Library of the Theological Seminary
PRINCETON - NEW JERSEY
Gift of the
Society of Inquiry
BV 2040 .N5 1855
Newcomb, Harvey, 1803-1863.
A cyclopedia of missions
s^vciopeaia ot missions : containing a
jomprehensive view of rnissionary operulk
Efiroughout the world : with geographical d
and accounts
1
A
/^r>X
CYCLOPEDIA OF MISSIONS;
(X)NTAININQ A
COMPRI ENSIVE VIEW OF MISSIONARY OPEIATIOKS
THROUGHOUT THE WORLD;
WITH GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTIONS, AND ACCOUNTS OF THE SO
CIVL, MORAL, AND RELIGIOUS CONDITION OF THE PEOPLE.
BY
REV. HARYEY NEWCOMB
REVISED EDITION. FOURTH THOUSAND.
NEW YORK :
CHAKLES SCllIBNER, 145 NASSAU STKEET
1855.
Entered according to Act of Congress, ht the year 1854, by
CHARLES SORIBNER,
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court 'of the United States for the Southern District
of New York.
Tawg, IU-bbell ii Co., rniNTEBS
No. 20 Ueek man-street.
Stereotyped by
TURNEY & BROTUER,
24 Bc«kman street
PREFACE
In presenting to the Christian public the "Cyclopedia of Missions," it becomea
me, first of all, to acknowledge the good Providence of God, which has enabled me
to accomplish a work of such diiBculty and magnitude, in so short a time. The en
terprise was entered upon with much misgiving ; but every obstacle has been removed
out of the way, as the work has proceeded. The preparation of the manuscript was
commenced on the 12th of January last. On the lOth of June, we commenced the
process of stereotyping, having about half the manuscript in hand. The work of
printing has progressed as rapidly as it could conveniently be done ; and we have not
been delayed a single day for want of copy, though the manuscripts have often been
received by mail the very day they were wanted. The whole will be completed a lit-
tle before the first of November, making more than four months occupied in printing.
If it be asked how such a work could be thoroughly prepared, in so short a time, we
answer, ly division of labor. There have been more than twenty different persons
engaged upon it. It has been a work of immense labor ; but the labor has been so
divided that each one has had ample time to do his part thoroughly. At the same
time, a general unity of plan and design has been secured, an outhne of every article
having been furnished by the Editor. And here I would acknowledge my great obli-
gations to those gentlemen who have kindly consented, at my request, to aid me in
this important undertaking ; as, without such aid, it would have required years to ac-
complish it. Their names appear at the close of their several articles, and will afford
a sufficient guaranty of thoroughness and accuracy. The articles which appear with-
out a name have been prepared, either in whole or in part, by the Editor. The por-
tions relating to the missions of the American Baptist Union have been furnished by
the author of the valuable and interesting " History of American Baptist Missions ;"
and those of the Methodists in this country and England, by a respected clergyman
of that denomination, whose name was mentioned to me by the Secretary of the Meth-
odist Missionary Society, as the most suitable person to undertake it. The missions
of the Presbyterian Board, have been chiefly taken (by permission,) from Rev. J. C.
Lowrie's "Manual of Missions." The article on the church of Rome audits missions
was prepared by a Roman Catholic layman.
We have aimed to make the entire work truly catholic in its character and spirit,
giving to every mission the degree of prominence to which it is properly entitled by
its age, importance, and success, without respect to the denomination of Christians
which supports it ; and nothing can present a brighter or more cheering view of the
essential unity of the different denominations of evangelical Protestants, than their
operations on missionary ground, where they are found adopting the same general
measures, preaching the same Christ, and receiving the seal of the same Holy Spirit
upon their labors. But, while I hold myself responsible for the general character of
the work, I would not be understood as adopting every opinion expressed, or of vouch-
ing for every statement made by my respected contributors.
lY PREFACE.
The gentlemen who have furnished these contributions have been induced to under-
take the work, from the interest wliich they liave felt in the cause of missions, and
their belief of the importance of this enterprise to that cause. They have fulfilled
their oniraj^'emcnts faithfully, and with f^reat promptness ; and I have the satisfaction
of believinc: that the work is much more valuable than it would have been, if I had
done the whole myself. They will accept this public expression of my thanks, as well
as of my high appreciation of their laljors. I would also, in this place, return ray sin-
cere thanks to the oCBcers of the several Missionary Societies, for the kind encourage-
ment wliich they have given me, in the prosecution of this work, and especially to the
American Board, who have granted me the free use of their extensive and valuable
library, and also encouraged the enterprise by subscribing for 100 copies of the work.
I return thanks, also, to those numerous friends of the cause, who have given me kind
words of encouragement, and subscribed for copies of the work.
In the preparation of the matter and in the supervision of the press, no pains have
been s]iared to secure accuracy ; and yet it would be strange, if, in so large a work,
consisting, to so great an extent, of statements of facts and numbers, no mistakes
should occur. Yet, if an error should be occasionally discovered, we think it should
not, in the mind of a reasonable man, impair confidence in the general accuracy of the
whole.
This volume brings down the history and results of missionary operations to the
present time. It contains a large amount of valuable information that is generally
inaccessiljle, and only to be found in a few missionary libraries, spread out in series
of volumes, extending through a period of half a century.
It is here presented in a convenient form for reading, consultation, and reference.
It is, however, not only a book to be consulted for reference, but a book to be read ;
many of the sketches and narratives being of thrilling interest. No future revision
or aftoration is contemplated in this volume, beyond the correction of errors. It will
always l)e as valuable a record of the past, as it is now. But if anything further shall
be called for, to bring up the history of missions and the progress of Christianity, to
any future time, other volumes may be added, either periodically or occasionally, ac-
cording to tlie demand.
It will readily be perceived that the copyright of this work has cost me no incon-
siderable outlay of means, in addition to my own time and labor ; as such contributions
as appear in this book could not be expected without compensation. It will require a
sale of ten thousand copies to remunerate me. It has, likewise, been a very expensive
work to my publisher ; and the price of the book has been put so low, in order to se-
cure a general circulation, that his profits will be very small, and it will require a large
sale to repay what he has already advanced. But, knowing the value of the book,
and having confidonce in the disposition of the Christian public to patronize a good
object, we have ventured upon the undertaking, with the confident expectation that
we should be sustained by a remunerative sale.
Explanations, ^-c. — The sketches of missionary operations are chiefly given under
geograjJiiail heads. For example, full accounts of the missions of the several societies
in India are given under the head of Hindostan. Other geographical articles relate
to Christian lands, as Eiirope, United States, &c., showing the religious condition and
resources of the Christian world. There are several articles, however, which derive
their title from the people, as Armenians, Ncslorians, &c. There are likewise a num-
ber of articles relating to the work of affiliated socfeties, which have an indirect bear-
ing upon missionary operations. All the missions to the ancient people of God, are
conii)rised under the head of Jews. The notices of missionary stations are designed
chieily as a guide to finding them on the maps. But, when any interesting informa-
tion respecting the places occupied as missionary stations, not contained in the ac-
counts of the mission, lias come to hand, it has been inserted under the head of the
station. From the very nature of the case, however, these notices are incomplete, as
new stations are being occupied coiUinuiilly ; and concerning many old ones, it has
been impossible to find any infonuatioii thut would be of any value even in finding them
on the maps. There are also many articles on niiscellaueous topics, connected with mis-
PREFACE.
sionarv operations, the condition of the heathen, &c, which contain valuable informa-
tion The Missionary Societies are treated under their several titles, giving an account
of their origin, tlie number of their missions, missionaries, converts, amount of receipts
&c Thus a greater amount of valuable information, iu regard to the movements ot
the ao-e is conipressed within these pages than was ever before comprised in a single
voluine ' or any one series of volumes. And the matter here given to the public is not
a mere'compiiation, but almost the whole of it has been written anew expressly for
this work As the materials have been collected from a very wide range, and to a
o-reat extent from original sources, I have not thought it necessary always to give
specific credit, except where the reference might be of advantage, in a more full exa-
mination of the subject. , .„ , ^ n . i
Mavs —The various maps, which accompany the work, will be found to cover nearly
all the ground occupied l)y foreign missions. They will generally be placed near the
descriptions of missionary operations in the countries which they describe. Bat, some-
times a place described will be found on a map placed at a distance from the matter
which relates to it. For instance, some of the stations of the Baptist Missio^ in As-
sam will be found on the map of Bengal. The following is a list of the maps, arranged
according to location: On ArmcA, T, viz.: ^/'^f ^'^''f I ^/ j^^ ^f ^^'^;;' ^!" f
em Africa, Western Africa, Liberia, Cape Palmas,SherbroJ'MeMiYorubaj On India,
5 : India, Southern India and Ceylon, Western India, Bengal, andlSorUiernlndia;
Burmah, Siam, &x. 1 ; China, 1 ^Fuhchan,! ; Sandtczch Islands, I ] Other Facific
Isle, 2 ; New- Zealand and Van Dieman^s Land, 1 ; Australia, \ ; West Indies, 4,
viz • St. Kitts and Antigua, Jamaica, St. Thomas and St. Croix and Surinam; In-
dian Territory, 1 ; Lahrador and Greenland, 1 ; Western Asia, 6 ^iz : Armenia,
Aintaband vkinity, Nestorians, Constantinople and vicinity Syria Thessalomca ; mak-
ino- 32 in all. These maps are some of them original, having been drawn by mis-
sionaries who have been on the ground. Others have been compiled with much labor.
They may not contain all the stations ; but where any are lacking, they can easily
be located from a description, and with the aid of the scale of miles. ^
Svdling and Pronunciation of Proper Names.— I have been requested to give
the accurate spelling and pronunciation of the foreign names, which occur_ in Mission-
ary intelligence ; and at first I designed to do so ; but I soon found that it was utter-
ly impracticable. The diversity of spelling is so great that it would be impossible to
follow any rule : and as the missionaries, in spelling, use the Roman letters to express
as nearly as possible the sound of a foreign tongue, it would be presumptuous in me
to attempt by any other combination of the same letters, to express more perfectly
sounds tliat I have never heard. What leads to the diversity of spelling is, the at-
tempts of different persons to express, by different combinations of the Roman charac-
ters sounds that have no corresponding utterances in our language. The most that 1
can 'do is to give a few simple rules, and endeavor to be consistent with myself in
spelling the same words alike in different parts of the book ; in which last particular,
however, I am not coulident that, in every instance, I have succeeded. The tollowmg
systems have been adopted by missionaries in different parts of the worid :
1. Chinese.— The following system of spelling and pronouncing Chinese names is that
adopted by AVilliams, in his " Middle Kingdom."
Fowers of the Letters.
1 a as in far • 11- ^'"' ^ ^'^ '
2. a as in American ; 12- eu, as in colloquial phrase say'em. _
3. e as in men ; 13. ta as in yard ; e. g. lua, hang, prose, /lea,
A. S as \n they'; !^^°'^S- ^ ^ ... ^^ _ , ,,
5. i as in mn; 14. ^au is made by |0ining Nos. 5 and 11.
6. i as in machine ; 15- ^^ as m Sierra (Spanisli.
7. 0 fis in long ; 16- ^u as in pew, pure, lengthened to a dipli-
^.u asm Ml) tliopg- , , ,,. , , , ., .
9. n as in 'Vuw (Fr.) or union ; 17. me is made by adding a short e to tli«
10. ai as in aisle, longer than i in fine. The preceding.
combination ei is more slender than ai, 18. ui as in Louisiana.
though the difference is slight.
VI PREFACE.
The consonants are generally sounded as they are in the English alphabet.
II. Hawaiian. — The missionaries at the Sandwich Islands, in reducing the language to writ-
ing, have adopted a portion of the Roman alphabet, giving the vowels the following lounds :
a aa in father; i as in machine, or as long e;
e as in they, or as long a in pale ; o as in no ; « as oo in too.
The full accent is usually on the last vowel but one, and a secondary accent two syllables
before the full. In the diphthongal combinations, ae, ai, ao, and au, each letter retains its origi-
nal sound, but when spoken in quick succession, combine together in a diphthong. Consonants
are not doubled, and never end a word or syllable.— £mg-/«im'5 History of the Sandwich Islands
III. Armenian and Turkish. — 1. Sounds of Vowels.
a as in far. u as in but.
e as a in fate. oo as in moon,
i as in machine. ai as i in ivy.
0 as in note. eu as the French eu in peu.
M as in unit.
Note.— Some of the above are but approximations to the vowel sounds designed to be ex-
pressed. E and o, for example, are not quite so broad and open as the corresponding English
sounds. Ai is strictly a diphthong, the elements of which are indeed the same as our long i, but
not so dlosely united in pronunciation. U in Armenian names is best represented as above ;
but in Turkish words it corresponds more exactly with the French « as in une. The sound
represented by it is more exactly that of the French e in le, me, &c.
2. Sounds of Consonants,
g always hard, as in good. ch as in chain,
s as in sun. zh as in pleasure.
Gh and kh are guttural sounds, having no corresponding sounds or characters in English
or French. The former resembles the modern Greek y, and the latter x, but both are deeper.
C to be used only in connection with h, except in words that have become anglicized with
c in them.
/, sh, and in general the consonants not mentioned above, to be sounded as in English.
The combination th does not occur ; when, therefore, the letters occur together, they are to be
regarded as belonging to different syllables, and each to have its own proper sound ; e. g. Fethi,
pronounced Fet-ki.
3. Accent. — The accent, which is slight, is uniformly on the last syllable in Armenian
proper names, and nearly so in Turkish. All the other syllables should be uttered fully, and
with equal stress of voice.
4. Anglicized Proper Names. — Names which have been long familiar to English and
American readers, and have thus become anglicized, not to be changed. Such are Constanti-
nople, Smyrna, Scio, Mitylene, Nicomedia, Philadelphia, &c. In fact, being for the most part'
Greek names, they do not strictly fall within the rules above given.
Monthly Concert. — One object which I have had in view, in the preparation of
this work, has been to provide the means of adding interest and value to the Monthly
Concert. The practice of appointing committees to report at this meeting on the va-
rious portions of the Missionary Field, is extending in the churches ; and where it is
well carried out, it adds greatly to the interest of the meeting, and by engaging the
leading minds in the church in the personal examination of the field, it tends greatly
to extend and deepen the missionary spirit. But, whenever this is attempted, those
engaged in it are met with the insurmountable difficulty of not having access to the
materials for giving a complete view of scarcely a single mission in the world. This
book will obviate this difficulty, not only by giving a complete, though brief historical
sketch of almost every existing mission in the world ; but it will generally point out
where further information can be obtained. It also provides the means of examining
the localities on the maps. And from these maps, rough ones may be constructed for
use in the lecture room, (in addition to BidwelPs large maps,) with very little labor, and
no other expense than a few sheets of cartridge paper, some India ink, and a little car-
mine. And besides what is strictly missionary, the work contains a great amount of
information respecting the resources of Christendom and the religious movements of
the age, which may be made the basis of effective remark.
With these explanations of the author's views, this work, which has cost him so
great an amount of thought, labor, and anxiety, is commended to the kind considera-
tion of the Christian public, in the humble yet confident hope that it may be useful.
Brooklyn, Nov. 1, 1854.
''^'i'v^PvWiff^'
CYCLOPEDIA OF MISSIOIS.
ABBEOKUTA : The capital town of the
Torubas, in "West Africa, and the principal
station of the Church Missionary Society in
that country. It is situated 100 miles inland
North of Badagry in the Bight of Benin, and
contains 30,000 inhabitants. (See Yoruba,
and Africa West.)
ABENAQUIS: A tribe of Indians in
Lower Canada, among whom the American
Board support a native missionary.
ABYSSINIA : A rich, mountainous dis-
trict of Eastern Africa, known to the ancients
as Ethiopia. It is bounded on the northwest by
Nubia, on the northeast by the Red Sea, on the
south by the country of the Gallas, and on the
west by countries almost unknown. Its extent is
estimated at about 245,000 geographical miles.
The country rises in terraces from the shores
of the Red Sea, till it swells into lofty pyra-
mids and abrupt peaks, whose heads are crown-
ed with imperishable snows. Pasture lands
almost entirely destitute of trees, though well
watered, stretch themselves before the eye in
the perspective, through a great part of the
more elevated regions, some portions of which
are cultivated with care. They are richly
stocked with flocks and herds. The country is
plentifully supplied with streams.
For about 1400 miles from its mouth, the
Nile receives no tributary. Here, in latitude
18° N. flows in the Takkazie, from Abyssinia,
around whose head-waters is the modern king-
dom of Tigre. The Blue Nile unites with this
at Khartum, in latitude 15° 37' N. ; and
around its sources and to the North, is Am-
hara. The country, encircled by its spiral
course, is Gojam. In latitude 9° 35' N., at the
verge of the table land, which terminates the
water-shed from the East, is Ankobar the capi-
tal of the kingdom of Shoa, the most impor-
tant and best known of the kingdoms into
which modern Abyssinia is divided. There is
every variety of climate, from the stifled and in-
tense heat of the narrow valleys, to the delicious
and exhilarating atmosphere of the elevated ta-
ble lands, and even to the perpetual frosts of the
snow-capt mountains. The year divides itself
into two seasons— the one of storms and inun-
dations, and the other of drought and burning
heat. Every tree and every bush in Abyssinia
not only retains its verdure, but bears blossoms
and fruit at all seasons of the year. This re-
gion is rich in iron and gold, the latter being
found in the sands on the shores and in the
bed of the streams. The entrance to Abys-
sinia for Europeans is the town of Massowah,
built on an island in the Red Sea. The place
of greatest note, at present, is Adoiva, which
contains about 6000 people. Till Abyssinia
was overrun by the Gallas, Amhara was the
residence of the sovereign, who now makes
Gondar his capital.
InJiabitants. — The population is estimated
at 4,000,000 to 5,000,000. The color of the
Abyssinians varies from black to transpar-
ent copper color. They are well made and
active, and distinguished from the negro by
the regularity of their features. They are
not deficient in the capacities of the un-
derstanding or the affections of the heart.
In the southwestern part of the country they
are better informed and more civilized than the
people of Tigre, who are rude and uncultivated,
passionate and violent. The Abyssinians, in
their high mountain-home, have been able to
maintain their liberty and independence, never
having been subdued by the Turks ; but the
Gallas have recently made inroads upon their
territory. The country is covered with cities
and villages, and isolated habitations are here
and there seen clinging to the sides of the moun-
tains. The houses are mostly composed of
mud, straw, and rushes. Caves are also some-
times used for human habitations. The dwell-
ings of the superior families consist of a num-
ber of rooms, arranged around an open court.
The clothing of the poorer classes is very sim-
ple, _ consisting of skins or pieces of cotton.
Their food is principally milk and bread, but-
ter, honey, beef, mutton, and fowls.
In Abyssinia the women are charged with the
most oppressive and irksome labors, both in the
house and in the field. They cultivate the
ground, gather the harvest, grind the corn, and
ABYSSINIA.
procure provisions and water for the families,
and that often with their infants in their arms.
But the education of the children is better at-
tended to than in most eastern countries, and
they are distinguished for filial affection and
obedience, and respect for the aged. The
common people generally marry, the- sons at
18, and the daughters at 14. AVhen arrived at
an advanced age most of them become monks
or nuns. If sick, they deliver over their pro-
perty to their children, who support them till
their deatli, with much iilial piety. About
half the young people enter into service at 15
or 16, mostly for the remainder of their lives.
The servants are kindly treated. The Chris-
tians do not sell their slaves ; but sometimes
give them away.
Language. — The ancient language of Ethio-
pia, called the Gheez, was, down to the 14th
century, spoken throughout Ethiopia ; and all
the ancient records arc in this language ; but
it has generally fallen into disuse, and the pre-
sent spoken language is the Amharic.
Government. — The old Abyssinian, or Ethio-
pic empire, is now broken into fragments, each
constituting a petty kingdom, the governments
of which are, so far as our information ex-
tends, arl)itrary and despotic.
lieUgion. — The fragments of the old empire
still profess Christianity, though both INIoham-
medans and Pagans have broken in and settled
among them, "jimong these, the Gallas are
the most remarkable. About the year 1500
they poured into the country in multitudes, and
seized many of its fairest portions ; and they
have kept up a perpetual and harassing war-
fare ; but many of their tribes have been made
tributary to the modern kingdom of Shoa, and
not a few of them have been reduced to slavery.
The best -writers consider the conversion
of the Abyssinians to Christianity to have
taken place about the year 330, when Atha-
nasius was Bishop of Alexandria. Meropius
a gentleman of Tyi-e, a Greek and a Chris-
tian, being cast away on the rocks of Abys-
sinia, was slain by the barbarous natives.
Two young men, Frumentius and Edosius, his
companions, on whom he had bestowed a libe-
ral education, being carried to the king, he, on
account of their diligence and industry, gave
them their liberty. They afterwards rose into
favor with tlie court, and were appointed to
important office,'*, that of Frumentius being the
charge of the young prince's education. And
besides instructing him in the learning of the
times, he inspired liim with a love and venera-
tion for the t'hristian religion. After the king's
death, Frunirntius, thinking itliisduty to take
advantnge of the position in which Providence
had placed him, to propagate the faith among
the Abyssinian5», procured ordination us Bishop
of Ethiopia, from Athanasius, Bishop of Alex-
andria, and returning, baptized a great number
of the people, ordained a regular clergy, and
built clnn-elies. Ever since their conversion,
the Abyssinians have received their Patriarchs
from Alexandria, and their creed has always
been the same as that of the Copts. (See Copts.)
The first discovery of the existence of this
church appears to have been made by some
adventurers sent out by John II., king of Por-
tugal. The king was so much interested in the
account which they gave of these Christians
that he sent out Pedro Cavilliam, to ascertain'
the state of the people, who entered Abyssinia
in 1490. After this, several emba.ssies pa&sed
between the two courts, and at length a sort of
alliance was entered into between the two
countries, which excited the jealousy of their
Mohammedan neighbors, and brought upon
Abyssinia a ruinous and destructive war. Zag-
ba Zaba, the ambassador sent by Abyssinia, in
1527, having published his creed, was, at the
instance of Bermudas, thrown into prison for
heresy. The emperor of Abyssinia, finding
himself engaged in a war, in consequence of
his alliance with Portugal, sent Bermudas, a
Portuguese then in Abyssinia, to Eome and
Lisbon for succors. But before Bermudas
started on his embassy, the Abuna or Patri-
arch of Abyssinia, was ordered to consecrate
him bishop, and nominate him his successor.
Bermudas first went to Rome, and was con-
secrated Patriarch of Ethiopia by the Pope,
and recommended to the king of Portugal to
solicit succors for Ethiopia. In the mean time,
the emperor died, and his son Claudius gained
some advantages ov^r the Mohammedans before
any Portuguese arrived, but was afterwards
driven to the mountains. Bermudas, on his
return, succeeded in joining the young emperor,
with a few Portuguese ; and in an encounter,
the Mohammedan chief lost his life, and Clau-
dius was put in quiet possession of his throne.
The Portuguese now demanded that the em-
peror should embrace the Catholic faith, and
give up one-third of his kingdom to the Por-
tuguese. And this demand was accompanied
with a threat of excommunication, and the
loss of the service of the Portuguese. The em-
peror replied to Bermudas, declaring that he,
as Patriarch, had no authority in the empire,
and that the Pope himself was a heretic. lie
also ordered Bermudas to be seized and put
in prison, and sent immediately to Alexandria
for an Abuna for the Abyssinian church.
Soon after this, Ignatius Loyola sent a Pa-
triarch, two bishops, and ten Jesuits to convert
Abyssinia to Rome. Claudius was by no
means pleased with this new arrival. Oviedo,
the bishop, soon after liis arrival, haughtily de-
manded his submission to Rome, which demand
was promptly resisted. Yet, Oviedo persevered,
growing more insolent in his demands. The
matter was submitted to a Council, in which
the emperor entered into a public debate with
the Jesuit, and afterwards wrote an answer to
a tract published by the bishop. Being foiled^
in this way, Oviedo' resorted to the terrors of
cxconnnuuication, and meanwhile sent a re-
AEYSSmiA.
quest to Goa for some Tortuguese soldiers to aid
in the conversion of the Abijssinians. But this
wise king was soon after slain in battle, in
defending his dominions from the invasion of
the Mohammedan king of Adel. Oviedo still
plied his arts with the successors of Claudius,
but with no better success ; in the midst of
which, he was recalled by the Pope, and sent
to Japan ; not, however, without assuring the
Pope that, "with the assistance of 500 or 600
good Portuguese soldiers, he could at any time
reduce the empire of Abyssinia to the obedience
of the Pontificate," and intimating that it was
a region abounding with the finest gold.
But, notwithstanding the failure of these at-
tempts, the Jesuits sent another mission to
Abyssinia in 1588_, one of whom was Peter
Pays, who arrived in Ethiopia in 1G03. Find-
ing Za Dangel, a weak prince, on the throne,
these Jesuits succeeded in ingratiating them-
selves into his favor, inducing him not only to
embrace the Eomish faith, but to order all his
subjects to follow his example. In this, the
emperor was strongly opposed by the Patriarch,
his son-in-law, viceroy of the Tigre, and a ma-
jority of the i>eople. Tet, in spite of all en-
treaty, and after being warned of the ruin he
was bringing upon his country, he persisted in
adhering to the policy set on foot by the Jesu-
its. The result was, a civil war, which raged
with great violence for a number of years ; the
emperor, for some time being victorious, and
pursuing the Romish plan of burning heretics,
drenched his dominions in blood, his subjects
rising in all quarters, and in one instance,
20,000 peasants coming against him from the
mountains. At length, he was so far brought
to his senses as to proclaim an act of tolera-
tion ; and on his death, his son re-established
the religion of his fathers, and drove from his
dominions those execrable Jesuits, who for more
than 25 years had been sowing discord, and
stirring up a weak prince to massacre his peo-
ple, and even to call in the aid of Moham-
medans to butcher his own Christian subjects !
In the beginning of the 18th century, a
French Jesuit, Brevedeut, attempted a mission
to Abyssinia, accompanied by a physician
named Poncet ; but the former died on the
way. The latter visited Abyssinia, and after-
wards published a book containing valuable
information respecting the state of the country
at that time. In 1714, Pope Clement XI.
sent out four German monks as missionaries to
Abyssinia, who got in favor with the emperor ;
but as soon as the Abyssinian monks got wind
of it, they raised a rebellion, dethroned the
emperor, and placed a youthful prince on the
throne, who condemned the missionaries to be
stoned. A reprieve was offered them, if they
would abjure the faith of Rome. They recoiled
with horror at the suggestion, and the punish-
ment was commuted to exile. But the monks
urged the execution of the original sentence,
and the emperor yielded. This event, though
by no means to be palliated, shows how intense
was the hatred excited by the intrigues of the
Jesuits, against Rome ; and how the persecut-
ing spirit, which they introduced, recoiled upon
their own heads.
Thus it appears that the Abyssinians have
preserved their ancient faith, both against the
sword of Mohammed and the more insidious
and dangerous arts of the Jesuits. Yet, whe-
ther there remains any vitality or spiritual life
among them, may be questioned. The Edin-
burgh Encyclopedia says : " The religion of
Abyssinia consists of a motley collection of
traditions, tenets, and ceremonies, derived from
the Jewish and Christian churches. In their
form of worship, Judaism seems to predominate.
The rites of Moses are strictly observed. Both
sexes are circumcised ; meats prohibited by the
Jews are abstained from ; brothers marry the
wives of their deceased brothers ; women ob-
serve the legal purifications ; Saturday and
Sunday are held sacred as sabbaths ;_ and per-
sons under Jewish disqualifications are pro-
hibited from entering the church. They have
festivals and saints innumerable. One day is
consecrated to Balaam's ass ; another to Pon-
tius Pilate and his wife, because he washed his
hands before pronouncing sentence on Christ,
and because she warned him to have nothing-
to do with that just person. The Epiphany is
celebrated with peculiar festivity, and they have
four seasons of lent, in which many abstain
even from fish. They so abound in legends and
miracles, that the Jesuits were obliged to deny
that miracles are a sufficient proof of the truth
of a religion. Images they abhor, but have
their churches hung round with pictures, to
which they pay the highest veneration. Their
canon of Scripture is the same as ours. Upon
the whole, it may be said that the religion of
the Abyssinians is a monstrous heap of super-
stitions, giving rise to disputes and persecutions,
without producing any salutary effect upon the
sentiments and conduct of its professors."
Bishop Gobat, however, says that, " Al-
though the Christian religion in Abyssinia has
entirely degenerated into superstition, yet there
is still sufficient of it to attach us to the Chris-
tians of that country, and to engage us to con-
sider them as brethren." He thinks their rn
ligion exerts some good effects upon them ; yet
he says, " They have no idea of the salutary
doctrines of Christianity ; such as justification
by faith ; the work of grace ; and the sanctify-
ing influences of the Holy Spirit ;" and that
" their morals are exceedingly corrupt. But,
in the midst of the chaos of corruption, there
are some traces of goodness, which, like pre-
cious stones, have remained dispersed among
the moral ruins of Abyssinia."
3Iokammedans. — The Mohammedans appear
to have lately multiplied in Abyssinia. They
live on friendly terms with the Christians.
They are engaged principally in trade, and
have the exclusive traffic in vslaves, the Chris-
10
ABYSSINIA.
tians never engaging in it. They are ignorant
of their own creed, and pay little attention to
the rites of Islaniism ; and in morals, they are,
in every re^^pect, inferior to the Christians.
Falaskas or Jeics. — The Falaslias live entirely
separate from the Christians, and are much
more ignorant. They are chiefly found in the
neighborhood of Gondar and Shelga, and to
the northwest of the Lake Tsana. They have
the same superstitions, a little modified after
the Jewish fashion.
The Camaoimtes are a people few in number,
inhabiting the mountains about Gondar, prin-
cipally engaged in agriculture. Bishop Gobat
regards them as Deists. They, however, have
priests, and assemble in private houses, where
they have a repast, which they call " Corban,"
communion or Eucharist.
The Zalanles are a migratory people, who
are said to believe in the existence of one God,
but to have no other religion.
Church Missionary Society. — The attention
of this Society has been, for many years, di-
rected to this interesting country. In 1815,
the Society's missionaries at Malta learned that
a native of Abyssinia had been engaged for
some years at Cairo in translating the Scrip-
tures into Amharic, the principal vernacular
Abyssinian language. This Amharic version
of the entire Bible was purchased for the Brit-
ish and Foreign Bible Society in 1820, by
Kev. W. Jowett. In 1826, Kev. Samuel Go-
bat and Bev. Christian Kugler, w^ere sent to
Egypt, with the view of entering on a mission
to Abyssinia ; and after various hindrances,
they arrived at Massowah on the 28th of De-
cember, 1829, where they were received in a
friendly manner. They carried with them por-
tions of the Amharic Scriptures, which had
been printed by the British and Foreign Bible
Society, and which the people gladly received.
They obtained permission to fix their residence
at Adowah ; while Mr. Gobat proceeded fur-
ther into the interior, and remained some time
at Gondar, the capital, distributing the Scrip-
tures and conversing with the people. But
war lireaking out, and the whole country be-
ing thrown into disturbance, he was detained
at that place till October, 18.'50, when he joined
Mr. Kugler at Adowah, in the province of Ti-
gre. On the 29th of December, Mr. Kugler was
called to his rest ; and his peaceful death made
a strong impression upon the natives, who said
they had never seen a man die in such full confi-
dence of the Saviour. Soon after this, the chief
Sebagdis, who had shown himself very friendly
to the mission, and who refased 1o go out to
battle on the Saljljath, was attacked and slain.
After his death, each of the chiefs contended
for the mastery,' and the country was kept in
a state of civil war. Mr. Gobat soon after left
the country, and arrived at Cairo. In 1833,
hu visited P^ngland, wlierc he published hi-i^
Journal, containing a full account of his re-
sidence in Abyssinia ; and several other mis-
sionaries were preparing to return with him
to that country. On the 20th of December,
1834, Messrs. Gobat and Isenberg arrived at
Massowah, in Abyssinia, where they were re-
ceived by the governor, with much civility. In
183G, Mr. Gobat was visited with a protracted
illness, which obliged him to withdraw from
his labors. Rev. J. H. Knox died at Cairo on
his way to Abyssinia ; and the mission w'as re-
inforced by the arrival of Eev. C. H. Blum-
hardt. Opposition began to manifest itself,
on the part of the ecclesiastics, on learning that
the missionaries rejected some of the rites of
their church, and set up worship of their ow'n ;
but the governor refused to listen to their com-
plaints.
In 1837, Eev. L. Krapf joined the mission,
at Adowah ; and in March of the following
year, a Frenchman and an Italian priest ar-
rived at the same place, their object being to
revive the Eoman Catholic Mission in Abys-
sinia. The people having had enough of Eo-
manism, were aroused by their appearance;
and this contributed to raise the clamor against
the Protestant mission, so that the governor
could no longer resist it, and they were obliged
to leave the country ; which they did with sor-
rowful hearts, reaching Cairo on the 24th of
June. But the Papists penetrated to Gondar,
and were active in endeavoring to re-establish
their mission. Messrs. Isenberg and Krapf,
having received an invitation from the king
of Shoa to visit his country, determined to at-
tempt an entrance into Abyssinia by the way
of Zcila, south of the straits of Babel Mandel,
'Shoa lies to the southward of Amhara, the
province where the mission was located. They
left Suez on this enterprize January 27, 1839,
and after encountering many difficulties, reach-
ed Shoa on the 31st of May, and met with a
favorable reception from the king. They re-
mained there, continually occupied in discus-
sion and preaching, till November fith, when
Mr. Isenberg returned to England. Mr. Krapf
continued in Shoa, laboring among the Abys-
sinian Christians, having secured the confidence
of the king of Shoa to a very remarkable de-
gree, so that the king assured him of his pro-
tection as long as he should live. Mr. Krapf
had made an expedition, with the King of
Shoa, among the Galla tril)es, by whom the
slave trade was carried on to a considerable
extent ; but it was considered a favorable
time to labor for its abolition. The Commit-
tee were so impressed with the ]irovidontial
openings, not merely as regarded Abyssinia it-
self, but also the heathen Galla tribes, that
they resolved to form the Abyssinian into a
new mission, to be called the East African
Mission, and Messrs. Miillheisen and Midler
were sent out to reinforce it. As this mission
will, hereafter, extend beyond the bounds of
Abyssinia, it will be treated under the head ot
AFRICA.
11
Afrka East, -which see. — GobaVs Abyssinia;
Edinburgh Encijdopedia ; Reports and Period-
icals of ike Church Missionary Society ; African
Repository for January, 1850.
AFAKEAITU : A station of the London
Missionary Society on Eimco, South Sea.
AFRICA : The continent of Africa is a
vast peninsula, in the form of an irreguhir
triangle, of Avhich the north is its base.
" Africa," says the learned Prof. Guiyot, " is
the most singular in its form of all the conti-
nents. Its mass, nearly round, or ellipsoidal,
is concentrated upon itself It {jrojects into
the ocean no important peninsula, nor any-
where lets into its bosom the waters of the
ocean. It seems to close itself against every
influence from without. Thus the extension of
the line of coasts is only 14,000 geographical
miles, for a surface of 8,720,000 square miles ;
so that Africa has only one mile of coast for
623 miles of surface."
Africa is separated from Europe on the
north by the Mediterranean Sea, and from
Asia on the east, by the Isthmus of Suez, the
Red Sea, and the Indian Ocean. On tlie south
is the Southern Ocean, and on the west,_the
Atlantic. The equinoctial line divides it into
two parts of nearly equal length. It extends
from Cape Blanco, opposite Sicily, in lat.
370 21' N., to tlie extreme point of the Cape
of Good Hope, (Cape Needles,) in 34° 52' S.,
being nearly 72 degrees, or 5,000 English
miles in length. Its breadth at the Equator
is computed at 4,760 English miles. Its super-
ficial extent has never been accurately deter-
mined. It is estimated in the Encyclopedia
Britannica, which is among the latest authori-
ties, at 8,550,000 geographical square miles,
which does not vary materially from that of
Prof. Guizot, as above. It is larger than
either Europe or Australia, but smaller than
Asia and America.
Progress of Discovery.— The ancients have
transmitted to us very little knowledge of this
gi-eat continent. We derive the first infor-
mation concerning the interior of Northern
Africa from the Arabs, who, by means of the
camel, were able to penetrate across the great
desert to the very centre of the continent,
along the two coasts as far as the Senegal and
the Gambia on the west, and to Sofala on the
east. On this latter coast, they not only ex-
plored to an extent far beyond any supposed
limits of ancient discovery, but planted colo-
nics at Sofala, Mombas, Melinda, and at
varioiu? other places. But the Portuguese
were the first to give any thing like an accu-
rate outline of the two coasts, and to complete
the circumnavigation of Africa. The dis-
covery of America and the West Indies gave
rise to the horrid traffic in African slaves ;
but this traffic has been the means of a more
extended knowledge of the coast between the
Senegal and Cameroons, and of the manners
and customs of the people. With the English
and French settlements in Africa began a
systematic survey of the coast, and portions of
the interior.
In 1788, a society was formed in London
for promoting the exploration of Inner Africa.
Under its auspices, important additions were
made to the geography of Africa by Houghton,
Mungo Park, Hornemann and Burckhardt.
In 1831, this association was merged in the
Royal Geographical Society.
During the last sixty years, more has been
done to make us acquainted with the geography
of Africa than during the whole of the 1700
years since Ptolemy. Mungo Park com-
mences the era of unceasing endeavors to
explore the Interior. He proceeded in 1795
from the river Gambia on the west coast to
the Joliba, or Niger, traced this river as far as
Silla, explored the intervening countries, deter-
mined the southern confines of the Sahara,
and returned in 1797. In 1805, he embarked
on a second journey, with the intention of fol-
lowing this river to its mouth. He passed
Timbuktu, and reached Bonsee, where he was
killed by the natives.
Hornemann, in 1799, penetrated from Cairo
to Murzuk, and transmitted from that place
valuable information respecting the countries
to the south, especially Bornu ; but no intel-
ligence was received from him, and it is sup-
posed that he soon after perished.
In 1822, Denham, Clapperton, and Oudney
crossed the Great Desert, and reached the
great Lake Tsad, Feb. 4, 1823. The sur-
rounding country was explored as far as Sa-
katu in the west, and Mandara in the south.
Oudney died in Bornu. Clapperton crossed
the Kawara, from the coast of Guinea, and
arrived at Sakatu, at which place he also died.
His servant, Richard Lander, returned to Eng-
land after having explored a part of the ad-
joining regions. Major Laing succeeded in
reaching Timbuktu from Tripoli, but was
murdered on his return, in the desert. In
1827 and 1828, Caillie set out from the Rio
Nunez on the western coast, reached Timbuktu,
and returned from that place through the
Great Desert to Marocco.
The termination of the Joliba, Kawara, or
Niger, remained in obscurity till 1830, when
it was ascertained by Lander and his brother,
who succeeded in tracing the river from Yaouri
down to its mouth. The great Niger expe-
dition, consisting of three large steam vessels,
was despatched by the British Government in
1845, under Captain Trotter ; but it proved a
failure, and resulted in a melancholy loss of
life. Mr. Duncan, one of the survivors of the
expedition, made some additions to our geo-
graphical knowledge, between the Kawara and
the coast, by his journey to Adafoodiah, iu
1845-6 ; but, in a second journey, in attempt-
ing to reach Timbuktu, he met with an mi-
timely death
A much greater number of travelers havt^
12
AFRICA.
explored the region of the Nile, among the
most (liritinguishod of whom arc, Bruce, Brown,
Burckhardt, Cailliaud, Riippcll, Eusseger,
Beke, and the Egyptian expeditions up the
Nile.
Though the Dutch settlement in South
Africa was founded as early as 1650, not much
information concerning the interior of that
portion of the continent was gained till the
end of the 18th century, when a series of jour-
neys w-as commenced l)y Sparrmann, and fol-
lowed up by \'aillant, Barrow, Trotter, Somer-
ville, Lichtenstein, Bruchell, Campbell, Thom-
son, Smith, Alexander, and Harris.
"Within the last five or six years, a number
of important discoveries have been made in
various parts of Inner Africa, and the present
time bids fair to outstrip all previous periods
in lifting the veil that has hitherto enveloped
Central Africa in im])cuetrable mystery. Eev.
Mes.srs. Krapf and llebmann, missionaries of
the Church Missionary Society in East Africa,
have explored the interior, from that direction,
with untiring perseverance, since 1847. (See
Africa, Eastern.) At several hundred miles
from the coast, they have discovered high
mountains, covered with perpetual snow, which
is the more interesting from the position being
so near the ecjuator.
In South Africa, also, missionaries have
been pioneers of geographical discovery. (See
Africa, Soutliern.)
A caravan of native traders recently made
a jom-ney across the whole continent, from the
coast of Zanzibar to Bengaiela, in which they
crossed Nyiussa, the gi-eat lake of South Africa.
To the north of the equator, the mission to
Lake Tsad, originated by Mr. James Richard-
son, promises to exceed in importance all pre-
vious expeditions to Central Africa. He left
England in 1849, for the purpase of concluding
commercial treaties with the chiefs of Northern
Africa, as far as Lake Tsad, by which legiti-
mate trade might be extended, and the slave
trade abolished. Drs. Barth and Overwcg ac-
companied Mr. Richardson, for the purpose of
making scientific observations. The party
started from Tripoli, March 23, 1850, after
having miimtely surveyed the mountainous
region to the soutli of that jtlace. The first
year, they successfully crossed the whole of
Sahara, in a very circuitoas westerly direction,
and thus explored a great portion of Northern
Africa, which had never before been visited by
any European. Tlieir route from Ghat to
Kano, leading them through the powerful
kingdom of Air, or Asben, wius highly inter-
esting. The second year, they explored a
large portion of Sudan, in different directions.
Messrs. Barth and Overwcg reached Kuka, the
capital of liornu, but Richardson died on the
way, in March, 1851. Dr. Barth penetrated
350 miles to the south, as far as Yola, the
capital of the kingdom of Adamana; and
Overweg navigated Lake Tsad in a boat,
which had been conveyed in pieces across the
Sahara, on the backs of camels. In September,
1851, they set out together on a journey to
Borgu, a mountainous country lying to the
northeast of Lake Tsad, about midway be-
tween it and Eg}']5t. They went in company
with a sheikh of Bornu, with a large army ;
but the party were attacked and put to flight,
and Barth and Overweg saved their lives by a
quick retreat. Retm-ning to Kuka, they set
out to the southward, accompanied by about
10,000 horse and the same number of foot sol-
diers. They explored the country beyond
Mandara, the farthest point of Denhanvs jour-
ney, and found it to be one of great fertility.
The third year. Dr. Barth made a journey to
Maseiia, the capital of the kingdom of Bagher-
mi, to the southeast of Lake Tsad ; while
Overweg traveled in a southwesterly direction,
and reached within 150 miles of Yacoba, the
great town of the Fellatahs. But on his re-
turn to Kuka, he was seized with a fever, of
which he died after a short illness. Dr. Barth
was about to start for Timl)uktu ; and a rein-
forcement, consisting of Dr. Yogel and two
sappers and miners, was sent to his assistance
on the 201h of February, 1852. The latest in-
formation oljtaiued by these expeditions is
summed up in a > aluable article in the new
edition of the Encyclopedia Britannica, now in
coui'se of publication, of which free use has
been made in the preparation of this article.
, Topography. — The physical configuration of
Africa may be considered under two heads :
the gTcat Plain of Northern Africa ; and the
great Table Lauds, with their mountain ranges
and groups, of Central and Southern Africa.
The great Plain comprises the Sahara, the
Lake Tsad region, and the valley of the Lower
Nile. I'he Sahara is by no means a plain
tia-oughout, but for the greater part it rises
into table-lands, interspersed with mountain
groups of 6,000 feet elevation, and probably
more ; and the term plain can only be applied
to it in a general way, to distinguish it from
the more elevated region to the south. ThOj
Sahara has often been pictured as an immense
and monotonous expanse of sand. But no-
thing could be more erroneous, as the greatest
\'ariely exists in tlie physical configuration of
its surface, as well as in its geological features.
The western half is surrounded by a broad belt
of ])laius and depressions, the central parts
being formed by extensive table-lands and
mountainous regions, comprising the kingdom
of Air or Asben, lately explored by Messrs.
Richardson, Bartli, and Overweg. The route
of Dr. Barth, in his journey to Agadez, the
capital of that kingdom, was girded by moun-
tain ranges and groups, rising to 3,000 and
4,000 feet ; and Mount Dogem, the culminating
point in that region, is even between 4,000
and 5,000 feet high. Tlie eastern porticm of
Sahara appears for the greater ])arl to be a
consiilerabiy elevated table-laud, comprising
AFRIUA.
13
V
the mountainous country of Borgu. The nar-
row valley of the Nile forms the eastern boun-
dary of the Great Desert.
To the south of the Desert, Africa may be
considered as one connected mass of elevated
laud, rising more or less above the sea, and
comprising the most extensive table-lands, as
well as high mountain groups and chains.
Commencing at the Cape of Good Hope, and
traversing the three terraces which rise one
above another from the coast, au almost unin-
terrupted table-land has i-ecently been ascer-
tained to extend to the north for at least 1,000
geographical miles. The southern portion is
formed by the basin of the Orange river, fol-
lowed by the desert of Kalihari, which is
again succeeded by the basin of the river
Sesheke and Lake JSTgami, with many other
rivers, traversing a region which presents a
dead level, its elevation at Lake Ngami being
2,825 feet. That region probably is in con-
nection with the basin of Zambezi. Farther
north the ground ascends to the line of water-
parting with the basins of Congo river and
, Lake Nyassa. In this region are supposed to
j be the celebrated Mountains of the Moon, ruu-
Ining, not as formerly supposed, east and west,
'but having a direction from north to south,
and running parallel to the eastern coast,
forming the southern continuation of the Abys-
sinian table-land. It is a remarkable feature
that the most elevated peaks rise on the outer
edge of this table-land, and even between it
and the coast, as isolated cones. One of them,
the Abba Yared, rises out of the northern edge
of the Abyssinian table-land to the height of
1.5,000 feet. The system of the Atlas moun-
tains is quite distinct from either of these two
divisions. It occupies the northwestern region
of Africa, consisting of several ranges, and its
highest summits are said to reach an altitude
of 15,000 feet.
Rivers. — Africa is emphatically a land of
deserts, resulting, of course, in a scarcity of
rivers. Many of the smaller rivers and lakes,
and not a few of the larger ones, present only
dry water-courses during certain periods of
the year. Even Lake Tsad is said at times to
be nearly dry. With the rains, floods are
prevalent all over the country, even in the
desert, as the recent observations made by the
expedition under Richardson testify. That
traveler relates that, when on the borders of
the kingdom of Air, on the 30th of Sep. 1850,
rain had been seen in the south, and black
clouds covering the zone in the heavens ; and
in an hour afterwards, the cry was heard in
the encampment, " The wady is coming !"
Going out to look, he saw a white sheet of
foam advancing from the south, between the
trees of the valley. In ten minutes after, a
river of water came pouring along, and spread
all around them, converting the place of their
encampment into an isle of the valley. The
current in its deepest part was powerful, ca-
pable of carrying away sheep and cattle, and
uprooting trees.
Africa is chiefly drained into the Atlantic
ocean and its branch the Mediterranean Sea,
the river system of the Indian Ocean being
very inconsiderable. The Nile is the oldest of
historical rivers, and afforded the only means of
subsistence to the earliest civilized people on
earth ; but the origin or source of the river it-
self remains an enigma to this day. The area
drained by this river is at least 2,000,000'
English square miles.
TJie river Senegal has a length of 1,100
miles, and has its sources in the same elevated
tract of land as those of the Kawara. The
Gambia and Rio Grande, south of the Sene-
gal, are also considerable rivers. The Ka-
wara, or Niger, is, next to the Nile, the largest
of the African rivers. Its sources, like that of
the Nile, are still unknown. It appears to be
the vUimar, whicli is said to rise in a high group
of mountains east of Sierra Leone. As far
as Timbuktu it is called Joliba, and its course
is pretty well known ; but from that place to
the Yaouri, it is as yet unexplored. Thence
down to the mouth, it was first traced l)y Lan-
der. It is there called Kawara, in general,
though it has several names in the different
languages of the tribes which inhabit its
shores. The Tshadda is its principal tribu-
tary, extending far into the heart of Inner
Africa. It was recently explored by Dr. Earth
in its upper course, where it flows through the
kingdom of Adamana. The length of the
Kawara is about 3,000 miles, and it drains
about 1,500,000 square miles.
South of the equator, the west coast receives
many large rivers which are yet unexplored.
Such are the Zaire or Congo, the Coanza, and
the Nourse, or Cunene. The Swakop has re-
cently been explored by Mr. Galton. The
Orange river is about 1,000 miles in lengtL
Its head streams are the Ki, Gariep or Vaal,
and the New Gariep, consisting of the Cale-
don and Cradock. The Orange river drains
350,000 English square miles.
Rounding the southern extremity of Africa,
and proceeding up its eastern coast, the Lim-
popo is the first river requiring notice. Its
head streams and middle course are known, but
whether it empties into the sea at Delagoa Bay,
or at Inhambane, is a matter of doubt. The
Zambezi is the largest river of the eastern
coasts. Its sources are not known but it is
probable that its head-streams are the Ses-
heke and Chobe, recently discovered by Messrs.
Livingston and Oswell.
Africa possesses several considerable lakes,
of which lake Tsad is probably the largest and
most interesting. It contains about 100
islands of large size, scattered over the lake.
They are wooded and inhabited by the Biddu-
ma, a Pagan tribe, who have remained inde-
pendent of the Mohammedan nations living
around the lake. Dr. Overweff was received
14
AFRICA.
by them with great kindness, on his landing
upon their islands. Lake Tsad has no connec-
tion with the Kawara or the Nile, but forms
an inland receptacle receiving the waters of
some of the most distant regions of Inner
Africa.
Lake Fittri forms a distinct hydrographical
system between it and the Nile, with which
it has no connection. Lake Tsana or Dem-
bea is the chief lake within the basin of the
Nile, so far as known. It is situated on the
table-land of Abyssinia, at an elevation of
6,110 feet. Other lakes on the Abyssinian
table-lands are Znwai, Haik, and Ashangi.
In Inner Africa, a number of considerable
lakes are reported to exist, but only two are
known with any degree of certainty, south of
the equator, the Nyassa and Ngami. Nyassa,
the great lake or sea in 10^ south latitude, is
as yet only appro.ximately laid down on the
maps, according to native information, and
whether it be the feeder of a large river, or
merely a recipient lake, is unknown. Another
lake in that region has recently been reported
by the natives to Dr. Krapf, as being situated
west of Mombas, beyond Kilimanjaro, and in
the country of Uniamezi. (For a description
of Ngami, see South Africa.) These are fresh
water lakes ; besides which there are numerous
small salt and natron lakes in various parts of
Africa.
Climate. — " The general climate of Africa,"
says Make Brun, " is that of the torrid zone ;
more than three-fourths of the continent being
situated between the tropics. The great mass
of heated air, incumbent in these hot regions,
has ready access to its northern and southern
parts, situated in the zones called temperate, so
that the portions of them adjoining the tropics
are equally torrid with the regions actually
inter-tropical. Nothing really moderates the
heat and dryness of the African climate, except
the annual rains, the sea breezes, and the eleva-
tion of the surface. These three circumstances
are sometimes united in a greater degree under
the cfjuator than in the temperate zones. It is
not impossible that in the centre of Africa,
there may be lofty table lands, like those of
Quito, or valleys like the valley of Cashmere,
where, as in those two happy regions, spring
holds an eternal reign." Recent discoveries in
the interior of Africa hivor this hypothesis.
Rev. Dr. Kra])r, in his recent missionary tours
in north-eastern Africa, has discovered ranges
of mountains covered with perpetual snow.
The greatest heat is not found under the
equator, but to the north of it, in consequence
of the northern portion being of greater ex-
tent than the s(juthern, and of less elevation.
The highest temperature Ls found throughout
the .Sahara, particularly in its eastern portions,
toward the Red Sea. In upper Fgy])t and Nu-
bia, eggs may be leaked in the hot sands, and
the saying of the Arabs is, " In Nubia the soil
is like fire, and the wind like a flame." The
regions along the Atlantic and Mediterranean
coasts are rendered more temperate by the in-
fluence of the sea. To the south of the Great
Desert, where the country becomes more ele-
vated, the temperature decreases. The inten-
sity of radiation, and its influence upon the
temperature, are very great in Northern Africa.
While in the day time, the soil of the Sahara
rapidly absorbs the solar rays, during the night
it cools also so rapidly that often ice is formed.
Africa is not much under the influence of regu-
lar winds, except the monsoons of the Indian
ocean. From hurricanes, Africa is nearly ex-
empt, except its southern extremity, to which
at times the Mauritius hurricanes extend.
Northern Africa is exposed to the hot winds
and storms from the Sahara, which are called
in Egypt Khamsin ; in the Mediterranean,
Sirocco ; and in the western regions, Ilarmat-
tan. Extreme heat and dryness are the char-
acteristics of these winds, which, raising the
sand, filling the air with dust, and prodigiously
favoring the powers of evaporation, are often
fatal to the vegetable and animal creation in
the regions visited by them.
The People. — From the shores of the Medi-
terranean to about latitude 20^ north, the pop-
ulation of Africa consists largely of tribes
not originally native to the soil, but Arabs
and Turks, planted by conquest, Avith a consi-
derable number of Jews, the children of the
dispersion ; and the recently introduced French.
The Berbers of the Atlas region, the Tuaricks
and Tibbus of the Sahara, and the Copts of
Egypt may be viewed as descendants of the
primitive stock, while those to whom the
general name of Moors is applied are perhaps
of mixed descent, native and foreign. From
the latitude stated, to Cape Colony, tribes
commonly classed together under the title of
the Ethiopic or negro family are found, though
many depart very widely from the physiogno-
my of the negro, which is most apparent in
the natives of the gold coast. In the Cape
Colony, and on its borders, the Hottentots
form a distinct variety, closely resembling the
Mongolian races of Asia. (See Hottcntotv.)
The Copts, (pron. Ckooht or Ckibt.) are re-
garded as the descendants of the ancient
Egyptians. They do not now compose more
than one-sixth of the population of Egypt, not
exceeding in number 150.000, of which 10,000
reside at Cairo. In some parts of Uj)per
Egypt there arc villages exclusively inhaljited
by Copts. Their complexion is somewhat dark-
er than that of the Arabs, their foreheads flat,
hair soft and woolly, nose short but not flat,
mouth wide, lips thick, eyes large, high cheek
bones. They are not an unmixed race, their
ancestors, in the earlier ages of Christianity,
having intermarried with the Greeks, Nubians,
and Abyssinians. (See Copts.)
The countries above Egypt are inhabited by
two tribes of people resembling each other in
their physical characters, but of distinct Ian
AFRICA.
15
ffuage and origin ; the Eastern Nubians, and
Nubians of tlie Nile, the latter called Berber-
ines. -4—
The country of the Nubians is limited on the
west by that of the Tibbus, who are spread
over the eastern portions of the Sahara, as far
as Ferran and Lake Tsad. Their color is not
uniform, some being quite black, and others
copper-colored. They are a pastoral people,
and live in square villages, a portion of which
is devoted to their flocks.
" All that is not Arabic in the kingdom of
Marocco," says Dr. Latham, " in the French
provinces of Algeria, in Tunis, Tripoli, and
Ferran, is Berber. The language also of the
ancient Cyrenaica, indeed the whole country
bordering on the Mediterranean, between Tri-
poli and Egypt, is Berber. The extinct lan-
guage of the Canary Isles was Berber ; and,
finally, the language of Sahara is Berber. The
Berber languages are essentially inland lan-
guages. As a general rule, the Arabic is the
language for the whole of the sea coast, from the
Delta of the Nile to the straits of Gibraltar,
and from the straits of Gibraltar to the mouth
of the Senegal. The Berber nation is one of
great antiquity, and from the times of the ear-
liest history, has been spread over the same ex-
tent of country as at present.
The 3Ioors inhabit large portions of the em-
pire of Marocco, and are spread all along the
Mediterranean coast. They are a mixed race,
grafted upon the ancient Mauritanian stock,
whence their name. After the conquest of
Africa by the Arabs, they became mixed with
their conquerors. Having conquered Spain, in
their turn, they intermarried with the natives
of that country, from which they were after-
wards driven back to Mauritania. They are a
handsome people, having a resemblance to the
European. They are also intellectual and not
altogether unlettered; but they are cruel,
bloodthirsty, and revengeful. Their religion is
Mohammedan. They generally lead a settled
life as merchants, mechanics, or agriculturists,
but there are many wandering tribes ; and
along the coast of Marocco, they carry on
piracy with armed boats.
At two different periods, separated from each
other by perhaps a thousand years, Africa was
invaded by Arabic tribes, which took a lasting
possession of the districts they conquered, and
whose descendants form no inconsiderable por-
tion of the population of North and Central
Africa, while their language has superseded all
others as that of civilization and religion. The
second of these was effected by the first succes-
sors of Mohammed, who conquered Egypt, and
subsequently the whole north of Africa, as far
as the shores of the Atlantic, in the course of
the first century of the Hegeira, or the seventh
of the Christian era.
After the destruction of Jerusalem, the
Jews spread rapidly over all the Roman pos-
sessions in Africa ; and when Philip II. di'ove
them from Spain, thousands of famines took
refuge on the opposite shores of Africa. They
are now numerous in all the northern towns.
They live in great degradation, except in Al-
giers, where the French have given them free-
dom and independence.
Ever since the conquest of Egypt by Sultan
Selim, Turks have settled in the north of
Africa, and as they were the rulers of the
country, the Turkish became the language of
the government ; but they can hardly be con-
sidered as permanent settlers.
For a description of the Abyssinians, see
Abyssinia. The Ethiopian race comprehends
by far the greater number of African nations,
extending over the whole of the middle and
South of Africa, except its southernmost pro-
jection towards the Cape of Good Hope. A
line drawn from the mouth of the Senegal in
the west to Cape Jerdaffur in the east, forms
its northern limits ; but this race are not all
negroes. The latter are only one of its numer-
ous offshoots. The principal negro nations are
the Mandingoe.% who are numerous and power-
ful, and partially civilized, in Senegambia, and
farther inland, around the head waters of the
Kawara, where they have established a great
many kingdoms and smaller sovereignties.
They are black, with a mixture of yellow, and
their hair is completely woolly. The iVolofs or
Yolofs, whose language is totally different from
those of their neighbors, are the handsomest
and blackest of all negroes, although thoy live
at a greater distance from the equator than
most of the other black tribes, their principal
dwelling-places being between the Senegal and
the Gambia, along the coast of the Atlantic.
The Foulahs or FellataJis occupy the central
parts of Sudan. Their color is black, with a
striking copper hue. They are one of the
most remarkable nations in Africa, very in-
dustrious, live in commodious and clean habita-
tions, and are mostly Mohammedans. Of the
principal nations of Guinea, among whom_ the
negro type is particularly distinct, especially
around the Bight of Benin, are the Feloofs^
near Caramanca, very black yet handsome,
and the Ashanti, who surpass all their neigh-
bors in civilization. In South Guinea^ we
meet with three principal nations, the Con-
go, the Abunda, and the Benguela negroes.
The next great branch of the Ethiopic race
comprehends the Galla, who occupy an irn-
mense tract in Eastern Africa, from Abyssinia
as far as the inland Portuguese possessions in
Mozambique, to the south of the equator. An
interesting tribe of them, the Somali, have
lately been brought to the knowledge of Eu-
ropeans, a widely scattered nation, who lead a
pastoral life on the uplands, and also nearer to
the coast of the Indian Ocean from Cape Jer-
daffur southward to a considerable distance.
They seem to be of a mild and peaceful dis-
position, while the other Galla tribes are a
warlike race. The Kaffres, Hottentots, and.
16
AFRICA.
Bushmen, occupy the greater portion of South-
ern Africa. (See Kaffrcs and Hottentots.) The
island of Madagascar is inhabited by a race of
Mahiy origin, exhibiting traces of Negro and
Arabic mixture.
The total population of Africa is vaguely
estimated, according to the most recent re-
searches, at 100.000,000.
Languages. — Tlie Arabic is the language of
the North, and the Mandiago is used from
the Senegal to the Niger. But the languages
or dialects of the negroes are as multifarious
as the nations. According to Seetzen, the
languages of Africa must amount to 100 or
l.oO ; but some trace them to a common origin.
Rev. John Leighton Wilson, late missionary
of the American Board at the Gaboon, in an
article in the Bibliotheca Sacra for November,
1847, says : " Too little is yet known of the
numerous aud diversified dialects of Africa, to
determine with certainty the precise number of
families which they form.
" In the northern half of the continent, or
that portion of it inhabited by the black
races, the number of languages is very great,
the different families of which show very little,
if any, affinity for each other ; while in the
southern division, one great family prevails
over nearly the whole of it, even to the Cape
of Good Hope."
Government. — Most forms of government
may be found in Africa. Despotism, however,
in its worst and most offensive shape, is by far
the most prevalent ; and, with few exceptions,
slavery and anarchy reign triumphant through-
out Africa.
Industnj, in Africa, is at the lowest ebb.
The Africans have, of themselves, generally
made little progress in the arts. All the more
laborious occupations are imposed on the fe-
males. In some parts, the wives of kings and
petty princes till the land for the support of
their lords. The Mandingoes, however, have
made considerable advances in civilization, and
the Ovas of Madagascar are an industrious
people.
Commerce. — An extensive intercourse has
been carried on, from the remotest antiquity,
between very distant parts of the continent, in
consequence of the natural adaptation of the
products of one part to supply the wants of
another. Thus Northern Africa supplies Cen-
tral Africa with dates and salt, and receives, in
return, gold dust, ivory, gums, palm-oil, feath-
ers and slaves. Egypt and the towns in the
Barbary States have always been the great
seats of trade, which is carried on wholly by
caravans, numbering from 500 to 2000 camels.
Stave Trade. — Slaves have been the staple
article of export from the African coast ; and
in some years as many as 110,000 or 120,000
have been carried across the Atlantic. In or-
der to supply slaves for the market, a whole-
sale system of brigandage and robbery has
i)een organized in many extensive districts, the
people being hunted down like game by the
petty princes, and by the Mohammedans, who
affect to believe that they are entitled to cap-
ture and sell the " idolators," to serve as beasts
of burden in another hemisiDhere.
The sufferings and misery which result from
this traffic, the merciless waste of human life,
and the " horrors of the middle passage," no
tongue can tell, no imagination can paint ; yet
these are but the lesser evils of this horrid
trade. Its deepest wound has been inflicted
upon the moral and social condition of the
country. It has undermined all the deep foun-
dations of society, dissolved the bonds of friend-
ly alliance between adjoining villages, destroy-
ed the peace of families, and extinguished the
last remaining spark of parental affection.
Even the mother will sell her own child for a
few strings of beads or a gallon of rum. It is
gratifying, however, to know that the efforts
of the British government, together with the
influence of the American colony at Liberia,
have nearly extinguished the inhuman traffic
upon a large extent of the western and south-
eastern coasts, where it has heretofore been car- ,
ried on to the greatest extent.
The traffic has also received a considerable
check on the eastern coast, in consequence of a
treaty for its suppression between the British
Government aud the Imaum of Muscat.
Religion. — Christianity is prof^sed in Abys-
sinia, and in Egypt by the Copts, but its doc-
trines and precepts are little understood or
obeyed. Mohammedanism prevails in all the
northern countries ; but the native mind gen-
erally is surrendered to superstitions of indefi-
nite number and character. The labors of
Christian missionaries have, however, especially
in South Africa, done much towards turnii\g
the benighted Africans from idols to the living
God. (vSee Western and Southern Africa.)
The social cmidition of Africa is, of course,
extremely depressed. The lowest form of polyg-
amy is diffused all over Africa ; and although
forbidden in Abyssinia, the marriage tie is there
so slight as hardly to have any sensible influ-
ence ; and morals are in a state of almost total
dissolution. Cannibalism formerly prevailed
to a frightful extent throughout Africa ; aud
though checked by the motive of providing
slaves for market, is still found to exist in somo
parts. Among some considerable nations, the
exposure of children, and the slaughter of
those that arc deformed or maimed, is not only
tolerated but enforced. In some parts human
blood is mixed with the mortar used iu the
construction of temples. McCidlock's Geogra-
phy; Malte Brun ; McQueen's Geographical
Survey ; Condor's Dictionary of Geography ;
and especially the Encyclopedia Britannica.
MISSIONS.
Africa, notwithstanding its terrible climate,
bad government and petty wars, forms one of
the most interesting missionary fields in the
AFRICA, EASTERN.
17
world. Its native inhabitants, though deeply
degraded, are found peculiarly susceptible to
religious influences. And wherever the gospel
has been preached long enough to penetrate
through their ignorance and superstition, it
has generally found a congenial soil. No mis-
sions in the world have been more successful,
in proportion to the means employed, than
those of the Moravians and the London Mis-
sionary Society, in South Africa, and the
Church Missionary Society in West Africa.
The way is opening up for the extension of
Christian missions into the interior ; and so
much preparatory work has already Ijeen ac-
complished, in reducing the languages to writ-
ing and translating the Scriptures, that we
may look for rapid changes, and confidently
hope that the day is not distant when a large
portion of the continent will be Christianized.
The results of the missionary work in Africa
will be seen by the following
TABULAE VIEW.
Western Africa.
11
a
"1
m
u
o
o
6
1
.s§
3
1
W
a
A
3
A
3
1
Scholars or
Persons un-
der Instruc-
tion.
3
3
1
3
3
1
11
12
3
4
3
1
3
11
11
3
5
15
116
27
15
10
IG
6
11
26
10
14
15
13
24
22
10
2
7
22
12
15
13
79
5
6
4
4
2
23
4
2
4
11
3
6
1
1
1
11
4
2
6
6
22
2
1
1
1
11
2
5
11
2,976
6,608
118
16
22
101
1100
32
114
600
69
48
i
1
5
11
2
» 7
11
5822
3919
450
58
46
70
213
200
100
179
400
Total "West Africa
20
93
279
127
100
53
3
29
56
11,687
162
11,457
SoiTTHERX Africa.
3
6
5
2
4
1
1
1
1
8
28
44
10
12
12
15
2
8
29
32
46
20
15
38
26
4
13
20
14
29
9
8
14
13
15
8
25
8
1882
4301
4206
109
1283
166
1604
833
60
12
11
6936
3883
7877
Free Church of Scotland, and \
310
155
760
* 170
Total South. Africa
24
139
223
63
9
35
15
41
14,384
83
20,090
1
2
2
2
3
8
5
3
1170
Total Africa
47
236
513
195
112
88
44
97
27,241
245
31,547
Owing to the manner in which some of the
societies make their returns, it was not possi-
ble to make the foregoing table perfect in all
its parts, as several items are not reported at
all, by many of them. But few of the socie-
ties give any account of the female members
of the missions ; and but few give any distinct
intimation whether their laborers are clergy-
men or not. But on several points of chief
importance they are complete, viz. : the whole
number of laborers, communicants, and schol-
ars in school. These items will indicate
very clearly the state of the work. Deducting
the females and native helpers, it appears
that there are less than four hundred Euro-
pean and American missionary laborers, on
the whole continent of Africa ; which will give
270,000 to each laborer. This presents an a|>
palling aspect of the destitution of that dark,
benighted land. On the other hand we have
a most encouraging and cheering view of the
success of missionary labor in this portion of
the vineyard of the Lord, which fully sustains
what we have said of the susceptibility of
the African character to religious impression ;
for we have but little less than eighty converts
to each missionary laborer on the continent
and islands of Africa. The missions are gen-
erally represented as in a prosperous condition,
except that in some portions of South Africa,
they have suffered from the Kaflfi-e war, and in
Madagascar, the converts still suffer persecu-
tion. These statistics can be corrected at any
future time on referring to the January and
February numbers of the London Missionary
Register for the current year.
AFRICA, Eastern. East Africa, according
to McCuUoch, comprises the region to the north
of the Zambezi river, round by the sea coast,
to the confines of Abyssinia. The Encyclo-
pedia Britannica makes it extend from Natal
to the Red Sea, (which would take in a per-
18
AFRICA, EASTERN.
tion of the limits we have allotted to Southern
Africa,) comprising Sofala, Mozambique, Zan-
zibar, and the Somali country. But little is
known of that region beyond the coast. The
Sofala country, extending from Delogoa Bay
to the Zambezi river, is flat, sandy, and marshy,
gradually ascending towards the interior. The
soil is very fertile and jiroduccs chiefly rice.
lu the interior gold and other metals and pre-
cious stones are found.
Mozambiciue extends from the Zambezi to
Cape Delgoda, and is similar in its natural fea-
tures to the Sofala coast. The country is in-
habited by the large and powerful tribe of the
Macuas. 'The principal river is the Zambezi.
Zanzibar or Sawahili coast extends from
Cape Delgoda to the river Jub, near the equa-
tor. The coast is generally low, and has but
few bays or harbors. Its northern portion is
rendered dangerous by a line of coral reefs.
The region possesses a great number of rivers,
but none of the first magnitude. The climate
is similar to that of other tropical coasts of
Africa, hot and unhealthy. In some portions,
however, the elevated ground, which is more
temperate and healthful, approaches near to
the coast.
The island of Zanzibar is the residence of
the Imaum of Muscat, (whose dominion ex-
tends a considerable distance along the coast,)
and is the seat of an extensive commerce.
Mombas, on a small island close to the main
shore, possesses the finest harbor on the coast.
The Somali comprises the eastern horn of
Africa, from the equator northward to the Bay
of Tudjurra, near the Red Sea. The coast is
generajly bold and rocky ; and the extensive
region it encloses, presents a slightly ascending
plain, traversed by large and fertile valleys.
Along the Arabian gulf, the coast is very
abrupt, and girded with a range of mountains,
the highest of which, Jebel Ahl, reaches an
elevation of 6,500 feet. The Somali country
is famous for its aromatic productions. The
inhabitants belong to the Galla tribe. — En-
cyclopedia Britannica ; Harris's Highlands of
Ethiopia; Ihe Nile and its Tributaries; Mc-
Culloch's Geography; African Repository, Jan.
1850.
Church Missionary Society. — The Abys-
sinian Mis.sion, which was commenced in 1829,
was, in 1841, changed into the East African
Mission, embracing a much wider range than
was originally contemi)lated by it. (See Abys-
sinia.) Mr. Krapf writes from Ankobar, in
1841, that the jjoople of Shoa manifested a
great desire for tlie word of God, and that
they besieged his house from morning till even-
ing, to procure copies of the Scriptures. He
hwi translated the four Gospels into the Galla
language.
During the year 1842, the Mission was inter-
rupted by various causes ; but a treaty of
friendship and commerce was concluded be-
tween the British Government and the King
of Shoa, which provides protection for British
subjects in the territories of Shoa. Mr.
Krapf undertook a difficult and dangerous
journey to the capital of Abyssinia, in order
to ascertain what encouragement the new
Abuna would give to missionary operations in
Abyssinia. He afterwards proceeded to Alex-
andria to meet Messrs. Isenberg and Miihlie-
sen, who were on their way to join him.
About this time there arose a fierce dispute
between the more enlightened party and the
monks, in the Shoa province, respecting some
frivolous points of speculation ; and the monks
prevailed with the king, by threatening excom-
munication, which gave the more ignorant aiid
bigoted party the ascendancy. Mr. Krapf be-
fore leaving expressed a fear that their icflu-
ence might prove unfavorable to the mission.
And, on his return, with the brethren, he found
that the king had prohibited their return, and
all efforts to induce the chiefs of the countries
lying between the sea and Abyssinia to let
them pass were unavailing.
Messrs. Isenberg and Muhliesen proceeded
to Abyssinia by the way of Massowah, to ascer-
tain the disposition of the new Abuna, and
see whether there might not be an opening for
the renewal of the mission at the Capital.
But in this they were disappointed. They
found the enemies of the mission in the ascen-
dancy ; the Abuna gave them no 'encourage-
ment ; and the chief Oubea ordered them to
quit Abyssinia. They had no alternative but
to return to Cairo. But during their stay in
Abyssinia, they were able to dispose of more
than two thousand copies of the Scriptures.
Dr. Krapf, meantime, visited Aden, in order to
concert a plan for reaching the Galla tribes in
Eastern Africa, from the Indian Ocean ; and
from that place he wrote a letter to the com-
mittee, asking their approval of the plan,
which he afterwards received ; but while wait-
ing for it he went to Massowah, and learning
the difficulties encountered by his associates, he
remained on the frontier of Tigre, and em-
ployed himself in the distribution of the Scrip-
tures.
After receiving the approval of the com-
mittee, Dr. and Mi-s. Krapf sailed for Zanzibar,
but were driven back and exposed to great
danger ; and after a very trying voyage they
arrived at Zanzibar, Jan. 7, 1844. There he
was kindly received by the Imaum of Muscat,
to whom they were introduced by the British
Consul. The Imaum wrote a letter to the
governors on the coast, after this manner ;
" This note is given in favor of Dr. Krapf, the
(ierman, a good man, who desires to convert
the world to God. Behave ye well toward
him, and render him services every where."
After remaining there about two months, he
proceeded on his way, touching at several
places, and arrived at Mombas, a small island
AFRICA, EASTERN.
19
at the mouth of the Tuaca river, about 4° south
latitude, which he selected as the site of the
mission. After his arrival there, Mrs. Krapf
was called home, some of her last words being,
" Do not praise me in your account of my last
hours ; but tell our friends that the Saviour has
pardoned me, a poor miserable sinner." She
had endured great hardships, in the tossings to
and fro to which they had been subjected for
mouths previous.
After this afflictive bereavement, Dr. Krapf
devoted himself with energy and zeal to the
work of his mission, giving his first attention
to the study of the languages spoken in those
regions. He, however, made several excur-
sions among the Wonica and Wakamba tribes
on the continent, declaring to them the blessed
gospel, and surveying the ground with refer-
ence to future operations. He found the natives
extremely degraded, indulging to a fearful ex-
tent in habits of intoxication, and frequently
selling their children to obtain the means of
indulgence. He also applied himself to the
work of translation ; and three years after the
establishment of the mission, he had translated
Genesis, Acts, Romans, Galatians, Peter, and
1 John into the Sooahelee language ; and
Luke and John into both Sooahelee and Won-
ica. He had also compiled a dictionary of
10,000 words of the Sooahelee, Wonica and
Wakamba languages. In 1846, Eev. J. Rebb-
man was appointed to this mission. Dr. Krapf
had suffered from severe and repeated attacks of
fever, which greatly impaired his constitution.
He had, however, continued his missionary
tours, in which he gathered much valuable
information respecting the interior tribes,
laboring to preach the gospel every where ;
and wherever he could make himself under-
stood, the natives would repeat what they
heard to others, and thus spread the message
of salvation.
On the arrival of Mr. Rebbman, immediate
arrangements were made for commencing a
mission among the Wonicas, and New Rabbai
was selected as the location ; which is situated
about four miles to the west of the extremity
of the bay, at a considerable elevation, com-
maudiug an extensive view. The people, with
one mind, cheerfully gave their consent to the
establishment of the mission, assuring the mis-
sionaries of their friendship and protection.
Both Dr. K. and Mr. R. were laid aside some
weeks with the fever ; and before they had
fully recovered, they set out in great weakness,
for the new mission, Dr. K. saying, " The mis-
sion MUST be commenced ; and should death
or life result to me, I can now have no regard
to sickness whatever." They found this place
more salubrious than Mombas; and though
encountering many difficnUies, yet met with
som£ encouragement. AUlKUigh of a peace-
able disposition, the Wonicas are deeply sunk
in ignorance, indifference, superstition, and
sensuality. lu Sept. 1847, after laboring 13
months, they had established a small school and
erected a small cottage for worship, which
would hold 60 or 80 persons, but only a few had
been induced to attend. These indefatigable
missionaries continued to make exploring tours
in the interior, and in one of their excursions
to the north, they came in sight of the Galla
country, so long the object of desire on the
part of Dr. Krapf. Their journeys to the
west opened a new country, of which the phys-
ical character and the disposition of the in-
habitants present facilities for missionary labor
of the most encouraging kind. The Wakam-
bas, with whom the missionaries are in daily
intercourse, carry on a trafiic with the main
body of their tribe, from 400 to 600 miles dis-
tant in the interior. Three groups of moun-
tains, 4,000 to 5,000 feet high,»enclose the
Faita country, whose inhabitants are estimated
at 170,000 souls ; and Dr. Krapf thinks there
are no insui-mountable obstacles in the way of
establishing a mission among them. In 1848,.
Mr. Rebbman explored the country beyond
Faita, called Jagga, travelling on foot amidst
a thorny jungle, infested by wild beasts, for
seven days. But having ascended the second
range of mountains, he felt as if walking in
the Jura mountains, in the Canton of Bftsle,
so cool was the air, so beautiful the scenery.
It will be recollected, that in 1843, the mis-
sionaries were forcibly driven from Abyssinia,
through the influence of the emissaries of
Rome. Since that time the Jesuits themselves
have been obliged to leave the country. In
June, 1849, Mr. Lieder writes that the young
king of Shoa, Beshaheh Ouered, had written to
the Queen of Great Britain, desiring a renew-
al of the friendly intercourse that had existed
between the British Government and his fa-
ther, and to Dr. Krapf, requesting his return.
The young king, only 14 years of age, had re-
nounced the heterodox notions of his father,
and delivered hundreds of persons whom the
late king had thrown into prison, because they
would not embrace his views. He had also
taken the Metropolitan, Amba Salame, (see
Abyssinia,) as his spiritual guide. Araba
Salame himself, had also written to Mr. Lieder
for two good teachers, as he was anxious to
open a school of a superior character, in Gon-
dar. And the king of Abyssinia and the
Abuna had both written to Bishop Gobat,
proposing that he should undertake the super-
intendance of the Abyssinian Convent at Je-
rusalem ; in consequence of which the Com-
mittee determined to establish a mission at Je-
rusalem, to provide, among other objects, for
the instruction of Abyssinian pilgrims.
Dr. Krapf and his associates, in their reports
for 1849, speak discouragingly of their pros-
pects at the new station of B^ahhaA-Empia,
owing to the depths of ignorance and super-
stition to which the people were reduced.
Their minds are enslaved by sorcery ; and
many cruel customs, such as putting to death
20
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
all deformed cliildreu, prevail amoug them ;
yet the missionaries had been eucoura^-ed bj-
the awakening of a poor crii^ple. This year
the mission received a reinforcement ; but
one of the newly arri\-ed missionaries was cut
off Ijy inflammatory fever soon after- their ar-
rival.
They had continued to prosecute the ex-
ploring tours, showing wonderful openings for
the entrance of the Gospel into the interior.
In the mean time, Dr. Krapf prosecuted the
study of the languages, and the translation of
the Scriptures, with zeal and success. He has
come to the conclusion that, from the Galla
boundary down to the Cape of Good Hope,
there is one family of languages, which he calls
the Suaheli stock ; which stock, he thinks,
from specimens he has received of West Afri-
can languages, commences on the southern
bank of the Gaboon River.
The report of the mission for 1850 is en-
couraging. The poor crlpi^le noticed the pre-
vious year had been baptized and died in hope ;
and two others had made an open profession
of their belief in Christianity, one of whom
was the father of a family, in independent cir-
cumstances, and the other a learned Moham-
medan, the Cadi of his village, who gave up
his office, and the gains attached to it, for the
Gospel's sake, and placed himself under the
instruction of the missionaries.
The missionary tours have been continued ;
and Dr. Krapf gives the following view of the
great results to which his discoveries may lead :
" When once the time has fully come that
the Ilamitic race shall be made acquainted
with the Gospel, an4 be received intp the fa-
mily of God's childi*en on earth, the high
roads of Africa will take every observer by
surprise. It will then be manifested that the
facilities of communication on the African
continent, are not inferior to those of Europe,
Asia and America. God's Providence has
certainly paved the way for the speedy ac-
complislmient of his sublime designs. The
Niger will carry the messengers of peace to
the various states of Nigritia, while the
Tshadda, together with the Congo, will convey
them to the western centre of Africa, toward
the northern tribes of Uniamesi. The differ-
ent branches of the Nile will lead the mission-
aries toward the same centre from the north
and north-east, while the Jub and the Dana
will bring them in from East Africa ; and the
Ivilimani will usher them in from the south.
The sources of these great rivers are not so dis-
tant from each other as our present geograjih-
ical knowledge would lead us to believe. Shall
we propose, therefore, and undertake the form-
ation of a mission chain, linking together the
eastern and western coasts of Africa? Or
shall we follow up the water-courscd of the
continent, by establishing missions at the
sources and estuaries of those great rivers ?
The Tshadda, the Congo, the Nile and the Kili-
maui rivers, take their rise either from the
great lake in Uniamesi, or very near it. And
if the communication with Central Africa shall
be found so simple and so easy, why should we
question the speedy spread of Christianity and
Christian civilization in Africa ?"
In these tours, the missionaries obtained
much valuable geographical information ; and
among other objects of interest, they saw a
range of mountains, the tops of which were
covered with perpetual snow. After the com-
pletion of these tours. Dr. Krapf visited Eng-
land, in order to print his translations, and to
confer with the Society upon future plans for
the East African Mission. He also visited
Germany, where he selected three pious me-
chanics to accompany him to Africa, and one
of the students at Basle, who was ordained by
the Bishop of London. Dr. Krapf having
fully explained to the Committee his views
upon the East African Mission, he returned at
the beginning of 1851, with the view of es-
tablishing new stations, retaining Rabbai as
a starting point on the coast. He returned
accordingly, with his new associates ; and, after
their arrival at Rabbai, he began preparations
for going with Mr. Pfefferle to Usambara, to
redeem a pledge given to King Kmeri, of es-
tablishing a mission among his people. But
Mr. Pfefferle soon after died of nervous fever,
the fever of the country, and Dr. K. prosecuted
the journey alone, with some native servants,
who deserted him in the hour of danger. He
was attacked by robbers on the way, and
obliged to give up the object, and to return to
the coast. But Avhile attempting to reach the
river Dana, he was again attacked, and came
near losing his life. And, after a fatiguing
journey, suffering from hunger and thirst, and
amid many perils, he at length reached the sta-
tion. But, with indomitable resolution, he
still pursues his object of establishing a chain
of missions across the continent ; but thinks
they cannot at once penetrate far into the in-
terior, but that they must first occupy a nearer
post.
Dr. Krapf afterwards visited Usambara, and
King Kmeri received him well, and desired
that the mission might be established on a
mountain thirty or forty miles from the
estuary of the river Pangani ; and offered
to order a considerable number of his sub-
jects to build houses and cultivate the laud
for him ; and also to afford them protection
and give them an opportunity to carry on their
labors. A wide door for usefulness here pre-
sented itself, but at the latest dates, he had not
entered upon the work.
AFRICA, Southern : The region south of
Cape Negro, on the west, and cf the river
Zambezi, on the east, embracing, within its
limits, the English colony of the Cape of Good
Hope.
Topography. — The country consists of three
successive plateaus, increasing in elevation ac-
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
21
cording to tlieir distance from the sea, and sep-
arated from each other by as many chains of
mountains. The first of these is called the
Lange Kloof, or Long Pass ; and between it
and the sea is an irregular belt of fertile land,
well watered with small streams and frequent
rains, from 20 to 60 miles in breadth. It is
well wooded with forest trees, and from its
proximity to the ocean has a mild climate.
The next chain is the Great Black Mountain,
(Groote Zwaite Bergen.) It is more lofty and
rugged than the first, consisting, in many
places, of double and treble ranges, and some-
times rising to the height of 4,000 feet. Be-
tween these two is a belt of about the same
area as that outside the first, composed in some
parts of barren hills, in others, of naked
arid plains of clay, called Karroo, interspersed
with fertile and well-watered patches of land.
The third chain of mountains, called the Nieio-
veldt Gehirgte, unites toward the east, with the
Schneeuw-bergen (Snow Mountain,) the high-
est in South Africa, its most elevated peak be-
ing 10,000 feet above the sea ; and covered
with perpetual snow. Betn^een this and the
second range is an arid, desert plain, nearly
300 miles in length by 80 to 100 in width,
called the Great Karroo. This is not a sandy
plain, like the great desert, but a sort of table-
land, thinly covered with an argillaceous soil,
impregnated with iron, upon a substratum of
• rock. It is about 3,000 feet above the level
of the sea. The beds of numberless rivulets, in
which water is rarely to be found, cross it like
veins, in a thousand directions. Mr. Moffat
says, the entire country, extending in some
places hundreds of miles on each side of the
Orange river, and from where it empties into
the Atlantic to beyond the 24th degree of east
longitude, appears to have the curse of Gilboa
upon it. It is rare that rains to any ex-
tent or quantity fall in those regions. Ex-
treme drought continues for years together.
The fountains are few and precarious, and some
of them have dried up altogether.
From the west coast the country ascends,
in a similar manner towards the interior, by
successive plateaus, separated bv mountain
chains. The Roggeveldt (Rye-field,) the lofti-
est of these, rises to more than 5,000 feet above
the level of the sea. To the north of all, and
near the boundary line of the territory, there
is a chain of mountains 9,000 feet in height.
The whole tract of country to the north is
much more sandy, barren and thinly inhabited
than that to the east, which, as it recedes from
the Cape, seems to increase in fertility and
beauty.
The third great chain of mountains forms
the watershed, or division between the streams
which flow north, into the country of the Bos-
jesmans or Bushmen, and those which run
southwest, through the colony. On its northern
side, rise the tributaries of the Orange river,
and on its south the Great Doom, (Thorn.)
Gamba, Camtoos, Sunday, Great Fish, and other
rivers. On the west coast, the principal
streams are the Great Berg, (SEouutaiu,) and
Ol/fant or Elephant river. Both are naviga-
ble for small craft about twenty miles. On
the south coast are the Brcede or Broad river,
the Gauritz, Camtoos, Sunday and Great Fish.
The Broad river is navigable for small craft
about 30 miles. Considering the extent of the
coast, good harbors are few. Saldanha Bay,
Cape Town, is the best.
The Great Lake.— On the 1st of June, 1849,
Rev. David Livingston, son-in-law of Mr.
MafTat.of Kolobeng, more than 200 miles N.
E. by N. from Kuruman, proceeded on a tour
of discovery to Lake Ngami, 300 miles N. W.
from Kolobeng. But by the circuitous route
which he pursued, he traveled about 600
miles. After proceeding about 300 miles
through the desert of Kalihari, the party
struck on a mao-nificent river, the Zouga, aud
following it to its source, it proved to'be the
Great Lake. The banks of this river are beau-
tiful, covered with gigantic trees, some of them
bearing fruit. Two of the Boabob variety
measured 70 to 76 feet in circumference. The
higher they ascended the broader the river be-
came. It has a periodical rise of water, sup-
posed to be occasioned by the melting of the
snow on the mountains. Its waters arc clear
and soft, and it is said to be connected with
other large rivers, running from the north.
Another party visited this lake in 1852, and
ascertained its length to be sixty-five, and its
average breadth 12 miles. It is at an eleva-
tion of 2,825 feet above the sea. Mr. Living-
ston found a tribe of natives on the banks of
the Zouga, called Bakoba or Bayeiye, in whom
he Avas deeply interested. They are a totally
distinct race from the Bechuanas, their com-
plexion being darker, and they speaking a dif-
ferent language. He admired their frank,
manly bearing. They listened to the state-
ments which he made respecting the Divine
Word, aud seemed to understand them.
They were found dwelling around the lake,
and on the banks of all the rivers to the north,
which seemed to open a highway capable of
being quickly traversed by boats. Thus is the
way opening in every direction, for the en-
trance of the gospel into that dark region.
In 1851, Messrs. Livingston and" Orwell
again started for the north, but in a more east-
erly direction, when they reached the latitude
of 17° 25' S., and discovered the Chobc and
Sesheke, deep and constantly flowing rivers,
supposed to be the feeders of the Zambezi.
The Zouga was ascertained to be absorbed in
sands and salt pans. The country through
which the former rivers flow, is level and very
fertile.
Capt. Vardon explored the region north-
east of Kolobeng, tracing the Limpopo river
to a considerable distance. In 1851, Mr. Gal
ton explored a part of South Africa from
S2
APRICA, SOUTHERN.
Walfish Bay, on the west coast as far as lat.
17° 58' S. aud 21° E. long., accurately deter-
mining the whole region.
In 1852, a journey was made by Mr. Plant,
from Natal to Delagoa Bay, in which he dis-
covered that St. Lucia Bay leads into an ex-
tensive inlet, hitherto unknown.
Climate. — The climate is in general temper-
ate and healthy, but unsteady, disagreeable,
and not well suited to agriculture. In the
south-western districts, the rains in the cold
season are profuse, but of rare occurrence in
the summer. In the more northerly districts,
sometimes no rain falls for years ; which, how-
ever, Mr. Moffat attributes to the universal
destruction of the forests. Generally, through-
out the colony, the rain, when it does come,
pours down in torrents, occasioning great dam-
age. Sometimes the southeast wind is a spe-
cies of Simoom, excessively hot, and loaded
with an impalpable sand. The mean tempera-
ture of the Cape is about 67 1-2'^ Fahr., the
coldest being 57° and the hottest 79°. Yet
Mr. Moffat thinks the climate of the colony
perhaps the healthiest to be found in any
part of the world. With reference to the cli-
mate of the whole of Southern Africa, Mr.
Moffat says, " It varies from that in which
thunder-storms and tornadoes shake the moun-
tains, aud the scorching rays of an almost ver-
tical sun produce the mirage, to that which is
salubrious and mild, within the boundaries of
the colony along Kaffre-land to the fruitful
and well-watered plains of the Zulu country,
in the vicinity of Port Natal ; while the more
mountainous aud elevated regions are visited
by keen frosts and heavy falls of snow."
Native Population. — When the Cape was
&'st discovered by Bai-tholomew Diaz, and
when it was taken possession of by the Dutch
in 1GG2, the whole of what is now designated
as the colony was inhabited by the Hottentots
proper.
The Kaffres proper live beyond the fish river,
on the eastern boundary of the colony. They
form one tribe of tlie great Bechuana family.
Their national character is bold and warlike.
Their country is bounded by the ocean on the
south, aud a range of mountains on the north,
and beyond them lie the Amopondo and Zulu
tribes, belonging to the same family. North
of Kaffre-land, between the AVinterlierg moun-
tains and the higher branches of the Yellow
river, lies the country inhabited by the Basu-
tos, a tribe of Bechuanas. Beyond the Basu-
tos to the north of Orange river, lie the other
Bechuana tri))es, whose numbers and extent
are yet unknown.
The country from the limits of the desert to
the west coast is called Great Namaqiuiland,
aud contains a thin population of the Hotten-
tot race. To the north of the Namaquas, Ho the
Damara tribes, of whom comparatively little
is known, except that they approximate, in
physical appeai-ance and color, to the negroes
on the west coast. These tribes inhabit a
counti-y extending from the tropic of Capri-
corn to the Cape of Good Hope, and from the
Atlantic to the shore of the Indian ocean.
The tribes which have been mentioned arc
those which have been the objects of mission-
ary labor. (See Cape Colony, Kaffres, Hot-
tentots.)— McCullocli's Geography; Moffat's
Labors and Scenes in Southern Africa, Chav. I.;
Encyclopedia Britannica.
Moravian Mission. — Missionary operations
were first commenced in South Africa, by the
United Brethren. In 1737, George Schmidt
arrived at Cape Town, a free passage having
been granted him by the Dutch East India
Company. His object was to make known
the gospel to the Hottentots; and he soon
commenced his labors at Bavian's Kloof, after-
wards called Genadendal, (Vale of Grace.)
Though obliged to preach through an inter-
preter, his self-denying efforts were followed by
considerable success. The Hottentots regarded
him with sentiments of unfeigned love and
admiration ; and in the course of a few years
a number of them received his message as the
truth of God. Finding himself, however,
much embarrassed in his operations by the in-
terference of the colonial government, he re-
paired to Europe in 1744 to obtain a removal
of his grievances. But he not only failed to
secure this important object ; the Dutch East
India Company even refused to sanction his
return to the scene of his labors ; and for fifty
years the harvest which he had begun to gath-
er, was left without a reaper.
At length, however, in July, 1792, Marsveld,
Schwinn and Kiihnel were permitted to search
for the few sheep, who had been left so long
without a shepherd at Genadendal. They found
a part of the wall of the old mission-house
standing ; and in the garden attached to it
were some of the fruit-trees which Schmidt
had planted. An aged female whom he had
baptized, and who still retained a remem-
brance of her beloved teacher, rejoiced exceed-
ingly when she was told that the new mission-
aries were his brethren. The Hottentots, —
some of whom recollected their old pastor, while
many bad heard of his brief but beneficent ca-
reer,— rallied around his successors ; and before
the end of 1793, seven persons were baptized.
Great opposition, however was encountered,
from the Dutch farmers, or boers, as they arc
called, who, thinking the instruction of the
Hottentots likely to prove injurious to their
temporal interests, manifested their hostility
by poisoning the minds of the natives, and by
threatening violence against the missionaries.
They also preferred charges against them, to
the colonial government, thereby securing or-
ders for embarrassing their proceedings. By
these means the mission was for a long time
kept in a state of constant alarm. In one
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
23
instance, a numerous body of the colonists rose
in arms, to obtain a redress of alleged griev-
ances, among which was the attempt to evau-
gelizethe Hottentots ; in consequence of which,
the missionaries were, at one time, di-iven from
their post.
Mr. Schwinn, while traveling to Cape
Town, on one occasion, was refused either lodg-
ing or refreshment by the colonists, and was
compelled to ride all night, attended by a sin-
gle Hottentot, through a desert country infest-
ed with runaway slaves. Through all these
trials, however, the native converts stood by
their teachers, in the greatest extremities.
But in 1795, the colony was taken posses-
sion of by the British Government, and the
mission at Bavian's-Kloof, was taken unddrji?
protection by the new government. After thi^
they enjoyed more quietness and peace, a con-
siderable number of new people came to them;
and the word of God was owned and blessed
to the conversion of souls. A Church was
built, and before the close of the year, twenty
adult converts were baptized. Still their ene-
mies were not quiet. In February, 1796, some
of the neighboring farmers assembled a hundred
armed men, with the design of murdering the
missionaries, and destroying their settlement ;
but the plot was discovered by the govern-
ment, and prevented. Afterwards the boers
undertook to starve the missionaries and their
people, by refusing them provisions, which oc-
casioned much suSering. But the Lord turned
the hearts of some of the worst of their perse-
cutors, who acknowledged the utility of their
labors, and sent a wagon load of corn to the
settlement, at a lower price than it would have
been sold elsewhere.
The mission now began to be visited by per-
sons of influence at Cape Town, who bore hon-
orable testimony to its good effects ; and
among others, Mr. Borrow, who gives the fol-
lowing account of what he saw : " Early on
Sunday morning, I was awakened by some of
the finest voices I had ever heard, and looking
out, sawa group of Hottentot women neatly
dressed in calico, sitting on the ground, and
chanting their morning hymn. The mission-
aries were middle-aged men, plain in their
dress, meek and humble in deportment, but in-
telligent and lively in . conversation, zealous in
their cause, but free from bigotry. Every
thing partook of their characteristic neatness
and simplicity. Their church was a neat plain
building, and their mill the best in the colony.
Their garden produced abundance of vege-
tables. Almost every thing had been done by
the work of their hands, their society requiring
every one to understand some trade. They have
upwards of six hundred Hottentots, and their
numbers are daily increasing. These live in
huts dispersed over the valley, to each of
which is attached a piece of land, and their
houses and gardens are very neat and comfort-
able ; and all are engaged in useful trades or
occupations. On Sunday they all regularly
attended public worship, and it is astonishing
how neat and clean they appear at church.
Their deportment was truly devout. The dis-
course of the missionary was short, pathetic,
and full of good sense. The women sung in a
plaintive and affecting style, and their voices
were sweet and harmonious."
In 1798, a reinforcement arrived from Eu-
rope, and the old church was converted into
dwellings, and a new one built, capable of
holding 1,500 persons, the settlement having
increased to 1,230. Eighty-four were baptized
during this year.
In the summer of 1800, an epidemic fever
raged for some months, carrying off sometimes
^ight or ten a day. To meet the occasion an ar-
rangement was made by which each missiona-
ry and his wife visited a certain district every
week, making a circuit of four or five miles, at
great peril to their own lives. They found the
poorpeople lying in the greatest misery, upon
nothing but a sheep-skin spread on the bare
ground, without medical aid, and often with-
out food ; the convalescent tormented with
hunger, and the poor, naked children crying
for food. When they sj^oke to them, in those
circumstances, of the love of Jesus, they were
cheered by seeing them listen with eagerness,
seeming to forget all their sufferings, and re-
signing themselves to the will of the Lord, ex-
pressing their confident hope that he would
receive them to himself, and extolling his good-
ness, in sending them teachers to instruct them
in the knowledge of their Eedeemer.
By this time, (1801,) the fame of Bavian's-
Kloof had spread far and wide, and the natives
came in companies, some of them the distance
of a six weeks' journey. One poor woman
came, who said she understood Bavian's-Kloof
to be an asylum for poor sinners like herself
who had become tired of the service of Satan,
and were desirous of finding rest for their
souls.^ Peace being concluded between the
English and Dutch, the colony was restored to
the latter, and the new governor proved friend-
ly to the mission, and one of the missionaries
was appointed chaplain to the colony. At the
suggestion of Gen. Jansen, the Governor, the
name of the place was changed to GnadentJial,
or Genadendal, which means Gracevale.
In January, 1806, the colony was again con
quered by the British ; but the government
continued friendly to the mission. In 1807, a
new settlement was formed at Groenckloof, or
Green-glen, in the high road between Cape
Town and Saldanha Bay, and Messrs. Schmitt
and Kohrhammer removed there with their
wives in 1808. They soon gathered a settle-
ment around them, and their labors were
blessed by the Holy Spirit, and many were
turned to the Lord, giving evidence of repent-
ance and faith. The following remarks of one
of these converts is a specimen of the feelings
generally expressed, giving e^^dence of the
24
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
genuineness of the work of grace in the heart :
" I seem to be surrounded by my sins, lilie a
man standing in the midst of the fire, and am
ready to be consumed by the anguish of my
spirit ; but in this situation, I stretch out my
arms toward heaven, and exclaim, Lord Jesus,
suffer some drops of thy heavenly grace to
quench the flame which threatens to destroy
me."
The mission still continued to enjoy the pro-
tection of government and the blessing of God,
and the converts made good progress in their
knowledge of divine truth. The heathen from
a distance were led in a remarkable manner,
as by some unseen influence on their minds, to
flock to the mission settlements. One woman
said that her father one day called his family
around him and said, "My dear children,
though you are Hottentots and despised by
men, yet behave well ; for I believe that God
will, at some future time, send us teachers from
a distant country. I may not live to see that
day, but you will hereafter know that I have
told you the truth. As soon as you hear that
such persons have arrived, hasten to them, and
obey their instructions." Soon after the old
man's death, the teachers arrived, and as soon
as the daughter heard of it, she went to them,
was instructed in the way of salvation, and
after some time, was received into the church.
In 1815, llev. C. J. Latrobe, Secretary of
the United Brethren's Society, visited tlie mis-
sion, accompanied by four male and two female
missionaries. This visit was productive of
much good ; and while there, he made an ex-
pedition into the interior, accompanied by
three of the missionaries, and the surveyor of
the government, and selected a site for a new
station, on the banks of Witte Revier, near the
frontiers of Kafiraria, which was afterwards
called Shiloh.
In December of this year, the inhabitants
of Genadendal were suddenly involved in dis-
tress, by the descent of a torrent from the
mountains, which overwhelmed the greater
part of their premises with destructive viulence,
and occasioned great damage. But when the
missionaries spoke to the poor Hottentots of
the damage done to their grounds, they replied,
that they had cause to thank the Lord for his
mercy, that notwithstanding their great de-
merit, they had been chastised with aO much
lenity.
In 1817, the Governor of the colony, Lord
Somerset, visited the mission at Genadendal,
and after expressing the highest gratification
at what he saw, presented them with three
hundred dollars for the ase of the school.
On tiie 7th of A])ril, 1818, Rev. H. Schmitt,
and his wife, with three single men and the
widow of Kohrhammer, commenced the mis-
sion at Shiloh, or AVitte Revier, or White river.
Considerable numbers of natives began to at-
tend on their preaching, when they were in-
volved in the greatest calamities by a preda-
tory excursion of the Kaffres, which resulted in
the loss of their cattle, and the murder of nine of
their Hottentots, and compelled the missionar
rios to leave the station. On the 18th of May,
Mr. Hofiftnau visited Witte Revier, and found
the mission premises burnt, and everything
destroyed. But, in October, peace having
been concluded between the Kaffres and the
colonial government, the mission was resumed,
and rapid and interesting improvements were
effected at the new settlement. Rev. H. P.
Hallbeck says, in 1821 : " On the spot where,
two years ago, we knelt in the fresh track of
an elephant, and offered up our first prayer for
the prosperity of this establisliment, I now
found a beautiful orange tree, adorned at once
with ripe fruit and fragrant blossoms; and short-
ly after my arrival, I was invited to tea, under
the huge yellow tree, in the shade of which, but
lately, there were no assemblies but those of
wild buffaloes, elephants, and other dreaded
inhabitants of the desert."
The Tambookies were a wild race, on the
borders of the Kaffres ; and the missionaries
frequently complain of their intractableness,
indifference, superstition and insubordination ;
yet, from the first, they appear to have
regarded the missionaries with esteem and ven-
eration, going to them for advice and for the
settlement of their difficulties ; and down to
the period of the breaking up of the station,
during the late Kaffre ^vav, they have been
gradually improving, and assimilating more
and more to the habits and usages of Europe-
ans. The gospel appears also to have taken
effect upon the hearts of many of them.
In July, 1822, the settlements at Genadendal
and Groenckloof again suffered severely by
flood, involving them almost in comj)lete ruin.
The buildings were damaged to the amount of
thousands of dollars, and the huts of the Hot-
tentots, together with their grounds, very much
injured. They also lost a great many cattle.
At the same time the settlement at Enon was
suffering severely from famine.
In 182G, the missionary writes : " A new
dwelling-house is building under the inspection
of a Hottentot mason of Genadendal, and I
am surprised at the neatness and accuracy with
which the work is done. This Hottentot has
not his equal, as a mason, either among the
Africans or Europeans, in the neighborhood.
He is an excellent character and a pattern of
sobriety, industry, and Christian temper :" thus
showing the effect of missions in elevating the
general character of the heathen, and qualify-
ing them for the arts of civilized life.
In the year 1822, the Brethren were solicited
by government to undertake the religious in-
struction of a number of lepers, for whom the
Hospital Hcmel-en-Anrde had been erected, in
a romantic situation, at the foot of a mountain
called the " Tower of Babel," near the sea.
Rev. J. P. Lietner, in obedience to this ro-
quest, removed there with his wife, in Decern-
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
25
ber of tliat year, and the poor patients were
overjoyed at their arrival. Some of them, who
had previously belonged to the church, at the
stations, exclaimed, " Now we know that Jesus
has heard our prayers and sent us help ; for we
have often entreated him to send our teachers
to us." Others who had spent their time in
fiddling and dancing, now broke their fiddles
and became serious and attentive hearers of
the word. This mission has been continued to
the present time ; but the hospital was subse-
quently removed to Bobbin's Island, that the
patients might enjoy the benefits of searbath-
mg, the missionaries accompanying them.
'Ihe year 1832 was signalized by an encour-
aging work of grace among the neighboring
farmers. They had begun to attend public
worship at the different stations, and in several
families a striking change had taken place. " In
view of this work, our churches have been
filled with attentive hearers, our schools with
crowds of children, and both churches and
schools have been filled with the hallowed pre-
sence of the Spirit of God, who has wrought
a marvelous change in the hearts of many,
both old and young. AVonderful indeed has
been the revival of religion around us, by
which the tone of society has been changed,
and the farmers, who in former years opposed
the work, are now brethren and fellow labor-
ers in Christ, sympathising in our sorrows, and
rejoicing in, and praying for our success."
The awakening among the farmers contin-
ued throughout the years 1833 and 1834, and
the converts among them remained steadfast
in the faith. One of the brethren called on a
woman who was dangerously ill, who grasped
his hand and with great fervency exclaimed,
" The Lord himself sent you to this land, in
order to be the means of saving my soul from
perdition : this I wanted to tell you before I
die." She informed him that she was awakened
by a conversation he had with her in 1829,
every word of which she remembered. Her
husband also had been awakened, and had es-
tablished family prayer.
There has continued to be, down to the pre-
sent time, a steady increase of numbers at the
several settlements, the natives sometimes
crowding in, in great numbers. _ There has,
also, been a steady improvement in industry,
agriculture, mechanical employments, houses,
dress and the arts of civilized life. And gen-
erally, every year, there has been evidence of
the special presence of the Holy Spkit in the
conversion of souls, and sometimes in large
numbers. The converts have for the most
part, given evidence of growth in grace, and
general improvement ; though almost every
year it has been necessary to cut oS" some
members for disorderly conduct. The general
influence of the gospel in elevating the charac-
ter of the natives, has been very marked and
striking. The Governor of the colony on visile
ing Genadendal, in 1849, remarked to Rev. Mr.
Teutsch, "Tour missionaries have been the
greatest benefactors of the Hottentots ; and
you have conferred the greatest benefits on the
Colony."
Great eagerness has often been manifested
to hoar the word. In 1849, Rev. Mr. Franke,
on visiting the out-stations of Goedverwacht,
some distance from Grocnckloof, remarks :
" Every time we visit that spot, our hearts are
gladdened. Every word appears to be, as it
were, devoured by those hungering souls, many
of whom come from a distance, some from
twelve to sixteen miles. They are constantly
making inquiries whether they will not soon
again be visited, and great joy is manifested
by the arrival of the missionary among them."
And often at the settlements the crowds are
too great to be accommodated in the churches,
and many stand outside. But at some of the
stations the settlements have grown so large
that many of the people have to go to an in-
convenient distance to find employment, which
frequently takes them for weeks from Christian
privileges.
The missions generally have large larms
connected with each station ; and in several in-
stances the government has appropriated three
thousand acres of land to a station. Besides
this, they have various kinds of mechanical
employments in operation. These arrange-
ments, while they furnish employment for the
natives, and instruction in agriculture, and the
mechanic arts, and afford a partial support to
the missions, occupy too much of the time and
attention of the missionaries in secular pur-
suits.
In 1839, at the request of the colonial gov-
ernment, a mission was commenced among the
Fhigoes, who being delivered from a state of
bondage among the Kaflres, found refuge to
the number of many thousands within the col-
ony. This new station was called Clarkson,
and the number of Fingoes residing there was
1,000. They had large herds of oxen, with
flocks of sheep and goats, and had settled every
place in the vicinity where the soil was capa-
ble of cultivation. The Fingoes received the
missionaries with open arms, and their atten-
tion to the word was truly edifying. Such
was their eagerness to hear, and the concourse
of people, that they were obliged to hold the
service in the open air ; and very soon the most
pleasing traces of the work of the Holy Spirit
on their hearts were visible. In April, 1840,
this became still more marked. At one of
their meetings, the Fingoes poured in from all
quarters, and great emotion was manifest
among them, which was shown in various
ways, some weeping for themselves and others
for their unbelieving parents and relations ;
and in the afternoon, there were few dry eyes
in the congregation. The blessing of God has
continued to follow the labors of his servants
at this station. The Fingoes are the relics of
several inland tribes, who have been expelled,
26
ATRICA, SOUTHERN.
and almost annihilated by their more power-
ful neighbors. They took refuge with the
Kaffres, who treated them as serfs ; and when
the colonial troops overran a lai'ge portion of
KaiFraria, they put themselves under the pro-
tection of the British government.
The effect of the emancipation of the slaves,
or apprentices as they were then called, was
greatly to increase the number of those who
docked to the mission stations, and especially,
of the children in school. The missionaries at
Genadendal, speaking of the genuine effects of
the admission of the gospel into the heart, as
manifested by the converts, say, "And among
none more so than the lately enfranchised
slaves, whose growth in grace and knowledge
is most encouraging." In one instance, a man
came a distance of two or three hundred miles,
to obtain a missionary for a settlement of
emancipated slaves, and offered a salary of
$500, but was obliged to return without
one.
In the Diary of the station at Genadendal
for 1841, it is stated that " The emancipated
slaves seem animated by an uncommon desire
after spiritual blessings. There is a fire in
their hearts which has not been kindled by
man, but by the Spirit of God. Freedom ap-
pears, by the divine blessing, to have awak-
ened in their minds the feeling that they are
beings who belong not to time only, but to
eternity. ' The chains,' said one of them,
' were on my limbs from infancy. I could not
come to the house of God, but was obliged to
live like a brute. Now, God has broken my
chains, and I am here ; but my heart is quite
blank ; I am old, and can undci-stand but little.
My God ! let but some drops of heavenly dew
fall upon my barren soul !' "
The Kaflro wars have affected the missions
of the United Brethren less than those of some
other societies ; yet several of their missions
were disturbed, and some of them temporarily
abandoned in consequence. Companies were
drafted into the Colonial army from the differ-
ent, stations, which took them away from the
means of grace. However, they were led
thereby to prize them more highly. They kept
up meetings at their camps, which were attend-
ed by the Dutch farmers, to their edification ;
and the British officers bore honorable testi-
mony to the good conduct of the Christian
Hottentots. Yet some of the young men re-
turned with habits of dissipation, which led to
their prompt discipline, and was the means of
introducing the temperance reformation among
the converts. Various measures were resorted
to, from time to time, to prevent the use of in-
toxiaiting lifjuors. The farmers were en-
treated not to furnish them to the Hottentots •
but this failing, Bishop Hallbeck addressed an
earnest letter to the congregation at Groenc-
kloof on the suViject, and a general resolution
svas passed that no brandy, and but a limited
quantity of wine should be brought into the
settlement ; and on a petition from Genaden-
dal, the civil commissioner refused to license
the sale of liquors at that place.
Schools have been sustained from the begin-
ing at all the stations, with increasing interest ;
and especially the infant school is spoken of
from time to time, as producing a very happy
effect, not only upon the children, but the pa-
rents.
In 1837, an institution was opened at Gena-
dendal, for training Hottentot assistants, with
eleven boarding pupils ; and the foundation
stone was laid, on the first of November, for a
two-story building, 74 feet by 23. The first ex-
amination proved highly satisfactory, and those
present were not a little astonished to hear
several of the pupils explain everything with
fluency in English, when called on to solve va-
rious problems with the use of the globe. At
the latest dates, the whole number of pupils
admitted was 26, of whom 11 had received ap-
pointments as assistants ; two of whom, how-
ever, had been cast off for improper conduct.
There were, in 1851, ten pupils in the institu-
tion, five of whom were Katfres.
After the mission at Genadendal had been
in operation a sufficient time to attract the at-
tention of the public, the frequent visits of the
English at the station suggested the idea of
collecting a library of religious books for their
use, which was effected and proved a means of
much good to strangers, who, from time to
time, became temporary residents of the mis-
sion settlement.
The brethren early introduced the practice
of speaking individually to all the people, on
the concerns of the soul, which they found very
profitable. Mr. Lehman, describing such a
conversation, in 1841, says, " Many of those
with whom we conversed declared that they
had been led to us by a secret impulse ; and
that though at first they could not comprehend
much, they now began to understand and relish
the word, and could not be sufficiently thank-
ful for the grace of God." Their pious ex-
pressions, on these occasions, were often traly
edifying. An officer of the church, on recov-
ering from a severe illness, acknowledged his
backslidings, and said, " I was like a dying,
half-withered tree ; but my Saviour in mercy
remembered me and visited me with sickness.
As the gardener saws off the whole crown of
a withered tree, leaving only the stump to pro-
duce new and healthy branches, so has my
Saviour done for me." A Fingo captain said,
" My Saviour has not only purchased me with
his blood, but in the days of my ignorance and
misery, he showed himself an Almighty Re-
deemer in me, and subdued my desperately
wicked heart. Now I sincerely believe he will
keep me so that the powers of darkness shall
not be able to separate me from him." An-
other, on being asked where true sanctification
was to be found, replied, " On Golgotha, at
the foot of the cross. "SVhen I am not there
APRICA, SOUTHERN.
27
in spirit, I have no power to resist sin." One
on being asked wherein meetness for heaven
consisted, replied, " It is his grace alone on
which I build. He forgives my sins, for the
sake of his precious blood. I come to him
daily as a beggar." One who had been a slave,
said her mistress used to reprove her, and she
laughed at her ; but having through God's
mercy, been convinced of sin, she had gone
and asked her pardon. " 0, I am happy,"
said another, " for I love my Saviour. He is
my treasure."
The genuineness of the work is also indi-
cated by the happy deaths of the converts, no-
tices of which appear in the journals of the
missionaries every year. We mention, as spe-
cimens, two remarkable cases, in extreme
youth. Also one of advanced age. Char-
lotte Orzom, a youth pf fifteen, died in Febru-
ary, 1841. She had" been baptized the year
before. On being visited by a missionary, she
said, " Ah, I love the Lord with all my heart !
AVith my whole heart, I cleave to thee, and
thou wilt come and dwell with me. This is
my consolation. In joy and pain, my soul de-
pends on thee with humble confidence, thou
rock of my salvation !" In two hours after-
wards, she was with the Lord.
Eev. Mr. Fritsch, writing from Elim, in
1849, says, " Of late, we have been much edi-
fied by the happy departure of several mem-
bers of our flock. We were particularly
struck with the happy frame of a young girl,
eleven years of age, who expressed the happi-
ness she enjoyed in the prospect of soon going
to her Saviour, and entreated all who were
present to remain faithful to Jesus, that she
might meet them in eternity. Her grand-
father, who soon followed her, after a short ill-
ness, said, " I suffer great pain, but what is it,
compared with the torments which my Saviour
endured for me on the cross ?"
In 1845, some new regulations were intro-
duced, among which were the annual contribu-
tion of a small sum by every able-bodied in-
habitant, toward the expenses of the place ;
the formation of a Missionary Association ;
for securing a better attendance of the child-
ren at school ; and for the more effectual ban-
ishment of spirituous liquors. Missionary col-
lections had previously been taken up at some
of the stations. In 1843, the Fingoes^at
Clarkson, after an address from their mission-
ary, came forward with the utmost cheerful-
ness, the smallest offering being Is. 6d. sterling,
and the lai'gest 7s. 6d. At Shiloh, the first
public contribution was made in 1844, when
young and old pressed to the boxes, with coun-
tenances beaming with joy. Showing that,
among the first effects of the gospel is a bene-
volent desire, and a readiness to make sacrifices,
that others may participate in its benefits.
In 1849, the station at Shiloh, was destroyed
by the Kaffres. It was a frightful scene ; but
the missionaries escaped. Some of the people,
however, joined the rebels, but mostly by con-
straint. Many of the houses were burnt down,
and the church was changed into a castle. In
April, 1850, Messrs. Bonatz and Gysin visited
Shiloh, and found all the huts of the Kaffres
and Fingoes burnt ; some houses of the Hotten-
tots were standing, but occupied by the English
and Fingoes. The dwelling-house of the mis-
sionaries, with its blackened walls, bore wit-
ness of sad events. The Mamre and Goshen
stations have also been broken up by the war.
The following table presents the state of
the mission before these sad events.
Stations.
Genadendal, - -
Groenckloof, - -
Elim, - - • -
Enon, . - . -
Shiloh, - - -
Clarkson, - -
Robben Island, -
Total, -
911
558
369
120
152
949
345
308
536
212
364
26
464
113
16
1882 1731
2846
1341
1214
304
762
323
45
6835
The whole number of male European labor-
ers at these stations is 29. — Choules's History cf
Missions ; London Missioyiarxj Register.
London Missionary Society. — The London
Missionary Society, three years after its first
formation, in 1795, sent out to Southern
Africa, four laborers, two of whom. Dr. Van-
derkemp and Mr. Edmonds, were appointed to
that part of the colony bordering on Kaffra-
ria ; and the other two, to the country north
of the colony, inhabited by different tribes
of Bushmen or Bosjesmans. Dr. Vanderkemp
was a son of a minister of the Reformed
Dutch Church at Rotterdam. He was born
in 1747, educated at the University of Ley-
den, and for some time practiced as a physi-
cian. In 1791, the loss of his wife and child
at sea was the means of his awakening and
conversion ; after which, he devoted himself to
the self-denying labors of a missionary. Mr.
Moffat says of him: "He came from a uni-
versity, to stoop to teach the alphabet to the
poor native Hottentot and Kaffi-e ; from the
society of nobles to associate with beings of
the lowest grade in the scale of humanity ;
from stately mansions, to the filthy hovel of the
greasy African ; from the army, to instruct
the fierce savages the tactics of a heavenly war-
fare, under the banner of the Prince .of Peace ;
from the study of physic, to become the guide
to the balm in Gilead and the physician there ;
and, finally, from a life of earthly honor and
ease, to be exposed to perils of waters, of rob-
bers, of his o-wn countrymen, of the heathen,
in the city, in the wilderness."
28
APRICA, SOUTHERN.
In 1799, Dr. Yaiiderkomp, iu company
with Mr. Edmonds, ]5roceeded through many
dangers, to the land of the wild and warlike
Kaffres ; and after no little parley and delay,
the chief gave his consent that they should re-
main in his dominions. They selected a spot
for a house, felled trees, and cut down long-
grass for a thatching, and then kneeled down
on the grass, thaukiug the Lord Jesus that he
had provided them a resting-place, and pray-
ing " that from under this roof, the seed of the
gospel might spread northwards through all
Africa." But, the next year, Mr. Edmonds
went away, and Dr. Vanderkemp was left
alone. He labored on alone for some time,
but owing to untoward circumstances, left
Kaffrelaud for GraafF Reinet ; but not until
he had sown some good seed ; for thirty
years afterwards, an aged woman was admit-
ted to the church who received the gospel from
his lips.
After this, the Doctor and Mr. Read at-
tempted to establish a mission among the Hot-
tentots near Algoa Bay ; but after much opposi-
tion from the colonists, and sundry attacks from
the plundering Hottentots, they were obliged to
take refuge with about 300 Hottentots, whom
they had collected in Fort Frederick. After the
cession of the colony to the Dutch, a spot was
granted them on Kooboo, where they com-
menced the station called Bethelsdorp ; which,
however, from its sterility and want of water,
was unsuitable for a mission farm. Five years
after its commencement, they wrote to the di-
rectors that they had been without bread for a
long time, and did not expect to procure any
for three or four months, nor had they any veg-
etables. Yet notwithstanding all these discour-
aging circumstances, there were many indica-
tions of the Divine blessing on their labors.
The progress of their scholars was astonishing,
and above all, their facility in acquiring reli-
gious knowledge, considering the apathy, stu-
pidity, and aversion to effort, which character-
ize the natives. Dr. Yandcrkemp closed his
useful labors, Dec. 15, 1811, after breathing
out the Christian assurance, " All is well."
Bethelsdorp, under many difiiculties and dis-
advantages, grew and multiplied. In 1822 it
was in a most flourishing condition, having
large schools and other institutions, and a
printing press. New churches were also
planted at Pacaltsdorp, Theopolis, and other
places, through the instrumentality of Rev. J.
Campbell.
A mission was commenced at Kat river,
among the Kaffres, iu ISIG, by Mr. Joseph
Williams. Short as Dr. Yandcrkemp's labors
were among tlie Kaffres, he loft a savor of
the gospel Ijchind him, which still remained.
The commencement of the mission was most
auspicioas. Temporary houses were raised,
ground was cleared for cultivation, a water-
course and a dam were constructed, and the
Kaffres as.sembled for instruction. A little
I more than two years after, Mr. Williams was
removed by death. His lonely widow, how-
ever, found sympathy in the hearts of the na-
tives, who had just begun to appreciate their
teachers. She instructed her half-civilized at-
tendants to prepare the wood and make the
coffin, and with a weeping baud, followed the
desire of her eyes to the silent dust. No suc-
cessor was appointed, at that time, and the
mission to the Kaffi-es was suspended.
At the same time that Dr. Yandcrkemp
proceeded to the land of the KaQres, IMessrs.
Kircherer, Kramer and Edwards, took up their
course for Zak river, between 400 and 500
miles north from Cape Town. Mr. Kircherer
had been designated to Kaffrelaud. But the
Bushmen, on making a treaty with Mr. Fisch-
er, one of the colonists, who was a good man,
beheld him solemnly appealing to God to wit-
ness the transaction, and observed that he was
in the habit of assembling his family for wor-
ship morning and evening, and were thus led to
inquire al^out God, and solicit a Christian
teacher. Mr. Fischer took some of their jDrin-
cipal men to the Cape, to see what could be
done for them. And Providence so ordered it,
that they arrived just before the missionaries,
who received it as a call from God to labor in
that quarter. They received great kindness
and attention from the government, and assist-
ance from the farmers, who accompanied
them to the spot, and loaded them M'ith things
requisite to commence the station.
Zak river became the finger-post to the Na-
maquas, Coraunas, Griquas, and Bechuanas ;
for it was by means of that mission that
these tribes and their condition became known
to the Christian world. The farmers contin-
ued friendly, and many Hottentots and Bas-
tards flocked to the station ; but the Bush-
men, for whom the mission was designed, could
never appreciate its object. The missionary's
life was more than once threatened by them ;
but his labors were blessed to the conversion
of a number of Hottentots and Bastards, who
afterwards became pillars in the Griqua j\lis-
sion. Mr. Kircherer having left, the mission,
with no small regret, was abandoned in 1806.
In 1814, another mission was commenced
among the Bushmen at Colesberg, south of
the Great river, by Messrs. Smith and Cor-
ner. The settlement was commenced with
about 500 Bushmen. For some time, how-
ever, they were jealous of the missionaries,
fearing that they were employed to deliver
them into the hands of the farmers, between
whom and themselves, there had been a long
and a mortal enmity. But it was not long be-
fore tlie light and power of the gospel reached
their hearts, and many of them believed. A
church arose, and with it the usual results
of Christianity appeared, among wliich were
extensive gardens, cultivated by the hands that
used only to handle the bow and spear, as they
roamed wildly over the country.
AFEICA, SOUTHEEN.
29
Another mission was commenced among the
Bushmen at Hephzibah. But in consequence
of some conflict between the farmers and the
Bushmen, the missionaries were ordered by
government to retire within the colony ; and
so these stations, in the midst of much pro-
mise, were broken up. Some of the Bush-
men had acquired a good knowledge of the
principles of Christianity, and appeared to
receive it into their hearts ; and they were
zealous in endeavoring to convey it to their
countrymen. And the experiment proved that
the conversion of this wild, untractable race
was not impossible. The last effort of the so-
ciet}'- to establish a mission among this people
was attempted in the vicinity of the Caledon
river ; but the mission was afterwards trans-
ferred by Dr. Philip to the Paris Society.
In the month of January, 1806, the Orange
or Gariep river was crossed by tJie missiona-
ries of the Loudon Missionary Society, for the
purjiose of carrying the gospel to the inhabit-
ants of the wild and desolate regions of Great
Namaqualand. Of this region, Mr. Moftat
says, "As an inhabited country, it is scarcely
possible to conceive of one more destitute and
miserable." On his way there, he met a per-
son who had spent years in that country, and
on inquiring about it, his reply was, " Sir, you
will find plenty of sand and stones, a thinly
scattered population, always suffering for want
of water, on plains and hills roasted like a
burnt loaf, under the scorching rays of a cloud-
less sun ;" of the truth of which, he says he had
ample demonstration. The inhabitants are
Hottentots, distinguished by all the singular
characteristics of that nation, which includes
Hottentots, Ooraunas, Namaquas aud Bush-
men. After a long journey of great hard-
ships, and much suflering for want of adequate
supplies, the missionaries arrived at the Orange
river, where they waited at a place which they
named Silent Hope, till Christian Albrecht
visited Gi'eat Namaqualaud and returned with
encouraging prospects, when they went forward
to the spot selectetl, which they named Happy
Deliverance. Their prospects were alternately
bright and gloomy. Their proximity to Afri-
caner added not a little to their anxieties. But
he came to them and M'elcomed them to the
country, becaase they were sent by the En-
glish, saying that though he hated the Dutch,
he loved the English, because he had heard
they were friends of the poor black man. This
man, being driven to desperation, by the op-
pressions of the Dutch boers, had risen upon
his master, and putting himself at the head of
his tribe, had become the terror of the whole
country.
Africaner, hearing that it was the intention
of the missionaries to remove to another place,
came to them and entreated them not to leave
that part of the country. They did, however,
remove to Warm Bath, about 100 miles west
of Africaner's neighborhood. Here they re-
sumed their labors, among a mixed population
of Namaquas and Bastards fi'om the Colony,
whom they found it difficult to manage. For
a season their prospects were cheering, and
their labors blest ; though they labored in a
debilitating climate, in want of the necessaries
of life, spreading their scanty fare upon the lid
of a wagon chest for a table. While here,
their congregation was increased, by that des-
perado, Africaner, who with part of his people,
drew near and attended occasionally the in-
structions of the missionaries, who visited his
place in return. But some jealousy and per-
haps alarm were excited in the minds of the
people of the station, which induced him to
retire to his former place. But Abraham Al-
brecht's health failing, he took an affectionate
leave, on the 14th of May, 1810, accompanied
by his brother, leaving the mission in charge
of Mr. Tromp. After a tedious journey, he
expired at the house of Mr. Botmas, at Honing
Berg, on the 30th of July. His last words
were, " I go to Jesus ; I am a member of his
body." After this. Christian Albrecht pro-
ceeded to the colony, married a lady of supe-
rior education, and returned to his field of la-
bor. But in consequence of the imprudence
of some of the people at Warm Bath, in join-
ing an expedition against Africaner, he be-
came enraged and vowed vengeance on the
mission. For a whole month, the missionaries
were kept in the greatest terror, and at length
were obliged to flee, and return to the colony.
Africaner and his men soon arrived, and after
obtaining what booty they could find, set fire
to the premises, and left them in ruins. In
Dec, 1811, they set out to return again to
the scence of their labors and trials. After
a most distressing journey, they arrived at
Silver Fountain, the residence of Cornelius
Kok ; where, five days after, Mrs. Albrecht
breathed her last. Tlie Namaqua mission was
resumed at Pella, south of the river, where
they were joined by about 500 of the Warm
Bath people. Mr. Chi'istian Albrecht, having
occasion to go to the Cape for medical advice,
suddenly expired, leaving behind him a bright
testimony of zeal, love, and self-denial. But
before leaving the country he had the unspeak-
able joy of making peace with Africaner, and
seeing the standard of the Prince of Peace
raised in the very village of the man
who once "breathed out threatenings and
slaughter," against not only his fellow heathen
biit against the saints of the Most High. Rev.
J. Campbell, on his fii'st visit to Africa, while
passing through Namaqualand, had written a
conciliatory letter to Africaner, to which the
chief returned a favorable reply through Mr.
Albrecht, who sent Mr. Ebner to occupy a sta-
tion at Africaner's Kraal. Mr. Ebner's la-
bors were blessed, and in a short time, Africa-
ner and his two brothers, David and Jacobus,
with a number of others, were baptized. Tet
he does not appear to have been altogether the
30
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
man for the place ; for by some means he got
the ill-will of the natives, and on the arrival
of Mr. Moffat, in Jan., 1818, he was in great
danger of losing his life ; and he soon after
left the mission.
Soon after Mr. Moffat's arrival, Christian
Africaner made his appearance, and inquired
if he was the missionary appointed by the di-
rectors in Loudon ; and being answered in the
affirmative, seemed pleased, and said as Mr. INI.
was young, he hoped he would live long with
him and his people. He then ordered a num-
ber of women to come, who soon made their
appearance, bearing bundles of native mats,
and long sticks like fishing rods. Africaner,
pointing to a spot of groimd, said, " There
you must build a house for the missionary."
A circle was formed and the women fixed the
poles, tied them down in the hemispheric form,
covered them with the mats, and in about half-
an hour the house was done, all ready for ha-
bitation.
Soon after Mr. Moffat commenced his servi-
ces, which were attended every morning and
evening, he was cheered with tokens of the
Divine presence ; and in none were these to-
kens more marked than in the chief, Africa-
ner, of whose wonderful change and devoted
piety, Mr. M. has given a thrilling account.
But as the memoir of this Christian chief is
a common book among us, the sketch will not
be repeated here.
After some time, Mr. Moffat visited the
Cape, for the double purpose of procuring
supplies, and of introducing Africaner to the
government ; and while there, he was appoint-
ed by the Society to the Bechuana mission.
The mission which was commenced and af-
terwards broken up on the Zak river, after mi-
grating for a few years, finally settled down at
(jfriqua Town in 1804, with Messrs. Anderson
and Kramer, and a mixed multitude of dis-
tinct tribes, having different languages, cus-
toms, &c. Mr. Anderson says, when he went
among the Griquas, they were without the
smallest marks of civilization ; excepting one
woman, they had not one thread of European
clothing. The missionaries' lives were in dan-
ger, the natives afterwards having confessed
that they had frequently meditated killing them
but were overawed by what they had learned
of an Almighty power. They were in the hab-
it of plundering one another, and seemed to
see no wrong in this or any of their actions.
Violent deaths were common. Their usual
manner of living was disgusting, and devoid
of all shame. 13ut after a scries of hardships,
requiring much faith and patience, the instruc-
tions of the missionaries were attended with
a blessing which produced a great change.
The people became honest in their dealings,
abhorring those acts of plunder which had be-
come so common among them. They entirely
abandoned their former maimer of life, and de-
cency and modesty prevailed in their families.
The Griquas at first showed great aversion to
the labor of cultivating the ground. But af-
ter some time, they were prevailed upon to
try the experiment ; and this was followed by
a great and visible improvement in them as a
body. As early as 1809, the congregation
consisted of eight hundred persons, who re-
sided at or near the station. In 1810, they
were threatened with an attack from a maraud-
ing party of Kaffres. Mr. Jantz, the mis-
sionary, with the people, set apart a day of
fasting and prayer, and at the same time sent
a pacific message with a present to the Kaffres,
who immediately retired. The mission con-
tinued to flourish, till in 1814, Mr. Anderson
received an order from the colonial govern-
ment to send down twenty Griquas for the
Cape regiment. This demand greatly exasper-
ated the natives, and produced such an excite-
ment that Mr. Anderson was obliged to leave
them ; while the refusal of the natives to com-
ply with the order, led to the introduction of
a restrictive system by which the missionaries
were prevented from crossing the northern
boundaries of the colony. Mr. Anderson was
succeeded by Messrs. Moffat and Helm, the
former of whom, in his book, bears honorable
testimony to his zeal, perseverance and success
as well as to the warmth with which his mem-
ory was cherished by the natives. One object
of Mr. Moffat's appointment was to make a
vigorous stand against interference on the part
of the missionaries with the goverriment of the
people. The former chief of the Griquas,
Adam Kok, had abandoned Griqua Town, and
the acknowledged chief, Berend, lived at the dis-
tance of fifty miles, and paid very little attention
to their interests. The consequence was, they
were without any regular government. The
hint was given them to appoint one of their
own number to take the government of the
village. The idea was eagerly embraced. The
choice fell unanimously on Andries Wates-
bocr, a man who had been educated at the sta-
tion, and employed as an assistant teacher in
the school, but who possessed neither name nor
riches. The missionaries took no part in the
matter ; but the choice afforded them entire
satisfaction. This was a new era in the mis-
sion, as it relieved the missionaries from con-
stant attention to the secular affairs of the
people. Waterboer, however, feeling his in-
sufficiency, spent several evenings every week
in conversing with them on the subject of his
duties and responsibilities. His administra-
tion was not unattended with difficulty and
trouble ; but by the blessing of God, he suc-
ceeded in establishing the principles of order
and peace. He always continued, however, to
preach. He obtained afterwards a liberal sal-
ary and supplies from the colonial government,
and was able, at length, to present the Griquas
in a most favorable aspect. The mission re-
ceived a new impulse in 1831, since which time
1 it has continued to increase, and to extend its
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
31
inflaence around, having been blessed in no
ordinary degree. Mr. Helraore, having been
appointed to Leliatlong, a station of Bechua-
nas connected with the Griqua Mission, 190
of their members were transferred to his care,
and a new church was formed, and at the re-
quest of the chief, 100 of the Basutos returned
home, and connected themselves with the
French mission.
Mr. Moflfat states that the missionaries ex-
perienced great difficulties, and were frequently
in imminent peril of their lives, in consequence
of holding the office of agent of the colonial
government. He says, " More than twenty
years' experience among the aborigines beyond
the bounds of the colony, has convinced the
writer that the two offices are incompatible."
The reason is that it places them in a suspi-
cious attitude toward the natives. But it is
the testimony of those well acquainted with
the subject, that without this official character,
they were able to exert a wide and strong in-
fluence over the natives, to restrain their war
like, marauding and revengeful disposition.
A mission was commenced by Mr. Hamil-
ton, among the Bechuanas, at Lithakoo ;
though with but the reluctant consent of Mo-
thibi, the chief. These people have no notion
of idolatry, and no religious ideas of any kind,
so that they can only be approached, at first,
through motives of self-interest, which, how-
ever, when resorted to, must ultimately react
against the missionary's object. In conse-
quence of a disastrous defeat of a marauding
expedition against the Bakuenas, Mothibi,
and a majority of his people removed to the
Kuruman river, in June, 1817. In 1820, Mr.
Motfat arrived, in company with Mr. Campbell ;
and in 1^21, the former became permanently
connected with the mission, where he now re-
mains. This mission passed through perils and
dangers almost incredible, which are described
by Mr. Moffat with graphic power. First, they
were the objects of suspicion to the natives,
who ordered them to leave, and threatened
their destruction. Then the country was vis-
ited with a long and terrible drought, which
threatened to destroy every thing. A rain-
maker was sent for, who charged it upon the
missionaries ; but, after having deceived and
fleeced the people, he was obliged to flee for his
life. Afterwards a new station was commenced,
at a place more favorable for water ; but no
sooner had they commenced operations, than
the whole country was thrown into a scene of
the wildest excitement and confusion, and no-
thing but wars and rumors of wars, and at-
tacks from banditti, seemed to be the order of
the day. Several times the mission was scat-
tered. But at length, after unheard of confu-
sions and terrors, hardships and disasters,
things settled down into comparative quiet,
and the appearances at the station were indi-
cative of the long desired change. And short-
ly after the return of Mr. Hamilton from a visit
to the Cape, they were favored with the man-
ifest outpouring of the Spirit from on high.
The simple gospel no.w melted the hearts of
men who had scorned to weep. The missiona-
ries were taken by surprise. So long accus-
tomed to indifference, the scene overwhelmed
their minds. Their chapel became a Bochim
and the sympathy spread from heart to heart,
so that even infants wept. An emancipated
slave, named Aaron Josephs, who had come to
the station for the education of his children, was
awakened, and giving evidence of a saving
change, was received into the church. The
services on this occasion gave a new impulse
to the work, and soon the sounds predominant
throughout the village were those of singing
and prayer. Those that were awakened held
prayer-meetings from house to house; and
when there were none able to engage in prayer
they would sing till a late hour. Before the
dawn of morning they would assemble again
at some house for worship, before going to la-
bor. Aaron and two other men now came
forward and offered to build a school-house,
that might serve as a place of worship, at their
own expense. And as all gave their assistance,
the building was soon completed. Many im-
jportant improvements were also made in the
outward affairs of the mission, in which there
was no lack of native assistance, while the lan-
guage and translations were attended to. On
the first Sabbath in July, 1829, six of the con-
verts, after a careful examination had shown a
good knowledge of divine truth and a simple
faith relying alone on the merits of Christ,
were baptized and received into the church.
And Providence had so ordered, that a large
number were present from Philipolis, Camp-
bell, Griqua Town, and Boochaup, who were
profitably impressed by the solemnity. There
were present, also, parties from the interior,
who had come there to trade. The place was
crowded to excess. In the evening, they sat
downat the table of the Lord, and enjoyed a
cheering and encouraging season. The con-
verts clothed themselves in decent raiment ;
and soon after a sewing school was started, to
teach the women and girls to make their own
garments. The same gospel which had taught
them that they were spiritually miserable,
blind and naked, discovered to them also that
they needed outward reform, and thus prepared
their minds to adopt those modes of comfort,
cleanliness and convenience, which they had
been accustomed to view only as the peculiar-
ities of a strange people. And the same im-
provement was manifest in the other depart-
ments of household economy.
Prospects continued cheering. The desire for
instruction was great, and the experience of
the inquirers and converts was such as to give
good evidence of grace. " I seek Jesus," one
would say, and another, " I am feeling after
God. I have been wandering among beasts of
prey ; the day has dawned, and I see my dan-
32
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
ger." Another, " I have been sleeping in a
lion's den ; or been blown to and fro like a cal-
abash upon the water, and might have sunk."
A woman, who was about to die, called her
husband and friends, and addressed them : " I
am going to die. "Weep not because I am
going to leave you, but weep for your sins, and
wcej^ for your souls. With me all is well, for
do not suppose that I die like a beast, or that
I shall sleep forever in the grave. No, Jesus
has died for my sins ; he has said he will save
me ; I am going to be with him."
The people now made rapid progress in civ-
ilization ; and as the country had been blessed
with plentiful rains, they began to adopt Eu-
ropean modes of cultivation, and to increase
the variety of their agricultural productions.
And the spiritual affairs of the station kept pace
with external improvement. Progress was
made in reading, and knowledge increased ;
and early in the year 1830, the foundations of
a church were laid.
Mr. Moffat, having completed the translation
of the gospel of Luke, repaired to the Cape to
get it printed, and returned with the treasure,
together with a hymn book in the native lan-
guage, a printing press, type, paper and ink,
having learned to print during his absence ;
also bringing with him Mr. and Mrs. Ed-
wards, as a reinforcement. Nothing could ex'-
ceed the surprise of the natives, when they
saw a white sheet, after disappearing for a
moment, emerge spangled with letters. The
mission continued to prosper after this. Mr.
Moffat made frequent excursions into the
interior to visit other tribes, where, in the
midst of groat peril and strange adventures, he
was mercifully preserved, and permitted to
scatter some seeds of divine truth, and prepare
the way for other laljors. He afterwards made
a visit to England, where he spent several
years in the translation and printing of the
Scriptures and other books for the mission
among the Bechuanas.
In the latter part of 1843, he returned to
his field of labor, where he arrived on the 13th
of December, accompanied by Kev. Messrs.
Ashton and Inglis, as a reinforcement. He
met a warm reception. " Many were the hearty
welcoines," says he, " we received, all appearing
emulous to testify their joy. GUI and youno-,
even the little children would shake hands with
us. Home gave vent to their joy with an air
of heathen wildness, and some in silent floods
of tears ; while others whose hearts had sick-
ened with deferred hope, would ask again and
again, " Do our eyes indeed behold you ?" Thus
we found ourselves again among a people who
loved us and who had longed for om- return.
It has affordiHl us hallowed delight, and often
called forth from our hearts the liveliest feelings
of gratitude to God. to witness the progress of
the knowledge of divine things, and of the pow-
er of the gospel, among the people coimected
with this place, as well as at om- out-stations."
The missions of the Society, embracing ma-
ny stations not named in the foregoing sketch,
though subject to occasional interruptions
from the predatory excursions of hostile tribes,
from the former wars with the Kaffres, and
from hostile boers, enjoyed, in general, contin-
ued prosperity, till the breaking out of the
Kaffi-e war, in 1846, when the stations in Kaf-
frcland were abandoned.
The presence of the Holy Spirit has beeo
manifested at most of the stations to a greater
or less extent, every year ; and, as the result of
seasons of refreshing, additions have been
made to various churches, in different years,
varying from a few individuals to ten, twenty,
and even as high as ninety at one time. In 1839,
the Caledon Institution was favored with a re-
markable awakening. Its beginnings were at
first small, and without noise ; it continued, till
men, women, and children, became anxioug
about their salvation. At one public meet-
ing, after service, Mr. Helms asked all to re-
main who felt anxious about their souls, and
only fourteen retired out of three or four hun-
dred. A great moral reformation took ^jlace ;
122 were added to the church, and the mem-
bers appeared to walk worthy of their profes-
sion, their character being marked by humility,
their views simple and scriptural, with much
spirituality of mind, and disposition to convei'se
about the things of God. The next year re-
ports the work as still continuing, and as hav-
ing produced great changes in many families,
many having been brought in, who were
considered as hardened beyond hope. In 1843,
Mr. Helms wi'ote : " We have still the spirit
of prayer, sinners are awakened, and the new
converts are growing in grace."
In 1847, a revival commenced at Gossiej),
an out-station of the Griqua Mission, among
the young people, as the result of which, ninety
were added to the church, of whom the mis-
sionaries say, the following year, '' Generally,
the new converts give us great satisfaction."
In 1851, there was a gracious work at Long
Kloof, which continued, with very little inter-
mission, to the following year, and fifty of the
converts had been received into the church.
The effects of the gospel are visible, also, ia
outward things, at all the stations. The re-
port of the Caledon Institution for 1849, says,
" the people are gradually and steadily ad-
vancing, not only in knowledge, but in civili-
zation, which is chiefly seen in their adoption
of better clothing, the increase of domestic
comforts, and the superior quality of their
food. And, as long ago as 1841, Dr. Philip,
while on a tour among the missions, writes
from Caledon : " This station presents a most
gratifying spectacle to those who saw it in
former times. In 1823, the people were in
rags. Few of them had any covering on, ex-
cept the filthy sheep-skin kaross. Their huts
were of the most wretched description. They
were given to drunkenness, and its kindred
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
33
vices, and the ground on which they resided
lay waste. In 1825, and the two Ibllowing
years, their condition was, if possible, still more
miserable, and the lands were in the possession
of the neighboring boers. The people are
now dressed in British manufactures, and make
a very respectable appearance in the house of
God. The children who formerly went naked,
and presented a most disgusting appearance,
are decently clothed. Insteiid of a few wretch-
ed huts, resembling pig-styes, we have now a
rising and regular village ; and the valley on
which it stands, which till lately was unculti-
vated, is now laid out in gardens. While re-
ligion was low among the people, we could
not get them to build decent houses ; but last
year the walls of forty houses were raised."
Among the Fingoes, who are constant in
their attendance on the means of grace, a
marked and pleasing change is exhibited in
their outward appearance. In 1843, Mr. Pass-
more wrote : " The red clay, used for anointing
their bodies, has been superseded by the cleans-
ing waters of the spring, and the kaross and
blanket have given place to garments of Eu-
ropean manufacture. Many have made great
progress in several branches of knowledge.
The desire for instruction is very great. In
the summer, many of them come from their
work, and remain in school till half-past nine
o'clock in the evening, before they go home
for refreshment, and they purchase with avidity
all the books that are published."
Mr. Solomon, on arriving at Griquatown, in
December, 1843, writes : " I found the great
majority of them no longer living in their mat
huts, covered with their tilthy karosses, subsist-
ing on roots and game, but dwelling in Europe-
an houses, many of them of stone or brick ;
decently clothed in European attire ; cultivat-
ing all the ground capable of cultivation ; pos-
sessing flocks and herds ; and enjoying many of
the comforts of life. I found many of them in-
telligent and respectable, in every sense of
the term, who would reflect credit on any
community." He says, also, that the influence
of the mission was not confined to that parti-
cular spot, but had extended to some distance
in all directions ; and that there were several
outposts where churches had been gathered,
some of them containing 100 to 200 members,
walking as becomcth Christians.
Testimonies of this kind might be given to
an indeSnite extent ; but we have room for
but one incident more on this j^oint, which
will show that the change is perceived by the
heathen, and its cause acknowledged : A Fin-
go, traveling through Hankey, where the so-
ciety have a station, sat down to rest at the
door of the place of worship, and looking
round on the houses, behind which the gardens
were concealed, asked one of the deacons how
the people got food in such a place. The
deacon told him to look at him, and see if he
was not healthy and well clothed. He then
called a fine child, and told the man to look at
it, and see if it was not well fed. The stranger
assented, but seemed perplexed. The deacon
then told him if he would attend service the
next day, he would see that it was so with
them all. The Fingo rose to depart, and lift-
ing up his eyes and right hand to heaven, ex-
claimed, " It is always so where that God is wor-
shipped .'"
I'he following incident, which occurred in
1848, at Long Kloof, shows the influence of
the schools upon children, even of a tender
age, and their reflex influence upon the parents.
A man utterly regardless of divine things was
induced by a i-elative to send two children to
the school, a boy of eight and a girl of six
years. After a few weeks he came for the
boy, as he wanted him to herd calves. The
boy objected to going, " because," said he,
" there is nothing good taught at the place
where father lives." " But," said the father,
" what can such a thing as you learn here ?"
" Father," said the boy, " I have learned some-
thing." " Eepeat it, then," said the father.
The boy replied, " ' It is a faithful saying, and
worthy of all acceptation, that Christ Jesus
came into the world to save sinners ? ' Docs
father know who Jesus Christ is ? He is the
Son of God. Does father know who are sin-
ners ? All are sinners." This conversation
so aflected the father that he returned home
without the boy, and in a few weeks came
back, an altered man, having, as he said, " met
with the precious word of God."
Polygamy has been found to be a great hin-
drance to the progress of the gospel. The
people seemed to have no idea of the siufuln&ss
of the practice. But the missionaries gave no
countenance to it, and required the converts
to give up all but one wife, and to prefer the
first one. Sechele, the chief at Kolobeng, was
the chief rain-doctor of his district, and had
been reckless of human life. But, from the
commencement of the mission, he attended
school and all other services. The truth took
hold of his heart, and he professed it boldly
among his people. But the great sacrifice he
had to make was the renunciation of polygamy.
His surj^lus wives were the most amiable
women, and the best scholars of any in the
town. Soon, the chief sent two of them to
their parents, with the message that the word
of God had come between him and their
daughters. The others were properly disposed
of. Each of them carried away all that be-
longed to her, and the chief supplied each of
them with new clothing. As soon as it was
known that he had renounced his wives, a gen-
eral consternation seized both old and young.
The town was as quiet as if it had been Sun-
day. Not a single woman was seen going to
her garden. Councils were held during the
night, in order to intimidate him. But he
remained firm, and after being tried in various
ways for two months, he was baptized.
34
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
Many very interesting cases are mentioned,
to show the effect of the gospel, in producing
a spirit of liberality. At all the stations they
have generally shown a disposition to contri-
bute according to their ability. A poor
woman, a cripple, hired herself out to earn
something to give to the missionary cause.
When the time for the missionary meeting
came, she asked her mistress for five shillings,
who, in reply, told her that sober and indus-
trious people ought not to give anything, but
rather drunkards, who squandered their money.
She replied, " Mistress, such persons can do as
they choose, but ivefed that we must give."
At the conclusion of a Sabbath service at
Port Elizabeth, the missionary called on a
man to offer prayer. He commenced by al-
luding to the condition of himself and country-
men before they heard the gospel, when they
indulged in vice, and when they were ready to
murder each other ; but when he came to
speak of God's goodness in having sent the
gospel to them, and in having made them par-
takers of its blessings, his voice faltered, and
his heart seemed too full for utterance. He
said, " How can we ever love thee as we ought
to do, for thy love to us ? " He could go no
further, but sat down, and continued sobbing
all the time of the last hymn. This man, who
was a poor Fiugo, obtained his living by work-
ing on the beach, up to his waist in water,
landing goods ; and he brought the missionary
eight shillings for the jubilee fund, and a sove-
reign as his annual subscription. In 1843,
there was extreme scarcity from want of rain
in all the villages, yet, that year, the churches
in South Africa, out of their deep poverty,
contributed £1,600 for the support and exten-
sion of the gospel.
The society have turned their attention to
the raising up of a native agency. In 1844,
Mr. Moffat writes : " The state of our mission
is very promising, with regard to the native
agents employed in teaching and addressing
the people. Six men are connected with Ku-
ruman, and these, from what I know of them,
arc, through the divine blessing, calculated to
do much good. It is truly delightful to ob-
serve the fervent zeal of these godly men. In
my opinion, this is the only means by which
the interior of the country can hav(i a stated
ministry." And, again, in 1846 : " At all our
stations the simple, but evangelic labors of our
native assistants arc receiving the divine bless-
ing."
In the report of the society for 1847, the
directors say, " During the greater part of last
year, this field of the society's labors has been
the theatre of war, and scenes have daily oc-
curred over which the friends of lunnanity and
religion nmst bitterly mourn. Thousands of
lawless Kaffres invaded the colony, destroyiuo-
the villag&s, stealing the cattle, and slauglite?-
ing the inhabitant's. During the progress of
these events, the four missionary stations of
the society in Kaffi-eland were ruined ; the
missionaries and their people were compelled
to seek refuge in the colony ; their property
fell into the hands of the enemy ; and the sev-
eral settlements, with their houses and chapels,
were totally destroyed. All the Christian in-
stitutions and villages within the colony occu-
pied by our brethren suffered in various de-
grees, but the flourishing settlement of Kat
River most severely." The reports of the mis-
sionaries generally speak of the bad effects of
the war, in engendering dissipation and vice ;
but they bear testimony to the good conduct
generally of the church-members, who were
called into active service in the army.
In the report of the society for 1852, the
directors say : " The war has continued through-
out the year to spread desolation and death.
Alarm and distress have been universally prev-
alent throughout the eastern districts, and many
valuable lives have been sacrificed. A portion
of the Hottentots, who, on all former occa-
sions, proved loyal and able defenders of the
colony, have been, unhappily, induced to unite
with the hostile Kaffres. But it is to be re-
gretted that the conduct of the colonists has
been calculated to produce, in the minds of the
colored people, distrust, estrangement, and en-
mity. At the commencement of the contest,
the governor, in his proclamation, doomed the
Kaffres and their allies to extermination, and the
British settlers joined heartily in the design.
Extermination was the watchword in the field,
and the motto inscribed on their banners, —
producing, in the minds of the native popula-
tion, the impression that it was a war of races.
But the only stations of the society at which
disaffection to the government has been man-
ifested, are those of Kat River and Theopo-
lis ; and, from its thirty-five stations, from four
only have the missionaries been obliged to re-
tire."
In the report for 1853, they say : " This
deadly conflict has at length terminated, and,
as might have been foreseen, by the triumph
of the British arms. The principal Kaflre
chiefs have been driven, with their people, out
of their country, and their lands allotted to
British settlers and colonists, and on the widely
extended frontier there will be military posts,
from which the troops and settlers are to guard
the colony against the return of the exiled
natives." But they justly complain ofc a treaty
which has been concluded between the British
government and the Dutch boers, by which the
territory north of the Vaal river has been
ceded to the latter, as the Free Dutch Republic,
without any provision for the protection and
freedom of the British missionaries, some of
whom have been laboring among the abori
giues for more than twenty years, or for the
numerous and prosperous Christian churches
which they have gathered. In this treaty, the
boers engage not to subject the natives to
slavery, but no security was taken, and the
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
35
directors have no coufidence that it will be
executed. Already, three of the society's mis-
sionaries and the natives among whom they
were stationed, have suffered grievous outrage
and wrong from the Dutch emigrants. During
the month of August, 1852, they attacked the
native tribes, among whom Messrs. Livingston,
luglis and Edwards labored ; the men were
killed, and the women and children captm'ed ;
the property taken as spoil, and their villages
destroyed. The house df Mr. Livingston was
broken open, his property stolen, and his books
torn to pieces and scattered to the winds.
And, in the month of October, these three
missionaries, after a mock trial, were sentenced
to be banished from the country. And, on
application by the directors to the home gov-
ernment for redress, they were coolly informed
that the treaty with the Dutch emigrants had
been confii-med by the government, thereby
precluding the expectation of future liberty
for the British missionaries, or of freedom for
the native tribes. Rev. Mr. Helmore writes,
Jan. 25, 1853 : " The boers are subjugating
the Bechuana tribes to their iron yoke. Ma-
musa is destroyed ; the missionaries of Matebe
and Mabotsa are driven out of the country ;
Kolobeng is destroyed. Kurumau and Lekat-
long are the only stations of our society that
yet exist in the Bechuana country. Alas ! for
the tribes beyond us, still enshrouded in the
black cloud of heathenism."
It may not be out of place here to remark
that, according to the statements of Dr. Philip,
Mr. Moffat, and others, the missions in South
Africa have met with greater hindi'ances from
the opposition of the colonists and the inter-
ference of the colonial government, than from
all other sources, and that the oppressive policy
pursued by the colonial government towards
the natives, has been one of the chief obstacles
in the way of their success.
Much complaint is made of the canteens, or
grog-shops, by which the mission settlements
have been infested, and, in some instances, suc-
cessful attempts have been made to counteract
their influence, by introducing the pledge of
total abstinence. At Dysaldorp, the Total
Abstinence Society, in 1844, numbered 420
members, and was the means of a great moral
reformation.
Here, as in all parts of the world where mis-
sions have been successful, the emissaries of
Popery have come in to take possession of the
harvest. In 1846, Dr. Philip says there were
priests in all the villages, and some of these
are represented as men of learning and ability,
and they were employing every means that
their zeal could dictate to make converts.
The native converts, in speaking of their
own religious feelings, manifest a simple-hearted
piety, a knowledge of their own hearts, and of
the gospel, in its adaptodness to their wants,
with an implicit faith, truly remarkable ; and
the death-beds of the departed have shown that
this faith was able to sustain them in that hour
which brings nought but terror and wailing to
the heathen.
The latest intelligence from these missions
is encouraging. The report of the society for
1853 states that, "Although the stations
throughout the colony have suffered, in conse-
quence of the Kaffre war, some diminution in
their temporal resources, and the men who en-
tered the military levies have been exposed to
the influence of the camp and the battle-field :
yet these evils have been far less than might
have been dreaded. Even at the Kat River
settlement. Rev. James Read has collected
the scattered members of the church, and re-
commenced the schools ; and at every other
station, with the solitary exception of Theopo-
lis, the believers have walked together in the
fear of the Lord, and in the comfort of the
Holy Ghost, and have been multiplied." But
beyond the bounds of the colony, it has been
otherwise. Yet it is gTatifying to learn that
the members of the churches, at the stations
which have been broken up, have generally
sought refuge at other mission settlements, and
that their conduct, in these trying circum-
stances, has been such as to honor their pro-
fession.
While the surrounding country has been
subjected to the lawless attacks of the emi-
grant boers, the station at Kuruman has been
unmolested. Mr. Moffat writes, in November,
1852, that he is going on with the work of
translation, and that the state of the work is
more encouraging than in former times ; the
people are more settled in their habits, and
better informed ; the grounds at and near the
station are becoming more generally cultivated.
Mr. Ashton writes, January, 1853, that they
had just admitted two young women to the
church wJio were baptized in infancy, thus
bringing in the fruits of the second generation.
At the station at Long Kloof, within the
colony, and at an out-station not far distant,
an interesting work of grace commenced in
1852, about the time the men returned from
the war. To the missionary it was an over-
powering time. Many who had grown old in
sin, as well as the youth of both sexes, were
crowding around to speak with him of the con-
cerns of their souls. In the report for 1853,
the work is noticed as still continuing. Sev-
enty-three had been received into the church,
as the fruits of the revival, and the church was
apparently in a healthy state.
The Rev. Dr. Livingston has returned from
his third journey into the interior of the
country, having penetrated 300 or 400 miles
northward beyond the limits of his former
travels. He found a country abounding with
rivers, some of much greater magnitude than
he had hitherto seen in Africa, and an interest-
ing population, far more numerous than the
native tribes further south. Though speaking
different languages, they generally understood
36
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
the Sicliuana, in which Dr. L. preached to
them the gospel. They received him with
kindness, and he purposes, with the sanction
which he has received from the directors, to
return and establish a mission among them.
In 1848, Eev. J. J. Freenian, Home Secre-
tary, of the London Missionary Society, paid a
visit to South Africa, for the purpose of devis-
ing means for rendering the missions more effi-
cient ; to inquire into the best means of econ-
omizing the society's funds ; and to aid in car-
Tying into effect any new arrangements. He
visited all the stations, and gave a highly en-
couraging account of their condition ; but he
agrees with Mr. Moffat and Dr. Philip, in his
views of the oppression exercised towards the
natives by the Dutch boers and other colonists,
as well as by the impolitic measures _ of the
colonial government ; — by means of which, the
cause of missions is greatly embarrassed. And
he expresses the fear that the native tribes,
though yet numerous, may be destined to ex-
tinction. Slavery among the Dutch emigrants
still exists. Mr. Freeman gives an account
of a party of them visiting a peaceable settle-
ment of natives, and demanding the orphan
children ; and, on being refused, they took the
children of the people by force, and on resist-
ance being made, shot down the men, and car-
ried off their children.
The following table will exhibit the present
condition of the several mission stations :
Paarl
Oaledon Institution
Pocaltsdorp
Hankey & Kruis Fontein
Port Elizabeth
Uitenhage
Graham's Town
Graaf Reinet
ColcKberg
George Town
Somerset
Kat River* (before the war in 1850)
Cradock
I/)ng Kloof or Avontuur
Fort Beaufort
Dysal'lorp
Bethelsdorp
King William's Town
Knupp's Hope * (1850)
Peellon"* (1850)
Griqua Town
Lekatlong
I'hilopolis
Kuruman
Marausa'S (1850)
Mabotsa* (1852)
Kolobong *
Matebe *
Stations 28
104
24.3
127
230
241
214
67
36
32
177
600
27
199
164
171
91
72
16
40
550
460
324
187
115
32 4,601
353
104
140
140
004
40
232
130
167
25
50
600
39
105
70
91
85
30
50
350
250
125
40
16
200
120
125
460
90
140
150
160
100
3,483'l,757
The stations marked * have been broken up
by the Kaffi-e war and the Dutch boers. Not-
withstanding the excitement and the unsettled
state of things, consequent upon a state of
war, this table presents the churches in a
healthy state. The yearly additions have, in
some cases, been large ; while the average is
eleven to a missionary, which is, we fear,
greater, than the average yearly additions to
our country churches. The aggregate of
church members shows the number of converts
to be equal to 134 to each missionary. This,
taken in connection with all the incidental
good accomplished, shows a large return for
the labor bestowed. — Moffat's Southern Africa ;
Dr. Philip's Researches in South Africa ; Re-
ports of the London Missionary Society ; Lmi-
don Missionary Register; Freeman's Tour in
South Africa.
W-esleyan Missionary Society. — The first mis-
sionary sent to South Africa by the Wesleyan
Missionary Society was John McKenny of Cole-
raino, Ireland. Some pious soldiers in an En-
glish regiment, at the Cape of Good Hope, in
1812, requested the English Wesleyan Confer-
ence, to send them a man to preach the gospel.
Mr. McKenny offered himself for this serdce.
On his arrival at Cape Town, in August,
1814, he applied to the Governor, Lord Somer-
set, for permission to preach, but this was re-
fused ; and after several efforts at usefulness, in
some other way, he was ordered to Ceylon the
next year, to join the band of missionaries
which had gone out with L>r. Coke.
Barnabas Shaio, a name which will ever bo
remembered in connection with South Africa,
offered himself for the mission field in 1815.
On his way to the Cape of Good Hope, he and
his devoted wife buried their only little one in
the " deep, deep sea." On their arrival, they
applied to the Governor for the usual license
to exercise his ministry at Cape Town. " His
excellency replied, that considering the high
and responsible office which he sustained, to-
gether with the adequate supply of clergy-
men for both the Dutch and English popula-
tion, and that several of the slaveholders were
opposed to the instruction of the colored
classes, he could not grant the sanction required.
These restrictions on religious liberty had been
imposed by the Dutch government in 1804.
But Mr. Shaw believing that the command
of the " King of kings," could not be counter-
manded by any earthly authority, proceeded to
open his commission as God's amba.?sador, on
the following Sabbath day to a congregation
composed of soldiers. His heart, however,
was set on preaching Christ to the perishing
heathen, and he earnestly looked for an oppor-
tunity to do so. Just at this juncture.
Rev.' H. .%/i«/i/c«, missionary of the London
Missionary Society, arrive d in Cape Town,
with some J^amaquas. ]Mr. Shaw sought an
interview with them, and was encouraged by
Mr. Schemlen to attempt a mission among the
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
37
heathen beyond the Orange river. But the
difficulties surrounding him were many and
great. He had not yet the sanction of the
committee for such an undertaking ; then the
expense would be great, and besides, his wife's
health was very feeble. But in this emergency
this intrepid and devoted woman urged her
husband to undertake the arduous enterprise,
and pledged her personal property to sustain
it, should the committee in London not be
willing to bear the expense. This decided
him. A wagon and oxen, with other neces-
saries, were immediately purchased, and Bar-
nabas Shaw and his wife, without knowing
where they should find a resting place, or to
whom they should go, set off on their journey
through the African wilderness. They soon
crossed the bounds of civilization ; and with
the thermometer sometimes standing 110° in
the shade, they plodded on their weary journey,
and on the evening of the 27th day, they met
a party of Hottentots, accompanied by a chief,
who encamped near them. Mr. Shav/ entered
into conversation with them, and to his sur-
prise and delight the chief informed hiin that
having heard of the " Great Word," he was on
his way to Cape Town to seek a Christian
missionary, to teach him and his people the
way of salvation. They had already traveled
200 miles, and there were yet nearly 300 more
before they could reach Cape Town. It was
certain that they could obtain no missionary
there ; and that a peculiar providence arranged
this meeting. Had either party started but
half an hour earlier on their journey, they
must have missed each other, they coming
from Little Namaqualand, and Mr. Shaw fac-
ing toward Great Namaqualand. The delight
of this poor heathen chief may be imagined,
when, after listening to his affectionate state-
ment, Mr. Shaw informed him that he was a
missionary of the Cross looking for a people
to whom he might preach Jesus Christ ; and
when he agreed to go back with him to his
tribe, the chief wept aloud, " and rejoiced as
one that had found great spoil." They pur-
sued their way through deep forests, and across
the most rugged and precipitous mountains,
(over which even 14 oxen could hardly draw
the wagon,) and when within two or three
days' journey of their destination, the chief
hurried on to inform his people of his success.
On the last day of the journey, between 20
and 30 ISTamaquas, mounted on young oxen,
came hurrying on to meet and welcome the
missionaries. They approached at full gallop,
their eyes sparkling with delight, and having
saluted them, set off again at "the top of their
speed to announce their approach, when the
whole town turned out to meet them. Next
day a council was held, which was opened with
prayer, and a sermon from, "This is a faithful
saying," &c., and before the termination of the
discourse, the chief and many of his people
wept aloud. After which Mr. Scliemlen, on
behalf of Mr. Shaw, propounded a series of
questions, relating to the establishment of a
mission, to all of which most satisfactory an-
swers were given. This devoted German mis-
sionary, having seen them safely at their desti-
nation, left them for his own field of labor, dis-
tant four weeks' journey.
Mr. and Mrs. Shaw found themselves sur-
rounded by heathen, far from friends, and
scarcely yet able to speak the language, so as
to make themselves understood. They took up
their abode in a hut, with neither chimney,
door, or window, and without furniture, sleep-
ing on a mat laid upon the bare ground. The
day was devoted to manual labor- — building a
house and tilling the ground, — and the evenings
to communicating religious instruction. With-
in one month of his arrival, he was rejoiced to
see some fruit of his labor. Soon a chapel
was erected, a school commenced, a class
formed, and a deep religious feeling extended
itself among the people. In the month of
June, Mr. Shaw admitted 17 adults into the
Christian church by the ordinance of baptism ;
in July the Lord's Supper was administered for
the first time, and in December, the first Love
Feast was held. The converts delivered their
sentiments with great freedom and simplicity,
of which the following are specimens : " Peter
Links rose and said, ' I was formerly an enemy
to missionaries, and when some wished to have
one, I opposed it ; but now I am thankful for
the word. I love it. It has taught me that I
am a great sinner. When I felt this I wan-
dered about eating bitter bushes hoping there-
by to make atonement for my sins ; but I never
found peace till I heard Jesus came to save
the lost. I am thankful for what the book
says, ' Come, let us reason together, though
your sins be as scarlet,' &c. I have been like
a poor little silly lamb, which is only just be-
ginning to go. When the ewe goes from it
a short distance, it turns aside, first to one
bush and then to another. Tlie ewe has her
eye upon it, and goes back again to it, and
does all she can to induce it to follow lier and
will not forsake it. So the Lord has done for
me.' The chief followed. His remarks were
very brief : All the sins I have committed,'
said he, ' from my childhood to the present
time, seemed to be placed before my mind.'
Very soon afterward he found mercy, and told
Mr. Shaw, that ' though he had been extreme-
ly sorrowful on account of the weight of his
sins, tlie burden had been removed by the
grace of God, and his mind was now 'filled
witli peace and joy.' Old Trooi rose up and
said, ' When I first saw my sins I felt pain in
my heart ; and by night, when all the people
were sleeping in their huts, I could not close
my eyes. I got up and went out. I wandered
to and fro. I lay down on my hands and
knees to pray. When I found one who told
me what I should do to be saved, I was so de-
lighted that I knew not how to go away. ' "
38
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
In tlie depths of tlie African wilderness that
same Divine Spirit, which had moved his peo-
ple in England to undertake the mission, was
enlightening the darkness of this people, and
leading them to the enjoyment of a personal
salvation through the labors of their solitary
missionary. Early in 1818, Rev. E. Edwards
arrived at Lily Fountain, (the name of the sta-
tion,) to assist Mr. Shaw. His coming was
most opportune, and greatly delighted the peo-
ple. In gratitude for his arrival, the natives
cheered them with " songs in the night." In
their state of ignorance they had often danced
at midnight to the sound of the kommct-pot,
and now, beneath the same bright moon, in the
calm stillness of the night, the mission party
are startled from their slumbers by the sound
of distant music. They rise and listen, and
as it comes nearer, they discover it to be a
happy baud of the redeemed heathen going
from hut to hut, and the song that rose on the
midnight air was " a new scmg " — a hymn of
praise, in their own language, to their Redeem-
er, one verse of which according to their cus-
tom was often repeated :
" Faith loves the Saviour and beholds
His sufferings, death and pain ;
And this shall ne'er be old nor cold,
Till we with him shall reign."
As they went onward they called on the head
of each family to engage in prayer, and thus
left in their track the cloud of incense rising up
from the domestic altar, acceptable before God.
The committee had sent out with Mr. Ed-
wards a forge and some iron, with other means
of improvement. They set to work, and made
ploughshares and other implements of indus-
try, and soon agriculture began to show its
happy eS'ects around them. Nothing surprized
them more than the heated iron, and the sparks
from the anvil. It was to them the day of
wonder ; and as the Greeks bemoaned the lot
of their ancestors, who had not lived to see
Alexander on the throne of Daritt.s, so the Na-
maquas seemed to lament the lot of their fath-
ers who had died before a forge was set up
in their camp. A school-house was built, and
with the assistance of Mr. Edwards, education
began more rapidly to diffuse its blessings.
As an illustration of the difficulties attend-
ing the introduction of letters among a barba-
rous people, Mr. Shaw, when in England,
about 1811, stated in the hearing of the wri-
ter, that for weeks he had tried in vain to
make the Namaquas understand that the large
letters he had traced on cards and hung up
before them, each stood for a separate sound,
and that their combination gave a word or
idea. They looked astonished and liurst into
a loud laugh. He was growing disheartened ;
but recollecting they had a name for each bul-
lock, he again hung up his letters on a tree,
while the Namaquas sat in a circle on the
ground, and pointing to the first letter said,
"There is bullock A," and to the second,
" There is bullock B," and so on. Their eyes
brightened ; they had caught the idea, and he
had no more trouble.
A good chapel and a mission house were
erected. Meanwhile the work of God deep-
ened in the hearts of the peojile. An awaken-
ing commenced. Even the children held meet-
ings for prayer by themselves. Clad in their
karosses of sheepskin, they bowed before the
Lord, and sung joyful hosannas to the Son
of David.
The news of this good work spread from
tribe to tribe, and soon the cry was heard from
distant places, "Come over and help us." Some
of the Lily Fountain people went on a visit to
a tribe of Midattocs, about sixty utiles off, car-
rying with them two little girls who had been
taught to read and sing ; and so eager were
those poor heathen to learn something of the
way of life, that they kept the two little girls
reading, praying, singing and answering ques-
tions incessantly, scarcely allowing them any
rest day or night. A desire was thus awak-
ened in the breasts of many to be " taught the
way of God more perfectly." One of the men
of the tribe soon arrived at the station, and
told the missionaries that the people living
near him, who had never heard a sermon or
seen a missionary, were longing for the gospel.
Mr. Shaw visited the tribe, (in Bushman-land,)
and preached there a few days.
In February, 1819, a Hottentot from a dis-
tant tribe, arrived at the station, and address-
ing the missionaries said, " My errand in com-
ing here is to request that you will come and
teach us, at out place, the good tidings of the
gospel. I am now an old man, and have long
thought of the world. I now desire to forget
the world and seek something for my soul.
We have many people — Bastards, (Griquas,)
Hottentots, and Bushmen, all of them earnest-
ly desiring the gospel. I could not sleep, but
rose early in the morning, and went to one of
my friends, whose house was a considerable
distance from mine, to speak with him. I
found him in the very same state of mind with
myself, longing to hear the gospel and greatly
troubled. I stood amazed, and said this must
be from God ; if it be not from him I know
not from whence it has come. I will go to
the K/iamies mountain and hear for myself.
He said, if you (the missionary,) will go with
me, or come to us, we will send a wagon and
oxen for yon. If I cannot procure men (though
I am now old) I will come myself: and be as-
sured I will never leave you. I will give all
my cattle over to the o'thcr people, and live
free from worldly care ; but you must come
soon."
Could it be possible that a mind thus
drawn by the Spirit of God, (or those anxious
ones in the tribes he represented,) Avould be
left to grope its way in darkness ? No, at the
very time these words were being uttered in
Africa, the Committee in London were raak-
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
39
ing arrangements to reinforce the mission ;
and soon the Rev. J. Archbcll, with his excel-
lent wife were on their way. They arrived at
Lily Fountain in July ; and two weeks after,
in company with Mr. Shaw, they proceeded to
open the new station in Bushmanland, at a place
called Reed Fountain, about two days' journey
from Lily Fountain to the east. The old Hot-
tentot received them with joy ; ground was
selected, and a station formed, where the word
of life was dispensed and eagerly received by
this people.
The pious natives of Khamies Berg (or
mountain) continued to improve both in tem-
poral and spiritual matters ; and were as a
city set on^ a hill. Their light shone in wor-
shiping God in their families. Mr. Shaw
testifies concerning them : — " Oft have I heard
them engaged in family prayer, before the
sun had gilded the tops of the mountains, nor
were their evening devotions neglected. As
I have stood by the mission house, with the
curtains of night drawn around us, I could
hear them singing their beautiful evening
hymn :
"O Christ eternal, light divine,
Who constantly on us doth shine ;
Thy presence shall be with us here,
Though neither sun nor moon appear."
Then falling on their knees they felt the pre-
sence of the Most High, and the fulfilment of
the promise, ' The habitation of the just shall
be blessed.' " The happy change was thus
illustrated by one of their old men : " Myn-
heer, before we received the gospel we were
like an egg before the chicken is hatched ; we
were surrounded with darkness, and could see
nothing ; but when the gospel came it broke
the shell, and now we see the light of day ! "
Religion also led to temporal comfort. When
the mission commenced in 1816, the habits of
the people were filthy in the extreme, so that
the effluvia from a congregation of them was
enough to make the missionary sick. But no
sooner did they receive the gospel than they
washed and clothed themselves. Instead of
living on roots, or by the chase, and creeping
into a smoky hut, or a hole in the earth to sleep,
they built houses and cultivated the soil and
received the reward of their labor ; so that of
many a spot in South Africa it may now be
said, " There he maketh the hungry to dwell,
that they may prepare a city for habitation,
and sow fields and plant vineyards, which may
yield the fruits of increase." Geo. Thompson
Esq., and also Sir James E. Alexander have
both, in their respective volumes of Travels,
put on record a most pleasing testimony con-
cerning this mission and others established by
Mr. Shaw and his associates in South Africa.
In 1820, Mr. Shaw undertook a journey to
some of the tribes beyond the Orange river in
order to explore the country and to avail him-
self of any opening which might be presented
for the further spread of the gospel. His jour-
nal contains a record of dangers and toils
and efforts, which has few parallels even in
missionary history. Besides the burning sun
and wind, they were constantly exposed to
wild beasts and to savage men ; often in dan-
ger of dying by hunger and thirst, or losing
their way in the wilderness, or being dashed to
pieces over the precipices round which they
had to climb. But God preserved them ;
and after fourteen weeks' absence, they re-
turned in safety. He made his report to the
committee in London, and applied to the col-
onial governor. Sir K. Donkin, who kindly per-
mitted and encouraged him to open missions
among the chiefs he had visited, many of whom
had requested to have Christian teachers sent
to them.
In 1821, the mission was enlarged by the
arrival of three more missionaries. Mr. Arch-
bell and the Hottentot assistant missionary,
Jacob Links, being sent to the Great Nama-
quas, Messrs. Kay and Broadbent were sent to
commence a mission in the Bechuana country,
and Mr. Hodgson to remain at the Cape, Avhere
permission had at length been obtained to
communicate religious instruction to the slave
population. The Albany and Kaffraria mis-
sion had been commenced the year before by
Wm. Shaw, (brother of Barnabas,) and two
missionaries were also appointed to Madagas-
car. The next year the devoted William
Threlfall was sent to assist Mr. William
Shaw. Being again reinforced in 1823, Mr.
W. Shaw opened a mission among the Kafires
under the protection of the Kaffi-e monarch,
Pato, and Mr. Threlfall and BIr. Wh?tworth
proceeded to open a mission still farther east,
in Delagoa Bay. While Mr. Edwards left
Khamies Berg to establish a station among
the Corannas, on the banks of the Orange
river, at a place called Moos. This and the
station at Maquasse (about three degrees east
of the junction of the Cradock, and one day's
journey north of Orange river,) were much
interfered with by incursions of savage tribes
in their vicinity. Mount Coke, on the Buffalo
river, was established the following year. The
missionaries were engaged in their great work,
learning the languages, building school-hoases
and places of worship, and preaching the word
of life with considerable success when an
event transpired which filled them with the
deepest sorrow, ^hey were called to resign
part of their number to become the first mar-
tyi's of the Methodist missions to South
Africa. Among the first fruits of Barnabas
Shaw's ministry at Khamies Berg, in 1816, was
the family of the Links. This converted Hotten-
tot family alone furnished three native teachers
of such decided piety anfl suitable knowledge
of the truth as to be very useful in the mission.
One of these was Jacob Links, who was at first
employed as interpreter. But his progress in
knowledge and piety was' such that he soon be-
gan to preach himself, and accompanied Mr.
40
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
Shaw in his various visits to neighboring
tribes. He was very useful ; in 1818, the con-
ference accepted him as au assistant mission-
ary, and placed his name upon the minutes.
Besides his own language, (the Namaqua.) he
could preach in the Dutch, and he also learned
English, that he might have access to its reli-
gious literature. As an instance of his shrewd-
ness : One day he and Mr. Shaw encountered
a Dutch boer, who stotitly denied that the Bi-
ble or the gospel was ever intended for Hot-
tentots. Links looked him in the face and
replied, " Master, you told me that our names
did not stand in the Book. Will you now tell
me whether the name of Dutchman or English-
man is to be found in it ?" No answer was
given, and Jacol) continued, " Master, you call
us heathens. That is our name. Now I find
that the Book says that Jesus came as a light
to lighten the heathen, so we read our name in
the Book ! " The Dutchman was silenced.
On another occasion, Mr. "Shaw says, "At
the time of our going into Namaqualaud, most
of the distant (Dutch) farmers not only disap-
proved of the heathen being instnicted, but
some of them endeavored to turn it all into
ridicule. One of them declared to me that he
believed the Namac[uas were only a species of
■wild dog, and had no souls. I therefore called
Jacob Links, who was with me at the time,
and offered to prove that Jacob, though a dog,
could both read and write better than the far-
mer. I believe the farmer could do neither ;
and finding himself in an awkward situation,
he called for his horse and rode hastily away."
In gratitude for his recognition as an assistant
missionary by the committee in London, Jacob
Links wrote them the following very interesting
letter, which gives additional particulars of his
personal history. This letter was written in
Dutch, in a very good hand. Only three years
previous to its date the writer of it was an ig-
norant Hottentot ; let the reader bear this in
mind, and then answer the question to his own
conscience, whether or no the gospel of Christ
is adequate to elevate and save the most de-
graded of mankind ? The following is a lite-
ral translation :
"Africa, Lkelie Foxteixe
Nov. 19, 1819.
" Unknown hut Reverend Gentlemen : — The
salutations which you seut^I received from
our beloved teachers, and wish you and the So-
ciety much peace and prosperity in the name
of the Lord. I have long been desirous of
writing you concerning my former and present
state, but on account of weakness in the Dutch
language, I have been hindered. I hope, how-
ever, your goodness will excuse and wink at
my fault. Before I lieard the gospel I was in
gross darkness, ignorant of myself as a sinner,
and knew not that I hail an innnortal soul ;
nor had I any knowledge of him who is called
Jesus. I was so stupid that when a Hottentot
came by us who prayed to the Lord, I thought
he was asking his teacher- for all these things
of which he spoke in his prayer. Sometime
after this another Iviamaqua came upon om-
place. He spoke much of sin and also of Je-
sus. By means of his conversation I was very
sorrowful and much affected, and knew not
what to do. My mother having some leaves
of an old Dutch psalm book, I thought if I ate
them I might then find comfort. I ate the
leaves up but my sorrow was not lessened. I
then got upon the roof of an old house to pray,
thinking if I were high the Lord Avould hear
me better ; but I found no deliverance. I then
ate all sorts of bitter bushes, for I thought the
Lord might possibly have mercy oi> me. But
my heaviness did not then go away. I then
heard that I must give my cause over to Jesus,
and tried to do so, by which I found much
lighter. There was then no one in this coun-
try to tell us of Jesus, and I desired to go to
the Great river, (the Orange river, near 200
miles off.) to learn from the word. I was now
persecuted both by black and white. The
[Dutch] farmers said if we were taught by mis-
sionaries we should be seized as slaves. Some
said I had lost my senses ; and my mother be-
lieving this to be the case, wept over me. Af-
ter this a missionary on his journey to Pella,
remained some weeks with our chief ; but as
I was tending cattle in the Bushman-land, I
heard nothing. Then our chief and four other
persons went to seek one who could teach us.
I was at this full of joy ; and when they re-
turned, and I saw the teacher (Mr. Shaw)
whom the Lord had sent us, it was the happi-
est day for me that I ever knew. Through the
word that the Lord gave the missionary to
speak I learnt that my heart was bad, and that
nothing but the precious blood of Christ could
cleanse me from my sins. I also found Jesus
to be the Avay of life and the sinner's friend ;
and I now feel the most tender pity for all
those who are ignorant of God. I often feel
sweetness for my soul whilst I speak about the
gospel, and my own experience in the Lord.
Before our English teacher came we were all
sitting in the shadow of death. The farmers
around us told us that if we prayed they would
flog us, and some of them even threatened to
shoot us dead if we attempted to pray. They
said we were not men but baboons, and that
God was blasphemed by the prayers of Nama-
quas, and would punish us for daring to call
upon him. Now, however, we thank the Lord
that he has taught us by his servants, and that
he hath also given His son to die for us. AVe
hear likewise, that many people in England re-
member us in their prayers ; and we hope they
* TliiH w.as the late Mr. Albrecbt, missionary at PoUa.
The Hottentot .ibove mentioned held service among tho
people where be happened to go. Jacob Links heard him
Iiray, but had no idea of God as a Being to be thus ad-
dressed.
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
41
will not forget us. The society ot all praying
people are by me saluted.
An unworthy Namaqua,
JACOB LINKS."
This monument of the mercy of Grod con-
tinued to grow in grace and knowledge, and
with great acceptance to exercise his abilities
in preaching Christ to his own people and to
the tribes around them. About this time a
deep feeling of commiseration for the perish-
ing heathen beyond the Orange river, had ta-
ken hold of the church at Lily Fountain. And
notwithstanding the distance and the danger,
Jacob Links had already oflered, if no Euro-
pean missionary could be obtained, that he
would take one of his Christian brethren with
him, and go and live among the Great Nama-
c[uas, and teach them the way of life. Just at
this time (early in 1825) the Rev. W. Thrcl-
fall arrived at Lily Fountain. Mr. Threlfall
was a young man of amiable spirit and man-
ners, oi deep piety and of great promise as a
Christian missionary. He left a home in Eng-
land where the attractions of wealth and so-
cial enjoyment presented their charms in vain
to detain him from the settled purpose of his
heart to preach Christ to the heathen. He
was appointed to Africa in 1822. But his de-
cided predilection was for Madagascar, and he
hoped to be allowed to proceed there from Af-
rica. When on the point of embarking, (in
addition to a donation of £100 which he for-
warded to the Missionary Society,) he nobly
intimated to the committee that if the low
state of their funds was the difficulty which
prevented their assent to commence a mission
in Madagascar, if they would furnish another
missionary to go with him, he would himself
meet that difficulty. There never went forth
a more devoted missionary than W. Threlfall.
On landing in Africa and beholding what had
l)een done already by the labors of the mis-
sionaries, he was so delighted that he wept for
joy. After- laboring in Albany for a time, he
proceeded to Delagoa Bay. He made great
proficiency in acquiring the language ; but in
the midst of his labors and usefulness his
health failed and he set sail for Cape Town.
On the voyage he and all on board were pros-
trated with fever ; eleven of the crew died, in-
cluding first and second mates, and the helm
of the ship was tied a-lee, for no one had
strength to steer, and she drifted in distress,
till discovered, when she was run into Table
Bay. Believing himself dying, Mr. Threlfall
took his pocket book and wrote, " My request
to my beloved father is, that whatever proper-
ty he intended to give me may be devoted to
the missionary cause." The vessel was pro-
hibited from entering the harljor, and no com-
munication allowed between her and the town.
No one would venture to the ship. In this
awful emergency the Rev. J. Whitworth, Wes-
leyau missionary, then at the Cape, volunteered
to go on board the infected vessel and attend
to the sufferers, and under express stipulation
that he was not to return till the quarantine
was taken off. Providing himself with medi-
cines, &c., he went on board, and God not only
preserved him but also made him the instrument
of raising up all the rest ; and on the 25th of
May, Mr. Tiu-elfall, with the captain and crew
landed, praising God for their deliverance.
Mr. Threlfall then proceeded to Lily Fountain
to join Mr. Shaw, and concert measures with
him for extending the cause of Christ among
the heathen. Mr. Shaw was delighted with
him. His piety and zeal and love for souls
was ever apparent. After regaining his health
in some good measure, he projected a mission to
the Great Namaquas on the north-west ; and
finding " a true yoke-fellow" in Jacob Links,
every thing was soon arranged, and he, with Ja-
cob Links and Jonas Jager, a native exhorter,
left Lily Fountain on their perilous journey
in June, 1825. Mr. Shaw heard from the party
up to Aug. 6th. They were at that date sirffer-
ing much from the disturbed state of the coun-
tries through which they were passing, and also
from deficiency of food ; but still trusting in
God. No further information arriving, and
several months passing over, fears began to
be entertained for their safety, which were
soon afterwards confirmed. It appears that a
cruel ruffian, well known to the different tribes
in Namaqualand as a blood-thirsty savage,
who lived by plunder and murder, had with
some others like minded, placed himself in Mr.
Threlfall's path, and offered to become guide to
the party. One night while they were asleep,
he and his confederates rose and murdered
them. Jonas Jager was shot while asleep.
They then turned on Jacob Links and shot
him, his last breath being spent in warning
and exhorting his murderers and commending
his soul to his Redeemer. Mr. Threlfall at-
tempted to fly, but a shot struck him and he
fell, and the cruel assassin came up and pierced
him near the heart with his assagay, and killed
him.
The only motive for this dreadful act was
to obtain the few trifling articles which they
had taken with them to provide food. Both
Jacob and Jonas left wives and families to be-
moan their loss, and all of them were under
thirty years of age ; cut down thus mysteriously
in their bloom, at a time when the Church was
expecting great results fi'om their holy and
zealous efforts.
Information having reached the chief Jfri-
caner, he pursued and at length arrested the
party, and then sent information to the British
authorities at the Cape. The mm-derer was
sent to the colony to be executed. On his way
he was led through Lily Fountain, and the
whole village turned out to see him ; but
mark the change Christianity had wrought.
The friends of the murdered men crowded
round him, not to upbraid or torment, but to
42
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
exhort liiin to think of his awful condition,
and earnestly repent before he left the world ;
and with au exemplification of the most ex-
alted Christian charity, Martha, the sister of
Jacob Links, said to the unhappy wretch —
" Although you have murdered my brother,
nevertheless, I am sorry for you, because you
are indifferent to the salvation of your soul."
The death of Mr. Thrclfall produced a deep
sensation in England, as well as in Africa ;
and the Christian bard, Montgomenj, celebrat-
ed his untimely end in one of his most beautiful
and pathetic productions. There was no re-
serve in the offering which Mr. Threlfall laid
upon the missionarj^ altar ; his life, his
blood, his property, his all, were joyfully con-
secrated in such a service. And, although,
none living know where he sleeps — his devoted
life has not been in vain, either to the posterity
of Ham, or to the living Church of God. Re-
deemed Africa will yet place his name in the
calendar of her saints and martyrs ; and
when '• the Chief Shepherd shall appear,"
Threlfall shall " be with him in glory."
It is but just to add, that the wish he penned
in his memorandum book, on board the plague
ship, was honored, after his death, by his ex-
cellent father, so that, including his own do-
nations and his effects, the noble sum of nearly
38,000 was presented, in his behalf, to the
missionary cause.
Animated by such an example, "his brethren
followed up his effort. Great Namaqualand
was entered ; and, in the country where he fell,
the society in whose service he sacrificed his
life, has now two stations, two missionaries,
six local preachers, and twenty-one teachers,
with nearly 400 church members, and more
than 1800 Great Namaquas under religbus in-
struction.
Barnabas Shaw came home to England, to
recruit his health in 1837 ; but he shortly after
returned to Africa, to resume his labors, and
after 45 years of ministerial toil and suffering,
this " Apostle of Wcsleyan Missions in South
Africa," is still at his post, diligently employed ;
while his son, on the spot where he first drew
the breath of life, became the successor of his
venerable father, in the cai-e of the Kkamies
Berg Church, till forced from his position by
failure of health in 1848.
"W. Shaw, the brother of Barnabas, mean-
while, was engaged with his associates in ex-
tending the Gospel on the east coast, and in
the interior, among the Bechuanas, as far up
as Plaatberg in lat. 28.
The Albany mission was originally com-
menced with the settlers who w'ent out from
England, in tlie hope that it would connect it-
Bclf with the Hottentots, and ultimately provide
the means for extending itself among the Koffre
tribes. These ho[)es liave been realized ;
and tlie brethren occupying them have suc-
ceeaively given way to the new missionaries
sent out from England, and have planted
themselves among the savages of Kafiraria. —
From their labors have resulted 19 stations,
besides those of Wesleyville and Coke's Mount,
in the Albany and Kaffraria District. In the
PoH Natal and Amazula District there tire five
stations ; and in the Cape of Good Hope Dis-
trict there are nine, all of which with full infor-
mation will be found in the tabular view at
the end of this article.
The peculiar difficulties which our mission-
aries have to encounter in their labors among
these people, arise from their feudal customs,
their wandering life, (being herdsmen,) and the
restless and warlike spirit of the Kaffres on the
east coast. But, notwithstanding these diffi-
culties the Gospel has been planted ; schools
and churches gathered ; education and the
press have been introduced ; hundreds have
been truly converted to God ; the savagism
of the unreclaimed, in some measure, softened
down ; and a large number are now before the
Throne, who have died rejoicing in the faith
which the missionaries first carried to them 30
years ago. An Institution for training native
teachers is in operation in Kaffraria, and also a
printing press, from which, besides Bibles,
Hymn IBooks, &c., there is regularly issued a
periodical in the Kaffre language. There is also
another press at Grahams Town, and another
among the Bechuanas. The languages employ-
ed by the missionaries are the English, the
Dutch, the Kaffre, the Bassa, the Scsuto, the
Grebo, and the Sichuana.
The leading authorities for this article are
the " Annual Reports," and " Missionary No-
tices," of the wcsleyan Missionary Society;
the " Annual Minutes " of the Wcsleyan Con-
ference ; " The IVesleyan Methodist Magazine ;"
" Shaw's Memorials of South Africa," and
" Moffat's South Africa." — Eev. William But-
ler.
It is especially gratifying to see, in the self-
denying labors of all denominations on mis-
sionary ground, and the blessed results that
follow, the substantial unity of Protestant
Christians. The Apostle expressed his earnest
desire, that the primitive disciples, to whom he
wrote, might all speak the same thing, and be
joined together in one mind and one spirit;
and this is fulfilled in the foreign missionary
field. By whatever diverse names they are
called, whether ]\Ioravian, AYesleyan, Episco-
pal, Presbyterian, or Baptist, tliey speak the
same language of Canaan, and their converts,
whether •' Parthians, Medes, the dwellers in
Mesopotamia," or Hottentots, Kaffres, Hindoos,
Chinese, or New Zcalanders, all hear in their
own tongue, and speak alike the language
of penitence and faith. And, in the foregoing
sketch, we find the German Presbj-terian
taking by the hand the English Wcsleyan, and
going a four months' journey into the wilder-
ness, to introduce him into the field : and soon
we hear the " song in the night," rising up from
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
43
the joyous hearts of those who have received
the Gospel from his hands.
The following tables give a comprehensive
and cheering view of the results of the labors
of the Wesleyan Missionaries in South Africa.
There is a slight discrepancy between these
statistics and the table at the end of the article
on Africa, that having been made out for the
year 1852, and these for 1854. A comparison
of the two will show the growth.
W *iCO bS l--
'■•
^1 Oi en 4^ CO to J-*
cooc.--i05cni»^cotoi-'
H
^
i?
liliiflll
P,
p :
a-
5^
3-
5'
a
3_
•^
^
^
I
5'
o o
p-
3
s
Number of
M
M- tci ta o
CO
• H" to I-" M M M M
o
*O5t5COU>Mt0t0t0
Chapels.
^
No. of other
>-'
to CO *. CO tc
to
• CO *^ l-l ht- O OO
C-.
4^
* . . t^t^)-i. . Y^
Preacning-Places.
1
^
Missionaries and
M r-- .— to h-i
«1
^*^' ■ ■ >-"-"-'
o
l-'l-ll-'Ml-'MI-'MlO
Assistant ditto.
1— 1
P
9 P"
o
li r-i^' li
HH
00
• M h- M to to • l-i
en
*:<:;,::::::
- &
1
2 ^
H
s-
>3.p
w
l_i I '■ to •
H
o
en
■I— (
1— 1
1.
■p-
* en M to to • to • M
2 2-'
4
w
c
-
w
*^ at
m
M . CO to
"^
M
M
CO to M 05
2 '^P'
^
to
o o ■ to
_
%
>-
• • O 05 to *» to CO
en
«otoa)OscctD-aco
era i-(
1-
o
tr'
a
II
o
CO
10
*..• • to CO
to
to
• • • 0>b5lfi.000
g
^
CO
Si-iCOMlo' MtOtO
^f
o
o
>*
>-
3
w
o
g
>— y—'
o
H-l
Number of Full
to
-» CO to to *.
?t
to to
CO
M
lf.|(*C»tOlti.030CO
and Accredited
OS
cn o O CO o> to o
l*i
Church Members.
o>
to P-'M
a
w
o
* en CO to en ^-*
''oocococoooooioto
On trial for
t)
t-^
to
CO Ol • CO O O -J
1— 1
to
Membership.
ro
t-*
lO
M M to CO tn
c1
M
(-1
o
• M to M to l-l M to
o
to
*OlMCOtOI-'tOI-'CO
Number of Sab-
bath-schools.
Q
H
1— 1
M
No. of Sabbath-
:0 CJ> 05 O 1»^
V-» M M M CO
05
» *^tO to M M *>■
^CnOiMOCOCOCObO
Scholars of both
o
O O O O O O O
o
ootoni-ifioenen
Sexes.
1— 1
^
Number of Day-
CO
MW I-'-
Q
to
■ • • to to M to to
1*^
* OS MtStS- to- !-•
Schools.
1^
l-»
Number of Day-
m
CO to- (ai •
CO
to
J. *i- M to M . • M
* 05 CS to OO • CO • *^
Scholars of both
o
o o o o c
lO Oi ((i en o 03
Sexes.
H
Kl
,_i
t
*SGSoi-.-ji-.8
o
• O0CJ>0 o o o
to
-Jif^ocotoe^eni-'
^
1^
l?ii-
CO
r*TT
,_1
B
CO
M O -I CO It*
o
o
• CO CO CO 30 C5 31 O
• O in in O O O C
^
^tooioototoootocn
enosoento^JfOO
p
^
lO
1-3
a>
M CO W
o
ji it. CO M to M >l^
^
K-^S-^
CD
GO o o c;> Oi
en
o cn o o O o o
"*
o 3
No. of Attendants
on Public
J-J
to _tO JO
o o o o 5
«
f^ » » * * * « w
en
*tOQCoencoencoto
oSooooeno
AVorship, in-
CJi
cluding Members
1
and Scholars.
u
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
I— (
CO
Q
t— I
P5
w
<J
cq
1-5
<1
w
w
■gj»[oqDS pan
0
0
000000
0
0
0
0000000
0
0
saaqniojif Suipnp
-u; 'diqsjo^
0
0
0 0 0 0 00 O'
0
0
0
0000000
T!l
0
c4"
0
i— C^^»0 0 15 00
i—T i-H
00
r4
000 00 00 0
co" in i-H co' CO i-T i-T
0
CO
1~
1— r
CO
-*
sjuBpaanV JO -ovj
»r
"^
CO
CO CO CO CO ?r> 00
,^
to
C5
0 «o 0 10 0 ri 0
00
C5
•If5-i
03
0
'^
c<i o"o 0 CO •-=
0
00
1^
1—1 CO '^ CD CO c; CO
in
1-
-8
00
I— 1
I— 1 CO CO C^ rH S^l
r— 1
C^l
I— 1 CO r—l 1—1 1—1 1—1
CO
'^
•Sg^.§
B
CO
1^
^^"1^
""^f ^
d
T-i
01
10 or^ CO (M 0
J:-
<n
■^
0 0 0 0 0 Ci CO
m
CO
C3
iri
on
;o 0 C5 000 CO
0
CO
0
1- 1- CO r-l 0 0 C5
in
1—
Sa|9
a
-*
<M iH i-l
I—I
I— 1 I— 1 1— 1 I— 1
1—1
1— 1
nil
&
C^l
-*
ir.
I— 1
CO c-1 m 0 '* CO
00
1-
10
0 0 0 »o 0 CO CO
CO
0
f— '«-»-* 'w
^
10
0
ic 0 0 0 0 CO
^
'^JH
0
-* 10 CO £- 00 00 CO
0
0
-S " '^ S
a
ro
I— 1 I— 1 r-l r-i
1— 1
1—1
1:-
ro
0-= -
i«q
1—1
CO
•sasag
'-H
(M
t- 0 00
C5
0 0 m ^ Tt< 0
CO
to
m
I— 1
JC- 0 • • rH (M
•
•
0
• 0 -^ 00 00 in CO
t—
1—
tpoq JO SJBioqog
r-l
I-H . .
•
CO
.1—1 1—1 1— i 1— 1
CO
I— 1
-Xbq jo Jaqtan^
1—1
CO
, -siooqDS
I— 1
CO
CO rH • • I-H CO
CO
• C^ 1— 1 C-1 1— 1 I— 1 rH
1—1
c-
-i«(I JO aaquinx
•
CO
■*
•saxag moq
iM
CO
0 00 C^T CO 0 00
10
0
0
0 0 0 m 0 c-1 0
0
^
00
^
CO 0 0 oco to
0
00
10
I—I c^i -^ oo 0 0 CO
•^
JO saTJloqog-qjTjq
1—
l-H
1—1 CO CO CO i-H CO
r-i
CO
rH CO I—I I— i I— 1 I— 1
t~
C3
-q^S JO Jeqranx
CO
to
•fpoqog-qttiq
CO
CO
CO CO CO CO CO CO
1— (
,_!
CO
I-l CO 1-i C^l CO I— 1 1— 1
0
1—1
00
-qi;S JO .lequin^Nj
•diqsioqni8K
0
-^
00 »o • 10 C5 0
r-
.^ -.o !■- 0 0 ^^ Ci
-H
0
aoj \vm no
CO
I— 1
lO . I— 1 CO £-
CO
1—1 CO 1—1
CO
to
•saoqcnoK q^J'^qo
CO
CO
0
CO 00 CO r- 1— t-
C^5 00 0 00 i:- 0
CO
0
C^l
C^l
CO
0 t^ Ol:- lO ^ 0
00 CO 1— 1 Oi 1— 1 t- «o
CO
in
0
0
^
c^
1— < 1— 1 r-i
I— 1
r—l r-l
1—1
CO
nn^ JO Jaqtunx
CO
^
2
I— 1
'^
la • ^ Ti< so t-
I-l
rH
^
^ t- I— 1 -^ 1- CO 0
-#
'^
og
3i
I— (
0
1—1
fc^
£
s:2
J- M
'■^^
"SS2
CO
«o
co CO m 0 0 0
0
':i<
0
0 0 'Jjl '^ 00 to Til
Ci
in
to
1^1
00
T-H
I-H CO CO r-l I-l CO
I-l
I— 1
1-1
CO
in
. -o E
(T?
CO
CO CO • • iH 0
.
CO
• CO r-l CO CO rH 1-1
t~
Ci
t-^-a
C^l
"*
e
■sa, .
<=£!
I- » "2
e5&
„
3-2 <!
^
,
,
'^_§
■3 ^J
I— 1
• • 1—1 1—1 • 1— 1
. . i-l-CO CO rH rH
rH
0
CO
M
0*1
3
•oiiip ttnujsiasv
CO
1—1
1— 1 i—< r-H r-< rH 1—1
CO
1—1
1—1
I— 1 I— 1 • • I— 1 1— 1 •
CO
1— 1
CO
pUB saUBUOISSII^
•Boacjrl-Suiqo'BOJJ
0
i-H
^ • CO 0 az t~
1—1
0
• «0 CO '^ 0 rJ lO
0
CO
Joq^o JO joqmn vj
•
^"
•blodBqa
■*
CO
tJ( CO CO CO CO CO
CO
1—1
I— 1 in rH CO -^ I-l I-l
CO
CO
00
JO aaquinj^
w
gig
2
£
OCO
1
1
'a
i=
1-
0
i ^ 4^ = -g ^
c -^ ^ ^ '^ z
C cS 0 0 u c
6
0
i -^
Ill-
^ 0 a rT
• 0 . • . •
• •^- 0 • • §
U5 K ►J ?= n m :/
ch
r— 1
c^
e<5 •'l' lo «o 1-^ 06
d 0
1—1
CO CO
1—1 1— 1
.«l5 in to t-^ 06 ci 0 I-H
rHrHI-^I-I^Hr-lC^^CO
1
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
45
Society for Propagating tlie Gospel in Foreign
Parts.— 'Soon after the Colony of the Cape of
Good Hope came into the possession of the
British Government, in 1806, a colonial chap-
lain was appointed; but for a considerable
period, but little interest was felt in the reli-
gious condition of the population, and no effort
was made for the conversion of the heathen.
In 1820, the Society sent out Rev. W. Wright
to Cape Town, where he was succeeded in
1831 by Rev. Dr. E. J. Burrow. In 1840, a
second clergyman was added to the Society's
list. In 1847, there were found in all only 13
clergymen and one catechist, ministering to
widely scattered congregations, throughout a
territory which, exclusive of the recent addi-
tions of British Kaffraria, the Sovereignty,
and Natal, was as large as Great Britain itself.
In that year, the Diocese of Cape Town was
constituted, including, together with all the
British possessions in South Africa, the Island
of St. Helena ; and Bishop Gray having been
consecrated on St. Peter's Day, 1847, arrived
at Cape Town Feb. 28, 1848. The change
which had been effected in the short space of
three years, at the time of the Society's Jubi-
lee in 1851, "shows," the Society say in their
report, " how the presence of a single man, full
of zeal for the glory of God and the extension
of Christ's Kingdom, can, with God's blessing,
infuse life and energy wherever he goes."' At
that time, the Bishop of Cape Town had made
four visitations, which had been performed on
foot or in a wagon ; or, occasionally on horse-
back. In 1850, he crossed the Orange River,
to visit the boers at Bloem Foutein and Vrede
Dorp, whence he descended to Peter Maritz-
burg. On his way back, he passed throughout
Kaffraria, sometimes into spots before uuvis-
ited by travelers, or at least unknown to geo-
graphers, for the purpose of bearing the Gospel
to those savage tribes.
"The clergy have been multiplied nearly
four-fold; two Archdeacons, Mcrriman and
Welby, prove themselves noble coadjutors of
their iioble-hearted Bishop, and between forty
and fifty active laborers were, in 1851, engaged
in missionary labor throughout the long-neg-
lected diocese. New churches were springing
up in every direction, and the colonists were
exhibiting their sense of the benefits conferred
upon them, by making some efforts on their
part to correspond with those of the church
at home. A Collegiate Institution has been
established at Woodlands, near Cape Town,
which is in active and efficient operation. A
Mission has been organized to the Mohamme-
dans in and about Cape Town; and other
missions, on a scale of unusual magnitude, are
contemplated to the Kaffras and Zulus. — So-
ciety's Report, at its Third Jubilee, in 1851,
p. 54.
Scotch Missions.— Some time about the year
1820, the Glasgow Missionary Society sent
out Rev. W. R.'Thorapsou as missionary, and
Mr. John Bennie as catechist, to accompany a
colony of people from Glasgow, who went out
with the intention of settling on the border
of Kaffraria, the Society hoping a door would
be opened for missionary operations among the
natives ; but the vessel which contained them
suffered shipwreck, and the greater part of the
company were lost. The missionaries, however,
were saved ; and the Government appointed
Mr. Thompson as a missionary to the Kaffres,
in conjunction with Rev. John Brownlee, the
catechist, to be supported by the society. The
Mission is located on the river Chumie, at the
residence of the chief Gaika. Soon after tho
mission was established, Sicana, the chief of a
Kraal near Kat River Mission, died. _ In the
morning of the day of his decease, it being
Sabbath, he went to the place of worship, and
told the people that God had afflicted him
with sickness, and that he should die that day,
resigning his soul and body into His hands ;
and advising them to remove to the Teacher,
as the situation of all without Christ was
wretched. He died at the time signified, and
all his people removed to the station at Chu-
mie in June. It pleased the Lord to pour out
his spirit in this wilderness, and in June, 1823,
five Kaffres were baptized, and there were a3
many more candidates.
December 16, 1823, Rev. Mr. Ross and his
wife arrived as a reinforcement. At this time,
the schools, both male and female, were well
attended, and the progress of the children en-
couraging. A printing press was in operation.
From the chiefs of different tribes the mission-
aries had received warm invitations to become
their instructors.
In 1830, a new aM commodious church had
been built, which would hold 400 persons, and
not less than 300 attendants every Sabl^ath.
Morning prayer was daily attended by about
150 persons, who were assembled in the even-
ing and questioned on what they had heard in
the morning. The settlement was in a flour-
ishing state. The Kaffi-es had built a great
number of houses for themselves, and had well-
cultivated gardens. A new station had been
formed at Lovedale, 12 miles from Chumie, to
which Messrs. Ross and Bennie had been as-
signed. And the Gospel of John had been
translated into the Kaffre language. In 1833,
another station had been added, named Bal-
four, and it was stated that other societies
were supplied with portions of Scripture from
their press.
The Glasgow Missionary Society was origi-
nally formed of a union of members of the
Established GTaurch of Scotland, and Dissent-
ers. On the 9th of January, 1838, this union
was amicably dissolved, the members of the
Established Church retaining the old name,
and the Dissenters taking the name of the
Glasgow African Missionary Society, and re-
taining the stations of Chumie, Iggibigha,
Glentiiorn, and Kirkwood ; while the old So
46
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
ciety took Lovcdale, Burnshill, Pirrie, and
Kwelcha.
On the 28th of February, 184:3, the mission-
ary brethren at Lovedalc formed themselves
into a session, for the purpose of conducting
the ecclesiastical affairs of the station. At
their first meeting, it was resolved to observe
the first Monday of the month as a day of
grayer for the extension of the Redeemer's
angdom, and at the morning and evening
service of that day to direct the attention of
the natives t© the subject. On the 18th of the
same month, Jacob, one of the young men of
their seminary, professing to see himself as a
lost and undone sinner, and to put confidence
alone in Chi-ist, was received as a candidate
for baptism.
At Lovedale, public worship is kept up both
on the Sabbath and week days. Four meet-
ings are held on the Sabbath. On week days
there is a meeting at sunrise, and in the evening
the people are called together and examined
on the passage read in the morning.
At Pirrie the church was enlarged, Mr.
Ross, the missionary, building the walls, his
son doing the wood-work of the roof during
Lis vacation, native assistants did the plaster-
ing and built the seats, Mrs. Ross glazed the
windows, and the native women laid the floor,
which was of clay, and whitewashed the whole
within and without, coloring the inside with
yellow ochre, which the school girls brought
two miles. "When all hands set to Avork w'ith
equal alacrity upon the spiritual building, how
soon will its walls go up !
The station at Kweleha was abandoned, on
account of the oppressiviyjonduct of a native
chief. •
After the division which took place in the
Church of Scotland in 1843, the Glasgow ^Mis-
sionary Society became merged in the foreign
mission scheme of the Free Church of Scot-
land ; and its missionaries all being in South
Africa, were placed under the care of the latter
body. The vote of dissolution and transfer
was passed on the 29th of October, 184-4. At
the time of the transfer, there was a mission
seminary, valued at 2000/. to 3000/., free from
debt, with twelve or fourteen native youths in
prei)aratii)n for the ministry ; and some of the
pupils trained in the seminary were engaged in
communicating Christian knowledge to their
countrymen.
The mission continued to prosper till the
breaking out of the Kaffre war, in 1846, when
the missionaries and their people were obliged
to flee, some taking refuge at the Kat River
settlement, and simic in other places. Mr.
Gowan returned to Scotland, and Mr. and
Mrs. Gorrie repaired to Cape 'J'owii, to labor
among the cnlonist.t. Mr. (iowiin
Lovedale have been converted into a garrison.
The seminary is occupied by 200 soldiers, with
commissariat and military stores. The walls
of our houses are loop-holed, and our gardens
converted into cattle kraals."
In 1848, the missionaries were again at their
posts ; and at Lovedale, where they had been
for some time, eveiy thing was full of hoi^e.
At the other stations, things presented a sad
appearance. The loss occasioned by the war
was about 1,2.58/., of which the government
repaid about 189/. The personal loss to the
missionaries was over 500/. In 1849, the semi-
nary at Lovedale was reopened, with seven
native and ten European pupils ; and the Gov-
ernor of the Colony had granted 100/. per
annum towards the expense of the seminary,
and 12/. a year to each native teacher, after
leaving the institution.
In 1850, Rev. Mr. Macfarline makes the fol-
lowing comparison of the present with the
past : " When our missionaries began their
labors, the Kaffre language had not been re-
duced to letters. The Scriptures, Catechisms,
school books, and other publications are now
translated. Native husbandry was conducted
with wooden instruments instead of iron, and
was unworthy of the name. Now, wheat and
barley are grown in luxuriance, and oxen arc
trained for the plough. Polygamy was almost
universal, and the women were treated as brute
beasts. Now, Christian females refuse to
marry in such circumstances. They dress in a
becoming manner, and some of them earn their
bread by the use of the needle. Then there
was little or no Sabbath beyond the mission
premises. Now, the Sabbath is generally re-
spected over the district. There are probably
a thousand native Christians in the district,
and these are, in many cases, educated, and able
to instruct others. The worship of God may
be heard from many a Kaffre hut. The native
mind has been found equal to any ordinary de-
gree of culture. Both sons and daughters of
the missionaries are employed in the work.
All is full of hope."
i
P
m
i
'C
<
n
a
Sifl
SUUions.
a
o
?
J8
a
2
^ s
Lovedalo
.1
2
1
a
6
2
2
220
1540
7700
35
RiimshlU
2
2
270
1890
9450
17
1
1
165
1155
6775
Total
6
6
665
4585
22,925
62
In 1852, Mr. Ro.'is and his a'^sistant were
compelled, for the fifth time, to leave the star
tion at Pirrie, on account of the war. The rest
thus do- of the brethren were laboring under many
scribes the iltsolation left behind : " Burnshill difficulties, yet with encouraging success. —
station is destroyed, and .several others have There were then 21 candidates for baptism at
been burncfl. S(»nie of the missionaries nar- i Lovedale. The foregoing table will show the
rowly escaped with their lives. The houses at i state of the mi.s.siou, at the several stations, in
APRICA, SOUTHERN.
47
1844, before the war ; the returns since the
resumption of the missions, being very incom-
plete. — London Missionary Register.
Glasgoiv African Missioimrij Society. — The
help of native assistants, in the conduct of
meetings, was beginning to be called in requi-
sition at Chumie, in 1843. At Iggibigha,
in 1842, a man and two women, after being
under the closest observation for four years,
were baptized, as the first fruits of missionary
labor at the stations ; and soon after, another,
who was a candidate for baptism, died, saying,
among his last words, " I love to go to Jcsns ; I
cast myself upon him. God has taught me to
hope in Him who died for me ; I desire to
dwell with him for ever. I am going home."
The first Christian marriage was celebrated
this year ; the heathen father of the young
woman, after much persuasion, with prayer on
the part of the young man, relinquishing the
usual present of cattle, which was regarded
as a heathenish claim. The operations at Glen-
thon have been suspended.
Our schools are supported, at these stations,
and the missionaries itinerate in the villages
around, makiag these preaching places ; and
they say not a few of their candidates for
baptism come from these schools. As an il-
lustration of the cruelty of heathenism, they
relate that a girl, who was afflicted with epilep-
tic fits, was left to fall into the fire, burning
herself severely, and was then carried out and
left in the field, where, after remaining in this
condition a day or two in great distress, she
was carried ofi" and devoured by the wolves.
This mission continued to prosper, till the
breaking out of the Kaft're war, in 184G, when
the stations at Chumie and Iggibigha were
burnt and laid in ruins, the missionaries taking
refuge at the Kat River settlement. On the
27th of July, 1847, this society transferred its
missionary operations to the care of the United
Presbyterian Church.
The Kaffi-e war has been most disastrous to
the operations of this society. It has laid
waste the mission stations, scattered the mis-
sionaries and converts, suspended entirely the
work of iiKtruction, and done an amount of
evil, which can scarcely be exaggerated. And
yet there is no disposition to abandon the field.
The following table will show the condition of
the stations in 1844, before the war. Whether
they have recovered from the disasters of the
war, we have no means of knowing. These
facts have been gathered from the London
Missionary Register.
S
^•
•c
Assistants.
K
Statioxs.
03
ri
In
Na - Euro-
s
o
■^
tives.'pean.
6
v^
Chumie
1
1
2 1 1
2 1
44
13
90
Kirkwood
1
1
Total
3
4 j 3
57
90
French Protestant Missions. — Tlie " Soci'et'e
lies Missions Evangeliques de Paris," which was
formed in 1822, sent its first missionaries to
South Africa, to labor among their refugee
countrymen, together with the Hottentots of
Wagoumaker Valley, near Talbagh. But the
farmers generally being unfavorable to the in-
struction of their slaves, and the colonists being
adc(iuately supplied with religious teachers,
they, upon tlie advice of Dr. Philip, determined
on the establishment of a mission beyond the
bounds of the Colony. Messrs. Lemue & Hol-
land, therefore, leaving Mr. Bisseus with the
descendants of the French Refugees, set for-
ward on the 9th of January, 1830, and were
soon after joined by Dr. Philip ; and after vis-
iting the various stations of the London Mis-
sionary Society, they determined to establish
themselves in connection with Lattakoo, among
the Bechuanas, where they arrived, July 24,
1830, after a toilsome journey of nearly ten
weeks, fi-om Bethelsdorp. They immediately
set about the study of the Sichuana language
with such ardor, that they suffered in health,
and were obliged to relax for some time, for
which purpose, they visited Griqua Town.
On the first of September, 1831, Mr. Bis-
seux writes from Wagonmaker Valley, that he
was about to baptize ten slaves, the first fruits of
his ministry ; and that the Gospel had wrought
an advantageous change in the manners of
many. On the 22nd of January, 1832, Mr.
Pellissier joined the mission at Lattakoo, and
in pursuance of an arrangement, previously
made, visited the Chief of the Baharootzes
for the imrpose of establishing a new station ;
but the design was frustrated by the jealousy
of the chiefs ; and in this journey he had a
narrow escape from two lions, by which he
was pursued.
On the 21st of March, 1833, another rein-
forcement arrived, consisting of one missionary,
and one male and one female assistant. On
the 17th of February, 1832, the three mission-
aries set forward to renew the attempt to es-
tablish a mission among the Baharootzes. For
three weeks they passed through vast solitudes,
which the want of water prevented being cul-
tivated ; after which, they traveled many days
through an inhabited country, till they reached
Mosika, the residence of Mokatla, the chief of
the Baharootzes. The town consisted of a
great number of huts, scattered at the foot of
two high hills, forming a chain of mountains, in-
tersected with valleys. The chief received them
with apparent cordiality, and on the Sabbath,
ordered all work to cease, and the missionaries
addressed a congregation of not less than
eight hundred persons. But, in consequence
of the jealousy of Moselekatsi, king of the
Zulus, to whom Mokatla was tributary, they
were obliged to leave the country ; and, by the
advice of Dr. Philip, they repaired to Motito,
seven or eight miles from Old Lattakoo, Ma-
hura, the chief, having desired that missionaries
48
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
should settle there. !Moselekatsl, having made
war upon the Baharootzes, and driven them
out of their country, many of them were hunted
out iu the desert, by the missionaries, and in-
duced to settle at the new station. Motito has
a good supply of water, and the lapd is good
for cultivation.
At AV'agoumaker Valley, iu 1833, there was
quite an awakening among the people, and
there were about forty who gave evidence of
piety. The mission at JMotito was, at this time,
the advanced guard, being eighty-five leagues
north of the colony, and no other settlement
being so far in the interior. But the prospect
seemed discouraging. The mission was estab-
lished for the special licnelit of a tribe of Be-
chuanas, called Batlapis, residing at Old Lat-
takoo. But, none of them had as yet come
to reside at the station ; and when the mis-
sionaries, after a fatiguing ride of two hours,
inhaling llie sand which the wind raised around
them, arrived at the miserable dirty village
of the chief, they were met with the great-
est indiflerence, except when the chief wished
to ask a favor, when the men would be seeu
retiring to the rocks from all quartei-s, for
prayer 1 Yet, the settlement at Motito was
greatly improved at the end of the first year.
The few people collected there were attentive
to the Gospel; schooLs were established, and
the chief sent his son and daughter.
In 1833, the station called Caledon, a settle-
ment at the junction of the Caledon and Or-
ange rivers, was ceded to the Society by the
Loudon Missionary Society, and taken posses-
sion of by Mr. G. F. PelJisier. But, finding
that the Bosjcsmuns, who had been collected
there, had abandoned the spot, he turned his
attention to the Bechuanas wandering near
Philipolis ; and a chief v.ith 1,200 followers
Avas induced to join him_. In a short time,
the appearance of the station was entirely
changed. The people had laid out a great
number of gardens ; and the inhabitants at
the station amounted to about 1,800, most of
them Batlapis.
On the 28lh of June, 1833, a station was
commenced at Morija, 5i leagues cast of Cal-
edon, near the residence of Moshesh, the chief
of the Bechuana Bassoutos ; and the chief
fjuit his mountiiin, and settled with his people
ut the statiun. The plan of a new town was
speedily traced, and all hands, old and young,
were so(jn busied in collecting and preparing
bamboos, laths, reeds an<l rushes. 'J'hev set to
the work with vigor, and pursued it with alac-
rity, untd a new town uiose l)efore their eyes.
The site of the missi.^n, which was secured
by rejiular i)urchasc, w.ia considered to bo the
best in tlie whole country.
In 1831, a liouse of worship was 1)uilt at
Motitx), and the '• sound of the clnireli-going
bell," was first hemd in the valley of Motito";
five adults were Ijapli/ed, and the inhal)itant.s
greatly iniinoved iu their condition. Mahura,
having offended ^loselekatsi, whoso power was
dreaded, flew from old Lattikoo, taking most
of his people with him, so that the hope of
reaching them by this mission was given up.
The inhabitants of Caledon had increased to
2,500 ; and some of the people gave evidence
of being truly awakened. The prompt and
unexpected assemblage of so many people
there was considered as an event unequalcd in
the missions in that country. On account of
the departure of Mahura from ^lotito, and
Mr. Holland not being required there, he com-
menced a new station in 183.5, at Beersheba,
18 leagues from Caledon, within the territory
claimed by Moshesh. The missionaries at Mo-
rija had just began to preach in the native
language.
In 1836, a great change was visible at
Wagonmaker's Valley, and the hostility of the
colonists to the instruction and baptism of
slaves was giving way. The departure of Ma-
hura from Old Lattikoo, had proved advanta-
geous to Motito, in opening the way for many
natives to settle there without fear. The
name of Caledon was changed to Bcthulia ;
and the station was considered to be in a re-
markably prosperous condition, with evidence
of the special presence of the Holy Spirit.
The first general conference of the missiona-
ries, which they have continued to hold annu-
ally since, was held on the 5th of July, 1835,
at Beersheba.
In 1837, a I'eligious awakening occurred
among the Bassoutos at Beersheba, and the la-
bors of the last six months were blessed to
many souls. A new station was formed among
the same j^eople at Thaba Bossioil, by Rev.
Mr. Gosselin, and another at MokoUong,
among the Lighoyas, by Rev. Mr. Daumas,
who was very cordially received by the people,
the women presenting their children to him,
and saying, " Come ! see your father!"
In 1838, the station at Motito had increased
in poi>ulation to 1,000 ; but had been visited
with sore trial by the severe and protracted
illness of Mrs. Lemue, in view of which Mr.
Lemue had presented to his mind the alterna-
tive of sacrificing his wife or the mission. If
he remained, he was persuaded she could not
survive another season. If he left, he feared
that the people, intimidated by Mahura would
be scattered abroad. At Bethulia 28 persons
were baptized. The administration of the or-
dinance was a scene of deep interest. " The
audience, which had kept a profound silence,
because they felt the presence of the Lord, at
length interrupted it to give free course to
tears, which the scene before them called
forth." After the baptism of the candidates,
they presented their young children, to conse-
crate them to the Lord, in the same ordinance.
In the afternoon, the Church, with this new
addition, making 48 in all, sat down to the ta-
ble of the Lord. The converts generally were
faithful and steadfast, maintaining family
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
49
prayer, and otha" religious duties. Fifty-five
more professed converts vrere candidates for
baptism, and there was about the same num-
ber of inquirers. Civilization also keeps pace
with the gospel. All who embrace the gospel
adopt, as much as possible, the manners of the
civilized. At Morija, Molapo, eldest son of
Moshesh, and second chief, was received as a
candidate for baptism with ten others. Oreat
progress had been made in the observance
of the Sabbath, throughout the whole tribe,
and the people were anxious to learn to read.
The station was also advancing rapidly in
temporal things. The new station at Thaba
Bossiou is on an isolated hill of a pentago-
nal form, about 400 feet high, on the summit
of which are the towns of Moshesh and his
father Mokachane, from which 22 villages are
seen. The missionary is greatly encouraged
by the appearance of things. Moshesh, on a
neighboring chief inviting him to join him in
a marauding expedition, sent this reply : " Go
tell your master that there is a house of prayer
at Thaba Bossiou. I learn there to make
power to consist in wisdom, and not in the
number of cattle. My children at Morija are
got ahead of me ; it is time that I should get
instruction." At Beersheba, the following
year, after a rigid examination, 42 were ad-
mitted to the church by baptism. In this ex-
amination, Mr. Eolland availed himself of the
assistance of some of the elder members, who,
from their knowledge of the persons brought
out many things by their questions which he
would not have thought of.
In 1841, Rev. Mr. Casalis writes from Thar
ba Bossiou, on the eighth year after the estab-
lishment of the mission, that in his view, there
were three periods in the missionary work :
during the first, the natives manifest indiffer-
ence and apathy, arising from ignorance of the
true object of the missionary. To remove this
ignorance, in this instance, required five years.
The second era was distinguished by a remark-
able eSusion of the Holy Spirit, which en-
riched the church with many enlightened mem-
bers. The third period was that of thought-
ful, argumentative opposition ; and this spirit
had already begun to manifest itself ; the loss
of those who unite with the church giving se-
rious offence to those that are wedded to their
sins. This was very strong among the villages
around, and had manifested itself decidedly at
other stations, especially among the polyga-
mists, who cannot bear the thought of giv-
ing up their wives. Ilie aged chief, Moka-
chane was baptized at this station, saying, " I
have done so much evil to Moshesh, by my per-
nicious counsels and flatteries, tLat, as long as
I live, I shall not cease my endeavors to draw
him to God by my words and my prayers." Per-
secution had manifested itself at some of the
stations. A young convert on the Hart river,
was subject to the bitter opposition and railing
of his father and wife, and his life was re-
peatedly threatened by the people ; but his re-
ply was, " you may kill the body, but you have
no power to kill the soul." This year a very
successful attempt was made at several sta-
tions to secure contributions for the support of
the gospel, the people, in their poverty exhib-
iting great liberality.
In August, 1841, a new station was formed
among the Oorannas at Friedau, 183 miles
east of Motito, by Rev. J. A. Pfrimmer.
At Morija, in 1843, an awakening spread
far around the station in more than 100 vil-
lages. The members of the church continued
to make progress in grace. They were simple,
affectionate, united and zealous. There were
about thirty, who were regarded as having
truly received the gospel during the year. In
1851, Mr. Freeman, the missionary, says, " By
dividing 280 villages into 28 districts, 12,000
souls are placed under the instruction of the
word of God by means of native teachers."
The latest intelligence gives the results of
missionary labor, at the several stations of this
society, as seen in the following table :
a
o
00
"a
CO
63
'3
6. .
a 0
Stations.
a
o
i
-A P.
to
a
Si
as
2
.a
o
m
13
.5 o
■§2
Wagonmaker's Valley, now
"Wellington,
1830
1
6000
300
44
6
15
Bethulia,
.
1833
1
2500
400
200
100
16
Carmel, ...
- . -
1846
2
40
Beersheba, - . _
.
183.5
1
600
391
80
106
Bethesda,
...
1843
1
1
22
3
Morija, - - . .
.
1833
2
4000
326
146
Thaba Bossiou, -
.
1827
3
250
121
9
Berea, ....
.
1843
1
23
Mekuatling,
...
1837
1
190
16
70
41
Motito, ....
.
1833
1
100
60
Friedau,
13
14
1
12,500
1,840
1,183
310
25
317
60
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
The Kaffi-e war occasioned so much destruc-
tion and confusion among the missions, that for
several years no reports were received. Previ-
ous to this time the missions were generally in a
prosperous state ; evidences of the presence of
the Holy Spirit appeared at all the stations,
and additions were yearly made to the churches.
The chm-ch members gave gratifying evidence
of piety amidst temptation, and in many in-
stances, persecution. Many, even of non-pro-
fessors, were abandoning polygamy, and other
heathen customs. Civilization was generally
advancing, the schools prosperous, many learn-
ing to read, and the work of translation and
printing the scriptures was going forward.
Many also had died in the triumphs of faith.
In 1846, a new station was established at
Carmel, between Bethulia and Beershcba, for
the training of native schoolmasters. An
awakening had taken place among the youth,
and sixteen of them were candidates for bap-
tism. At Bethesda, in 1851, the brethren say,
" Never was our spiritual horizon more encom--
ag-ing than at present. Some young persons
have'been awakened." At Thaba Bossiou the
station had been greatly disturbed by politi-
cal commotions, and by the conduct of the
three sons of Moshesh, who had renounced
their profession of the gospel.
On some of the points embraced in this ta-
ble, the returns are imperfect ; but enough ap-
pears to show that the labors of this society
have been quite successful ; and from the ex-
amination we have given the subject, we think
the number admitted as communicants may be
regarded as giving credible evidence of piety.
It has been the practice of the missionaries to
keep them standing a long time as candidates,
after professing conversion, before admitting
them to the church.
American Board. — In 1834, the Board re-
solved on a mission among the Zulus ; the
design being to establish one mission among
the maritime tribe, under Dingaan, near Port
Natal, and one in the interior, among the
tribe of which Moselekatsi was chief. To the
former were designated Rev. Messrs. Aldin
Grout and George Champion, 7/1 w.s70/iflr7e.s, and
Newton Adams, M. I)., phijsiaan, with their
wives ; and to the latter, Rev. Messrs. Daniel
Lindlay, Alexander E. Wilson, M. D., and
Ileury I. Venable, missicmaries, with their
wives. They sailed December 3, 1834, in the
Burlington, and arrived at Cape Town on the
Sth of February, 1835. The brethren destined
for tlie interior commenced their journey of
1000 miles, on the I'Jth of March, in three
large wagons, drawn by twelve yoke of oxen,
accompanied by Rev. Mr. Wright, a mis-
sionary of the London Society, residing at
Grif|ua Town, which place they reached May
16, 48 days after leaving Cape Town. Here
they were detained five months to recruit their
cattle. They were kindly and hospitably en-
tertained by the English missionaries ; and
they occupied themselves in learning the Si-
chuana language, and in preparing a small
spelling-book in the Sitibeli, the language
spoken by the tribe to which they were going.
The brethren destined to the maritime tribe
were detained at the Cape, in consequence of
a war between the Kafifres and the Colony, as
their route lay through Kaffraria, Mean-
while, they were employed in missionary labor
at the Cape ; and the chnrch under the care
of Rev. Dr. Philip presented them with £45
to defray their expenses. In July they sailed
for Algoa Bay, near Bethelsdorp ; and leaving
their wives at Bethelsdorp and Port Elizabeth,
with the missionaries at these places, they
sailed from Algoa Bay, December 7, and reached
Port Natal on the 20th. About 30 white
men then resided at Port Natal, as hunters
and traders, by whom they were kindly receiv-
ed, and furnished with cattle for their wagon.
A fortnight brought them to the residence of
Dingaan, about 160 miles from Port Natal.
The chief consented that they should come to his
country, but proposed that they should first
stop at Natal, till ho should see the effect
of a school which they might open at his
place ; to which they consented. Mr. Cham-
pion was left at Natal to make arrangements,
and the other two returned to Algoa Bay for
their families and effects. On their arrival,
Mrs. Grout was found to be ill beyond hope of
recovery. She died of consumption, on the
24th of February following, full of faith, and
rejoicing that she had been counted worthy
to leave her country and home on such an er-
rand.
January 22, 1836, Messrs. Lindlay and Te-
nable proceeded from Griqua Town to visit
Moselekatsi, and reached his place about the
middle of May. The chief gave his consent
to their commencing a mission among his
people ; but their impressions of his character
were unfavorable, and the extent of his terri-
tory and number of his people fell short of
their expectations. The mission was com-
menced at Mosika on the 16th of June, 1836.
But having entered their houses before the
mud floors were sufficiently dried, all of them
but Dr. Wilson were attacked with fever, and
Mrs. Wilson died, after being sick eight days.
The survivors were afflicted with digressing
rheumatism for three or four months. And
they had scarcely recovered, when the Dutch
farmers, having been plundered of their cattle
by Moselekatsi, invaded his country, destroyed
fourteen villages, slaughtered great numbers
of his people, and carried off COOO head of
cattle. They threatened to renew the attack,
tuid advised the missionaries to leave the coun-
try, which they did, taking their coui-se over-
land, to join the bn'lhren at Port Natal, where
they arrived July 27, 1837, after a journey of
ten weeks, in which they traveled not less
than 1300 miles, over the worst roads they had
seen in Africa.
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
51
Messrs. Grout and Champion and Dr. Adams
arrived with their families, at Port Natal, on
the 21st of May, 1836. Dingaau gave them a
cordial reception, with permission to form a
station at his capital. Mr. Champion was
destined to the interior station at Ginani,
about midway between Natal and the chief's
residence ; Dr. Adams to Umlazi, 6 miles from
Port Natal ; and Mr. Grout to divide his la-
bors between the two. The king sent seven
girls and four boys to be taught by the mis-
sionaries. At the end of eight or nine months,
Mr, Champion had ten boys and twenty fe-
males under instruction, with a congregation
on the Sabbath of about 200. But the des-
potic power oflKngaan, who held his subjects
in abject slavery, was a serious obstacle in the
way. Dr. Adams had about fifty children in
his school, besides a morning class of adults.
The Sabbath school for adults contained 250,
and that for others, under the care of Mrs.
Adams, 250 to 300. She also instructed 30 or
40 females twice a week in sewing. The Sab-
bath congregation was about 600, assembled
in the shade of a great tree. Four boys were
taken as boarding scholars. The press had
been set up at Umlazi, and two or three ele-
mentary books printed for the schools. Mr.
Lindley commenced a station at the Illovo
Kiver, 15 miles north-west of Natal, and Messrs.
Venable and "Wilson, at Klangezoa, 30 miles
farther from Port Natal. Mr. Grout, with
the permission of the committee, returned to
the United States, bringing his own mother-
less child and that of Dr. Wilson.
The Dutch emigrants, after having destroyed
the power of Moselekatsi, proceeded toward
Port Natal. And, although Dingaan did not
claim jurisdiction over the territory, they
thought it prudent to gain his consent ; and
for this purpose, they sent their governor, Mr.
Ratief, with a number of attendants, to con-
sult him. Just before, some of Dingaan's cat-
tle had been carried off by a party of Mantalis,
disguised as boers. Dingaau required Ratief
to see the cattle returned before he would
treat with them ; and he accordingly pursued
the party of marauders, and recovered the cat-
tle, without bloodshed, and returned with them
to Dingaan's capital, with about 60 of his
men, who, three days after their arrival, were
all treacherously seized and put to death. At
the same time, a party of soldiers were sent to
attack the boers at their encampment ; by
whom, however, although surprised in the
night, they were repulsed. The farmers now
rallied their forces, and with the newly arrived
emigrants and whites and Hottentots at Port
Natal, prepared to attack the treacherous
chief. The missionaries were obliged to retire ;
and leaving Mr. Lindley at Port Natal to
watch the course of events, they sailed, with
their families, for Port Elizabeth, on the 30th
of March. By this time a righteous Provi-
dence had made a vagabond of Moselekatsi.
Four times he was attacked and plundered,
after the breaking up of the mission.
The Zulus were victorious in a pitched bat-
tle with the people residing at Natal, and on
the 23d of April, they invaded that place, and
Mr. Lindley left on board a vessel, and after
visiting Delagoa Bay, joined his family and
associates at Port Elizabeth, on the 22d of
June. The war continuing, Mr. Venable re-
moved with his wife to Cape Town, and de-
voted himself to evangelical labors amongst a
destitute elass of its inhabitants. Tl^ after-
wards returned to the United States, and Mr.
and Mrs Champion soon followed. The for-
mer, at their own request, received an honora-
ble discharge from the service of the Board.
The latter waited, with the hope of being able
to return ; but his wife's health had received
such a shock from the hardships she had en-
dured in Africa as to give little prospect of
that cherished hope ever being realized. After
laboring several years in the ministry in this
country he was attacked with a pulmonary
complaint ; and having visited Santa Cruz, in
the West Indies, with the hope of being bene-
fited, he entered into his rest, at the age of 31.
His life was one of rare consecration to the
cause of Christ. Possessing an ample fortune,
and the esteem of a most respectable circle of
friends, he left all and entered on the mission-
ary work ; and his fondest desire to the last,
was, to resume his missionary labors, and spend
his life among the degraded Zulus in South
Africa. His wife, after a few years of suffer-
ing, followed him to the grave, leaving a son
an orphan. Mr. Champion, after providing
for his family, left the residue of his estate to the
Board. Dr. Wilson returned to this country, and
afterwards joined the West African Mission.
The Colonial Government resolved to take
military possession of Port Natal, and the
boers gained a decided victory over Dingaan,
and took his capital, and drove him from his
dominions. Umpandi, the brother of Din-
gaan, to save his life, as was supposed, from
the jealous cruelty of his brother, withdrew
from the Zulu territory. Being joined by a
majority of his people, he was declared king,
defeated Dingaan in a bloody battle, and com-
pelled him to flee. The Dutch afterwards
chased Dingaan to a great distance.
Mr. Lindley and Dr. Adams with Mrs.
Adams, returned to Port Natal on the 12th
of June, 1839. Mrs. Lindley was detained till
autumn, by the illness of one of their children.
Meanwhile, the English withdrew their mili-
tary force, and left the boers and the natives
to themselves. Mr. Lindley immediately com-
menced his labors for the intellectual and
spiritual good of the emigrants.
Mr. Grout returned to Port Natal, from the
United States, with Mrs. Grout, June 30. 1840.
By this, time, a congregation of 500 had been
collected by Dr. Adams at Umlazi, with a
Bible class, and a Sabbath school of 200 chil-
52
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
dren. Mr. Grout accompanied a Dutch dele-
gation to the residence of Unipandi, and ob-
tained bis permission for the settlement of a
missionary in the Zulu country. Passing by
Ginaui. Avhere Messrs. Grout and Champion for-
merly resided, they found the buildings burnt,
and the place solitary. A station was after-
wards formed in the Zulu country, at a place
called Inkamjezi, M'hich means a star. Thirty-
seven villages were so near this place that
their iu^bitants could be collected for worship
on the^bbath. The attendance on preaching
at Inkanyezi was about 250, and at Umlazi
about 800 at two diflercnt places. Each sta-
tion had a school of about fifty pupils. Mr.
Adams had a school for girls once a week, and
a prayer meeting for adult females, both classes
being instructed in needlework. One of the
women gave evidence of having been born
again. The mission, up to this'date (1841)
had printed 5.5,380 pages, more than half of it
portions of the word of God.
Mr. Lindley, at his own request, received a
dismission from the service of the Board, in
order to accept the appointment of minister
of the Reformed Dutch church, with liberty
to resume his connection, should unexpected
changes render it expedient.
At length, the interest and confidence of the
people in the mission awakened the jealousy
of Umpandi ; and some of the people being
accused by those who wished to obtain his favor,
of forsaking him and attaching themselves to
Mr. Grout, sentence of death was passed upon
them, before they knew anything of the matter.
At daybreak, on the morning of July 25th,
1842, it was announced at Mr. Grout's window
that an army was upon the place. Not know-
ing whether it was for him, or the people, or for
both, he commended himself and his family to
God, before leaving his room. An attack was
made on the six places nearest the mission
house, upon those who had been most friendly
to the mission, with orders to put to death
every man, woman, and child, in three of them.
Mr. Grout immediately left the station, and ar-
rived at Umlazi with his family early in Au-
gust ; and about a month afterwards, he com-
menced a new station on the Umgeni river, six
miles north-east of Fort Natal, where he imme-
diately collected a congregation of 600 to 1000
attentive hearers. Meanwhile, the English,
after some conflict with the boers, again took
possession of Port Natal.
Since the overthrow of Dingaan, the Zulus,
weary of his intolerable cruelty, and the
scarcely less bloody proceedings of liis succes-
sor, had been escaping from their country and
taking refuge near Natal, until, including the
country about 100 miles back, they amounted
probably to 24,000.
In view of the repeated disasters which the
mission had experienced, and the discouraging
a.'^pect of things, as well as of the fact that
the Weslcyan Methodists were extending their
missions nearly to Port Natal, the Prudential
Committee decided that it was inexpedient
to continue the mission ; and on the 31st of
August, 1843, a letfer was sent, instructing
the brethren to bring it to a close. Previous
to this, the native settlements about Umlazi
and Umgeni had received great accessions of
emigrants from the Zulu country. The Colo-
nial Government, in creating a new colony at
Port Natal, had officially announced that no
laws should be allowed, recognizing any dis-
tinction on account of color ; that no attack
should be made upon any people without the
colony, by persons not acting under the direc-
tion of the Colonial Government ; and that
slavery should not be tolerati^ in any form.
A commissioner had also arrived, who declared
himself in favor of giving the natives land on
which they might form distinct settlements ;
of having one or more missionaries in each
district ; and of employing all the influence
of the Government to induce the people to
conform to the instructions of the missionaries.
Dr. Adams had also visited Umpandi, and a
request had been received from him that a
colonial agent and a missionary might be sent
to reside near him. About the middle of No-
vember, Mr. Grout had about 10,000 people
around him, within the extent of an ordinary
New-England parish, and a congregation of
500 to 1000 on the Sabbath, to whom he
preached in the open air, imder a scorching
African sun.
It was in these circumstances that the breth-
ren received the decision of the Committee.
They at once began making arrangements for
carrying it into effect. Hearing of a vessel to
sail from Cape Town for the United States,
Mr. Grout immediately proceeded to that
place. On his arrival there, a strpng desire
was manifested by the ministers of the Gospel
and others, that the mission should not be
given up. A public meeting was called
After hearing Mr. Grout's statement, addresses
were made by Dr. Philip, the American con-
sul, and others, and a collection of about §800
was raised to defray Mr. Grout's expenses, till
he could communicate with the Prudential
Committee. Dr. Philip wrote to the commit-
tee, declaring that, rather than have it given
up, he would visit America to beg for the mis-
sion. A joint letter was also written, to the
same effect, by all the ministers at Cape To'w-n.
The Committee, therefore, could not hesitate
to authorize the missionaries to resume their
labors at Natal.
Defbrc leaving Cape Town, Mr. Grout re-
ceived the most encouraging assurances from
the Governor of the Colony, together with the
appointment of government missionary, with
a salary of £150 a year, with the same offer to
Dr. Adams; and Mr. Lindley was appointed
preacher to the boers.
Within the limits of the new Colony there
were supposed to be 100,000 Zulus, besides
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
53
20,000 immediately around the two stations
occupied by Mr. Grout and Dr. Adams.
Dr. Adams was ordained as a minister of tlie
Gospel at Cape Town, on the 10th of Decem-
ber, 1844, the services being performed by
Drs. Philip and Adamson and Messrs. Faure
and Brown, clergymen of that place.
On returning to Port Natal, having, by
some means, lost the right of resuming his
station at Umgeni, Mr. Grout turned his atten-
tion to a site on the Umvote river, about forty
miles north of Port Natal, which he regarded
as a most eligible post, well watered and well
wooded, with good arable and pasture grounds.
Under date of October 15, Dr. Adams wrote
that they had about 100 under instruction in
the day schools ; and that there had never been
a time before, when the people, young and old,
manifested so much interest in learning.
On the 18th of April, 1846, Rev. James C.
Bryant, who had been for about five years
settled as pastor over a united and attached
people in Littleton, Mass., sailed for this mis-
sion, with his wife, and arrived August 15.
About the middle of January following, Mr.
and Mrs. Lewis Grout also arrived from the
United States. Mr. Alden Grout resigned his
appointment from the Government, (which
resignation was kindly accepted,) and resumed
his connection with the Board, in April, 1845.
Dr. Adams had previously declined the aj3-
pointment.
In 1846, five commissioners were appointed
by the Colonial Government, for locating the
natives, and adjusting their relations to the
emigrant farmers, and among them were
Messrs. Adams and Lindlcy; it being the
wish of the Lieutenant-Governor to effect the
safe and permanent settlement of all classes ;
to secure the country lying between the allot-
ments assigned to the natives, so as to impose
a restraint upon their migratory habits ; to
stimulate them to industry by establishing
markets ; and also to make provision for the
new villages that would spring up, and for the
internal management and defence of the whole
district.
In September, 1846, Mr. Bryant wrote from
Umlazi, that, within a few months previous,
there had been unusual seriousness among the
natives, and that a few gave good evidence of
piety. The converts, of their own accord, had
established a prayer meeting among them-
selves; and, in December, Mr. Grout wrote
from Umvoti, that the respect and attention
with which many listened to preaching, was
truly gratifying; and he was not without a
hope that a young married couple had been
truly converted. They were married in a
Christian way, pledging themselves to abandon
polygamy ; and very soon after commencing
house-keeping, they set up family prayer.
In pursuance of the plans of the Colonial
Government, five allotments of laud were made
to the natives, comprising about 2500 square
miles, with a population of about 50,000. The
missionaries of the Wesleyan Society agreed
to leave their American brethren in the undis-
turbed possession of the coast between the
Umtogela and Umzinkulu rivers, a distance
of 160 miles.
In 1847, five stations had been commenced,
and permanent buildings erected at two of
them. Dr. Adams had removed twelve miles
south-west, to be nearer the centre of his dis-
trict, and the name Umlazi had been transfer-
red to his new abode, the place he left being
called Umlazi River. Six were admitted to
the church at Umlazi, this year, as the result
of what seemed clearly to be a gracious visita-
tion of the Holy Spirit. There had also been
some seriousness at Umvoti, and a native
helper had there been admitted to the church.
Two or three boys, also, were regarded as
hopeful converts.
Speaking of an evening school, which he
had, of sixteen regular attendants, Mr. Grout
says : " They do not confine their study of
books to the particular hour appropriated to
their instruction, but seize also upon other
opportunities. Not unfrequently have I seen
tiiem reading or studying at intervals of labor,
or reading the Scriptures together, by the light
of a wood fire in the evening. I have seen the
same young men and boys, eight or ten in num-
ber, singing their morning and evening hymn
of praise to God in their own tongue ; and I
learn that one of their number is in the habit
of leading the rest in prayer at these times."
Mr. and Mrs. Ireland arrived at Port Natal
on the 13th of February, 1848, and were fol-
lowed soon after by Rev. Andrew Abraham,
Rev. Hyman A. Wilder, and Rev. Joseph
Tyler, with their wives. At this period, free
schools had been established at each of the
stations. A few of the pupils could read all
the books which the mission had printed.
Among the pupils were several pious young
men, who, it was hoped, would become future
helpers in the missionary work. At Umlazi,
most of the congregation had committed to
memory the Catechism, the Commandments,
and many passages of Scripture. The num-
bers that assembled at the different stations
for public worship varied from 50 to 1000,
who listened with great apparent interest, and
behaved with decorum during all the services.
This disposition to assemble and listen to
preaching is an interesting feature of the mis-
sion, and one that promises much for its suc-
cess. Evidences of the special presence of the
Holy Spirit were manifested at all the differ-
ent stations, this year, and twenty-four were
received into the several chiu-ches. Some op-
position had been manifested, but it was short-
lived.. At the close of 1848, which seems to
be a later date, 15 members had been added
to the church at Umlazi and 16 at Umvoti.
Prayer-meetings had been sustained at all the
stations, and the native converts took jwrt in
64:
AFRICA, SOUTHEEN.
them with a good degree of readiness and pro-
priety. And Mrs. Grout and Mrs. Adams
held weekly prayer-meetings with the females.
The monthly concert was sustained at Umvoti
and Umlazi, and was the most spirited meeting
of all. All the male members took-part in it
with delight and to edification. About fifteen
dollars had been contributed at Umvoti, to
support a native missionary among their des-
titute countrymen, and about seventeen dollars
at Umlazi.
December 23, 1850, Mr. Bryant was called
to his rest. He was an excellent missionary,
and the close of his course was eminently in
keeping with his life. Rev. Jacob Ludwig
Dohue, a native of Germany, who went to
South Africa in 1836, in connection with the
Berlin Missionary Society, was, at his request,
and the strong recommendation of the breth-
ren of the mission, appointed by the Board ;
and in the year 1851, the mission was rein-
forced by Rev. Seth B. Stone and Rev. Wil-
liam Melien, with their wives. At the close
of 1850, there were churches at nine of the
eleven stations, containing 123 members, 36
of whom were received during the year. Re-
gular preaching was maintained at 23 places.
Three free schools, taught by pious natives,
contained 89 pupils. The printing press was
in operation, and 377,100 pages had been
printed. The average population connected
with each station was about 3000.
The distance between the extreme stations
is about one hundred and fifty miles. The
nearest English missionary station is 150 miles
from the most southerly station, at Umtwa-
Inmi.
Dr. Adams died on the IGth of September,
1851, in the midst of his usefulness. His end
was peace.
Evidences of an incipient civilization are
making their appearance at the older stations.
At Umvoti, for instance, nearly eighty persons,
men, women, and children, come decently clad
to the Sabbath worship, and some persons are
usually clad while at work during the week.
Three families live in civilized-looking houses,
and some seven or eight natives are erecting
similar habitations. These arc substituting
iron pots for cooking, in place of the old
earthen ; and are using spades, axes, saws, and
other kindred instruments of husbandry and the
arts. One native has procured a cart and oxen,
atid thus takes produce to the market. House-
hold furniture is naturally found in the im-
proved houses, and clothing to correspond, and
some have procured writing materials, and
learned how to use them.
The following table will show the state of
the mission at the close of the year 1851, and
the statistics of the following 3'ear, which are
not so full, will not materially vary the re-
sult :
i
s
(
1
c
.2
-)
-1^
£
t?
iz
Xi
3
«
ci
^
F-
ZULU MISSION.
8
S
<
s
o
i
o
a
a
s
(/I
5
1
2
<j
i
1
<
1
t
3
'a
:3
3
1
e
■1
1
s
s
1
125
1
i
1.
e
1
1
1
"3
Native Assistants
.
0
3
0
0
0
0
1
3
0
0
0
0
7
Out-stations
-
2
2
1
2
7
Sabbath Preaching Places for Missionaries
.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
]
1
1
1
12
Week-day Preaching Places ...
-
1
*
1
9
4
Average Sabljath Congregation at the Stations
38
150
30
40
30
GO
50
150
60
55
63
75
800
Schools
.
1
1
1
1
]
2
1
1
1
1
1
12
Male Pupils
-
3
C
12
5
23
10
9
10
10
Female Pupils
.
17
1
8
2
23
5
1
4
1
Total
.
8
20
7
20
7
46
30
15
10
14
11
188
Christian Marriages ....
.
2
4
1
2
1
3
2
15
Children Baptized
.
3
2
3
7
i
16
Churches
-
1
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
0
Members received during the year
.
13
10
1
8
8
9
1
50
Suspended
-
1
1
Excommunicated
.
1
1
Died - -
.
1
1
Male Members in good standing
.
29
8
4
5
14
IS
11
1
1
91
Female do. do.
.
18
6
G
11
26
h
75
■NN'hoIe number of Church Members -
.
47
14
4
11
25
44
19
1
1
1G6
Candidates for admission
-
7
3
3
3
5
4
2
1
28
* Mr. Dobne makes it a rule to go rrom kraal to kraal daily, viAiting and preaching to the people.
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
65
Eight churches have been organized in this
mission, the largest of which has fifty-five
members, and the smallest four. The gospel
is preached on the Sabbath, and at other times,
at each of the twelve stations, and with more
or less regularity at seven out-stations, either
on the Sabbath or during the week. Sabbath
schools also are sustained, and weekly meetings
for prayer and religious instruction. Eighteen
persons were received into the churches during
the year 1852. The report of the mission
speaks also of twenty-five other cases regarded
as " hopeful." " Such is the beginning of
things. The work moves on as yet slowly.
Still the light is spreading — knowledge is in-
creasing. The fallow ground is being broken
up, and the seed is falling, some by the way-
side, some on stony ground, some among
thorns, and some on good ground, as in other
parts of the world. The harvest is not yet ;
but it will surely come. The number of per-
sons constituting the Sabbath congregations
varies from thirty or forty up to two hundred."
In the report of his station for 1852, Mr.
Liudley remarks :
"With several of my church members, I
continue, as I ever have been, well pleased.
With most, I see no cause to find serious fault ;
yet my observation and experience, dvu-iug the
past year, have tended to weaken my confi-
dence in the religious professions of this people.
They do not give such evidence as I could wish
of a thorough change of heart. And this ques-
tion, always a difficult one, has now become
painful : ' How much allowance ought to be
made for imperfection in the Christian charac-
ter of those who have barely, and but lately,
emerged from the depths of a truly degrading
heathenism ? ' "
Rhenish 31issionary Society. — In the simmier
of 1829, this society sent to South Africa
four graduates of their Mission Seminary, at
Barmen. They sailed in company with Dr.
Philip and the missionaries of the Paris
Society. Soon after their arrival, two of
them, Messrs. Liickhoff and Zahn, entered
into the service of two local associations at
Stellenbosch and Tulbagh ; but afterwards
these associations transferred their chapels and
other buildings to the Ehenish society. The
other two proceeded with Dr. Philip farther
into the interior, and purchased the property
of a boer, near Clanwilliam, which they named
Wupperthal. This estate contained 60,000
acres of land, on which they established a mis-
sion colony. Whoever promised to sulmiit to
its regulations received a piece of laud, and
aid in the erection of a dwelling house. He
was required to clothe himself, shun theft and
drunkenness, remain with his family, and yield
obedience to the missionaries. Thus s^x^edily
arose the flourishing African Wupperthal,
which, crowned with beautiful gardens, looks
like a village in Germany. The new settlers
were instructed in all sorts of trades ; and the
oldest colonists already enjoy consideraijie pros-
perity. Mr. Zahn established a similar colony
in 1844, in the neighborhood of Kokfontein,
where he bought 954 acres for the sura of
^3 500, on the following plan : Each family
receives a piece of land for a house and garden,
for which he pays a rent of 812. The rent
pays the interest on the money which Mr.
Zahn borrowed for the purpose, in Cape Tov/n,
and the surplus is applied to the liquidation of
the principal ; and when the property becomes
free, these families will own their places.
The Dutch boers call these colonies " Insti-
tutes," and are very hostile to them, because
they interfere with their designs of oppressing
the natives. Artisans, some of whom are sent
out by the society, settle in these colonics, and
instruct the natives in the various handicraft
occupations. The Institute of Wupperthal
maintains itself and requires no assistance
from home. A strict discipline is kept up,
and every one exerts himself to earn a living,
and to leave off the former habits of filth and
theft. But some of the German colonists, who
have settled among them, have set them a bad
example, and the society have determined to
send no more such colonists in future.
In 1830, three more missionaries were sent
from Barmen, and 2 new stations were founded.
One of them, called Ebenezer, at the mouth of
Elephant River, was also an Institute. The
other was at Worcester. The station at l!^be-
nezor, being dependent for its fertility upon
the overflow of the river, often sufiers severely
from drought, as the river sometimes does not
overflow for six or seven years. There are
300 or 400 inhabitants at this station, most of
whom are baptized. On account of its drought,
this station would have been given uj), but for
the fact that it furnishes an important starting
point for the intercourse with the territories of
Namaqua and Damara. The society have also
stations at Sawn, near Tulbagh and ^t Korn-
maggas, in the north-west corner of the col-
ony.
At all the stations, buildings for the schools,
and churches, and dwelling-houses for the mis-
sionaries, have been erected ; and everywhere
a formal living in community has been organ-
ized ; that is, in every missionary community
there are chosen, from among the baptized na-
tives, elders or presbyters who form the church
session to the missionary, and who maintain
discipline over the community. Clerks and
church officers are chosen, native assistants are
educated, who especially give their aid in the
schools. Missionary associations are establish-
ed ; and the people, though nearly all very
poor, contribute according to their ability to
the support of their ministers. The preaching
of the gospel has nowhere encountered systema-
tic opposition from the natives themselves ; and
the government has shown itself, for the most
part, VC17 favorable to the operations of the
missionaries. But the boers are bitter foes of
50
AFRICA. SOUTHERN.
the missionaries, because they rescue the ne-
groes from their cruel oppressors.
Until the year 1840, the missionaries of the
society in Africa had not advanced farther
to the north than Ebenezer. Near to the
boundary of Kommaggas, Mr. Schmelen, an
esteemed German missionary, was stationed, in
connection with the London Missionary So-
ciety. At an earlier jieriod he had been in
Namaqualand, on the other side of the Orange
River, and he was now worn out with age.
The London Missionary Society declined to
send him any assistants, because they had given
up the western coasts of South Africa, to be
occupied by the Rhenish Society ; thus
Schmelen turned to this society, and prayed
for fellow-laborers. The first brother sent him
was Kleinschmidt, who went out to him in
the year 1840 ; and in the following year, five
others went.
In the year 1842, three of the brethren re-
moved into Great Namaqualand, and as far as
the tropic of Capricorn, where the boundaries
of Negro4and or Damara close, opposite to the
territory of the Yellow Namaquas. The next
year they were followed by two other missiona-
ries into Little Namaqualand ; and when, in
1848, the old Schmelen died, Kommaggas con-
tinued to be occupied by one of the society's
missionaries. They have to the south of the
Orange River, in Little Namaqua, three sta-
tions, Kommaggas, Kokfoutein, and Pella,
with several out-stations. In these are placed
three missionaries, with several native assist-
ants. They carry on their labors among some
two thousand Namaquas, who are scattered
over many hundred miles of these deserts,
and, besides their Namaqua tongue, for the
most part understand also the .Dutch. Aljout
three hundred had been baptized in 1850,
and the desire to obtain baptism Avas universal.
The people are poor and.filtliy ; but little grain
is gro^vn ; and for cattle little grass can be
found. The whole country is now English ter-
ritory ; and thus it is sure to happen that the
rapacious boers will take from these poor people
their last wells and their fertile strips of land.
Of the three brethren who proceeded into
Great Namaqualand, two advanced to where
the Zwakop flows into AVhale-bay, and forms
the northern boundary of Namaqualand. The
third remained in the heart of the country,
and built himself a house and a cluu-ch near a
beautiful fountain, and called the place Betha-
ny. From this centi-e he commenced his labors
all round, in a wide circle, which is larger than
all Irdancl. But very few ])eople reside in
these districts, only some three thousand ; who,
in order to find food fur their small cattle, travel
incessantly from one pastm-age to another, keeji
as long a.s po.ssible by their teachers in Betliany,
but must always soon pull down their huts, u\
order to set them uj) again, for a short time, in
more suitable localities. 'J'he missionary, too,
travels the greater part of the year, an<l visits
all the separate parties in the desert, remains
with each a few weeks or months, teaches and
administers the sacraments, and then returns
again to the centre at Bethany. "With each
troop is a native assistant, who carries on the
work of instruction in the absence of the mis-
sionary. About 1000 were baptized in 1850, of
whom, probably, the half partake of the Lord's
Supper. The missionaries usually employ an in-
terpreter, as the pronunciation of the Nama-
qua dialect is too difficult. But they have
already succeeded in fixing the language by
writing, and, besides a catechism, they have
translated the Gospel of Luke into that tongue ;
and by the assistance of the British and For-
eign Bible Society have had it printed at the
Cape, and distributed among the people. The
large circuit of the desert of Great Namaqua-
land is divided into two parts ; and a second
missionary has been sent.
The two missionaries who proceeded in the
year 1842, to the northern boundaries of Nama-
qualand, met with a very friendly reception
from Jouker, the Namaqua chief of that dis-
trict, who had dwelt before in Little Nama-
qualand. and had there been baptized. They
were the means of suppressing the desolating
warfare which had hitherto been waged be-
tween the Namaquas and the Damaras, and of
establishing peace. Upon this they thought
that the door was opened to them to visit the
populous tribes that live to the north, towards
the Niger ; but disputes in their own neigh-
borhood prevented all extension of missionary
undertakings ; and, on account of them, the
locality was abandoned to the AVesleyaus, who
claimed prior occupancy. But Jonker with
his people have relapsed into the abominations
of heathenism; and they have become the
worst robbers and murderers, so that the mis-
sionaries in that district have no more danger-
ous foe than that Jonker, who formerly sat at
their feet. Directly after the missionaries
abandoned Jonker's locality, two brethren
were sent out to their aid in 1845. They now
divided themselves ; two went fonvard into
Damaraland, and one established at Whale-bay
the station of Scheppuuinsdorf, of the highest
importance for intercourse by sea ; and one,
somewhat farther to the south, and towards
the interior, founded the flourishing Rehoboth,
at some hot springs which are pretty numerous
in that district, and the country round about
is rather fertile. The Namaqua tribe, which
has settled there to the number of 1800 souls,
is not compelled, by the want of food for their
cattle, to disi)erse at every instant ; but reside
so constantly that the chief and several of his
principal retainers have begun to build lor
themselves stone houses near the beautiful
church and school, a thing hitherto unlu'ard of
in Namaqualand. The congregation numbers
four hundred bai)tized pei-sonss and about one
luu:dred participants of the Lord's Siq)per ;
and though it has existed only for a short time,
AFRICA, SOUTHERN.
57
it is one of the most prosperous of the mission-
ary communities. The two elders, the four
deacons and deaconesses, discharge their offices
in an exemplary manner ; public worship is
very regularly attended ; a strict discipline is
administered. Amidst the tumults of war,
always raging around, Rehoboth has hitherto
been preserved as a community of peace. A
missionary association has also been formed.
The two missionaries who resolved to pene-
trate northwards into Damaraland, and to
whom lately two other brethren have gone,
have had to struggle with very great difficul-
ties among the rude and savage negro tribes.
Without an interpreter and without any assist-
ance, they had to master a language to which
they were perfect strangers, and which, from
the hoarse throats of the people, sounds unin-
telligible in the highest degree, and appears to
be extremely copious in inflections. It would
seem that the Damara language is allied to
that of the Kaffres. The missionaries have,
with unspeakable pains and labor, reached
that point, that they can both preach in the
language, and they have printed some little
books in it. At first they kept together at
one station ; but they have now three separate
stations, and will probably extend them to a
wider circle, as soon as the travels undertaken
to explore the country beyond Whale-bay to-
wards Lake Ngami have opened paths into
the interior. In Damaraland, though the mis-
sionaries cannot yet speak of the fruits of their
labors, they can speak of many lovely buds
and blossoms.
This mission has planted an offshoot, far
into the interior of the country. On the
northern boundary of the Cape colony, not far
from the middle, lie the Karroo mountains, on
one extremity of which live a tribe of Bastards,
on the other a tribe of Kaffres, that have been
separated from their kindred tribes, and have
wandered up and down for many years. Among
both tribes a mission has been commenced ;
in 1845, among the Bastards (600), of whom
150 have been baptized ; in 1847, among
the Kaffres (700), of whom already 100 are
baptized. The two stations are called Aman-
delboom and Schietfontein. They would all
have the prospect of pleasing prosperity, if
the hostile Dutch boers did not penetrate to
them, with an intention to drive out the tribes,
and to seize upon their fine pasture lands for
their own herds.
In 1854, the mission was in a prosperous
condition. Of its seventeen stations, ten are
within the limits of the colony, four among
the Namaquas, and three among the Hereros.
Scheppmansdorf, the most northerly of the
Namaqua stations, is near "^Tialefish Bay.
New Barmen lies about two hundred miles
north-east from Scheppmansdorf. Of the other
two Herero stations, Otjimbingue is situated
five days' journey west of Xew Barmen, and
Schmelen's Expectation is one day east of the
same place. The following table, though im-
perfect, will give a pretty correct idea of the
condition of the different stations :
•d
a
3 bi
2-9
C fl
1 2
Stations. .
a
2
a p,
Us
a
6
3
(2
P. a,
S5
Stellenbosh - -
1830
2400
900
292
Sarepta - - - -
Worcester - - -
1843
1832
400
2000
145
303
72
120
Tulbagh ... -
1830
1000
190
75
Saron - . - -
1846
500
109
58
Ebenezer - - -
1834
300
158
60
Wuppcrthal - -
Amandelboom - -
1830
1845
400
800
217
182
117
48
Schietfontein - -
1847
800
191
88
Kommaggas
1829
400
200
72
Richtersfeld - -
1843
400
107
41
Steinkopf - - -
1821
600
250
60
Bella
1849
400
?
?
Bethany ...
Beersheba - - -
1814
1842
300
600
240
462
70
190
Rehoboth ...
1845
900
430
160
Kam - - . .
1842
400
209
90
Scheppmansdorf -
New Barmen
1846
1848
300
500
47
0
30
3
Otjimbingue - -
1849
200
0
1
13000
4,340
1,647
Beiiiti 3Iissionanj Society. — This society
commenced operations in South Africa in
1833. One of the stations first occupied by
its missionaries was Beaufort. Some of them
went among the Corannas and Kaffres. Since
1838, they have had stations at Cape Town
and Zoar. Its stations in 1847 were, Zoar,
Bethel, Itembia, Emmaus, Bethany, and Priel.
The number of its missionaries is 14 ; of bap-
tized persons, 907 ; of scholars, 418.
Nonvegian Protestant 3Iissionarij Society. —
This society have recently commenced a mis-
sion near Port Natal, where they have sent
four missionaries ; but we have no particulars
concerning their operations.
The following table presents a general sum-
mary of missionary operations in Southern
Africa. The United Brethren and the Wes-
leyans do not distinguish, in their reports, be-
tween ordained missionaries and assistants. In
several otlier respects, the returns are wanting,
leaving the table incomplete ; but, in the most
important particulars, they are so nearly full
as to give a fair impression of the work. The
missionaries of the Society for Propagating the
Gospel in Foreign Parts are chiefly employed
in ministering to the established churches in
the colony, and the results of their labors are
not reported.
58
AFRICA, WESTERN.
§
25
o
6
1^5
Missionaries.
Assistants.
1
p.
n
S3
2
3
t3
.2
c
C3
■g
B
a
5
1
1
Societies.
H
= 2
o
3 S
6
1
c
a
3
c o
Moravians,
8
29
8
1882
1733
6935
London Missionary Soc,
Scotch Missions,
«8
10
32
8
3
9
4301
109
60
3483
French Protest. Missions,
11
14
1
1183
310
312
American Board,
12
12
1
9
166
12
188
28
Wesleyan Society,
Gospel Propagation Soc,
Rhenish Miss. Society,
Norwegian Miss. Society,
42
20
39
50
21
6
154
G
646
10
4970
1647
7479
41,790
13,000
Berlin Miss. Society,
6
14
907
■ 418
Total,
137
225
154
10
672
14,258
11,878
62,037
AFRICA, WESTERN :* That part of the
continent of Africa, which lies along the At-
lantic ocean, from the Southern })ordcrs of the
Great Desert of Sahara, in latitude 16° or 17°
north, to Cape Negro, near the river Nourse,
or tlie Southern l)oundary of Benguela, in
about the same latitude South. It varies in
width, from 200 to 350 miles, and bears about
the same geographical relation to the continent
of Africa, that the Atlantic States do to North
America. The Kong Mountains form the
eastern boundary of the northern half of West
Africa, and the Sierra del Crystal mountains
the eastern boundary of the Southern half
The former take their rise about 200 miles
east of the Gulf of Benin, and run in a north-
westerly direction, keeping nearly parallel to
the sea-coast, and not more than 200 miles dis-
tant, until they reach the latitude of Sierra
Leone, where they make an immense sweep
into the interior, inclining to tho north-cast,
nntil they lo.se themselves in the sands of the
Desert 700 or 800 miles from the sea-coast, and
more than 1500 miles iVom their starting point.
The latter rise nearer to the sea-coast, and for
the first hundred miles are in sight of it ; after
which, they bear off in a southerly direction,
for 200 miles, and then resume a parallel line
to the sea-coast, till their termination, in the
latitude of Benguela, 1000 or 1200 miles from
the place of beginning.
The three grand divisions of Western Africa,
are Senegambia, Upper or Northern Guinea,
and Southern Guinea or Southern Ethiopia.
The finst of these extends from tlic southern
• For tlie principal portion of the introductory part of this
article, embracing the (?eopraphy of the country and tho
character and tlio condition of tlie people, the author is
indebted to a work on Western Africa, in preparation for
the press, by Kev. John Lcighton Wilson, the manuscript
of which was kindly loaned for tho purpose by tho writer ;
the chapters on these subjects liaving been copied, with
Bome slinht abridgment, but in many parts, nearly verba-
tim . Tlie paragraph on moral amdUwn xi condensed from
a printed pamphlet by tho same writer.
borders of Sahara to Cape Verga, 10° north
latitude, reaching inward 700 miles. The
second extends from Cape Verga to the Cam-
eroon mountains, in the Gulf of Benin, a dis-
tance, on the coast, of more than 1500 miles,
but not more than 250 miles wide. The third
extends from the Cameroon mountains, in 4°
north latitude, to Benguela.
The physical aspect of the country presents
some of the richest and most exuberant nat-
ural scenery in the world. In the vicinity of
Sierra Leone, Cape Mount, and Cape Messu-
rado, the eye rests upon bold headlands and
high promontories, enveloped in the richest
tropical verdure. In the region of Cape Pal-
mas, there are extended plains, somewhat un-
dulated, and beautified with almost every vari-
ety of the palm and palmetto. On the Derwin
coast, the country rises to high table land, of
the richest aspect, and of immense extent.
The Gold Coast presents hills and dales of
almost every conceivable form and variety.
And, in the neighborhood of Fernando Po and
the Cameroons, mountain scenery presents it-
self of exceeding beauty and surpassing mag-
nificence.
The western coasts of Africa are watered by
four great and noble rivers ; the Senegal and
Gambia in Senegambia, the Niger in Northern
Guinea, and the Congo in Southern Guinea ;
besides which, are several small rivers and
,streams, which run into the Gulf of ({uinoa.
'J'he discharge of the rivers and small streams
Ls frequently obstructed by the heavy swells
from the open ocean, and form themselves into
back waters or lagoons, in consequence of
the exposed condition of the sca-coa'^t. These
lagoons are separated from the ocean by a
narrow sand bank, thrown uj) by the outer
swell. They are sometimes 200 or 300 miles
long, but generally only a few foet deej), and
seldom more thuu a quarter or half a mile wide.
They furnish great facilities of intercourse and
AFRICA, WESTERN.
69
commerce to the maritime tribes, but arc too
shallow for ordinary shipping. The coast of
Africa is greatly wanting in good bays and
harbors.
The extent of territory belonging to the
English colony at Sierra Leone, is about 3000
miles. The British possess also several small
settlements on the coast of Guinea, viz.. Cape
Coast Castle, Succondee, Dix Cove, Annamahoe,
Akra and Lagos. The town of Bonny is sit-
uated at the mouth of the river Niger, and has
been a great mart ibr the slave trade. The
Islands of Ascension and St. Helena belong
to Great Britain ; the Madeira and Cape De
Verde Islands, to the Portuguese. The Por-
tuguese have also formed settlements below
the Niger, on the coasts of Congo, Loangho
and Benguela.
Climate. — The heat is seldom oppressive on
the sea-coast. Alternate land and sea-breezes
blow fresh every day. The mercury seldom
rises to 90°, and usually ranges between 74 and
84°. lu-doors, the air is seldom opi^ressive.
During the Hannatton winds, the mornings
are cool, and the wind blows very strongly.
On the coast of Senegambia the heat is op-
pressive, but not so on the coast of Guinea.
In the interior, beyond the reach of the land
and sea breezes, the climate no doubt would
be oppressive.
Inluib Hants. — The inhabitants of Western
Africa are divided into three great families,
corresponding with the three grand geograph-
ical divisions. Although these families belong
to one race, yet there are marked and essential
differences between them.
lu Senegambia there are three leading fami-
lies, known as the Jalofs, Mandingoes, and
Foulahs. By many it is doubted whether either
of these are pure negroes. The Foulahs are
evidently a mixed race. They are Mohamme-
dans, while the inhabitants of Northern and
Southern Guinea are essentially Pagan.
Northern Guinea is inhabited by the Nigri-
tian family, so called from their supposed de-
scent from the great negro families living in
the valley of the Niger. They are here sub-
divided into six or seven families.
Southern Guinea is inhabited by the Nilotic
family, so called from their supposed descent
from the ancieut nations of the Nile. They are
spread over the whole of the south half of the
continent. They differ in many respects from
the inhabitants of Upper Guinea. They are not
so robust and energetic as the Nigritian race.
Their forms are more slender, their features
are better, and they are characterized by more
shrewdness and pliancy of character.
Government. — There are no extended politi-
cal organizations in Western Africa, excepting
the kingdoms of Ashantee and Dahomey, and
neither of these is larger or more powerful
than the second-rate kingdoms of Europe.
As a general thing, the people live together
in small independent communities, varying in
population from 1000 to 20,000. The form
of government, nominally, is monarchy, but
in reality, it is more patriarchal than mon-
archical.
Social Condition. — Though greatly debased
by their heathenism, yet the inhabitants of
Western Africa are not to be ranked among
the lowest of the human race. They have
fixed habitations ; they cultivate the soil, have
herds of domestic animals ; and show as much
foresight as most other people in providing for
their future wants. They have made consid-
erable ])roficieucy in most of the mechanic
arts, and evince a decided taste and capacity
for commercial pursuits. They have no writ-
ten literature, (excepting the Mohammedans
among tlicm ; ) but they have abundance of
unwritten lore, in the form of fables, allego-
ries, traditions, and proverbial sayings, in
which are displayed no small share of close
observation, lively imagination, and extraordi-
nary shrewdness of character.
3Ioral Conf?/</o».- ^Selfishness, the control-
ling principle of the heathen heart, has full
sway here. The principles of justice, the
rights of individuals, the rules of decency, the
voice of humanity, the ties of kindred and
friendship, are trampled under foot. Theft,
falsehood, fraud, deceit, duplicity, injustice,
and opi^ression, are favorite agents and con-
stant companions. Intemperance, licentious-
ness, gluttony and debauchery furnish the
aliment upon which it feeds. It is almost
impossible, says Mr. Wilson, to say what vice
is preeminent among these degraded natives.
Falsehood is universal. No man speaks the
truth, who can find a motive for telling a lie.
Theft, fraud, and intemperance, are considered
as praiseworthy acts. Chastity is an idea for
which they have no word in their language,
and of which they can scarcely form a concep-
tion. Envy, jealousy, and revenge, enthrone
themselves in every heart, and wield their
triple sceptre with uncontrolled power. Hence,
there can be no confidence between man and
man, no sympathy of interests, — in fact, no
such thing as society. As might be expected,
in such a state, their intellectual faculties are
obtuse and circumscribed, almost beyond con-
ception. Beyond a few local associations, the
ideas of the most intelligent native on the
coast of Africa are not one particle above the
speculations of a child in this country of two
or three years of age. And over such minds,
superstition reigns with absolute sway. Al-
though the African is by nature preeminently
social, yet polygamy, witchcraft, and the slave
trade, together with the general influence of
heathenism, render him an entire stranger to
social happiness. Even cannibalism prevails
to some extent, in connection with punishment
for witchcraft. A man's importance in so-
ciety is regulated by the number of his wives ;
but between them and himself, there exists no
aff'ection. The African woman detests her
60
AFRICA, WESTERN.
husband above all others, and strifes, je*ous-
iee, and endless bickerings, prevail among the
women of his household. The belief in witch-
craft sunders all the ties of nature, brings
fatal suspicion upon the nearest relatives, and
fills the minds of all with a fearful sense of
insecurity. Their persons, houses, and almost
every article of property, must be guarded by
fetishes, and a man must be careful what jjath
he walks, whose house he enters, on what stool
he Bits, and what he touches. The cere-
mony of " taking off the fetish " must be per-
formed before a particle of food or drink is
tasted. The hair of the head, and the parings
of the nails, are concealed with studied care ;
and yet, notwithstanding these and a thousand
other expedients, yet more silly and stupid,
these people enjoy no sense of security, but
are wretched and miserable among themselves,
and know not where to turn for relief.
Religious Belief, and Superstitiotis Customs
arid Traditions. — It has been found very diffi-
cult to ascertain or describe the religious views
of the Pagan tribes of Africa, owing partly
to their indefiniteness, and partly to their habits
of concealment in relation to what might ex-
pose them to ridicule. The belief in One
Great Supreme Being, the Creator and Up-
holder of all things, Mr. Wilson thinks is uni-
versal. This conviction stands out in every
man's creed ; so much so, that any theory of
Atheism would strike them as absurd and in-
defensible. Their conceptions of the character
and attributes of God, however, are extremely
low. They think of his power over the natural
world as great and irresistible ; but they have
no just ideas of his moral purity ; but ascribe
to him motives and feelings utterly at variance
with his true character. The tribes along the
coast have a name for Jehovah, and most of
them, two or more, signiflcant of his character
as Creator, Preserver, and Benefactor. The
general impression, however, is, that He exer-
cises very little agency in the government of
the world, feeling too little interest in the
affairs of men, or being too far off, to concern
himself with what is transpiring upon earth.
On some great occasions, his name is invoked,
and in the Grebo country he is called upon
three times, in a loud voice, to witness any very
solemn transaction, ai? the establishment of
peace after war, the ratification of some great
treaty, or other measures of national import-
ance. The same thing is done by an indivi-
dual when he is about to drink the " red wood
ordeal." Whether the practice of calling upon
God three times, about which they are very
particular, lia.s any reference to the Trinity is
matter of conjecture ; but it is not improbable
that it may have been handed down l>y tradi-
tion, or borrowed from Christianity.
The belief in a futnre^state of existence is
also general ; but they have no very definite or
consistent vicw.s as to what that state is.
Some believe in transmigration, and hence
animals in certain localities, as the monkeys
about Fishtown, are regarded as sacred, be-
cause they are suj^posed to be animated by the
spirits of their deceased friends. The soul of
one man is supposed to have been revived in
another, especially when there is any marked
resemblance between the two. TheMpongwe
people suppose there is a place where the spi-
rits of the dead will be ultimately collected ;
and the Grebos connect with it the idea of an
ordeal that must be passed through in going
to that place, which may, perhaps, have been
derived from the Popish doctrine of Purgatory,
taught by the Portuguese missionaries, who
visited this coast in the IGth and 17th centu-
ries. But at present, the spirits of the dead
are supposed to mingle freely with the living ;
hence their dreams and sudden impressions
upon their minds are regarded as visitations
from the dead ; and any hints or admonitions
received from such sources will be more readOy
followed than the dictates of reason and com-
mon sense. Sometimes the living are repri-
manded by the dead for their remissness in
duty, and not un frequently the streets and
precincts of the largest towns are swept and
thoroughly cleansed, in obedience to some such
hint from the dead.
The idea of a future state of rewards and
punishments is not clearly developed ; but a
separate burying place is kept for atrocious
criniinals, and there is a repugnance felt to
mingling with the notoriously wicked and
cruel.
Fetishism and Devil-worship are the charac-
teristic and leading forms of religion of the
Pagan tribes of all Africa. The'two things
are entirely distinct in themselves ; bnt they
run together at so many points, and have been
so much confounded by those who have written
on the subject, that it is by no means an easy
task to set them in their separate and true
light. A Fetish, strictly speaking, is little
less than a charm, amulet, or talisman, worn
about the body, or suspended from some part
of the dwelling, and is intended either to
guard the owner from some apprehended evil,
or to secure for him some coveted good. On
some parts of the coast it is called a grigri,
(greegree.) at other places, a juju, ( jewjew.)
and others still, afdixh, all implying the same
thing. It may bo a piece of' wood, in the
form of an ornament, the horn of a goat or
sheep, a piece of metal or ivory, or any thing
else that has been consecrated by one of the
priests. There are several classes of these fe-
tishes, for which they have separate names:
those worn about their persons ; such as arc
suspended over the doors, and in different ])arts
of their dwellings, corresponding somewhat to
the penatcs of the ancient Koinans : such as
may be found along their hJLihways. to])rotcct
their farms and fruit trees from dejjredation ;
such as are used in war ; and finally, such as
belong to the town and are kept in a house at
AFRICA, WESTERN.
61
the entrance of tlie village, or at the residence
of the chief.
The fetishes are supposed to possess extra-
ordinary and varied powers. They preserve
the life and health of one who uses them, and
guard not only from visible evils, but from the
secret machinations of witchcraft, so much
dreaded by the simple-minded African. The
fetish is also supposed to be able to protect itself
against violence ; which power the superstitious
people are afraid to test. If the fetish fails, in a
given instance, it only proves that this particu-
lar one has no eflicacy, and it is thrown away for
a better one ; but every one is considered effec-
tive till experience has proved the contrary.
And, if nine out of ten fail, the success of the one
is balanced against the failure of the nine, and
the successful one is the more valued. They talk
to their fetishes, try to stir them up to action m
great emergencies, pour rum upon them, and act
as if they supposed they possessed life and intel-
lio-ence : but in no other sense can their fetishes
be considered objects of religious worship. As
a general thing, they are regarded as inanimate
objects, without intelligence, but nevertheless,
exercising a silent mysterious influence, either
for their protection and preservation, or to the
injury of their fellow men. They regard this
as an established fact ; and think it as easy to
see the connection between the fetish and the
result, as between poison taken into the stom-
ach and death that follows. _
The practice of wearing and using fetishes
is universal. They may be seen along every
path, at the gate of every village, over the
door of every house, and around the neck of
every one. The young, especially those _ who
have had some intercourse with the civilized
world, show some skepticism on the subject ;
but the older people, especially when they be-
come contemplative, and feel the infirmities of
age, cling to them with greater tenacity. The
people, however, have less feeling of security
than if they had none of these charms ; and
they never rely upon them in any very trying
or dangerous emergency. Indeed, when flying
from imminent danger, they will tear off their
fetishes and throw them away, to relieve them-
selves of the incumbrance.
Fetishes are extensively employed to protect
property, and to punish offenders. They are
made fast to fruit trees, set upon the borders of
a farm, or tied around the neck of a goat ; by
which it is supposed that trespassers will be
punished. And so, when any great national
law has been adopted, a fetish is made, to
punish the offender. But this is more fre-
quently done, when they are too feeble to take
the execution of the law into their own hands.
The use of fetishes is intimately connected
with the belief in witchcraft.
Devil-worship.— T\i(i only thing in Western
Africa that can strictly be regarded as religious
worship, is that which is offered to the spirits
of the dead, and usually denominated " Devil-
worship:' Some of them are regarded as good
spirits, and their aid and protection sought,
others are considered as evil spirits, and their
displeasure deprecated. But it is doubtful
whether they have any idea of evil spirits dis-
tinct from those which are supposed to have
proceeded from wicked men. The presence ot
some spirits is courted; houses are built for
their accommodatiou, and occasional offerings
of food, drink, clothing, and furniture are taken
to these houses for their use. They place large
quantities of cloth, beads, knives, pipes, tobac-
co, and ornaments in the cofiBn, and large ar-.
ticks of furniture around the grave outside,
for the use of the dead.
There are also other spirits, whose presence
is much dreaded. They are supposed to cause
sickness, drought, wars, pestilence, and other
forms of national evil; and, ill some places,
they make offerings to the devil to appease his
wrath, and induce him to withdraw the scourge.
On the Gold coast, there are stated occasions
when the people turn out at night to drive the
devil away from town with clubs and torches.
At a given signal, the whole community start
up, commence a most hideous howling, beat
about in every nook and corner of their houses,
then rush into the streets like frantic maniacs,
beat the air with their clubs, brandish their
torches, and scream at the top of their voices.
)Soon, some one announces that the devil is
leaving the town by some particular gate,
when they all rush in that direction, and pur-
sue him for miles from the town.
Supposed demoniacal possessions are very
common, and the feats performed by those
who are believed to be under the influence of
these agents, are not unlike those described in
the New Testament. Frantic gestures, con-
vulsions, foaming at the mouth, feats of super-
natural strength, furious ravings, bodily lace-
rations, gnashing of the teeth, and other things
of a similar nature, characterize all those cases
which they regard as being under the influence
of evil spirits. But some of these, Mr. Wilson
says he found out had been occasioned by the
administration of powerful narcotics, and oth-
ers were the natural results of a highly excited
state of the nerves. But there were other ex-
hibitions of feeling and actions, which could
scarcely be ascribed to either of these causes.
However, we cannot tell what effects may be
produced by frequent and violent strain upon
the nervous system.
In the beginning, it is not easy to distin-
guish these possessions from an ordinary attack
of disease ; and when it is determined to be
a possession, it is no easy matter to ascertain
what kind of a spirit it is. On the Pongo coast;
there are four or five classes of these spirits ;
and when a man is known to be possessed, he
passes through the hands of the priests of these
different orders, till some one pronounces it to
be a case with which he is acquainted and is
able to cure. A temporal^ house is built
62
AFRICA, ■UTSTERN.
dancing commences, a variety of ceremonies
are performed, medicines are administered, and
after a fortnight spent in this way, night and
day, the friends of the invalid furnishing abun-
dance of rum and food for the performers, he
is pronounced cured. A house is then built
near his OArn residence, for the accommodation
of this outcast devil, who is henceforth to be-
come his tutelar god ; and so long as he treats
him with proper respect, and obeys the injunc-
tions imposed on him when he was healed, he
will do well. But if the disease returns, it is
evidence of neglect of duty towards his patron
spirit, and the ceremonies must be repeated.
The spirits who are objects of worship in
the country, are supposed to inhabit certain
great rocks, trees, mountains, rivers, caverns,
and groves ; and these places arc always sa-
cred. They are passed in silence, and not with-
out dropping some kind of offering, if nothing
more than a leaf of a tree, or a shell picked
up on the beach. To these places they carry
offerings of food, drink, cloth, or furniture ; but
they must be presented by the priest, who
pretends to hold intercourse with these spirits.
When the priests would make an impression
upon the people, one of their own number is
concealed in some recess of the grove, or cor-
ner of the rock, and answers are given to the
questions proposed, but always in an unnatural
tone. _ There is no danger of the exposure of
the trick, for no one has courage to venture
near the spot, lest a legion of angry spirits
should rush out and tear him in pieces. One
of these oracles near the mouth of the Cavali
river has acquired great celebrity ; and it is
visited by pilgrims from the distance of nearly
200 miles ; and as offerings are always brought,
it is a source of considerable revenue to the
king of Cavali. It has been visited by several
white men, and found to be nothing but a cav-
ern, in which is an echo, that the priests inter-
pret to moan whatever they please, and the
people are simple enough to credit .the word
of men, of whose dishonesty they have daily
proofs.
These patron spirits are supposed also to in-
habit certain animals, and hence such become
sacred. At Fishtown, on the Grain coast,
certain monkeys found in the wood about the
grave-yard are sacred, because it is thought
they are animated by the spirits of their de-
parted friends. At Dixcove, on the Gold
coast, the crocodile is sacred. At Papo and
Whidah, on the slave coast, a certain kind
of snake is sacred. At Calabar and Bonny
the shark is sacred, and human victims are
occasionally offered to it. At the Gaboon, the
natives will not eat the parrot, because it talks,
and. as they say, is too nnich like man ; but in
reality, perhaps, because they have some suspi-
cion that these birds have the spirits of their
forefathers. A certain tiger, at Cape St.
Catherine, is also sacred.
These animals have the sagacity to find out
that they are not liable to be molested, and
therefore appear to be very presuming. The
monkeys about Fishtown are quite tame ; the
alligator at Dixcove will come aj; call, and fol-
low a man with a white fowl in his hand, to
the distance of half a mile from his den ; the
snake at Papo has become so much domestica-
ted that it may be handled with impunity, and
so far trained that it will bite or refrain from
biting, according to the pleasure of its keeper.
The shark at Benin will come up to the river's
edge every day, to see if a victim is prepared
for him ; and the tiger of St. Catherine will
traverse the streets of the village at night, and
will burrow somewhere during the day, in the
immediate neighborhood, without any appa-
rent apprehension of being disturbed.
The spirits of the dead are suijposed to take
an active part in the affairs of the world ;
hence, when in great distress, they go into the
woods and call upon them for help, in the most
piteous strains. They sometimes send messa-
ges to 'their friends in another world, by one
that is about to die. Mr. Wilson says he has
known mothers who have shunned their own
sons, lest they should use some unfair means
to get them out of this world, with the hope
that they would do them more service in an-
other. They frequently invoke the spirits of
their forefathers, when about to discuss any
important matter ; and the leading men in the
Pongo country rub their foreheads with chalk
that has been kept in the skull of some great
chief, for the purpose of imbibing his wisdom
and courage.
The practice of sacrificing human beings to
the manes of the dead, which is more common
in Ashantee and Dahomey than any where else,
grows out of this belief in a future existence.
The victims offered at the death of any member
of the royal family, or of any great jiersonage,
and which are repeated at stated periods after-
wards, are intended to be servants or escorts to
such persons in another world. 'J'hey have no
right conce2)tions of a purely spiritual state of
existence, and hence they reason I'rom the visi-
ble to the invisible. Although they have no
distinct impression of the resurrection, they
sujjpose that their deceased friends have all
the bodily wants which they had in this world,
and that they would Ise gratified by the same
kind of attentions that would be acceptable
here.
A deranged man is regarded as one who has
lost his soul, and the same is said of the imbe-
cility of age. In sleep, they suppose it not
uncommon for the soul to wander out of the
body, and sometimes to come in conflict with
other wandering spirits. If a man wakes up
in the morning with pains in his bones or
muscles, he suspects at once that his spirit has
been wandering about in the night, and has
received a severe flagellation from some other
spirit.
Witchcraft. — Nearly allied to the foregoing,
AFRICA, WESTERN
63
is the universal belief in witchcratt, which is,
perhaps, the heaviest curse that rests on Africa,
and one of the last evils to be rooted out of
the African mind. In its leading and essen-
tial features, it does not differ materially from
that form of it which prevails in other parts
of the world. (See Witchcraft.) A person
who professes this art, is supposed to exercise
nothing less than omnipotent power, not only
over the minds and bodies of his fellow men,
but over wild animals and the elements of na-
ture. He can transform himself into a tiger
and keep the community in a state of agita-
tion for months or years ; he can turn himself
into an elephant, and destroy their farms and
fruit trees. He can turn another man into an
elephant, so that he may be shot by his own
father or brother. The wind and the light-
ning are his agents, and they never fall upon
any one but they have been directed by his
machinations. It is not known how this mys-
terious power is acquired. By some it is sup-
posed to be secured by eating a certain kind
of leaf in the woods, and by others to be con-
ferred by evil spirits. No very logical proofs
are required to show that a man has exercised
these extraordinary powers. It is known that
he once had a pique at one of his fellow men,
and because this man happened to die the same
day that an elephant was killed, he is suspect-
ed of having turned him into that elephant,
and so arranged every thing that he should be
put to death. A thunder storm passes over a
village, a house is struck with lightning, and
some one is killed. The whole community is
thrown into the most direful agitation. The
inquiry is raised, " Who brought the lightning
down upon that man ?" the meaning of which
is little else than " Who had a grudge against
him ?" The friends and family of the deceas-
ed have the right to single out the person and
require him to drink the " redwood draught."
This is a sure and infallible test of guilt or in-
nocence. No man can hesitate submitting to
it, without acknowledging his guilt. This
draught is a decoction made from the inner
bark of a large forest tree, called by the Gre-
bes, gian, and by the Ashantees, achim. The
bark is pounded in a mortar, and then thrown
into a pot of water until the strength is
extracted, when it is drawn off for use. Its
appearance is like the water of a tan vat, and
it is both astringent and narcotic, and when
taken in large quantities, it acts as an emetic.
The accused, before he takes the draught, makes
confession of all the evil deeds he has commit-
ted in his past life, and then invokes God to
make '' redwood draught " kill him if he is
guilty of the crime with which he is charged,
but if he is innocent to let it pass off without
harm. He is required to drink more or less
according to circumstances. If he vomits
freely, he is declared innocent. But if other-
wise, lie is the more strongly suspected, an ad-
ditional portion is administered, and if death
follows, it seals his guilt. The greatest indig-
nities are then heaped upon his body, some-
times even before life is extinct. Women and
children are summoned, and recpiired to beat,
kick, and spit upon it ; and even the friends
and relatives of the victim have to join in tliese
outrages, or else they are suspected of partici-
pating in his crime. And besides this, the fa-
mily are heavily fined, and it is a long time
before the stain upon their character is wiped
out.
On the other hand, if the accused comes off
clear it is the occasion of great exultation.
He is washed, decked out in his best, and pa-
rades the streets with no little pride and com-
placency. He receives presents from all his
friends, and the party who accused him wrong-
fully are mulcted in a large sum. But a man
who has drank this portion once, is not entire-
ly exempt from it in the future.
The use of the " redwood draught" is not en-
tirely confined to the case of persons suspected
of witchcraft. It is used as a punishment for
some other crimes ; and when it is the deter-
mination of those who administer it to kill the
man, it can be forced upon him in such quan-
tities as to insure the result. This mode of
punishment appears to have been adopted for
the purpose of exonerating the administra-
tors of justice from the responsibility of put-
ting men. to death in cases of doubtful guilt.
They say it was the " redwood " that killed
him ; and it is the general impression that the
" redwood " has in itself the discrimination to
detect guilt; and thus the peojole exonerate
themselves from the tedious process of search-
ing out evidence. They never assign any rea-
son for the use of this ordeal, except that tlieir
fathers did it, and because of the many marvel-
ous stories they can tell of the wonderful feats
of this mysterious agency.
A diSerent article ia used in Lower Guinea
for this ordeal. It is a small shrub with a red
root, from which the decoction is made, called
by the Mpongwe people nkazya. This is a
diuretic and narcotic ; and if it operates freely
as the former, and does not affect the brain to
produce delirium, the man is considered inno-
cent ; but if it produces vertigo, he is guilty.
Small sticks are laid on the ground, a few feet
apart, and after having taken the draught, he
is required to step over them. If he does this
without difficulty, he is innocent ; but, if he
fancies they are great logs, and raises his feet
high to get over them, he is, of course, guilty.
The quantity in this case is not more than half
a pint ; but in the other it is half a gallon or
a gallon.
The natives on the Grain Coast ha\^nother,
called the " hot oil ordeal," whichy^^tised to
detect petty thefts, and in cases wheper' women
are suspected of infidelity to their husbands.
The suspected person is required to plunge the
hand into a pot of boiling oil. If it is with-
drawn without pain, he is innocent. If he
64
AFRICA, WESTERN.
suffers pain, he is guilty, and is fined or punished
as the case may require.
Traditions. — Although the Africans have no
knowledge of letters, they have a great deal of
what may be called unwritten literature, in the
form of legends, traditions, fables, and pro-
verbial sayings. Their fables are highly dra-
matic, animals being made to act and speak
with life and naturalness. They have several
traditions, which would seem to have been
derived from the Bible. They believe in the
common origin of the human race, and have a
curious legend to account for the diflerence
between the white and black man, for which
see Ashantee and Gold Coast. They have tradi-
tions also of a deluge and of the advent of the
Saviour, but coupled with much that is extra-
vagant and gross.
Among all the tribes of both Upper and
Lower Guinea, there are many unmistakeable
traces of Jiulaism. The existence of twelve
families in most of the large commvuiities on
the coast ; the extreme care taken to keep
them distinct ; the rigid interdiction of mar-
riages between members of the same family ;
and various other customs, show that they
have views akin to those of the Israelites. On
the Gold Coast, they divide time into weeks,
have their lucky and unlucky days, and observe
the new moons with as much interest as the
Israelites. Circumcision is practiced among
all the tribes in Western Africa, with the ex-
ception of those on the Grain Coast ; and the
neglect of it exposes a man to much ridicule.
The practice of sprinkling the blood of ani-
mals, as they invariably do, on the door-posts
of their houses, and about the places where their
fetishes are kept, would seem to indicate a
Jewish origin. In the house of the chief-
priest, there is usually an altar with two horns,
and criminals fly to it and lay hold of these
horns, as the Jews did of old, and no one can
remove them but the chief-priest himself. They
have their stated ablutions and their purifica-
tions ; they shave their heads and wear the
poorest kind of clothes as marlvs of mourning.
At the funerals, the women are the chief
mourners, and the time of mourning corres-
ponds with that of the Jews.
Fxmerals. — African funerals arc attended
with great pomp and display. The corpse is
washed, painted, and decked out in the grand-
est style. It is then laid on boards, or in a
rude coffin, in a conspicuous place, during the
funeral ceremonies, which occupy the greater
part of the day ; the character depending up-
on the standing of the man. At an early hour,
the friends and townsmen of the deceased as-
semble in a circle, in front of the house. A
bullock tied by the fore feet is brought to be
slaughtered in honor of the dead. Every visitor
is expected to bring some kind of present, to be
laid in or beside the colTin. The male relatives
and others, to the number sometimes of forty or
fifty, get within the circle, and keep up a rapid
discharge of muskets for hours. AMien the cere-
monies have been continued long enough, as
they suppose, to gratify the dead man, two
bearers take the coffin on their l^ads to carry
it to the burying ground. But sometimes the
dead refuses to go, and the bearers are whirled
round, first one way and then another, and
finally run back into the town. Some one
then comes and soothes and coaxes the dead
man to consent to be carried to the grave
yard. The bearers start off again in a trot ;
but before they get out of town, they are vio-
lently forced against some man's house, which
is an accusation that the owner has been acces-
sory to his death ; and he is forthwith arrested
and subjected to the red-wood ordeal. After
some delay, the corpse is deposited at the usual
place of burial, and the bearers run and plunge
themselves into the water. The female rela-
tives assemble morning and evening to mourn
for the dead, for one month ; after which they
wash themselves, put aside all the badges of
mourning, and resume their wonted duties.
The wives of the dead man are then divided
among the brothers of the deceased ; but before
they enter upon this new arrangement they are
permitted to go and visit their respective
families.
MISSIONS.
Many of the efforts hitherto made to intro
duce the gospel into West Africa, it is well
known, have been singularly disastrous. The
United Brethren directed their attention to the
Gold Coast as early as 1736 ; but after repeat-
ed attempts to establish themselves at Chris-
tiansborg, extending through a period of nearly
forty years, and after eleven of their number
had fallen by the diseases incident to the cli
mate, they relinquished the undertaking as
impracticable and hopeless. In 1795 two
missionaries were sent to Sierra Leone by the
English Baptist Missionary Society ; but, owing
to the indiscretioiv of one and the ill-health of
the other, the enterprise was abandoned. In
the following year three societies, the Scottish
Missionary Society, the London Missionary So-
ciety, and the Glasgow 3Iissionary Society, —
made a joint effort to establish a mission among
the Foulahs ; but this plan was defeated by
the combined agency of disease and dissension ;
and the only one of six laborers who promised
to accomplish anything, was cruelly nmrdered.
Two years later (1797) the Glasgow Mission-
ary Society attempted to introduce the gospel
among the Timnehs, and sent out two mission-
aries for this purpose ; but they were grievously
disappointed in the character of their agents.
And even those societies which have been able
to maintain their position till the present time,
have suffered frequently and severely from the
loss of valued missionaries. The hope may be
indulged, however, that a better ao(juaintance
with the diseases of West Africa will cause a
dimiimtion in the number of deatlis. The oc-
A.FRICA, WESTERN.
65
casional return of missiooaries to their native
laud is already proving highly beneficial. It
may be found also, as many expect, that a resi-
dence upon the hills and mountains of the in-
terior will lie comparatively free from danger.
But whatever may be the obstacles, the gospel
must be carried to all parts of Africa, in obe-
dience to the Saviour's last command ; and we
may encourage ourselves with the hope that
" Ethiopia shall" soon stretch out her hands
unto God."
Church Missionary Society. — This society
sent missionaries to the Susoo country in 1804 ;
but one of them left the service, and the other,
Mr. Eenner, remained as chaplain at Sierra
Leone. In 1806, Messrs. Bretscher and Prasse,
with Mr. Renner, went to the Susoo country,
and met with a friendly reception from several
chiefs ; and a trader named Curtis gave Mr.
Renner a house and garden, in a pleasant lo-
cation, on condition that he would teach his
children. Messrs. Bretscher and Prasse built
a house at another town called Fantimania,
further up the country. Soon after, Mr. Prasse
died. This station was reinforced in 1809, by
the arrival of Messrs. Barnett and Wenzel ;
but Mr. Barnett soon after died of fever.
Supposing that the slave trade had exerted
such an influence upon the adults that there
was no hope of doing them any good, they did
not attempt to preach, but confined their efforts
to the children, thus erroneously limiting the
power of the gospel Some of the children
they ransomed from slavery, and others they
supported. In 1810, Mr. Bretscher had thirty
boys in a school-house, which he had built ;
and Mrs. Renner had a school of twenty-
eight girls, all neatly dressed in frocks and
gowns, made with their own hands. But they
were often much straitened. At one time,
they could not even buy a basket of rice, and
they had not provisions for a fortnight. But
Fananda, a chief about 40 miles distant, who
had been educated in England, being applied
to, offered to thresh two tons of rice for them,
leaving them to pay when they could, assuring
them that he looked more to the good object
they had in view than to the money. But
they met with much opposition from the slave-
traders, who feared the effect of Christianizing
the natives, upon their inhuman traffic, which
exerted a most debasing influence on the peo-
ple ; thus in effect making gain of the souls as
well as the bodies of men.
In 1813, Mr. Bretscher visited England, and
returning with his wife and seven other per-
sons, was shipwrecked with the loss of $13,000
worth of stores. A new station was now com-
menced on the Rio Dembia, called Gambler,
and one had been recently established on the
Bidlom shore.
At Canoffee a church had been erected, and
on the 7th of August, 1815, 50 children were
baptized. But by the arrival of a slaver, every
thing was thrown into confusion, the mission
6
premises, school-house, and church at Bashia
were burnt, and the missionaries compelled to
leave, saving nothing but a single trunk and a
bed, Mrs. Meisner being taken into the field,
from a sick bed, in a blanket. Other indig-
nities were heaped upon the missionaries, and
they were threatened with death. They, how-
ever, escaped to Canoffee.
On the 13th of February, 1815, Rev. J. C.
Spcrrhacker and wife, and four other persons
arrived as a reinforcement ; but Mr. S. was
removed by death soon after his arrival, and
several other missionaries fell victims to the
yellow fever.
In January, 1816, Rev. Edward Bickersteth,
secretary of the society, visited the mission ;
and in view of the repeated fires, and violent
opposition of the people, he directed the station
at Bashia to be abandoned. lie also brought
about a change of policy in the mission ; re-
minding the missionaries that their great
business was to preach the gospel, and inducing
them to make the attempt. But in conse-
quence of the continued hostility of the dealers
in human flesh, the stations among the Susoos
and the BuUoms were both broken up, and the
missionaries and most of their pupils retired
within the colony.
After the abolition of the slave trade, a
great number of negroes with hundreds of
children, were rescued from slave ships, and
settled in different parts of the country, and
fed and clothed at the expense of the govern-
ment. To provide for these children, the
Church Missionary Society obtained a grant
of laud at Leicester Mountain, and erected the
necessary buildings for what was called the
" Christian Institution." This was afterwards
changed into a sort of college, where a su-
perior education might be given to the most
promising youths, to qualify them to labor as
missionaries, or to fill important stations in
the Colony. Some years afterwards, the es-
tablishment was removed to Regent's Town,
and subsequently to Fourah Bay. The mission-
aries also established schools for the children
of the recaptured slaves, in their different vil-
lages, in which they were countenanced and
assisted by the government. The preaching
of the gospel was also commenced among the
adults, and in many instances crowned with
great success.
When these people were brought together
at Regent's Town, in 1813, they were in a most
deplorable condition. In 1816, about 1100
congregated at that place, from almost every
tribe in that part of the continent. A church
had been erected, and much improvement made
in their condition. In June, of that year, Mr.
Johnson was appointed to the care of Regent's
Town ; but the aspect of things appeared dis-
couraging. Natives of 22 different nations
were collected together, mostly taken from the
holds of slare-ships. They were in a state of
continual hostility, with no means of commu-
66
APRICA, WESTERN.
nicating with each other, but a little broken
English. When clothiug was given them, they
would sell it, or throw it away. None of them
lived in the married state, but they herded
together like brutes. From ten to twenty of
them were crowded together in a single hut.
Many of them were ghastly as skeletons, and
six or eight of them sometimes died in a day.
Only six children were born in a year. Super-
stition tyrannized over their minds, and there
was little desire for instruction. Hardly any
land was cultivated by them. Some would live
by themselves in the woods, and others sub-
sisted by thieving and plunder. Many of them
would prefer any kind of refuse meat to the
rations they received from Government.
So many negroes continued to arrive from
slave vessels, that Mr. Johnson had to issue
rations twice a week for a thousand persons.
He was greatly tried with their indifference,
when he attempted to preach Christ to them,
and was often on the point of giving u]) in dis-
couragement. But he soon began to see that
his labors were not in vain. The people w'ere
beginning to improve in appearance and man-
ners. Their natural indolence began to give
place to habits of industry. Those who had
lived in the woods came and asked for lots in
the town, which was now regularly laid out in
streets, and built upon with avidity. The
church, which originally contained 500, was
five times enlarged, in the course of a few
years.
In the course of a year from the commence-
ment of Mr. Johnson's labors, an astonishing
progress was made. One evening, when he was
praying, and wa.s much cast down, a young
man followed him and said, " Massa, me want
to speak about my heart. For some time my
heart bad too much. AVhen I lie down, or get
up, or eat or drink, me thinks about sins com-
mitted in my own country, and since mc came
to Regent's Town ; and me dont know what
to do." He was pointed to the " Lamb of God,
which taketh away the sin of the world."
The next week, several more came on the same
errand. And from this time, the work of
grace made progress. Young persons were
seen retiring to the woods for prayer, and little
groups assembled by moonlight to cliinit the
praises of the Redeemer. Both old and young
appeared anxious to be instructed in the way
of salvation. Polygamy, greegrees, and the
worship of the devil, were universally aban-
doned. In April, 1818, when Mr. Johnson
sailed for England, the number of communi-
cants w\as 2G3. All the people were decently
clothed, and most of the females had learned to
make their own apparel. About 400 couples
were married. Their heathen customs were
laid aside ; and for a year before Mr. J, left,
not an oath had been heard, nor a solitary case
of drunkenness witnessed by him. The schools
contained upwards of 500 scholars, and an
equal number regularly attended church every
day, at morning and evening prayers ; while
the average attendance at public worship on
the Sabbath was from 1200 to 1300.
At this time, the town contained 19 streets,
made jjlain and level, with good roads round
the town. A large stone church rose in the
midst of the habitations ; a government house,
parsonage, hospital, school-houses, store-houses,
a bridge of several arches, some native houses,
and other dwellings, all of stone, were finished
or in process of erection. Gardens, fenced,
were attached to every dwelling. All the land
in the immediate neighborhood was under cul-
tivation, producing a profusion of vegetables
and fruits, and about 75 of the natives had
learned various trades.
The parting of the natives with Mr. Johnson
was very affecting. Hundreds, of both sexes,
followed him five miles to Freetown, and on
his embarkation, said, " Massa, suppose no wa-
ter live here, we go with you all the way, till
no feet more move ! "
After his departure, a mortal sickness broke
out in the settlement, which carried off many
of the people, as well as several of the devoted
friends and agents of the society. Mr. Wil-
helm took charge of the station, during Mr.
Johnson's absence. On the 31st of January,
1820^0.'. Johnson arrived at Freetown, on his
retm'iSp' The new's of his arrival soon reached
Regent's Town, and a number of the people
came down that night, and many more in the
morning, and he says he never in his life shook
hands with so many pei-sons in one day. The
joy of the people was beyond all bounds. In
1822, his wife returned to England, in a feeble
state of health ; and in 1823, he embarked for
England to meet her ; but on the way, was
seized with a violent fever, of which he died.
The society, at this time, had stations at
BatJiurst, Charlotte, Gloucester, Kent, Leopold,
Waterloo, Wilberforce, and York, villages of re-
captured Africans ; in several of which, their
efforts were crowned with success similar to
that at Regent's Town, particularly at Glou-
cester, under Rev. Mr. I) firing, where the work
of grace and the genei'al improvement were
quite as remarkable.
The committee of the society attribute the
distinguished success of these two missionaries,
under God, to their tender, affectionate spirit.
They say that the parental spirit is that which
is alone likely to influence a people in the cir-
cumstances of the liberated Africans. " The
magisterial spirit, which, in its mildest actings,
must still tend to coercion and restraint, will
repel and shut up the minds of men who have
known little of Europeans, but as tyrants and ■
oppressors." Sir Charles McCarthy, who vis-
ited them in 1821, states that some of tliem
had " all the appearance and regularity of the
neatest village in England, with a church, a
school, and a commodious residence for the
missionaries and teachers, though in 1817 they
had not been more than thought of."
AFRICA, WESTERN.
67
Having thus given a sketcli of the early his-
tory of this mission, instead of following it in
detail during the succeeding thirty years, we
shall give a topical notice of its general pro-
gress, with the most prominent points of inter-
est, down to the present time.
Reverses, for want of Laborers. — For a num-
ber of years, the mission experienced sad re-
verses in the loss of many of its most valued
missionaries. By a mortal sickness prevailing
in Sierra Leone, and by disasters at sea, in the
short space of seven or eight months, in the
spring and summer of 1823, the society lost
no less than fourteen of its friends and fellow
laborers, eleven of whom were missionaries
and their wives, and among them. Rev. Mr.
Johnson, who died at sea, as before stated, and
Rev. Mr. During and Mrs. During, who per-
ished, as was supposed, by shipwreck, the vessel
in which they sailed for England never having
been heard of. ' The following year, the mis-
sion was reinforced by the addition of seven
new laborers ; but before the close of the next
year, an equal number was removed by death,
and three others returned home. The follow-
ing year, six returned home, and three were
removed by death. And for several years, the
loss of health and the death of missionaries
were most discoui'aging. In some i^jfcjnces,
this mortality could be traced to e^^ssive
labor, soon after ai'riving in the country. The
society appointed a medical committee, who
entered into an examination of the subject,
and reported a precautionary plan, which was
adopted, with good effect, in succeeding years.
They also adopted the rule of allowing all their
missionaries to return to England once in six
years, in order to recover from the debilitating
effects of the climate.
In consequence of this loss of laborers, the
affairs of the mission were thrown into great
confusion. Regent's Town was, for two or
three years after the death of Mr. Johnson,
destitute of a resident clergyman, and the at-
tendance upon public worship on the Sabbath
had fallen off to about 250 ; and the Christian
Institution, for want of instructors, was quite
deserted. In 1826, Mr. Betts gives a deplora-
ble account of the state of things at this sta-
tion ; and similar reverses were experienced at
other places, most of the stations having been
left to the care of native assistants, who had
not yet acquired the ability and experience
necessary for assuming such responsibilities.
There was a general falling off of attendance
on public worship, and loss of interest in Di-
vine things. Yet, most of the communicants
remained steadfast, though suffering some
decline of interest. The society made great
efforts to supply the deficiency of laborers;
and for a time, there was no lack of self-devo-
tion, on the part of missionary candidates,
who Avere willing to enter the breach. But
the loss of valuable lives was appalling. At
length, however, this frightful mortality in a
measure ceased ; and, as soon as the stations
were supplied with missionaries, they began to
revive, and to advance with a steady progress,
which has continued, with slight interruptions,
to the present time.
Evils of Connectmi with Government. — As
in South Africa, so here, the connection of the
missions with the Government, has proved a
serious evil. Although the Government were
influenced by the kindest intentions, yet the
connection proved a constant source of embar-
rassment. Its relations to the Church Mission-
ary Society were two-fold : first, in regard to
the ministry ; and second, in the management
of education. In 1823 or 1824, an arrange-
ment was made between the Society and the
Secretary of State for the Colonial Depart-
ment, by which they were to take upon them-
selves the preparation and support of all the
English clergymen of the colony, subject to
the approval of the Secretary ; while the Gov-
ernnient should provide for the education of
the inhabitants, in the country parishes, and
erect houses of worship, and provide houses
and gardens for the residence of the clergy-
men and teachers.
In 1827, the Governor of the Colony intro-
duced some new regulations, considerably af-
fecting the Society's proceedings, as well as its
relation to the government. The villages of
liberated Africans were formed into three divi-
sions : The River District, comprising, Kis-
sey, Wellington, Allen Town, Hastings, Water-
loo and Calmont, all lying to the south-east of
Freetown ; the Central, or Mountain Dis-
trict, on the eastern border of the colony, on
the Bunco river, and the Timneh country ; the
Western or Sea District, comprising York,
Kent, and the Bananas. This regulation was
approved by the Society. Another regulation,
which was also approved, relieved the mission-
aries of the civil superintendence of the set-
tlements ; this office having been found bur-
densome and embarrassing to the mission.
In August, 1826, Gov. Campbell, thinking
that he could place the education of the libe-
rated African children on a more economical
footing, and to give them early habits of in-
dustry, directed that the boys should not be
kept in school beyond the age of ten or twelve
years ; after which, they should be distributed
among the liberated adults, to be actively em-
ployed. The missionaries were released from
the charge of the schools, except occasional
inspection, and natives were appointed to con-
duct them.
This arrangement greatly diminished the a-^-
tendance on the schools ; and the missionaries
afterwards finding that they could exert no
beneficial influence upon the schools, broke off
all connection with them, and established
schools of their own.
The missionaries at Freetown greatly de-
plored the obstacles to the due performance of
their spiritual duties, which had arisen out of
68
AFRICA, WESTERN.
their connection with the Government ; and
coutrasted their circumstances unfavorably
with those of the AYesleyans, who were not
hampered with any such connection.
The Government not having fuiiillGd their
part of the arrangement respecting the sui>
port of religion, l)y which they agreed to fur-
nish houses of public worshij) and dwellings
for the clergy, the society applied, in 1846, for
a termination of the arrangement, which was
agreed to ; and the Committee believed the
change would facilitate the operations of the
Society.
Sierra Leone, as a Nursery of Missionaries
for the Interior. — The missionaries regard the
collection of persons from so many different
tribes in the; interior, at Sierra Leone, as a pro-
vidential arrangement for the sujiply of labor-
ers for the evangelization of Africa ; and, with
this in view, they have directed their efforts
both to the education of native helpers, and
to the acquisition of the languages of the dif-
ferent tribes reiJi'esented in the colony.
The work of reducing these languages to
writing was commenced as early as 1829, and
has been steadily prosecuted ever since. The
society's report for 1853 says that some pro-
gress had been made in this department during
the year. A Timneli English Dictionary had
been prepared by Mr. Schlenker ; and the
Epistle to the Romans had been translated
into that language by Mr. Schmid. Rev. S.
AV. Koelle had completed his grammar of the
Vei and Boruu languages. He has also pre-
pared sijecimens, consisting of 250 words and
short sentences, translated into 200 different
languages or dialects, showing that no fewer
than 200 different nations, speaking 150 differ-
ent languages, besides numerous dialects of
the same, have their representatives in Sierra
Leone. These tribes or nations lie along 4,000
miles of coast, beginning from beyond the
Senegal, in the north, to the Portuguese settle-
ments, south of the line. They extend in the
interior through the whole course of the Ni-ger,
from its sources in the mountains behind Sierra
Leone to its estuaries, comprising Timbvxtoo,
the emporium of African commerce, and the
vast provinces subdued by the Mohanunedan
Foulaks, besides numerous small tribes. And
even southern Africa has also its representa-
tives. Tliere arc tliose in Sierra Leone who
can tell of their native towns in that part of
the southern continent which has been hitherto
a perfect blank un the maps, which require a
day or more to pass from one end to the other.
They also tell oi" broad and deep rivers, of na-
tions of tall and strongly-built warriors, of sav-
age cannil>als, and of ])eaceable and generous
nomadic hunters. " Their breasts heave with
emotion when a i'riendly iiujuiry is made re-
specting their I'atlierland. and aj)peal in fervid
language and moving elo(|uence to those who
possess the best gift of God to a fallen world."
The Africans generally entertain a strong
affection for their native land ; and when
Christianized they manifest an earnest desire
that their own countrymen should partake of
the same benefits. The evangelization and ed-
ucation of these liberated Africans will, there-
fore, furnish the agency required to carry the
gospel to the interior. And it has been ascer-
tained that the gospel message is readily re-
ceived from their lips by their countrymen.
In a number of tours to the interior, under-
taken by the missionaries, they have discovered
a desire for the gospel, and a willingness
to listen to it, from their friends, who have
learned it in the colony. It appears, also, that
the fact of these friends having been liberated,
provided for and educated, by the English,
has created a favorable impression npou the
native trilies, and prepared them to receive the
missionaries with open arms. In view of this
state of things, much progress has been made
in reducing the different lang:uages of the in-
terior to writing, and preparing the way for
future missionary operations.
Education.— Hchooh have been maintained
at all the stations, from the commencement.
And the high school, already noticed, has
been sustained with various degrees of efS-
ciency, until the present time. A few years
ago, ^^usive buildings were erected, and it
now mms the relation of a college to the oth-
er educational institutions of the colony. Re-
ligious instruction is made prominent in all the
studies and exercises. The report of the Prin
cipal, Rev. E. Jones, for the year 1852, pre-
sents an interesting view of the advancing
character of the studies prosecuted by the stu-
dents, and the increasing importance of tho
institution. During the year 'two of the
students were sent to the Yoruba mission, and
three appointed to labor in the colony. The
number remaining at the close of the year,
was 17.
In 1843, a grammar school was organized,
as an intermediate step between the village
schools and the Christian Institution. In this
school it was intended to give a sound religious
and general education to boys and youths who
have received some previous training in the
lower schools ; and those who give proof
of suitable dispositions and qualifications, will
be admitted into the Christian Institution.
The report of this school for 1852, was
highly satisfactory. The number of pupils
was 73.
A high school for females has also been es-
tablished, which in 1852 was in a flourishing
condition, containing 2G pupils, of whom 15
were boarders, and in their report for that
year, the directors of the society say that
their village schools present a peculiarly hopo
ful character.
Native Agency.— It has been a leading ob-
ject with the Society, from the first, to train
up a native agency. As early as 1820, two
young men, while pursuing their studies, visit-
AFRICA, WESTERI5.
69
ed their countrymea evenings ana Sundays, to
teach them the gospel ; in 1822, both of them
had charge of stations, and were doing well.
During the trying period alluded to, when the
Society was deprived of so many of its mis-
sionaries by death, many of the stations and
even the Christian Institution, were left wholly
to the charge of natives. In 1827, the Com-
mittee tried the experiment of educating two
African youths in England, under the care of
a clergyman.
But in 1829, the missionaries express their
deep concern at the numerous disappointnTents
which they had met with in their expectations
of raising up eSicient native assistants ; and
at one time, a correspondence was opened with
the Episcopal church in the United States,
with the design of procuring persons of color
competent to act as missionaries.
Yet in their report for 1838, the Committee
present a more cheering aspect of this subject.
They say that the native assistants, proceeding
generally from the Institution at Fourah Bay,
increase in efficiency. In 1844, they say the
prospect of reaching the point at which they
have all along aimed in this matter was never
before so encouraging. Some of them were
found qualified to go forth to distant stations
in the interior, with the entire confidence of
the missionaries. One of them named Samuel
Crowilier, was torn from his country and liin-
dred in early life, and consigned to the hold of
a Portuguese slaver ; rescued by a British crui-
ser ; and carried into Sierra Leone, where he
received Christian training, first in a village
school, and afterwards in the Fourah Bay Insti-
tution. His course was satisfactory and con-
sistent ; and as he appeared to possess qualifica-
tions for the ministry, he was sent to England,
where he completed his education at the Soci-
ety's Institution in Islington, and was after-
wards ordained by the Bishop of London, and
sent by the Society to Sierra Leone with the
intention of his being employed as a missiona^
ry to the Yoruba country, of which he was a
native. In 1850, two other native Africans,
Messrs. Nicol and Matthews, were ordained by
the Bishop of London, and sent out by the
Society.
In the report for 1852, the Committee say,
that many of the stations formerly under the
care of European missionaries, have now been
placed in charge of natives, with occasional
European superintendence. The whole of the
Mountain district had been, for the last year,
under the superintendence of one European
missionary, and had kept up its character for
regular attendance upon the means of grace.
Mr. Denton writes from Sierra Leone in 1852,
that Mr. Crowther had visited and preached in
all the Mountain churches, and that his ser-
mons had been deeply interesting and profitable
to the people. On any point, where there was
the least danger of misapprehension, he had re-
course to his native language, and thus render-
ed Gospel truth clear and plain to their under-
standings.
Translations. — It is an interesting fact that
the work of translation of the Scriptures into
tlie BuUora language, was commenced pre-
vious to the year 1818, by a native, Mr. George
Caulker, a chief at the Plantain Islands. In
1820, he had completed the book of Genesis,
and was proceeding with the Psalms and New
Testament. He had also translated the Prayer
Book. He belongs to one of the principal
families in Sherbro, and was educated in Eng-
land.
In 1837, arrangements were made for carry-
ing on the work of translation with vigor, and
portions of Scripture and elementary works
have been translated, by different missionaries,
into the Timneh, Haussa, Yoruba, and Susa
languages, and in some of them the Liturgy.
Thus is the way preparing for the more efficient
prosecution of the missionary work in the in-
terior.
Character and Ability of the Natives. —
Rev. Mr. During saj's, " six years' experience
has taught me that Africans can learn any
thing. I have seen them rise from the chains
of the slave dealer, to become industrious men
and women, faithful subjects, pious Christians,
affectionate husbands and wives, tender fathers
and mothers, and peaceable neighbors." But
cautions are given against elevating them too
suddenly, as in this way they rise so high in
their estimation of themselves, that they prove
useless in the end.
Calls for Instruction. — The calls for instruc-
tion from every quarter, are beyond the means
of the society to supply ; and petitions come
in from the inhabitants of the villages, and
from distant tribes, pleading earnestly for mis-
sionaries. One of the newly arrived missiona-
ries relates that, on his way from Freetown to
Gloucester, there were many children on the
road, who, when they saw him as he passed,
said one to another, " New white man — new
Mission ! " and all exclaimed, " Thank God ! "
Missionary Tours. — The missionaries have
been, for a number of years, in the practice of
making tours among the neighboring tribes,
and into the interior, for the purpose of ex-
ploring the country, and ascertaining where
openings exist for missionary labor. In most
cases, they find the people ready to listen with
eagerness to the preaching of the Gospel, and
the chiefs desirous of receiving missionaries.
Their journals, however, furnish many painful
proofs of the sufferings entailed on the interior
of Africa, by the foreign slave trade. The
petty warfare, which is carried on between the
chiefs, with all its attendant cruelties, may
almost always be traced to that cause.
At the close of 1848, Captain Forbes, of
the English ship " Bonetta," informed the
missionaries that, near Cape Mount, he had
met with individuals of an African tribe,
which possessed a written language, and that
TO
APRICA, WESTERN.
be had brought ■with him some of their books,
and a man who could read them. This created
a lively interest at Sierra Leone, as it had
been generally asserted and believed that,
among one hundred and fifty languages of
Africa, not one had been raised by the natives
to a written language. In the hoj^e that this
discovery might be improved to the furtherance
of the Gospel, Mr. Koelle was immediately sent
by the local committee at Sierra Leone, to
visit the tribe, and investigate the circum-
stances respecting the language. He made
the tour in about four months, at the cost of
much suffering from privation and illness. Ue
discovered that the art of writing was of re-
cent invention, and confined to the single tribe
of Vei, on the coast. The writing is syllabic,
about two hundred characters representing all
the syllables in the language. Mr. K. found
the inventor, who lived about twenty miles in
the interior. He was a man about forty years
of age, of great intelligence and much religious
feeling, lie had learned the Roman alphabet,
from an American missionary, when a child. He
stated that, after he was grown up, and about
sixteen years previous to Mr. K.'s visit, he re-
ceived the first impulse to express his language
in writing from a dream. He told the dream to
a few of his companions, who assisted him to
invent the characters, and to procure, through
the favor of the chief of his tribe, the means
of establishing schools, and teaching the peo-
ple. But war soon broke out, the town was
destroyed by fire, the tribe depressed and dis-
persed, and they had had no schools since.
Yet, in the chief town, all the grown up peo-
ple were able to read, and in all the towns,
there were some who could read. They had a
considerable number of books, on various sub-
jects ; but the religion found in them was
Diainly Mohammedan. In consequence of this
report, it was determined, as soon as the way
should be opened, to establish a mission among
the Vei tribe.
Gemral Improvement. — The general improve-
ment of the natives, and of the country as a
consequence, has, I'rom the beginning, steadily
kept pace with the prosperity of the mission.
In 1821, Mr. Johnson writes that the gen-
tlemen of Freetown were so fully convinced
of the good effects produced by the prcarhiug
of the gospel, that tliey publicly confes.scd that,
above all other institutions, the mission had
proved the most beneficial to Africa, and
acknowledged that the gospel was the only
efficient means of civilizing the heathen. The
same year, the experiment was tried of calling
the natives from tlie Clu-istian villages to serve
on juries at tiie colonial sessions ; and the re-
sult was 80 satisfactory, that the practice was
continued; and the chief-justice oliservedthat,
ten years before, when the i)opulation was ordy
4,000, there were f(jrty cases on the calendar
for trial, while at that time, with a population
of 10,000, there were only six, and not a single
case from any village that was under the
superintendence of a missionary or a school-
master.
The Work of Grace. — From the time that
the truth began to be foirly understood by
these people, the work of divine grace on their
hearts has been noticed by the missionaries, in
their reports, from year to year. Mr. Gerber
writes from Kent, in 1820 : " Since the begin-
ning of last month, there has arisen among the
inhabitants of this settlement not only a long-
ing after the bread of life, but also, a coutin-
ucd»iuquiry after the way of salvation ; and,
instead of being annoyed, as formerly, with
settling daily palavers, and silencing noisy
school children at night, I am now rejoiced
with different prayer-meetings in the town,
and by the school-children singing at night,
and before day-break in the morning." This
is but a specimen of the notices, which frequent-
ly occur in the journals of the missionaries,
evincing the special presence of the Holy Spirit,
in awakening, convincing, and converting the
people, so recently turned from the most de-
basing heathenism.
Character of Converts. — The fruits of divine
grace are manifest in the character of the con-
verts. The committee, speaking of tlie ac-
counts given of them by Mr. Johnson, say that
this gracious influence is manifest in their
acknowledgment of the hand of Providence
in bringing them from their own country ; in
the manner in which convictions of sin are
awakened or deepened ; in the conflicts of the
Christian mind ; in their sense of the divine
forbearance and mercy ; in a watchful jealousy
over the state of their hearts ; in their i'aith and
patience under afflictions ; and in their culti-
vation of domestic happiness.
And, in regard to their feelings and conduct
toward each other, Mrs. Jcsty writes, " They
dwell in love, and live a life of prayer and
praise, to Him who loved them, and gave him-
self for them. The hearts of many of them
seem to be full of the love of Christ the whole
day ; and when merry, they sing Tsalms.
Such vocal music resounds from all parts of
the town. A dispute is seldom known among
them. Their benevolence was especially man-
ifested, on the arrival of new cargoes of liber-
ated Africans, taken from the slave shijis.
Formerly, their chief interest was, to know
whether any of their relatives were among
them. But after the love of God entered their
hearts, they would rush to the landing, and
seizing the poor, famished creatures, bear them
off on their shoulders to their own dwellings,
and take care of them as tenderly as if they
had been their own near relations. They also
attended prayer-meetings, took part in the
exercises, and generally maintained family
worship. Mr. Norman writes from ]{egent;s
Town, in 1821 : " A spirit of prayer is poured
out on the people in a remarkalile manner ;
so that we find.iis we pass through the streets,
AFRICA, WESTERN.
71
on returning from evening school, that almost
every house is become a house of prayer."
And Mr. Johnson says, the same year, " Family
prayer is observed by all the communicants,
and by some who have not yet been admitted
to the Lord's table, iu their respective houses."
Twenty years, or more, after this, Rev. J.
F. Sessing, in speaking of the character of some
of these converts who had emigrated to Jamai-
ca, in the West Indies, says : " They can read
and write, both males and females. They
work nine hours a day, and are most conscien-
scious iu the discharge of their duties. In order
to find time to cultivate their own grounds,
they commence their labor at 5 A. M. ; and
yet, early as they go to work, they never leave
home without first collectively singing a hymn,
and offering up a prayer for protection and
guidance during the day ; and they never re-
tire in the evening, without doing the same."
The Sabbath is strictly observed by the
native Christians, and to a great extent, by
the people generally, who have come under
Christian instruction ; though at some places,
there is great complaint of a relapse, in this
respect. It is stated that, in 1845 two cap-
tains of vessels landed at a village of about .500
inhabitants, where no missionary or catechist
resided, in order to purchase poultry ; but the
people would not sell on the Lord's day. The
people of Abbeokuta go a long distance to
market, and travel in large parties for protec-
tion against kidnappers. An interval of seven-
teen days elapses between one market day and
another ; so that if they lose the day, they
must wait for another. And yet, notwithstand-
ing these difficulties, the converts determined
not to travel on the Saljbath, though they ran
the risk of having to travel in small companies
and of losing their market day.
The reports of the missionaries abound in
accounts of the expression of pious feeling, on
the part of the natives, couched in simple lan-
guage, yet corresponding with the experience
of true Christians in all ages ; also, iu a va-
riety of personal narratives of thrilling interest,
and of peaceful and happy deaths ; which, how-
ever, it is impossible for us to give in detail.
One of the communicants at Kent, who had
been torn from his kindred and country in
childhood, and suffered great hardships on
board the slave ships, declared that his com-
passion for the man who kidnapped him was
so great, and his desire for his salvation so
strong, that, when thinking of it, he could not
sleep at night.
Church Discipline. — Church discipline is
strictly maintained in the native churches of
the Society in Sierra Leone. Any palpable in-
consistency iu a professed member of the church
is noticed and reproved ; and, if not corrected,
the person is removed from the list of mem-
bers. This, under God, is often made the
means of bringing the careless or disobedient
to a better mind. In most coui>-re£''ations, there
is a " backsliders' class," who are under instruc-
tion and probation, previous to their re-admis-
sion.
Remaining Superstitions. — With a people so
recently raised from the lowest depths of super-
stition, it is not surprising to find them some-
times returning to their former habits, or re-
taining, in their ignorance, some of their old
ideas. Among the things earliest associated
with the African mind, is, a disposition to trust
in charms, or grccgrees, as they call them. One
missionary says he believes all the inhabitants
of the colony would press to the baptismal
font, if they might be allowed to regard it
merely as the best of all greegrees; and com-
municants have been found wearing their gree-
grees at the communion table. Yet, this is not
to be wondered at, when we consider that the
same thing is encouraged, in a different form,
by the greater portion of nominal Christians,
and even by some Protestants.
Desire for the Word of God. — Mr. Kissling
saj's, "As soon as the natives can put letters
together to form syllables, and syllables to form
words, they are anxious to get a Bible ; and,
if attending our places of worship, a Prayer
Book also. Nor is it from mere curiosity that
they desire it. Many, I am sure, use them in
private as well as in church ; and when assem-
bled around their family altar, and by the side
of the sick, and on their visits to their heathen
countrymen." During the eight years ending
May, 1838, 2860 copies of the Scriptures had
been issued, and most of them paid for. In
1846, Mr. Beale writes : " Seven years ago, a
large stock of Scriptures was always on hand ;
but latterly, as fast as they have arrived, they
have been purchased by eager applicants. The
last two shipments were hailed by the people
with peculiar joy. They completely beset my
house, and within a fortnight after each arri-
val, nearly the whole of the smaller Bibles,
1500 in number, were exhausted."
Missionary Spirit. — The native Christians
manifest an earnest desire to impart the word
of life to their destitute countrymen ; and in
order to cultivate this spirit, the missionaries,
at an early period, organized missionary asso-
ciations at the stations, and took up regular
contributions. These societies hold anniver-
sary meetings, at which addresses arc made by
the natives, as well as by the missionaries.
Collections, respectable in amount, have been
reported from tlv?se aiixiliaries every year. In
1851, the amount collected at one station was
£123 5s. 8d. This amount was given by 134
communicants and fifty candidates, including
£30 5s. lid. from 150 children in school.
Timneh {or Timmanee) Mission. — In the au-
tumn of 1840, an expedition was sent into the
Timneh country, and it was ascertained that a
favorable opening existed for preaching the
Gospel ; and Rev. C. F. Schlenker and Messrs.
N. Denton and W. C. Thompson were set
apart for the work, and entered upon their
72
AFRICA, WESTERN.
labors. The location fixed upon for the mission
was Port Lokkoh, {wh ich see) The missionaries
devoted themselves to translations, schools, and
preaching the Gospel ; but at the latest dates
nothing of special interest had occurred. The
people are Mohammedans ; and " that perni-
cious system," says Mr. Schmid, " appears to
present a most formidable barrier against the
reception of Christian truth." The station is
now under the charge of a native teacher, and
Mr. Schmid visits it once a quarter, inspects
the school, and preaches to the natives.
Yoruha Mission. — "W^e have already alluded
to the early history and ordination of Kev.
Samuel Crowther, a native African. On the
3d of December, 1843, Mr. Crowther preached
in English, his first sermon in Africa, in the
Mission church, Freetown, which excited great
interest. On the 9th of January following, he
established a service at the same place in Yo-
ruba, his native language. The novelty of the
occasion brought together a large number of
people, Yorubas, Ibos, Calabas, &c. The ser-
vice was continued, Mr. T. King officiating
after Mr. Crowther left.
For a considerable time previous, there had
been a movement among the liberated Afri-
cans of the Yoruba tribe, towards their native
land. For the purpose of making arrange-
ments to enable them to carry the Gospel with
them, Mr. Townsend visited their country,
arriving in January, 1843, at Abl)eokuta,
where he met the chief, Sodeke, who appeared
friendly, exj^ressed a desire for the return of
his people, and for missionaries to accompany
them ; and wrote a letter to the Governor of
Sierra Leone, expressing his thanks to the
British Government for what it had done for
his people, and his determination to suppress
the slave-trade in his country. Mr. Townsend
found many liberated Africans from Sierra
Leone, at Abbeokuta ; and he describes some
very affecting scenes, on their meeting their
friends and relatives. The country he found
to be salubrious and fruitful. (See Yoruha.)
On hearing Mr. Thompson's report, the de-
sire of the Yorubas to return to tlieir country
wa.s greatly increased ; and hundreds imme-
diately began preparations for leaving the col-
ony. On the 4th of November following, the
inhabitants of Hastings addressed a letter to
Mr. Graf, their missionary, expressing their
desire to return to their country, and present-
ing, through him, to the Society, a request for
a missionary. This was responded to, by the
appointment of Andrew Wilhelm, a native
teacher of established character, to accompany
them. A farewell meeting was held, and
addresses and parting advice given to the emi-
grants by Mr. Graf and several of the natives.
The Committee decided on occupying Ab-
beokuta as a mis-sionary station ; and Mr.
Townsend went to England to receive ordina-
tion, in order to accompany !Mr. Crowther,
who had been appointed to the new mission.
He returned to the colony in December, 1844 ;
and on the 18th of that month. Rev. Messrs.
Thompson, Golmer, and Crowther, with their
wives and four native teachers, sailed in an
American vessel that happened to be at Free-
town, carrying with them a frame house, con-
structed for Mr. Townsend in England. They
were favored with a prosperous voyage, and
arrived safely at Badagry on the 17th of Jan-
uary, 184.5. There they heard that Sodeke,
the chief of Abbeokuta, was dead, and were
advised not to proceed till after the funeral
ceremonies were over. Soon after, the Yoru-
bas were attacked by the king of Dahomey,
and a serious war broke out, the consequence
of the slave-trade. Being thus prevented from
going immediately into the interior, they com-
menced missionary labors at Badagry, among
a mixed population. The Gospel was preached
under the shade of a tree. Mr. Townsend's
frame house was put up, and a native house
erected. The service was conducted in the
Yoruba language, the greater part of the Lit-
urgy having been translated by Mr. Crowther.
After a detention of eighteen months at
Badagry, Eev. Messrs. Townsend, and Crow-
ther succeeded in reaching Abl^eokuta, leav-
ing Mr. Golmer at Badagry ; which was to be
maintained as a branch of the mission, to keep
open the communication with the coast. As
soon as their arrival in the vicinity was an-
nounced, the crier was commissioned to give
public notice that the heaviest punishment
would be visited on any one who should dare
to insult or steal from the strangers who were
coming. The whole of the Lord's day previ-
ous to tlicir arrival was spent by the chiefs in
wrangling with each other for the right of re-
ceiving tlie missionaries, in their respective
districts. On their arrival at the ferry of the
river Ogun, they were met by a party of Sierra
Leone people ; and on the opposite bank, an-
other large party, dressed out in their English
clothes, were ready to welcome them.
After visiting all the chiefs, which it took
them four days to accomplish, an assembly of
the chiefs was convened, to hear from them
their intentions, on coming into their country.
The meeting was conducted with great deco-
rum. ]\Ir. Crowther addressed them, giving a
history of the proceedings, and explaining the
objects of the mission. He then read a letter
from the Governor of the Colony to them.
Their answer was highly satisfactory, ex-
pressing their gratitude, and promising their
cooperation in carrying out the objects of the
mission. They immediately set about the
erection of buihlings ; but in the mean time,
commenced service partly under the slielter of
a narrow piazza, and partly in the open air,
and were listened to attentively by all. Tliey
also learned that Andrew "W'ilhelni, the native
teacher who had preceded them, had been
faithfully laboring to prepare their Avay.
Under date of August 21, Mr. Crowther
I
AFRICA, WESTERN.
73
states that liis motlier, from wliora he had been
torn away about twenty-five years before, came
with his brother, in quest of him. Their meet-
ing was most affecting ; and slie readily received
the truth from the lips of her son, and became
one of the first fruits of the mission.
lu the beginning of the year 1848, Rev. J.
Smith, and Rev. J. C. Miiller, with their wives,
arrived at Badagry ; but in the course of three
weeks, Mrs. Miller was carried off by the fever,
and the alarming illness of Mrs. Townseud,
obligxjd her husband to return with her to
England. At Badagry, there was very little
that was encouraging. The same friendly
feeling continued at Abbeokuta. Eev. Mr.
Miiller considered the Yorubas a superior class
of Africans ; and their minds were prepared
to receive the truth. They were not so dull
and corrupt as those on the coast. Already,
the blessing of God had attended the labors of
the missionaries. On the Gth of Feb., 1848,
just before sailing for Europe, Mr. Townseud,
after receiving satisfactory evidence of their
true conversion, baptized three women, one
of whom was Mr. Crowther's mother, and two
men. On this occasion, a large number as-
sembled in the church. The three women were
neatly dressed in white. The candidates re-
ceived Christian names at their baptism. Af-
ter the service, Mr. Crowther preached an im-
pressive sermon, which was listened to with the
deepest attention. The number of candidates
for baptism, at this time, was about 100.
From Badagry, Mr. Marsh, as an instance
of the cruel bondage of superstition, writes,
April 17, 1849, that there exists, among the
Popos, at Badagry, a custom, bearing resem-
blance to monastic vows. The people are mostly
under vows to some idols, which cannot be
violated by themselves or others, with im-
punity. Under these vows, they are often shut
up for a long time in their idol temples. There
were, at that time, about five hundred young
men and women, shut up in these temples.
When these come out, they are regarded as
sacred, and any one who touches their heads
or treads on their feet, must pay a large sum
of money, or if unable, must be sold or put to
death. In crossing from one part of the town
to another, Mr. Smith passed a piece of ground
where these victims of superstition were put
to death, which was literally strewed with
human bones ; so truly are the '• dark places
of the earth full of the habitations of cruelty."
Three years after the establishment of the
mission at Abbeokuta, so great was the bless-
ing of God upon it, that there were five hun-
dred constant attendants on the means of
grace, eighty communicants, and nearly two
hundred candidates ; and the religion of Jesus
Christ had become a topic of conversation in
the war expedition, on the farms, and in the
market places. The people pressed eagerly to
hear the word, and were deeply moved with it,
sometimes speaking out and inquiring what
they should do. Those who came to oppose, were
convinced. The word, also, exercised a general
and pervading influence over the people at
large ; and there was a waning of the power of
idols and of the ancient superstitious. Yet, the
converts were subject to persecution from those
who adhered to the old customs. The priests of
the national superstition, being nearly deserted,
set up a persecution in four or five of the town-
ships of which the District of Abbeokuta is
composed, putting the converts in stocks,
cruelly beating them, threatening them with
death, and fining them to a heavy amount ; but
at length, on the urgent request of the mis-
sionaries, the principal chiefs interfered, and put
a stop to these cruel proceedings. The attempt
to renew persecution was again made, in 1850.
The cause was believed to be the close blockade
of Lagos, by the British squadron, by means
of which no slaves could be shipped ; which so
enraged the head slave trading chief at Abbeo-
kuta, that he sought to annoy, defeat, and
drive away, if possible, the friends of the mis-
sion, even threatening death to those who ven-
tured to go to church. But the British Con-
sul, Capt. Beecroft soon arrived at Abbeokuta,
and effectually stirred up the chiefs to protect
the converts.
The priests arc inveterate against Christian-
ity, and do what they can to oppose it ; but
they and the chiefs seemed to be held under a
remarkable restraint. They have a way of
consulting their gods, through an oracle, which
is their great superstition. This oracle has
again and again been consulted by them, in
regard to the missionaries, but has never been
induced to utter a word against them ; but
from first to last, it has said that the welfare of
the country was in the hands of the white
people, and that they must be permitted to
teach what they please. Their oracles are in
the hands of the heathen priests, who, by a
certain process, arrive at a conclusion as to the
will of the god. But, though they are open
anci avowed persecutors of Christianity, they
are unable to make their oracles utter a word
against it.
Toward the end of the year 1850, it became
evident that the various parties interested in
the slave trade "were preparing for a desperate
and combined attempt to crush the rising
Christianity of Abbeokuta, and expel the mis-
sionaries from the laud. At length, an inva-
sion was attempted by the king of Dahomey.
On the hostile army appearing before Badagry,
some of the boys at the missionary boarding
school were taken away to places of safety ;
but Eev. Mr. Gollmer remained at his post.
On Sunday evening, March 2, the enemy ap-
proached Abbeokuta. Many of the Christian
converts went from public worship and from
their special prayer meetings, to man the walls,
for the whole male population was summoned
to the defence. Many of the timid inhabitants
fled, but the missionaries remained at their
74:
AFRICA, WESTERN.
posts, with a stedfast confidence in God.
Masses of well trained warriors, male and fe-
male, armed with muskets, bore down upon the
town, defended only with a mud wall. They
fought with desperation, but were comiDletely
routed, with great loss ; while the less of the
Torubas was small. The missionaries exerted
themselves to save the lives of the prisoners,
and they were at length exchanged for the
means of defence against future attacks. The
immediate moral effect, upon the inhabitants of
Abbcokuta was most striking. The victory
was by them unanimously attributed to the
goodness of the Christian's God. All persecu-
tion ceased. The principal chiefs sent their
children to the schools. And it was hoped
that great advantage would accrue to the
cause of Christ, from this deep and bloody
plot against the very existence of the mission
at Abbeokuta. It is thus that the Lord makes
the wrath of man to praise him.
An attack was made on Badagry, and near-
ly the whole town reduced to ashes ; but the
premises of the mission escaped. At this
stage, the British cruisers interfered, and drove
away Kosoko, the usurper of Lagos, who made
the attack, and the most decisive measures
were taken to put down the slave traffic.
Treaties were made with Abbeokuta and
Lagos, in which protection was secured both
to the missionaries and to lawful commerce.
In the course of the persecutions which have
been alluded to, many instances are mentioned
of constancy in the converts, which would have
done honor to the early Christian martyrs.
The mission is extending its operations on
every side, and making exploring expeditions
into the interior, and bringing to light con-
stantly new fields of labor, to which the way
is already prepared, by all these tribes being
represented among the liberated Africans in
the Colony ; so that they are likely to prove
Josephs, lost and recovered again, to save their
people, not from temporal, but from eternal
death.
Present State of tJie Missions. — The report
of the society, for 1852, represents the work as
going forward at the different stations, with a
steady progress. The Yoruba country had
continued to be the scene of " wars and rumors
of wars ;" but from the threatened danger
Abbeokuta had been happily preserved. The
missionary work has been successfully pros-
ecuted, and several new stations commenced.
But, in consequence of the war, and other cir-
cumstances, Badagry Avas reduced to a small
and unimportant place ; and the mission has
been removed to Lagos, about 3G miles east of
Badagry. Lagos is a large and populous town,
having water communication far into the in-
terior, as well as for hundreds of miles along
the coast. It has hitherto been a great slave
mart ; but the British government have occu-
pied the place, and driven out the trafiic.
Several deaths occurred among the mission-
aries in 18.52 ; but a considerable reinforce-
ment was sent out, and Rev. 0. E. A'idal, D. D.,
having been consecrated Bishop of Sierra
Leone, arrived at Freetown Dec. 27, 1852, and
preached his first ordination sermon on the
admission of Messrs. Maser, Kefer, and Gerst
to deacon's orders.
The report for 1853, represents the pastoral
work within the colony as in a satisfactory
state of progress, and the educational establish-
ments as in a hopeful condition. Not much
progress was making at the Timneh mission ;
but the year has been one of peace to the
Yoruba mission. A good beginning had been
made at Lagos.
The following table will show the state of
these missions in 1853 :
DISTRICTS AXD
PRINaP.\I.
STATION.S.
Clergy-
Teacher.s.
S
a
'3
a
s
3
Baptisms
during
•3
S3
Il
Seminarists and
Scholars.
men.
M'le.
Fem.
the year.
c
1
3
P
"5
y,
16
12
•JO
10
2
13
6
79
1
1
1
4
i
9
<
&-
«
.fcl
11
"3
1
6
FroLtown District ....
KivLT District
Mountain District ....
1818
1820
1816
1819
1840
1846
1845
4
2
5
1
4
3
22
1
2
6
18
3
1
4
976
500
926
335
6
233
8
3S
21
11
61
161
113
111
44
3
31
2
13
14
18
12
8
2
598
252
4R1
248
38
454
209
367
7
155
101
929
429
729
227
6
357
1,981
890
1,577
710
51
512
101
Timiich Mission
Ahbookuta District...
Coast District
Totals
2,976
129
405
69
1,617
1,272
256
2,677
5,822
En<rlish Baptist Missionary Societij. — Allu-
sion has already been made to an unsuccessful
effort of the Baptist Missionary Society to
introduce the Gosjiel into Sierra Jjcone in
1795. From the failure of that enterprise to
1840, this sof'i(!ty appears to have attempted
nothing for West Africa. At length, how-
ever, it was resolved that measures .^should be
taken, having in view the exploration and oc-
cupancy of an entirely new field. The Bev,
John Clarke and Dr. Prince, who had both
resided for some years in Jamaica, wore invited
to go forth as pioneers, and lay the foundation
of the contemplated mission. They arrived at
AFRICA, WESTERN.
75
the island of Fernando Po, January 1, 1841 ;
and on the following Sabbath public worshii^
was held in Clarence, where they first lauded.
(See Fernando Po.) They subsequently vis-
ited the adjacent coast, to ascertain the feasi-
bility of commencing missionary operations.
Such was then- report to the society at home
that the latter soon sent out a number of ad-
ditional laborers, a part of whom were station-
ed on the island of Fernando Po, and a part
upon the main land. The agency of colored
persons from Jamaica is to be employed ex-
tensively in this mission ; and a number have
already joined their white brethren.
The prospects of this enterprise were quite
flattering till near the close of 1845. At that
time three stations had been commenced upon
the main land ; making the whole number of
stations four, and the oul>statious five. There
were also five missionaries, three male Euro-
pean assistant missionaries, and nine male
colored teachers.
Early in the year 1846, howevei-, all the
missionaries on Fernando Po were ordered by
the Spanish authorities to desist from their
appropriate work, twelve months being allowed
them to dispose of the mission property.
This year was also one of peculiar trial, in
the removal of two of the missionaries, Messrs.
Thompson and Sturgeon, by death. The
Spanish consul regarding their labors as a
great benefit to the people, consented to let
them remain, provided they would give up
preaching and cease to teach the Bible in their
schools. But this proposition they declined,
and employed the interval allowed them for
removal in their usual labors. Two Catholic
priests were left at Clarence, but they have
since returned to Spain. Seven persons were
baptized, during the year. Meanwhile, the
providence of God was opening other doors
at Bimbia and Cameroons. The former of
these is healthy, and surrounded by 140 vil-
lages. The report for 1851 states that cheer-
ing information of success had been received
from Mr. Johnson at Cameroons. The attend-
ance on preaching was good, there were several
inquirers, and 14 or 15 gave evidence of piety.
This year the mission was again afflicted with
the loss by death of two of its missionaries,
Messrs. Merrick and Newbegiu ; but one addi-
tional missionary was sent out, and Mr. Saker,
who was on a visit to England, returned to his
field of labor. In 1852, Kev. J. Wheeler re-
turned home, not being able to endure the
climate.
In the report for May, 1853, the committee
say that, notwithstanding the reduction of mis-
sionary strength, the blessing of God evidently
rests on the enfeebled labors of the remnant.
At all of the three stations there have been
conversions, and the labors of the negro teach-
ers have been the means of salvation to many.
The care of the churches has of necessity been
committed to native helpers, who have shown no |
small capacity and fitness for the ofBce. The
work of translation has been prosecuted, and
several thousand pages of the word of God
printed. Yet, the work has met with opposi-
tion, and more than once, at the Cameroons, the
lives of the people attending Christian wor-
ship have been threatened.
The latest complete returns from this mis-
sion are for the year 1849, as follows :
Fernando To, Clar- \
ence, &c J
Cameroons
Bimbia, Jubilee, &c. . . .
Totals
.2
c
S
1
3
7
<
3
a
1
4
5
.3
3
r3
O
3
2
si
s
o
5
20
25
II
9 .'H
^ c
OH
o
w
6
1
7
8
1
2
113
5
11
118
350
100
450
Wesletan Missionary Society.— T. Sierra
Leone. — The Wcsleyan Missionary Society
commenced a mission at Sierra Leone in the
year 1796— (not in 1811, as stated in " The
Missionary Guidc-Book," p. 2*7). During the
eleven years preceding, that Society had es-
tablished missions in J>iova Scotia, Newfound-
laud, and the West Indies ; and the success
which God had vouchsafed to those efforts
encouraged the Wesleyan Conference to at-
tempt to open a field of missions on the west
coast of Africa. Sierra Leone was chosen as
the place where to begin these efforts ; and
this was the first mission of any kind to that
part of Africa,
In 1795, the venerable Dr. Coke, the father
of Wesleyan missions, united himself with a
scheme then on foot, by gentlemen of difierent
denominations, for the civilization of the Fou-
lahs, in West Africa. This expedition, which
originated in motives so purely benevolent,
proved an entire failure, not merely from the
want of adaptation in the agents employed,
but from a mistake akin to that of the Mora-
vians, when they thought they could first civ-
ilize and then evangelize the Esquimaux.
From similar causes, this expedition failed.
The persons engaged and sent forth by Doctor
Coke on this mission, were a band of mechan-
ics, with a surgeon at their head ; and they
were directed to teach the FovJahs the arts of
civilized life. On arriving in the colony, they
became discontented, and were soon dispersed.
Some died, and others returned home, without
ever having reached the scene of their intended
labors in the interior. The enterprise " came
to naught," for its fundamental principle was
not that ordained by the great head of the
Church, for establishing Christian missions
among heathen nations. This was the only
mistake of the kind, which, in their long expe-
rience, the Wesleyans ever fell into, and may
T6
AFRICA, WESTERN.
be excused in view of the immature views en-
tertained of the missionary enterprise nearly
seventy years ago.* The Weslcyan Confer-
ence felt the rebuke, and promptly rectified the
mistake, so far as it was connected with them,
for, in the annual minutes of the Conference
held in August of that year, (1796) we find
the following entry : " Dr. Coke laid before
the Conference an account of the failure of the
colony intended to be established in the Fou-
lali country in Africa ; and, after prayer and
mature consideration, the Conference unani-
mously judged, that a trial should be made in
that part of Africa, on the proper missionary
plan. The two brethren above-mentioned,
Messrs. A. Murdoch and W. Patten, having
voluntarily offered themselves for this import-
tant work, the Conference solemnly appointed
them for it, iiud earnestly recommended them
and their great undertaking to the public and
private prayers of the JNIethodist Society."
Little information can now be obtained as
to the extent or results of the enterprise thus
set on foot by the Conference. No report was
published for many years aiterwards ; and the
only sources from whence to glean our scanty
knowledge of this mission, are the " Annual
Minutes," and the "Arminian Magazine."
We cannot, therefore, tell how many agents
were sent out, or what amount of success they
continued to have. But, that a commence-
ment was made, and considerable good accom-
plished, and that, too, very soon, is evident
from the following notice, being part of a
Narrative of Metliodist Missions, first drawn
up by a Christian of another denomination
for the Edinburgh " Mifisionarij Magazine,"
and thence copied into the " Arminian Maga-
zine," for February, 1797 : — " There are also
in Sierra Leone, upon the coast of Africa, 400
pei-sons in connexion with the Methodist Soci-
ety, of whom 223 are blacks and mulattoes."
The next reference to this mission turns up in
1804, when the preacher, Mr. Brown, appealed
earnestly to Dr. Coke for ministerial help.
* In explanation of tlic ahove wo find a note in the Mis-
simary Magazine, publi.shed iu Edinburg in August, 1796,
which says:— "We understand that the nii.ssi<jn to the
Foulah countrVj which is said to have failed, was not pro-
perly a Methodist mission ; as the families that went out
AvitJu Mr. Macaulay, with the design to settle on the bor-
ders of that country, were not sent by tlic Methodiiit Con
ferenee. They were mechanics, who had been members
of the Methodist Societies in England, some of whom had
officiated as local pi-eachers, and who had been recimi-
mended by Dr. Coke to Mr. Macaulay. But it seems thev
had either not rightly nnderstood the engagements tliey
had entered into, or had not fully counted the cost. We,
therefore insert this note, lest anv of our readers, by at-
taching tlie common idea to the phrase Methodist Misusum,
should be led to conclude that these persons must have
been missionaries, sent out by that body of people, for the
express purpose of preaching to the heathen : whereas
they were neither so .sent, nor was their mission so imme-
diately to proaeli, as to form a Christian colony, ami open
a friendly Intercourse with tJie n.itives of the Koulah
country." This explanation will also serve to correct a
mistake in Mr. Moistor's work, " Memnriah of MifHonary
Ldbnrs in WKstt:m Africa," (I/mdon, 18uO, ji. ai,) where
be seems to make Dr. Coke and the Confereneo responsible
for the whole undertaking. Other writers l)eside.s Mr. M.
have fallen into t)ie same mistake.
Mr. B. was assisted by Mr. Gordon, and
though only local preachers,, they faithfully
cared for the little flock that had been gath-
ered. They had also the assistance of a colored
preacher, a devoted young man. In 1808 we
find a communication from this native preacher,
Mmgo Jordan, to Dr. Adam Clarke, giving an
account of his labors as a missionary among
the Maroons, from 180.5 up to 1808, and stat-
ing that, inchxding the Maroons that had been
converted, the number of church members in
and around Sierra Leone amounted to 100. He
earnestly requests in his letter a supply of
hymn-books and some wearing apparel for the
preachers. Dr. Coke tried to sustain the mis-
sion until he could find a suitable man to go
and take the general superintendence of it ;
and, iu 1811, he sent out Bev. George Warren
for this purpose, who, on his arrival in Sierra
Leone, was received with open arms by the
officers and members of the church which had
been gathered there. Mr. Warren's report to
Dr. Coke gives the following as the statistics
of the mission, as he found it : — " The society,
at our arrival, amounted to 110 ; a great pro-
portion of tliese profess to enjoy a .sense of
the divine favor ; and the society in general,
as far as I can learn, conduct themselves with
considerable jiropriety. I found among them,
at my coming, three local preachers, tM'o of
whom meet classes, and six class-leadei-s btv
sides. Since this, one brother, who had been
in the country for his health, has returned.
Seven have been admitted on trial, while sev-
eral more appear to be under serious impres-
sions.* Sierra Leone had then about 4.000
inhabitant*!, only al)out one in forty being Eu-
ropean. The rest were Nova-Scotians, Maroons,
Timnehs, Bulloms, Kroomen, and recaptured
slaves. The places of worship were two
Methodist chapels, one Episcopal, and one
Baptist church.
To do anything like justice to our sketch of
this mission, it is necessary that we lie allowed
to state briefly what was the condition of soci-
ety then at Sierra Leone. Even at the present
day, after the Gospel (like the disinfecting fluid
acting on this mass of moral corruption) has
removed so large a proportion of the elements
of death, the population of Sierra T>eone is
unique, having no parallel in any other ])art
of the world. But what was the state of that
anomalous population, as a field for Christian
mis,«ions, more than fifty years ago ? All the
elements of the worst forms of heathenism were
here united to the most degrading vices of
civilization. And, in the midst of these abom-
inations, missionaries were set down to af tempt
to sjiread the blessings of a sanctifying Chri.s-
tianity through such " a hell upon eartli " as (his
place then was. At that time the colony wa,« liut
ten square miles in extent. It was originally
settled with the avowed object of the moral
* See Methodist Magazine for 1807. p. •iP3 ; fur 1808, p
72 ; for 1812, p. 316, and pp. 037 and 795.
AFRICA, WESTERN.
77
improvement of the natives. But at the close
of the war with the United States, the negroes
who had served under the British flag, either
on land or in the navy, were located in Nova
Scotia, or the Bahama Isles. Being dissatis-
fied with their situation, numbers of them made
their way to London, where they were found,
collected together, in the most deplorable state,
" subject to every misery, and familiar with
every vice." Public attention was called to
their condition, chiefly by the eSbrts of the
celebrated Granville Sharpe, and, in 1787,
" The African Company " was formed. The
committee purchased land from the negro
princes at Sierra Leone, on which to locate
these pests of London society ; and, a few
months after, 400 blacks and about 60 Avhites
embarked for Sierra Leone. The whites are
said to have been chiefly women of the most
abandoned character. Such were the materi-
als of the first English colony in Western
Africa. A company of American refugee
slaves and Loudon prostitutes sent out by Brit-
ish philanthropy to enlighten and civilize Af-
rica I The results may be anticipated. From
the combined influence of the climate and the
vicious habits of the colonists, the mortality
was fearful. In a few months, nearly one half
of them had cither died or escaped from the
colony, and, in little more than a year, the
whole were dispersed, and the town burnt to
ashes by an African chief.
In the year 1791, another association was
formed, by whose efforts a few of the dispersed
colonists were again collected, and about 1200
more negroes were transported from Nova
Scotia. About three years after. Sierra Leone
was destroyed by a French squadron ; and, in
18U8, disappointed and dismayed by the spirit
of the colonists, and the various disasters which
overtook the colony, the company transferred
their whole establishment to the British gov-
ernment. From this period may be dated the
rising prosperity of Sierra Leone. Law and
order soon reigned throughout the colony, and
provision was made for its defence. The Brit-
ish crown had, just the year before, declared
the slave trade to be piracy, and it now decreed
that all captured slaves, rescued iVom slave
ships by the English cruisers, should be brought
into Sierra Leone, as their asylum. Such are
the sources whence the population of Sierra
Leone has been drawn, numbering 41,735 in
the year 1847, and which presents in that
place the representatives of about 200 different
nations of Africa, each with its own language,
superstitions, and abominable Avickeduess, and,
Avhen lauded there, possessing no idea of order,
discipline, honesty, or morality.
Among these wretched outcasts of man-
kind, the Wesleyan missionaries have been hv
boring from the first ; and surely in such a
place, whatever good has been achieved must
be attributed alone to the hand of God.
"When to these considerations we add the dead-
ly character of the climate, some Mea may be
formed of the nature of that sphere where the
Wesleyan missionaries have been toiling for
half a century. It has been the grave of our
missionaries, and frequently at a time too when
they had just become qualified for usefulness
among this polyglot people. From 1811 to
1850, there were sent from England, as nearly
as can be ascertained, by the Wesleyan Mis-
sionary Society, about 123 missionaries, includ-
ing their wives ; and of these there were no
fewer than 54 who died, while many others re-
turned home on account of the failure of their
health. Nor was this merely aftei* a length-
ened course of labor. In consequence of the
unheal thiness of the climate, the Committee,
after a short trial of seven years, restricted the
period of service first to three, and then to two
years ; and it was only in a few instances that
this period was exceeded. Many died within
the first year, some in a few months, a few
weeks, or even a few days, after their landing.
Instances were not wanting of husbands and
Avives lying ill in different rooms of the same
house at the same time, and dying within a
short time of each other. The frequent sick-
ness and death of so many of the missionaries,
and the early return of others to England, could
not fixil to affect materially the progress of the
missions. Stations were sometimes left with
only one missionary, or without any mission-
ary at all.
The events and circumstances which we have
placed before the reader will, in a great meas-
ure, explain why the 400 members connected
with the mission in 1797 should have dwindled
to 110 in 1811, when Mr. Warren arrived to
take charge of the mission. He entered on his
work with great zeal, and extensive prospects
of usefulness, but fell a victim to the climate
the year after he landed there. William Davis
then offered himself for the vacant post, and
Sanmel Brown was sent out to assist him, in
the various openings of usefulness which pre-
sented themselves. The work soon spread from
Free Town to Wellington, Hastings, Waterloo,
Murraytown, &c., on the east, and to York and
Plantains Island on the South. And notwith-
standing the occasional checks to which the
mission has been subject, among the greatest
of which, may be reckoned each fi-esh cargo of
slaves, yet this mission has been crowned with
continued prosperity. And some of the most
remarkable instances of powerful awakenings
and revivals with which the Wesleyan missions
have been blest have taken place in Sierra Le-
one. Here thousands of the afflicted children
of Ham, drawn up from the reeking holds of
the slave vessels, have been made the joyful
partakers of a richer liberty than British plii-
lanthropy could confer upon them. And it
is the testimony of gentlemen who resided
there for years, that the religious experience of
" the converts to Christianity in that country
is generally clear and satisfactory, and will
78
AFRICA, WESTERN.
bear a comparison with that of the professors
of religion in more highly favored lands."
Schools have also been established for the
training of the rising generation, in which
over 3,(300 children are receiving an. evangeli-
cal education ; and an Institution for the train-
ing of a native ministry is in successful opera-
tion.
Nor have the labors of the missionaries and
their zealous associates, the native preachers,
been restricted to the heathen within the col-
ony. They have brought the word of life to
thousands of idolaters beyond the limits of the
colony ; so that the Kossos and the heathen
round Murraytown have turned to God from
" dumb idols." At the close of the year 1852,
one of those remarkable movements took
place at Sierra Leone, which occasionally start-
les the church and the world, evincing a
special omnipotent agency over the minds of
men, and indicating to us how vast are those
resources of influence which God has in reserve
and by which he may yet accelerate the con-
version of the world to the faith of Christ.
The nature of this movement may be best seen
from the communications of the missionaries at
Sierra Leone, under date of December 24,
1852. Rev. Messrs. Fletcher and Gilbert
write, " The Committee will be glad to hear
that the idolaters of Sierra Leone arc casting
their idols ' to the moles and tlie bats.' The
kingdom of Satan is falling as lightning to the
ground. A few weeks since, Mr. George, our
schoolmaster at Murraytown, came to the mis-
sion house, and requested that one or two
missionaries would come immediately to that
place, as the idolators were giving up their
idols. As it was past five on Sunday evening
when he came, we postponed it until the next
day. On the following morning Mr. Eeay
and myself rose at four o'clock, and started off
to the village. We arrived just as it was gctr
ting light, and proceeded at once to the con-
stal)le's house. "We were rather surprised to
find his piazza full of id(jls, and other supersti-
tious stuff which had b(?en brought to him the
day previous. lie very kindly took us to the
houses of the idolators. AVe talked to them
about their souls, and exhorted them to look
to Christ as their Saviour, Kedcomer and God.
One man who A'ohmtarily gave up his idol to us.
said he had been an idolator twenty-five years,
but now he intended to go to the Chapel. On
Sunday I went to Murraytown and preached
to those people who had latelv given up their
idols. The Chapel, which had been lately re-
built, Wfus crowded ; and all paid crreat atten-
tion, while I enforced the words, 'Little child-
ren, keep yourselves from idols.' On the same
day I bai)tized 28 males and females, 25 of
whom were adults ; and I received 5 as mem-
bers on trial ; but some of these were back-
sliders. As I looked upon these people a.s they
knelt down to be baptized, my feelings over-
came me."
At Free Town such a number of idols
were given up as no one suspected the place to
have contained. The people took the matter
into their owTi hands, and seemed to be simul-
taneously moved by an invisible impulse, be-
coming such enthusiastic Iconoclasts, that Mr.
i"1etcher tells us all other work was suspended.
In crowds, but not tumultuously, they paraded
through the streets, carrying the heathen dei-
ties in procession, to deliver them up to the
magistrates and missionaries. Mr. Fletcher
turned his apartments into a museum for the
exhibition of those unsightly abominations,
and thousands of people came to look at them.
The fame of this movement has spread far
along the coast, producing deep impressions
among the various tribes, and leading the re-
lenting heathen in many instances to say with
Ephraim — " What have I to do any more with
idols ?" The work is extensive and spreading,
and is another of those illustrations which fre-
quently occur to show how powerful and efiS-
cient are the resources of Him in whose hand
are the hearts of all men, and before whose Al-
mighty Spirit every obstacle must give way.
The proximity of Sierra Leone to Liberia, in-
vests this great work with an additional inter-
est, as both of these colonies bear a relation to
the evangelization of Africa, the value of which
is incalculable. Events like these give a pow-
erful impetus to a mission ; and it is so in this
case. The prospects in Sierra Leone, were
never so bright as now. The schools are
well attended, and the chapels cannot hold all
who desire the word of God. The Native
Training Institution is also doing well. At
a late public examination of the students,
held in the presence of the Colonial Sec-
retary and other official persons and resi-
dents in the colony, the students were exam-
ined as to their knowledge of Theology, Latin,
Greek, Mathematics, English Grammar and
Geography, and acquitted themselves most sat-
isfiictorily. One of their number has been just
recommended by the district meeting as a can-
didate for the holy ministry.
Those who remember the struggles and dif-
ficulties which marked the early history of this
mission, can best appreciate its present encour-
aging condition, and see with delight their
ho])es not only realized, but even far exceeded.
In 1811 there was but one missionary, three
local preachers, 110 members, and about 100
children in the schools, with two small chapels.
Now there are thirty-one chapels, (some of
which are very large,) seven nT^;sionaries, 107
local preachers, over COOO church members,
360S scholars, and more than 11,000 persons
in the pastoral care of the missionaries. "Ac-
cording to this time," it may well be said,
"what hath God wrought?" ' For more defi-
nite information on the present state of the
mission, see the Tabular Hew near the end of
this article.
//. The Gambia District. — This mission was
AFRICA, WESTERN,
79
commenced by the Weslcyan Society in the
year 1821. It lies further north than any
other on the west coast of Africa ; and the field
is entirely in the hands of the Wesleyan Society.
That portion of Western Africa which is drain-
ed by the rivers Senegal and Gambia, is named
Senea:ambia. The tribes inhabiting this district
of country are chiefly the Jaloofs, which lie
to the north; the Mandingoes, who inhabit
the sea-board ; and the Foidahs, who are chiefly
found deep in the country, to the east.
The Jaloofs and Mandingoes are mostly
Mohammedans; but they are very different
from each other in their opinions and disposi-
tions. One portion of them, called Mara-
boots, or "religious people," are excessively
superstitious, and put implicit confidence in
their " greegrees," (charms,) which they hang
about them in great numbers and variety.
They also practice witchcraft, of all sorts.
Mohammedanism has been carried to the west
of Africa by its priests in the capacity of
schoolmasters, using the Arabic lang-uage ;
and, though grossly ignorant themselves, they
have acquired a powerful hold over the native
mind.
The Foulahs, who are a wandering people,
are mostly Pagans, and are greatly oppressed
by the Mandingoes, who abuse and plunder
them without any ceremony. The French, the
Portuguese, and the English, have settlements
on the coast in these parts, as the rivers Sene-
gal and Gambia are exceedingly advantageous
for trade. The Gambia, especially, whose
source, in the Tenda country is said to be
only a few days' journey from the renowned
Niger, can be navigated by vessels of large
burden for nearly 400 miles, and with small
craft for nearly 700 miles. Ships from Europe
supply the whole country on both sides of its
banks, on which lie numerous towns and vil-
lages, the centres of trade to the country for
hundreds of miles inland.
The mission schools, which were established
by the missionary Dart, about the year 1820,
in the island of St. Louis, a French settlement
at the mouth of the Senegal, were not kept
up ; neither were others that were established
in the island of Goree, near Cape Verd ; arid
the first standing missions that we meet with
are these at the Gambia. Not far from its estu-
ary, which is twelve miles broad, is the island
of St. Mary, in lat. 30 degs. 30 min. north, and
long. 15 degs. 10 min. west, close to the south-
ern'shore. "it is four miles long by one broad.
The English have had a settlement here since
1816. The principal town is Bathurst, on the
north side, feeing the main branch of the river.
It contains a number of excellent houses,
among which may be noted the government
hou.se, the hospital, the Wesleyan chapel, with
the dwellings of the merchants, &c. The
population in 1846 was 3689, of whom only
50 were white persons ; the rest were Mandin-
goes, Jaloofs, and liberated slaves. Several
missionaries have died here ; and the schools
which were opened here by the Society of
Friends, in the year 1823, as also those which
they established, at the same time, on the
neighboring coast at Birkow, Mahmadi, and
Sandani, have sunk under the unhealthiness
of the climate. The immediate foundress of
these schools was the celebrated Hannah Kil-
ham, that spirited lady who, for ten years to-
gether, itinerated the west coast of Africa,
commenced schools in many places, and in
each of them devoted her particular attention
to the languages and dialects, of which she
printed a number of valuable specimens. She
had herself brought up and educated two Afri-
can youths in England, and it was with the
assistance of these she opened the schools at
Birkow. But she fell a victim to the country
fever in the year 1832. The Wesleyan mission
has stood better, inasmuch as it still continues ;
though one Christian messenger after another
has sunk into the grave, and almost yearly
some such mournful tidings reach us from this
station. The Wesleyan mission commenced
its labors in 1821, at a place called Mandara-
nee, in the territory of the king of Combo, on
the south bank of the river, about eight miles
from St. Marys. This locality, however,
proved to be ineligible, and the health of the
missionaries, Morgan and Baker, having failed,
the mission was removed to Bathurst, where,
as also in Melville Town and Soldier Town on
the island, and in Berwick Town on the conti-
nent, they have new chapels which are very
regularly frequented by native converts and the
heathen.
The Rev. Richard Marshall and his Avife were
sent out, in 1823, to strengthen and extend the
mission at St. Marys. Mr. Morgan and Mr.
Hawkins were then laboring there ; but in a
short time we find Mr. Marshall laboring alone.
He toiled on, however, assisted in the school
department by his devoted companion. But
in August, 1830, he was laid low, and in five
days the malignant fever carried him off. As
soon as an opportunity ofi'ered, the desolate
widow, with her little infant, embarked for
England, taking with her an African girl,
Sally, to take care of them during the voyage.
But great bodily weakness and extreme mental
sufiering soon jprostrated her, and within 48
hours of the ship reaching the port of Bristol.
INIrs. Marshall, unable to proceed to her friends
in the north of England, died among strangers^
though on her native shore, leaving her baby in
the hands of his African nurse, both strangers in
a strange land. One cold morning in the month
of October of that year, several young men, can-
didates for the missionary ministry of Method-
ism, were passing through the streets of London,
on their way to meet the secretaries and com-
mittee, to be examined in reference to their
qualifications, and the fields of laljor to which
they should be sent. Just as they arrived at
the Old Mission House in Hatton-Garden, they
80
AFRICA, WESTERN.
met a ucgro girl, carrying in ber arms a poor,
sickly-looking -white child. They spoke to her,
and while her sable arms were folded affection-
ately round her little charge, and the tears
flowed down her face, she told them of her
country, and of the missionary and his dear
wife, whom she had so much loved ; how they
had toiled and suffered for Africa, and how
they were dead, and no one to cai-ry on the
work ; and here she stood before the commit-
tee, that had sent out the man of God and his
wife, bearing back the missionary's orphan
boy, and pleading that poor Africa be not
given up. The devoted creature's appeal, ut-
tered with an energy and a pathos truly aflect-
iug, produced an immediate and powerful im-
pression upon the missioiiary candidates ; and
one of their number, William Moiatcr, imme-
diately offered himself to fill the vacated post.
In a few weeks he was on his way ; and M'hcn
he arrived opposite Bathurst, and it became
known that there was a missionary and his
wife on board, the Christian natives gathered
to the beach, plunging into the water to meet
the boat, out of which they lifted them and
carried them ashore. They set them down
and then wept aloud for joy, kissing their
hands again and again, and, as they bedewed
them with their tears, exclaiming, " Tank God,
tank God, Mr. Marshall die, but God send us
nuder minister ! " They proceeded to the mis-
sion house ; but the wild flowers had grown
upon the unused steps during the few preced-
ing months. Mr. Moistcr entered upon his
w^ork in faith, and his labors were soon owned
of God ; and others having been sent to his
assistance, he extended the mission to Macar-
thi/s Island, a most important position for a
mission. This move brought them into con-
nexion with the Foulah tribe, the very people
that were the ol^jccts of Dr. Coke's benevolent
but unsuccessful enterprise in 1796. Macar-
thy's Island is situated in the Gambia river,
about 250 miles from its mouth. It is nearly
seven miles long and one broad, having the
Gambia on both sides. From the central
situation of this island its trade, in gold, ivory,
hides, and beeswax — its being the i-esort of
the shijiping, and the facilities which its noble
river affords for communication with the coast
and the interior — no better position can be
found in all Africa for a missionary station.
Here, therefore, the Wesleyau committee estab-
lished a strong centre of operation, including,
as part of their plan, an institution for educa-
ting the sons of the neighboring kings and
chiefs. The committee were encouraged to
engage in this enterprise by the noble niunifi-
ceuce of a single individual — Dr. Lindoe, of
Southampton — and whose benevolent zeal is
the more to be appreciated, inasmuch as he was
not connected with the "Wesleyau denomina-
tion of Christians. From 183.3 to 1848, Dr.
Lindoe and his family expended upon the Fcu-
lah Mission over $19,000. A tract of 600
acres of land having been given by the Gov-
ernment, the Avandcring and persecuted Fcnc-
lahs were invited to settle upon it. School
houses were built, and the Eev. Mr. Macbrair,
formerly the Society's missionary in Fgypt,
was sent out to Macarthy's Island to translate
the Scriptures into the language of the Man-
dingoes and Foulahs. Several able native
missionaries were raised up, upon whom the
work has since chiefly devolved, and the society
there, with the genuine spirit of a missionary
church, are laboring and jiraying that the na-
tions contiguous to them may also be favored
with the light of saving truth. The record
of mortality in this mission is truly painful.
During the past 32 years, out of 24 persons
sent out, 15 have left the field disabled, and 12
have fallen into the arms of death 1 And yet
men are found who, with their lives in their
hand, rush forward and offer themselves for
these posts as often as they are left unfilled by
the ravages of disease and death. The longest
term of service was that of Eev. W. Fox, who
was enabled to stand his ground for ten years.
And next to him was Eev. H. Badger, who,
after spending twelve years in the South Afri-
can missions, went to the Gambia in 1848, and
remained there until the death of his noble
wife last year obliged him also to retire. The
late Mrs. Badger was one of the most devoted
female missionaries that ever was sent out by
any Christian society. Twenty years of her
life she devoted to the instruction and salva-
tion of the African race, in the West Indies,
at Sierra Leone, and at the Gambia. The
languages employed at the Gambia, beside the
English, are the Jaloof, the Mandingo, and the
Foidah. For information as to the present
state of this mission, the reader is referred to
the table near the end of this article.
IIL The Cape Coast District.— With the ex-
ception of the German Mission at Akropong
and Ussa, the only missions on the Gold Coast
are those of the Wesleyan Society. This coast
runs from the mouth of the river Adirio or
Volta, to Cape Appolina, a distance of about
240 miles. The leading power in this district
of Africa is the Ashantce nation, the capital of
which is Coomassie or Kinnasi. The coast of
Guinea, of which the Gold Coast is a part,
first became known to Europeans in the six-
teenth century. At that period the spirit of
discovery, which during the middle ages, had
])een confined to the Arabs, manifested itself
in Europe in amost remarkable manner. Tho
Fortuguese, who led the way, prosecuted their
researches with enthusiastic ardor, and along
tlie western coast of Africa, and from various
points penetrated into the interior. The Eng-
lish first commenced trading with Guinea in
the latter end of the reig-n of ]*]dward VI.;
but the merchants who engaged in such com-
merce were exposed to consideral)le risk, "n
consequence of the pretensions of the Fortu-
gucsc, who having built the fort of St. Gcorgf
AFRICA, WESTERN.
81
del Mina, endeavored to enforce their claim to
an exclusive right to trade with the Gold
• Coast, as well as the other parts of Western
Africa. The Dutch deprived the Portuguese
of tlieir forts and settlements, on the G-old
Coast ; and their attempt to serve the English
in" the same way, led to the war between the
Dutch and English in 1667. At its conclusion
the English company were left in possession of
only one fort, that of Cape Coiist Castle. But
they soon extended themselves on the coast
again. At this time the Fantees governed
the whole country round Cape Coast — having
the powerful and warlike Ashantees on the
north of them. The eruption of the Ashan-
toes into the Fantee country first brought
them into collision with the British, in the
year 1807. The Ashantees desolated the
country — and their great military power may
be imagined from the fact of the immense and
disciplined armies they brought into the field.
It is stated that, in some of the wars in which
this powerful people engaged, often 30,000 men,
and in two instances, as many as 100,000, have
been left dead on the field of battle. In the
war of 1807 they took the Dutch fort at Cor-
mautiue, they then fiercely attacked the Bri-
tish fort of Annamaboe, when a negociation
ensued, and Chibbu, the author of the war, had
to be given up to them. A second and a third
invasion followed, until the Fantees were com-
<j)letely subdued, and the British found that, to
retain their own possessions they must concili-
ate these powerful conquerors. An embassy
therefore was sent to Coomassie, a treaty con-
cluded, and a resident appointed to represent
British interests at the capital. Symptoms of
di^piietude, followed by another treaty, having
occurred, the Home Government resolved to
try harsher measures, and appointed Sir
Charles McCarthy Governor of Cape Coast."
He adopted a warlike policy. Hostilities were
commenced between the British and the As-
hantees, in which at first the British were suc-
cessful, but in the fatal battle near Assamacow,
Sir Charles was defeated and slain, and his
army cut to pieces. As an illustration of the
spirit and temper of the savage Ashantees, it
may be mentioned that they cut the heads of
Sir_ Charles and several of his officers from
their bodies, and having seized the Secretary
of the General, Mr. Williams, they confined
him in a room where the heads were kept.
They also tore open Sir Charles' body and took
out his heart, and having divided it, it was
eaten by the Ashantee Generals, in order that
they might, as they imagined, imbibe his
bravery. His flesh having been dried, was di-
vided,_ together with his bones, among the
captains of the army, who kept their respective
shares about their persons, as charms to in-
spire them with courage.
About two years from this period, in Sep-
tember, 1826, another and a decisive battle
was fought, in which the British were victo-
6
rious. Among the trophies Tvas a human
head, enveloped in a silk handkerchief, and a
paper covered with Arabic characters ; and
over the whole was thrown a tiger skin, the
emblem of royalty. On the supposition that
this was the head of the unfortunate General
McCarthy, it was afterwards sent to England
by Colonel Purdon ; but it was really the
head of the old king Osai Tutu Quamina, (a
sotereign remarkable for his prowess) which the
new king carried about with him as a charm.
It is said that on the morning of the battle, he
offered it a libation of rum, and invoked it to
cause all the heads of the whites to come and
lie near it ; and during the day, when intelli-
gence was brought to him of the death of any
of his principal officers, he immediately, in the
heat of the battle, offered human sacrifices to
their shades.
But the blow struck by the British was so
decisive that the Ashantee monarch had to
submit to the terms imposed on him, which
were, that he should lodge 4000 ounces of gold
in the castle at Cape Coast, to be a^jpropriated
in purchasing arms and ammunition for the Bri-
tish allies, in case the Ashantees should again
commence hostilities ; and that two of the
royal family of Ashantee should be sent to
Cape Coast as hostages. To these terms he
was obliged to conform, and in April, 1831,
his son Qiuintiinissah, and his nephew Amah,
arrived at the Castle. Tli&se princes were
kindly treated ; they received a good education,
under the direction of the African Committee,
by whom the British Government now con-
ducts the affiiirs of the Gold Coast; and
thi-ough the faithful ministry of Rev. J. Dun-
well, the first Wesleyan missionary to the
Gold Coast, they both became convinced of
the tnith and excellence of the Christian relig-
iou,_the public profession of which they assumed
during their subsequent visit to England,—
Quautamissah receiving in baptism the name
of William, and Ansah, that of John. They
returned to Africa with the Niger Expedition,
and were accompanied to Coomassie by the
Rev. T. B. Freeman, Wesleyan missionary at
Cape Coast Castle. The favorable impression
produced on the mind of the Asliantee monarch,
by these two princes, as well as by a few nor
tive Christians who had returned to Coomassie
from Sierra Leone, to which they had been
carried as rescued slaves, by the British cruis-
ers, were thus the means employed by Provi-
dence for opening Ashantee to the labors of
the Wesleyan Missionary Society.
Here we leave the narrative for the present,
in order to glance at the work which had pre-
viously been begun in the regions on the south
of the Ashantee kingdom nearer the sea.
Between Coomassie and the South Atlantic
Ocean there are several kingdoms, as Asin,
Aquapim, Akim, Fantee, &c., over which the
monarcLs of Ashantee formerly claimed supreme
sovereignty. And it is humiliating to reflect
82
AFRICA, WESTERN.
that tliough three Protestant powers of Europe
— the Danes, the Dutch, and the English — have,
successively had intercourse with these and
other parts of Guinea for three centuries, yet
until a comparatively late period, bul few at-
tempts have been made to communicate to the
native population the light and blessings of
Christianity. In the year 1751, a clergyman
of the Church of England went out under the
Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in
Foreign Parts, to the Gold Coast, to see what
could be done in establishing a mission there.
During the four years of his stay he officiated
as chaplain of the troops and residents at Cape
Coast Castle, but was much discouraged in his
attempts to establish the faith of the Gospel
among the natives. His health having failed
he returned to England in 1756, and puljlished
an account of his efforts. Before leaving, he
had sent home three native boys from Cape
Coast, who were placed by the society to
which he belonged, in a school in Islington,
under the care of Mr. Hickman, with whom
they are reported as having made considerable
proficiency in useful learning, and in the knowl-
edge of the Christian religion. One of these
youths, of the name of Quaque, was afterward
sent to the University of Oxford, and having
completed his education there, he received or-
dination, and returned to exercise the Christian
ministry in his native country. He was chap-
lain at Cape Coast Castle for more than fifty
years ; but does not appear to have Ijeen in-
strumental in turning any of his countrymen
to Christianity. Nor will tliis excite surprise,
when it is known that on his death-bed he
gave evidence that he had at least as much
confidence in the influence of the Fetish, as in
the power of Christianity. The case of this
individual furnishes matter for grave consider-
ation on the part of those who are anxious to
promote the enlightenment and salvation of
Africa. It yields no support to the theory of
Christianizing heathen lands, primarily or
chiefly, by bringing natives to England or the
United States, for education, with a view to
their being employed as the principal instruc-
tors of then- countrjnaien ; and shows that if
on their return, they are left to their own re-
sources, it is more likely that they will sink
down again to the level of their former state,
than that they will prove the regenerators of
their country. Instructed natives may main-
tain their consistency, and act a useful part,
where they are placed under the eye and direc-
tion of the missionaries ; but if they be thrown
back into heathen society without such sup-
port, it ought not to excite surprise, should
the result prove that the time and care em-
ployed upon their culture have been expended
in vain. Some English chaplains, who were
sent to the Gold Co;ist after the decease of
Quaque, successively died soon after tiicir arri-
val at Ca})e Coast Castle.
About twenty-four years since, a mission
was commenced by the Basle Missionary Society
at Danish Akra, and in the adjoining country
of Aquapim ; but this truly philanthropic un-
dertaking does not appear to have met with
the desired success. The missionaries encoun-
tered opposition in quarters where they ought
to have found encouragement and support ;
several of them were removed by death, and
the last smwivor, Mr. Eiis, returned to Europe
in 1840.
Such was the state of the Gold Coast about
the time that the providence of God directed
the attention of the Wesleyan Missionary So-
ciety to it. It was in the autumn of 1834 that
the committee of this society were induced, by
a peculiar train of inviting circumstances, to
send a missionary on a visit of observation to
the Gold Coast. A few native youths, who
had learned to read the English translation of
the Bible, in the excellent government school
at Cape Coast Castle, became so interested by
the contents of the sacred volume, that they
agreed to meet at regular times for the pur-
pose of reading it together, and of carefully
inquiring into the nature and claims of the
Christian religion. The formation of this in-
teresting society took place in October, 1831 ;
and, in the year 1833, William De Graft, one
of these native youths, and who himself had
begun to read the Scriptures privately in the
spirit of i^rayer and inquiry, received at Dix
Cove, where he was then residing, a request
from his young friends at Cape Coast Town,
that he would engage some suitable person,
who might be proceeding to England, to jjur-
chase for their use a number of copies of the
New Testament. Shortly after, the late ex-
cellent Captain Potter, master of a merchant
vessel from the port of Bristol, arrived at Dix
Cove ; to whom De Graft applied as one likely
to execute with promptness and care the com-
mission for the purchase of the Scriptures.
The captain was surprised at receiving such
an application from a native young man, and
became so greatly interested by the information
which his questions elicited, that he was led to
ask whether the instructions of a missionary
would not be highly appreciated by those native
inquirers after the true religion ? De Graft
replied in the afiirmative, but appeared doubt-
ful whether so high a privilege was attainable.
Captain Potter next proceeded to Cape Coast,
where he saw the other members of the meet-
ing or society, and, having consulted President
Maclean, he returned to England, resolved to
exert himself, in order that, on his next voy-
age, he might, together with copies of the
scriptures, take out a Christian missionary
who should " preach the word " to those who
were already united in seeking the way to
eternal salvation, and proclaim the gospel of
Christ to other portions of the heathenish na-
tive population of the Gold Coast. Immedi-
ately after his arrival at Bristol, Ca])t. Potter
communicated to the AVesleyan Missionary
ATRICA, WESTERN.
83
Committee in London his views as to the pro-
mising opening for missionary exertion in that
part of Africa, and generously offered to take
a missionary with him on the next voyage,
who might make personal observation and in-
quiry upon the spot ; and, should he conclude
that the prospect was not such as to warrant
his continuance for the purpose of commencing
a mission, Captain Potter engaged that in
that case he would bring him back to England
without any expense to the missionary society.
This noble offer met with acceptance on the
part of the missionary committee, and the Rev.
Joseph Dunwell was selected for the interesting
service.
This devoted missionary embarked with
Capt. Potter at Bristol, Oct. 17th, 1834. The
entries in his private journal sufficiently indi-
cate the views with which he entered upon his
arduous undertaking. He landed at Cape
Coast Castle on or about January 1, 1835,
and immediately wrote to President Maclean
informing him of his arrival, and stating the
objects contemplated by the Wesleyan Mission-
ary Committee, in sending him to that part of
Africa. The President gave him a kind recep-
tion. By the native young men who formed
the society for reading the Holy Scriptures,
Mr. Dunwell was received " as an angel of
Cod." They at once placed themselves under
his care, and he commenced his ministry at
Cape Coast town on. the first Sabbath after he
landed. Speaking of the congregation to
whom he preached his first sermon, composed
of the members of the above mentioned soci-
ety and a few others, Mr. D. remarks, " The
deepest attention was manifested ; joy beamed
on every countenance," and adds, " Their gra-
titude is without bounds, and they say, * we
never did think of the missionaries coming to
teach black men.'"
One class of persons, however, the fetish
men, speedily took the alarm, and used their in-
fluence to prevent the people from attending
Christian worship, and many of their steadfast
votaries emploj'cd ridicule and threats for the
purpose of deterring their friends and neigh-
bors from listening to the truths of the gospel.
But in spite of such opposition, the people
flocked to the ministry of Mr. D. at Cape Coast
Castle, Annamaboe, and other places which
he visited. And under the Divine blessing,
the great doctrines of Chi-istianity produced
their salutary effect on many minds, and
the number of those who felt interested in the
subject of their personal salvation steadily in-
creased. Mr. Dunwell, in his correspondence
at the time, mentioned with much satisfaction
a striking instance of decision in the case of a
woman who brought out her household gods
and publicly burned them in the presence of
her heathen neighbors.
The mission soon assumed a most promising
appearance. The large room in which public
service was held in Cape Coast town proved
too small, and a subscription was commenced
among the natives for the erection of a suita-
ble place of worship. Mr. Dunwell had se-
cured great respect among all classes of
society, and was receiving applications from
distant places to afford them also the benefit
of his labors. But in the midst of the antici-
pations which this hopeful state of things in-
spired, he was attacked by fever, under which
he sunk in a few days ; and left the societies
which he had been instrumental in forming
" as sheep without a shepherd." He died June
14, 1835. Upon his dying bed no word of
discouragement or regret escaped his lips,
on account of his having so early sacrificed
his life in the missionary enterprise ; but a
quenchless zeal for the cause of his Divine
Master sustained him to the last, and all the
solicitude he manifested was for the infant
church formed by his instrumentality.
This afflictive dispensation produced the
deepest feeling among all who took any inter-
est in the mission. On the following morning
a native wi'ote, " Sad news in the town ; the
shepherd is taken away ! The poor missionary
is dead !" Great numbers of the native people
and the resident English gentlemen attended
his funeral, at which his Excellency, the Presi-
dent officiated. On the day after the funeral,
the church met to take into consideration the
painful circumstances of their bereaved state.
The artless manner in which a record of this
meeting was made in the minute-book of the
Society, will best explain the conclusion that
was adopted : " I met the class on purpose to
know whether they would continue in the pro-
fessions they had recently entered into, or re-
turn to their former ways, in consequence of
the death of their missionary ? They said,
They would remain in the new profession : for
though the missionary ivas dead, God lives."
Another appeal was forwarded to London,
which was replied to by the Committee in the
appointment of Mr. Wrigley and his wife to
the vacant station. They arrived in Sept.,
1836, and were followed next year by Mr. and
Mrs. Harrop ; but in a short time Mrs. Wrig-
ley sunk under the hand of death, and both
Mr. and Mrs. Harrop, within a few weeks of
their arrival on the coast, were attacked by
fever and in a few days after were both laid in
the grave. Mr. Wrigley was but just recover-
ing from an attack of the fever when he was
bereaved of Mr. and Mrs. Harrop. But
though left alone he toiled on at the erection
of the large new chapel, and preached the
gospel till ISTovember, when he also was taken
ill and died. The arrival of Rev. Thomas B.
Freeman and his wife early in January, 1838,
once more revived the drooping spirits of the
native church. Mr. Freeman had zealously
entered upon the duties of his mission when he
was attacked with the seasoning fever ; and
while watching with solicitude at his sick bed,
Mrs. Freeman was seized with a violent inflam-
84
AFRICA, WESTERN.
matory complaint, which terminated her vaUi-
able life in a fewliours. Mr. Freeman gradu-
ally recovered his health ; and from that period
its to England, has been engaged in the exe-
cution of plans which have contributed great-
ly, under the Divine blessing, to the enlarge-
to the present, except during his occasional vis- ' ment of the mission on the Gold Coast
•sJBionag pnB
'
o o o
r^ o o o o o
-m -diqsjo^
^ *0^ T-J^
r-T
r4" r-Tl-T
sT
oo"
»!l'l"tl ""
IH
■-'
s;nBpnanv JO 'ON
-
£ o
O T-H <N
* CO C-J
O Tj C-1
CO
3i h- CI -f 00
o
CI
^l-^-i
o OJ »:3
1.0
^
a
lgi-§
EH
'^
.
^
-O o *
-: .-3 ■*
3 i~ o >ra 00
l-si^
a
•1
'is'^-2
£
fc5 o 5^
33 00-*
Ol'
3J O CO » • O
^
0,1
M o CD -* • r-
5^ =S El
?
-
q^oq JO s-ii'ioips
S =2 -:;
O iO 'O
1
■t coo
Sco n
■0 iH
35 »~ CI ■* 00
-O CO CO irt ■ CO
-t d CO •
o
p
CO
-^BQ .JO JOqtUn^SI
rl
IM
-
1-1
-*
•sjoonog
IH CO O
«
rH 1-1 1-1
CO
3> lOCO t- • Tjl
00
c<
CO
-jCbq jo jaqmn^
'"'
>.-.
•saxog
q^oq JO sjc^oips
i» r-l CO
s s; s
O
0 05^
03
i-O
00
U5
-ijlTjqqBj! JO -ox
1-1
'"'
■qooqos-qj'Bq
(M t- lO
•*
rlrtl-l
eo
1--
tH
-qns JO Jaqmnx
' f'
Q
1— I
«
H
CO
■diqtuaqmaK
aoj iBuj no
O lO rH
O CI -^
C-1 rH
?5
lJ
i-l Oi
CO CO
o
^S'*^ : ^
1ft
CI
CO
•swqmaj^ qojniio
pa^ipajooy put
2 J;; 2!
fH CO -*
0» CO O
1—1
I- o
00
Ph
1— 1
~ p
O -* CO iH r)< t-
lO CO ^ 03 CO
^ C«rH
CI
o
?I
o
P
nnj JO aaquinx
-)< 1-1
CO
"-I
00 i
5?;
^
1^
t^ lA »n
o c< n
o
t— 1
>a CO
00
Eh
t- o •* >a • C^
CO
CI
oo
CO
o
t
9 S
^
<i
^
fcs ^
£
1— 1
O
M
1"
P
'
o
P3
OC-IC
<M
o
«
J5
t- ■>* CO
1-1
o
<1
CI
a
cT:-^
1.
o
1/2
- 1
1
- Y -■*
1— 1
H
t-5
:8
S
'- -2 2
f- ■* CO
CO -*
t-
CI -# •<* CO . CO
CO
g
-S"
^i
3o
"* « IM
^
dlH -1-1 • CI
CO
CO
c/i
5
•ojjip iUBJSlSb-V
lO .1 Fl
«-
— rHrH
eo
Ml-li-li-lrH T-i
00
ao
pUB FaUBUOIBSIK
"^
•t00BIJ-3aU|3B0Jt£
1-1 c<
CO
n • •
c<
-* O iH ■<* rH C^
^
d
aaqio JO -Ofj
"^
•siodBqo
t~ 00 CO
1-1
■N I-l CO
CO
O CO CICI • r^
eo
o
JO Jaqinn;^
CO
r?;
:"r?
o
•d
1
i
13
:3 . .
4S ^
fl
u
1
1.
3
J
<
;
.
11
i
3
1
1
C
O
rJci CO
1
rn' ci CO
r" CI K> 1"rt CO
APRICA, WESTERN.
85
Mr. Freeman is a colored man, auJ though
not born in Africa, yet of African parentage
He has received the benefits of a thorough ed-
ucation, which added to bis great natural abil-
ities, and all sanctified by a zeal for Christ and
for Africa which nothing can quench, renders
him an agent of preeminent ability. On his
arrival at Cape Coast in 1838, he found that,
notwithstanding the bereavements which death
had made in the missionary ranks, the cause
of God was in a state of increasing prosperity,
chiefiy by the labors of the local preachers and
class leaders, so that there Avere over 450
church membei'S scattered over the district
where the missionaries and their devoted assist-
ants had itinerated. There were also a few
schools, with five or six places of worship, one
of which could hold from 6 to 700 persons, and
was well filled with attentive hearers. The
new chapel at Cape Coast was completed soon
after Mr. Freeman's recovery. This is proba-
bly the largest place of worship out of Sierra
Leone, on the west coast of Africa ; and on
the day of dedication it was crowded to its
utmost capacity by a deeply interested con-
gregation of Africa's sons and daughters. The
Gospel had been introduced in Anuamaboe by
the lamented Mr. Dunwell, and the claims of
Christianity were first introduced to the inhab-
itants of Winnebah, on the east of Cape Coast
Town, by William De Graft, who had now be-
come a local preacher and a useful agent of
the Society, Mr. Freeman had also the joy
of seeing the gospel established and extended
in Akra, and at Domonasi, Dix Cove, and sev-
eral other places. But it is in connection with
his visits to Ashantec (pronounced As-hanti,)
that Mr. Freeman's name has come so pro-
minently before the public of late years.
The territory over which the king of Ashan-
tec reigns, including the dependencies of that
power, are not much, if at all, inferior in ex-
tent to England and Wales united. The pop-
ulation is estimated by Mr. Beecham at over
4,000,000 ; while the capital city, Coomassie,
(pronounced Kumasi,) is said to contain at least
100,000 persons. They are a powerful race of
men, but, to a frightful degree reckless of human
life ; and some of their manners and customs
are not to be exceeded on earth for blood-
thirstiness and brutality. Their monarchy is
very powerful — they have a large army, of over
150,000 men, well disciplined, and also great
wealth, which they delight to exhibit in truly
barbarian magnificence.
This remarkable people claim a remote an-
tiquity, but from the want of \vritten records
among them, little can be known of their early
history. The mountains of Kong, on the north
of their tei-ritory, seem to have opposed a suc-
cessful barrier to the desolating tide of Moham-
medanism as it swept over the regions through
which the Niger rolls its coui-se. During, or
about, the thirteenth century, that portion of
the pure Negro race which could not brook
the Mohammedan rule, took refuge to the
south of this great mountain range, and have
there maintained their independence to the
present day. Among all the negro Icingdoms,
Ashantee holds the foremost place ; and the
conversion of such a people to the faith of
Christ, should it take place, would be " life
from the dead " to the nations around them.
And hence the surpassing interest which at-
taches to any opening for the Gospel, however
small, among this remarkable people, (See
Ashantee and the Gold Coast.)
Mr, Freeman felt the importance of attempt-
ing to introduce Christianity into Ashantee,
and at length an opportunity offered ; and
leaving the mission at Cape Coast under the
care of William De Craft, he made preparation
for the arduous undertaking. As an evidence
of their desire to spread the Gospel among
their countrymen, it may here be mentioned,
that the native Christians at Cape Coast not
only were willing to relinquish the benefits of
their missionary's care for several months, that
he might perform this service, but they also
contributed of their own little means $600
toward the expenses of his journey, Refer-
ring those who desire more information on this
interesting subject than the limits of this arti-
cle will allow, to the published Journals of Mr.
Freeman, we will merely state a few facts in
conclusion. He left Cape Coast on the 29th
of January, 1839, accompanied by a few at-
tendants, and, after being detained at various
towns along his route by the superstitious fears
of the Ashantee king, who could not compre-
hend why a missionary should want to see
hira and visit his capital, no stranger ever
having gone there, except to trade or conclude
a treaty, or for some secular object ; and yet,
under the idea that ]NEr, Freeman was a pow-
erful fetishman, whose wrath it would be im-
politic to provoke, the king at length gave
consent that he might approach the capital.
Mr. Freeman afterward learned, that previous
to leave being granted for his approach, a sac-
rifice of two human victims had been made
with a view to avert any evil that might,
without such precaution, result from his visit.
Great preparations were made for his recep-
tion. At length, on the 1st of April, he
entered Coomassie, and was received in the
spacious market place, by the king and big
officers and arniy, with others, to the amount
of over 40,000 persons. And there he stood,
the first herald of the Gospel that had ever
entered the dark and blood-stained capital of
^*Vshautee to offer to its monarch and its jieoplo
the religion of purity and peace.
The king, though kind, would not commit
himself as to the establishment of schools and
a mission station in his capital, but requested
time to think of it, and wished Mr, Freeman
to return soon again and he should give him
an answer. After a delay of fifteen days, iu
consequence of a " custom " for a deceased
86
AFRICA, WESTERN.
relative, to whose shade 42 human beings v;cvQ
sacrificed iu two days, while Mr. F. was there,
he was allowed to depart ; having striven to
commuuicate to the monarch and his counsel-
lors, as far as they were disposed to give him
audience, as full an exposition of the-Gosi^el
as he poss^ibly could. He evidently made a
good im2)ression at Coomassie, and though the
door was not opened, yet, by his being kindly
received in his avowed character as a mission-
ary, its bolts had l)eeu drawn, and he hoped a
future visit would result in a free access for
the Gospel. The publication of Mr. F.'s jour-
nal greatly increased the interest already exist-
ing on behalf of Ashantee, and a special fund
of ^25,000 was soon raised to open a mission
iu that kingdom. Accompanied Vjy the two
Ashantee princes, who had just I'eturned from
England, the youngest of whom is heir to the
throne, Mr. Freeman set out on a second visit
to Coomassie iu November, 1841. He was
kindly received, and succeeded in obtaining
ground for a mission-house and permission to
establisli a school, and have the Gospel preach-
ed in the streets and markets of Coomassie
without any restraint. And though little has
as yet been accomplished in the way of gath-
ering a church, yet the fact that ten or twelve
hundred persons statedly attend Christian wor-
ship in the capital of Ashantee is cause of
great encouragement, and we look forward
with hope that this citadel of the Powers of
Darkness will yet be surrendered to the Cap-
tain of our Salvation.
In addition to introducing the gospel into
Ashantee, Mr. Freeman was enabled the next
year to visit Sodcke, the powerful chief of
Abbeokuta, and obtaiued permission to preach
the gospel and open a school in the capital,
which Mr. F. considers to be larger than even
Coomassie ; so that there are now Christian
missions in Ashantee, Badagry, and Abbeo-
kuta, besides Cape Coast Town, Dix Cove,
Annamaboe, Domouasi, Akra and other im-
portant places. 'J^he (jueen of Jabin also, has
lately applied to Mr. Freeman, very earnestly
requesting him to establish a mission in her
dominions.
Badagry and Abbeokuta have been descri-
bed by travelers, particularly by Lander, as the
seat of the most sanguinary sui^erstitiona,. and
the scene of the worst atrocities and cruelties
of the slave-trade ; and yet even here have the
returned and christianized emigrants from
Sierra Leone been kindly received by the
savage monarch, and the foimdation of a Chris-
tian church l)een laid. But for further infor-
mation we must refer the reader to the forego-
ing tables. An institution for training a
native ministry is in operation at British Akra,
under the care of Mr. Wharton. All the re-
ports for IS-^S from this district speak of the
continued prosperity of the work in highly
gratifying terms. A recent letter of the gen-
eral superintendent says : " Never has the work
of God in this district been kno^Ti to assume
so cheering an aspect. The influence of Chris-
tianity is rapidly extending itself into the in-
terior. All the out stations, except perhaps
Kumasi, are in a healthj', vigorous, and flour-
ishing condition — the pastoral visits to the
stations iu the intei-ior delight us much ; they
are means of grace to ourselves." The writer
goes on to exemplify this latter statement by
the details of a recent journey taken for the
double purpose of opening a n«w native chapel
at Abiiadi, which has been built by the chief
of that town, at his own expense, and presented
to the mission, and of laying the foundation of
a chapel at Dunquah, where the Gospel is ex-
tending its power among the people. — Wesley-
an Missionanj I^oiices, Annual Reports, and the
Annual Minutes and Magazine; Fox's History of
3Iissions on the IVcst Coast of Africa ; Moister's
Missionary Memorials of Western Africa; Blum-
Imrdt's Manual of Missionary History and Ge-
ography ; and Beecham's Ashantee ami tlic Gold
Coast. — PtKV. TV. Butler.
Amkuican Baptist Missioxary Union. —
This mission is restricted to that part of the
coast of Africa known as Liberia, and to the
Bassa tribe of its inhabitants, a people occu-
pying a strip of the coast, ninety miles in length
lying between Junk river and the river Sesters,
extending nearly seventy miles in the interior.
They are supposed to be about one hundred
and twenty-five thousand iu number.
The first missionaries sent by the Board to
Africa were Eev. Lott Carey and Rev. Collin
Teage, two colored men, who were ordained at
Richmoud,Ya., in January, 1821, and soon after-
wards sailed for Liberia as emigrants of the
American Colonization Society. This society
had then no colony upon the coast, and Messrs.
Carey and Teage went to Freetown, in the
English colony of Sierra Leone. In February,
1822, they removed to Monrovia, a settlement
planted by colonists from America, and com-
menced their labors as missionaries. Dui-ing
the following year a church was formed and
six persons were added to it by baptism, and
iu 1824 nine more were baptized, and a house
of worship was erected. Of this church Mr.
Carey became the pastor, his associate having
meanwhile returned to Sierra Leone. He
was a man of unusual intelligence and energy
of character, and his career was one of great
usefulness to the people of his race, with whom
he was brought in contact on the shores of
A frica.
Early in 1825 Eev. Calvin Holton was ap
pointed to this mission by the Board, and sailed
for the American colonies ivhich had been
planted on the coast. He had, however, scarce
ly arrrived. when he fell a victim to the fevei
which in that climate seldom fails to attack
Europeans from other latitudes. Meanwhile,
the mission was sustained by Mr. Carey with
the aid of two or three pious assistants whom
he found among the emigrants. He provided
AFRICA, WESTERN.
87
most of the resources by which it was kept
alive, for the allowance of the Board was at
this time, very small, and gave direction and
character to all its operations. These em-
braced the emigrant colonists at Monrovia, also
the natives dwelling upon the coast, especially
those at Grand Mount, where he preached and
established schools. In September, 1826, he
was elected vice-agent of the colony, and sub-
sequently, on the return of Mr. Ashmun to
the United States, he was appointed for the
interim to the post of governor, the duties of
which he was discharging at the time of his
death. Serious depredations had been made
upon the property of the colony by some na-
tives, and Mr. Carey had called out the troops,
and was making arrangements for its defense
when the accidental explosion of a large mass
of gunpowder suddenly put an end to his life.
At the period of his death the church of which
he was pastor contained a hundred members.
It was committed to the charge of Mr. Teage,
who now returned from Sierra Leone, and of
Mr. Waring, one of its members lately ordained
a minister. The agencies which had been es-
tablished by Mr. Carey, long survived his
death, and continued to bless the race for which
he had toiled. The church at Monrovia soon
numbered two hundred members, and the in-
fluences of the gospel were extended to the
natives of the coast, of whom nearly a hundred
were united with the several churches of the
colony.
In 1830, Rev. Benjamin Skinner was ap-
pointed a missionary to Africa, and arrived at
Monrovia with his family in December. Soon
after their arrival they were all prostrated
with the fever of the coast, and in the course
of the following six months they all fell vic-
tims to its ravages, Mr. Skinner himself dy-
ing at sea on his passage to the United States.
After these disastrous issues of the attempts of
the managers to employ missionaries in Africa,
five years elapsed before any reinforcement
was sent to the mission. During the interval
the gospel was preached, and public worship
and the ordinances of religion were maintained
by preachers who were appointed from among
the pious emigrants. The most conspicuous
of these, in addition to those already named,
were Rev. A. AV. Anderson, Rev. John Lewis,
and Rev. Hilary Teage son of Collin Teage.
In the summer of 1834-, Dr. Ezekiel Skinner,
father of the missionary, went to reside in Li-
beria. He had been a physician, and also a
minister in Connecticut, and now emigrated
to Liberia from motives of i^hilanthropy to-
wards the race for whose interests his son had
sacrificed his life. This gentleman was sub-
sequently chosen governor, and exerted both
his personal and official influence in favor of
the mission and the spiritual objects it was in-
tended to promote.
In 1835 Rev. W. G. Crocker and Rev. W.
Myine offered themselves to the Board, and
were appointed missionaries to Africa. Their
proposal was a noble sacrifice, which the man-
agers, though they did not feel at liberty to
solicit it, yet were unwilling to decline. They
were persons of education and of high qualifi-
cations for the service to which they devoted
themselves. They sailed from Philadelphia
on the 11th of July, 1835, and arrived aft<3r a
brief passage, at Monrovia, and immediately
repaired to Millsburg, a town in the vicinity,
in order to go tlnrough with the process of
acclimation. They were soon all attacked with
the fever of the coast, which terminated the
life of Mrs. Mylne, the only lady of the com-
pany. Mr. Mylne and Mr. Crocker, though
with reduced strength, were soon able to enter
upon their labors as missionaries, and for this
purpose they selected, with the advice of Dr.
Skinner, Edina as the place of their residence.
This was a settlement of the Colonization So-
cieties of Pennsylvania and New York, at the
mouth of the Mecklin river, opposite Bassa
Cove, the principal trading place of the Bassa
tribe, a numerous people whose language was
widely spoken along the coast and in the in-
terior. They began to acquire the language
with the aid of a young colonist who could
speak both Bassa and English. They made
themselves acquainted with the people of the
country by several excursions into the interior,
and at the same time preached and established
schools among the emigrant colonists both at
Bassa Cove and Edina. At the former place
a house of worship was erected by funds which
they collected, and during the year 1836 six-
teen persons were baptized and added to the
church of which Mr. Mylne was temporarily
the pastor.
During the same period, also, Mr. Crocker
was able so far to master the language as to
prepare a spelling-book and small vocabulary
of words and phrases ; to which was also ap-
pended a brief ovitline of the facts of divine
revelation. These were printed in December,
1836, and contributed very perceptibly to the
progress of the schools and to the general intel-
ligence of the tribe. It was not till June, 1837,
that the mission buildings at Edina were ready
to be occupied, and at this time the missiona-
ries, who had suffered repeatedly from attacks
of disease, established themselves there and
commenced their work more immediately
among the native population. They had also
frequently visited a district up the river, whose
chief manifested so great interest in their
labors, that in October, 1837, Mr. Crocker
took up his residence at Madebli, the princi-
pal village of the district. The chief's name
was Sante Will, and he claimed to be an im-
portant patron of the mission, and was the
first to entrust his sons to the care of the mis-
sionaries. The number of children now sent
to the school at Edina was quite as large as
could be provided for, and many of them were
sons of the principal chiefs among the Bassas ;
88
AFRICA, WESTERN.
the son of king Kober being the most promi-
nent, both for intelligence and for excellence
cf character.
The mission at Ediua was now fully estab-
lished, but its heroic conductors, though they
appear to have taken a most hopeful view of
their condition and prospects, yet found them-
selves in the midst of ignorance and stupidity,
of degrading superstitious and brutal wrongs,
such as could scarcely have been found in any
other portion of the world. The colonists in
the neighboring settlements often presented
an example and exerted an influence most un-
friendly to the interests of the mission ; while
the natives of the coast were so debased by
barbarian passions, and so brutalized by super-
stitions, as hardly to be capable of compre-
hending spiritual truth. In addition to this,
they were near the marts in which the horrid
traffic in slaves was constantly carried on, in
many iustances by the very persons to whom
they were engaged in preaching the gospel.
They, however, were not disheartened, and
even prepared to extend the influence of the
mission to other tribes, both on the coast and
in the interior.
In January, 1838, this mission was strength-
ened by the arrival of Rev. Ivory Clarke and
his wife, who, so soon as they had recovered
I'rom the acclimating fever— which with them
was unusually mild — entered upon the study
of the language and the performance of such
labors as their inexperience would admit. The
prospects of the mission were brightened by
this accession, but only for a brief season ; for
Mr. Mylne, who had suffered from repeated
fevers, in the following May was obliged to
return to the United States, and with a consti-
tution hopelessly shattered, to withdraw from
the service of the Board. The station at Edina
was now committed to the care of Mr. Clarke,
assisted by two of the emigrant colonists ;
while ]\[r. Crocker still dwelt at Madebli, en-
gaged in preaching, teaching in the schools,
and translating the Scriptures ; in the latter
of which he was assisted by the young prince
already mentioned, the son of king Kober, the
great chief of the Bassas. In September, 1839,
the mission welcomed to Edina, Miss Riz.pah
Warren, a lady who had been appointed by
the Board a missionary teacher. Early in the
following summer she was married to Kev. W.
G. Crocker, and went to reside with him at
the village of Madebli, where she was soon
attacked by the fierce fever of the climate and
died in eight days, on the 28th of August,
1840. Mr. Crocker was first attacked, but
recovering from the immediate violence of the
disease, he was able, after the death of his
wife, to escay)e to Cape Talmas, and thus to
prolong his life by a change of climate. Thus
enfeebled by disease and depressed by sorrow,
he returned to Madebli in October, and again
entered upon the la1)ors of the mission. Early
in 1810, Messrs. Alfred A. Constantino and
Joseph Fielding offered themselves to the
Board as missionaries either to the western
coast or to the interior of Africa. An impres-
sion at that time prevailed that the climate of
the interior might be found less injurious to
European constitutions than that of the coast ;
and the British government was preparing an
expedition to ascend the Niger for the purpose
of introducing among the tribes of the country
the arts and the commerce of Europe. In ac-
cordance with this impression, and the hopes
which were inspired by the Niger expedition,
the new missionaries were specially designated
by the managers to the country lying' upon
that river. They accordingly sailed with their
wives in September, 1840, and reached Ediua
on the 3d of December ; and here they deter-
mined to pass the period of their acclimation,
and also to await the results of the expedition
that was about to ascend the Niger.
The African fever soon seized them with its
accustomed violence, and within six weeks of
their arrival, both Mr. and Mrs. Fielding be-
'came its victims. Mr. and Mrs. Constantine,
though they survived the fever, were wholly
unable to engage in the labors of the mission.
They remained at Edina, hoping to regain
their health by making excursions along" the
coast, and in which they were also able to
extend their acquaintance with the character
of its people. I^Leanwhile, the British expedi-
tion made its disastrous passage up the Niger,
late in the summer of 1841. The frighti'ul
destruction of human lilc which attended it,
and the reduced and disabled condition in
which it returned to the coast, put an end to
the hopes with which it had been undertaken,
of finding a more salubrious climate in the
interior. The design of establishing a branch
of the mission there was entirely abandoned.
Mr. Constantine, no longer able to endure the
climate of Africa, returned with his wife to
America in June, 1842, and soon after dis-
solved his connection with the Board.
In July of the preceding year, Mr. Crocker,
in consequence of declining health, had re-
turned to the United States. He had left the
mission with the utmost reluctance, at what to
him was the period of its greatest interest and
promise. Much good had been accomplished ;
schools had been established, and were largely
attended ; prejudices and superstitions had
been overcome ; and more than all, the power of
the gospel had been displayed in the conversion
of several of the natives and a large number of
the emigrants. The churches connected with the
mission were multiplied and enlarged, and their
members had begun to appreciate their obli-
gations to spread the gospel among those who
knew it not. A new station was also estab-
lished at Bexley, a little town on the Mccklin,
six miles from Edina ; and a printing press
had been received, and a printer only was
wanted in order to put to press several por-
tions of the New Testament, and other volumes
AFRICA, WESTERN,
89
wliicli the missionaries had prepared in the
Bassa language. Mr. Crocker, in hastening
away, as he felt obliged to do in order to save
the remnant of his enfeebled constitution, was
compelled to abandon all these interests and
prospects, over which he had long watched
with the fondest care. After his departure,
the entire charge of the mission devolved upon
Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, who had under their
direction three or four assistants employed
either as teachers or preachers. The press was
set in operation in September, 1842, under the
superintendence of a printer obtained from the
colony, and several books were printed for the
schools, and also for circulation among the few
who could read. Two schools were maintain-
ed, one at Edina and one at Bexley, contain-
ing, together, about 90 pupils, of whom 55
were natives. Companies were also assembled
at both the stations on the Sabbath, and often
on several evenings during the week, for in-
struction in the doctrines of the Bible and of
Christian morals. An out-station was estab-
lished at Duawi's town, a large village 30 or
40 miles in the interior, at which the chief
promised to build a school-house, and to sup-
port a teacher, if Mr. Clarke would provide
one. The school was begun by a young native,
who had for several years been under the in-
struction of the missionaries.
Mr. Crocker, on reaching the United States,
abandoned all hope of ever returning to the
mission, so shattered did his constitution ap-
pear to have become. He however soon betook
himself to the South, and after a residence of
several months in a more friendly climate, he
found himself so far i-estored that he again
presented himself to the Board and asked to
be sent back to his 2>lace in the mission which
he had loved so well. His proposal was gladly
accepted, and he sailed from Boston, January
1, 1844, in company with Mrs. Crocker, he
having been married a little time before to
Miss Mary B. Chadbourne, of Newburyport.
He reached the coast on the 24th of February,
apparently in excellent health ; but on the sec-
ond day after his arrival, while engaged in the
services of the pulpit at Monrovia, he was
fatally seized with a violent hermori'hage of
the stomach, and died after an illness of two
days. The fall of this rare missionary, in a
manner thus unexpected, seemed to blight the
prospects of the mission and almost to extin-
guish the hopes of its friends. Scarcely had
the intelligence of his return been spread along
the coast when the tidings of his death carried
mourning to every village and almost every
dwelling. He was a missionary of truly apos-
tolic stamp, and his name deserves to be en-
rolled among the foremost of the heroic men
who in different ages of the church have braved
every peril and at length sacrificed life itself
for the benefit of the benighted children
of Africa.
Mrs. Crocker, thus early widowed on the
desolate shore of a distant continent, attached
herself to the family of Mr. and Mrs. Clarke,
at Edina, and immediately set about prepar-
ing for the labors of the mission, on which she
was soon able to enter. In January, 1845, the
principal station was removed from Edina to
Bexley, a locality deemed more favorable to
health and nearer to the Bassa people ; but a
subordinate station was still maintained at
Edina and new out-stations were commenced
at Zuzo and at Little Bassa, the latter under
the charge of the young Chief Kong Kobcr,
or as he now chose to style himself Lewis
Kong Crocker, in honor of his lamented teach-
er. At these several stations the assistants,
under the guidance of the missionary and of-
ten associated with him, preached the Gospel
to the people. The ladies of the mission were
engaged in schools, while Mr. Clarke employed
himself as much as possible in translating the
Scrijitures, and preparing books for instructing
the natives in useful and religious knowledge.
He compiled a dictionary of the Bassa lan-
guage, and translated the gospels and some of
the epistles of the New Testament, which by
the close of 1846 were ready for the press ;
but which appear never to have been pub-
lished.
The health of Mrs. Crocker was rapidly
declining, and after one or two unavailing voy-
ages along the coast she was obliged to aban-
don the mission and return to this country.
Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, who had generally been
blessed with better health than their associates,
now began to experience the injurious effects
of that pestilential climate. Mr. Clarke liad
often represented the condition of the mission,
and appealed in the most earnest manner for
its relief, but none had offered themselves for
the perilous sci-vice, and the solitary mission-
ary, fearing that if he went away, all would be
lost, determined to remain at his post until his
ability to labor was entirely exhausted. He
carried forward the work of translating the
Scriptures and preparing books ; he increased
the number of the schools, and perfected their
organization, and in all the villages of the
tribe he preached the gospel and urged the
people to repent and be converted. These la-
bors were attended with most beneficial results.
The morals and manners of the people were
greatly improved — all the interests of civiliza-
tion were promoted, and many of the natives
in the villages where the missionary had
preached, embraced the Gospel and were bap-
tized in accordance with its Tequirements.
But the life of the missionary was rapidly
wearing away ; yet, though repeatedly urged
by the Executive Committee to return to the
United States, he lingered at his post in the
hope that some one would at length come to
take his place. The hope was constantly defex'-
red, and without its being realized he was pros-
trated by disease, and compelled to leave the
mission, in April, 1848. He died after a few
90
AFRICA, WESTERN.
days, at sea, on liis passage to America, on the
26tli of the same month.
Thus terminated another period of effort
and trial, of hope and of disappointment for
the Bassa people — a worthy succession of noble-
hearted men had laid down their lives in the
service of the mission till now none were left
to carry forward the plans which had been
formed and the labors which had been begun.
Mrs. Crocker and Mrs. Clarke of necessity re-
mained in the United States, and the interests of
the mission were committed wholly to the care
of native assistants. The station at Bexley
was placed under the charge of Eev. Jacob
Yonbrunn, assisted by two teachers, while that
at Little Bassa was superintended by Lewis
Kong Crocker. The schools at both were main-
tained, and were well attended. Public worship
was also held on the Sabbath, and each year
witnessed some accessions to the native church.
The assistants proved themselves to be men of
fidelity and discretion, but the mission, as was
to be anticipated, was shorn of its energy by
the bereavements it had sustained.
After many unsuccessful attempts by the
Board to revive the mission, Eev. Messrs. J.
S. Goodman and H. B. Shermer, were ap-
pointed for this purpose, and sailed with their
families and Mrs. Crocker, from Norfolk, Ya.,
November 27, 1852. They reached Bexley
on the 15th of the following January, in ex-
cellent health, and were welcomed by the na-
tive assistants and the Christian disciples with
enthusiastic delight. They found that the pro-
perty of the mission had been carefully pre-
served by the assistants ; that the schools and
the public worship, on the Sabbath, were still
well sustained, and that the persons who had
represented the Board, during an iuterval of
more than four years, had commanded the con-
fidence and respect of their countrymen. Mrs.
Crocker immediately put in requisition her
previous attainments in the language and
knowledge of the people, in reorganizing the
mission, and the other members entered upon
such labors as their circumstances would per-
mit.
But the period of prosperity was again des-
tined to be short, and as before, so now again,
the little missionary band was soon to be in-
vaded by death, and to be bereft of more than
half its members within a year of their arrival
in the country. Mrs. Shermer died at Bexley
in September, 1853, and Mrs. Crocker at Mon-
rovia, in November of the same year. Mr.
Shermer was so reduced by repeated attacks
of disease that he was soon obliged to return
to the United States. Mr. and Mrs. Goodman
are now the only missionaries remaining to oc-
cupy the stations, and jirosecute the labors of
the mission, and the health even of those has
begun to yield beneath the noxious (•liuiatc
that perpetually reigns along that prsfilciitial
coast. — See Professor Gammclts Jllstoni of Am.
Baptist 31issions. — Peof. W. Gammkij,.
TABULAR VIEW.
6
1
Missionaries and
Assistants.
c
s
Scl
Minis- 1 Lay Teachers,
ters. 1 &c.
lolars.
STATIOXS.
S
1 Ampripin
1
bo
1
1^
s
"5
Bexley \
Little Bassa J
1842
1845
2|2
^h
17
31
12 43
Total ....
1 ■' 1
■'\r
a.
12 143
American Presbyterian MissiONS.-The mis-
sions of the Board of Missions of the General
Assembly of the Presbyterian Church in the
United States, (0. S.) in Africa are found in
Liberia, — at Monrovia, Sinoe, Kentucky, and
Settra Kroo ; and near the Equator, on the
island of Coi-isco. These are two distinct mis-
sionary fields, distant from each other more
than a thousand miles. Each has its own fea-
tures of interest, and both are highly impor-
tant spheres of Christian benevolence.
The mission to Liberia was commenced in
1832, but has been repeatedly suspended, on
account of the death or the return to this
country of the missionaries. The Kev. Messrs.
John B. Pinney and Joseph Barr were the
brethren first appointed to this field. Mr. Barr
was called suddenly to his rest by an attack
of cholera in Richmond, Ya., while on his way
to embark for Africa. His removal was a se-
rious loss, as he was a man qualified by nature
and grace for eminent usefulness.
Mr. Pinney proceeded alone on his mission,
and arrived at Monrovia, in February, 1833.
After a few months spent in making the requi-
site inquiries and arrangements, he returned on
a visit to this country to confer with the Com-
mittee concerning the plans of the mission,
and to enlist recruits for its service. Previous
to his return, two brethren had been accepted
as missionaries for this field ; and in Novem-
ber the missionary company, consisting of the
Rev. Messrs. Pinney, Laird and Cloud, with
Mrs. Laird, and Mr. James Temple, a colored
young man, who was a candidate for the min-
istry, embarked at Norfolk for Liberia. ]\Ir.
and Mrs. Laird and Mr. Cloud were called to
their rest within a few months after their arri-
val at Monrovia, leaving a memorial of
piety singularly pure and devoted. Mr. Tem-
ple returned to the United States, and Mr.
Pinney was again left alone in the mission.
For a time he discharged the duties of Gov-
ernor of the colony with great benefit to all its
interests ; but withdrawing from this ])ost as
soon as it was practicable for him to resigt
its duties, he resumed his missionary labors.
Having been joined i)i Septom))er. 1834, by
Mr. J. F. C. Finlcy. Mr. Pinney liad a house
built for the use of the missii^n on a small
farm, at Millsburgh, a few luilrs from Monro-
AFRICA, WESTERN.
91
via. One or two colored assistants were en-
gaged as teacliers I'or schools among the
natives ; and Mr. E. Tytler, a colored man and
a licensed preacher, was employed among the
Bassas, a native tribe, at a station selected by
Mr. Piuney on the St. Johns, eighteen miles
from the sea.
The health of Messrs. Pinney and Finley
having given Avay, they were compelled to re-
turn to this country in 1835. Mr. Tytler con-
ducted a small school for two or three years
longer among the Bassas, but no very encour-
aging results appear to have followed his la-
bors. The mission was now virtually sus-
pended.
Considerable hesitation was felt about re-
suming the work of missions in Africa. The
loss of several valuable lives, and the failure of
the health of other brethren, proved extremely
discouraging to many persons. Yet others
were clear in their convictions that the Church
ought not to abandon this missionary field.
The door was open, and all things invited the
labors of the servants of Christ, with the
exception of the deleterious climate. To
^uard against this, it was thought that a more
healthy station could be found than those pre-
viously occupied, and it was considered expe-
dient for missionaries to return after a few
years to their native country, on a visit for the
sake of health. Brethren of approved quali-
fications had offered themselves specially for
this field. It appeared therefore to be the
duty of the Board to make another effort to
establish this mission.
Accordingly in 1839, the Eev. Oren K.
Canfield and Mr. Jonathan P. Alward, with
Mr. Pinney, the pioneer of the mission, made
an exploring visit along the coast for nearly a
hundred and fifty miles, during which they
were led to select a station among the Kroo
people, about half-way between Cape Palmas
and Monrovia. An interesting account of
the Ivroos is given in the annual report of the
Board for 1840. They are described as the
most intelligent and enterprising of the na-
tives on the western coast, having farms in a
high state of cultivation, and always opposed
to the slave-trade. Their distinctive name is
probably derived from the fact that many of
them are employed as crews on board of trad-
ing-vessels. This leads them to visit various
parts of the coast, although they commonly re-
turn to their own country after a few years
spent in this service.
The return of African fever soon forbade Mr.
Piuney's attempt to resume his missionary la-
bors ; but the other brethren enjoyed good
health, and after completing their exploration,
they I'etiu'ued home, were married, and Mr. Al-
ward was ordained ; and then they proceeded,
in February, 1841, to their chosen work, with
many hopes of a useful if not a long life.
These hopes were destined to be disappointed.
Mr. Alward was called to his rest in the fol-
lowing April, and Mr. Canfield in May of the
next year. They Avere both men of devoted
piety, and were qualified to be eminently use-
ful in the missionary work. Their bereaved
companions returned to their friends in this
country ; and for a mouth the station was un-
der the charge of a colored female teacher,
who had accompanied Messrs. Canfield and
Alward. The Rev. Robert W. Sawyer and his
wife, who had arrived at Monrovia in Decem-
ber, 1841, then succeeded the brethren whom
they had hoped to join at Settra Kroo ; but
in December, 1843, Mr. Sawyer was called to
join them in the Saviour's presence. Ho was
a man worthy to be their associate, both in
the church on earth and in heaven. Previous
to his death, schools had been established, and
at one time thirty boys and six girls were
boarded and lodged on the mission premises,
enjoying the benefits of Christian instruction
and example.
In the year 1842, three colored ministers be-
came connected with the mission. One of
these, the Rev. James Eden, had been for some
years at Monrovia, where he was pastor of the
Presbyterian church. This station he contin-
ued to occupy until his peaceful death, at an
advanced age, in 1846. The Rev. Thomas
Wilson and the Rev. James M. Priest reached
Monrovia in 1842. Mr. Wilson's station was
at Sinou, where, however, he was not permit-
ted long to labor, having been called to his re-
ward in 1846. He was a man of energy, and
his talents and piety gave promise of no ordi-
nary usefulness. Mr. Priest was at fh'st sta-
tioned at Settra Kroo, but removed to the sta-
tion at Sinou in 1846, where he has been much
encouraged in his work. Mr. Washington
McDonough, a colored teacher, was sent out
also in 1842, and he has continued to be con-
nected with a station among the Kroos until
the present time.
At Settra Kroo the education of native
youth continued to engage the attention of
Mrs. Sawyer, who with great devotedness had
remained at her post, although she was the
only white woman in sixty miles of the sta-
tion. She was assisted by Mr. McDonough,
and by Cecilia Van Tyne, an excellent colored
teacher, until the return of the latter for health
in 1844. In the same year the Rev. James
M. Connelly joined the mission, with whom
Mrs. Sawyer was united in marriage in the fol-
lowing December. They continued at Settra
Kroo, engaged in faithful eflbrts for the con-
version of the people, but meeting with no
marked encouragement, until they were com-
pelled to return to this country by the failure
of health in 1850. Since that time the sta-
tion among the Kroos has been under the care
of Mr. McDonough ; a small school has been
maintained, but no brighter days have been
witnessed.
In January, 1847, the Rev. Harrison W.
Ellis, a colored man, formerly a slave, who
92
AFRICA, WESTERN
with his family had been redeemed from bond-
age by Christian friends in the South, avils
sent as a missionary to Monrovia. As he jjos-
sessed considerable talent and energy, and had
acquired more than ordinary learning for a
person so unfavorably situated, it was reasona-
ble to expect that his efforts to do good would
prove encouraging to those who had taken
such a kind and liberal interest in his welfare.
He was for some time minister of the church
in Monrovia, and gave some attention to a
school ; but he is not now connected with
either. To the want of grace — more grace —
may be ascribed his not fulfilling the expecta-
tions of his friends ; but we would hope that
he may yet become a useful laborer in the
vineyard of the Lord. At Kentucky, a set-
tlement a few miles from Monrovia,' Mr. H.
W. Erskine, a colored teacher and a licentiate
preacher, lias been stationed since 1849, and
has met with much encouragement in his work.
About twenty members are connected with the
church at this station. Mr. B. V. R. James,
another colored teacher, who had been, for
some years under the patronage of a society
of ladies in New York for promoting edu-
cation in Africa, became connected, at the
instance of his former patrons, with the mis-
sion of the Board at Monrovia in 1849. He
has continued to be faithfully and successfully
employed in a large school at that place.
The Kev. David A. AVilson and his wife
arrived at Monrovia in July, 1850. Mr. Wil-
son joined this mission with a special view to
the work of Christian education, and he has
had the charge of the Alexander High vSchool,
an academy established by the Board in 1849.
The number of scholars has never been large,
iKit their progress in study has evinced capa-
city to niAkc respectable acquirements. This
institution, it is hoped, will train up many
yonn^ men for the Church and the State, It
may form the germ of a college in future years.
Bt'sides teaching in this academy, Mr. Wilson
preaches to the church, at present without a
pastor. His work is one of vital importance
to r.iberia.
The repeated bereavements of the mission
on the Liberia coast had led to the incjuiry
whether a more healthy location could not be
discovered elsewhere; and the comparative
exc'inption from fever enjoyed by the mission-
aries of the American Board on the Gaboon
river, turned the attention of many to the re-
gion near the Equator. Accordingly, in 1849,
the Rev. Messrs. James L. Mackey and George
^V. Simpson and their wives went out to form
a new mission in this part of the African field.
They werC greatly aided in their inquiries by
the counsels of the brevhren connected with
the American Board, and particularly of the
Rev. J. Leighton Wilson, a respected minister
of our body, who had been long a missionary
first at Cape Palmas and afterwards at the
Gaboon — and M-ho is now one of the Secreta-
ries of the Board. After making full exami-
nation of various places, they were led to select
the island of Corisco as their station. This is
a small island, four miles long from north to
south, and about the same in breadth at the
south end, but at the north not exceeding a
mile — having a circumference of about fifteen
miles, and an irregular surface, diversified with
narrow vallej-s and steep hills of no great
height. It is fifty-five miles north of the
equator, and from fifteen to twenty miles from
the mainland. Its population is about 4,000,
and its situation, midway in the sea-line of the
Bay of Corisco, affords a ready access to peo-
ple of the same language, the Benga, who
live on the shores of the bay and on the
sea-coast. In this part of Africa there are no
roads, and journeys can be most conveniently
made in boats along the coast or on the rivers,
so that the situation of the missionaries on an
island is ratlicr an advantage than a liindrance
to their intercourse with the natives. The
chief inducement, however, for choosing Co-
risco as the site of the mission, was the hope
that it would prove a healthy place. It con-
tains few local causes of disease, while it is
removed from the malaria of the coast on the
mainland, and enjoys the atmosphere of the
sea.
Thus far the missionaries have enjoyed
remarkable health for foreigners in Africa.
Mrs. Mackey was early called to her rest by a-
disease not connected with her new abode.
Mr. and Mrs. Simpson, in the mysterious prov-
idence of God, were lost at sea with all on
board the ship except a native sailor, their
vessel having been struck by a typhoon. This
sad event occurred in April, 1851, causing
great sorrow to the friends of this new mis-
sion. The other missionaries — Mr. Mackey,
and Miss Sweeny, who embarked for Corisco in
August, 1851, and was married to Mr. Mackey
in 1852, and the Rev. George McQueen, Jr.,
who joined the mission in the same year — have
all enjoyed good health. The Rev. Messrs.
Edwin T. Williams and AVilliam Clemens and
their wives sailed for Corisco in August, 1853.
Small schools for boys and girls have been
opened, religious worship has t)cen conducted
on the Lord's-day, and Mr. Mackey has exerted
a happy influence over the natives by his medi-
cal skill. Alread}^ many of their superstitious
practices have been abandoned, the Sabbath
is in some degree honored, and the influence
of the mission is visible in the improved con-
duct of the people. The principal employment
of the missionaries, however, has been the
acquisition of the native language. Some
interesting tours have been made on the main-
land, one extending nearly one hundred and
fifty miles into the interior, which have tended
to confirm the hope that this mission will afford
a door of entrance to a very large pojiulation.
Its location on an island may remind tlie reader
of the celelirated island of lona. on the borders
AFRICA, WESTERN
93
of Scotland — the liome of a Presbyterian and
missionary clergy in tlie sixth century. May
Corisco become to Africa what lona was to
Great Britain, Ireland, and many parts of the
continent of Europe! — Lowrie's Manual of
Missions.
TABULAR VIEW.
jnSSIGNS.
NAMES OF STA-
TIONS.
a
Ml
a
1
Missionaries and Assistants.
i
a
'3
a
a
3
Scholars.
Minis-
ters.
Lay Teachers
and others.
>
a
1
i
1
American.
Boarding.
Day.
1
1
"3
a
1
1
1
.a
LIBERIA,
lS4:i
1850
1847
1841
1850
1
1
A
1
1
1
1
5
40
33
41
78
24
*
18
28
6
78
28
18
55
KROO PEOPLE,
NEAR THE EQUATOR
Kentucky
4
9
12
Sfit+ra. Krnn , , , ,
Total
6
3 16
114
13
12
148
6
179
American Board. — On the Sabbath evening
following the meeting of the Board in 1833,
Eev. John Leighton Wilson, their first mission-
ary to Western Africa, received his instructions,
in the presence of a numerous audience, in the
First Presbyterian church in Philadeljjhia ;
and on the 24th of November following, he
embarked at Baltimore, in company with Mr.
Stephen R. Wyncoop, to explore his future
field of labor. After examining the coast from
Grand Cape Mount to Cape Palmas, a distance
of 300 miles, they fixed on Cape Palmas as the
site of the mission, and returned to this coun-
try, arriving at New York, April 13, 1834.
In the commencement of this mission, the com-
mittee instructed their missionaries to have a
primary regard to the preservation of health
and life, and to extend their operations gradu-
ally, as their knowledge, experience, ability,
and the blessing of God should enable them
to do so. The object of this mission was, to
prepare the way for an extensive system of op-
erations among the populous nations of West-
ern Africa. ♦
Mr. and Mrs. Wilson, with a colored female,
embarked from New York, Nov. 4, 1834, and
arrived at Cape Palmas the following month,
where they were received by the native popu-
lation with joyful acclamations. The frame
house, which Mr. Wilson had carried out with
him on his former visit, he found erected on
the spot he had selected, and furnished. They
were subjected, during their acclimation, to
considerable suffering from fever, Mrs. W. hav-
ing had two attacks, and Mr. W. three, the
last of which brought him to the borders of
the grave. After their recovery, they enjoyed
good health. Schools were commenced, and
by the following year, Mr. W. had prepared a
small elementary book in the native language.
On the 25th of December, 1836, Rev. David
White and his wife, and Mr. James, a colored
man, and a printer, arrived, as a reinforcement.
In about a month after their arrival, Mr. and
Mrs. White both died of fever ; but they ex-
pressed no regret, in the prospect of death, that
they had devoted themselves to Africa. Mr.
and Mrs. Wilson were prosecuting their labors,
with good health, comfort, and success. During
the year, Mr_. W.niade three tours of explora-
tion in the interior, performing his joiumeys
mostly on foot. Their boarding school num-
bered 50, one-fourth of whom were females.
One boy gave evidence of piety, and others
were inquiring. In April, there were four or
five candidates for admission to the church. In
1837, Mr. Wilson succeeded, by his judicious
interposition and influence, in suppressing a
tumultuous rise of the native population against
the colonists, before it resulted in bloodshed.
And about this time, he commenced preaching
to_ a native congregation of about 600. But
this mission, in common with others, suffered
from the crisis, which occasioned a reduction
of the appropriations to the missions. Two
of the day schools, and one-third of the board-
ing scholars in the seminary, were dismissed.
The effect of this was disastrous upon the mis-
sion, the natives not being able to appreciate
the cause.
Dr. A. E. Wilson having left the mission in
South Africa, on account of the war between
Dingaan and the Dutch boers, arrived with
his wife at Cape Palmas, Oct. 4, 1839. Their
attacks of fever, in the process of acclimating,
were slight, and the mission generally enjoyed
good health. Two native youths were admit-
ted to the church during the year, and others
were in an inquiring state of mind. Early in
September, 1840, Dr. and Mrs. Wilson com-
menced a new station at Fishtown, ten or
twelve miles from Fair Hope, the original and
principal station. There were, also, three out-
stations, and six preaching places connected
with the mission. The church numbered 23,
12 of whom were natives. Religious knowl-
edge was increasing, and many had discarded
their greegrees. Yet, there M'as great apathy
on the subject of religion. On the 13th of
October, 1841, Dr. A. E. Wilson died of an
epidemic dysentery, meeting death with much
cheerfulness and joy. Stephen Williams, also,
a native African, employed as an interpreter,
died of the same disease, and in a similar state
94
AFRICA, WESTERN.
of mind. Mrs. Wilsou removed to Fair Hope,
and took charge of the female department of
the seminary. On the 3d of February, 1842,
Rev. Messrs. "Walker and Griswold, with Mrs.
Walker, joined the mission at CapT3 Palmas.
Up to this time, the amount of printing in the
native language, at this mission, was 2,2.52,132
pages. Mrs. Walker died of fever, May 2,
1842, her chief concern being lest her death
should deter others from coming to the field.
But this mission experienced no small em-
barrassment, from being situated within the
bounds of the colony. The native teachers
and pupils, though from distinct tribes, and
owing no fealty to the colony, were required
to do military duty ; and it became obvious
that the leading object of the colony, and that
of the mission, in resjiect to the natives of
Africa, were far from being the same. There
was also too much reason to believe that the
colonists, as a body, regarded the missionaries
and their enterprise with jealousy and ill-will.
And, as it never entered into the plan of the
"West African mission that its principal oper-
ations should long be at Cape Palmas, it was
determined to seek a location elsewhere ; and,
accordingly, Messrs. "Wilson and Griswold, on
the 17th of May, commenced a voyage east-
ward, with this object in view ; and, after
touching at a number of points, fixed on a
location at the juouth of the Gaboon River,
which seemed decidedly more favorable than
any other they had seen. Though so near the
equator, the climate at the Gaboon is more
salubrious than at Cape Falraas.
Tlie chiefs received them in a friendly man-
ner, and they selected a site about eight miles
from the mouth of the river, and 20 north of
the equator. As soon as the necessary arrange-
ments could be made, the mission was removed
to this place, the stations at Fishtown and
Rocktown being transferred to the Episcopal
Missionary Society. At the new station, the
first school was opened in July, 1842, with 15
pupils ; and in the course of a year, three
schools were established, with 50 pupils, and
public worship was held at the station, and at
three other towns, within the distance of three
miles, where the people assembled in good
numbers. They a])peared friendly, and one
head man renounced his grei'grees in presence
of the people of his town, and had them sunk
in the river. They rested from labor on the
Salibath. and such was their regard for the
commandment that they refused to furnish
wood for a British war steamer on that day.
On the 23d of August, 1843, Mr. Griswold
and Mrs. M. II. Wilson were united in mar-
riage. On the 1st of January, 1844, Rev.
Messrs. Campbell and Bashiu-U sailed from
Boston for this mission, and arrived at Cape
Palmas on the 9th of March, where they were
botli taken with the acclimating fever, of
which Mr. Cani])bell died. Near the close of
1843, Mr. Griswold commenced a new station
at Oshunga, Prince Glass's town, where a
boarding-school for girls was opened with six
pupils. The people were anxious for schools,
and at King Duka's town, had built a school-
house and residence for the teacher. This
people had made considerable advances iu
civilization.
July 21, 1843, the members of the churchi
who had removed from Cape Palmas, with a few
others, met and organized themselves into a
church, adopted articles of faith, and elected
Mr. Wilson their pastor. On the 30th, B. B.
Wisner, a native of Cape Palmas, was admits
ted to the church, and the Lord's Supper ad-
ministered for the first time. The churcli
consisted of fifteen members, of whom seven
were native Africans. July 14, 1844, Mr.
Griswold rested from his labors ; and Mrs.
Griswold, whose health was suffering from the
climate, returned to the United States.
In July, 1845, Prince Glass's town was
bombarded by a French brig-of-war, and taken
possession of by armed men, the natives having
fled to "the bush." The missionaries w^ere
exposed to great danger, both from cannon
balls and musket shot, which were scattered
profusely on their premises, and with apparent
design. After this, the French admiral spent
nearly three months at the Gaboon, without
having any intercourse with the mission ; but
in February, 1846, the commander expressed
his regret that the mission premises had been
endangered ; and in the following summer,
Commodore Read, of the frigate United States,
arrived oS" the mouth of the river, and during
his stay, Mr. and Mrs. Wilson received much
kindness from him ; and he left a letter to the
French admiral, which was delivered to him
in September, and after that, they received the
most civil treatment from the French officers
and the local authorities. The Roman mis-
sionaries brought there by their ships of war,
did not appear to be doing much.
The Committee have adopted a rule, in re-
lation to this mission, similar to the one adopted
by the Church Missionary Society, allowing a
periodical return of the missionaries to their
native land, to recruit their health ; and in ac-
cordance with this rule, Mr. and Mrs. Wilson
visited this country in 1847. Their visit was
highly useful ; and in June of the following
year, they returned to their field of labor, with
the greatest possible cheerfulness, accompanied
by Rev. Messrs. Preston and Wheeler, and Mrs.
Preston, as a reinforcement. April 23, 1848.
Mrs. Walker departed this life, two months
after the birth of an infant. She never regret-
ted having gone to Africa. Early in the
morning of the day of her death, Mrs. Walker
sent for the head men in the towns, and they
came, and wept like children ; and nearly every
man, woman, and child came, feeling that they
were losing one of their best friends. She
was followed, the last of January, 1849, by
Mrs. Griswold, who was suddenly called home,
AFRICA, WESTERN.
95
speaking sweetly and confidingly of her Savior,
in her lucid moments, and manifesting entire
submission to His will. February 25, 1850,
Mrs. Bushnell entered into peaceful rest, she
having returned from her visit to the United
States, though in a consumption, that she
might finish her course in the beloved field of
her missionary labor.
In 1849 and 1850, the mission wfts reinforced
by the arrival of Eev. Mr. Best and Dr. Ford,
tlie former about six months before the latter.
Mr. and Mrs. Preston, who had arrived in
1848, had commenced a new station among
the Bakali, about 25 miles above Baraka, in
August, 1849. Messrs. Wilson and Bushnell
preached in Mpongwe, and Mr. Walker in
MpongTve and Bakali ; and in these dialects,
the Gospel was preached in ninety villages, in
1849. Eleven members were received to the
church in that year. But polygamy, in its
lowest forms, was found to be a great hindrance
to the Gospel, and the evil was greatly aggTa-
vated by the introduction of American rum,
which was exerting a most pernicious influence
along the coast.
Rev. Mr. Porter and his wife arrived as a
reinforcement, June 6, 1851 ; and early in the
following year, Messrs. Walker and Preston
returned to their field of labor. The Gospel
of St. John, in Mpongwe, translated by Mr.
Bushnell, was printed in New York, in 1852,
under his superintendance, while on a visit to
this country for his health. Mr. Wilson, being
on his periodical visit to this country, was de-
clared by physicians to lie under the influence
of a chronic disease, unfitting him for a longer
residence at the Gaboon. He accordingly ac-
cepted the appointment of a secretaryship in
the General Assembly's Board of Missions.
The Committee, in their annual report for
1853, bear honorable testimony to his excel-
lence as a missionary, and express their deep
regret for the loss of his valuable services.
Early in 1851, the brethren at Baraka suf-
fered from an unusual prevalence of fever.
Mr. Porter, who had recently arrived, was called
away by means of it on the 6th of July. He
died in the full faith and consolation of the
Gospel, and Mrs. Porter followed him on the
16th of the same month. Both of them said
that they did not regret having joined the mis-
sion, and hoped that their early death would
not deter others from entering the field. The
Committee say, in their report for 1853, that
the actual danger to life, as the Gaboon mission
is now conducted, is not greater there than in
many other missions, which awaken but little
apprehension.
The labors of this mission are directed to
three communities, each probably the repre-
sentatives of migrations from the interior :
the Mpongwes, Bakalcs, and Pangwes. The
last of these have but recently made their ap-
pearance. The country has been explored to
some distance in the interior, and found to be
hilly and apparently salubrious ; and the way
is open for missionary efforts among numerous
friendly tribes ; but laborers are wanting, to
enter in and reap the harvest. The labors of
the mission have been, to a great extent, pre-
paratory ; and its direct results are not so
clearly seen, as they will probably be a few
years hence.
The report of the mission for 1853, repre-
sents the health of the missionaries to have
been generally good throughout the year.
And, though a spirit of opposition had begun
to manifest itself among those who do not like
the restraints of Christianity, yet, the truth
is making progress. The intercourse of the
missionaries with the people and with the gov-
ernment has been most friendly throughout the
year. But, owing to the diminished force of
the mission, they have been able to occupy but
two stations.
Number of stations,
Missionaries,
Physician,
Female helpers,
Native helpers,
Church members,
Scholars in the schools,
3
4
1
2
4
22
70
United Presbyterian Synod op Scotland.
— When the converted negroes of Jamaica
obtained their freedom, their thoughts were at
once directed to their heathen friends in Africa.
Many said, " We must carry the gospel to
Africa." The missionaries constituting the
Jamaica Presbytery, representing the Scottish
Missionary Society, the United Secession
Church, and the Scotch Free Church, entered
fully into the feelings of the colored people
around them, and resolved to embody them in
action. Old Calabar was selected as their
field of labor, the King and chiefs having sent
a formal request that a mission might be com-
menced among them. The Secession Synod
having also sanctioned the movement, Rev.
Mr. Waddell was designated to take charge of
the enterprise. He accordingly proceeded to
Scotland, and was soon followed by five others.
One of these was an Englishman, who had
lived eighteen years in Jamaica, a printer by
trade ; another was his wife, a colored woman ;
another was a negro lad, about sixteen years
of age ; the remaining two were both persons
of color. A merchant of Liverpool granted
the free use of a fine schooner, the Warree, to
the mission as long as she should be wanted ;
and he also subscrii)ed £100 to keep her in a
sailing condition.
The mission sailed from Liverpool, January
6, 1846 ; and arrived at Fernando Po, April
3. They proceeded with as little delay as
practicable to Old Calabar, and were cordially
received by the natives. On the 6th of May
they opened a school in Duke Town, about
fifty miles from the mouth of Old Calabar
96
AFRICA, WESTERN.
Biver, in a house of Kiug Eyamba. Every
thing seemed to be propitious.
This mission has been prosecuted with con-
siderable success. In 1853, it had three stations,
Eock Town, Duke Town, and Old Town. Its
jjrospects are becoming more and more favor-
able. A few have applied for baptism, but, at
the latest dates, none had been admitted to the
oi'dinance. The number of scholars in the
schools was about 200. There were connected
with this mission, in 1852, ten European agents,
including females, four of the number being
ordained missionaries. From the beginning
the missionaries have publicly preached the
word on the Sabbath, and already several atro-
cious customs have fallen before its influence,
among which is the use of the poisoned nut,
as a test of witchcraft. The missionaries have
made several exploring tours into the interior ;
and they say that these regions present a wide
field for missionary labor ; that they are easy
of access, by water communication on the
rivers ; and that the country becomes more
elevated, and the atmosphere purer and more
bracin.g, in proportion to the distance from the
coast.
Stations, 3
Missionaries, ------ 4
European male assistants, - - - 1
Do. female, - - - - 5
African assistants, ----- 6
American Episcopal Mission. — The For-
eign Missionary Society of the Protestant
Episcopal Church in the United States, as
early as the year 1822, entertained the design
of establishing a mission in Western Africa,
and considerable sums were collected for the
purpose. But the design was frustrated
chiefly through the difficulty of obtaining suit-
able men, till 1834, when it was determined to
establish a school at Cape I'almas, and Mr.
James M. Thompson, secretary to the colonial
agent, with his wife, were appointed teachers ;
and the Maryland Colonization Society made
a grant of land, as a site for the mission,
about two miles from the town of Harper, on
the main government road leading to the Ca-
valla river. The situation is pleasant and sa-
lubrious, and well adapted to a manu.^l labor
school. The work of prepai-ation was imme-
diately commenced, the land was cleared, and
suitable buildings erected.
In March, 1836, Mr. and Mrs. Thompson
commenced a school in a small building, near
their residence in the town of Harper, with 20
to 30 scholars. In the summer of this year,
Mr. John Faine and Ecv. L. B. Minor, of the
Theological Seminary at Alexandria, Va.,
were appointed to this mission. Rev. Thomas
S. Savage, M. D., who had the advantage of
several years' jiractice as a physician, preceded
them, in order to become acclimated and pre-
pare for their reception before their arrival.
Messrs. Minor and Payne, after spending some
time in presenting the cause to the churches,
and collecting funds, arrived at Cape Palmas,
on the 4th of July, 1837. They found that
Mr. Thompson had made a good commence-
ment, having three acres of land under good
cultivation, with a small thatched house on the
premises, but still residing at Harper.
The Cape itself was at this time mostly oc-
cupied with houses belonging to the Agency,
and older colonists. Commencing with the
main land was a native town, of about 1,500
inhabitants. The houses or huts were con-
structed of narrow strips of boards, four or
five feet in height, three or four inches vfide,
and half an inch thick, placed perpendicularly
in the ground, arranged in the form of a cir-
cle. On this is placed the roof, made of palm
leaves, running high up to a point, like a sugar-
loaf. This town had its gree-gree place, where
some sort of religious ceremonies were per-
formed, said to be addi-cssed to the Devil.
March 4, 1837, Dr. Savage, with the mission
fiimily, removed from the Cape, and took pos-
session of the mission house at Mount Yaughan,
as the station w^as named, after the foreign
secretary of the society. The missionary ope-
rations were formally opened on Easter day,
which was kept as a day of fasting, humilia-
tion and prayer. Mr. and Mrs. Payne, and
Mr. Minor, who arrived July 4, passed safely
through the acclimating fever.
Dr. Savage made several tours among the
native tribes, and found them friendly, and de-
sirous of instruction. It was supposed that,
within 50 miles, there were 70,000 accessible
to missionary effort ; all of whom belonged to
one stock, and spoke dialects of the same lan-
guage, (Grebo.)
The care of the newly arrived missionaries,
during their acclimation, together with the re-
sponsibilities and labors of the mission, so af-
fected the health of Dr. Savage, as to make it
necessary for him to return to the United
States, which he did in June, 1838. But
he expressed the firm belief that, under dit-
fereut circumstances, his health would have
continued good. He did not regard the cli-
mate as fatal to the white man's health.
" With a moderate share of prudence," he says,
" we can live here, and enjoy good health."
In 1838, Mr. E. S. Byron, of Boston, was
sent out as a teacher. Dr. Savage having been
united in marriage with Mrs. Metcalf, of Fred-
ericksburg, Ya., returned with his wife and
Mr. George A. Perkins and wife, missionary
teachers to Cape Palmas, Avhere they arrived
on the 19th of January, 1839. Mrs. Savage
was removed by death on the 16th of April
following.
The mission was embarrassed by the jealous-
ies between the natives and the colonists :
the missionaries being identified with the lat-
ter, found it difficult to gain access to the na-
tives. This led them to the conclusion that,
in the selection of mission stations, they should
AFRICA, WESTERN.
97
disconnect themselves from the colonies, and
hold themselves neutral between the natives
and colonists.
Two unsuccessful attempts had been made
to establish a station at Garraway, a native
town about 30 miles to the windward of Cape
Palmas. It was opposed by the Bushmen, on
the ground that the effect of it would be to
stop the trade in rum. At the leeward, they
succeeded in establishing two ou1>stations, with
teachers in each.
Mr. Thompson, the colored teacher, who
commenced the mission, died of a protracted
and painful illness, which he bore without a
murmur, and departed in the exercise of a firm
hope and triumphant faith in the Redeemer.
Mr. Minor returned to the United States for
his health. On the 23d of January, 1840, he
was united in marriage to Miss Mary Stewart,
of Baltimore, and on the 15th of February,
they sailed for Africa, accompanied by Rev.
Joshua Smith, who was sent out by the Board
to labor among the colonists.
This year, the mission commenced the forma-
tion of a native town, near the principal sta-
tion, to be composed of such native families as
were willing to abandon their superstitious and
idolatrous practices, and come under the influ-
ence of Christianity and civilization. In this
town, those educated at the mission afterwards
settled ; and it soon began to assume an ap-
pearance of civilization.
In 1839, three years from its commence-
ment, there were in connection with the mis-
sion, nine missionaries and teachers, three
stations, 70 native children in schools, a
church of 17 members, and a population of
10,000 or 12,000, whom they were reaching
with their instructions. Rev. Dr. Savage was
rector of the Church at this station, by whom
two services were held on the Sabbath. A
Sunday school was held in the chapel for the
colonists, and another for the children and
other members of the mission ; and religious
services were regularly held at the out-stations
and native towns.
For some time previous to March, 1840, an
unusual seriousness had been observed at the
principal station, which continued to increase ;
and in April, nineteen appeared to give evi-
dence of a saving change. Many were inquir-
ing the way of life ; and at the station at
Cavalla, imwonted attention to the word was
manifested, and there was one case of deep
conviction.
In 1841, a new station was commenced by
Rev. Mr. Minor, at Taboo, on the coast, about
40 miles to the leeward, and beyond the bounds
of the colony, where the people expressed a
strong desire for a mission. The station at
Garraway was abandoned, and the teacher
removed to Rockbookah, the capital of the
Bahbas, whose chief had two sons in the
school.
The committee, in their report for 1842,
1
complain of the restrictions put upon the mis-
sion, by the colonial government, and of their
compulsory laws, requiring military duty of
the youth in the schools, as threatening the
mission with serious difficulties.
The year 1841 was a time of unusual sick-
ness, both among missionaries, colonists, and
natives, though less fatal than at some other
times. During this sickness, Mr. Smith, at
Cavalla, was roused early one morning by an
unusual noise, and on looking out, saw men,
women, and children, running towards the
woods, shouting and making various noises,
and when they seemed to reach the end of their
race, the report of two guns was heard. On
inquiry, he was informed that the native doc-
tors had directed the people to beat their
houses with sticks,- and chase away the sick-
ness to the bush !
In 1842, death again invaded the missionary
circle. Miss Coggeshall, who had recently ar-
rived, was stricken down, after a short illness.
Rev. Dr. Savage had been united with Miss
M. Y. Chapin ; who, after entering on h^r
duties, and advancing the female department
of the high school at Cape Palmas to a h'^h
degree of prosperity, was suddenly called to
her rest, cheerfully yielding up her spirit to
the Saviour whom she served. The following
year, Rev. Mr. Minor, whose health had for
some time been declining, was removed by
death, uttering, with his last breatli, prav^'-s
for the mission, and exhortations to his breth-
ren to " go forward." Mrs. Minor returned o
this country. Rev. Dr. Savage visited this
country for his health, and returned with a re-
inforcement, consisting of Rev. E. W. Heniug
and wife and two female teachers. The reports
of the missionaries this year were decidedly
favorable, the divine blessing having followed
their labors.
The i-eport for 1846, in a review of the mis-
sion the 10th year from its commencement,
says, " the result of past efforts is beginning to
show itself in the growing up of a generation
of young persons educated in the nurture and
admonition of the Lord, who are already '^eu-
dering assistance in the mission, and ir>m
among whom we may expect, at no distant
day, to select candidates for the minist )."
There were then 24 persons, including na*^i/e
assistants, engaged in the mission. Relip-i' -as
services were regularly held in five different
places, and other points were frequently visited.
The boarding schools contained about 150
children. More than that number attended
the Sunday schools, and about 1500 were regu-
lar hearers of the gospel. The number of com-
municants was about fifty.
Since that time, the mission has been stead-
ily progressing, without many marked inci-
dents requiring notice. In 1846, the mission
was again bereaved by the death of Rev. E. J.
P. Messenger, of the acclimating fever, soon
after his arrival, and also of Mrs. C. L. Patch.
98
AFRICA, WESTERN.
The health of every other member of the mis-
sion suffered severely, and the senior mission-
ary, Rev. Thomas S. Savage, M. D., was so com-
pletely prostrated as to be obliged to resign, and
return to the United States. The committee
this year resolved to give the missionaries leave
to return to the United States every fourth
year. The year following, Rev. ;Mi\ Hening
and wife returned to this country, on account
of the loss of his sight, and Mr. and Mrs. Ap
pleby resigned their appointments, in conse-
quence of her ill health.
To show how much labor can be performed
by one man, even in the climate of Africa, the
committee state that, during the year 1847,
Rev. Mr. Payne preached every Sabbath morn-
ing to about 200 natives ; conducted the mis-
sion Sunday school every Sabbath afternoon ;
preached four times a week in the native towns
in the vicinity ; lectured every Thursday even-
ing to the pupils and mission family ; conducts
ed daily evening service for the schools ; de-
voted two hours each day to the translation of
the Scriptures ; made three visits to each of
the more remote stations ; and officiated in the
colony forty-five times.
In 1848, the mission was strengthened by
the addition of two ordained missionaries, Rev.
Messrs. Jacob Rambo and C. C. HoSman, and
a lady of high qualifications as assistant ; and
in 1849, Mr. and Mrs. Hening returned to
Africa, accompanied by Rev. E. W. Stokes, a
colored clergyman, and Miss Williford of
Georgia. Dr. Perkins, the missionary physi-
cian, was obliged, on account of ill-health, to
relinquish his connection with the mission.
In the year 1851, Rev. John Payne, senior
missionary, was elected by the General Con-
vention, Missionary Bishop at Cape Palmas
and parts adjacent ; and the vestry of Trinity
Church, New York, appropriated $5,000 to-
wards the endowment of the Episcopate. On
the 11th of July following, he was consecrated
in St. Paul's church, Alexandria, Va.
In 1852, the mission was reinforced by Rev.
G. W. Home and three male and three female
assistants ; and it was determined to occupy
Monrovia and Bassa Cove, as stations within
the colony. Bishop Payne returned to Africa
July 7, 1852 ; and active measures were com-
menced by him for vigorous and enlarged oper-
ations. He held his first confirmation in the
new church at St. Mark's, in the colony, on
Christmas day, in presence of a large congre-
gation. Twenty-five persons were confirmed.
In March, 1852, a small newspaper, called
" The Cavalla Messenger," was commenced at
the mission, printed in Grebo and English by
two young native Christians.
From Bishop Payne's report, dated Cape
Palmas, June G, 1853, we gather the following
summary of the results of the mission : Since
its commencement in 1836, there have been
connected with the mission 31 white mission-
aries, male und female. Four principal star
tions have been established, at Fislitomn, Rode
town, Cape Palmas, and Cavalla. At all these
points native boarding schools have been main-
tained. Day schools have also been taught, in
which many heathen children have learned to
read. Sunday schools, also, have been sus-
tained. The gospel has been preached to
nearly the whole Grebo tribe, numbering about
25,000, and a congregation of colonists has
been supplied with stated services. More than
100 have been received into the church. Some
of these have died in the faith, others have
apostatized, and about 80 still remain members
of the church. A high school has been es-
tablished at Mount Yaughan, for training col-
onist teachers and missionaries. Six youths
have been sustained at an annual expense of
$75. A female colonist day school is in oper-
ation at Mount Vaughan, with 40 to 45 schol-
ars. The Grebo native dialect has been
reduced to writing, and many portions of
Scripture and other books printed in it. A
jDrinting press is in operation. A wide-spread
conviction of the truth of Christianity has been
produced in the native mind, and an expecta-
tion raised that it must supersede the religion
of the country. Two churches were in process
of erection, and the means had been raised for
a third, and an orphan asylum is being erected
at the point of the Cape. There were in the
mission two colonist and three native candi-
dates for orders.
TABULAR VIEW.
STATIONS.
'6
.a
.d
a
ci
a
s
c
H
M
.2
p
a
>
a
o
o
n
55 "
<S
^
H
cu
o
jj
Fishtown
Rock town
Cape Palmas . . . .
Mount Vaughan.
Cavalla
Taboo
Green Hill
Sinee
Bassa Cove
Monrovia
Clay- Ashland . . .
1
1
2
4
2000
5
1
1
5
1600
7
2
2
3
3000
9
1
2
9
1
2
5
1
1
5
1900
50
1
2
1
1500
1
1
*
20
1
12
16
60
100
10
15
50
Total I 11 |lli 4i 17 110,0001101 | 8|213 | 50
Methodist Episcopal Church in the
United States — Mission in Liberia. — The
Church of Christ has a profound interest in
the great experiment now being tried on the
West Coast of Africa ; and the Methodist
Episcopal Church, feeling that God had
thrown a portion of the responsibility upon
her, was early on the ground ; and has already
expended much treasure and devoted many
consecrated lives, to Africa's evangelization,
in Liberia. 'J'he mortal remains of her song
and daughters are lying in African grave-
yards, and she stands pledged by every sacred
engagement to carry on this work. This field
was her earliest foreign mission. Among the
AFRICA, WESTERN.
99
emigrants who left the United States, at the
commencement of the Liberian Colony, were
several members of the Methodist E. Church,
and with them several local preachers. On
their arrival in Liberia they at once set up
those religious services with which they had
been familiar in this country. They built
places of worship and held their class and oth-
er meetings. But they desired regular minis-
terial help, and the church in this counti-y be-
came increasingly interested in their case, until
at length, in 1832, the Rev. Mehille B. Cox
was appointed and sent forth as the first
missionary of the Methodist E. Church to Af-
rica. He arrived there 9th March, 1833, and
though in feeble health, entered at once upon
the duties of his mission. He gathered to-
gether all the members and officers of the
church then in Monrovia, and organized a
branch of the Methodist E. Church, under the
authority of the General Conference in Amer-
ica. The Swiss mission at Monrovia having
been broken up by the sickness and death
of most of its agents, the remainder of the
missionaries were ordered to Sierra Leone, and
Mr. Cox purchased their premises, and was
thus furnished with the means of at once enter-
ing upon his labors. His love for the heathen
soon led him to devise means for preaching the
gospel in the regions beyond the colony. The
plan of action which he proposed as sketched
by himself, was, '• il) To establish a mission at
Grand Bassa ; (2) Another at Sego, on the
Niger; (3) To establish a good school at
Monrovia, on the model of the Maine Wesley-
an Seminary ; and (4) Another mission either
in the interior, or at Cape Mount. He held a
camp-meeting commencing March 29, the first
probably ever held on that continent ; or-
ganized Sunday schools ; communicated with
the Missionary Board at home ; and was pro-
ceeding with his projects of usefulness, when
he experienced the first attack of the African
fever on the 12th of April. He rallied, how-
ever, but again took cold and was again re-
duced, and'on the 21st of July, this devoted
missionary slept in Jesus. This result, how-
ever, had not come upon him unexpectedly.
He had contemplated it as probable before he
left the United States. But when his own ease
or life was weighed against the salvation of
Africa, he conferred not a moment with flesh
and blood. He was willing to sacrifice all, if
by so doing the great cause in which he en-
gaged could thereby be promoted — ^joyfully
willing that Christ should be magnified in his
body whether by life or death. On his way
south, before leaving the United States, he
visited Middletown University, and on taking-
leave of a young friend there, he said to him,
" If I die in Africa, you must come and write
my epitaph." " I will," was the reply ; " but
wliat shall I write ?"■ " Write," replied Mr. Cox,
"Let a thousand fall befoee Africa be
GIVEN UP !" These words, so worthy a mis-
sionary of the Cross, have become a motto for
many who have followed him, even to an early
grave in Africa. He had been appointed to
superintend the mission, and Rev. Messrs.
Spaulding and Wright, with Miss Farrington,
were commissioned as his assistants. But they
were delayed and did not arrive in Liberia
until the 1st of Jan., 1834, nearly six mouths
after the death of Mr. Cox. He had left a
request that Bro. Spaulding, on his arrival,
should preach his funeral sermon from the text,
"Behold, I die ; but god shall be with you."
His successors entered into his labors, but
were soon attacked by the African fever, and
only five weeks after her arrival in Liberia the
estimable Mrs. Wright was laid beside Mel-
ville Cox, and on the 29th of the next month
her husband was carried to the same humble
resting place. Shortly after, Mr. and Mrs.
Spaulding were obliged, by prostration of
health, to sail for the United States, and Miss
Farrington was thus left alone, resolved, to
use her own words, to " offer her soul upon the
altar of God, for the salvation of that long-
benighted continent." In 1834 the Rev. John
Seys was sent out, accompanied by Rev. Fran-
cis Burns and Unice Sharp, (both colored,) Mr.
B. being a local preacher and Unice a teacher.
They found on their arrival, 13 preachers,
6 teachers in the schools, and a membership
of 191. This year missions were established
at New Georgia, Edina, and at Grand Bassa.
Considerable prosperity attended their labors,
and at the close of the year they reported an
accession to their numbers of 160, of whom
20 were native Africans ; but three of the
preachers had been removed by death, and 18
of the colonists had been cruelly massacred at^
Port Cresson, by king Joe Harris. Arrange-
ments were also made for establishing a mission
in tlie Condo country, and another at Bushrod
Island. Dr. Goheen, as missionary physician,
arrived with two teachers in 1837 ; and at the
close of that year the statistics of the mission
were reported as follows : 15 missionaries, one
physician, 7 school teachers, 221 scholars, and
6 Sabbath schools with 300 scholars, the church
members being 418. The work of God was
extended by the establishment of four new
stations, at Jacks Town, Sinoe, Junk, and
Boporo. In 1838 a printing office and a 25eriod-
ical {Africa's Luminary) were established, and
an academy under the charge of Mr. Barton,
of Allegany College, was organized. A manual
labor school was established at White Plains,
for the purpose of giving instruction in the
various agricultural and mechanical branches.
The steady light which shone forth to the dark
regions around them, in connection with the
few missions which they had already estab-
lished among the heathen tribes, led to many
earnest invitations from chiefs and people to
give them also the benefits of the gospel.
Deputations would frequently arrive from such
tribes as the Dey, the Goulah, the Pessah, the
100
AFRICA, ^VESTERN.
Bassa, tlic Qucah, and the Grcbo people, ask
ing for missionaries and schools. Mr. Seys
visited many of their tribes, as far as 150 miles
into the interior, and established as many mis-
sions and schools as the means at his' disposal
•svould allow. Cape Palmas also was added
to the stations in the mission, and a strong in-
terest established there.
At the close of 184.5 there were. 17 mission-
aries, about 20 chapels, 837 church members,
and IG day schools with 363 pupils, 12 Sab-
bath schools and 488 scholars. In December
of this year the Rev. Messrs. Beuham, Wil-
liams, and Hoyt, arrived, to reinforce the
mission. A few days afterwards, intelligence
was received at Monrovia that Capt. Bell, of
the United States sloop-of-war Yorktown, had
captured a slave-ship, the Pons of Philadelphia,
with 750 slaves on board. She had been only
three days out from Cabcnda, where she had
shipped 'Jl3 slaves, and during those thi-ee
days such was the barbarity ]n'acticed and the
diseases engendered that 20 died ; and during
the fourteen days the captors were getting her
to Monrovia, 1.50 more died. Governor llob-
erts. Judge Benedict, and Dr. Lugenbeel, M-ith
some of the missionaries, went on board the
slaver, and there witnessed a scene of horror
which language is inadequate to describe. The
suflering and dying creatures were landed, and
distrilnited among the colonists ; and one hun-
dred of the children were taken in charge by
the mission, to be brought up and educated at
the expense of the Missionary Society.
Bishop Payne estimates that the jurisdiction
of the Liberian Republic will eventually ex-
tend itself GOO miles along the coast, and 200
into the interior. " Here, then," to use his
own Avords, "a territory containing, besides
American colonists, 120,000 square miles, and
not far from 5,000,000 of aborigines, is the
sphere to which Providence directs American
pliilanthropy and Christianity." Forty years
since, in his celebrated speech on the Slave-
Trade, before the British Parliament, Mr. Pitt
made the following remarks : " "We may live,"
said he. '• to behold the natives of Africa en-
gaged in the calm occupations of industry, in
the jjursuits of just and legitimate commerce.
We may behold the beams of science and phi-
losophy breaking in upon that land, which at
some happy ])eriod in still later times, may
blaze witli lull lustre, and, joining their inflil-
ence to that of pure religion, may illuminate
and invigorate the mo.st distant extremities of
that iiniiiense continent." That happy period
has dawned u[)on Africa ; for these glowing
anticipation.-^ are now being realized in the
Republic of Liberia. The Board of Missions
of tlie Methodi.^t E. Church have evinced a
laudable anxiety to muet their part of the
great resixmsibility growing out of such a
state of things a.'* thi.s. But the impractica-
bility and inutility of depending in anv mea-
sure upon the labors of white missionaries for
I its accomplishment, has led them to transfer
the duties of the mission entirely to colored
ministers. So that, at present, the only white
agent of the Board in the Republic* is Mr.
Home, the principal of the Monrovia acad-
emy. This decision has been made on the
following grounds : They believe that, (1)
Whites may not expect sufBcient health to
enalde them to perform sufiBcieut labor, without
frequent interruptions of long continuance, even
if they escape with their lives ; while, on the
contrary, colored men do generally, after their
acclimation, enjoy as good health as in Amer-
ica. (2) The colored missionaries, by a previous
residence in the country, have to some extent
become acquainted with native habits, preju-
dices, and language. (3) The membership
of the Methodist Mission in Liberia has now
become so large, and of such a character, that
we may confidently look to it as the source
from -which to obtain our future supply of
laborers, in projiortiou as the necessity for
their labor becomes apparent, and the genius
of Christianity tends to render the piety and
talents of every one in the church available.
And, finally, Because the results of this great
experiment in Liberia have exhibited to the
world the competency of colored men to
govern themselves, and to take charge of all
matters of importance. With the requisite
amount of piety, they are as capable of attend-
ing to religious, as to secular, concerns — to the
affairs of the Church as well as to matters
of State. Up to 1850, the Missionary Society
of the Methodist E. Church had sent to Libe-
ria twenty-five white agents : Melville B. Cox,
in 1832, who died in six months after his arri-
val ; in 1833, Messrs. Wright and Spaulding
and their wives, and Miss Farrington. Mr. and
Mrs. "W^right both died -within three months
of their arrival, and the others, after a few
months, were obliged to return to America,
broken down by frequent attacks of African
fever. In 1835, John Seys and his wife were
scut out, and they also had to return, leaving
four of their children in the grave-yard of
Monrovia. In 183G, J. B. Barton was sent;
and after a brief residence, he returned to the
United States to recruit his health, and then
went back to Liberia, where he soon after died.
The same year S(iuire Chase went out, but was
forced to return, and though he went back
again, he had again to leave, and died from
the effects of the African climate, shortly after
his second return from that coast. Dr. Goheen,
the missionary physician, went out, with Mr.
Jayne, the printer, in 1837, but both were
obliged to come back. The next year. Miss
AVilkins and Miss Beers were sent ; the latter
left ; the former still lives ami labors, the de-
voted matron of the mission school for native
girls at Millsburg, the onli/ one, of all the white
missionaries sent out by this Board, now living
in Africa. J. Barton and AV. Stocker went
out in 1839 ; the latter died in seven mouths ;
AFRICA, WESTERN.
101
the former lived two years, and then fell a
victim to the fever. Mr. Pingree joined the
mission in 1842, and then returned ; and in
1845, Messrs. Beuham, Hoyt, and Williams,
with their wives, arrived ; but Mr. Williams
died in a month after his arrival ; and the rest,
enfeebled by disease, returned at different
times. Mr. Bastion and his wife next went
out ; but Mrs. B. and their child died, and he
r(!tm-ned. Now during all this time, but four
of the colored preachers have died, though
their numbers have been to the whites as ten to
one. Nor have they been under the necessity
of leaving Liberia to recruit their health.
The General Conference of 1852, arranged
to send Bishop Scott to visit the mission and
preside in the annual Conference there in 1853.
He went, and spent more than two months
there, and gave the whole work a thorough in-
spection, and made such arrangements as it is
hoped will tend to the greater eiiicieucy of
the mission. Here, in substance, is a descrip-
tion of his first Sunday and first sermon in
Africa, with other leading points in his report :
" Sabbath morning came, and at ' the sound of
the church-going bell ' I repaired to the place
of worship, and there, to a well-clad, well-be-
haved, intelligent assembly, preached my first
sermon in Africa, from the text, ' For the pro-
mise is unto you,' ^c. I said it was an intelli-
gent audience. I will describe it. There sat
the President of Liberia, and his wife, each
having a Bible and Hymn Book, (and this
was tiie case with all present ;) just beyond sat
the Vice-President ; in the next pew was the
tall and fine-looking figure of Chief-Justice
Benedict, and near him the Speaker of the
House of Representatives. And there we had
our first interview, in God's name, with our
colored brethren in Africa. I visited all the
settlements, except Marshall, in which churches
are established. These are luminous spots, ray-
ing out light along the dark coast of that conti-
nent. I also visited Bexley, Louisiana, Lexing-
ton, Puddington, and Mount Tubman ; all in-
teresting places, and concerning which I have
many pleasing reminiscences. In my interview
with the King of Cape Palmas, the King treat-
ed me as the father of all America, and said : —
' Merica been here twenty years and yet (al-
luding to the colonists and the natives,) we are
two people. We want one school for both.
I want bring our people (said he, suiting the
action to the word,) half round ; by and by,
bring them whole round : not do this all at
once.' The Government of the Republic of
Liberia, which is formed on the model of our
own, and is wholly in the hands of colored
men, seems to be exceedingly well adminis-
tered. I never saw so orderly a people. I saw
but one intoxicated colonist while in the coun-
try, and I heard not one profane word. The
Sabbath is kept with singular strictness, and
the churches are crowded with attentive and
orderly M'orshipers."
The Bishop also gives an account of the
meeting of the Conference, and of the value of
our African missions. He says, " At length
the time of meeting the Conference arrived,
and we entered on business. The Conference
had its president and secretary, and proceeded
to business with as much form and accuracy as
we are accustomed to do at home. On Sabbath
our religious exercises were held under the
shade of two large tamarind trees, at the con-
clusion of which I ordained eight to the office
of elder. After having surveyed the whole
ground, I am well satisfied with the church in
Liberia. While there I witnessed some of the
clearest, brightest and strongest evidences of
religion I ever became acquainted with in ray
life. The African mission is one of great pro-
mise to the church of God ; it is not only des-
tined to bless Liberia, but to pour the blessings
of light and salvation all over the continent of
Africa ; and God designs to awal^en and
Christianize its millions through the agency of
her own sons."
The Bishop enumerates the leading difficul-
ties with which this mission has had to contend.
The first is the want of missionaries who can
speak the language of the natives, and the conse-
quent necessity of still employing interpreters-
then there is the custom of dashing (or making
presents,) which the natives tenaciously endea-
vor to keep up ; then there is the difficulty of
polygamy which keeps hundreds from deciding
for God; then their vicious domestic organization
which makes the wives the mere slaves of their
lazy husbands ; then their superstitions, their
greegrees and witches ; and then there is the
vice and debasement which the natives con-
stantly contract in their intercourse with the
ships and traders on the coast. Holding offices
under government, and engaging in trade, by
the preachers, used formerly to exist — but of
late it is discontinued. — Annual Reports, and
Msssionary Advocate ; National Magazine ; Lon-
don WatclLman ; Cox's Life ; Hoyt's Land of
Hope. — Rev. W. Butler.
TABULAR VIEW.
MEMBERS.
STATIONS.
Alonrovia
Lower CalcUvcU Circuit .
Upper CaklweU Circuit.
MiUsburgh aud Wiiite \
Plains J
Heddington and Rob- >
ertsville J
Marshall Circuit
Bassa and Edina Circuit
Siuou and Reedsville \
Circuit J
Cape Palmas
ryi
-r
3
q
1.^
j3
,=
o
.'C a
a
^
fe^
£
ic
2
19-
139
1S5
197
18
Total llSo 116 115 4 19 SI, 543 01
220 35
10 00
40 00
135 00
150 00
102
AFRICA, WESTERN.
DAY AND SUNDAY SCHOOLS.
STATIONS.
3 ,0
►23
MonroAaa
Lower Caldwell Circuit ....
Upper Caldwell Circuit ....
Millsburgh and White Plains . .
Ueddington and Eobertsville . .
Marshall Circuit ■ .
Bassa and Edina Circuit . . .
Siuou and Readsville Circuit . .
Cape Palmas
Cape Mount
Lanesborouffh and Peter Harris's
Total
15
80
84
15.5
90
140
120
120
789
50
55 14
128
36
44
200
300
300
1096
20
103
80
50
10
513
12^
21
15
Southern Baptist Convention.— The South-
ern Baptist Convention have a flourishing mis-
sion in Liberia ; and they are commencing one
also in the Yoruba country. The board say, in
their report for 1853, that their mission in Li-
beria is exercising an immediately salutary
influence ; and that the facilities for beneficial-
ly affecting the heathen are abundant. The
missionaries are all colored men, and though
none of them have had the advantage of thor-
ough mental training, yet they are in advance
of the people among whom they labor, in piety,
talents, and knowledge. The reports of the
different stations indicate a healthy state of
the churches, and in several of the churches
revivals have been experienced the past year.
In the year 1852, the Board sent Rev. Mr.
Bowcn on an exploring tour to the Yoruba
country ; and his report was so favorable that
they immediately resolved on sending out a
missionary force to occupy three stations in
that field, and Rev. Messrs. J. S. Dennard, John
H. Lacy, and W. H. Clarke were subsequently
appointed ; and the intention was to send out
three more. Messrs. Lacy, Denuai'd, and
Boweu reached Lagos Aug. 28, 1853. It was
determined that they should locate, and for
the present, remain together at Ajaye. Mr.
Dennard, having gone to the coast on business,
writes, Jan. 10, 1854, conveying the sorrowful
news of the death of his wife. Mr. Lacy has
returned to this country on account of the in-
flamed condition of his eyes. At the latest
advices, Mr. Dennard was at Lagos, and Mr.
Boweu at Ijaye. At the meeting of the Board
in April, Mr. Clark Avas expected to sail in
May, and the Board were corresponding with
other brethren, with reference to this mission.
[See Yoruba and Map.)
The report for 1854 gives a cheering view
of the state of the mission at Liberia. The
churchas have been visited with revivals the
past year, and some of them have received
Iiu-ge accessions.
TABUTaAR ^^EW.
stations.
Liberia.
Cape Palmas
Sinou
Bassa Cove
Bexley
Ediiia
Junk
ilonrovia
Now Georgia
New Viigiixia
Caldwell
MiUsburg ")
Louisiana J
Yoruba.
Awaye . , ^
Ishakki >
Igboho J
Stations 14
_j3
.5
03
a
d
a
0
P^
'^
1
0 6
2g
0
1
50
4
2
*
4
23
3
1
*
1
1
*
4
1
*
4
1
*
50
80
*
1
*
10
1
.*
*
*
1
1
*
*
1
3
13
11
153t
sot
lit
30t
* No returns.
f Incomplete.
American Missionary Association. — The
mission of this society in West Africa, is called
the Mcndi Mismn, and is situated in the Shcr-
bro country. This name is generally given to
a section of country lying south and south-cast
from the colony of Sierra Leone, between TO
and 803 N. latitude, and from the 13th degree
of longitude west from Greenwich, eastward
into tiie interior. It embraces not only the
Sherbro country proper, but the IMperi country,
the Bulloms, Jung, Boom, Timneh, Boompe,
and Looboo countries, and sometimes even a
portion of the Mendi country. In general that
APRICA, WESTERN.
103
part of it which lies near the coast is low, with
numerous rivers running into each other, by
which it is really divided into several islands.
Ascending the Jong river some 30 or 40 miles
from the ocean, we reach the high lands at
Wela, or following the line of the Boom for a
much greater distance, the highlands are reach-
ed as you enter the Boompe country. At the
native town Tissana, or the mission station
Mo-Tappan, there is a considerable fall of
water, as there is also at Wela, on the Jong.
At these places Indian corn, beans, melons and
many other kinds of vegetables that are com-
mon to the gardens of the United States are
easily cultivated. Of some of them three or
four successive crops are produced in the same
season. Small villages, or African towns, are
very frequent all along the numerous rivers.
The population of these towns varies from 50
up to 1000, or more, inhabitants. There are
also scores of sites of towns destroyed in the
numerous wars instigated by the slave trade,
that curse of Western Africa,
The general condition of the people of that
part of Africa, before the establishment of the
mission, was that of heathen. Many of the
chiefs, however, arc Mohammedans some of
whom can read the Arabic readily, and pos-
sess parts of the Koran. The government of
the country is generally in the hands of these
men. The last few years has developed the
existence of idolatry much more wide spread
than the missionaries had previously any idea
of. Many of their idols, of the most hideous
and revolting form, have been voluntarily given
up to the missionaries.
The history of this mission properly com-
mences with the seizure of the schooner Amis-
tad, by Lieut. Gedney, U. S. K., near the east
end of Long Island, in 1839. He found on
board the vessel about forty Africans and two
Spaniards, one of whom declared himself the
owner of the negroes and claimed the Lieu-
tenant's protection.
After an examination before a judge of the
United States District Court, for Connecticut,
the Africans were committed to the jail at
New Haven, for trial on a charge of murder
on the high seas. When it was ascertained that
they were recently from Africa, and had been
illegally bought at Havana, to be carried to
Principe, to be enslaved, and that they had risen
upon their enslavers, and recovered their liber-
ty, much interest was excited in their behalf.
A few friends of freedom met at New York
and appointed a committee to receive dona-
tions, employ counsel, and act as circumstances
might require. Legal counsel were employed,
native African interpreters were obtained, and
a committee of gentlemen at New Haven un-
dertook to secure suitable instruction for these
unfortunate and benighted pagans.
Hon. John Quincy Adams, at the solicita-
tion of the Committee, consented to act as
senior counsel, and the cause was finally argued
by him and Hon. Roger S. Baldwin before the
Supreme Court of the United States, at the
city of Washington, February and March, 1841.
The following letter addressed to a member
of the Committee, gives the result :
" Washington, 9th March, 1841.
" The captives are free !
" The part of the decree of the District Court,
which placed them at the disposal of the Pre-
sident of the United States, to be sent to Af-
rica, is reversed. They are to be discharged
from the custody of the Marshal— /rce.
" The rest of the decision of the courts below
is affirmed.
" ' Not unto us — not unto us,' &c.
" But thank&-thanks ! in the name of human-
ity and of justice, to you. J. Q. Adams."
As these Africans had been instructed in
the elements of knowledge, as particular care
had been taken to enlighten them on the sub-
ject of Christianity, and as they all expressed
a strong desire that some of their religious
teachers should accompany them to their nar
tive land, the Committee deemed it a duty to
make their return, after such a providential
train of circumstances, the occasion of plant-
ing a mission in the heart of Africa. Aa
the funds had been contributed by persons of
various denominations, most of whom were of
anti-slavery principles, it was thought proper
to make the mission anti-slavery and anti-sec-
tarian in its character. Accordingly the fol-
lowing resolution was adopted :
"Resolved, That it would be contrary to the
feelings and principles of a large majority of
the d'onors to the Amistad fund, and of the
friends of the liberated Africans, to connect
their return with any missionary society that
solicits or receives donations from slave-
holders."
A passage was secured for them in a vessel
bound for Sierra Leone, and a farewell public
meeting held in the Broadway Tabernacle,
New York, Nov. 27, 1841 ; by the Union
Missionary Society ; when the instructions of
the Committee were delivered by S. S. Joce-
lyn to the missionaries under appointment,
viz.. Rev. James Steele, Rev. William Ray-
mond and Mrs. Raymond ; and parting coun-
sels were given to the Mendians, some of whom
took part in the exercises.
They arrived at Sierra Leone, January 15,
1842, after a passage of fifty days. All their
stores, tools and implements of agriculture
were admitted free of duty, and even without
examination. Governor Ferguson proffered
every necessary assistance. Soon after arriv-
ing, Messrs. Steele and Raymond became sat-
isfied of the impracticability of their reaching
the Mendi country, and, ascertaining that part
of the Amistads belonged to the Sherbro
country, and that all were willing to go there,
Mr. Steele, accompanied by Cinque and sev-
104
AFRICA, WESTERN.
oral others, visited Sherbro. King Henry
Tucker, to whom they went, lived at Kaw-
Mendi, (a town of the Sherbro) and seemed
willing to receive the people into his territory.
The conditions were, however, too hard to be
accepted, and Mr. Raymond, with the Afri-
cans, spent the next rainy season at Tork,
Sierra Leone. Mr. Steele was compelled by
ill health to return to the United States.
In November, 1842, a location was selected
for the mission about a mile below the village
of Kaw-Mendi, and 160 square rods of land
were obtained, half a mile on the river, extend-
ing a mile back, for which was paid an annual
rent of $100.
On the arrival of the missionary and the
Africans at Kaw-Mendi, the King ordered a
smvcl to be loaded and fired, as a token of
joy. The women and girls began to sing and
dance. A multitude of men, women and chil-
dren flocked around to see the ivhite woman,
having never seen one before. In the morn-
ing, many people were drawn together by their
singing and praying at family devotions. On
Lord's day, Mr. Raymond held religious servi-
ces, and preached his first sermon here from
John iii. 16 : " For God so loved the world,"
&c. The king attended, and seemed much
impressed.
The influence of the mission on the slave-
trade, on the king, and on the people, quickly
became apparent. A flourishing school was
soon in operation, and Mr. Raymond felt
greatly encouraged. His language w^as, _" This
mission is evidently planted by God himself.
I am more and more satisfied of it. It will
prosper."
On the first Lord's day in January, 1845, he
organized a church with five members. His
cares and labors were great ; but he was per-
mitted to see fruits abounding amidst the diffi-
culties with which the mission was surrounded.
A terrible war commenced in the Sherbro
country in 1845. Many towns were burned.
Hundreds fled from the scenes of war to the
mission, as a place of refuge. The persons and
property of all connected with it were respect-
ed. Its character as a place of freedom, peace,
temperance, and Christianity, was kown far and
wide. Rev. Henry Badger at that time wrote,
" Did you ever hear of a mission being establish-
ed in the midst of war ? Here is one, and it has
advanced during the war more than previously.
A school has been formed, and is doing well.
The Mission Establishment, at first regarded
with much suspicion, is now looked upon with
great respect. It is a sanctuary. And while
other towns and places are consumed by fire,
and their inhabitants destroyed by sword, or
carried into slavery, this flourishes and im-
proves."
After the death of Mr. Raymond, in Nov.
1845, the mission, with its school of over sixty
children, Wius for eight months muler the care
of Thomas Bunyan, a native Mendian, who
had previously acted as an interpreter and
teacher. Two missionaries sailed from New
York for the mission, April 8, 1848. One of
them, Mr. Carter, died eight days after his
arrival at the mission ; the other, Geo. Thomp-
son, labored there alone for two years, suffei'-
ing much of the time from sickness. During
this time, there was much deep religious intcr-
esW manifested by those about the mission, and
many were received into the mission church :
the first one was Te-me, one of the girls taken
in the Araistad. The next reinforcement con-
sisted of Mr. and Mrs. Brooks, and Mar-Gni-,
another one of the girls taken in the schooner,
who had been at school in Ohio. Mrs. Brooks .
died before reaching the mission. They were
followed to Africa in Dec. 1850, by a company
of eight ; and Dec. 25, 1852, another company
of seven newly appointed missionaries sailed
from New Tork for that mission. Since that
time, only one missionary has joined the mission.
TABULAR VIEW.
STATIONS.
Kaw-Mendi
Good Hope
Mo-Tappau. .. .
Total
1842
1853
1853
One female assistant not located.
Besides the stations which appear in the
foregoing table, the missionaries are under
instruction to open a station, either at Mp-
Bwavi, in the Looboo country, or at Wcla, in
the Timnch country.— Rev. George Whipple.
Basle Missionary Society. — The Basle
Missionary Society turned its attention to the
Gold Coast in 1826 ; and four of its agents
arrived at Christiansborg, near Akra, in 1828.
Three of them soon died ; and the fourth found
himself under the necessity of taking the place
of the Danish chaplain, who had also deceased,
only to follow hira, however, in 1831. In 1832
three other laborers reached Christiansborg ;
one of them, a physician, soon fell a victim
to the climate ; and another did not long sur-
vive. In 1835, Riis, who alone remained, went
to Akropong, which is a considerable place in
the Aquapim mountains, north-east from Akra.
He was kindly received by the king and Ins
people, and he commenced his labors among
them Two fellow -laborers came to Ins aid in
1836, but both soon deceased. At length, after
many disappointments, a new ])lan was adopt-
ed. Riis (accompanied by AVidmann, and a
AFRICA, WESTERN.
105
colored man wlio had been educated in Swit-
zerland,) conducted twenty-four Christian ne-
groes from Jamaica to Akropong, where they
arrived in 1843. A chapel was erected at this
place in 1844. This mission has been prose-
cuted to the present time ; and at the anniver-
sary of the Society, held July 6, 1853, its
affairs were in a prosperous and hopeful condi-
tion. The number of laborers was IG, and the
congregations had increased. The station at
Christiansborg had been particularly favored.
It has stations at Akropong, and at Ussu,
(Danish Akra.)
TABUI.AR VIEW OF MISSIONS IN WESTERN AFRICA.
SOCIETIES.
Church Missionary Society
English Baptist Mission
English Wesleyan Mission
Basle Missionary Society
American Board
Scotch Missions
Presbyterian Board
Episcopal Board
Southern Baptist Convention
American Methodist Episcopal Church
American Baptist Union
Totals
28
80 120 4 42 239 17 7 11 13,154 642 154
2976
lis
8021
114
101
600
1185
17
5921
450
5343
70
179
213
30
040
31
12,877
It will be seen, by the foregoing statements,
that a good beginning has been made in the
evangelization of Western Africa. Many val-
uable lives have been sacrificed, in the attempt
to plant the gospel on these inhospitable shores.
But they have not been sacrificed in vain. If
more than 13,000 souls, or a moiety of them,
have been saved through the instrumentality
of these missions, it would be worth the sacri-
fice of every missionary who has landed there.
But, the results of these self-sacrificing labors
reach far beyond w^hat appears in these statis-
tical tables. A large amount of preparatory
work has been accomplished ; native helpers
have been raised up ; communications have
been opened into the interior, and the way
l^repared for establishing missions among a
great number of large tribes, inhabiting the
more elevated and healthy portions of the con-
tinent, who are in a more hopeful condition
for missionary labors than those on the coast.
And, experience has removed, in a great de-
gree, the dangers of acclimation on the coast.
A large number of the native languages have
been mastered, and a number of them reduced
to writing. A good beginning has also been
made in the departments of translation and
printing.
Rev. Dr. Krapf, of the mission of the Church
Missionary Society in Eastern Africa, has made
to the mission at Gaboon a deeply interesting
proposal — the forming of a South African con-
tinental mission line, from the Gaboon to the
starting point of their mission in the neighbor-
hood of Zanzebar. North of the equator, this
would be difficult, on account of the variety
of languages and the hostility of the different
tribes. But it is a remarkable feature of all
the dialects south of the equator, spoken by
the black man as distinguished from the
Hottentots and Kafires, that these dialects all
have a common language for their basis. The
people, likewise, are essentially one people in
manners and customs. It has been discovered,
that, by an intercourse of a few weeks, the na-
tives of the eastern coast, and of the Gaboon,
converse with each other. This great family
of languages seems also to be remarkable for
the excellence of its structiu*e. The place of
meeting on this continental mission line would
be some one of the central mountains, supposed
to divide the great basins from which flow the
waters of the Nile, and of the Zaire, and of
the shorter rivers running into the Indian
ocean. These mountains may be 800 or 1000
miles from either coast ; and it is a cheering
fact that three or fom' hundred miles of the
eastern portion have already been traversed by
Dr. Krapf and his associates. The missionary
aspects of the two opposite sides of the conti-
nent have some strong points of resemblance.
On the east, a healthful upland was found much
nearer the coast than was expected ; and moun-
tains are seen from more than one of the Ga-
boon stations. The shores of the Gaboon are
healthful, compared with most rivers of Africa,
but will probably not compare with the eleva-
ted table lands of the interior ; and no more
will the coast from the east. A thick jungle
covers the plains and valleys on both sides,
106
AMERICAN BOARD.
creating the necessity of traveling on foot.
But the opening of the rivers to navigation,
may, in a measure, obviate this. And the
increasing desire for missionaries among the
interior tribes, shows that Providence is open-
ing wide the doors for the entrance of the
gospel on every side.
AHMEDNUGGUE : The city of Ahmed-
nuggur is situated on the table land of the
Ghauts, in Hindoostan, in a plain 12 or 15
miles in extent each way, and is about 175
miles north-east from Bombay. It contains
about 50,000 souls, and the population is in-
creasing since it has become a military station.
It was once the seat of the Mussulman power
in this part of India, and appears, from its
palaces, mosques, aqueducts, and numerous
ruins, to have been a place of much splendor.
It is four or five miles in circuit, and entirely
surrounded by a high wall of stone and clay.
It was occupied as a mission station by the
American Board in 1831.
AHURIRI : A station of the Church Mis-
sionary Society in New Zealand.
AINTAB : A large garrison town on the
northern frontier of Syria, in the pashalic of
Aleppo. It is 65 miles north of Aleppo, 50
miles cast of Scanderoon, and 30 miles west
of Bir. It has a population of 35,000 to
40,000. It is one of the most interesting
stations of the American Board among the
Armenians.
AITUTAKI : One of the Hervey islands,
and a station of the London Missionary So-
ciety.
AK-HISSAR: An oul^station of the
American Board among the Armenians ; it is
the ancient T/njatira, the seat of one of the
Apocalyi^tic churches ; population 7000.
AKRA : A station of the Wesleyan Mis-
sionary Society in Africa, on the Gold coast,
a short distance to the east of Cape Coast
Castle.
AKROFUL : An out-station of the Wes-
levans in West Africa. (See Annamaboc.\
"AKROPONG : A station of the Basle Mis-
sionary Society, on Cape Coast, Africa.
AKYAB : The name of a district and a
city in Arracan, one of the provinces of British
Burmah. The city contains from 10,000 to
20,000 inhabitants. Since 1840 the city has
been a station of the American Baptist Mis-
sion in Arracan.
ALBANY : A district and town in Sierra
Leone, West A frica, occupied by the Wesleyan
and Cliurch Missionary Societies.
_ ALUERVILLE, in Upper Canada : A sta-
tion of the Wesleyan Miss. Society among the
Indians; commenced in ^817; has now two
missionaries, several out-S' Ations, 80 members,
an industrial school with 54 pupils, and over
700 attendants on public worship.
ALEPPO : A town of Syria, the capital
of a pashalic situated in the vast plain which
extends from the Orontes to the Euphrates.
It is built on eight hills or eminences, and is
three and a half miles in circumference, sur-
rounded by an ancient strong stone wall forty
feet high. It is a station of the London
Jews' Society, and some Protestants are
found among the Armenian and Greek pojiu-
lation.
ALLAHABAD : A large city at the junc-
tion of the Ganges and the Jumna, in Northern
India, a station of the Presbyterian Board.
ALLEN TOWN : Station of the Church
Missionary Society among the liberated Afri-
cans in the river district of Sierra Leone,
W. Africa, south-east of Freetown.
AMALONGUA : Station of the Ameri-
can Board among the Zulus, near Port Natal,
in South Africa.
AMAPURA : The ancient capital of the
Burman Empire, situated on the Irrawaddy,
seven miles below Ava, the present capital.
The government was removed in 1824.
AMBALA : A station of the Presbyterian
Board in Northei-n India, nearly equi-distant
from Lodiana, Saharunpur, and Sabatten.
AMBOYNA: One of the Molucca or
Spice islands, in lat. 3° 41' south, and long.
128° 10' east. It belongs to the Dutch, and
contains a population of 29,660. The Nether-
lands Missionary Society have a flourishing
mission on this island. (See Indian Archi-
pelago.)
AMERICA : (See United States, Canada,
Nova Scotia, New Brunsivick, Labrador and
Greenland, Indians, Mexico, and South America^
AMERICAN BOARD OF COMMIS-
SIONERS FOR FOREIGN MISSIONS :
Of all the foreign missionary boards and
societies now preeminent among the bene-
volent institutions of the United States,
the A. B. C. F. M. was first in the date
of its organization. Yet it must not be
supposed that the spirit of benevolence — or
even what may be regarded as more specifi-
cally the missionary spirit — had previously no
existence in the American churches. Nor
must it be supposed that all the influence on
the churches, which led them to enter on the
foreign missionary work, was exerted by any
one, or any few individuals. The missionary
spirit is but the Christian spirit looking upon
the unevangelized ; and from the first settle-
ment of New England there had been much
of this spirit in the churches. Earnest, and
by no means unsuccessful, efforts for the evan-
gelization of the native Indian tribes, had been
made by the Mayhews, Eliot, Sargent, Brain-
ard, Wheelock, Kirkland, and many others,
extending through a period of more than 160
years, from 1643 to 1808, before Mills or Hall,
Judson or Newell, offered themselves as mis-
sionaries to the heathen.
About the commencement of the present
century it began to be obvious that the mis-
sionary feeling was rising and extending in
AMERICAN BOARD.
lOY
the United States, and would be likely soon to
open for itself new channels of effort ; and " no
man was the leader of the movement ; " God
was working for his own cause. In 1799, the
Massachusetts Missionary Society was formed
at Boston. In 1S04 the constitution was modi-
fied, and the object of the society was defined
to be " to difl"use the gospel among the people
of the newly-settled and remote parts of our
country — among the Indians of the country,
and through more distant regions of the earth,
as circumstances shall invite and the ability
of the society shall admit." Under this con-
stitution this society, had the means been fur-
nished it, might have sent missionaries to any
of the '• distant regions of the earth ; " and
some of the sermons preached at the annual
meetings of the society, as also sermons before
other missionary societies in the earlier years
of this century, and especially one by Dr.
Griffin before the General Assembly of the
Presbyterian Church in 1806, urge the claims
of the heathen, and the greatness and excel-
lency of a universal missionary work, with
eloquence and earnestness which have seldom,
if ever, been surpassed. Dr. Parish, the
preacher before this society in 1807, alludes
to " five societies in Massachusetts for propa-
gating the gospel," to " similar societies in all
the states of New England," and to " mission-
ary societies in the middle states," as then
existing. The Connecticut Evangelical Maga-
zine, commenced in 1800 ; the Massachusetts
Missionary Magazine, commenced in 1803 ;
the Massachusetts Baptist Missionary Maga-
zine, commenced the same year ; the General
Assembly's Missionary Magazine or Religious
Intelligencer, commenced in 1805 ; difftised
among the churches much intelligence in re-
gard to missionary operations in foreign lands.
Mr. Norris, of Salem, when applied to by Dr.
Spring, in 1806, to aid in endowing a Theologi-
cal seminary at Andover, found_ himself em-
barrassed by a previous determination as to
the use of his means. " My great object," he
said, " is the foreign missionary enterprise ; "
and he gave 310,000 to the Theological school
because convinced that the effort to establish
it was one with this enterprise, for " we must
raise up ministers if we would have men to go
as missionaries." The same year, 1806, Rob-
ert Ralston remitted for himself and others
of Philadelphia ^3,357 to aid the Baptist
Mission at Serampore. Dr. Carey, of that
mission, acknowledged the receipt of $6,000
from American Christians in 1806 and 1807.^
There were thus many indications of a mis-
sionary spirit in the churches of the United
States. Still it is true, that as yet, "American
Christians had never combined in any great
enterprise or plan for spreading the knowledge
of Christ, or advancing his kingdom; had
never sent, from their shores, a single mis-
sionary, with the message of heavenly mercy,
to any portion of the widely extended pagan
world" abroad. The different efforts which
" had been made for the benefit of some of the
native tribes of the American forest " had been
" scattered and transient," and " without any
general union, or any expansive and systematic
plan of operations."
In 1806, Samuel J. Mills became a member
of Williams College. "While a child he had
heard his mother say, " I have consecrated this
child to the service of God as a missionary,"
and from the time of his conversion, in 1802,
he had ardently desired to engage in the mis-
sionary work. In college, while laboring faith-
fully to promote true piety among the students,
he kept this work constantly in mind. In
1807 he invited Gordon Hall and James Rich-
ards to a walk, and led them to a retired spot
in a meadow, where they spent all day in fast-
ing and prayer, and in conversing on the duty
of missions to the heathen. He was surprised
and gratified to learn that the subject was not
new to these brethren, but that their hearts
were already set upon engaging in such a
work. September 7, 1808, a society was pri-
vately formed at Williams College, by these
and a few other pious students, the object
of which, the constitution says, "shall be to
effect, in the persons of its members, a mission
or missions to the heathen." The 5th article
provided that "no person shall be admitted
who is under an engagement of any kind
which shall be incompatible with going on a
mission to the heathen ; " and the 6th article
was, " Each member shall keep absolutely free
from every engagement which, after his prayer-
ful attention, and after consultation with the
brethren, shall be deemed incompatible with
the objects of this society, and shall hold him-
self in readiness to go on a mission when and
where duty may call."
Designing now so to operate on the public
mind as to lead to the undertaking of a foreign
missionary work, and proceeding with great
modesty, and great practical wisdom, they re-
published and circulated some impressive mis-
sionary sermons, and opened a correspondence
with some of the eminently wise and good men
among the clergy of the country, such as Rev.
Messrs. Grifiin, Worcester, Morse, and Dana.
With the same end in view, and to influence
young men, one of the number transferred his
relation to Middlebury College in Vermont.
Mills visited Yale College, and some efforts
were made at other institutions.
In the autumn of 1809 Richards became a
member of the Theological Seminary at Ando-
ver, and " labored with diligence and success
in promoting a spirit of missions among the
students." Mills followed him to Andover in
the spring of 1810, and Hall soon joined them.
At least one other young man was there also,
whose thoughts had been independently direct-
ed to the same great subject — Samuel Nott,
Jr. " There seemed now to be," says one who
was there, " a movement of the Spirit, turning
108
AMERICAN BOARD.
the atteution and the hearts of the studentf? in
the seminary to the condition of the perishing-
heathen." Several had already come, or soon
came to the resolution of spending their lives
in pagan lands, among whom were Adouiram
Judson, Jr., and Samuel Newell. The faculty
of the seminary were consulted and approved
the design, and on the 25th of June, 1810,
according to previous arrangement. Rev. Dr.
Spring of Newburyport, and Rev. Samuel
Worcester of Salem, met with the professors
and a few others, for further consultation. It
was thought the time for action had come, and
the young men were advised to present their
case to the General Association of Massachu-
setts, which was about to meet at Bradford.
The next day Rev. Messrs. Spring and Wor-
cester rode together in a chaise to Bradford,
and during that ride, between those two men,
*' the iirst idea of the American Board of Com-
missioners for Foreign Missions was suggested ;
and the form, the number of members, and the
name, were proposed." On Thursday, June
28th, Messrs. Judson, Nott, Newell, and Hall,
came before the Association and presented a
written paper in which they stated " that their
minds had been long impressed with the duty
and importance of personally attempting a
mission to the heathen ; " and they solicited
the opinion and advice of the Association as to
their duty, and as to the source to which they
might look for support in their contemplated
work. The subject was referred to a commit-
tee, who reported the next day, recommending
" that there be instituted by this Association a
Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions,
for the purpose of devising ways and means,
and adopting and prosecuting measures for
promoting the spread of the gospel in heathen
lands." Tlie report was adopted, and the fol-
lowing persons were chosen to constitute, in
the first instance, that Board : His excellency
John Treadwell, Esq., Rev. Timothy Dwight,
D. D., Gen. Jedediah Huntington, and Rev.
Calvin Chapin, of Connecticut ; Rev. Joseph
Lyman, J). D., Rev. Samuel Spring, D. D.,
William Bartlett, Esq., Rev. Samuel AVorccs-
ter, and Dea. Samuel H. Wallcy, of Massor
chusetts.
The commissioners had their first meeting
at Farmingtou, Connecticut, on the 5th of the
following September, five only being present.
A constitution was adopted, and officers were
chosen. The Prudential Committee ai)pointed
consisted of William Bartlett, Esq., and Rev.
Messrs. Spring and Worcester. Mr. AVorces-
ter was chosen Corresponding Secretary, and an
address to the Christian public was prepared,
accompanied by a form of subscription.
A begiiniing wa.s thus made ; but though
the objects of the Board were regarded with
favor by some liberal individuals, it was doul)t-
ful whether means could be very soon secured
in this country to send out and support a dis-
tant mission. Yet four young men were ready
and waiting to be sent. The eyes of the Pru-
dential Committee were turned to the London
Missionary Society, which was already in suc-
cessful operation, and in Jan., 1811, Mr. Judson
was sent to England to confer with the Direc-
tors of that society on various points, and to
ascertain whether any satisfactory arrangement
could be made for prosecuting the work of
missions in concert ; so that American mis-
sionaries might for a time receive their sup-
port in part from the London society without
committing themselves wholly to its direction-
No such arrangement, however, was made.
In June, 18l2, an act of incorporation for
the Board was obtained from the Legislature
of Massachusetts. The second annual meeting
was held at Worcester, Mixss., Sept. 18, 1811 ;
seven members being present. Donations to
the amount of $1,400 had been received.
Messrs. Judson, Nott, Hall and Newell were
appointed as missionaries to labor under the
direction of this Board ; and it was resolved,
as soon as practicable, to establish a mission
in the East, attention being turned specially to
the Burman Empire, and another in the West,
among the Indians of this continent. Late in
January, 1812, Messrs. Newell and Hall, who
had been attending to medical studies in Phil-
adelphia, returned hastily with the intelligence
that a vessel was to sail from that port in
about two weeks for Calcutta, and would ac-
commodate the missionaries. The Prudential
Committee immediately met. It was short
notice, and only about 1,200 dollars were at
their disposal ; yet, on the 27th of Jan. they
resolved to send out the four missionaries.
Then another, Mr. Luther Rice, desired to join
the mission, and they " dared not reject his re-
quest." Measures were at once taken to se-
cure, if possible, the requisite funds, and in
about three weeks, more than $G,000 was col-
lected. The missionaries were ordained on
the Gth of Feb., in the Tabernacle at Salem,
and after some delay sailed, Messrs. Judson
and Newell, with their wives, in the Caravan,
from Salem, Feb. 19, and Messrs. Nott, Hall,
and Rice, with the wjfe of Mr. Nott, in the
Harmony from Philadelphia, about the same
time.— See Tracy's History of the A. B. C. F.
M. ; Life of Dr. Worcester, Vol. II, Chap. 2 ;
Memoir of Dr. Judson, page 39 and on ; and Re-
ports oftlie Board.
From this small beginning the Board has
gone on until now its annual receipts are about
$300,000, and it has under its care, in difierent
parts of the world, near 400 missionary la-
borers, male and female, sent from this coun-
try, and more than 200 native lielpers. The
aiinual meetings, which are held in September,
from Ix'ing attended by seven members, as in
1811, or Ijynine as in 1812, in the parlor of a
private dwelling, have come to be occasions
of fully as deeji and extensive interest as
any annually recurring religious occjvsion in
the United States. They commence usually
AMERICAN BOARD.
109
on Tuesday afternoon and close in the forenoon
of the next Friday. They are always open to
the public, and can be held only in towns of
considerable population, that lodgings may be
furnished for the many hundreds who come
together from every section of the country.
The largest houses of worship are not sufficient-
ly large to accommodate all who wish to
hear, and usually on AYednesday and Thurs-
day evenings simultaneous meetings, for pop-
ular address, are held in two and sometimes in
three different houses. This is the case also
on Thursday afternoon, when the Lord's Supper
is celebrated.
Organization, Mode of Operation, fyc. — The
officers of the Board are chosen annually, by
ballot, and are, at present, a President, Vice-
President, Recording Secretary, Treasurer, two
Auditors, four Corresponding Secretaries, and
a Prudential Committee of eight. This com-
mittee, whose members receive no compensa-
tion for their services, meets at the missionary
house at least once every week, on Tuesday
afternoon, for the transaction of business.
There are now about 200 corporate members
of the Board residing in at least 21 different
States of the Union. These alone, by the char-
ter, are voting members, forming the body cor-
porate ; but the payment of $50, if the person
be a clergyman, or ^100, if a layman, consti-
tutes any one an honorary member, who may
share fully in the deliberations of the annual
meetings. About 9,000 persons have, since
the beginning, been thus constituted honorary
members. There is also a small number of
corresponding members, residing mostly in
foreign lands, and chosen, as are the corporate
members, by ballot.
This Board is neither an ecclesiastical nor
a denominational body, and is not supported
by denominations as such, but by nidividual
Christians. The Commissioners were at first
appointed by the General Association of Mass-
achusetts, which is Congregational, with pow-
er to adopt their own form of organization and
their own rules and regulations. By its char-
ter, obtained from the Legislature of Massa
chusetts, in 1812, the Board elects its own meni'
bers withoiit limitation as to numbers, or resi-
dence, or religious denomination ; but not less
than one-third of the members must at all times
be respectable laymen, and not less than one
third respectable clergymen. In 1812, the Sec
retary, in behalf of the Board, suggested to the
General Assembly of the Presbyterian Church
" the expediency of forming an institution simi
lar to theirs, between which and theirs tliere
might l^e such cooperation as should promote
the great object of missions amongst the une-
vangclized nations." The Assembly, however,
while they urged the churches under their care
to aid in this good work, tlionght " the business
of foreign missions miglit probably he best
managed under a sin;.';'e Board," and so decli-
ned forming any sep:',- ■!!::> in-titii1ii;;i. \i t1ie
very next meeting of the Board, (Sept., 1812)
thirteen new members were elected, from seven
different states, of whom eight, 4 from New
York, 2 from New Jersey, and 2 from Penn-
sylvania, were Presbyterians. In 1831, of 62
corporate members, 31 were Presbyterians,
24 Congregationalists, 6 Reformed Dutch, and
one Associate Reformed ; and of the 70 or-
dained missionaries, 39 were Presbyterians, 29
Congregationalists, and 2 Reformed Dutch.
Until the division of the General Assembly
in 1837, most of the efforts of Presbyteriaii
churches in the United States for foreign mis-
sions were made through this Board ; and this
is still true of what are called New School
Presbyterian churches, and also of the Reform-
ed Dutch and the Associate Reformed churches.
Missionaries from these different denopainations
have always been sent out without distinction,
and generally without even considering their
ecclesiastical relations in designating them to
their fields of labor.
The missions thus formed, are not controlled
by ecclesiastical bodies; though they may
themselves be considered as in some sense,
such bodies. They are organized and governed
as communities, the votes of a majority of the
missionaries and male assistant missionaries
deciding all questions, in their regular meet-
ings. Thus the missions provide for the organi-
zation, government and care of churches, which
they Ibrm, and may enter into organizations
among themselves, for fraternal or ecclesiasti-
cal purposes, as associations or presbyteries,
according to circumstances and the views and
preference of the majority. So far as any use
of the funds of the Board is involved, the ac-
tion of the mission is, of course, subject to the
revision of the Prudential Committee.
By its charter the Board is limited to the
work of " propagating the Gospel in heathen
lands, by supporting missionaries and diffusing
a knowledge of the Holy Sci'iptures." Its
missions are conducted with reference to the
ultimate complete evangelization of the nations
or communities to which they are sent. They
are not regarded as permanent institutions, but
are established to plant the institutions of the
Gospel, and to prepare the people themselves
to support these institutions ; — to gather
churches which are expected to be ultimately
self-supporting churches, sustaining their own
religious teachers, and acting for the still fur-
ther propagation of the truth. A leading ob-
ject therefore, has ever been, as fast as possible,
to educate and train a pious native ministry,
who may be fitted to act as pastors of the na-
tive churches, and as evangelists in gathering
churches. For this purpose not only have
schools of a lower order been established, but
seminaries, in which native young men of piety
and promise might be thoroughly educated,
and also boarding-schools for girls, from which
educated native preachers and teachers might
obtain suitable partners for life.
110
AMERICAN BOAED.
With the same end in view, to raise up Chris-
tian churches and communities, which shall be
independent of all foreign aid and foreign in-
struction, much labor has been expended to re-
duce unwritten languages to a written form,
to prepare faithful translations of the Scrip-
tures, and to give a Christian literature to
those for whose evangelization the missions
have been established. By the missionaries of
this Board fifteen different languages have
been reduced to writing, and the Scriptures
have been translated wholly or in part into
more than twenty languages. Still it is ever
inculcated upon the missionaries that they are
to regard themselves as sent, emphatically, to
prcacli the Gospel, and thus, with Divine assist-
ance, to turn men individually, and at once,
" from darkness to light ; and from the power
of Satan unto God ;" and that, in all ordinary
cases, every other work is to be subordinate to
this in the labors of the missions. In relation to
other societies the Board acts strictly upon the
principle of non-interference ; in agreement
with others considering " certain great centres
of human society and marts of commerce, as
common ground " to some extent, but in all
other cases avoiding fields of labor which are
already occupied by others.
Results— Statistics, ^c. — The operations of the
Board have been crowned with many tokens
of Divine favor. This is not the place to give
pai'ticular accounts of revivals, with W'hich the
missions have been favored ; these accounts
will be found in the notices of the several mis-
sions ; but simple reference may here be made
to revivals at Ceylon in 1810, 1821, 1824, and
'25, 1830 and '31, and 1835 ; to the great re-
vival at the Sandwich Islands, in 1838, '39 and
'40, as the fruits of which more than twenty
thousand persons, giving hopeful evidence of
piety, were received into the churches ; to revi-
vals among the Ncstorians in 184G, 1849, 1850,
and 1851 ; to repeated revivals among the
Choctaws and other tribes of Indians on this
continent ; and to the reformation among the
Armenians, obviously, a work of Divine
grace, and a work of deep interest and great
promise, though differing from many of the re-
vivals already referred to, which has been in
progress for the last ten or twelve years. In
all, from the beginning, more than forty thous-
and hopeful converts liave been gathered into
churches connected with the different missions.
None Vnit those who are thought to give evi-
dence of true piety are received to the churches
and much care is exercised by the missionaries
in receiving members.
The receipts and expenditures of the Board,
for each year since its organization, and for
each period of four years, arc presented in tlie
following table.
It is a fact of great significance, that all
missionary societies and boards, after a certain
period in their history, begin to receive buck
their expenditures from the miseioua which
they have planted. The sum thus received by
this Board in 1853 was ^12,905, which is more
than one twenty-fifth part of their whole
receipts. And this proportion is much greater
in the case of the large London societies, which
have been much longer in operation.
1811,
1812,
1813,
1814,
1815,
1816,
1817,
1818,
1819,
1820,
1821,
1822,
1823,
1824,
1825,
1826,
1827,
1828,
1829,
1830,
1831,
1832,
1833,
1834,
1835,
1836,
1837;
1838,
1839,
1840,
184i;
1842.
1843;
1844,
1845,
184<),
1847,
1848,
1849.
1850,
1851,
18.52,
1853,
6
■c
Receipts.
Periods of 4
Yeais.
E.^pon-
ditxues.
Periods.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
$999 52
$990
$46,732
114,698
202,151
263,167
392,891
592,148
908,649
1,039,531
964,983
1,072,626
610,655
SO, 699
8,611
7.078
5,027
13,611 50
11,361 18
12,265 56
9,493 89
$30,416
113,102
231,246
258,068
383,320
593,893
923,129
1,033,349
983,676
1,084,907
568.334
12,501 03
29,948 63
34,727 72
37,520 63
15,934
20,485
30,346
40,337
39,949 45
46,354 95
60,087 87
55,758 94
57,021
46,771
60,474
66,380
47,483 58
55,716 18
61,616 25
88,341 89
54.157
4i;469
59,012
103,430
102,009 64
106,928 26
83,019 37
100,934 09
107.676
92,533
84,798
98,313
120,954
149,906
159,779
163,254
130,574 12
145,847 77
1.52.386 10
163,340 19
176,232 15
252,076 55
236,170 98
244,169 82
210,407
254,689
230.642
227,491
241,691 04
235,189 30
.318,396 53
244,254 43
246.601
268,914
261,147
266,687
236,394 37
255,112 96
202,073 55
211,402 76
244.371
216,817
257,005
2ti4,783
254,056 46
291.705 27
251.802 28
274,902 21
282,330
203.418
254.329
274,830
301,732 70
314,922 88
257.727
310,607
0,205,120
6,203,339
It will be seen, that with only one exception,
in each period of four years there has been an
advance upon the receipts of the previous
period. But though there has been, on the
whole, constant progress, the receipts have
often fallen below the expenditures, and there
have been seasons of great pecuniary enibar-
ras,sment in the operations of the society. In
1837 embarrassments of this kind occurred,
the sad effects of which were deeply and widely
felt. For .some years previous to 183C the
america:n board.
Ill
means provided bad been sufficient ; the Pru-
dential Committee felt encouraged to enter
upon new and enlarged operations, and tlie
call was specially for men, while the churches
supposed there would be no difficulty in regard
to means. In the mean time laborers, in an-
swer to the call, offered their services in
increasing numbers, and within four years,
from 1833 to 1836 inclusive, no less than 185
new laborers, male and female, were sent
abroad. Expenses were thus greatly increas-
ed, and the receipts did not increase in pro-
portion. At the annual meeting in 183G it
was announced that 64 missionary laborers
were then under appointment, who were ex-
pecting soon to be sent abroad ; but there was
a balance of about $39,000 against the trea-
sury at the close of the financial year, (July
31,) and that balance was increasing. The
voice of the meeting, however, and the voice
of the churches, still was " let the missionaries
be sent ; " and the means seemed likely to be
provided. From October, 1836, to February,
1837, the receipts greatly increased, and in the
mean time 60 laborers, male and female, had
embarked for their respective fields. But now
there came a financial crisis in the affairs of
the country. Pecuniary difficulties began to
press upon the business community with very
great severity ; the receipts of the Board
rapidly diminished, and the debt rapidly in-
creased. The committee felt obliged to stop.
Laborers under appointment were detained,
and new missionaries were appointed only on
condition that they would not be sent out, and
must be at no expense to the Board, until the
state of the treasury should warrant it. Thus
discouraged, many turned from regarding the
heathen world and looked for other fields of
labor, and never since have there been so many
ready to offer themselves for the foreign ser-
vice. But this was not all. Difficulties still
increasing, the committee felt called upon, in
June, to curtail the appropriations which had
been made in the missions for the year 1838,
by $40,000 ; and the missions were informed
of the painful necessity, and requii-ed to con-
tract their operations. With 60 more laborers
to be supported, the pecuniary means of the
missions were thus reduced 345,000 below
what had been allowed in 1836. The effect
was deeply painful. Every missionary was
embarrassed, and every branch of missionary
operations crippled. Schools were broken up
or greatly reduced, and in Ceylon alone 5,000
children were dismissed from under Christian
instruction " to the wilderness of heathenism ; "
the facilities for preaching were abridged ; the
operations of presses were greatly diminished ;
native teachers and other helpers were de-
prived of employment ; native Christians were
disheartened, and the opposing heathen tri-
umphed.
Still the influence of this reverse was not
simply evil. The missions, the Christain public
at home, and the Prudential Committee all learn-
ed some important lessons ; and a new impulse
was given to missionary effort, particularly in
the rural districts of the country, where the in-
telligence of the disastrous influence of such
reduced appropriations was received. The
financial embarrassments were felt first and
most severely in the cities and larger towns ;
those in such communities who would have
given liberally, found themselves deprived of
the means of giving ; the country churches
were thus called upon to come with more lib-
erality to the support of the missionary work,
and in these churches the amount contributed,
and doubtless also the number of contributors,
greatly increased.
Such painful consequences of financial diffi-
culty have never since occurred, and it is
believed will never again occur in the history
of this society. The treasury was not fully
relieved until 1842. Indeed, in 1841 the debt
had increased to .^57,000 ; and for five years
again, from 1847 to 1851, there was a constant
balance against the treasury. In 1848 this
lialance was $59,890. But while all proper
economy has been used, and the appropriations
to the missions have been limited to the lowest
safe amount, the operations have been steadily
carried forward, and contributions have been
so increased as again to relieve the Board.
Until 1838 the Board hali no permanent
building for the accommodation of its business
at Boston, which has ever been the centre of
its operations ; and much inconvenience and
loss had been experienced from frequent remo-
vals. This year an eligible site was purchased
in Pemberton Square, and a substantial build-
ing erected ; the whole expense being met
from permanent funds, which could not be used
to sustain the missions or to pay the debts.
In addition to this building, the Board now
has invested funds, of which the interest only
may be used, amounting to $96,000.
The missions now under the care of the Board
are the following, of each of which a particular
notice will be found in its appropriate place :
The mission to the Zulus, and the Gaboon
mission, in Africa ; the mission to Greece,
and the mission to the Jews, in Europe ; the
mission to the Armenians, the Syrian mission,
the Assyrian mission, and the mission to the
Nestorians, in Western Asia ; the Bombay,
Ahmednuggur, Satara, Kolapnr, Madras, Ar-
cot, Madura, and Ceylon missions, in Southern
Asia ; the Canton, Amoy, and Fuh-chau mis-
sions, in China ; missions to the Choctaws,
the Cherokees, the Dakotas, the Ojibwas, the
Senecas, the Tuscaroras, and the Abenaquls,
among the North American Indians ; and the
Micronesian mission in the NorthPacific Ocean.
The large and successful Sandwich Islands mis-
sion has just passed from under the care of the
Board as an organized mission, it being merg-
ed in the Christian community of the islands,
which have been virtually christianized ; but
112
A^IERICAN BAPTIST UNION.
necessary aid is still furnished for the support
of religious and educational institutions.
The following table presents the more im-
portant statistics of the missions art different
periods, separated by intervals ot ten years,
commencing •with 1823, eleven years after the
first missionaries were sent out.
X
X
bo
_o
Si
c
u
1
JS
o
3
.2
.a
%
S
o
a
"5
3
a ,1
~
<
a
s- p.
O y
£.3
Si
i; 3
a □
.2
S
c
4>
•Ji
a
.2 <^
1
a K
g
.Si
1
a
m
o
1^
10
S
42
65
3
0- --
6
i^
'S. b
M
o
70
1823....
8
25
29
4
10
3,000
1833....
24
66
85
44
137
4
60
39
1,940
5
o
204
1
50
554
56,000
1843....
26
86
131
39
178
14
116
62
20,797
16
442,056,185
7
524
oo
699
610
30,778
1853....
28
111
38
157
1
26
205
39
192
103
25,714
11
958,132,478
9
487
23
645
712
21,993
AMERICAN BAPTIST MISSIONARY
UNION : This is the name at present adopt-
ed by the Foreign Missionary Association of the
regular or Calvinistic Baptists of the nou-slave-
holding States, and with few exceptions, it is
entirely dependent on them for its maintenance
and direction. Existing, at first, with a different
organization, and under the name of the Bap-
tist Triennial Convention, it was founded at
Philadelphia, in May, 1814, near the date at
.which the Baptists of the United States entered
upon the work> of propagating the Gospel
among the heathen. It owes its origin to a
series of events which have always been deemed
extraordinary and providential, and are, on
that account, worthy of a brief narration.
In the earliest company of missionaries sent
to the east, Ijy the American Board of Com-
mi,ssioners for Foreign Missions, were Rev.
Adoniram Judson and Rev. Luther Rice, who
in separate ships, sailed from the United States
in 1812. During the passage to Calcutta, Mr.
and Mrs. Judson found reason to change their
sentiments respecting the mode and the subjects
of Christian baptism. On their arrival in In-
dia they repaired to Seramporc, and on making-
known their views, were bajjtized by immersion
by Rev. Mr. "Ward, one of the ini.ssionaries of
the English Baptist mission, m-Iio were stationed
there. A few weeks later Rev. Mr. Rice
avowed a similar change in his sentiments, and
was also baptized at Serampc^re. It was this
unexpected announcement tiiat these American
Missionaries, who had already arrived in the
East, had become Baptists and had thrown
themselves on the Baptist churches of the
United States for the means of prosecuting the
Bclf-denying and heroic mission they had un-
dertaken, that first enlisted the general sym-
pathy of that denomination in this country,
and led to the formation of their earliest foreign
missionary organization.
Immediately on the receipt of letters from
Messrs. Judson and Rice, containing this an-
nouncement, a society was formed in Boston,
•which was styled, " The Baptist Society for
RiV. I. K. ■\V0RCESTEK.
Propagating the Gospel in India and other
Foreign Parts." The new Society, which was
designed to be the parent of numerous auxil-
iaries, immediately pledged to ]\Ir. Judson an
adecpiate support in the prosecution of his mis-
sion, whenever the Commissioners of the Ameri-
can Board should discontinue their j^atronage ;
and at the same time, thinking that such an
arrangement might be more acceptable to him
as well as more advantageous in its results, they
proposed that he should become connected ■ft'ith
the English Baptist Mission at Serampore.
This proposal was very wisely and fortunately
declined by the managei-s of that mission, who
urged upon their American brethren the forma-
tion of a general missionary society, in the
(United States. At this juncture, early in the
year 1814, Mr. Rice arrived in America from
Calcutta, having returned for the special pur-
pose of enlisting the Baptist churches of the
country in the enterprise of forming missions
among the heathen. He was immediately ai>
pointed traveling agent of the society already
formed, and was directed to visit the churches
in the middle and southern states, and at the
same time, an address to the members of the
denomination was prepared by the society's
managers, setting forth the obligations which
God in his providence had imposed on them,
in consequence of the secession of Messrs.
Judson and Rice from the missions which they
had been sent to establish. Through the agency
of these causes, numerous local societies for
missions were soon formed in nearly all the older
states, most of tiiem auxiliary to the society
originally established at Boston. The appeal
which had been made was not disregarded, and
as a conseijuence of the awakened sense of ob-
ligation, a general meeting of ministers and
laymen, delegates from societies and religiou,i
bodies in different parts of the Union, assem-
bled at Philadelphia, in May, 1814. At this
meeting was formed, " The General Missionary
Convention of the Baptist Denomination in
the United States of America, for Foreign
Missions." The Constitution provided that the
AMERICAN BAPTIST UNION.
113
Convention should meet once in three years
and that it should be composed of persons who
should annually contribute one hundred dollars
or who should represent societies contributing
that sura. The affairs of the Convention were
entrusted to a board of managers who were to
be elected once in three years, and in whom
was vested the appointment of the Secretary,
Treasurer, and other officers, and also of all
the missionaries. By a subsequent alteration
in its Constitution, the Convention for a con-
siderable period, embraced not only the foreign,
but also the home missions of the Baptist de-
nomination, and also, for a still longer period,
tlie management of the Columbian College, an
institution of learning established at Washing-
ton, in the District of Columbia. These latter
objects, however, were always regarded as se-
condary, and were at length entirely laid aside,
and the Convention left to its own proper work
of founding and directing foreign missions.
The Triennial Convention, thus collecting its
members from all parts of the country, con-
tinued, with the slight exceptions already stated,
unchanged in its organization till the year 1845,
when, in common with similar associations in
other denominations, its councils became dis-
tracted and its treasuiy embarrassed by the
sectional feuds generated by the discussion of
tlie institution of slavery. At this time the
churches in most of the slaveholding States,
becoming dissatisfied with the principles avow-
ed by its managers, united in a separate organi-
zation, under the name of the " Southern Bap-
tist Convention." In November, 1845, at a
special meeting of the Triennial Convention, an
entire change was effected in its composition
and a new Constitution adopted, which declared
its single object to be to " diffuse the knowl-
edge of the religion of Jesus Christ, by means of
missions, throughout the world." According
to its new Constitution, the principle of repre-
sentative membership is laid aside, and the as-
sociation is now composed of life members who
are made such by the payment of one hundred
dollars. Its name has likewise been changed to
the " American Baptist Missionary Union."
Its meetings are annual, and its affairs are com-
mitted to a board of managers composed of 75
persons, of whom at least one-third must not
be ministers of the Gospel, and who appoint
from their own number an executive commit-
tee of nine persons, by whom, in connection
with two corresponding secretaries and a trea-
surer, missionaries are appointed, missions are
established, and all the actual business of the
society is transacted. The members of the
Union, as has been stated, generally belong to
the Baptist churches in the uon-slaveholding
States, but this results from the influence of
common sentiments and not from any provi-
sion of its Constitution. It is in reality as
comprehensive as was the convention which
preceded it, and of which it is the legal and
lineal successor.
Thus organized arid composed, the Ameri-
can Baptist (Foreign) Missionary Union, from
the humble beginnings with which it com-
menced, has steadily advanced in its work and
has extended its missions from Kangoon in the
kingdom of Burmah, where the first was estab-
lished, to all parts of that kingdom, to Siam,
China and Assam, to the Teloogoos in India,
to the western coast of Africa, to Greece, Ger-
many and France, and to the Indians of the
American continent. In the number of its
missions, in the extent of its resources, and the
amount of its annual revenues, it ranks second
only to the American Board of Commissioners
among the foreign missionary organizations
of the United States. Its missionaries have
been sent forth for the simple purpose of
preaching the Gospel. They have been in all
cases instructed to make this their great object
and to regard the introduction of science and
art, the education of the young and even the
ti-anslation of the Scriptures as subsidiary to
it. The number of those who have been ap-
pointed and sent from this country, and who
are now in the emi)loyment of the managers of
the Union, is sixty-six missionaries and sixty-
four female assistants, exclusive of two hundred
and twenty preachers, teachers, and other as-
sistants who have been appointed from among
the native converts in the several countries
where the missions have been established.
These missionaries are now engaged in preach-
ing the Gospel in the languages of upwards of
twenty different divisions of the human race.
They have established twenty-one organized
missions, embracing 84 stations and five hun-
dred and thirty-nine out-stations, and in the
churches, 192 in number, which they have
planted in the different parts of the world, are
embraced about 15,210 persons who have been
converted by their laljors. Their schools are
88, and contain 1,992 pupils.
Of these missions the most interesting and
successful are those among the Burmans and
Karens in the kingdom of Burmah and the
neighboring provinces, and those in several of
the states of Germany. The Karens present a
singular example of a people for the most part
without any form of idolatry, but possessed of
singular moral sensibility and unusually dis-
posed to receive the doctrines of the Gospel of
Jesus Christ. Oppressed and despised by their
Burman masters, they have hailed the advance-
ment of English jwwer in the East, and have
entered with gladness into the freedom and se-
curity which it everywhere brings. They have
received Christianity from the teaching of the
missionaries with an eagerness which has sel-
dom been paralleled among any other portion
of mankind. After these no other missions of
the Union have had a success equal to that
which has been bestowed on the mission iu
Germany. It was commenced by the baptism
of a devoted and liberal minded German, Mr.
J. G. Oucken, in the waters of the Elbe at
114
AMERICAN BAPTIST UNION.
Hambnrg, in 1833, by Rev. Dr. Sears, who
at that time was residing in Germany as a
student. Since then, by the persevering labors
of this earliest convert, a mission has been es-
tablished which, without a single missionary
sent from the United States, now extends
through nearly all the states of Germany and
into Denmark and Holland.
The following table presents a comprehen-
sive view of the missions of the Union, and
their results :
MSSIONS OF THE UMION,
1863-54.
MliSilONS.
a
1
a
1
^0
1
a
a
|1
2 .
a.
6
-2
p.
.0 .
0
.a
OJ
bo
a
'3
cj
0
m
*
5
1
&
:3
p<
1
1
3
1
In Asia:
Jfaulmain Biu'man
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
19
is'
20
2
50
32
2
"3'
4
4
132
5
5
4
5
5
2
1
4
2
4
6
2
49
5
6
4
3
3
6
2
1
1
5
1
4
7
2
50
10
11
8
5
8
11
4
3
2
9
3
8
13
4
5
19
22
8
56
29
2
2
2
4
4
2
3
1
3
14
22
1
50
25
i
1
1
1
1
3
1
5
29
58
2
470
433
'"h
2
1
4
2
Ji2
1
170
869
1,046
CO
5,000
1,573
"ii
7
35
"i4
79
9
'2
2
'i
1
'i
2
'3
1
44
96
80
180
'7
21
73
13
6
3
15?
1
20?
'3
2
6
3
5
1
100
40
300
15
280
"36?
20?
75
36
216
50
6
5
17
1
21
1
"4
4
6
3
8
2
100
84?
396
15
360
180
"43?
41?
75
36
289
63
1
Tavoy
Hassein
Shwaygyeen
Toungoo
Ningpo
Teloogoo
Whole number in Asia 14. .
In Africa : Bassa 1 . .
98
159
124
1,027
8,873
13
514
65
1,168
78
1,682
2
2
2
4
4
1
17
1
31
1
12
2
43
In Europe :
French
8
44
3
55
0
388
397
1
6
2
8
1
3
4
2
5
5
16
31
1
8
44
1
33
681
330
4,618
10
1
4
i
"52
1
i
4
"52
Greek
Whole n umber in Kurope. . 3. .
Indian Missions :
12
48
53
714
4,958
1
4
1
52
2
56
2
3
5
10
84
2
's
10
539
2
3
2
7
66
1
5
3
8
4
1
2
6
1
3
10
"io?
69
21
100
1,250?
1
2
1
6
45
85
2
74?
3
2
1
80?
45
85
f^hawanoe
Cherokee
VSTiole number in America. 3..
Totals 21..
8
64
15
9
14
79
1,371
4
136
2
74
6
210
129
220
192
1,820
15,219
19
685
69
1,306
88
1,992
* Including theological and normal.
The officers of the American Baptist Mis-
sionary Union chosen at the annual meeting
in May, 1854, are as follows, viz. :
Hon. George N. Briggs, L.L. D., President ;
Rev. Bartholomew T. Welsh, D.D., Rev. Silas
Bailey, D.D., Vice-Presidents.
Rev. "VVm. II. Shailer, D.D. Recording Sec-
retary.
The Board of Managers is composed of 75
members, who are annually elected, and of
•whom at least one-third are not ministers of
the Gospel. Of this Board, the officers in 1854
were as follows :
Hon. Ira Harris, Chairmain.
"* Rev. Sewall S. Cuttting, Recording Secre-
tary.-
Executive Officers :
Rev. Solomon Peck, D. D., Corresponding
Secretary for the Foreign Department.
Rev. Edward Bright, D.D., Corresponding
Secretary for the Home Department.
Richard E. Eddy, Treasurer.
The subjoined table will present a complete
view of the financial growth and present re-
sources of the " Missionary Union" :
Contributions to the American Baptist
Missionary Union.
1815
§13,476 10
1830
21,622 00
181G
not recorded.
1831
15,266 00
1817
11,986 87
1832
16,556 00
1818
10,240 78
1833
27,600 30
1819
8,07G 51
1834
23,941 20
1820
12.296 21
1835
30,747 00
1821
7,758 16
1836
40,547 06
1822
3,615 27
1837
45,567 00
1823
4.944 29
1838
34.583 21
1824
9.127 63
1839
51,289 30
1825
5.186 20.
1840
57,781 00
182G
9,499 50
1841
52,598 68
1827
9 246 35
1842
50,706 20
1828
10,639 00
1843
45,883 04
1829
9,158 60
1844
62,062 29
AMERICAN AND FOREIGN CHRISTIAN UNION.
115
1845
71,876 21
1851 97,900 00
1846
100,150 02
1852 104,755 90
1847
85,009 24
1853 114,697 97
1848
85,894 42
1854 122,757 42
1849
1850
88,902 99
89,818 00
§1,663,763 92
Prof. W. Gammell.
AMEEICAN AND FOREIGN CHRIS-
TIAN UNION : This Society was organ-
ized in tlie city of New-York in the month of
May, 1849. It was formed by the union, or fu-
sion rather, of three societies which had existed
for several years. (1) There was The Foreign
Evangelical Society. The history of this soci-
ety is as follov/s : Shortly after the French
Revolution of July, 1830, several Christian
brethren in Paris wrote to gentlemen in New-
York, — some of whom had formerly resided in
France, in pursuit of commercial business, and
othera had visited that country as travelers, —
to say that the new constitution to which that
Revolution had given existence, granted to
Protestants a large amount of religious liberty,
and thus opened the door for evangelical effort.
The communication of this cheering intelli-
gence was accompanied by an earnest entreaty
for help, from Christians of this laud — a land
which had been blest by receiving into its bo-
som thousands of the excellent but persecuted
Huguenots, at the Revocation of the Edict
of Nantes, and for whose liberties La Fayette
and thousands of other brave Frenchmen had
suffered and bled.
This appeal was not made in vain. The sum
of $2,000 was raised and sent, and the sugges-
tion was made that a Home Missionary Socie-
ty, or something equivalent, should be formed,
to carry forward the work in France. This
led to tiie formation of The Evangelical Society
of France in the year 1833. In 1834, at the
request of that Society, a small association
was formed in New York, called The French
Association. This association two years later
took the name of The Evangelical Association.
In the month of May, 1834, at the request of
that committee, the Rev. Mr. Baird, (now the
Rev. Dr. Baird,) agreed to go to France in the
spring of 1835, with his family, for three years,
and make Paris his home, for the purpose of
learning what could be done by the American
churches to aid their Protestant brethren in
France. This mission was fulfilled, and not
only was much information acquired in rela-
tion to France, Belgium, Italy, and other Pa-
pal countries on the Continent, but a good deal
was done in that period to promote the cause
of temperance in the northern portions of it.
Besides what Tlie French Association was en-
abled to do for the cause of the gospel in France
during those three years,.the American Home
Missionary Society was induced to make grants
to the amount of 84,500 ; whilst the Amer-
ican Bible and Tract Societies also did much.
In the spring of 1838, Dr. Baird returned
and reported to two public meetings in New
York the state of things in France and other
parts of Europe. In the month of May, 1839,
The Foreign Evangelical Society was organ-
ized, for the promotion of the work in Papal
countries generally. The gentlemen who form-
ed it were members of the Presbyterian, Con-
gregational, and Reformed Dutch Churches.
This Society existed from 1839 to 1849. Dur-
ing this period of ten years the interest which
was felt in the evangelization of the Papal
world, steadily and perceptibly increased. The
Rev. Dr. Baird returned to Europe, and his
family made Paris and Geneva their home for
four years more, whilst he on the one hand
traveled extensively on the Continent in pros-
ecution of the work, and on the other, re-
turned twice to this country for the same object.
At the end of ten years the society had mis-
sionaries in France, Belgium, Sweden, Canada,
Hayti, and South America, besides having
aided the work in Germany, Poland, Russia,
and Italy. The receipts of the Society were
$10,127 in 1840, $13,725 in 1841, $15,733 in
1842, $9,303 in 1843, $12,392 in 1844, $16,-
037 in 1845, $19,930 in 1846, .$14,670 in 1847,
$19,214 in 1848, and 23,805 in 1849 : making
in all, the sum of $154,345, received during a
period of ten years ; all of which sum was ex-
pended in the various branches of the Society's
operations. The receipts of The French Asso-
cmtion, and The Evangelical Association, which
preceded The Foreign Evangelical Society,
were $19,759. Besides all this, there passed
through the hands of Dr. Gurdon Buck, a
member of the Board, for the Grande Ligne
Mission in Canada from first to last, nearly if
not quite, $20,000, not including some $6,000
which were granted to that mission by the For-
eign Evangelical Society, and which also passed
through Dr. Buck's hands.
(2) In the year 1843, The American
Protestant Society was formed. It owed
its existence to the fact that the immigra-
tion of Roman Catholics from Europe had
become very great, and was increasing every
year with a fearful rapidity. It was felt that this
foreign and un-Protestant element was becom-
ing very large, and demanded special and appro-
priate effort. Indeed, a similar movement in
some respects, had been made some years earlier,
when an "American Reformation Society"
was formed by the exertions of the Rev. Dr.
Brownlee and others. And although that So-
ciety did not exist long, it prepared the way
for The American Protestant Society, of which
we are speaking.
This Society existed from 1843 to 1849.
Its objects were : 1. To enlighten Protestants
of this country in regard to the errors of Rome ;
2. To convert and save the votaries of Rome
who are among us. In prosecution of these
objects, the press was employed and a goodly
number of colporteurs and other missionaries
were maintained — laboring among the Irish,
110
AMERICAN AND FOREIGN CHRISTIAN UNION.
(Jerman and other foreigu Romanists in tbe
country. The Society interested itself greatly
in tlie' winter of 1846-'49 in behalf of tbe
Portuguese exiles from Madeira, who were iu
Trinidad, and took meai^ures to bring them
to this country. The receipts of tha Society
were about .^4,000 in 1844, §6,742 in 1845,
§9,014 iu 1840,91 'J,3G5 in 1847,^24,672 in
1848 and. 328,363 in 1849 ; making a total of
§92,160, all of which was laid out iu prosecut-
ing the good work in our own couutry.
(3) In the year 1843 also, an association was
formed, in New-York, called The Fhdo-ltalian
Society, which afterwards took the name of
Tlie CImstiau Alliance. This society, as well
as the American Protestant Society, embraced
good men of many if not all tlic evangelical
denominations. It is known that its object
was to aid in causing the truth to enter into
Italy — a diOicult work before the year 1848,
as regards all parts of that country, and still
a dillicult work excepting in the kingdom
of Sardinia alone. As this society did not
publish its proceedings, we are not able to say
anything of them further thau that it em-
ployed an active agent, a Protestant Italian,
for 'years on the confines of Italy, who lost no
opportunity for sending tracts and the Sacred
Scriptures into that country. Nor are we
able to state the amount of its receipts.
It was by the union of these three societies
in the month of May, 1849, that Tlie Ameri-
can and Farcign Christian Union was formed.
Tbe new Board of directors as well as the ofli-
cers, were chosen from among the boards and
ofiBcers of the three societies. The new society
undertook the work and assumed the responsi-
bilities of the three societies, and entered at
once upon its ajjpropriate labors.
It will be seen, tlierefore, that the field of
this society's operations includes our own
country and foreign lands. As to its objects,
and the mode by which it aims to accomplish
them, the following article (No. II.) of its con-
stitution is full and explicit : " The ol)ject of
this society shall be by missions, colportagc,
the press, and other appmjiriate agencies, to
diftiise and promote tbe principles of religious
liberty, and a pure and evangelical Chris-
tianity, both at home and abroad, wherever a
cornipted Christianity exists."
The society contemplates imparting, so far
as it may be able, a jmre Christianity to those
who now only kiKJW a corrupt form, whether
in this land or in foreign countries. It may
well deem its field a great and important one.
The present Pojjc says that there are two hun-
dred millions of Roman (Jatholics in tbe world.
The present Emperor of Russia says that there
are fifty millions of followers of the Ureek
Church in bis vast cnijiire. These two inti-
mates make two hundred and fifty millions,
and e(|ual the fourth jiart of the human race.
And although his holiness may make quite too
liigh an estimate of the number of Ins " child-
ren," yet if we include all tbe members of the
Oriental Churches, (in the Turkish Empire,
Independent Greece, the Ionian Isles, and the
Austrian Empire) we shall certainly find that
the Church of Rome and tbe six Oriental
Churches embrace not much less than one
quarter of the inhabitants of the globe. And
how important that these two hundred and
fifty millions should have the true gospel !
They embrace powerful nations — France,
Austria, Russia, to say nothing of the Italian,
tbe Spanish, and the Portuguese races.
The society has made a noble beginning.
In the year ending iu May, 1854, (i]i(i fifth of
its existence,) it employed between 130 and
140 missionaries of all classes, at home and
abroad, (more than half of whom were ordained
ministers) belonging to seven different nations
and speaking a.s many languages. Of these,
90 labored among the Romanists in the United
States. Besides this, the Society aided tbe
work directly and indirectly iu many ways,
both at home and abroad. In the two first
yeai's of its existence, 1850 and '51, it expend-
ed nearly ^15,000 for the removal to Illinois
of some 500 or GOO Portuguese exiles, to whom
we have already referred. It publishes a
monthly Magazine of 48 pages, lite American
and Foreign Christian tlnion, which has a
large circulation, and two monthly sheets, one
in English and the other in German. It has
issued quite a number of excellent books and
tracts relatiug to Romanism, aud is constantly
publishing more. Its receipts were §57,223 iu
1850, §45,707 in 1851, §55,653 iu 1852,
§67,597 iu 1853 aud §75,751 iu the year end-
ing in May, 1854, ^Makiug a total of §301,-
931 iu five years, all of which, save a l>alance of
§2,706, was expended in the prosecution of tbe
work at home and abroad.
This important society, still in its infancy,
has indeed a great work on its hands. Be-
sides all its other objects, it has the cause of
" Religious Liberty," the " Protection of Amer-
ican citizens when abroad in their rights of
conscience and public worship," the " Pefencc
of the ])ublic schools," and the proper '' Ten-
ure of church property" to look after. 1'he
great meetings which it held in the city of
New-York, in b(;half of some of these objects,
iu January, 1853 and 1854, (the Madiai, aud
religious rights of Americans when abroad)
exerted a haj)py iniluence, and are an earnest
of what it may, with God's blessing, be expected
to achieve iu the future. — Officer of the Soc.
AMERICAN INDIAN MISSION ASSO-
CIATION.— This Association is counected
with the Baj)tist churches in the South-west. It
was organized in Cincinnati, on the 26th of Oc'-
tober, 1842, aud the Executive Board li>cated at
Louisville. At its first annual meeting, the year
following, six missionaries were under ajipoint-
ment, four of whom were in the field, and the
amount of receipts Wiis §3,000. The lU'xt report
gives 15 missionaries aud assistants; 75 ba]>
AMERICAN MISSIONARY ASSOCL^TION.
117
tisms ; receipts 38,090. The third, sevcnteeu
laborers, two small schools, and about forty
baptisms. The report for 1852, shows $15,811,
receipts ; foui* missious, located among the
Choctaws, Creeks, Weas, Piankeshaws, Mia-
mi&s, and Putawatamies ; with six stations and
eight outrstations ; 28 missionaries and as-
sistants ; 21 chiu"ches ; 126 baptisms during
the year ; 1G5 pupils in schools ; and over
1300 communicants. (See Indiatis.)
AMERICAN MISSIONAEY ASSOCI-
ATION.— This society was formed at Albany,
N. Y., September 3, 1846, by a convention of
friends of missions, who were dissatisfied with
what they undei-stood to be the position of ex-
isting missionary bodies, relative to slavery,
oppression, idolatry, polygamy, caste, &c., &c.
Among the declared objects sought to be at-
tained by the Convention, were the following :
To institute arrangements for the propagation
of a pure and free Christianity, and for gather-
ing and sustaining churches in heathen lands,
from which these and other like forms of ini-
quity should be excluded by terms of admis-
sion, or by disciplinary process ; to unite evan-
gelical Christians in an effort to give the Gos-
pel to those who were destitute of it, without
insisting upon those points on which the best
and most enlightened friends of Christ still dif-
fer ; and to secure a more direct responsibility
in the management of the society, by giving
to its evangelical supporters a vote in the con-
trol of its operations.
In the address issued by the Convention, it
was said that the crisis then appai'ent in the
cause of missions, afforded a favorable oppor-
tunity " for the review of existing usages and
methods of missionary effort ; of comparing
them with the New Testament standard ; of
discarding whatever might be found ^^Tong or
defective, and supplying their place in such
manner as might be found to accord with pri-
mitive teachings and examples." The Consti-
tution of the Association provides that " any
person of evangelical sentiments, who professes
faith in the Lord Jesus Christ, who is not a
slaveholder, or in the practice of other immo-
ralities, and who contributes to its funds, may
become a member of the society." Its affairs
are managed by an Executive Committee of
twelve, subject to the revision of the annual
meeting. "Churches or local missionary bodies,
agreeing to the principles of the society, may
appoint and sustain missionaries of their own,
through the agency of this body. " The so-
ciety, in collecting funds, in appointing officers,
agents, and missionaries, and in selecting fields
of labor, and conducting the missionary work,
will endeavor particularly to discountenance
slavery, by refusing to receive the known fruits
of unrequited labor, or to welcome to its em-
ployment those who held slaves."
Soon after the formation of the Association,
the Uniwi Missionary Society, the Committee
1848,
17,095 74
1849,
21,982 96
1850,
25,159 56
1851,
34,535 47
1852,
30,233 54
1853,
42,496 20
for the West Lxdian Mission, and the Western
Evangelical Missionary Association were merged
in it, and their missions were transferred to its
care. These missions were in the island of
Jamaica ; among the Ojibwa or Ckippeicay In-
dians of Minnesota ; and in Western Africa.
The society has now, in addition to these, a
mission in the Sandwich Islands; in Siam;
among the fugitives in Canada ; among the
Chinese and other foreigners in California ; and
a number of home missionaries in the destitute
parts of the United States ; it has also recently
undertaken a mission to the Copts in Egypt.
Missionaries and assistant missionaries, male
and female, in Africa 13 ; Jamaica 21 ; Siam
6 ; Sandwich Islands 2 : Canada 2 ; California
2 ; among the Ojibwa Indians 19 ; for the Copta
2: Total, 90
Native teachers and assistants, - - 9
Churches in the Foreign field, - - - 14
Number of Church members, -• - IIGO
The following table shows the receipts of the
society, for each year since its formation :
First year ending Sept. 1, 1847, §13,033 67
Second " " "
Third " « "
Fourth " " "
Fifth " "
Sixth " « «
Seventh, " "
Total, 184,537 14
It will thus be seen that the aggregate of
the society's receipts for the first seven years of
its existence, has been §184,537 14, and its
average increase about 24 per cent, per annum.
The home missionaries of the Association
are specially instructed to discourage intempe-
rance and slavery, and labor for their removal.
The churches to which they minister, as well
in the slave states as elsewhere, regard slave-
holding as a disciplinable offence, and exclude
those who practice it from their comnmnion.
Twelve churches have been formed on these
principles in Kentucky and North Carolina,
and are reported to be in a prosperous condition.
The number of home missionaries aided by
the Association, the first year of its existence,
was four ; in the seventh year, ninety. The
number of churches under their care was one
hundred and eight. The whole number of
church members is not known, a portion of the
missionaries having made their reports to an
auxiliary society. — Rev. Geo. Whipple.
AMHERST : A town in the province of
Maulniain, in British Burmah. It was founded
in 1820 by Lord Amherst, at which time it bo-
came a station of the American Baptist Mis-
sion in Burmah. It is the burial-place of ^Irs.
Ann H. Judson.
AMOY : A city of China, situated on an
island of the same name, on the coast north-
ward from Canton ; being one of the five porta
open to the foreign trade.
118
ANEITEUM— AKMENIANS.
ANEITEUM : An island of New Hebrides,
■where is a station of the London Missionary
Society. , ^ -,-, ^
ANNAMABOE : On the Gold Coast,
West Africa, lat. 5° 10' N. long. 1° 5' W. A
station of the Wesleyan Missionary Society,
commenced in 1835 : has now 1 missionary, 3
chapels, 5 local preachers, 15 teachers, 237
scholars, 254 members, and 900 attendants on
public worship.
ANTIGUA : One of the West India Isles,
lat. 17° 8' N. long. 61° 52' W. A district of
the Wesleyan Missionary Society, commenced
in 1786 ; has now 17 missionaries, 8 stations,
44 chapels, 42 local preachers, 508 teachers,
12,000 members, 5,523 scholars, and 33,G50
attendants on public w^orship.
AOTEA: (Beecham-Dale) in New Zea-
land. A station of the Wesleyan Missionary
Society. Commenced in 1823. Has now one
missionary^ 10 chapels, 26 local preachers, 315
members, 590 scholars, and GOO attendants on
public worship.
APIA : A station of the London Mission-
ary Society on the Island of Upolu, one of the
Samoau group.
AEABIAN COAST : An out-station of
the Wesleyan Missionary Society, in South
America. (See Demerara.)
ARABKIR : A station of the American
Board among the Armenians, in the Eastern
part of Asia Minor, not far from the Euphra-
tes. Population GOOO in the town, and 15,000
including the immediately surrounding dis-
trict.
ARCOT : A city of Eastern Hindoostan,
seventy miles S. W. of Madras. It is the
centre of a very populous district, and was
occupied by the American Board in 1852.
ARMENIANS : Armenia, in the most
flourishing period of its history, was divided
into fifteen provinces, the central one of which
was Ararad, the second cradle of the human
race. (Gen. 8 : 4, Jer. 51 : 27, and in Heb.,
2 Kings 19 : 37, Is. 37 : 38.) Its situation is
at the eastern extremity of Asia Minor, lying
at short distances from the Mediterranean on
the south-west, the Black sea on the north-
west, the Caspian sea on the north-east, and
at a much greater distance from the Persian
Gulf OQ the south-cast. Its western boundary
is not far from six hundred miles east of Con
Caspian Sea. Some portions of the country,
particularly the province of Ararad (Ararat)
which in the Bible gives name to the whole
of Armenia, are of great fertility.
History. — The Armenian race is claimed to
be, and probably is, of the highest antiquity.
The father of it, according to their o^-n tradi-
tion, was Haig, a sou of Togarniah, the son of
Gomer, who was one of the sons of Japhet.
Hence to this day, in their own language, they
call themselves Haik ; their country, also, they
designate by the same name, or by the deriva-
tive Haiasdan. The seventh of the dynasty
of Haig was the famous hero Aram, from whom
the names Armenia and Armenian originated,
by which the country and people have been
known among foreigners for many ages. That
distinguished monarch, after freeing his own
territory from invaders, against whom the Ar-
menians seem to have had to maintain a con-
stant resistance, extended his arms into Cappa-
docia, and gave laws and his name successiv&-
ly to the regions called, First, Second, and
Third Armenia ; which, united under the gen-
eral name of Armenia Minor, extended from the
Euphrates to Ctesarea, and from the mountains
of Pontus to those of Cilicia. Armenia Minor
passed early into the hands of the Romans,
but deserves even at this day, on account of
the number of its Armenian inhabitants, to
retain its ancient name.
The principal foreign relations of Armenia,
during the early part of its history, were doubt-
less with the neighboring kingdoms of Asspia,
Media, and Babylon. The minute details giv-
en by Armenian historians of this traditionary
period, are, of course, entitled to little confi-
dence, although the occasional intermingling
of this portion of their history with that of
Scripture, gives us certain stand-points of in-
terest and certainty from which to view it.
In 328 A. C, Alexander, whose empire absorb-
ed so many oriental monarchies, extended his
conquests over Armenia, and extinguished the
dynasty of Haig, which is said, with a few
grafts upon it of foreign stocks, to have held
during eighteen centuries uninterrupted pos-
session of the throne. After the death of A lex-
ander, Armenia was ruled by governors,
sometimes of Greek and sometimes of native
origin, who derived their authority from S&-
leucia and Macedonia, and at times laid claim
stantinople. It extends about 430 miles in to entire independence. It was next subduetl
longitude, and about 300 in latitude ; having
on the north the ancient Albania, Iberia, and
Colchis ; on the west, Pontus and Cappadocia ;
on the south, Mesoiiotamia and Assyria ; and
on the east. Media Atropatane, or the modern
Aderbaijan. It is an elevated region, abound-
ing in lofty mountains, and having a climate
of considerable severity. Several large and
celel>ratcd rivers go out from it ; the Euphra-
tes aud Tigris towards the Persian Gulf; the
Jorokh (Akampsis) to the Black sea ; the
by the power that overturned the empire of
the Seleucida3 in the East and formed an im-
passable barrier to the ambition of Rome.
A. C. 149, Arshag the Great, (Arsaces, called
also Mithridates I.) grandson of the founder
of the Parthian Empire, placed his brother
Vaghai-shag (Valarsaces) upon the throne of
Armenia. Thus commenced this branch ol
the Arsacidie. under whose reign of 577 years,
the Armenians enjoyed greatcrprosiwrity than
durins" iv'iy other period of their history. Dik-
Ai-ad (Araxes) aud the Koor (Cyrus) to the ran (Tigraues) the fourth of this dynasty, was
ARMENIANS.
119
an ally of Mihrtad, (Mithridates) the great
king of Pontiis, in his wars with Sylla and
Lucullus. Thus he became involved in a war
with Eome, which Pompey ended by imposing
upon him humiliating conditions of peace.
New alliances against Rome led to the over-
running of his country by Anthony, in his Par-
thian wars, 34 A. C. The part north of the
Aras was given to his son, who was soon ex-
pelled, and the remainder became permanently
tributary to Augustus. With tliis division the
reigning family, after the leading members
had died in captivity, was also divided. The
northern branch, alternately upheld and de-
throned by the Romans and Persians, was at
length supplanted by Georgian princes, who
again yielded to a brother of the king of Per-
sia, and finally after a separation of 85 years
the whole country was reiinited under the
southern branch. This branch had its capital
at MedzjDiu, (Nisibis.) From a remote anti-
quity the north-west part of Mesopotamia was
inhabited by a race resembling the Armenians
in person, manners, and language ; and at the
commencement of the Christian era, constitu-
ted, according to Armenian report, under the
name of Mesopotamia of the Armenians, an
integral part of their kingdom, and was the
resitleuce of the court for 228 years. Abgar,
one of their sovereigns, they say, transferred
the seat of government to Oorfa, and was there
converted to Christianity. Having believed
in Christ from mere report, he corresponded
with him, received from him his portrait miracu-
lously impressed upon a handkerchief, and was
then instructed and baptized, together with
many of his people, by Thaddeus, whom the
apostle Thomas, in obedience to the command
of Christ, sent on this mission, and who extend-
ed his labors, with success, to other places.
But the successors of Abgar apostatized from
the faith, and martyred, besides many common
Christians, several of the apostles and disciples
of our Lord, and nearly exterminated Chris-
tianity from the country. The third in suc-
cession fro)n Abgar having obtained from
Vespasian, A.D. 75, the dominion of the whole
of Armenia proper, by ceding to the Romans
his possessions in Mesopotamia, removed his
court to the province of Ararat. In A.D. 302
Durtad (Tiridatcs) the king and his court were
baptized and the nation received Christianity.
The instrument of this great work was Gre-
gory the Illuminator, since the highest saint in
the Armenian calendar. Without receiving
the stories of his numerous and wonderful mi-
racles, we must admit him to have been a re-
markable man. Their conversion to Chris-
tianity increased their hatred to the Armenian
royal house of the Sassanian dynasty of Persia,
which inflicted on the country unspeakable
misery until A. D. 381, Armenia was divided
between the king of Persia and the emperor
of Constantinople. It was not, however, until
A. D. 428 that the Arsacidae dynasty came to
an end and the country was reduced to the
condition of a dependent proyince.
This brief sketch allows no details of the
subsequent conflicts of the Armenians against
their Magian persecutors of Persia ; their fall
into the hands of the khalifs of Mohammed,
A. D. 637 ; the miseries which they suffered
from the rival claims of the courts of Damas-
cus and Constantinople ; their varying fortunes
to the invasion of the Seljookian Turks, from
which they suffered terrible massacres, A. D.
1049 ; of the petty independent kingdom in
Cilicia with its changing relations to Moghul,
Crusader, Turkish, etc., neighbors, to its over-
throw by the sultans of Egypt and its annexa-
tion to that dominion, A. D. 1375 ; of the
awful devastations inflicted by the waA^es of
invasion that rolled over them under the gui-
dance, successively in the 13th and 14th cen-
turies, of Chingiz Khan and Timurlane ; and
the flnal conquest effected by the Turkmans
and Osmanli Turks, the latter of whom still
rule over a large part of Armenia ; Russia
since the beginning of the present century,
having obtained a large portion of it from
Turkey and Persia, between whom it was for
a long time shared. Few countries have a his-
tory more painful than Armenia.
The Armenian Church. — Receiving Chris-
tianity in the beginning of the fourth century,
the Armenians received it in the form which
had then become common in the East. Its
subsequent development was natm^ally in the
same line of direction as in other national
churches starting from substantially the same
point of departure. AVhile soon separated, on
the doctrine relating to the person of Christ,
from the Roman and Greek churches, it has
never ceased to be much influenced by them.
Previous to the invention of the Armenian
character by the learned monk Mesrob, A. D.
406, writing was done among them in the
Syi'iac and Greek characters, and the state of
letters was very low. This invention intro-
duced a new era, the first and most important
literary effort being the translation of the Bible
into Armenian, A. D. 411, by Mesrob and
Isaac the Catholicos. The version was made
from the Septuagint, and of course has all the
faults of the latter with some serious ones of
its own. It is still in use, and has been a boon
of immense value to the nation. It is held in
considerable estimation by Biblical scholars.
It is the oldest Armenian book extant, the
next being the history of the nation by Moses
Chorenensis, which was written about half a
century later. The Armenians were unaffected
by the Arian and Nestorian heresies, but in
the year 491 a synod of their bishops rejected
the decisions of the council of Chalcedon, while,
most inconsistently, it also anathematized
Eutyches. Although strenuously contending
for the formula of one nature in Christ, and
thereby cut off as heretical and schismatical
by the Greek and Romish Churches, modern
120
ARMENIANS.
missionaries are generally disposed to regard
the Armenians as differing more in terminology
than in idea from the orthodox faith on that
point. They agree with the Greeks and other
oriental Churches in rejecting the " filio-que "
from the Nicene creed and maintaining the
procession of the Holy Spirit from the Father
only. With some difference iu forms and
modes of worship, the religions opinions of the
Armenians are mostly like those of the Greeks.
The sign of the cross is used on all occasions ;
but made by the Greeks with three fingers, by
the Armenians with two, by the Jacobites with
one— the Greek usage pointing to the Trinity,
the Armenian to the two natures made one iu
the person of Christ, and the Jacobite to the
Divine unity. They profess to hold to the
seven sacraments of the Latin church ; but in
fact extreme unction exists among them only
in name, the prayers so designated being inter-
mingled with those of confirmation, which
latter rite is performed by the priest at the
time of baptism. Infants are baptized, as
commonly in the Greek and other oriental
churches, by a partial immersion iu the fount
and three times pouring water on the head.
Converted Jews, etc., though adults, are bai>
tized in the same manner, for the reason that,
according to the tradition of their church,
the Saviour was thus baptized in Jordan.
They readily admit to their communion Ko-
manists and Protestants baptized by sprink-
ling, differing in this from the Greeks, who,
claiming orthodoxy to their church alone and
denying salvation to all others, receive none,
however previously baptized, without rebai>
tizing them. They believe firmly iu transub-
stantiation, and adore the host in the mass,
which stupendous perversion of the sacrament
is followed by the same evils that are witnessed
from it in the Romish Church. The people
l^artakc, however, in both kinds, the wafer
or broken bread (unleavened) being dipped
in undiluted wine, (the Greeks use leavened
bread and wine mixed with water,) and laid
carefully on the tongue. It must be received
fasting. They reject the Latin purgatory, but
believing that the souls of the departed nuiy
be benefited by the aid of the (Church, (which,
of course, must be paid for,) they pray for the
dead. Saint-worship is carried to an extraor-
dinary length, the addresses to saints being
often grossly idolatrous, and the mediation of
Christ lost sight of in the liturgical services
of the Church as it is in the minds of the peo-
ple. The cross and pictures of the saints are
also objects of worship as possevssing inherent
efficacy. The Supreme Being is likewise re-
presented under the form of an aged, venerable
man, with whom, and the Son under the form
of a young man, and the Holy Spirit symbol-
ized as a dove, the Virgin Mary is associated
in the same picture. The perpetual virginity
of the latter is held as a point of preeminent
importance. Confession to the priesthood, in
order to absolution, is deemed essential to sal-
vation. Penances are imposed ; but absolution
is without money, and indulgences are never
given. Baptism confers regeneration and
cleansing from sin, original and actual ; spirit-
ual life is maintained by penances and sacra-
ments ; and the priest holds in his hand the
passport to heaven. The merit of good works
is acknowledged, particularly of asceticism.
Monachism, celibacy, fasting, etc., are viewed
as in other Eastern and Western churches ;
the number of fast-days, when no animal food
of any kind can be eaten, is 1G5 in the year.
On the fourteen great feast-days the observance
of the day is more strict than that of the Sab-
bath, which last is as in Roman Catholic
countries. Minor feasts arc even more numer-
ous than the days in the year. The church
services are performed iu the ancient tongue,
not now understood by the common people,
and in a manner altogether perfunctory and
painful to an enlightened mind. There are
nine different grades of clergy, each receiving
a distinct ordination by the laying on of hands.
Four of these are below the order of dea-
con, and are called porters, readers, exorcists,
and candle-lighters. After these come the
sub-deacons, the deacons, the priests, then the
bishops, and last of all, the catholicos. The
catholicos is ordained by a council of bishops.
He is the spiritual head of the church, who
alone ordains bishops, and can furnish the mei-
ron or sacred oil used by bishops in ordaining
the inferior clergy, and in the various ceremo-
nies of the church. The priests are obliged to be
married men, and can never rise higher than
the priesthood, except in case of the death of a
wife, when, not being allowed to marry a second
time, they may enter among the vartaheds, an
order of celibate priests, who are attached to
the churches as preachers, (the married priests
do not usually preach,) or live together in mo-
nasteries, and from among whom the bishops,
etc., on whom the law of celibacy is imposed,
are taken. The ecclesiastical polity is njodi-
fied somewhat according to the political gov-
ernments under which, in the countries of their
dispersion, the Armenians live. Originally,
there was but one head to the church, whose
residence was at the seat of the imperial or
kingly government. Subsequently, in the dis-
tracted condition of civil afl'airs, rival catholi-
coses rose up. At present three are acknowl-
edged— one at Aghtamar, in the Jjake Van ;
one at Sis, with a small body of followers in
the ancient Cilicia and neighboring territory ;
and one at Echmiadzin, acknowledged by
the Armenians iu Europe, Asia Minor, and
Armenia proper. There arc two patriarchs,
one at Constantinople and the other at Jeru-
salem ; the latter, however, being of little ac-
count compared with the former. Tliis office is
not an ecclesiastical, but a civil one, as an eccle-
siastic the patriarch being only a bishop, hav-
ing properly no spiritual authority above that
ARMENIANS.
121
of any otlier bishop. He receives his appoint-
ment from the Sultan, on a nomination of the
primates of the nation. His powers are defined
by an imperial firman, and he ranks, civilly,
with the great pashas of the empire. The
Armenian patriarchate of Jerusalem, the juris-
diction of which is very limited, dates back to
A. D. 1311, and owes its existence to the Sul-
tan of Egypt. Mohammed II., on the capture
of Constantinople in 1453, finding a patriarch
with spiritual jurisdiction over the whole
Greek church, sagaciously continued him at
the head of the Greeks that he might govern
them through him ; and transferring the Ar-
menian bishop of Brusa to the capital, he made
him, in like manner, patriarch of the Arme-
nians. As this officer is made responsible for
the good conduct of his people, he is clothed
with such prerogatives as are necessary to ena-
ble him to maintain his authority. Important
limitations have recently [see article on Turkey)
been imposed, but his powers are still great.
Heretofore there has been so little check that
his power has been almost absolute in respect
to the infliction of punishment. A prison
exists within his own precincts, over which he
has had entire control. A note from him to
the Forte (Turkish government) has been, in
most cases, sufficient to secure the banishment
of any person, ecclesiastic or layman, to a dis-
tant part of the empire. If, owing to the rank
or influence of the individual, difficulty inter-
posed in procuring the order, a bribe was ready
and generally settled the question. The patri-
arch's sanction being required to such applica-
tions, it has been easy to practice the heaviest
oppressions by defeating attempts to procure
the official passports needed to go from place to
place, or licenses for occupying houses or shops,
or prosecuting trades, marrying, burying the
dead, etc., etc. ; and as our history will show,
the power to oppress thus possessed, has been
wielded with terrible severity, to prevent the in-
troduction of a purer faith and practice among
this people. The despotic power of the patri-
archs is practically, however, much modified
by the power of the primates of the commu-
nity, who are chiefly bankers, and all of them
men of great wealth. The patriarch is really
the creature of the primates, and can do little
without their approval. A permanent central-
ization of power, like that of Rome, is hindered
by the intrigues of rival parties in this body,
making and unmaking and controlling the
patriarch, who is thus, in general, merely the
tool of the party, which, for the time being,
by influence derived from its relations to those
in high places of the Turkish government, or
by its more liberal use of money, happens to
be in the ascendant. As circumstances change
and parties fluctuate, measures in process, or
in prospect, are liable to be interfered with
and frustrated ; and it will be seen how perse-
cution has often been averted, and quiet secured
to missionaries and their native coadjutors in
the prosecution of their evangelical labors, by
jealousies and party feuds among the spiritual
and temporal leaders of the Armenian com-
munity. The patriarch enjoys the title of arch-
bishop, and has the appointment of bishops to
their sees, but, as before stated, does not or-
dain to the office. One of the darkest features
of the state of the church is the universality
of simony in practice, although condemned in
its standards, and denounced in words ; but it
is notorious that the patriarch has to expend
large sums in obtaining and retaining his
office, to reimburse which, and for his own
emolument, he sells to the bishops their sees,
who again ordain to the priesthood for money.
The moral character of the priests (being mar-
ried men) is superior to that of the vartabeds
and higher clergy, that of the latter being
generally confessedly bad. Their acquaintance
with the scriptures is vei-y limited ; many
among them are unable to read them in the
ancient tongue. The state of education in
general is lamentably low. A gross su^iersti-
tion has taken the place of true religion, and
the light of truth and holiness, recently re-
kindled, beginning to shine with more than its
pristine splendor among that people, had well
nigh gone out in utter darkness. The annals
of the Armenian church for the last few cen-
turies are a record of corruption, intrigue, and
crime, that cannot be contemplated without
the deepest sorrow and disgust. There is little,
indeed, in its history, from the beginning, to
cheer the heart, but the unshrinking fii-mness
with which it has in successive ages adhered
to the profession of its faith and the Christian
name, under the dreadful oppression of pagan
and Mohammedan conquerors and the strong-
est worldly inducements to apostatize ; and it
has also resisted wily efiforts, repeatedly put
forth, and in some instances with sanguine
expectation of success, to subject it to the iron
rule of Rome.
Language and Literature. — Many of the
A.rmenians claim, for their nation, that it has
preserved the language of Noah, unaffected by
the confusion of tongues at Babel, and therefore,
that it has the original speech of our first parents
in Paradise; without conceding this modest
claim we are probably safe in allowing their
language a very early origin. Its relations
with other languages are fewer than those
which obtain in the case of most others ; yet
it clearly belongs to the Indo-Germanic family.
It is enriched very considerably from the San-
scrit ; and it has no affinity with the Semitic
tongues. As found in its earliest existing, as
well as later forms, it abounds in gutturals, and
is harsh to the ear of the foreigner ; but it has
strength, flexibility, and compass, and is capa-
ble of expressing thought by evolving from it-
self, without drawing from abroad, ncAV terms
for the purpose. The conversion of the nation
to Christianity, led naturally to the introduc-
tion of certain words from the Greek, and im-
122
ARMENIANS.
pressed a new cliaracter upon it in several re-
spects. It has also received accessions ftom
other languages, and as nov?- spoken, differs
very considerably from the ancient tongue pre-
served in books. The Ararat, or eastern dia-
lect, spoken in Armenia, (excepting thcpasha-
lic of Erzrum,) and to the cast of it, has de-
parted less from the ancient than the Constan-
tinopolitan or western dialect. The latter has
become moulded in its idioms and construction
by the Turkish, and is usually spoken with an
infusion of Turkish words. As now cultivated,
it is becoming purified from these, and receiv-
ing, as needed, added wealth from the ancient
or original Armenian. There has been little
published in this dialect as yet, by adherents
to the Armenian Church, but the publications
of convents at Vienna and Venice and Koraish
and Protestant missionaries have ushered in a
new era for this form of the Armenian tongue,
and the new intellectual life called into action
by missionary labors, and the contact of the
occidental civilization with that of the Orient,
has begun the creation of a valuable literature
in it. The modern dialects differ from the an-
cient language, chiefly in the disuse of certain
words, the introduction of certain words and
phrases not known to the ancient, and a change
in grammatical forms, collocations of words and
idiomatic expressions. The literature of the
ancient consists mainly of historical, ecclesias-
tical, liturgical, doctrinal, and polemical writ-
ings of the so-called Christian Fathers ; and of
these some are well worthy the study of the
learned.
Amount of Population and where found. — The
number of the Armenians is variously esti-
mated at from 2 1-2 to G or 7 millions. It is
impossible to ascertain it with any degree of
accuracy. They have become widely dispersed
from their original seat, everywhere, like the
Jews, preserving their distinct nationality and
characteristics. Multitudes of them were car-
ried away captives, by Saracens and Greeks ;
Toghrul and Timurlane carried thousands to
unknown countries ; the Egyptians removed
60,000 to Egypt ; and it is known that the
Persians have always carried their captives
into servitude. Multitudes, moreover, have, at
various periods, been induced by oppression at
home, voluntarily to seek an asylum in distant
countries, to say nothing of other multitudes
that commerce has enticed away. We are not
surprised, therefore, at finding them, not only
in almost every part of Turkey and Persia, but
also in India, as well as in Russia, Poland, and
many other parts of Europe.
Character. — A sad depravation of morals pre-
vails among all the populations of the East ;
but in respect to moral traits the Armenians
compare favorably v/ith other races. Physi-
cally, they are athletic and vigorous : the Ar-
menian porters of Smyrna and Constant iiiople,
are men of great strength. In the mountains
of Cilicia and in some other localities, we still
find traces of the martial spirit, for which once
the nation was distinguished ; but in general,
ages of subjection have disposed them to quiet
submission, and abandoning hope of political
restoration as a nation, to seek compensation
in the diligent cultivation of the arts of peace.
The Armenians are cultivators of the soil, ar-
tizans, and merchants ; in industry, enterprise,
shrewdness, and perseverance they take pre-
cedence of other populations in the East, and
make themselves indispensable to the Turks
who rule over them. They bun8 palaces for
the Sultan and his ministers, make his powder
and cast his cannon, collect and disburse his
revenue, and in fine, make themselves every
where indispensable to the government, and in
the business transactions of society. They
have supplanted the Jews in their special pre-
rogative of dealers in money. The Armenian
bankers of Constantinople, from their wealth
and relation, as creditors, to pashas and minis-
ters of state, have much consideration and in-
fluence, while in demeanor servile to those
from whom their wealth is gained, and often
made to suffer under the pressure of despotic
power. The employment most congenial to
the Armenian, and in which he reaps the most
sure and richest harvest of success, is that of
traffic. Through the agency of the merchants
of this class the products of the far East and
the West are exchanged across the countries
of Western and Central Asia, and by means
of the constant intercourse thus kept up, a bond
of sympathy is maintained between the most
distant portions of the race. Sedate and staid,
the Armenian is a striking contrast to the vi-
vacious and talkative Greek ; but in solid qual-
ities of mind and heart is, to say the least, not
his inferior. With less of imagination and
emotion, the bent of his mind is more to the
practical and the real. He learns languages with
less facility than many others, but in mathe-
matics, in the physical sciences, and in intel-
lectual and moral science, he shows an aptitude,
and makes proficiency equal to that of any
European race.
The Armenians show a high degree of reli-
gious sentiment, manifesting itself not merely
in a zealous and bigoted devotion to a religion
of forms, but in an impressibility under the "
presentation of the great truths relating to
man's spiritual condition and prospects. In
this respect they differ greatly from races like
the Greek, Persian, and others ; and furnish a
ground of hope, which the remarkable progress
of an evangelical reformation among them is
daily strengthening, that they will receive, and
spread throughout the vast regions over which
they are scattered, the blessings of a pure and
saving Christianity.
Preparation for a work of Evangelization. —
It was a favorable circumstance that the er-
rors and corruptions introduced into the Arme-
nian Church had never been reduced to sys-
tematic form and set forth by authority of
ARMENIANS.
123
Syuod or Council, as was done in the Council
of Trent for the Romish Church. No Synod-
ical decision had ever rejected the word of God
as the ultimate authority to bind the con-
science ; and, however practically the tra-
ditions of men and authority of the Church
were exalted above the Bible, the sentiment
has been inwrought into the Armenian mind,
too deeply to be eradicated, that the Scrip-
tures, (not including the Apocryphal books,
which though sometimes read in the churches,
have never been considered canonical) are the
court of last resort, against whose decisions
nothing can be made to stand. The writings
of their own fathers contain abundant testi-
mony to the true Protestant doctrine on this
point. The Bible was locked up from the
mass of the people in the ancient language,
but the educated among them could read it,
and there was no ecclesiastical rule to forbid
the reading on the part of any. The New
Testament was even used as a common text-
book in commencing the study of the language
in the schools. The honor of having made
the first attempt in modern days for the refor-
mation of the Armenian church, is due to
a priest by the name of Debajy Oghlu, about
A. D. 1760. He lived in the quarter of Con-
stantinople called Psamatia. He appears to
have been acquainted with the character of
Luther, of whom he speaks in terms of decided
approbation, in a book which he wrote on the
errors of the Church, and in which he casti-
gates both clergy and people with an unspar-
ing hand. But while he makes constant re-
ference to the Bible, testing every principle
and ceremony by that high standard, and
sev^'ely reproves superstition and vice, he ex-
hibits no correct appreciation of the only wea-
pon that can overthrow error, the doctrine of
justification by faith alone through grace.
His book was never printed, but copies of it
were circulated from hand to hand, and at the
beginning of the present reformation in the
Church they were brought out from the ob-
scurity in which they had been kept, and used
with considerable etiect. How much influence
this book may have had in preparing the way
for the reformation now in progress, cannot -be
known.
In the year 1813, the British and Russian
Bible societies, becoming interested in the
Armenians, undertook to aid them with a sup-
ply of the word of God, copies of Avhich were
very rare and dear. An edition of the Arme-
nian Bible (the version of the 5th century,)
was commenced by the latter society at St.
Petersburgh, and by the former at Calcutta.
In 1815, the former edition, (of 5,000 copies)
Avas completed ; the latter edition (of 2,000
copies) was furnished two years afterwards.
The Russian Society also soon published an
edition of 2,000 copies of the ancient Arme-
nian New Testament by itself. The report of
the British Society for 1814, says, " The print-
ing of the Armenian Testament has awakened
great attention among the Armenians, parti-
cularly in Russia ; and a fervent desii'e has
been manifested on their part to possess that
invaluable treasure." The Emperor Alexan-
der being at that time a warm promoter of the
objects of the Bible Society throughout his
dominions, archbishops and bishops, governors
and generals, and nearly all the nobility of the
empire were among the patrons and supporters
of the institution. Among the rest was
Eprem (Ephraim) the Catholicos of the Ar-
menian Church, having his residence in Rus-
sian Armenia, who was elected one of the vice-
presidents of the society, and strongly favored
its efforts in behalf of his own co-religionists.
The British Society also put into circulation
among the Armenians of Turkey large num-
bers of New Testaments previous to 1823 ; and
in that year we find it publishing at Constan-
tinople an edition of 5000 copies of the New
Testament, and of 3,000 copies of the four
gospels alone. These were widely distributed
through various agencies. The teachers of
schools, some of the priests and deacons and all
of the higher clergy, having made the ancient
language their special study, were prepared to
be benefited by these ; and in the sequel the
reformation began among the teachers. But
the discovery then made that that language
was not understood by the mass of the people,
led to the issuing by the Russian Society of
the New Testament translated into the Arme-
no-Tvirkish, in 1822, and in the following year
by the British Society in the vulgar Armenian
tongue. A portion of the Armenians of Tur-
key (perhaps one-third, chiefly in the more
southern parts of Asia Minor,) have lost en-
tirely the use of their vernacular tongue, and
speak only Turkish ; and it was for them espe-
cially that the first named translation was in-
tended, being in the Turkish language written
with the Armenian character. These transla-
tions were very defective, yet were useful.
They have since been supplanted by new and
greatly improved translations made and pub-
lished under the auspices of the British and
American Bible Societies by missionaries of
the American Board. Up to this period, the
Armenian ecclesiastics made no opposition, so
far as is known, to the circulation of the Bible
among their people, and some of them favored
it ; but when Messrs. Lewis and Baker, agents
of the Bible Society in 1823, sought the ap-
probation of the Patriarch at Constantinople
to the printing of a version of the New Tes-
tament in the modern Armenian, which the
common people could understand, that digni-
tary refused his sanction in the most positive
terms. He even threatened that if such a
work 'were attempted, he would prohibit the
perusal of it, and punish such as should be
found in the possession of it ; and the clergy
generally, so far as they were consulted, unan-
imously reprobated the plan of such a transla-
124
ARMENIANS
tion. Hierarchism dreads the light of God's
word, and must change its natnre before it can
tolerate any movement towards truly spiritual
reform.
Mission of the American Board. — Early
in 1821, Mr. Parsons, of the mission to Syria
and the Holy Land, on his first visit to Jerusa-
lem, found there some Armenian pilgrims, with
whom he had an interesting conversation on
religious subjects. Deeply interested in their
appearance, he ventured to suggest the thought
of having a mission from the American
churches sent to Armenia itself The sugges-
tion was favorably received. Mr. Fisk soon
after wrote from Smyi-na to Boston, recom-
mending this measure. Before any thing had
teen heard from them on the subject, it had
also been thought of in Boston, and subse-
quent events decided the adoption of the plan.
One of these events was the conversion, at
Beirut, of three Armenian ecclesiastics, as the
first fruits of the labors of the brethren there.
Considering the small number of Armenians
in Syria, and that the brethren of that mission
were not sent to them, that the first conver-
sions should be from among them is a singular
fact. Two of the converts, Dionysius Cara-
bet and Hagop (Yacob or Jacob Agha) were
bishops ; the other, Krikor, (Gregory AYorta-
bet) was a distinguished preacher (vartabed).
These persons, by their correspondence with
Constantinople and other parts of Turkey, did
much towards preparing the minds of their
countrymen for the interesting spiritual work
which afterwards commenced among them.
Another circumstance was also influential.
Mr. King, — now Rev. Dr. King, of Athens, —
on leaving Syria in 1825, addressed a farewell
letter to the Roman Catholics, stating the
reasons why he could not be a Papist. This
letter was translated into Armenian by Bishop
Dionysius, and a copy in manuscript was sent
to some Armenians of distinction in Constan-
tinople. An extraordinary effect was pro-
duced on those who read it. A meeting, it is
said, was called in the patriarchal church, at
which the letter was read, and the references
to Scripture examined, and, as if l)y common
consent, it was agreed to do something for the
improvement of their church. Out of this
grew immediately the famous school of Pesh-
timaljian. 'J'his individual was, in many re-
spects, an extraordinary man. He was a crit/-
ical and accurate scholar in the ancient Arme-
nian tongue ; deeply versed in all the lore of his
own nation ; familiar with the theology of the
Ea.stern and Romisli churches, — the doings of
their councils, and the general history of the
Church ; — and, withal, ^a dilijrent student of
the Bible. Disgusted with the superstitions
around him and the character of the clergy,
he was easily led, by the Avritings of certain
French infTdeLs, for a time to regard all reli-
gion as a delusion and a lie ; but afterwards
was brought back to the ground that the
Bible is the tnie word of God, and the only
standard of faith. It is a remarkable circum-
stance that such a man should have been
placed at the head of a school established
within the precincts of the Patriarchate, and
had committed to him the training of the can-
didates for the priesthood, the completion of
the regular course of study in this institution
being required as a condition to ordination.
Cautious although he was, in speaking of the
errors of the Church, — and even timid and
sometimes time-serving in the presence of the
bigoted, — in a silent, unostentatious manner,
he gradually led his pupils into new paths of
inquiry, and, almost before they were aware of
it themselves, they came to believe that the
church may err, and actually does err, in many
of her teachings. Afterwards, when the Gos-
pel began to take effect, and he saw some of
his former pupils boldly advocating the doc-
trines of evangelical religion, he became
alarmed, and tried to keep them back ; but,
subsequently convinced that they were right,
and, in fact, only carrying into practice what
they had learned of himself, he ever after
strongly, though still privately, encouraged
them in their endeavors for the spiritual re-
generation of their countrymen. Never, till
the day of his death, in the year 1838, did he
so far overcome his native timidity, as openly
to avow himself an evangelical man ; but it is
impossible to calculate the amount of influence
exerted by him, in preparing the minds of men
to experience the power of the gospel, as
taught by foreign laborers when they came
into that field of evangelization. All the first
converts under the labors of the missionaries
of the Board in Constantinople, and many of
the later ones, were from among the alumni of
Peshtimaljean's school.
The establishment of a mission among the
Armenians of Turkey was resolved upon by
the Prudential Committee of the Board in the
year 1829. As a preparatory step. Rev. Eli
Sniitk and Rev. H. G. O. Ihvight were sent to
explore the field. The tour was commenced
in the spring of 1830, and occupied somewhat
more than a year ; and a mass of new informa-
tion was obtained, both in regard to the Ar-
menians and the Nestorians, which has since
becH of essential service in prosecuting mission-
ary operations in that part of the world. Early
in the year 1831, the Rev. W. Goodell then at
Malta, was instructed to proceed to Constan-
tinople with his family. They arrived on the
9th of June of the same year ; and shortly
after, he called upon the Armenian p.atriarch,
and sought his cooperation in establishing
schools on an improved plan among the people.
The patriarch received him with true oriental
politeness, and promised to furnish gome school-
masters, or priests, to learn the new system of
instruction, so as to be able to open schools ;
but the promise was all he did in the matter
On the 5th of June, 1832, Rev. H. G. 0
ARMENIANS.
125
Dwight took up his permanent residence at
Constantinople, witli his family, liaving been
appointed to labor among the Armenians.
Kev. W. G. Schauffler joined the Constantino-
ple station the last of July of the same year,
his labors being confined chiefly to the Jews.
The number of Armenian visitors at the
mission gradually increased ; and early in the
year 1833, Hohanues Sahakyau, a pupil in the
school of Peshtimaljian, became a deeply inte-
rested inquirer, and an earnest student of the
Scriptures, in which he found sympathy and
aid from his l>eIoved preceptor. The follow-
ing year he found a friend to whom he com-
municated his views, and who, after some
opposition, embraced them. Mr. Sahakyan
soon became a most efficient instrument in
promoting the truth, as he has continued to be
up to the present time ; and never, from that
moment, has the mission been without the most
satisfactory evidence of the special presence
of the Holy Spirit among the Armenian peo-
ple. On the 18th of July, 1833, Mr. Saliakyan
and his companion, in a very solemn manner,
committed themselves to the instruction and
guidance of the missionaries. One of them
was employed as a translator of the mission,
and the other as teacher of a school for Arme-
nian youth. They were soon brought into the
clear light of the gospel, and led to trust, with
a calm and joyful confidence, in Jesus Christ
as the only and all-su£Bcient Saviour.
But opposition now began to manifest itself.
By secret clerical interference, both Armenian
and Romish, the school was broken up. An
Armenian jeweler of great respectability and
influence, and strongly attached to the doc-
trines and rites of his church, had his mind
wrought up into a state of great alarm, in
reference to the course of these two young
men, by the secret insinuations of a Roman
priest. They were represented as being the
hired tools of certain foreigners, employed to
seduce the people, and lead them into danger-
ous heresy. The jeweler prevailed upon Pesh-
timaljian to summon the delinquents before
him, in order to examine them as to the alleged
heresy. He himself was present, and began
the examination with great sternness and se-
verity ; charging them with violating their
obligations to the church, and dishonoring
God. They were proceeding to vindicate
themselves, when Peshtimaljian took the busi-
ness wholly out of their hands, and poured
upon the astonished jeweler such a flood of
light, from history as well as Scripture, to show
that their church is wrong, and in many things
idolatrous, that even the young men themselves
were amazed. They afterwards had an oppor-
tunity of speaking for themselves, Peshtimal-
jian aiding them iu their references to the
Scriptures whenever their own memories failed;
and the result was. that the jeweler was not only
entirely satisfied that they were in the right,
but immediately became himself an (.pen and
powerful advocate of the evangelical doctrines
The circumstance of the closing of the school
became a subject of some notoriety, and some
minds were by this means put upon a new train
of thought. Islx. Sarkis Yarjabed, teacher
of grammar in the school of Peshtimaljian,
became a convert at this time, and was after-
wards highly useful to the mission as a trans-
lator.
In the autumn of 1833, the missionaries
were invited to witness the ordination of fifteen
Armenian priests at the Patriarchal church in
Constantinople. None had been ordained for
many years, in consequence of the new rule
which required that only such as had received
a regular education at the school of Peshtimal-
jian should be eligible for ordination. Nearly
all the candidates on the present occasion were
comparatively well educated men ; and one of
them had a high rejratation for learning. He
had a peculiarly serious and devout appear-
ance, and when, some days afterwards, the
missionaries called upon him in one of the
cloisters of the patriarchate, he seemed deeply
impressed by the remarks made to him on the
solemn responsibilities resting upon the office-
bearers of the church of Christ, and feelingly
begged an interest in their prayers. This was
Der Kevork, a man whose subsequent influence
in promoting the reformation was highly im^
portaut.
Up to this period, the missionary press had
remained in Malta, and had been chiefly em-
ployed in printing in Greek and Italian. On
the 23d of December, 1833, the Rev. Daniel
Temple, and Mr. Homan Hallock, missionary
printer, ai-rived in Smyrna with the jtress,
accompanied by bishop Dionysius, as Arme-
nian translator. But a combination of Arme-
nian and Romish influences induced the Pusha
peremptorily to order Mr. Temple's departure
from Smyrna with only ten days' notice. The
Pasha, however, who had acted hastily and
under a misapprehension of the facts iu the
case, revoked his order, on hearing the expla-
nations of the American consul ; but it was
thought best that the bishop should return to
Beirut, where he had formerly resided ; the
Armenians being incensed against him on
account of his having married and become a
Protestant.
The indications of the special presence of the
Holy Spirit became more numerous and deci-
sive. The meetings at Mr. Goodell's residence
had been gradually increasing in solemnity and
interest. On the first Monday of Jan. 1834,
the monthly concert was observed, for the first
time, in the Tm-kish language. Intelligence
was communicated from the missions, and
every heart seemed deeply interested, and
many eyes were suffiised with tears. The
nativ..' brethren there received a new impulse
to go on with their labors for the salvation
of their own countrymen. The number stea-
dily increased of those who frequented the
12G
ARMENIANS.
houses of the missionaries, and the mam topics
of inquiry were deeply practical and spiritual,
relating directly to the salvation of the soul.
In the course of the year, two or three priests
in Constantinople were awakened, and tho-
roughly convinced of the truth of the evan-
gelical system. The Bible was much sought
for and read ; many eyes were opened to see
the folly of their own superstitious ; and a
few, it is believed, were added to the number
of sincere believers in Jesus Christ. The two
young men whose interesting history has been
briefly given, and who became native assist-
ants, were active in spreading the truth, and
exerted no small amount of instrumentality in
bringing about the results that followed.
Every effort made to induce the Armenian
ecclesiastical authorities to take the lead in
enlarging and imjiroving their schools having
proved a failure, the mission at length deter-
mined to establish, independently, a high
school in Pera, the objects being to educate
promising boys and young men in useful
branches, to stimulate the Armenians to efforts
in this department, and to furnish a model
school for them to imitate. The school was
opened, October 27, 1834, under the superin-
tendence of Mr. Paspati, a rfative of Scio,
who had Iteen educated in America, and who,
by his religious character, as well as his intel-
lectual training, proved himself to be well
fitted for this post.
Rev. John B. Adger joined the Smyrna
station in the month of October, 1834. Two
new stations were occupied, one at Brfisa and
the other at Trebizond. Rev. B. Schneider
arrived at Briisa with his family on the l.'ith
of July, 1834. The Greek bishop forbade his
people furnishing the missionary with a house,
although one had previously been pledged to
him by a prominent mcmljer of the Greek
community. But the independence of the
owner enabled Mr. Schneider to secure a resi-
dence in spite of the bishop. And, after some
opposition, he was enabled to open a school
of 70 children, his labors at first being divided
between the Armenians and Greeks. Rev. T.
P. Johnson first visited Trebizond in Novem-
ber, 1834. Through priestly interference, he
"was foiled in three successive attempts to pro-
cure a house, and at last he only secured a
contract for one, on condition that he should
obtain a firman or imperial order, from Con-
stantinople, which he succeeded in doing,
through the kind interposition of Commodore
Porter, the United States Minister at the
Porte ; and he removed there with his family
in the spring of 1835. The breaking out
of the plague, however, prevented him from
having much intercourse with the people lor
some months. At the capital, the number
of tho.se who declared themselves Protestants
rapidly increased. Not only in the city ])roper,
but throughout the suburbs and the villages
on the Bosphorus, wherever Armenians were
found, there was an increasing disposition to
talk on religious subjects. The missionaries
avoided controversy about forms and ceremo-
nies ; and instead of attacking directly the
superstitions of the church, determined to
" know nothing but Christ and him crucified."
Cases of true conversion were every now and
then occurring, among whom was Der Kevork,
before alluded to. He had charge of a school
of about 400 boys, supported by the Arme-
nians themselves, and in no way connected
with the missionaries. He soon introduced
the custom of reading the Scriptures daily,
and explaining them to the whole school ; and
he also formed a class of twenty of his most
promising scholars, for the critical study of the
New Testament under his immediate direction.
One room in Mr. Goodell's house was ahvays
open for Armenians to come together for
prayer ; and in some instances family prayer
was established by the new converts, and a
prayer-meeting w^as maintained by a few pupils
in the high school, which had now increased
to thirty pupils, and had also grown greatly in
favor with the people. The English, French,
Italian, Armenian, Turkish, Greek, and He-
brew languages were taught, as well as the
mathematics, geography, &c., and lectures were
given, illustrated by experiments on various
branches of the natural sciences. Mr. Pai;pati
having left for Paris, Mr. Hohannes Sahakyan
was appointed to the superintendency of the
school, assisted by several other teachers. Vis-
itors of all classes were numerous, and the lec-
tures were attended by many deeply-interested
spectators. Externally, friendly relations were
still preserved with the ecclesiastical authori-
ties of the Armenian church ; but they already
began to manifest their uneasiness at the cii--
culation of the Bible, and the popularity and
success of the school established by the mis-
sion. Matteos, the newly appointed bishop of
Brusa, was one of the earliest friends of the
mission, having imbibed many enlightened
views of the truth. Even after his removal to
Brusa, he expressed, by letter, the most friendly
sentiments; and w^hen Mr. Schneider called
upon him, soon after his arrival, he avowed,
in very decided terms, his approbation of the
school recently established by the mission in
Brusa. Not many months elapsed, however,
before this school was entirely broken up,
through the influence of this same prelate,
who also endeavored, in other ways, to circum-
scribe the operations of the missionaries. He
afterwards made himself notorious as Matteos
Patriarch, the persecutor of the Protest-
ants IN Turkey. This fact shows how little
dependence could be placed upon ])rofessions
of friendship nuide by the high ecclesiastics,
who, though often convinced of the truth, yet
having no fixed principles, are ready to do any
thing to please the rich and iuflueutial among
their people.
The Brusa station was strengthened by tho
ABMENIANS.
m
arrival of tlie Kev. P. 0. Powers and wife, in
February, 1835, who took up their abode in
the Armenian quarter of the town.
The preparation of books and tracts in
Armeno-Turkish and the modern Armenian
language, became more and more an object
of attention, and Mr. Hallock, the missionary
printer, visited the United States to superintend
the manufacture, at New York, of punches for
making Armenian type for the press in Smyrna;
and the liberal sum of $5000 was appropriated
to this object, and for the purchase of materials
for a foundry and printing office, by the Pru-
dential Committee. Mr. Sarkis, one of the
pious Armenians in Constantinople, and an
eminent scholar in his own language and liter-
ature, removed to Smyrna, to be employed as
translator, in connection with the press, under
the superintendence of Mr. Adger.
Early in 1836, two weekly meetings were
established in Constantinople, one of which
was conducted by Mr. Goodell, and the other
by Mr. Schauffler, in the Turkish language,
which afforded constant evidence of the pro-
gress of the work. The houses of the mission-
aries were frequented by ecclesiastics, as well
as laymen, some four of the former, chiefly
from among the parochial clergy, appearing to
be sincere inquirers after the truth. One of
these, attached to the Patriarchal Church, pro-
posed, of his own accord, that the missionaries
should publish a new and revised edition of the
modern Armenian New Testament, so that all
the people might have access to the AVord of
God in an intelligible language. He offered to
subscribe 500 piastres, (about $23) himself, to-
wards the object, and to procure more from
others. Some of the most influential vartabeds
at the patriarchate were disposed to encourage,
rather than hinder educational efforts.
It was now not an uncommon thing, to hear of
one and another of the bishops and vartabeds,
preaching what were called evangelical ser-
mons. Subsequent facts, however, have shown,
in regard to most of them, that public opinion,
at that time somewhat clamorous for reApm,
more than personal conviction and interest in
the subject, led to this new style of address.
One of the converts, who was rather promi-
nent as a reformer, was publicly accused of in-
fidelity by a priest ; and on the following Sab-
bath, one of the vartabeds of the Church de-
nounced him before the people, as a heretic and
an infidel, whose case was soon to be tried by
a council of ecclesiastics and laymen. The
council was afterwards held, and although the
accused declared plainly that he had no confi-
dence whatever in the mediation of the saints,
and that he received the Gospel as his only and
all-sufficient guide ; — yet he was fully acquitted.
The most diligent and persevering efforts
were made, by certain adherents of the Romish
Church, to stir up the Armenians against the
missionaries. No direct means had been used
by them, to enlighten that portion of the Ar-
menian race, who acknowledge the supremacy
of the Pope. They may amount, perhaps, to
15,000 or 20,000, having a Patriarch of their
own. In July, 1836, this functionary came out
with a public denunciation of all the books cir-
culated by the missionaries, including the New
Testament, and he expressly prohibited his
people from purchasing or procuring from
them copies of an edition of the Armenian
Scriptures which had been printed at their own
press in Venice.
Indications now began more and more to
manifest themselves, that the Word of God was
operating like silent leaven, especially in the
schools where it was daily read as a text book ;
and many interesting incidents are mentioned
in the journals of the missionaries, to illustrate
the influence that was operating upon the
minds of the people ; which Mr. Goodell cha-
racterized as a simple and entire yielding up of
the heart and life to the sole direction of God's
Word and Spirit."
The gospel had now been proclaimed to mul-
titudes of people by conversation in private
circles, both in the Turkish and Armenian
languages, and a formal expository senace had
been held in Turkish, by Mr. Goodell, for some
time. The first regular sermon in the Arme-
nian tongue, was preached by Mr. Dwight, on
the 9th of September, 1836, to a small select
company in his own house. The monthly con-
cert of prayer increased in interest. Female
education, which had been almost entirely neg-
lected, was beginning to attract attention.
At Constantinople parents were beginning to
provide instruction for their daughters, and
one of the evangelical brethren had a class of
Armenian girls who were learning to read. In
Smyrna, a school of 40 Armenian girls was
established by the mission, in the summer of
1836, with the express approbation of a num-
ber of influential men in the community.
Owing to one or two jealous spirits, however,
a meeting of the community was soon called,
and it was agreed to take the new enterprise
into their own hands ; and it was cheerfully
relinquished to them by the missionaries.
In Brfisa, there were manj^ who professed to
be friendly to the missionaries ; but in general,
the silence and insensibility of death reigned
among them. Bishop Matteos showed more
openly a hostile disposition. The station at
Trebizond was reinforced in August, 1836, by
the arrival of the Rev. W. C. Jackson and
wife.
The principal bankers in the country, at
that time, belonged to the Armenian commu-
nity. According to the system then prevail-
ing, the Pashas and governors of the empire
derived their support, not by a salary from the
government, but by taxes, levied by them-
selves, on the produce of the territory over
which they had jurisdiction, and by extortion.
Every Pasha had his banker, who furnished
him with money on interest, when out of office,
128
ARMENIANS.
or when newly appointed to office, receiving
his pay by participating in the spoils filched
afterwards from the poor people. This_ ar-
rangement gave great power to these capital-
ists ; and nearly all the important appointments
of the government were in their hands. With-
in their own community their word was law.
Patriarchs, as we have shown, were elect-
ed and deposed by them ; and through
them, bishops and vartabeds received their
appointments to dioceses and churches. A
few of the richest and most powerful of
these men decided nearly every question of any
importance pertaining to the civil or ecclesi-
astical affairs of the Armenian nation. As a
class, they were ignorant and bigoted, and,
therefore, quite ready to believe any misrepre-
sentations of Protestantism which their own
religious guides should give them. In this
state of things, any office-bearer in the church,
high or low, might be deterred fi'om acting, in
his official capacity; according to the policy
dictated by his own mind. Some rival in the
holy orders, even much lower than himself in
rank, might, through his superior influence
with one or more of these bankers, procure the
removal from office of the obnoxious individ-
ual. In the year 1837, it was resolved in the
counsels of the Armenian community, that is,
by a few bankers, as a first step, to break up
the High School. In preparation for this, a
large college had been founded some months
before, at Scutary ; and the public school, su-
perintended by I)er Kevork, in the quarter of
Hass Keuy, had been committed to the gene-
ral supervision of one of the great bankers re-
siding there, a truly noble-spirited man, that it
might be remodeled according to his own wishes,
so as to make it a first>rate school. As learn-
ing was now becoming popular, these were
necessary steps in order to reconcile the people
to the shutting up of the Armenian High
School. In January, 1837, the parents of the
scholars of the missionary school were sum-
moned before the Vicar, and peremptorily or-
dered to withdraw their sous from the school.
Sorrow was depicted on every face, as the
pupils came back to get their books, and say
their farewells.
The plan of the opposing party in this case,
was, after breaking up the school, to procure
from the Turkish government, the banishment
of Mr. Sahakyan, its principal, and several oth-
ers who were considered most iyfluential
among the evangelical brethren. Great was
their astonishment when they heard that, no
sooner was this hated individual released, by
their act, from his connection with the mission,
than he was engaged l)y the banker of Hass
Keuy, to take the superintendence of the great
national school, which had been placed by
them in his hands ! Every effort was made l)y
the anti-evangelical party to persuade him to
change his purpose ; but he remained firm, and
declared that if they did not allow him to
manage the school in his own way, he would
leave the Armenian community altogether.
They were obliged to yield, and soon a school
of COO, instead of 40, as before, was in suc-
cessful operation, under the superintendence of
Mr. Hohannes Sahakyan ; having Der Kevork,
the pious priest, for one of his principal
teachers !
The Hass Keuy school was formally adopted
as the school of the nation, and Mr. Sahakyan
received a regular appointment from the Arme-
nian Synod as its principal. He had there-
fore, more liberty of action, and could give
religious instruction officially. He devoted an
hour a day to this special purpose, in a select
class of sixty of the most advanced pupils, be-
sides more general instruction, and the daily
good influence exerted by himself and Der
Kevork.
There was a liberal course of study adopted,
and the school was arranged, throughout, af-
ter the model of the mission school. Lectures
were given in the natural sciences, the whole
of the philosophical apparatus of the mission
having been purchased and paid for, by the
directors.
This institution became deservedly popular ;
there was now much more boldnesS; on the part
of the enlightened Armenians, in spreading the
truth ; and the light of truth and piety seemed
to be kindled in every part of the city.
Inquiry was extending, also, at the interior
stations, and the spirit of opposition was like-
wise awakened.
In September, 1837, a convention of mis-
sionaries was held in Smyrna, the chief object
of which was, to ascertain, by prayerful in-
quiry, the mistakes and deficiencies of the past,
both in regard to personal qualifications for
the work, and the means and measures adopted
for bringing the claims of the gospel in con-
tact with the hearts of the people. Recent
afflictive dispensations in the mission had pro-
duced a mellowed tone of Christian feeling,
which greatly prepared the minds of the breth-
ren for a profitable discussion of these subjects.
The Lord was felt to be indeed present, and it
is believed that each one returned to the toils
of missionary life, with a more praj-erful and
confiding spirit, and a more fixed purpose of
heart, to make the salvation of the soul the
immediate and all-absorbing object of labor,
and the preaching of " Jesus Christ, and him
crucified," the grand means.
Mr. Adger was enabled to commence an ex-
pository service in Smyrna, in the Armenian
language, at which some five or six were usually
present. His translator, Mr. Sarkis, from
Constantinople, had increasing intercourse
with the people ; and Armenian mothers began
to be eloquent in their lamentations over the
neglected education of their daughters. Up
to' the first of January, 1838, there Avcre
printed, at the Smyrna press, about two and a
I lialf million pages in the Armenian language.
ARMENIANS.
129
A pocket edition of the New Testament, in
ancient Armenian, was completed on the last
day of the year 1837.
Tlic ph^guc, that scourge of Tiu-key, was
permitted this year to enter the family of Mr.
Dwight, and a beloved wife and child became
its victims. This afflictive dispensation called
forth the tendcrest expression of sympathy
from the native brethren and other friends of
the missionaries ; and, in various ways, it was
ti'uly a sanctified, though most sorrowful event.
This terrible disease, in its annual visitations
to the capital, and other parts of the Turkish
empire, has proved a far more serious obsta-
cle to missionary labor, than can well be
imagined in America. The season of the
plague was a season of non-intercourse, to a
very great extent. Schools must be closed ;
jKiblic worship suspended ; and the giving and
receiving of visits, in a great measure inter-
rupted. This has happened, again and again,
at all the stations. Sometimes, when the mis-
sionaries had made a successful and promising
beginning of some new plan of usefulness, this
dreadful scourge would come down upon them
with all its violence, and suddenly arrest the
enterprise, and frustrate all their hopes. And
in such a country as Turkey, when a school is
closed, or public worship suspended for several
months, more ground may be lost than can be
gained in a whole year. But for 16 years
past, since quarantines have been established,
Constantinople has not been visited with the
plague, showing that it did not originate there.
As the doctrines of the gospel gained a hold
on the hearts of the people, superstitions gave
way; and, as error became eradicated from
the mind, the external symbols of that error
were naturally removed from use and from
sight. The progress of correct religious opin-
ion was evinced, especially, by the gradual dis-
appearance of pictures from the Armenian
churches. In one instance, near the beginning
of the year 1838, the vartabed and leading
men in the large village of Orta Keuy, on the
Bosphorus, went together to the church, and
Ciirefully removed every picture, except the
altar pieces, which were so situated that they
could not be approached for worship. This is
the village in which the missionaries resided,
when they first began to get access to the Ar-
menians. The patriarch Stepan remarked to
one of the native brethren, that many of the
observances in their church were not prescribed
by the gospel, and that probably they would
not exist ten years longer.
The reformation was daily gaining strength.
Tlie converted Armenians were active and
prayerful. They delighted in the communion
of saints ; and they also sought and found fre-
quent opportunities for religious conversation
with their fellow-countrymen, who, as yet, had
not felt the power of the gospel. Mr. Sahak-
yan continued his connection with the High
School at Hass Keuy, and his opportunities
9
for usefulness were many and great. But, such
was the opposition of the leading Armenians
to Mr. Sahakyan, that its distinguished patron
determined to abandon it altogether ; and,
before the close of the year 1838, most of the
teachers were dismissed, and the school reduced
to its former footing. Many of the people
were strongly in favor of its continuance, and
particularly the leading men of the village
where it was located ; and they sent a delega-
tion to the patriarch, to implore his aid, to
prevent the approaching disaster. All they
obtained from him was fair promises, that were
never fulfilled.
Mr. Sahakyan, being thrown out of em-
ployment, was very gladly taken up by the
mission. The necessity had for some time
beenfelt, of having a man to superintend the
distribution of books, which were rapidly in-
creasing in number. To this post Mr. Sahak-
yan was appointed, with the confident expec-
tation that it would prove a station of great
usefulness.
The kingdom of Chi-ist now began to make
evident inroads on the kingdom of Satan, in
the interior of the country. Two Armenian
priests, in Nicomedia, who had never seen a
missionary, had been converted to the truth.
One of them afterwards came to Constantino-
ple, and visited the missionaries. He ai)peared
to be a man of a most devout and humble
spirit, who had inward experience of the grace
of God. The doctrine of salvation, by grace
alone, was quite familiar and very precious to
him ; and he readily discriminated between a
living and a dead faith. In 1832, Mr. Goodell
left with an old priest at Nicomedia, as he
was passing, a copy of the ArmenoTurkish
New Testament, and gave to some Armenian
boys several tracts in the same language.
One of these tracts— a translation of the
Dairyman's Daughter— fell into the hands of
another priest, whom Mr. Goodell did not see.
The perusal of it was the means of his awaken-
ing and conversion ; and, through his influ-
ence, another priest was brought to the know-
ledge of the truth, and their united prayers
and efforts were now directed to the enlighten-
ment and conversion of their flock. The spirit
of inquiry began to spread among the people.
In the spring of 1838, Mr. Dwight visited
the place and found 16 men, who appeared to
be truly enlightened and converted. Pie was
received by them with the greatest cordiality,
and they seemed to hang on his lips like men
hungering for the bread of life.
The two priests, Der Vertaness, and Der
Harutun,_ removed, of their own accord, to
Constantinople ; and were subsequently placed
together, as the only priests in a village church
on the Bosphorus. Here they could act with
a good degree of independence, and many op-
portunities of doing good were presented.
Durmg the summer of 1838, the Patriarch
Stepan, being an old acquaintance, spent sev-
130
ARMENIANS.
eral weeks with tliem ; and they bad free con-
versations together on religious subjects, the
Patriarch generally assenting to their views.
Both at Brusa and Trebizond every possible
obstacle was thrown in the way of the progress
of the truth ; and yet the ^Yord of God could
not be bound. In both places there were in-
creasing friendliness on the part of the people,
more extended intercourse, and the special
presence of the Holy Spirit. Among those
whose minds seemed to be especially opened to
religious impressions at Trebizond, were the
vartabed himself, or acting bishop, and also a
priest of the Church. At Brusa, the two
teachers, Mr. Serope, and Mr. Hohannes,
seemed to be growing in grace and in the
knowledge of Christ. An influential and dis-
tinguished man became a serious inquirer for
the°way of salvation, and opposition thus far,
was overruled for good. In October, 1838, Mr.
Schneider began a regular preaching service
at his own house, every Sabbath, in the Turkish
language, for the benefit of both Armenians
and Greeks. The Eev. E. Eiggs joined
the station at Smyrna, with his family, on the
2d of November, 1838.
By a series of intrigues, commenced near the
beginning of the year 1839, the leading bankers
were gradually dispossessed of much of their
former power ; and three or four menfrom the
artisan classes, stood before the nation as its
guides and dictators, and especially as defenders
of its ancient faith, and the zealous extirpators
of heresy. One of these was the Sultan's chief
architect, and another was his second. An-
other was superintendent of the government
powder works. The first two were employed
at the time, in erecting the most splendid of
all the imperial palaces ; and this brought
them into closer contact with the Sultan than
was enjoyed by any of the bankers ; and he
was so much delighted with their work, that he
seemed ready to grant them any request they
might make. The expulsion of Protestantism
from the land was an object that lay near their
heai-ts ; and they now resolved to make use of
the strong arm of the Sultan to effect it. Ac-
cusations were presented against the evangeli-
cal brethren, and the most false and scandalous
representations were made, as to the character
and tendencies of Protestantism, calculated
not only to prejudice the niinds of the Turkish
cabinet, but to excite the feelings of the popu-
lace. The Sultan was easily persuaded, and
the architects and powder-maker were fully
authorized to call upon the civil power, to aid
them in extirpating this dangerous heresy.
But the Patriarch Stepan, was altogether
too mild a man for their pui-pose ; and it was
reported and believed that his sympathies were
with the evangelical party. They procured
from the interior of the country, Hagopos, a
man who had once been Vicar of the Patri-
archate of Constantinople, and who was noto-
rious for his bigotry and sternness of charac-
ter, to be associated with Stepan, as assistant
Patriarch. He soon had the whole power
virtually put into his hands, and Stepan sunk
to a mere cypher. On the 19th of February,
Mr. Sahakyau was arrested, and thrown into
the Patriarch's prison, without even the form
of an examination, and without being informed
of the charges alleged against him. He was
a mild, amiable, inoffensive man ; of unblem-
ished character, and against whom, as a subject
and a citizen, not the slightest imputation
could be brought. And yet, while the same so
called Christian Patriarchate would use all
possible means to protect felons of every de-
scription, who belonged to the Armenian com-
munity, even to the murderer himself, from the
regular action of the Turkish law, it could
rudely seize an innocent man, and deliver him
over to the civil authorities, to be punished for
daring to think and act for himself, in matters
pertaining only to his own soul and God !
The Armenian Patriarchal power at Con-
stantinople has always been a persecuting
power, but more especially M'ithin the last one
hundred and fifty years, during which, much
blood even has been shed by it, in the endeavor
to prevent proselytism from that Church to the
Church of Eome. In the present instance,
therefore, the ecclesiastical authorities of the
Church were only acting out the true spirit of
the establishment. Mr. Boghos Fizika was
also arrested and put into the same prison
with Mr. Sahakyan. Four days afterwards,
these two individuals were put under charge
of a Turkish police officer, who was armed
with pistols and sword, and, without the least
show of trial or expressed accusation, they
were sent into banishment by an imperial fir-
man, to a monastery near Kaisery, (the an-
cient Ca?sarea of Cappadocia,) about 400 miles
cast of Constantinople. The Patriarch Stepan
took leave of them with tears. He did not
participate in the act of his comii«!.ers, and
knew well its deep injustice. The police ofii-
cer, a Turk, stopped at his mother's house in
Scutary, and sent back word that Mr. Fizika
was too feeble to bear the fatigues of the jour-
ney ; but the most positive orders were returned
to carry him to Kaisery, either alive or dead.
At Nicomedia, he was refreshed with an in-
terview with the evangelical brethren ; and
having recruited his health, he went on his
way. But the Turkish officer who conducted
him, finding they had friends there, treated Mr.
Sahakyan with the greatest cruelty, for the
purpose of extorting money, till he was com-
pelled to give an order for $100 to secure
relief. On their arrival at Kaisery, the Arme-
nians, on being informed that they had been
banished merely because they received the
Bible as the only infallible guide, replied that
the Patriarch might as well banish them all,
for they were all of the same opinion.
The greatest efforts were now made at the
capital to frighten the brethren into submis-
ARMENIANS.
131
sion. Yery few dared to visit the mission-
aries, aud those only under cover of the dark-
ness. On the 3d of Marcli, a Patriarchal bull
Vvfas issued by Hagopos, adjunct Patriarch,
forbidding the reading of all books printed or
circulated by the missionaries ; and all who
had such books in their possession were re-
quired to deliver them, without delay, to their
bishop or confessor. The brethren, though
appalled by such violent proceedings, still ex-
hibited great constancy ; and seemed ready to
suffer joyfully the spoiling of their goods, and,
if need be, imprisonment, banishment, and the
bastinado, for their Master's sake.
On the 14th of March, Der Kevork, the
pious priest of Hass Keuy, was arrested and
thrown into prison. Eight days after, the
Patriarch Stepan was deposed from office, and
permitted to retire to his convent at Armash,
near Nicomedia ; and on the following day,
his assistant, Hagopos, was installed in his
place. During the same week, the Greek
Patriarch issued a bull, excommunicating all
who should buy, sell, or read the books of the
Lutherans or Calvinists, as the missionaries
were called ; and an imperial firman was also
published, requiring all the patriarchs to look
well to their flocks, and guard them against
foreign influence and infidelity. It was now
quite evident that the Sultan himself was an
interested party in these transactions. After
lying in prison for more than a month, Der
Kevork was banished into the interior ; and
two vartabeds, who had presided over dioceses
as bishops, one more teacher, and several other
persons, were sent into exile about the same
time. As there was no examination of any
case, some who were made the victims of this
cruel fanaticism, had never in any way been
associated with the evangelical men, but were
made to participate in their punishment by a
mere miskike.
Apri]|H|R, the Patriarch issued a new bull,
more viol&nt than the former, threatening ter-
rible anathemas, in the name of the Father,
Son, and Holy Ghost, against all v/ho should
be found having any intercourse with the mis-
sionaries, or reading their books ; and also
against all who neglected to inform, when made
acciuainted with offenders. Within two or
three days, a rich banker, who had been for
years on friendly terms with the missionaries,
and who was especially the patron of Mr.
Boghos Fizika, was arrested and imprisoned
in the hospital, as an insane person : this is a
method of persecution not unfrequently resorted
to in this country. The banker was released
after about a week's confinement, on paying a
large sum towards the college at Sciitary, to
atone for the mischief he had done by his
insanity !
The list of suspected persons had now swell-
ed to a very large number ; and a strong effort
was being made to procure the expulsion of the
[missionaries themselves from the country. Mul-
titudes of persons of diverse characters, were
active, from diverse motives, in keeping alive
the spirit of fanaticism. The native brethren
were at their wits' end, and even the missiona-
ries could not see how God was going to
deliver his people. Providence solved the
problem, howevei", with the greatest imagina-
ble ease. The persecuting powers were sud-
denly thrown into the deepest consternation,
by a demand from the Sultan to all the Patri-
archs, that each should furnish him with seve-
ral thousand men, to recruit his broken army,
and enable him to prosecute his war with Mo-
hammed Ali of Egypt. Though an unprece-
dented demand, it must be promptly ol^eyed.
Public attention was now entirely absorbed
in this subject, and the doomed Protestants
were for the moment forgotten. The army
was raised, and marched to the field. It was
estimated to consist of 80,000 men ; and on
the plains of Nezib, near Aleppo, it encoun-
tered an Egyptian force of about the same
number. The battle was fought on the 24th
of June, 1839, aud the Turkish trooj^s were
utterly defeated, and scattered in all directions.
Tidings of this disaster, however, never reached
the ears of the Sultan Mahmud. He died in
his own palace, on the Bosphorus, on the first
day of July. His son, Abdid Mejid, was
girded with the imperial sword, on the 11th ;
and a few days after, the news reached the
capital that the Capudan Pasha had treacher-
ously surrendered up the whole Turkish fleet
to Mohammed Ali. Thus, both the army and
navy were gone, and a mere boy of seventeen
was upon the throne, in the place of the great
Mahmud ; and the entire dissolution of the
empire seemed inevitable. Nothing but the
intervention of the great powers of Europe
prevented this catastrophe.
By this rapid succession of remarkable
events, God rebuked the persecutors of his
people, and effectually removed from them the
power of carrying into effect their unholy de-
signs. Judgment succeeded judgment. A fire
broke out in Pera, which consumed between
three and four thousand houses, destroying an
immense amount of property and several lives.
Immediately after, a meeting of the Armenian
Synod was called, and, after much violent
debating, it was resolved that a part of the
exiles should be recalled. Mr. Sahakyan, be-
ing considered a " ring-leader," was to be left
in perpetual banishment. All the others re-
turned to their homes befoi-e winter set in.
Some of them were restored to their former
stations. The converted brethren, generally,
soon took courage. They cautiously resumed
their intercourse with the missionaries, and
gradually became bolder than ever in their
efforts to spread the knowledge of the truth.
In the mean time, at the suggestion of others,
Mr. Sahakyan wrote two or three letters, suc-
cessively, to the Patriarch, petitioning for his
own release. They were couched in terms of
ARMENIANS.
great respect, but as they contained no confes-
sion of error, and no promise of future submis-
sion, his request was denied. The bishop of
Kaisery also wrote to the Patriarch in his
behalf, saying that he had watched Mr. S.
very closely, and had " found no fault in him ; "
but this application also failed. But, through
the intervention of an English gentleman, who
was one of the physicians of the palace, the
Patriarch, by request of the Sultan, after many
delays, and sorely ao-aiust his will, sent an order
for the release of Mr. S. on the 10th of Feb-
ruary, 1840.
Steps were taken to make this persecution
general ; and similar measures of oppression
and cruelty were resorted to at Brusa, Trebi-
zond, and other places.
But, v,'hile these violent measures imposed
an outward check upon the work, it was evi-
dent that the truth was spreading ; even the
measures taken to check the reformation, be-
ing in many instances the means of awakening
inquiry ; and at the very time when the storm
was raging at the capital, and at diflerent
points on the sea-coast of the empire, the mis-
sion was ])ushing its advanced posts into the
very heart of the enemy's country. In April,
Mr. Jackson, from Trebizond, visited Erzrum,
almost in the centre of ancient Armenia, in
order to make arrangements for commencing
operations in tha.t town. While he was there,
a letter was publicly read in the church from
the Patriarch, warning the people against in-
tercourse with the Americans, and against
patronizing their schools and reading their
books ; and ordering them to seize such books,
wherever they could be found, and to commit
them to the flames. This did not prevent Mr.
Jackson from procuring a dwelling house,
which he accomplished through the kind as-
sistance of the British consul, and on the 11th
of September, 1839, he removed there with
*his family. In February of the same year,
the station at Constantinople was strengthened
by tlie arrival of the Rev. C. Hamlin and wife,
he being designated to open a seminary for
Armenian boys.
The first Monday in January, of the year
1840, was observed as a day of special fasting,
humiliation and prayer, throughout all the
mission stations of the Board in Turkey. The
events of the preceding year, and the existing
state of things in the country, rendered it a
season of deep interest. It became more and
more evident that the persecuting power had
received a check from which it would not im-
mediately recover. The efforts of the persecu-
tors to destroy the truth had only made it
more extensively known ; while the injustice,
violence and cruelty of the clergy had brought
them into contempt.
At the commencement of the year 1840, in-
tercourse was resumed with most of those
whom the persecution had temporarily repell-
ed from the missionaries, and there was evi-
dently no diminution of interest in religious
inquiry. One striking providence after an-
other occurred, calculated to lead the hearts
of the faithful to repose in God, and to be
" nothing terrified by their adversaries." lu
several instances, signal judgments followed
the persecutor, so that even the enemies them-
selves were constrained to acknowledge that
God himself was uttering his reproving voice.
The sudden manner in which the late Sultan
was cut off, and his forces by land and sea d&-
stroyed, at the very time when he was aiding
by his authority to vex the church, has already
been noticed. The chief instrument in induc-
ing him to use his mighty power for such a
purpose, was, by the Sultan's death, deprived
of his influence ; and shortly after, his wife
was removed by death, and he himself brought
down to the grave's mouth. Another power-
ful man, who had actively opposed and perse-
cuted the evangelical brethren, within a short
space of time lost two daughters by sudden
death ; a third daughter became deranged, and
also a daughter-in-law ; his wife was deformed
by sickness, and also made nearly blind, and
he himself became a miserable invalid. And
soon after the young Sultan came upon the
throne, a charter of rights was granted to the
people, without their asking for it, providing
for some fundamental changes in the internal
administration of the government. In the
presence of all the foreign ambassadors, the
sovereign solemnly pledged himself to guard, aa
far as in him lay, the liberty, jDroperty, and
honor of every individual subject, without re-
ference to his religious creed. No one was to
be condemned, in any case, without an impar-
tial trial, and no one was to suffer the penalty
of death, without the sanction of the Sultan
himself. Under this charter changes the most
momentous, particularly for the Christian and
Jewish population, have already taken place
in Turkey ; and everything now indig&tcs, that
according to the honest intention and policy
of the present government, there is ultimately
to be a complete carrying out of its provisions,
in every part of the empire.
Under the old system, bankers were needed
to furnish capital to the pashas, until they
should procure their supplies from the op-
pressed people. An important part of the
new system, however, was, that thenceforward
the ruling pashas and governors throughout
the country, should each receive a fixed salary
from the government ; and in no case meddle
with the collection of taxes. Accordingly, .
near the beginning of the year 1840, all the
bankers of the government received orders
to settle up their accounts, as they were to
be no longer needed in the capacity in which
they had heretofore served the state. This
threw many of them into great distress, and
some it completely ruined. One was driven, in
his desperation, to the crime of suicide. Thus
did God put another obstacle out of the way,
ARMENIANS.
133
which hitherto had seriously obstructed the
progress of his kingdom.
In the spring of 1840 the Greek Patriarch,
"who had joined hands with the Armenian Pa-
triarch in persecuting the people of God, was
suddenly deposed from office, by order of the
Turkish government ; and it was not long be-
fore the Armenian Patriarch followed him into
retirement. He became so odious, on account
of his overbearing, violent spirit, as well as his
follies, that he was obliged to resign to save him-
self from being deposed ; and Stepan, who had
been ejected for his mildness and his forbear-
ance towards Protestants, was reelected to the
Patriarchate, first by vote of the principal
bankers, and afterwards by acclamation, in
an immense popular assembly.
On the 24th of May, 1840, Mr. Sahakyan
returned from his banishment, and his presence
tended greatly to strengthen the native breth-
ren. He soon commenced a series of active
labors for the good of his countrymen. Priest
Vertaness also, not being able conscientiously
to perform all the duties required of him as
priest, quietly and unostentatiously withdrew ;
and resolved to devote his whole time in labor-
ing for the spread of the truth among his
countrymen. He thus abandoned, voluntarily,
a situation in which he was honored and sup-
ported, for one in which he was exposed to
constant suspicion, reproach and persecution,
and, at the same time, with very uncertain
means of subsistence. Priest Kevork seemed
to -be " full of faith and of the Holy Ghost,"
preaching more boldly than before his banish-
ment, that there is but " one name given under
heaven among men Avhei-eby we must be
saved ;" and ready to suffer again, if need be,
for his beloved Lord and Master. The doc-
tfiual views of the converted Armenians
seemed, in general, wonderfully clear ; which
was the more surprising, considering the im-
mense rubbish of superstition and error that
originally encumbered their minds. The stan-
dard doctrine of the reformation in Europe —
salvation by grace alone, without the deeds of
the law, was usually the great central truth,
first apprehended by their awakened and inquir-
ing minds, and made the ground of satisfactory
repose.
The number of inquirers steadily increased,
and indeed nearly all who called upon the mis-
sionaries, came for the avowed purpose of reli-
gious conversation. The story had been very
industriously circulated, especially during the
persecution, that the Americans were a nation
of infidels, without even the form of religion ;
and that the missionaries were aiming to con-
vert all the Armenians to infidelity, and only
pretended at first to believe the Bible, so as the
more easily to draw people into their snares ;
and in more than one instance, their visitors
showed at first no little anxiety to know ex-
actly what was the truth of the matter ; and
whether we have any churches in America,
and whether any number of people ever assem-
ble for worship on the Sabbath !
Before the end of the year 1840, a room in
the business quarter of the city, for receiving
visitors, and for conference on religious sub-
jects, was procured and kept open on two
stated days of each week, and gradually be-
came a place of much resort for religious
inquiry.
About the same time, the book depository
was removed to the heart of the city ; and in
the most public manner the products of the
press, so lately anathematized by the Patri-
arch, were daily sold by an agent, who was
himself an Armenian. More than three hun-
dred dollars' worth of books, in the different
languages, were sold at Constantinople during
the year 1840.
A weekly meeting in the Armenian lan-
guage, commenced by Mr. Dwight in the
autumn of 1839, with only three individuals,
and that privately, for fear of the persecutors,
gradually increased, and before the end of
1840, it was held twice a week, publicly, and
more than 25 different individuals had at-
tended.
November 24, 1840, a boarding-school for
Armenian boys and young men was opened at
Bebek, on the Bosphorus, under the supeuin-
tendence of Mr. Hamlin, with three pupils,
and within about a week, applications had
been made for 15 boarding scholars, though
their means, at first, would allow them to re-
ceive only 12. An effort was soon made to
crush the infant seminary, though it proved
entirely futile, and was in itself not a little
ludicrous. A deputation from the village
of Bebek itself, consisting of the Armenian
priest, two Greek priests, one of the village
rulers, and several of the inhabitants, called
upon the Armenian Patriarch, and expressed
to him their deep regret that such a danger-
ous man as Mr. Hamlin should be allowed to
reside in their quarter. They accused him of
eating meat, eggs, butter, milk, &c., both in
Lent and also on Wednesdays and Fridays,
the days of their weekly fast ! He also taught
his scholars that it is no more wicked to eat
butter than oil ; or meat than bread ; or eggs
than olives ! Another grievous offence was,
that neither Mr. H. nor his scholars made the
sign of the cross ; nor worshiped the Virgin
Mary, or the saints ! Of course, they said, he
must be a confirmed infidel, and he can teach
nothing better in his school than the works
of Yoltaire ! The Patriarch was too well
informed, and too well disposed, to be moved
by such an application; and the petitioners
had leave to withdraw.
During the month of June, 1840, Mr. Ham-
lin and Mr. Dwight visited Nicomedia. The
brethren there were sorely threatened, during
the reign of violence at the capital, but no
serious persecution was actually attempted.
They had had little spiritual aid or comfort
134
ARMENIANS.
from abroad. They had been thrown upon l declaring that the name of Christ is the only
their Bibles for religious teaching, and upon one given under heaven, among men, whereby
the Holy Spirit for their expounder of reli- we can be saved.
gious truth, and upon God as their only
protector ; and they had grown rapidly in
knowledge and grace. The missionaries sat
with them, on the Sabbath, conversing of the
things of God, for ten hours, and so intense was
their interest that they would have sat for ten
hours more.
While they were there, a stranger from a
neighboring town, a merchant, being in Nico-
media on business, had the curiosity to call
upon them. He said that the report of them
had reached his place through the Patriarch's
letter of warning, and that he, in common with
many of his ])rethren, was very anxious to know
what this new way was. They explained to
him their views, and gave him a copy of the
New Testament in the modern Armenian, and
also several tracts, and he took his leave, ex-
pressing his high gratification with the inter-
view. In this way was the knowledge of the
gospel first carried to Adabazar, the residence
of this individual. It is situated about 27
miles directly east of Nicomedia.
The reaction after the persecution, was not
confined to the capital. In BrCisa and Trebi-
zond the demand for books increased, and there
were some who gave evidence of being truly
converted ; and even at the new station at
Erzrum there were signs of promise.
The Rev. H. J. Yan Lennep was connected
with the Smyrna station during April, 1840.
The labjers of the missionaries here were chiefly
through the press, and during the year 1840
more than six millions of pages were printed
in the Armenian and Armeno-Turkish lan-
guages alone. The most important work in
the latter was the Pentateuch, translated under
Mr. Goodell's supervision. Its publication was
hailed with joy by multitudes. The Armenians
of Smyrna also established a press, and jmb-
lished a newspaper.
The year 1841 opened with many indica-
tions that a thorough reformation was going
forward in the Armenian community. A very
marked difference was observed in the general
style of preaching in the Armenian churches
at the capital. There was a growing desire
to study the scriptures, and a disposition to
compare every doctrine and practice with the
written word ; and this could not, Avith safety,
be disregarded. It was not an uncommon
thing to hear of sermons on repentfl,nce, on the
Sabbath, on the Judgment day, &c., altogether
based upon the Bible ; and, in some instances,'
the_ preachers borrowed largely from the publi-
cations of the missionaries for their materials ;
and they had repeated applications to furnish
matter directly for sermons, for one of the
most respectable vartabeds in Constantinople.
Another of the vartalieds went so far even as
to combat the prevailing error of substituting
Mary and the saints as mediators for Christ,
As the reformation advanced, instances of
pungent conviction of sin, and a strong and
deep aj^prehension of spiritual things became
more common than had before been noticed.
Some persons of infamous character became
the subjects of an entire change, so that many
of those who were without, were constrained
to speak of the change as most wonderful.
The converted brethren also, with scarcely an
exception, appeared to be growing in grace,
and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ, and in
an active zeal for the salvation of others.
Priest Vertaness was full of activity and
hope. Almost every day he brought word
of some new and interesting case of inquiry in
some part of the city. His v/hole time was
occuj^ied in going from house to house. In
the spring of 1841, a report came to Constan-
tinople that a number of Armenians in Nico-
media were about going over to the Jesuits ;
and the Patriarch commissioned this same
priest Vertaness to go there with all speed,
and endeavor to bring them back to their
mother church. Thus fortified by a commis-
sion from the highest power, he had perfectly
free access to every family in the Armenian
community in that town. He was quite suc-
cessful in the object of his mission, and while
he heartily and faithfully obeyed the Patriarch,
and endeavored to persuade men not to suffer
themselves to fall into the clutches of Rome,
he also labored still more zealously to bring
them to a sense of their sins against God, and
to a hearty reception of Christ alone, as the
Saviour of their souls. His visit was a great
comfort to the brethren in Nicomedia, as well
as an advantage to the cause at large.
In Adabazar regular meetings for prayer and
reading the Scriptures, were held every Sab-
bath, and from 25 to 50 were usually present.
One of the priests seemed to have become obe-
dient to the faith. A handbill tract, contain-
ing simply the ten commandments, in the
modern tongue, without note or comment, was
the means of opening many eyes to see the
folly and sin of picture worship. One year
previously there could not probably have been
found a single soul, among' the 4,000 Arme-
nian inhabitants of Adabazar, who was not
groping in the deepest spiritual darkness. Now
two scores or more were convinced of the er-
rors of their Church, and ready to take the
Bible as their only religious guide, and several
appeared to be truly converted men, and Avcre
willing even to lay down their lives for Christ.
All this took place before any missionary had
visited them. In the autumn of 1841, Mr
Schneider, in compliance with their oft-repeat-
ed invitations for a missionary to visit them,
went to Adabazar, and returned from the
visit with the most cheering impressions, that
what had been done was truly the work of
ARMENIANS.
135
God's Spirit. A spirit of inquiry was found
to be extending itself through many of the
neighboring villages.
In Constantinople a most singular state of
things existed. The Patriarch was personally
well-disposed towards the evangelical party,
but still, by no means a decided friend, and
easily influenced by the bankers. His Vicar,
or rather colleague, for such he became, though
by no means bigoted, probably not much of a
believer in anything, was time-serving and
somewhat cunning. A strong portion of the
tradesmen were in favor of a change of Pa-
triarch, and as a most ready means of accom-
plishing their object, they spread the story
everywhere, that Stepan, the occupant of the
see, was a Protestant, and was playing into
the hands of the missionaries. As an evidence
of this, they pointed triumphantly to the Sem-
inary at Bebek, consisting altogether of Ar-
menian boys, and yet their parents were not
ordered to keep them at home. It was neces-
sary for the poor Patriarch to do something.
The Vicar summoned before him a priest
and two laymen, who had children there, and
privately told them to remove their boys ; but
charged them not to speak about it in public.
The priest obeyed, but after a few days, brought
his boy back. The Vicar again ordered him
to remove his child. He again obeyed, but
soon returned him as before. This was repeat-
ed four or five times. At length the school
was voluntarily suspended for a few weeks ;
and then went on more prosperously than
ever.
A fierce quarrel soon broke out between
the bankers and the tradesmen, in reference
chiefly to the alleged mismanagement of the
pecuniary affairs of their college at Scutary,
which kept the whole comnmnity in a state
of intense excitement and agitation for many
months ; and, in the mean time, the mission-
aries and the native brethi-en were left to pros-
ecute their labors unmolested. The real cause
of this rupture is to be traced to the domineer-
ing spirit of some of the bankers, to whose
irresponsible rule, the increasing intelligence
of the tradesmen was teaching them no longer
quietly to submit. The latter succeeded in
j)rocuring the appointment, by the people, of
a committee of counsellors, consisting of 24
persons, to whom every question of importance,
pertaining to the business matters of the Ar-
menian community, was to be referred. After
a brief interval of repose, a list of charges,
which had been made out by the united efibrts
of some of the bankers, and some of the clergy,
was presented by the Patriarch to the Porte,
against these 24 men ; one of which was, that
they had formed the plan of placing themselves
and the people under the protection of Russia,
and thus bidding defiance to the Turks ! The
whole 24 were immediately thrown into prison.
As soon as the people heard of it, they rushed
to the Sublime Porte, to the number of from
4 to 6,000, and called upon the Grand Vizir
either to release their representatives, or im-
prison them all. This ofGcer replied that their
own bankers and Patriarch were their accusers.
The people exclaimed, " We do not acknowl-
edge the authority of our bankers or clergy ;
we are subjects of the Sultan." It soon be-
came evident that the true policy of the gov-
ernment was to yield, and the prisoners were
accordingly released. The people then de-
manded the immediate removal of the Patri-
arch. Upon this the bishops and vartabeds
were all summoned to the Porte, and the
tradesmen were called upon to select from
among them the one they would prefer as Pa-
triarch. The reply was, " We will have none
of these men ; they are all alike bad men ;
men who live by extorting money from the
poor people. We want none of them. We
will take time to consider the matter." The
assembly was then dismissed, and the clergy
went away in disgrace. As they passed through
the crowd, remarks like the following were
heard from the lips of the people : " There go
our oppressors !" " Whoever goes with them
goes to destruction !" " Let no man step his
foot again in the Armenian Church, on the
peril of his salvation, so long as these men are
there !" " Behold the deceivers and robbers
of the people !" Por some daj-s afterwards,
the wickedness of the clergy was a subject of
universal remark. Many said, " We thought
that Stepan, our present Patriarch, was one
of the best of them ; and we called him a dove,
but he has proved to be a raven. He has be-
trayed his people into the hands of the Mo-
hammedans ! If he is the best, what must the
others be?"
This struggle continued for several months,
each party alternately triumphing, and suc-
cumbing, until at last a peremptory order was
issued by the Sultan, that the belligerents
should forthwith make peace, and that a cer-
tain number of men should be regularly chosen,
to be associated with the Patriarch in adminis-
tering the affairs of the community. Subse-
quently it was arranged that two committees
should be appointed, one for ecclesiastical, and
the other for secular matters, and the Patri-
arch be the chairman of each ; and this order
of things still prevails.
The Patriarch, Stepan, was soon removed
from oCBce, and as the people and bankers
could not agree upon any of the prominent
candidates, they selected an obscure old bishop,
by the name of Asduadzadur, who had always
been an eccentric character, and was now in
his dotage. This also was so' overruled as to
work mightily for the spread of the truth in
the land. Such was the peculiar oddity and
capriciousness of this man, that nobody wished
to go to the Patriarchate for any pui-pose, ex-
cept through dire necessity. Everybody seem-
ed to feel that the less they had to do with their
Patriarch the better. And when any thing
136
ARMENIANS.
was said about the need of adopting rigorous
measures to check the spread of Protestantism,
the reply usually was, " What does that con-
cern us ? Let every man do as he likes."
The Vicar of the new Patriarch was one of
those exiled for Protestantism, in the year
1839. He was formerly acting bishop at Tre-
bizoud, and there became pretty thoroughly
enlightened as to the errors of his Church.
His exaltation to the office of Patriarch's Vi-
car, was as unexpected to him as it was to the
missionaries and to the evangelical brethren
generally ; and that also was of God. Only
a short time previous he had applied to the
mission for employment in the book-making
department.
'Jlie brethren were still exempt from perse-
cution, though they did not rest from prayer
and labor. They walked " in the fear of the
Lord and in the comfort of the Holy Ghost,"
and " were multiplied." It was a period of
quiet and steady increase to the church. There
was among the native brethren, a very delight-
ful increase of spirituality of mind, and an
extraordinary spirit of prayer. They often as-
sembled in small circles to ask for God's bless-
ing on the means of grace ; and often, after
sermon on the Sabbath, would several of them
remain, in order to have a season of social
prayer. If they found any individual in the
congregation giving indications of special se-
riousness, they did not fail to stop, and con-
verse and pray with him.
The year 1842 was distinguished for the
special presence of the Holy Spirit. The
whole city of Constantinople was filled with
rumors of " the new doctrines," and they form-
ed the topics of discussion in almost all assem-
blies of Armenians. The minds of some were
wonderfully wrought upon. The thoughtless
and gay became sober and prayerful ; the
worldly became spii-itually minded ; the proud
became meek and lowly ; opposers and perse-
cutors were disarmed, and a few were trans-
formed into decided friends and helpers.
Priests and vartabeds, and even monks, were
obedient to the faith ; of v/hicli the mission-
aries give in detail some most interesting in-
stances.
The zeal of the Armenian Christian breth-
ren, in endeavoring to enlighten and reclaim
their own countrymen, whether far or near,
was one of their most striking characteristics.
In the summer of 1842, several of them met
in a retired spot among the hills that surround
the capital, and after uniting in prayer for the
guidance and blessing of the Holy Spirit, they
resolved to send forth one of their number, at
their own expense, on a missionary tour among
the Armenians in the interior of Asia Minor.
The individual selected for this service was
priest Vertaness, who readily a'ocepted the
call, and soon proceeded on his way. It was a
tour attended with many good results.
Nor did they forget the claims of other races
around them, who were living in ignorance of
the Gospel. With the Jews especially, they
had almost daily conversation in reference to
the one only Saviour, Jesus Chi-ist ; and this
was the more remarkable, since there could
scarcely be found among the other classes of
people in Turkey, any other feeling than that
of contempt for the outcast children of Abra-
ham.
There was also a very marked increase of
interest and religious inquiry among females.
Hitherto the important element of female influ-
ence had been in a great measure wanting in the
reformation. The cause of this was two-fold ;
first, the extreme ignorance and consequent
bigotry of the female portion of the population,
there never having been the least provision for
their education ; and, secondly, the difficulty of
access to them, and of their availing themselves,
even when disposed, of the privileges of the
gospel, owing to the peculiar customs of society
in the East respecting the seclusion of women.
The priests, from their official character as con-
fessors, have free access to the females of the
community. The pious priests were not back-
ward in availing themselves of this privilege,
and chiefly through their instrumentality, in
the years 1842 and 1843, several of the Arme-
nian females became deeply interested in relig-
ious concerns, and some few gave evidence of
being truly converted. From that time they
began to form a part of the regular visitors,
and some few became regular attendants at the
preaching service in the Seminary. About
the same time Mr. Dwight opened a week-day
preaching service in Armenia, exclusively for
females.
The distribution of the publications of the
press became an important branch of labor,
and quite sufficient to occupy the best part of
one man's time. Mr. Homes was designated
to this particular work, and he soon found that
in connection with his other labors, he was
fully and most usefully employed. There was
a constantly increasing demand for books, so
that by the spring of 1843, it was impossible
to procure a supply from the press and bindery
in Smyrna, with the limited funds they had, to
meet seasonably all the orders that came in.
Eight or ten booksellers at the capital were
kept constantly supplied, and the products of
the press were also sent to almost every part of
the interior, even into Russia, Georgia, and
Persia. An Armenian archbishop near Odessa,
on receiving some of these, expressed the great-
est joy ; and remarked that they ought to be
grateful towards those who were engaged in
preparing such excellent books for their coun-
trymen. More than 40,000 volumes and tracts
were issued from the Smyrna depot to the dif-
ferent stations, during the year 1842. The
translation of the whole Old Testament into
the Armeno-Turkish language, to which Mr.
Goodell had devoted his undivided attention and
strength for many years, was happily completed
ARMENIANS.
137
on the 6 til of November, 1841, and was pub-
lished at Smyrna, in the spring of 1842 ; and
before the end of the following winter, the re-
vision of the New Testament in the same lan-
guage was also finished by Mr. Goodell, and
the translation published. And by its side may
be placed an edition of the New Testament in
the modern Armenian, published about the
same time in Smyrna, as revised by Mr. Adger.
The expense of the latter work was defrayed
by the British and Foreign Bible Society,
while that of the forme*- came from the Ameri-
can Bible Society.
One of the most striking ti-aits of the re-
formed Armenians is, their reverence and
love of the Word of God. Some have been
known to sit up all night to read and study the
Bible, when it was first furnished to them in
an intelligible language ; and the prevailing
desire of all seemed to be, to understand what
God teaches through his Word, and to conform
their belief and jiractice wholly to his teach-
ings. A distinguished Armenian having pub-
lished a book against Protestantism, under the
direction and at the expense of the Jesuits, the
Vicar of the Patriarch condemned the proce-
dure, admitted that there were errors in their
church, and said that this book would call forth
a reply from the missionaries, which would ex-
pose these errors to the people.
The seminary still survived all the shocks it
received from the jealousy and hatred of its
enemies. For several months the most vigorous
efforts were made by bankers, priests, varta-
beds, and bishops, especially those who were
endeavoring to uphold the Scutary College, to
crush this institution ; Avhen lo ! the Scutary
College was closed in spite of all their efforts,
and the mission Seminary still lived and flour-
ished !
The Eev. G. W. Wood, who arrived at Con-
stantinople with his wife, in the summer of
1842, was associated with Mr. Hamlin in the
instruction of the seminary, the number of
scholars being 25, all of whom boarded in
the establishment. Besides the incalculably
important bearing of such an institution on
the cause of evangelical religion in Turkey, it
proved itself to be highly useful also as an ob-
ject of attraction to visitors, drawing them
within the sound of the gospel, and those, too,
often of a class that could not be induced to
go for instruction to the private house of a
missionary.
Two of those who were numbered with the
converted brethren, in the autumn of 1842,
became disaffected, and left, the occasion being
a paragraph or two in the Missionary Herald,
respecting the probability and desirableness,
in certain circumstances, of a separation of
the evangelical brethren from the Armenian
Church. Mr. Southgate, (afterwards bishop)
of the American Protestant Episcopal Church',
first directed their attention to the article, and
translated the paragraphs alluded to for them,-
neither of them being acquainted with the
English language.
The work progressed also at the interior
stations. But success, as usual, awakened
opposition ; and an enlightened priest, at Erz-
rCim, who had begun to preach the truth to his
people, was suspended from office, and basti-
nadoed by the bishop with his own hands.
The sufferer, after counting 25 blows, swooned
away, and in this condition was bound with a
chain, and thrown into prison, where he re-
mained till the next morning. After being
released, he told the bishop, in the presence of
witnesses, that he should continue to read and
teach the gospel. This same bishop was once a
serious inquirer, and even suffered persecution
for Protestantism. He was one Of the exiles
in 1839 ; but, since his restoration to power,
he has been a bitter and violent persecutor.
The Providence of God wonderfully favored
the brethren in Adabazar. In the spring of
1842, the vartabed gave them formal permis-
sion to meet every Sabbath day in a private
house, for prayer and reading the Scriptures ;
and there were usually from 25 to 50 present.
Enemies they still had, however, who were
always watchful for opportunities of thwarting
and distressing them. A visit from the bishop
of the diocese, — the ex-patriarch Stepan, — in
the spring of 1843, seemed to offer such an
opportunity. It was represented to him that
a new sect had sprung up among them, which
had embraced very strange and heretical no-
tions, and was spreading its poison in all direc-
tions, lie took down the names of the lead-
ing men of this so-called sect, whom he after-
wards summoned before him, and asked them
to give an account of themselves. They re-
plied that they had not separated themselves
from the Armenian Church, but that they re-
ceived the Scriptures as the only rule of faith
and practice ; that they tried to keep holy the
Sabbath day ; that they endeavored to refrain
from lying, swearing, and blasphemy, and in
all things to follow strictly the rules of Christ.
The bishop, after questioning them still fur-
ther, for liis own satisfaction, decided that
there was no fault in them at all in this mat-
ter, and, expressing the wish that all the Ar-
menians would do the same, dismissed them.
At Nicomedia, the work received a new im-
pulse in 1842, when the attendance on a
weekly prayer-meeting was suddenly increased
from six or eight to 40 or 50. Many minds
were in an inquiring state. Opposition was
made, but the bishop gave a decision similar
to that he had given at Adabazar, and pub-
licly charged his people to abstain from med-
dling with these men. The awakening influ-
ences of the Holy Spirit were also felt in
Smyrna to some extent, as in almost every
part of the Armenian field.
In 1843, a young Armenian, who had, in an
unguarded moment, embraced Mohammedan-
ism, and afterwards returned to his former
138
ARMENIANS.
profession, was publicly beheaded in the streets
of Constantiijople, in opposition to the remon-
strances of Sir Stratford Oanuinj?, the British
minister ; in consequence of which, that gen-
tleman, in behalf of his government, and backed
by the French, Prussian, and Eussiau ambassa-
dors, demanded from the Sultan a written pledge
that no person who had embraced the Moham-
medan religion, and afterwards retm-ned to
Christianity, should, on that account, be put to
death. The Turks yielded, through necessity,
after holding out for several weeks, and the
pledge required was given, signed by the Sultan
himself, the conceded interpretation of which
is, that henceforth, no person should ee per-
secuted FOK ins RELIGIOUS OPINIONS IN TUR-
KEY. So plainly was the i!hger of God mani-
fest in this whole transaction, that His Excel-
lency, Sir Stratford Canning, afterwards dis-
tinctly acknowledged that God alone had
done it, and added, that to him it seemed lit^
tie less than a miracle. No reference was
made, in these proceedings, to the persecuted
people of God in Turkey ; yet, in this indirect
way, the foundation was laid for their full en-
joyment of religious liberty.
During the winter of 1843-4, the stations
in Turkey were favored with a visit from the
Kev. Rufus Anderson, D.D., Secretary of the
American Board of Commissioners for Foreign
Missions, and the Rev. Joel Hawes, D.D., a
corporate member of the Board. An oppor-
tunity was thus afforded for full consultations
on various subjects, having a practical bearing
on the missionary work, the results of which
clearly attested the expediency of the measure.
An important change followed in reference to
one department of labor. The mission to the
Greeks in Turkey was abandoned. Mr. Riggs,
of Smyrna, and Mr. Ladd, of Brusa, hitherto
laboring exclusively in this department, now
gave themselves up to the work among the
Armenians. Mr. Benjamin, of Athens, joined
the station at Trebizond, with a view to the
same field. Mr. Calhoun removed from Smyrna
to Syria, and Mr. Temple, much to the regret
of all who knew him, returned to America, as,
at the age of fifty-four, it would not have been
wise for him to attempt the acquisition of a
new and difBcult language.
From 1843 to 184G, there was no long
period of exemption from persecution, though,
throughout the whole field, the spirit of inquiry
and discussion wonderfully spread, and believ-
ers were multiplied. On the whole, there was
a very decided increase in the size of the con-
gregations on the Sabbath, though, both at
Trebizond and Erzrum, it became necessary,
during a portion of the time, to suspend pub-
lic worship, on account of the hostility of the
hierarchy. There was, indeed, such a hunger-
ing for the "Word, as has probably been rarely
witnessed in this world. Family worshijo —
consisting of reading the Scriptures and
prayer iu the vulgar tongue, was established
in many households ; and often did the request
come from females, living in difibrent quarters
of the city, that meetings might be opened in
their neighborhood expressly for the women.
To meet the ^^nts of the times, and in obe-
dience to what seemed plainly to be a provi-
dential intimation, a female seminary was
opened at Pera in the autumn of 1845. It
was kept in the house of Mr. Goodell, in
whose family the pupils boarded, and Miss Lo-
vell, who had arrived from America for the
purpose the preceding spring, took charge of
the educational department. The school
opened Avith eight scholars, which were as
many as could then be sustained by the funds,
though many parents were sadly disappointed
when they were told no more could be re-
ceived.
In the autumn of 1844, the Patriarch As-
duadzadvir, resigned his office, and Matteos,
formerly bishop of Brusa, but then of Smyrna,
was appointed iu his place. The former, be-
fore his resignation, became more and more
openly intolerant towards Protestantism. By
his orders, priest \^ertaness was again subjected
to persecution, being divested of his office, cast
into prison, and afterwards rudely banished.
The new Patriarch was a vacillating man ;
well convinced of the errors of his Church, and
sometimes appearing to favor reform, but ex-
tremely afraid of offending the party that was
strongest for the time being. Peshtimaljian
represented him as a man of enlightened views,
but without principle, and al^-ays governed by
what he considered the prevailing opinions and
wishes of those whom he desired to please.
" In short," said the teacher, " he is just like
an empty cistern. If you put your head to its
mouth and say hoo, the cistern says hno ; if you
say hah, the cistern answers bah." Matteos is
a man of more than common ability and
shrewdness, and withal exceedingly plausible
in his manner, and deep in his schemes.
Soon after he came into power, many of the
evangelical brethren called upon him ; some
in obedience to custom, and others by special
invitation. To all he manifested a friendly
spirit ; and professed to be iu favor of educa-
tion and even of reform, and opposed to perse-
cution. He was, however, exceedingly anx-
ious that both the missionaries, and the " Bible-
men" in the Armenian community should
" keep still," and avoid all " a.;jitation."
The position of the Patriarch was a most
difBcult one. The enemies of the truth were
clamorous for some decisive measures which
should effectually check the alarming tendency
to Protestantism. They would neither allow
their Patriarch to let the matter rest, nor to
make any compromise. Already had the re-
port gone abroad that Matteos himself was a
Protestant. And in sober truth he knew and
doubtless acknowledged to his own soul, that
the Protestants were right and his own Church
wrong. But he knew well, that the great
ARMENIANS.
139
mass of wealth aud inauonce in the Armeuian
community was on the other side. He was
ambitious ; and now that he had attained to
the highest post in his nation, he was resolved
to keej) it. He found the evangelical breth-
ren much less disposed to yield in matters of
faith and conscience, than his own indifferentism
had led him to expect. As the only means of
saving himself, he firmly resolved to sacrifice
the Protestants. From that moment, all his
powers, personal and official, were employed
in the effort to eradicate Protestantism from
the land. And, in the persecution that fol-
lowed. Rev. Mr. Dwight [Christianity revived
in the East, pp. 211, 213,) states that the Rt.
Rev. Horatio Southgate, missionary Bishop of
the American Episcopal Church to the Otto-
man Empire, appeared before the public as a
sympathiser and counsellor with the Patriarch ;
which Mr. D. substantiates by extracts from
I)ublished documents, bearing the bishop's sig-
nature. It is but just, however, to state that
the church to which Bishop S. belonged, has
since utterly i-epudiated his favorite policy, in
the conduct of Eastern missions. (See Orien-
tal Christians.)
Almost every shopkeeper and artisan in
Turkey depends for the chief profits of his bu-
siness, upon the patronage of some wealthy
aud influential individuals ; and young men es-
pecially, have very little j^rospect of advanc-
ing in the world, without the assistance of
some such friend. The Patriarch, by a skill-
ful manoeuvre, threw a large number of the ad-
herents to the gospel, into the greatest distress.
He secretly directed all the faithful among his
own flock, who stood in the relation of patrons,
or regular customers to any of the evangelical
brethren, silently to withdraw their patronage.
The consequence was, that many who supposed
they were in a fair way of obtaining a compe-
tent support, found themselves suddenly with-
out any business. Some of these had friends
depending on them for daily food ; when all at
once, it appeared that they had not the ability
to provide for their own wants. And they
soon found, also, that all appeals and remon-
strances were useless, unless accompanied by a
pledge to withdraw from the preaching of the
missionaries and cease to open their mouths in
favor of evangelical views. Another, and still
more threatening measure of opposition was,
that all the priests were ordered to hand over
to the Patriarch the names of those who did
not come to confession and receive absolution,
and partake of the communion in their respec-
tive churches. Those whose consciences were
fully enlightened (and they were specially
aimed at in the measure,) were not able to
conform to these rites, because of the supersti-
tion and idolatry involved. Now, excommu-
nication was threatened to disobedience, the
consequences of which, in a temporal point of
view, must necessarily, in a community organ-
ized as this was, be very serious. There was
a delay, however, in following up this part of
the plan, perhaps in order to see what would
be the result of the other. The experiment
Avas to be made throughout the country, as
well as in the metropolis, and orders similar to
the above were sent to the bishops in the inte-
rior, wherever Protestants were found.
In the mean time, some few of the ecclesias-
tics themselves were showing strong inclina-
tions towards the evangelical side of the ques-
tion. Two or three vartabeds, as well as
some of the priests, had gone so far as to per-
severe, from Sabbath to Sabbath, in attending
the public preaching of the missionaries.
Others were known to be friendly. Something
must be done at once to check this tendency
to Protestantism among the spiritual guides
of the people. Bedros, vartabed, was the first
selected to be made an example of. It was
known through the whole city that he had em-
braced evangelical views, aad the Patriarch,
as a test of his opinions, had already ordered
him to perform mass on a certain occasion,
Avhich Bedros had declined on conscientious
grounds. The Patriarch now instructed him
to i^rocced forthwith to a town on the Russian
frontier, ostensibly to take charge of a diocese.
The real object, however, was, plainly to get
him into a position, from whence he might
easily be conveyed as a prisoner to the monas-
tery of Echmiadzin. The vartabed very po-
litely declined the honor of this appointment,
and the Patriarch was not then prepared to
resort to force. After some little delay, it
was arranged that Bedros should proceed to
the monastery at Jerusalem. The Patriarch
drew up a paper for him to sign, in which he
was required to promise that he would perform
all the rites of the Church, and, in all re-
spects, be obedient to his superiors. This he
resolutely persisted in refusing, on the ground
that there were many things in the ceremo-
nies of his Churchy which he could not con-
scientiously perform. He never got nearer
Jerusalem than Beirut ; from whence he pro-
ceeded to Aleppo and Aiutab. For several
years he labored in these towns and their
vicinity, with great zeal and fidelity for the
spiritual good of his countrymen, though in
the midst of many persecutions, trials and
dangers. He distributed large numbers of
evangelical books, and preached the gospel
successfully to many people. He was suddenly
cut off by the cholera in the autumn of 1849 ;
but his end was peace.
But Priest Vertaness was fairly in the Pa-
triarch's hands, being already a prisoner at the
monastery of Armash, whither he had been
sent by the preceding Patriarch. And this
priest had been adding sin to sin, by preaching
to the monks, most zealously and faithfully,
salvation through the blood of Christ alone,
without the deeds of the law. Several of them
were awakened and convinced, and some, it
was hoped, really believed; and word was
1-iO
ARMENIANS.
brought to Constantinople that if the Protes-
tant priest was not removed, all the inmates
of the monastery would soon become corrupt-
ed. An imperial firman was forthwith pro-
cured (February, 1845,) by Matteos Pati'iarch,
for the further banishment of priest Yertaness
to Kaisery (Ca3sarea,) where Mr. Sahakyau
had been confined six years before, for a like
offence. While on his way to that place, in
charge of a Turkish officer, he everywhere
preached the Gospel, for which he was " in
bonds ;" nor could he, in the place of his se-
cond banishment, cease to make known " Christ
and him crucified," to all unto whom he had
access. In July of the same year, the Sultan,
on the occasion of a great feast, gave orders to
have all the exiles in the country set at liber-
ty ; and Vertaness returned to Constantinople
on the 4th of August. Letters afterwards
came to the Patriarch from Kaisery, saying
that Vertaness had seduced many, and that if
he had remained there much longer, all would
have gone after him.
Before this, a highly respectable inhabitant
of Trebizond, Tateos by name, who had been
a member of the Armenian municipal council,
became much interested in the study of the
Bible. Being a man of some property, he
went on a tour to Constantinople, Smyrna,
Brusa, Nicome-dia, and Adabazar, solely for
the purpose of becoming acquainted with the
missionaries and native brethren in those
places, and learning more of the work of God's
Spirit, as well as of the truths of his Word.
He returned to Trebizond, very much strength-
ened in his faith, and quickened in his zeal for
the truth. Just before his arrival, the most
stringent measures had been adopted to com-
pel the evangelical brethren to submit to the
Church, in obedience to a very urgent denun-
ciatory letter from the Patriarch Matteos.
Nearly one-half of the reputed Protestants had
been induced to recant, and the persecuting
party, fearing, with good reason, that the in-
fluence of such a man might turn the scale,
resolved to put him out of the way, with all
possible despatch. Accordingly, jiist as the
steamer was leaving for Constantinople, he was
decoyed on board by stratagem, and immediate-
ly thrust down into the hold, and there confined,
by order of the Turkish pasha, who acted at
the instigation of the Armenian vartabed.
Arrived at Constantinople, he was conducted
first to the Patriarchate, and from thence to
the Armenian hospital, to be confined in the
mad-house, in a sitting posture, and fastened
with two chains, one from his neck to the wall,
and the other from his feet to the floor. On
the Sabbath, the eighth day of his imprison-
ment, while the Armenian congregation were
engaged in singing in the chapel in Pera, he
entered the room — a free man ! Much suppli-
cation had been made for him, and his sudden
appearance among them, witliout their know-
ing how he had been liberated, strongly re-
minded them of the case of Peter. They uni-
ted in special thanksgiving to God for his
deliverance, and took courage. His case had
been made known to Sir Stratford Canning,
and there is no reason to doubt that his re-
monstrances caused the Patriarch to loosen his
grasp upon this innocent victim of his oppres-
sion.
The Patriarch labored with the most un-
wearied diligence to overthrow the Seminary
at Bebek ; but his opposition only increased
its prosperity.
Another method adopted by the Patriarch
and his party, was to engage the Protestants
in public discussions ; but in this, also, they
were signally defeated, the Protestants mani-
festly having the best of the argument, till as
a last resort, they were treated with brow-
beating and abuse.
Aljout this time, a censorship of the press
was established, which threatened to be a se-
rious obstacle in the way of the distribution
of evangelical books ; but the object of the
lav/ being to shut out inflammatory political
works, the character of the missionaries with
the Turkish ofiicers afforded a sufficient protec-
tion to the books circulated by them.
Among the evangelical brethren, a tempe-
rance society was formed, which was the first
one of the kind that ever existed in Turkey.
This movement was rendered the more inter-
esting from its being entirely self-prompted.
It has been since carried out to the extent
that the principle of total abstinence is of al-
most universal adoption by the Protestants,
wherever found.
The missionary circle was invaded by the
hand of death. Mrs. Van Lennep died, Sept,
27, 1844, less than a year from the time of
her embarkation from America. Mr. and Mrs.
Van Lennep had been removed from Smyrna
to Constantinople during the preceding spring;,
for the express purpose of taking charge of
the female seminary then in prospect, and her
early removal was on this account an uncom-
monly grievous aSliction to the mission.
The persecution which had broken out anew
at Constantinople, extended its fury to other
parts of the empire, and was prosecuted with
the same bitter spirit. Instances of cruelty
and suffering, shocking to humanity, occurred,
the details of which we are obliged to omit.
It raged with the greatest violence and fury
at Trebizond, where the evangelical party were
harassed, turned out of their houses, imprisoned
and banished, or " compelled to blaspheme,"
till scarcely one of them was left, and even the
house of the missionarv, Mr. Bliss, was attack-
ed and pelted with stones till all the windows
were broken in.
But in most cases, these violent measures
only tended to confirm the individuals in their
new views, as they more clearly developed the
true spirit of the ruling authorities in the
C'hurch ; and, in some instances, the persecu-
ARMENIANS.
141
tors themselves were convinced and con-
verted.
A young- man of superior mind and attain-
ments, belonging to the Papal Armenian
denomination, who had, for some time, given
the most satisfactory evidence of piety, was
called to his rest in the spring of 184-i. He
had been greatly troubled by his priest, who
made every effort to reclaim him, even to the
very last moment of his life. Mugurdich, for
that was his name, was very decided, and a few
days before his death he made a furmal renun-
ciation of his Church, in writing ; and peace-
fully committed his all to Christ. His body
was not permitted burial in the graveyard, or
with the usual religious ceremonies, but at a
late hour of a very dark aud stormy night, it
was carried out by common street porters, un-
der the direction of a Turkish police officer,
and placed uudcr the ground, in the midst of
a waste place about a mile from the city. They
had previously attempted to frighten him
back to his Church by threatening to bury
him like a dog, and faithfully did they execute
the threat ; though, as he told them at the
time, they could do him no real harm, for they
could not reach his soul.
An attempt was made to reclaim a husband
and SODS, by refusing Christian burial to the
wife and mother, although she had remained
faithful to the Church to the very last. They
would not yield, however, and after the great-
est trouble, and being obliged to keep the
body an unwonted time, they were at length
compelled to carry it out, amid the jeers and
spittings of the crowd, and bury it at a distance
from the city, in the corner of a Mussulman's
farm.
Hitherto, the Evangelical Armenians had
remained member's of the ecclesiastico-civil
community in which they were born. They
lived in different degrees of conformity with
the requisitions of the Church, according to
the amount of light they had, and their readi-
ness to endure reproach and suffering for
(Jbrist's sake. Some absented themselves en-
tirely from the public services in their church-
es, feeling that to be present where there was
so much of superstition and idolatry, was vir-
tually to sanction what their consciences con-
denmed. Others were occasionally present to
hear a sermon, though they made it a point to
retire from the other parts of the service, j
Others still, chiefly those Avho were only Intel- '
Icctually convinced of the truth, were as regu- !
lar in the external observance of the forms of
the Armenian religion as custom recjuired ;
and, it should be mentioned, that previous to
the Protestant movement, a great diversity
had existed in this respect, in the practice of
different individuals, and there had never been '
in the Armenian Church any of that rigor
in enforcing ecclesiastical rules and obser-
vances, which so characterises the Church of
Home.
According to the fundamental laws of the
Turkish empire, every individual of its Chris-
tian subjects must be enrolled in some one of
the existing communities, having a Patriarch
at his head. To secede from one body, in or-
der to join another, had repeatedly been for-
bidden by the Sultan, and was always attended
with danger ; although Papal diplomacy and
Papal gold had often atoned for the offence,
where the secession was to the Papal faith.
To detach oneself from one community with-
out coming into connection with another,
was equivalent to a renunciation of every civil
right and privilege, and necessarily exposed
the individual to all the evil consequences of
complete outlawry. To make this fully under-
stood, it will be necessary to enter somewhat
into detail.
In the city of Constantinople, as well as in
other large towns in Turkey, each trade is in-
corporated, and its affairs are regulated by a
committee, consisting of a small number of the
most wealthy and powerful individuals in the
business ; and no person is permitted to open
a shop, without a license from this committee.
Frequently, a single individual, who may be
called the presiding ofBccr, has, in practice, if
not in form, the whole matter of granting and
withholding licenses, in his own hands. A
Turkish officer presides over all the trades,
whose official sanction is necessary to give
force and effect to the doings of the trade
committees. Every journeyman, aud appren-
tice even, must be furnished with a permit, to
show to the Turkish police officers, whenever
he is challenged in the streets, and if he fails
to produce one, he is liable to be thrown into
prison, as a disorderly man and a vagrant.
On taking out these licenses, each individual
is required to give two or more sureties for
good conduct, and the Patriarch is held as
general surety for the whole community. If
the evangelical Armenians had declared that
they no longer acknowledged the authority of
the Patriarch, it would have been tantamount
to civil rebellion, and they would have been
dealt with as outlaws. In spiritual matters,
those who were decided among them, carefully
abstained — as they were taught by the mis-
sionaries, and had learned from the Word of
God to do — from all participation in supersti-
tion and idolatry. They attended regularly
upon the ministry of the missionaries, and sat
down at the table of the Lord with them, as
guests ; because they could neither profitably
nor conscientiously unite in this service at the
Armenian Church. They retained connection,
however, with their own people, and generally
cherished the hope, amounting in some case's
to a strong expectation that, by degrees, the
great body of the Armenians would come
over to the ev^angelical faith, and thus a serious
rupture be avoided. The Patriarch Matteos
efiectually cut off this hope.
In the beginning of the year 184C, he re-
142
ARMENIANS.
solved to enter upon more coercive measures.
The first subject selected for the new experi-
ment, was Priest Yertaness, whose zealous and
persevering labors for the spread of pure
Christianity, were doubly odious on account
of his being a member of the priesthood, and
who had already been twice banished for his
religion. One of the Patriarch's beadles was
sent to his lodgings, together with the chief
municipal ofBcer of the Armenians in that
quarter, in order to arrest hira. The owner of
the house, who was friendly to his lodger,
though not himself a Protestant, did not scru-
ple to tell a falsehood, declaring that Yerta-
ness was absent, and thus scut the oQicers
away. The priest made his escape the same
night to another part of the city, where he re-
mained for several weeks, concealed in the
house of a friend.
On Sunday, Jan. 25, after the usual morning
services in the patriarchal church were finished,
the house was darkened by extinguishing the
candles, and the great veil was drawn in front
of the main altar, and a bull of excision and
anathema was solemnly read against Priest
Yertaness, including all the followers of the
" modern sectaries." He was styled by the
Patriarch " a contemptible wretch," who,
" following his carnal lusts," had forsaken the
Church and was going about as a " vaga-
bond," " babbling out errors," and being an
" occasion of stumbling to many." He was
said to be " a traitor, and nmrderer of Christ,
a child of the devil, and au offspring of Anti-
christ, worse than an infidel or a heathen," for
teaching " the impieties and seductions of
modern sectaries, (Protestants)." " Where-
fore," says the Patriarch, " we expel him and
forbid him as a devil, and a child of the devil,
to enter into the company of believers. We
cut him off from the priesthood, as an ampu-
tated member of the spiritual body of Christ,
and as a branch cut off from the vine, which
is good for nothing but to be cast into the fire.
By this admonitory Ijull, 1 therefore command
and warn my beloved in every city, far and
near, not to look upon his face — regarding it
as the face of Belial ; not to receive him into
your holy dwellings ; for he is a house-destroy-
ing and ravening wolf; not to receive his sal-
utation, but as a soul-destroying and deadly
poison ; and to beware, with all your house-
holds, of the seducing and impious followers
of the false doctrine of the modern sectaries
(Protestants) ; and to pray for them to the
God who remenibercth not iniquity, if per-
chance they may repent and turn from their
wicked patla, and secure the salvation of their
souls, through the grace of our Lord and
Saviour Jesus Christ, who is blessed for ever.
Amen."
This bull of excision and anathema was fol-
lowed by a violent denunciatory discourse from
the Patriarch, against all the Protestants in
general, and the priest in particular, which
called forth many loud " amens " from the in-
flamed people.
On the following day the greatest activity
prevailed among the priests, in every part of
the city and subm-bs. All moved like the dif-
ferent parts of a machine, as if by one impulse,
and it was not difficult to trace the direction
from which that impulse had come. The reso-
lute Patriarch was determined not to trust
merely to the impression made upon the people
by the anathema, and his accompanying de-
nunciations on the preceding day. He, there-
fore, issued orders to his clergy to see that the
temporal penalties threatened in that instru-
ment were immediately inflicted to the very
letter. The priests went forth simultaneously
to their work, — most of them apparently with
good-will, but some reluctantly, their sympa-
thies being with the innocent victims of op-
pres.sion, rather than with the oppressor. The
Armenia'n heads of all the trade corporatioi^s
in the city were commanded to withdraw their
countenance from all Protestants who would
not recant. The keepers of khans and the
owners of houses were ordered to eject all
lodgers and tenants who would not comply
with this condition. Families were also
visited by the priests, wherever any one lived
who was suspected of heresy, and it was en-
joined upon them to expel the offending mem-
ber, or separate from it, even though it were
a son or daughter, brother or sister, husband
or wife. The Protestant brethren were sum-
moned to repair immediately to the Patriarch-
ate in order publicly to recant and become
reconciled to the Church. To give force to
the whole, the threat was issued that all who
refused to aid in carrying out these measures
against the " new sectaries," should themselves
be anathematized.
A wild spirit of fanaticism now reigned.
Before it, all sense of right, all regard to truth
and justice, all " bowels of mercies " vanished
away. Even the strong and tender affection
subsisting between husbands and wives, bro-
thers and sisters, parents and children, was,
in some instances, exchanged for the cruel and
relentless hate of the persecutor. The very
constancy of the people of God provoked still
more the wrath of their enemies. Their readi-
ness to suffer joyfully the spoiling of their
goods was considered as a proof that large
temporal rewards had been oflered them by
the missionaries ; and their unwavei'ing fidel-
ity to Christ was interpreted into obstinacy.
Some on the side of the Church, who at first
were signally wanting in zeal, in furthering
the Patriarch's violent measures, were stimu-
lated into active persecutors, by what appeared
to them, in their religious indiffereutism, as
mere stubbornness on the part of the Protest-
ants.
The leading men in the different trade cor-
porations, showed more resoluteness than any
other class, in attempting to force the evan-
AEMENIANS.
143
gclical brethren to a compliance with the
Patriarch's demands ; and they coukl urge
motives more potent than ahnost any other of
a worldly nature. Whatever method of coer-
cion was resorted to, whether by priests or
people, it was everywhere publicly declared to
be by the express command of the Patriarch
Matteos.
During the week after the first anathema
was read, although many were forcibly driven
from their houses and shops, and prevented
from doing business to support themselves and
families, and some were expelled from the
paternal roof, and otherwise afflicted, yet not
one was induced to recant. On the following
Sabbath, the passions of an ignorant and su-
perstitious people wei-e still more inflamed by
a second anathema, which, like the first, was
read in all the churches, and accompanied by
the most violent denunciations from the Patri-
arch, the bishops, and the vartabeds. In this
bull it w^as declared that not only the " cursed
nonentity, Vcrtaness," " falsely called priest,"
was anathematized by the " holy Church,"
but likewise " all that were of his senti-
ments." They were together pronounced to
be " accursed, and excommunicated, and ana-
thematized, by God, and by all his saints,
and by us," that is, Matteos Patriarch.
" Wherefore," he says, " whoever has a son
that is such an one, or a brother, or a partner,
(in business) and gives him bread, or assists
him in making money, or has intercourse with
him as a friend, or does business with him, let
such persons know that they are nourishing a
venomous serpent in their houses, which will
one day injure them with its deadly poison,
and they will lose their souls. Such persons
give bread to Judas. Such persons are ene-
mies of the Holy faith of Christianity, and
destroyers of the holy orthodox Church of the
Armenians, and a disgrace to the whole
nation. Wherefore, their houses and shops
also are accursed ; and whoever goes to visit
them, we shall learn, and publish them to the
Holy Church, by terrible anathemas."
The spirit of exasperation knew no bounds.
One after another, the brethren were summoned
before the Patriarch, or the local ecclesiastical
authorities of their particular cparter of the
city, and required to sign a paper of recanta-
tion, on penalty of being " terribly anathema-
tized," which involved their being deprived of
all business and treated as outlaws. The first
paper presented for their signature was, in
substance, a confession that under " the wicked
enticements of Satan" they had " separated
from the spotless bosom of the Holy Church,"
and joined the " impious sect" of the Protest-
ants ; which now they saw to be " nothing else
but an invention of arrogance, a snare of Sa-
tan, a sect of confusion, a broad road which
lead-eth to destruction." Wherefore repenting
of their " impious deeds," they fled for pardon
* to the bosom of the holy and immaculate
Armenian Church," and confessed that " her
faith is spotless, her sacraments divine, her
rites of apostolic origin, her ritual pious ;" and
promised to receive " whatever this same holy
Church receiveth, whether it be a matter of
faith or ceremony," and " to reject with ana-
themas," " whatever doctrines she rejects."
This first paper not being sufficiently expli-
cit to suit some of the persecuting party, an-
other was drawn up in the form of a creed,
to which all were required to subscribe, as the
only condition of being restored to the favor
of the Patriarch, that is to their civil privileges.
This creed contained substantially all the er-
rors of Popery. It acknowledged that good
works justify a man as well as faith ; that the
Church is infallible ; that there are seven sa-
craments ; that baptism by water, and private
confession to a priest are essential to salvation ;
that the soul of one dying without full pen-
ance for his sins, is after death, purified by the
prayers of the church, by the bloodless sacri-
fice of the mass, and by the alms-giving of his
friends ; that the bread and wine of commun-
ion are the true body and blood of Christ ;
that Mary is the mother of God ; that " the
holy anointed" material crosses are worthy of
adoration, as also relics and pictures ; that the
intercession of the saints is acceptable to
God ; and that the Patriarchs rule the Church
as Christ's vicegerents. It also required those
who subscribed it to join in anathematizing
all who call the worship of the holy cross, and
of relies and pictures, idolatry, and who reject
the ceremonies of the church as superstitious.
These two papers, the first having been com-
monly called, The Paper of Recantation, and
the second, tf he Patriarch Matteos's New Creed,
were issued under the high authority of the
Patriarch himself, and sent by him through-
out the country for the signature of the Pro-
testants. In Smyrna, in Nicomedia, in Adar
bazar, in Trcbizond, and in Erzi-iim, the evan
gelical brethren were summoned before their
respective ecclesiastical rulers, and presented
with identically the same creed, which, they
were told, had been received from the Patri-
arch, and which they were rec^uired, by his
command, to sign.
One individual, a very respectable merchant
who was in partnership with his father-in-law,
was driven from his shop, and separated also
from his wife and children, and defrauded of
his property for refusing to yield to these re-
quisitions of the Patriarch. Another, who
was in the silk business, was summoned before
the Patriarch, who, when he found no signs of
repentance, so far forgot himself, as to address
this brother with rude and angry profaneness ;
and, declaring that he and all like minded
with him are accursed, he drove him away.
The individual returned to his shop, but wa.H
soon followed by a beadle from the Patriarch,
who summoned his partner before this digni-
tary. The partner was required forthwith to
144
ARMENIANS
dissolve all connection with the heretic, which
fear led him to do without delay. Since the
shop and most of the capital belonged to the
partner, the brother was at once reduced to
circumstances of the deepest distress. As a
still further act of coercion, the Patrifirch sent
for his father, and enjoined it upon him to
drive his own son from home, and deprive him
of his inheritance. This command, in sub-
stance, was afterwards committed to writing,
and addressed to a priest, under the Patriarch's
own seal, two other sons being now included
in it. The following is a literal translation of
the original, which the writer of this article
has seen, with the Patriarch's own signature
and seal attached :
" My beloved Priest.— This Khachadur, a
penitent, has said ' I have sinned,' and pro-
mised to confess to you, and to commune in
the bosom of our church. But his three sons,
(one of whom was the silk merchant) are im-
penitent and hardened in inic|uity. If they come
to the house of their father, he is not to re-
ceive them, and ho is not to retain them as
his heirs ; but let them be stripped of their
inheritance, if they do not turn from their
wickedness. Farewell."
January 18, (0. S.) 1846, At
the Patriarchate of the Ar-
menians, Constantinople.
(Sealed)
Matteos
Patriarch.
Many other cases of like cruelty and oppres-
sion are related by the missionaries as speci-
mens of the cruelties practiced upon the peo-
ple of God, by their enraged persecutors.
iN'early forty individuals in Constantinople
had their shops closed and their licenses to
trade taken away, and were thereby prevented
from laboring for an honest livelihood. Nearly
seventy were obliged to leave father, mother,
brother, sister, husband, wife, or child, for
Christ's sake ; and were forced by the Patri-
arch's orders from their own hired houses, and
sometimes even from houses owned by them-
selves. In order to increase their distress,
bakers were repeatedly and stringently order-
ed not to furnish them with bread, and water-
carriers to cut off their supply of water. As
multitudes of families in the metropolis depend
entirely upon the latter for all the water they
use, and the greater part of the water-carriers
are bigoted Armenians, this measure operated
with great severity. Many, who were thrown
out of business, were compelled to dissolve
partnerships, and to bring their accounts to a
forced settlement, which involved their entire
ruin. And the greatest activity prevailed
among the Patriarch's agents, to ascertain
where debts were due from any of the anathe-
matized to a faithful son of the Churcli ; and
the latter, however reluctant he might be per-
sonally to distress his friend, was compelled to
urge an immediate settlement. In short, there
was displayed the greatest ingenuity in invent-
ing various refined methods of afflicting the
people of God, so as if possible to " compel
them to blaspheme." Large numbers of sus-
pected Protestants were carried before the
Patriarch, and urged to submit to the Church
and sign the creed ; but only four or five of
those who were previously known to the mis-
sionaries as decidedly evangelical in sentiment,
were led to give in their adhesion to the Pa-
triarch ; and they almost immediately renounc-
ed the forced confession they had made, and,
returning to the Protestants, were anathema-
tized with the rest. Attempts were also made,
but without success, to persuade them by mild-
er means, and even by offers of pectmiary ad-
vantage, to return to their mother church.
Nothing could be more evident than that
the suffering* brethren had special grace given
them from above, to enable them to bear as
they did these severe trials. Driven from their
houses and shops, their families and friends,
and having no certain dwelling-place ; and
many of them reduced to penury ; subject to
constant insult in the streets, and sometimes
to personal injury ; and having every reason
to apprehend persecution in still more violent
forms, they yet exhibited a calm and quiet
spirit of endurance, a readiness to suffer the
loss of all for Christ, and a peace and joy in
the midst of their sufferings, which could be
accounted for only on the supposition, that
God was with them in very deed. One, who
in fact spoke the feelin^js of many, said one
day to a missionary, " My daily prayer to
God is, that even if there should not be left a
single person except myself to witness for the
truth, He would still give me faith to
stand firm for the doctrine of salvation by
grace in Christ alone. I know that all the
resistance we now make to error, we are mak-
ing for coming generations. We may never
reap the fruits ourselves, but our exercise of
firmness and faith now, will enable thousands,
and perhaps millions, in after days to enjoy
the rights of conscience in pure and holy wor-
ship."
Another brother, to whom an offer of up-
wards of 20,000 piastres (about $1,000) was
made 1iy a rich friend, on condition that he
would conform to the Church, replied : " If
you knew anything of the value of the Gospel,
or the preciousness of faith in Christ, you
would not have thought to influence me either
by a thousand, or a hundred thousand dollars."
Many of whom the missionaries had known
but little, Avere led by these violent measures
to take a decided stand for the truth ; and in
the midst of the most violent ragings of the
(iiiemy, the missionaries' houses and the room
in the Khan, in the heart of the city, kept for
the reception of visitors, were more than ever
thronged. The persecuted brethren wrote let-
ters to the Patriarch and to the primates of
the Armenian community, setting forth their
ARMENIANS.
145
doctrinal views, declaring' their attachment to
their nation, and expressing their desire to be
further enlightened, yet declaring that they
■could do nothing against their consciences.
But they found no relief; and at length, they
presented a petition to Reshid Pasha, Turk-
ish Minister of Foreign Affairs, containing a
plain, dignified .statement of their grievances.
This petition was treated with respect ; but,
owing to the influence of some of the Arme-
nian primates, it procured no relief. Subse-
quently, a letter was addressed by the persecu-
ted brethren to the English, Prussian, and
American Ministers, asking for the influence
of these high public functionaries to procure
tlieir release from present suffering, and the
guarantee of their civil rights. The kindest
interest was taken in their case by the liberal-
minded and humane gentlemen who occupied
these posts, and repeated efforts were made to
procure for them exemption from suffering ;
but the persecution still went on. There was
evidently a connivance of some of the Turkish
authorities in this thing, and the Patriarch
was so much encouraged by his success, thus
far, that he sent to the Porte the names of
thirteen leading men among the Protestants,
requesting their banishment. The reply of
the Porte was fatal to his plans. The sub-
stance of it was, that having adopted the prin-
ciple of freedom of conscience, they could not
banish men for imputed religious errors. The
English Ambassador, Sir Stratford Canning,
had already been urging upon the attention
of the Turkish ministry, the pledge given tln-ee
years before by the Sviltan, and, in accordance
with the true spirit of this pledge, it was now
decided that the persecution of the evangelical
Armenians could not be allowed. The humane
endeavors of the American charge, Mr. Brown,
and subsequently of the American minister,
Mr. Carr, and also of the Prussian minister,
Mr. Le Coq, contributed essentially to bring
about this happy issue. A petition from the
suffering brethren, directly to the Sultan him-
self, no doubt, had its share of influence. By
the agency of Sir Stratford, Eeshid Pasha
summoned before him the Patriarch, and
charged him to desist from his persecuting
course.
The persecution began the last week in Jan-
uary, and it was now past the middle of March,
and during the whole of this interval, the
Protestants had struggled in vain, until this
moment, to procure their civil and social rights.
As regularly as the Sabbath came round, the
Armenian churches, in and around the capital,
rung with anathemas against all the followers
of the " new sect." None were more violent
in their public addresses than the Patriarch
himself, who seemed determined that the exci-
ted passions of an uninformed and bigoted
populace against the so called " infidels " and
" atheists," should not subside, so long as he
oculd find fuel to feed the flame. The most
10
foolish calumnies in regard to the religious
views and practices of the Protestants, were
uttered from all the pulpits, and even publish-
ed in books under the Patriarchal sanction.
In one of the latter, having the imprimatur of
the Patriarch upon the title page, it was cool-
ly asserted of the whole Protestant Church,
that it formally approves of polygamy, adultery,
and theft, and sanctions rebellion against the
civil powers ! With such examples, and such
untiring effort on the part of their spiritual lead-
ers, in the use of means like these, to stimulate
the fanatical feelings of the people, it was not
strange that the brethren could not pass
through the streets without being abused by
the most filthy language, and even spit upon
and stoned. Great care was taken, particu-
larly after it was known that the foreign am-
bassadors were keeping an eye on all these
proceedings, not to exceed, if possible, the
bounds of the law ; so that when even as many
as threescore and ten men, women, and chil-
dren, who had refused to bow the knee in idol-
atry, had been sent to wander houseless in the
streets, it was still declared that there was no
persecution !
To the missionaries, however, it was known
that, for the faith of Christ, they were driven
out, and for the love of Christ they could not
refuse to take them in. Very providentially,
the Rev. Mr. Allan, missionary to the Jews,
from the Free Church of Scotland, had, a short
time previously, secured a large house, with
reference to a preaching place, as well as a
dwelling for his family ; and, with true Chris-
tian sympathy and generosity, he opened his
doors for the oppressed. Twenty individuals of
the persecuted, found a comfortable lodging-
place there. For the rest, the missionaries hired
such tenements as could be found, at the same
time providing the starving with bread, while
they were cut oS" from all means of procuring
their own subsistence. A statement was drawn
up of the grievous things that had befallen
the brethren in Turkey, accompanied by an
appeal to evangelical Christians throughout
the world for sympathy and aid ; and the
generous contributions that flowed in from all
quarters of the globe, wherever the story had
gone, and pious hearts were found, showed
how strong a bond of union is the love of
Christ. Letters of the tenderest Christian
sympathy were received, accompanied, by dona-
tions for the sufferers, from every Protestant
country in Europe, from England, Malta, and
India, as well as from the United States ; and
in this spontaneous movement in behalf of the
persecuted people of God, denominational dis-
tinctions were forgotten. Nearly or quite five
hundred dollars were contributed by foreign
Protestant residents upon the ground, who
naturally felt the more deeply, because they
were personal spectators of the sufferings they
were called upon to relieve.
By these means the brethren who were scat-
146
ARMENIANS.
tered over an area of 8 or 10 miles were brought
together, and had opportunity to meet for
prayer, to become acquainted and sympathise
with each other ; thus forming a bond of union,
which remains to this day.
The Patriarch had now received such lessons
from high quarters, as greatly to modify his
expectations of putting down Protestantism
by force ; and he was even compelled, reluct-
antly, to issue public orders to his clergy, in
certain cases, against persecution ; though it
is known that secret instructions were, at the
same time, given of a contrary nature.
Printed copies of the Patriarch's two ana-
themas were sent to every part of Turkey, to
be read in all the churches ; and similar scenes
followed in Nicomedia, Adabazar, Trebizond,
Erzrfim, Brusa, Smyrna, and other places ; and
in some of them, scenes of a still more revolt-
ing character were enacted.
Sir Stratford Canning, whose noble efforts
for religious liberty in Turkey are worthy of
all praise, did not cease to urge upon the
Turkish government the necessity of securing
to its Protestant subjects the right of pursuing
their lawful callings without molestation. Be-
tween thirty and forty in Constantinople alone,
were still excluded from their shops and their
business, on the plea that 'they were without
Bureties. The Ambassador represented that
the demands of the law might be met, by their
becoming sureties for one another. This im-
portant concession was at length made by the
government, and Reshid Pasha, the Minister
of Foreign AJFairs, or Grand Vizer, as he soon
after became, gave orders that the Protestants
be permitted to resume their business on this
condition. This decision, which, with a^limited
application, had already released four imprison-
ed watchmakers, being now made general, vir-
tually settled the question of religious liberty
for the Protestants in Turkey. The immediate
relief afforded was important, though far from
being entire. The brethren were still tried in
various ways. Many, from the very circum-
stances of the case, could not hope to regain
the situations from which they had been thrust.
Others were still subject to secret persecution,
which was the harder to bear, because it could
not easily be traced to its proper source, and
brought in a tangible form under the cogni-
zance of the civil courts. The Patriarch,
seeing which way the current was turning,
very adroitly attempted to set himself forth
before the M'orld as a friend of religious liberty,
and a sympathizer with the suffering ; although,
at the same time, he was repeating his ana-
themas in his own church every Sabbath-day,
and exciting the people, by his appeals to their
fanaticism, as before. This kept alive the
spirit of persecution, and various arts were
practiced, often successfully, to prevent the
brethren who had opened their shops, from
doing any business. Numberless vexations
were practiced from time to time, and there
was often a great want of promptness in the
Turkish courts in relieving the innocent suf-
ferers of their oppressions, even when they had
tangible ground of complaint. These irregu-
larities, however, were to be expected in such
a country, and under such circumstances.
There was still satisfactory proof that the
Turkish government was disposed to be sincere
and consistent in its declarations in favor of re-
ligious liberty. A vizirial letter, dated early
in June, 1846, commanding the Pasha of
Erzrum to see that the civil rights of the
Protestants were not infringed, so long as they
were faithful subjects of the Sultan, is worthy
of mention, as the first imperial document ever
issued by the Turkish government, for the pro-
tection of its Protestant subjects.
In the course*of the persecutions that have
now been described the Patriarch was incessant
in his efibrts to break up the Mission Seminary
at Bebek. He succeeded at different times,
in getting away seventeen, in all, out of twenty-
seven students ; but five of these soon returned,
and ten others joined the institution, several of
whom were pious and promising young men,
who having been driven by persecution from
their business, were led to consecrate them-
selves to the service of God in the ministry,
and to seek from the Mission Seminary the in-
tellectual and moral discipline they needed for
this work. Mr. and Mrs. Everett, who had
been connected with the Smyi-na station since
April, 1845, removed to Constantinople in the
summer of 1846, and Mrs. Everett was asso-
ciated with Miss Lovell in the instruction of
the Female Seminary.
For nearly six months continuously, the anar
thema had been publicly repeated every Sab-
bath in the Patriarchal Church, as well as iu
other churches, until many of the people be-
gan to grow weary of the sound ; and the
changes were so frequently rung on the various
forms of denunciation, which had been contrived
to give force to the bull, that their efficiency
seemed rapidly wasting away. And yet, up
to the middle of fhe year 1846, through the
influence of the Church authorities, bread and
water were still withheld from many Protest-
ant families, by the regular dealers in those
articles, and everything was done, that could
with safety be attempted, to vex those who re-
mained steadfast in the truth. The sufferers
had again and again petitioned to their Patri-
arch, and to the primates for relief, but they
were uniformly repulsed with the declaration
that there was no hope of any melioration of
their condition, except by unconditional sib-
mission to the Church. Hitherto, no one had
voluntarily separated himself from the Arme-
nian community. Those who were called
schismatics, had become such by the exscind-
ing act of the Patriarch himself, who was the
sole author of the schism, and who seemed to
try every method in his power to render the
separation perpetual.
ARMENIANS
147
On the 21st of June, 1846, he gave the
finishing blow to this work, by a public official
act, which resulted, through necessity, in the
organization of the Evangelical Protestant
Churches in Turkey. On that day, it being
the day of a solemn festival for the Church, he
issued a new bull of excommunication and ana-
thema against all who remained firm to their
evangelical principles, decreeing that it should
be publicly read at each annual return of this
festival, in all the Armenian Churches through-
out the Ottoman Empire. Thus were the
Protestants cut off and cast out forever. And
although they had no power to organize them-
selves into a civil community, yet nothing
could be plainer than their duty, immediately
to secure to themselves and their children, as
far as they were able, the full*|)ossession of all
the spiritual privileges of the Gospel.
They made a written request to the mission-
aries, for aid in a matter in which they them-
selves had had no experience. Accordingly, a
meeting was held in Constantinople, of dele-
gates from the different stations of the mission
to Turkey. The Rev. Messrs. Allan and
Koenig, missionaries of the Free Church of
Scotland to the Jews of Constantinople, and
the Rev. Dr. Pomroy, then pastor of a Congre-
gational Church in Bangor, Maine, and now
one of the Secretaries of the Board, who was
providentially on a visit to the Levant at that
time, were also present by invitation, and took
part in the deliberations. All felt that God
was there ; and the overwhelming importance
of the business on which they were convened,
and their sense of their own ignorance and im-
potence, seemed to compel them to throw them-
selves directly upon him. Much prayer was
offered, both by the members of the convention
and the native brethren, and to this it must be
ascribed that although there were representa-
tives of four different denominations of Chris-
tians among them, yet the most entire harmony
of feeling pervaded their deliberations, and the
result was attained by a unanimous vote.
On the 1st day of July, 1846, the Evangeli-
cal Armenians in Constantinople, to the num-
ber of forty, three of whom were females,
came together for the purpose of organizing
themselves into a Church. The plan of organ-
ization, as drawn up at the above mentioned
meeting, was read and explained, article by
article, and those present gave their solemn
assent to the whole, and with perfect unanimity,
adopted it as theirs, and were thus constituted
into The First Evangelical Armenian
Church op Constantinople. After the names
of the church members had been recorded, a
pastor was chosen by ballot, and without pre-
vious consultation, the choice fell unanimously
on Mr. Apisoghom KhachadCiryan. The other
church officers were then elected, and the meetr
ing was adjourned. Although the whole had
OQpupied from four to five hours, the deepest in-
terest was maintained throughout; much ten-
derness of feeling was manifested, and many
eyes were suffused with tears.
The articles of church organization here
adopted, provide for the trial of offenders by a
standing committee, or church session, chosen
ft)r a limited time, and consisting of deacons
and " helpers," who, after conducting a case to
its close, report their proceedings with the evi-
dence, to the male members of the Church,
and a vote is taken of assent or dissent. In
the event of dissent, the case goes up to the
pastors and delegates of the associated churches,
whose decision in all cases, is final. Provision ia
made for appeal to this body, before which the
trial of ministers accused of offences is to be had.
The Confession of Faith is similar to those of
the orthodox Calviuistic churches in this coun-
try. ( For these documents in full, see " Chri's-
tianity Revived in the East," Appendix F.)
In one week from the organization of the
church, the person chosen was publicly ordained
to the work of the Gospel ministry, as pastor
of the newly formed Church. Under the cir
cumstances it was necessary to perform the
ordination by an ecclesiastical council invited
by the Church, and which consisted of the
missionaries of the board resident at Constan-
tinople, and the Rev. Mr. Allan of the mission
of the Free Church of Scotland to the Jews
of the capital.
A scene so new as a Protestant ordination in
the capital of the Turkish Empire drew forth a
crowd to the chapel, several of whom were of the
Patriarch's party. The strictest silence, how-
ever, prevailed, and the most fixed and solemn
attention was given to every part of the service.
As an act of justice to themselves, the mem-
bers of this new church lost no time in setting
forth before the world the declaration of their
faith, and their reasons for the step they had
taken. This document will be found in the ap-
pendix of " Christianity Revived in the East."
In the course of the same summer, churches
were formed on the same basis, in Nicomedia,
Adabazar, and Trebizond ; with the most evi-
dent good results, although the original num-
ber of members was, in each case, small. It
is not known that the least objection was ever
made to these organizations, by the Turkish
government, or any of its officers. Indeed, the
sympathies of the Mohammedans were with
the persecuted, rather than with their enemies.
The use of pictures in worship ; the invoca-
tion of saints ; and the doctrine of transub-
stautiation and priestly absolution, are as ab-
horrent to the Koran as they are to the Bible.
The government of the Sultan had ordered
that the Protestants be no longer molested in
their civil rights, on ticcount of their religious
sentiments. Their shops were reopened, but
it was comparatively easy for their busy ene-
mies to prevent traffic with them, jrithout open-
ly infringing the law, and this was repeatedly
done. They could not be imprisoned or ban-
ished merely for their religious sentiments;
148
ARMENIANS.
but false claims of debt could and did imprison I for the worship of God." The Judge had no
them • and false charges of vicious conduct, reply to make to this noble answer, but merely
established by perjury, could and did secure directed his_ cierk to record that '' the Protes-
their banishment. In Constantinople consider- 1 tants say it is a matter of faith and conscience
able sums of money were paid by different indi
viduals to avoid imprisonment for pretended
debts ; and more than a score of Protestants,
at different times, were shut up with felons for
alleged crimes which false witnesses had proved
against them, and which they, from the very
organization of the Turkish courts, could not
disprove. As an example of the length to
which the Patriarch could even now go in his
persecuting measures, the following story is
related : A place of Protestant worship was
opened in the city proper, for the accommoda-
tion of many ftimilics who, on account of the
distance, could not often be present at the
chapel in Pera. The house hired for this pur-
pose was built by a former Patriarch, though
now owned by his brother, who was a worthy
member of the Protestant community and
Church. It was situated near the Patriarchate,
which no doubt was an additional cause of
vexation to this dignitary. At that time no
other house could be obtained in all Constanti-
nople, for such a purpose. By a cunning de-
vice, the Patriarch procured the imprisonment
of Stepan, the owner of the house, by the Tur-
kish police, on charge of flogging one of his
priests ! The priest had been sent by his su-
perior to Stepans house, in his absence, to
endeavor to persuade his wife to separate from
him ; and the injured husband merely called
at the priest's door, and warned him not to en-
ter his house again, on pain of civil prosecu-
tion. This was a sufficient ground for a pre-
text, the futility of which was transparent on
the ti-ial, the whole object and aim of the
charges being to prevent the holding of Pro-
testant worship in the house in quc:;tion. The
Patriarch first claimed the house as the pro-
perty of the Church, having bee.i built by
a Patriarch. And when this wus decided
against him, he begged that Stepau might be
removed from the house, since all his neigh-
bors were complaining against him as a dis-
turber of the peace. This also was set aside.
After several other vain shifts on the part of
the Patriarch to accomplish his object, the
Judge at length took up the same side, and
said to Stepan, " The government gives you no
permission to hold meetings in that house."
" Sir," said Stepan, with solemn earnestness,
" I beg that you will not fatigue your!:i,^lves
with efforts to prevent us from meeting ; kt I
declare that not only I, but all the Protestant
Armenians also, are ready to shed our blood
for this thing. Consult together, if you please,
as to the best method of getting rid of us.
with them to hold meetings." Stepan wa.s
soon liberated.
In interior places, where the new order of
things was not so well understood, and M'here
the local governors were more completely
the creatures and the tools of rich and influen-
tial Armenians, it was still more easy to afiBict
the Protestants with impunity. In Nicome-
dia, after religious liberty had been proclaimed
to the Protestants, the brethren were often
abused in the streets, and their houses stoned.
In Adabazar, a Protestant teacher was put ip
chains and sent to prison, on the general
charge of distoabing the peace, though no one
in the town was really more peaceable than
he. At Trebizond, a mob of women attacked
with heavy stones, two females who were re-
turning from the preaching of the missionaries,
and because their husbands endeavored to
shield them from harm, these husbands were
thrown into prison, and there stretched out,
with their faces downwards, upon the cold,
damp ground, and their feet confined in the
stocks ! In this painful position they were
left for a whole day, without food, so that one
became insensible, and was more dead than
alive when he was removed. The other was
carried to Constantinople, and there kept in
close confinement for several months, his per-
secutors, who were influential, insisting upon
it that he was a disturber of the peace and a
dangerous man. In the same place, on the oc-
casion of the death of a Protestant brother, the
house where the body lay was assailed by
stones from a furious mob, and every effort
was made to prevent the burial. This neces-
sary duty could only be performed, at last, un-
der shelter of the night, and by paying twenty-
one dollars for permission to dig a grave in
the public highway ! At Erzrum an infuriated
moV forced its way into the house of Dr.
Smith, and bore away a priest of the church,
who had escaped thither to avoid persecution,
he being a Protestant in sentiment. They
afterwards returned with renewed fury, broke
into the house a second time, felled to the
ground a native assistant and also a patient of
the doctor, and destroyed seven or eight hun-
dred dollars' worth of books and furniture.
Even in the capital itself, at the burial of
the first Protestant adult after the separation,
the procession, in returning from the grave,
Avas followed by a mob of Armenians, who
first began to shout in a highly insulting and
disgraceful manner, using the most filthy lan-
ffuaffe ; and afterwards to Iwirl stones, some of
whether by exiling, drowning, or by cutting off j which were of an enormous size. The mob
our heads ^Jjut it is -useless to try to prevent | thus followed the procession for a quarter of a
us from rae^'ng. The Holy Gospel commands ] mile or more, when they amounted to at least
us to meet ; it is a matter of conscience and | a thousand persons. Several of the Armenjan
dutv with us ; and we can never cease to meet ! brethren, and one at least of the missionaries,
ARMENIANS.
149
were struck with tlic stones, though providen-
tially no one was seriously injured. In all
these cases, and numberless others of a similar
kind, the Turkish tribunals were immediately
appealed to for redress ; and this was, sooner
or later, almost sure to be obtained, though
not always to the full extent that was due.
At Nicomedia the governor erdered the civil
and ecclesiastical leaders of the Armenian
community to desist from their oppressions,
saying, " The Protestants no longer belong to
you, and you have no right to interfere with
their religion." A file of soldiers, even, was
sent on one occasion to disperse the mob. At
Trebizond, police officers were regularly sta-
tioned at the entrance of the Prot«stant place
of worship, as long as such a step was consid-
ered necessary. By the prompt and decisive
intervention of the United States Minister at
the Porte, the damages sustained at Erzrum
by Dr. Smith were repaid, and four of the
leaders in the mob were imprisoned. And in
Constantinople, the police took effectual meas-
ures to prevent the recurrence of such dis-
graceful scenes as those described in connec-
tion with the first funeral.
The position of the Protestants was still an
anomalous one in Turkey. They were separ-
ated from the Armenian community, but not
united with any other. The Turkish govern-
ment was determined they should not be mo-
lested by the Patriarch or his ministers, but
exactly what to do with them was not so easily
decided. According to the municipal regula-
tions of Constantinople, neither marriage,
baptism, nor burial can be performed without
the cognizance of the civil power. A certifi-
cate from the Patriarch must be presented to
the head of the police, to procure a permit for
marriage. The name of every child baptized
must be communicated by the Patriarch to the
same officer, for enrolment ; and previous per-
mission must be obtained, through the Patri-
arch, from the Board of Health, for every burial.
Besides this, no person can travel in the coun-
try without a passport, and no passport can be
obtained without the Patriarch's voucher for
the honesty of the man. At first it seemed to be
the plan of the government, that while the
Protestants should be entirely separated from
the Patriarch, so far as religious matters were
concerned, he might still be left to act for
them as their civil representative at the Porte.
This was soon found to be utterly impractica-
ble. There seemed to be two principal ob-
jections to organizing them regularly into a
separate civil community ; namely, the fewness
of their numbers, and the strong objections of
certain parties having great influence with the
government. They were consequently left for
more than a year and a half with their rights
acknowledged, and yet without any regular
provision for securing those rights from inva-
sion ; and subject, in the interval, to frequent
grievances and even ojipressions, such as have
been described. And it is always to be under-
stood, that Protestants in the interior were
exposed to greater trials of this sort in pro-
portion to the remoteness of their situation
from the capital.
But though the patience of the evangelical
Armenians was long tried in various ways,
through their imperfect acknowledgment by
the government, still there was a gradual
melioration of their condition evidently going
on, which, to such as were watching with
reasonable expectations, the signs of the times,
was highly encouraging. It is impossible for
those who have never been in like circumstan-
ces, to conceive of the degree of satisfaction
and encouragement felt by the Protestants
when they were, for the first time permitted to
bury their dead in peace, under the protection
of the civil power, and to procure a permit
for marriage, and a passport for traveling,
without the mediation of the Patriarch. The
second adult funeral among them was in strik-
ing contrast with the first. It occurred on
the Sabljath, and in the procession were from
100 to 1.50 native Protestants, with their pas-
tor at their head, carrying a copy of the Scrip-
tures in his hand. All marched silently and
solemnly, at mid-day, through the most public
street of Pera, to the Protestant burying-
ground, under the protection of a body of the
police. It was a new and wonderful spectacle
for Turkey ; and shop-keepers and artisans
along the way turned aside from business for
the moment, and inquired. What new thing is
this? Hitherto the funeral processions of
native Christians had been accompanied with
gilded crosses elevated in the air, and candles,
and priestly robes, and chantings. It was
whispered from mouth to mouth, " These are
the Protestants. See how the government
protects them!" Some of the Mussulmans
said, " Look ! There are no crosses ! no sing-
ing ! This is as it should be."
Several hundreds of people of different
classes gathered around the grave, where a
hymn was sung, and a short but earnest and
appropriate address was delivered by the pas-
tor. Many went home from that burial with
new and more correct impressions of what
Protestantism really is. The moral influence
of the whole spectacle was highly salutary,
and it was felt by all that an important point
had been gained to the Protestant cause. The
internal growth of the community was ever
in advance of the external. No week passed
without furnishing evidence of the special pre-
sence of God's Spirit.
But in eight short months a heavy affliction
befell the church in the capital in the death of
its beloved and useful pastor. His labors, and
cares, and anxieties had been abundant, and
he was the object of many a shaft from the
enemy. He was sometimes thrown into vary
exciting scenes, in the midst of mobs, raised
in the streets to vex the Protestants. Only a
150
ARMENIANS.
short time previous to his death, he visited
Nicomedia; and while there, was called to
attend the funeral of a Protestant brother.
As the procession passed along the street,
thousands of hostile Armenians were assem-
bled, to meet it with insults and abuse. Ar-
rived at the place of burial, this rabble gath-
ered around the grave, and Mr. Khachaduryan
took the opportunity of preaching to them the
Gospel of Christ. They listened in perfect
silence, and then went quietly to their homes.
The pastor returned to Constantinople, over-
come by exertion and excitement. Within a
week, he was exposed to the worrying influence
of a similar outrage, at the funeral of a Pro-
testant child, in the capital. His last disease
immediately developed itself, which was pro-
nounced by a judicious physician to be a dis-
ease of the brain, induced by excessive mental
effort and excitement, a disease in this form,
scarcely known in the country. During most
of his illness he was delirious, but his ruling
passion was constantly showing itself. Scarce-
ly anything else was heard to proceed from
his lips but the name of the beloved Saviour, or
what pertained to his kingdom and glory. _ The
report went abroad among his superstitious
enemies that God had smitten him with raving
madness and despair, in consequence of the
anathemas of the Church, which rested upon
him ; and great would have been their glory-
ing, had his sun thus set under a cloud. But
the earnest supplications of his Church were
heard ; the cloud was lifted up ;• the laboring
mind was unshackled ; and the departing
saint was permitted to magnify the grace of
Christ, by declaring how abundantly he was
sustained in that soiemn hour. A short time
before he died, in answer to inquiries, he said,
that his heart was " full of sin, but Jesus Christ
was his righteousness, his sanctification, and
his redemption ;" and that his hope was " not
at all in his own merits ; but only in the free
and infinite grace of God."
A brother of the decetised, Mr. Simon Kha-
chaduryan, was shortly after elected, and or-
dained pastor in his place. He had been
educated at the Bebck Seminary, and possess-
ed rare qualities for the office to which he was
called, and which he still continues to adorn.
Two other pupils of the same seminary, Mr.
Avedis, and Mr. Mugurdich, were licuused to
preach the Gospel. 'J'he latter was subse-
quently ordained as pastor of the Evangelical
Church in Trebizond, and the former as co-pas-
tor in Constantinople. Another pastor was
ordained in Nicomedia in the latter part of
November, 1847. This M'as Mr. Hariitun Mi-
nasian. His ordination was attended by circum-
stances of peculiar interest. Ilis little flock had
been for many years exposed to almost constant
persecution. . Oftentimes they were driven
from the abodes of men, and compelled to hold
their worship in the distant fields ; and even
there, they were never sure of being left un-
molested. Now they had a place for publie
worship in the very heart of the city ; and
there, at mid-day, on the Sabbath, the ordina-
tion services were performed — no one daring
to " molest them or make them afraid."
Missionary tours performed through various
parts in the interior of the country, brought
to light many encouraging facts in regard to
the extent of the work of reform. In no place
was there, a more remarkable movement than
at Aintab, a town situated about three days'
ride north-cast from Aleppo. Some copies of
the Scriptures, and other books from the mis-
sion press, had found their way to this town,
chiefly through the agency of Bedros vartabed,
who labored as a colporteur in those parts ;
and a few individuals, by the blessing of God
on the simple reading of the word, had their
eyes opened to see the errors of their Church.
Soon after, the Patriarchal bull against priest
Vertaness and the other evangelical brethren,
was received from Constantinople, and publicly
read in the Church. Those who had been con-
vinced of the truth now learned, for the first
time, that there existed in the Armenian com-
munity a body of men who take the Bible as
their only guide. This greatly encouraged and
strengthened them. Soon after, a vartabed
came to Aintab, and began to preach the
evangelical doctrines in the Armenian Church,
in the most bold and zealous manner. He was
interesting in his appearance, and eloquent in
his speech ; and with great fearlessness did he
expose the errors of his Church, and with
great power set forth the peculiar doctrines of
the Gospel. Yery many were convinced by
him of the truth, and were led to renounce
their previous errors, and openly avow them-
selves as Protestants. It seemed as though
the whole fabric of superstition in Aintab
must speedily fall. It was soon discovered
that this new and zealous preacher of the evan-
gelical doctrines, was himself evangelical only
in name. His moral character proved to be
infamous, and he was sent away in disgrace.
The fruits of his preaching, however, remained,
although he proved so unworthy an instrument.
The evangelical brethren immediately prepared
a letter, signed by eighty-two heads of families,
recjuesting that a missionary might forthwith
be sent to them. Mr. Van Lennep, of Con-
stantinople, went in obedience to the call,
though not to remain permanently, as they had
hoped. His visit was timely and useful. The
place was afterwards visited by Mr. Johnston,
by Dr. Smith, and by Mr. Schneider ; and a
flourishing church was gathered, and one of the
largest congregations of Protestants in the
Turkish empire ! The condition of the Ar-
menians in all that section of the country was
highlv encouraging.
In 'the latter ])art of the summer of 1847,
Rev. Isaac G. l^liss and wife arrived in the
country from America, and proceeded to join
Mr. Peabody in his labor in Erzrfim. An
ARMENIANS.
151
evangelical Armenian Ciiurch had been organ-
ized thei-e in April, and another was formed
in Brusa in July, making seven in all.
In the year 1 847 Sir Stratford Canning re-
turned for a season to his native land, and
Lord Cowley was appointed to occupy, tempo-
rarily, his place. He proved himself to be as
warm and firm a friend of religious freedom as
his predecessor. He exerted liimself with the
most unremitting zeal to secure to the Pro-
testant Armenians a distinct recognition on the
part of the Porte, and a formal organization,
which should place them on the same footing
with all other Christian communities in the
empire ; and his noble efforts were crowned
with complete success. On the 15th of No-
vember, 1847, he procured from the Turkish
Government an imperial decree, recognizing
native Protestants as constituting a separate
and independent community in Turkey. In
this high official paper it was declared that
" no interference whatever should be permitted
in their temporal or spiritual concerns, on the
part of the patriarchs, monks, or priests of
other sects." This decree was immediately
sent to all the Pashas in the interior, under
whose jurisdiction Protestants were known to
exist. An individual elected by the new com-
munity was formally recognized by the gov-
ernment as the agent and representative of the
Protestants at the Porte.
The evangelical brethren in Constantinople
immediately appointed a day for special
thanksgiving and prayer. Great was the joy
of the Protestants in every part of the laud,
though still it was, in many cases, rejoicing
with trembling. At the different missionary
stations greater boldness in attending the
preaching of the Gospel was noticed, and a
new impulse seemed to be given to the spirit
of inquiry. The special influences of the
Spirit were extensively enjoyed, though in no
case, except at the Female Seminary in Con-
stantinople, was the movement general enough
to be designated as a revival of religion. In
the district of Geghi, south-west of Erzrum,
containing from twelve to fifteen thousand
souls, Mr. P«abody found very promising indi-
cations of an extensive religious awakening.
The vartabed himself was the most decided
evangelical man in the community. For per-
sonal security, he was obliged to flee to Erzi'um,
where, after a sufficient trial, he was received
into the Evangelical Church. At Aintab, the
development was more rapid, perhaps, than any-
where else. Mr. Schneider, of the Brusa station,
spent the summer of 1848 in labors there,
during which time the congregation steadily
increased, and many were affected to tears, un-
der the preaching of the Word. A very intel-
ligent priest became obedient to the faith, and
his sincerity was called, more than once, to the
severe test of persecution. At a communion
season in October, 1848, seventeen persons
were added to the Church, five of whom were
females. During the same month. Dr. Smith
returned to Aintab, where he took up his resi-
dence as a missionary of the Board, together
with his wife. The importance of the station
was such, that it was determined that Mr. and
Mrs. Schneider, of Brusa, should become per.
manently connected with it ; the same steamer
which brought away Mr. Schneider from
Ghemlik, the port of Brusa, carried back thither
to occupy his place, the Rev. Oliver Crane and
wife, who had just arrived from America.
Among the evangelical Christians at Ain-
tab a most commendable zeal had shown itself
for the spread of the gospel in the towns and
villages around. Several attempts had been
made by individuals to labor as colporteurs,
but they were never suffered to remain long in
a place. The Armenian primates easily suc-
ceeded in persuading the Turkish authorities
to order them away as vagabonds. A novel
experiment was made, early in the year 1849,
to accomplish the object in view without sub-
jecting themselves to the charge of being mere
"idlers, and " busybodies in other men's matters."
Five individuals who had trades, went forth to
different towns, with their tools in one hand, and
the sword of the Spirit in the other. Wherever
they went they worked at their trades, while, at
the same time, they labored for the spiritual
good of the people. The experiment succeeded
to aikniration. The spirit of religious inquiry
was spreading from Aintab in almost all direc-
tions. The congregation in the town itself
had become so large, that two places were
opened for worship at the same time. And
from various towns and villages throughout
the country, the most urgent appeals came
from souls hungering for the bread of life.
In November, 1848, Mr. Hohannes Sahak-
yan, having spent several years in study in
America, was licensed at Constantinople to
preach the gospel ; and in the following spring,
he was ordained as pastor of the evangelical
Armenian Church in Adabazar, where he has
been since labovmg with great diligence and
success. Mr. Khachadur, a pupil of the Be-
bek Seminary, was licensed as a preacher in
February, 1849.
In Trebizond, formal permission was given
by tlie governor to the Protestants, to use as a
burying-ground a piece of land purchased for
this purpose three years previously. As long
ago as January, 1848, a vizirial letter had
been procured, through the generous efforts of
Mr. Carr, the United States Minister at the
Porte, ordering the authorities in Trebizond
to see that the Protestants be permitted to
have a cemetery of their own, but various dif-
ficulties had prevented an earlier accomplish-
ment of the design.
The following table presents a comprehen-
sive view of the present state of the mission.
I'he figure at the left of each group of out-
stations, indicates the station under whose su-
pervision they respectively are.
152
AEMENIANS.
OCOOJ^ICr-Cn^COVOJ-'pJOOOj^pCTirfkCObS^
R^S-F-^-
g s..s: ;
I O W *^ CO tj ►
GO OD 00 QO QC 00 CD
tK CJ CI CC Oi CO 02
to to CO i»i to CO l-l
When Commenced.
CO to to to ts w -
Preachers.
CO tC to to b£ CO o
Females.
03 to to lO CO ts -
Total.
Preacliers.
MMl-'l-'l-'l-'t-'l-'h
0< W H" to M O
Assistants.
to to to to to CO to M f
>-' h-" to *» if^ CO
0> M H" to P-" CO
TotaL
i-iMi-'i-'i-'i-'i-'i-Ji-'t
'l-'l-'l-'MH'l-'l-'IW
Maces of Stated
Preaching.
to»-»CJitoc;'Coc^tO(Oto»-**^Mt-» tOMc;i**c;i
0O00000C;'00<
00C10«'C<->00
O *- C5 lO 3i to
Average Sabbath
Congregations.
Seminaries.
Pupils in Sem-
inaries.
High Schools.
Pupils in High
Schools.
Female Boarding
Schools.
Pupils in Female
Board 'g Schools.
Free Schools.
Male Pupils in
Free Schools.
Fcmali! Pupils in
Free Schools.
O en C;i CO
O O CO o
Total of all
Pupils.
l)i.M l-'i-'
Teachers, Church
Members.
PupUs, Church
Members.
N'unibcr of
Churches.
ilcmbers re-
ceived.
Kxcommunica-
tions.
Number of
Members.
w~i-
Whole Do. from
beginning:.
to to to CJ» CO en to to to t-" CO to tSCOOiCJ'Oi
tni*>.C/»lOtOtOOOtO^^OOCflOlOOiOCOCnOitO
o en O V 4^ K^ V
Number of Enrolled
I'rotcstants.
ARMENIANS.
153
The year 1848 was remarkable lor tlie num-
ber and extent of its conflagrations in the city
of Constantinople ; and among the providen-
tial interpositions in behalf of the Protestant
cause, must be mentioned the fact, that in five
or six different instances the devouring element
approached so near to the chapel and Female
Seminary in Pcra, as to leave but a faint
hope that they could escape ; and once even
they actually began to burn, but the flames
were speedily extinguished. Again and again
was it shouted in tlie camp of the enemy, " The
Protestant Chapel is consumed ;" but in each
case, an unseen hand was sti'etched out to ar-
rest the destroyer, and save the Protestant
cause from so great a disaster.
The Patriarch Matteos' plans for the over-
throw of Protestantism in the country, had
met with a most signal failure. His own re-
moval from ofiRce wound up the scene. He
was found guilty of various frauds upon the
public treasury, and according to the official
announcement of the case in the French jour-
nal of Constantinople, "of acts of injustice
inconsistent with patriarchal dignity." He
was accordingly degraded, and sentenced to
banishment. A friendly banker, however, be-
came surety for him, and procured his release
from this part of the punishment. He has
since been living in retirement on the shores of
tlie Bosphorus.
Our limits will not permit us even in the
brief manner in which that of the previous
years has been given, to continue the sketch of
this interesting portion of missionary history.
We can only add a few words. In 1850 the posi-
tion of the Armenian Protestants was improv-
ed and its permanency secured by a firman of
tlie Sultan, obtained through the interposition
of Sir Stratford Canning, now Lord Stratford
de Redcliffe, as the completion of his noble ef-
forts in behalf of the rights of conscience in
Turkey, which gives to the Protestants all the
privileges granted to the other Christian
communities. What had before been done
was liable to be reversed by a change of ad-
ministration, or of the policy of the govern-
ment. This is beyond recall ; and the firman
given in 1853, in answer to the demands of
Russia for another object, to the Protestants
as to the other rayah (non-mussulman) com-
munities, carries forward the cause of religious
liberty another step by declaring these com-
munities on an equality before the law with
the ISIohammedan population. What is to be
the issue of the fearful conflict, which Avhile
we write, Turkey is waging for national exist-
ence, is unknown to us ; but the analogy of
the past, and the continued progress of the
work of enlightenment and spiritual regenera-
tion within her borders, encourage the hope
that it will be auspicious to the interests of
the Saviour's kingdom. A mighty social,
moral, and religious revolution is in progress;
and this political changes may favor, but cannot
defeat. We may confidently expect that the
religious freedom granted to others will soon
be secured equally to the Mohammedans, so as
to allow the profession of Christianity by
them ; and when that shall come, the work
accomplished among the Armenians will be a
noble preparation for another and still more
glorious one among those heretofore excluded
from the direct efforts of the Church for their
salvation.
The progress for the last six years of the
mission under review can easily be learned
from the reports and other publications of the
Board. The cost at which Protestantism is
still professed, keeps the increase of the Pro-
testant civil community, as yet, healthfully
low ; while evidence of the spread of evangel-
ical sentiments and the leavening influence of
the Gospel is multiplying on every hand. In
some places the outward development is more
rapid than in others. The greatest is in Cili-
cia and on the borders of Mesopotamia. Dur-
ing the year embraced in the report for 1853,
five new churches were organized ; one in Ro-
dosto, on the European shore of the Marmora ;
one in Smyrna ; one in Marsovan ; one in
Killis ; and one in Kessab. Ten others pre-
viously existed : viz., three in Constantinople,
and one each in Nicomedia, Adabazar, Brusa,
Trebizond, Erzrura, Sivas, and Aintab. The
increase of members in their communion dur-
ing the year was 90 ; making the total to be
351 ; which at the end of 1853 was increased
to 395. The number in the Protestant civil
community was about 2,000 ; of whom about
160 were in Kessab, a village of the Aintab
district, in which two years before not an
avowed Protestant was to be found. Brusa
has ceased to be a station of the mission ; the
missionaries having been transferred to other
places, and this left to the care, under the over-
sight of the Constantinople station, of the na-
tive pastor, Mr. Stepan Khachaduryan, bro-
ther to the two brothers who succeeded one the
other in the pastorate at the capital. The
press, formerly at Smyrna, has been removed
to the capital. The Female Boarding School,
now having 25 pupils, has become established
in the suburb of Hasskeuy. The seminary at
Bebek has enlarged its numbers to 50, and is
yearly sending forth educated young men to
preach the Gospel, and occupy other posts of
importance in connection with the work of
the mission. On both these schools the Holy
Spirit has descended and wrought a work of
conversion and sanctification in the hearts of
their pupils. The churches maintain discipline
with great strictness, and exhibit a gratifying
spectacle of Christian consistency and activity.
The converted Armenians are indeed a zealous
and effective body of evangelists, whose labors
are not confined to any one class or place. In
all the divisions of society the influence of the
G ospel is becoming more extended and power-
ful. A most encouraffinff feature of the re-
154
ARRAH— ASHANTEE.
formation is the wide extent of its influence
geographically considered. Mr. Layard, of the
Chnrch of England, who has gained so deserv-
ed a celebrity by his discoveries at Nineveh, in
his recent publication, gives incidents pleasing-
ly illustrating this ; and in a passage, too long
for quotation, in which he eulogizes the Amer-
ican missionaries for their "judicious, earnest,
and zealous exertions," and speaks of the
changes for the better which they are eflectr
ing in the Armenian Church and on its cler-
gy, be says that " there is now scarcely a town
of any importance in Turkey without a Pro-
testant community." (Nineveh and Babylon,
p. 405.) In the reports of the Board for 1852
and 1853, lists of towns containing considera-
bly more than 100 names are introduced, in
which there is so decided a developmeitt of a
spirit of inquiry, in connection with the fact
of the presence in each of truly enlightened,
and one or more of whom hope is entertained
that they are truly regenerated, individuals, as
to impose an urgent necessity for evangelical
instruction to be extended to them. " From
every part of the land," says Mr. Dwight,
" comes to us one appeal, ' Send us preachers,'
' Send us preachers.' " And, says Mr. Schnei-
der of the Aintab station,'- We are constantly
receiving calls for some one to preach the gos-
pel. These calls wax more loud and more
earnest every month. Sometimes I almost
fear to have the post arrive, lest some such
appeal, to which we cannot respond, come to
increase our perplexity."
The mission in connection with the mission of
the Board to the Jews in Turkey, has ten fonts
of type in the Armenian, Greek, Bulgarian,
and ilebrew languages. There are enrolled
Protestants in places where the mission has
no laborers, and who, therefore, are not inclu-
ded in the tabular view : viz., Divrik, 23 ;
Mashgcrd, 10, etc. The whole uum'ufr ii:
the country is not known.
PRINTING.
Whole number of vols, printed in the year. . 19,000
" " " tracts " " " .. 13,000
" " " paf(os of Scripture " .. 1,672,000
" " " " tracts and books " .. 3,596,600
Whole No. of copies printed during tho year 32,000
" " pages '• •' " " 6,268,600
" " copies from the beginning 1,043,210
" " pages " " " 121,780,060
During the present year (1854) at least eight
missionaries, with their wives, are expected to
be added to the mission, and the following
places to be speedily occupied as stations, viz.,
Tocat, Kaisery, Sivas, and perhaps Oorfa, Ma-
rash, and Kharpoot.
In the preparation of the foregoing article,
free use has been made of Smith and Dwight's
Researches in Armenia, and Dwight's Clirisiian-
itij Revived in the East. — Rf.v. G. AV. Wood.
AllRAII : A town in Bahar, 35 miles W.
by S. from Patna, in Cochin, India ; a station
of Gosner's Missionary Society.
AKORANGAI : A station of the London
Missionary Society on the Island of Raroton-
ga, one of the Hervey Islands.
ARRACAN : A province of the Burman
Empire ceded to the English East India Com-
pany, in 1826. It lies on the eastern shore
of the Bay of Bengal, and embraces 16,500
square miles, and contains a population of
about 250,000. It is divided into four dis-
tricts, Akyab, Sandoway, Aeug and Ramsu-
It is the seat of a flourishing mission of the
American Baptist Missionary Union, which
was begun in 1835.
ASOENSIOIT ISLAND: An island
in Micronesia, three hundred miles from
Strong's Island, a station of the American
Board.
AS-HAN' TEE : Ashantee is included in
that general division of Western Africa which
has been denominated Guinea. The empire of
Ashantee is not so much one state, as an assem-
blage of states, owing a kind of feudal obedience
to the sovereign of Ashantee. The empire, ac-
cording to Dupuis, extends westward from the
river Volta, about four degrees, and about four
degrees inland from the Gold coast, comprising
an area of about 60,000 square miles. It
embraces, also, several provinces east of the
Volta. Over the whole of this territoi-y tho
king of Ashantee exercises absolute sway,
all the kings, viceroys, or caboceers, being his
absolute and unconditional vassals. But the
power of the king is somewhat limited, by the
principle of the ancient Medes and Persians,
that a law once passed can never be changed ;
and the caboceers and captains claim to be
heard on all questions relating to war and for-
eign politics, which are considered in a general
assembly. The king employs a number of
boys, trained for the purpose, who are placed
as spies on the great men, and report to the
king all they see and hear ; thus verifying the
words of Solomon : " Curse not the king, for a
bird of the air shall carry the voice, and that
which hath wings shall tell the matter."
Speaking against the king is punished as trea-
son. The king has the property as well as the
lives of his people in his power. He is the
legal heir of all his people, and can claim all
their gold at their death. The produce of the
gold mines is the property of the king. Tho
gold contained in the soil of the market place
of Kuraasi also belongs to the king ; and on
two occasions, the washings of this soil yielded
1600 ounces of gold. Frequently, after a rain,
lumps of gold "are laid bare ; but they are
covered up again, for any one picking them
up would lose his head. On the public recep-
tion of visitors at the capital, the king is mag-
nificently attired in silk, with necklaces, brace-
lets, knee-bands and ankle-strings of gold and
beads, with various other ornaments, some of
which are of massive gold. The throne ig
covered with plates of gold ; and all his at-
tendants are decked in a corresponding style,
each bearing the emblems of his oflice : alto
ASHANTEE.
155
getlier presenting a very imposing appearance.
On these occasions, the marlcct place, which is
about a mile in circumference, is generally
crowded. When Mr. Freeman was received,
he estimated the number present at 40,000,
half of whom were soldiers. The Ashantee
monarchy is hereditary ; but instead of de-
scending from father to son, it passes from
brother to brother. A female cannot ascend
the throne ; but if, when the last of the line of
brothers dies, his sister has a son, the crown
descends to him.
Domestic slavery exists in Ashantee, and the
lives and services of the slaves are at the dis-
posal of their masters. Yet the treatment of
tlie slaves is not uniformly harsh and severe ;
and sometimes a slave becomes heir to his mas-
ter ; and in many instances, they rise to power
and office. The foreign slave-trade, says Bee-
cham, is valued by the native princes, not only
for its profit, but as an outlet for a redundant
slave population, which often becomes so great
by reason of captives taken in war, as to be
feared.
Polygamy prevails in Ashantee to a fright-
ful extent. It is said that the law allows tlie
king to have 3333 wives ; about half a dozen
of whom arc kept at the palace at a time, and
the rest live on his plantation, or at the capi-
tal, where two streets are devoted to their use,
into which no one is permitted to enter ; and
when they go abroad, no one is allowed to look
upon them. The chief men of the nation have
as many wives as they are able to procure. Mar-
riages are contracted without consulting the
woman, and often in infancy and childhood.
In Ashantee and the neighboring countries,
where polygamy prevails, the husband lives
separate from his wives, who dwell in houses
or sheds, contiguous to each other, in the form
of a square. In some cases, they remain with
their mothers after marriage. They cook and
carry food to their husband, but are not al-
lowed to eat with him. Sometimes his child-
ren eat with him, but more frequently, he eats
alone. The children arc left chiefly to the
care of their mothers, and grow up without
correction, till, when the perverseness of the
boy can be no longer endured, the father pun-
ishes him by cutting off an ear. Unfaithful-
ness on the part of a wife, is punished with
severity ; both parties being sometimes pun-
ished with death, but more frequently with a
fine from her parents and her paramour, in de-
fault of which, her husband cuts off her nose. If
she is found listening to his pri%Txte conversa-
tion, she loses an ear. In Asliantee one of
the king's sisters is made governor of all the
women in the kingdom. The women of As-
hantee, as in most heathen lands, are made the
drudges of the men, the heaviest work being
put upon them.
Roads have been made from Kumasi, or
Coomassie, the capital of Ashantee, to the
most distant parts of the empire, and these are
intersected by numerous cross-roads. The
population of the capital has been estimated
at 100,000. and of the whole kingdom, at
4,000,000. '
Homes. — The Ashantees, and other natives
contiguous to the coast, build their houses of
mud and sticks, with a verandah in front, fronj
which the door opens into an open court,
around which are built huts or slieds, for the
different members of the household. All the
houses in the capital of Ashantee are of this
sort, except the castle of the king, which is of
stone.
Arts. — The Ashantees are ingenious artists
in the precious metals which their country pro-
duces. Iron is manufactured to a considerable
extent. They carve and work in wood with
no little skill. The art of tanning leather is
understood. They have made considerable pro-
gress in weaving, and have done something at
pottery. ^
Trade. — The spirit of trade does not prevail
as much with the Ashantees as with some of
the adjoining countries, and the trade is mostly
confined to the king and his chiefs, who carry
on a considerable traffic with the interior.
Religion. — The notion of a Supreme Being
lies at the foundation of their religious sj'stem.
lie is called Yankumpon, from yanku, friend,
and pon, great. Another name used by the
Pan tees, Yehmi, from yeh, to make, and emi,
me, recognizes him as the Creator. The As-
hantees also give him a title which signifies eter-
nal existence. They have a curious tradi-
tion of the creation, which represents God as
having created three white men and three
black, with as many women of each color, and
allowing them to fix their destiny, by the
choice of good and evil. A box or calabash,
and a sealed paper were placed on the ground.
The black men, who had the first choice, took
the box, in which they found only a piece of
gold, some iron, and other metals, which
they did not know how to use. The white
men opened the paper, and it taught them
every thing. The blacks were left in Afri-
ca, under the care of inferior deities, while the
whites were conducted to the water-side, where
God communicated with them every day, and
taught them to build a vessel, which carried
them to another country, &c. To this tradi-
tion, it is supposed their polytheism may be
traced ; which is very similar to that of the
Yorubas. (See Yoruba) To the innumerable
objects of worship in nature is added images
of the same. But they do not profess to wor-
ship the objects themselves but the spirits,
which make their abode in them. To these
they make offerings, having such crude notions
of spiritual beings as to suppose that they re-
quire food.
The notion of a future state universally pre-
vails. It is believed that, at death, the soul
passes into another world, where it exists in a
state of consciousness and activity. They be-
156
ASIA.
lieve that the spirits of their departed relatives
exercise a guardian care over them, and hence
prayers are offei'ed to them. They have, how-
ever, no correct ideas of the immateriality of
separate spirits ; nor do they appear to have
any just idea of the immortality of the soul.
They believe in the existence of the devil,
an evil being supposed to be ever at hand for
purposes of mischief ; but he does not appear
to be an object of worship with the Ashau-
tees.
Traces of the Sabbath are found in this part
of Africa, the year being divided into moons,
and the moons into weeks, the seventh day of
which is regarded as sacred. Along the coast,
the sacred day is Tuesday ; on which the peo-
ple rest from labor, dress in white, and mark
themselves with white clay. They have also
their " lucky " and " unlucky days."
The priests or " fetish-men," are a numerous
order, and employ a variety of stratagems and
impostures to keep up their influence. The
word '"fetish" seems to be employed as a gene-
ral term for things sacred ; thus, the deities
themselves are called fetishes, as well as the
religious rites, and the offerings presented.
These acts of worship are daily performed by
the people, and they consult their deities by
various superstitious practices, answering to
the lot, to ascertain what course of conduct to
pursue ; a practice which necessarily leads to
the subjection of judgment and reason to blind
superstition. It would be tedious to describe
all the ceremonies by which this worship is
carried on. It is by consulting the deities by
means of oracles, that the priests hold their
sway over the minds of the people ; and on
great occasions, when the questions to be de-
termined are of public importance, human sar
crificcs are offered, sometimes to the number
of many hundreds. This consulting of the
fetish is also connected v/ith witchcraft. Oaths
are administered by it ; and accused persons
are tried by what is called the " oath-draught,"
which is the drinking of a poisonous draught
as a test of guilt or inuocency, in which it is
supposed that the spirit or fetish goes down
with it, and searches the heart of the accused,
and if it finds him innocent, returns with it, as
he vomits it up ; but if guilty the fetish re-
mains to destroy him. It will readily be per-
ceived that such a system, in the hands of wily
priests and powerful chiefs, is capable of being
made an engine of immense oppression and
cruelty. To obtain a supply of victims for
their altars, is the principal end for which the
national deities are supposed to promote war ;
and the sacrifice of their prisoners becomes a
religious oljjigation. Hence, dreadful are the
scenes of barbarity exhibited after a victorious
campaign.— /icec/mm's Ashardee ami the Gold
Coast. The English Wcsleyans have a mission
to Ashantcc and tlie Gold Coast, for which see
Western Africa.
ASIA : An immense continent, presenting
I every possible variety of climate, from the
j dreary confines of the polar world, to the
heart of the tropical regions. Every thing
in Asia is on a vast scale : its mountains,
its table-lands, its deserts. The grandest
feature, and one w-hich makes a complete
section of the continent, is a chain of moun-
tains, which, at various heights, and under
various names, but with very little, if any, in-
terruption, crosses Asia from the Mediterra-
nean sea to the Eastern ocean. Taurus, Cau-
casus, and the Himalaya, are the best known
portions of this chain. On the one side it has
Southern Asia, the finest and most extensive
plain in the world, covered with the richest
tropical products, and watered by magnificent
rivers proceeding from this great store-house,
and filled with populous nations and great em-
pires. On the other side, this chain serves as
a bulwark to the wide table-land of Thibet,
which, though under the latitude of the south
of Europe, has many of the characteristics of a
northern region. To the north, the recent
observations of Humboldt exhibit three par-
allel chains, the Rientim or Moor Tagh, the
Thiunchau or Celestial Mountains, and the
Altaian, which also support table-lands. But
these do not exceed 4,000 to 5,000 feet, accord-
ing to Humboldt, and in many places enjoy a
mild and temperate climate, yielding not only
grain, but wine and silk. Elsewhere, they are
covered with rich pastures, and tenanted with
numerous wandering races, at once pastoral
and warlike, whose victorious bands have over-
run and subjugated the empires of the South.
The Altaian chain separates Middle Asia from
Siberia : a long range of the bleakest land on
the face of the earth. Some of the southern
districts have been found, by the Russians, ca-
pable of supporting numerous herds of cattle ;
but the rest is abandoned to wild animals, not
generally of a ferocious character, but covered
with rich and precious furs, which afford a
grand object for hunting and trade. Asia has
been the scene of the most remarkable events
in the history of the human race. In Asia,
man was created, and fell. In Asia, his re-
demption was accomplished by the incarna-
tion, sufferings, and death of the Son of God :
and from thence proceeded the messengers of
the Saviour, the heralds of His gospel, who
published those tidings of Divine mercy, which
are now proclaimed on every continent, and on
many of the remotest islands of the sea. Asia
was the nursery of learning, and of the arts, in
their earliest infancy. It has been the school,
and also the victim of the successive forms of
false philosophy, and of idol worship. In Asia
have existed some of the greatest empire.'!,
through which have originated the most ex-
traordinary revolutions in the affairs of the
world. This immense continent, moreover,
teems with nations, and contains, on the most
moderate estimate, 500,000,000 of mankind. —
7/oo/e's Year Book of Missions.
ASIA.
157
Races of People. — Not only the majority of
the human race, in number, but also the
greatest variety of the species, is found
within ihc limits of Asia. The first family,
the Caucasian, comprises all the original in-
habitants of the mouutaiuous region lying
between the Black Sea and the Caspian, from
about the 38th to the 42d degree of N. lati-
tude. It includes the mountaineers of the val-
leys of the Caucasus, such as the Abasians,
Ossetes, Lesghians, and Kisti ; and in the more
level country, the Georgians, Mingrelians, and
Armenians. In personal form, this family may
be described as European, but in mind, Asi-
atic. The face is of an oval form ; tlie fore-
head high and expanded ; the nose elevated,
with a slight convexity ; the lips moderate in
size, and the chin full and round. The com-
plexion is fair, but without the clearness of
the European. The eyes are generally dark,
and the hair black. The stature is nearly
ecjaal to the European, and tie form symmet-
rical and handsome.
2. The second is the Arabian, called Semitic,
on the hypothesis that they are descended from
Shcm. It embraces all the aboriginal inhab-
itants of Palestine, Asia Minor, Syria, and
Arabia, from the east coast of the Mediterra-
nean and Red Sea, up to the west coast of the
Pei-sian Gulf. A brunette complexion ; black
or dark brown eyes ; long, lank, black hair ;
large bushy heads ; an oval face, in bokl, dis-
tinct relief, with a nose always elevated, and
not uufrequently aquiline ; high forehead —
ai-e among the most prominent characteristics
of the family. From the condition of the
country they inhabit, they have naturally be-
come divided into two opposite and hostile
classes, the roving and predatory, and the
settled and industrious.
3. Between the Caspian Sea and the Per-
sian Gulf, to the west, the ocean to the south.
India to the east, and an indefinite line to the
north, there are several races which have
mucli re-semblance, but which differ enough in
person, mind, and language, to be classed as sep-
arate families. The first of these, beginning
at the west, is the Persian : complexion fair,
without transparency ; hair long, straight, and
almost jet black ; beard abundant and bushy ;
features regular and handsome ; stature little
short of the European standard, Init less ro-
bust. The present inhabitants of Persia, how-
ever, are much mixed with the blood of Ara-
bian and Turkish settlers.
The next of these families is the Turkish or
Scytkian. The parent country of this family
lies between the 35th and 6Uth degrees of lat-
itude, from the Hindoo coast to the Belar
Tagh, and from the Caspian Sea to the west-
ern boundary of the desert of Cobi, where they
are mixed with the Mongols. The complexion
of this family is a light brunette ; hair gene-
rally black, strong and long ; eye, light brown,
somewhat contracted ; skull remarkably glob-
ular ; proportions of the face symmetrical ;
body stout, but shorter than the European.
They have made little progress* in civilization.
In the south-east angle of what is commonly
considered Persia, are three races of men, the
Belochees, Brahoos and Dehwars. The first of
these have dark brown complexion, black hair,
long visage, elevated features, with tall, active,
but not robust persons. The Brahoos, have
thick, short bones, and are a squab instead of
a tall people. The Dehwars have blunt fea-
tures, high cheek-bones, bluff cheeks, short per-
sons, and are an ill-favored race.
To the north of these is the Afghan race,
marked by a brown complexion, black hair,
sometimes brown, a profusion of beard, high
noses, high cheek-bones, long faces, a robust
person, and a stature short of the European.
Among the high mountains and narrow ele-
vated valleys, east of the Afghans, exists a
people called Kaffres or infidels, by their Mo-
hammedan neighbors. They are described as
remarkable for fairness, possessing occasionally
light hair, blue eyes, and great personal beauty.
They speak many languages unknown to Eu-
ropeans.
4. Proceeding eastward, we come to the
great and numerous Hindoo family, spread
from the 7th to the 35th degree of N. latitude,
and from the 68th to the 95 th of E. longitude.
Correctly speaking, this is, perhaps, not one
family, but an aggregate of races, bearing
such a general resemblance to each other as
the European varieties do among themselves.
The color is commonly black, or at least a
dee]) brown ; and hence the name of Hindoo,
applied to them by their Tartar and Persian
invaders ; for that word, in Persian, is equiva-
lent to negro in ours. The hair is long, coarse
and black ; beard of the same color ; the eye
black or deep brown ; the face oval, and the
features handsome ; except some defect in the
lower limbs, the person is well formed. The
stature is short of the European, and the body
spare and deficient in strength. Clearness and
subtlety, rather than depth and vigor, charac-
terize their intellectual capacities. But this
race is subdivided into several others, having
distinct peculiarities, as the Caskmerians, the
Bengallees, the Oriyas, the Telingas, the Mah-
rattas, and the Huuloo-Chinese, inhabiting a
country from the 7th to the 36tli degrees of N.
latitude, from the eastern limits of the Hindoo
country, to the western limits of China, and
consisting of several different varieties, viz., the
semi-barbarous people of Cassay, Cachar and
Assam, and to the south and east of these, the
Arracanese, Burmese, Peguans, Laos or Shans,
Siamese and Cambojans ; and east of them,
the Anam race, comprising the Cochin-Chi-
nese and Tonquinese.
5. The Chinese. (See China.)
6. Near the Chinese is another great fam-
ily, bearing it some resemblance, and yet a
distinet class, the Japanese. They occupy a
158
ASIA.
country of j^eat extent and fine temperature,
extending from 30" to 45° N. Their color
is tawny, stature short but robust, nose flat-
tish, eyelids thick and pufled, eyes dark, lower
limbs large and thick.
North-cast of China are the Coreans, occi-
pying a peninsula equal in extent with Great
IJritain. They are superior in strength to the
Chinese and Japanese, but inferior in mental
capacity.
7. The inhabitants of two-thirds of the
superficies of Asia, from the seats of the fam-
ilies already specified, to the frozen ocean, re-
main to be' described. These have a common
resemblauce, in some important features ; but
it is only such a resemblance as exists in all
the families already mentioned, from the east-
ern shore of the Atlantic to the eastern con-
fines of Ilindoostan. The first of these races
comprises the inhabitants of Bootan, a stout,
active race, their stature rising occasionally to
six feet. They are a long settled agricultural
race, hanng a peculiar language of their own.
West of these is the Yorkha family, a short,
robust people, of an olive complexion. North
of these, on fhe terrace of the Himalava, at
an elevation of 12,000 to 13,000 feet above
the sea, are the Tibet ian family, having a Tartar
countenance, angular face, broad across the
cheek-bones, small black eyes, and very little
head. They are short, squat, broad-shoulder-
ed, and sluggish both in mind and body.
We come now to the 31ongoIia)i family,
inhabiting the vast plateau and extensive as-
cents between the Himalaya and Altai ranges,
as far as the 140th degree of longitude, and
then between the former and the right bank
of the Amur. Their general features are,
forehead low and slanting ; head square, broad
cheek-bones, chin prominent ; body short,
broad, square, and robust. Hair black, long,
and lank, beard scant. There are two great
divisions of this family, the Eastern and AVest-
crn Tartars, the former being the present lords
of China.
The true Mongols extend westward from
116^ longitude to the sea of Aral, a sweep
of at least 3,000 miles, and embrace the
communities known as Mongols, Kulkas,
Eluths, Ogurs, Kokonors, Kami, and Kalumes.
These were the instruments of the conquests
of Jenghis Khan and his sons. Thoy have
firm and robust bodies, lean and pallid coun-
tenances, high and broad shoulders, short and
di.>itoi-ted ncses, pointed and prominent chins,
a low and deep upper jaw, long teeth, distant
from each other, eyelids stretched out from
the temple to the nose, eyes black and un-
steady, an expression oblique and .stern, ex-
tremities bony and nervous, large and muscu-
lar tlnghs. short legs, and stature equal to the
European. 'J'he country of tiie Mongols is
cold, elevated and dry. few parts of it being
fit for culture, and a great j)ortion of it con-
sisting of deserts or seas of sand. It abounds.
however, in game and wild animals. With
the exception of a very small number, they
live exclusively on animal food ; and their
clothing and dwellings are for the most part
made of animal tegument or fibre. Their
employment consists in tending cattle, the
chase, and war. The native capacity of this
family is sufiiciently attested by the production
of such men as Attila, Jenghis, Timur, llabe,
and KublayKhau ; as well as in the conquest,
retention, and government of China for 200
years.
Between the Altai range and river Amur,
tribes exist almost as numerous as in any
equal extent of the American continent,
and far more distinct in physical form. And
near to, and on the banks of the Amur are
four nations, called Soloni, Kertching, Daguri,
and Natkis, all of which have languages wholly
different from their immediate neighbors, the
Manchoos ; rude, dull, without the knowledge
of letters, living on fish.
Sherbani, the grandson of Jenghis Khan,
led a colony of Mongols into Siberia, amount-
ing to 15,000 families, and his descendants
reigned there for 300 years, till conquered by
the Russians ; so that the Mongols, though
originally foreigners, now form a considerable
part of the population of Siberia. Besides
these, there are a number of families, distinct
from each other, inhabiting these regions.
Among all the native races to the north of the
Altai mountains, letters are wholly unknown,
agriculture is scarcely practiced, and to obtain
food and clothing nearly the whole time of the
people is consumed in fishing and the chase. —
Abridged from McCidloch.
Religion. — Maltebrun gives the following
mournful, but just picture of the moral and re-
ligious condition of the immense population of
this vast continent : " The mental torpor sub-
sisting in combination with some virtuous,
mild, and hospitable feelings, keeps alive the
empire of religious superstition, under the yoke
of which we find all the eastern and central
parts of Asia languishing ; while the Christi-
anity of the Greek Chm-ch slowly penetrates
by the north, and Mohammedanism still flour-
ishes in the western regions. Polygamy, sup-
ported by the same spirit throughout Asia,
with the single exception of Japan, debases
family connections, and deprives life of its en-*
j dearments, by taking from the female all con-
! sideration and influence ; at the same time,
j being averse to the laws of nature, it diminishes
the population, and deteriorates the human
race."
Popidation. — We have no means of ascertain-
ing with any degree of certainty the extent
and population of this vast continent. The
following estimate, which we find in Harpers
new Universal Gazeteer, is probably somewhat
. above the mark :
ASIA.
Turkey in Asia,
Arabia,
Persia,
Hindoostan,
Furtl^er India,
China Proper,
Chinese dependencies
Turkestan,
Russia,
Islands,
Total
area in Eq. inil«e Fopulatii
516,000
834,000
900,000
1,6&5,090
917,575
1,300,000
3,810,000
700,000
5,200,000
1,075,400
13,700,000
10 000,000
16,700,000
168,697,277
25,182,540
367,000,000
76,800.000
12,000,000
7,400,000
55,326,676
16,918,065 752,806,493
159
Pop. according to Religious Profession.
Budhists. .... 360,000.000
Brahministfi, - - - 150,000.000
Mussulmans, .... 130,000,000
Shamans, .... 9,000,000
Sikhs, 5,000,000
Sect of Lao Kiun in China, - 2,500,000
Sect of Confucius, - - - 1,500,000
Sect of Sinto in Japan, - - 1,300,000
Ghebirs, 600,000
Jews, 800,000
Christians of all denominiations, - 50,000,000
TABULAE VIEW OF iHSSIOXS IN ASIA
COUXTRIES AND SOCTETHS.
India, inchiding Ceylon, Burmah, and Siam.
Church Missionary Society,
London Missionary Society,
Gospel Propagation Society,
General Baptist Missionary Society, (Eng.) . . .
Baptist Missionary Society, (Eng.)
English Wesleyan Society,
American Board,
American Baptist Miss. Union, including China,
American Presbyterian Board,
Irish Presbyterians,
Scotch Presbyterians,
German Missionary Societies,
Free-Will Baptists , .
American Missionary Association,
China.
American Board,
Church Missionary Society,
American Episcopal Church,
Southern Baptist Board,
German Societies,
Methodists, North and South,
"Wesleyans,
American Presbyterian Board,
English Presbyterians,
Asiatic Islands.
'Gospel Propagation Society in Borneo, ....
Rhenish Society in Borneo,
Gosner's Society in Java,
Netherlands Society, Amboyna, Celebas, Java, )
and Samarang j
Westirn Asia.
Church Missionary Society,
American Board, in Syria, Assyria, and Persia, .
Among the Jews in Syria,
Totals,.
83
47
48
5
35
37
35
49
25
5
25
60
3
5
206 577
23
24
124
6,182
1.024
4,629
225
1,656
2,137
926
8,873
226
2.179
47
23
68
176 28,372
625
44
81
215
78
1,084
24,036
8,919
5,500
3.492
4,936
8,042
1,682
2,932
9.405
3,274
151
130
62
200
80
146
550
10,000
I «
554
84,168
160
ASSA^I.
Owing to the imperfect reports of the mis-
sions, it is impossible to make such a table as
this complete ; and it is possible that some
slight errors may be discovered in tha statis-
tics ; but it is an approximation sufficiently
near to give a fair view of the present state of
the missionary work on the continent of Asia,
a« compared with its vast population. De-
ducting the 50,000,000 nominal Christians
from the estimate of the population, we have
left about 700,000,000 of Mohammedans,
Jews, and heathens in Asia, which would give
more than 1,000,000 to each missionary. But
then it is to be considered that the modern
missionary enterprise commenced but a little
more than fifty years ago ; and besides these
missionaries, there are now probably not less
than 2.000 native assistants laboring for the
evangelization of their countrymen on the
same field. More than ICOO have been re-
ported ; some of the societies make no reports
of native assistants ; and most of the reports
are very deficient on this head. And then, a
vast amount of preparatory work has been
done in the way of education and the printing
and circulation of books. The 20.000 con-
vcrLs from heathenism, and the 80,000 pupils
in the mission schools, and the millions of
pages of Bible truth in circulation, must be
now exerting a powerful influence in sapping
the foundations of heathenism.
ASSAM : The country known as Assam,
lies on the north-western frontier of Burmah,
and from that frontitr stretches across the
plains of the Brahmaputra, from 70 to 100
miles in breadth towards the Ilimmalaya
mountains. On the north-east it reaches to
the bordtTS of China. Its inhabitants are of
many different races, though they are known
by the common name of S/iuitn.'i or Shons, a
term which has given ri.se to the iMiglish name
Ajvsani. It was formerly an independent state,
but in 1822 it was ine(>r])(irat«d with the Em-
pire of Burmah and in 1^20 it wa.s ceded to
the English. The tribes that inhabit the coun-
try are numerous, and differ widely fmm each
other, the must important ])eing the Axsamcse,
the K/iamtis, the S/Hg/j/wis and the A'agas-.
MiBsiox — American Battist U.mo.v — The
attention of the Board was first directed to
the inhabitants of this country by Captain
Francis Jenkin.s, Commissioner otthe (Jover-
uor-(Jeneral of India for Assam, ^^lis gentle-
man feeling a lively interest in the singular
peojile whom heliad been appointed to govern,
m 1H:{4 addri-ssed a letter to some of his
friends in Calcutta, recpiesting them to invite
some of the missionaries of the American
Baptists to ciiine and settle in the country.
('ai>tain Jenkins also jiromised to contribute
1000 ruptvs for the establishment of a nii.s.sion
on the arrival of the first missitmary, and 1000
more on the arrival of a printinir-pres.-. This
proposal was communicated to the Board of
manager and was favorably rcc ived bv tl., in
being recommended by several special conside-
rations. The language of the people was similar
to the Burman. and the characters used in jnint-
ing were essentially the same. The proposed
mission also appeared to open a nearer access to
China, which was at that time liarred to all
missionary effort by the exclusive policy puN
sued by its government. It was imagined that
while the Imperial officers were carefully ex-
cluding foreigners from tin; ports, the mission-
aries from As.«am might join the caravans that
traded to the interior of China, and thus bear
the (jospel to the very centre of the empire.
AVith views like these, the Board determined
to comply with the request of Captain Jei>-
kins, and immediately referred the matter to
the mi.ssionaries at Maulmain to carry their
plan into execution. It was at the time when
Rev. Mr. Brown and Mr. Cutter, a printer,
had just been obliged to leave Rangoon, and
they were immediately selected to commence
the proposed mission at Sadiya — the place
deemed most eligible fttr the purpo.se. These
gentlemen with their families reached Calcut-
ta in .'September, 1835, where they provided
themselves with a printing-press, a standing-
press, and a suitable supply of paper and oth-
er materials for their work ; securing at the
same time from the Board the assurance of an
additional press and a complete apparatus for
printing to be sent from tliis country. Thus
provided, they embarked at Calcutta, in boats,
on the Brahmaputra, and after a passage of four
months they reached Sadiya on the 23d of
March. 183G. They were kindly received by
Captain Jenkins, who immediately fulfilled his
promise to the mission, and continued for many
years its lil)eral benefactor and constant friend,
Sadiya is the principal town of a district,
bearing the same name. It is beautifully sit-
uated in the north-eastern portion of A.ssani,
al)out 400 miles north of Ava, and half that
distance from the Chinese frontier. It con-
tains a large ])opulation, composed of the sev-
eral races that occupy the country. Among
these people the missionaries immediately pro-
pare<l to commence their labors. So soon as
a suitable building could lie erected, the ladiis
of the mission established schools, Mr.s. Brown
for boys and Mrs. Cutter for girls both of
which were well attended. Meanwhile Mt-
Brown and Mr. Cutter emjiloycd themselves rn
learning the condition of the people, in per-
fecting their ac(|uaintanre with the language,
in the printing of which they decided to adopt
the Roman instead of the Burman or other
oriental alphabet.* Mr. Cutter .soon printi^d
• Tlif i.W-n of iifiiiR the R.imnii nli.»i.ibct In llic printing
of biM.ks ill the limKnntr""" of nidia, »n» nmt ronimfii<i.<\
to til.' iiiiiKioiiiirips ill 1S.J4. by Mr. K. T Tr«>vtlvnn. a rpiv
tli-man connectoa with the (tovcrnnipnt In IVnesI, n di»-
tinifiiUhed orienliil nrholar ami an intc!li|tont and devot.sl
friciitl of ini>!<ion'i. Tliv nietb<«l «»« for ii tinio n.loptpd
bv the nii«-.ionnrie!i of Kpvrral drnominatioiK in India, but
li-w bt-on whoUy nbnndonml. It 1« ofirn rcfi-rn-d to
in the niUsionary corronjwndencc of the time a« Trevel-
ASSAM.
161
a spelling-book for the schools, and Mr. Brown
began to prepare works for the press, both in
the Assamese and Shyan languages.
In April, 1837, Rev. Miles Bronson, and
Rev. Jacob Thomas, with their wives, arrived
at Calcutta as missionaries to Assam. They
had sailed from Boston in the preceding Oc-
tober, having with tliem an additional printing
press, and a full supply of all the materials for
printing. They soon again emljurkcd at Cal-
cutta on the Brahmaputra, for the distant
place of their destination. They had been
several weeks on their jjassage against the ra-
pid current of the river, and had nearly reached
Sadiya, when Mr. Bronson having become dan-
gerously ill of the jungle fever, Mr. Thomas
was hastening forward in a small boat to pro-
cure medical assistance for his associate. He
had already come within sight of the town of
Sadiya, and even of the mission premises, when
two trees, whose roots were united, suddenly
fell from the loosened bank of the river, directs
ly upon the boat in which he was seated,
crushing the boat and causing Mr. Thomas to
drown. A calamity so unexpected could not
but darken the prospects of the mission. A
few days afterwards, Mrs. Thomas and her as-
sociates reached Sadiya, where they were wel-
comed by the mission families.
So soon as the newly-arrived mi.ssionaries
were prepared to enter upon their appropriate
lal)orri, it was found expedient to distribute
their labors among the several races of the
province. Mr. Brown gave his attention prin-
cipally to the Assamese and the Khamtis ;
Mr. Bronson to the Singphos ; while INlr. Cut-
ter was constantly occupied at the two presses
and in the supervision of the schools of the
mission. It should also be remarked that a
leading object had in view by the Board in
establishing the mission in Assam was, if pos-
sible, to penetrate the northern parts of Bur-
mah and Siam, and also the upper provinces
of China. In accordance with this general
design, Mr. Kincaid, of the Burman mission,
attempted a journey from Ava to Sadiya, in
1837. He was able only to reach Mo-gaung,
whence he returned to Ava, through the many
perils of a general insurrection of the provin-
ces of the north. For the same purpose, also,
the missionaries at Sadiya made several excur-
sions eastward, and proceeded almost to the con-
fines of China. Tliose excursions led to no
other result than to make them acquainted
with new multitudes of heathen, who were
already accessible to the preaching of the
gospel. The entrance to Burmah proper and
to China, however, continued to be controlling
objects of inquiry and aspiration both to the
missionaries and the Board, till the barriers
that so long sluit them out of these countries
were finally broken down.
In May, 1 838, Mr. Bronson and his family
removed to Jaipur, an important post of the
East India Company, on the river Dihinir.
11
three or four days' journey south-east from Sa-
diya. It was in this region that the Sing-
phos, the people to whom he was particularly
sent, were the most numerous. It was also
in the immediate vicinity of the Nagas, a
people living among the hills, who had been
visited l)y the missionaries, and had awakened
the interest of the English residents. Mr.
Bronson was warmly welcomed to Jaipur by
Mr. Bruce, a friend of the mission, who was
then residing there as the Company's agent
for promoting the culture of the tea-plant.
Other British officers and residents then at
Jaipur contributed liberally towards the estab-
lishment of the new station, and the personal
comfort of the missionary and his family ; and
several of the ladies of the post joined with
Mrs. Bronson in opening schools and teaching
the heathen children who attended them. At
about the same period, Captain Jenkins, in
addition to his previous benefactions, also con-
tributed 500 rupees for replenishing the fonts
of type, and offered 500 more towards the
support of a superintendent of the schools, in
ca.se one was appointed by the Board. The
interest which this gentleman manifested in
the plans and operations of the mission is a
high testimonial to the beneficent results which
it was producing among the people over whom
he ruled. Not only was he the constant ad-
viser of the missionaries in all their enterprises,
but he often addressed communications directr
ly to the Board, suggesting such measures as
he deemed important to its growth and pros-
perity, and coupling with his suggestions the
most liberal offers of aid in carrying them
into execution.
In 1839, the labors of the mission at both
its stations were for a time interrupted by an
insurrection among the Khamtis, who had unit^
ed portions of other tribes in a league against
the power of the English. They began with
an attack upon Sadiya, and a large number
of the English soldiers and residents were slain
in the fury of the onset. The missionaries at
this station fled to the cantonments of the
troops, where they remained in safety till the
insurrection was quelled, when they removed
to Jaipur. At the time of the insurrection,
Mr. Bronson was absent on a tour among the
Xagas, among whom he was preparing to es-
tablish a station. He immediately hastened
back to Jaipur, where he found the schools
broken up, and the whole population distract-
ed with alarms. The whole body of the mis-
sionaries being now at Jaipur, it was deemed
best to remove thither also the entire property
of the mission, and abandon altogether the
station at Sadiya. The expenses of the re-
moval were generously defrayed by Mr. Bruce ;
but in consequence of the agitation and alarm
produced among the people by the insurrec-
tion, it was several montlis before the mission
fully recovered from the shock it had sus-
tained. Sadiva was soon afterwards aban-
162
ASSAM.
donecl by the government officers and English
residents, most of whom also removed to Jai-
pur. Meanwhile the missionaries, in the sus-
pension of their external labors, ' devoted
themselves with the more assiduity to the
study of the language, the preparation of
tracts and books, and the translation of the
Scriptures. In the spring of 1839, the Gospel
of Matthew, translated by Mr. Brown, was
printed at the mission press.
In January, 1840, Mr. Bronson made a
second visit to the Nagas among the hills
around Jaipur. Finding them now in a quiet
condition, and apparently eager for instruction,
he determined immediately to settle among
them, and establish a branch of the mission.
He was greatly encouraged in this undertak-
ing by several English oflicers and residents,
of whom Mr. Bruce contributed 500 rupees
and Capt. Hannay 250 for the establishment
of schools. In the following March Mr.
Bronson, having made the necessary prepara-
tions, removed his family to the country of the
Nagas, and commenced his labors among the
people.
In May, Rev. Cyi'us Barker and his wife,
and Miss Rhoda Bronson, sister of Rev. Mr.
Bronson, were added to the mission. They
had sailed from the United States with an ap-
pointment specially to the Nagas ; but finding
that Mr. Bronson had already begun the sta-
tion among the hills, Mr. Barker decided to
devote himself to the Assamese, while Miss
Bronson soon went to join her brother at his
new residence. But the several departments
of the mission were scarcely organized when
changes and afflictions began to fall upon
them. Mr. and Mrs. Brown were obliged
temporarily to leave the mission to recruit
their health. Mr. Bronson soon found the
climate of the hills exceedingly unhealthy ;
and on account of the severe illness of mem-
bers of his family, he was soon obliged to re-
turn to Jaipur, where Miss Bronson died of
fever in December, 1840, before she had
scarcely begun her work as a missionary. Mr.
Barker, after acquiring the language at Jai-
pur, selected as the place of his residence Sib-
sagor, a flourishing post of the East India
Company on the Brahmaputra, about three
days' journey below Jaipur. He settled here
with his family in May, 1841, and in the fol-
lowing July was followed by Mr. and Mrs.
Brown. This place proved to be particularly
favorable to the culture of the tea-plant, and
soon withdrew most of the English residents
from Jaipur,— from which, without entirely
abandoning it as a station, the missionaries at
length also removed to Sibsagor. Mr. Bron-
son, however, went to Nowgong, a flourishing
town in Central Assam, to which he was spe-
cially invited by Captain G. T. Gordon, an
English officer who had long been a friend and
benefactor of the mission. The missionaries,
too, at all the stations, finding the other races
comparatively inaccessible to the gospel, de-
termined to restrict their labors to the Assam-
ese population. At Nowgong, Mrs. Bronson,
with the aid of Captain Gordon, soon opened
a large mission school, in which she employed
as assistants two native converts from Calcut-
ta. This school still continued to flourish,
and has been productive of much religious
benefit to its members.
Meanwhile Mr. Cutter still continued at
Jaipur, conducting the presses belonging to
the mission. The Gospels of Matthew and
John, and also the Acts of the Apostles, had
been translated by Mr. Brown, and, together
with school books prepared in various lan-
guages, were now printed for the use of the
numerous schools. In the winter of 1842-3,
the insurrectionary spirit began again to show
itself among the peoi^le, and Jaipur was for
several weeks exposed to attacks from parties
of insurgents. During this time Mr. Cutter
was obliged to take down the presses, and con-
ceal them with the other property belonging to
the mission. On the restoration of trancjuil-
lity they were again set up and put in opera-
tion ; but the events which had occurred, and
the exposed condition of the mission property,
decided the missionaries on the total abandon-
ment of .laipur, and the removal of the sta-
tion to Sibsagor. This was accomplished
with the approbation of the Board in Novem-
ber, 1843. At about the same time, in order
to prevent a concentration of the mission at
too few points, Mr. Barker removed into Cen-
tral Assam, first to Tezpur, and then to Gow-
ahatti, the residence of Major Jenkins — for
this was now his military rank, — and the most
important town in the province. Here a sta-
tion was begun, and Jaipur was wholly aban-
doned.
The three stations of Sibsagor, Nowgong,
and Gowahatti, into which the mission was
now divided, still continue to be the centres of
its operation, which have been for some time
past entirely restricted to the Assamese popu-
lation, instead of embracing the Khamtis, the
Singphos, and the Nagas, as was originally
designed. A church was constituted at each
of the stations soon after its establishment,
and these churches have gone gradually for-
ward in winning converts to the gospel from
the heathen population of the country. At
each of these stations, also, the work of preach-
ing, translating, and teaching has been con-
stantly prosecuted by the missionaries, with
only such hindrances as usually attend the dis-
semination of the gospel among men. In ad-
dition to the strictly religious schools which
are directly supported by the mission, there
are also others which are sustained in a great
degree by English residents ; and though
taught generally by native assistants, either
belonging to the country or brought from Cal-
cutta, are yet under the general care of the
mission, and are to be numbered among its
ASSAM.
163
fruits. These schools have become very nu-
merous, and are widely scattered among the
villages of the country. But the school to
which the missionaries attach the most import-
ance, and which has been productive of the
best results, is the Orphan Institution at Now-
gong. It aims to collect from all parts of the
province destitute orphan children, and train
them to useful occupations and to a knowledge
of the gospel. It went into operation in 1844,
and for several years past it has numbered
from fifty to seventy members. Its expenses
for several years were wholly defrayed, and are
still very much lightened, by the generous
contributions of the philanthropic English
residents in Assam. Many of its pupils have
become Christians, and several have been
employed as assistants in the mission. Prior
to 184G, only here and there a native convert
had been baptized, l)ut in the course of that
year seven of the elder pupils of the Nowgong
institution, and several other persons at the
same station, were admitted to the church.
At the close of the year 1847, the church at
Gowahatti numbered twenty-seven members,
and those of the three stations contained to-
gether upwards of sixty native disciples.
In 1846, Mrs. Brown visitetl the United
States, and awakened an increa.sed interest in
behalf of the mission among the churches and
the members of the Board, and early in the fol-
lowing year, two missionaries. Rev. A. H.
Danforth, and Rev, Ira J. Stoddard, offered
their services to the managers, and were ap-
pointed to Assam — the former to join the sta-
tion at Gowahatti ; the latter to relieve Mr.
Bronson in the charge of the orphan institu-
tion at Nowgong. They arrived at the places
of their destination early in the spring of 1848.
In the following year, Mr. and Mrs. Brown,
and Mrs. Cutter, were obliged, by ill health, to
come for a season to the United States. They
remained here until the summer of 1850, when
they returned to their stations, accompanied
by Rev. Messrs. Whiting and Ward, and their
wives, and Miss Shaw, a teacher, all of whom
W'Cre appointed to the mission. They reached
Assam in the following June. Mr. (Jr. Dauble,
a gentleman who had been employed as a
teacher at Dacca, in Bengal, by the Basle Mis-
sionary Society, came to Assam in 1850, and
having become a Baptist, was temporarily con-
nected with the Nowgong institution. He was
afterwards ordained as a missionary, and in 1851,
married to Miss Shaw. He died at Nowgong
in March, 185.3. Rev, Cyrus Barker, °also,
after a long period of declining health, em-
barked for the United States, and died at sea,
in January, 1850, His family now live in this
country, Mr. Cutter, the printer, was also
dismissed from the mission in the autumn of
1852.
ITie translation of the New Testament in
Assamese, was completed by Mr. Brown, and
printed at Sibsagar in 1849. Since then it
has passed through other editions ; and s^-eral
books of the Old Testament have also been
printed, together with a long list of boolvs to
be used in the schools. The English ohicers
and residents in the province, still continue to
evince their wonted interest in the prosperity
of the mission, and in the results whieh it aims
to accomplish for the people. The religion of
the Brahmins has, for some time, been losing
its hold on the popular mind, and the impres-
sion is widely prevailing, not only in Assam,
but in other parts of India, that it must give
place to the religion which is taught by the
English, This however is only a negative and
comparatively unimportant result. The mis-
sionaries have still before them their great
work, of persuading the people to embrace the
gospel — a work for which, thus far, a prepara-
tion only has been made, but which has of
itself scarcely begun to be accomplished. — See
Professor Gammcll's History of Am. Baptist
Missmis, and recent Reports of Managers of
Missionary Union. — Pkof, W. Gammell.
TABULAR
VIEW.
Sli.sriionaries and
As.sistants.
i
a
e
1
s
a
6
m
g
Minis-
ters.
I Jiy Teach-
ers, &c.
Scholars.
a
s
■c
o
a
<
1
1
a.'
a
Si
ti
a
•S
a
10
48
15
Day
Sch':B
.2
a
Sibsagor.. .
Nowfionp. .
Gowahutti
1841
1841
184;j
2
2
2
6
1
1
2
3
2
7
Ich.
2|
•216
Totals..
79
8 Sch'Ls.
289
ATHENS : See Greece.
AUCKLAND : Capital of New Zealand,
in lat. 360 51' S. long. 174° 45' E. A station
of the Wesleyan Missionary Society com-
menced in 1823. Population 1800, has now 4
missionaries, 5 chapels, 26 local preachers, 53
teachers, 291 members, 492 scholars, and 810
attendants on public worship. Auckland con-
tains besides a college and seminary for the
education of the sons of the Wesleyan Mis-
sionaries in Australia and Polynesia, having
now 70 students ; and there is also a native in-
stitution, giving the benefit of«,n education in
the English and Maori languages to native
young men, to fit them for future usefulness.
Also, a station of the Church Missionary So-
ciety,
AUSTRAL ISLANDS : A group of five
islands in the Southern Pacific, between 22^
27' and 27° 36' S, lat., and 144° 11' and 150°
47' W. long. The names of the islands are,
Raivavai, Tubuai, Rurutu, Rimatara, and
Rapa.
AUSTRALASIA : The Encyclopedia
164
AUSTRALIA.
Britannica gives the following as the bounda-
ries of Australasia : " Take the equator as the
northern line, from 132° to 175<? E. long. ;
continue a line on the meridian to the 55th
parallel, (bending a little to take in New Zea-
land,) for the eastern ; a line on the same par-
allel to 65° E.'long. for the southern; and a
slanting point on the equator, so as to include
Kerguelands Land, and pass on the eastern
side of Timorlaut, Ceram, Mysol, and Sal-
walty, for the western boundary ; those lines
will embrace the whole of the Australasian
Islands, Viz., Australia or New Holland, Yau
Dieraan's land or Tasmania, New Guinea,
and the Louiscade Archipelago, New Britain,
New Ireland and neighl)oriug islands, Solo-
mon's Islands, New Hebrides, New Caledonia,
New Zealand and isles to the southward, Ker-
gueland Islands, St. Paul and Amsterdam, and
numerous coral reefs and islets.
AUSTEALIA, or NEW HOLLAND lies
between 10° 30' and 39- S. lat. and between
1120 20' and 153° 40' E. long. Its extreme
length is about 2(303 mile^«, and its average width
1200, making about 2,690,810 square miles ;
the continent of Europe embracing 3,684,841,
which will give the reader a comparative
idea of the size of this new continent. The
prevailing features of the country are barren
and wooded plains, traversed by long ridges of
precipitous, but not very lofty mountains,
and rivers which often spread into marshes,
and do not continue their course to any great
distance in proportion to the extent of the
country. There are few deep bays ; nor does
the sea, so far as yet discovered, receive any
river, whose magnitude corresponds to that of
the land. Great portions of that part which
has been explored are unfit for cultivation, or
even for traveling. There are, however, fine
meadoAV tracts, on a grand scale, where the
richest herbage grows spontaneously, and
where industry may raise the most plentiful
crops. In its geographical features and in
some of its productions, Australia differs wide-
ly from all other portions of the known world.
The discovery of gold has recently attracted
considerable attention, and drawn great num-
bers of emigrants from Great Britain to that
far off land.
Inhabitants. — We have no definite and relia-
ble information as to the number of the abo-
riginal population ; but it is supposed to be
about 15,000. Major T. S. Mitchell, however,
who has made three tours into the interior,
thinks there are less than 6,000. This gentle-
man expresses a high opinion of their charac-
ter. He says that, in manners and general
intelligence, they appear superior to any class
of white rustics he had seen. The tribes of
the northern Coast of Australia possess a
peculiar interest, on account of their proximity
to the Indian Archipelago. Here, within a
circle of 500 miles, may be found a large num-
ber of distinct tribes, varying in color from
the black of the negro to the freckled-yellow
of the Polynesian mountaineer, and differing
in social condition as much as in person.
The British colony of New South Wales
was originally a penal settlement, to which
criminals were transported from Great Britain.
After this, it was opened to independent and
bounty emigrants. And, within a few yeara
past, the discovery of gold has caused a great
rush of emigration. In 1810, the population
was but 8,923. In 1851, it was 264,000.
MSSIOXS.
United Brethren. — The Moravians estab-
lished a mission to the aborigines of Austra-
lia in 1849, and have one missionary laboring
at Lake Boga ; but no specific results are yet
reported.
Society for Propagating the Gospel in
Foreign Parts.— New South Wales having
been occupied by the British Governnjent
as a penal settlement, chaplains w'ere ap-
pointed as their services were required. In
1795 the Society began, on the recommenda-
tion of the local chaplain, to pay two school-
masters in the settlement. In 1798, Rev. 0.
Haddock became the Society's first mission-
ary in Norfolk Island. In 1825, when the
population of Australia was 31,133, there were
only 10 chaplains maintained by the GoA'ern-
ment, and but 14 in 1837, when the population
had more than doubled. In 1836, Rev. Wil-
liam G. Boughton was consecrated bishop, and
£2,000 were granted by the Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge, and £1,000 by
the Society for Propagating the Gospel in
Foreign Parts, to aid the work ; and soon
after 10 missionaries were sent out by the lat-
ter Society. Year after year, more clergymen
were sent out, and considerable grants of
money were placed by the Society at the
Bishop's disposal. In 1843 the Society was
assisting to maintain 40 clergymen in Austra-
lia, and 10 in Yan Dieman's Land ; and in
1851, the number aided was about 50. In 1847,
the Diocese was divided, and three new sees,
Newcastle, Adelaide, and Melbourne were con-
stituted. The increase of clergy since that
time will be seen by the following table :
1847 1S50
Newcastle .... 17 • 27
Adelaide .... 11 22
Melbourne
1851
20
A meeting has been held, attended by the
four bishops of Australia, and the bishops of
New Zealand and Yan Dieman's Land, and a
Board of Missions constituted, for the propa-
gation of the Gospel among the aboriginal
inhabitants of the Australian continent and
the islands of the Western Pacific.
Wesleyan Missionary Society.— The Wes-
leyan Society opened a mission in New South
Wales, in 1815 ; in South Australia in 1838 ;
and the following year they began their opera-
tions in Western Australia, at a place called
AUSTRALIA.
166'
Pcrtb. Fifty years ago, New South "Wales
was a penal settlement. There were a few
thousand settlers, also, scattered over the coun-
try, engaged chiefly in rearing sheep and in
agricultural pursuits. The rest of the popula-
tion were aborigines. A few of the settlers
who had been Methodists in England, and had
gone to Australia either as farmers or as school
teachers, finding themselves without religious
services, and being surrounded by criminals
on the one hand, and by heathens on the other,
dreaded the consequences to themselves and
their children ; and in the year 1812 one of
these settlers addressed a letter to the Mis-
sionary Committee imploring help. The state
of society was frightful in the extreme. The
most debasing crimes were openly perpetrated ;
and when any one remonstrated, the reply was,
" It is the citstom of tfie country ! " The writer
of the letter alluded to, pleads most earnestly,
for himself, and in behalf of the little com-
pany associated with him, and also for the
aborigines ; and intimates that light might
yet break forth from that place to the thous-
ands of isles by which Australia is surrounded.
Such was the foundation of the Wesleyan Mis-
sions to Australia. What finite mind can
grasp the results of those labors which were
then so earnestly invited ! A day is coming
ivhen the great Southern Commonwealth,
Duilt up by Gold, and Commerce, and Agri-
culture, and Manufactures, may stand almost
peerless among the nations of the earth, repos-
ing upon freedom and evangelical faith, and
looking back with meek adoration upon the
humility of her origin !
The first class meeting ever held in Austra-
lia was on the evening of March 6, 1812 ; and
by July, a division of that little band had
formed three such small companies, united to
pray and exhort one another to " work out
their own salvation," two at Sydney, and one
at Windsor. " We have here," says the writer
of the letter, " in society, the following persons:
in Sydney, Mr. John H., who leads a class in
his own house, consisting of Mrs. H., Mrs. B.,
and Mrs. T., and three of the senior girls in the
school. Mr. B. has also a class in his house, on
a Friday evening, consisting of Mr. H., J. F.,
T. J., and a soldier or two of the 75th Regi-
ment. Our meetings are generally very com-
fortable and profitable. At Windsor we have
a class under the care of Mr. E., consisting of
six. Mr. E. is a pious, sensible young man,
sent here from Ireland, where he was converted
while under sentence of death for forgery. He
was bred to the bar. Being of an humble, af-
fectionate disposition, and zealous in the cause
of God, I doubt not, (especially could his re-
proach be wiped away,) he would make a useful
man among us. He hae been employed for some
months past in teaching school, and he goes
some miles into the country on the Sunday,
where he reads the Church Liturgy, and ex-
pounds, or preaches, to the settlers, several of
whom are thankful for his labors." Such wag
the first class, and such was the first preacher
of Methodism in Australia ! This little band
of 20 Christians assembled at Windsor, on the
3rd of April, to hold their first Love Feast.
They enjoyed a season of great blessing, and
at the close of the service, they resolved them-
selves into a Committee of Consultation, to
see what could be done to obtain the ordinances
of the Gospel for themselves, and the blessings
of an itinerant ministry for Australia. They
appointed one of their number to address the
Missionary Committee in London, on their be-
half, and to plead for the sake of the perishing
thousands of settlers, convicts, and savages
around them, to send them a missionary ; at
the same time engaging to meet his support.
The communication bears date July 20, 1812.
And thus originated that action, which, un-
der the blessing of God, has resulted, (1st) In
the establishment of one of the largest of the
British Colonial Churches, having had an inde-
pendent Conference, and nearly 100,000 persons
under its pastoral care ; which (2d) has also
rescued from sin and a sinner's doom, hundreds
of those whose crimes had driven them from
their native land ; for the Missionaries have
sought out the unhappy, branded exiles ; and
in many a delightful instance have those
" banished ones," in " the land of their captivi-
ty," repented beneath the influence of Chris-
tian admonition, and found mercy at the hand
of God ; and the morning of eternity alone
will tell how many of those children of crime
and punishment shall be welcomed in Heaven,
by the parents and friends, who in shame and
despair had seldom dared to mention their
names on earth ; and, (3) such was the agency
from which originated the Australian and
Polynesian Wesleyan Missions, to the abori-
ginies of the southern hemisphere, and which
this day yields (including members, scholars,
and regular hearers,) a result of more than
25,000 christianized heathens, to the pastoral
care of the Wesleyan Missionary Society.
" What hath God wrought !" To Him alone
be all the glory !
In answer to their request, the Missionary
Committee sought out a suitable man, in the
person of Mr. Leigh, who arrived at Australia
in August, 1815. He was joylully received,
and was favored with great and increasing
prosperity. Soon three chapels were erected,
at Sydney, Winsdor 35 miles, and Castlereagh,
50 miles from Sydney, and four Sunday-schools
were commenced, a circuit was formed, era-
bracing 15 preaching stations, extending over
150 miles of the colony. ]\Ir. Lawry was sent
to help Mr. Leigh, in the following year. The
Committee say in the report, " As many of the
aboriginal natives of the country are occa-
sionally met with by Mr. Leigh on his excur-
sions, it is hoped that, on the arrival of Mr.
Lawry, not only will the calls of the settlers
for religious help be met, but something effec-
166
AUSTRALIA.
tual be done by the brethren for the civiliza-
tion and Christian instruction of the natives
themselves. Mr. Lawry was encouraged by
the Committee to make the atteinpt, and to
consider this one of the objects of his mission."
In 1817, the missionaries had the pleasure of
entertaining eight missionary brethren, (among
whom was tjiat devoted man who twenty-two
years afterwards became " The Martyr of Er-
romanga,") sent out by the London Missionary
Society, to what was then called, Otaheite.
During their visit to the Wesleyan mission
stations in Australia, they zealously engaged in
preaching the Gospel, and conducted them-
selves toward the Missionaries, and the work
in which they were employed, in such a manner
as to leave behind them " a sweet savor of
Christ."
The Eev. Walter Lawry arrived in Sydney,
May 1, 1818, and was joyfully met by Mr.
Leigh. The ])opulation of the colony was
then about 20,000, of whom not one in five
had any oi^portunity of attending public wor-
ship ; and in some districts the runaway con-
victs, who prowled around the homes of the
settlers, made it dangerous to leave their resi-
dences to go any distance to the house of God,
even had there been places of worship provided.
The itinerancy, therefore, was the only mode
of searching out these destitute people. There
were at this time only four chaplains in all
the colony ; and it is due to truth and charity
to state that these clerical gentlemen welcomed
the Methodist itinerants to their adopted coun-
try with hearty good will, and showed them-
selves ready on all occasions to assist them.
The missionaries had great trials to pass
through. The roads were few, the rides long,
and the lodgings often very indifferent. Fre-
quently had they to lie on boards or on the
ground, with their saddle-bags for a pillow,
their only covering being their top-coat. But
the cause of God was triumphing, and this
reconciled them to every privation. In such
circumstances and with such encouragement,
"Labor was rest, and pain was .sweet."
The cause of God gained strength. Chapels
were erected, churches and congregations gath-
ered, and missionaries multiplied to meet the
growing necessities of this great work. But
here we must leave the delightful record of
prosperity, as the great object of this publica-
tion is to trace the rise and progress of the
Christian religion among the heathen.
The providence of God overruled the mis-
sions in Australia so as to accomplish this
great end ; for while the Gospel was gaining
its triumphs among the Anglo-Saxon settlers
and the convicts, and thus turning a colony
which was once literally " a den of thieves,"
into a peaceful Christian community, the at-
tention of these renewed and enlightened peo-
ple was turned in pity toward the degraded
aborigines around them, as well as to those
heathen in the isles of the South Seas, with
which they now began to have commercial
relations. Accordingly in 1820, a fourth mis-
sionary was appointed for New South AVales,
whose labors were to be devoted exclusively
to the aboriginal population, and whoso civil-
ization and moral improvement were then
considered by many to be utterly hopeless
An institution for the children of the aborigi
nal natives had been established at Paramatta,
under the Governor's auspices ; allotments of
ground for cultivation were made ; and an
annual general friendly meeting was estab-
lished by proclamation. This meeting was
well attended by most of the tribes in the col-
ony. They were kindly treated, and good im-
pressions were made upon their minds ; but it
was found that unless Christian missionaries
were obtained, to reside among them, who
" would have compassion on the ignorant, and
on them that are out of the way," and teach
them " the path of life," little good could
otherwise be accomplished. The Governor
nobly ofiered to bear the expense for two years
out of his private purse, and the Wesleyan
Missionary Society supplied the man.
Mr. Walker commenced with a tribe who
understood English, and through whom he
endeavored to acquire the native language.
The commencement of the mission was very
encouraging. The fact of a missionary being
appointed expressly for their benefit and in-
struction, impressed them with surprise and
conciliated their regard. The only object of
worship to which Mr. Walker found them dis-
posed to pay any adoration was the waxing
moon. They were also much influenced by
fear of the evil spirit, and had a terror of
darkness. But the missionary had hard work
to make any impression whatever upon them.
Nevertheless, though they had sunk so low,
they so much the more needed the application
of "that only power which could awaken the
torpor of their minds, and conquer their savage
habits. As a sample of some of the difficul-
ties which our missionary had to encounter
with his flock of wild Papoos, take the follow-
ing : Mr. Walker says, " They are very idle
and vagrant ; and the colonists often encour-
age their vices. For instance, if they cut
wood, or do any other trifling work for them,
they are rewarded by the colonists with what
they call buU ; sometimes this is composed of
a mixture of spirituous liquors, and at others
it is the washing of liquor puncheons. When
they are permitted, they take a bucket of boil-
ing water, put it into the puncheon, when they
agitate it until it has drawn out the strength
of the liquor. They then surround the pun-
cheon and drink till they are intoxicated.
Quarreling of course ensues. I was lately re-
turning from Paramatta to Sydney, having
visited the Native Institution, when I fell in
with a tribe of these revelers. Some were not
at all intoxicated, others were fearfully so;
AUSTRALIA.
167
but both the drunken and the sober knew me.
I asked them to go into the woods, knowing
if the convicts met them they would be ex-
cited to fight, and probably to murder one
another ; all followed me. But such a noise I
never heard before ; and so much wanton bar-
barity I never witnessed. The men would
take their ivaddies, which are made of hard
wood, about three feet long, and four or five
inches in circumference at the end, and strike
the heads of their women with such violence
that I expected nothing less than the death of
some of them, as the husbands stood up to
defend their wives. When one man lifted up
his waddy to strike another, I stepped in be-
tween them. I then turned round and found
another bleeding most profusely. Before I
had wiped away the blood from the head of
one, another would be in danger. At last I
declared I would not live with so quarrelsome
a people. This produced a clamor which made
the woods ring, and all vociferated, " Pai'son,
do stay," a hundred times repeated. This
threat of leaving them,, acted like oil on the
angry waters. It ended the row ; and all
proceeded peaceably to their homes. Though
degraded to such an extent, yet they were not
willing to lose their best earthly friend. They
had become conscious of his value. Mr. Walk-
er employed all his strength in visiting them
at their temporary settlements, gaining their
confidence, and giving them elements of in-
struction. He established preaching, and class
and prayer meetings among them. He also
kept a school, where he taught the children.
Some fruit of his labor was given him. One
youth in particular, of the name of Thomas,
became truly converted to God, and soon learn-
ed to read the Bible, and began to be useful
in holding meetings. But he sickened and
died, as did also another equally pious, though
not so efficient as Thomas. Both of these
youths died well — " the first-fruits " of the Aus-
tralian aborigines to Christ. But here a new
difficulty arose. They are so superstitious that
they believe the place where one has died to
be equally fatal to themselves. They therefore
fled from the mission house, lest they also
should die. This dispersion, and the ill-health
of the missionary, together with the unsettled
habits of this tribe, and the vices they had ac-
quired by their intercourse with the lower
classes of the colonists, all proved unfriendly
to this enterprise, and the committee resolved
to try what could be done among those tribes
which were located in the interior and more
distant parts of the country, and which, by
their position, were more out of the reach of
many of those counteracting causes to which
allusion has been made. They therefore open-
ed a mission at Wellington Bay, where there
were six tribes, the Bathurst, the Murrylong,
the Niiry, the Bendjanz, the Mudjee, and the
My awl.
Anions: these trib&s the atrents of the So-
ciety labored for a time, but with small suo
cess, owing chiefly to their migratory hab-
its, joined to their want of appreciation of
those means which were adopted for their
benefit. Had the committee been able to
have incurred the expense of adopting some
vigorous and extensive plan of localizing the
tribes, and thus bringing them under constant
and regular instruction, success, on a large
scale, might have been realized. But they
were unable to do this, and the mission to
these people was therefore suspended in 1828.
But the committee, finding themselves in a
better position in 1836, again renewed their
efibrts among the Australian aborigines, and
thi'ee missionaries were sent out. They loca-
ted themselves, two at Port Philip, in South
Australia, and the other at Peii.h, on Swan
Kiver, in Western Australia. These missions
have been blest with considerable success, and
have been strengthened froni time to time by
an increase of agents.
In 1838 a mission among the aborigines
was commenced at a place called Bimtingdale,
(now called Geelong) in Australia Felix, and
two missionaries were placed there. The gov-
ernment kindly donated a tract of land for the
use of the natives brought under Christian in-
struction. From that time, to the present,
considerable prosperity, mingled with many
trials, has attended their labors. The mission-
aries have mastered the languages of the na-
tives ; schools have been opened at each sta-
tion ; the printing-press has also been brought
into requisition ; and school-books, with Cat-
echisms and the Holy Scriptures, printed for
their benefit. An institution for training na-
tive young men for usefulness among their own
tribes, is in operation at Perth, in Western
Australia. It has now been open for about
eight years, and has from twenty to thirty
students.
Farms have been attached to each of these
three missions, and also sheep-raising, by which,
not only is a large part of the expense of the
missions provided for, but the tribes which have,
in each case, settled on the mission reserve, are
thereby trained to remain in a settled home,
where they are stimulated to industry, and en-
joy those comforts of life, which, in their hea-
then state, they never knew. At each station,
delightful instances of the saving power of the
Gospel are constantly witnessed among these
once degraded people, who, 30 years ago, were
regarded as almost, if not altogether, beyond
the reach of civilization or renewal. They are
now beginning to repay the labor and suffer-
ings endured on their behalf, and have been
thus brought into connection with that Christi-
anity which stands as the only barrier between
them and utter destruction.
The statistics of the mission to the aborigines
are not separated, in the following table, from
those which have reference to the English
population.
168
AUSTRALIA.
pnv sjaqtnaj^
Suipnpm 'djqs
s^PTipno't^v JO "ON
£ o
•sax9g
T^oq JO SJTSIOqOg
■Sva JO jaqratVN
■siooqog
-jCb(I jo jaqtanjj
•saxas qjoq
JO SJ'Eloqog-qitjq
-qug JO jaqcani.j
■siooqog-qjBq
-q'Bg JO jaqranKj
•djqsaaquiajil
■joj iBiJj, no
pajipaaooy pun
\\n^^ JO aaqninu
ooooo o oooooo
oooioo o 292223
o o o o
o o •* o
oooooo
oooooo
I-t lO to t--^ o
I M O O O O to
< r^ Ci to O t- '
to p C
00 'M O
o o o o t- >n
O O (N OD i-H i-l
CO -* 1-1 C^ 1-1 1-1
CO O r-( CO O
,._..._ _ O O IM O CC O
COOCOt-4"* en i-l'*'*rHi»>0
C^ CI (N iH iH C^
O O >o O C-l O
•«* rf ui CO tc -di
Cl-^OOO O OOOOOO
00a0rHO»O t— OiCOCOi— t**^
o o >o
O O „ CO
o o o o >c o
to Tl* to »0 U5 t^
•^ CS 00 b-
iH eo 1-1 • iM • c
<C0O O rHOtOOCOO
. JrHO to U3r - " — -~
■<1< 00 CO C« CO IH CO
• COOOi— *0 to lOt-Jr^fMOOS
O O O ai t^ »
O O C-1 00 rH 1
CO >ffl r-lCN iH 1
OOOd'^O CO 00 rl -^ iH CO <N
03-* CO r-(
c»(^^r-l(^^r^ o <Mco .coci
o o iH >n
to >n o to '^ 00
t-OO^CO 05 r^ift-^o^i— *C10
lO -* '^ »o
O to 00 -* CO IM
■^ tc to to CO o
(?1 C)rH iH
t-OtOOO-^ C^ OOiOCOi
!N o> o >n p-i-*
o cs d
fe'2'^
•s^u'vrjsTSsv
pnB sauBuoissij^
•SaOT!I<I-3uiqOB3JJ
jaq}0 JO jaqtnn^
•fe'iadBqo
JO aoqmni^
e
IN ■* CO m o o
to 00 <N CO CO r-l
CI t— 03 *0
C-1 to 00 01 CO to
CO -* IH CO 11 1-1
CI CD d -co
CI C^ CI iH CI CI CI
l-fCICOCOtO t^ rJ-t-OOlClCO
. d to 1-1 1-4 CI
•"♦Oicitoto lo •^irsTjtT-tcocoii
r-l in CO iH
00 0> 1* d CI ^
C^ <P CJ rt ,
re g.
2§a
S -o ^
fa cTp
2 g
bp'3
■3 a
53
5 S^
1— ' ci CO "^ lo to* i^ 00 03 o 1— I CI
CO -t
<!OPhO
a
S . . . .
g O to t- CO
p l-lr^r-l^H
<1
E "S '3 a g 3 "S
F oi cs iH ci CO ^
P i-( Cl d d d d
AVA— BAPTIST MISSIONAliY SOCIETY.
Wj
It is to be lamented that the rapid in-
flux of the Anglo-Saxon race, during- the
past five or six years, has made serious
encroachment upon their little settlements,
and upon the means adopted for their wel-
fare; and which has also left the aborigi-
nal missions uuaugmented, in the anxiety
of the committee to provide ministers and
Christian institutions for the gold seekers and
others, who have of late flocked by thousands
to Australia. But it is to be hoped that when
" the gold fever " is over, and society settles
down into calmness, and begins its efforts to
improve the country of their adoption, the
Anglo-Saxon Christians of Australia, which
are°uow being counted by tens of thousands,
will remember in mercy those aborigines in
whose country they have found a home of
comfort and of wealth. It was worthy the
wisdom of llim " who worketh all things after
the counsel of his own will," to convert " the
hid treasures" of Australia into a lure by
which should be drawn to that far-off land, a
Protestant population, whose evangelical zeal,
at some future day, will convert the millions
in the Isles of Malaysia and Polynesia, to the
faith of Christ. Already are the Wesleyans
of Australia moving in this great enterprise.
They have guaranteed soon to sustain all their
ministers, now nearly sixty in number ; they
have also received from the parent body a
separate and independent ecclesiastical organi-
zation ; and they have adopted the missions to
the Papoos, and those in Polynesia, as their
own special responsibility, to God and to his
Church. And in future years it will be grate-
fully remembered, that the same year which
witnessed their organization as an independent
church, also witnessed the establishment of
their Missionary Society for the heathen of
Australasia. — Wesleyan Missionary Notices and
Annual Reports, and The Arminian Magazine.
— Rev. W. Butler.
AVA : The capital of Burmah, situated
on the Irrawaddy, tliree hundred and fifty miles
from its mouth. It has been at different pe-
riods a station of the American Baptist mis-
sion in Burmah.
AVARUA : A station of the London
Missionary Society on the island of Raroton-
ga, one of the Hervey Islands.
AW AYE: A station of the Southern
Baptist Convention, in Yoruba, West Africa,
60 miles north of Abbeokuta.
BADAGRY : A town and port in West
Africa on the Gold Coast, in the Bight of
Benin, 50 miles N. N. E. of Whydah, at
first the coast station of the mission of the
Chiurch Missionary Society to the Yornbas.
But, in consequence of the wars of the native
tribes, the town was subsequently reduced in
importance and in the number of its inhabit-
ants, and the station was transferred to Lagos.
The Wesleyans also have a station there.
BADDAGAME : A station of the Church
Missionary Society in Ceylon, 10 miles north
of Point de Galle.
BAD RIVER : A station of the Ameri
can Board among the Ojibwa Indians, near
Lake Superior.
BAGDAD : A large city on the Tigris,
the metropolis of an extensive pashalic which
bears its name. The Jewish population is
6,000, and the whole trade of the town is in
their hands. It is a station of the London
Jews' Society, whose missionaries have been
visited by crowds of Jews, eager for instruc-
tion.
BAHAMAS : See West Indies.
BAHARUTSE : Station of the London
Missionary Society in South Africa, about 25
miles from Touns ; inhabited by a numerous
tribe of the Baharutse, who were, some time
ago, driven from their own country, which Avas
a considerable distance to the north.
BAPTIST MISSIONARY SOCIETY,
(ENGLISH :) The origin of this Society is
traced to the workings of the mind of Rev.
William Carey, which had been intensely di-
rected to the conversion of the heathen for
nine or ten years previous. He was at this
time pastor of a small Baptist church at Moul-
ton. He was born in obscurity, in the county
of Northampton, Aug. 17, 17G1, made a pub-
lic profession of religion in 1783 ; and Avas or-
dained, 1787. Under the pressure of poverty,
first as a journeyman shoemaker, and after-
wards as a village schoolmaster, he had ac-
quired several languages. With the earliest
dawn of missionary purpose in his mind, was
associated the study of geography and history.
He addicted himself to the construction of
maps of the world ; in doing which, he
reflected much on its spiritual destitution.
In 1784, at a meeting of the association to
which he belonged, at Nottingham, it was
resolved to set apart an hour on the first Mon-
day evening of every mouth, " for extraordin-
ary prayer for the revival of religion, and for
the extending of Christ's kingdom in the
world." This was done at the suggestion of
the venerable Mr. Sutcliff. This concert of
prayer has since become almost universal in
the churches. At these meetings, Mr. Carey
was incessantly introducing and descanting
upon the importance and practicability of a
mission to the heathen, and of his own wil-
lingness to engage in it. But he met with
little sympathy. Some regarded him as in-
fatuated, and denounced his project as wild
and hopeless ; and others hesitated, amid
doubts and fears. On one occasion, a request
being made for a topic for discussion, at a
meeting of ministers, Mr. Carey proposed
" The duty of Christians to attempt the spread
of the Gospel among heathen nations ; " when
Mr. Ryland, father of Dr. Ryland, expressed
great surprise, and called him an enthusiast for
entertaining such a notion.
While laboring as a schoolmaster and
iro
BAPTIST MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
preaching at Moulton, he wrote an essay, which
was afterwards published under the title of
" An Inquiry into the obligation of Christians
to use means for the conversion of the heathen."
This appeal produced a strong impression. In
1788, Mr. Carey became pastor of a church in
Leicester. While there, his anxiety for the
spread of the Gospel abroad increased, till it
became an habitual and irrepressible passion
of his soul. In 1791, at a ministers' meeting,
he urged forward the discussion, " whether it
were not practicable, and our bounden duty, to
attempt somewhat towards spreading the Gos-
pel in the heathen world." About this time,
two sermons were preached on the subject by
Mr. Sut cliff and Mr. Fuller which deepened
the impression. At the anniversary of the
association at Nottingham, in May, 1792, Mr.
Carey preached a sermon from Isa. 54 : 2, 3,
arranged under two divisions. (1) '* Expect
great things from God, (2) attempt great
things /or God," which produced such a pow-
erful imjjression as led the association to resolve
that a plan for a missionary society should be
presented at the fall meeting ; and on the se-
cond of October, the plan was adopted, the
society formed, and a contribution of £13 2s.
6(1. made on the spot. Several meetings were
held soon after, and the contributions in-
creased.
Mr. Caroy had his attention directed to the
South Seas ; and he proposed to go, if any so-
ciety would send him out, with the means of
support for one year. But, after the formation
of the society, he became acquainted with the
fact that a Mr. Thomas, who had been a surgeon
in the East Indies, and afterwards had become
a preacher, was collecting funds for a mission
in Bengal ; and sought to unite the two ob-
jects. And the committee, having satisfied
themselves as to the character of Mr. Thomas,
and being fully of opinion that a door was
opened in the East Indies for preaching the
Gospel to the heathen, agreed to invite him to
go out under the patronage of the Society,
agreeing to furnish him with a companion, if
one could be obtained. Mr. Carey was asted
if he was inclined to accompany him, to which
he answered in the affirmative. While they
were discussing the matter, Mr. Thomas came
in, and Mr. Carey rising from his seat, they
fell on each other's necks and wept. " Prom
Mr. Thomas' account," said Mr. Fuller, " there
is a gold mine in India, but it seems almost as
deep as the centre of the earth. Who will
venture to explore it ? " "I will go down,"
said Mr. Carey, " but remember, that you must
hold the ropes." This they solemnly engaged
to do.
But IVlr. Carey foimd difficulties in his way.
His wife was utterly adverse to the mission,
and refused to accompany him. She consented,
however, to his taking with him their eldest son
Felix.
An effort was made in London, in behalf of
the object ; but it was viewed with great dis-
trust, and the leading men were afraid of com-
mitting the denomination to the Society. Mr.
Thomas visited different parts of the country,
to awaken interest and collect funds. Mr. Carey
made repeated attempts to persuade his wife
to accompany him ; but she resolutely refused.
Yet, he considered his duty to God paramount,
and amidst the severest struggles of mind, re-
solved to go, intending to return for her as soon
as he had secured a footing for the mission. But,
being dissappointed of sailing at the time set,
in the interval before another vessel was to
sail, Mr. Carey visited her again, with the
hope that she might change her mind ; but she
still refused. Mr. Thomas, however, took up
the case of his friend, and after renewing his
appeals with reiterated urgency, she yielded,
and accompanied her husband. They era-
barked, June 13, 1793, and arrived at Bala-
sore, on the 7th of November. For the history
of the early trials and struggles of this mission,
the reader is referred to the appropriate head,
under the article " Hindoostan."
In 1795, the Society determined on establish-
ing a mission iu Africa ; and two young men
were sent out, who reached Sierra Leone on the
first of December the same year. But one of
them was obliged to return on account of his
health the next year, and the other embroiled
himself in disputes with a principal person in
Sierra Leone, so that the Governor insisted on
his leaving the colony, and he was discharged
from the service of the Society.
The organization of this Society is very
simple, a contribution of 10s. Gf/., constituting
membership, with the right of voting at its
meetings. Its officers are chosen at the an-
nual meeting by ballot. Its affairs are con-
ducted by a committee of 36 ; and all honor-
ary and corresponding members of the com-
mittee, together with all ministers who are
members of the Society, and officers of Lon-
don auxiliaries, are entitled to vote at the
meetings of the Committee.
This Society have extended their missions to
the different portions of India, and have them
now in operation, in Calcutta, Bengal, North-
ern India, Madras and Ceylon ; also, in the
West Indies : in Jamaica, Trinidad, Bahamas,
and Hayti ; iu Africa, and in France. The
table at the close of this article exhibits the
present state of their missions, and shows the
success which has attended their labors.
Receipts. — The following table shows an ap-
proximation to the aggregate receipts of the
society from its organization to Slarch 31,
1853, with the average annual receipts for
the periods specified. It is not, however, per-
fectly accurate, as no financial statements ap-
pear in the reports for the first five years ; and
in two other years iu which they are lacking,
we have given the amounts of the preceding
and following years :
BARAKA— BASLE MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
171
1792 to 1812, 20 years, £54,647=
■ • "0,646
1,011
p,099
;,553
(,086
>,317
1,970
i,854
),317
:,082
,759
1813 " 1816,
1817 " 1820,
1821 " 1824,
1825 " 1828,
1829 " 1832,
1833 " 1836,
1837 " 1840,
1841 " 1844,
1845 " 1848,
1849 " 1852-3 4
1854
30,1
39,1
55,
43,
. 56,1
76,:
78,
106, S
89,i
Annua!
average
£2,732
7,601
9,752
13,774
10,888
14,021
19,079
19,742
20,713
22,329
18,020
24,
I'he receipts for the year ending Marcli 31,
1853, were £17,225. These receipts present
the same general feature contained in the
financial reports of all missionary societies : a
general and steady advance in the contribu-
tions. The large amount for the period end-
ing ill 1844, is explained by the fact that it
includes a special jubilee fund, collected for the
Society's 50th anniversary. .
£627,341
TABULAE VIEW.
STATIOXS.
India ,
Ceylon
West Indies.
Africa
France
Totals . . .
Church
Members.
%
3
so
h3
a
^
I
o
c
.2
a
.2
a
.2
d
a
p,
o
u
1
-3
.2 cj
t
a)
•X3
3
w
3
o
1
i5
C
u
10
o
A
m
44
1
'S
d
5
"o
147
4
27
33
qo
561
1140 .
90
52
38
1498
82
2451
9
13
>)
11
17
516
57
4
74
1020
36
3
3V'
1041
6
170
4
67
7
1
1
24
5
1
18
2656
99
71
197
4695
19
209
222
16
97
763
40
2039
10
107
44
133
596
4312
246
127
309
7213
137
4245
51
1
2362
BARAKA: Station of the American
Board in AVest Africa, at the mouth of the
Gaboon river.
BARAPUTSA : A station of the Wes-
leyan Missionary Society in South Africa.
BARBADOES : See West Indies.
BARODA : The chief city of a district of
the same name, in India, 230 miles from Bom-
bay and 78 from Siirat : Pop. 100,000. Near
the city is a bridge, over the River Visuamitra,
which is remarkable as being the only one in
Gujerat. A station of the London Missionary
Society.
BARRA POINT : A station of the Wes-
leyau Missionary Society in West Africa, near
St. Mary's.
BARRIPORE : A station of the Gospel
Propagation Society in India, 16 miles south-
east of Calcutta.
BARTIOA GROVE : A station of the
Church Missionary Society in British Guiana.
BASLE MISSIONARY SOCIETY : A
seminary was established at Basle, in Switzer-
land, in 1815, for the education of missionaries
to the heathen. That year, a Russian army
was encamped on one side of the town, and a
Hungarian army on the other, and a torrent
of bombs was opened upon the town. But the
Lord sent a violent east wind, which had such
an effect upon the fire of the enemy, that the
bombs were exhausted in the air before they
could reach the houses. In consequence of this
remarkable deliverance, the people of God re-
solved to establish a mission seminary, to train
up pious teachers for the heathen. The first
year, they had only a few rooms, and a small
number of scholars, their income being £50 ;
but in the sixth year, they were able to build
a missionary college, their receipts having in-
creased to £5,000. More than 40 auxiliary
societies had been formed, in Switzerland, Ger-
manv, and France. This institution has since
sent "^ out a large number of valuable and de-
voted laborers, who have been employed in
different parts of the world. It has furnished
the Church Missionary Society many of their
most efficient laborers. In 1842, the institu-
tion had sent out 175 missionaries, and 28
more were iiursuing their studies.
It was no part of the original plan to send
out missionaries to the heathen ; but in 1821,
a society was regularly organized, (Die Evan-
gelischeMissionsgcsellschaftzu Basel,) with the
design of engaging fully in the missionary
work. Its first representatives went forth in
the following year. It now has 16 mission-
aries in Western Africa ; 28 in India ; and 3
in China. It has also a mission in North
America. From the last report it appears
that the receipts of the previous year were
304,298 fr. The disbursements were as fol-
lows :— for the African mission, 71,291 fr. ; for
the India mission, 156,849 fr. ; for the Chinese
mission, 21,193 fr.; for North America, 1,443
fr. ; for the Missionary Institute, 39,815 fr. ;
for other expenses, 22,221 fr. The payments
exceeded the receipts in the sum 8,514 fr. One
year before, the debt of the society was 55,000 fr.
Towards the liquidation of this amount, 26,402
fr. have since been paid, 12,568 fr. having been
received from the city of Basle for this purpose.
BASSETERRE : A station of the United
Brethren in St. Kitts, West Indies.
BATH: A station of the Wesleyan Mis-
sionary Society in Jamaica, West Indies.
BASSEIN : A district and a city in Bur-
mah, near the borders of Arracan, and the seat
of a mission of the Am. Baptist Missionary
172
BASSA COVE— BETHABARA.
Union. The mission is i^nucipally for the
Karens.
BASSA COVE : A settlement on the W.
coast of Africa, at the moutli of the Mechlin
river, a station of the Am. Baj^tist and Epis-
copal Missions in Liberia.
BATAVIA : A city and seaport of Java,
capital of the Dutch possessions in the east,
and of residency of same name, at the mouth
of the Jaccatra river, on the north coast of the
island. Pop. in 1842, 53,861, of whom about
3,000 were Europeans, the rest Chinese, Java-
nese, Malays, &c.
_ BATHUEST : A village of recaptured Af-
ricans, in the parish of St. James, Sierra
Leone, West Africa, a station of the Church
Missionary Society. Also a station of the
Wesleyan Missionary Society, in Great Na-
maqualand. South Africa.
BATTICALOA : A town and district on
an island three miles in circumference, on the
east coast of Ceylon, 66 miles S. S. E. from
Trincomale. A station of the Wesleyan Mis-
sionary Society.
■ BATTICOTTA : A station of the Am.
Board, in the northern part of Ceylon, about
6 miles north-west of Jaffnapatam, and 7 miles
south-west from Tillipally. It is the seat of
the male seminary, now in charge of Mr.
Hastings.
BAU : One of the Feejee Islands, about two
miles in circumference, most inconveniently
situated for every thing except defence. The
town is continually in ruins from fire, some
part, of it being constantly ignited by careless
or malicious people. It is one of the largest
towns, and the metropolis of Feejee. A sta-
tion of the Wesleyan Missionary Society.
BEAUFORT : A station of the United
Brethren, in Jamaica, West Indies.
BEE CHAM-DALE : See Aotea.
BEERSHEBA : A station of the Rhenish
Missionaiy Society, in Great Namaqualand,
South Africa, near Bethany.
BEERSHEBA: Station of the French
Protestants, in South Africa, on the Caledon
river, 60 miles south-west of Plaatberg.
BEKA : A station of the Wesleyan Mis-
sionary Society in Kaffraria, South Africa.
BELGAUM : A town in the province of
Bejapoor, India, lat. 15° 53' N., and long. 74^
42' E. Its climate is healthy, but all external
trade is stopped for six mouths in the year, by
the rains. Population in 1820, 7,654, one-
third Mahrattas, one-sixth Mohammedans, one-
eighth Jains, and one-ninth Brahmins. A
station of the London Missionary Society.
BELIZE : A town of 400 houses, situated
at the mouth of a river of the same name, in
Honduras Bay. A station of the Wesleyan
Missionary Society.
BELLARY : A fortified town in the Bala-
gaut ceded districts, India, and the head quar-
ters of a civil and military division ; lat. 15"
5' N., long. 76° 59' E. The town is large and
populous. Population of the district, 927,857.
A station of the Loudon Missionary Society.
BENARES : A large and celebrated city,
in the Presidency of Bengal, capital of a pro-
vince and district of the same name. It is sit-
uated on the north bank of the Ganges, 460
miles north-west of Calcutta. Population
632,000. It isthe most holy city of the Hin-
doos, the ecclesiastical metropolis of India, and
is resorted to by pilgrims from all quarters.
Benares is crowded with mendicant priests.
There are said to be 8,000 houses occupied by
Brahmins, who live upon the alms and offer-
ings of the pilgrims. This city is believed by
the Hindoos to form no part of the terrestrial
globe, but to rest upon the point of Siva's tri-
dent ; hence, they say, no earthquake can ever
affect it.
BERBICE : A colony in British Guiana,
about 70 miles east of Georgetown, in which
there are several stations of the London Mis-
sionary Society.
BEREA : Station of the French Protes-
tants in South Africa, on the Caledon river.
BERHAMPORE : A town in Bengal, sit-
uated on the east bank of the Cossimbazar
river, al^out six miles south from MoorshedalDad.
Population 20,000. It became a station of
the London Missionary Society in 1824.
BERHAMPORE : A town in Orissa, in
Hindoostan, on the coast of the Bay of Bengal.
It is the most southern station of the General
Baptists in Orissa.
BERLIN MISSIONARY SOCIETY:
An institution was formed at Berlin, in 1800,
by members of the Lutheran Church, designed
to qualify pious young men for missionaries.
The number of students who had been educa-
ted there, amounted, in 1825, to 40. The So-
ciety has 14 missionaries in South Africa ; but
it has, in general, assisted other bodies of
Christians in the work of evangelizing the
heathen, rather than sought to establish mis-
sions itself
BERLIN MISSIONARY UNION FOR
CHINA : This society was formed in June,
1850, during a visit of Dr. Giitzlaff to Berlin.
Dr. F. W. Krummacher was chosen President,
and Prof. Lachs, Secretary. The object of the
society is to send forth European laborers, male
and female, and also to support institutions for
the training of native preachers ; and it hopes
to aid in evangelizing, not only China, but
Thibet and the adjacent countries.
BERMUDAS: A numerous cluster of
small islands in the Atlantic Ocean, extending
about 45 miles from S. W. to N. E., and hav-
ing their northern point in long. 63° 28' W.,
lat. 32° 34' N. Population 9 or 10,000. The
Wesleyan Missionary Society have several
stations on these islands. (See West Indies.)
BETHANY: A station of the Berlin
Missionary Society in S. Africa.
BETHABARA : A station of the Mora-
vians in Jamaica, W. I.
BIBLE SOCIETIES.
173
BETHEL : A station of the Berlin Mis-
tdonary Society, South Africa.
BETHEL : A station of the Moravians
an St. Kitts, W. L
BETHELSDORP : Station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society, a settlement of Hot-
tentots in South Africa, 450 miles east of
Cape Town, and 7 miles north of Fort Fred-
eric.
BETHESDA: Station of the French
Protestants in South Africa, 73 miles N. E.
of Cape Town.
BETHESDA : A station of the Moravians
an St. Kitts, W. L
BETHULIA : Station of the French Pro-
testant Society in South Africa, 54 miles S. E.
of Philipolis. Inhabitants, 2,500, chiefly
Batlapis.
BETTIGHERRY : A station of the Ger-
man Missionary Society in India.
BETHANY : A station of the Rhenish
Missionary Society in Great Namaqualand,
South Africa.
BEULAH : A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society in the Society Islands.
BEXLEY: A settlement in Western Af-
rica, on the Mechlin river, six miles i'rom the
coast, the chief station of the American Bap-
tist Mission.
BEIRUT : The ancient Benjtus, a seaport,
and the chief town of the Druses. Its streets
are narrow and irregular, and the suburbs are
nearly as large as the town, consisting of
houses interspersed with gardens planted with
trees, which give it a beautiful appearance.
The environs are laid out in plantations full of
fine trees, and a stream descending from Mount
Lebanon winds through the country to the
sea. The mountains enclose a fine plain filled
with mulberry-trees, on which is reared the
finest silk in Syria. Population estimated from
12,000 to 20,000. Beirut is the first commer-
cial port of Syria, and is visited by the Turk-
ish and European steamers, and vessels from
different parts of the world. The people are
divided into different sects, but are principally
of the Arab race, and speak the Arabic lan-
guage. Beirut is the principal station of
the American Board in SjTia.
BH AGALPUR : A station of the Church
Missionary Society, in North India.
BHINGAR : In Hindoostan, two miles
east of Ahraednuggur, and was occupied as a
station by that mission in 1846. Pop. 4,000.
BIABOU: _A station of the VN^esleyan
Missionary Society on the Island of St. Vin-
cent, W. I.
BIBLE SOCIETIES : Origin.— JJutil the
formation of the British and Foreign Bible
Society, in 1804, it is believed that there did
not exist in the world any society having for
its sole object the distribution of the Holy
Scriptures without note or comment among
the people generally. An association had ex-
isted in London for several years, having for
its object the supply of the Scriptures to the
soldiers and sailors. It was afterwards some-
what remodeled, and called the " Naval and
Military Bible Society," but its efforts were di-
rected to a single point, and were somewhat
limited even there. A society called the
" French Bible Society," was formed in
Fi-ance, in 1792, but its operations were impe-
ded from various causes, and after struggling
along for a few years, the society disposed of
the Bibles on hand, settled up their accounts,
and dissolved in August, 1803. It is not, how-
ever, to be supposed that no effort had been
put forth to furnish a supply of Bibles for the
destitute generally, for the several missionary
societies in England and Scotland jjublished
large editions of Bibles and Testaments, as well
as other religious books, and tracts. One
society alone, "The Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge," formed in 1698, printed
the New Testament in Arabic, the whole Bible
in the language of the Isle of Man, and four
editions of it in the Welsh language, besides
many editions in English. The operations of
this society are still increasing. By the
efforts of these societies many copies of the
Scriptures were put in circulation, while as yet
there was no general society to supervise the
effort, and carry forward the work with an
energy and system becoming its importance.
The supply of an edition of the Welsh Bible,
for distribution in that principality, seems to
have been the moving spring of the establish-
ment of the British and Foreign Bible Society.
The Rev. Mr. Charles, a Welsh minister, had
urged that something ' should be done, and at
length, the Rev. Joseph Hughes, a dissenting
minister, who had traversed the ground, wrote
and published an essay, setting forth the im-
portance of the subject, the necessity of speedy
and vigorous action, and suggesting the forma-
tion of a large national instituiion. Thope
hints rested with weight in the minds of many
beiievolent men, a general meeting was invited,
and the British and Foreign Bible Society
was duly organized on the 7th of March, 1804.
Immediately after the formation of the society
a correspondence was opened with many
friends of the Bible, in all the large cities on
the continent of Europe, and in other places
more distant, unfolding the views entertained,
as well as the plans proposed ; urging cooper-
ation either by the formation of distinct soci-
eties, or becoming auxiliary, and offering pecu-
niaiy aid if needed. It was not long before a
response came from Germany. The friends of
(he cause at the city of Nurenberg assembled
and formed a Bible Society on the general
principles of the British and Forefgn Society,
calling it the " Niu-enberg Bible Society." In
about two years the seat of the society was
transferred to Basle, as possessing more facili-
ties for printing and distributing the Scrip-
tures. The Society is now known as the
" (jlerman Bible Society."
174
BIBLE SOCIETIES.
Other places soon followed, and in a few
years the great work was fairly under way.
In ten years from the formation of the British
and Foreign Bible Society, and mainly through
their advice and cooperation, 82 large, inde-
pendent Bible societies had been formed in
Europe, several having many auxiliaries of
their own ; five important branches had been
established in Asia, four of them auxiliary to
the British Society, viz., Calcutta, Colombo,
Bombay and Java, and one, viz., Astrachan,
auxiliary to the Russian. Two auxiliary so-
cieties had been formed in Africa, \iz., one on
the isles of Mauritius and Bourbon, and the
other at St. Helena. One hundred and
twenty-nine Bible societies had been formed
on the American continent, exclusive of one
at Quebec, and one at Pictou, with the " Nova
Scotia Bible Society," established at Halifax,
with branches in all the principal towns in that
Province. Two auxiliaries to the British So-
ciety were formed in the West Indies, viz., one
at Jamaica, of colored people, and one at An-
tigua. The same time that the work was thus
advancing in the four great quarters of the
globe, no less than 559 societies auxiliary to
the great parent society in London, had been
formed within the British dominions.
The following table will exhibit the names
of the several large independent societies on
the continent of Europe, and in Asia and Af-
rica, previous to the formation of the Amer-
ican 13ible Society, with the date of their sev-
eral organizations.
TABLE.
NAME.
German Bible Society
Berlin Bible Society
Katisbon (Catholic) Bible Society
Dublin Bible Society ^afterwards aux.^ . .
Hibernian Bible Soc. (afterwards aux.) . .
Edinbur«;h Bible Soc. (afterwards aux.) .
Iluncrarian Bible Society
Zuricli Bible Society
Wirtemberg Bible Society
Finnish Bible Society
Kouiussburgh Bible Society
f'hur Bible Society (Catholic)
Schaffhausen Bible Society
Russian Bible Society with ten large aux-
iliarion, fonued in 1813, 1814, and 1815
St. Gall Bible Society
Lsland of Gothland Bible Society
Gothenburg Bible Society
Wetteras Bible Society
Berne Bible Society
Amsterdam English Bible Society
Netherlands Bible Society, with 33 branch
societies
Hanover Bible Society with an auxiliary
at Osnaburg
Elberfield Bible Society with auxiliaries. .
Prussian Bib. Soc. with many auxiliaries
Thuringian Bible Society
Saxon Bible Society
Lubec Bible Society
Hambrn-AUona Bible Society
Swedisli r.ible Society
Daiii.-h liiblo Society
Strasburg Bible Society
I^iusanne Bible Society
(icneva Bible Society
Eichsfield Bible Society
PATE OF
OKGAMZ/iTION.
May 10, 1804
Feb. 11, 1806
1805
1806
1807
July 31, 1809
1811
Sept., 1812
1812
1812
1812
1813
1813
Jan. 23, 1813
July 3, 1813
Oct. 13, 1813
Nov. 4, 1813
1813
March 23, 1814
Julv 25, 1814
July, 1814
Aug. 2, 1814
Aug. 10, 1814
Sept. 16, 1814
Oct. 12, 1814
1814
1814
l)ec. 30. 1814
Bee. 30, 1814
Dec. 31, 1814
March 15, 1815
DATK OF
NAME. ORGANIZATION.
Cleve Bible Society 1815
Bremen Bible Society April, 1815
Lund Bible Society 1815
Iceland Bible Society July, 1815
Brunswick Bible Society June 18, 1815
Nassau Hamburg Bible Society Jan. 1, 1816
Frankfort Bible Societj' Jan. 4, 181G
New Wied and Wied Runckel Bible Soc . . Jan. 8, 1816
ASIA.
Calcutta (auxiliary^ Bible Society 1811
Colombo (auxiliary) Bible Society 1812
Bombay (auxiliary) Bible Society 1813
Java (auxiliary) Bible Society June 4, 1814
Astrachan (auxiliary) Bible Society 1815
AJEICA.
Mauritius and Bourbon (aux.) Bible Soc. 1812
St. Helena (auxiliary) Bible Society 1814
The establishment of the American Bible
Society forms a grand era in the Bible opera-
tions on the globe. It is believed that the
first Bible Society in the United States, was
the Philadelphia Bible Society, which was
formed in the year 1808, but not very long
after this Bible societies were also formed
in Connecticut, Massachusetts, Maine, New
Hampshire, New York, New Jersey, Yirginia,
and other southern states, while the active ex-
ertions of Messrs. Mills and Schermerhorn, who
performed a missionary tour to the south-west
and west, in 1814, aided by the Philadelphia,
Connecticut, and New Tork Bible Societies,
were instrumental in arousing the churches,
and procuring ultimately, the establishment of
Bible societies in Ohio, Kentucky, Tennessee,
Mississippi, and Louisiana, comprehending
both state and county societies, so that on the
establishment of the American Bible Society,
in 1816, there existed more than fifty Bible
Societies in the United States in active opera-
tion, forty-three of which became at once aux-
iliary to the National Institution.
The subject of forming a national society,
had been agitated from year to year, among
friends of the Bible cause in various parts of
the country, but nothing definite had been
effected, until the year 1815, when a plan was
sketched by the New Jersey Bible Society,
and sent out to the sister societies for concur-
rence. This plan met with very general favor,
and not long after, the managers of the New-
York Bible Society expressed their views in a
series of resolutions, approving of the plan, and
concluding by requesting the Hon. Elias Bou-
dinot, then President of the New Jersey Bible
Society, to invite a general meeting to be held
in the city of New York on the second Wed-
nesday in May, 1816. This was done, and the
meeting was held accordingly, and 61 dele-
gates, from ten different states in the Union,
appeared with credentials from between 30
and 40 different local societies; the subjects
involved were all carefully examined, and on
the second day of meeting, viz. Thursday, May
11th, 1816, a constitution was adopted, and
"The American Bible Society" was duly
organized.
From that time to the present, the American
BIBLE SOCIETIES.
175
Bible Society has gone steadily ouward, en-
larging its operations from year to year until
its influence has been felt to some extent by
almost every nation under heaven. Every
State and Territory in the Union has cooperated
in the good work, either directly or through
societies aiLxiliary to the national institution,
of which, up to May, 1853, there were 1457,
with 2500 branches, scattered throughout the
United States. For about twenty years, most
if not all of the evangelical denominations co-
operated harmoniously in the operations of
the American Bible Society. At length, in
1835, a disagreement arose between the Bap-
tist denomination and the Managers of the
American Bible Society, in relation to the
principles on which new versions should be
made in foreign languages; and in conse-
quence of the action of the latter, in adopting
a resolution to the effect that they " feel at
liberty to encourage only such versions as
conform in the principles of their translation
to the common English version, at least so
far as that all the religious denominations,
represented in this Society, can consistently
use and circulate said versions in their several
schools and communities," the principal part
of the Baptist denomination in the United
States withdrew from the Am. B. S., and in
1837, they formed the American and Foreign
Bible Society; a provisional organization,
under the same name, having been formed in
New York the year before. This Society now
has about 350 auxiliaries. But a portion of
those who left the American Bible Society, on
this occasion, were desirous of making an en-
tire revision of the English version. This pro-
duced a division in tlie American and Foreign
Bible Society, wliich led to the formation of
the American Bible Union in 1850,
We have sketched the history of the British
and Foreign Bible Society on the foregoing
pages, from its formation in ISO-l to the form-
ation of the American Society in 1816. Its
progress for the thirty-seven years which have
transpired since that time has been, in a most
emphatic sense, upward and onward. From a
handful of men at the beginning, not more
than could sit around a table, it has become a
Samson in strength, stretching its giant arms,
laden with blessings, to the utmost limits of
the world. The Bible Societies in continental
Europe, as well as in ii^ia and Africa, have
experienced many changes in the last thirty-
seven years. Some which were then formed
have ceased to exist, and many others have
been organized, and at the present time Bible
societies are found in successful operation in
every European nation, as well as in many im-
portant places in Asia, on the African coast,
and in many isles of the sea. It might be
difficult to name them all, were we to attempt
the task, but we are safe in the assertion that
as many as one hundred independent societies
arc now in operation, exclusive of many hun-
dreds of auxiliaries and branches which are
clustering around them. Such is a very brief
sketch of the origin and progress of Bible so-
cieties to the present time. We turn now to
trace the
Itesults. — Very great and encouraging re-
sults may be stated here in very few words.
The British and Foreign Bible Society cele-
brated a jubilee on the 8th of March, 1853, on
entering the fiftieth year of their existence,
and then reported that the society had issued
Bibles and Testaments to the number of 25,-
402,309 copies, and had expended in that work
four millions of pounds sterling, about twenty
millions of dollars. The number of languages
and dialects in which it had printed and
circulated the Scriptures was 148. The num-
ber of its auxiliaries direct, was 4,257.
The American Bible Society, from its insti-
tution, in 1816, up to May 1, 1853, a period
of thirty-seven years, has put into circulation,
9,088,352 copies of the Scriptures, in many dif-
ferent languages, raising from various sources
about four and a half millions of dollars, at
least 3400,000 of which has been expended to
aid in furnishing the Scriptures for distribution
among the heathen.
In addition to what has been accomplished
by these two great national institutions, with
their host of auxiliaries, the Bible societies in
continental Europe, in Asia, and in Africa,
have published and circulated some five or six
millions of copies of the Holy Scriptures, in
the various languages spoken there ; while the
American and Foreign Bible Society, during
the sixteen years of its existence, has put into
circulation more than half a million of copies
of the Scriptures, in 35 different languages,
and as many more in English, and expended
more than half a million of dollars, nearly
265,000 of which was expended in the foreign
work. The aggregate of all these operations
is the publication and circulation of nearly
50,000,000 copies of the Holy Scriptures, in
almost all the languages spoken upon earth,
and the expenditure in this important work of
at least thirty millions of dollars. Such arc
the great results of the operations of Bible
societies in the last fifty yeai*s. These results
encourage the hope that the time promised is
at hand, when the gospel shall blossom and
bud, and fill the face of the world with fniit.
For the details of this subject, the reader is
referred to the Annwd Reports of the Brit, and
Foreign Bib. Sac. ; Owen's History of the first
ten years of tJiat society ; the Annvxd Reports of
the Am. Bib. Soc. ; and the Annual Reports of
the Am. and For. Bib. Soc. ; and also to Strick-
land-s History of the Am. Bib. Soc, published in
1849. — Rev. J. Greenleaf.
The following table embodies much valuable
information, showing the progressive advance-
ment of the Bible cause in this country for
the last 22 years ; and the proportion of do-
mestic and foreign appropriations : •
176
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES.
KECEIPTS OF THE AilliEICAN BIBLE SOCIETY AS THE RESULT OF DONATIONS AND THE
APPROPEIATIONS MADE OF THE SAME.
1832,
1833,
1834,
1835,
1836,
1837,
1838,
1839,
1840,
1841,
1842,
1843,
1844.
1845,
1846,
1847,
1848,
1849,
1850,
1851,
1852,
Receipts.
$47,564
46,091
54,570
62,868
58,781
35,728
44,365
53,285
48,030
61,840
74,530
65..244
67,606
68,468
104,551
73,946
94,505
91,804
117,794
120,065
Periods.
211,093
192,159
249,644
314,571
424,165
1,391,635
Donations
for For. Dis.
13,789
6,589
3,631
5,840
Appropriated
for For. Uses.
631
15,300
17,000
35,500
39,070
6,326
20,230
19,465
Periods.
6,418
10,549
2,686
30,794
3,843
16,619
2,419
15,518
1,247
23,945
1,091
13,792
1,526
1,500
965
18,000
1,938
9,500
iO,762
11,188
1,483
17,900
9,100
68,431
85,091
73,480
57,237
47,788
332,027
For Home Uses.
142,662'
107,068
176,164
257,334
376,380
1,059,609
BIMBIA : A station of the English Bap-
tists at Old Calabar, West Africa.
BINTENNE : A station of the Wesleyans
on an island on the east coast of Ceylon.
BIRKLANDS : Station of the London
Missionary Society, in South Africa, containing
a large population of Kafifres.
BLACK TOWN : The fortified and most
populous portion of the city of Madras, on the
eastern coast of Hiudoostan. It was occupied
as a station of the Am. Board, in 1849.
BLINK WATER : A station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society, on the Buffalo river,
in South Africa.
BLUEFIELDS : A station of the Gospel
Propagation Society, in Jamaica, W. I.
BLYENDAAL : A station of the London
Missionary Society, in Berbice.
BOMBAY : A city on the west coast of
India, occnpying an island of the same name,
8 _ miles in length N. to S., and 2 or 3 in
width. The population, as reported in 1851,
is 556,000. Of these, 297,000 are Hindoos,
speaking the Mahratta and Gujathe languages,
and 124,000 are Mohammedans. The rest are
Parsees, Jains, &c. The Mohammedans gen-
erally speak Hindostanee. The Parsees of
Bombay are about 100,000 in number, while
the Jains number only a few thousands. The
Roman Catholics arc numerous. Bombay, next
to Madras, is the oldest of the British posses-
sions in India, and commands the whole trade
of the north-west coast, and of the Persian
Gulf. The Am. Board commenced its mission
here in 1812.
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES : The
Bible itself is a series of inspired tracts, gath-
ered into a sacred volume. WicklifF was the
author of more than one hundred volumes
against Popery, besides commentaries on the
Scriptures, and numerous tracts, which were
extensively read, notwithstanding they were
ordered to be burned. Some of his tracts,
borne to Bohemia by an Oxford student in
1389, sowed the seeds of truth in the heart of
John Huss, whose writings in turn were
blessed to Martin Luther, who was the author
of 740 tracts and books, which bore no incon-
siderable part in the Great Reformation. The
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge was
formed in England in 1701, partly " to dis-
perse both at home and abroad. Bibles and
tracts of religion." In 1750, was formed the
first institution of a catholic character, of
which there is any notice — "The Society for
Promoting Religious Knowledge among the
Poor," and its works were extensively useful.
In 1756, similar institutions were formed in
Edinburgh and Glasgow. Near the close of
the last century, the deluge of infidel publica-
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES.
177
tious, the offspring of the French Eevohition,
prompted Mrs. Hannah More to prepare a
series of tracts, entitled " The Cheap Keposi-
tory Tracts," which had an immense and use-
ful circulation. More than 2,000,000 copies
were scattered abroad. The demonstration of
the power of a cheap, popular religious litera-
ture, in the success of Mrs. More's efforts, and
the benevolent zeal of the Rev. George Bur-
der, let to the formation of
The Religious Tract Society, London, in
1799 ; which may be regarded, perhaps, as the
parent of the numerous and respectable pro-
geny of tract societies throughout the world.
The object of their organization was to publish
and circulate evangelical truth, in simple, un-
sectarian forms. The committee was composed
of ecjual numbers of churchmen and dissenters ;
and their first address declares that its publi-
cations shall contain " nothing of the shibboleth
of sect ; nothing to recommend one denomina-
tion, or to throw odium on another ; nothing
of the acrimony of contending parties against
those that differ from them ; but pure good-
natured Christianity, in which all the followers
of the Lamb, who are looking for the mercy
of the Lord Jesus Christ unto eternal life,
can unite with pleasure, as in one great com-
mon cause. Nor should any worldly scheme
be interwoven with the truth, or attempted to
be concealed ijuder its folds. Here should not
be seen the slightest vestige of any carnal end,
in any form or for any purpose, however lauda-
ble some may think it ; nothing but divine
truth, unmingled, unadulterated, and pure as it
came from heaven, fit for the whole human
race to imbibe."
The site occupied by the Society's edifice in
London is one of the most interesting in his-
torical association to be found in the metro-
polis. It adjoins St. Paul's church-yard, where
Wicklifif met his persecutors, and Tyndale's
Testaments and Luther's writings were com-
mitted to the flames, and where martyrs suf-
fered for the truth. It is a befitting spot for
the multiplication of those gospel writings
which symbolize the revived power and ulti-
mate triumph over all error and opposition,
of the Gospel itself, in all lands.
The publications of the " Religious Tract
Society" are about 5,000 in number, and are
so varied in character, style and language, as
t-o meet the wants of all classes. Besides a
valuable series of tracts and children's tracts,
several hundred books for the young, a rich
variety of standard, practical treatises, and
many helps to the study of the Scriptures, the
Society issues four or five periodicals for young
and old, with a wide and useful circulation.
Of " The Leisure Hour," about 80,000 are circu-
lated; of the " Sunday at Home," about45,000 ;
and of the " Child's Companion" about 40,000.
The total circulation of the London Soci-
ety's publications exceeds six hundred millions
of copies. Its total annual receipts are about
12
£70,000 or about $350,000, including £8,000
or £10,000 in donations. Its total receipts for
the first fifty years were, in donations £152,552,
and for sales £1,023,215 = £1,202,242, or
about $6,000,000. Its gratuitous issues smO
grants of money, paper, engravings, &c., for
the foreign Christian press in fifty years,
amounted to £155,372, or about $750,000.
The fruits of these stupendous operation?
are found in every part of the world, and many
have been garnered for the great day. A fact
of pleasing interest in the early history of this-
society must conclude our condensed sketch
Scarcely were its own foundations laid, and ito
special work commenced, before its founden
and early managers were providentially led t/3
consider the necessity of a kindred society fo"
the circulation of the Holy Scriptures. Th(
secretary and committee of the Tract Society
became the founders of the British and For
eign Bible Society in 1804, and the Eev. John
Hughes, secretary of the former, became thfi
first secretary of the latter. Thus were linked
together by parental and filial ties two of the
most influential and useful of the benevolenf
institutions of the world.
The American Tract Society was formed
in New York, May 11, 1825, and has become
the largest institution of its class in the world
A brief sketch of its history befits these pages.
Soon after the organization of the Religious
Tract Society, London, the Massachusetts So-
ciety for Promoting Christian Knowledge, com-
menced in 1803 the publication of tracts and
books. The Connecticut Tract Society, Rev.
Dr. Dwight, president, and Jeremiah Evarts,
secretary, was formed in 1807, and other kin-
dred institutions came into being. The tracts
of Hannah More found their way to Boston,
and reached the youthful members of a com-
mercial firm, by whom they wGre highly
prized. They caused several numbere to be
reprinted, and were in the habit of accompa-
nying the packages of goods sent from their
store to various parts of the country, with
some of these tracts. During long and useful
lives, Homes and Homer continued the active
friends of the Society which owed its origin
in a considerable degree to their influence. In
1814 the New England (afterwards the Amer-
ican) Tract Society, was formed at Boston^ — a
suggestion j^t a meeting of half a dozen Chris-
tian friends having led to the contribution of
sums for printing several tracts, and after a
few months of deliberation and experiment, to
the organization of a society which put in
circulation about 4,250,000 of publications in
the ten succeeding years. Other societies,
catholic or denominational, were formed in va-
rious parts of the United States, and the total
circulation previous to 1825, reached about
10,000,000 copies.
In 1824, a correspondence commenced be-
tween the New York Religious Tract Society
and the American Tract Society at Boston,
178
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES.
which resulted in a public mcetins: held in the
city of New York, March 11, 1825, at which
the plan of a national tract society was
adopted, to be submitted to the principal tract
societies ; and a subscription for the erection
of a tract-house was commenced with $5,000
by Mr. Arthur Tappau, §^3,000 by Mr. Moses
Allen, and $1,000 each by W. W. Chester
and Richard T.Haines, which were afterwards
increased to more than $25,000 by donors in
New York city. A convention of delegates
from various tract societies assembled in New
York, May 10, 1825, the Eev. Dr. Milnor,
chairman ; the constitution was approved, and,
on the succeeding day the organization was
effected, and the corner stone of the tract-
house laid with solemn religious services ; S.
V. S. Wilder, Esq., president ; Rev. Wm.
A. Hallock, secretary ; Moses Allen, Esq.,
treasurer ; Eev. Drs. Milnor, Spring, Knox and
Edwards, and Eev. Messrs. Sbmmers and Sum-
mei-field, Publishing Committee. It was near
the close of this meeting that the lamented
Summerfield made his last public address, in
^ which he said, " In all the anniversaries I have
ever attended, in Europe or America, I have
never been so conscious of the presence of the
Holy Spirit and Chpistian love pervading
every heart. Again and again I could not re-
frain from weeping. The very atmosphere we
breathe is the atmosphere of heaven ; one
which angels come down to inhale, and in which
God himself delights to dwell." Of the insti-
tution so auspiciously formed, the American
Tract Society at Boston, became a branch,
transferring its stereotype plates, and render-
ing the most efficient cooperation to the pre-
sent time. Other catholic societies also be-
came auxiliaries of the new institution.
" The basis of union" was declared in the
first address of the Executive Committee to
the Christian public to be the following great
doctrines of the Gospel, in which evangelical
believers are agreed : " Man's native sinfulness ;
the purity and obligation of the law of God ;
the true and proper divinity of our Lord
Jesus Christ ; the necessity and reality of his
atonement and sacrifice ; the efficiency of the
Holy Spirit in the work of renovation ; the
free and full offers of the Gospel, and the duty
of men to accept it ; the necessity of personal
holiness ; and an everlasting state of rewards
and punishments beyond the grave."
Besides the preparation of a series of tracts
and children's tracts for domestic circulation,
the claims of the Christian press in Pagan
lands were recognised from the outset, and
appropriations were made for this object in
the second and third years, as in all the subse-
quent years of its history. The principles gov-
erning foreign grants were drawn up by Jere-
miah Evarts, Esq., then the far-sighted Secre-
tary of the A. B. C. F. M. How extensive
and useful this cooperation with the missionary
work has been, will appear hereaftci'.
Volume Enterprise. — In the third year, the
Society commenced the Volume Enterprise, by
stereotyping Doddridge's Rise and Progress,
at the expense of benevolent friends, followed
by Baxter's Saint's Rest, and Call to the Un-
converted, Bunyau's Pilgrim's Progress, and
other practical works. The Rev. Dr. Plumer,
of Virginia, prompted an enterprise for sup-
plying the southern Atlantic States with these
volumes, which was extended to other states.
Agents were raised up who visited congrega-
tions in various parts of the country to pro-
mote the circulation of good books by the aid
of voluntary distributors ; and the foundations
were laid for the employment of the standard
religious press as a means of popular evangel-
ization. The various " Boards of Publication,"
and the unprecedented activity of religious
book-publishing, may be traced, in a good de-
gree, to the prosperity and success of the " Vol-
ume Enterprise."
Systematic Distribution of Tracts. — In the
fourth year attention was directed to systematic
tract visitation, or the employment of faithful
personal effort for the salvation of individual
souls, in connection with the systematic distri-
bution of religious tracts. Harlan Page, then
the Society's depositary, enlisted his energies
in this work, and furnished an illustration of
the efficiency of the principle underlying this
system of doing good. Numerous auxiliary
societies were formed, especially in our great
cities and larger towns, which still persevere
in the tract-mission work, and are widely use-
ful to the neglected classes of the population.
The New York City Tract Society employs 26
missionaries, including three for German and
other emigrants, and one for seamen, who
have associated with them 1,110 visitors, and
distribute annually about 1,500,000 tracts.
The results are most cheering, as appears from
the following statistics for 1853 : Tracts dis-
tributed in English and other languages,
1,579,756, embracing 6,319,030 pages ; Bibles
and Testaments supplied to the destitute, 2,434 ;
volumes lent from ward libraries, 5,416 ; child-
ren gathered into Sabbath-schools, 2,247 ; into
public schools, 284 ; into Bible classes, 121 ;
into church, 1,602 ; temperance pledges ob-
tained, 562 ; district prayer-meetings held,
1,483 ; backsliders reclaimed, 32 ; persons re-
ported as hopefully converted, 1*73 ; converts
united in the evangelical churche,s, 154.
Colportage. — In May, 1841, the system of
Colportage commenced. The Volume Enter-
prise had not reached the destitute classes, and
tract visitation had been restricted mainly to
large cities and towns. The combination of
the elements of both enterprises, systematically
applied to the destitute, constituted the basis
of the new movement ; and competent agen-
cies for directing and superintending the labors
of colporteurs had been providentially trained
in the Volume Enterprise. The annual report
for 1841 presented a vieM' of the destitutions
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES.
1T9
of the country. The secretary for this departs
meat, (Mr. Cook,) immediately after the amii-
versary at New York, addressed the annual
meeting of the Society at Boston, and made an
appeal for men and funds to begin the colpor-
teur enterprise ; he has been the author of
all the public documents and appeals relating
to it. From the four or five candidates who
presented themselves the next morning, two
were selected and commissioned ; Mr. Asa
Prescott, now a pastor in Illinois, who went
to a destitute part of Indiana ; and Rev. P.
Follausbee, who labored with great acceptance
for four years in Kentucky, and then entered
on his gracious reward. They were the first
American colporteiu-s. The number increased
from 11 in 1841, to 508 in 1850, and 619 in
1854, for the whole or part of the year.
In the summer of 1842, one of the secreta-
ries made an official extended tour at the West,
and became familiar with the condition and
wants of the German emigrant population.
His representations led to the successful aijpli-
cation of colportage to the various classes of
emigrants, Germans, French, Irish, Welsh,
Dutch, Norwegian, and Spanish, both Protes-
tant and Papal. An average of about 100
colporteurs are employed among them ; and
perhaps no feature of the Society's work is
more important and hopeful than this. Some
of the most cheering records of modern evan-
gelization may be found among the reports of
the German and Norwegian colporteurs. The
first German colporteur in this country was
Leger Eitty, a converted Roman Catholic.
The plan pursued in the prosecution of col-
portage is as follows ; the qualifications of the
colporteur having been investigated and a
commission issued, he is supplied with the pub-
lications of the Society and proceeds to his
prescribed "field, ordinarily one or two counties.
He goes from house to house, selling his books
when practicable, but supplying the families of
the poor and the erring gratuitously, accom-
panying his visits with personal religious con-
versation and prayer ; holding prayer-meetings,
delivering public addresses, forming Sabbath-
schools, promoting temperance, and advancing
the kingdom of the Redeemer in all appropri-
ate ways. Monthly reports of his labors are
made to the Superintendent of colportage, and
quarterly reports both to the Superinten-
dent and to the Committee. Superintending
agencies are established at important commer-
cial centres, with depositories, as at Rochester,
Philadelphia, Baltimore, Richmond, New Or-
leans, Mobile, St. Louis, Cincinnati, Chicago,
&c., with experienced agents, having each the
oversight of 30, 50, or 100 colporteurs. Mi-
nute attention is thus given to the wants,
character and labors of this self-denying band of
Christian men. They also have the oversight
of the Society's general agents, as they tra-
verse their fields, and come in contact with the
colporteurs, and of the executive ofBcei's, who
occasionally convene them, and spend several
days in intercourse with them. It is much
due, under God, to these precautions that the
system has thus far worked without friction or
disappointment.
Among the three thousand different persons
enlisted in this cause, since the enterprise be-
gan, more than 1000 have been connected with
about 50 different colleges, universities and
theological seminaries, of about 20 different
denominations, engaged in a course of train-
ing for the gospel ministry. And besides
accomplishing untold good to others, their dis-
cipline has been of much benefit to themselves,
in preparing them for the practical duties of
pastoral life. Many who are usefully employed
in the sacred office in this or other lands will
unite in the testimony recently borne by the
first American colporteur : " Among all the
means of preparation which the Lord has
spent upon me, I look upon my colporteur lar
bors as holding an important, if not the most
important place, except the agency of the
Holy Spirit."
The statistics of colportage furnish ^ im-
pressive illustration of its practical efficiency
and usefulness. In the first 13 years of the en-
terprise, no less than 3,820,101 families have
been visited, with 1,887,225 of whom the colpor-
teurs had religious conversation or prayer, gen-
erally both. The number of religious books soki
to these households was 3,900,739; and the num-
ber granted to the destitute was 1,068,662, of
the pecuniary value of $178,000. The aggro-
gate circulation of books by the Society dur-
ing these thirteen years was 7,875,224. The
moral and religious condition of the families
reached by colportage may be inferred from
the fact that 483,135 of them habitually neg-
lected evangelical worship; 541,397 were des-
titute of all religious books except the Bible,
aud_ 235,002 had not a copy of the Holy
Scriptures. The number of Roman Catholic
families, or other errorists, was 365,166. The
number of prayer-meetings held or public meet-
ings addressed was 100,169. These statistics '
embrace the emigrant population, and relate
to all the States and Territories in the Union.
They are worthy of attention and study on the
part of Christian philanthropists.
The bearings of such a wide-spread system
of evangelical effort, among our unevan-
gelized population, cannot but be the most
happy, on all interests, civil, social and reli-
gious. As a practical demonstration of evan-
gelical unity ; as an illustration of the power
of the Christian press, and a restraint and cor-
rective for the ills of a corrupt literature ; as
a means of awakening the spirit of active
piety ; as an agency for exploring and reveal-
ing our moral wastes, and dispensing the
means of grace among the scattered house-
holds in our new settlements, as well as among
the neglected abodes of crowded cities ; as a
well-adapted agency for reaching the emigrant
180
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES.
classes, who crowd our shores ; as an instra-
mentality for imparting the truth in love to
papists, infidels and others who come not to
the evangelical sanctuary, and are not other-
wise blessed wdth saving truth ; as the hand-
maid of the Sabbath-School and temperance
and Bible and Sabbath observance enterpri-
ses ; as a cementing influence, in Church and
State ; and above all as a heaven-blessed means
of edifying the body of Christ, converting
souls and promoting the revival of God's
work among men, Colportage has demon-
strated its claim to the regard of those who
love their country, and especially of those who
love the Eedeemer's Kingdom.
Foreign Distribution. — The enterprises of
the American Tract Society in foreign and
pagan lands, have been carried forward stea-
dily, almost from its foundation. Limiting its
appropriations to the preparation and circula-
tion of publications accordant with its princi-
ples, and aiming to meet the wants of the mis-
sions and societies especially of American ori-
gin, in all parts of the world, it has come to
be identified with almost every plan for fur-
nishing the nations with a Christian literature.
The following schedule of the appropriations
in money, amounting to $423,794, aside from
the grants of publications, engravings, &c., up
to 1854, will show how wide is the sphere of
its operations in this department. There have
been remitted in cash to the Sandwich Islands
$25,300 ; Java, Borneo and Malacca, $800 ;
China, the various missions, $49,150 ; Siam,
$20,300 ; Assam, $3,900 ; Burmah and Karens,
$32,600 ; Northern India, $37,500 ; Calcutta,
$800 ; Urissa, $10,250 ; Teloogoos, $2,600 ;
Madras, $19,750 ; Madura. $7,750 ; Ceylon,
$32,300 ; Bombay, $14,198 ; Ahmcdnuggur,
&c., $2,901 ; Africa, $4,200 ; Nestoriaus,
$4,500 ; Syria, $5,750 ; Turkey, $35,930 ;
Greece, $21,200 ; Italy, $2,800 ; Russia and
Poland $22,900 ; Sweden, $2,200 ; Denmark,
$1,400 ; Berlin, $2,800 ; Hamburg, $19,200 ;
Bremen, Barmen, Calw and Hungary, $4,550 ;
Basle, $1,500 ; Belgium and Holland, $2,650 ;
Societies in France, $23,020 ; Spain, $1,400 ;
Moravian missions, $3,000 ; Indian missions,
$3,144 : add grants for the blind, $1,500— to-
tal, $423,794.
The number of books and tracts approved
for distribution in foreign lands is 2,885, in-
cluding 282 volumes ; and the Society and the
institutions it aids, have issued publications in
one hundred and nineteen languages and dialcds,
as follows :
Seneca, Mohawk, Delaware, Ojibwa, Otoe,
or Iowa, Wea, Putawatomie, Shawanoe, Kan-
sas, Osage, ()ttawa, Abeuaquis, Sioux, or
Dakota, Pawnee, Creek, Choctaw. Cherokee,
Nez Perces, Creole, or Negro-German, Negro-
English, English, Welsh, Irish, French, Low
Breton, Flemish, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian,
Dutch, German, Ronianese, Lithuanian, Bohe-
mian, Hungarian or Magyar, Slavonian, Up-
per Wendish, Nether Wendish, Yandalian,
Servian, Wallachian, Croatian, Danish, Nor-
wegian, Icelandic, Greenlandish, Esquimaux,
Swedish, Polish, Judeo-Polish, Finnish, Lap-
pish, Russ, Eival-Estonian, Dorpat-Estonian,
Mongolian, Lettish, Tartar-Turkish, Thibetan,
Bulgarian, Armenian, Armeno-Turkish, He-
brew, Hebrew-German, Hebrew-Spanish, Mo-
dern Greek, Greco-Turkish, Arabic, Syriac,
Nestorian, Persian, Grebo, Mpongwe, Bakali,
Bassa, KafFre, Zula, Sessuto, Wanika, Kinika,
Timneh, Mahratta, Goojuratee, Latin, Tamul,
Cingalese, Teloogoo, Oriya, Bengali, Canarese,
Malayalim, Tulu, Hindui, or Dev Nagare,
Hindoostani, or Urdu, Panjabi, or Gurmukhi,
Cashmire, Burmau, Pcguan, Salong, Sgau Ka-
ren, Sho Karen, Kemmee, Siamese, Assamese,
Tai, or Khamti, Singpho, Naga, Chinese,
Japanese, Malay, Bngis, Javanese, Lettinese,
Dyak, Hawaiian, Marquesas, Feejee. Total,
119.
One or two illustrations of the usefulness of
tract distribution abroad, from the countless
instances in the records of this branch of bene-
volence, must suffice. The Rev. Dr. Duff, the
eminent Scotch missionary from India, stated
at the last anniversary of the A.merican Tract .
Society, that a missionary visited the west of
Bengal, and found that several years before his
visit, a tract called the " Ten Commandments"
had fallen into the hands of a Hindoo devotee.
The devotee had died unaffected, but the good
seed had come in contact with the soil of
honest hearts, and did a noble work. Very
soon one hundred souls were baptized, all the
fruit of that single tract.
The present amazing revolution in China,
threatening the existence of the Tartar dynasty
and the overthrow of idolatry in that vast
Empire, may be traced, in the wonder-working
Providence of God, to the influence of a
Chinese tract, which fell into the hands of
Tae-Ping-Wang, the insurgent chief, in 1834.
Leang-Afa, the faithful native preacher, was
the author of " Good Words to admonish the
Age," copies of which he distributed among
the literati during the examinations at Canton,
in 1833-4, suffering persecution for his zeal.
The head of the present movement was among
the literati, and gained his first knowledge of
the Christian scheme from the tract thus
placed in his hand. Ten years later " he is
found traveling through Kwangsi, preaching
the new doctrine ;" and in 1846, receiving the
instructions of the American missionary. As
the insurgent army, of which he is the leader,
advances in its progress toward the capital of
the Empire, 400 printers are employed in mul-
tiplying copies of the Pentateuch and the
Gospel of Matthew, GutzlafiTs version, so num-
bered as to indicate the purpose of printing
the sacred volume entire ; and one account re-
presents the forces of the chief, as " an army of
colporteurs," scattering publications more or
less pure in their religious tenets, among the
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES.
181
provinces they traverse. They are described
by a missiouary as follows : " These tracts
show a very correct knowledge of all the most
imjDortant points of Christian doctrine, and
were prepared and printed by the insurgents
themselves. One of them contains a summary
of the Ten Commandments, each command-
ment being accompanied by a brief explana-
tion and a verse of a hymn. Forms of prayer
are also given, one of which contains several
of the petitions of the Lord's Prayer. Prayer
is offered for the influences of the Holy Spirit
to change the corrupt heart, and for the inter-
cession of Jesus Christ as Mediator. The ob-
servance of the Sabbath is enjoined, as also
morning and evening worship, and giving of
thanks at meals. These precepts, it is believed,
are strictly observed by the whole army.
Theft and opium-smoking are both capital
offences."
Whatever may be the issue of this remark-
able movement, and how much soever of super-
stition may be mingled in the religious ele-
ments of the insurrection, it is an impressive
illustration of the power of the Christian press,
and a demonstration of the efficiency of the
humblest means when employed by the Pro-
vidence and Spirit of God for the accom-
plishment of vast results.
Religious Periodicals. — Besides the enter-
prises thus noticed, the Tract Society has be-
come one of the most extensive publishers of
Religious Periodicals in the world. In 1843 the
"American Messenger," a monthly newspaper of
a highly evangelical, practical character, was
commenced, and it has advanced in circulation
from year to year, till it has reached the immense
number of 204,000 copies monthly, or about
two and a half million copies in a year. The
"Amerikanischer Botscliafter," (American Mes-
senger in German) was issued in 1847, and has
gained a circulation (about 25,000 monthly)
greater than any religious periodical in that lan-
guage. " The Child's Paper" a beautifully illus-
trated newspaper for the young, began Jan.
1852, and already reaches more families than
were supplied witla juvenile papers of all classes,
at the time it was issued ; while most others have
since improved in character and in circulation.
The number printed monthly is not far from
300,000 copies, requiring the time of a power-
press forty-six days for each monthly issue, print-
ing two papers each stroke of the press. A
demand has arisen for the " Child's Paper" in
Great Britain, and several thousand copies are
sent monthly to Edinburgh, Scotland. Since
these enterprises commenced, there have been
printed of the American Messenger, 16,125,600
copies ; of the Botschafter, 1,366,000 ; and of
the Child's Paper, 6,611,000 ; total, 24,102,-
600.
Publications. — The publications of the soci-
ety printed in this country, now number about
2,000, including more than 400 books. Of
these 65 volumes and 186 tracts and children's I
tracts are in the German language ; 21 books
and 102 tracts in the French ; 13 books and
65 tracts in the Spanish; 22 books and tracts
in the Portuguese ; 16 in the Italian ; 35 in
the IVclsh; 27 in the Dutch; 44 in the Danish;
28 in the Swedish; and 4 in the Hungarian ;
the remainder being in English. They em-
brace as rich and varied a collection of stand-
ard works in practical theology as exists in
any language. The style of printing and illus-
tration in which they are issued does credit to
American art. In cheapness they are believed
to be unrivaled. The circulation of some of
the tracts has exceeded half a million copies ;
and of particular volumes, 200,000 or 300,000.
Baxter's Call has had a circulation of 400,000
copies ; the Pictorial Tract Primer, 300,000 ;
and D'Aubigne's History of the Eeformation,
82,000, sets of 4 or 5 volumes. The aggregato
circulation of tracts has been about 140,000,000,
and of volumes about 10,000,000, embracing
15,000 libraries; making a total, including
24,102,600 copies of periodicals, of about one
HUNDRED AND SEVENTY-FIVE jMILLIONS OF PUB-
LICATIONS. If to this be added the publications
distributed in foreign lands by the society's
friends, estimated to average 20 pages each,
21,115,200 copies, it will make a grand total
of about TWO HUNDRED MILLIONS OP PUBLICA-
TIONS, or an average of more than one for each
family of the human race.
Tract Hoxi.se. — The Tract Society's House is
a spacious edifice near the City Hail, New-
York, about 80 feet on Nassau street, and 100
feet on Spruce street, and is five stories high
in front and six stories in the rear, with a cen-
tral court for light and air. It was built in
1825 on the site previously occupied by a small
tavern or grocery, and rebuilt in 1846 to pro-
vide for new machinery, and to meet the in-
creasing necessities of the Society's business.
Its fifty apartments are heated throughout by
steam. Besides the two stores and offices now
rented to others, it furnishes accommodations
for nearly thirty printing and hydraulic press-
es, propelled by steam, and for nearly 300
persons engaged in the executive, commercial
and manufacturing departments of the Soci-
ety's service. A debt of about .^40,0 00 still
incumbers the estate of the Society. The
first building was the scene of the extensive
revivals of religion, connected with the labors
of Harlan Page ; and a daily prayer-meeting
of the employees in the Tract House, now
hallows all its influences for good. The meet-
ings of every committee are uniformly opened
with prayer.
Executive Officers of the American Tract So-
ciety.—Jlon. Thomas S. Williams, President ;
Rev. Wm. A. Hallock, D.D., Rev. 0. Eastman
and Rev. R. S. Cook, Corresponding Secretar
ries ; Rev. Charles G. Soramers, Recording
Secretary, 0. R. Kingsbury, Assistant Secre-
tary ; Moses Allen, Esq. Treasurer and Isaac
W. BrinckerhoQ", Depositary.
X82 I^OC)^ '•^'^ TPwiCT SOCIETIES
THE AMERICAN TRACT SOCIETY'S RECEIPTS, ISSCES, GRANTS, ETC., DURING TWENTY-NINE YEARS.
RKCHFTS.
PRnrrcD.
CIBCTLATKD.
GIUSTS.
Foreign •§ «
1
Grants in — c
Cash. s '^
215
Donations.
Sales.
ToUl. ■
Pages.
rages.
Pages.
1
$6,925 56
Sr;,233 22
$10,158 78
18,053,500
3,611,500
148,000
2
8,556 96
21,S43 05
*30,413 01
36,114,500
24,768,232
1,648,056
22
3
12,464 38
32,670 20
45,134 58
53,607;000
46,321,784
3.806,704
103
4
25,173 18
34,9S0 80
60,163 98
68,316,000
48,895,262
21992,881
"'"$650
92
5
11,755 65
4S.454 59
60.210 24
63.429,930
62,360,444
5.086,261
300
67
6
8,784 82
34.137 77
42,922 59
68,786,000
68.522,704
4,163,800
300
73
7
24,474 78
37,430 29
61,905 07
88,547,000
66,160,457
4,788,110
5,044
46
8
31,229 25
31.117 58
C2.346 83
39,700.808
48,400,607
7.480,607
10,000
35
9
35,212 25
31,169 26*
66.381 51
51.534,624
67,633.070
9.956,829
20.0fJ0
46
10
60.727 42
31,580 39
92,307 81
53,804,652
53.916.358
8,535,267
30,000
55
11
56,638 04
47,573 37
104,211 41
101,293,584
72,480,229
9.839.760
+35.500
f36,000
65
12
71,932 36
59,05S 92
130,991 28
125,082,000
96,851,174
10.867,616
41
13
37,173 74
54.558 36
91,732 10
48,377,100
86,479,621
8,893,743
10,000
40
14
55,852 81
75.226 96
131,079 77
124,744,000
119.733,356
10,631,676
30,000
33
15
41.475 49
76,120 07
117.590 16
117,970,000
123,687,707
15,973.446
20.000
34
16
41,751 61
57.210 98
98.062 59
95,958,500
80,581,565
11.908.265
25.000
26
17
34.941 03
56.214 11
91,155 14
100,108,000
94,329,045
15,604,510
15.000
32
18
42,4;i3 98
49.904 13
*y6,240 53
78,844,000
80,806,460
18,682,456
15.000
54
19
56,680 31
51,804 13
108,484 44
96,118,000
91,471,456
24,315,121
20.000
41
20
62,306 38
86.296 01
*152,376 78
157,018,000
152,727,229
26,749,445
6.000
68
21
71,132 16
82,784 00
153,916 16
116;i73,000
123,642,593
30,705,246
15,000
73
22
67,770 88
92,360 24
160,131 12
150,013,096
153,575,624
;;5,926,208
10.000
48
23
105,915 15
129.744 31
235,659 46
217,499,000
211,730,285
40,948,459
11,000
68
24
94,081 43
164,218 73
258,300 16
298,264.000
2;«.409.300
47,890,225
14.000
145
25
105,894 80
202.371 92
308,266 72
307,636.200
280.697.500
68,138,820
15.000
73
26
109,897 76
200.720 33
310,618 09
285,914,500
269,984,015
66,638,543
20.000
78
27
116,406 41
226,343 50
342,749 91
316,518.500
283.296,568
65.164.181
20.000
28
147,374 64
237,252 21
384,626 85
287,479.500
268.902,315
72.224,841
20,000
157
129
156,033 48
259,125 12
415,158 60
303,851,000
315,100,857
73,224,824
20,000
76
1
I
$1,700,996 71
$2,515,505 15
$4,224,191 67
3,861,416,594
3,621,076,917
682,932,900
$423,794
* Incluiiiiii; rfccipts from rent", 2<1 vear, $13 ; 18th year, $3,902 42 ; 20th j-ear, $3,774 39.
t IncluJing grauU lor the Uiwl, lllh year, $500 ; 12tU yeax, $1,000.
The Presbyterian Board of Publication
was organized by tlic General Assembly in
1840. ltd ^real design was to cooperate with
the Christian ministry in publishing divine
truth. One of the specific olyects of tbie Board
is, to counteract the influence of licentious lit-
erature. Another is, '• to furnish a thorouglily
sound Calvinistic literature." It doe^ not,
however, attempt to furui.sh exclusively doc-
trinal works, but also such a.s are practical
and devotional. A large portion of its issues
arc of the latter descrijition, and such as may
be read without offence by all evangelical
denominali(;us.
Pit/>/i.s7t/;ig Department. — During the year
ending March 'A, 18.54, the B(jard liave pub-
lished IG new books, one of wliieh is in the
German language. Of these books, there, have
been printrd 38,250 copies. They have also
added to their Catalogue 9 tracts in I'iino,
and 1 in Ibiuu, of which have been printed
20,000 copies. They have al'^o prinU-d 25,000
copies of the Presbyterian Family Almanac.
Total copies of new books and tracts, 89,250.
The reprints of former pul)lieutions during tlie
year, amount to 50(1,500 eopie.s. Total amount
of cojjies ))uljli.<lied during the year, 595,750.
The aggregate number of volumes published
by the Bo!U-d, from their orgai\ization in 1840,
to March .'U, lK5:{.has amounted to 2,020.450.
The aggregate number of tracts published dur-
ing the suuie period has umoaatea to 2,131 ,450.
The total number of volumes and tracts pub-
lished by the Board, from 1840, to ISIarch 31,
1853, has amounted to 4,151,900.
Besides this, the Board printed and circu-
lated, the last year, 15,000 copies of the Home
and Foreign Record, and of the Sabbath-
School Visitor, 41,000.
Receipts. — The receipts of the past year have
been, i.ir books and tracts sold, lj?77,648 ; dona-
tions for salaries and expenses of colporteurs,
815,800 ; for Sabbath-School Visitor, ;d(),111 ;
for distribution of books and tracts. 81,413 ;
for stereoty])ing certain books, 81,175. The
aggregate amount of sales, from the 1st of April,
1841, to April 1, 1853, is 8-lGG,573 75. The
aggregate receipts fo' calportage, from April 1,
1847, to April 1, 1853, have amounted to
847,677 10. The aggregate receipts for tlistri-
hution, from April l.'l848, to April 1, 1853,
have amounted to 80,085 19. Total amount
of receipts for colportage and distribution,
during the ])eriods above mentioned, being
853,702 29. The total increase of receipts from
all sources, the year jjast, amounts to 812,-
052 35, which is nearly 14 per cent, compared
with tlie receipts of 1844. It appears that the
income of the Board has hcca trchleil in ten
years, and. indeed, comj)arcd with that of
1848, the year in which the colporteur enter-
prise commenced, the incn>asc has be<>n nearly
as great, j)rescnting 8103,544 40, instead of
838,213 92, or §G5,330 54 iucrcaso.
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES.
183
The Colporteur Enterprise.—'' This branch of
service is every year increasing in interest, and
opening before the Church most pleasing pros-
pects of great and permanently beneficial re-
sults." The following summary will show
what has been done the past year :
1. Whole number of Colporteurs, 151 ; of
whom one was in India, six in the British Pro-
vinces, three in Maine, two in New nampshire,
twenty-two in New York, /our in New Jersey,
sixteen in Pennsylvania, one in ^Slaryland, two
in Virginia, twelve in North Carolina, six in
South 'Carolina,//l!ee»i in Georgia, two in Flo-
rida, one in Alabama, one in Mississippi, one
in Louisiana, five in Texas, one in Arkansas,
two in Kentucky, one in Michigan, six in Ten-
nessee, nine in Ohio, three in Iowa, fourteen in
Indiana, ten in Illinois, four in Missouri, and
one in AVisconsin ; or 144 distributed in 25
States of the Union.
2. Distribution of Books.— Sales 91,885 vol-
uni&s. Gifts, 9,581 volumes. To which add
28,000 volumes distributed by the Synods of
Pittsburgh (23,000) and Yirginia (5,000), and
6,517 included in the report of donations ; the
total is 135,983 volumes.
Distribution of Tracts.— Bj the colporteurs,
871 547 pao-es ; by the Svnods of Pittsburgh
(25,000) and Virginia (23,000)— 48,000, and
included in the report of donations 381,000 ;
making a total of 1,300,547 pages.
4. Families visited, 05,734 ; and 2,451 in Sy-
nod of Pittsburgh ; total, G8,185.
5. Presbyterian families without the Con-
fession of Faith, 2,340.
6. Families without any religious book ex-
cept the Bible, 1,603.
7. Time spent by colporteurs, 41 years and
a few days.
Of the practical results of this enterprise, the
Board say, in their report :— " By the testimo-
nies of clergymen of our own and other church-
es, as well as those of colporteurs, and by the
opinions of others, well qualified to judge, we are
satisfied that the books of this Board are exert-
ing a most potent and salutary injhmice on the
religious character of our nation. I'his is done, as
well by a positive effect in informing men's
minds and moving their hearts, as by the indi-
rect, but no less valuable operation of convert-
ing wrong tastes and moulding religious think-
ing to some definite shape. The historical,
biographical, and practical works are extend-
ing and deepening the impressions of a com-
mon Christianity and a common Protestantism,
and aiding other influences in fixing upon the
hearts of our people the great principle, that
the Christianity of the Bible is the strong de-
fence, as it is the true source, of our civil and
religious liberty. Of actual conversions through
the instrumentality of books and tracts, our
colporteurs relate numerous pleasing accounts."
Gratuitous Distribution.— Tim Board have
made donations of books and tracts the past
year, exclusive of those given away by colpor-
teurs, to the amount of 5?2,358, viz. : to Sab-
bath-schools, 2,535 volumes; to naval and
military stations and ships-of-war, 142 ; to
humane institutions, 60 ; to literary and theo-
loo-ical institutions, 226 ; to ministers, 850 ;
to° feeble churches, 1376; to individuals for
gratuitous distribution, 1328 ; total volumes,
6,517. and 381,032 pages of tracts ; 9,581 vols,
and 871,547 pages of tracts have been given
away l>y colporteurs.
The a"-i;regate number of volumes giveu
away, independent of the donations made by
colporteurs, from 1847, when the Board com-
menced making donations, to 1854, is 32,285.
The aggregate number of pages of tracts given
away during the same period, is 1,467,300.
The "Mkthodist Book Concern," New
York, is the extensive and enterprising pub-
lishing au-ency of the Methodist Episcopal
Church, North. By a recent decision of the
Courts a pro rata portion of its accumulated
funds have been or are to be paid over to the
Methodist Church, South ; and the latter or-
ganization formed an establishment in 1854,
for publishing at the South. From the im-
perfect data available, we can only give the
facts of 1853-4, as follows: the number of
volumes of general catalogue books printed,
680,500 ; number of Sunday-school books,
1,128,000; number of tract books, 110,000,
making the issues of a single year, of larger
or smaller books, not far from 2,000,000. The
" Sunday-School Advocate," has a circulation
of about 115,000, semi-monthly. The " Mis-
sionary Advocate" has a monthly circulation
of 50,000. The Christian Advocate and
Journal, weekly, a circulation of 33,000. 11)0
statistics of the " Concern" at Cincinnati, 0.,
are not included, for the most part, in the
above.
The Americax Baptist Publication So-
ciety was formed in 1824. Its publications,
denominational and general, now number 450,
of which 208 are volumes. Of the tracts, 218
are in English, 15 in German and 3 in French.
The receipts for 1853-4 were S49,612, of
which §35,218 were for sales of publications.
The number of colporteurs employed was 62,
includino: 13 students for short periods, who
sold 18,866 books; granted 609 books and
236,308 pages of tracts ; visited 32,690 fami-
lies and 3,758 vessels and canal boats ; held
1,081 meetings ; preached 1,558 sermons, and
organized lO' churches, and 7 Sunday-schools.
The Society has a building fund of ^25,000.
CONCiREfiATIONAL BOARD OF PUBLICATION.
The Doctrinal Tract Society was formed in
1829. For about 20 years its operations were
confined to the publication of Doctrinal
'J'racts. setting forth and defending the doc-
trinal views, which have from the beginning,
distinguished the leading divines among the
orthodox Congregationalists of New England.
In 1850, its constitution was revised, so as to
embrace the publication of books ; llev. Sew-
184
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES.
all Harding, was apjoointed Secretary and
General Agent ; and an act of incorporation
was obtained. The object of the Society is
thus stated in the second article of its consti-
tution :
" It is the object of this Society to procure
and circulate such tracts and books, as are
adapted to explain, prove, vindicate and illus-
tiate the peculiar and essential doctrines of the
gospel, and to discriminate between genuine and
spurious religious aflectious and experience."
In their report for 1852, the Executive Com-
mittee say : " In pursuance of this object, the
Society first published a scries of tracts, forty-
five in number, on important subjects of Chris-
tian doctrine and practice. More recently they
have given their attention to the publication
of books ; and they design to make this Soci-
ety, for the Congregational churches of our
land, what the Presbyterian Board of Publi-
cation is for the Presbyterian churches. And |
it might be appropriately called, as it is in
fact, the Congregational Board of Publication.
We have commenced the work of publishing
the writings of the ^most distinguished New
England theologians ; and we hope to be able
to continue this, until we have issued editions
of the works of that class of men, so distin-
guished for their theological acumen, and
whose writings and labors have been so highly
appreciated, and so signally blessed, in the
formation and prosperity of our religious char-
acter and institutions."
LIST OF PRINCIPAI, BOOK AND TKACT SOCIETIES.
American
" Boston
' ' Miscellaneous
Basle, Switzerland
Prussian, Berlin
Calcutta and otliers, India
Evangelical Society, Brussels . .
Jaffna, Ceylon
Italian Committee, Geneva
Lower Saxony, Hamburg
Hamburg Mission
Monthly Rel. London
Paris
Stirling, Scotl'nd (Peter Drum-
TOond) _
St. Pctersburgh, Russia
Stocliliolm, Sweden
Toulouse, France
Toronto
Copenhagen, Sweden
Rel. Tract Society, London ....
Soc. for Promoting Rel. Knowl. 1
England j
Meth. Epis. Tract Society
" Book Concern
" " " (South)
Pres. Board of Publication . .
Bap. Board of Pub
Cong. Board of Pub
Evang. Knowl. Soc. Prot. Epis.
ai
1825
1814
1844
1816
1823
1839
1825
1848
1820
183(3
1837
1820
1847
1830
1808
1835
1820
1799
1750
1853
1854
1840
1824
1854
TOTAL OECULATION.
220,000,000
* 4,217,000
* 6,783,000
2,000,000
2,000,000
25,000,000
2,000,000
8,500,000
1,000,000
7,500,000
1,733,475
2,000,000
11,604,570
10,000.000
4,396,000
1,000,000
600,000,000
20,000,000
/ for 1853-4,
I 2,000,000 books.
f vob. 202,945,
t tracts, 2,131,450
* l^evious to 1825.
For Sunday-School Publication Societies, see Sundav-
Schools. ' ^
General Increase op Eeligious Books. —
The foregoing statements show the most grat-
ifying results of the Christian press, in furnish-
ing to the masses a truly Christian literature.
But vast and beyond calculation as they appear,
they by no means present a complete view of
the immense diffusion of religious truth, by
this instrumentality, for the last half century.
The improvements in the art of printing, the
more general diffusion of wealth, the enterprise
of Christian societies, and the progress of reli-
gion, have greatly stimulated the production
and circulation of books, and especially good
books. In England, a century ago, the sales
of books and periodicals amounted to less than
$500,000 per annum. Now, they exceed $10,-
500,000. In 1471, Sweyuheim and Pannartz,
printers at Kome, whose entire stock of books
was 12,000 volumes, tell the Pope, in a peti-
tion, "You will admire how and where we
could procure a sufiBcient quantity of paper, or
even rags, for such a number of volumes,"
which 1,000 reams of paper would have i^ro-
duced 1 Isaiah Thomas, in his History of the
Art of Printing, says, " The paper manufac-
tured and used for book printing (in 1810) may
be calculated at about 70,000 reams, (probably
equal in weight and size to 30,000 reams of
the style now used,) a considerable part of
which is used for spelling and other small
school-books. The price, at $3 50 a ream,
amounts to $245,000, and it may weigh about
630 tons." Such was the book-trade in this
country less than forty years ago. In 1848.
the sum of $142,122 was paid for paper alone
by the American Bible, Tract, and Sunday-
school societies — $67,000 by the Tract Society
— an amount exceeding one-half the amount
paid in the whole country in 1810. Probably
a single private publishing house pay as much
as all these societies together — possibly as
much as all publishers in 1810.
As late as 1825, publishers of religious books
often resorted to subscriptions to secure them-
selves from loss. Such works as are now abun-
dant, at the lowest prices, could hardly be
procured at bookstores ; and bookstores were
few in number, and of doubtful success. An
examination of the files of the New York 01>
server shows that the whole number of reli-
gious books noticed in any way in its columns
in 1826, was seventeen. For months together,
there was no advertisement of a religious book.
Scott's Commentary was offered for $24. In
1835, the " new publication " list had twenty-
four new books by the trade. At this period
commenced the vigorous prosecution of the
" volume circulation " by the American Tract
Society, and other institutions were stimulated
to effort, or brought into being. The issues
of the book-trade rapidly increased, and, in
1841, the Observer's "new publication" list
noticed one hundred and twcntijfive religious
works by the trade — exclusive of all by pub-
lishing societies — or five times ax many as in
BRAHMINS.
185
1835. In 1841, colportage, or the systematic
circulation of good books, especially among
the destitute, commenced, and it has been con-
stantly increasing since. Otlier institutions
have greatly extended their efibrts for the dis-
tribution of good books. But the book-trade
has also stretched forward its successful enter-
prises simultaneously ; and one Itundrcd and
sixty-eight religious books issued by the trade,
are noticed in the Observer of 1848, or an ad-
vance of seven hundred per cent, on the issues
of 1835. Publishers now issue editions of
3,000 or 5,000 copies of such books, as in 1826,
they would have regarded it hazardous to pub-
lish, except by subscription. The bookselling-
business was never so safe, lucrative, and pros-
perous as now. Several extensive houses are
engaged exclusively in the publication of reli-
gious books ; and it is probable that cne of
them issues more practical religious works an-
nually, than were sold by the whole corps of
booksellers in the United States twenty-five
years ago. Thus showing that the j^roduction
and circulation of cheap religious books by
benevolent societies, while it may deprive the
ti-ade of a certain class of books, far more than
compensates for this loss by the taste which it
creates for solid and religious reading.
The foregoing statements respecting the
operations of benevolent institutions, including
the Christian press, show that they are the
right arm of the missionary enterprise, in all
lands. The domestic missionary who wisely
avails himself of the aid he may derive from
Sabbath-school publications, tracts, books and
periodicals, either as a means of edification and
salvation for the people of his charge, or as an
instrumentality for extending his influence be-
yond the boundaries of his congregation, may
multiply his power for good indefinitely. And,
by calling in the help of a faithful colporteur,
to penetrate the ' regions beyond,' and convey
the knowledge of Christ to the destitute and
erring whom he may not personally reach, the
leaven of the Gospel may be made to pervade
the masses of the people, and a demand be crea-
ted for pulpit ministrations, such as might not
exist in long years, were these auxiliary in-
fluences neglected or overlooked. And so of
the Foreign Missionary. If succeeding gener-
ations of missionaries are to profit by the ex-
perience of their predecessors, the results of
that experience must be committed to the
press. If the schools on heathen ground are
to be made the som-ce of abiding good, there
must be a Christian literature provided for the
generations of readers thus trained. If the G os-
pel is to be proclaimed beyond the restricted
precincts of the several missions, and any
considerable portion of the existing generation
of heathen are to have the word of lite, it must
be conveyed to them by the priutetl page. If
the mountains of superstition and error and
ignorance are to be lifted ofl' from the heathen
mind, the lever of the press must be applied.
If the advances made from year to year iu the
acquisition of languages and in the adaptation
of truth to simple minds, are to be perpetuated,
the missionaries must employ their peng, and
the printing-press must embody and multiply
the results of missionary toil. The stupendous
undertaking of printinga Christian literature/or
the world must be prosecuted with steady zeal
and enlarged liberality. The improvements
constantly making in all that relates to the
printing art must be potent to the missionary
cause ; and the religious literatm-e of standard
worth in the English laugnage must be made
the heritage of the reading world. The sys-
tems of aggressive Christian effort n^^w asso-
ciated with the press in America, should be-
come a part of the machinery of missions uni-
versally ; so that native piety may find active
employment, and the unevangelized hordes be
approached with adapted agencies for their
elevation and salvation. Way-side, fire-side
preaching, oral and printed, should attend and
complement the more formal proclamations of
divine truth, until the time comes when none
need say to his brother, " know the Lord,
for all shall know him from the least even
unto the greatest."
BOODALOOR : A station of the Gospel
Propagation Society in India.
BOOTAN : A village in the district of
Maulmain in Burmah — an out-station of the
Maulmain Baptist mission.
EORABORA : One of the Society Islands
and a station of the London Missionary So-
ciety.
BORNEO : See Indian Archipelago.
BOSJESMANS : The same as Bushmen,
which see.
BRAHMA : The supreme god of the
Hindoos. In Hindustani, the word is a neuter *
noun, derived by grammarians from the verb
brih to grow, and the sufQx man, and thus
means that which grows, or the Supreme Being
regarded under the aspect of development, and
revealed by the creation of w^orlds. The word,
however, is used in a secondary sense, also,
and means the Supreme Absolute Spirit, not
regarded as a creative force, but shut up in
himself without external manifestations of any
kind.
BRAHMINS : The name employed to
designate that body or order of priests, who
have always been the sole guardians, precep-
tors and ministers of the Hindoo religion.
This order is of extreme antiquity, and they
and their followers are universally acknowl-
edged as a tribe sprung from the Caucasian
variety of the human species. Their sacred
books or vedas represent them as invading In-
dia from the north-west, through Afghanistan
and the Punjaub, at a very early period, when
they seem to have made more considerable pro-
gress in literature, philosophy, mathematics
and medicine, than their cotemporaries in
other regions of the world.
186
BRAIIMIXISM.
BEAHMINISM : The religion of the Brah-
mins, which is the prevailing religion of Hiii-
doostan, and professed by about 1 50,000,000 of
people, is one of the grossest impositions ever
made upon an ignorant and degraded people,
by a corrupt and avaricious priesthood, bear-
ing, in many particulars, a striking resem-
blance to Poi^ery.
Ideas of God. — The Hindoos, in general, en-
tertain vague, incongruous, and unworthy no-
tions of the Deity. Some call him the invisi-
ble and ever blessed ; others ascribe to him a
form ; others suppose he exists like an incon-
ccivalaly small atom ; sometimes he is repre-
sented as male, and at other times, as female ;
sometimes both male and female, producing a
world by conjugal union ; sometimes the ele-
ments assume his place, and at other times he
is a deified hero. According to the Hindoo
theology, Brahme, the great Being, is the
supreme, eternal, uncreated Being. Bramha,
the first created being, by whom he made and
governs the world, is the prince of good spir-
its.— Yeeshnu, or Vishnoo, is the great pre-
server of men. He is said to have appeared
on earth nine times, in so many incarnations.
Seeva, or Siva, is the destroyer. This three-
fold divinity, armed with almighty power, has
under him no less than 333,000,000 of inferior
deities. These are represented in innumerable
forms, by dumb idols of wood and stone. The
Hindoos also worship men, coics, monkeys, ti-
gers, serpents, trees, stones, rivers, and even Satan
himself.
Character of their gods. — The Hindoo gods
are represented as practising without restraint
every species of wickedness that caa be im-
agined ; and their sacred books are filled with
details of these disgusting abominations, too
polluting to be recited. In obscenity, nothing
can be compared with one of these sacred
books, called BhagaAvata. Tet it is the de-
light of the Hindoos, and the first book they
put in the hands of their children ; as if they
deliberately intended to form them to dissolute
habits. The most frightful images are made
as representations of their gods. Doorga, the
wife of Siva or Seeva, the Destroyer, is repre-
sented with a frowning countenance and naked
breast. Her right foot treads on a lion. She
has four hands, in one of which she holds an
infant by the hair of the head, while its body
is pierced through with a trident she holds in
the second hand. The other two hands are
fi^llod with weapons of destniction ; and she is
ornamented with a necklace of human skulls.
Siva, also, is represented in a most terrific
form, ornamented with serpents, covered with
the ashes of a funeral pile, alighting in cemeter-
ies, and accompanied by a train of ghosts and
goblins. In this character, human victims, or
the blood of beasts, is necessary to appease
their wrath.
Character of their Priesthood. — The Brah-
mins are the legal priests of Ilindoostau ; and
from tlicni it is called Brahminism. They ex-
alt themselves above every other class of their
countrymen. They are arrogant, subtle, ava-
ricious, deceitful, selfish, and vicious. They
make great pretensions to learning and sanc-
tity ; while they are really ignorant and es-
ceedingly dissolute and destitute of principle,
Hindooism, from the foundation to the top-
stone, is one cold system of selfishness. Its
ultimate object is the aggrandizement of the
priesthood ; and to accomplish this, they keep
the people in darkness and ignorance. Their
sacred books are kept in a language unknown
and forbidden to the people, and can be ex-
plained only by the Brahmins. All learning
is monopolized by them ; and the people are
discouraged from any attempts to elevate their
intellectual condition. In their domestic and
social capacity, nothing can be done without a
Brahmin ; and a Brahmin cannot work with-
out a fee or a feast. All oflerings made to the
gods, go to these avaricious priests ; and the
giving of presents and distribution of money
to Brahmins is the most eflfectual way of gain-
ing the favor of the gods, and obtaining the
pardon of sin. The Brahmin is revered as a
god, and addressed and worshiped as a god.
The people fall down before him, and lick the
very dust of his feet. They believe that the
Brahmin can, by his enchantments and right-
eousness, control both the gods and men ; and
this gives him a wonderful preeminence. In
all things he domineers over the multitude ;
works on their fears ; turns every superstition
to his own account ; and takes every advan-
tage of their ignorance, superstition, and cre-
dulity, to enrich himself and increase his
power. The pride and dissimulation, and the
intrigue and dishonesty of a Brahmin, are
proverbial.
Religious Mendicants. — Monkery is a very
necessary appendage to every system of priests
craft ; and, of course, might be expected to
find a place in Brahminism. The monks of
Brahminism, like those of Popery, are divided
into numerous classes ; and several of the
highest of these classes are only open to the
Brahmins. Some persons become ascetics by
inheritance, and in consequence, enjoy certain
revenues ; others become such from necessity ;
others, on account of their pretended sanctity
and abstraction from the world ; others, on
account of a vow, devote themselves to what
they call a religious life. Most of them pre-
tend to be religious teachers. The Hindoos
entertain the iclea that religion is some wild
vagary, attainable only by priests and devo-
tees, but not practicable for people in common
life. 1'hese Religious Orders are beggars by
profession ; and it is esteemed meritorious to
give to them. They are a great scourge to the
country, contributing greatly not only to im-
poverish it, but also to corrupt and debase the
morals of the people. These idle and pretend-
ed devotees assemble sometimes in armies of
BRAH^^NISM.
18T
ten or twelve tlaousand, and, under pretense of
making pilgrimages to certain temples, lay
whole countries under contribution. They ai-e
generally robust and stout. They wear no
clothes, and commit all manner of excesses.
These men inflict voluntary penances upon
themselves, of an extraordinary character.
They sometimes hold up one arm, in a fixed
position, till it becomes stiff, and remains in
that situation during the rest of their lives.
Some clench their fists very hard, and keep
them so till their nails grow into their palms,
and appear through the back of their hands.
Others turn their faces over their shoulders,
and keep them so, till they fix their heads
looking backwards. By sucljjr means they in-
crease their celebrity, and become objects of
greater veneration. The supposed Ibolimss of
these men seems to sanctify, in the minds of
the people, all their licentiousness and abomi-
nations.
Character of their Worship. — From what wc
have seen of the character of their gods, it
may be readily perceived what kind of wor-
ship would be supposed to be pleasing to them.
The most unbridled and disgusting licentious-
ness is made a part of the public worship of
these false gods ; and every temple has a com-
pany of dancing girls, who are married to the
fvds, and are kept for purposes of impurity,
n the presence of some of the most celebrated
idols, among which is Juggernaut, all distinc-
tions of sex and caste are abolished, so that
men may gratify their evil desires with impu-
n.itv.
hindoo notions of sin. — The notions of sin,
inculcated in the Hindoo sacred books, like
pvery other part of the system, are calculated
^x> exalt the priesthood. Even the Brahmins,
their religious teachers, show the most stupid
deficiency in distinguishing between good and
evil. They call good evil, and evil good ;
light darkness, and darkness light. Lying is
good, if it result in immediate benefit ; to
speak the truth is evil, if it terminate in im-
mediate loss. Meats and drinks, divers wash-
ings and corporeal inflictions, make up their
righteousness, while sin is really but a trans-
gression of the laws of caste. To lie, steal,
cheat, deceive, commit adultery, and wallow
like swine in moral turpitude, is too trifling a
thing to be named ; it is only what their gods
did before them. But to eat with a man of
another caste, however respectable he may be,
or to drink out of the same cup, is a sin only
pardonable by a large sum of money. He who
breaks his word with a Brahmin, or occasions
him any detriment, directly or indirectly, in
his temporal concerns, will, according to the
Hindoo scriptures, be condemned, in his second
birth, to become a devil. He will not be per-
mitted to dwell on the earth or live in the air ;
but will be obliged to make his abode in a
thick forest, among the branches of a bushy
tree, where he shall never cease to groan by
night and day, cursing his unhappy lot, and
deprived of all food but toddy, mixed with the
slaver of a dog, which he shall drink out of the
skull of a death's head. It is in this way that
offences, imaginary or of small account, are
menaced with endless punishment ; while
adulterers, perjurers, robbers, and other real
offenders, are absolved by the Brahmins of
their actual crimes, for selfish objects, and as-
sured of a recompense after death.
Himloo ideas of Atonement. — The fact that
all false systems of religion contain devices of
atonement for sin, is a strong testimony that
an atonement is necessary ; while the Gospel
of Jesus Christ alone reveals the only true and
rational method of reconciliation between of-
fending man and offended Deity. But, the
blind heathen, conscious of his guilt, resorts
to vain and foolish expedients for taking away
sin. Brahminism abounds in atonements.
Holy bathing, reading the shastras, pilgrimage,
fasting, giving to the Brahmins, feeding devo-
tees or religious beggars, building temples, with
the endless routine of sacrifices, penances, and
religious austerities, which make up a very im-
portant part of Hindooism, constitute their
atonements for sin. Some of these penances
are very expensive, and most of them attended
with great bodily mortifications ; while others
are disgusting, filthy, and degrading. Among
these are, drinking the water in which a Brah-
min has washed his foot, and taking atonement
■pills, which are composed of the milks, curds,
clarified butter, and excrement of a cow. A
man in Bombay had been performing a penance
of a very painful character for sixteen years.
He sat in a miserable shed, holding on his left
hand a vessel of about ten pounds weight,
which contains the sacred shrub. His whole
arm was withered, and the finger nails had shot
out like ram's horns, five or six inches in length.
Another man sat in the open air, for three
months, during the coldest part of the year,
almost naked ; confining himself to a spot about
eight feet in diameter. Passing a rod of iron
through the tongue ; hanging suspended by
the legs from a tree, over a slow burning fire,
inhaling the smoke and sparks ; leaping on a.
plank set full of sharpened plates of iron ;
lying on a bed made of a plank set with iron
spikes ; looking at the meridian sun for whole
days in succession ; falling on the face, mark-
ing the place of the head, rising and falling
again from the marks, and repeating this, till
a specified distance has been measured ; swing-
ing through the air, suspended from a hook in-
serted in the back ; and other penances, too
numerous and too foolish to be mentioned, are
resorted to as expedients for taking away sin,
and accumulating righteousness. And their
sacred books prescribe even the most indecent
crimes, as atonements for sin.
Fate — Accountability. — The Hindoos are the
most cold-blooded fatalists in the world. Every
occurrence in life is, according to their notions.
188
BRAHMINISM.
the result of dire necessity. If they are pros-
perous, it is fate. If they are in distress, it is
fate. To Ho, cheat, or steal, isfate. To be
idle, dissipated, poor, and imprisoned, is fate.
The poor sufferer apparently feels no remorse
that his own sin has brought misery on him.
lie only curses his hard fate. When the cri-
minal is detected and condemned, he seems
never to regard himself as suffering the just
penalty of the law ; it is all fate. The Hindoo
writings teach, that it is the Great Spirit
which is diffused through every form of ani-
mated matter ; that actions of every kind are
his. By this doctrine, all accountability is de-
stroyed, and liability to punishment rendered
preposterous.
Notio)v> of Futuritij. — The Hindoo scriptures
teach that the soul must pa.ss, in certain
circumstances, into eight million four hundred
thousand different animal bodies, after it leaves
the human. Yet, the people are wholly in the
dark on the subject of futurity. They say
they can know nothing about it. Bej'ond the
present life, all is impenetrable darkness to the
Hindoos.
Different Ages of the World. — The Hindoos
hold that there are four ages of the world, the
first three of which are already past. The
first was the golden age, of 1,728,000 years
duration ; the second, the silver age of 1,296,000
years ; the third, the brazen age, of 804,000
years ; and the fourth, which is the present,
the iron age, of 432,000 years. They believe
that in the fii-st age, men were as tall as trees,
and lived many thousand years : but as every
age became worse and worse, the people dimin-
ished in size, and their lives were shortened ;
that even the Brahmins themselves, the gods
of the people, have lost their holinass, and are
now filled with covetousness and many vices.
Thus they account for the prevailing vice and
degradation, instead of tracing it to the depra-
vity of their own hearts.
Caste. — There is no part of the Hindoo sys-
tem, which e.xerts such despotic sway, and so
effectually prevents all improvement, as caste.
They were originally divided into four castes
or tribes, viz., the liralunins, the Kshatriyas or
Kdras, the Vaiiiija.% or 7i/cc.>-, and the Sudrcs or
Saoders, each of which is again subdivided into
a large number of branclics. Every indivi-
dual remains invariably in the caste in which
he was born, practices its duties, and is debar-
red from evi-r aspiring to a higher, whatever
may be his merit or his genius. 'J'he members
of each tribe must adhere invariably to the
profession of their ancestors, and continue from
generation to generation, to pursue one uni-
form walk of Hie. In con.sequence of this un-
natural distinction of caste, all motives to ex-
ertion, imiuiry, or improvement, are completely
extinguished among the Hindoos ; for the most
honorable actions, the most beneficial discov-
eries, the most virtuous conduct, secure no re-
spect or i-dvantagc to a person of inferior
caste. None of the high castes will cat with
any of the low castes. The fourth and most
numerous castes are the Sudres or Sooders.
Their business is servile labor ; and whenever
the original spirit of the institution has not
been infringed on, their degradation is inhu-
man. They are compelled to work for the
Brahmins, being considered as created solely
for their use. They are not allowed to collect
property because such a spectacle would give
pain to the Brahmins. To them, the Vedas,
or sacred books, must never be read. There
is also a race of the most degraded and uni-
versally insulted outcasts, called Parayas. In
many {ilaces, their very approach is sufBcient
to pollute a whole neighborhood. They must
not enter a street where the Brahmins live.
When they transgress, the higher classes will
not assault them, for it is pollution even to
touch them with a long pole ; but through the
medium of others, they often beat them at
pleasure, and sometimes put them to death,
without dispute or inquiry. For every species
of labor, there is a distinct class of men. This
division of labor is regulated according to
caste. The divisions of the former, however,
are so much more extensive than the nominal
grades of the latter, that different individuals
of the same caste are engaged in different oc-
cupations. Still, whatever be a man's capaci-
ties, he can never rise above the calling of his
father. He will perform only that kind of
labor to which his own subdivision of caste
are accustomed. One man of low caste may
be a dobee or washerman, and another of the
same caste, a coolie or carrier of burdens, and
a third, a palanquin bearer. But a dobee
would scorn to act as a coolie. Even the foot
pedlar will not carry his own pack of goods ;
nor will the Hindoo servant, who provides for
his masters table, bring from the market a
piece of meat, or a basket of vegetables. He
must employ a coolie. The coolie in his turn
can do nothing that does not come within the
sphere of his business. The first missionaries
in Southern India uiulcrtook to accommodate
Christianity to the jircvailing prejudices of the
people. The Rev. Hollis Bead, who has tra-
veled extensively among the Hindoos, regartls
caste as one of the most exceptionable features
of Hindooism ; and the Bishop of Calcutta has
become so well convinced of its utter incon-
sistency with Christianity, that he has address-
ed two charges to the missionaries of the
Church of England, requiring them no longer
to tolerate the distinction of caste in the na^
five churches. " The main barrier to" all per-
manent improvement," says he, " is the heathen
usages of caste, in the Christian churches."
He says, " the different castes sat on ditlerent
mats, on different sides of the church, to which
they entered liy different doors. They ap-
proached the Jjord's table at different times,
and had once different cups, or nuinaged to get
the catechists to change the cuji, Ijcforc the
BRAHMINISM.
189
lower castcB began to communicate; they
would allow no persons at baptism, of an in-
ferior caste ; and they had separate divisions
in the burial grounds." The usages of caste
enter so deeply into the social constitution of
the Hindoos, that every thing is affected by it.
4 It creates great inconvenience, and constitutes
the greatest barrier against improvement either
of the social or religious condition of the peo-
ple. There can be nothing more at variance
with the spirit of the Gospel than the spirit of
caste.
Rev. Dr. Allen, late missionary at Bombay,
makes the following statements respecting the
bearing of Caste upon the missionary work :
" The missionaries of the American Board,
in India and Ceylon, have always required a
renunciation of Caste, just as much as of idol-
atry, and other parts of heathenism, of all con-
verts before they were baptized. No arrange-
meats, nor accommodations, nor changes have
ever been made in the seats, or in the sitting
in the churches, or in the administration of the
ordinances on account of the Caste. Caste
was in no respect recognized. All were treated
as of one class, as nuich as Christians in this
country are so treated.
" It would naturally be expected that such
a public renunciation of Caste, and such sub-
sequent treatment of it, would be sufficient to
extinguish it in the church. But experience
has shown that it was not sufficient. Caste
has been found to be surprisin^y insidious in
its influence ; and to be capal)le of assuming
almost any complexion and shape, suited to the
native character and their circumstances. In
some places, as in the north part of Ceylon,
Caste, though religious iu its origin, yet retains
now but little of its religious character. It
has now become chiefly a social distinction,
and is valued as conferring personal and fam-
ily respectability. In proportion as it loses its
religious character, it becomes easy for those
v.'ho have abandoned it to be restored to their
former state. This state of feeling in the com-
munity presents a constant motive for those
native Christians who were originally of high
Caste, to abstain from those things iu their
habits, and from those persons in their social
intercourse, which afiect their personal or fam-
ily respectability. In such circumstances,
Caste becomes analogous to the civil distinc-
tions of society, and resembles those antipa-
thies and aversions -which exist between differ-
ent classes and races of people.
" Tlie lower castes are also very unclean in
thf-ir food, drink, &c. In some districts where
I have l)een, their food consisted chiefly of
cattle and other creatures, that died of tfem-
selves in the adjacent cities and villages. They
appeared almost to li\'e on carrion, and their
roads and houses arc exceedingly offensive, dis-
gusting and filthy. Now the Brahmins never
eat any kind of meat ; and the Hindoos of all
respectable castes hold the eating of beef in the
greatest abhorrence. With what feelings, then,
must all such castes regard the Pariars or
Parayas and Mahars ; and what must be their
involuntary shrinking from contact, or close
personal intimacy with them ? The Brahmins
and other high castes naturally and necessarily
feel far more aversion to associate intimately
with Mahars and Pariars, and to have personal
contact with them, than the most refined and
delicate people in this country would feel in
associating intimately with the most degraded
and filthy.
" It should not appear strange, then, in view
of these things, if persons recently converted
from the darkness and ignorance of heathen-
ism, should yield to the influence and motives
which continually surround them, and exhibit
the feelings, and perform, or refuse to perform
the actions which are ascribed to Caste ; esp^
cially when they know what respect was for-
merly shown to such feelings and actions by
some of the best men, (as Schwartz, and his
fellow-laborers,) ever engaged in the mission-
ary cause ; and know also, how such feelings
and actions are still regarded in some native
churches, and by some missionaries. Feelings
of this character are sometimes developed un-
expectedly and in much strength, where none
were supposed to exist. These facts show the
importance of continually watching such a
hydra-headed monster as Caste. Yarioas
ways and means have been tried to develop
these feelings, and so to extinguish, as far as
possible, the spirit in which they originate.
" The Madras Missionary Conference ' re-
commend a love feast, at which all the mem-
bers of the church, including the pastor and
teachers, shall partake of a simple and suitable
repast.' This custom has been observed in the
missions of the American Board, and with
very good effect. When the spirit of Caste
at these meetings, or on any other occasions,
lias appeared, it has been made the subject of
admonition, or suspension, or exclusion from
the church, according to the nature of the
offence.
'• During a residence of more than a quarter
of a century iu India, I had opportunities of
seeing missionary operations and mission
churclies in Bengal, in Madras, in Ceylon, and
in Bombay ; and I can fully concur in the sen-
timent of the Madras Missionary Conference,
that ' Caste is one of the greatest obstacles to
the progress of the Gospel in India. It meets
and thwarts the missionary, not only in bear-
ing the unsearchable riches of Christ to the
unconverted Hindoos, but also in building up
the native church in faith and love ; and to
tolerate it in any form, is to oppose the law of
Christ.' And again, in a communication of
a subsequent date, they say, ' We have long
regarded Caste as a most formidable opponent
to genuine Christianity, and a deadlier enemy,
in some respects, to the souls of this people,
than even idolatry. We are called to unceas-
190
BRAHMINISM.
ing effort to extingTiisli its spirit and power in
native Christians who have openly renounced
it.' ' Caste is a deadlier enemy to the souls of
the Hindoos than idolatry,' on account of its
assuming, as experience shows, almost any
complexion— adapting itself to circumstances
and exigencies, and then again assuming its
positive character. In the system of Hindoo-
ism, it is decidedly religious in its nature — and
yet, in connection with the Danish and Ger-
man missions, it became so far divested of its
religious character that it was admitted into
the church, and there tolerated for a long time,
as containing only civil and social distinctions
not inconsistent with the principle and spirit
of Cliristianity. After it had gained admis-
sion into the native Christian community, it
again assumed a religious character, and those
of high Caste became as much attached to it,
and as reluctant to abandon its usages, as the
heathen around them. And considering how
little was known of the nature of this peculiar
feature of Hindooism, when the first mission-
aries of the Board went to India and Ceylon,
and the state of the Protestant churches in
India, in connection with the high character
and great veneration of Schwartz and his fel-
low-laborers, who formed these churches and
presided over them, there is cause for gratitude
and thankfulness, that Caste has never been
knoinngly admitted into any of our mission
churches ; has never been recognized by any
arrangements to favor it ; and when its spirit
has been manifested in any manner which has
called for the consideration of the missionaries
and their churches, discipline has been admin-
istered in the way of admonition, suspension,
and excommunication, according to the nature
of the offence. Thus, while in looking back
we sec reason to thank Cod, the present state
of this caiLsc is such, that in looking forward
wc see rea.'^on to take courage."
Superxtitions.^-Uikv: the votaries of all false
religions, the Hindoos arc very superstitious.
And. in [iroportion to their ignorance and de-
gradation, their absurd superstitions have do-
minion over them. There is scarce an occur-
rence in life, which, to the superstitious Hindoo,
is not oniiiidus of good or evil ; and scarcely
an hour of the day when he is not bound to
the performance of some ceremony, or not
made a slave to some superstition. He leaves
his house in the morning ; but if ho sees a bird
fly in a wrong direction, or meets an animal
of ill-omen, or first sees a per.sou of a certain
caste, or any object betokening ill, he must re-
turn, and relinfjuish his enterprise, and perhajw
may nut go out of his house again that day.
These .suiierstltions are of endless variety ; and
Duly a few will be Kpecified here. The cholera
is regarded n.'* n mnlignant goddess, whom they
worship, in order to deprecate her anger. They
believe that this goddess walks to and fro, up
and down the earth, nfflicting the poople in
one place, and tlieu moving off to another,
where she commences the same work without
mercy or compassion. In order to propitiate
this malignant demon, they make offerings of
rice, ghee, flowers, fruits, and the like, and sa-
crifice to her sheep, goats, buffaloes, and fowls.
Consistently with their belief, they cannot take
medicine for the cholera. The only way is to
exorcise the demon. This, they pretend, may
be done by the muntra, which is the grand
charm of the Brahmias. This beaj-s a very
prominent place in the Hindoo religion. It is
a mystic verse or incantation, the repetition of
which is declared to be attended with the most
wonderful effects. None but Brahmins and
the higher order of Hindoos, are allowed to
repeat it. The lower castes are forbidden to
repeat or even hear it, on pain of eternal tor-
ment. All things arc subservient to the num-
tra. The gods themselves cannot resist it. It
is the essence of the Vedas, or sacred books ;
it is the united power of Bramha, Vishnoo,
and Siva. By its magic power, it confers all
sanctity ; pardons all sin ; secures all good,
temporal and spiritual, and procures everlast-
ing blessedness in the world to come. It pos-
sesses the wonderful charm of interchanging
good for evil, truth for falsehood, light for
darkness, and of confirming such perversions
by the most holy sanctions. There is nothing
so difficult, so silly, or so absurd, that it may
not be achieved by this extraordinary numtra.
As might be expected, it is employed very ex-
tensively for removing pains, for the curing of
diseases, the bite of venomous snakes, «Src., kc.
But the cholera is by no means the only disease
which is supposed to be the effect of an evil
spirit ; or of some animal or other object in
the part affected. Every disease is represent-
ed as possessed of a bodily form. A liver
complaint is said to be caused by a crab, who
is eating the liver ; a cough, by a large cater-
pillar in the throat ; the tooth-ache, from the
gnawings of a little worm in the decayed tooth.
The Hindoos believe that if they look at the
moon on a certain day, they shall be instantly
struck dead. Nothing will induce a man to
raise his eyes to the moon on that day.
The Hindoo sacred books abound with di-
rections about such frivolous things as cleaning
the teeth, bathing and washing, cooking and
eating, washing or drying clothes, &c., there
being some lucky or unlucky omen connected
with the particular manner in which every
thing is done. Of these, only a very few spo-
cinieiis can be given. Eating with the face to
the east, ensures long life; with it to the
.M)ulh, celebrity ; to the west, wealth ; to the
north, pecuniary embarrassment. If, before
eating, they do not make a circular mark, with
water, around where they set the dish, it is said
the demons will devour the food. On the tinst
day of the moon, he who cats a pumpkin be-
comes indigent. Ignorance follows eating the
tocoinmt on the eighth. It is said to be sinful
to cat bcana on the eleventh; and so on, through
BRAHMINISM.
191
the whole month. He who puts on new apparel
ou Sunday, becomes poor ; on Monday, is
afflicted with boils ; on Tuesday, is subject to
much trouble ; ou Wednesday, will have means
of purchasing new clothes ; ou Thursday, will
become learned and happy ; on Saturday, will
be involved in trouble and disputes. He who
shaves on Sunday, becomes miserable ; ou
Monday, happy ; on Tuesday, hastens his own
death ; on Wednesday, accumulates wealth ;
on Thursday, becomes dishonorable ; on Fri-
day, chiklless ; on Saturday, brings on his head
every misfortune. And, so on, to every action
of life. To sneeze, when one is about to sit
down, or lie down, or eat, or is dressing, or be-
stowing gifts, is highly inauspicious. These
are but a few, among a vast multitude of such
ridiculous notions, by which the minds of the
people are held in bondage. Their notions of
ceremonial impurity are also equally burden-
some and inconvenient.
The Hindoos believe that a person about to
be executed, imparts an extraordinary sanctity
to every thing he touches. For this reason, he
throws flowers, fruits, and spices, to the crowd
about the gibbet, who eagerly catch them, and
preserve them as a sort of charm. In one in-
stance, they actually worshiped the dead car-
cass of a man who had been executed, while
hanging on the gibbet, in consequence of a re-
port that miraculous cures had been experienc-
ed by touching his body. Amulets are almost
universally worn by the Hindoos, for prevent-
ing or curing diseases and the bite of serpents.
The Hindoos suffer exceedingly, on account of
their superstitions in reference to sickness and
disease. Many a wretched creature spends all
his living for the prescriptions of some quack,
or drags out a miserable existence, and dies in
the midst of the charms and the enchantments
of the Brahmin. The number of the blind,
lame, maimed, leprous, and diseased in India,
is astonishingly great ; and no doubt one prin-
cipal reason for this is the bad treatment, or
the want of good treatment, in the original
complaint. They have a singular superstition
respecting the eclii^se of the sun. They sup
pose that a kind of corporeal divinity, very
malignant and mischievous, very black, foul,
and impure, seizes on the sun, blackens it as
with ink, and thus infects and obscures it.
The sun, which they suppose to be a similar
divinity, but of a benevolent and perfect order,
is put iuto extreme pain and terrible anguish,
at thus seeing himself seized and tortured by
the monster ; and in order to relieve him of
this distress, they make use of many prayers
and foolish ceremonies. There is no slavery
so grievous as the slavery of superstition ; and
none which so much exposes an ignorant peo-
ple to the cupidity of an avaricious priesthood.
Cruelties of Brahminism. — A superstitious
religion is invariably a religion of cruelty.
Such, then, we may expect Hindooism to be.
And, in no respect is this cruelty more conspi-
cuous than in the treatment of females ; but
especially widows and female children. Tlic
Suttee, or burning of widows on the funeral
piles of their husbands, arose from their op-
pressive customs in relation to widows. Reli-
gion and custom have rendered widowhood so
wretched and disgraceful, that the Hindoo
wife, on the demise of her husband, chooses
death rather than so miserable a life. The
widow is stripped of her ornaments, compelled
to wear white clothing, have her head shaven,
and submit to many other tokens of degradar
tion. She is excluded from all ceremonies of
joy ; forbidden to marry, and shut out from re-
spectable society. This is no doubt the cause
of the burning of widows, and burying them
alive with their deceased husbands. The for
mer of these practices, has, however, been
abolished by the British government. When
the aged become burdensome, they are often
dragged to the borders of some sacred river,
by their own children, their mouths filled with
mud, and thus abandoned to die. There is no
benevolence, no disinterestedness, no mercy, in
the Hindoo character. In times of prevailing
disease, this is perspicuously manifest. People
are left to expire unattended, and their bodies
to consume in their own houses. Women, iu
performance of some vow, cast their children,
in cold blood, into the sacred rivers, and coolly
look on, and see them devoured by the sharks.
And, in some sections of the country, a large
portion of the female children are murdered by
their parents as soon as they are born. Surely,
the Hindoos are " without natural affection."
The various tortures resorted to for penance,
also indicate the cruelty of Hindooism.
Holij Days. — These are among the most
fruitful sources of poverty, covetousness, and
depravity, among the Hindoos. Of these, they
have no less than one hundred and forty-five ;
ten of which occur monthly, and twenty-five
are anniversaries. When it is considered that,
ou these days, they abai\dou all their employ-
ments, and give themselves up to all manner
of licentiousness, the effect upon society may
readily be imagined. AYe see the demoraliz-
ing eftects of two or three of these holy-days in
a year, in our own country ; what then may we
suppose them to be, whore they embrace nearly
one half the days of the year, on which all
manner of restraint is thrown olT. A descrip-
tion of the ceremonies of these holy-days would
be both tedious and disgusting. The festival
of the dcwalee is perhaps the worst of the
whole. It continues three days, during which,
gambling revelry, debauchery, lying, roguery,
and dissipation of every description, are not
only tolerated, but esteemed praiseworthy and
religious acts. And to these may be added a
multitude of private observances, on account
of births, marriages, deaths, &c. From the
first existence of the child, to his death, there
is probably not a month, perhaps not a week,
in which it is not required that some ceremony
192
BRAHMINIS3I.
be performed, when a Brahmin must be called,
and presents given ; and when he is dead, he
must be fav^ted through a Brahmin's mouth,
and offerings must be made for his benefit
through a Brahmin's hand.
Holy Places. — Another fruitful source of
poverty and vice among the people, and of ag-
grandizement on the part of the Brahmins, is
the multitude of Holy Places, celebrated for
their sanctity, to which pilgrimages are made,
as means of accumulating merit. To an igno-
rant and self-righteous peoi^le, the idea of pil-
grimage is extremely fascinating, and the subtle
priest is not slow to turn this principle of hu-
man nature to his own account. Various ex-
pedients are resorted to by the Brahmins, to
keep up the reputation of these Holy Places.
The principal ones are Benares, Jugunath, and
Rameshwur ; but there are a great number of
other places which are held in high estimation ;
and to all of them, crowds of pilgrims arc con-
tinually flocking : persons who have left their
homes, and sac-riflced their all, with the vain
e.X'pectatiou of laying up a stock of merit, by
visiting a sacred jjlace. They arc soon, by the
wiles of old pilgrims and covetous Brahmins,
stripped of every thing, and plunged into all
manner of exc&ssea. Those who have read the
disgusting accounts of pilgrimages to Jugu-
nath, " of tlie roads for fifty miles being marked
by the skulls of those who have perished on
the way ; " and of the thousands who are left
to die on the banks of the Ganges ; and those
who will take the pains to calculate what
must be the probable consequences of a com-
[)any of people, both poor and unprincipled,
caving their houses for nearly a year, travel-
ing across the country, and visiting the cen-
tral places of ini([uily in India, may form
some idea of the effects of these pilgrimages.
Degradation of Females. — There is no fea-
ture of Brahminism more revolting to the be-
nevolent heart, and the ingenuous mind, than
the C(»nditi(»n of Hiiidoo females. The genius
of llindooism saj)S in the heart of man the
rery foundation of all those tender and noble
affections of his .soul, which capacitate him to
appreciate and admire tho.se excellencies which
are peculiar to the other sex. J lindooism must
make its votaries selfish, distrustful, and brutish.
Love, tenderness, sympathy, weakness, modesty
and dependence, which we accord to the female
as her appropriate virtues, are ridiculed, if not
deipi.sed, by the llindoo. 1 Ic marries, or rather
buys a wife, us he would a beast of burden,
and afterwards regards her in very much the
same light. All tho.se civilities and attentions
•which females receive in a Christian country
are unknown in India. Were a Hindoo to in-
quire after tlie health of his neighbor's wife
or daugliler, the hu.sband ami father would
deem himself insulted. A Hindoo is never
seen to treat his wife with familiarity or fond-
ness. All this is in accordance with the prin-
ciples of the Hindoo scriptures. According to
them, " the supreme duty of the wife is to obey
the husband. Let the wife, who wishes to per-
form sacred ablution, wa.sh the feet of her
lord, and drink the water ; for the husl)and is
to a wife greater than Shunura or Yishnoo.
Her husband is her god and gooroo, (teacher.)
and religion and its services ; wherefore, aban-
doning every thing else, she ought chiefly to
worship her husband." This implicit obedience
of the wife extends to any thing which the
husband may choose to command. His will
and authority are paramount to any law, hu-
man or divine. If he command his wife to lie,
steal, or commit adultery, she must obey.
Such is the language of the Hindoo scriptures.
To become the father of a son is regarded the
greatest honor and happiness ; but the birth
of a daughter is a calamity. Thus the girl,
from her infancy, is made to feel her inferiority.
She is regarded as incapable of mental im-
provement, and is doomed to a servile life.
Ignorant and indolent, she becomes a wife,
without any choice of her own, and often sadly
against her wishes. If she be of high birth
she is little more than the prisoner of her hus-
band. He immures her within the walls of a
gloomy mansion, and watches over her with a
jealous eye. But if of low caste, she becomes
the wife and the drudge at the same time ;
carrying burdens, laboring in the field, bring-
ing water, gathering cow-dung, kneading into
cakes, and drying it for fuel, are her appro-
priate departments of labor. Nearly every
occupation which nature points out as the
sphere of the hardier sex, is, in this country,
assigned to the woman ; while her appropriate
labors are performed by men. Her washing is
done by the washerman ; her sewing, by the
tailor ; her milk and butter, and all articles of
food, which require but little cookery, are pur-
cluLsed in the bazar. She has no furniture to
clean, no floors to sweep or scrub. A coat of
cow diuig and water, once a week, settles that
long account, which the industrious hon.scwife
in tills country, has with her floors. Indolence
and dirt at home, and drudgery and disgrace
abroad, seem the only alternatives of llindoo
women. Such is the condition of females in
Hindoo.stan ; and for this there is no remedy
but Christianity. "Wherever this has prevailed,
the rights of women have been acknowledged,
and their cliaratter and condition elevated.
Character of the People. — After what has
been already said, little need be added under
this head. It can hardly be expecteJ that the
character of any jteople will be better than
that of their gods, their priests, and their moth-
ers. And when to these sources of corruption,
are added the demoralizing influence of igno-
rance, superstition, the doctrine of/(;/e, and
heathen festivals and jjilgrinuiges. we are i)r(>-
pared to contemplate a jK-ople reduced to the
lowest state of moral degradation. 'J'o i)ro-
viile for the daily wants of the body, seems to
absorb the whole soul of the llindoo. His
BRAHMINISM.
193
immortal mind is permitted to remain envelop-
ed in all its ignorance, without making any
proper efforts for its illumination. The great
ma.ss of the pcoi)le are content to do as their
fathers did, and to worship what their fathers
worshiped, and whether that object be a god
or a devil, it matters not, provided it be the cus-
tom of the people to do so. Custom with
them is law, to which reason and conscience
must submissively bow. Moral principle and
benevolent feeling seem to bo entirely obliter-
ated in the heart of the Hindoo ; and he
knows no higher motive of action than selfish-
ness. He will lie, cheat, steal, and commit
all manner of licentiousness, whenever it will
serve his turn, without the least compunction.
Although exceedingly zealous in their religion,
scrupulously maintaining, in their way, their
daily devotions, and having temples in every
village ; yet, all their holiness is ceremonial,
having no respect whatever to the state of the
heart, or the character of the actions.
Brahminism and Popery compared. — The simi-
larity of Popery and Brahminism, is so strik-
ing, that it is worth while to occupy a small
space in drawing a comparison between the two
systems ; especially as this resemblance has
fallen under the eyes of the missionaries, who
see them both in operation, side by side ; there
being many Roman Catholic convents and
churches in India. The following comparison,
somewhat abridged, was drawn upon the spot,
by Kev. Mr. Ramsay, missionary in India.
The Hindoos acknowledge one supreme god,
with many subordinate deities, entitled to wor-
ship. The Brahmins are held to be the repre-
sentatives of God, possessing the keys of life
and death, heaven and hell, and therefore they
arc worshiped by bowing down before them,
and ki.^sing their great toe. The Pope, in like
manner, considers himself the vicar of Christ,
and every priest is his representative. He too
holds the keys of heaven and hell, and his toe
has been favored with many a kiss. By the
Hindoo laws, none but their priests are per-
mitted to read their sacred books ; and to se-
cure this end, the priests oppose education, and
labor to keep the people in ignorance. The
Romish priests will not allow the people to
read the Scriptures ; and to secure their own
ascendancy, they strive to keep the people in
ignorance. The Hindoos have a multitude of
idols, which they daily worshi*p. Some of
them consider the idol as the representative of
God, and others worship the thing itself, and
go no further. Besides temple deities, they
have household gods, which they worship daily.
The Romanists in India have also images of
saints in their chapels, and in their houses, to
which they bow down daily. In the streets,
crosses are set up ; and in the evenings, lamps
arc placed at the feet of them, after the Hin-
doos' mode of placing lamps before their idols.
As they pass these crosses, the Romanists take
off their hats and bow down to them, or pros-
13
trate themselves before them. The worship of
images is sanctioned by the church in India, as
it is also by the second council of Nice. The
Hindoos have many millions of inferior deities,
corresponding to which the Romanists have
multitudes of angels. The Hindoos have their
Gooroos to intercede for them ; and the Roman-
ists have their saints, for the same purpose.
The Hindoos hold that a man may obtain
righteousness by his own works, and more
than he needs for himself, the surphis of which
he may sell. The Romanists also have their
works of supererogation, which lead to the
sale of indulgences. The Hindoos observe a
ceremony, in which they offer up prayers for
the dead, and for which they feed and fee the
Brahmins ; the Romanists also fee the priests to
say mass for the benefit of the souls of their de-
ceased relatives. The Hindoos say prayers and
count their beads, and undergo severe penances
to obtain righteousness, llie Romanists do the
same. They both alike have their fasts, in
which they eat no meat. They both have their
festivals, in honor of their saints. They both
have their holy places and their pilgrimages.
They both have their holy water. The Hin-
doos divide their sins into two classes, inward
and outward ; the Romanists, into venial and
mortal. They both have their monks and her-
mits, and religious mendicants, of equally de-
based character. The Hindoos have their fe-
males married to the gods ; and the Roman-
ists have their nuns, who are formally married
to Christ. Both are devoted to the same pur-
pose. Both carry out their images in solemn
procession, in great display. Both have their
small bells, to jingle during their religious ser-
vices in their temples. They both use rosaries,
and carry images about their persons. Many
more marks of resemblance might be named :
but these are sufficient to show that both sys-
tems have a conmion origin.
Tlie Remedij. — The Gospel of the Lord
Jesus Christ is the only remedy for heathenism.
This, with the power of the Holy Ghost, can
raise them from the lowest depths of filth and
degradation. It has done it, and it can do it
again. But, wheu we look at the state of
things in Ilindoostan, we must despair of help
from man, and look to the jiower of God,
which alone is able to accomplish so great a
work. The labors of the missionary alone
surely cannot accomplish such a change. The
power of God alone can produce it. — The
Christian Brahmin ; Ramsay's Journal ; Ward's
India and the. Hindoos ; Hooker's Pica for the
Hcathai.
BRIDGETOWN : Capital of the Island
of Barbadoes ; one of the gayest and hand-
somest towns in the West Indies. A station
of the United Brethren.
BRITISH AKRA : See Akra.
P>RITISH GUIANA includes Essequibo,
Demerara and Berbice, or all the maritime
tract between the river Corenten, the western
194
BUDHISM.
limit of Surinam, and i lie frontier of Spanish; number of chiefs, brahmas, and gods, made
Guiana, at Cu])e >sassau, in lat. 70° 40', a ^ their appearance as his retinue, and then his
space of about 300 miles, including the siuu- adversary, Maraya, came with a great array
oeitics of the coast. Sec West Indies. to try to hinder his becoming lord of the world.
BKUSA : Au out-station of the American! Upon this, panic-struck, the gods and brahmas
Board among the Armenians ; once the capi- all fled and hid themselves. Maraya then
tal of the Turki.-h empire — is famed for it.'; j brought on thick darkness, bit the body of
silk manufactures. I'opulation from 80,000 Budh was light as a thousand suns. He then
to 100,000, of which the Turks are by far the attempted to strike him, and asked him, ""Who
largitjt part. It is at the ba.sc of the']iythin-! is your witne.-s that you have done works of
ian Mt. Olympus, about GO miles soutli from \ merit, f(jr which you should deserve this seat?"
Coiv-tantiuuple. Then Budh exclaimed, "I have no rational
BROWN S TOWN : A Wesleyan sta
tion in Jamaica, W. I.
BIIUNSAVICK : A station of the Lon-
don Mi.'jsionary Society in Berbice.
BUDHISM: The religious system, called
Budhism, is exceedingly complicated, being
made up of legends, superstitions, and absurdi-
ties so numerous and strange that to give a
condensed and intelligible view of them is al-
most impos.eible. Volumes have been written
on the subject by missi«|tiarics, distinguished
travelers, and English gentlemen of learning
and research, resident in India, and from this
witness here," and called upon the earth to
proclaim his actions in the course of his en-
deavors to become Budh. Upon this the earth
rumbled 100,000 times, and began to turn
round. "Whereupon Maraya was dismayed
and defeated, and acknowledging the superior-
ity of Budh, fled a.shamed, and all the gods and
brahmas of the universe came and ministered
to Budh triumi)hant ; thus completely extin-
guishing evil, and acquiring omniscience, he
became perfect Budha.
The places near which he exercised his min-
istry were Benares, and other parts of northern
of materials the summary here given is ! India, and he is said to have proceeded as far
derived. The work of R. Spence Hardy,
member of the Royal Asiatic Society, has
been found -especially serviceable on account
of its systematic arrangement of topics, al-
though it' devotes nearly 450 octavo pages to a
cousidi.ration of the subject. The sukstantial
agreement of authors in regard to the origin
and character of Budhism leads to the belief
that they have attained to a great degree of
accuracy, and the following view, though it
omits numerous details, will, it is hoped, be
found to be a correct presentation of the lead-
ing facts of the system.
Orijrin of Jiiulliism. — The founder of the
sect of Budhists was (Jotama Budha, born
B. C. C24. At the moment of his birth, (.so
says the legend) he stej)ped upon the ground,
and after looking around towards the four
quarters and the four half (piarttrs, aV)ove and
below, without, «eeing any one in those ten direc-
tions who was equal to him.H'lf, he exclaimed,
" I am the most exalted in the world ; I am
chief in the world ; I am the most excellent in
the world ; this is my \a.<i birth ; hereafter
there is to me no other existence." He had
however previously existed through a vast
number of ages, and exercised all the virtues
which were necessary to his future odice. and
taking his jwsition in the sixth of the divine
worlds, the gt^ds and bralnmus, after the ajijiro-
priate period had jia.'^'^ed, went to his dwelling
and beg^fed his uppearance in this human
world. Thereuj)on he was born, and proclaimed
his own greatness its above. He then pa.^.'^ed
twenty-nine ye«rs in worldly wealth ami gran-
deur, and six more in morliflcation and pen-
ance ; and then silting down under a bo-tree, di^
clured he would not ri-so uj) till he became Bud-
ha, Lord of the Uuiverse. Upon this u great
south as Ceylon. He died at the age of eighty,
or as some say eighty-five, having previously
foretold that his religion, after extending over
the world, would become extinguished, and be
renewed by his successor, Maitra Budha, who
is now in a divine state, and after the appro-
priate age will become Budha.
The Budhas are beings who appear after in-
tervals of time inconceivably vast. Previous
to their reception of the Budhaship, they pass
through countless phases of being, and in the
birth in which they become Budha, they are
of woman born. At their death they cease to
exist. They do not continue to be Budhas,
nor do they enter upon any other state of
being.
Doctrines of Budha. — According to the doc-
trines propounded or rather ascribed to Gotama
Budha, tliere are innumerable systems of
worlds, called Sakwalas. which attain their
prime, and then decay and are destroyed, at
periods regularly recurring, and by agents that
are a.s regularly recurring. Budhism teaches
that there is no Creator, no being that is self-
existent and eternal. All sentient beings are
homogeneousi The diflerencc between one
being and another is only temporary, and re-
sults from the difference in their degrees of
merit. Any being whatever may be a candi-
date for the Budluushij) ; but it is only by the
uniform pursuit of this object through innu-
merable ages that it can be obtaineil.
The pow(T that controls theunivei-se is kar-
ma,\\U.r\iWy action; consisting of A-i/Wo and
ahmala, or' merit and di-mcrit. There is no
such thing as an immaterial .spirit, but at the
death of any being, the aggregate of his merit
and demerit is transferred to stmie other being,
which new being is caused by the karma of
BUDHISM.
195
the previous being, and receives from that
karma all the circunistanccs of its existence.
Thus, if the karma be good, the circumstances
are favorable, producing happiness ; but if it
be bad, they arc unfavorable, i)roducing niiscrj'.
Tlie manner in which being commenced,
according to Budhism, cannot now be ascer-
tained. The cause of continuance of existence
is ignorance, from which merit and demerit are
pro(hiced, whence comes consciousness, then
body and mind, and afterwards the six organs
of sense. Again, from the organs of sense
comes contact ; from contact desire ; from de-
sire sensation ; from sensation the cleaving to
existing objects ; from this cleaving, reproduc-
tion ; and from reproduction disease, decay,
and death. Thus, like the I'cvolutions of a
wheel, there is a regular succession of death
and birth, the moral cause of which is the
cleaving to existing objects, whilst the instru-
mental cause is karma. It is therefore the
great object of all beings who would be releas-
ed from the sorrow of successive birth, to seek
the destruction of the moral cause of contin-
ued existence, that is to say, the cleaving to
existing ol)jccts, or evil desire. It is possible
to accomplish this destruction, by attending to
a prescribed course of discipline, which results
in an entrance to one of the four paths, with
their fruition, that lead, by difl'erent modes,
to the attainment of nincana, or annihilation.
They in whom evil desire is entirely destroyed
are called rahaU. The freedom from evil de-
sire ensures the possession of miraculous ener-
gy. At his death the rahat invariably attains
nirwana, or ceases to exist.
TJie Sacred Books. — The sacred books of the
Budhists are called Dharma, which means,
emphatically, the truth. They contain the
incidents of Gotama Budha's life, his discour-
ses, and the voluminous commentaries that
have been added. From the moment that
Gotama obtained the state of a supreme
Budha, to the time of his dissolution, an inter-
val of forty-five years, in all that he uttered, to
whatever order of intelligence, he had only
one design, which was, to assist sentient beings
in the reception of nirwana. The discourses
of Budha are divided into 84,000, and include
all that was spoken by him. These discourses
are divided into 275,250, as to the stanzas of
the original text, and into 361,550 as to the
stanzas of the commentary. All the discour-
ses, including those of Budha and those of the
commentator, are divided into 2,547 vana-
waras, resembling the siclarim into which the
books of the Old Testament were divided by
the Jews, being the portion read in the syna-
gogue upon one Sabbath day ; and these con-
tain 737,000 stanzas, and 29,368,000 letters.
The system ])ropounded by Cotama Budha,
was not committed to writing either by him-
self or his immediate disciples. It is asserted
that his discourses were preserved in the mem-
ory of his followers during the space of 450
j-ears, after Avhich they were reduced to writ-
ing in the Island of Ceylon. The documents
themselves are an evidence that a considerable
period must have elapsed between the death of
Budha and the compilation of tlie Pitakas in
their present form. They contain the record
of numerous events that never could possibly
have hajjpened ; they are distorted by fictions
and legends which it must have taken a long
time to invent and impose upon the people ;
and they abound in the grave recital of mira-
culous events and supernatural interferences,
that any inhabitant of earth would have
known to be false ; and 400 years would be no
more than a sufficient period for all these per-
versions.
For the establishment of the text of the
Pitakas, or sacred books, it is said that three
several convocations were held ; but it is im-
possible in so short a space, to go into the his-
tory of these convocations and the fules by
which they were governed, so unintelligible is
much of the language, and so numerous and
senseless the repetitions.
In size the Pitakas surpass all western com-
positions, and are only exceeded by the sacred
books of the Brahmins. Josephus mentions
that his own antiquities contain 60,000 lines ;
but the sacred books of the Budhists, it is esti-
mated, contain 2,000,000 of lines. These
books were written in the Pa//' language, which
was the vernacular tongue in the time of
Gotama Budha. It was carried to a high
state of cultivation, as is evident from the fact
that in Ceylon a modern writer found as many
as thirty works on Pali grammar, some of
them of considerable extent.
The sacred books are literally W'orshiped,
and benefits are expected to result from this
adoration as from the worship of an intelligent
being. The books are usually wrapped in
cloth, and they are often placed upon a rude
altar near the roadside, after the manner of
images in Roman Catholic countries, that
those who pass by may place money upon
them and obtain merit. The praises of the
bona, or word, are a favorite subject with tlie
native authors. Whenever an opportunity is
presented they launch out into a strain of com-
mendation, heaping epithet upon epithet with
untiring zeal, as in the following instance:
" The discourses of Budha are as a divine
charm to cure the poison of evil desire ; a divine
medicine to heal the disease of anger ; a lamp
in the midst of the darkness of ignorance ; a
fire like that which burns at the end of a kal-
pa, to destroy the evils of repeated existence;
a meridian sun to dry up the mud of covetous-
ness ; a great rain to quench the flame of
sensuality ; a thicket to block up the road
that leads to the narakas ; a ship in which
to sail to the opposite shore of the ocean
of existence ; a coUyrium for taking away
the eye-film of heresy ; a moon to bring
out the night-blowing lotus of merit ; a sue-
19G
BUDHISxM.
cession of liVL-3 iKurinj; immortal fruit, placed
here and there, by which the traveler may be
CDabied to cross the desert of existence ; a
straight highway by which to pass'to the in-
comparable wisdom ; a door of entrance to
the eternal city of Nirwana ; a talisraanic
tree to give whatever is requested ; a flavor
more exquisite than any in the three worlds ;
a treasury of the best things it is possible to
obtain, and a jiower by which may be appeased
the sorrow of every sentient being."
The advantages to Ix; derived from listen-
ing to the baiia are represented by the native
authors as being immensely great. In the
early ages of 13udhism, when the bana wjus in
the vernacular language of the ])Coplc, it is
evident that great efl'ects were produced by its
recitation, and by the discourses that were
given in explanation of its doctrines and
duties ; but its rehearsal has now degenerated
into an unmeaning form, and is attended
with vft-y little power.
, Modes of Worsliip. — Tiie Budhists of the
present age are image-wor.shipers ; but it is
not known at what jjeriod they adopted this
custom, nor indeed at what period it was intro-
duced into India. The Budhists of Ceylon
have a legend that in the lifetime of Gotama
Budlia, an image of the founder of their reli-
gion was made l>y order of the king of Ko-
sala, and the Chinese have a similar story ; but
it is rejected by tlie more intelligent of the
priests, who regard it as an invention to at-
tract worshipers to the temj)les. The images
are sometimt^ recumbent, at f)ther times up-
right, or in a sitting posture, either in the act
of contemplation, or with the hand ujilifted in
the act of giving instruction. At Cotta, near
Colombo, in Ceylon, there is a recumbent im-
age 42 feet in length. Upon the altar, in ad-
dition to flowers, there are frequently smaller
images, either of marble or metal, the former
being brought from Burmah and the latter
from vSiam. In the shajte of the images each
nation appears to have adopted its own ideas
of beauty ; tliose of (Jeylon resemltling a
well proportioned native of tiic island, while
thase of Hiam are of a more attenuated figure,
and in Nepaul they often have three heads and
six or ten arms. The idol manufactories pre-
sent strange sights to tlie (ye of a Christum,
such as sign l)oards with tlie inscription.
" J'rc'-ious Budiias manufaetured or repaired ;"
"'I'he (Jolden Budlia Shop ;" and tln-se shops
containing groups of images, some lilack witli
age Hiid st:nt thither for gilding, and otliers
pauuiiy painted and fresh from the baud of
tlie artisi.
'I'lie BudliisLs have numerous temples, pago-
das, ami sacred jiiaccs, to which the people
resort to hear tiie bana read and to perforn
their religious rite*. From the ruins which
app<.-ar in various places it is evident that
these tem^>les weri- ani^icntly very costly
and bcautilul, much more 8o than any of mod-
ern construction ; l)ut a particular description
of them must be omitted. The bo-tree, under
which Gotama attained the Budhaship. was an
object of worship at a very early period. Near
this tree the city ol Bmlha-Gaya was afterwards
built, which, from the vast extent of its ruins,
must have had, at one time, a numerous popu-
lation ; but it declined rapidly, and in the
fifth century was entirely deserted. A bo-tree
flourishes at present on the same .spot, and is
believed by the Budhists to be the very tree
under which Gotama sat. This place is situ-
ated in British India, in the Presidency of
Bengal, about 40 miles S. W. of Bahar. It
is a good deal resorted to by pilgrims, and is
supposed to have once been the centre of
Budhism, but now no Budhists reside at or
near it. In the court-yard of nearly every
iL'ihara (temple) in Ceylon there is a bo-tree,
said to be taken from the original tree. Nu-
merous forms of relic-worshij) are observed by
the Budhists, and many of them, for extreme
folly and absurdity, will compare with any-
thing ever invented by Rome herself. They
have, for example, the left canine tooth of their
sage, and it is regarded by the Kandians of
Ceylon as the palladium of their country. The
impressions of Gotama's foot are also worship-
ed. There are believed to be many of these
impressions in various parts of India, hut the
most impfirtant one is on the top of Adam's
Teak, in Ceylon, 7,420 feet above the level of
the sea, and the summit of this peak is visited
by great numbers of pilgrims. The soles of
Budha's foot are represented as being divided
into lOB compartments, like a pictorial alpha-
bet, each of which contains a figure. One of
the titles of the monarch of Siam is, " The
pre-eminently merciful and munificent, the
soles of whose feet resemble those of Budha.''
It was an ordinance of Budha, that the
priests, who were then supposed to dwell most
commonly in the wilderness, should reside dur-
ing the three months of the rainy pea.sou in a
fixed habitation. This .season is called wass.
and it is at this period that the priests read
bana to the peojjle. The place of reading,
called the hunii-mwhai'a, is usually a tomponiry
erection in the form of a pagoda. In the centre
of the interior is an elevated platform for the
convenience of the priests, and the people sit
around it upon mats spread on the ground.
No part of the rough material of the ma-
duwa is seen, as the pillars and the roof are
covered with white cloth, upon which mosses
flowers, and the tender leaf of the cocoa nut
arc worki'd uj) into various devices. I>Jimps
and lanterns are susi)eiided in great nrofusion
and variety, and the impression produced by
the scene in some localities is most striking,
and forms the most magnificent sight ever
.seen by many of the worshi|M'r.s. The females
are arrayed in their gayest attire, and flags
and slre-amers and flgured handkerehiefs float
from every convenient point. At intervals
BUDHISM.
19T
totiitoms are beat, the rude tnirapet sends forth
its sereainv^, musketry and jinjalls add tlieir
roar, and with tlie help of glaring? lamps, floral
displays, and the noise of the people, a most
exciting and Ijewildering effect is produced.
The copies of the sacred books now used
are beautifully written in large characters,
upon the best talipot leaves that can be pro-
cured, with marks to point out the conclusion
of the sentences. Upon some occasions one
priest reads the original I'ali, while another
interprets what is read in the vernacular
tongue ; but generally the Pali alone is read,
so that the j^eople understand not a word of
it ; and even when the word is explained, most
of them fall asleep, or idly chew their favorite
beetle, regardless of what is said. The folly
of the priests, in confining their public minis-
trations to the simple reading of the bana,
has caused a class of persons, called upasalcas,
in some districts, to go about i'rom house to
house, after the manner of the Scripture read-
ei"s, reading works that are written in the ver-
nacular tongue, accompanied with familiar
expositions. It is by this means that Budhism
in many places is principally supported.
The Modern Priesthood. — The number of
Budhist priests in Ceylon is estimated at
2500, which is about one in 400 of the popu-
lation. In Burmah the proportion of priests
is much larger, and in Siam it is larger still.
The priests of Ceylon trace their origin from
a remote jxjriod, as, according to the native
legends, Budhism has there been professed
more tluxn 2000 years. But different sects
have arisen, and the doctrines and ministra-
tions of Budhism are not everywhere identical.
There ajjpears to be a general similarity be-
tween the Budhism of Ceylon, Burmah, Siam,
and China; but in Nepaul, Thiltet, and Japan
it is essentially different. In 'i'hil)et the sui)e-
rior priests are called Imnas, and are regarded
as incarnations of Budha ; and they jiossess so
large a share of political authority that they
can depose the sovereign of the country and
substitute another in his stead. The dross of
the grand lama is yellow, that of other lamas
of superior rank red ; and as these dignitaries
wear broad-brimmed hats, their costume closely
resembles that of the cardinals of Rome. The
Budhism of Thibet and of Jajian reseml)le
each other, in having a visible representative
of Cotama, possessed of unlimited power.
The Burmans, Siamese, Nepaulese, Chinese,
Japanese, and Thibetans, are the principal na-
tions, in addition to the Ceylonesc, who now
profess Budliism. once the predominant religion
throughout Llindoostan ; it is now nearly un-
known in that vast region, where it has been
superseded by other forms of superstition.
It has already been intimated that the sys-
tem of Budhism includes two leading and fatal
elements — atheism and annihilation. When
Gotama Budha died, he did not enter upon a
future state of being ; his existence was not
renewed in another world ; he forever ceased
to be, as truly as the light of a lamp ceases to
be when its flame is extinguished. Budha
can, therefore, in no sense, be an object of trust
or confidence; his guidance and blessing can-
not be sought, and when his name is invoked,
it is under the vague suppijsition that by some
latent, unknown process, the prayer will be
answered, without the agency of an intelligent
cause. And as Budha ceased to exist, so does
every other being. There is no such thing as
an immortal soul. The attainment of nir-
u-ana, or extinction, is the only hope to which
the Budhist can aspire ; though this extinc-
tion necessarily produces another being to
whom are transferred all the merit and de-
merit that have been accumulated during an
unknown period and by an almost endless suc-
cession of similar beings, all distinct from each
other, but all bound by this singular law of
production to every individual in the preceding
link of the chain.
AVith such withering skepticism at its foun-
dation, it is impossible that Budhism should
be productive of any good fruits. There are
indeed some good moral precepts in the sacred
books ; but as explained in the commentaries
and received by the people, they are wholly
inoperative. Man has no Maker, is responsible
to no superior being, and has before him no
future. If he has enjoyment, it is the result of
merit acquired in other ages and by other
births ; and the sense of gratitude, obligation,
and dependence, is unknown to him. Little
motive can exist therefore for the restraint of
the passions or for purity of life, and the do-
based and corrupt state of Budhist communi-
ties is the natural fruit of their religious belief.
As to what Budha himself taught, little can
be known, for he left nothing in \\Titing ; and
those who have most thoroughly studied this
intricate sj'stem, are of the ojunion that the
works which profess to record his discourses
have little if any foundation in truth ; that he
never laid claim to the miracles M'ith which his
name is connected, and which have been for
ages one of the principal supports of the sys-
tem ; and that the accounts given of Budha's
life, except the mere outlines relating to his
birth, family, and death, arc the merest fictions.
Those who wish more thoroughly to explore
the depths of the system of Budhism — the in-
volved and endless definitions, rules and rites
contained in the sacred books ; the historj' of
mosques, temples, pagodas, and sacred places ;
the di.-^gusling legends relating to miracles,
relics, and images; the celibacy, mendicancy,
diet, and dress of the priests ; and numerous
minor points connected with these, are referred
to the extended and elal)orate works of R.
Spence Hardy, D. J. Cogerly, Rev. Howard
Malcom, and others. — Rev. E.' I). Moore.
BUFFALO : A Karen village in Arra-
can and an out-station of the Arracan mis-
sion of the Am. Baptist Missionary Union.
lys
BURMAII.
BUXAAUAI : A station of the London I districtfl nor alluvial plains, but is altopcthcr
Mi.^-icimrv Sooioly. on Tahiti, South Sea. an upland territory, bounded at its southern
Hl'N'i'iXCiDALE : A station of the' extrtmity by a frontier lino at tht- <li:-laiico of
Wcjilcvans in Australia, 90 miles west of ; aljoul 200 miles from the mouth (»f tin- Irra-
Melliiiiirne. • I waddy. From this point, the country 1kj> ins
lUNTlNOVILLE : A station of the to rit^e, and thenoc for about 300 miles farther
Wcslevans in KaflVarin, S. A. it may be considered hilly and elevate*!, lie-
BUK'tj ALO \V : 'i'lio name R'iven in India ' vond this, it is wild and mountainous. To the
to a house or villa of a single floor. DtiJc Bun-WV. and N. W.. it is dividetl from Arracan,
galotrs are thatched houses, constructed at the Munncpore, and Assam, by mountainous ridges,
public expense, and placeil at intervals, in many . often of great elevation.
parts of India, for the accommodation of tra-] Pcrpulatimx. — From their resemblance in fea-
vcler.-;. i tures and form, the Burmese appear to be of
BURDWAN : A town in the province of ' the same race as the iidiabitants of the coun-
Bcngal, the ca])ital of a district of the same | tries that lie between liindoostan and China.
name, CO miles N. N. W. of Calcutta. PojvJThey may be penerally descrilx-d as of a stout,
ulation about :")4,000. 'J'he pojiulation of the short, active, but well-proportioned form : of a
whole district is estimated at 1,144,000. I brown, but never of an intensely dark com-
Bl'RISAL : The principal town in the'plexion; with black, coarse, lank, and abun-
district of Baharfrany, India, about 185 miles! dant hair, and a little more beard than the
Borth-eadt from Calcutta. It stands on the .SiauK^e. The ])ojiulation has been variously
point of an oblonjr i.sland, formed by the broa<l estimated and exair.L'erated from seventeen to
oranches of the p:real (janf,'c-s, which here pre- thirty-three millions; luit Mr. Crawford, from
sent an immcn.sc expanse of water, and a very the best data that he could procure, estimated
great facility of inland navigation. It is a, the population .«o as to give the present limits
station of the English Baptist Missionary So-! of Burmah 2.112.000.
cicty. Socioi and Pofitiral IiisiitiUkms. Alls, Ife. — The
liURMAII : A country situated in south- Burmese ajipear to be inferior to the Hindoos,
eastern Asia, in the region beyond the river, and still more to the Chinese, in arts, manu-
Brjihinapootra. It is j)ORse.ssed by the Bur- j fact ures. industry, and all the institutions of
mese. the limits of whose dominions have been I civil life. Their government is a juire des-
greatly contracted by British conquest.s. On ' potism, the king dispensing torture, impri.'^on-
the wi-.t, where it is conterminous with British [ment, or death, according to his sovereign
territories in India, Burmah is bounded by the I discretion. The chief object cvf the govern-
province of Arracan, surrendered to thcBri-l ment appears to be the i)ersonal honor and
tish by the treaty concluded wit!> the Burmese ' aggrandizement of the monarch ; and the only
in 182G, and by the petty states of Tipperah,' restraint on the exercise of his j)rerogative is
Muniujj.ire, and As.>:am. from which countries ' the fear of insurrection. lie is assisted by a
it is H'parated by lofty ridg(s «if mountains ; public and privy council, but may punish any
on the south, by the newly acf|uired British ot'hishigh cdlicers athis pleiL^ure. The country
province of Pegu ; on the north by As.-;ani and at large is ruled by provincial governors, and
Thibet; and on the ea.«t by China. Its limits' is divided into provinces. town.«hii)S, districts,
extend from lat. 10' 25' t<) 28'^ 15', and from and hainlet,«. In all the town.-jhips and vil-
long. Ii3" 2' to 100 ' 40' ; comprising a territory j lages there are judges of subordinate jurisdic-
640 miles in h-ngth, from north to sf)uth, anil tion ; but as no oflicer receive.^ a fixed Hilary,
420 in breadth, with an area of 1)0,000 scpiarei the ])eoj)lc are subject to the most .shameful
miles. I extortion. The criminal code is barbarous and
Tupof^rnpfn/. — Tliatportionof Asia in which ! severe, and the puni.>hments shocking to hu-
Burmah is situated slopes from the central ' manity. 'Hie Burmese are divided into .seven
mountains towards the south; and as it ap- class^es, viz. : the royal family; the iniblic ofli-
proaelns the Indian Ocean, it subsides into an cers ; the ])riesthood ; the rich men ; the culti-
cxtensivf chamjuiign country, which is over-jvators anil laborers; and the slaves and out-
flowed in the rainy season, by the swelling of | casts ; each of which have their badges of
tlic rivers. 'I'he Burmese territory is watere<l . tli.stinciion. But anv subject, except slaves
by three great streams, the Irrawaddy, the ' and outciust.s, may aspire to the highest oflicc>.
Salwen, and the Kyen-dwen, a tributary of | In the u.seful arts, the Burmese have ik
the Irrawadily. 'I'hcW rivers have their sour-' made any great advances ; and their currency
ces in the nortlMTn chain of mountains in thej is of the rudest de^eription. being conii>o.«*tl of
interior, !-onie of whi<-h are covered with j)er- uncoined Kail, silver, and gold, valued l>y
}Ktual mow; and they nin in a southerly | weight. The Burnu"se arc entirelv igiioruir
cour.-^' to the Indian (.><-eun. The Irrawaddy i of literature and science. Muralitv is at a lov
and the .'^alwcn are large rivers, which over- 1 ebb among tlnm, and their rulers have no con-
flow the Hat country on their hanks, during i (vjit ion of either the excellence or utility of
the seax'ii of the rains. Burmah, having been goixl faith,
despoiled of IVgu. contains neither maritime! Ueiigion. — Budhism is the religion of Bur-
.>i;U.
Sooui'oarO \ '•lU-/Ucr« / ^ ^
ioor
V At-'uLUit.
-^Mfiuii-it
llltiilhn
}xnb:tiintio
1 \'tt Httnkv nif.,
, J'htUii.-ii
^''•-^-U.-^(.„„,w:.^. B 17 R M A H
Y^ "^ oVaon^au J S I A M
^^.- M ^ f 3^1 JE jr .^
Sttftfatt
4^
jda.V -V"''
ytrhnni/
0 ,
Feul Jr. "^
(Tou;,
■ H
*;i2bpo-to
O
jOulee Mima
Ava
\^-
»(/-/i.
'?U.vl.Vr'")'''*K^. j(""'or^'''*i^'''' V-M-.r/r.-^/r '
C.jngrci
jBo^/; ''■•""•''•>.'
Aliiirn II /— ^ al^al''•«^'
>~:<V«
Qf!/Vi A--.y» O''' ^'^1
I -^ if --'l Mifrotft,
'^>»»^ — -/-Uoiitinaxoc ; ■
\ -IMUah) (7) S r V -^ V* "~\^ j7, Nrlsn-2f>l
JF*. ComwhBS.1
Tin rrt n / .
'A udtiiuun r.
lArc/iipelaQ«
JiuZlaud^M.
JJtrforatra J/ .
A"!
BURMAK
199
mah. (See Budhism.) Foreigners enjoy re-
ligious toleration ; but the Burmese rulers view
liny attempts to convert the natives to the
Christian, or any other foreign faith, as an
interference with their allegiance, and there-
fore discourage thcra. — Encyclopedia Britan-
71 tea.
Mission- — American Baptist Union. — The
first mission of the American Baptists in Bur-
mah was commenced by Kev. Adonirara Jud-
son,* who, with Mrs. Judson, landed at Kan-
goon, in July, 1813, and immediately began to
study the language of the country. So soon
as Mr. Judson had sufficiently mastered the
language, he prepared a tract, io be read in
manuscript by the Burmans, on the nature of
the Christian religion, containing an abstract
of its leading doctrines. This was his first
public labor. In 1816, Rev. George 11. Hough
and his wife arrived at Rangoon, as mission-
aries of the Board. Mr. II. had been a print-
er, and on his way, at Serampore. had received
a printing-press and a font of Burman types,
which were presented to the mission, and which
had preceded him to Rangoon. Mr. Judson's
tract and a catechism were immediately print-
ed, and they were soon followed by a transla-
tion of the Gospel of Matthew. In the summer
of 1818, the mission was for a time interrui)toi]
by persecution, and Mr. and Mrs. Hough sailed
fur Bengal, taking with them the jn-inting-
prcss. Mr. Judson was absent at the time, but
Mrs. Judsou determined to remain at her post,
and was soon afterwards rejoined Ijy her hus-
band, and they together quietly waited till the
storm had passed away.
In September, 1818, the mission was in-
creased by the arrival of Rev. Messrs. Colman
and AVhcelock, with their wives. Mr. AVhee-
lock, however, wixs, at the dose of a single
year, compelled, by failing health, to withdraw
from the mission, and was drowned at sea on
his passage to Bengal. It was not till 1819
that the first zayat was opened for public
worship and religious teaching. It was a
small low building, situated on the Great
Pagoda road, and surrounded by the mag-
nificent temples of heathenism. Here Mr.
Judson began his public labors as a Christian
teacher, and here for the first time he cck^
brated the public worship of God. In June of
the same year, nearly six years after his arrival
in Rangoon, he had the satisfaction of bajv
tizing and receiving into the mission-church
Moung Nau, the fii-st Burman convert to
Christianity. In the following November, two
othei-s were in like manner baptized and ad-
mitted to the Church. The.^e instances of baiv
tism, together with the increasing number of
inquirers who frequented the zayat. attracted
the interposition of the Budhist priests, also
of the Viceroy, and in consequence attendance
at the zayat for a time almost entirely ceased.
* For prerious notice of Mr. Judson, 8ee arUcle on Am.
Baptiil JlU-uvnari/ L'nion.
This fact revealed to Mr. Judson most dis-
tinctly the precarious situation of the mission,
and determined him to go iaimcdiately to
Aniarapura, the seat of the imperial govern-
ment, in order, if possible, to obtain toleration
for the Christian religion. Accompanied by
Mr. Colman, his associate in the mission, in the
winter of 1H19, he ascended the Irrawaddy to
the capital, and presented himself belbre the
Burman king, with rich and showy offerings,
in order the better to secure a favorable hear-
ing for his humble request. The occasion was
one of great ceremony, but the petition of the
missionaries was contemptuously rejected, and
they immediately retin-ned to Rangoon. This
stern repulse at fii-st decided Messrs. Judsou
and Cohnan to abandon Rangoon and retire to
the adjacent district of Arracan, which was
under the government of Bengal ; but on
announcing their decision and its cause to the
three Burman disciples, these recent converts
from heathenism evinced such firmness of faith,
and so eagerly entreated them not to abandon
the mission, that it wa.s at length determined
that Mr. and Mrs. Judson should remain at
Rangoon, while Mr. and Mrs. Colman repair-
ed to Chittagong, in order to provide a place
of refuge, in case of persecution, for the mem-
bers of the mission, and others who might
hereafter join them. The plan, however, was
entirely frustrated, and Mr. Colman fell a vic-
tim to the fever of the climate, at Cox's
Bazaar, in 1822.
Meanwhile the mission at Rangoon was
awakening a wider and wider interest among
the people. In the summer of 1820, Mr. Judson
baptized seven additional converts, who at the
peril of their lives, professed their fiiith in
Christ. Among them was a learned teacher,
who was able to render most important service
to the missionaries in translating the Scrip-
tures, and in other labors of the mission. The
failing health of Mrs. Judson now rendered it
necessary that she should for a time leave the
climate, and in the summer of 1821, she em-
barked for Calcutta for the purpose of taking
passage thence to England and the United
States. The visit of this accomplished and
heroic lady to this country in 1822 and 1823,
was productive of many important benefits.
It awakened a deeper interest in the mission,
and enlarged the contributions of the churches,
and especially it was the occasion of several
young men dedicating themselves to the ser-
vice of Ciirist among the heathen. On her
return to Burmah she was accompanied by
Rev. Jonathan Wade and Mrs. Wade, and
they all reached Rangoon in December, 1823.
During the absence of Mrs. Judson the mis-
sion had been also reinforced by the arrival o(
the Rev. Jonathan Rrice. a physician as well
as minister, who with Mrs. Price arrived at
Rangoon near the close of the year 1821, and
about the same time Mr. and Mrs. Hough
also returned to the mi-ssion with the much
200
BURMAH.
needed printing-press and types. So soon as
the Burman king learned that Dr. Price was
possessed of medical skill, he summoned him
to Ava, which was now become the capital of
the empire. Accordingly Dr. Price accompa-
nied by Mr. Judson, who alone understood the
language, proceeded up the Irrawaddy and pre-
sented themselves at the court of the Burman
monarch. Mr. J. was recognized by several
of the ministers of the court, and in one of his
visits at the palace he was particularly ques-
tioned by the king respecting his religion, and
whether any Burmans had embraced it, and
also commanded to show the members of the
court the manner in which he preached. Dur-
ing his stay of several months at the capital,
while Dr. Price M'as in high favor with the
monarch, Mr. Judson also had many opportu-
nities to commend the new religion to persons
in high official stations, aud to bespeak for it
a toleration from the government. He returned
to Rangoon early in 1823, not without a pro-
mise given to the king that he would soon come
back and bring Mrs. Judson to reside with
him at Ava. Accordingly so soon as Mrs. J.
landed at Eangoou on her return from the
United States, it was arranged that Mr. and
Mrs. Judson should proceed to Ava, while Mr.
and Mrs. Hough, and Mr. and Mrs. Wade
were to remain at Eangoon. Scarcely had
these arrangements been carried into exe-
cution when the threatened hostilities be-
tween Burmah and Great Britain beganvto
spread their blighting influence over the pros-
pects of the mission. These hostilities broke
out in open war in May, 1824, when Rangoon
was captured by a small fleet of English trans-
ports which landed the forces of Em-opeans and
Sepoys under 'the command of Sir Archibald
Campbell.
The war which now began was not termin-
ated till the close of February, 1826, nearly
two years from its commencement, by the
treaty of Tandaboo, by the terms of which
the provinces of Arracan, Maulmain and Mer-
gui, together with a part of Martaban were
ceded to the English. It of course, imn:edi-
ately suspended all the operations of the
mission at Eangoon, aud compelled Messrs.
Hough and Wade to retire from the country
— while upon Messrs. Judson and Price and
their families at Ava it brought calamities aud
sufferings, protracted through the entire con-
tinuance of the war, whose record forms one
of the most affecting passages in the history of
modem missions. For a full account of these
sufferings and the manner in which they were
endured by the heroic missionaries, the reader
is referred to the lives of Dr. and Mrs. Judson,
and also to the history of the American Bap-
tist Missions.
But, notwithstanding the frightful cruelties
to which the missionaries had been subjected,
they rendered most important seripces to the
Burman king in conducting the ncgociatious
for peace, and on their conclusion, were strongly
urged to remain at Ava. Dr. Price acceded
to the request and passed the remainder of his
life at the Burman capital. Mr. and Mrs.
Judson, however, decided to withdraw with
the English commander, and henceforward to
prosecute the labors of the mission in that por-
tion of the country which had been ceded to
the British Government. The place finally se-
lected for this purpose, was Amherst, a town
planted by the English as the seat of govern-
ment for the newly acquired territories, and
named for Lord Amherst, at that time the
Governor-General of India. Here he left his
family under the protection of the British flag,
aud in the society of British officers, while he
accompanied, as translator, the embassy of
Mr. Crawford, who in the summer of 1826, re-
paired to Ava for the purpose of negociating
a commercial treaty with the king. Mr. Jud-
son's motive was to obtain, if possible, a clause
in the treaty for securing religious toleration,
an enterprise which terminated in failure, and
was also associated with events of the most
afflictive character ; for it was while detained
at Ava, by the duties of the embassy, that he
received the intelligence of the death of Mrs.
Judson, a calamity which was soon followed by
the death of his infant daughter. On his return
to Amherst he thus found himself a widowed
and childless man, on the spot where he had
hoped long to share the sympathies of the faith-
ful wife, who during the weary months of his im-
prisonment had ministered to his necessities
with a fidelity that never failed, and a fortitude
that was equal to every emergency.
Mr. aud Mrs. Wade had already removed to
Amherst, and early in 1827 they were joined
by Eev. George D. Boardman, and Mrs. Board-
man, as missionaries from the United States.
But Amherst proved to be inconveniently situ-
ated for the purposes of the capital of British
Burmah, and Sir Archibald Campbell soon re-
moved the head-quarters of the army to Maul-
main, a new town on the Salwen river, about
twenty-fi-\'e miles from its mouth. It was at
first arranged that Mr. aud Mrs. Boardman
should settle at Maulmain and that Mr. and
Mrs. AVade should remain at Amherst, while
Mr. Judson should divide his labors between
the two settlements. But Amherst declined
as Maulmain grew, and before the beginning
of 1828 the entire mission was removed to the
new scat of government. This arrangement,
however, was not designed to be permanent,
and in April, 1828, Mr. Boardman, with his
family, settled at Tavoy, a place which had
been fixed on as a station of the mission, about
one hundred and fifty miles south of Maulmain.
It was one of the jirincipal strongholds of
Budhism in British Burmah, aud was celebrated
for the magnificence of its temples, the number
of its priests, and the splendor of its idolatry.
Here Mr. Boardman immediately opened a
zayat, and commenced [the v/ork of teaching,
BURMAH.
20J
preacliing, aud conversing with all who would
visit him.
From this period the chief stations of the
mission in British Burmah, for several years
were at Maiumain aud Tavoy. These were the
permanent humes of the missionaries and the
seats of their principal councils and labors.
Around these cities, in the neighboring jungle,
Avcre also soon established numerous out-sta-
tions, or places of preaching and instruction,
which became at length the seats of Christian
churches and congregations. In Burmah Pro-
])er, a little church was still maintained at
Eangoon, under the charge of a native pastor,
and the missionaries from Maulmain, in 1830,
resided several months in this part of the coun-
try— Mr. "Wade at Rangoon, and JSlr. J udson at
Prome, a large town on the Irrawaddy, about
midway between Eangoon and Ava. The main
operations of the mission, however, were of
necessity still confined to those portions of
Burmah which were under the government of
Great Britain. It was during Mr. Judsou's
residence in Burmah Proper, and especially at
Rangoon, that he was able to hasten forward
the translation of the Scriptures, which he had
previously commenced. He also took advan-
tage of the great assemblages of merchants and
others, who came from all parts of the empire
to Rangoon, at the great festivals of their re-
ligion, to scatter as widely as possible the
tracts and books which he had printed, as well
as to preach the doctrines of the Gospel.
During one of these festivals, which was cele-
brated with unusual pomp, he was frequently
visited by persons from a great distance in the
interior, who came to hira with the inquiries :
" Arc you Jesus Christ's man ? Give us a
writing that tells about Jesus Christ." Others
would say to him, " Sir, we hear there is an
eternal hell. Pray give us a writing that will
tell us how to escape it;" and others still would
say, " We have seen a writing that tells about
an eternal God. Are you the man that gives
away such writings, for we want to know the
truth." He estimated the number who visited
the mission-house on this occasion alone, with
inquiries like these, at not less than six thou-
sand. These inquiries were gratifying fruits
of the labors of the mission, which had now
been in progress many years, aud evidently
spread their influence to the remotest portions
of the Burmau territories.
In the summer of 1831, Mr. Judson returned
to Maulmain, where he found that part of the
mission greatly advanced during the thirteen
months of his absence. It had been strength-
ened by the arrival of Rev. Messrs. Mason,
Kincaid, and Jones, with their wives. The
church had been enlarged by numerous bap-
tisms, and the missionaries had extended their
labors to distant villages in the jungle, at seve-
ral of which converts had been baptized. In
the annual report of the mission lor the year
1831, it is stated that the number who hmf
been baptized during the year was in all two
hundred and seventeen. Of these eighty-nine
were Europeans, the rest being natives of the
country. During the eighteen years which had
elapsed since Mr. Judson first landed at Ran-
goon, the growth of the mission had been slow
but constant and healthy. Besides its original
seat it now had stations at Maulmain, Tavoy,
and Mergui, three of the principal cities on
that part of the coast which had been ceded
to the English. The missionaries were now
fourteen in number — seven males and seven
females, and the number who had been baptized
and admitted to the churches was three hun-
dred and ninety-three of whom two hundred and
eighty were natives, the others being chiefly
soldiers of British regiments stationed in the
country. The press had printed not less than
two hundred thousand tracts aud books, among
which were the New Testament aud several
books of the Old Testament. Schools were
also established and in successful operation at
all the stations in British Burmah, and the
mission, in all its departments, was just enter-
ing on that career of eminent usefulness and
success, which it has since pursued.
For many years after the commencement of
the mission in Burmah, the missionaries direct-
ed their entire efforts to the conversion of the
Burman race, without having much intercourse,
or becoming much acquaiuted with the other
races that inhabit the country. When, how-
ever, ]\lr. Boardman went to reside in Tavoy,
there was living in his family a man of middle
age, who had been a slave, but whose freedom
had been purchased by the missionaries. His
name was Ko-Thah-byu, one of the race of
Karens, or Karians, who are found in great
numbers in all parts of Burmah and the neigh-
boring kingdom of Siam. He had already
been converted to the Christian faith while at
Maulmain, and was baptized soon after his re-
moval to Tavoy. This man's conversion, and
his subsequent character, were the means of
attracting the particular attention of the mis-
sionaries to the singular race to which he
belonged, and of establishing among them a
mission, whose growth and success have scarce-
ly been equaled by any other of modern
times.
This interesting people are widely scattered
over the Burman empire, but are entirely dis-
tinct from the Burmans, by whom they are
regarded as inferiors and slaves. They have
adopted many of the customs and modes of
life of the Burmans ; they are generally indus-
trious, and, with the exception of intemperance,
are but little addicted to the vices of barbarian
tribes. Their condition is a degraded one,
being everywhere oppressed by their Burmau
masters, and compelled to perform every kind
of servile labor. Hence they lead a wander-
ing life, and dwell in temporary villages plant-
ed in rcn:^te places, in order to escajie the
exactions of theii* oppressors. With few ex-
202
BURMAH.
ceptions they reject Bnclliism, and present the
extraordinary phenomenon of a people witliout
any form of religion or established priesthood,
but believing- in the existence of God'and in a
state of future retribution, and cherishing a set
of religious traditions resembling the truths of
revelation, ■which they transmit from age to
age in the poetic legends of their race. Blend-
ing with these traditions are some singular
prophecies asserting their future elevation as a
race,, and that white strangers from across the
sea would come to bring them " the word of
God." It was on this account that when the
missionaries first became acquainted with them,
they evinced unusual interest in the truths of
the Gospel, and regarded them as the fulfilment
of the predictions which had been delivered to
them by the " Elders" of a former age. These
traditions of their race, acting on a people long
crushed by oppression, but possessed of imusual
moral sensibility, unquestio)iably gave the mis-
sionaries great advantages in their early labors
among the Karens.
Mr. Boardman, on his removal toTavoy, im-
mediately found himself in intimate relations
with these people, many of whom were first
brought to him l)y the converted slave, Ko-
Thah-byu. The tidings of the arrival of a
" White Teacher" soon spread beyond the city
into the distant jungle, and brought the Karens
in great numlters to the house of the missionary
to listen to his instructions. As an illustra-
tion of their moral sensibility, the story of the
(leijicd hook is otten mentioned. It had been
lelt in one of their villages some twelve years
before by a traveling Mussulman, who was
understood to have told the people it was to
be worshiped as sacred. Though entirely
ignorant of its contents, the person with whom
it was left carefully preserved it, and in virtue
of possessing it became a kind of sorcerer, of
great importance among the people. It was
brought one day to Mr. Boardman, and on
being unrolled from the coverings in Avhich it
was enveloped, it proved to be the " Book of
Gommon Prayer and the Psalms," printed at
Oxford. From this period Mr. Boardman
devoted the rcnniant of his too ])rief life almost
exclusively to labors among the Karens. Parly
in 1829, he made an excursion to the jungle
and mountains where their villages were most
numerous, and saw much of their condition and
modes of life in their native wilds. He also
conferred with the British Commissioner for
the district, and formed liberal plans for
schools, and other agencies of civilization,
while he gave a large part of every day to
preaching and conversation among the ])eople.
In the summer of 3 830, however, his strength
had become exceedingly reduced by repeated
attacks of hemorrhage of the lungs, and he
sailed for Maulmain. Here he regained a
temporary strength, and after a few months
returned to Tavoy, where he found many con-
verts waiting to be baptized, and^ still many
more daily visiting the zayat for religious
inquiry and instruction. A large number
were baptized by Moung-Ing, one of the native
Burman preachers, under the direction of Mr.
Boardman. Just at this time Mr. and IMrs.
Mason arrived at Tavoy as auxiliaries to the
mission, and in their company and that of Mrs.
Boardman, this excellent missionary made an
excursion into the country for the purpose of
meeting and baptizing a large number of con-
verts, who had often visited him in the city.
The journey of three days was accomplished,
and the baptism of thirty-four persons was per-
formed in his presence by Picv. TNIr. Mason.
But ere he could reach his home in Tavoy he
sunk beneath the exhausting malady which had
long pressed upon his constitution. His tomb
is at Tavoy, and the marble slab which covers
it is inscribed with a simple epitaph, which
records his heroic services for the Karens of
the neigliboring forests and mountains.*
The labors thus nobly begun by Mr. Board-
man were continued by ]\[r. Mason, his suc-
cessor in the mission at Tavoy, which has been
ever since that period almost entirely devoted
to the benefit of the Karens. They have, both
here and in other parts of Burmah, received
the Gospel with far greater readiness than the
Burmaus themselves. The mission, from its
very beginning, was marked by unusual pros-
perity and success. So rapid was the spread
of Christian truth, and the ennobling influence
which it exerts, that when, in 1832, Mr. Mason
visited the Kai-en villages, to the south of
Tavoy, which had been under the superin-
tendence established by Mr. Boardman, he was
surprised at their condition of neatness and
order, their regular industry, and their well-
ordered worship. In a letter written on the
spot, he gives utterance to his feelings in these
strong expressions : " I no longer date from a
heathen land. Heathenism has fled these
banks. I eat the rice and fruits cultivated by
Christian hands, look on the fields of Chris-
tians, see no dwellings but those of Christian
families. I am seated in the midst of a Chris-
tian village, surrounded by a people that love
as Christians, converse as Christians, act like
Christians, and, in my eyes, look like Chris-
tians."
The Karens, though they arc usually, in
some imperfect degree, acquainted with the
Burnuin language, yet have a language of their
own, which, however, at this time, had not been
reduced to Avritiug. This deficiency not only
presented an obstacle to the labors of the mis-
sionaries, but it also opposed an elfectual
barrier to the progress of tlie people in re-
ligious knowledge. Accordingly, in 1832, Mr.
Wade, who had been longest acqmvinted with
their spoken tongue, with such aid as he could
derive from the Christian Karens, nuide an
alphabet of its elemental sound.'^, compiled a
• Life of Mr. Boardman, by Rev. Alonzo King.
BURMAH.
203
6pellin?-book of its most common words, ami
translated two or three of the tracts already
printed in Burman. This was the beginning
of a hiost useful and important work, it has
^ince been carried onward to its completion
and perfection ; and the Karens now rejoice in
a written language taught in their schools, and
containing already the rudiments of a Chris-
tian literature. , , , +i „
The interval which elapsed between the
Years 1832 and 1835 was marked by the arri-
val of laro-e reinforcements of missionaries,
and also bf the adoption of arrangements for
the more systematic prosecution ot their diver-
sified labors. At the beginning of this period
the number of missionaries, both male and
female, at all the stations in Burmah, was four-
teen. On the first of January, 1833, were
added Rev. Thomas Simons, Mr. Hancock, a
printer, and his wife, and Miss Cumraings,
a teacher ; and in the following June, Rev.
Messrs. Brown and Webb, with their wives,
aud Miss Harrington, afterwards Mrs. Simons,
the latter company repairing almost immedi-
ately to Rangoon. In connection with the
former of these missionary companies were
also received two additional printing-presses,
a large font of types, and the materials tor a
type foundry, by means of which tracts and
portions of the Scriptures were soon printed
at Maulmain in the Burman, the Karen, and
the Taling or Peguan languages. These mis-
sionary companies were followed by a third
companv, who landed at Amherst on the 6th
of December, 1834, consisting of Rev. Messrs
Howard, Vinton, Dean, and Comstock, and
Mr. Osgood, a printer, with their wives, and
Miss Gardner, who was to be employed as a
teacher. Mr. Dean was destined for a new
mission just at that time established in the
kingdom of Siam. Thus within the space ot
two years there arrived in Burmah reinforce-
ments numbering in all not less than eighteen
missionaries, both male and female, with other
important accessions to the apparatus of the
mission. During the period in question, also,
Mr. Judson brought to its completion his
translation of the Bible into the Burman
tongue. It had been his daily task amid tlie
vicissitudes of many years. It had been his
solace in grief, his companion in solitude, his
support in weariness and depression. It was
completed on the 31st of January,_1834, and
on its completion the heroic and faithful mis-
sionary " retires alone, and with the last leaf
of his imperishable work in his hand, he prays
for the forgiveness of Heaven on all the sins
that have' mingled with his labors, and de-
voutly commends it to the mercy and the
grace of God, to be used as an instrument hi
converting the heathen to Himself.'' Mr. Kin-
caid, whoVas attached to the department of
the mission in Burmah Proper, in April, 1833,
ascended the Irrawaddy from Rangoon, and,
after landing at a multitude of villages on the
banks of the river, reached Ava, the Burman
capital, on the 30th of May, where he main-
tained a branch of the mission for a period ot
more than four years. Early in 183b he was
ioiiied by Mr. Cutter, the printer, froni Ran-
croon, who also brought one of the printing-
presses ; but the mission was jealously watched
by the Budhist priests and the officers ot gov-
ernment, and though Mr. Kincaid had an op-
portunity of studying Burman character^ id
favorable circumstances, and also of exploring^
the country beyond Ava, he was able to ac-
complish but few results that have contributed
to the advancement of the mission in that
portion of the empire. He, however, lingered
at Ava, with several of his associates ot the
mission, until the summer of 1837, when,_in
consequence of a civil war and the accession
of a new king, who threatened again to com-
mence hostilities with the English, they aban-
doned the station, and soon afterwards, with
the missionaries at Rangoon, repaired to Maul-
main or to other portions of British Burmah.
They left at Ava a church of twenty-seven
members, which had been gathered by then-
labors. , 1,1.
One of the most important undertakings
belono-iuf to this period of the mission was
the attempt to unite the Christian Karens,
who were scattered over the jungle, m compact
villa"-es, where they might pursue the avoca-
tions" of regular industry, and be united in
Christian churches, supplied with ministers and
the ordinances of the Gospel. In this manner
a number of Christian villages were formed
under the auspices of the missionaries, and
adopted as out-stations of the mission. The
principal of these villages were within a dis-
trict sixty miles around Maulmain and iavoy,
and among them were Wadesville, Newville,
Chummerah, Dong-Yahn, aud Matah. They
were composed principally of Karens, but
their formation belongs to a period prior to
any separate organization of the Karen _ and
Burman missions. As a step in the civiliza-
tion of the people, and their progress in the
social virtues which Christianity enjoins, it
was exceedingly important, and, it is believed,
has been productive of many beneficial results.
In April, 1835, the American Baptist Iri-
ennial Convention— the name which the mis-
sionary organization of the Baptists ot the
United States then bore— held its eighth tri-
ennial session at Richmond, Ya. Twenty-
three years had now elapsed since, in poverty
and weakness, in misgiving and doubt, this
association had been formed for the spread of
the Gospel among the heathen. The number
of missionaries who were now in the field, and
the results which they had been enabled to
accomplish, filled its members with new energy
and hope. Large and liberal plans were de-
vised, and assurances were given of more effec-
tive aid from the churches in all parts of the
country. The Board of the Convention de-
204
I^JRMAH.
termined to seud one of their number, Rev.
Howard Malcom, D. D., to visit the stations
and advise with the missionaries respecting-
the best mode of conducting their labors. This
service was performed by Dr. Malcom, who
sailed from the United States in the year 1835,
and returned in 1838, durinj^ which period he
visited the missions of the Board in Burmah
and other countries of Asia.*
The early periods of a Christian mission
planted in 'a heathen land are necessarily
periods of experiment. This was particularly
true in the infancy of modern Protestant
missions. They were undertaken without ex-
perience, and "the best mode of conducting
them was but imperfectly apprehended. Even
now, after the lapse of more than forty years,
many questions are still unsettled and many
principles yet remain to be adequately tested
and establi'shed. This remark finds frequent
illustration in the operations of the Burman
mission at the period of which we now write.
In this outline, however, it is impossible to do
more than refer to the leading features of the
general plan in accordance with which those
operations were conducted.
The general organization of the mission for
some years subsequent to 1835, was but an
expansion and development of that which had
been established on the settlement of the mis-
sionaries in British Burmah. The three great
stations of the mission were at the three cap-
ital cities of the provinces ceded to the English,
Maul main, Tavoy and Mergui. Besides these,
a station, as we have already seen, was main-
tained, not without several interruptions, at
Rangoon, in the kingdom of Burmah, and also
for short intervals at Ava and at Prome. In
the districts around each of these central sta-
tions, there were numerous villages designated
as out-stations, at which Zayats for preacliing
were maintained and in some of which schools
were established and ch.urches were organized.
At some of these villages missionaries and
teachers resided during as much of the year
iis the climate would allow, while to otliers
they made only occasional visits, the preaching
being performed principally by the ordained
native assistants, who had now become (juite
numerous both among IJurmans and Karens.
The labors of tiie nii.-sionaries were exceed-
ingly varied, and amid tlie inequalities of an
eastern cliniale and the imi)erfect physical com-
forts with which they were obliged to be con-
tent, often proved exceedingly injurious to
the con.stitution. At the principal stations of
the niission they were engaged in frequent
public preaching, in daily conversation witii
all who would come to in(|uire, in the study
of the language, in the writing of tracts and
the translation of the Scriptures, and in super-
luttMiding the operations of the several presses,
of which they were now in possession. Dur-
* Sec Malcom's Travels in SoutUEiistcm Asia.
ing the rainy season they were for the most
part restricted to the large towns and fully
occupied in the employments above indicated.
So soon, however, as the rains had ceased,
they went forth from their homes to visit the
villages and out-stations that were scattered
over the jungle within the field of their opera-
tions. Traveling in litters over the mountains
or embarking in boats upon the rivers, they
made their way once or twice each year to all
the out-stations of the mission — preaching and
distributing books as they went, instructing
the churches and their pastors, inspecting the
schools — baptizing new converts, forming new
churches, planting new stations according to
the wants of thefc'ural population whom they
met. The incidents of their excursions to the
jungle are often recorded in the journals of
the missionaries, and they furnish the best illus-
tration which can be given of the modes of
lil'e in the mission.
The schools were for the most part under the
direction of the ladies who Avere attached to
the several stations, and it sometimes happened
that a solifary female teacher would spend the
entire dry season at one of these distant vil-
lages, engaged in the work of instructing the
rude people around her. This was especially
true of the villages of Dong-Yahn and Chum-
merah, the former thirty-five and the latter
some sixty miles from ISIaulmain. At these
places schools were maintained for several
years by Miss Macomber at one and Miss
Cunnnings at the other, which were brought
to a close only by the early death of these in-
defatigable and heroic ladies. Separate schools
were usually maintained lor the Burmans and
Karens, and in some places for other races of
the country, and those in Maulmain and Tavoy
w(>i-e in part su)">ported by allowances from the
British East India Company, and embraced in-
struction in English and in the rudiments of
general education as Avell as of religious
knowledge. This arrangement, however, was
not permanent, as it proved to imi)air the con-
trol which it was necessary that the mission-
aries should exercise over the scliools. In ad-
dition to these a higher seminary was estab-
lished at Tavoy in 1836. for instructing native
converts of suitable qualifications in the doc-
trines of Christianity, in order to prepare
them to preach the Gospel to their country-
men. It was opened in May of that year with
eighteen pupils, of whom twelve were Karens,
— five were Burmans and I*eguans, and one
Avas a Hindoo. It was at first placed under
the charge of Mr. Wade, but on the failure of
his health, at the close of 1837. the school at
Tavoy was suspended and another especially
for Burmans was immediately opened at
Maulmain, to which the Burman jiupils were
removed. This was placed under the charge
of Rev. Edward A Stevens, M'ho has ever since
devoted himself largely to this department of
labor.
BURMAH.
205
la 1835 a branch of the mission waa com-
menced by Rev. Mr. Comstock and Mrs. Corn-
stock at Kyouk-Pliyoo, in Arracan, one of the
provinces whicli had been ceded to the English
by the treaty of Yandaboo in 1826, containing
a population of about two hundred and fifty
thousand souls of the same races as the people
of Burmah. This part of the mission however,
was but imperfectly sustained for several years,
in consequence of the feeble health of Mr. and
Mrs. Comstock, and the early death of Rev.
Levi Hall and Mrs. Hall, who arrived in Arra-
can in 1837, but died before their labors be-
gan. After a year's absence Mr. and. Mrs.
Comstock, in 1839. returned to Arracan bring-
ing with them Rev. Lyman Stilson and his
wife, but they now settled in Ramree, where
they hoped to find a climate more favorable to
health than that of Kyouk-Phyoo. They were
accompanied by four or five native assistants,
by whose aid they immediately established
schools and the other agencies usually employ-
ed in a mission. This was the condition of
affairs in Arracan when Messrs. Kincaid and
Abbott arrived in the province in 1840, on
finding themselves obliged to abandon their
stations in Burmah Proper. Their object in
going to Arracan was to be in a situation as
favorable as possible for keeping up a commu-
nication with the native churches and pastors,
and the numerous inquirers whom they had
left under the cruel sway of the Burman king.
For this pm-pose Mr. Kincaid went to Akyab,
where he established a mission for the Arra-
canese, and Mr. Abbott repaired to Sandoway,
nfear the Burman frontier, in order to be as
near as possible to the Karens in the districts
of Bassein and Rangoon. He soon contrived
to send information of his residence, to the
people on the other side of the mountain ridge
which separates the two countries, ajid though
the passes were constantly guarded by jealous
Burman oCBcers, the eager Karens found their
way in great numbers across the mountains to
Mr. Abbott, some asking for baptism, others
seeking books for their countrymen at home,
and others still desiring to remain and study
with the missionary. They came from the
districts of Maubce and Pantanau, and even
from the vicinity of Rangoon, telling him of
the progress of the Gospel among their coun-
trymen. Through a wide extent of country,
village after village received the Gospel, and
within the first year of his residence at San-
doway Mr. Abbott baptized nearly two hun-
dred of those simple-hearted and interesting
people. He made occasional visits to the Bur-
man frontier and entered the territory of the
king, always finding scores of converts await-
ing his coming, and desiring to be baptized.
In one of these excursions in which he was
absent thirty-one days, he visited all the church-
es along the frontier, received reports from
all the native pastors and preachers, and ad-
hundred and seventy-nine persons who professed
their faith in Christ. During the year 1844
the number of persons baptized by Mr. Abbott
and his native assistants through the regions
here referred to was upwards of two thousand,
and the whole number thus baptized within
five years after 'hi^ arrival at Sandoway was
considerably more than three thousand, a num-
ber larger than had at that time been baptized
in all the other missions of the American Ba]h
tist Board taken together. But these num-
bers but imjjerfectly indicate the extent to
which the Gospel began to exert its influence
on the Karens of that district. JVIultitudes
more were instructed in its doctrines, and be-
came obedient to its precepts, though they
never presented themselves to the missionary
for baptism. An entire change came over the
population of the district. They assumed an
aspect of higher civilization. They became
honest and industrious ; the vices common to
their race disappeared, and they were eager
for knowledge, and every kind of personal and
social improvement.
In 1843 the persecution of the Christian
Karens, which for a time had been intermitted,
was renewed with increased violence, and these
poor people were subjected to cruel and venge-
ful sufferings inflicted on them by their Bur-
man oppressors. Large numbers of them were
seized and chained together, and marched away
in companies to distant prisons, from which
they were liberated only by the payment of a
ransom which exhausted their entire wealth.
They bore these persecutions with heroic Chris^
tian fortitude. They refused to abandon the
faith which they had embraced, and maintain-
ed it with a firmness which commanded the
respect even of their persecutors, and com-
mended the Gospel still more widely to the
people around them. So frequent and violent
were these persecutions that the Karens, in
large companies, abandoned their homes and
their country and fled across the mountains to
Arracan. In the course of a single season Mr.
Abbott received upwards of two hundred fam-
ilies at Sandoway. Many others went to other
regions, and many perished by the way from
tlic ravages of the cholera ; but the emigration
of these humble martyrs for conscience sake,
still went on till the districts to which they
belonged were well nigh depopulated. They
awakened the sympathy not only of the mission-
arii's, but also of the resident English, who made
contributions for their comfort and support. The
pages of missionary history do not record a
more signal display of divine grace than was
seen among these simple dwellers among the
mountains of Arracan. With but little instruc-
tion from human lips, they seem to have been
largely taught of the Holy Ghost. With no
outward aids or encouragements, they clung to
the!r (aith with a tenacity that nothing could
subdue, and in the day of frightful persecution
mniistered the ordinance of baptism to two I they literally gave up all for Christ
206
BURMAH.
Such wore the labors of Mr. Abbott at San-
doway, during this interesting period of Karen
awakening and persecution. He was to thera not
merely their religious teacher, but protector and
friend, lie provided for the necessities of the
emigrant families, found them places of settle-
ment and productive occupation, and enlisted in
their behalf the sympathies aud active charities
of the humane Europeans who were residing in
the country. These varied cares and labors,
however, combining with the heaviest of do-
mestic aCaictions, soon made serious inroads up-
on his strong constitution, and in 1845 he was
compelled to seek a change of climate by a"
brief return to the United States.
Meanwhile Messrs. Kiucaid and Stilson re-
mained for two or three years at Akyab, where
they found a small native church, which had
been planted many years before by some Eng-
lish missionaries. Their arrival immediately
gave new life to the Christian disciples, and in
a little time they were surrounded by a large
congregation, among whom several appeared to
be sincere inquirers respecting the new religion.
This indication of interest, however, soon awak-
ened the jealousy of the Budhist priests aiid
other persons of influence, but the church still
increa-scd in spite of the opposition, aud another
w^as now planted at an out-station called Cru-
da, five daj-s' journey from Akyab. In the
course of the year 1811, the missionaries were
visited by several persons belonging to a tribe
dwelling among the mountains, and known as
the Kcmccs. They were, in many respects, es-
pecially in their docility and moral sensibility,
very snnilar to the Karens. These peo})le
soon sent to Mr. Kincaid a formal invitation,
signed by their chief and several of his sub-
ordinates, urging him to visit them in their
mountains, and promising to send their children
to school, if he would establish one in their vil-
lage. The invitation was soon followed by a
visit from the chief himself, who came in per-
son, to urge his request. Both the missionaries
soon afterwards visited these interesting people
and in several subsequent visits and frequent
intercourse with them at Akyab, Mr. Stilson
mastered the peculiarities of their dialect, and
prepared to reduce it to writing, in order that
a branch of the mission might soon be estab-
lished among them. But oSIr. Kincaid wius
soon obliged, by ill-hcallli, to leave the pro-
vince; and the absence of Mr. Abbott and
the lamented death of both Mr. and Mrs.
Comstock, left Mr. and Mrs. Stilsouthe soli-
tary conductors of the entire mission in Arra-
can. The plans which had been formed fi»r
the Kcmces were, in consequence, of necessity
abandoned, and they have since been but im-
perfectly carried into execution.
While these changes, both joyous and sad,
were in progress in Arracan, the brauches of
the mission established in the other provinces of
British Burmuli, or 'l\Miasserim, as it was now
called, were slill prosecuted with varying suc-
cess. Their principal stations, as has been
mentioned, were at Maulmain, Tavoy and Mer-
gui, the two former of which had become so
extensive as to be organiwd into separate mis-
sions, and to be designated as such. At Maul-
main there were residing in 1840, Messrs. Jud-
son, Howard, Stevens, Osgood and Simons, in
connection with the Burman department, and
Mr. Vinton, in connection with the Karen de-
partment of the mission. At Amherst, also,
was a secondary station, where Mr. Haswell
was engaged in preaching to the Talings or
Peguans, and in translating the New Testa-
ment into their language. The ladies of the
mission, at both these stations, were usually
employed in the schools, some for Burmans
and others for Karens. Around ISlaulmain
were now seven other tributary stations, all for
Karens, which were generally under the charge
of native assistants, but were visited by the
missionaries at least once during every dry sea-
son. The immber of churches thus connected
with what was called the Maulmain mission
was seven, containing in all, four hundred aud
fifty-four members.
The mission at Tavoy, though embracing a
single Burman church, was devoted almost ex-
clusively to the Karen population of the city
and district. There were dwelling there in
1840, only Messrs. Wade and Mason, with
their wives, Messrs. Bennett and Hancock
being at the time absent on account of ill-
health. Around Tavoy were eight out-stations,
all having churches, now numbering four hun-
dred and seventy-three members. Mergui was
a tributary station of this mission, and was the
residence of Mr. Ingalls, a preacher in Burman,
and Mr. Brayton, a preacher in Karen. In
the vicinity of Mergui, and under the care of
its missionaries, were also eight out-stations,
with six churches, numbering in all, one hun-
dred and thirty-one members. Under the di-
rection of the missionaries at Maulmain were
thirty native assistants aud seven schools of
different grades, for a poimlation of several dif-
ferent races, while at Tavoy there were sixteen
schools, nearly all for Karens, and twenty na-
tive assistants. The schools aud the native as-
sistants, both at Tavoy and Maulmain, however,
were supported in part by contributions of be-
nevolent individuals residing in those cities.
Mr. Judson, though usually preaching on the
Sabbath to tlieBuruuin congregation at Maul-
main, devoted his largest labor to the work of
revising his translatio'n of the Burman Bible,
a work which he prosecuted with the utmost
care, and which he found to cost him even more
time and labor than the translation itself. It
was committed to press in October, 1840,
twenty-seven vears after his fii-st attenqit at
learning the language. It has been often ex-
amined by critics and philologists acciuainted
with the Burman tongue, and has been, we lie-
lieve, invarialily pronounced to Ijc an excrllent
translation. It will for ever reuiain in the iii-
13URMAH.
207
erature of the couutiy, the noblest memorial
of the illustrious missionary who first intro-
duced the Gospel to the Burman people. Soon
after its completion Mr. Judson began the pre-
paration of a Dictionary in English and Bur-
mese, a work to which he had been repeatedly
urged by missionaries, and which he now un-
dertook at the special request of the Board, as
an important and much needed aid in prosecut-
ing the mission. The Burman Theological
School at Maulmain, was continued by Mr.
Stevens till 1841, when, in consequence of the
small number of pupils, it was suspended till
1844, and then reopened, though with only
eight members. The Burman race, though
that to which the missionaries were originally
sent, at this time had received the Gospel with
far less readiness than the Karens, whom they
everywhere despised and oppressed. Superior
in intelligence and in social position, they yet
clung to their ancient superstitions, and turned
away from the revelation of God which had
been given to them. The Karens, on the con-
trary, though furnished with more limited
means of instruction, presented one of the
most remarkable instances on record, of a peo-
ple readily accepting the Gospel of Christ. Its
influence was now perceptible wherever their
villages were scattered thronghout the pro-
vinces of Teuasserim, in the elevation of indi-
vidual and social character and the growth of
all the kindly charities and domestic virtues of
civilized life. The entire New Tiestament was
not translated into their language till 1843,
but long before that time, the churches and
schools which had sprung up among them
were so numerous as to far transcend the ability
of the missionaries to give them adequate su-
pervision and instruction. The officers of the
East India Company, in these provinces, co-
operated with the missionaries in promoting
their improvement, and protecting them from
Burman oppression, and though of necessity
left, in a great degree, to the care of native
assistants, who were but imperfectly instructed
themselves, they yet exhibited a striking illus-
tration of the power of Christian truth over
the characters and manners of a rude and bar-
barous people. In order to supply these ob-
vious deficiencies in the Karen department of
the mission, it was decided by the Board of
managers, to establish, without delay, a school
for the instruction of Karen preachers, and
Kev. J. G. Binney, pastor of the First Baptist
Church in Savannah, Ga., was appointed to
assume the charge of it. He sailed from Bos-
ton, in November, 1843, in company with Eev.
E. B. Bullard, and Mr. T. S. Eanney, a prin-
ter, with their wives, and Miss Julia Lathrop,
all appointed to the mission at Tavoy, with the
exception of Mr. and Mrs. Binney, who were
to be stationed at Maulmain. They were fol-
lowed in the succeeding year by Eev. E. B.
Cross and his wife, and also a teacher for the
Karens.
The missionaries at Mergui, at this period,
became acquainted with a singular people in-
habiting the islands on the coast and known
by the general name of Salongs. They evinced
much interest in the teachings that were im-
parted to them, and a large number of them
professed their faith in Christ and were bap-
tized. Their language was reduced to writing
by Mr. Stevens, and schools were established
for their instruction, for the support of which
a thousand rupees were contributed by Major
Broadfoot, the liberal-minded and generous
Commissioner for the district of Mergui.
In April, 1834, Dr. Judson had married
Mrs. Sarah II. Boardman, who since the death
of Mr. Boardman, had been connected with
the mission at Tavoy, as one of the most effi-
cient and devoted of its members. From the
date other marriage to Dr. Judson she had been
residing at Maulmain, and had shai'ed in all
the vicissitudes of labor and patience through
which her husband had been called to pass. But
her health had now become seriously and it was
apprehended fatally impaired, and her physi-
cians prescribed a voyage beyond the tropics
as the only means of prolonging her valuable
life. Accordingly, in April, 1845, Dr. Judson
and Mrs. Judson embarked at Maulmain on a
voyage to the United States. He took with him
his two Burman interpreters, thinking thus to
hasten forward the preparation of the Burman
and English Dictionary to which he was then
devoting his constant labors. On his arrival
at the Isle of France, however, he sent back
the interpreters, hoping from the apparent im-
provement of Mrs. Judson's health, that he
might soon return himself. But in this he was
doomed to be disappointed. The health of
Mrs. Judson soon began again to decline, and
she died on her arrival at St. Helena, Sept. 1,
1845. The now solitary missionary, with his
three eldest children, who had accompanied
their parents, proceeded on his voyage and ar-
rived at Boston on the 15th of the following
October. He remained in the United States
till the following July, a period of nearly nine
months, when he took his final leave of his na-
tive land, and returned to his station in the
mission.
The circumstances and results of this visit
of Dr. Judson to the land of his birth were
marked with unusual interest, and are worthy
of a brief mention in this narrative. He had
been absent thu-ty-three years, during which he
had been living in the midst of oriental hea-
thenism, associating with races of inferior
civilization and speaking languages of strange
and uncouth structure. From the honored
Board of Commissioners under whose auspi-
ces he had first become a missionary, he had
withdrawn, and for many years had been acting
under the direction and depending upon the
support of those whom he had never seen.
The country too, which he had left thirty-three
years before, had entirely changed in nearly
208
BURilAH.
every phase of its social and religious life.
Art and commerce and Christianity had mul-
tiplied tlieir wondrous triumphs "on every
hand. The missionary was bewildered at the
amazing contrast, between all that he had left
and all that he had now gazed upon. The
homes of his boyhood — the places of his edu-
cation— the large cities and the humble vil-
lages were alike changed, till the land seemed
no longer to be the land of his nativity. He
was everywhere received with an honor and
respect for which nothing could have prepared
him. lie was publicly welcomed at Boston by
the officers of the Board, and in every city
which lie visited throughout the land he was
received with an interest and attention such as
are seldom accorded to any private individual.
Members of every Christian denomination and
citizens of every rank were eager to do honor
to a man who had proved himself, by a lifelong
service, to be a benefactor of mankind. In
Kovember, 1845, a month after his arrival, he
was present at the meeting of the American
Baptist Missionary Union, and for the first time
became acquainted with, the brethren and
friends under whose guidance and support the
noble labors of his missionary life had been
performed. His presence everywhere awakened
the liveliest interest and enthusiasm. The
history of American missions seemed to be
embodied in him, and the cause in which he
had so long toiled and suffered touched new
sensibilities in the hearts of the people. Dur-
ing his visit in the United States, he married
Miss Emily Chubbuck, of Hamilton, New
York, with whoiu he embarked for Maulmain
on the 11th July, 184G. The same ship also
bore to the missions llev. Messrs. Harris and
Beecher and their wives, and Miss Lydia
LilJybridge ; ^Mr. and Mrs. Harris being
appointed to the Karen department of the
mission at Maulmain, and Mr. and ]\Irs.
Beecher to Arracan, while Miss Lillyln-idge
was to remain with Dr. and Mrs. Judson in
the Burman department of the mission. They
reached the i)ort of their destination in the
following December, and soon afterwards en-
tered their several spheres of labor.
During the absence of Dr. Judson, Mrs.
Mason and Mrs. Ingalls had been removed by
death, Mr. Simons had returned to the United
States and Mr. and Mrs. Osgood had with-
drawn from the mission in consequence of ill
health. The brutal and tyrannical Burnuui
king Thara-wadi, who usurped the throne in
1837, had been overthrown, and a regency had
been formed wliich it was hoped would prove
less unfriendly to the laljors of the mission-
aries. In this new state of affairs, Dr. Judson,
a few weeks after his arrival, repaired to Ban-
goon in order to ascertain the disposition of
the new government with respect to the mis-
sion. He continued to reside there for several
montlis, but received neither encouragment
nor prohibition from either the local or the
imperial government. Few ventured to visit
him for religious instruction, and though he
was gradually gathering the scattered mem-
bers of the Kangoon church, he at length
learned that an order had been issued to
watch the missionary's house, and apprehend
any who might visit him to inquire about the
new religion.* Dr. Judson at first thought
of proceeding to Ava, again to solicit tolerar
tion from the imperial government, but in the
limited resources of the treasury of the mis-
sion, he was compelled to abandon the attempt
and soon afterwards returned to Maulmain,
where he continued to reside and to work
upon his Dictionary with but little interruption
to the end of his life.
In August, 1847, Mr. Abbott left the United
States on his return to Arracan. He went by
the way of England, and hastening by the
overland route to Calcutta, reached Sandoway
early in December. By journeying thus rap-
idly he was able to fulfil an engagement which
he had made with his native assistants, that
if his life should be spared he would meet them
in January, 1848, at Ong-kyoung, where he
had given them his parting instructions three
years before. He immediately announced his
arrival among the scattered villages of the Ka-
rens, both in Arracan and across the mountains
in Burmah Proper. The assistants came to-
gether at Ong-kyoung according to their ap-
pointment, early in January, and reported the
condition of their several flocks and the labore
in which they had been engaged ; and most
encouraging was the report which they made.
Of the two ordained ministers, Tway-poh, who
was at the head of the churches in Arracan,
had baptized six hundred converts ; and Myat-
Kyan, who, though living in Arracan, had
preached principally among the Karens of
Burmah, had baptized five hundred and fifty.
The period of the missionary's absence had
been one of remarkable progress in the inter-
ests of the mission. Mr. Aljbott had left
twenty native assistants, who were preachers
but not ordained to the ministry. Of them
two had died, and one had been suspended by
his associates, while sixteen others had been
added to the number, and the thirty-three nar
five preachers now reported not less than
twelve hundred converts in their several dis-
tricts, who were waiting to be baptized and
received into the churches.
In the autumn of 1847, Bev. W. Moore and
his wile, and in the following summer. Rev.
i\ressrs. Van Meter, C. C. Moore, and Judson
Benjamin, and their Avives, were appointed
missionaries to Burmah, and sailed for the
scene of their future labors ; one of them being
designated to the Burmese department of the
mission at Arracan, and the other three to
* For a fuU .-iccount of the ((Tcct of tliis order, see Pre-
sident Wayland's Memoir of Dr. Judson, Vol. II. Chap,
vii. The Rame work is also filled with interesting passages
relating to the progress of the Dunnan missions.
BURMAH.
209
the Karen missiOQS at Maulmaiu, Sandoway,
and Tavoy.
Early in 1849, the Burman and the Karen
departments of the mission at Maulmaiu were
separated from each other, and for the pm'pose
of greater economy and efficiency were organ-
ized as separate missions, the Karen mission
having already been established in a separate
part of the city, which had received the name
of Newton. In the same manner and at about
the same time, the Karen department of the
mission in Arracan was erected into a separ-
ate mission of which the principal seat was San-
doway. Thus organized in independent bodies,
these missions greatly extended the sphere of
their influence, and by a judicious division of
their labors and endeavors, entered upon an
era of enlarged prosperity and usefulness.
From the report of the managers in 1850, just
after the new organization of these missions,
it appears that there were attached to the
Maulmain Burman Mission, Rev. Messrs. Jud-
son, Stevens, and Stilson, Mr. Ranney, a print-
er, and their wives. Rev. Mr. Simons, and Miss
Lillybridge, a teacher, all of whom resided in
Maulmain, while Rev. Messrs. Wade, Haswell,
and Howard with their families, were members
of the mission, but absent on account of ill-
health. In addition to these there were thir-
teen native assistants, three of whom were sta-
tioned at Amherst. Attached to the Maul-
main Karen Mission at this period, were Rev.
Messrs. Binney, Harris, and W. Moore, with
their wives, and Miss Vinton and Miss Wright,
teachers, Rev. Mr. Vinton and his wife being
absent in the United States. In addition to
these were thirty-four native assistants, of whom
five were ordained preachers, and three were
teachers, at Maulmain and the numerous out-
stations of the mission. Connected with the
nine churches of these two missions were up-
wards of nineteen hundred members, of whom
more than seventeen hundred were Karens.
There were also at Maulmain, a theological
school for Karen preachers, and a normal
school for teachers, together with a number of
other schools, both for the Karen and the Bur-
man population. In the mission at Tavoy, of
which Mergui had now become a station, were
Rev. Messrs. Mason, Bennett, Cross, Benjamin,
and Brayton, with their wives, Mr. Brayton re-
siding at Mergui. This mission has been al-
most exclusively for the Karens, and around
its two stations were fourteen outrstations at
the Karen villages which are scattered over
the jungle, where were also employed under
the direction of the missionaries, nineteen na-
tive assistants of various orders. In its twenty-
seven churches were also about eighteen hun-
dred members. The Arracan Mission was
now established at two stations, Akyab and
Ramree, the former embracing Rev. Messrs. C.
C. Moore and L. Ingalls ; the latter Rev.
Messrs. Knapp and Campbell, with their wives,
who had been appointed but had not arrived
14
at the station. Near Akyab was the single
out-station of Cruda, and the number of native
assistants attached to the mission was six.
The Sandoway mission, which was designed for
the Karens in its immediate vicinity, and also
for those beyond the mountains in Burmah
Proper, where the Gospel could not be preach-
ed, comprised at this time Rev. Messrs. Abbott,
Beecher, and Van Meter, with their wives. It
embraced one station and thirty-six outr-stations,
and in addition to its missionaries, gave em-
ployment to forty-four native preachers and
assistants. The number of churches was thirty-
six, and the whole number of church members
about four thousand five hundred.
Of these several missions, that at Sandoway
probably extended its labors over the widest
sphere, for it was designed for the persecuted
Karens who dwelt in the neighboring districts
of Burmah Proper, and who, beneath the se-
vere oppressions of a cruel government, evinced
the most extraordinary readiness to receive the
Gospel of Christ. Though each of the missions
was to some extent supported by contribu-
tions gathered from its own churches, yet this
was true of the Sandoway mission more fully
than of any other. The efforts and sacrifices
of these humble Christians to secure the bless-
ings of the Gospel and to maintain its institu-
tions in their villages, afford the noblest proof
of the sincerity of their faith and the fervor of
their piety. Several churches erected chapels
at their own expense ; others supported their
native pastors, while all contributed in some
way or other to the pecuniary maintenance of
the mission. Mr. Abbott repeatedly attempt-
ed to obtain a permanent footing for the mis-
sion in Burmah Proper, where so many of its
converts were found, but though he occasionally
visited BasseM) and the neighboring districts
he was wholty unsuccessful in securing the
toleration of the government or even a per-
mission for permanent residence. He, how-
ever, was accustomed as frequently as practi-
cable to meet the native pastors and preachers
of these districts for the purpose of becoming
familiar with their labors, and advising in
their prosecution ; and at these interviews he
would often administer the rite of baptism to
large numbers of converts whom the assistants
brought to him for the purpose. At these and
other similar meetings in all the missions, the
missionaries were accustomed to impart in-
struction and give advice to the assistants and
the converts, on all subjects which might re-
quire their attention, whether relating to the
doctrines and duties of the Gospel, or their
own interests and prosperity as a people.
Associated with the mission at Tavoy were
the labors which were undertaken among the
Salongs, a rude and oppressed people, about
10,000 in number, scattered among the islands
on the coast ; and with the mission in Arracan
was connected a department for the Kemees,
an interesting people, among the mountains of
210
BTJRMAH.
that province, whose character and condition,
as has ah-eady been stated, have enlisted the
sympathies of the missionaries.
The return of Dr. Judson to Burmah, and his
settlement at ]\Iaulniain, after an attempt to
establish himself at Rangoon, or at Ava, have
already been mentioned. Here he continued
to reside, constantly occupied with the pre-
paration of the Barman and English Diction-
ary, to which the closing years of his life were
principally devoted. He was excluded from
the kingdom of Burmah; but at Maulmain,
under the protection of the British govern-
ment, and with many facilities for the prose-
cution of his work, he gave himself to the com-
pletion of a task, whose accomplishment he
fondly hoped would confer immeasurable ad-
vantages on all future missionaries, and thus
greatly promote the progress of the Gospel
wherever the Burmau language is spoken.
The English-Burmese portion had already been
completed and nearly printed ; and the Bur-
mese and English portion was well advanced
when the venerable compiler was obliged to
lay down the pen with which he was com-
pleting his noble work. In the autumn of
1849, his enfeebled constitution began to give
signs of decay, and in a few weeks he was com-
pelled to abandon his labors, and seek such
means of recruiting his strength as the coun-
try and the climate would allow. He made a
trip to Mcrgui, and repaired to Amherst for
sea-bathing ; but his strength continued to
decline the more rapidly in consequence of an
attack of fever, and his physicians pronounced
a protracted voyage the only prescription with
which they could associate any hope of benefit.
In accordance with their directions, he took
passage early in April, on board a French
ship bound to the Isle ofj^ance. It was
several days before the vessel M;s fairly at sea ;
but the ocean airs brought no invigoration to
his worn and fevered frame. The pilot left
the vessel on the 8th of A])ril, and on the 12th
of the same month Dr. Judson breathed his
latest brealli, and on the same day his remains
were buried at sea. His life had been wholly
devoted to the mission, which, in solitude and
persecution, he had planted on the .shores of
Burmah ; and the tidings of his death awaken-
ed a profound sense of bereavement and sorrow
among its members. As the intelligence spread
from land to land, it carried grief to Christian
hearts in every part of the world ; while in the
country of his birth, and among the churches
with which he was particularly connected, it
called forth the sincerest demonstrations of
respect for his memory, and of gratitude for
the good he had wrought. Mrs. Judson, her-
self in declining health, and tho.se of his children
who were in IJurmah, returned to the United
States in the autumn of 1851, and retired to
the home of her parents, at Hamilton, N. Y.
Here she has emjdoycd the hours which could
be spared from the care of her family, in en-
riching the literature of Christian missions
with the productions of her own beautiful ge-
nius, and especially in contributing many a pas-
sage of touching reminiscence and life-like de-
lineation to the memoirs of her departed hus-
band— passages without which, in the absence
of other materials, that admirable work must
have been divested of many of its most attrac-
tive features. As we write these closing pages
of this rapid sketch of the missions in Bur-
mah, the beautiful and heroic life of Mrs.
Judson has been brought to a peaceful close,
in June, 1854, at her home in Hamilton. The
works which she contributed to the literature
of the age, are a fitting illustration of her rare
genius, while the brief records of her mission-
ary career will transmit to other ages the
memorials of hor piety, and the sentiments of
duty, faith and love which ever dwelt in the
depth of her woman's heart.
In October, 1849, there sailed from the
United States, under appointment for the
several missions in Burmah, Rev. Messrs. Har-
vey E. Knapp, Harvey E. Campbell, and their
wives, and Miss Elizabeth T. Wright. In the
course of the year 1850, they were followed
by Rev. Eugenio Kincaid and Mrs. Kiucaid,
who had formerly been connected with the mis-
sions, and also by Dr. John Dawson, a physi-
cian, and Rev. Benjamin C. Thomas, and their
wives ; Mr. Thomas being appointed especially
to Mergui, or the Tavoy mission, while Mr.
Kincaid and Dr. Dawson were commissioned
to repair, if possible, to Ava, or to some other
leading place in the kingdom of Burmah, and
there to commence a mission. They arrived
at Maulmain early in 1851, and repaired to
Rangoon in the following March, where, hav-
ing established their families, they commenced
their labors, designing, as soon as the rainy
season ceased, to ascend the Irrawaddy to
Ava. They soon found themselves jealously
and closely watched by the Burman governor of
Rangoon. They were forbidden to distribute
books or to associate with the people, and
those who visited them Avere punished with
fines, scourging and imprisonment. At length,
early in May, a message came from the king,
that " the American teachers were to be treat-
ed with all possible favor," and an entire
change was immediately WTOught in the man-
ner and bearing of the governor. Public wor-
ship, and the various operations of a mission
were commenced. A medical dispensary was
opened, and multitudes of Burmans and Ka-
rens, many of them from a great distance in
the interior, both converts and inquirers,
flocked to the residence of the missionaries.
The scriptures were widely circulated; four
Burmans and five Karens soon received the
rite of Christian baptism, and the Christian
converts of former years were gathered from
their wide dispersion to the instructions of the
missionaries and the ordinances of the Gospel.
But in the midst of these scenes of tempo-
BURMAH.
211
rary encouragement -whicli marked the sum-
mer and autumn of 1851, was preparing an
event that was destined to alter the entire
condition of the Burman people, and to pre-
pare the way for the universal dissemination
of the Gospel over a thickly peopled country,
in which the missionaries had sought, in vain,
for nearly forty years, to obtain a permanent
footing. This event was the war between
Burmah and Great Britain — a war which was
wantonly provoked by the faithlessness of the
Burman government and its i-eckless encroach-
ments on the interests and rights of the Bri-
tish East India Company. Hostilities were
commenced, in November, 1851, by the un-
expected firing of the Bui-man stockades, on
some British war steamers which were ascend-
ing the river. Negotiations were attempted,
in order to settle difficulties which had been of
long standing, but with no other effect than to
delay a war which had now become inevitable.
The relations of the two parties became daily
more and more disturbed, and after several col-
lisions between the forces, war was formally
declared on February 15tli, 1852. The mis-
sionaries, and other foreign residents at Ran-
goon, took refuge on board the English ships,
in the preceding December, and soon after-
ward sailed to Maulmaiu, where they remained
till Rangoon, Martaban, and Bassein had
fallen before the advance of the British arms.
So soon as hostilities ceased, they returned to
what was formerly Rangoon, but they found
the ancient city almost entirely destroyed, and
a new city already rising from the ruins — laid
out according to English ideas of order and
regularity, and rapidly filling up with a popu-
lation gathered from all parts of India. They
immediately established themselves in a part
of the town well suited to their purpose, in a
large "Kyoung or Burman monastery, and re-
sumed then' labors as missionaries among all
classes of the heterogeneous population. Un-
usual success soon crowned their labors.
British soldiers were converted to Christ ; and
Burmans and Karens, no longer deterred by
the jealous tyranny of priests or rulers, eagerly
embraced the Gospel. They were soon after-
wards joined by other missionaries from Maul-
main aud Sandoway, who came to preach the
Gospel in a region from which they had hith-
erto been excluded, but where they found
multitudes, especially of Karens, already in-
structed in its doctrines and clinging to its
hopes. JSIeanwhile British arms were every-
where triumphant, and on the 20th of Decem-
ber, 1852, the entire southern portion of the
kingdom of Burmah, including the ancient
province of Pegu, was incorporated with the
territories of British India. This district em-
braces the whole of Burmah, lying between
the Salwen river on the east, the Yoma
mountains on the west, and the Bay of Ben-
gal on the south, aud extending north to the
19th parallel of north latitude, about fifty
miles above the city of Prome. It embraces
an area of about 45,000 square miles, and a
population of 2,500,000 : Burmans, Karens,
Peguans, aud the other races common in Bur-
mah.
The portion of this territory around Martar
ban is annexed to the Amherst district, of
which Maulmain is the capital, while the re-
maining part is divided for the purposes of
civil government into five separate districts,
each of which is placed under the charge of an
Assistant-Commissioner, who is accountable to
the Commissioner of the territory, and through
him to the Governor-General of India. These
districts are Pegu — which includes Rangoon,
Toungoo, Henthada, Prome, and Bassein.
Such is the region which, as the result of the
late war, htis been liberated forever from Bur-
man oppression, and incorporated with the
British possessions in the East. It- embraces
districts in which, in spite of intolerance and
persecution, the Gospel has already won some
of its most remarkable triumphs among the
Karens, and it is now placed under the general
rule of a liberal-minded and pious Commis-
sioner,"-^ who, during his long residence in the
East, has proved himself the active and unfail-
ing friend of Christian missions, and the moral
improvement of the people.
In anticipation of this altered condition of
the missions in Burmah, and the new fields
which the progress of British power might
open for their occupancy, the Executive Com-
mittee of the Board of Managers requested
the missionaries in Burmah to assemble in
convention in Maulmaiu in the spring of 1853,
to consider what changes should be made in
the organization and modes of prosecuting the
missions. Ti»#y also appointed Rev. Solomon
Peck, D.D., tne Senior Corresponding Secre-
tary of the Board, and Rev. James N. Granger,
Pastor of the First Baptist Church in Provi-
dence, R. I., as a deputation to visit these,
and the other missions of the Board in Asia,
clothed with full discretionary authority to
decide questions which might require immedi-
ate decision, and to act for the Committee in
all matters which could not be referred to the
Committee for consideration. Receiving in-
structions according to the nature of the pow-
ers with which they were clothed, the members
of the deputation embarked on their distant
embassy. They met with the convention,
which assembled at Maulmain, according to
appointment, April 4th, 1853, and continued
its sessions for six weeks, to the 17th of May.
The convention was attended by all the mis-
sionaries in Burmah, except those who were
detained by causes not within their control^
and all the leading subjects connected with
the organization and conduct of the missions
were thoroughly scrutinized and discussed, and,
* Captain Arthur P. Phayre, who is intimately acquaint-
ed with the missions in Burmah, and extends all proper
facilities for their prysecution.
212
BURMAH.
at tho same time, much iuformatLon was ob-
tained respecting the j^ortions of the recently
concjuered provinces -which were deemed favor-
able for missionary operations. The principal
questions ou -which the deputation -were called
to act related to the following :
1. The selection of points at which new
missions were to be established in the conquer-
ed territory, and the designation of mission-
aries to commence them. 2. The manner in
which the missions should be conducted ; what
should be embraced in their work, and by
whom and in what proportions that work
should be performed, together with the agen-
cy of the native preachers and pastors, and
their relations to the missionaries. 3. The
true uses of mission schools, and the proper
limits to the operations of the mission press.
In relation to all these subjects, certain gen-
eral conclusions were furnished by the con-
vention as the result of the experience of
the missionaries ; and these conclusions, to-
gether with the general precepts and examples
contained in the New Testament, touching the
propagation of the Gospel, were made the basis
of the action of the deputation. This action
was also understood to be in accordance with
the views of the missionaries themselves, and
though involving many important changes and
some jjcrsonal sacrihces, it has by them been
cheerlully adopted and carried into execution,
to the larger extension and the increased effi-
ciency and usefulness of the missions.
Of these changes, the plan of this sketch re-
quires that we notice only those which relate to
the reorganization of the missions in order to
secure the dilliision of the Gospel with the
greatest success through the territory recently
annexed to British India. For the purpose
of accomplishing this, several important mod-
ifications were made in the missions already
existing, and five new missions were established
or are contemijlated : one in each of the sev-
eral districts into which the territory has been
divided ; and tu carry these changes into eflect,
the missionaries in 13urmah, insteud of being
stationed at live or six of the principal cities,
are now widely scattered in nine or ten, and
are brought in contact with a vastly larger
jtroportiou of the population of the country.
.Schools in some instances have been discou-
tiinied or their operations restricted ; and the
printing establishments have been brought
together in one, and that one at j\Iaulmain, in
order to liberate the missionaries from other
carcii, that they may give themselves more fully
to preaching the Gospel to the heathen.
In that portion of the country which is still
subject to the liurman king, no mission has
been established, or is at present contemi)lated.
The war with the British E;ust India Company
has wrought no change in his exclusive and
despotic policy, and the teachers of Christiani-
ty are still shut out from all access to the peo-
ple. Indeed, though the war has ceased, it can
not be said that a permanent peace has been
established, no treaty has been concluded, and
no concessions have been made. The barbarian
king has yielded up his territory only to the
superior force of the civilized enemy, whose
hostilities he had provoked, and the time can-
not be distant, when the same necessity again
recurring, will compel him to surrender the last
vestige of independent jurisdiction, and to be-
come a tributary of Great Britain. Mean-
while, the mission at Ava, which had been con-
templated, and to which missionaries had been
appointed, is, for the present, abandoned, and
the new missions have been established only in
those portions of Burmah which have been
placed under British jurisdiction, and where the
missionaries may prosecute their work in secu-
rity beneath the protection of British power.
These new missions are, 1, at Rangoon, in the
district of Pegu ; 2, at Bassein, in the district of
Bassein ; 3, at Shwaygyeen, in the district of
Amherst ; 4, at Frome in the district of
Prome ; 5, at Touugoo, in the district of Toun-
goo. A mission is also contemplated at Hen-
thada, in the district of the same name, and
ultimately at Tounghoop on the coast of Arra-
can, the terminus of the great road to Prome.
The missions which have been established all
lie within the valleys of the three great rivers,
along which are scattered the most thickly-
peopled cities and villages of both Burmans
and Karens. Throughout these districts, the
uninterrupted progress of British arms, and the
quiet establishment of British rule, have been
attended with results of great importance iu
their bearing ou the interests of the missions
and the progress of the Gospel. The reign of
intolerance and persecution is ended. The
despotism beneath which the people had groan-
ed for ages has been broken up for ever, and
has given place to a government of justice and
right, and more than all, the religious system
of the country has lost its hold on the minds
of men, in part, no doubt, from its being iden-
tified with the defeated cause, while Christian-
ity has assumed a higher authority, from its
being the religion of the conquerors and rulers
of the East. "While it has been embraced,
and is now professed by whole villages of
Karens, it is also making its way in the most
encouraging manner among the Burmans at
each of the several stations where it is regularly
preached, alike in the old and the new provinces
of British JUirmah. At some of tiiese sta-
tions it is already planted in the faith and
wrought into the daily lives of the people, so
that if the missionaries were all withdrawn it
would still )>e perpetuated to future genera-
tions, and at all of them it finds as inviting a
field as is now presented in any part of the
world. Tlie prayers of the earliest mission-
aries have been answered and their fondest hope
has been fully realized.
During the j'oar 18;V2, Rev. Messrs. M. IJ.
Bixby and J. L. Uoughis, both of whom had
BURMAH.
213
been pastors of cliurclies in this country, and
Rev. Messrs. C. Hibbard, D. Whitaker, J. R.
Nisbet, T. Allen and A. T. Rose, were ap-
pointed missionaries in Burniah, and soon after-
■w'ards repaired to their several stations; and dur-
ing the year 1853, Rev. A. R. Crawley was also
added to the number. The missionaries of the
American Baptist Missionary Union who are
stationed in the several provinces of Burmah,
are thirty-one ; several of whom are now on
temporary visits to the United States. With
those are associated about the same number
of female assistants and one hundred and forty-
five native assistants, of whom some fifteen or
twenty are ordained preachers. These mis-
sionaries and their assistants, according to the
latest report of the Managers of the Mission-
ary Union, are distributed among the follow-
ing missions, which are now in operation in the
several districts of Burmah, viz. :
I. Maidmain Burman Mission.— It com-
prises Rev. Messrs. Haswell, Howard, Stillson,
Bixby and Mr. Ranney a printer, with their
wives and five native preachers and assist-
ants. The Burman church at Maulmain
numbers 138 members ind that at Amherst,
which is also included in this mission, numbers
28 members. At Maulmain the printing
operations both in the Burman and Karen lan-
guages for all the Burman missions are at pre-
sent°concentrated. This mission has (1854) 2
stations, 5 missionaries, 5 female assistants, 5
native preachers and assistants, 3 churches, 170
members, 6 day-schools, 100 pupils.
II. Maulmain Karen Mission. — This is es-
tablished in a distinct portion of the city,
which among the missionaries is styled, New-
ton. It comprises Rev. Messrs. Wade, Ben-
nett, Hibbard, W. Moore and Whitaker with
their wives and nineteen native assistants. It
is the seat of a theological school for training
native preachers and of a normal school for
the education of teachers. Around Maulmain,
which is the central station, are fifteen out-sta-
tions, and the entire mission embraces fourteen
churches, numbering about 900 members. Its
operations are designed for the Karen race in
the district of Amherst, which includes the
adjoining and newly organized province of
Martaban, whose seat of government is also
at Maulmain. This mission has (1854) 1 sta-
tion, 15 out-stations, 5 missionaries, 6 female
assistants, 19 native preachers and assistants,
14 churches 869 members, 2 Iwarding schools,
44 pupils, 3 day schools, 40 pupils — total 5
schools, 84 pupils.
III. Tavoy Mission. — This is a mission both
for Burmans and Karens, though its operations
have hitherto been principally among the lat^
ter. It embraces Rev. Messrs. Cross, Thomas,
Benjamin, and Allen, with their wives, a,nd
two Burman and twenty Karen native assist-
ants. The operations of the mission are de-
signed to comprise the provinces both of Ta-
voy and Mergui ; though at present the mis-
sionaries all reside at Tavoy.
In 1854, 1 station, 20 out-stations, 4 mission-
aries, 4 female assistants, 22 native preachers
and assistants, 22 churches, 1,046 members, 2
boarding-schools, 96 pupils, 15 day schools,
300 pupils ; total, 17 schools, 306 pupils.
IV. Arracan Mission.— Th.\^ mission, both
Burman and Karen, is designed to embrace
the whole province of Arracan. It has now
two stations, Aky'ab and Sandoway, with out-
stations at Cheduba and Ramree, Kyouk-Phyoo
having been abandoned as a station by the
advice of the deputation in 1853. At Ak-
yab the missionaries are stationed. They are
'Rev. Messrs. C. C. Moore and Mrs. Moore. Rev.
A. T. Rose, and Mrs. B. H. Knapp, Mrs. C. C.
Campbell; Mr. Knapp having died in 1853,
and with them are associated eight native as-
sistants.
In 1854, 2 stations, 2 outrstations, 2 mission-
aries, 3 female assistants, 8 native preachers
and assistants, 1 church, 60 members, 1 day-
school, 15 pupils.
V. Bassein Msswn.— This is in the new ter-
ritory, and embraces many of the churches and
Christian villages in Burmah, formerly con-
nected with the mission at Sandoway in Arra-
can. It is designed hereafter to be both
Karen and Burman, though the Gospel has
thus far been embraced principally by the Ka-
rens of the Bassein district. The mission em-
braces in the Karen department, Rev. J. S.
Beecher, and Rev. J. R. Nisbet, Rev. H. L.
Van Meter, and Mrs. Van Meter, Mrs. Beech-
er having died in March, 1854, while on a
voyage to the United States ; in the Burman
department. Rev. J. L. Douglass and Mrs.
Douglass. Rev. E. L. Abbott is also attached
to this mission, but he is now in the United
States. Bassein is on a river of the same
name, one of the outlets of the Irrawaddy,
about 60 miles from its mouth ; and around
this principal station are fifty out-stations,
among which are scattered fifty-six native
preachers and assistants. The region is filled
with Karen converts, who, under the Burman
despotism, were obliged to cross the Yoma
mountains to Sandoway, to receive instructions
and be baptized by the missionary, and these
churches are now very numerous. The Bur-
mans, since the Gospel has had access to them,
are evincing a most encouraging interest in
its truths.
In 1854, 1 station, 50 out-stations, 5 mission-
aries, 3 female assistants, 56 native preachers
and assistants, 50 churches, 5,000 members, 1
boarding-school, 80 pupils, 20 day-schools, 280
pupils — total, 21 schools, 360 pupils.
VI. Rangoon Mission. — This mission, like
the others which have been mentioned, has
both a Burman and a Karen department, and
though established where the original mission
in Burmah was first planted, is yet, in its pre-
sent organization, to be regarded as a new
214
BURMAH.
mission. In the Burmau department it em-
braces Rev. Messrs. Stevens, Ingalls, Dawson,
and Crawley, with their wives, and six native
preachers and assistants ; and in the Karen
department Rev. J. H. Vinton, Mrs. Vinton
and Miss Vinton, with twenty- nine native
preachers and assistants. Tiie Karen depart-
ment of the mission is established at Kemmeu-
dine, a town about three miles north-west of
Rangoon. There are two Burmau churches
in the mission, one at Rangoon, and one at
Kambet, an out-station in the vicinity, and
they together number lOG members. The Ka-
ren churches are twenty-three in number, most
of them having been formed by missionaries
from Maulmaiu, in the occasional visits which
they made during the period in which the
country was closed to the Gospel by the des-
potism of the government. They contain 1476
members.
In 1854, 2 stations, 32 outstations, 5 mission-
aries, (j female assistants, 29 native preachers
and assistants, 25 churches, 1573 members, 1
boarding-school, 180 pupils.
VII. Frame Missioa. — This is a new mission,
exclusively Burmau, established near the city
of Frome, on the Irrawaddy, the centre of the
district of the same name, the most northerly
of the districts comprised in the territory re-
cently annexed. 'J'he mission is established at
Shwaydoung, a chief seat of Burman education,
eight miles distant from Prome. It was com-
menced in January, 1854, according to the
recommendation of the recent deputation, by
Rev. Messrs. Kincaid and Simons, who about
that time removed thither with their families
and native assistants. As in almost all the
large towns of Burmah,' there were residing
there several Christian converts, who welcomed
the missionaries with the utmost eagerness.
As the kingdom of Burmah is still closed to
the labors of the missionaries, the design of
establishing a mission at Ava, is for the pre-
sent abandoned, and Messrs. Kincaid and Daw-
son, who were appointed for that purpose, have
been assigned — the former to the Prome and
the latter to the Rangoon mission. The mis-
sion at I'rome or Shwaydoung has been com-
menced with two missionaries, and two female
assistants, (Messrs. Kincaid and Simons, and
their wives] and two native assistants. It has
one station and two out-stations.
In 1854, 1 station, 2 out-stations, 2 mission-
aries, 2 female assistants, 2 native preachers
and assistants ; no church has yet been formed,
and no schools have been established.
VII I. Skwaijgijeeii AJission. — 'I'his is both a
Burman and a Karen mission, established in
1853, at Shwaygyeen, a large town at the
junction of the Shwaygyeen and the Sitang
rivers, about lOO miles northward from Ran-
goon. It is one of the chiel places in Marta-
ban which now is in the district of Amherst.
The mission has been commenced by Rev.
Messrs. Harris and Brayton, both of whom are
missionaries for the Karens, whose villages are
exceedingly numerous and populous in the re-
gion. They have with them two native assist-
ants, and the auspices of the mission are most
encouraging.
In 1854, 1 station, 2 missionaries, 1 female
assistant, 2 native preachers, 1 church, 11 mem-
bers ; no schools have yet been cstablishc;l
IX. Toungoo Mission. — Toungoo is a large
walled city, the chief town of the district of
the same name, on the Sitang river, about one
hundred miles above Shwaygyeen. It is one of
the places fixed on by the deputation as the scat
of a new mission in the conquered territory.
The mission was commenced by Rev. Dr.
Mason, who, with two or three assistants,
reached the city in October, 1853. It is the
centre of a large population of Burmans, Shy-
ans and Karens, and the mission is designed
for all these races. The Karens of the region
regarded the arrival of a missionary, — bring-
ing his sacred books printed in their own lan-
guage, as a fulfilment of the ancient prophetic
traditions of their race, and evinced even more
than their wonted readiness to hear and be-
lieve the Gospel. A little church was soon
organized, and the native assistants appointed
to their respective labors, when Dr. Mason,
whose health was already greatly impaired,
was obliged to leave the mission for a time
and return to the United States. The care of
the mission has been committed to Tau C^uala,
an experienced Karen preacher from Tavoy.
He has with him one Burmese assistant.
In 1854, 1 station, 3 out-stations, I mission-
ary, 1 female ;issistant, 2 native preachers and
assistants, 1 church, 7 members, 1 boarding-
school, 7 pupils, 3 day-schools, 36 pupils ;
total, 4 schools and 43 pupils.
X. Henthada Mission. — Ilenthada is the capi-
tal of the district of the same name, and is situ-
ated on the Irrawaddy, at the point where that
stream branches into the Bassein and Rangoon
rivers. The district embraces the very fertile
and populous delta lying between these rivers.
A mission has been appointed for Henthada,
but no missionaries have yet actually arrived
to establish it. — I'kof. W. Gammkll.
TABLE OF MIS.SIONS IN BURMAH FOR 1854.
»
.„
i -2
3!
ja
V
m
it:
.5
■3
1
12
1
c
—
1. o
3
a
t
3
1
J3
c
X
5
-a
"3
o
31
>. =
e
6
cE
3
48
3
X
of.
324
145
117
8,7a6
7
407
771
5 -3
1,178
BURNSTIILL: A station of the Free
Church of Scotland in South Africa, about 18
miles ciist of Lovedale.
BUSHMKN : A nomadic race of Uotten-
BUSHXtEN— CALPENTYN.
215
tots in South Africa, who hve a wandering
life, remote from towns, in a condition of ex-
treme degradation. They have, says Mr. Mof-
fat, neither house nor shed, neither flocks nor
herds. Their most delightful home is afar oft"
in the desert, the unfrequented mountain pass,
or the secluded recesses of a cave or ravine.
They remove from place to place, as conveni-
ence or necessity requires. The man takes his
spear, and suspends his bow and quiver on his
shoulder ; wliile the woman frequently, in ad-
dition to the burden of a helpless infant, car-
ries a mat, an earthen pot, a number of ostrich
egg-shells, and a few ragged skins, bundled on
her liead or shoulders. Hunger compels them
to feed on everything edible. Ixias, wild gar-
lic, the core of aloes, gum of acacias, and sev-
eral otlier plants and berries, some of which
are extremely unwholesome, constitute their
fruits of the field ; while almost every kind of
living creature is eagerly devoured, lizards,
locusts and grasshoppers not excepted. The
poisonous, as well as innoxious serpents, they
roast and eat, extracting first the venom of the
former, with which they poison the points of
their arrows. Their dwellings are hardly fit
abodes for the beasts of the field. In a bushy
country, they will form a hollow in a central
position, and bring the branches together over-
head. Here the man and his wife, with per-
haps a child or two, lie huddled in a heap, on
a little grass, in a hollow spot not larger than
an ostrich's nest. Where liushes are scarce,
they form a hollow under the edge of a rock,
covering it partially with reeds or grass, and
they are often found in fissures and caves of
the mountains. In these places, they lie close
together, like pigs in a sty. They are ex-
tremely lazy, so that nothing will rouse them
to action but excessive hunger. They are
total strangers to domestic happiness. The
men have several wives, but conjugal affection
is little known. They take no great care of
their children, and never correct them, except
in a fit of rage, when they almost kill them
with severity. In a qaarrel between father
and mother, or between the several wives of a
husband, the defeated party wreaks vengeance
on the child of the conqiieror, which, in gene-
ral, loses its life. Bushmen will kill their
children without remorse, when they are ill-
shaped, when in want of food, when the
father of a child has forsaken its mother, or
when obliged to flee from pursuers. They will
even throw them to the hungry lion, which
stands roaring before their cavern, refusing to
depart till some peace-offering is made to him.
In general, the children cease to be the objects
of a mother's care, as soon as they are able to
crawl about the field. In some few instances,
however, we meet with a spark of natural af-
fection, which places them on a level with the
brute creation.
The Bushman knows no God, no eternity,
yet dreads death. He worships at no shrine —
has no religion. We can scarcely conceive of
human beings descending lower in the scale of
ignorance and vice. Yet they can be kind
and grateful, and faithful to their charge.
And it is their habitual practice, when they
receive food, to share it with their friends, re-
serving the smallest portion for themselves ;
and the hungry mother will give food to her
emaciated children without tasting it herself.
(For attempts to Christianize the Bushmen,
see South Africa). — Moffat's Southern Africa,
pp. 16-21 ; 46-50.
BUSSORAH : A great city to the south-
cast of Bagdad, 7 miles in circumference, a
part of which is laid out in gardens, intersected
with canals. Pop. 60,000 ; Arabs, Turks,
Jews, Hindoos and Persians. A station of
the London Jews' Society.
BUTTERWORTH : A station of the We^
leyans in Kaffraria, on the Buffalo river, S. A.
CABALIST : A Jewish doctor, who pro-
fesses the study of the Cabala, or the mysteries
of Jewish traditions.
CAIRO : The capital city of Egypt, the
residence of the viceroy, and the scat of gov-
ernment, near the right bank of the Nile, and
five miles from the origin of its delta. Popu-
lation, including the suburbs of Boulac and
Old Cairo, about 250,000, comprising about
125,000 Mohammedans, 60,000 Copts, 3,000
to 4,000 Jews, and numerous foreigners. Cli-
mate, healthy and little variable. The Church
Missionary Society have here a mission to the
Copts. See Egypt.
CALCUTTA : The chief of the British
Presidencies in India — the seat of the first Pro-
testant Bishop's See, the diocese extending
over all the territories of the company. Pop-
ulation, as estimated in 1849, 250,000 within
the " ditch," and 500,000 in the immediate
suburbs. Within a circumference of twenty
miles, the population is generally supposed to
be two millions. The city contains a mixed
population of Chinese, English, Portuguese,
French, Armenians, Jews, Monghols, Par-
sees, Arabs, &c., the great mass consisting of
Hindoos and Mohammedans. The Hindoos
alone number about 200,000. Calcutta is
the seat of missionary operations for various
societies.
CALEDON : Station of the London Mis-
sionary Society in South Africa, 120 miles
east of Cape Town, near a branch of the
Cradock river, Caledon district.
CALIF, C.AXiPii, or Kalif : A represent-
ative of Mohammed, bearing the same relatioa
to him that the Pope pretends to bear to St.
Peter.
CALOYERS or Calogeri : Monks of the
Greek Church, of three orders.
CALPENTYN : A peninsula, extending
about 60 miles along the west coast of Ceylon,
a station of the Society for the Propagation of
the Gospel.
CALTURA : A station of the Wesleyan
216
CALICUT— CANADA.
Missionary Society, in Ceylon, 26 miles from
Colombo.
CALICUT : A town in the province of
Malabar, India. 10.3 miles south west of Sering-
apt^tara. In 1800, it contained 5,000 houses.
The inluibitants are chiefly Mapillas, who are
of Arabian extraction. It is a station of the
German Missionary Society.
C ALMONT : Station of the Cluirch Mis-
sionary Society, in the River District, Sierra
Loone, to the S. E. of Freetown.
C AMEROOXS : A region of country bor-
dering on the river and mountains of that
name, in Upper Guinea, Africa, occupied by
the Baptist Missionary Society.
CANADA : This extensive country, lying
on the nortlicrn border of the States of
Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, New York
and Ohio, and the eastern border of Michi-
gan, was discovered by the French navi-
gator, Jacques Cartier, in the middle of the
sixteenth century, but was not entered upon
as a place of European settlement, until the
beginning of the seventeentli. At about the
same period the Pilgrim Fathers of New
England landed there, with an open aiid
loved Bible, an evangelical faith, and a manly
attachment to freedom, both civil and reli-
gious,— and the French adventurers landed
at Stadacona (Quebec) and at Ilocbelaga,
(Montreal), accompanied by ecclesiastics, to
take possession of the land in the name of
the French monarch and of the Papacy. Both
parties brought with them as a most cher-
ished object, their religion, designing to
stamp the country which they respectively
came to occupy, with that great element of a
peopFe's greatness. They founded their
respective Colonies on a religious basis, and
amid acts of homage to God, they set uj)
their banners. Yet was there a mighty dif-
ference between these two events, — a differ-
ence lying mainly in the character of the
religion they brought with them. The
founders of New England were Protestants —
the founders of Canada were Romanists.
The former wore enlightened and free, — the
latter were superstitious and spiritually en-
slaved. And although the Protestants land-
ed upon barren rocks, and the Romanists in
the midst of fertile valleys, the respective
history of the lands they came to peojile.
proclaims trumpet-tongued, the superiority
of a free Bible Christianity, over superstition
and pricstism, in moulding the character and
influencing the destinies of a nation.
The first missions to Canada were those
of Rome, which were immediately and muni-
ficently endowed by the French monarch.
The Jesuits were early in the field. They
founded a college at Queltec and stretched
their dependent missions to the small settle-
ments on the river. They established, more-
over, a chain of posts, westward, many of
which belong rather to the history of the
United States than to that of Canada. In
the year 1641, they erected their first church
in the city of Montreal, which with accus-
tomed mariolatry, they dedicated to the Vir-
gin, It would not comport with the design
of this work to narrate the conflicts which
occurred between the several orders of ec-
clesiastics for the possession of this fair and
promising field of missions. Suffice it to
state, that at length the Jesuits obtained the
preijminence at Quebec and at St. Francis,
while the St. Sulpicians had possession of
Montreal. There were also orders of friars
and nuns who formed an important part of
the ecclesiastical machinery of the country.
Ample endowiuents were secured to all these
parties, — which the progress of events and
the development of the country commercially
and otherwise, by a different race and Pro-
testant in religion, have rendered of vast
value. The Jesuits became the seigneurs
of Quebec. By gift and purchase they
acquired lands in various places between that
city and IMontreal ; so that the estates which
bear their name, have now a money value of
not far from one million of pounds currency,
or four millions of dollars. At the cession
of the country to Great Britain, this Order
was declared illegal, and their estates were
confiscated to the Crown on the death of the
last of them. They are now in the hands of
the colonial government, administered in an
improfitable manner, and their avails, which
it is presumed might be easily doubled in
amount, are mainly assigned to the support
of Roman Catholic schools and colleges.
The Seminary of St. Sulpice received the
seigniory of the city and island of IMontreal,
the seigniory of the Lake of the Two Mount-
ains, and some other property from which it
is estimated they derive an income of at least
one hundred and twenty thousand per annum.
They have retained this propert}' under the
British government, and have been incor-
porated by the local Legislature, for the pur-
pose of holding it as an endowment for their
churches, missions to the Indians, and
schools. But as the}' are never called effect-
ually to account for their use of the money
they receive, it can be, without fear of com-
plaint, assigned to any object that would bid
fair to advance the interests of the Church
of Rome on this continent.
The ancient lunmeries of Quebec, Three
Rivers, und Montreal, were also richh'- en
dowed. The writer has not the means at
hand of ascertaining the wealth of those at
Quebec and Three Rivers, but the two in
Montreal have large and increasing revemies.
Some of their most valuable estates have
been placed in enterprising hands at long
leases, which now yield to their holders a
large return, and will ultimately give to the
revered sisterhood a vast accessional income.
It is to be understood that these acquisitions
CANADA.
2ir
b}' gift and purchase were made by the cor-
porate bodies indicated, during the French
colonial history of Canada. At that period
the country west of Montreal, afterwards
made a distinct province under the name of
Upper Canada, and subsequently reunited
with its eastern sister bearing the name of
Canada West, was not inhabited except by
tribes of Indians and wandering traders in
furs.
Canada was ceded to Great Britain in
17G3 : the conquerors deahng with the people
in the most lenient and liberal manner —
confirming their laws, language and religion,
their tithes to the clergy, and their ecclesias-
tical endowments. But speedily a Protestant
and Anglo-Saxon element was introduced,
which has steadily increased until it is now,
in respect of the whole of Canada, the pre-
dominant element. At the above date the
population of the country did not exceed
70,000. In 1783, it had increased in Lower
Canada to about 112,000, but at this time Up-
per Canada had about 10,000 inhabitants, of
whom the dwellers at the numerous frontier
forts and the garrisons constituted by far the
greater part. After this period, the number
of settlers was augmented by agreataccession
of United Empire loj'alists and disbanded
soldiers, and by immigrants from the United
States and from G reat Britain, so that in the
year 1814, the inhabitants of Upper Canada
had increased to 95,000, and in 1824 to
152,000; while at the latter date, Lower
Canada contained a population of 450,000.
United Canada now contains a population of
two millions, of whom not more than 700,000
are the descendants of the original French set-
tlers ; moreover, Canada West now slightly
exceeds the Eastern section of the province
in population, — a circumstance which must
necessarily become more prominent in the
future history of the country, seeing that
there is a constant tide of immigration into
the country, no part of wliich comes from
France.
Whenever the number of Protestants be-
came such as to invite the attention of their
co-religionists in England, the venerable
Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in
Foreign Parts, sent out a few Episcopalian
ministers and sustained them ; there came
also on to the field a few Scottish Presby-
terian ministers, and from the United States,
Episcopal Methodist missionaries. Later,
namely, in 1829, the American Home Mission-
ary Society had several Congregational and
Presbyterian missionaries introduced to the
country, and continued for about ten years
to do something for Canada. The Wesleyan
Methodists of England, sent out several mis-
sionaries earlier than the above date, and
assisted not only in their support, but also
in training promising young men for their
ituierant ministry. In 1836, the Cougrega-
tionalists of England entered the Canadian
field, and have had ever since a growing mis-
sion in the country. The United Presby-
terian Church of Scotland, and later the Free
Church of Scotland, have done good mission-
ary service in the land. The'se hints will
suffice to show that up to this hour Canada
is missionary ground, and that all the leadino-
Protestant denominations have entered upon
its cultivation. There are now in the cities
numerous self-sustaining churches, but by far
the largest portion of those in the rural dis-
tricts are partly dependent on missionary funds
for the support of their pastors. It must be
obvious that in estimating the relio-ious con-
dition of Canada as represented by the num-
ber of churches, ministers, and other Chris-
tian agencies found within its precincts, it will
be needful to define the stand-point from
which the character of the several reli"-ious
bodies are viewed. It must, alas? be
acknowledged by all observing disciples of
Christ, that there exist throughout Chris-
tendom many organizations bearin"- the
name of churches, which have little iifthem
of the spirit and character of our Divine
Master. There are individuals in them all
probably more or less numerous, who love
the truth as it is in Jesus, but the character
of the whole bod3^ is the reverse of evan^^-eli-
cal. This definition need not be given in
i-espect to the Church of Rome, as her char-
acter for Christian illumination and influence
will be readily estimated by the readers of
this work. They will find her described 2
Thess. ii. 3—12. But in relation to the
other bodies to be noted, it may be well to
say that their measure of evangelical influ-
ence is estimated from a stand-point such as
that occupied by the American Board of
Commissioners for Foreign Missions, by its
Secretaries, Committee, and principal sup-
porters. Viewing the Episcopalian Church,
called '= the United Church of England and
Ireland," from that point, it cannot, as ex-
hibited in Canada, be termed as a whole, or
even mainly evangelical. Its communion is
usually without restriction as to the piety or
want of piety of its members. Its clergj^,
with some bright and delightful exceptions,
are, so far as can be judged, ignorant of sav-
ing truth ; and as a consequence, its ministry
is not eft'cctive in the conversion of sinners.
There are in each of the three Dioceses of
Canada bright exceptions to this descrip-
tion : men of God who love the Lord Jesus
Christ in sincerity, and seek by all means in
their power to promote the advancement of
our Lord's Kingdom. There are also lay-
men of remarkable excellence connected with
this church whose influence is most decided
in the cause of evangelical religion. But the
writer has no doubt that these excellent men
would endorse as true, the general represen-
tation given above. It should be borne in
218
CANADA.
mind, throughout, however, that the regular
services of the Church, bring before the
minds of the people a large portion of Scrip-
ture, and consequently of saving truth.
These few men hope much from this.
Before proceeding with an estimate of
other bodies, some statistical facts regarding
the foregoing, may be placed on record. The
Roman Catholic Church in Canada is divided
into seven dioceses, namely : Quebec, Three
Rivers, Montreal, and St. Hyacinthe, in East-
ern Canada, and Bytown, Kingston, and
Toronto, in "Western Canada. That of Que-
bec contains HI parishes, exclusive of those
of the city. There are an archbishop, a
coadjutor bishop, and 184 clergy, including
chaplains of nunneries, officers of colleges,
&c. That of Three Rivers contains, includ-
ing the town, 38 parishes. It has a bishop
and a body of clergy in all the offices num-
bering 51. That of Montreal contains 108
parishes. It has a bishop and a coadjutor,
and including the ecclesiastics of the Serai-
nary of St. Sulpice, the professors in colleges,
(the Jesuits among them) and other clerical
officials, the body of clergy numbers 209.
This does not include brotherhoods and sis-
terhoods in convents. That of St. Hyacinthe
contains 3G parishes, but some of these are
rather stations amid Protestant communities.
It has a bishop and 55 clergymen.
Western Canada being Protestant ground,
there are no Roman Catholic parishes, but
there are three bishops and 112 priests
laboring there, chiefly among the Irish
Roman Catholic settlers. The entire people
to whom these bishops and clergy minister,
nearly as much need the circulation of the
Bible among them, and the mission of evan-
gelical agencies, as heathendom itself.
The Church of England in Canada, has
three dioceses, namely, Quebec, Montreal,
and Toronto ; the latter more extensive than
the two former put together. There are
three bishops, and including arch-deacons,
and other officials gathered around the three
bishops, there are of clergy in the diocese
of Quebec, 42, in that of Montreal, 53,
and 4 retired missionaries ; and in that of
Toronto, 148. It is estimated that in the
diocese of Montreal there are about 30,000
nominal adherents, but the number of com-
municants is only about 3,000. Of the other
dioceses the writer has not the particulars on
th(!se points.
Tile Presbyterians in Canada are divided
into three principal sections, namely : the
Synod which retains its connection with the
Established Church of Scotland — the Synod
whidi without formal ecclesiastical connec-
tion, yet represents the Free Church of
Scotland — and the Syno(l of the [Jnited
Presbyterian Church, a branch of that Ciiurch
in Scotland, l)ut without formal ecclesiastical
connection with it. The first of these ia very
similar in thu character of its pastorate and
its membership to the Established Church
of Scotland. The discourses of the pulpit arc
sound and evangelical, but not usually pointed.
The clergy are well educated and respecta-
ble. The membership contains many of
God's saints, but like that of all established
churches, it is mixed in its character. The
second of these bodies possesses a large
amount of energy ; it is one of the youngest
of the denominations in Canada, but it has
already done an extensive and good work.
Coming out from the churches connected
with the establishment, its pastorate and
membership will be without difficulty esti-
mated by all who are aware of the religious
history of Scotland during the last ten years.
The third of these bodies, though the small-
est, is highly respectable as to character and
influence. They are eminently sound in the
faith, and preach the Word of the Lord with
boldness. There are seventy-three ministers
and three retired, in connection with the
first mentioned sections of Presbyterianism,
and forty-three vacant charges are reported ;
but it is to be presumed that some of these
are little more than nominal. The full sta-
tistics of this body are not in the hands of
the writer.
The following facts relating to the second
of these three sections of Presbyterianism are
given in the words of a thoroughly furnished
officer of Synod, and have relation to the pre-
sent year, (June, 1854.) " I may mention
generally, that ten years ago,when our Church
was organized, there were twenty-five min-
isters ; now we have on our roll 92 names of
ordained ministers, embraced in eight Pres-
byteries, seven in Canada West, and one in
in Canada East. During tlie past year,
nearly £12,000 ($48,000), has been raised
within the church for the support of our
Theological Institution ; about £430(^1,729)
for the French Canadian Missionary Society
and nearly £100 (*$1,G00), for foreign mis-
sions. The church also supports a mission-
ary in the Buxton settlement, among the
colored population. In our various presby-
teries there are at least 50 vacant congrega-
tions and mission stations, which (the latter)
are multiplying every j'ear. Knox's College
is attended by about 40 students, and has
been the means of sending forth upwards of
30 of tlie ministers now on the roll of the
Synod."
The third section of Presbyterians report,
in 1853, forty-nine ordained ministers and
three probationers ; but tlic names of 73 con-
gregations appear upon tlie tables, of which
eigliteen are vacant. The '" average attend-
ance" throughout the church amounts to
12,845, showing an increase of 2.2>7 ui)on the
returns of tlie previous year. Tlie total in-
come has been £0,425 ($21,500) ; of wliich
I$1G,000 were expended on stipend and
CANADA— CANNIBALS.
219
S8,000 on 'Church property," For mis-
sions, including Theological Fund Chair, the
church raised $2,200. Compared with pre-
vious returns, increase is observable in most
of these items.
Of the remaining Christian organizations
in Canada, it is not needful to do more than
to record statistics, inasmuch as their char-
acter in respect to the pastorate and mem-
bership is similar to that of the bodies of the
same name in the United States.
The Methodist body is divided into four
sections, as follows :
The Wesleyan Methodist Church in Canada
raises about .'j^21,000 for domestic and In-
dian missions, of which it has 81 in number,
supplied by 91 ministers. The total minis-
terial force of this body, including the above
mentioned missionaries, is 21G. The sister
church in Eastern Canada, numbers 20 min-
ister^ The congregations raised last year
.'^2,80U for missions, but more than this
amount was expended on the Canadian sta-
tions. In future, the East and West will be
united in one organization.
The Methodist New Connection Church
has fifty-two ministers. The Methodist
Episcopal Church has 91 ministers, includ-
ing the supernumeraries, but excluding those
who are superannuated. The Primitive
Methodist Church numbers thirty-two min-
isters.
The remaining denominations of any im-
portance are the Congregational and the
Baptist.
Eighteen years since there were only nine
Congregational churches in the country ; there
are now sixty-two, having 123 principal sta-
tions. The number of ministers is fifty-nine,
having about 10,000 hearers, and a member-
chip of 2,750. There are GO Sabbath Schools
with neai'ly 400 teachers and 3000 pupils.
This body contributed for the support of the
pastorate and of worship during the year
iust closed, £4,090, or .^18,760 ; for debt on
places of worship, building and repairs.
S10.226 ; for missions, .«;3,G00 ; Theological
institute, ?J;900 ; other objects §;1.270.
Concerning the Baptist churches the
writer has no access to statistics, beyond the
number of ministers, which is 131.
There arc two missions of importance, and
two others that arc in a state of formation,
for the evangelization of the French Cana-
dian people. The French Canadian Mission-
ary Society expended last year about !^10,000
on this work. It is catholic, i. e., not de-
nominational. The Grand Ligne Mission,
which is Baptist, spent nearly as much. The
other two are in the hands of the Church of
England and the Church of Scotland. They
are small and unimportant, A valuable im-
pression has been made on the mind of the
French Canadian people. Canada has this'
year resolved to enter into the foreign mis-
sionary work. No missionary has yet been
sent forth however. — Rev, Henry Wilkes,
D. D., of Montreal.
CANDY : Sec Kandy.
CANANOBE: A maritime town in the
province of Malabar, India, situated at the
bottom of a small bay, 45 miles N, W. of
Calicut, and 6G S. S. E, of Mangalore, con-
taining 11,000 houses: a station of the Basle
Missionai-y Society.
CANTON: The capital of Kwangtung,
China, situated on the north bank of Pearl
river, in lat. 23« 7', N. and 113'^ 14' E. long.
CANNIBALS : Man-eaters ; those who
feed on human flesh. It seems incredible that
men can be reduced so far below the brutes
as to devour one another, as the most ferocious
wild beasts rarely prey upon their own spe-
cies. Yet, in all ages, as far back as the re-
cords of history cajii be traced, men have been
found so far lost to the instincts of nature as
to devour the flesh of their fellow-creatures.
Herodotus, Mela, Sti'abo, and Pliny, speak
of such, and describe the particular regions
in which they dwelt. Herodotus describes a
nation, apparently in India, who regularly
killed and ate the more aged among them-
selves. The ancient Scythians wei'e Canni-
bals; and Herodotus speaks of a distinct
tribe adjoining them, who led a rural life,
obeyed no laws, and acknowledged no au-
thority, who fed on human flesh. Jerome
states that, when he was in Gaul, he had seen
the Atticotti, a Bi-itish tribe, feeding on hu-
man flesh. At a late period, traces of the
same barbarous custom are found in Scot-
land. During a war with England, in 1138,
the men of Galloway not only slaughtered the
innocent, without distinction of age or sex ;
but they cut out the bowels, devoured the
flesh, and drank the blood of their victims.
The inhabitants of the British Isles are sup-
posed, by many, to have sprung from the an-
cient Scythians, who drank the blood of their
enemies, and made drinking cups of their
skulls. There was a certain ceremony at
which none could drink, who had not killed
an enemy ; and it at length became connected
with religious rites, as well as being a token
of conquest. The early European navigators,
from the time of Columbus, have reported
the existence of Cannibalism among the abori-
gines of America. But the practice does
not seem to have been common among the
North American Indians ; and when prac-
ticed, it appears to have been upon enemies
taken in war, and connected with supersti-
tious observances. Cannibalism was preva-
lent in the South Sea Islands, and probably
on the Pacific shores of South America, as
well as in New Zealand and New Caledonia,
from the earliest discoveries ; and the horrid
custom still prevails among the unevangelized
tribes. M. de Fresne, a cotemporary of
Capt. Cooke, with seventeen of his compan-
220
CANNIBALS.
ions, were slaughtered and eaten in New
Zealand.
A few years ago, a native teacher, while
traveling in New Caledonia, in the district of
Eugene, witnessed a horrible transaction,
which shows how the chiefs are trained up to
the most ferocious habits. A feast was held,
and the people of the chief brought him food.
The son of the chief, a lad of about six 3'ears,
observing among them a very corpulent man,
asked his father for him. The father com-
plied with his request, and ordered the man
to remain after the rest went away. The
chief then asked his son what should be done
with the man, and the boy replied, " Let him
be cut in pieces alive !" One of the chief's
attendants then cut off one arm, then the
other, and one leg after the other, till only
the head and trunk remained ; yet the man
lived till his head was severed from his body.
The teacher was informed that this was a
privilege only granted to the son of the chief
during his minorit}' ; and that, as often as
the tenants bring him food, and the sou de-
sires any one among them, his wish is grant-
ed, and the victim is either killed for food, or
cut up alive.
So late as 1809, the captain and crew of
an English vessel, who had visited New Zea-
land for the purchase of timber, were trea-
cherously slaughtered, and their bodies de-
voured. The natives of New Caledonia also
have been seen greedily devouring human
flesh. Commander Wilkes, of the U. S. Ex-
ploring Expedition, says, there can be no
question that Cannibalism is practiced in the
Fejee Islands. " for the mere pleasure of eat-
ing human llesh as food!" '' Their fondness
for it will })e understood from the custom
they have of sending portions of it to tiieir
friends at a distance, as an acceptable pre-
sent ; and tlie gift is eaten, even if decompo-
sition have begun before it is received. So
highly do tliey esteem this food, that the
greatest praise they can bestow on a deli-
cacy is, to say tiiat it is as tender as a dead
man! Even their sacrifices are made more
frequent, in order to indulge their taste for
this liorrid food. The bodies of enemies
slain in Ijattle arc always eaten, liut war
does not furnish enough to satisfy their de-
sires. '" They embrace opportunities to seize
victims wherever they can lind them. The}'
will even banquet on the ilesli of their friends ;
and in times of scarcity, families will make an
exchange of children for this horrid purpose."
'• Tile flesh of women is preferreil to that of
men ;" but the women are not allowed to eat
of it openly, though it is said the wives of
the chiefs do ])!irtake of it privately. The
common people are forbidden to eat of it, un-
less there is plenty ; but tliey are allowed to
pick the bones. In 18."U, the mate and seve-
ral of the crew of an American vessel were
decoyed on shore by Vcndovi, Chief of
Reeva, with the pretence that he was sick
and wanted medicine, when they were trea-
cherously massacred and eaten.
Dr. Spr}^, a gentleman connected with the
Bengal medical staff, gives the following ac-
count of a Cannibal tribe in Chittagong, in
the eastern portion of the province of Ben-
gal, the particulars of which he had from
IMajor Gardner. The Kookies, as these bru-
tal wretches are called, are corpulant, low in
stature, with set features, and muscular
limbs. They speak a dialect peculiar to
themselves, and build their villages on the
boughs of the forest trees. They appear to
have no settled habitation, but wander in the
wilderness in herds. When they have select-
ed a site, the whole community set to work
to collect bamboos and branches of trees,
which are afterwards fashioned into plat-
forms, and placed across the loft}' boughs of
the ditferent trees. On this foundation^ the
rude grass su])erstructure is raised, which
forms the hut. When completed, the women
and children are taken into their aerial abodes,
and then the men lop off' all the hnver branch-
es of the trees, and make a rough ladder of
bamboos, on which they ascend, and take it
up after them. Though such a mode of life
may seem incredible, yet jNIr. Moilat gives an
account of an inhabited tree, which he found
in Africa.
The Kookies openl}- boast of their feats of
Cannibalism, showing with the strongest ex-
pressions of satisfaction, the bones of their
fellow-creatures, who have fallen a prey to
their horrible appetites. These people,
strange as it may appear, live within one
hundred and fifty miles of Calcutta, the me-
tropolis and seat of government of British
India, secluded in the woods and jungles of
the savage portions of Bengal. The same
writer also states that the Goands or Ghonds,
who inhabit the hill forests of Nagpore, arc
Cannil)als, but that the latter partake of hu-
man ilesli only occasionally, as a religions
custom, while the former banquet with de-
light on the horrid repast.
The Ivlinljurgh Encyclopedia remarks, that
" It is uniformly attested by persons in op-
posite parts of the glolje, under various cli-
mates, in ditferent circiuustanccs, that an un-
comnion degree of ferocity is speedily gene-
rated by feeding on human flesh." And it is
by no means improbable that the origin of
I the practice is to be found in the thirst for
blood engendered by savage warfare. It is,
liowever, one of the terrible fruits of heathen-
ism, the rcmed}' for which is alone to be
found in the elevating and genial inihience
of Christianit V. — Edinbunrh Enci/rlopedia ;
London Misi. Mai-, for Nov.. \XV.l p. 102;
U. S. E.rplorimr E.rpedition, Vol. III. p. 'J7 ;
Spri/.^ Modern India.
CAPE H A YTIEX : A seaport town of the
Island of Ilayti, on its north coast, 90 m. N.
CAPE HAYTIEN— CAKNIVAL.
221
of Port-au-Prince. Population 12,000 to
16,000. A station of the Wesleyan Mission-
arj^ Society.
CAPE COAST TOWN : a station of the
Wesleyan Missionary Society on the Gold
Coast.
CAPE FLATS: A station of the Wesleyan
Missionary Society in Little Namaqualand,
South Africa.
CANON : In ecclesiastical affairs, a law
or rule of doctrine or discipline, enacted by
a council and confirmed by the sovereiji;n ; a
decision in matters of religion, or a regula-
tion of policy or discipline, by a general or
provincial council.
CAPUCHINS : Monks of the order of St.
Francis, who cover their heads with a stuff-
cap or cowl. They are clothed in brown or
gray, go barefoot, and never shave their faces.
CAPE COLONY: A colony in South
Africa, belonging to Great Britain. It takes
its name from the Cape of Good Hope, and
extends from thence to the Orange River in
the north, and to the Fugela river in the east.
A large proportion of the territory included
within their limits is either luioccupied, or,
excepting the missionary stations, entirely in
the hands of the natives. Apart from the
shores, the country consists of high lands,
forming parallel mountain ridges, with eleva-
ted plains or terraces of varying extent be-
tween. The climate is exceedingly fine and
salubrious.
The Cape was discovered by Diaz, the
Portuguese navigator, in 1486. The Dutch
colonists began to settle here in 1600. In
1620, two English commanders took posses-
sion of the Cape, in the name of Great Bri-
tain ; but no settlement was then made by
the English. In 1650, the Dutch government
sent out one hundred men and as many wo-
men from the houses of industry at Amster-
dam to people the Colony ; and, according
to some authorities, it was made a penal set-
tlement. In 1652. the Dutch East India
Company took possession, and appointed
John Van Riebeck Governor, with instruc-
tions to extend Christianity among the na-
tives. In 1795. the Cape was captured by
the British, and Lord Macartney was appoint-
ed Governor. At the peace of Amiens, in
1800, it was restored to the Dutch, but in
1806, it was again taken by the English, to
whom it was finally ceded in 1815. The
European inhabitants are of English, Dutch,
and German origin. In the Pearl district,
there are about 4.000 French Protestants,
whose ancestors emigrated from France about
1700, in consequence of the revocation of the
edict of Nantez. The Dutch occupy the in-
terior, and are mostly farmers. The Eng-
lish re-side chiefly in the Albany district.
The Orange River sovereignty, added to
the British territories in 1849, extends north
of the Orange River as far as the Ky Gariep
or Yaal River. Natal, or Victoria, a district
on the east coast, and separated from Cape
Colony by Kaffraria, is a recently formed
British settlement, containing an area of
18,000 square miles. It is highly favored in
those respects in which the Cape is most de-
ficient, having abundance of wood and water,
with coal and various metallic ores, a fine
alluvial soil, and a climate adapted to the
production of cotton, silk, p.nd indigo.
CAPE PALMAS : The seat of the Colony
of the Maryland Colonization Society, in Li-
beria, West Africa, and a station of the
American Episcopal Missionary Society. Its
situation is high and prominent, and is visit-
ed every hour Avith a cool refreshing breeze
from the sea. It projects into the sea about
one hundred rods, forming the turning point
from the windward to the leeward coasts. —
The bar and landing are said to be the best
in all Western Africa.
CAPE TOWN: Station of the London
Missionary Society in South Africa, being the
capital of the Cape Colony. The missionary
stationed here, preaches in the " Union
Chapel,''^ and is the General Agent and
Superintendent of the Society's Missions in
South Africa. This post was for many years
filled by the venerable Dr. Philip. It is now
occupied ])y R^v. William Thompson, former-
1)^ one of the Society's missionaries in India.
Mr. Thompson, on his return to England,
touched at Cape Town, while Rev. Mr. Free-
man, Secretary of the Society, was on a visit
there. i\Ir. T. preached at the Union Chapel,
and was invited to the pastorate ; and sub-
sequentl}^ receiving an appointment from the
Directors, as their agent, he thought it his
duty to accept, and entered upon his duties
in the summer of 1850.
CARAVAN : A company of travelers, pil-
grims, or merchants, marching or proceeding
in a body over the deserts of Arabia, or other
regions infested with robbers.
CARAVANSARY : A place appointed for
receiving and lodging caravans ; a kind of
inn, where the caravans rest at night, being
a large square building, with a spacious court
in the middle.
CARMELITES: An order of mendicant
friars, named from Mount Carmel. They
have four tribes, and thirtj^-eight provinces,
besides the congregation in Mantua, in which
are fifty-four monasteries, mider a vicar-
general, and the congregations of barefooted
Carmelites in Italy and Spain. They wear
a scapulary, or small woolen habit, of a brown
color, tlirown over the shoulders.
CARNIVAL: The feast or season of re-
joicing, before Lent, observed irt Catholic
countries, with great solemnity, by feasts,
balls, operas, concerts, &c.
CARTHUSIAN : An order of monks, so
called from Chartreuse^ the place of their in-
stitution. They are remarkable for their
222
CARMEL— CEYLON.
austerity. They cannot go out of their
cells, except to church, nor speak to any per-
son without leave.
CAKMEL : Station of the French Protest-
ants in South Africa, between Bethulia and
Beersheba, established in 1846, as an Insti-
tution for training native teachers. 2 mis-
sionaries, 40 communicants.
CASTE : See Brahminism.
CATTARAUGUS : A station of the Ameri-
can Board among the Cattaraugus Indians, in
the State of New York.
CATHOLIC : Universal or general. Ori-
ginally applied to the Christian Church in
general, but now improperly appropriated by
the Church of Rome.
CAUNPOORjOrCAWNPORE: Ato^-n.
in the province of Allahabad, India ; capital
of a district of the same n.ame, on the west
side of the Ganges, 45 miles south-west of
Lucknow. A station of the Gospel Propa-
gation Society.
CAVALLA : A station of the American
Episcopal Board in West Africa, 13 miles
from Cape Palmas.
CEDAR HILL : A station of the Mora-
vians in Antigua, West Indies, where is an
institution for the training of teachers.
CELESTIXS : A religious order so named
from Pope Celestin. They have 39 convents
in Italy, and 21 in France. Their habit is a
white gown, a capuchc, and a black scapu-
lary.
CENOBTTE : One of a religious order,
who lives in a convent or community ; in op-
position to an anchoret or hermit, who lives
alone.
CEYLON: The island of Ceylon lies
chiefly between the Ctli and 10th degrees of
north latitude, and the 80th and 82d ea.st lon-
gitude, and ha.s the bay of Bengal on the N.
uini I']., the Indian ocean on the S. and S. W.,
and is separated from II indoostan on the N.
W. by the gulf of Manaar. Its k'ngth is
about 300 miles N. to S., and its breadth varies
from 40 to 100 miles. In form it rcsumbles
the section of a pear cut lengthwise through
the middle. The coasts on the N. and N. W.
are low and flat, but on the S. and E. they arc
bold and rocky, alTording some of the best
harbors in the world. The interior of the
island consists of three distinct natural divi-
sions : the low country, the hills, and the
mountains. The mountains of the central and
noil hern regions rise from 1000 to 4000 feet
above the sea, and arc clothed to the summits
with magnificent forests. The rivers and
laki-s are numerous, but only a few of the
former are navigable, and of the latter only
those along the eastern coast can be used for
purjioses of traffic. Ceylcm is rich in mine-
rals, but they have not been made of much
coiiiineri'ial importance. Its soil is generally
a mixture of sand and clay, but in the cinna-
mon region, near Colombo, it consists of puio
quartz, and is perfectly white. Being situated
so near the equator, the days and nights arc
nearly of equal length throughout the year,
and the temperature during the day varies but
little. The seasons, however, are more regu-
lated by the monsoons than by the course of
the sun, and the hottest part of the year is
from January to April. The climate is salu-
brious, except in the low and less cultivated
regions ; the principal diseases being those of
the liver and intestines. Measles and whoop-
ing cough occur only in a mild form, and con-
sumption of the lungs is wholly unknown.
The small-pox, which was once so fatal, is al-
most entirely checked by vaccination.
The vegetable productions of the island arc
numerous and valuable, and consist of cinna-
mon, cocoa-nut, palm, bread-fruit, coffee, in-
digo, areca, betel-nut, tobacco, ebony, gam-
boge, gum-lac, &c. The most important of
these is the cinnamon, which grows only in
Ceylon and Cochin China. In its wild state
it grows from twenty to thirty feet high, and
the cinnamon forests present a very beautiful
appearance. This spice constitutes the great
wealth of Ceylon, and together with the other
productions named, has rendered the island of
vast importance to the commercial world.
The principal animals found here are the
elephant, bear, leopard, hyena, jackal, elk,
deer, gazelle, buffalo, horse, ox, wild hog,
monkey, racoon, porcupine, squirrel, &c. Pea-
cocks, pheasants, snipes, pigeons, and a great
variety of other birds, with almost every spe-
cies of domestic poultry, are found in great
abundance ; and serpents, alligators, and rep-
tiles of all sorts, are numerous.
Population. — The native popidation of Cey-
lon consists of four classes : flrst, the Ceylon-
ese orSingalese, occupying the Kandian terri-
tories and the coasts ; second, the Moors, who
are found in all parts of the island ; third, the
Yeddahs, who live in the mountains and unex-
plored regions ; and fourth, the Hindoos, who
occupy chiefly the N. and E. coasts. Besides
these there are also in the island some Portu-
guese, Dutch, and English colonists ; and an
intermixture of these with each other, and
with the native races, forms still another class.
The total population, according to the latest
estimates, is 1,308,838. The Siugalese believe
themselves to have been the original inhabit-
ants ; and they have a tradition that their
island was the ancient paradise, from which
Adam was expelled, after which a company of
Chinese adventurers accidentally landed upon
their coasts. No importance is attached to
this tradition, however. There is no very
authentic information respecting Ceylon pre-
vious to its discovery by the I'ortuguose, in
l.')Or). They subsequently became masters of
the island, and from them it wa.s conquered by
the Dutch, in 1C5C, just a century and a half
alter the arrival of the Portuguese, lu 17'JO,
CEYLON.
223
Colombo surrendered to the English, who took
possession of Kandy also in 1815.
Government. — The government of Ceylon is
vested in the hands of a British Governor, "who
is assisted by three classes of officers, and any
person of requisite qualifications may fill the
highest offices, whether he be a European or a
native, and without reference to his religion.
A knowledge of the English language, how-
ever, is indispensable. For the administration
of justice the island is divided into three dis-
tricts, and these are divided into smaller ones,
each with a court, judge and assessors, while a
Supreme Court, and the only court of appeal,
is established at Colombo. Trial by jury is
secured to all the people.
Language, Arts, Sfc. — The language of the
Siugalese resembles the Burman in its con-
struction, though the natives think the Arabic
is their original language. They appear to
have had scarcely any literature beyond some
pretended skill in astrology. Their agricul-
ture is in a very rude state, and in the arts
they have displayed little skill beyond the con-
struction of immense tanks, in which water
was collected during the rains, for the irriga-
tion of their rice lands. These are now mostly
in ruins.
Religion. — Brahminism and Budhism have
been, from time immemorial, the prevailing
systems of religion among the natives of Cey-
lon. Brahm is regarded by that sect as the
universal and self-existent intelligence, from
whom proceeded the Hindoo Triad, Brahma
the Creator, Yishnu the presener, and Siva
the Destroyer. Yishnu and Siva are the prin-
cipal objects of worship. Brahminism, now
generally denominated Hindooism, proclaims
an active resistance to every other form of re-
ligion, is despotic and persecuting in its spirit,
and derives much of its authority and power
from its mysterioixs antiquity, the profound
and inscrutable teachings of its sacred books,
and the boundless extent and dimensions of
the system is such as to give it a dim and appal
ling aspect in the minds of its votaries. Ciusic
is one of its immutable laws and is enforced
with great rigor.
Biaihism is of an opposite character, being
tolerant and liberal towards other systems, and
strangely indifferent to its own. Brahminism
is a science confided only to an initiated priest-
hood, and its Vedas and Shasters are kept with
jealousy from the eyes of the people. Budhism,
on the contrary, rejoices in its universality,
and opens its sacred pages to the perusal of
all. The priests of Brahm invest themselves
with mystery and oraclee of authority, while
those of Budh claim only to be teachers of
ethics — the clergy of reason. Caste, although
to some extent practiced by the Budhists is
discarded in their sacred books. It may be
said, therefore, that Budhism is more a school
of pkilosophy than a form of religion, — more
an appeal to reason, than an attempt to operate
upon the imagination and the conscience
through the medium of imposing rites. But
while the latter is free from the fanatical into-
lerance and revolting rites of the Brahminical
faith, and vastly superior to it in the purity of
its code of morals, it yet exerts no elevating or
trauslorming power, but has admitted of con-
stant deterioration and corruption. See Budh-
ism and Brahminism.
MISSIONS.
Portuguese Missions. — Immediately after
taking possession of Colombo, in 1505, the
Portuguese erected the adjoining districts into
a bishopric, and Christianity, in the form of
Romanism, was proclaimed ; but it was not
publicly taught till 1544, when St.. Francis
Xavier first preached to the Tamils of the
North. From this time the Portuguese pur-
sued their schemes of ecclesiastical supremacy,
till the whole peninsula of Jaffna was brought
under the authority of the church, a college of
Jesuits erected, convents established, and al-
most the entire population of this province led
to abjure their ancient faith and submit to
baptism. The means by which this surprising
change was eflTected were, authority, appeals to
the hope of gain, and the pomp and pageantry
so congenial to the Eoman Catholic religion.
Some attempts were made by the priests to ex-
tend the Eomish religion into the interior of
the island, but this was not until near the close
of the Portuguese rule, and their labors were
interrupted by the approach of a hostile power.
Dutch Missions. — The Dutch established
themselves at Colombo in 1656, and at Jafiiia
in 1658, and having driven the Portuguese
from every fortress on the coast, they succeed-
ed by right of conquest, to the whole of their
possessions in Ceylon. They immediately di-
rected their power against the Roman Catho-
lic clergy, summarily transporting large num-
bers of them to the continent of India, and
offering every indignity to the images in the
Catholic chapels. This hostility to the church
of Rome continued to inspire the policy of the
Dutch, and their resistance of its priesthood
was even more emphatic and determined than
their opposition to the Brahmins and the Bud-
hists. Their success among the natives was
outwardly great. Within five years after their •
arrival in the island, 12,387 children had been
baptized, 18,000 pupils were under instruction
in the schools, and 65,000 converts to Chris-
tianity were reckoned in the kingdom of Jaff-
napatam. At the close of the Dutch rule in
Ceylon, the number of professors of Christian-
ity was estimated as high as 420,000 ; but the
Dutch themselves regarded a large proportion
of these as merely nominal believers, and it is
a remarkable fact, that notwithstanding the
hundreds of thousands of conversions and bap-
tisms ascribed to the labors of the Dutch Pres-
byterians, their religion and discipline are now
almost unknown in the island of Ceylon. This
224
CEl-LON.
failure has been ascribod to the superficial
manner in which tlie Dutch ministers devel-
oped and inculcated the doctrines of Christi-
anity ; their inabilitj- to preach in the vernac-
ular tono^ues of the island, and their employ-
ment of inteqireters ; the very limited amount
of instruction given in the schools ; and espe-
cially the system of political bribery adopted
by the Dutch to encourage conversions ; and
the hasty and indiscriminate manner in which
all outward appearances were welcomed as
evidences of conversion to Christianity. Thus
the clergy of the church of Holland at the
close of their ministrations in Ceylon, left be-
hind a superstructure of Christianity prodi-
gious in its outward dimensions, but so inter-
nally unsound as to be distrusted even by those
who had erected it, and so unsubstantial that it
Las long since disappeared almost from the
memory of the natives of the island.
LoxDOX Missionary Societv. — In 1804, this
Society entered upon a mission in Ceylon, and
Kev. Messrs. Vos, Ehrhardt, Palm, and Read
were employed as missionaries for several years.
Their labors were confined chiefly to Jaffna,
Matura, Galle, and Colombo, and were attend-
ed with many good results. They made con-
siderable progress in the acquisition of the
native language and established some schools,
especially at Colombo. But the opposition
was formidable, and the government not always
favorable to their operations, and after several
years of self-denying effort, the mission was
abandoned.
I]NGiJsir Baptist Missionary Society. — The
English Baptists commenced a mission in Cey-
lon in 1812, in the person of Mr. Chater, whose
efforts to Christianize the .Cingalese, or Biid-
liists, and to systematize the study of their lan-
guage, have made his name momorabie. lie
died in 1829, and was succeeded by Mr. Dan-
iel, who labored in that field fifteen years,
preaching and establishing congregations and
schools in Colombo and the adjacent villages.
In the midst of his usefulness, the health of his
children failed, and on his passage to England
for their health, his wife died. Thus bereaved,
lie returned to Ceylon, and spent two years in
incessant wandering and labors in the mari-
time provinces and forests to the east of Co-
lombo, lie then resumed his educational
labors in Colombo, giving attention also to
preaching and the preas, and died in 1814,
leaving a name honored and endeared among
the Singalese. He was succeeded by Mr.
Dawson and Mr. Davis, the former of whom
died two fir tiiree years since, and Avas suc-
ceeded by Mr. Allen. Their labors extend to
131 villages of the Singalese, in which they
niainlain HI schools, witii an average attenti-
ance of 8:ki pui)ils. They have also 483 en-
rolled as church meinl)ers, the greater portion
of whom are an lumor to their proltwion. It
was the l«itimony of Sir J. Emerson Tennent,
in 1850, after having visital this section of the
island, that the Singalese who had received
their instruction at the hands of the mission-
aries, were filling places of honor and emolu-
ment in the public service, and engaged in
private professions, and that many who had
made no open profession of Christianity, re-
spected it and inspired a veneration for it in
the minds of the heathen around them.
TABCL.Ul view FOR 1854.
■3
«
a
.2
.2
B
STATIONS.
ii
T
a
.a
.a
6
rf
c
m
c
3
rr
«
g
1
'x
to
r3
J.
a
i
.£3
o
n
— "s
^
-^
<
<^
->
o
■J.
yj
7.
•/J
1812
1
33
1
131
11
9
420
57
31
1001
102
4
Kandy & Matate
153
-
34
142
11
4S3
31
1103
4
153
American Board. — The first missionaries
of the American Board to the East, were com-
missioned Feb. 7, 1812. Their names were
llev. Messrs. Adoniram Judson, Samuel Nott,
Samuel Newell, Gordon Uall and Luther
Rice. This company, with the wives of four
of them, soon embarked for Calcutta, without
definite instructions as to their fields of labor.
They reached the place of their destination in
safety, but were greatly embarrassed by gov-
ernment opposition and other causes, the par-
ticulars of which may be found in connection
with the Bombay mission. Of this missionary
band, Mr. Kewell was the only one who spent
any time at Ceylon, he having first visited the
Isle of France, where his wife sickened and
died. Tie commenced no mission at the island,
but remained there long enough to acquire in-
formation of groat importance to the Ameri-
can Board, and which had much to do in
determining its future action. In a letter,
dated Colombo, Dec. 20, 1813, .Air. Newell
offered among other reasons for establishing a
mission in Ceylon, the fact that the govern-
ment (English) was friendly to missions ; that
the population of the island was from one to
two millions ; that there were great facilities
for evangelizing the people, such J^s that there
were but two languages spoken in the island,
— that on learning these a missionary could
preach to three millions of people ; that the
natives could read and write ; that the whole
Bible had been translated into Tamil, the lan-
guage spoken in the north of the island, and
the New Testament into Singalese, which was
spoken in the interior and south ; that there
were 200,000 native Christians, so called, but
who were totally ignorant of Christianity ;
that at least 100 schools were in operation, and
that the mission would be perfectly secure un-
der the British government, lie also urged
the fact that there were but two missionaries
iu the whole island, Mr. Errhardt, a German
CEYLON.
225
from the London society, and Mr. Chater, from
the Baptist Society, and that neither of these
could speak to the people in their native
tongue ; and the further consideration that the
Tamil language was spoken liy seven or eight
millions on the continent, between which and
the island intercourse was almost as easy and
frequent as if they were contiguous.
These considerations, with others, led the
Board to decide upon Ceylon as a field of mis-
sionary labor ; and in 1815, five missionaries,
viz.: Kev. Messrs. Meigs, Richards, Warren,
Bardwell and Poor, embarked in the Dryad for
Columbo, at which place they arrived March
22, 1816. After spending six months at Co-
lombo, it was determined that Mr. Bardwell
should go to Bombay, and that Messrs. Rich-
ards and Meigs should establish themselves at
Batticotta, and INfessrs. Warren and Poor at
Tillipally, both of these stations being in the
province of Jafliia. In a joint letter, dated
Jafihapatam, Oct. 9, 1816, these brethren com-
municate information of importance, and which
may be referred to as showing the condition of
the island at the period of commencing the
mission of the American Board in that field.
Tillipally, they say, is situated about ten
miles north, and Batticotta about six miles
north-west of Jaffnapatam. At each of these
places they foimd a salubrious climate ; glebes
and buildings, the property of the English
government ; churches and mansion houses,
built of coral stone, by the Portuguese, and
capable of being repaired for use, the churches
being large enough for both public worship
and schools. In the province of Jaffna there
were some relics of the Roman Catholic re-
ligion, introduced by the Portuguese ; some
traces of religious knowledge, afterwards com-
municated by the Dutch ; and some decaying
fruits of the labors of later missionaries ; 'and
yet the great mass of the people were pagans.
In the northern portion of the island, however,
the missionaries found the people generally,
and even the Brahmins, less devotedly attached
to their idolatrous rites, feebler in their preju-
dices against Christianity, and more easily ac-
cessible, than in almost any other part of the
pagan world. They spoke also of an almost
total destitution of Bibles and school books.
Copies of the Tamil Bible, a translation by
the Dutch missionaries, were extremely scarce,
and an English Bible was rarely to be met
with, though many of the people could speak
and read English. The missionaries therefore
suggested to the Board the importance of at
once establishing a printing press at Jaffna,
with hands and means of putting it into vigor-
ous operation, as the only method of meeting
the demand for books.
In accordance with a previous arrangement,
Messrs. Warren and Poor took up their resi-
dence at Tillipally, in October after their arri-
val, and innnediately commenced preaching,
through an interpreter, both at that place and
15
at Mallagifm, two miles distant. Mr. Poor at
once entered upon the study of the Tamil lan-
guage, and in one year he wa,s able to preach
to the people in their native tongue. From
this time his hearers increased, and more
marked impressions were produced. Simultsu
neously with this effort a school was established
at Tillipally, for the instruction of children in
both Tamil and English, and soon another was
commenced at Mallagum, and others at Milette,
and at Oodooville. Messrs. Richards and Meigs
were prosecuting similar labors at Batticotta.
About the time that these brethren entered
upon their respective fields, an event of much
importance occurred, viz., the abolition of
slavery in the island. This measure, effected
chiefly by the instrumentality of Sir Alexan-
der Johnstone, liberated a large number of
slaves, and placed multitudes of children in a
most interesting relation to the missions.
After sixteen months of successful labor,
Messrs. Warren and Richards were taken off
from their work by severe illness, and finding
every expedient for their recovery unavailing,
they embarked, April, 1818, for the Cape of
Good Hope. Mr. Warren died at Cape Town
in the following August, and Mr. Richards
took passage for Madras. Mr. Poor was thus
left alone at Tillipally, and Mr. Meigs at Bat-
ticotta, subjected to a severe disappointment
and to augmented labors. Relief, however,
was not far distant.
In November, 1818, Rev. Messrs. Miron
Winslow, Levi Spaulding, and Henry Wood-
ward, were ordained as missionaries to Ceylon,
and to these was added John Scudder, M.D.,
a young physician of promise, and of devoted
pipty. On the 8th of June, 1819, these three
missionaries and the physician, with their
wives, embarked at Boston on board the Indus,
and in the following February they were all at
Tillipally, Dr. and Mrs. Scudder having buried
their only child at Calcutta.
A little more than three years had now
elapsed since the arrival of the first mission-
aries of the American Board in Ceylon, during
which time fifteen schools had been established,
nine in connection with Tillipally, and six with
Batticotta, and the whole number of pupils
was seven hundred. Besides these, there was
a boarding-school, composed of youths under
the special care of the missionaries, supported
by contributions in America, and bearing the
names suggested by the donors. Special
tokens of the Divine presence began, at this
period, to be enjoyed by the mission.
The Board had already forwarded a print-
ing-press to Ceylon, and in August, 1820, Mr.
James Garrett was sent out to superintend its
operations. Unfortunately, Governor Brown-
rig, a zealous friend of the mission, was absent,
and the Lieutenant-Governor, Sir Edward
Barnes, gave notice through his secretary, that
the government would not allow any increase
of American missionaries in Ceylon, and that
226
CEYLON.
Mr. GaiTcU could not be permitted to rcmaiu
on tilt! ijjlaud. MciiKiriiild to the Lieuteuant-
Governor were unavailing, and Mr. Garrett
embarked fur Bombay.
Soon alter the arrival of the reinforcement,
Messrs. AV^iiislow and Spaulding commenced
their labors at Uodouville. Dr. Scudder took
up his residence at I'anditeripo, and Mr.
Woodward joined Mr. I'oor at Tillipally. In
1821, five years from the commencement of'
the mission, live stations were occupied, and
the missionaries, besides the labor of preach-
ing and visiting, were superintending 2-4
schools, containing 1,150 children, and educat-
ing eighty-seven heathen children in their own
families. Nine young men had given evidence
of ti^e conversion, and had been gathered
into the church, and three of them had been
licensed to preach the Gospel.
Mrs. Poor, the wife of Rev. Daniel Poor,
died on the 7th of Alay, 1821, after a short
illness, and Rev. Mr. Richards, who had long
since been compelled to relinquish his labors,
died in August of the same year, at Tillipally.
In 1822, the missionaries drew up a pros-
pectus of a college or high school for Tamil
and other youth, setting forth with great par-
ticularity its plan and course of study, its ob-
jects, and its contemplated benefits. Some of
the more prominent of these were, the inculca-
tion of true science in connection with Chris-
tianity, a higher standard of education among
the people, the raising up of native preachers,
translators, teachers, <fcc., and the influence of
such an institution on the primary schools.
This subject was laid before the Board in an
elaborate and urgent form, and the proposed
college, or higher seminary, was subsequently
established.
The scenes and events of 1824 were of very
marked and peculiar interest to this mission.
In January of that year, indications of unusual
seriousness were observed at Tillipally, and in
a little time, proofs of the presence of the
Holy Spirit appeared at all the other stations.
A revival of religion, of undoubted genuine-
ness and great power, had commenced, and,
within a few months, changes of a most sur-
prising and afiecting character were witnessed.
At Panditeripo, Dr. Scudder's station, the re-
ligious interest increased till, on the 12th of
February, the convictions of sin and of the
need of salvation, became as deep and earnest
as ever marked a revival in a Christian land.
The boys of the school were so deeply im-
pressed, that, on retiring to their rooms in the
evening, they could not sleep. Between 30
and 40 of them went out into the garden,
where they were heard in supplication, weep-
ing and a.sking, '• What shall I do to be
saved ? " and " Lord, send thy Spirit." Of
this company more than 20 soon gave evidence
of a saving change. Similar scenes were wit-
nessed in all the boarding-schools, and, as a
result, fifty-six native converts were admitted
to the church. Most of them continued to
give evidence of true conversion.
The contemplated high school at Batticotta
having been established, a class of the best
scholars was received into it from the school
at Tillipally, making room for others at the
latter place, and more than one hundred ai>
plied for admission at a single examination —
a great change from the time when the mis-
sionaries could not persuade nor hire a single
child to live on their premises. During the
year 1826 several seasons of special religious
interest were enjoyed by the mission, attended
with the same results, though not as extensive,
as during the first revival.
These Avonderful changes were wrought by
no such means as were employed by the Por-
tuguese and Dutch missions. A totally difier-
ent policy had been pursued. The mission-
aries simply preached, prayed, conversed, and
distributed Bibles and tracte among the adults,
and established schools among the children,
till more than 2000 had been taught the rudi-
ments of learning and the simple truths of
Christianity. This, without external pomp or
force, or the enticing words of man's wisdom,
became the wisdom and the power of God
among a people who, just before, were involved
in the ignorance, degradation and idolatry of
paganism. It was a demonstration of the
fact, — too little understood by many at that
day, — that the regeneration of the heathen
was to be effected, not by might nor by power,
but by the Spirit of the Lord.
In reviewing their work in August, 1827,
after eleven years of toil, the missionaries were
enabled to speak of large accessions to the
church ; the abandonment of idolatry by many
of the natives who had not embraced Chris-
tianity ; a general spirit of inquiry among the
people ; a press in operation, and a better
supply of the Scriptures, which were read with
avidity ; more than 80 schools in successful
operation ; and about 30 native assistants in
various departments of the work. One year
later, August, 1828, the missionaries say, " The
attachment of the people to their gods is de-
creasing, and there is a great stir among the
Roman Catholics, in consequence of a tract
recently addressed to their priests, who had
connnanded the people to burn our books."
In April, 1829, they allude with special inter-
est to the qualifioation of a number of pious
youths to make known the Gospel, an increas-
ing spirit of inquiry among the natives, and
the distrust they were beginning to feel in
their systems of geography, astronomy and
philosophy, long held by them to be divine.
Particularly had the confidence of learned
natives in their systems been shaken, by a seri-
ous error in their calculations of an eclipse,
which was pointed out to them by the mission-
aries, and i)roved by the event. The circum-
stance did nmch to destroy the authority ot
! their sacred books. In October, 1830, the
CEYLON.
227
mission was favored with another season of
awakening, during which many were con-
verted, and the church and the missionaries
were quickened and encouraged.
In March, 1831, a disastrous fire occurred,
in which the house, church, study, and large
school bungalow at Manepy were destroyed,
together with the furniture, library, clothing,
&c., of Mr. and Mrs. Woodward. In this ca-
lamity many of the natives rejoiced, believing
it to be an evidence that the anger of the gods
rested upon the missionary. On the 21st of
the same mouth 34 persons were received to
the church at Oodooville. On the 24th of
July of this year, Mr. and Mrs. Meigs were
called to bury an amiable and beloved daughter,
Harriet, aged 11 years. vShe had dedicated
herself to the Saviour ten months before, and
had given decided evidence of piety. At the
close of this year it was said, in regard to the
female boarding school at Oodooville, that
none had been long members of it without be-
coming hopeful subjects of converting grace,
and that none had dishonored their profession.
All who had left the school were married to
Christian husbands, and were training up fa-
milies in a Christian manner. During this
year, also, twenty-eight from the seminary at
Batticotta, were added to the church.
On the 15th of January, 1832, thirteen na-
tives from Tillipally and Oodooville, were add-
ed to the church, and on the 4th of March,
ten more were received. At this period the
missionaries commenced the plan of sending
out the most intelligent and pious young men
of the seminary, to visit the people regularly
from house to house, carrying tracts, and a cir-
cular letter from the missionaries to the peo-
ple. The result was highly favorable. At
the close of this year a theological class was
formed in the seminary at Batticotta, consist-
ing of about thirty students, who had comjile-
ted their course in the seminary. This was
vicM'ed by the missionaries as a most important
step ; for they considered, that while European
and American missionaries must be pioneers
in tins work, it could not be carried on and
completed without the aid of a native ministry.
In January, 1833, the mission was afiflicted
by the sudden death of Mrs. Winslow. She
departed in great joy and triumph, and her
memoir, as well as that of Mrs. Newell, will
live to quicken the zeal of the church and sti-
mulate the hopes and labors of other mission-
aries, till the heathen are all converted to
God. On the 24th of this month, at the quar-
terly church meeting at Oodooville, twelve
new members were admitted, one of them a
daughter of Mr. Sjiaulding. In July of this
year, a reinforcement, consisting of Rev. Slessrs
Todd, Hutchins, Hoisington, and Apthorp,
and Dr. Nathan Ward, embarked at Boston,
taking with them a printing press. In June,
Mr. Winslow baptized the interpreter of the
court of Mallagum, a man of sterling charac-
ter and of high respectability among the na-
tives. He had embraced Christianity amid
much opposition. During this month several
buildings belonging to the mission at Tillipally
were destroyed by fire, and in the following
August the church was set on fire, and nearly
all the Tamil books and tracts were destroyed.
On the 28th of October the missionaries who
embarked at Boston in July, arrived in Ceylon.
Dr. Ward being now on the ground. Dr.
Scudder commenced a new station at Chava-
gachery, a parish containing a numerous popu-
lation. Mr. Winslow, after the death of his
wife, embarked for America, taking with him
his three cliildren, and seven belonging to
other families in the mission.
Near the close of the year 1834, the mission
experienced another signal visitation of mercy.
Two of the most pleasing features attending
this work, say the missionaries, were its quick-
ness and depth. Conversion almost immedi-
ately followed conviction, and the depth of
feeling was manifested by uninterrupted prayer
and praise, in their general meetings, social
circles, and private rooms. This revival was
carried on in connection with protracted meet-
ings, at nearly all the stations. At the quar-
terly communion of the seven local churches
of the mission, in March, 1835, forty-seven na-
tives, male and female, were publicly received
into the church, and a daughter of Mr. Meigs
was received at the same time. In the latter
part of the year 1835, the seminary at Batticotta
was again visited with the influences of the Holy
Spirit; and in September, 1836, the female sem-
inary at Oodooville received a like visitation-
In May, 1837, there was another revival in
the seminary at Batticotta. During this year
there were 49 admissions to the church, and
24 excommunications, many of them for marry-
ing heathen wives. The mission this year ex-
perienced a most painful reverse, in being
obliged, through a deficiency of the funds of
the Board, to dismiss 45 students from the
seminary at Batticotta, and 8 from the female
seminary at Oodooville. They were compelled
also, from the same cause, to relinquish nearly
all the village schools, to curtail their printing
operations, and to reduce their own expenses
below the demands of health and comfort.
By the dispersion of the schools, the Sabbath
congregations were nearly broken up, and in
every direction efficient missionary labor was
made nearly impossible. " We could have
wished," say the missionaries, " that Christians
in America could have turned aside for a day,
from buying, and selling, and getting gain, to
see these 45 boys, as they left the seminary to
go back to their heathen homes." It was to the
mission, a sudden, unforeseen blow, coming, as
they said, like a thunderbolt, and breaking up
plans and operations whose success, under God,
depended very much upon their permanency.
In the aggregate, not less than 171 schools
were disbanded, and the number of pupils dis-
228
CEYLON.
missed exceeded 5000. One of the older mis-
sionaries, ill dismissing the schools from his sta-
tion, says, in fit and most affecting language,
" I told' them the reason, exhorted them to read
the Bible, and not to enter into temptation, to
keep the Sabbath holy, — prayed -with them,
commending them to the Friend of little chil-
dren, and then sent them away— from me,
from the Bible class, from the Sabbath-school,
from the house of prayer, — to feed on the
mountains of heathenism, with the idols under
the green trees ; a prey to the roaring lion, to
evil demons, and to a people more ignorant
than ihey, even to their blind, deluded and de-
luding guides, — and when I looked after them
as they went out, my heart failed me. 0 what
an offering to Swamy !— :/!re thousand children .'"
These events, on becoming known, moved the
deepest sympathies of the Board and of the
churches, and with the least possible delay the
Prudential Committee removed the restrictions
which they had imposed, not willingly, but be-
cause they could not disburse what was not in
their treasury. The receipts of the Board had
been cut short by the extreme pecuniary pressure
which, at that time, prevailed in this country.
This information from the Committee, reliev-
ing the mission of its embarrassments, was re-
ceived in November 1838, upon which joyful
occasion a day of special thanksgiving was
kept. Though the injury could not be repaired
at once, schools enough were soon resumed to
give a degree of efficiency to the system. At
this date four presses were in operation, giving
employment to 70 natives, and issuing a much
larger amount of missionary and other publi-
cations, than any other establishment of the
kind in Southern India.
Tliirty-seven native converts were received
to the church in 1839. The number in the
female seminary at Oodoovilie at this date was
95 — within five of the number in 1837, before
the calamity above referred to. A view of the
domestic habits of the pupils of this school is
thus given : " "When they take their food they
sit in rows, facing each other, each with a brass
plate or dish to receive her portion of rice and
curry, or congee. When all are served, one
implores a blessing on the food, after which
they begin to cat. They eat with the hand, if
it be rice, or with a leaf instead of a spoon if
it be congee. Their dress is of white cotton
cloth, consisting of a short loose jacket, and a
cloth varying in length from two to five yards,
according to their size, wrapped about them
and flowing dosvn to their feet. Both in food
and dress it is thought best for them to follow
tlie usages of native society. The girls of the
school, of whatever caste or family, all eat
together without complaint."
In the year 1840 there were 9,520,000 pages
of Scripturt', and 1,788,000 pages of tracts
printed, making a total of more than eleven
millions of pages. A very full and elaborate
report was made by the mission this year, on
the importance of giving instruction through
the English language. They represent the
native language as so much a part and parcel of
heathenism, so deficient in scientific and theo-
logical terms, and so unwieldy, that it cannot
be made the vehicle of correct ideas, and espe-
cially not of doctrinal truths and the senti-
ments of a pure Christian morality.
Two important regulations were adopted in
1841. The first was> that the pupils then be-
longing to the seminary at Batticotta should
be required in future to furnish their own
clothing ; and the second was, that every
youth, on entering the seminary, should be re-
quired to give security for the payment of his
board during the whole seminary course.
These measures were well received by the com-
munity, and a new class was admitted on this
plan. In 1842 a small paper was published in
Tamil, with about 700 subscribers, its columns
being open to communications from native
Christians, and from heathens. In a report to
the Board this year, mention is made of the
temporal advantages which the natives derived
from Christianity : '• When I arrived iu Jaffna
twenty-six years ago," says Mr. Meigs, " there
were but five bullock carts in the whole dis-
trict ; now there are more than 500. The
temporal condition of the people has also
greatly improved during that period, iu many
other ways. They have more learning, more
wealth, more enterprise, and fewer taxes."
From the very outset, the missionaries had
taken special care not to admit any to baptism
and to the church who did not give evidence
of having been regenerated by the Spirit of
God, and who were not thus prepared for the
trials they must meet with on leaving the
seminaries. Never were instructions more
faithful and searching, and yet heathenism
could not be at once and entirely eradica-
ted from the hearts of the natives, and pain-
ful defections were often witnessed. The
most disheartening instance of the kind that
ever occurred in connection with this mission
was in the spring of 1843, when it was discov-
ered that a system of deception, lying, and
other gross forms of corruption, had crept into
the Batticotta seminary. A thorough investi-
gation was made, and 61 scholars, including the
whole of the select class, were immediately ex-
pelled from the school. Several of the native
teachers were at the same time dismissed, and
those that remained were divested of nmch 'f
their responsibility, the missionaries themselvijs
assuming their duties. Trying as such a pi3-
cess was, there was no alternative, and the result
showed its wisdom. It illustrated to the peo-
ple of the whole district the high requisitions
of the' Bible, the purity and sacrcdness of the
church, and the utter repugnance of Christian-
ity to the vices of heathenism. It inspired
confidence in the missionaries also, as being
unselfish, and concerned for nothing but the
morals and welfare of the youth under their
CEYLON.
229
care. Accordingly but a few weeks had elaps-
ed before heathen parents were beseeching
the missionaries to take their sons back into
the school, promising to watch over them, pay
for their books, &c. One year later the semi-
nary at Batticotta was found in a more flour-
ishing condition than ever before, the qualifi-
cations for admission having been raised, and
the pupils paying more largely and freely for
tuition, board, and books.
In 1845 heathenism began to develop itself
in new forms of opposition. So far had the
mission progressed, so high were the demands
of Christianity, and so steady and resistless
was its pressure upon the surrounding idolatry,
that the missionaries were led to remark,
" We are now made to feel that we have come
into closer contact than ever with the benight-
ed and benumbed mind and iron-hearted soul
of Hiudooism ; and that nothing but the sword
of the Spirit, wielded by God himself, can
cause one of the enemy to fall before us."
In November, 1846, Mr. Spaulding, who
had been spending a little season in his native
country, sailed from Boston, with his wife, to
rejoin the mission at Ceylon. He was accom-
panied by Bev. William Scudder, a son of
Dr. Scudder, and by Eev. E. P. Hastings.
At no period was the importance of schools
and a high standard of education in connection
with the mission, more manifest, than in 1847,
when it was remarked by the missionaries that
the Brahmins, the highest caste, who had uni-
formly refused the education proffered them,
were sinking in influence, Avhile the lower, but
better educated classes, were rising above them
and filling the places of office and trust under
the government. Brahmin ical influence had
ever been one of the strongest holds of heathen-
ism in the northern portion of Ceylon, and it
was thus coming into disgrace and losing its
power. It was in this year that Sir J. Emer-
son Teunent, the British Colonial Secretary in
Ceylon, published his testimony respecting the
mission. In a letter to one of the secretaries
of the Board, he says : " Having at length vis-
ited in person all your stations, however un-
usual a spontaneous communication of this
kind may be, I cannot resist the impulse to
convey to you my strong sense of the sustained
exertions of your missionaries, and of their un-
exampled success in this colony. Much as I
had heard of their usefulness and its results, I
was not prepared to witness such evidences of
it as I have seen ; not in their school rooms
only, or in the attainments and conduct of
their pupils, but in the aspect of the whole
community, amongst whom they have been
toiling, and the obvious effect which their care
and instructions have been producing on the
industrial, social, and moral character of the
sm-rounding population. The whole appear-
ance of this district bespeaks the efficacy of
your system. Its domestic character is chang-
ing, and its social aspect presents a contrast
to any other portion of Ceylon, as distinct and
remarkable as it is delightful and encouraging.
Ci^alization and secular knowledge are rapidly
opening the eyes of the heathen community to
a conviction of the superiority of the external
characteristics of Christianity, and thereby
creating a wish to know something of the in-
ward principles which lead to an outward de-
velopment so attractive."
In 1849, the Governor of Ceylon visited the
mission stations, and on his return to Colombo
he published a notice of his observations, in
which he said, " His excellency cannot omit
to dwell with peculiar satisfaction on the pleas-
ure afforded him by his personal inspection of
the great educational establishments, which
are the distingiiishing characteristics of the
northern province. To those noble volunteers
in the cause of Christianity and education, the
gentlemen of the American mission, who by
their generous self-devotion in a foreign and
distant laud, have produced so marked an im-
provement in the scene of their labors, his
excellency feels that he should pay a special
tribute of grateful acknowledgement. He is
glad to hail, in this dedication of American
enterprise and American charity to the work
of civilizing and enlightening a distant depen-
dency of the British crown, one more tie of
kindred with the great nation that sends them
forth — one more pledge that between the Old
and the Xew England, there can henceforth be
only a generous rivalry in the cause of knowl-
edge and truth."
In 1849, a new version of the whole Bible
into Tamil was completed, with great labor and
care, by committees, both in Jaffna and Mar
dras, and beautifully printed in one royal oc-
tavo volume. Of this translation Mr. Meigs
says, " I find it very exactly conformed to the
Hebrew, as well as to our English version,
while it is also pure and idiomatic Tamil. It
will, I have no doubt, prove a great blessing
to the whole Tamil people, and many thousands
will bless God for the labors of those who
have prepared it."
A summary of the mission of the American
Board in Ceylon, from its commencement
to the close of 1852, a period of thirty-six
years, presents very important and gratifying
results.
Missionaries and Helpers. — The whole num-
ber of persons who have been connected with
the mission, is 60 ; 28 males and 32 females.
Of these 18 have died, and an equal number
have been obliged, for various reasons, to re-
linquish the missionary work. Eleven left
after a service of from 9 to 17 years ; 10 have
been in the field from 16 to 36 years. Of 85
children born to these miosionary families in
Ceylon, only 12 have died in the island, and
but three or four after leaving for America.
Churches. — The following table presents the
statistics of the churches, for the year 1852 and
1853;
230
CEYLON.
TABXXAR vrE\y.
5
In ruptlAr
1
•
p
s
s
Btaotling.
STATION'S.
B.
—
a
A
a 9
£■
a
1
EC
g
•ga-
1
•s
i
c
"3
P.
3
<
-
/2
=
S
b,
^
6
a-
£ «. rf.
TillipaUv
1
5
6
2
32
20
52
9
5 9 9
Biitticoltft
9
5
2
5
78
2b
103
5
45 7 5
0<)(\'>oviUe
13
1
1
b
32
65
97
10
10 4 10
ft
1
2
3
1
45
24
6(1
■Jii
35 2 5
Pun<Utcripo
4
2
19
14
33
3
11 0 9
Chav;igacbetTy..
•2
1
2
1
11
8
19
2
3 16 3
3
2
2
5
2
3
4
8
3
14 0
Ocxlocpitty
14 6
ToUl
28
21
12
21
2
224
161
386
57
112 19 11
Mcrabcrs reported, 1852 385
Received by i)rofossion in 1853 23
•' on certificate " 10
418
Dismissed on certificate 10
Deaths 5
Excommunicated 1
Error in statistics of 1852 7 23
lYesent number 395
The wliolo number received to the churches
from the commencement, is about 800 ; and
not fiir from 120 have been excommunicated.
Over 300 of the dnirch members ^vere educa-
ted in the Balticottu seminary, and about 150
at the female Ijoardiufr-scliool at Oodooville.
Scho(^s. — The stutistius of the two cla.sses of
schools, the vernacular and the English, for
1853, arc as follows :
TAIJUI-AU VIK^V
Vtmacular Schools.
Enplish
e
Sdiools.
s
4.
I'upiU.
STATIONS.
«
I
.-^
B
z
I
i
1
3
it C
it
1
5
a.
V.
3n
u
X
£
^
(i^
5^
■y.
t
c
TillipaJlv....
9
9
1
578
208
786
225
53
1
1
43
ItoHic'.tta...
16
19
1
.'>8()
251
831
367
100
1
2
64
0.4..uviUe...
10
6
4
229
207
436
131
6S
2
2
08
^••il.i.I.V
11
8
4
116
303
419
114
40
1
28
1 ■ripo..
9
9
391
102
493
210
23
1
22
1 -Hch'y.
10
10
326
9«
422
149
23
1
27
Va,. .:.-,....:.
4
4
88
21
IW
20
4
1
15
Oo«l.«jjiiU.v ..
R
7
1
301
116
407
130
30
1
22
ToUl....
77
72
11
2609
1304
3963
1362
341
0
11
279
In viiw of the vn-st number of children and
youth who, from year to year have been tanjrht
in thi-se pr-hools, and the J.OOO now in a course
of iraininp, the mi.-*.«ioiiaries are led to the
chc<rii)fr observation, that the old ^rcneration,
whose minds were sterpod in healln nism, and
to whom it WU.S diflicult to communicate a
I Christian idea, are fast disappearing from the
stage, and giving place to a generation who
understand .Scripture language, and have some
knowledge of Scripture doctrine.
^'ative Helpers. — The following table gives
a classified view of the native helpers :
Native I'reacliers
Cateclii-its
Scliool Superintendents
Secular Aitents
tliristi-an Teachers
I'riiif ing-officc workmen
Writers
Tcital Native Assi.stauts
Nominal Cliristian Teachers. .
Heathen Teachers
Nominal Christian and Ilea- )
then Teacher.'?, total.. . j
.^
o
ii
^'
3
u
i^
E
'E.
S
^
a
a
■^
~
a
-3
5
a
-
1
^
-
1
-
-
-
4
3
3
4
3
3 1
1
1
1; 1
il 1
'l
14
19
6
8 11
3 4: 1
15
2
1
1
1
7
1 1
3
3
3
0 5
4
2
28
4
3
65
15
4
121
8
24
Of the catechists four are physicians, two of
whom spend most of their lime in catecheti-
cal work.
Printing. — Tliis department has been con-
ducted with great efficiency, printing some
years 7 or 8,000,000 of pages of Scripture
and of tracts. The whole number of pages
printed since the mission press went into ope-
ration, in 1834, is estimated at 100,000,000;
" The Morning Star," a semi-monthly paper, is
still continued.
Medical Dejmrtmcnt. — The dispensary, under
the care of Dr. Greene, besides its physical
benefits, has served as an important aid in
preaching the Gospel. The number of pa-
tients treated during the year 1852, was 1,881.
Medical classes are constantly under instruc-
tion. Dr. tJreene has been recently preparing
a Tamil nomenclature for anatomy, i)hysi-
ology, and hygiene, and hopes soon to publish
some eleinentary works on these stibjocts, in
the native language. Besides their mt'dical
benefits, such works would help to undermine
the gross superstition with which the practice
of native physicians is connected, and prepare
the way for the reception of Christianity.
Female cduaition. — In no (h-partment has
progrt^s been more marked in Jaffna than in
that of female education, especially among the
higher clas,<es. 'J'he number who have bccL'
e<lucatcd in the female boarding school al
Oodooville, from the first, is 288. Of these
204 have left the school, 130 of them lK>ing
members of the church at the time of leaving,
and 13 having joined since leaving. Of the
whole ninnber who have* left the school, 120
have been married to Christians, and only IG
to heathens.
Tcmycrunce. — Vigorous cffort.s have been
made l)y the mii^iionaries to arrest the pro-
gress of intemperance, which prevails ex-
CEYLON.
231
teiisively in Ceylon. Temperance societies
have been foi-mecl, lectures delivered, and
pledges of total abstinence signed by a large
number of the people. It is easy to gather
from 500 to 1000 people to hear addresses on
this subject. On one of these occasions, jn
1852, 200 signed the pledge. These meetings
are conducted in a strictly religious manner,
being opened and closed with prayer ; and in
connection with the addresses, much instruo
tion is given in regard to other prevailing
vices. The people learn, by this very means,
that the missionaries are their best friends, and
are thus led in great numbers to hear the Gos-
pel preached. It should be added that the
temperance movement originated chiefly with
the young men educated at the Batticotta se-
minary, and is carried on by them, with the
cooperation of the missionaries.
Native Contributions. — For several years
there has been a " Native Evangelical So-
ciety " in Jafiha, designed to call into acti-
vity the Christian benevolence of the native
converts. Some of them manifest a very
strong desire to spread the knowledge of
Christ, This society, besides contributing
frequently to the funds of the American
Board, supports a catechist at Yarany, and
has also the entire care of the Island of Delft,
sustaining there a Christian family and a large
school. This island is within the field of the
Ceylon missicm, and contains an ignorant and
degraded population of about three thou-
sand.
Present state of Heathenism and prospects of
the 3Iission. — After thirty-six years of unweor
ried Christian effort in this field, the mission-
aries and the Christian world are permitted to
contemplate a degree of progress as surprising
as it is gratifying ; and to the question :
" Watchman, what of the night ? " is confi-
dently answered, " The morning cometh."
" It may be true," say the missionaries, " that
some forms of wickedness increase ; that ido-
latry even may assume a bolder and more
offensive front ; but this is only the natural
effect of the increase of light. There is no
doubt that heathenism is disturbed. While
the mass of the people are losing their confi-
dence in the rites and ceremonies of their an-
cestors, there are many who are roused by this
very fact, to greater efibrts to sustain them ;
but they only thereby publish their own shame,
and hasten the destruction of their cause.
That the people are extensively hypocritical in
their idol worship, is abundantly evident. This
is remarkably true throughout our field, and is a
fact full of encouragement. We need not, as
in former years, spend our time in attacking
idolatry, but can directly preach Christ, and
liim crucified."
Church Missioxary Society.— The Chin-ch
Missionary Society commenced its labors in
Ceylon, in 1818, establishing missions simul-
taneously among the Hindoos of the northern
province, and among the Budhists of Colombo
and Point De Galle, and of the Kandian hills
in the central portion of the island. Two
energetic men, Mr. Mayor and Mr. Lambrick,
stationed themselves at once in Kandy, about
90 miles N. E. from Colombo. It is sur-
rounded by woody hills and mountains, and
was anciently the capital of an independent
kingdom of the same name. The town itself
has only about 3,000 people, but in the neigh-
boring highlands, to which the labors of these
missionaries extended, there is a population of
200,000.
In no part of Ceylon has progress been so
difficult and slow as among the Kandians. It
was four years after the arrival of the mission-
aries before there was encouragement to build
a school-house, even in the capital of the pro-
vince ; and after the lapse of ten years the
number of pupils was small. The number of
conversions was still more limited. These
discouragements arose in part from the so-
cluded and solitary condition of the province,
for the boundaries of the Kandian territory
w^ere defended by dense forests, and every
opening M'as guarded by a species of palm,
covered with knobs, from the points of which
protruded spikes as sharp as the beak of a
hawk. Besides the natural fortifications,
watches were stationed at every pass from the
low country, beside gates of thorns, which
were only opened for the passage of the king's
people. Within these gloomy confines, Euro-
peans seldom entered ; and when the mission
was commenced, in 1818, the British govern-
ment discouraged the attempt, as it could not
assm-e them of any adequate protection in such
a region. The priesthood of Budhism thus
secluded, exerted undisputed sway, and the
Kandians preserved a rigid conformity to all
its teachings. On the arrival of the missiog,r
aries they could conceive of no possible advan-
tages to be derived from having their children
educated, and it was impossible to assemble a
class. After a perseverance of five years, how-
ever, five schools had been established, num-
bering 127 pupils, and so indefatigable were
the labors of these men, that in 1839 the
number of schools had increased to thirteen,
and the number of scholars to 400.
To attempt the education of females seemed
for a long time utterly hopeless ; for even the
little instruction that was given to the boys
in the temples of the Budhist priests, was with-
held from the girls, who were regarded as
unfit for tuition of any kind. It was there-
fore ten years before a school for the instruc-
tion of girls could be opened in Kandy. The
Church missionaries, with an intimate knowl-
edge of the native language, have sought to
explain the doctrines of Christianity to the
Kandians, in their secluded villages, and they
have secured, to a great degree, the confidence
of the native peasantry ; but owing to the as-
cendancy of the priesthood, very few have
232
CEYLON.
avowed their belief in the truth of Chris-
tianity. During the last ten or twelve years,
Europeans have settled among the Kandian
hills, causing some irritation to the peasants,
but aflTording protection to the mission, which
is still continued. It is stated, however, in a
recent Report of the Church Missionary Soci-
ety, that the labors of the missionaries are
conflned in a great measure to sojourners from
the maratime provinces, who reside at Kaudy
and other places in the interior, and who are
nominal Christians, and that the native Kan-
dians have received comparatively little atten-
tion. There are now at the Kandy station
five schools : one English, three Singalese, and
one for girls. The number of boys is 117,
girls 10. There are five regular congregar
tions, with an average attendance of one
hundred.
'J'he mission station of the Church of Eng-
land, at Baddagame, in the low country, ten
miles north of Point De Galle, although com-
menced as early as that at Kandy, has been
even less successful, though not without some
important results. Schools have been estab-
lished, printed books have been circulated and
read, and many have been made acquainted
with the principles of Christianity. Still
there have been but few conversions, and after
the labor of nearly forty years, the missionaries
have very little to cheer them. In the annual
report for 1852, Rev. Mr. ^arsons, one of the
missionaries, says : " At this place the church
is built (it was dedicated by Bishop Heber,)
and here are the mission residences, seminary,
and girls' school ; but here, alas, is the great-
est indifference to the good news of salvation.
It seems as if the people were hardened to the
sound of the church bell and the missionary's
voice, and accustomed to treat both with silent
contempt. Last year I established an early
service for the heathen, who objected to come
to the ordinary service. Like everything else
at Baddagame, it succeeded for a time, but
within three months fell to nothing."
By far the most important of the stations of
the Church of England mission in Ceylon, is
that at Cotta, a populous district within a few
miles of Colombo. The situation of Cotta is
peculiarly beautiful, being on the verge of vast
gardens of cinnamon, and surrounded by na-
tural forests, and interspersed with plantations
of spices and groves of cocoa nut. and palm.
Here the mission commenced its labors in
1823, by the opening of schools and the preach-
ing of the Gospel to the natives throughout
their hamlets. In connection with this mis-
sion, a collegiate institution was founded in
1827, for the training of native teachers and
assistants destined for the ministry. It com-
menced with ten pupils, and has continued to
the present time with remarkable success. To
this institution have^ resorted the Tamils of
Jaffna, the Kandians from the hills, and the
Singalese from the low country. In this
" oriental college " there are at present 22
students, extending their studies to Greek and
Latin, Euclid, Scripture history, <S:c. There
are also at Cotta 28 vernacular schools for
boys and 38 for girls, containing in all 750
children, besides English schools for boys and
girls. There are at present two missionaries
at Cotta, Rev. Messrs. Gordon and Wood, and
the number of services held on the Sabbath is
15. The average attendance is about 1000,
more than half of them being adults. A
printing-press has been for some years in ope-
ration at this station, and from this was issued
a translation of the scriptures, known as the
" Cotta version."
TABULAR
VIEW FOR If-
53.
1
0
S
i
'c
1
-r.
STATIONS.
S
a
6
'1
o
1
,
"^
C/^
.-
.^
.'- *7
§
X
■^
-a
1
i
>5
'/.
1^
UJ
a
5
>
^
Cotta,
1852
5
11
45
19
121
41
831
448
20
1,299
Kandy,
1818
1
3
n
2
35
10
1(;g
C4
22
252
Baddagame, ....
1819
1
4
17
2
47
20
534
58
21
613
Nellore
1818
2
18
1
49
14
COS
119
6.127
Chundicully, ....
1847
2
19
3
89
13
447
()9
38
549
Copay
Totals, . .
1842
10
2
1
23
12
1
21
JO
355
77
432
122
28
362
108
2,941
835
101
;),'J72
In the Jaffna district the Church Missionary i Chundicully being a suburb. Nellore about two
Society has three mission stations, viz.: at miles distant, and Copay five mik-s distant.
Nellore, Chundicully, and Copay. Those are There is a missionary and a church at each
all in the neighborhood of the town of Jaffna, I place, but the attendance is small, the total
CEYLON.
233
iiumber of adults at the three stations being
200, and of children 400. They have also 37
schools, iu some of which only Tamil is taught,
in others only English. In Nellore a girls'
boarding-school has been established, similar
to that of the American mission at Oodooville.
It has 42 pupils, most of them the children of
heathen parents. The principal of this school
is a superior native young woman, who was
brought up iu the school, and who speaks and
writes English with remarkable accuracy.
There is also a high school for boys at Chundi-
cully, with 29 pupils.— Eev. E. D. Moore.
AVesleyan Missionary Society.— The Wes-
leyan mission to Ceylon was undertaken at the
sua'gestion of Sir Alexander Johnston, Chief-
Justice of that island. He had attentively
studied the character and results of the AVes-
leyan missions in the AVest Indies, and most
earnestly urged upon the AVesleyan Conference
the impurtance of extending their operations
to Ceylon. Some temporary difficulties pre-
vented the immediate adoption of the sugges-
tion ; but the impression produced upon the
Methodist Conference by his appeals, led to
the establishment of their Eastern Missions.
Dr. Coke had set his heart upon sending or
carrying the Gospel to India ; and as soon as it
was agreed to undertake the mission, he, though
advanced in years, determined to embark in
it. Being possessed of considerable property,
he proposed not only to introduce and estab-
lish the present mission, but also to advance
whatever money might be required for the
outfit and settlement of the missionaries ; a
rare instance of individual generosity and de-
votion to the cause of missions. After some
discussion, it was finally agreed that six mis-
sionaries for Ceylon, and one for the Cape of
Good Hope, should sail with Dr. Coke. Those
for Ceylon were, Messrs. AA'illiam Ault, James
Lynch, George Erskine, AVilliain Martin Har-
vard, Thomas Hall Squauce, and Benjamin
Clough. Two of the party. Harvard and
Squauce, were acquainted with the manage-
ment of the printing-pvess, which subsequently
proved of great service to the mission. Dr.
Coke, accompanied by six missionaries, set sail
from Portsmouth on the 30th of Decemlier,
1813. On the passage, Mrs. Ault, wife of one
of the missionaries, died, happy in God, and
was committed to the great deep, in joyful
hope of a resurrection to eternal life. This
was a great affliction ; but one still greater
soon followed. On the 3d of May following.
Dr. Coke wtis suddenly called to his eternal re-
ward. He had been indisposed a few days be-
fore, but there was no apprehension of danger ;
and on the day previous to his death, he ap-
peared considerably better. It was supposed
that he died of apoplexy, as no noise was heard
in the adjoining cabins, and he was found dead.
Deep and mysterious are the ways of Provi-
dence ! The Doctor believed he had a call to
the East ; he had devoted himself to the work ;
and, to use his owii language, " Only lived for
India ; " yet before he could reach his destina-
tion, he died aIo7ie, iu his cabin, and was com-
mitted to a watery grave. The missionaries
were thro^vn by this sad calamity into a state
of painful apprehension ; they had not only
lost their counsellor aud guide ; but they were
left also, without immediate pecuniary support
The whole entei-prise had rested so entirely on
their departed friend, that they did not know
whether any provision had beeu made for the
event which they had to deplore. But the loss,
however, of the human arm, on which they had
leaned, kxl them, by the grace of God, to a
more entire dependence on Him.
They arrived at Bombay, May 21, and the
letters of introduction which they had brought
to several persons of distinction, obtained for
them a kind rece])tion. Among them was one
to AV. T. Money, Esq., a principal agent at Bom-
bay, from Dr. Buchanan ; and he relieved their
anxiety by assuring them he should be happy
to advance them any funds they might need,
on the credit of their Society at home. The
Governor, Sir Evan Nepean, to whom likewise
they had letters, showed them all the kindness
which their circumstances required, and had a
house of his own prepared for their accommo-
dation.
On the 20th of June, the mission family, with
the exception of Mr. aud Mrs. Harvard, sailed
from Bombay, aud landed at Point de Galle,
after a voyage of nine days. Their generous
friend, Mr. Money, had written to Mr. Gibson,
the Master Attendant of Galle, informing him
of the probable time of their arrival, and de-
scribing the signal which the captain would
make on comiug iu sight of land. In conse-
quence, he had been looking out for the ship,
and paid them all the attention they required.
This proof of the lively interest which IVIr.
Money took in their affairs, filled them with
gratitude to him and to God ; but what were
their emotions of surprise and thankfulness,
when they learned that Sir Evan Nepean also
had taken the trouble of writing favorably
concerning them, to the Governor of Ceylon,
Sir Robert Brownrigg, who had in conse-
quence immediately written to Lord Moles-
worth, commandant of Galle, directing that
the Government House in the fort should be
prepared for their reception! Lord Moles-
worth executed these instructions, not with
mere official punctuality, but, though an entire
stranger to them, with all the feelings of per-
sonal friendship. These favors were rendered
to the missionaries for the sake of the cause in
which they were embarked ; and they serve to
mark the rapid transition now going on in the
public mind. The Rev. George Bisset, episco-
pal chaplain at Colombo, as well as the Gov-
ernor and other gentlemen, showed them every
brotherly kindness, and wished them all success.
The Governor offered to allow them fifty-sixdol-
lars a month for each school that they might
234
CEYLON.
establish. After mature deliberation and fer-
vent jirayer, it appeared to them advisable to
occupy only four stations for the present :
namely, Jaffna and Batticaloa, for the Tamil
division of the island, Gallc and Matura for
the Singalcse ; and it was agreed that Messrs.
Lynch and Squanee should go to Jaffna, Mr.
Ault to Batticaloa, Mr. Erskine to Matura,
and that Mr. Clough should remain at Galle.
In a few days, after celebrating the Lord's
Supper together, in which Lord Molesworth
requested permission to join them, Messrs.
Lynch and Squanee set out for Jaffna. On
tlieir arrival at Colombo they were hospitably
entertained by Mr. Twistleton, and much re-
freshed in spirit by their intercourse with other
friends. Sir Robert and Lady Brownrigg, Sir
Alexander and Lady Johnston, gave them a
cordial welcome, and encouraged them to j^ro-
ceed. Mr. Armour received them as brethren,
and Mr. Chater, the Baptist missionary, was
no less kind, and invited them to preach in his
chapel, where the military of the garrison at-
tended. Their attention was called to the case
of a convert from Mohammedanism, who had
been baptized in the fort church by the name
of Daniel Theophilus, said to be the first con-
version from Islamism which had been known
iu Ceylon. He was a man of strong mind and
considerable learning ; and hopes were enter-
tained that his pul>lic renunciation of his for-
mer faith, and his open acknowledgement of
Christianity, would have an extensive effect on
others of the same faith. The change in his
religious profession had called down upon him
the indignation of his relatives and former
connexions, some of whom were fully bent upon
his destruction. But he was taken under the
protection of the government, and by them
committed to the care of Messrs. Lynch and
Squanee, that he might accompany them to
Jaffnapatam, and there be further instructed
in the doctrines and duties of Christianity.
On the first of August they set out with this
interesting companion : and on their arrival
at Jaffna, the sub-collector, ^Ir. Mooyart, re-
ceived them with great kindness. Here they
were also welcomed liy Christian David, the
Tamil preacher from Tranquebar, who j)resided
over the Tamil Christians in that province.
He told Mr. L)T>ch that he had for more than
ten years prayed that some missionaries might
be sent to Ceylon, and that ho regarded their
arrival as an answer to his prayers. "While he
was able to allnrd them considerable aid in
furtliering the objects of their mission, they
in tlieir turn greatly assisted him in the
way of religious instruction. They had now
a gratifying jiroof of the liberal intentions
of the government towards Ihcm in the pro-
posal for the endowment of English schools
to be placed under their care. Since Jaffna
was to be the residence of two missiouaries,
they found that the stipulated allowance
for each school was, in their case, doubled.
At the request of the European resulents,
who were without the means of public in-
struction, they held Divine service in English,
alternately reading the church prayers and
preaching ; and they were much encouraged
by the apparent effects of their ministrations.
The other missionaries joined their stations
about the same time, and met with similar aid
in the prosecution of their work. Matura, to
which Mr. Erskine was appointed, was about
thirty miles from Galle. 'J'he civil authorities
afforded him every facility he required in the
opening of the promised l^nglish school, which
the children of the highest classes of natives
attended Avith manifest pleasure. He soon
commenced his English ministration, also, in
the Dutch church in the fort ; but his con-
gregation was small, the European garrison
consisting of few troops. The native popula-
tion was considerable, and the district was
found to be one of tlie strongholds of their su-
perstition : he lost no time, therefore, in begin-
ning the study of Singalese, that he might at-
tack the enemy iu his quarters.
Batticaloa, Mr. Ault's station, was above
150 miles beyond Matura. It is a small is-
land, containing a fort, Avith a few houses ; but
it is the central point of an important district
of the same name, which carries on a constant
trade with the interior, and contains a large
population. Mr. Ault proceeded to Batticaloa,
in a native dhoney, a kind of sailing barge,
which was expected to make the passage in
three days ; but it took more than eight to
reach the destined port. As he had not pro-
vided for so long a passage, his sufferings and
privations by the way, added to his aflliction
from the recent loss of his wife, so shook his
constitution, that he was ill-suited to enter upon
his arduous duties. There was no habitation
vacant for him ; but the Collector, Mr. Sawcrs,
and the Magistrate, Mr. Atkinson, received him
into their houses, and showed him every atten-
tion, and he was soon sufficiently recovered to
open the English school. On Sunday mornings
he performed divine service for the civilians
and military, when his congregation was sel-
dom less than loO, the soldiers being marched
to cliurch. He had an evening service also,
at which their attendance was optional ; and
the numbers that came were sufficient to show
a desire to hear the Word, while a few applied
to him under serious concern. The station was
crowded with the sick ; they ."^aw their com-
rades dying daily ; and the missionary sought
to improve the solemn season to their souls.
He did not, however, suffer these labor.M to di-
vert him from the natives. He labored hard
at the Tamil language, and soon began to itin-
erate among the huts in the neigliboring
country.
At Galle, Mr. Clough performed the English
service, in the Dutch church, every Sunday ;
and a jjrivate house in the fort was fitted up,
by some of his hearers, for preaching on an
CEYLON.
235
evening during the ^Yeek, and for religious con-
versation with those under serious impressions.
The marked attention of Lord Molesworth
not only encouraged him, but exerted a good
influence among the officers and troops. His
Lordship often appeared in company with the
humble missionary on public occasions, and
was seldom absent from the cottage in which
their religious meetings were held. The good
effect produced upon the European inhabitants
and the military was soon very apparent. But,
though encouraged by these things, Mr. Clough
could not permit himself to be detained from
his missionary work. Besides the numerous
Europeans and the inhabitants of Dutch and
Portuguese extraction in the fort, at Galle, the
Mohammedans resided there in great numbers,
and had a mosque in the garrison, the only one
in the whole island. There was a very large
population of Singalese in the adjacent coun-
try, whose docility and gentleness of disposi-
tion were not surpassed by the natives of any
other district in the British territories; but
they were heathen. To these, Mr. dough's
attention was anxiously directed ; and he wish-
ed to live among them, to study their language,
and to exert himself for their spiritual welfare ;
and it was not long before Providence opened
the way for him to do so. He received a visit
at the Government-house, from Don Abraham
Dias Abeyesinhe Amavasekara, the 3Iaha or
great Moodeliar of Galle, a fine-looking man,
of good understanding, and of a liberal mind,
and who, irom his rank, was possessed of un-
bounded influence throughout the district.
After the usual compliments, he addressed Mr.
Clough in English, stating that he was come to
place his own children under his protection and
instructions ; that, having heard that he was
desirous to establish a school for the sons of
native head-men, he was glad to ofier him a
good house, ready furnished for the purpose,
near his own residence, which, if it suited him,
was at his service ; adding, that he should
think it an honor to have such a reverend gen-
tleman living near him, and that he would as-
sist him in all things in his power. Mr.
Clough having accepted the ofler, was thus,
without any expense to the mission fund,
placed at once in a situation of comfort and
respectability, in which he could prosecute the
study of the language, and commence his labors
among the natives. His school was soon
opened, and attended by some of the most in-
telligent boys upon the island. The Moodeliar
manifested great anxiety for his comfort, fur-
nished him with a horse, and afforded him as-
sistance whenever he required it. The patron-
age and friendship of this person had great in-
fluence on the surrounding natives. Curiosity
was powerfully excited, and in his new residence
Mr. Clough was visited by learned priests, and
persons of various classes who came to inquire
respecting the religion he professed. With
the help of an interpreter, he had frequent op-
portunities to converse with these visitors co7i-
cerning the faith that is in Christ, and had the
pleasure, in some instances, of seeing them de-
part, apparently impressed with the results of
their inquiries. By the Moodeliar's assistance
he obtained a competent Singalese teacher, un-
der whose instruction he applied himself dili-
gently to the study of that language. He soon
had reason to trace the providence of God in
these arrangements, which were ordered so en-
tirely in accordance with his design, and yet
so independently of himself. He began im-
mediately to hold intercourse with the Singa-
lese, and especially with the priests ; and Pro-
vidence cast, him in the way of one of the
most influential in the island, who v:a? well
known both in the Kandian and British domin-
ions. This high-priest was everywhere extolled
for his extensive knowledge, both of the relig-
ion and literature of Ceylon, as well as of the
Oriental languages, and several marks of dis-
tinction had been conferred upon him. He had
resided for a considerable time at the Court of
Kandy ; and at his inauguration as a priest he
had the honor of riding- on the king's own
elephant. Mr. Clough, desirous of becoming
acquainted with the native superstitions, that
he might be the better prepared to expose
their absurdity and impiety, took every oppor-
tunity to be present at their religious services,
and endeavored, on such occasions, to engage
the priests in conversation, in the hearing of
their followers. A celebrated festival, called
Banna maddua, at which the priest was carried
in great pomp on the shoulders of his disciples,
furnished the first opportunity of conversing
with the high-priest, who appeared to be deep-
ly impressed with what he heard, and visited
Mr. Clough in private, for further informar
tion. Mr. Clough gave him a copy of the Gos-
pels at his own heathen temple, in presence of
some of his pupils, educating for the Budhist
priesthood, who were not a little surprised at
the joy which he expressed, and the care with
which he wrapped up the book. He read it
with diligence, and it furnished him with topics
of inquiry, which led to the gradual develop*
ment of the whole system of human redemp-
tion. After about two mouths, the priest
avowed an entire revolution of sentiment, pro-
fessed his firm conviction of the Divine origin
of Christianity, and expressed a wish openly to
renounce Budhism, and to make a public pro-
fession of his faith in Christ. He now became
anxious for baptism, declaring that he regarded
it as the characteristic mark of those who
were not worshipers of idols. But as this
step would inevitably subject him to the pri-
vations of poverty, and perhaps to the attacks
of infuriated idolaters upon his life, Mr. Clough
made the Governor acquainted with all the
circumstances of the case, and received an im-
mediate answer from his Excellency, that if
the priest, from conviction, embraced the Chris-
tian religion, protection should be afforded him.
236
CEYLON.
Mcanwlnlc, every effort was tried by his friends
and the priests to sliake his resolution ; but
threats and persuasions were alike unavailing,
he had '• counted the cost." On the 25th of
December. 1814, he put off the yellow robes of
his profession, and was publicly admitted into
the visible Church of Christ, in the presence
of a crowded congregation, by the ordinance
of Baptism, receiving the name of Pctenis
Panditta Sekarras. Thus did he give up rank,
afBuence, connexions, family, and all that the
world holds dear, to embrace the religion of
Jesus, in obedience to the dictates of consci-
ence. Through the interposition of Sir Robert
Brownrigg, he was placed in a situation to
maintain himself His literary qualiflcations
obtained for him the office of Singalese trans-
lartor to the government, at a fixed salary.
His studies Av6re directed with a view to his
becoming, at a future period, a preacher of the
Gospel among his own countrymen. Many of
the priests M'ere so shaken by this conduct of
their leader, that they, also, were desirous of
embracing Christianity ; but there was this
difficulty in the way : when they cast off their
robes, they lost all, even their freehold estates,
if they had any.
Not long after the arrival of the missionaries
they had to mourn the loss of one of their
companions, Mr. Ault, who sank under a severe
disease with which he had for some time been
afflicted. He died at Batticaloa, and was in-
terred with every mark of respect from all
classes of inhabitants. His career was short,
but not without efiect. In the article which
appeared in the Government Gazette announc-
ing his death, after bearing testimony to his
piety and zeal, it is added — " Possessing rare
qualifications for the meritorious and useful
work which he had undertaken, his success in
the short space of eight months, in raising at
that place, a respect for, and a decent obser-
vance of, at least the external form of religion,
was truly remarkable. And although it could
not be said that he made any converts from
either the heathen or Mohammedan faith to
that of Christianity ; yet, by the establisliment
of eight schools for the education of Hmdoo
childi-en, and by his talents and address having
so far overcome the scruples and prejudices of
their parents, a.s to introduce the reading of
the New Testament as the only school-book
to the more advanced scholars, he has laid the
foundation for a most extensive propagation of
our faith."
About this time it was proposed to establish
a system of village preaching on the Lord's
day, in the vicinity of Colombo, where Mr.
Harvard was then stationed, by means of in-
terpreters. For this jmrposc they were provi-
ded with Siiigalese youths from the govern-
ment seminary, who were deemed competent
to interpr(;t the missionaries' discourses. Two
or tliree of the government interjn-eters were
associated with them, and Hiv A. Johnston di-
rected that the principal Singalese interpreter of
the Supreme Court should accompany Mr. Har-
vard whenever required. The persons so em-
ployed were previously instructed what to do ;
the native congregations were assembled in
the government schools ; the meetings were
always opened and closed with prayer, and
were productive of considerable benefit to
those who attended them. Thus, under the
immediate superintendence of the missionaries,
from twelve to fifteen villages were regularly
supplied with public i-eligious instruction every
Sabbath. While, however, we admire the
spirit that prompted these I'roceedings, we must
not omit to record the personal inconvenience
which they suffered from them, as a warning
to others. Mr. Harvard confesses that " zeal,
undisciplined by prudence, impelled us to exer-
tions, in these itinerating labors, which were too
violent to be lasting. In company with my
interpreter, I have frequently traveled twelve
or fifteen miles in one day, addressing three
congregations, and returning in the evening to
preach in English, in the Pettah. Mr. Clough
was no less regardless of himself. The leading
of the singing also devolved on us, which was
even more laborious than preaching. The
abundance of the harvest and the paucity of
laborers, is the only apology to be made for
efforts which cannot be wholly justified ; and
which at length inflicted injuries upon my
constitution from which probably it will never
wholly recover."
An English service, for natives understand-
ing the English language, was also opened at
this time in Colombo ; and their place of wor
ship having become too small, a larger build-
ing was commenced. A Sabbath-school of
over 200 children was also organized. The
printing-press was put in operation, under the
direction of Mr. ITarvard, and soon spelling-
books, hymn-books, ai:d religions books, or
tracts of dilferent kinds were printed in the
Singalese, Tamil, and Portuguese languages.
The mission house being situated on the main
road from the country to the fort, the mission-
aries had frequent opportunities to converse
with the natives, on tlieir way to and from the
town. The results of these interviews were
often encouraging ; and in one instance were
productive of the happiest effects. A Budhist
priest, known l)y the title of the Ava Priest,
was introduced to them by a note from the
Rev. G. Bisset. This man possessed much
acuteness of intellect enriched by scientific
and literary research ; he was highly respected
by his disciples, and had attained the honora-
ble distinction of Maha INIaiaka. He avowed
himself an atheist inininciple ; but after much
discussion his unljclief and prejudice were over-
come, and he became a sincere inquirer after
truth. In proof of his sincerity, he con.scntcd
to Mr. Harvard's preaching in the temple of
which he was the chief-priest. His pride was
renounced, and ho became a docile scholar,
CEYLON.
237
receiring with meekness iustriiction in tlie first
principles of the doctrine of Christ, with a
view to his baptism, which he earnestly desired.
After some time, Mr. Harvard preached in his
temple, through an interpreter, in front of the
great image, to a large congregation of priests
and people, from 1 Cor. 8:4:" "We know
that an idol is nothing in the world, and there
is none other God but one." On their return
to Colombo the Ava Priest publicly renounced
his former notions and was baptized in the
fort church, by the name of Gkorgr Xado-
KIS DE SiLVA.
In their visits to the native Christians in
the villages, the missionaries were occasionally
met or accompanied by Sir. A. Johnston, Mr.
Twistleton, and even the Governor with his
lady and suite, who attended divine service, with
the Singalese Christians, in churches of the
humblest structure. This countenance of the
highest official authorities in the island tended
to obviate difficulties which they would other-
wise have found it hard to remove. There
was one prejudice, however, which they could
not immediately overcome. The native Chris-
tians had a strong objection to their women
appearing in a place of worship, except at the
administration of baptism, and the celebration
of marriage. This was so prejudicial to the
domestic character of the people that the mis-
sionaries resolved to persevere until they should
see the mothers and daughters of the Chris-
tians taking their proper jslace in the church ;
in which, after much effort, they were success-
ful.
The converted Ava Priest, George Nadoris,
manifested a strong desire for the conversion of
his idolatrous countrymen. It ajipeared that
half the priests and temples in the island had
been under his controL He accompanied the
missionaries in their preaching excursions
round the country, when he addressed large
companies of people, from 800 to 1,000 at a
time, in the most lively and eloquent manner ;
and his character as a priest was so well
known before his conversion, that wherever he
went the people recognized him, and the effects
produced by his public discourses were re-
markable. The priests came from almost
every part of the country, even from the inte-
rior, to contend with him. Great numbers of
the superior order of priests avowed themselves
convinced of the truth of Christianity ; but
they were not willing, like George Nadoris, to
deny themselves and take up the cross. There
was, however, one exception. Nadoris had a
friend among them, who possessed considerable
property, good natural abi'lities, and an e.x-
tensive acquaintance with foreign languages.
His disposition was meek, and his manners
prepossessing. When introduced to the mis-
sionaries by his friend and instructor, he pro-
fessed to be dissatisfied with the pagan super-
stitions ; offered himself for baptism, and beg-
ged to be instructed in the principles of
Christianity. The knowledge which the
brethren had by this time acquired of the de-
ceptive character of the natives, made them
cautious in the admission of candidates. In
the present instance their examination of the
man's motives was more than usually severe ;
but they could detect no sinister design. His
replies to their questions were given with the
greatest apparent sincerity ; and, after putting
him off for a considerable time, they felt so
well satisfied with him, that they could no
longer resist his importunity to be received
into the Christian church. He was baptized
by the name of Benjamin Parks. " It was
most gratifying," observed Sir Alexander
Johnston on the occasion, " to see the very
men who had been devoted to a heathen priest-
hood, surmounting every prejudice of education
and profession, and convinced of the delusion
of that idolatry which they had been taught
to preach." He also further remarked " that
it was one of many proofs of the good
effect produced among the natives by the cir-
culation of the Scriptures."
In the month of June, 1815, Rev. John Mc-
Kenny arrived from the Cape of Good Hope,
and was followed, early in 1816, by four more,
31essrs. Callaway, Carver, Broadbent, and Jack-
son, as a reinforcement ; and a young man,
named Salmon, was appointed as an assistait
missionary. He was the first preacher they
had obtained from among the inhabitants of
the island. His acquaintance with several
languages rendered him a valuable acquisition
as an interpreter, and he was received on trial,
and appointed to the Matura station, with
Mr. CallaAvay, to whom he proved a useful col-
league. Not long after, a second young man,
named John Anthoniez, also born in the coun-
try, was employed as a local preacher at Galle.
The building commenced at Colombo was
finished and opened for public worship on
Sunday, December 23d, 1816. An appro-
priate discourse was preached by Mr. Clough
from Ps. 122 : 6. It was provided with an
organ, purchased at Galle. In the evening a
second service was held, which was crowded,
the Governor and his lady, and most of the
civilians and military officers of the station
being present, together with a number of re-
spectable natives.
It was now agreed to have service in Eng-
lish every Sabbath at 7 A. M., and at the
same hour in the evening ; also a Singalese
service at half-past ten in the forenoon.
The missionaries now began to hold annual
conferences for the regulation of the concerns
of the mission. It is said of them in the So
ciety's Report, "By preaching, catechizing,
conducting native schools, and printing the
Scriptures and useful books, they are lay-
ing the foundation of a work, which,
if zealously supported, promises, under the
blessing of God, to re-erect the temples of
Christ now in ruins, through the neglect of
238
CEYLON.
Christians ; to arrest the devastating progress
of Paganism and Mohammedanism, now almost
triumpliant over the feeble remains of Christ^
ianity ; to reassert the honor and victories of
the cross ; and convey the knowledge of God
and salvation through an island, the essential
principle of whose religion is, to deny God,
and whose almost universal practice is, to wor-
ship devils."
Tlie concerns of the mission were daily
gathering strength, and the missionaries,
hoping to occupy Caltura the ensuing year,
asked for four additional missionaries, to en-
able them to occupy all the coast to Galle ;
and two more to go northward. In pursu-
ance of this arrangement, they established
themselves among the Tamil population of
Jaflna, Trincomalee, and Batticaloa ; and so
early as 1819, they had opened schools in the
prin'cipal villages along the western coast,
from Negonibo to Galle. For twenty years
the Wesleyan missionaries carried on the work
of general education in the maritime provin-
ces, which was afterwards taken up by the
Government in 1834. They did not aspire to
the communication of the higher branches of
learning, which had already been provided for
in the "seminary of Colombo — an institution
maintained by the Government for the educa-
tion of the sons of the chiefs and higher order
of the natives ; but in the principal villages,
to which they extended their operations, the
children of the peiisantry were instructed by
theWesleyans in the principles of Christianity,
and the essentials of general elementary know-
ledge.
The usual objection was at first urged to fe-
males learning to read; but this was soon
overcome ; and at a very early period the at-
tention of the missionaries was directed
strongly to an object which has since been
kept steadily in view : the education of the
Singalese, through the medium of their own
vernacular tongue. Until taken up by tlu;
Wesleyans, this important department had
been exclusively in the hands of the priest-
hood, who occupied themselves in every paw-
sela and temple, in teaching to write upon
ohb!, and read from the legendary books of the
Ikidhists. In their hands education was of the
lowest description, and the priests themselves
were but a stage in advance of their pupils.
Science formed no feature in their own educa-
tion ; history is confined to the events con-
nected with religion and its movements ; me-
dicine is culled from the imperfect notices of
their ojicient Sanskrit authorities ; and astro-
nomy, degraded into the mere dreams of
astrology, is affected to be studied by the
priests, who, by a singular anomaly, share its
cidtivation with the tum-tom beaters, or berra-
wagos, one of the lowest and least respected
castes in Ceylon.
Vernacular education was begun by the
VVcsleyans in IhlT, in the hope of superceding
the Budhist priesthood in this department }
and so successful was the effort, that before
the close of the year, upwards of 1000 scholars
were in attendance ; twelve months after the
number increased to 4000 ; and during thirty
years that the system has been in operation,
upwards of 21,000 pupils, females as well as
males, have from time to time been instructed
in the numerous schools of the mission. No
religious test is required for admission, and no
compulsion is exerted to enforce participation
in the Christian services of the schools. The
objections of parents are at once respected, if
advanced ; but the instances have been rare in
which any scruples have ever been urged,
either by the priesthood or by the people, to
any portion of the system.
But laborious and extended as have been
these efforts of the Wesleyans, the tenor of
their observation and experience has pro-
duced a conviction that however efficient edu-
cation may have proved among the Budhists
as a pioneer and precursor for the introduction
of Christianity, its value is but secondary
as compared with preaching to adults, and
awaking the native mind through the instru-
mentality of the pulpit and printing-press.
" Under this conviction," says Sir E. Teunant,
■' the Methodists have been the closest investi-
gators of Budhism, the most profound students
of its sacred books in the original, and the
most accomplished scholars both in the classi-
cal and vernacular languages of Cej'lon."
The information thus acquired has been sedu-
lously employed by them in the preparation of
works in Singalese, demonstrative of the errors
of Budhism, and illustrative of the evidences
and institutions of Christianity. To the value
of these publications and the influence exer-
cised by their promulgation throughfiut Cey-
lon, the missionaries of other churches who
labor in the same field with the Methodists,
have borne their cordial and concurrent attes-
tation.
Of the converts made from paganism to
Christianity, by the instrumentality of our
missionaries in Ceylon, we have the following
testimony from Mr. Harvard, in answer to tho
inquiry of the committee : " As it respects
the nature of the change which our converts
have undergone, I have no hesitation in say-
ing, that in every case it has been real, accord-
ing to its degree. Inhere has been a real con-
viction of the falsehood of their previous faith,
and a real persuasion of the truth and excel-
lence of the Gospel. I have had every oppor-
tunity of being satisfied on this i)oint. As in
each case of conversion from heathenism the
change has been real, so it has been operative.
In none of them have there been any lingcr-
ings after their former idolatry. They have
renounced their formtr practices ; and, so far
as my knowledge has gone, their conduct has
been a constant conformity to Christian
practice. To a very gratifying extent the
CEYLON.
239
change in our converts has been experimental
It is scarcely to be expected that a man com-
ing out of the darkness of heathenism, under
the ordinary influence of the Spirit, should
very rapidly apprehend the things of God.
However, in all we have been satisfied of a
conviction of sin, and an earnest desire to be
saved. In some cases we have had professions
of religious enjoyment that we dare not call
in question, and which have been justified by
a corresponding faithfulness and consistency
of life." "I have heard," says Mr. Fox,
writing in 1823, " in this country, both in the
Singalese and Portuguese languages, as art-
, less and satisfactory sentiments of Christian
experience as I ever heard in the English lan-
guage ; and I have seen the colored face
beaming with smiles, while the last audible
sound, ' Yesus, Wahansey,' Jesus, my Saviour,
passed the dying lips."
In the years 182G and 1827, several other
priests of the highest class were converted to
the Christian faith, and have become active
agents in the mission. An institution for the
instruction of young native converts, with a
view to the Christian ministry, has been in
successful oijeration since 1826.
Kaudy, the capital of the interior of the
island, was occupied as a mission station in
1840. This mission, besides its immediate
benefit to the people, led to an investigation of
the subject of government support of idola-
try. This exposure roused the astonishment
and indignation of the Christian world, which
was f(jllowed by the issuino- of those instruc-
tions Avhich led to the disseverance of the
guilty and mischievous connexion between the
government and the idolatrous and supersti-
tious practices of their Budhist, Hindoo, and
Mohammedan subjects.
In 1842 a mission was established among
that wild and barbarous people, called the
Veddahs, who, in a state of savage indepen-
dence, inhabit the jungle in the interior of the
island, a few days' journey from Batticaloa.
God has crowned the enterprize with his blcss-
iiig, and granted his servants great success.
Under the direction of the learned and devoted
missionaries with which God has favored the
Ceylon mission, the press, in the different lan-
guages spoken there, has done a noble work. It
has not only presented them with the Holy Scrip-
tures, in a language which they can read, but
has also furnished them Avith school-books, and
works on history, biography, science, and the-
ology, besides a periodical literature. The
Ceylon native ministry are a class of very able,
devoted, and zealous men, continually growin"-
in number and efficiency. '^
The manner in which the missionaries have
to meet and combat the Budhism and devil-
worship in Ceylon, is well exhibited in the fol-
lowing communication from the Rev. Joseph
Rippon, of Point de Galle, addressed to the
secretaries of the society in 1851 : " On my
arrival here, I found Mr. Dickson doing the
full work of this large and important circuit,
and laboring among the people with great
acceptability and success, preaching in three
different languages weekly, and taking long,
fatiguing journeys, but so worn down by dis-
ease and incessant labors, that it was painful
to see him or hear him speak, I was thankful
that I came out by the quickest route, or
otherwise the life of a valuable missionary
must have been sacrificed, and this important
station left unoccupied. He much needed the
rest which he is now taking on the continent,
and I sincerely pray that it may be blessed to
his complete restoration to health, though there
is too much reason to fear that his disease is
too far advanced to be arrested. I relieved
him at once of the English work, and, in a
month, had so far acquired the Ceylon-Portu-
guese, as to be able to preach in it. I found
it a miserably corrupt, and, in a literary point
of view, worthless dialect, but still valuable to
a missionary, as the only means by which he
can communicate the Gospel to many thou-
sands of perishing souls. My Singalese work
is assuming an intensely interesting character.
Though I am diligently studying the language,
I am afraid it will be a month or two before I
can reach the people through this medium as
effectually as I wish ; and I am, therefore, for
the present, using an interpreter. The head
master of the government mixed school kindly
offered his service gratuitously, and, as he pos-
sessed peculiar qualifications for the work, we
spend many evenings in the surrounding vil-
lages, preaching to a deeply interesting, but
fearfully deluded people, the unsearchable
riches of Christ. The difficulties in the way
of their conversion are stupendous. My cir-
cuit embraces about half of the southern pro-
vinces,—the Avhole island being divided into
five provinces for government purposes, — and
extends along a densely populated sea-coast
for thirty-five miles, and as far into the jungle
as the imagination can reach, for, unfortu-
nately, this is the only means I have at present
of penetrating there. The people are in theory
all Budhists ; but in practice, all devil-wor-
shipers.
" Within four miles of my house there are six-
teen Budhist temjjles. In one of these alone
there are thirty priests ! The whole number
of priests in this circuit is perhaps 500. It is
not by human might, nor by power, that we
can prevail against such a host as this ! Fre-
quently, in the dead of the night, I hear the
music from the devil dances in the neighbor-
hood. _ I have attended these midnight orgies,
and it is only by doing so that any person can
form an idea of the strength with which this
superstition binds down an otherwise acute,
ingenious and intelligent people. Never did
a Christian congregation in England listen
with more unbroken silence, nor an audience
in Exeter Hall hang with more complete ab-
240
CEYLON.
sorption of soul on tlie lips of its most clioscn
speakers, than these people do on the frantic
gestures, and hideous veilings, and senseless
incantations of the devif priest. To their con-
ceptions, he is penetrating the invisible world,
and comrauniiig with spirits. His ascendancy
over their minds is complete. He is the great
intercessor between devils and men, for the
removal of all evil, and bestowment of all
good. Without the priest, nothing can be
done. If a house is to be built, if a journey is
to be taken, if a child is to be born, devils
must be propitiated, and their favor secured ;
but, especially, in cases of sickness where all
ordinary methods of cure have failed, devil
dances and incantations are the last resort, the
poor deluded wretches often dying in the midst
of the ceremonies, although the priest has per-
haps oO'cred a fowl in sacrifice, dug open graves
and slept in them, a7ul fried eggs in human
skulls, in order to obtain the necessary influence
to perform the cure ! An evil so wide-spread
and so deep-rooted will not be easily de-
stroyed ; and a conviction of its magnitude,
and of the necessity of resorting to some extra-
ordinary means for its extinction, has grown
upon me daily.
" The whole system received a severe shock
last autumn at 'Matura, its great stronghold.
The priests there are considered the cleverest
in the island ; and Mr. ISIurdock, the Secretary
of the Singalese Tract Society, being at that
place on business, challenged the priests pub-
licly, and offered them a large reward if th<y
would cause any of their incantations to take
effect upon him, by causing him to fall down
dead ; for these priests profess to be the dis-
pensers of death to the living, as Avell as of
life to the dying. They used all the methods
of preparation I have already mentioned, sleei>
ing in graves for many nights, and met iNlr.
Murdock, in the presence of many hundreds of
Singalese, who had gathered together to wit-
ness the experiment on the day appointed.
Their first effort was to evade the challenge.
1'hey excused themselves on the ground tliat
they should be tried for nuirder if they killed
him. Application was therefure made to the
government authorities, and an nndcsired per-
mission obtained for them to do their worst.
Their next attempt was to intimidate. Their
incantations never failed ; his death was cer-
tain if he tried them ; and he had belter spare
himself at once and run no risk. When they
failed, tiny were driven lastly to the test, and a
miseralile failure it was. They stood reading
their incantations, burning resin, and blowing
its fumes upon him, for more tlian an hour,
' and the people looked Avhen he shoulil have
swollen or fallen down dead suddenly, but after
they had looked a great while, and saw no
harm come to him, they changed their minds,'
if not with reference to him, at least with
reference to the power of these charms. A
derisive cry was raised throughout the crowd,
and the devil priests have since been hooted
through the streets of Matura. I have tried
the same plan with great success in the neigh-
borhood of Galle ; and, even to-night, I have
just returned from a village where I had been
undergoing a test, in some respects similar. I
challenged the priests some weeks ago, when
they refused to meet me, assigning various rea-
sons why they could ' do me no hurt,' as, that
I was of a different nation, &c. I have spent
several evenings in replying to their excuses
publicly, to the peojjle of the village ; and,
being driven to extremity, they resolved to
make a grand effort to-night to put me down,
as they term it, which means, to make me fall
senseless to the ground, and to cause blood to
gush from my nose, cars, and mouth. The
spirit which can conceive such a thing is dia-
bolical ; but the cool determination that can
resolve to accomplish it, shows to what a^Iegree
these men can imbibe the evil spirit ot their
master.
" They brought priests twenty-seven miles
from Matura to help them, and spent many days
in preparation by digging open graves, <tc
They haA-e also had two devil dances in the
village to-day, but whether to gain power for
the experiment or not, I cannot say. The
news reached Galle ; and six coaches full of
people, with about thirty on foot, flocked to
the village, where a number of Singalese peo-
ple were gathered to receive me. I preached
to them for nearly an hour, while two different
parties of priests, who did not dare to face
me, were reading their incantations against
me in the immediate neighborhood, and the
people were watching with intense interest,
not knowing what moment I should fall to tho
ground. When all was over, and they saw I
was uninjured, their astonished looks showed
that to their minds at least I had pa.sscd
through a perilous ordeal, however ridiculous
it was to me. My chief difficulty is to con-
vince the spectators that they are as safe from
these influences as I am. To make this point
([uite sure, I have promised to take a little Sin-
galese boy, next Tuesday night, and have
offered a reward of ten rupees to any priest
who will cause incantation to take effect upon
him, on condition that the child shall not
know what they are attempting, and that no
effort shall be made to frighten him. Failures
such as that of tonight, go like an electric
shock through the whole population, and the
effect will be seen after many days. I find
this the most effectual method of arousing thn
people and gaining their attention, and can
evei- after raise a good congregation in the
villages where the experiments have been
tried^ I have one last blow to strike at this
system, by a challenge to all the priests in the
province, to meet me publicly before the face
of the peojile ; and then, with this kind of
opposition to them I shall have done.
" Our prospects with reference to the over
CEYLON.
241
throw of Budhism were never so cheeriug as
they are at present. Our excellent chairman,
the Eev. Daniel J. Gogcrly, has published a
series of pamphlets, entitled Tlie Institutes of
Christianitij, m which the errors of Budhism,
geographical, philosophical, and theological,
are pointed out with unanswerable force. The
sj'stcm reels under the blow. There is perhaps
not a more profound Budhist scholar in the
island than he, not even among the priests
themselves. The priests are reaaling them and
comparing the extracts with the works of
Budha ; and if a priest be asked, why none of
them attempt an answer, his reply general-
ly is, ' Who is able ?' and his rueful counte-
nance is a sufficient attestation of his sincerity.
I am making arrangements to furnish every
priest in my circuit with a complete set.
"One of the mightiest agencies which is
now at work for the evangelization of South
Ceylon, is a Singalese Religious Tract Society.
It is entirely unsectarian in its character, and
is supported by Christians of all denomina-
tions. Its income is above £500 a year, with
an annual grant of 150 reams of paper from
the London Tract Society. It has already
printed and put into active circulation 397,000
Singalese tracts ; 140,G00 of which were print-
ed during the last year. It has also a widely
circulated monthly periodical, and has issued
a Singalese hymn book, and a history of the
patriarchs. It is conducted with great energy
and efficiency by its secretary, Mr. Murdoch,
who was mainly instrumental in its establish-
ment, and who relinquished a highly lucrative
government situation that he might give his
undivided attention to these and kindred ob-
jects.
" On the whole, therefore, our prospects are
hopeful ; our movements against Budhism
and devil worship are on a comprehensive scale,
and we have manifest tokens of the presence
and blessing of God upon our labors. Impres-
sions arc widely scattered ; the Gospel seed is
sown in many hearts to grow in secret for a
time ; convictions are produced, and souls are
saved.
" The most available portion of the circuit
for missionary effort is within a circle of four
miles around my dwelling ; but even this con-
tains one hundred and seventy villages, and
there are jungle districts where I fear the foot
of a missionary must not tread for years to
come. The extent of population may be esti-
mated from the fact that though my residence
is a mile from the fort and town of Galle, on
the Matura high road, 600 persons pass it
every hour throughout the day."
The mission in South Ceylon is the oldest
Wesley an mission among a heathen population
in the eastern world ; it is now in its forty-first
year, having been commenced in the year 1814.
In this quarter of the world, the missionaries
have had to encounter the most formidable
systems of pagan idolatry ; systems consecra-
16
ted by immemorial antiquity, wrapped .in all
the subtilties of metaphysical sophistry ; em
bodied in books of poetry and philosophy,
venerable in the eyes of the people for talent
and age ; inculcated by a numerous and learned
priesthood, and intimately associated with
every circumstance of civil and domestic life ;
systems too, which avowedly encourage the
vilest passions of the human heart, promote
an utter dereliction of sacred principle, and
reduce the glorious privilege of immortality to
an imaginary state of unimpassioned repose, in
which no joy shall gladden, and no pain afflict,
no activity arouse, and no desire ruffle ; but in
which the human mind of " large discourse,"
and lofty presage, shall sink into eternal qui-
escence and annihilation. Yet truth is pre-
vailing over these forms of error. Several of
the " priests have become obedient to the
faith," and many thousands of the people have
joyfully renounced the boasted advantages of
their former worship for "The unsearchable
riches of Christ." It is possible that the So-
ciety's mission in South Ceylon is undervalued.
The mission has, however, an interest of its
own, both present and prospective. Budhism
is the most gigantic form of error with which
the Christian church has to contend. But the
southern district of Ceylon is at once its cra-
dle and its strength. Strike it here, and the
wound will be felt to its very centre. Budhism
is a connected system ; its doings in other
lands are reported here, and occurrences in
this land are told in the courts of kings in
Siam and Burmah, and travel wherever its
connecting machinery is found. The progr^
and triumj^h of Christianity here would tell in
every part of the system, and be a prelude to
its entire downfall. Prospectively also this
mission has a peculiar interest ; it is the first
fruits of all the future missions of the society in
Budhist lands. The Budhism of China is only
a reflection of that of Ceylon, which was its
source. Even locally it is situated in the di-
rect route to the other strongholds of this form
of error. And therefore the destinies of the
future only confirm the demand which the
duties of the present enforce that existing mis-
sions to the Budhists should be well sustained
in all the means that are necessary to secure
their greatest present and permanent effi-
ciency.
In his late visitation journal, the Bishop of
Colombo gives an account of the great success
which the head of the church has conferred
upon the labors of the Wesleyan missionaries ff^
in Ceylon ; we had intended to present a por-
tion of that report to the reader, but the space
alloted to this article is already exhausted, and
we can only in conclusion direct attention for
more particular information to the annexed
table. — Wesleymi Missionary Notices, Annual
Reports and Methodist Magazine ; Hough's
Christianity in India; Sir. J. E. Tennent's
Christianity in Ceylon. — Eev. W. Butler.
242
CEYLON.
_
1
1
f 1
11^-2
— '
coi-(-rfcooi.':)C-iOiccJfMooc
L- 1
o ^9 g
<M
■n ») rt S ?i S; 1 r^ 1
lsi^5
H
(M~ 1
-l« 1
pl=""
a
1
°fe5l
CliOCOrHiOC-ir-OOClOCOCO .
• o 1 o 1
s
jr-S o"?
I—) I— t
cl 1 1- 1
(S
1
1
CC
s
r-
^ CJ r-l « r-
r-T ef
•saxag
lMIMr-(i-l«)(Mr-IS-)i-l tH
tl}oq JO gJBioqOS
e^
CO lO CI CI fM
O (M rH CO T-
i-
-Ai!(j JO jaqranji^
<N
CO
•spoqog
l~incOTl<00CC>->J<-*TJ<cqiHCOlHr-l
CO
H
-.fT;(X JO jaqiunj.^
o
a
■soxag moq
«
JO sjBioqag-HJiiq
***«***«**««**
«
H
« « « * *
»
*
-qcs JO jaqratiNj
M
•siooqag-itJtJq
**«**«**««««**
*
Q
« « * * »
-qiic; JO J8qcmij.j
•diqsaaquiojt
»OrH C-l -^l— COO .COC^lOiOOt-
C^ Ol ■* 4 OO O C» .C^i-lrH
^
!^
<»
•i"J I^IU no
o
'^
:?
•SJaqraare qoanqj
t:^S'£:J'£2'^=^'°«>^^»-'-i
CO
o
pajipaaooy puB
1-4 C-1 rH rH Ci^ i-l i-<
^
l^ rH 00 rH
-*
nnj JO jaqainj<[
fH
rn"
-s
u
g
*«****««**«»**
*
« * * * *
«
«
a,
32
Ph
S »?
£
O
"Sg
^
t, to
Ji^ 2
«
B
III
«*«««****«■**««
*
O
* * * * «
*
*
^
^
— ••"
-^
:2
•^11
l^OCO-*0)tO-*0-*rHtHiOrHiH
CO
*■ » •» * «
*
CO
H
M
saa
flH
^
.= 'S'<
V-
fe
•§
3o
•r-I^J'^ .r-( .rHrHrHrH . -rt
CO
o
CO
m
^
^
>— 1
•sjnBjstssy
« CI r-l iH C) r-(IN i-H n ! • rH rH
k
en
o
pUB BaiJBnOtSRlK
■BaOT!U-SlliqOt!OJ<J
*«*«»**««■«««««
— w
■^ CJ rH rH CO
rH
jatjio JO jaqmnjij
a
•siadBqj
«•»♦»•«••»«•»«
«
pa
CO rH rHrH
CO
CO
JO Jsqtnnj^
-^
S
T3 • ■
CQ
'A
8 -rl
-e
.3
C
a
e
•a
1
II
1
3
^
ill
c
c
d
l
i.
6
a
a.s
1
•o
c
c
d
•a
o
C3
, t-
_ tH
r-i fi CO •<» «n <0 t-^ 00 Oi C> r< (N «
rH ci CO Hi' >e
rHr^rl f-<
Society for the Propagation of tiik
Gospel in- Foreign Parts. — This society
haa three stations in Ceylon. The first was es-
tablished at Newera Ella, in 1838, and has now
one mi.ssionary. The second was commenced in
1840, at Matura, and has now one missionary,
113 church members, 0 schools, 381 scholars;
of which 71 are females. That at Calpentyn,
CHALDEANS.
243
was commenced in 1842, and has one mission-
ary, with a native missionary at Putlam.
The labors of the Loudon Missionary So-
ciety in Ceylon do not ajjpear in a statistical
form, for the reason that they M'cre discon-
tinued many years since. The missions of the
English Baptists, the Wesleyan Methodists,
the American Board, and the Church of Eng-
land, though occupying the same field, and
often in close proximity with each other, have
been conducted with the utmost harmony, and
without the intrusion at any time of denomi-
national strife or jealousy. Upon this fact the
British colonial officers have often remarked
with great particularity and pleasure. Fre-
quent mention is made in missionary reports,
and by intelligent travelers who have visited
the various missions of the island, of the Roman
Catholics, who have been somewhat numerous
there ever since the possession of the island by
the Portuguese, and of their hostility to the
Protestants and their labors. In the very last
report of one of the Church of England sta-
tions, the missionary says, " The Eomanists are
exerting themselves, and making every effort
to injure us, and having lately obtained a grant
from government for education ; they are seek-
ing to destroy or injure our schools, and
threaten any Romanist parent who dares to
send his children to a Protestant school. Fes-
tivals, processions, and theatrical representa-
tions, are the means by which they decoy the
unwary and the ignorant." But though the
Catholics have been among the bitterest ene-
mies of Protestant missions in Ceylon, it does
not appear that the missionaries have ever
entei'ed into much controversy with them, or
been hindered by them from the steady and
successful prosecution of their work.
Below is given a comprehensive view of all
the missions in Ceylon, as at present existing :
TABULAR VIEW.
MISSiONS.
English Bajjtist
Wesleyan Meth<xJ it. .
American Board
Church Miss. Society.
Gospel Prop. See
^
to
^
a
O £
a
t«
!3 .
3
U
g °
^
^1
.a
-3
1S12
<
o "
^j
m
.S4
483
31
1,003
1814
•26
69
1,749
80
3,753
1816
9
42
385
77
4,242
1818
6
167
S71
101
3,599
183S
3
47
1
113
9
381
313
3,101
298
12,978
CHALDEANS. — This name is applied by
some to tlie Nestorians, but belongs more pro-
perly to that portion of them who have fallen
ofif to the Pope. As long ago as 1681 a
Patriarch was ordained over such Nestorians
as had seceded to Rome, under the title of
Mar Yoosuf, Patriarch of the Chaldeans. His
seat was at Diarbekir till about the year 1780,
when Papal emissaries secured the defection
of Mar Elias of Elkosh, one of the two patri-
archs of the Nestorians, the other being Mar
Shimon, whose seat was at Kochannes, near
Julamerk, in Kurdistan. This defection is
said to have been brought about by the Par
pists refusing to surrender a firman essential
to his accession to the patriarchate till he
consented to acknowledge allegiance to Rome.
Even then an attempt was made to set aside
his claim in favor of that of Mar Yoosuf, but
the measure excited so decided an opposition,
that Rome was induced to resort to a more
conciliatory course. This and similar manoeu-
vres at the death of that Patriarch, when a
Chaldean from Khosrova was appointed in
his room, instead of the regular successor, and
the name changed from Mar Elias to Mar
Nicolas, have interfered with the thorough
subjection of this sect to Rome. But ever
true to the one end of subduing all things to
herself, she perseveres in fastening more firmly
her iron yoke as its members become more
subservient to her sway.
The Chaldean clergy consists of (1) the
Karooya, or reader ; (2) the Hoopodiakono,
or sub-deacon ; (3) the Shemmasha, or deacon ;
(4) the Kusha, Kushisha, or priest ; (5) the Kho-
repiskopa, Archidiakono, or Deputy Bishop
(Archdeacon) ; (6) the Episkopa, or Bishop ;
(7) the Mootran, or Metropolitan Bishop ;
and (8) the Katoleeka, Patriarcha, or Patri-
arch. All of these, except the two last, may
marry before ordination, laut not after.
Their books are written in ancient Syriac.
and are the same with those of the Nestorians.
save as they are gradually altered in confor-
mity to the creed of Rome. At first only the
name of Cyril was substituted for Nestorius,
&c. ; but greater innovations are made as the
people are able to bear them.
Besides the vicinity of Mosul, Chaldeans are
found at Diarbekir, Sert, Khosrova in Persia,
Arbela and Bagdad.
This sect is accessible through the missions
of the A. B. C. F. M. at Oroomiah and Diar-
bekir, but principally through the station at
Mosul, where some of the members of the Pro-
testant church are converted Chaldeans. Re-
cently, through Papal intrigues with the
Pasha, the large Chaldean village of Telkeif
has been closed to missionary efforts, and even
Protestants who own property there have been
forbidden to visit it. But such a state of things
cannot last, and we may hope soon to hear
that such measures have redounded, as they
always do, to the furtherance of the truth. — -
See Assemani ; Smith and DwighVs Armenia ;
Bishop Southgate*s First and Second Journey ;
Layard's Nineveh; Badger's Nestorians and
their Rituals ; and Dr. Grant and the Mountain
Nestorians. — Rev. T. Laurie.
OHAVAGACHERRY : A station of the
Am. Board, in the southern or central part of
Jaffna, or Tamul district, Ceylon.
244
CHINA.
CHAGA : A station of the General Bap-
tists in Ilindoslan. a little distance from Cut-
tack, and near the coast of the Bay of Bengal.
CHARLOTTE: A village of recaptured
Africans, in the parish of St. John, Sierra
Leone, West Africa, occupied by the Church
Missionary Society.
CHERRAPOO.VJEE : A town on the
Cassia, or Kossaya hills, 2;j0 m. N. E. of Cal-
cutta, where is a Welsh Calvinistic mission.
CHEDUBA : A Karen village in Arra-
can, and an out-station of the mission of the
Am. Baptist Miss. Union in Arracau.
CHEROKEE: A chief town of the
Cherokee nation in the Indian territory, and
the seat of the Cherokee IVIissiou of the Am.
Baj)tist Missionary Union.
CHEK CIIIX : An out station of the Hong-
Kong Am. Baptist Mission in China.
CIIETTHIXGSYJLLE : A Karen village
in the Amherst dist. of Burmah, and an out-
station of the Maulraain Karen Mission of the
Am. Baptist Miss. Union.
CHICIIACOLE : A station of the Loudon
Missionary Society, in the Northern Circar,
India, nO m. N. E. of Vizagapata,m.
CIJIXA : On account of its great antiquity,
its extent of territory, its vast population, its
physical, social, and moral condition, its poli-
tical and commercial importance, China pre-
sents a high claim upon the attention of the
scholar, the philanthropist, and especially the
Christian. And this claim is greatly aug-
mented at the present time, by the wonder-
ful moveuK-nt among its native population,
for the reformation of its p(ilitical, social, and
religious institutions. Little was known of
this great empire, in the Western world, till
it was \isited by the Venetian traveler, Marco
Paulo ; nor were his discoveries generally
known in his day. The researches of the
Catholic missionaries in Peking, early in the
ICth century, together with the efforts of the
Western puwers to secure a protltable trade
with China, contributed to extend our know-
ledge of the country ; and those have subse-
quently been followed up by Christian mis-
sions and commerce ; and yet, witii all tliese
aids, the interior of this vast kingdom is but
very imperfectly known.
Territornd E3te)tt. — The Chinese Empire is
bounded on the south-east by the Pacific
Ocean, and on the soutli-Avest by Cochin-china,
Laos, and ]Jurmah. By the Himalaya moun-
tains on the side of Thibet, it is separated from
Assam, Bootan, and Lidia. Its western bor-
der, inchiding Thibet, Ladak and Hi, extend-
ing north to the Russian territories, Ls bounded
by the pnnihcesof Lahore, Cashmere, Badak-
shun, Kdkand and the Kirghis steppe. Rus-
sia is conterminous with China from the
Kirghis steppe on the west, to the sea of Ok-
hotsk on tlie east, 3,-300 miles, the Altai and
Daourian mountains forming a natural bound-
•iiy between these two great empires, llie
whole Chinese Empire is 12,550 miles in cir-
cumference, (about half that of the globe,)
comprising, according to MeCulloeh, 5,300,000
square miles, and covering about one-third of
the continent of Asia and about one-ninth of
the land area of the globe. Russia is nearly
COOO miles in its greatest length, its average
breadth, about 1,500 miles, and meastu-es
7,725,000 sq. miles, being nearly one-seventh
of the land on the glol;e. The area of the
British Empire, at the lowest calculation is
6,508,000 square miles. Brazil comprises an
area of 3,390,000 square miles, and the United
States and territories measure 3,235,148 square
miles, situated, as to soil and climate, within
the most eligiljlc portion of the earth, while a
large part of the British, Rtissian, and Chinese
empires, can never be otherwise than very thinly
settled.
Political Divisions. — The Chinese divide their
empire into three principal parts, according to
the form of government adopted in each : —
{1) The Eighteen Provinces; (2) Manchuria,
lynig north of the gulf of Leantung, and east
of the Inner Daourian mountain to the Pacific ;
(3) Colonial Possessions, including Mongolia,
lli, Kokonor and Thibet.
The first only of these is, by other nations,
called China. It lies on the eastern slope of
the high table-land of Central Asia, in the
south-eastern angle of the continent. In its
scenery, soil, climate, navigable rivers and va-
rious and abundant production's, it will com-
pare with the most favored portions of the ha-
bitable globe. The Chinese call it "The
Eighteen Provinces," " The Middle Kingdom,"
and other pompous names. They regard it as
including within its area, the major jiart of the
earth, and as occujjying a central position
among the natioiB.
Compariitive Dimensimis of China Proper. —
Tito dimensions of the Eighteen Provinces, as
defined by the Chinese, cannot be much ))elow
2,000,000 square miles, including the provinces
of Cansuh and Chihli, a little exceeding two-
fifths of the whole empire. But estimating
China Proper, according to the old limits,
McCulloch makes its area 1,348,870 sq. miles.
Its length from north to south, is 1474 miles,
and its breadth 1355 miles. The coast line
from Hainan to Lcautung is above 2,500 miles,
its inland frontier is 4,400 miles, making it
seven times larger than France, fifteen times
larger than the Laiited Kingdom, and nearly
half as large as all Eurojie, Avliich contains
3,050,000 s(iuare miles. The area of China
Proper is nearly ecjual to that of the thirty-
one United States of America, which is about
1,558,424 square mile.?. In the relative posi-
tion of the United States and China, there is
considerable resemblance. which involvesniuch
similarity of climate. They arc both, on their
eastern shores, washed by great oceans. But
in the same latitude, China is considerably
colder than thia countrr.
Chao
Tim-pe-men.
I
CHINA.
245
Mountains. — The principal mountains of tlie
Chinese empire, are the outer Hiugau, Daou-
riau, and Altai, separating it from Eussia in
Asia on the north. These mountains seldom
rise more than 7,000 feet above the sea. On its
western border are the Ak-tak, Belar-tag, and
Karakara mountains. On the southern border
are the lofty Himalaya, running south-easterly
to about 950 east long., a distance of more
than 1,000 miles. In the interior of its vast
colonial dominions, are the Celestial Mountains,
separating Eastern Turkistan from Souugaria ;
and, running nearly parallel with them to the
south, are the Kwanlun mountains running-
easterly between Hi on the north, and Thibet
on the south. These ranges, with partial in-
terruptions, extend to the western borders of
China Proper, and between them lies the Great
Desert of Gobi, and much of the high table
land of Central Asia. Besides these are the
Taugnu mountains on the north-west, the Bay-
ankara in Kokonor, the Inner Hingan, run-
ning south, near the western border of Man-
churia ; and there is still another long range
commencing near the mouth of the Sagalien
river, on the north, and running nearly paral-
lel v/ith the sea-coast to the northern point of
Corea. The south-western and southern pro-
vinces are a mountainous region, though to a
large extent capable of cultivation, and very
productive. In the mountains, and lofty table
lands of Central Asia, the great rivers of China
originate. Nearly four-fifths of the empire are
mountainous, aside from the Desert of Gobi,
but generally well rewarding the husbandman*
for his toil. The character of the Chinese in-
habiting those mountainous regions differs wide-
ly from that of those residing in the Great
Plain, the former being rough in their man-
ners, and bold, hardy, and independent, in their
bearing.
Great Desert of Gobi.—lsext to the Great
Desert of Sahara, in Africa, the Desert of Gobi
is the most remarkable. It lies between the
Celestial Mountains on the north and the
Kwanlun range on the north-west, reaching
from the Belar-tag mountains on the west, to
the Inner Hingan or Sialkoi, on the east, a dis-
tance of 2,200 miles, with an average breadth
of between 350 and 400 miles, and a superfi-
cial area of about 1,200,000 square miles.
Though this tract is not all entirely desert,
none of it is very fertile. Its great altitude is
supposed to be the principal cause of its sterility.
Along the southern side of the Celestial Moun-
tains, is a strip of arable land of from 50 to
80 miles in width, in which lie nearly all the
Mohammedan cities and forts of the southern
circuit, as Kashgar, Oksu, Hami, and others.
The Tarim or Yarkand river flows eastward
through this fertile tract, and empties its waters
into the Lop-nor lake. About east long. 96°,
at the Kiayu pass, the desert is only 50 miles
wide. West of this point lies what is called
the Desert of Lop-nor, and east of the same is
what is properly termed the Desert of Gobi.
The former desert is about 1200 miles in length,
and 4500 feet above the level of the sea, while
the latter seldom reaches the elevation of 4000
feet. The province of Kansah reaches across
this desert tract to the base of the Celestial
Mountains. Between the Altai and the In-
shan mountains, the desert is from 500 to "700
miles in width. Within this tract lies the de-
pressed valley, called the Shali-moh, i. e. sandy
floats, varying in width from 150 to 200 miles,
the lowest depression being from 2,600 to 3,000
feet above the level of the ocean. This valley
is almost entirely covered with sand, sometimes
rising into low hills, but generally level, with a
scanty and stinted vegetation ; and the water,
in its numerous small streams and lakes, is
brackish and unwholesome. This desert is an
almost complete waste, but north of Kokonor,
it assumes its most terrific appearance, being
rendered intolerably hot, by the reflection of
the sun's rays from the dazzling stones and the
mountains of sand, with which it is covered,
and which are said to move like the waves of
the sea. North and south of the Shah-moh,
there is a gravelly and sometimes rocky sur-
face, which, in many places, aflbrds good pas-
turage for the herds of the Kalkas tribes.
From the south of the Inner Hingan range,
the desert lands reach nearly to the Chang-peh-
shan, north of Leautung. Thus, almost from
the extreme western limits of the Chinese em-
pire to its eastern coast there is nearly a con-
tinuous desert, variable in width, and elevated
several thousand feet above the sea.
Rivers and Lakes. — China is peculiarly fa-
vored as to the means of internal navigation.
The four principal rivers are the Yellow river,
the Yangtszkiang, the Sagalien or Amour, and
the Tarim or Yarkand. The Yamchangbu, in
the southern borders of Thibet, supposed to be
the same with the Brahmaputra, which emp-
ties into the Bay of Bengal, is also a noble
stream flowing east within the southern bor-
der of Thibet, upwards of 1000 miles. Of
these the Yellow river is the most renowned
in Chinese history ; but by reason of its rapid-
ity incomparably less useful than the Yacgtsz-
kiang. Besides the rivers of China Proper,
which rise in the mountains and highlands of
Thibet and Kokonor, there are numerous
streams in the colonial jDOssessions of the em-
pire, which are cither lost in the Great Desert
or empty themselves into lakes, or find their
way to the north sea, into regions south of
the Himalaya, or west of the Karakorum
mountains. Though the lakes are numerous
and useful as the sources of rivers, the chan-
nels of navigation, and the means of subsist-
ence to millions of the people, yet none of
them can compare with the great lakes of
North America. The lakes lying both north
and south of the Desert of Gobi, arc in gene-
ral salt, owing, perhaps, to their great evapo-
ration.
246
CHINA.
Boundaries and Civil Divisions of China
Proper.— Chuvj, Proper is bounded on the east
and south-east by the Pacific Ocean ; on the
south by the Pacific, Cochin-china, and the
uncivilized tribes between it and Burmah ;
west by Burmah, Thibet and Kokonor ; north-
west and north by the province of Kansuh
and Inner Mongolia, from which it is separ
rated by the great wall. The great wall is
strictly the northern boundary of China Pro-
per, though a part of Chihli lies north of it.
The eighteen provinces into which it is di-
vided, are arranged by the Chinese into the
northern and eastern, southern and western
provinces, according to their relative location.
The coast of China is dotted by many
small islands, which, together with the main
land, afford numerous and safe retreats to ves-
sels during the terrible storms that at times
sweep their shores. They are inhabited by a
numerous and hardy race of men, who subsist
by fishing and occasional piracy. Between
Hong-Kong and Ningpo the coast is high,
and barren, giving little promise of the rich
and fruitful regions in their rear.
Clnnate.— The climate of China Proper,
compared with most other countries in the
same latitude, is healthy. China has not been
subject to those wide-spread and destructive
pestilences which have so often swept over
Hindostan, and other portions of the eastern
world. It is seldom visited with extreme
drought. Its average temperature is esti-
mated lower than that of any other country in
the same latitude. The climate on the coasts,
like that of our Atlantic States, is changeable,
and rheumatic and pulmonary complaints are
common. On the Creat Plain, which reaches
from the Chinese wall to the Yangtszkiang, a
distance of 700 miles, and comprises an area
of about 210,000 square miles, the climate
varies according to its latitude and elevation.
The northern part is more elevated and salu-
brious ; the southern and eastern sections, bor-
dering on the rivers and the sea-coast, are low
and marshy, and agues, fevers and kindred
complaints prevail ; yet, considering its enor-
mous population of 177 millions, it must be,
to the natives, iu the main, a healthy country.
But, to foreigners, it has proved very unhealth-
ful.
The maximum heat of Shanghai, in lat.
310 24' N., according to Dr. Lockhart, is
100^ Fah. and the minimum 24°. The ice is
not thick, and the snow continues only a short
time. In a single day the thermometer some-
times varies 20^, and the spring winds, both
here and even downwards to Canton, are
chilly. The climate of Ningpo is considered
more i)loa.sant and salubrious than Shanghai.
In the course; of the year the thermometer at
this ])lace is reported to range between 21°
and 107^, and changes of 20'^ iu two hours
sometimes occur. In Shanghai, Ningpo,
Fuh-chau, Amoy, and to some extent iu Can-
ton, fires are necessary to foreigners in the
winter and spring ; but the Chinese dispense
with them iu their dwellings, and iu some
measure supply the deficiency by clothing
themselves in skins, and by wearing, at the
same time, several suits of apparel, which
give them a grotesque appearance. They
often carry about with them small stoves, filled
with charcoal. Fuh-chau, in about 29^ N.
lat., is among the healthiest of the five ports.
Amoy has a delightful climate, its insular
position moderating the heat of summer, and
giving it the full advantage of the sea breeze.
The thermometer ranges between 40^ and
96°, and compared with Ningpo, the changes
are not rapid. The heaviest rains on the Chi-
nese coast are usually iu the spring and early
part of summer ; and in August terrible ty-
phoons sometimes occur, producing great
destruction of life and property, among both
native and foreign shipping. The latter half
of the fall and the entire winter, are the most
pleasant and healthy portions of the year, the
air being clear and bracing, with little rain.
Four or five months in the year warm apparel
is necessary. Canton, situated about 22°
N., compared with most other places in the
tropics, has a fine climate. The thermometer
ranges between 50° and 88° ; consequently
the heat, though of longer continuance, is
there less severe than at the more northern
ports. The inequalities of climate in the
eighteen provinces of China are probably no
greater than iu the United States. A good
proportion of the Chinese, compared with
other nations, attain to old age.
Soil. — China Proper is among the most fa-
vored of the nations, as to the fertility of its
soil. The most fertile portion of her territory
is the Great Plain, of which the fact_ of its
containing such an inuueuse population, is
conclusive proof. It is the most densely pop-
ulated territory of its size on the globe. The
other portions of China are to a great extent
either hilly or mountainous, though on the
banks of the rivers there are large tracts of
rich soil, and the high lauds are capable
of supporting a numerous and hardy popu-
lation.
Persons of the Chinese. — The Chinese, iu gen-
eral, are iu stature considerably below the
average height of Europeans, but well-built ;
and compared with other Asiatics, strong,
hardy, and athletic. They have coarse black
hair and small black eyes, the inner angle of
the eye inclining downwards, and the eye-
lids seeming but partially opened, which
detracts from the animation and expressive-
ness of the countenance. They have higli
cheek bones, short and somewhat flattened
noses; foreheads of moderate elevation ; fea-
tures oval ; hands and feet small ; and com-
plexion a light olive, with sometimes a yellow
tinge. But their complexion is modilied by
their mode of life and the latitude in which
CHINA.
247
they reside. Many of their delicately-bred
females might pass among us for fair and even
beautiful.
Intellectu-al Character. — In native capacity,
the Chinese are not inferior to the Europeans.
They have shown themselves capable of com-
peting with the most gifted minds in literary
pursuits, and with tlie shrewdest Ibreigu mer-
chants in trade. Their literati possess vigor-
ous and powerful minds, and the Chinese states-
men have exercised great ability as diploma-
tists. The imperial civil code is "a work of
great ability. They have a voluminous litera-
ture, evincing great intellectual attainments.
Population.— The most reliable information
accessible to European and American scholars
in China leads to the conclusion that the pre-
sent population of the Eighteen Provinces,
cannot be much short of 367,000,000. This
conclusion is the result of a comparison of the
several censuses made by different emperors,
the last of which was in 1812. This is deemed
incredible, by some distinguished scholars ;
and in many of the geographies the number is
placed much below this figure. But those who
have had the best opportunities of learning the
truth on the subject, generally favor the larger
number ; among whom are. Sir Francis Davis,
and Messrs. Medhurst, Gutzlafif, Bridgman,
and Williams.
History. — The Chinese have strong claims
to great antiquity. Their traditionary records
carry us back about 4,000 years, to the Em-
peror Yu, the founder of the Hea dynasty,
2,204 B. c. Yet China, like other great na-
tions, has been the theatre of frequent and
bloody convulsions. Previous to the present
dynasty, 20 diflerent dynasties had risen and
fallen, each rising like the present, and also
closing its career, amid scenes of violence and
blood. The Mauchu was not firmly establish-
ed until 20 years after the occupation of Pe-
king by the first Manchu emperor in 1644.
Like the ancient eastern and modern European
nations, China has often been made a " field of
blood." The armies which have been successive-
ly brought into the field, in these conflicts, have
been vast, and the carnage in proportion. No
quarter has usually been shown to the vanquish-
ed ; but death has rioted in his slaughtered
victims. Twice, within less than 600 years,
it has been overrun by foreign princes, con-
nected with the savage hordes on her frontiers ;
first by the Monguls in 1280, who governed
the empire 88 years, and were expelled by the
Chinese at the commencement of the Ming
dynasty in 1368, which held the throne 276
years. Then again was it subjugated by the
Manchus, whose dynasty dates from 1644,
having lasted 260 years. But its days seem
now almost numbered. Happy will it be if
the next dynasty shall be a Christian one,
agreeing in character with the name of its
leader, the " Prince of Peace." Happier still
the day when Christ the true Prince of Peace
shall reign without a rival in the hearts of
China's unknown millions.
There is reason to believe that the primitive
domains of the Chinese monarchs were very
small, lying mostly within the " Great Plain,"
and comprehending only a small part of that.
The dominions of the present dynasty are more
extensive than of any preceding line of mon-
archs. Until a late period that part of China
Proper lying south of the Yangtszkiang, was
in a state of barbarism ; and even now in its
southern and south-western quarter there are
independent aboriginal tribes, called Meautsz,
children of the soil, who have never submitted
to the Chinese government. Their homes are
in the mountainous regions, where they main-
tain their savage state.
National Works — Great Wall. — The Chinese,
until within a comparatively short period,
greatly excelled the nations of the western
world, both in the arts, and in internal im-
provements. Among the earliest of these is
the great national wall, built by Tsim-Chi,
about B. c. 220, which, for its magnitude, may
be classed among the wonders of the Avorld.
It was designed to protect his dominions from
the incursions of the northern barbarians. As
evidence of its original solidity, it has to the
present day resisted the elements and the frosts
of a wintry region. Its entire length, includ-
ing its windings, is estimated by McCulloch at
1,2.50 miles. Its height is from 15 to 30 feet,
being 25 feet wide at the base, and 15 at the
top ; having square towers at short intervals,
generally about 37 feet high, and 40 feet
square at the base, built without the wall.
This immense structure is composed of earth,
faced with masonry, and covered with tiles,
and extends over the highest mountains,
through the deepest valleys, and over rivers by
bridges. It is at present in a state of decay,
being r.o longer needed for its original use,
since the incorporation of the Mongul and
Manchu territories in the Chinese empire.
The Grand Canal commences in Hangchau,
in about 30^ 20' N. lat., and 119° 45' E. long.,
and extending north, unites first with the
Yangtszkiang, and subsequently with the
Hoang-ho, and terminates at Lintsin, in about
37° N. lat. and 116° E. long., being in a direct
line 512 miles long ; but, including its bends,
above 650 ; and, by its union with navigable
rivers, forming a water communication be-
tween Hangchau and Peking, across ten
degrees of latitude. By its union with other
smaller canals and navigable rivers, it not only
aids in irrigating immense tracts of land, hut
facilitates the conveyance of produce to all
parts of the empire. Though its construction
must have required a vast amount of labor,
yet, aside from its great utility, it ranks not
high as a work of art, and in this respect can-
not compare with similar works in Europe and
America. This canal was dug in 1344, by the
last prince of the Mougul dynasty.
248
CHINA.
National Roads. — " In tlie public ruads,"
says McCulloch, " and where rugged steppes
.are only accessible by means of laboriously-
formed passes, Chinese industry is fully ap-
parent. Wlierever intercourse is expedient
between any two points, no natural impedi-
ments, no labor or expense, are too great for
the Chinese to overcome." Tet, we are not
to conclude that the celestial empire abounds
with good roads, in our sense of the term ;
for, as goods are transported in boats by water,
or carried overland by porters, the roads are
generally unsuited to wheel carriages. They
are usually mere foot-paths, sometimes paved
and sometimes not.
Cities. — In the number and magnitude of its
cities, no other country can compare Avith
China. In their architecture, however, there
is little to interest or to excite admiration.
The houses arc generally but one story high,
covered with tiles, without glass window^s, mis-
erably lighted and ventilated, and often
crowded together without nmch respect to
order. Their plastering is mud, overlaid
with a thin coat of lime. Their floors are
either tiles, boards, a cement made of lime,
sand, and red earth, or the mere ground a lit-
tle elevated. The rooms are sometimes ceiled
above with thin boards, but as often, perhaps,
without any ceiling. They plaster the walls
of their rooms, but never the ceiling, except
in the houses of foreigners. The framc-w^ork
of their dwellings is simple and peculiar,
and is not allowed to rest on the outer walls.
As a protection both against fire and robbers,
the houses of the more wealthy are often sur-
rounded by a wall from 18 to 20 feet high,
commonly made of earth, capped with project-
ing tiles, and plastered on both sides. Tiicse
walls arc sometimes two or more feet thick at
the base, and, with proper care, will stand GO
or 80 years. If w^ell made, they in tiaiie Ijc-
come almost as hard as brick. The dwellings
of the Chinese, in their general form, are much
after the model of a tent. Those of the rich
frequently contain, each a spacious court, with
side rooms for the different members of the
household, and with more private apartments
in its rear. 'J'his court is the reception room
for guests, and in its back part are the domes-
tic idols. Gardens, in which there is an at-
tempt to imitate lake, woodland, and moun-
tain scenery, are often found connected with
their dwellings. The houses of the rich are
adorned with carved work and a profusion of
coarse paintings, and the door-posts of the
dwellings of all classes are ornamented with
red paper, on which sentences from the classics
arc written in large characters. Ho also above
the doors, and sometimes on them. Some of
their temples and other public dwellings are
Viist structures, abounding in carved work,
both in wood and stone ; and in paintings and
gildings ; and, in their general construction,
they show much architectural skill. But they
are wanting in good taste, being suited to a
barbarous, or uncivilized age. The streets in
Chinese cities are very narrow, the widest sel-
dom exceeding 15 or 20 feet ; and they are
often so crowded with articles of merchandise
and various handicraft operations, that pass-
ing is difficult, especially in the filthy markets,
early in the day. The stench arising from the
articles of food exposed for sale, and the smoke
and dust from the numerous cooking establish-
ments in the streets, is very offensive. As the
use of wheel carriages is impracticable, pas-
sengers, goods, building materials, and every
other article in use among the people, must be
carried by coolies. Sedan chairs are used by
many of the more respectable citizens. A
horse is seldom seen in the streets. The Chi-
nese merchants and traders exhibit much taste
and skill in the arrangement of their goods.
In the evening especially, their spacious shops,
illumined by numerous lamps and by large
ornamented lanterns suspended in front, present
quite a splendid appearance. Their drug-
stores will compare very w"ell with similar
establishments in this coimtry. There is, how-
ever, no comparison between their mercantile
buildings and the superb establishments of
European and American merchants. The
shops are often lighted from windows in the
roof.
The Chinese have a method of guarding
against extensive fires, which is peculiarly
their own. They divide their cities into sec-
tions by fire-proof walls, from 20 to 30 feet
high, made of earth, plastei'ed on both sides,
and protected from the rains by a projecting
cap of tiles. No one is allowed to build
higher than this wall, unless he will raise the
wall to an equal height with his house.
With these preliminary observations, we
proceed to notice briefly some. of the more im-
portant of the Chinese cities, embracing the
principal cities on the coast, in which there
are or have been Christian missions, and those
which have become by treaty the centres of
trade. And as the particular dcscri2-)tions
given of the capital will api)ly to other cities
also, we shall not repeat them ; as, in these
respects, all their cities are nearly alike, every-
thing, almost, being stereot}-ped.
Peking, or the Northern Capital, if not the
largest, is yet the most important, being the
seat of the imperial power. It is situated in
the Chihli province, amid a sandy plain, in
latitude 39° 54' north, and longitude 116° 27'
east, nearly on the parallel of I'hiladelphia.
Its entire circuit, including, the suburbs, Inis
been estimated at 25 miles, and its area at 27
sq. m. ; and its population from 1,500,000 to
3,000,.000. The truth may be between the
two extremes, perhaps about 2,000,000. It is
an ancient city, but did not become the seat
of government until 1282, during the reign of
tlie celebrated Mogul enii)eror, Kublai Khan,
who subsetiucutly made llangchau, his inipe-
CHINA
249
rial residence. After tlie expulsion of the
Monguls, the emperors of the Ming dynasty held
their court at Hiang-ning-foo, now called Nan-
■ king, until Yungloh its third monarch, in
1411, made Peking the seat of government,
which has ever since been the residence of tlie
imperial court. This city consists of two parts,
the one containing about 12 sq. ni., being the
northern or Tartar city, including the imperial
palace and the government buildings ; and the
other, called the southern or outer city, being
occupied by the Chinese. The walls arc 30
feet high, 25 thick at the base, and 12 at the
top, being surmounted with a parapet, and sur-
rounded with a ditch. Near the gates, 16 in
all, the walls are faced with stone, and else-
where with large bricks, laid in mortar, which
in time become nearly as hard as stone. Be-
tween the facings, the wall is composed of
earth taken from the surrounding ditch.
Square towers, projecting 50 feet from the
outer margin of the walls, occur at intervals of
about GO yards, and one of these defences stands
on each side of every gate. The gateways are
covered by strong arches, which are surrounded
by wooden buildings, several stories high, with
painted port-holes. The towers on each side
of the gateways are connected in front by
a semi-circular fort, which is entered on the
side.
Canton is the largest of the five ports open
to foreign commerce. It is the capital of
Kwangtung, situated on the north bank of the
Pearl river, in lat. 23o 7' N., and 113° 14' E.
long. It was for a long period, the principal
foreign emporium, but is now rivaled by Shan-
hai. The city proper is about 6 miles in cir-
cumference, being divided into two unequal
parts, by a wall running east and west ; but
the entire city, including the suburbs, is about
10 miles in circuit. In magnitude it is regard-
ed as the third city in the empire, containing
a population probably of 1,000,000. In wealth
it may be next to Peking. The foreign fac-
tories are the best buildings in the city, and an
honor to the distinguished nations to whose
enterprising merchants they belong. The
promenade grounds, between the mercantile
hongs and the river are beautiful, and when,
morning and evening, enlivened by merchants
and strangers, seeking exercise and diversion,
they are a pleasant resort. The contrast be-
tween the enlightened and polished citizens of
the west, and the surrounding Chinese is strik-
ingly apparent. The English Episcopal church
on these grounds is a tasteful edifice. The
city proper is yet closed against the entrance
of strangers. The populace of Canton have
heretofore been peculiarly unfriendly to for-
eigners, and their treatment of them in lan-
guage and demeanor uncommonly reproachful ;
but of late there has been a great change for
the better, at least so far as Christian mission-
aries are concerned. The immense amount
and variety of native craft in the river ojipo-
site Canton, is not among the least interesting
and surprising objects to the traveler. They
constitute a vast floating city.
Whampoa, the " Yedow Anchorage," is
about 14 miles below Canton, and is the an-
chorage ground of the foreign shipping. Above
this point large vessels cannot safely venture.
There are two floating chapels for seamen, the
one Protestant, the other Eoman Catholic.
The first is furnished with a chaplain by the
American Seamans' Friend Society, and con-
tains apartments for the chaplain, and a reading-
room for sailors. On the south side of the an-
chorage are two islands, called French and
Danes Islands, on which foreigners are allowed
to bury their dead, and ramble at pleasure. In
this neighborhood is a dense population, and
the lands are rich and highly cultivated, and
large herds of cattle are raised for the use of
the shipping, the Chinese eating little beef.
Macao is a Portuguese settlement, about 8
miles in circuit, on a small peninsula at the
north-western extremity of the large island
called Hingshan, between 60 and 70 miles
south-east of Canton. It was occupied by the
Portuguese early in the 16th century, and was
formerly a place of much trade ; but in a com-
mercial aspect, it is not now of much impor-
tance. It is, however, a very pleasant and
healthful locality. The population of the pen-
insula is about 30,000, of whom upwards of
5,000 are Portuguese and other foreigners,
subject to Portuguese ofiicers ; but the Chinese
are governed by their own magistrates. This
place is the head-quarters of the Catholic mis-
sions in China, and the seat of a college, in
which many Chinese youth have been educated
to become preachers of that faith in different
parts of China. The town is protected by
three forts, on commanding eminences, and
others outside of its walls defend its waters.
Hong-Kong is a flourishing English settle-
ment, about 40 miles eastward of Macao. Yic-
toria, its chief city, is in lat. 22° 16' north, and
long. 114° 8' east. The island, which is nine
miles long, eight broad, and 26 in circuit, was
ceded by the Chinese to the English in 1842,
at the treaty of Nanking. It is mountainous,
with little productive soil, but on its northern
side, where stands the long and beautiful town
of Victoria, is a spacious and safe harbor.
The town contains many elegant buildings,
beautiful roads, and a mixed population, of
whom, probably more than two-thirds are Chi-
nese, whose families for the most part reside on
the main land. The governor of this colony
is also superintendent of British trade at the
Five Ports. Here is stationed a considerable
military force for the protection of the British
interests in China. It is now regarded as a
healthy place. It is the residence of a bishop
of the Church of England, having the oversight
of her Chinese missions. The Catholics are
numerous. The amount of money expended
in buildings in this colony, since its session, is
250
CHINA.
thought to exceed 2,000,000 of dollars. It is
a place of much trade, and a large opium de-
pot. Several newspapers are published here.
Amoy is situated on the coast northward
of Canton, in latitude 24° 40' N., and long.
118° 20' E. having an excellent harbor, a large
native and an increasing foreign trade. It
stands on the south-western corner of the
island after which it is called, at the mouth
of the Dragon river, which leads to Chiang-
chau-foo. This island is about 40 miles in
circumference, and besides the city it is dotted
with numerous large villages. The scenery
in and around the bay is quite picturesque.
Across the channel from Amoy is the island
of Koolungsoo, on which is the missionary
burial ground, and a jDlace of interment for
other foreigners. The city and its suburbs is
about 8 miles in circuit, with a population,
probably, of upwards of 200,000 ; while that
of the remaining part of the island may be
100,000. This city was captured by the
English in 1841, and restored again to the
Chinese in 1845. The surrounding country is
densely populated, and in a high state of culti-
vation.
Fw/!c/(a».-Fuhchau-foo,that is,happy district,
is in latitude 26° 5' N., and longitude 119°
20' E. It stands on the north bank of the
Min, about 34 miles from its mouth. The
walled part of the city is about three miles
from the river, the intervening space on the
south being a beautiful plain, under the high-
est cultivation, with moderate elevations, suffi-
cient to give a pleasing variety to the land-
scape.- On the north, the city walls are near
the base of the mountains, which bound the
valley of the Min, from a long distance above
the city, to its mouth. .Some miles to the west
is also a mountain range of moderate eleva-
tion, and the mountains on the south bank
of the river also reach from a))ove the city to
its mouth. These two mountain ranges con-
verge 8 or 10 miles below the city, thus plac-
ing Fuhchau in a vast natural amphitlieatre,
thi-ough which the Min winds majestically,
diffusing beauty and lertility througlu.u.t the
extensive valley through which it flows. The
British consulate stands on a hilly eminence in
the southern borders of the city, from which
is an extensive view of grand and beautiful
scenery. From the southern and eastei-n bor-
ders of the city proper, the suburbs extend for
about three miles south-east to the northern
bank of the river. At Tongchiu, a small islet
amid the stream, the river is spanned by a
stone bridge, 420 paces long, on the north side,
refuting on 40 stone piers, and on the south
side of the island by another, resting on 90
abutments, extending to the south shore.
'J'liese liridges are ancient structures, and on
one side are lined with shops. 'I'lic intervening
island is about an eighth of a mile in diam-
eter, and a ((uarter of a mile long, and dense-
ly iuhal)ited. On the soutli bank of the river
is a large suburb of about 3 miles in length.
The whole city within and without the walla
is supposed to contain a population of not less
than 600,000 souls. The foreign trade at this
port has hitherto been small, owing in part to
the difficult entrance to the river, though navi-
gable for large vessels to within 12 miles of the
city. The native trade is large, and the float-
ing population vast. To perform the circuit of
the walls on foot requires about two and a half
hours, and the entire circuit is probably about
eight miles. This city is the residence during
a part of the year of the viceroy of Fuhkieu
and Chekiang, and of other high officers ;
among whom are the lieutenant-governor and
the commander of the Tartar troops. The
Manchus occupy the eastern section of the city,
between whom and the Chinese there is little
intercourse. Outside of the south gate is a
handsome Catholic church, in which a Spanish
priest officiates. Timber and paper are among
the most considerable exports from Fuhchau.
Within a circuit of 20 miles in either direction
from this city, there is a large number of towns
and villages, all speaking one dialect, which,
including the city, may be the abode of 2,000,-
000. In a i^olitical and missionary aspect,
Fuhchau is among the most important of the
Five Ports, and in view of its commercial ad
vantages may yet become a place of much
trade. The opium trade is here vigorously
prosecuted, and its destructive and demoraliz-
ing influence is widely felt.
Ningpo is the only important city on the
coast, northward from Fuhchau. It is situated
in 29^ 55' N. lat., and 121° 22' E. long.,
near the head of navigable water, about 12
miles from the sea. Like Fuhchau, its native
commerce is large, but its foreign trade has
hitherto been small, excepting the opium trade,
which is there also vigorously prosecuted by
two or three receiving ships, stationed a little
off the mouth of the river leading to the city.
Its walls are about five miles in circuit, and
the city and suburbs are thought to contain a
population of near 300,000. It is one of the
neatest and best built cities on the coast, con-
taining some streets respectable for width, and
many large and well furnished shops. Many
of its dwellings are of two stories. It stands
in the midst of a large and fertile plain, densely
jieopled, and skirted by mountains on one side,
al)Out 18 miles distant. During the late war
it was captured by the English troops, and
held by tliein till the termination of hostilities.
At Chinghai, below Ningpo, near the rivers
mouth, there was a Vjloody engagement, and
great carnage among the Chinese forces.
Shanfr/iai, in lat. 31° 10' N., and long. 121°
30' E., is now the rival of Canton, in the foreign
trade, and bids fair to liecome the largest
foreign emporium in China. It is the i)riiLci-
pal seaport of Kiaugs«, and lies on the north
shore of the Wusung, about 14 miles from its
mouth, and near its junction with the Hwang-
CHINA.
251
pee. By means of this river, it communicate?
with Suchau, Sung-kiang, and other cities ou
the Grand Canal ; while by the Taugtszkiaug,
it receives produce from the south-western pro-
vinces of the empire. It hence enjoys the
greatest advantages for an extensive commerce.
The city lying within the walls is three miles
In circuit, and the entire city is estimated to
contain a population of 225,000. It has, for
some time, been in the hands of the insurgents.
After an unsuccessful attack, the imperial
troops burnt the eastern quarter of the city,
which is now a desolation. The section occu-
pied by the foreign merchants, in its streets
and tasteful buildings, much resembles a west-
ern city, presenting a strong contrast to the
neighboring dwellings of the poor Chinese.
This city also stands on a large and fertile
plain, and the whole surrounding country is
occasionally overflowed, causing great mor-
tality, by the generation of noxious miasma.
Such was the case in 1849. The native trade
of Shanghai is said to be larger than at any
other city in the empire. Nevertheless, Shang-
hai is a poorly Ijuilt and dirty place, with nar-
row and densely crowded streets, almost block-
ed up with articles of traffic. A lai'ge fleet of
opium receiving-ships are stationed outside the
river Wusung. Among its heaviest exports
are tea and silks. This city is now occupied
by a larger number of Protestant missionaries
than any other in the empire, and three or four
tasteful and commodious Christian churches
have been built within the walls, in which large
congregations have convened to hear the word
of (jrod. A large Catholic church stands just
outside the walls, on the banks of the Wusung.
Nanking. — Kiangningfoo, or Nanking, the
capital of the Kiangsu province, stands on the
southern bank of the Yangtszkiang, in about
32° N. lat. and 119° E. long. Next to Pe-
king, it is, perhaps, the most celebrated city in
China, though now shorn of its former glory,
and apparently greatly abridged in its limits,
and diminished in population. It was the ca-
pital of the empire only about 50 years, in-
cluding the earlier part of the Ming dynas-
ty, the court having been transferred to Peking
in 1411, by the emperor Yungloch. It was
here that the Chinese were compelled to sub-
mit to humiliating terms of peace with Eng-
land, in 1842. It has recently become cele-
brated, as the theatre of conflict between the
imperial troops and the insurgents, and by the
latter is still held. At the taking of this city
by the insurgents, the Manchu troops made
but a feeble resistance, and were indiscrimin-
ately put to the sword. The walls are still very
extensive, making its defence difficult. The
ancient palaces have disappeared, and few
monuments of ancient royalty now remain, ex-
cept the mementos of the princely dead.
Nanking is celebrated for its porcelain tower
completed in 1430, after the lapse of 19 years
from its commencement, and at a total cost of
§3,313, 9 V8. It is celebrated also for its manu-
factures, including satin, crape, nankeen, paper,
ink, and artificial flowers of pith paper. It is
also renowned for its scholars, and was, till
taken by the insurgents, the residence of a gov-
ernor-general of these provinces, and the abode
of a host of officials and literary men, anxious
for promotion. Its population is estimated
at 400,000. Only a part of the area within the
walls is covered with dwellings. The surround-
ing country is beautified by hills, valleys, vil-
lages, and fruitful fields.
The Arts. — The j^roductions of the Chinese
in the department of the fine arts, have little
comparative merit, though a few centuries ago,
China v/as in advance of Europe. Her laud-
scape and other paintings, though excellent as
regards their coloring, generally fail in per-
spective, and their portraits want expression.
Some of their jjaintings on rice paper, how-
ever, are very pretty, and their delineations of
the persons and costume of their own country-
men, are many of them quite accurate. Their
music is harsh, nasal, sonorous, and wanting
both in harmony and melodyj though admired
by themselves. Their statuary, even the best
of it, cannot compare with the Grecian and
the Eoman, and with that of western artists of
the present day.
Though, in the mechanic arts, the Chinese
excel in some things, yet in general, they are
far behind the Western world. Their imple-
ments are few and simple, though well suited to
their use ; but they are totally ignorant of the
multifarious and powerful machinery by which
Christian nations can so rapidly and so taste-
fully perform the most delicate work, and exe-
cute the most magnificent undertakings. They
however in some degree make up in numbers,
and the cheapness of labor, what they lack in
machinery and in mechanical skill. Works
have been executed in China, which in magni-
tude may compare with the pyramids of
Egypt, and far exceed the proudest monuments
of human labor in the Western world.
. The art of printing from blocks, which is a
species of stereotyping, the manufacture of
paper, of gunpowder, of the most beautiful
porcelain, and the discovery and use of the
compass, all originated among the Chinese ;
besides their exquisite workmanship in cotton,
silk, wood, stone, ivory, and the precious me-
tals. Of what they know in the arts, they
have borrowed next to nothing from other
nations. In this respect we have learned more
from the Chinese than they ft-om us. While we
were in comparative barbarism, they in me-
chanical knowledge and skill, were equal, if not
superior to their descendants of the present
day. Consequently for the improvements
which the Chinese have made, they, under
God, have been mainly indebteil to their own
genius and researches.
Agriculture, Productions, ^r. — Next to offi-
cial promotion and iiterary eminence, agricul-
252
CHINA.
ture is regarded by the Chinese as the most
honorable, as well as the most useful profes-
sion. It is encouraged by the example of their
emperor, who, at the capital, annually holds
the plough in the presence of his high officers
and thousands of .the people ; and a like cere-
mony is performed in the chief cities of the
provinces, by his high officers, as his vice-
gerents. It is thus honored because it is the
main support of the state. Though their
agricultural implements are few, simple, and
rude, yet practically, agriculture has been
made very effective, as evinced by the unex-
ampled density of the population. Though for
thousands of years the same lands have been
under culture, producing annually two, and
sometimes three crops, yet so far ft-om becom-
ing sterile, they appear to be increasing in fer-
tility ; not only are the alluvial plains on the
margins of the great rivers carefully culti-
vated, but lofty hills are in many cases ter-
raced from the base to summit. For fertiliz-
ing their lands, the Chinese depend much on
nigjit soil, which they obtain from the cities
and villages. The manure is collected for future
use in pits, on the margins of their fields. The
rice is first thickly sown in a small patch, and
the shoots, when nearly a foot high, are trans-
planted in rows in the soft mud, and by and
by between these rows the shoots for a second
crop are planted, which rapidly matures after
the first is gathered. For their crops of rice,
especially, the Chinese, like the ancient Egyp-
tians, are greatly de]Dendent upon diligent arti-
ficial irrigation. To overflow their fields, they
resort to a great variety of ingenious expe-
dients ; sometimes diverting the mountain
streams from their regular channels, watering
first the highest plots of ground, made level
and bounded by low embankments, and from
thence descending, as the proprietor wills, into
the lower grounds. In other cases, water is
raised from canals, rivers, and ponds, by
wheels propelled by water power, by buffaloes,
or by a species of treadmill, worked by two
persons. The water is forced upwards through
a box trough by a chain of paddles which re-
volves over two axles, one at each end ot the
trough. It reminds one of the Israelites, who,
while in Egypt, are said to have watered their
lands with the foot. The Chinese gardener
is assiduous in irrigating his plants. Chinese
agriculture in general is much like gardening,
each family at the most, ordinarily owning and
cultivating but a few acres. Oxen and buffa-
loes are much employed in plowing, furrow-
ing, and rolling the ground. "Women labor
in the fields in common with the men. The
land, theoretically, belongs to the emperor ;
yet it descends to the eldest son, so long as
the taxes are ])roniptly paid. The. younger
brothers, however, with their families, l)eing
joint laborers, have a perpetual right to a
support from the proceeds of the land. Daugh-
ters cannot inherit. The Chinese beat out
their grain in the field on a board, one end of
which rests in the bottom of a tub that re-
ceives the grain. The straw is carried home
on the shoulders of men. Carts are little used,
man, to a great extent, performing the labor,
which here is devolved upon the beast. The
agricultural classes do not generally live iipon
their lands, but in villages located upon the
more elevated grounds. Fences are very rare,
the lands being divided by ridges of earth, or
embankments, which serve as footpaths. In
the neighborhood of the cities, they are paved
with flat stones, lying transversely. Some of
these walks are many miles long. The rich
jjlains on the rivers are minutely traversed by
cr6eks and canals. Over these streams on the
main routes, are thrown strong stone bridges.
Productions. — In the northern and eastern
provinces, rice is the most important agricul-
tural product, grown mostly on the plains.
Wheat may rank next. Sweet potatoes are
produced on the hill sides, as also tobacco,
peas, beans, and a great variety of vegetables.
In the southern provinces, sugar is made from
the cane in considerable quantity. Cotton,
upon which the Chinese mainly depend for
clothing, is raised in large quantities on the
Great Plain. The fruits of China are much
the same as in other countries in the same
latitude; but they are not distinguished for
their excellence. The Chinese are fond of
flowers, which are extensively cultivated in the
neighborhood of the large cities. And not
content with these, artificial flowers of great
beauty are manufactured and worn by females
of all classes and ages. Money may procure
in China almost any article of food, clothing,
or furniture that may be desired, and at mo-
derate prices. Foreign merchandise may be
obtained for about the same prices as in this
country. Compared with the price of food,
the relative value of the dollar in China is
several times greater than in this country.
But the lot of the poor man in China, who
must labor for a mere pittance, is a difficult
and trying one.
Commerce. — The Chinese may be called a
commercial people. They have an extensive
internal trade, and make large exports in tea,
silks, camphor, cinnamon, fans, tire-crackers,
porcelain, and other products of the soil and
of the shop. A vast amount of native ship-
ping may be found in all the principal cities
situated on navigable waters. Tlie merchants
are found in the most distant nations of her
wide c<jlonial possessions, in the cold regions
of Manchuria and Mongolia, far west in the
broad territory of Hi, and in the remotest
bounds of Thibet. Her ships find their way
to Japan, and throughout the ports of the In-
dian Archipelago, (.'ochin-china Camboja. and
Slam, and some few have reached Jiurinah and
British India. Multitudes of (^linese adveu
turers are found in the Sandwich Islands, and
on the western shores of the American conti-
CHINA.
253
nent. The commercial euterprise is the more
remarkable, iu view of the little protection
afforded it by the imperial government, and
the vexatious duties imposed on internal
trade. Chinese merchantmen, trading at the
different ports between Shanghai and Canton,
have been obliged, at great cost, to hire foreign
armed vessels as convoys to protect them from
the pirates which swarm along the coast.
When once at sea, Chinese vessels have little
or no protection from government vessels, and
if they venture into foreign ports, they are by
their own laws regarded as aliens. But such
is the commercial spirit of the Chinese, that
iu spite of these obstacles, their trade is of
great extent. Necessity makes them a trad-
ing as well as an agricultural people ; and
they are skilful managers of trade. Placed
side by side with western merchants in Singa-
pore, I3atavia, Siam, and China, they do not
fall behind them in the acquisition of wealth.
Some of the richest men iu Singapore and
Batavia are said to be Chinese.
Fishing. — INIultitudcs of the Chinese depend
upon fishing for a livelihood. Large fleets of
fishing craft swarm at the mouths of the prin-
cipal rivers, and in the neighborhood of the
large cities on the coast, sometimes numbering
from one to two hundred sail. Vessels often
fish two and two, for mutual aid in dragging
their nets. The rivers and lakes of China
also abound with fishing craft, and great
quantities of fish are raised in artificial
ponds. The number of large fish sometimes
taken from a small pond, is surprising.
Birds are trained to catch fish, and other
ingenious modes of fishing are adopted in
which the Chinese excel. Sharks, some-
times of large size, are common iu the Chi-
nese fish markets. Fish, botli fresh and
salted, forms an important part of the food
of the people, which they eat with rice and
vegetables. The fishermen are generally poor
and illiterate, and when reduced to straits,
sometimes turn pirates.
Literary Exarainations. — Literary attain-
ment is greatly prized in China, as being a
passport to office, and to distinction and influ-
ence iu society. In the chief cities of the pro-
vinces, the lower literary degrees are conferred
on those wliose essays are adjudged to possess
the highest merit. The themes are assigned
by imperial officers to all alike. The candi-
dates, while composing their essays, are shut up
in a large hall, and allowed nothing but im-
plements of writing ; and every avenue to the
premises is guarded to prevent communication
from ■without. The names of the competitors
are not known to the judges till after their
decision. Only a fixed number of degrees,
bearing a small proportion to the number of
aspirants, can be conferred at one time. The
first degree is called the siu-tsai, answering im-
perfectly to our A. B. The second is hirjin,
indicating a higher grade of literary attain-
ment, and makes the possessor eligible to ofBce.
The third degree, called isin-sz, (entered
scholars or doctors,) is triennially conferred
at Peking, only those of the ku-jin, who have
not been appointed to office, being eligible, as
candidates. The fourth and highest degree,
called hanlin, entitles to enrolment, as mem-
bers of the Imperial Academy, with fixed sa-
laries. The triennial examination for this de-
gree is held iu the palace. In the conferring
of degrees, great impartiality is professed.
The meritorious scholar, however poor, has
legally the same chance for success, with the
sons of the rich and influential. Yet, it is gen-
erally thought that there is much of favorit-
ism and bribery. But very few among the
tens of thousands of annual competitors reach
even the lowest degree, and of the successful
ones but few secure the second degree, though
many struggle for it from youth to hoary age.
The government makes no provision for the
support of primary schools, nor does it com-
pel the people to provide instruction for their
children. But the making of distinguished
scholarship a passport to office and honor, ex-
erts a mighty influence upon the youth of
China, iu stimulating them to the pursuit of
knowledge.
Character and influence of the Chinese Clas-
sics.— With regard to physical, social, and
moral education, Chinese authors give many
excellent rules. But Avhile they give direc-
tions as fo the best methods of study, and the
means of preserving health, and enforce the
social duties of man to man, they make no
allusion to the higher and more solemn duties
of man to his Creator. The ceremonies to be
observed in the mutual intercourse of parents
and children, husbands and wives, brothers
and sisters, rulers and subjects, &c. are mi-
nutely described, and strenuously enforced ; and
their works on morals are not without allu-
sions to a future recompense of the evil and
the good. Honesty, truth, benevolence, and
even purity of heart, in their sense of the
term, are inculcated. But their views of inter-
nal purity and of virtuous conduct are radically
different from the Bible standard. Truth is in-
culcated, but falsehood is practiced ; even Con-
fucius, their idolized sage, setting the example.
But the consciences of the Chinese are in favor
of virtue.
The classical writings of the Chinese are
chiefly political iu their bearing, designed to
instruct and admonish the ruler in the good gov-
ernment of himself and of the people. Their
influence over prince and people is very pow-
erful; and the writings and instructions of Con-
fucius, as reported and explained by his disci-
ples, have, doubtless, been the main support of
the Chinese government, since his day. (This
illustrious man was born 551 B. C.) He says
little on religious subjects ; but besides con-
niving at the popular superstitions of his day,
he gave his influence in support of ancestral
254:
CHINA.
worship, by inculcating the religious venera-
tion of both the dead and the living. Dr.
Bridgman says of him : " Through a long
life, of threescore and twelve years, Confucius
busied himself exclusively with the things of
this world. He not only wrapped himself up
with the tissues and tatters of his pagan an-
cestors, but all his energies were exerted, from
first to last, in dissuading his fellow mortals
from all thought of a world to come. He
neither searched himself, nor would he allow
others to inquire, after the wisdom and attri-
butes, or even the existence, of heaven and
earth. Creator, Divinity, and divine things
had few if any charms for him. Time and
sense, and things present and visible, alone en-
grossed all his time and all his thoughts.
In the arduous labors of collecting and ar-
ranging the fragmentary records of the an-
cients, and in repeated endeavors to reform the
men who were his contemporaries, almost his
whole life was occupied. He seems to have
felt that the gods of his nation were vain ;
and yet it does not appear that he ever was
conscious of man's insufficiency. Thus he was
" without God in the world." On the part of
his disciples, he is a principal object of reli-
gious veneration.
The Cliincse classics are decidedly superior
in moral purity, to the Grecian and Roman
authors ; but they teach the perfectibility of
human nature. They maintain that, however
corrupt a man may become through the influ-
ence of evil example, he may, by his own un-
aided efforts, restore himself to primeval purity.
Such a doctrine is hostile to the humbling
truths of the Gospel, fostering the pride of the
human heart. Confucius seems to have had
no very distinct idea of an intelligent Great
First Cause, and his followers are regarded as
atheistical in their sentiments. So true it is,
that " the world by wisdom knew not God."
Chinese Schools. — The Chinese schools ori-
ginate in the private enterprise of the teach-
ers, whose wages dejjcnd on the number of
their pupils. They seldom number over 20.
Three or four dollars a month would be
thought good wages. Sometimes several
families unite in hiring a teacher by the year.
Children usually enter school between the ages
of .six and seven. Each morning on entering
the sehool-room, the children are required to
bow, first to the tablet of Confucius, before
which incense is burning, and then to salute
the teacher. He then reads the lesson, and
the boys repeat after him the characters, until
they can do so independently. Then each
one roads them by himself, till he can repeat
them from memory, (jhinese education is a
constant exercise of the memory, until the
classics can be rehearsed verbatim. These em-
brace the writings of Confucius and Mencius,
with copious commentaries, by distinguished
scholars. Each day's lesson is rehearsed by
the pupil, in the presence of his teacher.
and wi'iting is a daily exercise. During the
first two or three years of study, they do little,
except to learn the forms and sounds of the
characters in their particular dialect, which in
most cases widely differ from the vulgar tongue.
Consequently the books which they have me-
morized are not understood. After three or
four years of hard study, they begin to be ini-
tiated into the meaning of the characters, the
teacher daily explaining a few of them marked
with red ink, and requiring his pupils to repeat
the explanations after him. The' number thus
explained is gradually increased, until simple
sentences are explained, and ultimately the en-
tire text. The constant use of the pencil, first
in copying the characters, and afterwards in
composing, gives the Chinese student great
skill and celerity in writing.
The Chinese LangvMge. — The Chinese char-
acters were originally symbols, not of sounds,
but of ideas ; but most of them now bear not
the remotest resemblance to the things signi-
fied. In the imperial dictionary there are
about 80,000 characters, composed of 214
radicals, or elements, according to which they
are arranged. Thousands of these characters
are now nearly obsolete, and not above 8,000
or 10,000 of the remainder are in common
use. But the thorough mastery of these — in
their forms, sounds, and significations — is a
herculean work, especially including the ready
and felicitous use of them in composition.
But such is the attachment of the Chinese to
their system of writing, that it would be no
easy matter to induce them to relinquish it,
and adopt an alphabetic system. The Chinese
character serves them as a universal medium
of communication, Avhich no alphabetic system
could do, in view of the multiplicity and diver-
sity of dialects spoken within the eighteen
provinces. In Fokien alone are eleven princi-
pal dialects. The Chinese written character
has, without doubt, powerfully contributed to
the integrity of the empire, amid its frequent
change of dynasties. It has likewise availed
to maintain identity of manners, customs, sen-
timents and feelings. 'J'he empire, in its grand
characteristics, has thereby become stereo-
typed, and new modes of thought and action
are difficult to be introduced. In this lan-
guage, free, bold, eloquent and pathetic ad-
dress is next to impossible. As a medium of
thought, it has great advantages and marked
defects.
The Chinese system of education, though it
supplies valuable mental discipline, yet rather
cramps the mental energies, and impedes ex-
pansive, vigorous, independent thought. The
memory is sorely tasked, while the reasoning
powers arc but partially exercised. It imparts
little knowledge. One may hold the first rank
among the Chinese literati, and yet be igno-
rant of the most common branches of educa-
tion in our common schools. Many respect-
able Chinese scholars arc not acquainted with
CHINA.
255
the geography eren of their own country.
There are men who are familiar with the geo-
graphy, and civil and political condition of the
principal Christian nations, but this knowledge
they did not acquire at school.
Ability to Read. — There is a diversity of
opinion as to the proportion of intelligent
readers in China, according to the locality of
the observer. Among farmers, fishermen, boat-
men, small mechanics, and petty tradesmen,
there are comparatively few intelligent read-
ers, though some of them are familiar with the
few characters used in their particular voca-
tions. As the result of somewhat extensive
inquiry, the writer has come to the conclusion
that scarcely one in ten of the adult popula-
tion of China can understand books wi-itten in
the simplest and most popular style. Many
read the characters fluently, who do not under-
stand their meaning. Female education is not
appreciated in China, and few females can
read.
Industry and Frugality. — Compared with
other eastern nations, the Chinese are an in-
dustrious people, though among them are found
multitudes of idle vagabonds. The mass of
the people are frugal from necessity. By their
skill in cooking, they secure considerable vari-
ety of food with very limited means. Multi-
tudes feed themselves for less than four cents
a day. Salt fish, rice and vegetables, with a
few simple condiments, constitute a large part
of their food ; though a variety of other arti-
cles may be had in the cities by those who are
able to buy.
Marriage. — Children are often very early
betrothed by their parents, sometimes even in
infancy. This is done through a class of per-
sons who make a regular profession of match-
making. And, however unsuitable the match,
when once made, it is inviolable. In many
cases, they never see each other until the period
of their marriage. Instances have been known
of betrothed damsels committing suicide, to
escape union with the persons to whom they
had been betrothed. Before the consummation
of the marriage, a stipulated sum must be paid
to the parents of the bride, generally from 20
to 100 dollars, according to the circumstances
of the parties. Their marriages are pompous
and expensive. The bride, locked up in a red
quilt sedan, borne by four men, and sometimes
followed by an immense train gaily dressed,
with music, banners, and other parapharnalia,
IS carried by night to the house of the bride-
groom, where the parties pledge each other in
a cup of wine, and the joint worship of the
ancestral tablets, sometimes joined with pro-
stration to the parents of the "bridegroom. At
the marriage feast, spirituous liquors are freely
used. The sexes eat and drink separately,
when the young wife is subjected to many
severe jokes.
Condition of Females. — The Chinese females
are very rigidly confined to the house, and en-
joy limited opportunities of social intercourse,
even with their own sex. Brothers and sisters
are in a great degree isolated from each other.
When a visitor enters the house, the betrothed
girl must retire into a private apartment.
Almost from the cradle to the grave, the
Chinese females lead a life of painful degrada-
tion and toil : at home, imprisoned, and after
marriage subjected to the tyrannical rule of an
unfeeling husband and a cruel mother-in-law,
until she in turn is allowed to domineer over
the unhappy wives of her sons. How enviable
the lot of daughters born and educated in
Christian lands !
Funerals and Burying Grounds. — On the
decease of parents, their remains are enclosed
in air-tight coffins, and for 7 weeks retained in
the house, aud every fourth day is devoted to
special funeral rites. Food is offered them, the
essence of which they are supposed to eat, and
prayers are ofiered by Budhists and Tauist
priests for the happiness of their spirits. In
these ceremonies there appears a striking
resemblance to the tenets and practices of the
Romish Church. Much importance is attach-
ed by the Chinese to the circumstances and
place of interment of their dead, as affecting
the peace and prosperity of survivors. Wo-
men are their principal mourners. To see
them kneeling and howling in lonely burial
grounds, as the writer has seen them, by the
graves of their husbands and children, is in-
deed heart-rending. Into their dark minds,
their religion sheds no ray of light to illumi-
nate the gloomy regions of the dead.
The barren hills and the mountain sides are
the chosen places of sepulture, but necessity,
in some parts, compels them to bury on the
plains. Vaults are not uncommon. Great
numbers of the dead are placed in plank cof-
fins and retained above ground for many years.
They are arranged sometimes in open sheds,
often to the number of 15 or 20, side by side,
being the deceased members of the same fami-
ly. Within the city walls, interments are
seldom allowed. The Budhist priests burn
the bodies of their dead and place the ashes in
common vaults.
Government. — The Chinese government is
supposed to have existed under different dy-
nasties, nearly 4000 years. It is a system ven-
erable for its antiquity, and wonderful for its
unity and official responsibility, from the low-
est to the highest of its officers ; the emperor,
however, being theoretically responsible to
none, unless to heaven, whose vicegerent he
professes to be. There are nine orders of civil
and military mandarins, distinguished by the
color and material of the buttons on their
caps, by the ornaments on their girdles, and
some other insignia on their robes. Civil and
military officers are on nearly an equal footing ;
and as the highest of the latter are commonly
held by Manchus, they operate as checks and
spies upon each other. Every officer through-
256
CHINA.
out the provinces, is obliged to render an ac-
count of his administration to the emperor,
through the officer next in rank above him ;
so that the relative merits of all may be
known and awarded. A general council,
composed of the most distinguished personages
in the empire, assembles daily, at the_ palace
in Peking, in the imperial presence. This coun-
cil is of recent origin, and is thought to corres-
pond practically with the ministry of western
nations. It consists of both Chinese and
Manchus, and includes the chancellors of the
cabinet, the presidents and vice-presidents of
the Six Boards, and the chief officers of all
the other courts in the capital, all being se-
lected by the emperor. Its business is to
■write the imperial edicts, and to aid the empe-
ror by its joint consultations. The imperial
cabinet is a still more select council, composed
of the four high chancellors, and two assistant
chancellors, consisting equally of Chinese and
Manchus. Subordinate to the cabinet is a
large body of officers, of six different grades, a
majority of whom are Manchus. The first on
the list of the chancellors, is regarded as the
premier. Their business is to deliberate on
the government of the empire, proclaim the
imperial will, and aid in all matters affecting
the peace and well-being of the empire ; all
concerns, from the highest official appoint-
ments, down to the lowest police court of
crime, being through this cabinet, brought
before the imperial court. Other minor duties
also devolve on this body. The opinions of
these ministers on the numerous documents
which come before them, are expressed in
writing, on slips of paper appended to the
same, which, early on the following morning
are submitted to the emperor, being read by
the prime minister, usually a Manchu, and
the decision of the sovereign is immediately
written by one of the Chinese chancellors.
Business is thus rapidly expedited. Subor-
dinate to these two councils, are the Six
Boards, the Colonial Office, the Censoratc,
Courts of Representation and Appeal, and the
Imperial Academy, making in all, thirteen de-
l^rtments.
The PeJcing Gazette is compiled from the doc-
uments of the General Council, and is to the
people the main source of information touch-
ing the affairs of the empire. Copies of this
paper are transmitted to the high provincial
officers, and without change or comment are
allowed to be reprinted and widely circulated.
The Six Boards are the Board of Civil Office,
of Revenue, of Rites, of War, of Public Works,
and of Punishments. At the head of each of
these Boards are two presidents and four vice-
presidents, in which the Chinese and Manchus
are equally represented ; and subordinate to
each of these is a large retinue of officers of
different grades. The Censoratc is, in its influ-
ence, one of the most important of the ('ourts ;
and examples have not been wanting of great
fidelity in the reproof even of emperors them-
selves, by courageous ministers. Its powers
are extensive in connection with the adminis-
tration of the courts, the provincial officers, and
the criminal jurisprudence. Ordinarily, how-
ever, no great reliance can be placed upon the
fidelity of these public censors.
The whole number holding civil offices m
the empire, is estimated at about 14,000 ; but
the dependents on the government are much
more numerous. In the empire are eight vice-
roys and 15 lieutenant-governors, each viceroy
having the government of two provinces, or
two high offices in one province. The lieuten-
ant-governors are sometimes subordinate to
the viceroys ; but, in other cases, they govern
independently. Every important position, both
in the civil and military departments, is pro-
vided with its appropriate officer, down to the
lowest rank. In theory, the Chinese govern-
ment would seem to be the most perfect gov-
ernment on earth ; but in practice, it is far
otherwise, owing chiefly to a want of integrity
in its officers. They look for gain, and are sel-
dom very scrupulous as to the means of secur-
ing it. The Edinburgh Revieiv, speaking of
Sir George Stanton's translation of the Chinese
Code of Law, says, " When we turn from the
ravings of the Zendavesta or the Puranas, to
the tone of sense and business in this Chinese
collection, it is like passing from darkness to
light, and from the drivelings of dotage to the
exercise of an improved understanding ; and
redundant and minute as these laws are, in
many particulars, we scarcely know a Euro-
pean code, that is at once so copious and so
consistent, or so free from intricacy, bigotry,
and fiction." But, whatever may be the excel-
lency of the Chinese laws, the government is
oppressive and corrupt in its practice, often
illegal in its exactions, and, frequently, for a
bribe, screening the guilty and oppressing the
innocent. Woe to him who, whether innocent
or guilty, falls into the hands of the Chinese
officials, for he is not likely to escape without
being fleeced, if nothing worse. It is probable
that as many perish in the wretched prisons
of China, from want and cruel treatment, as
by the hands of the executioner.
The nominal salaries of Chinese officials are
thought to form Init a small part of their
actual receipts, a vast amount being the fruit
of bribery and illegal exaction. Their retain-
ers also are greedy dogs, which can hardly be
satisfied. Pity has little place in their hearts,
and the prisoner, whether innocent or guilty,
is severely taxed for his scanty privileges.
Chinese legislation is defective, neither defining
nor acknowledging the rights of the subject. A
watchful and rapacious police swarm in every
city and hamlet, as spies on the people, and no
one knows when he is safe and in whom lie
may confide ; and he prefers suffoTing heavy
exactions to resistance or complaint, lest he
should expose himself to ten-fold worse evils.
CHINA-
257
But when large bodies of the people are
jointly subjected to heavy exactions, they do
sometimes resist, and inflict sore retribution
on their oppressors. Tliere is nothing like
popular representation in the government, and
appeals from iniquitous judicial decisions are,
in most cases, impossible. The judges report
to their superiors as suits their own conveni-
ence. The peaceable disposition of the Chi-
nese is mainly the result of slavish fear, gene-
rated by constant surveillance and the absence
of mutual confidence and legal responsibility.
Every neighborhood has its local overseers,
who are responsible for the good conduct of
their charge, and no member of a family or
clan can offend the government without in-
volving his relatives in suffering. This system
of fear and espionage extendsfrom the hum-
blest of the people, through all ranks upwards,
to the highest minister of the realm. In the
Chinese civil polity, there is much resemblance
to the regulations of the camp. The fact,
however, that this system of government has
continued for thousands of years, securing to
so many millions such an amount of peace and
prosperity, speaks much in its favor. Both
the Monguls and Manchus, though originally
barbarians, were obliged to conform to the
maxims, usages and laws of the ancient Chi-
nese sovereigns, as detailed by Confucius and
his disciples. In theory, the Chinese govern-
ment is patriarchal, the emperor being re-
garded as the father of his people ; and as, in
China, the father has, under certain regula-
tions, the power of life and death over his
children, so the emperor, according to his
pleasure, though not irrespective of law, in-
flicts upon his erring children his fatherly cor-
rections, even to death itself, through his con-
stituted official agents. As deceased parents
and ancestors are the objects of religious ven-
eration, so the emperors arc worshiped both
before and after their decease. This worship
is required of the high officers when they con-
vene in the palace. The emperor is theoreti-
cally Heaven's vicegerent, and the ceremonies
and objects of worship of the state religion
are not allowed to the people. He only and
the high officers to whom he delegates the
right, must sacrifice to high Heaven. For
others to do it would be rebellion. No one
can be an official In China, without being an*
idolator, the officers being required on certain
occasions to honor the local deities. In the
ceremonies of the state religion, the emperor
is the chief-priest. Like the Pope of Rome,
he sits in the temple of God, showing himself,
that he is God. The grand objects of imperial
worship are heaven, earth, the temple of imperial
ancestors, and the gods of the land and of grain.
Standing Army. — The army of the present
dynasty is numerically large, being estimated
at 1,200,000 ; but, in the late war with Eng-
land, as well as in the conflict with the insvu--
gents, it has proved inefficient. The Tartar
17
soldiers are the most reliable part of the army,
but they have become enervated by idleness
and vice. But the greater part of the army
consists of a sort of militia, who are main-
tained in part by a small stipend from the
government, and in part by their own labors.
Several times a year they meet to be drilled,
presenting, on such occasions, a truly grotesque
appearance. Chinese forts are manned with
rudely-constructed ordnance, wanting in some
cases even a clumsy gun-carriage. Their port
holes are of immoderate size. Their navy,
though numerous, is furnished with inexpe-
rienced officers and seamen, and is despised
even by its own people. The admirals know
little of the sea, and when called to meet the
enemy, are said sometimes to depute their sub-
alterns to the command. They cannot even
cope with the pirates that infest the coast,
having, at times, been obliged to buy their
friendship with silver.
Revenue and Disbursements. — The annual
revenue of China has been variously estimated
at from ^120,000,000 to $200,000,000. Aside
from the maintenance of the palace, the sup-
port of tlje Manchu nobility, who are related
to the throne, and the presents sent to the
Mongnl and Mohammedan tribes in the colo-
nies, the main expenditures are for the support
of the army and navy, and for the mainten-
ance of the civil officers. The nominal sala-
ries of the latter are small, compared with
that of western civilians. The salary of a
viceroy or governor-general, who rules over
more than 50,000,000, is only about $27,000 ;
that of a lieutenant-governor, $21,333 ; that
of a treasurer, $12,000 ; and from thence the
salaries gradually decrease, according to rank,
to about $170. As regards legal taxation,
both direct and indirect, for the support of
government, China is favored above every
principal country in Europe. And, as there is
no powerfal aristocracy in China, the money
that is squeezed out of the people by the offi-
cers, returns back among the massea,
Physical, Social, and Moral Condition. — The
mass of the Chinese, according to our stand-
ard of competency, are miserably poor ; and
yet such is their great simplicity as to style of
living, a'hd skill in making the most of their
little, that their actual suffering from want is
not great. Their system of clanship, though
the source of many and great evils, yet inclines
them to afford relief to their kindred. Living
as they do, in large families, often including
parents, children, grand-children, and even
great-grand-children, numbering, in some
cases, sixty or more individuals, there is
something like equality of condition. But
in seasons of general scarcity the suffer-
ing must be very great and general ; and
notwithstanding all that the government, out
of its storehouses, can impart to the poor, mul-
titudes die of famine, and others are driven to
robbery and piracy. Granaries are provided
258
CHIKA.
by the government in tbe walled towns, ti) bo
opened in seasons of scarcity, from which food
is cither sold at a reduced price, or gratui-
tously distributed, according to the circum-
stances of the applicant. It is a politic and be-
nevolent provision, reminding us of the plan of
Joseph, in anticipation of tlie Egyptian iamine.
According to our ideas of comfort, the
dwellings of the mass of the Chinese are mise-
rable in the extreme. They are low, damp,
dark, and ill-ventilated, and abounding in
filth. Their furniture is meagre, often con-
sisting of only a few rude stools and a board
platform for a bedstead, on which is spread a
mat, with sometimes a block of wood for a
pillow. The houses of the wealthy are com-
paratively spacious, and well-furnished with
chairs, bedsteads, light-stands, tables, cup-
boards, and other articles, both tasteful and
convenient ; but even their dwellings are wautr
ing in cleanliness and comfort, jet they are much
more comfortable than we should be in the same
circumstances. Knowing nothing better, they
think their condition an enviable one, and
would not willingly exchange circumstances
with any people. Among the lower orders
the separation of the sexes is u(Jt rigidly
maintained ; and the cruel practice of bind-
ing the feet of female children does not exist
to much extent among the farming classes, nor
among boat-women — servants are often free
from it. Fashion, however, still binds and
shrivels the feet of the daughters of civilians,
merchants, mechanics, and humble artizans ;
and when poverty is conjoined with disability
for active labor, the wretched female l)ecomes
the subject of extreme suffering and degrada-
tion. Small feet are necessary to complete a
Chinaman's idea of beauty ; and consequently
daughters can seldom be respectably married
without being thus tortured and fettered. The
daughters of the Manchu are never subjected to
this practice.
The present Chinese custom of shaving the
head, and allowing the hair on the crown to
grow to an indefinite length, was forced upon
them by the present dynasty, as a badge of sub-
jection. What was then their shame is now
their pride. The Chinese possess much corpo-
real vigor, can endure much toil, and a good
proportion of them attain to old age. Though
among the more respectable classes there is an
excessive and favorite attention to ceremony,
yet in general their minds and manners are
gross, and their conversation indecent. Their
Bacchanalian revels are frequent and noisy,
accompanied with ingenious devices to excite
them to the excessive use of intoxicating
drinks. The refining influence of intelligent
and virtuous female society is greatly needed.
Moral Condition. — Most of those vices which
are known to exist among other heathen na-
tions, prevail among the Chinese. The lan-
guage of the Apostle in the 1st of Romans,
is a faithful description of their character as a
people. The Chinese are a nation of liars,
and they are adepts in the arts of deception.
They are also given to gambling, from the
highes't to the lowest. A great amount of
spirituous liquor is drank in connection with
their food, and on other occasions, but beastly
intoxication is not common in open day.
Notwithstanding the rigid seclusion of the
daughters of the Chinese, there are probably
few countries in which prostitution is more
common and public, or attended with less dis-
grace ; to say nothing of the system of legaliz-
ed concubinage.
jf'/ie Opium Trade and Opium Smoking. —
Of all the vices prevailing among the Chinese,
the smoking of opium is the most destructive
to property, health, and life. It appears to
have been first brought to China by the Por-
tuguese, as early as 1767. That year 1,000
chests were sold at Macao. The English East
India Company commenced the importation
of opium in 1G73. In 1780, two receiving
ships were stationed a little south of Macao,
at Lark's Bay. As early as the year 1800, an
Imperial edict was issued against its sale and
use in China, in consequence of the disastrous
effects of its use. In 1809, the Hong merchants
were, by the government, compelled to give
bonds that opium should be discharged from
no vessel at "Whampoa. But though steadily
opposed by the supreme government of China,
its subordinate agents, at the principal points
on the coast, have never been proof against
the seductive power of gold, and their own
love of this poisonous drug ; and with slight
interruptions, this iniciuitous and contraband
trade has, till the present time, continued
steadily to increase. The opium is chiefly of
two kinds, Benares and Patna, produced with
compulsory labor, by the East India Com-
pany, and sold at Calcutta ; and the Malwa
produced in a province in the western part of
India, under the government of native princes,
and sold at Bombay. It pays the Company
a transit .duty of 400 rupees per chest, the
number of chests in 184G being 25,000, and
furnishing the government a net income of
£1,000,000. In the same year, the income from
the opium sold at Calcutta was £2,000,000,
making a gross amount of income from this
article of £3,000,000. In 1847, at Calcutta
alone, the revenue from Opium, amounting to
upwards of 31,000 chests, was £3,000,000.
Most of the o])iuni sold at these two ports, is
exported to China, at an estimated profit of
about 15 per cent, to the merchant. About
50 armed vessels arc constantly employed in
this trade, including the large number of re-
ceiving ships, stationed at Lintin, below Can-
ton, and at the mouths of most of the princi-
pal rivers, and in the vicinity of the most im-
portant cities along the coast to Shanghai, in-
cluding Nomoa, Amoy, Chin-Chin, Fuhchau
and Ningpo. These receiving ships are all
abundantly supplied with opium, and attended
CHINA.
259
with clippers constantly passing up and down
the coast. Including the irregular craft, the
number of foreign vessels employed in the
opium trade must be much larger than has
been mentioned. It is stated by Dr. Nathan
Allen, in his valuable Essay on the Opium
Trade, that Mr. Jardine, of the firm of Jar-
dine, Matheson & Co., being about to return
to England a few years since, divided with his
partners £3,000,000, almost §15,000,000 of
profit in trade, the greater portion of which
had been accumulated in the space of ten years.
Thus both the production and sale of opium
are powerfully stimulated by the love of gain,
regardless of the ruinous consequences of this
trade. Notwithstanding the cupidity of all
ranks of the imperial officers in the provinces,
manifested in their readiness to receive bribes
to allow the introduction and use of this drug,
the government at Peking has been uni-
formly opposed to the trade. In 1839, just
before the commencement of hostilities be-
tween England and China, upwards of 20,000
chests, valued at §12,000,000, having been de-
livered up to Commissioner Lin, at Canton,
through his compulsory measures, were de-
stroyed by command of the emperor. This
remarkable act, committed as it was in the
face of a threatened invasion, which soon actu-
ally followed, is sufficient evidence of the sin-
cere opposition of the Chinese government to
the opium trade. It has been computed that
not less than 4,000,000 of the Chinese are ha-
bitual opium smokers, and that the average
length of the lives of these wi-etched men,
after becoming addicted to this habit, is not
above ten years. On this calculation, 400.000
of the Chinese, in consequence of the use of
opium, are annually hurried into the grave.
On whose souls must the blood of these
slaughtered multitudes rest '3 In the light
of God's word, what a weight of criminal
responsibility must press upon that company
whose coffers are annually filled with the price
of so much blood ? And no less guilty are
those who aid and abet it for the sake of gain.
The emperor of China, wheu urged to increase
his revenue, by legalizing the opium trade, re-
plied : " It is true, I cannot prevent the intro-
duction of the flowing poison ; gain-seeking
and corrupt men will, for profit and sensuality,
defeat my wishes ; but nothing will induce me
to derive a revenue fromx the vice and misery
of my people." A noble sentiment, worthy of
a Christian mind ! What a contrast to *the
practice of the East India Company, and its
multitudes of nominally Christian coadjutors,
in the sale of opium ! Very naturally may
the Chinese regard with abhorrence that reli-
gion which in their view tolerates, if not en-
courages, such iniquity. The use of it rapidly
enervates, emaciates, and destroys the body,
often speedily reducing the infatuated smoker
to the appearance of a walking skeleton, and
its effects upon the immortal mind are even
more to be deplored, wasting its vigor and in-
capacitating it for powerful and continuous
effort. The bodily and mental sufferings of
the confirmed smoker are too great to be
described. His state may be called one of liv-
ing death. While he has the means of pro-
curing wholesome food, the injurious effects
of his indulgence are less powerful ; but when,
as a consequence of his excessive ^•ice, he can
no longer procure healthful aliment, and opium
likewise fails him, then diarrhea comes, and
often amid his own filth, and by the way side,
the wretched man dies like a brute. On this
subject the writer can speak from personal ob-
servation. The use of this drug turns out a
numerous, miserable, and abandoned class of
men, who subsist, while they have strength to
move, by begging in the streets, a mere pit-
tance, from shop to shop, and finally, in many
cases, perish by the way side, without an eye
to pity them or a hand to help. Numbers by
the use of opium suddenly terminate their
wretched lives, and rush, uncalled, into a mise-
rable eternity. Multitudes of unhappy fe-
males in the same way wilfully destroy them-
selves, often as a consequence of the vices of
their husbands. The misery which this drug
introduces into families and communities, and
the vice and crime of which it is the occasion,
cannot be told. In the opinion of the Chinese
there is little or no hope of the reformation of
the opium smoker ; and he himself, while he
groans beneath his chains, and hates, with pe-
culiar malignity, the instruments of his ruin,
despairingly surrenders himself to his fate,
having neither the physical nor the moral re-
solution to abandon the drug. Such is the
almost hopeless condition of millions of the
Chinese. The evil is constantly and rapidly
increasing, and threatens, like a resistless
flood, to overwhelm the empire. At a mode-
rate calculation the first cost of opium to the
Chinese is about §40,000,000 annually, most
of which is paid in silver, though of late Chi-
nese products have, to some extent, been taken
in exchange. Opium and the implements
used in smoking it are publicly sold, and the
dens in which its victims congregate now need
little concealment. The higher classes are
much addicted to this vice. From careful and
repeated inquiries of intelligent individuals,
the writer is of the opinion that opium is used
by more than one-half of the adult male popu-
lation of Fuhchau. Probably the proportion
is about the same at the other ports. But the
first cost of opium to the Chinese is only a
part of its actual expense. The officers must
be bribed to wink at its sale ; the native mer-
chants must fill their coffers ; and the prepar-
ers and retailere of the drug must all live by
their iniquitous business. But the pecuniary
loss, though enormous, weighs but a feather in
comparison with the physical, social, and moral
evils which result from the traffic. The exam-
ple of Christian nations in obstinately perse-
260
CHINA.
vering in this trade, in opposition to national
law, and in the face of these terrible evils,
tends most powerfullj- to prejudice th(* Chi-
nese against the glorious Gospel. The writer
has had ample evidence of this fact in his ex-
perience as a missionary. Next to the deep
corruption of the heart, the sale by foreigners
and use by the Chincvse of this drug, consti-
tute the most formidable obstacle to the suc-
cess of the Gospel in China. And yet there
seems little hope of their emancipation from
this evil, except througli the power of Divine
truth, accompanied by the Holy Spirit, recti-
fying public sentiment and purifying the
heart. But if professedly Christian nations
would arrest the sale, there would be much
hope for the salvation of China. Such a
course would, in the end, be an incalculable
advantage to lawful commerce. Trade with
China must ultimately be extensive and pro-
fitable, in proportion to the wealth and pros-
perity of the people, to which the use of opium
is terribly ruinous. Commerce, humanity, ro-
ligion, the good of the undying soul, all re-
quire its immediate suppression.
Female Infanticide in China. — Another of
the crimes more or less prevailing among
the Chinese is the unnatural one of female in-
fanticide. This crime is known to a great ex-
tent to prevail in sections of the Fokien and
Kwangtung provinces. The degree and extent
of its prevalence in other parts of the empire is
unknown ; but considering the small degree of
criminality which public opinion, in China, at-
taches to this jjractice, it may be expected to
prevail elsewhere, under similar external circum-
stances. Rev. David Abcel made particular in-
quiries on this subject i^ the vicinity of Amoy.
In 40 towns and villages in the department of
Tsienchau, he learned that on an average, about
40 per cent, of the girls born there, were mur-
dered by their parents in infancy, and about
one-fourth of those born in 17 towns in the de-
partment of Chiangchau. It is known to pre-
vail in Fuhchau and vicinity. A country woman
a few miles below the city, of her own accord,
informed the writer and other friends that she
had destroyed four daughters, as if the thing
were common and iiniocent. Intelligent Chi-
nese residing in Fuhchau, represent the prac-
tice as being very common in the neighboring
villages. The unfeeling manner in which the
matter is spoken of, gives us reason to suppose
that the custom is general. It is prol)ably
more common among the poor than among
the rich. Their sons they do not destroy, be-
cause they regard them as profitable to their
parents. Poverty, the diflindty of rearing
them, and the expenses of their marriage, are
the more common rea.sons a.esigned for the
destniction of their female infants. Mothers
Bcem no ks.s ready to etrangle or drown their
infant daughters, than fathers, perhaps antici-
pating their sufterings and future degradation
»f spared to live.
Religious Sects. — The principal religious sects
in China are the Budhists, the Tauists, and the
Confucianists. The latter, however, hardly
merits the name of a religious association.
Budhism does not exist in China in its purest
form, as in Siam and Burmah ; but among the
people it is combined with the early supersti-
tions of the Chinese. It was introduced in the
year of our Lord 66, through an imperial em-
bassy sent westward in search of a sage, who
had appeared or was expected soon to appear.
In Hindostan they met with the Budhists,
and returned to the emperor with several
priests, aiid with some of the books and relics
of that sect, and from that time Budhism spread
rapidly in China, through the means of its
books and the conformity of its priests to the
popular idolatry. The opinions of this sect are
widely prevalent in China, and their temples
and monasteries abound ; although few of the
people are its professed devotees. Their priests
are employed at funerals, and in seasons of
public calamity, and have much influence over
the popular mind. They derive their main-
tenance partly from presents and partly from
the cultivation of the lands appropriated to
their monasteries, many of which are liberally
endowed.
Tauists. — The sect of the Tauists, or Ration
alists of China, claim as their founder, Lautsz,
or Laukiun, born b. c. 604, in the province
of Ilupeh, and is believed by his followers to
have been carried in the womb 80 years, and
to have been born with white hair and white
eye-brows. He is represented to have been of
humble parentage, a diligent and successful
student in historical and sacred lore and to
have traveled tln-ough Central Asia. His Me-
moir on Reason and Yirtue is his only philo-
sophical work. In his doctrines, he is said to
resemble Zeno, recommending retirement and
meditation as the principal means for the puri-
fication of the soul, and restoring it to the
bosom of the supreme Reason, from Avhich all
material, visible forms are said, by him, to be
emanations. In one section he says, "All the
visible parts of the universe, all beings com-
posing it, the heavens and all the stellar sys-
tems, all have been formed of the first elemen-
tary matter ; before the birth of heaven and
earth, there existed only an immen.se silence
in illimitable space, an immcasureable void in
endless silence. Reason alone circulated in
this infinite void and silence." He regards all
good beings as emanating from, and ri turning
again into the })Osom of Rea.son, there to dwell
forever : but the bad are to lie subjected to
successive births, with their accompanying mis-
eries. Mixed with these ideas, tiiere is much
confused speculation. In his language there is
somewhat to remind us of the actual creation
of the world by the eternal Word, but neither
he nor any of the pagan philosophers by their
reasonings attained to clear ideas of the (ireat
First Cause. He lived an ascetic life, and en
CHINA.
261
joined contemplation united 'witli good deeds.
In his writings are many excellent sayings.
Laukiun's followers believe him to have been
an impersonation of Tau or Reason, the last
of three incarnations having been a. d. 623.
The Taiiist sect is made up of priests, who with
their families, live in the temples, and are sup-
ported by the cultivation of the grounds be-
longing to these establishments, the sale of
charms and nostrums, and by presents received
from the people on funeral and other occasions.
They shave the sides of their heads, and coil
the remainder of the hair on the crown, and
wear slate-colored robes. They study astrolo-
gy, profess to deal with spirits, pretend to have
found a liquor, the drinking of which will in-
sure immortality. Some of the emperors are
reported to have tried it to their cost. By
some of the emperors this sect has been much
honored. A splendid temple M'as erected to
Laukiun containing his staiue, and in a. d. 674
literary examinations were ordered to be held
in his Memoir on Reason. The Tauists are
now extensively regarded as cheats and jug-
glers. The ceremony of running through the
fire is still observed by them and by their de-
luded followers, both of whom are at times
severely burned. They worship a great num-
ber of idols, and are very superstitious. Pro-
bably Pantheism is the prolific mother of their
idols.
Confucianism. — The Confucianists are the
literary men of China. They have no distinct
religious sj'stem, except such as is comprehend-
ed in the worship of Confucius, and the rever-
ence of his doctrines. Confucius said little on
religious subjects ; his instructions being polit-
ical in their bearing, attaching great impor-
tance to ceremonies in social and official inter-
course, and in conjunction with the worship
of the dead. There is much reason to doubt
whether Confucius had any distinct idea of an
almighty, spiritual Intelligence, distinct from
the material universe. An intelligent agency
is however allowed by him and his followers to
exist in the persons of the sages, who, from time
to time, have risen up to expound the will of
heaven and earth, the male and female powers
of nature ; and with them they form a trinity.
They sometimes seem to be placed on an
equality with heaven itself. The most renown-
ed of these sages are Yau and Shun, two an-
cient emperors, and Confucius, the instructor
of 10,000 ages, to whom, according to the Chi-
nese Repository, there are, in connection with
the examination halls, 1560 temples dedicated.
In these temples are oiFered tens of thousands
of pigs, rabbits, sheep, and deer, and 27,000
pieces of silk ; all of which are appropriated
by the worshipers. His followers are regarded
as materialists or atheists ; yet they conform
to the popular idolatry, and probably, in fact,
differ not much from the multitude, in their
religious sympathies.
In the Confucian system, a holy life is not
enforced by future sanctions, and the duty of
man to his Maker is entirely unnoticed. Dr.
Bridgman expresses the opinion decidedly that
the Chinese pay divine honors to Confucius.
He says : " In their moral codes and in their
religious systems, the Chinese place Confucius
in the highest rank, and give to him the high-
est honors. There is in each one, of all the
fifteen hundred and odd districts of the Empii-e,
a temple dedicated to him. There twice an-
nually, once in spring, and once in autumn,
the local magistrates, as priests, must enter
and offer to him, to the sage Confucius, prayers
and sacrifices. On one of those occasions, in
the city of Shanghai, I was, with other mission-
aries, an eye-witness of these solemnities. A
bullock, pigs and goats, and many other offer-
ings were all duly prepared and laid before the
altar ; and then the magistrates, in their robes
of state, officiated as priests, kneeling, j^rostrat-
ing themselves, and offering prayers. Thus, in
their official stations, clothed with authority,
they go forth in public and lead on these devo-
tions ; offering to a mortal man that worship
which is due only to Jehovah. The Emperor,
his ministers of highest rank, and all his rep-
resentatives, " the shepherds of the whole flock
in all the Empire," engage in these acts of
devotion, doing honor to Confucius, not as a
mere man, but as a god. As they honor Heav-
en and Earth, so they honor this man ! "
The ancient popular idolatnj of China. — Be-
fore Confucius's day, there prevailed a popular
idolatry in which ancestral worship was prom-
inent. To no other form of idolatry are the
Chinese more attached at the present day, and
in no other worship are they more serious.
How much of the nature of divinity they at-
tach to the deified spirits of their progenitors,
it is difficult to decide ; but on the pantheistic
principle, so prevalent in the eastern world,
they may legitimately regard the authors of
their existence as constituting a part of the
divine essence, and worship them as such. This
principle lays an indefinitely broad foundation
for polytheism. Everything mysterious and
spiritual seems in their view to partake of the
divine, and hence, shin, 'lot a very uncommon
term for spirit, is the generic name of all their
objects of religious worship, and as corres-
ponding to thcos and theoi, the Greek terms for
God and gods, in English, has been prcferrLd
by the majority of Protestant missionaries in
China, as the word to be used in the transla-
tion of the Scriptures, for both the true God
and for false gods. In the worship of ances-
tors, all the pagan sects unite, and it v.as
tolerated by the Jesuits in their Chinese con-
verts.
Besides the worship of ancestors, the Chi-
nese have innumerable other objects of reli-
gious reverence, as the god of wealth, the pat-
ron deities of the various professions, and the
gods and goddesses of the sea, hills, rivers, and
other localities. From the common practice
262
CHINA.
among Ihc people of appealing to heaven in
their "oaths, they would seem to have an idea,
thoui^h doubtless a confused one, of some supe-
rior power, more to be feared than their com-
mon objects of worship ; but how much the
different deities or powers of nature, on the
pantheistic principle, are in their minds asso-
ciated and blended, it is difficult to determine.
The God in whose hand their breath is, they
do not honor. Their motives to religious wor-
ship seem to be chiefly to avoid temporal calam-
ities, and procure temporal blessings ; and to
this cud they offer their prayers and sacrifices to
their innumerable local deities. With regard
to the destiny of their souls, they seem to allow
themselves no great anxiety, except so far as
they imagine their future happiness to be de-
pendent upon the worship to be rendered them
by their descendants after their decease. The
Chinese regard it as among the greatest of
calamities to die without any sons to perpetu-
ate their name and make offerings to their
spirits, at their graves. Their fears are to a
great extent imaginary, and their hopes are
shrouded in the gloom of a dark and doubtful
futurity. Like the ancient heathen, they are
led away by dumb idols, ar>d yield themselves
to the guidance of the prince of the power of
the air, the Spirit that workcth in the children
of disobedience.
MISSIONS.
Nestorian Missions. — The Xestorians, at
an early period, appear to have established
Christian missions in China, though few or no
traces of their labors are now known to re-
main. Arnobius, in the third century, rrien-
tions the Ceres, as Christians, whom Mosheim
regards as Chinese. The Nestorian patriarchs
are said in the fifth century to have sent me-
tropolitans into China, thus indicating the
long existence of Christian churches in the
empire. Between a. d. G3G and 781, no loss
than seventy Nestorian missionaries, whpsc
names are preserved, labored in that empire,
among whom Olopun, the earliest of tlie num-
ber, was especially distinguished. The record
discovered by the Jesuit missionaries, in 1G2.'>,
in Singanfoo, in Shensi,*is the most celebrated
monument of the zi'al of the Nestorians in
China. This record is engraven on a stone
tablet, and Mosheim regards it as genuine. It
purports to have been erected in a. D. 781, in
the second year of Kienchung, the ninth em-
peror of tlie Tang dynasty ; Kingtsing. a
priest from the cliurcli in Tatsing (India)
being the autlior of the preface to the procla-
mation issued by the emperor Taitsung, in
favor of Christianity. This proclamation is
dated in the 12th year of his reign, corres-
ponding to the year of our Lord 6.39. The
preface gives the history of the Nestorian
missions in China, for 14.5 years, from a. d.
030 to 781. It eulogizes the emperors wlio
reigned during this period, and recounts their
efforts in favor of Christianity, in the building
of churches in numerous cities ; honoring
the ministers of religion, among whom Olo-
pun, who arrived in 096, was raised to the
rank of high-priest and national protector.
Some of the emperors of this period, however,
seem not to have patronised Christianity.
One or more persecutions were raised by the
Budhists and literati, and the churches were
allowed to go to decay. But in the mean time
among the priests there were able defenders of
the Gospel. Making all due allowance for the
inflated language of this document, it seems
probable that there were at this time, Chri.s-
tian churches in the chief cities of the empire.
A translation of the Scriptures is said to have
been in the library of the palace. The state-
ments contained in this inscription respecting
India are glaringly incorrect. The Nestorians,
moreover, are represented as using images and
praying for the dead — whereas they abhor
image worship ; and Christ is spoken of as
having succored the confined spirits. It is
poesible, however, that the word translated
images, may have some other signification.
But, however this may be, it is evident, from
other sources, that there were Nestorian
churches in China at this time. The patri-
arch Salibazacha is reported to have sent a
metropolitan to China, in 714. Timotheus,
who appears to have been the Nestorian patri-
arch upwards of forty years, was zealously de-
voted to Christian missions. During his patri-
archate, Sabchaljunc, a learned monk, from
the convent of Beth-oben, after having been
ordained bishop, and successfully preaching
the Gospel on the eastern shores of the Cas-
pian sea, penetrated China, and there exten-
sively published the word. On his return to
Syria he was murdered by barbarians. Others
soon followed him to the Chinese. Christians
were found in Southern China in the ninth
century, by two Arabian travelers, and many
Jews, Mohammedans, Persians, and Christians,
in' A. D. 877, are said to have been massacred
in Canton by one Baichu, who had revolted
from the emperor. In a. d. 845, AV^itsuug or-
dered 3,000 priests from Ta-tsin, to retire to
private life. Marco Polo, a distinguished Tc-
nctian, who visited China about the middle of
the thirteenth century, and there spent more
than twenty years, for a time holding a high
office in Chih-Kiang, under Ilublai Khan,
often speaks of meeting with the Nestorian
Christians in Tartary and China. In the ele-
venth century the missionary zeal of the Nes-
torians was stimulated by the remarkable con-
version of a Mogul prince, called after his
baptism Prcster John, whose subjects, 200,000
in number, became nominal Christians. His
domains are supposed to have been on the
northern borders of China Proper. His de-
scendants', for several generations, were re-
nowned for their military achievements, and
the third in succession as conqueror on the
CHINA,
263
fields of Transoxouia and Persia. The last of
this race of Christian liings was slain by
Gengis Khan, about 1202. The victorious
arms of the Mohammedan princes, about the
beginning of the fifteenth century, overran
the regions in which Nestorian missions had
been planted, to the coast of the Caspian sea,
and the expulsion of the Monguls from China,
in 1369, by the Ming dynasty, probably nearly
extirpated the surviving Nestorians in this land.
Assyria and Persia have, since the tenth cen-
tury, been ruled by the followers of Moham-
med. Christians in those countries have been
bitterly harrassed ; and the Nestorians, from
being a numerous and powerful community,
are now few and despised. Their missions are
no more. No Nestorian churches, and no
copies of the Scriptures translated by them
into Chinese, or any books of theirs, are known
to exist in China. Tet it is to be hoped that
many souls may have been saved, by means of
their missions. There may have been much
admixture of error in their teachings ; bat we
have reason to believe that the flickering flame
of true piety lingered much longer with them
than with any other of the ancient Christian
sects. (See Nestorians.)
Papal Missions. — The Roman Catholic
Missions in China began in the 13th century.
An interesting account of them is given in
Williams's Middle Kingdom, to which we are
chiefly indebted for the following facts. John
de Monte Corvino went to China by the way of
India, and was kindly received by the emperor
Kublai Khan. At Cambalu, the present Pe-
king, he built a church, and in eleven years
is said to have baptized nearly 6000 persons,
and purchased 150 children, whom he taught
Greek and Latin, and for whom he composed
devotional works. His success procured him
the office of archbishop from Clement V. in
1307, with seven assistant suffragan bishops.
He died in 1330. In 1336 he was succeeded by
Nicholas de Bentra, with 26 assistant mission-
ary laborers. Corvino in one of his letters
speaks of having translated the New Testa-
ment and the Psalms into the Tartar language.
These missionaries appear to have labored
chiefly among the Monguls, and their subse-
quent expulsion from China by the Ming Dy-
nasty, was accompanied by the annihilation of
Christianity among them. For upwards of
200 years between the rise of the Ming Dy-
nasty, in 1368, and the arrival of Ricci, in
Canton, in 1.581, we hear little respecting
either the Nestorians or Catholics. From the
commencement of Ricci's labors to the death of
Yunching, in 1736, is a highly interesting
period of Papal missionary history in China.
Ricci and his assi%iate Ruggiero were much
opposed by the government, and attempted
the concealment of their real intention, by
affirming that their only wish was the acquisi-
tion of the Chinese language, arts, and sciences
of the country. Ricci was finally allowed to
reside at Shanchau-foo, whore, habited as a Bud-
hist priest, he remained for some years, ingra-
tiating himself by his courtesy, presents, and
scientific attainments, though his doctrines
were opposed by the Confucianists and suspi-
cious magistrates. He and his associates sub-
sequently adopted the dress of the literati, left
Shanchau, and after temporary residences in
Nanchang, Suchau, and Nanking, he was
admitted into Peking in 1601, and courteously
treated by the emperor AVanleigh. Other
Jesuits joined him, and under his direction
successfully prosecuted their work. Ricci's
manners, acquirements, and liberal presents,
gained him the favor of men in authority, some
of whom he ere long numbered as converts.
Among these, Siu, baptized Paul, a native of
Shanghai, was an early, and very efficient
cooperator. His daughter, named Candida,
was an illustrious and able coadjutor in the
missionary work. But among the imperial
ofiQcers there were powerful opposers, and in
1617 the missionaries were ordered to leave
the country. They, however, maintained their
position, and by the year 1636, had published
340 treatises, some religious, but mostly scienti-
fic. Ricci, the superior of all the missions, among
his published rules, allowed to the converts
the practice of ancestral worship, regarding
these rites as merely civil in their nature. This
subject subsequently became a bone of con-
tention between the Jesuits and the Francis-
cans, and the source of much alarm to the
Chinese. Ricci died in 1610, at the age of 80
years. By the Jesuits, he has been greatly
extolled for his virtues ; and by others ma-
ligned. A Catholic author thus speaks of him,
" The kings found in him a man full of com-
plaisance ; the pagans, a minister who accom-
modated himself to their superstitions ; the
mandarins, a polite courtier, skilled in all the
trickery of courts ; and the devil a faithful
servant, who, far from destroying, established
his reign among the people, and even extended
it to the Christians." After his death, the
work prospered under the patronage of Paul
Siu, who in 1622, obtained the repeal of tlie
edict of expulsion, and arrested the persecution.
Schaal, a German Jesuit, recommended to the
emperor Siu in 1628, by his great attain-
ments, secured imperial honor and authority
among his brethren. During the bloody com-
motions intervening between the decline of the
Ming dynasty, and the firm establishment of
the Manchus on the tlirone, lasting about 30
years, the missions suffered much. In this
contest the northern missionaries sided with
the Manchus, while the Romish missionaries at
the south favored Tunglieh, the surviving claim-
ant to the throne of the fallen Ming Dynasty,
in whose family were some distinguished con-
verts, and whose troops were led by two Chris-
tian Chinese officers, Thomas Kiu, and Luke
Chin. During the reign of vSlmnclii. Schaal
and his coadjutors were honored, and converts
264
CHINA.
were multiplied iu the provinces ; but the re-
gents into whose hands the government fell
at his death iu 1661, issued a decree that Schaal
and his associates merited the punishment of
seducers, who announce to the peo^jle false and
pernicious doctrines. Schaal, though tutor to
the young emperor Kanghe, was proscribed
and degraded, and in the following year died
of grief, aged 78 years. Onbiest, the next
most distinguished of the missionaries, was
with others imprisoned, and numbers were
banished from the country. On Kanghe's as-
suming the reins of government iu 1671, then
but 8 years of age, he released Onbiest, to ap-
point him his astronomer in place of Schaal,
and allowed the missionaries to return to
their stations, though he forbade his sub-
jects embracing Christianity. The missionaries
requited the kindness of the emperor, not only
by their scientific labors, but by casting cannon
for his army. In 1636 Schaal cast some for
Shemchi, and Onbiest cast the total number
of 450 pieces, more than 300 of which he
blessed and called after the names of different
saints. On the arrival iu China while Ricci
was yet living, of the Franciscan and Domi-
nican orders, a violent dispute arose between
them and the Jesuits, regarding ancestral wor-
ship, and the proper term in Chinese for Ood,
which continued into the reign of the successor
of Kanghe, and was referred to the emperor
himself and to the decision of Popes Innocent
X., Alexander VII., and Clement XI., whose
successive decrees nullified each other. The
final decision, however, was adverse to the
Jesuits, establishing Thien Chu, as the terra
for God, and forbidding the practice of the
ancastral rites to the Chinese converts. The
spirit with which these disputes were conducted,
the pomp and arrogance of the priests, and
the interference of the popes with the laws of
the realm regarding its rites and ceremonies,
at length aroused the jealousy of the govern-
ment, and awakened a determined and bitter
opposition, manifesting itself in a succession of
persecuting edicts. Kanghe would not allow
the Pope the right to legislate over his subjects,
and in 1706 decreed to countenance only those
missionaries who preached the doctrines of
Ricci.
In 1718, he decreed that no missionary
should remain in the country without his per-
mission, given only after the promise to follow
the rules of Ricci ; and yet no missionary
could leave for China without the most solemn
promise to follow the instructions of Clement
XL, respecting these ceremonies. Kanghe's
policy was to restrain the missionaries, and
keep them about him at court, while he allow-
ed the work of persecution in the provinces.
After the death of Kanghe, in 1723, the hos-
tility of the government to the missionaries in-
crea.sed, and the Catholic faith was strictly
prohibited, except the few wanted at Peking
tor scientific purposes. The missionaries were
all ordered to leave the country, and more than
300,000 converts were left without teachers.
Some missionaries secreted themselves, and
others, after reaching Canton, contrived to re-
turn to their flocks, who were every where
subjected to severe persecutions. Since that
time they have seldom been free from jiersecu-
tion.
The character of the Catholic missionaries
may be seen from the following remarks of
Ripa, one of their missionaries at Peking : —
" The diffusion of our holy religion in these
parts, has been almost entirely owing to
the catechists, who are in their service, to other
Christians, or to the distribution of books in
the Chinese language. There is scarcely a
single missionary who can boast of having
made a convert by his own preaching ; for
they merely baptize those who have been al-
ready converted by others. He even adds,
that up to his time, iu 1714, none of the mis-
sionaries had been able to surmount the lan-
guage, so as to make themselves understood by
the people at large."
Between 1580 and 1724, about 500 mission-
aries had been sent out. The empire is parti-
tioned into Bishoprics, and Vicariates, divided
between the Portuguese, the Spanish Domini-
cans, the Lazarists, the French Society, Avhose
missionaries are mostly Jesuits, and the Pro-
paganda, whoso missionaries are principally
Italians. The summary for 1846 gives 12
bishops, and 7 or 8 coadjutors, about 80
foreign missionaries, 90 native i:)riests, and
about 400,000 converts. The schools are not
given. There arc six colleges for educating
native priests, including that at Naples. The
above statistics are the latest we have found.
Undoubtedly the number of Catholic mission-
aries has greatly increased in China since
1846. In the report of the Lazarist missions
iu the empire in 1849. found in the Annals of
the Faith, including Macao, the Vicariates of
Honau, Kiangsi, Chihkiang, Mongul, Tar-
tary, Eastern Thibet, and the diocese of Peking,
there are stated to be 33 European priests, 45
auxiliary priests, 6 nunneries for the education
of native clergy, 50 schools for both sexes,
and a total of about 50,000 ueo])hytes. If the
<jther bishoprics have increased in the same ra-
tio as the Lazarists, within the last few years,
the estimatL' for 1846 must be much below the
present nunil)ers.
'J'he Catholic church requires no evidence of
spiritual regeneration, iis a condition of bap-
tism ; but this ordinance is itself regarded as
producing this great change. They attach
the greatest importance to the baptism of the
dying children of the licathen, and make this
a'distinct department of tli^r missionary Avork.
Statements are anuually made to their societies
of the number of dying'and other inlants of the
pagans baptized. " Tiie agents in this work,"
says Vcrolles, " are usually elderly women, who
have experience in infantile diseases. Fur-
CHINA.
265
nished with innocent pills, and a bottle of holy
water, whose virtues they extol, they introduce
themselves into the houses where there are
sick infants, and discover whether they are in
danger of death, and in this case, they inform
the parents, and tell them that before adminis-
tering other remedies, they must wash their
hands with the purifying waters of their bottle.
The parents, not suspecting this jmus ruse,
readily consent, and by these rr^cent frauds,
we procure in our mission the baptism of 7 or
8,000 infaiits every year." One missionary
speaks of the employment of the sponge for
this purpose, to whose use the Chinese were
led to attach peculiar medicinal virtue, and con-
sequently were much delighted to have their sick
children washed, that is, baptized with it. The
preaching of the Gospel is regarded as a secon-
dary matter, their work being, to a large ex-
tent, ceremonial. We hear little of them as
preachers, tliis work being entrusted to their
native assistants. The word of life is never
distributed ; for its influence is feared.
Peotestant Missions. — The first efforts of
the Protestant churches for the salvation of
the Chinese were chiefly directed to the Chi-
nese emigrants in the Indian Archipelago and
Siam, with a view to the ultimate spiritual
regeneration of China itself. It was hoped
that laborers might thus be raised up who
should become the ministers of mercy to their
own people. To some extent these hopes were
realized. And when China was opened par-
tially to the Gospel, some who had been labor-
ing and praying for China's perishing millions,
were prepared to enter into this great field ;
but others had already entered into their rest.
London Missionary Society. — The opera-
tions of this society in China were commenced
in 1807. The subject had been under consid-
eration for a considerable time previous ;
their first object being to secure a faithful
translation of the Scriptures into Chinese.
Their first missionary was Rev. Eobert Mor-
rison, who may be regarded under God as the
father of Protestant missions in China. By
talent, education, and piety, he was peculiarly
fitted for the post. Having been engaged for
some 41 me previous in the study of Chinese,
under the instruction of a learned native then
in England, he embarked in January, 1807,
going by the way of New York, and while in
the United States, he received from Mr. Madi-
son, then Secretary of State, a letter of intro-
duction to our consul at Canton, from which
he subsequently derived much advantage. On
his arrival in Canton, he devoted himself to
study, at first occupying a retired room, eating
and dressing like the Chinese, and having lit-
tle intercourse, except with the natives in his
service, with whom he held a religious service
in private. He subsequently deemed it wis'e
to throw off the Chinese costume. He hired
apartments in a factory, and through Sir
George Stanton, formed an advantageous ac-
quaintance with Mr. Eoberts, the chief of the
Company's factory at Canton. Near the close
of 1808, he was married to Miss Morton,
daughter of John IMorton, Esq., and on the
day of his marriage, was appointed translator
to the Company's factory at Canton, with a
salary which rendered him independent of the
society's funds. This appointment greatly
aided him in his great object of translating
the Scriptures, and preparing a dictionary
and elementary books in Chinese. In this
work, he was much assisted by a manuscript
Latin and Chinese Dictionary, furnished him
by the Royal Asiatic Society, a Harmony of
the Gospels, and the Pauline Epistles in Chi-
nese, the work of some unknown hand, and a
copy of the Acts of the Apostles in Chinese,
which he brought out with him. He also ac-
knowledges valuable aid from an Exposition of
the Decalogue, in three volumes, furnished him
by a native Roman Catholic convert. Sam
Tok, the Chinese with whom he studied in
London, continued to be a valuable assistant.
At the close of 1808, he writes to the direc-
tors :— " The grammar is prepared for the
press, and the dictionary is filling up. The
manuscript of the New Testament is in part
fit to be printed." His revision of the Acts
of the Apostles was printed in 1810, being the
first portion of the Scriptures in Chinese
printed by any Protestant missionary. His
Chinese grammar was printed at Serampore
in 1815, at the expense of the East India
Company. The Gospel of Luke was published
in 1812.
About this time, an edict was issued by the
Chinese government, prohibiting the printing
of religious books, and the preaching of the
Gospel, followed with acts of persecution ;
but Mr. Morrison unobtrusively continued his
work, and in the same year the directors sent
out Mr. Milne, as his fellov,--laborer. In July,
1813, he reached Macao, but was allowed to
remain there only 10 days. The following five
months he spent at Canton, in the study of the
language. In February, 1814, he left for_ a
tour in the Indian Archipelago, taking with
him 2,000 Testaments, 10,000 tracts, and
5,000 catechisms.
In his letter of January 11, 1814, communi-
cating to the Society the fact of the comple-
tion of the New Testament, Mr. Morrison re-
marks, " I give this to the world, not as a per-
fect translation. I have done my best ; it only
remains, that I commit it by prayer to Divine
blessing. The Gospels, the closing Epistles,
and the Book of Revelation are entirely my
own translating." For the middle part of the
volume he acknowledges his obligations to the
labors of some unknown individual. During
this year the Company testified their value of
Mr. Morrison's Dictionary by furnishing an
experienced printer, Mr. P. P. Thorns, with
the necessary apparatus for printing the work.
In 1814 Mr. Morrison baptized the first Chi-
266
CHINA.
nese couvcrt to Pi'otestaiit Christianity, Tsae
A-kn, apced 27, after much instruction, long
trial, and a full confession of bis faith in the
Lord Jesus. This was done, to use Mr. Mor-
rison's own words, " at a spring of water issu-
ing from the foot of a lofty hill, by the sea-
side, away from human observation." He
continued stedfast in his Christian profession
till his death, in 1818. Mr. Milne rejoined Mr.
Morrison September 27, after his return from
his tour in the Archipelago. In one year,
after entering the missionary field, he publish-
ed a farewell address to the Chinese in the
Archipelago, a singular instance of linguistic
proficiency. In January, 181G, Mr. Milne went
to Penang, and while there obtained from the
government land for a missionary establish-
ment at Malacca, which latter place became
the permanent field of his missionary labors,
where he afterwards became the head of an
Anglo-Chinese college, founded in part by the
liberality of Dr. Morrison.
On the 7th of July, 1816, Mr. Morrison and
Lord Amherst visited Peking ; which visit fur-
nished a good opportunity of obtaining in-
formation respecting the country and its dif-
ferent dialects. In 1817, he was honored
by the University of Glasgow with the title
of I). D. ; and during this year he published
his " View of China for Philological Purposes,"
and a " Chinese translation of the Morning and
Evening Prayers of the Church of England."
In the translation of the Old Testament he
chose the Pentateuch, the Psalms, and the Pro-
phetical books, and Dr. Milne the remainder.
In November, 1818, the entire Bible was
completed, and ])ublished, by the joint labors
of Morrison and iSIilne, a glorious work, which
the Catholic missionaries in China have not
yet executed, notwithslanding they boast of
about 400,000 converts. Dr. Morrison also
published other smaller works. The British
and Foreign Bible vSocicty, during his lifetime
gave at different times the aggregate sum of
£5000 for the printing of the Chinese Scrip-
tures, and £400 v.erc for the same olyect
collected in the United States. In liis trans-
lation of the Scriptures, he did not adopt an
elevated and recondite style, intelligible only
to the highly educated ; but he chose language
plain and simple, suited to the comprehension
of the common people. lie says, " In my
translation I have i^iuilm] fidclili/, perspicuity,
and simpliciiij. I have pi'cfcrred common words
to cla.ssical ones ; and would rather be deemed
inelegant, than hard to bo understood. To
the task I have brought patient endurance of
labor and seclusion from society, a calm and
uni)r(judiccd judgment, and, I hope, an accu-
rat(> mode of thinking. With a reverential
sense of tlic awful resiwnsiliility of misrepre-
senting Cod's word, :i have made no departure
in any sensible degree from the sense of the
English Yei-sion ; and have not atfected to
make a new translation, or an improved ver-
sion, immediately and solely from the origi-
nal."
Those who have thoroughly tested Morri-
son's translation, as the writer has done, by
reading it extensively with Chinese of different
degrees of literary attainment, can hardly
deny its general perspicuity; and as to its
fideUtij, it has not probably been surpassed by
any succeeding Chinese version of the Scrij)-
tures. Hi^style is not pleasing to Chinese
scholars, preferring, as they do, the terse and
recondite, unintelligible to ordinary readers.
His principal fault consisted in the use of too
many connective particles, giving to his com-
jiosition an unnecessary verbosity. Fewer
words might have been used, and the meaning
of the Spirit have been made equally clear.
In 1821, Dr. Morrison was bereaved of his
wife, who died of the cholera in the sweet hope
of heaven. This year his valuable Dictionary
was completed. As a Chinese lexicographer
he performed an invaluable service to com-
merce and Christian missions ; and his name
deserves to be held in grateful and honored
remembrance. His Dictionary was published
by the East India Company at the expense of
£15,000.
In 1824, Dr. Morrison returned to England,
after 17 years of severe missionary toil, and was
there received with distinguished honor. After
his marriage to Miss Armstrong of Liverpool,
they embarked in May, 1826, and arrived at
Macao on the 19th of Sept. following.
Leang Afa, a distinguished Chinese con-
vert, baptized by Dr. Milne, and ordained by
Dr. Morrison before he sailed for England, de-
serves a brief notice. He is the author of sev-
eral valuable tracts, and has distinguished him-
self by his usefulness to individuals, several of
whom he has baptized, and likewise by his zeal
and boldness in the preaching of the Gospel
and in the distribution of books at the literary
examinations. In Aug. 1834, the rage of the
mandarins was excited against him. Two of
liis friends were seized, and one of them Avas
cruelly beaten because he refused to betray Afa 's
concealment ; and he himself, with great difli-
culty escaped to Macao, and was taken on
board one of the English ships at Lintin.
One of the tracts distributed on this occa-
sion fell into the hands of the distinguished
leader of the insurgents, and was the founda-
tion of his earliest Christian impressions. Afa
has ever remained steadfast in his Christian
profession, and continued to be a diligent
preacher of the word.
Dr. Morrison's health was not vigorous after
his return to China ; yet he conducted religious
services on the Sabbath, often lioth in English
and Chinese, and prepared tracts for dislrilni-
tion. Aliout this time, he had the satisl'aetion
to V)ai)tize Clino-Tsinp:. a Chinese teacher once
employed at the Malacca college. Jn 1832 ho
writes', "I have been 25 years in Chiiui, and
am now beginning to see the work prosper.
CHINA.
26t
By the press, we have been able to scatter
knowledge far and wide." The following year
he and his assistants, Afa and Agang, were
diligent in scattering the word of life ; 60,000
sheet tracts, and 10,000 copies of prayers and
hymns having been printed, and most of them
distributed, partly among the students at the
literary examinations. Though feeble, he con-
tinued his work in the absence of his family,
•who had sailed for England. On the 1st of
Aug., 1834, this devoted missionary was sud-
denly called from his earthly labors to his home
in heaven, having continued his Chinese ser-
vices with his domestics to the close of his life.
His last service was characterized by much
holy ardor. His remains were taken to Ma-
cao for interment. China shall yet rise up
and call him blessed. By his decease, the mis-
sion v/as left without any one to look after the
few who had been brought under Christian
instruction, and who were dispersed by the
persecution which broke out shortly after his
death. In 1835, Eev. AV. H. Medhurst and
ilt Eev. Edwin Stevens arrived in China, but
nothing permanent was done by this Society,
in Canton, for 14 years after the death of Dr.
Morrison. In Feb. 1848, Benjamin Hobson,
M. D., a missionary of the Society, secured an
eligible position some distance above the for-
eign factories, on the margin of the river. He
met with a kind reception in the neighborhood,
and the patients who visited him three times a
week, numbered from 100 to 150, and were
attentive to the preaching of the word by Afa,
followed by remarks from himself. The Sab-
bath was reserved for special religious services,
in which Afa was a bold and faithful preach-
er. The reports of this mission, from year to
year, down to 1853, represent it as continuing
a steady and encouraging course of Christian
effort in the way of medical and surgical aid
to the sick, accompanied with the teaching
and preaching of the word of life by the vener-
able Afa and Dr. Hobson, assisted by Low
Ting Shun, agent of the Eeligious Tract So-
ciety. The number of hospital patients for
1852 and 1853 was 44,366. Four weekly ser-
vices were held with the patients. Between
70 and 80 usually attended the public services,
conducted alternately l:)y Afa and Dr. Hobson.
In 1853, there were 11 church members, and
5 native agents. Dr. Hobson remarks, "With
respect to any visible effects upon the heart
and conscience of our hearers and readers, in-
ducing them to seek salvation from the wrath
to come, we are still very much in the same
position as when the missionary hospital was
opened here five years ago." Yet he believes
that favorable impressions, with regard to the
Gospel, are manifesting themselves. Syste-
matic opposition to its truths is decidedly di-
minishing, and its teachers are treated with
more respect by the rude and turbulent sur-
rounding population. In 1852 he published a
valuable work on the Elements of Physiologi-
cal Science and Anatomy, which has been read
with interest by the Chinese.
Hong-Kmg. — Soon after the termination of
hostilities between England and China, the
Directors of the London Missionary Society
decided on the relinquishment of their mis-
sions in the Archipelago, and concentrating
their efforts for the Chinese in China itself.
Instructions were accordingly given to their
Chinese missionaries to meet in Hong-Kong,
to consider the plan of future operations. This
meeting was held in August, 1843, at which
were present Messrs. Medhurst, Legge, Milne,
Hobson, J. and A. Stronach, S. Dyer, and
the Hon. J. E. Morrison. Agreeably to the
recommendation of this committee, the society
resolved on converting the Anglo-Chinese
College in Malacca into a Theological Semin-
ary, for the training of a native ministry for
China, selected Hong-Kong for the seat of this
Institution, and appointed Eev. James Legge
as its superintendent. Eev. Dr. Legge and
family arrived in Hong-Kong on the 10th of
August, accompanied by three promising native
Chinese Christians from Malacca. The printing
apparatus, and other moveable property at
Malacca, were soon transferred to Hong-Kong.
A medical establishment was also opened in
connection with the mission, by Dr. Benjamin
Hobson, who, since 1848, had been assisted by
the Canton Medical Missionary Society.
Agong and Chin Seen, who came with Dr.
Legge from Malacca, and Leang Afa, preach-
ed "in the hospital, and in other parts of the
settlement with much encouragement. The
report for May, 1845, gives a cheering viewof
the mission. During the year, the native
evangelists had been diligent in preaching the
Gospel to large and attentive congregations
in the Chinese part of the settlement. Eev.
William Gillespie arrived there July, 1844.
Ground for a missionary establishment had
been obtained, convenient to the Chinese po-
pulation, and the requisite buildings erected
thereon, and the foreign residents in Hong-
Kong had liberally respolided to an appeal for
the erection of a chapel for English and Chi-
nese worship, called the Union Chapel. In
June, 1846, two aged Chinese were received
into the Mission Church, and on that occasion
seven Chinese surrounded the table of the
Lord. Chin Seen, who had long enjoyed the
care and instructions of Dr. Legge, was ordain-
ed to the Gospel ministry. Dr. Hobson had
previously been obliged to leave for England
on account of the health of his wife. She ex-
pired on the borders of her native land. Dur-
ing his absence he was married to a daughter
of the Eev. Dr. Morrison, and on the 10th
of March, 1847, embarked the second time for
the East, together with J. H. Herschberg, M.
D., subsequently medical missionary at Hong-
Kong. Eev. Dr. Legge, by reason of ill-health,
returned home in 1846, accompanied by three
intelligent Chinese youth, who, during their
268
CHINA.
stay in England, were there baptized by him
in the i^reseuce of the great congregation.
These young men were natives of Malacca,
and were baptized in the church in which Dr.
Milne, the President of the Malacca College,
used to worship. It was a thrilling scene.
After Dr. Legge's return to Hong-Kong, he
mentions, under date of November, 1848, the
reception of an aged Chinese, and three young
men of much promise, into the church. The
latter were membei-s of his seminary. Their
names were A-chiong, Ach'heong and A-King.
Thirteen others, including three seminarists,
were also applicants for baptism. In 1850, he
had four candidates for the ministry under his
instruction, besides the oversight of a male
boarding school of 30 pupils, and the stated
preaching of the Gospel in the Union Chapel.
The native church, under the pastoral care of
Chin Seen, then numbered upwards of 20
tnembers, and the Bgzar Chapel, in which he
preached, was filled with attentive hearers.
During the year, six members had been added
to the native church, one of whom was a man
of talent and highly educated. It is remarked,
that for one candidate received, the missiona-
ries were compelled to decline many. The Ma^
gaziue and Chronicle for June, 1850, contains
an extract of a letter from Dr. Herschberg,
giving a cheering account of the influence of
his hospital, from which it appears to have
been the birth-place of some precious souls.
His average daily patients were between 50
and 60, and in connection with the medical
practice, about 100 daily heard the Gos-
pel.
In their annual view of their Chinese Mis-
sions for 1851, the directors remark : " It is
therefore Avith peculiar satisfaction that the
directors report that the New Testament tho-
roughly and carefully revised, principally by
our missionaries at Shanghai, has been printed
in that city, and also at Hong-Kong." Cy
the introduction of metal type of reduced size,
and of beautiful form, for which we arc indebt-
ed mainly to the jiatient labors of the I?ev.
Samuel Dyer, the Scriptures in Chinese can
now be printed in a small volume, and at a
greatly reduced price. According to this re-
port, there were then in the school at Hong-
Kong, under the superintendence of Dr. and
Mrs. Lcgge, 40 boys and 20 girls, all dtmuvsti-
cated amidst the habits and enjoyments of a
Christian family, and carefully instructed in the
several branches, both of useful and Christian
knowledge. In the theological class were
five young men. Since the opening of Dr.
Hcrschberg's Hospital, in Septeml^er, 1849,
3,006 patients had been relieved. The report
of 1853, represents the missionary operations
at Hong-Kong, as being in a prosperous state,
though, in Octolfcr, 1852, the mission was af-
flicted by the sudden death of Mrs. T.eggo,
leaving three children and an alllicted husband,
to mourn her departure. The number of church
members was then 24, male pupils m the
boarding school, 45, and 10 girls. In this
mission is one of the most valuable printing
establishments in China.
The London Society's mission at Shanghai
was commenced by Messrs. ]SIedhurst and
Lockhart in December, 1843, with encouraging
prospects. It was the earliest Protestant mis-
sion in that city. Dr. Lockhart, under date
of Feb. 1, 1845, states the number of his
patients, since the })receding February, to have
been 10,600, to whom Mr. Medhurst preached
three times a week, and distributed tracts to
readers. At his house he had attentive con-
gregations. In the surrounding villages, as
far distant as 15 miles from the city, they had
preached and distributed tracts, and had been
invited to large tov.us 25 miles distant. In
March of the same year, two interesting in-
quirers are mentioned, and subscriptions to the
amount of ^1,000 for a Union Chapel by the
foreign residents in the city, designed for Eng-
lish and Chinese worship. An English ser-
vice on Sabbath morning was held in the
Consulate, and there was weekly preaching in
a Chinese temple. ISIr. JSIedhurst's valuable
printing establishment at Batavia was brought
to Shanghai, and now began to be employed
in the printing of weekly sermons, and other
publications. Opposition from the numerous
Catholics at Shanghai began to appear. A
later communication remarks, " Our sanctuary
was opened on the 24th of August, (1846.)
when every part of it was crowded with hear-
ers, who listened attentively to the preached
word. Since that time, divine service has
been continued therein every Sunday after-
noon, attended by crowded congregations, who
come regularly and sit quietly to the end."'
At the meeting of the Society in May, 1847,
it was reported that three Chinese had already
been baptized, one of Avhom was a literary
graduate. During the year ending May,
1847, 34,400 copies of different works were
printed, and about 500 tracts had been given
weekly to the attendants on the religious ser-
vices, besides these distributed in the hospital,
in the neighboring villages, and on the junks
trading to Peking and other cities. The
medical department was flourishing. Nov.
26, 1846, Pev. Mr. Milne and his wife arrived
at Shanghai, and Ajiril 1, 1847, Eev. Messrs.
Muirhead and Southwell, and Mr. A. Wylie,
superintendent of the press, sailed for that
city.
In June, 1847, delegates from several sta-
tions convened in Shanghai, for the revision
of the New Testament in Chinese. After a
long discussion on the proper term for Cod and
gods to he employed in a Chinese translation
of the Holy Scriptures, not being able to
agree in opinion, they concluded to proceed
in the Avork of revision, and leave the terms
for God and the Holy Spirit, for future settle-
ment. Canton, Amoy and Ningpo, wcVc rep-
CHINA.
269
resected by Kev. Messrs. E. C. Bridgman, J.
StronacL, and W. C. Milne ; and Shanghai,
by Rev. Messrs. Boone and Medhurst. Rev.
Messrs. Johnson and White were chosen to
represent Fuhchau, but circumstances did not
allow of their acting on the committee. The
ill-health of Bishop Boone prevented Mm
from taking much j^art in the revision.
The Report for 1847 mentions the forma-
tion of a church of nine members. In the
fallowing year, ending May, 1848, the labors
of the mission continued much as usual, and
the attendance on the preached word was en-
couraging. The printing amounted to 71,400
copies of various works. In 1849, besides the
English service in the chapel, conducted in
rotation by brethren of different missions on
Sabbath mornings, there were held on other
hours of the day, three native services,
and one in the hospital, besides two weekly
services in the former, and two daily exercises
in the latter place for the patients and others
employed on the premises. In most of these
services there was a good attendance. The
colporteur Wang Show-yih was a zealous
laborer in Shanghai and the neighboring vil-
lages. In September of this year, the writer
visited Shanghai, and there spent some weeks
in the hospitable family of Rev. Dr. Bridg-
man. It was a season of severe sickness, es-
pecially in this mission, two of whose mem-
bers. Rev. Mr. Southwell and Mrs. Mary
Wylie, were there called to their heavenly rest.
Rev. Mr.. Southwell had recently entered the
field, and Mrs. Wylie was called home, after
having long toiled for Christ among the Kaf-
fres in South Africa, then known as Miss-
Mary Hanson, Agent of the Ladies' Society
in London for the Instruction of Females in
the East. A letter from Rev. Mr. Muirhead
in 1850, remarks, " In the chapel we have on
the Sabbath six services, from half-an-hour to
an hour each, and during the week we have
service once every morning, and in the even-
on the average, than from 800 to 1,000 indi-
viduals within the walls of the chapel, hear-
ing the words of eternal life." This comprised
only a part of the weekly labors of these
brethren in the preaching of the Gospel. In
the followiuo- year, the labors of the mission
were unremitted, and health prevailed among
them. The missionaries remark that, though
many are willing to hear the word, they have
no personal convictions, and like not the
exclusiveness of the Gospel, however much
they affect to admire the excellency of its
moral precepts. The hopeful conversion and
baptism of 8 Fokien men, through the labors
of Rev. J. Stronach, during less than a year,
deserves grateful mention. While engaged in
the revision of the Scriptures, he statedly
preached to the Fokien residents in Shanghai,
with blessed results.
Between April and October, 1850, there
were printed at the Shanghai mission press,
50,000 copies of evangelical publications.
The revision of the New Testament had been
completed, and that of the Old Testament had
been commenced. Soon after the completion
of the revision of the New Testament, Rev.
Messrs. Medhurst, Milne, and Stronach, in
compliance with the instructions of the direc-
tors of the society, withdrew from the general
committee for Scripture revision, and prose-
cuted their work on the Old Testament alone.
Dr. Bridgman being a minority of the com-
mittee, on the revision of the New Testament,
does not regard himself responsible for the
style of the revision, or its lirinciples of trans-
lation. This work is essentially the produc-
tion of Messrs. Medhurst, Milne, and Stronach.
A letter from Rev. J. Stronach, in July, 1851,
gives the gratifying intelligence of the recep-
tion to church membership of eight other Fo-
kien Chinese, making in all sixteen within the
space of twelve months. The latest intelli-
gence from this mission, preceding the report
for 1852, represents the various services at the
chapels, as being well sustained, though for
the most part, as usual, consisting of transient
visitors. Preaching in the temples and by the
wayside was continued, favored with a listen-
ing ear among the people. The hospital was
sustained, and the press was kept in vigorous
operation. During the year there were printed
5,000 copies of the Gospels and Acts ; 10,000
of a condensed statement of Christianity ;
10,000 of the Three Character Classic ; 10,000
catechisms ; 3,000 of Sabbath calendar ; 5,500
copies of the New Testament, and 2,000 copies
of Two Friends, making together, 45,500
copies. The preaching of the Gospel has been
the main instrumentality used for the salvation
of souls, for which purpose, besides the hospi-
tal and temporary halls, in 1853, the mission
had, in the centre of the city, two chapels,
jointly accommodating 800 hearers. This
year the revision of the Old Testament, by
ings twice. Every week, there are not less,. .Rev. Messrs. Medhurst, Milne and Stronach,
was completed. The whole number of Dr.
Lockhart's patients, since the commencement
of the mission, in 1843, is stated at 100,000,
and the entire amount of printing by the mis-
sion, during about ten years, including fly
sheets, tracts, books, and Testaments in the
Chinese language, was estimated at about
500,000 distinct copies. A boarding-school
of eighteen male pupils had, as early as 1853,
been opened by Mr. Muirhead, designed to
teach various branches of useful knowledge,
solely through the medium of the Chinese.
The native church then numbered twenty-one
members, sixteen of whom were Fokien resi-
dents, and three Shanghai Chinese. The bre-
thren, while not discouraged by their limited
success and the obstacles to the triumph of the
Gospel, yet deplore the extreme religious apa-
thy of the people. They remark, " All
around us, we find proofs of civilization and
270
CHINA.
refinement. Increased intercourse, however,
•with this world of souls, has greatly unfolded
its moral and i-eligious characteristics, and wc
see that the masses are either the duijcs of an
atheistical philosophy, or the slaves of despi-
cably puerile superstitions. Though several
systems of tdolatry obtain among them, each
with its numerous temples and cumbersome
rites, yet the religious apathy spread over all
the people is woeful. ' Like priest, like peo-
ple,' all seem utterly devoid of serious thought
and concern."
Amoy. — This city and its vicinity is one of
the most promising missionary fields in China,
owing in part to the frank and friendly dispo-
sition of its inhabitants towards strangers.
This society's mission in Amoy was commenc-
ed by Eev. Messrs. J. Stronach and William
Young, in July, 1844 ; Rev. Dr. Abeel, of the
American Board, having already been in this
field upwards of two years. On the 1st of De-
cember they commenced Christian worship in
a large hong, in a populous part of the city,
which they had previously fitted up for a cha-
pel, and here, daily, morning and evening,
preaching in Chinese was sustained, with au-
diences varying from 100 to 150. A letter,
written in July, 1845, speaks of increasing de-
corum during religious services, and of the
wide diffusion of the Gospel, through preach-
ing and tract distribution. Under date of
June 29, 1846, Messrs. Stronach and Young
speak of having, during the last three or four
months, visited upwards of twenty towns and
villages in the neighborhood of the city, some
of which contained 10,000 inhabitants. In
all these places they met with a friendly recep-
tion, and preached the word. Owing to the
small proportion of readers, they were deeply
convinced of the imj)ortance of the living
preacher, and were .shocked l)y the extensive
prevalence of infanticide. In May, 1847, the
ineeting for Chinese women is described as in-
creasing in attendance, and the truth seemed
to be producing a powerful impression upon
the hearts of the people. I3y reason of ill-
health, Rev. Mr. Young and wife, in tne sum-
mer of this year, left Amoy for England. Rev.
A. Stronach, under date of March 10, 1848,
gratefully announces the hopeful conversion
and baptism of a father and his son, the latter
aged 28, being the first fruits of this mission.
Rev. Mr. Pohlman was present, and assisted in
the solemn services. Another letter of De-
cember 6, 1848, describes the conversion of a
Chinese soldier, called Tan Tai, an intelligent
and courageous man, and who subsequently
sig'nalized his devotion to Christ amid perse-
cution from his military associates, but who,
notwithstanding his Christian principles, was
subsequently promoted to office in the army.
Mrs. William Young's female boarding
school, which commenced before their depar-
ture for England, in July, 1846, was resumed
soon after their return, in the fall of 1848.
On the 1st of November, 1849, it contained
six boarders and nine day scholars, and funds
only were wanting, indefinitely to increase the
number of pupils. Besides studying the Chi-
nese character, they were then learning to
read their mother tongue, through the medium
of the Roman letters. In 1851, this school
had thirteen boarders and seven day scholars.
The Chinese boys' boarding school, under the
care of Rev. A. Stronach, then contained eight
pupils, whose studies included the Chinese
classics, the English language, and the careful
reading of the Holy Scriptures. Rev. T. Gil-
fillan joined this mission in March, 1850, but
within about two years returned to England.
On the first Sabbath in January, 1852, two
other Chinese were added to the church.
Two of the church members were employ-
ed, as colporteurs. A joint prayei'-meeting of
the mission churches of the L. M. S. and of
the American Board had been established by
a voluntary movement of the native Chris-
tians. In 185:-5, a spirit of active piety per-
vaded the native church, and ten individuals
were candidates for baptism, three of whom
were expected soon to be admitted into the
church.
TABULAR VIEW.
STATIONS.
•6
a
o
a
c
6
a
a
^^
II
o
.i3
a
'A
a
o .3
w
i
o
w
s
a
p<
g
3
e
to
c
•-3
ll
J5
t4
o
.a
So
1
a
? a
"A
Canton . . . .
Hong Kong . .
Shanghai . . .
Amoy ....
1807
1843
184.3
1844
2
4
3
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
45
18
10
1
1
10
15
5
11
24
21
8
Totals . . .
9
4
3
3
1
7
3
73
2
25
5
04
CHINA.
271
American Board. — The following account
of the origin of American Missions in China
has been kindly furnished us by Rev. Joshua
Leavitt, who was, at the time, Correspond-
ing Secretary of the American Seamen's Friend
Society :
After the lamented decease of Dr. Milne,
Dr. Morrison was left for several years to labor
alone, and without the solace of any Christian
society that would sympathize in his work. At
length, a kind Providence sent to Canton a
true brother, in the person of the late excellent
David W. C. Olyphant, Esq., who went to
China in a mercantile capacity, in connection
first with the house of 'J'homas H. Smith &
Co., and afterwards with that of Talbot & Co.
Mr. Olyphant entered deeply into the situation
and plans of Dr. Morrison. Together they es-
tablished the monthly concert of prayer — the
first on the eastern coast of Asia. As the
London Missionary Society delayed year after
year, the sending of additional helpers, Mr.
Olyphant suggested that an appeal should be
made to the American churches to enter into
the work. A joint letter was actually forward-
ed to Dr. Spring, and some publications were
made through the New York Observer ; but
up to the year 1829, nothing effectual had been
done in the matter.
In the summer of 1828, the American Sea-
men's Friend Society went into operation.
Shortly afterwards, the acting secretary came
into possession of communications, and a small
collection of publications, which had been for-
warded by Mr. Olyphant to his friend Mr.
George Douglass of New York, who was also,
like himself, a Baltimorean. Among the pub-
lications were some accounts, by Dr. Milne,
of his explorations among the ancient Dutch
churches in the island of Java, as well as his-
torical sketches of the movements in China.
The perusal of all these documents produced a
strong desire to see the American church en-
listed in the evangelization of China. A labor-
ed article on the subject was published in the
Christian Spectator. One of the plans suggest-
ed was, that the Seamen's Friend Society should
make a beginning, by sending out a chaplain
for the numerous body of American and J]ng-
lish sailors in the port of Canton, who might
after a while become qualified to preach to the
Chinese. Another suggestion was, that by a
mission to Java, the Reformed Dutch churches
in this country, who were then doing but little
for missions, might be aroused to a zealous co-
oj^eration in the work.
In February, 1829, the executive committee
of the A. S. F. S., formally resolved to estab-
lish a mission at Canton, as soon as the proper
man could be found. In September, of that
year, Mr. Olyphant wrote to the Society at
New York, and simultaneously to the Ameri-
can Board at Boston, that the good ship Ro-
man, Captain Lavender, belonging to him,
would sail for Canton early iu October, and if
a missionary could be sent out in her, the pas-
sage should be free. Mr. Evarts went at once
to Andover, and there found Elijah C. Bridg-
man, a young man who had just finished hia
theological studies, and was still undecided as
to his future field of labor. Mr. Bridgman was
so much impressed by the providential aspect
of the call, that he at once resolved to respond
to it and devote his life to China, and he there-
upon went to his native place, Belchertown,
Mass., and was ordained as a missionary to
the heathen.
On the same day that Mr. Evarts went to
Andover, the Seamen's Secretai'y was led,
through a suggestion from John Nitchie, Esq.,
to make a proposition to the Rev. David Abeel,
a zealous young clergyman of the Reformed
Dutch Church, who had just returned to his
father's house in New Brunswick, N. J., hav-
ing resigned his parochial charge at Athens,
N. Y., on account of the delicate state of his
health. He also gave a favorable response,
and in less than two weeks from the day the
application was made, both the missionaries
arrived in New York on the same day, and
prepared to embark for China. Mr. Abeel re-
mained about a year iu the service of the Sea-
men's Friend Society, and then, as had been
at first proposed, transferred his services to
the American Board, under whom he visited
Java and other eastern countries. He was
succeeded as Seamen's Chaplain by Rev. Edwin
Stevens, a tutor in Yale College, whose inter-
est in behalf of China originated from the
perusal of the article in the Christian Specta-
tor. Dr. Bridgman still remains in China, and
is acknowledged to be the most accomplished
and learned Chinese scholar of the age. — J. L.
Canton. — JNlr. Abeel, having connected him-
self with the Board as their missionary, made
exploring tours to Java, Singapore, and Siam.
Mr. Bridgman entered at once on the study
of the Chinese. He also became editor of the
Chinese Repository, which was established in
May, 1831, a post which he continued to hold
for 16 years. Preaching to foreign residents,
also, continued for many years to form a prom-
inent part of his work. He had under instruc-
tion a number of Chinese youth, among whom
was a son of Leang Afa ; and part of his
time was devoted to the distribution of books,
and personal convei'sation with the natives.
A printing-press, types, and ofiQce furniture,
were presented to this mission by the Bleecker
street Church and Society, New York, and
called the " Bruin press," in memory of their
former pastor.
The mission was reinforced by the arri-
val of Rev. Ira Tracy, and Mr. S. Wells Wil-
liams, October 26, 1833, and of Rev. Peter
Parker, M. D., June 3, 1834. Mr. Williams
took charge of the printing-press, giving him-
self also to the study of the Canton dialect.
Rev. Mr. Tracy soon left to establish a mis-
sion at Singapore. Rev. Edward Stroms, who
272
CHINA.
had been employed as Seamen's Chaplain, while
acquiring the language, was now a missionary
of the Board, and in 1834, he accompanied
Eev. C. Gutzlaff, and a gentleman from Ben-
gal, on a tour, with the intention of visiting
the tea plantations in Fokein. On the 6th of
May they reached the mouth of the Min,
which leads to Fuhchau. After proceeding
up the river, unmolested, four days, they were
suddenly fired upon, on the morning of the 5th,
by the soldiers on both sides of the river. Two
of their men were slightly wounded, and they
were compelled to return. This was the first
visit of any Protestant missionary in this re-
gion. In August, 1835, Messrs. Medhurst and
Stroms proceeded northward to Shantung, in
the American brig Hudson, with a cargo, con-
sisting of a few bags of rice, and 20,000 vo-
lumes of Christian books. They visited
Shanghai, aud a number of villages on the
coast, and distributed many thousand books to
eager multitudes. They returned in safety,
after an absence of two months. This vessel
carried no opium.
Mr. Williams was at Macao, in 1836, print-
ing Mr. Medhurst's dictionary. Dr. Parker,
having visited the United States, returned in
September to Canton, and opened a dispen-
sary, to which great numbers of ophthalmic
and other patients resorted. Mr. Stroms, being
on a missionary voyage in the Indian Archi-
pelago, was suddenly called away by death at
Singapore, January 5, 1837.
In 1838, Mr. Williams was still at Macao,
studying the Chinese and Japanese languages.
This year, Messrs. King, Parker, Gutzlafl" and
Williams undertook a voyage to Jeddo, in the
ship Morrison, to return to their country seven
shipwrecked Japanese, and also to ascertain
^whether there was any ojiening for Christian
intercourse with Japan. But the shipwrecked
Japanese were not permitted to land, and the
vessel was subjected to a brisk cannonade,
both at Jeddo and Kagosima Bay, and with
difficulty escaped. They embarked on this
voyage July 3, and returned to Macao Au-
gust 29.
Rev. Mr. Abeel, who had returned to the Uni-
ted States in 1 833, on account of his health,
rejoined the mission in Feb. 1 839 ; aud AVm. B.
Diver, M. D., arrived in September following.
It was during this year that the Chinese go-
vernment took those vigorous measuresf at
Canton to suppress the opium traffic, which re-
sulted in the war with England. The disturb-
ances at Canton interrupted the operations of
the mission, and the hospital was temporarily
closed, having, previous to this time, given aid
to 6,540 patients. A revised edition of the
New Testament, prepared in part by Mr.
Bridgman, had already been printed in Sing-
apore, and, to some extent, distributed in Can-
ton. 1 )r. Parker took this opjx.rtunity to visit
the United States and Fngland, and plead tlie
cause of Christian philanthropy. He return-
ed again to his work in 1842. Rev. Dyer
Ball, M. D., having been obliged to leave .Sin-
gapore on account of the health of his wife, re-
moved to China. He remained at Macao till
the close of the war ; after which, he joined
Dr. Bridgman, at Hong-Kong, which had
been ceded to England by the treaty of Nan-
king, in 1842. Here mission premises were
erected on land appropriated for the purpose
by the government, and missionary operations
were steadily prosecuted in the several depart-
ments of preaching, printing, and tract distri-
bution, and the healing art for about three
years. Here Mrs. Ball died in 1844. In
the summer of 1845, the brethren left
Hong-Kong, and resumed the partially sus-
pended missionary operations at Canton.
In 1845, Mr. James Bridgman, who had
been connected with the Mission High School,
became an assistant missionary of the Board,
and was subsequently ordained at Canton.
In June, 1846, Dr. Bridgman was married
to Miss Eliza Gillett, a member of the American
Episcopal Mission ; and Dr. Ball was subso-
quently married to Miss Robertson from Scotr
land. On the return of the missionaries to
Canton, a strong prejudice against foreign
teachers was found to exist ; but in the hos-
pital there was an encouraging field of labor,
where the word might be sometimes addressed
to 100 souls. The missionaries, however, were
much restricted, being obliged mostly to live
within the limits of the foreign factories. In
1846, a party, consisting of Messrs. Bridgman,
Pohlman, and Bonuey, with Mrs. Bridgman,
while passing under a bridge in a boat, nar-
rowly escaped with their lives from a shower
of stones thrown upon them from the bridge,
by an infuriated mob. Mr. Bonney had for-
merly been a teacher in the Morrison School ;
but in 1846, he became an assistant mission-
ary of the Board, and has since been a devoted
laborer, in preaching, teaching, and distribut-
ing books.
Dr. Ball superiptended the Chinese printing,
dispensed medicine statedly to the sick, kept a
boarding-school of eleven pupils, and conduci>-
ed a Chinese service in his own house on the
Sal)bath, where an interesting audience con-
vened. Dr. Bridgnian's time was divided be-
tween the Repository, the revision of the
Scriptures, the preaching of the AYord at the
hospital, and occasionally to Dr. Ball's con-
gregation, and the instruction of an interest-
ing Bible class, two of whom gave increasing
evidence of piety, and five of whom desired to
profess Christianity. ISIrs. Jlridgman had a
promising school of Chinese youth under her
tuition. Rev. Dr. Parker having accepted
the a])pointment of Secretary of Legation to
the United States Embassy, his connection
with the Board was consequently dissolved in
1847. Almost from the first the Hospital had
been sustained independently of the Board.
His labors continue much as heretofore.
CHINA.
273
Dr. Bridgman thus speaks of the moral char-
acter of the people, after 16 years continuous
residence in China : " The longer I live in this
country the more do I see of the wickedness
of this people ; the more do I see the necessity
of great cftbrts to bring them to a knowledge
of the truth. The gfeat bulk of the people
know not God nor his truth. They are the
willing servants of sin ; they love unrighteous-
ness, and there is no wickedness which they
will_ not commit. All that Paul said of the
ancient heathen is true of the Chinese, and
true to an extent that is dreadful. Their in-
most soul, their very conscience seems to be
seared, dead, so insensible, that they are, as re-
gards a future life, like the beasts that per-
ish. It often fills my heart with inexpressi-
ble sorrow to see what I see, to hear what I
hear. It is truly a great valley of death, of
putrefaction, of living death. No painting,
no imagination can portray, and lay open be-
fore the Christian world, the awful sins, the
horrible abominations which fill the laud."
The writer's experience of about 18 years
among them confirms his description.
With the approval of the Committee, Mr.
Williams returned to this country in 1846,
and while here published his " Middle King-
dom," one of the most valuable works that
have been issued upon that country. He re-
turned to his post in 1848.
In March, 1847, Dr. Ball secured a house by
the river side, about a mile and a half below
the factory, and there soon after opened pub-
lic worship in Chinese, with an audience of
from 60 to 100. In July a meeting for females
was commenced by Mrs. Ball and her daugh-
ter, now Mrs. Hopper, which was at times
attended by 30 or 40. This movement was
an important advance in regard to missionary
liberty.
The Report for 1848 acknowledges the print-
ing of 10,000 copies of tracts by Milne, Abeel,
and Afa, at the expense of Rev. Dr. Parker.
The word of life was everywhere dispens'ed
among the people. One member of Dr. Bridg-
man's Bible-class had been baptized, and ano-
ther gave much evidence of piety. On the 1st
of June, 1847, he removed to Shanghai, to aid
in the revision of the New Testament. Since
that time the general course of missionary
labor has been essentially the same from year
to year. The missionaries in that field have
been enabled to maintain their ground, and
gradually, by private teaching, by the diligent
preaching of the Gospel in stated places and bv
the wayside, by the healing of the sick, and the
manifestation of a uniform spirit of love to the
people, to dissipate their bitter prejudices, and
win their confidence and respect. For a time
Mr. Bonney labored with much encouragement
at Whampoa, and widely preached and dis-
persed among the numerous villages the word
of salvation. Dr. Ball's school, in 1849, num-
bered 14 boys, who, in addition to the study
18
of their own classics, were instructed in geo-
graphy, astronomy, natural philosophy, and
the truths of the Bible, through the medium
of the Chinese. The Chinese Repository was
suspended at the close of 1850, after having
reached its 19th volume. In December, 1850,
this mission was afflicted by the death of Rev,
James G. Bridgman, occasioned by a wound
inflicted upon himself in a fit of temporary in-
sanity, connected with greatly impaired health.
He survived the wound but a few days. In
1850 Mrs. Bridgman had an interesting girls'
school of 20 scholars at Shanghai, 12 of whom
were boarders. In 1852 two Chinese at Can-
ton are reported as furnishing good evidence
of piety, and Dr. Ball's school had amounted
to 20 pupils.
On the 15th of March, 1852> the mission was
reinforced by the arrival of Rev. Daniel Vroo-
man and wife. Rev. Frederick Brewster and
wife arrived at Canton, January, 1853, and on
the 27th of the same month our beloved bro-
ther died of the small pox. His last words
were, " Trusting in Jesus." The afiBicted widow
remains in the field. Early in 1852, Dr. Bridg-
man visited this country on account of his
health, after an absence of about 23 years;
and on the 11th of October, he re-embarked
at New York for China. Dr. Bridgman is
still at Shanghai, engaged in the revision of
the Old Testament. On the 12th of September,
1853, the native helper, Theen Fae, died in
the hopes of the Gospel. Lai Sun, the other
native helper, has left the mission. Mr. Wil-
liams, besides his other duties, has performed
a valuable service to the cause in the prepara-
tion of the Easy Lessons in Chinese, and a
Chinese and English Vocabulary of the Can-
ton dialect. In May, 1853, with the concur-
rence of the mission, he left for Japan, as
interpreter to Commodore Perry, and returned
in August. Dr. Ball's health was feeble, but he
was still engaged in the way of tours for tract
distribution, trying to regain his strength, and
to extend the savor of Christ's name ; and
Messrs. Bonney and Vrooman had made a
tour up the river, 36 miles, for tract distribu-
tion, and were well received. Since 1846,
14,257,690 pages of tracts and scriptures, be-
sides 225,120 volumes of religious matter, are
reported as printed by this mission ; and this
probably falls much short of the entire amount
of printing done by it during the past eight
years. How much printed matter has been
scattered far and near by the mission since its
commencement in 1830, we have no means of
determining. It must have been very great.
In the religious movement connected with the
present revolution, we are probably now seeing
the eSects both of the preaching of the Gospel
at Canton, and the distribution of the printed
page. _ By the grace of God this mission, in
the midst of great difficulties and discourage-
ments, has labored and has not fainted. A
brighter day shall yet dawn on it from on high.
274
CHINA.
Amoij. — This mission began with the arrival
at Amoy of Eev. David Abeel, in February,
1842, while the place M-as yet occupied by the
. English troops. Soon after his arrival he was
joined by Dr. Gumming, a self-supporting mis-
sionary from this country, who continued in
that field, devoting himself to hospital practice,
combined with religious instruction, until his
return to the United States, February 10th,
1847. In January, 1844, two hongs were
rented in Amoy, one of which was used as a
chapel, and the other for the in-door patients.
The apartments above the chapel were occu-
pied by Dr. Cumming. Mr. Abeel writes :
Sabbath, January 28th, the first religious ser-
vices were held in the new chapel, and about
70 united with us in worshiping the true God.
On Mr. Pohlmao's arrival in June foUoAving,
from 60 to 100 daily attended the preaching
of the Gospel in the hospital. On the 21st of
March, a Bible class was commenced with 12
attendants. Mr. Abeel, besides his English
services, labored a.ssiduously and successfully
among the Chinese in the way of preaching
and tract distribution ; and he is still remem-
bered by the people in Amoy with affection.
He exerted a salutary influence among the
high officers. The late Lieutenant-Governor
of Fuhchau makes grateful mention of him
as an assistant in the jireparation of his valua-
ble Geography. On the 22d of June, 1844,
Bev. Messrs. Doty and Pohlman, from Borneo,
joined the mission with their families, being
obliged to reside for a time on the island of
Koolong.soo, opposite Amoy. Their families
suffered much from sickness, and a promising
son of Mr. Doty, aged 6 years, M'as committed
to the grave. Eev. Dr. Abeel visited Hong-
Kong in August, 1844, for the benefit of his
health.
In September following, Dr. Abeel returned
to Amoy still feeble, and after a series of
boat excursions in the vicinity of the city, for
the double object of pulilishing the Gospel, and
improving his health, lie finally, as the only
means of prolonging his life, embarked for the
United States, and arrived at New York on
the 3d of April, 184"), about 15 years from his
original embarkation for the heathen world.
He closed his valuable and eventful life at
Albany, N. Y., September 4th, 184G. His
remains repose in Greenwood Cemetery, beneath
a tasteful monument, in a locality commanding
a fine view of the sea, on whose bosom he had,
for Clirist's sake, so extensively journeyed.
His works do follow him. Mrs. Pohlman
died on the 30th of September, 184.5, and
Mrs. Doty, on the 5th of the following month.
Both were faithful to Christ in life, hajtjjy in
death, and each left behind her an afflicted
husband and two children, llev. Mr. Doty,
■with tluM! niotberles.s children, left Amoy,
November 12th, 1845, and arrived at New
York on the Cth of March, lH4G.
December IGth, 1845, the first meeting for
Chinese females was held at Rev. William
Young's, when upwards of 40 adults were pre-
sent. The missionaries were treated with
marked politeness by the government. In
December, 1845, a new chapel was opened for
daily meetings, and on the 5th of January fol-
lowing the first Chinese monthly concert was
held, being a union meeting of the Amoy Pro-
testant missionaries. The morning of the day
was devoted to prayer, and the afternoon to
communicating missionary intelligence in Chi-
nese.
In April, 1846, two aged men were baptized
by Mr. Pohlman, being the first fruits of this
mission. They received their first religious
impressions from the preaching of Mr. Abeel.
During the absence of Mr. Doty, Mr. Pohlman
enjoyed the co-operating labors of brethren of
the American Presbyterian Board, and of the
London Missionary Society. Near the close
of 1846, he and Rev. Mr. Brown visited 32
out of 136 villages situated on the island of
Amoy. They were well received, and preached
the- word to large and attentive audiences, and
distributed books and tracts to the old men,
schoolmasters, and other influential persons.
Rev. Mr. Doty and wife, and Rev. John Tan-
nest Talmage reached Amoy on the 19th of
August, 1847. In March, 1848, Mr. Doty
writas, " On the 5th instant, our regular com-
munion season occurred, when two more from
among this people, fatlier and son, were ad-
mitted to the table of the Lord. It is about
a year since the father first heard the truth
from our evangelist. His attention seems soon
to have been arrested, and what he learned he
communicated to his son. The evangelist here
mentioned was originally from the Kwangtung
province, and about 1841 emigrated to Siam.
There he was long employed by the writer as
a teacher, and with him in social prayer, he
learned to bow the knee to our Lord Jesus
Christ, and by him was there baptized. After
his conversion, he was emploj'cd by myself as
an assistant in publishing among the Chinese
the glorious Gospel. In August, 1846, he left
with me for China, and at the desire of Rev.
Mr. I'uhlman, and in accordance with my own
advice, he V)ecame connected with the Amoy
mi.ssion, in !March, 1847. He was commonly
called (/ Sicn, or the teacher U. Many other
cheering facts are mentioned as to the state
of feeling among the attendants on Christian
worship, indicating the presence of the Holy
Sj)irit.
In June, 1847, a promising day-school was
opened by Rev. Mr. Peet, formerly with the
writer in Siam, and subsequently his mission-
ary associate in Fuhchau. Rev.'Mr. Pohlnuin
gives an interesting account of two excur-
sions, of two days each, made in March and
September, 1847, to ('hiang-chau, where he
was politely received,' his preacliing listened to
by large and attentive assemblies, and books
received with eagerness. Bundles of selected
CHINA.
275
books were sent to the officers and literary
men of the city. The walls of Chiang-chau
are about 5 miles in circuit, and in good pre-
servation, and this city, together with the val-
ley, 10 miles wide and 15 long, in which it is
situated, is supposed to contain about 1,000,000
of souls. Mr. Pohlman regarded it as a pro-
mising and inviting field. Bible class instruc-
tion, begun in Amoy in March, 1844, still con-
tinued. In July, 1847, the class in the New
Testament numbered about 25. In 1846 a
second Bible class was formed for the study of
the Old Testament. On Tuesday afternoon
was a meeting for Chinese women, which was
punctually attended by many of the same per-
sons. "Jbe church members, in their week-day
meetings, were active in exhorting their be-
nighted countrymen. A daily meeting was
held by the teacher U, in a house standing on
the site of the intended new place of worship.
At times the room was crowded to overflow-
ing, and a lively attention was given to his
exhortations. On Thursday evening is a na-
tive prayer meeting ; and a prayer-me»ting
preparatory to their monthly communion is
held on the preceding Saturday.
On the 19th of December, 1848, Rev. Mr.
Poldman left Amoy to accompany his sister,
then in feeble health, to Hong-Kong. His
object having been accomplished, he embarked
for Amoy, Jan. 2d, 1849, in the schooner
Omega. On the morning of Jan. 5th, about
2 o'clock, she struck on Breaker's Point, about
half way to Amoy. The sea rolled over her;
and Mr. Pohlman and several others were
drowned by the capsizing of the boat in which
they hoped to reach shore. This is the first
instance of the loss of life by shipwreck of any
missionary of the Board. His death was an
unexpected and heavy affliction to the mission,
and the missionary cause. The health of Miss
Pohlman, which had received a severe shock
from her brother "s sudden death, required the
return of Mr. Talraage with her to America.
They left Amoy, March 25, 1849, and arrived
at New York on the 23d of August.
The mission chapel, the site for which had
been secured by Mr. Pohlman, and in the
building of which he had been active, was
dedicated on Sabbath, Feb. 11, 1849. It is a
neat brick edifice, one story high, with a flat
roof, .36 feet wide and 68 long, including a
verandah 10 feet wide, and will seat from 350
to 400 persons. On each side of the pulpit
are apartments for females, where they may
hear the Gospel without the violation of Chi-
nese custom. Its completion was followed by
a large increase of attendants upon the
preached word.
July 29, 1849, a mother and her two sons,
who, amid deep trials, had manifested great
Christian steadfastness, were baptized and ad-
mitted to church-fellowship. The occasion
was one of deep interest to God's people. Of
the church members, Mr. Doty writes : " They
appear to be praying, growing Christians,
walking in the ways of the Lord, and ex-
periencing the joy of the Holy Spirit's
presence.
Rev. Mr. Talmage, with Mrs. Talmage, ar-
rived at Amoy, on his return, July 16, 1850.
On the 22d of December following, he preach-
ed his first regular sermon at the opening of a
place of worship connected with his own house.
The room, which will seat about 100, was
crowded. The regular attendance here and in
the chapel on the Sabbath, is from 150 to 200.
May 19, 1850, Mr. Doty baptized his infant
son, and three children of native converts, being
the first instance of the baptism of a child of
a native Christian in connection with this mis-
sion. Two men and three women were receiv-
ed into the church on the last Sabbath of July,
1850, and on the last Sabbath of March, 1851,
three others, a man and two women. The nar
tive evangelist was daily occupied in convers-
ing with inquirers in the chapel, in holding
meetings, and in occasional tours to other
places. Another church member was acting
as colporteur in the city, under the direction
of Dr. Young, of the Free Church of Scotland.
Early in 1850, the day-school was transferred
by Mr. Doty to Dr. Young, owing to the press-
ure of more important duties. The Roman
letters had begun to be used in preparing books
for the native Christian females.
The attendance at the chapel was from 150
to perhaps 300. Weekly female prayer-meet-
ings were held both by Mrs. Doty and Mrs.
Talmage, with encouraging results. Including
the three baptized in March, ten were add-
ed to the church in 1851, making with the
native evangelist, 19 church members, one
having died in May. The trials of the native
Christians from poverty and other causes have
been great ; but they appear to be growing in
grace. In 1852 two young men were admit-
ted into the church, who were called to suffer
for Christ's sake. Two others selected from a
large number of inquirers, who had been exam-
ined during the preceding mouth, were received
into the church. There was unusual evidence of
the presence of the Holy Spirit. At the close
of that year, the number of communicants was
21 ; and from the beginning, the whole number
of admissions to the church had been thirty-
three. During the year, 12 children of church
members had been baptized and two Christian
marriages celebrated. A monthly collection,
originating among themselves, is taken up for
the assistance of needy church members, amount-
ing to about $40 a year. " The first we knew
of it," says Mr. Doty, " was from being asked
if we would not 'join in giving something.'"
The mission pleads for additional laborers.
In May, 1853, the mission suffered a great
loss in the death of U Sien, the native evangel-
ist. He had been sent with a Christian col-
porteur to Chiang-chau to commence a new
station. Arriving just before the insurrection
276
CHINA.
broke out in that city, be was suspected of
being associated with the insurgents, and was
taken by the imperialists and beheaded. The
colporteur narrowly escaped with bis life. The
writer saw U Sien for the last time in Dec.
1852. He trusts that one, in whose conversion
he was an humble instrument, is now in heav-
en. He was much esteemed for his piety, good
judgment, and Christian activity. Early in
June, during one of those days when the blood
of civil war profusely flowed in the neighbor-
hood of the chapel, four young men were bap-
tized and added to the little flock, making six
added during the first half of 1853, and 26 the
total number of surviving church members.
Fuhchau. — The mission at Fuhchau was
commenced in 1847. In accordance with the
earnest wishes and advice of the Canton mis-
sion, Rev. Stephen Johnson, formerly stationed
in Siam, left Canton, Nov. 23, 1846, and pro-
ceeded by the way of Hong-kong and Amoy
to Fuhchau, where be arrived January 2,
1847. His first work was the study of the lo-
cal dialect. After about six months he com-
menced religious services in bis own bouse, on
the Sabbath, beside daily worship with bis
domestics, making the study of the Fuhchau
dialect his main business. At bis house be
had frequent Chinese visitors, to whom be dis-
tributed tracts, and made known Christ cruci
fied for sinners. In September, 1847, be wr .
joined by Rev. Lyman B. Peet and wife, wi i
whom it was his privilege to be associated u
Siam. On the 7th of May, 1848, the missi >n
was further reinforced by the arrival of Mess'-s.
Seneca Cummings and Caleb C. Baldwin, ar.d
their wives, and Rev. William Richards, oon
of the distinguished missionary of that uime,
at the Sandwich Islands. For the fi'iJ two
brethren, houses in eligible situations r .ore soqu
erected. For the first two years of '.neir resi-
dence in Fuhchau, the study of t. V; Chinese
was necessarily the main business oil the new y
arrived brethren. The first three .'bouses i>i
the mission were on Tong-chieu, ^smull islanfl
in the Min, about three miles fr ^ni the soutA
gate of the city proper ; and tbeV fourth wa^
on the south ))ank of the river, alj'Vut a quar-j
ter of a mile from tlic island, oijf the mair'
thoroughfare, with a commanding v(iew. Thii
is occupied by Mr. Cummings. . In June
1848, besides stated Sabbath worsliip in h'n
house, with an intelligent audience of about
thirty, Mr. Johnson opened a school 'and com-
menced preaching and tract distribution in a
hired bouse, which he bad fitted up for the
purpose, standing in the midst of a Uense po-
pulation, on the south bank of the itiver, and
about two miles from his residence. 'The au-
diences were at first so tunmltuous, that the
attempt to open or close the meetii^gs with
prayer was not deemed prudent. Glradually
the people were more orderly and re\^pect I'ul,
and the audiences numbered about sixt\y souls.
For the accommodation of the laborinfi'vlasscs,
evening meetings were frequently held, with
apparently good effect. Mr. Peet secured a
commodious chapel near the island and on the
great thoroughfare, a part of which he appro-
priated to a Chinese school, which has gene-
rally numbered about twenty scholars. In the
summer of 1849, Mr. Johnson's health com-
pelled him to visit the northern ports. At
Ningpo, on the 17tb of September, he was
married to Miss Caroline Silmer of Stock-
holm, Sweden. She was then an agent of the
London Ladies' Society for the Education of
Females in the East, and bad been for about
two years a teacher in Miss Mary Aldersey'a
Female Seminary, in that city. After visiting
Shanghai, be returned with Mrs. J.'to Fuh-
chau, on the 8th December, 1849. On tho
31st of May, 1850, the mission was further re-
inforced by the arrival of Rev. Justus Doo-
little and wife. Mr. Johnson, soon after his
return, resumed bis usual labors. His chapel
was about a mile from his residence, on the
way to the scene of bis former labors. Messrs.
Curtlmings, Baldwin and Richards were now
making some efforts in the preaching of the
word and the distribution of tracts. In Sep-
tember, 1850, Rev. Mr. Richards was attacked
with hemorrhage of the lungs, and by advice
o? bis brethren and physician, he soon after
embarked for Canton. Physicians there re-
commending a long voyage, he embarked for
the United States early in March, but was not
allowed to reach this country. He calmly
and cheerfully breathed out bis life on the 5th
of June, and his remains were committed to
the deep, south of St. Helena. Mr. Richards
bad made great progress in the Chinese, con-
sidering the short time be had been in the
field, and his prospects of future usefulness
were bright. His heart was in bis work, and
be labored perhaps beyond his strength. Just
before he was laid aside, be performed a valu-
able service to the mission in securing, after
much labor, trial and patience, the building
lot at Po-na-Sang, now occupied by Messrs.
Baldwin and Doolittlc. There the writer erect-
ed the house now occupied by Mr. Baldwin,
and moved into it early in 1851. Mr. Doolit-
tlc preceded him. It is near the great tho-
roughfare leading from the island to the city,
and nearly midway between the two places.
In November, 1850, Mr. Baldwin opened a
school and chapel on the island, and with some
interruption from ill-health, this continued to
be the central point of bis labors, till near the
close of 1851. In April of that year, Mr.
Cummings commenced public worship in Chi-
nese, in the court of bis house, with an encou-
raging attendance, and in May opened a day
school for girls, which has since continued.
Mr. Peet long had a Chinese service in the
court of bis residence, on Sabbath morning,
which, with bis Chinese school, has l)een trans-
ferred to the bouse on the island, once occu-
pied by the writer. Some months after Mr.
CHINA.
277
Johnson's removal to Po-na-Sang, he secured
an eligible site for a chapel near liis house, and
on the main street, and built a small and sim-
ple place of worshii3, large enough for about
180 hearers. There he opened a school, and
continued the preaching of the Gospel, both in
season and out of season, as his health would
allow, up to the time of his return to this coun-
try, December 8, 1852. His school was not
permanent. After its suspension, the school
room was for a time occupied by a flourishing
school, gathered by Mr. Doolittle, which also
was dispersed by the alarm caused by the seiz-
ure and imprisonment of the Rev. Mr. Wel-
ton's school teachers, in April, 1852. In the
spring of that year, Mr. Doolittle procured a
site, and soon after erected a chapel on the
main street, about a quarter of a mile nearer
the city than that built by Mr. Johnson.
These chapels need only to be opened and or-
dinarily there is a good number of hearers,
sometimes more that a hundred. On the 27th
of May, Mr. Doolittle commenced religious
exercises in Chinese, in his chapel. During
the first half of 1852, Mr. Cummings erected a
chapel near his house, on the main street, and
commenced Chinese services in it, with en-
couraging prospects. Mr. Baldwin occupies
the chapel in which Mr. Johnson formerly
ministered. Rev. Charles Hartwell and wife
arrived at Fuhchau on the 19th of June, 1853.
The four elder brethren now in this field, have
each chapels in eligible positions for securing
hearers, and without hindrance from the go-
vernment or people, can give themselves on
the Sabbath, and during the week, to the
preaching of the Gospel, and the judicious dis-
tribution of books. By their exemplary lives
and pure doctrines, a general and happy im-
pression, favorable to Christianity, has been
produced upon the popular mind. It is hoped
that some knowledge of the fundamental truths
of the Gospel has been extensively diffused,
though none have yet come out decidedly on
the Lord's side. Their religious meetings are
becoming more orderly and solemn, and many
of the youth have been carefully instructed in
the Scriptures. Truth is operating like leaven,
quietly among the masses, yet we trust power-
fully. The brethren here have, during the in-
surrection, remained at their posts, and stead-
ily prosecuted their work ; and the missionar-
ies are generally recognized as the teachers of
a holy religion, blameless and harmless in
their lives. The mission has four day schools,
containing about 100 scholars. Books are ex-
tensively prepared in the vulgar language,
using the Chinese characters, as symbols of its
sounds, when necessary. In Fuhchau from the
first, there has been great harmony and love
among the missionaries of the different boards,
being united in their English preaching on the
Sabbath, in their communion services, the
monthly concert, and in a weekly prayer meet-
ing. To the writer, the recollection of these
precious seasons is sweet, and he would rejoice
again to participate in them, and in the work
of preaching Christ to dying souls in Fuhchau,
should Providence please to grant him this bles-
sed privilege. May this mission, which ho
in weakness was permitted to commence, be
abundantly blest as the instrument of salvation
to the perishing.
TABULAR VIEW.
STATIONS.
Canton
Amoy, .
Fuhchau,
1830
1842
1847
10 1 13 1 9 1 26 2 30 4 100 2
Southern Baptist Convention — Canton. —
This mission, which has been subject to great
changes, was commenced by Rev. I. J. Roberts,
in May, 1844. Between his arrival in China
in 1836, and the commencement of his labors
in Canton, his efforts were mainly directed to
the spiritual good of the Chinese in Macao
and Hong-kong. Shortly after entering Can-
Ion, he gathered a church of 6 or 7 members,
two or three of whom were afterwards useful,
as assistants in publishing the Gospel. Early
in 1845, Messrs. Shuck and Devan came to
Canton. Mr. Shuck shortly after left with his
children for home, and Mrs. Devan died in
that city, Oct. 18, 1846, and Dr. Devan, after
a temporary sojourn in Hong-kong, returned
to America. Messrs. Pearcy and Clopton,
with their wives, arrived at Canton, in Oct.
1846, and Mr. Clopton died July 7, 1847, and
his widow, with her infant, soon after returned.
Rev. Francis Johnson arrived July, 1847, but
his health failing, he returned, and reached
New York in December, 1849. Rev. B. W,
Whilden and wife arrived at Canton early in
1849, where Mrs. Whilden died, Feb. 20, 1850,
and Mr. Whilden the same year embarked for
the United States. Rev. Mr. Pearcy and
wife, by reason of ill-health, left this station
for Shanghai in 1848. Thus, among all the
missionaries of this society, with the exception
of Mr. Roberts, none have been long enough
in Fuhchau to become able preachers in the
local dialect. He has been a diligent laborer,
and in his correspondence, eight persons are
named as having received Christian baptism.
In 1 849, he visited the United States, where
he M'as married ; and in 1850, he resumed his
278
CHINA.
■work in Canton. In the Society's Keport for
1853, his dismission is announced. Ho, how-
ever, remains in Canton, prosecuting liis work
as usual. The insurgent chief is understood
to have been for. a time under his religious
instruction, and to have recently desired a
visit from him, which he attemjrtcd to make,
but without success. From an article headed
" Canton Mission," in the Home and Foreign
Journal for January, 1854, Rev. B. W. AVhil-
den appears to have resumed his labors in that
city. A Chinese school, containing 20 pupils,
is mentioned, and Yong Seen Sang, who was
long employed by Rev. Mr. Shuck, was then
laboring as an evangelist in Canton. The
Report for 1854 speaks of serious embarrass-
ments in this mission ; but the missionaries
speak hopefully of future prospects.
Shanghai. — Rev. J. L. Shuck and wife em-
barked for China in 1835, and Macao and
Hoqg-kong became the scenes of his subse-
quent labors. In this latter settlement, Mrs.
Shuck, a highly esteemed missionary, died
Nov. 27, 1844, and Mr. Shuck, with his chil-
dren, soon after returned home. He reached
Shanghai, on his return to China with his
second wife and younger daughter, in October,
1847, where they were welcomed by Rev.
Messrs. Tates and Tobey, who had a little pre-
ceded them. From the arrival of these breth-
ren dates the commencement of this mission.
Dr. J. L. James and wife, destined to Shang-
hai, were drowned in Houg-kong harbor,
April 15, 1848, by the capsizing of the
schooner Paradox, in which they had taken
passage at Canton. Rev. Geo. Fearcy and
■wife, formerly at Canton, arrived at Shanghai
Nov. 18, 1848, where they have since con-
tinued to labor. Like the brethren of other
societies who had jjreceded them, they found
Shanghai a promising field for C'hristian effort,
and, with a knowledge of the local dialect,
they found no difficulty in obtaining hearers.
Besides the frequent ministry of the word in a
smaller chapel within the walls, the brethren
early made arrangement.s for the erection,
within the city ])roper, of a substantial and
S])aeious Christian edifice. 'I'his church was
opened for worship on the 3d of INIarch, 1850.
The house is a brick edifice, with a belfry, and
will accommodate upwards of 700 persons.
Occasionally, it has been well filled, and usually
some hundreds are present. In 1853, G schools
arc reported as under the care of the mission,
containing between 70 and 80 scholars.
There is one out-station, having a small cliapel
and a school-liouse. Wliile the brethren much
value Scripture and tract distrilnition, they
devote themselves chiefly to the preaching of
the (Jospd in the city, and in tlie large and
numerous villages in the surrounding country.
On the 2d of Se])tember, 1849, three Chi-
nese were bajjiized. A recent letter states
the interesting fact of the baptism of the son
of an insurgent chief, a youth of 18, who was
considered as giving uncommon evidence of
piety. Mr. Tobey has returned to this coun-
try on account of ill-health. He arrived at
New York, May 29, 1850. Rev. Mr. Shuck,
having been suddenly bereaA^ed of his wife,
late in 1852, returned with his family to the
United States. G. AV. Burton, M.D., sailed
from New York, Dec. 12, 1853, on his return
to Shanghai, accompanied by Mrs. Burton.
By the last accounts, the missionaries were
much encouraged, though living amid the rav-
ages of war. The report for 1854 says, with
reference to this mission, " At no time in its
former history, has the encouragement to per-
severe been stronger. The church at Shang-
hai have been permitted to receive into their
fellowship an interesting young man, by the
name of Asou, who gives satisfactory evidence
of a change of heart. This young man was
nearly related to the southern king, one of the
insurgent chiefs, and was on his way to Nan-
king to join the army. Having found protec-
tion in the families of the missionaries, it was
soon ascertained that he was a regular reader
of the Scriptures, and daily worshiped God.
He was more particularly instructed by them ;
and having professed faith in Christ, and a
readiness to obey him, he Avas baptized and
received into the church. Rev. Mr. Shuck
has taken a dismission, in order to enter into
the service of the domestic Board, among the
Chinese in California.
Chitrch Missionary Society. — Hong-kmig. —
This Society commenced operations in China
in 1844, Rev. Messrs. Geo. Smith and T.
McClotchie having arrived at Hong-kong on
the 25th of Sept. of that year. In 1_84G, Mr.
Smith returned to England ; and having been
a})pointed Bishop of Victoria, with the super-
vision of the missions in China, he again sailed
for Ilomr-kong, Nov. 1849, accompanied by
Rev. T. F. Gough. Wm. Welton, E. T. R. Mon-
crieff, D.D., and Mr. R. D. Jackson. The par-
ty arrived March 29, 1850. A]n-il 21, Mr.
Jackson was ordained in the cathedral at Hong-
kong, and soon after proceeded with Mr. AN'cltou
to Fuhchau. Rev. IMr. Gough joined Rev.
Messrs. Cobbold and Russell at Ningpo. Rev.
Dr. Moncrieff entered upon his duties in what
is now called St. Paul's College. It then con-
tained 30 pupils, three of whom had been
members of the Morrison school. Chinese is
the medium of instruction. At the end of the
year there were only 17 students. As early as
Jan., 1852, the new buildings at St. Paul's
college were com])leted, in which were the
residences of the bishop, the warden of the
college, and a full stalf of tutors and students.
This institution originated in the missionary
zeal of the Rev. A'incent Stanton, former chap-
lain at Hong-kong. About (10 persons reside
in the college building. The number of Chi-
nese pupils was about 30, between the ages of
12 and 18. In 1852, Dr. Moncrieff returned
to England, and resigned his connection witli
CHINA.
279
the college. At the close of that year a uew
college building was opened. The number of
the pupils was fluctuating.
S/ianghai. — This station was commenced by
Rev. T. McOlotchie on his arrival, April 15,
1845. By diligent application to the study of
the dialect, he was soon able to make himself
understood by the people. Shortly after his
arrival he secured a house within the city
walls. In less than a year he commenced a
Chinese service, and soon after was much en-
couraged by the interest manifested by his
crowded audiences. As early as May 29,
1847, he had translated the Morning Service
and the Collects into the Shanghai dialect,
through th» aid of G-utzlafif 's translation of the
Church Liturgy. On the 17th of April, 1848,
he was joined by Rev. W. Farmer and his
wife. Mr. Farmer was, however, soon obliged
to quit the field, on account of his health, and
he did not survive to reach his native country.
Early in 1850, the mission church, situated
in the city proper, was completed. It will
accommodate 300 persons. In the course of
1851, three members of Mr. McClotchie's
blind class were baptized, having long been
the subjects of Christian instruction. Rev. J.
Hobsou arrived in 1849, expecting to join this
mission, but the sudden death by drowning of
Rev. J. Lowder, the English chaplain, while
bathing in the sea, led to his appointment to
that office, in which his society concurred.
Mr. McClotchie's residence is now near that
of the American Episcopal establishment,
about 3 miles Ijelow the city, on the river's
bank. In the Report of the China mission for
1853, it is stated that, through the efforts of
Rev. John Hobson, a commodious educational
establishment, costing 35,41G, contributed by
the English congregation, had been erected
and made over to the society. The school was
opened in December, 1852, numbering 20
pupils, who had been some time under Mr.
Hobson's instruction. Two ordained students
have been appointed to this station, one of
whom takes charge of the school. In July,
1852, two other members of the blind class
had been baptized, one of them a woman.
The class numbered 18 members. This class
has been aided by Mr. McClotchie to the
weekly amount of about 7 cents each. He
gives them stated religious instruction.
Ningpo. — This station was commenced by
Rev. Messrs. R. H. Cobbold and W. A. Rus-
sell on their arrival in May, 1848. After a
short time, they obtained a house within the
walls, the basement of which they fitted up as
a temporary place of worship. On the first
Sabbath in 1849, they commenced worship in
Chinese. In the course of the year, a small
chapel, with school-room and teachers'-room,
was opened in a densely-populated portion of
the city. The congi-egations were fluctuating
at the new chapel, averaging about 80. Rev.
T. F. Gough joined the mission in 1850. In
April, 1851, two persons of hopeful piety re-
ceived Christian baptism. The Roman letters
were employed in writing the vulgar tongue
with apparent advantage. Early in 1852,
Rev. Mr. Jackson, formerly at Fuhchau, was
associated with this mission. This year was
one of unusual religious interest among the
people. Religious services were held at four
places, the average attendance at the two
chapels being about 200. The meetings were
more orderly and solemn, and the Gospel and
its teachers were treated with more respect.
During the last half of 1852, five adults, of
apparent piety, were baptized. This station
was visited by Rt. Rev. Bishop Smith, in
May, 1852, who speaks in the highest terms
of the missionaries.
Fuhchau. — Rev. Messrs.William Welton and
R. D. Jackson arrived in Fuhchau early in
1850, and through the assistance of the British
Vice - Consul obtained a lease of a temple
within the walls, near the consulate. The op-
position of the literati constrained them soon
after to exchange this place for another, also
in the city. Mr. Welton has maintained his
position amid much opposition from the local
authorities. In the spring of 1852, two Chi-
nese school teachers, with whom he had made
an agreement, were seized, imprisoned, and
treated with greo.t inhumanity. A house which
he had originally rented for a chapel and dis-
pensary was pulled down. His humane and
Christian efforts have been mostly restrict-
ed to his own house. Tract distribution and
preaching are allowed in the city proper ; but
no premises can be rented for such purposes.
Mr. Welton has made some efforts in prepar-
ing portions of the Scriptures in the local dia-
lect, using the Chinese character as a symbol
of its sounds. The opposition, it has been
thought, is abating.
TABULAR VIEW.
STATIONS.
Fuhchau
Ningpo...
Shanghai
At Home
Totals
1850
18-18
1845
d
^
•i>
ja
<s ce
C3
> 3
Q>
'A S
'^
o
rjl
•-C
^
%
c3
6
<
1
1
3
2
5
3
1
2
1
6
1
2
7
3
American Seventh-Day Baptist Society.
— Shanghai .—T\\\?, mission was begun in 1847,
by Rev. Messrs. S. Carpenter and N. Word-
ner, who with their families occupy a native
house within the walls of the city, situated
among family residences, near the small south
gate. A large room on the mission premises
has been fitted up as a chapel, which was
opened for worship in January, 1849.
280
CHINA.
English General Baptist Missionary
Society. — Ningpo. — This mission was com-
menced in 184:5, by Rev. Messrs. T. H. Hud-
son and William Jarrom. It has been active
in the preaching of the Gospel and the distri-
bution of Christian books ; and considerable
has been done in the department of schools.
Mr. Hudson has prepared a number of Chris-
tian tracts. He was early permitted to bap-
tize his Chinese teacher on the profession of
his faith in Christ. Mrs. Jarrom died in
Ningpo, in February, 1848. Mr. Jarrom re-
turned to England late in 1850. Mr. Hudson
has suffered much from ill-health, but conti-
nues in the diligent prosecution of his work.
His son, Mr. Joseph Hudson, who is a ready
Chinese scholar, was for some time a valuable
assistant in publishing the Gospel ; but he was
subsequently persuaded to connect himself with
a mercantile house in Ningpo.
Miss Aldersey's Female Seminary, Ning-
po.— This energetic and devoted Christian
lady, though educated amid ease and affluence,
has rejoiced, for Christ's sake, in the endur-
ance of peculiar hardships and privations. At
her own charge, near twenty years since, she
entered on the missionary work, first toiling
alone for some years in Sourabaya, several
hundred miles east of Batavia. Since she left
that place, a blessed work of grace has been
wrought among the natives, several hundreds
of whom have been hopefully converted,
•without the aid of any foreign missionary.
During the war between China and England,
3he went to Chusan, and there commenced her
labors for Chinese females. After the close of
the war, she opened a female boarding-school
at Ningpo, which has continued in operation
to the present time. It has usually numbered
about fifty girls, and her entire household
about seventy persons. Several of her family
have become hopefully pious. Her school is
now within the city proper. Out of her
school she has labored much for tj^e spiritual
good of Chinese females, by visiting and con-
versation.
Swedish Mission, Fuhchaii. — Thougli in the
mysterious providence of God this interesting
mission was early broken up, yet it deserves a
brief notice. It was commenced early in
1850, by Rev. C. J. Fost, joined soon after
by Rev. A. Elgquist. Both were youn^ men
of talent and piety, and during their l^ricf so-
journ in Fuhchau, made rapid progress in the
Chinese. After much trouble they obtained
the promise of a permanent residence, and in
October, 1850, they visited a vessel at the
mouth of the river to procure the funds neces-
sary to fulfil the bargain, amounting to about
$200. On entering the main river, on their
return, they were waylaid by a piratical boat,
and daring the encounter, Mr. Fost was mor-
tally wounded, and fell into the river, and Mr.
Eigciuist narrowly escaped to the shore with his
life, with some slight wounds. One of the pi-
rates, perhaps their leader, was mortally
wounded by a pistol-shot from Mr. Fost.
Their village was subsequently destroyed by
the government. Mr. Elgquist's health suffer-
ed a severe shock from this disaster and
previous robberies which they had endured
while residing in a Budhist temple ; and
early in 1851 he was advised to visit Hong-
kong. His health not improving, in 1852 he
embarked for Sweden. This was the first effort
of the society to establish a Christian mission.
Free Church of Scotland, Amoij. — This
mission was commenced in 1850, by James H.
Young, M.D., who had previously spent several
years in Houg-koug, as a medical practitioner.
Rev. W. C. i3urns, a devoted and successful
minister of Christ, in his native land, offered
himself to the Church as a missionary to
China, and arrived in Hong-kong in Novem-
ber, 1847. After having spent three years
and seven months in study and missionary la-
bor in Hong-kong and Canton, he sailed for
Amoy on the 26th of June, 1851. He soon
so far mastered this new dialect as to be able
to speak, it with ease and correctness. June
6th, 1853, he announced the completion of the
translation of the Pilgrim's Progress, which
was published at a cost of about ten cents per
copy. Dr. Young, soon after his arrival,
opened a dispensary, and likewise took charge
of a Chinese day school of 30 pupils, originally
connected with the mission of the American
Board in that city. Under his direction two
pious Chinese were emi)loyed, as colporteurs.
Upwards of twenty opium smokers were
thought to have been cured of this vice.
Another school of thirty pupils is superin-
tended by Mr. Burns. He has been diligent
in the preaching of the Gospel in Amoy, and
in neighboring cities and villages. The mis-
sion was expected soon to be reinforced.
The preceding portion, together with the
concluding part of this article was prepared
by Rev. Stephen Johnson, late missionary of
the A. B. C F. M., at Fuhchau.
American Episcopal Board. — The Board
of Missions of the Protestant Episcopal Church
in the United States resolved, on the 13th
of May, 1834, to establish a mission in
China as soon as a suitable missionary could
be found. On the 14th of July, Rev. Henry
Lockwood was appointed ; and in February
following, Rev. Francis R. Hanson, Rector
of Christ Church, Prince George's County,
Md., offered himself, and was accepted. The
mission excited so deep an interest, that the
necessary funds were raised in a few weeks, in
New York alone, and a free passage was given
by a mercantile house in that city. The mis-
sionaries embarked June 2, and arrived at
Canton October 29, 1835, and afterwards j)ro-
ccedcd to Batavia. February 17, 1836, Mr.
Lockwood was married to a daughter of Rev.
W. H. Mcdhurst, and ou the 9th of August
CHINA,
281
following, Mrs. Lockwood wag removed by
death.
Ou July 8, 1837, Rev. W. J. Boone, who
had received a medical as well as a theological
education, with reference to the missionary
work, sailed from Boston, with his wife, and
reached Batavia on the 22d of October. Mr.
Hanson's health had become so impaired, that
he was compelled to return home.
The missionaries applied themselves to the
study of the Chinese language, and in the
mean time, endeavored to make themselves
useful in holding an English service, distribut-
ing tracts, and establishing schools. Mr.
Boone found his medical knowledge of great
use to him. But the climate proved detri-
mental to their health, and Mr. Lockwood was
compelled to return to the United States.
During their residence at Batavia, a boys'
school was commenced ; and finding it diffi-
cult to retain them long enough to accomplish
much good, the expedient was resorted to of
having them bound by writing by the parents
for five years, the missionaries assuming all the
expense ; and the plan being found to work
well, was continued after the removal of the
mission to China. In August, 1839, Mr. Boone
had received 16 boys on these terms, and
scarce a week passed but he had to reject ap-
plications. Their improvement, in every re-
spect, was highly gratifying. They were do-
cile, studious, and affectionate.
In September, 1840, Mr. and Mrs. Boone
visited Macao, on account of impaired health ;
and in February following, the mission was re-
moved to that place. On the 20th of August,
1842, Mrs. Boone was attacked with a bilious
remittant fever, and on the 30th, she departed
this life, with the dying declaration : " If there
is a mercy in life for which I feel thankful, it
is, that God has condescended to call me to be
a missionary." In consequence of her death.
Dr. Boone returned to this country with his
children, hoping also to be able to secure a
reinforcement to the mission.
In 1834, and before Dr. Boone's return to
this country, the mission was removed from
Macao to Koolongsoo, a small island half a
mile from Amoy, which, in the opinion of Dr.
Boone, presented a most inviting field for mis-
sionary labor. He had frequent opportuni-
ties of preaching on Sundays to stated congre-
gations of Chinese, averaging from 60 to 70,
besides an English service for the troops. The
chief magistrate of Amoy interchanged visits
with Dr. Boone, and invited him to reside at
that place, where he would have an opportu-
nity to preach to many more people, and where
he (the magistrate) would have more frequent
intercourse with him. He listened to Dr. B.'s
declaration of the Gospel, and accepted a New
Testament.
Dr. Boone's visit to this country was the
means of exciting a greatly increased interest
in the China mission ; and in October, 1844,
he was consecrated Missionary Bishop. On
the 14th of December following, he embarked
for Canton, accompanied by Eev. Messrs.
Henry W. Woods, and Richardson Graham,
and Mrs. Boone, Mrs. Woods, Mrs. Graham,
and Misses Gillett, Jones, and Morse, mission-
ary teachers. Rev. Mr. Syle and wife em-
barked on the 24th of May following.
Bishop Boone and his associates reached
Hong-kong on the 24th of April, 1845 ; and
after much inquiry and consultation, Shanghai
was fixed upon as offering a most favorable
prospect for missionary labor ; and, as soon as
suitable arrangements could be made, the mis-
sion families proceeded to that place, and es-
tablished the mission there. The demeanor
of the people towards the missionaries was
highly' encouraging. The magistrates were
courteous, and the people exhibited none of
the arrogance and dislike manifested by the
inhabitants of Canton, but showed much kind-
ness and good will. A school for boys was
immediatety opened, with ten pupils, on the
same plan as that pursued first at Batavia,
and the new missionaries applied themselves
diligently to the study of the language. Pub-
lic service was established by the Bishop, in a
hall fitted up in the building occupied for a
school, capable of holding 250 people, which
was filled with an attentive audience. In
1846, one young man was baptized, who was
looking forward to the ministry.
The failure of Rev. Mr. Graham's health
rendered it necessary for him to return to
this country, and Rev. Phineas D. Spalding
was sent out to take his place. Bishop Boone,
in his report, gives a high testimonial to the
character and usefulness of the ladies attached
to the mission.
In 1847, the Bishop began to be afilicted
with serious illness, which has since followed
him, in a greater or less degree, and proved a-
great hindrance to his labors. This year he
succeeded in raising about $6000, and secured a
lot outside of the city, for the purpose of erect-
ing a suitable building for his schools. _ One
of the earliest pupils ot the school died, giving
satisfactory evidence of piety. Previous to his
death he was received into the clmrch.
The controversy in regard to the proper
word to be used for rendering God in Chinese,
to which allusion has been made in a former
part of this article, attracted the earliest atten-
tion of Bishop Boone, who expressed his firm
conviction that Shin was the true word ; and
that it would be in vain to fight against poly-
theism, if they chose the term used by the Chi-
nese as the proper name for their chief god.
To this subject he devoted several months, and
wrote and published a treatise upon it.
Funds were collected for the erection of a
mission chapel ($1000 of which was received
from a member of the Episcopal Church in the
United States), and also a suitable dwelling
for the missionaries.
282
CHINA.
In 1849, the mission was afflicted with the
.(jiBS of Eev. Mr. Spalding, whose indefatigable
diligence had given him a sufficient command
of the language to enable him to preach to the
Chinese in their own tongue. Over exertion,
connected with a cold, brought on him a con-
sumption ; urged by his physicians, he cm-
barked for his native land on board the ship
Coquette, which was never heard of after-
wards ; and it is supposed that she foundered
in the Chinese sea during a terrible gale, soon
after his embarkation.
Bishop Boone and Eev. Mr. Syle, were con-
tributing their share of labor to the work of a
revision of a translation of the Scrijiturcs into
Chinese ; and in connection with the Rev.
Mr. McOlatchie, of the Church Missionary
Society, they had nearly completed the whole
order for " Morning Prayer," in the local dia-
lect of Shanghai.
On Easter, 1850, the Bishop baptized six
persons ; and, after witnessing the administra-
tion of the ordinance, the teacher of the day
school came to Mr. Syle, and applied to be re-
ceived as a candidate for baptism.
The greatest vigilance is exercised by the
missionaries in the examination of candidates
for baptism, none being admitted to the ordi-
nance without a knowledge of Christian truth,
and evidence of its gracious efiects on their
hearts and in their lives.
The following fact, related by Mr. Syle, will
show the difficulty attending the translation
of the Bible into Chinese : " After reading
some chapters in the Gospel of Mark, which
had been translated in the very concise, ' highly
concentrated ' style, which is sometimes called
' classical,' ray old man, Soo-dong, made this
remark : ' A lad who has been to school two
or three years can read and understand the
Scriptures written in the Foo-pah (common
• dialect) ; if he has read books for six or seven
years, he can understand and explain the mean-
ing of what is written in the style of Mr. Cutz-
laff's version (which might be called the easy
Mandarin ;) but before he could <xtract the
meaning out of this (referring to what he had
just perused), he must have studied the books
at least ten years !' And yet this is what he
prefers, and would choose for translating the
word of God."
The following fact, stated by the same mis-
sionary, and which he says is no unusual occur-
rence, shows that there must be much suffer-
ing from want among the Chinese : " As I
stepped from the boat on the quay this morn-
ing, I saw some old mats spread over the
bodies of such as had died of destitution during
the night. I lifted one corner of the matting,
and counted nine distinctly. I M-as told there
were ehn-en, all killed with cold and hunger
in one night in one place !"
Mr. Syle relates the case of a, poor boy, thir-
teen years of age, whom they had taken in,
who died in couse(iuencc of the habit he had
acquired of smoking opium. Mr. S. thinks
this drug is undermining the constitutions of
one-third of the people of China.
In 1850, Bishop Boone published a defence
of his former treatise on the translation of the
word God, which had been reviewed by Dr.
Medhurst, Sir George Stanton, and Dr. Legge.
As an illustration of the danger of employing
the term Shang-te, he relates that they had been
teaching a catechism on the creed, in which
this word was used. A man of some intelli-
gence, who understood his own language v.'ell,
applied for instruction, and was furnished with
a copy of this catechism. He came regularly
for ten days, and showed great interest. He
read over with the missionary all the attributes
of Slia7ig-te, which we are accustomed to predi-
cate of God, and appeared to understand
thoroughly what he read. But when asked if he
prayed to Shang-te every day, he replied that
\\Q visited his temple twice- a day for this purpose.
This was the name he had been accustomed to
apply to the idol in the temple ; and it is not
to be wondered at that he understood the mis-
sionaries, as teaching the worship of the same
idol, since they i\scd the same name. The
word was immediately erased from their cate-
chism. There is an idol, the chief among the
Taouists, called Ncok JVorig Shang-te, and, if
you say Shang-te to them, they understand
you as speaking of this idol.
The interesting event of the ordination of
Chi-JVong,ihe first Chinese deacon, took place
in Christ Church, Shanghai, on the 7th of
September, 1851. He was questioned fully
on the books- of Scripture, and on the 39
articles, and answered very satisfactorily. He
also read two sermons, written out in the dia-
lect of his region. He gives promise of much
usefulness. There were, at this time, three
more candidates for orders : Mr. John F.
Points, a member of the mission, and two
natives, Soodong and Chu-kiung.
This year, a new building was erected for
the female school, under the instruction of
Miss Jones.
Bishop Boone having made arrangements
for as efficient conduct of missionary opcja-
tions as circumstances would admit, embarked
for the United States, and arrived in New
York, Jan. 30, 1853. :Mr. Syle, who had
lieen eight years in China, found it necessary
this year also to return to this country.
The obstacle which the acquisition of the
Chinese language has been supposed to present
to the missionary work there, appears far less
formidable than it once was. After seven
months' study, the newly-arrived missionaries
were able to read the seVvice, and address the
natives intelligibly in Chinese. And one of
the ladies connected with the mission com-
menced the study of the language in August,
and on the 31st of the following January, she
had read through the Gospel of ^Matlhew in Chi-
nese characters, correctly and understaudingly.
CHINA.
283
The mission, at the latest dates, was in a
prosperous condition. The following table
will show its present strength and the progress
that has been made in the several depart-
ments :
Ordained American Missionaries, including the Bishop.. 3
American Catechist and Candidate for Orders 1
Ordained Native 1
Native Catechists and Candidates for Orders 2
Female Teachers (single ladies) 6
Pupils in Bovs' School (on mission premises) 60
" " Gii-ls' " " " " 40
In six other Schools 100
Whole Number of Baptiims 29
Number of Communicants 24
Under Suspension 7
During the year a mission chapel has been
built, 60 feet by 30, at a cost of ^2,000, §600
of winch was subscribed by members of the
foreign community. — Revised by one of the Sec-
retaries.
Pkesbyteeian Board. — The missions of the
(American) Presbyterian Board among the
Chinese were commenced at Singapore, in
1838. At that time their jealousy of foreign-
ers prevented a station being formed in China
itself. Merchants and other foreigners were
permitted to live only at Canton, and were
there restricted within the limits of a few
warehouses on the river. The first mission-
aries of the Board were the Rev. Messrs. Ro-
bert ^Y. Orr and John A. Mitchell, and Mrs.
Orr, who arrived at their station in April,
1838. In October following, Mr. Mitchell,
whose health was delicate when he left this
country, was called to his rest. With Mr.
Orr, he had visited Malacca and Penang, and
Mr. Orr afterwards visited Bangkok, to ol>
tain information concerning the most eligible
places for missionary wcn-k. In the next year
the Chinese teacher employed by Mr. Orr was
baptized by him. In July, 1840, the Rev.
Thomas L. McBryde and his wife arrived at
Singapore, and in December Mr. and Mrs.
Orr were compelled to leave their work by the
failure of Mr. Orr's health. In July, 1841,
James C. Hepburn, M.D., and his wife, reach-
ed Singapore, under appointment to the mis-
sion in Siam, but with permission to join the
China mission — a measure which the return of
Mr. Orr and other reasons made expedient.
Towards the end of this year Mr. and Mrs.
McBryde went up to Macao for the benefit of
a colder climate. In May, 1842, the Rev
Walter M. Lowrie arrived at Macao, and
sailed about a month afterwards for Singapore.
This voyage was undertaken with reference to
the question of removing the mission from
that place to China. The war between the
British and the Chinese was drawing to a
close, and it was a deeply important matter to
decide wisely on the line of efforts Avhich
should be followed under the new aspects of
this great field of labor. Mr. Lowrie's voy-
age, however, ended in the shipwreck of the
vessel, and the almost miraculous escape of
himself and most of the ship's company.
After sailing four hundred miles in open boats,
and encountering a severe gale at sea, they
reached Luban, a small island near Manila,
and Mr. Lowi'ie returned to Macao in Octo-
ber.
The termination of the war between the
British and the Chinese in this year changed
the whole question as to the stations to be oc-
cupied. These were not required to be hence-
forth at places many hundreds of miles distant
from China ; five of the principal cities on the
coast of the country were now open to the re-
sidence of missionaries, as well as of other
foreigners. Accordingly it was deemed expe-
dient for Mr. McBryde to occupy a station on
Koolongsoo, a small island close by the city of
Amoy. To this island, in 1833, Dr. Hepburn
removed from Singapore, after spending a few
months at Macao while the question of his sta-
tion was under consideration. In October,
Mr. McBryde and his family returned to this
country, on account of the failure of his
health. In February, 1844, D. B. McCartee,
M.D., and Mr. Richard Cole, a printer, and his
wife, arrived at Macao ; in July the Rev.
Richard W. Way and wife, first appointed to
Siam ; in October, the Rev. Messrs. M. Simp-
son, Culbertson and Augustus W. Loomis,
and their wives, and the Rev. Messrs. John
Lloyd and Andrew P. Happer, M. D. ; and in
May, 1845, the Rev. Hugh A. Brown. The
number of brethren thus arriving in China
showed that the churches were willing to re-
spond to the call of Providence for enlarged
missionary operations in this country. It was
now practicable to form plans of missionary
work on a wider scale, and after much consi-
deration it was determined to form three mis-
sions— at Canton, Amoy, and Ningpo. Messrs.
Happer and Cole were connected with the
Canton mission ; Messrs. Lloyd, Brown, and
Hepburn with the mission at Amoy ; and
Messrs. Lowrie, Way, Loomis, Culbertson, and
McCartee with the Ningpo mission.
An important auxiliary to these missions is
the printing-press. A brief account of this
deserves a place in these pages. Preliminary
to this notice it should be stated, that in no
other heathen country are there so many read-
ers as in China, and that there the process of
printing has long been in use. The Chinese
method of printing, however, is a very im-
perfect one ; the types are blocks of wood, on
which each letter or character has been en-
graved by the hand of the artist, and the im-
pressions are taken by means of a brush for
the ink and a block for the press ; the whole
being an operation so slow, that only the
patience of a Chinaman is equal to its de-
mands. Our admiration, however, is due to
the invention itself, and to the neatness and
economy of the printing thus executed ; but in
this day of finished machinery, and of large
stereotype editions of the Scriptures and other
284
CHINA.
books, this imperfect process does not suit the
exigencies of the Church in her missionary
work. On the other hand, a serious and appa-
rently insuperable difficulty in the way of
printing, either by machinery or by the use of
metallic types, was found in the large number
of Chinese letters or characters. This num-
ber is estimated at 30,000 ; a common jirint-
ing-office case contains but 56.
For a satisfactory statement of the " dis-
covery," as it may well be called, of the me-
thod of printing this multitude of Chinese
characters with a small number of metallic
types, the reader may consult the Annual Re-
port of the Western Foreign Missionary Soci-
ety, May, 1837. It turns on the distinction
between the formatives and primitives in the
Chinese language, and between the divisible
and indivisible characters. The divisible are
reduced to their simj^lcst elements, and being
struck off as tj-pes, can be re-composed in dif-
ferent characters, so that a comparatively
small number of types will serve to express
most of the characters in common use. At
the instance of the Corresponding Secretary
of the Board, whose previous study of this
language had prepared him to take a deep in-
terest in this matter, the committee agreed in
183G, to order a- set of the matrices for this
new mode of printing Chinese. These matri-
ces were made in Paris, at a cost of over
$5,000. Types were cast from them in New
York, by Mr. Cole ; and at Macao both he
and Mr. Lowrie gave much time and labor to
perfecting the types, arranging the cases, and
other things requisite to the practical applica-
tion of this new invention. Many fears and
some predictions of failure were happily dis-
appointed, and its success may be regarded as
an era in the history of this people. For seve-
ral years this mode of printing has been in
operation. Large editions of works are j^rint-
ed, from stereotyjie plates, on improved presses,
such as are in use in our own country, which
will he driven by steam-power wlien Ihe Chi-
nese become a Christian people. It is of inte-
rest to add, that but for the order given by the
committee in 183G for a set of these matrices,
this great invention would pro1)ably not have
been brought into use. So little confidence
was felt in its practicability, that no other
missionary institution would give it their pa-
tronage. Only one other order was received
by the artist, and without at least two orders
he could not proceed with the work.
In 1845 the printing-press was removed from
Macao to Ningpo, and upwards of 3,500,000
pages were printed. A station was occupied
at Cluisan,an island not far distant from IS'ing-
po, which was then in the possession of the Bri-
tish. 'JMiis was an experimont to determine
whether other places besides the cities opened
under the treaty could be occupied by mission-
aries; but it was found that the authoritii'S
civilly but firmly ojjposcd their permanent res-
idence there, although the people of the island
were friendly ; and the station was relinquish-
ed soon after the island was restored by the
British to the Chinese.
In 1846, Dr. and Mrs. Hepburn reached this
country, being compelled to return by the state
of Mrs. Hepburn's health. In December, the
Rev. Messrs. William Speer and John B.
French, and Mrs. Speer, arrived at Canton,
and the Rev. John W. Quarterman joined the
Ningpo mission. A church was organized at
Ningpo in May ; boarding-schools were open-
ed at Canton and Ningpo ; and most of the
missionaries were now sufficiently acquainted
with the Chinese language to conduct religious
services in chapels, and to make known the
Gospel by the way-side.
The year 1847 was marked by the ieath of
Mrs. Speer on the 16th of April, and of Mr.
Lowrie on the 19th of August — the latter
under most afflicting circumstances, by the
hands of Chinese pirates.* Mr. Cole's connec-
tion with the mission ceased, and Mr. Happer
was married to a daughter of Dr. Ball, an
American missionai-y at Canton.
In 1848, the Rev. Messrs. Joseph K. Wight
and Henry Y. Rankin, and their wives, arrived
in China, to join the Ningpo mission. Mr.
Brown was compelled to return to this country,
by the state of his health, and on the 6th of
December Mr. Lloyd was called to his rest.
The station at Amoy has not since been occu-
pied by the Board.
In 1849, Mr. Moses S. Coulter and his wife
arrived in China — Mr. Coulter having been
appointed to take charge of the press at Ning-
po, while continuing his studies for the work
of the ministry.
In 1850, the Rev. Messrs. Samuel N. and
William P. Martin, and their wives, arrived at
Ningpo. Mr. Loomis and his wife and Mr.
Speer returned to this country, on account of
their health. A new mission was formed at
Shanghai, to which Mr. Wight and Mr. Culbert-
son were appointed — the latter with a special
view to the work of translating the Scriptures.
In 1851, Mr. French was married to the
second daughter of Dr. Ball, the sister of Mrs.
Happer ; and in 1852, the Rev. John Byers
and his wife and Miss Juana M. Knight arriv-
ed in China, the latter to be associated with
her sister, Mrs. Rankin in the female boarding-
school at Ningpo, and Mr. Byers to be station-
ed at Shanghai. Mr. Coulter was called to
his rest, on the 12th of December, and the
health of Mr. Byers having given way shortly
after reaching his station, he and his wife start-
ed on their voyage homewards, but he was also
taken to his rest on the 8th of April,_ 18.53.
In August, the Rev. John Nevius and his wife
* ?ce Memoirs of the Rev. Walter M. Lowrie : Xcw-l orlc,
1849. Robert Carter & Brothers. He was a mcniber of a
Convention of Missionaries at Sliangliai, engaged in the
translation of the Scriptures, and was returning to his sta-
tion at Ningpo, when he was taken, as by a martyr's death,
to his rest.
CHINA.
285
sailed for Ningpo, and iu Novembex' the Kev.
Charles F. Preston, and J. G. Kerr, M.D., and
his wife, for Canton. In this year also, Dr.
McCartce was married to Miss Knight.
In April, 1854, the Rev. Reuben Lowrie and
his wife embarked for China, to be connected
with the Shanghai mission.
This is but a slight sketch of the missions
of the Board in China, yet it shows that an
important work is in steady progress. Twelve
ministers and tv/o physicians, nearly all of
whom are married men, are stationed at the
cities of Canton, Shanghai, and Ningpo. The
boarding-schools contain about sixty boys and
thirty girls, and the day-schools about sixty
boys. The church at Ningpo numbers twenty-
three communicants. The printing-press at
that city has sent forth upwards of 24,000,000
of pages of the Sacred Scriptures and other
Christian publications, and is still in effective
operation. The medico-missionary labors of
Mr. Happer and Dr. McCartee have exerted a
wide-spread influence in favor of the Christian
religion, which is perceived to inspire its fol-
lowers with benevolence, and to confer evident
blessings on the poor and needy. Dr. McCar-
tee's influence, as a Christian physician, is such
as might well be envied by the most favored
of his professional brethren in any of our own
cities. Numerous chapels, most of them rooms
hired for the purpose, are open for religious
services, and at Ningpo a large and convenient
church has been erected, in which public wor-
ship is regularly conducted. The Gospel has
been frequently proclaimed, also, at the tem-
ples and other places of public coi;course, and
in the villages in the vicinity of Ningpo.
By means of these various labors, the leaven
of divine truth has been extensively diffused,
and is producing its appropriate influence. A
signal example of this occurred during the last
year, in connection with the Ningpo mission.
A part of the sacred volume, received from a
missionary, was carried by a Chinaman to
his own village, at some distance iu the in-
terior of the country. It seems to have made
no impression on the mind of him who first
received it, but it fell into the hands of an aged
man, who ibr fourscore years had been a wor-
shiper of idols. His attention was awakened
to consider this new religion, and he concluded
to go in search of the giver of this strange
book. He came to Ningpo, took up his abode
on the premises of one of the missionaries, and
spent his time in reading the sacred volume
and attending to the instructions of his kind
teacher, — often coming with the Bible in
his hand to ask for explanations of difBcult
passages, and manifesting a teachable spirit.
After some months thus employed, he gave
pleasing evidence of being a subject of divine
grace, and was received into the church of
Christ by baptism, in the presence of a large | gation. In the early part of the year 1854,
congregation of his heathen countrymen. I Mr. Speer was permitted to organize a church
Could anything more clearly attest that the
Gospel is the power of God unto salvation?
Commonly we indulge little hope of the con-
version of very aged persons, even in Christian
lands ; but here, in the adorable exercise of
God's sovereignty in grace, we see an aged
idolator, living far distant from the ministra-
tions of the sanctuary, brought into the com-
munion of the saints I Such an example shows
that nothing is too hard for the Almighty.
The Mission to the Chinese in California
properly follows the missions in China itself.
The fame of the gold mines has drawn some
thousands of this gain-seeking people to our
shores. Thus far, they have nearly all come
from the province of Canton, and speak the
dialect of that province. The Rev. William
Speer and his wife commenced their labors,
amongst them at San Francisco, in the autumn
of 1852. Having been stationed at Canton
in former years, his health being now restored,
Mr. Speer could at once speak to them in their
tongue, the wonderful works of God. Their
civil relations to each other were now reversed ;
they are the foreigners, and their missionary
could bid them welcome to his native land ;
accordingly, his visits were well received by
them. He found several Chinese patients in
the hospital, who were grateful for his instruc-
tions and aid ; a school was opened, but the
attendance was not regular. After some time,
an eligible place of worship was secured for a
few months, where services were conducted
in the Chinese language, with a varying au-
dience. Eventually the liberality of residents
of San Francisco provided a suitable building
for the use of the mission, in which it is de-
signed to have a school and a chapel, with
convenient apartments for the family of the
missionary. Many of the Chinese gave hand-
some donations towards* the purchase of this
property.
_ Among the favorable incidents in the brief
history of this mission, it may be noted that
some of the former pupils in the mission schools
in China were found in California. They were
predisposed to give a hearty reception to one
whose character and motives were at once un-
derstood by them. Another favorable provi-
dence was the return to China of an influential
man, whose influence would have been strongly
arrayed against the mission, and the choice as
his successor, to be the head of a company dr
association of Chinese, of a man who looked
with a friendly eye upon these efforts for the
benefit of his people. Afterwards a few Chris-
tians were found, who had been received into
the church by missionaries in their native land.
Their conduct appears to have been worthy of
their profession ; they rested from work on the
Sabbath, even at the mines, and met together
for religious worship ; but their wandering
ife prevented their forming a regular conore-
286
CHINA.
at San Francisco, with four Chinese commu-
nicants, one of whom was ordained as a ruling
elder. Thus an auspicious beginning has been
made.
The future influence of this mission Avill of
course depend to a considerable extent on the
number of Chinese who may seek a temporary
or a permanent home in our land. There are
causes which render it not unlikely that large
numbers of them will come to this country.
Some of these have been already referred to ;
others need not be here speeihed. On the
other hand, their emigration may be checked,
as indeed it was for a time, by the harsh and
un-American treatment which they met with
from some of our countrymen — or more likely
from some of the reprobate foreigners. The
impositions to which they are subject at the
mines will go far to deter them from remaining,
and to i)revent others from coming. These
oppressions are disgraceful to those who are
guilty of them ; but with a better tone of morals
at the mines, every thing of this kind must
cease. It seems quite clear that our country-
men should encourage and not repel the immi-
gration of the Chinese. They will form a most
valuable class of laborers, being industrious,
peaceable, and frugal. It may easily come to
pass that the Chinese will to a large extent sup-
plant the Negroes, in the cultivation of rice, cotr
ton, and sugar-cane. They will be found to be
a superior class of laborers, and every way less
expensive. Their employment in this country,
not merely in the mines of California, nor in
the slave States of the South, but in many
avocations in all the States, may become obvi-
ously desirable and quite expedient to our own
citizens, while it will afford a comfortable sub-
sistence to myriads of our now half-starving
fellow-creatures in China. Above all, it will
bring them within the reach of Christian in-
struction and example, and result iu the salva-
tion of multitudes of them iu our own day and
in ages to come. The wonderful ordering of
Providence that has already brought so many
of them to our shores should awaken attention
to their condition, and to the claims on the
missionary efforts of the churches of the great
nation whom they represent. — Lowrie's Manual
of Missions.
TABULAR VIEW.
MISSIONS.
STATIONS.
•6
a
a
a
a
a
Missionaries and Assistant
Missionaries.
i
a
6
Scholars.
Ministers.
Lay Teachers
and others.
Boarding.
Day.
103
78
o
o
a
<
9
1
American.
a!
>
^
^
1
i
3
a
Canton,
NlNGPO,
Shanghai ,
Chinese in Cal- 1
IFORNIA,. . . j
Canton, ....
Ningpo, . . .
Shanghai, . .
San Francisco,
Totals, .
1846
18-14
1850
1852
3
6
3
1
1
1
3
7
3
1
1
1
30
4
30
26
6
29
67
23
13
2
14
2
34
56
35
90
181
American Baptist Missionary Union. —
The earliest missionaries appointed by this
Society for the Chinese were settled at Bang-
kok, in Siam, and also at Macao. Their labors
arc given in full in the sketch of the Baptist
Mission in that country. These laltors were
undertaken at a period when China itself was
comparatively inaccessible to the missionary
or to any fureign residents, and were estab-
lished at Bangkok and Macao on account of
the multitudes of Chinese who are found either
permanently residing or freciuently visiting
those cities. They remained there until the
close of the late war between Creat Britain
and China, when by the treaty, which ter-
minati'd tlic war in l"842, the island of Hong-
kong, having been ceded to the British Gov-
ernment, the five ports of Canton, Amoy, Fuh-
chau, Ningpo, and Shanghai, having been open-
ed to British commerce, Rev. Issachar John-
sou, Rev. J. L. Shuck, and Rev. Wm. Dean,
removed to Ilong-kong, the two former from
Macao, the latt(,'r from Bangkok. Messrs.
Dean and vShuck, with their families, establish-
ed themselves at Victoria, tlie ca})ital of the
island, and Mr. Johnson at Chek-chu, a smaller
town on its southern shore. These missit)narie3
had already aeciuircd the language of China,
and were familiar with the cluiracter and man-
ners of its people. They were fully prepared
to commence the work on which th(>y were
sent. They were received in Ilong-kong with
kindness and favor from the British officers and
residents, especially from Sir Henry Pot linger,
the English ambassador, who had negotiated
the treaty. With their assistance, a lot was
CHINA.
287
obtained from the government on which a
mission-house was erected, and two commodi-
ous chapels were also built to be used alike for
public worship and for schools. A church of
five native members was organized, and placed
under the care of Mr. Shuck, to which four
others were added by baptism during the year
1842. At Chek-chu a chapel was also erect-
ed, in which Mr. Eoberts conducted service
both in Chinese and English. He also estab-
lished a school, which was taught princiijally by
one of the Chinese converts, who had come up
from Siam. In this manner, in the summer of
1842 wer^ commenced the first missions of the
American Baptists in China. The three mis-
sionaries by whom they were planted, had
long been waiting at their distant outposts,
but they were now for the first time established
in China. They were indebted to the protec-
tion of the English flag for the opportunities
they enjoyed ; but they saw the whole empire,
with its almost numberless population, open-
ing, as it were, before them. The barriers of
ages had at length begun to give way. The
day was evidently at hand when the Gospel
was to be preached to the millions of China.
In 1843, the mission was bereft of Mrs.
Dean, an English lady, who had come to the
East, under the auspices of a society of her
countrywomen, for " Promoting Female Edu-
cation." She had married Mr. Dean during
his residence in Siam, and both there and in
Hong-kong had proved herself a faithful and
efficient missionary. At about the same time
also Mr. Dean was obliged by ill-health to
suspend his labors and for a time to change the
climate. In the spring of the same year the
mission was reinforced by the arrival of Dr. D.
J. Macgowan. He, however, soon repaired to
Canton, for the purpose of consulting with Dr.
Parker, one of the missionary physicians of the
American Board, and at length decided to set-
tle at Ningpo, and there to commence a new
mission. In connection with Dr. Macartee, of
the American Presbyterian mission, he founded
a missionary hospital. The mission had from
the beginning been regarded with special favor
by many of the English officers, residents in
Hong-kong, who had given it their counte-
nance, and contributed liberally to its support.
It began with the most gratifying auspices,
and a second church was soon established at
Victoria. The people heard the Gospel preach-
ed by the missionaries in the several dialects
of their own tongue. In the summer of 1844
a treaty was concluded between Mr. Gushing,
Commissioner of the United States, and an
imperial commissioner of China, by the terms
of which all the advantages hitherto granted
to the English by the treaty of 1842 were
guaranteed to citizens of this country, and. in
addition, provision was made for the erection
of chapels, hospitals, and cemeteries, at each
one of the five ports. From this time Ameri-
can missionaries and other American residents
began to enjoy many privileges which before
they had procured only in consequence of their
connection with the English. This provision
in the treaty has distinctly recognized the
missions as among the national interests in
China which the American government do-
signs to protect.
But these prospects of the mission were soon
to be shaded by afflicting events, which for a
time retarded its progress. In November,
1844, Mrs. Shuck died at Yictoria, after a
brief illness. She was a native of Virginia,
and had sailed from the United States with
her husband in 1835. They had resided at
Macao until the opening of China to the Eng-
lish in 1842, and she was now cut ofi" at the most
interesting epoch in the history of the mission.
Mr. Dean, also, at nearly the same time, was
obliged to sail for the United States, in order
to recruit his health ; and was thus withdrawn
from his appropriate labors for upwards of two
years. In the autumn of 1844, Dr. Devan, a
missionary physician, with his wife, arrived at
Hong-kong. They subsequently removed to
Canton, where a mission-house was erected,
and several assistants were employed. But
their connection with the mission was of short
duration. Mrs. Devan died, much lamented,
at Canton, in October, 1846, and her husband,
finding himself unable to reside permanently
within the tropics, returned to the United
States. Mr. Shuck had already returned iu
1845, and on the organization of the Southern
Baptist Convention, he was transferred to the
service of that body, by whom the missioi\
buildings at Canton were purchased.
These changes, however, did not entirely
suppress the energies of the missionaries, who
remained behind, or prevent the progress and
growth of the mission. Hong-kong seemed
at that time to ofier many advantages, in con-
sequence of the presence of the English, but
more especially on account of the superior char
racter of the people who inhabit the island ;
and many sanguine hopes were then indulged;
which have been but imperfectly realized, in
the years that have since elapsed. In 1847,
Rev. E. C. Lord and his wife were added to
the mission at Ningpo, and in 1848, Eev.
John Johnson and his wife were added to that
at Hong-kong, though Mrs. Johnson was al-
most immediately removed by death. About
the same period, Mr. Goddard removed from
Bangkok, where he had, for several years, been
engaged in the Chinese department of the mis-.
sion,and established himself at Ningpo, where,
with occasional interruptions, he has since con-
tinued to reside. His health had not admitted
of regular preaching, and though not without
frequent preaching, he has been for the most
part engaged in the translation of the Scrip-
tures. This work, at all times, and in all cir-
cumstances, is sufficiently difficult and respon-
sible ; but the translation into Chinese is at-
tended with peculiar difficulties and embarrass-
288
CHINA.
ments. In 1843, a plan was formed among
the missionaries then in China, of the varions
denominations from England and America,
designed to establish a standard by which the
translation of the Scriptures should be regu-
lated and determined. The American Baptist
Missionaries appear at first to have thought
favorably of the plan ; but they afterwards,
with the approbation of the Board of Mana-
gers, decided not to adopt it, but to complete
the translation of their own, which had already
been begun. To this work Eev. Messrs. Dean
and Goddard have since been devoting their
almost constant labors. The New Testament
is now nearly all translated ; the translation is
undergoing the careful revision of both these
missionaries, while each one has made a be-
ginning with certain books of the Old Testa-
ment.
In 1851, Mr. and Mrs. Lord returned to the
United States, in consequence of the declining
health of the latter — she has since ceased from
her labors. The two stations of the original
mission, in Hong-kong and in Ningpo, have
been organized as separate missions, though
the number of missionaries attached to each
remains the same. On the island of Hong-
kong, in addition to the principal station at
Victoria, there ai'e also four out-stations at
which schools and preaching are maintained by
as many native assistants and teachers, who
are under the immediate supervision of the
missionaries. The church connected with this
mission numbers, at the present time, about 30
members, who make annual contributions for
the support of the native assistants, and for the
promotion of the Gospel among their country-
men. The missionaries at Hong-kong arc
Eev. Messrs Dean and Johnson, who also em-
ploy four assistants and three school teachers.
The mission at Ningpo has no out-stations.
It has had from the beginning a medical es-
tablishment, which has given to Dr. Mac-
gowan unusual facilities in becoming ac-
cjuainted with the people, and presenting to
them the claims of the Gospel. The church
here contains ten members. The missionaries
now belonging to the mission are, llcv. Messrs.
Lord, Goddard, and Knowlton, and Dr. Mac-
gowan. At both these missions, the agencies
hitherto employed are substantially the same.
They consist in jireaching the Gospel and con-
versation with the people, the circulation of
the Scriptures, and of religious books,
and the teaching of schools. The results of
these agencies, which have now been sustained
for upwards of ten years, do not, it is true, re-
alize the hopes with which the missionaries
first entered China, on the opening of the five
ports in J 842. But those hopes were undoubt-
edly the offspring of ine.xperience. It has since
been found tliat it is one thing to have access
to the people of a country, and quite anolliec
to convert them to the (/ospel of Christ. I'he
missionaries, instructed by experience, arc still
at work, with hopes chastened by the lapse of
time. Great changes are taking place in the
manners and policy of the people among whom
they are dwelling ; but still greater changes
are preparing through the agencies which
Christian missions have established, and will
develope themselves in the ages of the fu-
ture.
Ttvo Missicms in China — Statistics in 1854.
— Hong-kong mission, 1 station, 4 outstations,
2 missionaries, 1 female assistant, 4 native
preachers and assistants, 1 church, six day
schools, 75 pupils.
Ningpo mission, 1 station, 4 missionaries, 4
female assistants, 2 native assistants, 1 church,
14 members, 3 day schools, 36 pupils. — Peof.
W. Gammell.
Methodist Episcopai. Church. — It is now
eight years since the Methodist Episcopal
Church in the United States commenced the
missionary work in China. The first mission-
aries were the Eev. Messrs. Moses C. White
and Judson D. Collins, the latter of whom,
with the wife of the former, have died in the
work. This mission has suffered much in com-
mon with all other missions in China, from
the agitations growing out of the progress of
the revolution going on in that empire. Pre-
vious to 1846, the idea of founding a mission
in the Empire of China, was often discussed
in the periodicals of the Methodist Episcopal
Church ; and many generous contributions were
ofiered for the object. In conjunction with
the General Missionary Committee, the Board
in 1847 resolved on its establishment, and the
Providence of God soon supplied the men to
undertake it. They arrived in Hong-kong in
August, 1847, and were kindly received by
missionary brethren of all the other denomi-
nations. After remaining at Hong-kong a
few days, they sailed for their destination, at
Fuhchau. Here they soon obtained a resi-
dence and gave themselves up to the study of
the language, Mr. AVhite, meanwhile, practic-
ing medicine ; and by the distribution of books
and tracts, they endeavored to make themselves
useful among the half-million of people com-
posing the population of the citv.
The Eev. H. Hickok and Eev. Eobert C.
Maclay were sent out in October, 1847, but
Mr. Hickok was soon obliged, by failure of
his health, to return to the Uijited States.
'J'he three brethren who remained went daily
into the crowded streets and preached, as well
as they were able, " Jesus Christ and him cru-
cified," to the groups who stopped to listen to
their voice. They distributed tracts, and the
scriptures printed under their own supervision,
and found the people eager to receive them.
One of the brethren having had the advan-
tage of a partial course of medical study,
opened a dispensary, in which he was enabled
to treat many cases of disease, giving at the
same time, to the patients and tlieir friends,
religious instruction and Christian books.
CHINA.
289
Each of the missionaries had uuder his per-
sonal siipervision a day school, taught by a
Chinese master. In the three schools, they
had in 1849, G4 scholars, with an average at-
tendance of 50. Though the labors devoted
to this mission thus far, chiefly contemplated
prospective results, yet the laborers employed
were not without some measure of present en-
couragemeut. They perceived a yielding of
inveterate prejudices, and a willin^ess to
allow them to occupy portions of the city, in
which at first they could get no foothold.
And as they became more familiar with the
language and customs of the people, they saw
greater openings for usefulness. They long
and earnestly intreated for reinforcements, and
for means to establish a boarding school for
the youth of both sexes. The report of the
Superintendent of the mission for 1851, gives
the following account of their mode of labor :
" The only mission chapel we occupy at pre-
sent, is on the street, not far from the mission
residences south of the river. It is small,
having iu fact been rented rather as a room
for the distribution of tracts, than as a regular
preaching place. It will seat perhaps fifty
persons ; and as it is not upon a thronged street
it answers very well for addressing such con-
gregations as come iu. The preacher, when he
goes into the desk here, finds himself in cir-
cumstances very different from those which
surround him at home. Here come in street
passengers, few or many, as the case may be;
some will have the poles on which they carry
burdens ; some packages which they have been
buying, or are going to sell ; some will be
empty handed. They stand or sit, gazing list-
lessly about, noticing the room and its inmates,
especially the stranger. It may be the speaker
is going on with his remarks. The incomer
expresses aloud to his neighbor, his surprise
and delight, that the stranger can speak their
language — wonders aloud how long the man
has been in the country, or how old he is.
Those who are listening to the missionary, pro-
bably repeat the words as they fall from his
lips — look to those about them, and express
their approbation of the truths declared. They
may be the most solemn teachings of God's
word he thus endorses ; and perhaps the next
sentence will be to inquire how many thick-
nesses of clothes the preacher wears, or what
viands he eats with his rice. Thus it is, a
sense of the solemnity of eternal truths is to
be inculcated as well as those truths them-
selves. Some seem more serious. We are
glad of a hearing — are encouraged by a little
attention. We scatter the seed, and look for-
ward to the time when he that soweth and he
that reapeth shall rejoice together.
" AVe have distributed a great many tracts.
At certain times and in certain places, the
people seem beside themselves, in their anxiety
to get possession of them. They crowd around,
they call out, they push each other, and abuse
19
each other, in order to come at the books.
They take without asking, they grasp them
and will not let go their hold. Books are sel-
dom destroyed by the Chinese ; if not read at
once, they are carefully laid aside, and may be
read at another time. Sometimes we may go
gently on with the distribution ; at the same
time making remarks. Books distributed from
shop to shop are.thankfully received, and al-
most invariably read. Printing is very cheap
here, and at a small cost we have published
and circulated more than half a million of
pages. We have not at present any copies of
the Scriptures on hand ; we need them, and
hope that ere long the questions in regard to
the different versions will be so far settled as
to allow us to publish an edition."
In 1852, Dr. and Mrs. Wiley, Mr. and Mrs.
Colder, and Miss Seely arrived at Fuhchau.
Their entrance upon their field of labor was
very favorable. Messrs. White and Maclay
had each a small chapel erected, when the at-
tendance was good, and an increased attention
to the preached word was quite perceptible.
Wayside preaching and the distribution of the
Scriptures and tracts were prosecuted with
diligence : thus sowing the seed of divine truth
beside all waters, and humbly looking up to
God to give the increase. In their efforts for
printing and circulating the Word of God, the
missionaries make grateful mention of the kind
help they received from the American Bible
Society. They are endeavoring to prepare to
do their part in the work to which it would
seem that God will call the Protestant Church
in China, when all the results of the strange
revolution now in progress there shall have
been developed. Nov. 3d 1853, Mrs. Wiley,
wife of Rev. Dr. Wiley, departed this life in
the triumphs of faith. She was cut down in
the midst of her years and usefulness, far from
the laud of her birth, and buried among the
tombs of idolaters ; but the cause iu which
she rendered up her life will never die, but
move onward till it covers the wide domains
of the Celestial Empire.
The fruits of the mission to China, as the
fruits of all missions in old and consolidated
heathen states, appear slowly. Perhaps the
most valuable and extensive results of such
missions do not appear for ages. Confidence
in the old religion must be destroyed ; convic-
tion in favor of the new must be produced ;
and when this is done, old habits, as well as
the native enmity of the human heart, must be
overcome and changed, and new forms of
thought and feeling are to be introduced and
incorporated into society. It will require cen-
turies to obtain these results. — Anmml Reports
and Missionary Advocate. — Rev. W, Butler.
Methodist Episcopal Church, South. —
The missionary Society of the Methodist Epis-
copal Church South, began its operations in Chi-
na, in 1848. The first missionaries sent out were
the Rev. Charles Taylor, M.D., and Rev. Bcnj.
290
CHINA.
Jenkins, D.D., who, with their families, sailed
from Boston for Shanghai, April 24, 1848.
Dr. Taylor's medical knowledge fitted him for
usefulness in that respect also, and his colleague,
Dr. Jenkins, possessed extra advantages, being
one of the best linguists in the country. To a
knowledge of Hebrew, Greek, and Latin, he
added an acquaintance with the French, Ger-
man, and Spanish languages. He is besides,
a practical printer, and will be able on that
account also, to enlarge his field of usefulness
in the Celestial Empire. Both of these breth-
ren engaged to remain in China at least ten
years ; and, being in the vigor of life, are not
so young as to be novices, nor too old to acquire
a difHcult language, and adapt themselves to
the peculiar habits and manners of the Chinese
people. On their arrival they devoted them-
selves to the acquisition of the Chinese lan-
guage, and meauAvhile made themselves useful
through the medium of interpreters. The
church at home nobly and liberally sustained
the mission, and sent the Rev. G. W. E. Cun-
ningham to their help, in 1852. They turned
part of their house into a chapel, and soon had
an attentive and interesting congregation, and
a few souls became deeply concerned for their
salvation ; one of whom, in particular, has be-
gun to be useful. Accompanied by this native
preacher, Lieiv-scen-sang, they also establish-
ed regular preaching in the open air, at the
principal place of resort in the city. Their
school had 34 names on its roll. But the breth-
ren earnestly desire the establishment of two
boarding-schools, one for boys, and another for
girls. Measures were also in operation for
building a church, and setting up a printing-
press. But the health of Mrs. Taylor became
feeble, and she, with her children, returned to
the United States. Shortly after, Mrs. Jen-
kins's health became prostrate ; and in the
hope of saving her life. Dr. J. left with her for
America. But she continued to sink, and was
taken to her eternal rest before she could reach
her native land, leaving a bereaved husband
and six little ones. Soon after Dr. Jenkins
left, and before Shanghai had fallen into the
hands of the insurgents, Dr. Taylor set his
heart upon penetrating as far as the insurgent
camp at Chin-kiang-foo, in order to ascertain
what were the real sentiments of the invaders
in reference to Christianity, and what would
be the result, as to Christian missions, of their
triumph. This was a bold and dangerous pro-
ject, as the city was then besieged by the
imperialists, both by land and water ; and
should he even succeed in evading their vigi-
lance, he knew not what reception he might
expect at the hands of the insurgents. But he
resolved to make the attempt notwithstanding,
and God preserved him in safety. Some ac-
count of this expedition will be found under
the head of the Chinese Revolution, near the
close of this article.
The health of Mrs. Taylor having failed,
she was under the necessity of returning to the
United States, in the hope of recruiting it.
Dr. Taylor, several months afterward, fol-
lowed her ; and he, with Dr. Jenkins, itine-
rated through the Southern church for some
time, bringing the cause of China before them,
and arousing a deeper sympathy on its behatf.
Shortly after Mr. Taylor left Shanghai (in Oc-
tober, 1853), the city was taken, and for some
time the only remaining missionary, Mr. Cun-
ningham, was very much circumscribed in
his efforts to do good. But notwithstanding
the blockade by the Imperialists, matters have
become more settled, and he, with the native
local preacher, Liew, is again at his regular
work.
The Board of Missions of the Methodist E.
Church South feel an increased interest in this
field of Christian activity, and at their late an-
nual meeting the sum of $30,000 was appro-
jjriated for the support of this mission, the
purchase of a printing-press, the erection of a
church and a building for a school. They
have also strongly reinforced its staff of agents,
and by the time these sheets are before om-
readers, the Rev. Drs. Taylor and Jenkins, ac-
companied by the Rev. Messrs. Kelly, Belton,
and Lambeth, will be on their way to China,
or perhaps actually arrived there. — Ammal Re-
ports and Missionary Advocate. — Rev. W. But-
LEKf
AVesleyan Missionary Society. — Just
about the time that China was thrown open to
missionary effort, this society had been making
extraordinary exertions for Africa, the West
Indies, and the South Seas. After the eman-
cipation of the slaves, the missionaries were
largely increased in the West Indies ; the new
and costly mission to the Gold Coast and
Ashantee was established, and the cry from
Feejee was responded to ; with, at the same
time, considerable extension in New Zealand,
South Africa, Australia, and India. In 1844,
the society had increased the number of its
missionaries within ten years, by 123. This
rapid extension caused a corresponding out-
lay, which greatly exceeded the additional in-
come, and debts accumulated upon the com-
mittee, which, notwithstanding many instances
of truly Christian liberality, have, up to
the present time, hindered extension beyond
the necessity of keeping what had already
been gained ; yet the missionaries of the so-
ciety are this year one hundred and one more
tluin in 1844. Many felt that the call of the
society was rather to reinforce missions already
begun, than to enter upon a new undertaking,
so formidable as China. Yet many yearned
for that land. One and another made offer-
ings for the cnterprize ; one valued branch so-
ciety held a meeting and raised a considerable
sum. Yet with their existing burdens the com-
mittee could not proceed ; but a sub-commit-
tee was appointed, with a view to obtain all
desirable information, and make such arrange-
CHINA.
291
ments as miglit facilitate a movement when
the way seemed to open. But in the autumn
of 1850, God selected his own instrument for
the commencement of this work. George
Piercy, a simple-hearted but interesting young
man, in Yorkshire, having been truly convert-
ed to God, felt his soul yearning for the salva-
tion of the heathen world. The Spirit of
God found him, like Elisha, at the plough, and
threw over him the commission of Heaven for
the evangelization of China. Without any
hesitation he sacrificed the secular pursuits of
life, and proceeded to seek direction how he
should find his way to that field of labor to
which God had called him. About thirty
miles from his residence there was a Christian
friend of his, Mr. Henry Reed, whom he con-
sulted in reference to his impression that it
was his duty to go and labor in China. Mr.
Reed did all he could to dissuade him, urging the
great difficulty of acquiring the language anfl
the obstacles that he would have to encounter
on his arrival, and tried to direct his attention
to some other missionary field, that presented
less difficulties. But to every argument his
reply was : " I believe, sir, that God has call-
ed me to labor in China, but I have no such
impression that I have a call to any other part
of the mission field." At length, however, the
young man was persuaded for the time to
abandon the idea. But, in about six months
he waited upon Mr. Reed again, and stated
that the impression upon his mind not only
continued, but increased in strength. His
friend, satisfied that he was determined to fol-
low up what he believed to be a religious con-
viction, gave him a letter of introduction to
Rev. William Arthur, one of the general se-
cretaries of the society. For reasons already
stated, he was not recognized by the commit-
tee ; but nothing discouraged by their inabi-
lity to employ him, from his own limited
means he paid his passage, and the next in-
formation which his friend received was a
letter, in which he stated that he was then
on his way to that great empire. On his ar-
rival there, the facility with which he acquired
the language was amazing, and the openings
that he found for labor were equally remark-
able.
Mr. Piercy arrived at Hong-kong, January
30, 1851, expecting to fiud a pious sergeant at
the head of a small class of soldiers. The
following is his own account of his entrance
upon the field, in a letter to the Secretaries of
the Society : " Stepping ashore, a stranger in
a strange laud, with my heart beating hard in
my bosom — for I hoped speedily to find Ser-
geant Ross, and with him and his praying few
to tell of the goodness of our common Lord, I
walked on towards the barracks. The first I
met I addressed, inquiring where I might find
Ross. ' He is dead,' was the startling reply.
I felt, I knew not how, for a few moments — the
loneliness, the utter loneliness of my situation
seemed almost to unnerve me. With a falter-
ing tongue, I inquired further, and the particu-
lars of his death were told in tones solemn as
my own. The young man evidently felt much
as he told of his comrade's sickness and death.
I soon inquired as to his circumstances and
name. Corporal, now Sergeant D -, was
the individual with whom I was conversing.
This was most providential, and soon, in a
great measure, relieved the feelings which had
thus suddenly come into my soul. I soon learn-
ed all about Ross and Methodism in Hong-
kong. He, to use D 's words, was a
young man, but an old Christian, and had been
the centre of a little band, who sought to save
their souls, six or seven in number. They had
often met in his room ; but he fell, and they
fell, some with him, a prey to death, and others
into the indifference of the world ; and D ■
stood lonely as I had been myself, upon the
deep. He had oft, he said, longed and prayed
for a companion, and he thanked God for thus
giving him one. In a few minutes we were
brothers beloved, thanks be to a God of provi-
dence for this direction of his hand ! "
Having thus experienced the goodness of a
guiding Providence, he soon received a proof
of the catholicity of missionary affection, hon-
orable both to Dr. Legge and the London
Missionary Society. Mr. Piercy says : " We
thought it best to go to Dr. Legge, as he has
a good name for a catholic spirit. He was
not at home ; but we soon found him in the
Chinese Chapel, and I heard the Gospel in a
strange tongue, utterly strange ; though I had
tried to learn all the way as I came, a word
now and then was all that I could make out.
After the service, the young corporal intro-
duced me to the Doctor, and he most kindly
offered me a bed in his house for the night, say-
ing, the morning would bring leisure to
consider farther. I found Dr. Legge a man of
God, and soon disclosed all ray heart to him.
He advised me to do nothing rashly, but look
around, and make inquiries, and watch prayer-
fully for the moving of the cloud of Provi-
dence. ' After ten or twelve days, perhaps you
will see your way ; in the mean time you are
welcome to a bed, and the room you have been
in, in this house.' This was kind. I thanked
God, and took courage."
After residing about three weeks under the
hospitable roof of Dr. Legge, Mr. Piercy hired
rooms, one of which, capable of containing
about sixty persons, he turned into a preach-
ing-place for the English soldiery. He, at the
same time, commenced visiting the sick sol-
diers in the hospital ; and, under the kind di-
rection of Dr. Herschberg, of the London Mis-
sionary Society, applied himself to the acqui-
sition of some knowledge of medicine, with a
view to using it for missionary purposes. The
Lord blessed his labors among the soldiers and
their wives, and about twenty were soon for-
med into a society, of whose sincerity he had
292
CHINA.
good hope. Those among whom he had la-
bored showed a disposition to contribute to
his support ; and, though his own funds were
expended much sooner than he expected, what
they raised, coupled with small sums sent by
friends in England, enabled him to devote all
his time to mission work, without taking any
secular employment, as, when going out, he
bad anticipated that he might be obliged
to do.
From the first, he looked upon his stay in
Hong-koug as but temporary, and was making
inquiries, with a view to select a station on the
Chinese mainland. After months of useful
labor among the soldiery at Hong-koiig, he
decided on placing himself at Canton, and
there he received from Dr. Hobson, also of the
Loudon Missionary Society, the same brother-
ly kindness which he had previously received
from Dr. Legge. He gives this account of
the prospects : " As to the field before me, I
need not say that it is large. I am a tempo-
rary resident in a house not far from the fac-
tories, close to the river, and to a ferry which
9,000 persons frequently pass in a day. It is
a little way into the western suburbs, over
which, from a lofty veranda, I have an exten-
sive view. I can look two miles to the west,
and two and a half to the north, and in this
small space are crowded the abodes and per-
sons of 400,000, if not 500,000 human beings.
Through every street of this given space I
can pajs unmolested, in many . places enter
shops, and leave a tract or speak a few min-
utes with the people. I think I perceive a
difference in the treatment of foreigners since
November* last. The free intercourse of the
missionary families with the people has had a
very beneficial effect. Freedom of movement
in the streets and lanes of this suburb is now
a settled point. As to the people themselves,
there is a moral and mental apathy respecting
the truth, which is a great discouragement to
the missionary. This must be stated. Yet
still, nuinl)ers are willing and some desirous, to
receive Christian books and tracts. They
come into the preaching-rooms, and, in many
instances, pay close attention to the speaker.
Spiritual apathy and death are stamped deej)
in the soul. Few ask questions, unless you
enter into conversation with them ; and a sin-
cere inquirer after God is seldom met with.
Their thoughts seem to be : ' Tliis doctrine is
good for foreigners, but it is of no use to us :
we have our own sages, whose wisdom is un-
doubted. Jesus is a sage of the West ; let
the foreigners follow him.' The idolatry and
temple rites have no hold of their hearts, but
as seasons of show and mirth, of amusement
and relaxation from business. In this field
are (bund rich and poor, learned and unlearned
in vast numbers. If a Cliinese is of equal value
with any other human being, what a immber
of islands ami large tracts of territory else-
where will evcu tliis city outweigh !"
After a short residence in Canton, Mr.
Piercy offered himself to this society as an
agent ; and, taking from " Grindrod's Com-
pendium " the questions usually put to a can-
didate for the ministry at a district meeting,
gave written answers ; asking that, under the
peculiarities of the case, this should be ac-
cepted as an examination. The following is
his account of his mode of labor : " As to
what I am doing here, I wish I could say I am
able to do much, but not so ; my work is
nearly all preparatory, yet I will give you an
idea of my daily engagements. Rising early,
the first hour is spent in prayer and reading
the Scriptures ; then, till eight o'clock, I read
or write in English, and answer a letter, if
pressing. The forenoon is mainly spent in the
study of the Chinese colloquial dialect. At
twelve service is held in a room below this.
Here, though I have not yet commenced to
cteliver consecutive addresses, I seek to be use-
ful, after an address by the native teacher, who
labors here. I try to engage some of the peo-
ple on the subject of discourse, and make in-
quiries as to the various statements the
preacher has made. Our congregations are
not very large. Yet, day by day, they are en-
couraging and- attentive. Tracts are given to
all that desire them. After service, I gener-
ally return to my room, and study the book
language, the classics, &c., and get new words.
Part of the afternoon I spend in itinerating
through the city. From six to seven. Dr.
Hobson's teacher assists me. Then I spend
an hour till eight in instructing my boy, and
talking with my old teacher on the practical
: truths of God's word. Afterward, for another
hour, I read some spirit-stirring book in Eng-
lish ; then self-examination, review of my
labors, and prayer to God for mercy to par-
don and grace to keep me, close the duties of
the day. Often I have found this quiet hour,
when all the bustle of this great city is hushed,
a season of hallowed enjoyment. Such is the
general routine. Nothing breaks it except a
visit to a temple, or to see an idolatrous proces-
sion, which is a good opportunity to distribute
some tracts ; perhaps a visit to one of the mis-
sionary families. Dr. Hobson has kindly lent
me the second part of Dr. Morrison's Diction-
ary, which is a great help. He, together with
Mrs. Hobson, manifests a most affectionate
interest towards m(!, and they are even anxious
that ray personal piety should not droop."
While these comnuuiications were on tlieir
way from China, a friend in England was also
urging the Committee on. One missionary
student at Ri(;hmond was so desirous of going
out to join Mr. Piercy, that he would gladly
have done so, without promise of sustenance,
in the hope of finding some situation Mhereby
to support himself. "Another young minister
had for years his lieart set upon China. Just
!)cfore the time Mr. Piercy's commmiications
I readied the Secretaries, urgent requests to bo
CHINA.
293
sent came from both these brethren. At the
, same time, also, the Treasurer of the Society,
Mr. Farmer, who had previously offered a
tliousand pounds for this mission in ten annual
instalments, when six had been paid, said that
the day two missionaries sailed to join Mr.
Piercy, he would complete the payment of
the whole sum, and would thenceforth give
one hundred per annum for the Chinese mis-
sion. Other no less praiseworthy instances of
Christian liberality, helped to show the Com-
mittee that, in undertaking the responsibility
of a mission to China, they would have with
them a large amount of practical sympathy
from the lovers of the souls of men. The
Committee felt that a providential call was
now plainly made upon them, and though
deeply regretting their inability to do justice
to other needy fields, saw that to withhold aid
any longer from China would not increase
their ability to strengthen old missions.
They therelbre resolved, in dependence on the
bounty of God, to place China on the list of
their stations, adopting Mr. Piercy as a mis-
sionary, and sending out two brethren, Messrs.
William E. Beach and Josiah Cox, with Miss
Wannop, a trained teacher from the West-
minster Normal Institution. They sailed on
the 20th of January, 1852, and arrived safely
at Canton, and have entered upon the duties
of the mission. For the present, they are
mainly occupied in learning the Chinese lan-
guage.
They relieve their arduous toil by the distri-
bution of tracts, and seek, in all such ways as
may open to them, to spread the knowledge
and influence of divine truth. Mr. Piercy has
commenced preaching in a room in his own
house, which was opened as a chapel in June
last, and the continual kindness of Dr. Hob-
son has allowed him the occasional service of
Leang Afa, the first convert of Protestant mis-
sionaries in China. This venerable man, who
was baptized by Dr. Milne, in 181G, preaches
once on the Lord's day in the Methodist
Chapel. Mr. Piercy takes the other service.
A school for boys has also been commenced
during the past year, and Mrs. Piercy will
probably do something on behalf of the females
when she is better acquainted with the collo-
ciuial dialect of Canton^ Mr. Piercy has
translated the first catechism and part of the
second, for the use of the mission schools;
and some portions of the Scripture narratives
have been printed under his direction, to be
used as tracts. The missionaries have eno-atred
to distribute ten thousand copies each of "the
New Testament, to be supplied by the " Mil-
lion Testament Fund," if spared, during the
coming year.
The instrumentality by which this great
work was commenced was humble, and to the
.eye of human wisdom unpromising. The
brethren to whom the solemn charge is com-
^nitted, are young, and the measure of support
that can be bestowed upon the enterprize is
but small ; but in all these points of natural
weakness, we see cause for both seeking and
expecting the strength that is above nature.
Their labors, if they receive grace to be faith-
ful, will do something toward the conversion
of the most populous country in existence. The
strength of the Wesleyan mission in China, at
the close of 1853, was three missionaries, one
catechist, one preaching place, and sixteen
church members. — Annual Reports, Mission-
ary Notices, and London Watchman. — Eev. W.
Butler.
Rhenish Missionary Society. — This soci-
ety sent out Mr. Gutzlaff, about the year 1830,
who displayed extraordinary activity, soon be-
came perfectly master of the language, and
then made frequent journeys through the coast
countries of China, sometimes hundreds of
leagues up the rivers. The Christian Scrip-
tures, which he was most intent on circulating,
were everywhere received with the most in-
tense eagerness. He availed himself of every
method, even during the war, for putting or
conveying copies of the Christian Scrip-
tures into the hands of the Chinese. The
Chinese plenipotentiaries themselves, who had
to treat with the English, received, after the
war, copies of the Scriptures from his hands.
This society now have a mission in the
Quang-tung province, which has about eighty
converts, and occupies five preaching i)Iaces,
—six native evangelists being employed. It
is stated that the brethren at this post have
access to about a million and a half,of people.
Another German missionary in the same pro-
vince states, that he has access to about ninety
TOWNS AND VILLAGES, some of which contain
ten thousand souls.
Canton Baptist Missionary Society. —
This society is com.posed chiefly of native
Christians, and supports Rev. Mr. Ro-
berts, who first went out by himself in 1835,
and was subsequently supported by the
Baptist Board, but has since been separated
from it. He has a number of native assist-
ants. Two small chapels were opened in 1845,
where preaching was kept up on the Sabbath.
In another hired house, about two miles below
the foreign factories, a room was fitted up, to
accommodate 80 or 90, where preaching was
also m^aintained. Here the missionary and his
principal assistant reside. Jan, 19, 1845,
Wun, a Chinaman, was baptized, after several
months' instruction, and a theological class of
eight or ten was maintained. A number of
books and tracts had also been printed and
circulated.
Basle Missionary Society. — This society
have a mission at Hong-kong, with three mis-
sionaries, five native catechists, and ninety
communicants ; but we have not been able
to obtain any particular history of its operar
tious.
294:
CHINA.
GENEHAL TABULAE VIEW.
SOCTETIES.
London Miss. Soc
American Board
Am. Episcopal Church. . . .
Am. Bap. Union
South. Bap. Conv
Church Miss. Soc
Gen. Bap. Miss. Soc. . . .
Mcth. Epis. Ch. North and South.
Presbyterian Board
English Wesleyans
Seventh Day Baptists
Free Ch. Scotland
Rhenish Miss. Soc
Canton Bap. Miss. Soc
Basle Miss. Soc
Totals
1807
1830
183.5
1842
1844
1845
1845
1846
1844
1850
1847
1850
1830
1845
13
C
2
14
26 69 9 40 2 24 5 351 12
64
26
24
14
2
1
34
16
80
90
M
93
30
100
62
91
376
20
5
100
100
111
90
30
436
29
TuE Chinese Revolution. — One of the
most wonderful political and moral move-
ments in national history is the revolution
now in progress in China. It is wonderful
■both in its origin and in its progress. The
leader of the insurgents, known as Tien-
TEH, Tae !f ino Wong, and Hung Sow Chukn,
according to the accounts that have been pub-
lished, received his first ideas of Christianity
from a tract handed him by Leang-Afa, at
the triennial examination at Canton, in 1834.
About fourteen years later he placed himself
under the religious instruction of Rev. I. J.
Roberts, missionary at Canton, and at one
time desired baptism, but subsequently he ta-
citly withdrew his request for reasons un-
known. Mr. Roberts regarded him as vision-
ary in his religious views. From Canton he
returned into the Kwmip;-si province, and tlicrc
proclaimed his views of Christianity. _ There
he met with those who sympathized with him
in abhorrence of the pojjular idolatry and at-
tachment to Christianity, and he and his
friends soon became the objects of persecution
by the government. They were imprisoned
and subjected to such cruelties that one or
more of them died. The survivors were driven
to arms in self-defence. They issued a procla-
mation exposing the corruptions of the govern-
ment, and calling on the people to unite with
them in defence of their I'iglits. The op-
pressed flocked to their standard, and Provi-
dence crowned their arms with success. Army
after army was .sent to crush the infant relwl-
liou, but under God the infant was too
Btrong for the Imperial legions. 'I'hc Im-
perialists were frequently routed, not only in
Kwang-si, but by the advancing insurgents in
Hupoh and Honan ; and ultimately Nanking,
Ching kiang-foo, and other important cities,
fell into their hands. No mercy is shown to
the Tartars, but men, women and children
are indiscriminately slaughtered. By the last
accounts they were advancing upon Peking.
Though we cannot as yet predict the final re-
sult, yet judging from the past, and from their
rigid discipline, and the great self-denials to
which tlie revolutionary soldiers cheerfully sub-
mit, it would seem probable that victory must
ultimately crown their efforts, and that the
present idolatrous dynasty must soon fall.
If the primary object of this movement had
been of a political nature, it seems hardly
probable that the insurgents would have ven-
tured on attacking the popular superstitions
by the destruction of the idols. They appear,
the rather, to have been impelled to this bold
and fearlciss measure by strong religious feel-
ing. They seem to have partaken of the
genuine Puritan spirit. At all events, they
are true IconocInMs, the legitimate successors of
the renowned Claude of Turin.
Their religious views could not have been
received Irom the Romanists. They arc of a
d(>cidedl v I'rotcstant type. Nor can we rea.'^on-
ably sui)i)0se that the 'religious element of this
revolution was derived from any one individual
or bodv of men ; it is rather tlie consetiuencp
of the joint influence of the various Protestant
missions in China, and on its borders. The
leaven of Christianity has been diffusing itself
for years in the popular mind, preparing the
CHINA.
295
way for the revolution which now threatens
the very existence of the present corrupt, idol-
atrous and oppressive dynasty, and promises
to open the door to the preaching of the true
Gospel throughout China. It is not strange
that amid this moral fermentation much of
error in opinion and irregularity in practice
should be evolved, especially considering the
state of the popular mind. It is rather a won-
der that in the principles and practice of the
insurgents there should be so much to admire
and heartily approve. The One Living and
true God is their only object of religious wor-
ship, and to his aid they attribute all their
success, looking to Him for victory. God is
daily and unitedly worshiped in the camp
and the Sabbath is strictly observed. The
ten commandments they regard as their
rule of life ; and the Christian Trinity, the vi-
carious atonement of Christ, repentance, and
faith in Him, are prominent articles of their
faith. Opium and tobacco are rigorously pro-
hibited. They have begun to print the Word
of God, and to publish religious tracts.
Eev. Dr. Taylor, whose name has been men-
tioned in connection with the mission of the
Methodist Episcopal Church South, visited the
camp of the revolutionists, while he was at
Shanghai. He succeeded, after great expo-
sures, in reaching the city of Ching-kiang-foo,
which was then their head-quarters. He threw
himself at once upon the mercy of the in-
surgents, who demanded of him the object of
his visit. This he refused to disclose till he
was conducted into the presence of the chief
" On my way," he says, " as I passed along, I
frequently heard the sound of people chanting ;
and inquiring of my attendants what was the
meaning of these sounds, I was told that the
people were worshiping God, and that it was
the hour of morning worship. I saw idols
thrown down in all directions as I passed
through the streets, and I was frequently sa-
luted by the term ' brother.' This was per-
fectly new, for at Canton the appellation is
' foreign devil ; ' and while walking in the
suburbs of Canton, you will hear this perhaps
a hundred times. I at last arrived at the
head-quarters, and after passing through a num-
ber of gateways, on either side of which were
curtains of yellow silk, and a great deal of em-
broidered drapery of various kinds, for a dis-
tance of upwards of 300 or 400 yards from the
street, I came at last to the inner recess, and
there I was requested to sit. Again I was in-
terrogated as to my objpct, but I said I must
communicate with the chief He presently
made his appearance, but, owing to the sim-
plicity of his dress, I for some time doubted
whether he was the chief In order to remove
my doubts, he took his seat in the middle of
the hall, and his attendants arrayed him in his
robes. And when I was persuaded he was the
man, I opened my carpet-bag, spread before
him the Gospels, the Acts, and the Tracts, and
told him the object of my visit, whicn was to
give him a complete knowledge of the doc-
trines of Christianity. He seemed grateful
for the books, and entertained me hospitably.
The hour of breakfast was approaching, and
they had morning prayer before breakfast. He
and his attendants were seated in this large
hall, on cushioned chairs ; one individual read
a portion of Scripture, and then they chanted
some hymns, which the leader probably had
composed. At the close of these hynins, I
noticed that they chanted a literal translation
of the Doxology. After this they all took their
cushions, placed them on the pavement, kneel-
ed on them, closing their eyes, and lifting up
their faces towards heaven, while the secretary
of the chief (I think it was,) read a prayer.
At the close of this we proceeded to breakfast
in the adjoining hall. As a guest it would
have been etiquette to have commenced with
my " chop sticks " first ; but I waited, thinking
they would ask a blessing. This I told them,
when they informed me it was their custom, but
it had been included in the previous prayer. I
explained to them that it was not exactly our
course, and asked to be allowed to do so ;
which they requested me to do, and I did it
accordingly in Chinese."
Mr. Taylor became fully acquainted with
the military resources and ability of the insur-
gent army, and entertains a strong conviction
of their ultimate success. He says :
" I ascertained that these people were sin-
cere worshipers of the one true God ; that they
had sworn the extermination of idolatry in
every form ; that they were exceedingly friend-
ly to foreigners, and expressed themselves de-
sirous of becoming more instructed in Chris-
tianity, only the difficulties at present were so
great, that they thought I had better wait for
some months. This movement has for its ob-
ject the overthrow of the Tartar dynasty, and
the establishment of the old Chinese Govern-
ment. Therefore it is strictly a patriotic move-
ment ; and we are in the habit, in China, rather
of calling them ' patriots ' than ' insurgents.' "
As Christians, we cannot but regard this re-
markable movement with the deepest interest ;
and in view of its developments hitherto, we are
compelled to acknowledge that it is the finger
of God. We hope and jiray that China's re-
demption from the thraldom of sin and Satan
is near at hand. The Lord will hasten his
work in his time.
Concluding Eemarks. — In view of the few
conversions connected with the labors of Pro-
testant missionaries inChina, it may seem as if
little had yet been accomplished. But such
would not be a fair conclusion, considering the
short time that has elapsed since China was
opened to Christian missions. With the ex-
ception of that at Canton, no Protestant mis-
sion was commenced in China previous to
1842. In such a field as China, where idola-
try is very strongly fortified, and where cus-
29C
CHINA.
toms and oinnious are sanctified and made
venerable by antiquity, much preparatory
work must be performed before any very per-
ceptible results appeal-. ]\Iucli preparatory
work has been performed, and some fruit has
already appeared. They have sown in tears,
others shall reap in joy, and ultimately both
sower and reaper shall rejoice togethei*. It is
no small thing that already several translations
of the Scriptures have been made, generally
intelligible and faithful : a work which the
Catholics have not done after centuries of mis-
sionary labor, and the professed conversion of
hundreds of thousands of souls. The prepa-
ration and wide circulation of a great number
of valuable works, religious and scientific, is a
work not to be despised, to say nothing of the
helps to the acquisition of the Chinese which
have been furnished. It is something that
valuable missionary locations at the several
posts have been secured, and numerous cha-
pels built in these cities, in which the Gospel
is statedly preached to many thousands of
souls. It is impossible to calculate the influ-
ence which has already gone out from these
humble Christian sanctuarias. The name of
Christ, the Christian Sabbath, and the essen-
tial doctrines of the Gospel are already some-
what extensively known, if not reverenced,
where a few years since, no ray of Gospel
light had penetrated. Many children have
learned to lisp the name of Jesus ; and besides
living native Christians, some pious Chinese
are now, as we hope, with Christ in heaven.
We might point to the present revolution, as
in its religious character the fruit of Protes-
tant missionary labor, the ultimate influence of
which, no finite mind can predict. But if not
an individual soul had been converted nor any
perceptible influence exerted upoii the public
mind by all the efforts of missionaries in
China and its neighborhood, we should be
under no less obligation to pray and labor and
suffer for the salvation of its benighted and
j)erishiug millions. I'he command is to preach
the Gospel to every creature, and the greater
the obstacles to the accomplishment of this
work, the greater should be our efforts till this
dark land shall be illumined with its i)re-
ciou.s light. Upon it a few saving drops of
mercy have already fallen, which may be re-
garded as an earnest of the rich and abun-
dant spiritual blessings yet to be poured upon
the land of Sinim.
CHINESE EVANGELICAL SOCraTY :
The principal object of this society is to send
out Christian medical men to China. Rev. W.
Lobschcid and wife have sailed during the past
year ; and they are expected to labor at 8ai-
ncong. Two young men are in training lor the
missionary work ; and the society has agreed
to support three Chinese boys and a young
Malay in the school of the Rev. J. G. Rausun,
at rinang, with a view to their becoming evan-
gelists. Christians of diflerent denominations
unite in sustaining this missionary organiza-
tion. It is located in London.
CHINESE EVANGELIZATION SOCI-
ETY : In addition to European agents, six
colporteurs are employed in distributing the
Scriptures and tracts ; and in many places they
have been kindly received. The society has
also assisted the Rev. I. J. Roberts to prose-
cute his labors. Before the end of the year,
the society hopes to be able to print the entire
Scriptures in Chinese. (London.)
CHINESE SOCIETY for Furthering the
Promulgation of the Gospel in China and the
Adjacent Countries, bij means of Native Evan-
gelists.— This society was formed recently at
London, during the visit of Dr. GutzlafF to
England. Its object is to incite to prayer for
China, to diffuse information in regard to the
evangelization of that great empire, and to
aid those who enter that field. It is altogether
" unsectarian."
CHINTADREPETTAH : a station of the
American Board, belonging to the Madras
mission, in eastern Hindostan.
CHINSURAH : A town in the province
of Bengal, on the west side of the Hoogly
river, eighteen miles north of Calcutta. Po-
pulation about 30,000. It became a station
of the London Missionary Society in 1813.
CHITTAGONG : Capital of a district of
the same name, at the southern extremity of
Bengal, with the Burmau empire on the cast,
and the sea on the west. It is 340 miles east
of Calcutta, and is much resorted to by Eu-
ropeans in Bengal, on account of the benefi-
cial effects of the climate, seas, and salt-water
bathing. Here the two idolatrous systems of
Brahma and Budha come in contact, and the
influence of caste is feeble. ,
CHUMMORAH : A Karen village in Bri-
tish Burmah, GO miles from Mauhnain, and an
out-station of the Maulmain mission of the
American Baptist Missionary Union.
CIIUNAR : In the north of Hindostan,
near Benares, and a station of the Church of
England Mission.
CHUPRA: a station of Gosner's Missionary
Society, in India, 30 miles W. N. W. of Patna,
in the province of Bahar, on the north side of
the Ganges.
CriUNDICULLY: A station of the Church
Missionary Society in the Jaffna district, Cey-
lon, being a suburb of the town of Jaffna.
CHUMIE : Station of the United Scotch
Presbyterian Church in Kaflraria, South Af-
rica, one missionary.
CHURCH OF ROME : The Roman Cath-
olic Church, or that which recognises the pri-
macy of the Bishop of Rome, at one time cm-
braced all, or nearly all, Christendom. Several
of the eastern churches, at various times, adopt-
ed ideas which were condemned as heretical or
schismatical, by the bishop of Rome, and those
who embraced them were cut of from the Ro-
man communion. These formed the mass of
CHURCH OF ROME.
297
tliosev.'bo followed the Greek, Armenian, Chal-
daic, and Syrian rites. A portion, however,
of each rite never broke off their connection
with Eome, or soon returned to it, and are
called by Catholic writers " United." lu the
"West, the greatest secession, that of the Refor-
mation, took place in the 15th century, and in
several countries of northern Europe new sym-
bols were introduced, and the belief and prac-
tices of the Church of Rome proscribed by se-
vere penalties ; under this state of things many,
cither voluntarily or involuntarily, embraced the
doctrines of the various Reformed Churches.
At present the Roman Catholic Church is
considered as embracing the Latin, Sclavonic,
Greek, Armenian, Syro-Chaldaic, and Coptic
rites, which differ only in the language and
incidentals of their liturgy, and in some points
of discipline : the greatest difference being the
celibacy of the clergy and communion under
one kind, which are almost exclusively confined
to the followers of the Latin rite, never having
obtained in the East.
These various rites are jealously guarded as
ancient forms, in many cases of apostolical
origin, and persons are not without great difli-
culty allowed to pass from one to another or
even communicate, although they may worship
in churches of other rites. It accordingly hap-
pens in some parts that there will be bishops
of different rites in the same city, and in Lem-
berg. in Austrian Poland, there are three, the
Latin, United Greek, and United Armenian.
The doctrines held by all these churches are
the same, and their form of church government
is identical. The superior clergy consists of
priests, bishops, and archbishops, some few of the
latter being styled Patriarchs. The inferior
clergy, or those in minor orders, consist of the
deacons, and some subordinate grades, which
differ in number and name in the different rites,
and have apparently differed at times in the
same rite, lu most churches these orders are
merely used as steps to the priesthood, and are
no longer real offices in practice.
The Bishop of RoEie, commonly called the
Pope, is Patriarch of the Latins, and as suc-
cessor of St. Peter, Primate or Supreme Pon-
tiff of the various rites. In the government of
the church, his immediate Council is the Col-
lege of Cardinals, whose number is limited to
seventy, and in whom resides the elective power
on the demise of a Pope.
The statistics of the Church of Rome are not
easily estimated. The following will perhaps
be not far from the truth :
Latin j?ae.— Western Europe and Colonies. . . .164,000,000
Gredc Riie. — United Greeks in Greece, Turliey, "|
Kussia, and Poland J
Sclavonic liile.—myviix, Dalmatia, Poland.... (-15,000,000
Anneiiian Bite. — United Armenians m Turkey, j
Poland, India, Persia J
.S'l/ro-CftaWaiciJite.— llaroniteSjChaldees, Uni-
ted Copts, &c 5,000,000
184,000,000
The Latin Catholics are by far the most
numerous. In Italy, Austria, Bavaria, Bel-
gium, France, Spain, and Portugal, as well as
Spanish and Portuguese America, the Roman
Catholic is the religion of the people, in some
places established by law, and supported by
the government, in others, as Spain, France,
Sardinia, Austria, New Grenada, Hayti, more
or less fettered by civil laws, which hamper
the freedom of the clergy in the exercise of
their functions.
In the British Isles, Holland, the Protestant
states in Germany, Switzerland, Norway, Swe-
den, Denmark, and the Russian Dominions,
members of the Church of Rome are subject
to disabilities more or less severe, and the pre-
sence of their clergy rather connived at than
recognized by the state. In all, the church is
regularly organized, and governed by bishops,
sometimes titular, and thus forming a regular
hierarchy, as in Ireland, England, Switzerland,
and Germany, at others simply vicars apostolic
missionary bishops, commonly called bishops
in partibus infidelium, as the see of which they
bear the title is now in some Mohammedan or
heathen country. In the United States, mem-
bers of tlie Roman Catholic Church are in
some states deprived of certain rights, but the
exercise of their religion is not fettered by any
law.
TABULAR VIEW OF THE LATIN KITE.
Country Arhps.
Bps.
Clergy. Population.
Italy
44
8
3
13
15
1
6
1
2
3
1
1
0
7
1
1
1
1
216
47
20
70
65
5
44
4
18
9
12
3
34
18
5
11
10
23
32
10
6
1
4
4
7
1
3
40,000
4,000
3
10
220
1,600
Portugal
17,000,000
20,000,000
9,000,000-
Holland
Norway and Sweden
Turkey
Turkey in Asia
India and Further India. . .
400,000
Africa (various parts)
1,000,000
3,000,000
AMERICA.
British Possessions
United States
3,000,000
Venezuela
Peru
Bolivia
Chili
Spanish West Indies
Total
110
691
164,000,000
Support of the Clergy. — Prior to the Refor-
mation, the Catholic clergy possessed large
estates and received tithes in all parts of Ea.
298
CHURCH OF ROME.
rope. In tbe reign of Edward YI. the Eegents
seized much of the church property in England,
and in the reign of Elizabeth, the residue, with
the tithes, was transferred to the now estab-
lished church. Since then, the Catholic clergy
in England and Ireland, as well as in Scot
land, depend on the voluntary contributions of
their flocks. The same is the case in Holland,
Protestant Germany, and the Scandinavian
kingdoms, in the last of which the Catholic
religion has been most carefully watched and
crushed.
In France the revolution of 1789 swept
from the Catholic clergy all their property and
tithes ; and, on the re-establishment of Chris-
tianity by In apoleon, a regular pay was estab-
lished for all clergy, whether Catholic, Pro-
testant, or Jewish, which still subsists. In
1834 a similar steji was taken in Spain, and
all church property was seized by the State,
which professes to give a salary to each cler-
gyman. In Italy, Canada, and parts of Ger-
many, the tithe system still prevails, but will,
in all probability, soon be set aside, and other
provision made.
The clergy are commonly spoken of as
secular or regular. By secular are meant those
living in the world (saeculo), the parish priests,
chaplains, &c. : by regulars, those who live
according to a certain rule (regula), — that is,
members of the various religious orders. These
orders consist of men who bind themselves
(religare) by the tliree vows of poverty, chas-
tity and obedience, to the rules of Ihe partic-
ular institute which they enter. These vows
are called vows of religion, themselves reli-
gious, and their state of life religion. These
associations have in view, first, the sanctifica-
tion of the members by retirement, mortifica-
tion and prayer ; secondly, the service of their
neighbor, spiritually or corporally. The houses
of religious are governed by superiors, some-
times elected by the members, at others ap-
pointed by the head of the order, who is gen-
erally elected for life.
The members of the orders arc generally
divided into choir religious, being priests or
persons intended for the priesthood, and lay
brothers, who never become priests. The reli-
gious orders may be divided into the following
classes, viz. :
Monks living in Monasteries governed by Abbots, Triors,
&c.
Friars living in Convents, governed by Provincials, Com-
missaries, Wardens, &c.
Regular Clerks living in Colleges, houses, and governed by
I'rovincials, Superiors, &c.
Besides these orders, and analogous to them,
arc certain Congregations, the mcml)ers of
which are sometimes bound by vows, but
which have never been recognized as religious
orders by the head of the church. The num-
ber and variety of these orders and congrega-
tions is very great, and many no longer'exist,
having been created to meet exigencies that
have passed. In the Greek Church, the Basil-
ian Monks are almost the only order, as that
of St. Nerses among the Armenians. In the
Latin Church the most wide-spread and best
known are :
Monastic Orders. — Purely Contemplative. —
Carthusian, Cistercian, including Trappists,
Vallumbrosa. Contemplative Mixed. — Benedic-
tine, Camaldulensian, devoted to education,
literature, &c.
Friars. — Franciscan or Greyfriars, (includ-
ing Eecollects, Observantines, Capuchins, Con-
ventuals), Dominicans or Black Friars, Augus-
tinians or White Friars, Carmelites, Servites,
Minims, all devoted to Home and Foreign
Missions. Trinitarians, Mercedarians, devoted
originally to the redemption of captives from
the Turks.
Regular Clerks. — Society of Jesus, Bar-
nabites, devoted to education, home and
foreign missions, Ecgular Clerks of the Pious
Schools, and the Ministers of the Sick.
Congregations.
Lazarists or Priests of the Mission, devoted to Home and
Foreign Missions.
Priests of the Foreign Missions, devoted to Home and
Foreign Missions.
Oblates, devoted to Home and ForeigTi Missions.
Marists, or Society of the Sacred Hearts of Jesus and
Mary, devoted to Negro Missions.
Piepusians, devoted to Home and Foreign Missions.
Priests of the Holy Ci'oss, devoted to Instruction.
Sulpihans and Eudists, devoted to Theological Semi-
naries.
Pvedemptorists, Passionists, Order of Charity, Oratorians,
Pretrosissimi Sanguixus, devoted to Home Missions.
Brotherhoods (not priests).
Brothers of the Christian Schools, devoted to Instruction.
Brothers of St. Joseph, devoted to Instruction.
Brothers of the Society of Mary, devoted to Instruction.
Brothers of St. John, of God, and of Camillus, devoted to
Hospitals.
Besides these orders of men, which embrace
many in priests' orders, there are religious or-
ders and congregations of women, bound by
the three vows of religion, and living under
particular rules. There are Benedictine, Do-
minican, Franciscan, and Carmelite nuns, all
of whom are contemplative. Augustiniau
nuns, devoted to the sick as the Hospital nuns,
or to education as the Ursnliues, the Presenta-
tion, Visitation, and others, devoted to educa-
tion. The Congregations are more extended,
and the vows are generally made for a single
year, or some definite period, after which the
member is free to retire. Among them are
Tlio Ladies of the Sacred Heart, and the Sisters of the
Congregation, devoted to education.
Sisters of Charity, devoted to education, hospitals, asy
lums, kc.
Sisters of Mercy, devoted to education, the poor and sick.
Sisters of the Good Shepherd, devoted to the care of
M.agdalen Asylums.
The Little Sisters of the Poor, devoted to the care of the
poor and infirm.
Tlie Sisters of Providence, (black), devoted to the educa-
tion of colored guls.
John G. Shea, Esq.
CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OF.
299
CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OF :
The principles ou which the missions of the
Church of Rome are founded, lie in her claim
to apostolic succession, and an unbroken chain
of title in her clergy to preach the Gospel and
administer the sacraments. The missionaries
whom she sends out bear the liturgy^ of their
church, its dogmas and practices, which have
left their impression on the language and cus-
toms of nations. Before the separation of the
Eastern Churches from Rome, the Chaldeans
had extended their labors to India and Tar-
tary, and continued their missions long after
embracing the doctrines of Nestorius. The
Greeks evangelized much of Poland and Rus-
sia ; and ou the final rupture between the
Greeks and Latins, the churches in those coun-
tries generally adhered to the patriarch pf
Constantinople. The missions of the Latin
church were far more varied and extensive.
Under the Roman empire, all Italy, Spain,
France, and Britain, were converted, and em-
braced the Latin rite. When these countries
were overrun by the barbarians, Rome again
sent her missionaries gradually from country
to country, the Celts in Ireland and Scotland,
the Franks in France, Goths in Spain and
Italy, all embraced her forms. The Saxons in
England were converted by Augustine and
other Benedictine monks from Italy ; then
Irish and English monks carried the faith to
Germany, Scandinavia, and Iceland, founding
churches, which, in their development, extended
to Greenland and the coast of North America.
By the twelfth century the mass was chanted
in Latin from Narraganset Bay to the Baltic
and Adriatic. This was chiefly the work of
missionaries of the orders of St. Columbanus
and St. Benedict. The Crusades and the es-
tablishment of the orders of Friars gave a
new impulse to the missions. Franciscans
and Dominicans carried the faith to India,
Tartary, and China, in the 13th century, and
throughout Asia planted their convents beside
the Nestorian churches. Undeterred by the
fanaticism of Islam, they entered the various
Mohammedan countries in Asia and Africa,
hoping to restore religion on a soil where it
had once flourished ; and at the same time
straggled successfully with Paganism, which
still lingered near the shores of the Baltic.
The last missions soon triumphed ; those in
central Asia gradually sunk, as wars made it
impossible to keep up communication with
Europe. In Mohammedan countries the mis-
sionaries have, down to the present time, labored
almost in vain, no considerable number of the
followers of the prophet having ever been at
any one period won to the truth.
The close of the fifteenth century opened
to the view of Europe a new world, and a new
and free path to India. Spain and Portugal
began their career of conquest in both Indies ;
missionary zeal was excited, and apostolic men
from the various orders, and from the ranks of
the secular clergy, hastened to attempt the con-
version of the natives of the newly discovered
regions. In the East, missions were founded
in Hindostan, the East India Islands, Japan,
China, Tonquin, Abyssinia ; in America, the
half civilized natives of Peru and Mexico were
converted, and their descendants now form the
mass of the people, and the Church of Rome
has enrolled two of Indian blood among her
canonized saints. The nomadic tribes from
Labrador to Cape Horn were visited ; many
were completely gained, in other parts reduc-
tions were formed, and such as could be per-
suaded to enter were instructed alike in the
truths of Christianity and the usages of civil-
ized life. Close on these discoveries came the
religious feuds of the sixteenth century and
the defection of nearly every prince in North-
ern Europe from the Roman See. State
churches were formed in many of the Ger-
man States, the Scandinavian kingdoms, Hol-
land, England, and Scotland, based ou the
doctrines of Luther and Calvin. To compel
conformity to these, severe laws were passed,
and all who adhered to the Sec of Rome sub-
jected to heavy penalties. The Catholic clergy
were outlawed, and every attempt made to
prevent any educational establishments which
might continue the Catholic feeling or a suc-
cession of clergy. This led to a new species
of mission : colleges were established in Catho-
lic countries for the educatioft of their fellow
believers in the northern countries, and the
training of such as wished to enter the priest-
hood ; and from these seminaries, missionaries
proceeded to their native country to minister to
their brethren, and to gain back such as seemed
to repent the late change. Many suffered the pe-
nalty of death, but this, as usually happens, only
raised up others to fill their places. From this
period the Catholic missions are either Plome
missions for instructing the ignorant and neg-
lected in Catholic countries, or those in which
the exercise of religion is permitted: Missions in
Protestant countries to supply clergy for the
Catholic portion : Missions among schismatics
to reunite them to Rome : Missions to Pagan
nations. There are no missions intended to ope-
rate directly on Protestants of any denomina-
tion or Mohammedans, from the fact that any
such attempt jeopardized the Catholic body in
those countries where penal laws prevail. These
missions became at last so important a part
of the church government, that Gregory XV.
(1621—23) instituted the Congregation De
Propaganda Fide, which gave a new impulse
to the zeal and fervor of missionaries and all
interested in the missionary cause. This con-
gregation or department consisted of thirteen
cardinals, two priests, a religious, and a secre-
tary ; and to it exclusively was committed the
direction of missions and church matters in
mission countries. Considerable sums were
bestowed by public and private munificence
on this department, and under Urban VIII.
300
CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OF.
the active reformer, a college, usually styled
the Url);in colIe;,'e, or the Propagiiuda, w:vs
erected and richly endowed. Here caudidate.-^
for tiie priesthood and tl\e missions, are re-
ceived tVoui all (|uarters of tlio globe, and a
printint^-preAS issues devotional works in a
great niiinber of languages.
Besides this college, there soon rose the Ar-
menian College at Venice, the Uernianic, Eng-
lish. Irish, and Scol.ch colleges at Rome, the
English college at Rheirasand Douay, the Irish
and Scotch at Paris, the Irish college at Lou-
vain and Valladolid, and some others, all in-
tended to train the missionaries for their own
countries ; and at a later date, the Chinese
college at Naples was founded iu the same
view, and of late years, a missionary college
has arisen at Drumcondra. Convents and re-
ligious houses of various orders were also found-
ed on the continent for natives of the British
Isles, and from these also missionaries annually
set out for the missions in the English domin-
ions. Most of these latter have, however, since
disappeared, swept away by the French revo-
lution, or transferred to England or the United
States.
II. Ml-isionay-n Societies. — There are, properly
Bpeaking. no missionary societies in the Catho-
lic church similar to those among Protestants.
Three societies, of quite recent origin, the
Society for the Propagntion of the Faith, center-
ing at Lyons, th(i Leopnldine Society at Vienna,
and the Society of the Holy Childhood in France,
raise funds by a small weekly contribution,
which the directors distribute to various mis-
sions, n'i they think proper, but over the mis-
sionaries and stations they exercise no control.
The various missions are conducted entirely in-
dependent of this aid, relying, in default of it.
on other resources. The last named society is
made up of children, and has a special object,
the raising of momy to save and baptize chil-
dren exposed to death by their unnatural
parent.s in China and Annam. Besides the
aid thus given, some missions have funds es-
tablished before the present century, and for-
merly French, Spanish, and Vortugue.se mi.s-
sionaries received a regular stijiend from the
government. The great m;i.ss of the missions
at present are individual efforts,, supported by
the zeal and sacrificea of the bishbps and clergy
employed on them. V
III, Receipts. — The amount ralLscd in 1852
by
Society for the Propagation or.
the Faith, . . . 30r)0,000
Society of the Holy Childhood . 117,000
§1,007,000
MISSIONARY STATIONS. ■
EmopE. — 1. Amonf,' the Protestant' States
of Europe, the only countries where tiu'\Cath(»-
lic church is still anierc ihission.are Detnnark.
Norwav, and Sweden. Ifi're the nunAber of
Catholics is very small, and no details are
published, as many severe civil penalties are
still enforced against members, and especially
converts of the Roman church. The whole
number does not probably exceed 150,000.
2. Turkey. — The United Armenians have
an archbishop at Constantinople ; the Latins
several bishops and vicars apostolic ; the dis-
tinct missions are those of the Franciscans in
Moldavia, Jesuits in llerzcgovine, and Lazarists
at Constantinople and Salonica, the latter
aided in their labors by the Sisters of Charity.
The whole numlier of Latin Christians is esti-
mated at 613,000, and is constantly on the in-
crease.
3. Greece. — In this kingdom there are con-
stant accessions to the Latin and United
Greek Churches, especially at Athens, Pineus,
Patras, Xauplia, Xavarino, and Ileraclia.
There are, iu this kingdom, and the Ionian
republic flourishing missions of the Capuchins
and Jesuits.
Asia — 1. Turkei/ in Afiia. — The Francis-
cans have had missions in the Holy Land since
the Crusades, which, more or less active at
times, are now pushed with energy. The Je-
suits have since their origin had missions
among the eastern Christians, won many back
to Rome, established schools, and raised the
standard of clerical instruction. At Antioch,
there are Maronite, United Greek, and Sy-
rian patriarchs, and elsewhere an Armenian
and a Chaldean patriarch, all in communion
with Rome; and the number of Christians
who acknowledge the supremacy of I'ius IX.,
is about a million.
2. Persia. — In this country there is a mis-
sion directed by the Lazarists, and protected
by France, as well as a L^nited Armenian
church well established and tolerated.
3. India. — The Hindoo mission dates back to
the conquest of Goa, by the Portuguese, in
1510, and was at fir.st conducted by the Fran-
ciscans, Dominicans, and zt^ahnis secular priests.
Its progress was, however, slow, till the arri-
val of St. Francis Xavier. in 1542. By his
labors, and those of other Fathers of the So-
ciety of Jesus, numbers were converted on the
Fi.^ery coast, the Islands of Manar and Cey-
lon, and Travancore, while the former mis-
sionaries renewed their efforts in other jiarts,
and gained to Rome all the Chaldaic Chris-
tians who had fallen into Nostorianism. 'I'hc
Jesuit mission is, however, the most celcbrar
ted. and after Xavier, owed its chief ]irogrcss
to Rol)ert de Nuliili nephew to Pope Marccl-
lus II., who originated the plan of having mis-
sionaries for each caste, adojiting tin; life of
eacli. He himself became a Brahmin-.«amassi.
The Bles.«ed John de Brito. converted tlie Mara-
vas. A(|uaviva, at Delhi, won Akbar tothe
Christian religion, and Goes traversed Thil>et
and 'I'artarv to Peking. 'I'hese missions
were afTecteii by the overthrow of the Portu-
guese and French power in India, by the ix>r-
CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OF.
301
secution oftlie Danes, by the disputes as to the
Malabar rites, by the suppression of the Jesu-
its, and by the troubles of the French revo-
lution. A large number of converts had,
however, been made, and their descendants re-
mained faithful. During the Dutch rule in
Ceylon, Catholicity was maintained there by
the labors of the Portuguese Oratorians. All
Hindostan is now divided into Vicariates
apostolic, for European and native Christiaus ;
the most extensive Hindoo missions being those
of Madura, conducted by the Jesuits ; of My-
sore, conducted by the jiriests of the Foreign
IMissious ; and of Ceylon, by the priests of the
Oratory ; ail of which are rapidly gaining the
ground lost in darker days.
Hindostan contains 15 vicariates, 16 bishops,
a large number of priests, including 500 native
clergymen, and nearly four million of Latin and
Chaklee Christians. Ceylon contains 2 vicar-
iates, 3 bishops, 150,000 Catholics.
4. Farther India. — The Tonquin mission was
founded by the Jesuit Alexander Rhodes, who
labored in that field from about 1624 to 1648,
and gathered a church of 30,000 Christians.
Driven at last from the country, he originated
at Paris the Seminary of the Foreign Missions,
founded iu 16G3, and induced the Holy See to
appoint bishops to Touquin. Since then, the
priests of the Foreign Missions have had the
chief direction of the mission in Annara and the
neighboring province of Su Tchuen, in China.
The Jesuits also continued their mission, and
by the labors of both, many native clergy were
formed. The Cochin China mission was foun-
ded about the same time by F. Rossi, and pass-
ed also to the Foreign Missions. Both churches
have undergone terrible persecutions, even of
late years, under the Emperor Minh-Menh,
but have steadily increased. Tonquin con-
tains six vicariates apostolic, governed by 12
bishops. One of these vicariates (Retord's.) in
1847, contained 10 European, 91 native priests,
200 catechists, and about 200,000 Christians,
Another (Gauthier's),' 2 bishops, 3 European,
43 native priests, GO catechists, 70,000 Chris-
tians. Cochin China contains 3 vicariates
apostolic, all directed by clergy of the Semin-
ary of the Foreign Missions and native priests.
Siam, Laos, and Cambodia. — These missions
are also directed by the priests of the Foreign
Missions and native clergymen. They haVe
been subjected to repeated persecutions, but
arc now at peace. Ava, Pegu, and Malacca
are vicariates, with two bishops and about
10,000 Catholics.
5. China. — The Chinese mission was attempt-
ed in the thirteenth century, by John de Monte-
corviuo, who Ibunded a metropolitan See at
Peking, which subsisted for over a centiuy.
Xavier attempted to restore it in 1552, but
died near Canton. After several other at-
tempts, the Jesuits Ruggieri and Pazio,
founded a mission, which, under the great
Matthew Ricci (1584-1610), obtained a per-
manent footing iu the empire. The early Je-
suits adopted the dress of literati, and thus se-
cured the esteem of the Emperors, and would
probably have gained them to Christ, but for
the Tartar invasion. After that change, per-
secutions began, and as differences arose be-
tween the Jesuits on the one side, and the
Dominicans iu Fokien, and the priests of For-
eign Missions in Suchuen on the other, as to
the use of certain ceremonies, these dissensions
formed a pretext for very severe edicts. For
many years the blood of the Chinese Chris-
tians and their missionaries flowed in torrents.
At present the church enjoys peace, although
the insurgents arc decidedly hostile to the Chi-
nese Catholics, and treat them with great se-
verity.
Among the celebrated Chinese missionaries,
may be named Ricci, Schall, and Verbiest,
mathematicians ; Marin, an American, who at-
tempted a mission in 1556 ; Lopez, a native
Chinese priest and bishop ; Denis de la Cruz,
another Chinese, who died at Carthagena, in
South America ; Navarrette, Amiot, Sanz.
Perboyre, a recent martyr. The suppression
of the Jesuits, and the French revolution, se-
riously atfected these missions, by cutting off
a supply of learned and adventurous missiona-
ries. Since the restoration of peace in Europe,
and especially since the establishment of the
Society for the Propagation of the Faith, the
mission has recovered much of its former
extent. At the present time, China contains
15 sees or vicai'iates, 16 bishops, 84 European
priests, 135 native priests, many convents and
houses of religious women, and a population of
400,000 Catliolics. The great mass of the old
Jesuit missions are directed by the French
Lazarists ; the missions in Suchuen, Yunnan,
Quaychoo, and Leaotong, by the priests of the
Foreign Missions ; those in Chansi, Ohensi,
and Ilouquang, by Italian Franciscans ; those
in Fokien, by Spanish Dominicans ; and those
in Chantong and Kiangnan, by French Je-
suits, who have recently returned.
6. Corea. — Christianity was introduced here
from China about 1632, and has since grown
amid persecution of the severest kind. ,The
history of the Corean Church is written in
blood. Her first neophyte was a martyr ; her
first Chinese apostle, a martyr ; her first native
priest, a martyr ; her first European mission-
aries, all martyrs. I'he number of Catholics
is about 12,000, directed by a bishop, two Eu-
ropean priests, if still alive, and some native
clergy. This mission is entrusted to the Se-
minary of the Foreign Missions.
7. Mongol I'ai tarij. — This is a Lazarist mis-
sion, directed by a bishop, 3 European, 10
native priests, a college seminary, 8 schools,
and 5,000 Christians.
8. Manchuria. — A mission under the priests
of the Foreign Missions, with a bishop and
some European clergymen.
9. Thibet. — Missions were attempted here in
302
CHURCH OF ROME, MISSIONS OF.
the 13th and 14th ccntunos:, by St. Hyaciuth.
of Poland, and Oderic of Fruili ; in the 17th
century, by the Jesuits and Capuchins ; but in
the interval Budliism had grown up and ex-
pelled all but the traces of Christianity. The
mission was restored in 184G, by the Lazarists,
Hue and (xabet. Others have followed, and a
bishop has lately been appointed.
Ea^t Lidia Islands. — Missions exist on some
of these of ancient date, but the data are not
very full or recent.
10. Japan. — Christianity was introduced into
this empire in ir)4:9, by St. Francis Xavier,
who had converted a Japanese at Goa. During
a stay of two years he visited several king-
doms, and founded mis.sions which he confided
to zealous priests of his order. The faith
spread rapidly. In 1562, the Prince of Omura
and soon after the Kings of Bungo and
Ariraa, embraced Christianity, and sent a
splendid embassy to Pope Gregory XIII.
Soon after Taycosoma, a powerful general,
usurped the throne, and in 1586 issued a law
against Christianity, which his predecessor,
Nabunanga, had greatly favored. The num-
ber of Christians increased with the persecu-
tion, and in 1638, they rose in arms, in Arima,
but were crushed by Dutch aid. Since then
the faith has been almost entirely extinguished.
The number of Christians put to death has
been estimated at nearly two millions, and the
annals of the Jesuits, Franciscans, and Domi-
nicans are filled with narratives of the deaths
of members of their orders, in Japan. Be-
sides Xavier, the greatest missionaries were
Valignani, Father John Baptist, a Spanisli
Franciscan, Philip of Jesus, a Mexican Fran-
ciscan, both crucified at Nangasacki, Father
Charles Spinola, <fec.
The last Catholic priest who entered Japan
was M. Sedotti, who, in 1701), found means to
land, but he was never again heard of Within
a few years great efforts have been nuide to
reach the forsaken Christians, still said to exist
in Japan ; and a bishop appointed to the mis-
sion has already founded stations on the Lew-
Chew islands.
Africa. — 1. Congo. — The earliest missions
were those of Congo, begun ]jy the Dominicans,
Franciscans, and Jesuits. From 1500 to about
1560 the success was great ; the king and many
of his people were converted, native priests or-
dained, and one raised to the episcopacy. Ca-
tholicity flourished here for many years, but
insensibly declined for want of priests. The
Carmelites established missions in Guinea, the
Jesuits in Angola and Loango ; and on these
chicHy the Catholics of Congo depended, a.s
late as 1622. In 1645, the Capuchins under-
took the mission, headed by Fray Francisco
dc Pampehina, once a military officer of high
rank. This body and their successors con-
tinued the mission till about 1700. when Cis-
tercians took their ])lace. About tiic middle of
the last century, the priests of the Foreign
Missions established stations in Loango, and
converted many. These missions still exist in
several parts.
2. Barbary. — Missions have from the earliest
times been conducted here by Franciscans,
Dominicans, Trinitarians, and Mercedarians,
still later by the Jesuits and Lazarists. The
number of Christians is, however, very small,
and the clergy do not number a score.
3. Egypt. — The Latin mission here is due
chiefly to the Jesuits, of whom Father Sicard
was the leader. Many Copts were recalled to
the Latin Church, and are now directed by La-
zarist missionaries, aided by Brothers of the
Christian School.
4. Abyssinia. — The Portuguese, about 1530,
attempted to convert the schismatics of Abys-
sinia, and revive morality and learning ; but
the efforts and the zeal of the Jesuits failed ; the
missionaries were excluded, after a long perse-
cution. In 1839, the mission was revived by
the Lazarists, and a bishop appointed, while
the Galla country was allotted to the Capuchins,
in 1846. (See Abyssinia.)
5. Madagascar. — The first missions among
the Malagasies, was begun by the Lazarists,
in 1648, and continued till 1674, when Louis
XIV. forbid French vessels to stop at the is-
land. The mission was revived in 1837, by
Mr. Dalmond, who founded the station of
Nossibe, in 1840. Since 1845, this mission
has been confided to the Jesuits, who have
made rapid progress.
6. Other parts. — Missions have been founded
at different spots on the eastern and western
coast, which have been discontinued, or are
not yet firmly established. That of Guinea,
is the most thriving. A bishop was at first
selected for it from among the Catholic clergy
in the United States ; but on the failure of
his health, the mission was transferred to the
Society of the Sacred Heart of Jesus and
Mary, who still administer it.
OcEANiOA. — The first Catholic mission in
Oceanica was that of ^lessrs. Bachelot, Ar-
mand, and Short, of the " Congregation of the
Sacred Hearts of Jesus and Mary," at the
Sandwich Islands. They began it in 1826,
and continued it till their expulsion by the
government in 1832. In the following year
Vicars apostolic were appointed, and missions
begun at (Jambier, Tahiti, and for a second
time at the Sandwich Islands. These missions
are chiefly directed by priests of the society of
Picpry and the Marists. Other stations were
begun in New Zealand, at Futuna, in the
Marquesas, Nukahwa, and elsewhere. These
missions extended so rapidly that several new
vicariates were formed, and in spite of martyr-
dom, disease and shipwreck, they arc still ad-
vancing. Oceanica now contains 8 bishojjs,
10 vicariates, and 300 missionaries.
America. 1. Spanish Missions. — Missions
were established in all Spanish America,
and great numbers were converted, cspe-
CHURCH MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
303
cially in Mexico and Peru, where tlieir de-
scendants are still, the majority mingled
with the Spanish race. Even in Cuba the
Spanish blood is much mixed with Indian
blood.
The missions among the wild tribes were of
a different character. The most celebrated
are those of the Jesuits in Paraguay and Cal-
ifornia, the missions among the Moxos, Abi-
pones, in Chili and New Grenada. Few of
these are now properly missions, and are mat-
ter for a history rather than a gazetteer.
2. Portuguese Missions. — The missions of
Brazil were chiefly conducted by Portuguese
Jesuits, who converted several tribes, although
their numbers were diminished by the cruelty
of the savages on land and pirates at sea. Se-
veral of these missions still subsist, but details
are not easily accessible as to their numbers
and extent.
3. United States and Canada. — The early
Catholic Missions in New Mexico, Florida,
and California, were Spanish. The natives of
New Mexico were converted, and being now
Christians, are not considered a mission. In
Florida, while a Spanish province, the Indians
were converted by Franciscans, and formed
villages on the Apalachicola and around the
city of St. Augustine. The English drove
these Indians from their villages, and their
descendants, now called Seminoles or wander-
ers, have lost all traces of Christianity. The
Upper California missions were conducted
by Franciscans, and till a recent period
were in a very flourishing state, but are now
destroyed. The Canada missions were be-
gun by French Jesuits, in Nova Scotia and
Maine, about 1612. The Kecollects followed,
succeeded again by the Jesuits. This mission
converted the Abenaquis of JNIaine, now form-
ing two villages in the state of Maine and two
in Canada; the Hurons of Upper Canada, a
part of whom are Catholics, still at Lorette,
near Quebec ; a part of the Iroquois or Five
nations, who form the three Catholic villages
at Caughnawaga, St. Regis and the Lake of
the two Mountains ; the Algonquins, who form
a mission village, with the last-named band of
Iroquois ; the Micmacs of Nova Scotia, now at-
tended by the secular clergy; the Montagnais, at
Chicoutimi and Red River, under a bishop and
missionaries ; the Ottawas of Lake Superior,
who with the Ojibwas and Menomonees are
now under the care of Canadian clergy on
the north, and on the south, of Bishop Baraga,
a philologist, whose talents have been ac-
knowledged by government ; the Illinois and
Miamis, whose descendants are now on Indian
Territory and in Louisiana ; the Arkansas,
whose descendants, under the name of Kappas,
are also there.
The Catholics of Maryland began missions
among the neighboring tribes, but tribe and
mission have '.ong since disappeared. Since
the revolutioi? 5:,ud the establishment of a Ca-
tholic hierarchy in the United States, atten-
tion has been gradually turned to the ludiao
missions ; two vicariates are devoted to them
alone. That of Upper Michigan contains one
bishop, five priests, five schools, and a large
number of Catholic Ottawas and Ojibwas ;
that of Indian territory with a bishop, eight
clergymen, four schools, 5,300 Catholics of the
Pottawotamies, Osages, Miamis, Illinois, Kan-
sas, and Kappas. Besides these, there are in
the diocese of Milwaukee a Menomonee and
an Ojibwa mission ; in that of St. Paul's, Min-
nesota, a Sioux, a Winnebago, and three
Ojibwa missions ; and in Oregon there are
missions among the Waskos, Cayusus, Pointed
Hearts and Flatheads, — the Indian Catholics
of the territory numbering 3,400. Besides
these, a few hundred converted Indians are tc
be found in California.
Among the celebrated missionaries in Ameri-
ca may be named Anchieta, Bareze, Las Casas,
Bertrand, Solano, Gand, Motolinia, Brebeuf,
Druilletes, Chaum.onot, Jogues, and in later
times Marcoux, De Smet, Point, Belcour.
This is an outline of the widely-extended
and much diversified Catholic missions. As
to their history, the recent work of Henrion,
" Histoire Generate des Missions Catholiques,"
and the Annals of the Society for the Propaga-
tion of the Faith will give a general idea ; but
the sources are the accounts of the various re-
ligious bodies engaged on the several missions,
voluminous works which would alone form a
library. — John G. Shea, Esq.
CHURCH HILL : A station of the
Church Alissionary Society, on the Island of
Jamaica, W. I.
CHURCH MISSIONARY SOCIETY :
This Society was formed in the year 1800. The
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge,
and that for the Propagation of the Gospel in
Foreign Parts, had long existed, and received
the benefactions from the Church of England.
But as they both confined themselves chiefly to
foreign parts, where Christianity was already
embraced, there was, in the view of the friends
of Foreign Missions, still room left for a Soci-
ety which should consider the heathen as its
principal care.
This Society was organized on the principle
of making a specified contribution the condi-
tion of membership. Seven governors and a
treasurer are elected by the members ; also a
general committee, consisting of these officers
and twenty-five other members, for the general
direction of its affairs.
The constitution and practice of this Society
are regarded by its members and managers as
in strict conformity with ecclesiastical princi-
ples, as they are recognized in the constitution
and practice of the Church of England. It
exercises no spiritual or ecclesiastical func-
tions ; but is an " institution for discharg-
ing the temporal and lay offices necessary
304:
CHURCH MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
for the preaching of the GosidcI among the
heathen.
The Society was originally designed to ope-
rate in Africa and the East, and this is in-
corporated in its name, " The Church Mission-
ary Society for Africa and the East." But it
has extended its operations beyond these
bounds. It now has missions in Africa, India,
the Mediterranean, theWest Indies, Australasia,
and North-west America. The missions of this
Society, particularly in Africa, India, and New
Zealand, have been among the most successful
of Protestant missions. Its missionaries have
generally been devoted men of God ; and the
Holy Spirit has been poured out in a wonder-
ful manner upon several of its missions, pro-
ducing the most surprising changes in a
brief period of time. The state of the mis-
sions of this Society in the year 1852 will ap-
pear from the following
TABULAR VIEW.
Clergymen.
Lay teachers and others
3
0)
a
=1
■a
o
o
.g
-d
-S
European.
Country-
Native.
MISSIONS.
a
M
U
.2
03
a
1
^
o
a
a
X
c
1
Z
3
"3
i
a
_2
1
-a
a
a
a
6
a
1
o
o
a
a
m
West Africa..
181C
15
13
1
3
58
7
261
2743
49
1061
800
1034
2514
5409
Yoruba ....
1845
'2
4
I
1
13
58
203
9
25
12
453
22
512
Mediterranean
J 828
4
6
2
1
4
6
East Africa..
1845
1
2
I
Western India
1820
6
8
')
1
1
55
n
55
31
1621
North India..
181C
22
30
5
6
1
4
248
28
94
1087
115
5716
578
564
6858
South India..
1815
20
23
1
2
11
4
6
6
2
544
93
794
4180
354
6734
3093
9827
Cej'lou
1817
6
10
3
1
124
25
21
371
101
2S20
779
111
3710
China
1845
^
6
6
•2
35
35
New Zealand
1814
21
21
6
369
30
551
5749
West Indies..
1831
2
3
3
2
430
N. W. Amer.
TOTAM
1822
.7
109
6
131
~'
2
1
21
4
1
1
8
38
454
2E
295
275
T6
92
738
26
15
13 1 3
1423
189
1834
15 306
C84
25,710
This table is condensed from the Report of
1852. The following summary, from the Report
of 1854, shows considerable progress in several
particulars :
Stations
118
European m.issionaries
152
East Indian and native missionaries
24
European lay assistants .
30
European female teachers
. 14
Country-born teachers .
14
Native teachers .
1681
Communicants - . . .
17,224
Baptisms during the year, adults and
children
5444
Estimated attendants on public wor-
ship
107,000
Ditto scholars under instruction .
40,000
Income. — The following table shows the re-
ceipts of the Society, from its commencement,
in periods of four years, wjih the average an-
nual receipts of each period ; from wliich it
appears tliat the average annual receipts have
been regularly and steadily advancing, with
occasional sliglit depressions, from £321 to
£123,000, whicli may be regarded as a fair
inde.x of tlic missionary spirit in the Church
of England. And, it is to be especially no-
ticed here, as in other societies, that, beyond a
certain point, they begin to receive back a
revenue from the churches they have planted.
In 1853, the Church Missionary Society re
ceived from its missions £10,783, being aboi
one-tenth of its whole income.
Years.
Amount.
Average.
1799 to 1802,
£1,284
£321
1803
' 1806,
7,096
1,774
1807
' 1810,
11,699
2,924
1811
' 1814,
38,650
4,664
1815
' 1818,
78,074
19,518
1819
' 1822,
121,753
30,438
1823
' 1826,
152,608
38,152
1827
' 1830,
188,467
47,114
1831
' 1834,
187,575
46,893
1835,
68,432
68,432
1836
' 1839,
332,424
83,106
1840
' 1843,
431,018
107,754
1844
' 1847,
430,628
107,450
1848
' 1851,
411,970
102,992
1852,
118,674
118,674
18.53,
120,932
120,932
1854,
tal
123,915
123,915
T(
£2,805,205
CISTERCIAN : A reformed Benedictine
monk.
CLARKSON : Station of the United
Brethren, on the Zitzekamma rivers, in South
Africa, among the Fingocs.
CLEAR-WATER— OONSTANTINOPLE.
803
CLEAR-WATER : Once a station of tbe
Mothodist Episcoijal Cliurcli in Oregon.
CLOUDY-BAY : A station of the Wes-
leyan Missionary Society in New Zealand, on
the north-eastern side of the middle island.
CLOISTER : A monastery or nunnery ;
a bouse where monks or nuns reside.
COCLIIN : The chief city of a principality
of the same name, extending along the western
coast of Southern India, between Malabar and
Travancore, and under the nominal govern-
ment of a native rajah. A station of the
Church of Scotland Mission to the Jews.
COIMBATOOR: The capital of a dis-
trict of the same name, in the Madras presi-
dency. South India, 270 miles south-west of
Madras. The London Missionary Society
commenced operations here in 1830.
COLOMBO :' A seaport town of Ceylon,
the modern capital of the island and seat of
government, situated on the west coast. The
fort contains the residences of the governor
and most of the British inhabitants. The
pettah, or inner town, has a mixed population
of Dutch, Portuguese, and their descendants.
The native Ceylonese reside chiefly in the sub-
urbs. The to\Vn within the walls is regularly
laid out, and built very much in the European
style. Colombo is situated in the centre of
the cinnamon country, and is the depot for
nearly all the foreign trade of the island, and
has a somewhat extensive trade by means of
internal navigation. Its climate is healthy,
though destructive of books, clothing, &c.
This is the residence of the Bishop of the
Church of England for the Bishopric of Cey-
lon, and the missionaries of the Church Mis-
sionary Society and of the Society for the Pro-
pagation of the Gospel, are under his jurisdic-
tion. The Baptists and Wesleyans have each
their missionary stations at Colombo.
COLESBERG : Station of the London and
Wesleyau Missionary Societies, in South Afri-
ca, in the district of Colesberg, near the Cra-
dock river.
COMBACONUM : A station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society, on the eastern coast
of southern Hindostan, 25 miles from Tanjore.
It was formerly the capital of the Cholas, one
of the most ancient Hindoo dynasties in the
south of India of which any traces have been
discovered, and who gave their name to the
whole coast of Cholamundul, or Coromandel.
The population is about 40,000.
CONSTANTINOPLE: The first and
largest station of the American Board among
the Armenians and Jews of Turkey, and where
the Free Church of Scotland and London Jews'
Society have missions to the Jews. Lat. 41°
N., long. 29° E. This magniticent city, the
capital of the Turkish empire, has a population
according to the best estimates, of about 500,-
000 in the city proper, and of about as much
more in the suburbs on the north side of the
harbor, and on the Bosphorus. Taking the
20
whole together, it may be divided as follows :
Turks and other Mohammedans, 500,000 ;
Greeks, (including all of the Greek church)
200,000 ; Armenians, 160,000 ; Jews, 80,000 ;
Franks (foreigners not subject to the Porte,
and who wear the hat instead of other head-
dresses,) 40,000 ; and 20,000 not included under
the other heads. (See Armenians and Oriental
Christians.)
COPTS : A name given to the descendants
of the ancient Egyptians, who profess the
Christian faith according to the sect of the
Jacobites or Eutychians, called Mmiophysites,
from their distinguishing tenet. They diScr
in many points of doctrine and practice from
the Greeks and Latins ; but the principal
ground of their separation from other Chris-
tians lies in their belief in relation to the na-
ture of Christ. They maintain that the divine
and human natures so coalesce as to become
one, and therefore they reject the council of
Chalcedon and the epistle of Leo the Great.
Their government is episcopal ; and they have
a patriarch or metropolitan, at Alexandria,
who is head of the whole church, and is said
to have 140 bishoprics in Egypt, Syria, Nubia,
and other countries, besides the Abuna of
Abyssinia, who is also nominated and consecrat-
ed by him.
Eutychius, Patriarch of Alexandria, was the
first who maintained the Monophysite doctrine,
for which he was excommunicated, and died
in exile. But his party, with Dioscorus at their
head, shortly after, called a council at Ephesus,
in opposition to that of Chalcedon, which had
condemned Eutychius, and in their turn excom-
municated the Pope and all the bishops who
adhered to him. This is the origin of the
breach between the Latin and Alexandrian
churches, which all the efforts of Rome, for
centuries, have failed to heal. Dioscorus v\'as,
however, anathematized and banished ; but his
successor, who was nominated by the court at
Constantinople, was assassinated by the Mono-
physites. After this, there were two patri-
archs ; and the Greek party being favored by
the government, obtained the ascendancy.
But on the invasion by the Turks, the Mono-
physites joined the invaders, and thus obtained
the confirmation of all their privileges, and
ascendancy over their rivals. They practice
both circumcision and baptism. Confession
is observed, but instead of being private and
particular, it is public and general. They are
strict in their fasts, and loose in their morals.
Divorce is allowed on easy terms.
The Patriarch of Alexandria is chosen by
the bishops of the Coptic church. He is
obliged to preach once a year to his clergy,
while their j^rovince is, on set days, to read
homilies and legends to the laity. The priests
and inferior ministers are allowed to marry
before ordination. None but the lowest classes
become ecclesiastics, who are excessively igno-
l-ant, yet held in reverence by the people. Mo-
306
COPAY-rDELAWAEE.
oastic life is held in high esteem, those who
devote themselves to it liviunf in great auster-
ity, in deserts, sleeping in their clothes on the
ground, and every evening prostrating thcm-
eelves 150 times with their face and breast on
the ground. But they arc all of the lowest
class of people, and live on alms. The present
condition of the Copts may be learned from
the following extract of a letter written in
1840, to the Christian Knowledge Society, by
Eev. H. Tattara : " I have just returned irom
visiting the Coptic Christians in every part of
Egypt ; and during my stay in the country, I
entered most of their convents. They are in a
very low state, as regards pure Christianity, hav-
ing only its name and form, without the inilu-
ence of Christian principle upon the heart and
life. The Christian religion is now fully toler-
ated, and all its professors, of every denomina-
tion, receive protection, and enjoy equal privi-
leges with the Mohammedans. Although learn-
ing is at a low ebb among the Copts, yet they
recognize the right of the people to possess the
Scriptures. They are accessible, and will read
any publications presented them by English
Christians. They have a poor translation of
the Old Testament, in Arabic manuscript, and
a better one of the New." — Edinburgh Ency-
clopedia; Mosheim ; Buck; Missionary Guide
Book. For missions see Egvi't and Abyssinia,
COPAY : A station of the Church Mis-
sionary Society, five miles from the town of
Jaffna, Ceylon.
corns CO : A small island on the western
coast of Africa, 5;") miles north of the equator,
and 15 to 20 miles from the mainland, in the Bay
of Corisco, having a population of about 4,000.
The I'resbyteriau Board have a station here.
CORFU : One of the Ionian islands, and
capital of the Ionian Ilepublic, for some lime
the principal residence of the American Bap
tist missionaries in Greece, and still the seat
of the only school in their mission.
COTTAYAM: A station of the Church
Missionary Society in Suuthorn India.
COTTA : A ])0pul(jus district in Ceylon,
within a few miles of Colombo, a princij)al
station of the Cluirch Missionary Society. lt.s
situation is peculiarly beautiful, being on the
verge of vjist gardens of cinnamon, and sur-
rounded with natural forests, interspersed with
gardens of spice.'^, and groves of cocoauut and
palm.
CKADOCK : Station of the London and
Wcsleyan Missionary Societies in South Af-
rica, in the district of Cradock, north-east 'of
Graaf-Keinet.
CKUDA : A village in Arracan, and an out-
station of the Arracan Mission of the Ame-
rican Baptist Missionary Union.
CUDDALORE: A maritime town in the
Carnatic, India, extensive and po))ulous. One (jf
the early stations of the Christian Knowledge
Society, uiul now a station of the Gospel Pro-
pagation Society. •
CUDDAPAH : A station of the London
Missionary Society, directly west of Nellore,
and some 50 miles north-west of Madras. The
province of Cuddapah is about 170 by 120
miles in extent, and contains a population of
over a million.
CUMBERLAND PRESBYTERIAN
CHURCH, Board of Missions ; The General
Assembly of the Cumberland Presbyterian
Church have a Board of Foreign and Domestic
Mi.ssious, which resolved at its annual meeting
in 1853, to establish two foreign missions iu
the course of the year. Previous to that, for
several years they had cultivated the spirit of
domestic missions, by calling on the churches
to aid in establishing new churches and sus-
taining preachers at Philadelphia, Cincinnati,
Louisville, St. Louis, and Alton ; and also
in Keokuk, la. Several brethren were sent out
to Oregon, California, and Texas. The Board
of Missions, have employed special agents
to travel through the churches, and take up
collections, besides using their numerous papers
and the puljjit, to wake a deep and lasting
missionary spirit throughout the 100,000 mem-
bers now composing their church. They have
a great amomit of wealth among their people,
and with their new Theological Seminary, and
more than half a dozen colleges, containing a
large number looking forward to the ministry,
what may we not expect when the fact is
known, that the destitute thousands of a new
country, just reclaimed from the savages, called
their body into existence ? — Rev. S. Wells.
CTITTACK: A town in Eastern Ilindostan,
oh the coast of the Bay of Bengal, 250 miles
S. W. from Calcutta, and 770 miles north-east
from Madras. The population of the town is
supposed to be about 40,000. There are 7000
houses, built mostly of mud walls, thatched
with a long coarse grass. A few are built
of stone and brick. The town contains a
number of idol temples, but none of them
much celebrated. The English General Baj>
lists established a mission at Cuttack m
1822.
DACCA: A large town in Bengal, 190
miles N.E. from Calcutta. Population about
300,000. Occupied by the English Baptists ia
181G.
DAMARA COUNTRY : The country of
the Damara, Nama(iualand, South Africa, oc-
cupied Ijy the AVesleyans.
DAN I SH A K RA : See Akra.
DAR.JKKLING: A station of Gossners
Missionary Society iu Hindostan.
DARl/lSTON : A station of the Gospel
Propagation Society in Jamaica, W. I.
DAVVTON: a station of the London
Mis.-<ionary Society in Jamaica, W. I.
DEDGAUM : A station of the Am. Board
in Ilindostan, belonging to the AhmednuggoT
Mis.'iion.
DELAWARE : The chief town of the De-
laware tribe, in the Indian territory, and the
DELHI— EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
307
seat of the Delaware mission of the American
Baptist Missionary Union.
DELHI : A celelirated city in the presi-
dency of Bengal, capital of a province of
the same name, and the ancient metropolis
of the Palan and Mogul empires. It is sit-
uated on the Jumna, 830 miles N. W. of Cal-
cutta— traveling distance, 960. Population
about 200,000. In its period of splendor,
Delhi was a city of vast extent, as is evinced
by its ruins, which are supposed to cover
nearly as large a surface as London, West-
minster, and Southwark. The present city is
about seven miles in circuit, and, although it
bears no comparison with the ancient city,
which is said to have contained two millions
of inhabitants ; yet there are few, if any, of the
ancient cities of Hindostan, which, at the pre-
sent time, will be found to rival modern Delhi
in the wealth of its bazars, or in the activity and
enterprize of its population. The ruins of old
Delhi cover the plains for an extent of nearly
eight miles to the south of the modern city,
and connect it with the village of Cuttuh, ex-
hibiting, throughout this vast tract, one of the
most striking scenes of desolation to be met
with in the whole world. It has not been the
scene of much important missionary labor, ex-
cept by the English Baptists, who commenced
their operations here in 1818.
DEMARARA : See West hides.
_ DH ARWAR : A fortified town in the pro-
vince of Bejapoor, India, and capital of a dis-
trict of the same name. Population of the
district, 600,000. A station of the German
Missionary Society.
DIEP RIVER : A station of the Wesleyan
Missionary Society in Little Namaqualand,
South Africa.
DINDIGUL : A station of the American
Board in Southern Hindostan, connected with
the Madura Mission.
DINAJPOOR : Capital of a district of
the same name in India, about 260 miles north
of Calcutta. Population, 20,000. A station
of the Baptist Missionary Society.
DOHN AVOOR : A station of the Church
Missionary Society, in the Tinnevelly district,
Hindostan.
DOMINICA : See Weid Indies.
DONG-TAHN : A Karen village, 33 miles
from Maulmain, in Burmah, and'an out-sta-
tion of the Maulmain Mission of the American
Baptist Missionary Union.
DRY HARBOR : A station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society in Jamaica, W I.
DRY RIVER : A station of the Wesley-
aus in Trinidad, W. I.
DUKE TOWN : Station of the United
Presbyterian Synod of Scotland, about 50
miles from the mouth of the Old Calabar river,
in West Africa.
D'URBAN : A station of the Wesleyan Mis-
sionary Society among the Fingoes, in Kaf-
fraria, S. A. Also, a station of the same So-
ciety in the Natal district, same as Port
Natal.
DWIGHT: A station of the American
Board among the Cherokee Indians.
DYSALSDORP : Station of the London
Missionary Society in South Africa, 45 miles
north of Pocaltsdorp, commenced in 1838.
This station presents a very extensive field for
missionary operations. In the neighborhood,
there is a tract of country, the Congo, very
densely populated.
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS :
Christianity is essentially missionary. Its
Great Author announced it to the world as
the only true religion ; and it has ever been
aggressive in its character. The missionary
enterprize is but Christianity in action, carry-
ing out the design of its Founder, to subdue
the whole world to himself This was the
spirit that animated the apostles after the
wonderful impulse which they received on the
day of Pentecost, as they went everywhere, in
obedience to Christ's last command, to preach
the Gospel to every creature. Paul, who re-
ceived his commission directly from Christ,
after His ascension, was the first foreign mis-
sionary, having been appointed as the apostle
to the Gentiles ; and the graphic record of
his labors and successes, contained in the Acts
of the Apostles, shows how well he fulfilled
his commission, and presents him, for all time
to come, as the Model Missionary. Respect-
ing the labors of the other apostles, we pos-
sess but slender information. A few brief no-
tices in the Acts, and some vague and uncer-
tain accounts from ecclesiastical history, are
all that have reached us. Yet these, taken in
connection with the established fact, that in
the course of a single generation, the Gospel
was propagated throughout the then known
world, are sufficient to show that their lives
must have been devoted to the missionary
work. Peter appears to have directed his
labors chiefly to the dispersed Jews, to whom
his epistles are directed. Christian antiquity
ascribes to him a settlement in Antioch, and
afterwards in Parthia ; but he appears to have
extended his missionary tours as far as Baby-
lon, where his first epistle is dated, and which
is supposed by some to have been the metro-
polis of the eastern dispersion of the Jews.
Eusebius states that he was brought to Rome
by the providence of God, to oppose the here-
tical schemes of Simon Magus ; and this
statement seems to be confirmed by the re-
cently discovered work of Hippolytus. And
tradition makes him to have suffered crucifix-
ion at that place, being placed on the cross at
his own request, with his head downwards,
deeming himself unworthy to suffer after the
manner of his Master. But the whole state-
ment as to his ever having been at Rome is of
questionable authority. '
James, the son of Zeljedee, is represented
as having labored amons the Jews who were
308
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
scattered abroad in Asia Minor, and the
neio-hborin<r counlrios ; but as ho resided seve-
ral years at Jerusalem, and finally fell a saeri-
fice to the cruelty of Herod, it is not probable
that his travels were either frequent or ex-
pensive. Andrew seems to have ohoseu Scy-
thia and the adjacent countries as the scene
of his missionary exertions. He passed along
the shore of the Euxiue Sea, and returned to
Bj'zantium, now called Constantinople, where
he labored in word and doctrine with consider-
able success. He afterwards traveled through
Thrace, Macedonia, Thessaly, Achaia, and
Epirus, preaching repentance and forgiveness
of sins in the name of Jesus Christ. Philip
is considered as the apostle of Upper Asia,
and is supposed, in conjunction with Andrew,
to have sown the seed of Divine truth among
the inhabitants of Scythia. In the latter part
of his life he preached at Hierapolis, in Phry-
gia, where he sealed his mission with his blood.
Bartholomew, who is supposed to be the
same with Nathaniel, extended his travels as
far as India, on this side the Ganges, where he
instructed the inhaVntants in the revelation of
Divine truth, and at his departure presented
them a copy of the Gospel of Matthew. He
is also said to have preached in Lycaonia.
Thomas, according to the testimony of Je-
rome, was a very active and useful missionary,
•who labored among the Medes, Persians, Par-
thians, Bactrians, Carmaniafis, Hyrcanians,
and Magians. The Portuguese, when they
visited India in the sixteenth century, discov-
ered traditions and ancient monuments, which
they regarded as evidence that this apostle had
preached there. The Chaldean Christians
throughout all Asia regard Thomas as their
apostle ; and tlie h^yrian Christians of India,
on the Coromandel and Malabar coasts, to
the number of 200,000, hold, with a constant
and uniform tradition, that this apostle
was the founder of their churches. He is
said also to have visited Ceylon. These ex-
isting traditions arc corroborated by ancient
writers.
Matthew, or I.evi, the son of Alpheus, is
said to have remained for some time in Juda-a,
declaring the glad tidings of salvation ; and
there to have written his Gospel, about the
time that the apostles Peter and Paid suffered
martyrdom at Rome. He then went a.s a mis-
sionary into Ethiopia, Persia, Purtliia. and
India; and, either in the lalter of these places,
or in Abyssinia, he sufl'ered martyrdom.
Simon, called Zclotcs, appears to have traveled
through E<r)/pt, Cijrene, Asia, Libi/a, and Mau-
ritania. Niee])h()rus asserts that he introduced
the Gospel to Britain, where he preached, and
wrought many miracles. Othei-s, however,
are of opinion that he directed his route toward
Prr.s'Vi, where he labored till he received the
crown of martyrdom.
John, the l)eloved di.sciple, called Jolm the
Divine, shared, for some time, with I'eter, in
preaching, working miracles, and enduring se-
vere persecution at Jerusalem ; and in Samaria
the Holy Ghost was given by imposition of their
hands. About a. d. 52, this apostle continued
as " a pillar " of the Christian Church in
Judaa ; and, after that period, he is said to
have carried the word of life to the inhabit-
ants of Parthia and India ; but it is more evi-
dent that he labored for some time in Asia
Minor. In the persecution which raged under
Domitian, about a. d. 95, he Avas banished to
the isle of Patmos, where he was providentially
preserved, and favored with a series of the
most important visions. Under the reign of
the emperor Nerva, he was recalled from exile,
and returned to Ephesus, where he continued
to i^rcach the Gospel of Christ, till, at length,
he peacefully breathed out his soul into the
hands of his Eedeemer, in the ninety-ninth
year of his age.
JuDE, or Judas, not Iscariot, commenced his
missionary labors in Judcca, Galilee, Samaria,
and Idumea ; and afterwards extended his
travels to Mesopotamia, Persia, Armenia, and
Libya ; and, either in the latter place or in
Persia, the faithfulness of his preaching was
rewarded by a cruel death. James the Less
does not seem to have extended his labors
beyond the Jewish metropolis, where he met
his death at the hands of the Jews.
For a fuller account of the labors of each
of the apostles, see a summary in Fabricius
Lux Evans, cap. 5, pp. 95-114 ; Lardner
XVII, p. 239; Prof. Burton's Eccles. Hist.l. 281.
From highly respectable authorities, it
would appear that the Gospel was preached
in Britain in the first century. Bishop Stil-
lingfleet is decidedly of opinion that a Chris-
tian church was i)lautcd in this island, in the
time of the apostles ; as Euscbius distinctly
states that some of them had " passe<l over
the ocean, and preached in the British isles : ''
and Theodoret mentions the Britons among
the nations whom the " fishermen, publicans,
and tentmakers," as he styles them, had in-
duced to embrace the religion of the crucified
Jesus. Gddas, the earliest of our British his-
torians, speaking of the memorable revolt and
overthrow of the Britons under Boadicea,
about A. D. GO, gives us to understand that the
Gospel then began to be successfully published
in the country ; and the correctness of his
statement is sujiported by those ancient Cam-
brian records, called the Friades. In these it
is stated that the celebrated Caractacus, who,
after a war of nine j-ears, was betrayed to the
Unmans, was, together with' his father, Bren-
nius, and the whole family, carried prisoners to
Rome, about the year 53, where they remained
for a j)eriod of seven years. At this time the
word of life was preached in the imperial city ;
and Brennius, with others of his family, became
jirofessed membci-s of the Christian church.
At the expiration of seven years they Avere
permitted to return, and were thus furnished
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS,
309
with a favorable opportunity of introducing
the Gospel into their own country. It is also
said that three Christians, one an Israelite,
and the other two Gentiles, with whom they
had been in the habit of associating, accom-
panied them from Eouie, and became instru-
mental, as preachers, in reclaiming many of
the Britons from their ancient superstitions,
and instructing them in " the truth, as it is in
Jesus."
It does not appear that Caractacus himself
embraced the faith of Christ at Rome ; but
his son Cyllin, and his daughter Eigar, are
both ranked among the British saints. That
son is represented as the grandfather of King-
Lucius, who made great exertions for the pro-
motion of Christianity in Siluria, the country
of his ancestors ; and even the celebrated
King Arthur seems to have been a descendant
of this family. Eigar, the daughter of Carac-
tacus, is said to have bestowed her hand on a
British chieftain, whose domain, called Caer
Sarllog, is now known by the name of Old
Sarum ; and Claudia, one of her sisters, is
supposed to have become the wife of a Eomau
senator, named Pudens.
Within little more than one hundred years
from our Saviour's passion, Justin Martyr
places Christians in every country known to
the Romans, which must have included Britain.
Irenajus also asserts, that our holy religion
was propagated to earth's utmost bounds by
the Apostles and their disciples. Again he
mentions the Celts among the nations then
enlightened, the Celtic race being then seated in
the British Isles. Tcrtullian speaks of British
districts inaccessible to Roman arms, but sub-
dued by Christ. Dr. Adam Clarke sums up
at length the evidence relating to this subject ;
and to his argument the curious reader is re-
ferred. It appears evident, however, not only
that there was Christianity in Britain at a
very early period, but that there was a regu-
lated Church, with its bishops, who were sum-
moned to foreign councils, where matters of
vital importance were discussed and deter-
mined, long before Augustine was sent by
Gregory the Great, to convert the British Isles
to Rome.
Most faithfully did the first preachers of
Christianity fulfil their commission ; for by
them the Gospel was preached, not only to
Jews, Greeks, and Romans, but also to Bri-
tons, Gauls, Spaniards, Hindoos, Arabians,
Persians, and Scythians. Others were sent
out by them v/ho emulated their fidelity. An
oriental writer relates that all Persia, all parts
of Assyria, Armenia, and Media, the regions
about Babylon, Huz, and Gala, to the borders
of India, received the Gospel and its institu-
tions, from the hands of Agheus, the silk-
weaver, the disciple of the Apostle Haddeus
or Thaddeus. This took place about fifteen
years after the ascension of our Lord. — See
Yeates's Indian Ckurc/i History, pp. 27, 29.
Century II. — In the second century, the
march of divine truth was steady and trium-
phant. Eusebius informs us that the followers
of the Apostles imitated their example, in
distributing their worldly goods among the
necessitous believers ; and quitting their own
country, went forth into distant lands to pro-
pagate the Gospel. Among them were An-
dronicus, Aristarchus, Crescens, Marcus, Sijlva-
nus, and Trophimus ; and to these were after-
wards added Pantccnus, who traveled into
India ; and Irenccus and Pothinus, who came
from Smyrna and settled in France. Tradition
relates that Irenajus was sent by Polycarp
into Gaul, (circ. a.d. 160.) It is added also,
that Pothinus received a similar commission.
(Greg. Turon. History France, I. p. 27 ; and
Cave's Lives Fathers, p. 162.) Panta3nus,
master of a school of philosophy, in Alex-
andria, was sent by Demetrius, bishop of that
city, to India, where he remained several years ;
and on his return, is said to have brought with
him a copy of the Gospel of Slatthew
in Hebrew, which had been left by Bartho-
lomew. Athenagoras, who, towards the end of
this century wrote an apology for the Chris-
tian religion, says, " The Christians made small
account of the present life, but were intent
only on contemplating God, and the divine
Word, who is from him ; what union the Son
has with the Father ; what communion the Fa-
ther has with the Son ; what the Spirit is ; and
what are the union and distinction subsisting
between the Father, the Son, and the Holy
Spirit." Bardasones, of Mesopotamia, in allu-
ding to the influence of the Gospel on its pro-
fessors, says, " In Parthia, polygamy is allowed
and practiced ; but the Christians of that
country practice it not. In Persia, the same
may be said with regard to incest. And in
Bactria and Gaal, where the rites of matri-
mony are defiled with impunity, the Christians
act not thus. In fact wherever they reside,
their practice triumphs over the worst of cus-
toms, and the worst of laws." While the doc-
trines of the cross were progressively spread-
ing, through the labors of devoted mission-
aries ; while the lives and deportment of
the converts illustrated the divine origin and
beneficial eSects of those doctrines ; the great
work of ti'anslating the Holy Scriptures occu-
pied the hearts and hands of many others.
Latin versions of the oracles of truth were
multiplied. That which was styled the Itcdic
version was considered decidedly the best.
The Syriac, Ethiopian, and Egyptian versions
appeared at no great distance of time ; but
their dates cannot now be ascertained with
precision. The blessed truths, however, which
they contained, were so powerfully owned and
blessed of God, that wherever they circulated,
like a fertilizing stream, they transformed the
moral desert into the garden of the Lord. —
Smith, I. p. 26.
Century HI. — In the third century, the
310
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
progress of Christianity in the world was very
considerable, though, with respect to the par-
ticular countries into which it was introduced,
the same degree of uncertainty prevails, as was
noticed in the second. Origen having been
invited from Alexandria by an Arabian prince,
succeeded in converting a tribe of wandering
Arabs to the Christian faith. The fierce and
war-like nation of the Goths, who, inhabiting
the countries of Moesia and Thrace, made per-
petual incursions into the neighboring pro-
vinces, and some likewise of the adjoining
tribes of Sarmatia, received the knowled*ge of
the Gospel by means of several bishops,
who were either sent thither from Asia
or had become their captives. These vener-
able teachers, by the power of their doctrine,
and the sanctity of their lives, became the in-
struments of .converting great numbers, and in
time, of softening and civilizing this rude and
barbarous people. Fabian, Bishop of Rome,
sent Dionysius and six other missionaries into
Gaul ; and during the reiga of the Emperor
Decius (A. D. 250), and in the midst of his
persecutions, the Christian churches, which
had hitherto been chiefly confined to the neigh-
borhood of Lyons and Vienne, were consider-
ably increased. By the labors of many pious
and zealous men, among whom was Saturn inm,
the first bishop of Toulouse, churches were
founded at Paris, Tours, Aries, Narbonne, and
several other places. From these sources, the
knowledge of the Gospel spread, in a short
time, through the whole country.
In the course of this century Christianity
flourished in Germany, particularly in those
parts which border upon France. Maternus,
Clemens, and others, founded, in particular, the
churches Cologne, Treves, and Mcntz. No
positive account has been transmitted respect-
ing the progress of Christianity in the British
Isles during the third century. The historians
of Scotland contended, indeed, that the Gospel
then first visited that country ; and there is
reason to believe that their account may be
true. (See Usher and Stillingfleet Antiq. et
Orig. Ecell. BriU.)
In this century, tlie clemency and mildness
of several of the Roman Emperors, and the
encouragement which some of them gave to
Christianity, tended materially to augment its
influence. The piety and charity of the Chris-
tian disciples continued to excite the notice
and admiration of the heathen, and the zeal-
ous labors of Origen and others in the trans-
lation and dispersion of the New Testament,
and ill the composition of diflerent works in the
defence and illustrati(m of Cliristianity, contri-
buted to increase the number of Christians,
and to extend the boundaries of the church.
(Pearson's Historic View of the Progress of tlic
Gospel, ]). If).) Origen oljscrves, " that so de-
sirous were the Christians of propagating their
religion throu^diout the world, that some of
them had undertaken to travel, not only to
cities, but to towns and villages, to convert the
Heathen."
In the third century, Christianity had be-
come so extensive, that, about the year 24.5,
the emperor Philip, though evidently a world-
ly-minded character, rfnd but little influenced
by the spirit of the Gospel, was induced to
make a profession of the new religion, and
openly to patroni/AMts friends and adherent?.
About the same time, the light of divine truth
was greatly extended both in France and (jer-
many. And (though the power of religion
seemed to decline Iwth aniong the pastors and
])rofessors in Africa and Asia, Avhich, from the
inroads of barbarians, became a scene of raiser-
able confusion,) yet the wisdom and power of
God so over-ruled events, that the invaders, by
carrying away with them several Christian
ministers, forced these persons to become mis-
sionaries, contrary to their own intentions, and
rendered them instrumental in the conversion
of many.
Century TV. — The first Christian missiona-
ries to Ireland were Kierau, Aibe, Declan, and
Il)ar, all from the British Churches in Scot-
land and "Wales, faithful and self-denying
missionaries of the Christian Faith, and
but little sullied from its original lustre. The
period of their arrival is very likely to have
l)eeh the early part of this century, when
British Christians may have sought refuge in
Ireland from the fury of the Diocletian perse-
cution, then raging throughout all the provin-
ces of the Roman empire ; for, as Ireland was
beyond the boundary of the emperor's domin-
ions, it was almost the only place that could
afford an asylum to the Christians, until the
return of peace and security. Clu'istianity
was for a long time confined to the southern
portion of the island ; l)ut even here its pro-
gress was slow. A few families and solitary
hermits constituted the infant Cluu'ch. Kierau
is commonly regarded as the first bishop of
Ossory.
In the fourth century Chrysostom, archbishop
of Constantinople, maintained many presby-
ters and others in Phanicia, partly at his own
charge, and partly l)y the assistance of pious
and well disposed persons, whose only Avork
it was to instruct the inliabitants in the
truths of Christianity. During the same
century, Constantinc, surnamed the great, was
raised to the imperial sceptre ; and, in his per-
.son, Christianity ascended the throne of the
Caesars. Unfortunately, Constantino i)referred
coercive measures for the cstablislnnent of re-
ligion. a!)d deemed the sword a more efficient
instrument in the destruction of idolatry, than
the milder endeavors of missionary instruction.
But the order issued by him for the tninscrib-
ing of fifty copies of tlie Sacred Scriptures,
to'be placed in the «lilferent churclies of the
empire, was a more legitimate missionary
work. It was about the same i)eriod that the
Gospel, having been carried to the Goths, by
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
811
some Christian prisoners, Ulphilas, who had
been appointed their pastor or bishop, under-
took to form an alphabet, and to translate the
Scriptures into the Gothic language. Frag-
ments of this version are still in existence,
from which transcripts have been made and
published by Dr. Barrett, of Dublin, and M.
Maio, of Rome.
Christianity was introduced into Georgia by
Nino, a pious female who was carried captive
into that country, and by her exhortations and
prayers, prevailed upon the Cyarmerian to
embrace the religion she professed ; but some
suppose she voluntarily left Rome to visit Je-
rusalem, and from thence proceeded into the
ancient Iberia, accompanied by Sidonia and
Abrata, and succeeded in establishing the Chris-
tian religion. (Letters from the Caucasus and
Georgia ; translated from the French, p. 107.
Lond., 1823, 8vo.)
(For the introduction of the Gospel into
Abyssinia, in this century, see Abyssinia.)
Many of the monks, at this early period, are
said to have engaged in the missionary work,
and to have been very instrumental in extend-
ing the Christian faith, particularly among the
Persians and Saracens. A monk named Abra-
ham labored with success among the idolatrous
inhabitants in the vicinity of Edessa, until a
church was formed, and pastors from among
themselves placed over them. ('See Smith,
Yol. I. page 32 ; and JowetVs Christian Re-
searches. Vol. I. p. 171.)
In this century, Armenia, into which Chris-
tianity had before been introduced, was com-
pletely Christianized, through the labors of
Gregory " the Enlightener." The Gospel was
also furth(!r propagated, during this century,
in Persia.
During the reign of the emperor Valens, a
large body of the Goths, who had remained at-
tached to their ancient superstitions, were per-
mitted by that prince to pass the Danube and
+o inhabit Dacia, Moesia, and Thrace, on con-
dition of living subject to the Roman laws, and
of embracing Christianity, which condition
was accepted by their king, Fritigcm. And
Ulphilas, bishop of those Goths, who dwelt in
Moesia, translated the four Gospels into the
Gothic language.
Notwithstanding the utmost efforts of the
Christian bishops in the European provinces
of the empire, great numbers of Pagans still
remained. In Gaul, however, the labors of the
venerable Martin of Tours were so successful
in the destruction of idolatry and superstition,
and the propagation of Christianity, that he
justly acquired the title of the Apostle of the
Gauls.
In respect to the rapidity and extent of the
propagation of Christianity in these early ages,
besides the evidence furnished by the brief
narrtitive of Luke, and the incidental allusions
of the Epistles, the Christian Fathers have left
abundant testimony. Clement, who was a co-
temporary with Paul, says of the labors of that
Apostle, " He preached both in the East and
in the West, leaving behind him the glorious
report of his faith ; and so, having taught the
whole world righteousness, and for that end,
traveled even unto the utmost bounds of the
West, he at last suffered martyrdom," &c.
{Clem. Ad. Cor. C. V. YI.)
Justin. Martyr, who wrote about one hundred
and six years after the ascension, has these re-
markable words : " There is not a nation,
either of Greek or barbarian, or of any other
name, even those who wander in tribes, and
live in tents, amongst whom prayers and thanks-
givings are not offered to the Father and Cre-
ator of the universe, by the name of the cruci-
fied Jesus."
Irenceus, who died a. d. 202, speaks of the
Christians of his time living in the Court of
Rome : " But how is it those who are in the
regal halls are faithful ? Does not each one
of those who have charge of Caesar's utensils,
and those who have not, stand forth preeminent
according to his merit?"
Tcrtullian, who comes about fifty years after
Justin Martyr, refers very frequently to the
success of the first missionaries of the cross.
He says, " We, so great a multitude of men,
almost a majority of every state, pass our lives
in serenity and quietude." ( Tcrtullian to Sca-
pidxis.) " If we desired to deal with open ene-
mies and not with hidden foes, we should not
lack the power of numbers, and the influence of
ample resources. Doubtless the Moors, and the
Germanic race, and the Parthians themselves,
or any nations, however great, are more nu-
merous, yet dwelling in one locality, and cir-
cumscribed by their own limits, rather than
diffused through the whole world. But we,
though of yesterday, have filled every sphere of
life : cities, castles, islands, towns, the exchange,
the very camps, the plebeian populace, the seats
of judges, the imperial palace, the senate and
the forum. They (the heathen adversaries of
Christianity) lament that every sex, age, and
condition, and persons of every rank also, are
converts to that name." " We have been able,
though unarmed and not seditious, but only
differing in opinion, to contend against you
by the odium of separation only ; for if we,
such a vast company of men, should withdraw
from you and retii-e to some remote corner of
the world, assuredly the loss of so many citi-
zens irrespective of their character, would over-
spread your dominion, and at last would bring
upon you the retribution of desertation itself..
Without doubt you would be greatly terrified
at your solitude, the stillness of things, and a
species of stupor as of a dead city. You
would search for subjects in those p'laces in
which you might have held the sceptre." ( Tcr-
ttdlian's Apology, Chap. 37.)
Chrysoshm, who wrote towards the close of
the fourth century, attests, that at that time,
the Christian faith had become almost univer-
512
EARLY CHEISTIAN MISSIONS.
sally diffused ; he says : " But cousider and
think within yourself, in how short a time
the whole world became filled with so many
churches, and such pojoulous nations converted
to the faith ; people persuaded to abrogate
their country's laws, rooting out their old habits
and customs, and everywhere overturning the
heathen altars in the regions of the Romans,
Persians, Scythians, Maurians, and the Hin-
doos, to the world's end."'
And to these may be added the testi-mony
of ancient Pagan writers. Tacitus, in giving
an account of the fire which happened at Rome
about thirty years after the ascension, asserts
that Nero, in order to suppress the rumors of
having been himself the author of the mischief,
had the Christians accused of the crime. Speak-
ing of this event, he writes : " They only were
apprehended who confessed themselves of that
sect ; afterwards a vast multitude were discov-
ered by them." This was about six years after
Paul wrote his Epistle to the Romans, and
something more than two after his arrival in
Rome himself. Pliny the younger, the gover-
nor of Pontus and Bithynia, on applying to
the emperor Trajan for directions as to the
treatment of Christians, says : " Suspending
all judicial proceedings, I have recourse to you
for advice ; for it has appeared to me a matter
highly deserving, especially on account of the
great numbers of persons who are in danger of
suffering: for many of all ages, and of every
rank, of both sexes, likewise, are accused and will
be accused. Nor has the contagion of this super-
stition seized cities only, but the lesser towns
also, and the open country. Nevertheless it
seemed to me that it might be restrained and
corrected. It is certain that the temples, which
were almost forsaken, begin to be more frequent-
ed ; and the sacred solemnities, after a long in-
termission, are revived. Victims, likewise, are
everywhere bought up ; whereas, ibr some time
there were few to purchase them. "Whence it
is easy to imagine that munbers of men might
be reclaimed, if pardon were granted to those
that shall repent." "We need not pursue these
testimonies farther. Nothing can be more
satisfactory as evidence of the progress which
Christianity achieved in the hands of its first
missionaries.
Century V. — At the beginning of the fifth
century the Roman empire was divided into
two distinct sovereignties, under the dominion
of Arcadius in the East, and of Honor ius in the
"West. The confusions and calamities which
about this period attended the incursions of
the Goths, the temporary possession of Italy
by Odoacer, and the subsequent establishment
of the Ostrogoths, were prejudicial to the pro-
gi-css (jf Christianity. The zeal of the Chris-
tian emperors, more especially of those who
reigned in the ciust, was, notwithstanding, suc-
cessfully exerted in extirpating the remains of
the Centile superstition?, and the Church con-
tinuP(l daily to gain ground on the idolatrous
nations in the empire. In the East, the inha-
bitants of Mount Libanus and Antilibanus
were induced by the persuasions of Simeon the
Styliie, to embrace the Christian religion. By
his influence also, it was introduced into a cer-
tain district of Arabia. In the "V\^est, the Ger-
man nations, who had destroyed that division
of the empire, gradually embraced the religion
of the conquered people. Some of them had
been converted to the Christian faith before
their incursions upon the empire ; and such,
among others, was the case of the Goths. It is
uncertain, however, at whattime and by whose
labors the Vandals, Sitcvcs, and Alans were
evangelized. The i?«)-gttiu?ian.s, who inhabited
the banks of the Rhine, and passed from
thence into Gaul, received the Gospel, hojoing
to be preserved by its Divine Author from the
ravages of the Huns. But in general these
fierce and barbarous nations w ere induced to
embrace Christianity, by the desire of living
in greater security amidst a people who, for
the most part professed it, and from a persua-
sion that the doctrines of the majority must
be best. This conformity, of course, must
have be-cn chiefly outward and formal. — [Pear-
son's brief Historic View of tlie Progress of the
Gospel, p. 19.)
Pope Celestine the First sent Palladius to
Ireland, where he arrived a. D. 431. The mis-
sion was unattended with success, which gave
rise to a proverb among the Irish, that " Not
to Palladius but to Patrick did the Lord
grant the conversion of Ireland." St. Patrick,
whose original name was Succath,v>'as next ap-
pointed. The place of his birth was Bonna-
ven, which lay between the Scottish towns
Dumbarton and Glasgow, and was then reck-
oned to the province of Britain. This vil-
lage, in memory of Patricus, received the
name of Kil-Patrick, or Kirk-Patrick. His
father, a deacon in the village church, gave
him a careful education ; he was instructed
indeed in the doctrines of Christianity, but
he did not come to know what he possessed in
this knowledge until the experience of great
trials brought him to the consciousness of it.
At the age of sixteen he was carried off", with
many others of his countrymen, by Scottish
pirates, to the northern part of the island Hi-
bernia (Ireland). — {Ncander's History of the
C/iristian Religion, Vol. II. p. 122.) lie was
sold to a chieftain of the people, wdio made
him the overseer of his flocks. Here he re-
mained six years, during which time he receiv-
ed the renewing grace of God. At length ho
recovered his liberty, but was again recaptured.
But in a short time, however, he was allowed
to return home, and not long after he gave
himself up to the work of the ministry. After
his ordination in Gaul he was sent in comi)any
with several others, as a missionary to Ireland.
The party lauded at tlic place now occupied
by the town of Wicklow, either in the year
432 or 441. Aftgr preaching in different
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
313
parts of the country, St. Patrick visited Tara,
or Temora, the royal residence of tlie mon-
archs ; and here, notwithstanding the oppo-
sition of the pagan priests, his preaching was
most successful. He gained over to the Gos-
pel several zealous converts. In an epistle ad-
dressed to Caradoc, or Coroticus, prince of
certain districts in Wales, after stating that
he had been seized by a predatory band, and
carried captive to Ireland, he notices the suc-
cess which had attended his endeavors to bring
over the natives "to the obedience of the
faith." He thus offers his reason for subse-
quently becoming a missionary : " Dwelling
among barbarians, a Christian and an ex-
ile, urged by my love aud zeal for God and
the truth of Christ, I wished, although rudely
and in an unpolished manner, to declare those
• things from my mouth ; for the love of my
neighbors and my children in the Lord aroused
me, aud compelled me to give up my country,
my parents, aud even my life also, if I should
be thought worthy to teach the truth to the
nations." — (See Sir William Betham's Irish An-
tiquarian Researches, Vol. II. p. 433.) In the
course of St. Patrick's missionary jouruey-
ings he visited also the south of Ireland.
JEngus, the king of Cashel, received him
courteously, listened to his preaching, and be-
came a convert ; but the earlier Christians of
the country, especially the bishops Ailbe, De-
clan, Kearan, aud Ibar, did not give him so
glad a welcome ; they either had not been ac-
quainted with the extent of his labors among
their pagan countrymen, or they had some
fears lest the object of his visit might be to
claim supremacy over them. It is expressly
stated that Ibar would on no account submit
to him, because he did not wish a foreigner to
be the patron of Ireland. At length, however,
their differences were made up, and they were
persuaded to cooperate with each other in a
more cordial spirit. St. Patrick, after this,
returned to the north, where we next find_ him
engaged in the foundation of the See of Ar-
magh, the date of which event is assigned to
the year 455. From this time he appears to
have ceased in a measure from more arduous
labors, and to have employed himself in hold-
ing synods for the settlement of the church.
Several of the canons enacted in these coun-
cils are still in existence, and they serve to elu-
cidate many of the doctrines aud customs of
the early Irish church. Whatever time St.
Patrick could spare from these important avo-
cations, was passed in retirement at Said,
where, in prayer aud meditation he ended his
days. He lived to an advanced age, and was
buried near the site of the present cathedral of
I)ov7n.-{Todd's Ancient Church in Ireland,\^.l-i:.)
The efforts to evangelize the world, va-re
not, however, restricted to individual attempts.
In the fifth and several succeeding centuries,
the Nedonans became the most missionary body
at that time existing, as well as the most
numerous. (For an account of the origm and
missions of this body, see Nestorians and
China.)
Most writers agree that the Christian reli-
gion was early planted in Arabia, from the
great number of Jews dispersed among
these tribes, who claim their descent from
x\.braham aud Ishmael. Some have main-
tained that several tril^es among the Arabians
had received the Christian religion long be-
fore the time of Mohammed. An able writer
mentions one Phy/archus, and a whole tribe
of Arabians, who in the fifth century made
profession of the Christian religion. " Even
the Arabians themselves own that the Chris-
tians were very numerous in Arabia, long be-
fore the time of Mohammed, as appears from
numerous passages in the Koran, where both
Christians and Jews are mentioned, as well as
in their own common histories, cited by Pocock
and other Orientalists. The principal tribes
that embraced Christianity were Hamger, and,
according to others, the whole kingdom of the
Homer lies, Ghassan, Rahia, Taghlah, Bahra,
Tonuch, part of the tribes of Tay and Kodaa,
the inhabitants of Najaram and the Arabs of
Hira." {See31r. Sale's Prelim. Discourses, 1^.29.)
It does not appear, however, that the Holy
Scriptures had been translated into their
tongue, which will account for the subsequent
extinction of their churches. All nations tliat
have had the Scriptures in their o^yn lan-
guage have stood, either in whole or in part,
against the seductions of Mohammedanism ;
such are the Greeks, Syrians, Armenians, Abys-
sinians, Coptics, and some others. {See Yeales's
Indian Church, p. 41.)
In the same century, the conversion of the
southern or lowland Picts is said to have been
effected through the instrumentality of a British
bishop named Ninias; and though they were
soon after reduced by the northern Picts, their
heathen conquerors permitted them to retain
the profession of Christianity. The baptism
of Clovis, king of the Pranks, took place about
the year 49G ; and it has been justly remark-
ed, that, " nothwithstanding he was an ungodly
man, he became an instrument in the hand of
Providence to promote a cause of which he
knew not the value." Through the influence
of his queen Clotilda, who was a zealous Chris-
tian, he was induced to profess the faith of the
Gospel, and was baptized at Rheims, together
with his sister, and three thousand of his
troops. {See Smith's Origin of Missionary So-
cieties, Yo\. I. ^.23.)
In Britain, Christianity was almost extin-
guished by the predatory incursions of the
Scots and Picts, and, afterwards, by the per-
secutions of the Saxons.
Cexturv VI. — This century was distinguish-
ed by some further advances of Christianity,
both in the East and^West. The bishops of
Constantinople, under 'the influence and pro-
tection of the Grecian emperors, succeeded iu
314:
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
convertiug some barbarous nations, inhabiting
the coast of the Euxine Sea, among whom
were the Abasgi, whose country lay between
the shores of that sea and Mount Caucasus ;
the Heruli, who dwelt beyond the Danube ;
the Alani, Lani, and Zani, together with other
uncivilized nations, whose precise situation
cannot now be accurately ascertained, were
converted about the same time, during the
reign of Justinian. In the West, Remigius,
bishop of Rheims, was remarkably successful
in Gaul, where the example of Clovis continued
to be followed by great numbers of his sub-
jects.
Britain was abandoned by the Romans in
the fifth century, and then became subject to
the Saxom, who forthwith established their
pagan religion. The Roman language, cus-
toms, and manners, with all the Christianity
that existed, were at once swept away from
the largest and finest portions of the island, by
the Saxou invasion. The Britons were divi-
ded into a great number of petty kingdoms,
and their princes animated with as much
hostility against each other as against the in-
vaders. But they were generally too high-
minded to brook that foreed and ignominious
incorporation to which the Gauls, and Span-
iards, and Italians had submitted, and gradu-
ally retiring to the western peninsula, to the
l^id of lakes, and to the highlands of Scot-
laud, their language ceased to be spoken in
that great division of the island, which now
obtained the name of England, from its An-
glican conquerors.
It is, however, to Wales and Cornwall that
we are to look for the progress of Christianity
in Britain during this period. Fuller says :
" The entire body of the British Church at
this time was in Wales, where Bangor on the
north, and Caerleon (on the Usk, in Mon-
mouthshire,) on the south, were the two eyes
thereof for Icai'iiing and religion. The latter
had in it the court of King Arthur, the see of
an archbishop, a college of 200 philosophers,
who therein studied astronomy ; and was a
populous place of great extent." There is
reason to believe that Bangor, near Chester,
was of equal eminence with Caerleon for men
of learning and piety. It is said that the
monastery at this place contained 2,100 monks,
divided into seven courses, of 300 each.
The Anglo-Saxon people sprang from three
piratical tribes of Gothic origin. Two of
tha-e were seated in what is now called Jut/-
land, and in three adjacent islands. The emi-
gration of the Jutes does not seem to have
been extensive, its British settlements being
confined to Kent, the Isle of Wight, and the
southern part of Hampshire. Tlu' Angles,
whose liome lay in Sleswick and Holstein, as
now called, emigrated entirely, and spreading
over the north-eastern, midland, imd northern
counties of south Britain, eventually gave name
to the whole country. The Saxons, nearest
neighbors of these, found new abodes in Essex,
Middlesex, and those counties west of Kent
which lie between the Thames and the Chan-
nel.- The earlier years of their settlement in
Britain were little favorable to their reception
of the Christian religion. The people, indeed,
whose fair possessions had lured them from
their Scandinavian abodes, had risen into im-
portance and wealth under an abandonment of
paganism. The Britons, aroused into a long
course of sanguinary conflict with their treach-
erous invaders, were little likely to think of
their conversion. It is therefore proljable that
the native clergy made no attempt to humanize
these ferocious pagans, by communicating to
them a knowledge of the Gospel. The pagan
warriors, moreover, were likely to derive new
prejudices against Christianity, from the suc-
cess which usually waited upon their own
arms. Britain's trust in the cross had not
secured her fortunes from constant declension.
Reliance upon Woden had been encouraged
unceasingly by victory. A people unacquainted
with true religion would naturally infer that its
own deities were more powerful than those of
its opponents. A considerable change must
be wrought in the whole frame of a society
like this before it could be gained over to calm
reflection upon the religion of a people pros-
trate under its assaults. Providence, however,
effected such a change. Elngland's principal
monarch then was Ethclbert, King of Kent.
He appears to have ascended his father's
throne about the year 5G0 ; and, probably, ten
years afterwards he married Bertha, daughter
of Cherebert, King of Paris. This princess
coming of a Christian family, was not allowed
to pass over into Kent until ample stipulations
had been made for the free profession of her
religion. She came accordingly, attended by
Luidhard, a Frank bishop, and for her accom-
modation a British church was erected, in
hon«r of St. Martin, on the eastern side of
Canterbury. A Christian congregation was
formed in the principal seat of Anglo-Saxon
power. As its leading member was the most
illustrious female in the island, we may reason-
ably suppose that it did not long fail of mak-
ing converts. Hence it became umlerstood at
Rome, that among Englishmen an anxious
desire prevailed for admission to the church.
Grcgorij the Great, as he is termed. Bishop of
Rome, intimated to Bertha by letter that she
ought early to have inclined her husband fa-
vorably towards her own religion. The vener-
able Bede gives the following account of the
manner in which Gregory's attention was first
directed to Britain as a missionary field, wliich,
Dr. Clarke saj-s, is taken from the Saxon
Homily of JElfric. written more than nine hun-
dred years ago : " While yet a private clergy-
man, Gregory, passing through a slave market
in his native city, found his eyes foreildy ar-
rested by some light-haired, fair-complexioned
youths, who stood exposed for sale. ' Whence
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
315
come these lads ? ' he asked. ' From Britain,'
was the answer. ' Are the people Christians
there ? ' he then inquired. ' No, pagans,' he was
told. ' Alas ! ' he said, ' how grievous it is that
faces fair as these should own subjection to the
swarthy devil ! ' His next question was, ' What
do you call the tribe from which these young
people spring ? ' * Angles,' said the dealer
• Ah ! that is well,' Gregory rejoined ; ' Angels
they are in countenance, and choirs of angels
they ought to be. Where in Britain do their
kindred live ? ' 'In Deiira,' was the reply.
' Well again,' Gregory said ; ' it is our duty
to deliver them from Gods ire. Pray, who is
king of the land so significantly named ? '
' Ella,' replied the slave-merchant. ' Ah ! '
the pious inquirer added, ' Hallelujah must be
sung in that man's country.' " Gregory resolved
upon undertaking a mission into Anglia. Nor
did the Pope discourage his intention, but the
Eoman people would not alloAv him to enter
upon a labor so remote and perilous. How-
ever, after Gregory's elevation to the See of
Rome, A. D. 592, he selected Austin, or Augus-
tine, Prior of the Monastery of St. Martin, in
Rome, to lead a devoted band upon the mis-
sion. Austin, having engaged several monks
as partners in his toil, left Ronp, but halting
among the monastic recluses of Lerins, these
devotees, to whom the difficulties of his under-
taking were necessarily better known than
they could have been at Rome, utterly dis-
couraged him from the attempt. He applied
for Gregory's leave to withdraw from the en-
terprize. But the pontiif would hear nothing
of despondence ; he rebuked the missionary's
pusillanimity, refused to cancel his obligation,
and commanded him to lose no time in reach-
ing Britain. Austin now rallied his spirits,
proceeded northwards, and providing himself
with interpreters in Gaul, set sail for the
chalky clifl's of Kent. He lauded in the island
of Thanet, and thence dispatched a messenger
to Ethelbert, informing him of his arrival, and
declaring that he had come thus far in hope of
shoAving him the way to heaven. By the
Kentish prince, however well the message
might have pleased him, it was cautiously re-
ceived. He gave no permission to his Roman
guests for a further advance into the country,
until he had gone himself and made observa-
tions. Austin and his companions met him in
procession, one of them bearing a silver cross,
another a picture of the Saviour, Avhile the re-
mainder chanted litanies. The prior dis-
claimed any other object than to guide the
king and all his people to everlasting joys
above. ' Fair words and promises,' Ethelbert
replied, ' but still, new and uncertain. I can-
not relinquish for them what my countrymen
have long and universally professed. Your
distant pilgrimage, however, and charitable
purpose of oflering us a boon so highly valued
by yourselves, justly claim our hospitality. I
shall, therefore, provide you with a residence
and means of living. Nor do I restrain you
from endeavors to spread your opinions among
my people.' The residence provided was at
Cauterbiu"y, and the missionaries entered that
city to take possession of it, with Imposing
solemnities.
Austin's views were now directed to the
consolidation and extension of his authority ;
and he repaired to the confines of Wales, and
sought an interview with the native prelacy
of Britain. The place rendered memorable
by this meeting seems to have been under the
shade of some noble tree, afterwards known
as Augustine's Oak, situated, probably within
the modern county of Worcester. The prelates
and monks in Wales, wishing to retain their
independence of the See of Rome, and the inte-
grity of their own doctrines, naturally resisted
the claims of Augustine. Violent altercations
ensued ; the Kentish prince was engaged in
the quarrel ; and the unfortunate Cambrians,
whose only crime consisted in their conscien-
tious resistance to a foreign yoke, were doomed
to suflTer the invasion of their territories, and
in some instances, the loss of their lives. And
there is reason to believe, that the supremacy
of the Pope had as much to do with the origin
of this mission as the love of souls. But from
whatever motive it was undertaken, it was the
point of the papal wedge which, first insinuated
into the ecclesiastical hierarchy of England,
by Gregory I., was speedily driven deeper ;
until, by the authority of Innocent III. it
completely destroyed the independence of the
British Church, and laid her prostrate at the
feet of the Pope. It was, therefore, the policy
of Augustine to undermine the simplicity of
religious worship among the Britons, and to
operate upon the imagination and superstition
of tho Saxons, by means of sensual doctrines,
and a gaudy ritual, which he had imported
from Italy. Image worship, purgatorial inflic-
tions, the efiBcacy of good works, and the virtue
of old bones, designated relics, were all ready
and at hand. "The wily monk," says a
modern writer, "assumed such austerity of
manner, and sanctity of deportment, that he
effectually secured the veneration of the delu-
ded multitude ; and by his pretended miracles,
which any juggler of the present day could
surpass, very easily imposed on their credulity."
Gregory was transported with joy, on hearing
the continued prosperity of the mission; and in a
letter to Ethelbert, exhorted him " to assist Au-
gustine in the good work by all the expedients of
ea:/;orto«/o?i, TERROR, and CORRECTION!" The
whole of this aflfair is highly monitory. Eng-
land had once more become the land of pa-
ganism ; but by the labors of foreign njjssion-
aries, Christianity was again established. The
process was precisely the reverse of that by
M'hich the Roman empire had been brought
under the influence of the Christian faith.
There it had begun with the poor, and had
made its way up, unassisted by any human
316
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
power, or any worldly or interested motives
But here tlie missionaries came with the im-
posing rauli of ambassadors on a religious
errand ; they addressed themselves to the kings
of those petty states into which England was
divided ; and having succeeded with them, the
nominal conversion of their suljjects i'ollowcd
as a matter of obedience. The kings had an
obvious political motive for professing a reli-
gion, which enabled them to connect them-
selves by intermarriages with the princes of
the Continent ; prepared a refuge for them in
case of expulsion from their own dominions ;
and placed them in communication with the
more civilized parts of the world. — Fuller's
Church History of Britain ; Smitlt's Religion
of Ancient Britain, p. 277 ; Dr. Southeij and
Kingsmill.
To Augustine's mission, as well as many
other missionary efibrts of that period, the
judicious remarks of Dr. Moshcim will apply.
" The conversions and sacred exploits of this
age will lose much of their importance in the
esteem of such as examine with attention the
accounts M-hich have been given of them hj
writers of this and the succeeding ages ; for
by these accounts, it appears that the converted
nations retained a great part of their former
impiety, superstition, and licentiousness ; and
that, attached to Christ by a mere outward
and nominal profession, they, in effect, re-
nounced the ])urity of his doctrine, and the
authority of his Gospel, by their flagitious
lives, and the superstitious and idolatrous rites
and institutions which they continued to ob-
serve. If credit is to be given to the writers
of this century, the conversion of these uncivil-
ized nations to Christianity was principally
effected by the prodigies and miracle? which
the heralds of the Gospel were enabled to work
in its behalf. Lut, in abandoning their ancient
superstition, the greatest part of these people
were more influenced by the example and au-
thority of their princes, than by force of argu-
ment, or the power of a ratioiud conviction.
The missionaries required nothing of these
barbarous people that was difficult to be per-
formed, or that laid any remarkable restraint
upon their appetites and passions. The prin-
cipal injunctions they im])Osed upon these rude
proselytes were, that they should commit to
memory certain summaries of doctrine, and
pay to the image of Christ and the saints, the
same religious service which they had formerly
offered to the statues of the gods. Nor were
they at all delicate or scrupulous in choosing
the means of establishing their credit; for
they deemed it lawl'ul, and even meritorious,
to deceive an ignorant and inattentive; multi-
tude, by representing as prodigies, things that
were merely natural events, as we learn from
the most authentic records of these times."
It was in thi.s century that Cvlumbn, or Co-
lombamis, pa.'s-^ed over fnto the western parts of
Scotlaiul, and promulgated the Gospel among
northern Picts. The Scots of Argyle, among
whom he resided, embraced Christianity in
Ireland, when the hostilities of their neighbors
con)pellcd them to seek a temporary refuge in
that country. The little island named I-colm-
kill, after this missionary, was the seat of a
mission seminary, which he conducted for a
period of more than thirty years, besides retain-
ing the charge of several other institutions,
which he had founded in Ireland. Columba
had the happiness of l)aptizing the British
sovereign ; and the neighboring Scots and Bri-
tons held his character and person in such high
estimation, that it was no uncommon thing for
them to refer to him as the final umpire in the
adjustment of their differences. Of royal ex-
traction; superior talents and accomplishments ;
fervent in spirit ; indefatigable in his exer-
tions ; unbounded in his beneficence ; unmoved
by injuries, and undaunted by danger ; he
literally " overcame evil with good," and was
made the honored instrument of subduing
the prejudices, and winning the affections of
the most violent enemies of the Gospel. He
expired in the act of transcribing the Holy
Scriptures.
Tiie monastery of lona, in the Hebrides,
founded by Cotemba, might justly be called a
missionary college, as the great object of the
institution was to prepare the residents for mis-
sionary cnterprize, by previous discipline, and
transcription of the Scriptures. From thence
went forth several of those blessed men, by
whom many parts of Germany, and the Low
Countries, were first brought to the knowledge
of the truth. Three ancient manuscripts, in
the Irish character, probably written in this
monastery or college, are still preserved. (See
Sir AV^illiain Betham's Irish Antiquities.)
Such was the missionary zeal of the monks
of lona, that they arc said to have frequently
undertaken expeditions, the object of which
was to discover any land M'hieh the GosjjcI had
not yet reached, that they might i)reaeh to its
inhabitants the glad tidings of salvation. The
Norwegians found Iri.sh monks in Iceland,
when they first discovered it, about the vear
900. The followers of Columba obtained the
name of Culdces, from certain terms implying,
" The family or servants of God," and are dis-
tinguished by it, from those societies, or mo-
nastic institutions, founded by Papal authority.
" From this nest of Cohmiba," says one of his
biographers, speaking of lona, " these sacred
doves took their flight to all quarters. "Wherc-
ever tliey M'ent they disseminated learning and
true religion, and seem to have done more tow-
ards the revival of both, than any other society
at that time in Europe. In fact, lona. or I-colm-
kill, was, in the early ages, a seminary of all
kinds of learning, and a nursery of divines for
planting churches." (Sec Smith's Life of Co-
hunba.) His disciples were remarkable for the
exemplary holiness of their lives, and through
the medium of their missionarv lal)ors, the
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
317
northern Pids, the Anglo-Saxons of Mercia and
Northumberland, and several of the northern
nations of Europe, were converted, at least
to the name and profession of Christianity.
(See Life of Colomba, published by the Mass.
Sab. School Society.)
To the sixth century have also been referred
the conversion of the Abasgi, a people of Scythia,
and the Hevuli, who resided on the banks of
the Danube ; together with that of Zathus, a
prince of the Colchians ; and Almundurus, a
prince of the Saracens. About the same period
the Paidicans arose in the East, and were so
denominated from their making Paul's Epis-
tles the chief rule of their lives. They were
proverbial for their endeavors to spread the
Gospel, in opposition to the errors of the Greek
and Romish churches ; and such was the rapid
multiplication of this people, and so numerous
were they become in the reign of tlie Greek
Empress Theodora, in the ninth century, that
100,000 lost their lives during the persecution
of that Empress, by fire, sword, the gibbet,
Impalement, and other cruelties.
Century VII. — Cheerless, indeed, was the
commencement of the seventh century, and
gloomy the scene on which the first Gregory
closed his eyes, the barbarous hosts still press-
ing the Roman empire on the north, and the
Arabian impostor breaking forth from his sul-
try sands, as the avenger of the Lord, scatter-
ing the flock from field to field, and obliterat-
ing the once flourishing churches in the East,
and aloug the African coast. But it does not
appear that any of those nations who possessed
the written word of God relapsed into the Mo-
hammedan imposture. According to Yeates,
there were no early translations of the Bible
into Arabic.
During this century the spirit of missionary
enterprize arose chiefly from the North. From
the monasteries of Great Britain and Ireland,
men went forth glowing with the desire of
bringing the Gothic tribes within the fold of
Christ. Along tlie banks of the Rhine, in the
Black Forest, in Bavaria, and Thuringia, the
church extended itself by the labors of men
thus devoted, among whom shine the names
of Fridolin, Gall, Rupert, Eustasius, Willi-
brod, and above all, Boniface, as apostles of
the German nations.
Century VIII. — At the commencement of
the eighth century, wlien a considerable part of
Germany was buried in the darkness of pagan
superstition, Winfrcd, a Benedictine monk,
born in England of illustrious parents, and
afterwards known by the name of Bomface, at-
tended by two companions, went over into
Friesland, to water the churches which Willi-
brod had planted. He afterwards removed to
Bavaria and Thuringia; and throughout the
greater part of //esse, even to t!ie frontiers of
Saxony, he published the wurd ; and in the
year 719 Gregory the second made him bishop
of the new German churches. In his mission
from England, he obtained several assistants,
who dispersed themselves in the villages ; and
in a circular letter which he addressed to the
British prelates and people, he earnestly soli-
cited their prayers for his success. He con-
tinued his missionary labors with unabated
ardor till the age of seventy-five ; when going
to confirm some converts in the plain of Dock-
um, he was attacked and killed, with the whole
of his company, amounting to fifty-two persons,
by a troop of ferocious Pagans armed with
shields and lances. The German Christians
who had considered Boniface as the apostle of
their country, immediately raised an army, and
conquered the Pagans, whose lives were spared
only on condition of their submitting to be
instructed in the truths of Christianity.
Sicfuvyn, another Englishman, was particu-
larly distinguished among those who labored
as missionaries in Germany. On one occasion
he ventured to appear before an assembly of
Saxons, while they were sacrificing to their
idols, and with a loud voice exhorted them to
turn from such vanities and to serve the living
God. Tliis interference exasperated the idol-
aters to such a degree that the zealous mission-
ary would probably have been immolated on
the spot, had it not been for the remonstrances
of a Saxon chief, named Bute, who contended
that an ambassador of Heaven ought not to
be treated with less respect than if he had
come from the king of some neighboring na-
tion. Siefuvyn was, therefore, permitted ta
retire without molestation, and he continued a
useful and active laborer in Germany until hi?
death.
Villehad, a native of Northumberland, is also
said to have been very successful among the
Saxons, wliose ferocious spirits were softened
by his meekness, whose minds were illuminated
by his instructions, and some of whom, itia
hoped, were eternally saved through his in-
strumentality. He became bishop of Bremen,
and died in Friesland, after jie had preached
the Gospel thirty-five yeare with unwearied
perseverance and unabated zeal.
During this century a war broke out be-
tween Charlemagne and the Saxons, which
contributed materially to the extension of the
nominal Church. After a long and obstinate
struggle the Saxons were subdued ; and when
gentle means proved unavailing to induce
them to embrace the Gospel, coercive methods
were adopted, and they were then baptized by
thousands. What sort of converts these were,
may easily be conceived. However, as schools
and monasteries were founded, and ministers
were appointed to reside among them, some
general knowledge of Divine truth must havo
been progressively diffused, though wretchedly
intermingled with the superstitions of the age.
During the seventh and eighth centuries
the zeal of British, Scotch, and Irish Chris-
tians, induced many devoted individuals to
undertake extensive and laborious missions in
318
EARLY CHRISTIAN MSSIONS.
Germany, Belgium, France, and tlie unevan-
gelized parts of England, Scotland, and Ire-
land. These benevolent toils were not unfre-
qucutly shared by princes and nobles, when
converted from paganism to Christianity. As
instances of this, it is recorded that when Aiclan,
a monk of Ireland, and a zealous and success-
ful missionary in the north of Euglaed, under-
took his missionary tours, Oswald, a British
prince, who had been baptized and educated
in Ireland, acted as his interpreter. About
this period, Corbinian, a French Benedictine
monk, labored assiduously among the Bava-
rians. Firmin, a Gaul by birth, preached in
Alsace, Bavaria, and Switzerland.
Century IX. — Rumold, a native of England
or Ireland, had long been an example of piety
at home, when, animated by a desire for the
conversion of the heathen nations, he visited
Rome, and earnestly solicited an appointment
as a missionary. His request was granted,
and he not only received the Papal benedic-
tion, but was also " ordained a reigionary, or
missionary bishop, without any fixed see."
Aitaschanus, or Amutgar, preached the Gospel
to the Danes and Swedes, and other northern
nations, and so extraordinary were his labors
and success, as to cause him to be termed
" The Apostle of the North."
The missionai-ies who accompanied him, or
whom he sent out, were directed by him to the
apostle Paul, as an example of missionary zeal.
To these and other Christian worthies who
lived at this period, we may justly add the
name of Adalard or Alard, the cousin-german
of Charlemagne. He apjjcars to have been
truly pious from early years ; and though
obliged to fill several important offices by the
emperor "s order at court, he retained his love
of privacy and retirement. He founded seve-
ral monasteries, in which he promoted learning
and science. His favorite institution, how-
ever, was a missionary college, as it might be
justly called, founded by him at New Corbie,
or Cosway, nine leagues from Paderborn, upon
the Weser. expressly instituted to be a nursery
of evangelical laborers in the instruction and
conversion of the nortliern nations. Anascha-
rius, mentioned above, was one of its greatest
ornaments. This period has been emphati-
cally called " The Age of Missions."
The ninth century was likewise rendered re
markable by the attempts of Constautinc, (or
Cyril.) and Methodius, two Greek monks, to
evangelize several Sclavonian tribes. They
were the sons of Leo, a Greek nobleman, of
Thessalonica. Cyril, the younger brother, was
the most distinguished for his literary ac-
quiremenls and knowledge of the Holy Scrip-
tures. In his youth he had enjoyed the best
education us a companion t(t the young Prince
Michael ; but on the projxjsal to him of what
was deemed a highly im])ortant miitrimonial
alliance, but which he disapproved, he with-
drew from court, and retired for some time
into a monastery. In 857 he visited Constan-
tinople, and shortly afterwards proceeded on a
mission to the country of the Khazars ; and
proved successful in prevailing with the
prince, some of his nobles, and many of his
people, to embrace the profession of Christi-
anity. He then visited the Bulgarians, with
the same design, and succeeded in baptizing
many of them. Methodius, the other brother,
filled the office of governor on the Sclavonian
frontiers for ten years, affording a most favor-
able opportunity of acquiring a knowledge of
the Sclavonian language. He afterwards ac-
companied his brother in his mission to the
Khazai'S, and other nations. An application
being made to the Greek emperor, by certain
Moravo-Sclavonian princes, for teachers to
instruct their people in the truths of the Holy
Scriptures, the two brothers were at once
named as the fittest persons for the undertak-
ing. Being appointed to the charge, they en-
gaged in the translation of the Scriptures, on
which they are said to have employed four
years and a half, at the same time instructing
the inhabitants of Moravia. Afterwards they
visited Rome, where Cyril Isecame a monk,
and died there, in the year 871. To effect the
object of translation, Cyril, with the assistance,
as some think, of his brother, Methodius, in-
vented an alphabet, adapted to the language
of the Sclavonic tribes, to whom tbey were
sent. Whether they translated the whole of
the Old and New Testaments, or the New
Testament pi'incipally, is uncertain. Such,
however, has been the attachment to this an-
cient Sclavonic version, that no other is per-
mitted to be read in the churches ; and there
existed no version in the modern Russ prior to
the year 1816, when the Emperor Alexander
ordered a translation to be made, that his own
subjects might be favored, like other nations,
with the Scriptures, in their vernacular tongue,
the Sclavonian language having been for cen-
turies obsolete, and nearly as difficult to a
modern Russ as the Anglo-Saxon to an En-
glishman.— (See Report of British and Foreign
Bible Society.) This order of the eni})eror
having been partially carried into execution,
the whole of the New 'I'estament was printed
in 1823. Since that time the printing of the
Scriptures in modern Russ has been sus-
pended principally by the intrigues of the Jesu-
its and the opposition of the JDmpcror Nicho-
las.— (Henderson's Biblical Researches, p. 132.)
About the year 867, under the reign of the
Emperor Basdius, the Macedonian, the Scla-
vonians, Arentani, and others, inhabitants of
Dalmatia, sent an embassy to Constantinople,
declaring their resolution of submitting to the
(Jrecian empire, and of embracing the Chris-
tian religion, and requesting to be supplied
with suitable teachers. Their request was
granted, and those provinces were included
within the pale of the. church. The fierce and
barbarous nation of the Russians, inhabitants
EAELY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
319
of the Ukraine, embraced the Gospel under
the reign of the same emperor. But what has
already been said as to the nature of such
conversions, must be borne in mind. In the
case of individuals, the profession of Chris-
tianity may have been sincere ; but as to the
great body of the people, it was probably
merely formal. In the course of this century,
Christianity began to be preached in the fro-
zen regions of Scandinavia, and on the shores
of the Baltic, which had hitherto been involv-
ed in the grossest pagan darkness. In the
year 826, Harold, king of Jutland, being ex-
pelled from his dominions, implored the pro-
tection of the Emperor Louis, the son and
successor of Charlemagne. That prince pro-
mised him his assistance on condition that he
would embrace Christianity, and permit the
ministers of that religion to preach in his do-
minions, to which he consented. He Avas ac-
cordingly baptized, and returned to his own
country, attended by two ecclesiastics, Ansca-
ritis and Aubert, monks of Corbri. These ven-
erable missionaries labored with remarkable
success during two years in converting the
rude inhabitants of Cimbria and Jutland. On
the death of his companion, the zealous and
Indefatigable J/isca>7(t.s went into Siveden, a. d.
828, where his exertions were also crowned
with success. After having been raised in the
year 831, to the archbishopric of Hamburgh,
and of the whole north, to which charge the
superintendence of tlie church of Bremen was
afterwards added, this missionary spent the re-
mainder of his life in traveling frequently
amongst the Danes, Cimbriaus, and Swedes, to
form new churches, to confirm and establish
those which had been already planted, and
otherwise to promote the cause of Christianity.
He continued in the midst of these arduous
and dangerous enterprises till his death, in the
year 865. Rembert, his successor in the super-
intendence of the church of Bremen, began,
towards the close of this century, to preach
to the inhabitants of Brandenhurgh, and made
some progress towards their conversion. —
(Pearson's Brief Historic View of the Progress
of the Gospel, page 29.) About the middle of
this century, the standard of the cross began
to be unfurled among the Bulgarians, a Scla-
vonic people of extraordinary fierceness, who
had long proved extremely troublesome, by
their contiguity to the Greek emperors. The
sister of their king Bogoris having been taken
prisoner in a military excursion, was carried
to Constantinople, where she heard and em-
braced the Gospel. After some time she v/as
ransomed, and on her return home she was so
deeply affected by her brother's idolatrous
practices, that she earnestly sought to convince
him of the absurdity of his worship. The
king listened attentively to her arguments, but
did not appear inclined to change his religion,
till, on the appearance of a pestilence in his
dominions, he was persuaded to pray to the
God of the Christians, and the plague was al-
most immediately removed. This circum-
stance convinced him of the omnipotent pow-
er of Jesus, and he took an early opportunity
of sending to Constantinople for missionaries,
from whom he and many of his subjects re-
ceived baptism. Moshiem remarks, that " the
missionaries of this period were superior, both
in their principles and conduct, to those of
preceding ages, as they were more anxious to
inform the minds of men than to extend the
domination of the Pope, and they made no
attempts to add to the number of their con-
verts by rigid and coercive measures, altoge-
ther inconsistent with the spirit of the Gospel,"
— (Smith's History and Origin of Missionary
Societies, Vol. I. pp. 49, 50.)
Century X. — In the tenth century, the
Christian church presented a deplorable scene
of ignorance, superstition, and immorality.
Amidst the darkness, however, which universal-
ly prevailed, some rays of light occasionally ap-
pear. The Nestor tans continued their missionary
labors. The Hungarians and Avari had re-
ceived some imperfect ideas of Christianity
during the reign of Charlemagne ; but, on his
decease, they relapsed into idolatry, and the
Christian religion was almost extinguished
among them. Towards the middle of this
century, two Turkish chiefs, Bologndes and
Gylas, whose territories lay on the banks of
the Danube, made a public profession of Chris-
tianity, and were baptized at Constantinople.
Of these, the former soon apostatised ; the
other steadily i-)ersevered, received instruction
from Hierotheus, a bishop who had accompa-
nied him from Constantinople, and encouraged
his labors among his subjects. Yarolta, the
daughter of Gylas, being afterwards married
to Gcysa, the chief of the Hungarian nation,
he was by her persuaded to embrace Christi-
anity. Geysa, however, still retained a predi-
lection for his ancient superstitions, and was
only prevented from apostatising by the zeal
and authority of Adalbert, archbishop of
Prague, who visited Hungary towards the con-
clusion of this century. I3ut however imper-
fect might be the conversion of the King, the
most salutary consequences followed the recep-
tion of the Gospel by his subjects. Humanity,
peace, and civilization, began to flourish
among a fierce and barbarous people. — The
inhabitants of Poland were, during this cen-
tury, blessed with the knowledge of Christi-
anity. Some Poles, traveling into Bohemia
and Moravia, were struck with the preaching
of the Gospel, and on their return, earnestly
recommended it to the attention of their
countrymen. The report at length reaching
the ears of Micislaus, the Duke of Poland, he
was induced to divorce his seven wives, and
married Dambronca, the daughter of Boleslaus,
Duke of Bohemia. He was baptized in the
year 965, and, by the zealous efforts of the
Duke and Duchess, their subjects were either
320
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
persuaded or obliged, by degrees, to abandon
their idolatry, and profess the religion of
Christ. The conversions which had taken
place in Riiesia during the preceding century,
were neither sincere nor permanent. But in
the year 9G1, iro/oc/o/Hn- having married Anne,
sister of the Greek Emperor Basilhis the
Second, was prevailed upon by that princess
to receive the Christian faith. He was ac-
cordingly baptized in the year 98*7. The Rus-
sians followed, without compulsion or reluc-
tance, the example of their prince ; and from
that time Russia received a Christian estab-
lishment, and considered herself as a daughter
of the Greek Church. In Scandinavia Chris-
tianity, which had been so successfully intro-
duced during the preceding century, had met
with a severe check in Denmark, under the
reign of Gormo the Third, who labored to ex-
tirpate it entirely. At length, however, he was
compelled by Henry the First, called the Fowler,
the predecessor of Otko the Great, to permit the
profession and propagation of Christianity in
his dominions ; and under the protection of
the emperor, Unni, then Archbishop of Ham-
burgh, with some other ecclesiastics, came into
Denmark, and formed many Christian churches
in that kingdom. On the death of Gormo, his
successor Harold, being defeated by Otho the
Great, A. D. 949, by the command of his con-
queror, though not unwillingly, embraced the
Gospel, and zealously supported and propaga-
ted it amongst his subjects during bis reign.
Suen-Utho, however, his son and successor, en-
tirely renounced the Christian name, and per-
secuted his Christian subjects in the most cruel
manner. At length, being driven from his
throne, and forced into exile among the
Scots, he was led to reflect on his Christian
education, and to repent of his apostasy ; and
being restored to his kingdom, spent the re-
mainder of his life in the most sincere and
earnest endeavors to promote the cause of
Christianity in his dominions. In Su'cden, an
almost entire extinction of the Gospel had
taken place. Unni, animated by his success
in Denmark, determined, therefore, on at-
tempting a revival of it in that country. His
f)ious exertions were rendered prosperous, and
le had the happiness of confirming the Gospel
in Sweden, and of planting it even in the re-
moter parts of that northern region. It was
during this century that Norway first received
the Christian faith. Several attempts were
previously made in the early part of it, which
were altogether unsuccessful. The liarbarous
Norwegians resisted both the exhortations of
the English missionaries, and the more forci-
ble endeavors of their princes, to convert tliem
from their idolatry, till the year 945, when
Jlaco, King of Norway, who had been driven
from his throne, was restored by Harold, King
of Denmark ; and liaving been converted by
that princr durinff his exile, i>ublicly recom-
mended Christianity to his subjects. The im-
pression, however, which was then made upon
their minds, was but slight ; nor were they en-
tirely persuaded to become Christians till the
reign of his successor Olaus. At length Sv:ein,
King of Denmark, having conquered Norway,
obliged his subjects universally to renounce
idolatry, and to profess the Gospel. Among
the missionaries whose labors were render-
ed successful in this work, Guthebald, an
English priest, was the most eminent, both in
merit and authority. From Norway, Chris-
tianity spread into the Orkney Islands, which
were then subject to that country, and pene-
trated in some degree, even into the remote
region of Iceland. So that in this century the
triumph of Christianity was complete through-
out Scandinavia. (Pearson's Brief Historic
View of the Progress of the Gospel, p. 30-33.)
Though this century was proverbially an age
of darkness, yet the Gospel continued to
spread. And it has been well remarked that
although " the efforts of the missionaries at
this period, had their defects, yet they form the
principal glory of those times, and appear to
have been attended by the power of the Holy
Spirit, to the genuine conversion of numbers,
and the improvement of human society."
(Bcrder's ili/.ss. Anec, p. 129.)
From the end of the sixth to the ninth cen-
tury, the progress of the Gospel continued with
varied success, among the Gothic tribes. After
that period, in the tenth century, the field of
missionary labor extended itself still further
towards the East. Beyond the limits already
named, amid the barren table lands of Scla-
vonia and Sar mart ia, shut in by the Elbe and the
Oural mountains, were gathered the wandering
tribes distinguished by the name of Sclaves,
who presented a still more hopeless task to
Christian zeal. Uncontrolled by any govern-
ment or law, deeming even the formation of
villages an infringement of liberty, guided only
by traditionary custom, they dispersed through-
out the forests and plains of that wide district,
clustered in family groups, with no unity, either
of national existence, or of habit, or even of re-
ligion. A vague superstition, consisting of a
rude worship of nature's powers, with stated
sacrifices, and the dualistic notion of the East,
derived from contact with the Scythian tribes,
possessed their minds with a sense of religious
awe ; but, throughout the whole race, even the
idea of the immortality of the soul had become
extinct. One social virtue had the tbrce of law
amongst them ; and the obligation to hospi-
tality atlbrded an opening fur the strangers of
the West to gain an entrance among them.
Tartly, and in the first instance, from the
Greek Church, by the two apostles of I'oland
and Prussia, Cyril and Methodius ; afterwards,
and more perfectly, by emissaries from the
Latin Church, in various ways, and at various
intervals, the prevailing form of Christianity
was propagated in these countries I'runi the
tenth to the sixteenth centuries ; and during
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
321
the same period, by missionaries chiefly from
the monastery of ISeuf Corbie, on the banks of
the AVeser, and from the British Isles. And
thus, by the end of the thirteenth century, pa-
ganism may be said to have been well nigh
banished from the limits of Europe. (Grant's
Bampton Lecture, p. 112.)
Anscliar, the apostle of Denmark and Swe-
den, A.D. 826, and Giselmar, who followed
him to Denmark, wei'e sent from Neuf Corbie.
Missionaries were brought by Hakon, king of
Norway, into his dominions, (938.) Chris-
tianity was not, however, permanently intro-
duced before the reign of Olaf I., who was ac-
companied from England by John Sigard,
(993.) Olaf 11. afterwards requested mission-
aries of Canute, upon which, Sigfrid, first
bishop of Wexia, Gomkill, and others, were
sent into Norway, [1019.)— (History Eccles. of
Adam Bremensis.)
In Germanij, the exertions of the Emperor
OtJiO contributed, in a signal manner, to pro-
mote the interests of Christianity, and to estab-
lish it on the most firm foundation throughout
the empire. At the earnest request of the
Rugi, a remarkably barbarous people, who in-
habited the country of Pomeranm, between
the Oder and the Wipper, and the Isles of
Rugen in the Baltic, that zealous prince sent
Adalbert among them, to revive the know-
ledge of Christianity which had formerly ex-
isted, but was then extinguished. The mission,
however, was unsuccessful ; but Adalbert, who
was appointed the first Archbishop of Mag-
deburgh, was successful in converting great
numbers of Sdavonians.
Throughout this century, the Saracens in
Asia and Africa, successfully propagated the
doctrines of Mohammed ; and multitudes, even
of Christians, were the victims of their delu-
sions. The Turks also received the religion
of the Arabian impostors ; and, turning their
arms against the Saracens, began to lay the
foundations of that powerful empire which
they afterwards established. (Pearson's Brief
Historic View, p. 34.)
Adalbert, archbishop of Prague, visited Hun-
gary, and afterwards traveled as missionary
to Poland, and planted the Gospel in Dantzic ;
and was at length, like many of the mission-
aries already named, murdered by the Pagans.
Otho the Great, emperor of Germany, distin-
guished himself in this age, by his zeal for
religion, by erecting and endowing churches,
and promoting the propagation of the Gospel
among barbarous nations. Nor was his em-
press, Adelaide, less remarkable for her piety
and liberality. English missionaries, particu-
larly Bernard, were the active instruments in
planting the standard of the Cross in the
Orkney Islands and Greenland. The conversion
of the Normans is likewise said to have taken
place in this century, on the occasion of the
marriage ot'Rollo, Duke of Normandy, to Giesla,
daughter of Charles the Simple, king of France;
21
but, such matrimonial conversions may be
justly doubted : they might assume the name
without the change to Christianity.
Himgary, wliich had previously received
some faint dawnings of the Christian faith,
became, toward the end of this century, more
enlightened. Among those tribes of uncer-
tain origin, who assailed Europe at the time
of the dissolution of the Carolingan empire,
were the Magyars, who emerged from Asia, and
established themselves near the Don. Being
expelled from those regions, they penetrated
into Ukraine, from whence they were driven
away by the Russians, and then arrived in
Dacia, under the name of Hungarians, (889.)
At the head of the Magyar hordes was the
princely race of Arpad. The tribes were seven
in number, each being commanded by a chief,
almost independent. Christianity, as we have
seen, penetrated among them under the reign
of Geysa I., who was converted from heathen-
ism, by the exertions of his wife Sarolta ; and
was baptized towards 980. But the general
conversion of the Hungarians to Christianity
took place under the reign of their son Stephen,
one of the most celebrated kings of that na-
tion, who was at once the apostle and legis-
lator of Hungary, and the true founder of that
monarchy. In his reign churches were erected,
bishoprics established, and the profession of
Christianity became general in all parts of
the country.
The tenth century has been emphatically
styled " an iron age, barren of all goodness ;
a leaden age, abounding in all wickedness;
and a dark age, remarkable above all others
for the scarcity of writers and men of learning."
In this deplorable state of the church, however,
some rays of light, as shown in these previous
records, passed across the gloomy scene, and
some pleasing occurrences evinced that God
had not yet " forgotten to be gracious " to his
humble worshipers. Several of the churches
still possessed the oracles of divine truth in
the vulgar tongue ; the supremacy of the Ro-
man pontiff was in some places opposed with
heroic firmness, and the doctrine of transub-
stantiation was denied by many to whom the
Holy Spirit had revealed " the truth as it is
in Jesus." (SHe^/i, Vol. I. p. 51.) In the dark-
est ages of Christianity, the few rays of light
yet unextinguished, appear in connection with
the efforts of missionaries to evangelize the
heathen.
Century XI. — In the early part of this cen-
tury the Christian religion was further ex-
tended in the kingdoms of Sweden, Norway,
and Denmark, and also in Germany, by the
assistance of English missionaries. The con-
ductors of the mission were Sigefrid, Archdea-
con of York, Eschil, Guncchild, Rudolf, and
Bernard. The names of others are likewise
mentioned, as laborious and useful messengers
of truth among the barbarous European tribes :
thus, it is related of William, an English priest,
322
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
viho attended Canute in one of liis voyages to
Denmark, that be was so affected with the
idolatry of the Danes, that he desired to be
left among them as a missiouaj-y, and had the
happiness of finding his labors not in vain in
the Lord.
The zeal of the Nestorian Christians con-
tinued to be conspicuous in this century. In
Tartary and the adjacent countries they suc-
ceeded in converting great numbers to the
profession of Christianity.
The light wliich had been diffused during
the preceding centuries among the Hungari-
ans, Danes, Foles, and Russians, was consider-
ably increased and extended by the zealous en-
deavors of their princes, and of the mission-
aries who labored among them.
Century XII. — The twelfth century was
noted for attempts to spread the Gospel by the
sword. Waldemir I., King of Denmark, in
particular, distinguished himself by his endeav-
ors to propagate Christianity by force of arms,
especially among the Sclavomans, Venedi, Van-
dals, and other northern tribes. In these war-
like methods of forcing his subjects to listen
to evangelical instructions, he was zealously
encouraged and aided by Asalom, Archbishop
of Luuden. The inhabitants of the island of
Rugen, a fierce and savage people, were num-
bered among his conquests. The Finlanders
were driven to accept of peace on similar terms
by Enck IX., King of Sweden, who was ac-
companied in his bloody campaign by Henry,
Archbishop of Upsal. The Livonians, on re-
jecting the missionary instructions of Main-
hard, a monk of Segelaerg, were, on an appeal
made by Mainhard to the Roman Pontiff,
Innocent III., subjected to the horrors of war.
An ecjuestrian military order, of " Knights
Sword Bearers," instituted for the express pur-
pose of converting pagans, was sent against
them. During the Livonian war, they exer-
cised the greatest cruelty and injustice, not
merely by the slaughter of numbers of the in-
habitants, but by the confiscation of their pro-
perty. These forced conversions, however, as
might have been expected, effected but little
more than a profession of obedience to the See
of Rome, and a constrained attention to cer-
tain forms and ceremonies, substituted for idol
worship, while the profoundest ignorance re-
mained of the true nature of the (jospel.
This, indeed, appears to have been an age
peculiarly distinguished by the institution of
religious military orders, such as the Knights
of St. John of Jerusalem, now called the
" Knights of Malta," originally instituted for
the care of the sick, and the protection of pil-
grims in the Holy Land ; the Knights Templars,
so called from their occupying on their first
establishment a house in Jerusalem, near tlie
site of the temple, and designed to guard pil-
grims from the violence of the infidels, when
visiting Jerusalem ; The Order of ^lontjoi/e,
instituted to fight against infidels, especially
the Moors of Spain ; -ftie Portuguese Order (^
Avis, established for the same purpose ; the
Order of St. Lazarus, who received pilgrims,
in Jerusalem, in houses founded purposely for
them, and then conducted them on their way,
and defended them against the Mohammedans ;
the Order of Knights of St. James, united for
the protection of pilgrims visiting the relics of
St. Jiimes of Compostella from the ill-treat-
ment of the Moors ; and the Order of Teuto-aic
Knights, founded originally by some Germans,
who built a hospital at Jerusalem for the pil-
grims of their nation, and approved by Pope
Celestine HI. After the loss of the Holy
Land, these knights returned to Germany, and,
by their warlike prowess, made themselves
masters of Prussia, Livonia, Courland, and
Semigallia. To these may be added the order
of Christ's Militia, instituted by Dominic for
the extirpation of the Albigenses. An emi-
nent Romish theologian attempts the defence
of the warlike character of these institutions,
by the following specious reasoning : " Two
very different things," he says, " are confounded
by the Protestants, the object and the inten-
tion, the conduct of the knights, and that of
the missionaries. The knights were never
constituted preachers, and the missionaries
were never armed. The barbarians were wild
beasts ; it was necessary to make them men
first, and to reduce them by force, before it
could be expected to make them Christians.
The first of these exploits belonged to the
knights ; the rest was reserved for the mission-
aries. When the warriors had done their
part, they remained to protect the mission-
aries, in order to the peaceful performance of
their labors." — (Bergier's Diet. Theologique,
Ordrcs Militaires, tome VI.)
Most of these military orders owed their
institution to the Crusades of this century, un-
dertaken by the Roman Catholic princes of
Europe for the recovery of Jerusalem from
the Mohammedans; an outburst of religious
fanaticism, by whicli all Europe and Western
Asia were convulsed. They were the legiti-
mate offspring of ignorance, superstition, and
fanaticism combined, guided by the ambi-
tious designs of the Church of Rome. They
deserve no notice in this connection, except so
iar as their influence upon Europe and the rest
of the world, may have tended to prepare the
way for the Protestant Reformation, and ulti-
mately for the universal diffusion of the Gos-
pel. They broke the slumber of ages like an
earthquake at midnight. They roused the
minds of Europe, long besotted in ignorance
and barbarism ; and thus prepared it to grasp (
the great and soul-stirring truths of the Re- '
formation. They (luickened the energies of
nations, to provide for vast armies, and awaken-
ed their enterprise to fit out fleets ; and tluia
navigation received a new impulse, oi)ening
the way for commerce, which, in its turn,
opened a door for Christian missions. Its ex-
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
323
peditions also promoted geographical discov-
ei-ies, and acquainted the mind of Christendom
somewhat with the extent of heathenism. It is
thus that the overruling providence of God
brings good out of evil, and order out of confu-
sion, and makes the wildest fanaticism and the
most horrible scenes of war and bloodshed con-
tribute to the extension of his kingdom. For
the further examination of this subject see
Gibbon's Decline and Fall, ch. lxi. ; Mosheim,
Cent. XI. Part I. ch. i. ; Robertson's Charles
V. ; Channing on Associatiatis ; Guizot's His-
toiy of Civilization, sec. 8 ; Encyclopedia Brit-
annica, Art.Crusades ; Campbell's Maritime Dis-
covery and Christian Missions.
The propagation of the Gospel was success-
fully continued in this century, chiefly in the
north of Europe. Bolcslaus, duke of Poland,
having taken Stetin, the capital of Pomerania,
by storm, and laid waste the surrounding coun-
try, compelled the vanquished inhabitants to
submit at discretion, and imposed upon them,
as a condition of peace,, their reception of
Christianity. The conqueror sent Otho, bishop
of Bamberg, in the year 1124, to instruct his
new subjects. Many of them, among whom
were the duke and duchess, and tlieir attend-
ants, were brought over ; but great numbers of
the idolatrous Pomeranians, as might have been
expected, resisted appeals made at the point
of the sword, and adhered to the superstitions
of their ancestors. In a second visit, in the
year 1126, the bishop was more successful, and
the prevailing form of Christianity was estab-
lished in Pomerania.
In the year 1168, Waldemar, king of Den-
mark, who was foremost among the northern
princes of this century, by his zeal in the pro-
pagation of Christianity, having subdued the
island of Rugen, which lies in the neighbor-
hood of Pomerania, obliged its rude and pira-
tical inhabitants to listen to the instructions
of the missionaries who accompanied his army.
Among these Absalom, archbishop of Lunden,
was distinguished ; and, by his exertions,
Christianity was introduced into this island,
which had hitherto baffled every attempt.
The Finlanders, whose character resembled
that of the inhabitants of Rugen, and who in-
fested Sweden with their predatory incursions,
received Christianity in a similar manner.
Eric, king of Sweden, having totally defeated
these barbai'ians, sent Henry, archbishop of
Upsal, to evangelize them. His success was
so great, that he is called The Apostle of the
Finlanders ; yet he was at length assassinated
by some of these refractory people on account
of a heavy penance which he had imposed on
a person of great authority.
In Livonia, the labors of Mainard, the first
missionary who attempted the conversion of
that barbarous people, having proved unsuc-
cessful, the Roman pontiff, Urban the Third,
who had consecrated him bishop of the Livo-
nians, declared a crusade against them, which
was zealously carried on by that ecclesiastic,
and by his successors, Berthold and Albert.
These warlike apostles, at the head of great
bodies of troops raised in Saxony, successively
entered Livonia, and compelled the wretched
inhabitants to receive baptism.
Centuey XIII. — The thirteenth century af-
fords few records of missionary labor. It was
however, distinguished by the institution of
the Order of the Franciscans, or of friar mis-
sions, and the endeavors of James I. of Arragon
to communicate Christian instruction to his
Moorish subjects by the establishment of Arab-
ic scl^ools and the translation of books into the
Arabic language. These schools were chiefly
at Majorca and Barcelona, in which a consid-
erable number of youtlis were educated for
preachers ; but these efforts proving ineffectual,
he listened to the advice of the Romish Pon-
tiff, Clement IV., who exhorted him to drive
the Mohammedans out of Spain by force, in-
stead of missionary efforts.
Francis of Assisi, the founder of the Fran-
ciscans, undertook a mission to Palestine him-
self, and sent several monks of his order as
missionaries into Germany, Greece, France,
England, and to the Moors in Spain. Johan-
nes a Monte Corvino, a monk of this order, was
sent into Tartary, by Pope Nicholas IV.,
resided there for many years, and translated
the Psalms of David, and the New Testament,
into the Tartar language.
The Dominicans of Spain applied themselves
to the oriental languages and rabbinical liter-
ature, and were employed by the king of Spain
in the instruction of the numerous Jews and
Saracens, who resided in his dominions. Both
the Franciscans and the Dominicans sent out
many persons as missionaries to various coun-
tries ; but the most of them were more solici-
tous to make proselytes to the Romish Church
than to teach their converts the scriptural way
of salvation.
The Waldenses and Albigenses, in this cen-
tury, were distinguished witnesses for the truth
— the martyrs of the age ; and though com-
pelled to maintain a defensive, rather than ag-
gressive position, yet they did much to prepare
the way for the reformation, by the secret dif-
fusion of the Gospel among the nominal Chris-
tians of Europe. But the records of their
labors are scanty, and they do not come pro-
perly under the denomination of missions to
the heathen. And this century furnishes little
more, in the way of missions to the heathen,
than details of military conquests, by which
heathen nations were compelled to yield a
nominal conformity to the Church of Rome.
Century XIV. — Wickliffe, " the Morning
Star of the Reformation," rendered the four-
teenth century a remarkable epoch in the histo-
ry of the Church, by the intrepidity and success
with which he contended against the errors
and the corruptions of the Church of Rome,
and by his translation of the Scriptures into
824
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
what was, at that time, the vernacular tongue
of EngUmd. thou.afh now utterly obsolete. The
followers of Wickliife, generally called Lollards,
among whom was Sir John Oldcastle, other-
wise called Lord Cobham, were anxious to
diffu.-*'. as extensively as possible, the doctrines
promulgated by their learned anti-papal chief.
They expended considerable sums in collecting
and transcribing (printing not having been in-
vented,) and dispersing the works of Wickliffe,
and in maintaining a number of itinerant
preachers, who preached in churchyards and
market-places, particularly in the dioceses of
Canterbury, London, Kochester, and Hereford.
Bale says that Lord Cobham caused all the
works of Wickliffe to be copied by the desire
of John Huss, and to be sent into France, Spain,
Bohemia, and other foreign countries. Queen
Anne of Bohemia favored the adherents of
Wickliffe ; possessing and constantly reading
the Gospels in four languages, Bohemian, Ger-
man, Latin, and English. Many of her atten-
dants imbibed the same opinions, and on their
return to Bohemia, after her decease in 1394,
carried with them the writings of Wickliffe
and his disciples ; by which means they were
widely dispersed, and produced a powerful anti-
papal influence, not only in Bohemia, but also
in other neighboring' states.
Century XY. — The fifteenth century was
rendered remarkable by many important
events, which, though not strictly missionary,
yet, in their iufucnce, have in some cases so
greatly forwarded, and in others so greatly re-
tardttl, the progress of the Gospel, that we
may just glance at their occurrence and char-
acter. One of these was the discover ij of Amer-
ica by Christopher Columbus, in 1492, and the
subsequent landing of the I'ortuguese Arneri-
cus Vespucivs, in Brazil ; a second was the dis-
covery of the passage to India by sea, by Vasco
de Gama, in 1497 ; and another was the ruin
of the Greek empire, in the taking of Constan-
tinople by the Turks, in 14G3. By the first of
these events, an immense extent of country
was eventually placed under the control of the
Eonian Catl'.olic princes of Spain and Portu-
gal ; and hence these kingdoms were induced
to make extraordinary ancl ultimately success-
ful efforts, to introuuce and cstalilish Popery,
in its mt«t superstitious and degrading forms,
throughout the continent of South America,
and the kingdom of Mexico. By the discov-
ery of a pa.ssage to India, by (loul)ling the
Cape of Good Hope, the intercourse between
Eiijriand and the East Indies was greatly facil-
and his associates and successors, about the
middle of this century ; the slow and expen-
sive mode of transcription being the only way
previously known of multiplying copies of
books, however valuable. But, by the inven-
tion of this most useful art, and the improve-
ments of later years, copies of valuable works
can be rapidly and cheaply multiplied ; and
millions of persons have by this means been
furnished with the Holy Scriptures, who,
otherwise, must have remained destitute.
The military expeditions of the Papists con-
tinued during this century, and some of them,
among which were those of Don Henry, Duke
of Viseo, (Portugal,) and Grand Master of
the Order of Christ, were productive of im-
portant results, in the way of maritime discov-
eries, &c, ; but the events of this century, of a
purely missionary character, were few and
comparatively ineffectual. In the East, the
Nestorian Patriarch, who resided in Chaldea,
sent missionaries into Cathay and China, who
were empowered to exercise episcopal author-
ity over the Christian assemblies, which lay
concealed in the remote provinces of those
great empires, affording a demonstrative proof,
that notwithstanding the dreadful persecutions
that had been exercised by the dominant au-
thorities against the Nestorian Christians,
there were still some churches existing in
those regions of darkness.
There were also individuals, whose consis-
tency of conduct and zeal for the dissemina-
tion of Christianity, in this dark age, entitle
them to our notice and admiration. Such, for
instance, were the two brothers, Vincent and
Boniface Ferrer, Thomas a Kempis and John
Wessehs. Vincent Ferrer was a Spaniard by
birth ; at his own earnest request he was ap-
pointed apostolical missionary, by Pope Bene-
dict XIII., and for many years preached with
indefatigable ardor in different parts of Eu-
rope. He visited Spain, France, the Nether-
lands, Germany, and at the request of Henry
IV., England, Scotland, and Ireland. The
usual subjects of his sermons were death, judg-
ment, and eternity. INIilner says, that " though
bred in the midst of darkness, and connected
with the worst of ecclesiastical characters, he
was a shining model of piety." He died in
1419, at the age of sixty-two. Boniface Fer-
rer, the brother of Vincent, was a zealous
preacher of the word of God, and having em-
braced the monastic life, he successively rose
to high ofticial situations, and died prior of the
Carthusian monastery of Pontaleli. in Valen-
cia, in 1417, after having translated the Scrijv
tares into the Valcncian or Catalonian dialect
italed ; the i)revious routes having been
through Egvpt and Persia; and, by the over- -„ _ --- /■ ; p
throw uf the Greek empire, many learned men of Spain.— (See McCrie's Jlistory oj iliehc-
fled for security into various lOuropcun states, fmimition in Spain, p. 191.) Thojiias a Kem-
and, by the difcusion of literature aiul science, pis, whose piety has received a perpetual mon-
pr([)ai-(.d the way for the Rerormation of the ument in his " Christian's Pattern," was
following century. But. prubublv, no occur- born at Chempis or Kcmpis, in Co ogne_, in
n-nce of thi^ age proved of greater interest l.')80, and became one of the most illustrious
Ihiin Ihi Livculim of rrinting, by Guttcmlcrg members of the soci-'ty of the "Brethren of
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
825
the Common Life ;" a society founded by
Gerard de Groot, who, having retired into a
monastery, devoted himself to prayer and the
reformation of immoral characters, and insti-
tuted a fraternity, having one common pro-
perty, and earning their livelihood by their
pens. Kempis died in 1471, in the ninety-first
year of his age. His excellent work, " The
Christian's Pattern," has been translated into
most of the European languages, and even
into Chinese. A beautiful copy of the Bible
transcribed by him, is preserved in the library
of the regular canons, at Cologne. — (Town-
ley's Illustrations of Biblical Literature, Yol. I.
p. 328.) John de Capistrano may be added as
an instance of the activity and energy of the
pious, though mistaken, missionary agents of
the Romish church. He was a Franciscan
friar, of a wealthy Neapolitan family, and was
sent to convert the Bohemians, and to preacli
in Saxony, Misnia, and Moravia, and is said to
have been everywhere received with banners,
crosses, and processions, like a sovereign prince.
He is said to have preached at Erfurd to 60,000
persons, the men being arranged on one side
and the women on the other. When ignorant
of the language, he was assisted by an inter-
preter, who explained what he delivered to the
people. His sermons were accompanied with
violent action, so that he is said to have
" preached with his hands and his feet as well
as with his voice," which corresponds with the
accounts given of him by an English historian,
who relates that " he itinerated through the
cities and towns, addressing sermons to the
people, in the highways and market places,
against the enemies of the Romish Church.
Among the Germans and those that were ig-
norant of the Italian, he is said to have afTect-
ed the minds of his audience in a wonderful
manner, by using gesticulations instead of
words." — (See Turner's Modern History of
Engla72d, Vol. II. p. 9.) His death occurred
October 23, 1456, being seventy-one years of
age.
Century XVL — The happy reformation
from Popery illustriously signalized the com-
mencement of the sixteenth century ; the year
151*7 being regarded as its commencement,
when Luther first publicly opposed the monk
Tetzel, in his sale of papal indulgences. The
adherents of the Reformation were called Pro-
testants, from their protesting against an intol-
erant decree of the Diet of Spires, in 1529.
As the Reformation proceeded, those who had
embraced the views of its advocates became
increasingly desirous of emancipating the in-
habitants of their native lands, and of other
adjacent countries, from the errors of the Ro-
mish church. This object they pursued with
indefatigable zeal ; and in order to accom-
plish it, translations of the Holy Scriptures
were made into the vernacular tongues, and
widely dispersed ; while plain and homely
rhymes, embodying the opinions of the re-
formers, were composed, and put into the
hands of poor people, who made a livelihood
by singing them through the country. It is
related, that on one occasion a poor man, who
had received the printed copies of some of
these rhymes, repaired to Wittemberg, and, in
the course of his progress through the town,
sung them under Luther's windows. The at-
tention of Luther was caught by the subject,
and when on inquiry he learned the name of
the author, he is said to have burst into tears,
and rendered thanks to God for making such
humble expedients conducive to the propaga-
tion of truth. In pursuance of the same great
object, missionaries were sent into Eomai\ Ca-
tholic States to preach the distinguishing doc-
trines of the Reformation, especially that of
justification by faith, and tracts, often denomi-
nated libels, or 'little books, were composed
and extensively dispersed, containing defences
of the Protestant tenets, detached books of
Scripture, or exposures of Papal errors or
practices.
An expedition was fitted out in the year
1555, by Villegagnmi, a knight of Malta, un-
der the patronage of Henry II. of France,
with the view to establish a French colony in
the new world. The approbation of the mo-
narch was secured by the medium of the excel-
lent Admiral de Coligny, whose favor Villegag-
uon propitiated by the secret underslauding
that the projected colony should protect the
reformed religion. Accordingly Calvin, the
reformer of Geneva, was applied to, in order
to obtain ministers to embark with the expe-
dition. After consultation with the other
pastors of Geneva, he sent two, Guillaume
Chartier and Picire Richier, who were after-
wards joined by sevei'al others. Their object
was at once to labor among the colonists, and
to evangelize the heathen aborigines. This
was thefrst attempt at a foreign mission, by
the Protestant cluu-ches. The expedition
reached Fort Coligny, as it was named, on
the Rio de Janeiro, in Brazil, in March, 1556.
On their arrival the Genevan ministers proceed-
ed to constitute a church, according to the
forms and rites of the reformed churches, and
celebrated the Lord's Supper. But Villegag-
non soon betrayed his true character, and after
cruelly maltreating the missionaries, forced
them to reembark, and return to France. The
next attempt to send the Gospel to heathen
countries was made by the celebrated re-
former and king of Sweden, Gustavus Vasa.
About the year 1559, a missionary was sent
by that monarch to Lapland. The natives
were at the same time commanded to congre-
gate at a certain season of the year to pay
their tribute and receive religious instruction
from this missionary. — (Baird's Christian Re-
trospect, p. 296.)
Internal strifes and gainsayings, hortiiities
from without fomented by Rome, and perplex-
ities from within, exhausted the energies of
326
EAKLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
Christian men in England, diu'iug the reigns
of Elizabeth and James ; and for 150 years
nothing was undertaken for projjagating the
Gospel in other lauds. A scheme to rival the
Koman jDropaganda was devised by Cromwell,
but never realized. Burnet says that Crom-
well resolved to set up a council for the Pro-
testant religion, in oi;)position to the congegra-
tion Be Propaganda Fide at Rome. He in-
tended it should consist of several counsellors,
and four secretaries for different provinces.
These were, the first — France, Switzerland, and
the valleys ; the Palatine and other Calvin-
ists were the second ; Germany, the North,
and Turkey were the third ; and the East
and West Indies were the fourth. The secre-
taries were to have £500 salary a-picce, and to
keep a correspondence everywhere, to know the
state of religion all over the world, that so all
good designs might be, by their means, pro-
tected and assisted. Stoupe was to have the
first provinces. They were to have a fund of
£10,000 a-year at their disposal for ordinary
emergencies, but to be farther supplied as
occasion should require it. Chelsea College
■was to be made up for them, which was then
an old decayed building, that had been at first
raised to be a college for wTiters of contro-
versy."— Burnet's History of his ctm Times,
Vol. I. p. 132.)
(For any further notices of Roman Catho-
lic missions, see " Church of Rome, Missions
of.")
Under the impression of duty, and that of
feeling and benevolence towards others, cre-
ated by the enjoyment of experimental Chris-
tianity, many of the laity who had felt the
power of Divine grace in their own hearts, by
the preaching of the doctrines of the reforma-
tion, became exceedingly anxious that others
should ])artake of their happiness, and gladly
seized the op])orlunities jiresented to them by
mercantile intercourse to disseminate the
tniths which they themselves had embraced.
France, Spain, Italy, and other countries thus
received the rays of Divine light for a season,
though partially or entirely extinguished by
the cruelties and industrious efforts of the in-
quisitors of those ill-fated regions. Dr.
McCric, speaking of the eastern part of
Spain, says : " 'J'he inhabitants of Beam
were generally Protestants, and many of them
crossing the Pyrenees spread theniselvos over
Arragon, and at the same time carrjing on
trade, found the opportunity of circulating
their religious books and tenets among the
people."— (McCrie's Ihst. of the lieformation
in Spain, p. 234.)
The Waldensian pastors (barbes) who were
so numerous at this time, that 140 were present
at a meeting of the Synod, were not neglect-
ful (if o])portunities for disseminating the truth.
An Italian nuiimscript, preserved in the Uni-
versity of Cajiibridge, bearing date 1587,
states, that " some of these barbes traveled
into distant countries to preach the Gospel,
and to visit the Waldensian churches establish-
ed in France, Germany, Lombardy, Calabria,
&c., while in 1535, an edition of'the French
Bible had been printed at Neufehatel, by
Robert Olivetan, a native Vaudois." — (Gilly's
Excursioiis, Sfc., Appendix, No. XI.)
Towards the close of this century missions
were sent by the Siredish Protestants into Lap-
land, but as they did not understand the Lap-
pancse tongue, an interpreter stood under the
pulpit and explained their discoui'ses to the
people. But so little success followed this
mode of preaching, that Gustavus Adolphus
founded schools for the instruction of youth
in a more correct knowledge of the doctrines
of the Gospel. The first school was establish-
ed at Pithen, prior to the year 1619, and com-
mitted to the care of Nicholaus Andra^a, the
minister of the place, Avho had translated the
ritual, and dedicated it to the king. Gustavus
also committed to the same person the trans-
lation of necessary and useful books into the
Laplaudish language ; the Laplanders being
previously altogether ignorant of letters, and
without a book in their own language. For
the further encouragement of the schools, Gus-
ta\'us Adolphus allowed money for the diet
and clothes of the children who attended them,
besides a stipend for the schoolmaster. By
these schools and the elementary and scriptu-
ral books compiled by Nicholaus Andra^a, the
youth of Lapland were so greatly benefited,
that some of them became students at the
University of Upsal, and v;ere afterwards en-
trusted with the Christian ministry. — (Scuaf-
fee's History of Lapland, p. 27.)
The Protestants at length awoke to more
active efiorts for the extension of the Gos-
pel, and attempts were made to form mission-
ary societies. Ernest, a zealous Lutheran and
a baron, sought to form a society lor a Pro-
testant mission, but a variety of impediments
disappointed his purposes, so that no elfectual
benefit resulted Irom his efforts. 1'he learned
Anthony Walaus, of Leyden, recommended a
seminary to be founded for the education of
young men of known piety, prudence, zeal, and
diligence, to be employed as missionaries esjie-
cially to India. This object he proposed to
the Dutch East India Company, who appear
so far to have countenanced the ])lan as to
have placed several persons under the instruc-
tions of Walaius himself, about the year 1622.
A brief exposition of his views was i)ub]ished
in the third volume of his works, printed in
1643, under the title of ^' Neccssitas ac Forma
erigendi Collegii sew Seminarii Indici." The
Dutch East India Company, indeed, with a
praiseworthy attention to the religious inte-
rests of the' colonists in their foreign posses-
sions, supported ministers in most of them.
Millar, in his " Propagation of Christianity,"
mentions Ccyhm, Snmatra, Java. Aniboyna,
Hcresoria, Jstes of Banda, Coast of Corcman-
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
327
dd, Surat, China, Formosa, Trijwan, Sincan
and Japan, in all of which churches had been
erected. In several of these stations the
preaching of the Grospel appears to have been
greatly blessed. In Ceylon, Harvard [Narra-
tive, ^c. Introduction, p. 69.) states, that "un-
der the Dutch government there were in the
province of Jaffna alone, thirty-four churches
appropriated to the use of the Malabar Chris-
tians, attended by neai^y 63,000 auditors, ex-
clusive of more than 2,000 baptized slaves ;
and the government schools belonging to
them included upwards of 16,000 native child-
ren, who were under regular tuition." Since
that period there has been a most lamentable
neglect of religious instruction by the govern-
ment authority, and an awful relapse of im-
mense numbers into idolatry, who, it is to be
feared, were more swayed by political motives
than by a -love of the Gospel. — (See Art. Cey-
lon.) The zeal of the British Christians was
at length aroused, and more active measures
were adopted, not only to recover the nominal
Christianity which had been lost, but to dif-
fuse true religion throughout the island.
In Formosa, 3Ir. Robert Junius of Delft,
who had been sent by the Senate of the United
Provinces of Holland, as a missionary to the
pagan inhabitants, was eminently successful.
He is said to have baptized 5,900 converts,
" on professing their faith, and giving proper
answers to questions propounded out of the
word of God," and to have planted twenty-
three churches, besides appointing school-
masters, by whom about six hundred children
were taught to read and write. He is said
also to have composed certain prayers, collect-
ed the chief articles of religion, and translated
various psalms into the Formosan language.
Being at length grown infirm, and having set
pastors over various congregations, he became
desirous of seeing his aged mother, and of vis-
iting his native land ; he therefore returned
to Holland, and was succeeded by Daniel
Gravius, and others. The Dutch were driven
from their principal fort in 1659 or 1661, and
the island afterwards became subject to the
Chinese. In the American provinces, which
were taken from the Portuguese by the Dutch,
under command of Count Maurice of Nassau,
zealous efforts were made for the conversion of
the natives by their new masters, and with
much success ; but the recovery of these terri-
tories by the Portuguese, in the year 1644, ob-
scured the pleasing prospect that was begin-
ning to open upon them.
Among the objects contemplated by the
planting of the Phjmouth and Massachusetts
Colonies, as avowed by their founders, and set
forth in their charter, the conversion of savages
to Christianity was prominent. Their first
purpose was to provide an asylum, where, free
from the restraints imposed by the civil and
ecclesiastical policy of England, the Christian
Church might be organized in a form, as they
believed, more consonant with the primitive
model, and the doctrines of Christianity, as
they deduced them from Scripture, preached
without the forced admixture of dogmas and
rites imposed by act of parliament. Their
second was to make the aboriginal races par-
ticipatoi's of these blessings. The first prompted
a jealous resistance to the introduction of any
adverse opinions or customs, which was carried,
in some instances, to excess. The second,
though its execution was delayed by the cares
incident to a new plantation, commenced in
circumstances of such peculiar hardship as
tried the endurance of the pilgrims, prompted
very early action. Individuals made some ex-
ertion to recommend the Gospel to the natives
with satisfactory, though limited results ; and
in 1636, the colony of Plymouth enacted a law
to 2;)rovide for preaching among the Indians.
A similar act was passed in 1646, by the legisla-
ture of Massachusetts. By these movements, a
missionary spirit was awakened in England. A
society was organized for the propagation of
Christianity in North America, and raised a
fund yielding £500, which was applied to the
circulation of the Bible, and the support of mis-
sionaries. The formation of the Society for
Promoting Christian Knowledge, by members
of the Church of England, in 1698, is as-
cribed by Bishop Burnet, to a spirit of emu-
lation aroused by the example of the Non-
conformists. (Early Missionary Enterprises, by
Smith, p. 39.)
In the year 1620, a considerable number of
Non-conformists emigrated to America, having
obtained a patent for the establishment of a
colony and the free exercise of religion.
These were followed by a more numerous com-
pany in 1629. This new colony received the
designation of New England. Rev. John
Eliot, a holy and zealous young minister,
joined the emigrants in 1632. For fifteen
years he was the faithful and laborious pastor
of a congregation at Roxbury, near Boston.
During this period he was deeply affected by
the miserable and destitute state of the North
American Indians. He studied their difficult
language, and occasionally itinerated and
preached among them ; and he had the hap-
piness of seeing, not only an increase of civil-
ization in some of the Indian tribes, but also
of witnessing the influence of the Gospel upon .
the hearts of some of the people. In 1646,
he devoted himself to a mission among the
native tribes, having accomplished the difficult
task of a translation of the Scriptures into the
Mohegan dialect. Two editions of this ver-
sion were afterwads printed ; the first at Cam-
bridge, in New England, in 1661-4, in quarto.
Of this edition. Dr. Cotton Mather states as
two curious facts, that this was the first Bible
ever printed in America, and that the whole of
the translation was written with one pen. The
second edition was published in 1685, in quarto.
Towards this impres«ioa and the mission gene-
328
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
rally, the Hon. Robert Boyle gtive £500.
Eliut was afterwards assisted by other zealous
and able missionaries, among whom John Cot-
ton and the Mayhews, arc worthy of special
notice. The former possessed such skill and
dexterity in the Indian tongue, as to have the
correction and emendation of the second edi-
tion of the Bible committed to him. I'he
family of the Mayhews was eminent for its
missionary spirit. The Rev. Thomas Mayhew
was an excellent evangelist to the neighboring
heathen. In a few years, two hundred and
eighty-two Indians renounced their false gods,
and turned to the Lord. After the death of
tills excellent man, his father, the governor of
Martha's Vineyard, felt so much concern for
the poor Indians, that, seeing no probability
of a regular minister to succeed his son, he
applied himself with great diligence to the at-
tainment of the language, and then preached
to them with acceptance and success. He
continued to labor among them to the age of
ninety-three, and had the pleasure of a pious
grandson associated with him.
Hiacoomes, who afterward became a preacher
of the Gospel, was the first fruits of the mis-
sion. This convert, though opposed and de-
rided by his brethren, manifested so much
boldness and intrepidity in the cause of Christ,
that many were induced to renounce their
former idolatrous practices, and embrace the
Gospel. In 1650, such was the anxiety of a
considerable part of the Indians to hear the
word of life, that Mr. Mayhew, to accommo-
date them, preached weekly at dififerent parts
of the island. About this time, schools were
established among them. In 1674, there were
supposed to be 2 or 3,000 Indians on this and
a neighboring island, of whom, 1,500 were
praying Indians ; 50 were regular church
members.
Soon after this, the number of Indians be-
gan to decrease, so that, in 1792, the whole
number amounted only to about 440. Whilo
the Indians were fast verging toward annilii-
lation, the zeal of the Mayhew family in buing-
ing them to a knowledge of the truth, did not
abate. Five successive generations have beeu
indefatigable laborers on this and the neigh-
boring islands.
Century XVIII. — The eighteenth century
opened by the institution of the Society for the
Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts,
for a particular account of which schj the arti-
cle under that head. The Danish mission to
India was undertaken early in this century, in
coiisefjuence of representations to the king,
Frederick IV., by one of his chaplains. Api)li-
catioii having been made to the professors of
diviuity at Halle, for suitable persons to en-
gage in such a mission, Messrs. Zicgenbalg and
Plutscho were recommended and appointed. In
1705 tliey sailed for Traucjuebar, on the Coro-
maiidol cuiust, and arrived there on the 9th of
July, 1700. These missionaries were followed
by three others, who arrived at the Cape of
Good Hope in 1709. This mission was early
assisted by the English Society for the Propa-
gation of the Gospel, which sent out a print-
ing-press, with the requisite apparatus of type,
&c., and one hundred reams of paper, accom-
panied by Mr. Jonas Finck, a native of Sile-
sia, as a printer. By this means the mission-
aries were enabled to print a number of books
for the use of the Malabar school, which they
had commenced, besides various tracts, but
especially a translation of the Scriptures into
Tamil, begun by B. Zeigenbalg, and completed
by B. Schultze. In 1714, B. Zeigenbalg re-
turned to Europe for a short time, and on that
occasion was honored with an audience by the
king, George I. who took much interest in the
success of the mission. He was also patronized
by the " Society for the Promotion of Chris-
tian Knowledge." The king and the Society
encouraged the Oriental missionary to proceed
in his translation of the Scriptures into the
Tamil tongue, which they designated " the
grand work ;" the former addressing them let-
ters of commendation and encouragement,
signed with his own hand. After the first
missionary Zicgenbalg had finished his course,
he was followed by other learned and pious
men, upwards of fifty in number in the period
of a hundred years — among whom were
Schultze, Joenicke, Gericke, and Swartz, whose
ministry has been continued in succession for
many years ; until the missions became ab-
sorbed in the Indian Missions of the Church
of England. — [See Buchanan's Researches, p.
65 ; and Morrison's Fatliers and Founders,
Vol.1, p. 159.)
In 1714, the King of Denmark established
the Royal College of 3Iissions at Copenhagen,
for the instruction and preparation of mission-
aries. In connection with this college, the
celebrated University of Halle, in Saxony, may
very justly be noticed, not only on account of
its general objects, but more especially from
its having provided the Danish mission with
its first missionaries, and sev^eral others, pro-
foundly learned and most able men. This ex-
traordinary institution was begun by the pious
Dr. Herman Augustas Francke, as an orphan
house, erected by voluntary donations, and
continued increasing in other departments oi
an important nature until it became deserv-
ing of royal patronage, and the designation of
a university. Connected with the institution
are an oriental and theological college, for the
study of eastern languages, and the instruction
of missionary candidates ; a medical school ;
a seminary for catechists ; and an extensive
printing-office, chiefly for the purpose of print-
ing and circulating the Scriptures in dilli'r.'i'l
languages. At one period this university had
more than 3,000 students from dinorent jnirts
of Europe. The Canstein and .Tewish institu-
tion!? are also intimately associati^d with the
other benevolent establishments of Halle. The
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
329
Canstein, or Bible Institution, was established
in 1710 by Charles Hildehrand, Baron de Can-
stein, for the purpose of printing and selling
Bibles and Testaments at a moderate price, in
order to sccui'e a more general circulation of
the Scriptures. In 1805, above three millions
of copies of the entire Bible or Testament had
been distributed. The founder of the Jewish
Institution, formed professedly for the conver-
sion of Jews and Mohammedans, was Dr.
John Henry Callinherg, one of the pupils of
Professor Francke, and afterwards Professor of
Divinity in the University of Halle. One of
his most eminent coadjutors was Mr. Stephen
Scliultz, who was many years engaged in the
East in missionary labors, and returned from
Turkey to Halle in 1756.
In reverting to the Danish missionaries, it
will be satisfactory to learn, from the follow-
ing questions, propounded to their mission-
aries, that their instructions were Scriptural
and sound : " Have you discovered some ti-ue
working of grace in the souls of the catechu-
mens ? Are you sure there is more in their
conversion than a bare external compliance
with, and verbal confession of the Christian
doctrine ? What proofs and indications have
you of an inward work of grace ? " The
venerable Schwartz was one of the missionaries
sent out by the Danish College, though after-
ward supported by the English Society for
Promoting Christian Knowledge, which has
uniformly aided the Danish Missions, by the
entire or partial maintenance of many of its
valuable missionaries.
The Danish mission to Greenland was com-
menced in 1721, by Rev. Hans Egede. This
devoted man had for thirteen years i'elt a desire
to convey the Gospel to that inhospitable
country, and made repeated but ineffectual at-
tempts to carry it into execution. At length
he succeeded in raising a subscription of 8,000
rix dollars, and purchased a ship to convey
himself and several settlers, who proposed to
winter in Greenland. The king sanctioned
and aided the enterprise, and settled upon
Mr. Egede a salary of $300 a year. On
their arrival they proceeded to erect a habita-
tion, much to the displeasure of the natives,
who called on their conjurors to destroy them.
Mr. Egede attempted to convey to the people
a knowledge of the most important facts of
revealed religion by pictures, but the following
year he gained some familiarity with the lan-
guage, and was able to undertake oral instruc-
tion. The arrival of a colleague in the suc-
ceeding year, strengthened his hands, but
though the people listened attentively to what
was told them, they showed no personal inter-
est in his preaching. Some of them, indeed,
seemed pleased with the doctrine of the im-
mortality of the soul, but the impression pro-
duced was faint, and their curiosity soon satis-
fied. In 1728, the King of Denmark resolved
on prosecuting the work with increased ener-
gy, and a large colony, with additional mis-
sionaries, was sent out, and established a new
settlement 200 miles northward of Good Hope,
the station founded by Mr. Egede. But the
severity of the winter and the ravages of a
malignant disease made them discontented,
and the accession of Cliristian VI. to the Dan-
ish throne put an end to the enterprise. The
colonists were ordered home ; Mr. Egede's
salary was stopped ; and he was offered the
alternative of returning with the rest, or re-
maining on his own responsibility, with such
persons as he could induce to stay with him.
He obtained a supply of provisions for one
year, and ten men to remain during the win-
ter, and with a heavy heart bade adieu to
his two colleagues, who returned with the
colony. A vessel arrived the next year with
provisions, and having a valuable return
cargo, the king was encouraged to renew the
trade, and made a generous donation to the
mission. This intelligence gave fresh strength
to the lonely missionary, but his faith was
doomed to a severer trial. A young Green-
lander who had visited Denmark came back,
and shortly after died of a disease that proved
to be the small-pox. The contagion spread
rapidlj', and raged for twelve months with such
fatal effect, that for thirty leagues north of
the settlement, the country was almost wholly
depopttlated. Such was the alarm and con-
sternation of the natives at this visitation,
that many committed suicide. Mr. Egede, in
conjunction with the Moravian missionaries,
who had recently arrived in the country, did
all that untiring benevolence could do to alle-
viate the physical sufferings and comfort the
hearts of the unhappy Greenlanders ; they
were much affected by their kindness, and
manifested the liveliest gratitude. The mis-
sion was reinforced in 1734, by the arrival of
three assistants, one of them a son of Mr.
Egede. The venerable pioneer, regarding the
number as wholly inadequate, returned to Den-
mark. His representations led to the estab-
lishment of several new colonies, and the send-
ing of additional missionaries. But the effi-
ciency and interest of the Danish mission
shortly declined. It had not been wholly in
vain, but its fruits were scanty, and the chief
agency in imparting Christianity to Greenland
was now manifestly committed to the Vnited
Brethren, or Moravians. — [Hist. View of Earlier
3Iissions, by L. E. Smith, p. 31.)
While attending the coronation of Christian
VI., king of Denmark, at Copenhagen, in 1731,
Count Zinzendorf was brought into intercourse
with two Greenlanders, who had been baptized
by Hans Egede, and from them he learned
with regret that the Danish government had
determined on abandoning their mission to
that forlorn race. On the same occasion he
met with a West Indian negro, of the name of
Anthony, who told him that while in the island
of St. Thomas, when sitting alone on the sea-
330
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
shore, he had frequently and earnestly sighed
for a revelation I'rora heaven. By a remarka-
ble providence of God he had been brought to
Coi)enhagen, where he had received instruction
in Christianity, and was baptized. Having
enlarged in a touching manner, on the deplor-
able state of the negro slaves of St. Thomas,
and referred with anguish of heart to the mis-
eries endured by a beloved sister, who, like
himself, had sighed for the light of truth ; he
added that if God were to send teachers to in-
struct the negroes in tbe way of salvation, he
had no doubt that his sister, and many others
similarly affected, would gladlj- embrace Chris-
tianity.
These accounts of the poor Greenlanders,
and of the West Indian slaves, greatly affected
the benevolent mind of Zinzendorf, and on his
return to Herrnhut in July, he communicated
his impressions to the congregation. So pow-
erful was the effect of his narrative that several
of the brethren immediately offered themselves
for missionary service to the West Indies and
Greenland.
'J'his extraordinary band of Christian disci-
ples, the feeble remnant of a once numerous
body, that for a centur}^ and a half, against
powerful enemies, maintained the doctrines of
revealed truth in Bohemia and Poland, found
a refuge from persecution on the estate of
Count Zinzendorf, at Bethelsdorp, in mUppcr
Lusatia. Thousands had been driven into
banishment, and in their scattered condition,
they and their descendants had either been
absorbed into other communions, or had lost in
a great measure the power of that faith which
had been sealed with the blood of so many
martyrs and confessors.
It is now, (October, 1854,) 122 years since
the Moravians entered the great field of mis-
sionary enterprise ; and though their congre-
gation at the lime they commenced their efforts
in 17^2 consisted of little more than six hun-
dred persons, most of them poor and despised
exiles, such was their zeal and disinterestedness
in their Master's service, that in less than nine
years after, they had sent missionaries to Green-
land, to St. Thomas, to St. Croix, to Sririnam,
and to Bcrbkc, to the North American Indians,
to the negroes of South Carolina, to Lapland,
to Tartary, to Guiana, to the Cape of Good
Hope, and to the island of Cei/hm. Thd'J'ucccss-
es lliat crowned these enterprises, thus so hum-
bly begun, will be found narrated in their pro-
per jjjaces in this work.
'J'lie mission at Stockbridge among the Mohc-
can Indians, was commenced in 1734 by the
Rev. John Sergeant, then tutor in Yale College,
lie was succeeded l)y Rev. Mr. U'oodhridge,
at whose death Riv. Jtnmthnn Edwards took
charge of the mission for six years.
In 17."i5 John W'fs/pi/ arrived in Georgia, io
iBiitruct the Indians of that state, where he
remained till ] IVS. 'J'he founder of Metliddism
thus began his career as a foreign missionary.
In 174.3 the devoted David Brainard began
his labors among the Indians under the pat-
ronage of the Scottish Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledge, and after four years of
successful labor he expired in the home of
President Edwards, in Northampton, on the
ninth of October, 1747. The record of his
life by Edwards, held up his career to the ad-
miration of the Christian world ; and it is
interesting to note that the missionary devotion
of William Carey and Henry Martyn, was
nourished, if not kindled, by the contemplation
of his brief but triumphant course. A com-
plete view of Indian missions in North Amer-
ica wotiid not fail to include at least a passing
notice of J)r. Wheeloclc's Seminary for the edu-
cation of Indians and missionaries, founded in
1748, at Lebanon, Ct., and afterwards removed
to Hanover, N. H. ; of the life and usefulness
of Rev. Samson Occiwi, distinguished as an
effective Indian preacher ; of the forty years'
ministry of Kirkland among the Indians of
New York ; of the labors and sufferings of
the Moi-avians ; and of others who did their
part toward the rescue of the aboriginal tribes
from the fate which uniformly overtakes sav-
ages when brought into conflict with civiliza-
tion, unless it is arrested by the conservative
force of Christianity. The proper effect of
these benevolent efforts was greatly impaired
by the vices and rapacity of the European set-
tlers, and by the wars in which European pol-
icy involved the colonies. But that any rem-
nants of the once powerful tribes formerly
inhabiting the country east of the Alleghanies
have been preserved, is to be altributed to the
elevating influences of Christianity, imparted
by those devoted men whose labors have been
reviewed, sustained by active charity in Europe
and America. — (Smith, p. 47 ; Prince's Chris-
tian History, and Brainard's Life, p. 47.)
The ardent zeal of Wesley and Whitefield and
their associates, now began to develop itself.
Their plans of oi)eration both in England and
America, were practically missionarij ; and
contributed in a high degree to restore the
spirit of an evangelical Christianity. To this
fact the grateful testimony of Christians of
various denominations has been willingly ren-
dered, and in the energetic words of ili?-. i)owg-
lass of Cavers, we may remark : " 1'he Wesley-
ans, after Christianizing the abandoned dis-
tricts of England, and encountering tlie rage
of their own savage countrymen, often backed
l»y their own civil or religious guides — the
neighboring magistrate or clergyman — have
carried the same zeal, dexterity and success to
the slaves of the West Indies, more docile than
their ma,«ters ; and to the savages of the re-
molest countries and islands, less infuriated
and dangerous than the rude agricultural ])np-
ulation of England." — (Enrychpcdia Brtttm-
nicn, Article '•Religious Mission.'!." Vol. j\/.^.,
Part I.) N(vdoul)t the.<5e labors for the revi-
val of pure rnigion tended to evoke that spirit
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS.
331
of devotion from which the missionary zeal of
the charches bodied itself forth in the organi-
zations which characterized the close of the
eighteenth and the commencement of the nine-
teenth century.
In 1750, the Rev. Christmn Frederick Swartz
arrived at Tranquebar, and entered upon those
apostolic labors which have linked his name
imperishably with the establishment and pro-
gress of Christianity in India. He had gained
some knowledge of the Tamil while at the
university, to aid in examining the proofs of a
version of the Scriptures in that language, an
incident which is supposed to have suggested
to him the design of devoting himself to mis-
sionary life. On his arrival he pursued his
studies with such ardor and success, that in
four months he commenced preaching. His
labors were indefatigable, in public and in
private, in Tranquebar, Trichinopoly, Tanjore,
and throughout the Carnatic, for the space of
fifty years. His purity, sincerity, and disinter-
estedness won the confidence of all classes, and
those even who rejected his doctrine gave him
the tribute of their unaffected veneration. In
the distracting wars that marked that portion
of the history of British India, his active be-
nevolence was exerted to relieve misery which
he could not prevent, and more than once lie
was sent to negotiate treaties, as the only Eu-
ropean who could be trusted by the natives.
When a garrison was threatened with famine,
and the people could not be induced to furnish
provisions, through fear that the supplies would
be seized without compensation, they accepted
the security of the venerated missionary for
the whole amount needed. He rendered im-
portant services both to the British and to the
native princes, yet scrupulously avoided receiv-
ing any gifts or emoluments that might taint
him with the suspicion of mercenary motives,
and sedulously guarded himself from being in-
volved in any transactions that might impair
his influence as a Christian and a preacher of
the Gospel. With all the humility of a child
and the wisdom of mature experience, the harm-
lessness of the dove and the wisdom of the ser-
pent, he was enabled to testify to the truth in
every place and among all grades of society.
At his death he was mourned as a father, and
the Rajah of Tanjore erected a monument to
his memory, with an inscription which is re-
markable as the only specimen of English
verse attempted by an Indian prince. Swartz
had in his life time acquired considerable pro-
perty, through the kindness of the English
government and the native princes. When
he was dying, he said : " Let the cause of
Christ be my heir." When his colleague, the
pious Gericke, was departing, he also bequeath-
ed his property to the mission. And aflltwards,
another of the missionai-ies, Mr. Kokloff gave,
from his private funds, upwards of a thousand
pagodas a year. — (See Greenfield's Sketches of
the Danish Mission, p. 145.) At the death of
Swartz the native Christians connectea with
the mission were counted by thousands. The
fruit of his toils was gathered rapidly by his
successors. Bishop Heber, writing in 1826,
says, " There are in the south of India about
200 Protestant congregations ; " and he esti-
mated their number at about 15,000. Many
were undoubtedly merely nominal Christians,
as the Lutheran missionaries were much less
exacting in the qualifications they demanded
for admission to the sacraments, than later
missionaries have been ; yet, considering the
purity of their preaching and the devout spirit
in which their labors were conducted, a large
measure of piety must have been the result.
These missions have since come under the pat-
ronage of the London Society for the Propaga-
tion of the Gospel, and the superintendence of
the Anglican Bishop of Calcutta. — {Smith, p.
31.)
In 1769, the English Wesleynn Methodists
began to send forth their missionaries. Eleven
were commissioned for America, whose labors
laid the foundation of the Methodist Episcopal
Church. They next sent missionaries to the
West Indies, and to the East Indies ; but their
missionary operations were not regularly organ-
ized until 1816.
We now approach the commencement of
that period which has, by way of preeminence,
been designated the Missionary Age, when
the various churches of Christ began to wake
up to life and activity on behalf of the heathen
world ; and the isolated efforts of individuals
and churches were succeeded by the great or-
ganized agencies of the present day ; a list of
which, with the time of their organization, we
give in the following table. For a more par-
ticular history of the origin and progress of
these societies and their oiierations, the reader
is referred to other parts of this work. All
the more prominent societies are noticed under
their respective names, in their places in the
alphabet : —
Great Britain.
Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in
Foreign Parts, 1701.
Baptist Missionary Society, 1792.
London Missionary Society, 1795.
Scottish Missionary Society, 1796.
Glasgow Missionary Society, 1796.
Church Missionary Society, 1800.
General Baptist Missionary Society, 1816.
Wesleyau Missionary Society, 1817.
Methodist New Connection Missionary Soci-
ety, 1819.
Foreign Mission Scheme of the Church of
Scotland, 1824.
Primitive Methodist Missionary Society, 1830.
Foreign Mission Scheme of the Presbyterian
Church in Ireland, 1840.
Welsh Foreign Missionary Society, 1842.
Lew-chew Naval Mission, 1843.
332
EARLY CHRISTIAN IHSSIONS.
Foreip^n Mission Scheme of the Free Church
of Scotland, 1843.
Associate Relief Presbyterian Church of Scot-
land, 1843.
Foreign Mission Scheme of the Presbyterian
Church in England, 1844.
Board of Missions of the United Presbytcx-ian
Synod, united in 1 847.
Borneo Church Mission, 184G.
Chinese Society for Furthering the Promulga-
tion of the Gospel in China, and the Adja-
cent Countries, 1850.
Loudon Society for Promoting Christianity
among the Jews, 1808.
British Society for the Propagation of the
Gospel among the Jews, 1841.
Germany.
Missions of the United Bretln-en, 1732.
Society for the Promotion of Evangelical Mis-
sions amoug the Heathen, at Berlin, 1824.
Ehenish Missionary Society, 1828.
North German Missionary Society, 1836.
Evangelical Lutheran Missionary Society, at
Leipsic (formerly at Dresden.) 183G.
Evangelical Union for the Spread of Christi-
anity among the Heathen, (Gossner's) 1836.
Berlin Missionary Union for China, 1850.
Society for the Promotion of Christianity
among the Jevvsat Berlin, 1822.
Union of the Friends of Israel in Bremerlehe
and Vicinity, 1839.
Rhenish-Westplialia Union for Israel, 1843.
Hamburg- Altuna Union for Israel, 1844.
Evangelical Union of the Friends of Israel in
Hesse Casscl, 1845.
Union of the Friends of Israel in Hesse Darm-
stadt, 1845.
Holland.
Netherlands Missionary Society, 1797.
Netherlands Union for cooperating in the
Spread of Christianity among the Jews.
United States.
American Board of Commissioners for Foreign
Missions, 1810.
American Baptist Missionary Union, 1814.
Methodist Missionary Society, 1819.
Free-will Baptist i^'oreign Mission Society,
1833.
Board of Missions of the Protestant Episco-
pal Church, 1835.
Board of Foreign Missions of the Presbyte-
rian Church, 1837.
Foreign Missicmary Society of the Lutheran
Church, 1837.
Seventh-day Baptist Missionary Society, 1842.
American Indian Mission Association, 1842.
Baptist Free Mission Society, 1843.
Board of Foreign Missions of the Associate
Ileformed l'rc«l>yterian Church, 1844.
Board of Foreign Missions of the Southern
Baptist Convention, 1845.
Missionary Sncioty of the Methodist Episcopal
Church South, 1845.
American Missionary Association, 1846.
American and Foreign Christian Union, 1849.
American Society for Meliorating the Condi-
tion of the Jews, 1823.
Switzerland.
Evangelical Missionary Society at Basle, 1816-
Society of the Friends of Israel, at Basle.
France.
Paris Society of Evangelical Missions, 1822.
Union of the Friends of Israel at Strassburg.
Sweden.
Swedish Missionary Society, 1835.
Missionary Society at Lund, 1846.
Norway.
Norwegian Missionary Society, 1842.
British America.
Board of Foreign Missions of the Synod .>f the
Presbyterian Church of Nova Scotia.
As an approximation to an estimate of
what this missionary Christianity has done for
the world during the eighteen centuries wo
have sketched, in establishing the institutions
of the Gospel, and bringing men into that re-
lation to its agencies, from which their enlight-
enment and salvation may spring, — we shall
here insert a quotation from a writer of ac-
knowledged ability. Mr. Turner, in his " His-
tory of the Anglo-Saxons," gives the following
tabular statement, '• as a conjectural, but prob-
able, representation of the progressive increase
of the number of Christians in the world :"'
1st
Cent.
500.000
10th Cent. 50,000,000
2nd
!)
2,000,000
11th
„ 70,000,000
3rd
J(
5,000,000
12th
„ 80,000.000
4th
)>
10,000,000
13th
„ 75,000,000
5th
»
15,000,000
14th
„ 80,000,000
6 th
)»
20,000,000
15th
„ 100,000.000
7th
)>
25,000,000
16th
„ 125,000,000
8th
)>
30,000,000
17th
„ 155.000,000
9 th
40,000,000
18th
„ 200,000,000
— (Fekussac. Bull, Univers. Geog. p. 4, Jan.
1827.)
■' But I think,'" he adds, " in this nmeteenth
century, the real number of the Christian po-
pulation of the world is nearer to three hun-
dred millions, and is visibly nuich increasing,
from the missionary spirit and exertions which
are now distinguishing the chief l'r(.»testaut
nations in the world." — (Vol. III. p. 484, note,
6th edition.)
AVe have thus endeavored to trace the con-
necting links ill that chain of Christian labors
which unites the missionary exertions of the
Ajjostolic Church, down through the evangeli-
cal efforts of subsequent centui-ies, to the com-
mencement of its present glorious development
in ourliwn day ; and have at the same time
glanced at the workings of that all-wise and
gracious Providence, which in every age has
been operating, not only in the religions, but
also in the politics, the art?, the sciences, and
EGYP!E.
333
the literature of our race, to prepare the world
for the full millennial glory of the latter days.
— Condensed from an original article prepared
by Rev. W. Butler.
EAST CAPE : A station of the Church
Missionary Society in New Zealand, in the
beautiful valley of Waiapu, through the centre
of which runs the river of that name.
EBENEZER : A station and a colony of
the Rhenish Missionary Society in South
Africa, at the mouth of the Elephant river.
EBENEZER CHAPEL : A station of the
London Missionary Society in Demerara, W. I.
EDINA : A settlement at the mouth of
the Mechlin river, in Western Africa, formerly
a station of the American Baptist mission.
EGYPT is so well known, and the descrip-
tions of travelers are so generally accessible,
that it is not necessary to the purposes of this
work, to say much of its geography, topogra-
phy, or history. It is bounded on the east by
the Isthmus of Suez and the Red Sea, south
by Nubia, west by Lybia, and north by the
Mediterranean Sea, being about 500 miles in
length, and some parts of it 250 in breadth.
The principal parts of the country are the
Delta, or lower part of Egyj^t, and the narrow
valley of the Nile in the higher parts, which
is bounded on both sides by high hills and
abrupt banks. The mountains on the east of
the Nile extend to the Arabian Gulf, and are
only inhabited by Bedouins. The principal
towns and villages are on the eastern side of
the Nile. The whole area of arable soil has
been estimated at from 10,000 to 16,000
scpiare miles, or equal to nearly half the sur-
face of Ireland.
ITiis country, once the cradle of the arts and
sciences, has been for centuries trodden be-
neath the iron hoof of Moslem and Turkish
despotism. It is now, however, in a kind ot
transition state, in which the feelings, opinions,
and habits of the people are undergoing a
great and rapid change. Fanaticism is every
day becoming less powerful in Egypt ; and
the ancient Asiatic manners and customs arc
fast giving way to the European.
The political revolutions to which Egypt hat
been subject from time immemorial, have
given its population a mixed character. Th(
following estimate of the different races of it^
present population, made by Mr. Lane, is, w(
believe, the most recent :
. 1,750.000
150,0U(.
10,001
500(1
500('
200(
500(
Arab Egyptians .
Christian Egyptians (Copte)
Turks
Syrians .
Greeks
Armenians
Jews
1,927,000
Egypt presents great facilities for the intro-
duction of the Gospel into the north-eastern por-
an efficient mission in Greece, but chiefly de-
voted to educational interests. Their mis-
sions to Eastern Christians, for a time, ab-
sorbed no small share of their means and
efforts; but not being as successful as was
anticipated, they have been withdrawn in the
form in which they were originally undertaken;
but the field, we believe, is not abandoned, the
committee being authorized, whenever they shall
think proper, to resume the work in such form
as they may judge to be wise and expedient.
They had, also, for some time, a mission among
the North American Indians ; but this field
has been transferred to the iDomestic Com-
mittee, and as yet, but little progress has been
made therein.
ERROMANGA : An island of New He-
brides, where is a station of the London Mis-
sionary Society. This is the place where the
lamented Williams was murdered by the na-
tives.
ERZRUM : A station of the American
Board among the Armenians, situated almost
in the centre of ancient Armenia. Popula-
tion 36.000, of whom 10,000 are Armenians.
EUROPE : Area.— 3,816,936 square miles.
(Ungewitter's Europe.) The continent does
not quite equal in superficial contents, the
combined areas of the United States and
Mexico.
Popidation.— 262,300,000 (U.) The propor-
tion is nearly that of seventy persons to a
square mile. The United States and Terri-
tories would contain, if as densely occupied as
Europe, 226,000,000 inhabitants.
Languages. — The principal languages are
thirteen, derived from three great fountains;
the Latin, the Teutonic, and the Sclavonic.
Independent States. — Sixty-three. Of these
eight are Republics ; twenty-two. Empires or
Kingdoms ; eighteen, Duchies ; fifteen, Prin-
cipalities, Electorates, &c. Of these govern-
ments, seventeen are absolute ; forty-six con-
stitutional ; sovereigns, nineteen, of whom nine
are Catholics ; eight, Protestants ; one, Greek
Churchman ; one Mussulman.
The vitality of the Grecian and Roman
form of civilization was already exhausted, at
the opening of the Christian era. The sceptre
was still held in the feeble grasp of the Caesars,
long after all religious faith and national feel-
ing had perished in Rome ; a phenomenon re-
peated, in our day, on that magical soil. An
effete civilization, a corrupt society, and a wild
combination of refinement and barbarism, pre-
sented a rather discouraging field of invasion
to the heaven-descended kingdom of Christ,
yet in the vigor of its youth. Its entrance
into Europe was silent, and almost unnoticed,
in the persons of Jewish converts returning to
their western homes from Jerusalem and the
celebrated feast of Pentecost.
But the first formal invasion of Paganism,
and the first organization of the spiritual king-
dom, in Christian institutions, was made by
33r
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISP^^^^^^^*
Foreign Mission Scheme of tlie Free Church
of Scotland, 1843.
Associate Relief Presbyterian Churcli of Scot-
land, 1843.
Foreign Mission Scheme of the Presbyterian
Church in England, 1844.
Board of Missic-^? of the United Presbyterian
Synod, united in 1 847.
Borneo Church Mission, 184G.
Chinese Society for Furthering the Promulga-
tion of the Gospel in China, and the Adja-
cent Countries, 1850.
Loudon Society for Promoting Christianity
among the Jews, 1808.
British Society for the Propagation of the
Gospel among the Jews, 1841.
Germany.
Missions of the United Brethren, 1732.
Society for the Promotion of Evangelical Mis-
sions among the Heathen, at Berlin, 1824.
Ehcnish Missionary Society, 1828.
North German Missionary Society, 1836.
Evangelical Ijutheran Missionary Society, at
Leipsic (formerly at Dresden.) 1836.
Evangelical Union for the Spread of Christi-
anity among the Heathen, (Gossner's) 1836.
Berlin Missionary Union for China, 1850.
Society for the Promotion of Christianity
among the Jews at Berlin, 1822.
Union of the Friends of Israel in Bremerlehe
and Vicinity, 1839.
Khenish-AVestphalia Union for Israel, 1843.
Hamburg- Altona Union for Israel, 1844.
Evangelical Union of the Friends of Israel in
Ht^se Cassel, 1845.
Union of the Friends of Israel in Hesse Darm-
stadt, 1845.
Holland.
Netlierlands Missionary Society, 1797.
Netherlands Union for cooperating in the
Spread of Christianity among the Jews.
United States.
American Board of Commissioners for Foreign
Missions, 1810.
American Baptist Missionary Union, 1814.
Methodist Missionary Society, 1819.
Free-will Baptist Foreign Mission Society,
1833.
Board of Missions of the Protestant Episco-
pal Church, 1835.
Board of Foreign Missions of the Presbyte-
rian Church, 1837.
Foreign Missionary Society of the Lutheran
Church, 1837.
Seventh-day Baptist Missionary Society, 1842.
American Indian Mission As.sociation, 1842.
Baptist Free Mission Society, 1843.
Board of Foreign Missions of the Associate
Reformed Presbyterir.n Church, 1844.
Board of Foreign Missions of the Southern
P^*jst Convention, 1845.
Mis?"^ i^ ^« Society of the Methodist Episcopal
ChuiV^>.*h, 1845.
Americf^^ • -^° island of the Georgian group
Imeri ^o^th Seas, about 2° west of Tahiti.
^.^j^jg,^EUTHERA : A station of the Wes-
j-j"n Missionary Society in the Bahamas,
ELIM : A station of the United Brethren
in South Africa, on New-Year's river, CO
miles from Genadendal, near Cape Aiguilla.
ELIOT : The first place occupied by the
missionaries of the American Board among
the Choctaw Indians. It is within the limits
of the State of Mississippi; about 120 miles
from the north line of that State, and nearly
equidistant from its eastern and western bor-
ders. It is about 400 miles W. S. W. of the
Brainerd station, in the Cherokee nation.
Messrs. Kingsbury and Williams commenced
their labors there in June, 1818.
EMMAUS : A station of the United Bre-
thren, in St. Thomas, W. I.
ENGK ATOO : A village near Maulmain,
in Burmah, and an out>-station of the Maul-
main Baptist mission.
ENON : A station of the United Brethren
in South Africa, on the White river, near
Algoa Bay.
EPISCOPAL BOARD OF MISSIONS :
The Domestic and Foreign Missionary Society
of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the
United States, was organized by the General
Convention, in 1820. By the constitution, the
meetings of the Society Avere to be held at
the tinie and place of the Triennial General
Convention. The business of the Society was
conducted by a Board, of which the bishoi^s
of the Church and patrons of the Society
were members ex-officio, and the remainder
were chosen at each regular meeting of the
Society. The seat of operations was Phila-
d(;lphia, and there were auxiliary societies in
almost every state in the L^uion. Under this
organization, the society went on prosperously
for fifteen years.
At the meeting of the General Convention,
.in 1835, an entire change was made in the
Board, the Clmrch undertaking, in her char-
acter as a Church, to carry on the work of
(Christian Missions. At each meeting of the
pjonveution, a Board of 30 members is elected,
(ire which the bishops and the patrons who be-
fi-oine such prior to 1829, are ex-officio mem-
are "!. called " The Board of 3Jissions of the Pro-
iiati "^ Episcopal Church in the United States of
fjth tfica." Tins board appoints, not necessarily
\\not usually, from its own number, two com-
necti'^cs, of eight ni|pibers each, four clergymen
whicfour laymen, exclusive of a secretary and
Apisurer for each, and of which the bishop of
(■.«) diocese of New York is ex-officio chairman,
,one to direct the Foreign, and the other the
^Domestic Missions. As thus organized, tho
society embraces as members, all the members
of the Episcopal Church.
The constitution provides that " no clergy-
iman shall be appointed a missionary by the
ERROMAI^GA— EUROPE.
335
Board, or by either of the committees, without
the recommendation of the ecclesiastical au-
thority of the diocese to which he belongs ;
nor shall any missionary be sent to officiate
in any diocese without the consent of the ec-
clesiastical authority of the same ; and no
clergyman shall be appointed a missionary,
who is not at the time a minister of the Pro-
testant Episcopal Church, of regular standing ;
and the appointment of a missionary may be
annulled at any time by the written direction
or order of a majority of the bishops of the
Church."
TABULAR
VIEW
M
"o
^^
^
O
r3
'O
a
o
m
-kS
^
V
7"
u
•d
rt
m
MISSIONS.
a
a
6
CO
o
c
0
J5
a
a
'a
3
a
S
z
11
c
11
'A
a
-<
11
4
1
1
3
1
3
(2
ti
Africa West..
1884
213
10,000
32
China
1835
1
3
1
7
2
8
2U0
24
Greece
1830
1
13
1
15
1
20
6
8
-
-
Totals ....
413
10,000
56
The following table shows the aggregate re-
ceipts of both the Foreign and Domestic Com-
mittees, from their organization to the change
in the constitution in 1835, and, since that
time, of every year, with the grand totals.
Years.
Domestic.
Foreign.
1820 to 1835
$70,338
$50,683
1836
18,783
18,050
1837
• 31,563
26,012
1838
25,566
27,194
1839
29,660
26,347
1840
19,609
23.853
1841
28,317
22,918
1842
27,517
29,279
1843
35.913
33,746
1844
27,899
31,032
1845
28,870
38,514
1846
36,444
34,127
1847
23,300
30,691
1848
28,635
40,019
1849
27,263
41,453
1850
36,194
34,800
1851
34,302
37,702
1852
30,395
41,048
1853
23,856
42,050
Totals,
^590,424
$629,968
The Board now have missions in Western
Africa and China, which they are prosecuting
vigorously and successfully. ' They have, also.
an efficient mission in Greece, but chiefly de-
voted to educational interests. Their mis-
sions to Eastern Christians, for a time, ab-
sorbed no small share of their means and
efforts; but not being as successful as was
anticipated, they have been withdrawn in the
form in which they were originally undertaken;
but the field, we believe, is not abandoned, the
committee being authorized, whenever they shall
think proper, to resume the work in such form
as they may judge to be wise and expedient.
They had, also, for some time, a mission among
the North American Indians ; but this field
has been transferred to the Domestic Com-
mittee, and as yet, but little progress has been
made therein.
ERROMANGA : An island of New He-
brides, where is a station of the London Mis-
sionary Society. This is the place where the
lamented Williams was murdered by the na-
tives.
ERZRUM : A station of the American
Board among the Armenians, situated almost
in the centre of ancient Armenia. Popula-
tion 36.000, of whom 10,000 are Armenians.
EUROPE : J/-ca.— 3,816,936 square miles.
(Ungewitter's Europe.) The continent does
not quite equal in superficial contents, the
combined areas of the United States and
Mexico.
Po/)u/a«;bn.— 262,300,000 (U.) The propor-
tion is nearly that of seventy persons to a
square mile. The United States and Terri-
tories would contain, if as densely occupied as
Europe, 226,000,000 inhabitants.
Languages. — The principal languages are
thirteen, derived from three great fountains ;
the Latin, the Teutonic, and the Sclavonic.
Independent States. — Sixty-three. Of these
eight are Republics ; twenty-two. Empires or
Kingdoms ; eighteen, Duchies ; fifteen, Prin-
cipalities, Electorates, &c. Of these govern-
ments, seventeen are absolute ; forty-six con-
stitutional ; sovereigns, nineteen, of whom nine
are Catholics ; eight, Protestants ; one, Greek
Churchman ; one Mussulman.
The vitality of the Grecian and Roman
form of civilization was already exhausted, at
the opening of the Christian era. The sceptre
was still held in the feeble grasp of the Caesars,
long after all religious faith and national feel-
ing had perished in Rome ; a phenomenon re-
peated, in our day, on that magical soil. An
effete civilization, a corrupt society, and a wild
combination of refinement and barbarism, pre-
sented a rather discouraging field of invasion
to the heaven-descended kingdom of Christ,
yet in the vigor of its youth. Its entrance
into Europe was silent, and almost unnoticed,
in the persons of Jewish converts returning to
their western homes from Jerusalem and the
celebrated feast of Pentecost.
But the first formal invasion of Paganism,
and the first organization of the spiritual king-
dom, in Christian institutions, was made by
336
EUROFK
the Apostle Paul, about a. d. 51, at Philippi,
a provincial Eoman city in Macedon. Amid
weariness, -watchings, fastings, stonings,
scourgings, imprisonments, and martj'rdoms ;
amid the fiercest opposition of philosophers,
priests, and magistrates ; with all the powers
of Judaism and Paganism, arrayed against a
few feeble soldiers of Christ, was his kingdom
established in Europe.
Paganism as a religious system, was then so
completely routed from the field, that, at this
day there are left only a few thousand wander-
ing tribes, and a few savages in Southern
Russia and the northern regions, to profess
its principles. But, as we shall see, history
confirming and illustrating the language of
prophecy, presents to our view " the deadly
wound of the beast healed, and all the world
wondering after the beast." The organic body of
paganism was killed. The spirit of it went
out, seeking rest, but found it not ; and re-
turned, finding the Roman empire and society,
" empty, swept, and garnished " by Chris-
tianity ; and entering into it, brought " seven
other spirits worse than the first." But at pre-
sent we only notice the fact that paganism, as
an institution, was almost demolished. Judaism,
too, fell before the victorious arms of the
church. So that though it has thousands of
votaries, it retains no fortress, but every where,
simply craves permission to exist, and to traffic.
Mohammedanism, in the 8th century, was
master of Spain ; and in the loth century, when
it lost Iberia, it ascended the Byzantine
throne, which it still feebly retains. But this
false religion need scarcely be mentioned when
we are enumerating the forces actively con-
tending against Christ. Having no mission-
aries, and having long since laid aside the
policy of propagating its faith by the sword,
it now chiefiy interests us as one of the for-
tresses in which Satan defends his subjects
against the weapons of Christ. The Greek
and Armenian churches may be regarded in
the same light, unless the present measures
and war policy of the Czar must be considered
as a form of missionary enterprise.
Among the victories of the early mission-
aries, must be enumerated the questionable
conversion of Constantine, probably the most
costly triumph Christianity ever made, as it
immediately brought about .the reconciliation
of piety with woridliness, and of the Christian
name with the Pagan spirit, the desecration
of the Gospel to be merely an arm of the civil
power. From that period the fatal re-action,
which had before manifested itself at the ex-
tremities, reachoil the heart. Paganism re-
vived under Christian names and forms ; and
Satan turned the very arms and armies of
Ciiristianity against Christ. And to this day,
nearly tln-ce-lburths of the inhabitants of Eu-
rope still worsliip pugan gods in pagan temples,
with ])agan rites, iuid pagan festivals, all of
them bearing Christian titles. The war cry
of this occidental paganism is now, Christ and
the Church ; while it has abated in no degree
its original hostility to both.
I. Religious Classification of tue Peo-
ple OF Europe. — The great apostasy from
truth and from spiritual worship, which began
to manifest itself openly as Christianity "be-
came popular, was subjected to many modify-
ing influences, political intrigues, military ad-
ventures ; and the curious tides of immigration
resulted in producing those distinctive phases
of religious sentiment and ecclesiastical organ-
ization, which now characterize respectively
the three principal divisions of the European
family. The Sclavonic tribes, taking posses-
sion of north-eastern and eastern p]urope,
assimilated with the Greek Church. The Ro-
manic races, occupying southern Europe, never
really abandoned the distinguishing spirit of
the_ old empire; a spirit of gross super-
stition, servile subjection to authority ; conso-
lidated social organization under rigid law ;
and the ambition of universal dominion.
They still retain all the spirit of pagan hos-
tility to Christ, unchanged. They uphold the
anti-Christian power prominently portrayed in
prophecy: the beast, to whom Satan gives
energy to make war on the saints. Protes-
tantism has been engrafted on the old trunk
of the Germanic race ; a people controlled by
the sj)irit of personal independence, and of
loyal and intelligent submission to rulers chosen
by the ruled. With them originated the re-
formation in the 16th century, which made a
radical change in the intellectual, social, and
religious condition of the entire middle and
north-western sections of the continent. And
in fact, it had, at one period, thoroughly pene-
trated Italy, France, Belgium, Austria, and
Poland. But, by dragoons and Jesuits, by
massacres and banishments, those states were
restored to the Roman pontiff. So that the
present i-eligious condition of Europe may be
thus roughly sketched in numbers : ,
A. The Uncvangelical Sects. — Roman Ca-
tholic, 133,000,000, (U.) Jews, 3,000,000, (U.)
* Greek Church, 59,000,000, (U.) Pagans,
750,000, t Mohammedans, 7,000,000 (U.) other
sects, 1,000,000 ; inhabiting the several states
thus : Roman Catholics and Jews, every state
of Europe ; Greek Christians, Greece, Ionian
Isles, Russia, Turkey, Austria ; Mohammedans,
Turkey and Austria ; Pagans, Russia.
B. The Evangelical Sects. — They are
computed to embrace about 58,750,000 per-
sons, X whom we may conjecturally state to be
thus apportioned to the several denomina-
tions : Episcopalians, 13,000,000; Independents,
3,980,000 ; Methodists, 4,000,000; Presbyteri-
* Baird's Retrospect, p. 190.
t A writer in the Boston Courier, (April, 1864,) asserts
that the professors of tlie Byzantine creed are not only a
majority in Free Greece, but also half the population of
Austria, Scrvia, &c. ; and two-thirds of the popuUUion of
Turkey.
J Baird's R-jtrospcct, p. 106.
EUROPE.
337
ans, 6,973,000; Baptists, 1,912,000; Moravians,
45,000 ; Lutheran, German Reformed, and
United Churches, 28,840,000. The Episcopa-
lians reside chiefly in Great Britain, Ireland,
Guernsey, Jersey, Gibraltar, and Malta. Yet
so many of them are constantly abroad ; and
the national feeling of the English is so iden-
tified with their religious sentiments, that they
have chapels in most of the great cities of the
Continent. The Presbyterians are found in
Ireland, Scotland, England, Holland, France,
Switzerland, and Piedmont. The Lutherans
inhabit Denmark, Sweden, Norway, Germany,
and Prance chiefly. The German Reformed
are mostly in Germany. The Baptists are in
Great Britain and Ireland, and a few" on the
Continent. The Independents or Congrega-
tionalists, are in Great Britain, Ireland, France,
and Russia. The Moravians are found in
England, Ireland, Lusatia, Silesia, tJosna, &c.
Separate organiza-tion is not so much their
aim, as quickening existing churches.
The distinctions of doctrine, government,
and rites, which separate the evangelical
churches of Europe into different denomina-
tions, are so generally known, as to need no
explanation here. Perhaps the division of
the German churches is less understood in this
country. It may therefore be remarked that
the difference between Luther and Calvin, as
men and Christians, has extensively perpetuated
itself in the Continental churches. This
difference has been thus expressed by Herzog
and Lange, (as quoted by Professor Smith,
Christian Review, xvr. 596,) " while it was
the special office of Lutheranism to protest
against all Judaism in the Church, it has been
the special office of the Reformed Church to
protest against all Paganism." " The Catholic
Church is the church of priests ; the Lutheran
of theologians ; and the Reformed Church is
the church of the believing congregation.
The first talks most of the church ; the second,
of the speculative aspects of religion ; the
Reformed Church dwells most fondly upon the
plan of Redemption." Calvin had a clearer
intellect, and a purer logic than Luther ; less
superstition as a catholic, and a less preponder-
ating imagination. Hence the Reformed Church
has swept away more of the rubbish of popery,
and come to a greater degree of simplicity in
ecclesiastical organization ; while it has, at
the same time, cast away the vague concep-
tions of the Eucharist, which make the twi-
light where Romanism most effectually does
its work of proselyting. They differ, then, in
origin, the one being German, the otherFrench ;
in doctrinal bias, the one tending to Armini-
anism, the other being purely Calvinistic ;
in government, the one being episcopal, the
other Presbyterian. They have now been
amalgamated in some states, as Prussia, Baden,
&c. It was, however, a forced union, ab extra,
not voluntary, and so not vital. And yet it
was working well in Prussia ; too well, indeed,
22
to meet the government's desire for a firmer
attachment to dogmas and distinctive stand-
ards ; as ensuring a more legal and less demo-
cratic spirit than the fervent union of real
believers.
II. Estimate of the SpiRrruAL condition
OP PjUeope. — God alone knows the heart ; and
man is, at best, an imperfect judge of his own,
much more of his brother's spiritual state
before the Omniscient eye. And while an in-
accurate judgment is worse than useless, an
arrogant judging of man is hurtful to him who
practices it. A judgment is arrogant, either
when it is volunteered for a selfish end, or
when it is formed without adequate light, and
a conscientious care. But on the other hand
it is very important for us, both to judge the
religious systems under which our fellow men
are passing their brief probation, and also to
form a general estimate of their spiritual con-
dition, as individuals and as bodies. We
must therefore in justice say, that we experi-
ence more sadness than joy, in counting the
numbers in the evangelical ranks in Europe.
We fear, and for the most cogent reasons,
that the vast majority of them are in the con-
dition of the church of Sardis : having a name
to live, they are dead. And with every true
believer, such a conviction will incite to
prayer for the Spirit of life to come down and
breathe on the " valley of drv bones." We
shall now refer to some indications of the
present spiritual condition of the European
churches : —
1. The condition of the Clergy. — The intellec-
tual cultivation of the evangelical clergymen
is generally of the highest order. And there
is extensively a return to the more direct study
of the Bible itself, which has always distin-
guished the ministry in the best ages of the
church. Fifty years ago there was left a small
remnant of godly men in the European minis-
try ; but great changes have taken place in
England, Scotland, Germany, France, and
Switzerland, within that period. In 1815
there was probably not one spiritual, faithful
preacher of Christ's Gospef in the Protestant
Church of France — now there are nearly 300.
In England the clergymen of the established
church were generally far from possessing the
spirit of their office ; now there are thousands
of godly, earnest men in the ministry of that
church. The same might be said of the kirk
of Scotland, and particularly of that largo
body called the Free Church. Even the Inde-
pendents in Great Britain, thirty years ago,
had fallen far below the type of Owen, Baxter,
and Howe. The change in that body of min-
isters is very cheering. The same may be
said of the German clergy, who had sunk deep
into the abominations of neology. About
half the Protestant clergy in Germany are
evangelical in opinion and feeling, the rest
embrace every shade of opinion — moderate rar
tionalism, deism, pantheism, &c. The evan-
338
EUROPE.
gelical clergy surpass in learning the clergy of
any other nation. They are generally devout
men. The pulpit is disproportionately ivcak
when compared with the chairs of theological
science. The number of firstrate exegetes,
historia.ns, theologians, is very great, iu jjro-
portion to the number of effective preachers.
There is too much reflection and too little
action.
2. Estimate of the Sabbath. — It is essential to
the spiritual prosperity of the church, that she
recognize two features of this institution : its
divine authority and its entirely spiritual charac-
ter. But the general declension of the European
churches has sadly manifested itself in this di-
rection. Yet it is cheering to witness the
many signs of a healthful sentiment reappear-
ing. Among other indications of this we may
notice the following facts. The Evangelical
Alliance has called the attention of the con-
tinental churches to this subject. At Metz,
Amiens, Agen, and Lille, in France, industrial
men and members of liberal professions have
engaged, by regular contracts, to abstain from
all work and commercial operations on Sun-
day. A central council lor ]iromotiug the
voluntary observance of the S&bbath has been
formed in Paris. And the King of Pnissia
has issued military orders requiring his army
to observe it as sacred time. The labors of
our brethren in the British parliament are fii-
miliarly known. They have led, as is always
the case with any important subject brought
before that practical body of men, to a
thorough investigation of facts, as to the
amount of outward desecration of the Divine
institution. The result is, an accumulation of
powerful testimony in favor of at least so much
legislation aa shall throw the influence of the
government o« the side of the Sabbath. In
Protestant Germany, however, the Sabbath is
a religious and social holiday. The people
follow the reformers in their loose estimate of
the Sabbath, and know nothing of the advan-
tages of a Puritan Sunday. The continental
reformers never reached the light attained by
those of Scotland a*lid P^ngland. In Switzer-
land the infidel party, ascendant in the govern-
ment, have labored to put the Sabbath where
the leaders of the revolution iu France placed
it, in the height of their frenzy.
3. Relifrious Reading is another test of ad-
vancing or declining piety. In this light the
vast circulation of books by the British,
French, and other tract societies is very full of
promise. 'J'hc British, French, and German
presses are pouring forth continually a stream
of religious truth surpassing the productions
of any preceding age. llcligious devotional
books are said, by an inti'lligent observer, to
be more read in Germany than in any other
couutrv.
4. luimtly Worship.— With Christians in
America the neglcc-t of ut lea.st daily domestic
worship ia regarded us iucousisteut with the
healthy condition of a church ; and yet, out of
the small circle of the evangelical churches of
Switzerland and France, Holland and Swe-
den, there is evidence of a very general want ot
family worship among the evangelical churches
of the continent.
5. Discipliiu is another pillar of a true
church, extending its cognizance of church-
members to the following points : moral-
ity ; soundness of belief; outward fellowship ;
and habitual attendance on ordinances. We
know not an established church in which such
a thing as discipline, in the Puritan sense, is
recognized.
6. Social Religious Meeting are an efficient
means of promoting piety. But these are gen-
erally discountenanced in the established
churches, though not universally neglected.
The dissenters, and the most evangelical mem-
bers of the established churches generally de-
light in adding to the more general and for-
mal, the more social and simple exercises of
prayer-meetings and conferences.
1. Revivals and Conversions. — We do not in-
sist upon one specific form of manifesting the
work of the Holy Spirit in the human heart.
Men must, however, be converted ; and if we
are to judge from the entire course of the
Church's history, conversions will be some-
times solitary, and at others, in great numbers
at a time. But it is certain that the superna-
tural operations of the regenerating Spirit are
so much modified in their manifestations by
the outward influences which affect their sub-
jects, that it is difficult to judge the degree of
spiritual influences a people enjoy, except by
the more uniform and universal tests of their
living " soberly, righteously, and godly." Yet
there are many social movements in European
churches, resembling the phenomena known
among us as revivals of religion. In France,
Sweden, Norway, and many parts of Germany,
they have appeared, especially in France, un-
der the labors of faithful evangelists and col-
porteurs, and particularly in connection with
the meetings of the Evangelical Alliance.
8. Religions Education is also intimately
connected with the existence and advancement
of true godliness among a people. By no
people has more fidelity been manifested in
the religious education of families and in pub-
lic religious instruction, than by the Scotch.
The pious and patriotic exertions of Knox to
secure a common religious instruction for the
children of his countrymen, have produced re-
sults of immeasurable value to that people, in
the formation of personal character, and con-
sequently in their national history. 'I'lie re-
cent struggles of the dissenters in (ireat Britaiu
to prevent the monopoly of religious education
in public schools by the Church of England,
have led the dis.sonters to more vigorous exer-
tions to provide such education for the jioor,
under their own direction. The Congregation-
alists have commenced not only their own col-
EUROPE.
339
leges, but what we should call a normal
school, or a school for training religious teach-
ers of public schools. It is called the Homer-
ton College, in which were recently 21 male
and 28 female pupils. The necessities of the
case have driven the governments of Europe,
for centuries, to provide for the poor orphans
within their domiuious. And private philan-
thropy has done much in this respect. lu the
seventeenth century, Francke instituted at
Halle his celebrated orphan-house, which has
trained nearly 5000 children under the influ-
ence of the Gospel. It has grown into an im-
portant institution, having several branches,
among which is the Oanstein press, that has
already issued two million Bibles, and one mil-
lion New Testaments, at a low price. There
are in London 150 ragged schools, which are
accomplishing a work of immeasurable im-
portance for the long neglected pauper
children of the metropolis. In Horn, near
Hamburg, is a very interesting institution
for reforming depraved children. It refuses to
bring together more than one hundred. The
Evangelical Society of France has a valuable
school in the city of Paris, for educating the
children of Roman Catholic parents, which
has been crowned with great success. Sunday
schools originated in England, and are gradu-
ally introduced in France, Sweden, Denmark,
and other portions of the Continent.
9. Christian Union is another sign of the
Church's spiritual state. The divisions of the
church are a sign of weakness. They awaken
zeal, indeed ; but its strength is the convulsive
action of disease, not the vigorous movement
of health. And Rome has obtained an ad-
vantage by presenting the false appearance of
unity in contrast with this manifest diversity,
and often even animosity of the different
branches of the evangelical church. But we
may notice many indications of a brighter day
approaching. Among these we place, first,
the organization of the Evangelical Alliance.
All the friends of Christian Union are not
yet convinced of its value. It must, in fact,
be admitted that in England, where it origi-
nated, there was an outward pressure, which
might as fully account for the movement as
the simple attraction of brotherly love. In
France, however, it appears to exist in a purer
spirit ; yet it must be said for the British Al-
liance, that it has nobly carried out the spirit
of brotherly love in its valuable efforts to
liberate the Madiai, and to defend the Baptists
in Prussia. It is slowly gaining favor in Hol-
land, Sweden, and Germany. In the latter
country there are two institutions already ex-
isting, which, to some extent, embody the same
principles— the Kirchen-Tag and the Gusta-
vus Adolphus Society. The first of these
grew out of the movement in London, and is
promoting brotherly love in the German
churclies. Having to contend with a very
high church feeling in the Lutheran clergy, it
IS not yet prepared for an affirmation of un-
qualified religious liberty as the normal state
of man and churches. It is engaged in dis-
tributing Bibles and tracts, and at its last
meeting thoroughly discussed the questions of
Union, Schism, and Separation. In all such
discussions we may hope that truth and char-
ity will gain ground. The Gustavus Adolphus
Society was formed in 1832, on the second
centenary of the Protestant hero's death from
whom it was named. It was organized •' to
afford assistance to the dispersed and scattered
members of the Protestant Church, especially
to any who may suffer oppression ; to supply
their spiritual wants, and to aid in the erection
of chapels, in which the evangelical doctrines
may be preached." At first it was not dis-
criminating in the selection of its objects;
but now stands on the Word of God as its
platform. Among other good deeds, it has
saved from utter extinction a church of 1900
members at Santomysl, .by reconstructing its
ruined church edifice. It expended last "year
more than $30,000, mostly on churches suffer-
ing from Romanist oppression. And not
least among the signs of Christian union is
the growth of Young Men's Christian Associ-
ations, which are entirely catholic in their
character, and are now increasing in number
in different states of Europe.
10. Tli£ Missionary Labors of the Church.
Here we see one of the brightest spots in the
horizon, the harbinger of a new day for Europe
and the world. When we consider what has
been done in Europe and by European Chris-
tians since the days of the Countess of Hun-
tington and the Wesleys, to spread abroad
Bibles, religious tracts, and missionaries, we
feel assured that so much seed sown in so
much faith and prayer, must be growing, now
in the unnoticed blade, soon to show the ear,
and the full corn in the ear. Other portions
of this Cyclopedia will show what the Euro-
pean churches are doing in the great field of
Paganism. We shall here merely exhibit a
sketch of the missions conducted on their own
territory, and a table of their foreign opera-
tions. The Gustavus Adolphus Society, al-
ready referred to, is a Home Mission Society.
They have turned their attention recently to
the wretched condition of their countrymen in
the different capitals of Europe. In London
are 25,000 German Protestants, of whom not
1000 attend worship. In Paris 60,000 Ger-
mans are found, exceedingly degraded, for the
most part, having only 5 churches and 7 preach-
ers. In Lyons there are 12,000. They re-
solved, at their recent meeting in Berlin, to
collect information concerning the spiritual
condition of their expatriated countrymen, and
report to the several states, requesting that
measures might be taken to discourage emi-
gration, and to provide churches and "schools
for those who are deprived of them. Besides
this institution, the German churches have
340
EUROPE.
organiaed the Inner or Home Missionary So-
ciety. The Episcopal and the dissenting
churches of Britain have organized very effi-
cient societies to labor in Ireland. To those
Irish mission ehurches alone which are sus-
tained by the Congregational Society of Eng-
land, more than 400 members were admitted
last year. Its labors extend to nearly half a
million of people, aV it has 13,000 children in
its Sunday-schoois.
The following table presents an approxima-
tiv^e view of the contributions of the i^uropean
evangelical churches to the missionary work ;
and yet it is far from being complete.
MEANS AND MEN OF THE EUROPEAN EVANGELICAL MISSIONARY SOCIETIES.
sGciErrubB.
Years.
Contributed
in one year.
Aggregate in
Years.
a
1
a
1^
g
>
"A
a
S
a
8
§
eg
M
O
w
s
3
1853
1850
1853
1S53C
1850
1852
1847
1849
1851
1849
(1
1850
1852
1853
1853
1854
1853
$302,000 a
620,000
444,700
129,610
1,083,300
574,430
21,900
8,750
128,625
249,975
162,237
345,120/
25,630
54,000
53,540
25,600
10,100
26,150
16,110
5,634
130,420
7,000
56,700
37,000j
2,510,700
157,000
180,000
18,360
26,240
$9,405,000
10,730,645
7,408,530
2,636,305
17,789,468
38
54
84
61
50 rf
171
138
4916
64
427
507 e
50
133
289 e
10
22
95
200h
1,000 /c
18
650
1,634
334
4
188
81
16,000
15,306
5,138
1,400
1,185
460
30,000
25,710
4,390
350
1,035
•otI
6,000
70,000(;
12,500
5,615
Socifity for Propagation of Gospel. . .
British and Foreign Bible Society. . .
$47,969,948.
(aggregate of re-
ceipts of five
societies.)
London Moravian Association
Soc. for Promotion of Cbr. Know!..
London Religious Tract Society
Francke Evangelical Mission
Irish Evangelical Society
Colonial Mission (Congregational)...
Central Society (Paris)
Evangelical Contin. Soc. (London)..
City Mis^ions in London (two)
English Monthly Tract Society i
Home Mission (Congregational)
Geneya EvangeLcal Society
Total
$7,481,361
n
n
a About $35j000 in addition were contributed by the mission churches.
b Colonial Missionaries. c Report for 1853, in "News of the Clmrches."
d Issued from beginning, 26,571,103 Bibles, in 150 languages or dialects. Other societies on the continent haye dis-
tributed 2,937,273 copies,
e Laborers of all kinds.
/ Has issued from beginning 547,807,184 publications, in 110 languagefl.
g See United Brdhren. h More than 2,000 visitors,
t To send tracts by mail to the higher classes. 204,000 tracts Issued in 1853
j Supported 288 churches. k Agents in Catholic districts of Ireland.
I Teachers. m Theological School. n Supposed 4,000 laborers in pagan field.
All intelligent observers agree in affirming
that the Roman Catholic and Greek churches
present a spectacle of the most revolting for-
malism and hypocrisy on the one side, and
Bupcr.-ilitioii, tcnially di.sgusting, on the other.
The absurd credulity of the people, and the
vilhiiiiy of the priesthood, who palm upon them
not only lying legends of tlie jnist, but present
miraclia, cliaracterizes even the most highly
cultivated Cutiiolic people. High dignitaries
in the church give their sanction to these false-
hoods ; and even the Pope shows his favor to
the monarch of a mighty nation, by sending
him a tooth or tlic toe of a saint! Material-
ism in the lower stratum of society ; absorp-
tion in money-making, in the middle stratum ;
and sheer scepticism, in the upper class, gives
the portrait of every Catholic country.
The interesting inquiry here meets us : Is
the present tendency of Europe toward Pro-
testantism, Atheism, or Popery? So far as
England is concerned, we may speak with con-
fidence. IWrn the astute Wiseman was de-
ceived bv the tractarian movement. The 0.x-
ford apostasy and the tendency Romeward
have probably reached their climax. And it
is now manifest to all that the Cardinal has
unmasked iiis battery prematurely. The Pro-
testant spirit of P^ngland has been outraged,
and will probably not slumber again speedily.
EUROPE.
341
The London Times asserts that, from 1780 to
1853, the Papists have . increased only from
70,000 to somewhat less than 200,000. In Scot-
land the increase has been much greater ; but in
Germany, as in England, the semi-Roman de-
velopment has only the more efiectually arous-
ed the Protestant spirit. And we have varied
and accumulating testimony to the falling away
of thousands from the Roman church, besides
a vast growth of Protestant populations in
Catholic towns and districts on the continent.
Cobleutz, for example, had, in 1824, 23 fami-
lies or CO persons in the evangelical church.
Now there are about 4000. Mayence, 50 years
ago, had 60 members ; now more than 6000.
Cologne in the same time has advanced from
1000 to nearly 10,000. In Ireland the change
has been very great ; though the number of
conversions is variously estimated. In West
Galway ten years ago there were but 500
Protestants ; there are now more than 5000.
Rev. W. Marable says that within two years,
30,000 have been converted to the evangelical
faith. In the diocese of Tuam, out of about
20,000 Protestants, nearly bOOO v^ere born
papists. At the beginning of the present cen-
tury the King of Bavaria married a Protestant
princess, who brought a Protestant chaplain
to her court. But he could not find a person
in Munich who would consent to rent him a
house. He was the first avowed Protestant
settling there. Now there are 12,000 Protes-
tants in the city ; mostly however, immigrants.
In France and Italy we have growing evidence
of changes of conviction, which are abiding
their time, but which must, ere long, be openly
manifested.
The Ultraraontanists in France now dare to
unmask their policy ; and are misinterpreting
the silence of the nation at the avowal of their
monstrous notions and pretensions. They are
certainly completing the alienation of the
French heart from the Roman church. After
the events of 1830, honest men looked to the
priests as the only defence against socialism.
But the conviction is steadily growing, that
Rome is the enemy of a rational freedom. The
people are beginning to make that comparison
which is so fatal to Rome, between the influ-
ence of Romanism and Protestantism respect-
ively, on human society. Protestant England,
they see, advancing ; but gradually, healthfully,
peacefully adopting various improvements in
her government, while within sixty years Cath-
olic France, with violence and blood, has pass-
ed successively from monarchy to republic ;
from that to the consulship ; then, to the em-
pire ; then to legitimist monarchy ; then to
constitutional monarchy ; then to the republic ;
then to absolute monarchy again ; and she is
resting there only to recover breath for another
somerset. Even Catholic writers, as for in-
stance, Eugene Pelletan and Michel Chevalier,
(Profession defoi du XIXe Steele, 1 vol. 8vo. —
Journal des Bebats, 17 Juin, 1853,) have con-
fessed that Protestant, or at least, uon-Catholio
nations alone are advancing in all respects ; and
that they are moving on to the conquest of
the world, whilst Catholic nations are gradually
dropping from their hands the sceptre of pow-
er and influence.
Within twenty years, the Protestant pastors
of the French national church have increased
from 250 to 500 ; and all other Protestant in-
terests have been advancing in the same ratio.
Atheism has made some progress in Great
Britain, in connection with the movements
toward social reformation. But these indica-
tions have drawn forth corresponding efforts
on the part of Christians, which are attended
with very encouraging results. The change
in the tone of some leading journals indicates
a favorable change among the educated classes.
In Germany there is a manifest reaction among
the clergy. The cold and barren regions of
atheistical speculation are not as popular as
they were a few years ago. Believing men
are adopting a bolder policy ; and in fact, en-
tertaining less respect than formerly for ration-
alistic theories.
In Prussia there have been some manifestar
tions of favor to Popery in high places. And
this has certainly led to a formidable increase
of Roman priests and churches in that king-
dom. But the people have at length become
so sensitive on the subject, that the king will
probably act hereafter with more reserve in
this direction, and pay more regard to the
wishes of his Protestant subjects than to the
feelings of his Catholic wife.
It is then diflScult to give a well founded
reply to the inquiry whether the European
people are tending most to Protestantism or
to Popery. The Catholics appear to be san-
guine. You may find recorded in the Dublin
Registry the very names of their converts from
the Protestant ranks, with special stress laid
upon the rank of the pervert or the standing
of his father. Thus they give the statistics of
conversions in England, (1845-1852.) "Clergy
142. Ladies, 76. Their children, 87. Noble
ladies, 26. Noblemen, 30. Gentlemen, all of
hige station, 148. Total 509. Mem. _ The
additions of 1853 will greatly swell this list."
In so brief a space as we can give to this field,
it is impossible to show all the encouraging in-
dications of reviving religious principle and
feeling, which the present state of Europe pre-
sents. The French Protestants are aiming in
every way to revive a love for the memory of
their ancestry of confessors and martyrs. Among
other measures they have organized a society
for publishing the history of French Protest-
antism. The British press is issuing a higher
style of exegetical works than we have been
accustomed to receive from that quarter. And
religious periodicals of great value are now
issued in every part of Protestant Europe.
And if it were necessary to reply to the false
assertions of a distinguished Roman prelate,
342
EUROPE.
under the title, " The Dedine of Protestantism,"
we should merely contrast the missionary en-
terprises of the 'J'rue with those of the False
Church. Did we count our missionaries as
they count theirs, amounting to 6,076, ours
would be 20,000, or 4000 ordained mission-
aries, and 16,000 assistants, controlling some
40 presses in heathen lands. We should point
to more than §7,000,000 spent in one year by
the evangelical churches of Europe alone to
propagate a pure Christianity ; to 2,200,000
Bibles, which one society distributed in one
year, making a total of more than 26,500,000 ;
and to 34,700,000 religious publications ; mak-
ing a total of nearly 550,000,000 by one so-
ciety.
111. The agkncies employed to dissemi-
nate THE Gospel in Europe. — We are not
at liberty to consider here any agency that
does not immediately affect the religious in-
terests of the people. Yet, Christianity re-
quires so imperiously the aid of popular instruc-
tion, to secure her highest ends, that we cannot
entirely omit a reference to it. The brutal
ignorance of the majority of Catholics who mi-
grate to this country from Ireland, is painful
to every philanthropic mind. In Eussia not
more than one in eight hundred can read. So
that wc must strictly regard the majority of
the people of Europe as really pagans, intel-
lectually as well as religiously.
1. Common Schools. — Scotland took the lead
in popular education. And to that and the
character of her pulpit instruction, she is in-
debted for her distinguished position. England
moves slowly in this work, because Dissent is
jealous of the Established Church ; and yet the
government wishes to place the schools under
the control of the pet-church. Prussia has
introduced a very efficient system of com-
mon schools, which is now extended to all
Germany. Yet it should be remembered that,
while the children of I'russia are so exten-
sively instructed, we must not judge the re-
sults of this instruction by what we witneas in
this country. With the peasantry it docs not
form the basis of higher cultivation, nor the
guarantee of further improvement. Ireland.
Holland, Denmark, Protestant Switzerland,
Austria, Italy, Belgium, and Sardinia, have
adopted a system of jjrimary instruction, llus-
Bia, Sweden, and Turkey, are taking some
steps in the matter. Mucli has been done in
Germany, France, and England to reclaim
vicious boys. Miss Callandrini, a lady of a
truly missionary s])iril, more than twenty years
ago introduced religious infant schools into
Koitlicru Italy. But the Poman Pontiff', with
earnest vigilance, has guarded his little wretch-
ed dominions from the intrusion of infant
schools, railroads, and Bibles.
2. Tcmjicrancc. — The northern portions of
the Continent present the same melancholy
spectacle oliiitcmperance, which was so common
in this country, before the organization of
Temperance Reform ; and until very recently
no very manifest impression has been made
any where, unless it be in Sweden. Within a
few years, however, the British people are be-
ginning to appreciate the immense advantages
which would result from a universal cessation
from the use of intoxicating beverages. But
we now look mainly to —
3. Preaching and the disirihution of Bibles and
Religions Tracts, for the salvation of the perish-
ing. There arc several organizations in this •
country, and in England and Scotland, which
act on the people of Europe, mostly through
native institutions and laborers. In America
is the American and Foreign Christian Union,
which supplies the principal Continental soci-
eties with funds, and employs a few laborers
under its OM'n immediate direction. In an ap-
pendix will be found a very full statement of the
missionary labors of the Methodist Church in
Europe. The Presbyterian Church (0. S.) also
contributes liberally to this object. The Bap-
tist Church has labored long and faithfully to
support American missionaries in France ;
thus far, with very discouraging results, from
the opposition of the priests, which has been
the more effectual, as directed against foreign-
ers. They have likewise sustained missions in
Germany and northern Europe, and with much
better success. Their churches now spread
through Germany, Denmark, Norway, and
Sweden, and into Switzerland, embracing about
5000 members. More than fifty Bible Socie-
ties, and the Tract and Sunday-school Societies
of Em'ope and America, are distributing their
valuable publications over the whole European
field ; perhaps less extensively in Spain and
Portugal, however, than in any other countries.
The native Missionary Societies in Fi'ance,
Belgium, Switzerland, and the German States,
laboring among their own pojjulation, are yet
feeble ; and mostly much restricted by the
civil power of the priesthood. The Belgian
Evangelical Society has 16 preachers and 45
stations. The French Wcsleyans have 26
chapels, 79 stations, 19 ministers and candi-
dates, five evangelists and catcchists, 32 local
preachers, 830 members, 122 candidates, and
1462 pupils in their Sunday-schools. The
Peligious Tract Society f)f France has dis-
tributed more than one million publications.
'I'he two French Bible Societies have distri-
buted more than 18,000 Bibles and 67,000 New
Testaments. Besides these are the Evangelical
Society of the dissenters; the Central Society,
sustained by the evangelical members of the
French'National Church, both accomplishing
a work of inestimable importance, employing
Imndreds of laborers, and with constantly en-
couraging results. The Church of l-yons is
itself a vigorous missionary society. Jn Ger-
many there are various important Home Mis-
sionary institutions, which are working with
encouraging success. In Sardinia, complete
toleration is now opening a wide door lor evan-
EUROPE.
343
gelical efiForts. In Central and Southern Italj;,
as in Austria, much greater obstructions exist.
Several very interesting establishments, almost
or quite unknown in America, exist among the
Protestants of Europe. One is the Deaconess
Houses, designed to train religious women for
usefulness among the poor and sick. They
exist in France. Germany, Switzerland, and
Eussia. Another is a Retreat for ladies of
high families in Germany, not requiring celi-
bacy ; but, in case of marriage, the member
of the sisterhood forfeits her admission-fee.
This, aud several others, are adapted to the
peculiar circumstances created by the institu-
tions and customs of the country. The Rough
House, of Horn, near Hamburg, has great
celebrity as a model institution for reclaiming
children. We now inquire —
TV. What may be done to evangelize
Europe? — Wide and effectual doors are open
for a tenfold increase of evangelical labors.
And there is much reason to believe that He
who is so wonderfully bringing India and
China within the reach of his Church, will
soon bring eastern and southern, if not north-
eastern Europe before her, as an accessible
missionary-field. But at present our brethren
in France, Belgium, aud Germany are con-
tinually pointing out to us labor to be done,
and laborers ready to perform it, while the
lack of pecuniary resources restricts their
operations.
V. The Hindrances to Evangelizing
Europe. — They are many and mighty ; such
as only faith in God has a right to despise.
Most prominent among them are :
1. The Union of the Chmxh with the civil
government ; or, rather, the subjection of the
Church to civil rulers. The Roman Catholic
Church is thus united with the governments of
France, Belgium, Spain, Portugal, the Italian
States, Austria, and other German states, and
several Swiss cantons. The Episcopal Church
is thus united with the Government of Great
Britain in England, Ireland, Malta and Gib-
raltar. The Lutheran Church is united with
the governments of Prussia, France, Denmark,
Sweden, Saxony, and other German states.
The Presbyterian Church is united with those
of Holland, Fradce, Great Britain (in Scot-
land,) and several Swiss cantons. The Greek
Church is united with those of Russia, Greece,
and the Ionian Isles. The Mohammedan
Church is united with that of Turkey.
France also supports the Jeivish Church. The
vital question in regard to this relation be-
tween the Church and the State, 'is : Has
either a right to interfere with the self-govern-
ment of the other ? It is a broad question,
demanding a profounder discussion than would
be appropriate here. Yet we cannot dismiss
it with a dry statistical statement. Even
popes have advocated the complete independ-
ence of each of these powers. Their testi-
mony, however, loses even its appropriate
weight, because it is always given for an occa^
sion, and frequently on the opposite sides of
the same question. Some writers pretend to
discover great advantages to the Church and
to society in this connexion, especially in the
periods when the forms of society were dis-
solved ; and also its adaptedness to the old
forms of civilization. To us, even this is very
questionable ; while, in our age, it presents
gross and enormous evils, with scarcely a miti-
gating feature. The injustice now perpe-
trated under the forms, and in the name of jus-
tice, by the most civilized governments of
Europe, is a constant appeal to the vengeance
of Heaven. We mean not to deny that good
men may approve of the system ; nor to cen-
sure those who, in their circumstances, think
it best to labor within the various established
churches. Every man stands or falls to his
own Master, and not to his brethren, on that
point. Take the case of a civil government
throwing the whole of its power into the cause
of a lie ; abetting, sustaining, enforcing on
the consciences of its subjects, be they thou-
sands or millions, to reject Christ's Gospel, and
embrace an invention of Satan ! How great
the responsibility ; how enormous the injury ;
how dreadful the account of such a steward-
ship ! It is much for a man to judge for him-
self what is truth, and to stake his eternal
well-being on it. It is more to give himself
to instructing and persuading others to do the
same. But what will at last be thought of
worldly princes or godless statesmen choosing
for themselves a false religion, and then, under
pains and penalties, enforcing it on their fel-
low-creatures 1 They hinder Christ's faithful
servants from proclaiming his Gospel. They
are the kings of the earth that set themselves
against the Lord and his anointed. They hin-
der the people from coming to the light. No
one, for instance, can tell what would become
of the Roman Catholic Church in ten years, if
the civil and military power of France and
Austria did not uphold it. We have reason
to believe that multitudes of the people of
Italy and France would at once proclaim
themselves Protestants of some form ; and
that the zeal of some of its most fervent pre-
lates would take some other object, aud flow
in some other channel. We might refer, in
confirmation, to the changes which have taken
place in Turin, in Genoa, and in Nice, within
six years. Nice is said to have become almost
as Protestant as Geneva. And, were it in
place here to cite facts from America, we
could show that Romanism melts away like
dew, where it is left to a fair competition with
Christianity. Maryland was settled by Catho-
lics, just as New England was settled by Puri-
tans. Puritans retain their ascendancy there,
and have moulded the character of all the land
westward to the Pacific ocean. But Maiy-
iand presents at this day 65 Catholics to 800
Protestants. Florida was Spanish. The
zu
EUROPE.
whole country west of the Mississippi was first
settled by Spanish Catholics or French Jesu-
its. And yet, with all the influx of Irish and
German Catholics, — enough, it might reason-
ably be thought, to have given the lloman
Church a majority, — the census shows in Flor-
ida 5 Catholics to 147 Protestants ; in Louisi-
ana, 55 Catholics to 223 Protestants ; and in
similar proportions in the other states.* It is
diilicult for Christians in America to conceive
of the enormous evils resulting from this vio-
lent conjunction of these two institutions.
What man can judge for the conscience of his
fellow-man ? Think of such sovereigns as
Henry VIII. of England, and his daughter
Elizabeth, determining for godly men what
they must believe, and how they must worship !
No I'rotcstaut country more clearly deter-
mined, at the time of the Keformation, the
true relations of the Church and State, than
Scotland ; and, at the same time, none em-
braced more errors than England. The only
difl'ercnce between the supremacy of Henry,
however, and that of Victoria is, in omitting
the title of headship. Thus stands the 37th
article of the Church of England : " The
Queen's majesty hath the chief power in this
realm of England, and other her dominions,
unto whom the government of all estates of
this realm, whether they be ecclesiastical or
civil, in all causes, doth appertain." The 2d
canon of 1G03 stands thus :f "Whosoever
shall afiirm that the king's majesty hath not
the same authority in cases ecclesiastical, that
the godly kings had among the Jews, let him
be excommunicated."
Dr. Lucius, of Hesse Darmstadt, speaking
of his country, says : | " The present lords
paramount of the soil are, at the same time,
archbishops, born of the I'rotestant national
church — bishops in military array, with sword
and shield ; would that they also always bore
the sword of the Spirit, and girded on the
whole armor of Cod 1 Even lloman Catholic
princes assume the arch-episcopal oflicc, and
exercise its authority in the Cennun I'rotest-
ant church." Thus, ungodly men enact eccle-
sia.stical laws, and appoint to ecclesiastical
oflices. Do we avoid this evil wholly by our
system ? Alas ! no. But when worldly men
get power in the Church here, it is not by the
consent of the Church, by birth, nor by the
operation of a system which avows that j)iety is
not necessary in an ofiicer of Christ's Church.
The Hessian Constitution for 1803 runs thus :
" To the Minister of the Interior " (he may be
an infidel, avowedly ; it would not hinder his
appointment to this civil office.) " belong
mattcrx of police, in tlie widest signification of
the term; the promotion of popular education,
and, coitscquenthj, ecclesiastical and scholastic
♦ MiimionK niatt, 3 JahrgftDR, No. 10.
LNcirth IlritiKh Review, XV. p. 260.
Kvangflical fliristendcm, VI. p. 212. We shall
this work by K. C.
desig-
jiffairs ! " Thus, the law makers, judges, rulers
and teachers of Christ's Church, are more
likely to be men without piety, than to be
regenerated men.
Look, then, at these facts, selected from
thousands. They show both the indifference
of the higher clergy to the real worth and
wants of the poorer citizens, and the violence
done to the Church of Christ jn depriving her
of one of her most valuable and cherished
rights, the choice of teachers. Of 547,112 in-
habitants of Sardinia, 512,381 can neither
read nor write. And yet there are in that
state 11 bishops, 693 canons, 391 cures, 88
monasteries, 15 nunneries, and 2600 priests !
or less than 160 souls to a teacher of religion.
The Church of England is possessed of im-
mense wealth, and yet the Earl of Winchelsea
asserted in Parliament she had left two mil-
lions of the people without church accommo-
dations ; and then, out of 10,891 Episcopal
churches in England, only C4 choose their own
pastors !
And not among the least pernicious results
of the system is that a false standard is brought
into Christ's kingdom, and the canon law takes
the place of Scripture. Errors that ought to
be vanquished by instruction and conviction,
are suppressed by physical force, and thought
itself is stifled in the conforming and the non-
conforming ; and as light penetrates these
countries, and the minds of men are aroused to
a consciousness of those inalienable rights
which these systems destroy, there arises a
growing confusion. Civil and canon law are
coming constantly into collision with each
other, as now in the governments of France
and Bavaria, which undertake to support
Catholic and Protestant churches alike. la
Westphalia the absurd spectacle has been pre-
sented of a pastor (Heinrich) seized and im-
prisoned, his whole edition of a sermon de-
stroyed ; and yet the oflence of the sermon
was, that in a Lutheran church, under a Lu-
theran king, he defended the doctrines of the
Lutheran Church again.^ lloman heresies.
But in the case of the state supporting a
true church, while the immediate evil is not so
great, j-et the principle is equally false, and
many hurtful results remain. There is an in-
justice to other sects, and an injury to the de-
nomination chosen. For instance, we may
cite the fact that in Prussia every person is
])orn into the church, and entitled to the ".seal-
ing ordinances." Go into one of the princi-
pal prisons of Prussian Saxony, containing
more than 300 ])risoncrs, and you may regu-
larly see the chaplain administering to them
the Lord's Supjter indiscriminately. An eye-
witness reports : " Several months ago I saw
in Marysbuig the Lord's Supper administered
to a company of several hundred soldiers."-^
(Letters of Prof Fisher, in Coneregntionalist.)
Religious liberty is now, on tlie whole, gain-
ing ground. Although the French sovereign
EUROPE.
345
deems it bis i^oHcy to favor the priesthood, yet
there is a public sentiment gradually maturing
iu France, founded on more correct views than
have heretofore prevailed. The Protestants of
the national church boldly demand their
rights under the constitution. And the labors
of British Christians on the continent have
not been fruitless. The Protestant Conference
of France and ihe Kirchentag of Germany
have appointed a commission to take charge
of this subject. The Belgic Constitution guar-
antees religious liberty to all, although the
Roman Catholic Church is supported by the
government. Holland has a moderate degree
of religious liberty ; so have Turkey, Den-
mark, and Norway; but in Switzerland infi-
dels now play the tyrant, especially in Neuf-
chatel and Vaud. Russia tolerates other re-
ligions than the Greek ; but is very severe on
some poor churches, who come reluctantly
within the favored fold. Spain, Portugal,
Sweden, Italy (except Sardinia,) and Greece
have now the unenviable superiority to the
Turkish government in the exercise of intol-
erance and bigotry.
Englishmen dying in Spain are subjected to
the most brutal indignities. As one remarks :
" The gloomy intolerance of Spain pursues the
British Protestant, should he die on Spanish
soil, even to his grave." Portugal exhibits
some shades of improvement upon Spain ; but
even in that country, though it is far more
open to British influence than Spain is, relig-
ious liberty does little more than breathe.
Dr. Gomez, under the article of the Constitu-
tion which permits the exercise of the Pro-
testant religion to foreigners, and under British
protection, continues to preach the doctrines
of the Reformation in Lisbon, yet no Portu-
guese is allowed to become a member of a
Protestant church ; and the Jesuits are incite
ing the mob against him, as they did in regard
to Dr. Kalley in Madeira.
It would require too much expansion of this
article to enter into details concerning the
state of religious liberty in the several states
of Germany. The violence involved in the
system, and the immeasurable wrong it inflicts
on an intelligent people, may be seen in a re-
mark made by one of the most distinguished
theologians of Prussia. An American inquired
of him, if the Church should be separated
from the State, how many of the existing
churches of Prussia would adhere to their pre-
sent pastors ? The reply was. Not three. The
British government has manifested a shameful
indifference to the rights of its own subjects
traveling or dwelling in papal countries. Her
statesmen have boasted of dictating treaties
and constitutions to the continental powers ;
but, to their disgrace, they have looked with
indifference upon the sacred rights of con-
science, which it was thus in their power to
advance.
In some states foreign dissenters are hardly
tolerated ; and in a large number, native dis-
sent is prohibited ; and, of course, all proselyt-
ing efforts are crushed by the power of the
g-overnment. Even among the Protestant
governments the spirit of intolerance is mani-
festing itself Great Britain has gradually
abandoned the narrow policy of former days,
under which our fathers suffered to death and
exile. But in Sweden persecution is now car-
ried on against those who, wearied with the
formality of the established churches, are as-
sembling to worship God iu spirit and in truth.
Yet it is cheering to see the symptoms of a
change even there. The archbishop of Up-
sala, primate of Sweden, has recently held a
convocation of his clergy, in which it was de-
cided that laymen ought to participate in the
spiritual management of the parish ; that, ab-
stractly considered, religious liberty is desira-
ble ; and that conventicles are allowable. The
Baptists have peculiarly suffered in (jormany,
the arm of clerical oppression mask(!d by the
toga of the magistrate.
Another hindrance to the progress of the
Gospel is,
2. The Social penalties attached to a change of
religion. — This operates with peculiar power
over superstitious and affectionate people, like
the Irish and Germans.
3. The Literature of the day is deeply im-
bued with a worldly spirit, and to some extent,
with infidel opinions and an aversion to the
Gospel.
4. The Philosophy of Europe has been a
mighty hindrance to the success of evangelical
la))ors. In Scotland, Hume has had few fol-
lowers. In England, Locke has exerted a less
injurious influence than in France. But be-
tween the materialism of one school of German
philosophers, and the pantheistic transcendent-
alism of another, the higher and the iQwer
classes of the continent have been strongly
fortified against the influence of the Gospel.
But a visible and powerful reaction is taking
place in France and Germany, in favor both
of a more evangelical faith and of a more
spiritual philosophy.
Another hindrance to the labors of evangel-
ical men is,
5. Tlie debasing effects of Popery on the
masses of the People. — It promotes ignorance,
superstition, and sensuality. It is, in fact, one
of the most demoralizing institutions in the
world. The Rev. Mr. Seymour has recently
brought out some comparisons between the
immorality of several countries of Europe,
which are very instructive and painful. The
more thoroughly popish a country is, the worse
it is. ]\Iurder and licentiousness stalk hand in
hand among Gothic cathedrals, gorgeous rites,
and mumbling priests. Take, for instance, the
crime of murder. The standard assumed is
one million inhabitants. For every million,
there are murdered annually in England, 4;
Ireland, 19 j France, 31 ; Austria, 36 ; Lom-
34te
EUROPE.
bardy, 45 ; Sicily, 90 ; the Pope's kingclom,
100 ; Naples, 200.
All these causes combined have resulted in
counteracting, to a great extent, the influence
of the few faithful heralds who have been en-
deavoring to proclaim the Gospel to the mis-
guided millions of Europe.
VI. The present conditiox op tde Eo
MAN Hierarchy, considered as an aggressive
power. — In forming an estimate of the religi-
ous condition and prospects of Europe, a pro-
minent place must be assigned to this formida-
ble power. We consider,
1. Their Home Missionary Societies. — The
mightiest of these, and yet the most suicidal,
is the Order of Jesuits. They were not or-
ganized to spread the Gospel in heathen lands,
but to defend the Papacy in civilized nations.
In a Jesuit's eye, schism is worse than heresy,
heathenism, irreligion, or immorality. And,
although they have been distinguished as mis-
sionaries, their main work was to arrest the
Reformation. Loyola organized them as a
religious military police, for the Church of
Eome ; but Laincz, the second general of the
order, gave it its permanent form of a politi-
cal order, whose main instruments are shrewd,
unscrupulous intrigue, educating youth, and
confessing princes and nobles. One of their
early movements was the planting of two
powerful colleges in Rome ; that of the Jesuits
for general purposes, and a German college, in
which the course of instruction prepared men
to control the German mind. Belgium had be-
come, half Protestant : but, by education chiefly,
the Jcs^iits recovered it to Rome. The college
of Douai-jvas founded for the conversion of
England. :f*oland had become almost Pro-
testant. But^bc colleges of Cracow, Grodno,
and Pultusk, crm^'^cd the Reformation thererin
the same way the;^'. ^f^ved Austria to the Pope.
The order has n ^^de itself, in turn, indis-
pensable to every despotic government of Eu-
rope, and then h .^^ rendered itself intolerable
to them all. T^o ^^^ ^^^-'st classes of every
civilized communi\ty, sooner or later, the pres-
ence of tills body must be found iusuSerable to
men of jjrobity ai}^^ virtue, to true patriots, to
rulers, and to n,~^''^ of science and learning.
Society is again: ^'t them ; for she is pressing to
the future; they^^ould anchor her to the jtast.
Even the other ^ orders of the Roman hierar-
chy ean barely ^foleratellieir arrogance. Their
barbarous oppostst'^^*^" ^^ science, genuine his-
tory, and classical htliterature, unites the educated
classes ai^f-ainst thc^ 'Jii- 'i'l't'y make unrelenting
war on the univera
country that will
dreil and Iwenty-six
condemned by the
couraging crime.
'I'he I'arliament .,,-_
books l)y the hands ofl^
The archbi.shop of Mali
Jesuitismc, Ancicn et
ies and educators of any
.'^Icratc them. Three hun-
pf their authors have been
■ibunals of Europe as en-
France burned their
he hangman in 17f)2.
•les, in his work, I)u
erne, eavs, " that of
these 326 works approved by these Jesuit theo-
logians, 17 encouraged immodesty, 28 perjury,
33 robbery, 36 homicide," &c. In 1773 Clem-
ent XIV., in compliance with the feelings of
the civilized world, suppressed the order. At
that time it had 22,787 members ; of whom
11,010 were priests. But the suppression was
only in appearance. Catharine of Russia
saved them as an order. But, authorized or
unauthorized, they have insinuated themselves
into every part of Europe. In 1814, Pius
VII. restored their order. But when the Em-
2)eror of Russia found them not only opposing
the Bible Society he had formed, but also in-
terfering with the Russian mission in Peking,
which was purely scientific, he adopted still
more rigid measures against them. This is
the oSicial verdict of the government : ' Every
act of the Jesuits is founded in selfishness,
and directed solely to the unlimited extension
of their power : adepts in excusing each of
their unlawful proceedings by some rule of
their company, they have a conscience as vast
as it is docile.' In 1845 they had 1390 priests
in Europe, 1184 scholars, and 1041 lay brothers.
They have lost the prestige of their fame as
educators and as leaders of human thought.
They have not, at this day, one commanding
preacher, to reach the masses of mankind.
Immense wealth and untiring industry are
powerful instruments. But when these are
employed against the whole current of human
thought and the mighty movements of human
society, their possessors toil like Samson shorn
of his locks. They are at present recognized
only in some of the Italian States, and toler-
ated in France, where they hold immense pos-
sessions, under false names ; having about one
thousand members, so far as can be ascertain-
ed. Their pajier in Paris, X'f/n/wr.?, is bold
to impudence, and uncompromising in its
claims for Popery. It is said to be in the pay of
the Court of Rome. And it is a striking fact
that the Department of Worship in the general
government — that is, the superintendence and
care of all the churches of France, Catholic,
Protestant, and Jewish, is in the hands of a
Jesuit layman.
Beside this renowned corps, there is a great
number of orders and institutions, embracing
persons of both sexes, designed for educating
Protestant children, and for the care of or-
phans and invalids. They are resorting again,
in self-defence, to preaching " out of season,"
if not out of consecrated places. Series of
meetings are now held by the Jesuits, Re-
demptorists. Capuchins, Franciscans, Ligo-
rians, <fcc., sustained by various societies — St.
Vincentius, Borromco, Childhood of Jesus, Ro-
sary Catholic, Sisters of Education, <S:c.
A society has been organized to jiray for
the conversion of France. It counts 40,000
members in St. Brience alone. 'J'h(>n there
are fraternities attached to particular churches.
Almost every church in Paris has one. The
EUROPE.
347
most important is that of the Sacred Heart :
it has had 50,000 members. They have great
varieties of schools for children, and asylums
for the aged. They have also retreats, not so
rigid as monasteries. The Society of St. Vin-
cent de Paul, in Paris, composed of young-
people, has auxiliaries throughout the king-
dom. It labors indefatigably to reclaim chil-
dren, paupers, and apprentices, to the Catholic
faith. Its receipts from lotteries, cJaarity ser-
mons, &c., were $40,812 in one year. As a
specimen of the home missionary operations of
the Roman Catholic church, we may select
those established in Belgium. Twenty monas-
teries exist there. The majority of them arc
of recent foundation, and have abandoned the
old notions of meditation, fasting, and inac-
tivity ; for all which they have substituted an
intense activity. Tha Ignorautins have up-
wards of twenty houses, and are increasing in
number, as being peculiarly efficient in reach-
ing the mass of the people. The Freres de
la Charite have houses, scattered through
the five dioceses. T'he Josephites have seven
houses, divided into three classes ; priests,
seminarists, and artisans. The Freres de Renaix
have four houses : they take care of the aged,
promote free schools for the poor, and work-
shops for needy tradesmen. The Freres de la
Misericorde have three houses ; attending to
the sick and to prisoners. The Freres Xave-
riens devote themselves to instructing and to
nursing in families, and in houses of detention
and correction. But female missions are still
more numerous. The diocese of Mechlin alone
contains 33 orders of nuns ; comprising 109
communities, only eight of which are devoted
to a contemplative life. The whole corps of
archbishops and bishops in Europe is about
400.
2. Their Foreign Missionary operatioyis are
increasing. — The missionary college in Rome,
called the Collegium de Propaganda Fide, insti-
tuted by Urban VIII., in 1627, still continues
to educate men of different nations as mission-
aries to their own people. And the Congre-
gatio de Propaganda Fide, founded by Gregory
XV., in 1622, still continues its missionary
labors. There are five Foreign Mission Soci-
eties established in Paris.
The Society for Propagating the Faith,
founded recently in Lyons, is a remarkable in-
stitution. It collects one cent a week from
each of its members, scattered throughout Eu-
rope, Asia, and America. In 18.50 its receipts
were $620,370 ; (some say $950,000,) of which
$357,734 were from France. The congrega-
tion of St. Lazarus has increased its mission-
aries from 13 to 200, within thirty years. The
Jesuits, Dominicans, and Franciscans have
taken up the work of missions afresh, and new
ordei's are entering the field, Redemptorists,
Passionists, Oblatists, Priests of Mary's Holy
Heart, the Maryists, and the Monks ofPicpus.
The united incomes of three of their missionary
societies amount to nearly $1,300,000 per an-
num.
The Dublin Catholic Registry reports their
foreign mission operations, but furnishes basis
for no other statistical statements than these :
the number of Catholics in India is 822,000 ;
the number of priests in Africa is 150. — (See
Church of Rome, Missions of.)
3. Present internal strength of Popery. — Judged
by the true standard, the papal religion is a
failure, even on its own chosen ground. The
present political, social, financial, moral, intel-
lectual, and religious condition of the imperial
city is its standing condemnation : the verdict
of a righteous Providence, which mankind
may read and understand, if they have eyes to
see and ears to hear. The city of Rome, for
instance, has 137,866 lay citizens, and to teach
them how to be holy and happy, they have the
Pope himself, a large portion of the cardinals,
34 bishops, 1314 secular priests ; 1548 monks,
and 1686 nuns. But immorality, scepticism
and discontent, with a profound contempt of
the Pope and his reverend counsellors, charac-
terize the city of seven hills. A leaden atmos-
phere seems to oppress the respiration in that
doomed city ; the blasphemous corrupter of the
kings and nations of the earth. No man is
competent to judge the real condition of that
church. It is constructed with a cunning
adaptedness to conceal, even from Catholics, its
faults and falsehoods ; and yet more energe-
tically to prevent the exposure of them to the
world, when discovered ; and therefoi-e even
the Pope himself is incompetent to determine
anything beyond the external show of things.
But results cannot be concealed, and we
may get some definite view of a system com-
prising such varied and conflicting pretensions,
and blended ambiguously with so many civil
governments, by separately considering these
points : The temporal supremacy of the Pope ;
the boasted unity of the infallible church ; the
state of the controversy with Protestantism ;
and the result of the attempt to convert Great
Britain. How stand then
A. nie pretensions of the Pope to be the Empe-
ror of the World ? — It should never be lost sight
of, that while Roman Catholics are divided in-
to two parties, Catholics and papists, the Popes
and Cardinals are always papists. They be-
lieve, or profess to believe, that mankind will
never be happy ; error and sin will never cease;
commerce and agriculture, education, and
above all, religion will never thrive ; nor, in a
word, Christ reign universally until the Pope
has reigned as a temporal despot, over every
kindred and people, and tribe and man. All
however who believe the dogmas of the church,
do not believe in these pretensions of the Pope.
After the mighty Charlemagne had called on
the bishop of Rome to crown him, the idea of
universal supremacy seems to have taken root
in the papal brain. But it never was fully
matured until the ambitious Hildebrand gave
348
EUROPE.
it form and utterance. Among the doctrines
he promuljrat«d are these : (Baronius, Didatics
PapcE.) "T!io Pope is one universal bishop,
with all power to depose, restore, translate, and
alter the sees of other bishops. No book is
canonical without his sanction. No council
can be called general without his precept. ^ He
can depose emperors ; he can absolve subjects
from their allegiance. lie is the judge of all
men, and no man can judge him. All princes
must kiss his feet. There is only one name in
the world, that of the Pope ; and by the me-
rits of the blessed Peter, he is endowed with
personal sanctity." But how far has Gregory
VII. convinced the world of the truth of these
tremendous dogmas ? The world has discov-
ered that the Roman Church stands upon two
falsehoods — two base and acknowledged for-
geries. We say acknowledged : for since the
day in which the Magdeburg centuriators
showed to the world that they were forgeries,
her ablest writers have abandoned them. And
yet, if these are not her ground, she has no
other for claiming to be more than a simple
Christian church, upheld, (if she stands at all,
like all other churches,) simply by the power
of the Holy Ghost. Her claim of supremacy
over all other churches is founded, not to say
upon the strange coustruction of a promise to
an apostle to the Jews, by which a church of
gentiles is made supreme over all others, but
upon the ' Decretals of Isidore.' Her claim
for temporal authority stands upon the ' Do-
nation of Constantine,' both of them base
forgeries.
The question then before us is, how the gov-
ernments and churches regard these two
claims ? The Protestant churches and govern-
ments probably acquiesce unanimously in re-
garding the pretension as arrogant and ab-
surd, to the last degree. A recent writer,
(J. E. Shephard, A.M., " Historij of the Church
of Rome to the end of the Episcopate of Damasus.
A.D. 384, 1851,") says, that he undertook to in-
vestigate the facts on this subject, as establish-
ed by documents ; this is his conclusion : " What
is recorded of the Iloman church within that
period, is almost nothing ; and that those acts
of interference with other churches, which ap-
pear in the histories and some other writings,
are forgeries of a much later date, manifestly
wi-itten to create a belief in a supremacy
which had never existed, but which, at the
time they were made, the Roman church was
endeavoring to introduce." He finds the gross-
est anachronisms in tliesc records, for exam-
ple : Constantino is said to give Sylvester
supremacy, even over Constantinople, wlien
Constantinople has not yet an existence.
Gregory VII. proposed to himself to subju-
gate the world by means of the clergy, lie
therefiire exem[)ted the monasteries from epis-
copal jiu'isdiction, and so obtained the exclu-
sive services uf a disciplined ecck^iastical mil-
itia. But even the Catholic .soverei''n3 of
Europe choose to keep their sceptres in their
own hands, and employ the Catholic clergy as
a police. And the most intelligent Catholic
laymen throughout Europe, we iDelieve, are of
the same opinion with the late Abbe Lammc-
uais, that if the Pope is a sincere Christian,
and seeks the spiritual welfare of mankind, he
will lay aside his triple crown, and retain only
the Bishop's Croisier. There is not a prince
in Europe who does not despise the civil au-
thority of the Pope, at least as much as that
of the Sultan. Both those characters are re-
tained in the list of sovereigns by sufiFrance, and
by the help, of other peoples' soldiers.
B. Tfie Unity of the Catholic Church.— This
is another false pretension and hypocritical
profession. Neither Popes, Councils, Clergy,
nor Laymen are any more united than the
members of Protestant churches. Opinions
and decisions of Fathers, Councils, and Popes
recorded and published, are not harmonious.
Two Popes contended for the crown ; and a
council without a Pope appointed a third.
The old Jesuit and Janseuist tendencies re-
main, while the Jansenist party is broken up.
The Galilean and Ultramontane battle is as
severely fought to this day in Paris, as in any
former period. The church has adopted two
self-destroying fundamental theories; on the
one side, infallibility, and consequent immuta-
bility ; on the other, the dcvelopement theory
of Newman. She insists on absolute authority,
and then reasons with private judgment to
prove that there can be no legitimate exercise
of private judgment. The questions to-day
discussed in Catholic France go to the bottom
of Papal claims and pretensions. They affect
the union of civil and temporal power in the
Pope ; the agreement or antagonism of Popery
and modern society ; the rights of the inferior
clergy. And when Frenchmen take up such
questions, they investigate them thoroughly.
C. The State of the Doctrinal Controversy. —
The only real and legitimate controversy Rome
can maintain, is on the question of her infallibil-
ity. And it is striking, that when Mr. Seymour
in his discussions with the Jesuits, ( Mornings at
Rome,) affirmed that Rome had never dogmat-
ically asserted her infallibility, and challenged
them to produce such affirmation, they were
thrown into utter confusion. The fact is, that
on these fundamental points, What is the
Church ? and, When are her utterances infal-
lible? she never speaks positively; but al-
ways assures that she is inf;illible, when it
suits her purpose so to do. Her present doc-
trinal discussion makes a meagre portion of
theological literature.
D. The Papal Movertmits in England.— One
of the most striking events of the lOtli cen-
tury has been the struggle of Rome, accom-
panied with prcmat\ire shouts of victory, to
recover England to the Pope. Appearances
were certainly encouraging for them. There
were in 1838, in England, 11 dukes, 2 earls,
EUROPE.
349
7 lords, 18 of the richest baronets, and more
than 50 of the wealthiest families, members of
the Catholic church. And within a few years
70 EpiscojDal clergymen, and 120 of the nobil-
ity and gentry have joined them. In 1792
there were not 30 chapels in Great Britain ;
now there are 616, (800, Dr. Cummings says,)
with more than 300,000 attendants, and 875
priests. Within seven years sixty of the larg-
est churches have been built by them. They
had not then one college. Now they have 10.*
They have one Quarterly Review, two or three
monthlies and one able weekly paper. In Ire-
land the principal high offices of sli,te were in
the hands of Catholics. Oxford University
education partook so much of the medieval
spirit, as to furnish good instruments for de-
stroying the work of the Reformation. There
was great formality and indifference in the
Episcopal ranks that had rejected the " Meth-
odism " of Simeon and the Clapham school.
So far then as these gentlemen were sincere
in attachment to the Protestant principles they
professed, they aimed to prevent the Episcopal
church from being latitudinarian and worldly.
But their remedy was worse than the disease.
They substituted traditions of men for the
Word of God ; apostolical succession for minis-
terial godliness ; sacramental regeneration for
the work of the Holy Spirit ; the visible unity
of the church for the spiritual union of free
men ; justification by ceremonies for justifica-
tion by faith. Many of the most intelligent
men in England, however, give them no credit
for sincerity. The honest Arnold bitterly
complained of their want of honesty. Mr.
Rose affirms that the movement originated in
an anticipation that the established Church
was to be separated from the state, and then
these clergymen would be denuded of those
claims of superiority and of transcendental
dignity, which they have never sacrificed, and
be placed on a level with the ministers of other
denominations. They must, therefore, have
something to fall back upon. And they hit
upon the assumption that they are the Church,
and that all churches or communions, extrinsic
to theirs, are heathen men and publicans. So
that about twenty years ago they commenced
their operations, and conducted them with
consummate skill. Three fundamental princi-
ples were laid down : the participation of the
body and blood of Christ in the Eucharist is a
reality ; the mystery of his body and blood has
been confided only to the hands of the succes-
sors of the Apostles, and their delegates ; since
the Apostles, those who derived their succes-
sion from them in an unbroken line, by the
imposition of the hands of the bishops, are the
only priests to give this body and blood unto
the people. Dr. Newman saw that their effort
to transfer the Nicene Church of the fourth
* Living Age, New Series, HI. p. 469. Cummings on Apoc.
I, 330, (Am. edit.)
century to the nineteenth was inadmissible.
He therefore resorted to the doctrine of devel-
opement, which is directly destructive of the
famous claim of Rome to infallibility. By
means of tracts, reviews, novels, and poetry,
this leaven was spread through England. It
has logically resulted, in seventy instances only,
in taking its abettors from the ministry of the
Episcopal to that of the Roman Church. But
the movement has reached its climax, and is
silently sinking into the oblivion it merits.
Our picture will not be complete, without
adding to this general view of the Continent,
a more specific description of the several
States.
VII. Review op the European States. — •
g 1. England, Scotland, and Ireland. — Popula-
tion (including Guernsey) 28,500,000 (U). —
The English Reformation, we have already re-
marked, was deeply defective in many respects.
The king was made the Pope of England ; all
religious interests being put under his control,
even to the appointment of all the bishops ;
and, to complete the anomalous condition of
the church, her bishops became a portion of
the civil aristocracy, and members of the gov-
ernment. Liberty in matters of conscience
was not permitted, on the penalty of an utter
exclusion from all civil offices, and from the
privileges of the universities. After passing-
through various phases, the Church of Eng-
land is now divided into three parties. They
are familiarly denominated the Low, High,
and Broad Church. The Low Church takes the
Calvinistic view of theArticles ; and is earnest
in moral reforms, in promoting spiritual reli-
gion, and missions to the heathen. Their or-
gan is the Record. The High Church has for
its watch-words — Judgment by works ; Bap-
tismal regeneration ; Church authority ; and
Apostolical succession. The Guardian is its
organ. The Broad Church is well represented
by the lamented Arnold. It makes much of the
visible church ; of symbols ; of the unity of
the Church under different names. The fol-
lowing classification has been made of the
18,000 episcopal clergymen in England : —
High Church — Anglican, 3500 ; Tractarian,
1000 ; High and Dry, 2500. Low Church—
Evangelical, 3300 ; Recordite, 2500 ; Low
and Slow, 700. Broad Church — Theoretical,
1000 ; Anti-theoretical, 2500. About 1000 of
the peasant clergy are to be ranked apart from
these. Of the btshops, 13 are High ; 10 Broad ;
5 Evangelical.
To the student of British history, this state
of things is encouraging, as it is an evidence
of progress. Indeed, the distinguishing feature
of all British history is the steady progress ol
truth and righteousness, as seen in her Consti-
tution, her legislation, and her ecclesiastical
history. Britain is moving with a slow, und©
viating march, onward toward a brighter age
A great principle once secured there, is never
lost to the British race, nor to the world. Re
350
EUROPE.
forms do iwt move as rapidly as wc desire ;
but they arc advancing. We have seen those
two instruments of tyranny — the act of Uni-
formity and the Conventicle act, give place to
the act of Toleration ; which has been con-
tinually maintained inviolate, and even en-
larged. It was an immense progress from the
days of Laud and Jeffrey to the day when
Lord Chatham, addressing his peers, said,
" The Dissenters are represented as men of
close ambition. They are so, my lords. And
their ambition is, to keep close to the college
of fishermen, and not of cardinals ; to the doc-
trine of inspired apostles, not to the decrees of
inter&sted and aspiring bishops. They con-
tend for a spiritual creed and a spiritual wor-
ship."
From the days of Magna Charta to the
present parliamentary investigation of Oxford
affairs, resulting in the admission of dissenters
to the University, there has been a steady pro-
gress ; while the other European nations have
either remained stationary or receded. The
dissenters have become more discerning of
their rights and more courageous in advocat-
ing them. They have also become more pow-
erful in the House of Commons, which is the
real seat of civil power in the nation. The
recent papal maneuvre was premature, and
has made England more intelligently anti-
papal, more firmly Protestant than she has
been of late years. There is also an increase
of spirituality in the national and the dissent-
ing churches. The renowned universities of
the kingdom provide for the ministry a major-
ity of its incumbents. The prominent defect
of these venerable institutions is their conser-
vative lethargy. They do not keep pace with
the necessities of society, only as far as it has
interests in the past. The present and the
future are not to be learned in O.xford or Cam-
bridge, as they may be in the colleges of the
dissenters.
CHUBCHES AND ATTEXDANCE IN ENGLAND,
SCOTLAND, AND WALES.
Denominations.
Episcopal
Independent
Baptist
Jlelhoilist (Wesloyan) . .
Methodist (I'rimitivc) . .
Presbyterian (English),
i'rexbyterian (ricutcli) . .
Cnitarian
lAdy Huntinjrton Oin. .
Other Evanijfl. donom. .
Roman Catholic
.Tews
Quakers
Mormons
Undefined
Churches.
Sittings.
13,718
5,547,935
3,446
1.139,478
2,066
576,5t)l
6,649
1,407,531
(12)*
(2,490)
83
41.382
2,528
1,750,149
(0)
(2,437)
(117)
(62,776)
(0
(67)
fel82i
Attend-
ance.
2,568,310
818,534
480,491
915,722
620,517
28,212
851,584
37,863
29,686
81.000
349,878
4,178
(196)
(1,304)
33,304
• Tlie numbers enclosed in parenthesis belong to Scot-
land alone.
The preceding table presents the results of
some recent efforts to ascertain the provisions
made in England, Wales and Scotland, for
the religious culture of the people, and, the
actual attendance on divine worship. From
these statistics it is manifest that unless the
room provided in churches exceeds the num-
ber needed, (which is highly improbable.)
there is still a sad indifference to God's insti-
tutions of grace, even in a country so Chris-
tianized as England. Of the 17,297,000 in-
habitants of England and Wales, only 6,000,000
or about one-third attend worship. So that
as many as seven and a half millions either
neglect public worship, or attend on the min-
istry of error.
Dr. Cummings, in bis able and interesting
Lectures on the Apocalypse, has given a fear-
ful exhibition of the moral and religious con-
dition of London. (Vol. L p. 382.) He re-
marks : " If all the churches and chapels were
as full as they could hold, not one-fourth of the
population would be within them. There are
never in church on one Sunday, in all denomi-
nations, more than 200,000 people out of
2,000,000. And how many, do you think, of
that number are communicants ? Startling
fact ! Awful stain upon the missionary zeal
of the metropolis! There are scarcely 60,000
communicants in all the chajiels and churches
of this vast city put together ! The steam
boats and railways alone carry from the me-
tropolis every Sunday morning a greater pop-
ulation than are that day in all the chapels
and churches together. There are in London
12,000 children trained professionally to pick
pockets and plunder houses. There are 1 0,000
gamblers, 20,000 beggars, 30,000 regular
thieves, 150,000 habitual gin drinkers, and
150,000 of both sexes habitually leading a life
of debauchery !"
In the report of the late imperfect investi-
gations of attendance on worship in Scotland,
it is stated, that on the census dav, March 30,
1851, of the 2,888,742 people in Scotland, only
943,951 persons attended the fulle.st, or morn-
ing service ; and of those about 46,000 attend-
ed on the ministration of error. And there is
also a want of provision ; there being in every
kind of church only 1,834,805 sittings, and of
course many of these remote from the people.
The Catholics have 14 colleges in England,
and 3 English colleges on the Continent. In
Great Britain 812 churches. 1126 priests, 101
nunneries, &;c.
'I'he Sunday-school is less efficiently sustain-
ed in Scotland than in England. ''I'hcre may
be 80 much more faithful parental instruction
and public religious instruction there, as to
diminish the nece&sity for this form of religious
influence.
Popery has made progress in Scotland. In
1831 there were 54 priests ; in 1852 they had
increased to 135 — having 100 churches and
chapels, one college, and several schools and
EUROPE.
351
convents. But the most interesting feature in
the modern history of Scotland is what is there
termed " the Disruption." It was a new Pro-
test against the usurpation of ecclesiastical
power by the state. In 1843 nearly 500 pas-
tors, 200 licentiates, and 200 students, followed
by a million of the inhabitants, abandoned the
State Church in one day, and formed the Free
Church. At their annual General Assembly
in 1854, they reported' f 1,347,780 as raised by
their churches for the sustentation, building,
congregational, missions, education and miscel-
laneous funds. They sustain two theological
schools, one in Edinburgh and one in Aber-
deen. They have about 40 Scottish foreign
missionaries, mostly in India, and 57 native
missionary assistants.
On no foreign country do we look with such
interest in reference to the world's conversion
to holiness, as on Great Britain. Her politi-
cal power is ascendant ; her Constitution is
liberal ; her national interests are less exposed
to the control of demagogues than those of our
republic ; her religion is Protestant ; her in-
tellectual culture is high ; her colonial posses-
sions stretched as a zone of Protestant con-
stitutional power around the globe, contain
131,000,000 souls. A recent writer justly re-
marks : " With all England's defects, it would
not be an easy task rightly to estimate the
vast instrumentalities which she contains for
the moral and spiritual melioration of her
own population and the world at large." It
requires six weeks to enable the various reli-
gious societies to hold their annual meetings
in Loudon. In the city of Loudon millions of
dollars are annually expended for the benefit,
temporal and spiritual, of the poor and the
careless. Its City Mission has become a mag-
nificent instrument of good, solving most satis-
factorily the difficult question for London and
all large towns, " A-Vhat can be done for the
poor ?" The Young Men's Association is
opening a new prospect to another class, here-
tofore so neglected. By tracts, lectures, Bible
classes, meetings for prayer, conference meet-
ings and libraries immeasurable good has been
done. Similar organizations are now spread-
ing throughout the kingdom, and introduced
into Germany, Holland, Franco, Switzerland,
and Sardinia.
In regard to Ireland, we may be sure that
the Roman Church has lost great numbers by
famine, emigration and conversion within six
years. The estimates vary from half a million
to two millions. Many who remain in the
Eoman Church have at heart renounced its
errors. All the Protestant bodies in Ireland
are actively engaged in opening the eyes of
their blinded countrymen. In 1841 half the
Irish natives had houses of only one room,
three-fourths of these being made of mud.
Two-thirds of them lived on the potato ; one-
third were without any employment ; one-
eighth were beggars ; one-half neither wrote
nor read.* The Protestants numbered in 1834
1,517,228 ; the Catholics, at the same time,
6,427,712. So that Ireland was eminently a
Catholic country, and a specimen of what the
Koman Church does to elevate and bless a
people. The Irish Society has 667 schools, con-
taining 29,000 pupils and 250 laborers. The
Irish Evangelical Society has 20 missionaries,
and 30 readers. One Methodist Society has
400 stations. The Irish Church Mission has
425 agents in the field, and the industrial
schools are working very successfully. The
Catholics have 21 colleges in Ireland, one mis-
sionary seminary and three high schools, be-
sides two colleges for the Irish on the continent.
§ 2. Holland.— Fopnlatiou, 3,208,400. (U.)
Holland must be had in grateful remembrance
for its brave defence of the Gospel in the sev-
enteenth century, and for furnishing a Protest-
ant sovereign to England, as well as a refuge
to our persecuted Puritan fathers. An enu-
meration of the sects has been made by a
learned Hollander, which, if designed to pre-
sent the whole population under these religious
divisions, would make the number some
204,000 less than Ungewetter states it. His
enumeration is, 9,000 separate Lutherans,
54,000 Lutherans, 38,000 Baptists, 58,000
Jews, 5,000 Armenians, 1,670,000 Dutch Re-
formed, 1,170,000 Catholics, of whom 5500 are
Jansenists.
^ An utter declension in religion had taken
place after the close of the last century. Libe-
ralism and Neology occupied the chairs of the
three universities, Leyden, Groningen, and
Utretcht. There was a conservative Dort
orthodox party ; and the young, liberal party,
equally dead, though differing in doctrine.
The Lord then raised up the great poet Bil-
derdyk, by whose energetic exhibitions of the
Gospel two learned young Jews were converted.
Da Costa, a barrister, and Cappadoce, a physi-
cian. In 1834, 80,000 persons separated from
the national churcli, and organized a " true re-
formed church." They have encountered great
difficulties from persecution, and from " false
brethren." The Groningen party professed
great attachment to the person of Christ ; and
exalted love above doctrine. But it turned out
in the end that their Christ was a mere man,
a divine man, but not Jehovah Jesus. The
friends of pure religion are, moreover, not
agreed about the means of reviving religion.
One party look to the restoration of the Dort
Constitution ; at the head of them stands Mr.
Van Priusterer, Secret Counsellor of State.
The others resort to colportage, private mis-
sions, and social meetings, to revive the spirit
of the Church, and lead men to Christ. There
has been a struggle on the question of religion
in the_ public schools. The evangelical party
has triumphed. The mission to the colony in
Java is prosperous. Missionary tradesmen are
* Dr. Edgar's statement in E. C. VI. p. 305.
352
EUEOPE.
sent out, and important results are traced to
the measure.
I 3. Scandinavia. — Population, 6,965,000.
(U.) In >Sweden the civil and religious con-
ditions of the citizens are confounded together.
Every Swede must receive baptism, and com-
mune in the established Church, to retain citi-
zenship. No subject is allowed to chanp;e his
religion. A Protestant may not become a
Catholic ; nor a Baptist a Pedo-baptist, &c.
Laymen are not permitted to preside in reli-
gious meetings ; and all conventicles are for-
bidden. In fact Sweden has retained the in-
tolerant spirit longer than any other Protest-
ant country in the world. Of the 1800 Lu-
theran clergymen, it is supposed one-tenth may
be truly spiritual men ; and the number of such
is increasing. The Danes are among the most
highly civilized people in Europe ; but the
higher classes in the church are very worldly.
The clergy are well educated ; the Danish at
Copenhagen ; the German, some at Kiel, where
the professors are sound in the faith, and some
in the German universities. The government
has long sustained missions to the heathen ; but
the missionary spirit has much declined in the
national church. There is no home missionary
institution. Toleration is complete, although
the clergy are very jealous of any movements
which threaten to disturb the general apathy.
Bibles and tracts are circulated to some extent
by the native and foreign societies. Denmark
has small colonies in Asia, Africa, and America,
containing about 110,000 souls. The Lap-
landers are about 5000, very low in their phy-
sical and moral life. The Swedish mission
among them is quite prosperous, having en-
joyed a revival of great interest in 1851, under
the labors of the zealous Teelstrom. The re-
vival in Sweden was promoted both by preach-
ing and books. And an intelligent observer
remarks, that the converts made through read-
ing are better instructed than those converted
by preaching, but are narrower in their views.
The revival was' most powerful at ;i distance
from the capital, and yet it extended to the
students of theology in the University of Up-
sala.
^4. J5eZo:/(im.— Population, 4,350,500 (U.),
of wliich 4,304,000 are Roman Catholics,
10,000 Protestants, 30,000 Jews. (E. C, III.
234.) By a happy combination of skill and
firmness the politicians availed themselves of
the zeal of the Roman clergy in 1830, to throw
oif the Protestant yoke of Holland, and secured
a Constitution guaranteeing complete religions
toleration. An efficient missionary society,
established at Brussels, is laboring earnestly,
but with too little sympathy and support from
foreign churches, to extend the kingdom of
Christ among that people, once so bliiid!^' sub-
missive to tlie Papal yoke. There are 7 Eng-
lish Pipiscopal churches ; 8 Union Evangelical
churches: \'l I'rotestant French churchfts, and
15 churches of converted Catholics.
^ 5. fVauce.— Population, 35,401,000. (U.)
France is one of the great historical nations.
Its life embodies principles of profound impor-
tance, and presents features altogether peculiar.
Its political position is at least second in Eu-
rope. Its social and intellectual power is
great, and its colonial possessions contain
4,060,000 inhabitants. But we are now spe-
cially interested in the history of religion in
France. And there is no church whose annals
make a stronger appeal to the sympathies of
the universal church than those of the Hugue-
nots. Piedmont, Scotland, and France are
made sacred by the toils and blood of men of
whom the world was not worthy. The French
mind is in a peculiar state, differing from that
of any other Roman Catholic country. In
Germany the privilege of intellectual specu-
lation and research, and an unobstructed exer-
cise of the social feelings is generally an abun-
dant compensation for any privation of a par-
ticipation in questions of policy, and of any
share in governing society. The Spanish type
of civilization and society is worn out, as com-
pletely as are those of ancient Egypt, Greece,
or Rome. In modern Italy this is true also, to
a great extent. But in France there arc yet
vast intellectual resources, as fertile a vein,
perhaps, as in the Anglo-Norman race, and far
more social, propagandist, and missionary in
its tendencies. Ranke observes that " the
French have ever attentively meditated the
great problems of the church and the state,
and communicated them to all other nations,
with that talent of expression which is peculiar
to them." France is the most important mis-
sionary country for the Roman Church. Of
three hundred foreign missionaries she employs,
more than half are Frenchmen. But the pre-
sent state of the French mind in regard to all
the higher interests of man and society is dis-
couraging. They accept an absolute, one- will
government, because just now they are in a
period of painful waiting, perhaps transition.
They accept the Emperor and absolute autho-
rity as an iron band around society, painful in
its pressure, but indispensable to hold together
its heterogeneous and conflicting elements.
Perhaps many of the best of her people are dis-
couraged, regarding themselves as in the posi-
tion of Rome when liberty had perished in her
street^s. But we know that Christ, who by his
word and his Church penetrated that decaying
mass, can introduce the leaven of life into un
happy France. She must see that the Roman
type of Christianity is as much worn out as
was the Roman type of civilization. There is
outside of Romanism, and proscribed by the
Latin Church, a pure Christianity, the same
which regenerated Roman Gaul ; and it can
now regenerate Christian Roman France.
(Rev. Chret. Introd. I. 1.)
The Revolution had overthrown Romanism
and Christianity together ; for the French peo-
ple had believed that they were identical. But
EUROPE.
353
a returning religious feeling manifested itself
in Catholics, Protestants, and Jews. And
while Napoleon in the Concordate* of 1801
placed the Roman Church on a new footing,
the three religious systems were placed at the
same time on the same level before the law,
and a theological school for French Protestants
at Montaubau Avas adopted by the government,
as also a German theological school in Alsace,
for the German Lutheran population of that
portion of France. So that the government
supports 507 Presbyterian pastors, 249 Luther-
an, and 114 Jewish teachers. There are 956
Protestant churches under the care of the gov-
ernment, of which 660 are French, 296 Ger-
man, costing .$250,000, about equally divided
between the evangelical and rationalist clergy.
The Roman Church has 15 Archbishops, 65
Bishops, 175 Vicegerents, 661 Canons, 3,388
Cures, 29,537 incumbents of chapels of ease,
6 Chaplains of cemeteries, 7,190 Vicars, making
a total of 41,037, costing the government less
than before the Revolution, but still an enor-
mous sum. Before the Revolution the reve-
nue of the Catholic clergy in France was
^30,000,000. It is now about $20,000,000,
not derived from direct tax, but from the pub-
lic treasury. Neither instruction, eloquence,
or piety is to be witnessed in many of this vast
body of successors to Fenelon, Massilon, Bos-
suet, and Bridaine.
More than forty societies are laboring to
give the Gospel to France. Although the
government favors the priesthood, yet it is
jealous of them, and will not come under their
control. There are unmistakable marks of
the wane of Romanism in France. The vio-
lent measures of the Revolution would natu-
rally cause a reaction. But now the minds of
men are receiving light gradually and health-
fully. We see marks of the waning power of
the Roman Church in the contest between the
Archbishop of Paris and a lay-editor, in which
the Pope gives his verdict against an arch-
bishop in favor of a layman. This weakens
the clerical arm. We see it also in her failure
to secure a change in the marriage law, and
in the change of feeling towards the clergy.
From 1830 to 1840, honest men looked to
them as a barrier against socialism. But it is
now seen that their love of liberty was hypo-
critical. And when the people get the power
again, there will probably be no door of
return, perhaps of escape, for the priests.
g 6. Switzerland.— YopvLlation, 2,424,400.
Of these, 971,820 are Roman Catholics ;
1,417,474 Protestants; 3,146 Jews. The thir-
teen repuUics constitute one confederation.
The Reformation left that country divided on
the great religious question. The two com-
munions, however, lived in amity until Carlo
Borromeo arose, who, though only an arch-
* The Concordatps are conventions between the Pope
and Bccular sovereigns.
23
bishop, governed the Roman world. He in-
vaded Switzerland, by founding a Swiss col-
lege at Milan, opening for the Swiss the Ger-
man college at Rome, in which they were the
most numerous ; for, while 21 of the pupils
were Hanoverian, 25 Prussian, and 40 Bava-
rian, 48 were Swiss. He likewise sent the
Jesuits to Switzerland, who established them-
selves at Lucerne and Fribourg. He also
procured that a nuncio should be sent from
Rome to reside among them. These efforts
succeeded in alienating the Catholic Swiss
from their Protestant fellow-citizens ; and
" thus was gained to the Holy See the proud
and free country of primitive Switzerland, its
nationality sacrificed, the gates of the Alps
opened to the powerful house of Spain."
[Prof. Vulliemin, of Lausanne, vide E. C, v. p.
358.) About the time of Napoleon's abdica-
tion, three facts signalized the reappearance
of the Pope in Switzerland : the inscription
of an article in a new federal pact, conse-
crating the inviolability of the property of the
convents ; the organization of the episcopal
circumspection, in favor of Rome ; and the
return of the Jesuits. The ultimate result of
this was, that the Jesuits became insufferable,
and the Sunder bund was organized, which tri-
umphed over them. The political organization
of the country was then changed ; and the
confederation of states became one state.
This threw the political power into the hands
of the majority, who are Protestant. The
Jesuits were expelled ; liberty of worship was
guaranteed every where ; ultramontane gov-
ernments were overthrown ; and convent pro-
perty was confiscated. Five Roman Catholic
cantons then met together, and voted to main-
tain their entire sovereignty. They are now
patiently and confidently awaiting the day
when their church will again be ascendant.
The policy of the powerful European gov-
ernment has placed this little mountainous
territory out of the great whirlpool of the
" balance of power " system. Or, we should
rather go back to a higher purpose, and admire
the goodness of God in guaranteeing to that
people their civil rights, although surrounded
by ambitious and grasping potentates. But
the infidel democracy which expelled the
Jesuits, has been to the cantons De Vaud and
Neufchatel as great a scourge as a pope or an
emperor would have been. They threw off
the bands of the Jesuit, only to play the
tyrant themselves.
Geneva and Vaud are recovering some of
the spirit of the Reformation ; and the theo-
logical schools of Lausanne and Geneva have
furnished a race of well-qualified ministers for
their churches, and for the foreign service. A
band of faithfvtl disciples at Geneva have taken
advantage of their central position, and la-
bored with great success to disseminate the
truth in France and in Italy. The free church
of the Canton of Vaud has passed through a
354
EUROPE.
fiery furnace ; but the arm of the Lord is with
his people.
g 7. Itdy. Population, 24,573,100. (U.)
The traveler from the new world to Rome and
Naples is forced to exclaim : " O Italy, land
of beauty ; home of art, of priests, and of beg-
gars ! " God has blessed it with his gifts ;
man has cursed it with hypocrisy and tyranny.
In the Roman States there is one priest to
every 51 persons ; which, together with 1,400
receptacles of indolence and fanaticism, called
monasteries and nunneries, consume the moral
and financial strength of the country. Until
recently, it has been difficult to make the light
penetrate any section of this spiritually be-
nighted part of Europe. But great changes
have taken place within seven years. _ Large
numbers of Bibles have been distributed ;
many conversions have taken place ; and faith-
ful Italian preachers are proclaiming the pure
Gospel of Christ to their countrymen.
Sardinia has now become the object of pe-
culiar interest to the friends of religion and
religious liberty. The sovereign, though a
Roman Catholic, is following out the liberal
policy of his father and predecessor ; and thus,
both "the Waldeuses are freed from the yoke,
which, for centuries, has oppressed, if not dis-
couraged them, and the field is open for the
cultivation of every one who wishes to enter
it. The Waldenses number 23,000 ; with 16
pastors, and 3 Italian missionaries, recently
ordained for the Roman Catholic people.
Their college has 8 professors and 84 students.
They have a religious newspaper, Buona
Novella, and an Jnti-papal secular paper,
La Gazetta del Fopolo.
There are iri Italy four religious parties that
seriously thrc-aten popery : the Giobertists,
the Infidel Catholico-politicians, the Socialist-
Pantheists, the Evangelicals. The Giobertists
arc followers of the distinguished priest who
served the King of Sardinia as prime%iinistcr.
Piedmont is the stronghold of his followers,
who still belJeve that tlie Roman Church can
be brought % the pure belief and practice of
Christianity. The followers of Giovini declare
themselves Catholics, but are really infidels.
They cling tC religious expressions only to de-
ceive the people. The followers of Ansonio
Franchi are Socialists and Pantheists. The
fourth party ino.hides the Waldenses.
§ 8. Germany. — Population : Austria 12^-.
700,000 ; Pruss a, 12.200.000 ; German States',
17,100.000; totd, 42,000,000 (U.)* Of these
more than 20,000,000 are Roman Catholic ;
maiiy millions belong to the Greek Church ;
and 18,000,000 are of the various Protestant
churches ; with less thau 1,000,000 Jews.
There are thirty-four sovereign states in Ger-
many, each having its own church, ecclesiasti-
cal constitution, and liturgy. The clergy of
one state are often not recognized in another.
Austria is the most heterogeneous in its struc-
ture, having a population of 18,000,000 (in-
cluding Lombardy and Venice,) immensely
varied in race, language, and religion. More
than ten millions are Germans ; about eighteen
millions of the Sclavonic tribes ; five millions
Italians ; four millions Magyars ; and less thau
a million Jews.
The best thing that distinguishes any of the
German states is popular education. In Prus-
sia 77 per cent, of the children between the
ages of 6 and 14, or more than 15 per cent, of
the people, are in the public schools ; while in
England and Wales only 11 1-2 per cent, are
in them. Protestants and Catholics being so
nearly equal in numbers, intolerance is not
carried so far as in the purely Catholic coun-
tries, or as in Sweden. Austria is compelled
even to support Protestant interests. The
government supports a Protestant Theological
Seminary in Vienna ; but one of the examin-
ers of every candidate for the ministry is a
Catholic. In Vienna are three Protestant
pastors over 20,000 souls. There are in Up-
per Austria twelve Protestant congregations,
containing upwards of 16,000 members. But
the Protestant portion of Hungary has felt
the rigor of Austrian bigotry. In a popula-
tion of nearly 13,000,000 (E. C, V. 494),
nearly 3,000,000 are Protestants; but they
are kept in most degrading and painful sub-
jection. No feature of the German churches,
however, has so much afifected the Christians
of other nations as their sad declension from
the simple and fervent faith which character-
ized the period of the Reformation, to the blas-
phemous neology and rationalism of the last
fifty years. That people seem literally to have
undertaken to find God, a Saviour, and salva-
tion in their own personal existence and con-
sciousness. When the venerable Krummacher
was called on to describe the infidelity of his
country, he commenced by remarking : " I
feel as if I had to describe a new fall of man."
He traces the declension (E. C, V. 328), back
to the very age after Luther's death. For-
malism and an intellectual apprehension of the
Gospel were substituted for the life and earnest-
ness of the first period. Discipline also de-
♦ Dr. Marriott (E. C, I., TV., V.) makes a widely different estimate from this. He reports (and ij^^loser accord-
ance with the Gothaisclfjs Taschenbuchr) :
' Catholics.
Austria (withou^fr/imbardy) 11,113,642
I'luKsia t 5,820,123
<-'Uier States 6,732,359
Greeks.
Protestants.
.Tews.
3,178
244,538
110,044
1,879
9,428,911
206,529
127
14,180,524
238,296
Add I.omb«rdy and Venice.
Total.
11,471,402
15,457,442
20,151,305
47,080,149
. 6,068,000
62,148,149
EUROPE.
355
clined ; and when John Arndt appeared and
preached the necessity of regeneration, he was
reproached as a fanatic. The same experience
Speuer had, a century later. Then the " Pie-
tists " themselves prepared the way of the ap-
proaching apostasy by their opposition to doc-
trine. Naturalism was imported from Eng-
land, and Deism from France, and both found
a ready soil in hearts declined from God.
Frederic the Great contributed mightily to
the spread of infidelity. Kant, in a measure,
checked the destructive tide, though he left a
heathen philosojihy as his legacy to his i^oor
country. Fichte and Schelling began the
work of philosophical reverence for the dog-
mas of Scripture and church theology. The
overthrow of Napoleon touched the heart of
the oppressed German nations, and they began
to return to the God of their fathers. Still,
indifference, rationalism, and radicalism great-
ly prevail. In Berlin, out of 400,000 persons,
not more than 20,000 visit the house of God.
" A literature diabolically insipid, and sneak-
ing about in darkness, does not cease to nurse
and fructify these principles (of scepticism.)
Little more is necessary than that a mighty
and gifted personality should appear, who
should set himself up as the centre of infidel-
ity, and represent it with energetic pathos and
strong decision, and the reign of ' the Man of
Sin ' would be among us in more than a state
of embryo." The artizan clubs have given
most favorable opportunities for spreading
atheism among the working classes. In the
smaller Saxon Principalities, the consistories
are rationalistic ; while in Baden, Rhenish Ba-
varia, and Hesse Darmstadt they are of the
laisser aller school. It is said that in these
countries there are ten unbelievers in the min-
istry to one believer. There are towns in
Rhenish Bavaria where not more than ten or
twenty persons are found in church on Sunday
morning, and where not a single individual is
found to attend the sacrament on the great fes-
tival days. (E. C., III. 362.) Many of the
universities and gymnasia are yet wholly ra-
tionalistic. But there are brighter features in
the picture. There is a manifest returning
from this apostasy. The evangelical portion
of the church is laboring in many ways, and
with the most encouraging success, to restore
a pure faith to the land of the Reformation.
Much has been done, and systematically too,
in some of the uuiversitiCvS, to arrest the pro-
gress of rationalism, by literary efforts, and
likewise for the advancement of practical god-
liness. The Inner Mission is doing an excel-
lent work in Eastern Prussia, Pomerauia, Ber-
lin, Silesia, Saxony, Hamburg, &c. It is of
recent date that German Christians should
send out missionaries to the poor, and to pro-
mote the observance of the Sabbath. In
Hermansburg, Hanover, there is a college for
Home Missionaries, and a very efficient pastor
is over the church there In fact, an Ameri-
can, for some time resident there, observes :
" In general, the cause of evangelical piety is
steadily advancing in Germany ; and the re-
turn of that great nation to the principles of
the Reformation can be safely predicted. The
change from the state of things twenty-five
years ago, when rationalism reigned, to the
present state, is wonderful."
g 9. iiiwsia.— Population, 62,000,000 (tJ.)
Of these we may conjecturally make the fol-
lowing distributions : Greek Church, 50,650,-
000 ; Catholics (Roman and Armenian), 2,790,-
000 ; Protestants, 3,770,000 ; Mohammedans,
2,262,000 ; Jews, 1,138,000 ; Armenians, 640,-
000; Pagans, 750,000. The Greek Church
resembles the Church of Rome in ceremonial
rites ; but holds in common with her only
those opinions which they held alike previ-
ously to the Nicene Council. The Greek
Church accords more nearly with the Protest-
ant on these points : the source of all religious
doctrine ; the corruption of human nature ;
the Mediator ; divine grace ; the sacraments ;
the church ; and the future state. This may
be seen more fully drawn out in Dr. Pinker-
ton's work on Russia, in his translation of a
work by Philaret, Archimandite, written in
1815 to counteract the influence of the Jesuits
over the Russian nobility. There is much
ignorance and superstition. It is true, as Dr.
Pinkerton remarks : " A church in which the
people are permitted to read the Scriptures in
a language which they understand, and which
acknowledges this Word as the highest tribu-
nal in matters of faith, is still possessed of the
best reformer of all superstition." Yet our
missionaries thus far have found the Greeks
more impenetrable than the Catholics. The
Czar is the head of the national church, which
accordingly has no patriarch. And the pres-
ent sovereign has acted up to his convictions
of the duties of his ofiice in prosecuting the
work of proselytizing with great activity. The
Gazette of St. Petersburg at one time boasted
of 45,000 Protestants brought over to the Na-
tional Church in one year. These labors have
been put forth chiefly in the Baltic provinces,
and in a way not very creditable to a mighty
sovereign. All religions are tolerated ; but
no one may proselyte from the Greek Church.
An able writer has divided the sects into three
classes, one of which includes native dissenters
of a very remarkable stamp. They are the
most active and spiritual Christians in the
empire, probably amounting to two million
souls. They may not always keep within due
limits, but they are a kind of unlearned Puri-
tans in the dead Greek Church. They are
called Molakai. In another class appear some
of the most deluded fanatics ; even rivaling
in fierceness the pagans of India. Some
of them are called self-mutilators ; others,
self-immolators. Of the latter, as many as one
hundred have burned themselves to death to-
gether.
356
EUEOPE.
On the 23d of January, 1813, the Eussian
Bible Society was formed, by permission of the
Emperor Alexander. Great zeal was mani-
fested, and in a few years, more than 800,000
copies of the Scriptures, in whole or in part,
were distributed. An anecdote is told, show-
ing how this zeal reached the humbler classes.
A chimney-sweeper presented himself at a
meeting of the society to make his subscrip-
tion. Every person was surprised at his appear-
ing there for that object, and still more so when
he set down his name for seven dollars. The
Secretary delicately remonstrated against his
subscribing so much. He replied : " I intend
to subscribe this sura yearly. And if I might
ask a favor of the society, I should like to have
the honor of sweeping the chimneys of the
Bible House for nothing." Affected to tears
by the scene, says the narrator, they granted
his request. The house, being a present from
the Emperor, was very large ; so that the
sweeper "s donation really amounted to nearly
thirty dollars. The clergy extensively shared
this zeal. But Nicholas, whose policy is to
make the Christian idea subordinate to the
Eussian, in 1820 ordered the suppression of
the whole movement. There is still, however,
some circulation of the Scriptures in Finland
and the Baltic provinces, and among the exiles
as they are leaving Moscow to go to Siberia.
And it is an interesting fact for a Protestant
to record, that Dr. Haas, chairman of the
prison discipline committee of Moscow, takes
a lively interest in supplying the exiles and
prisoners with the New 'J'estament ; and he is
0, Eoman Catholic. In 1812 the Princess So-
phia Meschessky translated an English tract,
" an address to the afflicted." This was pecu-
liarly ajjpropriate to the circumstances of the
nation ; tlie French just then retreating from
Moscow. She distributed it among the ruined
and scattered inhabitants of that city. The
favorable reception it met encouraged her to
continue her labors ; and she had written or
translated, and published at least one hundred
different tracts, when the Emperor Alexander
came to her help. The work then expanded ;
and it has gone forward with little interruption,
covering an immense field with the seeds of a
glorious harvest. There is a censorship that
extends to every tract published. But it seems
to be candid and liberal. The Eus.sian news-
papers often speak in high commendation of
the tracts. A jjcculiarly favoraltlc opportu-
nity for the sale of evangelical books occurs at,
the annual fair of Nizney Novogorod. Here
arc to be met representatives from China,
India, 1'aitary, Bucharia, Persia, Turkey.
Greece, Italy, France. Germany, and England.
An Auii'vican merchant disposed, at one fair,
of iri(i,(j()0 tracts and books. The Siberian
exiles, on departing from Moscow, likewise re-
ceive thein.
§ 10. Spain and Poitugal. — Population. —
Spain, 12,000,000; Portugal, 3,725,000 (U.)
This people are almost universally within the
pale of the Eoman Church ; though the edu-
cated class, as in other Catholic countries, is
almost, without exception, iutidel. There re-
main out of the Church in Spain, some 500,000
basques, 60,000 Moors, and 45,000 gipsies. (U.)
Toleration by the governments is complete for
foreigners, so far as their own worship is con-
cerned. But the law was evidently construct-
ed on the presumption that no native would
ever desire to abandon the Catholic forms, and
then the influence of the clergy is so powerful
as to greatly obstruct the action of evangeli-
cal missions. Spain can be approached on
the side of France, and from Gibraltar. The
foithful church at Nismes has organized a mis-
sion tor the French Protestants in Spain, and
conducted it with encouraging success. A
Protestant pastor is about to be settled over
the little French church in Barcelona. Be-
sides the evangelical school at Gibraltar, con-
taining 330 children and 89 adults, the Eev,
Mr. Rule, a Wesleyan missionai-y, believes that
missions could be established in Madrid, Ca-
diz, and other large towns. And it certainly
was a large concession for a Catholic magis-
tracy in Spain to grant the Protestants of
Madrid permission to purchase a cemetery for
their dead, and conduct the funeral ceremonies
in their own way.
In Portugal there is less hindrance to evan-
gelical labor than in Spain ; there being no
other hindrance to introducing the Scriptures
than a heavy duty. Protestant worship is al-
lowed, if the place of worship does not assume
the appearance of one. Gomez, who was once
a Spanish priest, converted and naturalized as
a Portuguese subject, is a faithful laborer in
Lisbon. He reported, in 1849, as many as
four thousand enlightened by his labors.
Among these were several priests, but who
dai'cd not avow the change openly. The igno-
rance of the people is dei)lorable. In all Por-
tugal only 31,280 pupils in their schools, and
the splendid University of Salamanca, once
the glory of Spain, has utterly declined from
the position it held in the sixteenth century.
The feeble government of Spain yet holds
sway over nearly 5,000,000 colonists in Africa,
America, the Philippine and Ladronc islands.
^11. Greece and the Ionian Isles. — Popula-
tion 1,220,000. The educated Greeks are infi-
dels ; the people generally ignorant aiul super-
stitious. There seems to be no improvement
in the Church ; but the literary men are mak-
ing most ])raise-worthy efforts to restore the
former intellectual glory of their country: and
their success in restoring the classic as a sub-
stitute for the modern language, is very re-
markable. The labors of our missionaries are
described under the article Greece. Perhaj)s
we may see one fruit of them in the recent
work of Professor I'harmakides, I'rol'essor of
Theology in the University of Athens. Ho
has written a book in answer to a Decree of
EUROPE.
357
the Churcli of Constantiuople, which affects to
govera Greece ecclesiastically.* The mother
church ccQSured the church in Greece for as-
serting her independence. The professor re-
plied to it, but in replying, he has attacked
the history, doctrines and rites of his church,
in a most efficient manner. Greece has taken
a high educational position since the recovery
of her political independence. In the capital
of each of her twelve states is planted a college
(three in Athens), a high school and a com-
mon school. In every country town is a high
and a common school. In every village of
400 houses is a common school, which is at-
tended from September to April ; and the
Minister of Instruction has issued an order
requiring all common school- masters to hold
a school on Sunday, for instruction in the
Scriptures.
Geoi'ge Rijari, a wealthy Greek merchant,
bequeathed a large portion of his property
for the founding a theological school in Athens,
which furnishes a very good five years' course
to the candidates for the priesthood. The uni-
versity of Otho has advanced greatly in the
numbers of pupils, having, in 1839, 52 ; in
1853, 590. There are but few avowed dis-
senters in Greece. The Protestants are gene-
rally foreigners. Of these, about one hundred
are Lutherans, who attend worship with the
queen, in the palace. The chapel in the palace
is used by both the king and the queen, alter-
nately for Roman Catholic and for Lutheran
worship. The English Episcopalians have a
chapel, with a few worshipers, for the most
part English and Americans, connected with
the British embassy and the American episco-
pal mission. The Baptists have met with little
success. There are many Catholics in the
island of Syra, Tenos and Naxas. They have
a small church in Athens, and are building
another quite large. They have also a church
at the Piraeus, and several at the islands. The
missionaries stationed in Greece are two Bap-
tists and one Congregational, one Episcopalian
from America, one English Episcopalian, and
several Roman Catholics. The results of the
Roman Catholic missionary labors are, a mul-
tiplication of little crosses, beads, and wonder-
working medals of the Virgin Mary ; devotion
to her ; subjection to the Pope of Rome ; re-
jection of the Word of God ; the prohibition
of independent thought and investigation.
Two daughters of the Rev. Mi*. S., for a long
time agent of the British Bible Society, have
gone to the Roman church, and refuse to read
the Book their father labored to circulate, and
are now in a nunnery in Syra, and treat their
mother in a manner to be justified only by
those who say, that if a man say to his father
* The Patriarch of Constantinople is chief of the synod,
embracing Turkey, Austria, and the Ionian Isles. Independ-
ent Greece has three bishops, independent of the Patriarch
of Constantuiople, yet they aclinowledge his supremacy in
matters of faith.
or mother, ." Corban," he is free. (Mark vii.
11, 12.)
The labors of the Episcopal mission in
Athens and Syra have been directed chiefly to
the establishment of schools and the instruc-
tion of children. The American Episcopal
missionaries have disclaimed all intention to
draw any one from the Greek church, and a
large portion of those whom they have in-
structed are devoted to the Greek church, and
conform to all its ceremonies. They have all
employed the New Testament in their schools,
and this, it is to be hoped, will produce some
salutary effect.
The Greeks are proverbially deceitful, and
some of the professed converts have betrayed
their unworthy motives. " Of those," says Mr.
King, " who have come to me at various
times, and professed to believe the doctrines I
preach, and offered to become, as they said,
my followers, while some were intelligent and
sincere, many were deceived, and many deceiv-
ing." The labors of the missionary formerly
employed at Maui, by the American Board
of Foreign Missions, produced very happy re-
sults. Some hundred young men, who were
taught in the missionary schools there, now
hold important stations, civil or military. And
many who were taught, more or less in the
schools, under the care of Mr. King, in Athens,
hold important stations under the Greek gov-
ernment. Several are teachers of Hellenic
schools ; some are military officers ; one is at
the head of a gymnasium ; some are in situa-
tions in which they can exert an influence far
vorable to religious liberty. The sacred Scrip-
tures have been introduced into all the schools
of Greece, and among the common people,
and thousands have heard the truth, who, but
for the missionaries, would never have heard
it. A great degree of religious liberty has
been secured.
I 12. Turkey (European).-— Population,
12,500,000 (U.) ; 12,080,000 (D.*) : as follows :
Mohammedan Osmanlees 700,000
" Albanians & Sclavonians 3,000,000
Greeks, true Hellenic 1,180,000
" WaUachians, Mol- 1 g jgQ qqq
3,700,000
davians, &c.
7,330,000
Nntivc Roman Catholics and Europeans 550,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
Armenians .
Jews
Gipsies
12,080,000
The American Board have in this and Asi-
atic Turkey, a mission to each of the following
peoples : to the Armenians ; to the Greeks ;
the Jews ; the Syrians ; the Jacobites and
Chaldeans ; and the Nestorians. These mis-
sions consist of forty-three American mission-
* D. represents Rev. H. G. 0. Pwight, American mission-
ary to Turkey, to whom we are indebted for this view of
Turkey.
358
EUROPE.
aries and their wives, with one hundred and
nine native assistants. For fuller' statements,
see Armenians, Nestorians, Syria, and Mosul.
The Free Church of Scotland have an in-
teresting mission to the Jews at Constantino-
ple. The London Jews' Society has another
to the same people. Connected with the
American Missions are schools of various
grades, presses, &c. From the beginning, the
American missionaries alone have printed
more than 120,000,000 pages. The whole
Bible has been translated, under the super-
vision of the missionaries, into Hebrew-Span-
ish, Armeuo-Turkish, modern Armenian ; and
portions of it into other dialects. The Pil-
grim's Progress, Rise and Progress, Saints'
Rest, Butler's Analogy, D'Aubigne's Reforma-
tion, and similar works, have been translated
and distributed. The labors of the American
missionaries among the Armenians, and of the
Scottish missionaries among the Jews of Con-
stantinople, have been accompanied by the
most visible results. Among the Turks there
is as yet no such national movement toward
reformation, and the reception of spiritual
Christianity, as among the Armenians. Be-
sides the instances of an open renunciation of
the old church, there are many manifest results
of missionary labor in those who still remain
in the church. The opinions and practices of
the people in regard to several of their ancient
superstitions are changing : for example, the
use of pictures in churches is in many cases
discontinued ; coiilession to priests is less prac-
ticed ; the fasts are more neglected. There
arc now ten schools where one formerly ex-
isted. Discussion on the main points in con-
troversy between evangelical religion and the
multiform errors of formalism is now quite
common throughout the whole Armenian race
in 'J'urkey. Many, still remaining in the Ar-
menian Church, are fully convinced of its
errors, and laboring to hasten the day when
they shall be fully and openly renounced.
Fifteen evangelical churches have already
been formed among the Armenians in different
parts of European and Asiatic Turkey, and
more will soon be formed. IVobably 2,.'300
Lave already been enrolled as Protestants ;
and the number is increasing. Protestantism
is now protected by the government as fully
as any other form of religion.
The hindrances to the coming' of Chri.st's
kingdom in this country are, however, still
quite formidable. 1'he Greeks have a pride
of ancestry and church antiquity, a blind su-
perstition and submission to a priesthood very
jealous of their prerogatives, and vigilant
against the invasion of their darkness by any
beam of light. 'J'Im- Romanist.s are here, as
every when', either bigots or infidels, and vigi-
lantly guarded by the Popes emissaries. The
Armenians are embarras,sed in their inquiries
by the social penalties of deserting their
church. The Jews have a low, deceitful,
mercenary spirit, and seem, for the most part,
incapable of ajoprcciating an appeal to any
lofty sentiment.
No missionaries are designated directly to
the Mohammedans. Probably, most, if not
all the missionaries in Turkey have, however,
more or less intercourse with this class ; and,
in some instances, there is opportunity to
preach to them the Gospel. The chief hin-
drance to its success among them is the unre-
pealed law, that an apostate from Mohamme-
danism must be put to death. Some years
ago, it is true, the English ambassador forced
from the Sultan a pledge that this sentence
should not be executed in the case of a man
who, from being a Christian, embraced Mo-
hammedanism, and then returned to the Chris-
tian faith. But for all true Turks this cruel
law is still in force ; and has, in one instance,
been executed even since the British fleet en-
tered those waters to protect the Turks against
the Russians ! Let this law once be repealed,
and liberty given to all Mohammedans to era-
brace what religion they please, and we have
the best reasons for believing that Protestant
Christianity would very soon spread among
them. Romanism they never will adopt.
Several large bodies of men exist in Tur-
key, among w'hom no missionaries are yet
laboring, — and some of these may be said to be
fairly open for such labors ; such as the Bul-
garians,— professing the Greek faith, — who,
for several years past, have eagerly sought for
the word of God ; the AVallachians, (of the
same faith,) who, though more worldly in their
views, are yet, it is said, in a great measure
free from the shackles of priestcraft ; and the
Hellenic Greeks themselves, in the Turkish
empire, numbering probably 2,000,000, pre-
sent a field, if not yet wholly open, still not by
any means devoid of promise, and one which
hitherto has been l)ut very imperfectly sup-
plied with laborers.
The oiwuings in the Armenian field arc the
most remarkable, and, though the urgent call
for more laborers has not yet been fully re-
sponded to, we consider this field as occupied
by the American Board, and it may be hoped
that the i)nmiised reinforcement will soon be
sent by that efficient body to occupy it fully.
— Rev. E. N. Kikk.
Methodist Missions in Europe. — I. Tfie
several scctio)is of 3Idhodism engaged in this
work Hu the order in which they entered
upon tlieir labors) are — the (Engli-sh) Wesley-
an Methodists ; the (Irish) "Wesleyan Metho
dists ; the (Irisli) Primitive AVesleyan Metho-
dists ; the Methodist New Connexion; the
(English) Primitive ]\rethodists ; the Wesleyan
Methodist A.ssociation ; and the Methodist
Episcopal Church in the United States.
H. The Countries of Europe where these
several bodies are operating are as follows:
besides destitute parts of England. Methodi.st
missions have been established in the Normau
EUROPE.
t-
359
Isles, Ireland, Wales, Spain, France, Shetland
Isles, Switzerland, Germany, Sweden, Norway,
Corsica, and the Sardinian States.
III. The mode of operation in the manage-
ment of these missions. — With the exception of
the Continental missions, which are paid direct
from the General Mission Fund, the Home
missions of English Methodism are managed
in connexion with a fund designated the Co7i-
tingent Fund. This fund is made up from the
Yearly collection and the July collection. The
former is made annually in the classes at the
time of the March quarterly visitation. The
ministers meet every class ; and, after hearing
the religious experience of each member, hand
them their ticket (a certificate of continued
membership,) on the receipt of which each
member is expected to name the amount which
he will give to the yearly collection. This
sura is then entered by the leader in the class-
book, and collected by him. It is expected
that the average contribution to this fund is
not to fall short in any circuit of about 12 'a
cents for each member in society. And the
Board of Stewards is expected to do their best
to see this carried out in each case. The
July collection is publicly made in all their
chapels and preaching stations in the month
of July. The Contingent Fund also receives
occasional donations and legacies ; and out of
this fund are paid the contingent expenses of
the Conference ; and the remainder is employ-
ed in assisting the poorer circuits in maintain-
ing the ordinances of the Gospel, and to pro-
vide means of sending and sustaining addi-
tional preachers in destitute localities. This
is the oldest charity of the Methodist Connec-
tion, having been established by the venerable
Wesley himself, at the Thirteenth Annual Con-
ference, in 1756. It has thus been 98 years in
successful operation, and has done much for the
extension of Methodism in the British Isles.
This fund is distributed by a mixed committee,
consisting of the president and secretary of the
Conference, fifteen ministers appointed by that
body, and fifteen lay gentlemen, annually
chosen by the stewards exchisively, at the dis-
trict meetings most contiguous to the place
where the Conference is held. The annual
amount of this fund of late years varies from
$50,000 to over $73,000. There is no dis-
tinction made between the preachers who re-
ceive aid from this fund and their other
brethren. But they are practically " Home
Missionaries," and this fund is " The Home
Mission Fund " of Methodism. After the Gos-
pel has been established by means of this fund
in any new place, it is expected of those who
receive the Gospel through this instrument-
ality, that they shall, as soon as possible, be-
gin to help themselves. Unless in extreme
poverty, the minimum of Methodist contribu-
tion for the support of the ministry, " a penny
a week, and a shilling a quarter," is expected
to be contributed by each member ; and the
amount which their united payments fall short
of the Home missionary's allowance, is made up
from the Contingent Fund. So that each year,
as the Gospel gains adherents, the circuit
finances increase, and, in the same proportion,
the grant from the fund becomes less and less,
until ultimately the self-supporting position is
reached, and the fund is entirely relieved of
the burden ; while, for the service rendered, this
circuit is considered for ever afterward bound in
honor to contribute to both the sources from
whence this fund draws its supplies, in order
that a similar service may be rendered for
other places still destitute. And thus to this
simple, but efficient plan of Home Missionary
finance do more than one half of the circuits
in British Methodism owe their origin.
IV. The Success which has attended their
Efforts. — As already stated, the English Wes-
leyan Home Missions commenced when Mr.
Wesley instituted the Contingent Fund in 1756 ;
and the results are seen only in the general
diffusion of Methodism, because, in proportion
as they were successful, they ceased to be mis-
sionary. In 1786, Mr. Wesley sent Adam
Clarke as a missionary to the Norman Isles,
near the coast of Normandy, whose labors
were blessed ; and these isles now form a dis-
trict under the direction of the English Wes-
leyan Conference, with 11 ministers and 3161
members. Ireland was first included as a home
mission by the Wesleyans in 1799. But these
missions are held under the control of the Irish
Wesleyan Conference. Wcdes was taken up
in the year 1800. The first missionaries being
Owen Davis and John Hughes (since known
as the learned author of Horce Britannicce), and
the result, with the blessing of God, is now
seen in 49 Welsh preachers and 12,203 mem-
bers in society. The Shetland Isles, to the
north of Scotland, the natives of which are
said to be of Norwegian descent, were first oc-
cupied as a mission in 1821. For several
yeai-s they were under the special care of Dr.
A. Clarke. There are now six ministers there,
and 1265 members.
The English Wesleyans established a mission
at Gibraltar in 1808. The Gospel is now
preached there in both English and Spanish,
and of the 250 children in the schools, 224
are Spaniards — a hope of better days to come
for their noble and beautiful, but spiritually
oppressed country.
France. — During the revolutionary war be-
tween France and England. Methodist mission-
aries were regularly supplied to the French
prisoners at Chatham, Plymouth, and Staple-
ton. Soon after the peace of 1815 these efibrts
opened a way into France itself, where the
Wesleyans have now a strong and interesting
mission, which has lately been erected into a
separate organization, with independent action,
but continues to receive pecuniary aid from
the English Wesleyans, and also from the Me-
thodist Episcopal Church in the United States.
360
EUEOPE.
Su-itzerhnd. — This is au off-shoot of the
French nii.-sion. Into Switzerland, the val-
leys of Piothiiont, the hamlets of the Upper
Alps, and even Nice, within the confines of
Italy, Methodist preachers have found their
way, and gathered little churches. The socie-
ties here, and in the south of France, are now
enjoying a revival of religion such as never
was experienced by them before. The Na-
tional Reformed Church, the Free Church,
and the Dissenters have also begun to share
largely in its blessings. The missionary in the
Upper Alps, Mr. Bostan, is a convert of the
great and good Felix Neff, whose field of labor
he here cultivates as a Wesleyan missionary.
Germany. — In Winnenden, in the kingdom
of Wirtemberg, the Wesleyan Missionary So-
ciety have a most precious work going forward,
conducted, under very peculiar circumstances,
by the venerable Mr. Miiller, assisted by 20
local preachers, with 1100 church mem-
bers.
Sweden. — Here they have a chapel, and
many members in Stockholm, begun in 1826,
but the intolerant laws put in force against all
ministers not of the Establishment, obliged the
missionary, Mr. Scott, to quit the field. But
a work has been done there which intolerant
laws cannot extinguish — and which may yet
break forth on the right hand and on the
left.
TJie Irish Wesleyan Methodist Home Missions
were commenced in 1799. These missions are
scattered over different parts of Ireland ; and
by the preaching of a pure Gospel and the main-
tenance of schools where the Holy Scriptures
are taught daily, they are instrumental in pre-
serving and extending the saving power of.
Protestant truth in distant and necessitous
localities, which would otherwise be almost, if
not entirely destitute of its enlightening and
regenerating influences. Some remarkable
men have risen up in connection with these
missions, " whose praise is in the churches,"
among whom are the honored names of Charles
Graham, Thomas Wahh, and Gideon Ousley.
These men in tlie streets, and fairs, and mar-
kets of Ireland, in Ireland's own tongue, have
sown broadcast over the Cduntry those seeds
of evangelical truth, the fruits of which others
are now reaping, in the present retorniations
from Popery in that land. l\'rha])s few fields
of Christian activity have yielded richer results
for the labor bestowed upon them. Besides
conserving the interests of I'rotestantism in
many places in Ireland, where I'opi.^i error
would otherwise have rooted up the last vestige
of truth, and also during the past thirty or
forty years sending thousands of evangelical
Metiiodist Christians to Canada, Australia,
and tli<; United States, where they have helped
to sjircad tlu; Cospel, this mission hius given
McKciiney, Lynch, Home, AV. Arthur, and
othei-s to the lureigii missionary entcriyize,
and has furnished the Methodist Kpiscfjpal
Church with a noble addition to her ministry,
among whom stand James Caughey and
Charles Elliott.
The Insh Primitive Wesleyan Methodists arose
in 1816, on the question of the administration
of the sacraments by the Methodist preachers
in Ireland. They wished to adhere as closely
as possible to the practice of Mr. Wesley's
early preachers, and to consider themselves
merely as preachers of the Gospel, without full
ministerial responsibilty. They have for sev-
eral years sustained a missionary agency, chief-
ly in the destitute Protestant portions of the
country, under the shelter of the Church Estab-
lishment, among the members of which they
have done much good.
The Methodist New Connection in England,
which originated in 1797, has a home mission
occupying England, the north of Ireland, and
Canada.
The Primitive Methodists, vulgarly called
"Ranters," are a devoted and laborious body
of Christians, which rose in Staffordshire in
1810. God has greatly owned and blessed
the labors of these humble and faithful men.
Besides England, the home missions of the
Primitives are found in the north and east ol
Ireland, and in Canada. The rapid increase
of this hard-working body of Christians, and
the efBciency of their domestic mission may be
seen from the fact that while in 1830 they had
but 420 chapels, 240 ministers, and 35,733 mem-
bers ; in 1853, they had 1789 chapels, 568
ministers, and 108,926 members ; making an
increase, in 23 years, of 1369 chapels, 328 min-
isters, and 72,193 members. This increase has
been realized, under God, not by any aggres-
sion upon other men's labors, for they have
never built " upon another man's foundation,"
but they have gone forth " into the highways
and hedges," and have reclaimed the outcasts
and the wanderers, for whose souls no one else
has cared. Their prosperity is a matter of re-
joicing to all who pray for the coming of the
Redeemer's kingdom.
The Wesleyan Associat ion, v:h\ch rose in 1834,
under the au.«pices of Dr. Warren, has domes-
tic missions in England, Wales, Ireland, and
Hamburgh. ]^ut tliise eflbrta are only lately
originated, and, as yet, have not enjoyed any
large measure of prosperity.
The Methodist Episcopal Church, in the Uni-
ted States, has several missions of a domestic
character in Europe, and some of which, wheth-
er from the localities where they operate, or
from the rich grace which God has granted
upon their labors, are of the most interesting
character. They are conducted on the same
general plan as their home missions in this
country, for which see Home 31issions. Cer-
manv,"tlie land of Luther, the home of the Rc-
fornuition, now so gievously fallen from its
evangelical standards, is the iirincijnd post
occupied by this branch of the I^lethodist
chinch ; and the wonderful providence which
EUROPE.
361
led her there is thus traced by Dr. McOlintock :
"111 1821, two young men entered the Uni-
versity of Tubingen in Germany, from the gym-
nasium, to complete their education. They
were both well trained according to the Ger-
man plan ; both of promise and talent ; both
were to be theologians. They formed a friend-
ship at the university, and for six years lived,
studied, and formed their plans of life together ;
and they supposed that their lines of life would
be parallel ; that they would both be theolo-
gians— ministers probably, with the usual am-
bition of an enterprising and talented Ger-
man student. In 1827 they both finished their
studies at the university. The name of one of
them is no less a name than that of David
Frederick Strauss, the author of the " Life of
Jesus ; " the name of the other was William
Nast. In eight years from the time he left
the university, Strauss had written that famous
book in comparison with which all that infi-
delity had done before was as nothing. During
those eight years William Nast had come to
America, with blasted hopes and fainting heart,
with no sure Christianity, with no hope in this
life, and with no hope and hardly any belief in
the life to come ; and in eight years he had
been led by Providence through many a lane
of sorrow and darkness, up to the hour when
the memorable awakening occurred which re-
sulted in his conversion.
Thus Providence raised up William Nast to
counteract the evil work of his fellow-student,
and to be the instrument of converting thou-
sands of his fellow-countrymen here, and then
to be a most powerful agency to convert his
fatherland. It is now about nineteen years
since Dr. Nast's conversion. After laboring
here with great success among the Germans
— (See Home 31issions,) — he sailed for Germany
In 1848. He found the door of access wide
open, and having marked out a plan of action,
he returned and reported to the Board. The
Eev. L. S. Jacoby (one of Dr. Nast's own
children in the Lord) was accordingly appoint-
ed, and sailed in 1849, with instructions to
establish the head-quarters of the mission in
the free city of Bremen. The word of the
Lord immediately began to take effect, and to
spread, so that it was necessary to send out ad-
ditional missionaries. These were readily sup
plied from the German converts which God
had given to Dr. Nast in the United State?
The mission has extended itself to Hamburgh
on the north, and Frankfort on the south
and its influence has to some extent pervaded
all the surrounding states. It is also establish-
ed in the kingdom of Wurtemburg. Helpers
have been raised up to preach the Gospel in
the places where they have been converted
Persecutions have followed, and some of the
brethren have been imprisoned and fined, but
they still persist in preaching the Gospel
Some of the ministers of the state churches
oppose and persecute, but a few give their in-
fluence and favor to these brethren. The mis-
sion in Germany is working among the people
and upon the state churches, just as Mr. AVes-
ley's mission did in his early labors in England ;
and if it could have freedom and protection in
all the states of Germany, as it has in the city
and state of Bremen, and as Mr. Wesley and
his mission and helpers had in England, the
work in Germany would probably equal that
of early Methodism in England. Already the
fruits are great. In the state of Bremen they
are formed into churches ; in other states,
where this is not allowed, they arc formed into
societies, and arc met in class and prayer meel>
ings by the prominent persons whom God has
raised up among them, as in the early days of
Methodism. And where they may not enjoy
this privilege, they fly by scores to the United
States, bringing their certificates and joining
the German churches here. There are now,
besides five colporteurs, eleven missionaries iti-
nerating through various parts of Germany.
The localities where they preach and form so-
cieties and Sunday-schools, and other means
of evangelical instruction, are as follows : —
In Bremen they have three chapels : in Bre-
merhaven, Hastedt, Vegesack. In the king-
dom of Hanover they operate in Achim,
Scharmbeck, and a few other minor places.
In the duchy of Oldenburg, in Hasbergen, Dwo-
bergen, and six other places ; also in the
possessions of the princes of Schleufis-Reuss and
Greitz-Rems, and in the kingdom of Saxony,
where on account of persecution, they are
obliged to have their preaching and class-
meetings at the midnight hour ; they also have
circuits in Frankfort-on-the-Main, and in the
kingdom of Wurtemberg, where they have
twelve appointments ; and they have also
established a mission in Hamburgh.
In many of these places the missionaries
have been invited to come and labor, because
the friends of the persons inviting them, who
emigrated to the United States in past years,
have been converted, and have written home
to their families in Germany, explaining the
nature and the joys of personal religion, and
urging it upon their acceptance. These let-
ters have spread light, and excited the desire
to know more of this good way. The mission-
aries have established a printing-press and a
monthly periodical, and have also opened
a book concern for the sale and distribution
of evangelical publications.
France, Italy and Corsica. — The French
Methodist Conference having become inde-
pendent, and having peculiar means of- ex-
tending the Gospel in that empire, the Board
of Missions of the Methodist E. Church have
voted appropriations to assist the brethren
there to extend their interesting work. The
appropriation this year is $5,000. By this
means, additional ministers have been called
out into the work, whose labors are under the
special patronage of the Board. Access to
362
EUROPE.
the Waldensian valleys, in the direction of
Turin, having been much enlarged, Mr. Ras-
tau has been stationed there, and another pro-
mised to help him. A wide and remarkable
door was opened in the city of Nice, in Sar-
dinia, which is the gateway on the Mediterra-
nean, between France and Italy. Besides the
inhabitants, there are great numbers of stran-
gers, who resort here to spend the winter, for
the benefit of their health.
There has also occurred a remarkable open-
ing in the island of Corsica, in the Mediterra-
nean, which is under the government of
France. Occupying, as it does, a central posi-
tion between France, Italy, Spain, Sardinia,
and Algeria, it is the best position in the
south of Europe for a central evangelical Pro-
testant mission. The Methodist missionary is
the only Protestant minister in the whole
island, containing a population of about 250,000
Eomanists. The missionary, Mr. Gallienne, is
assisted by a zealous Christian, a convert from
Popery, of the name of Dominique Rimathie.
They circulate the Scriptures and tracts, both
in the French and Italian languages. They
have also obtained a chapel and opened Pro-
testant services, and God is giving them favor
in the eyes of the people.
In Nonvay the Methodist E. Church has
lately established a mission. Some time ago,
a sailor was converted under the ministry of
Rev. O. C. Hedstroom, of the Bethel ship,
John Wesley, New York. He soon became
eminent lor his piety, and was known among
his ship-mates as " Holy Peter." His anxiety
for the salvation of his kindred induced him
to leave his profession, and return to his native
country, Norway, that he might " tell them
how great things the Lord had done for him."
Ilis simple, earnest exhortations were accom-
panied with the unction of the Holy Spirit,
and many were awakened and converted, so
that it was with difficulty he could tear him-
self from the people, that he might return to
the United States. On his arrival here he
was sent off to preach among his Scandinavian
brethren in the State of Iowa. But the con-
verted souls in Norway earnestly entreated
that he might be sent back to them for their
sake, and for the sake of spreading the good
work among the perishing sinners aroinid
them. After the usual instructions and exam-
inations, he was accordingly ordained, and, in
October, 1853, accompanied by two other con-
verted Norwegian sailors, as his assistants, he
sailed for Norway ; and, when heard from,
they had hired a place to preach in, and had
begun their work with prospects of acceptance
and usefulness. Mr. I'etorson, the missionary,
in a coiiimuuication, dated March 1st. 1854,
" rejoices in God to be able to say that he
believes that twelve or fourteen persons have
been truly converted since they arrived in
Norway."— Rkv. W. Butler.
•sjutonos
1
puB buaqraaj? Sm
OO OOOOOO 1
o
-pnxom 'diqsjoAV
«5 ^ t- O LO c^
o
OJW^d 10 s^"'^
-pnauv JO Jtaqmnx
'£, o
-* a
. vO o o o o o
r-i
»0 U5 CO
»
%sMS
H
"^
^l^cH
°'Z. M >^
to *
.« « lO 05 o o
s
CO ^ C-*
f^
I'^sl
o-C =1
r^
H
■saxes
q;oq JO saTJioqog
■ ■ .(H ■ ■ ■
C)
-Xvci .JO jaqmnjvi
•siooqos
. . .rH . . .
l-<
-jCbci jo joquiiiK
•Sdxajj qjoq
•^ a
.in OO o o o
r^
JO sjTJioqas-qjwq
fi
O O CO
to
-q-Bc; JO jaqiuTiNj
y,
<
'"'
•siooqag-niBq
Cl IH
. H CI rH rH O CO
^,
-qBS JO jaqmnM
pa
SI
rH rH
•diquJequiaH
iH m
. . .CO .Ol .
cc
m if']^ "0
o
•sjaqiuan H^-itiiD
pojipaaDoy puc
Q
CO r-t
CO
IPjI jo jaqumfj
IS
<
^
-s
o
>
y.
<
«l-l
^^ :g3 :<= :
«
u to
i
p^
h5
^<5
a
3 2-S
C5
OJ
p
i^;
•°.'5 '^
pq
^^^
5^
7:
<
H
f-
o
. . .(N ; ; ;
CI
E-i
f-
u%
^
s-g-^
■2
•jT,
3
13 d
tH •
'. '.'^ '.'.'. '.
CI
•SJUBJSISSV
pUT! souimoissijAi
C^i-I
rH H rH lO CI ■* r-<
•saatiitl-SuiqaBaJj
aaqjo jo aaqvuiif^
C^
• CO CO CO 05 Oi C^
C-1 CI
-*
•spiduq;)
JO jaquini^
(N1-l
rH CO <N O N ■<* CO
Cl
r/i
y.
o
K P wi
O'^
CEXTRAL 0
RDTCIPAL STA
OR CIROnT
v^
■ x"
. 3
■a M
1 |s
•a :
'< ^
a
i
Ph
S.C
le&y.-^y^ \
rH O
CO-l-«<£.-X
OS
EUROPR
363
o
01
o
*
O)
t-
t-
to
us
co"
—
co
-
—
—
-
—
?5
4!
■*
M
CO
CO
s
00
•0
o
«
t*
CO
1-1
0
as
*■
00
^
oi
0
C^)
«
■^
0
c^
M
CO
• 0
lO
«
0
CD
00
CO
2
—
—
—
-
-
»
0
'
9
m
T^
00
c
»r
-\
oc
CO
CO
—
—
-
—
>»
S
a-
^
(O
to
-
-
-
«
-
00
^
00
•
a
oc
— 55
0
cr
CO
77
CC'
^
^
e
■"
tc
CO
c
0
c
10
CO
-t
cr
!?;
c
CJJ
B
C4
s
0
c-
'^^
o-
c:
o>_
r-
c»
c^
K
c^
0
c
«
CO
!?5
0
H
0
~ H
_ W
"0"
"t
§
CO
a
0
cr
■ i
s
w
00
0
w
0
Z
cc
I-H
0
la
a
;?;
CO
-^
P3
(N
—
-^
><
0
—
0
W
H
P4
!<5
><
CO
CO
_ K
0
55
<
CO
*
Q
0
-)<
o
n
S
g
I-H
U5
w
I— (
CO
—
pi]
—
H
^
—
0
0
—
H
- g
—
1— (
— fr.
— s
!0
s
K
!3
a
u
H
Ph
0
0
K
1—1
Q
0
M
H
"*
t— (
Pi
_
__
— pS
S
'"
CO
0
to
c»
^
0
ai
0
O!
~
0
c»
c^
^
iH
'"'
tH
«o
f
>o
CO
s
C)
0
CO
M
^
CO
"^
«5
OS
rH
*
?h
c^
<N
^
a
0
ce
M
ta
e
'S
>4i
*
JS
a
a
■c
c
0.
£
c
c
Cj
c
-§
C
t-
0
■^
0
"c
s
[i.
El
c
c
c
1
a
13
1
s
1:
c
3
g
0
s
e
"b
)
"5
"
1— 1
00
1
t-
C
c
C
364
FAIRFIELD— FREETOWN.
FAIRFIELD : A station of the ISIoravians
in Jamaica, W. I.
FAKIR or FAQUIR: A monk in India.
The fakirs siilyect themselves to severe aus-
terities and mortifications; Some of them
condemn themselves to a standing ])osture
all their lives, supported only l»y a stick or
rope under their armpits. Some mangle
their bodies with scourges or knives. Others
wander about in companies, telling fortunes,
and these are said to be arrant villains.
FALMOUTH : A station of the Wesley-
ans, in Jamaica, W. I.
FALEALILI : A station of the London
Missionar}^ Society on tlie Island of Upolu.
one of the Samoan group.
FAIR HARBOUR: A station of the
London Missionary Society in the Society
Islands.
FAR]\IERFIELD : A station of the Wes-
leyans in Great Namaqualand, S. Africa.
FASITOOTAI : A station of the London
Missionary Society on the Island of Upolu,
one of the Samoan group.
FATE : One of the New Hebrides Islands,
having a station of the London Missionary
Society.
FEARN : A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society in Berbice, S. America.
FEE JEE ^LANDS : See South Sea Is-
lands.
FERNANDO PO: An Island in the Bight
of Biafra, on , the western coast of Africa,
20 miles from the continent, 40 miles in
length, 20 in breadth, and 120 in circumfer-
ence. Like the adjacent parts of the main
land, it is very mountainous, Clarence Peak
being 10,700 feet high. The southern ex-
tremity is also intersected with steep moun-
tains, from 1,000 to 3,000 feet high ; which,
with the intervening valleys, are covered
with dense forests of large anil valuable tim-
ber, and watered bj' numerous rivulets. The
dry season conmiences the latter end of
May, and continues till the end of Novem-
ber. The sea breeze is regular, but the land
>»reeze generally deficient, being intercepted
by the high range of mountains on the main
land. Clarence, the principal settlement, is
on the north side of the Island, in latitude
3" 53' N. and longitude 7*^ 40' E.and is built
close to the sea, upon an elevated jilain, em-
bracing two small peninsulas, Point William
and Point vVdelaide, with a semi-circular
space, forming a cove, well adapted for ship-
ping. Tlie soil is fertile, and the water of
the best quality, and there are no marshes
in the vicinity. The English Baptist Mis-
sionary Society have a mission here. (See
Africa. Western.)
FETISH: Svl- Africa, Western.
FritST-HlLL: A statiim of tlie London
Missioiiai V Sociotv in Jamaica, W. I.
FISHTbWN : Station of the American
Episcopal ^lissionary Society in South Afri-
ca, situated to the south-west of Cape Pal-
mas.
FIVE ISLANDS : A station of the [Mora-
vians in Antigua. W. I.
FLINT : A Cherokee town in the Indian
territory and an out-station of the American
Baptist Mission.
FORT BEAUFORT : Station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society in South Africa, in
Beaufort district, near the head waters ot
the Keiskamma river.
FOUR-PATHS : A station of the London
Missionary Society in Jamaica, W. I.
FREDERICKSTHAL : A station of the
Moravians in Greenland.
FREEDOM CHAPEL: A station of the
London Missionary Society in British Gui-
ana.
FREEMANTLE : A station of the Gospel
Propagation Society in Australia, situated
at the entrance of Swan river.
FREETOWN : Chief town of the colony
of Sierra Leone, situated near the mouth of
the Sierra Leone river. It is well situated
for commerce. The Church and AVesleyan
Societies both have stations at this place.
(See Africa, Western.)
FREE CHURCH UF SCOTLAND MIS-
SIONS: 'flie Frte Church supports exten-
sive Home and Colonial Missionary (i])era-
tions ; together with missions to the Jews,
and Foreign Missions in Hindo^tan and S.
Africa, notices of which appear under those
heads. The income for Missions and Ednca-
tion in 1854, was £40,232, and for all objects,
£287,574.
FREEA\1LL BAPTIST FOREIGN JHS-
SION SOCIETY : The members of the Free
AViU Baptist denomination did not generallj''
engage in the Foreign Mission enterprise till
about twenty years ago. The founders of
the connection were zealous and jiious men^
who made great sacrifices to preach the Gos-
]iel in the destitute parts of the country.
But unfortunately for the cause of religion
and the interests of the denomination, they,
with those who sympathized with them,
sufl'ercd tlieir prejudices against what tliej
called the " hireling " system to drive them
into strong opposition to the regular support
of the ministiy. Hence, the appointment of
missionaries with the appropriation of defi-
nite sums of money for their supj)ort was
discarded. Yet there were some who ar-
dently desired the conversion of the Avorld,
and wished to see the denomination engage
in the great Avork of sending the Gospel to
the heathen. Being unknown to each other,
hearing but little to encourage them to en-
gage in the missionary enterprise, and being
scattered among those who were either op-
posed or indifferent to the c:^use, no elfoit
was made in the churches to send the lamp
of life to the benighted heathen for some
years after other denumiuutioiis had com-
FREEWILL BAPTIST FOREIGN MISSION SOCIETY.
365
menced their labors for the conversion of
idolators. Rev. Amos Sutton, of the Eng-
lish General Baptist Mission in Orissa, was,
under God, enabled to arouse many of the
ministers and members from their inaction,
and induce them to engage in efforts for the
conversion of Orissa. Early in 1832 he
wrote to Elder John Buzzell of Parsons-
field, Me., who was one of the oldest and
most influential ministers of the Free-will
Baptist connection. The letter was an earn-
est and pathetic appeal for aid ; and as it
was published in the Morning Star, the or-
gan of the denomination, was heartily sec-
onded by Elder Buzzell, and was written by
a missionary of sentiments similar to those
of the Free-will Baptists, a good impression
was made. In 1833 Mr. Sutton visited the
United States, having been compelled to
leave Orissa for a season on account of ill
health. lie came by the permission of the
English General Baptist Missionary Society,
who generously defrayed the expense of his
visit. His presence and earnest and perse-
vering labors deepened the favorable im-
pression previously made, and much of the
prejudice that had existed against the cause
of missions was removed. During his stay
the Free-will Baptist Foreign Mission Soci-
ety was formed. The organization was to a
considerable extent eft'ected through his
means, and his services were of great value
as the work was new to all who were asso-
ciated with him in forming the Society.
Soon after this he went to England, but re-
turned in 1834, and engaged in the duties of
Corresponding Secretary of the Societj^^ the
Directors having chosen him to that office
while he was in England. His health was
in a good degree restored, which enabled
him to travel and lecture in many of the
churches, and take collections in aid of the
cause. He was very cordially received not
only among the Free-will Baptists, but by
Christians of other denominations. His ar-
duous labors were continued for one year,
during which time two brethren were ap-
pointed as missionaries to Orissa. These
brethren were Rev. Eli Noyes of Jefferson.
Me., who was a Free-will Baptist, and Rev.
Jeremiah Phillips of Plainfield, N. Y., who
belonged to the Open Communion Baptists,
a sect that subsequentl}' united with the
Free-will Baptist connection. These two
missionaries, with their wives, sailed for
Orissa, September 22, 1835, and were the
first sent out by this Society. Mr. Sutton
was one of their fellow passengers, and was
of great service to them during the voy-
age, and after their arrival in India.
The Society has but one mission. It has
sent out six male and nine female mission-
arios from this countr}', iind the services of
one female have been secured in Orissa.
Rev. John Buzzell was the first President
of the Society, and retained the office about
fifteen years. Rev. Amos Sutton was its
first Corresponding Secretary, and Illr. Isaac
N. Sanborn of North Parsonsfield, Me., its
first Treasurer. He died in 1835j or ISS'G.
Wm. Burr, Esq., editor of the Momirig Star
and Treasurer of two other benevolent soci-
eties, succeeded Mr. Sanborn as Treasurer
of this Society, and has ever since retained
the office, rendering his services gratuitous-
ly. It has had three Corresponding Secre
taries since Mr. Sutton resigned, and their
services have been mostly gratuitous.
The affairs of the Society are conducted
by an Executive Committee. Its officers
were formerly chosen by a Board of Direc-
tors ; but this Board has been dispensed
with, and all the officers are now chosen by
the Society at its annual meetings.
A few years after the organization of this
body. Miss Sarah Chapin of Rumford, N. H.,
made it a bequest of some four thousand dol-
lars, which sum was paid in annual instal-
ments. She had previously willed the pro-
perty to the missionary society of another
denomination of which she was a member.
On learning the anti-slavery character of the
Free-will Baptists, she revoked her will and
disposed of her property as stated above.
While the denomination held an informal
connection with a body of slaveholding Bap-
tists at the South, which union has since
been dissolved, the Executive Committee
passed a resolution not to receive the contri-
butions of slaveholders.
The following are the Society's annual re-
ceipts. From its origin to 1835, a period
of about three j'ears, the amount received
was. $2,653 37. In 1836, it was, $915 43
In 1837, $1,459 79 In 1838, $2,504 36
In 1839, $2,336 71 In 1840, $2,777 00
In 1841, $3,137 32 In 1842, $3,556 42
In 1843, $2,726 74 In 1844, $2,388 04
In 1845, $3,160 66 In 1846, $3,219 21
In 1847, $3,544 00 In 1848, $5,618 63
In 1849, $2,992 20 In 1850, $4;215 31
In 1851, .$4,958 14 In 1852, $4,475 98
In 1853, $6,245 93. Total since the organ-
ization of the Society, $62,885 24.
Considerable irregularity is seen in the re-
ceipts, as the amount of one year is com-
pared with that of another. This is caused
mostly by the irregularity of the time of
holding the annual meetings when the ac-
counts are made up. Dividing twenty of
the twenty-one years of the Society's exist-
ence into two equal parts, giving to each its
respective receipts, the increase of funds in
the last period over the first, is $17,958 51.
This gain was not made by an increase of
the numerical strength of the denomination^
for there was a decrease of its numbers
while the funds were increasing. It was
caused by the increasing light on the subject
of missions, and the formation of churches
366
FRIEDENSBERG— GABOON.
better tauglit than some of those previously
organized. As the denomination was weak
in nujjprs and resources, and most of the
churches were small, poor, and not trained
to benevolent efforts, the missionary enter-
prise was commenced with fears of failure,
and there were some apprehensions of em-
barrassment when Miss Chapin's bequest
should be expended. But former anxieties
and disquietudes have been happily succeed-
ed by the pleasing hope that, under God, the
Society has become permanently established,
though its operations are limited. However
small it may be " among the thousands of
Judah." it has something to do in the great
work of spreading the Gospel among all na-
tions, and there are indications that the
churches will become more active in the holy
enterprise.
Most of the funds of the Society have
been collected by subscriptions, the circula-
tion of missionary cards, and by contribu-
tions. This course, though it saves the ex-
pense of agents, yet lacks the efficiency of
the agency system. Rev. 0. R. Bachelor, a
returned missionary, has been on an agency
among the churches more than a year past,
and is still in the field. The amount of re-
ceipts for 1853 was considei'ably greater than
that of any previous year, and his efficient
labors were among the means that brought
the additional sum into the treasury. Many,
however, think that in most cases the ser-
vices of agents are not necessary, and that all
the funds that can be appropriated directly to
missionary pui'poses may be obtained with-
out their aid. The denomination consists
ff( 28 yearly meetings, 129 quarterly meet-
ings, 1146 churches, 10G9 preachers, and
about 50,000 communicants. Eacli quarter-
(y meeting is composed of delegates from a
convenient number of churches, and the
yearly meetings are made of delegates sent
from the quarterly meetings. Each quar-
terly meeting assembles four times a year
with such churches in its limits as are wil-
ling to entertain tlie meetings. As there are
some five hundred of these sessions an-
nually held, with about the same number of
churches scattered throughout the denomi-
nation, each meeting usually attended by
several ministers and often by large num-
bers of people, great facilities are afforded in
this way for obtaining funds for the cause
of missions. It is hoped that these facilities
will at no very distant period be so far im-
proved as to dispense with agents.
The small amount of receipts shows that
the Society has done but little in the work
of converting the heathen. Tlie connection
took its rise in the then new settlements of
the country, and up to some ten years ago
it numbered scarcely a dozen churches in
large villager and cities. At the commence-
ment of the missionary enterprise among
Free-will Baptists, their churches were
mostly small, poor, scattered, and many of
them without pastors, and most of the min-
isters were uneducated and had no regular
support. The mass, which was then in al-
most a chaotic state, is now assuming form
and vitality. There are not many wealthy
men in the churches, and not one of the few
that are rich has yet made a large donation
to the Foreign Mission Society. — Rev. E.
HUTCHINS.
FRIEDENSBERG: A station of the
Moravians on the Island of St. Thomas,
West Indies.
FRIEDEXSFIELD: A station of the
United Brethren in St. Thomas, W. I.
FRIEDENSTHAL : A station of the
Moravians, on the Island of St. Thomas.
FRIENDLY ISLANDS: A group of
islands situated between IG*-' 21', south lati-
tude, and 176° 186', west longitude. Some
of them are barren and desert spots. Others
are of considerable size, Tonga containing
a population of 10.000.
FRIEDAU: A station of the French
Protestants in South Africa, 183 miles east
of Motito.
FUH-CHAU : One of the five ports of
China, opened to foreigners, situated in. lati-
tude 26^ 5', N., and longitude IIQ'' 20', £.,
on the north biuik of the Min river.
FURRACKABAD: A city in the pro-
vince of Agra, in Hindostan, situated near
the south bank of the Ganges, 82 E. N. E.
of Agra, 156 N. W. of Allahabad. Popula-
tion, 70,000. It is the chief commercial city
of the ceded and conquered provinces, and
is said to be the common resort of needy
and dissolute characters from other parts of
Hindostan. It is a station of the American
Presbyterian Board.
FUTTEHGURH: A station of the
Presbyterian Board in Northern India, on
the Ganges, 200 miles above Allahabad.
GABOON: A river in ^Yest Africa,
entering the ocean about twenty miles
north of the equator, in longitude 9' 18'
east from Greenwich, on which is situated
the mission of the American Board to West
Africa. Its width for 40 miles from its
mouth, varies from 8 to 14 miles. For the
last 30 miles of its course, this river is fully
equal in size to the Senegal, Niger, and
Congo, and much superior in grandeur and
beauty. Its general course is westerly.
Many rivers flow into it, the banks
of which are interspersed with numerous
villages. Forty miles from the ocean it
divides into the Rembwe, which is a mile
wide at its mouth, and navigable some dis-
tance for small vessels, and the big Orombo,
or the Olombo-mpolo, which has a width of
more than two miles at its junction with
the Rembwe, and is navigable to wiiere it
divides into the KfimAaud BAkwe. Of those
GABOON.
367
branches the B^kwe, which is a quarter of
a mile wide where it unites with the KarabA,
is said to have a boat navigation of 40 or
50 miles ; and the K4m&, which is twice its
size, would allow the passage of vessels of a
moderate burden a still greater distance,
were it not for a sand-bar at its mouth.
Face of the Country, Climate, ^c. — The
country for the distance of 100 or 150 miles
into the interior, is quite uniformly level,
and covered with forests so dense as to
render it next to impossible to thread them,
and the native paths (for there are no roads)
are not wide enough for a horse, or even for
a man, with a pack of any size, to pass. The
banks of the rivers are in many places low
and marshy ; in others, for miles together,
elevated. Farther in the interior the coun-
try is hilly, and rises at length into magnifi-
cent mountains.
Contrary to what would naturally be in-
ferred, there is good reason for believing
that no place on the coast is more healthy
than the Gaboon country. This is owing to
several causes. The rainy season, which,
including a month called " the middle dries,"
when the showers are less frequent, lasts
seven months, is the warm season, when the
thermometer ranges from 72 to 88 degrees
of Fahrenheit. Then, the rains are generally
in the night, so that one is still less exposed
to take cold. Again, at the close of the
rainy season, the sky becomes overcast with
clouds, by which means the disastrous ef-
fects of a burning sun, operating in the lux-
uriant vegetation of the rainy season, are
entirely obviated. The region through
which the upper waters of the Gaboon flow,
is supposed to be highly salubrious ; and
when the way shall be opened to the grand
mountains which are in full sight from a
hill back of King George's Town, as fine a
resort will be found, it is probable, for re-
covering from the effects of a tropical climate,
as the world affords.
Productions are various and abundant,
consisting of plantains and cassada, — the
staple articles of food, and which are pre-
pared for the table in a great variety of
ways, — yams, sweet potatoes, Indian corn,
sugar cane, pumpkins, peas, beans, &c.
Goats and fowls abound, but cattle and
sheep have only recently been introduced.
The forests swarm with wild animals, and
the waters with fish ; and honey is to be
had at all seasons.
People, Customs, Language, d^c. — The
tribes which now dwell on the Gaboon and
its waters, are not the original occupants of
the countrj^ Indeed, judging from present
appearances, there is ground for very pain-
ful conjectures as to the number of tribes
which have successively made their way
hither from the interior, and been swept
away during the hundreds of years that this
has been one of the centres of the slave
trade. The people spoken of by the nresent
inhabitants as the first who lived mre, are
the Divwas ; of whom it is said, only one is
now left. The Mpongwes, who then dwelt
far back in the bush, occupy their place ; but
are only a remnant of what they once were,
being variously estimated at from six to
twelve thousand in number. The Shikanis
next came over the mountains, then a wild,
fierce, numerous, and powerful tribe ; but
who, though still more numerous than the
Mpongwes, have almost literally sold them-
selves out, and are scattered among the bor-
der towns of the Mpongwes and Bakilis.
This last named tribe came over the moun-
tains yet later, overpowering the Shikanis,
and are the principal occupants of the
branches of the Gaboon. They thus far
know but little of trade, have had little to
do with rum, the great bane of these tribes,
and are in many respects a promising people.
Within ten years the Pangwes have made
their appearance ; though rude, and possibly
some of them cannibals, yet a noble race,
muscular, healthy-looking and uncontami-
nated with the vices of civilization. They
wear scaicely any clothing, many of them
paint their bodies with redwood, and nearly
all of them wear ornaments of white beads,
ivory, and iron rings. The iron seems to be
of a superior quality, and many of their im-
plements are made with a taste and skill
equal to that of any people in the world.
Already not far from ten thousand of them
are settled on or near the waters of the
Gaboon ; and they say they are only the,
pioneers of those who are to follow.
The Gaboon people are divided into four
distinct political communities, two of which
occupy the south side of the river, and two
the north. The number of the Gaboon people
proper is not large. They act as factors for
the interior tribes. The articles of traffic, be-
sides slaves, are ivory, redwood, ebony, bees-
wax, and gum copal. The annual export of
ivory, in 1843, exceeded 30 tons. The entire
trade of the river, besides slaves, was at
that time, estimated at over !$100,000.
The native merchants, through whom this
trade passes, are respectable and trust-
worthy men, who live in respectable style,
and associate with foreigners on terms of
equality. Their houses are supplied with
many useful and costly articles of European
manufacture, and their tables spread with
delicacies. Most of them speak intelligible
English. Most of the men are engaged in
trade. The women and slaves manage what
they call their " plantations." They pride
themselves not a little on their approxima-
tion to the habits and customs of civilized life.
The government in all these tribes is purely
patriarchal. The term king is derived from
Europe ; no power answering to the name
368
GALLE— GLOUCESTER.
IS possessed by him on whom it is conferred ;
and no central power exists, which is ac-
knowledged by the separate villages. Slav-
ery in a mild form, polygamy in perhaps its
worst character, and on the lower waters of
the Gaboon, intemperance, prevail. Witch-
craft is universally believed in. Death,
whatever its immediate cause, is very gen-
erally attributed to this ; and he upon whom
suspicion fastens as the witch, is made
the victim of a relentless superstition. Still
the people are farther advanced in civiliza-
tion than any other on the whole coast, and
possess such elements of character as give
promise that they will rise rapidly under the
influence of the Gospel. Their general dis-
position is mild and peaceful, and they mani-
fest an unusual desire for instruction. The
Mpongwe language is spoken very exten-
sively along the coast, and is supposed to be,
with more or less dialectic differences, very
largely throughout Southern Africa. It is
wonderfully perfect in its structure, of great
flexibility, and pleasant to the ear.
GALLE : A station of the Irish Presby-
terians and also of the Wesleyan Methodists
in Ceylon.
GAR AW AY : A station of the American
Episcopal Board in West Africa, 8 miles
from Cape Palmas.
GAWAR: A district of the Mountain
Nestorians, 70 miles west of Oroomiah, a
station of the American Board.
GAN-JAM: A station of the General
Baptists in Orissa, India.
GAWLER: A station of the Wesleyans
in Australia.
GEELONG : A station of the Wesleyans
in Australia. It lies at the bottom of a deep
bay, which forms the inner harbor, about 50
miles south of Melbourne. It i-s rapidly in-
creasing, and likely to become a place of im-
portance.
GEXADENDAL : A station of the United
Brethren in South xVfrica, 130 miles north-
east of Cape Town, near Sergeant's river.
.This was the first station of the United
Brethren in South Africa. It was first called
Baviati's Kloof, ami afterwards GauiletUkal
or Gcnedendal, wliicli means Valley of Grace,
or Grace Dale. It was originally commenced
in 173G ; but afterwards given up, and re-
newed in 1792.
GENERAL BAPTIST MISSIONARY SO-
CIETY: Tiie distinction between particu-
lar and general Baptists, is' founded on the
belief of the former in particular, and the
latter in gf.iieral redemption. The former
are Calvinists, the latter Arminians. On
account of the prevalence of Socinianism
among tlie General Baptists of England, the
evangelical portion of them separated them-
.selves and f jrined a new connection in 1770.
The foruiation of tlie Missionary Society by
the Particular Baptists in 1791. was the
means of awakening the missionary spirit
among the churches of the new connection ;
and at length Providence raised up Rev. J.
G. Pike to advocate the cause among them,
and his appeals awakened so much interest
that a society was formed in 1816. Their
first mission was established in Orissa, the
province in which the idol Juggernaut is
situated. To this their chief energies have
been directed. They have also a mission in
China. The reports of the Society do not
give statistics with sufficient definiteness to
enable us to state the number of missionary
laborers, church members, &c. The amount
of funds raised and expended by the Society
is about £2,000 a year.
GEOG TAP A : A village near Oroomiah.
Persia, an out-station of the mission of tho
American Board.
GEORGIAN ISLANDS: A group of
islands in the Southern Pacific Ocean, be-
tween latitude 17® 18', S., and longitude 149*
15', West, embracing the islands of Tahiti,
Eimeo, Tabuaemanu, Tetuaroa, Matea, and
Meetia.
GEORGETOWN: The chief town of
British Guiana, a station of the Wesleyans.
Population 8,000 to 10,000, mostly negroes.
GERMAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY:
(See Basle Missionary Society.)
GHAZIPOOR: A town of Allahabad,
41 miles north-east from Benares, a station
of the Berlin Missionary Society.
GLASGOW MISSIONARY SOCIETY:
One of the eadiest organizations in the
world for sending the Gospel to the heathen,
was the Glasgow Missionary Society. It
was formed on the 9th of February, 1796 :
and it originally embraced members of tho
Established Church of Scotland and Dissent-
ers from that communion. After the lapse
of more than thirty years, it was thought ex-
pedient to dissolve the union and form two
societies ; one of which should be composed
of persons adhering to the Church of Scot-
land, and the other of Dissenters. Tho
former retained the old name, and the latter
was called the Glasgow African Missionary
Society, and the missions were about equally
divided between the two. After the division
which took place in the Church of Scotland
in 1843, the Glasgow Missionary Society be-
came merged in the foreign iiiission scheme of
the Free Church of Scotland ; and its mission-
aries (all lieing in South Africa) were placed
under the care of the latter body. The vote
of dissolution and transfer was passed on the
29th of October, 1844, and, on the 27th of
July, 1847, the Glasgow African Society
transferred its missions to the United Pres-
byterian Church. See Africa, Southern.
GLOUCESTER : Town of liberated Afri-
cans, in Sierra Leone, West Africa, between
Freetown and Regents' Town — a station of
the Church Missionary Society.
GOSSNER'S MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
369
GNADENBERG : A station of Gossner's
Missionary Society in Hindostan.
GOGO: A station of the Irish Presby-
terians in the district of Goelwara. Hindostan.
GOLD COAST: (See Ashantce.)
GONAIVES : A station of the Wesley-
ans in the West Indies.
GOOBEE : A station of the Wesleyans
in India.
GOOD-WATER : A station of the Ameri-
can Board anions: the Choctaw Indians.
GORRUCKPORE: A town in the province
of Oude in northern Hindostan, and capital
of a district of the same name. Population
40,000. The Church Missionary Society
commenced operations here in 1823.
GOSSNER'S MISSIONARY SOCIETY :
Germany has one organization for the con-
version of the heathen, which is unlike all
others. It is generally called Gossner's
Missionary Society. This warm-hearted,
but eccentric man, belonged to the committee
of the Berlin Missionary Society. But as
he could not assent to all the principles of
his associates in regard to the training of
missionaries, he resigned his office in 1836.
Soon afterwards he took charge of a number
of young men, mostly mechanics, who were
anxious to engage in the missionary work as
Christian artisans, catechists, and teachers.
They were to earn their livelihood by man-
ual labor ; and such instruction as they
needed, was to be given them gratuitously by
pious students.
Gossner had scarcely entered upon this
new enterprise, when Dr. Lange, of the
Scotch Presbyterian Church in Australia,
invited these humble but zealous candidates
for missionary employment to make known
the Gospel to the natives of Australia, near
Moreton Bay ; and accordingly, on the 10th
of July, 1837, eleven men, one of them hav-
ing been ordained, and seven married, pro-
ceeded to Scotland, whence they sailed at a
subsequent date for their destination. A few
months later the Rev. Mr. Start, of the
Church of England, anxious to establish a
mission in Bengal, went to Berlin and se-
lected twelve persons for this purpose, who
proceeded to England, July 1, 1838. One
of them was a " candidate," and three were
married. In 1840, a reinforcement of five
was sent to this mission. During the same
year also, six laborers set out for middle
India, upon the invitation of several English-
men. In the following year another com-
pany left Germany for the Chatham Islands.
In 1843 an attempt was made to establish a
mission in New Caledonia ; but those who
were destined to this field, on arriving at
Sydney, concluded to join their brethren at
Moreton Bay. A similar fate attended an
effort to commence operations at Mergui, in
1844 5 the company sent forth for this pur-
pose having concluded to establish them-
24
selves in Chuta Nagpoor, some three hun-
dred miles west of Calcutta. lu 1846 a man
and his wife went to Madras to take charge
of an orphan school ; of them nothing parti-
cular is known. During the same year
Gossner was persuaded to send '• a dismissed
Basle missionary" and three others to West
Africa, near Cape Coast. Quite recently
three brethren have been sent to Java ; and
a like number have gone to the Tubuai
Islands.
Gossner prepared his young friends for
their future labors with little or no expense
to himself. He also endeavored to make
the missions undertaken by them as light a
burden upon his treasury as possible. In-
deed, the support of some of these missions
was assumed by others. For the large com-
pany sent to Australia in 1837, he provided
merely an outfit apd the cost of the journey
to Scotland. The expense of the passage to
Australia was paid by the Irish Presbyterian
church ; and Dr. Lange agreed that the
wants of the mission, after its arrival, should
be supplied by the Scotch Presbyterian
church of Australia, it being understood
that the missionaries should connect them-
selves with that body. The two who went
to Madras in 1846, were supported by oth-
ers. How far the Bengal mission-, com-
menced at the instance of Rev. Mr. Start,
was to be a charge upon Gossner, does not
appear ; and the same is true of the Middle
India mission ; though it is presumed that
both were expected to receive Important
assistance, if not all which they should re-
quire from other sources. The Java mission
is to be supported, in part at least, by the
Dutch.
The remaining missions looked originally
to Berlin for all the aid they should need ;
but it was a part of Gossner's plan that, as
far as possible, they should be cheap and
self-supporting. This was one argument, in-
deed, for sending forth such a number of
mechanics, though their qualifications in
some respects must have been of a very or- •
dinary character.
It is to be regretted that we have no full
and accurate history of Gossner's experi-
ments ; for the facts elicited thereby would
doubtless throw much light upon the expe-
diency of attempting to conduct missions
upon plans different from those which are
generally adopted. Certain points, however,
appear to have been pretty well settled.
1, It is not always safe to rely upon the
promises of individuals for a support. Thi«
has been proved, according to the author
of Das Missionswesen der Evangelischen
Kirche, by the history of the missions to
Australia, Bengal and Middle India ; inas-
much as they were soon left unprovided for,
and were obliged to rely upon their own la-
bor, or look to Gossner for help ; and they
370
GOVERNOR'S HARBOR— GREECE.
had. for this reason, but a sickly existence,
even if they escaped annihilation. The last
of the three, indeed, lived only a short time.
2. The attempt to carry out the self-support-
ing plan, as far as possible, has occasioned
the loss of many lives, particularly in India.
3. A number have abandoned the missions
with which they were at tirst connected, and
gone into the service of other societies. 4.
And it is even claimed by the author of the
Missio7isicesen, that the greater economy of
Gossner's missions, as compared with other
German missions, is rather apparent than
real.
If definite information is asked in regard
to the present state of the missions, the
commencement of which has been already
described, it is not easy to give it. Gossner
publishes no annual reports ; and his Biene
auf dem Missionsfelde is deficient in statis-
tics.
Prior to 1842 Gossner had the sole man-
agement of his various operations. In that
year it was deemed expedient that a society
should be organized ; and on the 19th of
September the " Evangelical Union for the
Spread of Christianity among the Natives
of Heathen Lands" obtained a legal exist-
ence. There has been but little change,
however, in the mode of conducting the
business. Gossner may be regarded as the
embodiment of the society. In an humble
dwelling outside of the walls of Berlin, far
back in a garden, where no one would think
of looking for him without a special direc-
tion, he receives those who are candidates
for the missionary work ; and there he
transacts the business of his society. Though
quite aged, he is exceedingly active, full of
vivacity, simple, benevolent, a Lutheran, yet
very catholic ; and a transient visitor will
have no difficulty in believing that he may
have a strong hold upon the confidence and
afiections of a portion of the good people of
Germany,
He has never sought to establish auxilia-
ries, or other subordinate organizations.
His treasury receives the free will offerings
(amounting to not quite $;5,000 a year,) of
all such persons as see fit to make use of
this channel to send the Gospel to the hea-
then ; and that is the whole story. To those
who go forth from under his care he makes
no pledges. They must trust in God. '• I
promise you nothing," he says; "'you must
go in faith. And if you cannot go in faith,
you had better not go at all." Those whom
he accounts suitable persons to preach the
Gospel, he ordains prior to their departure.
He ^yas once asked if he had the right to
ordain. His reply was, "Not for Germany,
but 1 have fur the heathen." None of his
missionaries liave received any other ordina-
tion.
From the January number of the •' Biene
auf dem Missionsfeld," it appears that the
receipts of this society during 1853 were
5,308 Thl. ; and that the disbursements
amounted to 4,871 Thl. Four missionaries
were sent forth for the first time, two to the
stations on the Gauges, and two to the Cele-
bes.— See Missionai-y Herald, June, 1852.
GOVERNOR'S HARBOR: A station
of the Baptist Missionary Society in the Ba-
hamas, W. I.
GOWHATTI : A city in Assam, a station
of the Mission of the American Baptist Mis-
sionary Union in Assam.
GRACE BAY : A station of the Mora-
vians in Antigua, W. I.
GRACEFIELD : A station of the United
Brethren in Antigua.
GRAHAM'S-TOWN : The capital of the
frontier district of Albany, in the Colony of
the Cape of Good Hope, in South Africa. It
is situated in a rich pastoral and agricultu-
ral country, with fine woods, and sources of
wealth of every kind. The London and
Wesleyan Societies have stations at this
place.
GRAAF-REINET : A beautiful village in
South Africa, in the district of Graaf-Reinet,
on a branch of the Sunday river, and at the
foot of the Sneeuwbergoi. The streets are
wide, laid out at right angles, and lined with
rows of lemon trees. It is copiously sup-
plied with water, and rich in vegetation, in
which it exceeds any town in the Colony. It
contains about 100 highly respectable Eng-
lish residents, and about 1,500 Hottentots,
Kaffres, and emancipated slaves. The Lon-
don Missionary Society and the Gospel Pro-
pagation Society both have missions at this
place.
GRACEHILL : A station of the Moravi-
ans in Antigua, W. I.
GRAND BAHAMA : One of the West In-
dia Islands, 03 miles long by 9 broad, with
but few people — a station of the Bai)tist
Missionary Societj'.
GRAND CAYMAN : A small island about
260 miles N. "NV. from Jamaica, a station of
the Wesle3'an8.
GRATEFUL HILL: A station of the
Wesleyan Society in Jamaica, W. I.
GREAT PLAINS: A Karen village in
Southern Arracan, an out-station of the
American Baptist Mission in Arracan.
GREIjCP] is situated between the 3Gth
and 40th degrees north latitude, and the 20th
and 24th degrees east longitude. It is bound-
ed on the north by Macedonia and Albania
proper, on the east by the il'jgean sea, on the
south by the Mediterranean, and on the
west by the Ionian sea. The length of
Greece proper is not more than 250 miles,
and its mean breadth is about 150 miles. It
contains a little more than 2.'.000 sipiare
miles, exclusive of Macedonia, Albania, and
the Islands. But novwitlistanding the nar-
GREECE— MISSIONS.
3T1
row limits of Greece, it has attrcacted more
attention than almost any other country for
three thousand years, and its poets, orators,
sculptors and architects, have been the ad-
miration of the world. By her mental su-
periority Greece became mistress of nations,
and by her own degeneracy she was precip-
itated from this proud eminence. But this
is so fimiliar a portion of ancient history
that the facts need not be repeated here.
At the time of the birth of Christ, Greece
had lost her liberties entirely, and was of
no importance in the political world. But
in the time of the apostles and soon after,
the nation was converted to Christianity,
and this has been a principal means of pre-
serving its language and of keeping it dis-
tinct from other nations. Passing on to the
9th century, we find the Greek or Romish
Churches engaged in a fierce controversy,
the Pope excommunicating the Grand Patri-
arch of Constantinople, the acknowledged
head of the Greek Church, and the Patri-
arch thundering bulls of excommunication
against the Pope. From this period histo-
rians date the separation of the Christian
world into the Romish and Greek Churches,
— a separation which has ever since been
widening.
Some of the points of difference between
the Romish and Greek Churches are the
following : The Greeks deny the supremacy
and infallibility of the Pope of Rome, but
regard their Patriarch as head of the true
Catholic Church. The Greek Church con-
demns as idolatrous the use of images, as
practised in the Romish Church ; but for
images it substitutes pictures. It does not
condemn its priests to celibacy, but no priest
can marry a second time, nor can any mar-
ried priest rise to the rank of bishop. It
rejects the doctrine of purgatory, but orders
masses for the souls of the dead. Unlike
the Romish Church, it does not condemn the
people to an ignorance of the Scriptures.
But the invocation of the saints and the
worship of the Virgin Mary, is carried to as
great an extent in the Greek as in the Rom-
ish Church.
For several centuries the Greeks were
subject to vai-ious masters, by all of whom
they were harshly treated. Their last op-
pressors were the Turks, from whose yoke
they freed themselves by the revolution
which terminated successfully in 1830, and
which was followed by the acknowledged
independence of the Greek nation.
■ The geographical situation of Greece is
most ftivorable, being situated in a central
position between Europe, Asia and Africa ;
her climate is delightful without being ener-
vating ; her vegetable and mineral produc-
tions are various and inexhaustible ; her
people enterprising, industrious, and intelli-
gent ; and only the prevalence of a pure
Christianity is needed to give her again the
high relative position which she once held.
MISSIONS.
The AiMERicAN Board entered upon its
mission to Greece in 1830, by the appoint-
ment of Rev. Jonas King as missionary to
that country. He commenced his labors in
the island of Tenos, where, during the first
3'ear, he had under his care a female school
of thirty or forty pupils. At the same time
he employed himself in distributing Bibles
and tracts, and in selling a Greek Spelling
Book, prepared by Rev. Mr. Temple, and is-
sued from the Mission press of the Board at
Malta. Mr. King's school was established
in the principal town in Tenos, where had
been built a modern church called the Evan-
gelistria, the most magnificent edifice in
Greece, and to which hundreds of pilgrims
resorted every year, chiefly the lame, the
sick, and the lunatic, brought there to be
miraculously healed of their maladies. It
was the central point of superstition in
Greece ; and yet the principal men in the
place sent their daughters to Mr. King's
school. Scarcely a year had passed, how-
ever, before opposition was made by the
Romish bishop, to whose authority a third
of the inhabitants were subject, some of the
books used were denounced as heretical, and
the school became the subject of opprobrious
remark through the town. Still Mr. King
held on his way, having usually over fifty
scholars present ; and just at this time, as
if to rebuke the Romish opposition, the go-
vernment sent him a box of ancient Greek
books, and the government gazette pub-
lished an expression of gratitude to the
Americans for the books they were furnishing
to the Greeks, at the same time highly com-
mending Mr. King's school and the general
course of instruction pursued in it. From
this time the opposition ceased. In the au-
tumn of 1830 the Greek School Committee
of New York forwarded to the President of
Grfece, through Mr. King, a box containing
3,456 slates and 74,000 pencils, at the same '
time placing at the disposal of Mr. King
^2>2,b for the purchase at Malta of element-
ary school books in modern Greek. The
slates and pencils were gratefully acknow-
ledged in the 'oflBcial gazettes of Greece.
But Mr. King had been desirous from the
first of making Athens the centre of his ope-
rations, and in the spring of 1831 he re-
moved to that place. He immediately opened
a Lancasterian school, at the head of which
he placed a distinguished Greek scholar, and
in one month the school contained 176 scho-
lars of both sexes. He soon divided his
school into two, one for boys and another
for girls, and established a third in a neigh-
boring village. He also maintained a regu-
lar Greek service on the Sabbath in his
172
GREECE.
principal school, besides a regular preaching
service in his own house.
In January, 1833, jNIr. Elias Riggs, a grad-
uate of Amherst College and a thorough
scholar, arrived in Athens, and became as-
sociated with Mr. King in the work of the
mission. One month after his arrival the
new king Otho, with the regency, reached
the country, and Greece became free from
Turkish rule. The new government was
soon organized, and the Gi'cek church was
made the established religion of the king-
dom. The highest ecclesiastical authority
was vested, under the king, in a permanent
council, bearing the name of the '" Holy
Council of the Kingdom of Greece." This
Council was required to watch diligently
over the doctrines of the Greek Church, and
especially over the contents of books de-
signed for the youth and the clergy, and
treating of religious subjects ; and whenever
they were assured that any man was en-
deavoring to disturb the established church
by false doctrine, by proselyting, or bj'' any
other means, they were required to call upon
the secular power to apply a remedy to the
evil. The laws respecting common schools
were liberal, and designed to extend the
benefits of education to all the people. On
the whole, the missionaries apprehended
more embarrassment in the prosecution of
their efforts in the kingdom of Greece, than
they had experienced under the Turkish
government.
In the autumn of this year. Messrs. King
and iligfs spent a month in visiting the is-
lands of Syra, Hj-dra and Spetsiie ; and Na-
poli and Corinth in the Peloponnessus.
Another month Mr. Riggs spent in travers-
ing the Peloponnessus, with a view to de-
terminin'.j upon the most eligible place for
his future residence, as he had resolved upon
removing from Athens. But at home or
abroad their main olyects were Iccpt in view,
and within a few months they distributed
gratuitously 8,2-31 school books and tracts
in modern Greek, 22G Testaments and Pftvl-
*ters, 19 copies of the Pentateuch and book
of Joshua, and one Turkish Bible and one
Turkish Testament.
The schools at Athens were at this time
less in number, but of a higher order, than a
year or two previous. The liigher school,
called the '" Evangelical Gymnasium," plan-
ned by M.^-ors. King and Riggs with refer-
ence to a systematic course of instruction,
was noticed in a Greek newspaper called
" The Minerva," which, in publishing the
plan of the Gymnasium, prefaced it with the
following editorial remarks, which it is pleas-
ing at tliis date to recur to. The following
is an e.Kact copy of tlie remarks :
'• i'he V eneiable Mr. Jonas King, known
for his charities and beneficence to almost
all the suiferers in the imvi of our struggle,
and, since the settlement of the afiairs of
our nation, devoted to the work of enhght-
ening it, has sent us the new organization
of his gymnasium at Athens, which we has-
ten to publish in our paper, that the public
may see how well the sincere friends of hu-
manity know what are the best means of
benefiting it, and bringing it to its true hap-
piness. Far from attributing to the vener-
able King, or others, any designs of prose-
lytism. which designs, did they exist, would
in the nineteenth centurj'be rather ridicu-
lous than worthy of regard, we cannot but
express the gratitude of our nation to Ame-
ricans who have set such a worthy example,
while we would also proclaim the virtues of
the venerable King, especially the diligence
and assiduity which he, as well as his col-
leagues, exhibit for our illumination."
One month after this the Gymnasium con-
tained sixty-six scholars, and the prepara-
tory school seventy-six. Mr. Riggs gave a
course of lessons on the evidences of Chris-
tianity, and went through with an epitome
of the Old Testament history, besides con-
ducting a Sabbath school composed of mem-
bers of the preparatory school; and Mr
King gave lessons twice a week, once on the
historical parts of the Old Testament, and
once on the doctrinal parts of the New. His
Greek preaching in his own house, on the
Sabbath, was also continued.
In June, 1834, Mr. Riggs took up his
residence in the renowned city of Argos.
He immediately opened a school for females,
assisted by his wife, and in a month or two
they had 40 scholars. During the year 1835,
the Scriptures were very extensively dif-
fused among the Greeks. Mr. King alone
distributed by sale and gratuitousl}', 2.G5G
copies of the New Testament, and parts of
the Old, in modern Greek, and 25,890 school
books and religious tracts. These were dis-
tri))uted in the Peloponnessus, in continental
Greece, Thcssalj', Macedonia, and the is-
lands ; and he could have disposed of many
more, had not his stock been exhausted.
Mr. King also continued his Gymnasium,
and in this year four of his most advanced
pupils came to this country to complete their
education. ]Mr. Riggs, besides continuing
his school at Argos, prepared a scries of
questions in modern Greek on Genesis, and
also a series of maps in Greek, illustrating
the science of geography. About this time
King Otho issued a decree authorizing the
establishment of a national bookstore, con-
nected with the royal printing-press, which
was to furnish all books on education to be
used in the schools within the kingdom. A
Greek paper, printed at Athens, boldly took
the ground that this was the first systematic
attempt to shut out all light from Greece,
and tliat it was a measure which the Greeks
could not and would not endure.
GREECE.
373
In November, 1836, Rev. Nathan Benja-
min and wife arrived at Argos as mission-
aries of the Board. They had begun now to
encounter increasing jealousy and opposition,
and to increase this feeling a tract was pub-
lished against the Americans, which meant
all missionaries and Bible agents from what-
ever quarter they had come. Still Dr. King
had his usual number of hearers on the Sab-
bath, and during the year 1836, he distri-
buted ncai'ly 5,000 copies of the New Testa-
ment in modern Greek, and over 4,000 school
books and religious tracts. Mr. Riggs also dis-
tributed 1,600 copies of Scriptures and tracts.
In 1837, Dr. King discontinued his Gym-
nasium, the government having established
a Gymnasium and University at Athens.
During this year 24,736 books were distri-
buted, of which 4,432 were new Testaments.
On one day Dr. King had 45 Greek soldiers call
on him for books. In May of this year. Rev.
Messrs. Samuel R. Houston and George W.
Leyburn and their wives, arrived at Areopolis,
the chief town of the province of Laconia.
They immediately commenced the erection
of a Lancasterian school-house, large enough
to accommodate 200 scholars, and also took
measures for the establishment of two other
schools, one for boys, and one exclusively
for females.
In 1838 the station at Argos was discon-
tinued, and Mr. Riggs removed to Smyrna,
and Mr. Benjamin to Athens. The books
sold and distributed this year at the depot
established by Dr. King at Athens, amounted
to 32,410 copies. Not less than 20,000 copies
of the Scriptures, or parts of them, were
distributed in Greece during the year. Of
Areopolis and its Spartan population, Mr.
Houston writes at this time : — " They seem
never to have been either a commercial, a
manufacturing, or an agricultural people.
All their buildings, their roads, many articles
of their household furniture and their dress,
have been evidently designed for a state of
war. Their implements of husbandry are of
the most ancient and rude methods of con-
struction. The hand-mill, turned b}^ women,
is used in most of their villages. Saddk^s
and bridles are unknown, as well as wagons
and carriages of everj'- kind. Bedsteads,
tables, chairs, knives and forks, are very rare.
At the bishop's house myself and two mule-
teers dined out of the same dish, all sitting
cross-legged on the floor. The inhabitants
are all Greeks. No Catholics, Jews, Arme-
nians, or Turks are, to be found among them."
Early in 1839 the government allowed a
teacher to be procured for the Gymnasium
at Areopolis, and soon that school contained
170 pupils. In Julj^ of this year. Dr. King
began to preach in the new chapel, which
had been finished tlirough the liberality of
friends in the city of New York. The whole
number of copies of books and tracts distri-
buted from the depository at Athens this j^ear
was 52.285. The printing executed at Athens
was 26,800 copies of books, making 1,413,400
pages, all in modern Greek. Among the
books printed was Baxter's Saint's Rest,
translated by Dr. King.
The year 1840 witnessed the translation
of Barnes' Notes on the Gospel of ^Matthew,
the Youth's Book of Natural Theology, and
a book of Scripture Stories, by the brethren
at Areopolis. The printing at Athens this
year amounted to 2,880,000 pages. A society
was formed this year called the Education
Societjr, designed to provide a juvenile liter-
ature, and the missionaries were recognized
as fellow-laborers in this work.
In 1841 the government required that one
of the catechisms used in the Greek church
should be introduced into the school sup-
ported by the Board at Areopolis. This
catechism taught the worship of pictures,
with other superstitions, which could not be
countenanced ; and as the government would
not yield the point, the station at Areopolis
had to be abandoned. Mr. Houston joined
the mission to the Nestorians in Persia, and
Mr. Benjamin joined Mr. King at Athens.
The schools at Atliens having been given up,
the missionaries employed themselves in
preaching, translating, and the circulation
of books and tracts. Among the transla-
tions were Dr. Beecher's sermons on tem-
perance. The abandonment of the station
at Areopohs, for the reason assigned, was a
testimony against the errors of the Greek
Church, of the most public and decisive char-
acter, and was regarded as honest and con-
sistent by the Greeks themselves.
Nothing unusual occurred in 1842. In
1843, Mr, Benjamin closed his connection
with this mission and removed to Trebizond,
and Dr. King alone remained at Athens.
The reasons for this change may be found in
a long article written by Dr. King, setting
forth the peculiar obstacles in the way of a
sucaessful mission among the Greeks, and
published in the Annual Report of the Board
for 1844.
In the early part of 1844, the enemies of
the truth made an attempt to oblige Dr.
King to retire from the field. This brought
him into controversy in one of the principal
newspapers of Athens, on the dearest of all
the superstitions of the Greeks — the worship
of the Virgin Mary — and his opponents were
perplexed by the proofs then given that one
of the saints of their own calender, Epipha-
nius, had taught the same doctrine vrith the
missionaiy on tliis subject. Dr. King pub-
lished also this 3'ear a volume entitled the
" Prayers of the Saints," a collection of pray-
ers from the Bible, and appended " Direc-
tions with regard to Prayer," consisting of
passages from the Bible, showing to whom
prayer should be offered, and through what
374
mediation. He had other Avorks in view,
but was interrupted by the passage of a law
designed to secure the'Greek Church against
danger from this quarter. Just before the
passage of this law, Dr. King wrote thus :
" The Greeks, though manacled and bound
for ages, were not made for slaves. The Greek
mind will he free, and being free it will act,
and its action will be felt in Europe, Asia,
and Africa. Onlj^ think of twenty-five news-
papers iu Athens, a Constitution, freedom
of the press, a University, Gymnasium, and
many schools both for males and females ; and
I, a stranger, permitted to make a defence,
which, in Spain or Italy, would have con-
signed ]oe to the Inquisition. And in the
midst of all the attacks which have been so
furiously made upon me, I have still con-
tinued my regular services on the Lord's day,
and have been surprised to see that so many
dared to attend."
This language was too complimentary, as
it soon appeared, for Dr. King was subjected
to prosecution in the courts of Greece, for his
work on the worship of the Virgin Mary, and
that notwithstanding he had drawn entirely
from the writings of some of the most approved
saints in the Greek Calendar,in the form of ex-
tracts from Epiphanius, Chrysostom, Basil,
Ireuajus, Clemens, Eusebius, Pamphili, &c.
This book, a duodecimo of 220 pages, received
the most pointed condemnation of the Greek
Synod, in August 18-i5, which Synod " ex-
communicated as blasphemous and impious,
the defence of the Calvinist and Nestorian
Jonas King, and prohibited to every ortho-
dox Christian the reading of it, and called
upon one and all to deliver it iumiediately to
the Arc." It prohibited also " all and every
kind of connection with this most impious
her-etic," such as saluting or greeting him in
the street, entering his dwelling, or eating,
or drinking with him. And the Synod, not
content with this, demanded that the author
be prosecuted by the Government. He was
accordingly prosecuted, and the case went
against him in three successive trials, the
last of wliich was before the Areopagus, or
higliest court of appeal. The ellect of these
judgments was to pass Dr. King over to the
Criminal Court for trial as to the truth of
the charges, and the infliction of punishment.
This trial was to take place at Syra, and to
that place Dr. King repaired, witli the two
Greek lawyers who had nobly and ably de-
fended him before the Areopagus. But be-
fore landing it was ascertained that Dr.
King's life would be in danger, and accord-
ingly a postponement of the trial was se-
cured, and he returned to Athens.
Arriving at this place in July 1846, ho at
once received the generous oifer of British
protection fr(jm the Ambassador, Sir
Edmund Lyons ; and the American Consul
also, Mr. iSIuHigiin. kindly interfered in his
GREECE.
behalf. Dr. King now resumed the preach-
ing service in his own house, which was at-
tended by about thirty persons.
For a little time this persecuted mission-
ary pursued his work, subject to frequent
abuse, and threats, and violence ; and on
learning that the " Minister of the Interior"
had the power and had expressed a willing-
ness to banish him from Athens and from
Greece, he determined, with the advice of
his lawyers and other friends, to depart
voluntarily, in which case he could return at
any time without a permit. He accordingly
set out for Geneva, where he arrived August
25, 1847. From Geneva he proceeded to
Malta, where he arrived November 1st ; and
in June 1848, he returned again with his
family to Athens. His letter to the Com-
mittee of the Board on this occasion, an-
nouncing his arrival and reception, his rea-
sons for returning at that time, the course of
the press, and the probable result of his
trial, is a document of extraordinary interest,
but it cannot be inserted in this work. It
may be found in the Report of the Board
for 1848.
Dr. King did not for some months resume
religious services in his chapel on the Sab-
bath ; but his book depository was opened,
and Bibles, Testaments, and religious books
of various kinds were in demand.
In January 1848. six months after his re-
turn, he had printed one thousand copies of
the " Prayers of the Saints ;" 6,410 copies
of the Decalogue ; and 2,000 copies of the
" Dialogue between the Bible and a Sinner ;"
amounting in all to 593,510 pages. On the
13th of February he commenced preaching
publicly, and one of his hearers was a mili-
tary officer, and brother of the King's at-
torney. He continued preaching in his
chapel through the year without molesta-
tion.
In the spring of 1850, the Government
took measures for a second prosecution
against Dr. King, on the ground of proselyt-
ism ; and in May he was called to appear
before a judge to answer to this charge.
The examination at this trial was iu the
form of question and answer between the
judge and tlie accused, and sets the great
prudence and wisdom of the latter in a
strong light. See report of the Board for
1851.
Dr. King met with no serious interrup-
tion in his labors until September 1851, when
he received an order from the Council of
Judges iu the Criminal Court of Athens, to
submit to trial as one guilty of having
preached in his own house doctrines, prin-
ciples, and opinions, contrary to the basis of
the religion of the Oriental Church. From
this Court he appealed to the higher Court of
the Areopagus. The Areopagus decided
that tlie penal law forbidding the expression
GREECE.
375
of sentiments and opinions contrary to the
basis of religion and morals, did not apply
in the case of Dr. King. Notwithstanding
this, the Criminal Court, to which the case
was' remanded for trial, declared him guilty
of this very offence against that law, and
condemned' him to imprisonment, and after
that had expired, to banishment from the
kingdom.
In these circumstances Dr. King enjoyed
the friendly interference of our government,
as well as the sympathy of a large number
of able lawyers and other distinguished gen-
tlemen in Athens. The sentence was not
enforced to its full extent, and the persecu-
ted missionary continued his labors, distrib-
uting during the year 1852 the Scriptures
and other useful books to the amount of
nearly half a million of pages.
The Herald for May 1S54, announced that
Dr. King had been formally notified by the
Greek government, that he was free " from
the penalty of exile imposed on him by the
decision of the Criminal Court of Athens."
He therefore continues his labors, preaching
and distributing the Scriptures, besides
printing and circulating large numbers of
tracts and other books. The United States
Government has taken up his grievances, of
which a full investigation has been made by
its representative, Hon. Mr. Marsh, who has
made an able report to his government,
favorable to Dr. King ; but the final settle-
ment of the case has not yet transpired.—
Rev. E. D. Moore.
American Episcopal Board. — The mis-
sion of -this Board to Greece was pre-
ceded by an exploring tour by Dr. Rob-
ertson. In the fall of 1830, the mission
was commenced by him and Rev. Mr. Hill,
at Tenos, but was afterwards removed to
Athens. They took with them two printmg
presses, under the superintendence of Mr.
Bingham, which were usefully employed in
issuing such publications as circumstances
called^ for. They were successful also in
collecting poor children into schools, who
were instructed in the word of God. This
small beginning grew into a large establish-
ment, and in 1834, it was recognized as the
Government Seminary for the instruction of
female teachers. In 1836, it numbered
between 600 and 700 scholars. This mission,
with its schools, has continued to prosper to
the present time, though, on several occa-
sions, a storm of opposition was raised,
which threatened its destruction. Yet, by
the good hand of God upon them, Mr. Hill
and his associates have been able to main-
tain their gromid, with increasing prospects
of usefulness. The committee in their re-
port for 1853, say that the mission continues
to be an object of regard with the people ;
and that it is quietly, yet efficiently, doing a
work which must exercise an important in-
fluence upon the spiritual welfare of those
among whom it is conducted. Dr. Hill says,
" Our schools are quite full. We are obliged
every day to refuse the most pressing appli-
cations. Our pupils are from five to fifteen
years of age, and from every class of society,
from the daughter of the Prime Minister
down to the poorest. The greater part of
them are able to read the word of God ;
and not a week passes without the whole
having learned some portion of it, and with-
out, at least, some impoi-tant truth having
been taught them. I have lately received a
very flattering testimonial of the favor in
which our mission is held by the Greek
Government. The Minister of the Interior
has sent me a large and elegantly executed
map of Greece, accompanied by an official
note, in which he says, ' For the use of the
Institution, which is so admirably conducted
under your direction, and as a mark of the
estimation in which it is held by us, we have
the pleasure of offermg. Reverend Sir, a copy
of the new map of the kingdom of Greece.' "
With reference to the general state of the
missionary work, Dr. Hill remarks : " While
the influence of our missionary operations is
every where felt, we are happy to find that
God is raising up among the clergy of the
Greek Church those who agree with us in
making His word the all-important means of
salvation." And he quotes from a lecture
recently delivered by one of the educated
clergy of the Greek Church, who has re-
cently been appointed by the Government
as public preacher in the capital, to a Bible
Class of young females in one of the public
schools, which is replete with evangelical
sentiments.
Stations were also commenced and main-
tained for some time at Syra and Crete ; but
they have since been abandoned.
American Baptist Missionary Union. —
The mission of the American Baptist Union
in Greece, had its origin in the sympa-
thies which had been awakened in the Uni-
ted States in behalf of a people, whose an-
cient splendor and power present a striking
contrast to their present feebleness and in-
significance— a people to the genius of whose
ancestors the civilized world with one ac-
cord acknowledges its unceasing obligations.
The Protestant denominations had already
established missions in the country, when in
the summer of 1836, the Baptist Board of
Missions appointed Messrs. Cephas Pasco
and Horace T. Love missionaries in Greece.
They were ordained in September of that
5'ear, and sailing soon afterwards, they ar-
rived at Patras in the following December.
The place at which the mission was to be es-
tablished, had not been determined by the
managers, and the missionaries at first fixed
their residence at Patras, a town in the
kingdom of Greece containing at that time
3Y6
GREECE.
about 7,000 inhabitants. So soon as their
acquaintance with the language would allow,
they opened a school with the sanction of
the government, which was soon attended
by 40 scholars, and also devoted themselves
to the circulation of the Scriptures and
tracts. They were required to report ail
their proceedings to the government, and
the Holy Synod of the Greek Church, find-
ing that the Scriptures which they circulated
were not of the authorized version, soon is-
sued a decree forbidding them to be read,
and commanding them to be burned wher-
ever they might be found. The decree,
however, was but little regarded, save by a
few of the priests, who alone attempted its
enforcement. But the attempt was futile,
and served only to stimulate a curiosity
which before was latent among the people.
In July, 1839, Mrs. Harriet E. Dickson
was appointed a teacher in the mission, and
went to reside at Patras. She was a Scot-
tish lady who had resided several years in
Greece, where, with her husband, now de-
ceased, she had been connected with the go-
vernment school in the island of Corfu. Mr.
Pasco having returned to the United States
in consequence of ill-health, the operations
of the mission were confined to Patras and
its neighborhood, until April, 1840, when
Mr. Love was obliged by the unfriendly cli-
mate of that place to remove with his family
to Corfu, which, for several years, became
the principal seat of the mission. Corfu is
the capital of the Ionian Republic, and con-
tains a population of upwards of 25,000, of
whom perhaps 10,000 are English, Italians
and Jews. In August, 1840, Mr. Love bap-
tized the first Greek convert, who, being a
person of superior intelligence, soon became
an assistant in the mission, and was appoint-
ed to resume its operations at Patras, where
he labored among his countrymen for seve-
ral years with commendable fidelity. In
the summer of 1841 Mr. and Mrs. Buel were
sent by the managers to join the mission at
Corfu — the R>rmer being already ordained
as a minister of the Gospel, while the latter.
a lady of superior cultivation, was appointed
to teach in the mission schools. ^Ir. Love
preached to such congregations of Greeks
as he was able to gather, and Mr. Unci com-
menced a service in Englisli for the English
residents of the island, and also distributed
tracts among the native population. In con-
sequence of this latter work in which he
was engaged, a report was set on foot that
the tracts were against the religion of the
country, especially against their favorite
Saint Spoiridion, and on the day preceding
Christmas, 1841, the festal day of the Saint,
Mr. IJuel having become an object of popular
jealousy, was insulted by the mob, and at
length attacked with open violence and dri-
ven to his own house. Hither he was pur-
sued by the mob, who broke into the house
and destroyed the bibles, tracts and other
books, as well as much of the furniture
which it contained. INIr. Buel and the mem-
bers of his family were rescued from the
peril to which they were exposed, only by
the interposition of the commander of the
British garrison, who escorted them with a
strong guard, to the castle. So intense was
the excitement among the people that a few
daj's afterward it gave rise to a collision be-
tween them and some soldiers of the garri-
son, which was brought to a close only after
the destruction of several lives. The afl'air
was, on subsequent inquiry, found to havo
its origin in false and exciting reports which
had been circulated respecting Mr. Buel and
the character of his tracts. Though the
other missionaries were not molested, it was
deemed prudent that he should withdrav?"
for a period from active participation in the
mission. He accordingly passed the two
following years at Malta. Mr. Love, in ad-
dition to preaching, had devoted much of his
time to the preparation of evangelical tracts
and the translation of several of the most
approved school books, especially relating to
Christian morals and kindred subjects, some
of which the Commissioner of Instruction
allowed to be introduced into the schools of
the island. They were also introduced into
many of the schools of Patras in the king-
dom of Greece. The assistant, whose name
was Apostolos, was here still engaged in pro-
secuting the labors of the mission. He en-
tered with ability and zeal into the plan of
introducing the new books into the schools,
and in the winter of 1842 brought to Mr.
Love at Corfu, two converts who professed
to have received the Gospel, and who now
solicited baptism at the hands of the mission-
'di-y. They were soon baptized, but on their
return to Patras, they found their country-
men so excited against them, because they
had become Americans, as was said, that,
together with Apostolos, they withdrew to
Athens, and the mission at Patras was
henceforth discontinued.
The health of Mr. Love had long been de-
clining in the climate of Greece, and early in
1843 he was compelled to return to the Uni-
ted States, and here, after waiting for two
years in the hope of a return to the mission,
he withdrew from the service of the Board.
The school at Corfu was continued by Mrs.
Dickson. In 1843 the kingdom of Greece
was convulsed with a political revolution
which had long been threatening. It re-
sulted in the establishment of a freer consti-
tution, which, however, though it contained
provision for religious freedom, also specially
prohibited all attempts at proselyting. Its
operation has been such that, while every
man is allowed to exercise the religious faith
which ho already professes, no one is allowed
GREECE.
377
to persuade another to change his faith. But
as in all other countries, the actual freedom
of religion has been found to depend rather on
the spirit of the government and the people,
than on any specific provisions of the consti-
tution, and though Protestant missionaries
are ahvaj's restricted in Greece, they j^et
encounter but few obstacles which prudence
and address may not i-emove or overcome.
On the establishment of the new constitu-
tion, Mr. Buel returned to Greece and went
to reside at the Pirgeus, where Apostolos had
for some time been living. lie immediately
engaged in revising the translations already
made by Mr. Love, of books for schools and
popular reading. Of these the principal was
President Wayland's "Elements of Moral
Science," a work which has since passed
quite beyond the sphere of missionary influ-
ence, and has been received with unusual
favor by teachers, professors in the univer-
sity, and scholars of every degree. It has
been adopted as a text-book in the Gymna-
sia and Hellenic schools both of Greece pro-
per and the Ionian Islands, and has become
a common authority in morals among the
people, often with the avowed ajjproval of
the ecclesiastics themselves.
In February, 1844, the mission was rein-
forced by the arrival of Rev. Albert N. Ar-
nold and Mrs. Arnold and Miss S. E.Waldo,
who had been appointed by the managers.
The ladies immediately associated themselves
with Mrs. Dickson in the management of the
schools. Mr. Arnold, while acquiring the
language, commenced a service in English for
the benefit of the English regiments stationed
at Corfu. Several other philanthropic and
religious labors which had hitherto been per-
formed by Eev. Mr. Lowndes, an English
clergj^man of the Island, were now in conse-
quence of his removal devolved on Mr. Ar-
nold. To these his attention was of necessity
mainly confined for a considerable period
after his arrival, and in the unsettled condi-
tion of the republic at that time, the ques-
tion of discontinuing the mission was seri-
ously entertained by the managers. At their
fleeting in May, 1845, they referred the mat-
■jcr to the Executive Committee or Acting
Board, as it was then styled, with the autho-
rity to discontinue the mission so soon as
might be deemed expedient. The corres-
pondence which ensued, however, deter-
mined the committee to continue the mis-
sion for the present till other events should
enable them to decide more confidently re-
specting its final issue. This experiment has
been in progress ever since, and has perhaps
exerted an unfriendly influence on the spirit
and labors of the missionaries. The question
has been considered an open one whether
the mission would survive the changes of a
few years, and no reinforcements have been
sent to strengthen it. Its members, how-
ever, have prosecuted their work with steadi-
ness and fidelity, though with a measure of
success so small as to afford but little encour-
agement to their hopes and plans. In 184G
Mr. Arnold began to preach in the Greek
language to a small assembly of Greeks, num-
bering usually from thirty to fort3r,while still
continuing his other labors among the Eng-
lish population and the regiments of Corfu.
The school of Mrs. Dickson also continued
to prosper, and awakened a wide interest
both among the philanthropic residents of
the island and Christian friends in England
and Scotland. Mr. Buel continued to preach
and prosecute other labors at the Pirseus,
where the mission was, in many respects,
more advantageously situated than it could
be at Corfu, or in any part of the Ionian
Republic. Its influences here were direct-
ed to the people of Greece — the descendants
of those whose genius once filled the world
with its renown, and who still cherish the
memories and traditions of their ancient
sires. In one respect, however, the mission
has encountered greater obstacles here than
in the Republic, and this is in the constitu-
tion and power of the " Eastern Orthodox
Church," as it is styled, which holds the
consciences of men beneath its sway, and
tolerates no dissent from the dogmas of its
established faith. It controls the authority
of the civil magistrate, directs the influence
of the press, and even holds the courts of law
in bondage to its spiritual despotism. The
power of this corrupt combination of priestly
bigotry and aristocratic pride has often been
brought to bear on those who have sought
the instructions of the American mission-
aries in Greece, and in some instances even
upon the missionaries themselves. This re-
mark finds its most prominent illustration
in the violent and inquisitorial proceedings
against Doctor King, one of the missionaries
of the American Board of Commissioners,
and is verified by the attempt made in 1847 to
extinguish the Baptist Mission at the Pirasus.
Mr. Buel was suddenly ordered by the De-
march of the city " to dismiss the school il-
legally taught in his house." The order was
complied with, but the missionary still con-
tinued his Bible class and preaching on Sun-
day. A few weeks afterwards he was sum-
moned before the Court of Magistrates and
fined 50 drachmas for teaching the Sacred
Scriptures without a license. The case,
however, was carried before the Court of
Appeals' at Athens, and ably argued by gen-
tleinen ardently devoted to the interests of
religious freedom, and the sentence was re-
versed. It was regarded as a signal triumph
of free principles, and has exerted an influ-
ence highly favorable to the independence of
Protestant missionaries residing in the coun-
try. They have since been molested less
frequently than before, though by no means
378
GREEN-KEY— HERVEY ISLANDS.
even now exempt from liability to annoy-
ance both from government and people.
In October, 1851, Mr. Arnold removed
from Corfu to Athens. This step vras taken
in accordance with the direction of the Ex-
ecutive Committee, on account of an impres-
sion which had long prevailed that the king-
dom of Greece, invested with independence
and nationality as it is, offered by far the
more inviting field for missionary labor.
Mrs. Dickson remained to carry on her flour-
ishing and useful school at Corfu, which she
still continues to superintend and instruct.
But with this exception, the entire mission
since the autumn of 1851 has been confined
to Athens and the neighboring city of Pirae-
us. Its members have here continued their
accustomed labors Avith comparatively few
and feeble religious results, but to the gene-
ral spread of intelligence and of liberal sen-
timents they have undoubtedly contributed
an important part. The native converts
have at no period numbered more than
seven, but these, in one of their communica-
tions to the Board of Managers, claim to be
the most numerous Protestant communion
in Greece. Amid the changes which are
now going on both in the kingdom and the re-
public of Greece, the missionaries still cling
to the hope that new opportunities may be
presented for bringing the simple doctrines
of the Gospel in contact with the minds of
the nation. There is said to be a growing
dissatisfaction with the- prevailing faith and
mode of worship, and an indication that the
beginning of a Protestant reformation may
not be distant. Meanwhile the missionaries
prosecuting such labors as their hands find
to do, are waiting to take advantage of every
change that may favor the dissemination of
the Gospel of Christ in its puritj^ among the
people of the covmtry. Prof. W. Gammell.
Statistics of the Mission fc»- 1854. — Sta-
tions, 3 ; Missionaries, 2 ; Female assistants,
3 ; Native preacher, 1 ; Churches, 1 ; Com-
municants, 10 ; Schools. 1 ; Pupils. 52.
GREEN-KF.Y: A station of the Moravi-
ans on the island of St. Thomas, W. I.
GREENLAND: (See Labrador and
Greenland. )
GRENADA : One of the West India Is-
lands, about 20 miles in length and 10 in
breadth. A station of the Wesleyans, also
of the Propagation Society.
GREEGREE: A charm worn by the na-
tives of Africa, as a protection against evil
spirits. These charms are of various kinds
and forms, according with the stupid notions
of a fetish religion.
GIIK^UA TOWN: Station of the London
Missionary Society in South Africa, 530 miles
north-east of Cape Town,with 8 out-stations.
GROHXCKLOOF : A station of the Uni-
ted Hrethrcn, in South Africa, 40 miles north
of Cape Town,
GUANGA : A station of the Wesleyans
in KafFraria. S. Africa.
GUIANA : (See British Guiana and
West Indies.)
GUNGREE: A station of the London
Missionary Society in Hindostan.
GUY'SllILL: A station of the Wesley-
ans in Jamaica, W. I.
HABAI: A station of the Wesleyan
Missionary Societv in the Friendly Islands.
HADGEE, or HAD.JI : The title of a Mo-
hammedan who performs a pilgrimage to
Mecca.
HAN A : A station of the American Board
in the Sandwich Islands, on Maui. It is
situated in a beautiful locality, the whole
country being crowned with the richest ver-
dure. In front of the mission house is an
immense bluft", with a precipice 400 feet high,
in which are two caves, in one of which tradi-
tion says Kaahumanu was born, and in the
othernursed.
HANKEY: A station of the London
Missionary Society in South Africa, near
Gamtoos, with an out-station at Kruis Fon-
teiti, commenced in 1825. The site of this
station is on a dry, barren land, near the
Gamtoos river, surrounded by hills, render-
ing it unfit for sustaining a large population.
Here the genius and activity of the mission
ary have, by much perseverance, triumphed
over the obstacles of nature, in making a
tunnel through one of these hills, leading the
waters of the Gamtoos over a large tract of
land, thus giving the people labor, and allbrd-
ing the means of support and comfort.
HARMATTAN: A dry easterly wind in
Africa, which destroys vegetation.
HASTINGS : A town of liberated Afri-
cans, in the River District, Sierra Leone,
West Africa, near Regent's Town : Church
Missionary Society.
HAURAKI : A district in New Zealand,
containing fourtribcs of natives, among whom
the Church ^lissionar}'^ Society have a
mission.
HAWAII : The largest of the Sandwich
Island grouj), being 97 miles in length and
78 in breadth, 280 in circumference, contain-
ing a surface of 4,000 square miles. The
greater part of the cultivated land is near
the sea-shore, along which the towns and
villages of the natives are thickly scattered.
A gradual and unbroken ascent leads from
the sea-shore to the summits of three mount-
ains which enclose a central valley, the crater
of an immense volcano, called Manna Loa.
The American Board have 0 stations on this
island.
HAYTI : See West Indies.
HENTIIADA : A large town in southern
Burmah on the Irrawaddy, 120 miles from
Rangoon. A station of the mission of the
Am. Baptist Missionary Union in Burmah.
IIERVEY ISLANDS: A group of is-
HINDOSTAN.
379
lands in the Southei'n Pacific, situated be-
tween lat. 19° and 21» S., and long. 150^ and
161° West. It embraces Mangaia, Atiu,
Aitutaki, jNIauke, Mitiaro, and Ilervey's
Island. Population, 7,000.
HIERARCHY : An ecclesiastical system,
comprehending different orders of clergy.
HILO : A district on the western coast
of the island of Hawaii, forming, in connec-
tion with Puna, the parish of Rev. Mr.
Coan, formerly a missionary of the American
Board, now pastor of the native church,
from whom he receives his support.
HINDOSTAN : Boundaries and Surface. —
The name Hindostan, was given to the south-
ern portion of India by the Persians, and
signifies, literal!}'-, " negro''' and '■'■negroland.''''
But as now used, to designate the entire
country south of the Himalaya mountains,
the term is of European origin. The vast
triangular country, called Hindostan, lies
between the 8th and 35th degrees of north
latitude. It is bounded on the north by the
Himalaya mountains, the highest in the
world, on the N. E. and N. W., by the rivers
Brahmaputra and the Indus, and on every
other side by the ocean. It comprises an area
of over 1,200,000 square miles, or about one-
third part of the estimated area of Europe.
The proportion of solid land is even greater
than this, on account of the absence of inland
waters. The surface of the country is of a
very marked character. In the northern
portion are three great ranges of mountains,
rising, one higher than the other, as we pro-
ceed northward, with elevated valleys be-
tween. These valleys, themselves, are from
2,000 to 4,000 feet above the level of the sea.
The east and west Ghauts are also noted
ranges, some of their granite peaks rising to
the height of 8,000 feet. The great coal
field, which is a distinguishing feature of this
country, is 65 miles in length and 12 in
breadth, running on both sides of the river
Damoda. Three pits only have been sunk
to the depth of 90 feet. The coal is largely
consumed in Calcutta for forges and steam
navigation. The geology of Hindostan is
very simple, compared with that of European
countries, consisting of only four classes of
rocks, viz. : the granite, the sand-stone and
clay slate, the trap, and the alluvial.
Rivers and Lakes. — The rivers of this
country have their sources either in the
Himalaya mountains, or within the great
central table-land. The principal of these
are the Brahmaputra and the Ganges. The
first of these, from its source to the Bay of
Bengal, is about 350 miles. Having a rapid
current, and passing generally through a wild
and inhospitable country, it is of but little
use for purposes of navigation. The Ganges
has its source in about 20 degrees N. lat.,
and runs 1,350 miles, emptying into the Bay
of Bengal, a few miles from the Brahmaputra.
The Ganges has several important branches,
as the Soane, the Hoogly, the Jumna, &c.
Hindostan contains no lakes of importance,
either of salt or fresh water, at least none that
can be compared with those of N. America,
or even of Switzerland or Scotland.
Coast and Climate. — The coast of Hindos-
tan is very little broken by inlets of the sea.
The only gulfs of importance are those of
Cutch and Cambarj''. The only good harbor
is that of Bombay. The climate of the
country is greatly diversified, owing in part
to its alternation of lofty mountain ranges
and deep valleys ; partlj^, also, to the mon-
soons, which, as a general rule, blow from
the N. E. during the serene temperate
months of winter, and from the S. W. during
the tempestuous and hot or rainy months of
summer. The year has been generally
divided into three well-defined seasons, viz.,
the hot, the wet, and the cold. The mean
temperature of Bombay is 82*^ Fah. At
Madras the mean temperature is 84°, and at
Dawar, on the table-land, it is 75°. At Cal-
cutta it is 79°. In May, the hottest month,
the thermometer rises at Calcutta, to 100°, and
in winter it foils nearly to the freezing point.
Native Popidalion. — The number of abor-
iginal races in Hindostan, differing in lan-
guage, manners, &c., is very great. Of these
races, eight have been considered as distin-
guished from the rest by a degree of supe-
riority in civilization, the arts, language, liter-
ature, and the richer and more extensive terri-
tories which they occupy. These are the Ben-
galee, Oriya, Mahratta, Gujratee, Telinga,
Tamil, Karnata, and Hindi, or Hindostanee.
The Bengalee nation occupies above 80,000
square miles of fertile land, chiefly within the
delta of theGana:es, and comprises a population
of nearly 25,000,000. The Tamil nation oc-
cupies 56,000 square miles, at the southern
extremity of the peninsula, with a population
of nearly 7,000,000. The Telinga people
occupy 100,000 square miles of the N. E.
portion of the peninsula, and number proba-
bly 7,000,000 or 8,000,000. The Oriya nation,
covering 17,000 square miles of the low land
which connects the delta of the Ganges with
the south peninsula, numbers about 4,000,000.
The Mahratta nation extends over nearly
200,000 square miles, between the 22d and
23d degrees of N. lat., and its population is
estimated at about 12,000,000 of people. The
Karnata, or Canara nation, numbers about
5,000,000, and are found upon the extensive
table-land south of the 18th deg., N. lat. The
people speaking the Hindostanee language,
occupy the upper portion of the valley of
the Ganges, and number about 20,000,000.
The most enterprising of these nations, it is
to be observed, have occasionally passed,
either as conquerors or colonists, into the
territories of each other, or of their neigh-
bors. Thus we find colonies of the Tamils
380
IIINDOSTAN.
Settled in the Malayalim, of Tclingas in
Karnata and the Tamil ccmntry, of Mahrat-
tas in the Telinga. Tamil, and Karnata coun-
tries, &c. These colonies not unfrequently
preserve their national language, their ori-
{^riial manners, and their purity of descent,
in their adopted countries. The barbarous
and savage tribes of India are to be
found in the recesses of mountains, never in
the fertile plains or extensive table-lands.
These barbarous tribes are considered abori-
ginal, in common with others of the plains,
and their savage character is ascribed to
their unfavorable situation, and the hostility
of the pou'erful occupants of the lower and
more fertile regions.
Foreign Settlers. — Besides the original
and peculiar inhabitants of Ilindostan, a
crowd of foreign colonists or settlers of
different nations, form a considerable portion
of the present population of the country.
They are confined to particular spots, or scat-
tered indiscriminatelj' over the countrv, ac-
cording to the place of their aiTival. or other
causes. These several classes of foreign
population, following the order of their sup-
posed arrival, are as follows, viz. : Jews,
Syrian Christians. Arabs, Armenians, Par-
Sees, Persians. Afghans, Tartars, Turks,
Abyssinians, Portuguese, English, Dutch,
French, Danes, and Chinese.
Religions. — The principal religion of the
lfiO,000,000 of Ilindostan— about one-half
the population of Europe — is Brahminism.
(which see.) The other forms of religion
are the Jain. Budhist, Seik, ^Mohammedan,
and Christian. The first of these forms of
religion prevails chiefly in tlie great provinces
of Gujrat and Talawa, on the western shore
of India, but more or less of it is found scat-
tered throughout the country. The Budhist
religion is supposed to have originated in
Bahar, within the great plain of the Ganges;
but though so prevalent in Ceylon, and in
countries to the E. and N., it is nearly ex-
tinct in Ilindostan. The Seik form of reli-
gion was originated hy Nanak, in 1419, and
is confined to the N. W. part of Ilindostan.
The Mohammedan religion appeared in In-
dia about the Ijeginning of the 11th century,
and its adherents are supposed, for all India,
to amount to about one-seventh of the entire
population. The Christians al)Ound most
in tlie southern portion of tiie country. The
greater number are Nestorians, who are sup-
posed to have cmljraced Christianity through
the labors of Greek missionaries from Syria,
as earl}' as the 2d and 3d centuries. Most
of the rcmaintler are Catholics, tlie descend-
ants of the Portuguese and persons converted
by Portuguese missionaries.
Liingiuiges. — There are more than fifty
native languages spoken throughuut Ilindos-
tan. Some Hindoos of the northern portion
of the country are ac(piaiiited witli throe dead
languages, viz. : the Sanscrit, the Saraswatty
or Pracrit, and the Pali. Of these three, the
Sanscrit contains internal evidence of being
the oldest. It was the language of a people
who. according to a very probable Hindoo
tradition, occupied the Jumna, a little to the
N. W. of Delhi, and with it probablv origin-
ated the Brahminical -religion, and the first
dawn of Hindoo civilization. The Pracrit
was the language that succeeded it in the
same country, and it seems to bear the same
sort of relation to it that the Italian does to
the Latin. The Pali is a language that
sprung up in the province of Bahar. Of this
also, the Sanscrit forms the ground-work
With the people speaking the Pali language
sprung up the religion of Budha ; and the
Pali is to this day the sacred language of all
the Asiatic nations who have Budhism for
their national worship. The existence of
these three languages, that have necessarily
ceased to be spoken, aftbrds evidence of the
great antiquitj' of Hindoo civilization. One
or other of the languages in question, is more
or less mixed up, not only with every lan-
guage of Hindostan, but also with the lan-
guages of most of the neighboring countries.
To the north they form the ground-work of
these languages, as Latin does of Italian ; to
the south they are engrafted on the language
somewhat as the French is on our Saxon
tongue. The literary Hindoos reckon that
there are ten cultivated languages, having a
written character and a literature. The
enumeration of these languages, however, is
not very distinct as applicable to the present
times. The Ilindee is the most cultivated
and generally spoken of all the native lan-
guages of Ilindostan. Besides the local lan-
guage of each district, the Hindee is com-
monly spoken by all persons of education,
throughout all parts of India. Of the dead
languages the Sanscrit is as much studied in
India as the Latin is in Europe. Then there
are eight languages spoken b}'- aver}' numer-
ous population, twenty spoken by a people
less numerous but still civilized, and at least
thirty spoken by rude tribes ; making in all
fifty-eight living languages. This may be
taken as conclusive evidence that all India
was never subject to one government, and
never thoroughly united in large masses. To
the native languages above enumerated, must
be added the Persian, as much used as Latin
is in Europe ; the Arabic, often studied from
religious motives ; the Portuguese, a good
deal spoken in some parts of the maritime
coast ; and the English, which is making
considerable progress.
Literature. — The largest portion of Hin-
doo literature is contained in the dead San-
scrit, that which is found in the living lan-
guages being little else than translations,
or paraphrases from it. To Hindoo litera-
ture in any language, prose compo.-ition is
IIINDOSTAN.
381
hardly known. Every thing is In verse,
even works on astronomy, medicine, and
grammar. These facts are evidence of great
antiquitj^ and rudeness, and they also show
that for 2,000 or 3,000 years at least, native
literature has made little progress. The two
most celebrated works of Hindoo literature
are the Mahabarat and the Ramayaua ; the
one giving an account of the wars of Bharat,
and the other, the adventures of Rama, king
of Ayndbya, a supposed incarnation of Vishnu,
the '• Preserver of the Hindoo Triad."
These fictions are considered not only ex-
travagant and contradictory to all the physi-
cal laws of the globe, but prolix, trifling and
childish to the last degree.
Science. — Hindoo science is confined chiefly
to arithmetic, algebra, geometry, and astro-
nomy. They are allowed to be the invent-
ors of the system of notation, which the
Arabs borrowed from them and we from the
Arabs. In the science of geography, medi-
cine, botany, kc, the Hindoos are extremely
ignorant. In grammar they have made large
pretensions, and they have constructed a
very valuable grammar of the Tamil, and
the Sanscrit has been thoroughly sub-
jected to rules. In astronomy the Hindoos
pride themselves, but in this they can lay no
claim to originality ; neither have they ever
applied it to any practical purposes, except
in a very imperfect manner, to reckoning
time.
Arts and Ag-ricnlture.— The arts in which
the Hindoos have made the greatest progress
are agriculture, weaving, dyeing, and archi-
tecture. Their agricultural implements are
simple and rude, and their mode of using
them equally so. Their greatest skill in
agriculture has been displayed m works of
irrigation, consisting of embankments, reser-
voirs or tanks, and wells. The reservoirs
are often of vast extent, and capable of con-
verting 4,000 or 5,000 acres of dreary, sandy
desert, into productive corn-fields. Their
wells are often sunk to the depth of oOO
feet. The articles cultivated by the Hindoos
from very early times are wheat, barley,
rice, millet, pulse, sugar-cane, mustard— the
cocoa, areca, and other palms— cardamoms,
black-pepper, cotton, the mulberry, indigo,
madder, and the banana— also many other
productions common to tlie climate. The
ox, horse, hog, buflalo, elephant, dog, sheep,
and goat, have been domesticated and used
by the Hindoos from the earliest antiquity.
The common poultry is of equal antiquity
among them.
In the art of weaving the Hindoos were
skilled at a very early period, particularly in
the weaving of cotton, silk, and the hair of
the Thibetian goat. The cotton plant is
grown almost every where in Hindostan.
Their silk weaving has never equaled that
of China, the raw material being inferior.
The Oashmerians, the manufacturers of the
well known shawls which bear their name,
are descended from the genuine Hindoos,
who were the nearest neighbors to the rude
tribes to whom the shawl goat belonged.
The invention of the shawl manufacture may
therefore be fairly ascribed to the Hindoos.
Their architecture is of the simplest kind,
except that which is dedicated to religion.
Their temples, however, are alike distin-
guished for their magnitude and durabil-
ity, and for their grandeur and beauty. The
Mohammedans introduced a much higher
order of architecture, in the construction of
their mosques and mausoleums. In useful
architecture,such as dwelling houses, bridges,
roads, &c., the Hindoos have made very lit-
tle progress.
Physical ai\d Intellectual Character. — In
respect to race, the Hindoos have been re-
garded by naturalists as belonging to what
they call the Caucasian or European ; but
this is proved by the best modern writers to
be untrue. The European is white, the Hin-
doo black, or nearly so. The European has
an endless variety in the color of the hair
and of the eye, while with the Hindoo the
hair is always black, and the eye a dark
brown. In physical force, the Hindoo is
below not only the European, but even the
Arab, the Persian, and the Chinese. . The
intellectual character of the Hindoos corres-
ponds to their physical. They have subtil-
ty, but not much originality or practical
good sense. In vigor and manliness of
mind they are below the Arabs and Persians.
In moral character the Hindoos rank ex-
tremely low. Candor, integrity, and ingen-
uousness of mind, cannot be said to exist
among them. Judicial perjury is said to be
practiced in Hindostan on a wider scale than
in any other country. The Hindoos are gen-
erally credited with frugality, patience, do-
cihty, and even industry ; but their frugality
is akin to avarice, and their docility to pas-
siveness. They about as readily submit to
wrong and oppression, as make an effort to
improve their condition.
British -Rif/e.— The great body of the Hin-
doos had, for six centuries before ' the com-
mencement of the British government, been
under the dominion of foreigners, and of
foreigners more energetic than themselves,
if not more civilized. Their conquerors
were Asiatics, with complexion, manners,
customs. &c., approaching to the natives,
with whom they to a considerable extent
associated. Even in matters of religion,
where the difference was widest, a good de-
gree of toleration was allowed, and the Hin-
doo converts to Mohammedanism were ad-
missible to the highest offices of state. So
that, en the whole, the Hindoos were rather
gainers by their subjection to a foreign do-
minion.
383
HINDOSTAN.
British rule may be considered as having
been practically established in India for a
period of about 90 years. This government,
in its practical operation, may be regarded
as an enlightened despotism ; a good deal
controlled by the public opinion of English-
men on the spot, and to a much smaller ex-
tent by Parliament and public opinion in
England. The British Government in India
has been divided into three periods, the last
of which commenced in 1814, and comes
down to the present time. The influx of
Europeans into India since 1814. has result-
ed in something like a public and independ-
ent opinion at the principal scats of com-
merce, which serves to modify the despotic
character of the government. The press of
India, which was formerly under a rigorous
censorship, is now thrown open, and em-
ploys itself in redressing public and private
wrongs. The government which England
administers in India is in manj^ respects op-
pressive, and liable to great abuses. An
English writer says, '"It is not a national
government, nor is it as j'et a government
carried on by conquerors who have made
the slightest progress towards naturalization
or amalgamation with the party governed.
We are aliens in blood, in manners, in lan-
guage, and in religion, carrying on the ad-
ministration of 80,000,000 of people, and ex-
ercising a control over 50,000,000 more, at a
distance of 12,000 miles. The local govern-
ment is purely vicarial, and the essential ad-
ministration rests with men residing at a
vast distance, who never saw the country,
and who have no actual knowledge of its
manners and institutions. These men them-
selves are perpetually changing, and look
upon Indian aliiiirs as matters of very sec-
ondary importance to domestic and Euro-
pean politics. The local governments, in-
stead of being responsible to the parties
whose administration they conduct, are only
amenable for their acts to their political
friends in Europe, while the affairs of India
are too complex, too extensive, and too re-
mote, to be understood by, or for the most
part, to excite any interest in, the people
and Parliament of England. In India, gene-
rally, the acts of the local government are
secretly prepared without consulting or at-
tempting to conciliate the parties for whom
the laws are made."
However true and just these statements
may be, there is another side to the picture,
which it is more pleasing to contemplate.
With evident candor and fairness, the Com-
mittee of the American Board, in their re-
port for 184G, say :
'■It is a deejily interesting fact that the
Briti.sli government in India is almost every
year assuming a more Christian character,
and adopting a more humane and liberal
policy. The declaration of the government
now is, that it is not pledged to the support
or countenance of Hindooism, that the prm-
ciple which guides it is, that all religions
professed by its subjects shall be equally tol-
erated and protected ; and that, contrary to
what has till recently been the law of the
land, the Hindoo may embrace Christianity
and break caste without the forfeiture of
property, or any other of his civil rights and
immunities. On this principle the govern-
ment is going steadily forward, suppressing
those disgusting and inhuman rites connect-
ed with Hindooism Avhich war upon society,
correcting the abuses which have grown up
under the unnatui-al state of things which
has long prevailed in India, encouraging edu-
cation, the arts and usages of more enlight-
ened nations, and giving Christian truth free
scope to exert its purifj'ing and elevating
power over the public mind. In this manner
God is breaking down barriers and opening
the way for the spread of the Gospel in
India."
This view of the nature and influence of
British rule in India, corresponds with the
still more recent statements of the mission-
aries, and will be regarded as more than
sufficient to counterbalance the temporal
and incidental evils resulting from the ad-
ministration of the government.
MISSIONS.
American Board. — The missions of the
American Board in Ilindostan, or India,
have been of long standing, and have been
eminently successful. They now occupy
Bomhay, Ahmednuggur, Satara, Kolnpu?;
Madura, Arcot, and Madras. Of the Avork
accomplislied at each of these places only
a com]irehensive view can bo given, and
this will be best done by noticing each field
separately, as far as practicable.
Bombay. — The first missionaries of tho
Board to India arrived at Calcutta in June
1812, and were followed by others in
August. These brethren all received their
instructions from the Board at Salem, Feb.
7, 1812, and as this was the first foreign
missionarj' enterprise of the American Board
of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, and
these its first missionaries, their names may
l)roperly be given. They were, Rev. ^Messrs.
Adoniram Judson, Samuel Nott, Samuel
Newell, Gordon Hall, and Luther Rice. Ou -
reaching Calcutta, they found the country ■
so embroiled in war, that to enter upon a ^
mission there was impossible, and after a
little delay, Messrs. Hall and Nott proceed-
ed to Bombay. (For a description of the
place, see article, Bombay.) Mr. Judsun
and Mr. Rice, soon after reaching Calcutta,
changed their sentiments and joined the
Baptist mission. Mr. Newell spent some
time in visiting the Isle of France and Cey-
lon, before going to Bjmbay. It was left to
HINDOSTAN.
883
Messrs. Hall & Nott, therefore, to commence
the first mission of the Board in India. At
first they were embarrassed bj the opposi-
tion of the government, and it was not till
early in the j'ear 1814 that the missionaries
" were fairly settled in their work." Never
did men show a more earnest, self-sacrific-
ing devotion to their Master. In a letter
dated September, 1815, the missionaries
say : " We have made so much proficiency
in the Mahratta language as to be able to
enter upon the great work of preaching the
Gospel to the heathen. We have also com-
menced the work of translating the Scrip-
tures into the Mahratta language." Two
months later they say : "We have translated
a Harmony of the Gospels and several tracts,
copies of which are now in circulation among
tha heathen." In November, 1816, Mr.
Bardwell and his wife reached Bombay, and
joined the mission. In March of this j'ear,
the first printing-press at Bombay went into
opera tion.and 1,500 copies of a Scripture tract
of eight pages were issued. During this year
alsOjthe establishment and care of schools was
entered upon. Thus, in three 3^ears from the
time of entering this field, these devoted ser-
vants of Christ were preaching the Gospel
to the benighted Hindoos in their native
tongue, circulating, from their own press,
translations of the Scriptures and of tracts,
and gathering heathen children and youth
into the mission schools. In 1818 they had
eleven schools, and six hundred bo3^s under
instruction. In view of so important a fact
the missionaries say : " In these schools we
seem to see a thousand Hindoo hands at
work, from 3'ear to year, in undermining the
fabric of Hindoo idolatry."
In 1818 the mission reported three sta-
tions,— one the seat of the mission, in the
" great native town of Bombay ;" one at Ma-
him, about sis miles north, with a popula-
tion of about twenty thousand ; and a third
at Tannah, the chief town of Salsette,distant
from Bombay about twcntj^-five miles, and
separated only bj^ a narrow strait from a
dense and wide spread population on the
continent. Messrs. Nichols and Graves oc-
cupied the out-stations. During this year,
Caranja, an island near Bombay, containing
10,000 inhabitants, was explored ; and also
Choule, a place upon the coast thirty miles
south of Bombay. Places still farther dis-
tant were also visited, and their population
and condition ascertained. The schools had
now increased to twenty-five, with 1200 hea-
then children and a hundred Jewish, and as
manj^ more of occasional attendants ; and
meanwhile the mission press was constantly
turning oif portions of Scripture, tracts, and
elementary school books. Thus rapidly did
the field whiten under their labors.
In November, 1821, Mr. Bardwell arrived
at Boston with his wife and child, he having
been compelled to leave the mission on ac-
count of declining health. Four months after
the departure of Mr. Bardwell, the mission
sustained another severe loss in the death
of Mr. Newell, who, as has been stated, was
one of the four young men who first offered
themselves to the Board as missionaries to
any part of the heathen world. He fell a
victim to cholera morbus. In 1822 a mission
chapel was erected at Bombay, at an ex-
pense of about $4,500, $1,700 of which was
subscribed in Bombay and Calcutta, and the
rest in this country. The dedication of this
first Christian temple on the western side of
the Indian peninsula, took place on the 12th
of May, 1823, and was a memorable event.
The dedication services, with the exception
of one English hymn, were all in the Mah-
ratta language. In the following June the
observance of the monthly concert was com-
menced in this chapel.
Near the close of 1822, the missionaries
sent out two Jewish schoolmasters, Avith
6,000 copies of extracts from the Scriptures,
and numerous tracts, in the Mahratta lan-
guage, for distribution among the people.
They had scattered about 2,000 copies, when
they were arrested by the local authorities
and sent back with their books to Bombay,
the Governor in Council saying that books
exposing the corruptions of heathenism
would endanger the public tranquillity. In
1824 the mission was strengthened by the
arrival of Mr. Frost and Mrs. Graves; but it
was visited with sore bereavement soon
after, in the death of Mr. Nichols of the Tan-
nah station, who had been seven years
among the heathen, most of the time preach-
ing to ihem in their native language.
In 1825 a society was formed at Bombay,
under the auspices of the English Governor,
called the Bombay Native School Book and
School Society, designed to promote the
education of Hindoo children. At this pe-
riod the missionaries were able to report
ver^" gratifying progress in the education of
heathen girls, in spite of the strong native
prejudices, 75 being under instruction. The
whole number of children in the schools
was 1,750, 133 of them of Jewish parentage.
On the 20th of March, 1826, the mission
suffered a severe loss in the death of IMr.
Hall, one of the two by whom the mission
of the Board at Bombay was established.
He was seized with the cholera, while on a
preaching tour on the Continent, and died
in eight or nine hours. One of his last ef-
forts was, an appeal to American Christians
in behalf of the 12,000,000 of people who
speak the Mahratta language, and on whom
the Bombay mission might be brought to
bear. Just before the death of Mr, Hall, an
important event occurred, viz. : the forma-
tion of the " Bombay Missionary Union," an
association of missionaries of the London
384
HINDOSTAN.
the Churcli, aud the Scottish Missionary So-
cieties, which had stations in various parts
of India, aud those of the American Board.
The members of these missions all united on
the basis of the distinguishing doctrines of
the Reformation, and for their common bene-
fit. It presented a pleasing instance of mu-
tual charity and affection, among those who
were striving alike for the evangelization of
the heathen. Soon after the death of Mr.
Hall, the stations at Makim and Tannah
■were given up, and in 1826 Mr. Graves was
the only missionary of the Board at Bom-
bay.
In 1827, Rev. Messrs. Cyrus Stone and
D. 0. Allen joined the mission, having em-
barked at Boston in June of that year. Dur-
ing this year the Missionary Union, just
named, formed a " General Tract Society,"
to aid Christians of all denominations in
their efforts to benefit the people of the East.
In their report for 1828, the missionaries
state that there were at that time about
18,000 Catholics in Bombay, most of them
of Hindoo origin, whose ancestors were con-
verted to the Romish Church some two cen-
turies before, when Bombay was a Portu-
guese colony. The Catholics, however, were
found to be in the same state of superstition
and idolatry as the other natives, and just as
much in need of the Gospel.
In 1830 three more missionaries arrived at
Bojnbay, viz. : Rev. IMessrs. Ramsey, Her-
vey and Reed. In July, 1831, Mr. Garrett,
for ten years the faithful printer to the mis-
sion, died, and soon after Mrs. Allen and
Mrs. Ilervey were called from their earthly
labors. During this year the mission re-
ceived $5,G00 from the American Bible and
Tract Societies, for the publication of the
Scriptures and of tracts, and a legacy of
$3,000 from an inhabitant of Bombay, de-
ceased, for the sujiport of public worship in
the Mission Chapel. Several Hindoo con-
verts were received to the Mission Church
this year, and the Christian marriage of a
Brahmin was celebrated.
In 1832, twentyyears after the commence-
ment of the Bombay mission, there were
twelve schools exclusively for females, con-
taining 320 pupils ; and eighteen other
schools, containing 03 girls and 1,322 boys,
making a total of 30 schools, and 1,705
scholars. Such an advance, especially in fe-
male education, must be considered quite
wonderful, in view of the total darkness
•which rested upon the native mind when the
work commenced. '"There is no doubt,"
say the Missionaries at this period, " but
Hindoo girls are capable of a high degree of
improvement in all the departments of
knowledge which are appropriate to their
station ill life."
During these 20 years, the amount of
Mahratta printing had been 13,000,000 of
pages, including a ]Mahratta version of the
New Testament ; five natives had been re-
ceived to the Mission Church ; and the Gos-
pel had been preached to many thousands in
the streets and market places of Bombay
and on the continent. A native temperance
society was also formed in 1832, on the
principle of total abstinence from the use of
ardent spirits, opium, tobacco, and other
intoxicating drugs.
Ahmednuggur was first occupied as a sta-
tion in December, 1831. It is on the Conti-
nent, 175 miles north-east from Bombay;
and Messrs. Read and Boggs were the first
missionaries to this field. In describing the
place, they say : " There are at least fifty
villages within twenty miles of Ahmednug-
gur. Short tours have been made through
most of these villages, and some thousands
of religious books and tracts have been dis-
tributed. The Hindoos have received them
with avidity." A number of English gen-
tlemen residing at Ahmednuggur opened an
asylum in 1832 for the infirm poor, and
placed it under the superintendence of Mr.
Read. It was recorded as an encouraging
fact, that within one year, and on the very
day appointed by the General Assembly of
the Presbyterian Church and other religi-
ous bodies in America, for prayer for the
conversion of the world, a spirit of inquiry
was awakened in this asylum, and nearly
half of the inmates, who numbered about
forty in all, were led to ask, " What shall
we do to be saved '?"
A Presbyterian Church was organized at
Ahmednuggur on the 4th of March, 1832
consisting of fourteen members, ten of
whom were Hindoos. Babajee, the Brah-
minic convert from the Church of Bombay,
was ordained elder, and Dajeeba, also from
the Bombaj'^ church, deacon. The mem-
bers of the church soon formed themselves
into a society for promoting temperance and
Christian morals in general, and 2-4 rules
were drawn up by Babajee himself. Con-
sidering their source, and how lately their
author was a blind and degraded Brahmin,
they fonn a document of very great interest.
(See Annual Report of the Board for 1833).
In January, 1833, 20 natives requested
baptism, one of whom was the aged mother
of Dajeeba, who was strongly opposed to
Christianity for some time after the conver-
sion of her son, but who finally yielded and
gave up her last idol to the missionary.
Babajee died of cholera, in April, 1833.
His death was felt to be a very great loss to
tlie mission and to the cause of Christianity,
in India. Although he had become an out-
cast by renouncing Ilindooism, he was
much respected by all classes. His memoir,
in two volumes, written by one of the mis-
sionaries, may be found in the Library of the
American Board. The mission at Bombay
, S ( IslaitinujWur
BUortal"
niNDOSTAN.
was also afflicted by the death of Mrs.
Stone, in August, 1833, after an illness of
twelve days. About this time it was re-
marked by the Board, that of the nine adults,
missionaries and assistant missionaries,
from this country, who had died in India,
only two had died of the peculiar diseases
of the climate. A reinforcement of five
missionaries and assistants reached Bombay
in September, 1834. A charity school for
native orphan girls was opened at Bombay
this year, thus affording another illustration
of the spirit and influence of Christianity in
its relation to the woes even of this life.
Itinerating was found to be not only one
of the most important means of access to
the heathen, but favorable also to the health
of the missionaries. They therefore pur-
sued it very extensively. IMr. Bead alone
traveled not less than 1,100 miles in his ex-
cursions into the country around Ahmed-
nuggur, between October, 1833, and August,
1834. It is remarked also that he traveled
without arms or a guard, the mode of travel-
ing best becoming missionaries of the Gos-
pel of peace, and that he never met with
either insult or harm. After, all, but a small
proportion of the population could be
reached, even by the tracts and portions
of Scripture that were scattered by tens of
thousands ; for the missionaries had before
them the appalling and affecting fiict that
they were almost the only laborers in a field
800 by 1,000 miles in extent, containing not
less than 2,000 towns and villages, and a
population of 40,000,000.
Malcolm Peth, on the Mahaburlishwur
Hills, was occupied as a temporary health
station in 1835. In 1836, Alibag was also
made a centre of operations. It is in the
Concan, the maritime portion of the Mah-
ratta country, and mission schools had for
some time been supported there. About the
same time a missionary was placed at Jalna,
in the dominions of the Nizam, or native
Prince, 120 miles north-west of Ahmednuc:-
gur.
Rev. Messrs. Ebenezer Burgess, Ozro
French, and R. W. Hume, with their wives,
and Miss Cynthia Farrar, sailed for Bombay
m April, 1838, and arrived there in the fol-
loAving August. In 1839 a boarding school
had been established at Jalna, containing 19
boys; and one at Malcolm Peth for girls
containing 30 pupils. '
The year 1839 was one of extraordinary
interest to the Bombay mission, not so much
on account of any remarkable progress
made, as for the opposition awakened in the
minds of the natives. The immediate occa-
sion of the opposition was, the public pro-
fession of Christianity made by two Parsee
young men named Narayan and Harripunt.
They were baptized by Dr. Wilson, of the
Church of Scotland's mission at Bombay,
385
25
and were supposed to be the first proselytes
from the religion of Zoroaster in modern
times. Their Parsee friends became much
enraged, and would have laid violent hands
on them, but they had taken refuge with the
missionaries. A legal process was instituted
against the missionaries, but in vain They
then attempted to break up the schools by
threats against the parents, and succeeded
to some extent. They published a tract in
defence of Hindooism, petitioned the Gov-
ernment for protection against the influence
of the missionaries, &c., but all with very
little effect, except to show that the progress
of the Gospel had begun to be such as to
disturb the native conscience, and awaken
their fears for the safety of their ancient
system of idolatry. One year later the
missionaries say, "The events of the last
year have done much, we think, to spread
the knowledge of the Gospel in Ahmednug-
gur and the villages around. People now
understand that there is something in the
Christian religion which is powerful to the
conversion of men, and they are afraid to
come into contact with it. Formerly very
few in this place knew the object for which
we came here. Now the great mass know
that It IS our aim to lead men from the wor-
ship of idols to the worship of the one
living and true God, and to a belief in his
Son Jesus Christ. Formerly the people
here were not afraid to enter into argument
with us, thinking that their religion rested
on a sure foundation ; now they are un-
willing to argue when the subject is pro-
posed." Narayan and Harripunt now ap-
peared among the people with entire safety,
the natives simply telling them it was
wrong for any one to forsake his religion.
At this period the Prudential Committee of
tfie Board m their annual report sa}--, " Those
who have attended to the history of this
first mission of the Board,— this earliest of
the foreign missions of the American
churches from the beginning, must perceive
that the Mahrattas, as a people, stand related
to the Christian religion very differently
from what they did in 1814. Much un-
avoidable, preliminary ground has been gone
over, and the truth is nearer the great mass
of the native intellect and heart."
In 1841, the Bombay and Ahmednuggur
stations, comprising what was called the
mission to the Mahrattas, were divided into
two, to be known henceforth as the Bombay
and Ahmednuggur missions. These places
were so f^ir apart that it became incon-
venient and expensive for the missionaries
to meet for business, and hence the division,
ihe two missions date their separate exist-
ence from the 1st of January, 1842, and from
tins period will receive a separate notice,
ihe station at Malcolm Peth belonged to
Bombay. Mr. Graves, of this station, died
386
HINDOSTAN.
in December, 1843. He embarked on his
mission in 1817, and had been 25 years in the
service of the Board.
The opposition to Christianity took quite a
new turn at Bombay in 1843, when the more
wealthy Hindoos commenced printing l)y
subscription, a series of their most popuLir
rehgious books in monthl}^ numbers. None
of these books had ever before been printed,
and the manuscripts were scarce and costly,
but in the printed form they were afforded
at little cost. A Hindoo at Bombay ex-
pended nearly .^1,800 in printing and circu-
lating one of the sacred books of his reli-
gion. Thus, a new and extraordinary^ effort
to sustain idolatry, showed that the presence
and power of Christianity were beginning
to be felt. This was still further manifested
a year later, when the periodical press was
for the first time brought to the aid of the
tottering S3^stem of Hindooism. Three
weekly newspapers and one monthly maga-
zine, all in the Mahratta language, and bit-
terly opposed to Christianity, were published
at Bomba}^. A paper was also issued at
Poona, a little to the south-east of Bombay,
and a monthly journal and three weeklies
in the Goozerattee language, spoken by
seven or eight millions in the region north
df Bombajr, besides two papers printed in
the Persian language. The Goozerattee
papers especially attempted to refute Chris-
tianity by quotations from the writings of
Paine, Voltaire, and other infidels. Thus
ten newspapers and magazines in and
around Bombay, armed not only with all
that heathen learning could furnish, but with
the most approved weapons of infidelity,
were brought to bear against the religion
taught by the missionaries, and of course
the tendency was most injurious. But
meanwhile the mission press at Bombay was
never more efficient. It had the means of
issuing periodicals, tracts, and portions of
Scripture, in English, Sanscrit, Mahratta,
Goozerattee, Hindostanee, Persian, Arabic,
&c., and thus the issues of the idolatrous
and infidel presses were met face to face,
and their influence in great measure counter-
acted. It was with great joy and thankful-
ness that the missionaries at Bombay were
able to say, in 1845, " Thirty-three years ago
the doctrine of Christ crucified was unknown
to the people of the Mahratta country. No
portion of the Sacred Scriptures had been
given to them in their own language. Not
a single tract from which they could learn
the way of salvation, was in existence. Un-
broken unmixed darkness covered the land.
Now the sound of the Gospel has gone out
into all the land. Tlie people of the most
distant villages liave heard, at least, that
' there is none other name under heaven
given among men whereby we can be saved,
but the name of Jesus."
The year 1847 was marked by an event of
great importance, viz : the translation of the
entire Scriptures into the Mahratta language,
thus rendering the whole volume of inspira-
tion accessible to a numerous people in
western India. In noticing this fact, the
Prudential Committee say, " It may be stated
as a fact of some interest to the friends of
missions in this country, that all the Scrip-
tures which have been printed in ]\Iahratta,
except one of the Gospels, have issued from
the mission press." For a history of this
great work they refer to the following state-
ment, by one of the missionaries, Mr. Allen :
" The Gospel of Matthew was printed in
1817. The translation of the New Testa-
ment was not completed and printed till
1826 ; though, meanwhile, some of the Gos-
pels and the Acts of the Apostles had been
printed several times. In 1830 a second
and revised edition of the New Testament
was printed. The original translation and
the revised edition were both made by our
mission. Since then all the New Testament
has been printed once, and some parts of it
several times, by the Bible Society, as
altered and revised by its translation com-
mittee. Of this committee I have been a
member for neai'ly fifteen years."
Mr. Allen proceeds to explain the reasons
which had delayed the translation and pub-
lication of the Old Testament till the above
date, and adds that the whole Bible has been
published, not only in the Mahratta, but also
in the Goozerattee language, the two princi-
pal languages spoken on the western side of
India.
Amid some discouragements, especially
the fact that the number of converts was
comparatively small, the missionaries had
ground for saying, in 1848, "Truth is
gradually making an impression upon the
public mind, and gradually changing the
views prevalent in the community. Hindoo-
ism is losing its hold upon the people, and
the Hindooism of the rising generation will
be a very difl'erent thing from that of their
fathers. Christian ideas, and Christian doc-
trines, are quietly gaining an infiuence over
the minds of many. There is a Christian-
izing, so to speak, of the ideas and even the
language of the people."
Satara was occupied as a missionary
station in 1848. It is about 170 miles south-
east of Bombay, and is situated in a very
populous and fertile district. The size of
the place, which is about equal to Ahmed-
nuggur, and the numerous villages around it,
seemed to point it out as a very important
station, as it has proved to be.
The custom recently adopted by the mis-
sionaries of .s'e//i«5- tracts and books, instead
of distributing them gratuitously, was found
to work admirably, and it strikingly illus-
trated the increasing desire of the natives to
HINDOSTAN.
387
read and learn. " The readiness to purchase
Christian tracts and books," says one of the
missionaries in 1849, " is without a parallel
in any part of the heathen world. The fact
that we have, in a single year, sold 9,000 of
these publications, is full of encouragement."
A further proof of the waking up of the
heathen mind was found in the fact, that the
paper issued from the mission press called
the Dnyanadaya, was widely circulated and
much read by the natives. In 1849 two
prize essays on the Holee, a shameful feast
observed among the Hindoos, were pub-
lished in this paper, and read by great num-
bers of the Mahrattas, and one of them was
copied into the native papers, and translated
into the languages of upper India. About
the same date the missionaries speak of very
interesting discussions with the Parsees.
The scene of debate was the sea-side, where
the Pai'sees assembled to worship the sea or
the setting sun ; and the disputants were
accustomed to sit down on the sand, the
auditors, to the number of several hundreds,
standing around. The fact that these dis-
cussions lasted sometimes till two hours
after dark, and that the crowds listened
with untiring interest to the end, indicated a
spirit of inquir}^, and a deep solicitude
among the people to know the difference be-
tween heathenism and Christianit3^ In
these debates the works of Paine, Voltaire,
and other infidels, were brought forward
with great skill and familiarity by the Par-
sees.
An event of deep interest to the missions
and to thexause of Christianity in India, in
1849, was the passage of a law b}^ the gov-
ernment, giving equal rights to all its sub-
jects. Up to this time, in western and
southern India, there had been no special
law for the protection of converts to Chris-
tianity, who were tried by heathen laws and
subjected to everj^ indignity, with confisca-
tion of goods. After various efforts of
Christians in India, they at length succeeded
in getting a x'epeal of the old laws, and the
passage of an act protecting converts against
all civil disabilities and forfeiture of rights.
Thus one of the most serious obstacles in the
way of the progress of Christianity in India
was removed.
The influence of Christianity and its mis-
sions in tlie education and elevation of
females, has ever been regarded as one of its
most interesting features ; and on this point
the missionaries at Bombay are very explicit
and satisfactory in their report for 1850. At
first there was an extreme jealousy on this
subject, but a gradual change was wrought,
the wealthiest natives began to send their
daughters to the mission schools, and at the
above date thousands of females in various
parts of India, of all castes, were acquiring
the rudiments of an education. It had been
proved, the missionaries say, that native
females were not wanting in capacity, and
the way had been prepared for the establish-
ment of female schools by the natives them-
selves, and by the government. The Gov-
ernor-General of India, this year, issued a
very important declaration, requesting that
the Council of Education would consider its
functions as comprising the superinten-
dence of native female education ; and that
wherever any disposition was shown by the
natives to establish female schools, said
Council would give them all possible encour-
agement.
During the years 1850 and 1851, Mr. Allen
had devoted himself to the work of revising
the Mahratta Scriptures. A complete trans-
lation had been made, as before noticed, but
different books had been issued at different
times, in differing type and style, and the
effort now was to correct the translation,
give uniformity to the style, and put the
whole into one octavo volume. This work
would not be completed, Mr. Allen thought,
till the spring of 1855. While the press was
thus at work, doing more, it was believed, in
various ways, to make known Christ among
the people than ten men could do faithfully
preaching daily in the streets and bazaars of
the city, the direct business of preaching was
by no means neglected. At the close of
1851 there were three stated places for
preaching in the city of Bombay, besides
which "touring among the villages" occu-
pied a considerable portion of each j^ear.
Among the interesting events of 1852, was
a series of public lectures in the mission
chapel, followed by a free discussion, in
which the natives present were allowed to
make inquiries and to state objections. The
discussions were in the Mahratta language,
but were reported in the religious paper of
the mission in both Mahratta and English,
and their influence was very extensive. The
Native Missionary Society also held meet-
ings on the first Monday of each month, for
the communication of intelligence, prayer,
&c., and they were among the most interest-
ing of the Mahratta meetings. About $70
was collected, and appropriated to the erec-
tion of another place of preaching in a na-
tive city. Another occurrence of special in-
terest this year, was the publication of a
work entitled " Principles of Hindooism,'''
written by an educated Brahmin, to explain
and defend his religion. He admits that the
missionaries have turned the minds of many
from Hindooism to Christianity, that a large
portion of those educated in the schools
abandon and seek to destroy their ancestral
faith, that th^y deny the divine appointment
of caste, &c., and adds :
" The ancient and noble edifice of Hindoo-
ism is now on all sides stoutly assailed by
the adherents of a hostile faith, and we are
388
HINDOSTAN.
filled with disraaj- at finding that there is also
treason within. No wonder that the vener-
able structure is already nodding to its fall.
I by means of this little book, seek to prop
up the building ; but when its size and its
ruinous state are considered, what hope is
there that such a feeble prop can prevent its
falling?"
The year 1853 was marked by no peculiar
changes in the mission, yet an event oc-
curred that will be celebrated in the annals
of Ilindostau, and so nearly related to the
cause of Christianity as to be entitled to a
notice here. It was the opening, on the
16th of April of that year, of the first
Asiatic railwaj' connecting Bombay and
Tannah, a distance of twenty-four miles.
One of tlie missionaries, J\Ir. Hume, in de-
scribing tliis event says. " Great was the in-
terest excited in the minds of assembled
thousands, as the first train of ponderous
cars, with 400 passengers, hasted away,
moved by some mysterious agency. From
the neighboring heights, at the various cross-
ings, and for a considerable distance along
the line of the road, nmltitudes gazed with
astonishment and delight at this triumph of
science and skill. New and more vivid im-
pressions I'egarding the immense superiority
of the Christian nations of the West, were
unconsciously received by those living
masses. Many of them must have felt, as
they never felt before, that Ilindooism is in
conliict with the spirit of the age, and that
its days must ere long be numbered."
Dating the commencement of the Bombay
mission in 1812, the whole period thus
brielly reviewed is forty-one years. The
general view taken is sufficient to show that
during this period changes of immense
importance have been wrought, and an
incalculable amount of good accomplished.
For general remarks and statistics the
reader is referred to the close of tlie article
on missions in Ilindostan. Also for a more
particular account of Bombay — its various
classes, religions, commercial importance,
&c., see article under that head.
Akmediiuisgur. — Previous to 18.31, Ah-
mechiuggur was simply a station of the Bom-
bay mission, and was noticed in that con-
nection. In IJecember of that year it be-
came a distinct mission, and from that date
the present account commences. At this
period there were three missionaries here,
viz: ^lessrs. Graves, Ilervey, and Read.
Mr. Ib-rvey died very suddenly, of cholera,
ui the following May. The mission church
at Alunednuggur was formed in March, 1833.
with 14 members, and public worship and'
preaching were regularly maintained, with
from forty to sixty hearers, though they had
no chapel, and were obliged to meet in a
tejuporaiy liuilJing, "a sort of shed."
Preaching tours in the surrounding villages
were also extensively maintained. The sys-
tem of education was nearly the same as that
at Bombay, and at the close of 1835 there
were 9 schools and 422 scholars. The es-
tablishment of free schools in the neiglibor-
ing villages, twenty or thirty miles around
Ahmednuggur. was also a favorite and suc-
cessful method of doing good. In 1837 a sub-
stantial house had been erected for the sem-
inar}^, which contained fifty bo3's, all taken
from respectable castes, and the same house
was used also for a chapel. A boarding
school for girls was also in successful opera-
tion.
Seroor, 28 miles from Ahmednuggur, was
occupied as a station in 1841. At this pe-
I'iod the missionaries, after describing a
preaching excursion, say : " We hope to be
able to adopt this plan more than we have
done. — to occupy a village for some days,
having as much intercourse with the people
of the village as possible, and making excur-
sions to the small villages in its vicinity as
may be convenient." The plan thus pro-
posed was carried out very successfully. In
their labors in and around Ahmednuggur,
the missionaries came much in contact with
a class of Hindoos called Mahars, who, they
say, " are thought to be the original inhabit-
ants of the country." They are a low caste,
and the more intelligent of them discard
idolatry, and maintain the doctrine of one
invisible God. They adhere but slightly to
the rules of caste, are free from bigotry,
manifest a desire to know the truth, and ex-
hibit none of that wrangling and angry dis-
putation which are so common among the
Brahmins." It was among them that the
missionaries, in 1842, found a remarkable
spirit of inquiry into the Christian religion,
and in their excursions through not less than
a hundred villages, they had access to crowds
of eager listeners. During this year seven-
teen natives were received to the Ahmed-
nuggur church, one of whom had been a rob-
ber and murderer by profession. The num-
ber of church members was thus more than
doubled. In 1843 twelve more were added,
and five in the beginning of the year 1844,
making the whole number of members 48.
The importance of this tield, and the in-
creasing interest felt in it, may be gathered
from the fact, stated in 1844, that " within a
distance of fifteen miles around Ahmednug-
gur there are more than one hundred vil-
lages, the population of which, including
Ahmednuggur itself, amounts to more than
one hundred thousand souls. The distinc-
tions of caste are numerous, amounting to CO
in Almiednuggur, and varying from ten to
thirty in the villages." It was to such a
people that the missionaries were carrying
the Gospel as they went out from their re-
spective stations. In their report for 1844
they say : " These excursions arc becoming
HINDOSTAN.
389
more and more intercsti"ng in consequence
of the increased knowledge of Christianity
which we find among the people, and of
their inci'eased acquaintance with us and our
native converts, and also in consequence of
the confidence which many of them have
learnt to place in us, and in the doctrines
which we preach." In the same report they
say : '' AYomen of all castes had the oppor-
tunity of learning the way of salvation
through Jesus Christ. In some places which
we visited, nearly all the women of the vil-
lage came out to seo us and to hear the mes-
sage of mercy." This work was prosecuted
during 1845 with increasing interest.
In 1846 this mission was strengthened by
the arrival of two new missionaries, and the
return of Mr. Burgess, whose health had
been improved by a short residence in this
country. At this period a new station was
formed at Bhingar, a large town of 4,000 in-
habitants, two miles east of Ahmednuggur.
Early in this year peculiar religious interest
began to be manifested in the seminarj^ for
boys, and a little band were in the habit of
meeting together for prayer, and of visiting
the house of their teacher for religious con-
versation and worship. At length one of
the company, named Rama, the most ad-
vanced boy in the seminar}^, determined to
confess Christ, and to request baptism. This
he did in spite of the opposition and entrea-
ties of his mother and brothers. At the
same time another boy in the seminary,
named Sudoo, professed his faith in Christ.
This seminary, under the care of Mr. Bur-
gess, was considered of very great import-
ance to the missionary work.
Two out-stations were formed in 1845,
one at Wudaley, about forty miles north of
Ahmednuggur ; and the other at Wadagaum,
a village about 30 miles south of Ahmed-
nuggur. At the former place the ^lahars
were favorable to Christianity and very de-
sirous of a station among them, and one of
them gave laud for a chapel, with a written
guaranty that it should remain the property
of the mission. This chapel was opened in
February, 1846, at which time ten adults
were admitted to Christian fellowship.
Others were admitted subsequently, so that
the whole number of church members con-
nected with this out-station in January,
1847, was twenty-one. Not long after ele-
ven children were baptized, and one adult
was examined for admission to the church.
These fruits were the more remarkable, as
this station did not enjoy the labors of a
missionar}'', but was under the care of a na-
tive catechist, Dajeeba. An interesting ac-
count of the opposition he met with, and the
numerous obstacles overcome in erecting a
chapel at that station, will be found in the
annual report of the Board for 1847. In the
same report will be found an account of Ha-
ripunt, the native catechist at Wudaley, who
was forcibly ejected from a temple, in conse-
quence of which the important decision was
obtained from a magistrate, that native
Christians were entitled to the same privi-
leges at the temples and rest houses, as are
conceded to Mohammedans. This decision
indicated the determination of the govern-
ment that no one should be deprived of his
rights merel}' because he professed his faith
in Christ.
The toilsome and ceaseless efforts of the
missionaries in this field, so noticeable
at every step, are indicated again by the
fact^ that in 1848 one of them made a preach-
ing circuit of 122 days, traveling 912 miles
and visiting 509 towns. In many places he
was heard gladly, crowds, especially of the
working people, flocking to his tent and lis-
tening attentively till late hours at night.
Ten persons, three males and seven females,
were received to the Ahmednuggur church
this year. Four were also added to the
church at Sei'oor.
In 1849 a new station was established at
Newasse. In accomplishing this object great
opposition and even danger were encountered,
an account of which will be found in the
^lissionary Herald for August, 1850. The
effort was successful, however, and in 1852
there was a school in Newasse of fifty schol-
ars. In the report of the Board for 1853,
the interesting fact is stated, that the num-
ber of baptized children was 159, and it is
added, *' The families of the church members
form a most interesting* field of labor, and
one which promises the richest fruits. As
the children of our converts grow up, they
exhibit an interest in religious things which
encourages us much ; and the number of
those of this class who have been already
received into the church, or are now candi-
dates for church membership, shows that
God is faithful to his covenant, and willing
to bless the instructions and prayers of pa-
rents to the conversion of their offspring, as
well as our efibrts in their behalf." In the
same report a preaching tour of Mr. Jilimger
is described, in v/hich he traveled over a
thousand miles in 135 da3'S, and preached in
400 towns and villages. He found every
where "an open door," and an increasing
conviction in many minds, that they \^'cre the
dupes of Brahmin cupidity and selfishness.
In the city of Ahmednuggur there was at
this period, a growing disposition among an
interesting and increasing class of young
men, to inquire into the truth of Christianity.
Some of them were teachers in government
schools, and writers in the public offices.
They lield the absurd superstitions of Hin-
dooism in utter contempt, but inclined to
deistical opinions, and were not prepai'cd to
receive Christianitj', though they approved
of some of its doctrines. This class of vounG;
390
HINDOSTAN.
men had fonned a society, the object of
which was to discuss subjects connected
with morals and religion, and in these dis-
cussions the truths of Christianity were
ably maintained by two native converts,
members of the mission church. (See Her-
ald for June, 1853.)
The printinjz: for this station is done at
Bombaj', and is included in the report of that
mission. A condensed view of the churches
and schools will be found in the table at the
close of this article. From what has been
presented, it is apparent that Ahmednuggur
and the country around it, afford an exten-
sive and most important field of missionary
labor, and that it has been cultivated with
great diligence and most encouraging suc-
cess, affording reasonable ground for the
hope, that still greater and more rapid
changes will ere long be witnessed.
Saiara. — This was a station of the Bom-
bay mission until 1851, when, in connection
with Mahabulishwar, it became a distinct
mission, and was occupied by Messrs. Bur-
gess and Wood. Schools were already es-
tablished there, and also a church, with nine
native members. In 1852 this mission ex-
perienced a severe bereavement, in the death
of both Mrs. Wood and Mrs. Burgess.
The first native who embraced Christian-
ity at Satara, was Krishana Row, a Brah-
min, and his case excited extraordinary in-
terest in the minds of the people. " For
some days after his baptism hundreds came
to see him and his wife. Some even came
from distant villages to behold the great
wonder of a Bralnnin become a Christian."
The excitement Avas attended with an un-
usual degree of calm inquiry.
Another event of interest at this time,was
the discovery of a secret society among the
educated Hindoos, the object of which was
to make war upon some of the more flagrant
absurdities of their religious system, such as
the distinction of caste, and the prejudice
against the remarr3ing of widows and female
education. This society numbered nearly one
hundred, and luid several branches. Its
members were educated in the missionary
and government schools, chiefly the latter,
and while many of them only sought to re-
form Ilindooism. others exposed its utter
worthlessness. and advocated the peculiar
claims of Christianity.
A small chapel was completed by this
mission in 1852, and regular preaching exer-
cises were commenced. The exercises took
the form of a discussion generally, and Mr.
Burgess, alluding to this fact, says : " 1 doubt
if any other mission in India can present
Bui-h well maintained religious discussions,
attended with continued interest on the part
of tie jieople. Certainly I never had such
opportunities for preaching to the masses of
the people as I enjoy at Satara. At the
latest dates from this mission a larger chapel
was about to be erected, and the villages
around presented an inviting field of labor.
Two boys' schools and two girls' schools
were in successful operation, and there was
also what was called a " parochial school,"
with from fifteen to twenty pupils, taught in
the yard of the mission house by a son of a
native Christian. Al)0ut 5,000 books, tracts
and portions of Scripture were sold by the
mission during tlie year 1852. A reinforce-
ment has sailed for this mission, but no re-
turns have been received.
Kola poor. — The mission at this place is of
quite recent date, having been commenced
in 1852. It is about 130 miles distant from
Ahmednuggur, nearly south, and contains a
population of some 44,000. No missionary
labor had ever been performed here before,
and the people were entirely unacquainted
with the Gospel. On the arrival of the mis-
sionarj-, Mr. Wilder, the people sent a re-
monstrance to the King and to the political
superintendent, against his being allowed to
remain ; but they soon became acquainted
with him, and the opposition died awa}'.
Kolapoor is the centre of a population of
550,000 souls, and presents an immense field
for missionary operations.
Akidiira. — The mission at ]\Iadura was
commenced in July, 1834. A tour of obser-
vation was previously made by Mr. Spauld-
ing, of the Ceylon mission, accompanied by
three native helpers, and after visiting vari-
ous places, this was decided upon as the
most desirable and important in that part
of India for a missionary station.
]Madura is in the southern part of Ilindos-
tan, and is the city of the ancient Tamil
kings and the scat of Brahminical pride in
that quarter. It has a population of about
50,000, and the district bearing the same
name contains 1,300,000 souls. Several largo
villages lie within fifteen or twenty miles of
the cit}-. As the result of their observa-
tions concerning the country itself, the mis-
sionaries say : " Southern India has no vast
alluvial plains, like the deltas of the Ganges,
the Jumna, and the Burrampootur, nor is its
coast marshy, like those of Cuttack, Bengal,
and Arracau. Beheld from the sea, it ap-
pears mountainous down to the beach. But
along the eastern shore for more than 500
miles from Cape Comorin. there is a strip of
sandy waste extending three or four miles
from the sea 5 when the land rises into de-
tached hills, and farther back into moun-
tains, till at length the scenery combines the
magnilicent with the beautiful. The moim-
tains assume every varied form, and arc
clothed with extensive forest.s, while tho
smaller hills, which skirt the plain, are
here and there graced with temitles and
choultries, exhibiting exquisite specimens
of architecture. Winding streams How f om
niNDOSTAN.
391
every hill, and the soft and lovely valleys are
in striking contrast with the dark and mighty
forests which overcap them." Among these
hills and valleys dwell that portion "of the
Tamil people on the continent, for whose
immediate benefit the mission was com-
menced.
In July, 1834, Messrs. Todd and Hoising-
ton removed from Ceylon to Madura, accom-
panied by three interesting young natives
who had been connected with the boarding
school and seminary at Ceylon almost from
their commencement. It will be seen, there-
fore, that a very intimate relation subsisted
between the Ceylon and Madura missions ;
and this will be still better understood by
quoting the preamble and resolutions adopt-
ed by the brethren at Ceylon. They were as
follows :
"Whereas, it is considered very desirable
that the missionaries from America stationed
in Jaffna and on the neighboring continent,
be on the most intimate terms, not only be-
cause they are connected with the same
Board, arc situated among a people of the
same language and religion, and are depend-
ent, at least for the present, on the produc-
tions of the same press ; but because a mu-
tual exchange of counsel and help, and some-
times an exchange of labors either for the
promotion of health, or for the advancement
of the cause generally, may be most salu-
tary ; therefore resolved,
" 1. That the American mission in Jaffna
and that about to be established on the con-
tinent of India, be associated missions.
'•2. That the mission on the continent have
equal power with the mission in Jaffna in
all secular and ecclesiastical concerns ; such
as the erection of all necessary buildings for
themselves and families ; the establishment
of schools ; the mode and extent of church
discipline ; the employment of such native
helpers as they may consider ne«essary and
expedient for the furtherance of the cause
of Christ in that place ; and the general
management of the mission in all its bear-
ings.
That each mission exchange copies of
all its ofQcial communications to the Board,
journals excepted.
" 4. That in case of any serious difficulty
in either mission, either the majority or the
minority may apply to the other mission for
advice."
In Feb., 1835, Mr. Eckard and his wife
left Jafthapatam to connect themselves with
the ]\Iadura mission; and in the May fol-
lowing he makes some statements which are
important, as showing the nature of the
field into which he and his brethren had en-
tered, lie speaks of Madura as a city
where idolatry has peculiar power, an in-
tense sanctity, a numerous priesthood ; and
a place into which, at certain seasons of the
year, tens of thousands of votaries crowd to
worship, they know not what. " Heathenish
abominations reign here," he says, " in full
malignity ; and the people are generally cap-
tious and careless respecting any religion
other than their own." Their principal
temple, that of Meen Aatche, he describes
as of vast dimensions, there being no build-
ing in the United States that can compare
Avith it in size. This temple is almost com-
pletely covered over with images of human
and superhuman beings, executed in plaster.
Most of the houses in Madura are of mud, one
stoi-y high, covered with leaves and straw ;
but there are a few really good dwellings, in
oriental style.
In planning the Madura mission the de-
sign was to make it a large central station,
while single families and schools should be
established in each of the surrounding vil-
lages, so that the whole mass of the commu-
nity should he brought under the influence
of Christian truth, and united and concen-
trated action secured. Soon after entering
upon the mission, Mr. Eckard commenced a
school upon the Lancasteriau plan, similar to
the one in Calcutta, which had been con-
ducted with eminent success. Instruction
was given chiefly in English, and Mr. E.
himself assumed the duties of teacher, be-
lieving, as he said, that " no English school
taught by a native could compare with one
taught by an educated missionary." He
began with eighteen boys, some of them of
high caste, and all were required to attend
public worship on the Sabbath. Preaching
was added to teaching, and besides these
labors in the city, an effort was soon made
to reach the surrounding villages. " There
are two of us," said Mr. Eckard, " and our
immediate circle of influence sweeps in
about 100,000 souls. I mean by this, that
if our bodily strength did not fail we might
reside at Madura and be sensibly felt by one
hundred thousand people in the city and ad-
joining villages."
Mr. and Mrs. Poor left Ceylon and joined
the Madura mission in 1836. At the close
of this year there were in connection with
the mission thirty-five schools, containing
1,149 boys and 65 girls. Nine of these
schools were in the city, and the others in
the neighboring villages. Books and tracts
were also freely distributed.
In general the most intimate and reliable
knowledge of heathen countries is derived
from the missionaries, and comes to us after
they have been upon the field a sufficient
time to make investigations. Hence the ne-
cessity of interrupting the missionary nar-
rative by the introduction of important his-
torical facts illustrative of the character of
the field, and essential to a correct under-
standing of the responsibilities and trials of
the missionary. In regard to that section
392
HINDOSTAN.
of Hindostan now iiiuler review, the mis-
sionaries say, in 1836, "The region inhabited
by those who speak Tamil on the continent,
is bounded on the north by a Une which we
may suppose to be drawn from Madras
towards the west. It extends from this
limit to Cape Comorin, at the extreme south
of Hindostan, from the sea shore on the
east to the western branches of the southern
Ghaut mountains on the west. This space
comprises an area of from 75,000 to 100,000
square miles. The population has been
variously estimated at from 3,000,000 to
10,000,000. Perhaps 6,000,000 or 8,000,000
approximates most nearly to the truth.
Comparatively few of the Tamil people
dwell .among the mountains on the west.
They reside chiefly in the wide plains which
extend to the sea, and which are known as
the Carnatic. There are more than twenty
cities within the limits above described, in-
habited in whole or in part by Tamil
people ; and there are probably 500 towns
of from 50 to 1,000 people each."
Passing on to 1838, we find four stations
around Madura, viz. : Dindigul, 40 miles
north-west of Madura ; Sevagunga, 25 miles
east, Teroopoovanum, 12 miles south-east,
and Tex'oomungalum, 12 miles north-west.
At each of these places there was a mis-
sionary, and in some instances two, with
schools, and other means of sj^stematic
eflfort. The whole number of schools con-
nected with the mission at this period was
66, and of scholars 1866.
In 1840 the work had progressed so that
there were in all the schools of the mission
a total of 3,316 scholars. About 1,000 of
the pupils in the native free schools could
read, and nearly the whole number had com-
mitted to memory the ten commandments,
the Lord's prayer, and a small catechism.
There were 12 additions during the year to
the four native churches. Mr. Spaulding
made a second visit to the Tamil district
this year, it being just seven years since his
first exploring tour, previous to the estab-
lishment of the mission. Of the changes
which had occurred he speaks in very strong
terms. The roads had been improved,
bridges had been constructed, numerous
shade trees had been planted, the tanks,
from which the cultivated lands were irri-
gated, had been repaired, and the revenue in
some parts of the district had been more
than doubled. " When I went over before,
our boat was blown out of its course by
the strong wind, and Mr. Harrington and
myself were obliged to walk about 70 miles
in the sun by day, and with no rest house
by night. Now we had good conveyances
and good rest houses and mission houses
and pleasant gardens through our whole
tour. Then there was no missionary station
nor Christian teacher Avithin the district.
Now there are five stations and nine mis-
sionaries, who have under their care about
eighty native free schools and four English
boarding schools, all of which are in a very
interesting and flourishing state, and fifteen
or twenty native assistants of very good
promise."
The increasing importance of this field,
and the opportunities oflered for enlarging
the operations of the mission, induced the
brethren in 1841 to make an urgent appeal
to the Board for hcenty additional mission-
aries. But instead of such a reinforcement,
or even one additional missionary, the mis-
sion was weakened and severely tried by the
removal of Mr. Poor to Ceylon, a change
which his health rendered indispensable.
The appropriations for the schools also fell
short this year, and there appeared to be a
painful necessity of disbanding some of
them, but on submitting the matter to the
native teachers they said, " You must not
discharge us ; we will take what you have to
give." In another instance, after a consul-
tation among the teachers, one of them re-
ported to the missionary in behalf of the
others, "If a father have ten sons, and un-
fortunately loses half his property, will his
sons allow him to turn away five of their
number to starve, while the rest are sup-
ported in comfort ? No ! These sons will
consent to live on less and to have the
parent divide the amount equally among
them. This is our decision. We are each
of us willing to live on rice congee rather
than to have any of our number dismissed."
The schools were accordingly continued as
usual.
An event of great importance, about this
time, was an act dissolving all connection
l)etween idolatry and the government of
British India. This act threw upon the
heathen themselves the whole expense of
building and repairing their temples. By
another act, passed the same year, simple
affirmation in the name of the living and
true God was made Viinding on all as an
oath, instead of the former swearing on the
sacred waters of the Ganges and on the
Koran. In this also the missionaries had
occasion greatly to rejoice, as the land would
no longer mourn because of the swearing by
false gods and a lie. These great changes
resulted in no small degree from the steady
operation of Christian missions upon the
public conscience, and the value and power of
sucli missions as reformatory agencies arc
thus placed in a very strong light.
In 1843 the mission was called to a severe
trial. Mr. Poor had already been removed
to Ceylon, and Ur. Steele had died in 1842,
and this year Mr. Ward was transferred to
Madras, besides which, the cholera made its
appearance, mowing down great numbers of
the native inhabitants, and not entirely ex-
HINDOSTAN.
393
empting the mission families. Rev. Mr.
Dwight, Mrs. North, and Mrs. Cherry, with-
in eleven days of each other, were carried
from one house to the silent tomb. Other
missionaries however soon arrived, and the
woi'k suffered but a temporary interruption.
It is recorded as a fact worthj^ of special
notice during this j'ear, that the Papists re-
siding in three distant villages, amounting to
twenty-five families, and numbering 106 in-
dividuals, were received under the spiritual
care and instruction of the mission. And
further, whole communities, villages, and
hamlets, applied to be acknowledged as no
longer pagans or Roman Catholics, but as
Christians and Protestants. In one village
three families, in another four, and in an-
other forty families, entered into an agree-
ment, either by their head men or over their
own signatures, to renounce idolatry and re-
ceive the Gospel, or else refund the expense
the missionaries should incur to meet their
wishes. For copies of some of these agree-
ments, see annual report of the Board for
IS-I-i. INIan}^ intei'esting features in the pro-
gress of the Madura mission during the
years 1844 and 1845 must be passed over. In
1846 the native churches received an acces-
sion of ninety-seven membei'S. At this date
the villages are spoken of as not only all
open, but more than open, as they not only
would receive the missionaries, but come to
them. Fifteen or twenty companies, from
villages thirty and forty miles distant, and
where the missionaries had never been,visit-
ed them for tracts and instruction, and some
of them manifested great anxiety for the sal-
vation of their souls. Dr. Scudder removed
to Madura with his family, in 1847, thus
supplying the want of a physician,which had
been deeply felt.
It was in the year 1847 that the mission
entered upon a formal and uncompromising
conllict with caste, which, the missionaries
at this date saj^, " has existed to the present
time, with various degrees of strength in the
churches established by Schwartz and his
devoted fellow laborers, as well as in those
of more modern date." The missionaries
of the Board were at length determined to
free the Church of Christ from " a foe most
insidious as well as powerful," and seventy-
two were suspended from church fellowship
on account of their adherence to this sin.
At the same time many left the seminary on
account of the encroachments made upon the
rules of caste. The results, however, showed
the wisdom of the measure, and proved that
the time had fully come for so decisive a
step. It should be stated, however, that
caste has never been tolerated in the churches
planted by the missionaries of the Board.
Rev. Dr. Allen, who has been for more than
a quarter of a century a missionary of the
Board in India, says :
" The Missionaries of the American Board
in India and Ceylon have always required a
renunciation of caste, just as much as of
idolatry, and other parts of heathenism, of
all converts before they were baptized. No
arrangements, nor accommodations, *nor
changes have ever been made m the seats, or
in the sitting in the churches, or in the ad-
ministration of the ordinances on account of
caste. Caste was in no respect recognized.
All were treated as of one class, as much as
Christians in this country arc so treated.
" It would naturall}' be expected that such
a public renunciation of caste, and such sub-
sequent treatment of it, would be sufficient
to extinguish it in the church. But experi-
ence has shown that it was not sufficient,
Caste has been found to be surprisingly insi-
dious in its influence ; and to be capable of
assuming almost any complexion and shape,
suited to the native character and their cir-
cumstances."
Passing on to 1851,we find the Committee
of the Board drawing a new and more mod-
ern sketch of this great field, and one which
sets in a striking light both the astonishing
changes which had been wrought and the
immense labors devolved upon the mission-
aries. After alluding to the fact that in 1836
this mission had only one station at Madu-
ra, and that all the schools were in its im-
mediate vicinity, they pi-occed to say that
now they have extended their operations till
they have ten stations, one of which is more
than thirty miles south, and another about
the same distance north ; one about twentj^-
five miles east and another forty north-west
from INIadura ; with families under their care
associated in the form of village congrega-
tions in about 100 villages, scattered singly
or in clusters through a populous region, ex-,
tending in length more than 100 miles from
south-east to north-west, and more than
sixty miles in breadth. This field, thus in
some measure taken possession of by our
missionaries, has been almost wholly left to
them by the missionaries of other societies
laboring in adjoining districts in India, and
it seems fitting that it should be fully occu-
pied by this Board. It is larger than the
State of Massachusetts, and has a popula-
tion, as is supposed, of 1,500,000. It has
become one of great interest and great prom-
ise, and the labor demanded in it has obvi-
ously increased much bej^ond the ability of
the present band of laborers. Hitherto the
natural growth of the mission has been
one of expansion, but there is now a call for
more thorough culture."
The year 1852 was one of great favor to
this mission, 72 having been received to the
churches at the different stations, fifty-six
of whom were adults. There were now nine
churches in all, and 335 members in good
standing. The system of education had been
394:
HINDOSTAN.
gradually changed, and, say the missionaries
at this period, "We can have but little to do
hereafter with the general desire of the hea-
then to have their children receive from us
an English and Tamil education. The Lord
in his providence has given us a people to
educate for him. Among the members of
our congregations we have 1,588 children, of
vrhom 647 are studying in our free schools.
From these it is easy to make a selection for
our own boarding schools." It is the main
design of the boarding schools and of the
seminary to raise up an educated and effi-
cient class of helpers for the missionary
work, and it is considered a great advantage
that the pupils can now be taken from fami-
lies connected with the mission and nomin-
ally Christians.
Madras. — The mission at Madras was
commenced in 1836, with a special view to
forming there a printing establishment for
printing the Scriptures and religious tracts
in the Tamil language. But in order to the
successful execution of this plan, it was
deemed necessary to establish there a dis-
tinct, efficient, and responsible mission ; and
with this view, Mr. Winslow and Dr. Scud-
der removed to this new field. Madras is
on the eastern side of Southern India, and
the population of the city and suburbs is
estimated at 416,000. It was intended to
establish the press at Chintadrepettah, a
suburb southwesterly of the walled town,
and at this place Dr. Scudder took up his.
residence, while Mr. AVinslow resided at
Royapoorum, a little north of the town.
They immediately found the demand for
Tamil books and tracts to be very great,
and expressed the wish that they had 25,000
copies' of the New Testament to distribute
B within a year. Schools and preaching sta-
tions were immediately established, and a
mission church was formed in 1837, and one
native was admitted on profession of his
faith in Christ.
In 1838 the mission came into possession
of a large printing establishment which had
belonged to the Church Missionary Society.
It comprised eighteen printing presses, be-
sides a lithographic and hydraulic press,
fifteen fonts of type, English, Tamil, and
Teloogoo, together with a type foundry and
book bindery. This enabled the mission to
enter vigorously upon the work for which it
was chiefly commenced. In one year from
this date there had been printed 3,500,000
octavo pages of Scripture, and 2,500,000
duodecimo pages of tracts, making 6,000,000
pages in all. In 1840 the printing in Tamil
amounted to 11,660,700 pages, over nine mil-
lions of which were octavo pages of Scrip-
ture. At this period there were also in ex-
istence sixteen schools, comprising 485
scholars.
Important tours for preaching and dis-
tributing books were made by Messrs. Scud-
der and Winslow in 1840. One of these
tours was to Conjevezani, a sacred place 46
miles south-west of Madras, during which
they preached the Gospel to numerous small
companies of people, and distributed over
4,000 books and tracts. Dr. Scudder also
journeyed 200 miles south, into the Cudda-
lore and Tanjore districts, taking with him
6,000 copies of one of the Gospels, and
11,500 tracts. Mr. Winslow, for the special
benefit of his wife and child, went west 200
miles, into the Mysore district, which he de-
scribes as an immense terrace of table land,
elevated about 3,000 feet above the level of
the sea, and altogether a splendid country,
well watered, fertile, populous, and promis-
ing as a field of missionary labor. In all
their visits to the sacred places, Messrs.
Scudder and Winslow found a great falling
ofi" in the number of attendants upon idola-
trous festivals.
In 1841 the mission had four places of
stated preaching, and the aggregate of the
congregations was 550. A piece of land was
bought this year at Royapooram for a
chapel, and ^1.500 subscribed for its erec-
tion. At this place Mr. Winslow estab-
lished an evening meeting, in a bungalow on
the pi'emises of a very respectable native
merchant, and upon this a persecution
arose, in describing which Mr. Winslow
says, " The Romanists immediately began
to annoy us, and to send letters threatening
our lives. They threw stones, both in times
of meeting and at other times, at the family,
set up a noisy meeting in the adjoining
house, and disturbed us by offensive smell-
ing lights and fire works, as well as b)^ the
noise of bells and various instruments ; and
when this was stopped by the authorities,
they burnt the bungalow with the furniture
it contained." The native merchant how-
ever, remained firm, and the persecution
failed entirely of its object.
In their report in 1843 the Board take oc-
casion to remark, that the Madras, Madura,
and Ceylon missions are all to a people alike
in religion, language, manners, and customs.
The station at Madras being intended to do
the principal part of the printing for all
these missions, it was not intended to en-
large it beyond what was necessary for this
purpose. The Madura mission has never
had a printing press within its bounds, and
that at Jafiua has done much less work
than the one at Madras.
In 1845 the missionaries found that caste
was exerting an undue control over the
minds of the native church members, and
wishing to see how far this unchristian feel-
ing would be carried, they took measures to
test it. The result was that five were sus-
pended ; but their Christian principles pre-
vailed, and in a few months they all camo
HINDOSTAN.
395
back, made a full and hum1)le confession,
and promised to conform to the rules of the
church respecting caste.
A prospectus for a railroad from Madras
to Arcot, sixty miles, issued in 1846, gives
the population of Madras in 1842, as up-
wards of 900,000, an increase of more than
200,000 since 1822. This increase was sup-
posed to be owing chiefly to political
causes, tending to centralize the population
in the cities of the coast.
This vast community is distinctly spoken
of in 1846, as showing signs of the wide
spread and powerful working of the truth,
and the organized opposition made to the
Gospel was one evidence of this fact. An
anti-missionary society existed among the
natives of Madras, which employed a press
in printing small ti'acts and a newspaper,
and the same society established several op-
position free schools, employed tract dis-
tributors and declaimcrs against Christian-
ity, and sent out agents into the country for
similar purposes. The people were thus
mightily stirred up, and on one occasion
8,000 people assembled to see if measures
could not be devised to prevent the spread
of Cliristianity. Say the missionaries,
"Now, light and truth have so far gone forth
that the bearings of missionary operations
on caste, custom, and idolatiy, begin to be
manifest. The Brahmins and head men
begin to feel that their craft is in danger.
They are therefore bestirring themselves."
They proceeded even so far as to seize and
forcibly carry off several hopeful converts,
and one of them was put in irons and
threatened with death. All this however,
while it showed that the pillars of supersti-
tion bad been shaken, occasioned no perma-
nent interruption to the mission. In the
autumn of this year Dr. Scudder, who had
been spending a few years in his native
country, greatly to the edification and quick-
ening of the churches, returned to his chosen
field of labor. Instead, however, of re-
maining at Madras, he Avas persuaded, by
the urgent want of a physician at Madura,
to resume his labors at that place.
The opposition continued to be very bitter
and violent in 1S47, and on one occasion Mr.
Scudder, son of Dr. Scudder, was openly as-
sailed in the streets. In defiance of the
popular rage however, the women came, at a
communion season, and sat down with the
men at the table, with their husbands, a
thing which they had never done before.
The most serious troubles were occasioned
by the spirit of caste, and Mr. Scudder is led
to remark, " If I were asked to tell in one
breath what I thought the mightiest present
obstacle to the onward course of the Gospel
in India, I should unhesitatingly say, caste.
It is a monster that defies description.
Idolatry in no way compares with it. as to its
grasp on the people."
Dr. Scudder returned to Madras in 1848,
and in the following year he was called to
mourn the death of his wife, ]\Irs. Harriet
jM. Scudder. She commenced her labors in
connection with the Ceylon mission in 1819.
In November, 1850, Mr. Winslow announced
that the printing of the new version of the
Tamil Bible was completed. It had been in
hand three 3'ears, and for two years the
united labors of Messrs Percival and
Spaulding of Jaffna, Brotherton of the
Church of England, and Winslow in Madras,
had been devoted to it, most of the time
daily except on the Sabbath. In point of
accuracy, conciseness, elegance, and idiom-
atic correctness, it was thought to be far in
advance of any previous work of the kind.
Another interesting event of this year was
the meeting of all the members of the
church except four, with the mission families,
on the evening preceding the annual meeting,
which was held in connection with the
Board. It is described as an interesting
sight. " Husbands and wives, little accus-
tomed to eat together, high caste and low
caste, and no caste, brethren and sisters in
Christ, thus acknowledging their unity in
him as members of the same body."
During the years 1851 and 1852, the press
at Madras continued its operations, and the
mission moved on without any very marked
changes. The whole amount of printing at
this place since the establishment of the
press, is 219,408,221 pages.
Ar'cot. — This city is seventy miles from
Madras, on the road to Bangalore, and is the
centre of a very populous and destitute dis-
trict. At this place Mr. H. M. Scudder com-
menced a mission in March, 1850. Haying
already become quite distinguished for his
medical and surgical skill, his services were
in immediate demand, from forty to fifty
visiting him daily. His custom was to meet
his patients in the mornmg, read and explain
a passage of Scripture, and pray with them,
after which he attended to their maladies.
Through his medical labors he gained access
to many Hindoo women, who could not have
been reached in any other way. A regular
dispensary was established, and Mrs. Scud-
der, who could speak Tamil fluently, visited
it daily to converse with the patients.
In '1852, Henry M. Scudder, William
Scudder, and Joseph Scudder, all sons of
the venerable Dr. Scudder, and all born in
India, were laboring as missionaries at the
Arcot station. In the report of the Board
for 1853, will be found a very interesting
account of the conversion of a Teloogoo
Brahmin, at Arcot. In addition to the labors
of the dispensary, the Gospel was preached
" in towns and villages, in streets and by-
wa3'S, in choultries and under green trees,"
The mission however is of too recent a date
to exhibit any very marked results, or to
require an extended notice.
396
HINDOSTAN.
The statistics of the missions of the Am. < named Shekh Salih, born in Delhi, and re-
Board in Hindostan are given below, as far ' ceived his first Christian instruction from
as it was practicable to arrange them in a that devoted missionary. Henry Martyn.
I He was baptized in the '• Old Church," Cal-
: cutta. in 1811. by the name Abdool Messech.
I which signifies " Servant of Christ." At
jthe close of 1S12 he left Calcutta and pro-
I ceeded to Agra, 800 miles north-west of Cal-
cutta, in company with }.Ir. Corrie. chaplain
of the East India Company at that station.
There he sustained the office of reader and
catechist with wonderful fidelity and success,
and his journals fill a large space in the
Church Missionary Society's publications.
To return to Madras, we find at an early
date the reasons stated for choosing this as
In the above table, assistant missionaries the seat of the mission in Southern India ;
and native helpers are all included under the | and they may be noticed with the more pro-
head of assistants. The summary of schools priety because, although the American Board
tabular form :
MISSIONS.
9
S
5 i.; |_
111
J
III
i ■. t\ 1
X X
• 2 2.
Bombay,
UV2
i
■J
2
1 20
U\ 4o6, 124,SS0,953
Ahraednu-'g"r
1S31
6
5
16
3 136
9
939
Satara,
ISol
1
1
2
1 8
4
100
Kolapur,
lSoL>
1
1
•2
■Maduni,
ItvM
10
H
1 1
9335
89 162GI
iladras,
1S36
3
4
1
2 42
11 679 i 219,408,221
Arcot,
1^62
-
•26
I
106
16'541 l-JTJsSOOi 344.2S9,174
also embraces those of every description.
The printing for the Mahratta people, it will
preceded the Church ^Missionary Society by
several years in India, thev were twentv-one
be seen, has all been done at Bombay, and ; years later than that society at Madras,
for the Tamil people at Madras and Ceylon, i Consequently many fiicts of interest belong
Chlkch Missioxarv Society. — The ' to a pei'iod over which the mission of the
Church Missionary Society commenced its ! Board does not extend.
labors in Hindostan in 1815. Beginning at
Madras and South India, they subsequently
extended their labors to Calcutta, and to
Bombay, and at each of these- places they
Lave now a diocese embracing many towns
and villages within its sphere of effort.
Adopting the clironological order, we begin
with
JilarJras. — The first missionaries of the
Society to this field were Rev. ^Messrs.
Schnarre and Rhenius. At the end of their
first year, they reported themselves as com-
fortably settled in Madras, as having ac-
quired the Tamil language sufliciently to
compose, converse, and publicly read in it.
and also as having formed a Missionary
Committee, and raised a small missionary'
fund.
It should be observed here, that although
this society had no regular stjition in India
previous to 1815. they had promoted mis-
sions in various places much earlier, through
English chaplains, and in connection with
what is termed the oldest Protestant mis-
sion in India, the Danish mission. Thus,
Messrs. Schnarre and Rhenius had been la-
boring for some time in Tranquebar. more
than a hundred miles south of 5ladras, part
The choice of the Coi-responding Commit-
tee fell upon Madras for the following rea-
sons : "Its high consideration as head of the
whole peninsula, the desire for Christian
knowledge which appeared to prevail therein,
the frequent demands for the Scriptures in
three or four languages, the existence of a
^lalabar congregation — a secession from the
Roman Catholics, and a translated liturgy of
the Church of England just completed for
this congregation, by Rev. Dr. Rottler. chap-
lain of the E. I. Company." To enter into
these labors, keei) open the Tamil Chapel,
provide against the failure of the venerable
Dr. Rottler. and build upon his foundations,
though limited, seemed very important ; and
further, the society would thus commence
its career in the South of India, at the seat
and within the eye of the English govern-
ment.
Attention was early given to schools, and
the distribution of tracts. The latter, how-
ever, were difficult to obtain, as the mission
had at this period no means of printing. To
supply this deficiency as well as they could,
one of the best school boys was employed at
certain hours in writing, and thus two books
were prepared for the English Tamil school,
h' in aid of the schools established there by with a dictionary affixed appropriate to them,
the Royal Danish Mission College, and part- 1 These books consisted of small portions of
ly for the acquisition of the Tamil language. ; the Scriptures. At the close of one year
About this time the Danish mission was ' there were two schools in Madras, but the
obliged to withdraw its jiatronage from ^ want of funds and of teachers prevented an
these school estaV>lishments, and the care of immediate enlargement of the system of edu-
them was assumed by the Church Mission- 1 cation. A seminary for the education of na-
ary Society. To Tranquebar and its schools j tive missionaries was a favorite idea from
frequent allusion will be made. the first ; but it was encumbered with many
In the early journals of this society much difficulties, and the project could not be eu-
is also said of Abdool Messech. a Christian tered upon at once.
reader, lie was a Mohammedan by birth, [ Much interest was awakened, near the
HINDOSTAN.
397
close of the first year, by the conversion of
a native, who called himself a Christian, and
who, without any suggestion from the mis-
sionaries, entered at once upon the business
of reading from house to house. His book
was the New Testament. He began by the
request of a single heathen neighbor, who
saw him much devoted to this book, and by
this his own soul was stirred up to read the
word of God daily to the perishing around
him.
It is worthy of note, that the missionaries
of the Church Society at jladras, from the
very start, excluded caste from their schools.
No little surprise and opposition were awak-
ened, but the truly scriptural and sensible
answer was, that •• the caste of the natives
is not at all compatible with tiiie Chris-
tianity ; because a man cannot be meek,
humble, and loving, in the manner in which
our Lord .Jesus has set us an example, and
as the Holy Spirit works within the heart,
and, at the same time keep up his notions
-of caste ; in which the station, or I'ank, or
esteem of any or every person is determined
by birth alone, and not by intrinsic worth
and dignity of mind."
Such were the labors of the first year. —
two missionaries able to preach the Gospel
in Tamil ; two schools in successful opera-
tion, without the least encouragement of
caste ; a native Christian reader, sufficient-
ly informed to be listened to with attention
by respectable natives ; and a general spirit
of inquiry awakened among the people.
In 1816, the mission received a reinforce-
ment, and at the same time Mr. Schnarre
returned to Tranquebar to take the entire
care of the school establishments in that
place. On the first of January 1817, Mr.
Rhenius formed a regular congregation in
Madras, consisting of the mission servants
and their families, and a few converts re-
ceived the previous year. That more were
not received from the heathen, is accounted
for in a manner most creditable to the char-
acter and principles of this mission, v>-hen
Mr. Rhenius says, '• If I had thought' it any
advantage to the Christian church, or any
honor to our Lord Jesus Christ, to'pav per-
sons for becoming Christians, I should have
had already the pleasure of reporting hun-
dreds, yea, thousands, that would have em-
braced Christianity." During this 3-ear,
schools were established at Yadadelli. about
30 miles north-west of Madras, through the
agency of the native Christian Sandappen,
residing at that place. Other native con-
verts were employed in a similar manner, yi
different directions.
In the autumn of 1818, the cholera broke
out with great violence in this part of Hin-
dostan, and the natives in their consterna-
tion attributed it to the anger of an idol,
which for forty years had been locked up by
public authority, on account of the dissen-
sions which occurred at one of her festivals.
The idol was therefore brought out, and a
human sacrifice — an idiot boy, was offered
to appease her rage. Only one member of
the mission — a catechist — died of the epi-
demic. But the mission property was much
damaged by a whirlwind which occurred
about the same time — all the school-houses,
and many other buildings, having been com-
pletely prostrated.
An important branch of this mission, was
that among the Syrian Christians, in Tra-
vancore, at the southern extremity of Hin-
dostan, on the Malabar coast. The history
of these Syrians, and the manner in Avhich
they came to be residents in this quarter,
are fully stated in the Report of the Mis-
sionary Society for 1818. There were then
not less than 50.000 of these Christians,
with churches, a ministry (exceedingly li-
centious) and a form of worship resembhng
that of the Roman Catholics. So deep was
the interest felt in this particular depart-
ment, that in 1820 a three-fold division was
made of the work, the instruction of the
Syrian clergy being assig-ned to one mission-
ary, the college and higher schools to an-
other, while a third took charge of the
schools intended for the great body of the
people. The clergy were regarded as the
first and most important branch of this mis-
sion. They are described at this period as
a numerous body, and deplorably degraded.
A total disregard of the Sabbath, profana-
tion of the name of God, drunkenness, and
adultery, were their prevailing crimes. Yet,
in this degenerated condition they were con-
siderably above the other castes. They did
not justify their crimes, but tried to conceal
them, and exhibited considerable moral
sense. They accepted most gratefully the
services of the missionaries, and concurred
in all their plans. The metropolitan even
remarked, that he did not expect much im-
provement among his people '■ till the Bible
was circulated."'
The college, at Cotym, had, in 1820. forty-
two students. Some of them could read
English well, understood the simple rules of
arithmetic, and had considerable knowledge
of the Malay and Sanscrit languages. The
method of teaching the Syriac was found
very defective, and a more thorough system
was entered upon. The third object of at-
tention, that of schools, embraced the estab-
lishment of a school for the preparation of
native schoolmasters, the gradual promotion
of schools for general instruction, the super-
intendence of these schools by personal vis-
its, and the compiling of small tracts for
their use. The establishment of parochial
schools to be attached to every church un-
der the jurisdiction of the metropolitan, was
an object much desired, and at the above
398
HINDOSTAN.
date ten of these schools existed, embracing
253 children.
The mission at Madras and South India
had now become systematized, and was an-
nuall}' reported under the following heads,
viz. : Madras and its vicinity ; Tranquebar ;
Tinnevelly, lying south of Tranquebar, and
not far from Cape Comorin ; and Travan-
core, which included Cotym, Cochin, and
Aleppi ; Cannanore and Tellicherry, on the
western side of southern India, and conside-
rably north of Travancore ; and Vizgapa-
tam, north of Madras, on the eastern coast.
At all these places the usual missionary ope-
rations were carried on with zeal and marked
success. But it is impossible in so brief a
space to notice each of them in the annual
progress of the work, and many facts wor-
thy of record are omitted, with a simple
reference to the Missionary Register, the
very ably conducted monthly journal of the
Church Missionary Societ}^, and to their an-
nual reports.
In 1<S24, a new mission was established in
the Nellore district, where the Teloogoo or
Gentoo language was vernacular. The rea-
sons which determined the Corresponding
Committee to occupy this field were, the
vast extent of country throughout which
the above language was spoken, the limited
efforts hitherto made for the enlightenment
of that people, and the circumstance of the
Madras printing-press being now furnished
with Teloogoo types, so as to give speedy
circulation to school books, tracts, and por-
tions of the Scriptures, in that language.
lu 1825, ten years having elapsed since
the society commenced its labors in Ilindo-
stan, with two Lutheran clergymen, design-
ed simply for the charge of the Tranquebar
schools, their report presented nine stations,
witii eleven European missionaries, and one
on his passage ; 117 boj's' schools and 101
girls' schools, with an aggregate of 4,585
scholars ; live seminaries for the training of
natives on a more liberal scale, with a view
to their liccoming teachers and missionaries
among their countrymen ; besides a vast
work accomplished through the mission
press, congregations gathered, houses of
worship erected, &c.
L>uring the next ten )'ears tliere was con-
siderable opposition, and even bitter perse-
cution, from the natives, especially at Tinue-
velly ; yet the mission was at no time essen-
tially interrupted. One or two new stations
were added during this period, and the spirit
of inquiry among the Syrian Christians
was greatly increased. In 1838. the mis-
sionary at Tinnevelley reported a remarkable
case of tlie effect of the Gospel upon a
whole village, which had then lately oc-
curred. Tlie Shanar village of Pragasa-
pooram, became entirely Christian ; and the
people, who had been ten or more years un-
der instruction, and had made great pro-
gress in Christian knowledge, became very
anxious to see a Christian church in the vil-
lage, which should not only last their life-
time, but stand and testify to their children's
children, the sincerity of their religious pro-
fession. Accordingly a subscription was
set on foot among themselvas, and the mis-
sion added a sum equal to what they could
raise, and the object was accomplished. It
was in this year that the mission at Aleppie
reported an extraordinary effort of the Pa-
pacy to establish itself in that place. A
large number of priests from Ireland, with
their bishop, arrived, and began putting forth
every effort by preaching, opening a college,
seminary, &c.
Although the work at Tinnevelly was con-
sidered of a diffusive character, extending to
different villages through a wide district, so
that nothing more was expected than to see
here and there a few embracing the truth ;
3^et, to the surprise of all, whole villages, as
in the case just noticed, were found embrac-
ing Christianity. The bishop of Madras, in
1842, says, " Among many sources of com-
fort during my journey through Tinnevelley,
one of the greatest has been a sight, for
which, I candidly confess, I was not pre-
pared— the sight of whole Christian vil-
lages. He alone who has passed some time
in a heathen land, engaged in the work of
the ministry, can understand the delight
which I felt at finding myself met, wel-
comed, and surrounded by crowds of na-
tive professing Christians, whose counten-
ances spoke a most intelligible welcome."
Some idea of the extent of the mission at
Tinnevelley may be gathered from the fact,
that at this period the lield was divided into
six districts, each containing from 50 to 90
villages, and each district having a mission-
ary, with from 40 to 70 catechists and school-
masters under his superintendence. A very
remarkable occurrence is recorded in 1841,
in one of the Tinnevelley districts, and should
be repeated as an evidence of the divine
blessing upon this mission. At a village in
the Palamcottah district, south of Tinne-
velly, belonging to a respectable Brahmin, a
number of families applied to a catechist for
instruction. The Brahmin, hearing of it, as-
sembled the whole of the villagers, and ad-
dressed them as follows : '• I hear that some
of you have determined to learn the Yedam
(Christian religion.) Now, I don't want any
divisions and quarrels in my village, nor
shall there be two parties here ; therefore,
all of you either remain in a body in your
oin religion, or else all of j'ou in a body join
the new. If you like to embrace Christiani-
ty, do so; I will make no opposition. You
may turn your temple into a prayer-house
if you like, only all be of the same mind ;
and if you do not act justly towards me, t
niNDOSTAN.
399
shall look to the missionaries to see me
righted." The result was. that they all put
themselves under Christian instruction, de-
molished their idols, and converted their
devil temple into a temple of the living God.
The evidence that real Christianity prevailed
along with these outward forms of it, was
most satisfactory, and one proof of this was
found in the constancy with which the na-
tive Christians bore persecution. In one in-
stance, when compelled to flee from their
native village, they said to the catechist,
" We might escape all these troubles by de-
nying Christ, and returning to our former
ways, as most of our relations have done ;
but we cannot do so ; and as the Lord has
said, when they persecute you in this city,
Jiee ye into another, we will avail ourselves
of his permission." As a further evidence
of genuine Christianity among these con-
verts, it is added, that they formed religious
and benevolent societies among themselves,
thus supporting the widows of catechists,
relieving the sick and indigent of their own
number, and sustaining Christian readers,
who traveled about making known the Gos-
pel. They also established a Church build-
ing fund, on the principle that every person
in the district capable of working, should
give the best day's income of the whole
year to the fund, with as much more as they
liked. Besides these evidences of the reality
of the work of grace among the converts of
Tinuevelley, there were many bright exam-
ples of Christian faith and hope at the hour
of death.
Particular instances of conversion and
Christian fidelity might also be given, illus-
trating the success of the missionaries at the
four stations iu Travancore. One is that of
a Syrian convert, who was reclaimed from a
most degraded course of life, and who soon
commenced preaching the Gospel with a
zeal and boldness seldom witnessed in a na-
tive. He went from place to place, and on
one occasion as he was preaching, a Syrian
became so incensed that he went out, and,
procuring a knife, returned and stabbed the
preacher (Curiathe) to the heart. Curiathe
put up a prayer to God not to lay this sin
to the charge of the murderer, and fell down
lifeless.
In 1844, the mission at Tinnevelly was
further subdivided, so as to make eight dis-
tricts, each having a faithful missionary. In
addition to the seminary iu the Palamcottah
district, for the superior instruction of pro-
mising j^ouths from all the district schools,
there was also established this year a nor-
mal school, for the instruction of native
children in the English language, and upon
Christian principles ; and also a normal fe-
male school, under the care of two English
ladies. Measures were also taken for the
establishment of a printing-press for the use
of the mission, thus rendering the mission
complete in all its departments.
The missionary in one of these districts
mentions this year the case of a school girl,
who labored unweariedly to bring her father
and mother to the mission church. They
allowed her to come into their house, with-
out persecution, and to pray with them, and
after more than a year of such effort, her
mother, and then her father, came to hear
the missionary, renounced heathenism, and
were regular attendants on the preached
word. In another Tinnevelly district twenty-
five families, all that remained in heathen-
ism, gave up their devil temple, and came in
a body, and placed themselves under Chris-
tian instruction ; thus leaving not one idola-
tor in the district. The zeal of the people
of these districts to erect substantial houses
of worship in their villages, afforded pleas-
ing evidence of the progress of the Gospel
among them. The one day's earnings which
they had formerly contributed did not sat-
isfy them, and they made quite large sub-
scriptions in money to this object. In re-
gard to real spiritual progress, in connection
with these wonderful outward developments,
the missionaries spoke favorably from time
to time, as they saw the converts abounding
in labors, in sacrifices, and in efforts to bring
their relatives to renounce idolatry and em-
brace Christianity.
An out-station was commenced this year
about 12 miles from Trichoor, a station in
Travancore, among a class of heathens called
Nayards, the very lowest class of natives,
who lived by begging, and were extremely
ignorant. Several dwelling houses were
erected for them, schools were opened, and
within a year as many as sixty of them
were under instruction, both in religion and
in habits of industry.
Madras had not, for several years, received
its proportionate share of attention, the in-
terest having been concentrated more upon
the southern portion of the field, particu-
larly Tinnevellejr and Travancore. The con-
sequence was, that in 1845, thirty years
from the commencement of the mission,
there were but three congregations in Ma-
dras, and these not so large as at an earlier
period. An urgent appeal was made for
more missionaries, but the society could not
respond favorably, as they had no more men
to send. Two years later, however, more
missionaries arrived, and the mission was
much strengthened and revived.
The Tinnevelly mission was again subdi-
vided in 1845, making 11 districts, with 14
missionary clergymen. The number of per-
sons under Christian instruction at this pe-
riod, in these eleven districts, amounted to
23,868, and in January 1846, they had in-
creased to 30,698. The number of baptized
converts was now 12,525. A similar sue-
400
HINDOSTAN.
cess attended the labors of the " Society for
the Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign
Parts," occup3'iug in some measure the same
field and of which fraternal mention is
made by the missionaries of the Church So-
ciety. But while Christianity was thus ad-
Tan«ing, and whole villages were demolish-
ing their idols and embracing the Gospel,
a spirit of violent persecution was rising.
In one district, several houses of worship
were destroyed, converts were handled with
violence, and many were falsely accused ;
but in spite of all this. 1402 souls embraced
the Christian religion in that very district,
within six months. In the latter part of
this year (1845) the persecution became
more systematic and violent. A mob of
more than 3,000 attacked some Christian
villages, robbed the people of all their goods,
and beat them in the most cruel manner.
The destruction of property was great. A
civil force at length interfered, and put an
end to the disturbance. Some of the con-
verts were led, through fear, to renounce
Christianity, but the great body of them re-
mained firm, and one of the missionaries
wrote, a few months later, " I have often
been surprised at the unshaken and uncom-
promising attachment which, during this
trying season, these poor people have mani-
fested. They, as well as some of the cate-
chists, have worked night and day to sup-
port the Christian cause, and with an alacri-
ty and zeal which have often revived my
own. Had it not been for this, I do not
know wliat, at times, I should have done.
I know also, that some of them have resist-
ed temptations which an English Christian
is little prepared to resist, — bribes, and such
things."
The Bishop of Madras visited the Tinnc-
velly missions in 1845. and in his report he
eaj-s, " More than 18,000 souls have renounced
idolatry and placed themselves under Cliris-
tian instruction, since January 1841, Avhen I
last visited these missions. Thus, in four
3'ears and a half, the Christian community
in Tinnevelly has doubled itself — the increase
during that period being equal to the total
increase of the lifty-fuur years which pre-
ceded it."
Many of the chief actors in the persecu-
tions were, in the following year, tried and
punished, but some escaped altogether ; and
it was found that the Christian congrega-
tions had, some of them considerably di-
minished. But this did not hinder others.
in groat numbers, from coming forward to
fill their phiccs. About this time the sub-
ject of caste was taken up by the missiona-
ries in Tinnevelly, and a declaration was
drawn up, condemning it in the severest
terms, with a solemn pledge forever to re-
nounce it, and to discourage it both byword
and example. This protest and pledge
every native teacher was required to sign,
before he could become a candidate for holy
orders.
The most diligent attention continued to
be bestowed upon the Syrian population, in
the Travancore district. While the progress
here was slow, compared with that in Tinne-
velly, the missionaries still felt justified in
saying that there was a shaking among the
Syrians — a state of great disorganization in
their church, and a general dissatisfaction
with their religion and a willingness to re-
ceive the truth. Two years later (1851) a
missionary remarks, that although the Syri-
ans hold many doctrines in common with
the Roman Catholics, yet there is this
wide essential difference between the two
churches, viz. : that the Syrians do not dis-
allow the perusal of the Scriptures, and nei-
ther do they mutilate the sacred text, like
the Roman Catholics, to suit their own in-
terpretation ; but the authorized version is
acknowledged by them, and they profess to
draw their doctrines from thence. Still a
year later, the same missionary says, " Some
gi'eat crisis is probably at hand, with regard
to the Syrian church in this place. The
whole Syrian community is in a most divided
state, and many are anxious to be joined to
a purer faith." This missionary had widely
distributed the word of God among the
12,000 Syrians of his district, when a Romish
priest ordered the people to bring all these
books to his church, on pain of excommuni-
cation ; and, as soon as they were collected
they were publicly burnt. Opposition of
this nature from the Catholics, was among
the most serious hindrances to the progress
of the mission among the Syrian people.
Slavery is spoken of as prevailing exten-
sively in Travancore, the slaves numbering
about one-sixth of the whole population.
They are an extremely degraded class, being
regarded by the higher classes, and even by
the laborers, as utterly unclean and pollut-
ing. " Their persons are entirely at the dis-
posal of their masters, by whom they are
bought and sold like cattle, and are often
worse treated." Yet even these slaves were
often reached, and brought under Christian
influences.
The intelligence from the Madras and
South India missions is to the close of 1852.
Much that is of special interest might be
added to the foregoing statements, particu-
larl}^ in regard to the Tinnevelly and Te-
loogoo missions, but it is necessary to omit
further details. It has been seen that this
brancli of the Church of England mission,
extending over a period of 48 years, has
been conducted on a very broad scale, and
upon principles as enli,5htened and philan-
thropic as they have been Christian. For
learning, jjractical wisdom, and sincere and
unremitting exertions for the temporal and
HINDOSTAN.
401
spiritual elevation of the heathen, the mis-
sionaries of this society in Southern India
have been distinguished, not less, certainly,
than those in any other field. The results
of these lal:)ors appear in a table at the end
of the article on the Church of England
missions in Hindostan.
Bombay. — The Church of England com-
menced its mission in Bombay in 1820,imder
the labors of Rev. Mr Kenney. Although
it was not a new field, the American Board
having had an efficient mission there for
eight years, yet Mr. Kenney occupied a sepa-
rate and independent station, and had the
Mahratta language to learn, xifter laboring
with great zeal and success for five years, his
return to England was rendered necessary
by the health of his family, and he was suc-
ceeded by Rev. Messrs. Mitchell and Steward.
Mr. Kenney had established three schools
for boys, witli 113 scholars, but no school for
girls had yet been opened. Mrs. Steward
soon died, and Mr. Steward left for another
field. Other laborers succeeded from time
to time, but for fifteen years or more the
operations of the Church Missionary Society
in Bombay and Western India were quite
limited. They had however established a
mission at Nassuck, 100 miles east of Bom-
bay, and at both these places they had opened
schools for both boys and girls, and had
preached the Gospel to multitudes of people,
and the Arch-Deacon of Bombay was led to
remark that " much precious seed was vege-
tating in the hearts of natives, though little
appeared externally." For the last few
j-ears more visible fruits have appeared, at
Bombay and at Nassuck. The latter place
has a population of 30,000, and is the resort
of numerous pilgrims, and the seat and
centre of Brahminism in Western India.
Here the missionaries have had to encounter
very fierce opposition, the Brahmins having
become enraged at the weakened influence
of Hindooisra on the minds of those who
have received instruction in the mission
schools, and particularly on account of the
relinquishment of caste by two Brahmin
youths. The Brahmins even expressed the
belief that they should be able to expel the
missionaries, who, nevertheless, went steadily
on with their labors. Considerable atten-
tion was bestowed upon the translation of
the Scriptures into Mahratta, and preaching
tours were frequently performed into the
neighboring towns and villages. In the So-
ciety's report for 1852, they say, " The mis-
sionaries at Bombay and Nassuck are perse-
vering in their patient and faithful labors,
though they have hitherto reaped but little
fruit, and can scarcely discern its promise.
The advantages which have been gained have
been chiefly the formation of schools, the
translation of the Holy Scriptures and of
tracts, and that increased respect and atten-
26
tion to Christian truth which form an impor-
tant vantage ground for future operatons."
In 1843 mention is made of an Asylum at
Nassuck for poor and destitute natives, sup-
ported by the alms of the benevolent ; and
here the missionaries were accustomed to
give instruction to the inmates, some of
whom received the Gospel and were bap-
tized. The last notice of this mission is in
the Church Missionary Record for May,
1853, in which the missionaries say, " There
are no great achievements to tell of — no
brilliant successes to call forth acclamations.
Our pages contain nought but the record of
humble, patient and persevering labors, car-
ried on amid much natural discouragement,
but sustained by the gracious assurance that
they who are called to do the work of the
Lord shall find that their labor is not in
vain." The native congregation at Bombay,
at this period, numbered 56, of whom 22
were communicants. There was also a
divinity class of four students, and a " Money
Institution," so called, containing in the
English department 230, and in the Marathi
department 175 pupils. The vernacular
schools were eighteen in number, eight for
girls and ten for boys, the former containing
362 pupils, and the latter 630. At Nassuck
there was one English school, containing 20
boys, four Marathi schools with 272 boys,
and one Hindostanee school with 16 pupils.
At Junin, east of Bombay about 100 miles,
little had been done, the station having been
occupied only a short time. The Sinde mis-
sion was commenced as late as 1850, and
presents no facts of importance. A com-
plete summary of the six stations of the
Church of England mission in Western
India, will be found in the statistical table.
Calcutta and North India. — The Church
Society's mission in Calcutta, was com-
menced in 1816, by Rev. Mr. Jetter. Early
attention was paid to schools, and to print-
ing and circulating religious tracts. Success
attended these labors, and in 1824 the num-
ber of schools reported was 22, and the
number of scholars 500, a large number of
whom were females. Great interest was
awakened on the subject of female education
in India, and a " Ladies' Society" for this
purpose was formed, under the patronage of
Lady Amherst. At an examination of
female schools in February, 1825, out of 323
girls, in eleven schools, 292 came together.
They were examined in Watts' Catechism
and the New Testament, to the gratification
and surprise of all present.
The death of Bishop Heber, in 1827, w^as
an afflictive event to the Calcutta mission.
He had been in India but little more than
two years, and in that short period had
visited almost every station where a Chris-
tian church could be assembled, performing
not only the higher duties of his office, but
102
HINDOSTAN.
the more humble and laborious duties of an
ordinary pastor. He had thus become
known to all his clergy and people, in the
plains and mountains of Hindostau, in the
wilder tracts of Central India, in the stations
of Guzerat, the Deccan, and the Western
Coast, in the hills and valleys of Ceylon, and
in the southern provinces of India, the scene
of his last labors, and henceforth of his
dearest memory." The Bishop on coming
in from a laborious tour, in which he had
confirmed a large number of persons, went
to the bath as usual, and in a few moments
was found deatl beneath the water.
The missions at Calcutta were not at any
time conducted upon so liberal a scale as in
some other places, and yet there is evidence
of great fidelity on the part of the mission-
aries and teachers, who from time to time
were called to labor here. In the report for
1852, the number of native Christians under
the missionaries in Calcutta and its neighbor-
hood, was stated at 230. Services were held
in the mission chapel, both in Bengali and
Hindostanee, and preaching to the heathen
was regularly kept up, in the vernacular
languages, both at out-stations and in the
public thoroughfares.
Throughout the entire history of this mis-
sion, schools of various grades and depart-
ments have been maintained. In 1853 the
boys' boarding school embraced 28 pupils,
and a similar school for girls had 30 pupils.
The vernacular schools connected with the
mission had an average attendance of GGO
boys. At an out-station a little distance
from Calcutta, there was, at the above date,
a boys' school contauiing 87 pupils, and also
a school for girls with 25 pujjils. These
were taught not only in books, but in needle-
work, cooking, &c. The English school con-
tained 350 pupils.
The native press in Calcutta has been con-
ducted with much energy, though not en-
tirely under missionary control. Rev. J.
Long, who at the last accounts had a con-
nection with this department, writes, '' Cal-
cutta sends out from native presses, annual-
ly, not less than 30,000 volumes in Bengali.
Among these are more than twelve news-
papers and periodicals. Some forty native
presses furnish a supply of intellectual food,
much of which is anything but favorable to
Christianity. Calcutta is, in this respect, a
very important sphere, and I have given to
it as much time as I could spare."
At a little earlier period Mr. Long gives a
view of Calcutta as a missionary field, which
is so comprehensive and satisfactory that
parts of it may with propriety be quoted :
" In the city is a population of at least
500,000. and within a radius of fifteen miles
a population of more than 2,000,000. It is
the centre of missionary operations from
North India— the heart of Eens:al. All
translations of the Scriptures, rules for their
circulating, the translation of tracts, the
printing of Christian school books, the
machinery of missions, — all are managed by
committees in Calcutta, and chiefly by the
extra labors of missionaries ; for were it not
for the exertions of missionaries, all these
committees would languish, or perhaps be-
come defunct. Many benevolent European
gentlemen in Calcutta, who are bi'ought into
connection with the missionaries, have their
attention directed to certain branches of
missionary work, which they support very
liberally."
'• Calcutta, as far as regards education, in
some respects resembles Cambridge or Ox-
ford. Thousands of youths come and lodge
in Calcutta for the sole purpose of their edu-
cation. Of my scholars — 150 in number —
who study the Bible, Home's Evidences of
Christianity, Milton, and Natural Philos-
ophy, through the medium of the English
language, four-fifths merely take lodgings in
Calcutta, while their parents live fifty or a
hundred miles in the country. Educational
labors afford a great field here. There are
more than 100,000 boys in Calcutta, of whom
not more than 10,000 attend school. * *
What a ocene for missionary labors. Be-
sides, it is generally admitted that Calcutta
missionaries do twice as much work as
those in the country. Their sphere of labor
is near them ; they have not to exhaust their
physical energies in traveling, &c. All the
labor connected with translations, a native
Christian literature, &c., is performed almost
entirely by Calcutta missionaries ; and yet
the Church Missionary Society has always
been weak in Calcutta. The Scotch Mis-
sionary Society have five laborers, the
London Missionary Society five, the Baptist
Missionary Society six, while our Society
have only Mr. Sandys and myself. I may
be mistaken, but I have long been of opinion
that Calcutta is the Waterloo of India, — the
depot where the grand battle between
Christianity and Ilindooism will be fought.
The English language is sweeping away as
with the besom of destruction, any linger-
ing attachment that may remain to Brah-
miuism, in the minds of youth, and now is
the glorious era to control the storm, and
direct the mental energies into the path of
salvation."
Since the above was written another mis-
sionary, Mr. Bost, has arrived in Calcutta.
In other respects Mr. Long's remarks apply
to the present state of that mission.
Benares. — This is a city of great import-
ance, and is about 500 miles north-west of
Calcutta. The mission here was commenced
in 1817, by Rev. Messrs. Morris and Adling-
ton, successively schoolmaster, cateohist,
and preacher ; but of their labors little is
recorded. They were succeeded by other
HINDOSTAN.
403
laborers, who remained but a short time, and
for manj'- years there was a great deficiency
of systematic effort. Gradually however, a
change took place, and for the last ten or
fifteen j^ears this has been one of the most
important of the Church Society's missions
in North India.
The mission premises are situated about a
mile and a half south-east of the canton-
ments, at a village called Sigra. The en-
closure contains about five acres of ground.
The situation is airy, healthy, and quiet,
with three large and one small bungalows
(houses), the former designed for the resi-
dence of ordained missionaries, and the lat-
ter for European schoolmasters. There is
another building devoted to the use of Chris-
tian orphan boys, who form a very interest-
ing part of the mission ; and not far distant
is the school establishment for the native
girls. In the city of Benares, and connected
with the mission, there is a large school for
native boys, founded by a native, named Jai
Nairain, who left at his death two bunga-
lows, the rent of which should apply to its
support, and also a large building to be used
as a school house and residence. Govern-
ment added a liberal monthly donation, and
this has been one of the most important in-
stitutions connected with the mission. It is
called " Jai Nairain's College," and has at
present about 500 students, which is as
many as the building will accommodate. At
the last dates, an enlargement of the prem-
ises had been commenced. The Brahmin
boys outnumber those of any other caste.
The usual schools for boys and girls have
been maintained for many years with in-
creasing interest. A pleasing fact is men-
tioned in the Record for November, 1853, by
Mrs. Smith, teacher of the " heathen girls'
school," viz. : that during the whole year the
school had not been once closed on account
of a heathen festival. She had told the
girls that she desired their attendance on
those days especially, that their minds might
not be contaminated by the ceremonies
practiced.
The native Christian congregation at
Benares numbers 314 individuals. The mis-
sionaries, of whom there are five, devote
much time to itinerating among the sur-
rounding towns and villages, and they
usually have no lack of hearers and dispu-
ters.
Birdwan. — At the close of the year 1816,
the corresponding committee received a
communication from Lieutenant Stewart,
stationed at Birdwan, 40 miles above Cal-
cutta, proposing an extensive plan of native
schools at and near that place. This pro-
posal was adopted, and in a short time ten
schools were established, one at Birdwan,
and the others in places not far distant.
Within a year from their commencement
there were 1,000 children in these schools,
all taught in the Bengalee language. The
number of schools was subsequently in-
creased, but disbanded again for the want of
means to sustain so manj^. The present
number is ten, and in the last report — 1853 —
the missionary says, " The number of
heathen children who enjoy plain education,
founded on the Christian religion, is about
500. In these schools you meet the proud
Brahmin sitting at the side of, or below, the
Sudra, in harmony and love, deriving th«
same instruction. The fear of having
youths taught in mission schools has, in
this neighborhood, almost passed away."
Particular mention is made in the circular of
the Board for October of last year, of the
orphan girls' school, with 150 orphans, up-
wards of 30 of whom had died while re-
ceiving their education, some of them very
happily. "This," says the teacher, Mrs.
AVeitbrecht, " has been one of the most
pleasing and encouraging branches of our
work in this mission, and has often sustained
our spirits when all besides has been dark
and trying."
Krishnagur. — This station is a little to the
north-west of Calcutta, and was commenced
in 1831. The work was continued in the
usual way, instruction being given in schools,
chapels, and by the distribution of the
Scriptures and tracts, till 1835, when a bit-
ter persecution arose against a sect com-
posed partly of Hindoos and partly of IMus-
suhnans, called "Kurta Bhoja," worship-
ers of the Creator. They worshiped one
God, had nothing to do with idols, and be-
lieved that God would come into the world
in human form. They boi-e persecution with
great patience, and the missionary, Mr.
Deerr, on visiting them, was convinced of
their sincerity, and was led to admire es-
pecially the great love and affection which
they bore one to another. In 1836, Mr.
Deerr renewed his visit, and was received
with increased cordiality. He established
public worship among them, in which they
united with much joy ; and upon this a
more rigorous persecution commenced
against them. They were treated as out of
the pale of heathenism, their caste was
gone, and their wives and children were
taken from them, and only restored by an
order from the magistrate. In 1838, the
leading men in ten villages belonging to this
sect, avowed their belief in the Gospel, and
after instruction, were baptized into the
Christian faith. They straightway confessed
Christ before the heathen, and estabUshed
public worship in their villages. This crea-
ted great excitement, and a still more violent
opposition was the result. But the truth
spread, the Christians were more in earnest,
inquirers were multiplied, and the Word of
God prevailed.
404
HINDOSTAN.
At the request of the Corresponding Com-
mittee, the Bishop of Calcutta made a care-
ful and thorough investigation into the facts,
and made a written report, from which the
following is extracted :
"It appears that between fifty-flve and
sixty villages are thirsting for the waters of
life, in a greater or less degree. They
stretch to the north and north-east of
Krishuagur to the distance of forty or fifty
miles, and to the south-west fifteen or
twent}'. The numbers described as pre-
pared for baptism, in various measures of
course, is between 3,000 and 3,500. The
Arch-I)eacon assisted himself at the recep-
tion of about 500 souls, including women
and children, into the Christian Church, and
tliere seems the fairest prospect, if we can
but enter the wide and effectual door in
time, that not only these three or four thou-
sand, bat the whole population of the fifty
or sixty villages, may receive the Christian
faith. Such a glorious scene has never before
been presented to our longing eyes in Ben-
gal ; and after making all deductions for
overstatements, sanguine hopes. &c., it ap-
pears that a mighty Avork of divine grace is
begun, — a work wide and permanent, as we
trust, — a work for which our fathers in
India, Brown, Buchanan, Martyn, Thomason,
and Bps. Corrie, Middlcton, and Hebcr,
would have blessed and praised God in the
loudest strains of gratitude and joy."
Archdeacon Dealtry, who visited the dis-
trict, and made ver}'' diligent and patient in-
vestigations as to the origin and history of
the sect, sa^'s :
"It appears that they have been about
sixty years settled on the banks of Jelingha,
(a branch of the Ganges). They called
themselves ' Kurta Bhoja,' "vvorshipers of
the Creator. They had some Cionnection
with the sect of Dervishes, supposed to
abound in Persia. They had a firm notion
of one Supreme Being, rejected with abhor-
rence all idolatry, held very slightly if at all
by caste, and considered tho test of prose-
lytism, not eating, but praying to the one
true God. They showed an acquaintance
generally with the lost estate and sinful na-
ture of man, with the incarnation and holy
life of Christ, with the atonement, justifica-
tion, and sanctification, in. their substantial
import, and with the necessity of following
Christ's example. Jesus Clhrist was the be-
ginning and end of thei-r religion, and
prayer to him v/as the test of discipleship.
They had learnt the ten conu'iiandments, the
Lord's Prayer, the Creed, ail,d Dr. Watts'
Catechism. It appeared further, as far as
could be ascertained, that theyl were willing
to forsake all for Christ, and <^idure what-
ever persecutions might come ujVon them."
The result was, that the Arohoieacon said
to the missionaries. '' Can any forlbid water,
that these should not be baptized, who have
received the Holy Ghost, in his sanctifying
influences, as well as we ?" And upon their
unanimous vote, baptism was administered
to them in separate companies, and from
village to village, to the number of over
1,000. In 1841, the Bishop of Calcutta vis-
ited the Krishnagur district in person, and
after surveying the villages and conversing
with the Christians, he said, " I have not a
word to retract on reading over my commu-
nications of 1839. Time has only developed
and confirmed the statements then made."
In 1845, the Papists made an incursion into
these Chi'istian villages, under the lead of a
Spanish Jesuit Priest, with a view to seduce
to Popeiy the numerous converts from
heathenism. They came with ifrge chari-
table funds, and secured an extensive piece
of ground in the centre of the chief station,
with a view to erect thereon a church, dwell-
ing house, school, &c. With much force aud
justice do the society, in their report, speak
of the Church of Piome as "turning aside
from the 130 millions of heathen in India, to
address its labors to a few recent Christian
converts who had been taught and fosterer
by the care of others, thus seeking to en-
large its bc/ders, according to its ancient
character, foreshown in the word of God.
through the a lostasy o^' Christians rather
than through the conversion of the hea-
then." For a time the efforts of this Jesuit
appeared successful, but after two years it
is recorded, that "the priest who had in-
truded upon our work and led astray many
of our converts to his errors, has been ar-
rested in his career, and has evidently failed
of his designs. Most of his converts are
very anxious to be re-admitted into our
communion."
Although there were many apostasies
from time to time, of those who " did run
well," yet a favorable account is given of
the stability and Christian consistency of a
large number of the professed converts, and
in very few instances has there been a more
signal display of the grace of God among
the heathen, than at Krishnagur. In 1848,
the missionaries say, " Seventeen years ago
the name of Krishnagur first appeared in the
records of our society, as an out-station to
Birdwan. This was the first attempt of the
missionary to disturb the unbroken heathen-
ism of the district. Now, Mr. Cuthbert,
one of the missionaries, reports missions and
mission work as rooted and settled in the
land as firmly as the English people are in
India, and more so." Seven stations were
occupied, substantial and durable churches,
school houses and dwelling houses, had been
built, neat and convenient cottages had
sprung up in all the Christian villages, and
the labors of the missionaries ancl school
teachers were attended with the most grati-
HINDOSTAN.
405
fying success. Were there space for it, it
would be gratifying to present much more
full details of the revival in this district, and
of its results ; but the narrative must be
closed, with a reference to the Church Mis-
sionary Record for 1837, and onward, for a
complete history of the work.
Ckimar. — This station is near Benares, far
to the north-west of Calcutta, and its mis-
sionary operations date a little earlier than
those of Benai'es. But it has seldom, if at
any time, had more than one missionary,
and less has been expended upon it than
upon almost any other station of the Church
Society, of so long continuance. The most
recent report says. " This station cannot be
continued much longer on the Society's list,
being only occasionally visited by amissiorf^
ary, and the native Christian flock consist-
ing of persons connected with the canton-
ment, and therefore properly belonging to
the ministerial charge of the chaplain of the
station."
Mirut. — The first missionary to this sta-
tion, which is about 32 miles north-east of
Delhi, and near the Ganges, arrived in 1815.
It was considered an important position,
and for fifteen years or more the mission
was conducted with ordinary zeal and suc-
cess, though the number of laborers was
never great. In 1842 the station was left
without a missionary, only the Government
chaplain being on the ground. In his appeal
for help, he says, " There is still a native
flock of 32 Christians, without a pastor, and
altogether depending on the care of a native
reader. The widowed state of the mission
is a constant source of grief to the local
committee." At the same time the Bishop
of Calcutta speaks of this mission as one of
the oldest in that part of India, and now in
danger of becoming entirely extinct — a mis-
sion with all the heavy external apparatus
complete — a mission which possesses a mis-
sion residence, with alms-houses for native
Christians when destitute — a mission in one
of the largest stations, and most healthy, in
all India, and where almost unlimited funds
might be raised if it were vigorously sus-
tained. In 1846, after four years' suspen-
sion of operations, a missionary. Rev. Mr.
Lamb, was provided for this station, and its
prospects brightened. During the four years
preceding 1850, eleven adults were baptized,
and have given satisfactory evidence of sin-
cerity. The latest account is contained in
the Record for November, 1853, when the
congregation of native worshipers num-
bered 150, the English school contained
about fifty boys, houses had been built for
widows, and the Christian village was ex-
tending its limits. Mirut is memorable as
the place where the distinguished native
catechist, Anund Messeeh, was baptized, in
181G, and where he commenced those labors
which have been of such signal service to
the cause of missions in India.
Delhi. — For several years Delhi was the
seat of an interesting mission, chiefly under
the care of Anund Messeeh, the distin-
guished native catechist and reader. He
had been for some time a teacher at Mirut,
not far distant, and his first visit to Delhi
after his conversion appears to have been in
1818, his wife, a brother and two sisters
being there, and some hope of their conver-
sion being entertained. While there a re-
port was in circulation, that a number of
strangers from several villages to the west
of Delhi had assembled together, nobody
knew why, in a place near the imperial city,
and were busily employed in friendly con-
versation, and in reading some books in
their possession, which induced them to re-
nounce their caste, to bind themselves to
love and to associate with one another, and
intermarry only among their own sect, and
to lead a strict and holy life. Anund imme-
diately set off for the place of rendezvous,
and found about 500 people, men, women,
and children, seated under the shade of the
trees, and employed in reading and conver-
sation. On further inquiry it turned out
that these people belonged to a sect of na-
tive Christians, called Saadhs^ and that the
book they had was the New Testament.
Many copies of it were in the possession of
the party, some printed, in the Ilindostanee
tongue, and some written. They professed
great love for this book, called it the book
of God, and said that the written copies
they wrote themselves, having no other
means of obtaining a supply. Subsequent
investigations led to the discovery, that
these poor strangers had existed as a dis-
tinct sect for 5 or 6 years, having separated
themselves from the authority and control
of the Brahmins, both in temporal and
spiritual things, being disgusted by their
tyranny and extortion, as well as determined
to exercise their own judgment more freely
in matters of religion. Before this general
secession of the Saadhs, the Brahmins, it is
said, had hated them, and subjected them to
such exorbitant exactions as to cause general
misery and discontent. When once the
leaven of their discontent began to work,
their numbers increased daily, and their
tenets continued to spread. The particular
tract of country occupied by the Saadhs,
lay to the north-west and west of Delhi,
some fifty miles. They had five villages, in
one of which was found ten copies of the
Gospel, which they accounted more precious
than gold, and would give any thing for a
larger supply.
In his tour among these villages, Anund
Messeeh was received with great reverence,
and would have been almost worshiped had
he not rebuked such a tendency. At the
406
HINDOSTAN.
principal villagje, the people gathered to-
getlier every night, for worship, each pray-
'ing (xtoiuporaneously. and hlessing and
praising the one true God for all his mercies.
It was with particular i-eference to the
care and instiniction of these people, that
Messeeh, about this time, was stationed at
Delhi, for there the Saadhs could visit him,
and he in turn could visit them at their
houses, so that they would be sure of religi-
ous instruction. It is supposed that the
copies of the Gospel in their possession were
those distributed by a missionary, Mr.
Chamberlain, while on an exploring tour in
that quarter. Favorable accounts continued
to be received of Anund's labors, until 1^27,
when he was renioved from Delhi to another
station, and subsequently to this the intelli-
gence respecting the Saadhs is very imper-
fect. A full account of them may be seen in
the Missionary Register, for 1818, pp. 17,
and 203.
Agra. — Incipient missionary labors appear
to have been commenced at Agra, some 50
miles south of Delhi, as early as 1815. The
mission was for some time under the care of
the Rev. Mr. Corrie, chaplain at this station,
assisted l.>y a native Chri.-^tian, Abdool Mes-
seeh. whose chiiractcr and labors are spoken
of in terms of high commendation. An in-
stitution for orphan children was an object
of special care at this place, and in the
calamitous famine of 1838, when 300 chil-
dren were preserved from starvation by the
benevolence of the Christian public, these
children were all received by the cunmiittee
of the Oiphan Institution, and pruviiled with
a home and suitable instruction. Agra has
been provided with schools of various
gnides, and with mi.ssionaries, so as to ixnder
it one of the most etiicient and important of
the Church .Society in northern India. A
new building for the high school, or college,
liad been completed, in 1853. and 200 boys
were under instruction in this institution.
This mission has had the advantaj'O of a
jirinting press, and many of the orphan boys
have labored in connection with it so as to
provide for their own support.
Jaunpore. — This was an extension of the
Benares mi.ssion. etiVcted in 1838. The mis-
sionary was s(joii removed, however, and for
four years this station was without a mis-
sionary. Rut the Record for November,
165.3. says, " This station has once more a
resident missionary, and a small Christian
llock, numbering about 30 individuals."
Cr'o/THcA-ywre.— This place, at a considerable
distance norlli-wost of Calcutta, was visited
frtjiu IJenares in 1823. and a mission was
conuiunced whi<h has been continued to the
present time. It Ims now one missionary,
tw(} native congregations, a large English
school, orphan schools, and a vernacular
school
Bhagjilpur.—The mission at this place
was commenced in 1?50, and at the last ac-
counts there had been 41 baptisms. The
hill tribes around this mission are said to
have no caste, and no antiquated system of
religion, and are regarded therefore as more
likely to receive the Gospel freely and at
once.
Himalaya. — This mission was commenced
in 1844. Its labors consisted for a time in
the est.'\blishment of small village schools,
and itinerating among the population of the
mountains, but it became a very important
mission, and is still so regarded. Reing in
the mountain regions in the north of llindo-
stan, and among a people little known before,
some notice of tlieir character, religion, &c.,
may be expected.
The principal station of the mission is
Kot-gurh, situated 7,000 feet above the level
of the sea, and 100 miles from the plains of
India. It is the key of central Asia, and the
granary of all the countries to the north and
east. The missionary, Rev. J. D. Prochnow,
describes the country, the inlluence of the
Sikh war, and the various means by which
this vast field had been opened to mission-
ary^ labor ; and then proceeds to give a de-
scription of the people themselves. They
consist of three classes :
" First, the Hill people, who afe all Hin-
doos, though their wa3S of living and of
worship are very different from those of the
plains. In their rites, they bear a great re-
sembliuice to the Jews of old. They carry
their Deotas — wooden chaii-s dressed up,
with human faces fixed to them — on their
shoulders, and dance before them in a pecu-
liar manner, as the Jews of old before the
ark. In their music, their observances of
the new moon, fasting, and many other
things, they also resemble the Jews ; but
more than any thing else, in their sacrifices
to atone the wrath of the Deota, vi/. : tho
sprinkling of bh>od on the posts and doors
of the temi)le and liouses. All this shows
that the hill tribes of the Himalaya nnssiou
at Kot-gurh, are far from being in a savage
and entirely uncivilized state. They under-
stan<l all the terms of our religion. I never
found the least dilliculty in making them,
even the women, understand the great truths
of the Gospel, if only brought before them
in simple language. To the Hindoo moun-
taineers, as we have been without assistance,
our labors liave hitherto been chiefly con-
fhicd."
" The second class are the wandering Tar-
tars, or the Rudhist mountaineers of the
higher hills. These people are very i)cculiar
every way, in their habits, religion, language.
&c. They come down from the high table-
lauds l»y thousands, to spend the winter
months in the valleys, all tlivided into small
families, bringing their sheej) and goats along
HINDOSTAN.
407
with them, together with the produce of
their country, — raisins, borax, wool, dried
apricots, silk, precious stones, &:c. These
they dispose of during the winter months,
feeding their flocks in the valleys of the
rivers, for they would find no food for them
in their own country at this season ; and in
May all these families move again towards
their native hills, with their bags filled with
grain. So they avoid the rainy season of
the lower hills, and enjoy the fine summer
of the higher hills. These wandering tribes
alone form a very interesting field of labor.
Their religion is Budhism, and there are
plenty of monks and nuns among them."
" The third class is the Sikhs. They are
all of one caste, and are readily influenced
by the preaching of the missionaries. Those
of them who have been converted to Chris-
tianity at Caunpore and Benares are very
highly spoken of, as being far superior to
the Hindoo converts."
As to the success of this mission, Mr.
Procknow says, " I must confess with deep
humiliation, visible fruits have been few ;
but considering all the difficulties which
have beset us from our very first beginning
until now, I am by no means discouraged.
The seed has fallen into good ground ; it will
spring up in God's own time." The greatest
difficulty in the way of giving success to
this, and many other new and important
missions, the committee say, is the " pau-
city of missionary laborers."
The Punjaub. — The mission to the Pun-
jaub was commenced in 1852, and has two
missionaries, assisted by three native cate-
chists and readers. Portions of Scripture,
books and tracts, in Punjaub, Urdu, and
Hindi, have been put into circulation. A
school has been commenced, with 50
scholars, half of whom are Sikhs, and the
rest Hindoos and Mussulmans. For a fuller
account of the Punjaub mission, see Mission-
ary Intelligencer for May and November,
1852.
TABULAR VIEW.
NAMES OF DISTRICTS
O
g!
CI
r
prgy-
nen.
B
1
3
"-1
2j
<
5
"3-
id"
33
3
&
S0
m
ma
OR
o
3
3
3
P'
t
^
2.
2
M
PRINCIPAL STATIONS,
c
V3
^
<<
i
3
3.
1
3
P
O
E
£ o
•-•s
f
>-i
J
o
a
^
S,
n
m
1853.
•=i
3
O
OB
1
D
S
_3
fe!
a
P
3
1-3
c
>
c
3;
3
1
02
o
1
Q
>
'T3
a
3"
o
3
"Calcutta District,
1S16
3
1
1
46
4
65
133
12
42
54
18
513
55
10 ! 1400
1978
Burdwan District,
1S17
1
2
17
3
22
47
4
29
33
10
513
50
60] 623|
Krishnagur District,
1S31
8
8
1
1
2
93
8
113
403
6
189
195
49
1759
352
30
40
2181
^
Bhagulpur,
1850
1
1
1
2
5
19
35
14
49
4
150
28
178
^
Benares,
1817
1
6
3
1
34
4
48
96
6
14
20
8
541
00
7
200
808
M
Jamipore,
1831
1
1
1
17
1
20
12
4
5
5
396
11
21
428
^ '
Gorruckpore,
1823
2
1
1
8
0
10
34
1
10
11
4
265
24
289
■£
Agra,
1813
2
2
4
1
27
2
36
108
2
48
50
10
456
26
27
509
ll
Mirut,
1815
1
2
9
0
11
55
15
10
25
3
6
92
98
Himalaya,
1844
1
2
6
8
4
71
15
86
Punjaub,
1852
1
2
2
At ilome.
2
2
« f Bombay,
1820
1
3
2
1
17
23
22
1
1
20
1219
214
1433
-3 Nasik,
1832
1
1
2
1
4
12
4
4
6
307
16
323
1-1 < Jiinir and Malljgaum,
1846
2
o
2
4
14
8
8
16
6
168
19
187
. Sinde Mission,
1850
1
2
5
3
p I At Home,
]
1
72
72
^ r Madras,
1815
1
2
2
3
2
13
10
32
209
9
17
26
12
264
276
540
:g Tinnevelly Districts,
1S17
12
11
1
7
6
4
412
81
522
3357
519
875
1394
286
5203
2758
79C3
c i Travancore Districts,
1816
6
8
2
3
116
6
135
1256
185
195
380
76
1775
433
2208
. 1 Telooaroo,
1841
1
4
2
16
7
29
18
2
8
10
4
113
66
169
=E L At Home,
Totals, 1
47 64
6
13i22|l4
839
127
■ 1094
5815
809
1363
2272
526
13776
4339
67
a7873|
Society for the Propagation of the
Gospel. — This society commenced its ope-
rations in Hindostan in 1818. not long after
the arrival of Bishop iliddleton, the first
bishop of Calcutta. He was at this time de-
vising a plan for the foundation at Calcutta
of a missionary college, but as the Society's
funds were pledged to already existing mis-
sions in the western world, no resource was
left except in vigorous efforts for the aug-
mentation of its income. Accordingly a
memorial was presented to the Prince Re-
gent, praying that a royal letter, authorizing
a general collection, might, as in former
reigns, be issued ; and an appeal was made
to the public for the means of entering upon
that new sphere of labor which the estab-
lishment of the Episcopate in India had
opened.
Bishop^s College. — The first great work,
therefore, to which the Society, under the
advice of the Bishop, gave itself in India,
was the foundation of a Missionary College
near Calcutta. To this the pi'oceeds of
408
HINDOSTAN.
the royal letter of 1810, amouutiiiK alto-
Rctlier to £45,747, were devoted. The col-
lege was designed on a scale to meet not
merely the present wants of the missions,
^ut such as would be required b}- a growing
church. The plan combined chapel, hall,
library, and printing-press ; and the estab-
lishment was meant to allbrd instruction,
not only in the sacred and classical languages,
but also in the principal languages and dia-
lects of India. Accommodation was to be
provided for three professors and twenty
students. A most eligible site, about four
miles below Calcutta, and on the opposite
side of the Iloogley, was presented by the
Uonorable East India Compaa(y.
The original object of the college was the
education of native, East Indian, and Euro-
pean 3outh, for the service of the church ;
but the college was some years afterwards
enlarged for the reception of law students.
Another purpose was the translation of tlie
Holy Scriptures and of the Liturgy into the
native languages of India. The Kev. W. II.
Mill. feJlow of Trinity College, Cambridge,
was appointed the first Principal, and em-
barked, in company with Rev. J. II. Alt, of
Pembroke Hall, as Professor, in August,
1820. It was a considerable time, however,
before the necessary buildings were com-
pleted ; and the actual work of education
did not commence till ^larch, 1824, which
was after the death of Bishop Middleton, to
whom the College owed its foundation, and
who had done much more than provide for
the erection of the material fabric. He had
suggested that a connection sliould be estab-
lished between Bishop's College and tlie
" School for the Orphans of Ciei-gy," in St.
John's Wood, which might generally be
looked to as a nursery of lads who might
afterwards be transplanted to Calcutta, and
be there educated for the same ministry as
that in which their fathers had served,
though it was to be exercised in a far dis-
tant land. This suggestion, which m<t with
the cordial and unanimous approval of the
Society, received also the ajijjrobation of the
governors of the Clergy Orphan School.
Three boys were, with the full consent of
their guardians, at once dedicated to the
missionary service. This connection, how-
ever, between the Orphan School and the
College, was not long continued.
As soon as the college began to send out
its alumni, missions were established in some
of tlie more imj)ortant villages to the south
of Calcutta. The lirst ones formed were at
Cossipore, Tallyguiige, Howrah. and Barri-
pflr ; and no sooner iiad the laborers entereil
into the harvest than fruit was gathered in.
Each year's report contains the account of
many baptisms of infants, and not a few
conversions of adults. Substantial stone
churches, which liad been erected at great
cost, at BarripAr and Mogra IIAt, were con-
secrated toward the end of 184G ; find at the
same time eighty persons from those two
districts were admitted to the rite of con-
firmation. The last report which has 1)een
received from Calcutta contains the follow-
ing gratifying notices: '• In the missions of
Tallygunge and Barripiir the converts con-
tinue stedfast, and numerous accessions to
the household of faith are taking place, but
have ceased to attract persecution or obtain
notice." In the circle of Mogra Il&t and
Dhanghatta, the congregations have contin-
ued steadily to increase, and other adjoining
hamlets now contain believers. The mis-
sions extend over an area of forty miles
north to south, by from twelve to twenty
miles east to west. In the summer of 1850,
the}' embraced 113 villages, 2G chapels, 7
schools, 55 readers and schoolmasters, 1,127
communicants, 2459 baptized pereous, and
1,215 catechumens.
Caicnpore. — The mission of Cawnpore, a
large cit}' about GOO miles north-west from
Calcutta, with a population of 100,000. and
an important military post, was established
in 1841. In 1845 the Society, in compliance
with the earnest recommendations of the
Bishop of Calcutta, voted the sum of £700
for the erection of substantial missionary
buildings. The two first missionaries. Rev.
Messrs. Perkins and Schleiclier, are still on
the ground, and besides the ordinary duties
of preaching they superintend a school for
boys, and an asylum for orphan girls, which
has been the means of training several Chris-
tian girls for the duties of life, and preparing
others to meet an early death.
Madron. — The missions in the south of
India, which liad originally been founded by
Frederic IV.. King of Denmark, in 1705, and
which had afterwards j)as.sed into the hands
of the Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge, were by them consigned to the
Society for the Propagation of the Gospel,
in 1825. (See p. 328). There were then in
the Madras presidency, in connection with
that society, only nine mis.-.ionary stations
and seven niissionarie.-^ — all of them tierman.
The interruption and discouragement of
missionary work occasioned by the death, in
(juick succession, of four bishops of Cal
cutta,— Middleton in 1822, lleber in 182G,
James in 182'.'. and Turner in l8ol. — tended
grievously to retard the progress of the So-
ciety's ojjerations in India, and though dur
ing this jiiriod name after name was added
to the missionary roll, no remarkable ad-
vance was made till after the subdivision of
the dioce.se of Calcutta, by the erection of
the See of M%ilnis, in 18.35. Even up to
that time, the number of missionaries in
that i)art of India had not been raised be-
yond nine ; but in 183G four were adde<l ;
and in the following year the total number
HINDOSTAN.
409
was sixteen. Bishop Corrie was removed by
death, only a little more than a year after
his return to JMadras as bishop, and again
the active direction of the missions of South-
ern India was suspended. Since that period,
however, they Imve been abundantly blessed,
more especially those in the district of Tin-
nevelly. This district had, for missionary
purposes, been for a long time dependent on
the mission of Tanjore, and all the missions
in the South had for many years been sus-
tained by the interest of the munificent
legacy of £10,000, which the devoted Swartz
had bequeathed to them.
Tinncvelly. — The first resident missionary
for TinnevcIIy was appointed in 1829 ; a
second was sent in 1834 ; and a third in
1843. It was in the next year, 1844, that
the very remarkable movement towards
Christianity took place in the mission of
Sawyerpuram. Many villages expressed their
desire of Christian instruction, and many
hundred natives were at once admitted as
catechumens.
Another mission in which wonderful pro-
gress has been made of late years, is Edeyen-
koody. For two or thi-ee j'ears little appears
to have been effected, but from 1844 to the
present time, the progress of the work has
been very observable. The number of per-
sons under Christian instruction is 2,054.
Prom 1844 to 1849 inclusive, twentj^ adults,
on an average, were baptized each year.
During the j-ear 1850, though the same strict
system of examination was maintained. 75
adults were admitted to baptism, of whom
70 were baptized in one day, in the presence
of a congregation of 800 native Christians.
Another mission,Christianagram,was open-
ed about the same time as Sawj-erpuram, and
in 1849 there were 1,579 persons under
Christian instruction.
The mission of Nazareth has also been a
ver}^ flourishing one. At the beginning of
1850 there were 2,292 baptized persons, and
1,563 more under Christian instruction.
Much has been done of late to raise the
qualifications and increase the efficiency of
the catechists and native readers. The sem-
inaries at Sawyerpuram, Yediapuram, and
Vepery, serve for the education of mission-
aries, while a school for the boarding and
education of native girls has forty-four pupils
under instruction. A seminary for theolo-
gical students, and such as may be candi-
dates for the office of catechist, has been
formed at ^ladras.
Bombay. — In the year 1839, a mission was
commenced in Bombay, and a substantial
chapel and school-houses were erected. —
Each school comprised one department for
day scholars and one for boarders. The lat-
ter has been made the means of rescuing
many orphan and other poor children from
destitution.
Guzerat. — The mission in the provmce of
Guzerat was first established in 1830, but it
met with a sad check in the early death of
its first missionary. Rev. Mr. Pcttinger.
Years elapsed before his place was filled, but
at length two missionaries were sent to
Ahmedabad, the chief city of Guzerat. But
subsequent removals weakened the mission,
and in 1850 it was transferred to the Bom-
bay Diocesan Committee.
English Baptist Missionary Society. —
(For an account of the origin of this Society
and of its mission to India, see Baptist Mis-
sionary Society.) In INIarch, 1793, Messrs.
Carey and Thomas attended a farewell service
of great solemnity at Leicester, and soon
afterwards i^roceeded to Ryde, in the Isle of
Wight, and embarked on board a ship for
India. The Captain, however, was informed
that he must not proceed with ministers who
were unlicensed by the East India Company,
and he retui-ned to the shore. Mr. Carey
hastened to London in the deepest distress,
and even Andrew Fuller quailed at the news,
and said, ''We are all undone." Mr. Thomas
was more hopeful and cheerful. The inter-
val before the sailing of another vessel was
employed in renewed efforts to persuade
Mrs. Carey to accompan}'- her husband (she
having steadily refused,) and with success.
This joyful result indicated to Mr. Carey the
design of Providence in their disappoint-
ment.
In June, 1793, they all embarked in the
Kron Princessa Maria, a Danish East India-
man, and on the morning of sailing one of
them addressed a London minister, saying,
'■ The ship is come, the signal made, the guns
are fired, and we are going with a fine fair
wind. Farewell, my dear brethren and sis-
ters, farewell. May the God of Jacob be
ours and yours, by sea and land, for time
and eternity. Most aflectionately adieu,"
They had a prosperous voyage of about five
months, and arrived in Balasore roads on
the 7th of November, and on the 10th went
on shore.
After the arrival of the missionaries in
Bengal, tlie}^ were much perplexed respecting
a place of residence, and after three weeks
they proceeded to Bandell, a Portuguese set-
tlement about thirty miles from Calcutta.
Not finding it expedient to remain long here,
Mr. Carey, with onlj' his own family and a
native guicle, removed to a considerable dis-
tance into the interior, and found a resting
place and a field of labor at CollahtuUah,
Here he erected an humble dwelling, and en-
tered upon the work of teaching a wild and
fierce people, from whom, and from the tigers
and other wild animals that roamed through
those forests, tlie rest of the population had
fled to a distance. But this proved to be
but a temporary field, for another call, which
to the mind of Mr. Carey was imperative,
410
HINDOSTAN.
invited him to a place called >rudnabatty.
about 2C>0 miles north of Calcutta. Owiiip;
to unavoidable causes, the investment of
money taken out for Mr. Carey's immediate
support was lost, and he vras left in a strange
land with no means of subsistence: added
to this was personal illness, the sickness of
his family, and the irreligion of the Euro-
peans by whom he was surrounded, all which
pressed' heavily upon his spirits. In this
condition, early in 1794, a gentleman who
afterwards filled some of the most important
stations in the government of India, oJlered
to Messrs. Carey and Thomas the superin-
tendence of two indigo factories, which he
was about to establish in the vicinity of
Malda. This opened the way for the remo-
val of all pecuniary difficulties, and also
promised the most beneficial results by pla-
cing each of the missionaries in the midst
of more than a thousand people to whom
they would have access. They therefore ac-
cepted the proposal, and Mr. Carey fixed his
residence at Mudnabatty, about thirty miles
from Malda, and Mr. Thomas settled at Moy-
pauldiggy. sixteen miles further north. Soon
after reaching his new home Mr. Carey was
visited with alliiction. in the death of one of
his children. Of this event Mr. Carey
writes, January, 1795 : ''When my dear boy
die<l, I could not prevail upon any one to
make him a c(»tHn. though we had carpenters
in our own emj>loy : and it was with diffi-
culty that I engaged four Mussulmen to dig
a grave for him. We went seven or eight
miles for two persons to carry the ])ody to
the place of interment, but in vain, and my
wife and 1 liad agreed to do it ourselves, when
a lad who had lost caste, and our mater (ser-
vant), who performed the most servile offices,
were induced to relieve us of this most pain-
ful service." The four Mussulmen lost caste,
and all the people in the village were forbid-
den to eat, drink, or smoke witli tl\em.
On the 1st of November, 179.'), tlie mis-
sionaries formed a church at Mudnabatty,
consisting of themselves and two Knglish-
men. In 1790, Mr. John Fountain was sent
out to reinforce the mission. In the early
part of 1797, Messrs. Carey and Thomas
made an excursion to Hootan, preacliing
Christ in many places where his name had
never before been heard. During the year
1798 a school was established, an<l a i>rinting-
press was set up at Mudnabatty for the print-
ing of the Scriptures, the translation of
which was nearly comjjletcd.
In April, 1799, ftjur missionaries, Messrs.
Ward. Hrunsdon, (Jrant, and Marshman,
sailed for India, where they arrived on the
12th of the following October. They pro-
ceeded to Seramj)ore, a village on the banks
of the Hoo^iy. fifteen miles fro!n Calcutta,
de.scribod by Mr. (Jrant as "a beautiful little
town, and esteemed th<' "lo-i b'-allliy in all
India." It was a Danish settlement, and
very much the resort of decayed tradesmen,
and gentlemen who had been imsuccessful in
business at Calcutta. It contained about 50
English houses, and was inhaliitedby Danes,
English, Scots, Germans, Greeks, Armenians,
Irish, Bengalees, and Portuguese. They
waited at an inn a few days, expecting the
arrival of Mr. Carey, when one of their mnn-
ber, Mr. Grant, suddenly sickened and died.
In November. Messrs. Ward and Fountain
went to Mudnabatty, to consult with Mr.
Carey respecting the removal of the whole
mission family to Serampore. The factory
at Mudnabatty liad declined, and added to
this were other considerations of great force,
and the removal was determined upon.
Mr. Carey arrived at Serampore on the
10th of January, 1800, and was kindly re-
ceived by the Governor. They purchased a
large house in the middle of the town, situ-
ated by the river side, with a large piece of
grovmd walled round, a garden at the bottom
and a pool of water in the centre.
On the 17th of Mai-ch, 1800, is recorded
at Serampore: "On this memorable day, the
first page of the New Testament was com-
posed for printing in Bengalee." Immediate-
ly upon their settlement at this place, they
commenced a system of itineracy, and going
out, generally two and two, they preached
and held discussions with the natives. On
the 24th of April, the missionaries united
together as a church, Carey being chosen
pastor, and Fountain .and Marshman deacons.
May 20, they began to print the first sheet
of the New Testament; 1700 copies were
printed on Patna paper, and .SOO on English.
A Bengalese school of 40 children was also
in operation.
In June, this missionary circle were called
to a severe alTliction in the death of Mr.
Fountain. He died at Diuagepore. at the
age of thirty-three. About the same time
Mr. Thoma.s fell into a state of temporary
insanity, which deprived the mission for a
time of his services. On the 22d of Decem-
ber, five individuals, four natives atid a son
of Mr. Carey, appeared for baptism and
church conununion, and on the 29th Mr.
Carey writes, " Yesterday was a day of great
joy. I had the happiness to desecrate the
Gunga, by baptizing the first Hindoo, Krish-
no, and my son Felix." In January. 1801,
two other natives were baptized and received
to the church. The 7th of February was
observed as a day of thanksgiving, it being
the day on which" they finished the composi-
tion of the New Testament, which had occu-
picfl nine months. About this time. Krishno,
self-moved, erected a house for God opposite
his own, and Mr. Carey preached in it to
about twenty natives. This was the first
native jilace of worship in Bengal.
In the spring of this year. Serampoa*,
HINDOSTAN.
411
which had been under the Danish govern-
ment, quietly passed into the hands of the
English, -vrithout the firing of a gun. Mr.
Carey writes, '-Seramporc is in the hands of
the English, but we have nothing to fear. I
was appointed Bengalee and Sanscrit pro-
fessor in the college of Fort William, by
Lord Wellesley, expressly under the char-
acter of a missionary. I have now gone
through one term." The year 1801 was
mournfully distinguished by the death of
two more of the missionaries — Mr. Bruns-
don, at the age of 23, and Mr. Thomas, the
early coadjutor of Carey.
In May, 1802, Rev. John Chamberlain
sailed for India, with his wife, by way of
America, and reached Serampore on the
27th of January, 1803. He added great
strength to the mission, both by his pious
zeal and his learning. His progress in ac-
quiring the language was so rapid, that in
one year he could speak the Bengalee with
a facility and accuracy that equaled any of
his cotemporaries.
The English Baptist Mission in India is
now brought down to the early part of 1804,
a period of ten years from its commence-
ment. During this time, amid many changes.
Borrows, and discouragements, the missiona-
ries had penetrated the regions of idolatry,
and gained a footing for the Gospel by the
breaking of caste ; they had obtained a vic-
tory almost as great over the language, and
had produced the New Testament in Ben-
galee ; they had established a printing-press,
by which the translations were capable of in-
definite multiplication, and by means of which,
also, tracts or other works could be put into the
most extensive circulation ; they had secured
the conversion of many natives, some of whom
were becoming valuable helpers in the diffu-
sion of the Gospel ; they had opened schools
for native youth of both sexes ; and finally,
they had, by their letters and journals, given
a powerful impulse to the spirit of missions at
home. In view of these results, and the fact,
also, that this mission was prior to any other,
either English or American, in India, it will
be admitted that a degree of success had
been realized far beyond what could have
been reasonably anticipated.
On the 9th of January, 1804, Mr. Cham-
berlain left Serampore to visit Saugur Island,
whither thousands were daily flocking to
their annual poojah, or festival. He was ac-
companied in this important journey by Fe-
lix Carey, Krishno, and another' convert
named Bhyrub. Some details in regard to
the island in question will shed light both
upon the shocking and degrading customs
of the Hindoos, and upon the obstacles
which the Gospel had to encounter in that
quarter.
The island of Gunga Saugur is situated at
the extreme point of laud where the great
western, or holiest branch of the Ganges
unites its waters with those of the Indian
Ocean; and is so called from the Sanscrit
appellation sagor. or sea, and ganga^ or river,
the latter term being emphatically applied
to denote the Ganges, the chief of rivers.
The island is a flat, swampy, and cheerless
shore, but it is the scene of one of the most
celebrated places of pilgrimage in India.
Its pecidiar sanctity arises from its situation
at the junction,, or point of confluence of the
Ganges and the ocean, where the purifying
virtue of the waters is believed to be
mightil)^ increased. Here there is a ruin-
ous temple, erected in honor of the great
sage of Kapila, the founder of one of the
chief schools of Indian philosophy, who is
here reverenced as a god. Twice in the
year, vast crowds of Hindoos resort to this
temple and neighborhood, to perform obse-
quies for the good of their deceased ances-
tors, and to practice various ablutions in the
waters of such efficacy. "The reverence
with which the Ganges is regarded," says
Dr. .Duff", "almost exceeds imagination. At
the January festival at Gunga Saugur, hun-
dreds of mothers were accustomed to throw
their unconscious infants into the turbid
waters; and they bewailed the sacrifice as
lost and the gods unpropitiated, if they com-
missioned not the sharks and other monsters
of the deep to crush and devour them before
their eves." Mr. Chamberlain says, Jan.
13th, 1804, " Words fail to give a true de-
scription of this scene. Here an imme^ely
populous city has been raised in a very few
days, full of streets, lanes, bazaars, &c., and
crowds upon crowds of men, women, and
children, high and low, rich and poor, are
seen bathing in the water, and worshiping
Gunga. The mud and water of this place
are esteemed very holy, and are taken hun-
dreds of miles on the shoulders of men.
The lowest computation of the people here
is one lac, or 100,000, and perhaps two lacs
is nearer the truth." To these deluded mul-
titudes Mr. Chamberlain preached the Gos-
pel, and gave books and tracts as opportuni-
ties occurred.
In the spring of this year Mr. Chamber-
lain was stationed at Cutwa, seventy-five
miles north of Calcutta. His wife was his
only companion in this dark region, and of
her he was bereaved in the following No-
vember. Fourteen months later he married
Mrs. Grant, widow of that lamented mis-
sionary. But she also died in a few months,
and he was left to mourn under a second be-
reavement. But notwithstanding his trials,
he pursued his work with unremitting dili-
gence. In reviewing his labors, Mr. Cham-
berlain says, "It is now five years since
Providence fixed my lot here. What can I
write of the works of God? Millions of
the heathen have heard the glorious report,
412
HINDOSTAN.
either from i)reachinf!;, or from the distribu-
tion of upwariJ.s of one hundred thousand
tracts, and many Imndrods of the Scrip-
tures. Some read tlie Scriptures, some the
tracts, many converse on these things. Tiie
leaven is at work, though as yet its opera-
tions are in silence. At present converts
are few." Amid all his other hibors Mr.
Chamberlain kept an occasional school of
about 40 scholars, for wliose benefit lie had
translated Dr. Watts"s Catechism and a few
hymns. lie also made several visits to Uer-
hampore, a military station 45 miles from
Cutwa. preaching: the Gospel to the soldiers
with so much success that he jrathered a
church there of twenty-four members.
In September, 180'J. Mr. Chamberlain was
married to his third wife, Miss Underwood,
with whom he had been acquainted in Eng-
land, and who was one of the first to direct
his mind to the missionary service. About
this time, by advice of liis brethren, he re-
moved to Agra. On account of his facility
in acquiring languages, his acquaintance with
the original Scriptures, especially the Jle-
brew, aTid his tried zeal and experience in
the missionary work, they considered him
as exceedingly suited to engage in a mission
where at least two versions of the Scriptures,
tJ»e Hindou and the Sikh, would require to
be carefully examined and improved.
During the five years through wliich we
have followeff Mr. Chamberlain, the In-ethren
had Jjeen steadily pursuing their work at
SeriOTiitoro and oilier places. In the early
part of IHO"), four additional missionaries
from England arrived in IJengal, having
sailed by wa}' of America. In January of
this year a new place of worship was opened
at Calcutta, 4,800 rupees having been con-
tributed for the purpose. In dune following
they built a new printing office, with rormi
for three presses and a bindery. During
this year fifteen natives were a<lded to the
cluu-cli, and some lMwo[ieans. Some idea
may be formed of the laliors of the indifa-
tigable Carey, from a letter of his to a
friend in England, in which lie say.s, " You
may perhai)S wonder that I write no more
letters, but when you see wliat I am engaged
in jou will cease to wonder. I transhitej
into IJengalee ; and from Sanscrit into Eng-
lish. Every proof slieet of the Bengalee
and Mahratta Scriptures, the Sanscrit (Iram-
niar, and the Ramayunee, must go three
times at least througli my hands. A dic-
tionary of the Sanscrit goes once, at least,
through my hands. I have written and
printe<l a second edition of my Hengalee
prammar, wliolly wr)rke<l over and greatly
enlarged, and a Mahratta gramnnir ; and
collected materials for a -Maliratta dictionary.
Besides this. 1 ])reach twice a week, fre-
quently thrice, and attend U])on collegiate
duties. I do not mention this because 1
think ray work a burthen, — it is a real plea-
sure,— but to show that my not writing
many letters is not because I neglect my
brethren, or wish them to cease writinir to
me.
In the missionary journals of this period
particular mention is made of the death of
two native converts of distinction. — Petum-
ber Shingce, and Krishno Presaud ; and
deeply interesting obituary notices arc given.
In 180G, and onward for two or three
years, the missionaries experienced severe
trials from the ojiposition of the Indo-
British government, which was determined
to conciliate the Hindoos by protecting their
idolatrous forms of worship against all inter-
ference from the missionaries. Prejudiced and
infidel Europeans circulated the most fiilse
and injurious reports, and kindled in Britain
the fire of hatred to the missionary enter-
prise, on the ground that it was fraught with
danger to their eastern possessions. Rev.
Andrew Fuller was at once looked to as the
most suitable person, from his station, talent,
and familiarity with the subject, to repel
these assaults, and with characteristic zeal
and power he met the exigency. His first
])ro(hiction \\iis " An Apology for the late
Christian Missions to India, in three parts."
The first section was issued sejjarutel}- in
1807, and so nearly did its work that the
court at the India House dismissed the com-
plaints, and refused to interfere with the
propagation of Christianity in India. The
two other sections followed in quick succes-
sion, and 80 thoroughly silenced the adver-
saries of missions, that no effective opposi-
tion was ever afterwards made. The (Quar-
terly Review, in this controversy, rendered
valuable assistance to the missionarv cause.
At the close of 1800, Mr. AVard remarks,
in a review of the mission, "' that from the
year 1788, when Thomas began to converse
with the natives in Bengalee, to the end of
1800, when Kri.shno Avas baptized, the work
of God in Bengal made Imt little apparent
progress. Much preparatory work, how-
ever, wa.s performed; but from the time
when this, the first native who had ever
publicly renounced caste in Bengal, entereil
the church, the word of the Lord seemed
to have a nmre free course, and was glorified.
The church at Serampore had now received
100 members, by the various modes of ad-
mission, in its two branches of Serampore
and Calcutta. The number baptized in all
the churches in 1809, amounted to sixty-
seven ; two or three only having been sus-
pended or excluded. The cost of the
chapel at Calcutta, amounting to about
30,000 rupees, was nearly paid ; several na-
tive itinerants had beeii sent forth, and a
valuable mission j)roperty had been created.
Besides the labors of brethren at Cutwa.
Berhampore, &c., a door of entrance liad
HINDOSTAN.
413
been opened in Burmah, and important pre-
paratory measures undertaken."
The state of the translations at this date
_1809— is given by Mr. Ward as follows :
" In Bengalee, the whole Bible was printed
and published in five volumes, in Sanscrit,
the New Testament was published, and part
of the Pentateuch printed. In Ori.ssa, the
New Testament and the practical books
were printed and published, and a consider-
able part of the prophetical books printed.
In Ilindostanee, the New Testament was
printed to the end of Romans. In INIahrat-
ta the New Testament was finished as far as
the ;niddle of Acts. In the Sikh language,
the New Testament was put to press. Be-
sides the progress at press, the greater part
of the whole Bible was translated into Hin-
dostanee, the New Testament and part of
the Pentateuch into the Sikh, the New Tes-
tament and nearly all the practical books
into the IMahratta ; the New Testament and
part of the Pentateuch into the Kurnata and
Telinga ; and the blocks for nearly the whole
of iNIatthew were cut and some sheets of
the first part thrown off for revision, in
Chinese." "Thus," continues Mr. Ward,
"mountains of difficulty, common to first
efforts, have been removed ; formidable at-
tempts to overturn the work have been
rendered abortive ; facilities of the most im-
portant nature opened to us ; a number of
persons acquainted with the languages have
been raised up, and are at their posts ; ac-
cess to the people of Bengal, Bootan, Orissa,
Burmah. and China, obtained by a knowl-
edge of' their languages ; the Holy Scrip-
tures are distributing or are to be distributed
among all these, and other nations, in their
own tongue ; the printing office belonging to
the mission contains Sanscrit, Ilindostanee,
Arabic, Persian, licngalee, Orissa, Telinga,
Sikh, Mahratta, Greek, Hebrew, and Eng-
hsh tvpes, besides presses, and every other
article necessary for printing the sacred vol-
ume. And now, brethren, has not God
completely refuted the notion that all at-
tempts to promote the Gospel among the
Hindoos are vain 1 This happy degree of
success, which surprises even us who are on
the ground, has been gained within the space
of nine years, for it is no more since the
baptism of the first Hindoo."
In 1810 the missionaries arranged their
labors under the specific designation of
'• The United Missiomaries in India," com-
prehending the Bengal, tlie Burmau, the
Orissa, the Bootan, and the Hindostan.
This afforded a convenient metliod of keep-
ing in distinct view the information they com-
municated respecting their diversified opera-
tions.
The Bengal mission included five stations,
Seramporeand Calcutta being considered
one, Dinagepore and Saddamahl another,
Goamalty the third, Outwa the fourth, and
Jessore the fifth. Dinagepore is about 260
miles north of Calcutta ; Cutwa 75 miles
north north-west ; and Jessore, 60 miles
north ; Goamalty was soon abandoned for a
more eligible station, called English-bazar,
in the Poorniya district.
The Bnrman mission had not yet made
any considerable advances, the labors being
of a preparatory kind. The same was true
of the Orissa and Bootan missions.
The Ilindostanee mission consisted of two
stations, Patna and Agra. The former is a
large city, 300 miles north-west of Calcutta,
and the latter is reached by a journey of a
thousand miles up the Ganges. The mis-
sionaries. Chamberlain and Peacock, reached
this place in May 1811. Mr. Chamberlain
was soon called to great affliction in the
death of two daughters, one of whom could
read and converse in three languages, and
gave decided evidences of piety. A few
months later he was called to part with his
only remaining child.
In 1811 the number of members in all the
churches exceeded 300, one-third of whom
had been added within little more than a
year ; and among these it was said that the
proportion of members who were qualified
for public labor, was much greater than the
average in the British churches. Fifteen
years'before this time the church in Bengal
numljered four members, and it had doubled
six times, or once in three j-ears.
On the 11th of March, 1812, the mission
printing house was entirely destroyed by
fire. The building, which was 200 feet long,
was a total loss ; and the articles consumed
were, upwards 1,400 reams of English
paper ; 4,4G0 pounds of English types ; a
doable font of Greek, and a small one of
Hebrew ; twelve fonts of types in the differ-
ent languages of India, among which were
a font of Persian, worth 3,000 rupees, a
valuable font of Arabic, and a double font
of Nagree, containing 1,600 lbs. weight ; all
the cases, frames, and other printing uten-
sils ; books in various languages, to the
amount of 5,000 rupees ; manuscripts to the
value of 7,000 rupees, among which were a
Sanscrit dictionary, in five folio volumes, and
the materials for a Polyglot dictionary of all
the languages derived from the Sanscrit.
There were burnt also more than fifty-five
thousand sheets printed off but not folded,
among which were seven sheets, of a thou-
sand copies each, of Mr. Martyn's Hindo-
stanee New Testament in the Persian char-
acter ; five sheets, five thousand each, of the
Tamil New Testament ; four sheets of the
Calcutta Bible Society's Report, &c. A
paper mill, and some presses and materials
in a building adjoining the printing office,
were saved. The loss amounted to nearly
£10,000, no part of which was insured. But
414
HINDOSTAN.
they recovereil from the ruins the punches
and melted metal, and immediately com-
pienced recasting the tjpe, and in about a
fortnijrht. with the presses they had saved,
were able to renew the work of printing in
<jne language. In a month or two the fonts
were so far restored that the printing of the
Scriptures was resumed on a large scale, and
the presses were going day and night. This
eudden rising from what seemed an over-
wlielming misfortune, occasioned the remark
in a Calcutta paper, that "' zeal and perse-
verance are qualities that happily distinguish
the character of the missionaries ; their
ardor, instead of being repressed, derives a
new impulse from difficulties and misfor-
tunes."
No sooner did the sad intelligence of the
fire at Serampore arrive in England, than
the Christian public hastened to repair the
loss. '■ A strong sensation," writes Mr.
Fuller, "was felt throughout the kingdom,
not only in our own denomination, but
among Christians of every name, each
vieing with the other to repair the loss."
The entire sum required was raised in the
short space of fifty days, and even after this
contributions continued with unabated lib-
erality, lint the greatest advantage was
the powerful impulse given to the mission,
by rendering it more generally known, and
producing a simultaneous feeluig of interest
in all denominations.
In ()cto))er, seven months after the con-
flagration. Mr. Carey writes to Mr. Fuller,
that though his manuscript of the Sanscrit
translation had been destroyed, yet he had
re-translated the whole of it, and had begun
new translations in the Xe[)alese ; the Push-
too, or that of the Affghans ; the IJiblochee,
which was spoken on the west shore of the
Indus, towards Persia ; and the Maldivo
Islands. Mr. Chamberlain had also trans-
lateil the Gospels into Brij-Hliusha. .Such
was the surprising courage and energy of
these men.
At the close of 1812, the general state of the
mission was encouraging. A work of grace
was proceeding in the -Itli regiment, then
in tlie fort at Calcutta, from which eleven
l>ad made a public profession' of religion
during the year. Nearly .seventy had been
ailded to the church at Seranipora and Cal-
cutta during the same time, and nearly
ever)- native c^ipalilc of speaking, itinerated
on the Sabbatli through the neighboring
towns. About this time Mr. (now Dr.)
Carey, wrote to Mr. Fuller, that there was
a pentral spirit of inquiry about the Gospel
throughout the country, and that (,'hristians,
eithtr Europeans or natives, were to be
found in tviry direction. He mentioned
five natives of high caste, near Serampore.
who had recently been bajiti/.td, but who
bad couie to the knowledge of the truth
without any communication with the mis-
sionaries. The Bibles and tracts with which
they had met, had been the instruments of
their conversion.
Early in 1813, there was a demonstration
of liostility from the government, and
several of the missionaries were threatened
with expulsion. One was actually compelled
to leave in haste for England. But the
evil was of very limited extent, and the
scene of the persecution, Calcutta and the
vicinity, " blossomed like the garden of the
Lord." In Calcutta there was a congrega-
tion of 120 attentive hearers. Thirty had
joined the church, and many others were
about to do so, from the 24tli regiment.* In
tlie schools there were 353 boys and 117 girls,
making a total of 470. This year Dr. Carey
was permitted to rejoice over the conversion
of his third son, Jabez, who at once devoted
himself to the missionary work ; so that now
he had three sons, Felix, "William, and Jabez,
engaged in preaching the Gospel to the hea-
then. In regard to the translations at this
time. Dr. Carey writes, " We are engaged
in translating the Bible into twenty-one
languages, including the Bengalee, which is
finished. We have obtained a person to as-
sist in the translation of the Scriptures into
the Kassai language. This is an independent
nation of mountaineers, lying between the
eastern border of Bengal and the northern
border of the Burman dominions. AVe have
also obtained help for the Sindh and Wuch
languages. The country of Sindh lies on the
east bank of the Indus, from the sea about
500 miles ; Wuch then continues along the
same shore, till it joins the Punjaub. I be-
lieve we have now all the languages in that
part, except that of Kutcli, which I hope
will soon be within our reach. We have
not 3'et been aVile to secure the languages of
Xepala, Bootan, Munipoora, and Siani, and
about five or six tribes of mountaineers;
besides these I am not acquainted with any
language on the continent of India into
which the word of God is not under transla-
tion."
At the|)ubhc disputation of the students
of the college of Fort William, before the
Right Honorable Lord Miiito, in Sept., 1813,
that gentleman after alluding to the literary
labors of the missiAiaries, concludes by say-
ing, '• I profess a very sincere pleasure in
bringing the literary merits of Mr. Marsh-
man and the other reverend members of the
Serampore mission, to the notice of the pub-
lic, and in bearing my testimony to the
great and extraordinary labors which con-
stancy and energy in "their numerous and
various occupations, have enabled this
modest and respectable community to ac-
complish. I am not less gratified by the op-
portunity which their literary arhievements
afford, of expressing my regard for the ex-
HINDOSTAN.
415
emplary worth of their Hves, and the benefi-
cent principle which distinguishes and pre-
sides in the various useful estabhshments
which they have formed, and which are con-
ducted by themselves."
The mission of the English Baptists in
India now comprehended ten stations in
Bengal ; three in the northern part — Goa-
malty or Malda, Dinagepore, and Silhet ;
five in the middle — Berhampore, Cutwa,
Vans-variya, Serampore, and Calcutta, and
two in the south-east — Jessore and Chitta-
gong. Employed in these twenty stations
there were twelve missionaries who had
been sent from Europe, twelve who were
Europeans by birth, and thirteen who were
descendants of Europeans, and others who
conversed in English. Adding to these the
native laborers, made the aggregate number
sixty-three. They preached in ten lan-
guages, and were preparing the Scriptures
in many more. Of the number of churches
exceeding twenty members, there were
eight in all ; and of the smaller churches,
thirteen.
During this year, 1813, the question of
the renewal of the charter of the East In-
dia Company came up in England, which
gave occasion for the friends of missions to
apply for a clause to be inserted in the char-
ter, tolerating and protecting Christian mis-
sionaries. This object called into action the
powerful pens of Robert Hall and Andrew
Fuller, and the eifort was successful, though
not to the full extent desii'ed.
The year 1814 was saddened by the death
of Mr. 'Fuller. lie had been the first olBcer,
the earliest and best advocate, and the main
pillar of the Society, for more than twenty-
two years, and his loss was deeply felt by
the friends of missions in England and in
India,
During the years 1815, 1816, and 1817,
upwards of four hundred persons were in-
troduced into the mission churches in India.
Adding these to previous accessions, the
number of baptized individuals at the differ-
ent stations in seventeen years, the first one
having been baptized in 1800, amounted to
nearly twelve hundred. And besides these,
not less than 10,000 children, of all descrip-
tions, had been in some way brought under
Christian instruction. About this time, the
mission was strengthened by a fresh acces-
sion of laborers from England, among whom
were Mr. William Yates, Eustice Carey, (ne-
phew of the venerable doctor,) Mr. Lawson,
and Messrs. Randall and Penney, with their
wives.
About eight miles north-west of Calcutta
was the military station of Dum Dum. A
neat place of worship was erected there, and
a distinguished native, Ram Mohun, preached
in Bengalee and Hindoo. Success attended
this eflbrt, and in the course of 1817 nine
were baptized, six natives and three Eng-
lish soldiers, and added to the little church,
then amounting to fourteen members. The
system of itinerating at Cutwa was con-
ducted on a large scale. Fourteen natives
were employed, some to preach, others \f)
read and distribute the Scriptures,
In 1818 was begun the erection of a col-
lege at Serampore, on a scale of great mag-
nificence. The buildings were designed to
cover eight acres of ground, and to cost
£10,000. The plan of such a literary insti-
tution, however, was deemed by some im-
practicable, and its ultimate failure justified
their apprehensions. A much better and
more approved object was the establishment
of a savings' bank at Serampore ; and about
the same time the formation of an agricul-
tural and horticultural society, which was
patronized by the governor-general and most
of the opulent natives.
The period from 1818 to 1827, although
filled up with arduous and successful labors,
is marked by no events which appear to re-
quire an extended notice. One of the se-
verest afflictions to which the mission was
called during this time, was the death of
Mr. Chamberlain. Having declined in health,
he sailed for England with the hope of re-
covery, but died on the passage.
It was during the period now under no-
tice, that a controversy arose between the
Serampore mission and the parent society,
which resulted in placing the two upon a
separate and independent basis. The na-
ture and grounds of this separation will be
understood from the following "Agreement,"
which was published March 23, 1827.
'• Several years ago, it was officially an-
nounced, that as the missionaries at Seram-
pore had been enabled so far to exceed the
expectations of their first supporters, as
largely to pi'omote the propagation of the
Gospel by funds which they had themselves
originated, a material change had resulted in
relation to the society from which they
sprang ; in consequence of which the breth-
ren of that station acted independently in
the management of their concerns. Subse-
quent experience has shown that the con-
tinued operation of the cause alluded to,
has occasioned considerable embarrassment
in the practical arrangements of the Society
and their brethren at Serampore. The
means of obviating this difficulty have been
seriously considered in a special meeting of
the committee assembled to confer with Dr.
Marshman on the subject, which has termi-
nated in the full conviction that in present
circumstances it is most expedient that the
Society at home and the missionaries at Se-
rampore, should be publicly understood to
be two distinct and independent missionary
bodies."
The simple fact to be gathered from the
416
HINDOSTAN.
foregoinp Btatcment, is, that the missiona-
ries at Scramporc, holdinj;; and using as they
did in the mission scirice, a large amount
of property which they had accumulated
without the aid of friends at home, refused
to render to the parent society a strict ac-
count of their pecuniary transactions. —
Hence the necessity of a friendly agreement
to become two bands.
During the next ten years, from 1827 to
1837, the Baptist Society and the Serara-
pore mission conducted their operations
separately, and they must therefore be kept
distinct in the present notices.
The stations immediately connected with
the Serampore mission at the commence-
ment of this period, were, besides Seram-
pore itself the following nine. viz. : Jessore,
Dacca, Chittigonc:. Arracan, Dinagepore,
Benares, Allahabad, Futteghur, and Delhi.
The three kinds of agency employed in con-
nection with these stations were: 1st. Na-
tives, through whom it was believed the
Gospel would ultimately obtain its greatest
diflusion ; 2d. Asiatics, or those who were
born in the country of European parents, at
least on one side, and who could be support-
ed with about half the sum required for a
missionary from England. Of this class
were Thompson, Fernandez. Smith, ^lackin-
tosh, and others. 3d. Europeans, whose
knowledge and influence were of the high-
est importance, when exerted in connection
with bands of three, four, or five Asiatic
or native agents. Native schools for the in-
.struction of boys had now been established
about ten years ; and recently the education
of female children, hitherto supposed to be
impracticable, had been introduced. In Se-
rampore there were thirteen schools for
girls, four or five at Dacca, and at least three
at Chittagong. The children included the
daughters of Mohammedans as well as Hin-
doos, who received instruction with the
greatest readiness and pleasure ; and in all
the schools, male and female, the Scriptures
were introduced.
Serampore. — At this important post were
Drs. Carey and Marshman, J. C. >iarshman.
Mack, and Swan. During 1H27. eleven per-
sons had been received into the church.
The college funds maintained 5S students at
the close of the same year, and Dr. Carey
lectured twice a week as theological profes-
sor. The report of the college in 182"J re-
ferred to several grounds of encouragement.
A charter had })een obtained ; the progress
of the students liad been good, and several
had entered on the work of iini)arting a
knowledge of the Scrijjtures to the natives
of India. Mr. Ward had rai.sed a fund in
Europe and America of a>)out 50.000 rupees,
and a libniry of nearly AjOOO volumes had
been collected. It po.s8essed a philosophical
apparatus, the largest in the country.
In 1829, three new stations were entered
upon, viz. : Goamalty, in Assam, 240 miles
north-east of Serampore ; Barripore, 31
miles south, and Burisal, 140 miles eastward
of Serampore ; thus making twelve stations
in connection with Serampore. An<l it is
an interesting fact, that all these stations
were occupied by men who were brought to
the knowledge of the tnith in India itself.
In May. 1831. Dr. Carey writes in an affect-
ing strain, saying that his race was nearly
run, being on the eve of seventy, and much
weakened by repeated bilious attacks. He
was able, however, to resume his labors again.
During this year, seventeen joined the
churcli, fifteen of whom were natives of
Bengal, and five of these were members of
the college. In June, 1832, Dr. Carey
brought the last edition of liis Bengalee
Scriptures through the press. In a letter,
April, 1833, one of the missionaries says,
• Our venerable Dr. Care}' is in excellent
health, and takes his turn in all our public
exercises. Just forty years ago he admin-
istered the Lord's Supper to the church in
Leicestt-r. and then started on the morrow
to embark for India." The entire Scriptures
of the Old and New Testaments had at this
time been printed and circulated in seven
different languages ; the New Testament had
been printed in twenty-three languages
more ; the Pentateuch, and other parts of
the Old Testament, had been printed and
circulated in several languages into which
the New Testameiit had been completed ;
and portions of the Scriptures had been
printed in ten others — making in all forty
languages ; so that upwards of 212.000 vol-
umes of the Divine word, in forty different
languages, had issued from the Serampore
press during thirty j-ears. "If," say the
missionaries. " we reckon the Chinese popu-
lation according to the most moderate compu-
tation, at one hundred and fifty millions. these
languages embrace the vernacular tongues
of two hundred and seventy millions of ira-
mortjil beings." Besides the Scriptures,
many other works ha<l been printed at the
Serampore press, such as grammars, diction-
aries, histories, tracts. Ac, so that literature
as well as religion was greatly indebted to
these distinguished translators.
On the nth of June, 1M34, Dr. Carey, the
original mover of this vast work, closed his
earthly labors, at the age of 73. In his last
will was found this highly characteristic pro-
vision: "I direct, that before every other
thing, all my lawful debts may be paid ;
that my funeral be as plain as possible ; that
I may be buried by the side of my second
wife," Charlotte Eniilia Carey ; and that the
following inscription, and nothing more, nmy
be cut on the stone which commemorates her,
either above or Ix-Iow. as there may be room,
viz. :
HINDOSTAN.
417
" William Carey,
Born August 17, 1761, died—
' A -n-retcbed, poor, and helpless 'worm.
On thy kind arms I fall.' "
Jessore. — During 1827, this station was
in a discouraging state, except that the
schools for boys were prosperous. In 1828,
there were only twenty members in the
church, and ever)- one of them were cither
suspended or excluded. In 1820, eight were
restored, and two added. There were four
schools, with an average attendance of 176
scholars. In 1832, threo more were added
to the church ; but the mission at this place
continued to bo of secondary importance,
except as the centre of extensive itinerant
labors. The district was estimated to con-
tain about 1,200,000 inhabitants, Mohamme-
dans and Hindoos.
Dacca. — This station suffered a great loss
in 1827, in the death of two of its mission-
aries, Mr. D'Cruz and Mr. Leonard. In
1828, the church was reduced to four by re-
movals, but others were added from time
to time. In 1829, the English congregation,
which had almost disappeared, was formed
anew. In 1830 there were six native schools,
containing between five and six hundred
scholars. Widows, as well as other native
females, were members of these schools, and
permitted to read at public examinations,
instead of burning on funeral piles. This
being an important military post, the officers
and soldiers benefitted by "the labors of the
missionaries, and some of them became
members of the church. The commander
of a native regiment invited preaching in
the hall of his own house.
Chittagons; 340 miles east of Calcutta,
was occupied by a faithful missionary, Mr.
Johannes, who superintended three native
female schools, and supported a school him-
self of thirty boys. There was also a na-
tive boys' school of sixty pupils. Mr. Jo-
hannes also conducted public worship in
Bengalee and English, and preached in the
market-places and streets. Another female
school was subsequently established, and
frequent additions were made to the church.
Eoman Catholics often attended the English
service, and gave good attention to the word,
which led the missionary to say, " I have
been now twelve years in Chittagong, and
never felt that encouragement 1 do now,
when I see Roman Catholics searching the
Scriptures."
Arracan. — The missionary in Arracan
was ]\Ir. J. C. Fink, assisted by five native
preachers. They occupied a very extensive
field, on the east of the Bay of Bengal, and
south of Chittagong, among a mixed popu-
lation of Mugs, ]\Iohammedans and Bur-
mese. Two services in English were main-
tained on the Sabbath, and a permanent
chapel was opened for the Mug congrega-
27
tion. Natives were from time to time added
to the church, and a native Arracaneee was
ordained as a missionary. He had been an
idolatrous priest,
. Dinagepore.— The church in this place in
1827 numbered ninety-two. In 1828 a few
were added, and in 1829 three whole Mus-
sulman fiimilies, consisting of seventeen per-
sons, renounced their idols and joined the
Christism church. Ignatius Fernandez died
in December, 1829. He was a native preach-
er of great worth, and had long been the
principal supporter of the mission at this
place. He was born at Macao in Jul}-, 1757.
and was therefore 73 j'cars old. He came to
Bengal in 1774, and of the fifty-six years
which had since passed, he had spent forty-
four at Dinagepore. He was the first fruit
of this mission, under Carey and Thomas.
As early as 1796, he built a dwelling house
at Dinagepore, which he told these mission-
aries he intended for the worship of God.
and when it was done, he invited them to
preach in it, which they did. From that
time till his death, 33 years, there was
preaching in his house, and he was instru-
mental of gathering the largest church in
Bengal. Dr. Carey expressed the opinion
that his labors were more blessed than those
of any other missionary in Northern India.
Feeling himself worn down by disease and
near his end, he went to Serampore, and
died in the presence of his brethren. He
was succeeded in the mission by Mr. Hugh
Smylie, assisted by Mr. Bareiro, a student
of Serampore college. These brethren suf-
fered from repeated attacks of fever, and in
1832 were obliged to leave their stations for
a considerable time.
Benares. — The Society commenced a mis-
sion here in 1817, and a church, though never
large, had been sustained, and the Gospel
regularly preached. In 1830 and onward,
the schools were quite prosperous, under the
labors of Mr. Smith, and a native preacher,
Sivadas.
Allahabad. — This was an important sta-
tion, being at the junction of the Ganges
and Jumna, and the resort of multitudes of
pilgrims who come thither to bathe in the
sacred waters. Mr. L. Mackintosh was the
missionary here in 1827, assisted by a native
reader, Gopaul, who kept a promising school
in his own house, consisting of about twenty
young men.
Delhi. — The situation of this place at the
confluence of the Ganges and the Jumna,
renders it an important field of labor. Great
numbers of pilgrims resort thither to bathe
in the sacred waters, affording the missiona-
ries opportunity to preach the Gospel to
multitudes besides the permanent residents.
Mr. J. T. Thompson and a native preacher
were laboring here at the period under no
tice. Mr.' Thompson traveled extensively
418
niNDOSTAN.
at certain seasons of the year, distributing
the Scriptures in the Yikiincer hxiipuage, to
the west of Delhi ; in the Marwar and the
Goozerattce, to the south-we.«t ; in tiie Na-
palee to the Goorkhas, on the east nortli-
east ; in the Punjabee. on the north-west ;
in the Pushtoo, to the Palans and Afighan
horse merchants ; and in the hinguagc of
Cashmere, to the north of Delhi. Mr. Thomp-
son makes particular mention of scenes wit-
nessed at the Pyree, a far-famed bathing
spot at the base of a mountain projecting!
towards the river, where there is room fori
only two persons to pass abreast. This oc-
casions the most lamentable consequences. |
In 1819, four hundred and thirty persons
were crushed to death, owing to a desperate
rush of the pilgrims. The assembled multi-
tude amounts to two or three thousand ; but
once in twelve years, when Jupiter is in
Afjuarius, at the time of the sun entering
Aries, the number is not less than a million,
and in 1810 it was estimated as high as two
million. Mr. Thompson spent much time at
this place at the proper seasons, and many
listened with appareut seriousness to his
conversation and prayers. In 1829, he men-
tions having circulated nearly six thousand
books, pamphlets, and tracts, in Ilindee,
Oordoo. Sanscrit, Napalee, Punjabee, Per-
sian, and Arabic. At the Ilurdwar annual
fair, in 1830, he distributed, in at least six
languages, 2.200 volumes of the Gospels and
other books. The word preached to the
multitudes was regarded with great atten-
tion. The students of the native college of
Delhi evinced great anxiety to be furnished
with the Scriptures and other works in
English, Ilindee, and IVrsian. Mr. Thomp-
Bon was nmch interested in a sect called the
Sands, who reject idolatr}', and regard the
Ganges like any other river. They profess
to believe in one invisible Crod. and are
taught that the soul is inunortal, but have
uo temple nor any regular priesthood. This
sect is almost 200 years okl.
Besides the foregoing stations in connec-
tion with Serampore, at the time of the
separation from the Society, a few others of
less note were formed. These were Dum-
Dum, Multra, Barripore, Burisal, Cawnpore.
and Assam.
During the same period, 1827 to 1837, the
parent society comlucted its separate opera-
tions at Calcutta, Cutwa. Digha, and Mon-
ghyn, leaving by far the largest and most
important part of the lieM under the direc-
tion of the Serampore brethren. During
this period of ten years, efforts were made
to unite the two societies, but although they
haruionizud in their spirit and aims, the di-
vision continued.
In the spring of 1838, however, the effort
at union was renewed, and resulted success-
fully. The particular agents or means em-
ployed in terminating the unhappy contro-
vers)-, need not be specified. All were hap-
py at length in a cessation of strife, and in
joining as formerly in the glorious work of
spreading the Gospel. Dr. Marshnian. who
had been greatly instrumental in l)ringing
about this happy change, died almost at the
moment of the termination of the negotia-
tions.
The plan of union provided that the trans-
lations and all the public property at Seram-
pore, should be transferred to Calcutta,
which from this time becomes the centre of
interest in regard to translations, printing, &c.
At the commencement of 1838, the con-
gregations in nearly all the chapels in Cal-
cutta and its neighborhood were increasing.
Mr. Robinson, assisted by Mr. Thomas and
four native preachers, occupied the Lai Bazar
chapel in Calcutta, which had a church mem-
bership of nearly a hundred. In September
of this 3'ear twelve Hindoos were baptized,
eight of whom were in the girls' Christiaa
boarding school, under the superintendence
of Mrs. Pearce. In the beginning of 1839,
Mr. Penney died of cholera, and in March
1840, Mr. Pearce died of the same disease.
The report respecting translations in 1840,
embraced the following important particu-
lars : An edition of the New Testament in
Ilindostanee, with marginal references, 1000
copies ; another edition of the New Testa-
ment in the same language, smaller size,
without references, 500 copies. Of this last
edition, extra copies of the Gospels and of
the Acts were printed, making an aggregate
of 9,500 volumes. An edition of the Psalms
in Sanscrit verse, 2.500 copies ; the third
edition of the New Test.ament in Bengalee,
octavo, 1,500 copies, with 0.000 extra copies
of each of the Gospels, 2,000 of the Acts,
and 500 of the Gospels an<l Acts together,
making a total of 28,000 volumes ; the fourth
edition of the New Testament in Bengalee,
royal 12mo., 3000 copies, with 2.000 of Gos-
pels and Acts together, making 5000 vol-
umes ; an edition of the New Te.=*tament in
modern Armenian, with numerous marginal
referenci'S, 0000 copies ; an edition of the
Gosi)el of Matthew in Ilindee, Nagree char-
acters, 0,000 copies.
Besides the foregoing works, which had all
Wen completed, there were in progress 8,000
copies of the New Testament, or parts of it,
in Sanscrit, and 8500 copies of the New Tes-
tament, or of the CJospels and Acts together,
in Ilindostanee. All this, the work of the
mission j)ross at Calcutta, and most of it
within one year, show the vast amount of
labor jn-rfonned in this department, and it-S
imj)ortan<-e in dilfusing the light of truth
over benighted India.
Freipient mention is made in the journals
of the missionaries, of the "Benevolent In-
stitution." It was established in 1809, for
HINDOSTAN.
419
I
the special benefit of the multitudes of chil-
dren in the city who were growing up in
ignorance and vice, with none to care for
them. The institution was not denomina-
tional, but was common to all classes of
missionaries in Calcutta, though it fell to the
lot of this society to have the chief manage-
ment of its concerns. For more than twent}'-
years it was under the care of Mr. Penney,
whose exertions in its behalf were unremit-
ting. In 18-12 there were 2G5 boys and 123
girls under instruction, the children of vari-
ous sects, as follows, viz. : Roman Catholics
1-12, Protestants 95, Hindoos 107, Moham-
medans 22, Burmese 3, Mugs 5, Armenians
4, Jews 1, Qreeks 1, Chinese 7.
In 1843, 90,000 volumes of the Scriptures,
in whole or in part, were printed in Sanscrit,
Bengali, Hindostanee, and Hindee languages.
From the country stations, during this year,
favorable intelligence was received. At Del-
hi, Mr. Thompson baptized five persons, one
of them his own daughter, the rest natives.
At Patna a delightful work of grace was in
progress three or four montlis, as the result of
which eight persons were baptized, and seve-
ral more stood as candidates. At Monghyn
four were added to the church by baptism,
at Burisal two, at Chittagong six, at Patna
eight, &c.
In January, 18-44, the London Society's
missionaries at Calcutta published a state-
ment, vindicating their Baptist brethren
Against an attack made upon them in the
London Patriot, in reference to the Sanscrit
version of the Scriptures, to which the Bap-
tist translators had devoted themselves with
so much zeal. In this vindication, they say
that the Sanscrit language is the language
of learning and religion throughout tlie whole
of Bengal, Bombaj', and considerable por-
tions of the jNIadras presidency ; that all
Brahmins, except those wholly secularized,
as soldiers or merchants, are acquainted with
this language, which alone is taught in their
colleges and employed in their religious cere-
monials ; that the highest reverence is uni-
versally felt for it, and any book written in
Sanscrit will always be received with respect,
and read with more acceptance than if com-
posed in any of the vernacular dialects ; that
tens of thousands in all sections of the coun-
try are fully qualified to read with intelli-
gence an}- ordinary composition in this lan-
guage; that a translation of the Sacred Scrip-
tures in Sanscrit was, in the opinion of the
most competent judges, every way desirable,
as furnishing a large Brahminical population
with the only version they would probably
receive, and as laying a critical foundation
and furnishing a classical model for the pre-
paration or improvement of vernacular ver-
sions; and finally, that they deem it just to
their brethren of the Baptist mission to give
these assurances, since, so far from sympa-
thizing with the writer in the Patriot (who
was a former missionary of the London So-
ciety in Burmah), they wholly approve of
the zealous efforts of their Baptist brethren
to secure a vei'sion of the sacred Scriptures
in the learned language of Hindostan.
These testimonials are considered of value,
as showing how the Sanscrit language ranks
in Hindostan, in the estimation of the most
learned and competent men, after almost fifty
yeai's of experience, and as illustrating the
kind and generous spirit which prevailed
among missionaries of different denomina-
tions.
The annual report for 1844 gives a pleasing
view of the work in most parts of India.
In Calcutta there were eight churches, with
454 members, 270 of whom were natives.
The baptisms during the year amounted to
32, all natives but three. The number of
schools in Calcutta and its neighborhood was
14, and the number of scholars 954. At the
various stations in northern India there
were 10 churches, and a membership of 465.
Also 19 schools, and 073 scholars. During
this year, the cholera made fearful ravages,
carrying off in two months between forty
and fifty thousand people. The missionaries,
however, were all mercifully spared. In
August of this year, some interesting and
valuable statements wei'e made by a Calcutta
missionary in regard to the state of society,
and the spirit of love and harmony which
actuated and pei-vaded all classes of laborers.
He says, "On the bosom of the Ganges is
the shipping of every nation, as may be seen
in its streets the natives of every shore.
In the city are splendid edifices and mud
hovels ; naked children and half naked
adults, various and discordant sounds, me-
chanics at their employ, venders sitting by
their goods, innumei-able sledges drawn by
oxen, fashionable European carriages, bug-
gies, gazees, palankins, grooms running to
clear the way, &c. Degradation and idolatry
were around us, destruction and misery
walked hand in hand. We passed through
the crowded streets, and soon arrived at In-
tally, a beautiful residence, as all the dwell-
ings of Europeans in Calcutta are. A group
of Hindoos, attired in snow white muslin,
and with intelligent countenances, met us as'
we entered the gates. Their whole contour
formed a striking contrast to those we had
seen previously. The explanation is simple :
these were Christian Hindoos. As they ut-
tered their salams, my eyes filled with tears.
Christianity finds man every whei e debased
— it blesses and elevates him. Next Sab-
bath I expect to be at Serampore, where a
Carey and a Marshman found refuge, not
from native violence, but from Englishmen
bearing the name of Christians ; where a
Martyn, a Bi'own and a Buchanan, contem-
plated India's welfare ; where a Chamber-
420
HINDOSTAN.
liiin. a Jiulson, and a Newell found Christian
iiosijitality ami were refreshed. The spirit
that animated tiiem still remains ; wc are all
one here ; we cannot afford to be jealous-—
the common foe is too strong ; and the mis-
sionaries are bound together neither by
creeds nor human ties, but by the fear of
God and the love of Jesus." These words
are worthy of being engraven on the mem-
ory of Christians and Christian ministers
every where, diU'ering in name and often ri-
valing in interests, but having professedly
one spirit and one purpose.
During the year ending May 1st, 18-15,
there had been i)rinted at Calcutta, in San-
Bcrit 2,500 volumes; in Bengali 23,500; in
nindostanee 26,500; in Armenian 2,200;
total. 51.VG0 volumes. These were all vol-
umes of the Scriptures in some form, and
the flistribution Ivi pt pace with the publica-
tion. Tlie distinguished Doctor Yates was
at this date engaged in preparing for the
press the Old Testament in Sanscrit, and
large portions of it had already been
printed. Ilis heart's desire was to finish
this work by the close of another year, and
to be able to rejiort a complete translation
of the whole of the Scriptures into this, the
sacred and learned language of the East.
But it pleased God in a few months to call
this <levoted servant to his rest. By the
advice of his pliysicians he sailed for Eng-
land, and died on the passage.
In November. 1845, Serampore is brought
to view asain, for the first time since the
'•union" in l<So7. More or less labor had
been performed tliere, but for some reason
uo reports appeared through the regular
channels. Mr. Denham, on taking charge
of the station at this time, found a church
of 0.'5 meuil)ers, a good congregation, and
many pleasant and sacred as.sociations. Re-
memlK-ring Carey and his coadjutors, he
asks, '• Who can recall the name of Seram-
))ore without veneration ? On its s«ges rest-
ed a sacred penlecostal fire, and from their
hands India and its hundreds of millions re-
ceived the regenerating word of life." There
were also at tliis time in Seramporo two
schools for healiien boys, supported by the
Ladies' Benevolent Society of that jdace, and
& third was conducted Ijy a European in the
college. Besifles these, two female schoul.s
were maintained, one for heatlien children,
and one for children of nominally Christian
parents. Tlie number of scholars in the va-
rious schools was over 800. There were
eight sub-stations around Serampore, at
which preachnig was regularly niaiutained.
and several other places that were visited
periodiciilly. In M.iy, IHid, Mr. Denham
speaks of arrangements then in progress for
rendering tlie college buildings available to
the inlere»t-s of the community, and espe-
cially for training convcrteil natives of India
for missionary service. Years having passed
away since the doors of the college were
closed, every thing had to be done, even to
the obtaining of pupils; but the elfort was
successful, and this institution, for a long
period so vitally connected with the welfare
of India, was again in a prosperous condition.
The various stations of this society having
now assumed a good degree of stability and
of uniformity in their progress, it is unne-
cessary to notice them further, except as we
find them in the last report which has been
received, that for 185.3.
Calcutta. — Under this head is included
Calcutta and its neighborhood, embracing
eight churches, each of which is worthy of
a brief notice. The first four arfe in the city
proper, the others in the suburbs.
1. The Church in Circular Road. This
is an English church, with 91 members iu
connnunion, and 10 non-resident members.
The Sabbath-school contains 03 children.
An English pastor, Mr. Leslie, has charge of
the church, which supports itself without
aid from the mission.
2. Church in Lai Bazar. This is a mixed
church, J. Thomas pastor, with three native
preachers. Number of members 137; non-
resident members, 20. The venerable and
distinguished native laborer, Carapeit Ara-
toon, continues to render important aid.
Five were added to the church by baptism
during the year.
3. South Colinga. — A native church, with
one English and one native pastor, and a
membership of 51.
4. Intalhj. — A native church, with 46
members. Besides the English pastor, four
native preachers are constantl}' engaged in
disseminating the word of life in and around
Calcutta. Seven persons were baptized dur-
ing the 3-car.
5. Ilaurah andSalkiya. — A mixed church,
with a pastor, T. Morgan, and a native
preacher ; and a membership of 20. Two
day schools are maintained, having 100 chil-
dren in attendance, and a Sabbath-school
with CO scholars. During the year, 4,000
copies of the Scriptures, or portions thereof,
were distributed l)y Mr. Morgiui iu his itin-
erant labor.>. In his report of these labors,
he states some facts of peculiar interest;
and being of so recent a date, they set in a
stnmg light the great though slow progress
which the Cospel has made in that quarter
since the early labors of Carey and his com-
jianions. He says, ''The desire of the peo-
ple to obtain the Scriptures is most intense.
Imagine a large market with from one to two
thousand people, myself on an elevated spot,
hundreds of hands'stretched out, and hun-
dreds of tongUL-s shouting, ' O Sahib, a great
thing. O holy incarnation, give me a book !'
Bralnnins and Sudras rolling iu the dust to-
gether, snatching the books from one another ;
HINDOSTAN.
421
respectable people with children in their
hands and in their arms, imploring me to
put the books into the hands of the little
ones; books all gone, — missionary reehng
from the eflects of dust, noise, and speaking ;
people imploring for more books, and in
some places I have been obliged to go to
police offices to rest for half an hour. I
have seen Brahmin lads in tears because
they could not get the books, saying, ' 0,
Sahib, I ran when I heard you were here,
and now what shall I do V Of a cold, bitter
night, I have found men at my boat, from
distant places, up to their shoulders in
water." Mr. Morgan spealcs of another im-
portant feature in this work, viz. : that on
going to a large town, if he is suspected of
being a government agent, the people will not
hear him, nor take a book from him ; but no
sooner do they learn that he is a missionary,
without any connection with the government,
than the whole town is at his heels, the most
respectable sending for him to their houses,
bringing milk to his boat, &c. This mission-
aiy concludes by saying, that it is evident
that the Hindoos are dissatisfied with both
their civil and religious institutions, and
that while they would regard with horror
any attempt on the part of the English Go-
vernment to convert them, disinterested
eiForts they can and do appreciate.
G. Narsigdar choke and Bishlapore. — A
native church of 45 members, two missiona-
ries, and five native preachers.
7. Khari. — A native church, with two mis-
sionaries and one native preacher, and a
membership of 49. A school with 45 chil-
dren is maintained.
8. Lakhyantipitr. — A native church with
G2 members, one missionary, two assistant
missionaries, and two native preachers. In
direct or indirect connection witli this church,
there are 74 households, comprising 84 men,
84 women, and 118 children.
9. Dum-Dum. — A native church of 13
members, one missionary, and one native
preacher.
10. Malayapur. — A native church of 5
members, a pastor, and two native preachers.
The Bengal Association met at this place in
January, and although many were detained,
the missionary brethren and delegates made
up a body of nearly 500.
The work of translating and printing the
Scriptures has been carried on witli the
usual activity and zeal during the past j'ear.
The translations have been chiefly into San-
scrit, Bengali, Hindee, and Hindostanee ; and
the number of Scriptures issued from the
depository during the year amounted to
34,036 copies.
Stations and Churches in Bengal. — Under
this head are embraced eight principal sta-
tions.
1. Serampore, — There were in the Serara-
pore college, in 1853, eleven students, four
of whom were natives. Their studies em-
braced theology, Christian evidences, mental
and moral science, classics, and history.
There were at this period two missionaries
at the station, Messrs. Denham and Robin-
son, and four native preachers. They had
preaching stations at eight villages, and the
number of church members was 121. The
Native Christian Asylum numbered 18 girls,
one having recently died in great peace.
The two schools for boys contained 327
scholars, and adding to them the schools
connected with the college, the whole num-
ber of children and youth under the care of
the mission would not fall much short of
600.
2. Cutwa. — This station has a missionary,
four native preachers, and a church of 35
members. A day school for girls is sus-
tained, and has ten scholars. The copies of
Scriptures distributed during the year
amount to 416. and of tracts to 2,780.
3. Jessore. — One missionary, eight native
preachers, and 234 church members. There
are se\en sub-stations connected with this
mission. Five boj's' schools are supported,
attended by about 400 children ; and one
boarding school attended by 14 gii'ls.
4. Dinajpur. — One missionary, one native
preacher, and 19 members. There are two
day schools attended by 120 children, and
a Sabbath-school with 10 scholars. In the
course of a few months the missionary
visited 246 villages, preaching and distribu-
ting Scriptures and tracts.
5. Dacca- — Two missionaries, four native
preachers, and 36 church members. In va-
rious journej's made during the 3'ear the
missionaries distributed 5.000 tracts, and
4,600 copies of portions of Scripture. They
say, " We now want more preachers, fur the
whole of East Bengal is open ; and on our
last journey we often had from 400 to 600
attentive hearers of all ranks and classes."
G. Chittagong. — One missionar}", eight nii-
tive preachers, and 65 members. There ai'e
two day schools, attended by 23 boys, and
one attended by 13 girls. Eleven persons
have been baptized during the year. Says
the missionary, "The lieathen do not ge-
nerally disregard the word now. They
listen with readiness and pleasure to the
news of salvation, and applications are un-
ceasingly made for Scriptures and tracts."
7. Surl. — One missionar}-, four native
preachers, and 37 c'nurch members. Five
day schools are taught, one English, and the
others Bengali. The attendance is about
220 boys and 16 girls. The Sabbath-school
contains 20 scholars.
8. Burisal. — This mission has under its
care ten sub-stations, and enjoys the labors
of two missionaries and ten native preach-
ers. The whole number of members is 204,
422
niNDOSTAN.
A variety of schools are supporterl, not only
for boys and girls, but for men and women.
TABULAR VIEW
n
^■1 No. of
Day
Sab.
c
X
t
Members.
- 0-
schoolB
schools
"f
0 £
d
6
Statioss.
o
X
t
c
S >
B
a
■i
a (S
C5
fl
L,
e
1
>
a
^
■S.H
"H
0
J3
o
c
a, «
s
.a
X
i
a
-A
3
"3
'A
d
'A
^
|_
<
75
CxLCnTTA.
18011
Circular
Road,
1S08 1
107
Lai- Bazar.
1808, 21 3
157
2
200
4
Haura,
181.S 1
15
5
2
100
1
60
2
Coiinsra.
1822 2
51
Narsikda-
1
choke,
1824 2, 5
45
60
1
58
2
Ehari,
1820 2' 1
15
49
2
45
1
LakhyaDti-
pore,
1830 1
4
62
1
30
1
Intally,
18.39 1
4
46
3
6
Dum-Durn,
1817i 1
1
31
Malyapur,
1842, 1
2
6
Bengal.
Beramporc,
1799 3
4
121
3
600
20
Cutwa,
1804 1
4
35
31
1
10
Jossore,
1804 1
8
3
231
230
5
300
5
DInajpoor,
1805 1
1
1
18
70
2
120
1
10
4
Dacca,
1816 2
4
4
32
25
Suri,
1818; 1
4
2
35
30
5
236
1
20
7
Barisal,
1828 2 11
650
3
75
3
ChltLogoncf,
1817 1| 8
65
2
23
2
NORTHKRS
India.
Moiiffhir,
1816
2! 4
40
27
90
3
105
1
20
Ben area,
1817
2 3
11
10
60
3
220
11
Delhi,
1818
90
9
Agra,
1834
2
2
55
3
Muttra,
1842
1 4
5
7
50
1
60
3
Nlsliiarpur,
1849
1 3
42
112
2
58
1
37
3
Cawuporu,
1851
l]2
30
480
6
932
100
147
77
Total,
35^
85
1598'
43
2345!
5
Statiotis and Chiirclies in Northern India.
— In Northern India the Society has under
its care seven principal missions, as follows :
1. Monghir. — Two mi.--sionaries are sta-
tioned here, and four native preacher.*.
There are three day schools with 105 cliil-
dren in attendance. The Scriptures dis-
tributed durin;; the year amoimted to 2,'.559
copies ; tracts 2,.'j70. Two Bible clas.ses are
also maintained.
2. Benares. — Two missionaries, three na-
tive preacher.^, and 21 members. Scriptures
dL-^tributed GOO; tracts 1,000. Preaching; in
the native language is considered of preem-
inent importance, and for this ]»urpo.se much
time has been spent in visiting the mclas or
fairs, in the suburbs of Iknares.
3. Delhi. — The death of Mr. Thompson
deprived this station of a missionary, and no
one having taken his place, it is not reported
in detail.
•t. Agra. — Two missionaries, a native
churclj with nine members, and an Knglish
churcii with 00 members. Tliere is a Mission
Seminary with between 40 and 50 scholars.
and a female institution well sustained.
Daily iiPeaching in the city and suburbs is
maintained.
5. Nishtarpur. — Thi.s is a quite recent
station near Agra, and has a missionary,
three native preachers, and a church of 42
members. Two schools are in constant
operation, besides a day and evening Sabbath-
school, and the Gospel is preached in the
villages and at the bathing festivals.
C. Muttra. — One missionary, one assistant
missionary, and three native preachers. The
church has 42 members. Two schools, one
native and one English, are maintained, and
the system has been adopted of making all
parties pay something for tuition. Tracts
and Scriptures are also sold to many, while
their gratuitous distribution is continued.
7. Caicnpore. — One missionary, two na-
tive preachers, and a church of 30 members.
Southern India. — The society has had a
mission at Madras and Trichonopolv, in
Southern India, but as the missionary there
has derived none of his support from the
society, and his labors arc confined chiefly
to the Europeans, the connection has been
recently dissolved.
Lo.\Do.\ Missionary Society. — This So-
ciety commenced its operations in Ilindostan
in 1804. In February of that year three
missionaries. Rev. 5lessrs. Ringletaube,
Cran, and Des Granges, sailed from Eng-
land, with the intention of commencing a
mission on the Coromandel coast, but on
their arrival in the country a diflerent course
was determined upon, .and Messrs. Cran and
Des Granges proceeded to establish them-
selves at
Vizagapatam, five hundred and fifty
miles south-west of Calcutta, and about the
same distance north-east of Madras, in the
Northern Circars, a place altogether unoccu-
pied by previous missionaries. Thej' were
received with marked kindness by tlie com-
mander-in-chief of the forces at this place,
and also by the judge, who had for some
time been in the habit of conducting public
worship in the fort on the Sabbath, with the
soldiers of the garrison and such others as
might wish to attend. This service how-
ever was now committed to the missiona-
ries, with a government allowance for their
labors. A piece of ground, a mile from the
town, comjjrising about ten acres, was also
granted to the missionaries, on which they
erected a hou.se and laid out a garden. Tliey
next conceived the plan of founding n
charity .school, towards which about 1,300
rupees were immediately contributed, and
in I8O13 the school was in successful opera-
tion, with suitable buildings, and between
thirty and forty per.sons under instruction.
'" Among our native scholars," .sajs the mis-
sionary, Mr. Cran, '' we have all castes,
from the ISrahmin to the Sudra, and several
of them have come from a distance of ten,
twenty, and even thirty miles. They arc
instructed by a native schoolmaster, of
Christian parents, whom we lu'ouglit with
us from Madras."
HINDOSTAN.
423
Near the close of 1806, the missionaries
report themselves as able to read and write
the Telinga language with ease, and they
had translated into it some passages of the
Scriptures for the use of the natives. They
also about this time formed the plan of a
complete translation of the Scriptures into
the Telinga language, spoken by all the Hin-
doos in the five northern Circars, and ap-
pealed to the churches at home for aid in
this great work.
In 1808, the missionaries were joined by
a converted Brahmin, named Ananderayer,
of whom a very interesting account is given
in the Society's periodical, the Evangelical
Magazine, for Feb., 1808. In Jan., 1809, the
mission sustained a sevei'e loss in the death
of Mr. Gran. Two new missionaries how-
/Cvcr, Messrs. Gordon and Lee, arrived during
that year, to the great joy of Mr. Des
Granges, who had been left alone in this
vast field.
The next year, 1810, Mr. Des Granges
himself was removed by death. Just before
his decease it was thought necessary to re-
move his wife, who was sick in an adjoining
apartment, in doing which she was carried
through the chamber of the dying mission-
ary, and there they exchanged their last
farewell till they should meet above. Before
his death, Mv. Des Granges had translated
three of the Gospels, which in lt^l2 were
printed at Serampore by the Baptist breth-
ren, and the surviving missionaries, Lee and
Gordon, spent much time in rfeading and cir-
culating these Gospels in the populous vil-
lages around them.
The mission was strengthened in 1817, by
the arrival of Rev. James Dawson, from the
Seminary at Gosport. In a letter dated
Jan. 1817, Mr. Gordon says, " The last year
has been better to me than any former one.
We are out every day among the people, and
I have lately held conversations with some
interesting characters, whose questions were
uncommonly striking. The children in the
schools also perform wonders, and by inter-
rogating them we find that they make an
actual progress in divine things. Our prin-
cipal school is in the very heart of the town,
and open to any person who passes by."
In 1819, Mr. Pritchett, who had joined
the mission, completed the translation of the
New Testament into Telinga, and secured its
publication at Madras, at the expense of the
Calcutta Bible Society. He also translated
several parts of the Old Testament, and en-
tertained the fond hope of being able to give
to tlie heathen around him a complete copy
of the Bible, in their native tongue. But in
this he was disappointed, having been called
to his final reward before the close of the
following year.
Twenty years after the establishment of
this mission, in 182-4, there were five native
schools, and about 250 boys under instruc-
tion. Mr. Gordon employed his days in
translating the Old Testament into the
Telinga language, and his evenings in visit-
ing the schools and the neighboring villages,
reading to the natives, and conversing with
them on the subject of religion.
In 1827, the schools had increased to
twelve, and the scholars to over 500. One
of these was a girls' school, and several girls
were in the schools for boys. These schools
were all conducted upon strictly Christian
principles, for besides writing, cj^phering
&c., the Scriptures were read daily, ana
Watts's Catechism taught. Mr. Gordon
died in 1828, after having labored m
India for 19 years with great fidelity and
success. In the Society's report for 1832,
mention is made of the translation of
Pilgrim's Progress into the language of the
Teloogoos, and it is said to have been read
with extreme interest and delight by intelli-
gent natives who understand the Scriptures.
Considerable interest was awakened in 1834,
by the conversion of a native of high caste,
residing at a considerable distance from the
mission. Having met with a tract in Teloo-
goo, he perused it, and kept it by him 17
months, and by this means he was enlight-
ened and made a willing convert to the
Christian religion. A report of his case
says, "We see in this young man's case
what Almighty grace can do, and how easy
it will be for the Lord to turn this whole
people to himself when he is pleased to
pour out his Spirit upon them."
This mission has continued, with some
interruptions by death and removal, but on
the whole with pleasing success, to the pre-
sent time. It has now three missionaries,
Messrs. Gordon, Hay, and Johnston. The
number in full communion with the church
is forty, of whom twelve are natives, and
the rest East Indians and Europeans. All
the members meet together to partake of the
Lord's Supper every Sabbath morning, after
which is held a regular Teloogoo service, and
also a Sunday-school for children of Euro-
pean descent. A missionary association has
been formed, for the two-fold purpose of
contributing to the Society's funds, and oi
sustaining an interest in the cause of Christ
throughout the world. The Native Female
Orphan School is conducted with success,
and the appearance of the pupils is highly
creditable and gratifying. The press has
been in active operation, and numerous and
most encouraging are the proofs furnished,
of good resulting from the circulation of
tracts and portions of Scripture. In a late
report one of the missionaries says, " The
tracts on caste and Juggernaut, are ver}'
popular, and I should be glad of a large
supply of them. I have within the last few
weeks had the pleasure of baptizing a
424
nlNDOSTAN.
Gooroo, whose mind was first aroused and
enlijilitened by reading the tract on caste."
Madras. — A mission was commenced
here by the London Society in 1805, Rev.
Mr. Loveless being the first missionary. For
several years he hibored with but httle as-
sistance, preaching and establishing schools
as he was able, and as opportunity offered.
In 1816, he was joined by Rev. Richard
Knill, '• whose disposition and talents were
well adapted to that important post." In
1818. however, Mr. Knill's health declined,
and being obliged to seek a colder climate,
he was appointed to a station in Russia.
Other laborers from time to time joined the
Madras mission, which has been conducted
with steadily increasing energy and success.
The present missionaries are Rev. Messrs
Drew, Porter, and Baylis. Preaching to the
heatlien in the bungalow, at the gate of the
mission compound, has been continued, with
an increasing number of regular hearers. It
has been felt to be a call for great thankful-
ness that these meetings have never been in-
terrupted by the heathen.
The native evangelists, besides prosecuting
their more stated labors at the various out-
stations, have continued to proclaim the mes-
sages of mercy in the numerous villages
around Madras. The work of education.
by means of the various boarding and day
schools, has been carried forward with great
activity and effect. There arc 11 schools for
boys, with 643 scholars ; and 4 for girls,
with 232 scholars. There are 7 native con-
gregations, with a total attijndancQ of 367 ;
and 4 native churches, with 119 communi-
cants. In the Missionary Magazine for Sept.
1852, there is a deeply interesting account of
the conversion and happy death of a native
female, — Eliza,— ^for several years a member
of the Girls' Boarding School. One feature
in her death-befl experience is so remarkal>le
and affecting, that the account, as given by
the attending missionary, may with jiropriety
be repeated in this place. It was a last
struggle and conflict witii Satan, and in her
case a living reality, as if the great enemy
of souls had been visible to her. '• Two
days before her death, in the evening, she
became suddenly full of distress and alarm,
and her body full of agitation. She cried out,
' Oh, I amafraid ! I am afraid ! lie is standing
close to my ear, and i.s continually saying to
me, There is no salvation for you ! There is
no salvation for you ! Oh! I am afraid ; lam
trembling ; this is very fearful ! How is
tliis ? 0, Jesus ! liave I not believed in thee?
Have I not been baptized into thy name ?
Have I not received the teachings of thy
servants 1 Am I not thy child ? O how is
this ? This is very fearful to ine !' She was
cxliorted not to let Satan dejjrive her of her
ho[)e, but to abide linn in her faitii. The
Scriptures were read to her, ami prayer was
offered, and after a considerable time her
mind became more calm, and her liope re-
turned, and she offered up the following
prayer : ' 0 sweet Jesus, I taste that thou
art good. Thou hast fed me in green pas-
tures, and hast refreshed me at the fountain
of life. AVhen we were only infants, our
father and mother left us (alluding to the
early orphanage of herself and another child),
but even as thou hast said, ' Although a
mother may forget her sucking child, I will
not forget thee,' so didst thou appoint for
us honored ladies and gentlemen, as fathers
and mothers, to take care of us and bring
us up. 0 sweet Jesus, for that I praise thee.
Thou, for my sins, didst suffer much ; thou
didst shed thy precious blood, and give thy
life ; and thou dost now pray for me before
thy Father's face. Therefore, do thou have
pity on me, and wash me from my sins.
Thou hast cleansed me by thy blood ; thou
hast made me holy by thy blood ; thou hast
redeemed me by thy blood ; therefore I
praise thy holy name. 0 death, where is thy
sting ? 0 grave, where is thy victory V "
The missionary remarks, '• Such deaths as
this cheer us much. They assure us that
our work is real, and that God is with us."
They will also assure every Christian reader,
that a Gospel which can impart such light
and joy, such faith in appealing to Christ
against the great tempter of souls, such
peace and triumph in the final hour, and that
can do all this for a mind once lost in the
utter darkness of heathenism, is worthy of
being given with the least possible delay to
the whole world.
Ciiddapah. — The London Society com-
menced operations here in 1822. Rev. Mr.
Howell, the first missionary, immediately
set about the establishment of schools, both
male and female, and within a year one hun-
dred and fifty native children were gathered
into these schools, all under Christian in-
struction. Besides these labors, Mr. Howell
preached in the school room to a small con-
gregation of natives, translated several cat-
echisms into Teloogoo. and distributed nu-
merous copies of the Teloogoo New Testa-
ment. In the following 3'ear, Mr. Howell
baptized 74 men, 25 women, 40 boys, and
21 girls. These had all nominally embraced
Ciirislianity, but only ten had been furmally
admitted to the church, of which three na-
tives Avere appointed deacons. During the
second year Mr. II. made a tour of about 100
miles, preached to great multitudes, and dis-
tributed tracts extensively. In 1826, a
chapel was completed, the expenses of which
were defrayed by subscriptions on the spnt.
By the aid of a respectal)le European resident,
a workshop was built for native t'hristians,
alfording them tlie means of self-support.
.\t Cuddapah was a scttlpment, called
" Christian Village," which was considered
HINDOSTAN.
425
the nursery of this mission. It had in 1832,
238 settlers, many of them being baptized
persons, the unbaptizcd having gone there
for the purpose of receiving Christian in-
struction.
During the succeeding ten years this mis-
sion exhibited no marked changes, but
showed increasingly the blessing of God
upon faithful missionary labor. In 1843,
having made a tour through the suiTounding
country, the missionaries say, " During the
present tour our minds have been, strongly
impressed with the generally necessitous
condition of the province of Cuddapah. In
consequence of the extensive cultivation of
cotton and indigo, and the uncommon fertil-
ity of many of its valleys, it may be con-
sidered as enjoying more temporal prosper-
itj^ than most other provinces in Southern
India ; but it would be difficult to find a dis-
trict in which heathenism has been less dis-
turbed." Yet they speak of the towns and
villages as all accessible to the Gospel, and
urge upon the Society the importance of
sending more laborers into the field.
In 1845, still another appeal was made,
accompanied with a more particular descrip-
tion of the extent and importance of the
field. Addressing the churches of England,
the missionary says, " I would call the atten-
tion of the friends of Christian missions, in
the first place, to the extent and population
of this hitherto much neglected province of
the British possessions in India. From
north to south the Cuddapah province is up-
wards of 170 miles, and from cast to west
about 120 miles — nearly half the size of
England. This immense province contains
a population of upwards of one million of
souls." The writer proceeds to give a mi-
nute and very curious description of the
omens and signs for which the people enter-
tain a superstitious regard, and also of the
doctrine o^ fate, to which they ascribe their
most glaring sins. (See Report of the Lon-
don Missionary Society for 1845.) In the
same report it is stated that no other Prot-
estant missionary society had ever made any
effort for the Christian instruction of this
immense population, in consequence of which
the great mass were involved in all the mis-
cries of heathenism. Self-murder prevailed
to an astonishing extent. In the short space
of three months, and in only one part of the
district, there were 144 cases of suicide.
One of the worst features of this mission
has been the diflflcult)^ of educating females.
The eff'ort, early commenced, has been con-
stantly embarrassed by the native prejudice
on this subject. In 1847, Mrs. Porter, in an
appeal to the friends of female education,
says, " The False Prophet of JMecca has his
standard, and tliousands flock around it.
Brahma and Vishnu have their altars and
their priests ; but to which of these shall
woman look for comfort or for peace ? Alas !
she knows too well that it is not to be found."
At a later period schools for girls appear to
have been maintained with more success.
In 1851, a deepl}^ interesting account is
given of the conversion of several natives,
one of whom in particular came to the mis-
sionaries one morning, bringing his brass
idols, and throwing them on the ground,
saying, " Enough of these ; I have done with
them, and wish to have no more to do with
them. I have read much and learnt much in
my heathen books, but I have found no rest.
In Christ alone is rest." He also took from
his neck a silver chain bearing the name of
his god, and casting it on the ground, said,
" Enough ! nothing but sin has cleaved to
me all the while I have kept this close to
me. Please, sir, take it. I know of some-
thing better — the love of Jesus. 0 how dif-
ferent to all this ! I know I must be perse-
cuted by my friends and relations, but I
must not mind that." This individual, with
others baptized at the same time, have per-
severed in their Christian course.
The mission has at present 34 church mem-
bers, 6 native teachers, 9 hoys, and 22 girls
in the orphan and boarding schools, and in-
cluding the vernacular day schools and the
English school, there is a total of 261
scholars.
Belgaiim. — The mission was commenced
here in 1820, by Kev. Mr. Taylor. In 1821,
tAvo native schools were established, and the
number of bo_vs under instruction was 120.
Throughout its whole history, it has been a
well conducted and successful mission. Val-
uable native assistants were early raised up,
and of one of them. Dhondaph, very parti-
cular mention is made in 1828. The mis-
sionary, Mr. Benyon, says, " He is the most
spiritually-minded native Christian I have
ever conversed with. His trials and suf-
ferings have been many and severe, and
the sacrifices he has made have been of
the most painful nature, and, amidst all, he
has sustained a most consistent character.
He has literally, for the sake of Christ, for-
saken wife and children, and brethren and
lands. In a conversation I had with him,
on adverting to his sufferings he modestly
observed, 'Yes, I have been called to endure
a few trials, and my friends frequently tell
me of my losses ; but it is not always they
tell me what I have gained by them.'' "
Seasons of special encouragement were
from time to time enjoyed by this mission.
In 1842, one of the missionaries writes,
"Among the Lingarts and other castes in
the vicinity of Belgaum, strong excitement
exists with reference to the faith of the Gos-
pel. Inquiries concerning the nature and
claims of the new religion, combined with a
perception of its immeasurable superiority
even to the purest pai'ts of Hindooism, are
426
niNDOSTAN.
rapidly spreading throughout the country."
In commencing their report for 1848, the
brethren say, '•There is much to cheer and
interest our hearts, and to call forth fresh
efforts of zeal and devotedne.ss in the glorious
work in which we are engaged. AVe hope
that the day of gracious visitation to the
Canarese people is fast approaching."
No report has been received from Belgaum
later than 1851. At that time there wore
two missionaries, Kcv. Messrs. Taylor and
Benyon, 31 church members ; 10 vernacular
schools, embracing 272 boys and 30 girls,
and an English school with CO scholars.
During the year there had been distributed
30 Bibles, 42 Testaments, 324 portions of
Scripture, and 5,340 tracts.
Bellary. — In the spring of 1810, Rev. John
Hands entered upon a mission at this place,
situated in the most northern part of the
province of Mysore, and surrounded by nu-
merous and densely populated villages. He
had at first great difficulties to contend with
in acquiring the native language, called the
Canara, but by perseverance he not only
soon cullected several thousand words, which
he farmed into a vocabulary, but also began
the preparation of a grammar. In 1811, he
writes, •' I now preach thrice every Lord's
day to my countrymen and the Portuguese
half-caste. A considerable stir begins to
appear among the soldiers (it was a military
stjition), and eiglit or ten seem ver}'^ serious
and promising. My dwelling was formerly
a pagoda, but part of it will now 1)e devoted
to the worship of God. Several huge gods
of stone are Iving about the premises, like
Dagon before the arlc." In 1812, Mr. Hands
opened a native school, wliich was soon at-
tended by about 15 native children, and
fradually increased to a larger number. In
810, the mission was joined by Rev. Mr.
Reeve. In January, 1«1'.>. a juvenile Bible
society was formed, principally tlu-ougli the
zeal of the master of the charity school.
About the same time, the missionaries ob-
tained of a native merchant a house situated
at the junction of several streets, and favor-
able for collecting large congregations.
At the close of 181'.), Mr. Reeve remarks,
•^During this year, the GosiJel has been car-
ried several hundred miles thnjugh the dark
villages, and several thousands of tracts have
been distributed. The translation and re-
vision of the Scriptures, in Canara, have also
bc'.'n proceeding. A new edition of Watt.a's
First Oatecliism, in that language, lias been
prepared for the jiress. and a copy of the same
has l)fen prepare<l in Tamil. The jirogress of
the schools has been fiivorablc. ;md several
InindrL-ds of the pupils know i)errectly the l''ir.>t
Catechism, and the greater i)art of the Lord's
Bcnnon on the mount." In lS2r). the schools
had increased to 17, and the average attend-
ancc of boys was 085. The report for 1820
mentions that there had been prepared, dur-
ing the previous year, in Canarese. several
tracts, among which were the '•Warning
Voice," a " Dialogue between a Shastre and
a Christian Missionary," "Explanation of
the Ten Commandents." tho '• Excellency
of Truth," "True Wisdom," '"On Idolatry,"
&c. In 1831, the tracts and portions of
Scriptures printed were still more numerous
and important.
The mission was left in a very feeble state
in 1841, Rev. Mr. Reid being in January of
that year removed by death, and Mr. Reeve
having returned to England several years
before. Very soon, however, two missiona-
ries and their wives joined the mission, and
the work went on as usual.
At the latest report, there were at Bellary
three European missionaries, an assistant
missionary, and a native jjastor. The church
members numbered 72, and in the 14 schools
there were 4G0 scholars. An asylum for the
poor was in successful operation.
Bangalore. — Rev. Messrs. Forbes and
Laidler commenced the mission at this- place
in 1820. Its position, some 50 miles west
of Madras, has rendered it an important
mission, and it has been an eminently suc-
cessful and useful one. The great instru-
mentalities adopted in carrying on the mis-
sion have been, preaching, schools, and the
distribution of the Scri])tures and religious
tracts. While there have been, each year, de-
velopments of peculiar interest to those on
the ground, there was nothing for several
years so marked as to require special notice.
The itinerant labors of the missionaries
were abundant. In regard to these they
say, in 1843, '"In visiting the towns and vil-
lages, we stay in each place one, two. or
three days, according to the work offered to
us. Our mode of communication is not
strictly iireaehing. but conversation, narra-
tive, and argument. The heathen of tliis
country cannot follow a logical discourse."
The total disregard of truth among the na-
tives is strikingly presented in the fol-
lowing pas.sage, by one of the mission-
iries : " Une of my schoolmasters labor-
ing in a country town lately said, 'Sir, if
these people reall}' believed that you are
speaking truth, or, as ho expressed it, no
lies, they would instantly deify you ; but
they cannot believe that such a thing as sin-
cerity is possible in any one.' This general
disregard for truth has Ijeen instilled into
the minds of tlie Hindoos by their so called
sacred books, which abound in falsehoods
mil lying wonders. Hence the common
saving W(> hear at every step, 'If I do not
teil lies, how shall I get through the world V
And hence, also, the lamentable fact, tliat a
Hindoo may be ccmvinced ten tinus, without
l)eing brought otice to act upon his convic-
tions. Owing to this, the Brahmin does not
HINDOSTAN.
427
blush in the least when we expose his false-
hood and deceit, but says, with tlie greatest
indifference, ' In this way I obtain my live-
lihood.' "
The various schools, Tamil and English,
have well rewarded the pains bestowed upon
them. In the Canarese department there
are five vernacular day schools, with 100
boys and 38 girls ; an orphan and boarding
school, with 22 boys and 17 girls ; and an
English and Canarese day school with 66
scholars. In the Tamil department there are
23 pupils in the girls' boarding school, 70
boys in the English Tamil school, and in the
vernacular school 30 boys.
Mysore. — Rev. C. Campbell arrived at
this place in February, 1839, and commenced
his labors under very favorable circum-
stances. In the following year, he describes
Mysore as "a noble field for missionary la-
bor," where he found constant opportunities
for publicly preaching the Gospel to the
people. The greater part of the people,
however, as in most heathen countries, hated
the light, and wilfully shut tlieir eyes against
it. Says the missionary in 1847, "The hea-
then often listen to the preacher with the
utmost patience and politeness till they fully
understand the nature of the Christian doc-
trine, and discover the practical effects it is
intended to produce on the heart and life,
and then the natural hostility of man to God
immediately appears. Much that has been
done at this station is regarded rather as a
preparatory work, yet a chapel has been
erected, a church of 13 members organized,
and 112 scholars gathered into the schools."
Salem. — Rev. Henry Crisp arrived at this
station in 1827. He died soon after entering
upon his work, and was succeeded by other
laborers. As usual, the journals of this
mission furnish numerous facts illustrative
of the religion of the country and the char-
acter of the natives, but such details can be
wrought only very sparingly into the present
work. Several seasons of spiritual refresh-
ing have been enjoyed by this mission, par-
ticularly in 1847, when many became alarmed
under the conviction of sin, and eight in one
day came to the missionar}^ with the inquirv,
"What must I do to be saved?" The mis-
sionaries here add their testimony to that
of others in saying that caste is a device of
Satan the most adverse to Christianity ; it
is, they say, like a contagion, calculated, if
allowed to exist in the Christian church, to
destroy every spark of vital godliness.
Within the last year or two the mission has
experienced much opposition, and the mis-
sionary himself has been once dragged be-
fore a heathen court on some frivolous pre-
tence. But he SAjs, '• Severe as these alliic-
tions are, we prefer them to apathy, and
would fain hope that they are tokens for
good."
In the IMissionary Magazine for March,
1853, the missionary, Mr. Lechler, remarks
with great satisfaction upon the success of
the School of Industry, which has been in
operation some five years, and which has
exerted a most valuable influence upon the
character and habits of the native Christian
community, by developing their resources,
and supplying them with the means of inde-
pendent support. He adds, "Our chapel,
now in progress and estimated to cost £400,
was built by our own people, one bricklayer
excepted, and is, I believe, the first church
built in India by the hands of native Chris-
tians." The district is described as full of
iron ore, and through the efforts of the mis-
sionary and the School of Industry, improve-
ments in the manufacture of iron were being
introduced, the primitive method being very
rude, and having been unchanged for 3000
years. Mr. Lechler, in speaking of the ob-
stacles to the social prosperity of India,
says: "It appears to me that very wrong
notions are entertained in England with re-
gard to the state of the people in India.
Certainly, if one would judge from the lordly
ai:)pearance of the Hon. East India Company's
servants and officers, it might be concluded
that the Indians, generally, are highly civil-
ized, and in the most affluent circumstances.
The nation, as such, is oppressed and ground
down both by the government and higher
class of natives. The soil is rich, it is true,
and will produce almost any and every thing ;
but a native once remarked to me, 'govern-
ment takes the grain, and leaves us only the
btraw.' It is also rich in metals and mine-
rals, but no one teaches the natives how-to
make use of them. So long, therefore, as
we shall have to do chiefly with the poor, —
and to the poor the Gospel is preached, —
we must, I feel convinced, not refuse to con-
cern ourselves about our people's temporal
affairs." There are at this station 33 church
members, and 168 scholars gathered into the
various schools.
Combaconum. — This was formerly an out-
station of the Travancore mission ; but in
1830 the directors annexed it to the Madras
district, it having become the residence of
the Rev. Edmund Crisp, from Madras. In
1838, there were ten Tamil schools in suc-
cessful operation. A singular instance of
moral impression is related in the journal of
the above date, of a Brahmin, who, in pro-
ceeding to the court-house to take a false
oath, passed by one of the school-rooms ;
the children were engaged at the time loudly
repeating the ninth commandment, on hear-
ing which the Brahmin hesitated, returned
home, and such was the impression produced
upon his conscience, that he relinquished his
guilty intention, and refused to commit the
sin of perjury, on which he had been pre-
viously determined.
428
HINDOSTAN.
In 1847, nearly all the heathen festivals | countrj' is divided into thh-ty districts, and has
were visited by the missionaries, on which I a population of nearly a million. The Malay-
occasion they preached the Gospel to the alim is generally spoken,
deluded multitudes as they had opportunity. In lb04, Rev. W. Ringletaube sailec:
L'd for
India, in company with Rev. Messrs. Cran and
Des (j ranges, but not wishing to go with thini
to the Northern Circars, he directed his course
to Tiunevelley, and subsequently entered upon
his labors at Tranvancore. lie gathered sev-
eral congregations there, and baptized great
numbers of the inhabitants, but the motive
cars. Not a few complained to me that they jwilh many of them was worldly advantage.
■were treated most cruelly, and confessed Alludin<r to the crowds of Hindoos and Mo
themselves heartily tired of idol worship."
and distributed large numbers of tracts and
portions of t;cripture. Concerning the great
annual car or chariot festival, the writer
gays, '-Five large cars were drawn b}' about
30.060 persons. I was greatly distressed to
fmd the poor people actually beaten and
compelled to assist in the drawing of the
The nnmber of native Christians connected
with Combaconum and its affiliated out-sta-
tions, comprised, at the latest dates, a total
of 207 individuals. There were also ten
vernacular schools, with a total of 305
scholars.
Coimbatoor. — Rev. ]Mr. Addis and family
arrived at this station, in the Madi-as presi-
dency, in October, 1830. In 1835. a Chris-
tian church was formed, and six natives par-
hununedans who expressed a willingness to
embrace Christianity if their debts were paid,
Mr. R. says : " For two huiidred rupees I could
have bought them all, but as I declined to pay
their debts, they never called on me again."
In 181G Mr. Ringletaube was compelled by
ill-health to relincpiish his mission, and for a
year the London Society had no missionary
in Travaneore. In 1817 Rev. Charles Moade
arrived, and in 1818 he was joined by Rev.
Rieliurd Knill. The outward success of the
ticipated, for the first tmic, in tlie ordinance missionaries was sur])risingly great. During
of the Lord's Supper. In 1837, the number the years 1818 and Ibl'J, nearly three thousand
of native assistants had increased from two of the natives of Travaneore placed themselves
to twelve, and a class of promising young
men was in a course of preparation for the
work of native teachers. There were also
12 boys' schools, in an efficient state, and a
female boarding school and a girls' day
school, established on Christian principles.
In 18 to the Roman Catholics in a neighboring
village manifested an earnest spirit of reli-
gious inquiry, and a desire to be taken into
connection with the mission.
In 18-lt), Mr. Addis speaks of the extreme
inditference of the Hindoo to the truths of
Revelati(m, and ascribes it in a great measure
to his Polytheism, "which meets him with
its multifarious remedies fur all moral evil,
and eau.-ks a deadness and sterility of feeling
which nothing but power divine can ellectu-
ally remove. A jireacher of the (Josjiel in
the most degraded part^ of Christian lands
can form but a faint conception of the diffi-
culties which hia missionary brethren in
India have constantly to encounter from
this source. In 1850," Mr. C. J. Addis, eon
of the missionary, became associated with
his father in the labors of the mission.
There are now at this station 35 elmrch mem-
bers, 13 native teachers, besides 14 other na-
tive helpers, 20 children in the female board-
ing-school, and 971 scholars in the day schools.
Sdutli Travuncon. — 'i'lie London Missionary
Society has lour missions in South Travaneore,
viz.: Nagenoil, Neyoor, Quilon, and Trevan-
drum. Tlic first of these stations was entered
upon iu 1 HOC, the second in 1H'J8, the third in
1821, and the fourth in ltS3K. The.se places all
lie on tlie western eoa.st of Southern India, at no
great distance from each other. Nagercoil ex-
tending (juite down to Cape Comorin. The
under religious instruction, in addition to about
nine hundred previously connected with the
mission. It was evident, the missionaries say,
that they had not renounced their former super-
stitions from selfish considerations.
In 1828 measures were taken for dividing
the Travaneore mission into two, the eastern
and the western. The eastern division embrac-
ed Nagercoil and its out-stations, and the
western division comprised Trcvandrum, Ne-
yoor, and Quilon, with their numerous out-sta-
tions. The work at these several places has
been carried on with great vigor and success
from the lirst, rendering it one of the most in-
teresting and important fields occupied by the
London Society in India. Particular int'erest
has been maiiifesteil in that large and neglect-
ed class called Parayas, most of whom are slaves,
so ignorant and oppressed as to be quite un-
able to defend themselves, or to plead in their
own behalf. A society has been formed for
the special purjiosc of diflusing the Gospel
among these people, and ten or twelve agents
are stationed among them iu the different dis-
tricts.
In the F'astern, or Nagercoil di.-trict, there
is a local tract society, wliich published during
the year 1H51. 71, COO copies of tracts, of va-
rious kinds. The chureh members at this sta-
tion and its out-stations number, aecording
to the latest rej)orts, 340, and the scholars, in
57 schools, 2402. The congregations of this
district. 25 in nundjer. are spread over 70 vil-
lages. comi)rlsinir ^^fi7 families, and 3333 indi-
viduals, of whom 200 have been baptized.
Neyoor, in the western division, has 42 ont-
stations, l»53 Christian families, and 315(» indi-
viduals under instruct i->n. of whimi 185 arc
HE^DOSTAN.
429
baptized, and 93 are in church fellowship.
There are also 941 boys and 235 girls in the
school.
Parechaley, a branch of the Neyoor sta-
tion, has enjoyed special tokens of the divine
blessing within the last two or three years.
Two native theological classes have been
formed and much encouragement has been
derived from their progress. The most recent
report gives the number of Christian families
connected with the Pareychaley mission as
1197, comprising 42.58 individuals. The out-
stations are 71, church members 75, readers
and assistants 77 ; boys in the day-schools
1372, girls 200 ; adult Bible classes 25, schol-
ars 151 ; theological classes 2, students 51.
Quilon has a press in active operation, and
tracts to the number of 16,600, varying from
8 to 16 pages each, were issued during the
last year, to Avhich the report extends. The
number of children in the day-schools was 281.
Trevandrum has 10 village congregations,
comprising about 800 people, scholars in the
village schools 148. Tracts distributed dur-
ing the last year, in Malayalim 10,428, Tamil,
4287.
I'hese statements will show that the Trav-
ancore mission is very extensive, demanding
an immense amount of labor for its successful
prosecution, and rewarding those labors with
the most gratifying and blessed results.
Calcutta. — The London Missionary Society
commenced its operations in Calcutta in 1816.
Kcv. Messrs. Townley and Keith, the first mis-
sionaries, began at an early period to preach
the Gospel in Bengalee, to establish schools,
and distribute the Scriptures. In 1818 a com-
modious chapel was erected, called " Union
Chapel," the funds for which were chiefly sub-
scribed at Calcutta. A printing-press was
established in 1820, and put under the super-
intendance of the Bengal Auxiliary Society.
An institution called the Christian School So-
ciety was also formed at Calcutta, the object
of which was to introduce Christian instruc-
tion into the native schools, under the entire
management of native schoolmasters. A Bethel
Society was established in the same year, at
Calcutta, in connection with the Baptist breth-
ren residing at Calcutta and Serampore. In
1823 and 1824 the labors of the missionaries
were abundant and successful. Union Chapel
was well attended, and a flourishing Sabbath-
school was in operation. Bengalee preaching
was continued at the bungalow chapel, Mirza-
pore, and a br.ngalow chapel was opened for
worship in the native language, on the main
road of Bhopanipore. In 1825 the mission
was reinforced, and a new station was com-
menced. The year 1827 was marked by the
baptism of a native female, who had been
under serious impressions for years. The abo-
lition of Suttee in India, by the British Gov-
ernment, was a memorable event of the year
1830, and proved the commencement of a
brighter day for India. In 1833 mention is
made of a diminution of schools, for the pur-
pose of giving increased attention to the
preaching of the Gospel. A year or two later
there was a manifestation of open and decided
hostility to Christianity, which was regarded
as an encouraging feature, there having been
before a degree of apathy to religious matters
which was most trying to the patience of the
missionaries. The wane of idolatry was clearly
indicated in 1837, by the greatly diminished
number of attendants upon the idolati'ous fes-
tivals, and the disappearance of the splendor
and pomp with which they were formerly cele-
brated. Another favorable change at this
period was the absence of Europeans — the
British resident gentry — from the dances given
in honor of the goddess Doorga by the more
wealthy natives. About this time Eev. Mr. La-
croix commenced a theological class which
embraced quite a number of promising young
men, and whose course of study consisted in
the practical investigation of the Scriptures,
systematic theology, the evidences of Chris-
tianity, and church history. They also com-
posed short sermons, which, after the needful
corrections, were 2;)reached to the natives in
the presence of the missionaries.
The annual report of 1843 speaks of the pre-
vious year as a most disastrous one in a tem-
poral point of view, the south of Calcutta hav-
ing teen visited by cholera, devastating storms,
inundation, and famine. Many members of the
Christian congregations died, the harvests were
cut off, and distress and despair followed. For
five months the rains continued almost without
intermission. Still the work of the mission
went on with encouraging signs of success.
During the succeeding eight or nine years un-
ceasing attention was given to preaching,
schools, translations of the Sci-iptures, the pub-
lication and distribution of tracts, and itinera-
cies through the principal villages.
There are at present five stations under
the immediate cai-e of the Calcutta mission,
one of which includes two native villages,
Eammakal-choke and Gungree. The church
members at this station number 180, and the
children in the vernacular schools 110. Mr.
Lacroix, the missionary, has been much em-
ployed in conducting through the press a new
edition of the Gospels of Matthew, Luke, and
John, in Bengalee, for the Calcutta Bible So-
ciety ; and in conjunction with Dr. DuS", has
superintended the printing of the book of
Isaiah, in Bengalcse, for the same society.
The station of Ballia-Hati, under the care of
Mr. Lacroix, has 60 professing Christians, and
171 pupils in the schools. At Cooly Bazar
there is a branch missionary society, and a Sab-
bath-school and Bible class have recently been
established. The most important educational
institution is at Bowhanipore, there being in
its several departments 803 pupils. At the
opening of the year 1850, three college classes
430
HINDOSTAN.
were formed, containing 70 students. A juve-
nile society and a ladies' society have con-
tributed liberally to the funds of the mission.
The Kishuapore station has connected with it
about 100 native Christians. There are eight
missionaries now laboring at the Calcutta sta-
tions.
Chinsurah. — Rev. Robert May commenced
the mission at this 2>lace in 1813. So great
was his success that in 1816 he had formed 30
schools, with 2,600 children. In 1819 these
schools were reported as in a very prosjjcrous
state. They were gratuitously supplied with
books by the Calcutta school Book Society,
who ordered 1000 copies of a Bengalee and
English Grammar to be printed at their sole
expense. Religious books were also much
called for, and extensively circulated. In 1820
a Bengalee chapel was erected, and in 1821 an
additional native school was commenced at a
village called Khonnian, the expense of which
was defrayed by the Rajah of Birdwan. A na-
tive female school was also opened in a room
of the fort, kindly assigned by the Dutch gov-
ernor for the purpose. In 1826, great success
attended the preaching of the Gospel to the
Europeans at this station, many embraced re-
ligion, and a church of about twenty members
was formed. The number of schools support-
ed by the Bengal government at this station
in 1828, was sixteen, in which over 2,000 boys
were in a course of instruction. The mission
schools were three in immber, and contained
295 boys. I'articular mention is made in
1834, of the free school in which English was
taught to both native and Portuguese boys ;
but the attendance on thi.-; school was small,
on account of the mimljor of government
schools in which English was taught, and the
prejudices of the parents against the use of the
Bible as a class-book — a prejudice tolerated in
the government schools by the exclusion of the
Bible. During the three or four succeeding
years a spirit of earnest inquiry prevailed
among the natives of high caste, .some of whom
abandoned llindooism in favor of Christianity,
l)ut othei-s were deterred by the most violent
jxirsccutions. The report for 1837 says, " The
government has established a college for the
education of IJindoo ymiths, in the immediate
vicinity of the station, and the ai)i)licafions fur
udmiHsion have been very nunierous." Rev.
Mr. Mundy, missioruiry at this station, calls
special attention, in 1838, to the fact, that
those who become ac(iuainted with the English
language are much more favorably disposed to
Cliristianily than those who are ignorant of it,
and expresses the opinion that every college
and school in the country might be conducted
on Christian principles, without any objection
on the piirt of the natives. 15ut over this (iue.s-
tion till- missionaries had no direct control, the
British governnu'nt being pledged not to intro-
duce Christianity into the schools for instruc-
tion in English, nor in any way to interfere
with the native religion. The mission schools
were conducted upon entirely different princi-
ples, and the advancement of the pupils in
Christian knowledge was very observable from
year to year. The female schools, and also
the infant school, under the care of Mrs. lAnxi-
dy, were marked by great prosperity, and re-
ceived the high commendation of the Bishop
of Calcutta. But this devoted female mis-
sionary died in 1842, leaving her husband and
the whole mission to mourn an irreparable
loss. The next year Mr. Mundy himself was
obliged, by ill-health, to abandon the field in
which he had labored many years, and to re-
turn to England. He was succeeded by Rev.
Mr. Bradbury, from Calcutta, and the preach-
ing of the Gospel in Bengalee was sustained as
in former years. Great eagerness to obtain
and read the Scriptures was evinced, and many
young men, educated in the Government col-
leges and schools, requested and thankfully re-
ceived copies of the Bible. These and other
encouraging signs led Mr. Bradbury to believe,
in 1845, that this locality, one of the most edu-
cated districts in India, would soon enjoy the
benefit of an extensive diffusion of divine
knowledge.
Special divine favor was granted to the Eng-
lish female school in 1849, and cheering hopes
were entertained of the conversion of several
of the pupils. The number in attendance, at
the latest date, was 57. The Bengalee school
has 100 pupils, employed in the acquisition of
general and religious knowledge. The older
boys have been conducted through the Gospel
of John, and the younger have learnt the Eirst
Catechism. There were 70 boys in connection
with the English and vernacular school in
1847, but for want of funds this school has
been suspended. Preaching to the heathen
and the distribution of the Scriptures are con-
tinued with encouraging success.
Berhamporc. — The operations of the London
Missionary Society at this station were com-
menced in 1824, by Rev. Mr. Hill, who had
been laboring at Calcutta. He met with oj)-
position for a time, but succeeded at length in
establishing schools for the children of Hin-
doos and Mohanmiedans. In 1828 a chaj)el
and mission-house were erected, and a fenude
school, under the care of Mrs. Hill and another
lady, was in a jtrosperous condition. In 1831
an orjihan asylum for native children was es-
tablished, to* which native orphans of both
sexes were received, under the charge of two
native matrons, members of the church. The
girls were instructed in reading, sewing, spin-
ning, itc. ; and the boys, between school hours,
were taught gardening and weaving.
In the annual rejwrt for 1837, Mr. Hill, in
reviewing the work of thirteen years, says,
" When I entered the country the jeakmsy of
the government was great. A inissionary
could not leave Calcutta without .special license,
and I had to solicit from the chief secretary
HINDOSTAN.
431
permission to live at Berliampore. The na-
tives misrepresented my conduct to the civil
and military authorities, and my own country-
men were hostile to me. Our schools were
injured by secret combination and open hos-
tility. For some years after my arrival at
Berhampore, wherever I preached I was hooted
and hissed, and men have even followed me
from preaching with clubs to strike me. But
things are now different. People are no lon-
ger afraid to ask for a tract, nor try to con-
ceal it under their clothes to prevent the Brah-
mins from tearing it in pieces. The Brahmins
themselves are as eager for tracts and Gospels
as the other castes, and plead that ihey are
Brahviins as a reason for showing them a pre-
ference. We now obtain congregations when-
ever and wherever we wish. In all principal
thoroughfares, crossways, and markets, we
never wait five minutes until a congregation
assembles. The number of converts from our
fellow-countrymen is not small. Of his Ma-
jesty's regiments which have been quartered
here, we express with gratitude our belief that
all, excepting one, included at their departure
those whom the Holy Spirit had, during their
residence at the station, sealed unto the day
of redemption."
In 1838, after nearly IT years of labor under
a tropical climate, Mr. Hill found it necessary
to seek a residence in his native country, and
Bev. Mr. Lesscl removed from Calcutta to
supply his place. Mr. Hill returned to his
field in 1842. In 1843 the mission was visited
with affliction, and not a native church mem-
ber, nor a native catechist, nor a child in the
asylum or school, escaped the prevailing sick-
ness. Some died, leaving the most satisfactory
evidence of saving conversion. A deeply in-
teresting account of the sickness and death of
several children, appears in the report for
1847. In January of that year, Mr. and Mrs.
Hill removed to Calcutta, where Mrs. Hill
soon after died. Mrs. Patterson was also
about this time called to her rest, and Mr.
Patterson removed to England. These events
left almost the whole burden of the mission on
Mr. Lessel, who, accompanied by native cate-
chists, preached to the heathen, and distributed
tracts and scriptures extensively. The pro-
fessing Christian community at Berhampore at
the present time, comprises about 100 indi-
viduals. Impediments to female education,
arising from the force of prejudice, the apathy
of parents, and other causes, have been very
numerous at this station ; but Mrs. Bradburv,
wife of one of the missionaries, has succeeded
in establishing a girls' school, which contains
23 pupils, 12 of whom are day scliolars, chiefly
Mohammedans, and 11 boarders, consisting of
orphans and the children of native Christians.
They are instructed through the medium of
the Bengali language, in reading, sewing and
knitting, and also in the Scriptures. Five of j
the sons of native Christians are under the]
care of Mr. Lessel. Divine service intne Eng-
lish chapel has been conducted regularly every
Sabbath evening, by the missionaries alter-
nately. In the English boys' school the ave-
rage attendance is 30.
Benares. — Mr. and Mrs. Adam were sent
out to this station in 1820. Mr. Adam im-
mediately organized a native school, which
was so far successful that he opened another
the following year. A chapel was opened in
1824, chiefly through the exertions of privates
in the artillery. Concerning this station Mi.
Adam forcibly remarks, "Benares exhibits,
in full operation, some of the worst principles
of Hindoo superstition." He describes the
people as rich in their own eyes and in need
of nothing, as already at the gate of heaven
and in no want of aid ; as awfully wicked in
their lives, and altogether presenting formida-
ble obstacles to missionary labor. In 1826
Eev. Mr. Robertson joined this mission, and
in 1827 the native schools, three in number,
contained 1*70 pupils. In all these schools
Christian books were taught. A catechism
and a Hiudawee translation of scriptural les-
sons was prepared by Mr. Adam for the use
of the schools. He also printed 1,000 copies
of his tract on the ten commandments, and
soon after prepared another tract entitled
" Jesus the Deliverer from the Wrath of God."
In 1831 the mission was strengthened by the
arrival of Eev. Wm. Buyers. ■ Mr. Craw^ford,
at this date, had translated the minor prophets,
and a consecutive version of the books of the
Old Testament had been finished, as far as to
the Second Book of Kings. The Psalms, Pro-
verbs, and Isaiah, had previously been printed.
The work of translation was continued in the
following years, and besides the Scriptures, Pil-
grim's Progress and other books were trans-
lated for the use of the natives.
In 1838 the report says : " The obstacles
presented by the native language to the diffu-
sion of religious and general knowledge have
now almost disappeared, and, after much per-
severance in endeavoring to simplify the style
of writing and instruction so as to meet the
capacities of the people generally, the mission-
aries, aidetl by the Benares Christian School
Book Society, have succeeded in correcting
much of the false taste formerly prevalent — a
taste which was so vitiated as to prefer the
absurdities of the native literature, clothed in
a style of pedantic obscurity, to the plain and
intelligible communication of sound and valu-
able instruction."
During the years 1839 and 1840, a vast
number of tracts and copies of the Scriptures
were put in circulation by the missionaries ;
but a serious obstacle to the success of such
labors has been the inability of the people to
read, arising partly from the peculiar and
widely differing styles of printing. On this
subject the missionaries, in 1840, offer the fol-
lowing important remarks : " Though Benares
432
HINDOSTAN.
is called the Athens of India, it is astonishing
to find how very few of its inhabitants can
read. Most of the Brahmins who chant San-
scrit sloks, do not know the meaning of them.
The greatest number of the Mussulman priests
who read, or rather chant the Koran, do not
understand it. Eut the great obstacle to edu-
cation arises from the variety of characters.
The Mohammedans use the Persian character,
the Brahmins the Devanagati, the tradesmen
the Kayathi, the bankers the Mahajani. On
this account few can read any 'printed charac-
ters, and among these only a small number can
read lluently, intelligently, and understanding-
]y. 'VVhe^e^'er a man takes a tract and reads
it fluently, \\c may be almost sure that he has
learned to read in a mission school. In these
circumstances the education of the native
youth is of the first importance.
In their report ior IbSl the missionaries say
that all their labors are performed with a
view to increase the prosperity of the native
church. " For it we translate the Scriptures
and write books. We preach the Gospel to
the heathen and teach it in our schools, in the
hope that some may be brought into the fold
of Christ. Our mission church, assend>ling at
Salem Chapel, consists of twenty native mem-
bers."' Of the orphan and Christian boys, ten
in number, recently under the charge of this
mission, five have been removed to ilirzapore,
to learn printing. Five of the orphan girls,
at the latest accounts, had been married, and
maintained an exemplary deportment in their
new position. In comiectiou with the mission
there are four subordinate schools, containing
an aggregate of 170 boys. The Bazar girls'
school, under the superintendence of JVIrs.
Buyers, has an attendance of 33 scholars. All
of tiitse schools are represented as in a state of
growing efficiency. 'Jhe number of jjupils in
the English free school is 200.
Jilirzaporc. — This is a large and important
inland town, about 30 miles south-west of Be-
nares, and was occupied by the London Soci-
ety in 1838. It was at that time a newly
erected city, devoted to trade and commerce ;
and Mr. Mather, the first missionary, had to
encounter obstacles of a peculiar nature, aris-
ing from the commercial character and sjjirit
of the people, (jenerally speaking, however,
the inhabitants were disposed to attend to the
preaching of tJie word, and displayed much
candor in judging of the confiicting claims of
their own religion and that of tiie Bible.
One of the earliest eflorts of Mr. and Mrs.
Mather, was the establishment of an orphan
school, to which a large number of children
were immediately sent from Agra, where
famine liad deprived them of their parents.
These children tliemselves were so reduced,
that 14 out of 7U who left Agra, died on the
way, or soon after tlieir arrival. In J8-l(t, Mr.
Mather was joined by Mr. (ikii, who directcnl
his attention to the Mohammedan pojiulation.
The Gospel was faithfully preached, and both
English and native services were regularly
maintained. The native church received fre-
quent accessions, and some of the converts
were of such a character and position as to
render their influence of great value to the mis-
sion. In 1843 the orphan schools had been
increased, and contained 50 boys and 34 girls.
But a sad mortality occurred among them
about this time, and 17 of the children died.
The various departments of this mission have
been well sustained, and there are now at the
station two missionaries and two assistant mis-
sionaries. The church has twenty-five mem-
bers, of whom sixteen are natives. The free
school has over 100 scholars, and the bazar
schools, three in number, contain an aggregate
of 70 boys. The orphan boys' school aflbrds
much encouragement ; and the orphan girls'
school, and also the infant school of 12 mem-
bers, have been attended with gratifying re-
sults.
Surat. — The London Missionary Society
commenced a station at this place in 1813, and
continued it, at times with the most encoura-
ging results, until 1845, when, "for weighty
reasons," the directors decided to relinquish it.
'J'he mission was transferred to the Irish Pres-
byterian Missionary Society, whose mission-
aries were on the ground, and qualified to sus-
tain the responsibilities of the mission.
Muhi-Kanlha. — The mission at this place,
situated in the Guzerat territory, about 100
miles from Surat, was commenced by Kev.
Mr. Clarkson, in 1844. The site of the mis-
sion at first was Baroda, but was changed to
Mahi-Kantha, on the banks of the river of
tliat name. The plan of forming a Christian
village has been ])rosecuted, for which purpose
CO acres of land has been procured from gov-
ernment, on a lease of 30 years, for cultivation
by the Christian colonists, and six or seven
substantial brick houses have been built.
I'reaching, schools, the distribution of books,
and itinerant laliors, have all been entered
upon with vigor, and the mission jiromises the
happiest results. A very interesting account
of the conversion and bajitism oT a native,
I'aladar, will Ite found in the annual report of
the liondon Missionary Society for 1850.
Alnwra. — This station, in Northern India,
was entered upon by Kev. J. IL Budden. in
1850. It was origiiuited, and has been ehiefiy
sustained, liy the liberality of J. 11. Batten,
Escp, and (Japt. Pamsay, of the East India
Company's service, and is at present in a pros-
perous condition. Schools have been estab-
lished, and regular preaching services arc
maintained.
'I'he following table gives an imperfect view
of the London Missionary Society's operations
in India, owing to the fact that in tiie more
recent repcn-ts the lumiber of churches and of
communieauts is not uniformly given ; and the
schools for boys and girls are not always men-
HINDOSTAN.
433
tioned separately. There are also many iso-
lated facts which could not be conveniently
dossed ; but the account given of each mission
or station, it is believed, will supply these
deficiencies.
TABULAR VIEW.
STATIONS.
S 2
§1
"A
&
Madras . . .
Vizagapatam
Cuddapah . .
Belgaum . .
Bellary . . .
Bangalore .
Mysore . . .
Salem ....
Combaconum
Coimbatoor .
Nagercoil . .
Neyoor . . .
Quilon ....
Trevandrum .
Calcutta . . .
Chinswah . .
Berhampore.
Bepares . . .
Mirzapore . .
Mahi Kantha
Almora . . .
Totals
1805
1804
1822
1820
1810
1820
1839
1827
1830
1830
1806
1828
1821
1838
1816
1813
1824
1820
1838
1844
1850
119
40
34
31
12
59
13
33
35
340
75
13
160
14
1
1
1
1
7
10
13
77
9
6
4
47
23
1,024
133
15
643
150
9
60
18
1,392
147
30
232
19
22
23
40
200
16
32
23
6
102
93
281
34
2,439
10
007
484
875
149
261
162
460
370
112
151
365
971
1,669
1,592
281
103
1,225
100
53
502
84
8,919
Free Church of Scotland. — Rev. Alex-
ander Duff, D. D., was designated by the Church
of Scotland as its first missionary to India,
early in the year 1829, and in October of the
same year he sailed from Portsmouth in the
Lady Holland. In February this noble ship
struck on the rocks of a barren island near
Cape Town, and almost everything on board,
except the passengers, perished. Dr. Duff
lost his whole library, consisting of over 800
different works, many of them of rare value,
besides all his journals, notes, essays, &c., the
fruits of many years of research and reflection.
He sailed in another ship from the Cape, and in
March came near being lost in another gale, and
on reaching the mouth of the Ganges the vessel
was driven ashore in a hurricane, amid all the
horrors of a shipwreck. At length, on the
27th of May, 1830, he reached Calcutta, " more
dead than alive." He soon entered upon his
favorite sclieme, the establishment of a colle-
giate institution, in which the Bible, in Eng-
lish, should be the principal text book ; and
after a year or two of trial and experiment, the
institution was carried into successful opera-
tion. The history of this college need not be de-
28
tailed. It has educated, on its peculiar plan,
many hundreds of Hindoo young men, and the
happy effects which it has produced are recog-
nized with gratitude by nearly all classes
throughout the province of Bengal. Native
youths of great promise, connected with the
institution, have from time to time been con-
verted,, and having renounced caste and all the
forms of Hiudooism, they have received bap-
tism, and have often become most able and
efficient assistants in the missionary work.
Of Dr. Duff's labors in Europe and America
for the last four years the Christian world is
fully aware, and no particulars need be stated.
Four or five other distinguished missionaries
have at different periods been sent to Calcutta,
one of whom, Rev. D. Sinclair, died a year or
two since. There are now, in the absence of
Dr. Duff, three European missionaries on the
ground, assisted by several native converts of
distinction. More than a dozen natives arc
employed as teachers in the college, having
themselves been trained up in it, and become
decided proficients in its various studies. Be-
sides this institution, a female school is in suc-
cessful operation at Calcutta.
434
HINDOSTAN.
The society has a branch station at Chin-
surah, a little distance from Calcutta, where
there is also a collegiate institution, on Dr.
Duff's plan, in a very flourishing condition.
It was opened in 1849, and has IVom seven to
eight hundred pupils, all boys, and these are
divided into fourteen classes, a<;eording to their
age and standing. The first class, of twenty-
three, are of the ages of IG to 23 and upwards,
and having been in the institution from its
commencement, they are far advanced in their
studies. The Old and New Testaments, as in
the college at Calcutta, are leading text-books,
and are systematically taught for at least one
hour each day. The boys in this class, says a
late report, " do not believe in idolatry now ;
they are full of Bible truth." Still there is
no evidence that any of them have been sav-
ingly converted. A female school of much
?romise has been established at Chiusurah.
'he Calcutta mission has also branch stations
a few miles distant, at Bansberiah and at
Culnah, chiefly for the purposes of education.
Madras. — The society established a mission
at Madras in 1835, under the labors of Rev.
John Anderson, who is still at that station,
with five others who have come to his aid. A
prominent feature of this mission at this place,
as at Calcutta and Chiusurah, is the educa-
tional institution, with the Bible for a leading
textrbouk. There are two divisions in the
school, the upper or college division being
taught by the missionaries and native converts ;
and the lower division, both male and female,
taught by an educated East Indian, with a
number of native teachers. There are nearly
600 pupils in the institution, about 150 of
whom are females.
Besides the institution at Madras there are
four branch schools, of which the following are
the statistics as furnished in the report for
1853. The figures show the actual attendance :
a
c
T
a
•a
'C
3
a
o
a
1
•3 *
o
o
S.':^
::;0
"^
►-,
17
Madras
27G
22
203
Treplecane . . .
143
32
100
15
Conjeverane . . .
221
37
66
6
Chingleput . . .
269
53
61
0
Nellore
179
26
115
29
Totals . .
1,088
170
545
67
The blessing of God has rested upon these
schools, conversions have been fretjuent, and
numbers arc in a process of training for the
ministry and for teaching.
Jioiiilxui. — A mi.ssion at this ])lace was com-
menced In 1828 by the Scottish Missionary
Society, but has been for several years under
the care of the Free Church. Rev. John Wil-
son, D. D., has been laboring there ever since
1829, and he has been joined from time to
time by other brethren. The society has there
an important high school, or collegiate institu-
tion, as at other places, and at the last accounts
there were about 400 pupils in the school. In
a letter of recent date Dr. "Wilson says, — " Wc
are striving with all our might not only to give
large stores of knowledge to our pupils, but to
qualify them by the culture of the native lan-
guages which wc have extensively studied, to
communicate that knowledge to their country-
men, not only by the living voice, but by the
wider working press. "VVe are raising up a
body oC native authors and translators." Quite
a number of the pupils are Romanists, Chal-
deans, Arminians, and Protestants ; and Dr.
Wilson says, '• It is an unspeakable advantage
to them, that from the first they deal with the
Bible as the Avord of God."
Poonah. — This place is 100 miles S. E. of
Bombay, and about 75 miles from the sea-coast,
and has been emphatically termed •' the native
land of the Mahrattas." It has a population
of about 100,000, and is the largest military
station in the Bombay presidency. The Free
Church has several missionaries at this place,
and besides the public preaching of the Gospel,
and lectures on the evidences of Christianity,
several schools, for males and females, are effi-
ciently maintained, the total number of pupils
being between-five and six hundred.
Nagpoor. — This place is in the interior of
northern Hindostan, several hundred miles
N. E. of Bombay, and has a population of over
100,000. The Free Church had there at the
latest dates, 1853, two missionaries, a small
church, and English and vernacular schools
containing about 500 children. During the
year embraced in the last report six Hindoos
had been baptized, one of whom was a Brah-
min. The station at Nagpoor is regarded as
a very important one, occupying as it does a
vast section of country, where few, if any.
Christian influences of a similar kind are
brought to bear upon the native mind. But
the opposition is sometimes very violent, both
from men in power and from the lower orders
of the people. Still the missionaries arc ena-
bled to continue their labors, and they actually
sold during the last year over 5000 tracts.
The foregoing brief statements show that the
Free Church Missions in India are performing
a leading and most important agency in the
department of education, not only by the Viust
number of youth, of both ecxes, brought under
their tuition, but especially by the position
and influence given to the liiblc in all their
schools. More full and complete statistics of
the schools and churches at these stations
would be desirable, but they are not furnished
in the missionary journals of the society.
CuuRCu OP Scotland. — The Established
HINDOSTAN.
435
Church of Scotland has three missions in Hin-
dostan, viz., at Bombay, Calcutta, and Madras.
The mission at Bombay was founded by the
Scottish Missionary Society in 1828, and
transferred to the General Assembly in 1835.
The general course of the mission has been
prosperous. There is now at that station one
European missionary, Rev. R. Miller, and two
female assistants, supported by the Scottish
Ladies' Association. The number of scholars
in actual attendance upon the schools, is about
400. In tlu-ee schools and an orphan asylum
there are 100 girls.
The Calcutta mission was established in 1830,
by missionaries now adhering to the Free
Church. It had in 1853, two missionaries,
Messrs. John Anderson and James Ogilvie, and
26 native assistants. The number of pupils in
the schools was 1306, of whom about 1100
were generally in attendance. One of the na-
tive teachers of the " Institution," or high
school, had been baptized during the year, but
not a single pupil had been withdrawn in con-
sequence. " Five years ago," say the mission-
aries, " had a teacher been baptized, more than
half the pupils would instantly have been re-
moved. A few years ago the native newspa-
pers were perpetually attacking the Institu-
tion, and holding up to reprobation those pa-
rents who allowed their children to attend.
But this is very seldom done now ; on the con-
trary, the importance of this and similar insti-
tutions is very generally acknowledged by the
native press."
At Madras the missionaries, by the last
report, 1853, Avere Messrs. Grant, Sheriff,
Black, Walker, and Francis Christian.
The number of pupils in the schools had
been till quite recently, 400 boys and 200
girls. But the number had been diminished
in consequence of a report that some
of the children were likely to be baptized,
and the number of boys was reduced to
282, while the number of girls was increased
to 220.
At the time of the disruption of the
Church of Scotland, all the missionaries then
connected with the establishment, adhered
to the Free Church.
Irish Presbyterian Mission. — The Irish
Presbyterian Church established a mission in
Hiudostan in 1841. The missionaries were Jas.
Glasgow, R. Montgomery, J. A. Speers, Adam
Glasgow, and J. McKee. They occupied three
stations, viz., Rajkote, Gogo, and Surat, situ-
ated in north-western Hindostan, the two for-
mer in Guzerat, and the latter on the opposite
side of the Gulf of Cambay. Immediately
upon entering the field these missionaries were
enabled, by the aid of the London Society and
the cooperation of government agents, to se-
cure ample mission premises, and to erect suit-
able buildings. They organized a church of
21 members, and entered upon the usual course
of missionary labor, as preaching, schools, &c.
They now have four stations, three mis-
sionaries, and three native assistants. Ver-
nacular services are held on the Sabbath and
week-days. There are schools for boys and
girls, with an average attendance of 550
scholars. Prayer-meetings are maintained,
and there have been several baptisms.
General Baptist Missionary Society. —
The General Baptists of I^ngland commenced
their mission in Hindostan in 1822. They
chose for their field that part of the country
called Orissa, or Ootkul K'hand, supposed to
be the ancient country of the Or, or Oriya
tribe of Hindoos, and lying between 19° and
23° N. lat. and 84° and 88° E. long. The
boundaries of Orissa have been changed at
different periods, but as now generally under-
stood it is a long narrow strip of land, extend-
ing from Midnapore in the north to a few
miles below Ganjam in the south, and from
the shores of the Bay of Bengal in the east to
the vast range of mountains in the west, com-
prising a tract of about 300 . miles in length,
and from 20 to 170 miles in breadth. The
principal towns in Orissa are Cuttack, Bala-
sore, Jajepoor, Pooree, Midnapore, Ganjam,
and Berhampore.
Ciittack was the first place occupied by this
society as a station, and the first missionaries
were Rev. Wm. Bampton and Rev. James
Peggs, who arrived in Feb. 1822. They were
soon joined by Rev. Mr. Lacey and wife.
They commenced at once the study of the lan-
guage in which they were to make known the
Gospel to the benighted Orissans, and in the
mean time organized schools, and taught the
heathen as they were able. Preaching in
English on the Sabbath was practiced from
the commencement of the mission, and an in-
fant church was soon formed, and three con-
venient chapels were fitted up. Thousands of
tracts and Gospels were also distributed dur-
ing the first year or two.
Pooree. — In Sept. 1823, Mr. and Mrs. Bamp-
ton removed to Pooree, or Juggernaut, a little
to the N. E. of Cuttack. It was one of the
strongest holds of Satan in all India, for there
the idol Juggernaut had his temple, making
the whole region a modern Golgotha, and
causing desolation and wo of the most appal-
ling nature. The journals of the missionaries
at Pooree are filled with the most shocking
and heart-sickening details of the idolatry, des-
titution and wretchedness of the vast multi-
tudes who thronged to the temple of Jugger-
naut. On one occasion, June, 1825, 250,000
pilgrims were estimated to be in the immedi-
ate neighborhood of the temple, a large por-
tion of them without shelter, and without de-
cent food or clothing, and dying off in the
most frightful manner, of famine, cholera-mor-
bus, and other diseases. Says one of the mis-
sionaries, " In every street, corner and open
space, in fact whei-ever you turned your eyes,
the dead and dying met your view. At one
436
HINDOSTAN.
time I counted upwards of 60 dead and dying,
from the t(.'nii)le down to tlie lower end of the
hospital, oniittin<i: the sick that had not much
life. At a corner ojjpopite to the hospital, on
a spot of ground twelve feet square, 1 counted
ten dead, and live who were sick and nearly
dead. This was the case- while there were
several sets of men in active employ carrying
out and burying the dead. You will now per-
hajis reflect, that if the streets were thus
crowded, what must the various Golgothas be ?
1 visited but one, and that was between the
town and the principal entrance. I saw things
tliat I shall never forget. The small river
there was quite glutted with corpses, and the
winil having dril'ted them together, they formed
a complete ma.ss of putriiying tlesh. They
also lay upon the ground in heaps, and the
dogs and vultures were able to do but little
towards consuming them." At a little later
date the same writer adds, " Pages would not
be sufiicicnt to detail the miseries of the de-
luded worshipers of Juggernaut. The poor
pilgrims were to be seen in every direction,
dead and in the agonies of death, lying by
fives, lens, twenties, and in some in.stances there
were hundreds to be seen. In one place Mr.
Lac(y counted upwards of 90, and in another
Mr. IJaniptun counted 140. In the hospital I
believe J have seen 30 dead at once, and num-
bers more in the agonies of death, and even
the living using the dead bodies for pillows."
It was amid such scenes as these that the
missionaries sought to diffiise the knowledge of
the true God, and of a pure Christianity, — a
hopeless attempt, except in reliance upon the
almighty and regenerating Spirit of God. This
dependence was deeply felt ; and in circum-
stances fitted most powerfully to impress such
a truth, one of the missionaries writes : " The
omni])otence of God is to me an encouraging
consideration. In the power of God is;ill my
hojie. ]f I had to address any advocates for
ministerial power to convert sinners, or for the
power of the Gosj)el apart from Divine influ-
ence, I would say, come to Juggernaut ; and if
that do not change your minds you are incor-
rigible." Again, the same missionary says,
" J am daily more convinced of the need of the
Holy S])irit. I have seen the peo])le confound-
ed in their gods ; I have heard them acknowl-
edge the infinite superiority of Chri.st ; 1 have
seen them nnuh affected, yea, in tears, mider
tlie preacliuig of the Go.spel ; l)ut alas, what is
all this wilhout the Holy Spirit to change
tiielr lirarts, to ( nlighten their minds, and to
render the word effectual?"
'J'he constant recurrence of such language in
the journals of these devoted laborers, shows
h<iw !-crij)tural were their views on fundanun-
tnl points, and how e.xaftly the (icneral JJa|)-
tists a< forded in their lielief, with tlic mis.sion-
nries ol other evangelical societies in the vast
field of India. Tlmt they should labor with
Bucci-ss, even uniid tlic desolations of Jugger-
naut, was to be expected, both from their own
spirit and the promises of God. Accordingly
we find, at the end of four years, that they had
gathered schools in Cuttach and Poorce, com-
prising 380 boys and 148 girls. Many of these
children were ableto read the Gospel with fa-
cility ; and besides the advantage to the child-
ren, these schools became chapels for the de-
claration of the Gospel to the heathen, like
the " school of Tyraunns," in which " Paul dis-
puted daily,"
Balasore. — In the early part of 1827, the so-
ciety established a third mission at Balasore, a
town situated about 170 miles S.W. of Calcutta,
and containing about 10.000 people. Rev. Mr.
Sutton, who had lalwred some time at Cuttack,
was the first missionary at the place. In 1832
the society say in their Report : " Ten years
ago our first missionaries opened their heavenly
commission in broken accents on the j)lains of
IJindostan ; and there Oriya converts have
been gathered to the Saviour, and Hindoos now
proclaim the unsearchable riches of Christ.
The grand contest between light and darkness
in one of the darkest regions of India, has
thus commenced. Even in the land of the
modern Moloch of the East, Satan no longer
maintains an unmolested empire." It is a fact
entitled to distinct and honorable mention,
that a field so dark, the very heart of Satans
empire in Hindostan, and a region that had
never been penetrated by a single mi.ssionary,
was chosen by the General Baptists as their
place of toil and conflict. They entered into
no man's labors, and counted neither ease nor
life dear, that they might preach the Gos-
pel to the most benighted and wretched hea-
then on earth. The report for 1832 mentions
the death of Mr. Bampton, one of the first mis-
sionaries of the society in India. The same
report notices the suspension of mis.sionary ope-
rations at Balasore, on account of a deficiency
of laborers. The town had then but recently
been visited with an inundation, in which
about 20,000 ])ersons perished.
From I'ooree Mr. Sutton writes this year :
" The opposition in the way of obscene abuse
runs very high. Oh, the abominable expres-
sions shouted out against me this evening. It
would frighten half England to hear them."
Persecution was very bitter, especially towards
those who exchanged Hindooism for Christi-
anity, and of this class there were some very
striking instances. To alleviate the trials of
the converts and render them heljicrs of each
other, the ])lan wius adopted of s( tiling tliem
together, in the vicinity of Cuttack. and form-
ing of them a Christian village. B<'ing out-
ca.sts whom none would a.s.sist, they coultl thus
enjoy sympathy and aid, could as.semlde con-
vi'niently lor worship, and would also form a
body of Christiana, whose example would be
salutary. The place of their assemblage was
named C"hristianai)oor.
By tliis time several native preachers had
HINDOSTAN.
437
been raised up, of wliom the most distinguish-
ed were Gunga Dhor and Rama Chundra ;
Guuga especially was regarded as a powerful
preacher and an astounding witness against
his idolatrous brethren. His illustrations were
often exceedingly bold and impressive. For
example : when wishing to show how the Gos-
pel would spread, he said — " Suppose we were
enveloped in complete darkness ; but suppose
it was ascertained that there was fire in the
house of a certain individual in yonder bazar,
some one would soon run and light his lamp
from that fire ; others would light their lamps
at his, and others again would light their
lamps from them, and so on, till the light
would spread all over Cut tack. Thus it is
with the true light of religion. All is thick
darkness, but in the padre's (missionary's)
house there is fire ; I have lighted my lamp at
his tire ; you will light yours from mine, and
others again will light theirs from you. Thus
the true light will become universal." Of
Rama it was also testified : " He is conscien-
tious, humble, teachable, and zealous. As a
preacher, he is a thuuderer. Sometimes he
almost makes me tremble ; and the effect on
natives, when he feels well and can get a hear-
ing, is very powerful." Rama's wife was the
earliest object of his solicitude. He con-
stantly taught her, and sought to impress upon
her the truths of Christianity, and his efforts
were blessed. She became a well-informed
and decided Christian, and was a great help
and comfort to her husband.
In this year (1832) the plan was adopted by
the brethren at Cuttack, of establishing coun-
try bungalows and circuits around some cen-
tral point, at a considerable distance from the
principal station. They chose Bhogepoor as
the centre, a place eight miles from Cuttack,
surrounded with villages and markets to a
great extent. It was the quarter from which
most of the converts had come, and where
great inquiry was made in regard to Chris-
tianity.
From the commencement of the mission at
Cuttack, the missionaries labored to promote
religion among the European residents, preach-
ing twice to them every Sabbath. These
efforts were blessed, and many of the govern-
ment officers and soldiers became decidedly
pious. " At the communion service," says the
missionary, " our poor dark native brethren
and sisters are ranged round the same table
and on the same seats with the civil and mili-
tary officers of government." Thus the na-
tives were led to see that their rulers acknowl-
edged the obligations of Christianity.
In 1833 au important object was supposed
to be gained for Pooree and for all ludia, viz.,
the abolition of the Pilgrim Tax._ Hitherto
avarice had been joined to Satanic influence
in drawing pilgrims to Juggernaut. All the
worldly interests of the most abandoned, im-
pure, and depraved people were involved in
the worship of this idol. By this craft they
had their wealth, and of course they opposed
every possible olostacle to the efforts of the
missionaries. The sanction which the English
government had lent to idol worship was also
an insuperable difficulty. But now the govern-
ment passed an act, instructing its officers in
India to terminate the guilty support of Hin-
doo idolatry at Juggernaut and other temples.
The order, however, remained a dead letter,
the East India Company refusing to carry out
the instructions it had received. As the con-
nection of the British government with idolor
try is an important topic, and one with which
the GeneralBaptists came into closer conflict
than any other missionaries, a somewhat full
statement of the facts may be desirable. In
their report for 1837, the Society say :
" It appears that the servants of the Com-
pany, even when professedly Christians, are
required to attend heathen and Mohammedan
festivals for purposes of respect ; that in
some cases they are required to present offer-
ings and do homage to idols ; that the poor na-
tives are compelled, without compensation, to
attend heathen festivals to draw the idols'
cars ; and that European officers exercise so
entirely the management and control of vari-
ous temples, that no expense can be incurred
but under their direction ; and, 0 horrible !
not even the prostitutes connected Avith the
temple can be entertained or discharged with-
out their concurrence ! And those who thus
degrade themselves lower than the managers of
a house of ill-fame, are high-minded English
gentlemen I To what infamy will not some
men stoop through the accursed lust of gold !
By this atrocious system has the British gov-
ernment in India been disgraced ; and the
Indian empire of Britain has been exposed to
the frown of that holy God who abhors idolar
try and those Avho participate in the abomina-
tion."
Glaring and awful as was the position of
Great Britain in this respect, apologies for
inaction were found from ye&v to year, till
1840, when the Society record with great joy,
that " the wicked Pilgrim J'ax, which in its
results has tended so greatly to add to the
celebrity of Juggernaut, is at length abolished"
Strong hopes were now entertained that the
great popularity of Juggernaut would decline,
from the loss of one of its main supports ; but
these expectations proved fallacious. The
Pilgrim Tax had indeed been abolished, but
the government, in other forms, still extended
its support and patronage to the bloody Mo-
loch of the East. From year to year the mis-
sionaries remonstrated, and their efforts were
seconded by some members of Parliament and
of the East India Company ; yet in 1846 the
Orissa conference of missionaries had occasion
to adopt the following resolutions in regard to
this enormous evil :
"Resolved, That as a very general opinion is
438
niNDOSTAN.
prevalent that the government of India lias
abandoned its connection with the temple of
Ju"-peruaut, we deem it obligatory on us as a
missionary conference, assembled in the pro-
vince of 'Orissa, to state that such is not the
case. It is indeed true that the government
has restored certain lands to the proprietors of!
the temple, and abolished the Pilgrim Tax;
they have, moreover, ceased to receive the
presents and other emoluments connected with:
tiie idul : and thus far they have done well ;
but the govcrnme-it do still, in fact, though in
another form, contribute more largely than
before to the support of the idol, inasmuch as {
they have not only relinquished the lands and
other emoluments of the temple from which
they formerly received a revenue, but have
added an annual donation of 35,000 rupees,
and allow the proprietors of the temple to re-
ceive all presents and levy any contributions
they please on the pilgrims, so that a much
larger source of revenue than ever is now open
to the rajah and other interested parties.
" AVe do, tiierefore, consider the continuation
of this yearly grant to Juggernaut as most
anti-Christian in itself, and an act of partiality
towards this idol, which is inconsistent with
the neutral position the government professes
to sustain towards all systems of religion in
India."
These facts and statements are brought for-
ward in this place in the belief that they may
be needed both in England and America to
remove the inipre.-;sion that the British govern-
ment in India has withdrawn its direct and
active support frum the worship of Jugger-
naut. Such is nut the fact. In their report
for 18.'>2, the rais.sionaries say, "It is nuich to
be lamented that the government grant in
Bupport of this idolatry is not yet withdrawn."'
At the missiunary cnnference held at Cuttack
in the year Ja.st named, the brethren protested
again.st this crying evil in the following terms:
"Rexolved, As the donation to Juggernaut luus
not been discontinued, and as we have wit-
nes.«ed tiirough another year the wa.<*ing and
demoralizing eilects of the system which it
sustains, we are constrained to repeat our |
aolenin and earnest remonstrance agaii>st this j
iniquitous support of idolatry."
As it is due to the friends of missions every !
where that this subject should be understood, |
and certainly not unjust to the Indo-British I
government, and as it comes up in no other
connection in the jircsent work, the precise ^
rcs)K)nsil)illy of the (idvernment in the .sujjport
of idolatry may lie given in another form of j
Btatcnieul adopted l)y the missionaries and an- 1
swering to the facts as still existing. They ■
say : " Tlie rulers of India still continue, by the ;
payment of the large animal grant from the i
pulilic tre;Lsury. to support tliis wicked sys- j
tern, (the worship of Juggernaut.) Nor is;
this all ; a pensiou amounting to nearly 500 i
rupees Ls allowed to u byraggee (public servant
or agent) on account of daily food to the idol ;
and another sum of 2,666 rupees is paid to
another Ijyraggee, that he may distrilmte the
holy food among the starving pilgrims."
These astounding facts the Hindoos have
the sagacity to turn to their own account.
A\nien rebuked for their idolatry by the mis-
sionary, they reply, " AVhy don't you teach
your own people to worship Jesus Christ ?
They mind Juirgernaut. They give a large
sum of money to support his worshij). If Jug-
gernaut were not true, would the government
give money for his support? Ask that bab-
bler (mi,>sionary) why the government gives
35.000 a year to Juggernaut if he be not true."
These, say the missionaries, are some of the
forms in which the British donation to Jug-
gernaut is mentioned by the heathen. The
fact of its being given is universally known,
they say, and only one reason for the bcstow-
ment is ever mentioned by the idol worshipers,
and that is that " Juggernaut is true, and
therefore the wise and mighty of the land con-
tribute to his support." The British govern-
ment still persists in its open and efficient })at-
ronage of idolatry in its most shocking and
degrading form, in defiance of the fact, stated
by the missionaries, over and over again, that
the government grant is the principal support
of Juggernaut, that more human life is sacri-
ficed at the shrine of this idol than by the sut-
tee and the sword, and that the efforts of the
missionaries to enlighten and save the besotted
and wretched masses who annually visit Poo-
ree, are neutrali/.ed and baflled by British in-
terference. In their report for 1853 the Orissa
missionaries protest with the same earnestness
as before against this great abomination.
They say, " Our mission has now reached the
thirtieth year of its history, and consequently
of its contest with this gigantic evil. During
this long period we have seen the ground of
controvei-sy continually shifting, but the con-
troversy itself continually renewed. In vain
have the various objections been met by the
most conclusive refutation ; ever and anon
some new friend of the idol, oblivious of past
arguments or imperfectly acquainted with the
real facts of the case, has come forward with
some new caveat." Thus, to this hour, the mis-
sionaries and the Christian world are doomed
to disappointment, and to the humiliation and
grief of seeing the most cruel, corrupt, and
shocking form of heathen worship known on
earth, supjiorted liy the money and infiuence ol
an eiiliglitrned anil ("hristian naticm. It isa
singular laet. moreover, that the devoted mi.s-
sionaries of this society have occasion to ar-
raign the government as the persevering ])atron
and supporter of idolatry, at the sjime time
that thev spe-ak with the highest .satisfaction
of its generous and noble eflurts for tlie suj)-
pression of human s;icrificca among the nuir-
dcroiis Khunds. It is to be regreMcl that a
sovcrnineiit which is doing so much to on-
HIMbOSTAN.
439
courage Christian missions sliould be any way
involved in the sujiport of idolatry.
For several years past no missionaries have
resided permanently at Fooree ; but the mis-
sionaries from several stations have uniform-
ly visited this place at the annual festivals, for
the purpose o-f distributing tracts and Scrip-
tures among the pilgrims, and instructing them
by preaching and conversation ■wherever hear-
ers could be gathered. The Balasore station
was continued till 1838, when it was suspended,
and has since remained without a missionary.
Bcrhampore, the most southern station of the
General Baptists in Orissa, has been steadily
and eCQciently sustained. It is an important
post, and enjoys the labors of two missionaries
and their wives. The people are worshipers
of a most detestable idol, and of course are in
a state of extreme degradation. A proverb
of their own says, "As is the king so are the
subjects ; as is the god so are the worshipers."
There are three native preachers at this place,
in whom the missionaries have great confidence.
Two asylums, one for boys and one for girls,
are accomplishing great good. They originat-
ed in a desire to provide for the children of
converted natives, which could not be done
except on the mission premises. To these
were added such children as were made over
to the missionaries, from time to time, by their
parents in a season of famine. Some also were
picked up in a state of starvation after being
abandoned to death. More recently another
class were added, viz. ; children rescued from
sacrifice among the Khunds, an extremely
savage people inhabiting the Goomsur moun-
tains in the neighborhood of Berhampore, and
who were in the habit of sacrificing great num-
bers of children to their stupid and bloody
goddess. Through the combined efforts of the
government agent, J. P. Frye, Esq., and the
missionaries, great numbers of these poor vic-
tims have been rescued from the sacrificial
knife, and put into the asylums. ]\lr. Frye
has also greatly aided in the establishment of
schools among the Khunds themselves, and a
rescued Khund, brought up in the asylum, is
now superintendent of those schools. It was
stated in the report for 1849, that Mr. Frye
had been instrumental of rescuing one hundred
nnd six victims from the horrid death to which
they were doomed. In the same report the
following deeply interesting particulars are
given of this before almost unheard of people :
" The last full moon had been fixed upon for a
very great sacrifice, in anticipation of the
agent's arrival, (it is the time for sacrificing
through the whole sacrificing country,) but he
was happily in the midst of them twelve days
before the appointed time, and the fearful
waste of human life was mercifully prevented.
The torture with which the revolting rite is
performed in this part of the Khund country
exceeds, if it be possible, the worst that has
been heard of anywhere. The victim is sur-
rounded by a crowd of half intoxicated Khimds,
and is dragg-ed round some open space, when
the savages, with loud shouts, rush on the vic-
tim, cutting the living flesh piece-meal from
the bones, till nothing remains but the head
and bowels, which are left untouched. Death
has, by this time, released the unhappy victim
from his torture ; the head and bowels are
then burnt, and the ashes mixed with grain.
The efforts of the government to suppress the
abhorred rites of human sacrifice and female
infanticide among these barbarous people, and
in these hills and jungles, are in a high degree
creditable to its character. The revolting rites
of sacrifice and female infanticide have prevail-
ed from time immemorial in the impenetrable
jungles and inaccessible hills of the Khund
country. No one can tell where they origi-
nated, or compute the frightful waste they
have occasioned, but it is estimated that, al-
lowing these bloody rites to have prevailed
from the commencement of the Christian era,
as they were found to prevail when the district
was discovered a few years since, on a moder-
ate computation the awful aggregate would
exceed three millions. We have thought, and
talked, and prayed about the Khunds, and God
has answered our supplications, though in a
way wc did not expect. Who can calculate
the results of so many being brought under
Christian influence ? "'
A late report states that the brethren at
Berhampore have succeeded in obtaining a
considerable quantity of fertile land, for a new
Christian settlement. The experiment of thus
providing for the honorable maintenance of the
increasing Christian community, promises to
be highly successful. A chapel and mission
bungalow have been built for this village,
chiefly by the liberality of Mr. Frye, and an-
other government officer. The precise number
in the church and in the schools at Berham-
pore is not stated in the recent reports. The
report for 1853 contains some deeply interest-
ing accounts of the Khund boys and girls in
the asylums. Fourteen of these rescued chil-
dren were this year baptized, after giving evi-
dence of sincere conversion to Christ. They
have been, like thousands of others, stolen
from their parents in early childhood and sold
to the Khunds for sacrifice, and but for the
efforts of the missionaries and government
agents, their flesh would have been distributed
piece-meal in the fields, instead of coming
around the Lord's table to commemorate his
love. An older girl of this class was married
this year to a young man in the asylum, and
both went as teachers to their native hills.
Four other young men, who had been rescued
and trained in the asylum, also returned to the
Khund hills as teachers. During this year,
Col. Campbell, the government agent for the
suppression of human sacrifices, rescued 120
victims. His account of the rescue of one
pretty little girl is full of tender interest. He
440
HINDOSTAN.
had received information by an anonymous
letter that a sacrifice was to take place about
thirty miles froui their encampment. A party
were scut to prevent tlic sacrifice, and by tra-
veling all night through the jungle they reach-
ed the village mentioricd at day-dawn, and
found everything ready An* the murderous
offering. In a short time the people began to
assemble, but they were soon surprised by the
appearance of the Colonels party, who made
the chief men prisoners, and brought the little
victim away. She was ready bound for sacri-
fice, and had the detachment been two hou^s
later, would have been cruelly cut to pieces.
She had been sold for this horrid death by her
own father. The chiefs and head men of the
villages have now signed an agreement to
abandon the inhuman i;)ractice.
Cuttack, the earliest station of the Society,
has been uninterniptcdiy maintained, and is
still prosperous. The mission church immbers
125. There are two asylums for boys and
girls, conducted on the same plan as those at
Berhampore. The average number in these
asylums, as last reported, was 105, of whom 5C
were rescued from a bloody death on the hills
of Goomsur, Boad, and Chiuna Kinedy. Some
of the remainder are the orphan children of
idolatrous parents, and a large number are the
children of native Christians, left fatherless or
motherless, llev. Mr. Sutton and his wife,
from Cuttack station, visited the United States
about twenty years since, and alter laboring
much to promote a spirit of Christian missions
among their friend^, returned again to their
chosen field. The two native ministers, of
whom mention has already been made, viz.,
Gunga Dhor and Rama Chundra, have con-
tinued to be very faithful, and important hel[>-
crs to the missionaries. Honorable mention
is also made of two other native preachers.
An interesting sketch of these four individuals,
with fine specimens of their style of preach-
ing, will be found in the report of the Society
for 1852.
Miilnapore, a considerable town on the bor-
ders of Orissa and Bcugal, and about VO miles
from Calcutta, was determined upon as a sta-
tion by the Mission Conference in 183C, and
Mr. and Mrs. Brooks subsequently removed to
that place. A neat chajiel was built, a con-
gregation collected, and the first Hindoo con-
verts soon gathered in. Means were also
found for the extensive distribution of Testa-
ment.s, and other religious books and tract.^.
But though the mission pronii.'^ed well, it was
determined to remove Mr. Brooks to Calcutta,
for the purpose of establishing there a branch
mission, and after three or four years Midna-
pore waa dropped from the Society's reports.
Oamjam, situated between the Berhampore
and I'(joree districts, was occupied by a mi.s-
gionary in 1840. It was once a very import-
ant and populous European settlenK-nt ; but,
in consequence "bf the rapid growth' of Cal-
cutta, and the prevalence of the Gamjam fever,
so called, but which was probably the plague,
it was forsaken by the Europeans, and the na-
tive population was much reduced. At the
time of entering upon the mission here, it was
believed to be a healthy place, and prepara-
tions wore made for permanent labors ; but
after some two years it was found to be unsafe
to remain there, and the station was given up.
Khunditta, not a great distance from Poo-
ree, and near the great Juggernaut road,
is first mentioned as a station in the report for
1840. But no f^uropean missionary has yet
been stationed there, though the Society has
been often and strongly urged to send one.
Much good has been accomplished, however,
by native laborers, in proof of which many in-
teresting facts might be stated. The station
is still continued.
Piplee, near Pooree, and a place through
which nearly all of Juggernaut's pilgrims pass,
attracted the special attention of the mission-
aries in 1847, and arrangements were soon
made for commencing operations there. In
1849 two missionaries were sent to this sta-
tion, and since that time a church of twenty
members has been gathered, and quite a num-
ber of the natives have embraced Christianity.
Deeply interesting statements, in regard to
some of the converts, appear in the journals of
the brethren at this place.
Choga is the only remaining station of the
Society in India to be noticed. It is described
as a secluded and beautiful spot, six miles
from Cuttack, and its history is one of extreme
interest. It appears that in 1833 two in-
quirers came to Cuttack from one of the vil-
lages of Choga, having heard much of Chris-
tianity, and listened to the missionari(-s, both
on then- journeys and in Cuttack. The Gos-
pel had deeply impressed them ; but they
felt unwilling to give up all for its sake.
The village to which they belonged was one
of sixteen exempted from the East India
Company's regulations, and did not enjoy the
benefit of Briti.^h laws, and therefore the con-
verts were subject to confiscation, banishment,
and every abuse. But they at length sent a
me.«sageto the Cuttack missionaries to come
and see them, and the interview ended in their
deciding for Christ. They were baptized, and
in a moment lost caste, were stripped of every
possession, and pei-seeuted in the bitterest
manner. I'u. the missionaries visited the rajah,
a:id jK-rsuudfd him to allow the converts to
remain, if they would build houses outside the
heathen village. This gave strength to other
inquirers to come out and profess Christianity,
and soon (juitc a number of families were
gathered together. The work went ou gradu-
ally, and in 1843 one of the missionaries^, Mr.
Laccy, secured a large piece of ground for a
Christian village. It wa.'i a hill in the middle
of a jungly plain, with high mountains on one
side, and wius the favorite resort of tigers and
HINDOSTAN.
Ml
thieves. A missionary, in describing the place,
says : " Crowded cities have generally been
chosen by missionaries as the scene of their
labors ; but here is a secluded mount, far away
from the busy haunts of mip, where the tiger
and the leopard and the bear have remained
unmolested for ages, on which the God of mis-
sions collects from the rude agriculturists of
the district a people for himself. It is cheer-
ing, indeed, in the midst of such a dense jun-
gle, to see a beautiful chapel and village ; and,
as the Sabbath dawns to see the Christians
busily preparing on every hand for the solemn
services of the sanctuary, and to hear the voice
of prayer and praise, from a spot which only a
few years since was darkness — dense darkness,
the residence of the goddess of thieves." The
village church of Choga, in 1853, consisted of
sixty-four members, besides eighty-five nominal
Christians. They are industrious, strict ob-
servers of the Sabbath, and the colony is a
source of great satisfaction and encourage-
ment to the missionaries.
The foregoing statements furnish a compre-
hensive view of the General Baptist missions
in Hindostan, the most interesting in some
respects of any in that vast field of idolatry.
But the reports are defective in respect to the
details needed for a statistical table, and none
can be furnished that would be of value.
[The preceding portion of the article on
Hindostan was prepared by Rev. E. D.
MooRE.]
Fkee-Will Baptist Missionary Society.
— The first two missionaries of this Society,
Messrs. Noyes and Phillips, with their wives,
spent their first six months in India as labor-
ers in connection with the English General
Baptist missionaries. Mr. Phillips superin-
tended their bazar schools at Balasore, and
Mr. Noj-es was in the English mission school
at Cuttack. At the expiration of that time,
it was mutually agreed that these brethren
should enter a separate field, and Sumhiiulpore,
the capital of a district of the same name,
was selected. It lies on the Mahanadi river,
250 miles above Cuttack, and contains some
15,000 inhabitants. It is the residence of the
rajah, and situated in the midst of a populous
counti-y. The only European family in the
place showed the missionaries every possible
kindness, and afforded them much assistance.
During the several months spent in building
and preparing for a permanent location, the
missionaries did what they could in preaching
and distributing books. Six starving children
were given them, and with them commenced
a boarding school system which has been use-
ful to the mission. Before they were settled
in their new abodes, the missionaries one after
another were brought very low by sickness.
They were almost destitute of the comforts of
life, and their hastily-built houses could not
shelter them from the scorching heat. Hav-
ing no physician or nurses, they assisted each
other as well as their debility Avould permit,
Mrs. Noyes on one occasion leaving her sick
bed to bleed her husband. After burying a
child, and narrowly escaping death themselves,
they revived so far as to be put on board a
boat, and were floated down to Cuttack. Mr.
and Mrs. Phillips were called to bury their in-
fant child, which she followed in a few days,
and was laid in the grave by her desolate hus-
band, attended by the six small children who
were her scholars. He was immediately taken
sick, and when hope had nearly fled, he too
was carried on board a boat, being almost
unconscious, and was taken to Cuttack. A
few weeks' residence at this place, where they
received the most kind attentions, restored the
health of the invalids ; but it was decided
that they ought not to risk their lives by a
return to Sunibhulpore. Balasore having been
recently vacated by the return to England of
Rev. Mr. Goadly, a General Baptist mission-
ary who had previously occupied that station,
by the advice of the missionaries at Cuttack,
Messrs. Noyes and Phillips located there, and
commenced their labors in 1847. Balasore is
the capital of the district of the same name.
It is a small river port situated on the great
pilgrim road leading from the northern provin-
ces to Pooree, and lies on the river Brundha-
balanga, about eiglit miles from the sea. It
contains about 14,000 inhabitants, and about
150 coasting vessels are owned in the place,
which are mostly engaged in taking salt to
Calcutta. The climate is comparatively cool
and healthy. At Balasore the missionaries
formed the nucleus of their boarding-schools
with the six native children given to them
in Sumbhulpore. Others were rescued from
death in time of famine, and the number of
scholars soon increased to fifty. In 1850_ there
were seventy-nine merias or Khund children
in the two Ijoarding-schools at this station,
with a large number of other children who,
like themselves, were kidnapped and kept for
the purpose of being offered as sacrifices, in
accordance with a horrible custom that pre-
vails among the Khund tribes. These merias,
as their captors call them, were rescued from
their intended immolators by some of the offi-
cers of the British government, who commit
the rescued victims to the missionaries in the
country, by whom they are brought up and
educated. A considerable number of the res-
cued ones have died of cholera, but the survi-
vors are doing well.
In 1840, Rev. 0. R. Bachelerand wife were
located in Balasore, soOn after which ill-health
compelled Rev. E. Noyes to return to his na-
tive land. Mrs. Bacheler left the station for
America in 1845, but died a few days after
commencing her journey. Rev. R. Cooley and
wife, Miss Lovina Crawford, and Rev. B. B.
Smith and wife now occupy this station ; but
on account of the ill-health^of his present
wife. Rev. Mr. Bacheler has bmi compelled to
442
HINDOSTAN.
return ■with her and their children to this I benefit of heathen pilgrims, and large numbers
country. j of the sick have received medical aid. The
AU'the missionaries of the Society have ; annual number of patients has usually varied
been obliged sometimes to give medicine to from four hundred to five hundred. The hos-
the sick and dying heathen ; but in conse- j pital was erected fcr the benefit of the poor ;
quence of having studied medicine previously
to his going to India, Rev. Mr. Bacheler de-
voted more time and attention to this depart-
ment of usefulness than could be consistently
done by the other brethren of the mission.
Through his efiForts a dispensary has been
established at Balasore, which, during ten
years past, has been extensively patronized.
All applicants for medicine have been supplied
as fullv as the means furnished would admit.
and like the dispensary at Balasore, it has
been sustained by subscriptions in India. The
natives have given small sums for its support,
but the principal contributions were made by
Europeans.
Some six months after his arrival in India,
in 1844, Rev. J. C. Dow located in Midnapore.
It is the capital of a district in the province
of Bengal, and contains some 20.000 inhabit-
ants, and the district is peopled by about one
and numerous surgical operations have been and a half millions of Bengalis. The town is
performed. In 1850, Mr. Bacheler treated ' about seventy-five miles from Calcutta, and the
2,407 cases, besides performing 12G operations ' climate is unusually healthy. A short time
in surgery. As the patients were mostly poor, | before Mr. Dow located in Midnapore, the
the medicines and services were bestowed gra- 1 place was vacated by the General Baptist mis-
tuitously. These labors for the physical com- sionaries. Three years of excessive toil broke
fort of destitute and suffering idolators were I him down, when he was compelled to return to
performed at times set apart for such services, |his native land a confirmed invalid. There are
so as not to allow the duties of the phj-^ician ' some twenty European families in the town,
to interfere with those of the missionary. On who would do considerable towards the sup-
an average he devoted only an hour daily to port of a missionary, were one sent there,
his patients. He also formed a Medical Class Three times has this promising station been
of the native converts, to whom he lectured occupied by different missionary societies, and
daily. The students, by taking copious notes as many times has it been abandoned for want
of his lectures, were furnished with a compe- \ of laborers.
tent guide in treating the ordinary diseases of
the country, which, if they are studious and
indastrious. will afford them a comfortable
support, and make them respected among their
countrymen. Twelve young men have attend-
ed this class, six of whom have completed the
course of two years' study, and are now useful
in their calling. Mr. Bacheler's medical la-
bors were considered beneficial to his mission-
ary work, as they secured the confidence and
esteem of many to whom he could otherwise
have had no access.
Early in 1840, Rev. Mr. Phillips took a por-
tion of the boardin "--school and .some of the
In 1852, a new interest was commenced at
a place called Santipur. which is about six
miles from Jellasore. and near several large
villages. Two hundred acres of land havQ
been secured, on which a Christian settlement
has been commenced, especially for the benefit
of the Santals. There is on the lot a small
Santal village, and there are others near it.
Some thirty or forty acres of the land are un-
der cultivation, and the rest is covered with
jungle or brush wood. The settlement is re-
garded as the outer court of the temple, into
which Gentiles may be admitted. It is de-
signed to afford refuge and protection to inqui-
native converts at Balasore, and went with | rers, while in their transition state from hear
them to Jellasore, where he commenced a new jthenism to Chri.^tianity, where the Santals
station. Jellasore is situated on the great j may bo secure from the interference and op-
pilfirim road, previously named in this article, prcssion of the landholders, and native Chris-
thirty miles north of Balasore, and in the midst tians enjoy the fruit of their labors, and wor-
of a densely populated country, one hundred .ehip God unmolested. Though the heathen
and twelve miles from Calcutta. It is rather are permitted to settle on the premises, rules
a collection of villages than a compact town, 'arc adopted forbidding all idolatrous practices.
Nominally the district in which Jellasore is I enjoining moral duties, the observance of the
located belongs to the province of Bengal, but Sabbath, attendance at worship, &c.
A Sabbath-school is held every Lord's-day
its inhabitants are mostly OriyasJ, numbering
aboTit half a million of souls. There is but
one European family within thirty miles of the
sLiti(.i), and the missionary has toiled alone
mt-rc than thirteen years. During this period
he buried his second wife, who was eminently
prepared for usefulness in the boarding-school.
A ilay sfhfiol and a boarding-school have been
in oivTiition a considerable portion of the
time at this staUon : and some four years ago
a ho-spital was Stablishcd there, most'lv for the
afternoon, and a day school has been opened
for the heathen children, from the adjacent
villages and the children belontring to the sta-
tion. It is designed to be in part a farming
community, and .several of the native Chris-
tians are already cultivating small lot* for agri-
cultural purposes.
During his residence in Jella.<»ore, Rev. Mr.
Phillips has labored considerably for the bene-
fit of the Santals, spending what time he could
HINDOSTAN.
443
spare from bis other duties, iu visiting their
villages, acquiring their language, getting a
few of their children into school, and giving
the people a written language. Having no
colleague he has been able to do but little iu
this interesting and important work, but what
he has done has not been lost. Several of the
Santal youth were brought into a school
which he established in Jellasore, where they
were taught their own language, reduced to
system, and written for the first time in a
book. But little religious concern was ob-
served among them, till 1847, when some of
the scholars begau to manifest a deep interest
in spiritual things. Several of them soon ob-
tained a hope in Christ, two of whom promise
to be useful to the mission and their country-
men, either as preachers or school teachers.
Though alone and engaged much of the time
in Oriya labors, Mr. Phillips has been enabled
to translate the Gospel by Matthew into San-
tal, and is now engaged iu translating Mark
into the same language. He has written a
Santal primer of 24 pp. ; a sequel to it of 44
pp. ; and an Introduction to the Santal lan-
guage, comprising a grammar, reading lessons,
and a vocabulary of nearly five thousand
words. It contains 190 pp. He has also
written a tract and geography in Oriya. Rev.
Mr. Xoyes prepared an Oriya tract and Rev.
Mr. Bacheler a medical guide, both in Oriya
and Bengali. These are the principal works
that the missionaries have published. Mrs.
PhilliiDs has recently arrived in this country.
She left Orissa with her children, partly with
a view of educating them here, and partly on
account of her ill-health. Her husband de-
signs to follow his family in a year or two, and
after recruiting himself, return with part of
them to his present field. Nothing occurring
to prevent it, he will then engage more ear-
nestly in the work of translating the Scrip-
tures into Santal. Appropriations are ex-
pected from the American and Foreign Bible
Society to aid him in the effort.
The following account of the results of the
mission is taken mostly from Rev. 0. R.
Bacheler's work, entitled Hindooism and
Christianity in Orissa :
1. The Gospel has been preached as exten-
sively as two or three missionaries, assisted by
four native preachers, could do it in a district
I inhabited by more than a million souls. A
, good impression has been made ; the minds of
j the people have been in a measure prepared
for the reception of the Gospel ; and obstacles
I to the work that at first seemed to be almost
insurmountable, have begun to disappear.
2. The Bible, either as a whole or in sepa-
rate parts, has been extensively circulated.
Good has been done in this way, and also by
the extensive scattering of religious tracts
among the people, multitudes of whom have
read what was put into their hands.
3. Some seventy-five young men, women,
and children are receiving a religions educa-
tion in the boarding-schools, where several of
the most prominent members, preachers, phy-
sicians and teachers have been instructed, who
will exert an important influence in Orissa's
evangelization.
4. Four native preachers have been raised
up, who are qualified for extensive usefulness
in this great work.
5. Two churches have been organized, both
numbering some forty-five members, gathered
from the darkness and degradation of heathen-
ism. Some who were converted at the stations
have left and united with other churches, and
others have been removed to their heavenly
rest.
TABULAR VIEW.
i
issionaries and Aisistant
STATIONS.
o
"a
1
□
iiissionaries.
i
°
Ministers.
Lay Teachers and
others.
Boarding.
Day.
American.
i =
,
E =
2
.-J
a
o a
o
P—
3
||
c
-<
1
&
55
S
S
6
1
£
5
X
X
o
^
5
^
Orissa.
Sumbhulpore* . .
1836
Balasore
1837
2
1
1
30
36
?.9
60
115
Jellasore
1840
1
2
0
17
ft
13
Midnapore * . . . .
1844
Sautipur
Totals ....
1852
1
13
13
3
3
1
3
47
44
29
73
151
* Unoccupied.
Ee
V. E.
Hut
:hixs.
444
HDsDOSTAN.
American Presbyterian' Missions. — The
missions of the l*rc?liytcriau Board in India were
commeuced in 1833. Tiic tirst missionaries
were the Kev. Messrs. William Rood and John
C. Lowrie, and tiieir wives, wlio arrived at
Calcutta in ()ctober of that year. Tliey were
sent out by the AVestern Foreign Missionary So-
ciety, with instructions to select a station in some
part of the northern provinces, if this should
appear to be expedient, after consulting with
CIn-istian friends in that city ; otherwise, they
were at liberty to proceed to any other part of
India, or of the t^astern world. 'J'hey were
greatly favored in obtaining information and
counsel from several gentlemen who were
largely ac(iuainted with the country, particu-
larly the Itev. William II. Pearce, of the Eng-
lish Baptist mission, the Rev. Alexander Dull,
D.D., of the Scotch mission, and Sir Charles
Trevelyan, K. C. B., one of the Secretaries in
the political deiiortment of the government, who
had himself resided in the Upper I'rovinces.
As the result of these inquiries, it was con-
sidered advisable to proceed, as originally con-
templated, to the remote north-western part of
the country ; and the city of Lodiana, on the
river Sutlej, one of the tributaries of the Indus,
was chosen as the station to be first occupied.
The principal reasons for choosing the G'pper
Provinces as their general field of labor, were
these : The urgent need of missionaries and
teachers in that part of the country ; its being
in a great measure unoccupied as missionary
ground ; the superior energy of the people, as
compared with the inhabitants of the Lower
Provinces ; the relation of the north-western
parts of India to other Asiatic countries west
and north, which suggested the hope that the
Gospel might be eventually extended from
thence into the heart of Central Asia ; the
vicinity of the Ilimalaya Mountains, atlording
places of resort to missionaries whose health
might become impaired by (he hot climate of
the plains. Besides general considerations of
this kind, there were some special reasons,
arising out of the liberal views concerning the
education of the natives, which were lield by
I'juropean gentlemen of influence at some of
the north-western cities, and the desire of some
of the native chiefs to obtain for their sons the
advantages of education in the English lan-
guage. As an example of both, Sir Claude
Wade, the political agent of the government
at Lodiana, had set on foot a school for the in-
struction of native youth in English, which
waa attended by sons and other relatives of
certain Sikh Sardars or chiefs, and of the
AflTghan exiles then living at Lodiana. This
school wiLs afterwards transferred to the mis-
sion, and the generous support of its founder
was continued until his ollicial duties called
him to a distant part of the country. It is
Still in successful operation.
The missionaries recognized with grateful
foiclings tlie hand of I'rovidence, in directing
the time of their arrival in India at the precise
juncture of circumstances which had turned
the attention of Christian observers with spe-
cial interest to the north-western provinces.
If they had reached India a year sooner, their
choice of a field of labor might have been a
very different one ; or, if a year later, they
would probably have found the ground at Lo-
diana already occupied, and that perhaps by
some educational institution from which the
Christian religion would have been excluded.
They also recognized with thankfulness the
favor that was shown to them in the eyes of
some of the most influential persons in the
country ; so that although they had landed at
Calcutta, feeling uncertain what their recep-
tion might be, they were cordially aided in
their work by those who were in positions
greatly to promote or to prevent its success ;
while nothing could exceed the friendly inter-
est in their mission which was manifested by
all the European missionary brethren with
whom they became acquainted. Thus, having
favor in the sight of (jod and his people, their
missionary field was chosen and their plans of
work were laid.
How often do we see that the Lord's thoughts
are not our thoughts, neither his ways our
ways! Signally was this shown in the early
history of this mission. Only one of the first
company of missionaries was permitted to sec
this carefully and well chosen field of labor ;
two of the others were early called to their
rest — Mrs. Lowrie and Mr. Re«l — both by
consumption ; and Mrs. Reed had accompanied
her husband on the voyage homeward, which
he did not live to complete. The remaining
member of this company reached the £ tation at
Lodiana in November, 1834, and entered on
his duties ; but a few days afterwards he was
taken with dangerous illness. For several
weeks the mission seemed likely to become ex-
tinct, by his removal from the scenes of this
life ; and, on his partial recovery, he was told
by bis medical attendants that he must not
attempt to remain in the hot climate of India.
A year longer, however, was spent by him in
the charge of a school, preaching, and making
journeys and inquiries, to gain information for
the use of the mission and the church at home ;
thus doing the work of a pioneer. In January,
183G, he left Lodiana, and Calcutta in April,
on a visit lo this country for health ; but
eventually the hope of returning to the mission
was, for the same reason, reluctantly aban-
dor.ed.
In the mean time, the Rev. ^lessrs. James
Wilson and John Newton, and their wives,
had arrived at Lodiana in December, 1835,
and entered upon enlarged labors in the ser-
vice of Christ. Besides the school and other
duties, they took charge of a i)rinting-])ress in
1836, which has been a valuable auxiliary ia
the missionary work.
The third company of missionaries, the Rev.
HINDOSTAN.
U5
Messrs. James R. Campbell and James Mc-
Bwen, and Messrs. Jesse M. Jamieson, Wil-
liam S. Rogers and Joseph Porter, and their
wives, reached Calcutta in March, 1836. It
•was Mr. Lowrie's privilege to welcome these
brethren on their arrival, and to aid them in
preparing for their journey to the Upper Pro-
vinces. Their meeting was of deep interest,
as may readily be supposed, especially to one
who had seen so severe bereavements and so
many dark hours in the short history of the
mission. It was now apparent that these afflic-
tions were not intended to discourage the sup-
porters of the mission, but to teach them their
dependence on divine grace alone ; to purify
their motives ; to chasten and strengthen their
zeal ; and thus at the latter end to do them
good, so that by their means God would im-
part the greatest blessings to those who were
sitting in darkness and the " region and shadow
of death."
The brethren of this new reinforcement soon
proceeded on thoir journey to Lodiana, but
Mr. McEwen was led, by what appeared to be
indications of the will of Providence, to stop
at Allahabad, a large city at the junction of
the Ganges and the Jumna, which has ever
since been occupied as a missionary station.
Mr. McEwen's labors were crowned with pleas-
ing success, and a church was formed in Jan-
uary, 1837, with 13 members. Besides preach-
ing, he gave a part of his time to the charge
of schools, in which he was greatly assisted by
his equally devoted wife ; but they were not
permitted to continue long in these encourag-
ing labors. On account of the loss of health,
he was compelled to leave India in 1838 ; and,
after serving the cause of Christ as a pastor,
in the State of New York, he was called to
his rest in 1845.
On the arrival of the other members of this
third company at the end of their journey, in
1836, two new stations were formed. One of
these was at Saharunpur, 130 miles south-east
from Lodiana ; the other was at Sabathu,
110 miles north-east from the same place, in
the lower ranges of the Himalaya Mountains,
at an elevation of about 4000 feet above the
level of the sea. The uuordained brethren of
this company were graduates of colleges, in
preparation for the work of the ministry. They
went out as teachers, but with the expectation
of prosecuting their theological studies, and
they were afterwards ordained to the sacred
office.
A church was organized at Lodiana in 1837;
and it is remarkable that two of its first three
native members have since become valuable
laborers in the missionary work ; one as a min-
ister of the Gospel, and another as a teacher.
This must be viewed as a signal proof of God's
favor tovi'ards this infant church, and as a hap-
py example of the way in which the Gospel is
to be more and more extended in heathen
countries. The schools at Lodiana, Saharun-
pur, and Sabathu, were vigorously carried for-
ward, and the brethren were engaged in preach-
ing, distributing the sacred Scriptures and i-e-
ligious tracts, making journeys to places where
large assemblages of natives were collected on
festival occasions ; but little more will be at-
tempted here than to present a chronological
outline of the arrivals of the missionaries, with
some of the leading facts in their work.
The fourth company of missionaries, consist-
ing of Rev. Messrs. H. R. Wilson, Jr., John
H. Morrison, and Joseph Caldwell, Mr. James
Craig, teacher, and Mr. Reese Morris, printer,
and their wives, arrived at Calcutta in April,
1838. There they met Mr. and Mrs. McEwen,
.on their return homewards, and were greatly
aided by them in making arrangements for
their journey. One of their number, however,
had already reached the last stage of her pil-
grimage ; Mrs. Morrison was taken to her rest
before leaving Calcutta, after a brief illness of
cholera. Her afflicted companions proceeded
to their several stations : Mr. Morrison to Alla-
habad, to join the Rev. James Wilson, who
had taken charge of the station on Mr. Mc-
Ewen's removal ; Mr. Morris to Lodiana ; and
Messrs. Caldwell and Craig to Saharunpur,
Mr. H, R. Wilson, M'hile proceeding to the station
at Lodiana, was led by Providence to stop at Fut-
tehgurh, on the Ganges, two hundred miles above
Allahabad, a town which had been pointed
out by some of the earlier brethren as eligible
for a missionary station. Here, with an inter-
esting family of orphan children, a part of
whom were placed under his care by a pious
p]nglish physician, and assisted by Gopeenath
Nuudy, the teacher previously employed in
their instruction, Mr. Wilson began important
labors, which have been steadily prosecuted
ever since, with evident tokens of the favor of
Heaven.
In February, 1839, th£ Rev. Messrs. Joseph
Warren, John E. Freeman, and James L.
Scott, and their wives, arrived at Calcutta,
and became connected, the first two with Alla-
habad, and the last with Futtehgurh. A
printing-press was sent out with Mr. Warren,
which, under his efficient superintendence, be-
came an invaluable means of promoting the
influence of the mission. In November of this
year, Mrs. Caldwell, at Saharunpur, was called
to her rest.
In December of the next year, the Rev.
Messrs. John C. Rankin and William H.
McAuley, and their wives ; the Rev. Jos. Owen
and Miss Jane Vanderveer, teacher, arrived at
Calcutta. Mr. Owen joined the Allahabad
Mission, and the rest proceeded to Futtehgurh.
In this year, 1840, the work of translating the
Sacred Scriptures and preparing other reli-
gious books and tracts, began to be reported
as occupying much of the time of some of the
missionaries. One of these works was a trans-
lation of the Gospel of John from the original
Greek into Punjabi, the language of the Sikhs j
446
HINDOSTAN.
another was the Confession of Faith of the
Presbyterian Church into Hindustani, with
the Scripture references at the bottom of the
page.
In the year 1841, churches were organized
at Saharunpur and Futtehgurh, and twenty-
seven native members were reported at all the
stations.
The Rev. Messrs. Levi Janvier and John
Wray, and their wives, reached India in Jan-
uary, 1842, and were stationed — the former at
Lodiana, and the latter at Allahabad. Messrs.
Morrison and Caldwell were married. Mrs.
Porter was called this year to her rest. Dr.
Willis Green reached India in November ;
spent a few months at Lodiana ; and returned
home, the climate not suiting his health.
Churches were organized at Saharunpur and
Futtehgurh, and the year was further signal-
ized by the organization of three Presbyteries
under the instructions of the General Assem-
bly, composed of the ministers in each mission,
and taking their names, like the missions,
from the leading city, or the station first occu-
pied, in the bounds of each : Lodiana, Fur-
rukhabad, and Allahabad. The brethren at
Saharunpur being ecclesiastically related to
the General Synod of the Reformed Presbyte-
rian Church, were constituted by their Synod
into a separate Presbytery. Their relations
to the Board as missionaries are the same as
those of the other brethren, and the intercourse
between them has been mutually pleasant and
beneficiaf. A part of their support has always
been furnished by chui-ches of the Reformed
Synod.
The year 1843 was marked by the arrival in
India of the Rev. John J. Walsh and his wife,
who were connected with the Furrukhabad
mission ; the death of the second 'Mis. Morri-
son ; the return to this country of Mr. Rogers
and family, on account of Mrs. Rogers's ill-
health ; and of Mr. Morrison, also for health ;
tiie forming of a new station at Mynpurie, 40
miles west of Futtehgm-h ; the licen.sure of the
native assistants, Golok Nath and Gopeenath
Nundy, by the Presbyteries of Lodiana ond
Furrukhabad ; and the steady advance of the
missionary work. The church members re-
ported at Allahabad in January were nine
Americans, three Eurtipeans, eight Fast In-
dians, and eleven natives ; in all thirty-one.
In 1844, Mr. Owen M'as married. G opeeiuith
Nundy was ordained. Parts of the Bible, in a
revised translation, were printed at Lodiana in
Hindustani. A translation of the Koran into
the same language, by a Maulavi, with an In-
troduction and Notes, refuting its errors, by
the Kcv. J. Wilson, was published at Allaha-
bad, marking (juite a new era in Mohammedan
literature. A larger number of tracts and
books were distributed in the Lodiana Mission
than during uny Ibrmer year, and all the
branches of missionary labor were faithfully
carried forward. 'J'ho number of church mem-
bers reported at Futtehgurh this year was
twenty-seven, of whom sixteen were natives.
The next year witnessed the death of Mr.
Craig at Saharunpur, and of Mrs. Jamieson
at Sabathu ; the return to this country of Mr.
Morris on account of health ; the destruction
by fire of the printing-press, book-repository,
<tc., at Lodiana, causing the loss of about
$10,000 worth of property, including upwards
of 90,000 copies of parts of the Holy Scrip-
tures and of tracts. In general, the labors of
the missionaries were continued without change.
In November of this year, the first meeting of
the Synod of North India was held at Futteh-
gurh. Important questions, concerning the
kingdom of Christ in India, received the earn-
est consideration of its members.
In 1846, Mr. Jamieson visited this country,
to provide for the education of his motherless
children ; Mr. H. R. Wilson and family also
returned, on account of Mrs. Wilson's health ;
and Miss Vanderveer came home also on ac-
count of impaired health ; Mi^ Morrison having
regained his health, returned to India with his
wife ; Mr. Rudolph, a German teacher, and his
wife, who had spent some years in India, be-
came connected with the Lodiana Mission,
and Mr. Rudolph was licensed to preach the
Gospel. A new station was formed at Agra ;
and a number of the members of the church
at Allahabad having removed to tlrat city
upon the transfer of the government offices,
they were reorganized as a church, with other
members, making in all fifteen, under the min-
isterial charge of the missionaries. At Fut-
tegurh, the number of church members re-
ported was thirty-four. At Allahabad, a
church building, 78 feet by 45, was erected ;
whilC; to the communion of the church itself,
it was stated that from its commencement
seventy-four persons "had been admitted, fifty-
one of whom were received on the profession
of their faith. The Government college at
Allahabad was transferred to the mission, and
the Christian religion and books became a
part of the daily study of the scholars.
Early in 1847, the Rev. Messrs. Augustus
H. Seeley and David Irving and their wives,
and Mr. Robert M. Munnis, licentiate preach-
er, arrived at Calcutta, on their way to the
Furrukhabad Mission. Mr. Jamieson, on his
return to his field of labor, with his M'ife,
reached Calcutta in November. Mr. Camp-
bell with his family arrived in this country on^
a visit, on account of his wife's health. Mr.
Rudolph and Golok Nath were ordained as
Evangelists by the IVesbytery of Lodiana,
and Mr. Munnis by the Presbytery of Furruk-
habad. A new station was formed at Jalan-
dar, in the Punjab, about thirty miles west of
Lodiana, which was occupied by the Rev. Go-
lok Nath and a native teaclier. Churches
were organized at Sabathu and Jalandar.
Some new members were admitted to most of
the churches ; and the number reported from
HINDOSTAN.
447
all the stations, except Agra aud Saharunpur,
was 107.
In January, 1848, the Eev. A. Alexander
Hodge and his wife, and the Rev. Charles W.
Forman, arrived in India. The former joined
the Allahabad, and the latter the Lodiana
Mission. In November, Mr. Campbell and
his wife reached Calcutta, on their return to
Saharunpur, accompanied by the Rev. John
S. Woodside and his wife, of the Reformed
Presbyterian Church, destined to the same sta-
tion. Mr. Julius F. Ullman, a German teach-
er, who had lived for some years in India, be-
came connected with the Furrukhabad Mis-
sion, and was licensed to preach the Gospel by
the Presbytery. Mr. Porter returned to this
country on a visit with his motherless children,
and Mr. Rankin and his family came home on
account of his ill-health. Mrs. Scott was
called to her rest while on her return to this
country for her health. A new station was
formed at Ambala, a city almost equally dis-
tant from Lodiana, Saharunpar, and Sabathu,
which was occupied by Mr. Jamiesou and a
native catechist. Some new members were
admitted to the churches, and a few were sus-
pended from church privileges. The second
meeting of the Synod of North India was
held at Agra, in December of this year. The
minutes of this meeting, and also of the first
meeting,'are published in the Foreign Mission-
ary Chronicle of November, 1849. They will
be read in future ages, as well as at the present
time, with deep interest.
In the next year, Mr. Porter returned, with
his wife, to his field of labor ; Mrs. Rudolph
and Mrs. Freeman were taken to their rest ;
and Messrs. Irving and Wray aud their fami-
lies returned to this country on account of
health. Mr. Ullman received ordination from
the Presbytery of Furrukhabad, and John
Had, a native catechist, was licensed to preach
the Gospel by the Presbytery of Allahabad.
A new station was formed at Lahor, the chief
city of the Punjab, which was occupied by
Messrs. Newton and Forman. A church was
organized at Ambala, aud a special work of
grace was manifested at Futtehgurh, as the
result of which thirty-three members were ad-
mitted to the communion of the church. The
whole number of church members reported
this year was 16 .
The year 1850 was marked by the arrival
in India of the Rev. James II. Orbison, to
join the Lodiana Mission ; the Rev. Messrs.
David E. Campbell and Robert S. Fullerton
and their wives, to join the Furrukhabad Mis-
sion ; and the Rev. Messrs. Lawrence G. Hay
and Horatio W. Shaw and their wives, to be
connected with the Allahabad Mission ; apd
by the return to this country of Mr. Hodge
and his wile, on account of her health, and of
Mr. Freeman, whose health had also become
impaired. The number of church members re-
ported this year was 209.
Messrs. J. Wilson and W. H. McAuIey and
their families came home in 1851, on account
of health. Mr. Freeman, with his wife, re-
turned to his field of labor, and Messrs. Ru-
dolph and Ullman were married. The num-
ber of church members reported this year was
231.
In 1852, Mr. Scott made a visit to this
country on account of his children, and Mr.
Newton and his family came home on account
of his health. The Rev. Robert E. Williams
embarked for India, and arrived at Agra early
in the following year. Schools were now
established at this city for the education of the
children of persons of mixed parentage, Euro-
pean and native, who are commonly called
East Indians, a class of growing numbers, in-
telligence, and influence. The members of the
church, according to the report of this year,
were 255.
The buildings required for their use were
purchased, with the aid of very handsome
donations from the late lamented Governor of
the North-western Provinces, the Hon. J.
Thomason, and other English friends. One
feature of the missionary cause in India should
be nientioned in this connection, as truly grati-
fying. From the beginning the missionaries
have enjoyed the confidence of many of the
English residents in that country— civilians,
officers in the army, and others. With the
best knowledge of the work in progress, they
have considered it their privilege to promote
it by their sympathy, influence, and very lib-
eral gifts ; and thus have they greatly encour-
aged the missionary brethren, gratified the
friends of missions in this country, aud pro-
moted the cause of the Redeemer.
In 1853, Mr. Scott, with his wife, returned
to India ; Mr. Orbison was married ; and Mrs.
Seeley and Mr. Porter were called to their
rest. The work of the missions continued to
be carried forward with fidelity and zeal.
The preceding sketch conveys a very inade-
quate view of the work of evangelization
which our brethren in India have been permit-
ted already to accomplish. Besides preaching
statedly at their various stations, they are
accustomed during the cold months of each
year to make journeys into parts of the coun-
try not yet occupied, in order to make known
the way of life by public discourses, conversa-
tion, and the distribution of the Scriptures
and other Christian books. To thousands of
towns and villages has the Gospel been pub-
lished on these tours. They are accustomed
also to attend the Mel as held at particular
times and places. These are assemblages of
the natives for religious ceremonies, but are
attended by many for purposes of trade or
amusement-— so that they may be regarded as
a kind of fair. They are held at places ac-
counted holy, such as Hardwar, where the
Gauges enters the plains, and Allahabad,
where the Ganges, the Jumna, and according
448
niNDOSTAN.
to the nalive tradition a third river, invisible,
unite their stroams. Immense crowds, amount-
ing to hundreds of thousands, inchiding many
pilgrims and visitors from the most distant
parts of the land, attend the more celebrated
of these Melas ; and there are numerous others
of less note, attended by people from the
neighboring towns and villages. They afford
opportunities for widely disseminating the
knowledge of the Gospel. Tlie good influence
exerted in this way will not be known until
the great day reveals it, but sometimes it is
signally displayed. An aged Brahmin had
made a pilgrimage from Jubbclpore to attend
the Mela at Allahabad, a journey of several
hundred miles, to wash away his sins in the
Ganges. There he heard a discourse by one
of the missionaries, which shook his faith in
Hindooism. He returned home without hav-
ing had an interview -with the missionary, and
was led by the persijasioii of a Qazi to study
the Koran ; but he found in Mohammedanism
no rest for his troubled mind. Having by
some means obtained a portion of the Scrip-
tures, he carefully studied its lessons, and
taught them to his only daughter. At this
point, an English officer became acquainted
with him. and found that he had renounced his
own religion, and was sincerely seeking a
knowledge of the Christian faith in the face
of many difficulties. A Hindi Bible for him
•was requested from one of the missionaries at
Agra, and thus his historj- became known to
the mi.ssionary brethren.
Another means of promoting a knowledge
of the Christian religion has been afforded by
the press. Numerous tracts and catechisms,
in various Hindoo dialects, and some larger
works, have been published. The AVay of
Life, by Dr. Hodge, translated into Hindus-
tani ; another work, with a similar title, by a
German missionary ; a translation of the Ko-
ran into Hindustani, with notes in refutation
of Its errors ; the Westminster Confession of
Faith ; a volume of hymns : revised editions
of the Scriptures, in whole or in part ; a trans-
lation of the books of Genesis, E.vodus, chap-
ters 1-20, and I'salms, and most of the New
Testament, into Punjabi, by Messrs. Newton
and Janvier, arc among the larger works i.s-
sued by the press. The whole amount of
printing at Lodiaua and Allahabad from the
beginning is over one hundred, millions of
pages, of which the sacred writings form a
large portion. By means of these Christian
bo()ks a large amount of truth, ^uibversive of
idolatry and Mohammedanism, and setting
forth the true religion, has been widely diffused.
Some striking examples of good which has
been done in this way, sometimes in places far
remote from the stations of our brethren, have
been reported in their letters.
Still another imjiortant agency has been the
schools of the missions. 'I'hcse have been sui^-
ported from the beginning, it having been cou-
sidcred from the commencement of the work
an object of the greatest importance to train
up a native ministry ; and the number of
scholars has gradually increased until, as
stated in the report of 1854, about two thou-
sand nine hundred of the native youth are now
under instruction, A few of the scholars are
in elementary schools, but most of them are in
schools of a higher grade ; and all of them
have been brought in greater or less degree
under the influence of Christian instruction
and example. A large proportion of them
have become convinced of the folly, and in
some measure of the sin, of idolatry. Many of
them are prepared to acknowledge that Chris-
tianity is the true religion ; some of them have
become the professed followers of our Lord,
and a few are laboring in various ways — one
as an ordained minister, others as teachers, ca-
techists, and Scripturereaders — to bring their
countrymen to the knowledge of Jesus Christ
as the Saviour of sinners.
The preaching of the Gospel in these mis-
sions has not been in vain, as the preceding
statements have shown. It is with sincere
thanksgiving that we can refer to still another
and more impressive proof of the blessing of
God on the labors of his servants, — the Chris-
tian life and the dying testimony of some of
the converts, to the power of divine grace. An
affecting and beautiful little memoir was pub-
lished by Mr. Warren, a few years ago, of
Jatni, a member of the church at Allahabad.
She was the daughter of a Brahmin, but she
became a child of God. in all the relations
and events of life, her deportment was exem-
plary. And when called at length to pa-ss
over Jordan, she was supported by a good
hope through grace, Mr, Warren, with ten-
der caution, liad apprised her of the probable
termination of her disease ; and he adds, " I
was delighted to find that she had thought of
it, and had come to feel willing that God
should do with her, as to life just as he
pleased. I questioned her closely, and set
death and the judgment before her plainly;
but her nerves Avere firm, her eye clear, and
her voice calm and steady : ' I know Christ,
and can fully and completely trust him in all
things. He keeps my mind in perfect peace.'
I saw her often, and always found her the
same." She was enabled to resign her soul,
luT husband and her child to the care of her
Father in heaven, and at the early age of
twenty-two she departed joyfully to be with
Christ. Another example hardly less striking
was presented in the Christian death of a na-
tive catechist at Saharunpur. His missionary
friend, Mr. Campbell, who had frequent and
most pleasing interviews with him on his
death-bed, gives a very interesting account of
his religious views and hopes: "I asked him
if he was afraid to die ? 'No, sir,' he said, ' I
am not now afraid. ... I am now fully recon-
ciled to the will of God. I do not wish to live
I
flINDOSTAN.
449
longer in tWs sinful world.' On being asked
■where his hopes for salvation were placed, he
replied emphatically, ' On Christ alone : he is
the only Saviour, and I know he will not dis-
appoint my hopes ; ' and then, bursting into
tears, he said, ' 0 sir, how much I owe to you !
You are the means of leading me to Christ,
and of instructing me and saving my soul.'
This was so much- more than I had expected, it
was too much for me, and we both wept toge-
ther. At that moment I thought that this was
more than enough to compensate me for all
the little trials I have ever been called to en-
dure as a missionary. I could have changed
places with dear Samuel, to enjoy his happi-
ness and assurance of hope." Examples like
these are precious seals of the favor of Heaven
towards the missionary work. — Lowrie's Manu-
al of Missions.
TABULAR VIEW.
MISSIONS.
Names of Statioot.
"a
S
n
o
2 o
Missionaries & Ass't Missionaries.
i
a
CS
'c
a
a
scholars.
Ministers.
Lay Teachers and
others.
Boardiflg.
Day.
"3
&
249
159
90
250
395
7i8
220
168
463
100
120
d
a
<
American.
4J
1
3
1
3
0
Male.
Female
LODIAlf A
FURRCKHABAD...
Lodiana
Saharunpur
1834
18.36
1836
1848
1847
1849
1853
1838
1843
1846
1836
1852
1853
2
2
'2
'3
1
4
1
4
4
'i
i
3
2
'2
'2
'4
1
3
4
1
3
'2
1
'4
2
2
7
2
2
19
24
14
7
8
97
5
45
47
0
18
18
15
is
231
150
90
250
395
€40
220
118
415
100
120
45
50
30
Futtegurh
Mynpurie
AT.I.AnABAD
Allahabad
Futtehpore
Total
23
2
21
26
266
27
51
2729
125
2932
Wesleyan Missionary Society. — For many
years Dr. Coke had desired to enter India as a
missionary field, but the keys of India were in
the hands of the East India Company, and they
kept them with the same jealous care as they
did the keys of their counting-houses. The
Doctor had often sounded individuals of the
Company, but without effect. The island of
Ceylon, not being in the Company's charter,
became the object of Dr. Coke's attention with
the hope that it might prepare the way for
entrance into India. Finding certain gentle-
men, high in office, willing to encourage the
Gospel in the East, Dr. Coke became satisfied
of his call to go, provided he could find six
young men of hopeful talents willing to devote
their lives to the work. He waited on the
late Dr. Buchanan, and consulted him on the
subject. And when his intentions became
known, five preachers already in the work,
expressed their readiness to go. To these
were added Benjamin Clough, a local preacher.
The conference could not but approve of the
plan, as Providence obviously opened the way ;
the Doctor being willing if necessary to bear
the expense of the outfit, which amounted to
above £6000. After the conference of 1813, he
assembled the six brethren in London, and pro-
cured them a Portuguese tutor, together with
a printing-press and types, as one or two of
the missionaries understood the art of printing.
29
Their books, clothes and other necessaries,
were furnished suitable for a permanent resi-
dence in India. Having established them-
selves in Ceylon they soon turned their thoughts
to the continent of India, where God seemed
to be opening their way ; and it was decided
that Mr. Lynch, the senior missionary, should'
proceed to Madras, which he did, Jan. 25, 1817,
taking with him letters of introduction from
persons of the highest consideration at Colum-
bo, to their friends at the presidency, which
insured for him a kind reception. His piety
and zeal soon endeared him to all who were
interested in the progress of Christianity, and
Madras became to him, in a short time, a
scene of considerable usefulness.
Mr. if Mrs. Horner arrived in Bombay, in
September, 1817, and the day following were
kindly received by Sir Evan Nepean, the gov-
ernor. On the same day he waited upon the
Bishop of Calcutta who expressed his good
opinion of the zeal and conduct of the Wesley-
an missionaries in Ceylon, and wished Mr.
Horner equal success at Bombay. Mr. Horner
immediately applied himself to the study of the
Mahratta language under the tuition of a Brah-
min. He soon acquired the language, and
began to preach to the people : he also gather-
ed a school of fifty boys, to whose instruction
he devoted himself. In 1819 the English and
Malabar school of Mr. Lynch was attended by
450
niNDOSTA^.
150 chiklrcD, aud the Mahratta school of Mr.
HorncT bad 180. lu consequence of applica-
tiou iVoiu Eurojican residents at Bcngalore and
Scyingapatam, in the jircsideucy of Madras,
Mr. Hook and Mr. fy Mrs. Mowait ■were ap-
pointed by the missionary committee to proceed
to those stations, Mr. Close Laving been pre-
viously directed to assist Mr. Lynch at Madras.
On the 19th May, 1820, Mr. and Mrs.Mowatt,
and Mr. Iloole embarked at Gravescnd, in the
Taiija>-e, a private trader, in company with
Sir llichard Ottely, Chief-justice of Ceylon, Mr.
and Mrs. Brovy-ning, of the Church of England
Missionary Society, and Adam Munhi Eathaua
and Alexander IJcrraa Rama, two Budhist
l^riests, who had been educated and baptized
iu England by Dr. Adam Clarke, under the
sanction of the Methodist Missionary Commit-
tee. On the nth of September, the vessel an-
chored off the river, near Batticaloa. The day
following having landed some baggage, they
weighed anchor, but had not sailed far before
they were overtaken by a tremendous storm,
in which the vessel was set on fire by lightning,
and they escaped with the loss of everything
on board. Iu 1821 both the missionaries were
obliged to leave Bombay on account of afflic-
tion. But at Madras the brethren were ena-
bled to labor with considerable encouragement,
where they Lad then 147 persons united with
them in cLurcL fellowship, and 4 schools which
were well attended, instructions being communi-
cated in Tamil and English. In 1823 Seringa-
palam was added to the list of stations, Mr. Iloole
Dcing placed there. So that this year they
were regularly established at Madras, where
they had four missionaries, at Bangalore, where
they had one, at Negapatani, where they had
two, and one at Seringapatam ; the number of
members being 191, composed of English, Por-
tuguese, Dutch, and Hindoos. They had
erected nine or ten chapels, with as many
schools; one of the chapel.* and two of the
schools being at St. Thomas's Mount. In 1827
the schools had increased to IG, with 542 child-
ren, and the church members to 251, but part
of this increase of the members had arisen from
the number of pious soldiers in regiments
which had been just landed in India, on ac-
count of the war then raging between the Bri-
tish and the Burmese, during which Dr. Judson
and his devoted wife were suQcriug such " fiery
trials," at the hands of the latter power. In
proportion as the natives began, on conviction,
to attach themselves to their societies, the
usual trials are narrated by the missionaries.
Many of the converts had to endure the keen-
est persecution, and all the injuries connected
with loss of caste, and expulsion from their
families ; but by their faith and patience they
showed, that they willingly " counted all things
lo.«s for the excellency of tLe knowledge of
Christ Jesus their Lord."
In 1830 the number of missionaries was
nine ; of schools 25 ; and of scLolars 1,000, of
whom many were females ; with 314 members
in Society, TLis year Calcutta was added to
the list of stations, with 31cssrs. Ptrcival and
Ilodson as the laborers there. They operated
chiefly among the Portuguese and Bengalee
inhabitants of that city, and soon found a
wide and promising field of labor, both among
the young aud tlic adult pojphlatiou. 'J'wo
years afterwards, however, the committee in
London considered that this mission had not
presented those results which would warrant
its contiimance. The station was given up,
Mr. Percival being sent to Ceylon, and Mr.
Hodsou to Baugalore.
A native ministry was raised up from the
ranks of the local preachers, who cooperated
with their European brethren in preaching
Christ to their countrymen. The printing-press
was, meanwhile, at work, diflusing a Christian
literature among the people, and quietly under-
miuing their systems of falsehood and pollu-
tion, M'hich had stood for ages, only to deprave
and oppress their wretched adLerents.
In tLe year 1837, the Eev. Jonathan Crow-
thcr was appointed General Superintendent of
the India Missions. He was accompanied by
the Eev. Messrs. Best, Jenkins, Male, Griffith,
and Fox, and their families. After shipwreck
and much suffering, they at length arrived in
safety. It is wortLy of remark, as an exempli-
fication of the advantages derived to the mis^
sionary cause from the Theological Institution,
founded by the Wesleyans only three years
before, that these five missionaries having been
students in the Theological Institution, had
gained such a knowledge of the Tamil and
Canarese languages before their embarkation,
that on their arrival in India, four of them
immediately commenced preaching to the peo-
ple in Tamil. This year several conversions
took place an)ong the natives, aud they were
received into the Church of Christ by public
baptism at Madras. One of these cases justi-
fies a more extended notice. Arvmaga Tam-
hiran was a native of the province of Tanjorc,
in Southern India, so much celebrated for
numerous and splendid temples, and for a pop-
ulation inveterately attached to caste und
heathen superstitions. He was born of highly
respectable parents, and had the advantages of
what is esteemed among his countrymen, as a
good education. He was zealous above many
his equals, in seeking knowledge, but appears
never to have l)een satisfied in the degradation
of heathen worship. At a very early age he
lost his parents, and became united to the sect
of Siva, under a celebrated gooroo, one of his
relatives. After making pilgrimages of many
thousand miles, he came back to the land of
his birth. There he had time for reflection.
In those moments wlieu he brought to mind
what he had pa.«sed through, and how all his
companions that had set out with him on those
weary pilgrimages had perished, some bv fevers,
some by wild beasts, aud he only left alive, his
HINDOSTAN.
451
spirit was agitated, aud he gi'oaned within
himself with disquietude of conscience. He
conversed with several native Christians, and
heard the Gospel from the lips of its ministers.
He felt the appeals of Christians against the
besotted maxims and usages of a defiling sys-
tem of heathenism, whose vain sacrifices and
bloody orgies proclaim in every high place
that its worship is that of devils, and not of
the true God. The conversion of one of his
pupils was the means of leading to the first
interview between Sambrian and Mr. Carver.
His intelligent mind soon opened to convic-
tion, and he at once entered upon an investi-
gation of the claims of Christianity, and the
result was his converaion. He soon evidenced
his sincerity by sacrificing all for Christ.
This aroused the bitterest opposition. Several
of his former disciples, assisted by other hea-
then, attempted to carry him off by force ;
aud an appeal had to be made to the protec-
tion of the law. In the court-house, before
the magistrate, aud a multitude of his fellow-
countrymen, he " witnessed a good confession."
He appeared in the court in his heathen robes
for the last time, only that he might be iden-
tified there as the head of his order. On that
occasion he rose and addressed the magistrate
as follows :
" Sir, I am a man well known in Madras,
Iiaving resided in this city since 1824. I was
born in the province of Tanjore. I was united
when very young to the sect of Siva, in whose
robes I appear before you this day. For many
years I was engaged in traveling by way of
Delhi, and other great cities, to the holy places
of the Hindoos. I dwelt three years at Casi
in Bengal, thence I traveled along the coast
to Madras, by way of Juggernaut. I visited
all the holy places in the south of India, and
went by Eamiseram to Ceylon, visited Mannar,
Colombo, Candy, the holy places called Kat-
teragan, on the east side of Ceylon, and re-
turned by Batticaloa, Trincomallee, and Jafiha,
to the continent. Fifty years of my life have
been thus spent. I sought all heathen books,
but found nothing for the soul. I have taught
many hundred disciples, as you know," (for the
magistrate knew him well, and congratulated
the missionary on having such a convert.)
He continued : " I found nothing in heathen
booh, in heathen temples, in heathen ceremo-
nies to satisfy the soul. I met with this minis-
ter, (pointing to Mr. Carver,) and he opened to
my understanding the way of salvation, the
treasures of the Scriptures : they suited my
dissatified heart ; I went again and again to
the missionary ; I determined to abandon
heathenism. By heathenism I got money in
abundance, and honors. I was worshiped by
my disciples ; but my soul sunk back at the
blasphemy against the God of whom I had
heard. I knew not how to escape from my
heathen friends and disciples, who were about
me on every side, when this minister, sir,
(looking at the magistrate with great respect
and firmness,) offered mc an asylum, a place in
the Mission premises. There, sir, I went of
my own free choice, there I was when the
heathen made the violent attempt to carry me
away by force, there I wish to remain and be
baptized in the name oi Jesus; to teach others
also of this Saviour, as some little attempt to
remedy the evils of having taught so many
heathen disciples a false way in time past."
The circumstance of one who had occupied
so high a station renouncing his honors and
emoluments, and subjecting himself to reproach
and persecution, for the sake of Christianity,
awoke the spirit of inquiry ; and his Poem, in
which he contrasted Christianity and heathen-
ism, was eagerly inquired after, and exten-
sively read. Three editions in a few weeks
could not satisfy the demand. Every one
wanted a copy ; they were carried far and
wide by the natives, sung in the streets,
and_ even read by the children ; until the
spirit of the heathen was excited to opposi-
tion. The American missionaries at Madras
printed an edition of 10,000 copies, besides an
edition published by the Madras Religious
Tract Society. From 80,000 to 100,000 copies
were distributed in a few months. The effect
produced by the conversion of this distin-
guished individual was so great, that a Eu-
ropean missionary, who had spent forty years
in India, and who was present at his baptism,
declared " he had not seen any thing like it be-
fore." The missionaries diligently improved
the increasing opportunities, which this event
had afforded, for prosecuting the work among
the natives.
In 1838, Goobee, in the Mysore coxintry,
was occupied by the "WcBleyan missionaries,
and Mr. Hodson appointed 'to that station.
In a few months after he was enabled to open
a mission in the city of Mysore. In the older
stations in India there had been an increase in
the number of professing Christians, several
of the heathens were baptized, the public ser-
vices were well attended, and the schools were
in a prosperous condition.
About this time the various societies in
South India were greatly agitated by the sub-
ject of caste; but the universal decision of
the missionaries of all denominations was, that
this odious distinction should be abolished, so
far as the church of Christ was concerned. In
this year arrangements were made to establish
on the Coromandel coast an institution for
training a native ministry, from the operation
of which much assistance was expected in ad-
vancing the work of God.
In 1839, the Eev. Messrs. Arthur, (now one
of the General Secretaries of the Wesleyan
Missionary Society,) Squarebridge, Garret, and
Pope, were sent out to reinforce the Indian
Mission, and extend its operations by planting
new stations. Mr. Arthur was sent to Goobee
and Mr. Squarebridge to assist Mr. Hodson at
452
HINDOSTAN.
Mysore. A printing-press -was also torwardcd
to Bangalore, to assist the missionaries to meet
the increased demand for Christian books and
tracts in the Cauarese languages. In 1841,
this mission experienced a painful reduction
in its strength and efficiency. Mr. Square-
bridge died of cholera at Coonghull, Mr. Fox
■v^■lls also called to his reward ; while Mr.
Cryer and Mr. Arthur were both obliged to
return home on account of the failure of their
health ; the committee, however, were enabled
during the next year partially to supply the
vacancies thus created, by the appointment of
Messrs. Hardy and Sanderson. This year a
perfect font of Canarese type was prepared in
London for the use of the mission. The head-
Bchool in Mysore (the capital, with a popula-
tion of T0,000.) is patronized and supported
by the Rajoh, much to the displeasure of many
of the Brahmins of his court- He has shown
much interest in some of the operations of the
Mission ; and it may be hoped that this exam-
ple of tlie relaxation of Hindoo bigotry will
be followed by many of his subjects. In this
year, also, the officers of the Second Regiment
of Native Infantry erected a chapel at the
French Rocks Cantonment, about five miles
N. E. of Seringapatam, and presented it,
through Mr. Hodson, to the Society.
Mr. Crowthcr having to return home in
1843, the Rev. Joseph Roberts succeeded him.
The next year three more missionaries were
scut out.
The opposition awakened about this time
among the Brahmins and others, showed that
the mission ii-ries were making a decided im-
pression upon the minds of the population, and
this was further evident by the progressive in-
crease in the number of professing Christians,
and in the eagerness with which the people at
large availed themselves of the instruction
afiorded in the Mission schools. The press at
Bangalore was meanwhile diligently employed ;
the amount of its issues this year in the Cana-
rese, Sanscrit, and English languages was over
843,000 pages ; in the next year it was 922,000
jiagcs ; and in 1851 and 1852 it was nearly
two millions of pages in each year ; and over
100.000 of the Canarese people, with more or
less regularity, had the Gospel preached to
them by the missionaries. In 1849 a Canarese
Brahmin of high caste, with several other con-
verts, were baptized in ^Mysore.
Alter thirty years of devoted labor among
the Hindoos, in Ceylon and Continental India,
the Rev. Jo.seph Roberts was called from his
work to his etc rnal rest. Mr. Roberts received
his first nppointmcnt to the East in the year
1818. His vigor of mind made the acquisition
of ihe languages in which he had to labor a
woik (if c( niparative case; and his frank and
gcr.cKus naliire endeared him to his colleagues,
and to all clasics of the inhabitants of Ceylon,
for wl.csc >i,iri1«al benefit and salvation he
labond lor many years wilh faithfulness and
zeol. In 1833 he published a most interesting
volume, entitled, " Oriental Illustrations of the
Sacred Scriptures," which reached a second
edition, and has been very much read and ad-
mired, as a remarkable chapter in the history
of the human mind, and as throwing light
on numerous passages of holy Scripture, which
has brought out their meaning with peculiar
beauty and force. He also executed some
translations from the Tamil language, which
were published by the Oriental Translation
Society in London, connected with the Royal
Asiatic Society for Great Britain and Ireland,
of which society he was a corresponding mem-
ber from an early period of his residence in the
East. In the year 1843 he succeeded the Rev.
Jonathan Crowther as General Superintendent
of the Society's Mission in the Presidency of
Madras. In this vast field he found ample em-
ployment for his sanctified energies, and ad-
dressed liimself to his work with the utmost
zeal and devotion. In preaching the word of
God both to Europeans and natives, and in the
performance of pastoral duties, he was indefati-
gable, as well as in the superintendence of
schools for children, and catechmnen classes for
young people. Though necessarily engaged
in the management of the temporal afi'airs of
the mission under his direction, he was an ac-
tive member of the Committe^of the Madra.s
Auxiliary Bible Society, and of its Translation
Committee, and of several other religious and
charitable associations. In addition to his
other engagements, he prepared a lucid and
comprehensive " Treatise on Caste, and its
bearing on Christianity and Missions," which
was published in England a few years ago ; he
also contributed to the " Wesleyan Methodist
Magazine," and other periodicals, several valu-
able essays on Paganism and Popery, and on
other subjects connected with the work of mis-
sions. The lubors and anxieties connected
with the important position he held, are sup-
posed to have weighed down his frame and
shortened his earthly career. He sunk into
the grave, exhausted mainly by the toils and
conflicts of the missionary life. His excellent
widow, Mrs. Roberts, continued in India to
render the aid of her valuable experience and
services in the superintendence of the native
female schools.
As an evidence of the impression produced
in favor of education upon the minds of the
population of Mysore, it may be stated that an
urgent petition "from that city was presented
to the Wesleyan Conferenu;, held in Bradford
in 1853, requesting the establishment of a firsts
class English school among them. This re-
markable and interesting document occupied
many folios of India paper of a large size,
neatly backed with blue ribbon. It was a
petition from the Hindoo and Mohammedan
inha1)i1ants of the city of Mysore, written in
the Canarese language, with an Engli.sh trana-
I lation, and signed by 3,340 persons, in nine
HINDOSTAN.
453
different languages. It represented
their great desire to have an Eng-
lish school for their children, and
requested that one might bo estab-
lished ; stating that, by so doing,
" great fame and merit would accrue
to their benefactors." If a qualified
teacher and half the expenses could
be provided by the Conference,
the bearer of tlae document enga-
ged on behalf of the natives of My-
sore, that they would raise the re-
mainder. This accomplished, a
monthly grant of thirty pounds
would be given by the liberality of
tlie Mysore Commissioner. It was
listened to with deep interest and
attention by the Conference, and
the request granted. Perhaps this
is the first instance in which an as-
sembly of Christian ministers has
received a similar petition from such
a number of heathens and Mussul-
mans, requesting the benefits of edu-
cation at their hands, and it re-
minds us of the prayer of the Man
of Macedonia, " Come over and help
us." The money for this interesting
object was subscribed, and a valua-
ble school apparatus provided and
taken to India at the commencement
of this year, by Rev. E. J. Hardey.
At present, Rev. D. Sanderson is
busily employed in London, with
Mr. Watts, the type-founder, in pre-
paring new fonts of Canarese type,
for the use of the printing establish-
ment in Bangalore, which will fur-
ther increase its efficiency, — already
so great, that few provincial offices
in England send out more beautiful
work, either as to typography or
binding. The labors of Mr. Gar-
rett in that department have been
of distinguished value ; and Mr.
Sanderson, by able translations of
very recondite native works, has done
much to secure to the Christian
press a command of the literature of
the country.
The printing establishment in
Bangalore was never so efficient, and
never promised such extensive use-
fulness as at the present. During
the year it has issued 59,448 publi-
cations. It is impossible by human
arithmetic to calculate the real bene-
fit which is conferred upon India by
this one establishment. — Crowther's
History of Methodism ; Hook's 3Iis-
sio7i to Madras ; W. Arthur's Re-
miniscences of a 31ission to the My-
'"""•'■ • The IVesleyan Missionary No-
tices, and the Amituxl Reports.-
"W. Butler.
-Rev.
2" 2 ,A
^
1
^ L
c«.g jS —
.nrH rH CS T)<
C^ i-l r-t T-l CO
%''B^
E->
'"'
a
Numbe
icting fc
end bol
Week-d
C^ C-* CO o ^o
o
fa
'~'
r
^ 1
1
1
1
So^a
^
O O ^ lO 1 s
O . to to 1 CJ 1 rH
o-o rt
1 c
3
CO r-lrH 1 u
J Oi
1
1
1
•saxag
0 0)05 0 a
5
^'^oq JO SJU^oqag
to Tfl f-l to ex
iH I-I iH -^
D
CO iH rH *0 1 O
-XbcI jo jaquin^
1
1
1-"
•siootiog
M^ tf c-
I c
rH .C5-* It
-.(■e(i JO .taquinjij
1
C)
•b-axag iijoq
JO sjmoqDfi-njBq
Oi . . t£
} ir
: S
-qcc; JO Jaquinjvi
•siooqag-qiTiq
rH . . ,-
]
N
-qns; JO joquinx;
•diqbMaqiuajj
Ttieo CO c-
^ t-
C)CO .r-
3 CO
JO.J IBHX no
co
O
•sjaqmaK qs-it'iio
t- ta
H
pajipajoDv puD
1-1 IM r-l OC
) C
i
5 -3
TI"^ JO jaqmnj^
^3
^2
•
C3
o ?
3i
* * « »
«
H
O
r^ •>-<
C
» C-)
t4
Oh
Ji^ 2
5
a;
-<
B
» * « «
»
w
a
K
S5
•2.5^ S
o
<
!« H
^
H
w
a
H
J
^° J3
« * « *
*5
Eh
O .t^rj
rH •
tc
to
Kiu
o
H
fc»
^
W
■s
>
«
d
m
u
* « « «
«
P3
<
Oir^r^r^
If
o
6
<i
•fcjatrisissv
H
pa's sauTjnoissire
CO IM 1-1 1-1
t-
lO CO rH rH
o
s
•saaBid-Saiqa^ajj
jaqjo JO Jaqnin^
toco T»l <c
a-
ffl C^ -C^
to
>a
•Kiaduqo
JO aaqran^
■* fj CO rH
c
rHUrHrH
o
13
w
;^
o
C2 H r/2
o <; H
k3 S R
<! a
U
« J a
,— ^
a
a
o
gS-
<U
W « QJ
"i
0
e.
E
E
c
' ^
O
a
HH
c
>
III!
J V
ng-55
H
EH
^
T-l c4 of -^ lO
rH ti CO-^
454
HINDOSTAN.
TVu^sii C.U.TIXISTIC Methodist Missionary
SociETV. — This society sent out Rev. Thomas
Jones, in November, 1840, who commenced a
station at Chcrrapunji, in the north-east of
Bengal, near Sylhet, among tlic Kassias, one
of the hill tribes. Other missionaries follow-
ed, and in 1850 another station was com-
mence 1 at Sylhet. In 1852, the number of
comiauuicants at the two stations was twenty-
eight. Rev. AV. Levas has translated the
four Gospels and the Acts into Kassias ; a
translation of Matthew, by Mr. Jones, hav-
ing been previously printed in the Roman
character. — AV. B.
American Baptist Mission among the Te-
LOOGOOS. — The country of the Teloogoos lies on
the western coast of the Bay of Bengal, and
stretches nearly 800 miles from the northern
part of the Carnatic to the borders of Orissa.
The Teloogoos or Telingas are believed to be
descendants of an ancient a'.id once powerful
race of India, and though now subject to dif-
ferent jurisdictions, they are united by a com-
TQon language and common traditions as one
people. They are generally estimated at up-
wards of ten millions in number, of whom
three millions dwell within the Northern Cir-
cars, or coUectorates of the presidency of Ma-
dras, while the remaining part are under the
rule of the Nizam of Hyderabad, or Golcon-
dah. Beyond this region also they are widely
scattered over the territory of Southern India,
especially in the districts of Tanjore, Mysore,
and the city of Madras. The religion of the
Teloogoos is Brahminism, and the system of
caste is established among them, scj)arating
them into classes and ranks, between which in-
tercourse is impossil)le. ]'Jach trade or occu-
pation is a caste by itself, and its memliors,
with their families and kindred, cannot become
connected, nor can they even associate with
those belonging to any other.
The mission of the Annjrican Baptist Mis-
sionary Union among this peojjle owes its ori-
gin to the representations of Rev. Amos Sut-
ton, of the English General Baptist ^fission in
Ori.ssa, during his visit to the United States in
1835. The London Missionary Society had
stationed its earliest missionaries in India
among the Teloogoos, but in consequence of
their d(Nith and other causes, the whole region
had been al)andoned. Their missionaries and,
others dwelling in the neighboring countries,
had prepared a grammar and dictionary of the
language, and had translated the entire Bible,
of whicli the New Testament, and some books
of the Old, had been printed in two editions,
one at Serampore and one at Madras. The
language was said to possess unusual copious-
ness and variety, and the peoj)le to be among
the m.ist interesting and intelligent to be found
in India.
On the 22d of September, 1835, Rev. Sa-
muel S. Daj' and his wife, and Rev. E. L.
Abbott havmg been appointed missionaries
among these people, sailed for Calcutta in the
same ship which bore Rev. Mr. Malcolm, the
agent of the Board appointed to visit the mis-
sions of the East, and Rev. Mr. Sutton, who
was returning to Orissa. Mr. Abbott was,
on his arrival at Calcutta, transferred to the
Karen mission in Burmah, while Mr. and Mrs.
Day immediately proceeded to Yizagapatam,
where they entered upon the study of the lan-
guage, with the aid of the books prepared by
the missionaries of former years. After pass-
ing several months in acquiring the language
and observing the condition of the country and
its population, Mr. Day, with the advice of
Rev. Mr. Malcom, at length, in March, 1837,
fixed his residence at Madras, which, though it
was already the seat of more than one mission-
ary, yet had none for the largo Teloogoo popu-
lation of the city and its suburbs. With the
aid of a native convert whom he employed, he
established three schools, containing about
seventy scholars, and assisted as far as he was
able, in maintaining public worship in the na-
tive language, and also preached in English
and distributed tracts and portions of the
Scriptures to those of the population who
could read. In 1838, a church of sixteen
meraljevs, English, Eurasian, Hindoo, and
Burnian, was organized at Madras, and a
branch of it, comprising soldiers of an English
regiment, was also organized at Bellary. The
preaching in English was understood by mul-
titudes of the native population, and the mem-
bers of the schools soon evinced their desire to
acquire the language in preference to any
other branch of knowledge — a fact which
plainly indicates that the people not nnfre-
(luently attend the mi.?sionary schools, merely
for the purpose of gaining some worldly ad-
vantage. The experience of missionaries in
India on this subject is rapidly convincing
them that teaching English is not a part of
their appropriate duty. .
Mr. Day was obliged to prosecute his mis-
sion alone, and was constantly embarrassed
for the want of the sympathy and cooperation
of an associate ; but the Board now found
themselves exceedingly restricted in funds, and
unable to send another missionary to his aid.
During the first four years of his residence in
the co\iiitry he had baptized many S(ildiers of
the Englisli regiments antl other English resi-
dents of the country. Ho had also baptized
several Eurasians and Tamils, but none of the
Teloogoos had thus far (;mbraced Christianity.
In these circumstances he decided, in the sum-
mer of 1839, to seek another station for the
mission. He at length fixed upon Nellore,
and removed thither, with his family, in Feb-
ruary, 1840. Having rented of the govern-
ment a lut, and erected a suitable building to
serve as a mission-house and a zayat, he imme-
diately commenced the daily reading of the
Scriptures, and preaching on the Sabbath. A
few weeks t\ftor his settlement at Nellore, he
HINDOSTAN.
455
was joined by Rev. Stephen Yan Husen and
bis wife, who had been appointed to the mis-
sion, and in September of the same year he
baptized the first Christian convert from the
Teloogoos. In a visit which Mr. Day subse-
quently made to Madras he found the church
which he had left there scattered, and to a
great extent, fallen from the faith which its
members professed. It was without a pastor,
and its members had ceased to meet together,
and though others were waiting for baptism,
Mr. Day recommended the dissolution of the
church and the organization of another at Ar-
cott, which should embrace all its living mem-
bers and receive the converts who were about
to be baptiiied.
The great external hindrances which the
missionaries from the beginning encountered
among the Teloogoos, arose from the system
of caste, which holds in its iron bondage all
classes of the people in Hindostan. They could
not receive the missionary into their dwellings
lest they should lose caste. They would allow
their children to attend schools for religious
instruction, if given by the missionary, or by
unconverted native teachers, but not by Chris-
tian natives. Children may be sent to the
missionary to be taught, but he may not visit
them in the families to which they belong.
It has been the general practice of mission-
aries of the various Christian denominations
to translate the Scriptures according to the
authorized English version, a practice which
requires the transfer of certain words from the
original Greek without translating them. The
Baptist missionaries, however, both of England
and America, have generally felt obliged to
translate these words, especially the word bap-
tize, according to their own convictions of its
meaning. The adoj^tion of this view by the
Board of Managers as a rule for the guidance
of its missionaries, gave rise to the action on
the part of the American Bible Society, which
resulted in the formation of the American and
Foreign Bible Society, an institution which
was founded and has been supported by a por-
tion of the Baptists of the United States. The
copies of the Scriptures which Messrs. Day
and Yan Husen distributed in Madras and
Nellore had been furnished by the Madras
Bible Society, and printed at that city. But
this society could not print a translation of
the Scriptures made by the Baptist mission-
aries without abandoning their principles, and
the missionaries, on the other hand, could not
adopt any other without disregarding the in-
structions of the managers. This embarrass-
ment was experienced in all the Bajitist mis-
sions, and however much a circulation of the
Bible in diiferent translations is to be regret-
fed, it yet seems to be an inevitable result of
the existing diversity of views in the Christian
world.
In 1841 Messrs. Day and Yan Husen, seeing
the necessity of an additional missionary and
a printing-press, urged the matter in a special
communication upon the attention of the
Board, but in the condition of the treasury at
that time, it was impossible to comply with
their request. In 1843 three additional con-
verts were baptized, and the number of schools
both in the city and the adjoining districts
was considerably enlarged. But the health of
the missionaries now began to decline, and the
mission was soon afterwards crippled, and sub-
sequently doomed to an interruption of several
years in consequence of the disability and ab-
sence of the missionaries. Mrs. Day, whose
health first failed, was recruited after a brief
absence. Mr. Van Husen was obliged to re-
turn to the United States in 1845, and has
never recovered his health. Mr. Day was
suddenly stricken down in October of the same
year, and was obliged to hasten away when
too ill to make any adequate arrangements
either for his personal comfort or the contin-
uance of the mission. The charge of the pro-
perty and the care of the church at Nellore
and the schools were all committed to an Eu-
rasian assistant, while Mr. Day returned to the
United States.
In 1848 the Missionary Union, after having
long considered the question, finding that Mr.
Day had now recovered his health, instructed the
Board to reestablish the mission. In October
of that year Mr. Day, in company with Rev.
Lyman Jewett and Mrs. Jewett, sailed for Cal-
cutta as missionaries at Nellore, where they
arrived in the following April. The missions
had been for more than three years wholly
dependent on the care of a native assistant, a
care which at best could not but be very inad-
equate to its maintenance and progress. The
church was scattered but not destroyed, and
though some had forsaken their faith, a salutary
discipline was productive of the restoration of
others. The schools were soon reassembled,
public worship resumed, books and tracts dis-
tributed, and the whole agency of the mission
again put in operation. The missionaries also
took an early opportunity to attend several
heathen festivals of this country, at which they
met thousands of people from various parts of
India and preached to them the doctrines of
the Gospel. These labors were productive of
much inquiry among the people, and of confes-
sions which are constantly made to the mis-
sionaries, that Brahminism is an imposture
and is destined soon to pass away. There
have also been several apparent conversions,
and two have been baptized ; but the field
occnpied by the mission, it must be admitted,
still continues to be one of great promise rath-
er than of fruit. The missionaries have work-
ed on assiduously beneath the protection of the
English government, among a people of unu-
sual intelligence, among whom great prepara-
tions would appear to have been made for the
spread of the Gospel. The enervating heat of
the climate has repeatedly prostrated their
456
HINDOSTAN.
energies and obliged them to withdraw for a
season to recruit, and at length in June, 1852,
Mr. Day was corapelledby ill-health to return
to the United States. Mr. and Mrs. Jewett
have since been in sole charge of the mission.
The latest reports represent them as still pro-
secuting their accustomed work, experiencing
the greatest kindness and receiving a hearty
cooperation from the English residents at Nel-
lore, and still more encouraged by tokens of
divine approbation in the conversion of several
of their pupils and visitors, of whom one has
lately been baptized.
Statistics of Teloogoo Mission for 1854. — 1
station, 2 missionaries, 2 female assistants, 1
native assistant, 1 church, 9 members, 1 board-
ing-school, 13 pupils, 1 day-school, 50 pupils,
total, 2 schools, 63 pupils. — Frof. W. Gammell.
Basle Missionary Society. — Of the Ger-
man missionary societies, that of Basle was the
first which established a mission in the East
Indies. In 1846 it had, in the province of
Canara, on the west coast of Hiudostan, and
in BoJ^cbagner, north of this, eight stations,
of which Mangalore is the oldest. This was
founded in 1834. It has, in the city and vicin-
ity, several common schools, a high school, and
a lithographic establishment. In 1837 and
1839, followed the stations at Dharwar and
Hoobly, in the South-Maliratta country ; in
1841, the neighboring village of Bettigherry.
There was a prophecy traditional in this place,
that, after the fall of the Indian kingdom, a
king in the West should send messengers to
teach Christianity and do away with caste ;
and as such the German missionaries were re-
ceived. Malsamoodra was also added in the
same year. In 1839, the mission work was
carried on with great success, by Gundert, of
Wurtemburg. In 1840 and 1842, stations
were established at Cannanore and Calicut.
The entire number of European laborers em-
ployed by the Basle Society at these stations,
including eleven women, was thirty-three ;
with thirteen native helpers. 2,000 natives,
partly adults, partly school-children, were con-
nected with the mission. A Basle missionary
in Mangalore had translated several books of
the New Testament into the Tooloo language,
which were lithographed at Mangalore. —
Translated from the German of Wiggers.
The following notices of the several stations
of this mission will show its present condi-
tion.
Mangalore. — In 1846 the lithographic press
at this station issued 12,775 copies of 16 dif-
ferent works in Canarese, Teloogoo, and Ma-
layalim. In the year 1847, 39 persons were
received into the church by baptism, 29 of
whom were adults and 10 children. In the
year following, 24 adults and 10 children were
baptized, and several were excomnuinicated.
During llie years 1849 and 1850, about fifty—
adults and children — were baptized ; and a
boarding-school for Indo-British boys, and an
industrial department, were formed. The
printing in 1850 amounted to 966,230 pages.
Moolky. — At the latest dates, the station at
Fort Moolky, which was commenced in 1845,
had about 50 persons under the immediate
instruction of the mission, a small church, and
a school into which none but Christian chil-
dren were admitted. The missionary, Mr.
Amman, preached the Gospel in most of the
neighboring villages, and was also engaged in
translating the Scriptures, and revising the
Tooloo translation of the Testament.
Ho7wre. — In 1847 there was at this station
one missionary, a small congregation, and a
school of 45 scholars, but s^t a later period the
missionary had been removed, and no one had
taken his place.
DItarwar. — In 1849 ten adults and two little
girls were admitted into the church. Six of
these wei'e Tamulians, a people who up to this
time had rarely afforded any encouragement
to the missionaries. A later report says,
" Several Lingaites seem to be inwardly at-
tached to the Gospel, but the fear of man and
the charms of the world keep them back from
Christ. The thraldom in which the poor Lin-
gaites live, under their avaricious and insolent
high priests, four in number, is very galling.
They farm their disciples out to certain priests,
called priests of thousands, who squeeze from
the poor deluded laity all they can get."
Hoobly. — The success at this station has not
been of the most encouraging nature for the
last few years. Heathen hearers have been
few on the Sabbath ; and, at times, they have
seemed " to shun the word of God in the same
measure as they became more acquainted with
it," whether from indifference or fear, the mis-
sionaries could not tell. Still, the schools
have been well attended, and through these
the seed has been sown among young and old.
Tracts and portions of Scripture were learnt
by heart, and the scholars catechized concern-
ing them.
Bettigherry. — The adult portion of the pop-
ulation at this station and in the villages
around have for several years shown much good
will to the missionaries. In most houses they
have been welcome ; and Hindoo men, when
spoken to of their hardness which prevented
their receiving the Gospel, have entreated the
missionaries to have patience till a better day
should come. In 1848 a Linga priest came to
the station, from some distance, and after mak-
ing careful inquiry into the doctrine preached,
he stayed to learn, and subsequently embraced
Christianity and was baptized. The event
created great sensation at Bettigherry and
elsewhere. He became a zealous laborer, and
has traveled much with the missionarii^ in
their tours through the neighboring country.
Another priest joined them in 1849, and tra-
veled with them several months. A respecta-
ble widow also joined them, was baptized, and
subsequently married to the priest first named.
HINDOSTAN,
457
The people seem persuaded that the new teach-
ers are their best friends, and they come in con-
siderable numbers to hear the Gospel. The
schools are in good condition.
Malasamoodra. — A poor house and hospital
were erected in 1846, by contributions from
friends in Poorah. In June of this year, on
a morning ajipoiuted for the purpose, several
prominent men, natives, entered the temple of
Doorga, and broke the idol and his seat in
pieces and cast them into the street. This
caused considerable excitement, but it soon
subsided, and the idol temple was converted
into a school-house, where the Scriptures were
daily read, and prayer offered to the living
God. Since that period the brethren have
met with serious discouragements, but have
continued to labor with some success, espe-
cially in the schools.
Caterij. — This station, on the Neilgherry
Hills, has been attended with considerable
success. In 1850 a native broke off the inve-
terate habit of opium eating, burnt his charm
books, and withstood strong temptations to
those works of darkness so profitable among
the superstitions inhabitants of the Neilgher-
ries. He attended the school with little child-
ren, though a man of advanced age, because
ho longed to be able to read the word of God.
He was soon to be baptized, as the first fruit
of the mission at this place. The missionaries
have visited the greater part of the several
hundred villages scattered over the Neilgher-
ries, and have become personally acquainted
with a large number of the people. Some of
them have a Tamil New Testament, which,
without being able to read, they worship morn-
ing and evening. Others, from an indefinite
belief in the power of Christ, have received his
name among the rest of the gods, and would
not think that anything could prosper without
the invocation of his name.
Cananore. — During the years 1847 and 1848
the people at this place were visited with cho-
lera and small pox, which proved fatal to
many, and severely taxed the time and strength
of the missionaries in attending upon the sick
and dying. The schools were much inter-
rupted, but have since come together as usual.
Several have been converted, and the mission-
aries record the happy deaths of two or three
native converts within the last few years.
Tellicherrij. — The number of persons bap-
tized at this station in 1846 was 22. A print-
ing-press was set up during that year, from
which was issued 2150 different works. In
1848 this mission shared largely in the special
divine influences which visited the region, and
many of the boys and girls in the schools were
" shaken out of slumber and death," and have
since been baptized. At the out-stations also
several " found grace and life." Compara-
tively few, however, show signs of real spirit-
ual life. The Brahmins, who are few, and the
Nairs, a spirited class of people, keep at a dis-
tance from the missionary. The I'lers are
more accessible, but are altogether taken up
with the cares of the world. The Mussulmen
hate the Gospel, and show their hatred when-
ever they have an opportunity.
Chombala. — A mission was commenced at
this place in 1849, since which time a church
of 20 or 30 members has been gathered, and a
chapel has been built. Micha, a native, hav-
ing been converted, his wife ran away from
him with her children, but returned after a
few months. " Micha's father, an old drunk-
ard, was driven to his house by want. At
first he only laughed and mocked at the Gos-
pel, but after some time, to the astonishment
of all, his mind seemed changed. The very ex-
pression of his countenance was altered. He
has been baptized, with Micha's wife and
children. •
Calicut. — In respect to the care of the poor-
house, which in 1846 was committed to the
missionaries, they say, " There are about 150
inmates, for whom every Saturday a service is
held by one of the catechists. Such an assem-
bly of crippled, lame, blind, leprous, sunk in
the utmost ignorance and apathy, and who on
a kind word of exhortation generally have
nothing to say but ' What can I do ? It is
the Lord's will ; thus it is written on my skull ;'
is a melancholy sight." In the autumn of
1847, 18 were received into the church at this
station. In January, 1848, six adults and
four girls belonging to the girls' institution
were baptized ; and in June a weaver with his
family, three persons in all, and in November
a Tamil family of four persons, were baptized.
In January, 1849, a Nair family, together
with two youths, two women, and two child-
ren, were received into the church. About
this time Mrs. Huber, wife of the missionary,
commenced an English day school for Indo-
British girls, and it has prospered remarkably,
in spite of the opposition of the Romish priest.
Three Parsee girls joined the school soon after
it was opened.
Dacca. — A mission was commenced at this
place in 1847, and a school and a small con-
gi'egation of 12 or 14 baptized heathen was
gathered by an English chaplain. Others
were subsequently added ; but the work became
embarrassed by the want of local funds, and
in 1850 the station was given up.
Dagapoor. — In 1848, six men, two women
and five children of natives were baptized at
this place. Before the rite was administered
to them, the inquirers had to undergo a severe
persecution from their pagan countrymen, but
they remained firm in their profession of faith
in the Saviour. On ' Good Friday,' 1849, 19
Christian natives sat down for the first time to
the celebration of the Lord's Supper. " On
the first of April Mr. Bion, with his fellow-
laborers, opened a school. On Sunday fifty or
sixty Hindoos and Mohammedans attended
divine service, of whom not a few were visibly
45b
niNDOSTAN.
aflFected." The missionaries received the most
pressing invitations from places at various
distances, to visit them.
Comjlla. — A missionary, Mr. Bost, with his
catechist, reached this place on Christmiusdaj,
1847, and immediately commenced preaching
the (josjiel, which roused the opposition of the
enemy. On assuming a more retired activity
in his own house, he found himself surrounded
by crowds of visitors, who desired to hear the
word of God. The higher castes asked for
schools for their children. But embarrass-
ments overtook the mission, and it was several
years since discontinued.
Two of the foregoing stations having been
discontinued, leaves thirteen now in actual
existence, besides which there are 19 or 20
out-stations.
In 1851 '' Insj:)rctor Josenhans " visited the
India missions of the Basle Missionary Society,
and his report was of a highly gratifying na-
ture, lie found that about 1400 persons had
been gathered into Christian congregations ;
and in one village, containing several hundred
souls, only three pei-sons continued heathen.
Christian colonies had been established in three
places, and were regarded with peculiar inte-
rest. The inspector says, " The religious life
of the new converts is by no means so weak as
many are disposed to think." On the whole,
he e.\prcs.«cd his a.'jtonishment that so much
hud l>c-cn accomplished by the mission within
a period of 18 years, for lie found the work
much more difficult than Christians at home
had su[)posed it to be. Even he who had
been familiar with the operations and trials of
his brethren, hud not ajipreciated the difficul-
ties of tiie enterprise till he liad the advantages
of a personal inspection.
TAUtLAR VIEW.
STATIONS.
a
&
E
Z
c
b
E
s
T
a
§
1
1
1
i
5c
i
c
.§
e
3
E
E
(5
£
E
1
ja
•1
1
Ca.mariisk Mianox.
1834
1845
7
1
5
3
138
26
2
1
1001
6
MoolXy
Ilonore
So. MAnBATTA Unmox.
Dhnnvar , . . . .
lloohly
1K37
183y
1S41
1841
1S41
IMU
1S42
1S46
1M7
2
2
1
2
2
1
4
2
8
3
2
8
1
1
25
2
3
202
26
23
34
7
n
7
8
1
412
3301
321 1
181
220
3K7|
58
330 ;
1
8l|
Maltiimootira
IIAI.ITAUX >Ui<SIO.<«.
Canimnore
TillirliPiry
llK-niUU
tmlicut
N'cn£nD(RY.
C«t«T-/
BwoAi.
t>ayapo<ir
28
28
4s:
•-•4
V3f.8i
1
The preceding table will give some idea of
the field occupied by this Society, and the ex-
tent of its labors, though imperfect, as the omi.s-
sions indicate. It is based on the reports for.
1850. A report for 18.52 supplies some of the
deficiencies, and swells the number of coniinu-
uicants to 780, a large number having l»een
added to the churches during the preceding
two years. The total number in the congrega-
tions is .stated at IfiOO, 200 having been added
during 1851. The whole number of laborers
from Europe, including the wives of mission-
aries, is 45. The expenditures of the mission
for the year last reported, amounted to 64,893
rupees, a considcraltle portion of which was
contributed by the friends of missions in
India.
Bkrlin Missionary Society. — The Berlin
Society for Evangelizing the Heathen, estab-
lished in November, 1843. a station at Ghazi-
pur, a city of 50.000 inhabitants, on the
Ganges, with four missionaries, who, in Feb.
1844, having acrniainted themselves with the
Hindoo and Urdu languages, made their first ef-
forts at public preaching.
liKirsic MissioxARY Society. — The Luthe-
ran Missionary Society at Leipsic has. liy the
report for 1853, eight stations in Southern
Hindostan. The following table exhibits the
state of their missions at the above date.
TABULAR VIEW.
il
i
STATIONS.
^
5'fe
,5 g I s •£
•-
f-
T
^fcr 2
E
c
•y
•^
.; i lii E
.a
■;
z
er
S(«
t
% c
- ?
j:
^^
c
X
H
i*=
*
3
»
4{ 6
•?n
3
•4.'i4
211
Tiruiufiijaiinm
I
4| J
Ul
ll.S
'h
5
1
6
1
1
l'J|2]
ll'ir.
3 yi
IP
9
•J 814
310
60
139
66
7
12
2L'8
3;«t
3.1
I'uiluciitUili "1
4
•)
Trioliinnpoly V
1
•J
i
2
20
(1(1
ih
V
1
1
1
130
121
SO
ToUU
6
21
16
S
68
56
371
2152
800
* Including Europeans.
NoitTn Gep.man ^Ii.ssionary SocrETY. — This
society, which had two stations, one in the
Teloogoo country. Eastern Himiostan, and one
in the Neilghorries, wius obliged, in consequence
of rliminished receipt.'!, to suspend operations
in the autumn of 1850, and the mis-sion wa.s
transferred to the Evangelical Lutheran
Church in the United Stat(^s. Since that
time the resj>onsibiIity of the mi.'wion has
been a.'vunie<l by the Bremen Union, and the
j committee of this society find them.selves siis-
I (ained by tiie sympathy nnd co6p*Tation of
I many warm friends of mis.'jion."' in Northern
I Germany. The station in Ea.-»tern Hindostan
' is Ilsijaniundry, and that in the Ncilgherries ia
HINDOSTAN.
459
Ootacamund. No recent statistics have been
furnished respecting cither of these stations.
Gossner's Missioxary Society. — Gossner's
missionaries, with no preparatory education
except that of the common schools, and accus-
tomed to manual labor, appeared in 1838, on
the middle Ganges, and joined in close fellow-
ship with the English preacher Btael, who was
laboring unconnected with any missionary or-
ganization. They came to Tatna on the 29th
January, 1839, and divided themselves among
the stations, Hadschipur, Muzafiipur, Chuprah,
and Eibbelgandsch. Hence they visited Pa1>
na, Monghyr and Dinapore. A small colony
settled at Dardschilling, on the boundaries of
Nepaul. Another expedition went from Bom-
bay to Jubblepoor, in the interior of India.
Partly through death, partly through its mem-
bers becoming connected with other societies,
Gossner's society met with considerable losses,
and the attempt was scarcely more successful
than that of the Moravians in India, many
years previous. — Wiggcrs.
GENERAL TABULAR VIEW.
SOCrETIES.
Baptist Missionary Society (English)
Loudon Missionary Society . . .
American Board
Church Missionary Society . . .
Wesieyan Missionary Society . . .
Soc. for Prop. Gospel in For. Parts
General Baptist Missionary Society
Church of Scotland
Free Church of Scotland ....
American Presbyterian Board . .
Basle Missionary Society ....
American Baptist Union ....
Free-Will Baptist Society ....
Welsh Calvinistic Methodists . . .
Irish Presbyterian Church'. . . .
Berlin Missionary Society ....
Leipsic Missionary Society . . .
Totals
1793
1804
1812
1813
1817
1818
1822
1828
1829
1834
1834
1835
1836
1840
1841
1843
26
21
22
47
9
3
6
13
13
1
5
2
1
1
178
35
41
26
83
17
48
5
7
18
23
26
2
3
2
5
4
6
357
85
133
106
1002
21
166
10
3
4
28
28
3
7
67
1663
1,412
1,024
541
5,815
428
4,629
255
266
487
9
47
28
2,152
17,093 787
43
44
127
526
20
24
2
2,345
8,919
3,800
17,873
1,183
5,500
2,932
2,375
7,030
2,900
2,358
63
151
21
890
58,340
The preceding table has been made out from
the materials furnished by the foregoing state-
ments. On some points the information is
quite deficient ; the number of stations iu con-
ucctioD with some of the societies is not fully
reported. The number of native assistants is
fully reported by few, and some societies re-
port the wives of missionaries as assistants,
and others do not report them at all. The
number of organized churches and of schools is
deficient iu many of them. But the number
of missionaries, communicants, and scholars,
is pretty generally reported. It is to be re-
gretted, however, that in such full and valu-
able reports as are furnished by the Wesleyans,
they do not distinguish between ordained mis-
sionaries and assistants. In judging of the
comparative success of different societies, some
regard must be had to the degree of strictness
practised in the admission of converts to
church privileges. There is a difference, also,
in the mode of counting stations. In some ac-
counts, only the central stations are given,
and others are reckoned as out-stations. But
with all its deficiencies, this table speaks, in
language not to be mistaken, of the results of
missionary labor in India.
Present State and Future Prospects op
THE Missionary work in India. — The fol-
lowing letter from the Venerable Dr. Scud-
DER to the author, will give the impressions
of one on the ground, who has witnessed the
changes which have been going on for the last
quarter of a century. We doubt not it will be
read with deep interest.
Madras, April 6, 1854.
My Dear Brother : — Tour letter of Janu-
ary 1, reached me last month. India, as a field
of missionary labor, is very different from what
it was a few years ago — very different from
what it was when even the venerable Dr. Carey
reached it. He, as you know, was not allowed
460
HINDOSTAN.
to commence bis operations anywhere within
the dominions of the East India Company. It
was on this account that he went to Sorani-
pore, where he resided until his death. Now
the missionary may enter any part of India.
Within the last few years, other changes of
a very important nature have also taken place.
This is witnessed,
1. In the educational iJepartment.
"The Marquis of Hastings's government
forms the brightest page in the history of In-
dian improvement, after a long chapter of dark
and dismal proceedings. It gave that impulse
to the cau.sc of civilization, of which we are
uow reaping the benefits. "When he first came
to India in 1813, he found the press in the
hands of a censor, who struck out whatever
he pieased. lie found that every attempt to
impart knowledge to the people, and to give
them the means of mental or social elevation
had not only been neglected, but discouraged ;
that the British empire in India was considered
stable, in exact proportion to the ignorance
of the inhabitants. The only educational effort
made in the reign of his predecessor was a pro-
posal by Lord Minto to set up two or three
colleges to teach the Sanscrit language, and
the sciences of the Shasters, and the morality
of ilindooism ; but not the remotest idea was
ever entertained of unlocking to the natives
the trea.sures of the English language, or dis-
seminating knowledge through their own
tongue. This system Lord Ha.stings was the
Srst to break through. He gave every encour-
agement, private and public, to the establish-
ment of schools and colleges. Under his aus-
pices, the Calcutta School Society, the School
Book Society, the Hindoo College and other
institutions sprung into being. He also abo-
lished the censorship of the {)ress, with the full
knowledge that the general feeling among the
directors and proprietors, at the India house,
was against any relaxation of the restrictions
on the press. That he met with oppusitidn to
his views in India, will ajijiear fron\ the follow-
ing circumstance : An article apjM'arcd in the
quarterly series of the Friend of Jndia, on the
burning of widows, in which the jjropriety of
abolishing this rite was advocated with a de-
gree of temper and jnoderation suited to the
circumstances of the times; but which gave
such oflcnce to Mr. Adams, afterwards our
temporary Governor-General, that he took it
to the council chamber, and insisted on the
suppression of the work, which Lord Hastings
positively refused to sanction."
" After the censorship of the press liad been
taken off, the Court of Directors showed their
opposition to what Lord Ha.'^tings had done.
by thi! preparation of a dispatch, directing the
imposition of the censorship again, which, how-
ever, George Caiming nobly refused to sanc-
tion."
I just alluded to the opposition which was
formerly made by the India government to the
education of the natives. The reverse of this
now obtains. So anxious are they to confer
this benefit upon them, that they ha-\x^ offered
to contribute their money for the support of
those schools which are taught by missionaries,
and of course in which Christianity is taught.
When speaking of the Marquis of Hastings,
I referred you to Mr. Adams, who thought that
the Friend of India should be suppressed,
because it had ventured to suggest the propri-
ety of abolishing the burning of widows on
the funeral ])ile. By contrasting his conduct
with that of Lord Bentick and Lord Hardiuge,
we shall at once see how much the views of the
politicians of India have, in a short period,
been changed for the belter. Loid Bentick
abolished the suttee throughout the British
possessions of India, and Lord Hardiuge made
great exertions to have it abolished in the do-
minions of the native princes, not under British
jurisdiction. And his labors were attended
with great success. He returned to England,
six or seven years ago, crowned with many
worldly honors. But he has other honors —
honors of a higher nature than these. He
went home with the satisfaction of having les-
sened, in no small degree, the horrors of hea-
thenism, in regions embracing a ])opulatiou of
not less than twenty millions. 'I'his will ap-
pear from the following notice : " The Calcutta
Gazette contains a proclamation by IMaha
Rajah Golaub Singh, prohibiting inlanticide,
suttee, and slavery throughout his territories,
forming the remotest Hindoo principality of
India. The Governor-General, as will be seen,
directs his thanks to be conveyed to a long
list — twenty-three in number — of potentates,
who during the last three years, have cordially
entered into the views of the British govern-
ment, in suppressing such practices. Those
edicts are estimated to aflect not less than
twenty millions of human creatures."
Such innovations as Lord Hardinge has
been instrumental in making on the sacred
customs of the Hindoos among the indej)end-
ent governments of India, will be the means
of ])ulling many a stone from that fabric,
which they have in times past considered to be
as stable as the heavens. Under such circum-
stances, the mi.^sionary may go forth and la-
bor among them with a mucli better pro.*pect
of success than he would otherwise obtain.
As I before remarked. Lord Hardinge left
the country six or .seven years ago. He left it
mucli too soon for India's good. Had lie rc^-
mained his full time, to say nothing of any-
thing else, the burning of widows would per-
haps now be unknown here. I'reviously to
his leaving, however, he left his protest against
the conduct of those powers which had not
abolished the rite — a protest which may i.ssue
in great good. It is as follows : " 'J'lie (Jover-
iior-gx'ncral abstains on thin occasion from i)ro-
minently noticing those states in which these
barbarous usages are still observed, as he con-
HINDOSTAN.
461
fidently expects, at no distant day, to hear of
the complete renunciation of them in every
state in alliance with, or under the protection
of the paramount power of India."
2. Infanticide has been very extensively sup-
pressed. You can scarcely imagine to what a
frightful extent this crime has prevailed.
Among the Nairs in Mulwa, in Oude, and the
northern provinces, it is impossible to calcu-
late what numbers of infants have, in the times
which have gone by, been put to death. A
gentleman of the Bengal service was sent by
the government through the northern and in-
dependent kingdoms to find out the number.
In the provinces through which he passed the
principal chiefs acknowledged that they had
murdered many of their children, and that they
knew their neighbors had destroyed many of
theirs, and that this rite was rooted in the
affections of the people. In one village there
were fifty-one boys but only fourteen girls. In
a second, sixty-six boys and only fourteen girls.
In a third, seventy-nine boys and only twelve
girls. In a fourth, ten boys and only two
girls. In a fifth, fifty-eight boys and only four
girls. In a sixth, twenty-two boys and no
girls.
As you are aware, the Punjaub has lately
been brought under British rule. Since this
event took place, the fact has been brought to
light that infanticide has been practiced ex-
tensively there. In the latter part of the year
1851 " Major Lake found it to prevail in the
district of which- he had charge. Soon after-
wards it was found to prevail in Umballa, Fe-
rozepore, Jullundur, Hooshearpore, Lahore,
Mooltan, Jhelum, and Leia districts. It is
not, however, practiced by all of the inhabit-
ants. It is confined principally to the Bedees
and the Rajpoots, among whom the custom is
one of immemorial antiquity. The Khetrees,
however, and even some of the Mohammedan
tribes maintain the practice ; and the higher
the rank the more certain are the female
branches of destruction. It is believed also
by the most experienced oiBcers to have in-
fected all classes in a greater or less degree.
All over the Punjaub there is a disproportion
in the number of female births not to be ac-
counted for by ordinary causes ; and in cer-
tain districts this disproportion rises to such a
height, as almost to imply the extinction of
the female race." The subject came under the
notice of our present Governor-general, Earl
Dalhousie, several months ago, and if this prac-
tice has not yet been put down, as it has been
put down in other places, it must soon come
to an end.
3. One of the most appalling religious
sects which ever appeared in any country, has
been nearly, if not entirely, destroyed. Allow
me to give you a short description of this sect,
from a work, which now lies before me. Scat^
tered throughout India there is a lawless set
of men whose profession it is to get their food
by murder. They are called Phansiagars, or
Thugs : they owe their origin and laws to the
bloody goddess Karle : they say that she di-
rected them to become murderers and plunder-
ers : they are called Phansiagars, from the
name of the instrument which they use when
they murder people. Phansiagar means a
strangle, and they use a phansi, or noose, which
they throw over the necks of those whom they
intend to plunder, and strangle them. These
Phansiagars are composed of all castes, Hin-
doos, Mohammedans, Pariahs, and Chandellars.
This arises from the circumstance that they
never destroy the children of those whom they
rob and murder. These children they take
care of, and bring them up to their own hor-
rible mode of life. They always murder those
whom they rob, acting upon the maxim, ' that
dead men tell no tales.' A gang of these rob-
bers varies from a dozen to sixty or seventy
persons. These divide into small parties.
Those whom they murder are travelers whom
they happen to meet on the road. Sometimes
two or three of a gang will take up theu* sta-
tion in a choultry, or place where the traveler
stops, and while he sleeps they rouse him from
his sleep, and cast the noose over his head and
kill him. It takes two persons to kill a man.
One casts the noose over his head, and imme-
diately tightens it with all his strength ; the
other strikes him on the joint of the knees as
he rises, which causes him to fall backwards.
After he has fallen they kick him on the tem-
ples till he dies, which is usually in a minute.
They never commit a murder until they have
taken every precaution not to be fovmd out.
They will follow a traveler for weeks, if neces-
sary, before they destroy him. After they
have murdered him, they gash the body all
over and bury it. They gash it that it may
not swell and cause cracks to take place in the
ground, which might cause the jackalls to dig
down to the body, and thus expose their guilt.
If a dog accompanies the person, they always
kill it, lest the faithful creature should lead to
the discovery of his master. They think it to
be a very good act to give a part of the plun-
der, which they get when they murder a per-
son, to their goddess. If they fail to put him
to death, according to their rules, they suppose
that they have made her angry, and they make
offerings to her, that she may be appeased.
Thus, their religion teaches them to commit
the blackest of crimes.
The reason why this people gash and bury the
bodies of those whom they murder, is as follows :
They say that the goddess used to save them the
trouble of burying the corpses of their victims by
eating them, thus screening the murderers from
all chance of being found out. Once, after the
murder of a traveler, the body was, as usual,
left unburied. One of the Phansiagars era-
ployed, unguardedly looking behind him, saw
the goddess in the act of feasting on it. This
made her so angry, that she vowed never again
462
HINDOSTAN.
to devour a body slauglitcred by tliem, they
having by this one act of curiosity forfeited
her favor. However, as an equivalent for
withdrawing her patronage, slic plucked one
of the fangs from her celestial jaw, and gave
it to them, saying that they might use it as a
pickaxe, Avhich would never wear out. She
then opened her side, and pulled out one of
her ribs, which she gave them for a knife,
whose edge nothing could blunt. Having
done this she stooped down, and tore off the
hem of her garment, which she gave them for a
noose, declaring that it would never fail to
strangle any person about whose throat it
might be cast. She, moreover, commanded
them to gash and bury the bodies of those
■whom they destroyed.
The Phansiagars bring up their children to
their own profession. 'J'o learn this the boy is
placed under the care of a tutor. Sometimes
his father is his teacher. By him he is taught
that it is just as proper to murder a man fis it
is to kill a snake which lies in his path, and
•would bite him as he passes. He is not per-
mitted at first to see the murders, but merely
a dead body ; his mind being gradually pre-
pared for the sight. After this, the dreadful
secret of his trade is, by degrees, told him.
"When he expresses a wish to be engaged in
this horrid business, they tell him all about it.
In the mean time, he is allowed a small part
of the plunder, in order that his desire to com-
mit these murders may be increased, as it is
only by murder that the plunder is obtained.
He is allowed from time to time to assist in
some things while the murder is taking place ;
or is allowed to be present to see how the busi-
ness is managed. It is not, however, until he
becomes a man that he is permitted to ai)ply the
noose. To attain this privilege, he usually
devotes eight or ten years. Before he can
commit a murder, his tutor must present him
with a noose. This sets him loose upon the
•world, as a licensed murderer. AVhcn the tutor
is about to give him the noose, he takes him
apart, and solemnly enjoins it upon him to use
it with skill, as it is to be the means of his
earning his food, and as his safety will depend
upon the skill with which it is used. After he
receives it, he tries his skill in strangling a
person, the first opportunity that occurs.
By the course of education which the Phan-
siagars undergo, they become so fond of their
dreadful occupation, that nothing can induce
them to quit it- Some who have been employed
in the JOast India Company's service have
showu this, by returning to their business when
an opportunity oilcred of successful enterprise.
When the Phansiagars become old, they do
not ijuit the service ; but act as watchers, and
decoy the traveler, by some false tale of dis-
tress, into some distant place, where he is mur-
dered.
Women arc sometimes admitted to the soci-
ety of these plunderers, and on some occasions
are allowed to apply the noose. They select a
handsome girl, and place her in a convenient
spot, where, by her beauty, or by a false
story of distress, she may decoy some unsus-
pecting traveler, and be the means of his de-
struction. Should he be on horseback, she
will induce him to take her up behind him,
after which, when an opportunity offers, she
throws the noose over his head, leaps from the
horse, drags him to the ground and strangles
him. Some time since, it happened that a
horseman of Coorg, in the Madras Presidency,
was passing by a spot where one of these in-
teresting-looking girls was stationed. She
told him a piteous story of having been robbed,
and badly treated, and begged him to assist
her. Feeling sorry for her, he ofiered to take
her up behind him on his horse, and thus assist
her a few miles on her journey. She expressed
much gratitude for his kindness, and mounted.
Soon afterwards, she suddenly passed a noose
over his head, and, drawing it with all her
might, endeavored to pull him from his saddle.
At this moment a number of Phansiagars
started from the neighboring thicket and sur-
rounded him. The murderess then slipped
from the horse ; but the Coorg striking his
heels into the horse's side, it threw out its
hind legs with great violence, and struck the
girl to the ground, who immediately let go the
cord. He then drew his sword, and cutting
his way through the robbers, ctfected his
escape. He wounded two of them severely.
These men were shortly afterwards taken, and,
through their means, twelve others fell into
the hands of the judicial oflBcers of the king of
Coorg, including the girl who attempted the
murder. They were all put to death.
4. A stop has been put, in a good degree, to
the Meriah sacrifices in the extensive hill-
tracts of Orissa. It was not until the military
operations of the British took place in Upper
and Lower Goomsoor, in 183G and 1837, that
the cruel rite of immolating human beings in
these places was brought to light, and it waa
not until that time that the first victims des-
tined for sacrifice were taken from them.
Captain ifillar was the honored instrument in
rescuing them. They were tw^elve in number.
His services were acknowledged in the follow-
ing manner by the Madras Government :
" Captain Millar will realize in his own mind
an ample reward for his most commendable
conduct, in having rescued twelve victims
destined for those horrible sacrifices, as the
gratifying retlection of having been the means
of saving so many human beings from a cruel
and untimely death cannot fail, at all times,
to be a source of genuine happiness to him.
The discretion, however, with which he con-
tinued to effect his humane purpose, is entitled
to the warmest and most unqualified a])proba-
tion of government."
In the year 1838, Captain Campbell rescued
a much larger number. He writes, " 1 have
HINDOSTAN.
4G3
been most fortunate in my late expedition
among tlie wild Khuuds of Goomsoor, and
have rescued no less than one hundred and three
children of various ages, who were intended
for sacrifice by these barbarians. The chil-
dren are now at head-quarters, and form a
most interesting- group ; happy such of them
as were aware of their situation, in having
escaped the fate which awaited them."
I am acquainted with Cajitain Mac Viccar,
who is one of the British agents " for the sup-
pression of human sacrifices and female infan-
ticide in the hill tracts of Orissa." I learned
from him that the whole number of victims
who had been rescued, up to the time when I
saw him, from those hill tracts, amounted to
more than 1,900. Of these, no less than 500
were rescued by himself and his assistant, Cap-
tain Frye, in the course of a few months.
Since my interview with Captain MacViccar,
which was in the year 1851, other victims have
been rescued.
There are various tribes inhabiting the ex-
tensive hill districts to which I have been al-
luding, and their manner of ofiering up these
sacrifices haA'e been various also. Let me give
you a few quotations from a little book before
me, to show how the KTliunds were in the habit
of offering up their victims. " WTien the day
which has been appointed for the sacrifice ar-
rives, the Khunds assemble from all parts of
the country, dressed in their finery ; some with
bear skins thrown over their shoulders ; others
with the tails of peacocks flowing behind them,
and the long, winding feather of the jungle-
cock waving over their heads. Thus decked,
they dance, leap, rejoice, beat drums, and play
on an instrument not unlike in sound to the
highland-pipe. In the afternoon, the priest
with the aid of an assistant proceeds to fasten
a man or a woman, or a boy or a girl to a post
which has been firmly fixed in the ground.
Around this post stand hundreds of those
Khunds with knives in their hands. At an
appointed signal they rush upon the poor
creature and try who can cut the first piece of
flesh from his bones. Great value is attached
to the first morsel cut out from his body, as it
is supposed to possess greater virtues. This is
buried in the earth before sunset."
In Guddapore a different sacrifice precedes
this. A trench, seven feet long, is dug, over
which a human body is suspended alive, by the
neck and feet, which are fastened with ropes
to stakes firmly fixed in the ground, at each
end of the excavation, so that to prevent
strangulation he is compelled to support him-
self with his hands over each side of his grave.
The presiding priest, after performing various
ceremonies in honor of their goddess, takes an
axe and inflicts six cuts, at equal distances
from the feet to the back of the neck, repeat-
ing the numbers, one, two, three, and so forth,
Rondif Rendi, Mungce, Nalge, Chingi, Sajgi,
and at the seventh, Argi, cuts off his head.
The body falls into into the pit and is co\Tred
with earth.
Captain Mac Viccar gave me an account of
other districts, where these sacrifices are per-
formed in a different manner. " Some destroy
their victims by heavy blows from the metal
bangles, which they purchase at the fairs, and
wear on these occasions. If the poor creature
is not killed by two or three of these heavy
blows inflicted on his head, they strangle him
with a cleft bamboo, which they slip over his
neck. Others destroy their victims by placing
them on the ground bound hand and feet, with
their faces downward, and by throwing large
stones violently on the back of their necks,
until life becomes extinct.
" In Patna the people do not use much of the
flesh of their victims, frequently none at all.
In some districts they cut out the liver, in
others the lungs, and after chopping them up
in small pieces, bury them. It is customary
among some tribes to draw a cup full of blood
from the body, and each family takes a little
of it and sprinkles it on the floor of their
houses. While doing this they implore bless-
ings on their households and on their fields."
The victims whom the Khunds sacrifice are
generally bought or stolen from the low coun-
try, and sold to them. Sometimes they escape
from their owners and thus are saved from
death. After the arrival of the British troops
in the Khund country, a female found her way
to the collector's camp with fetters on her legs.
She had escaped from those who had charge
of her, and said that she had been sold by her
own brother for the purpose of being sacrificed,
I will mention the case of another individual
who escaped from the Khunds, and this case
is the more interesting from the circumstance
that he has gone back to the hills to assist in
establishing and superintending schools. His
name is Joy Sing. He had witnessed one of
these sacrifices by stealth. He had seen a
child put in the cleft of a small tree which had
been split for the purpose. He had seen
how the child was held fast in that position,
by the split parts of the tree having closed
upon its body ; and while it was thus secured,
he had seen the flesh cut from its bones. We
shall not therefore wonder that he was filled
with horror at the thought of meeting such a
doom. Neither shall we wonder at his deter-
mination to make the very last possible effort
to free himself from the hands of his intended
murderers. The effort was made, but it was,
at first, unsuccessful. After traveling for two
days through the jungle, he was recaptured by
his owners and put in irons. His courage
however did not fail. He determined to make
another attempt to escape, though he could
only crawl along, in consequence of the irons
on his legs. Thus fettered, he traveled for two
days and two nights, and when he had just
reached the foot of the mountains, he again
espied those who were in pursuit of him. Pro.
464:
HINDOSTAN.
videntially Captain Millar, of whom I have
already spoken, had encamped near the place
where'he was. To this encampment he hasten-
ed with all the speed which he could command,
scarcely daring to look behind him, and happi-
ly he reached it in safety. On his arrival he
endeavored to make known his tale of woe by
his looks and his tears, and those looks and
tears spoke a language which this officer could
not misunderstand. His irons were taken off
and he was once more free.
Of the children rescued from the Khunds
and others, many have been sent by the Bri-
tish Government to missionary schools. Con-
nected with a station, where a very dear fellow-
laborer of mine — the Eev. Mr. Wilkinson —
resides, a station about ten miles distant from
the first range of mountains inhabited by the
Khunds, there are two schools, one for the
boys and the other for the girls who have been
rescued from this wretched people. Though
not altogether in place, I cannot conclude
without mentioning an interesting case or two
of children in connection with the subject
which is now before us.
A few years ago, a number of these rescued
victims arrived at the gate of the Mission
house, on their way to the sea-coast. The
children of the schools went out to see them.
Belonging to the female school there was a lit-
tle girl, who thought that she recognized her
brother among the strangers. In a few min-
utes she was seen coming forward, leading him
by the hand, and was heard exclaiming with
joy, " I have found my brother." Mr. Wilkin-
son said to her, " How do you know that he is
your brother? I'erhaps you are mistaken."
" 0 no, papa," said she, " 1 am not mistaken.
I thought, when I saw him at the gate, that he
looked just like u little brother I had when I
Avas taken from my home, only he was smaller.
So I said to myself, if he is my brother ho
will know his own name. So I called out
Pod ! I'od ! and he lifted up his head and came
running to my arms." And this sister wept
over her little brother, and kissed him, and at
last catching him up, she bore him away to
her school-room.
The llev. Mr. Sutton relates the case of two
brothers who met under similar circumstances.
They had both been sold at different times
to the Khunds, for sacrifices, by their unnatural
uncle.
Among the victims formerly rescued from
the Khunds, there was a very awkward lad,
who was called David. Great pains were
taken to instruct him, but he wais so stupid
that* all efforts appeared to be useless. At
last he was devoted to the work of sweeping
the premises of the Mission house. " At this
time," says Mr. Suttcm, '• our school was very
full, and many of the young natives had been
conviTted. All at once a ray of intelligence
seemed to break upon the mind of poor Da-
vid. He eecmed suddenly to be possessed of
new faculties. All were astonisl^d at his un-
derstanding and his answers. He now ajjplied
himself so diligently, and was profited so much
by the instruction afforded, that he was subse-
quently received into the church. Soon after-
wards he was taken into the printing-oGQce,
and as he made rapid advances in his new
business, he was made a compositor. While
thus engaged, and amazing us all by his sud-
den proficiency, there appeared on his skin
numerous white spots — the first indications of
leprosy, a very common and also a very fatal
disease in India. We sent him to the hospital,
and every care was taken of him ; but each of
the white spots became a putrid ulcer, and his
limbs were much eaten away. Nothing could
arrest the progress of his malady, or save his
life, and as there was danger that he might
communicate his disease to others, by coming
in contact with them, the doctor directed that
he should be kept by himself. A tent was
provided for him, from which he would creep
at service time to the door of the meeting-
room and join in the service. A more inter-
ested listener I never beheld. One day I went
with my wife to pay him a visit. He was
stretched on his mat. His Testament was
close to his side. His hymn book was in his
hand, and we saw that his attention had been
rivited on the following verses :
" Of all that decks the field or bower,
Thoa art the fairest, Bweetest flower ;
Then, blessed Jesus, let not me
In thy kind heart forgotten be.
" Day after day youth's joys decay,
Death waits to seize the trembling prey ;
Then, blessed Jesus, let not me
In thy kind heart forgotten be."
When we left his tent, my wife said to mo
with great emphasis and emotion, " There lies
an heir of glory, for though like Lazarus he is
full of sores, like Lazarus also, he is rich in
assured hope." I could not but concur in the
remark.
Soon after this the spirit of this afflicted but
happy youth took its flight, as M'e have every
reason to believe, to the bosom of his Saviour,
rescued by the British from the hands of the
cruel Khunds, and rescued from eternal tor-
ment in consequence of his having been sold
to them for the purpose of being sacrificed.
it. The law which declares that a native
shall forfeit his paternal inheritance by becom-
ing a Christian, has been abrogated. This
wa.s a most formidable obstacle to the spread
of Christianity in this land, and 1 need hardly
add that this abrogation is a very powerful
blow to Hjndooism.
6. t'aste, the greatest obstacle to the spread
of Christianity in India, has in some degree
been put down. The government do not ac-
knowledge it in the army. The Pariahs and
the Brahmins are made to stand side by side
when employed on duty. 'J'he government also
disregard itin their educational institutions.
HOME MISSIONS.
465
7. In the courts the practice of swearing is
in some places changed, the Bible being sub-
stituted for the water of the Ganges : or the
witnesses make only a declaration that they
will speak the truth. I need hardly add that
all such changes are undermining the faith of
this people.
I have now mentioned a few things to show
you that India is in a much better condition for
the promotion of missionary labor than it was
when you and I commenced life ; and jf we
further take into consideration the patronage
and the support which missionaries receive in
their work from the British government, what
greater encouragements can Christians at home
need to make this land a prominent field for
their exertions ? This latter consideration
should not be overlooked. I have again and
again said that if we were not under the pro-
tection .pf this government, our lives would
not be safe — humanly speaking — for an hour.
But I have said enough. 0 that the misery
and dying groans of the 130,000,000 of India
might arrest the attention of the young men
of our churches in America, and constrain
them to flee to their help before it shall be too
late ! Is it not enough that so many myriads
have already taken up their abode in hell for-
ever ? Very sincerely, J. Scudder.
HITIAA : A station of the London Mis
sionary Society, on Tahiti, South Seas.
HOBART TOWN : A station of the Wes-
leyan Missionary Society in New Zealand.
The town is delightfully situated upon two
hills, between which there runs a fine stream
of water from the heights of Table Mountain,
which towers above it.
HOLAPOOR : The capital of an indepen-
dent state in Southern Ilindostan, with a pop-
ulation of 550,000. It is 130 miles south of
Ahmednuggur, and 60 miles south of Satara.
It was occupied as a station of the American
Board in 1852, no missionary labor having
ever before been performed there.
HOME MISSIONS : This term is applied
to the work of preaching the Gospel in the
destitute portions of our own country, planting
new churches in places where the people are
not able to do it themselves, and aiding feeble
churches to sustain the preaching of the Gos-
pel. And this work is increasing in interest
and magnitude as our territory is expanding,
and the destitute classes of our population are
multiplying by the immigration of hordes of
ignorant and unevangelized foreigners. Not
only the papists of Europe, but even the hea-
then from Asia, are coming to our sliores ; and
if we do not wish to see the pagoda as well as
the cathedral established among us, we must
meet the case by the most vigorous applica-
tion of the means of grace to our whole popu-
lation. It is a significant Providence that is
casting upon our shores these unevangelized
multitudes, just at the time when we have
arrived at such national maturity and strength
30
as to be able to bear them, and when wo not
only have the means of giving them the Gos-
pel, but are considering how we may most
easily and successfully send it to all nations.
" It was about three-quarters of a century
after the landing of the Pilgrims at Plymouth
before anything answering to our present idea
of Home Missions was attempted, or in fact
needed. Churches were all the while slowly
colonizing, as new settlements were rising ;
but always through a self-sustaining process.
In the most missionary aspect of the work, ifc
was the bestowment of a minister upon a .new
congregation, by some older church that had
furnished itself with two. In this way an ap-
plication was answered that came to Boston in
1642, from "certain well disposed people in
the upper and newly settled parts of Virginia,
bewailing their sad condition for want of the
means of salvation, and earnestly entreating a
supply of faithful ministers, whom, upon expe-
rience of their gifts and godliness, they might
call to office." The request was read on " lec-
ture day " in Boston ; and after long consulta-
tion and prayer, it seemed good to the elders
of the churches to recommend two of their
number. Rev. Messrs. Knolls of Watertown
and Thompson of Braintree — each of which
had a teaching colleague — to go on this mis-
sion ; and they were accordingly dismissed by
their people, and went.*
" A nearer approach to Home Missions was
made about the year 1695, when several of the
98 churches then in Massachusetts were found
to be destitute of the stated means of grac>e
and unable to procure them ; — a circumstance
not more distressing to the vacant churches
themselves, than it was appalling to the guar-
dians of the Commonwealth. In the archives
of the State are to be found about 50 applica-
tions from feeble parishes, presented to the
Legislature between 1695 and 1711 ; and a
record of as many appropriations, amounting
in all to nearly £1,000, for their relief in sus-
taining the ministry. This plan, of course,
could not continue.
" The Society forPropagating th^ Gospel among
the Indians and others in North America, was
founded in 1787, and has the honor of being
the oldest incorporated missionary society in
the United States. A number of gentlemen,
residing in Boston and its vicinity, that year
received a commission from the ' Society in
Scotland for Promoting Christian Knowledge,'
to superintend funds which they had devoted
to the purpose of Christianizing the Indians in
this country. ' This Board of Commissioners,
emulous to cooperate with their foreign breth-
ren in a cause so benevolent and honorable to
the Christian character, not only as their
agents, but also as principals, by raising funds
in America for the like purpose, formed them-
selves into a Society similar to that in Scol^
* Winthrop's Journal, Vol. n. p. 78.
466
HOME MISSIONS.
land,' and obtained an act of incorporation.
At their request tlie Legislature also granted
a bAef ior a contribution in all the Congrega-
tional churches throughout the State, — which,
however, yielded but $1,5G1. A larger sum
was soon after obtained by private subscrip-
tion among the members of the Society. In
about IG years the fund had increased to
$23,417, and yielded an annual income of
§1,145 ; — which, since that time, has been ex-
pended partly among the Indians in different
sections of New England and New York, and
partly in new settlements, furnishing mission-
aries and Bibles, and supporting charity
schools.
'" The Connecticut Missionary Society, though
not instituted till 1798, " may be said to have
existed in flict, though not in form, from 1792 ;"
for .the General Association, which at first
composed the Society, obtained permission
that year from the Legislature to raise funds
for missionary purposes. Indeed, several mis-
sionaries are known to have gone into Ver-
mont and Western New York under the pa-
tronage of that bo^y as early as 1788. And
there is traditional authority for believing that
the ' grain of mustard seed ' from which this
fruitful tree has grown, was a donation of
three dollars, which a poor but pious woman
put into her pastor's baud for a missionary
use. Not knowing through what channel to
appropriate the gift so as to answer the donor's
purpose, he took it with him to the General
Association, and sought counsel of his breth-
ren ; which resulted in this missionary move-
ment, whose original object was, ' to Chris-
tianize the heathen in North America, and to
support and promote Christian knowledge in
the new settlements within the United States.'
" The Berkshire and Columbia Missionary So-
ciety was organized in 1798 for the purpose of
* propagating the Gospel in the new settle-
ments, and among heathen nations.' Its first
name was ' The Congregational Missionary
Society originated in the counties of Berk.shife
(Mass.) and Columbia (N. Y.) ;' and for a
lew years it received about an e(|ual share of
patronage from each State. Subsequently
most of the New York members became as.so-
ciated with other organizations. When this
Society assumed an auxiliary relation to the
Massachusetts Uome Missionary Society, it had
expended about $13,000 in sustaining, on an
average, four missionaries per annum, under a
commission for three months each — or one
minister through the year — besides a generous
distribution of books on the missionary fiekls,
and the establishment of nearly twenty ' cha-
ritable libraries.'
" T/lc New Hampshire Missionary Society was
instituted in 1801, for the purpose of ' sending
missioiuirics to destitute towns, parishes and
societies within this State, and on the borders
of the same.' i'rovision was also ma<le for
the distribution of religions books. It is now
auxiliary to the American Home Missionary
Society ; and besides supplying the necessities
within its own bounds, takes part each year
in the work of evangelizing the West.
" The Hampshire Missionary Society was insti-
tuted at Northampton, Mass., in 1802, whose
' object and business,' as stated in the Consti-
tution, is ' to promote the preaching and pro-
pagation of the Gospel of Jesus Christ among
the inhabitants of the new settlements of the
United States, and the aboriginal nations of
the continent.' At first the Society covered
the ' Old County of Hampshire,' from which
Hampden and Franklin counties have since
been separated, and now sustain their own cha-
ritable associations. By obtaining from be-
nevolent individuals ' promissory notes with
good securities,' a permanent fund was early
created, which has since been increased by
legacies. The income from this fund, together
with the annual collections, usually amounts
to several thousand dollars a year ; which is
paid in part to the American Home Mission-
ary Society, and in part to the Massachusetts
Home Missionary Society, agreeably to the
terms on which its present auxiliary connection
is based. Previously to 1827, its independent
disbursements amounted to $33,000 for mis-
sionary service, and about $10,000 in the pvur-
chase and distribution of Bibles and other re-
ligious books. Its missionaries labored chiefly
in Western New York and in Maine, from
four to six men being under commission from
three to six months each, on an average, per
annum.
" I7ic Massachusetts Society for Promoting
Christian Knoidedge, was instituted in 1803,
' for the benevolent purpose of promoting
evangelical truth and piety ; in the first place,
by a charitable distribution of religious books
and tracts among poor and pious Christians,
and also among the inhabitants of new towns
and plantations ; and secondly, by supporting
charity schools and pious missionaries in
places where the means of religious instruction
are sparingly enjoyed.' The tirst distribution
of books was made in 1804. The first mis-
sionary was employed in 1811 ; and during the
subsc(iuent ten or fifteen years the resources of
the Society, amounting sometimes to $2,0iQ0
per annum, were expended in circulating books
and in helping partially supplietl churches to
a ])crmanent ministry. These labors were be-
stowed in various parts of New England, but
more especially in New Hampshire. As its
original objects are now reached through the
Home Missionary and Tract Societies, its
jiresent income is small, and is expended in
supplying destitute Sabbath-schools with li-
braries.
" The Rhode Island Home Missionary Society
arose about the same time ; the Maine Mission-
ary Society in 1807 ; and the Vermont Domestic
Missionary Society in 1818 ;— all of them hav-
ing similar objects, and all now sustaining an
HOME MISSIONS.
467
auxiliary relation to the American Home Mis-
sionary Society.
" The Massachusetts Missionary Society was
formed in Boston, May 28, 1799 ; the original
object of which was, ' to diffuse the Gospel
among the heathen, as well a3 other people, in
the remote parts of our country, where Christ
is seldom or never preached.' But, having
subsequently become strictly a domestic mis-
sionary society, the name was (in 1844) chang-
ed to the Massachusetts Home Missionary Society.
" The Domestic Missionary Society of Massa-
chusetts Proper was formed by the General As-
sociation in 1818, to operate exclusively within
the State of Massachusetts. On the formation
of the American Home Missionary Society, in
1826, these societies united, and became aux-
iliary to the American Society, confining tBeir
operations to Massachusetts. At this time,
one of them had 25 missionaries, mostly in
Maine, and the other about the same number
in Massachusetts."*
The Presbyterian Church in the United States
has been a missionary body from its organiza-
tion, in 1706, to the present time. For the
first ten years of its existence, its operations
were conducted by the original Presbytery of
Philadelphia, under whose direction such min-
isters as could be had went out into the waste
places, making known the Gospel. In 1717
the oversight of the missionary work was
transferred to the Synod of Philadelphia, and
after 24 years of labor, in the year 1741, the
oversight was given to the Synods of Phila-
delphia and New York united, and remained
with these bodies until the formation of the
General Assembly, in 1789.
The business of domestic missions was con-
ducted by the General Assembly, as a body,
from 1789 to 1802, but the work having be-
come extended, and increasing yearly, the as-
sembly appointed a " standing committee of
missions," and that committee made its first
annual report in May, 1803. In 1816, the
style of this committee was changed for that
of " The Board of Missions," which name it
still retains. " The Board, therefore, is no
new creation, but the old standing committee
of missions, under a new name, and with en-
larged membership and powers." The Board
now consists of 60 ministers and 36 laymen,
elected for four years, arud arranged in four
classes, one of which goes out each year, when
a new class is elected. And the reason for the
election of so large a body, and those scatter-
ed over the United States, is to secure a quo-
rum for business at the annual meetings of the
General Assembly, which are held in various
sections of the union ; and besides this, the
field is so large, that it is found necessary to
have two executive committees, one located in
Philadelphia and the other in Louisville, and
the oversight of the several states is divided
between them. The work of church extension
«Rev. J. S. Clarke.
is also committed to this Board, The follow-
ing summary of a single year's work will serve
as a fair specimen of what has been accom-
plished through its instrumentality : — In the
year ending May 1, 1853, the number of
churches and missionary stations supplied, was
838 : organized within the year, 32 churches :
admissions to the churches on examination,
1643 ; on certificate, 1287 ; total, 2930. Total
number in communion in these churches, 19,966.
The number of Sabbath-schools in these con-
gregations, 432 ; scholars, 19,123 ; baptisms,
1876 ;«housesof worship erected or finished,
45. "The total amount of money paid out as
the cost of all these operations for the year,
was about sixty-eight thousand dollars. The
following extracts, from the report of the
Board for 1854, give an interesting view of
the progress of the work : —
" In 1828, the year of the re-organization of
the Board, there were Ijut 31 missionaries, and
an income of $2,400 only.
" In 1830, two years after, there were 198
missionaries and an income ''of $12,632. In
1840, two years after the division of the Church,
and when the parts were tairly separated, there
were 256 missionaries, and an income of
$40,734. In 1850, the number of missionaries
was 570, and the receipts were $67,654 19.
This year, 1854, the number of missionaries re-
ported is 523, and the receipts were $75,207 80.
'•' Let us now glance at the expansion of our
Church, which has been mainly effected by
missionary labor. We will begin with 1828.
the year of the re-organization of the Board.
Synods. P'bt'ries. Ministers. Cli'ches. Members
1828, 16, 90, 1,285, 1,968, 146,308.
1830, 19, 98, 1,491, 2,158, 173,329.
1840, 17, 95, 1,615, 1,673, 126,583.
1850, 23, 127, 1,926, 2,595, 207,254
1853, 28, 143, 2,139, 2,879, 219,263.
" In this brief reference to the fruits of mis-
sionary labor, as seen in the increase of Church-
es, and Presbyteries, and Synods, we have said
nothing of the thousands of religious volumes
and tracts distributed by our missionaries
throughout our country, the tens of thousands
of children gathered by them into Sabbath-
schools, the numerous Bible and catechetical
classes they have formed, the thousands of tem-
perance societies they have organized, the nu-
merous parochial schools, academies, and colleges
they have founded, nor of the various other in-
strumentalities which they have set in motion,
and which are silently, but effectively producing
a harvest of immeasurable good."
The following table is worthy of study. It
tells its own story, as to the self-sacrificing
spirit of our Home Missionaries ; and it is
probably a fair specimen of the whole.
Table showing the returns of 342 missiona-
ries, laboring in 29 States and territories, of
amounts paid them by both people and Board,
and average salary in each State : amounts
paid in each State by the Board, and general
468
HOME MISSIONS.
averaf^c salary as paiJ by the people and the
Boarci^ and by the Board alone lor the year
1853-4.
STATES AXn
lElUUTORiE.^.
■^ a
<K 4)
>
•^■xi a.
if
ill
4) ^
^^
u at
<
Amounts in each State
contributed by the
Board.
2
4
1
1
2
5
33
39
15
8
1
12
5
1
1
10
17
33
8
32
2
57
1
5
12
24
11
$820
2,450
600
600
1,250
1,543
11,846
15,101
5,391
2,780
650
5,977
2,392
600
625
3,929
6,395
15,351
2,935
10,484
8-25
22,653
275
1,882
6,2Q5
10,322
3,725
$410
613
600
600
625
309
359
387
359
348
651
498
478
600
625
393
376
465
367
328
413
397
275
376
522
430
339
200
2. Arkansas
3. California
4. Connecticut
700
300
6. Dist. of Columbia.
7. Florida
300
550
508
9. Illinois
4,563
10. Indiana
11. Iowa
4,850
2,500
12. Kentucky
13. Louisiana. . ,
14. Maryland
15. Michigan ,. . .
16. Minue.sota F. . .
17. Mississippi '. .
1,320
250
2,100
1,100
500
175
1,780
19. New Jersey
20. New York
21. North Carolina ....
22. Ohio
2,725
6,010
1,025
3,083
23. Oregor)
24. PcQiisvlvania
25. SouthCarolina ....
26. Tennesse
600
7,078
75
750
27. Texa^
2,750
28. Vii-ginia
3,490
29. Wibconsin
No. of Miss, reported,
2,430
342
$137,666
$51,832
Average salary of niis.sionarics (from all sources) $403.
Average salary of missionaries paid by the Board, $152.
American Home Missionary Society. — A de-
sire having arisen for a more general coopera-
tion, in the prosecution of Domestic Missions,
on the part of several denominations which
harmonized in doctrinal views, preliminary
meetings were held in Boston for consultation ;
and on the 13th of March, 182G, a circular was
issued by the E.xecutivc C-ommittee of the
United Domestic ML-aionary Society of New
York, inviting a meeting of the friends of
the cause, which took place in the Brick
Church, New York, May 10, 182G, when
the society was formed, and a constitution
adopted. At its ne.\t anniversary, the United
Domestic Missionary Society wits dissolved,
and ils life meu^bers and lil'e directors l)ccaine
life members and life directors of the new so-
ciety ; and subsetiiiently, the several State so-
cieties of the New England States became
au.xiliary to the American jlome Missionary
Society, on the principle of first su])plying the
wants of their own States, and paying over to
the An;, licun Society their surplus funds, their
missioaaiica being commissioned by the parent
society.
Tliis society is composed of life members,
who have become such by the payment of 1^30,
who now number nearly 8000, Its first presi-
dent was Hon. Stephen Van Rci-sselaer, of
Albany, N. Y., and its first secretary, Eev.
Absalom Peters. Its affaire are managed by an
Executive Committee of 14 members, clergymen
and laymen, all located in the city of New York.
Summary. — The society has existed for
Hcentif-eight years. The total amount of re-
ceipts, for this time, is $2,728,303 71. The
total number of missionaries employed, is about
5,400. The total number of years of labor, is
15,700. The total number of preaching stations
is about 4,000. The total number of churches
that have become self-supporting through thia
society's aid, is nearly 1,000. The total of addi-
tions to the churches, is 126,705.
Interesting and important facts and compari-
son's.— When the society concluded its first
year, 120 out of its 109 missionaries for that
period, or nearly three-fourths, had been employ-
ed in the single State of New York, and only
thirty-three, or about one-fifth in the Mississippi
Valley. The largest item in its receipts was
less than $0,000, which included all the contri-
butions of auxiliary and allied associations.
Its foremost contributor was the " Geneva,
Agency,"' which furnished the sum of $2313
30. AVhen the society concluded its twenty-
eighth year, 153, or little more than one-
seventh of its missionaries had been employed
during the year, in the State of New York,
while 530 out of 1047 (or more than one-half),
had labored at the West. Its foremost contri-
butor, the Auxiliary Society of Massachusetts,
alone,raised more than $40,000 (or $6,000 inore
than twice the whole income of the national
Society in 1827,) of which over $38,000 went
for the benefit of the new settlements. The
first year, 11 0 years of labor were performed ;
in the twenty-eighth year, 870 years. The
number of Sabbath-school scholars now coi>-
nected with its churches, amounts to more than
65,000. In its last year, 65 houses of worship
were built by congregations receiving its aid ;
49 repaired or improved, while 88 remain in
process of erection, and 20 churches have built
parsonages. The society needs about 200 new
missionaries, annually.
The direction of' the society's growth is
shown in the following table :
In 1827, Ohio
" " Indiana
" " Illinois
" " Missouri
" " Michigan
<' 183C, Wiscon.sin
" " Iowa
,. Ciilifornia
& Oregon
had 16 missionaries ; in 1854, 110
1847
("
43
105
28
76
87
66
12
At the same time its labors have also been
much extended in the older States.
Jknefit to particular States and Sections.— It
is estimated that one-half of the chnrchea
in New England have received mission-
ary aid— most of them from this society,
through its auxiliaries ; and iu Maine and Vcr-
HOME MISSIONS.
460
mont, three-fourtlis of the cliurclies ; m Central I The operations of this society from year to
and Western JS'ew York, Jive-sixths, and in the year, its regular increase of means and labors,
states north-west of the Ohio river, out of with the results, will all be seen in the follow-
1,200, all but about 50, or eleven-twelfths. ' ing
TABULAR VIEW.
Society's
Receipts.
E.xpenditures
a
o
.a
1
o
"o
O o
.2 ^
Years.
'^
«•« to
Z.aoS
o
O 'u
A« £
p.'C
««
o S
0
.S c-S
o .2 '1 -S
oils
is
1_1826-2V
§18,140.76
§13,984.17
169
68
196
110
not rep
not rep
.$127
$ 83
2—1827-28
20,035.78
17,849.22
201
89
244
133
1,000
306
134
89
3_1828-29
26,997.31
26,814.96
304
169
401
186
1,678
423
144
88
4—1829 30
33,929.44
42,429.50
392
166
500
274
1,959
572
155
108
5-1830-31
48,124.73
47,247.60
463
164
577
294
2,532
700
160
102
6—1831-32
49,422.12
52,808.39
509
158
745
361
6,126
783
146
104
7—1832-33
68,627.17
66,277.96
606
209
801
417
4,284
1,148
159
109
8—1833-34
78,911.44
80,015.76
676
200
899
463
2,736
Pupils.
172
118
9—1834-35
88,863.22
83,394.28
719
204
1,050
490
3,300
52,000
170
116
10— 1835-3G
101,565.15
92,188.94
755
249
1,000
545
3,750
65,000
169
122
11—1836-37
85,701.59
99,529.72
810
232
1,025
554
3,752
80,000
J 80
123
12—1837-38
86,522.45
85,066.26
684
123
840
438
3,376
67,000
194
124
13—1838-39
82,564.63
82,655,64
665
201
794
473
3,920
58,500
175
124
14- 1839-40
78,345.20
78,533,89
680
194
842
486
4,750
60,000
162
115
15—1840-41
85,413.34
84.864.06
690
178
862
501
4,618
54,100
169
123
16—1841-42
92,463.64
94,300.14
791
248
987
594
5,514
64,300
159
119
17—1842-43
99,812.24
98,215.11
848
225
1,047
657
8,223
68,400
149
116
18—1843-44
101,904.99
104,276.47
907
237
1,245
665
7,693
60,300
157
115
19 1844-45
121,946.28
118,360.12
943
209
1,285
736
4,929
60,000
160
126
20—1845-46
125,124.70
126,193.15
971
223
1,453
760
5,311
76,700
166
130
21—1846-47
116,617.94
119,170.40
972
189
1,470
713
4,400
73,000
167
123
22—1847-48
140,197.10
139,233.34
1,006
205
1,447
773
5,020
77,000
180
138
23—1848-49
145,925.91
143,771.67
1,019
192
1,510
808
5,550
83.500
178
141
2-1—1849 50
157,160,78
145,456,09
1,032
205
1,575
812
6,<582
75,000
179
141
25—1850-51
150,940.25
153,817.90
1,065
211
1,820
853
6,678
70,000
180
144
26—1851-52
160,062.25
162,831.14
1,065
204
1,948
862
6,820
66,500
189
153
27—1852-53
171,734.24
174,439.24
1,087
213
2,160
878
6,079
72,500
199
160
28—1853-54
191,209.07
184,025.76
1,047
167
2,140
870
6,025
65,400
212
171
Remarks. — The influence of this society, how-
ever, can hardly be estimated in figures, and is
not easily described in words. Its missionaries
are not merely pastors and preachers, they are
founders of schools, colleges, and theological
seminaries. They labor not merely in the pul-
pit, the conference-room, and by the bed-side of
the sick and the dying ; but they are abroad in
the world, laying the foundations of the
country's future, through labors, specific, and
direct, as well as in the general influences of
their sacred calling, and of the religious insti-
tutions that they buil'd.
Methodist Home 31issions. — The Methodist
Home Missions in the United States are those
sustained by the Methodist Episcopal Church,
the Methodist E. Church South, and the Pro-
testant Methodist Church. The mode of opera-
tion in raising and appropriating funds for
Domestic Missions is so much alike in each of
these churches, that one description will do for
all. There is no separate Home Missionary
Fund in any of these bodies. What they
raise for missions, is raised without any par-
ticular designation. But out of the whole sum
subscribed by the church, a certain proportion
is set apart for the support of Home Missions.
In the month of November of each year, the
General Missionary Committee, the Board of
Managers, and the Bishops of the Methodist
E. Church, meet together in New-York, in
order to make the appropriations for missions
for the ensuing year. This committee, after
having disposed of the foreign missions, takes
up the domestic missions. First, the missions
to the Germans in the United States and Ter-
ritories are taken up by the conferences, and
considered one by one, and the amount nece.s-
saryfor each conference set down ; then the
missions to the foreign population other than
German are taken up and considered, and the
amount necessary set down ; then the domestic
470
HOME MISSIONS.
Englisli Missions in each annual conleroncc arc
taken up, and the amount necessary to enable
each annual conference to carry on its own
domestic missions is determined, and set down
to each conference. This committee deter-
mines the amount for which each bishop may
draw for the domestic missions of those con-
li'rences over which he sliall preside, and he
cannot draw on the treasurer for more than this
amount. The Book nf Diaciplinc (Fart 111. ch.
iv.) prescribi^ the })lan for raising the funds
thus appropriated. The leading provisions
are : (1) Kaeli conference has an auxiliary to
the ])arent soeiety ; (2) Every cluu'ch within
the bounds of that conference is to have a mis-
Fionary committee, to aid in carrying into
efllet the disciplinary measures for the support
of missions ; {^) In each church suitable mis-
sionary collectors are appointed to solicit sul>
scriptions ; (4) One Sabbath in the 3-ear is
given to the advocacy of this cause, when a
public collection is usually taken up ; (f)) A
transcript return of all subscriptions of lifty
cents and upwards, is to be reported at Con-
ference for insertion in the Annual Report of
the Conference Missionary Societies.
The moneys appropriated for domestic mis-
sions are placed to the credit of the confer-
ences, severally, which have charge of these
nii.«sions. In each of the annual conferences
there is a mission committee, appointed at each
session, whose duty it is, in conjunction with
the bi.'ihop ])residing, to make the estimate for
each mi.ssion under the care of the conference;
and the estimates must be kept within the
credit allowed to the conference for its mis-
sions, and, further, must receive the sanction
of the bishop jjresiding. 'J'hus, it will be seen
that each conference is responsiljle for the use
made of the money placed to its credit for the
support of the missions under its care. The
conference missionary committee for estimating
for the support of the mi.^sions under its care,
can obtain all information of the condition
and pro.spects of each of their missions, and
hence make just estimates; and when these
estimates are maile, they are brought to the
notice of the bi.'^linp in council with all tliejjre-
siding elders, so tliat tiie idshop has an oppor-
tunity of thoroughly understanding each ease,
and thus is -naliled to give or withhold his
sanction. AVIien the estimates arc approved
bj- the bishoj), he draw.s on the treasurer at
IScw York for the same, in (|uarterly drafts,
in favor of each prc-iiding elder, for tlu; amount
estimated for the missions in his district, and
under his direction. In the expenditure of
the m.inevs appropriated for these missions.
• the iJuurd of Managers at New York are in
no Way n>spi)nsLbIe ; but each conference and
the bmliop i)re<idiug are respuiisilde for tlie
BiKTific appr(;priatious made to the missions
under its cure.
The Domestic Missions of the M. E. Church
arc (1) : Mi.sMJons to those who speak the Eng-
lish langtuige in the destitute, or new por-
tions of the country; (2) To/omg7jfr.5 who
have settled together in various portions of
the country, and in particular quarters of our
cities ; (3) Besides these they have also an
interesing mission to New Mexico. Of these,
the missions to the Germans are the most nu-
merous and successful ; but they have also
missions to the Swedes, Danes, Norwegians,
Welsh, and French.
The missions to people Tvho speak the Eng-
lish language are instituted by the bishop and
council of j)residing elders of each conference,
within whoie bounds such mission fields lie ;
and the appropriations for the same are re-
ported to the conference for its approbation.
As these English domestic missions become
strong, they cea.se to be missions, and become
self-supporting churches, and in their turn con-
tribute to sustain other new or promising fields
of labor.
The missions to the foreign populations
which have settled in the country, and still
speak their own language, sprung up among
these people spontaneously. Individuals were
converted under the ordinary ministration of
the Gospel, and they began to declare to their
countrymen what they had experienced. The
work among the (iernuxns began about seven-
teen years ago. Now there are 160 mission-
aries and 11,000 members, with numerous Sun-
day-schools, and a few day-schools. These
missions in the United States have reacted on
Germany, and produced the Foreign German
Missions.
Then there are the Scandinavian M! sions to
the Swedes, Norwegians, and Danes. Of these
people the Swedes are the most numerous in
this country, and the missions arc more exten-
sive anumg them. The Norwegians also have
received the Gospel gladly, and have carried
it back to Norway ; and have thus laid the
foundation of a mi.-<sion there. The centre of
the missions to the Sclavonic people from the
north-west of P'urope, is in New York, where
they all land. The liethel-ship, John if'ealey,
in the North River, is the; place Avhere, upon
landing, they hear for the fii-st time the simple,
spiritual preaching of the Gospel of Christ.
These mi.ssicms took fiirm nine years ago, in
the city of New York, under the labors of the
Rev. 0. G llcdslrom.
Residi-s these, there are missions to the
Welsh and French immigrants, as will appear
in the tal)le.
Orrixim and California have hithcito been
placed among foreign missions, owing to their
distance, the peculiarities of their pnj)uIation,
and their dependence upon the Missionary
Society. It has pleiv'jed God to give the
Methodist Episcopal Church the earliest, and,
as yet, the widest and strong(^t occui)ancy of
these new euuntries. Hitherto this body have
prosecuted these missions vigorously and suc-
cessfully. They have sent a large proportion
HOME MISSIONS.
471
of their best men into these missions ; and the
last General Conference judged it best to grant
their request to be organized each into a regu-
lar independent annual conference. From the
time of their meeting, in the spring of 1853,
under the presidency of Bishop Ames, they took
their places among their sister conferences.
The mission to New Mexico was commenced
about five years ago, by the Eev. E. Z. Nich-
olson. It was for a while suspended, but has
been again renewed. Santa F'e is its central
position. Mr. Nicholson is the superintendent,
having for his assistants, the Eev. Messrs. W.
Hansen and Bcnigno Canhnax. Mr. Hansen
is the fruit of the Swedish mission in New
York, and being able to preach in Spanish,
had long desired to go to Mexico as a mission-
ary. Benigno Cardenas had been an intelli-
gent and well-educated Roman Catholic priest
of much influence at Santa Fe, and a preacher
of considerable eloquence. During Mr. Nich-
olson's previous residence in that city, Cardenas
had freely conversed with him upon the errors
of the Church of Kome, and the nature of
evangelical religion. He afterwards left Mex-
ico and visited Rome, and returned by way of
London, where he called upon the Rev. Mr.
Rule, who had long been a Wesleyan mission-
ary in Spain. There he remained for several
weeks, and his mind and heart underwent such
a change, that he renounced popery for ever,
and cordially embraced the Gospel of ChriBt.
He then offered himself to the Missionary So-
ciety of the Methodist Episcopal Church, as a
missionary for his native Mexico, where he is
now zealously and usefully employed.
The Methodist E. Church, South, has
missions in the United States : — (1) In the
destitute portions of their regular work ; (2)
Among the people of color ; (3) Among the
German emigrants ; and (4) In California.
But these missions are so like those we have
described, that we need only thus enumerate
them and refer to the annexed table for full
information. The mode of raising the money
is also the same as that given above.
Tlie Methodist Protestant Church has 99
missions in the destitute portions of their regu-
lar work ; they have no others.
The following tables contain the results.
Some of the statistics are for 1853, but most
of them for the present year. We have made
the tables as complete as we could, some of
the Reports being quite defective.
METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHURCH.
MISSIONS.
.§
!^
493
53
5
12
3
1
1
i
a
i-i
a
CI
o
1
1
a
1
Missionary
Contributions.
Eng:iish Domestic Missions
German Domestic Missions
Swedish and Norwegian .
Welsh Mission ....
505
160
13
12
4
3
80
8
1
33
2
35,830
11,000
526
427
43
6839
271
27
9
27
132
8
2
42
$2,885.08
142
132.90
French Mission ....
New Mexican Mission
*
Totals
•667
697
89
35
47,826
7173 142
42
^3159.98
METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHURCH SOUTH.
MISSIONS.
English Domestic Missions •
Missions among the Slaves •
German Missions
California Mission
Totals 350 262
26,176
38,844
589
53
6,146 12
1^
5413
17,244
217
It is now thirty-five years since the Metho-
dist E. Church began her domestic missionary
operations. At the end of the year
Missions.
Missionaries.
Members.
1829 there were 37
30
9,539
1839 " " 140
164
18.700
1849 " " 250
275
29,124
1S54 " ■' 668
698
47,881
The entire expenditure during this period
has been about $1,000,000.— Rev. W.Butler.
American Baptist Home Missioimry Society.
—At a meeting of the Baptist Missionary
Society of Massachusetts, held in Boston, in
November, 1832, the spiritual destitution of
many of the new states, and especially of the
Mississippi Yalley, having been made a subject
of consideration, it was resolved to take mear
sures for the awakening of interest and system-
atic effort, throughout the Baptist community,
in behalf of domestic missions. Resolutions
were passed, recommending the formation of a
General Home Mission Society, and appoint-
ing Rev. Jonathan Going, of Worcester, Mass.,
an agent on the part of the Massachusetts So-
ciety, for the accomplishment of this plan. In
New York and Philadelphia the proposal was
favorably received. A provisional executive
Committee was elected in New York city, by
478
HOME MISSIONS.
1 all parts of the uuiou, for the purpose of
ling au organization. This convention was
eld in the Baptist church, in Mulberry-street,
s'ew York, on the 27th of April, 1832 ; four-
whom measures were taken, initiatory to a
convention of nienibers of the denomination
from
form
held
K
teen of the states and one territory being re-
presented by delegates. The American Ba}>
tist Home Missionary Society was formed, a
constitution adopted, and Hon. Heman Lin-
coln, of Massachusetts was elected president.
'J'he plan of operations adopted by the exe-
cutive committee proposes : First, to obtain
and disseminate information respecting the mo-
ral condition of the country — especially the
Mississippi Valley. Second, to excite the entire
Baptist community to systematic, liberal, and
vigorous action, in support of missionaiy ef-
fort. Third, to establish state agencies, era-
ploying and sending to destitute regions, min-
isters of suitable qualifications. Fourth, the
collection of the necessary funds.
It was proposed to raise 1^10,000 the first
year. The receipts amounted, however, to but
?7,58C 73, which was expended in the support
of 59 missionaries and agents, some of whom
labored only during a part of the year. Twen-
ty-two were appointed by the Kentucky Bap-
tist Convention, a separate and preexisting
organization. Mis.souri, Illinois, Indiana, Ohio
and Michigan chiefly formed the field of the
first year's operations. The receipts of the so-
ciety, in 183G, had risen to 810,910 ; 115 mis-
sionaries and agents had been employed dur-
ing the year, in fourteen states, two terri-
tories and two provinc&s. In 1838, 317 mis-
sionaries were employed during the year.
The annual receipts varied from 1838 to 1841,
from §10,000 to §20,000. In 1841, 82 agents
and missionaries were commissioned, who
occupied 300 stations, preached 10,922 ser-
mons, traveling 73,451 miles. The auxiliary
Baptist societies employed 233 laborers, mak-
ing a total of 315.
'i'he society now began to receive, from the
churches aided, new and active auxiliaries,
" who will continue to r(i)ay, with large intc^
rest, the debt of gratitude, until their charac-
ter of debtors will be lost in that of benefac-
tors. At the annual meeting in 1842, it wius
resolved to commence u mi.^sion to the .lews
in North America, provided suflicient funds
should be specifically contributed for its suf)-
port. The receipts, for this year, including
those of auxiliaries, rose to §57,154 72. 'J'otal
number of missionaries, 307. During the ten
years of the society's existence, from 1832, to
184*2, great results had been effected through
itH instnmientality, in Kentucky, Missouri, In-
diana, and M ichigan. Previous to ] 832, there
were in those states but 955 Ba])tist churches,
484 ministers — ten only being ])a.stors. There
way an anti-missionary s])irit i)revalent
among the mini-stcrs and churehe.-*, and scarce-
ly anything was contributed for benevolent
objects. In 1842, there were in the same
states, 1089 churches, with 772 ministers, of
whom 99 were pastors. The anti-missionary
spirit had greatly decreased, and §0,245 had
been then contributed for benevolent purposes.
In 1832, there was but one (Baptist) scientific
and theological institution ; in 1842 several
had been established. During the ten years,
750 missionaries had been employed by the
society, generally west of the Alleghanies ;
732 destitute churches and stations had been
supplied ; 10,990 persons baptized, 401
churches organized, 142 ministers ordained.
During the decade, from 1842 to 1852, the
society extended its operations to Florida,
Arkansas, Iowa, and Wisconsin, and greatly
increased its labors in the Mississippi Valley.
In the year 1845, a controversy upon the sub-
ject of domestic slavery, which had existed in
the society for some years, reached its crisis,
and produced a separation. A missionary
body was then organized in the slaveholding
states, which has since ret^eived the supiwrt of
the majority of southern Baptists. Since
then, the operations of the society, with two
exceptions, have been directed to the free
states and territories only. From 1842 to
1852, 877 ministers were employed, 9,408 per-
sons baptized, 354 churches organized, 240
ministers ordained. In mission fields, 105
houses of worship had been built, ai:d §18,845.
57 contributed to benevolent objects ; 05 of
the churches once aided, were sustaining the
Gospel themselves. In 18»2, three mission-
aries were scut to Oregon and California ; one
to an Indian tribe in New Mexico : a Chip-
pewa to his countrymen. In 1854, the execu-
tive Board resolved to take measures for the
es-tabli-shment of a church edifice fund. The
society, from its commencement, has had in
its employ 1750. missionaries and agents.
They have in the field at present, 184. The
entire amount of thuir receipts, from the be-
ginning, is §430,170. From New York State,
§100,039 of this sum. Receipts for the fiscal
year, ending 31st March, 1854, §02,730 2G._
During tlie past 22 years, the missionaries
of the society liavc baptized 22,814, persons,
organized 911 churches, ordained 400 minis-
ters ; and the people among whom they have
mbored have built, and in most cases paid for,
1 78 houses of worship. About 200,000 chil-
dren have been gathered into Sabbath-schools;
and the Gosi)el has been preached in fourteen
dill'erent languages. For the jjast yi'ar, the
missionaries report the ba])tism of 1,3L'2 per-
sons, the organization of 07 churches, the ordi-
nation of 30 ministers : 40 church edifices have
been built, or are in progress C)f erection.
About 103 have been baptized from the Cath-
olics and LutJierans.
Southern Ikvtid Board of Domestic Missions.
—In 1845, owing to controversy arising from
the discussion of slaveholding, u large; number
of the Southern Baptist churches withdrew
HOME MISSIONS.
4Y3
from the American Baptist Home Missionary
Society, and a Board of Domestic Missions
was formed, in connection witli the Southern
Baptist Convention. The receipts of this
Board, for 1852, amounted to $10,939 15 ; for
1853, to $13,074 17. During 1853, 66 mis-
sionaries and agents were commissioned by
this Board, a large number of whom have
labored in the rapidly growing cities on the
southern Mississippi and Atlantic seaboard.
The reports are imperfect ; 217 stations have
been supplied, 5,958 sermons and addresses
delivered, 1,521 prayer and other religious
meetings attended, 642 persons have been bap-
tized, 381 added by letter, 763 converted, not
baptized — making 1,786 substantial additions
to the strength of our cause, in place of 1,109
last year. 65,182 miles have been traveled,
8,712 religious visits made ; 59 Sabbath-
schools and Bible classes, 218 teachers, and
2,105 pupils are reported. These latter statis-
tics are, however, exceedingly deficient. 17
meeting-houses are reported as commenced, 13
finished ; 21 churches have been constituted,
24 ministers and 34 deacons ordained ; 8 are
preparing for the ministry.
What is doing by this Board, is as nothing
to what is being carried on for domestic mis-
sions by the denomination, through other chan-
nels. The General Association of Baptists in
Tirginia, proposed to raise and expend $10,000
in domestic missions during the year 1853.
Nor does this include the whole of what is
done in that State, a single association raising-
some $3,000 or $4,000 more. In most, if not
all, of the states of tlie South and South-west,
associations are carrying on, independently of
any State organization, a system of missions
within their own borders.
Board of Domestic Missions of the Protestant
Episcopal Church. — For a history of the organ-
ization and constitution of this Board, toge-
ther with its annual and aggregate receipts,
see Episcopal Board of Missio)ts. The account
is given in that place, rather than this, because
of the intimate connection between the foreign
and domestic boards. The Board now have
under thf ir charge 105 churches or stations,
13 of which are vacant. They have in their
employ 92 missionaries, and 8 missionary
bishops. These missionaries are distributed
as follows : in Maine, 2 ; New Hampshire, 3 ;
Delaware, 2 ; Florida, 1 ; Alabama, 7 ; Lou-
isiana, 1 ; Mississippi, 5 ; Tennessee, 4 ; Ken-
tucky, 3 ; Indiana, 9 ; Illinois, 11 ; Michigan,
9 ; Wisconsin, 11 ; Iowa, 9 ; Minnesota, 3 ;
Missouri, 3 ; Arkansas, 1 ; Texas, 6 ; Indian
Mission, 1 ; California, 1 (bishop) ; Oregon, 3.
The amount of donations received for the
financial year ending Sept. 30, 1853, was
$23,856 ; and from Oct. 1, 1853, to Aug. 15,
1854, $36,327. The aggregate amount of do-
nations from the beginning is $626,751.
But a new department of domestic missions
is opening up before the Episcopal Board of
Missions. Rev. E. W. Syle, of the Episcopal
Mission in China, having returned on account
of his health, had his attention turned to the
Chinese in this country. After much search-
ing and inquiry, he discovered about 70 China-
men in New York, most of them in a destitute
condition. He called a meeting of them at
the vestry-room of old St. George's Church,
where he continued to instruct from forty to
fifty, who carae regularly for some time, every
Thursday morning and Sunday afternoon.
After some time, a meeting was called, and
measures were taken to raise funds to make
temporary provision for their wants. Twenty-
two of them were sent to California and four
to China. The remainder were all provided
with employment suited to their ability, by
which they could earn a living, except six, who
desired an education, and these are placed
under the instruction of a theological student,
to make trial of their capacities, and in the
mean time are provided with a support. The
sixteen, who are provided with employment,
are located at Gowanus, near Greenwood Cem-
etery. They attend one of the neighboring
churches in the morning, and ]Mr Byle
preaches to them in the afternoon. In a com-
munication in the " Spirit of Missions," in
which these facts are detailed, Mr. Syle says :
" Our connection with the Chinese is becoming
daily more intimate and inevitable. The emi-
gration from Canton has been so large :hat
old ships not considered seaworthy have been
bought up at enormous prices, to meet the
demand for passages. The now indispensable
guano is put on board our ships at the Chincha
Islands by Chinese laborers, and what unutter-
able sufferings are they not made to undergo in
the operation ! The labor on the Isthmus
railroad is largely performed by Chinese. In
Kentucky, the Chinese coolies are said to be
employed at certain iron mills on the Cumber-
land Eivcr, near Eddy villc. Tea-stores, owned
and kept by Chinamen, are to be found at
Boston, Albany, and other places ; not to
mention that Chinese are to be seen in the
tea-stores of this city, and at Cincinnati, Day-
ton, Indianapolis, and elsewhere. Chinese
cooks and stewards on board our ships are
now quite frequently to be met with."
The fact that God is sending the heathen to
us, as well as requiring us to go to them, ought
to be a matter of gratulation and thanksgiv-
ing ; and it certainly calls loudly upon us to
seek their evangelization.
Board of Missions of the Reformed Protestant
Dutch Church. — This Board has been in exist-
ence twenty-two years. Its receipts for the
year ending May 1, 1854, were $15,257. The
following summary of results will show what
the Board is doing :
1. In nineteen out of twenty-seven classes,
one or more churches or missionary stations
have beeh aided during a part or the whole of
the year.
474
HONGKONGr-nOTTENTOTS.
2. Sixli/-nme pastors and missionaries liavo
received aid during a part or the whole of the
year.
3. Eighty churches and missionary stations
have been aided from its funds.
4. Thirteen new churches and missionary
stations have been established and assisted.
5. Eight churches have been ortjanized, to
which appropriations have been made.
6. Twelve new houses of worship have been
built l>y congregations aided by the Board.
7. Three have ceased to ask aid of the
Board, and several others give notice that they
will not need any aid beyond the present year.
8. Four hundred and fiftij-nine persons have
been received, on confession of their faith in
Christ, into the churches aided.
9. Four hundred and sixty-six have been
received on certificate from other churches.
10. Eighty-three Sabbath-schools have been
in operation during the year ; besides many
Bible and catechetical classes, both in ^nd out
of the schools.
11. Four thousand two hundred children and
youth have been taught in those the truths
which arc able to make them wise unto salvar
tion.
12. Nine hundred and thirty-four dollars
have been contributed, by the churches and
niis.«ionary stations aided, to the funds of the
Board.
13. Three thousand six hundred and sevcixieen
dollars have been contributed by them for other
benevolent objects.
14. One hundred and ninety-three out of three
hundred and forty-two of the churches have
contributed to the cause of Domestic Missions.
15. One hundred and forty-nine out of three
hundred and forty-two of the churches have
given nothing.
The last report states that the Domestic
Missionary efforts of this Board have aided in
establishing a majority of the Dutch churches
in the country. The churches aided are repre-
sented to be in a good condition. Special
efforts arc made in behalf of the Dutch and
German emigrants.
American Missionary Association. — This So-
ciety has a Home Department, with 90 mis-
sionaries and 108 churches.
GENERAL TABULAR VIEW.
SOClKl'lKa
1
= C3 =4
II
1
.2
■5 Si,
Receipts past
year.
Aggregruto of
receipts.
Years.
Presbyterian Board . . .
Am. Home Miss. Society .
Methodist f^piscopal Church
Meth. Epis. Church South .
Am. Bap. Home Miss. Soc.
Southern Baptist Board
Ki»iscopal Board ....
Reformed Dutch Board . .
American Missionary Asso.
38
28
35
22
9
34
22
7
838
4,000
567*
350*
217
105
80
108
523
1,047
697
202
184
60
92
69
90
32
67
21
8
45
65
46
12
2,930
6,025
1.332
1,786
925
S!75,207
191,209
62,730
13,074
36.327
15,257
^2.728.363
1,000,000
430,170
626,751
6,266
3,024
128
1C8
12,998
$393,804
$4,785,284
• Xumbcr of missions. Probably preaching places many times greater.
HONGKONG : A flourishing English set-
tlement, on an island about 40 miles east of
Macao. (Sec China.)
HON ORE : A station of the Basle Mis-
sionarv Society, in the province of llonore,
Uiiid()Htan. Pop. 4000.
HOOBLY: A station of the Basle Mi.s-
sioiiury Society, in the Mahratta country,
India.
HONOLULU : The chief city of the Sand-
wich Islands, and the seat of government. It
is situated in a fertile plain, which extends 9
Dr 10 miles along the southern coast of Oahu,
and about two miles inward to the ba.se of the
mountains. A rich alluvial soil, two or three
feel »lcep, covers a layer of fine volnuiic a.slies
and cinders, extending to the depth of 14 to
16 feet. These ashes rest on a stratirm of cal
careous rock. The harbor is considered the
best in the whole grouj), and most frequented
by shipping. It contains two large churches,
estal)lislifd liv the missionaries.
HOPKDAI.l']: A station of the Moravi-
ans in Labrador.
HOTTENTOTS: A family of affiliated
tribes in South Africa, formerly inhabiting
the territory embraced in the English colony
of the Ca])e of Good Ho])e, conijirising the
Coranas, Nama(iua.s. and Bushmen, as well aa
the tril)es on the coast.
The Hottentot is of a yellowish brown, high
cheek l)ones, spread out above, and contracted
to a very narrow chin ; no.sc remarkably tlat ;
eyes, chestnut color ; hair grows in small tufus.
HUMAN SACRIFICES.
475
and does not cover the whole head. The sta-
ture of the Hottentot is very short, about four
feet six inches being the medium size for the
men, and four feet for the women. Their his-
tory and origin are involved in obscurity.
They resemble none of the Kaffre tribes, and
are equally distinct from the Negro race. Mr.
Moffat thinks they more nearly resemble the
Chinese than any other people. All these
tribes possess the same physical characteristics,
the same manners and customs, and their lan-
guage is so nearly identical that they readily
understand each other. Mr. INfoffat thinks that
the difference between the Hottentots and
Bushmen is to be accounted for by the fact
that the former, residing in towns, are improved
by intercourse with each other ; while the lat-
ter, being scattered over thinly inhabited dis-
tricts, having little intercourse with each other,
lead an exposed and half famished life, and
degenerate rather than improve. The lan-
guage of the Hottentots is as singular as their
persons. Its pronunciation has been compared
to the clucking of the turkey.
Character. — Dr. Philip gives a very favora-
ble view of the native character of the Hot-
tentots. He says, when the Portuguese first
visited the Cape of Good Hope, they found the
inhabitants rich in cattle, and living in a com-
fortable manner. It was said that they were
remarkable for the excellence of their morals,
and that the records of the colony during the
first 50 years, unite in praising the virtues of
the Hottentots, so that they were distinguished
by the appellation cf The Good Men. It is
said that, during the whole of that period, the
natives had never been detected in stealing
from a colonist. But the injuries inflicted on
them, for 150 years, during which they have
been driven from the most fertile portions of
their country, and deprived of their indepen-
dence, he says must have exerted upon them a
deteriorating influence. INlr. Barrow says that
Hottentots are capable of strong attachments,
are grateful for kindness shown, and honest
and truthful. They live together in kraals or
villages, and have their cattle in common.
Kev. J. J. Freeman estimates the present num-
ber of the Hottentot tribes at 150,000.
Religion. — Like the Kaffres, the Hottentots
have no religion, eScept a gross, undefined su-
perstition. Dr. Philip says of them, "I have
never been able to discover, from my inter-
course with the natives, or from any other
source, that this nation had ever attained any
distinct notion of a Supreme Being, or that an
idea of a future state had at any period pre-
vailed among them." Eev. Mr. Moffat and
Eev. Mr. Schmelen also testify to the same
fact, and quote the conversations of the natives
and the declarations of the converts, to con-
firm their statements. Yet, Dr. Philip says
they were not entirely without moral restraints.
— Freeman's Tour in South Africa ; Moffat's
South Africa; Philip's Researches; McCulloch's
Geography. (For missions to the Hottentots,
see Africa, Southern.)
HUAHINE : One of the Society Islands,
on which is a mission of the London Mission-
ary Society. .
HUMAN SACKIFICES : The prevalence
of human sacrifices among the heathen, from
the earliest periods of history, is a fact of mo-
mentous interest. It shows, first, a sense of
the need of an ofiering for sin, of the highest
value that the human mind can conceive ; and
second, false notions of the character of God,
in supposing that he would be pleased with
one man, in consequence of his imbruing his
hands in another's blood. It shows, also, the
ferocious character of their gods, who are thus
represented as feasting upon human gore. We
said the practice had prevailed from the remot-
est ages. The ancient Egyptians, the Cretans,
the Arabians, brought human blood to their
altars. The people of Duma sacrificed every
year a* child, and buried it under an altar.
The Persians buried their sacrificial victims
alive. Amestris, the wife of Xerxes, entomb-
ed twelves persons alive, under ground, /o)' the
good of her soul. The Cyprians, the Rhodians,
the Phoenicians, the people of Chios, Lesbos,
Tenedos, all had human sacrifices. The king
of Moab offered up his eldest son, his successor
to the kingdom, on the wall, when the king of
Edom was fighting against his capital. When
an enemy was at the gates of Carthage, 200
children of the most distinguished citizens
v.'ere offered up to appease the sanguinary dei-
ties and avert the danger. The natives of
Taurie Chersonesus offered up to Diana every
stranger whom chance threw on their coasts.
The Pelasgi, in a time of scarcity, vowed tha,t
they would give a tenth of all that should be born
to them for a sacrifice, in order to procure
plenty. Aristomenes, the Messenian, ofl'ered up
300 noble Lacedemonians, and among them the
king of Sparta, at the altar of Jjiipiter, at
Ithome. The Spartan boys were whipped in
the sight of their parents, before the altar of
Diana Orthia, with such severity that they
often died under the torture. Every Grecian
state made it a rule, before they marched
toward an enemy, to seek a blessing on their
expedition, by the sacrifice of human victims.
The Romans likewise offered human sacrifices,
by public authority. Cains Marius offered up
his own daughter, to procure success in a bat-
tle against the Cimbri. Augustus Ccesar
offered up on the Ides of March, after the sur-
render of Persia, three hundred chosen per-
sons, at an altar dedicated to the manes of his
uncle Julius. The Gauls and the Germans
were so devoted to this shocking custom, that
no business of any moment was transacted by
them without being prefaced by the blood of
men. They were offered up to various gods,
particularly to Hesus, Taranis, and Shantates,
whose altars were far removed from the com-
mon resort of men, being generally situated
476
HUMAN SACRIFICES.
in the depth of woods, that the Cfloom miflit
udd to the horror of the operation, and give a
reverence to the proceeciing. There were
many places set apart for this purpose all over
Gerniany, hut especially in the Moods of Ardu-
cnna, and the greater llercurian forest, a wild
that extended over thirty days' journey in
length. These j)Iacos were held in great ven-
eration, and only approached at particular
sea.«ons.
These practices prevailed among all the peo-
ple of the Xorth of Euro])e, aiul even among
our Saxon ancestors. Their chief gods were
Thor and AVodeii, whom they thought they
could never sufiiciently glut with blood. Of
these sacrifices, none were esteemed so auspi-
cious and salutary as a sacrifice of the prince
of the country. When the lot fell to the king
to die. it was received with universal acclama-
tions of joj-. In a time of famine the lot fell
upon King Pomalde, who was put to death.
Clans Triliger, another prince, was bunit alive
to Woden. Harold, the sonofGunild. slew
two of his sons to obtain a storm of wind to
destroy the ships of his enemy. Another king
eacrificed nine sons, to prolong his own life.
In Me.vico, in the courts of a single temple,
there were found 130,000 skulls, the remains
of those who had been slain in sacrifice. The
manner in which the victims were slaughtered
•wa.s various, but generally, it was attended
with the utmost cruelty. A native Hindoo
artist engraved a cut to represent a practice
of our forefathers, which is thus described
in a Bengalee paper, published by a society
of natives, the followers of Kam !Moluin Roy,
who professed to have forsaken Hindoo idol-
atry.
After describing liuman sacrifices, as they
have existed in various countries, they say :
" Yet even all these frightful enormities ajipear
less surprising to us, when we hear of tiie hor-
rors practiced in their religious rites, by the
ancestors even of the present race of our
English rulers. Among them, on the com-
mencement of a war, or wh(>n some great
chieftain was attacked with disease, or when
any other calamity aflecting the public oc-
curred, the Druids, who were the jiricsl.s of
their religion, in order to secure the favor of
their gods, jiresented them with offerings of
human victims, attended with circumstances
of peculiar cruelty and horror. There was
one special atrocity, the recital of wliichnnikcs
the heart trcndile. They con.><tructid an enor-
mous iigure, resembling a man of gigantic sta-
ture, formed of dried ]ihint stems, or wicker-
work, in the hollow interior of which were
E laced, as in a cage, numerous criminals, fast
ound, to jirevent their escape. Or if these
could not be had in sufficient numbers to fill
tl:e (ajiaciouK eavities of this terrible image,
the- <1( licie ney was mnele un of une.nending vic-
tims. Surroniiding the whole with straw and
dry weed, lluy then i-tt fire to the' whe.le, thus
murderously consuming at once, hundreds of
living men. women and children."
The editor of the London Missionary Ma-
gazine says: "The instance here described,
is a correct specimen of the superstitions
of ancient Britain. When we hear of these
horrid practices as existing among heathen na-
tions, our feelings arc instinctively shocked,
and we seem to regard them as sunk too low
almost for the reach of the Gospel : but when
we reflect that no pagan or barbarous nation
that ever existed has exceeded in those cruel-
tics our own ancestors, and reflect that the
Gospel reached them, and that we are now
reaping its blessed fruits, how ought the reflec-
tion to stir us up to send the same Gospel to
those who dwell in similar dark places, which
are full of similar habitations of cruelty ! For
human sacrifices still exist." In the native
provinces of India, beyond the reach of the
British government, human victims are oflered
up to a])pease the anger of their gods. Dr.
Scudder writes, in 1848, that four persons
had tiien recently been offered up as sacrifices
by the Khunds of Goomsoor, which forms the
north-western extremity of the northern Gir-
cars. The following description of these cruel
rites was publisheei in a Madras paper, iu
1838:—
" Miria Pooja, or human sacrifice, takes
place in Goomsoor once a year, in one or other
of the confederate districts in succession. The
victims are stolen from the low country, or
brought from some other distant part, and sold
to those districts where the sacrifices are offer-
ed ; if children, they are kept until they attain
a proper age.
" When the appointed day arrives, the
Khunds (inhabitants of the hill country) as»-
semble from all parts of the country, dirssed
in their finc^ry. some with bear-skins thrown
over their shoulders, others with the tails of
peacocks flowing liehind them, and the lemg
winding feather of the jungk^cock waving oil
their heads. 'J'lnis decked out. they dance,
leap, and revel, beating-drums, and ))Iaying cm
an instrument not unlike in .sound to the High-
land jtipe. Soon after noon the Jaiii, or pre-
siding ])riest, with the aid of his assistants, fast-
ensthcunfortnnate victim to a strong jjost, firmly
fixed into the ground, and then standing cTCct,
the living sacrifiee suffers the unutterable tor-
ture of having the fle,«h cut off" from his bones
in small ])ie'ees by the knives of the savage
crowd who rush on him and contend with each
either for a juirtiem of the gory and ejuivering
siilistance. (Jreat value is attached to the
first me)rsel thus severed from the victim's boely,
feir it is .'■ujiposed to pos.se'sa superior virtues,
and a jireiportionatc eagerness is evinceel to
acejuire it.
" Wcmen are sacrificed as well as iiu n. A
female lemnd her way into the collector's cam]),
at I'atringia. with fetters on her limbs, who
related that she liad been gold by litr brollicr !
HUMAN SACRIFICES.
477
" The Khunds are in the habit of sacrificing
children annually at sowing time, in a most
cruel manner, for the purpose of propitiating
the demon of their worship, and of securing, as
they suppose, a good harvest by the blood of
their victims.
" In January, just before the turmeric shrub is
planted, the Khunds make the sacrifice alluded
to. They select, as their victims, male child-
ren who are devoted from infancy to this pur-
pose, and are sold to the chiefs of the different
villages. When the ground is ready, the vic-
tim is led forth, bound to bamboos for the
better security, and taken into the open plain.
The cultivators assemble, and at the supposed
auspicious moment, commence the dreadful
cai'nage by hacking with knives the body of
the truly pitiable creature ; each cutting off a
part as quickly as possible, and hastening with
it to the field whose fertility is the object to be
secured. The blood, in which the Khunds
imagine the virtue of the spell to subsist, is
then made, by pressure of the hand, to fall in
drops upon the soil ; and the flesh, not yet cold,
is cast into the same ground. In hewing the
body great care is taken not to touch a vital
part, for should death occur before the blood
is dropped on the field, the charm, according
to the notions of the people, would be lost.
'' Some of the Khunds, on being expostu-
lated witli, asked what else they could do, as
they should have no crops if they neglected to
perform this ceremony."
Doct. Spry, in his " Modern India," gives
an account of a tribe in the Nagpore kingdom
who not only sacrifice human beings, but feast
upon the sacrifice.
The practice of offering human sacrifices has
prevailed to some extent among the North
American Indians. In 1838 a sacrifice of this
kind was made by the Pawnee Loups, in con-
sequence of the prevalence of the small-pox.
Young females are the victims selected. After
various preliminary rites and ceremonies, she
is disrobed, and one half of her person painted
red and the other black ; the feet and hands
being extended, the right wrist and ankle are
tied to an upright piece of timber, and the left
wrist and ankle to another, and she is thus
suspended on a scaflbld. At intervals, various
ceremonies are performA The young men
and boys, each having pfovided a handful of
arrows, about a foot long, made of the stems
of a species of tall grass that grows on the
prairies, now advance, and shoot' these arrows
into the breast and other parts of the unfor-
tunate sufferer. The arrows enter just enough
to adhere, and the breast is literally filled with
them ; but they do not destroy life. An old man
DOW comes forward and shoots an iron-pointed
arrow through the vitals. The chest is now
cut open, and the heart taken out and burned.
The smoke that rises from this fire is con-
sidered a most potent medicine, and tlieir im-
plements of war, hunting, and agriculture are
passed through it, to insure success in their
use. The flesh is now wantonly slashed ofif
with knives, and thrown to be devoured by the
dogs, but the skeleton remains suspended till
it decays and falls.
The custom prevails among most of the un-
evangelized tribes of Southern and Western
Africa, and is attended with shocking bar-
barities. Mr. Hutchinson gives the following
account of a sacrifice offered by the king of
Ashautee, to secure the assistance of the fetish
in an approaching war : " The bones of the
king's mother and sisters were taken out of
their coflins, and wasMed with rum and water,
wiped with silks, rolled in gold dust, and
wrapped in strings of rock-gold, aggry beads,
and other costly materials. Those against
whom the king had any complaints were then
sent for, and immolated as they entered, that
their blood might ' water the graves ' of the
royal dead. During the whole night the king's
executioners traversed the streets, and dragged
away to execution all whom they met. The
next morning, desolation seemed to reign over
the capital, and none appeared in the market
but the king and his attendants. At the
close of the day the sacrifice was renewed.
The bones were removed to the sacred tomb,
preceded by the victims in chains, and followed
by a splendid procession. When the procession
returned the next day to the market-place, the
king's horns sounded the death-knell, and the
work of sacrifice commenced. The king sat
with a goblet of palm-wine in his hand, and
every time the executioners cut off a head, he
imitated a dancing motion in the air."
In the neighboring kingdom of Dahomey,
the barbarous monarch paves the approaches
to his residence and ornaments the battle-
ments of his palace with the skulls of his vic-
tims ; and the wide-spreading branches of the
gigantic fetish-tree at Eadagry are laden with
human carcases and limbs, which have been
offered in sacrifice.
The same rite was generally prevalent in
the islands of the Pacific, before the introduc-
tion of Christianity, and the mode much like
that practiced in Africa. It still prevails
among the Pagans in those islands. Capt.
Wilkes, of the United States Exploring Expe-
dition, thus describes the practice, as it still
exists in the Feejee Islands : " The victims are
usually taken from a distant tribe, either by
war or by negociation; and, after being fattened
for the purpose, they are bound in a sitting
posture, and placed in the oven and roasted
alive ; after which the body is taken out, the
face painted black, and carried to the temple,
where it is offered to the gods. The Feejees
being cannibals, it is then cut up and dis-
tributed, to be eaten by the people !" Surely,
•' the dark places of the earth are full of the
habitations of cruelty !"
It appears, from the foregoing, that the hor-
rid practice of offering human sacrifices to
478
IDOL— INANDA,
gain the favor of blood-thirsty deities has been
ahnost" universal, except where the religion of
the IJible prevails, and that we owe our de-
liverance from it to the introduction of the
Gospel among our ancestors. What obliga-
tions, then, must rest upon us to send the Gos-
pel to those who arc still groaning under the
cruelties of paganism. — Pamphlet by Mr. Peggs,
late missionary to Orissa ; London Missionary
Magazine for JvJy, IB-tG ; Beecham's Ashantee
and the Gold Coast; United States Exploring
Expedition, Vol. III. p. 97.
IDOL : A statue or image of some false
god, to whom divine ht)uors arc paid, altars
and temples erected, and sacrifices ofifered. The
idol or image, of whatever material it consists,
is, by certain ceremonies, called consecra-
tion, converted into a god. While under the
ariiflcer's hands, it is a mere statue. Three
things were necessary among the ancients to
change the image into a god : proper orua-
mentij, consecration, and ovation. The orna-
ments were various, and wholly designed to
blind the eyes of the ignorant and stupid mul-
titude, who are chiefly taken with show and
pageantry. Then followed the consecration
and ovation, which by the Romans were per-
formed with great solemnity. — Rees' Cyclope-
dia.
IDOLATRY : The worship of idols, or the
act of ascribing to things and persons, pro-
perties which are peculiar to God alone. The
principal sources of idolatry seem to be the ex-
travagant veneration for creatures and beings,
from which benefits accrue to men. The first
objects of idolatrous worship are thought to
have been the sun, moon and stars. Soon
after the flood we find idolatry greatly prevail-
ing in the world. In process of time noted
patriots or deceased kings, animals, plants,
stones, and whatever people took a fancy to,
were idolized. The Egyptians worshiped pied
bulls, snipes, leeks, onions, and many other
e(|ualiy insignificant objects. The Greeks had
aljout 30,000 gods.
The Apostle I'aul traces idolatry to its true
source, the corruj)tiun of the human heart:
" As they did not like to retain God in their
knowledge, God gave them over to a repro-
bate mind, to do those things which are not
convenient." And this statement is corrobo-
rated by the discoveries of Layard, among the
ruins of Nineveh : —
" They show, in conformity with the tenor
of .Scripture, that the earliest ages were not,
as many think, l)arbarous ages ; but that the
race of men, originally enlightened from a di-
vine source, had, at first, a high degree of gen-
eral knowK-dge which thev gradually lost
througli their defection to idolatry. It has
been (li-nioiistrated by tlii'.sc excavations, not
only that a liijri, yiate of the arts existed in
Niiicvfli ii thou.saiid years before Ghrist, but
also, that in the earliest ages of tlw.t city, dating
but a lew ceiiturica from the Hood, their sculp-
tures were the best. In this remarkable result,
the Egyptian and Assyrian antiquities also
agree,
" It is also proved, contrary to the general
impression, that idolatry was introduced when
men had a better knowledge of the true God
than afterwards prevailed ; that it did not
grow up as a religion of nature, by the inef-
fectual attempts of men to find the true God.
But it was introduced as an expedient of men
in order to obscure what knowledge of God
they possessed, because they did not like to
retain God in their knowledge. This is shown
in the fact, that the earliest representations of
God found in these sculptures are the best, and
immeasurably exceed every thing of the kind
existing in after ages ; especially in their ap-
proach to the true idea of God. So that idol-
atry came in not for want of light, but by an
abuse of light. ]\Ien, knowing God, and yet
not willing to glorify him as God, became
vain in their imaginations, and their foolish
heart was darkened."
And the description which Paul gives in the
first chapter of Romans, of the debasing influ-
ence of idolatry upon the heathen of his day,
is a just description of its eflects in every age
and in every portion of the world. The wor-
ship of inferior objects tends to debase, as the
worship of the true God tends to exalt the hu-
man mind. Nor is the baptized idolatry of
the church of Rome essentially better than
that of jiagans. The learned men profess, in-
deed, to worship, not the images and pictures,
but through them the objects they represent,
or the Supreme Being through them, as medi-
ators ; and so do the learned among the hear
then. But it cannot be expected, that the
masses, whom they keep designedly iu igno-
rance, will make this distinction. And even
though this distinction were made, the worship
of God in this manner is expressly forbidden
in the second commandment ; hence the Ro-
manists leave out this command from the de-
calogue.
The idolatry of the heathen is everywhere
connected with superstitions the most debas-
ing, and rites the most cruel.
IFAFA: Station of the American Board
among the Zulus iu South Africa, near Port
Natal. ^
IFUMI : Statioi^of the American Board
among the Zulus, in South Africa, near Port
Natal.
IGBOIIO : A station of the Southern Bap-
tist Convention in West Africa, 180 miles
north of Abbeokuta.
IGGIBIGIIA : Station of the United
Scotch Presbyterian Church, in Kaffraria,
South Africa.
IKAl : Station of the American Board at
the Gaboon, West Africa.
INANDA : Station of the American
Board among the Zulus, in South Africa, near
Port Natal.
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO.
479
INDIAN-WALK : A station of the Bap-
tist Missionary Society in Trinidad, W. I.
INDIANS : See Nortk American Indians.
INDIA : See Hindostan.
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO : This vast
extent of islands, which tradition reports to be
the remains of a sunk continent, forms, as it
were, a bridge to that remote part of the world,
Australia, and from thence again up north-
ward to China. Its exterior crescent form
begins with the Andaman and Nicobar is-
lands ; then come two of the great Sunda
islands, Sumatra and Java, which are followed
by the lesser Sunda islands. Up northward
of these are the Moluccas, to which belong also
the islands of Banda, Amboyna, and Ternate.
These are followed by the Philippines, and
lastly by Formosa. Within this curve of
islands are embosomed the two other great
Sunda islands of Borneo and Celebes. The
whole of these islands together, comprising an
area of 170,000 square miles, contain about
20,000,000 of human beings, of all grades of
color and stature. The most ancient appear
to be the Papoos, who are the only inhabitants
of the Andaman Islands, but who are found
farther eastward as a people driven into the
forests, mountains, and defiles, and are not
found again as a leading population till we
reach New Guinea. They are some of the
most degenerate of the whole human race.
They were supplanted more immediately by
the Malays, who, having many centuries ago
emigrated from India beyond the Ganges, have
become a mysteriously heterogeneous people,
by mixture with Papoos, Hindoos, Arabs,
Chinese, Siamese, and even with Europeans.
The shores have of late years been more and
more covered with Chinese emigrants, who
threaten the same fate to the Malays which
they have inflicted upon the Papoos. The re-
ligious here are as various as the nations, and
tribes, and languages. Here we may still
meet with aboriginal sorcery, together with
the divine worship paid to mountains, rocks,
woods, storms, volcanoes ; then with Brah-
minism and Buddhism, the Chinese worship of
ancestors exalted into demigods, the Moham-
medan delusions, and the saint-wofship of the
Eoruish communion. The worship of God in
spirit and in truth has hitherto been to these
wretched nations a thing unknown ; and what
has been attempted for these forty or fifty
years past by about 70 or 80 missionaries, is
as yet but little more than a beginning of what
remains to be done.
1. The Nicobar and Andaman Islands. —
South of Burmah Proper, and nearest to it,
are the Andaman Islands, for whose wild in-
habitants, the Papoos, nothing has hitherto
been done. Below them are the Nicobars,
which are also called Sambilang, or the Nine
Islands, with a Malay population, who are of
a tawny complexion, short stature, and strong-
limbed, without any modesty, or any know-
ledge of any other superior Being except the
evil spirit. Here the Danish Government, in
1756, attempted to establish a mercantile set-
tlement ; and two years afterwards, at the re-
quest of that Government, some missionaries
of the United Brethren's church set out on
their way thither. After an eight years' so-
journ at Tranquebar, they came at length, in
1759, to the island of Nancawery. But scarce-
ly ever had any mission to encounter so many
privations and hardships of every kind, while
the inhabitants continued quite unimpressible.
Besides which, the climate was so deadly, that
new comers were perpetually swept away after
a very short interval. Yet the mission wa3
not wholly abandoned till 1787, after eleven
missionaries had been buried in Nancawery,
and thirteen others had died from the injurious
eifects of the country after they had left it,
while none of them had seen there any fruit of
their labors.
2. Sumatra. — This, first ofthe Sunda Islands,
which is almost bisected by the equator, is
1200 miles in length, and 200 in breadth. Its
western shore, facing the Indian Ocean, is
rugged and steep, and rises onward inland into
a mass of mountains pervading the length of
the island. Their highest summit is 13,000
feet. Here are bi-ooks and rivers of no great
length ; but, on the eastern side, where the de-
scent is gradual to the low land, there are nu-
merous river-vales, which abound with most
luxuriant vegetation, but whose exhalations
cause a deadly fever to Europeans. Ravenous
animals of all kinds are abundant here. The
inhabitants, who are estimated at 7,000,000,
are Malays ; and are considered as the most
bigoted and fierce abettors of the Mohamme-
dan delusion. A remarkable, though less
known people, are the Batta tribes in the north
of the island ; as are also the Kampungs in
the south of the mountainous interior. The
Battas devour the flesh of persons who have
been executed. When the Portuguese arrived,
which was in 1511, the Malays had their prin-
cipal force in the peninsula of Malacca ; and
the sultans of Atshin, at the north point of
Sumatra, attacked the intruding Portuguese
at seven diSerent times within the period of
130 years. But, in 1664, the Dutch took the
city of Palembang, in the south ; and during
very many wars they went on enlarging their
dominions, while the English also in the west
formed settlements at Bencoolen and Tapa-
nooly. These English settlements have been
consigned to the Dutch since 1825.
The English Baptists had previously com-
menced several missions in Sumatra ; first, at
Bencoolen, in 1820, in the vicinity of which is
Fort Marlborough ; then at Padang, above
312 miles further north, in 1821 ; and lastly,
in 1822, at the Batta village of Sebolga, in
the vicinity of Tapanooly. But the mission
was broken up in consequence of the exchange
of governors ; for it could not act with sufQ-
480
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO.
cient freedom under the narrow-hearted Dutch,
who, moreover, had drawn upon themselves the
hatred of the Malays, so that war, conflagra-
tion, and pillage, were perpetually on the in-
crease. The missionary Burton likewise found
it necessary to withdraw from Sebolga, be-
cause fanatical Malays, called Padrees, were
approaching the place with fury, to compel
th:)se Battas to embrace Mohammedanism.
Besides the Baptist missionaries, there were
also others from Holland, who from time to
time attempted to establish themselves at Pa-
dang and Palembang ; but their society, it
seems, wanted the means for carrying anything
ilito efiect at those places. Lastly, in the year
1833, the American Board of Missions sent
Gift Messrs. Munson and Lyman to make a
tour of inquiry through the island. These
missionaries pushed their way from Tapanooly
through deep ravines and defiles, primeval for-
ests, and over steep and precipitous rocks and
mountains ; but were at last cruelly butchered
by the insensate Battas near the village of
Sacca. The missionary Ennis likewise, who,
in 1837, ventured into the interior from Pa-
dang, had much difficulty to escape from the
perils and dangers of the country, the attacks
of wild beasts, and of the savage inhabitants.
Since that time there has been nothing further
attempted for the mission in Sumatra itself;
and the Baptist missionary Ward, who remains
at Padang, can do little more than circulate
copies of the Scriptures and tracts, on account
of the extreme je<BLOusy and irritability of the
Malays.
The mission, however, is only the more ac-
tive, and prospered in some islands on the east
coast of Sumatra ; especially in that of Bing-
tang with the isle of Lor, below Singapore ;
also, in Lingin, further south ; and in the large
island of Bauca, over against the province of
I'alembang. The two first mentioned islands
are possessed and governed l)y native rajahs,
who, however, are dependent on the Dutch,
who have totally subjugated Banca. To Bin-
tang, in 1827, came the Dutch missionary
"VVeutink, to whom (lutzlafffor some time lent
a successfully helping hand. They gained
many Chinese and Malays, as likewise in the
neighboring islands of Muntoc, Poolo Pinin-
gat, and Tercolee, so tliat the otherwise friend-
ly rajah began to be jealous. Wentiuk's suc-
cos.sor, the missionary lloettger, extended the
mission on to Lingin and Banca ; and, in
183(1, baptized in the latter island many Mo-
hammedans and pagans.
3. Java. — 'J'his next great Sunda island is
700 miles in length, and averages 100 miles in'
breadtli. Its southern coast consists of lofty
rocks, behind which rises a chain of mountains!
from five to eight thousand feet high, with]
thirty-eight volcanic craters, some of which
are exhausted, and others still burning. The
north coa.«t is inferior to no country in beauty
and magnificence. The island is also one of
the healthiest of the tropical countries, except
in some parts of it, as at Batavia, which is
built upon a river in a marshy region, where
the climate is so deadly, that, in the space of
twenty-one years, more than a million of
human beings have been SM-ept away, so that
it is called a large btirying-ground. The na-
tives, who are a finer formed people than the
Malays, are reckoned at about five millions.
Their habits, education, and religion, are of
Indian origin, and they formerly consisted of
separate kingdoms, one of which at length
obtained dominion over the rest. But after
this came the Arabian invaders, in 1327, who
subjugated the Avhole island, and established
in it the Mohammedan religion and customs.
The Javanese, however, had nearly recovered
their independence, when the Dutch arrived,
and fixed themselves at Batavia and Chapara.
Amidst incessant insurrections and civil wars,
they became increasingly powerful ; they even
expelled the French, the Portuguese, and the
English from the island, and retained the sov-
ereignty of all Java till the year 1749. But
it was not till the English took Java from
them, in 1811, that a better and more liberal
government was introduced, the .system of
which the Dutch themselves, when the country
was restored to them in 1515, could not avoid
retaining in some particulars. In the high
mountain regions, in the east and west, there
are still various pagan tribes. The Chinese
who have come hither, have formed a chain of
colonies on the northern coasts ; and in the
centre, and in the south, there are still two
native sultans, whose residence cities, Soora-
carta, or Solo, and Yudshyakerta, each con-
tain 100,000 inhabitants. The Dutch terri-
tory is divided into seventeen provinces, each
of which has a native governor ; and these
again are subdivided into towns and negeretjs,
or smaller circuits. The governor resides at
the country seat called Buitenzorg, a name
which, in the Dutch language, signifies, free
from care ; as Batavia, the capital, with its
45,000 inhal)itants, is the certain grave of Eu-
ropeans. The other towns of most importance
are Samarang, with 30,000 inhabitants, and
Sonrahaya, wliich has a population of 100,000.
'J'he London Missioimry Society was at first
chiefly interested about the Chinese in Java.
Several missionaries, who had been educated
in Holland and at I5erlin, Avere consigned to
that society, and landed at Batavia in 1813.
Bruckner, who was one of them, and who, in
1816, joined the Baptist Society, repaired to
Samarang. But Supper, who was another,
remained at Batavia till his death, in 181G.
He wius very zealous for the conversion of the
Chinese in that quarter, and Wiis employed
chiefly in the circulation of the Scriptures
among them. No one succeeded him tdl
1819, when the missionary Slater arrived
there, who brought with liim a great many
printed works, and was received in a friendly
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO.
481
manner by the Chinese, whom he visited from
house to house. His dwelling was, indeed,
accidentally destroyed by fire, with all his
stock of books and furniture ; but this circum-
stance only served to awaken an increased in-
terest among the Christians at Batavia, and
missionary buildings and schools were soon
erected, together with a chapel. In 1821, the
missionary Medhurst came from Penang to
assist him ; and the zeal and activity of this
missionary were evinced in a particularly laud-
able manner. He composed a number of
tracts, preached at four different places, espe-
cially in the village of Depoc, read the Scrip-
tures and other books aloud in public places,
and stirred up much desire for salvation among
the Chinese, by his familiar intercourse and
journeys. As the government allowed him
entire liberty to preach and distribute books,
he frequently took very considerable journeys
in Java and the neighboring islands. Many
Chinese and Malays were baptized ; and the
ground was becoming more and more decidedly
prepared for a still richer harvest.
Greater difficulties were thrown in the way
of the Baptist missionaries, who likewise
arrived in 1813, and labored more immediately
for the benefit of the Malays. Eobinson, it is
true, soon got together one congregation, and
another at Batavia, and at Weltevreden, in its
neighborhood ; but the Dutch mode of govern-
ment was not favorable to the desirable work-
ing of a Malay mission. As he had so many
and various obstacles put in his way, he re-
paired, in 1821, to Bencoolen, in Sumatra.
Trowt meanwhile had come to Samarang,
where he was made very useful, and set him-
self to learn the Cawee language, which is the
ancient and original language of Java, and is
still spoken in the island of Balee. But he
died in 1816. The missionary Bruckner had
joined him in that year ; as this missionary,
however, could not see much fruit of his labors
at Samarang, he removed in 1823 to Salatiga,
in the higher ground of the interior, and from
that place his letters communicated more
cheerful reports. But a dreadful insurrection
against the Dutch, in the kingdom of Tudshy-
akerta, obliged him to return to Samarang.
Here the Dutch refused him permission to
print his translation of the Scriptures in the
vernacular tongue, as well as to circulate
copies of it, after it had been printed at Sin-
gapore in 1831. Even Medhurst's applicar
tions to the government for that purpose were
rejected. " Let the Javanese," it was said,
" remain as they are ; we do not think it a
good thing to have them more learned and
knowing." On the other hand, there were
only the more tracts put to press, which were
eagerly called for, in the hospitals, prisons, and
markets.
The Netherlands Missionary Society has two
stations on this island, viz., Depok and Soora-
baya. Of the former, very little is known, ex-
31
cept that Mr. Wentink, after laboring there
15 years, has been obliged by ill-health to
retire, and has been succeeded by another mis-
sionary. At Soorabaya a great work of evan-
gelization among the Mohammedan population
has been prosecuted for many years by a Ger-
man watchmaker, Emede, and his daughter.
The first fruits of their efforts were baptized
in Dec. 1843, viz., 18 men and 12 women. In
Dec. 1848, at a village 50 miles from Soora-
baya, 56 natives, young and old, were bap-
tized, after having been instructed in Chris-
tianity by Paul, a native evangelist. In
March, 1849, 21 persons were baptized at a
neighboring village ; and, at the close of
1849, there were under the care of the mis-
sionary, Mr. Jellesma, 347 adult Christians, or
baptized persons, and 183 children. He has
taken six Javanese youths into his own house,
in order to bring them up as catechists among
their own countrymen.
4. The Lesser Sunda Islands. — These
come next to Java, eastward, in succession,
and reach to the Straits of Ombay, beyond
which commence the islands of Timor, which
in a wider sense have been reckoned as part of
the Moluccas. The most important of these
Sunda Islands are Balee, with about 1,000,000
of inhabitants, who adhere to Hindooism, and,
agreeably to it, bury widows with their hus-
bands ; Lomboc, which is also called Sasac,
with 180,000 inhabitants, who are mostly Mo-
hammedans, and are subject to the Baleenese ;
Soombava, 200 miles in length, with 800,000
inhabitants, probably like the Baleenese ; also,
Sandalwood Island, which is but little known ;
and Flores, 250 miles in length, which once
was in the possession of the Portuguese. In
not one of these islands has any mission as yet
been established, though most of them appear
to be very promising fields for the purpose.
It is true that in the island of Balee, Mr. Med-
hurst, in 1831, met with a very unfriendly re-
ception. The rajah even forbade him to hold
any conferences with the inhabitants, and
threatened to poison those who should apply
to him for medicine ; and when Mr. Medhurst
complained of these restrictions, he was an-
swered, " No one sent for you hither ; if you
do not like it, go away to the place you came
from." But the missionary Ennis, when he
arrived there, found things quite altered, with-
in less than seven years afterwards ; he was
permitted to speak freely upon spiritual sub-
jects, was esteemed, and kindly treated, and
was frequently even requested to remain there.
5. Borneo. — This is the third great Sunda
Island, and is called by the natives Broonai.
It is 1000 miles in length, and 750 in breadth,
but hitherto is known only on the coasts. It
appears formed out of several smaller islands
by alluvial soil, which is especially evident on
the western side, where all is level inland for
several days' journey. In the interior, and on
the eastern coast, there are lofty chains of
482
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO.
mountains, which cont.iin diamonds, gold and
inferior metals, iu abundance ; and from whost
heif^hts very many rivers descend in cataracts
and waterfalls. These mountains form the
boundary between the Mohammedan Malays
of the coast country and the pagan Dyaks of
the interior and u])pcr country. The former,
who are about a million, are wiell instructed iu
their false faith, as well as adroit and fanati-
cal in defending it ; they follow agriculture,
traffic, and mining, and especially the cruel
trade of piracy. The Dyaks, of whom there
are several millions, are behind no nation in
barbarism and rude ignorance. The nearest
tribes, who are mostly subject to Mohamme-
dan chieftains, are indeed good tempered and
social, but, at the same time, stupid and cow-
ardly ; but those of the interior find their de-
light only in war and murder. Their constant
aim is to strike off the heads of their real or
supposed enemies ; and to this every stranger
is exposed without ceremony. In many of
their provinces, no one is allowed to marry that
cannot show a certain number of human heads
that he has recently struck off. The grave of
the chief must be fenced round with human
heads ; and the possession of many human
skulls constitutes the chief ornament and glory
of families. An offering of human skulls is
with them the surest safeguard against the evil
spirits, to whom they attribute all diseases.
Little is known of the rest of their religion.
Not le&s lawless are the settlers called Bug-
les, from the island of Celebes, who are about
30,000. The most quiet inhabitants are the
Chinese, who work in the mines, and who
amount to about 300,000. Magellan's com-
panions were the first Europeans that entered
the island ; this was in 1.521 ; but the subse-
quent Portuguese settlements failed. In the
year 1643, the Dutch founded a factory at
Pontianak in the west ; and their domains on
the south coa.st have become considerably en-
larged since the year 1812. They have now
preponderant influence upon both coasts,
though the native princes have still umch
power, and the Dyaks remain almost entirely
independent. In the east, the sultan of Cotee
is the most authoritative despot ; and in the
north, the .sultan of Broonai.
Rhenish Missionary Society. — In 1835,
the Rhenish Missionary Society sent Barnstein
and Ileyer to Borneo. Barnstein, who had
learned the Malay at Java, brought with him
Lucas Montou, a converted Celebesc. They
landed at Bandschermassing. Monton was re-
ceived by a ('hinese acquaintance, in whose
house he could read his books to an audience
of Chinese, Malays, and Arabs. Monton
preached here in- public to a large crowd until
evening. The Chinese received the Gospel
with many favorable manifestations.
Soon after landing, Barnstein made a jour-
ney to the Dajak country, with Monton. From
the chief in Gohong they received a friendly
invitation, and entered into a treaty with him.
Conforming to the custom of the country, they
allowed incisions to be made on their right
.shoulders, and tasted of a draught with which
the blood thence flowing was mixed. AVhea
the Dyaks heard of Christ, they appeared like
a people awakened from a long sleep, and con-
tinually heard the word with joy. At the mis-
sionaries' departure, one of the chiefs said to
them, " My brethren, do not fear to remain
with us. We will do you no harm, and if any
one molests you, you shall be defended with
our hearts' blood. God and this assembly
bear witness that this is true." And all the
people cried out in corroboration, " Baalak !"
Amen.
Returning to Bandschermassing every one
was filled with wonder to hear that the Dyaks
in the south-east were asking for a religion, as
they had none themselves, and would not em-
brace Islamism. The Malays in the city,
moreover, assembled themselves for the reading
of the New Testament. In 1836, the mission
was strengthened by the arrival of three new
Rhenish missionaries, who all had cause to be
rejoiced at the success of their labors. Some
Dyaks went in troops to a Chinese templc,where
one of them destroyed, with repeated blows,
an idol erected there, with the words, " These
gods must perish." They demolished the hea-
then temples and schools. The Chinese and
Dyaks were won over. A chief of the latter
expressed his sentiments in these words, " This
writing lias touched my heart. It has taken
possession of it." Stations were established
at Palingkau, Sungei Bintang, Gohong, Men-
tangei, and Patey. Many Dyaks were freed
from slavery by the efforts of the missionaries ;
and every missionary has a little household
gathered around him, consisting of liberated
debtors, who had fallen so deeply in debt that
they had pledged life and limb to their credi-
tors, and had become their property. The
following table shows the present condition of
the mission :
E^
3a
0 s;
■g
g
<^ c
Sfi
STATIONS.
s
a
a
2
3
■a tr
as «'■
s::a
6
<2
a-
6"-
BandscliPrmassing
1836
30,000
10
0
1840
1839
1851
1861
5,000
4,600
2,000
2,000
29
46
0
13
7
20
6
7
Muaratowo
Totals
43,500
98
40
American Boakd.— The first missionaries
of the Board to liorneo were Rev. Messrs.
Elihu Dotv, Elbert Ncvius, and William
Youngblood, with their wives, and Miss Azuba
C. Condit, teacher. Mr. Doty arrived at Sam-
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO.
483
bas, June 17, 1839 ; and Mr. Youngblood ar-
rived at Pontianak about the end of the follow-
ing November. Mr. Nevius reached Pontia-
nak at a little later period. Sambas is on a
river of that name, in the western part of the
island, described as a " noble stream, in width
nearly a mile, and in depth sufficient for vessels
of large burden. Its borders are skirted with
an unbroken jungle and forest, without the
appearance of a single habitation or trace of
human culture to enliven the scene." The Sam-
bas river afforded facilities for reaching the
scattered Dyak population, but besides this the
place held out no strong inducements for a
permanent location. Pontianak, in the west
part of the island, further south, was regarded
as a more desirable station, having a larger
population than any other place on the coast,
and being the entrance point, by a navigable
river, to large settlements of Chinese and Dyaks
in the interior.
The Dyaks, as seen at home, are described
as mild and gentle, and given to hospitality.
They will beg, but will rarely steal, though
clothes and other articles be ever so much ex-
posed. But when they exchange their domestic
habits for those of the warrior, their greatest
delight seems to be to revel in blood, and their
greatest honor to ornament their dwellings with
human heads, which are the trophies of their
inhuman barbarity. Mr. Doty, in a tour
through that part of the province of which
Sambas is the seat of government, distributed
600 tracts and volumes, including several copies
of the New Testament, and found that many
thousand volumes might be distributed during
such a tour.
Until the arrival of the missionaries, the
inhabitants of western Borneo had been, in a
religious point of view, almost wholly unknown.
They found there, as in many other parts of
the Archipelago, a variety of races, the princi-
pal of which were the Chinese, Arabs, Malays,
and Bugies, all of foreign origin; and the
Dyaks, who M'ere believed to be the aboriginal
race. The Malays, Arabs, and Bugies, were
found to be all Mohammedans. The chief
difficulties of prosecuting missionary labor
among these people were, the variety of lan-
guages, the interference of petty chiefs and
priests, the levity and ignorance of the people,
and especially the difficulty of reaching the
inhabitants, whose houses were generally built
upon posts, on the banks of the river ; or on
rafts or logs, which rose and fell with the water,
and were accessible only by boats.
The report of the Board for 1842 mentions
the removal of Mr. Nevius to Singapore, on
account of ill-health, and the arrival of Eev.
Messrs. Thomson and Pohlman. The mission
was now concentrated chiefly in the district of
Pontianak, where a Malay school of about 1 5
scholars, half girls, was established, and a reg-
ular preachiug service maintained in Chinese
and Malay.
But the mission was exceedingly annoyed
and embarrassed by the Dutch government in
Netherlands India. The missionaries were
required to spend their first year at Batavia,
in the island of Java, which was regarded by
the Board as " unreasonable and of no good
tendency;" and even on reaching Borneo
their labors would be restricted to the sea-coast.
None but native Dutch missionaries were
allowed to penetrate the interior of the island,
and to obtain such was difficult. In this state
of things the Board, in connection with the
missionary Board of the Eeformed Dutch
Church, sent an agent, Rev. Isaac Ferris, D.D.,
to the government at Holland, with a view, if
possible, to get these restrictions removed.
The agent was kindly received, but was inform-
ed that the exclusion of all foreigners from the
interior of their possessions in the Indian Ar-
chipelago, was a principle of settled state policy,
and that so far as the civil policy of the gov-
ernment was concerned, the members of the
Reformed Dutch Church and the missionaries
from the same must be regarded as foreigners.
Dr. Ferris was, however, assured by the min-
ister for the colonies, that all proper means
should be taken for bringing their government
to the adoption of a more liberal policy.
The report of Dr. Ferris, on his return,
rather encouraged the Board to continue its
labors in Borneo, and a mission was commenc-
ed among the Dyaks, at Karangan, about
eight miles south of Landak, and 140 from
Pontianak. Messrs. Youngblood and Thom-
son took charge of this mission in September,
1842, and erected a house on the banks of the
Karangan. In their journal of this year they
make the following interesting statements re-
specting the Dyak people, concerning whom so
little had been previously known :
" We are fully satisfied that there is nothing
to prevent us from settling, with our families,
immediately in the midst of these interesting
people, and teaching them without reserve the
principles of the doctrine of Christ. They are
mild, inoffensive, and docile in their disposi-
tions. In our opinion there would be no more
danger from them, in ordinary times, than from
the most civilized people in the world. They
almost universally expressed the utmost willing-
ness, if not strongest desire, to receive teachers ;
and some at least of their rulers professed to
entertain the same feelings. As to the coun-
try, we hope it will appear from the journal to
be such as no one need disdain to inhabit."
In the spring of 1844 Messrs. Doty and Pohl-
man removed to China, leaving Pontianak
without a missionary. Mr. Youngblood sub-
sequently removed to that place, leaving
Messrs. Thomson and Steele at Karangan.
Mrs. Thomson died in December of this year,
soon after following a daughter to the grave.
The brethren at Karangan say at this period,
" These are truly small things, but instead of
faint-heartedness that we see no greater results,
484
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO.
we ask you to join tis in most fervent praise to
God for the changes vee have witnessed, and
that each day brings advancement." Alluding
to their school they say : " We cannot paint
to you the intelligence and the alFectionate
confidence of these little ones, their delight in
obtaining new and elevating ideas, their unself-
isli rivalry for au approving word or smile from
the teacher they have learnt to love. The
nnmber of boys has seldom been more than
seven ; the number of girls has been larger,
and they have received instruction in needle-
work and vocal music, in addition to the les-
sons in spelling, reading, and writing."
A very discouraging feature in the condition
of the Dyaks, was found to be their degrading
subject ion to the Malays. It is described as
" a despotism the most absolute, and yet the
most irrational perhaps ever invented." Hence
the Dyaks were unspeakably and increasingly
wretched, and without any stimulus to rise or
to attempt the improvement of their condition.
Their ignorance was profound, especially on
subjects connected with the soul and a future
world, and, in their journal of 1845, the mis-
Biouaries " could see no signs of moral improve-
ment."
In 1 847 Mr. Thomson and Mr. Toungbiood,
were both compelled to seek the restoration
of their health by a cessation of labor, and a
temporary absence from Borneo. They sailed
for Singapore, at which place Mr. Thomson
was seized with hemorrhage of the lungs; but
after a little delay he proceeded to Geneva,
and thence to Berne, at which place he died.
Mr. Youngblood returned to Borneo with his
wife, but in such feeble health as to forbid the
expectation of their long continuance on the
island. Mr. Steele was also in feeble health,
and in 1849 he returned to the United States!
Both he and Mr. Youngblood had intended to
resume their labors, and earnestly desired to
do so, but neither of them were able to return ;
and neither did the Reformed I)utch Church
find any ministers willing to enter into this
field, and it was left without a niissionary.
In their report for 1852 the Prudential Com-
mittee say : — " It is indeed a hard ground to
cultivate, though not more so than some others
where success has at length come. The com-
mittee cannot believe that the missionary
labors and sacrifices that liave been expended
on Borneo will be in vain. The existence,
character, jiecessities, and claims of a large
heathen people in that great island, have been
kept, a long time before the attention of our
American churches, and the seed thus sown
may due day result in a rich harvest."
Siiice the above date, no laborers have been
sent to Borneo, and it remains to be seen
whctlier that mission will be resumed.
r>. Cei.kbks. — This name was given by the
Porlugmse to the fourth great Sunda island,
called by the natives IS' igrc-Orang-Bupics,
country of the Bugies people, a lofty island,
with four far-stretching peninsulas, whose nat-
ural beauties are as striking as those in Java.
The three millions of inhabitants are divided
into Bugies and Macassars. The former are
the most cultivated islanders of this Archipel-
ago ; they are found in all the harbors of these
seas ; they are also the most formidable pirates.
The latter are a coarse and clumsy race of
men, who inhabit the west of the island.
Both are at present strict Mussulmans, and
are subject to sultans, who, however, are very
dependent on the lesser rajahs. Originally
they M'erc pagans ; but, in 1512, their king
having resolved to embrace another religion,
invited to his capital two Mollahs and two
Jesuits. The Mollahs arrived first ; and soon
was Mohammedanism imposed upon the inhab-
itants, especially in the kingdom of Bonee.
About the year 1650, the Dutch landed in the
island of Bootong, in hostility against the
Macassars, and, since 1677, the Macassars and
Bugies have remained subject to the Dutch,
notwithstanding they have made, from time to
time, the most savage insurrections, to throw
off the yoke of their masters.
Netherlands Missionnry Society. — In the north
of Celebes, in the 18th century, a large number
of natives who had not embraced Islamism,
were baptized by a native of Holland. After
long neglect, the mission work v>-as renewed
here by the Netherlands Society. Three mis-
sionaries went from Amboyna to Menado, who
were followed in 1822 by Miiller. and in 1825
to 1839, by Hillendoofn. They found that
many, of all classes, wished for baptism ;
among these the chief, Tondano. In Amu-
rang the church numbers 1.000 souls, and the
schools 115 scholars. A church of 550 was
gathered at Tanowanka. At Menado, 260
heathen were baptized in one year. In conse-
quence of these successes, Midel and Schwartz
were sent by the society as co-laborers, who
endeavored to introduce the Malay into the
schools, as a common medium of communica-
tion. The number of Chri?tians, old and new,
in Manahasse, amounted in 1832 to 5,000.
with 20 schools, which latter number is now
increased to 56. The creed learned by the
school-children in Malay, was the means of
converting many heathen. People who had
passed their years in reckless debauchery,
cheerfully begun to lead orderly and Christian
lives. An aged priest, who, by his craftiness,
had led whole villages astray, besought his
people to embrace Christianity, which had
brought rest to his own soul. The chief seats
of the Christian communities in Celebes, arc
at Menado, Kenia, Tondano, Langowang,
Tomohou, and Amurang. In Langowang,
Schwartz, after 11 years of hard labor, saw
the first fruits of his' faithfuln(.=s. in the bap-
ti.<m of 30 jjcrsons. Since 1837, the mission
has had a ju-inting-prc'^s, in order to jirint
school-books and tracts. In Macnss-ar, also,
in the south, there is a preacher ol the Gospel.
INDIAi? ARCHIPELAGO.
485
On the neighboring island of Bonoa, he
found Christians, who had so far backslidden
as to engage with the heathen in the practice
of cutting off the heads of human victims. On
other islands, he was compelled to silence by
laughter and derision. In Ternate, where Jung-
michel was stationed, there were, in 1819,
700 Christians in a population of 5000. Since
1821 he has paid frequent visits to the San-
geer islands, where Christianity appears to be
at a low ebb.
The Society has in this island eight sta-
tions. The station at Tondano has one mission-
ary, Mr. Riedel, who baptized * in the year
1847, 356 adults and 270 children, all natives.
In 1848 he baptized 440 adults and 223 chil
dren. In 16 schools in his district he ha\
768 boys and 514 girls. In 1849 he succeeded
in building a chapel and school-house, by the
assistance and contributions of the native
Christians.
At the Langowang station the missionary is
Mr. Schwartz, who baptized, in 1848, 958 adults
and 382 children, and numbered in the 15
schools under his charge 1182 boys and 423
girls. In February 1849, he wrote—" In near-
ly every one of the 26 villages in my district,
a desire for instruction in Christianity mani-
fests itself with young and old, so that I and ray
assistant and the schoolmasters are hardly able
to satisfy all their wishes. The number of Chris-
tians on my list at the close of 1848, was 2951
and those who attended preaching in my
seven congregations on the Sabbath numbered
1500.
At Amurang Mr. Herrmann baptized, in
1847, 195 adults and 57 children ; and in the
following year 321 adults and 177 children.
He had 23 schools, with 1261 boys and 661
girls, and eight places of public worship, to
which he devoted more or less attention. In
February, 1849, he wrote — " My present sphere
of labor includes 75 very far scattered villages,
with 23,000 souls. I usually preach on Sun-
days at two different places, in the Alfoor lan-
guage.
Tomokon is another station, where Mr. Wil-
ken has several congregations, and 16 schools,
containing 1415 boys and 242 girls.
Menado, a principal town, on the northern
extremity of the island, enjoys the labors of a
faithful missionary, who has charge of Dutch
and Malay congregations, and also of five
schools, attended by 230 boys and 130 girls.
Tanavangho was occupied in 1849 by Mr.
Bossert, who found there more than 500 nom-
inal Christians, but who were very far from
the real life of God. But he says, " Besides
Tanavangho I have seven other villages com-
mitted to my charge, one of which gives me
very much hope : it is Tately, where there is a
* Baptism, with this Society, is not admission to the
CBurch, but is administered to those who nominally
eihbrace Christianity, and are subsequently received to
Church fellowship, if found worthy.
very good school and a good teacher. Some
30 or 40 have received baptism, and as many
more who are receiving instruction desire
baptism."
Kema is a new station, where the missionary
in 1848 baptized 299 adults and 83 children.
His 12 schools contain 747 boys and 107 girls.
The station at Koomelemboy was recently
commenced by Mr. Ulfers, who describes that
part of the island as " most picturesque, hilly,
woody, and abounding with springs of excel-
lent water." He lives there, in the centre of
a missionary circuit, comprising 25 villages,
with about 9,000 inhabitants, all living on high
mountains or in deep valleys. He has 9
schools under his care.
7. The Moluccas. — In a wider sense, all the
islands situated between New Guinea and Ce-
lebes are termed the Moluccas, or Spice
Islands ; and thus there belong to them — 1.
the Timor Islands in the south, Timor, Rotty,
Simao, Dao, and others. 2. The Banda Is-
lands, which next form a group of ten small
isles, about which, in an extensive bend, are
situated to the south-west the islands of Wet-
ter, Roma, Kissor, Letty, Damm, Moa, and
others ; and to the south-east, Timorlaut, with
its surrounding isles ; and eastward, as far as
towards New Guinea, the Aroo Islands. 3.
The Amboyna Islands, Amboyna, Ceram,
Booro, and others. 4. The proper Moluccas,
or Ternatas, with the islands Jilolo, Morty,
Ternate, Tidor, Moteer, Machian, Bachian,
and others. Lastly. 5. The Sangeer Islands,
which form the chain of passage to the m)rth
Philippine Islands. All these islands. Toge-
ther, are splendidly adorned and gifted, and
are particularly rich in spices of every kind ;
many of them, also, have active volcanos. But
the intercourse of their population with civil-
ized countries, is considerably less than in the
rest of this vast Archipelago, and they seldom
see a European vessel. The natives consist
partly of untractable and proud Malays, and
partly of savage aborigines, called Alfoors, or
Papoos, governed by their own rajahs. In the
year 1521, the Portuguese took possession of
these islands. Mohammedanism had been
forced upon the latter hardly forty years be-
fore. The chief Portuguese settlement was in
Ternate ; but their cruelty and barbarity
made them to be so hated by the natives, that
these oppressed people at length threw them-
selves into the arms of the Hollanders, who, in
1617, first expelled the Portuguese from Am-
boyna, and then extended their conquests far-
ther and farther.
Another sphere of missionary labor has been
formed in and around the island of Timor,
whither the Dutch missionary Lebrun came,
in 1819. He settled at Cupang, the seat of
the Dutch government, on the south coast of
Timor. The north coast about Dilly belongs
to the Portuguese. For twenty years there
had been no Christian minister among the na-
466
INDIAN AECHIPELAGO.
tivcs there, who profess Christianity. "With
80 much the greater eagerness did they now
crowd to the missionary's preaching ; and in
the very first year, ninety pagans were admit-
ted to the church, which already consisted of
3,000 professed Christians. Moreover, the
rajah of Rotty submitted himself to Christ
crucified ; and, in 1823, Lebrun baptized in
Little Timor, Kissor, Letty, and Moa, four
hundred and ninety-six pereons. The Friendly
Society which he 'established, was subscribed
to even by some of the pagan princes. He
everywhere formed schools, and to the remote
churches he addressed pastoral letters, after
the manner of the apostles, of the good effect
of which there are very pleasing testimonies.
A few years before his death, which took place
in 1829, eight missionaries more arrived, who
distributed themselves among various stations,
and made it one part of their business to estab-
lish more fundamentally in Christianity the
churches and congregations that had been
gained to it. The islands of Timor, Babaw,
and Rotty, as also Kissor, Letty, Moa, Roma,
Wetter, and others, are places where they are
continually visiting and laboring. Their
work, indeed, is often exceedingly harassing
and fatiguing ; and though the missionary
Bar, of Basle, who, in 1825, was stationed in
Kissor, and at present in Amboyna, was soon
enabled to baptize 1,500 of the 5,000 inhabit-
ants, yet he has to this day, amidst his un-
sjieakably troublesome and wearisome occupa-
^ tioDs, had one of the most difiScult of posts to
maintain. But the persevering patience of
the messenger of peace is never unaccompa-
nied by some blessed benefit or other. In the
proper Moluccas there is but little as yet done,
except what, since 1819, the missionary Jung-
michel has been effecting in Teruate. Since
1821, he has also periodically visited the San-
geer islands, 150 miles north-west of Celebes ;
but has found only extremely ignorant Chris-
tians and bad schools at those places. In
1850 it was reported that the natives of
Amboyna, being all nominal Christians, it
■was no longer regarded as a field for mission-
ary labor. liarookoo, in the same neighbor-
hood, is also 'inhabited by nominal Christians,
over whose different congregations and schools
a missionary, Mr.Luyke, is placed as pastor and
overseer. Timor has two stations, viz. : Koo-
pang and Babow, at which there are four mis-
sionaries, the two last having been sent out in
1849. 'J'hcy have in charge various congrega-
tions and schools, concerning which no recent
rcport.s have been made.
8. 'J'hk Pmui'PiNE Islands. — Of these
Islands, which contain about three millions of
inhabitants, we shall say but little, as they are
no thciilre of Protestant missions. The fa-
mous circumnavigator, Magellan, began here
his conversions with cannon-ball, in 1521.
This he did, especially in the island of Zeboo,
■where, after a cannonade, 800 Dyaks, or Al-
foors, were immediately baptized. He, how-
ever, and his officers fell a sacrifice to this zeal,
and Zeboo fell away again from Christianity.
The Spaniards and Portuguese soon contend-
ed for possession of these islands ; and the
former got the mastery. Zeboo, in 1564, re-
ceived a sanguinary chastisement for its apos-
tasy ; and as fast as the conquests proceeded,
did the Romish religion everywhere take root,
as Augustinian monks, Franciscans, and Do-
minicans, zealously prosecuted the work of
their missions. W. Hoffman, in his " Geo-
graphy," says : " Here is the paradise of the
monks. Here vegetate one thousand monks,
Augustinians, Dominicans, and Franciscans,
in luxuriant and luxurious monasteries ; four
provincials command them ; one thousand two
hundred parishes are occupied by them. The
temporal government, the instruction, and the
whole activity of the inhabitants are all under
their heavy hand. The pious idleness of their
festivals and processions is excessive ; the
poorer, but without knowing it, are the native
secular ecclesiastics in their three thousand
parishes. The titular archbishop of Manilla,
who resides at Madrid, together with the bi-
shops of New Segovia, Zeboo, and New Cace-
res, are at the head of them.
9. The Island of Formosa. — This island,
which is also called Thaiwan, is between the
Philippines and the Chinese coast; and the
greater part of it is subject to the emperor of
China. Hither, in 1631, was sent by the
Dutch government, the preacher Junius, who,
with much labor acquired the language of the
country, and at the period of his death had
collected a Protestant church of five thousand
nine hundred adults. But the light was soon
extinguished, through perpetual wars with pi-
rates, and the subsequent reduction of the
island by the emperor of China ; and proba-
bly at the present day scarcely a single trace
of those fair beginnings can be found.
[Tlie early history of the missions noticed
in the foregoing article, has been taken from
" A Manual of Christian Missions," by Rev.
C. Jinrtli,D.D., principal of the Basle Mission-
arylnstitution, and fVigger's History o/Missions,
in German. The later portions have been ga-
thered from various sources.]
INFANTICIDE : The practice of destroy-
ing infants soon after their liirth. That a
practice so revolting to humanity should ever
prevail, in any country, seems almost incredi-
ble. One characteristic of heathenism, how-
ever, as given by the Apostle Paul, is that of
being " without natural affection ;" and, al-
though there are exce{)tions, yet, as a general
rule, selfishness, in the heathen mind, risra
above every other principle. And hence, in
all ages, infanticide has been a prevalent cus-
tom of the heathen. It was a law of the an-
cient Spartans that only promising children
should be reared. They were submitled to the
examination of certain persons, and if weak or
INTANTICIDE.
487
deformed, they were thrown into a cavern.
The exposure of children was a practice com-
monly sanctioned by the ancients. Gimelli
Oareri states that, in the Philippine Islands,
children born with imperfections, were put
into a hollow cave, and buried alive. In the
Sandwich Islands, it was estimated by the for-
eigners who went first among them, that two-
thirds of the infants that were born, were de-
stroyed by their own parents. The sickness
or deformity of the child, or the trouble of
taking care of it, was a sufficient excuse for
its destruction. Mothers would cast their
children into a hole dug in the earth, and cov-
ering them up, would trample upon them with
their feet, and thus stifle their cries. The wri-
ter of this article has seen a native of the
Sandwich Islands, who was buried alive by
his mother, and rescued from the grave and
reared by the missionaries. Some of the con-
verted native women have confessed to the
missionaries, with tears in their eyes, that they
had killed all their children.
In the Georgian and Society Islands, infan-
ticide prevailed to an incredible extent. It is
stated by one of the missionaries, that on a
certain occasion he inquired of three women
who were sitting together, how many children
they had destroyed. " One replied with a fal-
tering voice, ' I have destroyed nine.' The sec-
ond, with eyes suffused with tears, said, ' I have
destroyed seven,' — and the third informed him
she had destroyed five." To such an extent
was this cruel and unnatural practice carried,
that it is the opinion of the missionaries that
two-thirds of the children were murdered by
their own parents.
There are several tribes in India, in which
the custom has long prevailed of destroying
the female children. The British Government
have exerted themselves to put an end to the
practice, and to some extent have succeeded.
Infanticide also prevails in China. A mis-
sionary was conversing with a Chinaman, who
was away from home ; and inquiring for his
family, the man said he had three sons and one
daughter ; he had had another daughter, but
" did not bring her up." " Not bring her up,"
said the missionary ; " what did you do with
her ?" " I smothered her," he replied. When
expostulated with for murdering his own child,
he said, " It is very common in China. We
put the female children out of the way, to save
the trouble of bringing them up. Some people
have smothered five or six daughters !"
Mr. Barrow computes, from authentic data,
that not less than 9,000 children are exposed
in the streets of Peking every year, and as
many more in the provinces. He states that
it is part of the duty of the police to carry
away in carts, every morning, those that have
been exposed at night, some of whom are yet
alive ; but they are all carried to a pit, with-
out the walls, and buried promiscuously. Here
the Roman Catholic missionaries attend, se-
lecting the most lively for future proselytes,
and administering baptism to others before
they die. The practice is connived at by the
government.
The people in some parts of India, particu-
larly in Orissa and the eastern part of Bengal,
frequently offer their children to the goddess
Gunga, by drowning them in the river. In
the northern districts of Bengal, if an infant is
sickly, it is hung up in a basket on the branch
of a tree, to be destroyed by the ants or birds
of prey. In Japan, mothers, on finding them-
selves too poor to bring up their children, do
not scruple to suffocate them at Ihe breast. In
Greenland, where a mother died leaving an
infant, the latter was buried with her. The
South American women on the river Orouoko
are said frequently to destroy their daughters,
to save them the hardships and sufferings to
which they are exposed. The Bushmen in
Africa take no great care of their children.
They kill them without remorse when they are
ill-shaped, or when they are in want of food ;
and when obliged to fly from their enemies,
they will cast them aside, strangle, smother,
or bury them alive ; and, to save themselves,
they will throw them to the lions, which prac-
tice has greatly increased the desire of the lion
for human flesh. In Madagascar, the fate of
the infant depends on the calculation of luoky
and unlucky days. If, judging from the time
of birth, its destiny is concluded to be malevo-
lent, it is put to death by suffocation. A poor
woman called on a missionary, and acknow- ^
ledged that four out of five of her children had
been destroyed in this way. Where the des-
tiny may possibly be averted, one plan adopted
for the purpose is, to place the infant at the
entrance of a cattle-fold, and then to drive in
the cattle. If the child is not destroyed, its
fate is declared to be averted ; but, if tram-
pled on and killed, the contrary is manifest.
Infanticide has also prevailed among the North
American Indians. From time immemorial,
the Choctaws had considered it no crime, un-
til they received Christianity. A young man
would take a wife, and having no means of
supporting her, would soon leave her. The
woman, seeing herself deserted, would say, the
child has no father to provide it a blanket ; it
had better be dead than alive. Sometimes the
mother digs a grave and buries it alive, soon
after it is born. Sometimes she puts it to
death by stamping on it with her feet. But
after the establishment of a mission among
them, they passed a law against this crime.
We are amazed in contemplating the utter
extinction of parental affection, which ages of
heathenism has thus effected ; but what shall
be said of the worse than heathen, among the
lower classes in England, who murder their
own children for the sake of obtaining the
burial fee from some mutual benefit society to
which they belong! Human nature is the
same every where, when unaffected by the Gos-
488
TMPARANI— JEWS.
pel ; and even in a Cliristian land, those who
treat it with utter contempt or neglect, often
fall, if possible, even below the heathen. —
Edinburgh Encyclopedia; Rees' Cychpedia;
Petrg's Great Moral Evils in Indta ; Narrative
of'Persecutions in 31adagascar, p. 61 ; Dibble's
Sandwich Islands ; Miss. Her., Vol. XIX., p. 9.
IRISH PRESBYTERIAN MISSIONS:
The General Assembly of the Irish Pres-
byterian Church maintain both Home
and Foreign Missions. The former have
been very successful among the Roman
Catholics of Ireland. They have a Foreign
Mission in Western India, with four sta-
tions. They have Jewish missions at
Hamburg, Bonn, and Damascus, and colo-
nial missions in British North America,
Australia, A^'an Dieman's Laud, and New
Zealand. All these missions are prosecuted
with energy and zeal.
ISLE OF FEANCE : See Mauritius.
ITAFAMASI : A station of the Ameri-
can Board among the Zulus in South Africa,
near Port Natal.
JEWS, MISSIONS TO: Coeval with
the establishment of Christian missions among
the heathen, spring up in the church the spirit
of missions to the Jews. The voice that, com-
ing across the lapse of centuries, struck upon
the «ar and thrilled the heart of Christendom,
"Go ye into all the world and preach the Gos-
pel," called uttention to the moral condition
and wpiits of God's ancient people, Israel,
scattered among all nations. There was a
Reeling, that if the Gospel was to be preached
among all nations, it ought, as in the apostles'
days, to begin at Jerusalem. There was also
a firm belief that " the Gospel was the power of
God unto salvation to everyone that believeth,
to the .Tew first ;" and that God had not cast
away this people from the covenant of redemp-
tion in a way that they could not be saved by
grace, " for even at this present time also there
was a remnant, according to the election of
grace." Whatever may be the theories ad-
vanced by many, respecting the future of the
Jewish people, it is a prophetic and providen-
tial fact that they have been kept distinct
from all other nations from the time of the
Abrahamic call to the present hour. During
the former part of their history, they were dis-
tinguished as the people of God ; during the
latter part they have been distinguished as the
snecial objects of Jehovah's indignation. In
this respect, their relation to Christianity and
all other forms of religion is peculiar. While
all other tribes and nations, springing from
whatever source, have come upon the stage of
the world, passed through scenes of prosperity
and adversity, socially and morally, having a
common history and fate, the Jewi.sh people
remain always the same, both in religious and
social adversity. 'J'hey are alone, dwelling in
the valley of weeping ; a proverb among the
nations with whom they sojourn, but to whom
they never assimilate. As, in ancient days, in
respect to the covenant of redemption, the
whole world was divided into two classes,
" Jews and Gentiles," so it is now, only the
order of the relation is reversed. The " Ammi "
are now the " Lo-ammi," and the " Lo-Ammi"
are the " Ammi." Divine Providence has
kept up the distinction, and an enlightened
Christian consciousness alwaj-s recognizes it.
In order to a comprehensive view of a work
of Christian missions among the Jews, a briel
review of the rise and progress, and decline of
Christianity among them, is necessary. Chris-
tianity began at Jerusalem. The story tha»
Jesus of Nazareth, on the cross expiating the
sins of the people, was the long-promised Mes-
siah of the fathers, kings, and prophets, con-
tained the truth essential to their salvation.
It was told and reported in their hearing. It
lodged in their hearts, and pricked their con-
sciences. The Spirit was poured out from on
high, and brought them to embrace the truth.
On the day of Pentecost, three thousand were
converted. A few days after, five thousand
more were converted. ' The work thus begun
continued until the converts were numbered
by multitudes of men and women, and great
companies of priests. The apostles to the eir-
•umcision were as successful in preaching and
making proselytes to Christianity throughout
the world, as were the apos..v;s to the uncir-
cumcision. There was no difference during
the first century. The leaders and teachers of
the early church never supposed that Jews
were not as hopeful subjects of grace as Gen-
tiles, notwithstanding the "judicial curse of
blindness " was resting upon them. In every
province of the Eoman empire, and in all
known countries out of the empire, Jewish
(Christian churches were established. At the
close of the second century, there were no less
than forty-four Jewish Christian congregations
at Rome. The third century witnessed the
triumph of nominal Christianity over the ter
ritory of the Roman empire. The state
espoused the church, and promised to be her
protector and defender. The Roman govern-
ment, after subduing the adjacent states and
kingdoms, reduced them to provinces, and
caused them, by the extension of its laws, man-
ners, and customs, to assimilate to the empire.
The Jewish people alone remained unaffected.
In the midst of the Roman empire, they con-
tinued to be a distinct people, and bitter
despisers of both church and state. The
state, now a Christian government, attempted
to exterminate this obstinate enemy by force
of arms; while the church, sympathizing with
her liege lord, imitated his example by exclud-
ing the Jews from the spiritual mercies and
graces of Christianity. Every effort at length
was abandoned to evangelize the Jews. The
council of Elvira forbade all familiar inter-
course with the Jews by Christians, under
pain of cxcomraunicatloD from the churck
JEWS.
489
Finally, a decree was passed, forbidding a Jew
to enter a Christian churcli. Thus, as through
corruption, Christianity ceased to be propa-
gated among the heathen, so, by wicked
decrees, it was not allowed to be extended to
the Jews. But, happily, the age of Christian
missions to the unevangelized came. The
Jews were not altogether forgotten.
The spirit of Jewish missions first manifest-
ed itself in the national Synod of the Low-
countries. The subject engaged the serious
attention of the synods of Dordrecht, Delft,
and Leyden, which were held 1676, '7, and '8.
The founders of these synods devised a scheme
for promoting the conversion of the Jews iu
their own country. Many Israelites and among
them some distinguished scholars, embraced
Christianity. From this date conversions
among the Jews were frequent. To promote
the work societies were formed by interested
Christians. In 1728 the Callenhurg Institution
was established at Halle, which had for its
chief object the conversion of the Jews, by
means of tracts, Hebrew Scriptures, and mis-
sionaries. The Moravian brethren, about the
year 1764, had their attention turned to the
spiritual welfare of the Jews. Some of their
most distinguished men, for example, Leonard
Dober, Count Zinzendorf, and David Kirkhoff,
did all ill their power to further this object.
In 173G, 400 Jews were admitted into the evan-
gelical church at Darmstadt. In 1739, 100
Jews embraced the Gospel in the Grand Duchy
of Hesse. The infidel revolution in Europe iu
1789 put an end to all like eflbrts to evangelize
the Jews. After these brief notices we arrive
at the period of modern missions to the Jews.
Numbers of the Jews. — In exact fulfilment of
the Scriptures the Jews are sojourners among
all nations. And so little is known respecting
them, in many countries, that no reliable esti-
mate can be obtained of their numbers. The
Jewish population of the whole world, as far
as it is known with approximate certainty, is
14,000,000. They are distributed as follows :
In the Mohammedan countries in
Europe, Asia, and Africa . . . 3,000,000
China 60,000
Russian Empire 1,200,000
Poland 1,000,000
Prussia Proper 150,000
Austria 453,000
German States 138,000
Holland 66,000
France 81,000
Italy 200,000
England 30,000
Ionian Isles 7,000
Danish States 15,000
Sweden 1,700
Switzerland 1,900
Gibraltar 4,000
Rhenish Provinces 250,000
Gallicia 200,000
West Indies
North and South America . . .
Add to the above the Beui-Israel
among the Hindoos, found in the
year 1822, and reported by the
agent of the Loudon Jews Soci-
ety, Mr. Largon, about . . .
13,500
200,000
6,928,900
Whole number 14,000,000
The Jews that are accessible to missionary
operations are distributed as follows : — Great
Britain, 30,000 ; France, 81,000; Italy, 200,-
000 ; Austria, 453,000 ; the Rhenish Provinces,
250,000 ; Silesia, 50,000 ; East and West
Prussia, 26,000 ; Prussia Proper, 150,000 ;
Danish States, 15,000; Poland, 1,000,000;
Holland, 66,000 ; Palestine, 19,000 ; Bagdad,
100,000 ; Smyrna, 15,000 ; Salonica, 35,000 ;
Russia, 1,000,000 ; United States, 100,000 ;
miscellaneous, 1,000,000. In all about 5,000,-
000.
Present Social State. — The social state of the
Jews has not changed since their dispersion.
The same feeling in the various governments
where they sojourn, that excluded them from
civil privileges during the sway of the Roman
Empire, still exists in the old world, excluding
them from any participation in political mat-
ters not only, but depriving them of many
privileges enjoyed by all others. In Russia,
Turkey, Austria, Italy, and Switzerland, they
are not at all regarded as citizens, but as aliens
that are to be I'igidly watched, and that may
be at any time sacrificed, personally or pecu-
niarily, for the benefit of those governments.
The Russians draft their young men at an
earlier age and in a larger proportion to their
numbers, than their own legitimate subjects,
and make it a crime worthy of death for them
to leave the country. "Austria, when it suits
her purposes, extorts enormous taxes from them,
oftentimes reducing them to the stages of utter
destitution. Rome confines them to filthy and
almost uninhabitable quarters, locks them in
at nightfall, and inflicts death upon any one
of them that ventures to mingle with Romans.
Switzerland has but lately banished them from
her cantons. Among the Turks it is no crime
to kill a Jew. In Prussia, France, and Eng-
land, although as Jews they cannot participate
in the first offices of these governments, still
by the force of their genius, and the power ot
their money, one may occasionally rise to po-
litical distinction. In England, the most lib-
eral and lenient government in Europe towards
them, a controversy has been for many years
pending upon the propriety and constitution-
ality of admitting Jews elect to seats in par-
liament. In no country of Europe have the
Jews been emancipated from the political
thraldom into which they were thrown by the
Roman power. In Asia, they generally live
in exclusion and have no desire to be received
490
JEWS.
as citizens. In the United States there are
presented no barriers to their political aspira-
tions, and the consequence is many Jewish
names are found on the rolls of both the upper
and lower houses of Congress. Also in some
of the free governments of the West India
islands Jews have a prominent voice in their
legislative bodies. The principal occuj^ation
of the Jews is trade and trafQc. From their
political relation to the governments, their
condition is made one of instability and change.
They do not become agriculturists, nor deal
largely in real estate. Having no government
to protect them, they have endeavored to secure
that which forms a very good substitute, viz.,
money. Their investments are made in banks
and in public or government stocks. So that,
■whenever the decree goes forth for them to
seek a new home, their possessions are imme-
diately, as by magic, turned to gold to accom-
pany and solace them on their pilgrimage.
Intellectual Position. — The intellectual posi-
tion of the Jews ranks high. They are the
great thinkers for the masses of Europe.
The following eloquent passage, from a dis-
course on the " Present Eelation of Israel to
the World," may serve to meet all historic de-
mands in a sketch like this : " The European
continental press is mainly in Jewish hands ;
every department of periodical literature
swarms with Jewish laborers. The news-
paper press is under their control, and the cor-
respo^iQcuce is mainly conducted by them. Tak-
ing''a step higher, there we find them again.
"VTe a.sk for knowledge of the mysteries of the
starry heavens, and the children of Israel be-
come our instructors, llie Herschels and
the Aragos are the leaders of that lofty band
of celestial travelers that journey among the
stars. We cry for light upon the mysteries of
revelation, and the children of Israel open the
pearly gates of day, and light flows around us.
Jahn, llengstenberg, Tholuck, Krunnnacher,
and a host of others, furnish us with biblical
criticism, didactic theology, and general sacred
literature. We ask for a key to unlo<:l: a dia-
lect of Moses and the prophets, and a Hebrew
takes one from his drawer. Gesenius gives us
our lexicon, and Nordheimer our grammar.
We would have the dark cliasm in early
Church History filled up, and a bridge thrown
across it, in order that we may jjass safely
from inspired to uninspired history ; the chil-
dren of Israel furnish the materials and cover
the chasm. Neander furnishes us with our
incomparable Christian Church History, and
Da Costa with a history of the Jews. What
need 1 add more? These facts show that the
Hebrew intellect is exerting a powerful influ-
ence upon the secular and sacred literature of
the age."
litlin;i(Ats Condition. — The religious condi-
tion ol the Jews may be viewed in relation to
Judaism and Christianity. In their relation to
Judaism they may be divided into four classes :
1. A considerable number of the older Jews
are strict Talmudists. They are so, however,
less from conviction thau because they per-
ceive the necessary consequences of deserting
the old foundations. The link which binds
them to Talmudism is purely of a negative
character. They adhere to it not from love
to that system, but from dread of a worse. If
they leave traditionary ground, they know of
no evidence strong enough to arrest them on
this side of infidelity. Their state, therefore,
may be summed up in this aphorism, that some-
thing is better than nothing, and authority is
better than no ground at all.
2. A second class of Jews having thrown
off the Talmud, endeavor, perhaps vainly, yet
earnestly, to find a resting-place in the Old
Testament. Having left their old moorings,
they endeavor to let down their anchor there ;
and, if it fixed, nothing would j^lease them
more. But, missing the right interpretation
of the Old Testament, they can get no sure
bottom. They are thus driven along, whether
they will or not, by the spirit of the times.
3. A third class, far more numerous than
the other two, whose reverence for authority
being entirely destroyed, have thrown off the
Talmud, and whose moral sense having be-
come darkened and debased, have cast ofi" the
Old Testament too. The link which binds the
first class to the Talmud, and that which at-
taches the heart of the second to the Bible,
being broken, they have sunk down into avowed
infidelity. It is to be observed, however, that
all who may be reckoned fairly among this
class do not occupy exactly the same position.
With many, their infidelity is a mere nega-
tion. Their understandings being emanci-
pated, they can receive nothing without evi
dence ; their hearts being callous, they do not
inquire after it. Still, if it were presented,
they Avould be open to conviction. Another
party, and it is one which is daily increasing,
places itself in the position of direct and active
antagonism. They would gladly banish all
.'systems of belief out of the world. They re-
gard them all alike as imposing fetters on the
understanding, and an unnecessary restraint
on the inclinations of the heart. They are,
for the most part, proud, high-minded, neither
reverencing Cod, nor regarding man.
4. A fourth class* is found a stage lower
down than all the preceding ones. The last
mentioned, though having given up all idea of
revelation, stand at least on dcistical ground.
But this goes further, and treads the dreary
wastes of pantheism. Of course, in dealing
with such, one must take up a question antece-
dent even to the in.^piration of Scripture, viz.,
the existence and personality of Him wliuse
revelation it professes to be. It is diflieult to
comjuite the number belonging to this ela.ss.
There is reason to believe that it is already
large ; and, without any doubt, it is continu-
ally receiving new acccssionB.
JEWS.
491
In their relation to Christianity, they may
be divided into three classes :
1. A very large proportion of the Jews
view Christianity in the aspect of the double
apostasy of Popery and infidelity, or Ration-
alism. They see in the one an idolatrous wor-
ship ; in the other, a denial of its very being.
There is something abhorrent to their mind in
the former, and nothing attractive to it in the
latter. A Christianity that presents itself as
a mitigated form of heathen idolatry, can
never win the regards of a Jew ; nor can it be
expected that a Christianity which requires to
be pared and pruned of its chief doctrines by
its own supporters, should gain his confidence
or engage his affections. So far, therefore, as
Christianity is identified in his mind with
either of these apostate systems, it is necessa-
rily rejected by him. He regards it either as
a vail thrown over the grosser features of hea-
thenism, or as a thin partition wall, employed
for a season to conceal the infidelity of the
heart, till circumstances permit its removal
and the free profession of the inward senti-
ments. Popery has been so long and so wide-
ly prevalent, and infidelity has acquired in re-
cent times so fearful an ascendancy, that we
need not wonder if most of the notions floatr
ing about in Jewish society regarding Chris-
tianity, have been drawn from the one or the
other of these two sources. The natural effect
is the formation of the large class of which I
now speak, who, whatever they may think of
their own position, consider that of Christians
as equally, if not more untenable. They are
not animated, however, with any special hatred
of Christianity, nor do they show themselves
actively hostile.
2. A second class, who have come into closer
contact with the Christian system, or with
true Christians, exhibits a difference of senti-
ment, corresponding to the difference of their
situation. Their views are very indistinct, nor
do they know well what passes in their own
minds. The idea, however, seems to have
started in many of them that possibly in Chris-
tianity is to be found the solution of their own
difficulties, and that Christianity is the termi-
nating point of the present movement. Those
who shrink back with horror from the thought
of infidelity, feel the necessity of some form
of positive belief to rest upon. To return to
the Talmud is out of the question. The Old
Testament, if they reject the Christian inter-
pretation, is also untenable. Christianity,
therefore, presents itself as the only and last
refuge.
3. The third and last party to be mentioned
entertain very different feelings towards Chris-
tianity from the other two. They manifest
towards it the greatest hostility, and persecute
it with the utmost rancor. The chief weapon
which they can at present command is the
tongue ; but the venom with which they poi-
son its arrows shows sufficiently the disposition
of their hearts, and what they would be in-
clined to do if they had more power. They re-
gard Christianity, whether as a system or as
embodied in the persons of its professors, as
their natural enemy. They consider it as the
one great obstacle to the leveling process
which they are attempting to carry out in
society. They declare they will not rest till
it is rooted out of the earth.
Reasons for distinct Missions to the Jews. —
The reasons for establishing distinct missions
to the Jews are various, and upon examination
they will be found to be the same in some
respects now that were acted upon by the
apostles. (1) As they were Israelites then to
whom pertained the adoption, and the glory,
and the covenants, and the giving of the law,
and the service of Cod, and the promises ; so
are they now. (2) They are a separate peo-
ple, and those among whom they dwell would
have no more relation to them than though
they did not exist. (3) As in our Saviour's
times it was necessary to begin at Moses and
all the prophets, and expound unto them in
the Scriptures the things concerning Christ, so
it is now. In order to this, the missionary
must not only be thoroughly versed in the
Hebrew Scriptures, but in Rabbinical litera-
ture in all its departments. Having proved
that the Messiah of the ancient Scriptures is
Jesus of Nazareth, the way opens for preach-
ing repentance and faith. (4) There were, at
the time of the establishment of modern mis-
sions among the Jews, no ^jdequate means or
agencies for meeting the religious wants of the
Jews. There was also a very prevalent senti-
ment that all efforts made for their conversion
would prove abortive ; and hence, on this
ground, if no other, the church declined to
entertain the subject of Jewish missions, and
did not deem it expedient to project any mea-
sures for a work of the kind. For these and
like reasons, separate missions to the Jews
were needed and established.
The London Society for promoting Christian-
ity among the Jews. — This Society was formal-
ly organized in the year 1809. The " object
of the Society was to relieve the temporal
distress of the Jews, as well as to promote
their spiritual welfare." The fundamental
principle on which it was founded, was by
means of temporal relief to gain access to the
poor. In order to furnish employment to
converts, a printing-press was established in
1811, which yet continues in operation. The
Episcopal Jews' chapel for Christian worship,
and schools, were opened in 1813. Up to this
time there had been made 79 proselytes from
among the Jews in London. In the year
1818, the first foreign missionary to the Jews
was sent abroad to Poland — an enterprise that
has been eminently successful from the first.
In contemplating the wants of the field, this
Society was convinced that little could be
done towards the conversion of the Jews with-
492
JEWS.
out missionaries and editions of the Bible and
other books adapted to their religious stat^;.
Accordingly, in 1821, a seminary for the in-
struction I'f missionaries to the Jews was
opened, and shortly afterwards an edition of
the Hebrew iScripturt-s was pul>li.shed. Sub-
secjiiently, the Scriptures were issued in Judeo-
Polish lor the Polish Jews, and in Syriac for
the ChiLsidini and Cabalistic Jews. In 1810,
the Hebrew College was established for the
iuslruction of missionary candidates in the
branches of learning recjuisite to promote the
cdiciency of their missions. From this college
have gone forth many converted Israelites as
missionaries, not only in connection with the
London Society, but also other societies.
This Society has at the jjresent time 31 mis-
sion stations in Holland, Frank fort-on-the-
Maine, Poland, Jerusalem, Pozen, Rhino Dis-
trict, Stra.-;ljurg, France, Konigsburg. Danzig.
Smyrna, North Africa, London, Berlin, I'rus-
sia, Constantipole, Safet, licyrut, Sweden,
Bagdad, Bucharest, Salon ica, Breslau, J assy,
Adrianople. The uumbei of missionaries is
78. Of this immber, 59 are converted Israel-
ites. Since the year 1820, there have been
distributed among the Jews by the agents and
missionaries of this Society — Hebrew Old
'iV'stament c(jpies, 01,020 ; Hebrew portions
of Old Testament, 107,03-1; Hebrew New
Testameiiis, r)."),7-ir) ; Ileltrow prayers of the
Church of Kngland, 4,471 ; tracts and publi-
cations of diverse languages, 1,039,005. The
Society has 20 schools, in which there have
been taught since the year 1827, children of
Hebrew parentage, 9,244. Since the Socie-
ty's organization, there have been ordained
under its au.spices, 50 clergymen who were
converted Israelites, the majority of whom are
now laboring us stated i)astors over Christian
congregations. It is almost impossible to
state with aj)proximate certainly the number i
of conversions that have been made in con- j
uection with this Society. The Society avows!
its object to be not to baptize Jews, but to,
promote Cliristianity among tbem ; and hence i
a return of ba)»tisnis can fonh no criterion ofj
the mimber really converted, lor the Jews are
generally but temporary ri'siurnts in the towns
where they receive instruet'tn, while oidy a
small proporti(»n of those instructed by the
missionary are baptized b\/him, and the vast
majority of the ])ro.selytes Vonnect themselves
with the ('hristian Church, unreported by the
missionary. The f<j||owing is tlie mo.<t authen-
tic e-ttimatc we have seen of fonverts through
mis.-.iouary efl'urL><. In Oermuny, during the
liL't 20 years, 5,000 ; HuRsia, .V.UOO ; London,
2,000; ill niher countries of Knrope, 1.500;
making, through the ojicrations o»' the London
Society, either directly or indirectlv, 11,500.
It kIiouM be remembcre<l here, for itlie benefit
of certain datwus of American reaUcrH, that
the I/>ndon Society biiA always buen com-
posed of the evangelical 8trengtli\of the
Church of England. There are found among
its principal managers the following names :
Burgess, Ryder, Wilberforce, Simeon, Basil
Wood, Saunders, Ilawtrey, Way, Marsh, CJrim-
sbawe, Bickersteth, Stewart, Cunningham,
McCaul, McNeile. Consequently the mission-
aries of the Society have bten selected gener-
ally with a strict regard to their evangelical
views and piety. 'J'he manner of conducting
the work of missions may be seen by the fol-
lowing extract. Speaking of Poland, where
there are two millions of Jews of the most or-
thodo.v stamp, a writer says : " A great work
was thus begun in Poland in 1821. Public
preaching, private discu.'ssions, daily conversa-
tion re.'^pecting the character and coming of
the Messiah, and the fulfilment of the prophe-
cies in him ; the circulation of the Hebrew
Scriptures, and the Scriptures in the Judeo-
Polish dialect. All these means are owned and
blessed of (jod among the numerous descend-
ants of Abraham in that country." Again. '-A
great exteiit of the kingdom of Poland has
been traversed every year, and the sound of the
Gospel has penetrated into almost every nook
and corner of the land, and the seed thus sown
has taken root in the hearts of many Israel-
ite,-^." The animal income of this Society is
about 8150,000.
The London Society is by priority of exist-
ence, and in the magnitude of its operations,
the leading Jewish mission society of Christen-
dom. It takes rank among the great mission-
ary enterprises of the day among the heathen,
and is ecjually successful under the influence of
the Divine Spirit in bringing souls to Christ.
Tlic Biitisli Society for the Propa<i;iition of the
Gospel nmmig the Jew^. — This Society is located
in London and is mainly composed of the various
denominations of dissenting churches in Eng-
land, and supported by them. It was f lundwl
in 1842. Its object is to propagate the Co-s-
pel among the tlews by means of missionarii'S
and colporteurs, who are directed to preach,
teach, and visit the Jews, and distribute Bibles,
liooks, and tracts among them. Its first en-
deavors wen; among the Jews rtNideiit in(jircat
Britain, with a population of 30.oy0. Sub.se-
quently it extendetl its operations to foreign
parts. The society hius now in its employ 24
missionaries, mostly converte<l Jews, located
ill the following jjlaces, besides the diflerent
localities in England, at Tunis, in Northern
Africa, at (Jil>raltar, at one of the gates of the
Holy Land, at Frankfort, in Paris, in Lyons,
ill \Vurteiiiburg. and in Hreslaii. It supports
one female agent, who ha-s under her charge 60
.Iewes.'i<>s. whom she instructs in the Sacred
.<cri|)tures. Viw aliout seven years the society
siLstained a H el >rew Mission (!olK'pe, to pre-
pare young nu-n for the mi.<sionary work among
the Jews. Eleven of the graduuUs, convertwl
Jews, are now missionaries of the .-society, while
others have become missionaries of other so-
cieties.
JEWS.
493
The immber of converts made through the
operations of the society is 100. Its annual
income is about ^20,000, the larger proportion
of which is the fruit of female piety and devot-
edness.
Missions to the Jews of the Free Church of
Scotland, and other Presbyterian bodies in Great
Britain. — The mission to the Jews of the Free
Church of Scotland is not conducted by a vol-
untary society, but is one of the departments
of the general missionary work in which that
church is engaged. It was originated before
the division took place in the Church of Scot-
land. A deputation was sent to the East to
make inquiry into the religious condition of
the Jews, in 1839. The result was the estab-
lishment of Jewish Missions at Pesth, Hun-
gary, and Jassy Moldavia. In 1841 the Presby-
terian church in the north of Ireland establish-
ed a mission at Damascus, and about the same
time the English Presbyterian Synod located
one at Corfu. At the time of the memorable
disruption, it was found that those clergymen
that left the established church were the friends
of Jewish missions, whose majority was so large
that the missions already established easily
passed over into the hands of the Free Church.
About this time, a great revival among the
Jews took place at Pesth. Hundreds, and
many Jews of distinction, were converted to
Christianity. This mission was interrupted by
the revolution in Hungary, and nearly annihi-
lated by the despotic decrees of the Austrian
government. The established missionary sta-
tions and number of missionaries are as fol-
lows : Pesth, a teacher and a school of 300
scholars ; Brcslau, one missionary and wife aid-
ed by Jewish converts. Constantinople, three
male and three female missionaries, one female
teacher, a colporteur, and four Jewish teachers,
in all eleven laborers. Amsterdam, two mission-
aries, four teachers in the college, with 16
scholars. The number of converts is not
known. The income of the church devoted to
this branch of missionary labor was in 1854
about ^36,000.
■ The Scottish Society for the Conversion of Is-
rael.— This society is composed of diflerent
denominations. It was organized in 1845.
]\lissiou stations were established at Hamburg,
Altona, and Algiers. The number of mission-
aries is two. A number of Jews have been
converted.
Besides these general efiforts, many local so-
cieties have, from time to time, heen insti-
tuted on the Continent of Europe, for the con-
version of the Jews.
Amkrican Missions to the Jews. — The at-
tention of American Christians has also been
attracted to the Jews, and many eflbrts have
been put forth with varied success. In 1832,
liev. W. J. Schaufllcr settled in Constantino-
ple. He had been preceded by Dr. Wolfe ;
but little or nothing was accomplished by him.
Mr. Schauffler labored alone, with extremely
limited means. His efiforts were mainly do-
voted to the preparation of an edition of the
Scriptures (O.T.) in Hebrew-Spanish, and
Hebrew. In this he was aided by the Ameri-
can Bi))le Society. He also published an edi-
tion of the Psalms, and two editions of the
Pentateuch, in the same language. These
publications he distributed among the Jews.
He is now engaged in printing, under the aus-
pices of the A. B. C. F. M., a Hebrew, and
Hebrew-Spanish Lexicon, to accompany the
Old Testament. Besides aiding Mr. SchaufHer,
the American Board of Commissioners for
Foreign Missions have sent two missionaries
to the Jews at Salonica and Constantinople.
The Reformed Presbyterian Church in the
United States has sent two missionaries to the
Jews at Salonica and Damascus. The Camp-
bellite Baptists have a mission station at Jeru-
salem. The Presbyterian Board of Foreign
Missions has under its care three missionaries
to the Jews in Baltimore, Md. and New
York. The labors of these missionaries are
divided between Germans and Jews. Two
places of worship have been opened, which
are frequented on Sunday, by a promiscuous
congregation of German population. A few
individuals have been baptized by one of the
missionaries.
The American Society for Meliorating the
Condition of the Jeivs. — This society was organ-
ized in 1820. Its fundamental idea was. the
temporal relief of persecuted converts from
abroad. It aimed to afford an asylum for
such Jews, as believing in the Christian reli-
gion, dared not profess their faith for fear of
persecution from their kindred. From repre-
sentations made to them, the whole American
Christian community became deeply interested
in the persecuted converts in Europe. Con-
siderable sums of money Avere raised, which
were devoted to the purchase and furnishing
of an establishment for this purpose. But
cither because there were no converts disposed
or because no provision was made to enable
them to emigrate, no colony of converts was
ever fully organized, for want of subjects. To
realize the idea started with, a number of dif-
ferent experiments were tried, all of which
proved abortive. It was in 1849 that a purely
missionary work among the Jews in the
United States was projected on a grand scale.
Although the society had employed mission-
aries to the Jews previously, yet its purposes
were not well defined, nor its plans matured
until this time. The society retaining its bap-
tized title, so changed its constitution as to
admit of a grand missionary enterprize among
the Jews. The field upon examination is
found to be an extensive one, at the present
time. In 1851 there were found on the syna-
gogues' rolls, in the United States, according
to a Jewish publication, 60,000 males, from
thirteen years and upward. The number of
females being about equal to that of the males,
494
JACOBITES— JASSORE.
not including any under thirteen years, would
make the religious portion of the Jewish po-
pulation in the country, 120,000. Add to this
the thousands of Jews that are traveling
through the country, and those who have not
entered their names on the rolls, together with
all the children under thirteen, and we shall
have a Jewish population of 150,000 souls.
The society aims to accomplish its work by
the distribution of the Scriptures in Hebrew,
German and French ; of tracts suitable to
their religious state ; and books which have a
bearing upon the question of the Messiahship
of Jesus of Nazareth. The character of the
society's operations is that of an itinerancy. It
baptizes no converts, but prepares them for
that ordinance, and" leaves the responsibility
of a public profession of faith with pastors of
churches ; hence the society can never know
the amount of fruits resulting from the culti-
vation of this field.
During the year 1854, the society supported
10 regular missionaries and 7 colporteurs, who
labored among the Jews in forty cities and
large towns in different parts of the country.
It also delegated an agent to Palestine, on a
mission of inquiry as to what could be done
there in agriculture among the Jews, with a
view to reach them with the Gospel. During
this same year, 29 converts were reported as
the results of the society's labors. The in-
come of the society for the same year was
about §14,500. The whole number of con-
verts reported as the results of the missionary
operations of the society since 1849, were 59
Jews.
GENERAL SUilllARY.
Number of Jews in the world, . . . 14,000,000
" " now coinprLsing a missionary
field, 5,000,000
" of Missionary stations, . . 115
" " Missionaries, about . . . 200
" " Missionaries, converted Jews,
about 100
" " Converted Jews, clergymen, (be-
sides) . 200
" " Hebrew children taught in lILs-
sion schools, .... 12,000
" " Converts during the la.st 50 years. 20.000
" " " now in the church (in 1864) 15,000
Amount expended on all the Mission stations, $160,000
Proportion of converts to the whole population, 1 to 700
" convert!! to Jews, that are acces-
sible, 1 to 333
" clergymen to the number of con-
verts, 1 to 60
Eev. E. R. McGregor.
JACOBITES: A sect of Christians in
Syria and Mesopotamia, so called either from
Jacob, a Syrian, who lived in the reign of
the emperor Mauritius, or from one Jacob, a
monk, who flourished in the year 550. They
are of two sects, one following the rites of the
Latin church, and the other continuing separate
from Rome. There is also a division among
the latter, who have two rival patriarchs.
They number about thirty or forty thousand
families in Syria and Mesopotamia. 'J'hcv
hold but one nature in Christ. AVith respect
to purgatory and prayers for the dead, they
hold with the Greeks and other Eastern Chris-
tians. They use unleavened bread at the eucha-
rist, reject confession, and practice circumcision
before baptism. — (See Copts.)
JACKMEL : A town in Hayti, contain-
ing a population of about 10,000, surrounded
by a district containing 60,000 more. A sta-
tion of the Baptist Missionary Society.
JAFFA : The ancient Joppa. It is the
principal port of Judea, and the only point of
communication which David and Solomon had
with the Mediterranean. It is a station of the
London Jews' Society.
JAFFNA : A seaport town, near the north-
ern extremity of the island of Ceylon, capital of
the district of Jaffnapatam. Population about
8000. A station of the Wesleyan Missionary
Society,
JAIPUR : A city in Upper Assam, and
formerly a station of the American Baptist
Mission.
JAINS : A remarkable sect, scattered
throughout India, but nowhere comparatively
numerous, except in South Canara, where Jain
temples still remain in a state of tolerable per-
fection. Their temples are of two sorts : one
covered with a roof, named Biu>ty ; the other,
an open area, called Betta, which signifies a
hill. In the Betta temples, the only image of
a saint is that of Gornuta Roya, said, when on
earth, to have been a powerful king. The
word Jain signifies a person who has renounced
the ordinary modes of thinking and living
among mankind. The Jains assert that they
have preserved the true and primitive religion ;
and say that the Brahmins have swerved from
all the ancient religious maxims of their an-
cestors ; and that, laying aside the venerable
traditions of their masters, they have substi-
tuted in the place a monstrous combination.
The Vedas, the eighteen Puranas, the Tri-
murti, the Avataras of Yishnu, the Lingam,
the worship of the cow and other animals, and
of sensible objects, the sacrifice of the Yojna,
are all rejected by the Jains, who hold them
to be a mass of abominations, innovations, and
corruptions of the true primitive religion. The
Jains are frequently confounded with the wor-
shipers of Buddha ; and their tenets have cer-
tainly, in many points, a strong resemblance
to those taught in Ava by the adherents of
Buddha. — Hook's Year Book of Miasious.
JALNA : A city of Ilindostan, 120 miles
N.VV. of Ahmeduupgur, and 300 miles from
Bombay. It is situated in the territories of
the Nizam, or Mohammedan prince, who has
nominally an independent government over a
territory of 9."),000 square miles. It was oc-
cupied as a station of the American Board in
1837 ; and belongs to the Ahmeduuggur mis-
sion.
JAMAICA : See West Indies.
JASSORE : A town on the Ganges, G2
miles N. of Calcutta. The English Baptists
commenced a mission here in 1800.
JAUNPUR— KADATCHAPORAM.
495
JAUNPUR : The capital of a district of (tables from the hands of the pilgrims. In the
the same name, in Northern Hindostan, about
40 miles north-west of Benares. It is a sta-
tion of the Church Missionary Society.
JAVA : See Indian Archipelago.
JERUSALEM : See Oriental Christians,
Jews.
JEREMIE : A station of the "Wesleyans, in
Hayti.
JESSORE : Capital of a district of the
same name, 62 miles N. E. of Calcutta. A
station of the Baptist Missionary Society.
JESUITS : The Society of Jesus, one of the
most celebrated monastic orders of the Romish
Church, founded in the year 1540, by Ignatius
Loyola. — (See Church of Rome and Europe.)
JILOLO : One of the Molucca Islands in
the Indian Archipelago.
JOONEER : A town in the province of
Arungabad, Hindostan, about 48 miles from
Poona. The fort has seven gates of masonry,
one within the other, and contains the ruins of
many Mohammedan tombs and Hindoo exca-
vations. About a mile south of Jooneer, are
numerous excavations and cave temples, the
sculptures of which prove them to be of Jain
origin.
JUGGERNAUT : A celebrated place of
Hindoo worship, in the district of Cuttack, on
the sea-coast of Orissa. It stands close to the
sea-shore, a few miles north-east of the Chil-
ka lake, and immediately adjacent to the town
of Pursottora. The town and temple are sur-
rounded with low sand-hills, and the surround-
ing country is very sterile. The idol is a
carved block of wood, with a frightful visage,
painted black, with a distended mouth of a
bloody color. On festival days, the throne of
the idol is placed upon a stupendous movable
tower, 60 feet high, resting on wheels, which
indent the ground deeply as they turn slowly
under the ponderous machine. He is accom-
panied with two other idols, his brother Bala-
ram, a*' ' his sister Shubudra, of a white and
yel* color, each on a separate tower, and
sit..iig upon thrones of nearly an equal height.
Attached to the principal tower are six ropes,
of the length and size of a ship's cable, by
which the people draw it along. The priests
and attendants are stationed around the
throne, on the car ; and occasionally address
the worshipers in libidinous songs and ges-
tures. Both the walls of the temple and the
sides of the car are covered with the most in-
decent emblems, in large and durable sculp-
ture. Obscenity and blood are the character-
istics of the idol's worship. As the tower
moves along, devotees, throwing themselves
under its, wheels, are crushed to death ; and
such acts are hailed by the acclamations of
the multitude, as the most acceptable sac-
rifices. The scenes which occur at the tem-
ple as acts of worship, are too indecent
to be described. A number of sacred bulls
are kept in the place, and fed with vege-
temple, also, is preserved what is regarded as
a bone of Krishna, considered a most sacred
relic. The temple of Juggernaut is esteemed
the most sacred of all the religious establish-
ments of the Hindoos ; and the concourse of
pilgrims by which it is annually visited is
immense, particularly in March, when the
Dole Jattrah takes place, and in July, when
the Ruth Jattrah is celebrated. Dr. Carey
was of the opinion that, at the lowest calcula-
tion, 1,200,000 attend every year, of whom an
incredible portion die by the way, from want,
fatigue, or disease. At 50 miles distance, the
approach to the spot is known by the quantity
of human bones which are strewed by the
way.
Mr. Sterling, in his "Account of Orissa,"
gives the following description of the grand
procession of the idol : " On the appointed
day, after various prayers and ceremonies, the
images are brought from their throne to the
outside of the Lion-gate, not with decency and
reverence, but a cord being fastened round
their necks, they are dragged by the priests
down the steps and through the mud, while
others keep their figures erect, and help their
movements by shoving from behind, in the
most indifferent and unceremonious manner.
Thus the monstrous idols go, rocking and
pitching along, through the crowd, until they
reach the cars, which they are made to ascend
by a similar process, up an inclined platform,
reaching from the stage of the machine to the
ground. On the other hand, a powerful senti-
ment of religious enthusiasm pervades the
admiring multitude of pilgrims, when the im-
ages first make their appearance through the
gate. They welcome them with shouts and
cries ; and when the monster Juggernaut, the
most hideous of all, is dragged forth, the last
in order, the air is rent with acclamations.
After the images have been safely lodged in
their vehicles, a box is brought forth, contain-
ing the golden or gilded feet, hands, and ears,
of the great idol, which are fixed on the proper
parts with due ceremony, and a scarlet scarf is
carefully arranged round the lower part of the
body, or pedestal. The joy and shouts of the
crowd, on the first movement of the cars, the
creaking sound of the wheels, as these ponder-
ous machines roll along, the clatter of hun-
dreds of harsh-sounding instruments, and the
general appearance of such an immense mass
of human beings, produce an astounding
effect."
JU-JU, or JEW- JEW : A charm ; a fe-
tish. (See Africa, West.)
JUNIN : In Western India, about 70
miles east of Bombay. It has 3,000 houses,
and about 25,000 inhabitants, and is a station
of the Church Missionary Society.
KADATCHAPORAM : A station of the
Church Missionary Society in the Tinnevelly
district, India.
496
KAFFRARIA— KAILUA.
K AFFRARIA, or Kaffrelaml, extends from
the Kciskamma river, (tne Kei, according to
the late arrangement.) which separates it from
Cape Colony, to an undefined line somewhere
on the south of Delagoa Bay. Its extent is
not exactly ascertained. Its western boundary
is supposed to be near the source of the Orange
river, which flows through a vast extent of
country into the Atlantic Ocean, and the Ma-
poota, which empties itself into Delagoa Bay.
KAFFRES : The appellation of Kaffre,
which signifies unbeliever, was originally given,
by the Moorish navigators of the Indian Ocean
to the inhabitants of the south-eastern coast
of Africa, and was borrowed from them by the
Portuguese. Afterwards, when the Dutch
colonists came in contact with the most south-
ern tribe of the KafFres, the Koosas or Amako-
sa, the Moorish name was given to them ex-
clusively ; and in this restricted sense it is gen-
erally used by the Dutch and English colo-
nists. It is, however, well ascertained that not
only the tribes commonly called KafFres, but
the Tambookics, Mambookies, Zulus, Dama-
ras, the inhabitants of Delagoa Bay, Mozam-
bique, and the numerous Bechuana tribes, who
occupy the interior of the continent to an ex-
tent yet unexplored, are but subdivisions of one
great family, allied in language, customs, and
mode of life. The Bechuana dialect, which
prevails universally among the interior tribes,
so far as they have been visited, varies but
slightly from that of the Damaras, and of the
natives of Delagoa Bay ; and the Amakosa is
a dialect of the same language. The natives
of tlie Comoro Islands and the aboriginal tribes
of Madagascar also sj)eak a dialect intimately
allied to tho.se of Kaffraria and Mozambique.
This word is variously spelled, Kaffrc, Kaffir,
Kafir, urul Caffre. "Which is the more proper
it is not easy to determine. "VVe have followed
the Encyclopedia Britannica, on the ground
that such a standard work would be most likely
to fix and settle the orthography.
Government. — The ancient government of
the Kaffre tribes is feudal : an aristocracy of
chiefs, acknowledging the supremacy of the
sovereign, but except on extraordinary occa-
sion.s, acting independently of him. Each
tribe is divided into kraals or hamlets, each of
which has its petty chief. The general chief
is the sovereign of the nation, and in a council
of chiefs is very powerful, and is looked upon
by all the nobles and people with unbounded
resjxict.
The People. — In ])crsonal appearance, the
KaflVes are a remarkably fine race of men.
Their noble figures and p(nver of limb ; their
lofty stature and graceful deportment, have
drawn the attention and excited the admira-
tion of travelers. Their color is dark brown,
mixed with a warmer tint of yellow. Their
hair is l»Uick and woolly, but not the woolli-
ness of the Negro. Their faces apjjroach the
European model. They wear no clothing but
a cloak of skin. In disposition, they are cheer-
ful, frank, good-natured, and intelligent. They
are a pastoral people, and their flocks and
herds constitute their chief care.
Religious and Moral Condition. — The Kaffres
have no national religion. They have only a
few unmeaning rites and superstitions, which
may be the ruins of some forgotten creed.
They practice circumcision, abhor swine's
flesh and fish, and have a reverential fear of
serpents, which may suggest their eastern ori-
gin. Mr. Moffat states that there is, with
them, an entire absence of theological ideas.
The venerable Dr. Vanderkemp, the first mis-
sionary among them, says, " If by religion we
mean reverence for God, or the external action
by which that reverence is expressed, I never
could perceive that they had any religion, 7i07-
any idea of the existence of God." This he said
with reference to them as a nation, for indi-
viduals among them had some notions of God,
which they had acquired from those who had
associated with white people. And, as proof
of this, he said they had no word in their lan-
guage to express the idea of a Supreme Being.
Mr. Moffat adds his testimony to the same fact,
of which he says he became convinced in oppo-
sition to his preconceived and cherished opin-
ions, both by the declarations of the untutored
natives themselves, and the accounts given by
the native Christians of their former state, to
illustrate which he relates a number of inte-
resting conversations and anecdotes. But,
although they appear to possess no just spirit-
ual ideas, or to have any true conception of a
future state, a belief in witchcraft holds the
same terrible sway over them as in other Afri-
can tribes. So deplorably does this supersti-
tious dread of the sorcerer's art prevail among
them that they never attribute the death of
their people to natural causes. If a Kaffre
should die of extreme old age, they would attri-
bute his death to witchcraft, and wreak their
vengeance on some poor innocent creature as
the witch. But in those portions of their
country which have come under British autho-
rity, these cruelties have been suppressed by
law. I'olygamy is also universal among the
KalTre tribes.
The various tribes of the Kaffre family are
estimated by Rev. J. J. Freeman, Secretary of
the London Missionary Society, at 2,000,000,
spread from the eastern frontier of Cape Colo-
ny to beyond Delagoa Bay, and then across
the whole continent, without break, to the
Atlantic, in latitude 'IQ^.—Condafs Dictionary
of Gco-;raphii; Wrongs of the Kaffre Nation, by
Ju.STis ; A Tour ?n South Africa, by Rev. J. J.
Fkkeman; Moffat's Southern Africa; Philip's
Rc^earche^ in Southern Africa. (F«r Mis.«ions
among the Kaffres, see Afkioa, Southkrn.)
KAIIUKU : A station of the American
Board on the San<lwich Islands, on Oahu.
KAILUA : The fii-st station occupied by
the American Board at the Sandwich Islands,
KAITOTEHE— KHARPtJT.
497
situated about the centre of the eastern coast
of Hawaii.
KAITOTEHE : A station of the Church
Missionary Society in New Zealand.
KAIKOHI : A station of the Church Mis-
sionary Society in New Zealand.
KAIPAEA : A station of the Wesleyan
Missionary Society on the western coast of
New Zealand, celebrated for a large muscle,
measuring 11 to 13 inches, found there in great
abundance.
KAITAT : The most northern station of
the Church Missionary Society in New Zea-
land. It lies under a fine wooded range of hills,
having on the cast a vast plain, with a dark
forest in the middle, extending to the flat,
marshy estuary of the Awarua river, ending in
the Sandy Bay ; to the northward a bright
line of sand marks the district of Muriwenua,
•which reaches to the North Cape ; on the
■westward the wooded range of Maungu Tanew-
ha bridges the whole inland country between
Kaitai and AVaimate.
KALUAAHA : A station of the Amer-
ican Board on the island of Molokai.
KALIFF : See CaUff.
KAMA STONE : A station of the Wes-
leyans in South Africa, near Buffalo's Vlcij.
KAMBEL : A Burman village near Kan-
goon and an out-station of the Am. Baptist
Mission at Rangoon.
KANTHA : A Karen village in the dis-
trict of Tavoy, Burraah, and an out-station of
Am. Baptist Mission at Tavoy.
KANEOHE : A station of the American
Board in the Sandwich Islands, on Oahu.
KANDY : In Ceylon, about 90 miles N.
E. of Colombo. It is surrounded by hills and
mountains, and was anciently the capital of an
independent kingdom of the same name. The
town itself has about 3000 peoiDle, but in the
neighboring highlands there is a population of
200,000. It is a station of the Church and
Baptist Societies.
KAPITI : An island of New Zealand, in
Cook's straits, whose chief sent his sons 500
miles for a missionary. The whole island had
embraced Christianity, by the labors of one
native, who had gone there of his own accord.
KARANGAN : Formerly a station of
the American Board in Borneo.
KARENS : An interesting race of abori-
ginal inhabitants of the mountainous regions
of the southern and eastern portions of Bur-
mah Proper, and all parts of the Tenasserim
provinces, extending into the western portions
of Siam, and thence northward among the
Shyans. It is impossible to form a satisfac-
tory estimate of their numbers. In the pro-
vince of Tavoy a British census makes the
number 2500. Around Maulmain and Ran-
goon there are perhaps 20,000 more. In
Siam and Laos, there are probably 10,000,
making in all, about 30,000. They are a quiet j
and intelligent people, living by agriculture, |
22
and their government is patriarchal. They
have received the Gospel with great readiness,
and among them the missions of the American
Baptists have met with wonderful success. (See
Burmah.)
KAT RIVER: A district in South Africa,
on the borders of Kafiraria, where the Lon-
don Missionary Society have a station at
Philiptou, with 13 out-stations on Kat River,
and four in Tambookee land. The population
consists chiefly of liberated Hottentots, living
in 50 or 60 locations.
KAUAI : One of the Sandwich Islands
group, about 75 miles north-west of Oahu. It
is 46 miles in length and 23 in breadth, moun-
tainous, and of romantic appearance.
_ KAUKAUA : A station of the Church Mis-
sionary Society in New Zealand. It stands
on a plain immediately adjoining a mountain.
The Kaukaua district extends from Opotiki in
the Bay of Plenty to Waipiro in Open Bay.
K AU : A district in the south of the island
of Hawaii, where is a station of the American
Board.
KAWHIA : A station of the Wesleyans
on the west coast of New Zealand,
KE ALAKEKUA : A station of the Amer-
ican Board in the Sandwich Islands, on the
north-west coast of Hawaii.
KEALIA : A station of the American
Board on Hawaii, Sandwich Islands.
KEISKAMMA : A station of the Lon-
don_ Missionary Society in Kaflreland, South
Africa.
KEMEES : A tribe inhabiting the moun-
tains of Burmah, in many of their habits re-
sembling the Karens.
KEiMMENDINE : A Karen village near
Rangoon ; a station of the American Baptist
Mission at Rangoon.
KENT : Town of liberated Africans, in the
parish of St. Edward, at Cape Shilling, Sier-
ra Leone, West Africa, about 40 miles south
of Freetown — station of the Church Mission-
ary Society.
KERIKERI: A station of the Church
Missionary Society in New Zealand.
KHAMIESBERG : A station of the Wes-
leyan Missionary Society in Little Namaqua-
land. South Africa.
KHAMTIS : One of the' races occupying
the country of Assam, to whom the missiona-
ries of the American Baptist Missionary Union
have preached.
KHAN : In Asia, a governor, a prince, a
king. Also, an inn.
KHARI : A station of the Baptist Mis-
sionary Society in Bengal.
KHARPUT : Prospectively a station of
the American Board among the Armenians.
It is in Northern Mesopotamia, on an extend-
ed, well-cultivated, and beautiful plain, having
a delightful climate ; 366 villages on the plain,
with an Armenian population, including that
of the city, of at least 100,000 souls.
408
KHUNDITA— LABRADOR AND GREENLAND.
KIIUNDITA : A station of the General
Baptists in Orissa, about 200 miles south
from Calcutta. It is surrounded by jiopulous
villa?e.'s and not far from the large town of
Ja^reepore.
KING WILLIAM'S TOAYX : A station
of the London Missionary Society, on the Buf-
falo river, South Africa.
KING WILL'S 'J'OWX : A station of the
American Presliyterian Board in West Africa.
KINGSTON : The capital of the Island of
St. Vincent, W. I., and a station of the Wes-
leyan Missionary Society. Pop. 8,000. It is
situated on the south-west side of the island,
and stretches along the sea-shore, the moun-
tains gradually rising behind in the form of an
ampliitliealre. to a considerable height.
KIOSK : In Turkey, a summer-house.
KIRKWOOI) : Station of the United
Scotch I'resbyterian Church in Tambookie-
land. South Africa, on the river Txhousc.
KISSOR: Oiie of the Banda Islands, a
group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi-
pelago.
KISSEY : Town of liberated Africans, and
station of the Church Missionary Society, in
the River District, Sierra Leone, AYest Africa,
about three miles east of Freetown, on the
Sierra river.
KLAAS YOOK'S RIYER : A station of
the London Missionary Society in Little Na-
maf inula nd. South Africa.
KNAl'fS HOPE: A station of the
London ^Missionary Society, among the Kaf
fres in South Africa.
KOIIALA : A station of the American
Board in the Sandwich Islands, on the north-
east coa.st of Hawaii.
KOKFONTEIN: A station of the Rhen-
i.sh Missionary Society in Little Namaqua,
South Africa.
KOLOA : A station of the American
Board in the Sandwich Islands, on the island
of Kaui. •
KOLOBENG : The most inland station
of the London Mii^'^ionary Society, in South
Africa, situated on the southern borders of the
Kalahari desert, 200 miles N. E. by N. from
Kuruman.
KO.MMAGGAS: A station of the Rhcn-
i.'^h Missionary Society in South Africa, in the
north-west corner of Cape Colony.
KOTGIIUR: A station of the Church
Missionary Society, the capital of a chicfship
of the same name, in Ilimmalaya, India, be-
tween the Sutlcj and Jumna, on a declivity of
the Whartoo Mountain, near the left bank of
the Sutlcj, at an elevation of G,G34 feet above
the level of the sea, on the high road to
Thibet. The language of the inhabitants
18 the same as that of the hilly parts of the
Sutloj.
KRAAL : A small village in Africa, con-
sisting ol a few native huts.
••''RISIINAGUR: A station of the
Church Missionary Society, a little to the
north-west of Calcutta.
KRISIINAPORB: A station of the
Church Missionary Society in Hindostan.
KRUSFONTEIN : An out-station of the
Loudon Missionary Society in South Africa,
situated on a dry and barren piece of land,
near the Gamtoos river.
KULANGSU, or KOOLANGSOO : A
small island near the city of Amoy, China, oc-
cupied as a station by the Presbyterian Board.
KUMASI, KOOMASSIE, or COOMAS-
SIE : The capital of Ashantee. Population,
15,000. A station of the Weslcyan Mission-
ary Society.
KUMISS : An intoxicating liquor distilled
from mare's milk, in use among the Tartars.
KURUMAN : A station of the London
Missionary Society in South Africa, G30 miles
north-east of Cape Town, among the Bechu-
anas.
KYOUK PIIYOO : A town in Arracan,
on Ramrce Island, where the mission of the
American Baptist Missionary Union in Arra-
can was first i)lanted.
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND :
These two countries are grouped together in
one article on account of the connection of the
missions, particularly those of the United
Brethren, which may be considered as in fact
but one mission.
Greenland. — Greenland is the remotest
tract of land in the north, lying between
P^urope and America, and is divided into East
and AVest Greenland. The eastern coast is
almost inaccessible, but on the western coast
the Danes have erected several factories, for
the purpose of carrying on the whale fishery.
The want of large timber is in some measure
compensated by the drift-wood, which floats in
great quantities into the bays and islands, and
serves the I]uropeans for fuel, and the natives
for building their houses, tents, and boats.
The population of Greenland is estimated at
(),000 ; 150 or 200 of whom are Europeans.
They are a remarkably docile and harmless
people, and the missionaries have not had to
encounter among them any fixed forms of
superstition or idolatry.
The climate in this country is intensely cold,
sometimes so severe that beer, and even brandy,
freeze in a room heated by a stove, and yet it is
a remarkable fiu't, that the bays and the water
l>etwecn the islands are seldom frozen for any
length of time, and sometimes they remain
open during the whole winter. This is of
great advantage to the Greenlanders, as their
principal subsistence is derived from fi.shing.
The summer seldom la.sts above four months,
and even then it frequently snows, and the M
frost never leaves the ground entirely, as the ^
rays of the sun .seldom penetrate above a foot
below the surface. Yet the heat in .summer is
said by the missionaries to be as great as in
any part of England or Germany, thou"-!) of
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND.
499
shorter duration. There is scarce any night
in summer, as the sun does not remain more
than two or three hours below the horizon,
and from the tops of the mountains his beams
are reflected even at midnight, so that a person
seated in a room may read and write without
the aid of a candle. And, though the winter
nights are proportionably long, yet the dark-
ness is considerably lessened by the stronger
light of the moou, the prevalence of the aurora
borealis, and by reflections from the ice and
snow.
The natives are of a tawny hue and low
stature, with very dark or black eyes, and
strong, flowing hair. They are clad the whole
year round in fur dresses, made of the skins of
seals and reindeer, very neatly sewed by the
women. Their dwellings are of two kinds :
first, tents, which are covered with seal-skins,
and constitute their summer habitations ; sec-
ondly, winter houses, constructed of large
stones, the walls being a yard in thickness,
and the crevices filled up with earth and sods.
The roof is of wood, covered first with sods,
and the whole overspread with skins. The
inside breadth of such a house is generally 12
feet, but its length varies from 24 to 72 feet,
according to the number of inmates. Four,
or even ten, families live together in a house,
the apartments being separated from each
other by screens, made of skins. lu every
apartment a lamp is kept constantly burning,
which lights and heats it, and serves also for
cooking. There is not a great regard for
cleanliness, and the smell of the train-oil is
offensive, but the contentment of the Green-
landers amid their poverty, and the order and
stillness observed among those who dwell to-
gether, excite the admiration of Europeans.
Notwithstanding the rigors of the climate
and the sterility of the soil, the missionaries
have succeeded in laying out gardens, in which
they grow lettuce, cabbages, radishes, turnips,
and a few other vegetables. However, as they
cannot be sown before June, and killing frosts
commence again in September, they remain
small, but have a fine flavor. Oats and barley
spring up very fast, but never come to matu-
rity. The missionaries have introduced the
breeding of sheep and goats, though hay is
difficult to obtain, as it comes only from the
valleys.
Several kinds of animals and fish are ser-
viceable to P^uropeans and natives, both for
traffic and food, such as reindeer, hares, foxes,
white bears, different descriptions of winged
game, and a great variety of fishes, especially
herrings, which, in the beginning of summer,
come into the bays in such shoals, that whole
boats can be filled with them in a few hours.
But the seal is the most important to the
Greenlauders, as it furnishes a principal article
of food, and also serves for clothing, bedding,
covering for boats, tents, and houses, oil for
their lamps, implements for fishing and hunt-
ing, and also serves as a medium of traffic,
instead of money.
MISSIONS.
To Hans Egede, a Danish missionary, belongs
the honorable title of " Apostle of Greenland"
and most cheerfully is this title conceded to
him by the Moravian brethren. It was in the
year 1721 that this excellent man exchanged
his comfortable parsonage at Vogen, in Nor-
way, for the bleak, desolate island of Kangek,
near the mouth of Baal's river, on the contig-
uous mainland, at Goodhab, on the western
coast, where he exerted himself with patient
and unwearied zeal, for the conversion of the
Greenlanders to the faith of Christ. Through
ten weary years, with very little apparent suc-
cess, he persevered in his labors ; but it ap-
peared as if the mission must be abandoned,
when a new era began to dawn upon benighted
Greenland. In 1831, two baptized Greenland- / "]
ers, who had been taken to Denmark by some
colonists, gave much interesting information
relative to the state of the nation to which
they belonged, and the comparative failure of
the mission. This being reported to the con-
gregation at Herrnhut, a young brother, named
Matthew Stach, felt an impulse which he could
not resist, to ofler himself as a missionary to
the Greenland race. His offer was accepted ;
and the brethren Christian Stach, cousin of
Matthew, and Christian David, the veteran
emigrant from Moravia, both common work-
ingmen, were connnissioned to accompany
him. On the 19th of January, 1733, these
brethren set out on foot for Copenhagen, a dis-
tance of about 500 miles.
Nothing can more strikingly exhibit the
zeal of these devoted servants of Christ, and
their truly apostolic spirit, than the manner in
which they entered upon their great work.
They literally obeyed the injunction, " Take
nothing for your journey." " There was no
need," says one of them, " of much time or ex-
pense in our equipment.. The congregation
consisted chiefly of poor exiles, who had not
much to give, and we ourselves had nothing
but the clothes on our isacks. We had been
used to make shift with little, and did not trou-
ble our heads how we should get to Greenland,
or how we should live there. The day before
our departure a friend in Venice sent a dona-
tion, and part of this we received for our jour-
ney to Co])euhagcn. Now we considered our-
selves richly provided for, and therefore would
take nothing of any one on the road, believing
that he who had procured us something for our
journey at the very critical moment, would
also supply us with everything requisite for
accomplishing our purpose, whenever it should
be needful."
On arriving at Copenhagen they were kind-
ly received by many friends ; but their design
appeared romantic and unreasonable, especially
as the Danish mission to Greenland was in a
500
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND.
low Btato, and the pfovornment was inclined to i
withdraw its colonists altop;cthor. In this state
of thiiiirs a n^idcnce on the co:u«t of Gretnland ,
was rtfrardod as hii^hly dancrprons, both on ac-j
count of exposure to the cruelty of the natives,
and the liability of beinjr left without any reg-
ular sujiply of provisions from Europe. These
reports however did not dispirit the misJ;ion-
aries, who on being asked by Count Pless,
" How they i'ltcnded to maintain themselves
in (Jreenkiiul," answcri'd, '■ Uy the labor of our
hands, and (Juds blessing," adding, " that they
would build a house and cultivate a piece of
land, and not be burdensome to any." On
being told by the Count that there was no
timber fit for building in that country, they
said, *' If this is the case we will dig a hole in
the earth and live there." Astonished at their
ardor in the cause in which they had embarked,
Uic Count replied, '• No ; you shall not be driv-
en to that extremity ; take timber with you
and build a house; accept of these fifty dollars
for that purpose." They tlien committed
their cause to Him wlio orders all things, and
on the 10th of April, 1T33, they sailed from
Copenhagen, and on the '20th of the next month
they reached the place of their destination,
having had a safe and speedy passage.
They soon fixed upon a place, to which they
afterwards gave tlie name of New Ilcrrnlnii,
and here they kneeled d(jwn and invoked the
blessing of Cod on themselves and their under-
taking. Their first labor was to erect a small
but, 08 a shelter against the inclemency of the
climate. A few ihiys after they laid the foun-
dations of their projx-r dwelling, for which tluy
bad brought the timber with thini from Copen-
hagen. The season was rtniarkuldy in their
favor, the ice and snow having nidti d a month
sooner than usual. IJesides their own house
they built one after tlie Creenland manner, for
the accommodation of such of the natives as
might be induced to come to them for instruc-
tion. During the fii-st year of their residence
in Creenland thesmall-|)ox iirevailed tua fright-
ful extent, during which the l)retlir(n e.verted
thcm.selves much fur the relief of the sick and
dying, till at length thty were violently attack-
ed themselvc-s, and nearly lost the u.se of their
limbs. Having thus pa.ssed their first year,
they were strengthened »nn onrouragea m 17^4,
by the arrival of two bretliren.'Bcck and
Boeuislj, who came iu the character of as»ist-
aotiu
They now resolved to pursue their work with
redoubled ardor, and applied themselves to the
study of the language with unremitting dili-
geuco. Unu.sed though they were to gramnuirs
of any kind, they soon con«iuercd the greatest
dinitulti.ti, ho as to be able to hold a .'^hort
coiiv.r.-atiin, Willi the natives. They also ol)-
tained sonu- copies of pieces which Mr. Kgcdc,
the Danish nii«.>.ioi)ary, had translated, such as
tlie Ten ("..nunandnicnt.H, thi; Aposik-s' Creed,
aud the I>urd a I'ruyer, uud euj braced every
opportunity of reading these to the Greenland
ers, with instructions suited to make au im-
pression on their hearts. By these means they
conciliated the esteem of the natives, who often
visited them, though not without asking for
some article that struck their fancy, showing
that they were actuated by selfish motives.
In 173;") some ships arrived from Europe, but
without bringing them sujiplies of any descrip-
tion. They were therefore reduced to great
distress, as their whole stock of provisions con-
sisted of a barrel aud a half of oatmeal. They
had been less successful than usual iu hunting
and fishing, and on attempting to buy seals of
the natives, the most exorbitant prices were
asked, and in some cases they refused to sell at
all. But in the .spring of 173G an unexpected
sup])ly of provisions was sent to them from
Iloliaud, and by a person from whom no aid
had ever been solicited. The same individual
promised them other supplies for the ensuing
season.
In July, 173G, some Dani.'^h ships arrived,
bringing with them the mother of Matthew
Stacli, a widow about forty-five years of age,
with her two daughters, Kosina and Anna, tlie
former twenty-two, and the latter twelve years
of age. 'J'heir domestic alTairs were now con-
fided to female hands ; and the two younger
V)eing desirous of acting as missionaries among
their own sex, applied themselves .sedulously
and successfully to the study of the Greenland
language.
Their temporal circumstances were now more
comfortable, but they were severely tried with
the character and conduct of the savages, who
seldom visited them except in (juest of victuals,
and who were strongly aver.sc to religious con-
versation. If a missionary remained with them
more than one night, they employed every
means to draw him into their dissolute prac-
tices, and, failing in this, they endcavond to
provoke him l»y mimicking his reading, pray-
ing, and singing, or by interrupting tla-se exer-
cises with frightful howling and the deafening
noise of drums. On some occlusions they even
jiclted the brethren Avitli stones, destroyed their
goods, strove to drive their boat out to sea,
and even threuteiied to a.ssassiiiate them in
their tent. In the midst of all thise dangers,
however, they were mercifully pri-.scrved.
TlniH five years ])a.>ssed away, and the breth-
ren witnes.scd no ainding Iruils of their self-
denying labor. 'I'liey hud tilled a soil ajipar-
ently unfit for culture, and in "tears had sowa
the seed on hearts apparently sus banxii as tho
coast where they had pitched their Iciita. But
now the Lord wits about to bless their work iu
a new and peculiar manner.
" I n .1 line, 1 738," write the missionaries," many
Southlanders,or jieople from the.south of (jreeu-
land, visited u.**. Brother Beck wiu< at this time
translating a fnirt of St. .Mattluw's Gospel. The
heathen l)cing very curious to know the cou-
Icuts of the book, lie read a few bcuteuces, aud
I
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND.
601
after some conversation witli them, asked
wlietber they had au immortal soul, aud where
that soul would go after death. Some said,
" Up youder." Others said, " Down to the
abj'ss." Having" rectified their notions on this
point, he inquired, " "Who made heaven aud
earth, man, and all other things?" They re-
plied that they did not know, nor had they
ever heard, but that it must certainly bo some
great and mighty being. Ho then gave them
an account of tlie creation of the world, the
fall of man, and his recovery by Christ. In
speaking of the redemption of man, the Spirit
of God enabled him to enlarge with more than
usual energy, on the sufiferings and death of
the Redeemer, and in the most pathetic manner
to exhort his hearers to consider the vast ex-
pense at which Jesus had ransomed their souls,
and no longer reject the mercy offered them in
the Gospel. He then read to them out of the
New Testament the history of our Saviour's
agony in the garden.
Upon this the Lord opened the heart of one
of the company, whose name was Kayarnak,
who, stepping up to the table in an earnest
manner, exclaimed : " How was that ? tell me
that once more, for I do desire to be saved."
These Avords, the like of which had never be-
fore been uttered by a Greeulander, so pene-
trated the soul of Mr. Beck, that with great
emotion aud enlargement of heart, he gave
them a general account of the life and death
of our Saviour, aud of the scheme of salvation
through him.
In the mean time the other missionaries who
had been abroad on business, returned, and
with delight joined their fellow-laborers in tes-
til'ying of the grace of God in the blood of
Jesus Christ. Some of the pagans laid their
hands on their mouths, which is their usual cus-
tom when struck with astonishment. Others,
who did not relish the subject, slunk aw-ay
secretly, but several requested to be taught to
pray, aud frequently repeated the expressions
used by the missionaries, in order .to fix them
in their memories. In short, they manifested
Buch an earnest and serious concern for their
salvation, as the missionaries had never wit-
nessed before, and at going away they promis-
ed soon to return, and hear more of this sub-
ject. They also promised to tell it to their
countrymen.
The impression made on Kayarnak was
not transient, for the word had taken deep
root in his heart. He frequently visited the
missionaries, and at length took up his resi-
dence with them. He told them that he often
felt a monition in his heart to pray, and when
they spoke to him he was often so much affect-
ed, that the tears rolled down his cheeks.
Considering the general stupidity of the
Greenlanders, the missionaries were not a lit-
^ surprised at the quickness with which he
comprehended every thing which they told
him, and at the retention of his memory. He
manifested very strong attachment to them,
and a constant desire for further instruction.
By means of his conversion, those who lived
in the same tent with him were ])rought under
conviction. Thus before the end of the month
three large families came with all their i)ro-
perty, and pitched their tents near the dwell-
ing of the missionaries, •' in order," as they
said, " to hear the joyful news of man's re-
demption." They all appeared much affected,
and even some who had formerly opposed the
word, declared that they wou^d now believe,
and winter with the missionaries. Most of
them, however, soon went away to hunt rein-
deer, but Kayarnak refused to accompany them,
lest therel)y harm should come to his soul. If
enticed to go away, he would reply by some
short remark, such as " I will stay with my
teachers and hear the word of God, which I
have once found sweet to my taste." If they
railed at him he held his peace, after he had
borne his testimony to the truth in a few
serious words. At length he prevailed so far
on some of his nearest relatives, that they re-
solved to return, and even some other familieg
desired leave to settle near the missionaries.
Thus, in October, 1738, when the Greco-
landers left their tents to move into their win-
ter houses, above twenty persons took up their
abode near the brethren. This induced them
to commence morning aud evening devotions,
with the two families of Kayarnak, and his
relation Simek, besides the reading and ex-
pounding of the Scriptures on the Lord's day.
Five of these persons, who appeared most
serious, they selected, as suitable candidates
for baptism, and gave them more frequent in-
struction in the truths of salvation.
The year 1739 was distinguished in the mis-
sion, by the baptism of the first Greenland
converts. This interesting and solemn service
was performed on Stuiday, March 29th. The
candidates having, before the whole assembly,
given a full account of the ground of their
hope, and promised to renounce all lieathen
customs and superstitions, to remain with their
teachers, and walk worthily of the Gospel ;
were in fervent prayer, and with imposition of
hands, commended to the grace of God, and
baptized in the name of the Father and of the
Son and of the Holy Ghost. The presence of
the Great Head of the Church was felt in the
most powerful manner during this transac-
tion ; the tears flowed in streams from the eyes
of those just baptized, and the spectators were
so overcome, that they earnestly desired to be
made partakers of the same grace. The first
fruits of the Greenland nation, who by this
rite were publicly ingrafted into the Christian
church, were Kayarnak, his wife, his sou and
his daughter.
Scarcely a month had elapsed before the
joy occasioned by this event was succeeded by
a dark cloud. The brother-in-law of Kayar-
nak, who also resided with the missionaries,
502
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND.
was murdered by a northern banditti ; and as
Kayarnak and bis surviving brother-in-law
were tlu'catoued with the same fate, the for-
mer resolved to retire with his family to the
Bouth. The missionaries were sorely tried
with the loss of these first converts, besides
having to bear the reproach, that thougli they
might baptize Greenland pagans, they could
never imbue them with Christianity, nor
•wean them from their roving habits. But
they trusted that the.^e events might be over-
ruled by the great Head of the Church, for
the furtherance of the Gospel ; and so it
proved ; for but a short time had elapsed,
when 21 boats filled with Southlandors arrived
at the mission station, with the intelligence
that they had met with Kayarnak and his
family, who had told them many wonderful
tilings of a religious nature, and had directed
them to apply to the brethren for more ample
and satisfactory instructions. Soon after this
event 9 families of the Greenlanders returned
to the vicinity of the missionary settlement.
The missionaries thus found occasion for
great thankfulness and encouragement ; but
amid all their rejoicings they sighed with un-
utterable grief over the a])sence of Kayarnak,
and could not venture to cherish the smallest
hope of his return. One day, however, while
they were attending the nuptial dinner of
Frederic Boenish and Anna Stach, he sudden-
ly entered their dwelling, after about a year's
absence, and on this occasion they had the sat-
isfaction to discover that not only had he re-
mained steadf\ist, but that he had brought with
him his brother and his family, to whom he
had communicated the glad news of salvation.
About the same time several other Greenland-
ers took up their aboile at Xew Ilerrnhut,
and gave unquestionable proofs that they were
the .subjects of serious and deep convictions ;
and in spite of the persecution of their coun-
trj-mcn, they continued steadfast, and rendered
many important services to the missionaries.
Early in 1741, Kayarnak was attacked with
a pleurisy, wliich soon jiiit an end to his earth-
ly labors. During his illness he exhibited the
utmost patience, and appeared alike regardless
of worldly concerns and of bodily sulferiugs.
Observing his relatives l)athed in tears, he
affectionately said, " Why do you weep on my
account? Arc you not aware that when be-
licve-s die they go to Jesus, and become par-
takers of everhustii>g joy ? As I was the iirst
of our nation who was converted by his grace.
lie has determined that T should be the first to
enter into his presence. Jle knows how to
provide for you in my absence, and if you
remain failhful to the end, we shall surely
meet again, and rejoice for ever before the
throne of (ind and the Lamb." These word^
comi»letc!y tramiuilized the minds of his wife
and brolhcr, who evinced the most pious re-
Bignation tu the bereavement which they were
ailleil to endure, and solicited the missionaries I
to bury him according to the rites of *3w
Christian religion, which request was compliecl
with, and he was bin-ied amid the most solemn
and impressive services.
From this time the missionaries found the
field of their labors gradually extending.
Wherever the new converts went in quest of
food, they proclaimed the riches of the grace
of Christ, and iuinil>ers were led to the Mora-
vian settlement, anxious to understand those
things more fully. One of the baptized Green-
landers informed the missionaries that he had
found his countrymen, many leagues to the
north, so anxious to be instructed in the things
of religion, that they urged him to spend a
whole night with them in conversation. Even
one of their augekoks, or necromancers, was
brought under such serious impressions, that he
wept almost incessantly during two days, and
asserted that he had dreamed he was in hell,
where he witnessed scenes which it would be
utterly impossible to describe. When this
general awakening began to subside, the ne-
cromancers circulated the most absurd and
ridiculous stories about the effects of the Chris-
tian religion ; but God frustrated these attacks
of the enemy, and the company of believers
increased ; so that at the close of 1748 no less
tlian 230 Greenlanders resided at Xew Ilerrn-
hut, of whom 35 had been baptized in the
course of that year.
In 1747, the brethren erected their first
church, the frame and boards of which had
been sent them by friends in Europe, and in
this house they frequently had the jilcasure of ^
addressing congregations of more_thau— 300""'^
persons. At the same time some conmiodious
storehouses were built, both for the brethren
and their converts ; and such excellent regula-
tions were adopted in the settlement, that the
believing Greenlanders not only subsisted com-
fortably, but were enabled to extend aid to
others in times of .scarcity.
'J'he winter of 1752, and also the winter fol-
lowing, were rendered extremely trying by the
dreadful intensity of the cold, which made it
nearly impo,-;sible to obtain food, and threat-
ened a general famine ; and to this was added
a contagions distenq)er, introduced by some
Dutch vessels. It carried off great numbers
of the inhal)itants, and no less than 35 of the
converts fell victims to this terrible malady.
But these trials furnished to the missionarie.9
the most pleasing evidence of the sincerity of
the l)aptized (ireenlanders, wln> sought in
every way to relieve the distressed, even when
suffering th(>mselves. and who were I'uabled to
meet death with great peace and composure,
" knowinir in whom they had believed."
Jn 17.5H, the ccmgregation at New Ilerrn-
hut havint,' become mimerous, the missionaries
felt anxi«Vus to establish a new settlement,
more contiguous to the Southlanders. many^
whom had repeatedly .solicite<l them to coiW
and reside iu their part of the country. Oa
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND.
503
hearing of this, Matthew Stach, one of the
first founders of the Greenland mission, but
who was now in Europe, resolved on resuming
his labors in the proposed new field. Accord-
ingly, in May, 1758, he set sail with two as-
sistant brethren, and arrived at New Hernn-
hut in safety. After resting a few weeks,
these three brethren, with four Greenland fam-
ilies, proceeded in search of a situation for a
new settlement ; and after carefully exploring
that part of the country to which their atten-
tion had been directed, they fixed upon an
island about three miles from the main ocean,
and at an equal distance from the Danish fac-
tory at Fisher's Bay. This spot did not afibrd
such a prospect of the sea as they could desire,
but it possessed three advantages of great im-
portance, viz., fresh water, which is never
entirely frozen over, a secure harbor for their
boats, and a strand which remains open the
whole year. Here, therefore, they pitched
their tents, and called the place Lichtenfels.
Owing to the scarcity of building materials,
they were likely to suffer, if not to perish, for
want of shelter, when, by a most remarkable
providence, beams suitable for their purpose
were drifted on to the shore.
In 17G0, the brethren at Lichtenfels bap-
tized the first heathen family at that place,
consisting of a man and his wife, with their son
and daughter ; and the congregation was now
rapidly increasing. The next year they ob-
tained a supply of building materials from
Europe, and erected a commodious mission
house and a spacious church, in which their
numerous hearers could be accommodated.
At New Herrnhut, in the mean time, the cause
of Christ prospered, and between 30 and 40
persons were annually admitted to the church
by baptism.
So remarkably had the lives and health of
the Moravian brethren been preserved, that
the original founders of the mission still
labored with undiminished energy and zeal,
having been almost 30 years in the field. But
in 1763, the mission sustained a severe loss in
the death of Frederick Boenish, who died at
the age of 54, after 29 years of toil on the
dreary coast of Greenland. In the winter of
1768, an aged angekok (sorcerer,) who had
often heard the Gospel, became alarmed about
his future state, renounced his mode of life,
confessed that he and the other angekoks had
deceived the people, and not only exhorted
them to repent and turn to God, but sent mes-
sengers to the brethren at New Herrnhut with
an earnest solicitation that a missionary might
be sent to instruct them in the truths of the
Gospel. The request was complied with ; and
so extensive was the awakening that took place
among the natives, that in little more than
twelve months two hundred were admitted into
j{?the church by baptism, at the two settlements
of New Herrnhut and Lichtenfels.
In 1773, Christopher Michael Koenigseer
arrived in Greenland as superintendent of the
mission in that country. Having received the
advantages of a liberal education, he was well
qualified to correct the translations of his pre-
decessors ; and he added to their little stock a
Greenland hymn-book, a catechism, and some
other pieces of a devotional nature.
In 1774, two of the brethren sailed from
Lichtenfels, in order to form a third settlement
in the south of Greenland. After a voyage of
about six weeks, they arrived at the island of
Onartok, where they were surprised to find, at
the mouth of a warm spring, a A'erdant mea-
dow, abounding with different kinds of flow-
ers. But it was not a good place for obtain-
ing provisions, and they fixed upon a spot a
little distant, four miles from Lichtenfels, to
which they gave the name of Lichtenau. Here
they found an extensive field for their exer-
tions, and their labors were crowned with the
most pleasing success. Even at first consider-
able numbers of the heathen flocked to hear
them preach, so that they were frequently
obliged to worship in the open air, previous to
the erection of a church ; and during the win-
ter of 1775 nearly 200 persons took up their
abode with them. Many of these were bap-
tized at the end of a few months, and in a few
years the believing Greenlanders at Lichtenau
exceeded in number those at either of the
other settlements.
In 1782 Greenland was visited by a pesti-
lence more fatal than that before noticed, and
within a fev/ months the deaths at New Herrn-
hut amounted to 180. The disease broke
out later at Lichtenfels and Lichtenau, but it
was equally fatal. Among the heathen Green-
landers the mortality was still more frightful ;
so that the country lost by this visitation
nearly half its inhabitants.
About the same time the directors of the
Greenland Trading Company issued a man-
date, enjoining that fewer Greenlanders should
reside together in settlements. This led to a
partial dispersion of the Converts, compelling
tlieni to fix their abodes ten or twelve miles
from the missionaries, by which means they were
deprived of regular instructions. But it was
soon resolved that a native assistant should
accompany each party, and by this means, and
frequent visits from the missionaries, their
spiritual wants were in a measure provided
for. •
In 1801, so great had been the success of"
the missionaries, the people on the western
coast of Greenland had nearly all embraced
Christianity, and of the women, the last one
that remained in heathenism was baptized in:
January of this year. During many years fol-
lowing the above date the general course of"
things at the settlements was prosperous, al-
though great trials were at times endured,
both from sickness and the want of necessary
food. Particularly in 1807, the war betweea
Great Britain and Denmark interrupted com-
50i
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND.
munication, and supplies from Europe were
entirely cut off. The utmost distress followed,
and many died of hunger. It was not until
1811 that the British government permitted
the Panes to send vessels with provisions to
Greenland.
In a letter, written July 1818, the excellent
Mr. Beck, of Lichtcnau, says, " Of the great-
est part of our congregation, we may say with
confidence, that their words and walk give us
great joy and encouragement. Many of the
excluded persons have been led, with weei^ing
and supplication, to confess the error of their
ways, and to return to the fold ; and those
who remain faithful have been preserved in
the conviction, that real happiness and rest
are only to ))e found in Jesus." In the same
year Mr. Beck wrote another letter, in which
were stated the following interesting particu-
lars : " The Southlanders, or those Green-
landers who reside south of Cape Farewell,
though not quite wild, are ignorant of .the
things of God, and in reality a heathen race.
There is another description of heathen who
live on this side of Cape Farewell, and fre-
quently join our people at the out-stations.
These have acquired some knowledge of the
truth, and have abandoned their gross heathen-
ish practices."
The year 1823 was rendered remarkable, by
the printing and circulation of the first com-
plete New Testament in the Greenland lan-
guage. The translation was completed in
1821, and sent to England, to be printed by
the British and Foreign Bible Society. The
manuscri])t was accompanied with a note,
saying, " The Society will judge for themselves
of the number of copies whicli will be Avanted,
when they are informed that the three congre-
gations under the care of the brethren in Green-
land consist of 1278 persons, viz., 350 at New
Hcrrnhut, 331 at Lichteufels, and 588 at Lich-
tenau."
In 1 824, a new Moravian settlement was
formed at the most southern extremity of
Greenland, at a place called by the mission-
aries Fredericksthal. Building materials soon
arrived, and a house and chapel were put up,
and the people seemed anxious for religious in-
struction ; and within a year twelve persons
were admitted as candidates f(;r baptism. A
missionary at this place writes, under date
Oct. 1825, " Fifty pcrsQjis have returned hither
from Lichtcnau, and have l)ecn joined by about
200 heathen fmm this n-'igliborhood ; so that
there are not fur from 250 Greenlandcrs living
here. 'I'liis is, indeed, a most encouraging be-
ginning, and our little chii])cl is already much
too small. On the 19th of Doc. last, furty can-
didates were baptized, and during the winter
many more were admitted to tiie same privi-
lege. Since our arrival here in June 1824,
104 hcatliens have been baptized."
Having readied the period when the four
Moravian settlemonla iu Greenland were in
successful operation, their subsequent history
must be noticed more briefly. The charac-
teristic zeal and earnest piety of these brethren
have never been known to abate, and from
year to year they have met with a degree of
encouragement most cheering to their own
hearts, and blessed iu its results to the people
for whose spiritual good they have toiled
through more than 120 years.
_ One of the severest trials which these mis-
sionaries have had to endure, has been the
repeated and long continued interference of
the Danish government, forbidding the con-
verted Greenlauders to dwell in communities
near the Moravian settlements. It has been
impossible in these circumstances to watch
over and instruct them in a proper manner,
for since the converts have increased and
spread over a wider surface, the missionaries
and their assistants have not been numerous
enough to follow them into the various and
often distant places, where they have been
compelled to reside. Still, it is a remarkable
and most gratifying fact, that the converts
have generally been steadfast, and that apos-
tacies have been of comparatively rare occur-
rence.
The injurious and dishonorable conduct of
the government, to which they are prompted
by commercial cupidity and national jealousy,
has led the Moravian brethren to consider the
importance of raising up native teachers, who,
on giving evidence of piety, might act as assist-
ant missionaries in the districts to which the
converted natives are driven.
Accordingly iu 1851 a school was established
at Kew Herrnhut, for training native assistr
ants, and strong hopes are entertained that
this will in a measure repair the evils which an
unrighteous course of legislation has produced.
In their journal for 1852, the missionaries em-
ploy the following language of hope and
cheerfulness : —
" However we may deplore the circum-
stances referred to, (the dispersion) we will
not lose courage nor quit our post, but m'o will
trust in the help of the Lord. Nor will we be
too much disheartened by the order lately re-
ceived from the Board of Trade, in Denmark,
to liaptize and receive no more heathen, but
to direct them to the Danish mission. This
proposition, however indicative of an unfriend-
ly spirit, has reference chiefly to Fredericks-
thai, the most southern of our stations, since
heathen (probaldy descendants of the ancient
Normans) arc found in any considerable num-
ber, only on the east coast, a coast almost in-
acce.ssi))le to us on account of the ice. From
that quarter the congregation at Fredericks-
thai has hitherto had a considerable increase,
while such as came only on a visit, and could
not remain, took with them what tlicy had
heard, and assisted in si)reading the Gospel."
In July, 1852, on the occasion of administer-
ing the sacrament of the Lord's Supper at
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND.
505
Liclitenau, so many of the out-dwellers came
together for the enjoyment of this sacred sea-
sou, that the number of communicants amount-
ed to 237.
The present state of the mission, at the four
Moravian settlements in Greenland, will ai>
pear from the following
TABULAR YIEW.
SETTLEaCENTS.
New Herrnhut
Licht«nfels . . . .
Lichtenau
Fredericsthal..
Totals
1733
1758
1774
1824
202
161
268
211
423
382
703
493
12 842 2001
Labrador.— On the 17th of May, 1752,
four Moravian brethren sailed from Lon-
don for Labrador, and on their arrival in a
fine bay, the same year, they fixed upon a spot
which they intended should be the place of
their future settlement. But after the lapse of
a few weeks the vessel proceeded farther to the
northward, with the design of ojiening a com-
mercial intercourse with the natives of the
coast ; and as the Esquimaux were fearful of
venturing on board on account of the guns, a
company of five mariners went among them in
an unarmed boat, accompanied by Christian
Erhardt, a member of the Moravian church,
who, in his voyages to Greenland had obtained
some knowledge of the language, and sup-
posed he could make himself understood on the
present occasion. But neither Erhardt nor
his companions ever returned ; and as the
captain had no means of sending in search of
them, he made his way back to the mission-
aries, whom he had left behind, and requested
their assistance in working the ship back to
Europe. As the best of his men had been
lost, and there was no other method of accom-
plishing the voyage, they acceded to his re-
quest, and thus the mission was for a time
abandoned.
In the spring of 1764, Jens Haven, who had
previously labored as a missionary in Green-
laud, sailQd from England, with the hope of
conveying the blessings of the Gospel to tlie
inhabitants of Labrador. He did not how-
ever proceed farther than Newfoundland,
though he found there some Esquimaux chiefs,
whom he addressed in language which they
could perfectly understand.
In May, 1765, Jens Haven sailed again for
Labrador, taking with him 0. L. Drachart,
formerly one of the Danish missionaries in
Greenland, and two other brethren. They
now penetrated farther into the interior of the
country, and on their return to the coast they
had an opportunity of addressing several hun-
dreds of the natives, who seemed to listen with
interest to the truths of the Gospel. As to
the doctrine of depravity, hoM^ever, they
thought it might be true in respect to foreign-
ers, but not in respect to themselves. No per-
manent settlement was made at this time, al-
though land was purchased of the natives for
that purpose.
In 17G9, George IIL presented 100,000
acres of land to the Moravian brethren, to aid
them in commencing a mission on the coast of
Labrador. A society was also formed in
England the same year, in furtherance of this
object. In May, 1770, the indefatigable Jens
Haven, taking with him nine brethren, sailed
again for Labrador, further to explore the
coast, and if possible fix on a place for a settle-
ment. They purchased a piece of land of the
natives for that purpose, and returned again to
England to make preparations for entering
upon their work. Accordingly in the spring
of 1771, a company of 14 persons, under the
direction of Mr. Haven, proceeded to Labra-
dor, and took possession of the spot formerly
purchased, and gave it the name of
Nahi. — This place is on the east coast of
Labrador, in N. lat. 55°, and is so intensely
cold in winter, that rum placed in the open
air freezes like water, and rectified spirits in a
short time become as thick as oil. The breth-
ren at once commenced the erection of a
mission-house, the frame and materials for
which they had brought with them from Eng-
land, and by great exertions it was completed
before the setting in of winter. They could,
however, obtain but few of the necessaries of
life ; and as much delay was experienced in
getting supplies from England, they began to
look forward to all the distresses of a famine.
But in season to prevent this extremity, and
at a moment when they had only two pieces
of meat and a few berries left, a vessel arrived
from England, bringing the needed relief.
The conduct of the Esquimaux towards the
missionaries was uniformly friendly, from their
first arrival. In former times, no European
could have passed a night among these sav-
ages without hazarding'hisi life ; but now the
missionaries, regardless of the inclemency of
the season, traveled across the ice and snow to
visit them in their winter houses, and were
hospitably entertained for several days and
nights together. These visits were often re-
turned ; and in consequence of the friendly in-
tercourse thus opened, the natives not only
asked the advice of the brethren in all difiBcult
cases, but even chose them as umpires in their
disputes, and invariably submitted to their ar-
bitration. They were also in a mood to listen
with attention to the preaching of the Word,
and at times they seemed to be deeply im-
pressed ; still they were savages, habituated to
the gratification of the most brutal passions, and
always ready with some excuse for their sins.
606
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND.
In 1752, a year after the settlement of the
mission, a native named Anauke, was induced
to attend npon the instructions of the mission-
aries, and altiiough he had been a ferocious and
desperate character, he was so much impressed
that lie came and pitched his tent near the
mission house. lie removed to his winter
house after a few months, but his anxiety con-
tinued, and he visited the missionaries again,
and spent a few days with them, desiring fur-
ther instruction. From this time the brethren
beard nothing of him for more than a year,
when his wife came to Nain and stated that An-
auke had died, calling on the name of the Lord
Jesus. From the time that he was seized with
his last sickness he prayed fervently, and ex-
pressly stated that he had no wish to live, but
desired to depart that he might be with Christ.
He would not permit one of the necromancers,
called Angekoks, to come near him, but com-
mitted himself unreservedly into the hands of
the great Fliysician. After his decease, this
person was invariably spoken of by the natives
as " the man whom the Saviour took to him-
self" As many of the heathen residing in the
vicinity of Nain appeared remarkably atten-
tive to the Gospel, and expressed the most
profound reverence for the name of Jesus, the
brethren resolved to select a few of the most
serious, and form them into a cUiss of catechu-
mens, in order to prepare them for baptism,
and ultimately for helpers in the missionary
work. At the same time they resolved upon
tlic erection of a chapel, capable of containing
some hundreds of persons, as the apartment in
the mission house had become too small to
contain the congregation.
OJckak. — In the summer of 177.5 two of the
missionaries, Messrs. Iluven and Jensen, set
out with the design of commencing a new set-
tlement at a place called Okkak, aljout a hun-
dred and Ofty miles north of Nain. They
found it to be an eligible spot for a mission,
being abundantly furnished with wood and
fresh water, contiguous to an excellent haven,
and surrounded by a numerous population of
heathen. 'J'hey therefore purchased the land
of the natives, and in the spring of 1776 the
missionaries took up their residence here and
began to preach the glad tidings of salvation to
tlic natives. They met with little success at
first, but at the end of three years they had
baptized ."58 of the natives, besides ten others,
who, as catechumens, were receiving particular
instruction.
llopcthtk. — In 1782 the brethren proceeded to
form a third settlement, at a place called Hope-
dale, sonic distance to the south of Nain. 'J'liis
was the place reconnoitered liy Krliardt and
his compiinions in 1852, but who, instead of
aceoinplishiiig their wishes, were inhumanly
murdered by the Indians. For several years
the l)retliren at this place met with little en-
courngemciit, and were inclined to give over
the enterprise, when at length the word took
I effect, and Hopedale became the scene of an
awakening which extended to the other settle-
ments, and constrained the missionaries to ex-
claim. " AVhat hath God wrought ? "
In 1790 an epidemic broke out in Labrador,
and raged for several months with great sever-
ity, carrying off a great number of the natives.
It was a source of great trial to the brethren,
that some of the converts, even under this ca-
lamity, resorted to their old heathenish prac-
tices for the purpose of averting the disease.
Most of them, however, were soon convinced
of their folly and sin, and returned to the mis-
sionaries with the most humble confessions.
Tlie month of December, 1800, was made
painfully memorable by the death of a devoted
brother at the Hopedale station, Eev. J. W.
Reiman. He went out one morning with the
design of procuring some fresh provisions, by
shooting, and was never afterwards seen or
heard of, although immediate and long-contin-
ued search was made for him.
At the commencement of 180-4 the mission-
aries at the several stations in Labrador were
much disheartened on account of the little suc-
cess that attended their labors. It had long
been a sulyect of regret, that the instructions
given to the Esquimaux during the winter,
when they resided near the settlements, were
forgotten during the summer excursions, when
they associated with their heathen countrymen,
and relapsed into many of their old practices.
In the spring of this year, however, the breth-
ren were gratified to find that the converts had
been preserved from falling into sin and had
also made important advances in knowledge
and humility. They appeared unusually se-
rious, and a peculiar unction attended their
conversation and prayers, and many who liad
before shown only an outward respect for reli-
gion were awakened, and led earnestly to in-
quire for the way of salvation. Tiie religious
interest, or revival, thus commenced at Hope-
dale, soon began to manifest itself at Nain,
where it was specially promoted by the remark-
able conversion of a young man named Siksi-
gak ; his wife had been converted, and he had
formed the purpose of putting her away and
marrying another who was friendly to his
superstition!?. Arriving at the hou.se of his
mother, who had also become a Christian, just
at the season of the evening devotion, he was
nnich struck with Mhat lie saw and heard, but
still nothing could dissuade him from abandon-
ing his wife. The next day a special prayer-
meeting was held for his conversion, during
which his mother besought the liOrd in a .sjiirit
of great earnestness, for the conversion and
salvation of her son. Almost immediately
upon this the young man became convinced of
the error of h'ls ways, and was subdued under
the ])ower of the "(ioijpel. He exhibited an
entire change of spirit and conduct, and boldly
proclaimed to his companions at Nain the
preciousness of that word which had proved
LAEPvADOR AND GREENLAND.
507
the power of God to his soul. Many others
were astonished at this change, and led to con-
fess their sins with penitential tears. The in-
telligence of these things reached Okkak, and
proved the means of a similar awakening there.
Even many of the Esquimaux who resided far
north of Okkak, but who occasionally passed
that way, were struck with astonishment at
what they saw and heard, and were led to come
and settle near the missionaries. This work
of grace continued several years, bringing in
many of the children, as well as the ad^ult" na-
tives.
Early in the summer of 1811 two of the mis-
sionaries undertook the perilous task of explor-
ing the northern coast, with a view to the
formation of a settlement in that quarter.
They embarked in a two masted shallop, owned
by one of the converts, named Jonathan, who,
though a chief of his nation at Hopedale,
readily engaged in the arduous service. He
was a man of superior understanding and great
courage, and when his countrymen rei^resented
to him the danger of his undertaking, he re-
plied, "When I hear people talk about the
danger of Ixnng killed, I recollect that the love
of Jesus induced him to submit to death for
us ; and therefore it would be no great matter
if we were to lose our lives in his service,
should that be his pleasure concerning us.'"
They proceeded with great difficulty and peril,
through regions of ice, to the desert regions
west of Cape Chudleigh, where they discovered
two places suitable for a missionary settlement.
One of these was a verdant spot, overgrown
with shrubs, near the mouth of a river, to which
they gave the name of George's river, in honor
of his Britannic majesty ; and the other was sit-
uated in what they called Unity Bay, near the
estuary of the Koksoak, or Sand river, which
is nearly seven hundred miles distant from Ok-
kak. They found the land level and dry, wat-
ered by several rivulets, and producing a vari-
ety of trees, plants,' and flowers. The natives
in this region had never before seen a Euro-
pean, and were at first rather reserved, but
after receiving a few trifling presents they be-
came familiar, and not onlylistened attentively
to what their visitors had to sav, but expressed
a strong desire to have them settle there. After '
exploring the surrounding country sufiBcientlv,
the party started on their return, and reached
Okkak in October, having been absent about
five months, and performed a voyage of between
twelve and thirteen hundred m'iles. Xo settle-
ment, however, has yet been formed in that
region.
On the 9th of August, 1820, the missionaries
at Nain had the satisfaction of seeing the new
ship, called the Harmony, come to anchor in
their bay, just fifty years' after the first vessel
arrived there with fourteen brethren and sis-
ters on board. They expressed their joy by
hoisting two small flags, and a white one on
which some of the sisters had formed the num-
I ber 50 with a red ribbon, and surrounded it
I with a wreath of laurel. Their small cannons
j were also discharged and answered by the guns
of the ship, and the Esquimaux fired their mus-
1 kets as long as their powder lasted. Some
j tunes expressive of thanksgiving were also
played on wind instruments, which, altogether,
made a suitable impression on the minds of the
converts, and gave them some idea of a jubilee
rejoicing. The missionaries explained to them
the whole thing, and after listening with pro-
found attention they exclaimed, •• Yes ; Jesus
is worthy of thanks I Jesus is worthy of thanks,
indeed I "
In further noticing this joyful occasion, the
missionaries say, "In the public services of
the day, a spirit of joy and thanksgiving pre-
vailed throughout the whole congregation, and
the baptism of two adults tended greatly to
solemnize the festival. AVe praised the Lord
with heart and voice for all the wonders he
had wrought in behalf of the mission in Lab-
rador, during half a century ; in which he had
led, i^reserved, and blessed us abundantly.
His mighty arm had protected us in many
dangers, and the preaching of his cross had
been attended with power and with the demon-
stration of his own Spirit, so that many souls
had thereby been brought into his kin'gdom.
An account of the commencement of the mis-
sion, translated into the Esquimaux language,
was communicated to the congregation, and
heard with great attention and astonishment.
They were indeed surprised at the recital of
what had been done for so many years, with a
view to their benefit."
The jubilee of the mission was also cele-
brated in the other settlements with due solem-
nity, and many of the Esquimaux afterwards
testified that it had been a most important and
blessed season to their souls ; as they had been
led to consider more seriously than ever before,
what great things the Lord had done for them,
in making them acquainted with himself and
his glorious salvation.
About this time,- portions of the Xew Tes-
tament were translated and printed in the Es-
quimaux language, a work from which very
important _ benefits appear to have resulted.
The following particulars have been given, in
illustration of the gratitude which was excited
in the minds of the natives, by the kind and
repeated donations of the British and Foreign
Bible Society. " Several of our Esquimaux
at Xain, having been informed of the nature
and aim of the Bible Society, began, of their
own accord, to collect seal's' blubber, by way
of making up a small contribution towards the
expenses of that society. Some brought whole
seals, or half a seal, or pieces, according to
their ability. Others brought portions of
blubber in the name of their children, request-
ing, with the most affecting expressions, that
their little offerings might be accepted. Hav-
ing been told that in some parts of the world,
608
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND.
converts from among the heathen, who were
poorer than they, had cheerfully contributed
their mite towards the furtherauce of the Gos-
pel, they exclaimed, " How long have wc heard
the pleasant and comfortable words respecting
Jesus Chrijjt, our Saviour, and how many books
have we received treating of him, and yet we
have never known or considered Avhence they
came. "We have, indeed, sometimes observed
among ourselves, that so many books freely
bestowed upon us must cost a great deal some-
where ; but we never knew till now that even
poor people have contributed their little sums
for our instruction and comfort. "We are in-
deed poor, yet we may occasionally bring
Eome blubber, that others who are as ignorant
as we were formerly, may receive the same
Gospel which has been so sweet to our souls,
and may thereby be taught to find the way to
Jesus." " By these spontaneous declarations,''
says tl:e missionary, '• a great impression was
made upon our people. Each would bring
something, when they heard how desirous other
nations were to hear the word of God ; and
they now begged me to send their contribu-
tions to those generous friends who printed the
.Sciiptures for them, that more heathen might
be presented with a book so much more i^re-
cioHS than any thing else in the world."
A letter written at Xain, August 10, 1823,
says, " Many are the instances which we might
adduce as i)roofs, that the word of the cross is
indeed the power of God unto salvation to all
them that hear and believe." Having related
many striking facts, he added, " During the
la.st winter we perceived with great gratitude
the traces of renewed spiritual life among our
dear Esquimaux. The schools and daily wor-
ship are well attended, the scholars show an
eagerness to learn, and at the examination they
all affurded us much pleasure. During the
last year three adults and seven children were
baptized ; five were admitted to the Lord's
Supper ; four were received into the congrega-
tion, and one departed this life. The number
of inhabitants in this settlement ut present
is 181."
Letters of equal encouragement were written
from the other settlements during the same
year. The number of inhabitants at Okkak,
in 1830, was estimated by the missionaries at
385, of whom 314 were memliers of the con-
gregation. The population at Hopedale, at
the same date, consisted of 179 pirsons, of
wiiom .')G were communicants, 7 candidates fur
admission to the Lord's table, 21 baptized, but
n(4 yet conununieants, and 80 children.
Ill ]H2'J, the congregations in Hopedale and
Jsani were visiUd ])y a malignant disorder,
whicii carried ofl" great numbers of the society.
In four weeks upwards of 150 lay ill at Nain,
and their situation was dejiloraljle indeed. In
niany of the tents all the families lav in a help-
less state, nor could any one give the other so
much as a drop of water. " Our greateat com-
fort," says a missionary at this time, " was the
state of mind of those who departed this life:
They all declared that they rejoiced at the
prospect of soon seeing Him, face to face, who,
l)y'his sufferings and death, had redeemed
them from the power of sin and the fear of the
grave."
Hebron. — In 1830 a fourth settlement was
formed at a place called Hebron, about 90
miles porth of Okkak. It is the most northern
station on the coast of Labrador. During this
year 500 copies of the Psalms were distributed
at the several stations.
- One of the sorest trials which the mission-
aries at this period, and subsequently, had to
endure, was the influence exerted on the natives
by the Southland traders. By mingling in
the society of these uuprinci})led and mercenary
men, the converts were many of them seduced
into vicious practices, and led far away from
the simplicity of the Gospel. Some of them
returned again with penitent confessions, but
the pernioious example of these traders has had
a sensiljle effect on the missions.
In 1837 the brethren completed the revisal
of the Esquimaux version of the prophetic
ScrijJtures, and sent it to England for publica-
tion.
The year 1848 was one of great joy and
thanksgiving to the brethren at Hebron ; for,
after years of earnest and apparently fruitless
effort, they had the satisfaction of seeing the
heathen coming to them, one after another,
till, in the course of a few weeks, 81 had found
their way to the settlement, raising the num-
ber of souls under the care of the brethren at
that place to 33G. During this year the Es-
quimaux version of the book of Proverbs was
forwarded to the Bible Society in England to
be printed.
"Within the last year or two, new explora-
tions have been made in the north of Labra-
dor, and considerable bodies of Esquimaux,
speaking a language easily understood, have
been found. But as yet no settlement has been
formed in that distant and dreary region.
In Laljrador, as in Greenland, missionary
operations have been attended Irom the first
with peculiar vicissitudes, both of a joyful and
a painful nature. This has resulted, in great
measure, from the severity of the climate,
which at intervals renders it nearly or quite
impossible to obtain food, subjecting the peo-
ple to all the horrors of famine, to wluch is
superadded ol'teu the ravages of pestilence.
But it has happened generally at such times,
that the missionaries have had stores from
l']urope, with which in some measure to relieve
the natives, and by this means, and a tender
and watchful care 'of the sick and the dying,
the brethren have secured the gratitude and
confidence of the people, and gained a more
ready access to their hearts and consciences.
It has ever been tun] must be a serious draw-
back on these missions also, that the congro-
LAC-QUI-PAELE— LEW-CHEW.
509
^tions are obliged to spend the warm months
away from the settlements, in quest of provi-
sions for the winter. They are thus deprived
of instructions, and subjected to many tempta-
tions. But as a mitigation of this evil it is to
be gratefully considered, that in their disper-
sion the converts often carry the news of a
Saviour to the heathen at a distance, and bring
in many to the settlements who otherwise
never would have heard of a missionary, or of
the way of salvation.
On the whole, therefore, while the trials of
the missionaries have been great and peculiar,
the results of missionary labor in those frozen
and inhospitable regions have been happy and
encouraging to a remarkable degree.
The present state of the missions at the four
stations in Labrador, is indicated in the fol-
lowinor
TABULAR
VIEW.
SETTLEMENTS.
"S
1
i
a
a
6
i
1
i
8
1
1
1771
1776
1782
1830
4
4
4
3
84
176
59
75
366
Okkak
410
234
347
Totals
15
394
1357
Ke
V. E.
D. Mo
OBB.
LAC-QUI-PARLE : Once a station of the
Am. Bonrd among the Sioux Indians.
LAGOS : A large, well-built, and populous
town, situated on a small island at the mouth
of a lagoon in the Bight of Benin, West Africa,
about 3G miles east of Badagry. It is accessi-
ble to vessels drawing ten or eleven feet of
water, and has a water communication far into
the interior, and for hundreds of miles along
the coast. It is a great commanding point,
from whence Christianity may go forth into
the interior. The coast station of the Yoruba
mission of the Church Missionary Society has
been removed from Badagry to Lagos.
LAHAINA : A town on the Island of
Maui (S. I.), which is rapidly increasing in
commercial importance. In the year 1844,
300 ships visited its harbor. — A station of the
American Board.
LAHAINALUNA : Upper Lahaina, a sta-
tion of the American Board in the Sandwich
Islands, on the north-east of Maui.
LAIIOR : The chief city of the Punjaub,
Northern India, a station of the Presbyterian
Board.
LA POINTE : A station of the American
Board among the Ojibwas.
LAUNCESTON : A station of the Wes-
leyan Missionary Society in Van Dieman's
Land.
LEFAASALBLEAGA : A station of the
London Missionary Society on the island of
Savaii, one of the Samoan group.
LEGUAN : A beautiful island in the
mouth of the Essequibo river, containing 23
sugar estates. A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society.
LEICESTER MOUNTAIN: Station of
the Church Missionary Society in the Moun-
tain District of Sierra Leone, South Africa,
about three miles from Freetown.
LEKATLONG: Station of the London
Missionary Society in South Africa, on the
Hart river, among a branch of the Batlapi
nation ; one missionary, 300 communicants.
LEONE : A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society on the island of Tutuila, one
of the Samoan group.
LEOPOLD : A town of liberated Africans
and station of the Church Missionary Society
in the parish of St..Peter, SieiTa Leone, W.
Africa, a little south of Freetown.
LEPA : A station of the Loudon Mis-
sionary Society, on the island of Upolu, one of
the Samoan group.
LETTY: One of the Banda Islands, a
group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi-
pelago.
LE ULUMAEGA : A station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society on the island of Upolu,
one of the Samoas.
LEW-CHEW, or LOO-CHOO : The king-
dom of Lew- Chew consists of the island bear-
ing this name, the various small islands lying
around it, with the entire Madjicosimah group
on the south-west, the whole number being 36.
The island of Lew-chew is about GO miles long
and from 12 to 15 wide ; and it is nearly equi-
distant from Japan and China. Coral I'eefs
line the shores ; and in some j^laces they seem
to have been thrown up by volcanic agency,
or to have been raised so as to form ledges
along the beach. The climate is one of the
most delightful and healthy in this region of
the world. The vegetation partakes more of
the tropics than the adjacent coasts of China.
Cities and Villages. — Napa, or Nafa, lies on
the river, the mouth of which is known as
Napa-kiang ; and it stretches inland from the
beach for more than a mile, most of the houses
being in view from the anchorage. Shui, or
Shudi, is the residence of the court, and is
prettily situated on the ridge and side of a hill,
about three miles from Napa, the two being
connected by a broad paved road, in some
places elevated above the marsh with great
labor. Shui is a well-built town ; and the
stream which runs down the hill, adds greatly
to its appearance. The waters are collected
into pools and tanks for the convenience of the
people, and its banks are connected by stone
bridges of great durability ; while the houses
are scattered along the steep sides, intermixed
with ledges of stone and trees in a most pictu-
resque manner. The palace is a collection of
large buildings, inclosed and defended by a
610
LEW-CHEW.
stone wall of great solidity. The buildings
thcmsclvc-s arc of an ordinary description ; bat
the flight.-) of stone steps, the ornamented tri-
une gateways, and the paved court-yards, with
detached trees and arbors, exhibit some skill.
1'he streets of Napa and Shui are partly
macadamized, with open gutters at their sides ;
some of them are wide enough for carriages.
The road between these two cities is well
paved ; but elsewhere the common highways
are rough, stony, and painful to the feet ; and
they seem to have had no mending since they
were made. The markets are held in the
squares and corners of the streets, and present
only a miserable assortment of the commonest
necessaries of life.
The villages are often prettily situated ; but
all of them exhibit proofs of the poverty and
ojipression of their iidiabitants.
Tlie People. — In stature.the natives of Lew-
chew are below their neighbors ; but they are
compactly built and well-proportioned. In
general the people are healthy, though their
countenances indicate the depressing effect of
unremitted labor. The serious aspect of the
Lew-chewans strikes a visitor as soon as he
lands, (iroups of women, with children around,
are seen along the highways. The M'rinkled,
grimmcd, and care-worn countenances of these
poor creatures offer a melancholy proof of their
toil and exposure, and the low position which
they hold in society.
The color of the Lew-chewans is a pleasing
reddish-olive tint, presenting a lighter or dark-
er shade, according to exposure. In general
however, it is darker than that of the Chinese
Product)) of the Soil. — The greatest part of
the i)oi)uIation is engaged in agriculture ; and
the lields .show abundant evidence of the un-
ceasing toil bestoweil upon them, in which the
women take a large share; but the productions
of Lew-chew arc less varied than those of
China or Japan. Timber and fuel are sup-
plied from the forests in the northern i)art of
the island, among which the camphor and tal-
low-tree arc found.
Dwellinrr^. — The arrangement of a Lcw-
chewan dwelling is very sinii)le, it being fitted
only for a warm climate, and so oi)en that in
the latitude of 2G^ north it must often prove
an indilK'rent .shelter. The roof is supported
l)y a duuble row of posts, on its sides, about
four feet apart ; and beams extend acro.ss to
assist in upholding the roof in the centre.
These beams and the rows of joists running
across, as well as the; inner of the two on the
outside, are provided with grooves, in which
panels slide, so as to form, when closed, the
Bides of the hou.se and the division of the rooms.
'J'he floor is elevated about two feet above the
ground ; and it is usually covered with stuffed
mats an inch thick, on which arc sometimes
spread felt carpets. The space between the
outside posts forms a porch, sheltered from the
rain. In unplnisant weather sa-shes, covered
w ith oiled or thin paper, are slid along the in-
side grooves, imperfectly supplying the place
of glass, and furnishing a twilight to the in-
mates, who warm themselves with braziers of
charcoal. The porch serves many purposes ;
and parts of it are partitioned off in the rear
of the houses ; so that the whole establishment
is under one roof, and can be thrown into one
room. No chairs or tables are seen in the
houses, all persons eating and sleeping upon
soft mats. A few low stands are used for
writing-desks. The mats and felted carpets
harbor an abundance of fleas ; and musquitoes
annoy the inmates. But houses of the better
sort are cleanly.
The houses are usually placed within inclo-
sures, the walls of which are six or seven feet
high, and surmounted with plants, completely,
concealing the house. The entrance to each
yard is usually at the end of a short lane run-
ning up from the street ; but no passer-by can
look within.
Dress. — The dress of the Lew-chewans con-
sists of loose robes, not unlike night-gowns,
apping over in front, and secured by a girdle.
The capacious bosom thus made is usually
pretty well tilled with a variety of papers,
books, and other articles, so as to give the
wearer a corpulent appearance. The feet are
protected by grass sandals, fastened by a strap
passing between the first and second toe. The
women are always modestly dressed. The men
wear two hair-pins of brass or w^hite copper to
secure their hair, which is done up in a coil
on the top of the head, with a bow above the
coil, through which the large pin is thrust.
Much time is daily spent in arranging and
oiling this trosseau. One of the pins has an
ornamental end, like a flower, nearly an iifch
broad, which always points forward. The
other is not much unlike a skewer, four or five
inches long, and thrust in sideways. Females
collect their hair in a knot on the side of the
head, where the ends are kept from lalling
over the shoulders by a skewer. All married
women tattoo or color the back of their hands
and fingers blue. Neither sex wear any head-
dress ; but official rank is denoted by an oblong
flat-topped cap, covered with red, yellow, pur-
ple or variegated silk, the last being the Inidge
of the highest. In rainy, or cold weather, an
overcoat of thick coltoii, forming a ct)mforta-
ble defence, is worn l)y the gentry.
Language. — The language of these islanders
is a dialect of the Japanese, differing so great-
ly, however, that the people of the two coun-
tries cannot very readily understand each
other.
The Arts of Life.— \^ov\if^\o\^?, are found in
various places, occupying favorable positions
near the markets ; and as their fronts are open
to the street, all the operations of the workmen
can easily be seen. 'J'he mechanical art.s arc
at a low point among the Ix-w-chewans, judg-
ing from these shops, in which one sees tools
LEW-CHEW.
511
and raanipulatioDS strikingly resembling those
of the Chinese.
Religion. — The religion of the Lew-chewans
partakes of that of their two neighbors, from
whom they have derived most of their civiliza-
tion. They have ancestral worship, the ritual
of which is mainly taken from the Chinese ;
from whom the adoration paid to Confucius is
also derived. The temples are numerous. They
are among the best structures in the island,
affording lodgiug-places for travelers within
their precincts, as well as dwellings for the
priests. The latter possess but little influence
in the government ; but they seem to receive
a good support from devotees.
Government. — The government is a heredi-
tary monarchy ; and the political institutions,
like those of China, are founded on the writ-
ings of Confucius ; who is highly revered hei'e,
as well as in Japan, as a wise and safe guide.
The kingdom has been under the sway of the
princes of Satzuma for more than two centu-
ries. The present hereditary sovereign of the
kingdom is a minor, about thirteen years old ;
and the administration of affairs is nominally
in the hands of an officer called " tsung-Ii
kwan," or general superintendent, usually
known as the regent, assisted by three others,
called " pu-chiug," or treasurers, one for each
of the prefectures into which the island is
divided. No soldiers or arms of any kind are
seen in the streets. The power of the govern-
ment seems to be maintained by means of a
system of espionage, in which the gentry act
as policemen, their duty being to mark every
thing which is done by the meanest person.
The servile fear which the system has caused
in the mind of the lowest beggar, rendering
him suspicious of his neighbors and kindred,
stands in lieu of the actual jjresence of the
oSBcer.
Foreign Policy. — The Lew-chewans, situated
between the powerful empires of China and
Japan, have consulted their safety by a sys-
tem of strict non-intercourse ; and their gentle
disposition has led them to exhibit kindness to
all who have been cast on their shores, or
have visited their ports, prompted in a measure
too by the conviction that kindness had no re-
prisals to fear. For a long time they were
able to maintain their independence by pay-
ing homage to their neighbors ; but, in 1G09,
the Prince of Satzuma. who rules in the south-
western corner of Kiu-siu, compelled their
sovereign to go to his capital, Kagosima, and
the subjects to pay him tribute and receive
his tax-gatherers. — S. Wells Williams, in
Missionary Herald for June, 1854, abridged.
MISSION,
^he kind hospitality of the Lew-Chew peo-
ple to British and American vessels which
touch at their islands, or were wrecked on
their coasts, excited a deep interest in their
behalf among the officers of the British navy ;
and between February 1843 and Dec. 1845,
more than £1,000 were raised for the purpose
of sending the Gospel to them, and £700 more
in 1846 ; and a Board of Trustees was appoint-
ed to manage the affairs of the mission. Dr.
Bettelheim, a converted Jew, a physician, and
a learned man, with the sanction of the bishop
of London, was sent out in Sept. 1845, and
arrived at Lew-Chew in January, 1846.
He was met on board the vessel which con-
veyed him by a French Catholic missionary,
who greeted him with a cordial welcome.
Fearing that permission to settle would be de-
nied him, he effected a landing with his wife
and his effects, by getting into the native
boats that came out to visit the ship. The
authorities, however, refused to give him leave
to remain, pleading poverty and scarcity of
food ; and he was requested to give up his de-
sign of stopping, and to embark on the vessel
that brought him. But this he declined to do,
returning a good present for an answer.
After the vessel had sailed, he was invited
to go and look at a house intended for his
residence, but finding it low and damp, he de-
clined it, and was afterwards shown to the
temple, an old, but spacious and pleasantly
situated wooden building, which was offered
him on condition that the keeper of the idols
should reside in the house, the idols being
screened off by a sliding partition ;. and ho
accepted it. But three guard stations, with
five men in each, were arranged near the house,
under pretence of protection, but really for
espionage.
For about a year he was able to carry on
missionary operations, maintaining a service
in his own house with his servants, and preach-
ing to the people as he met them in the streets.
Crowds gathered around him wherever he
raised his humble pulpit, upon a stone, or on
the corner of a street, in the market, in the
roads and lanes, or elsewhere. Wherever he
halted, there the passers-by stopped, and all
the people in the neighborhood came out to
hear him. The stalls were idle, sellers and
buyers forgot their trade, while apparently en-
gaged in a higher business. " I have seen,"
says Dr. B., " the coolies lay down their bur-
dens and quietly listen ; laborers lean their
heads on the handles of their rural tools, and
rest in pensive attention ; thoroughfares were
obstructed, and roads and open places rendered
impassable from the masses of the people
crowded in the space around me ; none forbid-
ding, none driving them away, much less pre-
venting their assembling."
But suddenly all was changed. It was re-
ported that the king was dead ; but Dr. B.
thought it was but a feint to justify the officers
in cjbanging their course. Immediately all
things assumed a new aspect. On the very day
which he supposed to be the day of the king's
burial, he was assaulted with stones and sticks
in the open road, and his life endangered. His
512
LIBERIA,-
appeal to the government was only met by a
denial of the assault. Soon after, the people,
who ii?oil to crowd around him whenever he
went into the street, now ran from him : and
whenever he passed throngh a street, all the
shops were closed, and the doors and windows
of the houses closed. " First there was a bus-
tle, a running here and there, a rattling and
clapping of shutters, doors, and windows, as if
a devil incarnate had come in their way ; green
grocers deserted their stalls, laborers ceased
their work, and crews left their boats ; women
dragged their children in-doors in such haste
and fright as made them scream out when
they saw me again far otf. Often the noise,
confusion, and bewilderment rose to such a
pitch that I was not always free from fear my-
self, and almost dreaded to walk out."
All his appeals to the government were in-
effectual. It seemed to be a concerted, sys-
tematic movement on the part of the authori-
ties to drive him from the country ; and the
people, being held under an oppressive despot-
ism, were compelled to act according to tlicir
orders. This course of incessant annoyance
was continued, with increasing rigor up to the
time of his writing a letter to Rev. Dr. Peter
Parker, of China, which was published at
Canton in ISoO, from which this statement is
derived.
We letirn from recent intelligence that Dr.
Bettelhcim has succeeded in maintaining his
{)osition at Lew-Chew ; and a layman, after
aboring seven years in Loudon as a city mis-
sionary, has been sent to his assistance. The
visit of the American squadron has operated
favorably ; and the prospects of the mission
are brightening. Three persons have received
baptism in Xapa ; and another is a candidate
for the same privilege at Shuy.
An ajipeal has been issued by the committee
having charge of this mission, for the men and
the means of a speedy enlargement. " The
Lord," it is said, " seems to be preparing an
open door for entering Japan ;" and " the ma-
chinery and materials for a future mission in
that kingdom arc in preparation at Lew-
Chew."
LI13KRIA : A republic on the western coast
of Africa. Its civilized population, consisting
of free colored people and emancipated slaves
from the United States, and their descendants.
native Africans rescued from stave traders, and
a few other natives who have become civilized,
may be estimated at about 10,000. Its native
population, entitled by treaties to protection
and the means of civilization, and to all the
privileges of citizenship when civilized, are
supposed to be two or three hundred thousand.
(government. — The government consists of a
president and vice-president, elected once in
two years, a senate and house of representa-
tives, eliiiM'ii by the people, a judiciary, secre-
taries of tiie nece.-Nsary departments, and otlier
executive officers, appointed by the president
and senate. None but persons of color can
hold office, hold land, or be citizens.
_ The territory has been purchased, at various
times, by the American Colonization Society,
and the emigrants, with few exceptions, sent
out at its expense. The government was ad-
ministered at first wholly, and afterwards in
part, by officers appointed by that Society, till
the growth of the colony and the extent of its
commercial relations required the establishment
of an independent government, which could
form coininercial treaties with the several powers
of Europe. By advice of the Society, there-
fore, the colony proclaimed its independence
August 24, 1847 ; and the government, under
its present constitution, was organized at the
commencement of the succeeding year. It has
been recognized by the principal nations of
Christendom.
Education. — The laws of the republic require
a free school in every settlement, and pro-
vide for raising money to defray the expense.
At present, however, the whole educational
establishment, including the primary schools
required by law, are supported by various rais-
siwnary societies in the United States, and a
full account of them will be given in connec-
tion with the several missions. In addition to
these the legislature has incorporated a college,
and given it a valuable tract of one hundred
acres, on the north bank of the St. Paul's,
about twelve miles from Monrovia. For its es-
tablishment and support, funds are held by the
Trustees of Donations for Education in Libe-
ria, incorporated by the Legislature of Massor
chusetts.
The provisions for religious instruction and
worship, like those for education, are connected
with the several missions, and to a great ex-
tent supported by societies in the United
States.
Extent. — The name Liberia, however, has a
wider application. The whole country known
l)y that name extends along the western coast
of Africa, from Manna Point, lat. 7^ 25' X.,
long. 12^ 34' W., to the river San Pedro, lat.
4° 44' N., long. 0° 37' W. The entire length
of its sea-coast is about 520 miles. Of this
coast about 390 miles, extending from Manna
I'oint on the north-west, to (jlrand Scstcrs,
l)elongs to the republic of Liberia. The re-
mainder of the coast, extending about 130 miles
to the river San I'edro, the extreme eastern
l)Oun(lary, belongs to Maryland in Iiit)eriii
Its civilized settlements were planted by the
.Maryland (.'olonization Society. Its govern-
ment has always been entirely distinct from
that of the republic. It has this year, 1854,
pii.«sed from its colonial state to that of nation-
al independence. These two republics intwid
to unite under one government. In respect to
their religious interests, they are already united,
and may be considered as one. 'I'he territory,
having been purchased of numerous small tribes,
extends inland as far as the rights of the sev-
LIBERIA.
613
eral tribes extended; in some places, sixty
miles, in others, only fourteen. From Grand
Cape Mount to Grand Sesters, 286 miles, it
averages about forty-five miles in width, and
contains 12,870 square miles, or 8,236,800
acres. If the remainder averages twenty miles
in width, which is a low estimate, the whole
contains 17,270 square miles, or 11,052,800
acres. It is nearly all susceptible of cultiva-
tion ; and it is a low estimate of its fertility to
say, that every cultivated acre will, on an aver-
age, furnish the necessaries of life for one in-
habitant. For procuring luxuries or acquiring
wealth, they would need other employments,
or larger farms. Settled as densely as Sierra
Leone, it would contain 1,740,000 inhabitants.
Liberia is every where well watered by
numerous small streams, but has no very large
rivers. Sand-bars at the mouths of the rivers
prevent the entrance of large vessels ; and, at
about twenty miles from ' the coast, their navi-
gation is obstructed by rapids. Here is the
base ^f the mountain range which divides the
waters of the Atlantic from those which flow
into the Niger, the great river of Central
Africa. From this range, spurs and detached
elevations run down between the rivers, in
some places quite to the coast, forming, as at
Cape Mount and Cape Mesurado, bold pro-
montories. According to the best information
yet obtained, the summit of this range, beyond
which the waters flow eastward and north-
eastward into the Niger, cannot be more than
150 or 200 miles from the coast.
Harbors. — The coast is deficient in natural
harbors ; but in several places, good harbors
might probably be constructed at a moderate
expense. The whole coast, however, is one
continuous roadstead, where, at any season of
the year, ships may lie at anchor within a mile
or two of the shore, and landing-places for
boats occur as often as once in five or ten miles.
Productions. — The productions are those of
other tropical countries. Rice is the principal
grain. It is grown on uplands, without irri-
gation. Yams, sweet potatoes, cassada, and
other esculent roots, are easily raised, as are
oranges, bananas, and other tropical fruits.
Coffee is indigenous, of several varieties, in-
cluding the Mocha, as are also several varieties
of cotton. Indigo is a troublesome weed.
Another native production is the Malaguette
pepper, or " Grains of Paradise," from the
abundance of which, the coast was formerly
known as " the Grain Coast." Sugar-cane,
ginger, and arrow-root, are easily cultivated.
Palm-oil is made in large quantities, and cam-
wood and ivory are brought from the interior
for exportation. The waters furnish fish abun-
dantly, and of good quality. The domestic ani-
mals for food are bullocks, of small size and lit-
tle value for the yoke, goats, swine, and poultry.
Climate. — The climate is a healthy one for
its native population ; as is evident from their
well-developed, vigorous forms, their usual free-
33
dom from disease, and the age to which they
live. It must, of course, be adapted to the
constitutions of their descendants, in propor-
tion as they retain the constitutional peculiar-
ities of their ancestors. Foreigners, however,
from temperate climates, whatever may be
their ancestry, must undergo an acclimating
fever, within a few weeks after their arrival.
To this rule, the exceptions are too few to be
of any account. The fever is sometimes vio-
lent, and even fatal ; but in most cases, where
the constitution was previously unimpaired, it
is not severe, and yields readily to judicious
treatment ; and in many, it is very slight, not
even confining the patient to his house for a
single day. White men never become per-
fectly acclimated ; though, with prudence and
occasional visits to their native air, they have
been able to live and labor usefully for five,
ten, and even twenty years. Visitors may
avoid the fever by spending their nights on
board their ships, half a mile, or even less,
from the shore.
Native Inhabitants. — Liberia belongs to that
division of Africa, called Nigritia by the
Latin geographers ; Belad-es-Sudan — that is,
the Land of the Blacks — by the Arabs ; and
Guinea by the Portuguese. These names are
unknown to the natives, and the last is of un-
known origin. It extends eastward across the
continent, north of the equator, even into the
valley of the Nile. In its inhabitants, the
form, features, complexion, and all the charac-
teristics of the negro, are most perfectly de-
veloped. They appear as slaves on some of
the oldest monuments of ancient Egypt. They
were carried as slaves across the Great
Desert, and sold to the Carthaginians. They
have always been hunted and seized as slaves
by the Arab, Moorish, and mixed races on the
Great Desert and its southern border. After
the discovery of the western coast by the Por-
tuguese, they were bought and carried as slaves,
first to Europe, and afterwards to the West
Indies and the American continent. This last
calamity, however, has fallen with almost equal
weight on the Zingian or Zambezan races,
south of the equator. So far as is known,
they have always been divided into numerous
small tribes, ignorant of letters, and with but
slight knowledge, if any, of some of the sim-
plest arts of civilization. A large majority —
a well-informed writer supposes five-sixths — of
them are slaves. Wives are bought, worked
as slaves, and sold, according to each man's
ability and caprice. Favorite wives, and other
slaves, sometimes in great numbers, are killed
in sacrifice on the death of a king. Slaves
are sometimes killed, to give solemnity to the
ratification of a treaty. In some of the tribes,
cannibalism is occasionally practised ; but to
a less extent, probably, than in some of the
Zingian tribes farther south.
Religion. — See Africa, Western.
Discovery. — The first discovery of this coast
514
LIBERIA.
of Tvliioh we have any authentic account, was
made by I'Jedro dc Cintra, in MG2. lie was
in the employment of the King of Portugal,
to wiiom Tope Martin V. had given all the
territories he might discover, from Cape I3o-
jador to the East" Indies, to be conquered and
"recovered to Christ and his church." The
natives had never seen ships before. The few
that came off to him, 16 miles beyond Cape
Mesnrado, in canoes carrying two or throe
each, were naked, had some wooden darts and
small knives, two targets and three bows, rings
about their cars and one in the nose, and
teeth, which seemed to be human, strung
about their necks. It does not appear that he
carried away any of them as slaves, though
that practice had been followed by most ex-
plorers on the west coast of Africa, since it was
tirst commenced by Antonio Uonzalos, in 1440.
For nearly a century and a half the Portu-
guese were masters of this coast. They had
forts or trading houses at numerous points, of
which Gallinas, Cape Mount, Cape Mesurado,
Junk river, Sesters and Sangwin seem to have
been the most important.
Slave Trade. — The slave trade to the West
Indies was commenced in 1 503, and encour-
aged by edicts of Ferdinand Y. of Spain, in
1511, and of Charles V., in 1515. From that
time forward, procuring slaves from the na-
tives and .«('Ilinir them to the Spaniards, was a
principal branch of their business. Their in-
fluence was so predominant, that before IGOO
the Portuguese had become the language in
which business was usually transacted, and
was generally understood by natives who had
dealings with foreigners.
T/ie Pope's Grant not recotrnized. — The Eng-
lish and Dutch, being Protestants, cared
nothing for the Pope's grant to I'ortugal ; and
the French soon learned to disregard it, claim-
ing that they had discovered the coast anil
traded at Sesters belore the I'ortuguese, and
even as early as 134G. 'I'lie Knglisli took the
lead. In 1553, having already made two voy-
ages to Morocco, 'J'homas Windham, though
the Portuguese had threatened him and liis
crew with death, visited the whole coast from
the river Sesters to Benin. In 1554, Cajitain
John Lok, with three ships, reached Cape
Mesurado, sailed along the coast to Benin,
and brought home " certain black slaves," the
first, so far a.s we know, ever seen in lOngland.
In 1588, the English "African Company"
yiaa incorporated fur the more vigorous prose-
cution of commerce in this region. The Por-
tuguese did what they could, and hired tho na-
tives to do what they could, to resist these
encroachments. They destroyed the ships of
the intruders, and killed or enslaved their crews.
But by 1C04 they were driven from all their
'posU*, from Cape ^lesurado to Cape Palmas ;
and a few years later, the Dutch had i)osse.';-
sion at Cane Mount, and the English at Sierra
•Leone. Ihe Portuguese, however, did not
wholly quit the country. Being driven from
the coast, some of them, with their mulatto
descendants, retired inland, and endeavored,
\v ith some success, to monopolize the trade be-
tween the interior and the coast, and were gra-
dually lost by amalgamation with the natives.
Portuguese Missions. — Of the missionary
labors of the Portuguese while in possession
of the coast, we have no particular informa-
tion ; but, as the Pope gave them the country
for that purpose ; as they had chapels and
priests at all their settlements ; as we have
accounts of their efforts and success at Sierra
Leone and other places ; and as they arc said,
when driven from the coast, to have built
chapels and tried to make converts in the
interior, there can be no doubt that some such
labors were performed. From them the na-
tives probably first received the idea of a Crea-
tor, whose existence they admit, though they
never worship him.' The word " fetish," by
which they designate a consecrated post or
any object of their superstitions reverence, is
derived from a Portuguese word, signifying a
charm, such as witches arc supposed to use.
From the same source, they may have received
the term " devil," which they apply to the dis-
guised chief of certain nocturnal orgies. These
are the only remnants of their religious influ-
ence, which even conjecture can now detect.
Character and Iiifluence of Traders — Slave
Trade. — Tho character of the traders to this
coast, whether Portuguese, French. English or
Dutch, appears to have been, with very few
exceptions, of the worst kind. Many of the
English and Dutch were " interlopers," trading
there in violation of the laws of their own
countries, and indeed of all laws whatever.
From about IGOO, pirates began to mingle
Mith them, and the crews of traders sometimes
joined the pirates, and often copied their ex-
amples. The slave trade raged with increas-
ing violence. Not only were slaves bought
of the natives, and wars excited for the pur-
pose of making slaves for the market, but
negroes were seized indiscriminately a>ul car-
ried off, whenever it could be done without too
much danger. The custom of '• panyaring,"
that is, alluring an individual beyond the
reach of protection, and then seizing him or
her as a slave, became comnlon ; and the ne-
gro trader who was employed to panyar his
countryman one dav, was sometimes ]ianyared
himself the next. ' From 1G88 to 1G97, the
power of the " buccaneers" in the "West In-
dies wiLS broken, and they were dispersed.
They sjiread themselves over the whole Atlan-
tic and Indian Oceans, and in Western Africa,
for about 30 years, were one of the strongest
lowers. Besides other places, they s.vcrai
times ])lundered Sierra Leone, which was on>
of their favorite resorts. 'J'hey held thf bay
next south of that cane for seven years, till, in
1730, they were broken up by the French.
Meanwhile, the Genoese first, and then the
LIBERIA.
515
French, obtained the exclusive privilege of
furnishing negro slaves for the Spanish colo-
nics. In 1713, the English government, by
the famous Assiento treaty, obtained it for the
South Sea Company for thirty years. What
multitudes were sold, and how profitably, may
be judged from the fact, that in 1739 England
sold out the remaining four years to Spain for
a hundred thousand pounds — nearly half a
million dollars.
Under such influences, the character and
temper of the natives became such that, in
1730, not a single European factory was in
operation on the whole coast of what is now
Liberia ; traders found it dangerous to go on
shore ; and trade was carried on by sailing
along the coast, and coming to anchor where
the natives, by building a fire, indicated that
they had slaves or other articles for sale. This
state of things seems to have continued, with
little change, to the close of that century.
The testimony concerning the character of the
slave trade, laid before the British Parliament
from 1791 to 1807, showed that in other parts
of Africa, slaves were collected and kept for
shipment in factories ; but on the " windward
coast," where Liberia now is, " every tree was
a factory," and ships stopped and traded wher-
ever a signal was made.
Origin and History of the Colony. — About
the year 1770 the celebrated theologian, Rev.
Samuel Hopkins of Newport, R. I., began to
preach against slavery and the slave trade.
April 7, 1773, he called on his neighbor, Rev.
Ezra Stiles, afterwards President of Yale Col-
lege, for conversation' on his design "to make
some negro ministers, and send them to Gui-
nea." There were two young natives of Africa
in his church, whom he wished to educate for
that purpose. Mr. Stiles thought there might
be some prospect of success if thirty or forty
were sent, and a society formed for the pur-
pose. They " left the matter to further
thought." August 31, 1773, they published
a circular, asking contributions for the educa-
tion of these young men. The plan was re-
ceived with favor by the ministers of Berkshire
County, Mass., by those of several counties in
Connecticut, and by the Presbytery of New
York. The young men left New York for
Princeton, to be educated, Nov. 21, 1774, and
three days after, bills were drawn on a gentle-
man in London for fifty pounds sterling, of
which thirty pounds were given by the Edin-
burgh Society for promoting Christian Knowl-
edge, and five pounds by some one in London ;
and assurances were received, both from Eng-
land and Scotland, that more would be given,
if needed. About as much more was raised in
America, besides one hundred dollars for which
Mr. Hopkins had, some years before, sold a
slave, and which he now devoted to this pur-
pose.
When the plan of connecting a colony with
the mission was first fully adopted, and how
far it was understood by contributors in Eng
land, Scotland, and America, is not known.
April 29, 1784, Mr. Hopkins says, it " has
been on foot for some time." This, it was
thought, would not only be for the benefit of
those who should return to their native coun-
try, but would do much to stop the slave trade,
and to introduce Christianity into Africa.
Jttarch 7, 1787, his friends knew that he had
been desirous to attempt such a settlement
" for years." He was glad to learn that " cer-
tain Friends and other Dissenters in Britain
have joined to carry this design into execu-
tion," on the plan, as he supposed, of " the late
Dr. Fothcrgill." Dr. William Thornton, a
native of Virginia, had been in Newport some
weeks, proposing to form such a settlement
with free blacks from New England. A num-
ber volunteered to go with him ; but the at-
tempt failed for want of funds, perhaps, be-
cause others thought, with Mr. Hopkins, that
Dr. Thornton, though " an honest man," was
" too flighty and unsteady to be the head " of
such an enterprise.
In that year, 1787, Granville Sharp and
other British philanthropists commenced the
colony at Sierra Leone, with some hundreds of
colored people from America, who had served
in the British army during the war of Inde-
pendence. After some reverses it has growri
to a colony of more than fifty thousand in-
habitants.
The same year, the Constitution of the
United States was formed, by which the seve-
ral States were deprived of the power of con-
tinuing the slave trade more than twenty years.
In 1789, Dr. Hopkins wrote to Granville
Sharp, to learn whether colonists from Ame-
rica could be received at Sierra Leone, and
also whether the character and government of
that colony were such that he could recom-
mend it. He was then acquainted with " a
number of religious blacks,"' who were ready
to form a church, with one of their own num-
ber as pastor, and to settle in Africa, to intro-
duce Christianity and civilization, and to re-
ceive others who might wish to emigrate.
In 1791 he wished the Emancipation Society
iu Connecticut to embrace this object in its
charter. In a sermon against slavery and the
slave trade, May 17, 1793, and more fully in
its appendix, he urged almost precisely the
same plan of colonizing, which has since been
carried out. In 1799, in the last work he
ever published, he expressed the same desires,
and the same hopes that they would yet be re-
alized.
The emancipation of slaves and their colo-
nization in some part of America had been a
favorite idea of Mr. Jefferson, and others in
Virginia, as early as 1786, and probably ear-
lier. In the autumn of 1800, an extensive
and dangerous conspiracy was discovered
among the slaves iu and around Richmond.
Unwilling to put so many to death for such a
616
LIBERIA.
cause, the House of Delegates, December 31,
in secret session, requested the Governor to
correspond with the Tresident of the United
Stales as to procuring land out of tlie State,
to which they might Ije removed. The corres-
pondence continued till 1805, and the plan
was so modified as to express a preference for
Africa as a place of a settlement, but without
sovereignty, and to include free blacks and
slaves who might be emancipated. The I're-
sident, Mr. Jefferson, applied to the Sierra
Leone Company to receive the proposed colon-
ist.s, but was refused.
In 1807, Congress passed an act prohibiting
the importation of slaves after the end of that
year. Nearly all the States had prohibited it
many years before. Previous acts had forbid-
den American citizens to trade in slaves be-
tween foreign countries. The same year the
British government, moved by evidence of the
nature of the trade, collected principally at
Sierra Leone, abolished the traffic by British
subjects.
About 1810, Samuel J. ]Snils and others,
theological students at Andover, began to col-
lect information concerning the colored people
of the United States, bond and free, and were
soon brought to the conclusion that, in the
words often used by I^lills, " we must take care
of them, or they will ruin us." They endea-
vored to rouse attention to the subject by the
press, and by correspondence and conversation
with leading men. Mills thought of coloniz-
ing them north of the Ohio, but some of his
associates early saw that any colony on this
continent would soon be overrun by white
people, and would be a failure. This was one
principal object for which he afterwards re-
sided some time in New Jersey, where he pro-
cured the establi-shmeut of the "African
school " at I'arsippany.
About 1811, Captain Paul Cuffec, a colored
man of New Bedford, carried 38 colored emi-
grants to Sierra Leone, in his own vessel, and
thirty of them at hi.s own expense. This
movement wa.s to have been more extensive,
but it was sto|»])ed \>y the war of 1812. Ami
Mifliiii, of the Society of Priend.s, in Per.nsyl-
vania, advocated a colony in Africa. Her
views were communicated to Mr. Jen'er.-ion,
who expre-ssed his warm uiiprubulion in iHll.
Feliruary If), Ihlf), the Ucv. Robert Finlev,
D. 1)., of New Jersey, wrote to a friend, a.sk-
ing ids opinion of an attemi)t to found a co-
lony of colored ])eople on the coa.st of Africa.
In February, IHKJ, (Jeneral (.'harles Feulon
Mercer, of the Virginia lIou.se of Delegates,
became ac(|uainted with the jiroceedings of
that liouKC in 1H00-I80r>, and jjiedged him.«elf
to renew the subject, if he should l)e re-elected
at the next session. lie soon after eomnuini-
cated the fact.s and his intention to two friends.
Klias 1{. (y'uldwell and Francis S. Key, of
Wa-^hington, who ])lcdged their cooperation.
The same year, probaljly towards iUj close,
the first meeting preparatory to forming a Co-
lonization Society, was holden at Princeton,
N. J., and was attended by most of the pro-
fessors of the Theological Seminary and the
College. In December, Dr. Finlev visited
Washington, and consulted with Villas B.
Caldwell, his brother-in-law, and Francis S.
Key, who encouraged him to call a jmblic
meeting. The meeting was holden December
23. ^I can while Gen. Mercer, yet unacquainted
with Dr. Finley, and ignorant of his plans,
redeemed his pledge, llis resolution was in-
troduced to the House of Delegates on the
12th, sent to the Senate on the 14th, and
passed on the 23d. The Constitution of the
Society was adopted Dec. 28, 181G, and the
officers elected Jan. 1, 1817. Samuel J. Mills
was one of the original members, and Dr. Wil-
liam 'J'hornton was a member of the Board of
Managers.
The society owed its origin, therefore, to tho
union of the various influences which, in Rhode
Island, in ^Massachusetts, in New Jersey, in
Penu.sylvania, and in Virginia, had been tend-
ing towards such a result for nearly half a
century.
In 1817, Samuel J. Mills and Ebcnezcr Bur-
gess were sent to Africa, to find a place for a
colony. They selected a place on Sherbro
Island, or the adjacent continent, near where
the Mendi mission now is. In visiting Paul
Cuffee, prejiaratory to this voyage. Mills took
a severe cold, from which he never recovered.
He died on his voyage home.
January 21, 1820, the first colonists, 89 in
number, embarked on board of the Elizabeth,
at New York. After an unsuccessful attempt
to settle on Shcrl)ro Island, in which many
lives were lost, and an effort to ])urcha.se a
location in the Biussa country, which was de-
feated by the attachment of the natives to the
slave trade, Caj)e Mesurado was purchased,
Deceml)er If), 1821. The colonists arrived
January 7, and were landed on a low island in
the river, from which, in a few months, under
the conduct of Klijuh Johnson, one of their
own number, who had lieenleft as a temporary
(Governor, they removed to the Cape.
Belbre this time, slave-trader.-? had begun to
reestablish factories on the coast. In 1813,
thouj;h the trade had lieen abolishid by act of
I*arliament from the l)eginniiig of 1808, two
British subjects, Bostock and McCiuinn, liad
one on Cape Mesurado, and in June his Ma-
jesty's .«hip Thais sent 40 men on shore, who,
after a battle, in which one of their number
was killed, entered the factory and captured,
its owners. The trade, however, still con-
tinued.
Missinm in Liberia.— There had been one
attempt at mL-^sionary labor in this region.
Mr. Jnhn IJreretnn Cati-s, with Williiim Tam-
lia and William Davi.s, two convertiil natives,
the latter a IJa.ssa, rc-^cued from a slavi.'-tradcr,
s])eut February, March and April. Ibl9. in a
LIBERIA.
517
journey from Sierra Loonc to the St. John's
river. At Sug'ury, near Grand Cape Mount,
a plot was laid to rob them, Avhieli only
amounted to stealing a hat, for whieh they fol-.
lowed and arrested the wrong man, and had to
pay a fine of " three bars," or $2 25. At Little
Cape Mount, a plot was laid to rob and nnu'-
der Mr. Gates on his way to Gape Mesurado ;
but Tamba understood enough of the language
to detect it, and it was abandoned. On an
island in the Mesurado river, they were hospi-
tably entertained by John S. Mill, a mulatto
slave-trader who had been educated in Eng-
hind. Mill had houses on the Gape, which he
sold when the Gape was purchased. August
25, 1824, he engaged as Secretary of the Gol-
ony, under Governor Ashman, lie performed
the duties of the ollico well till September 30,
when, tired of civilized life, he returned to his
former habits, and nothing has since been
heard of him. At some places, especially
among the Bassas, the kings professed a will-
ingness to receive missionaries ; but Mr. Gates
tluHight that only white missionaries would
command respect enough to be successful.
He sulfered much from the fever on his jour-
ney, and died in a few months after liis return.
The first American missionary in Liberia
was Lot Gary, who had been a slave, and had
purchased himself and children for $5850. In
181 5, more than a year before the Golonization
Society wa.s Ibrmed, he took a leading part in
forming The African Misfiionari/ Society, in
Richmond, Va. In five years that society had
raised about $700, w'hich hud been expended
in aiding missions in Africa. Having read
the report of Mills and Burgess, Gary resolved
to devote himself to tlie work. lie resigned
the pastoral care of a Baptist church of nearly
800 members, and accepted that of a mission-
ary church, composed of himself and wife,
Golin Teage and wife and son Hilary, and
Joseph Langford and wife. Gary and Golin
Teage were appointed missionaries of the So-
ciety, embarked in February, and arrived in
Sierra Leone March 8, LS2L Here Gary
preached to such as could miderstand, and
started a mission among the Mandingoes. He
was one of the first that took possession of
Cape Mesurado. 'J'lie absolute necessity for
his services as magistrate, physician and pas-
tor among the colonists, detained him from
systennitic labor among tlie heathen, till his
death, by casualty, Noveml)er 10, 1828. Yet,
before June, 1825, he had established at ]\lou-
rovia, a missionary school for native children ;
and about a year before his death, was enabled
to establish aiu)ther near t!rand Gape i\Iount.
Here. John Kevey, afterwards a distinguished
Bai)tist ])reaeher aiul Golonial Secretary at
Gape Talmas, was for a time the teacher ; and
one of his pupils, a few years afterwards, in-
vented the syllabic alphabet in which th.o TV;/
language has been extensively written and
read for nearly 20 years. Gary was allowed,
before his death, to rejoice over a few conver-
sions from heathenism.
In March, 1825, and in May, 1827, Mr.
Aslunun, governor of the colony, issued earn-
est appeals for missions to be established in
Liberia ; not only for the good of the natives,
but as necessary to i)reserve the colonists them-
selves from subsiding into barbarism. His
first appeal reached the venerable Blumhardt,
of the Alissionary Seminary, at Basle, in Swit-
zerland ; and, after some correspondence, five
young men connnenced special preparations
for tlie mission. About the close of this year,
the liev. Galvin Ilolton was ordained at
Beverly, Mass., as a missionary of the Baptist
Board to Liberia. Ho embarked at Boston,
January 4, 182C, in the brig Vine, with thirty-
four emigrants, mostly from Rhode Island.
Before embarkation, eighteen of them were
organized into a church, of which Newport
Gardner and Salmur Nubia, two of the native
Africans, whom Dr. Hopkins had selected in
their youth to be educated as missionaries,
were chosen deacons. This expedition proved
one of the most disastrous in respect to life
and health, ever sent to that countr}'. Mr.
Holton lived only to July 23, yet he had al-
ready done much towards giving sj-stem to the
means of education, both among colonists and
natives.
Of the Swiss missionaries from the Basle
Seminary, JNlessrs. Ilandt and Sessing arrived
at Monrovia, Uecember 21, 1827, and the
others a few months later. !Mr. WuHf died
December 22, 1828. Sickness compelled Mr.
Hegele to leave, and INIr. Sessing was obliged
to accompany him. They arrived in England,
May 7, 1829. Mr. Handt left the service of
the Society, and commenced an independent
mission near Gape Mount. Only Mr. Kiss-
ling remained. Mr. Sessing soon returned
with his wife, Mr. Buhrer, Mr. Graner, and
Mr. Dietschy who M-as to reside, as secular
superintendent, in a house at Monrovia, be-
queathed to tlie mission by Gov. Aslunun ;
while the principal seat of missionary labor
was to be at Bassa Gove. Tiiey visited the
United States on their way, and atteuded pub-
lic meetings and received pecuniary aid in
Philadelphia, New York, and Boston. Messrs.
Sessing and Buhrer sailed early in Dec. and
the others a few weeks later, arriving at Mon-
rovia March 4, 1830. There Mr. Graner died,
May 12. Mr. Sessing remained lor a time,
and opened an orphan school ; but he soon
removed to the older colony of Sierra Leone,
where, as he believed, the native mind was
l^etfer prepared to jirofit by missionary labors.
With his removal, the mission seems'to have
been closed. Nothwithstanding its short du-
ration and many interruiitions, its beneficial
infiuenee is still felt. It did much to form
some of the best minds in liiberia, and some of
its native pupils arc still useful missionary
laborers.
518
LICHTENFELS— LONDON MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
Of missions subsequently establislied, ac-
counts will be found under the head of Africa,
Western. — Rkv. Joseph Tracy.
LICIITBNFELS : The first station occu-
pied by the Moravians in the south of Green-
land. It is situated on an island, about three
miles from the main ocean, and at an equal
distance from the Danish factory at Fisher's
Bay.
LICHTENxlU : A station of the United
Brethren in Greenland, four miles from Lich-
tenfels.
LIFU : One of the New Hebrides, where
is a station of the London Missionary Society.
LISIIUAXI : A station of the Wcsleyans
among the Griquas, Basutos, and Mantatees,
South Africa.
LITITZ : A station of the Moravians in
Jamaica. W. I.
LITTLE BASSA : A village near Edina
in Liberia, and a station of the American
Baptist Mission among the Bassas on the west-
ern coast of Africa.
LIVERPOOL (Australia :) This town was
founded about 26 years ago by Gov. JSlacquar-
rie, and for some time its existence was only
indicated by a post, with the inscription, "This
is Liverpool." It now, however, sjjeaks for it-
self; and though not situated in a very fertile
country, yet affording a route to the fine agri-
cultural and pastoral districts of Camden and
Argylo, it is a place of considerable bustle,
and daily increasing in importance. It is oc-
cupied by the Society for the Propagation of
the Gospel.
LODIANA : The principal station of the
Presbyterian Board in Northern India. The
city is situated on the river Sutlej, in lat. 30°
5.0' N. and long. 75^ 48' E. It is 1,170 miles
north-west of Calcutta, and 115 south-east from
Labor.
LOMBOE : One of the lesser Sunda Is-
lands, in the Indian Archipelago.
LONDON MISSIONARY SOCIETY:
The formation of the London Missionary Soci-
ety was one of the grandest enterprises of the
age. It had for its object, not the conversion
of the heathen to any j)articular form of
church order or government, but to send the
Go.spcl to the heathen, leaving it to the minds
of tlio.se whom Cod might " call into the fel-
lowship of his Son anu)ng them to assume for
tlienii^'lves such form of church government as
to them shall appear most agreeable to the
word of God."
_ In the year 1794, the minds of British Chris-
tians were turned towards the subject of mi.s-
sions by an Address to Evangelical DLssenters,
puljlished in the London I^vangelical Maga-
zine, which excited considerable interest, and
led to a meeting with a view to the formation
of a society, which was held on the 4th of
November. It coB.sistcd of "a small but
glowing and harmonious circle of ministers of
various connections and denominations." In
the month of January. 1795, an " Address to
Christian Ministers and all other Friends of
Christianity, on the subject of Missions to the
Heathen," was drawn up and sent as a circular
to various persons, in which it was proposed
that a meeting should be held in London tlie
ensuing summer for the purpose of organizing
a Missionary Society.
On the 15th of January, a number of min-
isters convened in the city of Loudon, and
" a])pointed a committee of correspondence to
collect the sentiments of their brethren in the
country relative to the great plan under con-
templation." A circular letter addressed to
ministers was drawn up, acquainting them
with the plan and object of the proposed soci-
ety, and requesting them to communicate it to
their congregations, and to send delegates to
the general meeting. The time appointed for
the convention was the 22d, 23d, and 24th
days of September. On the evening preceding
the meeting, a consultation " was held by a
numerous and highly respectable assembly of
ministers friendly to the proposed institution.
Several interesting letters from ministers and
private Christians approving of the formation
of a society were read to the meeting, and an
address delivered by the Rev. Dr. Ilaweis of
Aldwinkle. The exercises were concluded with
prayer by the Rev. Rowland Hill, and the
assembly broke up with a feeling of delight
which, as has been justly remarked, " the
highest gratification of sensuality, avarice,
ambition, or party zeal could never have in-
spired." The following day the Rev. Dr.
Haweis delivered a highly animating discourse
from Mark xvi. 15, IG, to a large congregation
assembled at Spa-fields chapel. At the clo.^e of
the public exercises, a large number of minis-
ters and laymen formed themselves into a soci-
ety. In the evening a sermon was preached
by the Rev. G. Burder, and, on the tln'ce sub-
seiiueut days, successive meetings were held, iu
different parts of the city, at which the cause
of mi.«sions was pleaded with solemnity and
earnestness. The cfTect of these meetings I)oth
upon the ministers and people was most hajjpy.
" The unanimity and fervor of the assembly iu
entering ujion this greatest of all schemes —
the evangelizing of the world — created bursts
of joy wliich nothing could express but tears.
The "Christian world seemed to awake, as
from a dream, wondering that they ctuild have
been so long asleep, while tlie groans of a
dying world were calling upon them for the
Gospel of Jesus Christ. Another considera-
tion that rendered these seasons inexpressibly
delightful was the visible union of Christians
of all denominations ; who, for the first time,
forgetting their party prejudices and i)artiuli-
tics, a.ssembled in the same place, sang the
same hymns, united in the same prayers, and
felt tliem.selves one iu Christ."
The condition of membership in this Socie-
ty is, a subscription of a certain amount to its
LONDON MISSIONARY SOCIETY,
519
fuads. Its proceediugs are conducted by a
Board of Directors, who hold monthly meet-
ings, in which the treasurer and secretaries,
ministers who are annual subscribers, and the
officers of auxiliaries are entitled to vote.
Committees are allowed, but their acts are not
valid till ratified at a monthly meeting ; and
the directors are not allowed to make an ex-
penditure exceeding £500 without calling a
general meeting of the subscribers.
Soon after the formation of the Missionary
Society, its members began to agitate the im-
portant question, " In what part of the world
they should commence their work of mercy ?"
The Rev. Dr. Ilaweis, who was one of the
founders of the Society, and among its most
liberal supporters, was requested to prepare a
'• Memorial "' upon the subject, which was de-
livered at Surrey Chapel. In the course of
his address he says, "The field before us is
immense ! 0 that we could cuter at a thou-
sand gates ! that every liml) were a tongue,
and every tongue a trumpet, to spread the
joyful sound. Where so considerable a part of
the habitable globe on every side calls for our
efforts, and like the man of ]\Iacedonia cries,
' Come over and help us,' it is not a little diffi-
cult to decide at what part to begin." He
then drew a comparison between the climates,
the governments, the language, and the reli-
gious of heathen countries, and concluded that
of all the '• dark places of the earth " the
South Sea Islands presented the fewest diffi-
culties, and the fairest prospect of success.
Such was the interest excited by this dis-
course, and by the glowing representations
which had been made respecting the newly dis-
covered regions in the South Seas, that the
directors determined to attempt a mission to
these islands, and immediately began to raise
subscriptions, to examine and select mission-
aries, and to make preparations for the voyage.
At length a ship was purchased, and in Au-
gust, 1796, twenty-nine missionaries, several of
whom had wives and children, embarked at
London on board the J)ufF, commanded by
Captain James Wilson,*who had retired sev-
eral years previous from the East India service,
but who now kindly offered to conduct the ad-
venturous voyage. On the 23d of September
they took their final leave of England.
The missions of this Society have since been
extensively prosecuted in the South Seas, West
Indies, Soutli Africa, African Islands, China, and
India. The following summary statement will
show the extent of its operations :
Missionaries: in Polynesia, 32 ; China,
17 ; India, 47 ; Africa and Maiu'itius,
43; West Indies, 20; total, (exclu-
sive of wives and children,) . . . 170
Native Teachers and Evangelists, . . 700
Churches 150
Meml)c.-3, (exclusive of Madagascar) . 16,000
Day Schools 400
Scholars 30,000
Boarding schools 32
Pupils 849
Institutions for training native evan-
gelists 8
Students 150
Printing-presses 15
Translations. — The Scriptures have been
translated by the society's missionaries into
Chinese, Bengalese, Urdu, Teloogoo, Canarese,
Tamil, Goojurattee, Malayalim, Buriat, Tahi-
tian, Ilarotongan, Samoan, Sechuana, Mala-
gasy, l-l languages and dialects. The receipts
of the society for the year 1853, were £71,821
Is. 6d., of which £12,933 7s. 9d. were contrib-
uted at the missionary stations. The following
table exhibits the receipts of the society, for
periods of four years each, since 1815, (which
is the first year in which they published a
financial report, when the society possessed
funds to the amount of £39,790.) with the aver-
age annual receipts in each of these periods.
Amount
Average
Periods.
for the Period.
Annual FiCceipts.
1S15 to 1818
£80,109
£20,027
1819 " 18.22
95,549
23,SS7
1823 " 1826
133,431
33,357
1827 " 1830
168,057
42,014
1S31 " 1834
155,970
38,994
1835
57,895
57,895
1836 " 1839
300,191
75,047
1840 " 1843
377,467
94,306
1844 " 1847
344,013
86,003
1848 " JSSl
292,422
73,105
1852 " 1853
144,599
72,299
£2,149,707
Prom this statement, it appears that the
aggregate of the Society's receipts, from dona-
tions and legacies, for 38 years, has been
£2,149,707 ; and that, during this period, the
contributions have been steadily rising in
amount, the average of annual receipts rising
from £20,000 to £94,000, with a slight de-
crease in the three last periods. This may be
taken as a fiiir index of the growth of the
missionary spirit with the large class of Chris-
tians who make this society the organ of their
missionary operations. But, in addition to
the growth of the missionary spirit at home,
a fact is here developed of great importance
lO all future missionary efforts, that nearly one-
fifth of the contributions of this society, the
last year, came from its own missions. Here
is a source of supply which is not to be over-
looked. It shows that, while, up to a certain,
point, the demands on the churches at home
must increase with the success of the missions,^
beyond that point they will diminish, by means
of the supply created bv success.
LONG KLOOF (LONG V'ALLEY) : A
station of the Loudon Missionary Society in
South Africa, commenced *in 1840. This val
ley extends more than 100 miles, between a.
520
LONSDALIi-MADAGASCAR.
range of mountains on one side and of higli]
grassy hills ou the other. It is celebrated for
its fertility, arising from the number of springs
found everywhere to irrigate the soil.
LONSDALE : A station of the London
Missionary Society in Berbice.
LOO-CIIOO : (See Lew-Chew.)
LOVEUALE : A station of the Free
Church of Scotland in South Africa, 60 miles
from Graham's Town.
LUCCA : A station of the Wcsleyan Mis-
sionary Society in Jama.ica, AV. I.
LUSIGNAN : A station of the London
Missionary Society in Demarara, W. L
MACAO : A Portuguese settlement in
China, situated on a small peninsula at the
south-eastern extremity of the large island of
Hingshan, between GO and 70 miles south-cast
of Canton. (See China.)
MAC HI AX : One of the Molucca Islands
in the Indian Archipelago.
MADAGASCAR : A large island on the
eastern coast of Africa, containing an area
somewhat larger than Great Britain and Ire-
land. Its mineral productions are silver, iron,
slate, limestone, and coal. It produces, also,
many valuable articles of commerce, as sugar,
cotton, hemp, silk, indigo, tobacco, gum elas-
tic, copal, el)ony, wax. Sec. The island pos-
sesses many fine ports, from which considerable
trade is carried on with Mauritius and Bour-
bon, the Arabs from Muscat, and the Ameri-
cans.
Population. — The great mass of the popula-
tion of Madagascar are of the Malay race ;
but with some mixture of negroes and Kaf-
fres. They are all of dark complexion, but
some more swarthy than others. The lan-
guage, which is nearly the same throughout
the island, is of Malay origin. The inhabit-
tants are industrious, intelligent, and semi-civ-
ilized.
Government. — Madagascar docs not appear
ever to have formed one kingdom, Init to have
been occupied Ijy independent tribes, to the
number of 20 or 30. The most powerful State
is the kingdom of Madagascar, situated about
200 miles from the eastern coast, in the cen-
tral part of the island, called the Hova coun-
try. The llova tribe had risen from a very
limited possession of influence and power to
extensive authority under Andrianimpoincrina,
who had formed the ambitious project of sub-
jugating the whole country to his control.
lie was succeeded Ijy lladama, in the begin-
ning of this century, who iidierited his father's
ambition,- and succeeded in enlarging the
boundaries of his kingdom. lie cncouraginl
the labors of the missionaries, and souglit to
civilize his subjects by establishing schools,
and sending sonic of them to Mauritius and
Europe ; in which he was favored with tlie
friendsiiip and aid, of Sir Koliert Farquhar,
the Govi-rnor of Mauritius. He established an
ariuy, provided with iire-armij and horses, and
organized on the European system. But, in
1827, he visited the eastern coast of the
island, where he was feasted, and indulged in
habits of intemperance and irregularity, which
brought on him a fatal disease that terminated
his life the following year. The legitimate
heir to the throne was his sister's son, Rako-
tobe, a young man in the mission school, who
gave some hopeful indications of piety. But
Ranavalona, one of the wives of Radama, a
woman combining in herself the worst traits
of character of Jezebel, Athaliah, and bloody
Queen Mary, on hearing of the king's death,
sent for two military officers from her native
village, and promised, if they would devote
themselves to her interest, and secure to her
the throne, she would advance them to the
highest rank, and reward them with riches,
and exempt them from capital punishment
whatever crime they might commit. Having
first secured tlie favor of the gods by collusion
with the diviners, she succeeded in destroying
four officers of the late king, who declared that
he had named Rakotobe and his own daughter,
Raketaka, to succeed him. She soon after
took measures to destroy both these, their
mother, and a number of other relatives of
Radama, some of whom were starved to death,
and others openly speared. She afterwards
perfidiously murdered the principal actor in
her elevation to the throne, the reputed father
of her only son, to whom she had made such
promises befoi'e her accession.
Notwithstanding the immoral and bloody
character of this woman, she is as religious in
her way as Queen Mary, as weak and devoted
to her superstitions as her Roman Catholic
l)rototype. She has attempted to carry out
the design of her predecessor, in annexing the
whole island to her dominion, but in such a
way as tends rapidly to the depopulation of the
whole island. For years she has maintained a
standing army of from 20,000 to 30.000, and
these have been in the habit of going out on
predatory excursions, several thousands at a
time, desolating the villages, treacherously de-
stroying all the men Ifter they have surren-
dered, and carrying captive the women and
children, treating them with the greatest cru-
elty, and selling them into slavery ; and in
these expeditions multitudes of the soldiers
perish every year. The people generally are
treated as the servants, not subjects of the gov-
ernment. The soldiers are compelled to serve,
and the bourgeois to work for the government
without pav^ thus reducing themselves and
their families to starvation. So much of thcr
time is eniploved in the service of the Queen,
that they are oljliged to neglect thccultivati m
of the land, and hence they have sulVercd se-
verely by famine. Many have been untble,
for several months of the year, to obtani iuore
than one meal a day. And, what rend-vs the
oppression the more infamous is, that 'liey are
often employed, not in the necessary service of
MADAGASCAR.
521
the government, but in collecting fighting
bulls and dancing idiots, for the amusement of
this modern Jezebel. In consequence of this
oppression, hundreds and thousands of the peo-
ple have deserted the villages, and fled to the
forests ; and robbers and highwaymen have
fearfully increased.
Rdigioa and Morals. — The natives of Ma-
dagascar have no just ideas of God. The
name which they give the Supreme Being lite-
rally signifies " Fragrant Prince." They have
some idea of such a Being, but what jire-
cise notion is affixed to it, it is extremely diffi-
cult to ascertain. Their ideas of a future
state, and indeed their whole religious system
is indefinite, discordant, and puerile. It is a
compound of heterogeneous elements, borrow-
ed, in part, from the superstitious fears aud
practices of Africa, the opinions of the .ancient
Egyptians, and the prevalent idolatrous sys-
tems of India, blended with the usages of the
Malaj-an Archipelago. There are no public
temples in honor of any divinity, nor any
order of men exclusively devoted to the priest-
hood, but the keeper of the idols receives the
ofierings of the people, presents their requests,
and pretends to give the response of the god.
They worship also at the grave or tomb of
their ancestors. Some Jewish or Mohamme-
dan customs prevail, such as circumcision, the
division of time into weeks of seven days, ab-
stinence from swine's flesh, &c. Marriage is
general, but polygamy prevails, and conjugal
fidelity scarcely exists.
The Malagasy, though not naturally savage
and inhuman, have become dreadfully familiar
with blood, under the present reign. False-
hood, chicanery, avarice, deceit and sensuality
extensively prevail. But they have some re-
deeming qualities. Parents ars devoted to
their ofispring, and children are respectful to
their parents. There is much genuine hospi-
tality in the country, and warm and steady
friendships exist. They are prepared for im-
provem(Mit and for rapid advancement, under
favorable circumstances.
MISSION.
LoxDOx Missionary Society. — This Society,
from the time of its formation, had an eye upon
Madagascar as a missionary field; and, in
1S18, two married missionaries, Messrs. Jones
and Bevan, were sent out ; and having left their
families at Mauritius, they proceeded to Mad-
agascar, and found every encouragement for
commencing a mission. They returned to
Mauritius for their families, and again, early
in 1819, reached the coast of Madagascar.
But in a very short time Mr. and Mrs. Bevan
and ]Mrs. Jones, with their children, were re-
moved by death, and Mr. Jones was so disabled
by serious illness, as to be obliged to return to
Mauritius. They had lauded on the coast dur-
ing the rainy season, the most sultry and un-
healthy portion of the year.
In 1820, the mission w^as recommenced by
Rev. D. Jones, at Tananarivo, the capital, in
the district of Ankova. This was in the in-
terior of the island, the most salubrious and
populous part of the country ; and the mission
was commenced with the express sanction of
Radama, the chief, or king as he styled himself.
From that time the mission j^roceedcd without
interruption for fifteen years. In its early
stages it had to encounter the jealousy of the
natives, whose ideas of Europeans were associ-
ated with the slave trade ; and many of the
natives whose interests were involved in the
traffic opposed the proceedings of the king, in
forming a treaty with Great Britain for its
suppression, and in encouraging the residence
of Europeans among them. And some of the
people imagined that the schools were nurseries
for making their children more valuable- when
sold into slavery ; and some of them fancied
that their offspring werc purchased by white
men as articles of food !
For a considerable time, the efforts of the
missionaries were directed almost exclusiyely
to the instruction of the children in schools,
under the sanction of government. But two
facts in the history of this mission, show that
this was a mistaken policy : " One is, that the
majority of natives converted to a profession
of the Gospel, so as to afford credible evidence
of piety, consists of adults not trained in the mis-
sion schools, but impressed by the preaching of
the Gospel, or by conversation with those who
had received it. The other is, that most of
those who embraced the truth, volantarily and
immediately commenced learning to read, how-
ever much engaged in secular business, or ad-
vanced in life."
During the first fifteen years of this mission,
the whole Bible was translated, corrected, and
printed in the native language, at the capital,
aided by the British and Foreign Bible Soci-
ety ; 20,000 tracts and 1000 copies of Russell's
Catechism were also printed. About 100
schools had been established, with 4000 schol-
ars ; and during that period 10,000 to 1.5,000
had received the benefit of instruction in these
schools. Tv/o printing-presses were established
at the capital, by the London INlissiouary So-
ciety. A ly^alagasy and English dictionary
was published in two volumes. Two large
congregations were formed at the capital, and
nearly 200 persons applied for admission to the
church. Adult Bible classes were formed for
the regular and systematic study of the Bible.
Various preaching stations w'ere visited every
Sabbath ; aud the minds of multitudes had
become enlightened in regard to the truths of
Ciu-istiauity, and had renounced the supersti-
tious customs of the country. Meetings for
prayer were held, convened and conducted by
the natives themselves. At a village about
60 miles from the capital, a small chapel had
been erected by the natives, chiefly through
the influence and exertions of a pious woman ;
622
MADAGASCAR.
and public worship, cliiefly for reading the
Scriptures and prayer, was held in many dis-
tant parts of the country, conducted bythosc
who were formerly teachers or scholars in the
mission schools.
lu addition to the missionaries a number of
artisans were sent to Madagascar, in fulfilment
of the treaty between Iladama and the British
Government, by whose instruction habits of
thought, attention, industry, and application,
were generated, a spirit of inquiry fostered, and
a general advancement in civilization secured.
Besides these influences much good was accom-
plished by the religious exertions of these pious
missionary artisans, who embraced suitable op-
portunities for communicating religious as well
as secular knowledge. The female members
of the mission also accomplished much good,
by instructing the native women.
Numerous causes were operating to produce
an extensive change in the minds, manners,
habits, and institutions of the people ; but in
that change, the Madagascar government did
not sympathize. They looked upon it from
the beginning with a jealous eye ; and, fearing
its progress, they determined to crush it. It
is believed that this feeling was indulged by
Iladama himself His successor, the queen,
though possessing a masculine will, has never
shown any indication of superior intelligence.
She is slightly ac(|uainted with the elements
of reading and writing. But she never availed
herself of the opportunity of becoming familiar
witli tiie instructions of European teachers.
She has always been strongly attached to the
superstitions of the country, and cherished a
veneration for the luitional gods. Ilcr acces-
sion to tlie throne was pu1)licly attributed to
the gods, and she necessarily felt bound to sus-
tain their authority. One of the hereditary
guardians of the principal idol, llainiharo, wa.-^
appointed, as it was i)retended, Ijy the com-
mand of the idol, to remain with the queen.
Two parties were furmed at court ; the idol
party, of whom this man was the head, and
the party who sought to extend education, and
to carry out and enlarge tlie measures of Ilad-
ama, which consisted of Andriamihiaja and
his friends. But, in about two years after the
accession of the queen, the idol party prevailed,
and Andriamihiaja, as already stated, was mur-
derc<l.
The idolatrous party represented the mis-
sionaries and teachers as having some political
designs, and so wrouglit upfin the jealousies
and fears of the queen to prejudice her against
them. The first indication of this was numi-
fested in an abrupt order for Rev. I). (JrifTiths
to leave the country, on the ground that the
period of five years, to which his jiermission to
remain extended, had expired. Similar mea-
sures were jiur.'^ued with regard to other mis-
hionurics. 'I'owards the close of 18.31, the ])or-
mission wliidi hud previously been given for
the iidiiiiiii-tnitinii of baptism and the Lord's
Supper was recalled. The next year, slaves
were prohibited learning to read and write.
This M'as believed to have been done because
many free people were in the habit of purchas-
ing slave children, to place in the schools in-
stead of their own, certain towns and villages
being required to furiiish a given number of
children for the schools ; and parents were uu-
willing to place their children where they
might so soon be drawn off to the army and
jxn'ish.
In the fall of 1834, a circumstance trans-
spired, which tended still further to prejudice
the mind of the queen against Christianity,
and to hasten the crisis. A middle-aged man,
a keeper of an idol, had experienced in 1832 a
succession of calamities, which rendered him
melancholy; and meeting with a native Chris-
tian, who conversed with him on the subject
of religion, a deep impression was made on his
mind ; and, disregarding the advice of the
native Christian to seek further instruction, he
immediately set about preaching to the inhab-
itants of his native village, telling them of the
day of judgment, the resurrection, and of the
happy time when all men would receive Chris-
tianity, and live in peace with one another.
He imagined himself raised up for a reformer,
and proTessed to receive immediate revelation
from God ; and very soon he began to mix the
worship of his old idol with that of the true
God, probably with the hope of conciliating
the queen. In the course of two years, he had
gained 200 followers. In 1834, this man sent
to the vqueen that he had an important mes-
sage for her. His message was received by
Ilainiharo, the principal officer, who was in-
formed that this man's followers were very
numerous. This rou.sed the jealousy of the
government, •and the whole party Avas sum-
moned to the capital. "When they arrived,
they stated that they had a message from God
to the queen, to the effect that she was to be
the sovereign of all the world ; that the dead
would rise, and the living never die ; tluit all
would then live peaceably and happily, for
there would be an end i)ut to the ordeal of
tangena, divination, murder, wars, and conten-
tion ; and they offered to forfeit their heads, if
these things were false, " for," said they, *' God
ha,s told us these things, and God caiuiot lie."
After an examination of two or three days, the
man, with three of his principal followei-s, was
condemned to death, and led to the north end
of the town, and put head downwards in a
rice-pit. and l)oiling water poured on them;
after which, the i)it was closed upon them, and
filled up with earth. A number more of the
party were cruelly jiut to death, and the rest
were' sold into slavery and their property con-
fiscated ; which vielded a l)rofit of ^Q\v\a\
thousand dollars 'to the queen, officers, and
judges, thus giving tliem a taste f(.r plunder.
'The queen and licr advi.<;ers being ignorant of
the i)riuciplcs of Christianity, it was natural
MADAGASCAR.
523
tliat they should identify this fanatical sect
with the Christians ; and hence the occun-ence
tended greatly to their prejudice.
Prejudice was further excited by the indis-
cretion of some young converts, who under-
took to be teachers of others before they had
themselves become fully acquainted with the
principles of Christianity. The statements
made by native converts were also misunder-
stood and misrepresented. In the beginning
of 1835, a native, addressing a small congre-
gation at the capital, was overheard to say
that ere long God would i)unish all the work-
ers of iniquity, and reward those who had
loved and served him. The expressions M'ere
reported to the queen, and she ordered spies
to be sent next time to bring a fuller report.
The subject was the resurrection, and the
speaker said, '• All must rise, and God alone
will be the judge. Every one in this country
will be raised and judged then." It was re-
ported to the queen that he had said the in-
habitants other country alone would be judged
by God in that day. " It is false !" cried the
queen. '• Other sovereigns are allowed to judge
their people as they please, and am I alone to
be prohibited? If so, God indeed is partial.
Besides, how should they know that God will
raise the dead ?'' After this, a young man, a
native convert, who held a meeting at some
distance from the capital, had given offence to
the people, by working on Saturday, their
sacred day, and speaking disrespectfully of
their idol. In revenge, they accused him to
the queen ; but instead of punishing him, she
ordered the ordeal of tangena to be adminis-
tered, by which he was declared innocent.
Having retired to a private village a few days,
according to the usual custom, he came up to
town in a public procession, which, being
joined by a number of the native Christians,
dressed in white robes, was much larger than
on ordinary occasions. The queen happened
to see the procession, and inquired what it
meant. She was informed that it was the
young man's procession whom she had ordered
to pass the ordeal, and that the persons dressed
in white were native Christians. " You would
be surprised," they added, " at the love of these
people for one another ; M'hen any one of them
happens to be in distress, they all feel dis-
tressed, and when any one is happy, they are
all happy ; when any are poor or destitute,
they form a society to assist them ;" meaning
that they collect money of one another to
aSbrd relief " I am indeed surprised," replied
the queen, " to see such things in my country.
Was it not I who ordered him to take the
ordeal, and why do they now make such an
exhibition, as if they had overcome an enemy ?
All this is intended for me, I suppose."
These circumstances created so much pre-
judice in the mind of the queen, as to prepare
her to receive any charges that might be
brought against the whole body of the Chris-
tians. The officer who had accused this young
man in the first instance, felt picjued at his
acquittal, and hearing that the queen was dis-
pleased with the procession, determined to
bring an accusation against the whole body of
the Christians. And, in order to get some-
thing upon which to found an accusation, he
went to one of their meetings, where he heard
a slave addressing the congregation, from
Josh. 34 : 14, 15, exhorting them to forsake
the gods which their fathers had served, and to
serve Jehovah and Jesus Christ. He thea
represented to the queen that there Avere in
and around the capital certain people who
were seeking to change the customs of the
country, who despised the idols, and divina-
tions, and all the customs of their forefathers ;
entering into a league with the English, hold-
ing meetings in the night, and urging all pre-
sent to serve Jehovah and Jesus Christ ; and
he supposed that Jehovah was the first king
of England, and Jesus Christ the second, and
that the idols they were urged to forsake were
the queen and her successors. " Besides," said
he, " these meetings are carried on by slaves.
We cannot see the end of these things ; but
we fear that these people, who have become so
friendly with the English, will attempt to
transfer the kingdom of the queen to them."
Such a communication was well calculated to
arouse the suspicious temper of the queen ;
and she burst into tears, and then swore that
she would put a stop to these things, and that
with the shedding of blood. And soon after-
wards she ordered the judges to convene tho
people at- the capital, on Sunday, March 1.
The previous Sabbath she had ordered the
sewing women, (the women whom the female
missionaries had taught to sew,) to meet in the
court yard to sew for her. Passing by them,
she said, with a contemptuous sneer, " You had
better go and ask permission of the Europeans
to come and sew for me on the Sabbath. You
observe the day like the English ; I do not.
You had better go and ask their permission."
In the evening of the same day, as she was re-
turning home from a bull-fight, passing the
chapel and hearing the singing, she said,
" These people will not leave off till some of
their heads *are taken from their shoulders."
The next Tuesday, orders were given to pro-
cure a list of all the houses where prayer-meet-
ings were held, and the names of all the bap-
tized persons. The c|ueen was astonished at
their numbers, and swore that she would put
to death the owners of the houses. She ap-
peared now exceedingly violent against the
Christians. One of her officers, named Eain-
ingatabe, rose and said that though she might
think proper to destroy him, he could not re-
frain from speaking his mind ; and he entreated
her to consider well what she proposed to do
to these people ; for he had for years had op-
portunity to observe their conduct, and he as-
sured her that he had seen none more upright,
524:
MADAGASCAR,
diligent, faithful aud trustworthy. Besides
this° he said they were the most intelligent
people in the country ; and if she put one of
them to death she would be the loser/ and
would be sorry for it. After a long pause, the
queen said, " I thank you for your advice. I
]!ave indeed a father and a mother in you :
you do not conceal from me what you think
will be of service to the kingdom. We shall
consider well what to do with them." Andria-
nisa then rose up and said he very highly ap-
proved of the advice that had been given, and
added that almost all the new things that had
been introduced for the good of the country,
had been introduced by the English ; and that
if any who had been placed under the instruc-
tion of the P^uropeaus should be put to death,
it would be a reproach to the queen's country.
The queen had also sunnnoned some of the
head people from other districts, to give their
opiniuii as to jjutting to death one or two of
the most active Christians in each district.
They did not hesitate to express their disap-
probation of such a measure.
On 'J'hursday, the missionaries re.ceived a
letter from the (lucen, forbidding them to
teach Christianity to the natives, but allowing
them to teach the arts and sciences. To this
they rc])lied, remonstrating against the order,
but without effect. The rest of the week was
a time of great excitement among all parties.
At length the day of the dreaded assembly
came, and the people flocked in from all quar-
ters, amid the jjaradc of troops and the roar
of artillery. After the meeting had been
opened with pompous addresses, the queen
sent a message, couched in the style of oriental
bombast, in which she called on all who had
been liaptized, or who had attended places of
Christian worship, to come and accuse them-
selves, threatening with death all who re-
fused, and forbidding the performance of
Christian worship, or changing the customs of
the country.
Many ol" those who bad attended on Chris-
tian worship, and among others, the twelve
principal teachers, came forward, and accused
then)selves, and made their submi-ssion ; but
others remained faithful, and boldly told the
persons appointed to receive confc.'^.-;ions, ""We
did no evil, and intended none to the queen or
ber kingdom, in our prayers and our observ-
ance of the Sabbath. "NVc prayed to the
Cod of Heaven to prosper her reign." Being
a.sk((l how nuiny times they had j)rayed and
worshij)ed Cod, they said tlicy could not tell.
" We always,"' said they, '• jjrayed before going
to our W(jrk in the morning, and before going
to sleep in the evening, also before and after
eating, and often at other moments in the
cc'urs-c (,f the day." A man of considerable
inllucnco from a Ilistant district, being asked
Low many times he had prayed, said he could
not tell, Init that for the last three or four
years be had not .«pcnt a single day without
offering prayer several times a day, but that
he asked for nothing injurious to any one.
The judges asked him to give them a specimen
of his prayer, which he did in the presence of
the multitude. He said he confessed his sins
before Cod, implored his forgiveness, and
asked for help to enable him to live without
sinning, that he might be holy and prepared
for heaven. The same blessings he asked for
his family and friends, for the queen, and for
all her subjects. " I asked all these things,"
said he, " in the name of Jesus Christ, for we
sinners can receive nothing from Cod but
through his Son Jesus Christ, who died for
sinners." The judges acknowledged that his
prayers were good, but as the queen did not
approve of such things, they ought not to be
done in her country.
During this time of trial a small company
of the converts met for prayer at midnight,
every night in the week, and many of them
said they had never before enjoyed so much in
drawing near to Cod. Among these was an
olTicer of high rank, who had never before de-
clared himself as a Christian. AVhen asked
by a friend why he joined the Christians at
this time, he replied that he perceived so much
injustice in the proceedings of the government,
that he determined to join the injured party,
and that after having united with tliem in
these meetings, he had felt so much jileasurc
in their comjiany that he resolved to take
their God as his Cod, and their people as his
people. And as to accusing himself, he had
determined not to do it until convinced that
he had done wa-ong in attending the meetings.
ITis wife has since become a convert, and the
refugees who fled to England were greatly in-
debted to him and his wife lor having conceal-
ed them for some time in his house.
During the following week many reports
were circulated, and aj)prelKnsions entertained
that some would be put to death. It was ex-
pected that the final result would be announced
on the expiration of the week, but it was the
policy of the governnu'nt to keep the people in
suspense, that they might fear the worst. The
people were summoned again on the i)th, and
the queen sent another bombastic and threat-
ening conununicati(jn, in. which she reduced
the rank of those officers of the government
who had been at the meetings, which punish-
ment was received by them with the most de-
grading servility. The number thus reduced
was not less than 400.
In the cour.'^e of the second week in .March,
orders were issued that all ])ersons wiut hud
received any books from the Europeans should
deliver them U]t, and not conceal even a leaf,
on pain of death ; and orders were sent to all
the outposts to collect in the books, .'^ome of
which had been carried 300 miles from the ca-
|)ital. The books were delivered up by the
Christians, with great grief, but it is tuj.posed
that many were retained aud concealed. After
MADAGASCAR.
525
tlie books •vrere all collected, the queen ordered
four ofiBc'ers to examine them, and ascertain if
any of them were free from obnoxious expres-
sions. The twelve senior teachers were called
on to read them to the officers. As the Bible
was the largest book, it was taken first. They
found no fault with the first verse ; but as the
word darkness occurred in the second, they
said that the queen did not like darkness, and
therefore the book was condemned. The hymn
book was taken next, and that was condemned,
because the word JehovaJt, was found in it.
Then several tracts and catechisms were ex-
amined, but in all these the words " Jesus
Christ," " Jehovah," " darkness," " hell," " Sa-
tan," or " resurrection " occurred, and they
were condemned. After the verdict had been
pronounced upon all that had been printed in
the Malagasy language, the examination of
books in other languages commenced. A He-
brew Bible was first taken, of which the read-
er knew about as little as the hearers, but he
pretended to read it off with fluency ; yet as it
was incomprehensible to the officers they pro-
nounced against it. The English and French
books, with a few Latin and Greek, shared
the same fate. These were afterwards sent
back to the missionaries as European property,
but while in the hands of the government,
they were kept in an old unoccupied building,
where the rats were so plenty that it was
feared the books would be devoured by them ;
and the soldiers were directed to provide cats,
and keep them on the spot, and a weekly al-
lowance Wi^s made from the royal treasury to
provide meat for the canine guards.
The missionaries continued to impart instruc-
tion and comfort to the native Christians, up
to the time of their departure, in 183G.
The number of converts had gradually in-
creased, notwithstanding the difficulties under
which they labored, and the dangers to which
they were exposed. The Lord's Supper was
administered in private, and several were bap-
tized. They increased in spiritual knowledge,
even more than they had done before the per-
secution arose. A strong bond of union was
formed among them, which continues to the
present day. Before the missionaries left, they
supplied each one with a copy of the Bible,
some of whom walked more than a hundred
miles to obtain it. A sick man, who had not
been able to leave his house for five months,
traveled sixty miles, and when he received the
Bible, he pressed it to his bosom, saying,
" This contains the words of eternal life ; it is
my life, and I will take as much care of it as
of my own life." He has since been compelled
to leave his home, and take refuge in the for-
ests, for his adherence to the faith. Before the
departure of the missionaries, they translated
the Pilgrim's Progress into Malagasy ; and
eight copies were written out by the native
Christians, and left in their hands ; and it has
proved a great comfort and blessing to them.
The London Tract Society afterwards printed
1000 copies, which were sent to them.
The missionaries remained till they had
completed the translation and printing of the
whole Bible, when they came to the conclusion
to leave, as they were forbidden to impart re-
ligious instruction, and their presence only
excited the jealousy of the queen, and increas-
ed the rigors of the persecution. Messrs.
Freeman, Cameron, Chick, and Kitching left
Madagascar in June, 1835 ; and Messrs. Johns
and Baker remained another year, to see if
any changes were likely to take place favora-
ble to the prosecution of the mission. That
was a year of suspense, anxiety, and pain to
them. The servants of the missionaries who
left were subjected to the murderous ordeal of
tangena, and two of them died. The infant
of another was suffocated the day after its
birth, by order of the queen, because it was
born on a " fatal day." The oppressions of
the government became more and more cruel.
The Sabbath was purposely desecrated by
public works and amusements. Vice, disease,
and j^overty increased at a fearful rate. Grad-
ually the faithful became known to the mis-
sionaries and to each other. Sometimes a
recognition took place by a reference to Jer.
38 : 15, which was answered by the following
verse. After some time the native Christians,
began to hold secret meetings at their own
houses, at the houses of the missionaries, and
on the summits of solitary mountains. At
length, after leaving 70 complete Bibles, and
several boxes of psalters, Testaments, spelling
and hymn books, catechisms and tracts, chiefly
buried underground, Messrs. Johns and Baker,
sorrowfully and in great depression of mind,
left Madagascar, and arrived at Mauritius in
September, 183G.
Just before they set out from the capital, the
storm burst out afresh, and its earliest object
was Kafaravavy. She had been a convert be-
fore the suppression of Christianity. Before
her conversion, she had been so devoted to
idolatry that, when there was not a meal of
rice in the house, the money required to pur-
chase it was paid to the support of idol wor-
ship. But wlien she embraced Christianity,
she became one of the most zealous converts.
She took one of the largest houses in the cap-
ital, for the purpose of maintaining a prayer-
meeting ; and she did much to secure the
attendance of others on the means of grace.
A short time before the missionaries left, she
was accused by three of her servants of read-
ing the Bible and praying on the Sabbath,
with nine of her companions ; and the charge
was received, though it was contrary to law to
receive an accusation from slaves against their
masters. As they did not return home, her
father, who was a heathen, went after them
and put them in irons. But they were released
by the interference of Rafaravavy, by whom
they were addressed with so much earnestness
62G
MADAGASCAR.
that she found reason to hope they had become
new creatures. The judj^e informed her father
of the accu.sation, and advi-^^ed him to persuade
her to accuse herself, and make knowu her
companions. She readily acknowledged to
him that she prayed, but steadily refused to,
betray her associates. The queen, on hearing
of the c;ise, was in a great rage, and gave
orders to put lier to death immediately ; but,
as her father had rendered great service to the
government, some influential persons at court
pei-suaded her to a more lenient course.
"While these things were in progress, Rafar-
avavy contrived to reach Mr. Johns's house just
before he left. It was about 3 o'clock in the
morning. She was fully expecting to be put
to death. The interview was afl'ecting on
both sidc-s. Mrs. Johns remarks, " I shall
never forget the serenity and composure she
displaj-ed while she related to me the consola-
tion she enjoyed in pleading the promises, and
in drawing near to Uod in prayer." 1'lie
queen decided to spare her life ; but fined her
to the amount of half her property, and half
her own value, if sold into slavery. Soon
after, she found that she was very narrowly
watched by her father and friends ; and she
determined to sell her house in the capital, and
purchase one in a retired spot in the suburbs.
The little band continued to meet, sometimes at
her house, sometimes at the house of one of
her frienils, and sometimes on a mountain.
The number of those confiding in each
other as Christians now rapidly increased ;
and many coming from Yonizongo made
Eafaravavy's house their home while at the
cajiital. Ill the early part of 1837, Mr. Johns
^Yrote from .Mamitius to .some of the Christians
at the capital, intimating his intention of vis-
iting 'I'aniatave in the cour.'Je of the season.
Ha.'^omaka (Jo.senh) ami others were deputed
to meet him. TLey left their friends in peace
and tranfjuillity. They carried with them a
number of letters from the native Christians.
The following e.\(raet from a joint letter of
the whole band will show the spirit that ani-
mated them :
" "When we consider our guilt and pollution,
and the evil that dwells in our hearts, then
we soon faint ; but when we renumber and
reflect upon the mercy of (JimIuikI the redeni]*-
tion thire is in JeiJUS, and when we call to
mind the promise.^, then our hearts take confi-
dence, and we believe that Jesus can cleanse
us and bring us to heaven ; and when we meet
there, we will tell you all that has befallen us
by the way while Vet here on earth. lU' the
strength of (iod we shall go forward, an«l not
fear what nuiy befall us ; but we will go in
the jiower of the Lord, and if accus^ed by the
t'iiple, we will still go straight forwanl, for we
now that if we deny him before men, Je.'jus
will deny us b<-fore his Father. All the Chris-
tians are teaching others to read. 'I'here are
ten with one friend, six with another, four with
another, and so the number is quietly aug-
menting. The Bibles that were left in our
possession have all been circulated, and many
are wishing to obtain complete copies.''
Some time after the dejjarture of those who
had been deputed to meet Mr. Johns at 'J'ama-
tave, he heard that persecution had broken out
afresh ; and afterwards he received a letter in-
forming him that fourteen of the Christians
had been a])preliended, and sold into slavery. \
It afterwards appeared, that w hile the brethren J
were at Tamatuve, two women had entered a |
complaint against ten of the Christians, with
the hope of getting a share of their property.
Kafaravavy was immediately apprehended, and i
the next day all the rest of the ten, except I
Rasomaka, who had not yet returned from
Tamatave, and Rafaralahiandrianisa, from \on-
izongo, who was saved, Ixcause his accusers
did not know his name. Some time. inter-
vened before sentence was pronounced ; and
Rafaravavy was frequently examined and im-
portuned to disclose her companions. Rut
while she freely confessed that she prayed to
God who made all things; and whatever the
queen might be pleased to do with her, she
confessed that she had done this, but steadily
refused to implicate others.
Paul, another of the accused, when the ofG-
cers came to apprihend him, said, " I have
certainly prayed to the Gcd who created me
and supported me, and who made all things, to
make me a good man ; to bless the queen and
give her real happine.<s, both in this world and
that which is to come ; to ble.«s the efiieers
and judges, and all the people, £md to make
them so good that there might be no more
highwaymen and liars in the country; and
that God would make all the people wise and
good." This discreet answer liad some e fleet
upon the oOicers ; and some of them said they
saw no harm in all that ; and one said, " ImI
us do nothing rashly, lest we should advise the
(jueen to shed innocent blood." Rut another
said, " The (jueen has ft)rbidden any to pray to
Jehovah, and they have done it ; and, liaving
despised the command of the (|ueen, are guilty."
The government wius a fortnight consider-
ing what punishnunt to inflict on the aceu.«ed.
On the fourteenth day, the peoj)le in the mar-
ket were summontd, and reei'ived a nu'ssage
from the (puvn to go and .«eize the pn'i)erty
of Rafaravavy. She knew nothing of the order,
till some of the people came rushing into her
house, almost out of breath, and began lo seize
and carry away whatever they could lay their
hands on"; and.'in a very .'^hort time, every thing
she had was carrie«l away, and her houiH' pullt d
down, and the nuiterial.^ carried oflT. She wa.s
then orden-d to follow four of tlio Tsiarvtxlaliu.
the daivseniplovi din putting criminals todeath.
Siie expected to be imnudialely put to d( ath.
She went on, repeating lo hers«lf. " Lonl Jesu.s
receive mv spirit," and feeling that she iiad
done with' the body. She was followed by
MADAGASCAR.
627
several native Christians, who encouraged and
comforted her. But instead of going directly
to the place of execution, they turned aside
into a house by the way, and put heavy irons
on her, the queen having ordered her to be
put to death before daylight the next morn-
ing. But that night a lire burst out in the
capital, burnt down many houses, and created
so much confusion, that the queen's order was
neglected. The fire occasioned a good deal of
remark. Many said it seemed like a judg-
ment from heaven, on account of the persecu-
tion of the Christians ; and it was thought to
have had some effect upon the superstitious
fears of the queen herself.
The rest of the company were divided among
the officers, Paul being jjiit in irons and placed
in a separate house. At length, the judgment
of the queen was given, in a public assembly,
that they should be reduced to perpetual sla-
very, so that their friends should never be allow-
ed to redeem them.
Rasalama, when deceitfully told that all the
rest had informed of her companions, was in-
duced to mention the names of several, who
had not yet been impeached ; and when she after-
wards ascertained that she had been the means
of their apprehension, she was deeply grieved.
During her confinement as a prisoner she was
overheard to express her astonishment that the
people of Cod should be treated in this man-
ner, and to say, " I was not afraid, but rather
rejoiced that I was counted worthy to suffer
affliction for believing in Jesus ; I had hoj^e
of the life in heaven." This was reported to
the judges, and she was put in irons and cruelly
beaten. Keferring to the information she had
given of her companions, she said, " My life
shall go for them." She was ordered for exe-
cution the next morning, and in the mean time,
put in irons, which forced the extremities to-
gether, and put the whole body in an excru-
ciating position. Being led to the place of
execution the next morning, she expressed her
joy that she had received the knowledge of the
truth, and continued singing hynnis on the
way. On reaching the fatal spot, and having
received permission to kneel down and pray,
she calmly committed her spirit into the hands
of the Lord Jesus, and while thus engaged was
pierced through the heart by the spears of the
executioners ; and her body was left to be de-
voured by the dogs.
As soon as the two brethren had returned
from Tamatave, they also were apprehended,
their goods confiscated, and they and their
wives reduced to slavery. They were divided
among the officers of government, and treated
in the most cruel aud brutal manner, the ob-
ject apparently being to make their condition
as uncomfortable and wretched as possible ;
all which they bore with Christian meekness
and resignation.
Bafaravavy was kept in irons for five mouths,
expecting all the while to be led out for execu-
tion. It was supposed that the regard the
government entertained for her father was the
means of saving her life. Her friends did all
they could to alleviate her suffl'rings, visiting
her as often as they dursj, taking Mith them
Christian books and reading to her, the guards
remaining outside ; and they were not a little
encouraged to find her sustaining her afflictions
so cheerfully. Her conversation with the
guards and with other persons who visited her,
was so discreet and edifying as to produce a
very favorable impression upon their minds.
When ask(d if she was not sorry that she had
brought this trouble on herself, she replied,
'• How can I be sorry for the pardon of my sins,
and asking God to bless me and make me for
ever happy ? " She was at length sold into sla-
very, but, as it was supposed by design, she lell
into the hands of a distant relation of hers, who
treated her kindly, allowing her to go and come
as she pleased, provided she punctually finished
her work. During this time she was visited
by her husband, a colonel in the army, who,
hearing of her condition, had obtained liberty
to spend a few months at the capital. The
other Christians who had been sold into slav-
ery, had been in the habit of meeting for pray-
er and religious conversation at the house of
a young man named Rafaralahy, who had built
a house for the purpose a short distance from
the village where he resided. After being re-
leased, she found out the little band and united
herself with them. But they were soon dis-
covered, and Rafaralahy was put to death, and
all who had met at his house, so far as they
could be discovered, were apprehended. This
was brought about by the perfidy of a man
named Rafiakarana, who had received Chris-
tian instruction and baptism, and appeared
zealous for the truth, but had apostatized on
the suppression of Christianity, and become
openly vicious. Rafaralahy having formerly
received instruction from him, conversed with
him, and thinking he had gained him, received
him into parlnersliip, and disclosed to him the
facts respecting the meetings of the Christians ;
but his kindness was requited by being cruelly
betrayed. Those who had not been apprehend-
ed before, were dealt with more leniently ; but
Rafaravavy, Paul, Joseph, and others who had
been accused before, having nothing to expect
l)ut death, they were advised by their Christian
friends to seek safety by flight. But they
knew not where to go. At first, they thought
of attempting to go to a neighboring province
which was at war with JIadagascar. But the
dangers and difficulties in the way appeared
insurmountable, 'i'hree of the company were
concealed for several months in a forest near
the capital, and fed by a friend in the city,
until his means were exhausted. Others of the
party, including the women, wandered about,
from one village to another, concealed some-
times in houses, sometimes in pits, and in bogs,
the country meanwhile being filled with sol-
528
MADAGASCAR.
diers in search of thcra. At length Mr. Johns
having visited Tamatavc, took measures to make
it known througli the country that he was there ;
and the refugees sent one of their number to as-
certain whether they could not escape by sea ;
and a plan was arranged between him and a
friend atTamatave,who held a post of influence,
to efl'cct the object. A party of them immediate-
ly set out for Tamatavc, where, after enduring
incredible hardships, and experiencing many
hair-breadtli escapes, they arrived in safety,
and embarked for ^Mauritius. Six of them,
Eafaravavy. (Mary,) Razafy, (Sarah,^ wife of
Andrianiliiina, Andrianomanana, (Simeon,^
Eosoamaka, (Joseph.) Eatrarahamba, (David.)
and Adrianisa, (James,) soon after embarked
for England, where they arrived in May, 1839,
and received the sympathies and friendship of
British Chri.stian.s. Six more remained at
Mauritius, Andrianilaina, thehusband of Sarah,
separating from his wife and remaining behind,
with the hope of being able to render aid to the
Christians in Madagascar.
At the time of the martyi-dom of Eafaralahy,
an eminently pious young woman was appre-
hended and sold into perpetual slavery. Her
husband had previously divorced her, and her
father had disowned her ; and her relations,
preferring that she should die rather than dis-
grace them, procured her trial V»y the tangena,
under the effects of which she perished. Alany
of the Christians who had effected their escape
from the capital, but not out of the country,
have continued to suffer innumerable hardships
and difficulties ; and it is supposed that many
of them have perished through extreme fa-
tigue, hunger, nakedne!M, di.^ease, and anxiety.
At length, under the pretext of fearing that,
if brought to the capital for trial, they might
practice sorcery upon her, the queen i.<sued or-
ders to her soldiers to put the Christians to
death at once, wherever they might be found,
by digging a pit, tying them by the hands and
feet, tiiru.sting them head downwards into the
pit, and pouring b(jiling water on them till
thoy perisiied. Murder by the ordeal of tan-
gena waa proceeding on a large scale. On
one occasion, it was administered to COO, 500
of whom peri.shed.
The manner in which these Chri.stian3 have
borne their trials, and mit the terrors of mar-
tyrdom, is worthy of apostolic times. "When
brought to the final test, not one of them ha*
renounccil the Saviour's name, from tlie terrors
of martyrdom. Nominal professors, indeed, in
great nunilnrs, hastened to purge them.«elvi>s.
on the first breaking out of pei-seeution ; but
iKiue of tlio-Kc who adhered to their jirofession
have been led to renounce it by the terrors of
niurtjTdom.
But one groat Icfwon forces itself upon our
attention. 'I'ho connection of the Madaga.<:car
luiKHion with the native gnvorninent has jiroved
one of (he grcuti-st imjx'diments to its success ;
aud ehowa beyond (jui-stion, what appears evi-
dent also in other missions, that the more en-
tirely disconnected missions are from all polit-
ical or governmental alliances, the less embar-
rassments they will meet with, and the more
successful they will be. Christianity does not
need the support of the state, and when allied
with it, will always find itself oppressed.
The injustice and cruelty of the infatuated
queen continued to rage with increased vio-
lence and fatal success. Many of her people
sought a sanctuary on the tops of the moun-
tains, or in the caves of the wilderness, where
they might enjoy liberty of mind, and hold fel-
lowshij) with each other and with God. In
June, 1840, sixteen of them determined to
seek under British protection in Mauritius, the
liberty of conscience which they could not
enjoy in their native land. But they were dis-
covered on their journey to the coast, and con-
ducted back to the capital. Two of them
escaped on the way ; five were condemned to
perpetual slavery ; and nine were doomed to
die, and, after being led up in front of the
deserted mission house, they were conducted to
the place of execution, and, while kneeling
down, were speared to death.
The following year, as appears by letters
from some of the native Christians, 3,000 per-
sons had been subjected to the ordeal of tan-
gena at Ponizongo. But, amid these fiery tri-
als they were sustained liy the gracious pre-
sence and faithful promises of the Saviour,
and not one of those accounted believers had
proved traitor and denied Christ.
In January. 1842, four of the six Malagasy .
refugees who ha(J visited England, returned to
Mauritius with the hope of being able to ben-
efit their people. Joseph and Mary were
comfortably settled on ^linow Maml, a few
miles from the western coast of Madagascar,
where they were usefully employed among their
own peojlle. David was en)j)ioyed at (jrand
13ay, Mauritius, in the instruction of the Mala-
gasy apjuentici^. and James was emi)Ioyed as
interpreter on board a British ves.sel.
On the 1st of May, 1842. Eev. David Jones,
one of the oldi^t surviving members of the
Madagascar mission, died of paralysis, at Port
Louis, on the i.sland of Mauritius.
During this year, five new victims were
added to the glorious (^oml)any of martyrs ;
and there was no abatement, but rather an
inerea.se in the suspicion aud cruelty of the
(jueen and her government.
In 1843. .Mr. Johns, another of the Society's
devoted missionaries, met his death on the
island of Nosibe, on the north-ea'itern const of
Madagascar, luiving been driven by the P>cnch
authorities, at tlx' instigation of a Catholic
priest, from the island of Nosiniitsio. where,
111 connection with the two Malagasy Chris-
tians, Joseph and Mary, he was attempting to
establish a mission.
In 1817. the report of the society says, that
though still per.<ecutoil, the native Chri.^ians
MADAGASCAR.
529
of this afflicted island continue to increase
and multiply.
By the blessing of God bestowed on the
labors of a young and zealous convert, named
Ramaka or llasalasala, there had been a great
awakening, and 100 new converts had been
added to their number ; and among them was
Rakotoudrama, only son of the queen, and
heir presumptive to the throne. Five months
after his conversion, the queen issued orders
for the apprehension of all the new converts
whose names had been reported to the govern-
ment, 21 of whom were condemned to die.
The young prince, then only 17 years old, no-
bly came forward, and used his influence to
save their lives, in which he was successful.
Nine of them, however, were obliged to sub-
mit to the ordeal of tangeua, one of whom
died ; four escaped ; and the rest were sen-
tenced to slavery, three of whom were imme-
diately redeemed by their friends, the prince
contributing largely towards the object. He
has continued to afford the persecuted follow-
ers of Christ the most conclusive evidence that
he is a faithful brother in the Lord. In defi-
ance of the laws, he assembled with them for
worship in their places of retreat ; and when
their lives or liberties were in danger, he em-
ployed all the means in his power to warn them
of impending danger, and effect their rescue.
The prime-minister; addressing the queen,
said, '• Madam, your sou is a Christian ; he
prays with the Christians, and encourages them
in this new doctrine. Wc arc lost tf your
Majesty do not stop the prince in this strange
way." " But," replied the queen, " he is my
son — 7ny only — my beloved son ! Let him do
what he pleases ; if he wishes to become a
Christian, let him ! He is my beloved son."
It is thus that the " earth helps the woman."
God, in this instance, makes use of the natural
affections of this cruel woman to protect his
people. But in a still more striking manner
did he turn the heart of this same prime-min-
ister. Being informed of a meeting of Chris-
tians at the capital, he sent his nephew to lake
down their names. The nephew went and
informed them of the object of his visit, and
begged them to break up and go home, which
they did. He then returned to his uncle, who
inquired, " Where is the list ?" '• There is ;
none," he replied. " Why have you disobeyed
my orders ?" the uncle again inquired. " Young ,
man, your head must fall, for you .show that
you also are a Christian." " Yes," he replied,
" I am a Christian ; and if you will, you nuxy
put me to death, for I miuit pray." At these
"words the cruel man's feelings gave way, and j
he exclaimed, " Oh, no, you shall not die ;" and |
there the matter ended. Still the persecution
did not cease. Christians continued to be \
despoiled of their goods, confined in chains, or ,
sold into slavery. And those who escaped
could only meet for worship in the night, or in ^
solitary caverns, or in the deep recesses of the
34
woods ; and even there they were not safe
from the government spies.
In 1850, a new i)ersecution broke out witli
great violence. Nearly 2,000 were summoned
to the capital to answer for the offence of wor-
shiping the only true God, and believing-
in his Son. Three of the most distinguished
for rank and devotedness were sentenced to bo
burnt to death ; and three times while their
bodies were consuming, the rain descended in
torrents, and extinguished the fires. Ten
others were thrown from a precipice near the
city, and dashed in pieces. The ])rinee now
interposed, at the risk of his life, and boldly
withstood the prime-minister, who was the
author of this cruelty.
The native converts, in a letter describing
this scene, say, " At the moment the first four
suflijrers were brought to the stake, a rainbow
of an immense size, and forming a triple arch,
stretched across the heavens. One end of it
appi'ared to rest on the posts to which the
martyrs were tied ; the rain, the meanwhile
falling in torrents. The multitudes were struck
with terror and amazement, and many of them
took to flight." In a letter requesting Bi-
bles, the following direction is given : " Put
them in the bottom of cases or small casks, — •
put some iron bars over them, and fill up with
bottles or eatables."
In reviewing the history of the Madagascar
mission, it presents one of the most remarka-
ble instances of the power of the Gospel on
record. From the commencement of the mis-
sion, in 1819 to 1828, the society sent out
fourteen laborers, consisting of six ordained
missionaries, two missionary printers, and six
missionary artizans. We have already given
the results of the first 15 years of the mission,
up to the time when the persecution com-
menced.
For seventeen years the same oppressive
policy was continued. Many hundreds were
degraded and impoverished ; hundreds more
doomed to slavery ; not less than one hundred
have been put to death, and a large munber
are still suffering exile, l)onds and degradation.
Yet, during this time of trial there has been,
an astonisliing increase in numbers. As be-
fore stated, there were at the capital about
200 church members. It is now impossible to
obtain an accurate statement of the number
of Christians on the island ; yet it has been
ascertained, from reliable authority, that there
are now in the capital and the immediate vi-
cinity. 1.000 persons known to each other, and
mutually recognized as the disciples of Christ,
who meet regularly on the Sabbath and at
other times, for the worship of God and the
administration of the ordinances. Besides
these, there are known to be considerable
numbers in other places. The Christians com
prise among them some of the most intelligent
and reputable men in the community. Many
of them hold offices of great responsibility.
530
ifADAGASCAK.
of their abflitr. integritr. and known Iafc-:r. I: ^ii said tha: no ef :r_; -s-rrf nared
worth. It is ioppDeed that their CcriiTiarLiry oj :lii ..iilr: aoi Lii rartj :o rr;-ec: ■.':!- ae-
is coomved at. oq acoDont of the ralae of their '^i??: n f "ii'r 7 ;crr r ^iz'^;. TL-rv r^- re<-r:i" ril
aorrices. And. among the cooverti are th-r bizi :: :Le v:-;::! ii iraei;^ia::::ei Vi-i :he
heir to the thp.ine and the n^Aew to the prime- "" tii;-r:^i :: r ~-""^-'""- icd'fc'ewitohei ":- the
■linister. the most bitter persecutor <:' thr '.'hriitiizis. ' ThLi — ii jcrwseii to "t-' the
Christiaie. V-^' -^ -^"^^ :ti^: 1: anifhe^i; =a:i :; z^^
la Janoarv. 1S53. the society r^'>r:vai h:- inil.-iLt 2t :I. ' _.-l:?t
td^eaee thau the jovemment had l-vn c:zi- ta.: :•. i^ :^h : : 1^-' i^-A
■itted to the yonn;r prince, and that *' - - — • -. - ■ .
of the late prime-minister had it ; j-eeiir
fitho-'s office : that the persentiic h^
SKpeaded. and the restrictions ur':z ::r^:_
iuiatuurse remoxed. In cotKeqnetoe ol* th
intellisence. th^ isEiied aa *j>peal to the Chris-
tian pablic for fonds to recoBnaeace the nis-
aon, which was Irboally responded to, and ui.
abost £3.QWt w^e rabed, as the Mada^ecar is :
fand. As a prepararorv measure, &e societ'^
resolred to send Rev. Mr. Ellia, ia eoB^ar'
with Mr. Cameron, one of the fomor oiision- a r
aries. to risit Madagascv, and ascRtaia the ar
trae state of things oa the isl--'' -n- -- ---. grr--:, .
tkoea readied Tanalave on Messrs. 1^
1853. and woe hamlj recov - -
offices. Fr(»a that place t!:
ktter to the qoeea, a^ie^ :
tiat of friendship and good-^
ttod to coDTerse on snch sal)^ ~
woold tend to the gi»i of th- , - ; )ve true,
15 days, they received a coort ■al in the
the goveraflKat, eoDtamh^
after the fbmo' misaoBarie^ _.
them, as there was Modi pabi.
qairing conaderable time, to
other ade of the waters. les-
orertakoi with the sickly ^
garded the answer as by no m
Whik remaininff at'Tama
tioB obtained all --
in reelect to Xbe a
learned that ^'-^^ -
hadbeeapQt
neorrect. T
Baiaiharo^ L
was stated tL^
the palace, ar
r, (rep.-Tt
of -
■rander-
howerer
the kic^
oae &ToVa--e to eiacaiica. :. - ^
Chnsdaoity ; and the other
mBo«aik»,'uid determined t
pentitiooB and ancient costct
At the head of the ibnaer par
pnnoe; and aoaK othen ho:
offices of the goverameat. A-
htter was a nephew of the qc
yoong prince, a Arewd, a:
■an, of considaaMe basines.-
property, leagaed with the r
portcKs of the i^Aa and their' '^^
aatkaaodtangaa^andofsla ^^^o^
jii.\. i/uisiaicae.
MADEIRA-
531
supposed to Iiave been the crater of a volcano, j defs Dictionary of Geography ; U. S. Exploring
The various branches of this mountain avQ Expedition.hy Coyi.yCjLKEs.Tol. I. -p. 6. ^
separated bv narrow glens, the sides of which J The Roman Catholic church is the establish-
are thinly covered with soil, but nevertheless ed religion of Madeira, and no other is tole-
fuUy reward the cultivation they receive, rated.
The lower slopes are covered with vines ; the '
higher declivities with the chestnut and pine MISSION,
trees. The importance of Madeira is derived Scotch Free Chcech.— The mission, which
solely from its vineyards, producing annually | was ultimately taken up bv the .Scotch Church
about 20,000 pipes of wine, 15,000 of which , was the result of the priva'te labors of Dr. Kal-
The sugar-cane is cultivated on ^ ley, a Scotch phvsician. to benefit the native
The poorer classes chiefly sub- 1 population. For most of the facts contained
in the following sketch we are indebted to the
Memoir of Rev. W. Hewitson. In the begin-
ning of his intercourse with the people, Dr. Kal-
ley met few who had ever seen a Bible, or who
seemed to know that the Xew Testament was
written by men, the companions of Jesus
Christ. In 1839, a few persons began to man-
ifest a desire to read and hear the word of
are exported,
a small scale
sist on the eddoe-root, sweet potatoes" and
chestnuts. The island abounds with beautiful
scenery, and its different elevations afford every
variety of temperature.
Under the new constitution, promulgated in
1836, the islands of Madeira and Porto Santo
were included in one district. At that time,
these islands contained 45 parishes, 24.674
families, and 115,447 inhabitants ; 108 families . God ; and in 1840 this interest increased, and
and 324 souls being English, and the remain- many adults went to school that they mi"-ht
der consisting, according to Conder, of a mixed 'learn to read the Bible. This interest con-
race, sprung principally from Portuguese and tinning to increase, in 1841 it attracted the
Moors, with some sprinkling of English blood ;
though Com. "Wilkes says there is little if any
mixed blood among them. There are about
notice of the Government at Lisbon, who or-
dered it to be suppressed. But the popular
feeling was such, that, for the time, the order
5,000 proprietors of the soil, of whom no more was not executed,
than 650 live on their rents : and there are In 1842, people came in large numbers to
about 400 who receive government salaries, j hear the Scriptures read and explained, many
Mendicants are numerous. Tlie native inhab- of them walking 10 or 12 miles, and climbino-
itants are meagre, sallow, and short-lived, which over mountains 3000 feet high. The meetinn?
is attributed to their want of wholesome food, were held in the open air. a part of the time,
a life of drudgery and exposure to great vicis- on a ridge, between two valleys, on the east
situdes of climate, and to a total disregard [ and west, a lofty mountain rising on the south,
of cleanliness. They are infected with a spe-iThe numbers varied from 1000°to oOOo/ The
cies of itch, which they regard as incurable. 'people sat in a clear space near the house
In this connection, the following description of {which Dr. K. occupied, and all around was
the mode of expressing the juice of the grape, covered with trees clustered with grapes. In
on this island, given by Commodore "Wilkes, some places, the general topics of conversation
may not be uninteresting to the lovers of •• Old were, the word of God. the one sacrifice for
Madeira.^' •• On our approach, we heard a sin, the free salvation. &c.. and the hymns of
sort of song, with a continued thumping ; and the Sabbath were heard through the week in
on entering the rude shed where the men were
employed, we saw six; men stamping violently
in m vat of six feet square by two feet deep,
three on each side of a huge lever beam, their
legs bare up to the thighs. On our entrance,
they redoubled their exertions, tOl the perspi-
ration fairly poured from them. After the
the fields and vineyards.
The manner in which this work commenced
was remarkable. The gratuitous medical aid
which Dr. K. rendered the people, induced many
to visit him, and to regard him as a friend. He
took the opportunity to converse with them
about the disease o'f their souls, and direct
grapes had been sufficiently stamped, and the j them to the true remedy, the Great Physician,
mens legs well scraped, the pulp was made ; advising them to read the Bible, and explain-
into the shape of a large bee-hive, secured by a ' ing and enforcing its truths as he had oppor-
rope made of the young twigs of the vine, and ! tunity. Many of them followed his advice,
the lever being used for a pre^, the juice flows j and while searching the Scriptures appear to
off and is received in tubs." j have been truly taught of God. Some read
Funchal, the c^ief town of :^[adeira, has ajthe Scriptures for some time without perceiv-
very pleasing appearance from the sea, and its i ing that they condemned Popery ; but when
situation in a kind of amphitheatre, formed by they perceived that masses, penance, pur^a-
the mountains, adds to its beauty. The con- tory, (tc, were inconsistent with the One Sacri-
trast of the white buildings and villas, with fice, they were alarmed, and consulted their
the green mountains, forms a picture which is ' priests, and by this means were exposed to
much heightened by the bold, quadrangular , persecution. This led them to further exa-
Loo Rock, vriih its embattled summit com- j mination, confirmed them in the truth, and
manding the harbor in the foreground,— Con- 1 prepared them for heavier suffering. Upwards
532
MADEIRA.
of 1000, between the ages of 15 and 30, learn-
ed to read the Scriptures intelligently, and were
thus enabled to search for tlieuiselves.
But such a work could not go on long with-
out attracting the attention of the ecclesias-
tical authoritie:?. A pastoral letter was issued,
denouncing the Bible as '-a book from hell."
and threatening all who should read it with
cxcomnninication. Then a letter was address-
ed to the registrar of each parish, directing
him to summon before him the teachers of all
the schools established in the parish, by Dr.
Kalley, both male and female, and charge
them in tlie presence of witnesses, " not to
teach any living being;" and, in case they
should disobey the charge, to cause them to
be arrested. Two of the converts having par-
taken of the Lord's Supper in the Presljyterian
church at Funchal, were formally excommu-
nicated, and all persons forbidden to hold com-
munication with them, or to "give them fire,
water, bread, or any otlier thing that may be
necessary for their support ;" or to pay them
their debts ; or to support them in any case be-
fore the courts ; under pain of the greater
excommunication.
In January, 1843, the civil governor com-
manded Dr. K. to abstain from speaking to
the Portuguese on the subject of religion.
But as the command was arbitrary and illegal
it was disobeyed. After that, the governor
issued a proclamation, forbidding the people
to visit Dr. K.'s House ; and on Sabbaths and
holidays, the police were stationed in the roads
at his doors, to enforce the order. Many were
beaten or taken tu jail for disobedience. One
wealthy gentleman, indignant at the priestly
attack on civil lilierty, came on purpose to
have the case tried. Jle was jirosecuted, and
the legal authorities decided that no citizen
could be hindered from entering any house, if
he liad the consent of the owner. 'I'he people
continued to come, l)ut came early to avoid
the police. The officers also came earlier and
earlier, till at last they came at four o'clock in
the morning ; and after that, many of the peo-
j)le came on Saturday night, and remained
(jver the Sabbath to worship God and hear
the truth.
At length, a prosecution was commenced
against Dr. K. ; but the judge, after examining
into tlie case, decided that his jjroceedings did
not violiMe any existing law of I'ortugal, and
dismi.'v^cd the prosecution. But, the judge
having left the island, Dr. K. was arrested
again, and refused bail, on the ground that
the crinios laid to his charge were punishable
with death ! The jailor acted as a spy, and
warned the pco})le not to visit him. and took
down the names of those who did. and ex-
eressly forl)aile any singing or reading the
libit" in the prison. The British Judge Con-
servator, with other ofTicials, visited the prison,
searched fur Testaments, and carried away one
or two that he found among the prisoners,
which were never returned. But tlicy did not
search the doctor's rooms, where was a large
supply of the Scriptures ; and the colporteurs
continued to come for supplies, which they
took away and sold as before. On the Sab-
bath from 70 to 100 persons visited him by
threes ; and as the cathedral was near the jail,
the Ilomanists showed their zeal by spitting
on the heretics, who .showed their spirit by
praying for their persecutors.
The bishop now issued a letter stating that
there Mas scarcely a verse in the Old Testa-
ment or the New, in the Bibles circulated on
the island, but what was adulterated. To an-
swer this charge, Dr. K. caused the Bible thus
circulated to be carefully compared with the
authorized version, and the result certified and
posted up in the streets, showing the falsity
of the bishop's a.ssertions ; and at length a
newspaper arrived from Lisbon, containing
a royal mandate, sanctioning the circulation
of the very same edition.
In January, 1844, Dr. Kalley was released
from prison, and resumed his operations, the
police licing employed around his doors as
before ; the attendance on his services being
about GOO on the Sabbath, and 30 on week
day evenings. In the summer of that year one
of the converts, Mrs. Maria Joaquima Alves,
was snatched from her family of seven children,
one of them an infant, and committed to prison.
But she remained firm, and was often heard
j)raising the Lord that she was counted worthy
to suffer shame for liis sake. After sixteen
months she was brought to trial before the
Supreme Court on a charge of apostasy, heresy,
and blasphemy. But she was tried only on the
last charge, the specification being, that she
had refused to acknowledge that the consecrat-
ed wafer is the real body and real blood,
and the human soul and divinity of the Lord
Jesus t-hrist, and that she had also refused to
adore it.
The Judge asked her, whether she believed
this dogma, and she, knowing that her life or
death depended ujjon her answer, calmly replied,
"I do iH)t btUei'c it." The Judge immediately
rose, and pronounced sentence of death ui)on
her. This sentence was afterwards commuted
by the court at Lisbon, on account of a techni-
cal error, liut with the instruction that, if she
had Iteen tried upon all the charges, the sentence
of death juust have lieen executed !
Xo effort was now spared by the persecutors
to inflame the jiublic mind. Assassination was
openly ])roj)osed in the public papers, as an
easy way to be freed from annoyance; the
free use of the cudgel was recommended ; and
even a n^petition of St. Bartholomew's day, or
the Sicilian vespers, was hinted at. Some of
the converts were cruelly beaten ; others were
stoned ; houses were set on fire, and some of
them burned down ; and for these injuries all
redress wa.s refused. Families were denied any
place to bury their dead except the public
MADEIRA.
533
highway ; and when so buried the bodies were
taken up and burned under the inspection of
the police.
In the September following, fifty soldiers
were quartered upon a portion of the parish of
Antonio de Serra, and allowed to plunder and
perpetrate every cruelty. Twenty-two of the
most respectable men and women were taken
to Funchal in a vessel, and cast into prison
among the most depraved and degraded, with-
out any allowance of food. Friends, both
English and Portuguese, sent them food, but it
was refused admission. Still, they were not only
patient and resigned, but happy. The streets
around the jail resounded with their hymns of
praise. But this was soon forbidden, although
obscene songs sung by other prisoners were not
prevented. They were driven to mass at the
point of the bayonet, and forced to kneel.
After twenty months' imprisonment, they were
brought to trial before a jury of their own
countrymen, and acquitted. Still they were
not allowed to return to their plundered homes
till they would pay the jail fees !
Dr. Kalley now perceiving that he was like-
ly to be brought to trial, and expelled from
the country, though contrary to law, was desi-
rous of avoiding such a result, and therefore
sailed for London. Lord Aberdeen, Secretary
of Foreign Aifairs, demanded damages of the
Portuguese government for Dr. K.'s false im-
prisonment, and to compromise the matter, it
was agreed that all proceedings against him
should be dropped, and he returned to Madei-
ra. But not many days after his arrival a
warrant was issued for his apprehension, in
direct violation of the promises made by the
Portuguese government.
But Dr. K. having been warned by Lord
Aberdeen, that he would not be protected by j
the British government against any attempts
on the part of the Portuguese government to
remove him from the Island, if he permitted
Portuguese subjects to assemble in his house
for the reading of the Scriptures, he thought
proper to resign the work into other hands.
Rev. W. H. Hewitson had, without Dr. Kal-
ley's knowledge, been appointed in Scotland to
labor in Madeira ; and meeting with Dr. K.
at Lisbon, he returned with him, and entered
into the work with zeal, yet with prudence,
avoiding unnecessary publicity.
In March, 1845, Mr. Hewitson administered
the Lord's Supper in secret to 34 Portuguese
converts. More might have been admitted,
but there was not room for them. Not a few
in different parts of the island were being
taught to read the Scriptures ; and those
already converted were not slack in comforting
one another and doing good to souls still in
darkness. Many of them, through reading
and prayer, had become intelligent members
of society, and able to give a clear and distinct
" reason of the hope that was in them." Some
of them seemed to be altogether free from
doubts and fears, and to be filled with joy and
peace in believing.
But it was soon found that the meetings
were attracting the attention of the priests
and the authorities, and they were given up.
The people now waited on Mr. Hewitson indi-
vidually, or two or three at a time ; and their
hungering and thirsting after instruction in
the Scriptures was 'remarkaljle and aliecting.
In this way, ]Mr. H. was usually engaged with
different parties or individuals, for a great por-
tion of the day ; and those who waited on his
instructions grew rapidly in knowledge and
grace. After a course of instruction, Mr. H.
received them one by one into the Christian
church. At his first communion, twenty-two
were admitted, and at tbe second, tliirty.
Some of them had made much progress in
grace and holiness, and their greatest joy was
to see the work spreading, and new converts
coming into the fold ; though they had nothing
before them but the prospect of suffering for
Christ's sake. Mr. H. took the lease of a
house in a retired place, where he intended to
live and hold meetings. But soon the police
began to watch about it, and he was ibrced
again, for a time, to discontinue his meetings,
though he met a few persons at a time in pri-
vate houses.
On the 10th of May, a man and a woman
were put in prison for teaching their neighbors .
to I'ead the Bible. Soon after this, at a dinner
party, the Bishop of Madeira declared exter-
minating warfare against the Bible, and said
he was determined to put down all dissent
from the Eoman Catholic church. The per-
secution which the converts had to endure in
private from relations and neighbors, was
growing fiercer and fiercer. Yet they were
willing and even glad to suffer persecution for
Christ's sake. ,
In June, Mr. H. moved into his house, and
held small meetings in it almost daily. Though
the authorities were seeking grounds for a
prosecution against him, they could, as yet,
find none. Before this time, he had baptized
several children ; and the suspicion of it going
abroad, produced great excitement ; in conse-
quence of which, about 20 persons conspired
together to assassinate Dr. Kalley. Notices
were posted on the church doors, requiring all
to confess to the priest, or attend church,
within ten days, under pain of imprisonment.
About this time, after an imprisonment of
more than two years, Maria Joa([uima was re-
leased.
In August, Mr. IT. was visited by a public
notary, who warned him to discontinue meet-
ings in his house with Portuguese subjects, for
religious purposes, under pain of being pro-
ceeded with, and handed over to the judicial
power. But he continued to hold meetings,
under cover of the night, till a serious iUness
interrupted his labors. Alter his recovery, he
organized a theological class, in order to qual-
534
MADEIRA.
ify them to act as catochists, expecting, him-
self, soon to be obliged to leave the island.
Thi.s class was composed of fifteen or si.xtecn
of those who had made the greatest advance-
ment in spiritual knowledge, some of whom
came from the distance of twelve or fifteen
miles. One of them was the father-in-law of
one of the i)rincipal judges of the island. The
regularity of their attendance, and the earnest-
ness of their attention, were highly gratifying.
Under date of Dec. 17, 1845, Mr. 11. writes
that 28 persons were imprisoned for the crime
of meeting one Sabbath evening for reading
the word of Uod, and praj'er. The usual prac-
tice in such cases, he said, was, first to prepare
the senter.ce in writing, and afterwards to go
tlirough the empty form of trying the case,
and hearing the evidence. A family of three
persons, hearing that they were to be prose-
cuted for not going to confession, escaped to
Demarara.
Under date of Feb. 6, 1846, Mr. H. says :
" The people arc hungering for the word. Some
of them say to me occasionally, ' AVhen shall
we come, ibr we are very hungry ? ' On the
2Gth of February, lie wrote, that he had heard
it intimated that the civil governor had charged
one of the judges to proceed against him ; and
expecting soon to be compeiled to leave, he
set about preparing the people for his absence.
He administered the communion to 87, while
•about 100 more were ready for examination.
His theoltjgical class he kept up from Decem-
ber to April, till he had gone over all the
leading doctrines and duties of Christianity ;
and in the beginning of May he left, intend-
ing after a few months to return to his flock.
Soon after, the persecution burst forth with
fury. On the 2d of August, 30 or 40 converts
were assembled in the house of an English
family, to hear a pastoral letter from Mr.
llewitson, when one of the canons of the
cathedral church mustered a rudian mob and
appeared at the gate as the pe(jple were about
to retire, ready to attack them, 'i'hu first ])er-
son who came out was Arsenio Da Siiva, who
had been conducting the wor.ship. The canon
thrust in his face an image, and liade him kiss
it and adore his (Jod, knocking off his hat, and
abusing him with fuul language. AVith great
dillicully he escaped with threr or four others,
who came out behind him. The females took
refuge in the kitchen. The house was besiegeil
by tlie mob, at the instigation of the canon
and several other jjriests, till towards midnight,
when tlii-y smashed in the doors and windows,
and rushed into the apartments of the lady of
the house, who was an invalid. After search-
ing lor .some time, thoy found the rortiiguese,
and ln'oan to beat and otherwise maltreat
tliem, wlien the pijlice and soldiers entered,
and jusked them by what authoritv they had
entend the house, when they declared' that
they did not care for authoritv or law. 'I'hey
bad l»vfjre said there were uo'laws for Calviu-
ists. Two of them were arrested and sent to
prison.
About 2 o'clock on the morning of Sabbath,
August 9th, as Dr. Kalley was escorting a
friend to his own house, he overheard "the
guard of soldiers, which had been s(!ut at his
request to protect him, in familiar conversa-
tion with persons disguised in masks, oncof
whom Avas sharpening a large knife, prepara-
tory, as he said, to " the killing on the mor-
row." This convinced him thai there was no
safety for him but in fiight ; and, disguising
himself as a country peasant, he hastened to
the house of a friend.
About noon, after the services were over in
the church, groups of people were seen in the
streets, talking with evident delight of the
work of the day. At last a rocket rose hiss-
ing in the air. It was the signal for proeeetl-
ing. " Those who are in that house," said one
of the people in the hearing of ^Irs. Kalley,
as she was escaping in disguise through the
street, " would need to be sure of salvation."
At length a dense mass surrounded the house.
The ringleaders rushed in, the mob watching
till their benefactor should be brought forth.
tJhagrincd to find that he had escaped, they
committed his library to the flames, and has-
tened away in search of him.
By this time, Dr. Kalley, disguised in female
attire, and concealed in a hammock, was escai>
ing for his life to the bay. As the bearers,
attended by Mr. Tate, were huiried along,
the cry was raised, " Kalley ! Kalley !" The
infuriated mob catching the cry, and raising-
three cheers, ran towards the jiier. As they
reached it, the hammock had just been lowered
into the boat, and in a few minutes it was
alongside the steamer, the hammock swung on
deck, and Dr. Kalley was safe. The whole
beach teemed with the ruffian crew.
The removal of Dr. Kalley was the signal
for all manner of cruelty and oppression.
Many of the converts immediately ficd to the
mountains, wIhm-c they were hunted down like
wild beasts. "When discovered in their hiding
jjlaces, they were mercilessly beaten, to extort
from them" the promise that they would go to
confession. One man was brutally murdered,
and several women sustained fatal injuries.
About a hundred fled on board an emigrant
shi|), with tlu! design of removing to some
other land. Alany of these humble disciples
numifested a spirit of devoted attachment to
the truth, of simi)le steadfast faith in Jesus,
and of patience in the midst of great tribula-
tion.
An English resident, who liad been obliged
to take refuge on board the ship that was to
take two hundred of them to Trinidad, wrote
to Mr. llewitson, " 'J'he sound of the hymns is
very sweet, as it rises from the liold. They
never speak airainst their persecutors. They
onlv mention them witli pity. Sometimes 1
overhear them in prayer, praying for their
MADEBLI— MAGEZZIN.
535
enemies, and for those who have turned back
again to the Casas LVMolatria. They have all
been in hidings on the mountains, their houses
broken up and pillaged ; and many of them
have nothing left but the clothes they wear."
A woman was taken out of her house, beat-
en till she was seemingly dead, then dragged
down and thrown on the graves of the Pro-
testants, buried on the roadside. She revived
again, and was carried by the police to the
hospital. After dressing her broken arm,
they ordered her to " confess," which she re-
fused ; in consequence of which she was taken
to the police station, where she remained all
day in a hammock.
Two hundred sailed on the 22d of August,
for Trinidad ; 350 soon followed, and others
went afterwards, increasing the number to
800 in all.
Dr. Kalley, speaking of the converts, says,
they were begotten of God, by his word of
truth ; they grew by the sincere milk of it ; it
was sweeter to them than honey, more pre-
cious than gold ; the words of Jesus were
spirit and life to them. They enjoyed peace
through his blood. Sometimes the expression
of their attachment to him was very striking,
and their sympathy and aSection for each
other truly brotherly. Their enemies witness-
ed changes upon them, which appeared very
strange and unaccountable, especially when
they persecuted them. The gentleness and
patience, the love and joy, of the sufferers, con-
founded even their persecutors, some of whom
were reported to have used expressions like
these : " We call these people ugly names,
and they don't answer back ; we spit upon
them, and they don't get angry ; we beat them,
and they seem pleased ; we break open their
houses and destroy their property, and they
are happy ; we put them in jail, and they sing :
we can't make them unhappy."
Mr. Da Silva, already mentioned, was a
man of wealth and distinction ; but he was
obliged to forsake all, even his wife and chil-
dren. He was aiterwards ordained pastor of
the exiles at Trinidad, where he died, after
having witnessed the departure of a portion
of them for the United States.
Mr. Hewitson, after remaining some time in
Scotland, to recruit his health, visited the
exiles at Trinidad, and labored for some time
among them, preaching the Gospel, and seek-
ing to establish them in the faith. After his
return to Scotland, another missionary was
appointed by the Free Church to labor among
the exiles, who has since followed them to
their settlement in Illinois.
Mr. Hewitson, on visiting his flock at Trin-
idad, says of them, "Though a few of the
Portuguese in Trinidad have, under the pow-
erful influence of new temptations, declined
somewhat in spirituality of mind, yet I have
discovered no good ground, for suspecting the
sincerity of any whom I was accustomed to
regard in Madeira as having the things which
accompany salvation. A consideralDle num-
ber seem to be truly desirous of growing in
grace, light and holiness. The elders and
deacons have been faithful and exemplary."
The Portuguese converts of Madeira are
among the martyrs of the nineteenth century.
They furnish a remarkable instance of the
power of God attending the simple ministry
of the word. The facts in this case show tiat
there is no want of power in the Gospel, pro-
perly applied, for the conversion of the world.
They furnish also, a living testimony to the
changeless, persecuting spirit of Popery ; and
to see the identity of " Pope and Pagan," we
need only compare the persecutions in Madeira
with those of Madagascar.
As evidence that the blessed work is still in
progress, we notice the recent arrival of a ves-
sel at New York from ]Madeira, bringing 158
more religious exiles, on their way to the colo-
ny in Illinois.
]S[ADEBLI : A town of the Bassas in
Western Africa, situated on the Mechiin river,
about 20 miles from its mouth. It has been
a seat of the African mission of the American
Baptist Missionarv Union.
MADRAS: The capital of the British
possessions in the south of India, in lat. 13°
5' N. and long. 80° 81' E. ; for two centuries
the seat of Jesuit Missions in Ilindostan.
The population has recently been estimated at
630,000, of whom 530,000 are Plindoos, 80,000
Mohammedans, and 20,000 Europeans or de-
scendants of Europeans. It is fortifled to the
north and west by a wall, having five gates,
and on the south by Fort St. George. It is
occupied by the Society for the Propagation
of the Gospel, the London Missionary Society,
the Church Missionary Society, the Wesleyan
Missionary Society, the Church of Scotland,
the American Board, and the Free Church of
Scotland. (See Ilindostan.)
MADURA : A city of Southern Hindos-
tan, 136 miles north-east from Cai^e Comorin,
and 270 miles south-west from Madras, and
contains a population of 50,000. The district
of Madura has a popidation of 1,300,000.
The city itself is encircled by walls, and may
be emphatically termed a city of temples.
The largest, as described by Mr. Hoisington,^
missionary of the Board, in 1834, has at least
10,000 massive pillars of stone, presenting on
every side, in full relief, curiously wrought,
images of every description — men. women,,
children, beasts, and creatures of the wildest
fancy. This vast palace, covering ground suf-
ficient almost for the site of a town, is ir; a.
dilapidated state, and the immense wealth that
existed at the period of its construction has-
departed. Madura is the city of the ancient
Tamil kings, and the seat of Brahminical
pride in this part of India. The American;
Board commenced its mission here in 1834.
MAGEZZIN : A Karen village on the-
536
MAHE— MASULIPATAM.
confines of Arracan, in Burmah, and an out-
station of one of the Karen missions of the
American Baptist Union.
MALTA : An island iu tlie Mediterranean,
60 miles from Cicily, probably the ancient
Melita, "vvliere Paul was shipwrecked. Pop.
70,000. A mission was commenctd here by
the Loudon Missionary Society in 1811, and
continued for several years. In 1815, Eev.
William Jowett was sent to Malta by the
Church Missionary Society, where he re-
mained several years. In 1822, the Ameri-
can Board established a printing press in
Malta, under the direction of Rev. Daniel
Temple and Mr. Iloman Ilallock, which was
removed to Smyrna, Dec. 23, 1833. (See p.
125). The Church Missionary Society have
a college there. (See p. 633.)
MALCOM PETH: A temporary health
station of the American Board upon the
Ghauts, towards the south of Hindostan.
MALLIGAUM : A .'station of the Church
Missionary Society, 150 miles north-east of
Bombay.
MAMRE : Station of the United Brethren,
in South Africa, on the Beka river.
^MANKPy : A parish in the district of
Jaffna, Ceylon, 4i^ miles N.W. of Jaffnapatam,
and 4 from Batticotta : a station of the Ame-
rican Board.
MANDAHASALIE: In Southern Uin-
dostan, and one of the most recent stations of
the American Board, in connexion with the
Madura mission.
MAUBEE : A Karen village in the Bas-
sein province of Southern Burmah, near Arra-
can, and an out-station of the Bassein mission
of the American Bajitist. Union.
MAN(;JAIA, or MAXAIA : One of the
Hervey Islands, having a station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society.
MANGALbRE : A station of the Basle
Missionary Society, in the province of Canara,
440 miles ""S. S. E. of Bombay.
MANUA : One of the Samoa Island.^ cir-
cular in form, and so elevated as to be visible
at the distance of 40 or 50 miles. 'J"he inlia-
bitants are regarded as a conf|uered jicople.
and are despised and oppressed by the inhabit-
ants of otiicr islands. London Mis.sionary
Society.
MAXOXO : One of the Sanioan Islands ;
a station of the London Missionary Society.
Tliough sir.all, it has obtained a kind of ))o-
litical supremacy over the whole group of these
islands.
MAXAARGOODY: A station of the
Wesleyan Missionary Society in Southern In-
.dia.
^LXXKROO: An extensive district in
Australiii. cm the south side of Murrunbidgee
.river, with a wide-sjm-ad ]iastoral population.
.Society for the Propagation of the Gospel.
MAXTl : One of the Hervey islands;
about 15 miles in circumference. Population,
300.
MAPUMULO : A station of the Ameri-
can Board in South Africa, among the Zulus,
near Port X^atal.
MARE : One of the New Hebrides, where
is a station of the London Missionary Society.
MARAETAI: A station of the Church
Missionary Society in New Zealand, on the
east coast, at the mouth of the river Waikato.
MARSOVAN : A station of the Ameri-
can Board among the Armenians, situated in
X'orthcrn Asia Minor, not far from the Black
Sea. S. E. from Samsoon.
MARTABAX : A province in Southern
Burmah, annexed to the British dominions, in
part in 1826, and in part in 1852. The city
is near the mouth of the Salwen river, and is
a seat of the missionary operations of the
American Baptist Union.
MAROXITES : A sect of Eastern Chris-
tians, who follow the Syrian rites, and are sub-
ject to the Pope ; their principal habitation
being on Mount Libanus, between the Ansa-
rians to the north and the Druses to the south.
According to Moshcim, the sect had its origin
among the Monothelitcs, who, having been
condemned by the Council of Constantinople,
found a refuge on Mount Lebanon, which, at
the time, formed an asylum for vagabonds of
all sorts. About the conclusion of the seventh
century they were called Alaronitcs, after
Maro, their first bishop. They retained the
opinions of the Monothelitcs until the twelfth
century, when they abandoned them, and were
admitted into the church of Rome. The na-
tion is divided into two classes, the common
people and the sheikhs. (See Sheikh.) They
live dispersed in the mountains, in villages,
hamlets, and even detached houses. The whole
nation consists of cultivators, living frugally,
with many enjoyments and few wants. Though
dependent on the Pope, they continue to elect
a head under the title of Batwk, or jiatriarch
of Antioch. Their priests marry, but nuist
not marry widows, nor marry a second time.
'I'hey say mass in Syriac, which they do not
understand ; but the Gospel is read in Arabic,
and the communion administered in both kinds.
'J'hey have about 200 convents for men and
women, of the order of St. Anthony. 'J'hcre
are Maronites, however, in Syria, who regard
the church of Rome with aversion and abhor-
rence.
JNFARQUESAS ISLANDS : A group of
.islands extending from 7° to 10° S. lat. and
138° to 140° W. long. They contain two
clusters, of five each.
MASULIPATAM: A town in the presi-
dency of Madras, and capital of a district of
the same name on the Coromandel coast, 230
miles X.N.E. of Madras. It is very exten-
sive, and for a Hindoo town loleralily well
built. It stands on the only part of the Coro-
mandel coast which is not beat by a hca\7
MATAH— MAURITIUS.
537
6urf. It is the residence of the district col-
lector and judge. Population of the district
in 1822, 454,754 persons. Church Missionary
Society.
MATAH : A Karen village in Tenasscrim,
Burmah, and an out-station of the Tavoj mis-
sion of the American Baptist Missionary
Union.
MATURA : A town in the southern extre-
mity of Ceylon, 82 miles S. E. of Columbo.
Population, 3,000 ; surrounded by populous
villages. The Matura priests arc famed for
their" knowledge of the Pali literature. The
people are generally poor, ignorant, and super-
stitious, and addicted to the disgusting practice
of devil-dancing. A station of the Wesley-
aus, and also of the Gospel Propagation So-
ciety.
MATANTU : A station of the Loudon
Missionary Society on Savaii ; one of the
Samoa islands.
MAUI : One of the Sandwich Island group,
lying to the N. E. of Hawaii, being about 48
miles in length, 29 in its widest part, with a
surface of about 600 square miles. The Ame-
rican Board have five stations on this island.
MAULMAIN : One of the Tenasserim pro-
vinces in British Burmah. The capital city
bears the same name, and is situated on the
Salwcn river, twenty-five miles from its mouth.
It is the seat of two missions — one for Bur-
mans, and the other for Karens — of the Amer-
ican Baptist Union ; and has hitherto been
the residence of most of the American Baptist
missionaries in Burmah. Dr. Judson resided
here the greater part of the time from 1827 to
the period of his death.
MAUPITI : A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society in the Society Islands.
MAURITIUS, or, ISLE OF FRANCE :
An island in the Indian Ocean, belonging to
Great Britain, situated between 19° 58' and
20° 32' South latitude, 70 or 80 miles N.E. of
the Isle of Bourbon, and 500 E. of INIadagas-
car. It is an irregular oval, about 3G miles
long, by 18 to 27 broad ; area, about 500,000
acres. The population in 1832 consisted of
13,000 whites, 26,000 free colored people, and
89,000 slaves, now freemen. Its appearance
is in the highest degree picturesque and l)cau-
tiful. There are several ranges of mountains
in different parts of the island, from which
flow numerous small rivers and streams. The
whole coast is surrounded by reefs of coral,
with the exception of a few openings through
which vessels approach the shore. The capi-
tal is Port Louis, on the north-west side of the
island, population 1830, 26,000. The ther-
mometer in Mauritius generally ranges from
79 to 88 degrees. The soil requires but little
labor to cultivate, and is particularly favor
able to the sugar-cane ; but most of the fruits
of the temperate zones have been introduced
and naturalized. It came into the possession
of the English in 1810, by conquest from the
French. It has several small dependencies, the
chief of which are the Seychelles Islands, about
900 miles north of Mauritius.
Inhabitants.— Among the colored people of
Mauritius, there are at present supposed to be
about 5000 natives of Madagascar. The great
majority of the Europeans, both at Mauntms
and the Seychelles, are Roman Catholics.
MISSION.
London Missionary Society.— This Soci-
ety sent out Mr. Le Brun, in 1814, who arrived
at Mauritius in June of that year, and opened
a school for the French children at Port Louis,
and engaged in the circulation of the Scrip-
tures and tracts. In the following year, he
had gathered a small congegation, amid much
opposition, and in connection with which was
a prosperous Sunday-school of 50 children.
He was countenanced by the Governor, who
wrote to the Directors of the Society in 1816,
expressing his approbation of Mr. Le Brun's
labors, and stating that he had succeeded in
inducing the free colored population to attend
upon his instructions. In 1818, he had suc-
ceeded in organizing 25 persons into a Chris-
tian Society at Port Louis. He was also em-
ployed by Gov. Farquhar in the religious in-
struction of two brothers of a principal chief
of Madagascar. In the following year he had
gathered a church of 20 members, and six
more were candidates for admission. Two of
the converts he had appointed to preach in
the suburbs of Port Louis. An auxiliary
Missionary Society had been formed at that
place, the proceeds of which were to be appli-
ed to the support of the Madagascar Mission.
The inhabitants of Mauritius manifested a
strong inclination to cast aside their super-
stitions. In 1820, Mr. Jones, a missionary
under appointment to Madagascar, spent a
portion of the year in the instruction of Mr.
Telfair's slaves at Bclombre, with great suc-
cess. Mr. Telfair wrote to the Directors that
a general spirit of religious feeling pervaded
all classes of the numerous population on his
plantation ; and that there had been a propor-
tionate improvement in their conduct and in-
dustry. The school was continued after Mr.
Jones left, and many of the slaves learned to
read. In 1821, the church at Port Louis had
increased to 34, and the year following to 43.
Mr. Le Brun continued his labors amid many
obstacles, both from the superstitions of the
people, and the opposition to the instruction
of slaves. His church continued to increase,
and he extended his efforts to several places
around. But in 1832 his health failed ;_ and,
assigning the care of his flock to pious friends,
he visited the Cape of Good Hope, with the
hope of recruiting his health ; but there he
experienced a severe attack, and was obliged
to return to England. The work which he
had commenced and continued for 18 years,
against much bitter opposition and pcrsccu-
638
MAUEITrUS— MAVELICARE.
tion, had been successful beyond his expectar
tion. Public worship had been maintained in
several different places ; the slaves had been
instructed ; day and Sabbath-schools had been
maintained ; a church had been gathered of
about 50 members, two of whom were en-
gaged in preaching the Gospel. The state of
the island being peculiarly unfavorable to the
successful prosecution of missionary labor, the
Directors did not think it desirable to resume
the mission ; but- Mr. Le Brun, after spending
some time in Europe, returned on his own ac-
count to Mauritius, and took the pastoral
charge of the people among whom he had
formerly labored.
In 1836, when the missionaries were driven
from Madagascar, Mr. Johns was instructed to
remain at Mauritius, devoting himself to the
instruction of the natives of Madagascar, whom
he found on the island ; and also to embrace
every opportunity of keeping up a communi-
cation with Madagascar. And Rev. D. Jones,
who had been a few years in England, re-
turned to Mauritius, to make himself useful
there, and await the changes at Madagascar.
Two schools were established for Malagasy
children, consisting of 52 boys and 23 girls.
Public worship was maintained by them and
Mr. Le Brun, in French and English. The
door was at this time open for the instruction
of all classes of the people of color. In Octo-
ber, 1837, ISIr. Baker removed to Piton, 12
miles IVom Port Louis, where he was employing
the press for the diffusion of the Gospel and
promoting the cause of education.
In 1845, Mr. Le Brun reported a strong re-
ligious movement among the people at Port
Louis ; and the 200 free sittings in liis chapel
were insufficient for the accommodation of the
negroes, who attended on the Sabbath. An
adult Sunday-school of 80 to 100 persons had
been formed, consisting of Malagasy, Africans,
Malays, and Creoles.
Before Mr. Johns's death, he had purchased
a piece of land at Moka, 1 2 miles from Port
Louis, intending to form a settlement of the
Christian refugees from Madagascar. After
his death, Mrs. Johns, with the a^^sistancc of
Mr. Le Brun, proceeded to carry out his plan.
She afterwards returned to England, and the
station was committed to the cliarge of a son
of Mr. Le Brun, who soon gathered a congrega-
tion (jf more than 100 Alalagasy, and on the
1st of January, 1845, he formed a church of
seven members ; and there were many earnest
in((uirers. ^Vith Bamiadina and Ivararalahy,
both men of decided i)iety, he commenced a
coin-se of theologieal instruction. At the same
time, they were ajipointed to labor at an out-
station, ill the neighboring mountains. Mrs.
Le Brun had estaljlislied a promising Malagasy
school of .05 children. In the year 1847, six
new members were added to the church at
Moka, and there was a class of eight incjuirers.
Mr. Le Brun this year established another out-
station, among several villages of Malagasy, at
a place called La Nouvdle Decouverte. The
people came with carts and donkeys for Ra-
miadana and his wife, the native teachers, and
bore them away with joy. GO or 70 of them
commenced meeting for public worship on the
Sabbath. They proposed to build a place of
worship at their own expense, and a woman
gave a piece of ground for the chapel and a
house for the teacher. And adults as well as
children commenced learning to read. On
Christmas day, 1848, the new chapel was ded-
icated by Mr. Le Brun, in the presence of a
crowded assembly.
In 1851 Mr. Peter Le Brun was appointed
to the station at Moka, and Mr. J. J. Le Brun
joined his father, in the pastoral office at Port
Louis, especially for the purpose of taking
charge of the theological instruction of some
young men, natives of Madagascar, with the
view of their becoming evangelists in their
fatherland.
The latest intelligence from this mission is
contained in letters from Mr. J. J. Le Brun,
dated Port Louis, June 21,1852, and from Mr.
Peter Le Brun, dated Moka, Aug. 25, 1852.
Mr. J. J. Le Brun says the people at Port
Louis are sick of popery, and are everywhere
asking for the pure doctrines of the Christian
faith. The Bible is in great demand. At all
the stations and out-stations, there is an in-
crease of numbers, and many inquirers are
coming to a saving knowledge of the truth.
Mr. Peter Le Brun says the mission at Moka
has made decided progress, both in numbers,
and in moral and spiritual improvement. On
the 21st of August, 1852,.a new and commo-
dious place of worship was opened at this sta-
tion, and near the same time, 18 were added
to the church.
The Malagasy refugees, numbering about
500, residing at Mauritius, have continued to
share in the oversight of the Messrs. Le Brun ;
and it is believed that many of them will be
raised up to be the future instructors of their
countrymen in Madagascar.
The latest reports from these missions do not
give the statistics. The following table gives
the present number of stations and missiona-
ries ; but the number of church members at
Port Louis is taken from the report of 1850,
and at Moka the number has been collected
from reports of additions from time to time,
and may not from that cause be perfectly ac-
curate.
stations. Missionaries.
I'ort Louis, 2
Moka, 1
Church members.
140
33
173
Total, 3 •
TklAVELICARE : A large and populous
town, near the foot of the (ihauts, and^ nmch
shut out from European intercourse. Popula-
tion of the district, about 270,000. The pago-
MEIGNAPOORAM— MICRONESIA.
539
das are numerous, and there are 21 Syrian
churches within a few miles of the town.
MEIGNAPOORAM: A station of the
Church Missionary Society in the Tinnevelly
district, India.
MEKUATLING : Station of the French
Protestants in South Africa, four or five days'
journey N". W. of Morija.
MELBOURNE : The metropolis of Aus-
tralia. In 1838, it contained but three houses
deserving the name. It is now a large place.
It is occupied by the Wcsleyans and the Soci-
ety for the Propagation of the Gospel.
MERGUI : The name of a city and a jiro-
vince in British Burmah. The city is on one
of the branches of the Tenasserim river, and is
a station of the Tavoy mission of the Ameri-
can Baptist Union.
METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHURCH,
MISSIONS OF : See Missionary Society of
the 3Iethodist Episcopal Churcli.
MEXICO : This country exhibits at the
present time, a striking exemplification of the
legitimate tendencies of unmitigated Roman-
ism. After the revolution which separated
Mexico from the mother country, a republican
constitution was adopted, after the model of
our own, with the important exception, that
the Church of Rome was made the established
religion, and no other was tolerated. The
priests have borne rule from the beginning,
having unlimited resources at their command ;
yet the people continue in abject ignorance,
misruled by demagogues, and constantly con-
vulsed by internal dissensions and revolutions,
demonstrating, beyond a doubt, the utter in-
compatibility of Romanism and a republican
form of government. At present, so far as we
can ascertain, there is little if any opening for
missionary efforts in that miserable land. The
present government appears to be sold to the
priests. Yet, in the unsettled state of affairs,
we cannot tell what a day may bring forth ;
and it is to be hoped that the increasing inter-
course of the people of Mexico with those of
the United States, since the conclusion of the
late war, may be preparing them for the re-
ception of the Gospel, when the way shall be
opened for its introduction.
MICIIIPOCOTON : An Indian town on
the northern shore of Lake Superior, formerly
a station of the Ojibwa mission of the Ameri-
can Baptist Union.
MICRONESIA : The name Micrmesia is
derived from the Greek Mikros, small, and
Nesion, a little island, signifying a region of
small islands or islets. It is applied to a por-
tion of the Central Archipelago, Pacific Ocean,
including the Kwgsmill Group. As this term
is of recent application, it is not generally laid
down on the maps, nor very well defined. The
Kingsmill Group lies on both sides of the
equator, and consists of 15 principal islands,
all coral, densely covered with cocoanut groves,
are governed by independent kings, have a
limited intercourse with each other, are resorted
to by whalers, and occupied by a company of
English traders, who export annually more
than 1200 barrels of cocoanut oil from Pitt's
Island alone.
Population. — The natives of these islands
lead a life of indolence. The cocoanut, which
everywhere abounds, supplies their few Avants
with little labor. Their chief employment is
the manufacture of cocoanut oil, which is now
a source of great profit to the few traders, and
might bring a large revenue to the people.
They also make an excellent kind of molasses
from the cocoanut sap. From this tree almost
every thing which they eat, drink, wear, live
in, or use in any way, is obtained. The people
are divided into three classes, chiefs, landhold-
ers, and slaves. They live in small communi-
ties, regarding the oldest of their number as a
kind of patriarch. Polygamy is common.
They are hospitable, and ready to share the
last morsel with the needy. In each town is
a " stranger's house," where travelers find a
temporary home. Some of these are large,
and serve as council chambers and places of
amusement. Their religion scarcely deserves
the name. They have, so far as is at present
known, no idols and no priests. They have a
loose system of spirit-worshi23 — veneration for
the spirits of the dead — but their confidence
in it is weakened. When one dies, the body
is placed upon mats, in the centre of the house,
and rubbed with cocoanut oil till the flesh is
gone ; and then the bones are placed in the
loft or thrown into the sea. A stone is placed
near the house, as a resting jilace for the spirit,
and offerings are made to it twice a year.
The tabu system has little force. They have
but few traditions, and cannot be said to be
very superstitious.
MISSION.
American Board. — The mission to Micro-
nesia had its origin, in part at least, in the
belief of some of the officers of the A. B. C.
F. M. that something of this kind was needed,
more fully to develop the benevolence and
strengthen the Christian character of the
Sandwich Islands Christians. Nov. 18th, 1851,
Rev. Benjamin G. Snow and Rev. Luther H.
Gulick, M. D., with their wives, sailed from
Boston for the Sandwich Islands, and on the
17th of January, 1852, Rev. Albert A. Stur-
gess and wife followed them. Dr. Gulick was
born at the Islands, his father having been
long a missionary there. The Hawaiian Mis-
sionary Society had been already formed in
May, 1851, and was expected to cooperate with
them in commencing a mission in Micronesia.
The first company arrived at Honolulu, March
29th, and great interest was at once awakened.
The churc-lies contributed with very great lib-
erality to their missionary society, and, by the
having a population of about 50,000. They I end of its first year, $5,000 had come into the
540
MINISTERIAL EDUCATION.
treasury from Uawaiian sources. It ^vas then
propu.sccl to i)urcbasc a vessel for the new mis-
sion, and mure than half the cost was raised
at llonuluhi alone. Two natives were wanted,
at first, to Ijc connected with the mission, and
seven oilers of service were soon received. A
teacher, iJaniela Opunui, and a deacon, Berita
Kaaikaula, both from the second church in
Honolulu, were selected, with their wives.
The company sailed from Honolulu, July
15th, accompanied by Kev. E. W. Clark, Sec-
I'Ctary of the Hawaiian Missionary Society,
Eev. Mr. Kekela, native pastor of one of the
churches, and a brother of Dr. Gulick. They
reached Pitt's Island, latitude 3° 20' N., and
cheering ; but one vessel had been at the
island, with plenty of brandy and other
liquors, producing great evil ; and about the
close of the year, the presence of several ves-
sels occasioned an outbreak of licentiousness
which had been exceedingly trying.
Messrs. Sturgcs and Gulick commenced
their labors in behalf of the people of Ascen-
sion Island, among the Kittle tribe. But, iu
June, 1853, Dr. Gulick removed to the Mela-
lauim tribe, at Shalong Point, the landward
extremity of Taman Island, which lies in the
mouth of Metalim harbor, and is about four
miles in circumference. He had previously
visited the tribe, secui-ed the protection of the
longitude 172-^ 57' E., of the Kingsmillgrouit, I chief, and built a house. In July, he had
on the 5th of August. These islands are of opened a school, some of his pupils being
the low, coral formation, and it was thought j adults, and three of them chiefs. They seemed
to have the entire confidence of the rulers, who
afforded them complete protection. I'heir
families had been remarkal:)ly healthy, but
they had been afflicted with the los,«i of a
friend, Mr. Lewis Corgat, a trader who had
shown them great kindness, and of wliom they
had some hope that he was a true Christian.
They had two of his children in their families,
whom they hoped to bring up for useiuhiess.
TABULAR VIEW.
f. 1
i.
STATIONS.
c
-. I
"3
•;
%
i^
y. c
c
-
Ascension Island
1
1
1
1
1
1
Sbalong Point
Strong's Island
1
1
1
so
Totals
3
3
1
-
30
best to form the mission on one of the high
islands. On the 22d of August they reached
Strongs Island, COO miles north of west from
Pitt's Island. Obtaining the cordial assent of
the king, who, with some of his people, had
obtained some knowledge of the English lan-
guage from traders, it was arranged that Mr.
Snow and the teacher, Opunui, should estab-
lish themselves there. The Avhole comjiany,
however, j)roceeded together to Ascension
Island, or Bonabe, 300 miles distant, latitude
7° N. Here a station was selected for
Dr. Gulick, Mr. Sturges and Kaaikaula, and
they landed, Sept. 20th, under apparently
favorable circumstances, encouraged by the
king, and by a young man whose otficial title
is ^'umlcin, and who seemed to have secured
the full control of state affairs. Ilesident
foreign trailers also encouraged the formation
of the mission, of one of whom a house was
hired. Others of the company now returned
to Strong's Island, where Mr. and Mrs. Snow,
with their Hawaiian fellow-laborers, were cor- MINISTERIAL EDUCATION : In eve-
dially welcomed by the king, on the Gth of ry effort, looking to the spread of the Gospel
October, to their future home. among men, reference must always be had
On the 1 3th of November, Mr. Snow took to the Christian ministry. In Christ's great
pos.session of a house built for him l)y the king | plan for the recovery of our lost world, the
and chiefs, and on the second Sabbath iu Do- ministry is made to hold a fundamental place,
cember, he held his first public service with ' and this institution can never be set aside, or
the natives. At the close of the first year, 'even lightly regarded, without the most inju-
(Oct. 1853,) this service had been regularly rious consequences. Any serious deficiency in
sustained, the congregations varying from 75 this respect, paralyzes the whole movemen't of
to 150. The king used his influence to .secure the church, in her great contest with the pnw-
thc attendance of the people, and was always 'ers of evil. Hence it is, that the most far-
present himself, — with liis wife and family, — a 'seeing minds in every age of the church have
very attentive listener. He had sent his young- given sijccial thong-ht'to this subject. No
est .son, a bright buy about ten years of age, (juestion with them has been more vital than
to reside with IMr. Snow. A school of about this — how shall a suffieJent number of men, of
30 boys and girls manifested nnich interest in ; the right stamp of character, bo sought out
learning to read and spell. But the mission and fitted for the responsible work of the
comiuiny had been deeply afHieted by the Christian ministry ?
death of Opunui, in August. Other trials, j AVe .'^hall not now attempt any general his-
too, had been experienced, .';uch as have so i tory of tiiis .subject, as it stands connected
olten and .«o soptly afflicted missionaries on | with the growth and prosperity of the church
the i.<lands of the I'ucific. In many instances,' at large. Our ol)ject will be simply to give
the dejiortuK-nt and the kindness of captains some brief account of the methods by wliieh
of vessels and otiier foreigners had been most the ministry has hitherto been sui)plied in this
MINISTERIAL EDUCATION.
541
country, and more especially to set forth the
present coudition of this interest among the
different religious denominations of our land.
The early ministers in this country were,
almost without exception, men who had been
educated and trained for their work, in the old
world : and in the great majority of cases they
had filled the pastoral office before coming
hither. The intolerance and persecution which
drove from their homes so large a portion of
these early emigrants, would be likely to bear,
with peculiar severity, upon non-conforming
ministers ; and hence it was, that so large a
number of persons of this class were found in
the early settlements.
At no period has this country been better
supplied with religious teachers than during
the first few years after these settlements be-
gan. It has been estimated that there was in
the New England colonies, twenty years after
the landing at Plymouth, a graduate of Oxford
or Cambridge college, for every 240 inhabit-
ants. A few of these graduates were employ-
ed in the civil administration of the colonies,
but most of them were in the ministry.
But as the population of the country in-
creased, and as an adequate supply of ministers
from abroad could not be depended upon, the
thoughts of good men began to turn toward
some method for raising up, on these shores,
a supply of Christian teachers. In the year
1G3G, the foundations of Harvard College were
laid, amid much sacrifice and self-denial, with
special reference to this sacred interest. From
this time forward, as new churches were plant-
ed, or as the early ministers passed away by
death, the ministerial office was supplied, in
great measure, from among the' graduates of
the infant college. More than half of its gra-
duates, during the first century of its existence,
entered into the labors of the ministry. Cotton
Mather, in his Magnalia, has given us a list of
the churches in tlie New England colonies,
for the year 1G96, with their ministers, by
which it appears that there were then 129
churches, having 116 pastors, of whom 107
were graduates of Harvard College. In the
year 1C92, the College of William and Mary,
Va., was founded, and in 1700 Yale College,
in Ct. To these three institutions the churches
for a long time were wont to look for a sup-
ply of educated ministers. For almost fifty
years no other college was added to the list.
In 1746, the College of New Jersey, at Prince-
ton, was founded, and from that time forward
colleges have been springing i;p, numerously
in all parts of the land. In the year 1800,
we had 24 institutions bearing this name, and
now the number has increased to 120. It
must be confessed, however, that many of these
institutions are hardly deserving of the name,
though some of the smallest of them aspire to
be called universities. Still they have, to a
very great extent, been founded for the prima-
ry purpose of training up ministers of the
From 1540-1650 .
. 22
From 1720-1730
" 1650-1660 . .
. 37
1730-1740
" 1660-1670 .
. 31
1740-1750
" 1G70-16R0 . .
. 28
1750-1760
" 1680-1690 . .
. 35
1760-1770
" 1690-1700 . .
. 72
1770-1780
» 1700-1710 . .
. 95
1780-1790
" 1710-1720 . .
. 99
1790-1800
Gospel for the several denominations to which
they belong. Of these institutions the Bap-
tists have the control of 24 ; the Methodists of
10 ; the Episcopalians of 7, and the Catholics
of 9. The controlling influence in almost alV
the rest is Congregational or Presbyterian.
Until the beginning of the present century,
the cause of ministerial education had but a
slow growth. There was a sure, but at no
time a rapid advance. From the early periods
of the country. New England has borne a
very prominent part in the work of raising up
ministers ; and the following table will show
at a glance, the progress made in this cause,
in New England, down to the year 1800. The
table dates from near the time of the found-
ing of Harvard College, and exhibits the num-
ber of ministers who have come forth from
the N. E. colleges, arranged in periods of ten
years : —
Ministers. Ministers.
. 195
. 195
. 176
. 178
. 224
. 219
. 264
. 310
Soon after the beginning of the present cen-
tury, a new and decided impulse was imparted
to the whole cause of ministerial education.
The population of the country, which until
then had been found mostly along the Atlan-
tic shores, began to pour westward, and take
possession of the vast territories which had
been kept ready for its reception. About the
same time, too, the Foreign Missionary enter-
prise was started, creating an additional de-
mand for Christian laborers. A new sense of
responsibility was enkindled in the church to-
ward the perishing millions of the heathen
world. These causes conspired to produce a
greatly increased activity in the work of bring-
ing forward candidates for the sacred office.
Under the pressure which was then felt upon
this subject, the American Education Society
was formed, in the year 1815, which very soon
began to lend a powerful aid for the further-
ance of this great work. The evidence of this
progress may be distinctly seen, by continuing
the table which we have given above, down to
the year 1840. This table is confined, as be-
fore, to the New England colleges.
Ministers.
From 1800-1810 427
" 1810-1820 635
" 1820-1830 965
" 1830-1850 1077
This table, however, gives only a very par-
tial idea of the advance which has actually been
made since the beginning of the present century.
Most of the large New England colleges were
already in existence before the close of the last
century, while, since that time, in other parts
of the country, colleges have sprung up in great
542
MINISTERIAL EDUCATION.
numbers. As already stated, there were in the
year 1800, but 24 colleges in the M'bolc coun-
try, and now the number has increased to 120.
Almost all these institutions have been contri-
buting, according to their degree, to the ranks
of the ministry.
There is still? another item, in this enumera-
tion, which ought not to be overlooked. The
two largest religious denominations in our land,
the Methodists and the Baptists, the former
numbering 12,484 churches, and the latter
9,659, have to a very great extent, been sup-
plied with ministers, whose names are not found
in the catalogues of our colleges or theological
schools. And yet it must be confessed that the
ministry, in both these denominations, has been
remarkably efficient and useful. It has carried
the Gospel, with its life-giving power,among the
moving masses of our population, which might
otherwise have been sadly neglected. Though,
as was inevitable, there have been many things
exceptionable in connection with a ministry of
this sort, yet we may say with Paul, " Clu'ist
is preached, and therein we rejoice, yea and
will rejoice." It is very greatly to the credit
of these two denominations, that as the country
grows older, and as their first rough work is
done, they are turning their attention more
and more to the great enterprise of rearing up
an educated ministry. The Baptists already
have some 24 colleges and 10 theological
schools in diftcrent parts of the land, devoted to
this work, and in many of the older portions
of the country, their ministry, for dignity and
culture, holds a most honorable position, 'i'lic
Methodists, though somewhat later in the pro-
cess, are also giving earnest attention to this
subject. They already numljcr 10 colleges,
some of them of a very efficient character. In
the department of distinct theological study
they have as yet done but little. They have
one theological school, the " Biblical Institute,"
at Concord, N. H., recently ibrmed, which is
understood to be working very successfully.
In the absence, however, ol' theological schools,
the candidates for the ministry, in the Metho-
dist Church, are now for the must i)art carried
through a process of training, the details of
which we cannot stop minutely to describe,
but which serves as a partial substitute for a
regular course of theological study.
The growth of theological schools in this
country even among those ilenominations which
have given most attention to thorough minis-
terial education, has been of comparatively re-
cent date. In earlier times, the candidate for
the ministry, after he had closed his course of
college study, was accustomed to reside for a
season with some settled pastor, where he could
enjoy the benefit of books and conversation,
and ccnild accustom himself also to the practi-
cal business of the ministry. Tjiis course of
training had its advantages and it.s disadvan-
tages. It pave the student an ample opportu-
nity to understand the details of the pastoral
work, but in the department of intellectual and
biblical training it was far less efficient than
the present method. In many cases too it was
unfavorable to breadth and liberality of senti-
[ ment. _ The teacher, especially if he was a man
I of decided force of intellect, was apt to impress
I his opinions, theological and practical, too
bodily upon the mind of the pupil. In this rc-
I spect, a theological seminary, with its several
I teachers and its diverse studies, and with the
influence derived from the intercourse of stu-
dents among themselves, is far more favorable
to completeness of education.
The oldest theological seminary in the coun-
try is that at Andover, Mass., which was found-
ed in the year 1807. The next in order is
the seminary at Princeton, founded in 1812.
Others soon followed, and now the number has
increased to 44. The number of students con-
nected with these seminaries in 1853 was not
far from 1C50. The three largest are the semi-
nary at Princeton, the Union Seminary in New
York city, and the seminary at AndoVer.
In our estimate of the progress of the
cause of ministerial education in this country,
as seen in connection with the colleges, we
brought the reckoning down to the year 1 840.
About this time a reaction commenced, which
has extended itself, to a greater or less de-
gree, throughout all the religious denomina-
tions in the land, and which is now beginning
to excite no little apprehension. iS'ot with-
standing the very rapid growth of our popula-
tion, and the prosperous condition of the
country, in respect to almost all forms of sec-
ular enterprise, there has almost everywhere
been an actyal retrograde as regards this
sacred interest. A few statistics will show
how the case stands better than any general
statements.
Let us take, in the first instance, the four
Congregational seminaries of New England,
Andover, Bangor, East "Windsor, and New
Haven. The number who completed their
education in these four institutions
In 1R40 was 81
" 1841 " 81
" 1842 " 08
" 1843 " 82
" 1844 " 64
" 1845 " 71
"1846 " 70
In 1847 was 64
"1848 '■ 67
" 1849 " 57
" 1850 " 615
"1851 " 49
" 1852 '• 68
"1853 " 45
In Lane Seminary, the course of events has
been somewhat different during the period of
time coiitem])lated in the above tables, but on
the whole discouraging. In this seminary,
the number completing their education
16
12
20
"1841 "
" 1848 "
28
" 1842 "
14
. . . . 38
" 1849 "
14
" 1843 " ..
" 1850 "
13
" 1844 "
19
" 1851 »
"1852 "
"1853 "
10
" 1846 "
"1846 "
22
28
8
8
Take, again, the operations of the two New
MINISTERIAL EDUCATION.
543
School Presbyterian Seminaries in the State
of New York, Union and Auburn. Although
the Union Seminary in New York city has
continued to prosper, the Seminary at Auburn
has materially declined, so that if we take
their joint labors, there has been no increase
upon the field where they operate. The num-
ber completing their course of study in these
two seminaries,
In 1840 was
" 1841 "
39
57
" 1842 "
"1843 "
"1844 "
42
42
41
"1845 "
"1846 "
37
43
In 1847 was 49
" 1848 " 39
" 1849 " 43
" 1850 " 41
"1851 " 44
" 1852 " 46
"1853 " 36
The candidates for the ministry in connec-
tion with the Old School Presbyterian Church,
as given in the " Home and Foreign Record "
for February last, since the year 1844, range
as follows : —
In the year 1844 244
" " 1845 257
" " 1846 255
. " " 1847 258
" " 1848 246
In the year 1849 250
" " 1850 241
" " 1851 254
" " 1852 267
" " 1863 240
This table, it will be noticed, does not give
the number who have closed their studies hi
these years, as in tlie previous tables. It in-
cludes all the theological students who are con-
nected with the Okt School seminaries. And
although there is little actual retrograde, yet
in a denomination numbering almost 3,000
churches, and rapidly extending, it is but a
meagre number of candidates for the sacred
office. In connection with this table, the
" Record " says, " The statistics of our candi-
dates for the ministry summon the church to
the mercy-seat; with an urgency of appeal
which no intelligent and zealous Christian will
resist."
The statistics now given, though they do
not cover the whole field, may doubtless be
taken as a fair indication of the tendencies of
the times in respect to the cause of ministerial
education. It is exceedingly difficult, in re-
gard to several of the religious denominations
of the country, to present the results, year by
year, as in the above tables, because so many
of their candidates for the ministry are not
found in their public institutions. Through-
out the Congregational and Presbyterian
fields, we may ascertain very accurately how
the matter stands, by studying the catalogues
of the theological schools. But the general
statements which are made on this subject in
the publications of almost all the religious
bodies of the land, give ample proof that this
downward tendency is well nigh universal.
The following table, made up in part from
the census of 1850, and in part from statistics
gathered still later by the several religious
bodies to which they refer, is designed to give
a complete view, as far as possible, of the re-
ligious state of the country in respect to the
number of churches and ministers :
Ministers.
10,280
7,430
3,765
1,687
1,650
1,421
663
273
309
202
250
Churches.
Methodist 12,484
Baptist 9,C59
Presbyterian 4,639
Congregational 1,971
Episcopal 1,350
Roman Catholic 1,411
Lutheran 1,205
Christian 607
Qualier V15
Universalist 494
Jloravian 331
German Reformeil 260
Dutch Reformed 296
Unitarian 244
Mennonite 400
Jewish 31
Swedeuborg 15
OtherSecta 1,357
While in some of the smaller of these bo-
dies there seems to be an adequate supply of
ministers, in most of them, and especially in
the large denominations, there is a very serious
deficiency. There is doubtless a considerable
number of ministers, who are not included in
this reckoning. The colleges of the country,
founded as they are upon religious principles,
and wfth primary reference to the raising up
of ministers, have always supplied themselves
with teachers, mainly from the ministerial
ranks ; and a large number of men are in this
way withdrawn from the pastoral office. The
religious press of the country, also, absorbs no
small number of those who have once been
settled in the ministry, yet in both these sta-
tions it is deemed highly important to have
men of this class, so that this may be regarded
as a part of the regular demand. Not a few
also are temporarily out of employment, and
their names may not appear in the statistics of
the denominations to which they belong ; but,
after making all due allowances, it cannot, Ave
think, be doubted that there is already a real
deficiency in the ministerial supply. The
especial cause for alarm, however, is with refer-
ence to the future. The tendency, at present
is clearly doAvnward, and unless this is soon
arrested, it will entail upon the churches the
most serious consequences.
The Foreign Missionary enterprise has
now become one of such growing magnitude
as to demand a considerable number of men,
efficiently to carry on its operations. The calls
in behalf of this work were never more press-
ing than now. Although the number of or-
dained ministers employed by the several For-
eign Missionary Boar^ls in this country is not
large, as compared with the number of minis-
ters in the home field, yet it is one most im-
portant and growing item in the demand made
upon the churches in this country for ministe-
rial education.
The amount of agency exerted by education
societies in this country in the work of train-
ing up men for the ministry, may be judged
of by reference to the following items : The
544
MIRUT— MISS. SOC. OF THE METH. EPISCOPAL CHIJPvCn.
American Education Society, (including the
parent society at Boston, and its Presbyterian
branches,) since its formation, in the year
1815, has raised and expended in the 'oork of
ministerial education not far from $1,300,000.
It has afforded aid to 4500 young men in their
course of education for the ministry. The
amount raised by this society for the year
ending April 30, 1854, was 838,914, and the
number of young men assisted for the same
year was 432.
The A. B. C. F. M. since its formation has
sent out into the great foreign mission field,
not far from 325 ordained ministers. Of these
140 have been beneficiaries of the American
Education Society. About one-third of the
Congregational ministers of New England at
the present time were aided in their education
by this society, while more than one-third of
that large body of men who have labored so
efficiently in connection with the Home Mis-
sionary Society, were raised up in the same way.
The Board of Education of the Presbyterian
Church (Old School.) has since its formation
furnished aid to about 2200 young men. IIow
many of these men have been employed in
Foreign and Home missionary service, we have
no means at hand for determining. The
amount raised by this Board, from year to
year, for the purposes of ministerial education,
is not far from !?35,000, and the number of
young men now assisted yearly, is but little
less than 400.
There is also an Education Society in con-
nection with the Baptist churches, which has
rendered efficient aid in the same great work,
but the exact details we cannot give.
_ In view of the facts thus set forth, it is ob-
vious that the churches of this country are
drawing near to a time of serious embarrass-
ment, unless the most speedy and efficient
measures are employed to change the present
tendencies. There is an earnest call upon all
the friends of Christ to look above, to the great
Lord of the harvest, entreating h.im, "that he
would send forth laborers into the harvest."—
Eev. T. N. Tarisox.
MIRUT, or MEEROOT: Capital of a
district of the same name in Norlliern Ilindos-
tan, 30 miles north-ea.--t of Delhi. It is the
residence of a revenue collector and judge, and
the liead- quarters of a military force of 20,000
men, of whom about 3,000 are Europeans.
The Church Society have a mission there.
MTRZAPOPE : A large and flourishing
town in the province of Allahaljud, and dis-
trict of Mirzapore, situated on the south side
of the Ganges, about 30 miles W. S.W. of Be-
nares. It is one of the largest inland trading
towns, and has long been the grand mart for
cotton. The population is sup])osed to l)e
about f.0.000. and that of the whole district
1,000,000. 'J'hc- London Missionary Society
commenced its labors there in 1838. The city
was then comparatively new, and occupied
much the same position in regard to trade and
commerce, as Benares did Avith respect to re-
ligion.
MISSIONARY SOCIETY OF THE
METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHURCH:
This Society was organized in the city of New
York, April 5, 1819, the following persons
being chiefly instrumental in its formation, viz.,
Messrs. Freeborn Garrettson, Samuel Merwin,
Joshua Soi'.le, Tliomas Mason, Laban Clark,
Seth Croicell, Samuel Hoxve, Tltomas Thorp,
and Nathan Bangs. Four of this venerable
band still linger among us, to witness, after 35
years, the growing efficiency of the enterprise
they were the honored instruments of inaugu-
rating. The General Conference, at Baltimore,
in 1820, fully endorsed the Society, and adopt-
ed it as one of the institutions of the church.
The Society embraces, by its constitution,
both foreign and domestic missions. The terms
of mcmber.ship are, the annual contribution of
§2 to its funds, or the contribution of §20 at one
time constitutes a member for life. The officers,
(except the corresponding secretary, who is ap-
pointed by the General Conference, and a vice-
president from each of the annual conferences,)
are elected by the Society, but must be mem-
bers of the Methodist Episcopal Church. The
Corresponding Secretary is under the direction
and control of the Board of Managers. This
Board consists of 32 managers chosen by the
Society, together with the president, vice-pres-
idents, secretaries, and treasurer ; and all or-
dained Methodist ministers, who are members
of the Society, are ex-officio members of the
Board of Managers. Each annual conference
has an auxTliary ; and auxiliaries and donors
are allowed to designate the mission to which
their contributions shall be applied. The an-
nual conferences are divided into mission dis-
tricts, with eflcctive superintendents, and a
committee of one from each district, ai)i)ointed
by the bi.shop, constitutes a General ^Missionary
Committee. This conunittee/ meets annually
in the city of New York, Avith the Board of
^Managers, for fixing the amount to be drawn,
and in the division of it between the foreign
and domestic missions. Tiiis committee, also,
in concurrence with the Board of Managers
and at least two of the bi.shops. determine what
fields shall be occupied or continued a.s foreign
missions, the number of persons to be employ-
ed, and the amoiuits to be a]ipropriated to
each. The same committee also determines the
amount uir which each bishop may draw for
domestic missions in those conferences over
which he pri'sides. But in the interim the
Board of Managers, with the bishop in charge
of the work luoposed, nuiy adoi)t a new field,
or jn-ovide for any unlbr.-een emergency, not
exceeding §5,000. The General Committee
are amenable to the (General Conference, lo
whom they are required to make full reports of
tlieir i)roceedings. There are also eleven
standing committees, and rules and regulations
mSS. SOC. OF THE METH. EPISCOPAL CHURCH.
545
prescribing the duties of officers, regulating
the salaries of missionaries, &c. The Mission-
ary Board holds their regular meetings on the
third Wednesday of each month, at the com-
mittee rooms, in the city of New York.
The Society was incorporated by the Legis-
lature of the State of New York, in 1839,
which authorized it to hold property ; and
another act was passed in 1850, by which it
was authorized to receive legacies.
The mode of proceeding in raising funds for
the support of missions, the reader will find
fully described in the article on Home Missions,
under the head of Methodist Home Missions.
The moneys appropriated are paid out to the
missions under the direction of the Board, and
the accounts and vouchers are returned to the
treasurer by the superintendent of each mission.
For the right use of the moneys appropriated,
the Board is rcsponsiljle.
_ When a foreign mission is authorized, the
bishop having charge of foreign missions for
the time being appoints the missionary or mis-
sionaries, making his selection from the whole
body of the ministry in the whole church. One
of the missionaries so appointed is made super-
intendent of the mission, and bears the same
relation to it, as far as circumstances will per-
mit, as a presiding elder to his district. Thus
each mission is instantly organized on the
organic principle of the church which originates
it ; namely, the principle of a responsible super-
intendent. The spiritual and disciplinary ad-
ministration of each foreign mission is under
the supervision of the bishop, aided by the
Corresponding Secretary ; but the estimates
for the salaries and other expenses of the mis-
sion are under the supervision and management
of the Board of Managers. Thus the spiritual
affairs of the mission are committed to the
bishops and its pecuniary interests exclusively
to the Board. If, when a foreign mission goes
into operation, the missionaries shall find
it expedient to institute schools, or employ
helpers or colporteurs, the authority of the
Board must be had expressly, both as respects
the persons, their salaries, and the objects con-
templated. This places the responsibility of
appointing the missionaries upon the bishops,
who from their general acquaintance with tiie
whole ministry in the church, and their facili-
ties for ascertaining the character and fitness of
any minister, can put their hands on the pro-
per men ; and the action of the bishop in mak-
ing the appointments is wholly independent of
the pecuniary considerations involved. He
selects the man ; the Board provides the means
to meet the expenses ; and yet the Board is
restricted from going beyond the general ap-
propriation or credit allowed by the General
Missionary Committee for each particular mis-
sion for the year.
In all this movement for making appropria-
tions, raising missionary funds, and instituting
and carrying on missions at home and abroad,
35
there is but one regular office under pay of the
society for salary, and this is the Corresponding
Secretary, who is required to give his whole
time to the work. He is allowed a clerk in
the office, to keep the records, to take charge
of business matters in his absence, and to at^
tend to out-door business. In like manner the
Treasurer is allowed a clerk, to keep the books
and attend to the proper business of the trea-
sury ; but the Treasurer receives no pay for
his own services.
Notwithstanding the favorable reception
which this society received at its inauguration
in 1819, yet, at its anniversary in 1820, the
amount of money reported was only $823 04.
The amount expended was $85 76. The next
year the amount reported was $2,328 7G ; and
the expenditure 3-407 37. Indeed it then seem-
ed more difficult to expend than to collect,
though the collections were sufficiently small.
So difficult was it to diffuse the missionary
spirit among the ministers and members of the
church, that the bishops seemed afraid to select
and appoint missionaries, and to draw on the
treasury, so that from the time of its organiza-
tion to the year 1832, a balance in the trea-
sury was reported each year, though the great-
est amount for any one year was but $14,176 11.
From that time, however, — which was the year
the Liberia Mission commenced — it has gra-
dually increased in its resources, and enlarged
the boundaries of its operations by taking in
new fields of missionary labor, until in the year
1840, the receipts amounted to $135,521 94,
and the expenditures to $146,498 58 ; while
last year the income was $339,072 06, and the
disbursements $288,506 88, with $50,000 in
the treasury Jan. 1, 1854, to meet the demands
on the society for the quarter ending March 31.
The annual income has more than doubled
itself during the past twelve years.
Besides those noticed under the head of
Home Missions, the Society has established
Missions in Africa, China, South America, and
among the North American Indians, particular
notices of which will be found under the appro-
priate heads. They have also in contemplation,
missions to Turkey and Himhstan, for which
$12,500 have been appropriated.
Up to 1831, the Methodist Episcopal Church
had no foreign missions except to the North
American Indians. That year, through the
efi:orts of Kev. Dr. True, the Young Men's
Methodist Missionary Society was formed at,
Boston, in order to enter upon the missionary
work in foreign countries, and soon after com-
menced the mission to Africa ; and the same
year the Board sent a missionary to Aii-ica.
The Young Men's Society afterwards becamoL
an auxiliary of the Board. The first mission-
ary prayer-meetings held by the Methodists of
New England were suggested by the Young
Men's Society.
The Methodist Episcopal denomination in the
United States, according to the last census, has-
646
MISS. SOC. OF THE METH. EPISCOPAL CHURCH.
12.4C4 diurch edifices, valued at ^14,636,676,
■with an agfrreg'ate accommodation for 4,209,333
persons. With this array of numbers and
wealth, it may be asked why they have not done
more in the work of foreign missions? To this
question it may be answered that, seventy-five
years ago next Christmas-day, the Methodist
Episcopal Church in the United States had no
organized existence. The church was organized
in the city of Baltimore in 1784. Previous
to that time, there were about 13,000 Method-
ists scattered over this country and the Cana-
das, with only about 100 licensed preachers,
scarcely a dozen of them ordained, and proba-
bly not a single church edifice. The work of
the church, from its first organization, was
essentially missionary ; but it had first to form
a body from the materials immediately around
it, before it could command the resources for
carrying the Gospel to distant lands. The
first 30 or 40 years after their organization
was employed in the Avork of acquiring a com-
munion of their own. Then symptoms of ma-
turity began to manifest themselves ; and the
want of the institutions and arrangements of
well-organized and established communions
began to be felt and expressed. Hence, cir-
cuits began to yield up their towns as stations ;
city churches, Avhich had been associated as
circuits began to separate into distinct charges;
conferences began to feel the need of schools
and academies, and colleges, for the people
born within their congregations or acquired
from without. The Church in her growtli had
arrived at that state when these institutions
necessarily arose within her limits, if she
meant to maintain herself in the execution of
her mission. And some thirty years ago she
entered formally into the modern missionary
enterprise, by the formation of the Missionary
Society of the Methodist Episcopal Church.
Her first formal missionary efforts were neces-
sarily directed to her home work, and she did
not enter upon the foreign work until I'ro-
videncc called her to establish a mission in
Liberia, in Africa. 'J'iuis growing first by
spreading among the people, and advancing
into new countries, and then coming to matu-
rity by beginning to grow vigorously and
rapidly within herself, she, within a lew years
past, has become conscious of her nuiture and
permanent existence in the land, and of her
responsibilities and duties as a Church. Taking
the whole body of Methodists in the United
States, they iiave grown in 70 years from
13,000 to 1,200,000 meml)ers, besides the many
hundreds that have died during that time.
Thus the condition of the Methodist Church
since its organization has been one of unparal-
leled growth and expansion ; and its whole
attention and strength have been employed in
advancing to its' present nuiturity. IJut,
having gained that nuiturity, it is now called
to wider and more vigorous action iu the
forcigu field.
In the year 1843 — the year before the divi-
sion of the Church — the number of foreign
missionaries was about 60 ; with 5,085 mem-
bers, of whom 3,851 were Indians. The amount
collected that year was §109,452, and the
amount expended §145,035 ; leaving a balance
against the Society of §35,.583.
After the division, the Missionary Society
of the Methodist Episcopal Church South,
was formed, its operations being conducted
independently upon the same general principles
as the original Society.
In 1846, one year after the division was con-
summated, the statistics (for Indians and Af-
rica, as before,) stood thus :
Mission's. Memb's. Income. Expend.
Meth. E. Church 2T 1,448 $89,528 $65,444
" " South.. 33 3,632 TSi 667 not stated
Totals CO 5,080 $163,195
In 1854, they stood as follows : —
Jlethodist Epis, Church
Methodist Epis. Church South. . .
United
Increase in eight years
44 2,412
34 4,232
78 6,044
18 1,564
$228,427
168,031
$396,458
$233,263
The income and expenditure of the Mission-
ary Society of the Methodist Episcopal Church
from the time of its organization, April 5,
1819, to January 1st, 1854 :—
Receipts. Expenditures.
Inl820 S 823.04 $ 85.76
"1821 2,328.70 407.87
"1822 2.547.39 1.781.40
"1823 6;427.14 3,740.22
"1824 3,589.92 4,996.14
"1825 4,140.16 4,704.21
"1826 , 4,964.11 5,510.85
"1827 6,812.49 7,379.42
"1828 6,245.17 8,100.18
From 1829 to 1838 (inclusive). 498.497.49 466,038.23
" 1839 to 1848 " .1,106,123.84 1,604,62L32
In 1849 100,196.09 102,939.90
"1S50 107,835.73 100,989.63
"1851 133,317.41 131,663.40
"1852 154,858.08 158,031.42
Eight months, ig53 109,041.12
ending Jan. 1, '
In 1854 228,427.27 288,506.88
Total, from April, 1819, to 1 g.^j .g, .94 gg $0 339 goa.ss
January, 1854 J " > ' > '
Income of the Missionary Society of the
Methodist Episcopal Church South, from the
first year of their separate organization : —
For the year ending May, 1846 $ 68,529
.. -^ u u " "-"1847 72,697
" " " " 1848 62,613
" " " " 1849 66,496
" » " " 1850 85,973
<i " " " 1851 113,801
" " " " 1852 123.163
" a " " 1853 100 001
MITIARO— MORETON BAY.
547
For tKe year ending May, 1854 §168,031
$927,203
Add the contrib. of the Method. E. Church. .2,481,794
And we have the sum of S3,408,997
contributed by the members of tbe Methodist
E. Church, for Home and Foreign Missions,
dui-ing the past 34 years.
In the address of the venerable Dr. Bangs,
at the opening of the new Missionary Rooms,
in New York, he stated, that from a close
and anxious investigation, he was satisfied that,
up to that time there had been at home and
abroad, at least 60,000 persons converted to
God through the instrumentality of this soci-
ety, since its organization. To God be all the
glory.
TABULAR VIEW OP FOREIGN MISSIONS.
Methodist Episcopal Church.
a
.2
11
1
13
25
ca
a
.2
'5
29
47
19
11
30
i
a
1410
1227
2637
Day
Sunday
■3
■Jl
9
1
0
.a
cH
640
304
944
A
16
13
29
CO
839
American Indians
Totals
292
1131
Mdhodist Episcopal Church South.
1
30
31
6
28
34
81
30
4232
4232
6869
36
944
34
34
63
American Indians
Totals
Totals, both churches.
1394
1394
2525
Among the Indians both churches have
several manual labor schools and four or five
seminaries, not included in the above statistics.
The Church South has 490 pupils in her
superior schools. — Authorities : Bangs and
Strickland's Histories of the 31issions of the
Methodist E. Church ; the Annual Reports of
both societies ; the Christian Advocate ; and
Missionary Advocate. — Rev. W. Butler.
MITIARO : A small island in the South
Seas, belonging to the Hervey Islands. Pop.
100. A station of the London Missionary
Society, with one native teacher.
MOA : One of the Banda Islands, a group
of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archipelago.
MOGRA HAT : A station of the Gospel
Propagation Society, 32 miles south-east of
Calcutta, and 12 from Barripore.
MOK A : A station of the London Mission-
ary Society on the Mauritius, about 12 miles
from Port Louis. Moka is well adapted as a
site for a permanent mission station. It occu-
pies the centre of a large Malagasy village,
and two other populous villages lie a few
miles from it. The land is capable of a high
state of cultivation. The station was esta-
blished for the benefit of the Malagasy refu-
gees. (See Mauritius.)
MOKAU : A station of the Wesleyan Mis-
sionary Society in New Zealand, on the west
side of the island.
MOLOKAI : One of the smaller of the
Sandwich Islands group, lying to the north-
east of Maui, 40 miles long by 7 broad, broken
by numerous deep ravines, with little level
land ; on which is a station of the American
Board.
MOLLAH : A spiritual and judicial officer
among the Turks, who has civil and criminal
jurisdiction over towns or whole districts, and
is therefore a superior judge, under whom are
the cadis or inferior judges.
MOMBAS : Station of the Church Mis-
sionary Society in East Africa, situated on a
small island at the mouth of the Tuaca river,
near the coast of Zanzebar, in lat. 4° S. It
has the finest harbor on the coast.
MONGHIR : A celebrated town and for-
tress in the province of Bahar, situated on the
south side of the Ganges, and distant from
Calcutta about 300 miles. Population 30,000.
Occupied by the English Baptists as a station
in 1816.
MONROVIA : The capital of the republic
of Liberia, so called in honor of the late Pre-
sident Monroe. It is a place of growing com-
mercial importance, occupied as a mission by
the American Baptist Missionary Union.
MONTEGO BAY: A station of the Wes-
leyans in Jamaica, W. I.
MONTROSE : A station of the London
Missionary Society in Demerara, W. I.
MONTSERRAT : A fruitful and pleasant
island, about 20 miles south-east of Antigua,
agreeably diversified with hills and vales, with
streams of water and a generous soil. Pop.
10,000. Society for Propagating the Gospel.
MONOPHYSITES : A general name
given to all those sects in the Levant who own
but one nature in Christ, and who maintain
that the divine and human nature of Jesus
Christ were so united as to form but one na-
ture. They are also called Jacobites, after
Jacob Baradseus, Avho restored the sect after
it had been suppressed by the emperor Justin.
They are divided into two parties, one Afri-
can, under the jurisdiction of the patriarch of
Alexandria, the other Asiatic, at the head of
whom is the patriarch of Antioch.
MONASTERY : A convent built for the
reception of monks, mendicant friars and nuns.
MOOLKY : A station of the Basle Mission-
ary Society, in the province of Canara, Hin-
dostan.
MORANT BAY : A station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society in Jamaica, W. I.
MORETON BAY : An extensive grazing
district in Australia, occupied by the Soci-
ety for Propagating the Gospel in Foreign
Parts.
548
MORETY— MOSUL.
MORETY : One of the Molucca Islanils, iu
the Iiuliiiii Arcliipslaso.
MOKIAII : A station of the United Breth-
ren, on the r.-:laiid of Tobago, W. I.
MORIJA : Station of the French Protest-
ants in South Africa, 160 miles east of Cale-
don, among the Bassoutos ; commenced 1833.
Inhabitants, 4,000. In connexion Avith this
station are 280 villages, of 12,000 inhabitants,
which, being divided into 28 districts, are
placed under the instruction of the word of
God by native teachers.
MORLEY : A station of the Wesleyan
Missionary Society in Kaffraria, South Africa.
MOSUL : A walled city of Mesopotamia,
in N. lat. 30^ 20' 17" ; E. Ion. 43° 10' 17".
It stands on the western bank of the Tigris,
where the high land, that generally lies some
distance back, comes down to the river. This,
at its narrowest point, is 305 feet broad, and
is crossed by a bridge resting on 21 boats,
•which, during the season of high water, when
the river is sometimes a mile wide, is detached
from the opposite shore, and lies idle along tlie
western bank. The average breadth of the
river between Mosul and Bagdad, at its ordi-
nary height, is 200 yards.
Directly opposite Mosul, and about three-
fourths of a mile distant, lie the ruins of an-
cient Nineveh. These were first accurately
surveyed by Claudius J. Rich, Esq., in 1820 ;
and in 1843, Moub. F. E. Batta led the way in
their excavation. His remarkable discoveries
at Khorsabad have been followed by tlie bril-
liant achievements of Hon. A. IT. Layard, at
Nimrood, Khoyunjuk and other points in
Assyria and ^Mesopotamia.
The population of Mosul was at one time
estimated to l)e more than 100,000, but does
not now probably exceed one-third of that
number, if it amounts to that. 8.000 of the
inhabitants are nominally Cln-istians ; the rest
are Mohannncdans, with the exception of
about 150 families of Jews.
The nominal Christians belong mostly to
three sects, viz. : Chaldeans
who acknowledge the Pope ; Jacobites, and
pai)al Syrians, who are seceders from the Ja-
cobites. Of these sects the Chaldeans arc by
far the most numerous. A few Armenians
and others reside in the city, but not enough
to deserve a separate mention.
The Arabic is the prevailing language in
Mosul, both among Moslems and Cln-istians ;
but besides this, Kurdish is used by tliose who
belong to that race, or have nnich intercourse
with it. Turkish is the government language,
and is spoken l)y those who transact business
with the authorities ; and Feliahi, a dialect of
the modern Syriac, similar to that used by the
Nestorians, in Kurdistan and Persia, is the
language of the (Christian villages around ^lo-
sul, thougli it is not much used among the
Christians of the city.
The climate of Mosul is very hot, the ther-
mometer averaging 67.80 Fahr. for the entn*e
year. In summer it rises to 115^ or 117° in
the shade, and in winter does not usually sink
below 30°. At one time during the heat of
summer, the average temperature of 35 conse-
cutive hours was 102°. But owing to the ex-
treme dryness of the air, the city is considered
healthy, notwithstanding so high a tempe-
rature.
The principal crops in the vicinity are wheat
and barley. Rice is brought from the valleys
of Kurdistan, while its mountain sides supply
the city with an abundance of the finest grapes.
Figs come mostly from the mountains of Sin-
jar, in Mesopotamia. Palm trees flourish in
the plain near jSIosul to some extent. The
olive grows in the gardens ; also pistachio
nuts and other fruits. Beets, turnips, the egg
plant, melons, cucumbers, and other vegetables
are abundant ; but barmia (hibiscus esculen
tus) — called in the United States okra — may
be said, par excellence, to be the vegetable of
the region.
The missionary field of which Mosul is the
centre extends from Mardin to Bagdad and
includes within its boundaries Jebel Tour, the
stronghold of the Jacobites, which covers an
area of 1400 square miles, the whole region of
the Yezidees extending from Jebel Singar on
the west as far east as Sheikh Adi on the bor-
ders of Kurdistan ; a large part of the country
of the mountain Nestorians, and almost the
whole of the Chaldeans living within the limits
of the Turkish empire. Telkeif, one of their
largest villages, about 9 miles from Mosul, con-
tains 5,000 inhabitants, and Elkosh 3,000 more.
It is estimated that more than 40.000 nomi-
nal Christians in the valley of the Tigris speak
the Feliahi. Some of the villages to the east
of Mosul are inhabited principally by the Ja-
cobites.
The diplomatic emissaries of Rome have
been in this region for centuries, not preaching
the Gospel, but straining every nerve to induce
the oriental churches to acknowledge the Pope,
e. Nestor'ians, | and whenever they have succeeded they have
only removed the people further from Gospel
influences, though the change effected has not
been so radical as to remove all danger of re-
turn to a purer faith ; a result which their
tyrannical measures in some instances favors
rather than retards.
'I'he Rev. Horatio Southgate, sent out by the
American Episcopal Church, visited Mosul iu
1838, on his tour of exploration through Tur-
Icey and Persia. But the first Protestant mis-
sionaries who resided here were Dr. A. (iraiit
and Rev. A. K. Hinsdale, who occupied this
as an outpost of their mission to the mountain
Nestorians, in 1841. Rev. C. C. Mitchell had
died on the way at the village of Mushtafia, near
Mardin, June 27th. Mrs. Mitchell lived to
reach Mosul, but died there July 12, 5 days
after her arrival ; when ISIr. and Mrs. H. were
themselves prostrated by disease. Thus was
MOSUL.
549
the mission baptized in snifering at the outset.
On Mr. Hinsdale's recovery nothing but his
ignorance of the Arabic prevented his laboring
at once among the Jacobites, who, hard press-
ed bj' the Papists, were eager for instruction.
Providence at this time sent to his aid a Jacob-
ite ecclesiastic from Malabar, who, educated in
the English College at Cottayan, was on his
way to be ordained bishop by the Patriarch
at Mardin. He preached the Gospel in the
churches and had much religious intercourse
with the people. On the 12th of November,
1842, Rev. Thomas Laurie and wife joined the
mission ; but on the 17th of the following
month Mr. Hinsdale was called to his rest,
leaving the mission even weaker than it was
before.
The massacre of the Nestoriaus, in 1843,
turned the attention of the missionaries more
exclusively to Mosul, and " a great door and
effectual was opened to them, but there were
many adversaries." The opposition, however,
did not originate so much among the people
themselves as from men who came from Chris-
tian lands, with the avowed purpose of oppos-
ing the labors of evangelical Protestants.
f.Yet, notwithstanding all, the truth was made
known, and agitation only stimulated investi-
gation. One man at least gave delightful evi-
dence that he was taught of God, and others
were intellectually convinced, if not savingly
converted. But the trials of the mission were
not yet over. On the morning of December
16, death removed Mrs. Laurie from among
them ; and on the 24th of April, 1844, the
little band was again bereaved in the loss of
Dr. Grant, the pioneer of the enterprise ; but
not till the Rev. Azariah Smith, jSI.D., had
been sent to minister to his last hours, and aid
the survivors by his practical faith and devot-
ed spirit. The early history of this mission
would thus seem to be little more than a record
of the death of its members ; l)ut the field was
so full of promise that the survivors would not
have left it, nor would the Board have recall-
ed them, but for the published intention of the
American Episcopalians to occupy the field.
Yielding to their prior claim, the missionaries
reluctantly turned away from this interesting
field on the 22d of October, 1844.
But the intentions of the Episcopal church
were never carried out, and for 5 years Mosul
received only brief visits at distant intervals
from Rev. Messrs. Bowen and Sandrcczki,
English missionaries to the Jews in Bagdad.
The report of the piety of the solitary disciple
left there, led to the visit of Messrs. Perkins
and Stocking, in May, 1849 ; and on the 22d
of November following. Rev. J. E. Ford, of
Aleppo, came, and remained till April 10th,
1850 ; and before he left, the Rev. I). W.
Marsh entered on his labors (March 20) in
very encouraging circumstances. Rev. "W.
F. Williams and family joined him May IG,
1851, and on November 3, a little church of 8
members was formed, which we hope is only
the germ of better things to come. Rev.
Henry Lobdell, M.D., joined the mission May
8, 1852, and the latest accounts, though they
tell the usual tale of persecution from the pa-
pists, leagued with the civil government, yet indi-
cate a preparation for an extensive reformation,
which may take place at no very distant day.
The political power of the nominal Christians
in this region is much less than that of the
larger communities nearer the capital. 'J'he
Mohammedans, too, are much more accessible
than elsewhere, and both these things encour-
age us to hope that there are glad tidings soon
to issue from Mosul, to all who love the king-
dom of our Lord Jesus Christ.
For more extended notices, see Missionary
Herald, 1839, seq. ; lUdCs Narrative of a Resi-
dence in Kurdistan; Laurie's Dr. Grant and
the Moimtain Nestorians, &c., &c. — Rev. T.
Laurie.
Present Condition and future prospects of the
Assyrian Mission — Rev. Mr. Marsh to the author.
— " The field of the Assyrian mission includes
the city of Diarbekir on the north with some
40,000 inhabitants, Mardin with 20,000, Jezi-
rah with 7,000, Mosul with 45,000, Arhilwith
perhaps 10,000, and Bagdad with its GO or
70,000. It includes a population of some
70,000 Christians, (beside a much larger Mos-
lem population,) of whom about 35,000 are of
Jacobite, 20,000 of Nestorian, and 15,000 of
Armenian origin. But from these three sects
large numbers have become papal — say of the
Nestorians 17,000, of the Armenians 5,000,
and of the Jacobites 3,000, making the papal
element over one-third. Of course these num-
bers are only approximate, but they agree very
nearly with the best authorities, though based
upon a separate estimate. The strength of the
Jacobites is in Jebal Tour, or between Mardin
and Jezirah, near the middle of the field. The
strength of the papal Nestorians is upon the
plain cast of Mosul ; that of the Armenians of
our field at Mardin and Diarbekir. There are
some Jacobites in the whole field, but almost
no Armenians in the southern part and almost
no Jacobites in the northern.
" Stations are established at Diarbekir and
Mosul, undoubtedly the best points for the
present. Churches have been formed at each
of these places, consisting now at Mosul of 12
members, at Diarbekir of 11. The average
attendance for a few months past at the fullest
Sabbath service has been at Diarbekir over
100, and here over 30. There is a flourishing
school for boys at Diarbekir, and also one for
girls, so promising that we have applied for a
female teacher from America. I'here are in
the schools at Mosul over 80 learning to read.
There are schools also at Hince, near Diarbe-
kir, and at Naherwan and Jezirah.
" At IHarbekir the great present want is a
force upon the spot to cherish the little church
and to guide and encourage the work. We
550
MOSUL.
liave been obliged to abandon that station
•with little present prospect of occupation be-
fore at least next spring. I do not believe
that a more promising point was ever tempo-
rarily abandoned by missionaries of the Ame-
rican" Board. It will be supplied with native
helpers who will sustain preaching, but it
needs at least three missionaries. The occa-
sion of leaving that point has been detailed in
letters to the rooms to which you doubtless
have access. The station remained half man-
ned till the health of Mrs. Dunmore failed, and
should Mr. Walker be Ieft«/o»e there a simi-
lar result must inevitably ensue. It should
be borne in mind that in these interior sta-
tions we are cut off from the refreshment of
occasional intercourse with travelers, and at
Diarbekir there is no consular protection.
AA"e need the prayers of Christians that mis-
sionaries may be sujiplied for and protected
in Diarbekir.
" So long as stations are half manned, the
work must be expected to languish ; and all
Western Asia is half manned. All the mem-
bers sympathize, for, whatever ma_y be the
division into missions, we are one body iu
Christ. So long as the Armenians are neg-
lected and left to perish, while calling to
American Christians for help, we arc left un-
heard to plead from a greater distance for
wants less obvious, requiring a more vigorous
exercise of faith.
" The great want at Mosul and for the As-
syrian field is a seminar}' for young men to
train up preachers, to awaken mind, to pre-
vent the iva.'ite of sending to Beirut, where, by
the distance from his house, in case a bo}' turns
out ill, the evil is greatly increased. For this
we have urged the sending out of additional
missionaries. But how shall they get here 7
They have a gauntlet to run. "When Dr. Lob-
dell came, the wants of Aintab were so ex-
ceedingly pressing, that a ])etitioii and most
urgent entreaties were used by the natives to
detain him there. AVe are glad that that rob-
bery of our field was not consummaied. Had
Dr. Lobdell known that the Committee at
home would acquiesce in his stay there, he
would have remained. I only allude to this
to sliow that the ai)athy of the American
church, in leaving that great Armenian field
without any adecjuate sui)i>ly of laborers, crip-
ples us. AVe want the attention of American
Christians drawn to their suiciilul jjolicy of
neglecting vast immortal interests, whose mo-
nientous issues eternity alone can compute.
How many a wealthy family is being ruined,
especially in its younger branches, by the
houriled manna ! How many I know person-
ally, training up children in the wureliip of
mammon, bowing down to the golden calf !
Alas ! though that maima would be bread of
life to many famishing ones here, it comes not I
AN e want, and nmst have for the success of our
work, the sober, prayerful attention of Chris-
tians to the feebleness of their efforts. For
want of one more man, in raising the timbers
of a house, the joists and beams fell back, and
crushed many of those toiling their utmost.
Is it wise — is it prudent, to leave a few labor-
ers to die with over-work ?
" The occupation of INIardin is desirable, ex-
ceedingly desirable, provided we have faith.
Some Christians seem to think that we are to
wait till Satan conies crouching to us, laying
down his arms, and oU'ering ns the keys of his
strongholds. He has been forced to this in
some cities of AYestern Asia ; but shall we
leave these other cities till they throw down
their battlements and urge us in ? Faith is
the great irant, that the kingdom of heaven
may suffer violence and the violent take it by
force. AA'e want such a mighty moral move-
ment behind us, that we shall feel that we are
borne on to new efforts as by some silent gulf-
stream flowing from our native land. If
America were only enlisted for our success,
and folloAving us with eager wishes, as gen-
erals and soldiers were followed to the halls of
Montezuma, then they would not withhold
their reinforcements, nor that best of all gifts,
their prayers.
" As to i\\c future prospects of our work, my
impression is, that if this efl'ort making in
AA'estern Asia fail now, a century will not see
it renewed under such promising auspices.
If it fail, it can only be from the storms of low-
ering war, which seems not at all probable, or
from the dcadness of the American church.
AA''ere the American church now to call us
back, old Assyrian kings would break the
silence of ages and rise like mufilcd Samuels
to reproach us. 'J'he very stones Avould cry
out.
" Ultimately, these efforts cannot fail. Un-
less God's promises arc a fable, — unless Chris-
tianity is a delusion, and God himself a being
indifferent and neglectful of his creatures, this
preaching of his Gospel cannot return void.
AVith rapt anticipation we watch the great
changes bursting upon the world — the opening
seals of the vision of the church militant and
millenial. The day seems at hand for Moslems
to accept Christ. At our disjiensary we shun
not to point them to the great Physician.
They listen Avitli re.«pect to that voir, for which
our blood would redden these streets, were they
what they were twenty years since. Their
spirit is broken ; they exi)ect the downfall of
their religion. Their expectation upon this
point is in advance of the Christian church.
It is not for mortal man to be wise upon what
God has sealed ; but we wait in hope. Hope
thrills in our hearts and rises to full assurance.
Let the cannons roll on ; let swords gleam and
drip, and the spears and chariots of war. The
King of many crowns is marching forth. AVc
expect the fall of distant Bonie : and that fall
will make freemen of her slavi's here. Our
hearts anticipate glad things. AVc rejoice iu
MOTEER— NATAL.
551
the God of our salvation. With sincere cs-
teen}; your brother in Christ,
" DwiGHT W. Marsh.
"Mosul, 3% 8, 1854."
MOTEER : One of the Molucca Islands,
in the Indian Archipelago.
MOTITO : A station of the French Pro-
testants among the Bechuanas of South Af-
rica, 9 miles south-west of Old Lattikoo, and
about 19 miles from the frontier of the colony.
It has five out-stations. Rev. J. Fredoux, the
missionary at this station, has married the sec-
ond daughter of Rev. Robert Moffat, of the
Kuruman.
MOUNT COKE : A station of the Wes-
leyans in Kaffi'aria.
MOUNT VAUGHAN : A station of the
Episcopal Board, at Cape Palmas, West Af-
rica.
MOUNT ZION : A station of the Amer-
ican Board among the Cherokee Indians.
MUFTI : The chief of the ecclesiastical
order, or primate, of the Mussulman religion.
The authority of the mufti is very great in the
Ottoman empire ; for even the Sultan himself,
if he will preserve any appearance of religion,
cannot, without first hearing his opinion, put
any person to death, or so much as inflict any
corporeal punishment. AVhen the mufti comes
into his presence, the grand seignior himself
rises up before him. Yet the grand seignior
appoints him to office, and the honors paid tn
him have become little more than form. If
the Sultan does not like his decision, he dis-
misses him and appoints another.
MUSSULMAN : A professor of the re-
ligion of Mohammed.
MUTTRA : A celebrated city, of great
antiquity, situated on the western bank of the
Jumna, about 30 miles N.N.E. from Agra,
and 80 miles S.S.E. from Delhi. Population,
80,000, of whom about one-eighth are Moham-
medans. Mr. Philips, of the English Baptist
Mission, removed to this place in 1844.
MYNPURIE : A station of the Presbyte-
rian Board in Northern India, 40 miles west
of Futteligurh.
MYSORE : A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society, and capital of a province of
the same name, in Southern Hindostan, near
the western coast, to the north-west of Ma-
dura. It is also occupied by the Wesleyan
Missionary Society.
NAGERCOIL : A town in Southern
India, in the Travancore district, a little
north-west of Cape Comorin. A station of the
London Missionary Society.
NAGPORE : A large town in the pro-
vince of Gundwana, the capital of the Boonsla
Mahrattas, lat. 20° 9' N., long. 79° 11' E.
It is elevated 4,104 feet above the sea, and in
the hot season, has a decided advantage over
other stations, the night being almost invaria-
bly cool and pleasant ; and in the winter sea-
sou, it is so cool as sometimes to produce hoar
frost and ice. Population in 1825, 115,000
A station of the Free Church of Scotland.
NAIN : A station of the United Brethren
in Labrador.
NANKING : The capital of the Kiaug
su province, and former capital of the Chinese
empire, situated on the southern banks of the
Yangtsz-kiang, in lat. 32° N., and long. 119°
E. (See China.)
NAMAQUALAND : See Africa, South-
ern.
NARSINGDARCHOKE : A station of
the Baptist Missionary Society in Bengal.
NASSAU : The capital of the island of
New Providence, W. I., and the seat of gov-
ernment. It is situated on the north side of
the island. A station of the Baptist Mission-
ary Society, and also of the Society for Pro-
pagating the Gospel.
NASSUCK : A large town and place of
pilgrimage on the Godavery, principally in-
habited by Brahmins. Population in 1820,
30,000. Near Nassuck, the seat and centre
of Brahminism in the Deccan, are extensive
Buddhist excavations, which extend round a
high conical hill, five miles from the town, with
many Buddhist figures and inscriptions, with-
out the slightest Hindoo vestiges. Church
Missionary Society.
NATAL : The colony of Natal lies in the
S. E. part of the continent of Africa, between
the latitudes of 31° 31', and 28° south. It is
bounded on the north by the river Tukela,
which divides it from the country of the Ama-
zulu ; on the south by the river Umzimkulu,
separating it from the territory of the Araa-
ponda ; on the east by the Indian Ocean ; and
on the west by the Quathamba range of moun-
tains. Its length is about ISO miles, and its
width 125 miles. The w-hile population of
Natal at present, November 1853, is estimated
at 10,000 ; most of whom have immigrated
from England since 1845. The colored popu-
lation, Zulus (or Zulu Kalfres, as they are some-
times called), is about 120,000. Most of them
are remnants of tribes which originally occu-
pied this territory, but were conquered and
dispersed by the tyrant Chaka. When the
British established their authority in Na-
tal, multitudes, from all sides, returned to the
land of their nativity for protection. Most,
however, have come from the country of the
Amazulu within a few years past, and the
number of refugees is increasing. Natal, for
several years past, has been in a state of quiet
and safety, though apprehensions have been
entertained by some that Umpandi, the present
King of Amazulu, would invade the colony.
These I'cars, for the most part, are now laid
aside ; for Umpandi, with his present force is
unable to cope with the Dutch Boers who are
settling, without his permission, in the north-
ern part of his territory. So numerous have
been the refugees from his dominion, that it is
doubtful whether the tyrannical chief can mus-
652
NATAL.
ter more than 50,000 warriors. Ufaku, the
kiug of the Amaponda, is more pacific than
most of tlic Kafl're chiefs, and endeavors to
live on good terms with his white neighbors.
lie is far more powerful than Umpandi, and
commands an army of 80,000 fighting men.
The natives of Natal are split up into numer-
ous petty tribes, each tribe having a chief of
its own, who, however, is amenable to British
authority. Constant jealousies and animosities
exist among these tribes, and nothing but fear
of the English Government prevents them from
destroying each other. The greater part of
the natives in this colony dwell on locations
assigned them by Government, and over each
location is placed a white magistrate, to keep
order, to collect the annual tax, which is seven
shillings per hut, settle their numerous disputes,
&c. When cases presented by the natives are
not satisfactorily settled by the magistrates,
they have the privilege of appealing to the
Lieut. Governor of the colony.
Natal Harbor. — The coast is skirted by a
dense " bush," or forest of thorn trees, vines,
and brambles, and the monotony of the scene
is relieved only by the mountains of silvery
spray which indicate the mouths of the nu-
merous rivers, 'i'lie only elevated and striking
object is the bluff, a rocky promontory, desig-
nating the entrance to the port. At its foot
is a great sand liar, the dread of all comers to
Natal, and the chief barrier to the prosperity
of the colony. The people of Natal are
exerting themselves to construct a break-
water lar enough into the sea, not only to
break the violence of the waves, but to check
the drifting of the sand into the harljor.
D' Urban. — An hour's walk or ride from the
harbor, in an ox wagon, through the sand,
brings one to the only seaport town in this
colony, which is ealle(l D'Urban, in honor of
Sir ]>enjamin l)'Url)an. The streets of this
town which were laid out by the Dutch at right
angles, are wide and convenient for trading
with large wagons, but intolerably sandy.
Many of the houses are one story high, and
made of " wattle and daub " — that is, long
sticks woven together between posts and plas-
tered with mud. The roofs are thatched with
long grass. Some nice brick buildings are
now going up, and tlie appearance of the
place is rapidly improving. 'J'he Wesleyans,
the largest religious society in Natal, have
here two houses of worship, one for the whiles,
and one for the colored population. 'I'lie
Episropiilians, the Congregationalists, the
Baptists, and the R<mian (yatholics have also
their sanctuaries. New churches for the troo]is
are about to be erected, at an expense of £10,-
000. The people of D'Urban are mostly mer-
•chants and mechanics. 15ut few among" them
are wealthy. Some of the oldest residents in
.the colony, who ocaipy farms, are agricultur-
ists or graziers, possess 'large herds of cattle,
4ind are in comfortable circumstances. The
Natal Bay abounds in fish, with which the
market of D'Urban is supplied ; and there is
no lack of good beef, pork, mutton, venison,
and fowls. D'Urban suffers for the want of
good water. All that is suitable for drinking
is brought in hogsheads from the Uniqui
river, Avhich is about three miles distant, or
caught from the roofs of the houses when it
rains. The M'ater of the wells is brackish,
and induces cutaneous diseases. This deficien-
cy of good water, it is supposed, may be rem-
edied by turning the Uniqui river across the
long flat on which the town is built. The ex-
periment will doubtless be made if Natal con-
tinues to prosper. D'Urban is a place of
great importance, as all the trade with the
tribes on the northern borders of Natal passes
through it, and most of the trade with the
Dutch farmers over the Quathamba Moun-
tains, and beyond the Orange river, amount-
ing to many thousands of pounds.
Two weekly newspapers are published in
D'Urban, and are well conducted. There is
also a day school for children, supported by
government. Intemperance and horse-racing
are quite prevalent.
Pidcrmaritzburg. — The town next in import-
ance to D'Urban in Natal, is Pietermaritz-
burg, or Petermauritzburg, as it is sometimes
spelled, the capital of the colony. It is about
50 miles from D'Urban, situated in a large
valley nearly surrounded by high hills, and
presents a beautiful appearance. Its streets,
like those of D'Urban, are laid out at right
angles, are broad, and shaded on each side by
large and beautiful trees. "Water, which
never fails in the driest season, is conducted
through the streets on each side, from which
every house may be supplied, and every garden
irrigated. 'JHie Lieut. Governor of the colo-
ny, his Secretary, and other chief officers of
Government, have their residence at this place.
Extensive liarracks have been erected for
British soldiers, and part of a regiment is
quartered in them.
'J'he Episcopalians, Presbyterians, Indejien-
dents, Wesleyans and Catholics have their
houses of worship. A large and flourishing
school is supported by Government. Three
jiapers are published, the " Independent,"
'•Government (Jazeteer," and "Witness for
the People." The morals of this place are far
in advance of those in D'Urban, and for health-
I'ulness of climate and beauty of a])pearance,
it is not surpassed by any locality in the col-
ony.
The trade of Pietermaritzburg is ])rineipally
with the Dutch fai-niers who come from beyond
the (Quathamba Mountains, some ten days'
journey with the ox wagon, and exchange
their ivory, wheat, and Vool for groceries,
clothing, &c.
Sccncrij— Climate— Prospects of the Coloni/.—
Natal is "preeminent for the beauty of its land-
scapes. Along the coast, the surface is for
NATAL— NESTORIANS.
553
tlie most part level ; but inland, at the dis- '
tance of about 15 miles, ruj^ged ii> the extreme.
A chain of high table lands extends the whole
length of the colony, intersected by numerous
rivers which have worn deep chasms to the
low country. During June and July (the
winter months) the natives burn off the long
grass, and the hills and valleys assume a dark
and mournful aspect. But in September and
October the rain descends copiously, and the
whole country is covered, as if by magic,
with a carpet of green. The scenery is then
truly magnificent. Natal is acknowledged to
be one of the healthiest places in Africa.
The tops of the Quathamba Mountains are
supposed to afford a cooling medium for the
hot winds which come from the interior, and
hence Natal is exempt from that debilitating
atmosphere which is the scourge of other
warm climates. The Natal climate is mild
and temperate, the atmosphere delightfully
clear, and those noxious vapors which prove
so unfavorable to health and longevity at De-
lagoa Bay, on the Gaboon and Zanzibar coasts,
are here unknown. During the summer, the
heat is seldom so great as to render out-of-
door labor oppressive ; and in winter, it is
rarely cold enough to render a fire necessary.
It is the united testimony of foreign residents,
that this colony is remarkably free from those
diseases which are common in their father-
lands. In no English colony exist in a greater
degree the elements of prosperity, viz., abun-
dance and cheapness of labor, fertility of soil,
plenty of food, healthfulness of climate, &c.
Natal is yet in its infancy. It is but recently
that the tide of immigration has turned to-
wards its shores. But from what has been
already seen of the production of sugar, cot-
ton, rice, coffee, indigo, wheat, barley, and
corn, of her wool growing districts, and her
animal market, it is reasonable to conclude
that the increasing exports will give an im-
petus to trade and industry, and thus the
colony will ere long be filled with Europeans.
— Rev. Josiah Tyler, missionary to the Zulus,
abridged from the Puritan Recorder.
NAVIGATORS' ISLANDS : See Samoa.
NAZARETH : One of forty native Chris-
tian villages, formed in Tinnevelly by the Na-
tive Philanthropic Society, in order to shelter
converts from persecution. Also, a station of
the Moravians in Jamaica, W. I.
NEGAPATAM : A town in the Madras
Presidency, and district of Tanjore, the resi-
dence of the British collector for the district,
situated on the shore of the Bay of Bengal,
162 miles south by east from Madras. The na-
tive town is extensive and irregular, and on its
north side there is a remarkable ruin of very
massive brick masonry, about 80 feet high,
called by mariners the Chinese Pagoda. It is
supposed to have been a Jain temple. A sta-
tion of the Wesleyan Missionary Society.
NEGOMBO : A town on the west coast of
Ceylon, 20 miles north from Colombo. A sta-
tion of the Wesleyan Missionary Society.
NEGROES : The term Negro is the Span-
ish and Portuguese word for black. The Ne-
gro race inhabit that portion of the continent
of Africa which commences at the Great Des-
ert of Sahara, extending southerly to about
20° of south latitude, and embracing both the
eastern and western coasts of the continent.
The skin and eyes of the Negro are black ;
hair black and woolly ; skull compressed later-
ally and in front ; forehead low, narrow, and
slanting ; cheek bones prominent ; jaws nar-
row and projecting ; ujiper front teeth oblique ;
chin receding ; eyes prominent ; nose broad,
thick, flat ; lips very thick ; palms of the
hands and soles of the feet flat ; knees turned
in, toes turned out. The stature and physical
strength are equal to the European. Many of
them have made considerable progress in the
useful arts and cultivation.
It has been said that no Negro nation ever
possessed a literature, or had the ingenuity to
invent an alphabet, and until recently this was
probably true ; but the missionaries of the
Church Missionary Society have discovered a
tribe in AVestern Africa, named Vci, which
pos.sess a well-constructed written language,
with books, the invention of one of their num-
ber still living, which presents a case as re-
markable as that of the invention of the Cher-
okee alphabet. Among the Negro race there
is a great variety, greater, perhaps, than
among any other family. For accounts of the
civil, social, and religious condition of the
Negro race, and of missions among them, see
Western Africa, Gaboon, Fernando Po,
YoRUBA, and Liberia.
NELLORE : A station of the Church of
England Mission, in the northern part of Cey-
lon, about two miles from the town of Jaffna.
Also, a large city near the northern extremity
of the Carnatic in Bengal — the principal sta^-
tion of the Teloogoo M^ission of the American
Baptist Union.
NELSON : A town in New Zealand, situ-
ated at the bottom of Tasman's Bay, on the
northern shore of the middle island, with a
population of 2.100 inhabitants. The town is
extremely pretty, situated on a small plain sur-
rounded by lofty hills. The climate is delight-
ful. It is a station of the Church Missionary
Societv.
NENGENENGE : Station of the Ameri-
can Board at the Gaboon, West Africa.
NIISTORIANS : Nestorius, from whom
comes the name Ncstorians, was a native of
Syria, and a presbyter of the church at Anti-
och, " esteem.ed and celebrated," says Neander,
" on account of the rigid austerity of his life
and the impressive fervor of his preaching."
He was made patriarch of Constantinople, a. d.
428. Possessed of an honest and pious zeal, he
was wanting probably in that prudence and
moderation by which his zeal should have been
554:
NESTORIANS.
governed ; and while his iutcmperaie efforts to
suppress various lieresies provoked, his unguard-
ed language laid him open to the attacks of
some who were jealous of his influence, or as-
pired to his position. Cyril of Alexandria
became his fierce antagonist, and Nestorius
was soon himself accused of heresy ; first, in
denying that Mary was the mother of God,
and second, in holding that there were two
persons as well as two natures in Christ. He
denied both the charges, as they were brought
against him ; but he was deposed by the third
general council at Ejjhesus, a. d. 431, and was
banished first to Arabia, and then to Lybia,
and finally died in Upper Egypt. His friends
denied the fairness of his trial, and the justice
of his condemnation, and his opinions were
warmly defended, especially among his coun-
trymen in the East. The flourishing school for
the education of divines at Edessa, in Mesopo-
tamia, to which many Persian youth resorted,
became eminently the seat from which the sect
extended into Persia. This school was broken
up on account of its Kcstorianism by the em-
peror Zeno, in 489, but the consequence was
only the transfer of the school to Nisibis, where
it could fully develop itself under the Persian
goverimient, and where for many years, Bar-
sumas, a zealous Kestorian, had been bishop.
Having now its principal seat in Persia, the
sect was fostered by the rivalry existing be-
tween the governments of Persia and Constan-
tinople, and on the death of the archbishop of
Seleucia, a. d. 496, Babsus (or Babacus) a
Kestorian, was chosen his successor. He de-
clared himself Patriarch of the East, and held
a synod, or council, a. d. 499, at which the
whole Persian church professed itself as belong-
ing to the Ncstoriau party.
From A. D. 485 to a. d. G40 the Nestorians
"were under I*ersian authority, generally favor-
ed, but sometimes persecuted. From C40 to
1257 they were subject to Arabian caliphs.
In 1258, on the taking of Bagdad by the
grandson of Gengis Khan, the jjower was trans-
ferred to the Tartars. 'J'he i>atriarciis resided
at Seleucia until a. d. 702, when Bagdad be-
coming the cai)ital of the Saracenic empire ; it
became ahso the scat of the patriarchs, who
now took the title of patriarch of Babylon and
Bagdad.
" The Nestorians," says Mosheim, (Ec. Hist.,
vol. I. p. 93,) "after they had obtained a fixed
residence in Persia, and had located the head
of their sect at Seleucia, were as successful as
they were industrious in disseminating their
doctrines in the countries lying without the
Koniiui empire. It appears from uiu|uestion-
ablc docunient.s, still existing, that there were
nunicroufi societies in all ])arts of Persia, in
Ii.tliii, in Armenia, in Arabia, in Syria, and in
i.iliti- coi iitries, under the jurisdiction of the
l.atriavch of Seleucia during this (the Gth) cen-
tury.'' Of the 7 til century lie says, (Ec. Hist.,
vol. I. p. 499,) " The Christian religion was, in
this century, diffused beyond its former bounds,
both in the eastern and western countries.
In the east, the Nestorians, with incredible
industiy and perseverance, labored to propar
gate it from Persia, Syria, and India, among
the barbarous and savage nations inhabiting
the deserts and the remotest shores of Asia. In
particular, the vast empire of China was en-
lightened, by their zeal and industry, witii the
light' of Christianity."
At this time, from the 5th to the 9th cen-
tury, the Nestorians had schools, some of which
were quite celebrated, designed especially,
though not exclusively, for the education of
ecclesiastics. " Previous to the overthrow of
the caliphs, the Nestorians had become widely
extended. They occupied, almost to the ex-
clusion of other Christian sects, the region
which forms the modern kingdom of Persia, in
all parts of which they had churches. They
were numerous in Armenia, Mesopotamia, and
Arabia. They had churches in Syria and in
the island of Cyprus. They had churches
among the mountains of Malabar in India.
They had numerous churches in the vast re-
gions of Tartary, from the Caspian sea to
Mount Imaus, and beyond, through the greater
part of what is now known as Chinese Tartary,
and even in China itself. The names of twen-
ty-five metropolitan sees are on record, which
of course embraced a far greater number of
bishoprics, and still more numerous societies or
churches."
But at this time Christianity, as exhibited
in the lives of its professors, had lost not a
little of its purity and its power ; and even if
we suppose the Nestorians to have been more
correct in doctrine and more Christian in life
than other sects, there can be no reason to be-
lieve that they published the pure Gospel, or
that they exhibited, generally, the light of a
holy life. Of the tenth century :Moshoim says,
"All are agreed that in this century the state
of Christianity was everywhere most wretched,
on account of the amazing ignorance, and the
consequent superstition and debased morals of
the age, and also from other causes." Early in
the eleventh century a Mogul prince, in Cathay,
(the northern part of China) was converted to
Christianity by the Nestorians, and perhaps,
taking the name of John upon his baptism, he
was called Presbyter John, or Prester John.
Under this name his successors became widely
known and celebrated. The last of this race
of Christian kings — Christian, with their sub-
jects, in name, doubtless much more than in
reality — was slain by (Jengis Khan, about the
year 1202. Gengis, who had a Christian wife,
the daughter of Prester John, and several of
his successors, appear in some measure to have
favored the Christians, of whom numerous
bodies were still scattered over all northern
Asia and China. In the mean time, however,
Mohanimedanism luul been gaining not only
in Persia, but upon all the countries west of
NESTORIANS.
655
Mount Imaus whore the Xestorians commenced
their missionary labors. After the descendants
of Gengis had extended their conquests and a
branch of the family had overthrown the Ara-
bian caliph and destroyed Bagdad, one of them
became a Mohammedan and engaged in a bit-
ter persecution of the Christians. About the
close of the fourteenth century the sword of
Tamerlain completed the overthrow of the
western Tartar churches, and Nestorian Chris-
tianity was fully crushed in the principal seat
of its life and power. A little earlier than
this, in 1369, the descendants of Gengis Khan
were expelled from China by a revolt of the
native Chinese ; about the same time Romish
missionaries were banished, and the Nestorians,
though permitted to remain, suffered under
inauspicious circumstances, and their numbers
gradually diminished. Still a metropolitan
was sent to China in 1490, and some bishops
in 1502. But when papal missions were resum-
ed in China, in the sixteenth century, the
missionaries stated that they could find no
distinct traces of Christianity in the empire.
Thus the Nestorian church, once so extended,
whose missions in Central Asia were continued
from an early period to the sixteenth century,
has been crushed at its centre, by Mohamme-
dan power, and has gradually died out in more
distant regions, in great measure, doubtless, be-
cause of its want of true Christian vitality. For
three centuries past it has been shut out mostly
from the Christian world, and degraded in its
political, social, intellectual, and moral condi-
tion. During this period defections have
taken place from time to time, growing out of
dissent ions among themselves and the efibrts
of the Jesuits, and a considerable part of the
Nestorians have submitted to the Pope of
Eome. These are governed by a patriarch
appointed by the Pope, and constitute what is
called the Chaldean church. The orthodox
Nestorians, if this title may be thus used, are
reduced to a moderate number, perhaps 80,000,
about 40,000 inhabiting the plain of Oroomiah,
in the western part of Persia, and about the
same number the Koordish mountains between
Persia and Turkey. Their patriarch, Mar
Shimon, resides in the mountains.
^The mountain districts inhabited by the
Nestorians of Koordistan are exceedingly wild
and rugged ; in some cases almost inaccessible.
Having but small patches of arable laud the
people subsist mostly from their flocks, and are
miserably poor. In the rudeness, wildness, and
boldness of their character they resemble their
Koordish neighbors.
The city of Oroomiah, the ancient Theharma,
the reputed birth-place of Zoroaster, is situated
on a beautiful, fertile plain, about 40 miles in
length, and in its broadest portion 20 miles
wide. The staple productions of this plain
are wheat, rice, cotton, tobacco, and the vine.
It abounds also in a great variety of fruits,
and has naturally one of the finest climates ;
yet artificial causes, particularly the means
used to irrigate the fields and gardens, pro-
ducing not only a great amount of evapora-
tion, but numerous pools of stagnant water,
make it unhealthy, particularly to foreigners.
The city contains a population of about
25,000, of whom less than 1000 are Nestorians,
but the Nestoriaus are numerous in the \i\-
lages of the plain, and most of them are em-
ployed in the cultivation of the soil. The
number of this people on the plain, Mr. Per-
kins gave in 1843 as between thirty and forty
thousand. These " partake much, in their
manners, of the suavity and urbanity of the
Persian character. By the side of their rude
countrymen from the mountains, though ori-
ginally from the same stock, they appear like
antipodes."
As Christians, up to the time when mission-
ary operations were commenced among them,
a few years since, the Nestorians, though they
might have a name to live, were dead. Their
religious belief and practices were more sim-
])le and scriptural than those of other Oriental
Christian sects. They abhorred all image
worship, auricular confession, the doctrine of
purgatory, and many other corrupt dogmas
and practices of the Papal and Greek churches.
Though not free from errors and superstitions,
their doctrinal tenets were generally correct,
and the Scrijitures were fully acknowledged as
of supreme authority. But " the life and power
of Christianity had departed. Scarcely a symp-
tom of spiritual vitality remained." They clung
with great tenacity to the forms of their reli-
gion. Many of them would rather die than
violate their periodical fasts, which are very
numerous, covering nearly half the whole year.
Yet, even their most intelligent ecclesiastics
seemed to have hardly any idea of the mean-
ing of regeneration. Lying and profaneness
seemed universal, and intemperance existed to
a fearful extent. " p]ducation Avas at an ebb
alniost as low as vital religion. None but
their ecclesiastics could read at all, and but
very few of them could do more than merely
repeat their devotions in an unknown tongue,
while neither they nor their hearers knew any
thing of the meaning." There was among
them little if any thing that could be called
preaching ; their public services consisting of
chanting the Scriptures and their prayers in
ancient Sp-iac, a language which but few of
the priests, and none of the people, under-
stand. Very little attempt had been made to
reduce the vernacular language of the Nesto-
rians to writing, and the printing-press was
unknown among them. What few books they
had, and they were very few, were manuscripts
in the ancient Syriac, a dead language.
The canons of the Nestorian church require
celibacy in all the episcopal orders of the clergy,
I. e. all from the bishop up ; lower orders may
marry. They reckon nine ecclesiastical orders,
viz., sub-deacon, reader, deacon, priest, arch-
556
NESTORIANS.
deacon, bisliop. metropolitan, catholokos, and
patriarch ; but two or three of these are now
little more than nominal. Monasteries and
convents do not exist among them. " They
have no I'clics such as are common in the
Church of Rome," says Mr. Badger {Nestoriuns
and their Ritual, Vol. II. p. 13G), yet " they
believe the remains of the martyrs and saints
to be endowed with supernatural virtues ;"' and
they invoke the virgin and the saints, asking
for their prayers to Christ. They have no
pictures or images in their churches, and are
much opposed to the use of them. The only
symbol among them is a plain Greek cross,
■which they venerate highly. I'he sign of the
cross is used in baptism and in prayer ; a cross
is engraved over the low entrances of their
churches, and kissed by those who enter, and
the priests carry with them a small silver
cross, which is often kissed by the people. —
Missionary Herald for August. 1838 ; Dr.
Grant's Nestcrians ; Moshcim and Neandefs
Church Historij ; Badger's Nestorians and their
Ritual, Vol. li. pp. 132-6.
MISSION.
Americax Board. — In the spring of 1830,
Ecv. Messrs. Smith and Dwight, while on an ex-
ploring missionary tour, in accordance with in-
structions which had been given them by the
Prudential Conmiittee of the A. B. C. F. M.,
visited the Nestorians. They found it not safe to
attempt to penetrate the Koordish mountains,
but spent a few days at Orooniiah, and became
much interested in the condition of the Nesto-
rian church, and satisfied that a favorable open-
ing for missionary ell'ort was there presented.
Their report led to the formation of the mission.
In Jaiuiary, 1833, soon after the report was pre-
sented to the I'rudential Committee. Mr. Justin
Perkins, then a tutor in Amherst College, was
appointed to commence the mission. In the
instructions given to him the main ol)jcct of
the mission was defined to l)e to bring about
a change which would " enable the Nestorian
church, thriiugh the grace of (jod, to exert a
commanding influence in the spiritual regener-
ation of Asia." Considering the past history
of that church, its present state, and the char-
acter of the people eml)raced in it, it was
hoped that, brought again to a fuller knowl-
edge of the truth, and to feel the regenerating
and sanctifying power of truth attended by the
influences of tlie Spirit, the members uf'that
church would again become, not only them-
sehcs true disci])les of Christ and heirs of life,
but efficient laborers in the great work ol'
building up the Bedeemer's kingdom through-
out the world.
Mr. and Mrs. Perkins sailed from Boston,
Sept. 21, 1833. 'J"1k: Committee had not been
able as yet to find a physician for the mission,
and it was not th(jught"best to delay their de-
parture on that account, as Mr. Perkins could,
. while waiting for a colleague at Constantino-
ple, avail himself of facilities which he might
there find for acquiring the language of the
Xestorians. They reached Constantinople on
the 21st of December, and on the ITth of ^Slay
following, feeling constrained, without waiting
longer ibr associates, to proceed on their way,
they sailed for Trebizond, the port on the
Black Sea from which their land journey
must commence. They left this place on the
IGth of June ; but, owing to tlie incursions
of Koordish robbers upon the Turkish iron-
tiers, they were much detained and annoyed on
their journey, were obliged to take a circuit-
ous route through Russian provinces, and did
not reach Tabrcez until the 28th of August.
Sir John Campbell, Bi'itish ambassador at
Tabreez, to whom ^Mr. Perkins had written,
stating their detentions and perplexities, sent
a courier to meet them, and also a kind of lit-
ter borne by mules, for the accommodation of
Mrs. Perkins (who had been brought by hard-
ships into a critical state of health,) with a
supply of i^rovisions. The next day, August
21st, they were also met by Dr. Reach, the
physician of the British embassy, whose kind
regard for their welfare had brought him about
sixty miles, that he might render them assist-
ance. .
As no European resided at Oroomiah it was
not thought prudent for Mr. Perkins to \)vo-
ceed there until he should be joined by an asso-
ciate, and he resolved to remain at Tabreez.
Anxious, however, to be making all j-.ossible
progress in acquiring the modern Syriae lan-
guage, he went to Oroomiah in October, ac-
companied by Rev. Mr. Haas of the Basle ]\lis-
sionary Society, who was residing at 'J'abreez,
to procure a teacher. He obtained ISIar (bish-
op) Yohannan to return with him to Tabreez
as his teacher, and the bishop took, as his
"servant" and companion, jjriest Abraham, an
intelligent young man, who became from the
first one of the most valuable native heljiers iu
the mission.
On the nth of May, 1835. Dr. Grant, leaving
a large and lucrative practice, and a circle ot
warm friends at Utica, N. Y., sailed from Bos-
ton with his wife to join this mission. They
reached 'i'abreez Oct. 1.0. After lesting a lew
days Dr. CJrant proceeded to Oroomiah to make
arrangements. Comforta1)le houses were soon
jirovided, and on the 20th of November, Mr.
Perkins arrived with his wife and Mrs. Grant.
The first missionaries to the Nestorians had
now reached their destination, and their com-
ing was greeted by the peo])le with gi'cat cor-
diality. Dr. Grant's jtrofessional character
served to secure the favor of the I'ersian gov-
ernor, and the Nestorian bishops and priests
at once gave them their cordial co-o])eration
in the prosecution of their mis.^ionary labors,
regarding them not as rivals, but as coadjutors
with them in a necessary work of instruction
and improvement among the ])eople. A school
was soon projected for educating teachers and
NESTORIANS.
557
other native helpers, to be taught by priest
Abraham under the supervision of Mr. Perkins.
It was commenced on the 18th of Jan., 1836,
with seven pupils from the city, and the next
day 17 boarding scholars were received from
abroad. Among the pupils were three deacons
and one priest. It is a singular fact that these
new favors conferred upon their' Christian sub-
jects excited the jealousy of the Mohammedans,
who resentfully asked, "Arc we to be passed
by ?" and to quiet their minds Dr. Grant was
obliged to devote a few hours each day to
teaching a school of Mussulman boys.
In presenting some view of the subsequent
history and the success of the mission thus
commenced, a topical and not a chronological
arrangement ^vill be followed. The subjoined
table will show what laborers have been sent
from the United States to the mission, who of
these laborers have deceased, and who have
returned to their native land. Mr. Merrick
accompanied Dr. Grant to Tabreez in 1835, to
commence an experimental mission among the
Mohammedans of Persia. He resided some
years at Tabreez, but no such promise of use-
fulness was found as to warrant the continu-
ance of a distinct mission, and in 1841 he re-
moved to Oroomiah. In 1845 he returned to
the United States.
MISSIONARY LABORERS FROM THE UNITED STATES
WHO HAVE BEEN CONNECTED WITH THE NES-
TORIAN MISSION.
t3 aj
Rev. Justin Perkins, D.D
Mrs. Cluu-lotte B. Perkins
Asahel Grant, M.D
Mrs. Grant
Rev. James L. Merrick
Rev. Albert L. Hallaclay
Mrs. Hallaclay
Rev. William R. Stocking
Mrs. Jerusba E. Stocking
Rev. Willard Jones
Mrs. Jones
Austin H. WriRht, M.D
Edward Breath (Printer)
Rev . Abel K. Hinsdale
Mrs. Hinsdale
Rev. Colby C. MitclieU
Mrs. Mitchell
Rev. Thomas Laurie
Mrs. Laurie
Rev. David T. Stoddard
Mrs. Stoddard
Miss Fidelia Fisk
Miss Cath'ne E. Myers (Mrs. Wright)
Kev. Joseph G. Cochran
Mrs. Cochran
Miss Mary Su^au Rice
Rev. George W. Coan
Mrs. Coan
Mrs. Sarah A. Breath
Mrs. Sopliia D. Stoddard
Rev. S.Tmuel A. Rhea
Miss JIartba A. Harris
Rev. Edward H. Crane
Mrs. Crane
1833
18.33
1835
1835
1335
1837
1837
1837
1837
1839
1839
1840
1840
1841
1841
1841
1841
1842
1842
1843
1843
1843
1843
1847
1847
1847
1849
1849
1849
1851
1851
1851
1852
1852
1842
1842
1840
1843
1843
1841
1845
1846
1846
1853
1853
1845
1845
184';
1849
1844
1839
1842
1841
1841
1843
1854
Object aimed at. — Cooperation of Ecclesiastics.
— From the commencement of the mission
there has been reason to hope that pure reli-
gion might be revived in the small Nestor ian
community without seriously disturbing the
existing ecclesiastical constitution. The mis-
sionaries have not sought to form a new Chris-
tian community, but to bring individuals, both
among the ecclesiastics and the common people,
to a full and saving knowledoe of the truth,
hoping that such a change might be brought
about by the grace of God as should cause the
forsaking of false doctrines, so far as such were
held, the laying aside of whatever was super-
stitious or unscriptural, and the establishing of
a pure church upon existing foundations. It
seemed at least best to make the experiment,
and to leave the question as to the necessity or
propriety of forming new churches to be de-
cided by time and providential circumstances.
There has been the more reason, and the
more encouragement, for pursuing such a
course, from the fact that many of the leading
ecclesiastics, so far from setting themselves in
opposition to the missionaries and to their in-
structions, as has been done so generally among
the Armenians and the Greeks, have been de-
cidedly friendly, and in not a few instances
have earnestly cooperated in every e&brt to
elevate and evangelise the people. The four
bishops on the plain. Mar Yohannan, Mar Elias,
Mar Joseph, and Mar Gabriel, exhibited friend-
liness, and a disposition to favor the objects of
the mission from the first, and the missionaries
early made it an object of special attention to
instruct and benefit these and other ecclesias-
tics. The four bishops named were placed in
the relation of boarding pupils to the mission,
and for several years the three first received
daily instruction in a theological or Bible class,
forming, with some priests and other promising
young men, the first class in the seminary.
They" were also soon employed as native help-
ers to the mission, and as early as 1841 Mr.
Perkins speaks of some of the ecclesiastics as
" enlightened, and we trust really pious."
" They not only allow us to preach in their
churches, but urge us to do so ; and are for-
ward themselves in every good word and
work." It is an important fact that through
the schools which have been established, almost
the entire education of ecclesiastics is now in
the hands of the missionaries.
British and Russian protection — Kindness of
British officials.— ThG kindness of Sir John
Campbell to Mr. Perkins has been already
mentioned. In 1835, at the suggestion of the
Rt. Hon. Henry Ellis, British Ambassador tc
Persia, the missionaries asked and obtained
from him English protection, and the ambas-
sador and his suite ever extended to them all
possible kindness. When the English embassy
was withdrawn from Persia, with a prospect
of war in 1839, the missionaries applied for
protection to the Eussiaa consul-general at
o5S
NESTORIANS.
Tabreez, who cheerfully gave them passports,
aud took other measures to insure their safety,
auil for many years Russian protection was
extended to them. In 1851, at the suggestion
of Mr. Stevens, British Consul at Tabreez, Bri-
tish protection was again solicited, and at once
granted. The many instances in which Mr.
Stevens has manifested the kindest interest in
the welfare of the missionaries, and has ren-
dered them assistance, can here only be alluded
to, but arc worthy of most grateful notice, as
nre also the self-sacrificing and earnest efibrts
made in behalf of suffering native helpers of
the mission during recent difficulties in the
mountains, by Col. Williams, British Commis-
sioner for settling the boundary between Tur-
key and Persia. Persian officers, also, have
often uianifested much readiness to afford pro-
jection and prevent violence and wrong from
opposing ecclesiastics, Jesuit or Ncstorian, as
also at times from rude and abusive Moham-
medans.
The Press — Tra7islatrng. — "When the mis-
sionaries commenced their labors at Oroomiah
they at once felt the want of a press and a
printer. Very few books were to be found
among the people, and these were in a lan-
guage not understood. Excepting the Psalms,
the mission had discovered in 1838 but one
copy of the Old Testament Scriptures, and
that was in three or four separate volumes,
the properly of different individuals. The
British and Foreign Bible Society had printed
the Gospels in tiie Xestorian character, but
scarcely more than one copy of the Acts and
of the Epistles could be found, and none of the
Book of Revelations in that character. Much
delay, however, wa.s experienced in finding a
printer. At last, on the 21st of July, 1840,
Mr. Breath sailed from Boston, taking with
him an iron press, constructed of so many
pieces that it could be transported on horse-
back from Trebizond to Oroomiah. lie reached
Oroomiah, Nov. 17th, and the press was im-
mediately put in operation, exciting great in-
terest among both Nestorians and Mohamme-
dans. 1,000 volumes, and 3,000 tracts, amount-
ing in all to 510,400 pages, were reported as
having been printed in 1841. In 1843 a new
font of type, cut and cast expressly for the
mission, modeled after the best Syriac manu-
scripts, was forwarded from the United States.
The printing, up to the close of the year 1850,
had amounted to 0,228,200 pages. 'Probably
more than 2,000,000 of pages have been print-
ed since that time.
_ On the ]5th of February, 183G, the mis-
sionaries cnnmienced the great work of trans-
lating the Bilde into tiie modern Syriac, the
spoki'u language of the Nestorians. ]n 1840
an edition of the New Testament, with the an-
cient and the modern Syriac in parallel co-
lumns, wius carried through the press. Near
the close of 1h52, the whole Bible was printed
in a language which the people could under.
stand. The Old Testament has been printed
like the New, with the ancient and modern
languages in parallel columns, and thus the
living and life-giving Word of God is going
abroad among the people in an attractive Ibrm,
and " in their own tongue wherein they were
born," though a few years since, that was not
a written language. Banyan's Pilgrim's Pro-
gress also, Baxter's Saint's Rest, and other
valuable religious books are given to the peo-
ple. For the last three or four years a month-
ly paper, " The Rays of Light," has been pub-
lished, containing a great amount and variety
of valuable reading matter. Thus a literature
has been already created for the Nestorians.
Small, indeed, as yet, if we except the Bible,
which alone is not small ; but of immense va-
lue, and steadily increasing.
Schools. — In the mean time the schools estab-
lished have been raising up a community of
readers. Mention has already been made of
the opening of a seminary for the education
of native teachers and preachers, on the 18th
of January, 1830. The next Sabbath the pu-
pils requested permission to attend the English
worship of the mission, and this they continued
to do with much interest. For some years
this seminary was, of course, in an incipient
state, giving instruction only in the elements
of knowledge ; but it had from the first, dea-
cons, and priests, and bishops among the pu-
pils, and was gradually rising i\a its character
as a literary institution. There were 50 pupils
in 1838. Early in 1841 the school was re-
organized and improved ; the fjualifications for
admission were raised ; the primary depart-
ment was excluded, and a better system of
instruction was introduced. The two teachers
were " deacons from the mountains," and were
" among the best scholars of the nation." The
inimber of pupils was thus for a time dimin-
ished, but soon increased to more than the for-
mer number. In 1845 it was again entirely
re-orfi-anized, with the design to " reduce its
numl)ers, make the instruction more systematic
and thorough, and exert a stronger religious
influence over the pupils ;" and in 1840 it was
removed from Oroomiah to Seir, the health
retreat of the mission. It has exerted a great
influence for good, and has been highly esteem-
ed by the people — the desire to obtain admis-
sion having been often very great. In 1852,
the report gives 40 as the innnber of students
" of whom 30 are hopefully pious." Regular
instruction in theology is now given to the
most advanced class. One of the pupils " is
designed to succeed the present bishop of the
largest diocese in Oroomiah ; several are from
mountain districts, and one from Bootan, in
the extreme western part of the field."
In March, 1838, a female boarding-school
was commenced in the mission premises. A
few girls had previously been in the seminary,
and in some village schools, already commenc-
ed, but the idea of female education was
NESTORIANS.
559
strange to the Nestorians, and until about
this time the missiouaries had not ventured to
commence a school exclusively for girls, fear-
ing it might excite prejudice. Now the Nes-
torians had become acciuainted with them, had
learned to confide in them, and seemed fully
prepared to sustaiii such a measure. The ec-
clesiastics connected with their families, were
active in recoraracnding it, and the mission-
aries at once looked upon this female school,
in which there were some 16 girls, as one of
the most hopeful departments of their work.
Since 1843, this school has been under the
care of Miss Fidelia Fisk, from Shelburn,
Mass., who has shown herself eminently fitted
for the place, and has been eminently useful in
it. Miss Rice, from Lincoln, Mass., has been
for several years associated with Miss Fisk.
Though a few years since, it was a novelty,
and considered as disgraceful to teach Nesto-
rian females ; now, " an examination of this
female seminary draws together all the princi-
pal men and women of the Nestorian commu-
nity, who sit and listen with unwearied interest
for two days together." There were 42 pupils
in 1852, and Mr. Stoddard " doubts whether
he ever attended an examination of greater
excellence " than that of this institution.
Both this and the male seminary have been
repeatedly favored with large measures of the
special influences of the Holy Spirit.
The first village free school of which notice
is found in connection with the mission, was
commenced about August, 1836, at Ada, the
residence of Mar Yoosuph (Joseph) about 15
miles from the city. Three months after it
was commenced, Mr. Perkins visited it, and
says : " It now numbers about 40 children,
and is as well regulated as any school I ever
visited." It was attended by girls as well as
boys — " a great novelty among the Nesto-
riaus." This school, and others which began
now to be formed, were collected, and taught
by those who had been under the instruction
of the missionaries in the seminary. In 1837
there were three free schools. In 1841 there
were 17, in 16 different villages. The number
rapidly increased, and in 1843 there were 40
schools in 36 villages, with 635 male and 128
female pupils, and 56 teachers, of whom 22
were priests and 26 deacons. In June, 1844,
it was judged best, from circumstances grow-
ing out of the opposition of the patriarch to
the mission, and other difiSculties, to dismiss
all the schools, but they were again commenc-
ed in October, 1845, in compliance with the
earnest wishes of both ecclesiastics and peo-
ple. The character of these village free
schools has been improving ; the Bible is the
prominent text book, and their influence is
great and most happy. In April, 1851, Mr.
Stocking, who had then the superintendence of
the schools, reported 45 schools, with 871 pu-
pils, of whom 203 were females. The teach-
ers, with but few exceptions, had been mem-
bers of the seminary ; many of them were
hopefully pious, and all were regarded a,s
evangelical in sentiment. In June, 1853, the
number of schools had increased to 78.
About the first of Januai-y, 1840, a regular
school was commenced for Mussulman boys,
aad soon numbered 10 promising boys and
young men as pupils, but it does not seem to
have been long sustained.
Preaching — Native Helpers. — The preach-
ing service on the mission premises at Oroomi-
ah, on the Sabbath, was attended by the pu-
pils of the two seminaries, from the commence-
ment of these institutions. The missionaries
had preached also extensively in their village
schools, during the week, but they were taken
quite by surprise, when in February, 1838,
Mar Yohannan, requested Mr. Perkins to go
into their church every Sabbath and feast
days, and preach the Gospel to the people,
stating, that he and other priests had often
spoken on the suljject, and unanimously desir-
ed that he would do so. The invitation was
complied with, at first with some reluctance,
as they had not supposed that ecclesiastics and
people were yet ready for such a measure. —
[Perkins' " Residence in Persia," p. 333.)
A regular Sabbath service by the mission-
aries, in a Nestorian church, in Oroomiah,
does not appear, however, to have been com-
menced until March, 1840. {Missionary He-
rald, 1840, p. 493.) At this time, to meet the
wishes of such as could not find seats at the
mission house, inquiry was made for a private
house, in which they might hold a service.
But deacons, and priests, and three bishops,
who were consulted, all insisted that the ser-
vice should be in the church. There would be
no jealousy, they said. " Do you think," ask-
ed Mar Yohannan, " that we do not know
lambs from wolves ?" The missionaries had
before preached at times in different churches
in the city and villages, at the request of the
officiating bishop or priest ; but now this work
seemed fairly commenced, and calls for preach-
ing multipled. Within a short time those
who were able to use the language, preached
usually three times each on the Sabbath, to as
many diffei'ent congregations, in villages, some
miles apart. There were 7 regular preaching
stations before the close of the year. A great
door for usefulness was thus o^iened, and it has
not been closed. The missionaries have entire
access to the people on the plain, preaching in
their churches, wherever they can go.
But the Gospel is now preached among the
people not by the missionaries only. When
the mission was commenced, the ecclesiastics
were not preachers, and their public religious
services were not preaching services. But
bishops and priests have been pupils in the
schools, and bishops and priests have felt the
force of truth, — have become new creatures in
Christ Jesus, and are now, in some cases, zeal-
ous and impressive preachers. And some
660
NESTORIANS.
young men who have been educated at the
seminary, and have become apparently devoted
Christians, have been ordained by the bishops
of their church, and arc thus fully introduced
into the work of the ministry. In 1844, five
intelligent native preachers aided the mission-
aries in maintaining- " preaching, more or less,
lit a score of places." The patriarch has at
times opposed, and some of the bishops, in
1S37, prohibited the pious helpers of the mis-
sion from preaching in their dioceses ; but, to
a great extent, the whole field is, and has been,
open to them, and among them are some who
make extensive tours, not only on the plain,
but in the mountain districts, as zealous and
able evangelists. At a meeting of the mis-
sion, in September, 1851, a plan was devised,
by which it was hoped the Gospel would soon
be carried to all the Nestorians of Persia.
For the mouth ending January 16, 1852, there
were reported 29 places where there had been
at least one preaching service each Sabbath,
and iu several of these places two or three ser-
vices. In 13 other villages there had been
preaching once or oftener within the month.
Seven of the native helpers of the mission are
now regularly employed as preachers, and
others, though tliey have other employment,
preach every Sabbath, and at other times.
" The line of demarcation between an evange-
lically reformed church and a mere dead Chris-
tianity, is becoming more and more distinct."
Mar Yohannan boldly discards many customs
of the church, and seems disposed, as do the
native helpers of the mission and those who
have been educated in the schools, to go on
with the work of reformat ion.
Opposition from Papists and the Patriarch. —
The missionaries have not prosecuted their
work without meeting with obstacles and
trials, as well as with encouragements. Jesu-
its and others of the Romish church, whose
missionaries have so often, for many centuries,
tried to induce the Nestorians to come under
allegiance to the pope, were not idle after the
American missionaries commenced their labors.
In 1837, a Roman Catholic bishop, from Sal-
mas, came to Oroomiali, professing to have a
large sum of mimey to aid Nestorians who
would join his church. Other emissaries of
Rome followed, and earnest elibrts were made
to undermine the influence of the mission, and
secure among the people the ascendancy of
popery. Sucli, however, were the folly and
raslmess of the proceedings of French Jesuits
among the Armenians of isl'ahan and Taljreez,
that, in IS 12, they were expelled from Persia,
and an order was passed by the government,
proliibitii.g all proselyting from one Christian
sect to another. Remaining quiet for a while,
some of tlie Jesuits soon made their way to
the jirovince of Oroomiali, and recommenced
their pruselyting career among the Nestorians,
with even greater zeal and assurance than they
bad before used, resorting to the most unprin-
cipled and hazardous expedients, which led to
their second expulsion. The French govern-
ment sent an envoy to Persia to obtain per-
mission for them to return. Failing in this,
every eifort was made to procure the banish-
ment of the American missionaries, on the
ground that they, too, were violating the law,
in making proselytes. It seemed necessary
that Messrs. Perkins and Stocking should go
to Teheran, in November, 1844, to counteract
the influence which was exerted ; and, for a
considerable time, much solicitude was felt ;
but, aided by the kind offices of the Russian
ambassador, the missionaries and their friends
satisfied the government that the charges
against them were not true, and they were
permitted to remain. In 1851, an edict of
toleration was promulgated by the Persian
government, granting equal protection to all
Christian subjects, and permitting them to
change their religion or denomination at their
2)leasure. Of course, the Papists are again
active, and will do what they can. It is as-
cribed by the people to the influence of the
mission, that their efforts have been, as yet, so
unsuccessful, and, as they have now truth, and
light, and piety, to meet, it is not to be sup-
posed that they can now do what they might
once have done.
The Nestorian patriarch, Mar Shimon, re-
siding in a region almost wholly inaccessible,
had never been visited by any of the mission-
aries until Dr. Grant penetrated the mountain
districts in 1839. lie was cordially received,
and was, for more than a month, the guest of
the patriarch, who then urged that schools
and missionary labor should be commenced in
the mountains. Up to this time, the Nestori-
ans of Koordistan had been, iu their mountain
fastnesses, as they were called, independent ;
but in 1843, determined hostilities were com-
menced against them by Koordish chiefs, en-
couraged by the Turks, which resulted, after
some months of terrible warfare, in their en-
tire subjugation. The patriarch fled to Mosul,
and some of his brothers escaped to Oroomiah.
Here, in necessitous circumstances, they threw
themselves upon the hospitality of the mission-
aries, and when the hospitality afforded was
more limited than were their desires, and they
were infurmed that no more could be done for
them, they attemj)ted to coerce by o])position.
In the mean time, an influence hostile to the
mission had been successfully exerted on the
patriarcii himself at Mosul, and he sustained
his brothers in their course. By such influ-
ences, some of the higher ecclesiastics at Oroo-
miah were led also into more or less decided
opposition, for a time. In June, 1844, it was
thought best, in view of the diiriculties thus
brought about, to dismiss all the village
schools. As the male semiiuiry needed re-or-
ganization, the necessity for dismissing this
also was not so much regretted ; but when, in
the course of the summer, it became necessary,
NESTORIANS.
561
as was then supposed, to disband the female
seminary, " the tears and sobs of the pupils
told, more expressively than language could
have done, the bitterness of their hearts."
The missionaries could not restrain their tears,
and the stoutest Nestorians who were standing
by were melted. Both seminaries were, how-
ever, soon reopened. Ecclesiastics and others,
who were for a time led to oppose by the pa-
triarch and his family, were again cooperating
with the mission with apparent cordiality in
October of this year, (1844,) and not long
after, the brothers of the patriarch were them-
selves apparently wishing to regain their
standing with the missionaries.
In June, 1847, the patriarch, distrusting the
motives of the Turkish government, by which
he had been invited to visit Constantinople,
fled from Mosul to Oroomiah. Two of his
brothers then there. Deacon Isaac and Deacon
Duuka, had now been, Deacon Isaac especially,
for two years, apparently decided friends of
the mission, and for some months the patriarch
himself put on the appearance of friendliness ;
but in April, 1848, he took the stand of open
and decided opposition. Not satisfied to use
persuasion only, and not content with ecclesi-
astical interdicts, he employed the most abusive
language towards the pious Nestorians, threat-
ening imprisonment and the bastinado. His
servants and Koords, instigated by him, re-
sorted to violence ; and some of the pious
native helpers of the mission were cruelly
abused. During these troubles, Mr. Stevens,
the British consul at Tabrecz, exerted himself
in the most efficient manner for the protection
of the mission. Through his influence mainly,
the Persian government interfered decidedly,
in September, to put a stop to the violence of
the patriarch and his most active instruments.
In these difficulties, the prominent Nestorian
ecclesiastics did not hesitate to oppose the
course of their own patriarch, the head of
their church, giving their sympathy and co-
operation to the mission. In 1849 the patri-
arch returned to the mountains. There he has
remained, sometimes making professions of
friendship ; but instigating, probably, to the
opposition which has been made to recent
efforts to plant a permanent missionary station
in the mountain district of Gawar. His influ-
ence, especially with the Nestorians of the
plain, has been greatly diminished, as the influ-
ence of the truth has increased among the
people.
Revivals. — In January, 1844, this mission
was favored with some tokens of the special
presence of the Holy Spirit. A few, mostly
young men of promise, who had long been
members of the seminary, or in some way con-
nected with the mission, gave cheering evi-
dence that they had passed from death to life.
In the summer of 1845 there was an interest-
ing state of religious feeling at Geog Tapa, the
largest Nestorian village on the plain, which
36
has since been greatly favored. The first
great revival, however, commenced in Jan-
uary, 1846. The first instances of hopeful
conversion were in the female seminary, but
in a short time, many in both seminaries were
inquiring what they should do to be saved.
The feeling became general and very deep,
continuing for many months in the seminaries,
and extending to many not connected with
these institutions. John and Moses, two
young men, native helpers of the mission,
labored with deep interest and much solicitude
among the people of Geog Tapa, of which
place it was said in March, by Dr. Perkins, " a
great work in the conversion of souls is in
progress." Not far from 50 persons in this
village, besides pupils in the two seminaries
from the village, were hopeful subjects of
renewing grace during the progress of this
work. In the two seminaries there were
believed to be also now about 50 truly pious
youth, many of whom manifested great interest
in efibrts for the conversion of others. In the
village of Seir, where the male seminary was
located, there was much interest, and within a
few months it was stated that hopefully pious
persons were to be found in not less than
eleven villages on the plain. The work ex-
tended also, in some measure, to the mountain
districts. Deacon Guergis, " an untamed
mountaineer," came to visit his daughter, who
had become hopefully a Christian in the female
seminary, and was soon himself bowing with
penitence and faith, before the cross of Christ.
Eeturning to his mountain home, he exerted
at once a most hajipy influence. Others from
the mountains were hopefully converted at
Oroomiah, and during the year several excur-
sions were made in mountain districts, by
members of the mission and native helpers ;
especially '• the young evangelist, John," who
made extensive missionary tours, with happy
results. Thus did light break in soon after the
difficulties with the papists and with the brothers
of the patriarch ; " whose powerful influences
from without and from within had combined
to embarrass, and, if possible, to destroy the
mission." Eight months after the commence-
ment of this work, not less than 150 hopeful
converts in all were reckoned, including seve-
ral ecclesiastics. Early in 1847, the female
seminary again experienced a work of grace,
when it was hoped that 9 others of the pupils
were " born again." Again, in 1849, follow-
ing the night of darkness occasioned by the
bitter opposition of the patriarch in 1848, a
precious revival was exj^erienced, commencing,
as in 1846, in the two seminaries in January,
and extending, as then, to Geog Tapa and
many other Nestorian villages. During this
M'ork, Mar Yohannan and Deacon Isaac, the
friendly brother of the patriarch before men-
tioned, were both, it was hoped, truly born of
God. Another work of grace was enjoyed in
1850, commencing, tis before, in the seminaries
562
NESTORIANS.
and extending itself abroad. Though not as
powerful as the revival of the previous year, it
had all the marks of a true work of the Spirit,
and quite a number, before impenitent, were
hopefully renewed, while . Christians were
greatly quickened. In 1851, also, there were
indications of the special presence of the
Spirit at about the same period ; and in
March, 1853, Dr. Perkins speaks of .a "pre-
cious refreshing from the presence of the Lord,
which has been in delightful progress in our
male seminary, and in the village of Scir, dur-
ing most of the past month." Few modern
missions have been more favored with such
tokens of God's presence, than this mission to
the Nestorians. A few years since, none
could be found among the people who gave
evidence of piety ; now, hundreds are heirs of
the grace of life.
Efforts for the Mountain Nestorians. — In
1837 the Prudential Committee of the Ameri-
can Board said, in their annual report, " The
Committee look with great interest to the day
when a branch of this mission shall exist
among the independent Nestorians. Among
these fierce mountaineers the life of the mis-
sionary might be in some peril, but sanctified
by grace they would make excellent soldiers of
the cross." It having become obvious that
Dr. Grant could not endure the climate of
Oroomiah, instructions were sent to him to
commence, if possible, a station on the western
side of the Koordish mountains, in tlie hope
that from there access might be gained to the
mountains themselves. These instructions he
received in Feb. 1839, about one month after
he had been called to bury his wife. His own
wish was to attempt to enter the mountains
from Persia ; but overruled in this he started
on the first of April for Erzriim, where he ex-
pected to meet Mr. Homes, of the Armenian
mission, who was to be his temporary associ-
ate. Learning that Mr. Homes would nut
meet him at Erzrfnn, he went to Constantino-
ple, and there finding that Mr. H. could not
at once be spared from that station, with cha-
racteristic energy he proceeded alone to Meso-
potamia, it being understood that he should
remain at or near Diarbekir until his associate
should join him. He reached Diarbekir May
30, and " found the public mind in a state of
suspense and expectation, like the calm which
precedes an overwhelming storm." The Turk-
ish army had been defeated by the Koords,
who were now in a state of commotion, and a
reign of violence and anarchy at once com-
menced. He was joined by Mr. Homes on the
3d of July, and they proceeded together to
Mardin. Here they were in great danger, and
once very narrowly escaped with their lives,
during a popular tumult. Finding themselves
beset with dangers, and learning also that there
■were no Nestorians on the west side of the
mountains, as there seemed hardly any hope of
.doing good in that vicinity, after remaining
two months, Mr. Homes escaped in disguise to
Diarbekir, and returned to Constantinople.
Dr. Grant resolved to spare no effort to obtain
access to the mountain tribes, and proceeded
to Mosul, 200 miles distant on the Tigris, where
he arrived Sept. 20. Here he found the coun-
try more cpiiet. On the 7th of October he left
the city, and in a few days was in the heart of
the mountain region of Central Koordistau.
Riding a hardy mule, and when even a mule
could not traverse the steep and broken moun-
tains, going on foot, he visited the Nestorians,
by whom he was cordially received ; spent a
month with the patriarch, and proceeded
through the country of the Hakary Koords, by
way of Salmas, to Oroomiah, where he arrived
on the 7th of December. He was now pre-
pared to urge the immediate commencement
of missionary cQbrt in the mountains, and re-
gretted exceedingly that he could not at once
enter upon labors there. In May, 1840, he
again crossed the mountains with his little son,
four years of age, accompanied by Mar Yohan-
nan and Mar Yoosuph, on his way to the
United States. He reached Boston Oct. 3.
January 18, 1841, Rev. Messrs. Hinsdale
and Mitchell, with their wives, sailed from
Boston for the field among the then indepen-
dent Nestorians. Dr. Grant followed on the
1st of April, hoping to overtake them. Learn-
ing at Constantinople that they would proba-
bly be detained at Aleppo by the disturbed
state of the country on the route which they
had designed to take, he determined to go by
way of Trebizond and Erzriim. From Erz-
riim he went to Van, and from there took the
shortest route to the country of the Nestori-
ans, and on the 8th of July he was at Jula-
merk, the residence of the patriarch, by whom
he was. again cordially received. Messrs.
Hinsdale and Mitchell left Aleppo on the 28th
of May, to go by way of Diarbekir and Mar-
din to Mosul. On the journey, which M-as too
late in the season for traversing the hot plains
of Mesopotamia, ^Mr. Mitchell was attacked
with a fever and died on the 27th of June.
]Mrs. Mitchell, overcome by fatigue and grief,
also died on the 12th of July, a few days after
reaching Mosul. Mr. and Mrs. Hinsdale both
sudered nnich from fatigue, watching, and ex-
posure, and greatly needed assistance. Dr.
G'ranl, hearing of these trying circumstances,
hastened to Mosul, where his arrival, on the
25th of August, was most seasonable, as Mr.
Hinsdale Avas then suffering from a dangerous
relapse of fever.
}n the spring of 1842, hostilities having
arisen between the Turks and the Koords of
Amadich, it was not safe to attempt going
into the mountains. Dr. G rant however passed
to Oroomiah by way of Ravendoose. Mr.
Stocking started to go with him from Oroo-
miah to the mountains, but was taken sick at
Salmas, on the way, and obliged to return.
Dr. Grant, however, having obtained assurance
NESTORIANS.
563
of protection from the Hakary chiefs, the con-
fidence of one of whom, Nooroolah Bey, he had
gained three years before, for the fourth time
determined to traverse the wild fastnesses of
Koordistan, without a missionary associate,
but accompanied by Mar Yoosuph. Finding
tlie patriarch at an encampment of one of the
raaleks of Tyary, where he had taken refuge, on
a mountain summit overlooking the Zab, they
descended together to Ashita, where arrange-
ments were made for a missionary station.
The war on the west side of the mountains
being ended, Mr. Hinsdale left Mosul the last
of September, and arrived at Ashita in ten
days, where he was welcomed by the people
with all cordiality. In November he returned
to Mosul, and was soon taken sick of typhus
fever. Dr. Grant came to his relief, but on
the 2Gth of December he rested from his labors.
Mr. and Mrs. Laurie left the United States
for this mission July 29th, 1842, and reached
Mosul November 11th. Eemainiug at Mosul
for the winter, in April, 1843, Messrs. Laurie
and Grant went to the new station at Ashita,
where it was hoped a mission-house would be
in readiness for the removal of the females in
June. A school was opened, with 20 pupils,
and the patriarch seemed as cordial as ever.
Mr. Laurie's impressions in regard to the field
as one for present cultivation, were not, how-
ever, altogether favorable.
About this time it became obvious that the
Turkish government was not willing that mea-
sures should just then be taken to elevate the
mountain Nestoriaus, as they wished to bring
them under subjection to the Sultan. At least
they were not willing to grant firmans, en-
gaging the protection of the government, to
other laborers who were on their way to the
field, if they were going as missionaries to this
people. A storm was gathering which soon
burst upon the poor Nestorians with terrible
effect. The Koords commenced hostilities in
June. Dr. Grant fearlessly visited the hostile
chiefs, Bader Khan Bey of the Buhtan Koords,
and Nooroolah Bey, or Noor Ali Bey, of the
Hakary Koords, who made no secret of their
designs, but promised protection to the mission
property at Ashita. The scenes which now
commenced, and continued with intervals of
comparative quiet for several months, were
fearful in the extreme. Thousands of the Nes-
torians, men, women and children, were mas-
sacred, often with horrible tortures ; others
were taken to a terrible captivity, and others
fled. Their villages were utterly destroyed,
and what remained of the people in central
Koordistan were entirely subdued, and reduced
to a state of yet deeper poverty and wretched-
ness than they had known before.
The devoted Dr. Grant, who had so often
gone, as few men could have done with impu-
nity, and gaining favor, among wild mountain-
eers and savage Koords, was now about to rest
from his labors. He died at Mosul, on the
24th of April, 1844. Mrs. Lattrie had pre-
ceded him to the grave, in Dec. 1843. Doctor
Azariah Smith joined the company at Mosul,
in March, 1844, and the following summer
Messrs. Laurie and Smith once more explored
the mountain district of Tyary, looking upon
a scene of painful desolation. The Prudential
Committee, in view of all the discouraging
circumstances of the case, now forwarded defi-
nite instructions to discontinue this branch of
the Nestorian mission, and in October the
three who remained of the missionary company
left Mosul ; Dr. Smith and Mrs. Hinsdale to
join the mission to the Armenians, and Mr.
Laurie, the Syrian mission. Good had been
done at Mosul, and in 1849 missionary opera-
tions were resumed there, under favorable cir-
cumstances, but not with special reference to
the Nestorians. That city is now the centre
of what is called the Assyrian mission. (See
Mosul.)
In May, 184G, Dr. Wright, from Oroomiah,
visited Bader Khan Bey, at the request of the
emir himself, who wished the benefit of his
professional services. He was accompanied by
Mr. Breath and the Nestorian deacon Tamu.
They found the Nestorians in the districts
which had been ravaged, again slowly collect-
ing flocks and herds and resuming the cultiva-
tion of the soil ; but another scene of slaughter
and rapine from the Koords soon followed, re-
ducing them again to deep destitution. At
length, in 1847, the Turks conquered the
Koords and garrisoned the mountains, subject-
ing both Koords and Nestoriaus to taxation.
Repeated excursions have been made during
the past few years, to some of the mountain
districts, by the missionaries at Oroomiah, and
more frequently and more extensively by some
of the devoted Nestorian helpers of the mis-
sion, some of whom are natives of these dis-
tricts. In 1851, a station was taken by
Messrs. Coan and Rhea, with three native help-
ers, in the district of Gawar, among the moun-
tains, about 70 miles N. W. from Oroomiah.
Much opposition has been experienced, and
unwearied efforts have been made to drive
them away, instigated, doubtless, by those
high in office in the . Nestoriar. church, with
the patriarch at their head, and too willingly
joined in by the local Turkish authorities.
Deacon Tamu, one of the native helpers, upon
an utterly groundless charge of murder, was
seized in July, 1852, and kept a prisoner at
Van, until September, 1853. His Christian
deportment during all his trials, is worthy of
great praise. The station has been maintain-
ed with increasing promise of usefulness ; and
in the autumn of 1853, Messrs. Coan and
Rhea made a preaching tour among the Nes-
torians of Koordistan, going to Mosul, and
visiting Ashita, the place where a station was
commenced in 1843. They urge that effort
should now be again commenced, without de-
lay, on the west side of the mountains, by at
564
NESTOEIANS.
least two missionaries, believing that the field
is now open, and that if it be not occupied,
the enemy, fvom Rome, will sow tares. — See
Perkins' " Residence in Persia ;" Grant's
" Nestorians, or the Lost Tribes;" Laurie's " Dr.
Ghant and the Mountain Nestorians ;" The
Reports of the A. B. C. F. M., and the 31is-
sionary Herald. — Eev. I. R. Worcester.
TABULAR VIEW.
STATIONS
ANT3 OUT-STATIOX^
Oroomiah..
Gawar
Geog Tapa .
Ardishai. . .
Total.-^
,
,^-
'i-
<
^
3
o
c
-S
"3 M
9
P
'5
3
•^
^
6
1
10
7
10
•->
SO
(-)
1
Q
.-)
1
1
76
S
1
11
11
12
2
80
7S
1038
1038
PRESENT STATE AND FUTURE PROSPECTS OF THE
MISSION. LETTER FROM REV. DR. PERKINS.
Oroomiah, 3Iay 16, 1854.
My dear Sir : — Yonr favor of January 1
was received a few days ago. I had before
seen notices of your contemplated enterprise,
and rejoiced in view of it. The work you
propose is exceedingly desirable and import-
ant, and judging from the fruits of your pen,
•which I have from time to time been so much
favored as to receive, through our conmion
friends, I^fr. and Mrs. , I am happy in
the belief that this great undertaking is fortu-
nate in having fallen into j'our hands. With
all my heart, I wish you the fullest success.
You request me to give you a sketch of the
present aspect of our field and mission. This
I will now briefly do with pleasure ; but owing
to the pressure of missionary duties, it must be
very brief; which, however, is the less to be
regretted, as our Reports to the .Prudential
Committee of our Board, to which you doubt-
less have access, have at all times been ample.
Our mission Press has given to the Nesto-
rians the entire Bible, in both the ancient and
modern Syriac ; and an edition of the New
Testament, in the modern language only, is
just completed. Into this language, which, as
you will recollect, was first reduced to writing
by our mission, we have also introduced many
valuable books besides the Holy Scriptures,
as Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress, liaxter's
Saint's Rest, the Dairyman's Daughter, the
Young Cottager, the Shepherd of Salisbury
Plain, and other tracts, and many school
books ; and wc are now printing a third edi-
tion of our hymn book, the first edition of
which consisted of only four hymns, attached
to a small spelling book, while the present edi-
tion contains about two hundred hvmns. Our
monthly ])eriodical, entitled " The Rays of
Light," holds steadily on its way, having en-
tered on its fifth year. It is an exceedingly
interesting auxiliary in our schools and among
the people, each monthly number embracing a
spice of matter in the various departments of
religion, education, science, missionary intelli-
gence, juvenile instruction, miscellanies, and
poetry.
It is impossible for any statement or descrip-
tion to convey an adequate impression of the
blessed influence of the press among this peo-
ple, in whose vernacular tongue, twenty-one
years ago, not a syllable of printed or written
matter existed.
Passing from the press to our schools, we
meet with corresponding phenomena. Where
but a single small school existed, and that not
worthy of the name, when our mission was
commenced, we have had more than seventy
village schools in operation, during the past
winter ; differing, of course, in the compara-
tive competency and fidelity of their teachers,
and corresponding progress of the pupils, but
all contributing to multiply readers of the
Holy Scriptures and other good books, and
operating as important centres of evangelical
light and influence.
Among our most interesting and promising
labors are those of our male and female semi-
naries— the former under the care of Messrs.
Stoddard and Cochran, and the latter under
the care of Misses Fisk and Rice. I do not
believe these two institutions of learning are
surpassed, in the order, industry, and improve-
ment of the pupils, and especially in their re-
ligious training, by any seminaries on the face
of the globe. They each contain about forty-
five pupils, the present year, the most of whom
are hopefully pious. The male seminary is
soon to graduate a class of twenty, the largest
class that Inis ever le!"t it at one time. The in-
fluence of the pious pupils and graduates of
both these seminaries, on their people, is alike
blessed and incalculalde.
During the few past years. Sabbath-schools
have been multipled among the Nestorians,
and with very happy effjct. In these schools
many adults' have learned to read, and thus
been' qualified to go rig'ut to the fountain of
Cod's word, for themselves, and draw from
thence the waters of salvation. Here, as else-
where, the Sabbath-S' hool is found to be a
very efficient and precious instrumentality in
the difl'usion of Scripture knowledge, and in
preparing the minds and hearts of men for the
saving work of the Holy Spirit.
Last in order of means employed, but first
in importance, I may mention tJie preaching
of the Gospel. Under all the pressure of our
other arduous labors, we endeavor to keep
fresh in mind tlu^ cardinal truth in the work of
missions, that it hath pleased God, by the fool-
ishness of preaching, to save them that be-
lieve. The clerical members of our mission,
unless sick, or otherwise providentially pre-
vented, preach at least twice on the Sabbath,
NESTORIANS.
565
or conduct religious services, tantamount to
preaching, eitlicr at the stations or abroad
among tiie villages, and more or less during
the week. And we have now many able and
faithful Nestorian fellow-laborers, from Mar
Yohannan and Mar Elias, down to graduates
of our seminary, engaged in the same way,
some of them itinerating, and others at out-
stations. And few are the Nestorians in Per-
sia who do not thus have the Gospel brought
to their villages, if not to their doors, at fre-
quent intervals, a great many of them every
Sabbath, and hundreds every day.
The pious Nestorians are also doing some-
thing in the line of missionary effort. I^or
several successive years they have united with
us in sending Nestorian missionaries to the
district of Bootan, on the river Tigris, about
300 miles westward from Oroomiah. To give
a missionarij character to this ancient church,
once so celebrated for its missionary efforts,
has ever been the strong desire of our hearts ;
and it possesses good materials for that pur-
pose.
But while Paul may jilant and Apollos
water, it is God who giveth the increase. You
have doubtless been made familiar with the
unspeakably precious revivals with which our
tield has been graciously visited in former
years. The present year, the Lord has again
mercifully visited this missionary vine. The
recent work of grace here has been more quiet
in its progress than some previous revivals ;
but I believe not less pure and pervading in
its influence, nor less hopeful in its results. A
precious harvest lias thus been gathered, the
present year, in our two seminaries, in the
large village of Geog Tapa, and to some ex-
tent in smaller villages.
This refreshing from the presence of the
Lord is the more interesting at this time, from
the ominous political aspects that lower in
these Eastern lands. We have in this visita-
tion a most comforting pledge that God has
not forgotten to be gracious to our Zion, and
Tliat he will not forsake his missionary ser-
vants and the holy cause in which they are
engaged, " though the earth be removed, and
the mountains be carried into the midst of the
sea."
Under the operation of these various mis-
sionary means, and especially under the re-
to labor in the church, we still leave for the
Lord to decide, ever endeavoring carefully to
watch and implicitly to follow the guidance of
his hand.
The members of our mission are all severely
worked. It cannot be otherwise ; but eight
in number, as we are, with the great amount
of labor we have constantly on our hands, in
the departments of preparing matter for the
press, printing, education, and preaching the
Gospel. We need more reapers, and the har-
vest must suffer for the want of them, especial-
ly as the vigor of youth and manhood is
departing from some of us.
Among the obstacles to the progress of the
Gospel here, the efforts of the wily French
Papists to lead astray the Nestorians shoftld be
mentioned as the most serious. No means are
too low or too iniquitous for them to adopt ;
and among an ignorant and corrupt people, it
would be strange if such means and motives,
constantly pursued, and shamelessly and dog-
gedly urged on their mercenary feelinfrs, in
their low state of morals, did not meet with a
ineasure of success. In view of the corrupt-
ing and destructive efforts of these unprinci-
pled emissaries of Rome, we often feel like
uniting our cry with that of the witnesses
under the altar, " 0 Lord, liow long ?"
Our mission station in the wild Koordish
mountains is manfully occupied by Messrs.
Rhea and Crane. They greatly need the ser-
vices and the influence of a physician in that
self-denying field. Ilieir labors are gradually
becoming more and more extended in those
dark regions, and we have every reason to
hope that the day is not distant when the
handful of corn thus lodged in the top of the
mountains shall shake like Lebanon ; the light
there kindled, mingling with that risiug- from
the plain, and both unitedly blazing upward
and onward to aid in the illumination of be-
nighted Central Asia.
I have alluded to the warlike aspects in
eastern lands. As yet, Persia perseveres in
refusing to declare war against Turkev,
though long and strongly urged to do so ; and
we hope that, in the good providence of God,
the Shah will continue to maintain this neu-
tral ground. Should there be a rupture be-
tween Turkey and Persia, our position would
of course be disturbed, and more or less uu-
peated showers of heavenly grace with which safe, near as we are situated to the boundary
„.... i;.,i,i i,„. i,„ ■.^■^^.^ :^ n , ^ ^f ^jj^^g^ |^^,^ empires, and that boundary in-
fested with hordes of bloody Koords. But it
is always safe to trust in the Lord. We know
that the cause of missions is infinitely dearer
to him than it can be to us, and we will trust
that He who rides on the whirlwind will direct
the storm. I am, dear sir, with much respect
very truly yours, J. Perkins.
NETHERLANDS MISSIONARY SO-
CIETY : The Netherlands Missionary Societv
was established in December, ]797, at Rotter-
our field has been visited, it would be strange
if evangelical light and truth were not making-
rapid progress among the Nestorians. Such
is the fact ; and the result is that the pious,
and many of the enlightened who are not
pious, are casting off the senseless and unscrip-
tural doctrines and practices with which their
worship had been more or less encumbered,
and rapidly verging toward the Gospel stand-
ard. Hitherto we have, as you are aware, la-
bored in the Ncstorian church without " let or
hindrance." How long we shall continue thus | dam, through the instrumentality of Dr. Van-
566
NETHERLANDS MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
der Kemp. This remarkable man, after his
appointment by the London Missionary Society
to South Africa, visited his native country to
settle his affairs. There he translated into
Dutch and ])ublished an address of the direc-
tors of the London ISIissionary Society to the
religious people of Holland, which led eventu-
ally to the establishment of the " Netherlands
Missionary Society." The founders of the soci-
ety having been principally ministers and
inhabitants of Rotterdam, the chief seat of
the Netherlands Missionary Society has re-
mained at that place. The members of the
society belong principally to the established
church, which is Presbyterian in its form of
government, and Calvinistic in its doctrine.
Those ministers who have imbibed Ncologian
sentiments, take scarcely any interest in it,
nor in anything connected with missionary
work, thereby confirming the often-made ob-
servation, that the orthodox, evangelical faith
is that which alone produces true and disinter-
ested love to God and zeal for his glory, and
prompts men to exert themselves actively and
perseveringly in promoting the spiritual and
eternal welfare of their fellow-creatures. The
General Synod, however, of the Dutch Church
has no control over the missionaries nor over
the funds collected for missionary undertak-
ings. But all the missionaries sent out by the
society are examined and ordained at the
Hague by a committee of ministers appointed
for that purpose by the General Synod from
among its mcmljors. The parish churches are
everywhere i'reely granted for missionary meet-
ings and other missionary purposes. 'J'he so-
ciety is supported by regular monthly and
annual subscriptions, and by donations and
legacies ; but no list of subscribers is ever
published. The principal supporters of the
society belong to the poorer and middle class-
es ; few of the great and wealthy being found
willing to assist the good cause. A body of
directors, both lay and clerical, is annually
chosen from among the subscribers, who man-
age the afiiiirs of the society.
Wherever there are clergymen members of
the society, the monthly prayer-meeting on the
first Monday of the month is publicly and
regularly held in the parish churches. In
some places it is very well attended, 1,0(10 aiid
even 2,000 sometimes being ]iresent in the
large towns. 'I'lie directors publish nu)nthly a
report of the most interesting missionary
events whidi have come to their knowledge
during the month, which is always read at the
meeting, the ollieiuting minister intersiXTsing
it with suitable remarks.
'i'lie annual general meeting takes place in
•Inly, and is held in the Cathedral Church of
Ki.llerdam, which can accommodate between
three iuid I'uur thousand people, and is gener-
ally liiied on the occasion. I'ious laymen and
clergymen IVoni almost every part of Holland
attend. A report of the p'roceedings of the
year is read and a missionary sermon preached ;
but speeches are never made.
The society has its foreign secretary, who
corresponds with the missionaries on 'official
topics. But, in addition to this, every one of
the leading directors chooses one of the mis-
sionaries he may like best, and becomes his
particular and regular correspondent, and also
his advocate and that of his station at the
Board. This arrangement has jiroved very
useful to the Netherlands Missionary Society,
and most advantageous both to the directors
and the missionaries. The society has a col-
lege of its own, at Rotterdam, for the instruc-
tion, theological and scientific, of the candidates
for the missionary work. Of these, the small-
est proportion generally are Dutch, whilst the
greater number are Germans and Swiss.
At first the funds of the society were too small
to admit of its sending missionaries to foreign
lands, and that it might not be idle, various
plans were formed and carried into execution
for doing good at home, especially by the pub-
lication and distribution of religious books, the
establishment of Sunday-schools, visiting pri-
sons and hospitals, and assisting some congre-
gations to sustain ministers. In such courses
of labor the society went on till the year 1800,
when they began to hope they might enter on
the field toward which their eye was originally
turned.
In a short time their funds increased rapidly.
Numbers of young men also offered their ser-
vices as missionaries, several of whom after
having gone through a proper course of instruc-
tion, were ready to occupy any field that might
be pointed out to them in the heathen world.
The political circumstances of the country, the
subjugation of Holland by France with the con-
secjuent loss of its colonies, rendered it imprac-
ticable for the directors to send these young
men abroad themselves ; they therefore entered
into a friendly agreement with the London
Missionary Society, which engaged to send
them forth under its auspices, and selected first
South Africa as the most suitable sphere fo©
them, owing chiefly to their being acquainted
with the Dutch, which language is generally
understood and s]ioken by the Hottentots and
other tribes. For many years afterwards,
nearlv all the missionaries whom the London
Mi.«si'onary Society sent to that part of the
world, were young men they had obtained from
Holland.
In lb04 the London Missionary Society sent
Messrs. Vos, Krhardt.and Palm, three mission-
ai-ics transferred to them by the Netherlands
Missionary Society, to the island of Ceylon,
encouraged })y the'accounts they had received
of the vast numbers of natives wJio professed
themselves Christians, but who were now in a
great measm-e destitute of religious instruction.
'I'hefirst-nanuMl of these missionaries \yas jireatly
thwarted in his efibrts among the natives liy the
Ennlish government, instigated it is said by the
NETHERLANDS MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
567
Dutch consistory of tne island wliora he had
offended by his faithfuhiess and zeal. In
consequence, he was soon compelled to leave
the country. Messrs. Palm and Erhardt con-
tinued at Ceylon until their death, which hap-
pened several years a^o, and were successfully
employed in the superintendence of schools and
the pastoral care of two churches to which they
had been appointed by government. It does
not seem that they were able to accomplish
much among the heathen.
About the year 1812, the directors of the
Ketherlands Missionary Society, anxious to
exert themselves for the benefit of the former
Dutch settlements in the East, transferred again
for that purpose three missionaries to the Lon-
don Missionary Society ; for Holland being as
yet under French rule, and Java and the East-
ern Islands being occupied by the British, it
was not practicable for the Netherlands Soci-
ety then to undertake that mission directly.
These three missionaries were superior men
and thoroughly qualified for their work. They
were the Rev. Messrs. Kam, Supper, and Bruck-
ner. These brethren were at the outset of
their career exposed to considerable difBculties
and dangers; for the French government hav-
ing strictly prohibited their leaving the country
for Eng-land, they were compelled to assume
the attire of traveling mechanics, and in this
disguise, succeeded, after having had many
narrow escapes from the French gendarmes,
to reach Christiana in Norway, from whence
they embarked for London. This place they
left for Java in the commencement of 1813.
On their arrival at Batavia they separated,
Mr. Supper having been appointed to that
capital, Mr. Bruckner to Samarang, and Mr.
Kam to the Molucca islands. Mr. Supper died
not long after his arrival, and Mr. Bruckner,
(who is still living and actively employed in
the translation of the Scriptures and other
missionary duties,) joined the Baptist Mission-
ary Society.
Mr. Kam fixed his residence at Amboyna.
and met there what his heart so greatly longed
for — a most extensive field of labor. There
are in the Eastern Archipelago thousands of
Malay native converts who embraced Chris-
tianity during the dominion and by the exer-
tions of the old Dutch East India Company.
In propagating Christianity in those parts,
there is nothing which the Dutch aimed more
at than to furnish the inhabitants with the
Holy Scriptures. As early as 1733, the whole
Bible in Malay and several parts of the sacred
writings in other dialects of the East, were
translated and published by order, and at the
expense of the Dutch government, and widely
disseminated throughout the islands. It is
true, however, that the best means to promote
the conversion of the natives, were not always
used, nor the best motives ahvays held out,
neither was sufficient caution always exercised
in receiving candidates into the church.
In 1814, Holland having resumed its inde-
pendence, and received back its colonies, the
directors of the Netherlands Missionary Soci-
ety deemed it time to pursue operations for
the future, directly, and without the interven-
tion of other societies. They placed their
Missionary Seminary upon a more regular foot-
ing, and in 1819 sent out five young men
trained in it to join Mr. Kam, who meanwhile
had been appointed by the Netherlands Mis-
sionary Society one of its foreign directors.
These young men, after having obtained
some knowledge of the native language at
Amboyna, were placed in various islands, as
Celebes, Ceram, Ternate, Banda and Timor, and
have been since from time to time reinforced by
fresh arrivals of laborers from Holland, the
Netherlands Society viewing at present that
part of the world as its principal sphere of action.
In July, 1833, the zealous missionary Kam
died, at the age of sixty-three years, from over
exertion, occasioned by an extensive mission-
ary tour he had made. He was a most active
and devoted servant of the Lord. Until his
death, he continued twice or thrice in the
year, in a small brig of his own, which he
managed himself •\\ath the assistance of a few
native lascars, to travel in that burning clime
for several months together, from island to
island, exposed to storms and dangers of vari-
ous kinds. On such occasions, he often added
to his duties of a preacher of the Gospel those
of a peace-maker among the native tribes, and
was the means of preventing much bloodshed.
As Schwartz had been on the continent of In-
dia by the British government, so was he fre-
quently emjiloyed by the Netherlands govern-
ment in allaying disturbances and quelling
rising rebellions among their Malay subjects,
in which endeavors he seldom failed. His
judicious views of things, good temper, perfect
iiitegrity, and the holiness of his life, rendered
him greatly respected by the chiefs of the East-
ern Islands, and made the humble missionary
a far more successful instrument in maintain-
ing peace among them, than large bodies of
troops could ever have been.
The Netherlands Society twenty-five or thir-
ty years ago, made an attempt to contribute
to the evangelization of the Chinese, and sent
out the celebrated Mr. Gutzl.aff and some other
missionaries, for that express purpose.
In the year 1822, the Netherlands Society
sent a missionary (the Rev. Mr. Vix.) to the-
Dutch colony of Surinam, in Guiana, vvho has.
labored there ever since (not without fruit,)
among the negro slave population. His church:
amounts to about 700 members. The society
has another missionary in the West Indies,,
stationed at the island of Curaqao, who is em-
ployed much like Mr. Vix.
In 1820, the late Dr. Vos, being on a visit
to Holland, called the attention of the directors
to the destitute state of the Hindoos in a spii--
itual point of view, upon which they resolved
568
NEVIS— NEW BRUNSWICK.
on commencing two missions m these parts, one
at Chinsurali in Bengal, and the other at Pulicat
on the coast of Coromandel, both of which
places belonged then to the Dutch government.
Kcv. A. F. Lacroix was appointed to the for-
mer, and the Rev. Mr. Kindliuger, a most pious
and devoted man, who, up to his twenty-fourth
year had been a bigoted Roman Catholic, to
the latter. Dr. Yos and G. Herklots, Esq., of
Chinsurah, had, previous to their departure
from Holland, been elected foreign directors of
the society.*
Mr. Kindlinger on his arrival at the station,
had great difRculties to contend with on ac-
count of the exceedingly degraded state of the
native Christians, great numbers of whom he
met at Pulicat and the vicinity. These had
embraced Ctnistianity through the instrumen-
tality of the old German missionaries who had
preceded Schwartz and had been more than a
quarter of a century without teachers and with-
out instruction. By patient endeavors, how-
ever, he succeeded in course of time in collect-
ing a numerous and regular congregation, es-
tablished several schools, and spent much of
his time in preaching to the heathen. In 1823,
he was joined by two other laborers from Hol-
land, the Rev. Messrs. Irion and Winckler, the
former of whom remained with him at Pulicat,
and the latter was stationed at Sadras, a small
Dutch settlement near the seven pagodas be-
tween Madras and Poudicherry.
In 1825, the Dutch settlements on the conti-
nent of India having been ceded to the British
government in exchange for its possessions on
the island of Sumatra, the directors of the
Netherlands Society informed their mission-
aries that circumstances would not permit
them to continue their missions in those settle-
ments, and left them free either to proceed to
the Eastern Archipelago to join their brethren
there — or, if they preferred, to connect them-
selves with any one of the English societies
laboring in India. All four, having already
at the expense of much time and labor, attain-
ed a knowledge of the native languages and
the native customs and habits, felt unwilling
to relinquish so great an advantage, and there-
fore deemed it their duty to accept of the lat-
ter proposal ; in consequence of which Messrs.
Kindlinger and Winckler joined the Church
Missionary Society. Mr. Irion joined the
Society for Propagating the Gospel in Foreign
Paris ; and Mr. Lacroix connected himself
with the London Missionary Society, which
made an end to the Dutch mission in these
parts.
The receipts of the Society for IHTjO were
.about §:n,000. The institution for training
missionaries at Rotterdam is continued. At
that time, the Society had 17 stations in the
Indian vVrchipclago, manned by 11) missionaries,
bei^ides luiviug lurnished a large number of
.missionaries for other societies.
NEVIS : A small, but beautiful and fer-
tile island in the "West Indies. A station of
the Wesleyan Missionary Society.
NEW-BARMEN : A station of the Rhen-
ish Missionary Society in South Africa, 200
miles north-east of Scheppmansdorf.
NEWASSE : A station of the American
Board in Hindostan, connected with the Ah-
mcdnuggur mission.
NE\V-HEBRIDES : A group of islands
in Western Polynesia, or Australasia, M'here
the London Missionary Society have eight star
tions. Erromanga, one of this group, is the
place of the tragical death of the martyr mis-
sionary, Williams. Population, 150,000.
NEWERA ELLA : A station of the
Gospel Propagation Society in Ceylon.
NEWVILLE : A Karen village, in the
northern part of Maulmain province, in Bur-
mah, and an out-station of the Maulmaiu
Karen Mission of the American Baptist ,
Union.
NEW-RABBAY" : Station of the Church
Missionary Society among the W^onicas, in
East Africa, situated on the coast, a short dis-
tance W.N.W. of Mombas.
NEW-AMSTERDAM : The capital of
Berbice, situated 50 miles up the Berbice
river. It is a pleasant town, intersected with
canals, and a considerable portion of ground
attached to each house. It is occupied by the
Society for Propagating the Gospel.
NEW-HERRNHUT : The first station
occupied by the Moravians in Greenland.
Also, a station of the same on the island of
St. Thomas, W. I.
NEW-HOLLAND : See Australia.
NEW-PROVIDENCE : One of the Ba-
hama Islands, about 25 miles long and nine
In-oad, and considerably in advance of the
otlier islands in cultivation. Wesleyan Mis-
sionary Society. .
NEW-BRUNSWICK : One of the pro-
vinces of British America. The latest census
was taken in 1851. The population was at
that time 193,800 ] but no religious statistics
arc given in this important public document,
and there are no denominational records, from
vvhivh the numbers, character, and condition
of the Christian connnunity can be accurately
ascertained. The following items have been
collected from dociunents under date of 1854.
The number of Catholic clergy is almost the
same as in Nova Scotia, and the circumstances
would appear to indicate that the proportion
of Catholics to Protestants in New Brunswick
must be greater than in Nova Scotia.
Chwch of En;j:hmd.—l bishop, 1 archdea-
con, and 5 clergymen.
Church of Scotland.— I synod, 2 presbyteries,
8 ministers, 11 congregations, and several mis-
sionary stations.
Rcfonaed Prcshijterinn Church of Ireland.—
2 ministers and 1 missionary.
Wesleyan Methodists.— 30 ministers, 22 con-
gregations, and 2 supernumeraries, besides 3
NEW-ZEALAND.
5G9
miuisters employed as principal and teachers
of Sackville Academy.
Baptists. — 2 associations, 52 ministers, and
7 licentiates.
Free Christian Baptists. — 16 ministers and 2
missionaries.
Congregationalists. — 3 ministers.
Rev. J. Bayne.
NEW-ZEALAND : Two extensive and
beautiful islands in the Southern Pacific,
stretching from latitude 34° 30' to 47° 20'
south, and from 167° to 178° east longitude,
being nearly 900 miles long and over 700 broad ;
together with a small one to the south, called
St'cwart's Island. New-Zealand is distinguished
for its rich and varied scenery, and for every
thing which naturally strikes the eye as beau-
tiful or sublhne. Some of the mountains in
the northern island rise more than 14,000 feet
above the level of the sea ; their sides covered
•with forest timber ; their summits girt with
clouds or capped with snow ; and their whole
appearance strikingly rich and grand. The
country is remarkably hilly and broken, the
hills being studded with caves, deep, dark, and
frightful. New-Zealand has several large and
noble lakes. The Thames is the principal
river ; the others being mostly insignificant
streams. The forests are so extensive and so
dense, that no sound from without disturbs the
traveler ; and yet no beasts of prey infest these
retreats to put him in fear. New-Zealand has
a number of harbors, which are visited for
supplies by a vast number of whaling vessels.
The northern island is divided into fourteen
districts, viz. : Kaitaia, Bay of Islands, Thames,
Tauranga, Rotorua, Bay of Plenty, East Cape,
Poverty Bay, Wairoa, Entry Island, Taranake,
Waikato, Kaipara, and Hokianga.
Climate. — The climate of New-Zealand is
temperate, salubrious, and congenial to Euro-
pean constitutions. North of the Thames
snows are unknown, and frosts are off the
ground by nine o'clock in the morning. Dur-
ing six months of the year, the country is ex-
posed to heavy gales of wind and tremendous
falls of rain. The spring and autumn are de-
lightfully temperate. Spring commences the
middle of August, summer in December, au-
tumn in March, and winter in July.
Soil and Productions.— These islands afford
almost every variety of soil, which produces
wheat, barley, maize, beans, peas, and various
grasses in abundance. Most of the trees are
evergreens, and vegetation is scarcely ever sus-
pended.
Inhabitants. — When first discovered, the
New-Zealanders were a savage and barbarous
people. When a child was born, it was wrap-
ped in a coarse cloth, and laid in a verandah
to sleep ; and in a few hours, the mother pur-
sued her ordinary work in the field. The child
suffered much ; and if its mother did not fur-
nish it nourishment enough, it must perish.
Large holes were slit in the ear, and a stick,
half an inch in diameter, thrust through.
When five days old, the child was carried to a
stream of water, and either dipped or sprinkled,
and a name given to it ; and a priest mum-
bled a prayer, the purport of which was said
to be, an address to some unknown spirit, pray-
ing that he may so influence the child that he
may become cruel, brave, warlike, troublesome,
adulterous, murderous, a liar, a thief, disobe-
dient, in a word, guilty of every crime. After
this, small pebbles, about the size of a pin's
head, were thrust down its throat, to make its
heart callous, hard, and incapable of pity.
The ceremony was concluded with a feast.
The system of tabu, or consecration, com-
mon to the Pacific isles, nowhere prevailed to
a greater extent than at New-Zealand. (See
Tabu.)
With the New-Zealander, superstition took
the place of medical skill. When a person
had a pain in the back, he would lie down and
get another to jump over him and tread on him
to remove the pain. A wound was bruised
with a stone, and afterwards held over the
smoke. In internal acute diseases the patient
sent for a priest, lay down, and died.
Dreams and omens were much regarded, and
had great influence over their conduct. On
important occasions, when several tribes were
going to war, an oracle was consulted, by set-
ting up sticks to represent the different tribes,
and watching the wind to see which way the
sticks would fall, in order to determine which
party would be victorious. But tlie person
performing the ceremony, by a little juggling,
could determine the question as he pleased.
The belief in witchcraft, also, almost univer-
sally prevailed, and was productive of all the
suspicion, cruelty, and injustice which generally
accompany it among a barbarous and super-
stitious people. Polygamy was allowed to
any extent ; being the fruitful source of jeal-
ousy, strife, and murder. Marriages were
generally confined within the tribe. The peo-
ple were affectionate, but desperate and re-
vengeful when roused to anger. For an un-
civilized people, they were industrious. Their
food consisted of a variety of vegetables, and
some kinds of animal food. They were war-
like, and ate their enemies killed in war; and
prisoners who were not killed and eaten were
reduced to slavery. The heads of their ene-
mies were preserved as trophies of victory.
They formerly preserved the heads of their
friends, and kept them with religious strictness.
Tattooing was practised, and was made a
much more painful operation than in the other
Pacific Isles. The operation was performed
with a small rough chisel, with which an in-
cision was made by a blow with a mallet, the
chisel being first dipped in coloring matter
made of the root of flax, burnt to charcoal,
and mixed with water, the stain of which is
indelible. The flax is cultivated extensively
in New Zealand, of which they make gar
570
NEW-ZEALAND.
ments, nets, and lines. The houses of the bet-
ter class were snug and -warm, ornamented
with carved work. They were built of IjuI-
rushes, lined with the leaves of the palm tree,
neatly platted together. They were about IG
by 10 feet, and four or five feet high. The
entrance was by a low sliding door, and there
was one window 9 by 6 inches, with a sliding
shutter. Their houses were without furniture,
and their cooking utensils a few stones. Their
villages were scattered over a large plot of
ground without any order or arrangement.
Religion. — The New-Zealanders, though re-
markably superstitious, had no gods that they
worshiped, nor anything to represent a being
whom they called god. They imagined that it
was a great spirit (Atua) who thundered ; but
all their thoughts of him were those of fear
and dread. Sickness, they supposed, was
brought on by him, coming in the form of a
lizard, entering the side, and preying on the
vitals. Hence they used incantations over the
sick, threatening to kill and eat their deity, or
to burn him to a cinder, unless he should
come out. Their idea of Wiro, the evil spirit,
was more in accordance with the Scriptural
idea of the Evil One. They believed in a fu-
ture state ; but their ideas of it were vague
and sensual ; and as they supposed all the
functions of life were there performed, slaves
were killed upon the death of a chief, that
they might follow and attend upon him ; and
some of their native sports. Sometimes they
would come into the chapel dressed in the
most fantastic style, and at other times, na-
ked ; and in the middle of the service they
would start up with the cry, " That's a lie !
that's a lie ! Let us all go."
Another station was commenced at Paihia,
in 1823, on the south side of the Bay of
Islands, where the people were in an exceeding-
ly wild and uncontrollable state.
The mission was reinforced from to time,
and a schooner was built to ply between the
mission and Port Jackson, in order to furnish
supplies. She was lost in 1828, but another"
was built, and launched in May, 1830, called
The Messenger.
Schools were commenced at Paihia, in 1823,
and at the same time the missionaries began
to visit the natives in the neighborhood, for
religious instruction. In 1824, those instruc-
tions were blessed to the conversion of the
chief Waitangi, who was baptized under the
name of Christian Rangi ; and by June 1831,
20 adults were baptized at this station, with
10 children.
For 15 years the natives had steadily refused
to allow any one to reside near their villages,
in the interior. But having become convinc-
ed that the missionaries were their friends, in
1830 a station was commenced at "Waimate,
the centre of a large district in the interior,
to which roads have been cut by the natives
widows often put themselves to death that to their residences, for thirty-five miles, and
they might accompany their departed hus-
bands.
mSSION.
CiiDRCU Missionary Society. — Tlie atten-
tion of the Church ^Missionary Society was di-
rected to New-Zealand, ])y Rev. Saml.Marsden,
senior chaplain to the colony of New South
"Wales, and they sent out three missionaries to
labor under the direction of Mr. Marsden, who
arrived at New-Zealand towards the close of
1814, and commenced a station at Rangihona,
on the N. AV. side of the Bay of Islands. But
for a long time they were treated with taunts
and jeers and threatenings, while their message
was neither understood nor regarded, and they
were suljjected to great privations, from want
of sh(;]ter, food and companions. But an infiu-
ential chief named Ilongi, visiting England and
returning loaded with presents, the mission- ^
aries rose in the estimation of the natives, and 1 Gospel into pagan lands began to be seen.
were beloved and protected by the chiefs. One of them, Rev. Mr. Yate, in speaknig ot
The station was afterwards removed to Ta- this change in 1835, says, " Instead ot the
puna, on the other side of the hill ; and on the noisy merriment, the blusternig excitement to
arrival of a reinforcement, another station was imiscliief, which used to prevad on the Sab-
commenced at Kerikeri, near which was a bath, all is peace. Sabbath-schoo s m many
lar->e native village, occupied by Ilongi and of the native villages are established, and
his pcnple. But it was with great difficulty regularly carried on; work of every descnp-
that they could form a school, or secure at-Uion is laid aside; Cin-istian worship is puiic-
tendancc on public worship. When the Sab-ltuallv attended; and the day as strictly re-
bath l>ell caught their ears, they would run gardcd as in any well-regulated village in
away, and employ themselves in fishing, or England. In this, I am speaking of the Chris-
chapels have been erected in most of the nu-
merous villages in this district, capable of
holding 150 to 200 persons, in which services
are regularly held on the Sabbath, by assistant
missionaries, and they are occasionally visited
l)y the resident clergyman ; schools have also
been established in these villages, with the
sanction of the chiefs. Four schools are in
operation at AVaimate.
In January, 1834, a settlement was formed
at Kaitai, at the earnest solicitation of the
chiefs and people of the Rarawa tribes, in the
vicinity of the North Cape ; and another
subsequently at Puriri, south of the Bay of
Islands.
Although the missionaries labored at these
stations under great discouragements, for
many years, yet after mastering the language
and acquiring the confidence of the natives,
the usual results of the introduction of the
NEW-ZEALAND.
571
tianized villages in the interior ; not of those
in connection with the shipping- ; in which, as
the sailors on that daj' have frequeutly liberty
to go on shore, the holy day is made a season
of far greater iniquity than any other."
A report of the Waimate station for 1832,
stated that the chapel was every Sabbath
crowded to excess ; that the natives rejoiced at
the approach of every Sabbath ; and that the
preached word had its effect upon many of the
hearers. On the 4th of May, 1834, just before
embarking for New South Wales, to superin-
tend the printing of some translations, Mr.
Yate baptized four chiefs, and several other
persons ; and on the 8th of June, he baptized
38 adults, the greater portion of them chiefs.
They had been candidates for many months.
The next Sabbath they were admitted to the
communion. Mr. Yate gives an account of the
deaths of several heathens, who met death in
darkness and horror of mind, one of them, a
chief, declaring, with his last breath, that he was
" goii^lo hell ;" and a number of native Chris-
tians, -VTOO had died in peace and comfort, in
the I'aith of the Gospel. He also publishes a
number of letters, which he received from the
converts, which were full of affection and pious
feeling, expressive of a deep insight into their
own hearts, and a simple faith in Christ.
At this stage in the progress of the mis-
sion, the natives manifested a strong desire for
knowledge ; and though their facilities for in-
struction were small, yet a great many of
them had learned to read. And, captives
from distant tribes, having been sold into
slavery, had attended the mission-schools ; and
by some means gaining their liberty, they had
carried the knowledge thus acquired to their
distant homes, and taught it to their friends.
A great change had been effected by the
Gospel in the domestic character of those who
had embraced it. Polygamy was diminish-
ing, and husbands and wives did not quarrel
as formerly. The inhuman practices of ibrmer
times were being suppressed. It was once the
custom for the relations of a chief to kill one
or more slaves at his death, to wait upon him
in the world of spirits ; but, when the great
chief Hongi died, not one was slain. The tabus
and other superstitious, also, were falling into
disuse. And industry, regularity, and a desire
to make improvements in their land, their
habits and customs, were on the increase among
the great body of the people. Mr. Yate gives
the following speech of a chief to his people,
who seems to have cauoht a correct idea of
the power and influence of the Gospel : " What,"
he inquired, " what are these missionaries come
to dwell with us for ? They are come to break
in two our clubs, to blunt the points of our
spears, to draw the bullets from our muskets,
and to make this tribe and that tribe to love
one another, and sit as brothers and friends.
'J'hen let us give our hearts to listening, and
we shall dwell in peace."
The following incident shows how the leaven
works when it once finds its way to the heathen
mind : Two of the missionaries, as they were
traveling to a new and distant part of the
island, rested on the Sabbath, and collected an
assembly of natives to hear the Gospel. They
commenced by singing a hymn ; and, to their
astonishment, the whole congregation joined
with them. The responses also were correctly
given. They afterwards found three boys who
had lived for some time in the mission family,
who had acted as their teachers.
In December, 1837, a Roman Catholic
bishop and two priests landed in New-Zea-
land, and located themselves in the midst of
the Wesleyan mission. Thus it is that the
Church of Rome follows the track of Pro-
testant missionaries, like an evil sjiirit, to
counteract the good work. In 1839, they had
eight priests and two catechists ; but one
chief is represented as having become more
deeply attached to the missionaries, being dis-
gusted with what he had seen and heard of
the Papists.
In January, 1839, the Bishop of Australia
visited the mission ; and in a letter to the
committee, he bears the following testimony to
the character of the missionaries, and the re-
sults of their labors : " I must offer a very
sincere and willing testimony to their main-
taining a conversation such as becomes the
Gospel of Christ. Their habits of life are
devotional. They are not puffed up with self-
estimation, but appear willing to learn as well
as apt to teach. And among themselves they
appear to be drawn together by a spirit of
harmony, prompted by that Spirit of which
love, gentleness, and goodness are the most de-
lightful fruits.
" At every station which I personally visit-
ed, the converts were so numerous as to bear
a considerable proportion to the entire popula-
tion ; and I was informed that the same was
true at other places. In most of the native
villages in which the missionaries have a foot-
ing, there is a building set apart for religious
worship. In these buildings generally, but
sometimes in the open air, the Christian classes
were assembled before me. The gray-haired
man and aged woman took their i)laces to read
and undergo examination among their descend-
ants of the second and third generations. The
chief and the slave stood side by side, with
the same holy volume in their hands, and ex-
erted their endeavors each to surpass the other
in returning proper answers."
The bishop states that the native population
is rapidly diminishing, even more so than dur-
ing their savage warfare — a fact for which he
is at a loss to account.
The activity of the natives in teaching their
countrymen, and in building places of worship,
forms an important feature of this mission.
Mr. Williams states, June 3, 1839, that on
his visit to the East Cape, he found three nar
572
NEW-ZEALAND.
tive teachers actively engaged, and that the
degree of attention paid to them by the na-
tives generally was astonishing. At one place
they lound a chapel, 60 by 28 feet, which had
been erected by the natives, and a congrega-
tion of 500 assembled in it on the Lord"s day.
At another place, where no missionary had
ever been, they found the natives assembling
for Christian W'orship, in a regular and order-
ly manner.
The following account of a native prayer-
meeting, is related by Mr. Brown, in a letter
dated July 21, 1838 : " After evening service
I found that a few natives had met to hold a
prayer-meeting. They commenced by sing-
ing a hymn. A native then engaged in
prayer. That was followed by reading a chap-
ter. Another hymn was sung; and after an
address by a native, the meeting was closed by
another extemporaneous prayer."
In relation to general improvement, it is
stated that at this time (1839) the missiona-
ries had introduced among these savages agri-
culture and gardening ; the use of the spade,
the plow, and the mill ; cattle, sheep, and
horses ; built houses and chapels ; cut roads
through forests ; built bridges, kc, changing
a country from a wild and savage state to a
condition of incipient civilization. In all the
14 districts of the island. Christian congre-
gations had been gathered, with an aggre-
gate attendance on public worship of 8,760,
and 233 communicants ; and the entire Scrip-
tures had been translated and printed in the
native tongue. But so rapid was the in-
crease of interest, that in a letter dated May 5,
1840, Rev. AV. "Williams says that the popula-
tion as a hodij professed Christianity ; that the
number attending public worship had increased
to 27,000 ; that the baptisms could not be less
than 2,000 ; and the nuniljer of communicants
during this short period had more than dou-
bled.
In 1841, the British Government made New-
Zealand an independent colony, and appointed
Captain llobson Covernor.
In September, 1840, Mr. AVilliams gives a
most encouraging view of the state of things
in the Eastern District. He says his parish
extends two degrees and a half ; that almost all
the people are inquiring after the truth ; and
that more than 8,000 assemble regularly for
worship.
Ill 1841, New-Zealand was erected into an
Episcopal see ; and Kev. (1. A. Selwyu, D.I).,
Was consecrated bishop at Lambeth, England.
In June of the same year, the lirst mission-
ary mwtiiig in New-Zealand was held at Kai-
taia, attciide'd by 500 natives and a numlier of
Eurupt'uns. "J'he rest)luti()iis were each moved
by a European and seconded by a native.
Several of the native adilresses were appropri-
ate and striking, 'i'he amoulit of the contri-
bution taken on the occasion was £46 5s.
The good work in the Eastern District pro-
gressed so rapidly, that in July, 1841, the
communicants had increased in that district
alone to 878, among whom were included a
large proportion of the leading chiefs. The
whole fabric of the old superstitions was gone,
the idols cast away, Aveapons of war laid aside,
and petty quarrels settled by arbitration.
In the'Western District, in September, 1839,
two young chiefs traveled 500 miles with a re-
quest for missionaries from their father, a noted
chief and warrior at Kapiti, an island in
Cook's Straits. To the astonishment of the
missionaries, it was found that they could read
well ; and from their statements it appeared
that, in many villages, the Lord's day was ob-
served, public worship regularly held, and
great numbers Avcre anxious for instruction ;
and all this was the result of the labors of one
native, named Matahau, who had gone there*
of his own accord, and was actively engaged
in diffusing a knowledge of the Gospel.
The zeal of the native converts for the eon-
version of their countrymen has been remark-
able. In many parts of the country where the
missionaries have journeyed over ground never
before trodden by Europeans, they have been
astonished to find chapels built, some of the
natives able to read, and many in the habit of
assembling for ■worship. Mr. Aslm-ell says
that in a tour of 400 miles, in every village he
found some one who could read, and in all but
one of them he found the Testament.
In their report for 1843, the committee say,
" The blessing of God continues to be vouch-
safed in a marked degree to the labors of the
missionaries and native teachers, and the cir-
culation of the Scriptures. "Within the last
four years, the number of natives who have
embraced Christianity has increased from 2,000
to 35,000." And although they do not speak
confidently of the saving conversion of the
great mass of them, yet they say there is every
reason to entertain the hope that not a few of
this nmltitude have truly embraced the Gos-
pel. "War and cannibalism had almost, if not
entirely, ceased ; ancient superstitions had
been forsaken ; and many were making rapid
progress in spiritual knowledge. Dr. Sinclair,
surgeon of the British Navy, who visited New-
Zealand at the end of 1841, gives the follow-
ing testimony :
'• By means of the well-directed labors of
the iiiissionaries, the natives have become ex-
emplary Christians, and now show an intellec-
tual capacity which strikes with surprise every
one who goes among them. Perhaps no peo-
jile in the history of mankind has been so
completely changed, in their religious and
moral condition, as these natives have been,
in such a short time, and more particularly by
such a small number of men, ami by such
peaceful means. Freciuently have I lieard a
Christian native, when asked to buy or sell on
the Lord's day, or break any other command-
i ment, make the decided answer, ' No— me mis-
NEW-ZEALAND.
573
sionar ;' aud that wlieu the temptations were
great."
The new bishop arrived at Auckland, May
30, 1842, where he was received with demon-
strations of joy by the inhabitants. Aud, in
his letters to the society, he confirms the state-
ments already made respecting the progress of
the Gospel. The committee say, in 1844, that
they can speak with increased confidence of
the extent to which the Gospel has spread
among the natives of New-Zealand, and the
essential change which it has produced in all
their moral habits. The message of salvation
had been conveyed to nearly, or quite, all the
settlements on the northern island ; and in
many places unvisited by the missionaries, the
Gospel was read aud jDublic worship main-
tained. War had almost entirely ceased ; and
where it had occurred lately, it had been car-
ried on in a very mitigated form. Theft aud
murder were of rare occurrence. The bishop
states that, among the Christian natives, he
had met with the most pleasing instances of
/the natural expression of the deep and earnest
feelings of religion.
The bishop rented the mission farm at
Waimate, aud commenced a collegiate estab-
lishment for the training of candidates for the
ministry.
The following incident, related by Rev. C.
P. Davis, and which occurred in 1844, shows,
in a very striking manner, the power of the
Gospel to tame the most savage tribes. He
entered a village belonging to two Christian
chiefs, Perika aud Noa, and found them sur-
rounded by their armed followers, engaged in
prayer, expecting au attack from Ripa, a chief
who had made au unjust demand of them,
with which they refused to comply. They had
a white flag raised over their heads, as a token
of their desire for peace. Mr. Davis went out
to meet Ripa aud his party, whom he found
naked and their faces painted red, listening to
addresses urgiug them to vengeance and
slaughter. Noa walked between the two pai--
ties, telling the enemy that they were acting
contrary to the word of God ; and that, while
his party were not afraid of them, they were
restrained by the fear of God. Ripa and his
party were but 20, while the Christian party
were 100. After many speeches on both
sides, one of Ripa's men, in brandishing his
hatchet, accidentally hit Noa's head. As soon
as his men saw the blood tiowing. every man's
musket was leveled. In another moment
Ripa's whole party would have fallen ; but the
wounded chief sprang forward, and exclaimed,
" If you kill Ripa, I will die with him ; " and
then thr<,wing his own body as a shield over
Ripa, saved him from destruction. Peace was
then made between the two parties, and there
was great rejoicing. " Some years ago," says
Mr. Davis, " the very sight of blood would
have been a signal for a dreadful slaughter."
In the year 1845, the mission was seriously
interrupted by a collision between some of the
natives in the northern district and the British
forces, which led to a serious war for some
time, some of the natives ranging themselves
on one side aud some on the other, aud thus
threatening a general civil war. Some of the
stations in the northern district were broken
up and destroyed. But the natives engaged in
this outbreak, though not generally professing
Christianity, were very far from manifesting
the savage cruelty which formerly character
ized their warfare. In a number of engage-
ments, the natives were victorious ; but the
governor states that, in these circumstances,
European troops would not have behaved bet-
ter, or shown less viudictiveness. Their for-
bearance towards European settlers, especially
the missionaries,, was remarkable. Yet, the
effects of the war upon missionary operations,
and upon the religious condition of the Chris-
tian natives, were lamentable in the extreme.
Such was the demoralizing influence of the
example of the British soldiers at Waimate
upon the natives with whom they came in
contact, that some of them had given up even
attending upon Christian ordinances, and
others had showu great lukewarmness. And,
in many instances, those Christian natives who
tpok part with the heathen against the Eng-
lish, relapsed into heathenism.
However, Rev. 0. Hadfield, under date of
March 8, 1847, writes : " I certainly have a
much stronger conviction of the reality of the
hold that religion has uj)on the professing na-
tives, since the late disturbances, than 1 had
previously. Last winter, v/hile war was going
on iu the neighborhood, Governor Gray visited
Waikanae on the Lord's Day, and attended
the native church and schooLfcIt was con-
ducted by a native catechist,ff;evi Te Ahu,
a man who has conducted himself invariably
iu the most Christian manner, ever since his
conversion, seven years ago. On his return to
Wellington, the governor came to me, and ex-
pressed himself as altogether astonished that
such a change could have taken place in a
barbarous people iu so short a time. I believe
that Christianity is extending itself in New
Zealand."
At a missionary meeting of native teachers,
held at Waugauui the day after Christmas,
four of them offered themselves as missionaries
to a heathen tril;e at war with the English.
On the 6th of Fcbruo.ry, 1847, they set out on
their mission. Knowing that it was at the
risk of their lives, they went directly to the
hostile chiefs, preached to them the Gospel,
and endeavored to dissuade them from their
warfare ; but on their way to the third, they
were waylaid aud murdered. Rev. Mr. Taylor
soon after visited the tribe by whom this mur-
der was committed, and had an interview with
the chief. After a number of addresses on
both sides, au agreement was made between
Mr. Taylor, iu behalf of the tribe to whom the
574
NEW-ZEALAND.
murdered mou l^elongcd, and the chief of the
tribe to ^Yhom the murderers belonged, that
they should make peace with each other ; ^[r.
T. assuring the latter that, as the former were
Christians, they would not seek revenge. But
he found some difficulty in restraining the
Christian tribes, they were so indignant at the
baseness of the act. Two other native teach-
ers oflcred to go on a mission to the same
tribe. One of them l)eing dissuaded by his
friends, replied : " What if a cauoe be upset
at sea ? Will it hinder all other canoes from
going to sea for fishing, lest they likewise
should be upset ? I shall go to Taupo, because
the object is good — to make peace." Pie did
go, with his associate, and they were well re-
ceived.
In 1849, an institution was commenced by
Eev. ^Ir. Burrows at the Waimate station, for
training up native teachers. The institution
opened with five pupils, and the hope was en-
tertained that it would prove a great blessing
to the mission.
To show the rapid growth of Christianity
in these islands, we give the following table,
showing the number of communicants in the
eastern district, from the year 1S40, when the
church consisted entirely of natives who came
from the Bay of Islands, principally as
teachers.
1840 .
. 29
1845 .
. 1484
1841 .
. 133
1846 .
. 1668
1842 .
. 451
1847 .
. 1960
1843 .
. 675
1848 .
. . 2054
1844 .
. 946
1849 .
. 2893
Here we have illustrated the fact seen in al-
most all missiQM,ry history, that wliile during
the first years^f a mission the results are
scarcely perceptible, and the prospects discour-
aging, yet, when the Gospel fairly gets a lodg-
ment in the minds of a people, however des-
perate their case might seem, its progress will
be rapid and powerful. After 20 years' labor
in New-Zealand, the number of communicants
reported was but 8, and they were all at one
station ; but here is an increase in ten years,
in one district, from 29 to 2,893 !
The Committee, in the report for 1852, state
that the native population of New-Zealand is
estimated at from 80,000 to 120,000; that
more than three-fourths of these are Protestant
Christians, and that those connected with Ro-
manists do not exceed 5,000. The rest refuse
to join any Christian party, though they have
laid aside, for the most part, their heathen prac-
tices. The number of natives connected with
the inissions of this society may be estimated
at 50,000, and of communicants between 5,000
and 6,000. And every one who is admitted to
the Lord's table undergoes a strict examina-
tion, in presence of their native teachers and
neighbors.
Since the appointment of the Bishop of New-
Zealand, the mission has been put under the
direction of a Central New-Zealand Commit-
tee, with the bishop at its head.
The Church Missionary Record for October,
1853, contains the following general view of
this mission. On the 8th of August, 1822,
Rev. William Williams, now Archdeacon of
New-Zealand, received his instructions, on his
departure for the mission. On the 6th of Au-
gust, 1853, the archdeacons son. Rev. Leonard
Williams, received the instructions of the com-
mittee on his departure for the same mission.
The instructions delivered Aug. 8, 1822, ex-
pressly stated that there was not a single Chris-
tian convert among the natives of New-Zea-
land. At the present moment, the remnant of
heathenism among them is so small as not to
interfere with their being pronounced a Chris-
tian people. A corresponding influence has
been exerted on their native character. Can-
nibalism is extinct, and the sanguinary spirit
that gladly availed itself of every pretext to
break forth in deeds of blood is laid. The
New-Zealanders have exchanged the spear
and club for the plowshare and the reaping-
hook ; and tribes which once wasted the dis-
tricts of their neighbors, are diligently em-
ployed in cultivating their own. Christian
Saljbaths and Christian ordinances are gene-
rally observed over the island, and this national
profession is inclusive of a large proportion of
genuine godliness. If it be asked by what
means this change has been accomplished, we
answer, by the preaching and teaching of
" Jesus Christ and him crucified ;" and God's
promised blessing on the same. The work has
been a rapid one. Fifteen years back, the
main portion of the island was lying in un-
broken heathenism.
The following statement, taken from a recent
munber of the " Australian and New-Zealand
Gazette," shows what has been done in a single
district :
" Fourteen years ago the natives of Otaki
were among the most dreaded classes of New-
Zealand. Their leaders were Raupcraha and
Rangihaiata, par excellence the two most blood-
thirsty men in the whole islands ; men whose
whole lives were literally spent in shedding
blood, and as literally in drinking it, for both
were determined cannibals, and gloried in what
is now the shame of their followers.
" Mark the scene at Otaki at this day. The
natives have built a church 80 feet long, 36
feet wide, and 40 feet high. Its principal
beam they dragged 12 miles from the depth
of their forests, the choicest tree therein. The
pillars were brought from the same spot, and
with the same amount of labor. The church
is lighted with lanced-shaped windows, four of
which occupy the east cud. The railing of
the communion table is elaborately carved by
the natives, and those who know what their
skill in carving is will bear us out in saying
that the tabernacle work of many^au EiiglisB
NEW-ZEALAND.
575
church is greatly inferior to that of the native
church at Otaki. For the ground on which
the church stands, the natives are indebted to
the former cannibal, Te Eauperaha, who died
a Christian.
" On the south side of the church stands the
school, equally substantial with the church
itself, and larger than the school in Welling-
ton. The instruction here given is equal to
that given in country places in England ; in
one respect superior, for the natives arc taught
music, of which they are exceedingly fond,
" looking forward to the music lesson as a
regular treat." Their teacher may not be a
Costa, but he is a native who has become
sufficiently skilled in the art, as taught at the
Bishop's College, to become the instructor of
others.
" But the native boys are widely scattered ;
and, therefore, on the Avest side of' the church,
stands a boarding-house for the boys attending
the school. The dining-hall — native work too
— is 50 feet by 25, and 15 feet high. The
building contains dormitories for 1 00 children,
who will be received in this establishment,
educated, clothed and fed. On the north side
of the church will stand a similar building for
native girls. The cost of this was defrayed by
the natives, who have also erected the whole,
with the assistance of an English carpenter.
" The school possesses a valuable estate, given
by the old cannibal chiefs. Of this estate 60
acres are cleared and thoroughly drained ; 20
acres are cropped with wheat, and another
portion with potatoes. The establishment
already numbers 70 head of cattle, four iron
plows, and four teams of oxen ; the lads being
the plowmen. Portions of the estate are let
to other natives, who pay their rent in pro-
duce, and pasture on the estate 200 head of
cattle, and 70 horses. The cost of all the
buildings is between £5,000 and £G,000, of
which the government has, at dift'erent times,
contributed £2,000 ; the remainder, as well
as materials and labor, has been found by the
natives themselves.
" One of the most enterprising patrons of
this establishment is the former savage Eangi-
haiata himself, who has survived Te Eauperaha,
his partner in the wholesale slaughter of his
species. What this slaughter was may be
judged by one instance. Where the Canter-
bury settlement now stands, 30 years ago stood
a large palt, peopled by a numerous and happy
population. An English ruffian, for hire, car-
ried the above chiefs and their forces in the
hold of his vessel to the present Lyttelton. On
the pretence of trade the natives were thrown
off their guard and became an easy prey to
Te Eauperaha and his followers, who did not
leave a man alive. The women were carried
into slavery or eaten.
" On the voyage back the ship's coppers were
used for cooking human joints, the people
being slain on board as they were wanted.
The ruffian commander of the English vessel
admitted this. Yet from those very chiefs
mentioned as the leaders of this fearful slaugh-
ter, and from their followers, have sprung the
Otaki church and schools.
" Many of our readers will remember Pira-
hawau, long the guest of Mr. Halswell, at Ken-
sington. That man was, when a youth, one
of the perpetrators of the horrible massacre we
have just spoken of. He was, while with Mr.
Halswell, educated at the British and Foreign
School, through the influence of Dr. Hodgkin,
and is now a pioneer of civilization in the re-
sponsible post of chief of the native police in
the Wellington district. The above progress
of civilization among savages is unparalleled in
history ; but those savages far surpass all
others in intellectual character. Des))ite the
former cruelties of the race toward each other,
it would be difficult to find a New-Zealander
of the superior caste — for there are two dis-
tinct races — upon whose features it is not un-
mistakably stamped that he is one of ' nature's
gentlemen.' The inferior caste are the abori-
gines of the islands, who have little in common
with their superiors beyond their cunning at
a bargain."
The following table gives the statistics of
the mission, as they appeared in the report of
the society for 1853 :
Lay
Teachers and other
NAMES OF MISPION-
AliY DISTRICTS.
■a
a
a
a
0
afi
S
Helpers.
1
'3
3
I
a
o
.a
13
"o
3
a
Kuropean.
Native.
a;
6
a
SI
o
Ec
"3
s
^
s
a
a
9-
.9
a
"
.2
§
ii
g
"cS
^
^
o
r^
h
S
tN
o
^ ■
M
^
5
m
>^
&
Northern District
1814
3
4
1
2
30
624
136
8
89
43
155
287
Middle District .
1834
9
10
4
1
53
1247
391
Eastern District .
1839
5
4
134
8
3534
423
87
5,357
Western District .
"■f'otals ....
1839
4
21
3
21
2
215
1622
124
18
380
2,080
7
3
432
8
7027
1074
33
89
43
880
155
7,624
676
NEW-ZEALAND.
Society for Propagating the Gospel in
Foreign Parts. — This Society's first mission-
ary to Xew-Zealand was sent out in 1839.
Eight are now maintained by an annual grant
of £1,000, placed at the disposal of the bishop.
Since the appointment of the bishop, the soci-
ety has paid £7,000 to meet an equal amount
given by the New-Zealand Company for the
permanent endowment of the church. This
grant has been the means of endowing three
chaplains in perpetuity.
Wesletan Missionary Society. — In the
year 1819, the Wesleyan ^Missionary Society
had a young man (Mr. Samuel Leigh) station-
ed at New South Wales. Having suffered in
his health, he was advised bv Mr. Marsden to
visit New-Zealand, which he did. He became
acquainted with the missionaries, who had
been introduced by Mr. Marsden ; saw the
natives, and witnessed many horrible scenes of
cannibalism ; and was so affected with the ap-
pearance of things as to cherish an ardent desire
to commence a "Wesleyan mission in the
country. The excellent brethren of the
Church of England supported and encouraged
him in his project. Ue returned home to
England ; obtained the sanction and authority
of the executive committee ; and in 1821 re-
turned with Mrs. Leigh for New-Zealand.
At the request of one of the most influential
chiefs, Mr. Leigh determined to fix his resi-
dence at Mercury Bay, near the river Thames,
but this design was frustrated by the outbreak
of a war, in consequence of which, he and his
excellent wife were under the necessity of re-
maining for some time at the Church Mission-
ary settlement, where they employed them-
selves in acquiri! g the language and instruct-
ing the natives, as they liad opportunity.
Mr. Leigh's sii.iplicity, courage and hardi-
hood eminently litted him for the work to
which he was called ; but mere natural resources
would have utterly failed in such scenes. Pie
had faith in his Di^•ine Master, and in his gra-
cious declaration, " Lo, I am with yt^ii alway,
even unto the end of the world." And this
was his strength and stay when human forti-
tude and endurance would have utterly failed
him. He dared their pointed muskets ; stood
undaunti d while chilis were sometimes whirled
around his head and spears were thrust close
by his side, and felt that he only lived from
hour to hour, as sustained by the invisible pow-
er of Cod. He mingled with the people in
their villages and huts ; bartered with them
for aninuil food, having been four months with-
out any ; conversed with ^thcm in the most fa-
miliar manner, and endeavored to win their
confidence as well as sound the depth of their
superstitions. At length he was joined by
the brethren 'J'urner and White, and the
whole mission party proceeded to IVungaroa,
ou the north-iviit coast, and north of the Bay
of Islands. A\hoic they were received with ap-
parent kindness by the chiet; George. This
George was a very notorious person. In the
year 1809 he had cut off the crew and passen-
gers of the " Boyd," a fine ship of five hun-
dred tons burden ; on which occasion, at least
seventy persons were murdered and feasted
upon by the blood-thirsty savages, and the
ship was burnt down to the water's edge.
From this time George had a lurking f'earof
the Europeans, though for selfish purposes he
wished to have traffic with them, even to the
extent of encouraging, in some degree, their
settlement in the country. But the vague
idea of a possible retribution overtaking him,
made him distrustful, overbearing, and violent;
and the missionaries, while endeavoring to
erect their temporary dwelling by the aid of
hired native labor, were subjected to end-
less trouble and annoyance. He came and
drove the natives away ; used ill-language to
Mr. Turner ; threatened to level the house to
the ground, and said it was his ; but all this
turbulence was to obtain some gift or gratuity.
Afterwards three spades were forcibly taken
away by some of his people. Others came in
canoes, with fencing timber for sale, which Mr.
Turner bought of them, making payment in
various articles of hardware, though almost be-
wildered by their violence and vociferation.
Another of the chiefs brought a pig for which
he had previously received payment ; but he
demanded to be paid again. Mr. Turner did
not yield at first, but afterwards gave him an
iron pot, which lie coveted, when he claimed
another article also. This was refused, and he
fell into a violent passion, dashed the pot to
j)ieces, followed Mr. Turner, who was leaving
liim, and with all the rage of a fiend pointed
his musket twice to shoot him, but was re-
strained by an invisible hand. However, he
])ushed Mr. Turner very roughly about, until
JNIr. Ilobbs, the assistant missionary came up.
He charged them with the design of making
the New-Zeal an ders slaves ; and said, the only
thing they gave him was Karakia ('' i^rayers,")
upon which he jioured the greatest contempt,
lie did not want to hear about Christ ; he
wanted muskets, powder, tomahawks, tobacco,
and the like. He then went back to the house,
and threatened to kill Mrs. Turner and the ser-
vants ; saying, he would serve the whole mis-
sion family as his people had served the crew
of the "Boyd." The maid screamed with ter-
ror, but ISIrs. Turner preserved her composure;
and when the excited savage had taken seve-
ral articles from the mission store, she took
them back from him with calm resolution, and
felt litr mind kej)t in peace, being stayed
on God. After a while the storm ceased, but
such scenes often occurred during their first
month's residence at AVangaroa. One morn-
ing the missionaries heard "that the lieads of
an adjacent tribe had killed one of their own
slaves, and were preparing to eat the bodj'.
Mr. Turner went down to the place, and found
the chiefs sitting round the fire, and apparently
NEW-ZEALAND.
577
glad to see him. After the usual salute he
went towards the fire, and found to his horror
a human being laid at length, and roasting be-
tween two logs. He told them that his heart
was very sore at such a sight ; and as guilt and
shame were evidently depicted on their coun-
tenances, he made use of the opportunity se-
verely to rebuke this enormity, warning them
of the just judgments of Almighty God.
The natives, who disliked toil, could not be
induced, even in their most friendly moods, to
build a school-house ; and therefore the mis-
sionaries were content for a while, in their
fine climate, to collect the people and their
children in the open air, and there teach them
letters, catechisms, prayers, and hymns. Nor
were their efforts fruitless; for many of the
New-Zealanders have dated their first impres-
sions from these primitive exercises. Towards
the end of 1824 the mission premises were
pretty well completed. They stood upon a
jutting point of land on the south side of a
beautiful vale, through which ran a fine ser-
pentine river of fresh water, before emptying
itself beyond into a safe and commodious har-
bor. The vale was bounded by hills and
mountains of almost every size and form, gen-
erally covered with excellent pines, many of
which were from 60 to 100 feet to the lowest
branch, and from three to six feet in diameter.
The soil of the valley was exceedingly rich.
The missionaries, having purchased the land,
had built a good wooden house, with brick
chimney — the bricks having been made on
the premises, and the lime obtained by cal-
cining cockle-shells. They cleared about three
acres of ground, enclosed it with a log fence,
sowed it with wheat and barley, and likewise
set out a good garden with vegetables and fruit
trees : all these were for the mission families.
Besides this the missionaries had, with their
own hands, at two of the principal villages,
raised buildings to the honor and service of
God, and for the purposes of his worship. By
this time the natives began to listen with at-
tention ; the children were learning to read in
their own language ; and Mrs. Turner's girls
began to make progress in needle-work. The
little settlement was visited by Messrs. Bennet
end Tyerman, the deputation of the Loxdox
Missionary Society, by whom the brethren
were greatly cheered. The missionaries had
been instrumental in quelling an outbreak of
jealousy on the part of the natives in their
ship, while she was lying off the shore, and
thereby saving their lives. Prospects of use-
fulness seemed to be opening in a very pleas-
ing manner, when, all at once, a dark cloud
gathered around them. A fresh scries of na-
tive outbreaks took place, which ended in the
total destruction of the mission premises and
property ; and the suspension for a while of
tiie mission itself.
About this time an English ship, the Mer-
cury, had been taken and plundered by the
3t
natives of the Bay of Islands, which was after-
wards rescued and conducted out to sea by
two of the missionaries. The natives were
aijprehensive of retribution from other English
vessels, and this made them jealous of the mis-
sionaries. The chief, George, was now dan-
gerously ill, and likely to die. His father had
been killed in the affair of the Boyd ; and it
was reported that George had requested the
natives of Hokianga, in case of his death, to
come and strip the Wangaroa Wesleyan mis-
sionaries of every thing they possessed, if not
to kill them, as utu, or " payment," for the death
of his father, for which he said he had never
received satisfaction. The death of a chief is
a day of reckoning, when all the quarrels of
his life have to be avenged. These sources of
uneasiness made the more wicked natives very
overbearing and annoying. They broke over
the mission fence and committed petty de-
predations on the property ; and on being rea-
soned with, proceeded to acts of violence against
Mr. Turner and his assistants, assaulting him
with spears, and menacing his life. But God
protected him.
The Church missionaries evinced the live-
liest sympathy with their Wesleyan brethren ; '
and with true Christian love, the Eev. Messrs.
Williams and Kemp came over, and urged
that at least Mrs. Turner and the little ones
should be removed to one of their settlements
for a season. They were removed accord-
ingly to Mr. Kemp's, at Kerikeri, where they
received every kindness and attention ; but
nothing could induce Mr. Turner and his fel-
low-laborers to forsake their posts. For a
time their circumstances were most critical ;
but they endured hardness as good soldiers,
and repaid evil with good ; till at length the
old chief, George, sunk under his malady, and
died. The people upon whom had devolved
the task of exacting satisfaction for the death
of his father, according to his last will, assem-
bled to deliberate, and for that purpose ap-
proached the mission premises ; but, after they
had spent some time in mutual conference,
they agreed to accept the blood of a bird as a
sufficient compensation. One of the party
then jumped over into the mission premises,
bore off a duck, and killed it as a sacrifice to
the manes of the chief's father. Mrs. Turner
and the children now returned to Wangaroa,
and it was hoped all would be well ; but very
soon far worse troubles arose. The valley of
Wangaroa was suddenly invaded by Shungee,
one of the most sanguinary New-Zealand
chieftains. On the 4th of January, 1827,
while the mission family were engaged in do-
mestic worship, they received intelligence of
his approach. For several days all was alarm
and confusion. Canoes began to drop down
the river, bearing the natives to the various
scenes of conflict. Early on the morning of
the 10th a party of natives were descried by
the servant, approaching the mission-house
578
NEW-ZEALAND.
The missionaries had hardly time to put on
their clothes, when twenty savages, armed
with muskets, spears, hatchets, &c., entered
the mission-grouud, and were proceeding to-
wards the house. It was demanded of them
what they wanted. Oro, the chief, said, " We
are come to make a fight ; your chief has fl.ed,
your people have left the place, you will be
stripped of all your property before noon ;
therefore instantly begone." At the same time
he gave orders to his party to commence the
work of spoliation. They fired several guns
as a signal, and others came and joined them.
Mr. Turner began to prepare for quitting
the place, though he lingered to the last ex-
tremity, from his reluctance to leave a spot
upon which he had bestowed so much labor
and care. The native youths who had been
under the instruction of the missionaries were
much alarmed, and urged a speedy departure,
begging that they might be allowed to accom-
pany the family. At 6 o'clock in the morn-
ing, when all hope of remaining in safety was
extinct, the sorrowful and affrighted household
began to move, saving scarcely anything from
the wreck but the clothes they wore, and a
> change or two for the children. The company,
apart from the native young people, consisted
of Mr. and Mrs. Turner, three children, the
youngest of whom was an infant five weeks
old ; Luke Wade, the assistant, and his wife ;
Mr. Hobbs, and Miss Davis, a young lady
from the Church settlement of Paihia, who
had come to spend a few weeks on a visit.
Their flight was most perilous, through scrub
and fern, drenched with heavy dew, and
obliged to ford the river with the helpless
children in their arms. Behind were blood-
thirsty savages, who were only restrained from
murder by their selfish fears ; and all around
were hovering hostile parties, who, from vari-
ous motives, were quite ready to exterminate,
in this time of excitement, the mission house-
hold ; but, looking to God for help and deliv-
erance, the fugitives directed their steps to-
ward Kerikeri, the nearest Church settlement.
As they went on they were met by one of their
own principal men, and also a very friendly
old chief, IVare ISlui, from the Bay of Islands.
To the latter Mr. Turner made his appeal for
help and protection, to which he immediately
responded, aud all the group moved on under
his guidance. Twice more they crossed the
river, and on turning a sharp bend of the
channel, all at once they came upon a formid-
able body of fighting natives from the Hokian-
ga, orderly, compact, and ready for action,
variously armed, but chiefly with muskets and
bayonets. They were headed by several chiefs,
the principal of whom wtus Patimic, long
known to be most friendly to Europeans. He
caught a glance of the missionaries, and loudly
called upun his people to stop, lie then in-
vited them to sit down, and came with several
of his principal companions and rubbed noses
with the fugitives in token of friendship and
good-will. After some words of explanation
between the several chiefs, they I'ormed a
guard around the mission party, and then
commanded the armed band to march forward
to the other side of the river ; thus another
peril was passed. The travelers then plunged
into the woods. Soon after they were met by
a party from Paihia, consisting of the Rev.
H. Williams, Messrs. Davis, Richey, and a
dozen natives. The Apostle Paul at " the
Appii Forum and the Three Taverns," could
hardly have more fervently thanked God and
gladly taken courage; than the Wesleyan mis-
sionaries here. From these excellent persons,
and at Kerikeri, where they soon arrived, they
received every kindness that sympathy and
Christian brotherhood could suggest. On
Thursday, Jan. 17, they removed to the Paihia
settlement, where they remained until the cap-
tain of the ship " Rosanna," hearing of the
disasters of the mission party, most kindly
offered them a passage to Sydney ; and thus
they removed to the colo-ny, and for a while
the mission was suspended. While they were
sheltered at Paihia, the Ilokianga party, whom
they had met on the 10th, proceeded to Wan-
garoa, came in conflict with the plunderers at
the mission-house, who belonged to Shungec's
people, drove them away with savage fury,
and seized upon the remainder of the booty
themselves ; burned the house and barn, with
the wheat crop in straw, to ashes ; killed the
cattle, goats, and poultry ; and, worst of all,
the body of Mrs. Turner's infant child, which
had died and been buried there, they dug up
for the purpose of obtaining the blanket or
wrapper in which they supposed the tender
babe had been buried, and left the cherished
remains of this little one to moulder on the sur-
face amid the other monuments of this sad and
desolating outbreak.
Patuone, the chief who interposed on be-
half of Mr. Turner's family, and shielded them
from native violence as they fled from Wan-
garoa, seems never to have been easy at- the
removal of the Wesleyan missionaries. To-
wards the latter end of the year 1827, he ear-
nestly invited them to return ; and they, not
wishing to entertain the thought of finally
abandoning the country, very willingly accept-
ed the invitation ; and in January, 1828, we
find them establishsd at Mangungu, on the
river llukianga, in Patnouc's district. This
locality was selected in mutual council with
the Church missionaries, and purchased and
paid for to the satisfaction of the natives. The
soil was suitable for the production of such
articles as were needed ; and a vessel of 500
tons might lie opposite within 100 yards of the
premises.
So far this mission had been one of sorrow
and discouragement. Ten years of hard toil >n
and danger "had been passed through, and
much money expended, and yet up to the year
NEW ZEALAND.
579
1830, there seemed to bo no visible results,
But the faith of the missionaries was unshak-
en, and they were resolved to persevere. AVe
now come to a turu of affairs. The Gospel
day began to dawn, aud the glorious light has
been brighteuiug ever since. During the year
just mentioned, the natives had narrowly
watched the brethren, keenly scrutinized their
temper and conduct, and become convinced
that they were real friends, who only sought to
do them good. They now began to hear in-
struction with great attention, and to renounce
their superstitions. One of the missionaries
writes. May 26th, 1834 : " On the preceding
Sabbath the native chapel was crowded to ex-
cess, and great numbers had to sit outside, all
panting for the Word of Life. Such was the
desire to get there in the evening, that they
almost trampled on each other, aud some of
them had come in canoes from places forty
miles distant, and anxiety for salvation ap-
peared to possess a great proportion of this in-
teresting multitude. Their earnest singing,
prayers, attention to their classes, and other
ordinances of religion, left no doubt on the
minds of the missionaries as to their sincerity.
In reverential behavior in the house of God
they were a pattern even to Europeans ; al-
most every Saturday some eminent stranger
would arrive, in order to be ready for worship
on the Sabbath, and would there profess his
attachment to Christianity ; wherever mission-
aries went on errands of mercy to the sur-
rounding villages, the natives were all ready
to receive them ; aud it was manifest that a
glorious work was breaking forth in New-
Zealand."
Several chiefs and other natives had declar-
ed in favor of Christianity. Tawai and Miti,
the former one of the most celebrated and suc-
cessful warriors in the land, with some old
gray-headed cannibals, were sitting "at the
feet of Jesus," anxious to learn and ready to
do the will of God. Various alterations had
now taken place in the mission establishment.
Mr. Hobbs had been removed by the com-
mittee for a while, to the Friendly Islands, to
strengthen the work there. But Mr. Whitely
and Mr. Wallis, with their wives, had been
sent out to New-Zealand to join in occujiyiug
those gracious openings which now seemed so
numerous and promising ; and these were
joined in 1836 by Mr. N. Turner, who return-
ed from Van Dieman's land to the scene of his
former labors and sufferings. In 1836 and
1837, Mr. and Mrs. Woon and Mr. and Mrs.
Butler were respectively appointed. A print-
ing-press was employed, under the manage-
ment of Mr. Woon, in supplying the mission
with Ijooks for circulation.
At this time native teachers were extensive-
ly employed, so far as their gifts and graces
qualifled them for the work, initiating mission-
ary operations in the interior aud along the
coast. They were visited by the brethren at
the head stations of Mangunga, Newark and
Kaipara, as often as possible, and were thus
more fully instructed in the way of the Lord.
No less than five deputations came to Man-
gunga and Kaipara, from the south, to request
missionaries, bearing tidings that the natives
had already built themselves several chapels,
and begun regularly to assemble and worship
God, according to their best knowledge.
In 1839, an attempt was made to pass
through the British Parliament a measure for
the colonization of New-Zealand. The mis-
sionaries of the Church and Wesleyan Mis-
sionary Societies, believing that some of the
provisions in this measure would compromise
the character of England, by violating the in-
dependence of the New-Zealauders, and prove
detrimental to the labors of the missionaries,
earnestly entreated the committees of those
societies to petition the Parliament against
that bill.
In 1840, the Wesleyan Society sent six ad-
ditional missionaries to New-Zealand, in the
missionary ship Triton, to strengthen the older
stations, and to answer some of those calls for
new stations.
The Rev. John Bumhij was one of this rein-
forcement. Having been eminently useful in
home circuits, he offered himself for the mis-
sionary work ; and in March, 1839, landed in
New-Zealand, where he labored with great
zeal, diligence and enterprise, until June 26,
1840, when he was drowned by the upsetting
of a canoe in the Bay of Thames. His mis-
sionary career was short, but laborious and
self-denying. He was the first Wesleyan min-
ister whose life had fallen a sacrifice in the
New-Zealand mission.
When the New-Zealand mission was com-
menced at Wangaroa, there was no written or
printed book in that language. In a compar-
atively short period, however, the missionaries
were able to hold conversations with the peo-
ple, and to form schools for the instruction of
the children ; and they were cheered by the
effects of their labors soon becoming apparent
among both young and old. In 1842, the fol-
lowing works had issued from the mission
press : 5,000 Scripture lessons ; 3,000 copies
of an elementary school-book ; 6,700 cate-
chisms, and prayers and hymns. At this pe-
riod, the missionaries occupied 13 stations ;
there were 3,259 persons in church-fellowship,
and 4,000 children in the schools. The Brit-
ish and Foreign Bible Society had also sent
out 15,000 copies of the New-Zealand Testar
ment from England. However, neither the
liberality of friends at home, nor the labors of
the mission press, could keep pace with the
progress of the natives, and the increasing de-
mand for teachers and books. The natives
were also rapidly adopting the manners and
habits of civilized life. Many of the chiefs
appeared dressed like gentlemen, and sup-
ported the character by their behavior.
680
NEW-ZEALAND.
About the middle of 1842, the Rev. Dr.
Selwyn arrived as Bishop of New-Zealand.
As he was known to possess " High Church
principles," the missionaries, especially the
Wesleyans, foreboded evil from the possible
rise of new controversies in the infant commu-
nity. These forebodings were too soon real-
ized ; for the bishop began to teach and en-
force the doctrines of baptismal regeneration
and apostolical succession, as understood and
explained by the High Church party ; thereVjy
casting discredit upon all ministers not epis-
copally ordained, and by implication denying
the validity especially of the pastoral acts of
the Wesleyan missionaries. This was a seri-
ous hindrance to the work of God. The mis-
sionaries of the Wesleyan Society and the
Church brethren had labored together hither-
to, in the utmost harmony and love ; and it
was with the greatest reluctance that the Wes-
leyan missionaries were compelled to act on
the defensive, against the hostility of that
church which the bishop represented. The
Great Head of the Church had put his seal
upon their labors, and they could turn to
thousands of converted New-Zealauders, res-
cued from cannibalism and sin, and say, " Ye
are our epistles." As the Wesleyan flock was
disturbed and scattered by these dissensions,
the Rev. H. H. Hanson Turton, at Taranaki,
deemed it his duty to address a spirited, yet
Christian remonstrance to Dr. Selwyn on the
subject, in three letters, published some time
afterward in one of the country newspapers.
There was no great amount of sympathy with
this cxclusivism, however, in the colony gen-
erally ; and as mutual difficulties multiplied,
Dr. Selwyn acquired juster views of the Wes-
leyan cause, and these ill-judged and divisive
proceedings were gradually abated ; not, how-
ever, without Nveakening that blessed bond of
attachment and respect which had formerly
united both societies.
On the 30tli of March 1842, the Rev. John
Waterhouse, of Hobart Town, the General Su-
perintendent, was summoned to his eternal
rest. His last sickness was brought on. by
exposure to the heavy rains of Van Dieman's
Land ; but his death was eminently edifying
and triumphant.
In Kaipara, two circumstances of a most
gratifying character have lately transpired,
both illustrating the value of Christian missions.
On occasion of the distressing shipwreck of a
vessel belonging to the French navy, nearly
200 persons were cast naked and destitute upon
the shores of New-Zealand, about thirty miles
to the north of Kaipara Heads. They con-
structed temporary huts upon the beach, and
sent out a party in quest of help, which,
after two days, fell in with a few natives from
Okriro, who received them kindly, and encour-
aged them to send for the main body of sufferers
to refresh themselves at the Christian village.
Accordingly they came, and received from a
people, who a few years before would have
murdered and perhaps eaten them, a kind and
Christian welcome. The Union Jack waa
hoisted on the approach of the party, and the
houses, the blankets, and the provisions of tho
natives were placed at their service for about
ten days, until arrangements could be made
for their removal. For this hospitality they
neither asked nor desired a recompense : but
the Lieutenant-Governor of New-Zealand,
knowing how largely their winter stores had
been encroached upon by this unexpected de-
mand, gave them his high commendation, and
a handsome present likewise. It is hoped and
believed that the unfortunate Frenchmen woitld
carry with them to Tahiti a practical lesson of
the value of Protestant missionary labors.
Nor is it only for the bodies of their fellow-
men that these newly reclaimed savages have
learned to care. Concern for their own souls
has taught them the value of the souls of
others ; and their own experience of Gospel
blessings has made them solicitous for the
evangelization of the vrorld. Few missionary
documents possess a higher interest for the
thoughtful mind than a narrative forwarded
by Mr. Bullers, of a missionary meeting held
at this place. About 300 natives were as-
sembled. The Lord's Supper was celebrated
on the Lord's day, and a love-feast on Tuesday
morning concluded the services. Monday was
occupied by the missionary meeting, at which
16 native speakers bore their testimony to the
value of the Gospel, and urged on their breth-
ren the duty and privilege of contributing to
the Missionary Society, A collection of £13
bore witness that they did not plead in vain.
But the true value of the meeting must not be
estimated by the collection. The strong sense,
the cogent arguments, the clear perception of
Christian duty, the union of purpose, and the
grateful acknowledgment of their obligations
to British Christians, which marked the pro-
ceedings of the meeting, gave to it a high im-
portance, both tvs a trophy of the past and a
pledge of the future.
In 1845 and 1846, the gracious spirit of
awakening that spread over all the Wesleyan
stations in the South Sea, visited also the
stations in New-Zealand ; and a great exten-
sion of the Redeemer's kingdom was the con-
sequence. The Wesleyan Institution for train-
ing a native ministry was established in 1844,
making the second of these institutions iu
New-Zealand. And about the same time, a
college and seminary w'erc also established at
Auckland, the capital, for the purpose of edu-
cating the children of the missionaries who
are stationed in Australia, New-Zealand, and
the islands of the South Sea.
Neat and commodious chapels were raised
in all the peopled localities around the princi-
pal stations, and thus those stations became
circuits, as iu England ; native young men, ia
great numbers, as soon as their piety and iu-
NEW-ZEALAND.
581
TABUT.AR VIEW.
Stnpiipu; 'liiqs
s^utipaatlV JO -o^j
^-^^S
OirtOOOOOOOOOOOOSiOO
CC -^ Ol CO t- lO lO CO -^ O O 05 t- c-i C-* 1^
■3<O^lOOOOOOO-*Tl*OOi0C0
O T^ CO CJ t— * DO vr^ tii o CO o ^o iri i(^ t^ .'1
C^ 1-1 ■* r< C) >?)
1-1 » C-l !N C<
•sexag
q)oq JO sJBioqag
-.(v(j JO jaqiunj\j
■stooqog
-^urr 10 .loqiiui y
■soxag qjoq
JO SJBloqo^-qiBq
-qBg JO jaqtun^sj
•SlooqOfi-qivq
-qB^ JO aaqtunsj
•liiHSjaqraaf^
m li-'iJJ, no
saoqiu><j\; qj.uiqj
|-.jju,.i.io,iY iiin;
TIM JO Jaquinjsi
•^ CO C^ C-l 1-1 C^ I
g8SS§g5?22rf??o.^c?>o
■^ (M CO to o Tf r-1 r
«cooooocot--'*co--*iiocoy?(D-
■*i-ll-li-l C^i-l<Ni-l .
• O 00 t- CO l^ -^
<M -^COC-tiMCOi-li-lOCOCoJjrtS
3 6
J r- ^ o Oi • o t- c-l o r
•r-l 1-1 ■^ CO (N CO 1-1
c«00:00-^i-lt-OCOir3t-lO'OI
^ ^ CO CI CO C^ fH 00 O 00 o
•ujutijsissy
PUE fc-0U«UOlSS!It '^i-llHr-lr-lr-lrHr-lT
I IM i-J rH r-l rH 1-1 r
saouXtl-SuiqoBajj
JOqjn JO Jaqtuu^
t^iC*JJC-100CiOU5-^OC0i-lC0 'C-JOI
•natlBqj U5 CO <o c .
JO joqiun^i^
JO-^CI-^t^rHClOlSeOCi
73
o
^^8
Oh
!* J 9 c5 rt Wr-'""Si:
< 01 CO -* lO » !■- t» Ol O rH C) CO ■*' in !D
telligence were of an order to warrant such an
arrangement, were sent forth among their hea-
then countrymen, to lead them to the know-
ledge of the truth. An awful earthquake
which liappened in Wellington, October 14,
1848, destroying some lives and much property,
was the means, in the Divine hand, of greatly
deepening the serious impressions.
Such are the present results and aspect of
the New-Zealand mission. It is a territory
that has been won for Christ by the united
exertions of the Wesleyan and Church of Eng-
land inissiouaries. To the Weslcyans espe-
cially, it has been a sphere of unparalleled toil,
carried on for 33 years, at the cost of several
thousands a year, and yet yielding glorious
fruit. The fields are " white unto the harvest,"
and Christian reapers are filling their arms
with the sheaves.
_ It yet remains to be seen whether the abo-
rigines will be borne down and lost under the
surging tide of colonial immigration, or whe-
ther they will stand like a rock amid it all.
Native tribes have generally disappeared where
mere aggressive or commercial colonization
has taken place ; but here, where cupidity has
received a check, where the clear lines of right
have been revealed, where the native mind has
been elevated, and the trading spirit overawed
by a more than usual amount of Christian in-
fluence and appliances, the results may prove
more cheering. Wise and experienced men,
such as the senior missionaries, give it as their
opinion, that the slave population of New-
Zealand, the lowest in the physical scale, will
die off and become extinct ; while the chieftain
families, changed in their habits, and raised by
religion and educational trainmg, will be pre-
served and increase, partly, and lor a -while, as
a separate people, and then perhaps, ultimately,
as commingled with the Europeans of the
country.
Their euphonious but poor language is now
impressed with great Gospel conceptions, with
words that shall stir the hearts of generations
yet to come. With them the Sabbath is " a
delight and honorable ;" and, notwithstanding
the number of those who still " walk according
to the course of the world," there is nothing to
hinder the ordinary progress of the Gospel '
through this fine and interesting country, or to
prevent it from becoming a fair, prosperous,
and Christian laud. — Barrett's Life of Bamby ;
Wesleyan Notices, aval Annual Reports. — Kev.
W. BUTLEE.
GP^NERAL TABULAR VIEW.
* No returns.
SOCIKl'IES.
2
21
It)
37
12;
'3
o
o
1
Church Mis^. Soc. ..
Wcslej'au Miss. Soc
Totals
31
20
440
24
7,027
4,310
ii;.
71
7,724
6,719
51
-Ifi.'
11 34u
184
14,443
582
NEYOOR— N. A. INDIANS.
NEYOOR : A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society, at the southern extremity of
Hindostan, in the Travancore district.
NGATANGAI : A station of the London
Missionary Society on the island of Rarotonga,
one of the Hervey Islands.
NGABANTANG : A station of the Wes-
levan Missionary Society in Sierra Leone.
'NG AMOTU : A station of the Wesleyans
in New-Zealand.
NICOMEDIA : An out-station of the
American Board among the Armenians, situ-
ated at the head of a gulf bearing the same
name, stretching out from the eastern extrem-
ity of the sea of Marmora, about 50 miles
east of Constantinople. It was formerly the
capital of Bythinia, and was also the residence
of Constantine, and several of his successors,
at least during a part of each year. Here
Dioclesian also held his court, when he issued
his first edicts against the Christians, and here
the horrid work of persecution first began.
Population 30,000 ; of which 6,000 are Arme-
nians.
NINE : One of the New Hebrides, where
is a station of the London Missionary Society.
NINGPO : One of the five ports in China
open to European and American commerce,
situated in lat. 29o 55' N., and long. 121° 22'
E., on the river Min, about 12 miles from the
sea. Several societies have missions there.
(See China.)
NINA TUBU-TABA (KEPPEL'S IS-
LAND) : One of the remote out-islands of
the Friendly Isles, occupied by the Wesleyans
with native teachers.
NINA-FO-OU (SAVAGE ISLAND) :
This island is about 130 miles from Keppel's
Island. It is a cinder island, every portion of
it bearing marks of fire. It is occupied by
native teachers, as a station of the Wesleyan
Societv.
NISBET BATH : The seat of an exten-
sive district in Namacjualand, South Africa,
occupied by a mission of the Wesleyan Mis-
sionarv Society.
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS : The
American Indians of this day may be divided
into two classes, — those who arc now partially
civilized, and live in a somewhat settled state,
and those who are yet savage. They are all
the remnants of once powerful nations. Some
of them arc found in the western part of the
State of New York, some in ]\lichigan, but
the larger portion of them live in the territory
west of the Mississippi river, known as the
"Indian reservation," a territory lying west of
the States of Arkansas and IMissouri, between
Red river on the south, and Platte river on
the north, being about 500 miles in length from
north to soutli, and about three hundred miles
in breadth from east to west. Here are col-
lected together the remnants of the Chickasaws,
Choctaws, Creek?, Seminoles, Cherokeos, Osa-
ges, AVyandots, I'utawatomics, Wcas, Pianke*
shaws, Peorias, Kaskaskias, Ottawas, Chippe-
ways, Shawnees, Kansas, Delawares, Kickapoos,
lowas, Foxes and Sacs, Otoes, and ]\Iissouries.
Immediately north of the reservation, the Oma-
has, and some other tribes have an uncertain
abode. And as we look up to the Minnesota,
and to the north and west of that territory, we
shall find the Sioux, the Ojibwas, and others.
And further west, to the Rocky mountains, and
over that barrier to Oregon, and then to Cali-
fornia, and out through the northern and west-
ern parts of Texas, we shall encounter many
savage tribes where property and life would
not yet be safe. Most of the Indian tribes
now living on the reservation, once lived east
of the Mississippi river, and some of them in
the Atlantic States. It was supposed that the
interests of these States demanded tlieir remo-
val, and it was urged, and finally carried by
the General Government. It was a hard case,
and the right of it has been very justly ques-
tioned. It has, however, been overruled for
good.
MISSIONS.
Presbyterian Board.^ — An Indian Mission,
under direction of the Presbyterian Church, Mas
commenced in 1833, by the " Western Foreign
Missionary Society," and established among the
Weas, a small band, of not over two or three
hundred persons, who occupied a part of the re-
servation, near its northern boundary. The Rev.
Joseph Kerr, and the Rev. Wells Bushnell. and
their wives, with several teachers, both male and
female, labored here in a faithful and sell-deny-
ing manner, and much good was accomplished.
But another denomination established a mission
in a small kindred tribe near by, and it was
thought expedient to relinciuish this. At the
present time the Board of Foreign Missions of
the Presbyterian Church have missions among
the Chickasaws, Choctaws. Creeks, and Semi-
noles, who occupy the southern part of the re-
servation ; the lowas and Sacs, near the north-
ern ])art ; the Omalias and Otoes. in the vicinity
of Council BInfts, on the Missouri river ; and
some bands of the Chippewas nnd Ottawas, on
the Grand and Little Traverse Bays, in Michi-
gan, 'i'lie Iowa and Sac Mission is the oldest
on this list, having been established in 1835.
At that time the lowas numbered about 1100
.«ouls, and the Sacs about 500. They have
decreased since that, owing princii)ally to
intemperance, which has grown upon them from
their intercourse Avith the whites, from whom
they are separated only by the I^lissouri river.
Still the missioiniries have prosecuted tlieir
work among this people, and done good, though
in the face of great discouragements, Tlie
language of the lowas was reduced to writing
in 1843, when a grannnar was prepared, por-
tions of the Scriptures translated, a liymn-book.
and some elementary works prejjared and ])ub-
lished. It is deemed however nu)st expedient
to teach the natives English at once, and thus
give them access to the whole range of our
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
583
literature. In 1846 a boarding-scliool was
established, which continues in operation.
Next in date is the mission among the
Chippewa and Ottawa tribes, in the State of
Michigan. This mission was commenced in
1838, by the Rev. Peter Dougherty. A church
was organized iu 184.3, to which over thir^j'
natives have been admitted. Two stations are
now occupied by this mission, one at Great
Traverse bay, where a small boarding-school is
established, and the ot^er at Little Traverse
bay, where there is a flourishing day-school. A
further notice of this mission will be found at
the conclusion of this article.
The mission among the Creek Indians was
next established, and was commenced in 1842,
by the Eev. Eobert M. Loughridge. The
Creek Indians numljcr over 20,000 souls, and
the district of country which they occupy lies
in the Indian Territory, directly west of the
State of Arkansas, between the Choctaw dis-
trict on the south, and the Cherokee on the
north. Missionaries had been sent among this
people in former years, by dififei-ent societies,
but their labors not being altogether accept-
able they left the country, and for several
years no missionary had resided in the Creek
nation. Mr. Loughridge spent some months
in 1841 and 1842, in visiting the leading
chiefs of the nation, explaining fully his object,
and securing their confidence and coopera-
tion. The result was a written agreement
signed by both parties, in which the chiefs
agreed on their part to allow him and others
free access to the people, to teach them, and to
preach the Gospel, granting lands for all ne-
cessary mission premises, &c., Mr. Loughridge
engaging for himself and others, that they
would not interfere with the government schools,
nor with the national affairs. Mr. Loughridge
then returned, and in the early part of 1843,
Avcnt on with his wife. He was most cordially
received by the natives, and was soon settled in
his new home. A church was organized in
January, 1845, and a boarding-school was
established in the same year. A second station
was formed in 1848, and a large building
erected for a boarding-school. The whole mis-
sionary work in the Creek nation is in success-
ful progress.
The mission among the Choctaws is next in
date. The Choctaw people are perhaps more
like a Christian nation than any other Indian
tribe. Missions were commenced among them
by the American Board in 1818, while they
were living east of the Mississippi river, and
one of their early missionaries, the Rev. Al-
fred Wright, a Presbyterian, has but recently
gone to his rest. The progress of civilization
among the Choctaws, though somewhat hin-
dered for a time by their removal, has advanced
until they have now a regular civil government,
a written constitution and laws, courts of jus-
tice, and schools. The mission of the Presby-
terian Board to this nation grew out of an
offer by their National Council to transfer to
the Board an important school called " Spen-
cer Academy," which was established in 1842,
and the transfer was effected in the summer of
1845. In the spring of the next year a mis-
sionary and his wife, with one female teacher,
commenced operations there. In 1847, a
church was organized there, and both church
and school are in successful operation.
The mission among the Otoes and Omahas
stands next in date. The Otoes are divided
into six bands, and number about 1,160. The
Omahas number about 100 less. It was in
1846, when the Rev. Edmund McKinney and
his wife removed from the Iowa station to the
vicinity of Council Bluffs, on the Missouri
river, and commenced a school for the children
of these tribes, with some scattering Pawnees,
Puncas, and half breeds. A building for the
mission premises was completed in 1848. It is
yet the day of small things with this mission,
but not on that account to be despised.
A mission among the Semiuoles was com-
menced in 1848, and is an off-shoot from the
Creek mission, in which territory the Semi-
noles now reside. Mr. Loughridge visited this
tribe in 1846, and the experiment of a mission
was attempted. There are many obstacles in
the way, especially as this feeble remnant of a
once powerful and warlike tribe consider them-
selves more deeply injured by the white man
than most others. At the same time, they
have no school funds, and are generally poor
and discouraged. One fact, however, is pecu-
liarly encouraging : one missionary teacher,
Mr. John D. Bems, is himself a Seminole In-
dian, and has been laboring among his people
faithfully for several years.
The Chickasaw mission is the last that has
been planted among the Indians by the Pres-
byterian Board. This mission was resolved
upon in 1849, but did not go into operation
until 1852. Two stations in this tribe are oc-
cupied, but the results can hardly be looked
for at this early day.
The complete returns of these Indian mis-
sions, as stated in the Report of 1854, are : —
8 ministers of the Gospel ; 58 male and female
assistant missionaries, of whom four are na-
tives— teachers, farmers, the wives of mission-^
aries, &c. ; 96 communicants ; and 517 schol-
ars, mostly in boarding-schools.
For the support of these missions, the sum
of §43,457 was expended in the year ending
May 1, 1853, a part of which was on account
of the buildings for the Chickasaw and Otta-
wa boarding-schools. The sum of §23,240-
was received from the government in aid of
the schools, being mostly moneys appropriated'
to this object by the Indians, out of their an-
nuities. This leaves a little more than §20,000'
as the amount furnished by the Presbyterian.
Church to the cause of missions among the
Indians.
The foregoing narrative shows that the
584
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
boarding-school system has been largely adopt-
ed in these missions. It is a system that has
some drawbacks, and yet greater advantages.
It involves a considerable expenditure of
money, for buildings, the support of teachers,
food and clothing of scholars. This consider-
ation will always prevent the establishment of
such schools in all tribes alike. Some of the
tribes are very poor ; others are not -willing to
appropriate their annuities for this or any other
good ubject. Xo part of the missionary -work,
moreover, requires so large an amount of care
and labor, on the part both of the missionaries
and of the executive officers of the Board, in
providing supplies of every kind for large
families, living far in the interior of the west-
ern wilderness. It is no light matter to fur-
nish all the different kinds of food, clothing,
and domestic service required by a household
of 150 inmates, at a place far distant from
markets, stores, and the usual conveniences of
civilized life. Nor is it a small thing to keep
all the accounts of sucli purchases, with a
voucher for every item, however minute. Yet
with all this complex and difficult labor, and
with the more serious discouragements of the
impaired health of many engaged in the work,
and of too frequent changes of scholars and
teachers, the system of boarding-school instruc-
tion is nevertheless attended with the greatest
beneGt to the Indians — making it well worthy
of adoption, as a part of missionary agency.
The scholars in these institutions are trained
up under Christian influence, instruction, and
exanifjle. They live in the missionary house-
hold, and are clothed, plainly but comfortably,
after our fashion. The boys are taught to
work in the garden and on the farm ; the girls
to knit, sew, and attend to the common duties
of housekeeping. They are taught the Eng-
lish language, and the usual branches of com-
mon-school learning. They are assembled
morning and evening at family worship, and
on the Habbath they unite together in the ser-
vices of the sanctuary. 'llms they are in
training for the duties of life under the hap-
piest circumstances. Many of them have al-
ready become the sul)jecls of divine grace. A
few are already looking to the work of the
Christian ministry ; some are already, and
others probably will be teachers ; others still
will occupy posts of inllucnce in tlieir respec-
tive tribes, as magistrates or council-men. Tlie
boys will grow up to revere the laws and in-
stitutions of civilized society ; the girl.'*, to e.x-
crt a hallowed influence in the domestic circle
as Christian daughters, wives and mothers. In
all this we see principles or elements of civili-
zation of a high order — the beginnings of a
Christian life in the wilderncRs — the desert
blossoming as the rose.
The liiipjiy influence of ^hcse missions on the
Indians may Ije shown by a'li example. Fifteen
years ago, the Kev. I'eter Dougherty, on leav-
ing the seminary at Priucetoa, went among the
Chippewa and Ottawa Indians in the neighbor-
hood of Grand Traverse Bay, on Lake Michi-
gan. He found them living in a sad condition,
dwelling in small bark huts or wigwams, poor-
ly clad, and deriving a precarious subsistence
from fishing, making sugar from the maple
tree, and the cultivation of little fields of Indian
corn by the women. They were exposed, more-
over, to the pernicious arts of the whisky-trader,
who reaped the greater part of their small an-
nuities. They were thus fast traveling on the
road to extinction.
Mr. Dougherty mingled freely with this poor
people, and gained their confidence and good-
will, lie built a small log-cabin for himself
and another for a school-house, doing most of
the work with his own hands. He then tatght
the children during the week, and preached to
as many as could be collected on the Sabbath.
After some mouths he returned to his friends
on a short visit, and was accompanied back by
his wife, who did not hesitate at the call of
duty, to exchange the comforts of refined Chris-
tian society for a home among the children of
the forest. Gradually an impression was made
on the minds of the Indians. One family after
another was induced to build small cabins of
rough logs, near the dwelling of their mission-
ary ; little fields were opened and fenced ; fruit
trees were planted, and vegetables raised in
the gardens. A suitable church building was
erected, with a sweet-toned bell to call the wor-
hipers to the house of God. The unwonted
sight of a Christian village appeared on the
shores of the bay.
The means of grace administered in this hum-
ble village w(>re followed by the influences of
the Holy Spirit ; hopeful conversions among
his Indian congregation cheered the heart of
the missionary. A church was organized iu
1S43, and to its communion, at different times,
over thirty of the Indians have been admitted
after receiving Christian baptism. Some of
these have finished their earthly course, in the
enjoyment of a good hope through grace, and
they arc now at rest with Jesus. Surely r.o
doubt can be entertained as to the benign in-
fluence of this work of faith and labor of love.
Its fruits are beautiful here, and in the world
of glory they will l)e forever perfect.
The christianiz.it ion of these Indians was fol-
lowed by their civilization. Of this a marked
proof is now to be mentioned. The land occu-
pied by the settlement on Grand Traverse Bay
had been ceded by the Indians in former years
to the Government, and, being a reservation,
it was not yet in market. Mr. Dougherty's
Indians, as they may be called, in distinction
from the unevangelizcd jiart of thesame bands,
were now anxious to obtain land for ])ernianent
pos.session and improvement, so that they might
have a settled (lwelling-]>lace, and leave the
fruits of their labor to their children.
'J'hey were the more encouraged to desire
this, by the wise aud liberal legislation of
V
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
585
the State of Michigan, giving to the Indians
the rights of citizenship. After long con-
sideration by the Indians and their mission-
ai'y, and no small degree of attention on the
part of the Executive Committee of the Board,
including repeated references to the Indian De-
partment at Washington, it was .eventually
deemed best that they should remove from
their first settlement, purchase small tracts of
land on the other side of the bay, and thus be-
gin life anew. They had carefully husbanded
their small annuities and earnings, and some
of them were able, in 1852, to purchase little
tracts of forty, sixty, or eighty acres each, to
which they have now removed, and they are
hard at work clearing their lands, and putting
up their houses.
It is gratifying to add, that they were most
anxious to have their benefactor accompany
them to their new abode. A memorial was
sent by them to the Committee, signed by a
large number, requesting that Mr. Dougherty
might be transferred to their new settlement.
He is now there, pm-suing his work under new
and more hopeful circumstances. It has be-
come expedient to form a small boarding-school,
as the families are now at considerable dis-
tances apart ; and two more stations have been
occupied on Little Traverse Bay, where inter-
esting day-schools are supported.
This narrative exemplifies the working of
our Indian missions, and shows clearly the re-
sult to which they directly tend. Their aim
is to save the Indians for this life and tlic life
to come. They promote their civilization, and
thus fit them to become eventually incorpo-
rated with the other inhabitants of this coun-
try,— who can have a better right to be en-
rolled as native citizens under our government ?
And they point their minds to that life and
immortality which the Gospel alone brings to
light. What has been accomplished among
these bands of Chippewas and Ottawas, is pre-
cisely what we hope to see accomplished among
all the Indian tribes.— Rev. J. (treenleaf, and
Loiorie's Manual of Missions.
TABULAR VIEW.
MISSIONS.
Names of Stations.
o
a
S
a
is
a. 9
O -t^
Missionaries and Assistant
Missionaries.
1
a
a
6
Scholai
s.
Ministers.
Lay Teachers and
others.
Boarding.
Day.
3
P
s
/5
American.
0.'
"A
fe-
rn
5
0
3
<0
1
a
Spencer Academy
Kowetah
Tallahassee
Wapaniicka
1846
184-2
1849
1849
1852
1848
1835
1846
1838
1852
1853
6
'2
3
i
1
2
1
1
1
7
4
8
0
1
3
4
4
1
1
"i
*
30
25
*
5
4
32
100
16
40
14
20
26
23
'9
40
100
12
CO
16
11
26
15
26
15
100
25
80
100
26
40
42
34
40
30
Chickasaws
Little River,or Oak-ridge,
low AS AND Sacs
Otoi'S and Omahas..
Cmp'wAs & Ottawas
Grand Traverse
Middle Village
Totals
8
IS
37
3
96
239
208
35
35
517
American Baptist Missionary Union. —
The history of these missions is so blended
with the changing fortunes and declining des-
tiny of the Indian race, that it can be fully
narrated only with considerable diflBculty, and
at a length greater than is compatible with
the limits of this sketch. These missions were
formerly established in portions of the country
from which the Indians have long since disap-
peared, and are now, with a single exception,
concentrated in that territory lying westward
of the states of Missouri and Arkansas, which
Is the home appointed by the American gov-
ernment for the feeble remnants of this once
powerful race.
In the autumn of 1817, Rev. Isaac McCoy
was appointed by the Board of Managers of
the General Convention, a missionary among
the Indians, at that time scattered in great
numbers over many of the states and along the
entire western frontier of the United States.
In accordance with the instructions he received,
he repaired to Fort AVayne, in Indiana, on the
banks of the Wabash, then one of the remotest
settlements of the West. In the region lying
around this military establishment were the
Miamies, the Kickapoos, the Putawatomies,
and the Ottawas — tribes speaking substantially
the same language, and existing in the same
social condition. In the relations then exist-
ing between the two races, he found these
people exceedingly averse to everything be-
longing to white men. After many persever-
ing efl^brts he was able to conciliate their o'ood
586
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
will, and by the end of the year to collect a
small school of native children to be boarded
and instructed in his own family. In 1820 the
school contained 48 pupils, and had become
instrumental in establishing relations of confi-
dence between the missionary and several
chiefs of the tribes. In 1822 the station was
removed 200 miles M'estward to the borders of
Michigan, to a spot situated far from any set-
tlement of white men, and which now received
the name of Carey, in honor of the celebrated
English missionary at Serampore. I'wo as-
sistants were now added to the mission, and
the school was the means of gathering a little
community in which the arts of civilized life
began to be practiced, and the influences of
Christianity were exerted. The members of
the church were now 30 or 40 in number,
many of whom were Indians, and the public
worship maintained by the missionaries often
drew together large companies of the Puta-
watomies, who alone had hitherto evinced any
interest in the agencies of the mission.
The Ottawas, who had opposed the efforts
of the missionaries, soon began to relax their
hostility. Two pupils from that time Avere
sent to the school at Carey, and their chief.
Noonday, offered a tract of 600 or 700 acres
of land to the mission, in case a missionary
could be sent to the settlements of his people
on the Crand river. The proposal was ac-
cepted, and a new station cstal)lished, which
was conducted for a year by different members
of tlie mission at Carey ; but in 1820, on the
arrival of other missiuuaries, Mr. McCoy tem-
porarily removed his family to the new settle-
ment, and immediately founded a school and
the other agencies usually connected with a
mission for the improvement of the natives.
This station received the name of Thomas, and
in 1827 it was placed by the Board under the
charge of Rev. Leonard Slater, who was ap-
pointed for this i)urpose, and Mr. McCoy re-
turned to Carey. This station, however, was
already beginning to decline, and the l*uta-
watomies, who had olFered that field of the ear-
liest missionary effort, entirely disappointed the
hopes which had been cherisheil in their l)c-
half. They yielded to the corrupting inllu-
enccs of tiie white men who came to them,
ceded th ir lands to the goveriuaent, and ceusecl
to practice the rudiments of civilization which
they had learned from the missicjnarics. In
these circumstances, in 1821), Mr. IMcCoy and
Lis associates removed to Thomas, leaving only
a single missionary, Kev. Mr. Simerwell, to
teach the school and preach to the church at
Carey.
The Ottawas at this time presented a nuich
niore inviting field of phihinthropic labor.
Their duel's were more intelligent, and their
settlements were further removed from the re-
gions occupied by white men. In the summer
ot 1830, tlie station was composed of five mis-
siouaries, a superintendent of the farm, and
six female assistants, who were engaged in in-
structing the Indians around them in the doc-
trines of Christianity, and the rudiments of
useful knowledge. But the labors of the mis-
sion were at this time too much directed to
the mere outward improvement of the people,
and its members soon felt the importance oi
addressing themselves more directly to their
religious welfare. For this purpose new pro-
minence was given to the daily religious wor-
ship, and the services of the Sabbath, so that
the character of the people began to improve,
and in 1832 several of them gave evidence of
piety, and were received into the church by
baptism. Among these earliest converts was
Noonday, the chief of the tribe who had in-
vited the missionaries to come among them,
and who now attempted to unite the people in
an association for preventing the sale of whis-
ky, and for promoting the morals of the settle-
ments. Every year witnessed improvements
in their condition, and the enlargement of the
church and the mission. Eight Indian youths
were sent to the Academy at Hamilton, N. Y.,
to receive a fuller education, and the prospects
of the tribe began to brighten. But the set-
tlements of the white men were gradually ap-
proaching their remote domain, and already
beginning to exert upon them their unfailing
mischievous influence. In 183G, their territory
having become covered with English settle-
ments, was ceded to the government of the
United States, and the mission was removed to
Richland, about 50 miles south of Thomas.
Here Mr. Slater continued to reside, though
the great body of the Ottawas had long since
migrated to the Indian territory beyond the
Mississippi. A small settlement, however, re-
mained till near the close of 1853, who then
joined their brethren, and the property of the
mission has been sold and the services of Mr.
Slater discontinued, at his own recfuest.
The improvement of the Indian race had
early engaged the attention of the government
of the United States. Special appropriations
had been made, and different i)laiis had been
recommended by successive jjresidents, and
various schemes had been devised by philan-
thropic citizens in their behalf. At length, in
181I», a bill was passed by Congress, placing
at the disposal of the president the sum of
."i?10,()00, as an amuial appropriation for their
instruction and civilization. The schools at
'J'homas and Carey had from the beginning
been supjiorted by moneys derived from the
government, and in accordance with the plan
adoi)ted by the president Jbr disbursing the
ii?lO,000, the Board in 1825 began to receive
a portion of this ai)propriation, which, varying
with the amount of service which has been
rendered, they have continued to receive to the
present time.
In 1828, the Board appointed Rev. Abel
Bingham to establish a mission among the Ojil>
was at Sault de Ste. Marie, an ancient French
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
587
settlemeut, about 15 miles south-east of Lake
Superior. The president, in accordance with
what was now the settled policy of the govern-
ment, had placed at their disposal the sum ap-
propriated for this tribe, and Mr. Bingham
immediately commenced a school with fifty
scholars, and began to preach in J]nglish at
the neighboring garrison, and through an in-
terpreter to the Indians of the settlement.
Suitable houses were soon erected for the ac-
commodation of the members of the mission
and the boarding-school ; a temperance society
was formed, a church was constituted ; and, in
1830, two persons were baptized. Others,
both in the Indian and the English congrega-
tions, soon became decided and active Chris-
tians, whose good influence was felt in the im-
proved morals and social habits of the commu-
nity. Early in 1832 special meetings were
held at frequent intervals by the members of
the mission, which were also attended l)y other
ministers in the neighborhood, and which con-
tributed largely to the religious instruction
and benefit of the people. Forty persons were
soon afterwards baptized, and added to the
church of Mr. Bingham, of whom eleven were
Indians ; the others being principally officers
and soldiers of the neighboring garrison.
Among them were Dr. Edwin James and Mr.
Cameron, and Shegud, an Ojibwa chief, the
two latter of whom were subsequently assist-
ants in the missions. Dr. James also had trans-
lated the New Testament into the Ojibwa lan-
guage, with which he had long been familiar,
and after a careful revision it was printed, in
1833, at Albany, under the direction of the
translator. At this time also Messrs. Meeker
and Merrill were appointed missionaries of the
Board, and passed some time at Sault de Ste.
Marie, but were afterwai'ds removed— Mr. and
Mrs. Merrill and a female assistant, to the
Otoes, and Mr. and Mrs. Meeker to Thomas,
and afterwards to Shawanoe in the Indian ter-
ritory beyond the Mississippi.
But the station at Sault de Ste. Marie soon
began to suffer from the presence of immoral
and unprincipled traffickers, and from the wan-
dering habits of the Indians. The pious sol-
diers of the garrison were removed to a distant
post, and the school and congregation were
both greatly reduced in consequence of the
intrigues of Komau Catholic priests, who had
come into the settlement. Messrs. Bingham
and Cameron, however, still continued their
labors, and made frequent excursions to other
native settlements, and soon established a sub-
ordinate station at Tikuaraina bay, which was
placed under the charge of Shegud, the con-
verted chief already mentioned. Mr. Cameron,
who was ordained in May 1837, visited Michi-
pocotou, an Indian town in Upper Canada, on
the shore of Lake Superior. He repeated his
visit in Successive seasons, baptizing several
Indians, whom he at length formed into a
church, which, in 1842, numbered thirty mem-
bers. The station, however, did not long
thrive, in consequence of the changing habits
of the people, and it was, after a few years,
entirely abandoned, and Mr. Cameron return-
ed to St. Clary's. This latter station also has
been gradually declining for several years,
while that at Tikuamina bay has become more
important.
In the year 1821, the Board assumed the
general care of the mission established by the
Hamilton Missionary Society, among the Sene-
ca, Tuscarora and Oneida Indians, in the re-
moter counties of New York. This mission was
conducted in three separate stations, which at
length were reduced to two, but both of them
gradually declined in the waning fortunes of
the race, and have since become extinct.
We have thus far sketched those missions of
the Board which were established among the
tribes of the north. Similar missions were
also planted in the south, among the Chero-
kees and Creeks, in the States of North Caro-
lina, Georgia, and Alabama. Of these mis-
sions, that among the Cherokees has been
attended with a degree of interest and success,
that has jilaced it at some periods of its history
among the foremost Baptist missions of the
country. It was established in 1817, when the
territory of the tribe embraced a large tract
lying on the borders of the States of North
Carolina, Georgia, and Tennessee. The Chero-
kees were already beginning a career of civili-
zation, and by being more widely separated
from the settlements of white men, had main-
tained an independent national existence.
They had, in former years, been visited by
Moravian missionaries, and by agents of the
Presbyterian Synod of Tennessee, by whose in-
fluence much good had been accomplished. In
1817 also the mission of the American Board
of Commissioners was commenced among the
Cherokees, and a few months later, Eev.
Humphrey Posey was appointed the first mis-
sionary of the Baptist General Convention, as
the society was then styled. In consequence
of much time being spent in journeys of explo-
ration, and the selection of a suitable locality,
the labors of the missionary were not begun
till the spring of 1820, when Mr. Posey, with
a few assistants, went to reside at Valley
Towns, on the banks of the Hiwassee river,
just within the State of North Carolina. The
station was commenced, in accordance with
the views at that time prevailing, bj^euclosing
a large piece of ground of eighty acres, as a
mission farm, which was supplied with the
necessary implements and stock. Buildings
were soon erected ; a school of 50 children was
opened for instruction in the Scriptures and in
the lessons of useful knowledge. In the fol-
lowing year a second station was commenced
at Tinsawattee, a settlement sixty miles south
of Valley Towns, where was already residing a
missionary, supported by the Sarepta Baptist
Association in Georgia. In September of the
588
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
same year, Rev. Thomas Roberts was appoint-
ed superiutondent of the mission, aud several
tcacliLTS for the schools and artizaus for the
farm and the workshop were added to its sta-
tions, and under the influence of their arrange-
ments, the Indians made evident progress in
the arts and morals of civilized life.
Among the members of the mission at Yal-
ley Towns at this time, was ^Slr. Kvan Jones,
who, with his wife, had, for several years, been
engaged in the instruction aud management of
the schools. In 1825 he was ordained as pas-
tor of the church at Valley Towns, and soon
after, on the resignation of Mr. Roberts, was
appointed superintendent of the mission. He
soon had the happiness of seeing several of his
former pupils settled around him, as heads of
Christian families, aud illustrating the virtues
of a well-ordered society. In 1826, the civil
organization of the tribe having been altered,
a new code of laws was adopted, aud their
progress, as a people, was greatly promoted.
Their language had already been reduced to
writing, by (jteorgc Guess, one of their own
people. Many hymns were composed in it, in
the singing of Avhich the natives especially de-
lighted ; and in 1825, the New Testament was
translated according to the alphabet of Guess,
by David Brown, a Cherokee of superior edu-
cation. A printing-press was soon purchased
by the council, and in 1828 the " Cherokee
Phoenix" was published Weekly, both in Che-
rokee and in English. The Xew Testament
and the hynuis were also printed.
But the labors of the mission were thus far
devoted too much to the civilizaliou and social
improvement of the nation, and by the direc-
tion of the Board, the missionaries now began
to give themselves more fully to the work of
preaching the Gospel to the people, and lead-
ing them to repentance and faith in Jesus
Christ. The mission farm and its kindred ar-
rangements were gradually abandoned, and
the attention of the Indians was directed espe-
cially to tlie claims of the Gospel, with results
that fully justified the wisdom of the change.
A religious awakening soon commenced, which
spread widely through the nation, and continu-
ed for several years to e.Kcrt its beneficial in-
fluence upon the character of the peo])lc. Mr.
Jones established new out-stations, and organ-
ized new churches, and at the close of 1833
the mission numbered 200 communicants,
three-fourMis of whom had l)een liaptizcd in
the three preceding years. !Many of these In-
dian converts were men of superior intelligence
and standing in the tribe, and two of them
8ubsc(iueiilly became respected and useful
ministers of the (iospel. These were Oganaya
and Kaueeka. who adopted the names of Jt^hn
AVickliife and Jes.se J'.ushyhead. The latter
had giiiued his knowledge of Christianity from
tlie Bible ahtni', and apart from all other in-
struction, had become a Christian of the firm-
est faith and the loftiest character. Both ho
and WicklifFe were ordained to the ministry in
1833, and became pastors of churches at dif-
ferent stations, where, for many years they de-
voted their eflbrts to promoting the religious
welfare of their own people.
The station at Tinsawattee was never equal
in importance to that of Valley Towns. It
was under the faithful superintendence of Rev.
Mr. O'Briant ; but the Indians in that district
declined in numbers ; and at length in 1831,
at the recommendation of the United States
government, they removed to the territory
which had been a-^signed them, beyond the
Missisippi. Mr. O'Briant accompanied them,
but he soon after died ; and though his place
was supplied by others, this mission was aban-
doned in 183G, aud the remaining missionaries
removed to Shawanoe.
From the year 1822 a mission had also been
established among the Indians known as the
Creek nation, in the States of Georgia and
Alabama. The attention of the Convention
was called to the wants of these people, and
the establishment of a mission recommended
Jjy Governor Rabun, of Georgia, — also by Rev.
Messrs. Mercer and Mosely, eminent clergy-
men of the same state. In 1822, Rev. Lee
Compere, of South Carolina, was appointed to
commence the mission at Withington, on the
borders of Alabama. But the Creeks were
far less civilized than the Cherokees, and were,
withal, sadly degraded by the unprincipled
traders who came among them in great num-
bers, to teach them the vices of civilized life.
Troubles were also arising between them and
the government of the United States, and they
were constantly exposed to depredations from
their white neighbors, which provoked the
fiercest passions of their savage natures. In
this condition of the Creek nation, it was im-
possible that the mission should accomplish
any high success. A school was maintained
I'or a few years, and a small band of Creeks
were baptized ; but in 1821) a large part of the
nation migrated beyond the Mississippi, and
Mr. Compere withdrew from the service of the
Board.
In 1830, John Davis, a former member of
the school at Withington, who had accompar
nied his people in their removal westward, was
aiipointed a missionary, and immediately began
his labors as a preacher. Two years later,
Rev. Daniel Lewis was sent to the mission, the
chief station of which received the name of
Khcnczcr. He soon organized a church, com-
posed of those who had been baptized in Ahv-
Ijama, and those who h;ul been more recently
instructed in the Gospel l)y John Davis. 'J'he
school was well attended, and a weekly con-
uregation of three hundred Creeks was assem-
bled I'or public worship. Mr. Davis was sub-
sefjuentlv ordained, and in the autumn of
lH3-i. the mission was placed under the care of
Rev. David Rollin, wlio, with two iu^-^istants,
went to reside umang the Creeks. In 183G, a
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
589
second station was establisned at Canadian
Creek, and an attempt was made to prepare a
Creek version of the New Testament. But
the passions of the tribe were too easily in-
flamed to admit of much social progress, or of
any settled and uniform modes of life. Many
of the chiefs were opposed to the introduction
of Christianity among the people, and the
nation soon became distracted with tumults,
which threatened the safety of the mission-
aries. Mr. Rollin and his associates accord-
ingly withdrew to Shawanoe, and the mission
was broken up. It was afterwards resumed
by Rev. Messrs. Kellam and Mason, who main-
tained the government schools and kept to-
gether the churches ; but in 1840 they were
obliged to leave the nation, on account of
threatened violence. The churches, however,
continued to be visited by members of other
missions in the Indian Ten-itory, until 1843,
when Eev. Eber Tucker, lately a government
teacher among the Choctaws, was appointed
missionary among the Creeks. In the course
of two years, he baptized more than a hundred
of the tribe ; and the church, at the end of
that period, numbered 250 members, of whom
many were African slaves owned in the nation.
In 1845, Mr. Tucker abandoned the mission,
on account of the sickness of his family, and it
subsequently passed into the hands of the
American Indian Mission Association.
In May, 1830, the bill for removing the In-
dians from their lauds within the states to the
territory of the United States beyond the Mis-
sissippi, passed the national Congress. This
measure had been early advocated by Mr.
McCoy, and repeatedly commended to the
government by the General Convention, as the
best mode of relieving them from the evils to
which they were exposed within the jurisdic-
tion of the states. Many of them had already
consented to remove, and other portions were
only waiting for some definite arrangements to
be made by the government. But the Chero-
kees in Georgia, and other tribes in the neigh-
boring states, claimed to be each an indepen-
dent people, occupying lands which had been
repeatedly guarantied to them by treaties with
the United States. It was while this claim
was still a subject of angry disjjute between
the Cherokees and the State of Georgia, that
the bill for removing the Indians became a
law of the laud. It provided for an equitable
exchange of the lands of the Indians ; for
their removal at the public expense ; their full
indemnification for the losses they might sus-
tain, and their entire sujjport for one year
after their arrival in the territory which was
set apart for them, beyond the western borders
of the states of Arkansas and Missouri. The
act imposed on them a virtual necessity, and
was ultimately carried into execution by the
troops of the United States, under the com-
mand of Major-General Scott. Several other
tribes, seeing the necessity which they could
not escape, acceded to the terms of the govern-
ment, and exchanged their lands for portions
of the new domain. Not so the Cherokees.
They clung to the promises of the government,
and to the guaranties of their treaties. At
length, however, on the submission of a por-
tion of them, the President of the United
States felt obliged to compel their removal by
the array of military force. It was commenced
in the summer of 1838 by the enforced depart-
ure of 3,000 of the tribe ; but the remainder
having obtained permission from General
Scott to remain till the sickly season of sum-
mer was over, removed of their own accord,
in companies of about a thousand each, under
the conduct of leaders of their own selection.
It was to them a season of unprecedented
national calamity and humiliation. They
were, in a great degree, a civilized and Chris-
tian people, and they felt with the keenest sen-
sibility the pressure of the iron power which
tore them from their ancient seats, and the
graves of their dead. But, amidst all their
deep afiQictions, the religious influence which
had begun to show itself some years before,
still continued to be experienced among them.
In 1835, not less than 300 had been bajitized,
and during the protracted period of their ad-
versity, and, even on their sorrowful march
to the western territory, they manifested a re-
ligious sensibility, and developed a religious
faith, which not only sustained them in all
their sufferings, but awoke a thrill of sympathy
in every pious heart throughout the land.
Among the persons chosen to conduct the
several parties of the migrating nation, were
Rev. Messrs. Jones and Bushyhead, and it
often happened that their evening encamp-
ments resounded with the prayers and hymns
of devout assemblies, engaged in the worship
of God ; and the streams which they crossed
were sometimes consecrated by the holy rite
of Christian baptism.
In this manner were the Cherokees removed
to their present home in the Indian Territory.
The missionaries went with them in their long
and wearisome journey, and did all in their
power to alleviate their sufferings, and breathe
into them the spirit of cheerful Christian resig-
nation. The interests of the mission, though
they had suffered a serious shock in the changes
which had befallen the nation, yet soon revived
on the arrival of the Cherokees in their new
home, and in a little time its labors again were
prosecuted with their wonted regularity. At
the close of 1839, Mr. Jones returned to
the States, and visited the managers at Boston.
In the course of his visit, he narrated in the
cities of the east the sufierings of the Chero-
kees, and the spirit with which they had
endured them, and made the public more fully
acquainted with the progress they had made
ill the knowledge of the Gospel, and the arts of
civilized life. His narratives awakened new in-
terest in the prosperity of the mission, and ou
590
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
his return in 1841, he resumed his labors with
jiew zeal and encouragement. He found that
during the eighteen months of his absence,
upwards of two hundred had been added to
the churches — a number which was soon
increased by the baptism of nearly 100 more.
The wilderness was blooming with the industry
and care of the people, and the Cherokees
became pioneers and exemplars to the other
tribes that occupied the territory.
There were at this period within the terri-
tory nine missions of the Board, embracing in
all twenty-four missionaries and assistants,
and twelve native preachers. Most of them
were of recent origin, and some were little
more than government schools, placed by the
President of the United States under the direc-
tion of the Board for the benefit of the several
tribes among whom they Avere established.
This number of laborers was soon increased by
additions to the Cherokee mission, and the
missionaries and teachers stationed among the
Shawanoes, Ottowas, Putawatomics and Dela-
wares, were in 1841 united in a single mission,
the principal seat of which was at Shawanoe,
with a subordinate station in each of the
tribes. At Shawanoe there had been a press
since 1833, at which the Gospel of Matthew,
together with many Christian hymns and
school-books had been printed, and from which,
for sevCTal years, had been issued a v/eekly
newspaper, called the " Shawanoe Sun." Since
then other school books, and other portions of
the New 'J'cstament have been added to the
number. In 1842, the operations of a portion
of the mission were suspended for a time, in
consequence of the jealousy and threatened vio-
lence of the Indians. At about the same time
also, it was visited by Kev. J. S. Bacon, I). I).,
a member of the Board, who had been appointed
to visit the several missions in the Indian Ter-
ritory. Dr. Bacon extended his oltservations
and inquiries to all the leading tribes in the
territory, and his report to the Board contril>
uted largely to their infornuition respecting
the condition of the people, the influence of
the missions, and the niodes in which llicy should
be conducted. Since that time the lal)ors of the
mission have been conducted without inter-
ruption, though amidst the unceasing decline
of the Indian race in all the trilxs with which
it is connected — a decline which of necessity
spreads its shadows not only over the prospects
of the people, but also over the agencies that
arc employed for their improvement. At
Shawanoe, ]\Ir. and Mrs. Barker with one na-
tive assistant, and, within the pa.st two years
Miss Doty, a teacher, have conducted the
station. 'J'he church numbers thirty-one mem-
bers. At Delaware, the church has also thirty-
one members, and is under the charge of the
llev. J. (J. Pratt, who, with Mrs. Pratt, IStiss
I']. S. Morse, Miss K. P. Gookin, and one native
assistant, has also the entire charge of the
schools, and all the interests of the mission in
the Delaware tribe. At Ottawa, the station
is under the charge of Rev. G. Meeker, who,
with his wife and one native assistant, is em-
ployed among the Ottawa people. The church
here numbers forty members. Around each
of the stations, the natives are making grati-
fying progress in morals and the arts of civil-
ized life. The members of the churches
maintain an exemplary Christian character,
and for some years past have made considera-
ble contributions for the support of the mis-
sion. Each year, also, witnesses additions to
their numbers, and an increase of intelligence
among the children of the schools.
The only other mission of theUnion now re-
maining in the Indian territory is that among
the Cherokees — a mission which from its com-
mencement, while the Cherokee nation were
still in the State of Georgia, has been signally
blessed of heaven, and has been productive of
the most gratifying results in the civilization
and religious improvement of the people. Its
principal seat is at Cherokee, which is three
miles west of the boundary of Arkansas, and
its operations are extended over a district oc-
cupied by the tribe, of forty miles in extent to
the west, the south, and the north. Since 1843
the mission has been furnished with a press
and printing establishment, which until re-
cently was under the care of Mr. H. Upham,
a printer by trade, who retired from the ser-
vice of the Board in 1851. In addition to
Rev. E. Jones, the faithful friend of the natives
who has remained with them through all their
disasters, the mission was strengthened in 1843
by the arrival of Rev. W. P. Upham, and these
two are now its only managers. They have,
however, employed at different periods a num-
ber of intelligent and educated Cherokees as
assistants and coadjutors in their laljors, and
these have in most instances proved themselves
efficient and faithful in carrying forward the
work of the Gospel. The translation of the
Xew Testament was comjileted by ^Ir. Jones
in 1847, and some books of the Old Testament
have been translated by other members of the
mission. School books have been prepared in
large numbers, and the I'ilgrim's Progress has
been translated and extensively circulated
among the people of the nation, everywhere
awakening the deepest interest, and producing
the most beneficial results. In 1844 Mr. Up-
ham established the " Cherokee Messenger," a
jieriodical which has been continued by mem-
bers of the mission, or by natives of the tribe,
'i'he people have occasionally been distracted
by civil feuds, — some of them having their ori-
gin in questions and events connected with
their removal from (Georgia — which have some-
times affected the interests of the mission, but
its course has been one of unusual prosperity, and
its agencies have conferred inestimable benefits
on the Cherokee nation. Tiie national council
has adopted a liberal policy in the administra-
tion of its public affairs, and its enactments
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
591
and decrees Iiave for a considerable period
been such as become a civilized and Christian
people. Its school system is in advance of
those of some of the neighboring States,
and the schools of the mission are no longer
needed, except for religious instriiction. The
churches which, on the migration of the
Cherokees in 1839, contained 500 members,
in 1849 numbered upwards of 1200. They
very nearly support the institutions of the Gos-
pel by their own contributions, and have often
sent liberal suras to the treasury of the Mission-
ary Union. In 1854 their contributions to this
treasury amounted to $409, and it is believed
that were the missionaries now withdrawn, the
churches would still go on in maintaining the
faith of the Gospel, and spreading it more
widely among the people. The mission is now
established at five st-ations, Cherokee, Dela-
ware Town, Dsiyohee, Taquohee, and Flint,
and at eight out-stations. Its missionaries are
Eev. Messrs. E. Jones and W. P. Ui^ham, who
with their families reside at Cherokee, while
the native assistants are distributed among the
other stations or out-stations of the mission.
The only mission of the Union now remain-
ing among the^Judians east of the Mississippi,
is that among the OjibM'as, near Lake Supe-
rior. Its origin and early progress have al-
ready been narrated. It has from the begin-
ning been under the charge of Eev. Abel
Bingham, assisted for many years past by Eev.
G. 1). Cameron. Its stations still continue to be,
as they have long been, at Sault de Ste. Marie
and Tikuamina bay, with an out-station at
Michipicotou, in Upper Canada. A flourish-
ing school is maintained at Tikuamina bay,
which contains, by the latest reports, sixty-
nine pupils, and the church numbers twenty-
one members. The Ojibwa tribe, however, is
constantly diminishing in numbers, and must
soon either be removed to the western terri-
tory, or be merged in the tide of population
that is advancing from the east, and a few
more years must terminate the existence of
the mission. And even in the Indian terri-
tory itself— the domain which the government
solemnly set a^jart as the perpetual home of
these ancient masters of the whole land — the
horizon of the future is shutting darkly and
gloomily upon the fortunes of the Indian race.
Already have the guarantees to which they
trusted been set aside, and the titles which
they fondly thought would be valid for ever,
are about to be extinguished by the legislation
of Congress, and the lands ' for which they
abandoned their ancient seats in the States of
the East are about to be merged in the terri-
tories of Nebraska and Kansas, to which the
tide of emigration is rapidly rolling. The des-
tiny of this once powerful race is one of the sad-
dest in the annals of mankind, and happy will
it be, if, before their final extinction, they shall
find in the Gospel of the Son of God a solace
and a balm for all the mighty wrongs which
they have been forced to endure at the hands
of the American people.
Statistics of Indian Missions for 1854.
Ojibica Mission.~2 stations, 2 out-stations,
2 missionaries, 1 female assistant, 1 native
assistant, 1 church, 21 members ; 1 boarding-
school, 6 pupils ; 2 day-schools, 74 pupils ;
total, 3 schools, 80 pupils.
Shau'ame Mission. — 3 stations, 3 mission-
aries, 5 female assistants, 2 native assistants,
3 churches, 100 members ; 2 boarding-schools,
45 pupils.
Cherokee Mission.—!) stations, 8 out-stations,
2 missionaries, 2 female assistants, 6 native
assistants, 10 churches, 1,250 members; 1
boarding-school, 85 pupils.
Total.— 3 missions, 10 stations, 10 out-sta-
tions, 7 missionaries, 8 female assistants, 9
nath-e preachers and assistants, 14 churches,
1,371 church-members, 4 boarding-schools, 136
pupils; 2 day-schools, 74 pupils; total 6
schools, and 210 pupils.— Prof. W. Gammell.
Missionary Society of the Methodist
Episcop.tL Church.— This Society was led by
a very peculiar providence to undertake the
missionary work among the Indians. JoJm
Stcu-nnJ, a free colored man, who was born and
bred in Powhattau county, Va., was converted,
and became a member of the Methodist Episco-
pal Church. Though of slender education, yet
he became deeply impressed with a conviction
that it was his duty to call sinners to repent-
ance ; and, at the same time, his mind appear-
ed to_ be drawn somewhere in a north-west
direction, he hardly knew where, among a
people to whom he was a stranger. So strong
were his convictions on this subject, that,
though unauthorized by any body of Chris-
tians, he arose, forsook all, and went alone and
unprotected; crossed the Muskingum river,
directing his way sometimes through a wilder-
ness without any road ; nor did he suffer him-
self to be diverted from his purpose, though
many with whom he fell in company by the
way endeavored to dissuade him from it, until
he arrived at Pipe Town, on Sandusky river,
where a tribe of the Delaware Indians resided.
He was conducted to one of the Indian
cabins, and seated. Pinding, however, that they
understood but< little of his language, he could
attract but little attention by his conversation.
They were moreover preparing for one of their
dances, and did not like to be diverted from it
by the arrival of a stranger, but commenced
their barbarous exercises with such energy and
violence, that poor Steward thought they were
about to kill him. Finding, however, that his
fears were groundless, as soon as they desisted
from their dance, he pulled out his hymn-book
and commenced singing. Profound silence
reigned in the assembly while Steward pro-
ceeded with the hymn. And when he ceased,
one said, in English, " Sing more." He com-
plied, and then asked if they could furnish
592
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
him -n-ith an interpreter ; when an old Dela- 1
ware, named Lyons, was produced, and Stew-
ard delivered to them a discourse on the sul>
ject of religion, to which they listened with
attention ; and, at the close of it, they pre-
pared for their guest an entertainment, after
which, he retired to rest. ^
Thinking he had discharged his duty here,
it was his intention to visit some friends in
Tennessee. In the morning the people wished
him to remain another day ; but a secret im-
pulse seemed to urge him to proceed still fur-
ther to the north-west ; and so, disregarding
his own inclinations to visit his friends, and
the solicitations of the people, he traveled on
to the house of the United States sub-agent of
Indian Affairs, at Upfer Sandusky.
At first suspecting Steward to be a runaway
slave, Mr. Walker questioned him very closely.
But Steward related to him his first experience
of the grace of God, his subsequent impres-
sions, and the way in which he had performed
his journey and come among them. The art-
less and unaffected manner in which he nar-
rated the dealings of God with him, soon re-
moved the scruples from Walker's mind, and
be gave him encouragement, directed him to
the house of Jonathan Pointer, a colored man,
who had been taken prisoner in his youth by
the Wyandots, and who had learned to speak
their language with ease and fluency. When
Jonathan learned the object of Steward's visit,
he endeavored to dissuade him from his enter-
prise, telling him he need not attempt to do
that which many great and learned men had
failed in accomplishing before him ; Steward,
however, would not be diverted from his pur-
pose without a thorough trial, and the same
day, with the reluctant consent of Jonathan,
he attended a feast with him. A large num-
ber of Indians were asseml)led. and the feast and
dance were conducted as usual, with great mirth
and hilarity. Permission being granted at the
close of the amusements, Steward, by the aid
of Jonathan, as interpreter, delivered a dis-
course on the subject of Christianity ; dwell-
ing principally on its experimental effects upon
the heart and life. 'J'hoy listened with jjro-
found attention, and then gave them tlicir
hand in token of hospitality to a stranger.
He made an appointment for a meeting the
next day, at the house of Jonathan, but how
surprised and dii-appointed was he to find, in-
stead of a large assembly, only one old woman.
Not disheartened, however, at this, Steward
imitating the conduct of his Master at Ja-
cob's well, preached the Gospel as faithfully as
if there had been hundreds present to hear
him. 'J'he next day his congregation was in-
crea.«cd l)y the addition of one old man, and
these two soon became converts.
The next day being Sabbath, 8 or 10 asscm-
ble<l in tlie council-house, who seemed nnich
afl'ectid under his sermon, and a work of grace
commenced, which terminated in the conver-
sion of many. This was in the month of No-
vember, 1816. Steward continued his labors,
visiting the families from cabin to cabin, talk-
ing, singing, and praying with them, and
preaching to them on the Sabbaths, in the
council-house. Very soon large crowds flock-
ed to the meetings, and such was the deep con-
cern manifested, that for a season they almost
entirely neglected their secular aff'airs. This
gave occasion for the mercenary traders re-
siding among them to speak reproachfully of
Steward, and accuse him of being instru-
mental of starving the Indians, by preventing
them from hunting. But it was very manifest
that the true reason of their opposition was,
that " their craft was in danger." Yet, al-
though they threatened him with imprison-
ment, he persisted in his preaching. One of
his greatest difficulties was with his interpre-
ter. Being unaffected with the truth, though
he interpreted faithfully whatever StcAvard
delivered, he would often add, " so he says ;
but I do not know whether it is so or not, nor
do I care ; all my mind is to interpret faith-
fully what he says. You must not think that
I care whether you believe it or not." The
word, however, took effect, and at length
Jonathan himself, -wicked and thoughtless as
he had been, yielded to the poAver of truth,
and was afterwards apparently hearty in the
work.
The greater part of the Wyandots had been
under the instruction of some Boman Catholic
missiojiaries ; they had embraced the Boman
Catholic religion, and had become attached to
1 its superstitions and unscriptural ceremonies,
without any visible reformation of manners, or
any saving influence of Divine grace upon
their hearts. These things added to the difQ-
eulties with which Steward had to contend.
While the heathen party were offended at
having the religion of their fathers called in
(juestion, those who had become attached to
the idle ceremonies of the Church of Bome
felt themselves abused by being told that the
worship paid to the Virgin Mary and to saints
and angels was rank idolatry. Truth, however,
triumphed over all opposition, and gained the
ascendancy in the hearts of some of these
savages.
The following circumstance contrilnited
not a little in its results, to confirm the wav-
ering faith of such as doubted of Steward's
sincerity, as well as to confound many of his
open enemies : — When he so boldly denounced
the iK'Culiarities of the Church of Bome, and
taught doctrines so different from what they
had been taught by the Bomish priests, they
concluded that there must be a discrepancy
between his Bible and that used by the pne.-ts.
To decide this ((uestion, it was by mutiud
agreement submitted to Mr. Walker, the sub-
agent. He accordinglv appointed a day f< ir the
examination. Steward and the chiefs ai)pear-
cd before him. Many being present of both
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
593
parties, and all deeply interested in the issue,
a profound silence reigned in the assembly.
Mr. Walker carefully examined the Bible and
liymn book used by Steward, while all eyes
were fixed upon him. The Christian party
gazing with intense interest, hoping for a re-
sult favorable to their desires, and the others
no less anxious to be confirmed in their op-
position to Steward and his party. At length
the examination closed. Mr. Walker inform-
ed the assembly that the only difference be-
tween the Bible used by Steward and the one
used by the Eoman priests was, that the
former was in the English language, and the
latter was in the Latin ; and as to the hymn-
book, he informed them that the hymns it
contained were all good, the subjects having
been taken from the Bible, and that they
breathed the spirit of religion. His decision
therefore was, that the Bible was genuine,
and the hymns good. On hearing this deci-
sion, the countenances of the Christian party
instantly lighted up with joy, and their very
souls exulted in God their Saviour, while the
ojiposers stood abashed. During the whole
transaction Steward sat calm and tranquil,
fixing his eye upon the assembly with an af-
fectionate regard, as if fully conscious that
truth and innocence would triumph.
Being foiled in this unrighteous attempt to
interrupt the progress of the work of reforma-
tion, they next objected to Steward that he
had no authority from any body of Christians
to preach. To this Mr. Walker replied by
asking them -whether he had ever performed
the rite of matrimony or of baptism. Being
answered in the negative, he told them that
there was no law, either of God or man, vio-
lated, as any one had a right to talk about
religion, and try to persuade others to embrace
it. He then dismissed the assembly, who
" had great reasoning among themselves con-
cerning these things." Steward, however, was
permitted to prosecute his labors with but lit-
tle opposition for about three months, when he
proposed leaving them for a season, and gave
them a farewell discourse in the council-
house, when such was their attachment to
him, there was a universal weeping. Promis-
ing to return to them " when the corn should
shoot," he made a journey to Marietta. Dur-
ing his absence they contiimed their meetings
for singing, prayer, and exhortation, and re-
ligion prospered, so that on his return at the^
appointed time he was hailed by the Chris-
tian party with cordiality and great joy.
Steward, in trying to introduce Christianity,
had to encounter the usual difficulties with
these people — their idolatry, their traditional
customs, their belief in witches, their scatter-
ed and migratory condition, their wars, their
ignorance, and their prejudices against the
white man. He felt them most sensibly among
the Wyandots. He, however, persevered in
his work, and God blessed his labors. But
38
though a number of them had received the
Gospel, strong efforts were made by the Pagan
and Popish parties to oppose the work. Yet,
confiding in God and in the goodness of his
cause, he persevered in his labors. It was
some time, however, before opposition ceased.
Two chiefs e^ecially, Mononcue and Bloody
Eyes, manifested particular opposition to the
Gospel. With a view to obviate the objec-
tions against him, for want of proper authority
to preach the Gospel, after laboring among
them for two years with considerable success,
assisted occasionally by a colored man from
Mad River Circuit, and by Moses Hinckle, Jr.,
Steward obtained a license as a local preacher
at a quarterly conference held at Urbana in
March, 1S19, and was appointed a missionary
to Upper Sandusky. His excessive labors,
together with the numerous privations he M'as
called to suffer, with his fastings and watch-
ings, had in the year 1821 induced various
afHictions of body, and no doubt laid the foun-
dation of his premature death. With a view
to aflbrd him aid in his work, several local
pi'cachers volunteered their services, and were
instrumental of much good. At the Ohio
Conference, held in Cincinnati, August 7, 1819,
the Eev. James B. Finley was appointed to
the Lebanon District, which included the San-
dusky mission, of which he took the over-
sight.
On the 13th and 14th of November, at a
quarterly meeting held for the Mad River Cir-
cuit, 42 miles from Upper Sandusky, about 60
of the natives, among whom were four of the
chiefs, Bctween-tlie-logs, Mononcue, Hides, and
Scutcash, attended with their families, together
with two interpreters, Jonathan Pointer and
Armstrong, both of whom were happy in the
love of God. It seems notwithstanding the
former opposition of two of these chiefs to the
Gospel of Jesus Christ, that through the pa-
tient and indefatigable labors of Steward and
those who assisted him in the work, they had
yielded to the power of truth and grace, and
were now heartily engaged in building up the
good cause. Betwcen-the-logs was one of the
chief councilors of the nation — a man of strong
powers of mind, and of great eloquence and
influence. Mononcue was grave, dignified, de-
liberate in counsel, with a charming voice, and
a commanding eloquence. The others, though
somewhat inferior to these, were much respects
ed by their people and compeers. The con-
version of such men to the Christian cause-
could not but have a most happy influence in
favor of the mission.
The mission was continued as a regular ap-
pointment, and increased in prosperity ; many
of the chiefs embraced religion ; several of
them subsequently became preachers, and la-
bored with great zeal and success among their
brethren. A mission-school was established
in the Wyandot Reserve, mainly supported by
the general government, which in its treaty
594
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
with tbc tribe reserved a certain portion of
land for tliis purpose.
Some time during the year 1820, reports
had reached a portioiiof the Wyandot tribe who
were liviiifr near Fort Mihkn, in Canada, of the
great diange wrought among their brethren in
Sandusky. ' They were visited* by two native
preaciiers, who made known to thorn, " in their
own tongue, the wonderful work of God."
Several were converted, and a mission was
subsequently established among them. The
labors of John Sunday, a converted native,
were of great service in this good work. ^J'he i
missions in Canada, however, were all conveyed
to the Canada Conference in 1828.
In 1826, being a period of about ten years!
after the connncncement of the mission, 303
had become members of the church. In the
mission school there were 77 scholars acquiring
a knowledge of the English language, and
being instructed in the useful arts. In 1830,
a branch was added to this mission, conqjosed
of WmndcA.-^ and SJuncnccs, on the JJuron
river, in Michigan, and continued to prosper
for several years. An interesting revival of
religion was enjoyed by the Wyandots during
the fall of 1837, and many were added to the
church. From this time to the period when
the Wyandot nation determined to sell their
lands to the general government, and remove
beyond the Mississippi, nothing occurred of
any special interest. Preachers were regularly
sent, and mission schools were sustained. 15y
the treaty, all the missionary improvements
which had been made were appraised and paid
for by the government, the avails of which
w^'.re to go into the treasury of the ^Missionary
Society of the ^Icthodist Episcopal Church.
They accordingly removed to their new l;ome
in the west, many of them carrying their
religion with them. After the separation of
the southern conferences from the ^Methodist
Episcojjal Church, and the organization of a
separate and distinct ecclesiastical connection,
the Wyandots falling within the range of that
jurisdiction, they were supplied with preachers
by the Church South.
The next mission was established in 1822,
among the Creek Indians, entitled the Asbury
mission. This tribe resided in the bounds of
the States of Alabama and Georgia. Another
mission was commenced among the Hloluncks
on Crand river, Upjjcr Canada, Vho occupied
a reservation of land, GO miles in length and
12 in breadth, on each side of the river.
In 1823, an interesting revival of religion
tommenced under the laljors of Kev. Messrs.
Torrey and Crawford, Methodist ministers, a
very interesting account of which is to be
found in the annual report for the j':'ar 1823.
A munber of Mississattfidt! were brou',dit into
the mission-house and Itaptized. 'J'h« y after-
wartls removed to the Credit river. Several
Cliippmitijs were also subjects of thi.Awork.
An mteresting incident is eouuected wi\li the
introduction of the Gospel among the Missi»-
saugas. In 1801, the Rev. Joseph Sawyer
was holding a quarterly meeting at the house
of Mr. J ones. ]\Irs. Jones, who was a Mohawk
princess, presented herself for Christian bap-
tism, and, with her husband, united with the
church. Their son, an Indian youth, was at
the same time solemnly dedicated to the Lord
in bapti.sm, and while the minister was con-
cluding the ceremony with a prayer, he most
fervently besought the Lord to make that
youth the first fruits of a harvest of soula
among that people. The father of the youth,
having embraced Christianity, and being in
possession of two wives, he married the Mo-
hawk princess, renounced the mother of the
boy, who was a Mississauga, and turned her
away from his tent. The boy followed his
mother to the woods, and remained with the
Mississauga tribe in the wilderness until he
was twelve years of age, when he entered an
English school, where he made rapid progress
in the language, and was soon able to converse
fluently in English. AVith a ready knowledge
of both languages, he was made an interpre-
ter, became a convert to Christianity, and was
called to preach the Gospel to his countrymen.
His young and ardent sjiirit urged him to pro-
claim the glad tidings of salvation to his kin-
dred and friends. His clear and rich experi-
ence in the things of God, announced in strains
of simple eloquence, subdued and melted their
hearts ; and many were brought through his
ministrations to the foot of the cross. That
prayer Avas heard, and that mother, like Ha-
gar driven out into the wilderness, was not for-
gotten nor forsaken of (Jod. The labors of
this remarkable youth were wonderfully owned
and blessed of God. The great change which
was wrought among the Mississauga Indians,
was followed by the most blessed results on
other fragments of the same tribe. An addi-
tional number of 22, mIio professed faith in
Christ, and were baptized in the year 1826,
were formed into a class at Ucllville, Upper
Canada. Their sub.sequent deportment gave
evidence of a radical change.
In 1827, a new mi.ssion was commenced
among another branch of the Mississaugas,
residing on Snake and Yclh.w Head hiands, in
Upper Canada. They sjioke the Chippeway
language, and were about GOO in number. A
Sabbath-school was established among them;
yiey were supplied with a missionary ; and so
sucees.slul was the mission that in 1H2!) there
were 3.^)0 that had renounced heathenism, and
become memljers of the church, and 100 of
their children were regularly taught in the
schools.
In the year 1822, a mission was comnu'nced
by thcMe-thodist Episcopal Church among the
Cherokee Indians, who inhabited a tract of
country included in the States of (Jeorgia and
North' Carolina on the ea-^t. Alulmma on the
west, and that part of Tennessee south of Ho-
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
505
waussc and Tennessee rivers, comprising ten
millions of acres. The work of Uoil among
the Cherokecs was so great tiiat in 1828 tlie
niimljor of converts luid increased to 800 ; and
the number of missionaries employed was in-
creased to seven. Tlie wliite missionaries were
greatly assisted by the services of a young con-
verted Clierokee, who acted its interpreter. In
1832, the Cherokecs were removed lieyond the
Mississippi ; and the faitiiful, self-denying mis-
sionaries accompanied them to tlieir distant
home. In 18-lG, this Indian mission was em-
braced in the limits of tlie Churcli Soutii. In
182."), the Mississippi Conference established a
mission among the Cherokecs, under the su-
perintendence of the llev. William Winans ;
and the Kev. Wiley Ledbctter was appointed
the missionary. For three years this mission
gave but little promise, and fears were enter-
tained that it would be necessary to abandon
it altogether ; but just at the darkest period of
its histcn-y the star of hope and promise arose.
A camp-meeting was held in the mouth of
August, 1828, and the Lord poured out his
Spirit, and his work revived ; and multitudes,
among whom were four captains, were con-
verted and joined the church. At another
camp-meeting, held a few months afterward, a
great number of Indians united with the
church. From this time the work progressed,
till, in the year 18.30, the number reported as
in eonimiuiion with the church, was 4,000.
All the principal men of the nation, chiefs and
captains, were members of the church. Three
missionaries, three interpreters, and three school
teachers were connected with the mission.
A proposition made by the general govern-
ment to the Choctaws, in regard to their re-
moval west of the Mississippi, cast a gloom I
over the mission about this period. In the
midst of great division of sentiment and con-'
fli';t of feeling, at a council, held in the month j
0.* March, the nation succeeded in obtaining a
majority of votes to sell the land, and accord-'
ingly made arrangements for removal. The
llev. Mr. Tally accompained the emigrants to
their new and distant home, in the vicinity of
the Kocky Mountains. In 1831, 500 had ar-
rived at the Choctaw mission west, most of
whom were members of the church. The re-
movals became so extensive that the old mis-
sion east was nearly broken up. In 1836,
there were reported 9G0 members, an English
school, and ten .Sabbath-schools, taught by na-
tive teachers in the Choctaw language, con-'
taining 373 scholars. There were" two white J
missionaries, five wiative preachers, three e.\-
horters. twenty class leaders, and five stewards. '
At the general council of the natives an act |
was piu^sed, providing for the estal>]isliment of!
seven literary institutions within their national
limits. Two of these. Tort Coffee Academy and '
Nuii,uncat/a Acadcnu/, were placed under the!
supervision of the ^lethodist Church, with an
annual appropriation to the former of §G,000, ,
and to the latter of S6,500. The Rev. William
II. Go<jde was appointed to take charge of
Fort Collee Academy, and the Rev. Wesley
nrowning of the Xunnawaya Academy. The
Indian Mission Conference having Ijcen formed,
the Choctaw mission was embraced as one of
its districts. The Choctaw mission, by the
plan of .reparation, pa,ssed into the jurisdiction
of the Church South in 1846.
A mission was established among the Puia-
u'litonitcs, a small tribe in the vicinity q[ Fort
Clark, on Fox river, in the year 1823. 1'hc
Rev. Jesse Walker was appointed missionary,
and a school was established. In 1837, up-
wards of one hundred Fntawatomies were con-
verted, and joined the church among the Kick-
apoos.
In 1829 the Oneida mission commenced. A
young Mohawk, who had lieen converted in
Upper Canada, prompted by a love for souls,
came among them, and in a short time, 100
made a profession of Aiith in the Redeemer.
Through the influence of the Oneida Chris-
tians, a work of grace was commenced among
the Ononda_c^a.s, a neighboring tribe, twenty-
four of whom were converted, and became
memljers of the church. The Oneida mission,
in 1835, was reported as enjoying a state of
prosperity, having been ble.s.sed with a revival.
This mission extended its labors among the
Menominee and Kcicaurnon Indians, and was
successful in establishing churches and schools
among them. The whole number of church
members,— including the mission above speci-
fied, and those in the Green Bay district,—
amounted to 788. The number of mission-
aries was 15. There were 9 week-day schools,
with 9 superintendents; 23 teachers, 267 schol-
ars, and 280 volumes in the library. These
missions have continued to prosper, down to
the present time.
In 1830, an efTort was made by the Missouri
Conference to introduce the Gospel among the
S/iau-nec and Kansas Indians. In 1841, the
mission reported 130 members, and was repre-
sented as prosperous. These missions also
passed under the supervision of the Methodist
Episcopal Church South.
In 1830, a mission was established among
the Iroquois, including the tribe of the Kicka-
poos within the bounds of the Illinois Confer-
ence. A projjhct had risen up among thera,
who acknowledged the true God, and was zeal-
ou.sly engaged in instructing the people in
religion, llis religious notions were mixed up
with much that was superstitions, lie, howc
ever, afterwards embraced Christianity ''^''■^'
became useful among his brethren in '^ sehol-
ing their temporal and spiritual '• '.' P"!"'^-
1834, the Kickapoo mission wn- missions, 4G
have 230 members, and a schr-'xl 1,884 schol-
24 native children. ""(1 Strickland's
The Peoria mission w/ '^'^ Methodist Epis-
and 40 natives were re'''"^""''!J -Advocate and
The report for 1835 s ^^^- I^ltler.
59G
NORTH A-MERICAN INDIANS.
hail doubled its numbers, auJ the mission
sch'K)! was j)rosj>eriii!;.
A mission was estal)li.slied among the Sioux,
tViiiuefxii^ns, and C/iij)pcwai/s, by the Rev.
Alfre*l JJriiiison, who. m 1834, went out on an
exploring,' tour through tlio regions bordering
on the Mis-ji.-^sippi. The same year, the South
Indian missionary district, in the Arkansas
Conference, Koon Town, Oothcalooga, and
Valley Town, were visited with a powerful re-
vival, and I'JO natives were aildetl to the
church.
In 184.'), the following statement was given
of the numbers of church members in the va-
rious districts included in the Indian Confcr-
oucc :
Kansas River District 700
Cherokee District 2,0.")"
Choctaw " 800
Rock River Conference .... l.SO
Michigan Conference 338
Oneida " 90
Ilolston '• 109
Mississippi " 115
Total 4,339
Tlic most of these Indian missions having
fallen within the jurisdiction of the Church
South, in 1847 there were but nine Indian
inis-ions, 1") missionaries, and 778 church
members left to the Methodist E. Church.
In connection with these missions, there were
nine week-day srhools, emltracing 20(1 pupils ;
8 Sabltath-schools, 9 suj>erintendent.s, 23 teach-
ers, 2G7 scholars, and 287 volumes in the
library.
Missionary Sociktv ok tiik MKTiif>DisT E.
Chl'iicii SoiTii. — Full thrw-fourths of all the
Indian missions of the Mfthodi-t E. Church,
lav within the jurisdictional limits of the
church South, at the time when tin- Church
was divided in 1814. The Kansas, Cherokees,
Clioctaws and some others falling over to tlie
Church South, the Oiu'idas, Onondagius, Ojil)-
WiLs, and others remaining with the Methodist
E. Church. During the pxst year, a portion
of the Cherokee mission iiils again come under
the .supervision of the Melliodist V.. Church
The Church South having taken nj) her share
of the Indian missions, hits pursued her ihity
to the.se gons of the forest with a comnn'nda-
ble Z'-al. In 18-18, encouraged by the liberal
u«-ist:iiK-o of the U. S. (Jovernment, the IJoard
of mi.ssions of the Church South, greatly en-
con.'"'' ''"' ""'""'"* "f <^''hication through their
Torn V V'^"'""' ' "'"' ^'"7 ^^^'r'^ privileged to
verv inter^-i'- l""'-]"''''}' '" "" departments of
foulid in the ."''/.'"'r labors. Last year the;
A number of y;l*i"-"*on. Superintendent of the
the missicm-luWl '"''•'"■ Academy, paid a
ward.H removed to t?.'"' ♦•■"''• t.. n.tro,luce the
CInppnraiis were uIko"""*"^ "•" *'"•"" »"'"'"•
An luterti^ting incideii'' '^™o"e ^^^ Indians,
constitutes a regular Conference, with the ex-
ception of the Echota mission, VFhich is within
the bounds of the llolston Conference. Their
work among these people bears a very com-
pact aspect, and seems formed on a model
which ought to work well. They have a regular
Conference, several of the members of which
are Indians; and a Missionary Society, with
male and female seminaries, and many day
and Sunday-schools in vigorous and very suc-
cessful ojx-ration. God lia« given them some
noble specimens of living Christianity among
these people, and every j)rovision seems to be
made for a wide dilTiision of the Gospel among
them, and tlie tril)es which lie adjacent to the
scenes of those missions.
The A'(7«svjs- DiMrict wa? detached from the
'Indian Mission Conference." by the General
Conference of the Church South in IS.'iO, and
was attached to tlie St. Louis Annual Confer-
ence. The Kansas district now embraces the
Shawnee, Delaware. "Wyandot and Kickapoo
missions, and also the Fort Ij<^avenworth >Lan-
ual Labor, and the Kansas schools. This dis-
trict is under the superintendence of the Rev.
J. T. Peery. There are si.x missions within
the bounds of this district, with 2r>3 members,
and 40.5 children in the schools, and 135 pupils
in the two seminaries. The Echota mission
is situated among the North Carolina Chcro-
Art's in the north-western corner of that State.
'Ilie llolston Conference established missions
among this jieople ; and although there is but
one missionary (Rev. Ulrich Keener.) laboring
among them, yet such has been the divine
blessing npon this one agent of the Board,
that hist year he was able to report 200 mem-
bers of the church, 60 children in the school,
five or six conversions, and 22 admitted on
trial.
The Indian 3//,f«'V)n Conference in the " far
west," embraces the larger portion of the
Indian missions of this church. This Confer-
ence is situated in the Indian Territory, in lat.
34- N., and long. 97^ "W. "We befieve the
(Miickasaw station in this territory, is the most
distant of any of the missionarv stations, until
we reach the I'acific coast. The seminary at
this jjlace is very efTicient, and boards and i-du-
cates 120 pupils. The Indian Mission ('onfer-
ence contains three districts, the Cherokee,
Creek, and Choctaw. The last report of thi.s
(!onference with a letter from the presiding
bislK»p, will give the reatler a good general
impression of this mo,st interesting field of
missionary labor. The report states that
general good liealth has jirevailtnl through
the mi.ssion during the j-erfr 1853, and then
gives a view of the religions condition of the
different district.*. The Cherokee district has
five circuits, with five white, and .seven native
preachers. The number of church members is
1.518 ; showing an increase from the last year
of 130.
Christianity has made, and is still making a
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
597
powerful impression upon the Cherokee people.
About thirty years since, Richard Neally, the
first Methodist missionary scut to the Chero-
kees, entered upon this work ; since then, thou-
sands of precious souls have been " translated
from the power of darkness into the kingdom
of God's dear Son ;" and Avhile hundreds of
these have died and arc now in heaven, others
are beinj^ converted, and ministers have been
raised up, who " count not their lives dear
unto theu'.sclves," and arc preaching the Gos-
pel " with tlie Holy Ghost sent down from
Heaven." The Creek district comprises five
circuits and one school. There have been, dur-
ing the past year, five white, and four native
missionaries. They number 728 church mem-
bers, showing an increase of 100 over the past
year. A great and effectual door is now open
in this nation, and almost every town and
neighborhood are inviting the missionaries to
enter and preach to them " the unsearchable
riches of Christ." The Choctaw district con-
tains five circuits and seven academies. There
are eight white and six native preachers.
Number in societj' 1,533 ; making an increase
over last year of IGG. Tliis work is now in
good condition, and bids fair to yield a rich
harvest of immortal souls.
Tlie late Chickasaw Council made an ap-
propriation of s?l,000 for the purpose of ex-
tending the buildings of the Bloomfield Acade-
my, in the Chickasaw nation, so as to accom-
modate A5 scholars.
We add some interesting extracts from a
letter of Bishop Andrew, who presided at the
last session of the Indian ^lission Conference :
" Van Buren, Akk., Nov. 5, 1853.
" Dear Brother — I bought a little carriage
and a pair of ponies in St. Louis, shipped
them up the river, and at the close of the Mis-
souri Conference, started for the Creek agency,
the seat of the Indian (Conference. A heavy
ride of about 450 miles brought me to that
place the evening Ijcfore the Conference be-
gan. The agency is located 12 miles beyond
Fort (iibson, not far from the Arkansas river.
Tlie situation is handsome, commanding an
extensive prairie view. The weather is good,
and the site I should judge a healthy one.
Colonel Garrett, the United States agent, we
found a gentlemanly man, who seems disposed
to do all in his power to promote the improve-
ment and happiness of the Indians ; and I am
glad to record that he seems to be finite popu-
lar with both Indians and whites. The Creeks
are steadilj- improving, and manifest great in-
terest in having their children educated.
" The schools in tiic Indian Conference are,
I think, with a slight exception, doing well.
We greatly need some dozen good zealous
preachers — white men — to travel in this Con-
ference. We have a number of good native
brethren, and might have more ; but these,
though valuable assistants, yet, with some few
exceptions, are not well prepared to govern
the church, and very few Indians have the
energy and enterprise necessary for the work
of church extension. The Indians themselves
greatly prefer white men to teach them, and
there are many neighborlioods, and they are
con.'^tantly increasing, in which the people all
understand English, and prefer to hear preach-
ing in English. Tliis process nmst steadily
progress, until that language is spoken univer-
salh', and the sooner the result is accomplished
the better ; for never till then will the Indians
Ijc generally enlightened, converted, and pros-
perous. Meanwhile, for the sake of the old
people, translations of the Scriptures and ele-
mentary works in the native dialects will be
important. But our grand aim is, to lead the
young into an entire abandonment of the lan-
guage, and whatever is distinctly Indian ; for
after all the sent imentalism of poets and tour-
ists, there is very little which belongs to the
original savage character that is worth re-
taining.
" The Conference closed on Tuesday even-
ing, and on Wednesday, in company with Bro-
thers McAlister and Harrcll. I left on my way
to Tulip, the seat of the Arkansas Conference.
I visited, on the way, the interesting Choctaw
schools at Fort Coffee and Xcw Hope, num-
bering about 50 each. Thej'seemto be doing
well. I preached here last night, and to-mor-
row expect, God willing, to dedicate our new
church at Fort Smith, and then away for Tu-
lip. Yours, very afl'ectionately,
"James 0. Andrew."
Exclusive of the lately established mission
among the Cherokees in Arkansas, the follow-
ing are the best statistics we can find of the
Indian missions of the Methodist Episcopal
Church :
CONFERENCES.
c
c
c
.a
c
a
c
J3
o
1
Is
4
5
1
1
144
'J!'
60
ii
Black River
1
1
2.S
44
171-
10
1
50
1
1
Michigan — Niitoway liulians . .
1
■' Kazior Mission
1
2I'5
<■'
2
" Janesvillr- "
I
2
183
15
" Saut St. Marie "
2
f.U
V2
" Kc'wawenon "
1
47
11
Totab
13
17
1051
17G
5
The Church South have 30 missions among
the Indians, 28 missionaries, 4,232 members,
35 churches. 34 Sabbath-schools, 1,394 schol-
ars. 0 manual labor .schools, and 490 pupils.
Total for both churches — 44 mi.«sions, 46
missionaries. 5,359 members, and ], 884 schol-
ars.— Aitthorit/cs : Banos and Strickland's
Histories of the Missions of tlic Methodist Epis-
copal Cliurch ; the Missioimrij Advocate and
Annual Reports. — Rev. "W. Butler.
598
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
"Wesleyan Missionary Society.— The In-
dian missions in Upper Canada arose, in the
providence of God, from the hibors of the
Methodist Episcopal Church among the abori-
gines vitliin the United States. Sonic time
during the year 1820, reports had reached a
portion of 'the Wyandot tribe, living near
Fort ^Slalden, in Canada, of the great change
which had taken place among their brethren
at Sandusky. Two native preachers also vis-
ited them, and the result was the establish-
ment of a mission among them. lu 1832,
there were nine missionary stations among the
natives of Upper Canada, all of which were
reported as in a prosperous state. They were
located at Grape Island, River Credit, Lake
Simcoe, Rice Lake, Grand lliver, Macdurk,
Munceij Town, Carnard, and Bay Qiiinie. In
each tliere was a missionary and a school
teacher. Mackinaw and Leegecng were also
occasionally visited by native teachers. Chris-
tian instruction was given to 2,000 adult Indi-
ans, and in 11 schools there were about 400
youth. The labors of John Sunday, an Indian
preacher, and of another Indian preacher,
Peter Jones, were of great service in the estab-
lishment and carrying on of these missions.
In 1828, the Methodist Episcopal Church
entrusted these missions to the care of the
Canadian Conference ; and that conference,
in 1833, placed them under the fostering care
of the Wesleyan Missionary Society. And
the following year, the committee in London
sent out liev. J. Stinson to take the general
suj)erintcndency of them, lie soon visited
each station, and was able to transmit to the
committee a very encouraging report of their
condition. He found no less than 1,200 of
the native Indians, chiefly Cliippcxcays, united
in church feilow.^hip, and l)y their consistent
conduct, as well as by their progress in the
arts and enjoyments of settled and civilized
life, they strikingly manifested the great
change which had taken place among them.
2,000 of their children were under a course of
educational and Scriptural instruction. Six
missionaries were sent out by the Wesleyan
Society in 1834. And in the report some
time alter, the following pleasing testimony is
rendered to the efTiciency of these Christian
labors : " The Indian missions are eminently
owned of God, and furnish the most undoubted
evidence of the tendency of the Gospel to dif-
f'us(! the blessings of civilization, in connection
with those spiritual and everlasting benefits
which it is destined to communicate to all the
nations of the earth. Hundreds of these once
wretched wanderers liave been raisi'd from the
lowest state of degradation to sit together in
lieavrnly jjlaces in Christ Je.sus, and are living
in sucli a state of peace and purity as affords
the most delightful evidence of th'e reality of
the outward and spiritual cliange which they
have e.\|ierienced. It is, indeed, the Lord's
doings, and it is marvellous in our eyes. That
form of paganism which once enthralled thom
has given place to Christianity ; and the In-
dian who spurned all human restraint and
control, bows his neck to the authority of
Christ, and meekly carries the burden which
the Eedeemcr has placed upon his shoulder.
A state of brutal ignorance has been broken
up by the force of evangelical truth ; and
minds from which all that tends to elevate
human nature was utterly secluded, have been
enriched, not only with the knowledge of Ict-
tei's, but with the saving knowledge of God,
and of his Son Jesus Christ, our Lord. Hab-
its of intemperance, indolence and irregular-
ity, have been succeeded by sobriety, industry,
and order. ' The songs of Ziou ' are now
sung in those forests where, for ages, the war-
cry of the savage, and the growling of wild
beasts, were the only sounds that were heard.
Instead of lodging in the wretched wigwam,
and depending for a scanty subsistence upon
their success in hunting and fishing, the con-
verted Indians occupy comfortable houses near
the River Credit, and at other stations, and
these are surrounded with gardens and fields,
which they themselves cultivate."
Exertions had been made during a period
of forty years, to educate and civilize the
Moliau'k tribe of the Six Nations, established
on the banks of the Grand river, and some of
them had been taught to read and Mrite ;
but. instead of any improvement having been
effected in their moral and social state, they
were more vicious and degraded in their habits
than the neighboring heathen tribes, who were
entirely ignorant of letters. Yet, as soon as
these hall-educated, but ferocious and depraved,
JNlohawks embraced the Gospel, they became
the hajjpy subjects of a change as extraordinary
and saluUuy as that which had been experi-
enced by their converted brethren of the
Chi])peway, and other tribes of Indians.
Thus, while every attempt (and many such
have lieen tried.) to improve the condition of
the Indians by merely human expedients, has
invariably and signally failed, the "Gospel of
the grace of Goil," in the hands of mission-
aries, and ajtplied by the Holy Ghost, has tri-
umphed among them, and " created them
anew in Christ Jesus unto good works."
The labors of the six missionaries sent out
by the Committee in 1834, were greatly owned
and blessed of God, and they were enabled to
report most pleasing statements of their suc-
cess. An increased attention was given to
education, and also to the qualifying of native
teachers to preach the word of life to their
I'ellow-eountrymeu. In 1835 a whole tribe of
pagan Indians had been converted at the Kiver
St. Clair, an event so extraordinary and unex-
pected that His Excellency Sir John Colborne
remarked to one of the missionaries that, " alter
the gracious etl'ects luodueed by the Go.^ju'l on
the wretched Indians of St. Clair, there was
no room left to doubt that all the tri\ies in
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
699
Britisli North America may be converted to
the faith of Christ." This excellent mau, then
Lieutenaut-Groveroor of Upper Canada, proved
himself a true friend to the Indians. He had
several small villages built expressly for them,
with comfortable houses and good gardens for
their occupation. Mr. Stinsou, on entering
one of these comfortable cottages one day, was
met at the door by the father of the family,
and while the tears of gratitude ran down his
face, he remarked, " When I came here, nine
years ago, I was a poor drunken Indian. I
had nothing but one dirty blanket ; but now,"
pointing to the various articles of furniture
and provision in the room, '• now I have all
these good things that you see ; and, Avhat is
best of all, I have the love of Christ in my
heart."
In 1836, the missions not only maintained
their ground, but also made considerable in-
roads into the territories of Satan, and pagan-
ism was forced to retire a considerable dis-
tance before the bold and rapid advances of
Christianity. The mission schools also were
in a good state, and this year some of the more
advanced pupils were sent to the academy at
Cazenovia, N. Y., there to gain that addi-
tional information and training which would
fit them to be useful as instructors of their
countrymen.
About the same jieriod it also pleased God
to crown the patient labors of the native teach-
ers employed among the Tuscarora and Onon-
daga Indians with considerable success. Many
of these pagans had been awakened, and turned
to the Lord, among whom were two of their
principal chiefs. The Ouondagas were ex-
ceedingly intemperate and wretched, as well as
strongly addicted to the worship of idols, the
war-dance, and other abominations, and had
long withstood the zealous ctt'orts made by
their converted brethren to turn them from
the error of their ways. But among these
stones did God raise up children unto Abra-
ham.
Shahwundias, otherwise John Sunday, a
converted chief of the Chippeway tribe, and an
assistant-missionary among his people, during
the year 1837, made a visit to England. He
attended the anniversary missionary meetings
of some of the priucr[:)al auxiliaries through
that kingdom, and by his artless and Scrip-
tural account of his conversion and Christian
experience, and of the progress of the Gospel
among the Indians, he was the means of
greatly increasing the zeal of the friends of
Indian missions. The Committee, in conduct-
ing tiiesB missions, have been constantly tried
and annoyed by the selfish and wicked designs
of many unprincipled traders among these
tribes ; men who have habitually used all the
means in their power to deceive, pollute, and
rob the Indians with whom they had inter-
course. But in the midst of these and other
afflictive circumstances, our Indian brethren
have been sustained and encouraged m the
path of improvement. God raised them up
friends and protectors, who from time to time
warded off" the evils which beset them. But,
about this time, a new difficulty arose, which
was likely to produce a most unfavorable in-
fluence. It was the w^ant of a title deed of
their reservations. They justly feared that at
some future period, those small portions of ter-
ritory, which constitute all that remains to
them of the vast possessions of their fathers,
would be wrested from them, and that they
and their children would thus be deprived of
the fruits of their industry. The Committee
of the "Wesleyan Missionary Society pressed
the matter on the attention of the Colonial
Department of the British Government, in
consequence of which, and of other representa-
tions on the subject from the missionaries and
chiefs, a dispatch was addressed by the Colo-
nial Secretary to the Lieutenant-Governor of
Upper Canada, on this subject, which was pro-
ductive of the best results. Very valuable aid
was rendered in accomplishing this result by
Lieutenant-Colonel Sir Aug. d'East. A variety
of circumstances, however, which occurred
about that time, endangered the advantages
thus gained, and it was found necessary by the
Committee, if they would save these missions,
to make another special effort on their behalf.
Accordingly, the visit of the Rev. Dr. Alder,
one of the missionary secretaries to Canada,
about this period, had a special reference to
these Indian missions. Besides the insecurity
of their titles, the annual grant promised by
the British Government to this society, as a
fixed charge on the casual and territorial rev-
enue of the upper ]5rovince, to enable the Com-
mittee to support and extend their Indian and
other missions in that colony, had been with-
held ; and the Committee felt it to be a duty
which they owed to the society to urge their
claim to a part at least of the arrears due to
them, and the j^unctual payment of the grant,
at the rate fixed by Lord Glenelg, for the fu-
ture. These and other matters of importance
were brought under the notice of the colonial
government during the ^isit of Dr. Alder, by
the kind and active interference of Sir George
Arthur ; and the representations which were
made were attended with much success. £1400
were received from the colonial treasury by
Mr. Stinson, and several plans for the benefit
of the Indians engaged the earnest attention
of the head of the Indian Department. The
results of these exertions were soon witnessed in
the peace and contentment with which the In-
dians applied themselves to the improvement,
of their holdings ; in the increased attention
which they paid to the instructions of the mis-
sionaries, and in the efforts which they made
for the education of their children.
In 1S38, Kah-ke-waquonaby or Peter Jones,
a missionary and chief, visited England, and
performed a similar service for the missions-
coo
NORTH AMERICAN EsDIANS.
to thiit accomplislic(J by SJiahwundias, some
time before. The tribe, of -which the latter
is the principal chief, removed about this time
from liieir former residence at Grape Island,
to a tract of land near Rice Lake, which was
laid out in farms of 50 acres each, to which
were attached snug cottages and gardens. All
of these Indians profess Christianity ; uo ves-
tige of paganism remaining among them.
Their number is 214. In 1839, a new and ex-
tensive field of labor and usefulness was open-
ed to this society in that part of north-western
America, known as the " Territories of the
Hudson's Bay Company." In the southern por-
tion of this territory there was an Indian po-
pulation of over 10,000. In the northern
department, extending north and west from
the height of land wdich divides the waters
that flow into Lake Superior and the St. Law-
rence from those that fall into the tributaries
of the Mississippi, to the high land that di-
vides the waters which fall into the Polar Sea
from those that flow into Hudson's Bay, and
in a westerly direction from Hudson's Bay to
the Rocky Mountains — there is an Indian po-
pulation of 100,000. To these long-neglected
children of the forest the way was ojiened in
consequence of arrangements into which the
committee of this society had entered with
the governor and committee of the Hudson's
Bay Company, who made them most libe-
ral oSers of assistance to commence these mis-
sions. For the missionaries which this society
might send, whether married or single, the
Company agreed to provide board and lodg-
ing, interpreters, servants, and the means of
conveyance from place to place, free of all ex-
pense to the society. And in addition to this,
the governor and company generously contri-
buted £100 toward the passage of the first
missionaries to be sent out. In March, 1810,
Rev. Messrs. Baruley, Mason, and Ilundle
sailed for this trying and extensive field of toil,
and on their arrival were joined by that expe-
rienced and successful laborer in the work ol'
Indian evangelization, the Rev. James Kvans.
The stations they occupied were Michipiciton,
Moose Fyrt, Norway House, Lac la Pluie, and
Rocky Mountain House. In this immense field
they itinerate from the longitude of Moose
Factory, on the shores of Hudson's Bay, back
N. W., by Lake Winnipeg, to Edmonton
and the Rocky Mountains, a distance of more
than 2000 miles from cast to west, in a lati-
tude a-s high as that of Labrador.
The general superintendent of these scatter-
ed missions, in one round of visitation, has
sometimes been from home more than three
months, traveling l)y snow shoes, dog-carriage,
&c., during which time he has passed over
about G,00() miles. Situated as these missions
arc, it is hardly to be expected that they can
present large statistics for a long time to come,
inasmuch as from the scattered and migratory
■condition of the Indians, the missionaries can
do little more than visit and preach for a few
days, and then pass on, perhaps from 100 to
300 miles to the next post, there to do the
same, and so on, all round. For these 200,000
Indians this is the only evangelical agency em-
ployed, and should this be withdrawn,' they
would be left in total darkness, or to the super-
stitions of popery. In this distant sphere of
labor the missionaries are of course widely
scattered, being from 400 to 1,500 miles sepa-
rated from each other, with no opportunity for
a personal interview, and no facilities for cor--
respondence, save twice in the year ; and of
these they are by absence from home, and other
causes, sometimes unable to avail themselves.
A very efficient agent in this mission is Thomas
Hassel, an educated Indian. He can speak
English, French, Creek, and Chippewayan —
the latter being liis native language. He has
been very useful as a school teacher and in-
terpreter. Another Indian, Peter Jacobs, has
done good service as a preacher. In 1845
there were 11 classes, containing 121 members,
all of whom gave good evidence of piety. But
this was only a jiart of the membership under
the care of the missionaries, it being almost
impossible from the isolated and scattered con-
dition of the work in these regions, to obtain
anything like complete statistics of them.
The AYesleyan missions among the Indians
in Upper Canada continue to prosper. Schools
have been established, and translations effected
into the Mohawk, the Oneida, the Ojibwa, and
the Munsey languages. Much is being ac-
complished for the elevation of these peojile
by means of industrial schools, particularly
those at Ahnvick and Blount Elgin ; and a
great deal more might be done were the pecu-
niary means at the disposal of the Society.
It is very affecting to read the appeals fre-
(jiiently made to the missionaries by tribes in
their vicinity, who are uttering the Macedoni-
an cry. As an apt illustration of the anxiety
of the people to receive instruction, ]\Ir.
McDougall reports the following speech of a
chief of the Garden River band of Indians,
which was addressed to him before leaving his
station to attend the Canadian Conference :
" Black Coat, I want to say a few words. I
want to say them strong. AVe Avant you to
repeat them to the Big Bhvck Coat, and to the
black coat^ asseinljled in council. The Indi-
ans down south have fathers and mothers. "We
are orphans. The Great Spirit has done a
great deal for them ; he has given them a rich
country. He has also sent them missionaries,
who have been ])arents to them. The great
Wonnin Chief (the (^ueen of llngland) has
been a mother to tliem. She has assisted their
missionary in building large schools among
them, and in teaching them how to work.
'IMiey are not poor ; tliey have i)!enty of kind
friends. Not .so with us; we are oriihans —
we who live on the north shore of Huron and
Superior. The Great Spirit lias not given us
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
601
•SJBioqog
pnt! gjaqraajij
Saipnpnt 'dtqs
-^OM. aiiqnd no
o o
C-1 o
o o
to"
o
Total Number of Scholars,
deducting for those who
attend both Sabbath
and Woek-day Schools.
1
. -)l
-*
g
3
■saxog
qjoq JO SJupqag
-XvQ JO Jaqmnx
^
■siooqag
-S'BQ JO joqranj^
1-1
CO
•saxag qjoq
JO BJBloqas-qjuq
-qug JO Joqmn^si
: 8
o
■Slooqog-qjTjq
-quS JO jaqraiix
: ^
1-K
■diqsjoqiuajt
•i«I I«HX "0
o
o
■saaqiuajt qajuq3
pajipajaay pun
nn^ JO jaqtun^^
CO o
CO CI
g
o
of
e
o 1
t. bo
a
"A
CO
ill
. rii
^
3 el a
xn
ill
Eh
e^i c^
•fe'lUBJSISSV
puB sauunoissij^
O H
?)
•saaBi,j-SaiqDuai<j
aaqjo \o aaqmn^
•siaduqo
JO Jaquin^*^
: ^
r-(
CENTRAL OR
PRINCIPAL STATIONS
OR CIRCUITS.
c
a
c
c
c
1
1
S
u -a
W
^
1
a ricli country ; the missionary has not taiipht
us the white man's religion; no teacher Las
been sent us, nor school- house built for u^.
We are poor. We have no kind great fathers
or mothers to i:)rotcct us ; we are worse than
our forefathers were many years ago. Our
forests were full of wild animals — deer, bear,
beaver, &c. ; but the white man came and in-
duced us to kill off all our furs. He brought
his steamboats and large nets, and drove the
fish from our shores. We are poor, and we are
becoming more so every year. Xow we want
you to say to the big black coats that we ask
them to help us. We Avant them very much.
We want our sons and daughters to understand
paper, and to learn to work. Tell them that
we live in a very large country, and that there
are a great many of us. Tell them about this
place, that it lies between Huron and Superior ;
that the land is good ; that we raise potatoes,
oats, turnips, etc., and all sell for a great price ;
but that the Indian knows little about making
gardens. Tell them we ask for a school like
the one some of us saw at Alnwick, when we
went to Moncyaung (Montreal) three years
ago. We are willing to give some of the 'best
of our land for a farm, and assist in building
the houses ; but we must have white man to
teach us the way." — Authorities : Weslet/an
3l!ssionary Notices and Annual Reports.— W.
Butler.
American Board.— At the anniversary of
the American Board, in Sept. 1816, measures
were reported preparatory to the establish-
ment of a mission among the Cherokee In-
dians, located chiefly within the bounds of the
State of Georgia. In January, 1817, Eev.
]\lr. Kingsbury arrived at Chickamnuga, in
the Cherokee nation, and commenced prepa-
rations for an establishment there. In March
following he was joined by the Eev. Messrs.
Hall and Williams, with their wives. Before
the close of the year they were joined by other
missionaries, and the name of the station was
changed to Brainerd, in honor of that devoted
missionary. This place is situated one mile
X. of the 35th parallel of latitude, and seven
miles S. E. of the Tennessee river ; consequent-
ly in that part of the Cherokee country, which
falls within the limits of Tennessee. It is
about 250 miles from Augusta, Ga. At the
close of about a year they had a mission-house,
a school-house, and 45 acres of cultivated land.
Forty-seven Cherokee children were under a
successful course of instruction.
In 1818, a mission was commenced among
the Choctaws, by the Eev. Messrs. Kingsbury
and Williams, from the Brainerd station? The
place selected for the station M'as called Eliot,
situated within the bounds of the State of
Mississippi, near the Yazoo river, and 400
miles W. S.W. of the Brainerd station, in the
Cherokee nation. In August of that year they
felled the first tree on the mission ground, and
in the following April they had erected eleven
602
NORTH AMERICAN INDL\NS.
log dwellings, a mill-house, stable, store-house,
and several outbuildings. They had also clear-
ed 35 acres of good land, and enclosed it with
a substantial fence, besides enclosing gardens
and yards for cattle, and constructing several
roads and bridges. In this Avork they were
assisted by the Choctaws, who had never be-
fore been instructed in anj' such arts. JMcan-
wliile they had preaching every Sabljath, at-
tended by a number of natives, and some half-
breeds, and negroes. During this year some
preliminary steps were taken towards estab-
lishing a mission among that portion of the
Cherokee nation who had removed to the
Arkansas, on the west side of the Mississippi
river, and also among the Chickasaws, whose
country lay partly between that of the Chero-
kees and Choctaws.
The report of the Board for 1820 speaks of
the conversion of several natives among the
Cherokees at Braincrd, and of the gathering of a
church of 20 members, including 3 or 4 negroes.
Particular mention is made of Catharine Brown
and her brother David, two Cherokee converts
of great promise. Having occasion to visit
theii^ lather, who was sick, David read and ex-
plained to him the Bible, and maintained
family worship, and also conversed freely with
their friends and neighbors, warning them to
flee fr(<m the wrath to come. Several were
thus led to inquire for the way of truth.
The station at Eliot, among the Choctaws,
is reported this year, 1820, after an existence
of two years, as having eight commodious log-
cabins, a mill-house, and a blacksmith's and
joiner's shop ; a lumber-house, granary, and
stable ; more than two hundred neat cattle,
teams of oxen, and horses ; wagons, carts,
plows, and other implements of hiisl)andry,
suflicient for a large plantation. The import-
ance of these things to a tribe entirely savage,
till the missionaries went among them, and
without the least knowledge of agriculture,
will be readily understood. They had also a
school of seventy or eighty youths, male and
female, taught in the elementary l)ranches, and
in agriculture and domestic labor. It was a
most encouraging A\ct, that the Choctaw
chiefs, from the first, manifested the most
friendly disposition towards the mission. 'J'hey
contributed for the support of the mission-
school $2,000 a year for sixteen years, from
each of the three districts of their nation,
making 80,000 a year, or a total of $90,000.
This large sum Mas their proportion of the
proceeds of land sold to the United States
government. Such a gift, freely nnule, shows
a surprising appreciation of the importance of
ediK-alion, among a people, till lately, ignorant
of cviiy thing but the simple arts of fishing
and hunting.
_ Jn January, 1821, Dr. Klizur Butler. ])hy-
BJcian, and Rev. AVilliam I'ottcr, arrived at
Braincrd, as missionaries amonp the Chero-
kees. The mission had been extended, and
was to embrace 3 out-stations, viz., Taloneney,
Chatooga, and Creekpath. In connection
with Creekpath is mentioned one of the most
remarkable displays of Diviue grace which
the history of missions affords, viz. : the con-
version of the entire family of Mr. John
Brown, consisting of eight ])ersons. The con-
version of Catharine and David Brown, and
their visit to their sick father, have already
been mentioned. The father was converted,
and subsequently the mother, a son's wife, and
three sisters of Catharine. Tlyis a whole fa-
mily emerged in a short time from pagan
darkness into the light of the glorious Gospel.
The Choctaw mission was strengthened
during this year, by the arrival of several ad-
ditional laborers. Besides the station at
Eliot, three others, viz., at Mayhew, 100 miles
east from Eliot, the Six Towns, and the French
Camps, were commenced. Rev. Dr. "Worces-
ter, corresponding secretary of the Board,
died this year, while on a visit to the Choctaw
missions.
In 1822 there were 218 Cherokee children
in the school at Braincrd, rapidly improving
in their studies, and in various departments of
industry. The oldest chiss of girls sustained,
it was said, a. better examination than most
girls of the same age who have attended school
constantly from their early years. Several of
the most promising scholars had become pious,
and others were anxiously inquiring the way
of salvation.
Rev. Mr. Butrick, of the Cherokee mission,
reported this year, 1 822, considerable progress
in the acquisition of the language. He found
it " very artificial and complicated, evincing,
beyond a doubt, that it was once spoken by a
highly-cultivated people." i\Ir. B. had made
translations into Cherokee of several portions
of the Scriptures, a summary of Christian doc
trines and duties, and several hymns for pub-
lic worship.
The report for 1823 shows an extension of
the Cherokee mission ; three new stations
having been occu])ied, viz., llightower, 80 miles
S. S. E. fnmi Braincrd; "Wilistown, 50 miles
S. AV. from ihainerd ; and llaweis, 00 miles
south from Braincrd. In connection with the
Creekpath station, is noticed this year the
death of Catharine Brown. She had been an
ornament to religion since joining the church
in 1818, and died a happy Jlcath. An impor-
tant and solemn transaction occurred this year
— the admission to the church of four hrothcrs,
named Sanders, their mother, the; wives of two
of the brothers, and one sister. 'J'hcse having
been baptized, proceeded to dedicate their
household to (iod in the same ordinance, to
the inunber of 21, some of them adults. Says
, ]Mr. Hall, one of the mi.^sionaries, "It was a
I melting scene; scarcclv was a dry eye in the
' house. It was not without exertu)n that some
i kept from weci.ing aloud, 'i'he ugcd nu)ther
land the rest of the family appeared deeply af-
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
603
fected." Two or three other members of this
family were soou afterwards cooverted.
Many interesting- facts are stated this year,
1823, by the missionaries among the Choc-
taws. In the school at Eliot were about 40
chikh'cn, the greater part of whom could read
the Bible and write a legible hand. Some
■were expert in translating from English into
Choctaw, and from Choctaw into English ;
others had made considerable progress in
arithmetic and in drawing maps. Messrs. By-
ington and Wright had made some progress in
reducing- to form the elements of the Choctaw
language, assisted by Mr. David Folsom, who
had spent four years at the Foreign Mission
School at Cornwall, Ct. They had agreed
upon an alphabet, and assigned the powers of
the vowels, marks of accent, &c. To adopt a
uniform mode of spelling was extremely diffi-
cult, owing to the variations of speaking
among the natives, who used various letters
interchangeably, as b for m, and m for h, &c.
Some thousands of words, however, had been
collected, and Mr. Byington had acquired
some facility in speaking " this strange lan-
guage."
The Mayhew station experienced a severe
bereavement this year, in the death of Mrs.
Kingsbury. She was a woman of rare quali-
fications, and a devoted missionary. She had
left a father's house, abounding with all the
comforts of a New England home, for the su-
perintendence of a large mission family, among
the ignorant and neglected children of the
forest ; yet she never once regretted her deci-
sion. On her death she only lamented that
she had not done more for Christ.
The station called French Camps, received
this year the name of Bethel. It is about GO
miles S. W. from Mayhew, and the same dis-
tance S. E. from Eliot. Another Choctaw sta-
tion was commenced about this time at a
place called Emmaus, 140 miles S. E. from
Mayhew, near the line which separates Missis-
sippi from Alabama, and not far from the
•white settlements of the south. Another sta-
tion was commenced at Yok-e-ua Chu-ka-ma,
115 miles S. W. from Mayhew, and 120 miles
N. W. from Mobile.
Two important laws were passed by the
Choctaw nation during the year "1823 ; one
■v\'as for the suppression of intemperance, and
the other related to infanticide. For a long
time the Choctaws had carried on a great
trade in whisky. Those who could, paid mo-
uey for it, others gave cattle, clothes, blankets,
guns, and every species of property. Their
love of whisky exceeded all bounds, and
there were white people from the States, un-
principled and vile enough to furnish it to
them. The consequence was, poverty, wretch-
edness, quarreling and murder tilled the
country. The law passed by the chiefs near-
ly suppressed this great evil.
The inhuman practice of infanticide had ex-
isted among the Choctaws from time immemo-
rial, though this fact was not known till the
missionaries went among them. A father or
mother, to get rid of the trouble or support of an
infant, would kill it by burying it alive, stamp-
ing on its breast, strangling- it, or knocking
it on the head. This horrid custom the chiefs,
enlightened by missionary efforts, put an end
to by very stringent laws. The first punish-
ment under the new law was that of a woman
who had killed her infant by knocking it on
the head with a pine knot. She was tied to a
tree and whipped till she fainted ; and her hus-
band, who instigated the deed, was punished in
the same manner.
Supposed witchcraft was another cause of
much suffering to this people. They experi-
enced imaginary terrors from the apprehension
that evil spirits exerted a supernatural power
to do them harm,; and besides this, application
was often made to a conjurer that he would
designate a witch, and for some paltry fee he
would fix upon some person, generally a avo-
man, as the cause of the calamity complained
of. The devoted object was then hunted down
and slain, or obtained safety by flight. But
this evil disappeared as the light of the Gospel
increased.
The mission among the Cherokees on the
Arkansas was now in successful operation.
The seat of the mission was at a place called
Dwight, on the Illinois Creek, about four miles
north of the Arkansas, and nearly 500 miles,
following the course of the stream, from the
junction of this river with the Mississippi.
There were at this station, in 1823, two mis-
sionaries, two teachers, and one mechanic.
It may be proper to state here the reason
why some of the Cherokee tribe were found on
the other side of the Mississippi. In the first
place some of them wandered thither for the
purpose of hunting. Afterwards, as they grew
more mimerous, a treaty was made with the
United States, by which these Indians ex-
changed their lands in Georgia and Tennessee,
for lands on the Arkansas river. This led to
a considerable migration, so that nearly one-
third of the Cherokee tribe removed to a place
700 miles west of the place of their nativity.
They were composed chiefly of that portion of
the Cherokees who were least inclined to look
with a favorable eye upon missions, schools,
and civilization, so that the prejudices to be
encountered among them were peculiarly
strong. A school was, however, established,
and gradually the jealousy of the Indians gave
way, and they rejoiced in the education of their
children. As the system of education included
manual labor at agriculture, or the mecha-
nic arts, many objections were raised on this
ground, but the great utility of such arts was
at length seen, and opposition died away.
From the very commencement of missionary
labors among the North American Indians,
doubts were very extensively entertained as to
G04
NORTH AJMERICAN INDIANS.
the possibility of their conversion, or even civ-
ilization. They were looked ujoon as wild men,
savages, incorrigibly addicted to hunting, fish-
in"-, and wars among themselves, and the at-
tempt to make them .an agricultural, sober,
and Christian people, was regarded by many
o-ood men as hopeless. The common remark
was, " The Indian will be an Indian in spite of
all that can be done for him." This deep pre-
judice, however, gradually gave way before the
facts which were circulated through the reports
of the Board and other ])ublications. In their
journal for 1823, the missionaries, alluding to
the prevailing impression, say, "We think it
■R-ould be impossible to show any substantial
reasons for thinking that the aborigines of
America are in a more hopeless state than the
inhabitants of Asia or Africa. That such a
belief is erroneous is incontrovertibly manifest,
from the labors of Eliot, the Mayhews, Brain-
erd, and the United Brethren." In noticing
these remarks the Board say, " Beyond all
reasonable doubt, divine truth is as likely to
be efScacious upon the heart of a Cherokee,
who has arrived at mature age, as upon any
other man who has grown up in ignorance and
sin."
The above facts are important as showing
the peculiar embarrassments of the Board in
its early efforts among the Indian tribes of
this country. Missions to the Islander and
the Hindoo might be successful, but not those
to the red man of the forest. But the Board
and its missionaries had more faith, and pur-
sued their object with a steady purpose.
The Cherokee mission in 1823 and 1824
was marked by a steady progress, and the
Board were led to remark, in their review, that
the Cherokees were " making advances in civ-
ilization and a well regulated society. The
dwellingD arc made more comfortable from
year to year, regular industry is more pursued,
laws are enacted and executed which restrain
from immorality and secure a respect for civil
government, and a desire for acquiring an
education is becoming more prevalent."
The Choctaw mission was enlarged this
year by the occupancy of several new stations.
Mr. Byington, Mr. Wright, and some other
members of the mission, were giving special
attention to the language, in order that they
might communicate religious instruction to
those who could not understand English.
Whisky drinking had been very much dimin-
ished, and the whoop of a drunken Indian had
not l)een heard for some months. This change
had been eflccted in great measure by the
laws of the Choctaws themselves. A dreadful
mortality prevailed among this people during
1823 and lH24,and 2,()00 are supposed to havV
died in 18 months, which was about one-tenth
of the whole population. The' prevalent dis-
ease was the measles.
The mission among the Cherokees of the
Arkansas was more systematic and regular in
its operations than the others, owing to the fact
of its having but one station, that at Dwight.
The school contained 60 scholars, and the mis-
sionaries say, " The number might be increased
to 100 or 150 within a few days, if we would
open our doors for their reception. But our
limited resources forbid our enlarging the num-
ber." In their report this year the Board say,
" As the missionaries become more acquainted
with the state of this tribe, especially by hold
ing intercourse with the more aged, and mak-
ing inquiries respecting former times, they are
convinced that anciently the people had the
knowledge of the true God ; but a long period
must have elapsctl since the glory departed
from them. In many instances the adult na-
tives have never heard of the immortality of
the soul. In others they entertain a vague
notion that the good and the bad go to differ-
ent places in the future world. But how it is
possible for a bad man to become good they
do not know. Indeed they have no clear idea
of wdiat goodness or badness is, no just views
of sin, no idea of forgiveness, no conception of
a holy God or a universal Providence."
A highly favorable mention is made this
year of Mr. John Brown, a Choctaw who
joined the Foreign Mission School at Corn-
wall in 1820, and subsequently spent two years
at Andover, making at both places very rapid
25rogrcss in his studies. After lecturing to
crowded audiences in the principal cities of
the north on the condition of his nation, and
spending a season at Washington, he returned
to his countrymen and to his father's house,
near Dwight, where he was received with
much kindness and attention.
As the missions among the various tribes of
Indians begin to assume at this period a more
distinct and important, as well as complicated
character, in the reports and journals, and as
the number reciuiring notice is from time to
time increased, a separate and continued ac-
count of each down to the present time will, it
is thought, be a matter of convenience to the
reader, and this method will be hereafter
adopted. In ])ursuance of this jolan, we take
up, as first in the order of time.
The Mission among the Cherokees. — The pro-
gress of the work from its commencement, in
January, 1817, down to 1824, has already
been briefly sketched. At the period last
named, we find the mission to the Cherokees
in the .Southern States occupying seven sta-
tions, viz.,Brainerd, Carmel, Creckpath, High-
tower, Willstown, ITaweis, and Candy's Creek.
'I'he geographical position of Brainerd. lligh-
towLT, ^Villstown, and Ilaweis. has already
lieen desigiuited. Carmel is M-ithin the char-
tered limits of Georgia, 02 miles from Brain-
anl, and 4(5 miles north-west of the Chatahoo-
chee river. Creekpath is within the State of
Alabama, four miles south of the Teimessee
river ; Ilightower is in Georgia, 3.5 miles
S.S.W. of Carmel ; Willstown is in Alabama,
NORTH AAIERIOAN INDIANS.
605
10 miles from the w^steru line of Georgia,
and Candy's Creek is in Tennessee, 25 miles
N.B. of Brainerd. The number of laborers
at these seven stations at this period (1824,)
including missionaries, teachers, farmers, me-
chanics, and the wives of these several classes,
amounted to 30.
The number of scholars in the mission
schools among the Cherokees was less at this
period than in some former years, partly be-
cause more discrimination was used in taking
children into families. The good done was at
no time greater.
It was in this year that the missionaries,
and the churches under their care at Brainerd,
Carmel, Hightower, and Willstown, wero re-
ceived into the Union Presbytery of East
Tennessee. It was expected that this would
naturally increase the interest felt in missions
by the ministers and churches in the adjacent
new settlements.
Another event of importance to the mission
and to the whole Cherokee nation, was the
invention of a form of alphabetical writing
by George Guess. He was a Cherokee, and
could neither speak nor read English, yet he
became acquainted with a leading principle of
the English language, viz., that marks or cha-
racters can be made the symbols of sound, and
he conceived the notion that he could express
all the syllables of the Cherokee language by
separate characters. On collecting all the
syllables which, after long study and trial, he
could recall to memory, he found the number
to be 82. In order to express these, he took
the letters of our alphabet for a part of them,
and various modifications of our letters, with
some characters of his own invention, for the
rest. With these symbols he set about writ-
ing letters : and very soon a correspoideuce
was actually maintained between him and his
countrymen beyond the Mississippi, 500 miles
apart. This soon became a matter of great
interest, and young Cherokees traveled great
distances to be instructed in this new and
easy method of writing and reading. In three
days they were able to commence letter writ-
ing, and return home to their native villages
prepared to teach others. Subsequently,
either Guess or some other person, discovered
four other syllables, making all the known
syllables of the Cherokee language 86. It is
a curious fact that all syllables in Cherokee
end with vowels. The same is true of the lan-
guage of the islanders of the Pacific Ocean.
But in the Choctaw language syllables often
end with consonants.
The mission among the Cherokees of the
Arkansas has, as already noticed, only the sta-
tion at Uwight, which is near the Arkansas
river, about 200 miles from its mouth in a
direct line, and 500 miles by the course of the
river. There were at this place, in 1824, 12
white persons, including two missionaries, a
teacher, a steward, a farmer, and a mechanic,
and their wives. There was a school for boys,
and one for girls, which were making very en-
couraging progress, and the missionaries ex-
pressed the opinion that many of the pupils
would not suffer by a comparison with scholars
of their age in any of the states. These chil-
dren were but a little while before wandering
in the forest, totally without mental and
moral cultivation.
In 1825, Rev. Samuel A. Worcester and his
wife joined the mission at Brainerd, and, at
the same time, two farmers, with their wives
and a female teacher, went out to be employed
at different stations. The schools at Brainerd
were in a fine condition. As evidence of ca-
pacity in the Indian youth, it was stated that
a boy, ten years old, who had been in school
less than five months, not having previously
learned the English alphabet, was spelling in
words of three syllables, and had never missed
but a single word. To master in so short a
time a foreign language, and one so arbitrary
in its mode of spelling, indicates very unusual
quickness and strength of mind. The educa-
tion of females was found to be of great assist-
ance in the work of civilization. At the
Willstown station, an important moral refor-
mation liad taken place. When the first mis-
sionary came there, in 1823, the intemperate
use of ardent spirits was almost universal ;
but, now, intoxicating liquor was entirely dis-
used by a great majority of the people, and
riotous assemblages were unknown.
The knowledge of Guess's alphabet was in-
creasing, and many adults who had never
learnt the English letters, and never would, it
was thought, would immediately read the Xew
Testament, if printed and written in this char-
acter. As an evidence of the progress of civ-
ilization, the trial by jury was introduced this
year, and conducted with great solemnity.
The national council alsa appropriated money
money
for the establishment of a printing-press, with
English and Cherokee types, and for laying
the foundation of a public school. In aid of
those objects, Mr. Elias Boudiuot visited the
northern states, and received liberal patron-
age.
As the Cherokees occupied portions of sev-
eral states, and the question of boundaries and
titles was one of great importance, the secre-
taries took occasion this year to state, in their
report, that the Indian titles were in no way
aftected by the limits of different states, whe-
ther fixed by the states themselves, or by Con-
gress. The national authorities had uniformly
admitted that the tribes of Indians in North
America had a perfect right to the soil of
their ancestors, now in their own occupancy,
unless that right had been voluntarily relin-
quished for a good consideration. " When we
speak, therefore, of Indian territory, as lyino-
in the State of Tennessee, or in the State of
Georgia, it is not intended that the Indians
there residing are subject to the laws of the
606
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
whites, or that the running- of a line through
their country, or marking it upon a map, has
any effect to impair their claims, or dispossess
them of their patrimonial inheritance. The
only way iu which this inheritance can be
alienated, is by treaties fairly and honorably
made, and with the full assent of the present
owners." These remarks will enable the read-
er to judge, not only of the rights of the In-
dians, but of the maimer in which those rights
were subsequently treated by the national gov-
ernment, it may l)c added, that large tracts
had already been sold by treaties, to the Uni-
ted States, and the territories which remained
to the Cherokces contained about 12,000
square miles, or 8,000,000 acres. About two-
thirds of this country lay in the north-west
corner of Georgia, one-fifth in the north-east
part of Alabama, one-tenth in the south-east
part of Tennessee, and a small portion iu the
south-west corner of North Carolina. The
Cherokee population was supposed, in 1825,
to be about 14.000. They had already made
great advances in learning, and in agriculture
and mechanic arts. The national council met
annually for the exercise of legislative func-
tions, and government was administered ac-
cording to the usages of civilized countries.
A regular constitution, however, had not been
adopted, and in the sunnncr of 182G a council
was held, and a committee appointed to draft
a constitution. Measures were also taken this
year at Boston, to prepare types in the pecu-
liar character invented by Guess, and to pro-
vide a printing-press for the nation.
In tlie autunui of 1827, Mr. David Greene
was appointed to visit all the missionary sta-
tions among the Indians in the south-western
and western parts of the United States, which
service he performed, — traveling 6,000 miles,
inspecting 30 stations, and reaching Boston in
July, 1828. His report, so far as it related to
the ('herokees, authorized the statement, that
nearly all the adult population, and in the
tribe at large more than half, were actually
capable of reading their own language, a fact
almost incredible, but for the facilities aiforded
by the alphabet of (jiuess. There was a won-
derful improvement, also, in regard to houses,
dress, style of living, industry, dec. ; the men
being found upon well-cultivated farms, and
the women spinning a)id weaving cotton, and
providing garments of their own nmnufacture.
More than 500 children had been taught in
the mission schools, and IGO communicants
belonged to the churches of the .sevei^ stations.
This was justly considiM-ed by the Board and
the missionaries very great and encouraging
progress to have been made in ten years,"and
it ought to have silenced forever the objection
that tlic Indiiins could not be civilized and
Cliristianizcd. Rarely, if ever, has missionary
labor l)een i)roductive'of greater results, within
the same piriod. in any licatlien country.
In 1S2S. Mr. AV'orcestcr occupied a new sta-
tion at Xcw Echota, not far from Brainerd
and devoted himself chiefly to the translation
of the Scriptures, and the preparation of reli-
gious books and tracts. A printing-press had
been put in operation at this place, at the ex-
pense of the Cherokees.
Among the Cherokees of the Arkansas, dur-
ing the few years just noticed, operations were
continued with general success. At Dwight
a house of worship had been erected, and there
was no family in which some were not hope-
fully pious. Within 25 miles of this place
there was a population of 1.200, not including
the whites, and stated preaching Avas main-
tained in various neighborhoods among these
people. Schools were sustained, and the
progress made in education, husbandry, &c.,
was similar to that among the Cherokees in
the southern states. A United States agent,
Major Duval, residing near Dwight, declared
to the corresponding secretary, that a single
school for girls at that place, had done more
to improve the condition of the Indians, than
all the sums of money expended by the gov-
ernment, in furnishing them with implemcuta
of husbandry, and annual distributions of
clothing.
In 1829, we find the Cherokees possessed of
a regularly organized civil government, and of
a written language, unlike any other that ever
existed, and yet complete, by the use of which
adults could learn to read their native tongue
iu ten, five, and even three days ; and this lan-
guage the invention of an uninstructed Cher-
okee ! For a considerable time this mission
had attracted special attention, both because
it was the first mission of the Board to the
American Indians, and because of the success
which had attended it. But now the ej'cs of
America and of many people in Europe began
to be directed with new interest to this tribe,
on account of the measures which were in
contemplation for their removal. The Chero-
kees themselves began to be in great fear and
anxiety lest they should be driven from the
lands received from their fathers, and con-
strained to migrate to a country for which
they had no attachment, and whicli, in their
view, would lie only a resting-place for a few
years, when they would be again driven off,
dispersed, and destroyed.
In Septemlier of this year the nation was
deprived of one of its most u.scful and valued
men, Mr. David Brown. lie became pious in
1820, acquired his education at the north, and
traveled nnich in the United States, receiving
everywhere the esteem and affection of the
people. He had been much engaged in public
business, but at the time of his last illness was
studying with a view to preach the Gosjtel.
He was the fifth member of the same family
who had died in the triumphs of the Christian
faith.
In 18.30, we find the Cherokee nation in an
iucreasinglv troubled and distracted state. A
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
60T
treaty for their removal had already been
formed between the United States government
and leading men of the tribe, in opposition,
however, to a large majority of the Chero-
kees. The subject was engrossing the atten-
tion of Congress and of the nation, and it
seemed a fitting time for the secretaries to re-
cord publicly their views of the subject, as it
related to the Cherokees ; and accordingly,
in their report of this year, they said, " What-
ever may be thought of some questions relat-
ing to this matter, the following points are
indisputable, viz., that treaties in existence
between the United States and the Cherokee
nation guarantee the inviolability of the Cher-
okee territory and of the Cherokee govern-
ment ; that the words in which these engage-
ments are expressed are perfectly plain, not
admitting of doubt or cavil ; and that these
words express what was the real meaning of
the parties at the time, and what was under-
stood to be the meaning by both parties for
more than forty years. It is true, also, that
the Cherokees conceive themselves to have a
perfect right to their own country, and that
they are unwilling to leave it. The few who
have consented to emigrate, have done so from
the apprehension that all would be compelled
to remove, and that those who remained lon-
gest would be in the most unfavorable circum-
stances." In March of the same year, Sir.
Worcester wrote a letter on the subject of the
advancement of the Cherokees in civilization,
and their feelings with regard to a removal,
and addressed it to a member of the Cherokee
deputation at Washington. It was printed by
the Senate, and appended to a report from the
War Department. It gave a fair and candid ac-
count of the actual condition of the Cherokees,
and may be found in the Herald of May, 1830.
Amid all these disturbances, public religious
meetings were held at all the stations as usual,
and»the schools and printing-press were kept
in operation. At tiie beginning of 1831
there were eight churches, embracing in all
219 members, at the stations occupied by
this mission, of whom 167 were Cherokees,
and the remainder were of African descent,
or white persons residing in the nation. The
number of scholars in all the schools was 150,
which was less than usual, the school at Brain-
erd having been broken up by the burning of
their school-house. A Cherokee Sunday-school
Union had been organized, embracing six
schools, eight teachers, and 113 scholars.
During the year, the mission had also printed
1,400 copies of the Cherokee hymn-book,
1,000 copies of the Gospel of Matthew, and
3,000 copies of a tract of twelve pages, con-
sisting of extracts from the Old and New
Testaments. These had all been prepared by
Mr. Worcester, assisted by Elias Boudinot,
who was at the same time editor of a well-
conducted and useful paper, called the " Cher-
okee Phcenix."
At the period just named, fourteen years
from the commencement of the mission, the
secretaries could say, " The mass of the peo-
ple, in their dress, houses, furniture, agricultu-
ral implements, manner of cultivating the
soil, raising stock, providing for their families,
and in their estimate of the value of an edu-
cation, will not suffer by a comparison with
the whites in the surrounding settlements.
The mass of the people have externally em-
braced the Christian religion. Intemperance,
the bane of the Indian as well as the white
man, has been checked ; the laws of the na-
tion rigorously exclude intoxicating liquors
from all public assemblies ; and numerous so-
cieties for the promotion of temperance have
been organized." But in spite of these im-
provements and these laws, the secretaries
were ol^liged to add, in their report for 1831,
that " the nation has been made to experience
nearly all the political and domestic evils with
which, for two or three years, they had been
threatened. Their government has been nearly
prostrated ; their council has been forbidden
to assemble ; their laws have been declared
null and void, and their magistrates prohibited,
under severe penalties, from enforcing them ;
intoxicating liquors have been introduced with-
out restraint ; their country has been traversed
by armed troops ; their property has been
plundered, their persons arrested and imprison-
ed ; the land which they know is theirs by im-
memorial possession, and which has been guar-
anteed to them by numerous and perfectly ex-
plicit treaties, has been claimed by others, and
surveyed, and they themselves threatened with
immediate ejectment. These and other vexa-
tions and suiferings to which they have been
subjected, have filled the nation with anxiety
and alarm." In this condition of discourage-
ment, and almost of despair, some, as was to
be expected, gave themselves up to idleness
and intemperance, and ceased to cultivate fields
and erect buildings, not knowing who should
possess them. The future was all dark, for if
they could not hold their present country they
could be secure of no resting-place, however it
might be secured to them by solemn treaties.
The Board had already addressed a memorial
to Congress on this sul:)ject, the preparation of
which was the last official act of the Corres-
ponding Secretary, Rev. Dr. Cornelius. It was
referred to the Committee on Indian Affairs,
but was not known to produce any important
results.
In addition to all the other embarrassments
thrown in the way of the mission, and the dis-
tresses caused to the Cherokees, the missiona-
ries themselves began, in 1831, to be arrested
and imprisoned. In January of this year, the
missionaries at Carmel, Hightower, Haweis,
and New Echota, the four stations lying within
the territory claimed by Georgia, were served
with copies of a law, then just passed, declar-
incr, in substance, that all white men found
608
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
within the State after the first of the following
March, without having taken an oath of alle-
giance to the State, would be imprisoned
in the penitentiary at hard labor, for a terra
of not less than four years. But there were
important and obvious reasons why the mis-
sionaries should not abandon the field ; and
they could not take the prescribed oath with-
out an admission that Georgia was right.
They therefore concluded to remain at their
posts and abide the consequences. They
were unmolested till the 12th of March, when
a detachment of the Georgia guard, consist-
ing of twenty-six armed and mounted men,
jn-oceeded to each of the four stations named,
and arrested three of the missionaries, viz.,
Messrs. Proctor, Worcester, and Thompson.
The fourth, Mr. Buttrick, was absent. They
■were taken to the head-quarters of the guard,
where they employed legal counsel, and
•were set free by the judge of the Superior
Court of Gwinnet county, on the ground that
they were under the patronage of the United
States government, and were in such a sense
its agents that the laws of Georgia did not
apply to them. They therefore returned to
their stations, anticipating no further troubles
of this nature.
A correspondence was now held between the
Governor of Georgia and the President of the
United States, the result of which was a state-
ment by the president, that he did not consider
the missionaries as being in any sense agents
of the government. Upon this the mission-
aries received letters, informing them of their
exposure, and giving them ten days to remove
out of the State or take the recpiired oath.
Messrs. Buttrick, Proctor and Thompson
thought it expedient to remove with then- fa-
milies. Dr. Butler was arrested, but released
on account of sickness in his family, upon a
promise that he would deliver himself up at the
proper time. Mr. Thompson, who continued
to visit his station at High tower, was subse-
quently arrested and treated in the most brutal
manner. Though seriously ill, and offering to
furnish himself a horse, he was compelled to
walk, and when he could M-alk no longer he
■was tlirust into a rao.st offensive and uncomfort-
able wagon. At one time he was chained.
After being locked up in jail awhile he was
dismissed, and told to go where he pleased, but
no provision was made for his return. A
month later, Mr. Worcester and Dr. Butler
were again arrested, and subjected to cruelties
and indignities such ;i,s savages themselves
would scarcely inflict upon their captives. 'J'he
shocking and painful details of the treatment
which they received from the military, both
on tlic march and in the filthy aiid wretched
prison into which they were thrust, arc given
at lengtli in a letter written by Mr. AVorces-
ter, and published in the annual report for
1831. 'i'liey were finally taken out of the
bauds of the military, and released, on giving
bonds to appear at the superior court of Gwin-
net county, in September. On the 2.')th of
that month they were tried, and Mr. Worces-
ter and Dr. Butler, with eight other white
men, one a missionary of the Methodist Epis-
copal church, were sentenced to four yeara
hard labor in the penitentiary. On arriving
at the door of the prison they were all of-
fered a pardon and release, on condition of
their removing from the State, or taking the
oath of allegiance to the laws of Georgia,
and all but two of them' accepted of these
humiliating terras. Mr. Worcester and Dr.
Butler, believing that obedience to such laws
would be treason against God, conceded no-
thing, and were committed to the penitentiary.
Measures were taken to bring the matter
before the Supreme Court of the United
States, and a writ of error having been grant-
ed by the justices of that court, the case was .
brought up and ably argued, in February 1832,
by Messrs. Wirt and Sergeant in behalf of the
plaintiffs in error. The decision was pro-
nounced by Chief-Justice Marshall, on the 3d
of the following INIarch. I't reviewed the
whole subject of Indian titles, the treaties
which had been made with the Indians, and
the recent laws of Georgia, which extended
the jurisdiction of the State over the Chero-
kee country, and these laws were pronounced
repugnant to the Constitution, to treaties, and
to the laws of the United States. The man-
date of the Court was immediately issued,
reversing and annulling the judgment of the
Superior Court of Georgia, and ordering that
all proceedings on tlie indictment against the
prisoners do forever cease, and that the prisoners
be, and hereby are dismissed therefrom.
]{ut the Superior Court of Georgia refused
to obey the mandate, or to discharge the pris-
oners. A memorial to the President of the
United States was prepared by the counsel for
the prisoners, praying him to interpose liis
authority for enforcing the decision of 'the
CoTH-t. Upon consultation, however, it was
thought inexpedient to j)resent the memorial ;
neither was it thought advisable to prosecute
the case by a second appeal to the Supreme
Court ; for it was well understood, that though
tliat Court would sustain its own decision, the
President, (Andrew Jackson) was not ini-lincd
to enforce it. and therefore the result would be
doubtful. Further, the missionaries had the
a.ssurance of an unconditional release, provi-
ded they would desist frdm the attempt to
obtain that release by a military enforcement
of the decision of the Sujirerae Court. This
assurance came not hom any solicitations on
their part. 'J'hey made " no solicitation, no
overture, ?!o compromise." But they were often
and earnestly solicited by persons in the confi-
dence of tlie"^ Governor of Georgia, to_ desist
from the prosecution, and a.'ssured that if they
did so, thev shouKl nC't long remain in prison.
Even after' they Jiad given notice, as they did at
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
609
one time, of their intention to move the Supreme
Court for a further process, they were waited up-
on by two members elect of Congress, whose
names are given, and told officially, that they had
conversed with the Governor on the subject,
and knew his views, and that they might
regard it as certain, if they withdrew the suit,
that they would be discharged without any
concession, or condition, or even an applica-
tion to the Governor. These repeated pledges
induced the prisoners, by thtir counsel, to drop
all further proceedings, and on the 14th of
January, 1833, the keeper of the penitentiary
received a proclamation from the Governor of
the State, directing him to set Messrs. Wor-
cester and Butler at liberty. This he commu-
nicated to them forthwith, and discharged
them. They immediately returned to the sta-
tions which they had respectively occupied in
the Cherokee country, and resumed their mis-
sionary labors.
The reasons which determined the conduct
of these brethren from first to last, were sta-
ted by them with great clearness and force,
and published in the report of the Board
for 1833. In the same report may be found
the decision and mandate of the Supreme
Court ; the reply of the Court of Georgia ;
the memorial of the Board, praying for the
protection of the missionaries, and several
other important documents relating to this
subject.
During the year and four months that
Messrs. Worcester and Butler were in prison,
they were permitted daily to read the Scri|>
tures, and pray with the prisoners confined in
the same building ; and during the last six
months or more, Mr. AVorcester preached once
every Sabbath to all the prisoners. A spirit
of inquiry was awakened, and many, it is be-
lieved, were savingly benefitted.
It is painful in the extreme to dwell upon
such facts as have been recorded in the preced-
ing pages ; and it seems scarcely credible that
they could have occurred in a country like
ours, and in an enlightened Christian State.
It is not surprising that missionaries should
occasionally fare thus at the hands of benight-
ed Brahmins, or proud Mussulmans, but that
in the United States, and within 25 years,
they should have been dragged from their
fields of labor by an armed soldiery, and treat-
ed like felons ; under laws, too, enacted for
the very purpose of extinguishing Indian
claims, and getting possession of their lands,
in violation of treaties and of the Constitution,
and all this persisted in against the decision
of the highest judicial tribunal in the land, —
this is surprising and deeply humiliating ; and
it forms a chapter in our country's history,
which, for naked injustice, mercenary aims,
and bold contempt of national faith and honor,
is scarcely equaled by any of the public
wrongs and oppressions laid to her charge.
During the period of these troubles there
39
was no regular instruction at the four stations
within the limits of Georgia, and at the other
stations the work was prosecuted under great
disadvantages. Previous to the release of
Messrs. Worcester and Butler, the whole Chero-
kee country, lying within the chartered limits
of Georgia, had been surveyed and divided into
lots of 140 acres each, and distributed by lot-
tery among the citizens of that State. The
laws of Georgia had begun tp be enforced,
counties had been organized, courts held, and
magistrates and civil officers appointed. In
this state of things, the Cherokees were divi-
ded on the question of ceding their lands by
treaty to the United States ; but whether they
did so or not, it had become evident to all that
they must remove, either peaceably or under
a despotism which they could not resist. In
the beginning of 1834, the number of white
settlers on the Indian lands was estimated to
outnumber the Indians themselves, and no art
was left untried by the whites to draw them
into intemperance and every kind of debauch-
ery. The depression of morals was deplorable,
and yet not so general as might have been ex-
pected. Most of the influential men of the
nation manifested much firmness and dignity
of character, and remained the steadfast friends
of the mission, and of the intellectual and
moral improvement of these people.
After repeated negotiations and conferences
between the Indians and the government at
AVashiugtou, the details of which it is unneces-
sary to give here, a treaty was at length agreed
upon, Dec. 1835, by which the Cherokees
ceded the whole of the country which they
occupied, and consented to be removed to a
territory west of the Mississippi within two
years. For their lands, improvements, build-
ings, &c., they were to receive §500,000, and
§650,000 to defray the expenses of their re-
moval, and of sustaining them one year after
their arrival at their new homes. This treaty
was negotiated with the representatives of a
party or section of the Indians, and against it
Mr. Hoss and his friends protested in all the
stages of its progress, as being unsatisfactory
in its provisions, made contrary to the will of
the nation, and with persons wholly unau-
thorized to transact such business. All at-
tempts to annul or improve it, however, failed,
and nothing remained but its rigid enforce-
ment.
The time allowed the Indians to remain ex-
pired on the 23d of May, 1838, and immedi-
ately after that day the military commenced
their operations. Families were taken from
their houses and farms, leaving their furniture,
fields and flocks as they were, unprotected, to
be possessed by they knew not whom, and were
marched under strong guards to camps selected
to be their starting places for a distant, and
to them a strange land. In June nearly the
whole tribe had been taken from their houses
to the camps, and some thousands were started
610
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
off on their dreary march westward. Owing,
however, to the extreme heat of the season,
emigration was soon suspended, and the great
body of the Indians remained till the coming
autumn.
On the Sabbath, Aug. 19, the Lord's Supper
was administered for the last time by the mis-
sionaries, to as many as could be collected at
Braiuerd ; and early in Octol^er the Cherokee
people bid a mournful and reluctant adieu to
the country of which they had long and strenu-
ously, but in vain, been endeavoring to retain
possession. They were divided into fourteen
companies, embracing nearly 1G,000 persons.
Their route lay through the States of Tennessee,
Kentucky, Illinois, Missouri, and Arkansas, a
distance of si.x or seven hundred miles, and all
the companies but one made this journey by
land, consuming from three and a half to five
and a half months on the way. Dwelling, as
they had, within the narrow limits of encamp-
ments for four mouths before starting, and
sheltered only by tents on the way, and much
of the time without adequate food or clothing,
it is not wonderful that great suffering and
mortality were experienced among them. Ac-
cording to the most careful estimates, there
was an average of from 13 to 15 deaths a day
from the time they started, and by the time the
last company had reached its destination, be-
tween 4,000 and 5,000 persons had died, or more
than one-fourth of the whole population in the
space of ten months. This, it was admitted
by the friends of the Cherokees and of the
mission, resulted from the nature of the case,
and not from any unnecessary exposure or
bad treatment on the part of those who were
employed in carrying the deplorable measure
into effect.
The dissensions which-prevailed among the
Cherokees before their removal were not less
annoying in their new home. In June, 1839,
after'the close of a council during which there
had been much party heat, Major Ridge, his
son, John Ridge, and Elias Boudinot, were
assassinated. They had taken a leading part
in the treaty of Dec. 1835, and fell victims to
the enmity awakened by that measure in the
minds of the opposing party.
Omitting, for want of space, the details of
re-settlement, and the re-organization of the
mission, we And them, in 1810, occupying four
stations, viz., Dwight, Fairheld, I'ark Hill,
and Honey Creek. Dwight, as already ex-
plained, is a few miles north of the Arkansas
river, about 500 miles from its junction with
the Mississippi, or 200 miles in a straight line.
Among the missionaries were Messrs. Worces-
ter and Butler, and several others who had
labored in the old Cherokee country.
In 1811, when full returns began to be re-
ceived, there were five churches, and over 200
communicants. There were also five schools,
embracing 225 pupils. The school fund of the
Cherokees was sufficient to support teachers
and furnish books, stationery, &c., for eleven
public schools, and the system was ready to go
into operation as soon as teachers could be
procured. A mission press was in operation
at Park Hill, and a Cherokee almanac, an
edition of Cherokee laws, and the epistles of
John, had been printed, Large meetings had
been held for the promotion of temperance,
and about 1.000 of the Cherokees were living
in conformity to the temperance pledge. The
amount of printing executed at the mission
press in 1843, was reported to be 140,000
pages. The congregation at Fairfield erect-
ed this year a large and convenient house of
worship, the old one having become too
small.
In 1844 the mission press executed, in the
Cherokee language, the following works, viz. :
Acts of the Apostles, 5000 copies ; Gospel of
Matthew, 5000 copies ; Select Passages of
Scripture, 5000 copies ; Evils of Intoxicating
Drinks, 5000 ; a tract. Poor Sarah, 5000 ;
Christian Almanac, 1000 ; making a total of
26,000 copies, and of 1,586,000 pages. Be-
sides this, over 50,000 pages of various works
were executed in the Choctaw language.
During the years 1846, 1847, and 1848, no
very marked changes were reported. Party
strifes continued, and outrages on property and
life were prevalent, but they were not of such
a nature as to interrupt missionary labor at
either of the stations. The general sentiment
of the people was against the sale of intoxicat-
ing liquor, and some 3000 persons were en-
rolled as members of total abstinence societies.
The cause of education also has an upward
tendency, and two high schools, one for boys
and one for girls, were established, and the
necessary buildings erected, at an expense of
fifteen or twenty thousand dollars each, all
which was defrayed by the Cherokees them-
selves. The structure of their alphabet afford-
ed great facilities in the acquisition of knowl-
edge, and the name of George Guess will ever
be held in grateful remembrance by the friends
of Cherokee learning.
In 1850 there were scattered over the terri-
tory occupied by the Cherokees, 22 free public
schools, besides a boarding-school at Dwight,
riiis had been'the centre of mi.ssionai7 opera- 1 three day schools, and the two high schools,
tions for several years among the Cherokees | The communicants numbered 209, and the
who early removed to that country. The other printing for the year amounted to l,3o4,000
stations were at no great distance from this, pages. , , c • • r
and there were in this field, in 1840, five mis- ' The latest period to which definite iiilorma-
eionarios, one physician, three male and fifteen tion has been received is 18o3, and from the
female as.sistants, two native preachers, and reports of that date the following table is com-
one native printer, making a total of 27. piled :
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
611
i
-*^
S
Ss
■i
rt
STATIONS.
CS
<
a
□
3 ^
u
a
m
s
r3
3
^
'A
o
P-(
D^n-'ht
3
2
3
i
1
1
1
48
8
69
50
42
25
41
45
Park Hill
38
Totals
5
10
4
237
149
In concluding tWs notice of tlie Clierokees,
it seems desirable to add the following edito-
rial passage, from the " Herald" of Sept. 1854 :
" The prospects of the Cherokecs seem to have
brightened, in certain directions within the
past year. The committee employed Eev.
Marcus Palmer, M. D., formerly a missionary
of the Board among these Indians, to act as
an itinerant during the winter and spring ; and
he says, in closing his labors, ' The Cherokee
nation is increasing fast in numbers, wealth,
intelligence, and civilization. The public po-
litical mind is settled and calmed. The intem-
perance and frequent murders which now take
place, are the effects of the storm which years
since went by. The causes being removed, the
evils are evidently subsiding, and a better state
of things seems to be coming over the people.'
It must be confessed, however, that some clouds
still darken the horizon of this interesting peo-
ple. A powerful revival of religion is greatly
needed. If the influences of the Holy Spirit
shall be much longer withheld, the Christian
will have great occasion for solicitude and
fear."
Choctaivs. — The events of this mission, from
its commencement in 1818 to 1824, have been
sufficiently noticed. The Choctaws occupied
■ the central part of Mississippi, extending en-
tirely across the State, and numbering about
20,000. The nine stations occupied by the
mission were considerably dispersed, and were
supplied with missionaries, teachers, and farm-
ers, to such an extent as to carry the blessings
of religion, education, and the arts of agricul-
ture, to nearly all the people.
In 1827 a highly favorable report was made
of the schools. That at Eliot had 38 native
pupils, many of whom were studying geogra-
phy, arithmetic, and book-keeping, besides at-
tending to writing and composition. Some
of them could answer 400 questions on the
maps of various countries, and could describe
the boundaries of the scTcral States. A similar
progress had been made in all the schools. In
the spring of this year there was considerable
religious interest at Mayhew, as the fruits of
which nine persons were admitted to the
church in June. The whole number of chil-
dren instructed in the Eliot school, from its
commencement to 1828, was 185. In the
Sabbath-school at Eliot this year, 7,732 verses
of Scripture and of hymns were committed to
memory by the boys, and 2,688 by the girls.
Great improvements had been made within
four or five years in the cultivation of land
and the manner of living. The introduction
of whisky was, however, a great impediment
to civilization, leading to many vices, and often
to violence and bloodshed.
In 1829, the chief of one large district re-
solved to suspend the laws forbidding the im-
portation of whisky for two moons, and to
drink himself and permit others to drink with-
out restraint. For this abuse of power he was
removed from office, and a man appointed in
his place who favored the cause of morality
and religion. During this year there was a
more general attention to religion among the
Choctaws than at any former period. The
three chiefs of the nation took a very active
part in favoring religious inquiry, and in seve-
ral instances meetings of three or four days'
continuance were held at convenient places in
the wilderness. Many hundreds manifested
great anxiety to be instructed, and to become
experimentally acquainted with the Gospel,
and fifty or sixty native converts were added
to the churches. It was regarded as a won-
derful display of divine power and grace, and
was a subject of praise and joy both to the
missionaries and to the churches, which had
aided them in their work. At the same time
school-books and hymn-books, which had been
printed in Boston, in the Choctaw language,
were furnishing the elements of knowledge to
as many as were prepared to receive and use
them. In each of the three districts into
which the nation was divided, intemperance
received a powerful check, the laws against
whisky were rigidly enforced, the people were
better clothed, the lands were better tilled,
and in every respect the improvement was
very striking.
In the early part of 1830, the Choctaws be-
gan to be seriously disturbed with the ques-
tion of their removal to a country west of the
Mississippi. In March of that year a treaty
was made between the Choctaw nation and
the government ; but it was not ratified, and
was of no effect. In the following September, a
deputation from the government visited the
Choctaws, and tried to persuade them to sell
their country, and remove across the Missis-
sippi river. The Choctaws, in council, ap-
pointed a committee of sixty, twenty from
each district, to consider the subject and make
a reply, and their report was unanimously
against m.akiug any treaty. Their report was
approved by the whole body of the nation
assembled ; and, supposing that the matter
was at an end, most of them returned to their
homes. The next day the commissioners for
the government assembled the few who re-
mained, and by various threats and promises
induced them to sign the treaty. "VVhee it
612
NORTH AirERICAN INDIANS.
was known by tlic people that tlieir country
was sold, it producecl a general feeling of in-
dignation. A large majority of the captains
and warriors were strongly opposed to it, and
the chiefs who were instrumental in forming
the treaty were turned out of office, and others
elected in their places.
]}y the treaty the Choctaws ceded to the
United States all their lands east of the Mis-
sissippi, and agreed to be removed to lands
provided for tiiem west of the Arkansas ter-
ritory ; one-half as soon as the fall of 1832,
and the remainder in one year from that date,
at the expense of the government ; food to be
furnished to them on the way, and for one year
after their arrival. No provision was made
in the treaty for refunding any part of the
money expended by the Board, in establishing
and sustaining the mission, amounting, since its
connuencemeut, to more than $G0,000, besides
the labors of some 30 missionaries and assist-
ants, for 12 years. Besides, the missionaries
of tlie Board were expressly forbidden by the
commissioners, in writing, to be present at the
treaty ground, though the presence of all other
persons was alloM-cd. The treaty Vas ratified
at Wa.shington, and its effects were sadly visi-
ble on the Chocta\v nation, producing, as
among the Chcrokees, distress and desponden-
cy among some ; idleness and intemperance
among others ; and extensive divisions and
confusion in all the affairs of the nation.
The influence of this state of things on reli-
gious meetings, schools, agriculture, and all the
means used for the improvement of the people
was disastrous.
Many had been received to the churches as
the fruit of the late revival, and the whole
number of communicants in the spriug of
1831, was estimated at 360, and the numljer of
baptized children at 214. The number of
scholars in all the schools was about 23.5 ; of
these, 144 were boys and 91 were girls ; 112
were full blood Clioctaws, and 109 were mix-
ed ; 80 read in the Xcw Testament, and 75 in
any English book ; 37 used only Choctaw
books, and 1G5 both Choctaw and English ;
74 studied geography, 03 arithmetic ; 148
wrote ; 10 composed in Choctaw, 49 in Eng-
lish, and 24 in both languages. Besides
these, a large number of adults were taught
to read their own language with ease, and
many of them learnt to write. The Choc-
taw Sunday-scliool Union embraced 6 schools,
20 teachej's and 180 scholars, of whom 7 had
been recently received into the church. The
Gospels of Luke and of John had been trans-
lated by i\lr. AVright ; a work on Scripture
history iiad been prepared by Mr. AVilliaras,
and jtriutcd, and other works were in a state
ol forwardness. The missionaries at this pe-
riod were Kev. Cyrus Kingsbury and Rev. Cy-
ras Byingtun, assisted by 4 farmers, 2 teachers,
3 calechists, and the wives of the missionaries
ami others.
Such was the general state of the mission at
the time of the treaty. Such was the degree
of elevation and forwardness which had been
secured by the thirteen years of missionary la-
bor which had been bestowed upon the Choc-
taw nation ; enough certainly to warrant the
belief that another such time of service in that
field, could it have been uninterrupted, would
have rendered that people in a high degree in-
telligent, civilized and Christianized.
The spring of 1832 found a large body
of the Choctaws on the other side of the
]\Iississippi. They had been removed, through
forests and swamps of 500 miles, during a
winter of great severity, and great suffering
had been endured ; men and women, the old
and the young, the decrepid and the sick, M'ere
all included in this melancholy exodus from
the hom^s and improvements which they had
cherished ; and multitudes of them were poor-
ly clothed and fed ; bare-footed ; without shel-
ter, and in this condition often overtaken by
snow-storms in the dreary forests of that re-
gion. In crossing the swamps of the Missis-
sippi large numl^ers, with their horses, were
surrounded by the rising waters, from which
there was no possibility of escape. The cap
tain of a steamboat who rescued one company
of Choctaws v.'ho had been six days in this pe-
rilous condition, said that he saw at least a
hundred horses standing, frozen dead in the
mud. Before the spring of 1833 the Choctaw
nation had all been removed to their new
homes, if homes these children of the forest
could be said to have on earth.
In their report for 1833, the Board say,
" Definite information respecting the number
of the Choctaws who have become settled in
their new country has not been received. It
is proljably between 10,000 and 14,000. The
number of the whole tribe before their remov-
al commenced, was estimated at 18,000 or
20,000. They generally appear to be satisfied •
with their new country, and are laboring with
a good degree of vigor to prepare for them-
selves fields and comfortable residences, and
manifest considerable industry and public spi-
rit, though they have obviously suffered iu
their habits and moral character by their ex-
posures to temptation while preparing to re-
move, and while on their long and hazardous
journey."
The' new territory occupied by the Choc-
taws is situated between the Arkansas and
Bed rivers, west of the State of Arkansas, with
'J'exas on the south, and the Seminolcs and
Cherokees on the north. As several of the
missionaries removed with the Indians, they
began at an early day to locate the missions,
and in 1834 there were five stations, viz. :
AVheelock, Bcthabara, Clear Creek, Bok Tuk-
lo, and Cedroii. These stations were all near
Red river, or Little river, a northern branch,
and not far from the south-Avestern corner of
Arkansas. The missionaries were Rev. Messrs.
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
613
Kina-sbury and Byington, Alfred Wright,
Loring S. Williams, and H. R. Wilson, the
latter also a physician. There were three
churches ; one at Wheelock, one at Bathabara,
and one at Bok Tuklo. The first had 71 mem-
bers, GO of whom were professors of religion be-
fore their removal ; the second had 113 mem-
bers, and the third 23. The missionaries
preached as much as their impaired health
would allow, and there was some serious in-
quiry and a few hopeful conversions. Six or
eight schools for instruction in the Choctaw
language were either opened or ready to go
into operation, but they w^ere entirely inter-
rupted by the sickness which broke out in the
preceding autumn, and prevailed to a fearful
extent. In some populous neighborhoods one
in every fifteen died, and not a child under a
year old was left. " The wretchedness of the
people, without suitable food, or medicine, or
'nursing, was heart-rending, and altogether be-
yond description." In the summer and au-
tumn of 1834, sickness also prevailed to an
alarming extent, and the schools were suspend-
ed, and the mission families were almost wholly
taken up with the care of the sick and the dy-
ing. It was estimated that one in ten of the
members of the churches, many of them pro-
mising young persons, were hurried to the
grave. In the autumn of 1835, Eagle Town
and Pine Ridge were added to the sta-
tions, and occupied by Messrs. Byington and
Kingsbury. Each station had a school and a
competent teacher, and the whole number of
jDupils was 365. A new church was formed in
1836, and the total membership was 225.
Several tracts in the Choctaw language were
printed, amounting, in all, to 30,500 pages.
From this period to 1840, no very important
changes occurred in the mission.
From May 1840 to May 1841, 85 persons
were admitted to the churches, more by far
than during any preceding year since the re-
moval of the Choctaws. The whole number
of members was now 314. The cause of tem-
perance had made considerable progress, and
in one district 300 were reported as having
signed the temperance pledge. In 1842, one
of the missionaries, who was with the Choc-
taws before their removal, wrote, — " I do not
hesitate to say that there never has been, since
I have been acquainted with this people, a
season of so much interest as the present.
Their crops were never better ; there never was
more peace and friendship ; there never was
less sickness ; and drunkenness has decreased
a hundred per cent, at least." In 1843 there
was an accession of more than a hundred to
the churches, the total membership amounting
to 459. The religious interest continued, and
in 1844 one of the missionaries writes, — " In
no year since the Choctaws came to this coun-
try, have we been permitted to witness greater
displays of the power and grace of God in
the salvation of sinners." Nearly 100 were
received by profession this year, and the mem-
bership increased to 546. Between 80 and 90
were added in 1845, and in 1846 the large
number of 218 were received, making the num-
ber of members 769. During this long season
of spiritual refreshing, increased attention was
paid to education, and to the printing of the
Scriptures and religious tracts. The four Gos-
pels had been printed, and 3,000 copies put in
circulation, besides other portions of the New
Testament.
The existence of slavery both among the
Choctaws and Cherokees had been a fact well
understood for many years, and the relation
of the missionaries and the mission churches
to this evil, had been a matter of increasing
solicitude to the friends of these missions. In
1848, Rev. Mr. Treat, Secretary of the Board,
visited these nations for the special purpose of
ascertaining the facts on this subject. His
inquiries related to the origin of slavery among
these tribes, its character, the number of slaves,
their treatment, laws relating to slavery, effects
of slavery, the influence of Christianity upon
it, and its prospective termination. In his re-
port to the Board, at its meeting in Boston,
Sept. 1848, he not only presented a full and
clear statement on the above points,_but also
in regard to the policy of the missions, the
preaching of the Gospel in reference to slavery,
the instruction of slaveholding converts, the
admission of slaveholders to the church, the
treatment of slaveholders in the church, and
the employment of slave labor. This report,
drawn up with exceeding clearness and force,
was published in the Herald of October 1848,
together with an important correspondence
between ISIr. Treat and the Choctaw and Cher-
okee missionaries on the same subject.
From these documents it appeared, that in
the Cherokee churches there were 24 slave-
holders, and in the Choctaw churches 38, and
that the number of slaves held by them was
considerably over one hundred. It also ap-
peared that the missionaries themselves em-
ployed slave labor in the cultivation of lapd,
sometimes hiring slaves, at other times buying
them, " with their own consent, and with the
understanding that they should be allowed to
work out the purchase money, and then_ be
free." For the reasons assigned by the mission-
aries in defence of this practice, and their feel-
ings in regard to it, the reader is referred to
the report as above.
Both the Cherokee and Choctaw nations had
made stringent laws for the protection of
slavery, the Choctaws especially, enacting in
1846, that any mis.sionary or preacher, who
should be found " to take an active part in
favoring the principles and notions of the
most fatal and destructive doctrines of abo-
litionism," should be compelled to leave the
nation, and forever stay out of it ; and they
also enacted, that to teach a slave to read,
write, or sing, without the consent of the owner.
614
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
should bo sufficient to couvict a person of abo-
lition principles.
Having made the needed investigations,
througli its Secretary, in regard to the question
of slavery in these churches, and ascertained
the views of the missionaries ; and having dis-
tinctly stated the principles that would govern
its own action, the Board continued its support
of the Choctaw and Cherokee missions, in the
belief that divine Providence would indicate
from year to year such further measures as
ought to be adopted relative to this delicate
and difficult subject.
During each year since the foregoing trans-
actions, there have been accessions to the Choc-
taw churches, and diligent attention has been
given to the schools, and to the printing of the
Scriptures and of tracts. But these labors and
their results have been of so uniform a charac-''
ter as not to require an extended notice, ex-
cept as they relate to the present condition of
the mission. The Herald for January 1854
reported 129 admissions to the churches dur-
ing the preceding j(^v, and commended the
Choctaw government for its zeal in executing
its temperance laws. A " high institution ol'
learning " had recently been established by a
Choctaw council, the course of study to be
such as is usually taught in the best female
institutions in the United States. In the
Herald for Sept. 1854, mention is made of
much seriousness at some of the stations, and
a few conversions. In the same number Mr.
Kingsbui'y writes, " In all the region of coun-
try Mhcre I labor, there is very little drinking;
nor is there any other open vice, except that a
portion of the community do not regard the
Sabbath."
CBURCIIE.S.
Received on
profession.
Received by
letter.
3
11
12
19
1
1
3
8
2
3
141
AVhoclock
206
Mount Zion
6(5
IDO
351)
3.5
70
CI
84
5
G
11
7
13
Totals
80
7
13
1,163
BOARDING SCHOOLS.
Cdoil Water..
I'ine Uidge . .
Norwalk... .
Wliiilnck. ..
Stock bridge..
Totals..
V •
■3
■= c
3
=
i «
.2
■y.
^ ?■
~:t
u.
■t
~
-^
"^
39
8
47
24
6
10
40
16
0
5
20
24
10
8
42
31
10
41
134
21
41
26
170
The foregoing tables exhibit with tolerable
accuracy the present state of the Choctaw
mission churches and schools.
At the meeting of the Board in September
last, the Prudential Committee reported a state
of things in the Choctaw nation, which seemed
to call for special action. It appeared that the
Choctaw Council had recently enacted a law,
prohibiting the instruction of slaves, or the
children of slaves, at any school or academy,
by any person connected therewith ; and also
directing the expulsion from the nation of all
such persons, missionaries or teachers, as
should be found violating this statute. This
was simply re-afBrming the old law of 1846,
before referred to, which, however, had so i'ar
remained a dead letter that the missionaries
had continued to teach slaves and their child-
ren without interruption. The fresh promul-
gation of such a law indicated a determination
to enforce its requisitions, and the Prudential
Committee decided that the Board could not
conscientiously maintain its connection with
the Choctaw schools upon such conditions.
This decision was approvetl by the missiona-
ries, and was in exact accordance with the
principles laid down in the well-known letter
of Mr. Treat, in 1848. See the Herald for
October of that year.
The suliject, on being brought before the
Board at Hartford, was referred to a commit-
tee, who reported resolutions which, after an
animated and protracted discussion, were
adopted in the following form :
" Resolved, That the Board acknowledge,
with gratitude to God, the wisdom and fidelity
with which, so far as appears from the docu-
ments which have been submitted to them, the
Prudential Committee are advising and dii-ect-
ing the missionaries among the Choctaws, in
conformity with the principles presented by
them in their correspondence with those mis-
sionaries, reported to the Board in 1848.
" Resolved, That the decision of the Pruden-
tial Committee, Avith the concurrence of the
mi.ssionaries, not to conduct the boarding-
schools in the Choctaw nation, in conformity
with the principles prescribed by the recent
legislation of the Choctaw Council, meets the
cordial approbation of the Board.
" Resolved, That the commission given by
Christ to his disciples, to go and teach all na-
tions and to preach the Gospel to every crea-
ture, which is the warrant of Christian mis-
sions, is to be respected and obeyed in all the
operations and by all the missionaries of the
Board ; and that while our missionaries among
the Choctaws are allowed in fact to preach
the Gospel to all persons, of whatever com-
plexion or condition, as they have opportunity,
and to preach it in all its applications to hu-
man character and duty, they arc to continue
patiently in the work."
'I'hese resolutions were understood and in-
tended as a full endorsement by the Board of
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
615
tlie principles of the letter just referred to, and
upon wliich tlie Committee had been acting for
six years, on their own responsibility. But
recent events seemed to demand that the Board,
in its corporate capacit /, should assume this
responsibility, and this it did, in the form of
the above resolutions, which were adopted by
nearly a unanimous vote.
At the period of closing this article it re-
mains a doubtful question, whether the mis-
sionaries will be allowed to preach the Gospel
among the Choctaws in the full and unqualified
manner required in the last of these resolutions,
or whether, being forbidden to do this, they
will retire from the field.
Usages. — The mission among the Osage In-
dians was commenced in 1820, by a Presbyte-
rian body, called the " United Foreign Mis-
sionary Society." At that period the Osage
tribe consisted of two divisions, located at a
considerable distance from each other, the one
called the Osages of the Neosho, and the other
the Osages of Missouri. The former dwelt
upon the Neosho, or Grand river, a northern
branch of the Arkansas, west of Missouri ; and
the latter occupied a territory in Missouri, 150
miles farther north.
The first station occupied by the above
named society was at Union, among the Osages
of the Neosho, on the west side of that river,
and about 20 miles from its mouth. In 1823
a farming settlement was formed at Hopefield,
four miles from Union, the design of which
was to teach the Osages the arts and advan-
tages of agriculture. Many families settled at
this place, and the labor of the farm was car-
ried on with much courage and zeal ; but a
threatened war with other tribes alarmed them,
and some of them fled to Union for protection.
A year or two later the place was nearly ruined
by an inundation, which swept away all their
crops, houses, fences, and every movable thing.
At Union, meanwhile, a school was gathered,
very small at first, but increasing, till in 1826
it numbered 50 scholars.
Among the Osages of Missouri two stations
were formed, one at Harmony, near the west-
ern line of Missouri, on a branch of the Osage
river ; and one at Neosho, 60 miles from Har-
mony. Some progress was made in teaching
the Indians, and especially in training them to
agricultural habits. But they were a migra-
tory tribe, accustomed to long hunting expe-
ditious, and not stationary more than four or
five months in the year, so that it was extremely
difiBcult to do them good.
In June, 1826, a union was formed between
the American Board and the United Foreign
Missionary Societj', and from that period the
Board shared in the responsibility of the Osage
mission. But the peculiar habits of the Osages,
and their frequent intercourse with white tra-
ders, who exerted upon them a most corrupt-
ing influence, nearly baffled all attempts to
benefit them either in a spiritual or temporal
respect. The difficulty was further increased
by treaties formed at different times with the
United States, by which the Osages ceded
large portions of their territory, and were finally
removed to a considerable distance farther
west, and north of the Cherokee country. The
old stations were thus broken up, and the
Osage mission was abandoned. In view of
this result the Board say, in their report for
1836:
" A retrospect of the history of this mission
cannot be taken without awakening many pain-
ful emotions. Yery few, if any of the adults
of the tribe have been induced to exchange
their savage and migratory habits for a civil-
ized and industrious life ; or to substitute the
Christian doctrines and practice for their ridi-
culous and absurd superstitions ; nor do they
seem to have been in any way benefitted as to
their character and condition. The number
of youths educated in their schools has been
comparatively small, and of this small number
few have given evidence that the Gospel, un-
der whose daily influence they sat for years,
has been to them the power of God unto sal-
vation ; while many have returned to their
friends and former manner of life, and become
as filthy and debased as those who never en-
joyed such advantages ; and not a few others
have been enticed away to sink into the low-
est depths of pollution and misery. The
amount of funds expended on the mission has
been great ; and so also has been the number
of laborers who have engaged in promoting it.
Not a few of these, after going through a
course of arduous service, have gone down to
the grave, the victims of disease and hardship ;
others, worn down by toil, and disheartened by
opposing difficulties, have retired from the field
with broken constitutions ; while the remnant,
after having labored with much fidelity and
patience nearly 1 5 years, have felt themselves
compelled to abandon the work, leaving the
Osages, with scarcely an exception, more mis-
erable and hopeless, both as to condition and
character, than they were when the mi.-sii^n
was commenced among them."
Notwithstanding this most deplorable and
discouraging result, circumstances encouraged
the hope, in some minds, that something might
be done to benefit the Osages, and during the
following year, measures were adopted for re-
establishing the mission. It seemed probable
that the tribe would be permitted to remain
upon their new territory, and many of them,
particularly those who had been connected
with the agricultural estaljlishment at Hope-
dale, manifested a disposition to abandon the
chase and cultivate the soil. Funds were also
expected from the sale of the old mission
buildings and improvements, and the govern-
ment, agreeably to treaty, had furnished those
Osages who wished to engage in agriculture,
with farming implements, and aid in procuring
stock. Under these circumstances, Mr. Ee-
616
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
qua, who had labored much with this tribe,
visited their towns, in the autumn of 183G,aud
selected a spot for a large agricultural colony,
on the western branch of the Neosho. He
had made considerable progress in preparing
the requisite buildings and other improvements,
and a preacher and school-teacher were expect-
ed to join him as soon as circumstances would
permit. But during the following summer, a
portion of the tribe began to manifest their
hostility to the enterprise, the cattle belonging
to the station were killed, and other property
seized ; the settlers themselves were threatened
and assaulted, and the chiefs justified these
savage acts. The annoyance became so great
that neither usefulness nor safety could be
hoped for, and ^h\ Requa removed his effects
and left the Osage country. No mission has
since been attempted among them.
Cluckasau's. — The Chickasaw Indians origin-
ally occupied the northern portion of the State
of Mississippi, and numbered about 3,000.
The first mission among them was commenced
by the Synod of South Carolina and Georgia,
in 1821 ; but was transferred to the Board, in
December, 1827. The number of stations at
the time of the transfer was four, viz. : Mon-
roe, Tokshish, Martyn, and Caney Creek.
In 1827 there was an interesting revival at
Munroe, and it extended to the whole country
round, and continued many months. " People
came thirty or forty miles to inquire what
these things meant, and some of the most hope-
less, stuljboru sinners, were the first subjects of
the work." Six were admitted to the church
at Munroe this year ; and in 1829 seventeen
were admitted to the church at Tokshish, and
25 children of believing parents were baptized.
Schools were taught at three of the stations,
the number of scholars varying from 20 to 30.
Most of these children learned to read and
write, and many of them became acquainted
with geography and history, besides acfiuiring
a knowledge of the English language. During
the years 1828 and 182!), a great reformation
took place among the Chickasaws, in regard
to the use of intoxicating Hcjuors. 'J'hc leading
men discountenanced and nearly prevented the
sale of whisky, and one of the missionaries
remarked that he had not seen an intoxicated
Indian for a year and a half.
For two or three years ])revious to 1830,
the people had been agitated with the (|UCPtion
•of .selling their land.s to the United States, and
removing to a region west of the Mississippi.
The Slate of Mississippi extended its own laws
over the Indians, which broke the force of
their temperance and other laws, and intemper-
ance with its associated vices prevailed through
the nation " like an overwhebning tide." in
the fall of 1830, a treaty was coiicluded with
the('liickasa\vs, by which tliey agreed to sell
their land and remove west of the Mississippi,
provided a country could be found for tliem
with which they should be pleased. A delegation
I was sent to explore the new country, and on
their return they reported in favor of a tract of
j land lying between the Sabine and Red rivers,
j in the province of Texas. But this report was
never acted upon, and the treaty was not rati-
fied. The Indians, therefore, still remained in
suspense, and in great despondency, the State
laws beginning to operate severely upon them,
and their intercourse M'itli the whites leading
I them into temptation and moral debasement.
I This state of things greatly interrupted mis-
sionary labor, and yet there was considerable
seriousness in the churches, and some who had
been excommunicated returned, and gave evi-
dence of sincere repentance. Two of the
schools were maintained with an average of
2.5 or 30 scholars.
In October, 1832, a new treaty was formed
by which the lands of the Chickasaws were to
be sold in the same manner as the public lands
of the United States, and the proceeds paid
over to them, out of which they were to pur-
chase a new country and remove themselves ;
provided however, that if they could find no
new country that suited them, they might re-
main permanently on one-third of the territory
held hj them, they being subject to the la^-s
of the State of Mississippi. But they must
not remain settled together, on one compact
third of their country, but must be dispersed
over the whole of it. This arrangement greatly
aggravated the troubles of the Indians ; for
white intruders kept pressing upon them from
all quarters, harrassing them by vexatious law-
suits and depredations upon their property,
and introducing large quantities of liquor,
which was sold often at an enormous price.
" No less than 300 gallons of these liquors were
brought into the single neighborhood of
Tokshish, within a period of three months,
where a grocery for the sale of them had been
erected, near the house of God." The more
intelligent Indians complained and remonstrat-
ed without effect.
Some of the missionaries lingered on the
ground, endeavoring, against every disadvan-
tage, to keep up the churches and schools,
until 1834, when the mission was abandoned.
It had been provided in the treaty, that the
Indians might sell the reservations upon which
they remained, and this fact attracted the at-
tention of purchasers, who entered the country
with money and whisky, and exerted a most
corrupting and ruinous influence throughout
the whole extent of the Indian settlements.
They were at first tempted with strong drink,
carried to every man's door ; and then excited
with the hope of making large gains by .selling
their lands ; and when they received tlieir pay-
ments, with characteristic improvidence, they
gave themselves up to idleness, gambling and
intoxication. They were thus rendered unfit
to receive instruction, and all hope of doing
them essential and permanent good was at an
end. The Chickasaws never removed in a
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
617
body to a new territory, but have either min-
gled with other tribes west of the Mississippi,
or wasted a\Yay under the State laws that were
extended over thera.
Creeks. — The Board sustained a mission
among the Creek Indians from 1832 to 1835.
That portion of the tribe to which these labors
were directed, was located at that time in the
territory west of Arkansas, on both sides of
the Arkansas river. Their number was about
2,.500. A much larger portion of this tribe,
some 18,000, resided on lands owned by them
in the State of Alabama, but with these the
Board had no connection.
The first and only missionaries which the
Board at any time had among the Creek Indi-
ans, were John Plemming and his wife, and
E. L. Dodge, physician. Mr. Flemming de-
voted himself with great zeal to the study of
the Creek language, which no one had ever
before attempted to reduce to writing. He
found it an exceedingly embarrassing work, on
account of the numerous and difficult combina-
tions of consonants ; but, with the aid of an
interpreter, he prepared an elementary book
in the language, containing also select portions
of Scripture, amounting to 100 pages, of which
500 copies were printed. A few hymns were
also prepared, to be sung at meetings.
It was found difficult, however, from the
first, to interest the Creeks in matters of reli-
gion, or of education. They were generally
indifferent or hostile to the missionaries and
their operations, and the difficulty was in-
creased by the efforts of the government to
dispossess them of their lands, and remove
them farther west. It was judged, also, that
their jealousy was awakened by the presence
among them of the missionaries of two other
religious denominations, viz., the Baptist and
the Methodist. The number attending reli-
gious meetings was at all times small, and it
was not found practicable to maintain a school
of any promise within their territory.
In the autumn of 183(3, a number of the
Indians, including some of their chief men, for-
warded a petition to the United States' agent,
in their neighboi'hood, requesting that the mis-
sionaries and teachers of all denominations
might be removed from their territory. The
petition was instigated by white men residing
in the vicinity of the Creeks, and was accom-
panied by injurious and slanderous charges,
and, without affording the missionaries any
opportunity to examine or repel the allega-
tions, they were all directed immediately to
leave the Creek country.
As the Creeks of Alabama had, a little be-
fore this, been removed to their new country,
west of Arkansas, composing, with those al-
ready there, a body of from 15,000 to 20,000,
it was hoped that the mission might be re-
sumed among them with better prospects of
success, as soon as missionaries could be ob-
tained ; but, for reasons satisfactory to the
Board, no attempt of this kind has ever boeu
made.
Ottawas. — ^The Ottawa Indians, for whose
benefit a mission was commenced in 1822, oc-
cupied five small reservations in the north-west-
ern part of Ohio. They were but a remnant
of the tribe, and numbered only about 800 ;
and they were found in a very poor and de-
graded state, their great vice being an exces-
sive fondness for ardent spirits.
The mission was commenced at the above
date, by the Western Missionary Society, and
was transferred by them to the United For-
eign Missionary Society. The station was at
Maumee, about 30 miles from the mouth of
the Maumee river, which empties into the
upper end of Lake Erie. The care of the mis-
sion was subsequently assumed by the Ameri-
can Board, and was brought to a close in 1833.
A school was established at Maumee, which
in 1828 had 70 pupils, about 40 of whom re-
mained long enough to make useful acquisi-
tions. Seven of them became hopefully pious,
and persevered in their Christian course. A
good farm was opened at the station, and was
put under good cultivation. The missionary,
Mr. Yan Tassel, was untiring in his labors,
but he was unacquainted with the Ottawa dia-
lect, which no missionary had ever acquired,
and as he could find no good interpreter, he
could do little in the way of preaching. la
1830, a small church, formed several years pre-
vious, but much scattered, the Lord's Supper
not having been administered for six years,
was gathered and strengthened, and much so-
riousuess prevailed.
During this year Mr. Yan Tassel had' so far
mastered the Ottawa language as to prepare
translations of the Lord's prayer and the tea
commandments, and also a few hymns and
spelling lessons, which were printed at Hudson,
Ohio. It was hoped that some of the Indians
would now learn to read their own language.
About this time, however, they were induced
to sell their lands lying in the State of Ohio,
amounting to about .50,000 acres ; but most
of them absolutely refused to accept of lands
offered thera by the United States, west of the
Mississippi, or to be removed to that country.
They were thus left without lands and with-
out a home, surrounded by white settlers and
exposed to every species of temptation, and iu
the worst possible condition to be benefitted
by missionary labors. Their only prospect
seemed to be an unsettled, wandering life, till
they should waste away and disappear. Their
mission was therefore discontinueil.
The number of pupils connected with the
boarding school at Maumee, daring the tea
years of its existence, was about 90. Nearly
half of these acquired an education sufficient
for the ordinary business of life. The church,
which was formed in 1823, had 26 members at
the time the mission was disbanded, including
the mission family. The congregations on the
618
NORTH AilERICAN INDIANS.
Sabbath, during the last year, averaged about
80, and much seriousness prevailed, both among
the Indians and the white settlers, and fifteen
or twenty persons gave evidence of a change
of heart. It was never practicable, however,
to form a temperance society among the Otta-
was, and the intemperate and quarrelsome ha-
bits whicli generally prevailed among thera,
were the occasion of much suffering, and a hin-
drance to all efforts for bettering their con-
dition.
Ojibwas. — ^The Ojibwa Indians, called also
Chippeways, are located near the south-west
shore of Lake Superior, and about the head
waters of the Mississippi river. The mission
among them was commenced in 1S30, at the soli-
citation of gentlemen connected with the Amer-
ican Fur Company, who spent most of the year
at their trading posts in that quarter, and who
were well acquainted with Indians in that re-
gion. During the first year the only pei-son
employed was ]Mr. Frederic Ayer, a teacher
and catechist ; but in 1831 the Board sent out
Rev. Messrs. Hall and Boutwcll, and the next
year they were joined by another company,
consisting of a mechanic and a teacher, with i
their wives, and two female teachers.
They had now four stations, viz.. La Pointe,
Yellow Lake, Sandy Lake, and Leech Lake.
The first of these places is on an island in a
large bay, near the south-west part of Lake
Superior, and was a place of resort for large
numbers of Indians, besides about 200 who re-
sided there. Yellow Lake is loO or 200 miles
south-west of La Pointe, and was, in 1832, the
residence of nearly 400 Indians. Sandy Lake
station, near the Mississippi river, had about
300 Indians residing near it ; and Leech Lake,
which communicated with the Mississippi by
one of its western tributaries, had an Indian
population of 700. Each of these stations was
near the post of one of the American fur
traders ; and though the number of Indians
was not large, other bands, scattered over that
vast region, were constantly passing and re-
passing, and often remaining a considerable
time for the purposes of traffic.
The circumstances supposed to favor this
mission, were the friendly disposition of most
of the men engaged in the fur trade ; the loca-
tion of the country, remote from the influence
of unprincipled white men ; and the determin-
ation of the agent and traders of the American
Fur Company that no intoxicating liquors
should be used in trade with the Indians. The
principal obstacles to be encountered were the
migratory and warlike character of the In-
dians ; the dilQculty of supporting missionary
families in a region so remote and dreary ; and
tlie opposition of a few French Catholics from
Canada, engaged in the fur trade.
Schools were opened at an early period of
the mission at three of the stations, and the
number of pupils in thera all in 1831 was b
La Pointe in the summer of 1833, consisting
of 12 persons, including the mission families.
In July 1834, Mr. Ely, of the Sandy Lake
station, removed to Fon du Lac, at the west-
ern extremity of Lake Superior, as affording a
more promising field of permanent missionary
labor. The missionaries had made so much
progress in the acquisition of the Ojibwa lan-
guage in 1835, as to prepare for the press
quite a number of books, among which were a
spelling-book, Gallaudet's Picture Reading and
Defining Book, a selection of Stories, a treatise
on Natural History, and a book of hymns.
In 1836 the Yellow Lake station was ro-
moved fifty miles south-west, to Pokegu-
ma Lake, where the soil was better, and fish
and game more abundant. During this year
there was an increased interest in hearing the
Gospel read and preached, and some of the
Indians manifested an anxious concern for
their salvation. Two Indians, a man and his
wife, were hopefully converted, and received to
the church. In 1837 the church at La Pointe
numbered nine, exclusive of the mission family,
and a new church of three adult Indians and
the mission family, was organized. The schools
were all in successful operation, and quite a
number of Ojibwas had learned to read well,
both in their own language and in English.
An increasing desire was manifested, especially
about Pokeguma, to cultivate the soil, and
several Indians erected houses, with aid from
the mission, and raised good crops of potatoes.
It was found that the migratory habits of the
Ojibwas resulted more from ignorance and
poverty, than from any real attachment to
an unsettled hunter life. They knew not how
to enclose and cultivate farms, neither could
they obtain agricultural implements, seeds, and
furniture for dwellings, without aid. AVith
suitable assistance they seemed capable of
being brought up to civilized life, and to a
condition of intelligence and comfort.
In 1838, the mission family at Leech Lake
removed to Pokeguma, a change which it was
thought would give greater elficiency to the
mission. At this place there were six or eight
hopeful conversions during the year, and the
Sabbath was strictly observed by all the far
milies residing near the mission. The Gospel
of John and the Acts of the Apostles were
printed this year, and the Gospel of Matthew
was prepared for the press. In the autumn of
the preceding year the Ojibwas concluded a
treaty with the United States Governinont, by
which they ceded a large tract from the south-
ern portion of their country, the line beginning
at the 4Gth parallel of latitude on the Missis-
si[)pi river, and extending through uj^per Lake
St. Croix to Lake Superior. The Indians
were to remove from all the country south of
the line, whenever the president of the United
States should direct. The station at Poke-
unnia was within the ceded territory ; and those
tweeu 40 and TjO. A church was organized at 1 Indians who had just begun to lead a settled
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
619
and agricultural life, were in trouble and sus-
pense, anxiously inquiring what would become
of their houses and cultivated fields, if the pre-
sident should order their removal.
In 1839, cue of the missionaries, after stat-
ing some encouraging facts, adds, " The mass
of the tribe, however, manifest very little de-
sire to improve their condition, wretched as it
is. Few are desirous to learn anything of the
Bible, and most of them seem to have the im-
pression that the white man's religion is not
made for them. They say they are a distinct
race, and the Great Spirit designed they should
be distinct. They live difierently, and go to a
dilFereut place when they die." With these
views they could not be supposed to regard the
objects for which the missionaries were labor-
ing, as anything very desirable.
The vicinity of Fon du Lac was deserted by
the Indians in 1840 ; and as there was no
prospect that they would again make it a
place of resort, the station was discontinued.
Pokeguma and La Pointe were now the only
remaining stations, and the missionary force
consisted of two missionaries, three catechists
and teachers, and five female assistants. The
printing in Ojibwa, this year, embraced the
epistles of John and James, making 30 pages ;
a tract on the Atonement, 20 pages ; Peter
Parley's Geography, 139 pages, of which 500
copies were printed, making au aggregate of
94,000 pages ; and the whole amount printed
in the language was 707,000 pages, and 21,000
volumes. Most of this printing was done in
New England.
For several years a hostile feeling had ex-
isted between the Ojibwas and their neigh-
bors, the Sioux, and frequent acts of savage
violence had been perpetrated. In the early
part of 841, the Sioux made an attack upon
the Christian Indians of Pokeguma, in de-
scribing which one of the missionaries says:
" War has desolated Pokeguma. On the
morning of the 24th of May, more than 100
Sioux fell upon our quiet settlement, and in
two short hours made it a licene of war and
death. The enemy bore away the scalps of
two interesting girls, one a scholar of our
school. They did not molest us, or injure
any of our property." Immediately after this
outbreak, the Ojibwas all fled from Pokeg-
uma.
In August, 1842, the mission was strength-
ened by the arrival of Messrs. Wheeler and
James, with their wives, and Miss Spooner.
Mr. and Mrs. James, however, were obliged,
by the impaired state of her health, to re-
turn to their friends, after being in the field
about a month.
In October, 1842, the superintendent of In-
dian Affairs in the north-west, Eobert Stuart,
Esq., met the Ojibwas at La Pointe, and ne-
gotiated a treaty with them, by which they
ceded to the United States the whole of their
lands lying on the south and south-west of
Lake Superior, and extending westerly to the
sources of the Mississippi river, except some
reservations, embracing a large tract about
Fon du Lac, and another about Sandy Lake.
It was not expected, however, that the Indians
would be dispossessed for many years, or that
any portion of the country would be occupied
by white settlers, except the mineral districts
on the southern shore of Lake Superior. By
the terms of this treaty, annuities in money,
goods, provisions, &c., were to be granted to
the tribe, amounting to ^25,000 a year, for
25 years ; also $2,000 annually for schools ;
also $5,000 for the purchase of stock, agricul-
tural utensils, &c. ; $75,000 for liquidating
their debts tb the traders ; and $13,000 for
gifts to the half-breeds — amounting, with the
aimuities, to $708,000. Blacksmiths, carpen-
ters, and farmers were also to be furnished.
Between 3,000 and 4,000 Indians, including all
the most influential and intelligent chiefs, were
assembled at La Pointe on the occasion of this
treaty, and the whole transaction was charac-
terized by uprightness and fair dealing on the
part of the commissioner, and fully understood
and approved by the Indians. Much M'as done
to encourage the missionaries in their labors.
Eeligious meetings were held nearly every day
during the two or three weeks of the sitting
of the council, no business was transacted on
the Sabbath, and many of the Indians, influ-
enced by the example of the commissioner,
listened to the word of God, who had seldom
if ever heard it before. By this treaty it was
stipulated that the intercourse law, forbidding
the introduction of intoxicating liquors into
the Indian country, should be continued in
force over the ceded territory.
In the spring of 1843, the Indians who were
driven from Pokeguma by the hostile incur-
sions of the Sioux, and who had remained dis-
persed nearly two years, reassembled at that
place, and were joined by several families from
other bands. Here they fortified themselves,
and commenced their agricultural labors with
more diligence and energy than they had ever
before manifested. They also paid good at-
tention to public worship on the Sabbath, and
the members of the church were much quick-
ened. At the same time the Holy Spirit de-
scended upon the mission families at La Pointe,
and some of the Indians gave evidence of hav-
ing been savingly renewed. During this year
also the amount of reading matter in the Ojib-
wa language was much increased by the printing
of the whole New Testament, the Peep of Day,
and an enlarged collection of hymns, making
in all 2,500 copies, and 910,000 pages. This
printing was done at the expense of the Amer-
ican Tract and Bible Societies, and of the
American Board.
An experiment of a year or two convinced
the missionaries that it would be impracticable
to maintain the station at Pokeguma with a
reasonable hope of success, and it was given
620
NORTH AiiERICAN INDIANS.
up. A little subsequent to tins, a degree of
uncertainty was thrown around the prospects
of the Oji'bwas by the conversion of Wiscon-
sin territory into a State. A portion of the
tribe fell within the chartered limits of that
State, and what disposition would be made of
them was uncertain. The tide of emigration
was constantly roUiug in upon them, and they
were in constant expectation that the presi-
dent would give the order for their removal.
But notwithstanding these dark prospects,
which for a series of years hung over the
Clioctaws and the mission among them, they
have been preserved, though some of them
Lave removed a little further to the north and
west, and the mission has not been without
some visible fruits from year to year.
For the last two or three years only two sta-
tions have been maintained, viz., at Bad River
and Crow Wing. The latter, west of the
Mississippi, and near its northern extremity,
was given up on account of the war between
the Ojibwas and the Dakotas, the constant in-
troduction of ardent spirits, and the small num-
ber of Ojibwas residing in that quarter. The
former, on I^ake Superior, was favorably no-
ticed in the Herald for September, 1854, the
missionary, Mr. Wheeler, saying, " The past
year has been one of progress among our peo-
ple. They were never more quiet, friendly,
industrious, or temperate, and they were never
more disposed to listen to truth. Our meet-
ings upon the Sabbath have been well attend-
ed. Never before have so many Indians come
so regularly to our religious services, and lis-
tened so attentively to the preached word. A
number of Indians, including three Indian
chiefs, have identified themselves with the
Christian party, and call themselves praying
Indians. I have seen but one Indian dnuik
at Bad River for more than a year. A school
is maintained of about 50 pupils. The Indi-
ans the past year have planted more than ever
before, and have a prospect of a good crop."
The station was soon to be reinforced, and
hopes were entertained that much might yet
be done for the temporal and spiritual good of
the Ojibwas; but events of a discouraging
natin-e have occurred, and at the late meeting
of the Board in Hartford, notice was given of
the entire pusjjension of the mission.
Dahitas. — The American Board commenced
a mission among the Dakoias or Sioux in the
summer of 1835. The tril)e, as then estimat-
ed, was one of the most powerful on the conti-
nent, embracing about 25,000 Indians, who
wandered, for hunting and fishing purposes,
througli the extensive country lying between
the A'M\ and 40th degrees of north latitude,
and extending from the Mississippi to the Mis-
Bovu-i rivers.
The first missionaries were the Rev. Thomas
S. Williamson and Jedediah 1>. Stevens, with
their wives; Alexander lluggeiis. farmer, and
his wife ; and Sarah I'oage and I^ucy C. Ste-
vens, assistants. They selected for their sta-
tions Lake Harriet and Lac qui Parle, the
former five or six miles west of Fort Snelling,
which is on the west bank of the Mississippi,
near its junction with the St. Peters, and about
forty miles below the Falls of St. Anthony ;
and the latter on the St. Peters river, about
200 miles above its junction with the Missis-
sippi, or 400 following the course of the river
in a north-westerly direction from Lake Har-
riet. Mr. Williams, who was also a physician,
and Mr. Huggeus and Miss Poage, remained
at Lake Harriet ; while the rest of the com-
pany proceeded to Lac qui Parle. The first
few years were chiefly occupied in preparing
suitable buildings for the mission families and
school, and in the study of the Dakota and
French languages, the hitter being thought
important in order to communicate instruction
to the mixed French and Indian population
found at the trading posts and other places in
that region. The l)akota language was found
to be peculiarly destitute of a large class of
words which were indispensable in giving in-
struction on moral and religious subjects. As
illustrations. Dr. Williamson found that in
Dakota a " good heart " meant simply joy, and
a " bad heart " grief. A " hard heart " stood
for courage. Giving religious instruction in
such a language was a slow process. But the
word was not without effect ; and in 1838
churches had been formed at both the stations,
that at Lac qui Parle having received in all 16
members, and that at Lake Harriet a smaller
number. The school at the former station had
about 40 pupils, and that at the latter 10 or
15. The tribe suffered severely from the pre-
valence of the small-pox in the autumn of 1837,
and great numl)ers died in some localities.
Famine also prevailed to some extent, and the
Ojibwas were making frequent incursions into
the Dakota territory, destroying or stealing
horses and cattle, and often murdering the peo-
ple. These causes, altogether, operated to
discourage the pijiiple and retard the mission ;
yet the missionaries were mastering the lan-
guage, and drew increasing numbers within
the sound of the Gospel. Portions of the
Scriptures were also translated, including the
(jospel of Mark, and selections from other Gos-
pels and the Acts, and from the Old Testament,
amounling in all to 107,500 pages.
In4&4(), the Indians near Lake Harriet all
fled, througli fear of their Ojibwa neighl>ors,
and the mission at that place was suspended.
At Lae (lui l\vrle more progress was made
this year than in any preceding year. Three
preaching services were held each Sabbath,
two in Dakota and one in English, and the
hearers varied from 40 to 80. Four Indian
women were admitted to the church, and 1 G
childrt'ii of Die church members were baptized.
A Sabbath-schnol was opened early in the
year, which soon increa.^ed to over 30 pupils ;
iind in the day-school there was an average of
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
621
30 or 40 scholars, and a total of 112. Print-
ing was also done to the amount of 173,000
pages.
In 1842, a house of worship was erected at
Lac qui Parle, with the aid of some of the
Indians. The monthly concert was held in
the Dakota language, attended by 40 or 50
Indians. It was estimated that 200 Indians
had attended the school, more or less, and that
about 100 had learned to read intelligently.
A uew station was occupied in 1843 at Tra-
vers des Sioux, at the head of boat navigation
on the St. Peters, about 75 miles from its
•junction with the Mississippi. In 1846 and
1847, two other stations were occupied, one
called Kaposia, on the west bank of the Missis-
sippi, a little below the St. Peters, and the
other Xapedan, on the St. Peters, 30 miles
from Fort Snelliug. To these j^laces mission-
aries and teachers were sent, at the earnest
solicitation of the Indians themselves, and it
was the first time that the Dakotas had ever
shown such an appreciation of missionary in-
struction and aid. The Indians residing around
the stations generally refrained from the use
of ardent spirits, and manifested an increasing
inclination to till the soil. About the same
time invitations came from several other Indi-
an villages, requesting that religions teachers
might come and reside among them ; but there
were none to send.
In the autumn of 1848, the committee, wish-
ing to make full proof of the Dakota mission,
sent out two more missionaries and their wives,
and new stations were formed at Prairieville
and Red Wing, making six in all, one having
been gived up. There were now 8 missiona-
ries in this field, and 5 male and 14 female
assistants. The report for 1850 presented the
following statistics, which, as they are more
full than any of a later date, are presented
here:
STATIONS.
SCHOOLS.
CUURCHES.
"3
o
o
B
a
o
a
<A
■3
■a
"S
1
<
o
A
6
o
o
a
"o
a
o
o
O
"S
o
•a
K
1'^
1
.g
o
"a
1
3
a
a
o
a
a
'3
p
a
a
8
£
N
"p.
3
1
a
i
cl
o
tj .
|i
a. 5*
go
11
Lac qui Parle .
Traversdes Sioux
Prairieville. . .
Oak Grove . . .
Kaposia ....
Red Wing . , .
Totals ....
12
12
16
5
6
70
24
50
6
5
20
12
50
6
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
20
3
8
7
0
2
7
8
2
1
1
4
1
2
2
1
28
3
6
17
30i
27
144
11
32
57
6
3
31
32
2
5
5
54
In July, 1851, treaties were entered into be-
tween the Dakota Indians and the U. S.
Government, by which the Indians ceded a
large portion of their territory, only reserving
a tract about 150 miles 1 mg and 20 wide, in
the valley of the St. Peters. But the treaty in
this form was not ratified, the Senate refusing
to confirm the reservation, and merely permit-
ting the Dakotas to remain upon it during
the pleasure of the president. To these modi-
fied terms the assent of the Indians was subse-
quently obtained, and in 1853 they removed on
to the reservation. As all the stations but one
lay within the ceded territory, they were for-
saken of Indians, and of course given up. The
Herald, for September, 1854, notices the exist-
ence of but two stations. Yellow Medicine and
New Hope, so that from the six flourishing
stations above mentioned, the mission was sud-
denly reduced to a very restricted condition,
thus furnishing another instance of the harrass-
ing and disastrous efl:ects of the government
policy, in driving the Indians from their lands,
andcompclling them to feel that they have no
resting place, and no security for any spot of
earth they may dwell upon, whether held by
permission or under the most solemn treaty
stipulations. To conduct missions successfully
amopg a people subject to such removals, liv-
ing in constant dread of government force, or
treachery, and rendered suspicious of the mo-
tives of white men, has been found extremely
difficult, and often impossible ; and hence the
frequent abandonment of Indian missions, after
vast expenditures of labor and money upon
them and the sacrifice of many precious lives
in efi^orts to sustain them.
As the Dakotas hold the territory they are
upon at the pleasure of the president, the
order for their removal to some other uncertain
abode may be looked for at any time, and,
therefore, great uncertainty attends the mis-
sion among them, both as to its usefulness and
permanency.
622
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
Abenaquis. — This band of Indians is settled
at St. Francis, in Lower Canada, on the south
side of Lake St. Peters, about 60 miles below
Montreal. Their missionary and teacher, Pe-
ter Paul Osunkhirhine, is a native of this
tribe, and received a good English education
at Hanover, N. H., where he became hopefully
pious. He afterwards returned home, with the
hope of doing good to his people. Finding it
impracticable to teach them the English lan-
guage, he prepared an elementary book in
their own language, embracing a translation
of passages of Scripture, and some other useful
pieces. This book, with a small religious
tract, was printed at the expense of the Board
in 1830. With these he returned again to his
people, and having obtained the appointment
of schoolmaster from the Canadian govern-
ment, he opened a school, at the same time
holding meetings on the Sabbath, and endea-
voring, in other ways, to enlighten their be-
nighted minds. Many children and youth at-
tended his school, and even some adults learned
to read his books. Some who listened to his
religious instructions became serious and hope-
fully pious. This awakened the opposition of
the papists, who complained of him to the gov-
ernment, for interfering with the religion of
the Indians, and he was forbidden to hold
meetings, or in any manner to meddle with
their religious concerns. With this injunc-
tion he could not conscientiously comply, and
he_ was, therefore, much persecuted, and de-
prived of his salary from the government. He
then applied to the Committee of the Board,
for such an annual allowance as would furnish
him the means of subsistence, and enable him
to continue his labors among his people. This
was granted, and he has persevered in his self-
denying and important work to the present
time.
Osunkhirhine was licensed to preach in. Jan-
uary, 1836, by the Champlain Presbytery, and
in the following June, he was ordained as an
evangelist to his native tribe. Upon this, the
opposition of the papal community was much
embittered, and efforts were made to get him
removed from the reservation, but the governor
refused to interfere. When he commenced his
labors, the whole tribe were ignorant and
bigoted papists. In 1837, more than 30 per-
sons attended his preaching, all of whom had
renounced the Komish church, in spite of the
most bitter persecution. From five to twenty
children were gathered into a school, accord-
ing as the people were at home or on their
hunting grounds, and three persons, including
the wile of Osunkhirhine, had joined the Pro-
testant church. In 1840, the church members
had increased to 27, and a prosperous school
of 23 pupils was in operation.
In the winter of 1841, President Lord, of
Dartmouth College, visited Osunkhirhine at
St. Francis, and in a sul)scquent statement, he
remarked : " The church now consists of 29
members, out of 300 souls, the number of the
tribe now resident at St. Francis. Osunkhir-
hine's labors are . steady, and well adapted to
the condition of the people. His wife, a full-
blooded Indian, is remarkably interesting — a
model. I beg to commend the mission. Its
importance, I think, cannot be too highly ap-
preciated. Its relation to the French popula-
tion gives it its greatest importance. There
is hardly any other light between Montreal
and Quebec. The despised church at St.
Francis is his witness along the great river."
In 1843, it was reported : " Five Indians
have been received to the church on profession
during the last year, and the whole number
received since Mr. Osunkhirhine commenced
his labors, is 46, 41 of whom still survive, and
are members in good standing. The papal
priests are active, as heretofore, in opposing
the progress of spiritual religion among the
Indians." In 1845 it was recorded : " Sixty-
six Indians, all converted from Romanism, and
hopefully renewed by the Spirit of God, have
been received to the church." The opposition
of the papal priests availed little. In 1846 it
was estimated that one-third of the 300 com-
posing the Abenaquis tribe, had become Pro-
testants, through the labors of this judicious
and devoted native missionary.
In June, 1851, Mr. Treat, one of the secre-
taries of the Board, was directed to visit the
Abenaquis tribe, which he found composing
" an irregularly-built village on the right bank
of the St. Francis, four miles from the St.
Lawrence. The population of the tribe is
three or four hundred, and in their general
appearance and habits of life, they compare
well with the Canadians around them. Mr.
Osunkhirhine has a plain but comfortable
church, erected partly at the expense of the
Board, in which he holds three services on the
Sabbath, and three meetings during the week."
The latest intelligence from this mission is
to January, 1854. The missionary continues
to labor with his usual fidelity, having been at
his post more than twenty years, and, though
contending still against papal influence, and
often tried by the delinquency of the converts,
he has a reasonable prospect of continuance
and usefulness.
Pawnees. — The Pawnee tribe, at the com-
mencement of the mission among them, in
1835, was divided into four bands ; Pawnee
Republicans, Pawnee Peeks, Pawnee Loups,
and Grand Pawnees, — amounting in all to
between 6,000 and 7,000 persons. They occu-
pied an extensive territory on both sides of
the Platte river, in Nebraska. The first mis-
sionary company consisted of Rev. John Dun-
bar, missionary, Benedict Satterlee, physician
and catechist, and Samuel Allis, assistant.
Owing to the wandering habits of these Indi-
ans, little could be done for several years in
the way of systematic labor. Their head-quar-
ters were at Bellevue, the seat of the govern,-
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
623
ment agency, and Messrs. Dunbar and Satter-
lee generally accompanied large bands of In-
dians in their long hunting excursions, with a
view both to acquire the language and to give
instruction, as opportunity was afforded. Mr.
Satterlee died on one of these tours, in a some-
what mysterious manner.
In 1840, these four bands appeared strongly
inclined to abandon the hunter life, and settle
in villages for the cultivation of the soil. The
tract of country selected for this purpose was
located on Council and Plumb creeks, on the
north side of Loup Fork, which empties into
Platte river. To this place the missionary
families removed in the spring of 1841. The
government, agreeably to certain treaty pro-
visions, had furnished the Indians with large
numbers of oxen, plows, &c., and they had
begun to plow and sow their farms with
great zeal and satisfaction.
In this early stage of their progress they
were destined to a terrible onset from a neigh-
boring hostile tribe. Early on a morning in
June, 1843, a strong party of Sioux came upon
one of the Pawnee villages by surprise, when
a course of fighting and plunder ensued which
lasted till mid-day, and resulted in killing 67
Pawnees, wounding twenty others, seizing 200
horses, and burning 20 out of 41 lodges of
which the village was composed. The value
of property lost was estimated at §8,000 or
$10,000. The Indians of this village were
scattered among the other bands, being fearful
of another attack should they attempt to re-
build the village ; and in all the villages agri-
cultural labor was greatly retarded by the con-
stant fear of hostile tribes. Meanwhile the
missionary brethren and sisters, amid many
agitating scenes, prosecuted their labors with
patience and hope ; and especially had they,
in 1846, accomplished an important work, in
the translation of the Gospel of Mark into the
Pawnee language.
In 1847 the missionaries, in view of the
frequent assaults made upon the Pawnees, and
the danger to which their own lives were ex-
posed, withdrew from the field, and the mission
has not since been resumed.
Oregon Indicns.-^-After several exploring
expeditions among the Indians west of the
Eocky Mountains, the Board entered upon a
mission there in the autumn of 1836. Their
attention was directed to three tribes, embrac-
ing the Kayuses, among whom was the "VVaii-
latpu station ; the Nez Perses, among whom
Avere the Clear Water and Kamiah stations ;
and the Flat Heads, in whose neighborhood
was the Tshimakain station. These stations
were provided with suitable laborers, so that
in 1840 the whole force consisted of four mis-
sionaries, one physician, two male and six fe-
male assistants. They were not only kindly
received, but the Indians showed the utmost
eagerness to receive instruction ; and other
tribes, hearing that teachers had come into the
country, sent pressing messages requesting that
one or more might be sent to dwell among
them.
The three tribes above named were anxious
also to engage in agriculture, and hundreds of
families settled near the mission stations, and
cultivated the ground so assiduously that in a
little time they had produced enough for their
comfortable subsistence. Their desire for re-
ligious instruction exceeded anything ever be-
fore met M^ith among the North American In-
dians. " Among the Nez Perses," says the
report for 1840, "the congregation had in-
creased from such a number as could be accom-
modated in a small school house, to between
one and two thousand, many coming from the
adjacent bands. All seemed eager for religious
instruction, and it was believed that the Spirit
of the Lord was working on the hearts of many.
As many as 2,000 made a public confession of
sin, and promised to serve God. Doubtless
many did this with a very imperfect idea of
what was involved in it, though not a few
were thought to give evidence of saving con-
version." A similar religious interest was
manifested among the Kayuses.
About this time the mission received, as a
donation from the Sandwich Island churches,
a small printing-press, Avith the requisite type
and furniture, with paper, &c., all estimated at
about §450. From the same source they re-
ceived the year before §80 in money, and ten
bushels of salt. The press was immediately
set up at Clear Water, and employed to print
an elementary school book of twenty pages.
The Indians were highly gratified with a book
in their own language, and new interest was
found to be imparted to the schools. In 1841
a second book was prepared and printed in the
Nez Perses language, and 800 copies printed,
making 41,600 pages. A saw mill and grist
mill were also put in operation at Clear Water,
and a grain mill at Waiilatpu, all of which
afforded valuable aid to the mission families,
and encouraged a settled life among the In-
dians.
For the three or four succeeding years the
mission was attended with great apparent suc-
cess, not, however, without some serious defec-
tions among the Indians, and at times abusive
treatment from the younger and more savage
portion of the tribes.
In the autumn of 1847, however, a scene oc-'
curred at the Waiilatpu station, among the
Kayuses, of the most tragical and distressing
character. Owing to the prevalence and ex-
treme fatality of the measles and dysentery, a
portion of the Indians became jealous of the
missionaries, and especially of Dr. Whitman,
who was stationed at Waiilatpu, supposing
that if they would they might use their super-
natural powers to stay the dreadful malady.
Some even pretended that Dr. W. was giving
them poison, in order to destroy their lives.
They therefore determined on revenge, and on
624
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
the 29tli of Nov., 1847, they fell upon the
Waiilatpu station, and most cruelly massacred
Dr. "Whitmai], his wife, and twelve other per-
sons. Of the latter, several were emigrants
from the States, and one was an assistant mis-
sionary. The details of this tragical affair
are of a most heart-rending nature. They are
fully given in the " Herald " for July, 1848, by
Mr. Spalding, one of the missionaries, with an
account of his own wonderful escape. About
fifty women and children, who were taken and
held as captives, were redeemed through the
agency of Mr. Ogden, chief factor of the Hud-
son Bay Company, after having suffered every
abuse and indignity for nearly a mouth.
In addition to the above-mentioned cause for
this outrage, it Avas believed to have been pro-
moted in some measure by the Romish priests,
from St. Louis, who had come into that region,
and who had been active in opposing the Pro-
testant missionaries. This suspicion was
strengthened by the fact that several children
of the murderers were baptized by one of these
priests, while yet the hands of their parents
were wet with the blood of their victims. It
was also known that the Catholic priest last
named was in the company of an Ind ian who was
pursuing Mr. Spalding with a loaded pistol,
with a view to murder him. From these and
other circumstances it is not difficult to deter-
mine the relation and agency of Romish priests
to this scene — one of the most savage and ap-
paling to be met with in all the annals of mis-
sionary adventure.
Witliin a short time after the massacre, all
the stations were abandoned, it not being con-
sidered safe for the mission families to remain.
Some of the missionaries continued to labor
in Oregon, among the whites, but no mission
has since been attempted among the Indian
triljes.
Indians in New York. — The Indians in Xew
York are remnants of the " Six Tribes," and
reside at the four following places, viz. : Tusca-
rora, about 4 miles east of Niagara river ;
Seneca, 4 miles from Buffalo ; Cattaraugus, 30
miles south of Buffalo, and Alleghany, also in
western New York. The missions at these
places were transferred by the United Foreign
Missionary Society to the Board, in 182G.
In 1827, Mr. John Eliot, a young man from
Maine, entered upon his labors among the Tus-
. caroras, where he found a poi)ulation of 240
Indians, a church of 15 numbers ; a mission
house and farm worth .^1,800, and a school,
■which he inmu'dialely re-organized, with 30
scholars. In 1831, a revival of religion was
enjoyed at this place, and the chur^ih was in-
creased to 56 members. At this period for
the first time, the sanctity and obligations of
the marriage relation were acknowledged by
those Indians, and 21 children were baptized.
The people also began more strictly to regard
the Sabbath, and to be more temperate and
industrious.
At Seneca, a boarding-school was in opera-
tion, which, in 1828, embraced 70 pupils ; also
a church of 49 members. In 1821), a new
house of worship was dedicated, the money for
which, — Si, 700, had been subscribed by the
chiefs and young men of the tribe. During
this year, also, the Gospel of Luke, the Sermon
on the Mount, and about thirty hymns were
printed in the Seneca language. A revival of
religion was enjoyed at this station in 1831.
At Cattaraugus, there was special attention
to religion in 1827, and a church of 12 mem-
bers was organized. For several subsequent
years there was much attention to religion at
this place.
The station at Alleghany had enjoyed the
services of a teacher several years, but had
been without a missionary till 1829, when Mr.
William Hall was ordained to that work.
In 1843, the whole number of Indians resid-
ing in Western New York, was estimated at
3,000, about three-fourths of whom were Sene-
cas, and the remainder Tuscaroras, Onondagas,
Cayugas, Oneidas, and Mohawks, remnants of
the once powerful Six Nations. They occu-
pied five reservations, embracing about 110,000
acres. A treaty had, a little before this, been
concluded, by which a portion of their lands
wez-e ceded to the United States, and this sub-
ject caused much complaint and trouble.
The whole number of church members at
this time was 234, of whom 49 were at Tusca-
rora, 20 at Seneca, 51 at Cattaraugus, and
114 at Alleghany. The number of pupils in
the schools at these stations was estimated at
200. The mission press at Seneca was em-
ployed in printing various small works, and iu
1845, more than 52,000 pages were executed.
In respect to agriculture and the comforts of
life, great good had been effected among the
the Indians. One of the missionaries reported
in 1848, " three times as much productive
labor as there was in 1832, and five times as
much provision obtained."
Of late years some changes have occurred,
and the mission has been reported under two
separate heads, viz., the Seneca mission, and
the Tuscarora mission. The Seneca mission
has 4 stations, 4 missionaries, 15 female as-
sistant missionaries, and one native assistant.
In the two churches there are 1G9 members,
and in the 10 schools there arc 310 pupils.
The Tuscarora mission has one station, one
out-station, one missionary, four female assist-
ant missionaries, and two native helpers. The
church has 96 members ; and the schools, of
which there are two, have 70 scholars.
Under the labors of the missionaries, these
Indians have advanced to a high state of civ-
ilization, and, in respect to industrial, social,
and moral habits, they show a degree of im-
provement rarely excelled by those who have
been raised from a savage state.
Moravian Missions to Nokth Amkrican
Indians.— The labors of the Moravian breth-
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS.
625
ren among the Indians of North America were
commenced as early as 1735. Their attention
was first directed to the Creek nation, but their
labors were soon interrupted by hostilities be-
tween the English and the Spaniards. Subse-
quently, during the 18th century, they estab-
lished missions at various points in the south-
ern and middle States, and they often had the
pleasure of seeing the Indians embracing the
truth, and even of witnessing some signal tri-
umphs of the Gospel ; but they were frequent-
ly compelled to abandon interesting fields, by
hostilities among neighboring tribes, and espe-
cially by the adverse events of the English and
French war, and the war of the revolution.
To follow them in the varied results of their
labors through this long period, would require
more space than can be allowed in the present
work.
Within the present century the Moravians
have had missions among the Delawares, the
Chippcways, the Creeks, the Cherokees, and
some smaller tribes, whom they have followed
in their voluntary or forced removals, quit-
ting their posts only when their continued
labors became fruitless or impossible.
At the present time their missions are con-
fined to two tribes : the Delawares, on the
Kansas river, where they have more than 3.50
Indians under religious instruction, and the
Cherokees, in their new western home, where
they have two stations, and about 120 com-
municants. The returns .from these missions
are very incomplete, rendering it impossible to
give full statistics, or to state what are their
jjresent prospects and means of usefulness.
CnuROH Missionary Society. — The only
mission which the Church of England has
had among the North American Indians is
that among the Esquimaux, on lied river,
south of Lake AViuuipeg and north of Minne-
sota. It was commenced in 1822 by Eev. J.
West, the Hudson Bay Company's chaplain,
on Red river. In the course of a year or two,
a school-house and church were erected, and
considerable progress was made towards bring-
ing the Indians under instruction. In 1823
Rev. D. T. Jones sailed from England for the
purpose of strengthening this mission, and in
1825 he was joined by the Rev. W. Cochran.
The progress of the mission at this date had
been such, that the school-house and church
were too small, and new and more commodious
ones were erected. In 1832 there were 3 sta-
tions, with each a church, and a total of 143
communicants. The number attending public
worship was 800, and the number gathered
into schools was 330.
At the present time, as nearly as can be as-
certained from the incomplete returns, there
are connected with the Red river mission 10
stations, 8 missionaries, 12 assistants, 8 of
whom are natives, 1733 attendants on public
worship, 507 communicants, 22 schools, and
724 pupils. The missionaries have acquired
40
the Indian language, so as to preach in it, and
they have translated portions of the New Tes-
tament, the church catechism, the marriage
service, and the communion and baptismal
services. The language of these Indians, de-
nominated the Cree language, is said by the
missionaries to bear a strong affinity to the
C-reek.
In the department of agriculture, consider-
able progress has been made. The Indians
build very comfortable houses, raise large
patches of barley, wheat, potatoes, &c., and
enjoy much of social order and comfort. With-
in a short time Moose Lake has been occupied
as a station, under the laboi's of a pious Indian
who reads the New Testament well, and has
the entire confidence of the missionaries. — Rev.
E. D. MooRE.
Episcopal Board. — A mission was com-
menced at Green Bay, by the Missionary So-
ciety of the Protestant Episcopal Church in
the United States, in 1825, under the superin-
tendence of Rev. Mr. Nash, which was sus-
pended in 1827. In 1829, it was renewed,
under the superintendence of Rev. R. P. Codle,
by whoa\ it was continued, under many em-
barrassments and difficulties, till 1837, when
treaties were entered into between the United
States and many of the north-western tribes of
Indians for their removal west of the Missis-
sippi. The unsettled condition of the tribes
around the mission, consequent upon these
treaties, and their subsequent removal, led to
the discontinuance of the mission. The results
of this mission are thus stated : About 270 In-
dian children enjoyed the benefits of the school,
some of whom have died in the faith of Christ,
and the comfortable assurance of a blessed
hereafter. Some are now adorning the doc-
trine of God our Saviour by a life of consistent
piety.
Some time after the breaking up of this
mission. Bishop Kemper, accompanied by Rev.
Mr. Gregory, embraced a number of tribes in
a circuit, in a visit to the scattered members
of his diocese ; and on the 2d of December,
183S, he consecrated a church at Duck Creek,
erected by the Oneidas with a portion of the
funds received from Government ; and in 1839,
Rev. Solomon Davis had charge of the church.
The department of Indian Missions was subse-
quently transferred to the Domestic Commit-
tee ; who proposed a plan for an Indian dio-
cese, with a missionary bishop, and considera-
ble eifort was made to raise money to endow
the bishopric ; but as yet, the object has not
been accomplished. A mission has, however,
been commenced among the Chickasaws, and
an apjjropriatiou has been made by the United
States Government toward sustaining a school
under the direction of the mission.
American Missionary Association. — Ojib-
wa Mission.— This mission comprises four sta-
tions, located at Red Lake, Cass Lake, Belle
Prairie and St. Josephs, Minnesota Territory ;
626
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS—NOVA SCOTIA.
the first throe on the head waters of the Mis-
sissippi river, and the last on the North Red
river, where it enters the British possessions.
This is the only mission in all that region of
country. It was commenced under the patron;
age of the Western Evangelical Missionary
Society, in 1843, and afterwards transferred to
the American Missionary Association. Tlie
Ojiljwa (or Chippeway) Indians compose one
of the largest tribes in the United States, num-
bering some 30,000. They are divided into
smair bands of from 200 to 500 souls ; the
bands each having its own home, hunting-
ground and chief, all located from 25 to 100
miles apart.
At three of these stations, boarding-schools
are established, and the scholars are required
to engage in some kind of manual labor a por-
tion of each day. Churches containing native
converts have been formed at Red Lake and
Cass Lake. The other stations have been
commenced within the last two years.
AYhen this mission commenced, the Indians
had no domestic animals, except dogs, and no
agricultural implements. They raised nothing,
but depended for subsistence on hunting and
fishing, wild rice and sugar ; and, being in a
poor country for game, they often suffered with
hunger, and sometimes resorted to the use of
human flesh to satisfy it. Now some of these
bauds supply themselves abundantly with food,
and have to spare for their starving neighbors
of other bauds. For this improvement they
are indebted to the instruction and example of
the missionaries, and the aid received from them
in plowing their lands. — Rev. G. Whipple.
^
NAME OF STATION.
s ^
a a
1
a
J3
S in
o
■^ °
19
— -S
^-5
t-
■^ 3
'o 'H
'-'
Red Lake
1843
1846
1
1
3
1
4
3
1
1
1
10
2
*
20
12
7
Belle Prairie
ISo-J.
1
1
*
*
Totals
2
7
10
3
12
39
«
Not
reported.
American Ixdian Mission Association. — ■
This society, the seat of whose operations is in
Louisville, Ky., have four missions, located
among the Choctaws, Creeks, Weas, Piauke-
shaws, Miamies, and Putawatamies ; with six
stations and eight out-station« ; 28 missiona-
ries and assistants ; 21 churches, with 1300
communicants ; 126 baptisms during the year ;
and 165 pupils in schools. This society repre-
sents a portion of the Baptist denomination iu
the south-west.
GEXERAL TABULAR VIEW.
SOCIETIES.
Presbyterian Board
American Baptist Union
Methodist K. Church North and South
Wesleyan Missionary Society ....
American Boardf
American IMissionary Association . .
Church Missionary Society
Moravians
American Indian Missionary Association
Totals . . . ,
1835
1817
1819
1828
1818
1843
1822
11
10
44
24
4
10
4
6
113
7
46
22*
21
2
28*
50
-A a
55
73
17
3
u;3
3
9
2S
15
64
14
19
3
21
57
96
1,371
5,359
2,003
1,669
12
507
1,300
12,317
13
26
22
67
517
210
1884
74
718
39
724
165
4331
* Includes assistants. ■)■ Statistics for 1853.
(See Appendix, p. 784)
NOYA SCOTIA : The province of Nova
Scotia, is situated on the eastern side of the
continent of North America, between north
latitude 43^ 25' and 47-^, and between west
longitude 43^ 40' and 66° 25'. It is one of
the provinces of British North America. It
was first colonized by the French, by whom it
was called AcadicS or Acadia. It was finally
ceded by France to Great Britain in 1713.
Its principal natural divisions arc Nova Scotia
18,600 square miles ; its population 276,117,
according to the census of 1851. The reli-
gious parties, when ranged under the two gen-
eral divisions of Protestants and Catholics,
stand thus: Protestants, 206,483; Roman
Catholics, 69,634. Of the Protestant churches,
the more prominent are the Established (-hurch
of England and Ireland ; the Presbyterian
Churcii ; the Associate Baptist ; the Wesleyan
Methodist; the Congregational; and the Evan-
Proper and Cape Breton. Its area is about gelical Lutheran. The religious statistics given
NOVA SCOTIA.
62T
in this article ave to be understood as those of
1854, except where it is otherwise stated.
The Church of England is recognized by
the ancient hxws of the province as the Estab-
lished Church. This legal recognition was ef-
fected in 1758, but though various civil enact-
ments, as to the limits of parishes, appointment
of church-wardens and vestrymen, were ob-
tained thereby, nothing beyond the mere name
of an establishment has for many years existed.
The permanent endowment of Windsor Col-
lege, under the exclusive control of this church,
has been discontinued by the state ; so that,
in effect, the only privilege which i-emains of a
distinctive nature, is that the bishop retains
ex-officio a seat in the legislative council of the
province. There is much probability that this
offensive distinction will soon be removed, and
that then the name, as well as the privileges of
an establishment, will be erased from the civil
statute book. The number of adherents to
this church in 1851 was 36,482. The iist of
clergy for 1854 contains one bishop, one arch-
deacon, 65 ordained ministers, and two travel-
ing missionaries. These are located in 40 dif-
ferent towns and settlements. Four of the
clergy are connected with Windsor College,
and three with Halifax Grammar School :
two are retired from service, and one is an
agent for the Colonial Church and School
Society. Until recently, large annual remif-
tances for the support of the clergy and col-
lege professors, had been received from the
British Society for the Propagation of the
Gospel in Foreign Parts, and even, it is under-
sttjd, from grants of the Imperial Parliament
of Great Britain and Ireland. The foreign
aid is now greatly curtailed, and will, it is ex-
pected, in the course of a few years, altogether
cease. The effect of this change of policy has
been far from disastrous. A large portion of
the wealth of the province is found within the
pale of this church, and nothing is wanting to
secure permanent and growing prosperity but
the prudent management of its internal re-
sources. Already this has been tested in the
large endowment secured by subscription for
Windsor College, (£10,000,) and in the efforts
made to sustain in thorough efficiency the Di-
ocesan Society and the Foreign District of the
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge.
Presbyterian Church. — Under this head
are grouped the adherents of three distinct
churches, who, though holding the same stand-
ards, are yet quite independent in church gov-
ernment, if not really antagonistic in feeling
and pursuit. Their source of dispute, or
rather, ground of separation, depends entirely
upon their respective origin. They have all
descended from the Presbyterian Churches of
Scotland, and hold the distinctive principles of
what are there denominated, Kirk, Free
Church, and United Presbyterian. The old-
est, largest, and most influential of these bodies
in Nova Scotia is that which arose from the
two secession churches, Burgher and Anti-
burgher. A union was happily effected be-
tween the adherents of these, and of all the
Presbyterians then in Nova Scotia, in the
year 1817. Only one Presbyterian minister
remained aloof, and he was personally favor-
able, while his congregation being originally
independent, was unfavorable to this union.
The first Presbyterian missionaries arrived in
Nova Scotia in 1766, but no permanent loca-
tion was made before 1771.
The first presbytery was formed in 1786,
under the designation of Presbytery of Truro,
Nine years afterwards, another was formed in
Pictou, and so designated. At the period of
the union above referred to, there were three
presbyteries, comprising in all 19 ordained
ministers, and 25 congregations. The great
difficulty all along experienced by this church,
has been the difficulty of obtaining an ade-
quate supply of ministers.
At first, and for many years, the only source
of supply was the parent churches in Scotland,
and the missionary spirit there and then exist-
ing was not so ardent as to overcome, with suf-
ficient readiness and frequency, the terrors of a
climate generally reputed, though falsely, as
vibrating between the extremes of heat and
cold. In 1816 a society was formed to pro-
cure the establishment of an academy for the
training of native youth, for the ministry and
•other learned professions. The basis proposed
was sufficiently liberal to unite all dissenting
bodies, and the means of sujiport was to be en-
dowment by the State. This effort was for a
time apparently successful, but never so much
so as to acquire the character of permanency.
Ultimately it became a bone of contention, in-
troduced bitter animosity and religious hate
into the surrounding community, and became
a watchword for political party, so as to form
an effectual hindrance to ecclesiastical union
on the part of the different Presbyterian bodies.
Eventually all. connection with this institution
was abandoned by the Presbyterian Church
of Nova Scotia, and then it became a matter
of dire necessity with that church to provide
and maintain an educational institute out of
her own resources. Several years, however,
elapsed before this step was taken. In 1848
measures were initiated with # view to the
erection of a theological seminary, as prepara-
tory to the Divinity Hall. A professor of
philosophy was appointed, who for a time took
charge of the literary classes, as well as logic,
and natural and moral i^hilosophy. At pre-
sent, 1854, there are two professors in the se-
minary, one having charge of the classes iu
languages, mathematics, and natural philoso-
phy ; the other logic and moral philosophy,
with other branches. In the Divinity Hall
there are two professors, to one is committed
biblical literature, to the other theology, sys-
tematic and pastoral. The literary and phi-
losophical classes have an annual session of
628
NOVA SCOTIA.
six months, and students are required to attend
three years in order to complete their curricu-
lum. The Divinity Hall remains in session
six weeks, and the course of study extends
over four years ; but as the Hall meets annu-
ally, immediately after tne seminary, the entire
course for students of divinity does not exceed
six years. A fixed standard of qualification
for entrance to the seminary has been estab-
lished, such as can be acquired at the g-eneral
schools and academies of the jn'ovince, and
special provision is made to admit students
who have received part of their training else-
"whei'e to such a standing in the seminary or
hall as their acquirements may be found, on
examination, to entitle them.
The Synod of the Presbyterian Church of
Nova Scotia meets annually on the last Tues-
day of June, and is the final court of judicar
ture — there being no ecclesiastical connection
■with the Church in Scotland, either in regard
to pecuniary su])port or spiritual control. It
has now (in 1854) under its inspection three
presbyteries in Nova Scotia and one in Prince
Edward's Island. The presbytery of Pictou
includes 15 congregations ; of these 14 enjoy
a settled ministry, and one of these a collegiate
charge. There are various mission stations
within the bounds of this presbytery which
will soon be able to support, as they now re-
quire, the labors of a separate minister. One
member of this presbytery is located in Mera-
michi. New Brunswick, and is the only or-
dained minister of this connection now settled
in that province. The presbytery of Tours in-
cludes seven congregations, and at present all
are supplied with a settled ministry. Several
mission stations are in course of preparation
for the same position, and one of these is in
New Brunswick. The presbytery of Halifax
has within its bounds seven congregations.
Six are now under a stated pastorate. ]\Iis-
sion stations are thus numerous and promising.
The presbytery of Prince Edward's Island con-
tains seven congregations, six ministers, and
several missi(m stations. In each of these
presbyteries there are cor-regatiuns whose
local extent, numlier of adiicrents, pecuniary
resources, and prospect of increase are calling
aloud for division and subdivision ; but the
supply of masters is yet too scanty to admit
of comjjliance with a policy that would soon
double and redouble the efficiency and spirit-
ual prosperity of the best portion of the Church.
At present there are but three ordained pro-
bationers, one retired minister who takes occa-
sional appointments, and four licentiates. The
business of the synod, during the interval of
its meetings, is conducted by four distinct
boards, one for the Home Mission supply, dis-
tributing supply of })rol)ationers according to
th(-- wants of the several presbyteries, and as-
sisting such stations with the means of occa-
sioiuil supplies, under the direction of the pres-
byteries in whose bounds these arc placed ; a
second board, for the superintendence of the
Foreign Missionary operations of the church ;
a third, for the superintendence of the seminary
and hall, and a fourth for legally receiving and
appropriating the moneys of the church which
may be entrusted to their care.
The following statistics will afford some
idea of the pecuniary resources and numerical
strength of the P. C. N. S. : ordained minis-
j;ers, 38 ; licentiates, 4 ; self-sustaining congre-
gations, 34 ; homo mission stations, 6 ; supple-
mented congregations, 3 ; foreign mission sta-
tions, 1 ; adhering population, according to
census (1851,) 28,767 in Nova Scotia ; the
population in Prince Edward Island not cor-
rectly ascertained, but not under 4,000, and in
New Brunswick 1,000. If to all this we add
2,000 for the church at Aneiteum, New Heb-
rides, we have a gross amount of adherents,
35,7G7 souls, who are depending for spiritual
oversight on the church. 31 congregations
return 5,3G9 communicants, 27G accessions.
According to the statistical tables and finan-
cial returns for 1854, the average salary paid
to each minister is supposed to be nearly
£130 currency, or £104 sterling.
This TvouU yield a return in round 1 £ , .„„ q q
numbers of / '
Home Mission receipts during same year. . 258 2 2)^
Foreign " " " " " .. 433 15 2
Synod Fund " " " .. 81 2 1>^
Seminary Fund " • " " .. 328 0 3^
Miscellaneous purposes, not strictly ") g 404 8 0
dcuomiuational j . . . . ,
Total raised during year 1854 £8,005 7 9>i
currency, or £6,404 6 3 sterling.
Additional funds under the care of the Educa-
tional Board :
Theological Trofessorsliip, funded iutere.'t. . . £581 11 10
Various funds, bequests, &c., " " ... 1,500 4 6
Total £i,081 16 4
currency, or £1.665 9 1 sterling.
CiiuRcn OF Scotland. — In order of date
the Church of Scotland is the next branch of
the Presbyterian CJhurch in Nova Scotia.
For a long ptn-iod very painful and injuri-
ous animosity existed between this body and
the Presbyterian church of Nova Scotia.
Shortly after the union of all the Presbyterians
in the province, in 1817, the strife commenced
and raged so long as the state-paid academy
of Pictou remained as a source of dispute.
Happily this has been removed, and the very
unseemiy and destructive feuds which it en-
gendered, have to a great extent disappeared,
aiul feelings of friendship are now being che-
rished byniinisters and people. This church
has all along depended for pecuniary sujiport
and ministerial supply on the parent church in
Scotland. In 1824, the Glasgow Colonial So-
ciety was organized (in Scotland) with a view
to supplv the Presbyterian pojndation of the
colonies with ministers of the Church of Scot-
land. At the disruption which took place in
NOVA SCOTIA.
629
May, 1843, uot fewer than 8 ministers left the
synod of Nova Scotia to fill up the breaches
at home. In 1844, this synod divided, a ma-
jority declaring in favor of the Free Church,
and assuming- the designation " Synod of No-
va Scotia, adhering to the Westminster stand-
ards." For several years a large proportion of
the congregations that had been deserted by
their ministers, remained vacant, but latterly
these have been to a considerable extent sup-
plied by new accessions from Scotland. The
synod now (1854) consists of 4 presbyteries.
There are, however, in all, but 9 ordained min-
isters, and 1 ordained missionary, and 4 cate-
chists. While the adhering population in
Nova Scotia alone was, in 1851, 18,867. It
will thus be seen that a very great deficiency
of pastoral oversight still exis.ts. The greater
number of those ministers now in the field are
supported by the Home Church, so that this
church, as a whole, is far from self-sustain-
ing.
Free Church or Synod of Nova Scotia,
adherixg to the westminster standards.
This body was formed in 1844, and consists
of the same number of presbyteries as the
body from which it was separated. It includes
a ministry, however, of 24, of whom 19 are
located in Nova Scotia, and 3 in Prince Ed-
ward's Island, one in Newfoundland, and one
in Bermuda, W. I. The adhering population
in Nova Scotia, in 1851, was found to number
25,820. A Free Church College for the lower
provinces of British North America is located
at Halifax, N.S., having 2 professoi's. Also
an academy, with a rector and 2 masters,
which is designed to prepare for the college.
Hitherto the supply and support of ministers
in this connection has greatly depended on the
resources of the Free Church of Scotland ; but
from the above institution, in connexion with
a Theological Hall, the native youth have been
trained, so that the first year's students have
advanced so far as to be licensed and located
in the different vacancies and mission stations
during the present year.
Reformed Presbyterian Church. — Three
congregations and 3 ministers. Adhering po-
pulation not accurately known.
Associated Baptist Churches. — The earli-
est efforts of this religious connection in Nova
Scotia is nearly contemporaneous with those
of the Presbyterian Church. It has 54 settled
ministers, with an adhering population of
42,243. This population, however, includes
several distinct Baptist communities, whose
ministry amounts to 17 elders and 3 ministers.
The Associated Baptist Church is divided into
3 associations : Western, Central, and Eastern.
The Baptist Convention of Nova Scotia, New
Brunswick, and Prince Edward Island, meets
annually. In Nova Scotia their educational
institutions are located, consisting of a college
and academy. The college has now 3 profes-
sors, and connected with it is a theological in-
stitute, with 2 professors, who also hold chairs
in the college. The academy has two teach-
ers, a principal and master, with an assistant.
Some years ago this church sent a missionary
to the foreign field, but at present they do not
appear to have any one. They have, however,
a missionary to the Acadian French in Nova
Scotia.
Wesleyan Methodist Church. — Mission-
aries from this body visited North America as
early as 17G9. In 1786, missions were commenc-
ed in Nova Scotia. By the last census (1851)
it has an adhering population of 23,596, and in
1854, 31 ordained ministers. This list of min-
isters includes, however, 1 chairman and gene-
ral superintendent, 1 editor of a denominational
newspaper, and 4 supernumeraries. The semi-
nary under the care of this body, is situated on
the borders of the two provinces. New Bruns-
wick and Nova Scotia, and this suits in its
locality the wants of both denominational dis-
tricts. It has a principal, who is also one of
the professors, and a second professor ; a clas-
sical and French tutor and English teacher ;
also a chaplain, treasurer, and steward. The
students are boarded within the institution,
and recently a large addition has been made,
with a view to accommodate females with suit-
able board and education.
Congregational or Independent Church.
— The origin of this church in Nova Scotia
was quite as early as others already described,
but its progress has been very limited. It has
but 6 ministers and 2,639 adherents. A col-
lege with 2 professors, 1 of whom acts as
president, is placed under the sanction and
control of the Congregational Union of Nova
Scotia and New Brunswick.
Evangelical Lutheran Church. — This is
the only other religious body in Nova Scotia
worthy of distinct notice. Its adherents are
chiefly of German extraction, and number
4087.
Besides the denominational efforts of each
of these evangelical bodies, they severally
unite in general schemes of benevolence and
Christian philanthropy. The Nova Scotia
Bible Society, and other auxiliaries of the
British and Foreign Bible Society enlist
the sympathies of all but the Baptists, and are
very generally supported. The Halifax Naval
and Military Bible Society is in like manner
dependent upon the Christian public, gene-
rally. The Micmac Missionary Society, while
its principal agent and missionary is#Baptist,
meets with the countenance and support of all
classes. The Nova Scotia Sabbath Alliance
consists of the leading ministers and members
of all the leading Protestant denominations in
Halifax. — Rev. J. Bayne, of Pictou.
NOWGONG : A station of the American
Baptist Union in Assam.
NULLOOR : A station of the Church Mis-
sionary Society, in the Tinuevelly district,
India.
630
OAHU— OLD CALABAR.
OAHU : One of the principal of the Sand-
wich Islands group. It is 25 miles W. N.
W. of INIolokai, the most romantic and fer-
tile of the whole group, and the residence of
the King, and seat of gOTernment. It is
about 48 miles long and 23 wide. The Am-
erican Board have seven stations on this
Island.
OCEANIC A : A term somewhat indefi-
nitely applied to the islands of the Pacific
Ocean. (See South Sea Islands and Indian
Archipelago.)
OJIBWAS : A tribe of North American
Indians, inhabiting the shores of Lakes Supe-
rior and Huron. (See North American In-
dians.)
OKKAH : A station of the Moravians in
Labrador.
OLD TOWN : Station of the United Pres-
byterian Synod of Scotland, at the Old Cal-
abar. West Africa.
OLD CALABAR: Old Calabar lies in the
Bight of Biafra, near the sixth degree of
north latitude, and between the eighth and
ninth degrees of east longitude. The coast
there runs east and west. Standing oppo-
site the Old Calabar frith, you look directly
north. On your right hand are the Came-
roon mountains, rising to the height of
13,000 feet ; and further to the right, at the
distance of sixty miles, is the elevated and
beautiful island of Fernando Po ; and on
your left is an extensive level district, over
which a dense mist is often seen resting: —
that is the long-sought Delta of the Niger, a
vast morass, extending 200 miles along the
sea shore, and upwards of 250 miles inland,
channeled by numerous streams — the mouths
of that celebrated river, covered with man-
grove and palm-oil trees, and inhabited by
fierce and savage tribes, many of whom are
cannibals. Sail up the Old "Calabar frith, a
distance of fifty miles, and you see two
large rivers flowing into it. The one on your
left hand is the Cross river, so called be-
cause it was supposed to comnnmicata with
the Niger, and to be one of its mouths ; but
it was explored by Captain Becroft. in 18 12.
a distance of 175 miles, and was found to be
an independent stream, more than a mile in
breadtli, with a depth of from six to seven
fathoms, flowing from the east— a region yet
unexplored by Europeans — and having its
banks studded with towns and villages. En-
ter the fiver on your right hand, which is
the Old Calabar river, fully three-fourths of
a mile m width, and after ascending it about
eight miles, and passing a jutting head-land,
you see upon the right bank a cluster of
towns. Tliese are Duke Town, Ilenshaw
Town, Old Town, aiid seven miles up the
river, on the left bank, Creek Town, the
principal towns of Old Calabar, and tlie seat
of the mi.;>ion of the Unili'd Presbyterian
Synod of Scotland. (See Africa, U'estti'n.)
These towns, with the country villages, con-
tain a population of 00,000 or 70.000. subject
to the sway of the King of Old Calabar, and
are accessible to missionaries. Each town
has its king or headman ; but the chief au-
thority is vested in Eyo Honest}', of Creek
Town. The population is divided into two
classes, freemen and slaves — the latter being
the great majority. These are cither em-
ploj-ed on the provision grounds, which are
at some distance from the towns, or in the
operations of trade. The freemen are all en-
gaged in trade, and are mainlv dependent
upon it for their support and influence.
Even the king, who has no revenue from his
subjects, carries on trade to a great extent,
is of active business habits, keeps regular ac-
counts, and owes all his power to the weight
of his character, and the wealth which he
has acquired from trading. The slaves are
generally treated with kindness ; and there
seems to be a process of internal emancipa-
tion, the children of the third generation
generally becoming free. It is a happy cir-
cumstance that persons have ceased to be ex-
ported as slaves from this district for a con-
siderable number of years. That horrid
traffic is totally suppressed in the Bight of
Biafra. This result is to be ascribed to the
beneficial influence of a growing trade, and
to the treaties made with the chiefs by the
British Government. The trade which is
carried on at Old Calabar, is chiefl}' in palm-
oil. The palm-oil is brought from the inte-
rior, and is exchanged for British goods.
The humanizing influence of legitimate com-
merce is becoming every year more obvious.
Not only has it enlarged the views of the
people, and to a certain degree improved
their manners ; enabled them to have com-
fortable houses, and to furnish them, in
many instances, with costly articles of Eu-
ro{)ean manufocture ; but it has taught them
that it is for their interest to live at peace
with their neighbors.
The mode of government at Old Calabar
is, in the case of freemen, by common con-
sultation and agreement. They meet to-
gether in the palaver-honso, talk over the
matter, and no measure can become law that
has not a majority of votes. The great dif-
ficulty which they feel is to keep in subjec-
tion their numerous slaves. This seems to
lie managed chiefly by the aid of sujiersti-
tion. They have a secret institution, called
Egbo, much resembling the Oro of the Yor-
ubas. (See Yoruba).
Religion.— They believe in the existence
of God and of the devil, in a future state,
and in the immortality of the soul; but
their ideas on these subjects arc dim and
confused, and have, by the wickedness of
the heart, and the malignant teaching of
Satan, been framed into a system of super-
stition, dark, cruel, and sanguinary. Tlity
ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS.
031
regard one day of the weelc as a Sabbath,
they all practise circuracisioii, on festival
days they sprinkle the blood of the Egbo
goat, and they make a covenant of friend-
ship between parties that were at variance,
by putting on them the blood of a slain goat,
mixed with certain ingredients ; things
which indicate the remains of the patriarchal
religion. Their personal worship, so far as
it has been ascertained, may be divided into
two parts ; that which is observed within
the house, and that which takes place in the
court-yard. The worship within the house
consists in adoring a human skull, stuck upon
the top of a stick, around the handle of
which a bunch of feathers is tied. This dis-
gusting object — their domestic idol — is said
to exist in every house in Old Calabar. The
worship in the court-yard is of this kind : in
the middle of the yard there is a bason of
water placed at the foot of a small tree,
which is planted for the purpose. This bason
is never emptied of its contents, but is once
a week filled with a fresh supply of water ;
and on the day when this is done, the second
day of the week, called God's day, they
" offer a fowl, or some other small thing of
that sort, which is tied by the foot to the
tree," and then they " pray to Basi Ebum,
the great God, but without confession of
sin, and solely for temporal benefits." Witch-
craft exerts the same terrible influence here
as in other parts of Western Africa.
But the most desolating and sanguinary of
all their customs is the practice of sacrific-
ing human victims, for the benefit of deceased
persons of rank. This horrid custom arises
from the belief that the future woidd cor-
responds to the present — that the same
wants are felt, the same relationships sus-
tained, and the same pursuits followed ; and
therefore, that the station and happiness of
a person depend upon the number of follow-
ers and slaves that are killed and sent after
him. The eflect of this belief is, that in pro-
portion to the dignity of the depai'ted, the
rank and power of the survivors, and the
warmth of affection which they cherish for
the deceased, is the number of victims that
are seized and immolated. Acquaintances
also testify their respect for the dead, and
sympathy with the sorrowing relations, by
destroying a few of their slaves. The agents
in this wholesale system of murder are the
nearest relations of the deceased, who evince
their affection and their grief, by exerting
themselves to catch by force, by stratagem,
and by all manner of ways, and to destroy
as many of their fellow creatures as they
can. It is a season of terror. The slaves,
from whose ranks the victims are usually
taken, flee to the bush for shelter, the doors
of the houses are fastened, and every one is
afraid to go abroad. And when it is con-
sidered that the funeral ceremonies continue
for four months, and that at the beginning
and especially at the close of this per?od_
when the grand carnival, or make-devil, as
they call it, takes place, great exertions are
made to obtain victims, it will at once be
obvious that this is a practice which spreads
terror and mourning through every part of
the community. It prevails in the greater
part of western Central Africa, and is
drenching the land with blood.
OLENDEBENK : Station of the Ameri
can Board at the Gaboon, West Africa.
OODOOVILLE: A populous parish of
Cejdon, in the district of Jaffna, 5 miles
north of Jaflfnapatam. It stands on an ex-
tensive plain, covered with groves of pal-
myra, cocoa-nut, and other fruit trees, in
which are many villages of natives, and, for-
merly, many idol temples. The American
Board have a station with a female boarding-
school here. «
OODOOPITTY: (Valverty) A station of
the American Board in Jaffna, Ceylon.
OOEFA : A prospective station of the
American Board among the Armenians : the
ancient Edessa^ as is commonl}^ sujjposed,
and also tlie Er of the Chaldees, the birth-
I^lace of the patriarch Abraham : has a pop-
ulation of 7.000 Armenians and 4,000 Syrians.
OOTACAMUND : A health station, on the
Neilgherrv Hills, Southern India.
OPOTIKI : A station of the Church IMis-
sionary Society in New Zealand, situated on
a plain, at the entrance of the river, on the
south-east side of the Bay of Plenty. Pop-
ulation about 1,300.
OIUENTAL CHRISTIANS, MISSIONS
TO : For accounts of missions at present ex-
isting, among the decayed churches of the
East, see Armenians, Nestorians, Greece, Sy-
ria, Mosul, Egypt. Although it does not en-
ter into the plan of this work to notice exten-
sively those missions, which have been prose-
cuted for a time, and then given up, yet there
have been operations of tliis kind in the East
which deserve some notice. Among these-
is the mission of the Church Missionary So-
ciety to Abyssinia, for which see Abyssinia..
There are, also, several missions of recent
origin, which may be noticed more appro-
priately in a general article than under geo-
graphical heads. And there are certain gene-
I'al principles, which apply to all these mis-
sions, which may be properly noticed in a
general article. The appointment of a mis-
sionary bishop to Jerusalem, by the govern-
ments of Great Britain and Prussia, had re-
ference not only to the Jews, but to Oriental
Christians ; but we have no sources of in-
formation which will enable us to give a.
connected history of his operations. The-
present incumbent, Bishop Gobat, the worthy-
pioneer of the Abj-ssiiuan mission, will use-
his position Xo the best advantage for the-
furtherance of evangelical labors among alL
G32
ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS.
classes of the people. The Church Mission-
ary Society have a mission at Jerusalem,
consisting of two ordained missionaries, one
European lay secretary, and one native teach-
er. This nussion was designed' espcciall}',
though not exclusively, to provide for the
instruction of Abyssinian pilgrims, Bishop
Gobat having been requested, both by the
king and the Abuna of Abyssinia, to take
charge of the Abyssinian convent at that
place. (See ylfrica East.) The report of
that society for 1853, states that "The expe-
rience of another year has confirmed the
committee in the wisdom of the course hith-
erto pursued l)y their missionaries, in making
an open protest against the errors of the
Oriental churches, and in receiving under
Christian instruction all who desire to hear
and embrace the truth of the Gospel. Events
render it each year more difBcult for such
inquirers to coutiftue in communion with
their own church. They have now political
liberty to enrol themselves on the civil regis-
ter of the local pachas as Protest ants ; and
having done so, they claim the assistance
and protection of the Protestant churches,
and there appears no just ground on which
that claim can be refused. The committee
have great satisfaction in adding, that the
American Episcopal Church, at the late anni-
versary of their Board of Foreign ^Missions,
announced their entire adherence to these
views, after sixteen years' experience in mis-
sionary operations at Constantinople, upon
the opposite principle of co-operation with
the heads of the Oriental churches."
The mission at Constantinople, here al-
luded to, was commenced by the Rev. J. J.
Robertson, D. D., and Rev. Horatio South-
gate, under the direction of the Episcopal
Board of Missions, in 1830. It was designed
principally as a mission to the Greek Church ;
in the words of the annual report, "placing
our church in a position to be known and
recognized as a branch of the same Catholic
Church, and a friend. It is sought that its
missionaries should, if possible, be received
and sanctioned as the representative of their
church ; that a friendly intercourse should
be maintained, and every cause of needless
offence be avoided. The Greek Church is
to be approached as an Episcopal Church,
and its integrity {jreserveil."
In connection with this mission, it was
designed also to establish a mission in Meso-
potamia, among the Jacobite Christians.
Mr. Southgate had made an exploring tour
in that region, and Mardin was selected as
the site of the mission.
In 18 12, tlie Committee having determined
to discontinue the Constantinople mission.
and concontiiitc their elfurts upon Mesopo-
tamia, directed Mr. Soutligate to remove as
soon as priicticiiblc. either to Mardin or Mo-
sul, and appointed two new missionaries to
the same field. But Mr. Southgate viewing
his appointment as limited to Constantinople,
declined to accept the appointment to Meso-
potamia.
At the meeting of the Board in 1843, the
committee were directed to continue the
mission at Constantinople, and re-appoint
^Ir. Southgate as missionary. One of the
missionaries appointed to Mesopotamia, Rev.
Mr. Taylor, on reaching Constantinople,
changed his views as to his field of labor,
and wished to remain at Constantinople;
but the committee refused to alter arrange-
ments which they considered definitely set-
tled. Mr. Southgate, after his return to
Constantinople, requested either that he
might be permitted to return to the United
States and present the cause to the churches,
or else that a colleague be sent him, with
authority to commence labor among the Ar-
menians, and that ^2,000 mission funds
should be allowed for the coming year, both
which the committee declined, chielly for
want of means. But this decision was over-
ruled by the Board ; and the committee were
requested, so soon as funds could be raised
for the purpose, to establish a mission to the
Armenians, and also to grant Mr. Southgate
permission to visit the United States for the
purpose which he had proposed. In conse-
quence of which the Mesopotamia mission
was discontinued, and the whole operations
concentrated uj)on Constantinople.
Soon after the adjoumment of the Board,
Mr. Southgate returned to the United States ;
and at the triennial session, his plans were
submitted to the Board, and resolutions were
passed, recommending to the general con-
vention the apitointment of a bishop, appro-
priating for the mission to the Eastern
churches ^5.000 per annum, and dii-ecting
the addition of two missionaries to the sta-
tion. In accordance with this recommenda-
tion, Mr. Southgate was elected bishop, and
consecrated in October, 1844, as Missionary
Bishop of the Trotestant Episcojtal Church
of the United States, in the dominions and
dependencies of the Sultan of Turkey ; and
considerable sums of money were raised to
sustain the mission. But the funds raised
specifically for this mission not being suifi-
cient to meet Bishop Southgate's views of
what was needed to carry on the mission,
and the committee not deeming it expedient
to appropriate the amount requested by him
from the general funds of the Board, Bishop
Southgate returned with his family to this
country, Nov. O, 184'.). On his arrival, the
committee "came unanimously to the con-
clusion that the removal of the missionary
bishop with his family, had closed the mis-
sion in Turkey."
At the triennial meeting of the Bmird in
1851, a resolution was passed, reciuesting
the foreign committee to "renew the mission
ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS.
633
to the decayed churches in Asia INIinor, in
the manner they shall deem most likely
to accomplish the best results." In obe-
dience to this resolution, the subject was
committed to Rev. Messrs. G. T. Bedell
and T. S. Winston, who made an elaborate
report, which was unanimously adoi)ted by
the committee. This report goes into an
examination of the two methods of conduct-
ing missions to these churches: . (1) "at-
tempting their reformation through agencies
and means approved by their ecclesiastical
authorities, with the hope that the ecclesias-
tics would first become enlightened, and be
chief instruments in promoting the general
result ;" and (2) seeking the same object
"by the usual means of diffusing a saving
knowledge of the Gospel among those who
are ignorant of it, or ' decayed ' in the ap-
preciation of its truth."
In regard to the first of these, they say,
"The foreign committee have entertained
but one view on the subject. Although at
the earnest representations of the mission-
ary, they acquiesced in the trial of the ex-
periment, 5'et from the first, the)^ have con-
sidered it inadequate and impracticable.
The experience of the church," they continue,
" has proved that a reformation cannot be
effectual while confined to the clergy ; that
of the two classes, the laity are the most
easily affected, and must be the instruments
of moving the clergy ; and that ecclesiastics,
as a body, very slowly acquiesce in a move-
ment to which self-interest and cherished
prejudices are so much opposed."
The committee proceed to review the his-
tory of the experiment at Constantinople,
made for 16 years, at an expenditure of
$45,000, and come to the conclusion that it
has produced no practical results, beyond
the translation of the Prayer Book, and a
few other translations, the benefits of which
if any are j^et to be seen. They say, also,
that an experiment upon similar principles
was carried on by the Church Missionary
Society from 1815 to 1846, with a similar
result ; and quote the following language
from the report of that society : " The So-
ciety's chief failures have been in its attempts
to establish missions among the ancient but
lapsed churches of the East. The hope
which was cherished, that the light of Di-
vine tnith might be rekindled with compa-
rative ease among them, and through their
agency be transmitted to their heathen and
JNIohammedan neighbors, has failed. Twice
were the missionaries of the society driven
out of the different districts of Abyssinia.
(See Abyssinia and Africa East.) They
were compelled, also, to withdi-aw from Asia
IMinor, through tlie jealousy of the Greek
Church, as soon as their laboi's began to ex-
ercise a spiritual influence upon their schol-
ars in their mission schools. And the So-
ciety's establishment at Malta was relin-
quished, after a trial of 25 years, as there
appeared no results suflScient to justif}^ its
continuance. The Society also attempted,
for several years, to cooperate with the ec-
clesiastical authorities of the Sj'rian Christian
Church upon the Malabar coast of South In-
dia, in educational measures for the revival
of that ancient church ; but the attempts
have failed." The committee also quote
Bishop Gobat, and Archdeacon Pratt, of
Madras, in corroboration of these views,
and remark : " We are forced to the conclu-
sion, that the effort to produce a restoration
of those churches, by acting through their
ecclesiastical authorities, or only in harmony
with them, and by their approbation, will,
in all probability, prove, as it has always
proved, a failure ; and therefore, that, in re-
newing the mission to these churches, the
plan heretofore pursued must be abandoned."
> At the annual meeting of the Board to
which this report was made, it was resolved,
"That the subject of Eastern Missions be
still left in the discretion of the foreign com-
mittee, in accordance with the resolution
adopted at the last triennial meeting."
Nazareth. — The Chui-ch Missionary So-
ciety have a station at Nazareth, under the
care of Rev. F. A. Klein, who reports some
movement among the people towards re-
formation. The congregation consists of
180 to 200.
Jerusalem. — Bishop Gobat, in his last
communication, says, "During the course of
last year, a goodly number of families and
individuals have joined our church, although
only 13 or 14 communicants are with us.
But all meet every Lord's day, and two or
three times during the week to hear the
Wovl of God read and expounded, and to
pray together, with the help of the Arabic
version of the Liturgy."
Nahlous. — Bishop Gobat says the good
work is progressing here. A few Protes-
tants meet on the Lord's daj^ and in the
week, for reading the word of God and
prayer.
Sijra. — The Church Missionary Society
have a station at Syra, in charge of Rev. F.
A. Hildner. He has a school of 284 pupils,
mostly girls. He holds service on Sundays
in E]iglish and German, and some of the
people seem to be under the influence of di-
vine grace.
Smyrna. — Here, also, the Church Mission-
ary Society have a station, under the direc-
tion of Rev. J. T. Wolters, and a Greek
catechist. In his report for 1852. Mr. Wol-
ters says, "There are a few Greeks among
us, who have, I tinist, been brought from
darkness to light."
Malta Protestant College. — A Protestant
college is maintained at Malta, of which the
634
ORISSA.
eport of the Church Missionary Society for
1853 speaks as being in a state of growing
prosperity. It comprises a school for youth,
and a class of adults under training for na-
tive teachers. It contains 80 well-behaved
boys and youths, from various countries, and
of^liiterent complexions — Abyssinians, Sy-
rians and Persians, Moslems and Jews. Copts
and Greeks, Nestorians and Papists, are here
living in the atmosphere of the pure word
of God, of which some appear to have ex-
perienced the power during their stay here.
Bishop Gobat, speaking of a visit which he
recently made to the institution, says: "I
could not refrain from tears of gratitude,
when I saw them all devoutly kneeling,
•while an Italian, who but a few j-ears ago
■was a blind Papist, or one who was formerly
a blaspheming Jew, &c., was offering up a
prayer to God, in the name of Jesus Christ,
full of life and unction, for the outpouring of
the Spirit of God upon Israel, Italy, Turkey,-
&c., each putting a peculiar emphasis upon the
country or the people with whom, by nature
and former habits, he was more particularly
connected." Great hopes are entertained
of this institution for furnishing missionary
laborers in the East.
TABULAR VIEW.
MISSIONS.
Palestine,
Grocco,
Asia Minor.
1851
1.S2S
1831
4' 2
278
361
ORISSA: A province of India, situated
near the head of the Bay of Bengal, on its
north-western shore, a short distance south-
west from Calcutta : boiuided on the north
by Bengal, cast by the Bay of Bengal, south
by the country of the Teloogoos, and west by
Nagopore. It is iri'cgnlarly shaped, about
three hundred miles long, and two hundred
and forty wide. Its population is estimated
at about three millions. It is supposed that
the province was anciently much larger than
it is now, and that its sovereigns formerly
sustained a rank much above that of most
Hindoo rajahs, and that it was numbered
among the most powerful of tlic ancient In-
dian sovereignties. It was subjected in part
by the Moluunmedans about 400 years ago,
and remained in an unsettled state till 174;').
At tliut time it was overrun by the iNIahrat-
tas, who continued tlieir plundering depred.i-
tious till 1803, when they were expelled by
the English. Since that period, the British
have held absolute sway over the previously
long distracted country, and quiet has mostly
prevailed. Compared with the misrule and
oppression of the former reigning powers,
the policy of the present government is lib-
eral, and the political condition of the people
is so much improved that most of them are
better satisfied with their state than their
predecessors were with the rule of the na-
tive princes. Orissa is divided into three
civil districts, viz. : Pooree in the south. Cut-
tack in the centre, and Balasore on the
north. The sea-coast, which is the eastern
part of the province, is level and far more
populous than the central and western di-
visions, which are mountainous and covered
in many places with primeval forests, inhab-
ited by wild beasts, or men almost as un-
tamed and rude as they. The climate, soil,
productions, animals, insects, birds, reptiles,
and fish of Orissa are similar to those of
Bengal and other adjacent portions of Ilin-
dostan lying near the Tropic of Cancer. The
villages, houses, food, clothing, dress, litera-
ture, and trades of the Oriyas are also much
lite those of the Bengalis and the people of
other large portions of India.
The population of Orissa consists of Hin-
doos, Mohammedans, Santals, and Bhumi-
jahs, the Hindoos constituting fiirthe larger
number. The districts of Pooree and Cut-
tack are occupied by the English General
Baptist missionaries, the district of Balasore
being the site of the Freewill Baptist mis-
sion. This district lies on the west side of
the Bay of Bengal. It is about eighty miles
long, and on an average thirty or forty miles
wide, and contains about 500,000 inliabitants.
On its northern boundar}^ lies a considerable
tract belonging to the province of Bengal,
which is inhabited by Oriyas. On the west
are several tributary states governed by na-
tive princes, which are peopled by Oriyas,
Santals, &c. These arc as numerous as the
inhabitants of the district of Balasore, so
that there are about one million souls de-
pendent on this Society for religious light
and influence. From its liability to inunda-
tion, the country is not much inhabited for
three or four miles inland from tlie sea. Be-
yond this low tract the plains are suflicientl)'
elevated for security, and arc highly culti-
vated and densely populated. Fartlier in-
land the country becomes nio\nitainous,
covered in part by forests, wliere are
found the scattered "villages of the Oriyas,
Santals, and Blunnijas. '• There are," says
llev. O. 1\. Bacheler. who has resided several
years in the town of Balasore, '' tliree ver-
nacular languages spoken bv the inliabitants
of the Balasore district. 1. The Oriya, one of
tlie Hindoo family of languages, derived
principally from the Sanscrit. This is s|)ol<eu
by the greater part of the Hindoo population.
OROOMIAH.
635
2. The Hindostanee, derived pinncipally from
the Arabic find Persian, and spoken b_y the
Mohammedans. 3. The Santal, with which
may be chissed the Bhumija, they both being-
dialects of the same language."
The Oriya contains many religious and
literary works, some translated from the
Sanscrit, and others original. ]\Iost of the
religious books are poetical, and some of
them possess a great degree of literary
merit. Some of these works are very large,
the Puranas alone consisting of 1,600,000
lines ! The religion of the Hindoos in Oris-
sa, like their manners and customs, is similar
to that of multitudes of others of their race.
Caste in all its ruinous forms bears almost
unlimited sway in the province. They wor-
ship the same gods .and observe the same
rites of most other Hindoos, and ai'e equally
ignorant and superstitious. The religious
opinions and customs of the Mohammedans
are based on the Koran, though somewhat
modified by a long contact with heathenism.
They arc great bigots, and are probably more
immoral and vicious than the Hindoos.
The Santals it is supposed were the abo-
rigines of the country, but were driven* to
the mountainous regions by the Hindoos,
by whom thcj'' were conquered in some re-
mote period. They invariably live in the hill}'
jungle. They subsist mostly by selling-
wood, coal, and leaves to their neighbors ;
but they cultivate the soil to some extent.
In religion, language, manners and customs,
they are very different from the Hindoos,
and are much less influenced by caste. The
sun is the chief object of their worship,
which they believe is God, and to which
they sacrifice goats and chickens, at the
same time repeating a praj^er composed for
such occasions. The departed spirits of
their fathers are sometimes adored, and they
are accustomed to worship their bidlocks
annually. This is done out of gratitude to
the animals for bearing burdens during the
year. These jieople ai'e without a regular
priesthood, temples, and a systematic re-
ligion. The master of a famil}^ olBciates as
its priest, performing the customary rites
either in the house or under a tree.
The Santals say their race originated from
two ducks' eggs ; but their more immediate
origin is attributed to a drunken and incest-
uous intercourse, something like that of Lot
with his daughters. Strong drinks, music
and dancing are among their favorite enjoy-
ments. They are, however, a mild and inof-
fensive people. Unlike the Hindoos, they do
not burn their dead, but bury them. Their
complexion is nearly as dark as that of the
Africans, but their hair is straight. A few
oral songs and traditions constitute their
literature, but they have no written language
except that recently furnished by a mission-
ary of the Freewill Baptist Society; and
which none but a few who have been taught
in the mission school can read. The lan-
guage sounds very sweet and musical when
spoken, and is remarkably regular, consider-
ing it has never been cultivated. As might
be exjjected, it is A'ery barren in theological
terms. The women mingle with the men in
their labors and recreations, seem to be on
an equality with them, and are divested of
the squcamishness of the Hindoo females.
At the age of sixteen or seventeen years the
Santals usually marry. The ceremony is
ver}^ simple and performed as follows : The
man puts some paint on the bride's head,
and she in return confesses herself his wife
by putting oil on his head.
The Bhumijas are next in importance to
the Santals, They are described by Eev.
^Ir. Bachelor as " a similar people, occupy-
ing the same portion of the district, speak-
ing a language strongly resembling the San-
tal, and, in most particulars, differing little
from them. They are considerabl}' less nu-
merous than the former, and it is probable
that missionary effort among them also
would be eminently successful, could they
be brought under religious influence. There
are small portions of other tribes scattered
among those already mentioned, but they are
not sufficiently numerous to render a par-
ticular description necessary."
"The complexion of these different races
varies from a dark copper color to black.
Those whose occupation is mostly within
doors are rather lighter than those more ex-
posed. The hill tribes are darker than the
people of the plains. The hair is straight
and black, and worn long both by men and
women. The eyes are black, the lips thin,
nose prominent, foreheads elevated, the in-
tellectual faculties predominating. They
have an intellectual cast of countenance,
and are rather good-looking than otherwise.".
OROOMIAH: A city of Persia, the an-
cient Thebanna, the reputed birth-place of
Zoroaster, situated on a beautiful fertile
plain, the seat of the Mission of the Ameri-
can Board to the Nestorians. On this plain
there are about 300 villages, inhabited chiefly
by Nestorians, of whom there are about
20.000 in Oi'oomiah. (See Nestorians.)
OSHUNGA: Station of the American
Board in West Africa, at the mouth of the
Gaboon river.
OTAWAO : A station of the Church Mis-
sionary Society, near the Waipa river, in
New Zealand.
OTAHEITE : Same as Tahiti. (See South
Sea Islands.)
OZYUNGA : A station of the American
Board at the mouth of the Gaboon riyer.
West Africa.
PAARL: Station of the London Mission-
ary Society, in South Africa, 85 miles north-
east of Cape Town.
636
PACALTSDORP— PARSEEISM.
PACALTSDORP : Station of the London
Missionary Society in South Africa, 2i5
miles cast'of Cape Town.
PAGO-PAGO : A station of the London
Missionary Society, on the Island of TutuiJa,
one of the Saraoau group.
PAGAN : A heathen, a Gentile, an idola-
ter. This word was originally applied to
the inhabitants of the country, who adhered
to idolatry after Christianity had been re-
ceived by the cities. So heathen signifies
the inhabitants of a heath or woods, and
Kaffre, in Arabic, signifies the inhabitants of
a liut or cottage, and one that does not re-
ceive Mohammedanism.
PAGODA : A house of idols. In India,
a temple in which idols are worshiped. It is
likewise applied to an image of some sup-
posed deity. Also a gold or silver coin cur-
rent in liindostan, varying in value from
S1.75 to l$2.
PAtlllA : A station of the Church Mis-
sionary Society in New Zealand, on the
south 'side of the Baj' of Islands.
PALLA:M : A station of the Church Mis-
sionar}' Society in India.
PALAMCOTTAH: A station of the
Church iMissionary Society in the Tinnevelly
District. India.
PALANKEEN, or PALANQUIN : A cov-
ered carriage used in India, China, &c..
borne on the shoulders of men, and iu which
a single person is conveyed from place to
place.
PANNEIVILEI : A station of the Church
Missionary Society in India.
PANTIJRA : A village at the mouth of a
river of the same name, in Ceylon, a station
of the Clnu'ch Missionary Society.
PANTHEISM: The doctrine that the
Universe is God.
PANEIVADALI : A station of the Church
^lissionary Society. India.
PANDITERIPO : A parish in the Jaffna
district of Ceylon, 9 miles north-west of
Jaffnapatam, where is a station of the Am-
erican Board.
PAPEXO : A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society on Tahiti, in the Southern
Pacific.
PAP ADA : A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society on the Island of Tahiti, in
the Southern Pacific.
PAPEETE: A station of the London
Missionary Society on the Island of Tahiti.
in the South Sea.
PAl'ARA: A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society on Tahiti, South Sea.
PAf'EURlRl: A station of the London
Missionary Society on Tahiti. South Sea.
PAPET OAI : A station of the London
Missionary Society on Eimeo, South Sea.
PARK HILL: A station of the American
Board among the Cherokee Indians.
PARAMARIUO: A considerable town.
situated at the mouth of the Surinam river.
Population 18,000 or 20,000. A station of
the Moravians.
PARSEEISM: The Parsees area some-
what numerous and influential sect in liin-
dostan, especially in the western part of the
country, and also in Persia. In Bombay and
vicinit)^ they are estimated at about 75,000.
Their sacred writings, or scriptures, are con-
tained in the Zand-Avasta, or Zand WoM,
which, however, the missionaries have never
found in a collected form in the hands of the
Parsees. The Zand-Avasta consists of seve-
ral parts, as the Vandidad, which professes
to report the result of an interview of Zo-
roaster, the alleged founder of the sect,
with Ilormazd, tlie supreme object of wor-
ship, the Yacna and Vispard, which are in-
terspersed with the Vandidad, and recited
along with it during the celebration of the
most extended service ; the Khurdah Avasta,
or minor liturgy ; the Yacts, and other de-
tached pieces.
The Zand-Avasta is ascribed to Zoroaster,
who is feaid to have lived about 500 years
before Christ ; but the testimonies of the
ancients respecting the epoch of Zoroaster
are very conflicting ; and besides, there is
no proof of even the existence of the Zand
writings till long after the above period, and
much less is there evidence that thej' were
written by such a person. Learned Euro-
peans of everj' shade of belief agree in pro-
nouncing the Zand-Avasta a spurious work.
Sir AVm. .Jones, the " prince and i)ioneer of
modern orientalists," says it contains noth-
ing which corresponds with the character of
a philosopher and a legislator, and adds, that
■' either Zoroaster had not common sense, or
he did not write the book which is attribu-
ted to him." Not only is it believed to be
a spurious work, but a production of com-
paratively modern times, and probably of
Persian origin.
According to the Zand-Avasta there are
two deities, Ilormazd and Ahiram, the far-
mer the author of good, and the latter tho
author of evil, but both of these are regard-
ed as derived beings, coetaneously i)roduced
by Time. Writers on this sul)ject have traced
a striking reseml)Iance between this theory
and that of the ancient Manicheans, who also
ascribed good and evil to two distinct crea-
tors, corresixinding somewhat in name to
those of the I'arsees. and hence it is believed
that the hitler derived their notions, in part
at least, from that heretical sect.
The Parsees are idolators, worshiping not
merely tlie good and evil deities, but almost
every thing that is named in heaven and
earth. The learned Dr. Wilson, long a mis-
sionary of the Church of Scotland at Boni-
bay, makes a literal translation of one sec-
tion of the Parsee .scriptures, in which the
devotee is taught to say, "I worship Ilor-
PARSEEISM.
637
mazd, the pure, master of purity. I wor-
ship Zoroaster, the pure, master of purity.
I worship the whole body of Hormazd. I
worship ail the long existences (the beings
which are to exist 12,000 years.) I worship
all the pure celestial and terrestrial Izads
(angels.) I worship all the fountains of
water, flowing and stationary. I worship
all the trees, and the trunks, and lofty
branches, and fruit. I worship the whole
earth. I worship the whole heaven. I wor-
ship all the stars, the moon, and the sun. I
worship the primeval lights. I worship all
the animals, both aquatic and terrene. I
worship all the mountains, the purely plea-
surable. I worship all the fires."
These are a few from the long catalogue
of objects, animate and inanimate, Which the
Parsees are taught to worship. These ob-
jects are so jumbled together and confound-
ed as to produce the utmost distraction and
degradation in the mind of the worshiper.
"Thus," Dr. Wilson remarks, "he at one
moment calls upon Hormazd, at the next
upon his own ghost ; at one moment on an
archangel, at the next on a sturdy bull ; at
one time on the brilliant sun, the next on a
blazing fire ; at one moment on a lofty and
stupendous mountain, the next on a darksome
cave 5 at one moment on the ocean, at the
next on a well or spring, &c." Not only are
all distinctions among the different objects
of worship referred to in the liturgical and
doctrinal works of the Parsees levelled, by
being confounded together in the most
strange and unnatural associations, but the
same result is brought about by the fact that
all the different objects of worship of what-
ever nature, have applied to them the same
terms expressive of respect, of worship, of
supplication, praise, exaltation, reverence,
glory, and benediction. It has been clearly
ascertained that the terms and objects of
worship which have been given as specimens,
are used by the Parsees, not to express civil,
but religious respect and honor, and further,
that they are used not with levity and indi-
^erence, but in the most solemn forms of de-
votion which they possess. Another singular
fact is, that the service of the inferior objects
occupies more space in the books of the Par-
sees, than that of the more exalted and com-
manding objects. It appears therefore that
the Parsees, worshiping as they do "gods
many and lords many," are polytheists in
the most literal and degrading sense.
It must be evident from the number and
character of the objects worshiped by the
Parsees, that their ideas of personal respon-
sibility and guilt, of the method of salvation,
and of a future state, cannot be even an ap-
proximation to the scripture doctrine on
these subjects. They do, indeed, like all
idolators, believe in something called
guilt, and in some method of expiation ; but
how low and corrupting is that belief, and
how shocking and disgusting tho services
and sacrifices offered for the soul. The
teachings of the Zand-Avasta on these sub-
jects occupy a large space, and cannot be
quoted here, but they are alluded to with
suflBcient distinctness by Dr. Wilson, when
he says, " The religious war with, and re-
lentless destruction of vermin ; the mending
of holes formed in the earth, through which
the devils are supposed to emerge from hell ;
the feeding of the hungry flame with grease
and fat and sweet smelling odors ; the mut-
tering and sputtering of prayers and praises
in an vmknown tongue, to every object that
exists ; the disposal of corpses so as to pol-
lute the atmosphere rather than the earth ;
the solemn funeral of bones and hair and
nails ; the drinking and sipping of cow's
urine at morn and eve as if it were the very
elixir of immortality ; the scrubbing and
rubbing of the body with various ablutions
for the expulsion of devils ; the frightening
and driving away of demons by noises ; the
introduction of dogs to survey the bodies of
the deceased and to prognosticate and guard
them from the assaults of Satan ; and many
other practices said to be enjoined by divine
authority and to be good and virtuous ac-
tions, do not certainly commend themselves
to the reason of many of those with whom
tyrant custom compels their observance."
The earth, fire, water, dogs, and some
other objects are deemed peculiarly sacred ;
and hence the severe penalties attached to
the pollution or injury of either of these ob-
jects. Thus, for instance, a person who
strikes a water dog is treated to 10,000
stripes ; and he must by way of atonement
carry 10,000 bundles of dry and the same
quantity of soft wood, to the fires of Hor-
mazd. He must furnish 10,000 barsams
(trees), and 10,000 zors of pure hom (a kind
of tree) and its juice. He must kill 10,000
reptiles that creep on their bellies, 10,000
reptiles in the form of a dog, 10,000 turtles.
10,000 land frogs, 10,000 water frogs, 10,000
ants which drag the grain, 10,000 stinging
ants, 10,000 blood suckers, and 10,000 sting-
ing flies ; and he must take out 10.000 im-
pure stones from the ground. And these
are only a part of the penalty.
So numerous and confused are the rites,
ceremonies, superstitions, and penal regula-
tions of the Parsees, that to illustrate them
all would require a volume. They are in
general but little acquainted with their sa-
cred writings, except by tradition and as in-
ferred from actual observances, though some
of them are quite intelligent, and able to de-
fend their system with a show of learning
and ingenuity. An American missionary at
Bombay says of the Parsees, " They yield in
energy and influence to none. They are
more ready than any other class to adopt
63S
PASUMALIE— PILGRIMAGE.
European customs and opinions, and not a
few of them speak and write the English
languac!;e with facility. Thej' have several
fine' temples in Bombay, and at the time of
sunrise and sunset they may be seen reading
and repeating their prayers, and addressing
their worship to the sun and to the sea. But
they are much less of a religious people than
the' Hindoos. They are indeed zealous for
their religion, but are most ignorant of what
it really is, and their zeal apparently arises
rather from a sectional, national feeling,
than from their being imbued with any re-
ligious principle. They pride themselves on
being Parsees, and they are ready to defend
Parseeism, whatever it may be. Among
them are found the bitterest opponents of
Christianity, who ai-e familiar with the prin-
cipal writings of opposers, and who manifest
no little zeal in disseminating their infidel
views. Much use is made of the press for
this purpose."— Rev. E. D. Moore...
PARIS PROTESTANT MISSIONARY
SOCIETY: This society was formed in 1822,
under the title of '-Societe des Missions
Evangeliques de Paris." A meeting was
held for the purpose at the house of S. V. S.
Wilder, Esq., an American merchant, then
residing in Paris, which was attended by the
presidents of the Reformed and Lutheran
Consistories ; by other pastors, with la}^
members of the two churches ; by various
foreign Protestants, then in Paris, among
whom were Rev. Daniel Wilson, Rev. S. S.
Wilson, and Rev. -Jonas King, and b)-^ Messrs.
Cook and Croggon, Wesleyan missionaries
then in France. One object of the So-
ciety was declared to be, to enlighten the
public mind, through the press, as to the
character and importance of the different
missions of Protestant Christians among the
heathen ; and another, to estal)lish an insti-
tution for 3^oung persons recommended bj^
the different missionary societies, to whom
it might l)e necessary to study some of the
Oriental languages.
Rev. .Jonas King, being then in Paris, and
having received an invitation from Rev. Mr.
Fisk, after the death of his associate. Rev.
Mr. Parsons, to join him in the mission to
the Holy Land, the new society assumed, for
a given period, his support. The committee
issued an address, setting forth the object
of the societ}', and soliciting contributions.
They also established the Monthly Concert
of Prayer.
Subsequently, this society directed all its
efforts to Southern Africa, where their mis-
sions have been very energetically and suc-
ces.->fiilly prosecuted to tlie present time.
TIk'V have thirteen stations, among several
diffi-'rcnt tribes, with fourteen missionaries,
and a large number of native assistants, and
about tliirteen hundred communicants. (See
Southern Africa.)
PASUMALTE : A station of the Madura
mission in Southern Ilindostan, under the
cai"e of the American Board.
PASHA: In the Turkish dominions, a
viceroy, governor, or commander.
PASHALIC : The jurisdiction of a Pasha.
PATNA: a city of much importance in
the presidency of Bengal, on the south side
of the Ganges, about 300 miles north-west
of Calcutta. The population is estimated at
nearly 400,000. Within the walls, the city
is not more than a mile and a half in length
by three-fourths of a mile in breadth ; but
its suburbs extend nine miles along the
banks of the river, and two miles inland.
The English Baptists commenced a mission
here in 1811.
PATE A: A station of the Wesleyan Mis-
sionary Society in New Zealand.
PATRIARCH : In the Oriental churches,
a dignitary superior to the ordA- of arch-
bishops.
PATRIARCHATE: The oflBce or juris-
diction of a patriarch.
PAUMOTU: A group, consisting of a
large number of low, small islands, in the
South Pacific, between 17'^ and 23» S. lati-
tude, and loO-^ and 145° W. longitude.
They have been called by several names, as
The Labyrinth, Pearl Islands, Pallisee Is-
lands, Dangerous Archipelago.
PEDANG: A Dutch settlement on the
west coast of Sumatra. Camphor, benzoin,
and pepper, and a considerable quantitj-- of
gold from the interior are collected here,
and sent to Batavia. It is a station of the
Baptist Missionary SocietJ^
PEELTON: Station of the London Mis-
sionary Society, among the Kaflres in South
Africa, destroyed by the KaftVe war.
PEHIAKUR A : A station of the Wesleyan
Missionary Society, on the north-west side
of Waikato harbor. New Zealand.
PEKING : The Northern Capital of China,
the residence of the imperial com-t. situated
in the Chilili province, in lat. 39^ 54' N., and
long. 11G° 27' E. (See China.)
PELL A: A station of the Rhenish Missions
arv Society, in Little Namaqua, South Africa.
■pE RI ACOOLUM : A station of the Ameri-
can Board, belonging to the JIadras mission,
in Southern Ilindostan.
PHILIPOLIS: Station of the London
iMissionary Society, in South Africa, among
tlie Bosjesmans, on tlie north side of Cradock
River, with out-stations.
PHILIPTON: The principal station of
the London ISIissionary Society, on Kat
Ilivei', South Africa.
PIETERMAURITZBURG: A Dutch set-
tlement, near Port Natal, Southern Africa.
PILGRIMAGE: A journey to someplace
deemed sacred, undertaken with supersti-
tious veneration for the place or the relics
or other sacred things which it contains.
PINE RIDGE— PRESUFTERIAN BOARD.
639
PINE RTDGE : A station of the Ameri-
can Board among the Choctaw Indians.
PIPLEE: A short distance from Pooree,
In Hindostanj and near the coast of the Ba)^
of Bengal, a place throngh which most of
the pilgrims pass in their annual journeys
to the great Juggernaut festival. The Gene-
ral Baptists of England established a mission
there in 1847.
PIRIE : Station of the Free Church of
Scotland in South Africa, about 20 miles
East of Burnshill.
PLAATBERG : A station of the "Wesley-
ans in the Natal District, South Africa.
POINT PEDRO : The northernmost ex-
tremity of Ceylon, in lat. 9" 48' N., and
long. 80* 7' E. A station of the Wesleyans.
POINT VENUS : A station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society, on Tahiti.
POLYNESIA: The Many Isles; a name
vaguely applied to numerous groups of Is-
lands in the Pacific Ocean. (See Sandwich
Islands. South Sea Islands, &c.)
PONTIANAK: A Dutch possession on
the west coast of Borneo, 12 miles from
the mouth of the Pontiana river, for some
time a station of the American Board.
POOIIACOOTEE : A large village, about
50 miles north-cast from Madura, within the
territory of the Tondiman rajah. The sta-
tion was transferred to the American Board
in 1845, by the Indian Church Missionaiy
Society of Madras.
POOTHACOTTAH: A town of Southern
Hindostan, 65 miles north-east from Madura.
Population, 10,000. The mission of the
American Board at Madras had a station
here, but transferred it to Madura in 1845.
In 1848 it was relinquished, owing to its
distance, and the inconvenience of superin-
tending it.
POONAH: A city in the province of
Arungabad, until 1818 the capital of the
Mahratta empire, about 30 miles east of the
Ghauts, 100 from Bombay, and 75 from the
nearest sea-coast. A station of the Free
Church of Scotland.
POOREE : A station of the General Bap-
tists in Orissa.
PORT ANTONIO : A station of the Wes-
leyans in Jamaica, W. I.
PORT-AU-PLATT : A station of the
"Wesleyans in Hayti.
PORT MORANT: A station of the Wes-
leyans in Jamaica, W. I.
PORT NATAL: (D'Urban,) the principal
port of the Natal District, South Africa.
PORT REPUBLICAN : A station of the
Weslevans in Ilayti.
POilT OF SPAIN: A station of the
United Secession Church in Trinidad.
PORT ELIZABETH: Station of the Lon-
don and Wesleyan Missionary Societies in
Algoa Bay, Soutli Africa. The London Mis-
sionary Society's labors at this station are
chiefly directed to the Fingoes, a considera-
ble portion of this tribe having been for
years settled at this place. There is also an
English congregation and a Sabbath-school.
PORT LOKKOII: A native town in the
Timneh country, about 40 miles from the
colony of Sierra Leone, West Africa. In
point of population and geographical location,
it is a highly important position. It is the
thoroughfare of that part of the country, and
is visited by the natives of various countries
to the eastward. This is the site of the
mission of the Church Missionary Society
to the Timneh countrj-.
PORT LOUIS : A station of the London
Missionary Society, on the north-western side
of the Island of Mauritius, or the Isle of
France. It is the principal town and capital
of the Island, and contains a largo propor-
tion of the whole population. Its population
is largely Roman Catholic, and, of course,
the missionary work meets with much oppo-
sition. (See Mauritius.)
PRATTVILLE : A station of the Church
Missionary Society in Jamaica, W. I.
PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MIS-
SIONS.— The foreign missionary work was
commenced by the Presbyterian Church in
the United States at an early date. The
Society for propagating Christian knowledge
in Scotland, which was formed in 1709, es-
tablished a Board of correspondents in New
York, in 1741, who appointed the Rev. Aza-
riah Ilorton, a member of the Presbj'tery of
New York, to labor as a missionary among
the Indians on Long Island.* His labors
extended through two or three j^ears, though
the precise limit is not now known. The
second foreign missionary of the Presby-
terian Church was the justly celebrated Da-
vid Bi'ainerd. He was licensed to preach
by an association of Congregational niinis-
ters, assembled at Danbury, Conn., July 29,
1742, and spent about a year at an Indian
settlement not very far from Albany. On
June 12, 1744, he was ordained by the Pres-
bytery of New York, then meeting at New-
ark, N. J., and immediately commenced his
labors at the foi-ks of the Delaware, on the
Susquehannah, and at Cross-weeks, near the
centre of New Jersey. After the death of
David Brainerd, in October, 1747, he was
succeeded by his brother, the Rev. John
Brainerd, a member of the same Presby-
tery, who labored faithfully and successfully
among the Indians for many yeai'S. These
three first missionaries to the heathen tribes
in this land, under the direction of the Pres-
byterian Church, maintained a correspond-
ence with the parent Society in Scotland,
and derived a portion of their support from
that country. Both Mr. Ilorton and David
* See Green's Hist. Sketch, page 37, and Rev. A. Ilor-
tou's Narrative, from June, 1742, to March, 1743, in
Prince's Christian History, VoL I.
640
PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONg.
Brainerd received something; like two hun-
dred dollars a year from this source. But
John Brainerd Avas supported principally,
if not wholly, by contributions in the
Presbyterian churches here. In 17G3, the
Svnod of New York ordered a collection
to bo made in all their churches for the sup-
port of Indian missions, allowing Mr. Brain-
erd a salary of thirty pounds, giving the
same amount for the support of schools, and
voting sixty-five pounds for the support of
the Rev. Sampson Occum, a native Indian,
a member of the Presbytery of Suffolk, on
Long Island, and at that time a missionary
among the Oneida Indians.* Three years
after this, in 17GC, the Rev. Charles Beatty
and the Rev. George DufBeld performed a
mission, under the appointment of the Synod
of New York, to the Indians on the Mus-
kingum river in Ohio ; and their report was
so favorable that the Synod appointed two
others to labor in the same region. But
troubles arising between the Indians and the
frontier inhabitants, this mission was relin-
quished. After the death of Mr. John
Brainerd, in 1780, so many changes had oc-
curred among the Indians in consequence of
the revolutionary war, and other causes, that
the foreign missionary work was to a con-
siderable degree abandoned for several years.
It had been prosecuted by the Presbyterian
Church from the j'ear 1741 to 1780, a period
of nearly 40 years, during which time at
least six faithful ministers had labored in
the field, besides schoolmasters, and some
other helpers. In the year 179G, the for-
eign missionary work was resumed in the
formation of the "New York Missionary
Society." This body was independent of
any presbytcrial supervision, though it is
believed to have consisted principally of
members of the Presbyterian Church. A
considerable amount of funds was collected,
and three Indian missions were established,
viz. : among the Chickasaws, tlie Tuscaroras,
and the Senecas. In the following year.
1797, the " Northern Missionary Society "
was instituted. This, like its })redecessor,
was an independent body, thougli composed
in part of Pres1)yterians. By this Society.
missions to the Indian trilies were i)rosecuted
for several years. But in the year 1800, the
General Assembly of the Presbyterian Church
took up the work of foreign missions in a sys-
tematic manner. They aj)pointed the Rev.
Mr. Chapman as a missionary on the north-
western frontier of the State of New York,
with reference to the wants of both the white
inhabitants and the Indian tribes ; and in the
year 1802, the General Assembly's standing
connnittee on missions addressed a circular
to all the Presbyteries under their care,
urging ooUuctions for the support of missions,
* Grccn'B Sketch, page 44.
and making inquiries for suitable candidates
to be employed. In the next year, 1803, a
suitable person was found. The Rev. Gideon
Blackburn ofiered himself for the work and
a mission was established among the Cher-
okee Indians, then residing within the
chartered limits of the State of Georgia,
where Mr. Blackburn prosecuted his mis-
sionary labors with zeal, activity, and
devotedness, for eight years, when his
health failed, and he was constrained to
leave his post. The standing committee of
the General Assembly intended to have
prosecuted this mission, but did not succeed
in finding a man to supply the place of Mr.
Blackburn, and subsequently the Rev. Mr.
Kingsbur}', acting under the American Board,
established himself in the Cherokee country,
and a flourishing mission was built up.
Missions among the Indians were prose-
cuted by the General Assembly in various
directions from 1805 to 1818, and with some
encouraging results ; but in 1818, measures
were taken to unite the efforts of the Pres-
byterian, Reformed Dutch, and Associate
Reformed Churches, by forming one inde-
pendent Society, and a new body was accord-
ingly formed, called " The United Foreign
Missionary Societj'." This Society was in
active operation some six or seven years,
and all the existing missionary interests in
the Presbyterian Church were merged in it.
In the 3'ear 182G, it had under its care nine
missions, embracing GO male and female mis-
sionaries, 250 children and youth under in-
struction, and more than 40 native converts
to the faith and hope of the Gospel.* About
that time the whole work was transferred to
the American Board, and the United Foreign
Missionary Society ceased its operations.
It was regretted by many Presbyterians
that the church of their preference should
not prosecute foreign missions under their
own distinctive name, and this feeling be-
came at length so deep that in the month of
Noveniber, 1831, the Synod of Pittsburgh
formed the "Western Foreign Missionary
Society." This Society was intended to
unite the efforts, not of that S^niod alone,
but the efforts of all others who might
choose to unite with them. Operations
were immediately commenced and prose-
cuted by this Society, with varied success,
for six years, when, in June. 1837, a Board
of Foreign Missions was established by the
General Assembly, to which the Western
Foreign Missionary Society subsequently
transferred all their missions and funds. —
Rkv. J. Gkkf.nlkaf.
The following interesting account of the
manner in which this IJoard is organized,
and the principles >ipon which its operations
are conducted, is taken from Mr. Lowrie's
" Manual of Missions:"
» Ureon'B Sketcb, pago 69.
PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS.
641
This Board consists of sixty ministers,
and as many laymen, whose term of oflBce is
four years. Its members are appointed by
the General Assembly, one-fourth part each
year. To them is " intrusted, with such di-
rections as may from time to time be given,
the superintendence of the foreign missionary
operations of the Presbyterian Church in
the United States of America ;" and they
are required to "make annually to the Gen-
eral Assembly a report of their proceedings ;
and submit for its approval such plans and
measures as may be deemed useful and ne-
cessa^3^" The Board is, therefore, simply a
Standing Committee of the General Assem-
bly, and the title of Committee would have
more clearly indicated its relations to that
venerable court. For convenience in holding
certain real estate and in the transaction of
some kinds of business, a charter has been
obtained for the Board under a general law
of the State of New York, with the same
title precisely as designated by the General
Assembly, " The Board of Foreign Missions
of the Presbyterian Church in the United
States of Americay This charter is not a
close but an open one, and the members of
the incoi'porated body are the same persons,
and no others, who are appointed as mem-
bers of the Board by the General Assembly.
The Board appoints annually an Executive
Committee and the Executive OfiBcers. On
these devolves the immediate charge of the
missionary work. "Weekly meetings are held
by the Committee, at which every thing re-
lating to the interests of the missionary
cause at home and abroad may be brought
under consideration. The selection of mis-
sionaiy fields, the appointment of mission-
aries, the kinds of labor in each country and
at each station, the measures suitable for
promoting an interest in the missionary
work among the churches at home, receive
continued and careful attention. Most of
these are matters of deep importance. They
require the exercise of enlarged views and
the most sober judgment. A general ac-
quaintance with the missionary field, and
with the history of missions, and a particu-
lar knowledge of the missionary work under
the charge of the Board, are required for the
proper decision of questions that occur from
time to time. An application for funds to
build a missionary chapel, or a request for
appointment as a missionary or teacher, may
easily bring under consideration the whole
subject of the best method of expending
missionary funds, in view both of the exi-
gences of the various missions and the
am,ount of moneys at the disposal of the
Committee.
The appointment of missionaries is one of
the most important of these duties. In
making appointments the Committee must
rtly ver}-- much on recommendations of pas-
41
tors, instructors, and others. They are
anxious to send forth only those who have
been called to this work by the Head of the
Church. As a part of the evidence of this
divine call, they must take into consideration
the qualifications of the applicant. His rep-
utation for piety, prudence, and zeal, his
talents and scholarship, his health and its
adaptation to particular climates, are all mat-
ters of great moment. Qualifications of a
superior class are greatly to be desired ; but
men of respectable talents, with good judg-
ment and habits of industry and energy, all
under the control of humble, loving, and de-
voted piety, may be very useful in most mis-
sionary fields. It may well be doubted
whether it is expedient to send out men
whose qualifications are not fully equal to
the average attainments of the ministers of
the churches in this country. A nile was
adopted by the Board, at the request of the
Executive Committee, that no ordained min-
ister should be sent to a foreign field, with-
out the recommendation of his Presbytery.
This places the responsibility of deciding on
the qualifications of missionaries, to a large
degree, on the Presbyteries ; and it should
go far to secure the right kind of men. But
the nature of the work itself, and the sacri-
fices which it involves, will always furnish
presumptive evidence that the brethren who
ofier as volunteers to engage in it are men
worthy of confidence and honor.
The missionaries become members of the
Presbyteries which have been organized in
their respective fields of labor, and all eccle-
siastical matters are transacted as is usual
in these church courts. With these, the
Committee do not interfere, unless by Chris-
tian counsel at the request of the missiona-
ries. Financial and other business matters
are transacted with the missionaries, not as
Presbyteries, but as missions or sub-commit-
tees ; and as a general rule it is expedient
to leave local details as far as possible in
their hands. The general supervision must,
from the nature of the case, be reserved to
the Committee. This is particularly neces-
sary in the expenditure of the funds devoted
to missionary purposes. Estimates are sent
up. embracing the various kinds of work in
each mission — the sum desired for the sup-
port of missionaries and native assistants,
for building churches, chapels, or school-
houses, for schools, for the press, &c., being
separately stated. In forming these esti-
mates, the missions proceed upon the ex-
penses of the preceding year as a basis, with
such enlargement or diminution as may be
called for by their circumstances and pros-
pects. With estimates from all the missions
before them, the Committee then apportion
to each such part of the probable receipts of
the Board as the wants of each mission ap-
pear to require. The probable income to
642
PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS.
be thus apportioned is itself a matter of es-
timate, founded upon the income of the pre-
ceding^ 3-ear, and the hope of enlarged con-
tributions hy the churches to this cause. In
the proper fulfilment of their trust in these
financial matters, the Committee are called
to exercise their maturcst judgment. Errors
or mistakes here would involve the whole
work in serious dilBcultics. Were expendi-
tures to be authorized without a strict regard
to the probable means of payment, a debt
would soon be created, embarrassing alike to
friends at home and to the missionaries
abroad. On the other hand, it is no easy
matter to withhold aid which is urgentl}'
solicited, and which the churches are so well
able to give.
The arrangements of the Board for the re-
ceipt and expenditure of the funds commit-
ted to its charge for the missionary work.
are thoroughly business-like and satisfactory.
Every donation, though as small in amount
as the widow's two mites, can be traced in
its course from the time it leaves its donor's
hands, and for every dollar expended a sat-
isfactory exhibit can be shown — all being on
record in books kept for the purpose. Vouch-
ers are preserved for all moneys expended.
It is believed that nothing has been at
any time lost through want of uprightness
or fldelit3^ Errors of judgment there may
have been, and a consequent injudicious ex-
penditure of money in some cases. To ac-
knowledge this is but to concede that the
Executive Committee and OflScers are Hir
from being infidlible in judgment. But it is
no small thing to be able to say, that in
twenty )'ears, out of an expenditure amount-
ing altogether to more than a million and a
half of dollars, nothing has been lost through
want of iidelit}^ on the part of those who
were charged with its disbursement. The
further merit of economy in the administra-
tion'of the funds of the Board may be justly
claimed, and is shown, among other ways,
by the low per ccntage of cost for executive
services.
In the transmission of moneys for the sup-
port of the missionary work abroad, difi'er-
ent methods are adopted for missions in
different countries. To the missions among
the Indian tribes, a large amount of "'sup-
plies"— various articles of clothing, grocer-
ies, books, &c., — are forwarded. These can
be purchased at much lower rates in our
cities than in the Indian country'. For articles
purchased in the neighborhood of these mis-
sionary stations, payments are commonly
made by drafts drawn l)y the Treasurer or
Superintendent of the mission on the Trea-
surer in New York. In the African missions,
particularly at Corisco, money is less conve-
nient than some kinds of merchandise, and
accordingly supplies are sent from this coun-
try. To the missions in India, Siam, and
China, supplies are seldom sent, and only
when ordered ; and money is remitted, com-
monly by letters of credit. The Treasurer
goes down into Wall street, and engages a
letter of credit for, say, five hundred pounds
sterling ; on which letter, bills of exchange
may be drawn, payable in London at four or
six months after sight. This letter of credit
is forwarded to the Treasurer of the mission,
and bills are sold by him at the prevailing
rates. The purchaser sends the bill to Lon-
don, where it arrives in some five or six
months after the time when it was obtained
in Wall street, and four or six months njpst
still elapse, after it is presented for accept-
ance by the parties on whom it is drawn, be-
fore it becomes payable by the Treasurer of
the Board, making altogether ten or twelve
months from its date in New Y'ork. As the
Board must in due time pay this draft, it has
been the good practice of the Committee to
authorize, at the time of engaging the letter
of credit, the investment upon ample securi-
ties of money bearing interest, so as to be in
no danger of not being prepared to take it
up when it becomes due. In this way, not
onlj' is safety secured, but the interest gained
in the meantime on the money invested
serves to reduce the cost of the bill, or, in
other words, to diminish the expense of re-
mitting funds to the missions. When the
fluctuations of commerce, war, or any other
cause render it difficult to sell bills of ex-
change in India or China, it then becomes
necessary to send out silver. This must be
bought, sometimes at a premium, and it is
subject to expense for freight and insurance,
while onthevoj-age it is earning no interest;
so that this kind of remittance is seldom a
desirable one.
The business of the Board is transacted
mainly in the city of New Y'ork. This city
has become the chief foreign port of the
country, and possesses many advantages for
sending forth missionaries, remitting funds,
and foreign correspondence. No other city
in this country affords equal facilities for
these purposes. The decision to establish
the business head-quarters of the Board in
this city was therefore a measure of obvious
propriety. Almost the only drawback to the
desirableness of this location grows out of
the great cost of living in New York. This
renders a somewhat large outlay necessary
for the salaries of the Executive Officers.
The amount paid by the Board, however, has
thus far at no time equalled the actual ex-
penses incurred by them for their support.
The missions of the Board are eight in
number, viz. : to North American Im/ians ,-
Wciilern Africa; India; Siam; China;
Jewn; and Papal Europe. The following
summary view will exhibit the progress and
present condition of these missions, as they
appear in the Bcport for 1854:
PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS.
643
MISSIONS.
INDIAN" TRIBES :
Choctaws
Greeks -
Chickasaws.
Seminoles —
lowAS AKD Sacs
Otoes and Omahas.-
Chippewas and Ottawas
AFRICA:
Liberia —
Kroo People
Near the Equator,.
INDIA:
LODIANA.
Furrtjkhabad.
Agra
Allahabad.
SI AM:
CHINA;
Canton
NiNGPO.
Shanghai --
Chinese in California
JEWS:
ROMANISTS:
Names of Stations.
Spencer Academy
Kowetah
Tallaliassee
Wapamicka
Boggy Depot
Little River, or Oak-ridge
lovra
Bellevue
Grand Traverse
Little Traverse
Middle Village
Total of Indian Missions
Monrovia —
Kentucky
Since
Settra Kroo .
Corifico
Total of African Missions
Lodiana
Saliarunpur-
Sabatliu
Ambala
Jalandar
Labor
Dehra-
Futtehgui'h.
Mynpurie...
Agra
Ailaliabad...
Futtehpore..
Banda
Total of India Missions
Bangkok
Canton
Ningpo ■
Shanghai
San Francisco.
Total of China Missions,
New York---
Philadelphia.
Baltimore
Stations in France.
Belgium, &o
Buenos Ayrea
General Total .
Missionaries and
Ass't Missionaries.
Minisl'rs
1846
1S4'
1849
1849
1852
1848
1835
1846
1S3S
1S52
185;
1842
1S50
1847
1841
ISoO
1834
1836
1836
1848
1847
1849
18,
1838
1843
1846
1836
1852
1853
1840
1846
1844
1850
1852
1846
1850
1850
1S44
1853
Lay Teachers
and others.
Ameri-
can.
25 79 32
32
Schohirs.
Board'ng
208
358 310 300;
Day.
249
159
90
250
395
718
220
168
403
100
120
2932
27
103
78
166 3836
For offices, the liberality of a few friends.
in addition to the collections made in some
of the churches in 1842, has provided the
Mission House, in Centre street. The place
at first occupied as an office was a room in
the Brick Church Chapel, in partnership
with another benevolent institution. This
was soon found to be quite too confined a
place, and two rooms were taken on the
third floor of a building at the corner of
Broadway and Murray street. The growing
business of the Board and the inconvenience
of these rooms led to another change, and a
part of a house was rented in City Ilall
Place, where the office was held for some
years. These rooms, however, were not
well suited to the use of the Board ; and the
plan of renting an office was found to be ex-
pensive, and attended with the risk of change
and other serious inconveniences. It is
therefore a most happy thing that a house
conveniently situated, well lighted, suffi-
ciently large, and planned for its special use,
is now owned by the Board. Its offices are
rent-free, and are better suited to its pur-
poses than rented rooms at almost any cost.
In the Mission House, besides the Trea-
surer's and Secretaries' offices, there are
apartments for packing and storing goods to
be sent to the missions. These occupy the
basement story. When several missionary
families arc about to sail, their trunks,
644
PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF MISSIONS.
boxes, parcels, articles of furniture, &c., fill
up these apartments, often to an uncomfort-
able degree ; and both the economy and the
convenience of these rooms become quite
apparent. To rent suitable places for such
purposes, when missionaries are preparing to
embark, would always be attended with
much expense, and might often be found im-
practicable.
The rooms devoted to the Museum, in the
third story, contain a rare variety of idol
gods and goddesses, from India, Siara, China,
Africa, and other heathen countries, besides
numerous other objects of interest. This
collection is gradually increasing in extent
and value, and is worthy of attention by the
friends of missions. Visitors are admitted
at ajjy time, on application to the oflBcers or
clerks in the House.
A large room is occupied by the Library.
The books here collected number about 2000
volumes, mostly relating directly or indi-
rectly to the work of missons. They in-
clude numerous translations of the Sacred
Scriptures, Dictionaries and Grammars of
foreign languages. Reports and periodicals
of missionary institutions, in bound volumes,
memoirs of missionaries, works on the In-
dians, on Africa, India, China, &c. They
form a collection of very considerable value,
and one which should be gradually enlarged.
A number of works by Chinese authors
occupy a recess in the same room. This is
probabl}' the only library of the kind in
this country. It consists of about 1000 vol-
umes, of which 400 are but one work, " The
Twenty-Four Histories ;" and another work,
"A Universal Encyclopa3dia," with maps,
diagrams, and sketches, extends to 120 vol-
umes. '• The Five Classics" number 10-1
volumes, and a second series, under a simi-
lar title, contains 22 volumes. These are all
in octavo, as are works on botany, descrip-
tions of particular districts, accounts of
kings and emperors, dictionaries, &c., be-
sides some works of smaller si/e. The
whole collection gives a striking view of the
extent of Chinese literature, and makes one
sigh over the strange language which ren-
ders its stores inaccessible to most readers.
Yet for reference these volumes may prove
of great service.. They were collected by
the late lamented Mr. Olyphant, a merchant
in the China trade, for some years a most
valued member of the Executive Committee ;
and by his characteristic liberality they oc-
cupy a place in the Mission House Librarj-.
In oilier rooms are kept the bound vol-
umes of letters received at the missionary
office. These arc arranged according to date.
All from correspondents in this country are
classilied under Domestic, and those from
the mi.ssionaries are placed under the head
of the Missions. Thus, the volume labeled,
'•Domestic — January to June, 1853," in-
cludes the home letters received in those
months; and the volumes labeled, "India
Letters. Lodiana, 1847-51," contains the let-
ters from the Lodiana Mission in that time.
Each volume has an index, making reference
easy. There are upwards of sixty of these
thick volumes, and each year steadily in-
creases the number. In addition to these
are many volumes consisting exclusively of
letters relating to the Missionary Chronicle,
formerly published, and to the Foreign Mis-
sionar}^. The copies of letters sent from the
office fill several volumes more. And the
Treasurer's books of account, of various
kinds, form still another class, second to
none in their importance. A copy of every
letter with remittances of money to the mis-
sions, and every letter containing remittances
from the churches or individuals to the trea-
sur}', will be found among these volumes.
The Receipts of the Board, and of the
Western Foreign Missionary Societj^, (de-
ducting the grants of the Bible and Tract
Societies, and the appropriations of the
TJ. S. Government for Indian schools,) from
the commencement of their operations to
the present time, as it appears from the fol-
lowing table, present a gratifying view of
the growth of the missionary spirit from
year to year. The financial year of the
Board terminates the first of May.
^■s I 1834,
£^<! 1835,
I ^ 1836,
1111837,
f 1838,
1839,
1840.
184i;
1842,
1843,
1844,
1845,
■^^ 1840,
1847,
1848,
1849,
1850,
1851,
1852,
1853,
1854,
«
$6,431
16,296
17.677
19;i23
22,832
44748
56;i50
54;425
62,344
58,924
54,760
66,674
72,117
76,395
82,739
89,165
96,294
104;665
108,544
117,882
122;028
140,502
Total, $1,490,795
PRESBYTERIAN OIIURCII OF NOVA
SCOTIA, BOARD OF MISSIONS: This
Board was first organizeif on the 11th July,
1844, in consequence of an overture on the
subject of Foreign Missions by the Presby-
tery of Prince Edward Island. The move-
ment in Presbytery is understoorl to have
originated with Rev. John Geddio, who after-
wards became the first missionary under the
PRESBYTERIAN CHURCH OF NOVA SCOTIA,
645
direction of the Board. Its members are
subject to the anmial appointment of synod,
but for the most part the same individuals
are re-appointed. At present, it consists of
eight clergymen and four laymen ; the Rev.
David Roy, New Glasgow, N. S., being Con-
vener, and Rev. James Bayne, Pictou, N. S.,
Recording and Corresponding Secretary.
The Board m^t as often as business re-
quires, at the call of the Convener, or their
own adjournment. The Secretary is instruct-
ed to correspond once in three months, and
at other times, as circumstances require. A
monthly periodical, called " The Missionary
Register," is issued under the care of the
Board, with a special view to disseminate
missionary intelligence. An annual report
of proceedings is laid before the synod, and
the minutes of the various meetings, during
each year, countersigned by the Moderator.
The following synodical instructions were
given to the Board at its first formation :
(1) That the Board be authorized to receive
the cooperation of the several ministers of
the church in making an appeal to all the
congregations of the body relative to the
object of their appointment, and in counten-
ancing and aiding an agency, if it be deemed
proper that one should be employed. (2)
That the Board do apply to such sources of
information as they may deem requisite for
the purpose of ascertaining the most elegible
field for their missionary operations, expenses
of outfit, passage, annual salary, &c. (3)
That when funds adequate to maintain a
missionary abroad shall be guaranteed b}^
the several congregations of the church, and
the Board shall feel themselves prepared to
negociate with candidates for such mission-
ary employment, proposals shall be made to
obtain offers from qualified persons willing
to volunteer their services for this purpose.
(4) That in treating with candidates, care-
ful attention be paid to their personal re-
ligion, doctrinal views, and missionary spirit.
Agreeabl}^ to these instructions the Board
took immediate steps to appeal for support,
and as far as possible obtain a guarantee of
annual contribution to a specific amount
from the Church at large. The result of this
appeal was that a yearly contribution of
£200 currency, was considered as an amount
that might confidently be depended upon
It had been ascertained that £70 sterling, or
£84 currenc}'', was suflBcient for the support
of one missionary in Polynesia, and this
field was selected as the least expensive and
most healthfuL September 2G, 1845, the
Board met for the purpose of receiving ten
ders of service from dulj'- qualified persons,
when the Rev. John Geddie, of Cavendish
and New Loudon, Prince Edward Island,
oifered and was accepted. From the favor-
able aspect of continued and enlarged pecu-
niary support, the Board felt encoui'aged to
appoint a catechist as companion and assist-
ant to Mr. Geddie. This was happily ac-
complished so that the divine example of
sending out the disciples two by two was
followed ^to the letter. Mr. Isaac Archibald,
a native of Nova Scotia who had received a
liberal education, though not sufficient to
warrant his immediate licensure and ordina-
tion as a missionary in full standing, was
unanimously accepted, and duly appointed. In
the mean time ^Ir. Geddie, who was in a few
weeks loosed from his congregation, visited
the various congregations in his presbytery
with a view to deepen their interest in the
mission, by a series of farewell services. The
same course was pursued during the earlier
part of the following year throughout the
presbyteries of Nova Scotia, and was found
to produce a very happy efi'ect. Mr. Geddie
devoted some months to the study of medi-
cine and also to the art of printing, with a
view to their future practice on the field of
foreign service. It was found very difficult
to select the particular island on which Mr.
Geddie should commence operations, as it
was not known which would be most acces-
sible to missionary effort. New Caledonia
was chiefly thought of, but Mr. G. was not
bound by any decision of the Board to
adopt it, unless circumstances were found
favorable. The New 'Hebrides group had
been surve3'ed by the martj^r missionary
Williams, for the special occupation of the
parent church, (United Presbyterian, or as
it was then called the United Secession
Church of Scotland,) and at their expense.
It was felt to be exceedingly appropriate
that the Church in Nova Scotia should adopt
as their field what the Church at home could
not enter upon at that time. This arrange-
ment proved afterwards to be quite advan-
tageous, and was accordingly adopted.
Messrs. Geddie and Archibald, with their
wives and children, after a series of farewell
services in Pictou, Onslow, and Halifax, left
Nova Scotia Nov. 30, 1846. After a brief
sojourn in the United States, at Newbury-
port, where they were very kindly entreated
by the friends of the missionary enterprize,
they sailed for the Sandwich Islands, being
there also entertained, with Christian wel-
come, and sent on their way with the pray-
ers and offerings of the churches. They
found a safe and prosperous voj^age to the
Samoan group, which is occupied by the
agents of the London Missionary Society,
with whom they spent a considerable period,
receiving the benefit of their experience as
to the manners and customs and language of
the tribe whose evangelization was considered
most suitable to the resources of the newly
arrived missionaries. After due deliberation
the island of Aneiteum, New Hebrides, was
selected for permanent location. In July,
1848, the mission families were conveyed
646
PRIMITIVE METHODISTS— EANGOON.
thither and entered immediately upon their
allotted duties. Mr. Isaac Archibald re-
signed his connection with the mission in
1850. Since that period the Board have had
one missionary and a few native teachers
under their charge. Very urgent appeals
have been made for additional assistance, but
up to the present year, (1854,) no favorable
answer has been returned, such as warrants
the expectation of immediate aid. One
young man of ardent missionary spirit, is
now in course of training, and will be sent
out by the John Williams on her outward
voyage next year. Two additional mission-
aries are wanted, and if found, duly qualified,
would be sent immediately. The funds on
hand have always been adequate to the
wants of the mission, and exhibit now a
more flourishing condition than they have
ever presented. After defraying the neces-
sary expenses for the year there will be a
balance on hand of nearly £500. There is no
reason to fear that the resources of the
Church are quite equal to the maintenance
of four missionaries. At first, the salary of
the ordained missionary was £70 sterling,
but in 1850 it was raised to an equality with
the scale adopted by the London Missionary
Society, viz., £100 sterling, and £5 sterling
for each child. In addition to this, one of
the children has been for some years at
Walthaustow, England, along with the chil-
dren of the missionaries of that Society.
The expense for his education amounts to
£15 sterling per annum, and with extras
does not exceed £20.
Tlie entire amount contributed to this
mission since 18-16 probably exceeds, but
may be stated at, £3,000 currency or £2,400
sterling. The amount for the past year re-
ceived by the Treasurer is £424 currency,
or £339 sterling in money, and nearly £300
in mission goods. At present the Board has
but one mission, and one missionary, with
several native teachers, on Aneiteum and Fo-
tenna, New Hebrides. The church in Dec,
1851, contained 24 members and is situ-
ated at Aniligauhat, Aneiteum. There is
every probability that tlie number of con-
verts greatly exceeds tliis amount now. By
the latest date, Oct. 1853, it appears that the
entire island, with its 3,000 inhabitants, has
abandoned heathenish practices, and tliat the
district wliich had last given up its idols is
now exceedingly anxious to have Christian
instruction. (Sec South Sea Islands.) — Hev.
J. B.vvNi;. of Pictou, N. S.
PRIMITIVE METHODIST FOREIGN
MISSIONARY SOCIETY: Tlie Primitive
Methodists, (or "Ranters," as they are
sometimes called.) are a body of simple-
hearted and devoted Christians which arose
in Eughinil in 1810. In 1853. they reported
508 ministers, 108,920 members. Finding
themselves gaining strength, they organized
a foreign missionary society in March 1844,
adopting Canada, New Zealand and Australia
as their fields of labor. The Rev. J. Long,
and J. Wilson were the first missionaries
they sent to Australia. Since that time they
have strengthened this mission, and God has
honored them with considerable prosperity.
Their stations in Australia are Adelaide,
jNIount Barker, Burra Burra, Sydney, Mor-
peth, Melbourne, and Geelong. The number
of missionaries is seven, and of members
under their care 535. The total number of
their foreign missionaries throughout the
world, is 23 ; of whom 13 are in Canada, 7
in Australia, and 3 in New Zealand. The
whole number of members in their stations
is 2,374— W. B.
PROSPECT PENN : A station of the
London Missionary Society in Jamaica,
West Indies,
PROTESTANT EPISCOPAL CHURCH,
MISSIONS OF : (See Episcopal Board of
3Iissions.)
PUEN : A station of the London Mission-
ary Society on Tahiti, South Sea.
PUNA : A district on the western coast
of the Island of Hawaii, forming, in connec-
tion with Ililo, the Parish of Rev. Mr. Coan,
formerly a missionary of the American
Board, now pastor of the native church in
Hilo and Puna, by whom he is supported.
QUILON: A seaport town, in Southern
India, of considerable note in former times,
said to have been built A. D. 825. A station
of the London INIissionary Society.
RAGGED ISLAND : One of the Baha-
mas ; a station of the Baptist Missionary
Society.
RAIATEA: One of the Society Islands,
having a mission of the London Missionary
Society.
RAiVAVAI : One of the Austral Islands,
and a station of the London Missionary So-
cietv.
RAJKOTE : A station of the Irish Pres-
byterian mission in India, on the Gulf of
Gambay, opposite to Surat.
RAJMUNDRY : A town in the Northern
Circars, India, — a station of the Hamburgh
North German Missionary Societj'.
RAJAH, or RA-JA : In India, a prince.
Some of the Rajahs are said to be independ-
ent princes, and others arc tributary to the
Mogul.
RAMREE : Tlu? capital of a district of the
same name, 117 miles south from Arracan
town : A station of the American Baptist
Union.
RANGOON : The principal seaport of the
Burraan dominions, situated on the north
bank of the Rangoon branch of the Irrawady.
Its extent along the river is about a mile,
and its breadth about G50 yards. It is en-
closed by a stockade of teak timber and
planks from ten to twelve feet high, having
RHENISH MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
647
two gates on the northern face, and one on
each of the others. Pop. 40,000 to 50,000.
RANGIHONA: The first station occu-
pied by the Church Missionary Society in
New Zealand, on the north-east side of the
Bay of Ishmds.
RAROTONGA: The largest of the Hcr-
vey Islands group, in the South Pacific,
where is a mission of the London Mission-
ary Society.
RED RIVER : The Red River falls into
Lake Winnipeg. The settlement on this
river is about 50 miles in extent. Popula-
tion in 1843, 5,143, of whom 2,798 were Ro-
man Catholics, and 2,345 Protestants. The
Church Missionary Society have sevei'al
stations in this settlement.
REGENT'S TOWN: A town of liberated
Africans, in Sierra Leone, West Africa, 5
miles south south-east from Cape Town, in
a valley near the heights of the Sierra Leone
mountains. Its situation is romantic and
healthy. No less than 8 mountains, covered
with evergreen forests, rear their heads and
form a chain around the settlement. Streams
descend from the various clifls, and form a
large brook, which runs through the middle
of the town. On the banks is a meadow for
the cattle belonging to the settlement, which
is always green. In 1813, this spot, then un-
inhabited, was set apart for the reception of
negroes delivered from slave ships by the
English cruisers. In 1816, their number was
1,100, from 22 different tribes, barbarous to
an astonishing degree. (See Western Africa,
Church Missiomiry Society.)
REHOBOTH: A station of the Rhenish
Missionary Society, at tlie hot springs, in
Namaqualand, South Africa.
REWA : The second place in rank and
influence in the Feejee Islands. A station
of the Wesleyan Missionary Society.
RHENISH MISSIONARY SOCIETY :
The following account of the Rhenish Mis-
sionary Society was given by Rev. L. Van
Rohden, Assistant Inspector of the Barmen
^Missionary Seminary, in the ^^Evangelical
Christendom^'' for Jan. 1851 : " The Rhenish
Missionary Society was founded in the year
1828. Three associations, those of Elberfeld
Barmen and Cologne, united in the autumn
of the above year, that they might, with
common powers, send out missionaries to the
heathen world. The above three associa
tious were soon joined by others, in the
Rhenish provinces and in Westphalia, having
the same objects in view. The associations
thus combined, which, up to the present
time, have been joined by about fifty other
small and large associations in Western and
Middle Germany, bear altogether the name
of the Rhenish Missionary Society. The
associations have appointed a committee, or,
as we call it, "a deputation," consisting of
twelve individuals, the whole residing either
in Elberfeld or Barmen, who have the man-
agement of its affairs in their hands. They
hold, for this purpose, regular meetings once
a month, or oftener, in the mission-hous-e. A
part of the correspondence is conducted by
the members of the deputation themselves ;
but the principal part of the business de-
volves on the inspector of the mission-house.
Once a year, or even oftener, the deputation
summons delegates from all the combined
associations to a general assembly at Bar-
men ; lays before them a report of their
proceedings ; and adopts such resolutions as
may appear to be necessary for the exten-
sion and furtherance of the work. The gen-
eral assembly decides by a majority of votes.
"When the Rhenish Missionar}^ Society
met in the autumn of 1828, one of the asso-
ciations composing it, viz., that of Barmen,
had already for three years established a
mission seminary ; and had published also
the Barmen IMissionary Gazette, of which
20,000 copies were in circulation. The mis-
sion seminary had at the first for its object
to give young mechanics the necessary in-
struction to qualify them for going out as
missionary assistants to the heathen. But
soon this plan was enlarged so far, that the
young men should be educated with a view
of becoming actual missionaries, who should
pass their theological examination here, and
should be ordained to go out as ministers to
the heathen ; only by way of exception are
they sent out without being ordained as
catechists, or even as assistants and mechan-
ics. The Rhenish Missionary Society under-
took, immediately after its foundation, the
direction of the Barmen mission seminary.
The Inspector and the pupils were placed
under its control. The first was a perma-
nent member of the deputation. Dr. Richter
was then the Inspector ; and he remained so
till the spring of 1847, when he suddenly
died. He was assisted by his brother W.
Richter, who died about two years before
him. His place was filled by the writer of
these lines, L. Von Rohden, and that of In-
spector by C. Wallman since 1848.
" The Rhenish Missionary Society supports
twenty -five stations, with several more out-
stations, in three different parts of the mis-
sion-field ; viz.. in South-eastern Africa, in.
Borneo, and in China. It has sent out fifty
missionaries, who are, for the most part,,
married, and of whom seven have already
died. The yearly income amounts to from-.
28,000 to 32,000 Prussian thalers, or front
£3,150 to £-3,000. It possesses a mission-
house, in which the pupils are educated, ten.
at a time, and a small congregation and mis-
sion-chapel, near the mission-house, in which
public worship is conducted by the pupils
exclusively, under the direction of the In-
spector. Once a year missionary meetings,
are held in all the congres;ations connected.
G48
RIMATARA— SANDWICH ISLANDS.
with the society, which have assumed the
character of public festivals. Once a month
missionary prayer meetings are held. Every
fortnight ' there appears a report of the
labors of our missionaries : and once a year
a general report is published."
Thus stood the affairs of the Society in
1851. It has just entered its twenty-sixth
year. It now has twenty-five auxiliaries in
Rhenish Prussia, and thirteen in Westphalia ;
and many of these embrace other " special
and local unions." Nor is this all. Thuringia
furnishes four auxiliaries ; Nassau, Ilessc
Darmstadt, &c., three ; and there is one in
the United States. In 1850, its receipts had
risen to 39,000 thalers. Within the twenty-
five years, more than 500,000 thalers have
been expended for the spread of the Gospel.
As the result of its efforts in behalf of the
heathen, the Ilhcnish Missionary Society can
point to more than five thousand persons
who have received baptism, and to eighteen
hundred communicants,
IlIMATARA: One of the smallest of the
Austral Islands, and a station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society.
ROBBEN ISLAND: Hospital for Lepers,
ofT Table Bay, South Africa, occupied as a
station by the United Brethren, removed
from Henicl-en-Aarde.
ROCKBOOKAII : A station of the Ame-
rican Episcopal Board in West Africa, about
25 miles east of Cape Palmas, beyond the
limits of the Colony, being the capital of the
Bahboo tribe.
ROCK TOWN: Station of the United
Presbyterian Synod of Scotland, near the
mouth of the Old Calabar, West Africa.
ROCKTOWN : A station of the American
Episcopal Missionary Society in West
Africa, south-west of Cape Palmas.
ROMA : One of the Banda Islands, a
group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi-
pelago.
ROTORUA : A station of the Church INIis-
Bionary Society in New Zealand, on the Ro-
torua Lake, lat. 38« 40' S. and longitude
176° E.
ROTTY : One of the Molucca Islands, in
the Indian Archipelago.
ROYAPOORUM: A station of the Ame-
rican Board, belonging to the Madras mis-
sion, in Eastern Ilindostan.
RURUTU : A small island, of the Aus-
tral group, and a station of the London Mis-
Bionarv Society.
SABATII A : A station of the Presbyterian
Board in Northern India, 110 miles north-
east from Lddiana, in the lower ranges of the
IIinial;iyii mountains, at an elevation of about
4,000 foc't al)ovc the sea.
SAFl-yf: A town, formerly of consider-
able note, sittuted on a hill overlooking the
western coast of the Lake of Tiberias, 05
miles west of Damascus. It formerly con-
tained seven Jewish synagogues, and a sort
of university for the education of Jewish
rabbis. In the year 1759, the place was
nearly destroyed by an earthquake. It is
now a poor place. The Jews are much op-
pressed. The London Jews' Society have a
station here.
SAFOTULOFAI : A station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society, on the Island of
Savaii, one of the Samoas. It is a large and
important place. Population about 1,000.
SAIIARANPUR : A town in the province
of Delhi, Northern India, 90 miles north-
east from the city of Delhi, and 130 south-
east from Lodiana. Its elevation above the
sea is 1,073 feet. It is a large town, and
many of the houses arc built of brick. The
Presbyterian Board (American) have a sta-
tion here.
SALULUA : A station of the London Wxs-
sionary Society, on the Island of Savaii, one
of the Samoan group.
SALEM : Chief town of a district of the
same name, in the province of Mysore,
Indiaii^ station of the London Missionary
Society^ Also, a station of the Wesleyan
Missionary Society in South Africa, and of
the United Brethren m Surinam.
SALUAFATA : A station of the London
Missionarv Societv, on the Island of Upolu.
SALONICA: {See TkessaUmka.)
SAMANA: A station of the Wesleyan
Society in Hayti.
SAMARANG: A town and seaport on
the north coast of the Island of Java, near
the mouth of a river of the same name, 240
miles east south-cast from Batavia. Popu-
lation about 20,000. A station of the Bap-
tist ^lissionary Society.
SAMOA : A group of Islands in the South
Pacific, between 10* and 20'' S. lat. and 109"
and 174" AV. longitude, sometimes called
Navigators' Islands, 8 in number, viz.. Man-
na, Oroscnga, Ofu, Tutuila, Upolu, Mammo,
Aborima, and Savaii. Population, 100.000.
The London Missionary Society have a mis-
sion here. (See Sutdh Sea Islands.)
SANDOWAY : A station of the Ameri-
can Baptist Union in Arracan.
SANGEER ISLANDS: A group of the
Moluccas, -in the Indian Archipelago.
SANDALWOOD ISLAND: One of the
lesser Sunda Islands, in the Indian Archi-
pelago.
SANDWICH ISLANDS: The Sandwich
Islands, situated in the North Pacific Ocean,
al)Out 20" N. lat. and 100" W. hmg.,
were discovered l)y Capt. Cook in 1778.
They ctmsist of a group of twelve volcanic
islands, (three or four of which are mtri-ly
uninhabited rocks.) standing (piite by tlicm-
selves, and of very considei-al)le commercial
importance. Hawaii is the largest, but
Oaku, more central in the group, and hav-
ing a good harbor, is the seat of government
- P 0 S ■«
CO — I J3 o-' i» W t« *-' d I
V
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
649
and the commercial centre. The islands are
estimated to contain something more than
6,000 square miles. The face of the country
is greatly diversified with hills and plains,
secluded vallej's, deep ravines, lofty moun-
tains, and craters of immense volcanoes. In
the elevated interior of the Islands the cli-
mate is cool. Rains are frequent in the in-
terior and on the windward side, and vege-
tation in many parts luxuriant ; but the low
lands of the leeward side of the islands are
mostly dry and barren. The native inhab-
itants belong to the same race with those of
most of the more easterly islands in the Pa-
cific.
Pcypulation. — The population was esti-
mated by Capt. Cook at 400,000; an esti-
mate, doubtless, greatly too large ; though,
from various causes, the people have been
rapidly wasting away since his visit. About
1840, a census not fully to be relied upon,
showed the population to be not far from
108,000.
Social, Moral, and Religious Condition of
the People. — Before missionary operations
commenced, the people were, if not in the
lowest state of barbarism in which men
are ever found, yet certainly in a very low
state of intellectual, social, and moral de-
basement. With no written language, with
no comfortable dwellings, with very little
clothing, with the family constitution in
ruins, unmitigated licentiousness universal,
and every vile passion indulged without re-
sti'aint; the people "a nation of drunkards,"
with no laws or courts of justice. "Society
was a dead sea of pollution, and many ships
visiting th*e islands were floating exhibitions
of Sodom and Gomorrah." The government
was wholly arbitrary ; the kings and chiefs
were considered owners of the soil, and the
people were slaves, with their property and
their lives subject to the will of those above
them. The people of all ranks were much
under the influence of superstitious fears,
and their religion, in connection with the
cruel rites of idol worship, was in a great
measure a tabu system ; i. e., a system of re-
ligious prohibitions and consecrations, which
had extended itself very widely, and had be-
*' come exceedingly burdensome under the di-
rection of priests and kings who used the
system to accomplish their own purposes.
MISSION",
American Board. — Just as American
Christians were beginning to direct their at-
tention to the work of Christianizing hea-
then nations, two youths from the Sandwich
Islands, Opukahaia (Obookiah) and Hopu,
came in an American vessel to the United
States. They came from " a boj^s' notion,"
but the hand of God was in it. Landing at
New York in 1809, they accompanied the
captain of the vessel to New Haven, Conn.,
and soon attracted the notice and Christian
sympathy of some of the students of Yale
College, who began to give them instruction.
In 1816, they, with several others from the
Sandwich Islands, and others from various
portions of the heathen world, were gathered
into a " mission school " at Cornwall, Conn.
Opukahaia, having become hopefully a Chris-
tian, expressed deep sympathy for his hea-
then relations and nation, and a strong wish
that they might be evangelized. He, how-
ever, was not permitted to engage personally
in the work of preaching to them the Gospel,
as he ardently desired to do. He died in
Feb., 1818, before arrangements were made
for sending a mission to the Islands. But
he had not lived in vain. Extensive interest
had been awakened, and it had become ob-
vious that Christian missionaries woidd soon
be sent to his kindred according to the flesh.
In the summer of 1819, Hiram Bingham
and Asa Thurston, students in the theologi-
cal seminary at Andover, offered themselves
to the American Board for this service.
They were ordained at Goshen, Conn., Sept.
19. Others oflered themselves as assistant
missionaries ; a mission church was organized
in the vestry of Park Street church, Boston,
Oct. 15th. The public instructions of the
Prudential Committee were given by the
Secretary, Rev. Dr. Worcester, at Park Street,
the same evening, and on the 23d of the
same month, (Oct. 1819,) the company sailed
from Boston in the Brig Thaddeus, Capt.
Blanchard. Besides the two ordained mis-
sionaries and their wives, there were, as
members of the mission, INIr. Daniel Cham-
berlain, farmer, Dr. Thomas Holman, physi-
cian, Mr. Samuel Whitney, mechanic and
teacher, Mr. Samuel Ruggles, catechist, and
Mr. Elisha Loomis, printer and teacher, with
their wives, and John Honoree, Thomas Ho-
pu, and William Tennooe, natives of the Is-
lands who had been educated at Cornwall ;
in all, 17. George Tamoree, a son of one of
the Island chiefs, who had also been educated
at Cornwall, returned in the same vessel, but
not as a member of the mission. It may be
stated here that some of these natives of the
Islands did not render all that assistance
which it was hoped would be derived from
them in the operations of the mission. They
exhibited neither the intelligence nor the sta-
bility of character needed in teachers. Hopu,
however, acquired the epithet of " the faith-
ful," and Honoree appears to have been la-
borious and useful ; but Tennooe rapidly fell
into the immoral pi'actices of his countrymen,
and was excluded from the church in 1820.
The mission was also yet more deeply pained
by the unchristian conduct of Dr. Holman,
who was excommunicated in Januaiy, 1821.
In the instructions given to this band of
missionaries, who were going, emphatically,
to one of the " dark places of the earth,"
650
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
they were directed "to aim at nothing short of
covering those islands with fruitful fields and
pleasant dwellings, and schools and churches,
and raising up the whole people to an ele-
vated state of Christian civilization;" ''to
introduce, and get into extended operation
and influence among them, the arts, institu-
tions and usages of civilized life and soci-
ety ;" but, " above all, to convert them from
their idolatries, superstitions and vices, to
the living God." They were going to do a
great work, and God, who had prepared the
way for their being sent, was also preparing
the way for their reception and for their
success.
Preparation for the Mission at the Islands.
— One of the most important of that series
of events by which the Sandwich Islands
were prepared to be a field of most success-
ful missionary operations, was the subjuga-
tion of the different islands about the com-
mencement of the present century, and the
union of all under one government. Several
distinct petty kingdoms had previously pre-
sented a scene of uninterrupted jealousy,
contention, and savage warfare ; but now
Kamehameha, of Hawaii, a man of great phj'--
sical strength and mental energy, and of
many excellent qualities as a ruler, had sub-
dued all the other kingdoms. There was
one government only. What was permitted
in one island would be likely to be permitted
in all, and any changes which might take
place in customs, religion, or laws, would
readily become universal changes.
Capt. Vancouver, who visited the Islands
several times, in 1792, '93, and '94, gave the
king much good advice, as well as some val-
uable presents ; and before leaving, is re-
ported to have said to him: ''There is a God
above in heaven, and if 3-ou desire to wor-
ship him, when I return to England I will
entreat his majesty to appoint for you a
clergyman ; and when he comes you must
renounce your tabu system, which is false, —
there are no earthly deities." Kamehameha
died May 8, 1819, a few months before the
missionaries sailed from Boston. On his
death-bed. he requested an American, who
was present, to tell him about the religion
of the Bible and the Christian's God. lie
obtained, however, no information, and died
without the knowledge which he sought, leav-
ing his son, Liholiho, Kamehameha II., to
succeed him.
Almost immediately, under Liholiho, an-
other event occurred, of great importance in
the wa^v of preparation for the Gospel : — the
renunciation of the tabu system and the old
idolatry. Kamehameha is said to have spo-
ken to his chiefs, during his last sickness, of
throwing o!f the restraints of tabu when he
should recover. The testimony of foreigners
residing at the islands had been often given
against the system. They had also some-
times allured the people to acts which wero
violations of tabu, and as no harm had fol-
lowed,— as the gods did not punish bj^ death
or in any other way, — the force of supersti-
tious fears were lessened. The restrictions
of tabu were unnumbered, and often of tho
most oppressive character, bearing, in many
things, as heavily upon the chiefs as upon
the common people, so that many motives
would urge to its violation. The chiefs pre-
sent at the death of the king are said to
have requested Kaahumanu, the one of his
wives who was specially looked to for direc-
tion, to suffer that occasion to be taken for
disi-egarding all former ceremonies, and re-
nouncing tabu. Kaahumanu however, did
not consent, but the license and intemperance
which followed the king's death, helped the
matter forward. That very day, many of
the common people and a few chiefs ate,
males and females together, a thing prohibit-
ed on pain of death, and a few days after,
most of the female chiefs partook of pro-
hibited food. Superstitious fears were grad-
ually swept away. Kaahumanu advised the
king, on the day of his coronation: "Let us
henceforth disregard the restraints of tabu,"
and within a short time, the dissolute Liho-
liho, first in the midst of drunken revels,
ate, drank, and smoked with female chiefs.
The people raised the cry, ''The king has
violated tabu, there is no longer any re-
straint." Some, however, still resisted.
One chief, encouraged by the priests, raised
the standard of rel)ellion in support of the
old idolatry ; but he was subdued, — " the
army with idols was weak, the army with-
out idols was victorious," — and 'the work
was done ; the islands were without a reli-
gion, waiting for God's law. The people
demolished the temples of the false gods
that had enthralled them, and treated their
idols with contempt, throwing some into the
sea, and some into the fire. God had brought
about events before the missionaries reached
the Islands, which they could hardly have
sui)po3ed it possible that they should witness
until after years of toil.
Arrival and reception of the missionaries ;
first stations and labors. — The missionaries
welcomed their first view of the mountains^
of Hawaii on the 30th of March, 1820, and
entered the harbor of Kailua on the 4th of
April, only a short time after the decisive
battle which had subdued the party support-
ing idolatry, and near the scene of tliat bat-
tle. They had already received intelligence,
from some of the ship's company who had
landed with a boat, of the surprising and
encouraging revolution which had been ef-
fected ; but how t hey would be received they
could not tell. The missionary company
were introduced to the king, (who was then
at Kailua, with many of the chiefs.) gave
liim the presents and the letter from tho
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
G51
Secretary of the Board, which were designed
for his father, and requested permission to
remain and establish themselves as teachers,
on different islands. They Avere received
with respect ; but an answer to their pro-
posal was not given until after a discussion
of several da)'-s. One difficulty was that
Vancouver had encouraged Kamohameha to
look for teachers from England, and they
doubted whether they ought to receive those
who were from another country ; but John
Young, an Englishman residing at the islands,
and who had been recommended to their
confidence by Vancouver, assui'ed them that
missionaries from America were the same as
missionaries from England. On the 8th of
April, permission was given for them all to
remain one year at Kailua. They, however,
thought it better that a iiart of their number
should go to Oahu, and on the 11th the king
consented to this. On the 12th, Mv. Thurs-
ton, Dr. Holman, Tennooe, and IIopu were
landed at Kailua, and the Thaddeus sailed
with the rest of the company for Honolulu,
on Oahu. Early in May the Thaddeus sailed
for Kauai, to return George Tamoree to his
father, and ^lessrs. Whitney and Ruggles ac-
companied him. The old chief received his
son with great joy and urged the missionary
laborers who were with him to remain.
After spending some weeks, and satisfying
themselves that a favorable opening was
presented there, they returned to Honolulu
to consult with their brethren, and in July
were stationed -ftt Kauai. Thus three sta-
tions were commenced by the first band of
laborers, on three of the largest islands,
Hawaii the most south-easterly, Kauai the
most north-westerly, and Oahu, central, and
commercially the most important of the
group.
After establishing themselves in thatched
native huts of a single room, without floor,
ceiling or fixtures, and with simple openings
for doors and windows, one of the first ef-
forts of the missionaries was to collect
schools, composed both of children and
adults. The king, the chiefs, and the mem-
bers of their families were the first pupils.
As the native language had never been re-
-duced to writing, instruction was of neces-
sity conhned to the English, and the difficul-
ties were great. Much interest however was
awakened among the learners, though with
most it soon abated. Within three months,
the king could read, and within six months
several of the chiefs could both read and
write. In November of this year the mis-
sion reported 4 distinct schools with 90
pupils, of different ages and rank. Religious
services of different kinds, and Sabbath
schools were also at once established, and
withm a few months some of the missiona-
aries were addressing the people on religious
subjects in their own language, imperfectly
used of course. After residing about three
months at Kailua, Mr. Thurston preached a
formal sermon to the royal family, using
Hopu as an interpreter, from the words, " I
have a message from God unto thee." His
little audience kneeled in praj^er before Je-
hovah.
Obstacles. — Wonderfully as God had pre-
pared the way before the missionaries, it yet
could not be otherwise than that they should
find themselves compassed with difficulties
and met by many and sore trials in their ef-
forts to evangelize a people so degraded.
There was the difficulty of communicating
with the people, and when the language was
learned so as to be spoken, there was still
the want of a written language, and of
books ; and there was the poverty of the
language, especially its want of terms which
would express correctly the sentiments and
doctrines of a pure religion. But far more
than all this there was the intellectual and
the moral debasement of the people, which
they themselves well termed their " dark-
heartedness." When the missionaries first
looked upon the degradation and barbarism
of the half naked, lewd, and chattering sav-
ages as they came about the ship in their
canoes, some turned away from the sight
with shrinking and with tears, and others
were ready to ask, " Can these be human
beings ? can they be civilized and Christian-
ized? and can we take up our abode for life
with such a people ?"
But as if the character and the condition
of the natives did not present obstacles
enough to the successful prosecution of the
holy work for which these Christian laborers
had come, foreign residents at the islands,
from Christian lands, must bring in also, not
only all their vices, but their decided oppo-
sition. Most of the foreigners then at the
island, were sailors of the "baser sort,"
some of whom had been put on shore by
masters of vessels, and some were deserters.
Such men, removed from all the restraints of
a Christian land and shut out almost entirely
from the observation of the virtuous, lived
in open and unblushing vice, as vile as the
heathen about them, and much more capable
of successfully opposing missionarj'' effort.
There were some foreigners of a better class,
among traders and commercial agents, from
whom the missionaries received, more or less,
both of kind attention and of encouragement
in their work ; but for many years, the great
body both of foreign residents, and of sea-*
faring men visiting the islands, exerted a
most pernicious influence, and were a source
of constant and most painful trial to the
Christian laborers. Nearly all the foreigners
at Kailua, when the missionaries first arrived,
used their influence to induce the king and
chiefs to send them away, asserting, among
other things, that they would soon make war
652
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
upon them and take away their lands. Here
the presence of missionarj ladies was found
to be of great service. " If they had come
to make war would they have brought their
deUcate wives ?" said the chiefs. Foiled in
their efforts to prevent the landing of the
missionaries, they looked forward to the end
of the year for which they had obtained per-
mission to remain, hoping then to secure
their banishment. But in this also they
were wholly unsuccessful. Before the year
expired the chiefs had become satisfied in
regard to the character and the objects of
their teachers, and instead of sending them
away were requesting them to send for more.
Reinforcements. — To sustain and carry for-
ward the eObrt to Christianize the islands,
additional laborers have beeii sent from time
to time. The table below will shoAV at one
view the number of laborers of different
classes who have gone from the United
States (not including 'natives of the islands)
and the date of their arrival at the islands.
In regard to female helpers the table is not
quite full, 76 in all having been sent, nine of
whom went out unmarried.
.
C5
>
- IT-'
'C
-5 ^
<
tr.
'x ^
o
o
if
"^1
cl a!
ft
^a
P
1820
3
4
7
1823
5
2
7
1828
4
2
10
1831
3
1
4
1832
8
2
9
1833
2
1
2
1835
1
2
5
1837
5
10
17
laii
3
1
4
1842
2
1
2
1844
4
3
1848
2
1
1849
1
1
42
27
72
Of the laymen sent, seven have been phy-
sicians, and two have been emplo3'cd specially
in managing the secular affairs of the mis-
sion. In April, 1822, Rev. "Wm. Ellis, an
English missionary at the Society Islands.
came to Honolulu with ^Messrs. Tyennan and
Bcnnet, designing to go from there to estab-
lish a mission at the [Marquesas Islands.
Prevented from going as he had expected to
do, and finding that he could be very useful
at the Sandwich Islands in connection with
the American missionaries, he was induced
to remain, and cooperated with affectionate
harmony in the laljors of tlie mission until
obliLTod by the illness of Mrs. Ellis, to leave
for Knghind in the autumn of 1824.
Position and injluence of the Chiefs. — In
order to understand correctly many of the
facts connected with the history of this mis-
sion, the relative position of tlic cliicfs and
the common people nmst be borne in luiud.
The inhabitants of the Islands were " chiefs
and slaves," with a wide distance between
the two classes. The king was supreme, and
his word was law, not only in civil, but in
religious and all other matters ; and the
chiefs also were regarded by the people
generally with superstitious reverence and
awe, as something more than mortal. They
were accustomed, not to suggest and advise,
but to direct ; and their wishes, or advice,
had all the force of a command. The peo-
ple were accustomed to obey, and to look to
the chiefs for direction. Hence, in the esti-
mation of both chiefs and people, if any
change was to be introduced in laws, cus-
toms, or religion, the chiefs must take the
lead. When the missionai'ies came, the king
and chiefs were not willing that the common
people should be taught to read till thej' had
first learned, and when some of the lower
chiefs and the comrat)n people began to think
favorably of the new religion, they consider-
ed it out of place for them first to make any
public profession ; they must wait '• for the
king to turn." From this state of things
there resulted a kind of necessity for paying
much attention to the higher classes, endea-
voring to secure from them attention to
schools and pi*eaching, and such a sanctioning
of the instruction given as would at least be
regarded by the people as permitting them to
follow it. From the same cause, when chiefs
of the highest rank did express their wisli
that the people would learn to read, or
would attend on preaching, the wish was at
once regarded ; when they desired the peo-
ple to build school-houses, or houses of wor-
ship, it was done without hesitation, and
when they publicly professed their faith in
Christ, thousands of the people would read-
ily have done the same at once. It was not
easy to keep church and state distinct, where
civil and religious matters had always been
united, and not ahvays easy for either chiefs
or people to perceive the difference between
permitting a suitable religious liberty, and
suffering an entirely unsuitable disobedience
to civil rulers.
In this connection it should be distinctly
stated, to the honor of both the missionaries
and the chiefs, that discipline in the churches
has been administered with impartialit}'. In
18o5 a sister of the king was exConununi-
cated, and one of the older missionaries
writes in 18-17 : " High chiefs have been dis-
ciplined as abimdantly as any class of meni-
l)ers in our chiu-ches, and they arc vastly
more docile under discipline than crooked
elders, deacons, and gentlemen of high stand-
ing in the United States."
First Four Years of Missionary Labor. —
The reception which the missionaries met at
the islands, the first stations taken, and the
first efl'orls to reach the people, have^ been
mentioned. The royal family left Kailua,
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
653
Hawaii, towards the close of the year 1820,
and early in 1821 went to Honolulu, on Oahu.
Such was now the state of things at Kailua
that the mission family was no longer con-
sidered safe at that place, and they also re-
moved to Honolulu in Dec, 1820, and Ha-
waii was left without missionary labor until
Nov., 1823, when Kailua was again occupied,
and the next year two other stations were
taken on the island. The interest at first
felt by chiefs and others in learning to read
in English, somewhat abated as the novelty
wore away, and in Dec, 1821, there were
but about 05 pupils. In the mean time, the
missionaries had given themselves diligently
to the difficult task of learning the native
language and reducing it to writing, and on
the first Monday in January, 1822, the first
sheet was printed in the Hawaiian language,
containing the first eight pages of a Ha-
waiian spelling-book. (Owing to the ex-
treme difficulty of ascertaining the exact
sounds of a language never before written,
and the best modes of expressing such
sounds, six months elapsed before the second
sheet was struck ofi".)
This introduction of printing awakened
much interest, and gave at once a new im-
pulse to schools. Several of the chiefs un-
dertook in earnest to learn to read and write
their own language. The king resumed his
studies in August, and on the 16th of the
month he wrote a letter, in a fair, legible
hand, to one of the chiefs of the Societj^
Islands. Kaahumanu and others of the
highest chiefs followed the example of the
king, and in September, the number of per-
sons under instruction was estimated at 500.
Religious instruction began to be given to
much better advantage. The spelling-book
contained easy but important sentences of
Christian truth. The missionaries could in
some measure dispense with the aid of in-
terpreters in preaching. Mr. Ellis, who had
joined them, could readily make himself un-
derstood in the Hawaiian tongue, and some
natives of the Society Islands who had ac-
companied him, could very soon pray and
converse with the Sandwich Islanders in
their own language. Many of the people
listened with interest to the Gospel, but
"waited for the king to turn."
The conduct of the king, Liholiho, was
one of the greatest obstacles with which the
missionaries were called to contend. He
was friendly to the mission, had sometimes
applied himself with characteristic energy to
learning to read and write ; advised others
to learn ; regretted that he had not more
persevei-ance ; and showed no resentment
when reproved by the missionaries for his
vices. But he was young, reckless and
profligate ; was naturally daring, and when
partially intoxicated was ready for any ad
dents, taking advantage of his weaknesses,
made assiduous and persevering efforts to
keep him from the influence of the Gospel.
Even in the place of worship, means were
used to divert his thoughts ; and to prevent
his attendance on preaching, he was more
than once artfully seduced into intoxication,
against his own deliberate resolutions.
While some foreigners thus endeavored to
seduce the king, and many complained that
the preaching, which was regularly main-
tained, was too severe against sin and sin-
ners, others approved the preaching and sus-
tained the preachers. Chiefly at the ex-
pense of foreign residents, a grass house of
worship was erected at Honolulu, in 1821.
54 feet by 22, and calculated to hold 200
hearers. On the 15th of September, it was
publicly dedicated to the service of God.
The missionaries were much encouraged
and aided in their work in 1832, by the visit
of Messrs. Tyerman and Bennet, who had
been sent by the London Missionary Soci-
ety to visit their missions in the Pacific,
They came with Captain Kent, who had in
charge a small schooner as a present from
the king of Great Britain to the king of the
Sandwich Islands, and their testimony in
favor of the missionaries, as well as the tes-
timony of natives of the Society Islands
who were with them, as to the happy results
of missionary labor in those islands, was of
great service. It was specially of service,
and providentially timely, from the fact that
foreigners, among other eflbrts to prevent
the success of the missionaries, and, if possi-
ble, to secure their banishment, had en-
deavored to persuade the king and chiefs
that the English government would be dis-
pleased if they tolerated the residence of
American teachers. Here now were men
from England, coming at the same time with
the ship which Vancouver had long before
encouraged Kamehameha to look for as a
present from the king of England, strongly
commending the missionaries to the confi-
dence of the king, and urging attention to
their instructions. The falsehood and base-
ness of the opposers was made clear. The
commander of a Russian exploring squadron
had previously, in Dec 1821, heartily com-
mended the missionaries, sending from him-
self and his officers a generous donation to
aid them in their work.
In August, 1822, the first Christian mar-
riage, that of Thomas Hopu, took place at
the islands ; and in October, 1823, two chiefs
of high rank, at their own request, were
publicly, at the house of God, on the Sab-
bath, " like the people of Jesus Christ, joined
together as man and wife." The first Chris-
tian burial was that of a son of Mr, Bing-
ham, Jan, 19th, 1823. The services were
attended by the king and his principal chiefs.
venture ; and a portion of the foreign resi- A few days after, a relative of Liholilio,
654
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
whom he called sister, died at Honolulu, and
at his request her funeral was conducted
with similar Christian services. In Febru-
ary of this year, the chiefs held a consulta-
tion respecting the Christian Sabbath, and a
crier was sent around at Honolulu, proclaim-
ing; a law enjoining its observance.
I^Iay 3i, 1823, a station was taken at La-
haina. on the islaJid of Maui, at the request
of Keopuolani, the mother of the king, and
the highest chief of the islands, who was
going to that place to reside. "She inter-
ested herself as a mother in seeing the mis-
sionaries comfortabl}^ located," and exerted
her great influence to induce the people to
respect them, and listen to their instructions.
A house of worship " of ordinary structure
and frail material" was soon erected there,
and dedicated on the 24th of August ; and
in Dec, a house was dedicated also at Kai-
lua, where labors had now been resumed.
Keopuolani was the first native baptized at
the Islands. She lived but a few months
after the station was taken at Lahaina, in
which she felt so deep an interest. Previ-
ous to her last sickness, she had given evi-
dence of conversion ; during that sickness
the evidence constantly brightened, and at
her request she received baptism a short
time before her death, which occurred on
the IGth of September. She had given strict
injunctions that no heathen customs should
follow her death or attend her funeral, and
her injunctions were in good measure regard-
ed ; though, but a short time before, the
death of such a chief would have been fol-
lowed, not only by horrid rites, but by a
scene of universal licentiousness and pillage.
It was expected now. !Many natives fled to
the mountains, and foreigners prepared to
take refuge on board the ships, advising the
missionaries to do the same. "But not a
human victim was slaughtered ; not a hamlet
was burned, not a house was pillaged." Thus
had the mother of the king given her testi-
mony and the influence of her example, in
life and in death, in favor of the missionary
work, and thus was it made apparent that
already much good had been accomplislied.
Regency of Kaahumanu. — On the 27th of
November, 1823, the king embarked for
England, prompted, probabl}^, more by curi-
osity and a restless, roving disposition, than
by any better motive. He was accompanied
by his favorite wife, several chiefs, and a
Frenchman named John Rives. They reach-
ed London in May, 1824, received some at-
tention from statesmen, and visited places
of amusement, but saw little of religious
society. Within a few weeks, the king and
queen were both attacked with measles, and
both died in July.
Before sailing, Liholiho had nominated his
young brother as his successor, in case he
should not return, and left the government
in the hands of Kaahumanu, the favorite
wife of the conqueror Kamehameha, and by
his appointment the prime minister of Liho-
liho. Kaahumanu was a woman of much
energy, decision, and strength of character;
and though haughty and disdainful, and
sometimes tj'rannical and cruel, was in
many respects well fitted for the emergency
in which she was placed. Iler prime minis-
ter, not associate regent, was Kalanimoku.
At this time she stood entirely aloof from
religious influence, and looked down upon
the missionaries with contempt; but she
soon gave evidence of a great change of char-
acter, and in December, 1825, she became a
member of the church, with several other
persons of rank. Six months before, she,
with others, had made a public declaration
of faith in Christ and desire to join his peo-
ple. From the time of her hopeful conver-
sion, this remarkable woman became warm
in her attachment to the missionaries ; and
in the administration of the government she
manifested a strong desire to promote the
good of the people. In a female prayer-
meeting at Honolulu, she expressed her feel-
ings with earnestness and tears. Nor was
she content to speak alone. While giving
strict attention to all the affairs of govern-
ment, she began at once the work of " visit-
ing every island of the group, and almost
every village of each island ; encouraging
schools, introducing improvements, and ex-
horting the people to forsake their many
vices, and cleave to the pure religion which
had been brought to their shores." The
effect was very great. Not the king, indeed,
but the regent, had turned. Liholiho had
issued his proclamation against various crimes
and vices, and in favor of the Sabbath, with
little effect comparatively, for his example
did not show him to be sincere. Kaahumanu
gave to her proclamations and instructions
tlie force of her own consistent example, and
made it evident that she was deeply in ear-
nest. A great change among the people was
the immediate result, at least in outward de-
portment, and the way was in some measure
prepared for a true reformation of character.
The regent was not alone among the chiefs
in such efforts to do good. Several others,
of nmch influence, were already, hopefully,
true Christians, and still others gave their
support to the labors of the mission. In-
deed, as early as April, 1824, just as the
printing of 3,000 copies of elementary les- ^
sons in reading and spelling was finished, the
principal chiefs had called a meeting of the
people of Oahu, to proclaim, in a formal
manner, their united resolution to receive
instruction themselves, to observe the Sab-
bath, worship God, and obey his law, and
to promote time knowledge among the peo-
ple. After a public examination of the
schools, Kaahumanu eeloctcd some of the
SANDAVICH ISLANDS.
655
most forward of the pupils to teach in other
districts, and before the end of the year
1824, 50 natives were thus employed as
teachers, and at least 2,000 persons were said
to have learned to read ; but both the teach-
ing and the learning were, of course, in most
cases, of a very imperfect kind. This was
the commencement of a kind of native
school system which rapidly extended it-
self, and continued in operation without very
much change, for eight or ten years. Na-
tive houses were built for the purpose by
direction of the chiefs, and large numbers
of the people, a great majority being adults,
were collected in what were called schools,
and taught to read, and in many instances
to write their own language, by native teach-
ers who themselves knew, in most instances,
" this much, no more." But defective as
these schools were, they were much better
than nothing, and they were all that could
then be had. In 1831 there were reported
1100 schools, with near 53,000 learners, at
least one-third of whom could read with a
good degree of ease, many could write, and
a few had some knowledge of arithmetic.
Kapiolani. — Mention should here be made
of another "honorable woman" — Kapiolani,
of the island of Hawaii. A woman of high
rank and of great influence, she united with
the church about the same time with Kaa-
humanu, and, like her, made it her great busi-
ness to induce the people to attend to the
instructions of the missionaries. Like her.
she made frequent extensive tours among the
people, exhorting them to forsake their sins,
and destroying every vestige of idolatry.
She became, also, a pattern to the people in
civilization. " She built a large framed
house, enclosed a yard, and cultivated flow-
ers, and in her dress, manners, and mode of
living appeared more like a Christian lady
than any other high-born native of her day."
In December, 1824, that she might more
efiectually destroy from among the people
any remaining fear of old divinities, she de-
termined to visit the great crater of Kilaua,
the reputed residence of Pele. The whole
mountain was a dreaded place. Its fire and
smoke, its frequent mutterings, and occa-
sional desolating eruptions, served to keep
alive the superstitious dread. Clinging even
to the feet of their chief, the people besought
her, with tears, not to go. Before reaching
the crater, she was met by a pretended
priestess, wild with rage, who warned her
to desist. But her purpose was fixed.
With calm dignity rebuking the pretensions
of the prophetess, she had her soon hum-
bled and calm, saying that the god had left
her, and she could not answer. Accomj^a-
nied by one of the missionaries, and by some
trembling native attendants, she descended
into the crater, and standing upon a ledge
500 feet below the top, with the lake of mol-
ten fire before her, she cast stones into the
fiery gulf, ate the sacred berries consecrated
to Pele, and called upon one of her attend-
ants to offer prayer and praise to the one
true God. The rock did not open under her
feet ; the hissing and bellowing gases did
not destroy her, and the boiling lava did not
rise to consume her. The people felt that
Pele was powerless, and Jehovah was .God.
Visit of the British frigate Blonde^ Lord
Byron. — While the influence of honored
chiefs, whose hearts God had touched, was
thus doing much to turn the tide of feeling
in favor of Christianity, another event oc-
curred, of much importance, tending to the
same result. The frigate Blonde, command-
ed by Lord Byron, which had been sent from
England Avith the remains of Liholiho and
the queen, and with the few survivors of the
natives who had attended them, reached
Honolulu on the 7th of May, 1824. At first
there was a burst of tumultuous feeling, but
the strength of heathenism was broken, and
Christian services took the place of cruel
pagan rites. In the evening, the crowd at-
tended at the chapel, to engage in religious
services. At the close of the meeting, Baki,
the chief of highest rank who had returned
from England, made some report of what he
had seen in a Christian country : of the in-
fluence of the Christian religion, as he sup-
posed, in giving so much wealth and power,
and of what the king of England had said,
urging that the people should attend to the
instructions of the missionaries. Lord By-
ron, during his stay of two months at the
islands, showed himself the decided friend
of the mission, thus adding the weight of his
influence to increase the favor with which
the Gospel and the American teachers were
beginning now to be received. On the 6th
of June a council of the chiefs was held,
to fix the succession in a formal manner.
Lord Byron attended, and aided by his ad-
vice. Everything was conducted in an ami-
cable and Christian manner, the rightful
claims of Kamikcaouli, the young brother of
Liholiho, about nine years of age, were fully
admitted, and it was resolved to acknow-
ledge and sustain him. Kaahumanu was
still to act as regent during his j^outh, and
he was to be put, for a time, under the in-
struction of the missionaries. It was gen-
erally felt by the chiefs and the people that
here was a triumph of the Gospel of peace,
since, had it not been for the influence of the
Gospel, that mere boy could never have been
king.
Various circumstances thus combined to
give strength to the religious influence of the
regent. The Spirit of God, which had
changed the hearts of chiefs, was present
also with the people, and some from time to
time gave pleasing evidence of a saving
change. The mission having been reinforced,
656
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
more stations had been taken ; more houses
of worship were erected, and large numbers
attended upon preaching, while schools of
some sort, were established at almost every
village throughout the group of islands.
" Tlimgs as they were in the days of Kaa-
humanu," has long been a phrase well under-
stood at the islands.
Opposition from foreigners — Whale Ship
Daniel. — But all was not bright. "Well
would it have been if all foreign vessels had
exerted as good an influence as the Blonde
and her commander. But the commanders
and the crews of merchant vessels, and
sometimes also of vessels belonging to the
navies of the United States and of Great
Britain, as well as of France, have disgraced
themselves, while they have thrown the
most serious obstacles in the way of mis-
sionary effort at these as well as at other is-
lands. On the 3d of Oct. 1825, the English
whale ship Daniel, Capt. Buckle, came to
anchor at Lahaina. The crew soon found
that a change had taken place since their
former visit to the islands. A law of the
chiefs had gone into operation, forbidding
females to visit ships for immoral purposes ;
and instead of the throng of native females
which they had expected to see, not one ap-
proached the vessel. Suspecting the cause,
they cursed the missionaries, and clenching
their fists, declared that they would have re-
venge ; and in spite of missionaries, and
chiefs, and laws, they would have the liber-
ties of former years. On the evening of the
5th some of the crew came to the house of
Mr. Richards, the missionary, insisting that
he should exert his influence to have the
law repealed, and threatening destruction to
his property, his life, and his family if he re-
fused. He firmly told them that he would
die rather than give any countenance to such
vile demands, and his wife, in feeble health,
and with her helpless little children around
her, assured them of her readiness to share
the fate of her husband in such a cause. The
men at last withdrew, and the house was
guarded through the night by natives. The
next day Mr. Richards wrote to the com-
manders of some American vessels, who
took no notice of his letter. He wrote also
to Capt. Buckle, asking him to control his
men, but he replied that the men were all on
shore r"!etermined not to return without wo-
men, and Mr. Richards had better give his
consent, when all would be quiet. On the
next day the men again landed, and, having
a black flag and armed with knives, they
presented themselves before the mission-
house to the number of about forty, de-
manding, with oaths and execrations, that
Mr. Richards should not resist their purpose.
The chiefs, who had exercised all forbear-
ance, and had at first sent natives armed
only with clubs to defend the mission family,
satisfied that milder measures would iiot
answer, at length called out a company of
two hundred men armed with muskets and
spears. The mob was compelled to retire,
the law was sustained, and quiet restored.
From Lahaina the ship went to Honolulu,
where, aided by American sailors, the crew
engaged in similar outrages.
Schooner Dolphin. — The crews of whale
ships were not to be left alone in the unen-
viable notoriety secured by such proceed-
ings. The armed schooner Dolphin, of the
United States navy, Lieutenant Percival
commander, came to Honolulu Jan. 14th,
1826, when the law against females visiting
ships had been in operation about three
months. The ten commandments also had
been translated and printed in the Hawaiian
language, and the chiefs had adopted them
as a basis of law and government. The mis-
sionaries had been instructed, as are all mis-
sionaries of the Board, to abstain from inter-
meddling with the affairs of civil govern-
ment, that they might give rulers no occa-
sion for jealousy, and unreasonable men no
grounds for finding fault, and they had so
abstained. It was obvious however that the
religious instruction which they had im-
parted had given the chiefs new views of
right and duty, and had in this way led to
the enacting of such laws ; and foreigners
who did themselves intermeddle, in the most
objectionable way, accused the missionaries
of intermeddling and dictating laws, which
were to them offensive. Even the English
and American consuls violently opposed some
of the new laws, recommending a code
which should prohibit nothing but murder,
treason and theft. They even went to the
young king and told him that the regent and
chiefs had no right to make laws, but that
the right belonged to him alone. When the
Dolphin arrived, her commander at once
manifested his sympathy for those who were
thus endeavoring to prevent improvement in
the morals of the people, and in the laws ;
at least any improvement which should in-
terfere with their vices. He expressed his
disapprobation of the law which kept females
from going to the ships for purposes of in-
famy, and insisted upon the release of four
prostitutes then in custody for a violation of
the law. Imputing its existence to the in-
fluence of the missionaries, he threatened
violence against their houses and their per-
sons if it were not repealed. The chiefs be-
came alarmed, and repeatedly inquired of the
missionaries what would be the duty of the
people in case such threats were put in exe-
cution. They were assured that the com-
mander would not venture to injure them, as
he was responsible to the United States
Government, and when they still pressed the
inquiry, " What shall we do in case your
houses are attacked ?" they were exhorted
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
657
in no case to resort to violence in their de-
fence. On the afternoon of the Sabbath,
Feb. 26, when Mr. Bingham and several of
the chiefs were collected for religious worship
around the sick bed of the minister, Kalan-
imoku, six or seven sailors from the Dolphin,
armed with knives and clubs, entered the
room and demanded the repeal of the law,
threatening to tear down the house if it were
not repealed. After a scene of confusion,
during which they broke all the windows in
the front of the house, they were con-
strained to retire, when they directed their
course towards the house of Mr. Bingham.
The missionary, alarmed for his family, at-
tempted to reach his house before them by
another way, but fell into their hands and
very narrowly escaped with his life, rescued
by the natives. The same evening, Lieut.
Percival, instead of restraining his crew, or
apologizing for the outrage, called on the
chiefs, and declared that the prohibition
should come off ; that he was determined not
to leave the islands till the law was repealed.
Kalanimoku was confined by sickness, some
of the chiefs yielded to fear, and a 'conni-
vance at a breach of the law was the result.
" In the dusk of the evening of the next day,
a boat with females passed along the harbor,
and a shout arose among the shipping at the
glorious victoiy that had been achieved."
The Dolphin remained at the islands about
four months, and lef*' a most disastrous in-
fluence behind, when at last, she sailed. The
law was broken down for a time ; the flood-
gates of vice were opened ; and irreligion
and immorality had gained strength and
boldness which could not be overcome at
once. Similar scenes of violence and out-
rage were enacted by the crews of English
and American whale ships at Lahaina in
Oct. 1826, A mob of such sailors went to
the house of Mr. Richards with the declared
intention of taking his life. He was not at
home, and his house was guarded by the na-
tives ; but for some days they filled the place
with violence, pillaging the tents of the na-
tives and destroying their property. Here,
however, females were not obtained. The
Governor was absent, and the place was in
the charge of a female chief, who directed
the women to flee with her to the mountains,
which they did ; all the females from a town
of 4,000 native inhabitants, fleeing from the
violence and lust of sailors from Christian
lands ! Such are the sailors, and such the
foreign residents at the Sandwich Islands,
by whom so many basely false and slander-
ous reports against the missionaries have
been put in circulation.
United States Sloop of War Peacock —
Vindication of the Missionaries. — We gladly
turn from such scenes to look at the honor-
able conduct of a more honorable commander
in the navy of our country. Within the
42
same month in which these scenes were en-
acted at Lahaina, the United States sloop of
war Peacock, Capt. T. H. 0. Jones, arrived
at Honolulu, where it remained till January
1827. Hsaring of the proceedings of Lieut.
Percival, and hearing also the many slander-
ous reports against the missionaries, Capt.
Jones kept himself uncommitted, until be
should be able to judge from a knowledge
of the facts. About this time the mission-
aries published a circular, stating the course
they had pursued, and some of the good re-
sults of their labors, denying the charges
brought against them, and challenging inves-
tigation. Opposing foreign residents, laying
hold of the word '•' challenge," called a
meeting at which Capt. Jones and the other
officers of the Peacock were to be present,
and a hearing was to be had. Without de-
tailing the proceedings of the meeting, we
quote Capt. Jones' own opinion of the case
as he subsequently gave it to the public : —
" I own, I trembled for the cause of Chris-
tianity, and for the poor benighted islanders,
when I saw, on the one hand the British
Consul backed by the most wealthy and
hitherto influential residents and ship-
masters in formidable array, and prepared as
I supposed, to testify against some half a
dozen meek and humble servants of the
Lord, calmly seated on the other, ready and
anxious to be tried by their bitterest ene-
mies, who on this occasion occupied the
quadruple station of judge, jury, witness,
and prosecutor. Thus situated, what could
the friends of the mission hope for or ex-
pect ? But what, in reality, was the result
of this portentous meeting, which was to
overthrow the mission, and uproot the seeds
of civilization and Christianity so extensively
and prosperously sown by them in every di-
rection, while in their stead, heathenism and
idolatry were to ride triumphantly through
all coming time 1 Such was the object, and
such were the hopes of many of the foreign
residents at the Sandwich Islands in 1826.
What, I again ask, was the result of this
great trial ? The most perfect, full, complete,
and triumphant victory for the missionaries
that could have been asked by their most de-
voted friends. Not one jot or tittle — not one
iota derogatory to their character as men,
as ministers of the Gospel of the strictest
order, or as missionaries — could be made to
appear by the united eflTorts of all conspired
against them."
Further Outrages. — In Oct., 1827, the
crew of the English whale ship John Palmer,
Capt. Clark, at Lahaina, enticed several base
women on board. Iloapili, the Governor of
the island, demanded that they should be
given up, but the Captain evaded and ridi-
culed the demand, and when the Governor
detained him on shore insisting that it should
be complied with, he sent directions to his
658
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
crew to fire upon the town if he should not
be released within an hour. He soon
promised however that the women should be
sent on shore if the Governor would release
him. and he was released accordingl)', but be-
fore the crew had learned this fact they dis-
charged five cannon balls, all in the direc-
tion of Mr. Richard's house. The next day
the Captain sailed for Honolulu, basely dis-
regarding his promise to send the women on
shore. At that time Capt. Buckle, of the
Daniel, was again at Honolulu. The report
of his conduct at Lahaina two years before
had been sent to the United States and ex-
tensively published, and the published ac-
count had just returned to the islands.
The excitement was intense. There were
other captains and crews, and there were
foreign residents at Honolulu, with the
British Consul at their head, who sympa-
thized with Capt. B. Deeds which hereto-
fore they had supposed they could commit
at these for off islands in darkness, were
being brought to the light. The pririlege of
wallowing in all pollution there, and return-
ing with untarnished reputations to their
homes, they were likely to lose. Complaints
were bitter and threatenings were loud.
Some who had before sustained the mission-
aries now thought Mr. Richards had done
wrong in reporting the outrage. Even Boki
and John Young took this ground. Kaahu-
raanu was for a time perplexed and troubled.
She sent for the principal chiefs at Lahaina,
and Mr. Richards, to repair to Honolulu, and
called a Council to consider whether it would
be right to give up Mr. Richards to the for-
eigners, or whether it was their duty to pro-
tect him. Before any decision was reached,
meeting a shrewd man of the common peo-
ple in whom she had confidence. David Malo,
Kaahumanu asked him, '• What can we do
tend to be themselves exempt from all obli-
gation to obey the laws, and threaten the
chiefs with the vengeance of their respective
governments if they should be punished for
violating them. The government was how-
ever gradually gaining strength and confi-
dence, and in 1829 a proclamation was is-
sued declaring that the laws of the country
forbade murder, theft, licentiousness, retail-
ing ardent spirits. Sabbath-breaking and gam-
bling ; and that these laws were in force
equally against all residents at the islands,
both foreign and native. On the 14th of
October, just one week after this proclama-
tion was issued, the American sloop of war
Vincennes arrived at Honolulu. Her com-
mander, Capt. Finch, brought presents, and
a letter to the king from the President of
the United States. That letter, after con-
gratulating the king on the progress of civil-
ization and religion in his dominions, and re-
commending " earnest attention to the true
religion of the Christir.n's Bible," proceeded
to say : " The President alflo anxiously hopes
that peace, and kindness, and justice will
prevail between your people and those citi-
zens of the United States who visit your is-
land, and that the regulations of your gov-
vemment will be such as to enforce them
upon all. Our citizens who violate your
laws, or interfere with your regulations,
violate at the same time their duty to their
own government and country, and merit cen-
sure and punishment." The letter also ex-
pressed entire confidence in the missionaries,
and bespoke protection and favor for them
and for other American citizens who con-
ducted with propriety. Nothing could have
been more opportune. A kind Providence
had sent this decided sanction by a foreign
power of the course they were pursuing just
at the time when it was most needed to
for our teacher 1 for even Mr. Yoimg and i strengthen the hands of the chiefs.
Boki say he was very guilty in writing to j Papal Missionaries^French Outrages.—
America." After a few remarks, David ' It has been mentioned that John Rives, a
asked, " In what country is it the practice I French adventurer, left the Islands with
to condemn the man who gives true inform- ! Liholiho when he went to England. From
ation of crimes committed, and let the crim- 1 England, Rives went to France; and pretend-
inal go uncensured and unpunished ?" " No ! ing to be the o^>-ner of large estates at the
where." she replied, and her resolution and j Island, and to have great influence with the
that of the chiefs was soon taken. Mr. j king, he applied for priests to establish a
Richards had done no wrong ; he had told
only what they all knew to be true, and they
would protect him. The British Consul and
his party saw that they were defeated, and
when Mr. Richards was sent for to meet
them before the Council they hastily with-
drew.
Letter from tlw. President nf the United
Catholic mission. In^ 1820, John Alexius
Augustine Bachelot was appointed, by the
Pope, Apostolic Prefect of the Sandwich
Islands. He arrived at Honolulu, July 7,
1827, with two other Romish priests and
four laymen. Disregarding the law which
required foreigners to obtain permission be-
fore landing, the priests and thclv comimny
were
.%a<e.f.— iJefore turning entirdy from this | landed privately. They were ordered to
kind of foreign opposition, allusion must be leave, and the captain of the vessel was told
made to some other facts. ' Every effort was ! that as he had landed foreigners without per-
raadc to prevent the enacting and the en- ; mission, he must take them away. He, how-
forcemcnt of wholesome laws. Especially ; ever, took his departure, leaving them on
did many foreign residents and visitors pre- 1 shore, where they never obtamed permission
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
659
to reside, but remained in disregard of law.
Boki, governor of Oahu, was disposed to
court the favor of foreigners, and was, as
early as this, manifesting some disposition
to resist, or at least disregard the authority
of the Regent. The priests immediately con-
nected themselves particularly with his party,
but even he never gave them permission to
remain, which, indeed, he had no authority
to do. They soon opened a chapel, and it
was at once reported that they worshiped
images. The young king went to see for
himself, and, as he thought, found the report
correct. The chiefs feared their old religion,
which they knew to be bad in all its tendency,
was about to be revived. English captains
told them of the influence of the Papal reli-
gion and Papal priests in Europe, and pre-
dicted that they would work evil there if
they were suffered to remain. They and
their adherents continued to identify them-
selves with the party of Boki, whose career
was one of intemperance, prodigality, and at
last rebellion. Collecting armed men and
ammunition in different places, he threatened
the life of the Regent and a revolution in
the government. Fortunately, in December,
1839, he embarked on a wild expedition in
search of sandal wood, and was lost at sea ;
but his wife Liliha, whom he had left as
governor of Oahu, continued to head the
disorderly party until in 1831, when a con-
spiracy seemed fast ripening, and she was de-
posed from her ofiice. In the mean time,
there was much trouble with the Papists.
The priests countenanced and encouraged, in
their adherents, various violations of the
laws, until the natives were forbidden to
attend their services, and some were punished
for doing so. At length, in April, 1831, the
chiefs passed a formal order, requiring these
priests, whom they regarded as abettors of
rebellion and promoters of vice and distur-
bance, and who were residing there without
authority, to leave the islands. They had
borne with them almost four years, and could
bear no longer. The priests, however, re-
sorted to various expedients to evade obe-
dience to the order, and in December the
government fitted out one of its own vessels
and sent them to California, with orders to
the captain to "land them safe on shore,
with every thing belonging to them, where
they might subsist." The banishment of
these priests, as well as preceding and sub-
sequent proceedings against the Catholics,
has often been attributed to the agency of
the American missionaries ; but both the
missionaries themselves and the Sandwich
Islands government have always denied the
charge, and there is ample evidence that the
missionaries have decidedly discountenanced
any thing which could be regarded as inter-
fering with religious liberty.
In September, 1836, another Papal priest
' came to the Islands. He was forbidden to
remain ; but aided by the English Consul,
who claimed a residence for him as a British
subject, he evaded repeated orders to leave.
In March, 1837, two of the banished priests,
M. Bachelot and Mr. Short, returned from
California. They designed to land secretly
and conceal themselves for a time ; but they
were recognized and ordered to return on
board the vessel. Refusing obedience, after
much delay they were put on board by the
police, where they remained, in the harbor.
On the 8th of July, a British, and on the
10th, a French ship of war came into port.
The captains of these vessels interfering, an
arrangement was made by which the priests
were to be allowed to remain on shore until
they should have opportunity to go to some
other civilized country ; but in the mean time
they were not to be allowed to proselyte. On
the 24th of July, the French captain negotia-
ted a treaty with the king, in which it was
stipulated that the French should "go and
come freely" at the Islands, "and enjoy the
same advantages which subjects of the most
favored nation enjoy." Th'S, of course, did
not secure the right of teaching a prohibited
religion. In October, Mr. Short left the is-
lands, and in November, M, Bachelot also
left, with another priest who had recently
arrived, and had been refused permission to
remain. On the 18th December, the govern-
ment issued an ordinance forbidding the
teaching '' of the Pope's religion," and an-
nouncing that no teacher of that religion
would be allowed to reside at the islands.
Some persecution of Romanists followed ;
but in June, 1829, under the influence of Mr.
Richards, who, at their earnest request, had
become the political teacher of the king and
chiefs, the king issued orders that no further
punishments should be inflicted upon ad-
herents of the Romish faith.
About three weeks after this order was
given, on the 9th of July, the French frigate
L'Artemise, Capt. Laplace, came to Honolulu.
A full account of the proceedings which fol-
lowed cannot be given here. The captain
immediately issued a manifesto, stating that
he had been sent out to put an end to the
ill-treatment which the French had received
at the islands, and demanding, among other
things, "that the Catholic worship should
be declared free ;" "that a site for a Catholic
Church should be given by the Government
at Honolulu," and that $20,000 should be
deposited with him, by the king, as a guaran-
tee of his future conduct towards France.
These " equitable conditions " must be com-
plied with, and the treaty which accompanied
the manifesto must be signed at once, or he
should make immediate war upon the islands.
Offering protection, in case of hostilities, to
English and American residents, he expressly
excepted the "Protestant clergy." As the
660
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
king was absent, he consented to wait for
his 'return until the 15th, before commencing
hostilities. The king not returning, the
$20,000 was sent on board by the governor
of Oahu, on the 13th, and the treaty was
6i"-ned by the governor and the Premier.
On the i6th, the king returned, and was
compelled, almost at once, to sign it himself
The most offensive articles were the fourth
and sixth: the fourth providing that no
Frenchman accused of crime should bo tried
except by a jury composed of foreign resi-
dents proposed by the French Consul ; and
the Gth declaring that French merchandize.
" and particularly wines and brandy," cannot
be prohibited, and shall not pay a duty higher
than five per cent., ad valorum. A law had
just before been enacted to promote tem-
perance, which excluded distilled spirits and
imposed a heavy duty on wines. This was
now effectually repealed ; the French Consul
at once em^aged largebj in the sale of intoxi-
cating drinks^ and intemperance rapidly in-
creased. Of course, numbers of Papal priests
soon arrived, and located themselves on dif-
ferent islands of the group. It was not,
however, to the advantage of Romanism
that it was thus forced upon the people, and
that in connection with brandy. Tlie same
word in the native language, says Mr. Hunt,
now means a Frenchman, a Papist, and
brandy. The priests have continued their
efforts to the present time with varying suc-
cess, sometimes interfering seriously with the
efforts of the Protestant missionaries and of
the government for the elevation of the peo-
ple, especially opposing the school laws, and
interfering with efforts to promote general
education ; but by no means gaining the con-
fidence of the better and more intelligent
classes of the community. For several years
their influence does not seem to have been
increasing, but rather diminishing. In 1852,
of i'M'j comTnon schools, supported by the
government. 92 were Papal, with 2,174 pupils.
In SeptemV)er, 1842. the French sloop of
war Emhuscade visited Ilonoluhi, the captain
making most arrogant demands, designed to
secure the more free use of French intoxi-
cating liquors, and still greater facilities for
propagating the Papal faitli. J*rovidentially,
the king had recently sent a delegation to
the court of France, to adjust all diliiculties,
so that he could with good reason decline
negotiations with the commander, and that
without giving him a pretext for offering
violence. In 184'), treaties were negotiated
both with England and France, by which the
government of the islands was allowed to
impose any duties on wines and spirituous
li<lin)i-s wiiicli sliould not be so high as "' ab-
Bohilely to prohibit" their introduction. A
duty of live dollars a gallon was imposed,
against which the French Consul protested.
In August, 184'J, Admiral Tromelin came to
Honolulu, and misled, as is believed, by M.
Dillon, who had been there as Consul since
February, 1848, made demands upon the
government utterly unreasonable and unjust,
having reference in great measure, as usual,
to French spirits and the Romanists. As
these demands were not complied with, ho
took possession of the fort, the custom
house and the government offices by an
armed force, seized the king's yacht, which
he sent away as a prize, dismantled the fort,
and destroyed the arms, powder, &c. The
government abstained from all forcible re-
sistance ; but the representatives of Great
Britain and of the United States made a
formal protest against the ungenerous pro-
ceeding. To complete the series of such
outrages on the part of the French, in De-
cember, 1850, M. Perrin came to Honolulu
as Commissioner of tlic French Republic,
presenting demands, which were mostlj'' a
reiteration of those made the year before,
and prepared, it is supposed, again to use
force. But in the kind providence of God, —
not by any previous arrangement or direction
from home, — tlie United States ship Vandalia,
Captain Gardner, came into port at the most
critical point of the negotiation, and the im-
pression that this vessel would resist any acts
of violence if appealed to by the native go-
vernment doubtless led the commissioner to
moderate his demands, and the islands were
saved, perhaps, from such a French protector-
ate as has been forced upon some other is-
lands in the Pacific Ocean.
Having thus presented a connected view
of difficulties thrown in the way of the
Christianization of the islands by unprinci-
pled foreigners, of the forced introduction
of ]{oinan Catholics, and the aggressions of
the French, it is time to return to the days
of Kaalmmanu, and consider more directly
the progress and results of the missionary
work.
Results of the first ten years of missionary
labor. — A few brief statements in regard to
the state of the mission, and results which
iiad been already reached in 1830, will show
that the first ten years of labor by the
American missionaries had accomplished
verv nuich. over which they, and all friends
of their work, might well rejoice. Not only
had the language of the islands been reduced
to writing, but two printing-presses were in
oi)eration at Honolulu, at which 387,000 cop-
ies in all, of twenty-two distinct books in
the native ton'.rue, had been printed, amount-
ing to 10,287,800 pages. A large edition
of the Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and John,
had also been printed in the United States
for the mission, swelling the whole nuniber of
pages in the Hawaiian language to 13,032.800,
Most of these pages were portions of the
Scriptures, or other strictly evangelical and
most important matter. Nine hundred na-
SANDWICH ISLANDS,
661
tive schools, for teaching the people to read,
were in operation, and about 45,000 scholars,
about 21.000 readers, and more than 3,000
writers, were reported. The government
had adopted the moral law of God as the
basis of its future administration, and recog-
nized the Christian religion as the religion
of the nation. Most of the higher chiefs
and rulers were members of the church of
Christ. Special laws against the grosser
vices, and also against retailing ardent spirits,
Sabbath breaking, and gambling, had been
enacted and were enforced, and the Christian
law of marriage was the law of the land.
Decent houses for public worship had been
erected by the chiefs and people in very many
villages. Those at the several mission stations
were large : one at Kailua, 180 feet by 78,
and one at Honolulu, 196 by 63. At Lahaina,
the church was of stone, 98 feet long and 62
broad, with galleries ; "the most substantial
and noble structure in Polynesia." It would
seat 3000 persons after the native manner.
The other churches were all thatched build-
higs. In these houses large congregations
assembled from Sabbath to Sabbath, or
when the missionary could attend, to listen
to the preaching of the Gospel. Churches
had been gathered at different stations, to
which there had been admitted 185 native
members at the close of the year 1829.
There were now connected with the mis-
sion, 11 ordained missionaries with 3 male
and 16 female associate laborers from the
United States. Six stations were occupied,
three on Hawaii, one on Maui, one on Oahu,
and one on Kauai. A third reinforcement
was about to join the mission.
Death of Kaahumanu. — Reaction against
Religion. — In 1827, the mission mourned the
death of Kalaniraoku, the prime-minister of
Kaahumanu, often spoken of as joint regent
with her, whom foreigners called Pitt, and
whom the natives regarded as the " iron
cable" of their country. He gave satisfac-
tory evidence of preparation for a better
world. On the 5th of June, 1832, Kaahu-
manu also "fell asleep," and " the mission
and nation mourned as for a mother." She
had nominated Kinau or Kaahumanu II., a
pious daughter of Kamehameha I., to be her
successor, as regent, and had given affection-
ate and earnest parting counsels to the
young king. For a time sad reverses fol-
lowed her death. Kinau, though a consistent
Christian, had neither the dignity, the
strength of chai'acter, nor the influence of
Kaahumanu, and the king, inclined to dissi-
pation and led on by vicious foreigners,
broke over all restraints. Others followed
his example. Many schools were deserted ;
teachers relapsed into vice ; congregations
on the Sabbath were reduced ; some
churches were burned ; in a few places hea-
then rites were revived, and opposing
foreigners predicted that the missionaries
would soon be banished. Early in 1833, the
king assembled the chiefs and people at Hon-
olulu, and declared the regency at an end. It
had been said that he would remove Kinau
from all authority, and appoint Liliha, the
unprincipled wife of Boki, as his premier.
This was hoped for and expected by the dis-
solute, but when the time came he slirunk
from such a step and named Kinau. When
asked by his companions why he had not
done as he intended, his significant reply
was, " Very strong is the kingdom of God."
The reverse had long been expected by the
missionaries, for religion had been too pop-
ular, and sustained too much by the in-
fluence of the chiefs ; but the crisis was al-
ready passed when the king named Kinau
as his principal agent, and the reaction in
favor of vice and idolatry was but temporary
and more apparent than real.
Progress. — Schools. — Additions continued
to be made to the mission churches from
year to year, and that gi-eat care was exer-
cised in receiving members must be obvious
from the fact, taken in connection with the
character of the people, that in 1835, of the
whole number who had been received from
the beginning (864) only 13 had been ex-
communicated, and that though the year of
reaction had passed.
The character of the first native schools
at the islands has been already spoken of.
The missionaries soon felt the great import-
ance of raising the qualifications of teachers,
and as early as 1830 commenced schools in
various places for this purpose, which were
instructed by themselves, or by females from
the United States. In 1831, a seminary was
commenced at Lahainaluua (Upper Lahaina)
for the education of teachers and other
helpers in the missionary work. The school
was first opened in a mere shed made of
poles and grass, but under the direction of
the teacher, Mr. Andrews, the scholars, most
of whom were adults, soon began the ei'ec-
tion of a stone house, which was covered
with a thatched roof in 1832. The school
prospered, and its importance became more
and more obvious. Another teacher was as-
sociated with Mr. Andrews in 1834, and
about the same time a large permanent
building was commenced. In 1836 the
school became more distinctively a boarding
school for unmarried lads, and it has now,
for many years, been regarded as one of the
most important of the means in operation
for suppl^nug the Sandwich Islands with
educated teachers and an educated native
ministry, " sending out streams of the best
influence to every part of the nation." In
1849, the support of this seminary was as-
sumed by the government of the islands.
A female seminary was commenced at
WailukUj on Maui, in 1837, and a boarding
662
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
school for boys, at Ililo, on Hawaii, in 1839,
for both of which commodious buildings have
been erected. Quite a number of other
boarding and high schools of similar charac-
ter, some for boys and some for girls, have
been in operation at the islands, accomplish-
ing much good. In 1839, a family school for
j^oung chiefs was opened at Honolulu, which
has been attended with much success. The
expenses of this institution have been paid
by the government for the last ten years. A
school for the education of the children of
the missionaries was conimenced at Punahau,
on Oahu, in 1841, which has recently re-
ceived a charter from the government as a
collegiate institution. By these various
seminaries and select schools much has been
done to bring forward native teachers, who
are in good measure fitted for their work,
and the character of the schools has greatly
improved. The government of the island
has assumed the support and superintend-
ence of the common schools. In 1840, laws
were enacted requiring parents to send their
children to school, and providing for the
erection of school houses, and the support of
native teachers. These laws have since been
revised, and increased efficiency has been
given to the school system. In 1846, Mr.
Richards was appointed minister of public
instruction, and after his death, Mr. Arm-
strong, who had been long connected with
the mission, was induced, by the earnest so-
licitation of the government, to take the
same office. In no country probably are the
children more imiversally collected into
schools. The government expends near
$50,000 annually for purposes of education ;
of which between S^5,000 and !$30,000 is
for the support of common schools.
Tlie Press — Churches — Great Revival. —
The first newspaper ever issued at the is-
lands was printed in February, 1834, at the
Lahainuluna Seminary, " the Ilaicaiian
Luinbiary.'''' This was designed especially
for the members of the seminary, but a
semi-monthly paper designed for general
circuhition, '' llie Ilawaiiua Teacher" was
commenced soon after at Honolulu, and in
1830, 3,000 copies were circulated. In 1847,
five periodicals were published at the islands.
Several printing-presses and a bindery are
now in operation, and most of the workmen
are natives. From the commencement, near
200,000,000 of pages have been i)rinted at
the mission presses. " Besides the Bible
and a hymn-book, no mean library has been
translated and composed, consisting of re-
ligious, scientific and literary books of vari-
ous kinds."
As early as 1836, it began to be manifest
that tlie churches were fully recovering from
the depiv.ssing influence of the reaction
whicli loiluwed the deatli of Kaahumanu.
At most of the stations there were tokens
of the special presence of the Holy Spirit.
In June, 1837, there were 15 churches on the
islands, with 1,049 members in good stand-
ing, and during the remainder of the year
admissions were numerous. The churches
were gaining strength and influence ; there
was increasing preparation of mind among
the people at large to listen to preaching,
and to feel the force of truth, and about the
close of the year it seemed obvious that the
time had come for greater triumphs of the
Gospel than had yet been witnessed. Tho
labors of the missionaries, particularl}- in
the way of preaching, were increased, as in-
creasing feeling among the people called for
more effort, and at the general meeting of
the mission in June, 1848, it was found that
religion had been revived at every station ;
about 5,000 persons giving evidence of truo
conversion, had been added to the churches
since the last meeting, about 2,400 then
stood propounded for admission, and many
others were giving evidence of a change of
heart. The work continued, — a great work
of the Spirit of God, — and during the next
twelve months more than 10,000 persons
were added to the number of the professing
followers of Christ. In June, 1840, there
were 19 churches, with 18,451- members in
regular standing.
To suppose that all those who had been
brought during the progress of this '• great
awakening" to give, for a time, satisfactory
evidence of a saving change, would continue
to give such evidence, would be to expect
fjir more from the ignorant and degraded na-
tives of these islands than is ever realized in
the most enlightened Christian nations. In
most cases the missionaries were very cau-
tious, and candidates for church fellowship
were kept many months on probation. Some
indeed, were probably to|o cautious ; but
some others erred upon the other extreme,
and at some stations theix; began to be ex-
perienced, in 1839, something of the reaction
wliich usually follows hi^h excitement. It
is remarkable, however, that, if we except one
church to which tlie additions were very nu-
merous, it has been found necessary to ex-
clude so few of tlie thousands who were re-
ceived as the fruits of this revival. It is
also remarkable that no year has passed from
that time to this, during which there have
not been large additions to the churches, on
profession ; very few years in which tlio
number thus added has not considerably ex-
ceeded 1,000. Up to June, 1853, the whole
number of those who had been admitte(l to
the churches, on exan\ination, from the origin
of the mission, was 38,544. Of these 1 1.782
had deceased. The number then in regular
standing was 22,230, more than one-fourth
part of the whole population of the islands.
Benevolence.— Yroiw the very connnence-
ment of the mission the chiefs and people
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
663
have been accustomed to make efforts to
provide houses of worship and school houses,
and sometimes also for other purposes ; and
as the churches have increased, as civiliza-
tion has advanced, and the people have begun
to rise from their utter poverty, their benev-
olent efforts have greatly increased. With
the great revival in 1838 and '39 there came
an increase of effort worthy of notice. At
the general meeting in 1839, mention was
made of four lai'ge stone churches in pro-
cess of erection at as many different sta-
tions. Contributions in money to the amount
of more than 8.000 were reported, mostly for
building churches and school houses. Four
churches had contributed towards the sup-
port of their missionary pastors. In 1844,
the subject of fully supporting their own
pastors began to be agitated, and at least
two of the churches resolved to undertake
the work at once. Contributions to different
benevolent societies commenced early, and
have been greatly increased. In 1851, the
whole amount of contributions reported for
different objects was $21,211, of which
§J5,608 was for the support of pastors, and
^2,838 for the American Board of Commis-
sioners for Foreign Missions, In 1852, con-
tributions to the Hawaiian Missionary So-
ciety, now an independent body, amounted
to $4,981 ; and contributions to all objects
exceeded $24,000. May it not be said that
" their deep poverty" hath " abounded unto
the riches of their liberality ?"
The importance of raising up a native min-
istry for the churches has long been felt by
the missionaries, and has been urged upon
their attention by the officers of the Amer-
ican Board. But they have been cautious,
fearing to "lay hands suddenly" on those
who might not prove "faithful men." In
1842, there were but two regularly licensed
native preachers, with one other, who, though
not yet licensed, was entirely devoted to the
work of preaching. A very considerable
number, however, were employed in different
villages, as a subordinate class of religious
teachers. The first instance of the ordina-
tion of a native as the pastor of one of the
churches, occurred in December, 1849. In
1850, two others were ordained ; there were
five other full}'- licensed native preachers,
and quite a number who had a qualified li-
cense to preach at out-stations.
Civilization — Government — Laws. — The
Christianization of the Hawaiians has ad-
vanced more rapidly than their civilization
and refinement, and school education more
rapidly than a knowledge of the mechanic
arts. Those, however, who saw the islanders
as they were in 1820, see now an advance in
civilization which is truly . wonderful ; and
Christianity and common schools have laid
the foundation for a raipid advance in future.
In 1838, the king aii^d chiefs having endea-
vored in vain to procure from the United
States some suitable person of legal attain-
ments to become their adviser, requested
Mr. Richards to become their teacher in the
science of government and laws, their chap-
Iain, and their interpreter in intercourse with
foreigners. He and his brethren thought it
his duty to comply with the request. Up
to thii? time, the government was an absolute
despotism. The chiefs were still the sole
proprietors of the soil, and the people were
virtually their slaves, though some laws had
been published, and the administration of
the government had been greatly meliorated.
In 1839, the first code of written laws was
published, prepared wholly by a native. In
1840, a constitution was adopted, and a new
code of laws soon took the place of the first.
Of their own accord, a king and chiefs, who
were absolute hereditary despots, had now
set limits to their own power, and given con-
stitutional liberty to their subjects, for their
good. In 1846, the different departments
of the general government were tuWy organ-
ized, and the organization of the judiciary
soon followed. The legislative power is
vested in a house of nobles, mostly heredi-
tary, and a house of representatives, elected
by the people. Substantial court houses
and prisons are being erected in different
districts. Honolulu has its "noble custom
house." its " costly court house," and its
" splendid and convenient market house."
Roads and bridges are in process of construc-
tion in every part of the islands, for building
which the people are all taxed. And most
important of all, perhaps, the people are
rapidly becoming owners of the soil they
cultivate, a commission having been ap-
pointed several years since to investigate
claims and give titles, which " are not to be
disturbed or questioned," and which "are
intended to be as perfect and independent
titles to the soil as are enjo3red by the citi-
zens of any country in the world."
The laws are not a dead letter. Very
soon after they were first published, a high
chief murdered his wife. It was at once
predicted that justice would not reach one-
of such rank ; but, to the siirprise of foreign-
ers and the astonishment of the commoa
people, the chief was hung. ^Mr, Lee, the-
present chief-justice of the Islands, testifies
that now " in no part of the world are life
and property more safe." Yet, a few years-
since, this was a nation of thieves, robbers^
and murderers.
Seizure of the Isla7ids by Lord George
Paulet — Independence acknowledged. — Re-
cord must be made of one more gross act of
aggression upon the rights of the Sandwich Is-
lands government and people. In Februai-y,
1843, Her Brittanic Majesty's ship Carysfort
came to Honolulu, The commander, Lord
George Paulet, at once opened a correspond-
664
SANDWICH ISLANDS,
ence with the king, conducted, on his part,
in a stj-le of shameless insolence, in which,
pretending to seek protection for British
subjects, and to support the position of
Mr. Simpson, to whom Mr. Charlton, now
going to England, had delegated the functions
of British Consul, he made demands which
could not be complied with, under threat of
an immediate bombardment of the town.
The king, having no alternative, surrendered
the government of the Islands, provisionally,
to Lord Paulet, at the same- time protesting
against the justice of his demands, and ap-
pealing to the British Government, to which
he had already sent ministers, for redress. A
commission was appointed for the provisional
administration of the government, which pro-
ceeded at once to abrogate some of the
most important laws, and, among others, that
against fornication. The government was
in the hands of this commission for five
months, and they were months, at Honolulu,
of vice and sorrow. In July, 1843, Rear-
Admiral Thomas, commander-in-chief of the
British forces in the Pacific, having learned
what had been done, came to Honolulu, and
at once restored the sovereignty to the king.
The English government, also, on learning
the proceedings of Lord Paulet, promptly
disavowed having authorized them, or giving
them any sanction.
Previous to these transactions, the king
had sent Mr. Richards and Haalilio, as com-
missioners, with full powers, to the United
States and diiferent European governments.
They secured an acknowledgment of the
independence of the Islands by the United
States, Great Britain, France, and Belgium.
As has been previously mentioned, impor-
tant treaties were negotiated with England
and France in 1846. and in 1850 the United
States government entered into a treaty with
the Islands on a more liberal scale than any
which the Hawaiian government had been
before able to negotiate with leading Chris-
tian nations.
Decrease of Popxdation. — It is a painful
fact that the native population of these Is-
lands is still diminishing. The reasons for
this are perhaps in part inexplicable, or at
least not now understood ; but doubtless a
vitiated national constitution, the fearful
consequence of disease introduced by the
vices of foreign visitors, long before the in-
troduction of Christianity, has been a promi-
nent cause. For many years, deaths were
many, and births few. Other causes arc to
■be finmd in the fact that there is neither suf-
ficient intelligence, nor sufficient preparation
in the way of homo comforts, among the
people, to enable them to contend success-
fully with contagious and' epidemic, or other
violent diseases now from time to time
introduced from abroad. In 1848-9, measles
And whooping cough, followed by diarrhoea
and influenza, passed over the Islands with
fearful fatality, carrying away about one-
twelfth part of the whole people. A census
taken in 1850, showed the population to bo
only about 84,000. P^ecently, the small-pox
has proved very fatal in some districts, but
its ravages have not been like those of the
measles. (See Report, 1849, p. 187.)
The Mission dissolved. — The missions of
the American Board, as other foreign mis-
sions, are never regarded as permanent insti-
tutions. They are established and conducted
with reference to a definite end ; to plant the
institutions of the Gospel, and to Christianize
the people, and prepare them to support, them-
selves. Christian institutions. The Hawaiian
nation has bepn Christianized. Much I'emains
to be accomplished for the more full civiliza-
tion of the people, and to bring them to a high-
er state of intellectual and social as well as re-
ligious cultivation ; but it is a Christian peo-
ple. One-fourth part of the whole people
are members of Protestant Christian church-
es ; and the first article of the national con-
stitution, adopted by the chiefs in 1840, de-
clares that all the laws of the Islands shall
be in consistency with God's law.
In July, 1848, the Prudential Committee
of the American Board addressed a long
communication to the mission, designed to
bring about changes in the constitution of
the mission, and its ultimate separation from
the Board ; and thus a change in the mode
of aifording needed assistance to the native
churches, and to educational institutions
adapted to the changed circumstances of the
people, while yet the continued residence of
the missionaries and of their families at the
islands should be secured. In accordance
with propositions made, some of the mis-
sionaries very soon took a release from their
full connection with the Board ; others have
from time to time been doing the same, and
at the meeting of the mission in May, 1853,
the transition was completed, and the mis-
sion was merged in the Christian community
of the Islands. Its organization as a mis-
sion, under the direction of the Board, was
dissolved.
Much assistance must doubtless be ren-
dered, still, to this new and poor Christian
community ; but the churches at the Islands
are put forward to tlie leading position, and
are to take tlie leading responsibility in sup-
porting the Gospel institutions. It is ex-
pected that they will erect their own church
edifices, and support native pastors ; and aid
furnished in the support of foreign pastors, —
when this is necessary, — will be given on
the Home Missionary plan of making uj) de-
ficiencies, after the churches have done, in-
dividually, what they can. The Ilawaiiau
Missionary Society has become an indepen-
dent body, but will act to some extent as a
disbursing ajrent for the board. Various
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
665
other benevolent societies have been organ-
ized at the Islands, yet the pecuniary means
for accomplishing what is done for the newer
sections of our own land by Education, Col-
lege, Tract, and other benevolent institutions,
must obviously be furnished in good measure
Btill from the United States.
Substantially, the appropriate work of a
Foreign Missionary Society at the Sandwich
Islands has been done. A new nation has
been born into the family of Christian na-
tions. To bring about this "intellectual,
moral, religious, and social new creation of
the Hawaiian nation," the American Board
has expended $817,383 ; the American Bible
Society, $41,500 ; and the American Tract
Society, $23,800: in all, $882,683:— less
than it costs to build one line-of-battle
STATISTICS OF THE
ship, and keep it in service for a single
year.
The number of laborers, male and female,
sent to the Sandwich Islands by the Board,
is 145 : — 42 toinisters, 7 physicians, 20 lay
helpers, and 76 females. Of these, 27 minis-
ters, 3 physicians, 9 of the other lay helpers,
and 42 females, are now at the Islands.
SUMMARY.
Foreign pastors and preaohers, ......24
Native pastors,- 4
Ministers supported on the Home Missionary plan,
and reckoned among the missionaries of the
Board - 13
Ministers supported wholly through the Board 3
Ministers not supported through the Board 8
Laymen supported wholly or in part through the Board 3
Laymeu not supported through the Board 6
Females supported wholly or in part through the
Board 24
Females not supported through the Board 14
CHURCHES — 1853.
STATIONS.
a
O
>.
.a
6
a .
Is
21
P.
6-6
^1
■3
P.
s
d
|2i
1
a
P<
-53
c
'S
CI
a
"to
c3
3
M.
<0
-d
9
(0
"3
"o
-o^
"N
a
0
"o
.s
^
s
8
^
-3
S
^
^
O
H
^
a
3
o
a
a
10,614
504
442
31
686
68
4,385
129
45
5,742
125
3,520
100
6,268
459
99
43
1136
58
1,835
54
100
2,096
58
1,387
90
1,S53
629
23
31
312
54
734
31
12
8
1,038
20
899
47
2,770
299
273
624
685
27
5
1,730
132
2,023
45
3,018
115
112
18
886
8
662
20
1
1,069
60
1,181
30
1,488
64
7
284
15
507
21
R
1
944
22
484
26
693
1
7
9
511
38
45
990
19
74
3
3
11
9
4
13
35
2
758
38
23
2
122
1,224
355
42
2
268
7
509
17
8
2
690
24
1,236
37
3,404
579
331
46
351
19
759
65
41
2,589
.36
768
128
2,267
694
33
61
381
30
860
47
1,179
15
683
107
1,9S1
65
329
12
445
25
34
912
10
578
52
369
14
5
4
3
R
394
7
22
63
16
15
22
8
575
700
42
560
96
4
86
4
107
8
5
495
21
186
17
382
145
22
6
53
2
137
8
291
13
183
14
663
94
124
1
92
2
157
2
485
27
254
42
38,544
3792
1880
2865492
307
11,782
499
103
224
22,236
675
13,387
924
IHilo and Puna.
Waimea
Kohala
Kailua
Kealakekua
Kau — .
fHana
«• Wailuku
5 l Lahainaluna
g I Lahaina
tKaanapali-— . -.
MOLOKAI .
r Honolulu, 1st....
Honolulu, 2d
6 I Ewa -.
• Waianae . .
Waialua ..
Kahuku... .
Kaneohe.-— ....
Waioli.,
Koloa.... . ......
14 ( Waimea-—
Teachers sent to the Marquesas Islands. —
Some account of what has been done at the
Sandwich Islands in connection with the
mission to Micronesia, will be found in the
account of the " Micronesian Mission ;" but
Bome notice should be taken here of a mis-
sion to the Marquesas Islands. In March,
1853, Matunui, the principal chief of Fatu-
hiva, one of the southern islands of the
Marquesas group, came in a whale-ship to
Lahaina, accompanied by a son-in-law, who
was a native of the Sandwich Islands. He
had come thousands of miles to obtain mis-
sionaries to teach him and his people the
word of God. Desiring a white missionary
if he could be had, he would yet greatly pre-
fer Hawaiian teachers to none, and was
affectiugly urgent to obtain those who would
return witli him at an early day. "We
have/' said he, " nothing but war, war, war
— fear, trouble, and poverty. We are tired
of living so, and wish to be as you are here."
The case awakened much interest among the
churches ; Hawaiian pastors and teachers
offered themselves for the service ; the peo-
ple were willing contributors to provide for
their outfit and support, and on the 16th of
June, two native pastors and two deacons,
with their wives, sailed for the Marquesas,
in a brig chartered for the purpose, at an
expense of $2,000. They were accompanied
by Rev. R. W. Parker, who would give them
advice and assistance in commencing their
work, and then return to the Sandwich
Islands. They reached Fatuhiva, (usually
called Magdalena on the charts,) on the 26th
of August, and were " received with much
joy by the natives." Only five days after
their arrival, a French brig, which had sailed
from Tahiti while they were detained at that
666
SANDWICH ISLANDS.
island, anchored in the harbor, and a Catho-
lic priest landed. The captain of the brig,
and the priest, in a long interview with Man-
tunui and other chiefs, claimed the islands
as the possessions of the French, and de-
manded that the Protestant teachers should
be sent back to the Sandwich Islands. The
chiefs, however, insisted that the land was
theirs, and that the Protestants must re-
main ; they wanted them, and not the Pa-
pists. After a few days, the brig left, taking
the priest, but leaving two Hawaiian Catho-
lic teachers, with the promise that in a few
months a French priest would come to re-
main. The Protestant missionaries were
. soon established in a house belonging to
Matunui, and engaged in their work. Papal,
and probably French, opposition is to be ex-
pected ; but it' may be hoped that God has
good things in store for a mission commenced
under circumstances so remarkable. — See
Reports ami Publications of the American
Board; Sarins' s^ Dibble^c, and Bingham'' s
Histories, and HunVs " Past and Present"
of the Sandwich Islands. — Rev. I. R. Wor-
cester.
American Missionary Association. —
Rev. Mr. Green, who was originally a mis-
sionary of the Board, has been, for a num-
ber of years, connected with the American
Missionary Association. He has under his
care two cliurches, one at Makawao, and the
other at Keokea, the latter having a native
pastor, David Malo. Mr. Green has also
three or four native helpers. The whole
number of members in these churches is
750, residing at various places within an ex-
tensive district, and having a number of
different places of meeting. The Committee
say, in their last report : " The indications
of progress are very encouraging. ^More
than one hundred and eighty members have
been added to the church in Mr. Green's
field. The interest of his people in behalf
of tlie conversion of the world and the re-
lief of the enslaved is maintained, and, in
general, the members of the church, are dili-
gent and attentive readers of the Bible."
Present Condition and Future Prospects
of the Missionary Work in the Sandwich
Islands— Letter from Rev. Titus Coan.—The
following letter, addressed to the author, by
the pastor of the largest church in the
world, giving his impressions of the state
of things in this most remarkable field, can-
not fail of being read with deep interest:
IIiLo, Hawaii, April 17, 1854.
Ml/ Dear Brother :~Y on ask my inipres-
Rions concerning the present condition and fu-
ture prospects of the missionary work at the
Sandwich Islands. It is impossil}le to do jus-
tice to the subject in one brief letter ; but allow
me to say, that I believe the Gospel has effected
asignal truimph on these shores. Savagism
has Hed before it, never to return. Idola-
try, in its grossest forms, has fallen, never to
rise again. Ignorance and superstition have
fled apace before its rising light. Not that
the people are remarkable for intelligence
and wisdom ; but they have made progress.
They are not where they were 35 years ago.
Most of them can read and write, and what
is more, their minds have been impercepti-
bly expanded by the silent istnd constant in-
flux of ideas from a world opening and mov-
ing around them. Like the man ascending
the mountain, their horizon is extending at
every step. The comforts and improvements
of civilization are multiplying here. All
men with eyes can see this, and all men of
candor confess it. Social relations are bet-
ter understood, and social obligations more
faithfully discharged than in former days.
Not that we are perfect, or near it ; but we
can report progress. The nation has expe-
rienced a great civif revolution, a political
emancipation, and this without rebellion and
without blood. Calmly, silently, but with
the energy of light, the Gospel has under-
mined, overthrown, and melted the ancient
despotism, and the temple of freedom is
now rising on its ruins. Instead of the ca-
pricious, the selfish, the irresponsible, the
crushing will of despots, we now have con-
stitutional laws, the elective franchise re-
cognized, prerogatives limited, rights defined,
and life, limb, liberty, character, and the
fruits of physical and mental toil protected.
External morality is also more generally
practiced here than in most nations, or per-
haps, any nation. No where on earth are
life and property more secure. No where
may the people sleep with open doors, by
the wayside, or in the forests, with more
safety than here. No where may the travel-
er with more impunity encamp where night
overtakes him, lay his purse by his side, hang
his watch on a tree, and commit himself to
sleep. Natives often hang calabashes of
food, fish, clothing, and other things on the
limb of a tree by the wayside, and leave
them thus for days or weeks, until they re-
turn from an excursion. Open crimes are of
rare occurrence here. They increase, how-
ever, as a certain class of white men are in-
troduced.
As to " pure and undefiled religion"
among the people, M-e would speak with
modesty. God only knows the heart. Our
enemies say that in this, as in all good, we
have signally failed. We are sure that the
word of God has not been without effect —
that it has not returned void — that those
who have sown in tears have not reaped in
sadness — that those who have fought with
spiritual weapons have not beat the air. It
is our jo}', and a part of our reward, to be-
lieve that many of the poor sons and daugh-
ters of Hawaii have been prepared unto
glory; that they now sing with the re
SANDWICH ISLANDS— SAVAGE ISLAND.
667
deemed in heaven ; and that many now with
us are following in the steps of those who
thi'ough faith and patience, now inherit the
promises. This we believe, because God's
word and the fruits we see, warrant such
confidence. How many, or what proportion
of our church members are the true seed of
Abraham, we do not even conjecture. This
we leave for the disclosures of the final da}'.
That all of our converts are weak and child-
like, we confess ; while at the same time we
feel that many of them are better than our-
selves. We do not boast that in any one
thing we have attained or are perfect, but
we follow after. "We are toiling up the hill,
and we may say, with all our defects — and
they are many — that no savage tribe ever
went so fast and so far, in 35 years, as the
Hawaiians. And the Gospel is the efficient
cause. Not that we overlook or undervalue
collateral agencies. These have been many.
One class of facts has had a happy influence
in helping to elevate and to bless this peo-
ple, while another class has been decidedly
antagonistical. For whatever good has been
done, let God he praised.
As to the future prospects of our islands,
what shall we say ? Here, of course, our
knowledge is at fault. Our missionary ope-
rations are now in a transition state. As in
other respects, so also in this, old things
are passing away, and all things are
becoming new. The islands are adopted
into the great fraternity of Christian nations.
Henceforth we are no longer to be known as
foreign missionaries. Many of us are already
receiving our full support from the churches
over whom we are pastors. Others receive
support in part, the lack being supplisd from
foreign sources. For years to come we may
need to call on the A. B. 0. F. M., and on
the Bible and Tract Societies, for special
grants to aid us in our work. But these aids
will be collateral. "We are organizing inde-
pendent institutions in the land. Our
churches are settling their pastors, obtaining
charters, etc. "We have our Missionary,
Bible, Tract, and other benevolent Societies,
to draw out, collect, and scatter over many
waters the beneficence of our churches.
Already the relative amount of those chari-
ties does not suffer by comparison, with the
gifts of more favored lands. In a word, we
consider the Church of Christ as planted
here, as having -taken root, and as bearing
fruit. And as Christ said to his disciples,
that their '"' fruit should remain.'" so we say
of these children of the kingdom. We are
sure that the Redeemer has a church here,
that it is founded on " The Rock," and that
" the gates of hell shall not prevail against
it." But in saying this we do not afiirm the
perpetuity of the Hawaiian race. This may,
and probably will, become extinct. The
natives are few, and in physical, mental, and
moral power, feeble. Amidst the march of
men, the rush and the surges of a moving
world, they may be overwhelmed and lost.
Fleets of merchantmen, whalemen, and war-
ships, are scattering thousands of our vigor-
ous young men to all the winds of heaven.
Foreigners are pouring in upon us from every
point of the compass. Amalgamation is
fast taking place — new forms of disease have
swept off thousands to the tomb. The base
passions of many vile and reckless seamen,
like the consuming fires of hell, are destroy-
ing many in our sea-ports who should have
become the mothers and matrons of a rising
race. The English language is being learned
by many and coveted by most — and all
things combining, indicate the absorption or
extinction of the Hawaiians as a distinct
race, at no distant day. Let it be so — still
the islands will have a people, and God will
have a Church here. A crisis may be at
hand which will try men's souls. "We shall
need the prayers, the sympathies, the coim-
sels, and the alms of the Church in older
lands. The cause of education must be sus-
tained here. We must have a college. We
must have teachers and evangelical ministers
— men of wise heads and holy hearts. INIen
of self-denial, patience, zeal, discretion,
and broad philanthropy. Our work is not
done. Probably our responsibilities were
never so great as at the present hour. All
things grow around us, and we need great
faith, firmness, and wisdom, lest all good be
swept away by the currents of passion and
of worldly and civil policy. Our joy and
our triumph are, that " The Lord reigns,"
and his kingdom is safe. In Christian love,
"Tour friend and brother,
Titus Ooan.
SAPAPALII: A station of the London
Missionary Society, on the island of Savaii,
one of the Samoan group.
SARON : A station of the Rhenish Mis-
sionary Society in South Africa, nearTulbagh.
SASAC : One of the Lesser Sunda Islands,
in the Indian Archipelago.
SATTAUKOOLAM : A station of tho
Church Missionary Society in the Tinnevelly
District, Hindostan.
SATARA : a city of Hindostan, and a sta-
tion of the Am. Board. It is 170 miles S.
E. of Bombay, and 50 miles from the western
coast. It is 2,320 miles above the level of
the sea, and its position is singularly beau-
tiful. The population of the city is 32,000.
It was occupied as a station of the Bombay
mission till 1848, when it became a distinct
mission.
SA"VAII : One of the Samoan Islands, on
which the London Missionary Society have
four stations.
SAVAGE ISLAND : One of the Friendly
Islands, situated about 130 miles from Kep*
pel's Island. It is a cinder island, produced
668
SCHEPPMANNSDORF— SEAMEN.
by volcanic action. It is a remote island,
the landing dangerous. The London Mis-
sionary Society have a station here, in charge
of native teachers. It has six chapels, one
of which is wholly built from the bread-fruit
tree.
SCHEPPMANNSDORF : A station of the
Rhenish Missionary Society in Namaqualand,
South Africa, at Whale Bay.
SEAMEN : The subjects of inquiry here
are three, viz. : 1. Tlie number of persons
employed. 2. The origin and progress of
missionary efforts among them. 3. The re-
sults.— In ascertaining the number of per-
sons employed in connection with navigation
both on the sea and on the interior waters,
there will necessaril}' be a degree of uncer-
tainty, as a part of it cannot be known with
precision, there being no documents in exist-
ence to point it out, and an estimate is all
that we can obtain. But in other cases there
are authentic documents, on which we may
safely rely. This is the fact in relation to
British and American seamen. From the
latest document which could be consulted,
it is found that there are about 30,000 regis-
tered vessels in Great Britain, the measured
burthen of which is about 3,000,000 of tons.
These vessels are manned by about 170,000
sailors. To these there should be added
about 40.000, who are always in port look-
ing for ships, and between 50.000 and 00.000
.engaged in the fisheries, and nearly 40,000
more in the Royal navy, making in all of
British sailors about 300,000. The number
of American seamen is correctly stated in
the last ainmal reports made to Congress by
the Secretary of the Treasury, and by the
Secretary of the Navy. They are as follows :
The measured burthen of American vessels
in the foreign trade is 3,230,590 tons, and
the number of their crews is 117,043. The
measured burthen of vessels in the coasting
trade is 2,008,021 tons, and the estimated
number of men in them is about one hundred
thousand. This is an estimate based on the
tonnage. It includes the vessels on the
lakes and rivers in the western country,
steamers as well as sail vessels. The mea-
sured burthen of the vessels engaged in the
fisheries is 175,205 tons, carrying about
22,000 men, making in all of American sea-
men in the foreign and coasting trade, and
the fisheries, 239,000 souls. And when we
add to these not far from ten thousand sea-
men in our national vessels, we shall have a
total of not less than two hundred and fifty
thcjusand men in American vessels for whose
salvation we should labor. 'Jhe seamen t)f
Russia, Sweden, Denmark, the Dutch and
German States, of France, Spain, and Por-
tugal, are probably nearly or quite double
the number found in Great Britain and
America. Looking now up the Mediterra-
nean on the African coast, and away to the
eastern Archipelago, and thence to Turkey
and the Grecian Islands, we shall en-
counter a multitude of seafaring men ; and
then looking across the Atlantic to the
South American coast, both on its eastern
and western shores, we shall find multitudes
more, not yet counted, to be added to those
already estimated. And when we turn east-
ward again, and passing the Cape of Good
Hope, stretch away toward India, and China,
and the eastern Islands, an almost innumer-
able multitude of seafaring men are found
thronging the native vessels which fill those
seas. Putting the wholetogethcr, not much
short of three millions of men will be found
floating upon the waters for whose salvation
every effort should be made. We turn now,
2. To the origin and progress of mission'
ary efforts among seamen. — The first effort
known to have been made to benefit seamen
as a distinct class of men. took place in Lon-
don, in the year 1814. anil under the follow-
ing circumstances : At an evening meeting,
a stranger was observed to enter the assem-
bly, and to sit weeping bitterly during the
sermon. When the service was closed, a
pious man, who had observed him. followed
him out, and asked him who he was. He
said he was a sailor, belonging to a collier
vessel, which then lay among others in the
Thames. On farther inquirj- it was ascer-
tained that there were a few other seamen
belonging to those vessels who were also se-
rious minded men, and who were accustom-
ed to meet together occasionally and pray.
A few pious men from the shore sought op-
portunity to visit those vessels, and hold
prayer-meetings on board, until it became a
common thing, and as an appropriate name,
they called them " Bethel meetings." and a
flag was prepared to designate the vessel
where the meeting was held, which they de-
nominated the '• Bethel Flag." It was a
l)iece of blue bunting, bearing the word
'' Bethel" in white letters, having over it a
star, and under it a dove bearing an olive
branch. After about two years, preaching
was added, either on ship board, or in a
chapel near the water, and the commence-
ment of this was at London and New York,
at about the same time, yet without any
concert of action. It was in the year ISIG,
when the Rev. Ward Stafford was laboring
in New York as a city missionary, and car-
rying the Gospel to the destitute as he could
find them. In prosecuting this work he
placed his eye on the sailors, some thousands
of whom were visiting the port of New
York every year, and procuring a school
room, he commenced preaching to them. The
Mariner's Church in New York grew out of
this efiort. In 1818, a similar meeting was
opened in Boston, by the Rev. Dr. Jenks,
and in Die following year, 1819, the Kev.
Mr. Eastburn commenced u meeting for sea-
SEAMEN— SETTRA KROO,
669
men in Philadelphia. Efforts of the same
kind have been made in other places, and
regular meetings have been established in
Portland, Baltimore, Richmond, Charleston,
Savannah, Mobile, and New Orleans. In
some of the larger ports, different denomina-
tions have embarked in the cause, and are
carrying on the work, each under their own
flag, but harmoniously as against a common
enemy. Thus in Great Britain and the
United States, all the large ports are provi-
ded with mariners' churches, and the work
of promoting religion among seamen is very
judiciously carried on, under the patronage
of local societies.
About the year 1831, an advance was made
in this work by extending it to the inland
waters, and after various efforts to establish
Bethel meetings at some of the more im-
portant places on the line of the canals,
rivers, and lakes of the western country, a
large meeting was held at Syracuse, N. Y.,
Aug. 11, 1833, which resulted in the forma-
tion of the " Boatmen's Friend Society."
Several local societies had been previously
formed, which, to some extent, were now
merged in this. After a year or two of
rather declining operations, a convention of
the friends of the cause was held at Buffalo,
in June, 1836, when the " American Bethel
Society" was formed, which took charge of
most, if not all of the Bethel operations on
the western waters.
The friends of seamen in the United
States having seen the permanent establish-
ment of mariners' churches in most of the
large ports on the Atlantic coast, and having
laboi'ed successfully in this department for
about ten years, began to consider the con-
dition of seamen in foreign ports, and the
importance of providing the preaching of
the Gospel for them there. This led to the
establishment of the " American Seamen's
Friend Society," in 1827, the grand object
of which is to provide and sustain chaplains
for seamen in every large foreign port, where
an open door can be found. In the prosecu-
tion of this work that society has stationed
chaplains at Canton, Havre, Marseilles,
Smja-na, Cronstadt, Stockholm, Gottenburg,
Rio Janeiro, Sandwich Islands, San Francis-
co, Havana, and some other smaller ports,
most of which remain to the present time.
The friends of seamen in Great Britain,
through a general organization styled " The
British and Foreign Sailors' Society," has
accomplished much for the benefit of seamen
in their own ports, though, as yet, but little
abroad. Such is a brief outline of the origin
and progress of the missionary efforts among
sailors up to the present day. These efforts
have involved a large outlay of money, but
the precise amount cannot be stated. We
turn to consider,
3. The remits of these efforts. — We have
no means of counting the number of pious
seamen, were we so disposed. They are
scattered in almost every vessel that floats
upon the ocean ; but as a general remark,
proved by many facts, we feel safe in the
assertion that the character of seamen, as a
whole, is greatly improved since Bethel ef-
forts were commenced, and many vessels are
now found where the Sabbath is strictly ob-
served, and daily prayer is maintained ;
things almost unknown in former days. Tem-
perance has gained ground among sailors,
since the efforts for their benefit commenced,
quite as fast if not faster than among lands-
men. Forty years ago it was thought
wholly impracticable to manage a vessel
without ardent spirits, and merchants would
almost as soon have thought of sending their
ships to sea without bread as without rum.
But that day has passed, and a large propor-
tion of vessels are now manned on temperance
principles, and " no rum," is put forward to
a prominent place on the shipping paper.
Marine temperance societies are common in
every port, bearing the names of many thou-
sands of pledged men, both officers and
common sailors. The immediate and very
natural result of temperance in seamen is
frugality, and a careful saving of their hard
earnings ; and an investigation of the various
Seamen's Savings Banks, which are founded
in every large port, shows us that immense
sums have been there deposited by sailors
for use in future life. We have thus briefly
hinted at the several subjects of inquiry re-
specting seamen. The details may be found
in the twenty-five annual reports of the Am-
erican Seamen's Friend Society ; the annual
reports of the American Bethel Society ; the
twenty -five volumes of the Sailors' Maga-
zine ; the annual reports of the Secretary of
the Treasury, relating to commerce ; the an-
nual reports of the Secretary of the Navy ;
the annual reports of the British and Foreign
Sailors' Society ; " Britannia," by the Rev.
John Harris ; the " Retrospect," by Rev.
R. Marks ; publications of Rev. G. C. Smith,
Rev. William Scoresby, and others. — Rev.
J. Greenleaf.
SEIR: A village near Oroomiah, Persia,
where the seminaries of the mission of the
American Board are located.
SERAMPORE : Formerly a Danish settle-
ment, in the province of Bengal, situated on
the west side of the Hooghly river, about 12
miles above Calcutta. Population 15,000.
For many years, the principal station of the
English Baptists in Bengal.
SEROOR : In Hindostan, 28 miles south-
west from Ahmednuggur. Pop. 6,500. Be-
came a station of the American Board in 1841.
SETTRA KROO : A station of the Am-
erican Presbyterian General Assembly's
Board on the western coast of Africa, about
halfway between Cape Palmos and Monrovia.
ere
SEVAGUNQA— SIAM.
SEVAGUNGA : A station of the Ameri-
can Board in Southern Hindostan, 25 miles
east of Madura, and connected with that
mission.
SEYCHELLES: A cluster of small is-
lands, which lie nearly north from Madagas-
car. They are high and rocky, and little fit-
ted for any culture except cotton. Popula-
tion 4,000. They are famous for the produc-
tion of a palm not known in any other part
of the world. A station of the Society for
the Propagation of the Gospel.
SHALONG POINT: A station of the
American Board in Micronesia, on Taman
Island, a small island in the mouth of Me-
talim Harbor, Ascension Island.
SHANGHAI : A city in China, in latitude
31* 10' north and longitude 121° 30' east, on
the Wosung river, about 14 miles from its
mouth. (See China.)
SHAWANOE: A town in the Indian Ter-
ritory, and the seat of a mission of the Am-
erican Baptist Union for the Shawanoe and
other tribes.
SHEIKH : (pronounced Shehh or Shuhh)
means literally an old man, but besides being
used in that sense it is also employed as a
prefix to tJie names of respectable heads of
families li^our "Mr." Somewhat like our M.
A. it is applied to schoolmasters and learned
men. It is also the title of the heads of the
Mohammedan sects as the Ilhanafees, Mali-
kees, &c. But among the Bedaween it de-
notes the head of the tribe, and where seve-
ral Sheikhs unite together for greater secu-
rity, they choose a chief from among them-
selves who is called Sheikh el k'bir or Sheikh
el Shoyukh. Sheikh el Islam is one of the
titles of the Grand Mufti of Constantinople,
who is the President of the College of the
Ulema, or professors of Mohammedan Law.
Shiekh is also the name of one of the orders
of priesthood among the Yczidees. and has
a like religious meaning among the Druzes.
SIIILOH : Station of the United Brethren
in South Africa, on the Klipplaat river,
among the Tambookics and Hottentots.
SHWAYDOUNG: A town in Burmah
near Prome, and the seat of the Prome mis-
sion of the American Baptist Union. It is
one of the principal centres of Burman edu-
cation and religion, and has been styled the
" Oxford of Burmah."
SHWAYGYEEN: A city in Southern
Burmah, at the junction of the Shwaygyeen
and Sitang rivers. It is the seat of amission
of the American Baptist Union.
SIAM: Siam is a long, narrow country,
lying between Burmah and Cochin-China,
and extending from the Gulf of Siam to the
borders of China. It is watered by several
rivers and by numerous canals ; ami as the
soil is generally quite fertile, it is capable of
supporting a largo population. Having been
distracted by wars, however, until within
comparatively a modern period, the actual
number of inhabitants is estimated at not
more than from 3,000,000 to 5,000,000. Of
these some hundred thousands are Chinese,
and there are many Peguans, Burmese,
Shans, &c. This diversity among the inhab-
itants imparts the greater interest to Siam
as a sphere of missionar}^ labor. Some races
may be reached here who cannot be visited
in their own lands. Numerous Chinese, for
instance, from the island of Hainan, are now
living in Bangkok, who keep up a constant
intercourse with their own country ; and
through whom a Christian influence might
readily be exerted on the 1,500,000 inhabi-
tants of that island.
In Siam the inhabitants live chiefly on the
banks of rivers and canals, — a circumstance
worthy of being noted, as it renders them
easily accessible by missionaries in boats —
the common mode of traveling. The princi-
pal city is Bangkok, of which the population
is estimated at 300,000 ; it is situated on the
Meinam, about twenty-five miles from its
mouth. The people of this country are
hardly inferior in civilization to other nations
of South-eastern Asia. They carry on vari
ous kinds of industrial occupation. Many
are able to read, and schools are commonly
connected with the wats. or places devoted to
temples and idolatrous worship, where edu-
cation is given without charge by some of
the priests ; yet the knowledge thus acquired
by the youth is little more than that of the
simplest kind.
Government. — The government of this
country is a despotism. The king is chosen,
however, on some basis of hereditary de-
scent, by the principal nobles, which must
give them influence in the administration of
public affairs. In no other country in the
East, and probably in no country in any part
of the world, is the influence of the king
more controlling over all the opinions and
conduct of his subjects ; the servility of all
classes is most abject, and is fitly shown by
the prostration, with the face to the ground,
of even the chief men when they appear in
the ro)'al presence.
Religion. — The religion of the Siamese is
Budhism, which may be characterized as a
kind of atheistical idolatry ; for Budh, in his
most common form, Gotama, is not sup-
posed to take any concern in the affairs of
men. (See Budhism.) It is one of tlie rea-
sons for regarding Siam with special interest
as a missionary field, that it is the head-
quarters of this widel)--spread system of
false religion, so far as this bad preeminence
can be assigned to any country. It is a re-
ligion held here in great honor. The king is
its subject ; the revenues of the kingdom
are to a large extent devoted to the wats. the
support of priests, processions in honor of
Gotama, and other religious ceremonies.
SUM.
671
If Budh were dethroned in this country, his
downfall would doubtless be felt in other
parts of Asia.
MISSIONS.
Presbyterian Board. — The mission es-
tablished by the Board in Siam was resolved
upon in 1839. It was formed at first with
reference to the Chinese rather than to the
Siamese. The door into China was not then
open, and missionary societies adopted the
policy of supporting stations among the
large numbers of Chinese emigrants who
were found in the neighboring countries.
The Rev. Robert W. Orr, one of the first
missionaries to the Chinese, whose station
was at Singapore, made a visit to Siam in
the autumn of 1838 ; and upon his favorable
report it was deemed expedient to form a
branch of the Chinese mission at Bangkok,
and also a mission to the Siamese at the same
place. The Rev. William P. Buell and his
wife, appointed to the latter mission, arrived
at Bangkok in August, 1840. A physician
and his wife were appointed to this field of
labor in 1841, and a minister and his wife in
1843. They were led, however, to proceed
to China instead of Siam, so that Mr. Buell
was not joined by any associate. After
learning the language, he was able to
preach the Gospel and distribute the Holy
Scriptures and other religious books, ex-
plaining them to the people. He was en-
couraged in his work ; but in 1844 he w^as
compelled to return to this country by the
state of his wife's health.
In March, 1847, the Rev. Stephen Mattoon
and his wife, and Samuel R. House, M. D.,
licentiate preacher, arrived at Bangkok ; and
in April, 1849, they were joined by the Rev.
Stephen Bush and his wife. These brethren
found ample employment in preaching and
distributing the Scriptures and religious
tracts. The medical labors of Dr. House
were of the greatest benefit to large num-
bers of patients ; while they brought many
persons within the reach of the Gospel,
whose attention could not otherwise have
been gained ; and they also tended to con-
ciliate the confidence and good-will of per-
sons of all classes towards the missionaries
The year 1850 was marked by vigorous
'abors in preaching and tract distribution in
Bangkok ; by missionary tours to several
distant parts of the country, which were
made without hindrance, and afforded many
opportunities of publishing the Gospel ; by
the printing at the press of another mission
in Bangkok of 422,000 pages of books of
Scripture history ; and by faithful and suc-
cessful medico-missionary practice. This
year was also marked by a singular exigency
in the history of the mission, which for
months threatened its existence.
The missionaries had lived in houses for-
merly occupied by missionaries of the Ame-
rican Board. On relinquishing Siam as a
field of labor, the American Board trans-
ferred these houses to the American Associ-
ation, and it became necessary for the breth-
ren to seek other places of abode. After
long search and many disappointments,
they found it impossible either to purchase
or rent new quarters. The increasing bigo-
try of the king was the obstacle in their way.
He did not openly oppose their wishes, but
it was soon understood among his abject
people that he was unfriendly to foreign
teachers ; and no man was willing to sell or
lease real estate to those who at any hour
might be ordered out of the kingdom. The
strange issue was apparently reached, that
Christian missionaries must withdraw from
a heathen land, where their life and liberty
were still safe, and where their labors might
be carried forward in many ways, solely for
the want of houses in which to live ! The
question had been viewed in every aspect ;
referred home to the Executive Committee j
reconsidered after obtaining the sanction of
the Committee, given fully, but with deep
regret, to their removal to some new field of
labor — and still the necessity for this re-
moval appeared to be unavoidable.
Towards the end of the year matters grew
worse. The teachers of the missionaries
were arrested and thrown into prison, their
Siamese servants left them or were taken
away, and none of the people dared to hold
intercourse with them on religious subjects.
In the mean time prayer was offered without
ceasing on their behalf, and in answer to the
requests of his people, God interposed for
the help of his servants, — but in a way not
expected by them. The king was attacked
with disease in January, 1851 ; and, though
he had the prospect of many years of life, ho
was cut down by death in April.
His successor, the present king, had much
intercourse with the missionaries before his
accession to the throne, and he has since
shown himself to be their friend. The diffi-
culty about a site for mission premises was
soon removed ; suitable houses have been
erected, and the work of the mission can
now be prosecuted with greater freedom than
at any former period.
The little company of missionaries have
since been called to meet with trials of a
different kind — to see their number dimin-
ished, instead of being increased. Mrs.
Bush was removed by death in July, 1851.
Her last days were full of Christian peace
and joy, and her associates could say, that
" in the full possession of all her faculties,
without one cloud to separate between her
and a present Saviour, she went down into
the Jordan of death, singing Hallelujah,
in the triumph of victory. The Siamese
have lost in her a faithful, praying friend ;
the mission, an exemplary fellow-laborer j
672
SIAM.
and her bereaved husband, an affectionate
and beloved companion." The health of
Mr. Bush afterwards gave way, and it be-
came necessary for him to return to this
countr}-, in 1853, for his recovery. He has
not yet become sufficiently restored to re-
turn to his field of labor.
With the single exception of the embar-
rassment growing out of their small number,
the missionaries have reason to be much en-
couraged in their work and its prospects.
They are permitted to preach the Gospel in
stated services and by the way-side ; and
the Word has not been preached in vain.
Besides the testimony thereby held forth for
God and against idols, and the secret con-
victions and impressions of many hearers,
vrhich may yet result in the open confession
of Christ before men, two hopeful converts
have been admitted to the church. They
are both Chinese, and one of them is a native
of Hainan. Their walk and conversation
are exemplary, and both of them are engaged
in efforts to make the Gospel known unto
their own people. Some progress has been
made in giving the Scriptures to the Siamese
in their own tongue. The New Testament
and the books of Genesis and Exodus have
been translated by the missionaries of other
Boards ; but the translation will require re-
vision, and it may be expedient to make al-
together a new translation. Mr. Mattoon's
biblical scholarslup and his knowledge of
Siamese will enable him to perform good
service in this work. Schools have been
opened on the mission premises, and a small
number of boarding-scholars are under daily
Christian instruction. It seems to be not
unlikely that a Christian element may be
largely introduced into the education of
Siamese youth. The distribution of the
Scriptures in Bangkok and in the interior is
going forward, and many of the people are
not only able to read and willing to receive
Chri^tian books, but give a cordial welcome
to the missionary, and have many inquiries
to make about this new religion. Mrs. Mat-
toon and the wives of the other missionaries
have been requested by the King to give in-
struction in English to some of the female
members of his family ; and they can in this
way bring before persons of the highest rank
— in Eastern countries commonly secluded
from intercourse with foreigners — the all-
important lessons of the Gospel of Christ.
These engagements are still in progress, and
may result in the greatest good to some of
the ladies of the royal family, and by their
means to many others in high and low sta-
tions. One of their pupils, a princess of
amiable disposition, who had given pleasing
attention to the instructions of the mission-
ary teachers, was suddenly removed by death.
Her serious interest in listening to the story
of the cross would lead us to hope that heV
trust in her last hour may have been placed
in Jesus.
In connection with this brief sketch of
missionary labors, the character of the pre-
sent King of Siam should bo taken into con-
sideration. He is a Budhist in his religious
profession ; and he is an absolute monarch.
He might on any day banish every mission-
ary from his kingdom. The Church must
ever remember that her dependence is not
on the kings of the earth, but on the God of
heaven. This being deeply felt, it is still
allowable to survey things future in tho light
of present providences. Now he who, con-
trary to human expectation, has been ele-
vated to the throne of Siam, possesses a con-
siderable degree of Christian knowledge. Ho
is a much more enlightened and liberal man
than his predecessor. He has learnt the
English language. He has paid some atten-
tion to the history of our countr}^, probably
led to this by his acquaintance with Ameri-
can missionaries, and he is a warm admirer
of Washington, He is disposed to adopt tho
improvements of western civilization. Ho
has under consideration the opening of a
ship-canal to connect the Gulf of Siam with
the Bay of Bengal — a measure which would
prove greatly favorable to commerce be-
tween India and China, and would bring his
hitherto secluded country out upon one of
the highways of the world. He is surround-
ed by the priests of Budh, but Christian
ministers are living at his capital, and their
wives are giving lessons of Christian truth
in his palace. Reasons of state policy may
commend Budhism to his pride, but the
Spirit of God may easily constrain his heart
to bow unto Him who is the King of kings
and the Lord of lords. The influence of the
king and court in Siam, is almost unbounded,
especially in religious matters. If the king
should embrace Christianity, a large part of
his subjects would follow his example. They
are in some degree prepared for this, by their
acquaintance with the general truths of the
Christian religion ; the circulation of the
Scriptures and Christian books, and other
labors of the missionaries, have been tho
means of widely disseminating a knowledge
of the Gospel. It is, therefore, in the power
of one man, not only to make his own reign
an era in the history of his country, but to
lead his jjcople from the wat to the clmrch —
from a miserable paganism to the profession
of Ciiristianity ; and if the Spirit of tho
Lord were poured out from on high, we might
soon see in Siam " a nation born in a day."
'' The king's heart is in the hand of the Lord ;
as the rivers of water, heturneth itwliithorso-
ever he will." — Lowrie's Manual o/Missiuiis.
Amkrican liAPrisT Mission in Siam.—
This mission was originally designed in part
f<n- the native Siamese, and in part for tho
Chinese who are found in Siam in great num-
SIAM.
673
bers, and who, until within a recent period,
were wholly inaccessible in their own coun-
try. It was commenced in March 1833, by
Rev. J. T. Jones, formerly of the mission in
Burmah, who with Mrs. Jones at that time
established his residence at Bangkok, the
capital of the kingdom. The city had at
former periods been visited by Rev. Mr.
GutzlafF, of the Basle Missionary Society,
Rev. Mr. Abeel, of the American Board, and
quite recently by Rev. Mr. Trumlin, of the
London ]\Iissionary Society. They had, how-
ever, all abandoned the attempt to plant a
mission there, and the latter on his depart-
ture had written to the missionaries in Bur-
mah, urging them to send one of their num-
ber to Siam. It was by the appointment of
his brethren of the Burman mission, that Mr.
Jones first settled at Bangkok, and com-
menced his labors among the several races
composing its diversified population, the
most numerous of whom were the Chinese.
He was courteously received by the public
personages to whom he became known, and
in a little time his house became the resort
of considerable numbers of Chinese, Bur-
mans, and Peguans. He found the Chinese
by far the most amiable and inquisitive,
but he understood neither their language,
nor the Siamese, and was in consequence
obliged to confine his teachings and conver-
sations to the Burman tongue, which, how-
ever^ seems to have been comprehended by
others than the Burman population. He
baptized his first five converts in December,
1833. They were all Chinese, two of whom
had been instructed by Messrs. Gutzlafi" and
Abeel. One of them was immediately ap-
pointed an assistant in the mission, to take
charge of a school for Chinese boys, and to
conduct public worship in Chinese on the
Sabbath. In 1835, Mr. Jones had acquired
sufficient familiarity with the language to
warrant his attempting a translation of the
Scriptures. He soon completed the Gospel
of Matthew, and a Catechism of the New
Testament, both of which he carried to Singa-
pore to be printed by the press of the mis-
sion of the American Board established there.
When Mr. Jones removed from Rangoon
to Bangkok, it was without the knowledge
of the Board of Managers. They, however,
were already directing their attention to that
countiy, and not only approved the steps
taken by Mr. Jones, by the advice of
his associates in Burmah, but deter-
mined immediately to send additional mis-
sionaries to be united with him. Accord-
ingly, Rev. "William Dean, and Mrs. Dean,
were appointed by the Board in the summer
of 1834, and sailing in the following September,
arrived at Singapore in February, 1835, while
Mr. Jones was still thei'e engaged in printing
the Gospel of Matthew. Both the mission-
aries remained here for several months for
43
the purpose of studying the Chinese lan-
guage ; here Mrs. Dean, a few weeks after
her arrival, was suddenly summoned away
by death. Mr. Dean accompanied Mr. Jones
to Bangkok in June, 1835, and they com-
menced together the labors of the mission ;
the former more particularly among the
Chinese, and the latter among the Siamese.
In December of the same year, three other
Chinamen were baptized. But so strong
was the appetite for opium, and so general
its use among the Chinese, that several of
those who had been baptized were unable to
withstand the temptation, and fell away from
the faith which they professed.
In March, 1836, Mr. Jones had completed
the translation of the Acts of the Apostles,
and went a second time to Singapore to obtain
fonts of type both in Siamese and Chinese,
to be used with a press which had been for-
warded from America, and which was expect-
ed soon to arrive. It was while he was absent
on this excursion that there arrived at Singa-
pore, Rev. Messrs. Davenport, Reed, and
Shuck, with their wives, together with the
expected press, and the necessary materials
for printing. Messrs. Davenport and Reed
soon went with Mr. Jones to Bangkok, the
former to be attached as preacher and print-
er to the Siamese, and the latter to be con-
nected with Mr. Dean in the Chinese de-
partment of the mission. Mr. Shuck re-
mained for the present in Singapore, with
the intention of establishing himself ulti-
mately either at Macao or at Canton. A
printing house was immediately built at
Bangkok, together with a substantial brick
building for a store-house, and the press was
set into immediate operation under the direc-
tion of Mr. Davenport, in printing books and
tracts both in Siamese and Chinese. Mr. Dean
occupied a floating house on the river, and
employed himself in conversing with visitors
and on Sundays in preaching to a congrega-
tion varying from thirty to fifty Chinese,
while Mr. Jones was occupied with translating
the Scriptures into Siamese, preparing tracts
and visiting the wats or places of worship
for the purpose of scattering the knowledge
of the Gospel among the people. The ladies
of the mission also were emploj-ed in teach-
ing such pupils as could be induced to attend
their instructions. The children, however,
were in many instances forbidden by their
parents to attend the schools, lest by so
doing their value would be diminished in
case their parents should wish to sell them
as slaves.
In 1834, the mission was visited by Rev.
Dr. Malcom, and its members, together with
those converts who still remained faithfu',
were organized into a church. Three othe 6
were added soon afterwards, and the labd s
of the mission, particularly among the Chi-
nese, continued to progress, until they were
674:
SIAM.
sadly interrupted by a series of bereavements
which for a time paral^-zed its energies. Mr.
Reed was taken away by death, in August,
1837 ; Mrs. Dean had already fallen a victim
to a fever ; Mr. Dean was now obliged to
withdraw for a period, in order to recruit
his foiling health ; and early in 1838, Mrs.
Jones, a missionary of great excellence,
closed her valuable life at Bangkok. The
printing arrangements proved very defectivo
on account of the imperfection of the tj'pe,
and a t3-pe-foundry was established in the
summer of 1838, and at the same time a
second press was added to the property of
the mission. B}^ these means the books of
the New Testament, which Mr. Jones was
rapid!)' translating, were printed in great
numbers, and with these a multitude of tracts
and other works prepared for circulation
among the people.
In June, 1839, Rev. Messrs. Slafter and
Goddard, arrived at Singapore, as a rein-
forcement of the mission in Siam. Mr. Slaf-
ter brought with him an additional press, and
went almost immediately to Bangkok, where
he became associated with Mr. Jones in the
Siamese department of the mission. He
speedily acquired the language, and gave
great promise of usefulness, but in 1841 he
fell a victim to disease before he had begun
his labors as a preacher. Mr. Goddard, who
was appointed to the Chinese department,
remained at Singapore studying the language,
until October, 1840, when he repaired to
Bangkok and entered upon the duties of his
post as an associate of 5lr. Dean. In 1843,
Mr. Chandler, a machinist and type founder
connected with the mission at Maulmain,
went to reside at Bangkok. He became the
principal manager of the printing establish-
ment, and immediately interested himself in
introducing among the people a knowledge
of the mechanic arts. Prince Momfanoi in-
vited him to aid in building several kinds of
machinery after American models, and
evinced such deference for his Christian
principles that he directed his laborers to
abstain from work on Sunday. Much inci-
dental good was thus accomplished, though
it of course fell far short of the great objects
for which the mission was established.
Notwithstanding the fact that the mission-
aries in Siam have encountered none of the
hindrances usually interposed by the govern-
ments of oriental nations, it is also true that
they have been encouraged by comparatively
few religious fruits among the native Siamese.
They have translated the books of the New
Testament, and some of the Old, into the
language of the country. They have printed
and circulated very widely among the people
copies of the Scriptures and of religious
tracts. They have introduced the meclianic
arts, and have won the favor of several of
the princes and noblemen of the country,
but they have not thus far succeeded in per-
suading the people to accept the Gospel.
The native race of Siam is said to be com-
paratively stupid and less civilized than those
of the neighboring countries. Tliey have
the Gospel, but they do not embrace it. They
acknowledge the superiority of Christ's re-
ligion, but they still remain indifferent to
it. Messrs. Jones and Chandler, with the
interruptions of occasional absence, were for
many years the principal laborers in this
department of the mission. The former,
though repeatedly prostrated by ill-health,
on account of which he twice returned to the
United States, died at Bangkok, September
13, 1851. He had been a missionary up-
wards of twenty years, and had passed
eighteen years in Siam. He had acquired
the language to a degree of unusual perfec-
tion, and had won the respect and confi-
dence of the king and the leading public per-
sonages of the country. He had written
many tracts and books in the Siamese lan-
guage, and had translated the entire New
Testament and parts of the Old Testament,
the former of which he had just revised for
the third time. These contributions to tho
literature of Siam will remain forever, as
memorials of his well-spent and most labor-
ious life.
In 1849 the Siamese department of the
mission was strengthened bj^ the arrival at
Bangkok of Rev. Samuel G. Smith, who
since the death of Mr. Jones has been the
only missionary whose work was preaching
the Gospel. Mrs. Jones and Miss Morse
conduct schools and render such other as-
sistance as may be in their power, while Mr.
Chandler has lately returned from a visit to
the United States, better supplied than ever
before with the means of printing, both in
Siamese and in Chinese. A few native
Siamese have been converted to Christianity,
and have been admitted to the Chinese
church, ])ut as has been already intimated,
the spiritual results of this department of
the mission, after the lapse of twenty years,
in which it has not only encountered no op-
position, but has been received with decided
favor from the Government, appear thus far
to be unusually small. It may be, however,
that these have been only years of toilsome
preparation, and a period of sowing the seed
which shall yet spring up and yield an abun-
dant harvest.
The Chinese department of the mission at
Bangkok, however, has from the beginning
been attended with far more encouraging re-
sults. It was established at a period wlien
the Gospel was shut out from the countless
population of Chinese, and was designed to
accomplish for her wandering traflickers and
the emigrants from her shores what could
not be done for her people at home. The
only church at Bangkok has been composed.
SIAM.
675
with few exceptions, of converted Chinamen,
who at first learned the Scriptures tlirough
the Siamese translations of Mr. Jones.
From 1840, to the removal of Mr. Dean to
China in 1842, the mission was managed
principally by Rev. Messrs. Dean and God-
dard, and the former engaged in preparing
books and tracts and the latter in translating
the Scriptui'es, and both in preaching to the
people. In. 1840, the members of the church
were nine in number, and each year has wit-
nessed a gradual increase, until in 1853 they
were tliirty-five. In January, 1851, the mis-
sion suffered a severe loss in the destruction
of its buildings, and the entire property
which they contained, together with many
of the personal effects of the missionaries,
the whole amounting to not less than
^12,000 to $15,000, a calamity from which
it has not even yet fully recovered.
It has already been stated that Mr. Shuck
with his family settled at Macao, a port
under the jurisdiction of the Portugese, in
1836, also for the purpose of laboring as a
missionary among the Chinese. He found
them, as at Bangkok, entirely accessible to
the preaching of the GospeL In 1841, Rev.
Issachar J. Roberts, who had been residing
for some time at Macao under the direction
of a missionary society in the Western
States, became associated with Mr. Shuck
under the patronage of the American Bap-
tist Missionary Union. Two or three Chinese
converts have been baptized at this station,
religious books and tracts have been circula-
ted very widely among the multitudes of
Chinese who frequent this mart of oriental
commerce, and the missionaries were looking
with the fondest hopes on the prospect that
was opening before them, when in 1841 their
labors for a time were wholly interrupted
by the breaking out of the war between
Great Britain and China, and the blockade
of the port of Macao. This was continued
till August 1842, when a treaty of perpetual
amity was concluded, by which the island of
Hongkong, at the mouth of Canton river,
was ceded to England, and the five ports of
Canton, Amo}'-, Fuhchau, Ningpo and Shang-
hai were opened to the commerce of Great
Britain and the residence of foreigners.
This most important event altered the rela-
tions of this ancient people to the rest of the
human race, and effectually severed the bar-
riers which have hitherto prevented the in-
troduction of the Gospel to the country. So
soon as the treaty was published, Messrs.
Shuck and Roberts from Macao, and Mr.
Dean from Bangkok, removed to China and
took up their residence at Hongkong ;
Messrs. Dean and Shuck at the new town
of Victoria, and Mr. Roberts in another part
of the island at Chek-chu. Mr. Goddard
remained at Bangkok prosecuting his accus
tomed labors among the Chinese population
of that city till 1848, when he went to join
the mission in China.
JNIeanwhile at Bangkok both departments
of the mission were committed to the care
of the Siamese missionaries. Two out-sta-
tions were established, one at Teng-kia-chu,
and one at Bang-chang, both of which were
placed under the charge of native assistants.
In 1851, Rev. W. Ashmore and Mrs. Ash-
more arrived at Bangkok as missionaries to
the Chinese. Mr. Ashmore has now ac-
quired the language, and is prosecuting those
labors to which he was appointed. The
latest reports of the mission bear witness to
a somewhat more gratifying pro'gress in
both its departments. The Siamese mission-
aries had before been often invited to the
palace of the king for the purpose of aiding
the monarch and some members of the roj^al
family in the study of English and the me-
chanic arts, and much incidental conversa-
tion had been held respecting the doctrines
of the Gospel. These interviews, while
they have been latterly declined by the mis-
sionaries, when proposed for the former ob-
jects, have become more frequent for the
latter object, and have led to the establish-
ment of a regular system of biblical instruc-
tion at the palace. The two ladies of this
department of the mission, Miss Morse and
Mrs. Smith, formerly Mrs. Jones, are also
constantly engaged in similar teaching either
at the mission school or in private. The
most friendly relations are still maintained
with the government, and even the Budhist
priests themselves in Siam, appear less per-
tinacious in their opposition to the new re-
ligion than in other countries in which Budh-
ism prevails. The Chinese church, which
is still the only one belonging to the mission,
numbers at present only twenty-six mem-
bers, nine having removed to China. In ad-
dition to this, and several Siamese who have
been baptized, but live away from Bangkok,
there were at recent dates eight additional
converts who were about to be baptized.
These are all Siamese. In February, 1854,
Rev. R. Telford and JNIr. G. H. Chandler, the
printer, with their wives, sailed from the
United States for Siam ; Mr. Chandler hav-
ing been home on a visit for the benefit of
his health, and the improvement of his ar-
rangements for printing. Mr. Telford is ap-
pointed to the Chinese department of the
mission. When they arrive at their stations
the two departments will be nearly equally
supplied, though neither will possess a mis-
sionary force at all adequate to the work
which may be advantageously undertaken.
The prospects of the mission — though pros-
pects are often illusory — are thought to be
more encouraging than at any former period.
The mission is organized in one station at
Bangkok, aud four out-stations in the towns
of the neighboring country. It embraces in
676
SIBSAGAR— SIERRA LEONE.
the Siaruesc department Kev. S. G. Smith
and Mr. G. II. Chandler, with their wives,
and Miss Morse a teacher, and in the Chi-
nese department Rev. ]Messrs. Ashmoro and
Telford and their wives, and four native as-
sistants who are employed in both depart-
ments.
STATISTICS FOR 1854.
1 station, 4 out-stations, 4 missionaries,
5 female assistants ; 9 missionaries and as-
sistants ; 4 native preachers and assistants ;
1 church, 35 members ; 2 boarding schools.
21 pupils ; 2 day-schools, 20 pupils ; total of
schools 4, and 41 pupils. — W. Gammeix.
A.MF.RiCAN' BoAUP. — Mcssrs. Abeel and
Tomlin spent some time in Banc;kok in 1831,
and again Mr. Abeel in 1 832. Messrs. Robin-
son and Johnson, with their wives, arrived
July 23, 1834, and Doctor and Mrs. Bradley
on the 18th of Jul)\ 1835, with a printing-
press, and Siamese tvpe. Mr. Caswell after-
wards joined the mission. The missionary
work was prosecuted here by the Board
until 1848 ; but without an}'- marked results.
That year, in consequence of a change of
sentiment on the part of Doctor Bradle}' and
Mr. Caswell, a separation took place between
them and tho Board. And, on the matter
coining up at the meeting of the Board, the
discontinuance of the mission was recom-
mended, and the Prudential Committee after-
wards took action accordingly, [Messrs. Brad-
ley and Caswell were afterwards received
under the care of the American Missionary
Association, and the mission premises were
transferred to that body. For a full account
of the causes which led to these results, the
reader is referred to the report of the Board
and of the Association for 1848.
Amkuicax Missionary Association. — In
Octolicr. 1849, the Association sent out Doc-
tor Bradley, Rev. L. B. Lane, iM. D., Prof.
J. Silsby, with their wives, who in due time
arrived at Bangkok, and entered upon the
missionary service. In 1853, the executive
committee authorized tlie opening of a new
station in Siam, and they speak hopefully of
the future prospects of the mission. The
I)rcsent missionary force is two ordained mis-
sionariis, with tlieir wives.
SIBS.\(K)lv: A town in Assam, — one of
the stations of the Assam mission of the
Am. Baptist Union.
SIREKIA: See Tartary and Siberia.
SIERRA LEONE: A colonial establish-
ment of Great Britiin, on the west co.ast of
Africa, con.sisting of a peninsula about 25
miles in length, north and south, washed by
the Atlantic on the north-west and soutli.
and partly bouiuled on the east by a bay
fonni'd l)y the Sierra Leone river. The
population, consisting chiefly of liberated
slaves, amounted, in 1847. to 41,735. Free-
town, the capital, has 10,580 inhabitants.
The peninsula consists principally of a range
of conical mountains, from 2000 to 3000 feet
in height, surrounded by a belt of level
ground, from one to five miles in breadth.
The location, for Europeans or Americans,
is unhealthy, though not more so than tho
French and Portuguese settlements in other
parts of Western Africa. The chief charac-
teristic is its extreme humidity. More rain
fell there in two days of August, 1838, than
in Britain throughout the entire year.
This colony was founded in 1787. About
1200 free negroes, who, having joined the
ro3'al standard in the war of the American
Revolution, took refuge, at the termination
of the contest; in Nova Scotia, were conveyed
to Sierra Leone, in 1792. To these were
added the Maroons from .Jamaica : and since
the legal abolition of the slave trade, the
negroes taken in the captured vessels, and
liberated, have been carried to the colony.
The constant influx of these poor heathen
Africans has materially tended to retard the
improvement of the colony. A large pro-
portion, however, are enjoying the means of
moral and religious instruction, under the
direction of the missionaries of the Church
and other missionary Societies. (See Africa,
Western, under the heads of Church Miasion-
arij Society, and Wesleyan Missionary So-
ciety.) Many of the colored people brought
from Nova Scotia had there been converted,
under the labors of missionaries who were
associated with Lady Huntingdon. For
more than sixty years they have existed as
a distinct religious body, under the name of
the " Connection of the Countess of Hunting-
don." Simple faith and earnest prayerful-
ness have distinguished them from the be-
ginning, and sustained them under many and
heavy trials. They have now forty-eiu;ht
preachers and exhorters, and more than
tifteen hundred members in church fellow-
ship ; the}'' have also eleven chapels and
several schools. Aid has seldom been re-
ceived by them from any quart<^'r. They
have all along maintained a steadfast devo-
tion to the welfare of their countrymen.
Their attention has been directed to several
localities in and around the colony where tho
people have no Christian teachers, and seve-
ral tribes have invited them to send thera
teachers. By means of some assistance from
fjUgland, they have sent out two ministers
and several teachers, and it is expected that
others will speedily follow them.
liev. E. .J. Fierce, in a letter dated .Jan-
uary 11, 1854, states that Rev. E. Jones,
principal of a seminary for the education of
youn<r men for the ministry, has 10 students,
who read Hebrew quite as well as the ave-
rasre of students in the senior class in our
own theological seminaries. They also read
the (Jreek Testament, and seemed to under-
stand tlio structure of the language.
SOCIETY FOR THE PROPAGATION OF THE GOSPEL.
677
Freeto-WTi is the chief city of Sierra Leone;
in which the Wesleyans have 17 chap-
els, 1 out-station for preaching, 5 missiona-
ries and assistants, 4 catechists, 27 day-
school teachers, 71 Sunda3^-school teachers,
67 local preachers, 4,213 church members,
256 on trial, 12 Sunday-schools, 665 scholars,
11 day-schools, 1400 daj^-scholars : 2,065
scholars in all ; number of attendants on
public worship, 7,534. The Baptists have 2
churches.
SIMLA: A station of the Church IMis-
sionary Society among the hills, between
the Sutlej and Jumna, situated near Saba-
thoo, and elevated 7,200 feet above the level
of the sea. It is a sanatorium for invalids
from the plains of India, a retreat for the
civil and military officers, and a place of
fashionable resort. The number of English
houses is about 200. The country around it
contains a numerous population.
SIMAO: One of the Molucca Islands, in
the Indian Archipelago.
SINGAPORE: A small island at the
southern extremity of the Malay peninsula,
including the town of the same name. In
1836, it contained a population of 20,984, of
whom 13,749 were Chinese settlers, and
9,632 Malays. The town of Singapore is
situated on the south side of the island. Its
central part is occupied with the dwellings
of the merchants, and the military canton-
ments. The Malay quarter is at the east,
and the principal Chinese commercial quar-
ter at the west extremity. The junks from
China bring annually a large number of Chi-
nese settlers. Most of the artizans, laborers,
agriculturists, and shopkeepers, are Chinese.
Singapore was occupied, for a number of
years before the opening of the Five Ports,
as a Chinese mission, by a number of differ-
ent societies ; but the missions there have
never been very productive.
SINDE : A station of the Church Mission-
ary Society, a little east of Bombay.
SINMAH : A town in the south of Arra-
can, on the confines of Burmah ; an out-sta-
tion of the Bassein mission of the American
Baptist Union.
SMYRNA : The principal city of Asiatic
Turkey. Of the cities of the seven churches
addressed in the Apocalypse, Smyrna alone
can be regarded as still flourishmg. The
modern town, which has long been the em-
porium of the Levant, contains a mixed popu-
lation of about 120,000. It is a station of
the mission of the Am. Board to the Arme- !
nians ; also of the Church Missionary Societv.
SOCIETY FOR THE PROPAGATION
OF THE GOSPEL IN FOREIGN PARTS : |
This Society received its charter from King i
"William IIL, in 1701 ; its two great objects ,
being, " to provide for the ministrations of !
the Church of England in the British Colo-
nies, and to propagate the Gospel among the ]
native inhabitants of those countries. The
principal efforts of this Society, however,
have been directed to the British colonists,
rather than to the conversion of the heathen
in general ; and therefore it assumes more
the character of a Home than Foreign Mis-
sionary enterprise. Yet, the Society have
not been backward to embrace opportunities
of preaching the Gospel to the heathen.
Though occasional assistance in books and
money was given to Jamaica, Antigua, Newr
foundland, and other islands, for fourscore
j-ears, the great field of the Society's mis-
sionary labor was the continent of North
America. Shortly after the establishment
of the Society, missions were founded iu
Massachusetts, Connecticut, Rhode Island,
New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, and
the Carolinas ; and the ministers who were
sent to take charge of them were the only
ministers of the Church of England in vast
districts. Among other missionaries of the
Society, the celebrated Jolm Wesley received
an appointment and allowance, in 1735, as
its first missionary in Georgia. It subse-
quently extended its operations, and now
has missionaries in Canada, Nova Scotia,
Newfoundland, the West Indies, the East
Indies, South Africa, Seychelles, Australia,
Tasmania, and New-Zealand. The whole
number of missionaries now maintained by
the Society, in whole or in part, is 491. Be-
sides this, it supports 300 Divinity students,
catechists, and schoolmasters. The follow-
ing table shows the location of the mission-
aries :
DIOCESE.
Nova Scotia.
Frederickton-
QUEBEO
Montreal
To R ONTO -
Colony.
Nova Scotia
Cape Breton-
Pnnce Edward's Island
New Brun8\^ack
Canada East
Canada Wept.
Rupert's Land -Hudson's B'y Territory
Newfoundland Newfoundland
Labrador
Jamaica-
Barbadoes..
Antigua
Guiana
Calcutta...
Madras
Bombay
Colombo
Cape Tows.
Bermudas.
.Tam.iica...
Bahamas..
Sidney
Newcastle.
Melbourne -
Adklaide...
New Zealand.
Tasmania
Tristan d'Achuna.
Bengal
Madras .
Bombay
Ceylon
Cape of Good Hope...
St. Helena
Nnw South Wales
New North Wales
Port Philip
South Australia
Western Australia
New-Zealand-
Van Diera.an's L,and..-
Seychelles
Missionaries.
O 2
d S
^1
53
40
2o
42
121
1
678
SOCIETY ISLANDS— SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
Of this number, 74, in Canada West, are
supported from the interest of the Clergy
Reserve Fund, and 16, in Nova Scotia, by a
Parhamentary grant. The following state-
ment shows the aggregate receipts in periods
of twenty years, the average annual receipts,
the receipts of 1849 and 1850, and the gene-
ral aggregate from the beginning :
A
v'ge ann. rec'pts
£4,114
1769 to
1788,
£82,299
1789 "
1808,
75,616
3,780
1809 «
1828,
386,749
19.337
1829 "
1848,
1.018,888
50^944
1849
' 07,489
1850
62,365
Grand Total,
1,093,406
These sums have been realized by annual
subscriptions, donations, legacies, collections,
dividends, Royal Letters for collections in
churches, and Parliamentary grants.
SOCIETY ISLANDS: A group of Is-
lands in the Southern Pacific, embracing
Huahine, Raiatca, Tahaa, Borabora, Maurua,
Tubal, Moupiha, and Fenuaura, having a
population of 10,000.
SOUTHERN BAPTIST CONVENTION,
Board of Missions : The Southern Baptist
Convention was organized in 1845, in conse-
quence of disagreement between the north-
ern and southern portions of the Baptist
churches on the subject of slavery, when a
separate Board of Missions was constituted
for the south. It held its first annual meet-
ing at Richmond, Va., June 10, 1840, on
which occasion its two first missionaries
were designated to China. It now has a
mission to China, with three stations ; and
a mission to Liberia, with thirteen stations.
It has also projected a mission to Central
Africa, the ground of which has been sur-
veyed by one of its missionaries. The whole
amount received by the Board, as appears
from its biennial reports, is .$118,202 22,
being an annual average of $14,782 77.
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS: The islands
which lie in the Pacific Ocean, south of the
Equator, from their prominence in the mis-
sionary operations of the present century,
have become generally known as Tke South
Sea Islands. Under this designation, we
shall include, in this article, the following
groups, being the field of operations in the
South Sea, occupied by the London Mission-
ary Societ}', viz. : the Georgian, Society, Aics-
tral, Hervey, Navigators^ or Samoa, Pearl,
and Marqupsas Islands ; and the Friendly
and Fcejee Islands, by the Wesleyan Mission-
ary Society.
TiiK Gkorgian Islands are situated in
the South Pacific Ocean between 17" and 18^
soutli latitude, and 149" and 153° west lon-
gitude. Tlic group contains six islands.
/ Takiti, Einico, Tabnaeinanu, or Sir Charles
Sander''s Island, Tetuaroa, Matea, and Mee-
tia.
I Tahiti is the largest of these islands, and
'sometimes gives name to the whole group.
Tahiti was visited bj' Captain Cook, and
from him received the name of Otaheite. but
Tahiti is the name given to it b}-^ the natives.
It consists of two peninsulas united bj'' an
isthmus. The largest is nearly circular, and
about 20 miles in diameter. The smaller
one is oval, about 16 miles long, and 8
broad. The circumference of the whole is-
land is 108 miles. The interior is mountain-
ous, but is surrounded by a border from 2 to
3 miles wide, of low, rich, level land, which
extends from the base of the mountains to
the sea. The population of Tahiti is esti-
mated at about 10,000.
Eimeo, or, as it is called by the natives,
Moorea, is situated about 2° west of Tahiti.
It is about 25 miles in circumference. The
other islands though equally elevated are of
smaller extent.
The Society Islands include Hiidhinc,
Raiatea, Tahaa, Borabora, Maurua, Tubal.
Moupiha, and Fenuaura. The population of
this group is supposed to be about 10,000.
The Austkal Islands are Raivavai, or
High Island, Tubuai, Rurutu, Rima'tara, and
Rapa. They are situated between 22"^ 27'
and 27'' 36' south latitude, and 144° 11' and
150* 47' west longitude. The population is
about 1,000.
Raivavai is one of the most important is-
lands of this group. It is about 20 miles in
circumference, mountainous in the centre,
but has considerable low land.
Rapa is the most southerly of the Austral
Islands. The mountains are craggy, and
picturesque, and the land generally fertile.
Tubuai is a small island about 12 miles in
circumference and thinl}' peopled.
Rurutu and Raimitara are small, and but
little is known of either of them.
The IIeiivey Islands arc situated be-
tween 19^ and 21° south latitude, and 156"
and 161° west longitude, and contain a pop-
ulation of 16,000 or 18,000. The largest and
uK^st important island of the group is Raro-
tonga. This beautiful island remained un-
known until 1823. It was then discovered
by the Rev. Mr. Williams, an English mis-
sionary. It is a mass of mountains, many
of which are high, and remarkably romantic-
The island is about 30 miles in circumference,
and has several good harbors for boats. Its
population is about 7.000.
Mangaia is 20 or 25 miles in circumfer-
ence, and contains between 2,000 and 3,000
inhabitants.
Atiu is about 20 miles in circumference,
hilly, but not mountainous. It is a very ver-
dant island, and contains nearly 2,000 inhab-
itants.
Ailutakl is 18 miles in circumference, and
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
679
has a population of about 2,000. The land-
scapes on this island are rich and variegated.
Mauke is a small, low island, discovered
by Messrs. Williams and Bourne in 1823.
Its former population was considerable, but
when discovered it Avas so much reduced by
repeated wars that it numbered onl}' 300.
Mitiaro is a still smaller island Ijnng 20
miles north-west of Mauke. It has also been
nearly depopulated by famine and wars, so
that it contains not more than 100 inhabi-
tants.
Hervey''s Island is the one from which the
group takes its name, which was given by
Captain Cook, in honor of Captain Hervey.
The Navigators' or Samoa Islands are
situated between lO'' and 20° south latitude,
and 169° and 174'' west longitude, and con-
sist of eight islands, Manua, Orosenga, Ofu,
Tutuila, Upolu, Manono, Aborima, and
Savaii.
Manua is a small and almost uninhabi-
ted island, circular in form, and so elevated
as to be visible at a distance of 40 or 50
miles.
Orosenga and Ofu are two small islands,
separated from each other by a narrow chan-
nel.
Tutuila is about 50 miles west of Orosenga.
It is from 80 to 100 miles in circumference.
Upolu is between 150 and 200 miles in
circumference. The mountains on this is-
land are very high, and covered with verdure
to their summits.
Manono is about 5 miles in circumference,
and is attached to Upolu by a coral reef.
Aborima is a small island about 2 miles
in circumference, situated half way between
Manono and Savaii. It received its name,
which signifies the hollow of the hand, from
its shape. It is supposed to be the crater of
an extinct volcano.
Savaii, the largest island of the group, is
about 250 miles in circumference. The
mountains are very high, and visible at a
distance of 600 or 700 miles. With the ex-
ception of the Sandwich Islands, this group
is the largest and most populous of the nu-
merous clusters in the Pacific at which mis-
sions have been commenced. Its population
is estimated at 160,000.
The Paumotu, or Pearl Islands, are sit-
uated between 17° and 23° south latitude,
and IZd" and 145° west longitude. The
group consists of a large number of small,
low islands. They have been called by ditfei"-
ent names, as, the Labyrinth, the Pearl Is-
lands, Paumotu, the Palliser Islands, and the
Dangerous Archipelago. Some of the islands
have received the name of Crescent, Bow,
Harp, and Chain, which have been regarded
as indicative of their shape. The population
is 8,000 or 4,000.
The Marquesas Islands are situated
about 7° or 8° north of the Pearl Islands,
and extend from 7^ to W south latitude,
and from 138° to 140° west longitude. They
consist of two clusters. The southern clus-
ter contains five islands. They were called
Marquesas by Alvaro Mendano, a Spanish
navigator, in honor of his patron, Marques
Mendoza, viceroy of Peru. The northern
group also consists of five islands, and as it
is distinct from the other cluster, it has
sometimes been called by another name.
Both groups, however, are usually designa-
ted by the common name jMarquesas. The
geographical extent of the united groups is
inferior to that of the Georgian and Society
Islands, but the population is supposed to be
much greater.
Most of the South Sea Islands are sur-
rounded, at a distance of from one to two
miles from the shore, hj a coral reef, or belt
of coral rock, several j'ards in width.
Against this reef the waves of the Pacific
are constantly dashing, and being impeded
in their course, rise from 10 to 14 feet above
the surface of the reef, and thus form a beau-
^ful liquid arch. From the outer edge, the
reefs shelve away underneath into deep hol-
lows. In landing from canoes, when the sea
is high, there is danger of upsetting, and
being forced by the violence of the waves
into these awful caverns, from which escape
would be impossible. The water within the
i-eef is placid and transparent, and at the
bottom may be seen coral of every shape and
color, among which fishes of various hues
and sizes are constantly sporting. In most
of these reefs there is an opening large
enough to admit vessels, through which a
stream of water enters the ocean.
The climate, though hotter than that of
Europe, is more temperate than in those
parts of South America whose latitude is
the same. Though the distance of the
groups from the equator is, on an average,
only 17", they are surrounded by a vast ex-
panse of water, and enjoy almost daily a re-
freshing land and sea breeze. Still, the heat
in the low lands is constant, and often ex-
cessive. The changes, on the other hand, are
neither sudden nor violent, and the warmth
of the climate, though debilitating to Eu-
ropeans, occasions no inconvenience to the
natives.
The islands are for the most part hilly,,
often mountainous, and on some of them the
mountains rise to an immense height. The^
sides of the mountains are covered with ver-
dure, and at their bases are spread fertile and.
luxuriant valleys. It would be difficult for
the strongest imagination to conceive an
earthly paradise more lovely than is to be
found in some portions of the South Seals-
lands. Freed from the usual power of the
tropical heat, and fanned by the soft breezes
of a perpetual spring, these delightful
regions present to the eye extensive and.
680
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS
beautiful views of hills and valleys, forests
and streams. The scenery is in general fine,
especially on the island of Tahiti, which
abounds in landscapes of the most charming
kind.
Yet the beautiful is occasionally mingled
with the terrible. The winds, though gener-
ally moderate, are sometimes violent and
tempestuous. "Whirlwinds visit the islands
and produce the most disastrous conse-
quences.
Water-spouts are of frequent occurrence,
and are a source of much terror to the is-
landers.
The vegetable productions of the South
Sea Islands are abundant. Many of them
are invaluable to the natives, and from some
of them, they derive almost their only
means of subsistence. The trees are re-
markable for their size, and the beauty of
their foliage or flowers. Most of them are
evergreens, and often present an appearance
both novel and interesting. The old and new
leaves, the bud, and the blossom, the young
fruit, and the ripe, are found togcthe*
throughout the year.
Tiie most valuable trees are, the bread-
fruit, the cocoanut, the cahdle-nut, the
auti, or paper-mulberr)', from which most of
their material for making cloth is derived ;
besides several other magnificent trees, very
useful for their timber.
The native esculent roots are, the taro or
arwn, which is prepared in the same manner
as the bread-fruit, the yam, and the sweet-
potato.
Many of the most valuable tropical
fruits have been introduced into the islands.
Vines, oranges, limes, and other plants were
brought from England by Captains Cook,
Bligh, and Vancouver. Citrons, tamarinds,
pine-apples, figs, and coffee-plants have since
been introduced, and successfully cultivated.
Foreign vegetables do not generally thrive.
The only quadrupeds originally found on
the islands were hogs, dogs. rats, and lizards.
Rats were exceedingly numerous, and at
Mangaia, and some of the other islands, they
■were a common article of food ; but after
the introduction of Christianity, they ceased
to be eaten. So numerous were these
animals that one or two persons were con-
stantly kept in attendance on the tables for
the purpose of keeping them off. Horses,
asses, cattle, goats, and sheep, have all been
"brought to the islands, and with the excep-
tion of tlie cattle appear to thrive. The
common domestic fowl is reared in great
numbers to supply the vessels that touch at
the islamls for rcfrcsliment, but they are lit-
tle usoil by the natives. The coast abounds
with lisli and turtle. The only venomous
reptiles found on the islands, are a species
of cc ntipL'dos, and a small kind of scorpion.
There are several species of snakes, all of
which are esteemed good food by the na-
tives.
Inhabitants, — The islands of the Pacific
Ocean are inhabited by two races of men,
which exhibit traces of distinct origin. One
race is characterized by a black skin and
crisped hair. The other resembles the
Malays. The skin is of a bright copper
color, the hair long, black, and glossy. The
first race belongs to Australasia, or AVestern
Polynesia ; the latter inhabit Eastern Poly-
nesia, including those islands in the Southern
Ocean which we have described. Although
the inhabitants of these islands exhibit the
same general characteristics, the people of
each cluster are marked by some peculiari-
ties. Their origin is involved in obscurity.
Language. — There are eight distinct dia- 1
lects in the Polynesian language. The re- 1
semblance which exists between them is,|
however, so strong, that with little variation
one language can be spoken by the inhabit-
ants of all the islands. It abounds in vowels, '
and all their syllables end with a vowel. On
this account, as well as for other reasons, it
was extremely difficult to acquire a know-
ledge of it or to reduce it to a written system.
General Characteristics. — The inhabitants
are distinguished by vivacity, and move with
quickness and ease. The men are generally
tall, often more than six feet high. Their
forms are well proportioned and s^'mmetri-
cal. The women, though they often present
elegant models of the human figiu'e, are in-
ferior, in appearance, to the other sex. The
chiefs are men of uncommon size — a fact
which is probably to be attributed to the
different treatment which the sons of chiefs
receive in inlimcy and childhood.
Tattooing was common in most of the
groups of the Pacific. It was considered a
personal ornament, and was practised by all
classes, and by both sexes. The operation
was so painful that a whole figure could
rarely be completed at once. ^luch taste
and elegance were often displayed in the ar-
rangement of the figures. They were first
drawn on the skin with a piece of charcoal.
The instruments used for perforating the
skin were constructed of the bones of birds
or fishes, fastened with fine thread to a
small stick. The coloring fluid was made of
the kernel of the candle-nut, baked, and re-
duced to charcoal, and then mixed with oil.
The points of the instrument having been
dipped in this fluid, ami applied to the sur-
face of the bod}', a blow upon the handle
punctured the skin and injected the dye.
The dress of the islanders was various in
form, color, and texture. It was always
light and loose, and often elegant. AH
, classes used the same materials for clothing,
j and the dress of the two sexes dillcrod but
I little. Both men and women wore foMs of
I cloth round the body. Some of the former
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
681
wore a garment extending below the knee,
open at the sides, with a hole cut in the
middle, through which to pass the head.
The women wore the ahii-pu in the form of
a scarf over their shoulders. With the ex-
ception of the ornament of a bunch of
flowers, or a wreath of cocoanut leaves, with
which the forehead was sometimes shaded,
the head was uncovered. The unmarried fe-
males woi'e a white instead of a red mat,
were neither anointed nor colored with
rouge, and had a profusion of graceful curls
on one side of the head, while the other was
shaved. The females generally wore their
hair short, the men sometimes long, some-
times short. It was often braided in a kind
of cue behind, or wound in a knot on the
top of the head. The men plucked out their
beard by the roots, or shaved it ofi" with a
shark's tooth. Some, however, allowed the
beard to grow, and braided it together.
Since the islanders have become civilized,
they all shave once a week, and the chiefs
more frequently.
The mental capacity of the South Sea Is-
landers is thought by the missionaries not
to be inferior to that of Europeans. Chil-
dren learn to read, write, and cypher, and
readily commit their lessons to memor}^.
Many who commenced learning the alphabet
at thirty or forty years of age, were able to
read in the Testament in the course of
twelve months. They commit to memory
with ease large portions of Scripture, and
sometimes whole books. They have made
considerable progress in the use of numbers.
They are remarkably curious and inquisitive,
and some of them are ingenious and imita-
tive. They often ask questions of the most
interesting character, and are anxious to ac-
quire knowledge.
The islanders are generous and hospitable.
Their native modes of living were simple,
requiring little exertion to supply their
wants, and thus cultivating habits of indo-
lence. They are cheerful and good natured ;
but their domestic habits are unsocial, and
their hours for restand meals irregular. They
manifested an extreme fondness for orna-
ments and love of pleasure, no small portion
of their time being devoted to games and
sports.
Marriage. — Among the Tahitians mar-
riages were often celebrated when the
females were twelve or thirteen j^ears of
age, and the males two or three years older.
The parties were generally betrothed at an
early age. The principal part of the mar-
riage ceremony consisted in the bridegroom's
throwing a piece of cloth over the bride, or
the friends throwing it over both.
Moral Character. — In the Georgian and
Society Islands, infanticide prevailed to an
incredible extent, and of those who were
6ufFei*ed to live, it is stated by Mr. Ellis, that
" their years of childhood and youth were
passed in indolence, irregularity, and unre-
strained indulgence in whatever afforded
gratification."
The moral habits of the islanders were,
many of them, such, that the veil of oblivion
ought forever to hide them from the view.
The revolting forms in which human de-
pravity developed itself among them will
not bear the light. They were often engaged
in savage wars, which gave them a ferocious
character. They were addicted to thievish
habits, and to robbery and plunder. Their
dances and other amusements were conduct-
ed with shocking indecency ; their conversa-
tion was low and vile, and chastity was un-
known among them. Some of them were
cannibals. "Awfully dark, indeed," says
Mr. Ellis, "was their moral character, and
notwithstanding the apparent mildness of
their disposition, and the cheerful vivacity
of their conversation, no portion of the hu-
man race was ever, perhaps, sunk lower in
brutal licentiousness and moral degradation
than this isolated people."
The Arts. — Previous to their intercourse
with Europeans, the use of iron was unknown
to the natives. Long before the missiona-
ries settled among them, however, many of
them had learnt its value from the ships that
visited their coasts. But of the method of
working it they were still ignorant. The
houses of the natives were little more than
thatched roofs or sheds, supported by posts
and rafters. The inside of the chiefs' houses
was often ornamented with beautifully
fringed matting. The floor was covered
with long dried grass, or mats. If the
family was large, little huts were sometimes
erected near the principal building, for the
accommodation of the children and servants
at night ; but the greater part of the houses
contained only one room. Theu* beds con-
sisted of a coarse kind of matting, made of
palm leaves woven by the hand. The prm-
cipal articles of household furniture consisted
of some wooden stools, pillows, and a few
wooden dishes. The pillows were ten or
twelve inches in length, and four or five
inches high, cut out of a single piece of
wood, and curved on the upper side so as to
fit the head. The natives were accustomed
to sit cross-legged on mats, bat occasionally
used a stool. The principal dish was called
iimete. Those belonging to the chiefs were
often six or eight feet long, a foot and a half
wide, and twelve inches deep, and resembled
a canoe rather than receptacles for food.
The dishes in common use were two or three
feet long, and twelve or eighteen inches
wide. Each dish had four feet cut out of
the same piece of wood. The papahia or
mortar was used for pounding bread-fruit
and plantains, which was done with a stone
pestle called a penu. Their drinking cups
682
SOUip SEA ISLANDS
and vessels for washing their hands were
made of the cocoa-nut shell, and were often
beautifully carved. A piece of bamboo-cane
was their only substitute for a knife, but
this they used for a variety of purposes.
Like the American Indians, they obtained
fire by rubbing together two dry sticks.
Their principal agricultural instrument was
a short stick, and their only tools were an
adze of stone and chisels of bone. Their
cloth and mats were made by the women,
from the bark of trees.
Wars, at most of the islands, were fre-
quent and exceedingly destructive. At Her-
vey's Island, they occurred so often, and
were so exterminating in their character,
that the whole population was at one time
reduced to about sixty. A few years after-
wards, when this island was visited by one
of the missionaries, it was found that by re-
peated combats this little remnant of the
former population had become smaller still,
so that five men, three women, and a few
children were the only survivors. When
preparations were to be made for war, every
thing else was neglected ; for war was con-
sidered the most important end of life, and
training for its successful pursuit was held
in the higliest estimation. In time of war
all who were capable of bearing arms were
called on to join tlie forces of the chieftain
to whom they belonged, and the farmers
were obliged to render military service when-
ever their landlord required it.
War was seldom proclaimed hasfly, and
the preparatory deliberations were frequent
and protracted. Great importance was at-
tached to the will of the goils. If they were
favorable, conquest was considered as sure ;
but il' unfavorable, defeat, and perhaps death,
was certain. For the purpose of ascertaining
the decision of the gods, divination was em-
ployed, and in connection with it, olferings
were presented to the divinities invoked. Suc-
cess or failure was inferred from the appear-
ance of the animal otfered, either before or af-
ter it was placed on the altar. The victorious
party pillaged the villages of their enemies,
cut down and destroyed all the bread-fruit
and cocoa-nut trees, and often left the island
almost uninhabited. Tlie vamiuished fled to
the mountains, where the}' were pursued b}'
their enemies, and sometimes overtaken and
slain. Those who eluded pursuit, took up
their resilience in caves and dens of the
mountains, and sometimes became perfectly
wild. Captives taken in war were either
slain on the spot, or sacrificed to the gods.
On the d;iy following the battle, the bodies
of tliu nhnn, having suffered the greatest in-
dignities. Were olFered to Oro, the god of
war, as an acknowledgment of his assistance.
In connection witli their wars, the natives
were accustomed to observe many ceremo-
nies, and to olTer human sacrifices to Oro,
whom they wished to preside over the army.
Various ceremonies and offerings to the gods,
together with divination, also accompanieu
the making of peace.
Government. — Although there were many
points of resemblance in the government of
the different clusters of islands in the South
Sea. there were also some peculiarities in
each. In the Society Islands, and in some
of the other groups, the government was
hereditary and despotic. The chiefs in the
island of Tongataboo were elected, and their
power limited. In the Marquesas and Navi-
gators' Islands, each tribe was governed by
its own chief, and was independent of every
other. In all the islands, the government
was interwoven with their system of idola-
try. The god and the king were generally
supposed to share the authority over man-
kind. Next in rank to the king was the
queen, who often governed a whole island.
Immediately on the birth of a son to the
king, the infant was proclaimed sovereign,
and the father became a subject. lie, how-
ever, continued to transact business, but paid
the same homage to his son that he had be-
fore demanded for himself. The king and
queen, whenever they traveled by land, were
always carried on men's shoulders, and ac-
companied by a number of "sacred men, or
bearers," who relieved each other of their
burdens. The distinction between king and
people was strongly marked. Every thing
connected with the former, even the ground
on which he trod, was considered sacred, and
no person was allowed to touch eitlier the
king or queen, on pain of death. The inau-
guration of the king took place some years
before he arrived at the age of twenty-one,
and this festival, although celebrated in a
magnificent manner, was marked with crimes
of the deepest dye. Each district had its
own chief, whose power in that district was
supreme. They had no regular code of laws,
nor any court of justice. The people avenged
their own injuries, and the chiefs punished
with death or banishment. Theft, altliough
common among them, was severely punished.
Religion. — The islanders generally, and es-
pecially the Samoans. had a vague idea of a
Supreme Being, whom they regarded as " the
Creator of all things, and the Author of their
mercies," calleil Tangaroa, or Taaroa. They
believed in a future state, but their ideas re-
specting it were vague and indefinite; and
their notions of paradise were material and
sensual. Idolatr}' prevailed at most of the
islands. The inhabitants of several of them
worshiped their departed ancestors ; others,
birds and insects, while the greater part of
tliem had gods, the work of their own luands.
Tiieir gods were nearly a hundred in number,
and every family <jf rank had its tutelar idol.
So great was their fear <if the gods, that, to
avert their anger, they would not only devote
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
683
to them every valuable article they possessed,
but murder their fellow beings, and offer
them to the god. The worship of the is-
landers consisted in prayers, offerings, and
the sacrifice of victims. Their prayers
were generally vain and useless repeti-
tions, addressed to the god in a loud and
unpleasant tone of voice. Their offerings
included "the fowls of the air, the fishes of
the sea, the beasts of the field, and the fruits
of the earth, together with their choicest
manufactures." Domestic altars, or those
erected near the corpse of a departed friend,
were small squares of wicker work. The
altars in the temples were usually eight or
ten feet high, and were ornamented with
plantain leaves, and covered with sacred
boughs. The animals, when presented alive,
received the sacred mark, and were allowed
to roam at liberty. When slain, great care
was taken that a bone should not be broken,
or the animal disfigured in any way. The
atmosphere in the vicinity of the maraes was
frequently rendered offensive by the action
of the heat on the offerings of meat left on
the altar. In some of the islands, the in-
habitants inflict injuries on themselves, in
connection with their offerings.
Besides animals and fruits, human victims
were not unfrequently offered to the gods.
These barbarous rites commonly took place
in time of war, at great national festivals, or
the erection of temples, and during the ill-
ness of the king and chiefs. The victims
were generally captives taken in war, or
persons who had rendered themselves odious
to the king. At the request of the priest, a
stone was sent by the king to the chief of
the district where the person selected as a
victim resided. If the stone was received,
it was an indication that the i-equisition
would be complied with. Certain districts
were regarded as tahu^ or devoted. From
these districts, and generall}^ from families
where one victim had been previously taken,
another was demanded. When it was known
that any ceremonies were near, at which hu-
man sacrifices would be offered, the mem-
bers of the devoted families fled to the
mountains or caves, and remained till the
ceremonies were past. The victims were
generally unconscious of danger, till they
were seized, or stunned by a blow. Their
doom was then fixed, and their death certain.
The account which has here been given
does not, however, apply to the religious
system of the natives of the Samoas, or
Navigators' Islands. They had neither tem-
ples nor altars, and practised none of the
barbarous rites that were observed at some
of the other groups. The form of supersti-
tion most prevalent at the Samoas was the
worship of the etu. This consisted of some
bird, fish, or reptile, in which they supposed
that a spirit resided. It was not uncommon
to see an intelligent looking chief praying to
a fly, an ant, or a lizard.
The islanders generally had both stated
and occasional seasons of worship. The lat-
ter were observed in times of national ca-
lamities, such as the desolation of war, or
the illness of their rulers. At the close of
war.they were accustomed to perform certain
ceremonies, the object of which was to purify
the land from the defilement occasioned by
the incursions of an enemy. In connection
with these ceremonies, prayers were offered
to the gods, that they would cleanse the land
from pollution. It was then considered safe
to remain on the soil ; but#if the ceremony
had been neglected, death would have been
anticipated. The illness of the king or chiefs
was supposed to have been owing to the dis-
pleasure of the gods, on account of some
offence committed either by them or the peo-
ple. Prayers, if offered frequently, were
supposed to avert anger and prevent death.
Costly offerings always accompanied their
prayers to the god, and the value of the gift
was in proportion to the rank of the chief.
Whole fields of plantains, and a hundred pigs
have often been presented to a god at once.
If recovery followed these ceremonies, the
gods were supposed to be pacified, but if
death ensued, they were considered as inex-
orable, and were destroyed.
Keligious ceremonies were connected with
almost every event of their lives. An iibu,
or prayer, was offered before they ate their
food, when they tilled their ground, planted
their gardens, built their houses, launched
their canoes, cast their nets, and commenced
or concluded a journey.
Their " first fruits " were always present-
ed to the gods. At the close of the year
they observed a national festival, which was
considered as an annual acknowledgment to
the gods. A sumptuous banquet was pro-
vided, after which each individual visited his
family marae or temple, to offer prayers for
the spirits of departed friends. Witchcraft
and sorcery were common among them.
MISSIONS.
London Missionary Society. — Georgian
Islands. — In 1796, this Society purchased
the ship Duff, and sent her out under the
command of Capt. James Wilson, who had
retired from the East India service several
years before, with twenty-nine missionaries.
They left Portsmouth on the 23d of Septem-
ber, and arrived in safety at Tahiti on the
4th of March following. On their arrival,
seventy-four canoes, each carrying about
twenty natives, put off from the shore, and
rowed rapidly towards them. About one
hundred of the natives came on board, and
began to dance and caper about the deck in
the most frantic manner. When their aston-
ishment and delight had in some measure
684
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
subsided, many of tliem voliintarily left the |
vessel, and others were sent away by a ven-
erable old man. a near relation of the royal
family, called JNIanne Manne. They after-
wards landed, and were presented by the
king with a house, built by his father for
Capt. Bligh— a spacious building, 108 feet
long and 48 wide.
Tiie island had been visited by two Spanish
Catholic priests, in 1774, who resided about
ten months on the island, but effected nothing.
Captain "Wilson, through the medium of a
Swede who acted as interpreter, informed
Otu, the king, of the object and design of the
voyage. The kifg received the communica-
tion with favor, and formally ceded the whole
district of Matavai to Captain Wilson and
the missionaries ; but the missionaries were
not expected to appropriate the land to their
own use to the exclusion of the original pro-
prietors.
The Duff now proceeded on her way to
the Friendly Islands, where ten missionaries
were landed. Captain Wilson then visited
the Marquesian Islands, and left one mis-
•siouary there, after which he returned again
to Tahiti. He found all the missionaries in
good health, and learned with pleasure from
them that the natives continued to treat
them as friends, and that they had furnished
them witli abundant supplies of food. On
the 4th of August, 1797, he sailed from Ma-
tavai, taking with him one of the mission-
aries, who expressed a desire to return ; and
on his arrival in England, the society ob-
served a day of public thanksgiving for the
success that had attended the voyage. This
day was kept on the first Monday of the
month, the same that has since been observed
as the Monthly Concert. Dr. Ilaweis preached
on the occasion, and such was the effect of
his appeal, that the very next day the Mis-
sionary Society passed a resolution to un-
dertake another voyage to the Pacific Ocean.
In tlie latter part of December, 1798, the
Duff sailed from England, under the com-
mand of Captain Thomas Robson, on her
second voyage, with a reinforcement of twen-
ty-nine missionaries. Ten of them were
married, five were ordained ministers, two
were actjuainted with medicine and surgery,
and most of the others were botanists, agri-
culturists, and artisans. On the 13th of Feb-
ruary, 1799, a little less than two months
from the time of leaving England, the Duff
and all the missionaries on board were cap-
tured oif Cape Frio by the Buonaparte, a
French privateer. Tiiey were taken to Monte
Video, wliere they remained several weeks.
The Captain of the privateer appears to have
been a kind-hearteii man, and expressed
great sympathy fur the missionaries, saj'ing,
tliat if he had Ivuowu who they were and the
'">nse in which tliuy were engaged, he would
' given five hundred pounds out
of his own pocket than to have met with
them. By his kindness the missionaries
were at length furnished with a passage to
Rio Janeiro. On their way to that port
they were again taken captive by a Portu-
guese frigate bound to Lisbon. During this
voyage, the missionaries suffered not only
from want of proper accommodations and
food, but from the inhuman conduct of the
Captain of the frigate. On their arrival at
Lisbon, September 22d, they were set at
liberty, and, with the exception of one of*
their number who had died, returned to
England.
In the mean time, the king and chiefs con-
tinued friendly to the missionaries, and sup-
plied them liberally with such things as the
island afforded. Several of the missionaries
had been selected on account of their ac-
quaintance with the mechanic arts ; and the
surprise of the natives was great, on seeing
their tools, and the readiness with which
they were used, but particularly, in the work-
ing of iron.
While some of the missionaries were, em-
ployed in making the natives acquainted with
the arts, others were diligentl_y exploring the
adjacent country, and planting the seeds
which they had brought from Europe. They
all began to apply themselves diligently to
the acquisition of the language, which proved
to be a most laborious undertaking.
In 1798, in consequence of attempting to
assist Captain Bishop, of the ship Nautilus,
in recovering two of his sailors, who had de-
serted with the ship's boat, four of the mis-
sionaries were seized by a party of natives,
who attempted to drown them ; and it was
thought that the outrage was committed
with the sanction of Otu, the young king.
However, they were rescued by some of the
natives, and taken to Pomare, the old king ;
who, with his queen, treated them kindly,
restored several articles which had been
taken from them, and sent them home in his
own boat. But, in consequence of this oc-
currence, eleven of the missionaries, con-
sidering their lives in danger, determined to
leave the island, in the ship that was then
there. Pomare. with much persuasion, in-
duced Mr. and Mrs. Eyre, and five single mis-
sionaries to remain ; but the departure of the
remainder of the eleven crippled the mission
very much. Those who remained now deemed
it expedient to give up to Pomare their public
stores, and all the property they possessed,
together with the blacksmith's shop and tlio
tools. But, notwitlistanding this precaution,
they were fre(piently alarmed by intolligenco
thai the mission-house Avas marked out for
destruction, and they were several times
plundered of valuable articles. Hostilities
also commenced in the district of Pare, in
consequence of the execution, by order of
Pomare, of two of the men who had so
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
685
cruelly treated the missionaries. The in-
habitants rose in arms to revenge their death ;
and when peace was oflfcred them, they re-
jected it. Pomare therefore attacked them
with a numerous force, drove them to the
mountains, killed fourteen of their number,
and burnt forty or fifty houses. Otu, and
his father Pomare, not bemg on friendly
terms, Manne Manne, the chief priest, taking
sides with Otu, formed a league with him to
deprive Pomare of all authority in Tahiti.
They made war upon the district of Matavai,
put the inhabitants to flight, and took pos-
session of the land. The triumph of the old
priest, however, was short. Pomare gave
private directions to Idia, the queen, to pro-
cure his assassination. At the earnest solici-
tation of his mother, Otu, though in the
closest alliance with Manne Manne, con-
sented to his death. This event appeared to
unite in one interest Otu and his father.
The inhabitants of Matavai left their places
of retreat, and having presented a peace-
oifering, re-occupied their land. The mis-
sionaries resumed their attempts to instruct
the natives, but continued to meet with much
to discourage them, not only in the acquisi-
tion of the language, but from the insensi-
bility of the natives.
In November, 1799, the missionaries were
called to mourn over the death of Mr. Lewis,
one of their number. For some months pre-
vious to this event, his conduct had been
such as to excite the fears of his brethren,
and lead them to feel the utmost solicitude
respecting him. Soon after the departure
of the Nautilus, he expressed his intention
of uniting in marriage with a native female,
but as the missionaries considered her as an
idolatress, they endeavored to dissuade him
from it. Mr. Lewis, however, persevered in
his determination, on account of which the
connection that had subsisted between him
and the other missionaries was dissolved.
He removed from the mission-house to an-
other part of the district, but was still con-
stant in attendance on public worship, and
industrious in the cultivation of his garden.
As soon as the report of his death reached
the missionaries, they hastened to his house,
where they found his body, which presented
indications that he had been murdered.
Soon after this the small band was again re-
duced, by the departure of Mr. Harris to
New South Wales ; but his place was sup-
plied, in the January following, by the return
of Mr. and Mrs. Henry from Port Jackson.
Until the year 1800, public worship was
held in the mission house; but on the 5th
of March, of that year, the missionaries, with
the assistance of several of the natives, com-
menced the erection of a chapel. The mate-
rials were mostly furnished by the chiefs,
and when it was nearly completed, Pomare
sent a,Jish as an offering to Jesus Christ, re-
questing that it might be hung up in the new
chapel. This was the first building erected
in the South Sea Islands for the worship of
the true God. At the time of its completion
the missionaries indulged the hope of seeing
it regularly filled with worshipers ; but they
were obliged early in the year 1802, to pull
it down in order to prevent its affording
shelter to their enemies, or being set on fire.
The missionaries continued to labor among
the people, but without any apparent success.
Their situation was in many respects im-
proved, but their property was still exposed
to the thefts of the natives, and their feelings
constantly tried by the apathy of the de-
graded beings for whose benefit they were
making such sacrifices.
In the month of June, 1800, the mission-
aries were visited with a new and unexpected
affliction. Mr. Broomhall, who had for some
time evinced much coldness and indifference in
respect to religious things, at length avowed
that his sentiments had become entirely chang-
ed, and that he no longer believed in the im-
mortality of the soul, or the reality of a divine
influence on the mind. His companions en-
deavored to remove his skepticism ; but, fail-
ing in their efforts, they separated him from
their communion, and he soon afterwards left
the island. The brethren followed him with
their prayers, but for years received no ac-
count of him. At length he made himself
known to the Baptist missionaries at Seram-
pore, and conversed freely with them respect-
ing his state. He appeared deeply penitent,
renounced his erroneous sentiments, and pro-
fessed his belief in the truths of the Christian
revelation. Shortly afterwards, he embarked
on another voyage from which he never re-
turned, and nothing has since been heard of him.
In July, 1801, a reinforcement of eight mis-
sionaries arrived at Tahiti from England.
Tlie number of missionaries now amounted to
thirteen, who were organized into a regular
body.with rules for the regulation of their pro-
ceedings.
In 1802, the missionaries who had been
longest on the island had acquired so much of
the language as to be able to preach to the
natives in their tongue. Early in that year,
Messrs. Nott and Elder made the_ first mis-
sionary tour of Tahiti, and in a little more
than thirty days preached in nearly every dis-
trict. The natives seemed interested in the
account of the creation, and asked various
questions about Jehovah, and his Son Jesus
Christ. Some of them were much affected by
the exhibition of Jesus as the atonement for
sin, others said they desired to pray to the
true God, but were afraid to do so lest the
gods of Tahiti should destroy them. But at
this time a serious war broke out, in conse-
quence of the king having taken their national
idol, Oro, from the district of Atehuru, by
force ; which, for a time, interrupted the ope-
686
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
rations of the mission. For many years the
missionaries were treated ■with ridicule and
contempt, and their hearts were often grieved
to sec the same ignorance, superstition, and
cruelty, which they found on their arrival, still
prevail among the heathen. Sometimes when
tliey had gone to every house in a village, and
the people had not only promised to attend
their meeting, but had actually set out with
them, they found on reaching the appointed
place, that only two or three had arrived there.
Those that came often brought with them dogs
or cocks, which they would set to fighting
outside the circle of persons to whom the mis-
sionaries were preaching. In addition to these
and similar trials, they were sometimes charg-
ed with being the authors of all the disasters
of the people, and especially with being the
cause of all the diseases which prevailed among
them, and which they supposed were brought
upon them by the influence of the foreigners
with their God.
In Sept. 1803, old King Pomare, who had
always been their friend, died. Before his
death he recommended them to the protection
of his son, Otu, who now assumed the name of
Pomare. Early in 1805, they had formed a
vocabulary of Tahitian words, and prepared a
catechism in the language. They had also
made considerable progress in the instruction
of the children.
The king had for some time applied himself
to writing, and had become so fond of using
his pen, and his progress was so rapid, that in
the beginning of 1807 he was able to address
a letter to the Missionary Society of London.
He first composed it in the Tahitian language,
and afterwards transcribed the English trans-
lation which was made for him.
In October of this year, IMr. Davies opened
a school for boj^s in a part of the mission-
house, and was so much encouraged that he
composed a spelling-book in the Tahitian lan-
guage, which was sent to England and printed.
Near the close of 1807, the mission sustain-
ed a heavy lo.ss in the death of Mr. Jefferson.
He was a man of ardent piety and great per-
severance, who for ten years had labored unre-
mittingly to bring the heathen to a knowledge
of the truth.
In November of the following year a rebel-
lion broke out, and the king was defeated.
The missionaries were compelled to leave the
island, their premises being destroyed, and all
their labor apparently lost." All of them, with
the exception of Mr. Nott, embarked the
first opportunity from Iluahine, and arrived at
Port Jackson, New South AVaies, in Febru-
ary, 1810, Mr. Nott remaining on the island
of Elmco. But it was not long before they
received letters from King Pomare, expressing
the deepest sorrow at their absence, and in-
viting them to return as soon as possible.
And in the autumn of 1811. five of them re-
joined Mr. Nott, at Eimco. They were receiv-
ed with joy by the king. During their ab-
sence he had scrupulously observed the Chris-
tian Sabbath, and he now expressed the
deepest contrition on account of his past life.
He spent much of his time in reading and
writing and in earnest inquiries about God,
and the way of acceptance through Jesus
Christ. He had for some time past shown
contempt for the idols of his ancestors, and
expressed a desire to be taught a more excel-
lent way, that he might obtain the favor of
the true God. This change in the king's views
had been noticed by his subjects with the most
fearful apprehensions. They were powerfully
affected on one occasion, when a present was
brought him of a turtle, an animal which had
always been held sacred, and which it was
customary to dress with sacred fire within the
precincts of the temple, part of it being inva-
riably offered to the idol. The attendants
were proceeding with the turtle to the marae,
when Pomare called them back, atdtold them
to prepare an oven to bake it, in his own kitch-
en, and serve it up, without offering it to the
idol. The people around were astonished, and
could hardly believe that the king was in a
state of sanity, or was really in earnest. The
king repeated his direction ; a fire was made,
the turtle baked, and served up at the next
repast. The people of the king's household
stood in mute expectation of some fearful visi-
tation of the anger of the god as soon as a
morsel of the fish should be touched. The
king cut up the turtle, and began to eat it,
inviting some that sat at meat with him to do
the same, but no one could be induced to
touch it, as they all expected every moment to
see him either expire or writhe in strong con-
vulsions ; and although the meal was finished
without any evil result, they carried away the
dishes with many expressions of astonishment,
confidently expecting that some judgment
would overtake him before the morrow.
Pomare now requested baptism, but the mis-
sionaries judged it expedient to defer it till he
received more instruction.
Soon after the return of the missionaries,
two chiefs arrived from Tahiti, and invited Po-
mare to return and resume his government in
that island. After his departure they were
cheered by the accounts which they received
from time to time of his eflbrts to enlighten
his subjects ; and one of the missionaries who
visited Tahiti, returned with the report that a
.spirit of inquiry had been awakened among
some of the inhabitants of that island, and
that two of those whom they had formerly in-
structed, occasionally met to pray to God.
Messrs. Scott and Hayward were then .'^ent tp
visit Tahiti ; and the niorning after their arri-
val they retired to the bushes near their lodg-
ings for meditation and prayer, when Mr.
Scott heard a native engaged in praytT in his
own mother-tongue. " It was the first native
voice in praise and prayer that he had ever
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
m
heard, and he listened almost entranced with
the appropriate and glowing language of de-
votion employed, until his feelings could be
restrained no longer. Tears of joy started
from his gladdened eye, and rolled in swift
succession down his cheeks, while he could
scarcely forbear rushing to the spot, and clasp-
ing in his arms the unconscious author of his
ecstacy. The name of the native was Oito.
He had formerly been an inmate of the mission
family, and had there been instructed in the
knowledge of the true God.
Since the return of the king to Tahiti, Oito
had been with him occasionally, and some re-
marks from him had awakened convictions of
sin. Having no one to direct him, and not
knowing how to obtain relief, he applied to
Tuahine, who had for a long time lived with
the missionaries. Tuahine was in a state of
mind similar to that of Oito. Their conversa-
tion strengthened their impressions, and they
resolved to retire to the valleys for meditation
and prayer. This course at first excited ridi-
cule, but, after a time, several young persons
united with them, and this little baud, without
any missionary to guide them, agreed to re-
frain from the worship of their idols, and from
the evil practices of their country, and to ob-
serve the Sabbath day, and to worship Jeho-
vah only.
Tuahine afterwards became a valuable as-
sistant to the missionaries, not only as a teach-
er in the schools, but also in translating the
Scriptures into the native language. He sub-
sequently accompanied one of the missionaries
to Eaiatea, and was appointed deacon in the
native church there, a station which he con-
tinued to fill till his death, in 1827. He was
much respected by the people, and died in the
enjoyment of the consolations of the Gospel,
at the age of forty-five.
After making the tour of the island, Messrs.
Scott and Hayward returned to Eimeo, taking
with them Tuahine and Oito, that they might
attend the school which had been opened
there. At a meeting held at Eimeo, after the
dedication of a new chapel, in July. 1813,
31 natives declared that they had already cast
away their idols, and desired that their names
might be written down as those who were
determined to worship the true God. To this
number 11 others were soon added, among
whom were Taaroarii, a young chief of Hua-
hine, and Matapuupuu, the chief priest of
Huahine, who had long been one of the prin-
cipal supporters of idolatry in that island.
The missionaries held frequent meetings with
them, for the purpose of explaining to them
the doctrines of revelation, and uniting with
them in social worship. They had the satis-
faction of hearing some of the new converts
lead in prayer, and were surprised and gratified
with their fluency and fervor, as well as the
appropriateness of their language.
On one of Mr. Scott's visits to the residence
of Taaroarii, to preach to his people, Patii,
the priest of Papetoai, expressed his intention
of bringing out his idols the day following,
and publicly burning them. In the forenoorr
of the next day, the preparations were made ;
and the news spreading, multitudes assembled
to witness what they considered a daring act
of impiety.
A short time before sunset Patii appeared,
and ordered his attendants to apply fire to the
pile. This being done, he hastened to the
sacred depository of his gods, brought them
out, and laid them down on the ground. They
were small carved wooden images, rude imita-
tions of the human figure ; or shapeless logs
of wood, covered with finely braided and curi-
ously wrought cinet, of cocoanut fibres, and
ornamented with red feathers. Patii tore ofif
the sacred cloth in which they were enveloped,
stripped them of their ornaments, which he
cast into the fire ; and then, one by one, threw
the idols themselves into the crackling flames,
sometimes pronouncing the name and pedigree
of the idol, and expressing his own regret at
having worshiped it, — at others, calling upon
the spectators to behold their inability even to
help themselves.
The example of Patii produced the most
decisive effects on the priests and people.
Many in Tahiti and Eimeo, emboldened by his
example, not only burnt their idols, but de-
stroyed their maraes. Patii himself became a
pupil of the missionaries, and his subsequent
life evinced the sincerity of his profession of
Christianity.
On the 5th of October, 1813, the native
Christians for the first time united with their
teachers in observing the Monthly Concert of
Prayer. The names of 50 who had renounced
idolatry were now recorded, and the number
of those who attended public worship was so
great, that it was found necessary to enlarge
their place of meeting. The deportment of
those who professed to have been converted
was most encouraging. They were punctual
and regular in their observance of the outward
ordinances of religion, in social meetings for
prayer, and in seasons of retirement for private
devotion.
King Pomare, not being successful in recov-
ering his authority at Tahiti, in the autumn
of 1814, returned to Eimeo, with a large num-
ber of followers, all of whom professed to be
Christians. And so rapid was the progress of
divine truth among the natives, that, at the
close of 1814, no less than 300 hearers regu-
larly attended the preaching of the Gospel,
and about 200 were constantly receiving in-
struction in the different schools.
But the success of Christianity awakened
the jealousy of the priests, and of those chiefs
who adhered to idolatry, and a persecution
broke out against the native Christians. One
young man was shot at and wounded ; another
was seized while in a retired spot for devotion,
688
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
carried ofiF, and sacrificed to their gods ! The j
chiefs of several districts on Tahiti entered
into a conspiracy to exterminate the Chris-
tians ; on hearing of which, they fled to Einieo.
But, on being invited by the rebel chiefs to
return to Eimeo, Pomare and his people ac-
companied them, and an apparent reconcilia-
tion was effected. But, on the Sabbath, as the
king and his people were at worship, they
were attacked, and an obstinate engagement
followed, in which the king was victorious,
and the pagan party completely routed. The
king, however, would not allow his men to fol-
low up the victory, according to their former
customs, to take vengeance on their enemies,
but said, " It is enough."
At the close of the battle, the king directed
a number of his people to proceed to the tem-
ple in which Oro, the great national idol, was
deposited, and to destroy the temple, altar,
idols, and every vestige of idolatry. In the
evening of the same day, Pomare and the
chiefs invited the Christians to assemble, and
render thanks to God for the protection he had
afforded them. On this occasion, they were
joined by many who had, till then, been zeal-
ous worshipers of idols, but who now desired
to acknowledge Jehovah as the true God.
The party sent by the king to destroy the
god Oro proceeded to the temple at Tautira,
and, having brought out the idol, stripped it
of its sacred coverings and highly valued orna-
ments, and threw it contemptuously on the
ground. The altars were then broken down,
the temples demolished, and the sacred houses
of the gods, with all their appendages, com-
mitted to the flames. The temples, altars, and
idols, all around Tahiti, were soon after de-
stroyed in the same way.
Pomare was now by universal consent re-
stored to his government, and to supreme au-
thority in his dominions. His clemency, on
this occasion, made a strong impression on the
minds of the vanquished, who concluded that
it must be the new religion which had i)ro-
duced such a change, and unanimously ex-
pressed their determination to embrace it
themselves. " The family and district tem-
ples, and altars, as well as those that were
national, were demolished, — the idols destroyed
by the very individuals who had but recently
been so zealous for their preservation, and, in
a short time, there was not one professed idol-
ater remaining." The people were earnest in
inviting the missionaries to come and instruct
them in the knowledge of the Christian reli-
gion. Schools were established, and places for
pul)lic worship erected, the Sabbath was ob-
served, divine service performed, and infant
murder, with all the abominations of idolatry,
were discontinued.
As soon as possible after the battle, tidings
of the result were conveyed to Eimeo. The
missiniuirios were almost overcome with joy,
when tluy learned that the Christians were
safe, and hastened to render thanks to God,
with feelings which it would be impossible to
describe. " In that one year they reaped the
harvest of sixteen laborious seed-times, sixteen
dreary and anxious winters, and sixteen unpro-
ductive summers." A missionary from Eimeo
was soon despatched to Tahiti. On his arri-
val, be found the people so anxious to hear
about Jesus Christ, that they would often
spend the whole night in conversation and
inquiry on subjects connected with religion.
The schools everywhere greatly increased, and
hundreds who had been among the earliest
scholars, were now engaged in imparting to
others the knowledge they had received.
" Aged priests and warriors, with their spel-
ling-books in their hands, might be seen sit-
ting on the benches in the schools, by the side,
perhaps, of some smiling little boy or girl,
by whom they were now taught the use of let-
ters. Others might be often seen employed in
pulling down the houses of their idols, and
erecting temples for the worship of the Prince
of Peace, working in companionship and har-
mony with those whom they had so recently
met on the field of battle."
In 1816, Pomare sent most of his family
idols to the missionaries, to be either burnt or
seLt to England, " that the people might know
Tahiti's foolish gods." The idols were accord-
ingly sent to England, and deposited in the
Missionary Museum, In February of the fol-
lowing year, the mission was reinforced by the
arrival at Tahiti of the Eev. Mr. Ellis, who
expressed his astonishment at the change that
had taken place. Mr. Ellis had brought with
him from England a printing-press and types,
and at the request of the directors of the Mis-
sionary Society had learned the art of print-
ing. The curiosity of the natives to see the
printing-press brought persons from different
parts of the island, and also from Tahiti, to
look at this " wonderful machine." Hundreds
who had learned to read were still destitute of
a book. Some had written out the whole
spelling book on sheets of writing paper,
while others had written the alphabet on pieces
of cloth made from the bark of a tree. Po-
mare manifested a strong interest in the press,
and rendered much assistance in the erection
of the building for its accommodation. He
was allowed the privilege of setting the types
for the first al{)habet, and of making the im-
pression of the first sheet that issued from the
press, which gave him great satisfaction.
The curiosity of the natives, excited by the
establishment of the printing-press, was not
easily satisfied. Pomare visited the printing-
office almost every day ; the chiefs requested
to be admitted inside, and the windows, doors,
and every crevice through which they could
peep, were filled with people exclaiming. "Bcr-
itanie! fcnua panri;' " O, Britain, land of
skill," (or knowledge.) Multitudes from every
district iu Eimeo, and many from other islands,
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
689
came to procure books and to see the machine
which performed such wonders. For several
weeks before the first portion of Scripture was
finished, the district of Afareaitu, in which the
printing-office was situated, resembled a public
fair. The beach was lined with canoes, the
houses of the inhabitants were filled to over-
flowing, and temporary encampments were
everywhere erected. The printing-office was
visited by such numbers of the strangers, that
they often climbed upon each other's backs, or
on the sides of the windows, so as to darken
the room. So anxious were the people to ob-
tain books, that they were constantly comino-
from other islands, and many waited five or six
weeks rather than return without them. Most
of those who received the books made them
their constant companions, and read them care-
fully and regularly, so that they became to
them the source of their highest enjoyment.
The greater portion of the inhabitants of
the Georgian Islands having embraced Chris-
tianity, the missionaries proposed to the king,
and to several of the leading chiefs, the plaii
of forming an auxiliary missionary society.
which was at once approved by them, and the
13th of May, 1818, which was the anniver-
sary of the London Missionary Society, was
appointed for its organization. At sunrise,
the missionaries attended a meeting for prayer
in the English language. The natives, also,
held one among themselves at the same hour.
I'n the forenoon a sermon was preached in
Ifinglish by one of the missionaries; in thej
afternoon the services were entirely in the na-
tive language. Long before the appointed
hour, the chapel was crowded, and the meeting
was adjourned to a beautiful grove at a short
distance from the chapel. Chairs were pro-
vided for the king and chiefs, and a raised
stand, four or five feet from the ground, for Mr.
Nott. The services commenced with singing
and prayer ; after which Mr. Nott delivered a
short and appropriate discourse from Acts 8 :
30, 31. At the conclusion, Pomare rose and
addressed the multitude, referring to their for-
mer habits, and to the wonderful change which
the Gospel had produced in their condition,
and showing their obligation to extend the
same blessing to others still in heathenish
darkness. He concluded by proposing the
formation of a Tahitian Missionary Society, to
aid the London Missionary Society in sending
the Gospel to the heathen, and requested those
who approved the object to hold up their right
hands. Two or three thousand hands were
instantly raised. The constitution of the so-
ciety, previously prepared by the missionaries,
was then read ; a treasurer and secretaries were
chosen, and the people retired to their dwell-
ings with excited and happy feelings.
In 1817, the mission had been reinforced
with seven missionaries and their wives ; and
early in 1818 two of them, Messrs. Wilson and
Darling, removed to Tahiti, and commenced
44
their labors near the place from which the
missionaries had been obliged to fly in 1809.
New stations were also commenced in three
other districts on the island of Tahiti.
Pomare had for a long time been engaged
in preparing materials and erecting at Papaoa,
on the island of Tahiti, a chapel 712 feet in
length and 54 feet in width. The roof was
supported by 36 massive pillars of the bread-
fruit tree, and the sides by 280 smaller ones.
The walls were composed of boards fixed per-
pendicularly in square sleepers, and were either
smoothed with a plane or polished by rubbing
with coral and sand. The building contained
133 windows and 29 doors. The floor was
covered with long grass, and the area was
filled with plain but substantial benches.
The rafters were bound with braided cord,
colored in native dyes, or covered with white
matting, the ends of which hung down several
feet from the upper part of the rafter, and ter-
minated in a broad fringe. The chapel con-
tained three pulpits, 260 feet apart, but with-
out any partition between. It was called the
Royal Mission Chapel, andVas first opened for
divine service on the 11th of May, 1819. A
sermon was preached at the same time in each
pulpit, to an audience of more than 2,000
hearers. The encampment of the multitude
extended along the beach on each side of the
chapel to the distance of four miles. A long
aisle extended from one end of the chapel to
the other, crossed in an oblique direction by a
stream of water five or six feet wide. The
plan of so large a place of worship originated
entirely with the king, and the chapel was
erected by the united efforts of the chiefs and
people of Tahiti and Eimeo. When Pomare
was asked why he built so large a house, he
inquired " whether Solomon was not a good
king, and whether he did not build a house for
Jehovah superior to every edifice in Judea or
in the surrounding countries."
The first baptism at the islands took place
in 1819, and the king was the first subject.
The ceremony was performed on Sabbath, the
6th of June, in the new chapel, in the presence
of 4,000 or 5,000 peoj^le. The exercises were
conducted by Messrs. Bicknell aud Henry, two
missionaries who had arrived in the Duff more
than 22 years before. This public profession
of religion by Pomare was followed by the
baptism of many of the converts.
As the people had now embraced Christian-
ity, they were desirous that their civil and ju-
dicial proceedings should be in accordance^
with the principles of the Christian religion.
The missionaries, at the rec^uest of Pomare,
assisted him and his chiefs in framing a code
of laws. On the 13th of May, 1819, when a
large number of people from Tahiti and Eimeo
were assembled at the anniversary of the mis-
sionary society ; after the meeting had been
opened with prayer, the king read aud ex-
plained the laws, and afterwards asked the
690
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
chiefs if they assented to them. They replied,
" We heartily agree to them." Thea address-
ing the people, the king desired them, if they
approved of the laws, to signify it by holding
up their right hands. Thousands of arms were
immediately raised. The meeting was then
closed with prayer by Mr. Henry. I'he laws
were subsequently printed on a large sheet of
paper, and sent to every chief and magistrate
throughout the islands, and posted up in most
of the public places. After the promulgaticTu
of the new laws, two or three slight insurrec-
tions occurred, but they were easily quelled ;
and their authority firmly established.
In the islands of Tahiti and Eimco, Chris-
tian churches were formed early in 1820, which,
though small at first, gradually increased in
numbers.
An interesting change had now taken place
in the Georgian Islands, and the effects of the
Christian religion were becoming more and
more apparent. The appearance of the mis-
sionary station at Burders Point, in Tahiti, is
thus described by Mr. Ellis, who visited it in
April, 1621 : " Newly planted gardens and
enclosures appeared in every direction ; several
good houses were finished ; some were plaster-
ed and thatched, while only the frames of others
were completed. A school-house and chapel
had been erected. The latter was neatly
finished with a gallery, the first built in the
South Sea Islands. The congregation on the
Sabbath consisted of about five hundred, w^ho
were generally attentive. Here, as in other
stations, the singing forms an interesting part
of the worship. The fenmle voices are usually
clear and distinct, but those of the men rather
inclined to harshness."
"With the introduction of Christianity into
the Georgian Islands, a striking change took
place in the habits of the natives. The females,
who had until this time been treated with con-
tempt or cruelty, and regarded as fit only for
the most menial oflices, now began to assume
their proper station in society.
AVhen the missionaries first went there, they
were annoyed with the thievish propensities of
the natives ; but, after this change, Mr. Ellis,
who had resided at Eimco more than a year,
remarked : " Although we had no lock, and
for a long time no bolt, on our door, and though
sometimes the door was left open all night, yet
we do not know that a single article was stolen
from us by the natives, during the eighteen
months we resided among them."
The observance of the Sabbath was so
marked as to attract the attention of the ofli-
cers of vessels, which visited Ihe islands. A
ship arrived at Tahiti on Frida". It was soon
thronged with natives, who offered fowls, fruit,
and vegetables for sale. On the following day
the traflic was continued, but on the third, to
the astonishment of all on board, no individual
came near the ship. 'J'he rea-^iOn afterward
assigned was, that it was the Sabbath. On
Monday the intercourse was resumed again, as
briskly as before.
In 1821, two laymen were sent out for the
purpose of teaching the natives the useful arts ;
and they learned to manufacturt; cotton cloth,
and to make lathes, looms, and spinning-
wheels.
While these things were taking place at
Tahiti and Eimeo, similar events were occur-
ring at Tabuaemanu, another of the Georgian
Islands. Having hoard that the people of the
Huahine had destroyed their idols, they re-
solved to do the same. In 1818, Mr. Davis,
while on a voyage to Tahiti, being driven out
of his course, spent nine weeks on Tabuaemanu,
instructing the natives, and when he left them,
appointed two of the best informed to teach
the rest. In 1819, nearly all the inhabitants,
with their chief, removed to Huahine, to re-
ceive religious instruction. The next year
they returned to their own island.
Mr. Barff visited this island in 1822, and
found the inhabitants living together in great
harmony, and diligently endeavoring to im-
prove in knoMledge. Those who had been
received, while at Huahine, as candidates for
baptism, continued to act consistently with
their profession, and frequently met together
to exhort each other to love and good works.
During his stay at Tabuaemanu, Mr. Barff
baptized fifty-four adults, and thirty children.
Tw-o native teachers from the church at Hua-
hine were appointed to labor among them, and
on the departure of ^fr. Barff nearly all the
inhabitants placed themselves under their in-
struction. In 1823, a church of thirty-one
members was formed at this station, to which
thirty-five more were added in 1825. In 1833,
Mr. Barff found the outward appearance of
the settlement greatly improved by the erec-
tion of houses built after the European man-
ner, with neat and well cultivated gardens.
The judicious labors of the native teachera
had been followed with the divine blessing,
and order, harmony, and industry prevailed. A
new chapel had also been built, and dedicated
to the worship of God. In 183G, the church
had increased to ninety members, and there
were in the school seventy-six children. All
the adults were under instruction, and most of
them had learned to read the Scriptures.
Near the close of the year 1821, the mission
in the Georgian Islands experienced a heavy
bereavement in the decease of the king Pomare
II. He was the first convert, and jiroved a
steady friend of the missionaries ; but towards
the close of his life he contracted a fondness
for spirituous liquors, which proved a snare to
him. On his death-bed, being reminded of
the number and magnitude of his eins, and di-
rected to Jesus Christ, he replied, " Jesus Christ
alone," and shortly after expired. He was
succeeded by his son, Pomare III., only four
years old, who was crowned with Christian cere-
monies. Ue lived, however, but about a year
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
691
and a half, and was succeeded by a daughter of
his father, who was afterwards mai'ried to the
young chief Tahaa, to whom her father had
giveu his own name.
In March 1824, the South Sea Academy
was established at Eimeo, by the Deputation
from the Missionary Society, the primary de-
sign of which was to furnish a suitable educa-
tion to the children of the missionaries. Na-
tive children also of piety and talent had
access to its advantages, and it was intended
as preparatory to a seminary for training native
l^astors.
In 1829, nineteen years after the natives be-
came Christians, the Rev. Mr. Stewart visited
the Greorgian Islands, as chaplain of the United
States' frigate Vincennes. After giving an
Recount of the schools, and the public services
on the Sabbath, he adds, " A single glance
around was sufficient to convince the most
skeptical observer of the success and benefit
of missions to the heathen ; for it could not
be made without meeting the plainest demon-
stration, that such can be rescued from all the
rudeness and wildness of their original condi-
tion, can be brought to a state of cleanliness
and modesty in their personal appearance, can
be taught to read and write ; for many, be-
sides the intelligent and familiar use of the
Scriptures and their hymn-book, took notes in
pencil of the sermon delivered ; in a word, can
be transformed into all that civilization and
Christianity vouchsafes to man."
In 1835, there was an awakening, and the
houses of the missionaries were thronged with
those who desired to be instructed in the way
of life. Some of these were wild men and
women from the mountains ; but among those
who desired admission to the church were the
queen, her husband, and her mother. In Dec.
of this year, the translation of the Scriptures
was completed, and Mr. Nott went to Eng-
land to superintend the printing, as well as to
recover his health. In 1836, there were, in
Tahiti, nearly two thousand natives in church
fellowship ; two- thirds of the people could
read ; a great number of them had learned to
write ; and the schools and chapels were well
attended.
An attempt was made in 1836 to introduce
Catholic priests into the Georgian Islands, but
the queen refused them permission to remain,
and ordered them to depart in the same vessel
iu which they came. But Mr. Moerenhaut,
the American consul, received them, and
placed them in a house where they locked
themselves in. The officers of the queen, how-
ever, lilted off the roof, and took them out by
force, and put them on board the ship. In
1837. a second attempt was made by an Ame-
rican ship, from Boston, commanded by Capt.
Williams, who undertook to force two Catho-
lic priests upon the queen, iu which he was
aided by the American consul. Because she
would not receive them, he demanded $2,000
damages, and threatened to send a man-of-war
to enforce the demand. The queen wrote a
letter to President Van Buren, complaining of
the conduct of Mr. Moerenhaut, and the presi-
dent promptly removed him, and appointed
Samuel E. Blackley in his room.
Mr. Moerenhaut, however, was rewarded for
his zeal in behalf of the Catholics, with the
French Consulate. The French frigate, Ve-
nus, was ordered to proceed from the South
American station to punish the insults offered at
Tahiti to the subjects of His Most Christian
Majesty. The captain, on his arrival, ordered
the queen to send on board his frigate
§2,000 ; to write to the king of France an
humble letter of apology ; and to permit all
French subjects to reside on the island, on the
most favorable terms. The deck of the frigate
having been cleared for action, these requisi-
tions, as well as some others, were enforced by
threats of the immediate destruction of the
town ; and the queen was obliged to borrow
the money to meet this unexpected demand.
Captain Harvey, master of a whaling vessel
who visited Tahiti, iu May, 1839, gives the
following testimony to the good effects of mis-
sionary labor on the island : — " This is the
most civilized place that I have been at in the
South Seas ; it is governed by a queen, daugh-
ter of old Pomare, a dignified young lady,
about 25 years of age. They have a good
code of laws ; no spirits whatever are allowed
to be lauded on the island ; therefore the sail-
ors have no chance of getting drunk, and are
all in an orderly state, and work goes on pro-
perly. It is one of the most gratifying sights
the eye can witness on a Sunday in their
church, which holds about 5,000, to see the
queen near the pulpit, and all her subjects
around her decently appareled, and in seem-
ingly pure devotion. I really never felt such
a conviction of the great benefit of missionary
labors before. The attire of the women is as
near the English as they can copy."
Such was the state of things in these islands,
previous to the introduction of the French pro-
tectorate, which has been the means of opening
the floodgates of iniquity, and of embarrassing
and finally breaking up the mission. This
measure appears to have been brought about,
through the combined influence of rumsellers
and Catholic priests. It is stated in the report
for 1843, that the French and American Con-
suls had determined to break through all re-
strictions ; and in spite of law, they had o^jenly
forced the sale of spirits. " I have seen more
drunkenness," says a missionary, " at Eimeo,
the last six mouths, than in seven years before."
The first French outrage was committed, as
already stated, in consequence of the Queen's
refusing to permit two Catholic priests to re-
main on the island, in the exercise of her un-
doubted right of sovereignty. This was in Au-
gust, 1838. In April, '39, the Artemise, another
French frigate, put into Papeete for repairs ;
692
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
and after receiving the aid of the native?, and
the kind hospitality of the government, for
three month?, those acts of kindness were re-
paid hj obliging the queen to abrogate the
law excluding Papists from settling on the
island, under threat of overturning her govern-
ment. In May, 1842, Tahiti was visited by
the French ship of war, L'Aube, under the
command of Capt. Dubusct, who compelled the
queen to disband her police force, because the
commander of a French whaler had been put"
in confinement for drunkenness and riot. On
the first of September, of the same year, the
French ship of war, Reine Blanche, of GO guns.
Admiral A. Dupetit Thouars, arrived at Pa-
peete, with professions of peace. After a few
days, the queen, who was at Eimeo, daily ex-
pecting confinement, with the principal chiefs,
were invited to come to Papeete, that the Ad-
miral might pay his respects to them. The
principal chiefs came and dined on board, on
the 8th, it being understood that a meeting or
conference was to be held the next day. The
same evening, the British vice-consul and the
American consul v/ere notified of probable
hostilities. During the night, a secret meeting
was held between the French and four princi-
pal chiefs, at which the latter were induced to
sign a document, addressed to the Admiral,
soliciting the protection of the French, osten-
sibly leaving the internal afilxirs of the govern-
ment in the hands of the queen, and stipulat-
ing for the freedom of religion and the protec-
tion of the English missionaries; but leaving
all affairs concerning foreign governments,
foreign residents, port regulations, &c., with
officers appointed by the French government ;
thus, in reality, nullifying the stipulation con-
cerning the English missionaries. The Admi-
ral demanded the queen's signature to this
surrender of her sovereignty, or a fine of
$10,OnO for alleged injuries ; and if she did not
comply with one or the other of these demands
in 24 hours, he threatened to plant the French
flag and capture the island. The queen signed
the document just one hour before the firing
was to have commenced. A supreme council
of three Frenchmen was appointed, from whom
there was no appeal but to the king of France ;
and a proclamation wa.s issued, threatening
with banishment from the island, any person
who should, by word or deed, prejudice the
people against the French government. Un-
der such law.«, Ave can see how easy it would
be, at any time, to find a i)rctext for ainioying
the missionaries. This gross outrage called
forth protests and expressions of sympathy
from most of the Protestant Missionary Socie-
ties in (ireat Britain and on the continent of
liiurope, as well as of tlie American Board ;
and a])pcals Merc made by the Directors of the
Society to the Governments of France and
Groat Britain.
On the ].')th of Januarv, 1843, Tahiti was
visited by the British frigate Talbot, Sir Tho-
mas Thompson, Captain, by whom a meeting
was convened of the queen and principal chiefs,
at which the French and American Consuls
wore present, to confer upon the changes that
had taken place. By request of the cjueen, the
meeting was opened with prayer. A letter
was read from the British Admiral, expressing
the sympathies of the Queen of England to-
ward Queen Pomare ; and, in answer to inqui-
ries, the principal chiefs of each district declared
that Queen Pomare was their only sovereign ;
that they desired to be on friendly terms with
all nations, but that, if she required aid of any
nation, it was her intention to seek it of Great
Britain. And even the chiefs who signed the
request for French protection declared that
they did not desire the aid of the French, but
that they signed the request because they were
teased to do so.
On the 2d of November, following, Admiral
Dupetit Thouars paid a second visit to Papeete,
with three men of war, and demanded the re-
moval of the emblem of the queen's sove-
reignty from the national colors, which she re-
solutely refused to do ; whereupon the gallant
Admiral declared that she had ceased to reign,
and took possession of the island in the name of
the king of the French. The queen issued her
proclamation, ordering her subjects to offer no
resistance. The British Consul struck his flag,
and protested against these proceedings. The
French government refused to sanction this
act ; but the French Protectorate still remained,
to the lasting disgrace of that nation. The
French authorities, allying themselves with the
most unprincipled portion of the chiefs, have
been able to secure the passage of laws, pur-
porting to come from a native legislative body,
to suit their own nefarious designs, and sub-
versive even of the original conditions of their
own proposing.
These events were followed by continued acti
of aggression, on the part of the French;
which, notwithstanding the remonstrances of
the missionaries, and the commands of the
queen, led to resistance on the part of the nar
tives ; and the fairer portions of the island
wore desolated by the French.
Early in the year 1844, Queen Pomare took
refuge from the insults and hostility of the
French on board a British vessel, where she
remained six months, and afterwards sailed in
the Carysfoot to Raiatea. On the 2d ot
Iklay, Bev. llenrv Nott, one of the missionaries
who first landed'at Tahiti, in 1796, was called
to his rest, and on the 30th of June, Ecv.
T. S. McKean was accidentally shot by one of
the native soldiers. A number of stations
were at this time broken up, and others re-
duced very low, and several of the mission-
aries returned to England.
The French continued to exercise full sove-
reiirntv, till Januarv, 1845, when, in conse-
quence of instructions from government, this
claim was nominally abandoned, but one of
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
693
the most corrupt and unprincipled of the
chiefs was named " Eegent," and affairs were
carried on in the queen's name, though really
by the French ; and many arbitrary regula-
tions were introduced, among which was one,
changing the Sabbath from Sunday to Mon-
day ; and another prohibiting the missionaries
to travel in the island without a passport.
In 1845, the French attempted to introduce
the protectorate at the Society Islandaj where
they met with a decided resistance, in conse-
quence of which they blockaded some of the
ports. But subsequently the independence of
these islands was guaranteed by the French
and English governments ; yet the latter, to
the surprise and grief of good men, acknowl-
edged the protectorate of the French in the
Georgian Islands.
In 1S4G, in revenge for an attack by the
natives on Papeete, Governor Bruat drove
them into the mountains, and destroyed every
vestige of civilization and fertility in the
country below. Every house was leveled, and
every tree cut down and burnt. And while
the better portion of the natives were thus
hewed down, those who submitted to French
rule were seduced into the vices of the invad-
ers, and intemperance and licentiousness pre-
vailed in their most loathsoiue forms.
In December, 184G, the patriot forces of
Tahiti, seeing no possibility of successful re-
sistance, surrendered to the French ; the queen
returned, and an attempt was made to resusci-
tate the mission. In 1849 the new French
governor under the Republic arrived, and at
first he appeared friendly to the missionaries,
but afterwards he employed his authority and
influence to prevent the natives repairing their
houses of worship, or making contributions
for the diffusion of the Gospel ; and from one
district, where there were two Catholic priests,
they were entirely excluded, lest there should
be controversy about religion ! But amid all
these troubles the Tahitian churches received
numerous accessions, and exhibited progressive
improvements in Christian character ; 109
members were added to the church at Papaoa,
in six months, and 134 at Papeete ; and the
queen has maintained her Christian character
throughout, in these most trying circum-
stances.
The missionaries continued to be subjected
to the harrassiug interference of the French
authorities, while an influence was exerted by
the latter upon the natives, exceedingly preju-
dicial to good morals and social order. At
length, in 1852, a law was enacted, removing
the choice of pastors from the members of the
churches to the principal chiefs. The mission-
aries of the London Missionary Society were
likewise denied the privilege allowed by others
of preaching the Gospel in their own houses.
The missionaries regarding this as a violation
of treaty stipulations with Great Britain, as
well as of every principle of religious liberty,
retired from the island, leaving Mr. Howe in
charge of the mission property and of the
theological seminary at Papeete. A number
of native pastors, educated at this seminary,
had, however, previously been ordained, and
several of the superannuated missionaries re-
mained at different places, where the churches
had native pastors.
It will readily be perceived that the state of
confusion into which this group of islands has
been thrown by these outrages and oppressive
proceedings must have proved disastrous to the
missionary work. It has certainly been the
means of the dissolution of morals, the destruc-
tion of good order, and of strengthening every
evil influence. And yet the work of God has
not been destroyed. The following table will
show the state of the churches before the giv-
ing up of the mission : —
STATIONS.
Papeete .
Pajif
Papeno
Poiut Venus .
Bunaauia . . .
Pa para
Hitiaa
Tiarei
Papeuriri
Tautira
Puen
Papetoai . .
Alareaita .
204)
118 J
1240
The returns in regard to schools and attend-
ance on public worship are very incomplete.
The number of communicants is probably be-
low the fact, the churches having been much
scattered during these trials. At Bunaauia,
there was an extensive awakening in 1850,
which was much accelerated by Mr. Darling's
farewell sermon, on his departure for England,
and which resulted in the addition to the
church of about 80. An institution for rais-
ing up a native ministry has been maintained
for many years at Papeete, which promises to
supply native pastors for these churches. Five
of them were called to the pastoral office in
1851, and 8 more were in the institution,
making good progress in their studies.
Society Islands. — When the missionaries were
obliged to flee from Tahiti in 1808, they spent
some time at Huahine ; and in 1814, Messrs.
Nott and Ilayward made a second visit, and
were welcomed, and their instructions listened
to with serious attention. Afterwards, Mr.
Wilson and Pomare, while sailing from Eimeo,
694
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
were driven to Huahine, whore they spent
three months in preaching the Gospel and per-
suading the natives to abandon their idols. In
June, °1818, Messrs. Davies, Williams, Ors-
mond and Ellis, accompanied by a number of
the principal chiefs of Eimeo, sailed from that
island to Iluahine for the purpose of establish-
ing a mission there. On lauding, the mission-
aries found that, with one or two exceptions,
the natives had renounced idolatry, and, in
profession at least, had become Christians.
Infanticide, and some of the most degrading
vices had been discontinued. The people,
however, were not yet fully acquainted with
the nature of Christianity, and were only
partially under the influence of its moral re-
straints. The outward change which had
taken place Avas owing to the example and
efforts of Tamatoa, the king of Raiatea, and
certain other chiefs who had been with him
at Tahiti and Eimeo. Soon after his return,
Tamatoa publicly renounced his idols and de-
clared himself a believer in Jehovah and Je-
sus Christ. Several of the chiefs and a num-
ber of the people followed his example.^ Here,
however, as in Tahiti, the idolatrous chiefs and
inhabitants resorted to arms in defence of the
gods. Exasperated at the destruction of Oro,
their greatnational idol,theydetermined to make
war upon the Christians and to put them all to ^
death. Having erected a house, and enclosed j
it with the trunks of cocoanut and bread-fruit j
trees, they resolved to thrust the Christians^
into it, and burn tliem alive. Tamatoa sent ■
frequent overtures of peace, but the invariable
reply was, " There is no peace for god-burners,
until they have felt the effects of the fire which i
destroyed Oro." The attack was made by the
idolaters in canoes, early in the morning, while
the Christians were at prayers. "While the
idolaters were landing, the Christians rushed
to the shore, and extended their little army as
far as it would reach. The boldness of this
movement filled the assailants with consterna-
tion. After a short resistance, they threw
away their arms and fled for their lives, ex-
pecting to meet with the same barbarous
treatment which they would have inflicted had
they been the conqucrons. IV-rceiving, how-
ever, that those who had fallen into the hands
of the Christians sustained no injury, they
came forward and threw themselves on the
mercy of the victors. As the prisoners were
conducted into the presence of the chief, a
herald who stood by his side, shouted, " AVel-
come ! welcome ! you are saved by Jesus, and
the influence of the religion of mercy which
we have embraced !" \Vhen the chief Avho
lad led the heathen party was taken, and con-
ducted, pule and trembling, into the presence
of Tamatoa, he exclaimed, " Am I dead ?"
His fears were, however, soon dissipated by
the reply, " No, brother ; cease to tremble ;
you are saved by Jesus !" The Christians
soon prepared a feast for them, consisting of a
hundred baked pigs, and a large quantity of
bread-fruit. But so overcome were the prison-
ers by the kindness with which they were
treated, that but few of them were able to par-
take of the food. One of them rose from the
table, and declared his determination never
again to worship the gods who could not pro-
tect them in the hour of danger. " We were,"
said he, " four times the number of the praying
people,^et they have conquered us with the
greatest ease. Jehovah is the true God. Had
we conquered them, they would at this moment
have been burning in the house we made strong
for the purpose. But instead of injuring us,
or our wives or children, they have prepared
for us this sumptuous feast. Theirs is a reli-
gion of mercy. I will go and unite myself to
this people." A similar feeling seemed to
pervade the whole company. That very night
they bowed their knees, and united with the
Christians in returning thanks to God for the
victory he had given them. On the following
morning, the Christians and the heathen joined
their efforts to demolish the gods and maraes,
and three days after the battle every vestige
of idolatry was destroyed.
The inhabitants of Tahaa, Borabora, and
Huahine soon followed the example of the Ra-
iateans, demolishing their temples and burning
their gods. A number of the chiefs and peo-
ple of Borabora and Raiatea visited ISIaurua,
the most westerly of the Society Islands, and
succeeded in persuading the inhabitants to de-
stroy their temples and idols. The reign of
idolatry in this group was now at an end. In
one year the system of false worship, which
had so long prevailed, was abolished, and most
of the people adopted the external forms of
Christianity.
Soon after the arrival of the missionaries at
Huahine, Tamatoa, king of Raiatea, visited
them, in order to persuade some of them to
remove to these islands ; and Messrs. Williams
and Threlkeld accompanied him to Raiatea.
Immediately on the introduction of the Gos-
pel, the natives began to lay aside their idle
habits, and to cultivate the arts of civilized
life. They began the cultivation of cotton
and sugar-cane; and in October, 1818, they
I followed the example of the Tahitians in the
I formation of a missionary society. The niis-
I sionaries soon acquired a sufficient knowledge
of the language to preach to the natives, of
whom they had large and attentive congrega-
tions. A flourishing school was also sustained.
A carpenter's shop had been erected, the
forge was in daily ojjeration, and a large place
of worship was building. The missionaries
had erected dwellings lor themselves, the frame-
work of which was of wood, wattled, and plas-
tered with lime made of coral. " It was my
determination when I left England," says Mr.
Williams, '• to have as respectable a dwelling
as I could erect, for the missionary does not go
to barbarize himself, but to civilize the hea-
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
695
then. He ought not therefore to sink down to
their standard, but to elevate them to his."
A house similar to that of Mr. Williams'
•was soon after built for Tamatoa, which was
the first of the kind erected for their own
abode by any of the natives of the South Sea
Islands. A plastered house was soon after fin-
ished on the island of Huahine, in the district
of Fare. The success of the individuals who
had built houses encouraged others to follow
their example, and the settlements in the Lee-
ward Islands soon began to assume a new
aspect. The people of these islands were also
occupied in building chapels for the worship
of God. The edifice erected for this purpose
in Eaiatea was more than one hundred feet
in length and forty-two feet in width. It
was completed and opened for divine service
early in the year 1820, when upwards of 2,400
inhabitants of that and the adjacent islands
assembled within its walls. By the ingenuity
of the missionaries, it was subsequently fur-
nished with a rustic set of chandeliers, the
frames of which were of light wood and opaque
cocoanut shells. The chapel in Huahine, 100
feet long and 60 wide, was also finished and
opened in May of this year. The walls were
plastered within and wnthout, and the windows
closed with sliding shutters. All classes had
cheerfully united in the work, and the king of
the island, with his son, a youth of seventeen,
were daily employed in directing the laborers
or using the plane and chisel themselves.
The old chapel was converted into a school-
house, and two other buildings were afterwards
erected, one for the boys' school and the other
for the girls'. Schools were also established
in the other islands of the group, and the
improvement of the pupils became daily more
and more perceptible. The same eagerness to
obtain books was manifested here as in the
Windward Islands, and nothing could exceed
the delight with which the treasure was re-
ceived by those who were so fortunate as to
obtain one. And the same general improve-
ment was manifest in the people as has been
described at the Georgian Islands, in the adop-
tion of the dress and habits of civilization.
But in no respect was the change in the South
Sea Islanders more apparent than in their
manner of spending the Sabbath. It was cus-
tomary for those who resided at a distance to
repair to the settlement before the Sabbath.
On a Saturday afternoon, parties from every
direction were seen approaching the missionary
station, either by sea or by laud. The shore
was lined with canoes, and the encampment of
natives along the beach presented a scene of
bustling activity. Their food for the Sabbath
■was all prepared on Saturday, and carefully
placed in baskets. Their calabashes were filled
with fresh water, their fruit was gathered, and
bundles of the broad hibiscus leaf were collect-
ed to serve instead of plates. The dwellings
of the natives appeared more than usually neat
and clean, and at an early hour the prepara-
tions for the Sabbath were completed. No
visits were made on the Sabbath, and no com-
pany entertained ; nor was any fire kindled
except in case of sickness. This strict observ-
ance of the Sabbath was never directly enjoin-
ed by the missionaries. It was no doubt partly
attributable to the example of their teachers,
but with many it was probably the result of
impressions left on their minds by their former
superstitious system. While they were hea-
then, their religion consisted in a great mea-
sure in the strict observance of sacred days,
and the punctilious performance of ceremonies.
But some of them were actuated by conscien-
tious Christian motives.
The private devotions of the natives on the
Sabbath were finished by sunrise ; and soon
after that time the greater part of the inhabit-
ants assembled for their weekly prayer-meeting.
Often COO or 800 were present. The meeting
was generally conducted by a native, one per-
haps who had formerly been an idolatrous
priest. The singing of a hymn, and the read-
ing of a portion of Scripture, were followed by
prayers of the most appropriate and touching
character. At eight o'clock, the children as-
sembled in the Sabbath-school, where they
remained an hour. They were then conducted
to the chapel, each class walking in pairs with
its teacher. A particular portion of the cha-
pel was assigned to the Sabbath-school schol-
ars, and here they all quietly seated themselves,
waiting for the commencement of public wor-
ship. In the afternoon they again assembled
in the schools to read the Scriptures, and to
repeat hymns and the catechism. They were
also questioned as to their recollection of the
morning sermon, and it was often surprising
to see the readiness with which they would
repeat not only the text, but the divisions, and
often the leading thoughts of the discourse.
At the close of the school the afternoon wor-
ship was held. A weekly lecture was also de-
livered, which was always well attended. A
sea captain, who was present at one of these
meetings, says, " The most perfect order reigned
the whole time of the service. The devout
attention which these poor people paid to what,
was going forward, and the earnestness with
which they listened to their teacher, would
shame an English congregation."
A meeting was held every week for the in-
struction of those who wished to make a pub-
lic profession of religion ; besides which there
were occasional meetings for conversation. At
these the natives inquired the meaning of dif-
ferent passages of Scripture, and asked other
questions on miscellaneous subjects.
The baptism of the first converts in the So-
ciety Islands took place in Huahine, in SejD-
tember, 1819. Mahine, the principal chief of
the island, was among the number, "j'he name
of every individual was formerly descriptive of
some event or quality, and many of them were.
696
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
significant of something blasphemous, idola-
trous, or impure. These the missionaries ad-
vised the people to renounce, and select those
by which in future they wished to be called.
Scriptural names were in general chosen by
the adults for themselves and their children.
After the first baptism, an address, on the na-
ture of the ordinance and the duties of those
who received it, was printed and widely cir-
culated, apparently with good effect. The
weekly meeting for those who desired baptism
was continued, and, after the first administra-
tion of this rite, the number of those attending
it was greatly increased. Many, who had
previously been indifferent to religion, now
seemed in earnest to obtain it, and not only in
Huahine but in the other missionary stations,
a general desire to obtain the favor of God
seemed to prevail among the people. " Often,"
says Mr. Ellis, '' have we been aroused at break
of day, by persons coming to inquire what
they must do to be saved." Many, who at that
time were awakened and professed conversion,
have ever since given evidence of being actu-
ated by Christian principle ; but some having
been baptized, were disposed to rest satisfied
without making greater attainments. It there-
fore became necessary for the missionaries to
lengthen the term of probation, and in some
instances persons have been candidates more
than two years.
This first awakening in the Society Islands
occurred in the years 1819 and 1820. Pearly
in May, 1820, the first Christian church in this
group was organized at Huahine, and on the
following Sabbath IG persons, who gave evi-
dence of a saving change, united for the first
time with the missionaries in the commemora-
tion of tiie death of Christ, in the presence of
several hundreds, who by their thoughtful and
serious countenances evinced how deeply they
were afieeted by it. The annual nieetiiig of
the Missionary Society in JIuahine was held
soon after the formation of the church. 'J'he
subscriptions amounted to between 8,{I00 and
4,000 gallons of oil, besides cotton and other
articles. In February of the following year,
four of the converts, who had long been con-
sistent Christians, were set apart to the office
of deacons, and proved valuable assistants to
the missionaries. So general had the interest
in religious things become, that wherever the
people were collected, religion was the topic
of conversation. The houses of the missiona-
ries were sometimes thronged at day-l)reak by
those whose minds were distressed, and often,
after they had retired to rest, some would
come to their doors and beg fur instruction.
A great change had tj^lvcn place in these once
degraded islanders. The aged and the sick,
who hud fta-merly been treated with the great-
est nef;lect and cruelty, were now n\irsed with
care by their relatives and children. In some
of the islands, henevf Jent societies were formed
among the natives, for the purpose of building
houses for the poor, and supplying v^'ith food
and clothing the sick who had no friends to
take care of them. Besides this, they were
visited by persons who read the Scriptures and
prayed with them, so that their last days were
cheered by the precious consolations of the
(jospel. Parental restraint and discipline be-
gan also to receive attention. The mothers
endeavored to influence their children and gain
their affection by kindness. The fathers some-
times resorted to harsher measures.
But there were some young men who did
not relish the restraints which Christianity had
imposed upon them ; and they entered into a
conspiracy to murder the missionaries and
overturn the government. They were, how-
ever, detected, and the chiefs held a meeting
and determined to put the ringleaders to
death. But the missionaries interceded for
their lives, and, after a whole day's discussion,
the chiefs yielded. In the course of conversa-
tion, the chiefs inquired what the English
people would do in such circumstances, and
were informed that in England there were es-
tablished laws, by which all offenders were
tried before judges appointed for the purpose.
They then wished to know what judges and
laws were, and when the subject was explained
to them, they said, " Why cannot we have the
same ? " A temporary judge was then ap-
pointed, by whom the criminals were tried,
and the ringleaders sentenced to four years
banishment on an uninhabited island.
A code of laws was soon after prepared by
the missionaries, and recognized by the chiefs
and people of llaiatea. It was publicly pro-
claimed in May, 1820. At a national assem-
l)ly, held in Hualunc in May, 1821, a code of
laws similar to that adopted in liaiatea was
promulgated in that island also, under the
authority of the queen, the governor, and the
chiefs. These laws met with the approbation
of the people ; but there were a numl)er of
dissolute young men, who did not relish the
restraints which these laws imposed on their
appetites and passions. The practice of tat-
tooing, on account of its connection with idol-
atry and with certain vices, had been prohib-
ited. It was discovered that 4G young men
had been marking themselves, not from any
desire to ornament their persons, but from im-
patience of the restraint of law. They were
publicly tried, and sentenced to build a certain
(juantity of stone work, as a punishment. A
(lay or two afterwards, it was discovered that
Taaroarii, the king's son, a youth about eight-
tei'U years of age, had also been tattooed.
This was considered as evidence of a determi-
nation to oppose his father, and produced a
litrong sensation among the people. The
lather, a venerable old man, was deeply agi-
tated by a struggle between affection and
duty. The latter prevailed, and his sou was
brought to trial. His jHuiishmcnt was the
same as that of the others. lu the mouth of
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
697
August, he withdrew from the place of punish-
ment, with a number of the culprits, to Parea,
in the northern part of the island. There
the}' were joined by the son of the king of
Raiatea, a young man twenty-six years of age,
and by a large party of associates. These
proceedings seemed to indicate that a formid-
able rebellion was about to break out. A
public council of the chiefs and people was
held, and, after several interesting and affect-
ing speeches, it was determined that kindness
should be mingled with decision. An armed
force was sent, with orders to reason with the
malcontents, and invite them to return to
their duty, and to resort to arms only in case
of resistance. The insurrection was quelled
without violence. The rebels surrendered and
were brought back as captives. Two days
after, they were tried and sentenced to public
labor, with police ofBcers to guard them. On
the evening after the trial, the weekly service
was thronged by great numbers of the people,
and their attention was directed to the history
of Absalom's rebellion. The turbulence of these
disaffected young men having been repressed
without any bloodshed, the supremacy of the
laws was firmly and permanently established.
Slight insurrections, similar to that which
was excited in Huahine, occurred in Tahaa
and some of the other islands ; but, since the
introduction of Christianity, peace has pre-
vailed for a much longer period than was ever
before known. Their love for peace is ex-
pressed in terms like the following : " Let our
hands forget how to lift the club or throw the
spear. Let our guns decay with rust, we do
not want them ; though we have been pierced
with balls or spears, if we pierce each other
now, let it be with the word of God. How
happy are we now ; we sleep not with our
cartridges under our heads, our muskets by
our sides, and our hearts palpitating with
alarm. We have the Bible, we know the
Saviour, and if all knew him, if all obeyed
him, there would be no more war."
In 1821, Taaroarii, the king's only son, died,
as he had lived, without the Christian hope,
much to the grief of his aged father.
During the year 1837, the most happy
effects were observable in the improved moral
state of the people at Huahine. Numbers
came forward and offered themselves as candi-
dates for baptism ; nearly all of whom were
from that class who had lived in the practice
of the most debasing vices. A considerable
addition was also made to the church, chiefly
from among the young. The schools were
better attended by adults and children than in
former years, and a desire for knowledge, par-
ticularly for religious knowledge, was much
increased among all classes. At Borabora,
also, a great interest in religious things was
manifested, and in 1838, more than 100 mem-
bers were admitted to church-fellowship.
In February, 1839, the mission at Huahine
sustained a great loss in the death of Mahine,
the chief of that island. He was nearly 80
years of age, and, from the time when he be-
came a Christian, he had been a steady, active,
and consistent member of the church. For
several years he had been a deacon, and had
discharged the duties of that office with gi'eat
faithfulness. He showed a sincere and strong
attachment to the missionaries, and on several
occasions hazarded his life in defence of the
truth which they preached. In the prospect
of death, he was calm and composed. In reply
to one who asked him how he felt, he said,
" Christ is my resting-place ; the fear of death
is removed ; I have taken leave of all things
here, and am waiting and praying for the Lord
to take me."
Since that time, the mission to these islands
has been subject to various vicissitudes of de-
cline and advancement. Their proximity to
the Georgian group has subjected them to the
injurious influence of the excitement created
by the French outrages ; and they have not
been unmolested, the attempt having been un-
successfully made to subject them to the Pro-
tectorate. There has, however, on the whole,
been a steady advancement of the work. In
1851, all the stations were reported in a pros-
perous condition. But in 1852, owing to the
tyranny of the queen of Huahine, she was de-
posed, and the chief Teururai, a mild man,
and a member of the church, was chosen in
her place. A young man named Otare, who
had been one of the principal agents in bring-
ing about this change, was appointed prime
minister, and several of his relations were ap-
pointed to offices of trust. These men sought
the repeal of the laws prohibiting licentious-
ness and the use of ardent spirits. This led to
a civil war, in which, however, Teururai was
victorious, and the laws sustained. Yet, amid
this confusion, the church members generally
adorned their profession. Raiatea, also, the
same year, was afflicted with a civil war, aris-
ing out of a quarrel between the king and one
of his principal chiefs.
TABULAR VIEW.
STATIONS.
-= S -r- -^
Huahine
Raiatea
Tahaa
Borabora and Maupiti ....
Totals
^
.a
rr
f-
.S!
ra
c <-
s
>
^
.i ^'
■s
i
e
-g
1
5
375
24
2
180
75
18
1
330
58
7
4
5
969
100
7
240
430
676
Hervey Islands. — In 1821, two natives were
set apart with appropriate religious services,
at the Society Islands, and sent to Aitutaki.
698
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
Mr. Williams accompanied them, who found
the natives exhibiting in their manners all the
features of savage life. Mr. Williams related
to tlie chief, to his astonishment, what had
transpired on the other islands, and the teach-
ers were kindly received, with promises of pro-
tection. For some time, however, they labored
in great discouragement, suffering much from
the persecution of the natives. But, while the
old chief Avas engaged in an idolatrous feast of
several weeks' continuance, his daughter was
taken dangerously ill. Offerings were imme-
diately presented to the gods ; and to induce
them to restore the child to health, their favor
was invoked from morning till evening. The
disease, however, increased, and the girl died.
The old chief, incensed at the ingratitude of
the gods in requiting his zeal with such un-
kindness, determined at once to' abandon them,
and the next day sent his son to set fire to his
marae. Two other maraes near it took fire
and were also consumed. On the Sabbath,
after the death of the chiefs daughter, the
people of several districts brought their idols
to the teachers, and professed themselves wor-
shipers of Jehovah. Others followed their
example, and at the close of the week there
was not a professed idolater on the island.
Fifteen months after the arrival of the teach-
ers at Aitutaki, a general meeting of the in-
habitants was convened at the request of
Papeilia. In an address to the assembly, he
spoke of the immense labor they had formerly
bestowed in the erection of their maraes and
in the worship of their gods, and exhorted
them to let their '• strength, devotedness, and
steadfastness in the service of the true (Jod far
exceed." He then j^roposed that all the maraes
in the island should be burned, and the idols
be brought to him that he might send them
to Raiatea, and also that they sliould immedi-
ately commence building a house for the wor-
ship of Jehovah. To buth these proposals the
multitude assented. At the close of the meet-
ing, a general conflagration of the maraes took
place, and on the following morning not a sin-
gle temple remained. The whole poj)ulation
then came in i^rocessiou, district after district,
the chief and the priest leading the way, and
the people following them, leaving their re-
jected idols, which they laid at the teachers'
feet, and received in return copies of the Cios-
pels and elementary books. The missionaries
at Raiatea, hearing of the success of the native
teachers at Aitutaki, resolved to visit them,
and to attempt the introduction of the Gospi'l
into every island of that group. In July, 1823,
Messr.s. Jiourne and AVillianis, with six natives
who !iud been soletttuly set apart as teachers,
Bailed from Raiatea, and after a pleasant pas-
sage of five days, arrived at Aitutaki. A
number of canoes filled with men crowded
around the vessel, saluting the missionaries
with such expressions as these : " Good is the
Word of God ; it is now well with Aitutaki !
The good word has taken root at Aitutaki."
The teachers soon came on board, and inform-
ed Mr. AVilliams of the destruction of the idols
and temples, and added that the Sabbath was
regarded as a sacred day, that all the people
attended divine service, and that family prayer
was very general throughout the island.
Soon after, Messrs. Williams and Bourne,
with two native teachers and several natives of
Rarotongo set sail for that island ; and after
six or eight days' fruitless search for it, they
landed at Maugaia ; where, after being receiv-
ed in a friendly manner, the native teachers
were stripped of every thing they had, and
obliged to reembark. A few months after-
wards, two other native teachers went to the
island, and found the people prepared to receive
them ; a fatal epidemic having broken out,
which they attributed to the anger of God for
their treatment of the teachers. Though meet-
ing with opposition for some time, the Gospel
was ultimately successful at this island. When
Mr. Williams left i\Iaugaia, after his first visit t
in 1823, he proceeded to Atiu, where two na-
tive teachers had been sent two or three
months before. He found them in a most
pitiable condition. They had been stripped
by the nrtives of all their property, had suffer-
ed exceedingly from hunger, and become very
much disheartened by their want of success.
The chief came on board, where he met a na-
tive convert, who astonished him by relating
what had taken place, in the burning of idols,
in Aitutaki ; and Mr. Williams commented
upon what is said by David and Isaiah in re-
ference to idols, by which the mind of Roma-
tane was powerfully impressed ; especially by
the words, " AVith part thereof he roastcth
roast and is satisfied ; and the residue thereof
he makcth a god, and worshipeth it, and
prayeth unto it, and saith, Deliver me, for thou
art my god." The effect of this striking pass-
age of Scripture on the mind of the heathen
ciiief, was powerfully expressed by the language
in which it was uttered. There are in that
language two words, similar in sound but ex-
pressing opposite ideas, moa and non, the for-
mer meaning safped, and the latter profane or
connnon. All that pertains to the gods is the
superlative of moa, and all that relates to food
the superlative of noa. The chief now saw, for
the first time, the folly of making a god and
cooking food from the same tree, thus uniting
two opposite extremes, the moa and the noa.
For some time he appeared lost in wonder. At
length he retired, and spent the whole of the
night in conversation with the Aitutakians
about the wonderful truths he had heard, fre-
quently rising up and stami)ing with a><tonish-
mentthat he should have l)een so longdrhidcd.
Ilis idol gods he determined never again to wor-
ship. "Eye-s, it is true," .said he. '• they Inivc. but
wood caimot .see ; ears, they have, but wood
cannot hear." He expressed a determination
to demolish his maraes, to burn his idol.s, and
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
699
to commence immediately the erection of a
house for the worship of Jehovah. Leaving
Atiu, Mr. Williams sailed in search of the two
small islands Mitiaro and Mauke, taking with
him the newly converted Romatane, who was
king of those islands also. On arriving at
Mitiaro, the king had an interview with the
resident chief of the island, to whom he slated
that the object of his visit was to exhort him
and his people to burn their maraes, and aban-
don the worship of their false gods. He wished
also that they would place themselves under
the instruction of a Christian teacher, and
couvert the house they were erecting for him-
self into a house of prayer. The people listened
with astonishment, and inquired if the gods
would not all be enraged and strangle them.
" No," replied the king, " it is out of the pow-
er of the wood, that we have adorned and called
a god, to kill us."
Sailing from Mitiaro, Mr. Williams proceed-
ed to Mauke, where he found the people wait-
ing on the shore to welcome their king. The
first words of Romatane were, " I am come to
advise you to receive the word of Jehovah, the
true God, and to leave with you a teacher and his
wife who will instruct you. Let us destroy our
maraes. and burn all the evil spirits with fire :
never let us worship them again. They are
wood, which we have carved and decorated,
and called gods. Here is the true God and
his word, and a teacher to instruct you. The
true God is Jehovah, and the true sacrifice is
his Son Jesus Christ." The people listened
with astonishment, but said that as the king
assured them it was a " good word " which he
brought, they would receive it. It was deter-
mined to leave here a native teacher with his
wife, to whom the king presented a new house
which had been erected for himself, and com-
mending them to the care of the chief, he re-
turned to the vessel and shortly afterwards de-
parted. These islands were afterwards visited,
and found to have wholly abandoned idolatry,
and to have adopted the habits of Christian
people.
The Gospel had now been introduced into
five of the Hervey Islands, but Rarotonga, the
largest island of the group, remained undiscov-
ered. Mr. Williams inquired of Romatane if
he had ever heard of it, and learning from this
chief the direction in which it lay, he determined
to go again in search of it. He sailed on this
voyage in 1823, and after having been so long
tossed about by contrary winds as to be on the
point of giving up all hope of accomplishing
his object, he was at last delighted with the
sight of the lofty mountains and beautiful val-
leys of this lovely island. A boat was soon sent
on shore with Papeiha, another teacher, and one
of the Rarotongans whom Mr. Williams had
found at Aitutaki. Meeting with a favorable
reception, they immediately stated to the peo-
ple who gathered around them in great nuni-
bers, the object of their visit. Having in-
formed them of the renunciation of idolatry at
the other islands of that group, the teachers
proposed to the natives that they also should
receive Christian instruction, and become ac-
quainted with the way of salvation through
Jesus Christ. The proposition was agreed to,
and Makea the king came on board to conduct
the teachers to the shore. He was introduced
to his own people who had come_ with Mr.
Williams, among whom was his cousin. _ Early
the next morning the teachers and their wives
came off to the vessel in a most pitiable con-
dition, and related the sad treatment which
they, and especially the females, had received
during the night. A powerful chief who had
conquered the principal part of the island had
heard of their arrival, and had come with a
large retinue to take away one of the female
teachers, for the purpose of making her his
wife. He had already nineteen wives, and the
teacher was to be the twentieth.
Tapaireu, the cousin of Makea, was a per-
son of much influence, and to her exertions
the i^reservation of the females was owing.
Discouraged by the roughness of their recep-
tion, the 'teachers would have abandoned this
field of labor had not Papeiha, when the chiefs
expressed a desire that they should stay, ofiered
to remain alone on the island on condition that
his friend Tiberio should be sent from Raiatea
to his assistance. This was readily promised,
and Papeiha, after taking leave of his friends,
got into a canoe and went on shore carrying
nothing with him but the clothes he wore, his
native Testament, and a bundle of elementary
books.
Papeiha was conducted to the house of Ma-
kea, and was followed by an immense crowd,
one of whom cried out, " I'll have his hat ; "
another, " I'll have his jacket ; " a third, " I'll
have his shirt." Before they were able to
carry their threats into execution, they were
met by the chief, who, addressing Papeiha,
said, " Speak to us, 0 man 1 that we may
know the ' business on which you have come."
The teacher replied that he had come to in-
struct them in the knowledge of the true God,
and the way of salvation through Jesus Christ,
that they might burn their idols as the inhab-
itants of Tahiti and other islands had done.
The mtiltitude cried out with surprise and hor-
ror, "What! burn the gods! What gods
shall we then have, and what shall we do with-
out the gods ? "
After five months, Tiberio, Rapeiha's friend,
arrived, and they visited together all the chiefs
on the island, explaining to them the princi-
ples of Christianity. Carrying this plan into
cfi'ect, at some places they were kindly treated,
at others ridiculed, while from some they nar-
rowly escaped with their lives. A few days
after their return to the station, a priest came
I to the teachers and expressed a determination
! to burn his idols, and requested permission to
' place his son, a boy of ten years of age, under
700
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
their care, lest the gods in their anger should
destroy him. Leaving the child with the
teachers, he returned home, and next morning
came bending under the weight of the god he
was bringing to be burned. A crowd follow-
ed, calling him a madman, but he persisted in
bis resolution to embrace Christianity, and
threw his idol at the teachers' feet. One of
the teachers brought a saw to cut it up, but
as soon as the people saw the instrument ajv
pliod to the liead of the god, tliey became
frightened and ran away. In a short time
they returned, and in the presence of au im-
mense multitude the first rejected idol of Ra-
rotonga was committed to the flames. So
great an effect was produced on the minds of
the people by this event, that in less than ten
daj-s after it occurred 14 idols were destroyed.
Immediately afterwards the chief Tinomana
sent for the teachers, and informed them that
after nutch deliberation he had concluded to
embrace Christianity, and to place himself
under their instruction. He therefore wished
to know what was the first step towards be-
coming a Christian. Being told that he must
destroy his maraes and burn his idols, he in-
stantly i-eplied, " Come with me and see them
destroyed." The temple was immediately set on
fire, and was soon consumed, together with the
sacred pieces of wood with which it was deco-
rated. The idols were then brought and laid
at the feet of the teacher, who, having dis-
robed them, threw them into the fire. Some of
the people were much enraged with the chief,
and called him a fool and a uiadnum for burn-
ing his gods. The women became frantic with
grief, and made loud and doleful lamentations.
But notwithstanding this excitement, an im-
pression was made in favor of the new religion,
and in the course of a few days all the idols
iu the district were brought to the teachers for
their disposal. From this time the destruction
of the gods and maraes went on rapidly through-
out the island. Amung the last of the chiefs
to renounce his idols was the king. Though
many .*till adhered to their supcr.stitions,
the supremacy of idolatry was now at au end.
I'hrough the influence of the teachers, a chapel
COO feet in length was hnWt for the worship of
the true God, in the erection of which the ))eo-
plc were all an.xious to assist. AVhen the first
1)ost was laid, Tinomana was re(|uested by the
cing to im])lore the blessing of (Jod; and in
order that all might see and hear, the chief
climbed up into a tree and ofl'ered an appro-
priate prayer. While this chajjcl was build-
ing, Barutonga was visited by Messrs. Tyer-
man and Bennet, who found that the whole
population had renounced idolatry. One year
later Mr. Bourne preached to large congrega-
tions in Barotonga, and ba])tized many con-
verts. Of the progress of the Gospel in this
island he observes, " Much hius lieen said con-
cerning the success of the Go.spel in Tahiti and
the Society Islands, but it is not to be compar-
ed with its progress in Rarotonga. In Tahiti,
European missionaries labored for 1.5 long
years before the least fruit appeared. But two
years ago Rarotonga was hardly known to exist,
was not marked in any of the charts, and we
spent much time iu traversing the ocean in
search of it. Two years ago the Rarotongans
did not know there was such good news as the
Gospel. And now I scruple not to say that
their attention to the means of grace, their
regard to family and private prayer, equals
whatever has been witnessed at Tahiti and the
neighboring islands. And when we look at
the means, it becomes more astonishing. Two
native teachers, not particularly disiinguished
among their own countrymen for intelligence,
have been the instruments of eflecting this
wonderful change, and that before a single
missionary had set his foot upon the island."
The heathen party at Rarotonga, though
comparatively small, was sufiiciently numerous
to annoy the Christians, and at last the per-
sonal injuries inflicted on the converts to the
new religion led to a conflict between the two
parties. In this battle the Christians con-
quered. Having led their captives to the sea-
side, the victorious chiefs, instead of putting
them to death, ordered them not to be injured,
and advised them to embrace Christianity, iu
order that peace and happiness might be estab-
lished. The prisoners replied that they were
now convinced of the superior power of Jeho-
vah and of the merciful character of the Chris-
tians, and that they would therefore unite
with them in the worship of the true (xod.
On the following day they demolished all their
maraes and brought their idols to the teachers.
The island was soon after visited by Mr.
Williams and Mr. and Mrs. Pitman. A cha-
pel'was built, well plastered, capaljle of con-
taining nearly 3,000 people, without a single
nail or any iron work. The people were at-
tentive to instruction. Their anxiety to under-
stand the truths of the Gospel, and their punc-
tual attendance on ])ublic worshi]), were very
encouraging. Previous to the commencement
of public worship on the Sabbath, the people
met in cla.sses of 10 or 12 families, and a par-
ticular portion of the sermon was assigned to
each person, which he was to bring away.
One said, " Mine shall be the text, and all that
is said in immediate connection with it;" an-
other, '■ I will take care of the first division ;"
and a third, " I will bring home the particu-
lars under that head." After public worship
the classes met again, and after singing and
prayer, one among them began the examina-
tion by in(iuiring, "With whom is the tixtV
and proposed a variety of questions respecting
its meaning. He then proceeded to other parts
of the discourse, till the whole sermon iiad
passed in review, and to such habits of atten-
tion were the people trained, that a sentiment
of importance was rarely omitted. A code of
laws was established, and the diflictdt subject
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
701
of polygamy was disposed of, by requiring the
converts, from the king down, to select one
of their wives, and then be united in marriage
to her in public. We think the Gospel rule
would explicitly require that the first wife
should be retained, and all the others discarded.
The last visit which Mr. AVilliams made to
Earotonga was in 1834. The contrast be-
tween the appearance of the inhabitants at
this time and on his first visit is thus stated :
" When I found them in 1823, they were igno-
rant of the nature of Christian worship ; and
when I left them in 1834, 1 am not aware that
there was a house in the island where family
prayer was not observed every morning and
every evening."
During the year 1838, several native con-
verts were removed by death. Their last days
were full of hope and joy, and afforded to sur-
viving friends abundant consolation in the be-
lief that the exchange was their eternal gain.
In this year also great additions were made
to the churches at Earotonga. The spirit of
inquiry seemed to be general, and the lives of
very many testified that they had become sin-
cere Christians.
One of the missionaries, in a letter from
Earotonga dated January 14, 1840, stated that
a meeting was regularly held in the chapel at
Arorangi, to give opportunity for jiersons to
express their feelings and to exhort one an-
other to diligence and love in the work of the
Lord. At one of these meetings an old man
who was a candidate for church fellowship,
said that he had lived during the reign of four
kings. " During the first we were continually
at war. During the second we were overtaken
with a severe famine, and all expected to per-
ish. During the third we were conquered, and
became the prey of two other settlements.
But during the reign of this third king we
were visited by another King — a good King
— a powerful King — a King of love — Jesus
the Lord from heaven. He has gained the
victory ; he has conquered our hearts ; we are
all his subjects ; therefore we now have peace
and plenty in this world, and hope soon to
dwell with him in heaven."
In 1841, the directors record with satisfac-
tion the progress of their missions in these
islands. In Earotonga, the largest of the
group, they say the Christian churches present-
ed a most impressive and animating aspect,
both as to numbers and character ; and the
social and moral character of the population,
a lew years previous loathsome and terrific,
was then pure and peaceful. One of the most
consistent members of the church, and an ac-
tive evangelist, was, in the days of his youth,
a cannibal. An institution was commenced
about this time at Avarua, for the training of
native missionaries, in which young men are
instructed in Christian theology and other
branches of useful knowledge.
In 1 ^43, the directors say that in the islands
forming the Hervey Group, the people gener-
ally evince a sincere attachment to the Gos-
pel. " The entire aspect of society is changed
from the savage to the civilized ; and misery,
strife, and bloodshed have given place to the
comforts and amenities of social life. Educa-
tion is generally sought for, and the members
of the church adorn their profession ; and the
entire Bible is now translated into the Earo-
tonga dialect."
Since that time the work has been advanc-
ing with a steady progress from year to year.
In 18.51, there was a general awakening at
three of the stations, affectino^ about 300 per-
sons, most of whom gave evidence of a saving
change.
Since 1846, the institution for training na-
tive evangelists and teachers at Avarua, hag
sent forth 15 men and 9 women to occupy dif
ferent spheres of missionary labor.
On the 24th of August, the churches on the
island of Earotonga held a meeting at Nga-
tangaia, where 700 communicants united in
the celebration of the Lord's Supper, and
among them were the captain and part of the
crew of the missionary ship, the Johi Wil-
liams.
TABULAE VIEW, 1853.
■/:
ja
a
o
STATIONS.
13
a
§s
S
t4
S
1^
6-^
'■5 "-
0
111
Rakotonga.
Ngatangaia, ]
Avarua,. . . . VS stations. .
3
24
700
20(i
3
800
Arorangai,..J
Aitutaki*
1
2
70
130
451
"32
'3
Maugaia
850
Totals
6
94
1281
238
6
1650
* 1851.
Samoan or Navigators' Islands. — These is-
lands were visited by a French vessel, in 1787,
when several of the party were treacherously
murdered ; and this act created such an im-
pression of their treachery and ferocity, that
for many years they seem not to have been
visited by any vessel from any part of the ci-
vilized world.
The idea of introducing the Gospel into this
group appears to have originated with Mr.
Williams, who, in 1824, formed the plan of
making a voyage to the Navigators' Islands.
But the great distance of this group (nearly
2,000 miles) from Eaiatea, the ferocious cha-
racter of its inhabitants, and in the event of
his death the desolate condition of his wife
and children at so great a distance from their
home and friends, naturally rendered Mrs. Wil-
liams unwilling that her husband should enter
on such an undertaking. At length, however,
she gave her " full concurrence," and Mr. Wil-
702
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
liams began to devise the means for carrying
his plan into execution. Having no vessel
suitable for such a voyage, he attempted to
build one, and with the assistance of the na-
tives completed it in about three months. In
the prosecution of this work, the ingenuity
and skill of Mr. W. was put to the test.
It was indispensable to its accomplishment
that he should have a pair of smith's bellows,
as well as certain tools for working in iron,
which were not to be found in Rarotonga.
Having killed, for the sake of their skins, 3 of
the 4 goats on the island, he constructed, with
much difiBculty, a tolerable bellows. But
when the rats had left nothing more of his
new apparatus than the naked boards, all
hope of accomplishing his object in the ordi-
nary way was removed. Unwilling, however,
to relinquish his purpose, he persevered in his
efforts, and at last hit upon a novel expedient
to " raise the wind." It occurred to him that
as water is thrown by a pump, air might be
projected on the same principle. With two
boxes eighteen inches square and four feet
high, fitted with valves and levers, and worked
by 8 or 10 natives, he contrived to procure
such a succession of blasts as answered all his
purposes in the building of his vessel. A stone
was substituted for an anvil, and a pair of car-
periter's pincers for tongs. With very little
iron, without a saw, without oakum, or cord-
age, or sail cloth, he succeeded in launching a
vessel sixty feet in length and eighteen in
breadth, of seventy or eighty tons burthen.
It was named " The Messenger of Peace."
The trees were split with wedges, and for
adzes the natives used small hatchets. The
bark of the hibiscus was twisted into ropes,
and native mats quilted for sails, and the rud-
der was constructed of " a piece of a pickaxe,
a cooper's adze, and a large hoe."
In the vessel so constructed, Messrs. Wil-
liams and BarfT, with 7 native teachers, sailed
from Itaiatea for the Navigators' Islands, on
the 24th of ^fay, ls30. They proceeded first
to Tongataboo, where they found Fauea, a
chief of one of the Navigators' Islands, who
stated that he was related to the most influen-
tial families there ; that he had lieen eleven
years absent from his home, and that he was
now desirous of returning. Having heard
that the Messenger of Peace wits on a voyage
to the.se islands, and that the oljject of the
missionaries was to convey the Gospel to his
countrymen, he offered, if they would take him
with tliLin, to u,«e all his influi-nce with his re-
latives and the chicf-^ to induce them to receive
the teachers kindly, and attend to their instruc-
tions. After .'ipending a fortnight at Tonga-
taboo, tlie missionaries and the chief, Fauea.
sailed for the Navigators' I.«Iands. 'J'hey had
not been long at sea, when Fauea came and
seated himself l)y the side of Mr. Williams,
and said that he had been thinking of the
great work which the missionaries had under-
taken, and though he had no doubt that the
chiefs and people would gladly receive them, he
feared opposition from a person called 'I'amafain-
ga,in whom the .spirit of the gods dwelt, and who
was a terror to all the inhabitants. lie fur-
ther added, that if he forbade it, the people
would be afraid to place themselves under
Christian instruction. After a protracted voy-
age, the beautiful island of Savaii was des-
cried in the distance. As soon as the vessel
reached the shore a number of natives came
off in their canoes, and welcomed Fauea to
his native land. After some conversation the
chief inquired '• AVhere is Tamafaiuga ? "
" Oh ! " replied the people, " he is dead, he is
dead ! he was killed 10 or 12 days ago." Al-
most frantic with joy at this information,
Fauea leaped about the deck, shouting, " The
devil is dead ! the devil is dead I our work is
done ; the devil is dead ! "
On the first Sabbath after their arrival,
canoes came off to the vessel, bringing articles
for barter. Fauea informed the people that
the ship was e vaa lotu, or a praying ship, and
that as it was Ic aso sa, a sacred day, they could
not trade with them until the morrow. This
information surprised them, but Fauea col-
lecting a circle around him on the deck of the
ship, stated the object of the missionaries in
coming among them, informed them that a
number of islanils had embraced Christianity,
and specified some of the advantages which
the inhabitants were deriving from this new
religion. " Can the religion of these foreigners
be any thing but wise and good ?" said the
chief to his countrymen. " Let us look at t/iem,
and then at oiirsclccs ; their heads are covered,
while ours are exposed to the heat of the sun
and the wet of the rain. Their bodies arc
clothed all over with beautiful cloth, wliile wc
have nothing but a bandage of leaves around
our waists ; they have clothes upon their very
feet, while ours are like the dog's. Look at
their axes, their scissors, and their otlier prop-
erty, how rich tkey are !" This address was
listened to with great interest by the natives,
who crowded around the speaker, and with
outstretched necks and gaping mouths care-
fully caught the words as they fell from his
lips.
While Fauea was thus em])loyed on board
the vessel, his wife, who had gone on shore
with the teachers and their wives, was ecjually
diligent in describing to the natives the won-
ders .she had seen, and the value of the religion
which was now brought to tlieir island. When
food was offered, she stood up and asked a
l)le.ssing in tlie presence of the a.-^sonibled mul-
titude. Malieloa, the king, though engaged
in a war, to avenge the dt-ath of 'J'amafainga,
received them kiiully, and declared tliut il was
the hapi)iest day of his life.
In October, 18.32, Mr. Williams sailed from
Rarotonga on a second visit to the Samoa.s.
The fii-st island that appeared in sight was
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
703
Manua, the most easterly of the group. Asj
the vessel aj^proached the shore, a number of j
canoes put off and advanced towards it. In
one of them a native stood up, and shouted,
" We are sons of the Word, we are sons of
the Word ; we are waiting for a falau lolu, a
religious ship, to bring us some people whom
they call missionaries, to tell us about Jesus
Christ." One of the chiefs came on board,
and finding that the vessel was a " religious
ship," appeared highly delighted, and asked for
a missionary. On being informed that there
was but one, and that he was intended for
Manono, he manifested great regret, and beg-
ged to be supplied as soon as possible.
The vessel next touched at Tutuila, where it
M'as immediately surrounded by a number of
canoes, filled with savage men, anxious to ob-
tain powder and muskets. The missionaries
did not land here, but passed along the coast
to a district called Leone, where a person
came on board, and introduced himself as a
" son of the Word." He informed Mr. Wil-
liams that about fifty persons in his district
had embraced Christianity and erected a place
worship, and that they were waiting his arri-
val. The heathen party arranged themselves
along the beach, and presented rather a form-
idable appearance. Mr. Williams supposing
his life might be in danger, desired the natives
to cease rowing and unite with him in prayer.
The chief who stood in the centre of the as-
sembled multitude perceiving that the mission-
aries were afraid to laud, directed the people
to sit down, and wading into the water, ad-
dressed Mr. W. with " Son, will you not come
on shore ? will you not land amongst us ?"
Mr. W. replied that he had heard that the
inhabitants of that bay were exceedingly sav-
age, and that he did not know that he should
trust himself among them. "Oh!" replied the
chief, " we are not savages now, we are Chris-
tians." " Where did you hear of Christianity ?"
asked Mr. AV. " Oh !" he exclaimed, " a great
chief from the white man's country, named
Williams, came to Savaii about twenty moons
ago, and placed there some tamafai-lotu (work-
ers of religion,) and several of our people who
were there, began on their return to instruct
their friends, many of whom have become sons
of the Word." Then pointing to a group of
persons sitting apart from the rest, each of
whom had a piece of white native cloth tied
round his arm, he added, " These are the Chris-
tians, and they are distinguished from their
heathen countrymen by the cloth which you
see upon their arms." Mr. Williams then in-
formed him that he himself was the " great
chief " he had spoken of, and that he had car-
ried the " workers of religion " to Savaii about
twenty moons before. On hearing this, the
chief made a signal to the multitude, who in-
stantly sprang from their seats, rushed to the
sea, seized the boat and carried both it and Mr.
W. to the shore. Amoamo, the chief, conducted
Mr. W. to the Christians, by one of whom he
was informed that a chapel had been built,
and that service was performed every Sabbath
day. " And who," asked Mr. Williams, " con-
ducts the worship ?" " I do," said he, " I take
my canoe, go down to the teachers, get some
religion, which I bring carefully home, and
give to the people ; and when that is gone, I
take my canoe again and fetch some more.
And now you are come, for whom we have
been so long waiting 1 AVhere's our teacher ?
give me a man full of religion, that I may not
expose my life to danger by going so long a
distance to fetch it." On hearing that he
could not be supplied with a teacher, he was
affected almost to tears, and would scarcely
believe it, for he imagined tfhat the vessel waa
full of them. Mr. AV. inquired of the chief if
he had become a worshiper of Jehovah. He
replied that he had not, but added, " If you
will give me a worker of religion to teach me,
I will become a believer immediately." It
was with sincere regret that Mr. Williams left
this little band without a missionary to teach
them, and returned to the ship to prosecute
his voyage. He found there a party of natives
from an adjoining district who were waiting
to present a request that he would pay them a
visit. The chief assured Mr. Williams that he
and nearly all his people Avere Christians, and
that they had erected a spacious place of wor-
ship in imitation of the one at Savaii, and that
he was daily engaged in teaching his people
what he had himself been taught. Seeing that
Mr.W. was inclined to doubt his statements,
he placed his hands before him in the form of
a book, and recited a chapter out of the Tahi-
tian primer, after which he said, " Let us
pray," and kneeling down upon the deck, he
repeated the Lord's prayer in the Tahitian
language. The next day Mr. W. reached
Upolu, when natives from various parts of the
island approached the vessel, saying that they
were " sous of the AVord,", and that they were
waiting for a " religion ship " to bring them
missionaries.
AVhen Mr. AVilliams reached Manono, the
chief, Matetau, whom he had seen on his first
visit to this island, came off to the ship and
inquired with great earnestness, " AA^here's my
missionary?" Te-ava and his wife, the native
teachers who had been set apart for this sta-
tion, were then introduced to him. He seized
them with delight, and exclaimed, " Good, very
good, I am happy now !" After a hasty visit
to this island, Mr. Williams proceeded to Sa^
vaii, where he was received by the teachers
and people with many expressions of joy. They
informed him that Malietoa, his brother, the
principal chiefs, and nearly all the inhabitants
of the settlement, had embraced Christianity,
and that the body of the people were only
awaitiug his arrival to follow their example.
The next day he addressed about 700 persons
in the chapel. He was followed by one of the
704
SOUTH SKA. ISLANDS.
native teachers, who was succeeded by Malie-
toa, wlio declared that it was his intention to
" give his whole soul to the word of Jehovah,
and to cnii)]oy his utmost endeavors that it
might speedily encircle the land in which he
dwelt."
During his stay at Savaii, Mr. Williams
learned from the teachers many interesting
particulars resi^ectiug the introduction of the
Gospel into the island, and especially its recei>
tion by Malictoa and his family. A short
time previous to the day fixed upon for the
opening of the new chapel, the king called to-
gether his family, and stated that he was about
to fulfil his promise and become a worshiper
of Jehovah. His sous replied that if it was
good for him it was also good for them, and
that they also would receive the Gospel. But
to this he objected, saying that the gods would
be enraged with him for abandoning them, and
endeavor to destroy him, " and perhaps," added
he, " Jehovah may not have power to protect
me against the elTects of their anger. I will
thereibre try the experiment of becoming his
worshiper, and if he can protect me you may
with safety follow my example ; but if not, I
only shall fall a victim to their vengeance—
you will be safe." The young men unwillingly
consented to wait a mouth or six weeks ; but
the third week their patience became exhaust-
ed, and going to their father they stated that
he had tried the experiment long enough, and
as no evil had befallen him, they would inmie-
diately follow his example. Not only his sons,
but all his relatives, and nearly all his people,
abandoned their heathen worshij). In connec-
tion with this reimnciation of their old reli-
gion, a singular ceremony was observed. 'Eve-
ry chief of note at the Samoa Islands had his
du, in which the spirit of the gods was sui>
posed to reside. This etu was some species of
bird, fish, or reptile, and if any one of that
class was cooked and eaten, the etu was con-
sidered so entirely dAecrated that it could
never again be regarded as an object of reli-
gious veneration. The etu of Malietoa's sons
was a fish called anae. On the day ajipointed,
a_ large party of friends and relatives were in-
vited to partake of the feast. A number of
anae were dressed, and a portion laid before
each individual, who with li-av and trembling
ate of the sacred fuod. The superstitious fears
of the young men were so much excited lest
they should be punished with death for their
presumi)tion, that ou returjiing from the feast
they drank a large dose of cocoanut oil and
salt water, to prevent the effects which they
feared might follow. The people who were
spectators of this feast, exjjected that those
who partook of it would fall down dead sud-
denly, but seeing no harm hajipen to them they
changed tlieir minds, and said that Jehovah
was the true (iud. 'J'lie result of this experi-
ment produced a decidtd tliongc in favor of
Christiuuity, and induced many of the people
to place themselves under the instruction of
the teachers.
Having completed the object of his voyage,
and visited all the islands of the Samoa group,
Mr. W. returned to his family with feelings of
gratitude and joy. In less than twenty mo^utha
an entire change had taken platee in the habits
and character of the Samoans. Chapels had
been built in all the islands, and every where
the people seemed waiting to receive instruc-
tion. The desire of the chiefs and people of
this group to receive Euglish missionaries, was
communicated by Mr. Williams to the Direc-
tors of the Missionary Society, and in Novem-
ber, 1835, six missionaries, five of whom were
accompanied by their wives, sailed from Lon-
don for the Navigators' Islands.
The last accounts from this group of isknda
is of the most interesting and encouraging
character. Mr. Heath estimates that there
are now on the island of Upolu 20,000 persons
who have embraced Christianity. On Manono
all the inhabitants, consisting of about 2,000,
are professedly Christians. At Savaii thero
are from 12,000 to 13,000 converts. Ou Tu-
tuila there are 6,000, and several hundreds on
the smaller islands. What a contrast with
the condition of the natives in 1830, when the
heralds of salvation first visited their shores !
" Then, their beautiful country was ' burned
with fire ;' rapine, murder, cannibalism, crimes
and horrors at which the heart sickens, gene-
rally prevailed ; now, with wonder and grati-
tude the messengers of mercy exclaim, ' Behold
how good and pleasant a thing it is for breth-
ren to dwell together in unity.' And this
change, as great as it is blessed, has been
efiected within the short space of ten years.
Truly may we exclaim, 'What hath God
wrought ! ' "
In 1843, there were some painful defec-
tions among the members of the churches at
Savaii and Palauli ; and this was followed by
a disturbance between two villages, which
threatened to embroil the whole group in a
general war. In November, 1843, the party
at Sapapalii declared open war against the
inhabitants of ralauli. The missionary and
members of the church at the former place
used every means in their power to turn the
war party from their evil course, without effect.
When the attack was made, the people of Pa-
lauli, unwilling to shed blood, fled to the dis-
trict beyond, while the invaders wasted the
plantations, cut down the bread-fruit and
cocoanut trees, killed and devoured the do-
mestic animals, and burnt or removed every
house in the district, except the chapel and
the houses of the missionaries. On the return
of the jiarty, they began to persecute the mem-
bers of the church, and threatened to \nm\
their houses and drive them from their lands.
But, out of 430 members, there was a defec-
tion, during those trying times, of but aljout
35. This war continued to distract the couu-
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
705
try and disturb the operations of the mission-
aries, for several years ; producing the most
disastrous results, desolating many fertile dis-
tricts. And yet, God overruled it for good,
as it led many of those opposed to the war to
seek an asylum at the station, and thus in-
creased the attendance upon the word. Mr.
McDonald wrote, iu 1849, that there were
nearly 400 candidates for admission to the
church. This war was not brought to a close
till April, 1851, when a battle was fought,
which resulted in the complete triumph of the
injured party ; but such was the intluence of
Christianity upon the victors, that not a single
act of retributive vengeance was perpetrated
upon the vanquished, though their provocations
were very aggravated. The missionaries say
that the means they have used to restore peace
and harmony have commended themselves to
all, and convinced them that they were their
friends. Yet, the war had produced a very
demoralizing effect, and led to the revival of
heathen customs. --v.
The Samoan Seminary at Malua, forms one
of the most interesting features of the mission.
In the course of seven years from its com-
mencement, this institution had under its in-
struction 53 teachers, 34 women, wives of
teachers, and 50 boys ; many of whom are now
employed in the missionary work. And, to a
considerable extent, it has been a self-sup-
porting institution. In 1852, there were in the
institution 4 Erromangans, 4 natives of Sav-
age Island, 4 from Fate, 1 from New Caledo-
nia, 1 from Clarence Island, 18 Samoan youths,
and 36 teachers, with their wives and children,
making 146 in all.
The Papists have made a descent upon these
islands, but as yet have been unable to obtain
a footing.
TABULAE VIEW, 1853.
STATIONS.
Savau : "1
Lafaasaleleaga 1 ..
JIatautu V ..
iSapapalii I ..
Salulua J ..
Upolu : . . . .
Apia
Fasitootai. . .
Malua
Ulemoega. ..
Taluafata...
Talealili
Lepa (1848) .
llAXONO ;
TUTt'ILA : .
Pago-1'ago
Leone
Maxua : .
Totals .
^A^
212
120
2141
14
10
450
45
Several stations, where churches existed be-
fore the war, are not mentioned in the latest
reports, and probably have been broken up ;
and some of the stations noticed above have a
number of out-stations. Near Lepa, for in-
stance, there are 40 villages, with a population
of 15,000. It is impracticable, from the im-
perfect returns, to ascertain the number of
native teachers, or to distinguish between
teachers and preachers. The number is un-
doubtedly much larger than appears in the
table. So also in regard to the schools, many
of the stations only reporting the number of
scholars, not of schools.
Austral Islands. — In 1821, a fatal epidemic
l^revailed at Rurutu, and Auura, a young chief,
with some of his companions, fled from the
island, and remained for some time at Tubuai,
about 100 miles distant. On their return
they were drifted about for 3 weeks, and after
the loss of some of their crew, they landed at
Manrua, the most westerly of the Society Is-
lands. Here they were shown the demolished
temples, prostrate altars, and broken idols,
and informed that the inhabitants of these
islands had become worshipers of Jehovah,
the one living and true God. They immedi-
ately determined to proceed to Borabora, to
see the missionaries, and from this place they
went to Raiatea. They were filled with won-
der at what they saw.
On the Sabbath they were conducted to the
chapel, and beheld with astonishment the as-
sembled multitude. The songs of praise in
which the people joined, and the sermon from
. one of the missionaries, excited the deepest in-
-■lerest in their minds. They were at once con-
vinced of the superiority of the Christian re-
ligion, and desired to be instructed in the
knowledge of the true God. They became
pupils in the school, and soon learned to read
and spell correctly. Auura was exceedingly
diligent in learning, and made very rapid pro-
gress. In a little more than three mouths he
was able to read and write well, and had com-
mitted to memory the greater part of the cate-
chism. Having publicly renounced their
idols and professed themselves worshipers of
Jehovah, the strangers became anxious to re-
turn to their own island, that they might carry
to their countrymen the knowledge of the true
God and of his Son Jesus Christ. An oppor-
tunity occurring for them to go in a vessel
bound for England, Auura and his friends
were delighted with the prospect of returning
to their country, but they objected to going to
their "land of darkness without a light in
their hand." Hastening to the missionaries,
the chief earnestly requested them to send in-
structers to his native land. On assembling
the people and inquiring who among them
would go, two of the native deacons, Maha-
mene and Puna, came forward and said, " Here
are we ; send us." Every member of the
church at Eaiatea brought something as a
ro6
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
testimony of his affection, which they present-
ed to the teachers. The missionaries supplied
them witli elementary books and a few copies
of the Gospel in the'Tahitian language, from
which their owu does not essentially differ.
Thus equipped, the Raiatean Christians em-
barked on the 5th of July, 1821, with Auura
and his friends, and on the third day after
their departure arrived at Rurutu, where
Auura was welcomed by the remnant of his
countrymen. The tidings of his return soon
s^prcad' through the island, and the whole popu-
lation came to offer their congratulations. On
the night of his arrival, Auura conveyed his
own idol on board the ship in which he had
returned, and on the following day convened a
meeting of his countrymen. The little band
of Christians entered the assembly, and Auura
demanding attention, informed them of the
incidents of his voyage, and the islands he had
visited, and of the 'knowledge he had obtained
respecting the true God, the destiny of man,
and the means of happiness in a future state.
He declared that the god whom they worship-
ed was the foundation of all deceit, that their
idols were mere images, and their priests im-
postors. He therefore proposed to his country-
men to follow his example by renouncing their
false religion, and adopting that v,-hich would
lead to immortality. The priests opposed this
startling proposition, but the king and chiefs
replied, •' AVc will receive the word of life ;
we will burn the evil spirits ; let every thing
made by our hands as an object of worship be
totally charred in the fire." An aged man,
who had listened to Auura with deep interest,
arose and said, " Behold you say, 0 Auura,
that we have souls ; till now, we never knew
that man possessed a soul." The chief then
introduced the two missionaries from Raiatea;
stated their object in coming to Rurutu, and
recommended them to the kind attentions of
the people. The missionaries then briefly ad-
dres.^ed the meeting, and concluded by recom-
mending to the chiefs to provide an entertain-
ment tlie next day of a number of kinds of
fiiod which were considered as sacred, and of
which it was thought a female could not par-
take without instant death. The feast was
accordingly prepared, and Auura, his wife and
friends, with the Raiatean Christians, unitedly
partook of the sacred food. The chiefs and
people stood around, expecting to see those
who had thus f»penly violated the law of the
gods, either fall into convulsions or expire in
agony. But when they saw that no harm be-
fel them, they simultaneously exclaimed, " The
priests have deceived us," and hastening to
their temples, they hurled the idols from the
places they had so long occupied, burnt to the
ground their sacred buildings, and then pro-
ceeded to tlic demolition of every marac in
the island.
In October, 1822. the island was visited by
Messrs. Tycrman and Beuuet, who found the
results of a little more than one year's exertion
surprising. Many had learned to read, and
some to write. The teachers had erected neat
plastered dwellings for themselves, and under
their direction the people had built a chapel
eighty feet long and thirty-six feet wide. The
railing around the table, in front of the pulpit
and by the side of the stairs, was composed of
the handles of warriors' spears. " The people
here," says a missionary, " learn war no more,
but all submitting to the I'rince of Peace,
have cast away their instruments of cruelty
with their idols."
In 1823, Rurutu was visited by Mr. Wil-
liams. He found that the industry and im-
provement of tlie people had been progressive.
" Many of the chiefs were dressed in European
clothing, and all were attired in the most de-
cent and becoming manner. In the house of
God, no congregation could have behaved
with more propriety. Not a vestige of idola-
try was to be seen, not a god was to be found
in the island."
In 1825, the Falcon, a large American ship,
commanded by Captain Chase, was wrecked at
Rurutu. The chief officer and crew remained
some time on the island, and the captain on
his departure left the following testimony with
the native teachers : " The natives gave us all
the assistance in their power, from the time
the ship struck to the present moment. The
first day, while landing the things from the
ship, they were put into the hands of the na-
tives, and not a single article of clothing was
taken from any man belonging to the ship,
though they had it in their power to have
plundered us of every thing. Since I have
lived on shore, myself, officers, and people
have received the kindest treatment from the
natives, for which I shall ever be thankful."
Captain Chase afterwards rewarded the na-
tives for their assistance, by giving them a
portion of the oil. They immediately formed
a native missionary society, and contributed a
considerable part of the oil in aid of the funds
of the Parent Society. It was afterwards sold
for £CG, and the proceeds sent to the Society
in London.
In 1829, this island was again visited by Mr.
Williams, who found that the people, although
their teachers had left them, continued to ob-
serve all their religious services, and that Auura
officiated as minister. During the previous
year, they had contributed to the Missionary
Society 750 bamboos of cocoanut-oil. They
earnestly requested that another teacher might
be sent them, saying that " one-handed peoj)le
were very good, but that two-handed people
were much better."
On the return of Auiua to his native island,
he found there a number of the inhabitants of
Rimatara. These followed the example of the
Rurutuans in destroying their idols and receiv-
ing Christian instruction. They .shortly after-
ward sailed for their own island, and induced
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
TOT
many of tlieir countrymen to abandon their
idols and embrace Christianity.
In June, 1822, two native Christians were
sent from Borabora, to instruct the inhabitants
of Rimatara in reading, writing, and the first
elements of religion. These teachers labored
with so much diligence and success that, when
the island was visited by Mr. Williams in Oc-
tober, 1828, the inhabitants had renounced
their idols, and were living in harmony with
their teachers. A chapel had been erected
for the worship of the true God, which was
opened during Mr., Williams's visit. The fe-
males were neatly dressed in white native cloth,
with bonnets which the teachers' wives had
taught them to make. The entire population
were receiving instruction, and the school for
children contained one hundred and thirty
scholars. In 1825, Rimatara was visited by
Mr. Bourne, who was delighted with the ap-
pearance of the station, and in 1819, Pomare,
king of Tahiti, left a man on the island of
Raivavai, who, though ignorant and immoral
himself, undertook to teach the people ; and in
1821, when visited by Capt. Henry, they had
made such improvement of this poor instruc-
tion that the renunciation of idolatry had be-
come general throughout the land ; and he
says of them, " The very quiet, devout, and
orderly manner in which they conducted them-
selves, not only in church but during the Sab-
bath, excited my highest admiration. They
sent a request for suitable teachers, and in
1822, three native missionaries were sent from
Eimeo. In 18*^6, a Christian church was
formed among this people, and sixteen persons,
after examination, were admitted to its privi-
leges.
The inhabitants of the neighboring island of
Tubuai, hearing that the people of Rurutu and
other islands had renounced their idols and
embraced Christianity, sent a deputation to
Tahiti, requesting teachers and books. Twp
native teachers, with a supply of useful arti-
cles, embarked, in June, 1822, for the island of
Tubuai, accompanied by Mr. Nott. On arriv-
ing at Tubuai, they found the whole population
engaged in war and on the eve of a battle.
They went immediately to the king, acquainted
him with the design of their visit, and re-
quested that hostilities might be suspended.
The king expressed a willingness to accede to
their proposal^ provided the consent of the op-
posing party could be obtained. A chief
having been despatched with a message of
peace, his proposal was accepted, and the next
morning, the two parties met, and peace was
concluded. The chiefs then embraced each
other, and the warriors, perceiving the recon-
ciliation of their leaders, dropped their imple-
ments of war, and rushing into each other's
arms, presented a scene of joy, far different
from the conflict in which they expected to be
engaged. The next day, the inhabitants of
Tubuai were invited to attend public worship,
when Mr. Nott delivered the first Christian dis-
course to which they had ever listened. In
1826, when this island was visited by Mr. Da-
vies, the profession of Christianity had become
general throughout the island, and the chiefs
and people were assisting the teachers in erecting
comfortable dwellings, and a substantial house
for public worship.
In the year 1825, Rapa was visited by a
vessel from Tahiti, which on its return carried
two of the inhabitants to that island, who were
astonished and delighted at the strange objects
presented to their notice. Having attended
the schools and places of public worship, and
learned the alphabet, they soon after returned
to their own island, accompanied by two Tahi-
tians, to whom the inhabitants became so much
attached, that they were invited by the chiefs
and people to reside among them permanently.
In January, 1826, two Tahitian teachers with
their wives, accompanied by a schoolmaster
and a mechanic, sailed from Tahiti for Rapa.
They carried with them not only spelling-books
and copies of the Tahitian translation of the
Scriptures, but also a variety of useful tools,
seeds, and plants, together with timber for a
chapel. Mr. Davies, one of the senior mission-
aries at Tahiti, accompanied the teachers to
their new station. The chiefs received them
with every mark of respect, and promised them
protection and aid. On the first Sabbath after
their arrival, Mr. Davies preached in the Tahi-
tian language to a number of the natives, who
seemed impressed with the services. This
island was visited in 1829 by two missionaries,
who found that four chapels, in which religious
instruction was statedly given, had been erected
at different stations. The people manifested
an increasing interest in religious things, and
their improvement exceeded the expectations
of their visiters.
TABULAR
VIEW.
STATIONS.
Church
Members.
Additions re-
ported the
last year.
40
36
36
47
11
Tubuai
19
7
Totals.;
159
37
The work has continued to be carried on by
native agency alone, except the occasional vis-
its of missionaries ; and, owing to their remote
situation, it is seldom that any intelligence
is received from the mission. Mr. Rodgerson
visited Raivavai and Tubuai in 1838, and Mr.
Orsmond, Rurutu and Rimatara, in 1839 ;
when they observed many signs of improve-
ment. In May and June, 1846, they were
again visited by Mr. Barff, of Huahiue, who
was greatly encouraged by what he witnessed.
1^5
SOUTH SEi^ ISLANDS.
Peace and purity provailed among the native
believer? ; and tlie native agents were faithful
and zealous in their work, and their labors ap-
peared to have been crowned with the divine
blessing. Tlie populatiou of these islands is
Binall, probably not exceeding 1,000.
I'aumotuor Pearl Islands. — In the early part
of the reign of Poniare II., king of Tahiti,
many of the inhabitants of the Paumotu or
Pearl Islands fled to the Georgian Islands for
security during a war. They were protected
and Iiospitably entertained by Pomarc, and
when the 'J'ahitians renounced idolatry, they
also cast away the idols they had brought with
them, and placed themselves under the instruc-
tion of the missionaries. In 1827, they re-
turned to their own i.slauds, and immediately
after their arrival ]Moorea, one of the number,
who had learned to read and had been hope-
fully converted, began to instruct his country-
men. He met with such success, that with
the exception of the inhabitants of one district,
the whole populatiou agreed to renounce
heathcuisni. Moorea was subsequently charged
with having deceived his countrymen, in the
accounts he had given of the change at Tahiti,
and, to save his life, was obliged to leave the
island. But when the people afterwards be-
came convinced that they had accused him
falsely, they burnt their idols and demolished
their temples. Several hundreds of tliem soon
after sailed to Tahiti, a distance of three hun-
dred mile.s, for the purpose of obtaining books
and receiving instruction, and, before they left
the island, several of them were admitted to
Christian fellowship. Early in the year 1822,
Moorea and Teraa, another Christian native,
were publicly set apart as teachers, and soon
after sailed for Anaa, or Chain Island.
Shortly afterwards, a canoe from this island
arrived at Tahiti, bringing the pleasing intelli-
gence that the inhabitants were M'illing to re-
ceive Christianity ; that war, cannibalism, and
idolatry had ceased, and that a jjlace of wor-
ship was building in every district. Two
other native teachers were afterwards sent to
these islands.
Mr. Orsmond visited Chain Island in 1839 ;
where lie addressed congregations of 300 or
400, and formed a church of 43 membei-s.
Marijucsas Islands.— h\ 1797, Captain Wil-
son, after landing the missionaries at Tahiti
and Tonga! aboo, sftiled for the Manjuesas.
At Santa Christina he left Mr. Crook, who,
after residing on the island about a year, be-
came discoru'aged and returned to 'I'ahiti. In
182."), Mr. Crook returned to Santa Christiiu\
Willi two native teachers from lluahine, and
out; from 'I'ahiti. He found tliat some of the
inhabitants had destroyed their idols, but the
greater part were exceedingly rude, vicious,
and di.<onlerly in their behavior, aiul strongly
attached to their .supirstitions. After remain-
ing about a month among then>, Mr. Crook
left the native teachers under the protection of
a friendly chief. Their prospects of usefulness
were at tirst encouraging, but the wickedness
of the people was 80 great, and their conduct
so violent and alarming, that the Tahitians
(whom they threatened to kill and devour)
were obliged to return. They were succeeded
by others in 182G, who were obliged to leave
in 1828. In the following year, Mes-srs. Pritr
chard and Sampson visited the islands, but so
turbulent and repulsive was the conduct of the
natives, that they deemed the establishment of
a mission impracticable. In 1831, Mr. Dar-
ling, one of the missionaries stationed at Ta-
hiti, visited the Marquesas, and in consequence
of his report, the Directors of the Missionary
Society, in 1833, sent two missionaries, Messrs.
Eodgerson and Stalhvorthy, to commence a
mission in those islands. Having been joined
at Tahiti by Mr. Darling and four Tahitians,
they were kindly received at Santa Christina
by lotete, the king, who promised to protect
them, and gave them half of his own house
for their residence.
These missionaries labored for a number of
years, in great discouragement, and at the peril
of their lives. In 1838, Mr. Eodgerson, com-
ing to the conclusion that he could not remain
there with his family, removed to Raiatea ;
Mr. Stalhvorthy continuing his labors alone.
In August, 1838, two Roman Catholic mis-
sionaries from the Popish College at Valpa-
raiso were brought to the island by the French
frigate La Yenus. Mr. Stalhvorthy made
strong objections to their settling at any sta-
tion where missionaries had been placed by the
London Missionary Society, but without effect.
The chief having received several presents from
the captain of the frigate, cordially received
the priests, and gave them a piece of land for
a garden. He, however, evinced an unshaken
attachment to the missionary who resided on
the island, but the people showed the same
indifference to the (jJospel which they liad al-
ways done. Pearly in the following year seven
more Romish missionaries arrived at Santa
Christina, and established themselves in va-
rious parts of the island. The imposing cere-
monies connected with their worship, their in-
sinuating manners, and their skill in operating
on the self-interested motives of the people
have not been without effect.
This mission was continued, in the face of
great discouragement, and without any visible
fruit, till 1811, when the missionaries, Me.'jsrs.
Stallworthy and Thompson, abandoned the
field, and removed to Tahiti. The group has
since been seized by the French ; but the
Romish missinnaries'have Iteen no more suc-
cessful than the Protestants. Native teachers
have recently been sent from the Sandwich
Islaiuls. (See Saiuhrich Islands.)
Ncjc Hebrides.— Mr. Wdlinms's last 1 oija^e
and 7)to//(.— After seventeen years of \niremit-
ted toil, the illn(>ss of both Mr. and Mrs. Wil-
liams obliged them, in 1833, to leave the
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
Y09
Islands. In June of the following year, tlioy
arrived in England. His own health and that
of Mrs. Williams having been recruited by the
voyage, and by a residence of four years in
England, Mr. W. became anxious to return to
the scene of his former labors. The plan pro-
posed by him was to undertake an exploring
voyage among the groups situated between
the Navigators' Islands and New Guinea, and
to place on them native teachers. For the
prosecution of this object, it was deemed advi-
sable to purchase a ship which should be ex-
clusively devoted to missionary purposes. And
for this purpose an, appeal was made to Chris-
tians in England, which was speedily responded
to in a very generous manner. The interest
which Mr. Williams' narrative excited through-
out England, seconded by his personal repre-
sentations, was so great that he found easy ac-
cess to the hearts and the charities of those
whom he addressed.
A sum more than sufBcient for the purchase
of a ship was soon raised, and the Directors of
the Missionary Society purchased the Camden,
a vessel of two hundred tons burthen. Every
arrangement for the safety of the vessel and the
comfort of the passengers wass made as soon
as possible, and on the 4th of April, 1838,
a meeting was held in London, at which ]Mr.
and Mrs. Williams and ten other missionaries,
one of whom was Mr. John AVilliams, Jan.,
received their parting instructions. The meet-
ing was one of intense interest. On the 11th
of April, 1838, these missionaries embarked,
being escorted to the vessel by an immense
crowd of the friends of missions, who followed
them with their prayers.
After visiting the Navigators', Georgian,
and Society Islands, Mr. Williams, in conform-
ity with his original plan, proceeded to visit
the New Hebrides. He was accompanied by
Captain Morgan, Mr. Cunningham, vice-consul
for the South Sea Islands, and Mr. Harris,
who was intending to go as a missionary to
the Marquesas.
On the 19th of November, 1839, this apos-
tle of the Pacific unfurled the banner of peace
on the island of Tauna, one of the New Heb-
rides group, where the barbarous people show-
ed him no little kindness, and received the
Christian teachers from Samoa gladly. In the
evening, having recorded his gratitude to God,
who had done such great things for them, he
assembled with his beloved companions for the
solemn exercise, which Captain Morgan so
appropriately styles their " family prayer," and
Mr. Harris, in the orderly course of their
Scripture reading, read the 15th chapter of the
first Epistle to the Corinthians — the sublime
record of the believer's triumph over death !
The next day they proceeded to Erromanga,
another island of the same group. The natives
appeared quite different from those of the other
any intercourse with the strangei;s, but having
received presents of fish-hooks and beads, they
brought the missionaries some cocoanuts. They
were still, however, exceedingly shy. Think-
ing that they had gained the confidence of the
natives, they all went on shore. While Capt.
Morgan stopped to see the boat safely anchor-
ed, the missionaries walked up tlie beach.
The captain soon followed them, but had not
gone far before the boat's crew called to him
to come back. He looked round and saw Mr.
Williams and Mr. Cunningham running to-
wards the sea,- the former closely pursued by a
native. Captain Morgan immediately return-
ed to the Ijoat, from which he saw a native
strike Mr. Williams, who had just reached the
water. The beach was stony and steep, and
in consequence of the l)low, Mr. AYilliams fell
backward to the ground. Other natives soon
came up, one of whom strucl^; him with a club,
and another pierced his body with several
arrows. Mr. Harris was also overtaken and
shared the same fate. Captain Morgan made
several attempts to obtain the bodies, but nei-
ther of them could be procured. The natives
seeing the boat approaching the shore for this
purpose, attacked the persons remaining in it,
and left one of their arrows sticking in its side.
The news of this sad event reached England
a few days before the annual meeting of the
Missionary Society. The particulars respect-
ing it were communicated to the assembly,
and resolutions passed by the Society express-
ing the deepest sympathy with the bereaved
families of their lamented missionaries. A
subscription was soon after commenced in aid
of Mrs. Williams and her children, and a hand-
some sum was raised and appropriated to their
use.
On the 1st of February, 1840, the British
ship Favorite sailed from Sydney to search for
the remains of Messrs. Williams and Harris.
The expedition was accompanied by I\Ir. Cun-
ningham, and a Saraoan chief to act as inter-
preter. At Erromanga they had an interview
with the natives, and by means of presents
and threats obtained from them part of the
bones of the two missionaries. The vessel
then sailed for the Samoas, where the recover-
ed bones were interred, amid the respcctfukre-
grets of the officers of the Favorite, and the
tears of their brethren, and of hundreds of Sa-
moans, who remembered Mr. Williams as the
first herald of salvation to their shores.
After the death of Mr. Williams, Mr. Heath
of the Samoa mission was requested by his
brethren to make an exploring voyage in the
Camden. He visited the New Hebrides, and
left native teachers at four of the islands, one
of which was Erromanga, the very island on
which the missionaries were murdered.
One object which Mr. Williams had in view
in his last voyage to the South Sea Islands,
islands, being more rude and barbarous in their was the establishment of a college for the ed-
behavior. They were at first averse to holding I ucation of native teachers. The missionaries
10
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
at the different stations entered fully into bis
plans respecting it, and one was immediately
commenced at Rarotonga, which soon num-
bered eleven students. A large piece of ground
on which to erect the building, was purchased
of the king, and there is every reason to hoiw
that the institution will prosper.
Messrs. Turner and Nisbet, having been ap-
fiointed to this mission, arrived at Tanna on
he 30th of June, 1842, and having assembled
the principal chiefs, and made known their ob-
ject, were kindly received, with assurances of
protection ; and on the following Sabbath
they held the first religious service, and preached
to over 200 people. They soon found, how-
ever, that the character of the people was de-
praved and cruel in the extreme, and that they
were distracted with internal division and
strife. The natives with v;hom they were im-
mediately located, manifested some attach-
ment to them ;■ but by all others they were re-
garded with distrust and hatred. More than
once their destruction was secretly attempted.
At length the chiefs in the interior, under pre-
text that a fatal disease which prevailed, was
to be attributed to their arts, demanded their
e.xpulsiou from the island. This was resisted
by their few adherents, and led to a savage
war, which compelled the missionaries to quit
the island in tlieir small open boat. They
were driven back, where death in its most
horrid form seemed inevitable. But a merci-
ful Providence prepared them an ark. Just
as they were entering the harbor, an American
ves.sel appeared oil Tanna, in which they em-
barked for the Navigators' Islands.
In the Isle of Pines, where native teachers
were stationed in 1B40, the result was still
more tragical. In 1842, the crew of the brig
Star, being treated with apparent friendship,
went on shore to cut timber, when they were
treacherously murdered and devoured by the
natives. After which the Samoan teachers,
after assisting to tow the vessel ashore, were
murdered at the conniiand of the chief. This
was done, however, not from (jj)position to the
teachers or to what tliey taught, but as an act
of revi'uge for the outrages previously commit-
ted among them l)y European and American
traders. This is believed also to have been
the cause of the death of the lamented AVil-
liams. The visits of these trading vessels
have been marked by rol)bery and murder.
The natives, on one occasion, having offered
some resistance to these outrages, they were
attacked with deadly weapons, many of them
slain, and others, having taken refuge in a
cavi', were suffocated by fire at its mouth. The
immediate cause of the death of these native
teachers is supposed to have been that some
tradei-s presented them with forged lettei-s from
nii-ssionaries, directing them to assist in pro-
moting the objects of the traders, therel)y ex-
citing the jealousy of the people against them.
In 184r>, the mission at the New Hebrides
was renewed. Messrs. Murray and Turner land-
ed at Tanna with 15 native teachers, where they
were most cordially welcomed and kindly treat-
ed by the inhabitants. They left four new
teachers at this island, and two native evange-
lists at Nina ; after which they proceeded to
Erroraanga ; but, from the appearance of the
natives, they came to the conclusion that the
island was still closed against the Gospel, and
did not land. They next proceeded to Sand-
wich Island, a Ijeautiful island about 50 miles
from Erroinanga, teeming with a population
of noble aspect and gentle manners, where
they introduced four native evangelists, who
were received with hearty good will by chiefs
and people. They also left teachers at two of
the New Caledonia group ; but at the large
island of New Caledonia they found things in
such a state from the influence of ^Matuku,
chief of the Isle of Pines, that they thought
proper to withdraw the native teachers who
were there before.
The last intelligence from the "Western Poly-
nesian Islands was obtained by a visit of Rev.
Messrs. Murray and Sunderland, of the Sa-
moa mission, in 1852. They took with them
five native teachers, with tlieir wives, from the
Hervey Islands, two unmarried teachers from
Samoa, four natives of Savage Island, four
Erromangans, and four Fatese, who having
been for years under Christian instruction at
Samoa, were now returning to carry the Gos-
pel to their native isles. In nearly all the
islands they found an extraordinary change in
the sentiments and habits of the people had
taken place since the previous voyage of the
John Williams ; and large numbers had re-
nounced idolatry and put themselves under
Christian instruction. Commodious places of
woi-ship and dwellings for teachei-s had been
erected, congregations and schools gathered,
and a few were hopeful candidates for church
fellowship.
PuEsuvTERiAX CnriiCH OF Nova Scoti.v. —
AncHcum is an island of the New Hebrides
group, situated, according to Captain Cook,
in lat. 20^ 3' S., and long. 170- 4' E. It is
about 30 or 35 miles in circumference, and
contains a population of 3,000 souls. Its ex-
terior apjiearance is pleasing and rather im-
posing, rising to the height of 2,000 feet above
the level of the sea, and ])resenting an inter-
esting variety of mountain and valley, large
tracts of low land in some parts of the coast,
and a bold shore in others ; high land and
deep ravines running to a great distance
iidand ; well wc^oded and watered, having
streams of considerable size, and valuable tim-
ber, available for almost any pm'pose. The
soil is not remarkably rich in general, though
in some parts it appears very fertile. The na-
tives of Aneiteum are very low in civilization,
and their moral and social condition, like that
of all other heathen tribes, is such that it can-
! not fully be brought out to light. They do
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
711
not live together, like the Eastern Polynesians,
in regular villages. In language, in color, in
manners and customs, in religion, in almost
every thing that distinguishes one race of men
from another', they differ from the eastern
tribes. They are generally of small stature,
very dark, slender, and lacking in the spirit
and energy which characterize adjacent tribes ;
yet there are some fine-looking people among
them, and the mental capabilities of many of
them are of a very fair order. They are not
destitute of ingenuity, as appears from their
ornaments, their war weapons, their planta-
tions, &c. War was very frequent among
them before the introduction of the Gospel.
Cannibalism is found in all the islands of the
New Hebrides group. One of the most re-
volting practices found on Aneiteum, and one
which appears to be confined to this island, is
the strangling of widows. Till very lately,
an old woman was scarcely to be seen on the
island. Even since the English missionaries
have been located there, as many as 11 widows
have been known to be strangled within a sin-
gle year. The monstrous deed is done by the
brother of the woman, if she have a brother,
and when that is not the case, by some other
relative or friend. The idea of the people is,
that the soul of the wife should accompany
that of her husband to the other world. It is
remarkable that the greatest difficulty in re-
moving this practice, has all along arisen from
the widows themselves. What an amazing
hold must their religious belief have upon their
minds ! Here is one of the very strongest in-
stincts of our nature — the love of life, fairly
overmatched by it. Something, however, is
to be attributed to other than religious influ-
ences. It would be considered disgraceful not
only to the party herself, but to the whole
family to which she belongs, were she to con-
tinue to live. How potent is public opinion
even among savages ! Of late years, this inhu-
man practice has received an extensive check,
and, as the last heathen district has abandoned
idolatry and besought the aid of missionary
teachers, it may now be said, to have almost
ceased to exist. From what has been said, it
will be seen that the people of Aneiteum be-
lieve in a future state of existence. They be-
lieve in gods many and lords many. They
have gods of the sea and gods of the bush ;
and among themselves are men who pretend
to have, and are believed to have, power over
diseases, over the sea, the winds, thunder, rain,
&c. They make a difference between the
future abode of the righteous and the wicked ;
but their hell lacks, and their heaven abounds
with such sensual gratifications as they most
prize on earth. It does not appear that the
island was much visited prior to the introduc-
tion of the Gospel. That important event
took place in March, 1841. On the 20th of
that month, the London Missionary Society,
by their zealous agents, succeeded in obtaining
a footing, and introducing Christian teachers.
This was a work of no small difficulty. The
people were in a state of pure barbarism ;
they were shy and suspicious of the mission-
aries, and the missionaries had no confidence
in them. It was by the aid of an individual,
himself a savage, and chief of a neighboring
island, that communication was held witli the
natives, and they were induced to receive the
teachers. The names of these teachers, who
began the work of evangelization, were Tavita
(David) and Fuatieve. They were natives of
the island of Savaii, Samoau group._ During
the early years of the mission, no visible im-
pression was made. The teachers passed
through great hardships and difficulties. One
of them, with his wife, died, after a short
course of service. The mission was sustained
by a reinforcement from Tauna,sent by Messrs.
Turner and Nisbet, of the London Missionary
Society, who were on the island at the time.
Apolo (Apollos.) and Simeoua, (Simeon,)
who were thus introduced, labored usefully on
the island for several years. It was not till
1845, that any visible success was obtained.
In April of that year the island was visited.
The teachers had suffered severely from scarci-
ty of food, frequent attacks of illness, the un-
kindness of the natives, &c. They had, how-
ever, been sustained under all their trials, and
enabled not only to keep their ground, but to
make a little advancement. A few of the na-
tives had attended for some time on their in-
structions, and one man had decidedly attached
himself to them, and had acted towards them
with great kindness. Up to this time, only
one station had been occupied, viz., Ipeki, on
the north-west side of the island. Now, ope-
rations were commenced at another part.
Two teachers were placed at Aniligauhat,
where is the principal harbor. After this
visit, the prospects of the mission were again
overcast, and when the island was visited in
1846, about twelve mouths after, it appeared
as if it must be abandoned altogether. The
teachers had, from various causes, suffered so
severely, and their labors had been so unpro-
ductive, that they were greatly discouraged,
and were ready to give up in despair. Two of
them, however, were induced to stay, and thus
the door was kept open till it was possible to
locate English missionaries. In July, 1848,^
the Rev. John Geddie and a catechist from
Nova Scotia, N. A., and the Rev. Thomas
Powell, from Samoa, were placed on the
island. Aniligauhat was thought tlie most
eligible place at which to commence their
labors, and they accordingly settled there.
Difficulties and trials, similar to those. which
had been encountered by the teachers, were
experienced by the missionaries, and a consid-
erable time passed before any marked impres-
sion was made. In July, 1849, the mission
was visited, and slight symptoms of an im-
proved state of things had begun to appear.
712
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
A small plastered chapel had beca erected,
and a plastered dwelling-house. Services were
being regularly couducted by the teachers in
the native language, and, though the attend-
ance on these was both small and irregular,
yet a little progress was being made. Five or
six individuals had begun to exhibit symptoms
of an awakening interest in the truths of reli-
gion. The night was passed ; the morning
had dawned. New troubles, however, awaited
the mission ; circumstances led to the separa-
tion from it of the catechist, and Mr. Powell
returned to Samoa. Thus, ]\Ir. Geddie was
left to struggle, single-handed, with the great
and formidable difficulties through which the
mission was destined to pass. It is found, in
the history of missions, that the most severe
trials do not generally occur till the Gospel
begins to take effect. So long as all remains
in the stillness of spiritual death, the mission-
ary is generally permitted to carry on his
work with comparatively little molestation ;
but when the power of divine truth begins to
be felt on the heart, and decided symptoms of
spiritual life show themselves, then it is found
that the Lord of missions did not say in vain,
" Suppose ye that I am come to give peace on
the earth ? I tell you, nay ; but rather divi-
sion." It was thus W'ith the Aneiteura mis-
sion. The opposition encountered in its early
years was trifling, compared with what it had
to pass through after the truth of God actually
took hold of the hearts of men. AVhen that
was the ca.se, parties among the heathen, gen-
erally official characters, whose craft was in
danger, and other parties also besides the na-
tives, whoso proceedings and pursuits were
incidentally interfered with by the new reli-
gion, were greatly enraged against the faithful
missionary and his adherents ; and many and
formidable were the combinations entered
into, ami the attempts made, to rid themselves
altogether of his unwelcome presence. In
one instance, the infatuated heathen vented
their rage on one of their own countrymen.
They entrapped and killed a young man.
named Waievai. Thus, martyr l>l()od has
flowed on Aneiteum. The mission property
and lives of the mission family were seriously
endangered by incendiarism. On this subject.
Mr. Geddie say.s : '• We often look back on
those days of trial with tremliling and with
thankfulness to God. This hostility to the
mission seemed to have reached its crisis in
18.51, wlien an attempt wa.s made on my own
life and that of my lamily, by setting fire to
my house at midnight ; but the arm of the
Lord was stretched out for our protection, and
no harm was permitted to befall us. The ex-
citement which that act caused among the
Christian party was very great, and it reijuired
all the influence that I posses.scd among them
to control it. The enemies of the cause of
God were then convinced that the truth had
taken a stronger hold of the hearts of the na-
tives than they had expected, and if they op-
posed it by violent means, it must be at their
peril. The last exciting event occurred about
two years a^o, (August, 1852,) when the
heathen district of Anau-un-se contemplated
an attack on the people of a Christian village.
The Christian party from all parts of the island
assembled at the hostile district, with a view
to reason with the heathen and warn them.
The meditated attack was abandoned, and all
parties returned peaceably to their homes.
We have ever since been permitted to labor
without interruption or harm."
The truths of the Gospel first took decided
hold on a few individuals in the immediate
neighborhood of the missionary. Among them
were five or six men adapted to be useful to
their countrymen. These were employed by
the missionary to assist in diffusing the truths
of the Gospel in such ways as they were able.
In the warmth and zeal of their first love they
went forth to beseech their fellow-countrymen
to turn from the vanities and abominations of
pagan idolatry and embrace the pure and holy
religion of the Bil)le. Astonishing results fol-
lowed their labors in connection with those of
the missionary. A spirit of inquiry was awa-
kened, large numbers abandoned heathenism
and embraced Christianity, and a goodly num-
ber there is reason to believe became anxious
inquirers after salvation. Heathen worship
and heathen practices were extensively aban-
doned, and a scries of changes commenced
which have already led to the most beneficial
results, and promise to continue till every ves-
tige of heathenism be swept away, and the re-
ligion of Jesus fill the island with its own
l)lessed fruits. The Eev. A. "W. Murray and
Rev. J. P. Sunderland of the London Mis-
sionary Society, visited the island in June,
18;")2, and again in company with Rev. W.
(iill, in December of the same year. Mr. Mur-
ray had several times visited it before, and
knew it as it was while the reign of heathen-
ism was unbroken. lie had it before his mind
as it was under that reign, and though he had
heard something of ;\ change being in progress,
his expectations were not highly raised. Let
the reader judge of the grateful surprise, when,
I'll approaching the shore, instead of a crowd
of naked, wondering, rude, snsi)icious .s;ivages,
with long hair and painted bodies, and armed
with cluljs, spears, and other weapons, he found
a company of (juiet, orderly peoi)le, all more
(jr less clothed, with confiding, affectionate
countenances, long hair, and other marks of
heathenism almost entirely gone, and not a
weapon of war to be seen — all pressing forward,
each eager to be foremost in giving the most
cordial welcome. The visiters did not need to
i)e tnld that a mighty change was in progress,
and all they saw and heard during their stay
in the. i.sland tended to confirm their first im-
pressions. A large number, probably about
half the population of the island, had embraced
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
713
Christianity. The services and schools were
being attended by large numbers ; many had
learned to read, and hundreds were striving
with the utmost diligence to do so. A moral
change, moreover, was in progress, corKspond-
ing to the great external one that was every-
where visible. A considerable number were
professedly seeking the salvation of their souls,
and some among them had, according to the
opinions of the missionaries, really found the
pearl of great price. Mr. Geddie was waiting
the arrival of the John Williams, that he might
constitute a Christian church. Accordingly
it was the high privilege of the deputation to
witness the baptism of 11 of the natives of
Aneiteum on the Sabbath following, and to
unite with them in commemorating the Sa-
viour's dying love. The occasion was one of
the deepest and most hallowed interest. It was
an era not only in the history of Aneiteum,
but of the entire group to which it belongs.
The work is now fairly begun. God has un-
mistakably affixed the seal of his approbation
and given a pledge of ultimate and complete
success. In December, 1852, the little church
had increased to the number of 24, and every
thing indicated a healthy and advancing
state.
The Eev. John Inglis, a missionary from the
Eeformcd Presbyterian Church of Scotland,
who had been several years in New-Zealand,
had joined the mission. Mr. Inglis had been
about six months on the island, and Mr. Ged-
die and he were most harmoniously and zeal-
ously prosecuting their interesting and delight-
ful work. These esteemed brethren are con-
templating great things. In addition to plans
now in operation, they are about to commence
an institution for the training of native teach-
ers to assist them in carrying forward and ex-
tending their operations in Aneiteum, and also
on the neighboring islands. This is to be at
Ipeki, under the care of Mr. Inglis. Mr. Ged-
die is at Aniligauhat ; and in addition to his
other duties, manages the printing department.
Thus Aneiteum is fully embraced, and if the
lives and health of the devoted and excellent
men who occupy it are continued, we may an-
ticipate the happiest results, not to Aneiteum
alone, but also to the extensive region beyond.
They expect a reinforcement from their re-
spective churches, ere a great while, and when
that arrives, they will. Providence permitting,
extend their operations to the neighboring
islands. Under date October 1, 1853, Mr.
Geddie writes to the eflect, that the church
erected at his station about 15 months pre-
viously, and in dimensions G2 feet by 25, was
found quite too small, and an enlargement was
contemplated to be made in the course of a
few months. A mission house of stone, 56 by
19, with a room attached to the rear 19 by 13,
has taken the place of the former temporary
and incommodious building. The attendance
at both stations is on the increase, and the
hearts of the missionaries are cheered with the
most attractive prospects.
The home chm'ches are earnestly at work in
their efforts to send additional laborers, and it
is gratifying to know, that while there are few
found to respond to the call, " Who will go
for us ?" there has never yet been found any
difiSculty to defray most liberally all necessary
expenditure. Besides the annual salaries of
the missionaries, funds to a large amount have
been raised for boats and other contingencies.
Last year, and the earlier part of the present
year, the free-will offerings of the church in
Nova Scotia, in clothing and other supplies, ad-
ditional to the necessary expenditure, amounted
to £400, a sum more than equal to the salary
of two missionaries. The Synod, at its recent
meeting, instructed the Board of Foreign Mis-
sions to secure, if possible, the services of two
additional missionaries, besides the present
candidate for the same field now engaged in
preparatory study. Should their efforts be
successful in ^^rocuring this large accession to
the mission staff, the island of Aneiteum will
soon become the centre of a very widely ex-
tended scene of missionary effort. It is pre-
sumed that the Reformed Presbyterian Church
in Scotland, whose zealous agent, Mr. Inglis,
has within so short a period exercised great
and permanent influence on the prospects of
the mission, will sooy secure a similar rein-
forcement. The churches in Sydney, New
South Wales, have raised £2,000 for the per-
manent support of two missionaries on the
same group ; and as there are peculiar facili-
ties of communication between Australia and
the New Hebrides, the amount of effective aid
from that prosperous colony is capable of great
extension. — Eev. J. Bayne, of Fictou, N. S.
TABULAR VIEW OF WESTERN POLYNESIA.
ISLANDS.
ej to
p a
J3
i
s
.a
6
2
3
4
3
2
S
1
3
24
F.ate
Lilu
Mare
Toka
Nine
Totals
2
21
24
Owing to the difficulty of access to these
islands, several years frequently elapse between
the communications received from them, and
hence the returns must be very imperfect.
Wesleyan Missionary Society. — The mis-
sions of the Wesleyans in the South Seas are
situated in the Friendly Islands and neighbor-
ing groups, and also in the Fecjee Islands ; the
714
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
former mission was begun in 1822, and the
latter in 1835.
Friendly Hands. — The Friendly or Tonga
Islands arc situated in the Pacific between lat.
18° and 25^ S., and long. 173° and 176^ W.
They consist of three separate groups, which
are said to contain more than 150 islands.
Fifteen of them rise to a considerable height,
thirty-five are moderately elevated, and the
rest are low. The most southern group, the
Tongataboo Islands, were discovered by Tasman
in 1G43. Tonga, the largest of them is about 20
miles long and 12 -wide, in its broadest part.
The highest part of Tonga, the little mount of
Nukualofa, on which a chapel stands, rises about
60 feet alwve the sea. The surface of the
island generally is only a few feet above the
level of the ocean. The central group, called
the Habai Islands, is composed of a consider-
able number of small islands. The most popu-
lous of them is Lefuka, about 8 or 9 miles long
and 4 broad. These islands are very fertile.
The most northern group is formed by the
Hnvau Islands, which are somewhat larger and
higher than the Habai Islands. The island
of Vavau, which is a fine island, is about 36
miles in circumference ; its surface is uneven,
and, on the northern side, rises to a consider-
able elevation.
The climate of the Friendly Islands is humid,
and the heat rather oppressive, rising frequent-
ly to 980 in the shade. Much rain falls pe-
riodically. The trade-winds are not constant,
and westerly winds occasionally blow in every
season, which, from their variable character,
have obtained from the natives the name of
" foolish winds."
These islands are remarkable for their fer-
tiliii/, and the variety of their vegetable pro-
ductions. Ewa is so fruitful as to be desig-
nated the granary of " Tongataboo." The
island of Tongataboo, which is nearly a dead
level, with the exception of a few hillocks, 30
or 40 feet high, has a rich and fertile vegetable
mould, which is not composed of sand, as in
the other coral islands. The Friendly Islands
abound in tropical fruits and productions.
The inhabitants of these islands belong to the
same general stock, and resemble those of the
other South Sea Islands, already described.
The j)opulation is estimated by missionaries
at about 50,000.
Their political ccnistitiition is despotism, sup-
ported by a hereditary aristocracy. In one
view, however, the government may be con-
sidered as a kind of family compact ; for the
persons holding offices and titles address one
another by the names of father, son, uncle, and
grandfather, without any reference to kindred.
I heir ranks are, king, diicfs, matahoolcs, tooas,
and tamaiccikis, or slaves. The matabooles
rank next to the chiefs, and are a sort of min-
isters. They are always looked up to as men
of experience, and superior information. The
sous and brothers of matabooles assist at pub-
lic ceremonies, under the direction of the mata-
booles. The matabooles attend to the good
order of society, and look to the morals of the
younger chiefs, who are apt to run into ex-
cesses, and oppress the lower orders. They
are nmch respected by all classes. The com-
monalty are called Tooas.
The present king of these islands is an ex-
emplary Christian, and a preacher of the Gos-
pel. The inhabitants are in a transition state.
A new order of things is springing up. Club
arbitration, which formerly prevailed, has been
laid aside ; a code of laws has been framed ;
governors are appointed to the different groups,
and courts of justice instituted.
The first attempt to introduce Christianity
into the Friendly Islands was made in the year
1797, when Captain Wilson of the " Dufi","
left ten mechanics at Hihifo, a town on Ton-
gataboo, in the capacity of missionaries. After
having resided together some time, they sepa-
rated, for the purpose of being more exten-
sively useful. The chief under whose protec-
tion they resided, was murdered by his own
brother, and the island involved in a sangui-
nary and desolating war. Three of them were
murdered by the natives ; the others were
obliged to take refuge among the rocks and
dens of the island. They were plundered of
their property, stripped of their clothing, and
subjected to various kinds of insult. When
the strife terminated, the missionaries endea-
vored to support themselves by hard labor.
The natives, however, having stolen every
thing they possessed, it was with great diffi-
culty they succeeded in constructing a forge.
When this was accomplished the thievish in-
habitants brought the articles they had stolen,
in order to have them manufactured into some
other form that pleased them better. In 1800
an English ship arrived among the islands, the
captain of which offered the distressed mission-
aries a passage to New South Wales ; and
they being utterly destitute, and having but
little prospect of usefulness among the natives,
gladly accepted the proposal. For 20 years
after this, no missionaries visited these islands.
The Ilev. AValter Lawry, of the Wesleyan
INIissionary Society, arrived at Tongataboo in
August, 1822. He was kindly received by the
peo])le, and for a time well treated. Like his
predecessors, however, he experienced but lit-
tle encouragement. The natives received him
as the harbinger of soldiers who would shortly
come to kill them, and seize their island ; and
consequently treated him with suspicion. In
1823 he was obliged to remove to the colony
of New South AVales, on account of domestic
circumstances. In 1825, the Rev. Messrs. John
Thomas and John Hutchinson were appointed
to Tongataboo, where they arrived in June,
182G. They fixed their residence at Hihifo,
where they erected a substantial dwelling-
house, and commenced the study of the lan-
guage and the instruction of the pcoijle. They
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
715
also met with great opposition and witli little
success.
In the year 1827 they were reinforced by the
arrival of Rev. Nathaniel Turner, Rev. Wil-
liam Cross, and Mr. Weiss. They found at
Nukualofu, one of the chief towns of the
island, two native teachers from Tahiti, who
had been some time employed in that locality,
preaching to the people in the Tahitiau lan-
guage. They had erected a chapel, and 240
persons attended their teaching.
In January, 1830, Mr. Thomas proceeded
to Lifuka, the chief of the Habai Islands. On
his arrival he found that the king Taiifaahau
had renounced idolatry, and acknowledged Je-
hovah as the true God, and that the houses
that were formerly held sacred were used as
common dwellings. The chief had \isited
Tonga a few months before, and on his return
he was accompanied by a young man and his
wife, who had been baptized, as teachers. Im-
mediately on his arrival, Mr. Thomas began to
preach to the natives. He also opened schools
both for males and females, which were well
attended, chiefly by adults. They were taught
principally by the natives themselves. Such
as had learned a little taught others what they
knew. The king and others of the chiefs at-
tended, and stood up in the same I'ing with
their people, to be catechized evei'y morning.
Mr. Thomas, after being some months in the
Habai Islands, baptized a number of the na-
tives, among whom was Taufaahau, the king.
He and his people erected a large building for
public worship, which was usually attended by
great numbers of the natives, there being gen-
erally from a thousand to fifteen hundred per-
sons present. The king was very zealous in
bringing over the people from idolatry, and
young and old, rich and poor, masters and ser-
vants, might now be seen renouncing the wor-
ship of idols, and .turning to the true God.
Among others was Tamaha, a female chief of
the highest rank, who had been regarded as a
deity, and was one of the pillars of the popu-
lar superstition.— Me^A. Blag. 1832, p. 144;
Miss. Not. Vol. VII., p. 513.
Idolatry also received a heavy blow in the
island of Vavau. Three years before, Finau
the king appeared anxious for a missionary,
but afterwards he acted the part of a perse-
cutor, and was mad on his idols. The king of
the Habai Islands, and some of his people
had, however, gone on a visit to Vavau, with
24 canoes, and the missionaries wrote a friend-
ly letter to Finau. The king of Habai. ex-
horted him to turn to God, and put away his
lying spirits, and he at length yielded, saying,
" AVell, I will ; and I will spend the Sabbath
with you, in worshiping your God." He then
gave orders to his servants to worship Jeho-
vah, and to set on fire the houses of the idols.
These orders were promptly obeyed. Some of
the houses of the idols were taken by the
people for their own use ; others, to the num-
ber of 18, were burnt to the ground, and their
gods in them. Some, however, were much
alarmed at these proceedings ; but a thousand
people at least, it was supposed, joined with
the king in renouncing idolatry. They showed
great eagerness to hear about the new reli-
gion. The Habai people had no rest fi-om
them day nor night. When they had done
with one company another would come for in-
struction, and thus they were kept constantly
employed.
In March, 1831, Messrs. Nathaniel Turner,
J. Watkin, and W. Woon, three new mission-
aries, arrived at Nukualofa, in Tongataboo,
the last of whom was a printer. Hithei-to the
missionaries had had great trouble in writing
out books for the natives ; but now a press
was established, at which were printed large
editions of several school-books, select passages
of Scripture, hymn-books, catechisms, and
other useful works. The people were greatly
delighted, and not a little surprised when they
first saw the press in operation. Thousands of
these little books were in a short time circu-
lated, and were read by them with great inte-
rest. The desire for books was very great,
and the missionaries, availing themselves of
this, did not think it advisable to give them
generally gratuitously. But the people were
so poor that many found it difficult to purchase
them. The missionaries were greatly assisted
by a host of native helpers, not only teachers
of schools but class-leaders, exhorters, and even
local preachers. The overthrow of idolatry
and the reception of Christianity in the various
islands was in fact effected very much through
the instrumentality of the natives themselves.
In the schools were some thousands of scholars,
of whom a large portion were adults, and
about one-half females. Several hundreds of
the natives, both male and female, were era-
ployed as teachers, among whom were some
of the most influential of the chiefs, and their
wives. Many of the females, besides learning
to read, were taught to sew by the wives of
the missionaries, and it was truly surprising to
see the rapidity with which they acquired this
useful art, and the neatness of their work.
There was a great desire among them to adopt
the style of dress worn by English women.
The religious instruction communicated by
the natives contributed essentially to the over-
throw of idolatry, not only in their own and
neighboring islands, but even in islands at a
great distance. One day the missionaries in
Vavau observed three canoes approaching the
shore, which proved to be from the island of
Nina-Fo-ou, 300 miles distant, where no mis-
sionaries had ever visited. Some of the Va-
vau converts, however, had been there, and
such was the effect of their statements that the
whole of the inhabitants had cast away their
idols. One of their visitors they had detained
to afford them further instruction.
In July, 1834, a powerful religious move
716
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
ment bej^an in Yavau, which quickly extended
to the whole of the Habai Islands, and after-
wards, though in a less degree, to the Tonga
group. Thonsauds of the natives had before
been nominally Christians ; yet, the number
who gave evidence of true conversion was not
considerable. Now, hundreds of men, women,
and children, including some of the principal
chiefs, might be seen in deep distress, seeping
aloud and crying to God for mercy. Often as
soon as the service commenced, the cries of
the people began. Many trembled as if they
were about to be judged at the bar of God.
For a time, the i)eople laid aside their ordinary
employments, and gave themselves up entirely to
religious exercises. The missionaries went
about among them, imparting instruction, and
pointing them to Christ, and many of them
soon found peace in believing. The work was
not confined merely to the principal islands,
but spread, like fire among stubble, through
the whole of them. In a short time, every
island had caught the flame : everywhere the
people were earnestly seeking the Lord, or re-
joicing because they had found him. This re-
ligious movement was followed by a remark-
able reformation of manners. Among other
sins, polygamy was now abandoned ; marriage
became general ; and they were more decent
and mcdest in their apparel, many of them
dressing in the English style. They set a high
value on the means of grace. They kept the
Sabbath with remarkable strictness, resting
from labor ; and cmpli)ying the whole day in
the public and private exercises of religion.
They also maintained morning and evening
worship every day. In their prayers there was
an affectionate simplicity. Their former hatred
of each other was now exchanged for love.
The missionaries had great jjleasure in laboring
among a people so affectionate in their disposi-
tions, so attentive to their instructions, and so
tractable in their manners. To assist the reader
in judging of the character of the work, we
shall here give a few extracts from the letters
of the missionaries :
" On Tuesday, July 27th," says ^fr. Turner
of Yavau, " we believe that not fewer than
1000 souls were converted ; not now from
dumb idols only, but from the power of Satan
unto God. For a week or two we were not
able to hold the schools, but had prayer meet-
ings six times a day. "We could not speak five
minutes before all were in tears, and nunduri^
prostrated before the Lord, absorlx'd in dee]>
concern about salvation. Fretiuenlly their
words were, ' Praise the Lord ! I never knew
Jesus until now, now I do know him, ho has
taken away all my sins ; I love Jesus Kokusc'
Sonie were so filled with joy that they could
not contain themselves, but cried out for' hearts
to praise the Lord.' This has not been like the
dew descending upon the tender herb, but as
the spring-tide, or as the overflowing of some
mighty river ; all the mounds of sin have been
swept away ; the Lord has bowed the whole
island to his sway. We have to hold two
prayer meetings daily. "We have ascertained
that the total number in society, is 3066 : and
the number converted, for the most part, with-
in the pa-st six weeks, is 2262."
" In the morning," says Mr. Tucker, of the
Habai Islands, " we repaired to the house of
prayer as soon as it wa.s light. The Lord made
' the place of his feet glorious,' the stout-hearted
began to tremble, there was a mighty shaking
among the dry bones. As soon as service be-
gan, the cries of the people commenced — what
a solemn l)ut joyful sight to behold ! One thous-
and or more individuals bowed before the Lord,
weeping at the feet of Jesus, and praying in
agony of soul ! I never saw such distress,
never heard such cries for mercy, or such con-
fessions of sin before. These things were uni-
versal, from the greatest chiefs in the laud to
the meanest individuals, and of both sexes, old
and young. The Lord heard the sighing of the
prisoners, he bound up many a broken-hearted
sinner in that meeting, and proclaimed liberty
to many a captive. We were engaged nearly
the whole day in this blessed M'ork. I attended
four services and witnessed hundreds of precious
souls made happy by a sense of the Saviour's
love, on that day and the preceding evening.
We have not yet received an account from all
the islands of those who have obtained peace
with God during this revival, but from the num-
ber already brought in by the leaders, we be-
lieve that upwards of 2000 were converted to
God in the course of a fortnight." — Miss. No-
tices, Vol. YIIL, p. 149.
Not the least remarkable of the converts
was Tavfaahau, the king both of the Habai
andA'avau Islands, and who, at his baptism,
was called Grorgc, while his queen was named
Charlotte. They both adorned their Christian
profession, and were truly zealous, devoted per-
sons. They both met classes and superintended
schools. The king is a very excellent local
preacher, and never sought to be preferred be-
I'ore others, but went wherever he was sent,
fulfilling his a]i])ointments with the greatest
cheerfulness. Mr. 'J'ucker, having one day in
the course of conversation, stated his views on
the subject of slavery, and mentioned the
emancipation of the negroes in the West In-
dies, he (King George,) said several of his ser-
vants were slaves, having been given to him by
his father and other chiefs ; but that he would
liberate them ihat very day. In the evening,
h(! accordingly called them all together and set
them at lilierly. 'I'he .scene was very aflecting.
He told thein of the many evils whicli were
practised among them during the reign of
heathenism, and .spoke of the love and mercy
of (Jod, in sending the Gospel to them with all
its attendant l)lessings. lie told them how
much he loved them, and then said, " Vou are
no longer slaves : you are your own masters,
and may go and reside where you i)lease."
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
They all burst into tears and wept aloud ; the
king himself and his queen could not refrain
from tears. Two of them begged to be allow-
ed to live and die with him ; but he would not
consent to their remaining as slaves. " If you
wish," said he, " to reside a little longer with
us, well ; if you desire to go and dwell in any
other island, just please yourselves." — Miss.
Not. Vol. VIII. p. 315, 317, 320.
The missionaries were indebted to the king
for the erection of a very large chapel in
Habai. It was 110 feet by 45 inside, and was
expected to be capable of holding all the in-
habitants of the island. It was probably the
largest and most elegant building ever erected
in the Friendly Islands, and was a fine monu-
ment of the zeal and good taste of the king.
It was built in little more than two months,
and for several weeks there were about a thou-
sand people engaged in the work. Most of
the chiefs were employed in plaiting kafa of
cinet, while the common people did the heavier
work. The pillars and other timber used in
the frame work were brought from other
islands. The labor was regularly divided
among the inhabitants of the whole group,
and each party tried to excel the others in
their workmanship. As they had no nails the
timbers were fastened with kafa, made of the
fibres of the cocoa-nut husks, and dyed black,
red, and other colors. These colors they in-
terweave with almost mathematical accuracy,
which makes their work appear to great ad-
vantage. The king gave several beautifully
carved spears which were left to him by his
predecessors, and had often been used in war,
to be converted into rails for the communion-
table, and two beautifully carved clubs, which
were formerly worshiped as gods, were now
fixed at the bottom of the pulpit-stairs.
At the opening of the chapel, the natives
assembled in great numbers from all the islands,
on many of which the sick and aged only were
left. On this occasion, the king delivered a
very approjwiate sermon from Solomon's prayer
at the dedication of the temple. King George
is one of nature's noblemen : he is six feet
four inches high, well made, with an intelli-
gent and benevolent countenance.
Commander Wilkes, of the " United States'
Exploring Expedition," describes his late re-
ception by the Friendly Islanders in terms of
great interest. He says, " On the morning of
the 24th, I landed at Nukualofa with all the
officers that could be spai-ed from other duties.
We were received on the beach by Mr. Tucker,
one of the missionaries, and were at once sur-
rounded by a large number of natives. It was
impossible not to be struck with the great
diflcrence between these people and those we
had left in New-Zealand ; nothing of the mo-
rose and savage appearance, so remarkable
there, was seen. Here all was cheerfulness
and gayoty ; all appeared well fed, and well
formed, with full faces and muscles. The number
717
of children particularly attracted our notice,
in striking contrast with the New-Zealand
group, where but a few were seen. We wait-
ed some minutes for King George. When he
made his appearance, I could not but admire
him ; he is upwards of six feet in height, ex-
tremely well proportioned and athletic ; his
limbs are rounded and full ; his features regu-
lar and manly, with a fine open countenance,
and sensible face ; all which were seen to the
greatest advantage. He at once attracted all
eyes ; for, on approaching, every movement
showed that he was in the habit of command-
ing those about him. With unassuming dig-
nity he quietly took his scat."
King George is now about fifty years old.
He was converted during the great revival in
Tonga, in July and August, 1834. He suc-
ceeded to the sovereignty of all tlie islands in
1845. He has thrown the whole weight of his
influence in favor of Christianity. Mr. Lawry
says, " What God declares to be wrong, he
causes to be refrained from, or punished when
done; but religion, in all its operations, he
leaves, where God leaves it, between God and
the conscience."
In February, 1835, Mr. Peter Turner, accom-
panied by some of the natives, sailed from
Vavau for NiuarTubu-tabu, or Keppel's Island,
about 170 miles distant. After the arrival of
Mr. Turner, a work similar to that which had
lately occurred in the Habai and Vavau
Islands, commenced here. Mr. Turner remain-
ed on the island between three and four months.
He baptized 514 adults and 200 children,
united the former into a Methodist Society,
and married 240 persons, while in the schools
there were 557 scholars, male and female, old
and young. He now left them under the care
of the native teachers. Mr. Thomas, on a sub-
sequent visit to the islands of Niua-Tubu-tabu
and Niuarfo-ou, baptized 778 adults and 403
children, forming, with those previously bap-
tized, the greater part of the population.
In 1836, auxiliary Missionary Societies were
formed in the islands of Habai and Vavau,
(xreat numbers of the natives were present at
the meetings for their formation, and their
speeches were deeply interesting. The con-
trasts which they drew between their past and
present condition, were afl'ecting. The sub-
scribers were very numerous, and included per-
sons of all ages, and of all ranks, from the king
down to the poorest of the people. In the
absence of a circulating medium, their con-
tributions consisted chiefly of articles of native
manufacture. The most valuable of these were
fine mats, which many of the chiefs presented.
A few gave pigs, many gave native cloth,
some native fish-hooks, others oils, yams, ar-
row-root, tortoise-shell, baskets, ornaments,
&c. The king was particularly zealous in
carrying on these auxiliary societies, and on
one occasion he and his queen gave a dona-
tion of ten sovereigns, which had been received
718
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
by King George as a present from the captain
of an Ilnglish war ship.
In March, 1839, KingGreorge promulgated,
in a large assembly of the chiefs and people, a
code of laws, which had been drawn up for
their government, and appointed judges to
hear and decide all cases of complaint which
might arise among them. No one, whether
chief or private person, was now to take the
law into his own hand ; but must bring every
matter of importance before the judges. It is
evident, from the character of this code, that
the missionaries had some hand in its forma-
tion. And, although it may not be free from
defects, yet its adoption was an important
step in the progress of civilization, laying the
foundation for the security of life and property,
and for the future improvement and happiness
of the peojile.
In Tougataboo, Christianity had made much
less progress than in Habai and Vavau Islands.
There heathenism had all along maintained itself
in vigor, particularly in the district of Ilihifo,
where the missionaries originally settled, but
which, after two or three years, they left in
consequence of the opposition they encoun-
tered. Tonga was, in fact, the centre of the
superstition of the Friendly Isles. Its very
name, Tongataboo, or Tonga, the holy or con-
secrated, would seem to mark it out as a strong-
hold of the ancient religion. Though many of
the natives, particularly at Nukualofa, em-
braced Christianity, yet there were thousands
throughout the island who clung to idolatry,
and from time to time they manifested deter-
mined hostility to the Christians.
In June, 1840, the heathen cliiofs of Tonga
broke out in rebellion. Capt. Croker, of the
British ship Favorite, happening to arrive just
at this time, united the force under his com-
mand to that of King George, in the hope of
bringing the quarrel to a speedy conclusion.
But he, with two of his officers, were killed,
and the first lieutenant and 19 men danger-
ously wounded. By this unfortunate occur-
rence the mission was broken up for a time,
but was resumed again at the restoration of
peace.
Of late years, Christianity luis greatly ex-
tended it.'^elf in the Friendly Islands, notwith-
standing the opposition of heathenism and
popery. Quite lately the character and actions
of the Christian kmg of these islands has at-
tracted considerable public attention. Tonga,
the principal island, has been again the scene
of a rel)eilion, instigated by a few chiefs who
Btill adhere to heathenism. The rebels were
aided by Ilomish priests, who, for some years,
have had a settlement on the island. An ec-
clesiastic, said to be a bishop, was prominent
in the r|uarrel, and went in search of a French
ship of war to eliastise King George. Fears
were excited that there might be a repetition,
in the Friendly Isles, of those acts of despoti'^
tyranny practiced by the same power in Tahiti
a few years ago. In the interval many prayers
were offered up to God in behalf of King
George and his people. During the bishop's
absence, the British war ship Calliope, com-
manded by Sir E. Home, came into the harl:)or
of Tonga. Meanwhile King George's efforts
for suppressing the rebellion were successful ;
the rebels surrendered, and were magnani-
mously pardoned, and the war was brought to
a happy termination. The king by his for-
bearance and generosity, in the hour of tri-
umph, and by the practical wisdom of other
parts of his conduct, has eminently adorned
his Christian profession. The chiefs of the
fort called Houmd, having first notified their
intention to submit, a day was appointed to
receive this submission ; and as the custom of
the nation is to destroy the vanquished, the
missionaries thought it right to be present
at the ceremony, that they might intercede for
the captives, if needful. But their good offices
were not required. The king caused it to be
proclaimed that he did not intend to take
from these chiefs either their lives, their dig-
nity, or their lands, but that he " freely for-
gave them for the sake of lotu alone." The
clemency of Christianity, which thus shone so
conspicuously in the king's conduct towards
the rebels is the more marked when we re-
member that they had barbarously murdered
some of his own relatives, among the many
victims that fell into their hands. His con-
duct on this occasion won the hearts and alle-
giance of even his bitterest enemies. The
pardoned chiefs returned from the assembly to
the king's house, and that same night re-
nounced their heathenism, and at the family
altar of King George, for the first time in their
lives, they bowed their knees to the Lord Je-
sus Christ. More than 100 persons followed
their example when Mr. West visited the fort
a few days afterward. On the 16th of August
the remaining fortress surrendered, and Avas
destroyed ; and mercy again triumphed in sav-
ing the lives of the vantiuished. The Romish
priests who had persisted in remaining in it to
the last, notwithstanding the remonstrances
addressed to them both by the king and Sir
K. Home, escaped without injury, and their pro-
perty was saved from destruction by the per-
sonal exertions of the king and the baronet,
who went through the midst of burning houses
and falling trees to save their goods. Thus
did Providence guard this worthy king, and
reward his Christian courage and consistency
and mercy. Sir E. Home was surprised
and delighted, and afterwards said to one of
the missionaries, " I saw the noble and Chris-
tian conduct of King George. He can only
he compared to Alfred the Great, of blessed
memory. He is worthy of being called a king.
He is the greatest man in these seas."
These events took place in August, 18.')2.
In November, Sir E. Home returned in the
Calliope to the Friendly Isles, that he might
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
719
learn the result of the visit of the French
ship of war. He seemed very anxious that
no harm should happen to the Friendly Island-
ers or the king. His visit was an occasion of
much joy to all parties. However, the French
ship had not arrived. But on the 12th of No-
vember, two days after Sir B. Home left Ton-
ga, the Moselle made her appearance. Her
commander; Captain Belland, was comnais-
sioned by the Popish governor of Tahiti to
inquire into certain complaints lodged against
King George by the captain of a French
whaler, the Gustave of Havre-de-Grace, and
also by the Romish priests residing in Tonga.
The king obeyed the summons of the captain,
and went on board the Moselle, taking with
him his state paper box, in which he had copies
of all his correspondence, especially that with
the Romish priests. This correspondence _ he
laid before the captain, who viewed the king
and his papers with astonishment. At the
close of their long interview, which lasted five
hours, and throughout which the king con-
ducted himself with the greatest Christian
propriety, the French captain expressed him-
self entirely satisfied, and stated to the king
that " the French government, through him,
acknowledged George as king of the Friendly
Islands ; and that the only condition he would
impose was that, if any Frenchman chose to
reside in his dominions, he should be protect-
ed, so long as he obeyed the laws ; and that if
any of the king's subjects chose to become
Roman Catholics they should be allowed to
do so." To these conditions the king agreed,
and the dreaded French war ship took her de-
parture, the captain declaring that he" had
seen and conversed with many chiefs in the
South Seas, but that he had not seen one to
be compared in knowledge and ability, in
courage and dignity, to George, the king of
the Friendly Islands."
And thus this man, who 29 years ago was a
savage, noted through the South Seas for his
bravery and fierceness of disposition, has be-
come " a wonder unto many" — a monument of
the enlightening and transforming power of
the Gospel of Christ. In 1844, he lost his
peace, and became a "backslider in heart;"
but it was only for a short time. Publicly, at
a love feast, he penitently acknowledged his
fall, and immediately found peace anew, and
ever since he has maintained a walk conform-
able to the Gospel.
The war, thus brought to a close, had an
unfavorable influence on the mission ; but
much is hoped for from the moral influence of
the events connected with its termination. In
the month of October a great council was
held, at which all the ruling chiefs were pres-
ent, and many important regulations were
enacted. The following extracts will speak
for themselves : " The system of tabu is abol-
ished. All slaves are hereby set at liberty ;
and no man is to keep a slave or other person
in bondage. All persons are to dress modestly
and becomingly. All crime wijl be punished ;
and the laws already printed' are to be en-
forced throughout the land. All children arc
to be sent to school, for on this depends the
future welfare of our nation."
In no other mission of the Wesleyans has so
large a number of native preachers been raised
up to proclaim the Gospel to their country-
men as in this mission. Nearly 500 of the
Friendly Islanders are regularly licensed to
preach. In this great result, the institution
for training a native ministry has exerted an
important influence, and was early brought
into operation.
The printing-press also is worked with great
efficiency, and so is also their system of day
schools, in which are nearly 8,000 children.
Altogether this mission is worthy to^ stand by
the side of that to the Sandwich Isles, as a
witness before the world of what the religion
of the cross can effect, even among a savage
people, in the short space of thirty years.
The Rev. Robert Young, the deputation
lately sent from London to visit these mis-
sions, has just returned, and in his report
bears the most delightful testimony to what
the religion of Christ has done for this peo-
ple. Among other things he says : " With
the exception of about 50 persons, the en-
tire population have embraced Christianity.
It is true they have not all felt its saving
power, yet they have all been more or less
benefited by its influence, and some thousands
of them have experienced its transforming
power, and are now, by the grace of God,
adorning the doctrine of God their Saviour.
There were many things that delighted me
during my visit to that interesting land. I
was pleased with the reverence of the people
for the Lord's day. On that day nothing is
heard or seen infringing upon its sacred right.
If people are beheld coming from their habi-
tations, it is that they may go to the house of
the Lord and inquire in his holy temple. If
a canoe is seen in the offing, it is conveying a
local preacher to his appointment on some
distant island, that he may preach Jesus to
the people. If noises occasionally fall upon
the ear, they are not those of revelry and strife,
but songs of praise and earnest prayer to the
God of heaven. I was also delighted with the
attention of the people to family worship.
That duty is strictly attended to, there being
very few families throughout the length and
breadth of these islands bearing the Christian
name where they have not a domestic altar on
which is presented the morning and evening
sacrifice, I was also pleased with their profi-
ciency in learning. Not less than 8,000 of
them can read the sacred Scriptures, and 5,000
can write their own language, and some of
them very elegantly. I examined several
of our schools ; and many of the pupils, in
addition to reading and writing, had acquired
720
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
a very respectable knowledge of geography,
arithmetic, natural history, and some other
branches of learning. A few of thorn were
even making attempts to master astronomy.
I had also the picasm-e of examining the stu-
dents of our normal institution, and was
greatly delighted with their proficiency.
" Though as a nation they are, after all, but
in a transition state, yet, in point of truthful-
ness, and honesty, and hospitality, and tem-
perance, and chastity, they might be placed in
most advantageous contrast with the refined
and polite nations of the civilized world.
King George is a most decided and exemplary
Christian. I had the privilege of being with
him for nearly two months, and during that
period I never heard a foolish word drop from
his lips, nor did I ever sec anything in his
spirit or deportment inconsistent with the
most entire devotedness as a disciple of the
Lord Jesus Christ. He is a local preacher,
and I heard him preach iu Feejee a most in-
teresting, powerful, and effective sermon. On
his arrival in Sydney, to which place he ac-
companied Mr. Young, he attended a mission-
ary meeting. It appears that some years ago
he gave to Mr. llabone, a missionary in the
Friendly Islands, an idol god which he and his
family had been accustomed to worship. That
idol god had been preserved by Mr. Kabone,
who being at the mission iu Sydney, showed
this to the king, and requested him to take it
with him to the meeting. King George did
so, and on the platform he held up the idol and
said, ' This is the thing which I and my family
were accustomed to worship.' Then holding
up first one hand and then the other, each of
which was minus two joints of the little finger,
he said, ' ]\Iy father cut off these fingers and
offered them in sacrifice to this very thing.'
But the king had been ami)ly revenged upon
his idol gods. On his embracing Christianity,
lie had them all collected, and, to the indescri-
bable alarm of his people, he hanged the
whole fraternity of them in his kitchen, and
left them dangling in evidence of their ina-
bility to save themselves or those who had put
their trust in them."
Fccjee Hands. — The Feejee Group is situated
about 3fJ0 miles north-west of the Friendly
Islands, between lat. 15° 30' and VJ^ 30', and
long. 177=' and 178^ AV. It comprises 150
islands, about 100 of which are inhabited.
The remaining islands are occasionally resorted
to by the natives for the purpose of fishing, and
taking the biclic-dc-mer, or sea-slug. There are
also numerous reefs and shoals. Two are large
islands, stretching north-east and south-west,
nearly throughout the whole extent of the
group ; und are supposed to be each about 300
miles in circumference. This group of islands
comprises seven districts, and is under as many
principal chiefs. All the minor chiefs, on the
difierent islands, are more or less connected or
subject to one of these, and as the one party
or the other prevails in war, they change mas-
ters. War is the constant occupation of the na-
tives and engrosses all their time and thoughts.
The introduction of fire arms brought about a
great change of power. This happened in the
year 1809. A brig was wrecked on the reef
off Nairai, which had both guns and powder
on board. The crew, in order to preserve their
lives, showed the natives the use of the new in-
strument. They joined the Mbau people, in-
structed them in the use of the musket, and
assisted them in their wars.
The people are divided into a number of
tribes independent of, and often hostile to, each
other. In each tribe great and marked distinc-
tions of rank exist. The classes, which are
readily distinguished, are as follows : — 1, kings ;
2, chiefs ; 3, warriors ; 4, matauivanua, liter-
ally " Eyes of the laud." They are the king's
messengers ; 5, slaves, (kaisi.) The last have
nominally little iufljuence.
The climate of the different sides of the
islands may, as in all the Polynesian islands, be
distinguished as wet or dry, the windward side
being subject to showers, while to the leeward
it is remarkably dry, and the droughts are of
long continuance. The difierence of tempera-
ture is, however, small. Earthquakes are not
unfrequent, generally occurring, in the month of
February. Several shocks are often felt in a
single night. By observing the plants whose
flowers succeed each other, the natives are
guided in their agricultural occupations.
Next to war, agriculture is the most gene-
ral occupation of this people. To this they pay
much attention, and have a great number of
esculent fruits and roots, which they cultivate,
in addition to many spontaneous productions
of the soil.
The population of these islands has been es-
timated at 300,000. This computation, how-
ever, proceeds upon the supposition that the
interior of the islands is thickly inhabited,
which seems very doubtful. It is probable
that the number may be about 200,000.
'JMie Feejeans are generally above the middle
height, and exhibit a great variety of figure.
The chiefs are tall, well-made, and muscular,
while the lower orders arc meagre, from labo-
rious service and scanty nourishment. Their
complexion, in general, is between that of the
black and copper-colored races, although in-
stances of both extreme^s are to be met with,
indicating a descent from two different stocks.
They are inferior to the natives of Tonga iu
beauty of person. In the Tonguese there is a
native grace combined with fine forms, and an
expression and carriage as if educated ; while
there is an air of power and independence iu
the Feejeeans, that makes them claim attention.
They at once strike one as peculiar, and, unlike
other Tolynesian natives, they have a great
deal of activity both of mind and body, which
may be ascribed, in some measure, to their con-
stant wars, and the necessity of their being
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
721
continually on the alert to prevent surprise.
They are much more intelligent than those of
other parts of Polynesia, and express them-
selves with great clearness and force. They
excel the inhabitants of Tonga in ingenuity, as
appears from their clubs and spears, which are
carved in a very masterly manner, neatly form-
ed, and ponderous ; cloth beautifully checkered ;
variegated mats ; earthen pots ; wicker-work
baskets, and other articles ; all of which have
a cast of superiority in the execution.
The faces of the greater number are long,
with a large mouth, good and well-set teeth,
and a well formed nose. Instances, however,
are by no means rare, of narrow and high fore-
heads, flat noses, and thick lips, with a broad,
short chin. Still, they have nothing about
them of the negro type. Their eyes are gener-
ally fine, being black and penetrating. The
expression of their countenances is usually rest-
less and watchful ; they are observing and
quick in tlieir movements. Their hair is some-
what curly and rather disposed to be woolly.
Their whole external character, viewed gener-
ally, is fierce and warlike, rather than brave and
noblo. For an account of their cannibal pro-
pensities, see Cannibals.
A feast frequently takes place among the
chiefs, to which each is required to bring a pig.
On these occasions, Tanoa, king of Mbau, from
pride and ostentation, always furnishes a human
body. A whale's tooth is about the price they
put on a human life, even when the party slain
is a person of rank. This is viewed by the re-
latives of the victim as a sufficient compensa-
tion. It is, therefore, not to be expected, that
a people who set so little value upon the lives
of their own countrymen should much regard
those of foreigners. Hence the necessity, while
holding intercourse with them, to be continually
guarded against their murderous designs, which
they are always meditating for the sake of the
property about the person, or to obtain the
body for food. Several instances are related of
crews of vessels visiting the islands, having
been put to death and eaten.
The pantheon of the Feejeeans contains many
deities. " Many of the natives," says Mr. Hunt,
in his Memoirs of Mr. Cross, " believe in the
existence of a deity called Ov'e, who is con-
sidered the maker of all men ; yet different
parts of the group ascribe their origin to other
gods. A certain female deity is said to have
created the Vewa people ; and yet if a child
is born malformed it is attributed to an over-
sight of Ove." The god most generally known
next to Ove is Ndengei. He is worshiped in
the form of a large serpent, alleged to dwell in
a district under the authority of Mbau, which
is called Nakauvandra, and is situated near the
western end of Viti-Levu. To this deity they
believe that the spirit goes immediately after
death for purification, or to receive sentence.
All spirits, however, are not believed to be
permitted to reach the judgment seat of Nden-
46
gei ; for, upon the road it is supposed that an
enormous giant, armed with a large axe, stands
constantly on the watch. With this weapon
he endeavors to wound all who attempt to
pass him. Those who are wounded dare not
present themselves to Ndengei, and are obliged
to wander about in the mountains. Whether
the spirit be wounded or not, depends not upon
the conduct in life ; but they ascribe an escape
from a blow to good luck. They have four
classes of gods besides their malicious deities.
The occasions on which the priests are re-
quired to officiate are usually the following :
to implore good crojDS of yams and taro ; on
going to battle ; for propitious voyages ; for
rain ; for storms, to drive boats and ships
ashore, in order that the natives may plunder
them ; and for the destruction of their enemies.
Their belief in a future state, guided by no
just notions of religious or moral obligation, is
the source of many abhorrent practices ; among
which are the custom of putting their parents
to death when they are advanced in years, sui-
cide, the immolation of wives at the funeral of
their husbands, and human ' sacrifices. (See
Human Sacrifices.)
IMbau, the metropolis and imperial city of
Feejee, is situated on a small island about two
miles in circumference. It contains nearly one
thousand inhabitants, most of whom are chiefs.
The houses are of a very superior description.
In October, 1835, Rev. Wm. Cross and D.
Cargill proceeded from Yavau, one of the
Friendly Islands, to Lakemba, one of the Fee-
jee Islands. It was but a small island, being
only about 22 miles in circumference, and did
not contain above 1000, inhabitants. With a
view of ascertaining tlae disposition of the
chiefs and people, it was agreed that the two
missionaries should go ashore in the boat. As
they approached the beach, many of the natives
were running hither and thither on the sand ;
and as they drew near the landing-place, nearly
200 men were standing at the distance of about
100 feet from it, some armed with muskets,
others with bayonets fastened to long sticks,
some with clubs and spears, others with bows
and arrows, their faces painted some jet black,
others red, some after one fashion, others after
another. This was rather a formidal)le array.
However, being told that the chief wished to
know who they were, and what they wanted,
the missionaries went on to his house, a large
building within a fortress, nearly a mile from
the shore. Having had their object explained
to him, he appeared friendly, gave them a
piece of land on which to live, and built a tem-
porary dwelling for each of their families.
The missionaries soon began to preach to
the natives, and in a few mouths they baptized
a number of them, some of whom had previ-
ously obtained a knowledge of divine truth in
the Friendly Islands. The Gospel silently
made its way among the people ; and every
week one or more turned their backs upon
722
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
ielolatry. A desire to embrace the new reli-
gion ])rcvailed among many of the inhabitants
of Lakemba ; but they were afraid openly to
declare themselves, as the chief, notwithstand-
ing his first profession, threatened and perse-
cuted those who first embraced it. He himself
was only a tril)utary chief, and appeared un-
willing to take any step in favor of Christian-
ity until he knew the mind of the more power-
ful chiefs of Feejee. " When Tanao," said he,
referring to one of the most renowned chiefs,
'• leads the way, I and all my people will em-
brace the new religion."
In the course of a few years, the missiona-
ries, with the aid of native teachers and preach-
ers, some of whom came from the Vavau
Islands, introduced the Gospel into various
other islands of the Feejee Group, beside La-
kemba, as llewa, Vewa, Bua, Naudy, and some
others of less importance. Though in some
instances they had many difficulties to contend
with, yet, generally speaking, they met with
a favorable reception from the chiefs and
people. Their motives, however, for this kind
reception of the missionaries were very various,
and, ia some instances, altogether of a secular
character. But the missionaries labored on,
trying to enter every open door, and sow " the
seed of the kingdom " even on Feejeean soil.
Nor did they toil in vain. In 1845 and the
following year, there was a religious movement
in the island of Vewa, which extended also to
others of the islands, similar to that at the
Friendly Islands, already described. " Busi-
ness, sleep, and food," says JNEr. Hunt, in de-
scribing it, " were almost entirely laid aside.
We were at length obliged almost to force
some of the new converts to take something
for the sustenance of the body. Some of the
cases were the most remarkable I have ever
heard of ; yet only such as one might e.vpect
the conversion of such dreadful nuirderers and
cannibals would be. If such men manifested
nothing more than ordinary feelings when they
repent, one would suspect they were not fully
convinced of sin. They literally roared for
hours, through the discjuictude of their souls.
This frequently terminated in fainting from
exhaustion, which was the only respite some
of tluMu had till they found peace. They no
sooner recovered their consciouiuess than they
prayed themselves tirst into an agony, and
then again into a state of entire insensibility.
The results of this work of grace have been
most happy. The preaching of the word has
been attended with more power than before
the revival. Many who were careless and use-
less have become sincere anil devoted to God.
The experience of most has been much im-
proved, and many have become by adoption
and regeneration the sons of God."
Says Mr. Watsford, " The people, old and
young, chiefs and ccnnmon people, were broken-
hearted before the Lord. 'J'hc cries for mercy
drowned &vcry other sound, and the struggling
and roaring for deliverance evinced indo
scribablc agony and bitterness of spirit. They
felt themselves great sinners, and their repentr
ance was deep and genuine. The joy of those
who were pardoned was as great as their dig-
tress had been. At some of our meetings the
feeling was overpowering, and the peo})le fell
before the Lord, and were unable to stand, be-
cause of the glory." Perhaps the most remark-
able instance of the mercy of Heaven which
this revival witnessed, was the conversion of a
chief, whose name was Varin. He had long
acted as the human butcher of Sern, called
" the Napoleon of Feejee." He was a man of
a dreadful character. But by the faithful
warnings and instruction of the missionaries
his guilty conscience was aroused, and his
haughty looks were humbled ; and now, like
another Paul, he is preaching " the faith he
once labored to destroy."
The missionaries continued to pursue their
work in the midst of dangers, and scenes of
blood and cruelty, which make the tiesh creep
at the bare recital, and were cheered to find
that the Gospel was, even in Feejee, " the
power of God unto salvation to every one that
believeth." God wonderfully protected them
from every evil, and the little flocks which they
have gathered have grown in grace, and in
numbers far beyond the most sanguine antici-
pations of those who projected the mission.
Mr. Young, who has just returned from Feejee,
bears the following testimony to the state of
things : " After visiting Lakemba and Vewa, 1
proceeded to Bau, the capital of the country,
and doubtless the deepest hell upon earth.
Here I was shown six hovels in which 18 hu-
man beings had recently been cooked, in order
to provide a feast for some distinguished
stranger, and the remains of that horrid repast
were still to be seen. I next went to one of
the temples, at the door of which was a large
stone, against which the heads of the victims
had been dashed, previous to their being pre-
sented in the temple, and that stone still bore
the marks of blood. I saw — but I i)auso.
There are scenes of wickedness in that country
that cannot be told. There are forms of can-
nibalism and developments of depravity that
can never be made known. No traveler,
whatever may be his character, could have
the hardihood to put on record what he wit
nessed in that region of the shadow of death.
I went to see Sakcmhow, the king of Fecj'ee.
lie received me with great politeness, and
got up and handed me a chair ; and his
(lueen knowing I was from England, at once
made me a comfortaljle cup of tea — a thing
hardly expected in the palace of a cannibal
king. Before I left. King George (of Yavan)
arrived at the palace, and I requested him to
deal faithfully with Sakembow's conscience,
and I believe he attended to my request, and
did it witli good effect, and I hope the fruit
of that visit will be found after many days.
SOUTH SEA ISLAOT)S.
723
•SJBloqog
pne saaqtnaH
Sniptiionj 'diqs
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
1
o
o
1
d
o
§
•<*
o
o
s
in
*
o
to
>n
§
00
I-l
-10^ oqqnj no
siUBpuaiiv JO •OKT
er of Scholars,
for those who
oth Sahbath
day Schools.
3
o
o
to
cf
to
o
CO
*
»
to
co'
o
in
CO
o
00
C-4
o
cl
K
o
to
I-H
a
«
«
»
«
*
«
*
»
*
■»
»
*
«
fo
-■S^-c
rt
*
'i
»
«
*
«
«
*
»
*
»
*
*
-s-s =3
s
H
•saxag
qjoq JO smtoqog
1
O
o
«
«
00
CO
CO
IM
<N
*
to
o
-a"b(i ?o JaqranN
r-1
•siooqag
_
<M
,_
«
«
-!H
-*
t-
t-
«
o
s
--{■Bd JO jaquin^
•^^
rH
^
(N
•saxag q;oq
JO SJTJioqog-q^vjq
-qwg JO J9qnin]vi
■siooqos-qiTjq
«
-QBg JO aaqran;\j
•diqsaaqtnant
*
*
«
*
*
«
rH
o
CO
*
-r
"*
joj ITJIJX no
1
iO
o
•sjaqmaH qo-inqo
pa^ipaioay pa«
cn
05
8
5S
Oi
CO
o
s
O
o
o
to
»
to
C<1
to
ntij: JO jaqam^
IM
r-l
IN
1-
t-(
'-'
H
\
1 l-S
*3i
O
CI
rM
o
CO
c<
CO
«
ft
u
05
to
to
*
lO
:s
^
H
a,
(4
hi^
B m
S-o "^
»
ts o S
H
*
o g
H
u ho
■5 S =«
a
t5
^"^^
O
O
CO
«
«
CO
t>
o
CO
o
CO
to
f-l
?3
«
CO
g
U,o
n
<J
H
2=8
CI
r-1
lO
00
cc
c^
to
to
*
o
to
s
puB sauBuoissiH
N
c>
CO
iH
-
o>
■*
■*
CO
(M
tH
•4
CO
•saoBy-SntqoBajj
o
TJH
o>
CO
00
o>
C5
to
*
C-J
>C
jaqio p jaqinn^
•sxaduqa
CO
03
!M
t-
Ol
to
ei
(N
«
t-
C-1
• JO aaqum^
rH
^
ro
^
o
« P CO
O <! a
^SB
03
;
1
PKINCI]
OK
3
o
a
1
i
^
.g
c
0 ji
tr
>
1
1
J2
>
c
PC
1
^
1
'-
(M
cr
"*
i»
■-
c-
e^
■^
IS
724:
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
But notwithstanding the darkness and im-
piety, and sin and cannibalism in Feejee, a
great Avork is being effected in that country,
i'he foul birds of night are hastening away,
and the Sun of Righteousness is about to
arise with majesty and glory in that benight-
ed land. Much good has already been accom-
plished. We have 3,000 of the people in
church-fellowship ; -1,000 in the schools : and
C.OOO regular attendants on the ministry.
We have 50 native teachers, who arc valiant
for the truth, and who in diffcreut parts of
the land are making knoM-n the power of
Christ's salvation." Then the people in gene-
ral are beginning to understand and to value
the character, the motives, and the objects of
the missionaries ; and the conviction gains
ground, even in the minds of the priests them-
selves, that the idolatry of Feejee is doomed
to fall before the conquering religion of the
Son of God. Both in the Friendly Isles and
in Feejee, the printing-press is in active ope-
ration ; and by the assistance of the British
and Foreign Bible Society, the natives of both
have been well supplied with the Word of God,
and this fact accounts for the failure of Popery
among the AVcsleyan missions in Polynesia.
AuTnoRiTiES : Animal Reports and 3Iissionary
Notices ; J. Ilvnt's Life of Mr. Cross ; Broicn's
History of Slissions. Vol. I. ; 3iiiS!ons in Ton-
?a and Feejee. by Walter Lawry, and Wilkes'
Jnited States Exploring Expedition. — Rkv. AV.
BCTLER.
Temperance. — The introduction of spirituous
liquors into the South Sea Islands has proved
one of the greatest obstacles in the way of the
Gospel. The Taliitians were early taught by
some natives of the Sandwich Islands to distil
ardent spirits from the ti root, and they soon
acquired such a fondness for it, that no sacri-
fice was deemed too great by v.hich the grati-
fication of their appetite might be secured.
Whole districts frequently united to erect a
tude still, of which, at one time, there were on
Tahiti alone, 150. The first spirit that issued
from the still, on account of its being the
strongest, was called ao, and was carefully pre-
served and given to the chiefs. The less pow-
erful liquor which was subsequently obtained,
was distributed among the common people.
A temporary house was erected over the still,
where tiie men and boys assembled, and spent
several days in rioting and drunkenness, and
where they often ])ractised the most atrocious
barbarities. AVhen they were either preparing
a still or engaged in drinking, it was impos.'^i-
ble to obtain from them the most common offi-
ces of hospitality. " Under the unrestrained
influence of their intoxicating draught, in
their appearance and actions they reseml)lcd
demons more than human beings. Sometimes
in a deserted still-house might Ijc seen the
fragments of the rude boiler, and the other
appendages of the still, scattered in confusion
ou the ground, and among them the dead and
mangled bodies of those who had been mur-
dered with axes or Viillets of wood in the quar-
rels that had terminated their debauch." It
was not among themselves only that they quar-
reled ; vessels were sometimes seized, and their
crews murdered. The most daring acts of out-
rage and cruelty occurred from time to time,
and led the missionaries to feel that if these
immoralities were not suppressed, the most
disastrous consequences would ensue, not only
to the natives but to themselves. A meeting
of the missionaries was convened in 1B31, for
the purpose of considering what could be done
to counteract the existing evils. Each one
made a report respecting his station, and
deeply lamented the comparative smallness of
his congregation and the little regard paid to
divine things. The cause which had operated
in producing so sad a change was sought for,
and it was found in the use of spirituous liquors
among the people. The formation of a Tem-
perance Society was proposed and agreed to
by the missionaries, who all resolved to use
their influence to induce the natives to engage
with them to abstain entirely from all ardent
spirits. Papers were immediately drawn up,
stating the object of the Society and signed
by the missionaries at oacl^tation. At Papa-
ra, a district on the islan(ftf Tahiti, the chief
Tati entered cheerfully into the plan, and in a
short time the society at that station number-
ed 360. " The vacant seats in the chapel be-
gan again to be filled, tUe schools were well
attended, and attention to religion revived ;
the happy state of things prior to the introduc-
tion of spirits re-appeared." The people were
so much delighted with this change, tliat they
called a meeting of the inhabitants of that dis-
trict, and agreed among themselves that they
would not trade with any ve.«sel that should
bring ardent spirits to their shores. 'J'he chiefs
and people of other districts, seeing the favor-
able results of this measure at Papara, follow-
ed the good example. Soon after this the
"Parliament" met. Before proceeding to
business, the members sent a message to the
queen to know ujjon Avhat principles they were
to act. She returned a copy of the New Tes-
tament, saying, " Let the principles contained in
that book be the foundation of all your proceed-
ings ;" and immediately they enacted a law to
prohibit trading with any vessel which brought
ardent spirits for sale.. It was some months
after the ibrmation of the 1'emperance Society
at Tahiti before it was joined by the queen
and her attendants. In March, 1834, a meet-
ing of the hitc Ture, or law-makers, was held
to prohibit the imjKM-talion of spirits, at which
it was agreed that if any one was found^ to
have used even o?ie glass, he should be tried,
and that if proved guilty he should suffer a
penalty, which was, for a native, ten hogs, and
for a 'foreigner, ten dollars, and banishment
from the country. Notwithstanding this pe-
nalty, the runaway seamen who were living at
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS.
T25
Tahiti, continually smuggled liquor ou slioro,
but whenever they were discovered their rum
was poured upon the beach.
In 1831, during the absence of Mr. Williams
from Raiatea, an unprincipled captain brought
a cask of spirits to the island, and sold it to
the natives. Encouraged by tlicir chief, the
people gave way to almost universal dissipa-
tion. As the cask which had been imported
was sufficient only to awaken a desire for more,
they prepared stills and commenced the distil-
lation of spirits from the ti root. Mr. Wil-
liams, ou his return, found the people in a
dreadful state. A meeting was immediately
called, which Mr. Williams attended, and reso-
lutions were passed that all the stills should be
destroyed. A new judge was chosen, the laws
were re-established, and persons selected to go
round the island and carry the resolutions into
effect. In some districts they met with con-
siderable opposition, but they made repeated
circuits, and, in the course of a few months,
every still was demolished, and every still-house
burnt to the ground. A law was also enacted,
inflicting a heavy penalty on any one who
should be found engaged in the work of distil-
lation. A temperance society was soon after
formed at Eaiate^ which was joined by the
dissipated young Mief, who said, in a letter to
Mr. Williams after his return to England,
" The spirits, about which your thoughts were
evil towards me, I have entirely done away
with, because my heart is sick of that bad
path, and I am now ' pressing towards the
mark for the ^jrize of my high calling.' These
are now my thoughts, that God may become
my own God. This is really my wish. I am
commending myself to God and to the word of
his grace."
Daniel Wheeler, a member of the Society
of Friends, who visited these islands in 1834,
states that, though great efforts were made to
suppress the traffic, yet spirituous liquors were
introduced clandestinely, and in some of the
islands, produced most disastrous results. He
states, also, the disgraceful fact that much of
this traffic is carried on by American vessels,
many of them denominated " temperance
ships."
During the visit of the American Exploring
Expedition at the Feejee Islands in June, 1840,
a series of commercial regulations were agreed
to by the principal kings and chiefs on the one
part, and Commodore Wilkes and some of his
officers on the other, the 6th article of which
is as follows :
" All trading in spirituous liquors, or land-
ing the same, is strictly forbidden. Any per-
son offending, shall pay a fine of twenty-five
dollars, and the vessel to which he belongs
shall receive no more refreshments. Any spir-
ituous liquors found on shore shall be seized
and destroyed."
If these untutored natives had been left to
themselves, they might have been saved from
this scourge. But one of the missionaries
writes, in 1841 : " AVe have had peace in the
islands for several years, and, for the last six or
seven, we have had but little drunkenness.
But, of late, the French and American consuls
have determined to break through all restric-
tions. I have seen more drunkenness at Eiuieo
the last six months than in seven years before."
The establishment of the French Protectorate
at Tahiti has removed all restraints ; and the
chiefs at Raiatea have followed the example
of the French, and given encouragement to
the traffic, which has exerted a most baneful
influence, upon the young people especially.
But it is gratifying to know that the members
of the church have, fo# the most part, escaped
the seductive influence.
GENERAL SUMMARY.
GROUT'S OF
ISLANDS.
Georgian Islands
Society Islands
Hervey Islands
Samoan Islands
Friendly Islands
Austral Islands
Feejee Islands
Western Polynesia..
Paumutu
Totals
13
B
cl
,
:3
'S
>~t
^
^
15
'if.
? a
3
.2 X*
-5 o
"o
1
■J.
f^
O
C/J
m
13
1,870
a
970
i
4
5
9G9
100
7
676
5
6
97
1.-2S]
238
6
1,650
16
15
143
2,141
163
55
3,680
5
9
1,221
7,1(31
174
7,928
4
159
37
5
14
490
2,526
120
4,068
8
21
4
43
59
57
1,981
16,150
538
368
18,972
These returns are deficient in several impor-
tant points. The number of schools is not
given at half the stations, and at some of them,
the number of scholars is not given ; though
the latter item approximates somewhat to the
fact. The number of European missionaries
is correctly given from the latest reports ; but
the number of native helpers falls far below
the truth. The returns, in regard to the num-
ber of church members, are full ; but some of
them are several years old, so that the number
here stated must fall somewhat below the fact.
Taken as it is, it furnishes a very encouraging
result, when compared with the labor bestowed
upon the missions. Here are 283 communi-
cants to each European laborer, which is
probably much more than the average among
us. And the results of the last year reported,
show that the work is still progressing in an
encouraging manner. Here is an increase on
an average of 10 to each missionary of the
London Society, that of the Wesleyans not
being given.
But the peculiar feature of this mission is,
that so much of the work has been accom-
plished by native agency. Here are 59 sta-
tions, and but 57 European missionaries ;
while many of the stations embrace a large
726
SOUTH AMERICA.
number of out-stations, served by natives.
And, on a large number of islands, there lias
never been any labor but that of natives, with
the occasional visits from missionaries. Insti-
tutions for training native teachers and evan-
gelists, were established at an early period of
the mission, at Avarua, on Rarotonga, in the
Hervey Group ; at Griffith's Town, on Eimeo,
in the Georgian Group ; at Malua, on Upolu,
and Leone on Tutuila, in the Samoan Group.
There is, also, one or more .sxistaiued by the
Wesleyans. And these institutions have been
constantly turning out teachers and evange-
lists. Although we cannot suppose them to
possess the high qualifications required for
these offices in this courftry, yet they appear to
have labored with great zeal and success, and
generally to have sustained an excellent char-
acter, both in view of the natives and of the
missionaries.
A missionary ship has been employed most
of the time, since the establishment of the mis-
sion, in furnishing supplies, and in making
voyages among the islands for the purpose of in-
troducing the Gospel. The John Williams, the
ship emploj'ed for a number of years past, was
purchased by the contributions of children.
In all these islands, the languages have been
reduced to writing by the missionaries, and a
literature given them. The entire Scriptures
have been translated and printed in the lan-
guage of the Georgian, and also of the Ilervey
Islands, and the New Testament, in Samoan ;
and many thousand copies of these, and of ele-
mentary books, have been printed and sold in
these islands.
Soon after the formation of churches in these
islands, the natives Averc encouraged to make
contributions for the missionary cause ; and
the amount contributed for the last year re-
ported was £445.
Almost every year, since the Gospel obtained
a foothold in these islands, there have been re-
ported, at some one or more of the different
stations, such seasons as, among us, are tech-
nically termed Bevivals, M'hen a community
generally are simultaneously moved by the spe-
cial presence of the Holy Spirit, to an awaken-
ed and earnest attention to the groat concerns
of the soul. And, in the wonderful events that
have transpired in this mission, has been lite-
rally fulfilled the prophetic declaration, " The
■isles shall vait for his law." — (For a ])ortion
of this article, the author is indebted to a small
work entitled, " Sovth Sen Islands," published
in Boston, by Tappan & Whittemorc.)
SOUTH AMERICA : South America
covers an area of 0,500,000 English square
miles, its greatest length being 4,550 miles,
and its greatest breadth 3,200. Three-fourths
of thi;; iina lie between the tropics, one-fourth
in the temperate zone. The long chains of the
Andes exercise great influence over the climate
of a largt; portion of the countrv. 'J'wo mil-
lions of s(iuare miles are fertilized' by the Ama-
zon, and large tracts by the rivers Orinoco and
Plata. Prairies cover a large extent of coun-
try, and afford, during a part of the year, sus-
tenance to immense herds of horses and cattle.
The Pacific shore, the basin of the Orinoco,
the basin of the Amazon, the country watered
by the Plata, and Brazil, form five natural
divisions, comprehending the whole continent.
Brazil. — After the Russian Empire, China,
and the United States, this state has the most
extensive contiguous territory of any in the
world. It possesses more than 4,000 miles of
sea-coast, and the coast commerce of the coun-
try is second only to that of the United States.
The climate is remarkably even and healthy
for a tropical country, owing to the great ele-
vation of the whole empire. Until Dec. 1849,
the yellow fever was not known, and at Rio
Janeiro it was said, proverbially, that physi-
cians could not live. The fever seems now to
have left the country. In mineral and vegetable
productions, Brazil is exceedingly rich. Coffee,
sugar, cotton, furniture and dye-woods, india-
rubber, hides, and drugs, are the principal articles
for export. The coffee crop more than doubles
that of the rest of the M-orld. The Chinese
tea-plant is quite extensively cultivated in some
of the southern provinces, also the Jimtt'c.
Fruits and flowers abound^ and the greater
part of the empire enjoys a perpetual summer.
History. — Brazil was discovered by the Por-
tuguese, under Cabral, in 1500. In 1530, it
was divided into captaincies, by the king of
Portugal. De Souza entered the bay now
called Rio de Janeiro in January, 1531 ; and,
supposing it to be a river, named it the River
of January. The city founded a few years
after this discovery, was called San Sebastian,
a name now rarely used. Of the A'arious early
colonies, that which possesses the most inter-
est, in a historical as well as missionary point
of view, is the French Protestant colony, sent
out in 1555, to Rio Janeiro, under the auspices
of the great and good Admiral Coligny. The
idea of building up a Protestant community on
the new-found and fertile shores, excited great
interest among the persecuted European re-
formers. Geneva sent two clergymen and 14
students to accompany the colonists. But the
enterprise seemed to bo attended with misfor-
tunes at every step. 'J'hrough the treachery
of Yillegagnon, the leader Of the first expedi-
tion, the colony was soon broken up, and the
whole plan frustrated. Various colonies were
attempted by the French and Dutch ; but
finally the whole country of Brazil came under
the dominion of Portugal. In 1808, Brazil
became the residence of the Portuguese court,
Rio Janeiro being the capital. In 1822, un-
der Don Pedro]., it became an independent
empire. In 1823 an excellent constitution was
framed. The go\crnmc\\t\s decent ralized l-lach
of the 21 provinces has its own governor
and legislature, besides wliich there is an im-
perial parliament, consisting of a Senate and
SOUTH AMERICA.
727
House of Representatives. The emperor, now
Don Pedro Seguiido. is the constitutional liead ;
a fine man, descended from the houses of Bra-
^anza and llapsburg', and connected with the
Bourbon and Orleans families. The great
cities of the empire being situated on the sea-
coast, there is little narrow-mindedness and
bigotry prevalent among the people. All de-
nominations are free to worship God according
to the dictates of conscience.
MISSIONS.
The American Seamen's Friend Society
have, for many years, maintained chaplains in
the cities of Brazil. The Methodist Episcopal
Church in the United States have also, for a
considerable time, had a mission there. In
1833, the subject of a mission to South Amer-
ica came before the Missionary Board.
In 1834, an invitation was received from a
few pious persons in Buenos Ay res, and in the
hope of being useful to the Protestants of that
city, and of gaining a foothold in that land of
unmitigated Romanism, the committee resolv-
ed to obey the call. Accordingly, the Rev.
F. E. Pitts was sent out, and the next year
Rev. John Dempster (now President of the
Biblical Institute, Concord, N. H.,) was ap-
pointed to follow him. A congregation was
soon formed, and a church built ; and after
that a parsonage, and now there is a very
flourishing Society and Sabbath-school in that
city. In 1837, the Board sent out R6;v. Dr. P.
Kidder and Rev. J. Spaulding. Much was
done by Dr. Kidder in the dissemination ol'
the Scriptures, which were everywhere gladly
received. Just as he was ready to commence
preaching in the Brazilian language, Mrs. Kid-
der died, and he was compelled to return with
his family of young children. The mission is
still continued, and all its expenses are borne
by the people. The present missionary is Rev.
D. D. Lare.
The next missionary effort was made under
the joint auspices of the American Seamen's
Friend Society and the American and Foreign
Christian Union. Rev. J. C. Fletcher was
stationed at Rio, and labored between two and
three years, both among his own countrymen,
who flock to that port for purposes of commerce,
and among the natives. He found copies of
the Bible in the Portuguese language, which
had doubtless been given or sold by Dr. Kidder.
He found tracts especially useful ; and in the
city, in the foreign hospitals, and in the coun-
try, tracts and Bibles wore always gladly re-
ceived. He there made journeys from 30 to
200 miles into the interior, always having with
him a supply of Bibles and tracts. In some
instances, he had discussions with the priests,
some of whom were induced to receive the
Bible. One not only with joy received the
Word, but demanded Bibles and tracts, for dis-
tribution among his people. Mr. Fletcher heard
this priest read the Bible to his people in their
own vernacular. The priests, as a general
thing, are ignorant, lazy, impure, and not very
devoted to their own religion. Infidelity pre-
vails among them, and an English Roman
Catholic priest, of Rio de Janerio, informed
Ex-Governor Kent, American Consul at Rio,
that a jn-iest of his acquaintance died a few
years ago refusing the sacrament to the last.
Dr. Kidder found a few excellent priests, who
seemed to appreciate the Bible ; and one or
two were very desirous to see it introduced
into the schools of the empire. Sen. Fcijo,
formerly regent of the empire, was once a
priest, and even a bishop ; but he wrote the
most powerful book against the celibacy of the
Brazilian priesthood and of the Romish clergy in
general, that has appeared from any other pen
either Romanist or Protestant. Through the
influence of Feijo, Montezuma, and other Bra-
zilian statesmen, this important step towards
breaking from Rome, ?'. e., the marriage of the
clergy, nearly became a law. There is a great
deficiency of priests in Brazil, and for years
the presidents or governors of the different
provinces when delivering their messages, make
this the subject of much complaint. Some
parishes have been twenty years without a
priest, and the country is constantly increasing
in wealth and population. The priests are cor-
rupt and the jieople have very little of what
the French call reUgiosit'e.
An attempt was made by some foreign
priests, to prevent Dr. Kidder from circulating
the Bible ; but their efforts made the Bible
more sought for. In 1846, an American gen-
tleman residing in one of the southern pro-
vinces, received from the United States a
number of Portuguese Bibles, from the Ameri-
can Bible Society. Some foreign priests per-
suaded a few of the people to give up these,
and they were burned ; but the Brazilian priests
were indignant, and at a great festival, bor-
rowed a large gilt Bible, belonging to this
American gentleman, and bore it at the head
of one of their yorocessions. During a part of
1852 and 1853, Mr. Fletcher was Secretary of
the U« S. Legation at Rio, and enjoyed unusual
facilities among the higher portion of the Bra-
zilians for promoting religion. He was begin-
ning to reap the advantage of such a position
for religious influence, when he was called away
by sickness in his family. During his residence
there, the yellow fever raged, and he was called
to witness many deaths among his country-
men, and also, to behold, in the midst of this-
terrible pestilence, the spiritual birth of many..
The Roman Catholic religion in Brazil, has-
been several times almost severed from the
authority of the Pope. It is characterized by
great indifference in its devotees, and by great
theatrical splendor on festival occasions — the
only occasions, except funerals, when the
churches are full. Mr. Fletcher says : " I
have seen the Romish Church in France, Ger-
many, and Italy ; but in show, glitter, and the-
728
50UTH A3IERICA— SUNDAY SCHOOLS.
atrical effect, Brazil takes the lead. The slave
trade in Brazil was formally put down by
British cruizers iu 1850. Slavery will socn be
done away with, (though nearly two-thirds of
the population are slaves.) because color is not
a qualification for respectability. Some of the
first officers of the government, civil and mili-
tary, are tinged with African blood. On the
whole, there is no part of the Roman Catholic
world, except the United Sates and England,
where missionary labors are so unimpeded,
or where they would be better rewarded. —
The press is entirely free. There are three or
four English chaplains in the coast cities.
Railroads are being built, and other indications
of progress are manifest.
"In"l852 and 1853, treaties were made by
the United States, through our ministers, Hon.
Messrs. Schenck and Pendleton, with the repub-
lics of Ums:uai/, the Argentine Confederation,
and Paraguay (so long shut up), and clauses
permitting Protestant worship and the burial
of the Protestant dead, were insisted on and
agreed to.
" Patagonia is still heathen ground, and so
far as known, the inhabitants have very few
religious rites and no idols. The Teerra del
Fugians are sunk very low in barbarism, though
the few that I saw iu the straits of Magellan
appeared as capable of elevation as our North
American Indians." An attempt was made
in 1850 and 1851, by some J^nglish mission-
aries, to labor among them ; the sad accotint
of whose sufferings and death from starvation,
has appeared in the newspapers.
" Chili," continues Mr. Fletcher. " is the most
peaceful, and perhaps the most flourishing of
the Spanish-American republics. But, at the
present time, the priests' party rule. There is
no freedom of ojiinion in religious matters.
The press is muzzled ; the Bible in the Spanish
language is forbidden to l3c circulated. Out
of Valparaiso, the Protestant dead are buried
like dogs. Such abject devotion to the Church
of Rome docs not exist even in Rome itself, as
I have witncs.sed among the Chilians at Val-
paraiso. Rev. David TurnbuU labored there
a number of years, as a missionary of the Ame-
rican and Foreign Christian Union ; but he
now has a regularly organized church of his
own. Rev. Mr. "VVilliams, formerly of the
Presbyterian church at Uniontown, Pa., is
now laboring in Chili for the American and
Foreign Christian Union, and has a flourishing
school of Chilian youth, wlio are also under
Gospel influences. Mr. Turnbull also has a
successful school for young ladies, taught by
Mrs. T. and his sister. Chili is progressing
rapidly in material improvements, railroads,
mining, &c."
Peru and Bolivia arc both bigoted in the
extn nio, and nothing has been done beyond
individual effort.
I^'cv Grenada. — In this state, a few years
■ago, religious liberty was proclaimed, and the
Jesuits were banished, giving the Pope a great
deal of trouble. Still, however, the priestly
party is very strong, and the recent overturn-
ing of the constitutional government has given
great pain to all lovers of civil and religious
liberty. All the South American governments,
with the exception of Brazil, have had bloody
revolutions. The influence of the Americans
on the Isthmus of Panama, which belongs to
New Grenada, has been felt throughout the
whole republic. The American Seamen's
Friend chaplain, at Panama, Rev. Mr. Ravel,
has done something toward distributing the
Spanish Scriptures and tracts. Rev. Mr.
Mont Salvatge, a converted Spanish monk,
has recently been sent to New Grenada, by
the American and Foreign Christian Union.
Venezuela. — This country has been almost
constantly involved in revolutions, and is now
under the government of two tyrants, the
brothers Monagas. An agent of the Ameri-
can Bible Society is now at work there.
Guiana. — For the missions in British and
Dutch Guiana, see West Indies.
Aborigines. — The aboriginal tribes of South
America still exist in large numbers. Thou-
sands of them are still in heathenism ; but by
I'ar the greater part are very loosely conriccted
with the Church of Rome. In the N. E. portion
of the continent are the " Arromack " Indians,
for whom a portion of the Bible has been
translated. But these tribes, as to Protestant
missions, constitute an almost unbroken field.
SPANISH TOWN : The seat of govern-
ment of the island of Jamaica, W. I. It is
very pleasantly situated in the interior of the
island, IG miles from Kingston. A station of
the Wesleyan Missionary Society.
ST. EUSTATIUS : (See West Indies.)
ST. KITTS, or ST. CHRISTOPHERS :
(See West Indies.)
ST. THOMAS : (See West Indies.'
ST. VINCENT : (See West Ind/rs.'
STELLENBOSCH : A station of the Rhen-
ish Missionary Societv in South Africa.
STRONGS ISLAND : An island in Mi-
cronesia, where is a station of tlie American
Board.
SUGANA : A station of the London ^li.s-
.sionary Society on the Island of Upolu, one of
the Samoan group.
SUMATRA : (Sec " Indian Archipelago.")
SUNDAY-SCHOOLS : The institution of
Sunday-schools was inaugurated by an liumble
layman, a little more than seventy years ago ;
and it has been mainly conducted and sustained
l)y laymen since that time, and has provi d itself
a powerful adjunct to the ministry and cliurch
of Christ. God has blessed it with wonderful
success, and we may safely expect it has far
g-rcater blessings in .';tore for our race. Said
the late venerable Dr. A. Alexander, " Al-
though this method of teaching the voung and
ignorant is so sim]ile, yet it dcservts to be
ranked seco7xd to no discovery of our age. 1 do
SUNDAY-SCHOOLS.
729
not know that the beneficence of Providence
has been more manifest in anything that has
occurred in our day, than in the general in-
stitution of Sunday-schools. Other benevo-
lent institutions provide the means of religious
instruction ; but the Sunday-school makes the
application of them." Says Dr. Drew, of Eng-
land, most eloquently — " Honor rest upon our
age. A wonderful machinery has sprung up
into existence from humble and feeble sources.
God gave the word, and since that blessed
hour a million of teaching men and women
arose on Sabbath mornings to tell infancy of
Jesus, and to lead with loving hand the poor
man's child onward on Zion's road. In human
history no institution of man holds such an honor-
ed place. The unpaid, untiring, and unceasing
etttorts of Sunday-school love, are of the kind-
est strongest and most effective doings of
modern times. How do such teachers aid the
responsibilities of parents ; relieve and gladden
the pastor's heart ; bring Christ and all Christ's
truth to warm young hearts, and captivate list-
ening ears, and penetrate earth's dark places,
led by the light of their own Bible, and cheered
by the faith of their Christ-sustained souls."
The following interesting account of the
origin of the first Sabbath-school is from the
graphic pen of Mr. Lancaster, to whom it was
communicated by Mr. Raikes when far ad-
vanced in life. " He said," observes Mr. L.,
" about the year 1782 he had taken a garden
and wanted a gardener. He went to the out-
skirts of the city of Gloucester to hire one ;
and while waiting for the man, he was greatly
disturbed by a troop of wretched, noisy boys,
who interrupted him while conversing with the
man's wife. He anxiously inquired the cause
of those children being thus miserably neg-
lected and depraved. ' 0 sir,' said the woman,
' if you were here on a Sunday, you would pity
them indeed. They are then much more nu-
merous, and a hundred times worse — it is a
very hell upon earth. We cannot read our Bible
in peace for them.' It was this aifecting an-
swer which moved every feeling within him.
He immediately asked, ' Can,nothing be done
for these poor children ? Is there any body
near that will take them to school on a Sun-
day ?' He was answered there was a person
who kept a school in the lane who perhaps
might do it. At this important moment,
while revolving the matter in his mind, the
word ' TRY ' was so powerfully impressed on
his mind as to decide him at once to action.
He went and entered into treaty with the
school-mistress to take a number of these poor
destitute children. Here was the first Sabbath-
school Britain ever saw.
'■■ When two years had elapsed after the
commencement of the first school, on retiring
to rest one evening, Mr. Raikes began to con-
sider that his schools had now been fully tried,
and that it was time for the public good that
they should be made generally known. On
this, instead of going to bed, he directly wrote
a paragraph and had it inserted in his news-
paper, the Gloucester Journal, Nov. 3, 1783,
in which he described the good effects of the
Sunday-schools already in operation, and re-
commended their extension over the country.
This paragraph was copied into many other
papers, and in consequence he had applications
from all parts of the empire ; an answer to
which he published in his joaper. The result
was, that the dormant zeal of many was called
into action, and the establishment of these
schools proceeded throughout the nation with
the rapidity of lightning.
" Sept. 7, 1785, a society for the support and
encouragement of Sunday-schools in the differ-
ent counties of England was formed in Lon-
don. This society engaged the cooperation of
the Bishops of Salisbury and Landaff, the
Deans of Canterbury and Lincoln, and other
distinguished persons, and was the means of
greatly advancing the cause.
" Before his death, which took place in 1811,
Mr. Raikes had accounts of the establishment
of similar schools in various parts of the coun-
try, embracing no less than 300,000 children.
Well might he say, ' I can never pass by the spot
where the zvord try came so powerfully into my
mind, without lifting up my hands and heart
to heaven, in gratitude to God, for having put
such a thought into my heart.' "
The schools were at first conducted by
hired teachers, who were paid thirty-three cents
a Sabbath. This entailed a load of pecuniary
difficulty upon the plan. The Sunday-school
society alone expended, during the first 16
years of its existence, no less tiian £4,000 ster-
ling in the salaries of teachers. Gratuitous
instruction was an astonishing improvement
upon the system, laying a solid basis for its
efficiency, and ensuring its success. The exact
time when this was first introduced was not
known, nor where it commenced ; but about
the year 1800 this plan became very general.
The institution of Sunday-schools was now
become universal throughout England. Every
city and every town had warmly espoused the
cause ; and on July 13, 1803, the London
Sunday-school Union was formed, which gave
the cause an additional impulse.
Scotland, as early as 1797, entered spiritedly
into this good work, enrolling 34 schools that
year, and the next year adding 20 more.
Wales, at a very early period, entered with
eagerness into the scheme, and adorned her
romantic and picturesque valleys with nume-
rous asylums for the instruction of the poor.
And the necessity of supplying these schools
with Bibles, suggested the idea and led to the
formation of the British and Foreign Bible
Society. So great was the progress of Sun-
day-schools in Wales, that in three years 177
schools were established, containing more than
8,000 children.
The Sunday-school system was introduced
SUNDAY-SCHOOLS.
into Ireland in 1793 ; but its progress was not
rajnd until the formation of the Hibernian
Sunday-school Society, in Dublin, in 1809.
In April, 1815, there were 252 schools, con-
taining more than 25,000 children, under the
care of this institution. Since that time the
number of schools has been greatly augmented.
The first adult Sunday-school was planted by
Mr. Charles, upon the mountains of Wales, in
the summer of 1811.
The first Sunday-school in Asia was estab-
lished by the Wesleyan missionaries in Ceylon,
June 4, 1815, and gained them great favor in
the eyes of the people. In the Annual Re-
port of the Loudon Sunday-school Union, May
1, 1818, they give us an account of Sabbath-
schools in successful operation in Bordeaux
and La Garde, near Montauban, France ; also
in Uolland, in Rotterdam and Zeist ; also in
Sidney, Richmond, and seven other jilaces men-
tioned in New South AVales, and further cheer-
ing accounts from the cause in Ceylon.
First Sundaij-scJiools in the United States. —
The Sunday-school Repository of August,
1818, states that the first Sunday-school in the
city of New York (and it is believed in this
country,) was instituted in 1701, and incorpo-
rated in 1796. Its object was to instruct chil-
dren to read and write, gratuitously, who were
unable to go to school during the week ; but
their instructions were carried on by means of
hired teachers, and their design did not extend
to the religious instruction of the scholars. In
the Sunday-school Teachers' Magazine for
1824, it is stated that Mr. and Mrs. Bethune
had spent part of the years 1801 and 1802 in
Great Britain, where they had observed the
progress Sunday-schools were then making in
that country ; and on their return, they con-
versed on the subject with their pious and ex-
cellent mother, Mrs. Isabella Graham of New
York, who resided with them, and it was deter-
mined that as soon as possil)le they would try
to introduce them liere. Accordingly, in the
autumn of 1803, these three Christian philan-
thropists opened the first Sabbalk-scliool in this
city, for religious and catechetical instruction,
at their own expense, at the house of Mrs. Leech
in Mott Street, which was attended by about
forty male and female scholars ; and their
punctuality of attendance was rewarded on
Moiulay mornings, by frequent donations of
tracts, shoes &c., to a considerable amount.
Mrs. Graham and Mr. and Mrs. Bethune then
established two other Sabbath-schools in other
parts of the city ; M'hich they attended every
afternoon during the summer, and during the
winter between the services of the church, wIumi
they brought their provisions with them from
their residence in Greenwich, as there was no
time to return to dinner. Mrs. Graham opened
the first adult school at Greenwich, on the se-
cond Sal)hath of June, 1814, only about two
months lul'ore her departure from this scene of
active benevolence to her prouiised rest. It
was not until 1809, however, that churches or
public bodies began to institute and patronize
Sabbath-schools in this country. The first
school on this plan, was probably one onranizcd
August 22, 1809, in the city of Pittsburgh,
Pa., which met for the first time, on the first
Sabbath of September, in the jury room of
the Court House. It was regularly organized
under an excellent constitution, and was attend-
ed by 240 children and adults. This school
was formed without a knowledge of the mode
of organization in Europe, and coincided in its
principal features with the schools now estab-
lished. In 1811 a similar school was established
in Philadelphia, under the auspices of the Rev.
Robert May, a missionary of the London Mis-
sionary Society, who docs not appear to have
had any knowledge of the school at Pittsburjdi.
In 1813, a school was established by a genHe-
nian in Albany, and continued for some time.
In the autumn of 1814 a school was establish-
ed in Wilmington, Delaware. In April, 1815,
schools were commenced in the Northern Liber-
ties of Philadelphia, which in a few months
contained 500 scholars. In 1816 they began
to be generally inti'oduced.
The citizens of New York claim the honor
of forming the first society for the regular or-
ganization and conduct of Sabbath-schools.
The first proposition for the formation of the
Female Union Society, for the promotion of
Sabbath-schools, was made by the benevolent
ladies of the several denominations in this
city, assembled by public invitation on the
24th of January, 1816. On the 12th of Febru-
ary following, the gentlemen of New York, as-
sembled by public notice, adopted measures for
the formation of a similar society for boys :
and on the 26th of that month, the New York
Sunday-school Union Society was instituted.
Schools were immediately established ; and
during the first year, more than 6000 scholars
were entered in their schools.
About this time Sunday-schools multiplied
rapidly all over the United States. In Alay,
1824, the American Sundai/school Union was
formed in the city of Philadelphia. This So-
ciety has been doing, as rapidly as means have
been furnished, a great work for our country in
exploring its waste i)lace8, establishing schools
everywhere, and i)ul)lishing and circulating a
juvenile literature of great value and extent.
Its operations during the past year embrace the
organization of 2,012 new schools, conlaining
not less than 60,000 children, with 8000 volun-
tary teachers in them ; besides encouraging
and aiding 2,961 other schools, ami putting in-
to circulation about 50,000 dollars worth of
Sunday-school publications. The whole mis-
sionary work above referred to, cost ^20,071 68
for the work done, or at the rate of §36 50 per
month ; §284 37,'i for their expenses ; being,
in the aggregate, $1 50 per day, or 75 cents a
day less than the wages lor wliicli the drcsser.s
of brown stone are said to have lately •' struck"
SUNDAY-SCHOOLS.
T31
ia Philadelpliia. This Society has already
published, and is now circulating a catalogue
of 872 bouud volumes of choice juvenile reli-
gious books, and an assortment of other Sab-
bath-school requisites. It also publishes the
Sundaij-school Journal, a serai-monthly paper
for teachers, and the Youths^ Penny Gazette,
every other week for scholars. The latter has
a circulation of 135,000. The sales during
the year ending March, 1854, amounted to
$172,041 30, or an average of 1,720,000 18mo
volumes of 120 pages each.
The General Protestant Episcopal S. S. Union.
— From the Annual Keport of this Society, for
1853, it appears that it is quite rapidly increas-
ing in means and influence. In 1851, its dona-
tion and collection list wag reported as only
$28 15, while in 1853 the amount had run up
to §1,375 95. Its list of Sunday-school books
numbers about 224 volumes, and receipts from
cash sales in the Depositor}^, 320,793 82.
This society embraces the denomination in the
U. S., and is located in the city of New York.
The Sunday-school Union of the 3Iethodist
Episcopal Church. — This Society has its head
quarters in the Methodist Book Room, 200
Mulberry-street, New York. It reported in
1852 in the different states, 9,074 S. Schools ;
98,031 officers and teachers ; 504,679 scholars ;
1,402,010 volumes in libraries ; 7,213 Bible
classes ; 45,632 scholars in iufant classes ; 100,-
584 S. S. Advocates taken; 13,242 conver-
sions ; and expenses of schools §69,094 00.
Raised for the S. S. Union, §7,258. It has an
extensive list of excellent juvenile books and
tracts, and is constantly adding valuable works
to its catalogue.
y'he American Baptist Publication Society
reports 103 Sunday-school books on its ca-
talogue, while three years ago it had only 28.
The society is more largely engaged in pub-
lishing and selling books and tracts for gene-
ral purposes, and the Sunday-school publica-
tions are mingled with other sales.
The New England Sabbath-school Union
is an organization in connexion with the Bap-
tist denomination in New England, and has
its centre of operations in the city of Boston.
They have issued the past year 30 reprints,
28,000 copies, and 12 new books. They also
issue the " Young Reaper," which has a month-
ly circulation of 16,000 copies. The entire
receipts of the society for the past year were
§1,803. It has increased its schools about 50
per cent, within the year, and has encouraging
prospects for the future.
T/ie Massachusetts Sabbath-school Society is
the Sabbath-school publication society for the
Congregational denomination throughout the
country. It has received an act of incorpora-
tion from the Legislature of Massachusetts, and
its capital for its publishing operations was
raised some years ago by the friends of the
cause, in the vicinity of Boston, where it is
located.
Of late that society has made vigorous and
praise-worthy exertions towards extending its
Sal)bath-school missionary labors and libraries
among the destitute of the West. The ra-
pid demand for Sabbath-schools and a v/hole-
some juvenile literature has made the co-
operation of this society on an enlarged
scale, both timely and grateful to the public.
The society has published 658 bound volumes,
for the libraries. It has also an extensive
series of Scripture questions, of which many
hundred thousand copies have been circulated.
Its juvenile paper, the " Well-spring," has an
extensive circulation, and is, we believe, the
only Sabbath-school paper that is published
weekly. From the annual i-eport of 1853, it
appears that its sales of books amounted to
■§23,872 17, the last year, and its donations and
legacies were §2,910 95.
Every city and almost every county in our
States has a Sunday-school Union, but un-
fortunately they have lost the habit of report-
ing regularly to the parent society, so that it
is impossible to give with accuracy the extent
of our Sunday-school efforts in the United
States. We, however, know the numbers in
our cities and some of the counties, and from
these we have made an estimate that approxi-
mates as nearly as our resources and judgment
enables us to do! The result is, we think, all
the Sunday-schools of our country contain at
the present time not less than 1,800,000 chil-
dren, with a noble army of 200,000 voluntary
unpaid teachers and officers. Great Britain
includes in her schools, it is estimated, not less
than 2,000,000 children, and 200,000 volun-
tary teachers — a noble army of 400,000 in
these kindred countries, who, with ceaseless
energy, are making a vigorous onset uj^on Sa-
tan's kingdom. (Rev. Mr. McClure estimates
the children in our Sunday-schools at 3,000,000.
See United States.)
3Iission Schools. — The original Sabbath-
school of Robert Raikcs was preeminently a
31ission school ; and for many years, both in
England and this country the Sabbath-school
effort was mostly of this character. In both
countries the earliest efforts were confined to
paid teachers, and the teachers or teachings
were not always of a strictly religion;^ charac-
ter. Soon, however, the Sabbath-school enter-
prise found its home and resting-place among
the churches ; and the tendency of things of
late years has been to gradually relinquish the
mission schools, and remain satisfied with
teaching the children of the churches, and such
others as could conveniently be brought into
company and association with them. Some
noble exceptions in different parts of our
country ought here to be named, among which
stands preeminently the New York Sunday-
school Union, and its enterprising and devoted
officers and teachers. Besides some 125
church Sabbath-schools, this Union embraces
between 50 and 60 mission schools, with about
732
SURAT— SUTTEE.
1,500 teachers and 10,000 scholars. About
one-fourth of these schools were formed in
1853, and tlieir present efforts are designed to
increase the number still more rapidly in fu-
ture. This union comprises members and
churches of 20 different denominations, or
shades of denominations, and is well adapted
to reach the destitute by its combined influ-
ence. About 20 mission schools are also in
successful operation in Brooklyn. Some of
these schools have been in operation more
than thirty years, and they can refer to their
well-trained children now standing at the
head of the professions. Many are in the
Christian ministry, some of whom arc mission-
aries of the cross, in pagan lands, and one or
two are presidents of colleges. Whole neigh-
borhoods of the lowest classes are every year
in a measure purified and elevated by the in-
fluence of these mission schools. The personal
intercourse of intelligent, refined and Christian
teachers and visitors, with even the most pol-
luted and criminal, has the happiest effect in
restraining, and now and then of saving. The
most bitter hostility against the upper classes
is thus checked and changed, so that the great
book of remembrance alone can reveal how
much the privileged classes are indebted to
such teachers for the safety of persons and
property. 'J'he poor emigrant melts into tears
of joy as he witnesses the first act of kindness
in this strange land, in the approach of the
gentle teacher for his children. Said one old
man recently, " I thought there was no religion
in America until you came and led my chil-
dren to the Sunday-school." And said a poor
Catholic woman with a bursting heart, " Oh,
you Protestants are kinder than the Catholics."
There is imperative need everywhere of Chris-
tians turning their attention and labors more
in the direction of this mission school move-
ment.
In all our principal cities, and even in our
country towns, there are multitudes of chil-
dren, whose religious instruction is neglected.
Their Sabbaths are spent in idleness and vice,
and they are rapidly preparing for tiieir ap-
pearance in our criminal courts, gaols and pe-
nitentiaries. The Sabbath-school is almost
the only instrumentality that can reach them.
Its succes.-! in reclaiming and saving them has
often Ijeen tested ; and it must occupy a ])r()-
niinent place in any system of measures that
may be adopted for the evangelization of our
great cities. — 11. G. P.viuikk, Esi^.
SUllAT : A large and i)opulo>is town on
the south l)ank of the Tuptee river, 177 miles
north of Jiombay. It is the head-fpuirters of
a considerable military force, the residence of
the IJritish collector, judge, kc, and the chief
tribunal lor the entire presidency of Bombay.
'I'he London .Missionary Society had a station
at this ])laci! from IK];] to 1845.
SUIU : Capital of the district ofBirbhum,
iu the province of Bengal, 130 miles N.N.W.
from Calcutta. Station commenced by the
English Baptists in 1818.
SURINAM : (See West Indies.)
SUTTEE : The name given in India to a
woman who immolates herself on the funeral
pile of her husband, and denotes that she is
considered true and faithful to him. The term
is also applied to the horrid rite itself. The
origin of the practice is supposed to have been
the voluntary sacrifice of a widow, who was
inconsolable for the loss of her husband, her
affection for the deceased making life a bur-
den ; the Brahmins taking advantage of the
novelty and admiration it excited to recom-
mend the practice as most meritorious and
productive of good effect to the souls of the
widow, her husband, and the surviving friends,
in order to turn it to their own advantage.
W. Ewen, Esq., superintendent of police iu
the lower provinces of Bengal Presidency, was
of the opinion that the widow can rarely be
considered voluntary iu the sacrifice. Pew
widows, he says, would ever think of sacrific-
ing themselves, unless overpowered with force
and persuasion, very little of either being suf-
ficient to overcome the physical or mental
powers of Hindoo females. A crowd of hun-
gry Brahmins represent to her that, by becom-
ing a Suttee, she will remain so many years
in heaven, rescue her husband from hell, and
purify the family of her father, mother, and
husl)and ; while, on the other hand, disgrace
in this life, and continual transmigration into
the body of a female animal will be the
certain consequence of this refusal. In this
state of confusion, a few hours fiuickly pass,
and the widow is burnt before she has had time
even to think on the subject.
The details of this practice have often been
given in our missionary periodicals. We need
not repeat them here. But the extent to
which this abomination has been carried, and
the terrible sufferings which it has occasioned,
will appear from the fact that, in ten years,
from 1815 to 1825, no less than 5,997 widows
were thus immolated. For a long time the
Suttee was winked at by the British govern-
ment in India. Dr. Scuddersays that in 1819,
when he first went to India, no order had been
issued against it. In 1828, a society was
formed at Coventry, England, called the Hu-
man Sacrifice Abolition Society, the object of
which was to effect, by appeals to British hu-
manity and justice, the abolition of widow-
l)urniiig, infanticide, and other superstitious
murders in India. In their report for 1834,
they state that the Suttee was abolished in the
Bengal Presidency in 1829, and in the other
Presidencies the following year. In 1848,
Dr. Scudder staled that the practice still pro-
vailed in the native Stales of Meywar, Yolah,
Marwar, Beekaneir, Kisbcngur, Ulwar. and
]{oondee, a portion of the country larger than
Xew-JMiglaiid. He says Suttees are rooted in
the affections of the people ; as an evidence i>f
«#
SWAK RIVER— SYRIA.
733
which he states that the Eajah of Ihallawar
issued a proclamatioa denouncing any one
who should assist at a widow-burning. He
soon after died, and the first victim after his
proclamation was his own widow. But he
says that, whenever a province is taken
possession of by the British government, the
Snttee is immediately abolished ; and that
government is exerting its influence with the
native kings to secure its entire abolition ; in
consequence of which some of them are issu-
ing their orders against it. — The Suttee's Cry
to Britain, by J. Beggs ; 3Iiss. Her., Sept.,
1834, p. 347, and March, 1848, p. 90.
SWAN RIVER : A settlement in Austra-
lia, on the river of this name, occupied by the
Wesleyan Society.
SYJDNEY : The capital of Australia. It
is situated upon a cove which opens from the
spacious basin of Port Jackson. The town is
built upon the head of the cove, on a rivulet
which falls into it, and in a valley between two
opposite ridges. The best houses arc of white
free-stone, or brick plastered, and have a light,
airy appearance. Population about 8,000. It
is occupied by the Wesleyans and the Propa-
gation Society.
SYRIAN CHRISTIANS : Called also St.
Thomas's Christians. They inhabit the inte-
rior of Malabar and Travancore, in the S.W.
part of Hindostan. They extend from N. to
S. 150 or 200 miles, and in breadth 40 or .50.
Between 50 and 60 churches belong to this
ancient branch of the Christian church, which
has preserved the Syriac Scriptures, in manu-
script, from Christ and the Apostles, and, un-
connected with the rest of the Christian
world, has stood for ages amid the darkest
scenes of wickedness, idolatry, and persecution.
The tradition among them is, that the Gospel
was planted in Hindostan by the apostle
Thomas. Landing at Cranganore, or Chcn-
ganoor, from Aden in Arabia, he was well re-
ceived by Masdeus, king of the country, whose
son, Zuzan, he baptized, and afterwards or-
dained deacon. After continuing some time
at Cranganore, he visited the coast of Coro-
mandel, and preached the Gospel at Melapoor,
and finally at St. Thomas's Mount, near Mad-
ras, where he was put to death. His tomb
long remained an object of veneration. Dr.
Buchanan entertained a decided opinion that
we have as good authority to believe that the
apostle Thomas died in India, as that the apos-
tle Peter died at Rome.
That Christians existed in India in the second
century, is a fact fully attested. The bishop
of India was present and signed his name at
the Council of Nice, in 325. The next year,
Frumentius was consecrated to that office by
Athanasitis of Alexandria, and founded many
churches in India. In the fifth century, a
Christian bishop from Antioch, accompanied
by a small colony of Syrians, emigrated to
India and settled on the coast of Malabar.
The Syrian Christians enjoyed a succession of
bishops, appointed by the patriarch of Anti-
och, from the beginning of the third century
till they were invaded by the Portuguese.
They still retain the Liturgy, anciently used
in the churches of Syria, and employ in their
public worship the language spoken by our Sa-
viour in the streets of Jerusalem.
The first notices of this people in modern
times are found in the Portuguese histories.
In 1503, there were upwards of 100 Christian
churches on the coast of Malabar. As soon
as the Portuguese were able, they compelled
the churches nearest the coast to acknowledge
the supremacy of the Pope ; and, in 1599,
they burnt all the Syriac and Chaldaic booka
and records on which they could lay their
hands. The churches which were thus sub-
dued, are called the Syro-Roman Christians,
and, with the converts from other tribes, form
a population of nearly 150,000. Those in the
interior would not submit to Rome ; but after
a show of union for a time, fled to the moun-
tains in 1653, hid their books, and put them-
selves under the protection of the native
princes, by whom they have been kept in a
state of depression. These are called the Sy-
rian Christians. About 10,000 persons, with
53 churches, separated from the Catholics ;
but in consequence of the corrupt doctrines
and licentious manners of their associates, they
have fallen from their former estate, and very
few traces of the high character which they
once possessed can now be discovered. Their
number was estimated in 1825 at about 50,-
000. (See Hindostan.) — Chapin's Missionary
Gazetteer.
SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND.—
Throughout the Old and New Testaments
there is a frequent reference to Syria, a coun-
try which has been subject first to one conquer-
or and then to another, and made the bloody
theatre on which ambition and tyranny have
displayed their fiercest energies. The Chal-
dees, the Persians, the Romans, the Saracens,
the Mohammedans, were successively its mas-
ters. In 1517, the Sultan of Turkey took pos-
session of Syria, and his successors held sway
there without interruption till 1832, when
Ibrahim Pasha fought his way into the coun-
try, and brought it under the dominion of
Egypt. In 1841, Avith the aid of the European
powers, Syria was again restored to Turkey,
and it is still subject to the Sultan, though a
dark uncertainty hangs over its future destiny.
In the south-west part of Syria, with the
Dead Sea and the river Jordan on the right,
and the Mediterranean Sea on the left, lies
Palestine, or the Holy Land, which has been
the scene of those great events which involvr
the destinies of mankind. Of the present con
dition of Syria and Palestine so much has bees
said by modern writers, that it is unnecessarj^
to go into particulars here. But as there Is a
constant reference in the missionary records to
734
SYRIA AisD THE HOLY LAND.
the leading religious sects which occupy the
country, some statistics on this subject may be
of use to the reader, in the right understanding
of the succeeding pages. From the statements
of a missionary, as late as 1840, who had en-
joyed unusual facilities for obtaining correct in-
formation, the following facts are gathered.
The population of Syria, including Palestine
and Lebanon, does not vary much from one
million and a quarter. Of this population, in-
cluding the wandering tribes, the following is
a tolerably correct division.
Moslems 565,000
The Antioch or Orthodox Greeks 240,000
Maronites 180,000
Greek Papists 40,000
Druses 100,000
Jews 30,000
Metewalies, a sect of Moslems 25,000
Ansaireea and Ismayeleea 200,000
Armenians and other sects 20,000
The Moslems are spread over the whole
country, except Lebanon and the large moun-
tainous regions of the Ansaireea, in both which
districts they are so few as scarcely to merit
attention. The orthodox Greeks extend to
every part of Syria and Palestine. The Druses
occupy Lebanon, and particularly the southern
half of it. The Ansaireea and Ismayeleea oc-
cupy the large and fertile region north of Tri-
poli, and spread over mountain and plain all
the way round the head of the sea to Tarsus
and the plain of Adona. The Maronites re-
side chiefly in Lebanon, while about 2,000 are
found in Aleppo, a few in Damascus, and small
communities in other places. The Greek Pa-
pists are confined chiefly to Aleppo, Damascus,
Beirut, Sidon, and different villages in Leba-
non, and a few in the ITaouran. The Arme-
nians reside chiefly in Jerusalem and Aleppo.
They increase along the southern frontier of
Syria. The Jews, who are chiefly Spanish,
German, and Polish, are confined mostly to
Jerusalem, Hebron, Tiberias, Damascus, and
Aleppo. Small communities are found in some
of the other cities. Small Arab tribes occupy
portions of nearly all the great plains in Syi-ia
and I'alcstine, but chiefly along the eastern
frontier and in the Ilaouran. There is a sect
called Yezzidecs, worshipers of the devil, but
they arc few, and occupy the extreme north-
cast frontier.
The Druses. — This sect, though not the most
numerous, yet holds a very conspicuous place.
They derive their name from Mohammed Kben
Ismael, surnamed El Drusi, who came from a
foreign country, and Ijccame a follower of
Ilakem, the supposed founder of the sect in
the eleventh century. The Druses acknowl-
edge seven law givers : Adam, Noah, Abra-
ham, Moses, Jesus, Mohammed, and Said.
They l)elievc in ten incarnations of God, the
la.?t and most important being that in the per-
son of llakem. 'J'hey call llakcm the creator
of heaven and earth, the only God worthy
of reverence in heaven, and the only Lord on
earth. " He is one, the only one, who knows
no consort and no number. He neither begets
nor is begotten. He does what he will and as
he will. He tears down and builds up. He
lifts up and throws down. He says to all
things, be ; and they are. He is the begin-
ning and the end of all things. He is the'be-
ginning and the end, the powerful, the excel-
lent, the victorious. I am, he says, the foun-
dation of religion, the way, the Lord of the
resurrection and the new life, etc." This Ha-
kem, they believe, will appear again in human
form, at the judgment, to give to every man
according to his desert. The time of his coni-
in"' is pointed out to be when kings rule with
unlimited power, and Christians get the supe-
riority over the Moslems. At the judgment
those who are called Muwahhidin, 7. e. Unita-
rians, in opposition to Polytheists and Chris-
tians, will be rewarded, and all apostates pun-
ished. There are two classes of Druses, viz.,
the Akkal, or the learned and initiated ; and
the Jahal, or the ignorant and uninitiated.
The initiated are very strict in regard to food,
not eating with strangers ; in regard to mar-
riage, not marrying out of their own order ;
and in the use of oaths, using only the expres-
sion, " I have said it." They form a sort of
sacl'ed or aristocratic order, and perform the
ceremonies of their religion in secret. From
them is taken the -ima??!, the spiritual or eccle-
siastical head of the Druses. The uninitiated,
comprehending the greater part of the Druses,
and even the emir himself, who is not permitted to
interfere in matters of religion, are very differ-
ent as to religion and religious usages. They
make no distinctions of meats, drink wine,
marry wives out of their own sect, and wear a
variegated dress. They conform to the reli-
gion which happens to predominate. With
the Mohammedans they are Mohammedans ;
Avith the Christians they are Christians. This
conduct is said to be commanded them in their
sacred books, in order to conceal the fact that
they belong to a particular sect. This class
of the Druses are exceedingly ignorant and
degraded, Ivnowing but little about God, and
still less about the Saviour ; yet they are teach-
able, and not being subject to ignorant and
bigoted priests, they have been found more
ready to receive the Gospel than the nominal
Christians of Syria.
Missions of the American Board. — Kev.
Messrs. Levi Parsons and Pliny Fiske, em-
l)arkcd at Boston, Nov. 3, 1819, for what was
then denominated the mission to Palestine,
and on the 15th of the following January, they
entered the harbor of Smyrna. In December
of the same year, Mr. Parsons embarked for
Jerusalem, where he arrived in March — the
first Protestant missionary who had entered
that field with a view of making it the centre
of his own evangelical operations. He had,
however, scarcely surveyed his field, when dis-
ease undermined his constitution, and he em-
SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND.
735
barked for Alexandria, where he died, Febru-
ary 10, 1822. lu April, 1823, Mr. Fiske en-
tered Jerusalem, accompauied by Rev. Jonas
King. They spent some time in explorations
in and around the holy city, and in excursions
to Lebanon and other places, meanwhile dis-
tributing Scriptures and tracts, and studying
the prevailing language. In November, 1823,
Eev. William Goodell and Rev. Isaac Bird,
with their wives, arrived at Beirut. As this
city holds a conspicuous place in the history of
the Syrian mission, a particular description of
it seems desirable. Soon after their arrival
the missionaries wrote :
" Beirut is pleasantly situated at the foot of
Mount Lebanon, on the western side of a large
bay, in latitude 33° 49' N. and long. 35° 50'
E. It has a fertile soil, and is abundantly fur-
nished with good water from springs that flow
from the adjacent hills. The houses are built
of mud, and of a soft, crumbling stone, and are
dark, damp, and inconvenient. The streets are
narrow ami dirty, and during the winter are
seldom dry. They were once paved, in a slov-
enly manner with stones of irregular shape,
which are now wide apart, and simply furnish
stepping stones in rainy weather. The filth of
the city, together with its dampness in winter
and its heat in summer, renders it a very un-
desirable place for a family. Ships are forced
to lie at anchor at the eastern extremity of the
bay, about two miles from the city. The port
is choked up with sands, and with some of the
pillars of granite, which remain as almost the
only relics of the ancient magnificence of the
place. On the north and north-west Beirut is
entirely open to the sea, and at no great dis-
tance to the east is Lebanon, which stretches
far to the north and to the south. Nearer to
the city on the south, is a large and beautiful
plain, varied by small hills, covered with olive,
palm, orange, lemon, pine, and mulberry trees,
and enlivened by numerous cottages. From
the terrace of the house we occupy we can
count more than 200 of these cottages, scatter-
ed here and there among the trees. Besides
three large mosques and several smaller ones,
the city contains a Roman Catholic, a Maron-
ite, a Greek, and a Catholic .Greek church." —
(See Beirut.)
In view of this beginning of Protestant mis-
sions in a quarter of the world the most inter-
esting and sacred, the Board say in their re-
port for 1824 : " la Jerusalem, the ancient
capital of the visible Church, the standard of
truth and righteousness has been erected, it is
hoped, never more to be permanently removed.
Among the mountains of Lebanon, the Gospel
has been proclaimed to Druses, Maronites, Sy-
rians, and Greeks. Jordan and the Dead Sea
have heard the sound, and Bethlehem, Caper-
naum, and Nazareth. In that most interest-
ing portion of the world, the light of life, after
having been for ages quite extinguished, has
been rekindled — and by whom ? The mission-
aries of the Board — thanks unto our merciful
God for the unmerited privilege — have been
among the first and principal instruments. A
great crowd of witnesses upon earth, and
doubtless many more on the heights of the
heavenly Zion, contemplate this enterprise."
A prominent feature in the mission for the first
few years, was the determined and systematic
opposition to the circulation of the Bible,
made by the Romish church ; and not to the
Bible only, but to the preaching of the Gospel,
the establishment of schools, and the diffusion
of knowledge generally. In spite of the op-
position, however, a school was established
and continued at Beirfit, and the Scriptui'es
were put into the hands of many, notwithstand-
ing a proclamation from the Grand Signior
forbidding their distribution. In the fall of
1825, Mr. King left the mission, having engag-
ed in it only for a limited period. About the
same time a severe loss was sustained in the
death of Mr. Fisk. He had been preparing
an Arabic and English dictionary, which it
was necessary now to commit to other hands.
As the missionaries became acquainted with
the language of the country, so as to converse
with the people freely, and engage in contro-
versy with the patriarchs and others, a spirit
of religious inquiry was awakened, and the ex-
citement became general ; so that the time of
Mr. Bird, and often that of Mr. Goodell, was
demanded night and day to converse with men
and women from different places, who were
convinced of the rottenness of their old system,
and wished to become acquainted with a more
excellent way. As the work went on, the op-
position of rulers, both ecclesiastical and civil,
became more violent, threatening decrees were
fulminated, and in some instances the most
cruel forms of persecution were resorted to.
Among the objects of this persecution was
Asaad Shidiak, who had been Mr. King's
teacher in Arabic and Syriac, and who was
one of the most intelligent men on Mount
Lebanon. He was a Maronite Roman Cath-
olic, had been much acquainted with the
bishop of Beirut, and with the Maronite patri-
arch, and on his showing a strong tendency
towards evangelical religion, he was threat-
ened with immediate excommunication, if he
did not cease from his connection with the
" Bible men." To avoid this evil he was ad-
vised to retire for a season to Hadet, in the
hope that the opposition would subside. In
this retirement his mind became still more
serious and determined, and on his return to
Beirilt he was resolved to risk whatever ob-
loquy and violence might come upon him.
The suspicion that he was heretical made it
necessary for him to give up a marriage con-
tract into which he had entered ; and he pre-
ferred this sacrifice rather than shut himself
out from the means of access to the truth. In
January, 1826, the patriarch sent his own
brother to call upon Asaad, to urge him to an
736
SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND.
interview, and though warned by the mission-
aries of the dangers to which he would be ex-
posed, he comijlied with the request, and went
to the convent of Der Alma, where he met the
patriarch, and had many conversations with
him. The topics upon which Asaad insisted,
were the necessity of a sijiritual religion, in
distinction from modes and form ; the sufS-
ciency of the Scriptures ; and the absurdity of
holding the Pope to be infallible. The patri-
arch was highly displeased with these bold sen-
timents, and uttered, first, cruel threats, and
then promised honor, promotion, money, &c.
The bishop of Beirut was present at several of
the discussions, and threatened Asaad's life in
the most angry and violent manner.
After an absence of seven weeks, he return-
ed to Beirut, and wrote a history of what had
transpired. The document was published in
the Missionary Herald, and indicated great
talents, a sincere love of the truth, and the
spirit of a martyr in its defence. As soon as
Asaad's mother, brothers, and other relations
heard of his return, they flocked around him,
and besought him to leave the missionaries.
Against the urgent entreaties of the brethren,
he accompanied four of his relatives home, in
the belief that it would be safe, and that he
should do some good by the visit. In about a
fortnight some of his relatives took him by
force, and carried him to the convent of Der
Alma, and delivered him up to the patriarch,
by whose order he was removed to Cannobeen,
about 50 miles from Beirut. There he suffered
imprisonment, chains, stripes, and revilings.
To those who delivered him up, he said that if
be had not read the Gospel he never should
have known how to explain their conduct ;
but there he learned that " the brother shall
deliver up the brother to death, and a man's
foes shall be those of his own household." For
several months he was beaten daily, and hav-
ing made an unsuccessful attempt to escape, a
heavy chain was put around iiis neck, and the
other end fastened to the wall. The common
people were. encouraged to visit him and spit
in his face, and otherv/ise insult him, with a
view to shame him and break his spirit. His
mother and one or two of his brothers, finding
how cruelly he was treated, relented, and ear-
nestly sought his release. One who visited
him declared that he had been beaten till his
body was of the color of blue cloth. In the
midst of his sufTerings he wrote a kind letter
to tlie missionaries, but not having an oppor-
tunity to send it, the patriarch discoverecl it,
and both he and others beat him severely on
this account. For many months intelligence
was received of Asaad's (5ondition, and though
his sufTerings knew no abatement, the hope
was entertained that his deliverance would in
souie way be effected. But at Icngtli communi-
cation was cutofT, a dreadful uncertainty hung
over his fate, and the sad conclusion was forced
upon the missionaries that he had died in the
hands of his unrelenting tormentors. Nothing
has ever occurred to relieve this painful ap-
prehension. The piety and constancy of Asa-
ad Shidiak were regarded as very extraordi-
nary. His pride of talents and of authorship,
his reverence for his former tutors, patrons,
and ecclesiastical superiors, and all his previ-
ous habits of thinking and acting, were opposed
to his joining the missionaries and yielding to
the authority of the Scriptures. To these
were added the anathemas of the Church, the
revilings of friends, the malice of a bigoted
and bloody priesthood, and the horrors of »
long imprisonment under chains and stripes,
till his vigorous frame became oue mass 0/
suffering ; while, on the other hand, deliver-
ance, honor, emoluments, all that wealth and
power could offer, awaited him in case of his
recantation. That under these circumstances
Asaad should have adhered with unwavering
firmness to the Gospel and the religion of
Christ, must certainly be regarded as a sur-
prising triumph of Christianity over the natu-
ral inclinations of the heart, and over the prin-
cipalities and powers of this world. With
propriety did the Board ask, " How many are
there among ourselves, with all our means of
knowledge and all the strength of confirmed
religious principle, who could assure them-
selves that, in such a fearful controversy, they
should stand like Asaad Shidiak, calm and
unrufHed amid the war of angry passions, de-
prived of every earthly support, and looking
through tears, yet with a resolute eye, to hear
ven as his home, and to Christ as his only de
liverer ?" A brother of this first martyi\
Pharez Shidiak, also embraced the truth, and
was pursued with the same persecuting spirit,
but saved himself from the fate of Asaad by
a timely escape to Malta. After the occur-
rence of these two cases, the Maronite patri-
arch issued a proclamation to be read iu all
the Maronite churches, strictly forbidding all
connection with the missionaries, in the way of
buying or selling, borrowing or lending, giv-
ing or receiving, attending schools or teaching
them, or rendering any service, on pain of the
loss of office and the great excommunication.
The patriarch admitted that the missionaries
were " unwearied in their efforts ;"' that they
went aljout " manifesting a zeal in compassion-
ating their neighbors ;" that they " opened
schools and sujjplied instructions, all at their
own expense," &c. The Greek Catholics man-
ifested a similar hostility, though they were
less inclined to persecute ; and the Mohamme-
dans were ready to pursue every professor of
Christianity with inexorable vengeance. Thus
it became evident in the early history of the
mission, that those who would follow Christ,
must be prepared, like the primitive Christians
on the same soil, to seal their testimony with
their blood. The people might turn frum one
form of nominal Christianity to another, and
embrace the Greek, or Greek Catholic, or
SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND,
737
Maronite, or Latin faith, without giving
offence ; but to be Christians indeed, and take
the word of God as their only rule of faith,
was to incur the wrath of bishops and patri-
archs, and required the spirit of a Christian
hero. Along with these violent persecutions
carae political and warlike agitations, and all
the schools which had been organized at Bei-
rut, Tripoli, and elsewhere, had to be given
up. In May, 1828, the missionaries removed
from Beirut to Malta. Their reasons for this
step were the prospect of war, which soon
after commenced, the difficulty of holding
communication with other places, and the in-
security which was felt after the removal of
the British consul. After an absence of two
years, during which they devoted themselves
to the study of the various languages of
the east, the missionaries, learning that the
English consul had again taken up his resi-
dence at BeirGt, returned to that place. On
entering that city, they were saluted with
kindness by the people, but the priests were
disturbed, and soon the papal thunders began
again to roar in the churches. The mission-
ary work proceeded, however, without material
interruption, except by the ravages of the
plague, which prevailed through Syria, Arme-
nia, and Persia, in 1831. In 1832, the mission
sustained a severe loss in the death of Gregory
Wortabed, an early and distinguished convert,
concerning whom full accounts may be found
in the Missionary Herald of that and pre^aous
dates. The reply of Mr. Bird to the Bishop
of Beirut, in 1833, received special attention,
and served to awaken a spirit of inquiry among
the people. About the same time a press was
established in Beirut, to be superintended by
the Eev. Eli Smith, under the general direc-
tion of the mission.
Syria and the Holy Land were now under
the government of the viceroy of Egypt, and
embraced the four pashalics of Aleppo, Tripoli,
Damascus, and Acre. Beirut, being the prin-
cipal port of commerce, was assuming increased
importance as a missionary station, while ex-
plorations were made in Damascus, Tripoli,
Sidon, and other large towns, with a view to
the occupancy of new fields. The system of
schools was yet in its infancy, the missionaries
not having been in circumstances to give to
this subject the necessary attention. lu their
report for 1834 the Committee of the Board
say, " They are not aware that any material
change has taken place in the character and
condition of the people at large, in consequence
of the establishment of the mission. But the
impression is said to have been extensively re-
moved, which had been given by the Jesuits in
former years, that the Protestants have no re-
ligion, no jn'iesthood, no churches, &c. The
bigotry, intolerance, unreasonableness, and
worklly-mindedness of the papal priests have
also been brought to light, by their opposition
to the Scriptures and schools, and it is thought
4t
that image worship is growing unpopular in
the vicinity of Beirut. Among the inhabitants
of that place now living, the missionaries reck-
on but four native converts. A fifth hopeful
convert is teaching a school at Tripoli. The
number admitted to communion from the com-
mencement of the mission is seven, not includ-
ing the lamented Asaad Shidiak, nor Jacob, a
young Armenian, who died giving evidence of
repentance and faith in Christ." Correspond-
ing with the date of the foregoing, is a joint
statement by the missionaries, in which they
speak of the insufficiency, in that country at
least, of the mere circulation of the Scriptures.
Many copies had been distributed from Alep-
po to Hebron and Gaza, and after ten or twelve
years' use of them, not a single soul had, to their
knowledge, been by this means brought to a
sense of sin, and converted to God. " Not,"
they say, " that the word of God has taken no
effect ; not that it has done no good ; but we
state a fact, and from it we draw the conclu-
sion that other efforts ought to be connected
with Bible distribution." The missionaries at
Beirut in 1835, were Eli Smith, Isaac Bird,
and William M. Thompson, with the wives of
the two latter, and Eebecca W. Williams,
teacher. A class of ten young men were un-
der instruction in geography, astronomy, and
the English language, and three other schools
were taught by natives, the whole number of
pupils being 140. Besides these a female
school had been opened by the female members
of the mission, assisted by the widow of the
lamented Gregory Wortabed, and eighteen pu-
pils were in attendance. For this school a
building had been erected on the mission pre-
mises, by the avails of a subscription among
foreign residents. The measure met w>^ no
opposition.
Jerusalem was at this date the centre of a
great tumult among the people, the mountain-
eers of Palestine having suddenly risen in gene-
ral rebellion against the government of Egypt.
That government, however, maintained its su-
premacy, and the whole country of Syria, un-
der the sway of the Pacha of Egypt, was soon
disarmed and quiet. In 1836 the Committee,
in surveying this field, were able to say, " Al-
most every change opens the door still wider
for missionary work. Lebanon is completely
open. Missionaries can go where they please.
The Druse population in particular have been
rendered accessible to the truth. They are fre-
quently seen at the chapel of the mission." At
Jerusalem, Mr. Whiting found much encour-
agement in the distribution of books and tracts
among the pilgrims who visited the Holy City
from all quarters. A school was also in opera-
tion there, and a few Moslem girls were learn-
ing to read and sew. The island of Cyprus
having been thoroughly explored, a mission
was commenced there in 1836, by Messrs.
Pease, J. L. Thompson, and Daniel Ladd. The
number of Greek Christians on the island was
738
STRIA AKD THE HOLY LAM).
estimated at 70,000, and there did not appear
to be any obstacle in the -way of spreading the
Gospel among them. The death of Mrs. Smith,
in consequence of exposures by shipwreck, on
her way to Smyrna with her husband, was a
serious loss to-the mission ; Mr. Smith also lost
at the same time, the valuable manuscript of a
iournal, which he had kept during a tour
through the Haouran, and the models of Arabic
letters which he had procured for the cutting
of a new font of tj-pe in that language. The
latter he was able afterwards to replace. The
printing in 1836, at the Beirut press, all in Ara-
bic, was as follows, viz. : A Hymn Book, 24
pages, 200 copies ; Watts' Catechism, 16 pages,
1,000 copies ; Elements of Arabic Grammar,
168 pages, 1000 copies ; Dairyman's Daughter,
96 pages, 2000 copies ; making a total of 380,800
pages. Besides this there were struck off from
the lithographic press 200 copies of the Arabic
alphabet, for the schools ; and 2000 copies of
Chrysostom on reading the Holy Scriptures.
The year 1838, and a part of the following
year were spent hj Mr. Smith in an exploring
tour with Dr. Eobinson, through Arabia and
Syria. The results of these observations are
well known to the public. There were 6,642
books and tracts distributed from Beiriit sta-
tion in 1838, amounting to 490,629 pages.
The larger portion of this work was effected by
a native employed for the purpose. The people
manifested an unexpected eagerness to receive
books. The ecclesiastical rulers of every de-
gree made fierce opposition, but very many of
the people received the books in open defiance
of patriarchs and bishops.
It was a highly interesting fact, recorded in
1€39, that several papal priests, from d.iffercnt
parts of the country, all of them strangers to
each other, were so enlightened and so evan-
gelical in sentiment, as to become disgusted
with popery and anxious to escape from it.
This and the preceding year were also signal-
ized by an extraordinary religious excitement
among the Druses. The extent and effects of
this awakening, and the spirit in which it was
met by the civil and ecclesiastical powers,
forms an exceedingly interesting chapter in the
history of the S3Tian mission ; but for the par-
ticulars reference must be had to the journals
of the missionaries published in the Herald. The
books and tracts distributed from Beirut during
the year 1839, amounted to 3,.543. Of these 103
were Bibles, 264 Testaments, 419 Psalters, and
2,757 smaller portions of the Scriptures. A
large and convenient chapel was built at Bei-
rut, in which were held two services in the
Arabic language, one soon after sunri.se, the
other in the afternoon. Between the.se services
was one in English at the American Consulate,
and a Sabbath-school was conducted in the
native chapel.
The free school contained upwards of 56
scholars, and the attendance was full and regular
throughout the year. The school at Tripoli,
already mentioned as under the eare of a na-
tive, had about 30 scholars.
In the autumn of 1840, Beirut was bom«
barded by Turkey and her allies, and the mis-
sionaries fled, some to Jerusalem, and others
to Larnica in Cyprus. The houses and other
property of the mission were unharmed. In
the summer of 1841, the war having ended in
placing the government under Turkish rule,
the missionaries returned to Beirut and re-
sumed their labors. About the same time a
printer from Boston, with an improved font of
Arabic type, and Eev. Eli Smith, who had
been spending a little time in America, joined
the mission. The whole missionary force at
Beirut, on being collected at this period, con-
sisted of Messrs. Smith, W. M. Thompson,
Nathaniel A. Keyes, Samuel Wolcott, L.
Thompson, missionaries, and their wives ; Mr.
Van Dyck, physician ; a printer ; and five na-
tive assistants. At Jerusalem there were two
missionaries, Messrs. Whiting and Sherman,
with their wives, and one native assistant ; and
at a station on Mount Lebanon, called B'ham-
dun, there was a missionary and a physician.
Tlie country, however, was not quiet, for the
war that had transferred the government from
the dominion of Mohammed Ali to that of the
Sultan, was followed by a civil war, in which
the Maronites and Druses of Mount Lebanon
contended for the ascendancy. It was in fact
a war of the Druses against the Papists, who
had provoked it, and ended in the complete
triumph of the Druses. In view of this con-
stant disturbance and change, Mr, Smith wrote,
in January, 1842, " There is an evil, a great
evil, in being thus beaten about by these po-
litical surges, and we try to avoid them all in
our power, and seek the stillest waters we can
find. Yet our minds are never free from anxi-
ety, looking out for what may come next.
And besides this, we are excessively troubled
to give our friends at home proper and correct
accounts of our labors and prospects. One of
the brethren, in giving reasons for not writing
home more full accounts, remarked that he
could not get the world here to stand still long
enough to describe it. So it is — we write
home now an account of our labors and pros-
pects, with propositions for money and men to
do this or that, and before our letter reaches
the United States, some revolution has taken
place which materially alters our pluiis, and
we want to do something very different from
the thing proposed."' Four months later Mr.
Smith wrote, that the power of the Maronite
patriarch, which had always presented the
greatest obstacle to missionary labor, appeared
to be broken ; that wherever they M'ent they
had free access to the Druses, and that an im-
pulse had been extensively given in favor of
schools. And yet, he adds, " The Turkish au-
thorities have taken such a conr.se, that their
designs remain wholly unknown ; and what
will be the result of the present position of
SYKIA AND THE HOLY LAND.
739
tkiogs 've feel entirely unable to conjecture."
la spitd "f these perplexities ten scliools were
maintained, nine at Beirut and one at Jerusa-
lem, containing an aggregate of 287 pupils,
and the printing during the year 1841 amount-
ed to ()3G,0U0 pages, half of which were por-
tions of the Scriptures. In their report for
18-13, the Prudential Committee say, " During
the past year a good house for a permanent
establishment has been obtained at Abeih, a
raouutain village about 15 miles southward of
Beirut, facing the sea, sufficiently elevated to
render it a safe and healthy residence the whole
year, central with regard to the Druse people,
with 1000 or 1500 inhabitants, and villages iu
all directions around it. The mission has also
gained much experience during the few years
past, made many favorable acquaintances, dis-
seminatea mucn evangelical truth, done away
uo small amount of prejudice, and conquered
one of the most difficult and important lan-
guages of the Avorld — the Arabic — spoken by
60,000,000 people, it being the sacred lan-
guage of the vast Moslem nation." The sta-
tion at Jerusalem was reported this year as
having been suspended, tne missionary, Mr.
Whiting, having joined Mr. Thompson and
Dr. Van Dyck at Abeih.
In 1844, soon after the visit of Dr. Anderson
and Dr. Hawes to the Syi'ian mission, the
committee say, " Besides the large and rapidly
increasing population of Beirut, Lebanon is
terraced and planted from the profoundest
depths of her numerous valleys up to the dizzy
summits of her majestic hills, and more than
200,000 hai'd-working mountaineers reside in
her romantic valleys and hamlets. Here the
members of the mission may abide, and travel,
and teach, and preach, and distribute the word
of life ; and hei-e it is the present intention of
the committee, in following out the apparent
leadings of Providence, to combine and con-
centrate the power and resources of the mis-
sion. The people are divided into different
sects, but they are essentially one race, the
Arab, by whatever name called' ; with a com-
mon language, the Arabic, spoken just as it is
written, and the same as in ancient times ; and
the manners, customs, and social condition
throughout are substantially the same." In
connection with these statements of the com-
mittee, the report for this year contains a
document of extraordinary interest, drawn up
by the mission while Drs. Anderson and Hawes
were on the ground, which gives a description
of the Arabic race, and an impression of the
importance of this mission, as being the only
one especially to that race, which every one
should examine who would fully appreciate this
mission. We regret that our limits will not
allow us to give the document entire. The
reader is referred to the report of the Board for
1844, where it may be found in full.
At Abeih. two rooms iu the house occupied
by Mr. Thompson were arranged for a tem-
porary chapel, and an Arabic service was
kept up twice every Sabbath. Between the
services an interesting Sabbath-school was
held. The shyness and reserve of the people
wore off as they became acquainted. The ad-
verse portions of the Druses and Maronites,
both of whom resided in the village, began to
consult the missionaries in their mutual diffi-
culties, and Mr. Thompson had more friendly
intercourse with the Maronite priesthood dur-
ing the first summer of his residence at Abeih
thau during all his previous missionary life.
The years 1844 and 1845 were distinguished
by a sudden and wonderful Protestant move-
ment at Hasbeiya, a village at the foot of
Mount Hermou, containing a population of
about 4000, composed of Greek Arabs, Maro-
nites, Greek Catholics, Jews and Druses. la
February, 1844, the brethren of Beirut were
visited by a party of about 50 men of the
Greek Arabs of Hasbeiya, who declared their
intention to become Protestants, and asked for
ministers and teachers. After much conversa-
tion with them, it was agreed that a native
assistant should be sent to them, and that if
his report of their case was favorable, the mis-
sionaries would visit them. The intelligence
proved of so interesting a character, that in
May, Messrs. Smith and Whiting proceeded
to Hasbeiya, when they were convinced that
they had been too slow to credit the sincerity
of these professed Protestants. They amount-
ed to about 150 men, besides women and
children, and among them were some of the
most respectable men in the village, and a
large proportion of enterprizing young men.
Some of them had made considerable improve-
ment in Christian knowledge, having received
many of the works of the mission, both from
Beirut and Jerusalem, and heard much of the
character and doctrines of the missionaries.
That they were sincere in their determination
to adhere to the Protestant faith, and to take
the Bible alone for their guide, the missionaries
could not doubt. Their separation from the
Greek church appeared to be entire, and even
the Greeks acknowledged that there was a de-
cided improvement in their character ; t^jat
the profane had left off swearing ; that the
drunkard had abandoned his cups, and that
the Lord's day was carefully observed for reli-
gious improvement. Schools were established
among them, and the field seemed white for
the harvest. In June, one month later, ano-
ther missionary visited Hasbeiya, and wrote :
" The Protestants hold out and increase ia
numbers. They are increasing in knowledge
also ; some of them quite rapidly. The school
has 40 or 50 scholars, and we must establish
another soon." In July Mr. Whiting wrote :
" We cannot but feel much anxiety for this
little band of Protestants, imperfectly instruct-
ed as they are, but up to this time, although
very strong efforts have been made to induce
them to return to the Greek church, they have,
740
SYRIA ASD THE HOLY LAND.
•with very few exceptions, remained firm in
tlieir adherence to the truth." At about the
same date, Mr. Smith, in describing their first
Sabbath in Hiisbeiya, said, " How strange and
exciting our circumstances. It seemed almost
a dream. Here we were, in this wild corner
of Syria, always peculiarly lawless, and now
entirely without a government. Before us was
a considerable congregation, brought up in the
gross and deeply-seated superstitions of the
(jrreek church, but now abandoning, and with
a suddenness almost miraculous, all their fasts
and feasts, their image and saint worship, and
worshiping God with us after the simple forms
of Protestantism, yet not a hand was raised
to molest us, and we went through our worship
with as much quiet and security as if we had
been in the heart of New England."
It sov'/n became evident, however, that this
little body of Protestants was to expect no
protection from the government, and that
their enemies were aware of this, and had de-
termined on using violence. In view of the
storm which was about to burst ujjou them,
and the fiery trials through which they must
pass, the whole company of the Protestants
assembled at Mr. Smith's house on a Sabbath
evening, for the purpose of entering into a
solemn covenant to stand by each other to the
last. In describing this scene, Mr. Smith
says ; " The step was entirely of their own sug-
gestion, and I knew nothing of it until they
had begun to assemble. Being all collected,
they drew up a covenant engagement in the
following terms : — ' We whose names are here-
to subscribed, do covenant together before
God and this assembly, and pledge ourselves
upon the Holy Gospel, that we will remain
leagued together in one faith ; that we
will not forsake this faith, nor shall any se-
parate us from each other while we are in
this world ; and that we will be of one hand
and one heart in the worship of (jfod; accord-
ing to the doctrines of the Gospel. In God
is our help.' Each one took this covenant
separately, standing by the table, and laying
his hand upon the Bible, as it was read to him.
Sixty-eight names were subscribed on the spot,
and the next day the number was increased to
seventy-six, all adult males. The aflecting so-
lemnity of this scene I leave you to imagine.
I have been mftnyyearsa missionary, and have
witnessed a great variety of heart-thrilling
events, but this is one of the last that I shall
forget." In a day or two after this solemn
transaction, the persecution broke out with
great violence, and to escape the murderous
hands of their enemies the Protestants fled to
Abeih, as their only place of safety. They
remained there till October, when learning
that the unfriendly emir had been deposed,
and that another governor had been appoint-
ed, with express instructions to restore the Pro-
testants to their houses; they returned to
Hasbeiya. The quiet, however, was of short
duration, for by some means the new governor
was soon removed, and a son of the former
governor appointed in his place, so that the
poor Protestants were again at the mercy of
their enemies. They were publicly insulted
and beaten in the streets ; their houses were
attacked and much injured, and no Protestant
could appear in the streets without being
stoned. It required more courage, faith and
love for the truth than these brethren had at-
tained, to stand firm in such circumstances,
and the result was, say the committee, " That
the poor persecuted people, since it had not
pleased God yet to give them fully the martyr
spirit, yielded the case in despair, and one after
another made peace with the authorities of the
Greek church." It was believed, however,
that they did not fully conform to the rites of
the Greek church, but were allowed consider-
able liberty ; and one of the Protestants, in
writing to the missionaries, in January, 1845,
said, " We meet together and have prayers as
often as we have opportunity. Thanks to
God, the faith of the brethren increases ; but
we are thirsting to hear your prayers and spi-
ritual instructions again. You are never out
0/ our minds a moment. We pray for grace
to wait for that privilege with patience."
Thus the door was closed in Hasbeiya for the
present, but in circumstances which left a
strong conviction that it would be opened
again ere long, and that God would yet com-
plete the work which he had so signally be-
gun.
In the spring of 1845, Lebanon was again
disturbed with civil war. It was a struggle
for political ascendancy between the Maronitea
and Druses, and after twenty days' fighting in
different sections of the mountains, the Maron-
ites were defeated, and driven out of nearly all
the Druse quarter of Lebanon. AstheMaro-
nites were bigoted adherents of the Romjsh
church, and the most bitter opponents the
missionaries had ever met with in Lebanon,
their loss of power at this time had an impor-
tant bearing on the mission. In describing
this event, Mr. Thompson wrote : " Again the
Maronite patriarch has sunk under disa])point-
ment. He died a few days ago. Moreover,
that party in Hasbeiya who opposed us and
stoned our pei)ple, has been driven out of the
place by the Druses, and great numbers of
them killed. The whole combination is com-
pletely broken up and dispersed." Mr. Smith,
in writing on this subject has the following
very striking comments on the death of the
patriarch : — " I cannot couclude without al-
luding to the death of the old Maronite jjatri-
arch. What a lesson does that event, in such
circumstances teach us ! After having raai'-
tyred that faithful witness, Asaad Sliidiak,
caused the Bible often to be burned, had
missionaries insulted and stoned, and boasted
that he had at last left no place open for
them to enter the mountains, be find-* Uira-
SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND.
741
self stripped of all his power ; niissiouaries
established pei-maneatly iu the midst of his
flock, and his own favorite bishop coustraiued
to give orders for their protectiuu ; aud fiually
he sialis himself under his disappoiiitmeut,
and dies. How signally has the blood of
the martyred Asaad been avenged upon him,
even in this life."
At Beirut and Abeih the labors of the mis-
sionary brethren had suQered but slight inter-
ruptions during the troubles in Mount Lebauon
and iu Hasbeiya. In 1847, there appeared at
Beirut evidence that evangelical principles
were spreading with increased rapidity. Most
of those who attended upon the preaching of
the missionaries openly avowed their evan-
gelical sentiments, in the face of violent oppo-
sition. More than fifty young men of the
papal church refused to confess for more than
a year, and this they regarded as a final renun-
ciation of popery. At Abeih, about thirty
adults were in attendance on the Arabic ser-
vice, and stated preaching was maintained in
four of the neighljoriug villages. There was
evidence of the special influences of the Holy
Spirit on many minds.
In April, 18-18, a station was commenced at
Aleppo, and Messrs. W. A. Benton aud J. A.
Ford were appointed as missionaries to that
place. Mr. Smith, who accompanied the
brethren to their station, describes the people
as intelligent, social, inquisitive, and not so
much afraid as elsewhere of changing sects.
The Arab Christian population was the largest
aud most intelligent to be found in any place
in Syria.
An important event of this year was the
formation of a purely native church. Previ-
ous to this the native converts had joined the
mission church, composed iu part of mission-
ary families. The petition for a church to be
composed only of converted natives, orignated
with the natives themselves, aud is a document
of considerable length and of great interest.
(See Annual Report for 1848, or Herald for
August 1848. The latter contains also the
constitution and discipline of the new
church.)
ceeding with the translation of the Bible into
the Arabic language, aided by Butrus Bistany,
one of the native brethren. Special interest
was awakened in the beginning of this year
by a learned Greek Catholic of Damascus who
had become fully convinced of the errors of
his church, and had openly declared himself a
Protestant. He stated that for about six
years his conscience had been troubling hira ;
that he had embraced infidel views, but by
reading boots furnished him by the mission-
aries, and by conversation with Mr. Smith and
others, he had been led to take a decided stand
on the subject of religion. An open profes-
sion of his sentiments brought on a discussion
between him and his patriarch ; and, as Mr.
Meshakah, the individual in question, was
esteemed the most intelligent native layman in
the country, and the patriarch the most learn-
ed ecclesiastic, attention from all quarters was
directed to this controversy. Mr. Meshakah
also immediately prepared a treatise in Arabic,
addressed to his countrymen and friends, the
object of which was to explain to them the
reasons of his secession from the Catholic
church, aud to set forth proofs of the corrup-
tion of the doctrines and practices of that
church. This book produced a great sensa-
tion.
The printing during the year 1849 amounted
to 1,934,000 pages. The mission had two
fonts of beautiful Arabic type, of different
sizes, cast in Syria, under the supervision of
Mr. Hurter, printer for the mission, at Beirut.
Up to this time there had been but one mis-
sion church — that at Beirut, and the number
of members was 27. Ten of these were from
the Greek church, four were papal Greeks, four
Maronites, five Armenians, three Druses, and
one a Jacobite Syrian. In the latter part of
1850 there was an outbreak of Turkish vio-
lence at Aleppo, resulting in terrible scenes of
violence and blood, and subjecting the nominal
Christians to serious disadvantages. (For full
accounts of these scenes see Missionary Herald
for February and April, 1851.)
The report for 1851 includes Hasbeiya
among its regular stations. For several years
In Is'ovember, 1848, a new mission was | the missionaries had paid frequent visits to
commenced at Tripoli, and Messrs. David M. that place, and had held frequent correspond-
Wilson and Horace Foot were stationed at ence with leading men of the Protestant com
that place. They met with vigorous and de-
termined opposition at the outset, and it was
with difficulty that they procured houses in the
city. At the beginning of the year 1849 there
were four common schools in connection with
the station at Beirut, and five in connection
with that at Abeih, with an aggregate of 210
male and 55 female pupils. 'J'here was also a
school at Tripoli, containing 20 scholars, and
one at Hasbeiya, containing 70 pupils. The
prhiting during the preceding year had amount-
ed to 1,010,000 pages, and the total amount
munity; but no missionary had been perma-
nently stationed there. The time having come,
as was believed, for carrying on the work there
in a more systematic manner, Messrs. Thomi>
son and Van Dyck were designated to that
field; and, in July, a church was formed at
Hasbeiya, composed of IG native brethren.
The necessary oflicers were chosen, and Mr.
Thompson was requested to act as pastor till
one from their own number should be raised up.
But it was a church planted in the midst of
enemies, and persecution still awaited it.
, Be-
printed from the commencement of the mission ' fore the close of 1851 the government ceased
was 75,705,800 pages. Mr. Smith was pro- to have any control over that region, and anar-
742
SrEIA AND THE HOLY LAND.
chy set in, robbers infested the rocvds, and
property and life were at the mercy of law-
less and marauding bauds of people. This cou
dition of things continued through most of
18.")2 and 1853, and of course had a most dis-
astrous effect upon the church at Hasbeiya.
It was often impossible for the missionaries or
the native assistants to visit the people in
safety. Xor could the people assemble for
worship without danger. At a communion
season, in 18.53, the Protestants came fully
armed, and stacked their guns, and hung their
swords in the court of the chapel, forcibly re-
miading the missionaries of scenes often wit-
nessed iu the early planting of churches among
the savages of the American wilderness. It
was hardly to be expected that the Gospel
would achieve many triumphs amid such dis-
orders and tumults ; and it is even more than
could have been anticipated, to hear the mis-
sionaries say, as they do, in the Herald for
July, 1853, " We are thankful that none of
the members of the church have been terrified
into submission ; nor indeed have any of the old
and established members of the congregation
yielded to the pressure. The number who at-
tend public worship, however, is sensibly re-
duced ; and these absorbing social troubles
have sadly distracted all minds, and diminish-
ed that earnest zeal which has at other times
been so encouraging a feature of our work at
Hasbeiya."
At the last accounts, civil war was again
pending, and seemed almost inevitable ; and
yet it was evident to those on the ground, that
neither war nor persecution could drive the
Gospel from Hasbeiya, nor prevent its progress
among a people who had begun to be enlight-
ened and quickened by its power. 'J'he latest
intelligence from IJein'it is that found in the
Herald for August, 1854. The native church
has 2G members, 8 having been recently dis-
missed and formed into a church at Abeih.
Scripture spelling-book ; Dr. Tan Dyck's Al-
gebra ; a sermon on the second commandment ;
an Arabic grammar ; Meshakah on Skepticism,
besides some broad sheets ; and we now have
in the press, Schneider on Rites and Ceremo-
nies, and a new edition of the Psalter, making
in all 1,083,000 pages." There had been is-
sued from the depository during the year 5,008
books and tracts, of which 725 were disposed
of in Beirut, 923 were sent to Sidou, 1.073 to
the mountain, 242 to Tripoli, 313 to Alepjjo,
7G to Mosul, 71 to Damascus, 100 to Jerusa-
lem, 20 to Alexandria, and 30G to Bombay.
The primary school at Beirut had about 75
pupils. The female seminary was in a pros-
perous condition. Some of the studies pur-
sued were, "Watts on the Mind ; Church His-
tory, in Arabic ; an abridged work on Moral
Philosophy ; besides which the girls had read
the whole of D'Aubigne's History of the Re-
formation, and other history, with Mrs. De
Forest in an evening class, the atlas being al-
ways open before them. A Sabljath afternoon
service, in Arabic, was kept up, the congrega-
tions varying from GO to 120. The excited
state of men's minds in regard to political mat-
ters and the prevailing wai-s, had turned away
the thoughts of many from spiritual things ;
and it was remarked as a serious evil also, that
for at least one-third of the year there must be
a virtual suspension of labor at Beirut, owing
to»the absence of the missionaries among the
mountains during the hot season. Repeated
trials have shown this absence to be necessary.
A good rcjjort is made of the little church at
Abeih, in the Herald for May, 1854. The
chapel was kept open during the year, and the
average attendance was about 50. There was
an increasing demand for free schools among
the Druses. Six of these schools were already
in operation on the mountains, and in them all
a large amount of religious instruction was com-
municated. At Aleppo a church had been or-
" Most of the members," say the missionaries, ganized with six members, all of whom gave evi-
" give evidence of sincere piety, and are lead
ing upright and useful lives. The church has
sent 1,000 piastres to assist the British and
Foreign Biljle Society in tiieir special effort to
furnish a million of Xew Testaments for
China." Mr. Smith wiw progressing rapidly
willi the work of translating the Scrijjtures
into Arabic, having completed the Pentateuch,
and the Xew Testament as tiir as 2 Corinth-
ians. As an evidence of the capabilities of
the mission press at Beirut the brethren say,
" AVe have been able to print an Algebra, and
have now in hand an edition of the Pentateuch,
with references, using all the varieties of letters
found iu Algebras, and reference Bibles in
English. 'I'lie whole has been created since
1835. tlic fonts of type all having been made
by .Mr. Ilallock, oiilier in Smyrna or in the
deuce that they were living branches of the
true vine. Little had l)een done for education in
Aleppo. They are an ignorant people. Though
the largest, wealthiest, and most intelligent
community of nominal Christians in Syria,
there is not a common school in the city that
deserves the name, and scarcely a person com-
petent to teach his native tongue correctly.
Yet a large and increasing numl)er were intel-
lectually convinced of the truth, and many
were anxious for evangelical instruction. Some
females were concerned for the salvation of
their souls. The brethren say, " AYe fei^l that
we can now work to advantage, having a hold
upon the consciences of men."
Mr. Thompson, the only missionary stationed
at Sidon. reports favorablv of tiiat station.
In the 1 lerald, Mav, 1 854. he'says : " Our chapel
UnitedStates, after improved models furnished has not been closed for a single Sabbath dar-
by members of the mission. AYu have finished ing the year. Our Protestants carry their
printing during the year, a new edition of the ' faith and zeal wherever they go, and make
TABU— TAMLOOK.
743
very successful laborers among their country-
men. Our congregations are now fuller than
they ever were before, and the attention has
been marked and solemn." During the last
half of the year, the school in Sidon was quite
full. In many places around, there were im-
portant openings for schools, but there was a
want of competent teachers. Among the
places visited by Mr. Thompson was Tyre,
where he found many anxious to extricate
themselves from the yoke of the priesthood,
and form a Protestant community. The same
was true of Alma, a village higher up in the
•mountains, where an important individual had
become a Protestant, and had sustained him-
self against all opposition, though he was en-
tirely isolated, and had never seen an Ameri-
can missionary. He was led to embrace evan-
gelical sentiments, by the perusal of a single
book from the press at Beirut, which was
sent him by a friend. Acre was also found to
present a favorable opening, and a missionary
was much needed there. Tripoli is regarded
by the missionaries at that station, Messrs.
Wilson and Foot, as a promising field of labor,
— as much so as any in Syria, although the
congregation has hitherto been small, and the
school was last year broken up by the Greeks.
Besides the regular stations, there are four
out-stations, where considerable labor is per-
formed. These are B'hamdun, Bhawara, Kefr-
Shima, and Ibel.
The Syrian mission, as now constituted, em-
braces Beirut, Abeih, Hasbeiya, Sidon, Tripoli,
and Aleppo, with the out-stations. The mis-
sionary force employed consists of 11 mission-
aries, 1 physician, 1 printer, 13 female assistant
missionaries, 4 native preachers, and 1 native
helper. The state of the schools connected
with the mission is presented in the following
table :
_:
STATIONS.
«
1
7.
'p.
1
a;
1
5*
s
1
i 2
s 1
Beirut
1
1
25
17
2
5
7
80
139
140
10
33
40
90
172
180
9
Abeih
3
Hasbeiya and Sidon
4
Tripoli
1
10
o
T'
Alepijo
OUT-STATIONS.
1
30
25
Bhawara
1
1
25
20
Ibel
Totals
2
•25
17
20
369
85
554
9
Rev. E. D. Mooke.
TABU : A term used in the Sandwich
Islands, and other islands in the Pacific, to
denote a kind of religious interdiction, of very
powerful and extensive operation. "With places
and persons that were tabued, all intercourse
was prohibited. The term was also used to
indicate any thing sacred or devoted. There
were tabued or sacred days, when it M'as death
to be found in a canoe. Pork, bananas, cocoa-
nuts, and certain kinds of fish, were tabued to
women, and it was death for them to eat these
articles of food. Another tabu forbade men
and women eating together ; so that a man
must build an eating-house for himself and
another for his wife, and have separate ovens
for their food. Anything of which a man
made an idol, was tabu to him. If he made
his idol of the native apple tree, then the
apple tree was tabu to him. Birds, fowls,
beasts, fish, and stones, were objects of wor-
ship, and whoever made any of these his
god, they were tabu for him. So, too, of arti-
cles of food, which were employed as offerings
to idols ; they were afterwards tabu to the
offerer. If a king died, the whole district was
tabu, and his heir went to another.
TABLE MOUNTAIN : Station of the
American B.oard among the Zulus, in South
Africa, near Port Natal.
TABOO : A station of the American
Episcopal Board in West Africa, about 40
miles to the leeward of Cape Palmas.
TAHAA : One of the Society Islands, and
a station of the London Missionary Society.
TAHITI : The largest Island of the Geor-
gian Group, in the South Seas.
T ALUAF ATA : A station of the London
Missionary Society, on the Island of Upolu,
one of the Samoan grouji.
TALAPOINS : Priests or friars of the
Siamese, and other Eastern nations. They re-
side in convents, which are square enclosures,
in the centre of which stands a temple, and
round it the cells of the talapoiiis, like so many
tents in a camp. There are likewise female ta-
lapoins, who live under the same regulations as
the men, and in the same convents. They have
likewise ncns, or young talapoins, who wait on
the old ones, and receive their education from
them. Each convent is under the direction of
a superior, whom they call a sancrat. These
priests subsist wholly upon the sins and the liber-
ality of the people ; for they undergo a course
of penance for the iniquities of such as bestow
upon them their charitable benevolence. I'hey
are indulgent and hospitable to strangers ; and.
there are two lodges on each side of the en-
trance to their cells, which are wholly reserved
for the accommodation of their guests.' They are
under an indispensable obligation to live siuole ;.
and those who offend against chastity are subject
to be burnt at the stake. — Brougkton's Diet.
TAMAKTIA : A station of the Wesleyaa
Society in Kaffraria, South Africa.
TAMTAM : A large flat drum used by the-
Hindoos.
TAMLOOK : A town about 3.3 miles S.
W. from Calcutta, head-quarters of an agency-
for the government manufacture of salt, whicli
7U
TARTARY AND SIBERIA.
is prepared by filtration from the mud of the
Hooghly riter, and is esteemed of peculiar
value by the Ilindoos, as being extracted on
the banks of the holiest branch of the Gan-
ges. It is a station of the Society for the
Propagation of the Gospel.
TANAXART VO : The capital of Madagas-
car, former seat of the mission of the Lon-
don Missionary Society. It is situated in the
interior of the island, in the district of An-
kova, the most populous and salubrious part
of the country.
TAN GEN A : An ordeal administered in
Madagascar to determine the guilt or inno-
cence of a person suspected of witchcraft or
sorcery. The accused is first made to eat a
hearty meal of rice ; after which, three pieces
of the skin of a fowl, killed for the occasion,
are swallowed ; and then an emetic is admin-
istered, consisting of the tangena nut. If the
three pieces are returned from the stomach,
the party is declared innocent, and he is led
up by his friends to his village with much
pomp and ceremony. If the skin is not thrown
up, he is declared guilty, and immediately
despatched with a club, unless a slave, in
which case he is sent to some distant part of
the country and sold. They are, however,
sometimes thrown into the under-ground rice
granaries, and scalded to death with boiling
water. This ordeal is likewise often resorted
to when persons are accused of other offences,
as a trial of guilt or innocence. It is some-
times administered to large numbers at the
same time. It forms one of the most cruel
and destructive of the heathen superstitions.
A similar ordeal, though varying in form, is in
u.se generally among the different tribes of
West Africa.
T-(VNN A : An island of the New Hebrides
Group, on which is a station of the London
Missionary Society.
TAOUISTS : A religious sect among the
Chinese. (See China.)
TAPUNA : A station of the Church Mis-
sionary Society in the Bay of Islands, New-
Zealand.
TAQUOIIEE : An Indian town among
the Cherokees in the Indian Territory ; a sta-
tion of the Cherokee mission of the American
Baptist Union.
TARTARY AND SIBERIA: Tartary
is the name given to that immense region ex-
tending almost entirely across Asia from the
Caspian Sea to the Eastern Ocean ; but the
.name is only partially recognized within these
limits. Many parts of it are bordered and
even pervaded by chains of mountains ; and
large cities, cultivated spots, and fi.xed socie-
ties, here and there occur. It contains also
sandy dc>erts of considerable extent. Still,
the predominant characteristic is that of im-
mense plains or stc])pe,«, covered with herbage
more or loss al)undant, and occupied by wan-
.deriug and pastoral tribes, whose camps, like
moving cities, pass continually to and fro ovor
its surface. The extensive chain of the Altai
mountains separates the whole of Mongolia or
Eastern Tartary, from Siberia, and another
long chain divides it from Thibet. There is
also a transverse range of mountains, called the
Beloor or Bolor mountains, connecting the
western extremities of these two boundary
chains together, of a peculiarly lofty and rug-
ged character, and affording only two narrow
and difficult passes by which to penetrate into
Eastern Tartary or Mongolia. A considera-
ble number of rivers, descending from these
high mountain ranges, traverse the great up-
land plain of Independent Tartary, but unable,
across so many barriers, to reacli any of the
surrounding oceans, they expand into large
interior salt lakes, two of which, the Caspian
and Aral, are entitled by their magnitude to
the appellation of seas. The irrigation pro-
duced by those seas breaks the continuity of
the desert, and on their banks are situated the
most fertile and populous tracts, and the most
powerful states of Western Tartary.
Bokhara, or Bucharia, is an extensive table
land, very imperfectly explored, Init, according
to Humboldt, much more fertile than the rest
of Tartary. The cotton, the vine, and the
mulberry are, in many parts, cultivated. It
has also valualjle mines of precious stones.
The other more northerly table land of Tar-
tary, Mongolia, is much more bleak and un-
congenial. It yields in its best tracts only
pasturage, and includes large expanses of sandy
and saline deserts.
But that portion usually called Russian
Tartary is almost the only spot, on this widely-
extended tract, that has been the scene of mis-
sionary labor. It is situated between the Cas-
pian and Black Seas, and appears to hold out
the advantages of a genial climate, and a tho-
roughfare between more populous countries,
which render it desirable as a field of mission-
ary operations.
The province of Orenburgh forms the link
between European and Asiatic Russia. Tar-
tars compose its chief population ; but many
of them nave been trained to regular and in-
dustrious habits by the Russians, in their
mines and other works. The country is capa-
ble of every kind of culture, but is mostly
covered with rich pastures.
To the south of the lofty range of the Cau-
casian mountains is Georgia, a region pro-
fusely gifted both with richness and beauty.
It is fortiiizod l)y numerous mountain streams,
and clothed with magnificent forests of beech,
ash, chestnut, oak, and pine ; while the ground
is covered with vines, growing wild, in vast
profusion. In this ])rovince are Toflis and
Shusha, each having been, at difTorcnt times,
missionary stations. 'J'his country has been
the seat of continual wars and commotions,
and was, a)»out two centuries ago, wrested
from Persia by Russia. Its population, roduc-
TARTARY AND SIBERIA.
745
ed by war and other causes, does not much
exceed 300,000.
The most northern regions of Asia present
an almost unbounded expanse of frozen forest
desert. Some of the plains of the southern
borders of Siberia are covered with pastures ;
but, as we proceed to the northern boundaries
of the bleak shores of the frozen ocean, human
life, with the means of its support, becomes more
and more deficient. But those regions abound
in animals producing the richest furs ; and the nu-
merous rivers furnish abundance of fish, which
form the principal part of the food of the
scanty, wandering tribes ; and all the western
dii^tricts of ^^iatic Russia, which border on the
Ural mountains, contain valuable mines of
gold, silver, copper, and precious stones.
Seliuginsk, whicli for twenty years was a
station of the London Missionary Society, for
the Tartars of the Buriat-Mongolian race, js a
small town on the frontiers of Siberia and Chi-
nese Tartary, south-east of Lake Baikal, and
was built by the Russians, to facilitate their
route up the river Selinga, as far as Kiachta,
on the Chinese frontier. All the towns of Si-
beria are chiefly of Russian origin, and are
built to facilitate trade and the collection of
revenue. The native inhabitants of these
thinly peopled and desolate regions prefer liv-
ing a rude and wandering life in tents or mov-
able huts.
The two leading races among the various
tribes inhabiting this immense region, are the
Mongols and Turks. The first have complex-
ions of a dark yellow tint, broad, square, flat
faces, thick lips, and small eyes inclining down-
wards, aud scanty hair. The Turks are a much
handsomer people, with a rich profusion of
hair, broad foreheads, and clear ruddy com-
plexions. The Circassian females are famed
for their great beauty, fine forms, and delicate
complexion. The daughters of all above the
rank of slaves are exempt from degrading or
oppressive labor, and occupy themselves in
sewing, embroidery, or plaiting straw. The
face is carefully shaded from the sun, their feet
are protected by a wooden shoe, and their
hands by gloves. Their food consists chiefly
of milk aud pastry. But their condition is a
sad one ; for their parents invariably sell their
daughters to the highest bidder. Georgia, and
still more Circassia, have been distinguished
for the athletic strength of their men, and the
beauty of their women, and hence they have
been in great request as domestic slaves all
over the Turkish empire.
The Tartars do not, like the shepherds of a
civilized country, lead their flocks through re-
mote aud sequestered valleys, and spend their
time m peaceful seclusion. They move from
place to place, usually in large bodies, for war
or plunder. Their government has a strong
tendency towards despotism, which is increased
by the superstition incident to a barbarous
people, whose creeds are accommodated to a
system of absolute power. Under the charac-
ter of Mohammedan muUohs, or Budhist lamas,
many of the princes of Asia both preach and
rule. In Bokhara, the former sovereign raised
himself from a low rank " to that high station,
solely by his eminence as a mulloh, or Moham-
medan doctor, and by his rigid observance of
the austerities enjoined in that religion. In
those parts of Tartary where Mohammedan-
ism prevails, the Koran is enforced, not only
as a sacred, but as a civil code. According
to its rules, justice is administered and the
revenue collected ; and conformably to its pre-
cepts, a tenth part of the revenue is bestowed
in alms.
Nearly the whole territory of Mount Cau-
casus, and the country north and west of the
Caspian Sea, own the sovereignty of Russia.
On the borders of Persia, where the Russians
must court the natives as their allies against
that power, they arc obliged to allow the Tar-
tars the unrestrained exercise of their national
propensities. The vast plains on every side of
Asti'achan are continually traversed by Cal-
mucks, Nogays, Kubans, and other Tartar
tribes, whose internal aifairs are administered
by khans or rulers, who collect and transmit
such scanty tribute as can be drawn from the
flocks and herds of their vassals. It is only in
the more northern provinces of Oufa and Oren-
berg, where cities with a civilized population
and extensive mining establishments have been
formed, that Russia has been able to mould
the people into that uniform subjection which
prevails in other parts of her European and
Asiatic territory.
In the mountainous regions of Circassia and
Caucasus, the distinctions of birth aud rank
are observed with all the strictness of highland
pride. Under the prince are the nobles, who
exercise almost absolute sway over their vas-
sals. These are of two kinds, the bondsmen,
who cultivate the soil, and the armed retainers,
who attend the nobles to the field, either for
war or for prey. The life led by the nobles is
one constant round of war and feasting, hunt-
ing and jollity. On state occasions, they are
attired in splendid robes, while their food and
furniture are of the most plain and homely de-
scription. Their drink is a fermented liquor
caWtii koumiss, made from mare's milk, of which
they are very fond. It supjolies the place of
wine, which is prohibited by the Koran. All
Tartar tribes are addicted to habits of plun-
der ; and if a stranger enters their territory,
except under the protection of one of their
chiefs, he is sure to be enslaved. The Russians
have never yet been able to subdue the Cir-
cassians. The most she can do is to hold mil-
itary occupation of the leading positions.
The kingdoms of Kiva and Bokhara form a
kind of oases in the midst of the vast deserts of
Turcomani, which is the name given to this
whole region as far 'as the Caspian and the
Aral.
746
TARTARY AND SIBERIA.
The population of Tartary, including Mon-
golia and Manchuria, is estimated at about
20,000,000. I'he immense region of Siberia
embraces 5,000,000 square miles, and is com-
puted to contain rather more than 5,000,000
inhabitants. This scanty population consists
of two distinct portions, the foreign rulers, and
the native tribes. The Russian inhabitants
are composed of the unfortunate exiles, who
are banished to those desolate wilds for some
real or fancied offence against the State, the
convicts, who work in the mines, and the offi-
cers stationed at the different Russian towns
throughout Siberia, to collect the furs and
skins, as tribute or tax to the emperor. There
are likewise the dignitaries of the church and
the inferior clergy connected with the estab-
lishment.' Each of the four large provinces,
Tobolsk, Tomsk, Irkutsk, and OkkotsJv, has
its archbishop and patriarch, who reside en-
tirely in the towns. Of the native Siberian
races, those which occupy the whole of the
southern frontier are of Tartar origin ; and
until conquered by Russia, they held supreme
sway in Siberia. The people iuhaljiting the
southern and eastern shores of Lake Baikal
are the Buriats, a division of the Mongolians.
The authority of Russia has suppressed the
system of plunder which used to prevail among
these people. The Samoyedes and Tungusi
races inhabit the northern coasts, and these
are unlike the Tartars, both in their persons
and habits. They lead a wandering life, their
sole employment being hunting and fishing.
Their dress*^is composecl chiefly of skins.
Religion. — All the eastern regions of Tar-
tary acknowledge the supremacy of the Grand
Lama, and hold the Shaman doctrine, which is
a modification of Budhism. The nations in-
habiting Western and Independent Tartary
are devoted to the Mussulman creed. Under
tlie Budhist system of religion, the various
little tribes of eastern Asia have minor lamas,
who hold a mixed temporal ands))iritual juris-
diction over the people, and in Tartary this
form of idolatry seems combined with magic
and sorcery, and many similar modes of terri-
fying and deluding the ignorant wanderers of
the desert.
Burchan is the name of the Calmuc idols,
and most of their gods are supposed to have
been spiritual beings, who, after jiassing through
all the dillerent degrcesof transmigration, have
at last raised themselves to the dignity of the
godhead, by great deeds and extreme suflerings.
The inhabitants of the Tartar villages near
Astraehan are Mohammedans, and there are
also many Persians, professing the same faith,
residing in this country, f(ir trade.
Tlial race of Mongolian Tartars called Bu-
rials, inhabiting the southern shores of Lake
Baikal, as far as the Chinese frontier, arc wor-
bliipers of the Grand Lama ; but they have
numerous other objects of worship. Their
worship abounds in burdensome and disagree-
able ceremonies, but is accompanied with no
sanguinary rites. A portion of the people pro-
fess Shamanism, which is supposed to be the
most ancient religion of the country.
MISSIONS.
United Brethren. — In 17G5, five Brethren
from Hernhutt in Silesia, were appointed to
undertake a mission to the wandering Tartar
tribes in Asiatic Russia, and settled at Sarep-
ta, not far from Georgeisk, one of the chief
Russian towns, between the Caspian and Black
Seas, on the road from St. Petersburg to Per-
sia. They ransomed some of the Tartars from
slavery, and preached the Gospel to all whose
attention they could gain, conforming, in some
respects, to the Tartar mode of life. They
translated the Gospel and several tracts into
Calmuc. They met with very little success,
till 1815, when a little flock of Calmuc Tar-
tars came out from among their heathen coun
trymen, and joined their congregation. In
1823, their congregation had increased to 300.
About this time, the emperor refused to grant
them permission to baptize their converts, 22
in number, under an old law which forbids the
conversion and baptism of the heathen, unless
it be done by the Russian Greek clergy ! But
the Emperor Alexander gave them permission
to preach and distribute the Scriptures. Very
valuable assistance was at this time rendered
not only to the Moravian mission, but also to the
Scotch and London Society's missions, by the
Russian Bible Society, whose interests the Em-
peror and the pious (ialatzin warmly promoted.
This society was at the expense of printing the
Scriptures in modern Russ, Mongolian, and a
portion of them in Turkish Tartar, after they
had been translated into these languages by the
missionaries of these societies.
Scottish Missionary Society. — This society
commenced a mission in 1802, at Karsass, in
Asiatic Russia. They obtained from the Rus-
sian Government, a grant of land consisting ot
14,000 acres, with certain immunities attached,
and they seem to have obtained greater privi-
leges than the Moravians, for liberty was given
to their converts to " embrace the religion of
the colony, and become members of it." They
also had the privilege of giving passports to
the members of their congregation to settle in
other parts of the empire. In conseciuence of
these privileges, probably, the Scotch mission-
ary settlement continued in existence longer
than any other missionary establishment in
Tartary. Native youths, slaves to the Circas-
sians and Cuban Tartars, were redeemed hy the
Scotch missionaries and placed in schools,
where they acfjuircd the Turkisli and English
languages, the principles of Christianity, and
several useful arts. In 1805, a ])rinting-press
was sent out to Karass, and the New Testa-
ment was printed in Turkish, and tracts in the
Tartar language. In 1814, they extended their
missionary eflbrts to Astraehan and Orenberg;
TARTARY AND SIBERIA.
747
and at the former place, another printing-press
•was established, which printed the Tartar New
Testament and other books, which were carried
into Persia by the numerous merchants trading
from that country with Russia. One of their
Tartar converts, nafhed John Abercrombie,
was for many years printer to the London Mis-
sionary Society at Selinginsk. In 1817 they
issued 4000 tracts and 5000 Testaments.
These found their way, by means of Mohamme-
dan merchants and pilgrims, and even Brah-
mins and Jews, to Bagdad, Persia, Bokhara,
and even to China. A Tartar prince of the
Crimea, called the Sultan of Katagherry, ap-
pears to have been the first fruits of their mis-
sionary labor. Walter Buchanan, a Circas-
sian, was the next. He ihithfully served the
Scottish or Edinbin-gh Society, for many years,
at Orenburgh, in Russian Tartary.
In 1822, the Scotch colony was joined by
several German missionaries, sent out by the
Basle Institution, some of whom settled in
Tartary, and others proceeded to Teflis and
Shusha, in Georgia, to labor among the Arme-
nians.
In 1823, Mirza Mohammed Ali, son of a
Mohammedan judge, was employed by the mis-
sionaries at Astrachan, as a teacher ; and in
consequence of the discussions which he had
with the missionaries, his faith in Moham-
medanism was shaken ; and, after a short time,
in the face of the opposition of friends, he cor-
dially embraced Christianity. The Greek arch-
bishop proposed that he should be admitted
into that church by baptism ; but he wrote a
petition to the Emperor Alexander, through
Prince Galatzin, asking to be allowed to re-
ceive baptism from those who had been the
instruments of his conversion, which request
was instantly granted. He was, therefore, ad-
mitted to the church, in the presence of Greeks
and Turks, Persians and Frenchmen, Germans
and Armenians, the service being in English,
Turkish, and Persian. But he was afterwards
treated with great harshness by the Russian
government of the Caucasus, being compelled,
in 1825, to enter the Russian service, and or-
dered to refrain from interfering or coopera-
ting in any missionary work. In consequence
of this and other restrictions imposed npon
them by the Russian government, both the
Scotch and the ISloravian Missionary Societies
relinquished their missions, though with the
greatest regret ; but the settlement at Karass
continued to be occupied several years longer.
A great revolution also took place about this
time in Russia with regard to the Bible Society.
Thi^institution, under the fostering care of
the Emperor Alexander, had pursued a distin-
guished career, and promised to supply the
Word of Life not only to the Russian popula-
tion, but to the heathen and Mohammedans.
A powerful opposition, however, was raised
against it in 1825, the year that Alexander
died ; in consequence of which. Prince Galat-
zin retired from office, and resigned his station as
Minister of Religion. Its secretary, M. Papoff,
was put upon his trial in the criminal court, for
allowing a book to be published, in which were
some reflections considered unfavorable to the
doctrine of the Greek church, in relation to the
Virgin Mary ! It had been intended that the
missionaries at Astrachan should be employed
by the Bible Society to print a new and correct
edition of Henry Martyn's Persian New Tes-
tament, and the types had been ordered from St.
Petersburgh ; but this work was now stopped,
and the missionaries were told that their Tar-
tar version of the Old Testament would have
to be submitted to three archbishops of the
Greek church ; so that, when they had com-
pleted the translation, it was doubtful whether
it would bo allowed to be published. All these
causes, together with the growing indifference
of the native tribes, combined to cause the
Scotch and United Brethren's Societies to
withdraw their missionaries in 1825.
London Missionary S(x;iety. — This society
undertook a mission to Selinginsk, in Siberia,
in 1819. When the missionaries had finished
the translation of the Gospel of Matthew, the
first printed edition was sent to the governor
of Irkutsk, to distribute among the Tartars on
the shores of Lake Baikal ; but the Calmnc
Tartar character being different from that
which the Buriat tribes had retained, the books
M'cre not generally understood by these people.
But two of their nobles were found who could
decipher the character, and were able to read
and explain its contents. This so astonished
the Buriat chiefs and the head lama, that each,
among his own people, made a collection
amounting to £550, which they sent to the
Russian Bible Society, begging to have the
Gospel of Matthew, and, if possible, other
books of the New Testament, translated into
their own dialect, and printed in a character
which they could read. The two Buriat nobles
who had interpreted the former edition, were
sent for, and repaired to St. Petersburgh to
undertake the work. As they proceeded with
their work, they became deeply interested, and
frequently came to Rev. Mr. Schmidt to in-
quire the meaning of passages. When they
had completed the 23d chapter of Matthew,
they came to him, and declared that they had
resolved to renounce their former superstitions,
and embrace the Christian faith. lie warned
them of the trials they would have to encoun-
ter, but they replied : " It is our firm determi-
nation to be followers of Jesus, and to share
in his reproach, if that be our lot ; though we
hope that such trials may not befall us soon, on
account of our weakness in the faith." One of
them died at Sarepta, in October, 1822.
In 1838, the mission is thus mentioned in
the Society's report : " Shagdur and Tekshee,
two of the native converts, conduct the daily
Mongolian worship with much propriety, dur-
ing Mr. Stallybross's visit to England. The
us
TASMANIA.
girls' school at Khoclon makes satisfactory
progress. The boys are ten in number. At
Ona, Mr. Swan is snrroundcd by a number of
Bariat youth, who have been brought under
the influence of religion, and whose chief de-
sire is to impart to their countrymen the bless-
ings they so highly prize." The whole of the
Old Testament was translated into Mongolian,
and printed ; and some of the Gospels had
been printed and circulated.
But, in 1841, the mission was suppressed by
an order from the Russian Synod, the reason
given being, " that the mission, in relation to
that form of Christianity already established
in the Russian empire, did not coincide with
the views of the church and the government."
The missionaries wrote, concerning the aban-
donment of this mission : " It is painful to bid
adieu to the scenes where we have spent so
many years, and to the people of whom, we
trust, the first fruits have been gathered unto
Christ. They are living evidences that we
have not labored in vain, and earnests of the
abundant harvests #o be expected when the
word of God shall have free course, and be
glorified in this land. — Missionary Guide Boole.
We may judge, from these examples, what
will be the fate of our missions in Turkey,
should Russia succeed in her present crusade.
TASMANIA, or VAN DIEMAN'S
LAND : An island, lying at the southern
cxtremitv of New Holland, between 40° 42'
and4.3o43' S. lat. ; and 145° .31' and 148°
22' E. long., reckoned to contain 27,192
square miles. In general it is composed of al-
ternate hill and dale, and even the high downs
are generally fit for cultivation and pasture.
The chief lines, both of mountain and river,
run from north to south, through the eastern
part of the colony. Talilc Mountain, the
most elevated hill in the island, nearly over-
hangs the southern settlement of Ilobart
Town, rising to the height of 3.936 feet. Al-
though the country is productive, and but a
small portion of it is occupied by British co-
lonists, the aboriginal inhabitants have en-
tirely disappeared. In consequence of the in-
ces.sant nuitual hostility which sul)sisted be-
tween them and the colonists, the whole of
them were hunted out, and removed in the
year 183.5, to Flinder's Island, in Bass's Straits,
where the miserable remnant still reside. They
numbered 210, but in 1842, were reduced to
54. There had been only 14 children born in
8 years.
MISSION.
Wesleyan Missionary Society. — 'J'he
Wosleyan Missionary Society began opera-
tions in Tasmania in the year 1820, at a time
when there was but one minister of any per-
suasion in the whole island. That )'ear the
committee in London direct(<d Mr. Carrosso
to ]iroceed from New South AN'nles and com-
mence a mission there ; but he failing to reach
the island, and iMr. Hortou being then on hi3
way to New South Wales, was directed to re-
main in Tasmania. At that period the state
of society in the island was most deplorable.
The aboriginal inhabitants, greatly reduced in
number, wandered about-in wretchedness, con-
stantly exposed to the hostility of the white
settlers. The white population, made up of
convicts and settlers, then amounted to about
8,000 persons. And on Mr. Horton's commenc-
ing his efforts, he thus describes the moral
condition of the place where he was appoint-
ed to labor : " Adultery and drunkenness,
and blasphemy arc sins which prevail to an
awful extent among all classes, associated
with idleness, dishonesty, malice, quarreling,
and misery. Almost every tongue has learned
to swear, and among the lower classes every
hand to steal. The houses are surrounded by
fierce dogs, to guard them against nocturnal
depredations ; and yet when thieves are de-
tected in the act of plundering, they seldom
resist, but scamper off as fast as they can.
Indeed a vigilant and active police prevents
the frequent perpetration of very daring deeds
of outrage. Before we arrived, there was
only one Protestant minister, a clergyman of
the established church, whose labors were al-
most wholly confined to Hobart Town, and one
Catholic priest, who had been but a few months
in the colony. The out-settlements were there-
fore left without the public ordinances of reli-
gion. Thus Satan enjoyed an undisturbed
reign. When we landed in this country, we
were not a little surprised and pleased to find
a "NVesleyan Methodist Society already formed,
and a chapel in a state of preparation. There
are about 20 who very regularly attend class,
and appear to be sincere inquirers ; some of
whom have found peace with God."
The mission was soon strengthened by ano-
ther missionary. The missionaries received
every encouragement from the governor of the
colony, who showed himself laudably anxious
for the moral benefit of all classes of the popu-
lation. In 1627 he applied to the committee
for two more missionaries to be sent out ; their
passage, together with an annual allowance
toward their support, having been voted from
the public funds.
But the labor in such a mission field as Tas-
mania is one of no ordinary difficulty, especi-
ally that portion of it employed among the
convicts. These unhappy creatures, while suf-
fering the punishment of their crimes, retain
the vicious habits and daring disregard of the
laws of God and man, which have been the
occasion of their banishment to those distant
lands. And yet among these children of (♦imc
and sorrow the missionaries have labored with
very considerable success. One of them gives
it as his opinion, that out of 50 criminals exe-
cuted within six years, many of them had been
snatched " as brands from the burning," and
shared with " the dying thief in the kingdom
TATT ^OING— TENASSERIM.
U9
of a compassionate Saviour. The missionaries
gave what attention they could to schools, for
the education of the young ; but they had to be
held in the evening, and to be taught, at least
in part, by the more educated criminals. The
prisoners generally seem to have entertained
toward the missionaries feefmgs of respect and
affection. This may be partly accounted for
from the fact, that usually the only words of
kindness which cheered their bitter lot, fell
from the lips of these men of God. In 1832,
the government requested the appointment of
an additional missionary for the new penal set-
tlement of Port Arthur, and the Eev. Mr.
Butters was sent out to supply that post. At
this period the number of members had risen
to 103, and 283 children were in the schools.
Many of these had been among the most
guilty and abandoned of mankind. Many
even of the scholars had already been trained
and graduated at the school of vice, and had
arrived at early maturity in depravity and
guilt. In this class of men the colonial gov-
ernment had found it necessary to make dis-
tinctions ; the most hardened and incorrigible
being separated from the rest, and j^laced
under severe discipline in the penal settlements
or condemned stations in Tasmania. Among
those thus " twice dead," the Wesleyan mis-
sionaries wore appointed to labor ; and such
were the results of the Gospel over the hearts
and conduct of many of these outcasts, that
successive governors of this colony have grate-
fully acknowledged the importance of the ser-
vices rendered by the missionaries. In 1837,
four additional missionaries were sent out to ex-
tend its operations. The mission was farther
enlarged in 1839, when the statistics stood
thus : 9 missionaries ; 570 church members,
and 922 scholars. The Rev. John Water-
house became central superintendent of the
missions in Australia and Polynesia, in 1839.
In the discharge of his official duties he per-
formed long and perilous journeys, both by
sea and land, while visiting the various stations
under his care. On one of these journeys in
Tasmania ho was much exposed to heavy
rains, the result of which was a protracted ill-
ness, which at length ended his valuable life.
The excellent financial measures which he and
others introduced into these missions have re-
lieved the missionary society from the respon-
sibility of their maintenance and now this por-
tion of the mission field has become nearly,
if not quite, self-supporting.
The gold discoveries in Australia have ra-
ther retarded the prosperity of this mission dur-
ing the past three years. An extensive emi-
gration took place, which affected every circuit
more or less. Yet, under all these disadvan-
tages, the district has sustained itself during
the past year by the help of its own contingent
fund ; the missionaries in general report very
favorably of the spiritual state of the mem-
bers who have remained at home, and encour-
age themselves with the hope of future im-
provement.— Eev. W. Butlek.
TABULAR
VIEW.
-3 S
1 =
1
r,
£
CE.\TK.\L
rt a
V
a
OR PRINCIPAL
STATIONS
"3 S'C
a
c8
.a
cj
OR CIRCUITS.
a' J
^"
Cm
pd
S
O rt
J3 .2
a
"
P^
S^
0) o
•^^
^
d
rn
S
Hobart-Town...
n
41
10
351
."ifil
1.500
New Norfolk...
2
10
23
124
250
Carapbell-Town.
3
6
2
37
55
250
Launceston
r,
2
38
5
194
306
1100
Longford
6
12
5
72
65
4.50
Westbury
4
4
47
42
300
Oatlands
7
1
3
2
26
6
150
Totals
39
6
3
114
24
750
1159J4000
TATTOOING : A process of marking the
human body with various figures, by stained
lines, practiced by the natives of the Pacific
islands before the introduction of Christianity
among them, and still practiced by the pagan
tribes. Until a j'oung man is tattooed, he is
considered in his minority. He need not
think of marriage, and he is constantly ex-
posed to taunts and ridicule, as being poor and
of low birth, and as having no right to. speak
in the society of men. But as soon as he is
tattooed, he passes into his majority, and con-
siders himself entitled to the respect and pri-
vileges of mature years. When a youth,
therefore, reaches the age of sixteen, he and
his friends are all anxiety that he should be
tattooed. He is then on the out-look for the
tattooing of some neighboring chief, with
whom he may unite. On these occasions, six
or a dozen young men may be tattooed at one
time ; and for these there may be four or five
tattooers employed. Tattooing is a regular
profession, just as house-building, and well
paid. (See New-Zealmul, p. 569.)
TAUTIRA : A station of the London Mis-
sionarv Society on Tahiti, South Sea.
TAURANGA : A station of the Church
Missionary Society in New-Zealand, on the
Bay of Plenty.
TAVOY : A province and a city in Bur-
mah annexed to the possessions of the East
India Company by the treaty of Yaudaboo
in 1826. The city is the seat of a mission of
the American Baptist Union. The entire dis-
trict has been brought in some degree under
the influence of its operations.
TELLTCHERRY : A station of the Basle
Missionary Society, on the Malabar coast, in
the western part of Southern Hindostan, 126
miles from Seringapatam.
TELOOGOO : A station of the Church
Missionary Society in Southern India, on the
eastern coast, and some distance north of
TENASSERIM: The name of a large
ToO
TERNATE-TREBIZOND.
river io Burmali, and also applied to the three
provinces of Maulmain, Tavoy, and Mergai,
annexed to the territory of the British East
India Company by the treaty of Yaudaboo in
1626.
TERN ATE : One of the Molucca Islands,
in the Indian Archipelago.
TIIABA BASSIOU: A station of the
French Protestants in South Africa, on a
branch of the river Kaledon.
TIIEOPOLIS : A station of the London
Missionary Society in South Africa, 550 miles
east of Cape Town.
THESSALOXICA, rcalled by tho_ Turks
Selanik, and by the French Salonica) is situated
at the head of the gulf of Salonica (ancient
Sinus Thermaicus) a branch of the iEgean Sea.
It is about 175 miles north of Athens and 300
west of Constantinople. It is, as in Paul's day,
the chief city of Macedonia, being its main
Bca-port, and next to Constantinople, the chief
port of European Turkey. It has a population
of G0,000 or 70,000, of whom perhaps 15,000
are Turks, 15,000 Greeks, 30,000 Jews (in-
cluding 5,000 Mohammedan Jews), and a few
thousand Bulgarians, Wallachians, Albanians,
&c. &c.
in 1849, the A. B. C. F. M. established a
mission among the Jews of this city. It con-
sisted at first of Messrs. Maynard and Dodd,
with their wives, of whom the former died in
a few months, and his widow returned to this
country. Mr. and Mrs. Dodd were subse-
quently joined by Messrs. Parsons and Morgan
with their wives. Mrs. ■\torgan also died in a
few months and Mr. Morgan afterwards mar-
ried Mrs. Sutphen, widow of a missionary.
The members of the mission suffered much
from sickness, especially from fever and ague,
which is prevalent in Macedonia ; and at the
present (July 1854) they are all absent from
their stations : Messrs. Parsons and Morgan in
Smyrna, laboring among the Jews there, and
Mr. Dodd in America, expecting to return
soon.
It is hoped that hereafter both stations
may be occupied, and that in Thcssalonica a
more favorable residence may be secured, and
bettor health enjoyed.
Thcssalonica is the most important literary
centre of the Jews in the east, and a foothold
there gained will be valuable. The Jews there
are peculiarly sociable and accessible to mis-
sionary influence. The missionaries have met
with encouragement in their work. There
have been a few cases of hopeful conversion
among Jews and Mussulmans. Many others
seem convinced, intellectually, of the truth,
though yet unrenewed, and of a still larger
circle the prejudices are broken ; their i>stecm,
and sometimes affection, is won, and tlicy lie
open to the influence of the truth. The field
is hopeful.— Rev. E. M. Dodd.
'i'llUGS : (See Hindostan, Dr. Scudder's
Letter.)
TIAREI : A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society on Tahiti, South Sea.
TIDMAXTOX : Out-station to Kat River
station, of the London Missionary Society in
South Africa, formerly Blinkwater.
TIDOR : One of the Molucca Islands, in
the Indian Archipdago.
TILLIPALLY : A station of the Ameri-
can Board in Ceylon, about 10 miles north of
Jaflfnapatam.
TIMOR : A group of the Molucca Islands
iu the Indian Archipelago.
^IMORLAUT : One of the Banda Islands,
a group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi-
pelago.
TIXX'EYELLY : A district in the South-
ern Carnatic, South India, and an important
field of missionary operations.
TIRUMUXGALUM : A station of the
Am. Board, about 12 miles S. W. of Madura,
in Southern Hindostan, and belonging to that
mission.
TIRUPOOYANUM : A station of the
Am. Board, in Southern Hindostan, 8 or 10
miles S. E. of Madura, and belonging to that
mission.
TOBAGO : (See West Indies.)
TOKA : One of the Xew Hebrides, where
is a station of the London Missionary So-
ciety.
TOXGATABOO : One of the Friendly
Islands, a station of the "Wcsleyan Society.
TOUNGOO : A large city in Southern
Burmah, 100 miles above Shwaygyeen on the
Sitang river. It is in territory which was
annexed to British Burmah in 1852, and is the
seat of a mission for both Burmans and Ka-
rens, of the Am. Baptist Union.
TRAXQUEBAR: A settlement formed
by the Danes, on the Coromandel coast, in
1G16. It is 145 miles S. by AV. from Madras.
The town, and a small adjoining territory,
were ceded to the Danish crown in 1G21, on
payment of an aimual tribute of 2,000 crowns
to the rajah of Tanjore. The Danish govern-
ment have recently relinquished Tranquebar ;
and the British collector has removed there
from Negapatam. This was the scene of the
early Danish missions in India. The mission
is now supported by the Lutheran Missionary
Society at J)resden.
TRAVAXCORE : The southern extremity
of Hindostan, between 10'^ and 11° X". lat.
It is about 140 miles in length, by 40, the ave-
rage breadth. The population is not far from
1,000,000. The princii)al part of the popula-
tion consists of Brahmins and X'airs : thero
arc also many Mohammedans. The missions
in Travancore are those of the London Society,
the Church Society, and the Church of Scot-
lands mission to the Jews.
TREBIZOXD : A station of the American
Board, situated near the south-eastern extre-
mity of the Black Sea, and supposed to be the
precise spot where Xenophon, with his retreat-
TREVANDERAlil-^TURKEY.
751
ing army, first touched the sea. It has about
15,000 inhabitants, 1,250 of whom are Arme-
nians. Its chief importance as a missionary
station, arises from the fact of its being the
principal sea-port of ancient Armenia, and its
consequent influence over the proper country
of the Armenian race.
TREVANDERAM : A station of the Lon-
don Missionary Society, in the Travancore dis-
trict, Southern India, near Cape Comorin.
TRICHONOPOLY : A large fortified town,
capital of a district of the same name, situated
on the Cavery, 186 miles south-west of Madras.
Population, exclusive of troops, estimated at
74,000. Society for the Propagation of the
Gospel.
TRICHOOR : A large town 50 miles north
of Cochin, a station of the Church Missionary
Society.
TRINCOMALEE : A town on the N. E.
coast of Ceylon, 150 miles N. E. of Colombo,
having one of the finest harbors in the world.
A station of the Wesleyan Society.
TRINIDAD : (See West Indies.)
TSHICKSOO: A Karen village in the
district of Tavoy, in Burmah, and an out-sta-
tion of the Tavoy mission of the American
Baptist Union.
TUBUAI : One of the Austral Islands, and
a station of the London Missionary Society.
TULBAGH : Station of the London Mis-
sionary Society in South Africa, 75 miles
north-east of Cape Town. Also of the Rhen-
ish Society.
TURANGA: A station of the Church
Missionary Society in New-Zealand, situated
on Poverty Bay.
TURKEY : The dominion of the Grand
Turk, or Sultan, extends over territory situated
in Asia, Africa, and Europe, and lying be-
tween the 20th and 45th degrees of north
latitude, the 10th and 47th of east longitude.
The countries composing this empire are, for
the most part, rich in natural resources, and
have been the seats of mighty empires and re-
publics, which at various times have exercised
a controlling influence on the world's history.
The entire territory covers a surface of about
210,000 square miles, including the tributary
provinces of Moldavia, Wallachia, Servia,
Egypt, Tripoli and Tunis.
Turkey in Europe, by nature formed to be
the garden of the world, has become a wilder-
ness, from the devastations of war and the op-
pressions of government. It is bounded on
the east by the Black Sea, the Bosphorus, and
the Sea of Marmora ; on the south by the
Dardanelles and Archipelago. The climate
is, for the most part, temperate ; the surface of
the country is varied with mountains and well-
watered plains. The unusually large extent of
sea-coast, and the number of good harbors,
afibrd every facility for commercial operations.
The Danube carries steam navigation into the
neart of the country. Constantinople, or
Istamboul, including its suburbs, is situated
upon both sides of the channel which separates
Europe from Asia, numbers about 1,000,000
inhabitants, and commands the Euxine and
the Levant. Turkey might long ago hitre
shared the fate of Poland, had the powers of
Europe dared to deliver Constantinople, the
key city, into the hands of any one of their
number. Moldavia, Wallachia, and Servia
are tributary principalities, over which the
Sultan has now but little power.
Turkey in Asia includes the countries be-
tween the Sea of Marmora, the Euxine, and
Russian Asia, on the north, and Arabia on
the south ; between Russian Asia and Persia
on the east, and the Mediterranean and Archi-
pelago on the west. Within its boundaries lie
the iloly City, the ancient seats of power, and
fountain-heads of learning, and Turkistan,
from whence came the savage tribe who have
given their name to a great empire, and iden-
tified it with the faith of Mohammed. Many
wealthy and thriving cities exist among
the old ruins, supported by the Asiatic com-
merce which passes to Europe through these
countries. Among these are Brusa, Symrna,
Trebizond, Erzrum, Bagdad, Tripoli, Damas-
cus. Manufactures of steel and cloths are car-
ried on prosperously in several towns.
Turkey in Africa consists of the tributary
countries of Egypt, Tunis, and Tripoli. The
universal prevalence of Mohammedanism in
these countries tends to preserve the political
union with Turkey, the stronghold of their
faith.
Population. — By the table annexed, it will
be seen that, in European Turkey the Moham-
medans, although the dominant race, do not
constitute a third part of the population.
They hold the fortresses and important towns,
but Greeks, Bulgarians, Armenians, &c., form
the mass of the population. The European
Turks preserve their original character of a
military colony :
EUROPEAN TURKEY (rUMELIA.)
Thrace 1,800,000
Bulgaria 4,000,000
Moldavia 1,400,000
Wallachia 2,600,000
Bosnia and Hertegowina 1,400,000
Rumelia 2,600,000
Servia 1,000,000
Islands of the Archipelago 700,000
15,500,000
ASIATIC TURKEY (aNADOLU.)
Asia Minor 10,700,000
Syria, Mesopotamia and Kurdistan... 4,450,000
Arabia (Mecca, Medina Habesh) 900,000
16,050,000
AFRICAN TURKEY (gaRB.)
Egypt 2,000,000
Tripoli, Fezzaii, Tunis 1,800,000
3,800,000
35,350,000
752
TURKEY.
Dividing the population into races and
tribes, thc'rcsult is as follows :
IUCR3 0R
fRlBE?.
In Europe.
In Asia.
In Africa.
TotaL
Ottomans. .
1,100,000
10,700,000
11,800,000
Slavonian.-".
7,200,000
7,200,000
KuiiiHDiao.t
4,000,000
1,. 100, 000
Greeks
1,000.000
1,000,000
2,000,000
Armenians.
400,000
2,000,000
2,400,000
Jews
70,000
100,000
170,000
Tartars.. ..
230,000
230.000
Arabs
900,000
3,800,000
4,700,000
SvriauHand
235,000
235.000
Clialileaai
Druses ....
25,000
25,000
Kurtis ....
1,000,000
1,000,000
Turkomans
90,000
90,000
ToUU...
15,500,000
16,050,000| 3,800,000
35,350,000
Taking the population according to religious
creeds, the result is :
CREEPS.
Mahom'd'n
Greeks anil
Armenians
Rnm. Cath.
Jew.s
TotiL-s
In Europe.
3,800,000
11,370,000
260,000
70,000
12,950,000
2,360,000
640,000
100,000
16,050,000
Total.
20,550,000
13,730,000
900,000
170,000
35,350,000
There are now, also, more than 2,000 in the
Protestant community lately organized, and a
great number, particularly among the Arme-
nians, who have embraced Protestant senti-
ments. Protestantism is likely to have a rapid
growth, and become an element of great power
in the future of Turkey.
2'he Erdesiastico Political Character of the
Turkish Government, and its bearing upon the
condition of the different Religious Classes of its
Subjects. — 'J'he Turkish Government is, in spirit,
a tht'ocracy. Its legislation is derived from
four sources ; the word of God, i. e., the Ko-
ran ; the Sunna, Avord of the prophet, the sen-
tences of the four grand Imams, the fathers of
Lslamisra ; and the laws of the reigning sove-
reign, rejiresentative of the prophet. Moham-
med aimed at being the founder of a new state,
and the Koran wa.", declared to be, as it now is,
the civil and religious code of the Mus.sulmans.
The Faithful are the j)ro[)er subjects of the Sul-
tan ; his well-beloved children. Unbelievers are
his enemies. Unable to carry out the princijile of
intolerance, the Sultan still recognizes the Ma.s-
Buiinans an liis more immediate and privileged
Hubjcet.«. He tolerates and grants jirivileges
to certain ineoriwrateil bodies of unbelievers,
and rt.'cojrnizes his Christian subjects only as
members of sotnc one of the e.xistini,' ( •hri.stian
communities, in wliich every individual must
be enrolled. K,,,!, of these bodies, excepting
the I'rotestants. luvs a I'atriarch at its head,
who bccomi-a respon.sible to the Sultan for the
whole. Every trade, moreover, is incorporated
under the direction of a committee, who grant
licenses to tradesmen, journeymen and appren-
tices, and are responsible to the head of their
community. In the early years of the Arme-
nian mission, this power, in the possession of the
patriarch, enabled him to inflict intolerable per-
secutions upon the missionary converts. They
could not withdraw from the community, with-
out rebelling against the civil law of the coun-
try. They were finally excommunicated, were
unable to obtain licenses to trade, had their
property taken from them with no means of
recovery, and were only preserved from starva-
tion by the charity of foreign residents and
Mussulmans.
On the 15th of November, 1847, after long-
continued exertions on the part of Sir Strat-
ford Canning, carried forward by Lord Cow-
ley, his successor to the British Embassy, an
imperial decree was issued, recognizing native
Protestants, as constituting a separate and in-
dependent community in Turkey.
Reforms in the Turkish Body-politic. — For
more than three centuries Turkey was the ter-
ror of her European neighbors. Her arraiea
were as well disciplined and equipped as those
of other nations, while their fanatic devotioa
to their religion, inseparably united as it was,
with the civil power, and their intense hatred
of unbelievers, rendered them almost irresistible.
So long as the zeal and valor of individual
combatants decided the day, the Turkish ar-
mies retained supremacy. But while civiliza-
tion was advancing in the surrounding Chris-
tian nations, and martial tactics were studied
and practised, there was no advance, but rather
a retrogression, in Turkey. I'oward the latter
part of the seventeenth century the Turkish
power was at its zenith ; from that time, it be-
gan to decline. The Janissaries became alarm-
ingly powerful, audacious and overbearing.
While there was no progress made in the art
of war, the Ottoman people gradually degene-
rated, and lost much of their original native
valor.
Reform was commenced in 1789, by Sultan
Selim. Prejudice and ignorance, on the part
of his subjects, were obstacles almost insuper-
able to the introduction of measures which
would tend to place Turkey on a level with her
neighbors. An army was formed by Selim on
the European plan, and various governmental
reforms were introduced. These new meiisures
were considered as sacrilegious by the body ol
Mussulman subjects, and a revolt of the Jan-
issaries deposed Selim from his throne.
Mahmoud, successor of Selim, was disposed
to continue the reforms commenced by that
monarch, but was, for a long time, kept in
check by the Janissaries. At length, on the
14th of June, 182C, they were carried off by a
general ma.ssacre, and the Sultan was free to
pursue his j)Ians of reform. The red cap and
trowsers were substituted for the turban and
Sinus Thermaicus )
s 0.^lasonia
'hi„ .A . ,v>\"%'^
THE S SALONIC a5
OK
SALONIC A
a ad
TTC JINriT^r
£aba
TUTUILA— UNITED STATES.
753
loose robes. Womea were allowed greater
freedom. The Christians and Franks received
new privileges and protection. The army was
increased, the power of the Pashas limited, fo-
reign officers, mechanics and engineers employ-
ed, and the navy renovated and enlarged. A
medical college was also instituted, and quaran-
tine laws introduced. These reforms were not
appreciated nor understood by the people.
They were contrary to the genius of Moham-
medanism, encountered the stern opposition of
the priesthood, and were carried forward with
great difficulty. Their first effect was to weaken
the power of the empire, and from a succession
of untoward events, it seemed, at the death
of Sultan Mahmoud, in 1839, to be on the verge
of destruction. His son Abdid Mcdjid, ascend-
ing the throne at the early age of 17, however
persevered in the same line of policy ; and on
the 3d November, of that year, the celebrated
Hatti ScherifT was proclaimed in Giil Hane,
a park within the limits of the Seraglio, to the
assembled grandees of the empire, and in the
presence of the ambassadors of foreign powers.
In this extraordinary document the new sove-
reign, unsolicited by his people, but constrain-
ed by the necessity of circumstances, limited
his own authority, guaranteed to every subject
security of life and property, ordained an equal
and fair system of taxation, ordered a regular
method of drawing the conscription for the
army and fixed the period of service ; did away
with the confiscation of the property of crimi-
nals and visiting punishment on innocent re-
latives ; promised better administration of jus-
tice, and placed Mohammedans, Christians,
Jews, and Pagans, on the same footing, as re-
garded civil rights and the law. Changes so
great and opposed to Mohammedan feeling and
usage, were, of course, but imperfectly execut-
ed, and the tanzimat or " new regulations,"
can be made a reality only by gradual steps of
enforcement. The government, however, has
entered upon the right path, and under the in-
fluences from abroad which must control it, is
moving onward in it. The action taken in be-
half of the Protestants, the guarantees given
recently to the Western Powers, and the fir-
mans addressed to the Christian and Jewish
communities, are events of the happiest signi-
ficance in reference to the cause of civilization,
of religious freedom, and of true Christianity in
Turkey.
TUTUILA : One of the Samoau Islands on
which the London Missionary Society have
two stations.
TUMBOO : A village beautifully situated
near the sea, in Sierra Leone. West Africa,
about 11 miles from Kent. Church Mission-
ary Society.
UAWA : A station of the Church Mission-
ary Society in New-Zealand, 36 miles north of
Turanga.
UITENHAGE : A town and district in
South Africa, occupied by the London Mis-
48
sionary Society, and the Society for the Pro-
pagation of the Gospel. The district is pas-
toral and agricultural, lying chiefly between
the Chautoos and Bushman's rivers. In the
neighborhood of the town, it is of extreme fer-
tility, and has been known to yield from 80 to
90 returns of wheat. The town is regularly
built, each house having behind it an allotment
of garden ground ; and the water from a spring
in the vicinity has been laid along the princi-
pal street, furnishing an abundant supply for
all. Fruit and vegetables are successfully cul-
tivated, and sold in market at Port Elizabeth.
The interior trade is carried on through Gra-
ham's Town.
ULAH : A Karen town in the district of
Mergui, in Burmah, on the Tenasserim river,
an out-station of the Tavoy mission of the Am.
Baptist Union.
ULEMOEGA : A station of the London
Missionary Society on the island of Upolu, one
of the Samoan Group.
UMLAZI ; A station of the American
Board in South Africa, 12 miles south-west of
Umlazi river, containing 100,000 Zulus.
UMPUKANI : A station of the Glasgow
African Society, among the Grequas, Basutos,
and Mantatees, South Africa.
UMSUNDUZI : A station of the Ameri-
can Board among the Zulus in South Africa,
iiGur Port N'iitil
UMTWALUMI : A station of the Ameri-
can Board among the Zulus, near Port Natal,
in South Africa.
UMVELO : A station of the London Mis-
sionary Society in South Africa, formerly
called Botman's Kraal.
UMYOTI : A station of the American
Board in South Africa, about 40 miles north
of Port Natal, on the Umvoti river. It is a
most delightful site for a mission, well-watered
and wooded, with good arable and pasture
grounds, so that several thousands of natives
might live within a short distance of the mis-
sionary's residence.
UPOLU : One of the Samoan Islands, on
which the London Missionary Society have
seven stations.
USSA : Danish Akra, occupied by the Ger-
man Missionary Society.
UTUMAORO : A station of the London
Missionary Society on the east side of the
island of Raiatea, situated on an open bay.
UVEA : One of the Friendly Islands, the
most remote in the district of Habai, occu-
pied by the AVesleyans. A Romish bishop,
two priests, and an old friar have taken up
their residence here, and done much mischief,
by kindling up a religious war and setting the
people to destroy one another.
UNITED STATES : I. Extent of Terri-
tory.— In 1819, the territory belonging to the
United States included not less than 2,300,000
square miles. Since then, at different times,
another million has been acquired by various
754
UNITED STATES.
treaties. The present area of our " real estate " | the most valuable metals are beyond exBatlS*
is about 3,300.000 square mile.-, and there is tion,— a country stored with the endless treas-
the pro^^pect of further annexations. Within j ures of the forest and the quarry,— a country
asinple generation, the Ptar-.spang]ed flag has ! endowed with such resources, and fast filling
'■■'■- ■-■'=" '^"- ^' '- up with a people who know how to find and
use them ; — with such a country, and such re-
sources, it is impossible we should not heap up
riches, and rapidly rise to that eminence of
moral and political power, which amplitude of
material means secures. Take a few items
from the census returns of 1850. The an-
nual crop of only one of the cereals, Indian-
corn, reached the inconceivable amount of
600,000,000 of bushels ; the yield of wheat
was 100,000,000 bushels; that of cotton,
1,000,000,000 of pounds. A very large pro-
portion of the soil is of the richest kind ;
though this is of the less consequence, as, by
the help of modern science, and agricultural
chemistry, the poorest soils can be made per-
manently fertile. As to mineral wealth, we
have already ascertained 218,000 square miles
of coal-formation, equal to twentj'-seven States
like Massachusetts. Not less than 1,100
cubic miles of this fuel are deposited beneath
the surface of our soil ; and one of these cubic
miles, at the present rate of consumption,
would last 1,000 years; so that a million of
years would not exhaust the stock. Of iron,
so far as utility is concerned, the most precious
of the metals, there are vast deposits every-
where in the Mississippi valley, along the cen-
tral axis of the country. Some of them are
prodigious. There is a mountain in Missouri
500 feet in height, and miles in circuit, almost
wholly composed of iron. The abundance of
it is even greater in the region of Lake Supe-
rior; and it is also richly, thougli less pro-
fusely, scattered over the Atlantic slope. The
lead formations in the great central valley oc-
cupy 3,000 square miles, annually yielding
more than 20,000 tons. The copper deposits
in the wide regions of the north-west are still
more extensive, affording thousands of tons
every year, though the exploration is but just
begun ; and some of the Southern States are
found to be still richer in this metal. To say
nothing of silver, zinc, and other metals used in
the economy of civilized life, gold is found all
along the eastern slope from Texas to Canada,
in many places profitably mined ; Avhile, on
our Pacific slope, it is so lavishly diftuscd, that
there is enough to reward the industry, and
excite the greed, of generations to come.
III. Commerce. — Tlie internal trafiic is be-
yond all computation. Its statistics are too
huge to be meddled with. The active transfer
of property to and from all portions of the
land, and the exchange of values in crude and
manufactured articles, employ and reward an
inconceivable amount of industry and capital.
To say nothing of the traction on common
roads, illimitable for extent and ramification,
and of the freightage on our immense system
moved southward, from the "still St. Mary's
ri\ter," on the confines of Georgia, to the Sunken
Floriiiian keys ; and westward to the Rio Bra-
vo, on the farthest Texian border ; and beyond
that, southward and westward still, to the Rio
Gila and the Californian gold coast. The
bannered eagle, which, till of late, fluttered
only on the Atlantic breezes, has sped her
flight across the " Father of Waters," and over
the rugged sierras or saws of the Rocky Moun-
tains, and now hovers in proud supremacy on
tl)e gales of the Pacific, and " the stretching
out of his wings fiUeth the breadth of the land."
Neither the empire of Rome nor even that of
Alexander spread so far. The sun is more
than two hours and a half in rising to the view
of all our people, and bringing morning to the
whole land. I3ef(jre tlic denizens of San Fran-
cisco have eaten their breakfast, their fellow-
citizens of Eastport are beginning to think of
their dinners. From nortli to south, " as the
wild goose files," in passing from his summer
rgtreats among the Canadian lakes, to his win-
ter quarters on the Mexican Gulf, the poor
bird must wing an aerial journey of 1500 miles
ere he is safe from the guns of our sportsmen.
An indented coast-line, meandering through
more than 30,000 miles, affords numerous har-
bors for the purposes of commerce ; and these
still further favored by even a greater number
of miles of inland communication by those
natural canals, our noble navigable rivers.
Nearly the whole of this vast area is within
easy reach of water conveyance.
It was said by the cynical Randolph, that
Washington is " a city of magnificent dis-
tances ;" and, in this respect, our national
capital is a fit tj'pe of the great country whose
political interests centre there. The mind,
which can traverse any s])ace with the quick-
ness of thought, is bewildered in wandering
over tliis vast domain. And as for the body,
there be few indeed, even in our huge " travel-
ing community," with its restless ramblings,
who have so nuicli as set foot in each one of
our States and organized Territories. Out of
our country there could be carved 38 such
kingdoms as Great Britain, and IG such em-
pirc-s as France. 'J'he possession of land has
ever been regarded as one of the grand ele-
ments of natifinul greatness, wealth, and power.
II. I'htjsical RcHnirces. — Of these we can
catch but a hiu^ty glimi)se. AVith a country,
of which portions are buried for half the year
in ice and snow, while other portions have
never six-n so much as a snow-flake ; — a coun-
try where the rivers— those liquid roads of
commerco. roll in paths of a thousand miles,
a country affording every variety ot climate,
yielding in teeming exuberance almost everv
iweful vegetable product, and whose mines of | of railways and canals, the tonnage of the
UNITED STATES.
755
steamboats occupied with our inland trade is
more than 400,000 tons.
Our foreign trade is also conducted upon
an enormous scale, employing above 4,000,000
of shipping in the transportation of above
400,000,000 in value of imports and exports.
Our sails are courting every breeze that blows,
and seeking every shore. Our sinuous coast
affords abundance of bays and harbors for
these floating bridges and ferries of the sea.
The winds and the waves are wafting to us the
commodities of the world. Our merchant-
princes and maritime adventurers are con-
tinually extending the range and magnitude
of their euterprizes.
IV. Population. — Since the revolution, when
it was but little more than 3,000,000, it has
swelled, at the last census, in 1850, to more
than 23,000,000. At each decennial census,
since 1790, it has been found that the increase
has been at a rate so surprisingly uniform, that
we can safely estimate its increase for future
periods. By the year 1875, it will be close
upon 50,000,000, and will far exceed 100,000,-
000 by the end of the nineteenth century.
Even then, it will not be a densely peopled
country, being capable of sustaining a far
greater population than that. We have now,
on the average, but seven inhabitants to each
square mile of territory. In Great Britain,
thtre are 223 to the square mile. If this coun-
try becomes only one half as populous, we shall
have 350,000,000. As yet, but one-fourteenth
part of our land is occupied at all. But the
immigration from all parts of the world brings
half a million every year to fill the vacant
space ; while, in the same time, even a larger
number is born upon the soil. Thus, our wide-
spread territory is rapidly rescued from the
dominion of savage nature, and is replenished
with a population intelligent and active, brave
and free, full of the republican spirit, glowing
with patriotic fire, and waxing bold as to their
country's glorious destiny, and the part she is
yet to act in propagating among the nations a
nobler system of political and social life.
V. Public Works. — The old historic empires
fell to pieces, like uncementcd masses of ma-
sonry, by their weight. Their magnificent
capitals, the seat of power and the heart of
government, could not, with their mightiest
throbbings, send out and draw back a quick
and healthful circulation through their remoter
members. But this fatal difficulty is quite
remedied for us, by those modern means of
inter-communication, whereby the pulsing life-
blood of our grand confederation is carried in
full vigor to the most distant bounds of our
sovereignty. Cheap postage keeps up a con-
stant ripple along the innumerable mail-routes,
whose branching veins. I'un, like a vascular net-
work, over the whole body politic. The aggre-
gate of mail-service under contract for the pre-
sent year is more than 200,000 miles. 24,000
miles of telegraph-wires, like a vital nervous
system, with its numerous ganglionic centres,
carry instant sensibility to every chief limb
and member ; so that all parts of the nation
are touched at once by the same sympathies,
and excited by the same volitions. 15,000
miles of completed railroad, and as many more
in the course of construction, like iron sinews
of vast strength and wondrous flexibility, are
linking joint with joint ; and, compacting the
whole by that which every joint supplicth, are
giving to the huge body corporate a ready
command over all its movements and resources.
On land and water, the steam-power, with hot
breath, inflates the lungs with vital energy,
and breathes through all the nation an ani-
mating principle, which puts vigor into every
muscle, and sharpens every sense. For all the
practical purposes of locomotion, and inter-
course and business interests, and political
efficiency and military operation, this country,
notwithstanding its recent prodigious annexa-
tions of territory, is not one-tenth as large as
it was thirty years ago. Quick as her growth
has been, still more rapid is the diffusion of
her working power, and the concentration of
her governing capacity.
VI. Geographical Position. — The ocesltis
which for ages separated this continent, and
hid its existence from the rest of the v/orld,
have now become broad and easy highways of
intercourse with all nations. Nearly every
pagan, papal, and Mohammedan land on the
face of the earth may be reached by lines of
communication almost direct, drawn from our
eastern, western, or southern ports. Along
these lines of marine travel immigration is
pouring in its thousands and tens of thousands,
v/hile our people are passing out by the same
lines, scattering themselves everywhere in pros-
ecuting all the great material, intellectual, and
religious interests of life. Our country pre-
sents one front to the civilization of Europe
and the degradation of Africa, and another
front to the barbaric wealth of Asia and the
luxuriant isles of the southern seas, and offers
to mediate among them all. On her north
flank, she lifts a mighty arm of warning and
menace against the aggressive despotism of
Russia ; and on her southern side, she is be-
ginning to stretch out a hand of help towards
the distracted governments and the sweeping
solitudes of the other American continent.
The four corners of the heavens seem to be
bending towards her, to lift her to the highest
sphere of moral and political influence over all
the globe. Her very location on the map of
the world seems to mark her out as " the
glory of all lands," " an eternal excellency, a
joy of many generations."
VII. Peculiar character of the people. —
Prominent and offensive as its faults may
sometimes be, we find in the very genius
of the people strong elements of national
power and influence in the world. It is
said, that the most fertile soils are made by
756
rXITED STATES.
the commixture of earths obtained bv the I cision in the arbitrament of the great political
crumbling of difft-rent kinds of rock. And | questions which agitate the world. May it
the difibrent races of men sending hither their • be a voice of truth and love, as well as power !
most resolute and venturous spirits, have blend- 1 Till. i:(/uco/?'o«.— The statistics of this
ed the more active traits of their several na- subject are so great as to crowd themselves
tionaiities in a new and highlv energetic and out of the narrow space that could be afforded
practical t^-pe of the human kind. When the here. TTe have IGO colleges and theological
beloved Laftiyette made his triumphal pro- 1 seminaries, all but 14 of them Protestant ; and
gress throutrh this countrv in 1825, he was with very few exceptions, and these not infi-
askcd bv the governor of Massachusetts, what del, under decidedly evangelical auspices,
nation of the° old world we most resembled ? , They have 20,000 students under more than
The bvstanders expected, that in one of his 1.000 professors. In at least 12 of the States,
neatlv'turned compliments he would liken us j the public school system, which offers gratui-
to his own " beautiful France ;" but the smil- ! tons instruction to every child, is established
in"- veteran repkcd : " Sir, the American is an ; by law. In many of these States it is all but
Enelishman reinforced ! " To the original | impossible to find an adult native of either sex
Anslo-Saxon stock, with the old British har- - who cannot read and write. This system of
dihood and steadiness stimulated by freer scope free schools is constantly rising in efficiency, ia
for activity, there is an in-wrought re-inforce- 1 importance, and in public estimation. It is
ment of the more mobile and versatile spirits spreading into the States contiguous ; and it
of other European races. Puritan, Covenant- ' can hardly be, in course of time, but it will
er, Husiienot. Hollander, and many more, have be adopted in all. In the new States of the
mixed their firmness, their vivacity, their piety! West there are reservations of the public lands
and other active ingredients in bur national set apart for this object, which will form a
composition. Out- people have a wondrous ^ most munificent endowment. In the Sunday-
talent for self-govcrnmcut and social orgauiza- i schools sustained by different branches of the
tk)n anvwhere, and at the shortest notic^e. So church, 3.000,000 of children and youth are
completelv is the government the offspring of : taught '• the first principles of the oracles of
the public sentiment and will, that if the mat-: God." It is a most gratifying fact, that this
ter were to be put to the vote to-morrow, not I immense array of means for the right training
a thousand ballots among millions would be | of " young America " is almost wholly ^d-
cast in fiwor of any essential change in the ' ministered by men of high moral feeling, and
form of government. Such a government has ' generally of strong religious principle. But
no need of anv standing armv'to maintain it even this mighty enginery for mental discipline
at home, and we have never had one for that | will not suffice for the safety of our country,
purpose. Where, on the face of the earth, is [ unless true religion shall keep pace with its
there a form of government so firmly and , progress, and guide it to right results.
safely established as ours ? It is wonderful to IX. Religion.— The grand idea of full rcli-
see the peaceful partv revolutions, which, even I gious liberty is to leave religion entirely to it-
after the most violent political agitations, are ' self, except so far as it may be necessary to
BO calmy acquiesced in, at our great periodic j protect it from violence. This idea was early
elections. The power of the nation is trans- { introduced, and in time won complete ascendan-
ferred to new hands at the bidding of a ma-i cy. It has now few enemies, unless it may be
jority of one vote, as quietlv as at that of a j among the more bigoted part of the adherents
million. In all the settled parts of the country, | to the Komish hierarchy. We have now ra-
the authority of the law and the magtstracy is j ther more than 12 Protestants to every Papist,
acquiesced in bv the native population, with- and this majority is ever increasing. The
out a thought 'of resistance, and without a ' spirit of Popery is so contrary to the spirit of
show of force. All the mobs and popular tu- j our people, and of their history and institu-
mults which have occurred in the Atlantic | tions, that Romanism would rapidly dry up
States for the la.«t half century, if taken to- {but for the streams of immigration running
gether. would not equal for violence the famous over from so-called Catholic Europe. Their
" no-popery mob," headed by Lord George ' l)est-informed ecclesiastics represent that one-
Gordon, at London, in 1780. i half of all the children born in this country.
Our nation has proved it.self able thus far, j fall off from their communion. So, too, infi-
by the Divine blessing, to absorb and a.wm?-! delity, which has never been very prevalent in
late a va.=t amount of foreign immigration. It i this country, has been on the wane ever since
abounds in inventive talent, in the faculty of ; the beginning of this century, among the in-
adaptation to circumstances, in practical effi- born population ; and like Popery, depends
ciency, and in tireless industry. As such a' mostly for its continuance on foreign impor-
pcoplc advance in wealth and industry, it'.tation.
mu.<!t roll an enormous weight into the '" ba- The supporting of religion on the voluntary
lance of power." among the nations of the! system has worked well. Never, since the
earth. The popular voice uttered from this i primitive age of the martyrs, has there been
continent, will, ere long, speak in tones of de- ' an experiment so successful and instructive.
UNITED STATES.
757
Nothing tries the strength of this system more
thoroughly than the building of churches to
meet the growing wants of the people. And
yet the careful estimates of Dr. Baird show
that more than 3,000,000 of dollars are ex-
pended for this purpose alone in each year.
The last census proves that there were then
over 36,000 church edifices by actual enumer-
ation ; and also that in these there were al-
most 14,000,000 of sittings, sufficient, if these
buildings were located as the population is, to
accommodate nearly two-thirds of it, which is
quite as much as could be in attendance at one
time. The amount thus voluntarily invested
in church-property was over ^Sfi,000,000 in
1850 ; and, by this time, can be little, if at all,
short of $100,000,000. By careful estimates,
it is found that daring the last year above nine
millions of dollars were expended in the cur-
rent expenses of the churches, such as the sus-
tentation of ministers, &c. ; three millions
more in the erection of new houses of worship ;
and two millions and a half in the various
missionary and benevolent operations of all
denominations ; making in all a self-imposed
tax of not far from fifteen millions of dollars
for the support of the Gospel, and the spread
of its institutions. So much for leaving the
Gospel to its OMm vital resources, and to the
blessing of Him, who gave it to make men
liberal and free like Himself These expendi-
tures have not been in vain. God has made
them, as we shall see, of great effect in pro-
moting the spiritual welfare of the nation.
Yet, the sum so expended the last year, great
ag it seems in the aggregate, is not burthen-
some by any means. It is but one dollar upon
every four hundred of the valuation of im-
proved lands, or one quarter of one per cent.
it is but one dollar upon every sixty of the
valuation of only the agricultural products of
the country for the same year.
In the first fifty years of this century, the
population of the United States increased a
little less than fourfold and a half. During the
same time, as appears by their several statis-
tics, the number of members in the various
churches called Evangelical, has increased
nearly tenfold. That is to say, the church
membership has increased more than twice as
fast as the population. If these rates of in-
crease shall continue the same for the next
fifty years, the whole adult population of the
United States must be included in these
churches before the century is ended. Where
is there in the world another field whicli can
show such wonderful religious prosperity? " It
is the Lord's doing ; and it is marvelous in our
eyes !"
X. Pauperism and Crime. — In the year end-
ing June 1st, 18.50, the whole number who re-
ceived aid as paupers in the United States was
135,000. These were less than one in a hun-
dred of the free jiopulation ; and of these above
68,000, or more than half, were foreigners.
The native paupers were not two-fifths of one
per cent, in the population. This indicates
that there is an abundance of the means of
subsistence here ; and that this ought to take
away from the inducement to commit crimes
against property. The whole number of per-
sons convicted of crime during the year above-
mentioned, was about 27,000. This is a sad
array ; and such a host of culprits may seem
to indicate a low standard of morality. But,
happily for the reputation of our country, it is,
found that 14,000 of these malefactors are
foreign-born ; so that there are eight times as
many criminals from our foreign, as from our
native, population, in proportion to the num-
ber of each. Very many of the native criminals
are the children of foreign-born parents, and
ought to be classed with those who trained
them. Our stock, both of paupers and crimi-
nals, would be admirably small, were it not
for the constant supplies with which we are
furnished by the nations of the old world.
Most of the European immigrants, (seven-
eighths of them.) settle in the free States ; and
hence the larger proportion of poverty and
crime to be found in those States. The im-
migrants are also prone to locate themselyes
in the large cities of the free North and West,
whose alms-houses and jails are almost wholly
filled by the imbecility and demoralization of
the lower orders of European society. Thus,
in one of the largest cities of New Jersey, it
was found, last year, that all the inmates of the
poor-house were Irish ; and of a larger num-
ber who received out-door relief, all were
foreigners but hm. Of 4,000 charged with
minor offences before the city police, only 80
were native Americans.
The prospects of our large cities would be
gloomy indeed, were it not for the moral ener-
gy of the resident natives, and their prompt-
ness t(^pl in the execution of the laws. There
is also at work among them a vast amount of
organized benevolent effort, working with
silent and unrecognized power, but with the
noblest results, for the relief of the miserable,
the instruction of the ignorant, the reclaiming
of the profligate, and the prevention of crime.
Numerous voluntary associations for these
purposes, besides the various churches, are en-
gaged in these objects with remarkable wis-
dom and zeal ; and the ramifications of their
influence reach all parts of the mass of sufifer-
iug, ignorance, and vice.
The temperance reform, which began here
some 25 or 30 years ago, has wrought its M'on-
ders ; and, ere this, would have won M'hat
might be called a complete victory, but for the
resistance it meets from the Irish and Germans
among us. Already several of the States
have adopted and rigorously enforced a system
of prohibitory legislation, aiming at the en-
tire suppression of the traffic in intoxicating
liquors as a beverage. Other States are on
the point of adopting the same protective
758
UNITED BRETHREN'S MISSIONS.
policy af^ainst this prolific source of penury
and crime.
Amon? the means by which it has pleased
God mainly to sustain the spiritual life and
moral health of this great and prowing nation,
the highest place must be assigned to what
are called " revivals of religion." The numer-
ical statistics of these can only be tabled by
recording angels, and fully published at the
judgment day. But the men among us best
qualified to judge of their power, extent, and
fruits, do not hesitate to speak of them as the
salvation of America. — Rev. A. W. McClure.
UNITED BRETHREN'S MISSIONS:
p]arly in the history of the Moravian Brethren
they'were baptized with the missionary spirit.
Count Zinzcndorf, having resigned his civil
dignities and become a minister of the Breth-
ren's Church, devoted himself, with his whole
estate, to the diffusion of the Gospel, in con-
nection with that church. Having been,
through false accusations, banished from Sax-
ony, on receiving the elector's order to quit the
kingdom, he made the following characteristic
remark, which contains the germe of the future
missionary history of the Moravian Church :
" Now we must collect a Congregation of Pil-
grims, and train laborers to go fouth into all
THE WORLD, AND PREACH CnRIST AND HIS SAL-
VATio.v." " Viewing the Brethren's Church as
a society revived by the Lord, for the special
purpose of diffusing the Gospel throughout the
wprld, Zinzendorf considered himself solemnly
pledged to see to it, that this, its destination,
shoulil be carefully attended to, and, as far as
possible, faithfully executed. When banished
from Saxony, he saw no other way for obtain-
ing the proposed end, than by having, besides
his own family, those persons constantly about
him who were under preparation for service in
the church. These Avere occasionally joined
by missionaries who had returned from pagan
countries, and by Brethren, who had come
back from their deputations to different parts
of Christendom, and who mostly remained
with the Count, till they resumed their former
employment, or received new appointments.
These persons constituted the Congregation of
Pilgrims, which, strictly speaking, was never
stationary; for. whenever the Count changed
his place of residence, the greater jiart of the
company followed him. Special attention was
paid to the design of their Institution; and
for this pui'pose, days and even weeks were
sometimes occupied in conferences, for deliber-
ating on sul)jects bearing on the enlargement
of Christ's kingdom."
When llie refugees on Count Zinzendorf's
cstati-a, scarcely amounting to COO pennons —
where they had themselves just fdund rest from
suffering. an<l were beginning to build a church
and habitations, where there had previously
been a wilderness, — the missionary spirit wa.s
sent down upon them witli .such constraining
influence, that within the short period of ten
years, they had sent missionaries to St. Tho-
mas and St. Croix in the AVest Indies, to
Greenland, to the Indians in North and South
America, to Lajiland, to 'J'artary, to Algiers,
to Western Africa, to the Cape of Good Hope,
and to Ceylon ; as they did subsequently to
others of the West India Islands, to Persia, to
Egypt, to Labrador, and to India. In several
of these countries, their attempts to Christian-
ize and civilize have proved unsuccessful. Id
some instances the missionaries sent out never
reached the places of their destination ; and
in others, the political state of the country, to
which they went, rendered their immediate re-
turn an imperious duty ; and in several cases,
they were compelled to relinquish their benev-
olent designs, after years of patient perseve-
rance and heroic fortitude, spent in fruitless
endeavors to impress the wretched natives with
the importance of the Gospel. Going forth as
hardy pioneers, who penetrate the thickest
forest, unrestrained by dangers and privations,
their eaj-lier missionaries submitted to the most
painful sacrifices in order to communicate the
iDlessings of the Gospel to the heathen.
The missions of the United Brethren in for-
eign countries had their origin in a Providen-
tial circumstance, which directed the attention
of the Brethren to the condition of slaves in
the AVest Indies. Count Zinzendorf being in
Copenhagen in 1731. some of his domestics be-
came acquainted with a black man named An-
thony, who told them of the suflerings of the
slaves on the island of St. 'I'homas, and of their
earnest desire to be instructed in the way of
salvation. The Count was deeply affected by
the statements of Anthony, and on his return
to Herrnhut mentioned them to his congrega-
tion. The zeal of the Brethren was awakened
for the conversion of the heathen, and they de-
termined, at whatever cost, to send a mission to
the slaves, in whose condition they had become
so deeply interested ; and in the following year
two brethren sailed for the Danish Islands.
And such was their devotion to the work that,
having heard that they could not otherwise
have access to the slaves, they went with the
determination of .submitting to be themselves
enslaved, that they might have the opportunity
of teaching the poor captive Africans the way
of deliverance from the bondage of sin and
Satan. Although this sacrifice was not re-
(juired of them, they still maintained them-
selves by manual labor, under a tropical sun,
(Miiploying every opportunity for conversing
witli the heathen. A similar zeal characterized
the first misvsionaries to Greenland, in 1733.
AVhile at Cojjenhagen, Count I'less, who was
much interested for them, asked them how
they intended to procure a livelihood in Green-
land? Unacquainted with the sitinition and
climate of the country, the missionaries replied,
" By the labor of our hands, and God's bless-
ing ;" adding, that they would build a house,
and cultivate a piece of land, not wishing to
UNITED BRETHREN'S MISSIONS.
759
be burdensome to any one. Being told, there
"was no wood fit for building in that desolate
region, they said : " In that case we will dig a
hole in the earth, and lodge there." So suc-
cessful has this mission been, that nearly the
whole of the Greenland population in the
neighboi'hood of the settlements has been con-
verted to Christianity.
The following short notice of the Doctrine
and Constitution of the Moravian Brethren's
Church, as far as they affect the missions, may
not be misplaced here. It is the constant aim
of their missionaries to make known " Christ
and Him crucified." Their motto is : " To
humble the sinner, to exalt the Saviour, and to
promote holiness."
The internal regulations are the same in
every mission. Such heathen as from the hear-
ing of the Gospel, or the private conversations
of the missionaries, are led to serious reflec-
tions, and desire their names to be put down,
for further instruction, are called new people,
and reckoned to the class of catechumens. If
they>remain steadfast in their resolutions to
forsake heathenism, and desire baptism, they
are considered as candidates for that ordinance ;
and after previous instruction, are baptized.
If their conduct proves consistent with their
professions, they at length become candidates
for the communion, and finally communicants.
When the number of converts is very large,
assistants are chosen, who have particular dis-
tricts assigned them, in which they visit the
people, attend to the poor, the sick and infirm,
and are occasionally employed to hold meet-
ings, and to preach at the outposts.
The external regulations vary in the differ-
ent missions. Among free heathen, as in Green-
land, North America, South Africa, &c., most
of the converts live together in regular settle-
ments, and thus enjoy the advantages of vari-
ous regulations for promoting their progress in
spiritual knowledge, and in civilization, which
regulations are impracticable in missions
among slaves.
Church discipline is exercised without re-
spect of persons ; and consists according to
the nature of the offence, either in exclusion
from the meetings of the baptized, or in sus-
pension from the Lord's Supper, or in total
separation from the church.
The general superintendence of the missions
is vested in the synods of the church. But, as
these are convened only occasionally, the el-
ders' conference has the oversight of the mis-
sion. The missionai-y service is in the strictest
sense, voluntary. Any person desirous of en-
gaging in it, makes known his wishes to the
directors ; and if, after being informed of the
difficulties and dangers attending the life of a
missionary, his resolution remains fixed, he is
considered a candidate for the service. Should
lie eventually feel any reluctance, he is at full
liberty either to accept or decline any proposal
or call, which may be offered him.
The Brethren's Church has no permanent
fund for the missions. They are maintained
by voluntary contributions collected mostly at
stated times in their congregations ; and also
by the many female, young men's, and juvenile
missionary societies in the church. Not able,
however, to raise one half of the sum annually
required, friends, and societies in other Chris-
tian communities have hitherto been most
liberal in their donations.
The Moravians now have 17 settlements and
congregations on the continent of Europe, with
46 home mission stations. The aggregate
number of persons in these congregations is
5,900. They have institutions of learning in
Nisky, Gnadenberg, Gnadenfrey, Neusalz, Neu-
wied, Koenigsfcld, and Zeyst. There is also a
high-school at Nisky, and a college for train-
ing candidates for the ministry at (inadcnfeld.
In Great Britain and Ireland, they have 34
settlements and congregations, with six home
mission stations in Ireland, and a membership
of 5,000. 1'hey have institutions for the edu-
cation of J outh at Fulneck, Gomesal, Mirfield,
Ockbrook, Bedford, Tytherton and GracehiU.
In the United States, they have 28 settlements
and congregations, with home missionary sta-
tions in Philadelphia, Green Bay, Sturgeon
Bay, among the Norwegians, New York, Gluey,
and Richland. Their institutions of learning
in the United States are at Nazareth, Bethle-
hem, Litiz, and Salem.
They now have missions in Greenland, La-
brador, Danish West India Islands, Jamaica,
Antigua, St. Kitts, Barbadoes, Tobago, Suri-
nam, South Africa, Australia, and the North
American Indians.
Missions have been undertaken by the Bre-
thren, at various periods, and abandoned as
unsuccessful, in Laplaud, in Siberia, among
the Jews in Amsterdam, among the gypsies ; in
Guinea, in Egypt, in Tranquebar, in Ceylon,
in Persia, in the West Indies, ami in South
America.
The following table exhibits the present
state of their missions :
Mission
a
V
aries.
o
_2
a
p.
a
2
MISSIONS.
o
o
s
a
a
d
6
e;
a
■ rj
ri
a
S3
8
^
a
s
c
g
■a
6
e
t
Danish W. I..
15
10
10.087
..
17.32
Greenland. . ..
4
14
9
2,054
1733
N. A. Indians.
^
9
7
491
1734
Surinam
8
29
2*1
18,831
1735
South Africa.
9
27
27
6,560
1882
2210
1733
6935
1736
Jamaica
13
IS
17
13,.311
17.54
Antigua
9
10
9
8,021
17.56
Barbadoes . . .
4
6
6
3,198
1765
Labrador
4
17
n
1,326
1770
St. Kitts
4
6
.5
4,045
1777
Tobago
2
3
3
2,103
1790
Nicaragua.. ..
1
3
1
20
1848
Australia
1
72
2
1849
Totals
i03
1.31
T",047 1SS2
2210
1733
6935
760
VALVERTY— WAIROA.
The whole number of missionaries employed
by the United Brethren, from the commence-
ment of their operations, is 1947,-1150 males
and 797 females. G43 of these have died in
the mission service : 9 of whom have deceased
on journeys made during service, 11 on the
journey out, and 2 on the way home ; 22 met
with an untimely end, mostly by shipwreck ;
one was murdered by the Esquimaux in Lab-
rador, and one by the Indians near Guaden-
hiitten, and 10 were shot or burned to death
on the Mahoney, in North America.
That so small a body of Christians should
have accomplished so much missionary labor,
i£i truly wonderful. Yet, the fact does but
show what might be done by the whole Pro-
testant Church, were they to enter upon the
work of evangelizing the world, with the same
singleness of purpose and spirit of consecration
which have, from the beginning, distinguished
this little band of brethren.
We have no means of ascertaining the ag-
gregate receipts of the United Brethren's Mis-
sions from their commencement. We give
the income of several years, which will enable
the reader to judge of the average receipts :
1848 £12,4421
Jgj^ ll'lf^l [ Average for four years, £12,640.
1852!"..'.!!! 13,051 J
The Lcnulon Association in aid of the Missions
of the United Brethren, which has existed for
thirty-six years, contributes to their funds be-
tween £4,000 and £5,000 annually, which is
included in the amounts aliove stated. Con-
sidering the extent of the Brethren's opera-
tions, it seems unaccountable that they should
be able to maintain them with so small an ex-
penditure. They have, however, been con-
ducted, so far as practicable, on the self-sus-
taining principle. Their missions are " settle-
me^," containing farmers and artizans, who
live on lands belonging to the mission, and, by
their laljor, contribute to its support. With
80 small a body, possessing such slender means,
this plati appears to have licen a matter of ne-
cessity, like that of Paul's laboring with his
hands while preaching to the heathen. But,
with the wealth now in the jjossession of the
Protestant churches, it must be the height of
injustice to send a man to preach the Gosi)el
to the heathen '• at his own charges ; " as it is,
also, the poorest economy to employ men capa-
ble of doing missionary work, in laboring for
their own bread.— //o/ww's llistury of the Mts-
nons of the United Brethren ; Moravian Mis-
sionartj At hut.
VAIA'KIITY (OODOOPITTY) : A sta-
tion (if tlie Anierican Board in Ceylon.
VAN DIKMAN'.S LAND : See Tasmania.
V Alt.XNY : A station of the American
Board in the Jaffna district, Ceylon, a little
cast of Uodooville.
VAKTABEl) : A religious teacher, or
doctor of divinity, among the Armenians.
This degree is conferred with the solemnities
of ordination, and those who receive it are
appealed to in all religious debates. They
preach in the churches, reconcile differences,
and exert themselves to maintain the Arme-
nian creed. They are supported by the volun-
tary contributions of their hearers, and of
those who apply to them for the decision of
any religious question.
VEDAS : The sacred books of the Hin-
doos, believed to be revealed by God, and
called immortal. They are considered as the
fountain of all knowledge, human and divine.
1'hey are four in number, the principal part
being that which explains the duties of man in
methodical arrangement. The fourth book
contains a system of divine ordinances. — Asi-
atic Researches.
VEWA : A small island, about 3 miles in
circumference, in the Feejee group, having
every variety of hill and dale in miniature.
It is nearly covered with bread-fruit trees and
eve, a kind of chestnut, the flowers of ^^^hich
have an odor like the violet, that fills the
whole island with its fragrance. Population,
150. Wesleyau Missionary Society.
VICTORIA: The chief city of Hong-
Kong, China, situated in lat. 22^ 16' N., and
long. 114^ 8' E. (See China.)
VIZAGAPATAM: A station of the
London Missionary Society, situated on the
eastern coast of Hindostau, in the Northern
Circars, about 500 miles south-west of Calcutta,
and north-east of Madras about the same dis-
tance.
WADAGAUM: A town in Hindostan,
30 miles south of Ahmeduuggur, — became
a station of the American Board in 1845.
WADESVILLE : A Karen village, near
Tavoy, in Burmah, named for Rev. Dr. Wade,
the missionary. It is an out-station of the
Tavoy Mission of the American Baptist Union.
WAGEN MAKER VALLEY : See Wel-
lington.
WAIALUA : A station of the American
Board in the Sandwich Islands, on Oahu.
AVAIANAE : A station of the American
Board in tlic Sandwich Islands, on Oahu.
WAIMEA : One of the three first stations
of the American Board at the Sandwich
Islands, situated on the north-west coast of
Kaui. Also, an interior station on the island
of Hawaii.
WAIKANAE : A station of the Church
.Missionary Society in New-Zealand.
WAIOLI^ A station of the American
Board, in theT^andwich Islands, on the island
of Kauai.
^VAIROA : A station of the Church Mis-
sionary Society in New-Zealand, situated on
the shore of llawke Bay. It is a very pretty
station, with a beautiful river winding through
an extensive plain, and communicating with a
chain of inland lakes.
H
H
EH
WELLINGTON— WEST INDIES.
761
WELLINGTON: Formerly, Wagenmaker
Valley : Station of the French Protestant
Society in South Africa, 30 miles north-east of
Cape Town. Inhabitants, 7,000 or 8,000 free
neg'roes, with many descendants of French
Huguenot refugees. Also a station of the
Church Missionary Society in New-Zealand,
having a European population of 2,500.
WELSH CALVINISTIO METHODIST
FOREIGN MISSIONARY SOCIETr :—
The Welsh Calviuistic Methodists arose during
the revival of religion in England under AVes-
ley and Whitefield ; chiefly from the devoted
labors of Howell Harris, Esq., of Trevecca, in
Brecknockshire. Having obtained peace with
God himself, he began a course of missionary
labor in his native Wales, then sunk down in
formalism and impiety. He visited from house
to house, and preached in the open air to thou-
sands, who were drawn by the novelty of the
scene and the burning zeal of the preacher.
God owned his word, and great numbers began
to be aroused to seek after God ; and, when
they had obtained, " like precious faith " in
Christ Jesus, they joined their efforts to those
of their beloved teacher, and thus the work
spread like fire among the dry stubble. In a
few years, Mr. Harris had established 300 so-
cieties or churches in South Wales. Several
clergymen of the Episcopal Church joined
themselves to him, and the great work operated
like the Reformation in Scotland, or Wesley-
anism in England. Mr. Harris and his asso-
ciates itinerated through the country, so that
in 1742 he had 10 clergymen, and nearly 50
lay preachers helping him. In the mean time,
North Wales began to be aroused in a similar
manner. The Rev. Thomas Charles of Bala,
afterwards one of the founders of the British
and Foreign Bible Society, was, towards the
close of this century, a prominent instrument
in this great work of God. In 1811, the socie-
ties formed themselves into an independent con-
nection with a polity similar to the English Wes-
leyans, but differing from them, as their name
imports, in some doctrinal views. In 1853 they
had 207 ministers, 234 local preachers, and
58,577 members.
Previous to 1840, the Welsh Calvinistic Me-
thodists, operated through the London Mission-
ary Society ; but, in May of that year, an as-
sociation was formed among them for sending
missionaries to the heathen, and in November
following, a mission was commenced in the
north-east part of Bengal among the Kassias,
a hill tribe. Besides this mission, they have
a mission station in Brittany, south of France
— the language of that country being a sister
dialect of the Welsh. The Bretons themselves
are a branch of the Welsh nation. The Cal-
vinistic Methodists have also a mission to the
Jews, which is now served by the Rev. John
Mills. The General Secretary of this society
is the Rev. J. Roberts, 12 Huskisson-st., Liver-
pool, England. — Prize Essay Jethro ; Censiis of
Religious Worship in England and Wales, by
H. Mann Esq.; and Annual Reports. — Rev. W.
TiITTT T^Ti.
WEST INDIES AND GUIANA : We
have connected Guiana with the West Indies
because they are thus connected in missionary
operations. The following table, which ex-
hibits a list of the West India Islands, with
the date of settlement, population, &c., is taken,
with some modification, from the " Missionary
Guide Book," published in London in 1846,
The author of that work gives as his authority
as to the population of the British Islands,
" Murray's Encyclopedia of Geography."
ISLANDS.
Pi
o
,— o
o
British.
1624
1023
1628
1632
1650
1665
1660
1628
1670
1632
1759
1763
1763
1783
1797
1803
1612
1492
1492
1493
1632
1635
16—
16—
1733
1781
1785
120,000
23,492
9,250
33.726
3,080
380,000
7,731
13,920
4,643
7,119
19,375
26,533
23,642
18,718
43,678
15,320
8,720
830,000
432,000
100,000
114,000
96,413
12,000
900
5,080
2,430
31,387
6,000
20,000
1,600
8,500
8,000
66,000
15,667
9,225
23,350
2,300
255,290
4,318
9,078
2,127
5,126
11,664
18,114
19,009
7,734
17,539
10,328
3,314
500,000
198,000
20,000
112,000
87,207
10,000
600
4,500
2,250
29,164
15', boo
' 7', 300
4,000
Jamaica
Tobago
Honduras
Bahamas ,
Trinidad
St. Lucia ,
Bermudas
LVDEPENDEXT.
Hayti or St. Dommgo
Spanish.
Cuba
Porto Rico
French.
Guadaloupe
Marigalante ,
Deseada
Danish.
St. Thomas
St. Jan
St. Croix
Dutch.
St. Martin •
St. Eustatia .'
Saba
Curacoa
Swedish.
St. Bartholomew
Totals
2,377,227
1,449,582
The Bermudas. — These are a numerous clus-
ter of small islands, in the Atlantic Ocean, ex-
tending about 45 miles from south-west to
north-east, and having their northern point in
long. 63° 28' W., and lat. 32° 34' N. St.
George's, the principal island, is about sixteen
miles long, and three in breadth. The inhab-
itants are chiefly engaged in shipping and
trade.
Bahamas. — The Bahama Islands are the
762
WEST INDIES.
most western of the "West Indies, extending
along the coast of Florida towards Cuba.
They are 400 in number, most of them mere
rocks. About 14 of them are hirge; Bahama,
the priiici])al one, being G3 by 9 miles. They
enjoy a mild, equable, and delightful climate.
The inhabitants are chiefly employed in fishing
nnd wrecking.
Jamaica is oval-shaped, IGO miles long by 45
broad. Its scenery is magnificent and delight-
ful. It is reckoned as one of the most roman-
tic and highly diversified countries iu the
world. The Blue Mountains, an elevated
ridge, towering in some places nearly 8,000
feet above the sea, run through the island
from east to west.
Haijti is a very fine island, lying between
Jamaica and Purlo Rico, 450 miles long by
110 in width. In the centre rises the lofty
range of the Cibao mountains, the highest
peak of which is 9,000 feet. These mountains
are covered with vegetation nearly to their
summits, from which descend numerous streams,
that unite in four rivers, which render the
plains below exceedingly fertile. This island
was settled about the middle of the IGth cen-
tury by a daring band of French buccaneers.
The French revolution, in 1791, Avhich pro-
claimed universal equality, produced a con-
test between the white and free colored popu-
lation ; and while they were contending, the
slaves rose and drove out or massacred
both classes, and became possessors of the
French part of the island. Since that time,
the island has been the scene of successive
revolutions ; and at the present time, the
French part is governed by a black empe-
ror, and the Spanish part is an independent
republic.
St.^ T/iomas lies in lat. 18*^ 22' N. and long.
64=" 50' W., and is 18 miles in circumference,
having considerable trade.
St. Emtalius consists almost entirely of the
sloping sides of one high conical hill, termi-
nating in a rocky summit, but it is productive,
and cultivated with care.
Si. Kills or Si. Chrinlopher's is peculiarly
rugged ami mountainous, but the plain along
the sea shore surpasses iu richness and beauty
the other islands.
Ncvis is a small but beautiful and fertile
island, consi.-liiig of one conical mountain,
about 20 miles in circumference.
Aiiligiui is about 21 miles in length, nearly
the same in breadth, and 50 in circumference.
John's Town, the capital, is admired for the
aKrwabk-ness of its situation and the regula-
rity of ita buildings, and is a favorite place of
resort. *
Moutscrrnt i.« about 9 n»iles in length, and as
many in breadth, about twenty miles south-
west of Antigua; a beautiful and pleiusant
island.
^ BarlHulocs is about 22 miles in length, by 14
IQ breadth ; its rich plantations being diversi-
fied with gentle hills, which present a delight-
ful landscape.
Si. Vincent's is a very beautiful island, about
24 miles long and 18 broad, and contains the
only active volcano on these islands. It is
said to' contain small remnants of the aborigi-
nal race, mingled with the negroes.
Grenada is about 20 miles in length by 10
at its greatest breadth. It is mountainous,
abounding with streams and rivulets.
Tobago is a small but fertile and beautiful
island. The heat of its southerly situation is
tempered by breezes from the surrounding
ocean, while, at the same time, it appears to
be out of the track of those hurricanes which
have desolated so many of the other islands.
Trinidad is separated from the coast of
South America by a strait. It is a fertile
island, in extent next to Jamaica.
British Guiana lies on the coast of South
America, and includes Essequibo, Demerara,
and Berbice, or all the maritime tract between
the river Coventen, the western limit of Su-
rinam and the frontier of Spanish Guiana, at
Cape Nassau.
Surinam, on the coast of Guiana, consti-
tutes the most important of the Dutch western
possessions. They have, of late, made very
considerable efforts for improvement, and it is
rising in importance.
Inkahilanls. — When Columbus first discov-
ered the New World, he found the whole con-
tinent and every island thickly peopled by dif-
ferent classes of Indians. But within a few
years after the discovery of the West India
Islands, these native races had, for the greater
part, perished. Millions of them had been
swept from the earth or sent to work in the
mines of South America, where they sunk into
a premature grave, the victims of avarice and
cruelty. AVhcn the Spaniards found how ra-
pidly the aboriginal population perished under
the system of forced labor which they had in-
troduced, they resorted to the expedient of im-
porting negro slaves from Africa, and their
example was soon followed by the I'ortuguese,
Dutch, French, and English. At the present
time, the population of Guiana and the West
Indies consists of three descriptions of people :
willies, mixed races, and negroes. 'J'he whites,
or Europeans, chiefly British, consist partly of
proprietors, sui)erintending the cultivation of
their own lands, and partly of agents and
overseers. The negroes have always formed
by far the largest portion of the populatitm.
Since the 1st of August, 1834, they have en-
joyed a state of freedom in the British portion
of the West Indies. As the negroes aix) of
African origin, we must refer to Africa for a
description of their native character and
habits.
MISSIONS.
Wksi.evan Missionary Society. — Anligiu:.
—Nathaniel Gill)ert, Esq., the speaker of the
^r Grey aoHT^*'"*
Sc;iie of Ceog'rapMcal Allies
JThe Sisters. /^'oi>^ ***'i'ife
oc^^-^A^^^ iSAIMT JOHNS X, S,
/five ISLANDS ^REENBAX Vf?^? /^
Ixlan'"* y
■lol.timni'tXt.^L
CWTCST rxiiiKs)
Jjuu. V\fsl oi GrcKuwicU
WEST INDIES.
r63
House of Assembly in Autigua, coming to
England for the recovery of his health, was
led to attend the ministry of Mr. Wesley,
which he found to be the power of God to the
salvation of his soul. Happy in the enjoy-
ment of the Divine favor, and full of holy zeal,
he returned to Antigua in the year 17G0,
■where he began to teach Christianity to the
African slaves, many of whom, by the bless-
ing of God upon his labors, were made the
Lord's free men. Nearly 200 persons were
united in fellowship under his superintendence.
While thus usefully and honorably employed,
(though encountering bitter hostility,) he was
removed by death, and the flock he had ga-
thered were left " as sheep without a shep-
herd," yet they were not finally forsaken.
John Baxter, of the royal dock yard at Chat-
ham, who had been connected with the Metho-
dist society about 12 years, and had also for
some time been a class-leader and a local
preacher, was sent out by the government as a
shipwright. He collected the remains of the
society, and writing to Mr. AVesley under date
of April 2d, 1778, he says : "The work that
God began by Mr. Gilbert is still remaining.
The bliick people have been kept together by
two black women, who have continued praying
and meeting with them. I preached to about
30 on Saturday night and Sunday morning,
and in the afternoon to about 400 or 500.
The old members desire that I would inform
you, that you have many children in Antigua,
whom you never saw."
For about eight years he continued his la-
bors, working in the dockyard for his support.
About 2,000 were united together in religious
society ; when he was at length relieved by
the arrival of missionaries. In 178G, Dr. Coke,
having embarked for Nova Scotia with three
missionaries, two of whom were destined for
North America, and one for the West Indies ;
after being tossed about for a long time by the
winds and waves, and nearly suffering shipwreck,
they were obliged to put in to the West Indies,
and were carried directly to Antigua. Land-
ing on Christmas day, they met Mr. Baxter,
as he was going to conduct public worship.
They embraced each other with a joyous sur-
prise ; and the Doctor thai day occupied Mr.
Baxter's pulpit, and administered the Lord's
Supper to the people. He remained about six
weeks in the West Indies, and while there had
an offer of a salary of £500 to remain in Anti-
gua ; but he was too intent upon the spread of
Christ's religion in the world, to confine his
labors to one place. He visited several of the
islands, and having fixed Mr, Warreuer at Au-
tigua, Mr. Clarke at St. Vincent's, and Mr.
Hammet at St. Christopher's, he sailed for the
American continent. From this time the
Wesleyan mission in the West Indies was car-
ried on with increasing success.
The mission in Antigua appears to have en-
joyed for many years an almost uninterrupted
prosperity. Such was the importance attached
to it by the authorities of the island, that in
the year 1795, when they dreaded an attack
from the French, the missionary was requested
to organize a military corps from the members
of his society to assist in defending the island.
This request was promptly responded to by
both the missionary and his people : but hap-
pily the French never came. In 1826, this
mission met with a most melancholy loss, all
the missionaries, with part of their families,
13 in all, having perished at sea. This sad
event occurred as the mission joarty were re-
turning from a district meeting, which was
held in St. Christopher's. They encountered
a storm, and as they were approaching Anti-
gua, their vessel was thrown upon the breakers
and broken, and they were precipitated into the
sea. Some of the party were left clinging to
the wreck for two days and nights, but none
but Mrs. Jones was saved.
In 1839, Rev. Mr. Codman wrote from An-
tigua : " The number of members in our so-
cieties is now some thousands more than when
I came, (1826) and the scholars have more than
doubled. Nor must the great number who
have died in the Lord be forgotten. I should
think, that five or six thousand have left the
church militant for the church triumphant.
The work is prospering in several islands, es-
pecially Antigua. In the island of St. Kitt's
the attendance at all our chapels is increased,
and some of them have been enlarged, and new
ones built."
In the year 1843, a violent earthquake visit-
ed the island of Antigua, by which, with
scarcely an exception, every edifice constructed
of stone was left a heap of ruins. Out of nine
Wesleyan meeting houses, only one escaped
without serious damage. This sad event, how-
ever, did not essentially retard the prosperity
of the mission. It has still gone on increasing
in numbers and influence. In 1853, the num-
ber of church members in connection with the
Methodist mission on this island, amounted to
2,472.— See Rev. Mdh. Miss. Soc. 1853, p. 106.
St. VmcenVs District. — In January, 1787, Dr.
Coke and three of the Brethren visited St. Vin-
cent's ; and Eev. Mr. Clarke remained, encour-
aged by the promise of several planters, that
their houses should always be open to receive
him, and their negroes ever ready to receive
his instructions. His congregations were large,
and his exertions appeared to be crowned with
considerable success, yet he was not without
opposition. But for several years it was con-
fined to some lawless individuals Avho on one
occasion broke into the chapel, defaced the
benches, and stole the Bible and hung it on the
public gallows. And at length, the arm of au-
thority was itself turned against the mission.
In December, 1792, the Assembly, with the
view of rooting out the Methodists from the
island, passed a law, that no person except the
rectors of the parishes should preach without a
764
WEST INDIES.
license ; and that no individual should receive
a license until lie had resided at least twelve
months on the island — a clause admirably cal-
culated to banish the Methodists from among
them, as their preacfiers would never consent
to lie' idle a whole year, in order to have liber-
tv of petitioning at the end of that period for
a license, which after all, would probably be
refused. Fur the first offence, the culprit was
to be punished by a fine of £18, or by impris-
onment ; for the second, by sucii corporeal pun-
ishment as the court should think proper ; and
by banishment from the island ; and to crown
the whole, if he returned from banishment, he
incurri-d the i)enalty of death! In justice to
the i)euple in general it may be well to say that
the nnijority were hostile to the law. But, the
next Sabljatli after the passage of the law,
Jlr. Lamb, the missionary, preached as usual.
Ite was apprehended, and on refusing to pay
the line, was thrown into prison. Wheu the
period nf his impri.soument had expired he was
releast'tl, but it was a release only to silence or
voluntary banishment. He preferred the lat-
ter, and retired from St. Vincent's. The
law, however, was in force only for a short
time, being disallowed by the king, as contrary
to the principles of toleration, which were now
an established part of the British Constitution.
In 1794, Messrs. Thomas Owens and James
Alexander were sent to reuDw the mission.
Before this, the members of the Methodist So-
ciety amounted to about 1,000 ; but soon after
its passiige, they were redueeil nearly one lialf.
Many now returned from their wanderings, and
the congregations began to increase ; but the
spirit of hostilitj was rather smothered than
Kuljdued. Jn March, 1797, a mob, headed by
a nuigislrate, attacked the Methodist chapel,
threw down the railings, broke the lamps, pull-
ed down the ctiUimunion rails, and tore the
Bilde in pieces and scattered them on the
ground. About a year after an attempt was
niu'le upon the live^ of the missionaries. Their
house wius broken open at the dead of night.
and some rullians armed with cutlasses, entered
the sleeping apartments, turned up the bed and
searched for ihem in every corner. Happily
the mis-sionaries, anticiimting the attack, had
taken refuge for the night at the dwelling of a
friend.
in the year 1841, a young man, who was
brought to a knowledge of the truth through
this mission, hearing of the sad mortality at-
ti-nding the agents of the Methoilist Missionary
SiK l.-iy in South Africa, oflered himself as a
mis-ioiinry to that land, where he is now ac-
tively laboring.
TriHtdnd (iwl Dcmemra. — During the past
few yeurs thonsand.s of immigrants have been
introduced into Trinidud and Demerara, from
Afriea and Hindustan, for whose religious iii-
Rtruetion tlie Wesleyan Mi.ssi(juary Soeiety hits
cndcJivnred to umke provision. This emigra-
tion has had au unfavorable effect on the mis-
sion, and preceded as it was, by a reduction of
wages, it led several of the church members to
leave, while the newly arrived immigrants from
Africa, with few exceptions, only tended to
demoralize the people by their heathenish
practices. It is very much questioned too,
whether the church members from Sierra
Leone were much improved in their temporal
circumstances, by emigrating to Trinidad ; but
it is certain, that there is no comparison be-
tween the tv/o countries as to religious advan-
tages. In Trinidad the greater number of
Wesleyan emigrants from Sierra Leone were
placed beyond tiic reach of their own mission-
aries, or any other Protestant ministers ; and
were thus exposed to the temptations of joining
in the barbarous practices of their heathea
countrymen, or of being led astray by the delu-
sions of Popery.
A review of missionary operations in Deme-
rara, during the past thirty years, gives rise to
the most grateful recollections. The mission-
ary during the first year of labor in that colony,
was often denounced as " an execrable wretch
who ought to be put out of the world,"' and
himself and his people frccjuently suffered per-
secution. At a public meeting, held ^nly 20
years since, all the leading persons in the colony
unanimously resolved, that the Court of Policy
be forthwith petitioned to expel all the mis-
sionaries from the colony, and a law be passed
prohibiting the admission of missionary preach-
ers into the colony for the future. But in 184.5,
the ])rinciples and designs of the missionaries
had been so well ascertained and so highly ap-
preciated, that all the leading persons in the
colony, including the Governor, have cordially
and liberally subscribed towards the erection
of a new Wesleyan chapel.
About the year 1850, various causes exerted
an adverse influence on the missions in Deme-
rara. Emigration from India, Africa, and
Madeira, introduced classes of persons sunk in
gress superstition and wickedness. British
(jiuiana witnessed during this year the erec-
tion of the swinging-pole ; and human beings
have been suspended from it, to the wild ad-
miration of the wretchedly deluded Hindoo,
and to the agonized mortification of the Chris-
tian. Many thousands of the Creole laborers
have withdrawn from the cultivation of the
estates, and have retreated to the backwoods
and river districts above the Falls. This
painful state of things has furnished a new
motive for effort on thejiart of the missionaries.
" The country," they write, " is becoming daily
more missionary in its character, and more
difiieult of moral cultivation ; it, therefore,
commends it.self to the truest sympathies of
the Committee." An important <i])portunity
for effecting extensive good is presented on
this island, by the ch.sc of some thousand.^ of
emi^irant coolici!. These persons have lately
applied to the mi.s.<ionaries for instruction in
their own language ; and Rev. Mr. Bickford
x/i.
O
Q
<
<
■Jo S^f'- ?-^
"^
o
H
o
<
M
PQ
H
o
X
H
Si
vT^
5 !j:__x:^
WEST INDIES.
765
sent home to the Committee a document drawn
up by one of them, Samuel Johnson, who had
been baptized, and who felt intensely for the
moral and spiritual improvement of his wretch-
ed countrymen. This document was accom-
panied by a request for a returned East India
missionary to labor among them. The Com-
mittee immediately sent out a supply of Tamil
Scriptures and tracts; and, in 1852, Eev. J.
E. S. Williams was sent to labor among them,
thus carrying the Gospel to 5,000 heathens.
The work of the mission at Georgetown and
Essequibo proceeds in an encouraging man-
ner, upwards of 60 having been added to the
Society, and the congregation enlarged by
African emigrants ; 36 of whom have been
baptized, and 52 are on the schoolmaster's
roll-book.
In 1853, the missionary to the coolies visited
many of the estates where they were employed,
and many of them called on him for instruc-
tion ; and he had received much encourage-
ment from the interest manifested in his work
by olBcial persons and others, in the colony ;
but no special results are reported among the
coolies.
The number of church members in this mis-
sion, in 1853, was 4,813.
St. Eustatius. — In 1787 Dr. Coke visited this
island ; but in consequence of the jealousy of
the Dutch government, he was not allowed to
preach to the negroes. However, he employed
himself in instructing small companies, in the
house of a free black, with whom he lodged.
In December, 1788, he again visited the island,
and notwithstanding persecution, the Method-
ist Society numbered, before his departure, no
less than 258. He preached once ; but next
morning received a message from the governor
forbidding it, under severe penalties. He left
the island, and afterwards went to Holland to
endeavor to secure from the Dutch government
the toleration of the Methodists in St. Eusta-
tius ; but his application was unsuccessful. In
1810, two Methodist missionaries waited upon
the governor of St. Eustatius, which had lately
been captured by the British, and obtained
liberty from him to establish a mission. They
experienced considerable hostility at first, but at
length triumphed over all opposition. The
king of Holland, to whom the island has been
restored, has ordered a grant of 600 guilders
annually to be made to the mission. The
tranquillity they now enjoy forms a striking
contrast to the intolerance of former years.
The congregations are large ; and many of the
white people, as well as the negroes, hear the
Word with great attention. In 1853, the num-
ber of church members was 315.
Barhadoes. — In December, 1788, Dr. Coke
and Mr. Benjamin Pearce visited Barbadoes ;
and, having obtained liberty to instruct the
slaves on several plantations, Mr. Pearce re-
mained, and commenced his labors with great
energy and zeal. But he soon experienced
violent opposition on the ground that he was
disseminating among the negroes notions in-
compatible with their condition as slaves.
Repeated attempts were made by the mob to
interrupt the meetings for worship, in which
they conducted in the most violent and out-
rageous manner. Mr. Pearce applied to a
magistrate for redress, who heard his state-
ment with apparent indignation at the rioters,
issued warrants against several of them, and
promised to do him justice, But when the
outrage had been clearly proved, the magis-
trate gave this extraordinary decision : " The
offence was committed against Almighty God :
It therefore does not belong to me to punish
it !" Mr. Pearce was left, with all his expenses
to pay, a prey to a lawless mob, at once the
scorn and pity of his foes. This emboldened
the rioters, and they again attacked the chapel,
and attempted an assault upon Mr. Pearce ;
but on his appealing again to the law, the
magistrate reprimanded them, and ordered
them to pay the expense of the proceedings.
But persecution did not cease. Soon after-
ward the rioters attacked his dwelling with
stones during his absence, and struck his wife
with violence.
In 1791, he was succeeded by Mr. Lamb,
who, on his arrival, found the prejudices of the
planters so far dispelled, that he had access to
more estates than he was able to visit. Perse-
cution had now nearly ceased, but it had given
place to a settled contempt for divine things.
But in October, 1823, intelligence was received
that an insurrection had broken out among
the slaves in Jamaica, and the Methodist mis-
sionaries were accused of being accessory to
it, by teaching sedition under pretence of giv-
ing instruction. This intelligence raised a
storm of wrath against the mission, and every
indignity was heaped on the missionary. A
mob assembled and tore down the chapel, and
Mr. Shrewsbury's life being in danger, he
left the island and went to St. Vincent's.
These outrages led to a censure upon the in-
habitants of the island from the British House
of Commons ; and to relieve themselves of the
odium, 94 of the principal men signed a de-
claration, expressing their regret at the occur-
rence, and their concurrence in the sentiments
of the House. But when another missionary,
Mr. Raynor, M"as sent to the island in 1826,
placards were posted up on the day of his land-
ing, calling upon the mob to tar and feather
him, and the president refused him a license to
preach. Yet, afterwards, he proceeded in his
work without molestation. A new chapel was
erected, the prejudice against the Methodists
subsided, and a prosperous mission was estab-
lished.
Virgin Islands. — In January, 1789, Dr.
Coke, with other brethren, visited Tortola,
and, finding a prospect of usefulness, Mr.
Hammet remained and soon collected a large
society. On the arrival of other preachers,
766
WEST INDIES.
they extended their labors to Spanish Town,
and many of the other islets which are scat-
tered up and down in that vicinity, and, like
solitary rocks, lift up their heads above the
waves. 'J'o several of these they paid frequent
visits in open boats, at the risk of health and
life, in order to preach to the few forgotten
families who inhabited them. The governor
of the island, on a threatened invasion by the
French, solicited the superintendent of the
mission, Mr. Turner, to place himself at the
head of the negroes, as he was unwilling to
trust them with arms under the command of
any person of less influence. As there was no
other means of defending the island, Mr. Tur-
ner considered it his duty to comply with the
request. But, happily, the French abandoned
their design and withdrew their scjuadron. In
December, 180;3, a most brutal outrage was
committed on ^Mr. Erownell, one of the mis-
sionaries in Tortola, by a mob, by which he
came near losing his lile, in revenge for an al-
leged publication of his in England, respect-
ing the morals of the people of the island.
Before the commencement of this mission,
every species of wickedness prevailed among
the negroes, and among others, a lascivious
dance, called camscn, in which all manner of
iniquity was practised, and a pretended inter-
course was carried on with the spirits of de-
parted friends, who directed them to seek re-
venge of injuries they (the spirits) had received
during life ; and the scene begun in mirth
often ended in blood. But, since the Gospel
entered^ these superstitious practices have
been abandoned. The church in Tortola, in
1853, numbered 1,604.
Jamaica. — Dr. Coke visited Jamaica in
1789, and was received with such extraordi-
nary kindness, as to encourage him to com-
mence a mission, and, soon after, Mr. Ilammet
was appointed to Kingston. But he very
Boon met with violent opposition and abuse
from the white people ; his meetings were dis-
turbed, and attempts made to burn and to tear
down his chapel ; and when he sought legal
redress, the cul[)rits were accjuitted against the
clearest testimony, and the grand jury declared
the missionaries and their chapels to be imi-
eances! The prejudice, however, after a time,
subsided, and they were allowed to labor in
peace for a number of years. But the storm
again burst forth, and raged with greater fury
than before. The I^cgislativc Assembly of
Jamaica, in 1802, passed an act that no per-
Bon, unles-s duly qualified by the laws of that
island and of Ureal Britain, should preach or
leach in meetings of negroes, or jjcoplo of color,
under the severest penalties. The Methodist
ministers, being regularly licensed in I':iigland,
did not consider themselves endangered by this
arbitrary luw. Mr. Campbell continued to
preach a.s usual at Kingston, and met with no
interruption; but, on preaching at Morant
Hay. he wjis seized and inij)risoned. On his
relea.se, he obtained license at Kingston, but,
on returning to [Morant Bay, he was again
persecuted, and believing his usefulness at an
end, he left his flock at Kingston in charge of
Mr. Fish, and returned to England. But the
king of England refused to sanction this in-
tolerant law ; and after two years, they were
permitted to resume their meetings. But, in
1807, the Common Council of Kingston passed
a law of similar import, but of a still more
stringent character, which forbade unlicensed
preaching or exhorting, and all meetings
earlier than six in the morning, or later than
sunset in the evening, which completely cut off
the slaves from public worship. And, not
long after, one of the missionaries was sen-
tenced to a month's imprisonment, because a
newly-arrived missionary had sung a new tune
in meeting! The Legislative Asscmblj', in
the mean time, passed an act equally cruel* and
intolerant, Vjy which a complete stop was put
to the labors of the Methodists in Jamaica.
These unrighteous laws coming before the
home government, were immediately repudi-
ated ; and the king, to prevent the repetition
of such shameful proceedings, issued a general
order to the governors of the West Indies,
commanding them, on no pretence whatever,
to give their assent to any law relative to re-
ligion, until they had first transmitted a draft
of the bill to England, and received the royal
assent. This greatly enraged the Assembly,
and led to violent proceedings, in consequence
of which, the governor (Duke of Manchester)
■immediately dissolved the assembly. It was
not, however, till the month of December,
1815, that the missionaries obtained permis-
sion to resume their public labors. Mr. John
Shipman obtained a license, and immediately
began to preach again in Kingston, after the
chapel had been shut, with one short interval,
for more than eight years. Other missionaries
obtained similar licenses, and, having divided
the island into districts, they proceeded in
their labors with increased energy and zeal.
'J'hcy now received more invitations from
planters to preach on their estates than they
had ever done before. Their congregations
greatly increased, and their societies were aug-
mented to an extent unknown in any other
island.
In 1824, the spirit of opposition again broke
out, in consequence of the House of Commons
having taken some incipient steps towards the
extinction of slavery. The missionaries were
accused of being agents of the African Insti-
tution, and every effort was made to blacken
their characters and send them away from the
island. The Assembly again pa.ssed a law,
which, though it left Roman Catholic and
Jewish teachers at liberty, cut off the Metho-
dists from their public duties. Under this act,
one of the missionaries was imprisoned ; and,
instigated liy an inflammatory sermon preached
by the rector of the parish against the Metbo-
WEST INDIES.
767
dists, a company of militia attacked the resi-
dence of the missionaries, and left seven balls
in the walls of the house, though none of the
inmates were injured.
Two others, Messrs. Whitehouse and Orton,
were imprisoned in a filthy cell, at Montcgo
Bay, on a charge of preaching without a
license for that parish ; but on being brought
before the chief-justice, they were discharged,
and the lieutenant-governor, Sir Thomas
Keane, dismissed from office the two magis-
trates who had committed them. Another
slave act was passed by the Assembly similar
to the rejected ones, and approved by the gov-
ernor, Earl Belmore, notwithstanding the in-
structions of the king to the contrary ; but it
was promptly disallowed by the home govern-
ment.
In December, 1831, an insurrection broke
out on the north side of the island, in the par-
ish of St. James's, and quickly extended to
Trelawney, Hanover, Westmoreland, St. Eliz-
abeth, and partially to Manchester, Port-
land, and St. Thomas in the east. It does
not appear to have been the design of the
slaves to take the lives of the white people,
their object being simply to obtain their free-
dom, which they erroneously supposed had
been granted by the king, but was withheld by
the local authorities. A violent outcry was
now raised agaijist all missionaries, particularly
the Baptists and Methodists, as if they had
been the cause of it. Without trial, without
evidence, they were proclaimed guilty, and a
violent outcry was raised for summary mea-
sures to be taken with them. Some of the
missionaries were arrested, but as nothing
could be proved against them, they were dis-
charged. Immediately after the supiwession
of the insurrection, associations were formed
throughout the island, the object of which
was to expel from the country all ministers
except those of the established church. The
proceedings of these associations were of the
most violent character. A mob was raised,
the chapel of St. Ann's Bay was destroyed,
and the missionaries hung in effigy, and every
indignity offered them.
During these persecutions, the societies in
/arious places were left without pastoral care,
and the congregations without public worship,
the missionaries not being allowed to exercise
their ministry. Meanwhile, Earl Mulgrave
arrived as governor of the island, and showed
his determination to maintain the cause of re-
ligious liberty, and to protect the missionaries
in the enjoyment of their rights and privileges.
In January, 1S33, 13 montlis from the com-
mencement of the disturbances, a royal pro-
clamation was issued in Jamaica for putting
down the lawless colonial church unions, and
maintaining religious toleration. This was
accompanied by a circular, requiring the
prompt obedience and cooperation of the ma-
gistrates in enforcing it. It was now decided
by the grand court that the toleration laws of
England were applicable to Jamaica; yet,
notwithstanding this and the governor's pro-
clamation, one of the magistrates, on Mr.
Greenwood's applying for license according to
the provisions of the toleration act, behaved
in such a violent manner that Mr. G. was
obliged to retire from the court, to save him-
self from personal injury. But, in consequence
of the energetic course of the governor, the
missionaries were, after some time, allowed to
carry on their labors without molestation.
On Friday, the 1st of August, 1834, slavery
was abolished in the AVcst Indies, in conform-
ity with an act passed the preceding year by
the newly reformed Parliament of Great Bri-
tain— a memorable event, mainly brought
about by missionary labor and suffering. A
graphic description of the inauguration of
freedom at the Wesleyan chapel at Kingston
is given by Rev. H. Blcby, but our limits will
not allow us to give it at length. A sermon
was preached the night before, by the mission-
ary ; after which the whole assembly knelt in
prayer, and remained on their knees till the
town clock struck the hour of midnight, when
thousands of voices joined in the shout, "Glory
be to God.' ivefrec! ice free!" Free scope was
then given to the general outburst of joy ; after
which a hynm of praise was sung, a prayer
offered, and the crowd dismissed with the ben-
ediction.
The emancipation of the negroes was quick-
ly followed by very important changes. The
Sabbath was observed with hallowed "strict-
ness. Nothing was to be seen on that day but
decently-dressed people going to and from
their places of worship ; congregations were
increased and multiplied ; old chapels were en-
larged, and new ones erected. Education was
also greatly extended. A great change took
place also in the public opinion of Jamaica as
to the Methodist missionaries. Formerly no
names were too vile, no treatment too bad for
them ; even their chapels Avere shut up or
razed to the ground as public nuisances. Yet
within five years after the late insurrection,
the House of Assembly of Jamaica made a
grant of £500 to aid in the erection of a Me-
thodist chapel in Kingston ; and in the discus-
sion of the subject the highest eulogiums were
pronounced on the usefulness of the Wesleyan
missionaries. The Common Council of Kings-
ton and several of the parochial vestries fol-
lowed the example of the Assembly, and made
grants for similar purposes. Yet, though at
first the prospects of the mission seemed to
brighten, after a few years they grew .worse.
Many of the colored people purchased small
lots of land, sometimes in the mountains, built
cottages, and cultivated the ground for their
living. Many left their old homes and sought
employment elsewhere, often at a distance from
the house of God. Many grew worldly-mind-
ed, made money the great object of their pur-
768
WEST EST)IES.
suit, and sought for happiness in earthly tilings.
Some even returned to their vile heathenish
practices, which it was hoped they had utterly
Forgotten.
In 1853, the number of church members in
connection with the Jamaica mission was
19,478 — a considerable decrease from former
years ; for in 1844 they amounted to 26,585.
The stations of the missionaries are no longer
confined to the chief town, but are to be found
in all parts of the island, both in the towns
and in the country places.
Bermudas. — In 1779, Mr. John Stephenson
commenced a mission on Somer's Island where
he had to encounter the prejudices of the
whites and the heathenish superstitions of the
blacks ; the latter of whom he found under
the slavish dominion of witchcraft, as it
prevails in Africa, and for a description of
which, and the bondage under which its vic-
tims are held, the reader is referred to the
article on fVcstern Africa. It appears that a
particular species of charm called Obi, was
made and sold at these islands, and was sup-
posed by the negroes to have great power. It
was to a people sunk under such superstitions
that Mr. S. came ; but it was not long before
the Gospel began to exert its influence. Yet
this was no sooner manifested, than the hos-
tility of the whites was aroused. Laws were
passed similar to those in Jamaica, and Mr.
S. was imprisoned six months in the common
jail, Vjy winch his health was so impaired that
he was recalled, and the island was left without
a missionary for six years. In April, 1808, Mr.
Joshua Marsden proceeded from New Bruns-
wick to Bermuda, but found the society gather-
ed by Mr. S. dispersed, lie obtained permission
from the governor to preach, but he met with
no very great success. In 1853, the number of
churcli members in connection with the mis-
sion in this island amounted to 445.
Bahama Islands. — In October, 1800, Mr.
William Turton arrived at New Providence,
where he obtained permission to preach ; and
though a law had previously been enacted,
prohibiting the instruction of the slaves, he
was attended by considerable congregations,
and succeeded in raising a small society.
Other mi.ssionaries liavig afterwards arrived,
tliey extended their labors to Eleuthera, Har-
bour Island, Abaco, and others of the Baha-
mas. On some of these their prospects were
highly encouraging ; their congregations were
large;, attentive, and respectable, and a great
reformation followed their labors. But in
1816, ihe legislature passed an act prohibiting,
under sev( re penalties, meetings for Divine wor-
ship rarlier than sunrise and later than sunset,
thus depriving the slaves of the privilege of
attending. Many of the negroes came to the
nii.siiionaries in tears, lamenting the loss of
their religious privilege.s. It was truly affect-
ing on the Habbath morning to see some of
the oldcs* members ascending a neighboring
hill to see whether the sun was risen, before
they durst begin to sing the praises of their
Creator. After a few years, however, the le-
gislature retraced its steps, and repealed the
restrictions which it had laid upon' the poor
negroes. In 1853, the members of the Me-
thodist Society in the Bahama Islands were as
follows : —
New Providence, . . . 816
Eleuthera, 804
Harbour Island, . ' . . 538
Abaco and Andros Island, . . 264
Turk's Island . . .378
Total, . . 2,800
St. Domingo. — Having been previously in-
formed by the secretary of state of the repub-
lic of Hayti, that Protestant missionaries would
not only be tolerated but welcomed, Messrs.
John Brown and James Catts sailed from
England for Port-au-Prince, in November,
1816. They soon gathered a numerous con-
gregation at the capital, and in the country
they were uniformly treated with kindness and
respect. The inhabitants, indeed, were ex-
tremely ignorant, wicked, and superstitious ;
yet, in a short time a number of them appear-
ed to be impressed with divine things, and
were formed into a society. By the govern-
ment they were treated with great condescen-
sion and kindness. Presid^t Boyer mani-
fested the greatest readiness to encourage and
promote their plans, particularly in regard to
the education of youth. Yet, after a residence
of about two years in St. Domingo, they were
obliged to withdraw from the island, in conse-
quence of the tumultuoiTS opposition of the po-
pulace. But on their departure, President
Boyer not only expressed himself highly satis-
fied with their conduct, but transmitted a do-
nation of £500 to the society. The constitu-
tion of Hayti recognized the church of Rome
as the religion of the state, but tolerated all
others. ItT may be questioned, however, whe-
ther the principle of toleiatiou was at all un-
derstood ; practically, at least, the Methodists
enjoyed nothing like religious freedom. The
small society that the missionaries had collect-
ed were, after their departure, greatly perse-
cuted chiefly through the influence of the Ca-
tholic priests over the ignorant people, in
which, however, they were too much seconded
by some persons of high rank. They could
only meet by stealth, and in small companies ;
and when assembled for worship, they were
sometimes assaulted by the populace with
stones and other missiles. On one occasion, a
number of them were seized by the police, and
carried to prison, and on being brought before
the chief judge, they were prohibited by him,
in the name of the president, from meeting to-
gether. " No one," said he, " can hinder you
from worshij)ing Cod as you plcjise ; but let
every one abide at home; for as often as
you are found assembled you shall bo put in
WEST INDIES.
769
prison ; and if you unhappily persist, I have re-
ceived orders to disperse you everywhere."
Several wished to reply, but he refused to hear
them, saying, " It is not from me ; it is not
my fault ; these are orders given to me."
There is reason to apprehend that these were
the orders of President Boyer. Tet the poor
people continued to meet. In 1834, John Tin-
dall was sent to Hayti ; other missionaries fol-
lowed, and settled at Port-au-Prince, Cape
Haytieu and Samand. Their congregations
were generally small, and they had no great
encouragement in their labors. There was
reason to believe that numbers saw the absurd-
ities of the Romish church, but ignorance,
superstition, and vice maintained their domin-
ion over the great mass of the population.
Notwithstanding the unsettled state of affairs,
arising from changes in the government and
war with the Spanish part of the island, the
principle of religious toleration has made
marked progress. In 1853, the number of
church members in connexion with the mission
in this island amounted to 429.
Otlier missions. — Besides the missions already
noticed, the Methodists established others in
St. Christophers, Nevis, Grenada, St. Bartho-
lomew, St. Thomas, St. Martins, Anguilla,
Montserrat, Tobago, and Honduras, the present
state of which will be seen in the tabular view.
In 1853, the African, Creole, and Asiatic
church members in connection with the Wes-
leyan missions in the West Indies, amounted to
over 48,000 souls ; and other general results of
the mission will be seen in the tabular view.
Though in the preceding account of particu-
lar missions we have given a few illustrations
of the nat«re and difficulties of missionary labor
in the West Indie^n the days of slavery, we
shall here add, in conclusion, a remark or two
of general application to the whole of these mis-
sions. It was a great disadvantage to the ne-
groes, that the Lord's day was assigned them
by their masters to cultivate the grounds al-
lowed them in lieu of provisions, and that the
regular market throughout the West Indies
was on that sacred day, when the chief towns
exhibited all the noise and bustle of petty com-
merce. After breakfast, on one Sabbath, a
driver or overseer accompanied the slaves to
the negro fields, where they spent the Sabbath
toiling all day under a burning sun. On the
following Lord's day, they went to market to
sell the produce of their grounds and to pur-
chase such articles as they were not allowed by
their masters, and they closed the day in drink-
ing, dancing, and debauchery. Such was a
Sabbath in the West Indies. The Christian
slaves had to perform the same work as the
others, unless, as in some cases, their masters
allowed them the Saturdays for that purpose.
They went to market in the forenoon, and from
thence to the chapel. It was no uncommon
thing to see the chapel yard covered with bas-
kets, while their owners were attending wor-
49
ship. The missionaries did not, however, as
was insinuated, excite complaint among the
slaves on this subject. They were no doubt
grieved at the profanation of the Sabbath, and
the beneficial eflects of their labors were mate-
rially counteracted by it ; but they accommo-
dated themselves to the circumstances of the
slaves, seized upon the broken fragments of
their time, and made the best improvement of
them they were able.
TABULAR VIEW.
PRINCrPAL
STATIONS OR
aRCUITS.
Antigua
Domiaica
Montserrat
Nevis
St. Kitts
St. Eustatius
St. Barttiolomew. ..
St. Martins
Anguilla
Tortola
Kingstown
Biabou
Grenada
Trinidad
Tobago
Georgetown
Mahaica
Victoria
Barbadoes
Kingston
Montego Bay
Spanish Town
Morant Bay
Guy'sHiU
Grateful HUl
Falmouth
St. Ann's Bay
Ocho Rios
BeecharaviUe
Bath & Port Morant.
Port Antonio
Clarendon
Mount Ward
Brown's Town
Duncan's
YaUahs
Mount Fletcher
Linstead
Manchioneal
Belize & Charibtown
New Providence
Eleuthera, 1
Eleuthera, 2
Harbour Island
Abaco
Andros Island
Turk's Island
Port-au-Prince
Port-au-Plaat
Jeremie
Cape Haytien
Cayes
Totals
397 79 146
o
2,472
915
404
1,
3,687
315
100
S6
331
1,604
2,380
2,433
671
1,
1,549
468
549
3,045
3,210
767
824
965
l.OO
'466
55
66
712
1,233
2,056
473
1,133
1,511
607
772
659
536
491
830
646
816
447
35 7
538
249
15
378
180
166
20
41
22
48,589
1,706
260
321
810
1,780
151
53
90
352
639
671
253
290
850
1,436
380
440
1,700
414
210
210
115
264
126
175
92
156
150
113
128
270
120
209
190
96
507
279
360
191
410
208
328
300
148
88
204
9,000
2,350
1,000
5,000
9,250
1,000
500
1,000
1,000
3.550
4,580
6,020
1,520
1,600
2,200
2,300
1,403
1,759
9,500
7,500
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
500
500
1,000
1,100
1,832
2,056
1,000
1,500
3,000
900
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,500
1,000
1,860
1,700
1,400
1,000
1,600
985
30
1,210
600
500
140
360
400
112405
There was in general no such thing as map-
riage, in the common sense of the word, among
the slaves in the West Indies. They herd^
770
WEST INDIES.
together like the beasts of the field, -wit
any cerenionv. Some lived together n
ithout
any ceremony, come- nvcu luyi^mti many
years ; others soon parted, and each chose a
new mate. Promiscuous intercourse was com-
mon, and the planters, when they made the
attempt, found themselves utterly unable to
break it. Marriajre, however, was uniformly
introduced by the Methodist missionaries among
the converts ; but with respect to this they had
many difficulties to encounter. They were fre-
quently at a loss to know which was the pro-
per husband or wife. A female, for instance,
wished to become a member of the society ;
but the man with whom she lived was not the
first to whom she had been united. She had
lived with many others, and the person with
whom she was originally connected bad in like
manner had many more women since he left
her ; and perhaps was living at that time with
one by whom he had children. Somotimes the
missionaries were content with an engagement
on the part of the woman that she would abide
with the man with whom she lived when she
joined the society. At other times, they acted
to the best of their judgment in selecting the
person whom they thought most proper.
Though we have given several instances of
the hostility of the white inhabitants of the
West Indies to the labors of the Methodists, it
would be an act of great injustice both to the
planters and to the missionaries, did we neglect
to mention, that such feelings were by no means
universal. In some of the colonies, there were
not only no persecuting laws, but they were
greatly encouraged, both by the local govern-
ment and by the owners of the slaves. Even
in those islands where they met with persecu-
tion, they had many friends among the plant-
ers and others of the white inhabitants. Some
built chapels on their estates, others subscribed
handsomely to their erection in the neighbor-
hood. There was scarcely a place of worship
of any size in the West Indies, in the building
of which the gentlemen of the island did not
assist by their contributions, or in some other
form. Subscriptions of £10, £20, £50, and
£100 for such purposes, indicate both the rank
in life, and the sentiments of the contributors.
Kven in Jamaica, where the reputed dark and
dangerous fanaticism of the Methodists was
detected witli more than ordinary sagacity, the
moat liberal assistance was afforded. In other
islands, planters, merchants, members of colo-
nial assemlilies, presidents, chief-judges, gover-
nors, not only subscribed to the erection of
chap(■l^, but in some instances paid regular
Btiponds to the missionaries, as a remuneration
for their services in instructing their slaves.
In several of the islands indeed the proprietors
of CRtAtcs, and other inhabitants, were so fully
satigfied with the conduct of the missionaries,
and Ro sensible of tlie political as well as moral
and religious advantages resulting from their
labors, that they defrayed entirely the ordinary
expenses of the mission. Since the abolition
of slavery, the views of the white people in the
West Indies in reference to the Methodist mis-
sionaries have been greatly changed ; and it
is probably now matter of wonder to many,
that any hostility should ever have been mani-
fested to so zealous, laborious, and useful a
body of men. — Marsden's Missionary Narrative;
Broicn's History of 31ission3 ; Jackson's Cente-
nary of Metlioaism ; Duncan's 31ission to Ja-
maica ; Memorials of Miss. Labor in W. Indies,
by Moister. — Rev. W. Butler.
American Missionary Association. — Ja-
maica.— The mission to Jamaica is occupied
mainly with labor in behalf of the emancipated
colored people of Jamaica, It was commenced
by five Congregational ministers, who sailed
from New York in the fall of 1839. They
went to Jamaica with the expectation of
receiving a plain support from the eman-
cipated people themselves ; but in this they
were disappointed, and as there was then no
missionary society in the United States that
could undertake the support of a mission there,
they were reduced to circumstances of distress-
ing privation. A committee was formed of
gentlemen residing in New York and Now
England, called the West India Missionary Com-
tnittee, who received and forwarded contribu-
tions for this mission, but without undertaking
its support. In 1847 the mission was trans-
ferred to the American Missionary Association,
under whose care it remains. In 1843, the
missionaries formed a Congregational Associa-
tion, under the name of the " Jamaica Congre-
gational Association ; " and the mission is now
known in the island as the " American Con-
gregational Mission."
•
TABULAR V0fr.
STATIONS.
Brainerd, includiDg Mr. l
Patience'a Bcbool. ... J
Good Hope (au out-sUUon)
OborliQ
Eliot
Kock River (out-station)..
Union, including Ilenni- \
tage and Chesterfield j
Pevon I'en
lYovidence
Brandon (out-station)
Golden Vale
Totals
1839
1853
1839
1842
1853
1839
1839
1844
1851
1851
433 716
For the purpose of leading the people to
take more interest in the education of their chil-
dren, and to accustom them to responsibility
m;
WEST INDIES.
771
in the conduct of the schools, the missionaries
formed a vohintary school association in 1852.
Two of the directors of each school are chosen
from among- the people of the station, and as-
sociated with the missionaries and teachers in
the general management of the school. With
the results of this plan, after two years' trial,
the teachers are well pleased. — Rev. G. Whip-
ple.
Moravian Missions. — Danish W. I. Islands.
— The first Moravian missionaries to the West
Indies, were Leonhard Dober, " the potter," and
David Nitschmann " the carpenter." Their at-
tention was first directed to this field by a ne-
gro, who stated that he had a sister in the
island of St. Thomas, who, with many of her
enslaved companions, desired to be instructed
in the way of salvation, and earnestly implored
the God of heaven to send some one who was
capable of giving them religious instruction.
In the hope of being of some service to these be-
nighted people, these young men, laymen, of
the occupations above named, set out from
Herrnhut, in Denmark, with only six dollars
each in his pocket, and arrived at St. Thomas
on the 13th of December, 1732. The next
year two companies, one consisting of 18 and
the other of 11 persons, sailed from Europe,
many of whom fell victims to the insalubrity
of the climate. In 1736, three persons were
baptized. In 1738 a negro named Mingo was
baptized, and became a zealous assistant.
Through his preaching an awakening took
place over the whole island. But the planters
opposed the work, and persecuted and impris-
oned the mksionaries. Count Zinzendorf, how-
ever, who unexpectedly arrived in the island,
procured their liberation. In 1741, 90 persons
were baptized at a plantation called New
Herrnhut. Princess jjlantation, in the island
of St. Croix, became a permanent station in
1751. A church was erected in Friedensthal,
St. Croix, in 1755, a,nd this became the princi-
pal station in the Danish islands. The place
was destroyed by a hurricane in 1772. Bethany,
in the island of St. Jan, was occupied as a sta-
tion in 1754 ; and in 1782, Emmaus, in the
same island, became a station. Friedensfield,
in St. Croix, became a missionary settlement in
1805. In 1832, a centenary jubilee was held,
and the important and encouraging fact was
reported, that during that period 37,000 souls
had been baptized in the Danish islands. The
year 1848 was rendered memorable by the ii>
surrection of slaves in St. Croix, and by the
emancipation of the negroes in all the Danish
isles.
In the three Danish islands, St. Thomas, St.
Croix, and St. Jan, there are at the present
time 8 stations, 35 laborers, 9,398 converts
of whom 2,892 are communicants.
Jamaica. — The Moravian brethren com-
menced a mission in this island in 1754, en-
couraged by several of the planters, who pre-
sented them an estate called Carmel. In one
year the Sabbath congregation numbered
700 persons, and 26 had been baptized. In
1804, fifty years from the date of the mission,
the brethren observe : " Though we cannot
exult in an abundant in-gathering of souls,
which these fifty years have produced, or even
over our present prospects, yet we have suffi-
cient cause of gratitude to the Lord for having
preserved a seed in Jamaica. From the be-
ginning of this mission to the present time,
938 negroes have been baptized."
In 1824, a serious insurrection broke out in
the island ; and in 1831, another still more
general and bloody. To this last outbreak the
slaves were provoked, say the missionaries,
" by inhuman treatment, instigated also by
hearing of the sympathy which their lot had
excited in England and its parliament."
Much hatred was excited against the missions,
and several churches of different denominations
were broken up. In 1834, a system of eman-
cipation was commenced, but complete liberty
was not granted till 1838. " From that time,"
say the brethren, " our mission in Jamaica has
prospered greatly. Our six churches were
over-crowded. At the church in Fairfield,
which contains 800 sittings, above 2,000 per-
sons sought admittance. It was therefore ne-
cessary to keep two meetings, either at the
same time or in succession. The schools were
equally over-crowded. The souls under our
care numbered 8,000. New preaching places
were established, and many school-houses were
erected." In 1842, an institution for training
native teachers was established. In 1850, the
souls under the care of the mission at the se-
j veral stations, was estimated at 13,000. 25
elementary schools were in active operation,
under the superintendence of the missionaries.
The Moravian Church Miscellany for May,
1851, contains a review of the Jamaica mis-
sion, representing it as comprising 13 stations,
at the west end of the island, each station con-
sisting of various buildings — a church, a
school- house, and a dwelling-house, with out-
offices. With each station a congregation is
connected, living within a circle, the diameter
of which is, in most cases, about 20 miles.
Besides the principal stations, there are 17
school-houses and out station schools, making
the number of churches 13, and of schools 30.
The number of negroes in connexion with
these churches amounted, at the above date, to
13,388, young and old. Many white families
also regularly attended the churches. These
statements are not essentially modified by any
later returns.
AntigiM. — The brethren's mission was com-
menced in this island in 1756. It originated
with the missionaries at St. Thomas, and the
first missionary was from that place. Little
interest was excited in the minds of the ne-
groes, however, till 1761, when a piece of
ground was purchased in the town of St.
John's, and a place of worship was erected for
772
WEST INDIES.
the negroes. In 1772, a religious awakening
spread over the island. A desire for religious
instruction wu-s increased among the slaves,
and in 1775 the attendants on public worship
numbered 2,000, and from 10 to 20 were bap-
tized almost every month. The converts were
subject to many temptations and troubles,
such as famine, sickness, persecution, depreda-
tions, and the excitements consequent upon the
taking of the island by the French ; yet the
cause was firm and progressive, so that after
the restoration of peace, in 1783, GO adults
were received into the church at St. John's,
in one day, and in a year 700 were added to
the congregations. The missionaries preached
on diflerent plantations, and one native assist-
ant built a house of worship at his own e.\-
pense, to scat 400 persons. Many of the
planters saw that the efifects of the Gospel
upon the slaves was highly beneficial, and
when any of thera were refractory, they sent
them to the missionaries for reproof, instead of
administering corporeal punishment. J3ut others
were decidedly hostile, and would punish their
slaves severely for attending on the means of
grace. One negro was compelled to give his
own wife fifty lashes, because she hud sought
the protection of the local authorities. At
another time, an aged female negro was un-
mercifully whipped and put in irons, from ha-
tred to her religion, and the next day she was
chained to two negroes, and dragged towards
the field to work, but died on the way. Amidst
these persecutions the church in Antigua re-
sembled the burning bush. In spite of oppo-
sition, the word of the Lord continued to run
and be glorified, and the two congregations,
in 1788, numbered more than 0,000 ; and so
many new doors were opened for preaching the
Gospel, that the missionaries were thankful to
find u.5eful assistants in many of the converts,
who visited the sick, gave advice, and minister-
ed in many ways, though they were not employ-
ed in preaching.
In 179G, a third station was formed ; the
names of the three .stations being St. John's.
Grace Hill, and Grace IJay. In 1810, they
commenced a school on the I^ncasterian plan,
at St. John's, with 80 scholars, wliich soon in-
creased to 700, who made surprising ])rogress
in learning. In 1812, owing to the dryness of
the season and the war with America, provi-
sions became dear and scarce, and famine and
disease prevailed, which carried off more than
200 of the congregation at St. John's. In 1817,
the brethren commenced a fourth station, at a
place called Newfield, for which the colonial
government presented them with ten acres of
land, £1,000 towards the erection of buildings,
and an annual grant of £!J00 for their support.
Two (ilhor stations were added. Cedar JIall,
and Moiuit Joy and large congregations were
collected. In 182.'}, they celebrated the .OOtii
anniversary of the opening of the churclj at
St. John's, when it appeared that there had
been baptized and received into the church in
that time, 16,099 negroes, young and old.
Among a people so ignorant and oppressed,
however, some allowance must be made for
spurious conversions. In 1826, the mission in
Antigua was strengthened by the arrival of
several brethren from Europe. The number
of slaves receiving instruction at this period,
was 14,823. Bible and missionary societies
were formed among the negroes in 1832 ; and
in 1834, unconditional emancipation was pro-
claimed in the island, the negroes being consider-
ed sufficiently advanced in knowledge and intel-
ligence to render such a measure safe and pro-
per. In 1838, Lebanon, the sixth station, was
begun, and 1839, Gracefield was commenced
in "the north. A training school was opened
at Cedar Hall, in 1847, but the buildings were
destroyed by a hurricane the next year. They
have been rebuilt, and the institution is in a
flourishing condition. There are not so many
under the instruction of the missionaries in
Antigua at the present time as there were a
few years ago, owing chiefly, as is supposed,
to the increase of churches of other denomi-
nations ; still the number as last reported,
amounted to about 8,000.
St. KitVs. — A mission was begun in this
island in 1777, at Basseterre. In a year or
two a general interest was awakened among
the negroes, which continued, with some inter-
ruptions, so that in 1790 the Gospel wa3
preached on upwards of 50 plantations. In
1800 the number of converts was estimated at
about 2,000. A second station, Bethesda, was
formed in 1820 ; and in 1832 a third waa be-
gun at Bethel. From this time the activity of
other missionary societies increased, and many
who had attended the Moravian meetings fell
off, and joined congregations nearer and more
convenient. Estridge, a fourth station, was
commenced in 1845.
Barbmhcs.—'Vha Brethren entered upon • a
mission in this island in 1765. The first con-
vert was baptized in 1708 ; but there has been
no such general desire for the word of God as
in many of the other West India islands. Two
stations were established, one at Sharon, in
1794, and one at Mount Tabor, in 1826. In
1831, l)oth these stations were destroyed by a
hurricane, and upwards of 4,000 souls perished
in the island. These stations were rebuilt in
1832, when the congregations numbered about
1100. A congregation was established at
Bridgetown in 1836, and another at Clifton
Hill, in 1841, making four .stations, which aro
still occupied with a good degree of success.
Tobago. — The Moravians have had a mission
in this island since 1787. At several different
times it has been suspended, but resumed again,
and it still exists, as one of the many proofs of
the ble.>*sing of God on missionary perseverance.
There are two stations, Montgomery and
Moriah.
DxUcli Guwn«.— Into this field two of the
WEST INDIES
773
Brethren cutered iu 1733. One of their lead-
ing objects was to carry the Gospel to the
Arawacks, a numerous Indian tribe in tliat
part of Surinam called Rio de Berbice. Their
first station was at Filgerhiit, on the river
Wironje, a tributary of the Berbice. At the
end of ten years the mission was favored with
the presence and labors of Theophilus Solomon
Schumann, called " the gifted apostle of the
Arawacks." By his great talents and " won-
derful combination of wisdom and firmness,"
he was enabled, under God, to triumph over
the opposition of the whites, and 300 converts
crowned his labors. But in 1757 difficulties
of every description, among which were fam-
ine and epidemics, thickened around, and
almost dispersed this little flock. By removals
they sought a more peaceful abode, and much
might te>related of the heroic perseverance of
the Moravian brethren in these primeval for-
ests. In 17G0. Schumann was called from his
labors on earth. The work was continued by
other missionaries, though amid appalling diffi-
culties and discouragements. Station after
station was invaded and burnt by the Bush
Negroes, and the converts dispersed, and finally,
in 1808, the mission among the South Amejfc
can Indians, after existing 70 years,was brougnx
to a close.
A mission among the negro slaves in Suri-
nam, was commenced iu 1735, at Parimaribo
as head-quarters. The missionaries went out
with licenses for several trades, by which they
supported themselves. The first convert iu
Parimaribo was baptized in 1776, and the first
church was erected in 1778. From 1799 to
1816 the colony was a scene of frequent wars
between the Batch and the English, but the
mission was at no time entirely interrupted.
In 1821 the '• Harmony of the Gospels," was
translated into Negro-English, and was heartily
welcomed by those who were able to read. In
1828 the brethren opened a new church in Pari-
maribo, with a congregation of 2,260. The most
respected inhabitants furmed a society, which
still renders valuable assistance to the mission.
In 1830 Berg en Dal, on the Surinam, 90 miles
from Parimaribo, was opened as a preaching
place. During this year the British and Foreign
Bible Society printed the Negro-English New
Testament for the Surinam mission. It had pre-
viously existed only in manuscript. Several
new stations have been formed, but the largest
and most important is still at Parimaribo,
where the congregation, iu 1850, numbered
5,500 souls. The other negroes under the care
of the mission ai'e scattered over several hun-
dred plantations. The Brethren have also a
mission among the Bush, or Free Negroes, on
the upper Surinam, a country which can be
reached only by dangerous voyages iu small
canoes up the streams, the navigation of which
is rendered extremely perilous by cataracts.
The heat is extreme, and the climate fatal to
most Europeans. Into this region two of tlie
Brethren penetrated iu 176o. One of them
died in two months, the other labored 12 years,
and was the means of bringing a few souls to
accept the Gospel invitation. New Bambey,
a station some miles lower down the river, was
established iu 1785, for a company of 20 ne-
groes. Considerable desire was manifested for
several years in the interior of the country, to
hear the Gospel, but sickness and death among
the missionaries proved a great hindrance to
their labors. In 1813 the congregation in New
Bambey numbered 50, but there was little vi-
tality among them, and the field was relinquish-
ed ; it was afterwards resumed, but owing to
the death of missionaries, was given up again
in 1848.
English General Baptists. — Jamaica. —
The Baptists entered upon their mission in Ja-
maica iu 1814. The first station was at Fal-
mouth, where a school was opened, and preach-
ing commenced on the Sabbath, attended by
both negroes and white people. Two more mis-
sionaries arrived the next year, and settled at
Kingston. Encouraged by early indications of
success, the society pressed forward its work, in-
creasing the number of laborers and forming
new stations, till, at the annual meeting of the
missionaries iu Falmouth, in April, 1831, the
following tabular statement was presented :
CHURCHES.
Kingston, Queen-street
'' Hanover •'
Yallahs
Spanish Town
Moutcgo Bay
Gurney 'b Mount
Falmouth
Anotta Bay
Charles Town
Port Maria
Ora Cabessa
Brae Head
Mount Charles
Old Harbor
Hayes Savanna
Crooked Spring
Port Royal
St. Ann's Bay
Ocho Rios
Savanna la Mar
Fuller's Field
Rio Bueno
Stewart's Town
Lucea
Totals.
2,937
769
103
1,036
1,572
126
885
510
112
410
45
36
319
265
257
723
202
52
22
128
108
50
The mission continued to prosper, and the
churches had at no time been in a better con-
dition than when the act of emancipation was
carried into effect, in 1838. Yet, those who
were unfriendly to this act, and wished to
make its results appear to the worst advan-
tage, raised numerous reports against the mis-
774
WEST INDIES.
gionarios, and sought in every way to embar-
rass their operations. This led Sir Lionel
Smith to make some explicit statements in
their defcuce. In reply to an address from
the Baptist brethren, he said, " On my assum-
ing the government of this colony, I strongly
expressed my reliance on the whole body of
missionaries, in their high integrity of purpose,
and in their luyal principles. You more than
realized all the benefits I expected from your
ministry, l)y raising the negroes from the men-
tal degradation of slavery to the cheering obli-
gations of Christianity, and they were thus
taught that patient endurance of evil, which
has so materially contributed to the general
tranquillity. Even with the aid of a vicious
and well paid press, both in Elngland and
Jamaica, the enemies of your religion have
never dared go to the proof of their audacious
accusations against you." After alluding to
the peaceful working of emancipation, and the
disappointment of those who had predicted
violence and blood, the governor added, " The
admirable conduct of the peasantry in such a
crisis, has constituted a proud triumph to the
cause of religion ; and tliose who contributed
to enlighten them in their moral duties, through
persecutions, insults, and dangers, have deserved
the regard and esteem of the good and the just
in all Christian countries." This was said
after one year of freedom had passed away.
The returns made from the rcspeciive mission
churches in 1839, evinced that the work of
God continued to advance in an encouraging
degree. A nett increase of 2,G17 members
had taken place during the preceding year,
and the whole number of members was 21,337.
There were also over 20.000 inquirers. A
large increase was reported in the number of
pupils receiving instruction in the schools.
The day-schools contained 5,413, the evening-
schools 577, and 10,117 were taught on the
Sabliatii, making a total of 1G,117 scholars.
As a further proof of the rapid growth of those
habits and feelings which are tlie best security
for the social welfare of a comnninity, the mis-
sionaries had solemnized 1,9 12 marriages dur-
ing the year. In 1841, the ininibcr of church
members had increased to 27.700. At the
association of the IJaptist mission churches,
lield in Kingston. January, 1842, the ministers
unanimously resolved, as an a]>prfipria(e com-
memoration at once of the day of freedom and
the jubilee of the mission, to detach themselves
from the funds of the parent society after the
first of August ensuing. From this period, the
churches in Januiica, although contnined with
no less elTiciency than before, are not formally
reported as mission churches.
JiahnmiLs. — A mi.ssion to the Bahama Islands
was commenced by the (Jenerul HaptLsts in
1834. 'I'lie missionaries established themselves
at Nhw I'rovidriire, and in two jrars they had
extended their labors to Andros Island, Eleu-
thcra, Exuma, Kura Key, Crooked Island. For-
tune's Island, and Turk's Island. Connected
with the churches at these places there were
490 members, 217 having been added during
the preceding year. This field has been steadily
and perscveringly cultivated, and has yielded
much precious fruit. In 1850, Mr. Littlewood
wrote, " "We have six native agents, assisted
bytheir wives, exclusive of 140 Sabbath-school
teachers. Their work is divided between 45
churches. 1 ,475 members. 3,045 attendants on
public worship, and 1,226 scholars, the fruit of
whose labors is evidenced in the steady acces-
sion to our churches, and in the increased
knowledge and piety of the people." !Mr. Lit-
tlewood, speaking of his field of labor, says :
" Imagine an expanse of water spread out be-
fore you some 500 miles, studded with sea-girt
isles, varying from 100 miles by 40, to bare
rocks of 100 yards in circumference. Amidst
these islands I am continually navigating,
where the ocean is frequently as smooth as a
mirror, or as often lashed into a foam by the
tempest." The members of these churches are
represented as, for the most part, very poor,
but as humble and consistent Christians.
TriniclaiL—Jn 1842 the attention of the So-
lely was directed to this island, only about
*ne-tenth of whose 80,000 inhabitants are
white people. Mr. Cowen, the first mission-
ary, described the people as in an awful state
of destitution and spiritual ignorance, and
nothing to encourage missionary ojierations
except the existing necessity. In 1846 the
Secretary of the Society visited Trinidad, at
which time the number of evangelical minis-
ters on the island was eight, and the attend-
ance upon day-schools about one in twenty.
The great body of the people were Roman
("atholics ; and, by popery and slavery com-
bined, tlie energy of the people had been de-
stroyed, and the finer features of the negro
character nearly obliterated. The Secretary
says, " We have two groups of stations in
Trinidad, one of which is in and around the
port of Spain, the other about 20 miles to the
south, in and around the Savanna Grande.
Sinei' 1843 two small chapels of wood have
been built near the ]iort of Spain, in one of
which a .school of 90 scholars is taught. An-
other chapel ha-' been built about three miles
distant, close to the sea, in the midst of a con-
siderable pojMilation. About 20 miles north
of the port of Spain, Mr. Cowen has three sta-
tions, where he labors with nnieh self-denial."
In 1850 the missionary wrote with expres.sions
of grief: "What with rum-drinking, supersti-
tion, and something like jtaganism, the cause
of the Lord Jesus makes little j)rogre.'is in
'I'rinidad." He added, however, that increas-
ed attention was being paid to the cause of
education; that thousands of religious tracts
were in circulation, and that during the pro-
ceding year more than a thousand copies of
the Scriptures had been distributed. The
number of communicants, as last reported, was
WESLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
775
80 ; schools, 8 ; teachers, 12 ; scholars, 181 ;
all under tke superintendence of one mis-
sionary.
Honduras. — This island has been the scene
of missionary operations by the English Bap-
tists since 1822 ; but their labors have been
quite restricted, and no very full reports of a
recent date have been received. The largest
number of communicants reported at any one
time was 132 ; schools, 9 ; scholars, 227.
Church MfssiONARv Society. — This Soci-
ety commenced a mission in the island of An-
tigua in 1815, another in Jamaica in 1826,
and one in Trinidad in 1836. Later still, a
good work has been begun and carried on in
British Guiana. In Jamaica, as last reported,
the Society had five stations, viz., Siloah,
Prattville, Chichester, Rural Hill, and Church
Hill. At Siloah the house of worship, which
■was adapted to seat 850 persons, was crowded
with a congregation of about 1,000. The
communicants numbered 312. and there were
114 candidates. In two schools there were
218 scholars. The Prattville station had 279
communicants ; one day-school, with 138 chil-
dren, and one Sunday-school, with 230 scholars.
At Chichester there was a congregatioi^ of
450, of whom 105 were church-members, and
39 candidates. Of the other two stations no
definite account is given. Little, if anything,
is at present done by the Society in Antigua
and Trinidad. In British Guiana considerable
attention has been paid to schools, and though
the number of scholars is not large, their pro-
ficiency is remarkable. The highest class
read the Old and New Testaments, and study
general and church history, and geography,
besides learning hymns, catechism, and por-
tions of Scripture.
Society for the Propagation op the
Gospel. — This Society has missions in Barba-
does, Grenada, Tobago, and British Guiana.
In Barbadoes they commenced opemtions as
early as 1818, and they have now eight or
nine stations, and as many missionaries. Cod-
rington College, an important institution of
this Society, has been in operation since 1829,
and has supplied the West Indian Church with
upwards of sixty clergymen. In Grenada the
Society has but one missionary ; also one in
Tobago. In Essequibo, Pomeroon, and De-
marara, belonging to British Guiana, there are
five or six missionaries.
London Mis.sionarv Society. — The London
Missionary Society commenced a mission in
Jamaica in 1834 ; and at later periods it has
established missions in Dcraerara and Berbice.
The latest reports received are to 1851, when
the Society had in Jamaica 12 chapels or sta-
tions, 8 missionaries, and over 800 commu-
nicants. In Demarara there were 7 chapels,
5 missionaries, 4 teachers, 1,000 communicants,
and 550 scholars. In all, 19 missionaries, 4,000
communicants, and 3,000 scholars.
United Scotch Presbyterian Chukch. —
This Church has taken charge of the stations
till lately maintained by the Scottish Mission-
ary Society. They are in Jamaica and at the
following places, viz., Hampden, Lucca, Port
Maria, Cornwall, Carron Hall, Green Island,
Brownsville, and Rose Hill. Their statistics
are not given. — Rev. E. D. Moore.
Baptist Free Mission Society. — This Sch
ciety, which is organized on anti-slavery prin-
ciples, and has its seat of operations in Utica,
N. Y., has had a mission for a number of years
in successful operation in Ilayti ; with 1 mis-
sionary, 3 female assistants, 1 native pastor,
and 4 native teachers.
GENERAL TABULAR VIEW.
s
SOCIETIES.
'C
a
1^
3
.a
eg
Weslevans
79
48,589
18.r47
112,405
Knglish B.iptisls
Church of England
7
36
is,cor.*
096
753
348
London Missionary i~oc. .
19
4,000
3,000
87
•J3
17,000
3,900
3,000
59, ngc
Scotch Presbyterians . . .
American Miss. Asso...
Totals
0
300
513
256
92,494
25,861
172,001
* Includes the churches not now aided by the tjociety.
WESLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIE-
TY.— Methodism has often been complimented
as being " essentially missionary in its charac-
ter." This is true in a higher sense than is
generally understood. Indeed, the very origin
of the system can be traced to a high and
devoted missionary spirit. The founder of
Methodism was a missionary before he was
an evangelical Methodist, having gone forth in
1735 in the service of the Society for Propa-
gating the Gospel in Foreign Parts, as a mis-
sionary to the North American Indians. His
subsequent conversion to God was accom-
plished through the honored instrumentality
of a Moravian missionary, Peter Bohler, then
on his way to his field of labor among the
heathen. And almost prophetic were the
words of "Wesley, when parted from this de-
voted missionary, who had been to him a
father in the Gospel : " 0 what a work hath
God begun since his coming into England!.
Such an one as shall never come to an end till
heaven and earth pass away." For over fifty-two-
years from that time as an itinerant preacher
he nobly acted up to the spirit of his chosen
motto : " The World is my Parish." During
this period, such " full proof of his ministry "
did he make, that he generally delivered two,
and frequently, three or four sermons every
day ; and traveled about 4,500 miles every
year, chiefly on horseback. And so wonder-
fully did God own his great missionary plans.
776
WKSLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
and efforts, that, at his death, the work had
spread through all parts of Great Britain and
iVeland (where there were 300 itinerants,
1,000 local prcachera, and 80,000 members, in
the societie«i,) and also into the Isle of Wight,
and the Isle of Man, and the Channel Island",
through the United States, the West Indies,
Canada, and Newfoundland.
We might almost say that Mr. Wesley's
missionary spirit was liereditary. His father,
Rev. Samuel Wesley, felt deeply for the hea-
then, and about the beginning of the eight-
eenth century we find him in correspondence
with one of the English prelates, projecting a
mission to Ilindostau on a magnificent scale,
and even offering himself to take a part in it
as a missionary. Mrs. Susannah Wesley, also,
the gifted mother of John Wesley, shared the
missionary ardor of her husband. During Mr.
Wesley's absence in London, attending the
Convocation, she read the journals of the mis-
sionaries sent out by the Danish Society to
Tranquebar ; and so powerful was the effect
produced upon her mind, that she gave herself
anew in covenant to God, and resolved in fu-
ture to be more devoted to his service. She
began to labor systematically with her child-
ren, and then with her husband's parishioners,
assembling them together on the Sabbath eve-
nings, daring the long months of her husband's
absence, and giving them religious instruction :
and pleading, in justification of this unusual
step for her as a Avoman, the example of the
Tranquebar missionaries. Much good was
accomijlished by her efforts, and she imbued
her children with her own spirit ; and perhaps
it may be seen in the light of eternity, that the
missionary ardor of the followers of AVesley
owes much to the mother of the founder of
Methodism.
The Contingent Fund, instituted by Mr.
John Wesley as early as 175C, was designed by
him to be the means of sustaining the home
mis-sions of Methodism in Great Dritain and
Ireland. But the work soon began to spread
beyond the ability of a home mission agency
to manage. One step after another led the
Methodists onward until they reached the pa-
gan world ; and it soon became apparent that
a foreign mi.-^-^ionary organization was needed
to take charge of the spreading work of God.
The first mission beyond the limits of Great
Britain, undertaken l)y the early Methodists,
was that to the North American colonies. In
the minutes for ITG'J, we find Mr. Wesley ask-
ing in the Conference, " Who are willing to
go to America an missionaries ?'' Two breth-
ren inimi'diatcly rose and offered themselves,
Ilichard Boardnian and Joseph Pilmoor. But
there wiu^ no fcjreign missionary fund ; and Mr.
Wesley proposed that they should take up a
colleclidu among themselves, and £70 were
contributed on the spot. This was the first
Mcthodi.-<t mi.-^sionary collection ever made ;
ADd aa the whole number of preachers at that
time was but 110, and only about half of these
usually attended Conference, this collection
would probably average nearly $7 each from
this company of poor itinerants. Of this sum
£20 was appropriated to pay the passage of
the missionaries, and the remainder was given
them to assist in the erection of the first Me-
thodist meeting-house in America. Other mis-
sionaries were sent out afterwards, but in a
short time this portion of the work assumed
the independent position of the Methodist E.
Church ; and being able to provide for her
own necessities, ceased to be regarded as a
mission of the parent community.
But the missionary spirit which Mr. Wesley
had evoked, soon called into existence opera-
tions too extensive for the superintendence of
one man, even of Mr. Wesley's versatile pow-
ers ; and in this emergency, God sent to his
aid liev. Dr. Coke. The friendship between
these men began Aug. 13, 177G ; and after
traveling through the home work of Jkletho-
dism, and visiting America to organize the
Methodist Episcopal Church, in 1784, Dr. C.
became General Superintendent of Methodist
missions. He traveled extensively through
Great Britain, making collections for their
support, soliciting subscriptions from wealthy
individuals, wherever he could gain access, and
selecting suitable men for the work. He also
maintained a regular correspondence with the
missionaries. From the time of Mr. We.^ley's
death, in 1791, to the year 1811, under his
active and vigilant superintendence, Ihe mis-
sionaries among the Africans in the West In-
dies, and those in British North America,
were increased from 21 to 43, besides 11 em-
ployed in the Irish mission among the neglect-
ed papists ; and the members in society in
these foreign stations were increased from
G,.'>2.5 to 13,382. After the Conference of
1786, Dr. Coke sailed in company with three
brethren for Halifax ; but Frovidence drove
the vessel to Antigua. He distributed the
missionaries among the islands, and thus began
the Wesleyan missions to the West Indies.
He returned to England, and .';pent the next
18 months in visiting the principal towns,
begging for the missions with unabated zeal ;
anil at the close of the Conference of 1788, he
sailed again with another detachment of mis-
sionaries for other islands among the ^^'est
Indies. He again returned home, and having
sent out several more missionaries, he once
more started with another band of devoted
men for the West Indies, in Octolier, 1790.
As the missions multiplied abroad, the Con-
ference in England relieved Dr. Coke of a part
of his labor, by establishing an aiunial mis-
sionary collection in all their chapels, to sup-
port this growing and ble.ssed work.
In the next ten years the Doctor paid four
more visits to America, to extend and .>;trength-
en the work already begun. At the Conference
of 1813, though then in his C7th year, he ex-
WESLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY.
717
pressed an earnest desire to proceed to the
East Indies to establish a mission there. Eight-
een times had he crossed the Atlantic for mis-
sionary purposes ; yet his godly ardor was un-
abated. Some of his brethren attempted to
dissuade him from his purpose ; but, after hear-
ing their arguments, he burst into tears, and
exclaimed, " If you will not let me go, you
will break my heart !" His brethren withdrew
their opposition ; and, accompanied by seven
missionaries. Dr. Coke embarked for the east
in December, 1813. But on the 3d of May
following, his spirit suddenly returned to God :
he was found dead in his cabin. Thus ended
the life and labors of this estimable man,
whose name will ever be remembered in hon-
orable association with the history of the
Wesleyan Missionary Society.
The Wesleyan Honie Missions may bo con-
sidered to have commenced when Mr. Wesley
instituted " the Contingent Fund " for their
support in 1756, 98 years ago. The Foreign
Missions of Methodism were commenced by
Mr. Wesley in 1769, when he sent missionaries
to America. In the year 1784 he planted a
mission in the Isle of Jersey; and in 1785 he
sent out seven missionaries to establish mis-
sions in Nova Scotia, Newfoundland, and in the
Island of Antigua. The next year he sent
additional help to these missions, and also oc-
cupied Guernsey. In 1787 he sent missionaries
to St. Vincent's, St. Christopher's, and St. Eusta-
tius, and also strengthened the mission in the
Norman Isles. In 1788 he appointed five
more missionaries for the West Indies. The
work continued to spread, and in 1789 Domin-
ica, Barbadoes, Saba, Tortola, and Santa Cruz
were added to the list of Wesleyan missions.
Mr. Wesley sent out two more missionaries the
next year to the West Indies, and he added
Jamaica to the list of stations, and also ap-
pointed a committee of m'ue preachers to take
the management of those missions. This
closed Mr. Wesley's connection with the early
missions of Methodism. A few mouths after
this Conference he was called to his reward.
The statistics of the Wesleyan Foreign Mis-
sions at the Conference before his death were
as follows : The fields occupied were the Nor-
man Isles, Newfoundland, Nova Scotia, and
the West Indies. The number of missionaries
was 23, and of members 5848 ; of whom 498
were French, 350 were mulattoes, and 4377
were negroes. The same year that witnessed
the deatli of Wesley, witnessed also the 'death
of the first missionary who fell in the service
of this society. Robert Camhell died of putrid
fever in the Island of St. Vincent's. Upon
Dr. Coke now devolved the management of the
Wesleyan missions. To assist him, however,
the Conference appointed a committee of
finance and advice, consisting of all the minis-
ters of the connection resident for the time
being in London, and by them all missionaries
sent out were to be examined, and all accounts
to be submitted to their inspection, and corre-
spondence to be maintained with them. This
Conference sent out three more missionaries to
the West Indies, and also projected a mission
in France, William Mahy being apjiointed to
this latter service the next yeai-.
In the " Minutes of the Conference " of 1792
we first find Africa on the list of the Wesleyan
missionary stations, Sierra Leone being the
part occupied.
The Conference of 1793 established a gene
ral collection to be made in all their congrega-
tions for the support of the missions. During
the next five or six years, notwithstanding the
commotions throughout their connection on
account of some questions of discipline, as well
as the disturbed condition of the political
world. Dr. Coke and the Conference continued
their care of the missions already planted, and
gave them what enlargement they could. In
the minutes for 1796 we find the names of A.
Murdoch and W. Patten set down as mission-
aries to the Foulali country in Africa, to which
service they were solemnly set apart by the
Conference. In 1799 the Rev. G. Whitfield
was appointed treasurer for the Foreign Mis-
sions ; and Gibraltar was added to the list of
stations. In the minutes for that year occurs
the following entry : " We in the fullest man-
ner take these missions under our own cai-e,
and consider Dr. Coke as our agent." The
Conference also requested Dr. C. to draw up a
statement of the work of God carried on by
their missions, for circulation, and took addi-
tional steps to give greater efficiency to their
missionary work. At the next Conference a
body of rules was compiled for the regulation
of the Foreign Missions ; and authority was
given to Dr. Coke to send a missionary to
Gibraltar, and another to Madras. In 1804
Mr. Hawkshaw was sent to Demerara, in South
America. At this time the number of mem-
l)ers in the Foreign Missions was 15,846. The
first missionary secretary (Mr. Entwistle) Avas
appointed this year, Dr. Coke being general
superintendent, and Mr. Lomas treasurer, each
of these officers being amenable to the Mis-
sionary Committee, consisting of all the Lon-
don preachers ; so that the whole apparatus
necessary for the guidance of the missions took
form as the necessity arose.
In 1813 the Conference yielded to Dr. Coke's
solicitations for the establishment of a mission
in the East. Of the seven missionaries ap-
pointed for Asia and South Africa, it was in-
tended that three of them should be stationed
at Ceylon, one at Java, one at the Cape of Good
Hope, and the others to be placed where Dr.
Coke might think best and as Providence
opened the way. The result will be seen in
the history of the Ceylon mission.
The Conference of 1814 strongly recom-
mended " the immediate establishment of a
Methodist Missionary Society in every district
where it had not already been done. They
778
WESLEYAN MISSIONAEY SOCIETY.
also appointed two secretaries for the Foreign
Missions, in coiiucction with the General Mis-
sionary Coniniittec in London, and designated
eight additional missionaries, three to New-
foundland, two to Demarara, one to Canada,
and two to Australia. The missionary income
wa.> ascertained as having amounted this year
to £12,177.
At Dr. Coke's death, there was no sufficient
organization to direct the operations of the dif-
ferent miisions, and to provide the means of
their support and extension. And, when all
of a sudden they found themselves deprived of
his services, the preachers and people awoke
from their supinencss and keenly felt the neces-
sity of some combined effort to maintain the
ground that had been gained.
In this state of an.\ious inquiry, the Rev.
Geo. Morley, then superintendent of the Leeds
circuit, suggested the formation of a missionary
society in that town. This was done ; and a
new impulse was thus given to the work through-
out the connection. Other places, in swift suc-
cession, followed the example of Leeds, till
the Methodist congregations, from the Land's
End to the Tweed, caught the sacred flam.c.
Collectors offered their services in all direc-
tions ; the hearts of the people were every-
where impressed and opened to the state of the
heathen, and the communication of authentic
missionary inlellijjcnce ; and money was from
year to year poured into the sacred treasury
beyond all former precedent. At the same
time missionaries have continued willingly to
offiT themselves even for the most hazardous
and difficult stations ; and doors of entrance
are almost every year opened in the most un-
expected quarters.
The Weslcyan Missionaries, ministers of the
connexion, are 454 in number. They are as-
sisted by catechists, local preachers, assistants,
superintendents of schools, schoolmasters and
schoolmistresses, artizans, &c. ; of whom C98
are employed at a moderate salary, and 8,494
afford their services gratuitously. These mis-
sionaries and their assistants are preaching the
Gosjjel, and communicating instruction by
schools and otherwise, in .3.0 different languages :
In Europe in the Irish, Welsh, French, Italian,
Spanish, (jerman, and Swedish ; in Africa, in
the Akra, Yoruba, GreVjo, Mandingo, Nama-
qua, Kaffre, Dutch, Scsuto, and Seehuana ; in
Asia, in the 'J'amil, Portuguc^^e, Singalese,
Dutch, Canarcse, Sanscrit, Bengnlese, Kassia,
Ti'Ioogoo, and (.'hini'se; in Australia and Poly-
nc-sia they use the Maori, the Toiigan, and the
Feijccan ; and in America they employ the
Spanish. ('hi])])cwayan, Mohawk, Ojibwa, Onei-
da and Muncey languages. Six or seven of
thi'w; are u.=ed through the medium of inter-
nretcrs ; but the rest have all been mastered
Dy the missionaries, and are the medium of in-
struction. Many of th'-m have been for the first
time reducfd to a written form by the mission-
aries, who have comjiikd graninmrs and dic-
tionaries ; and into them all the Holy Scrip-
tures are translated, and have been placed in
the hands of the people.
In addition to over 1,700 day and Sunday-
schools, and several farm and industrial-schools,
the AVesleyan ^Missionary Society sustains a
few Normal institutions and some seminaries,
where a superior education is imparted. These
are situated at Colombo, Jaflua, Auckland,
Tonga, Moun' Coke, and "Westmoreland. —
Theological institutions, for training a native
ministry, are in very efficient operation at Ton-
ga, Sierra Leone, Macarthy's Island, Jaffna,
Auckland, Graham's Town, and the Feejee
Islands. The number of students last year was
about 100.
The Society's missionary printing establish-
ments are doing a noble work. They are lo-
cated at Bangalore, (India.) Kaffraria.D'Urban,
Plaatburg and Graham's Town, (Africa.) Jaff-
na, (Ceylon.) and the Tonga and Feejee Islands.
" The Field " in which the Wesleyan mis-
sionaries are employed, as already shown, is
emphatically " the world."
Results. — These have already been stated ;
but they will appear more distinctly in the fol-
lowing summary, as given in the report for
1853:
No. of Circuits, 361
Chapels 1,099
Other preaching places 1,887
Missionaries and Assistants, . . . 465
Subordinate paid agents, .... 698
Do., unpaid 3,494
Full and accredited church members, 108,286
Sabbath-schools, 868
Sabbath scholars, 54,737
Day schools 795
Day scholars, 42,172
Attendants on public worship, 362,347 ; of
whom 149,802 are Anglo-Saxons, and 212,.545
are of other races. Of the church members in
these missions, 32,070 are British and Irish ;
1,815 are German, French, Swiss, and Spanish ;
1,711, Asiatic; 4,046, Australian; 8.971, Po-
lynesian; 53,831, African and Creole; and
1,980 N. A. Indians.
But, besides what appears in these statistics,
the Wesleyan missions have set off mature and
large portions of their work in indejiendent
positions, which no longer appear in the re-
ports as missions.
Income. — AN'e present below the income of
the society in ])eriods of four years, with the
annual average of each :
Krotn 1814 to 1817 £50,760 average £12,440
" 1818 " 1821 114,3.^8 " 28,889
•' 1822 " 1825 143,283 " .35,820
" 1826 " 1829 206,256 " 61,664
" 1830 " 1833 216,658 " 64.164
" 1834 " 1837 316,781 " C3,ii42
" 1838 " 1841 384,644 " 96.161
" 1842 " 1845 422,810 " 10.1,-02
" 1846 " 1849 442,090 " 110,522
" 1850 " 18.13 424,.390 " 106,097
1864 114,498
ToUl in 41 yean, £2,836,528
WETTEE— WITCHCRAFT.
779
This exhibits a regular growth of the mission-
ary fund, increasing at everv period, from £12,000
to £106,000, and from £12,177 in 1814, to
£114,498 in 1854. — Jackson's Centenary of
Methodism ; Aider's Wesleijan Missions ; Coke's
Life ; Minutes of Annual Conferences; Notices
and Reports. — Rev. W. Butler.
WETTER : One of the Banda Islands, a
group of the Moluccas, in the Indian Archi-
pelago.
WHAMPOA : A city in China, on the
Pearl river, 14 miles below Canton, being the
anchorage for foreign shipping. (See China.)
WILBERFORCE .• Town of liberated
Africans, in the parish of St. Paul, Sierra
Leone, West Africa. Station of the Church
Missionary Society.
WITCHCRAFT : " The practices of
witches ; sorcery ; enchantments ; intercourse
with the devil ; power more than natural." —
fVebslei: " A supernatural power, which per-
sons were formerly supposed to obtain posses-
sion of, by entering into a compact with the
devil." — Buck. " The pretended or supposed
possession of supernatural power, in conse-
quence of an alleged compact made with the
devil ; the object of which was either to pro-
cure advantages to the persons thus endowed,
or their friends, or to do evil to their enemies.
That persons supposed to be possessed of super-
natural endowments, in consequence of a com-
pact made with Satan, or who pretended to
such endowments, have existed, is an opinion
that has more or less obtained in every age."
— Edinburgh Encyclopedia.
There certainly can be no question of the
fact that persons have existed who were sup-
posed to possess, or who pretended to possess,
such powers. Whether the witchcraft forbid-
den in the Bible was real or pretended, is a
question on which learned men arc not agreed.
The writer last quoted, says : " Before the
Christian era, and at that time, the arch-enemy
of mankind was, undoubtedly, for wise pur-
poses, allowed powers, and held a visible inter-
course with our species, which have long been
denied him." But, whether the witches and
wizards denounced in Scripture, wore real or
pretended, their strict prohibition will appear
to have been equally wise and necessary, when
we consider what terrible consequences have
always and everywhere followed the delusion.
It is important, however, to observe with this
writer, that " the modern witch is a consider-
ably different personage from any we read of
in the Bible." The ancient witches seem to
have been somewhat similar to our modern
fortune-tellers, for " they made great gain by
their divination ;" and we may add, also, like
our modern " clairvoyants" and " spiritual me-
diums," and the A.Mcan fetishmen also, instead
of the innocent persons whom they accuse of
witchcraft. Witchcraft was universally be-
lieved in Europe till the sixteenth century, and
even maintained its ground with tolerable firm-
ness till the seventeenth. The latest witchcraft
phrensy was in New England, in 1662, when
the execution of witches became a calamity
more dreadful than the sword or pestilence.
The following description of the supposed cha-
racter of the modern M'itch is given by the
writer, in the Edinburgh Encyclopedia : " This
compact (with the devil) was not reckoned va-
lid, until it had been written out with blood
taken from the vein of the person who thus
resigned his life to the service of Satan. The
individual who in this way became a witch,
gave up to him soul and body, and at death he
necessarily went to the regions of horror and
despair. The devil, on his side, guaranteed
that the persons who thus sold themselves to
him, should want for nothing they desired in
this world ; that they should be avenged upon
their enemies ; that they should have the pri-
vilege of inflicting disease on whomsoever they
wished ; and that, in short, their power of
doing evil should be very great, if not unlimit-
ed. To accomplish this purpose, a familiar
spirit, or gnome was given them by Satan,
which was ready to attend them at a call, and
was entirely subservient to their will. The
witches could assume any shape they chose,
and transport themselves through the air with
unspeakable rapidity, on a broomstick, or nut-
shell, or any such article, for any purpose, par-
ticularly to attend meetings of witches, at
which the devil himself always presided."
The reader need not be reminded how un-
scriptural and absurd is the idea of the pos-
session of such power by any human being ;
but it is easy to see how the belief in the ex-
ercise of such power by persons regarded as
witches, should produce the terrible effects de-
scribed in the witchcraft excitements of the
16th century ; or that a similar idea, in the
mind of an ignorant and superstitious heathen,
should hold him in such terrible bondage as
that described by missionaries and tourists. But
it is a noticeable fact, that the belief in witch-
craft has always disappeared with the progress
of civilization, education, and true religion.
The belief in witchcraft, however, is not con-
fined to barbarous tribes. Hindostan, which
lays some claim to civilization and learning, is
overrun by professors of those mystical incan-
tations, called Mantras, and of the occult sci-
ences generally. The greater part of the cross
accidents in life are attributed to this cause.
For the first twelve months, a Hindoo mother
carefully conceals her child, lest the evil eye
should fall upon it. A highly respectable
Hindoo landholder at Saugor, named Baboo
Bight, refused to sell one of these men a piece
of laud ; whereupon, the man vowed to conjure
the Baboo's life away in a year. He fixed
himself on a plain near the Baboo's land, and
every night kept up his incantations, the fire
blazing away in his earthen pot. After some
time, the Baboo became ill, his appetite being
gone, and he having become restless and fever-
780
WITCnCRAFT— WORLD.
ish. lie affected to treat the man's incanta-
tions with contempt ; but they were evidently
uppermost in iiis mind. A low, destructive
fever insinuated itself into his system, and,
before the twelve months were ended, he
died, — evidently the result of a superstitious
fear.
The terrible influence of the belief in witch-
craft, ainonj!: the natives of Southern and
"\Vesl> rn Africa, are thus described by Rev.
John Leighton Wilson, formerly a missionary
of the American Board at Gal)oon, now one of
the Secretaries of the Presbyterian Board ;
and the reader will observe how the African
idea of the power of witches corresponds with
the foregoinj^ description of the opinions, which
formerly prevailed in both Old and New Eng-
land :
'• This idea, or belief, is of such long stand-
ing, of such constant recurrence, and so inti-
mately interwoven with all their actions, their
projects, their reasonings, and their specula-
tions, that it seems to form an essential part
both of their mental and moral constitution.
It ascriltes to those supposed to possess this
mysterious and hateful art, power not only
over the health and lives, but over the property
and fortuiies of all around them. Every event
in life, if adverse or calamitous, is ascribed to
this malignant agency. Sickness, no matter
what itd type or how contracted, the loss of
properly, no matter by what means, or under
what circumstances of mismanagement, the
disappointment of cherished hopes, however
extravagant or unreasonable they may have
been ; the loss of friends by death ; are indis-
criminately ascribed to some one who is sup-
posed to e.vercise this mysterious power. A
death seldom occurs in one of their villages,
which is not atoned for by the life of some
one else. Other feelings than those of heart-
felt sorrow are awakened by the sound of the
death drum. It is the voice of the accuser
that sends a thrill of concern to every heart.
No one is exempt from the .suspicion of having
caused that death. To fly from the* scene of
anticipated danger, is a virtual confes.sion of
tlie charge of guilt. Uprightness of character
and lieiievolence of heart aflord no' shield. The
intimacy of friendship and the endearment of
kindred ties, are alike unavailing. Suspicion
may fa,sten u[)()n the son as the cause of his
fathers death, or upon the mother a.s the de-
stroyer of her own oflspring. How tho inhabi-
tants of Africa can have any repose at all, un-
der such a system, is a matter of surpri.se to all
who arc familiar with their superstitious creed."
— Dainnnnlntrie, by King Jame.s VI. ; Baxter's
World if Spirifa ; Rei^nwld Scat's Discovery o/\
M'drlinaft ,- Cotton Mather, Hutchinson, and
Ihwkms on ^ WdrJicraft ; lices' Cijc/opedia ;
Jmrsh Knci/f loped m ,• Moflat's S(julliern
WORLD : We have furnished ample means
in this volume for ascertaining the religious
condition of the world. We give the follow-
ing general survey, which presents an appro.xi-
mation to the w^orld's population, and the pro-
portion of different religions, and an enumera<-
tion of Protestant missionaries and their con-
verts, as near as it can be obtained from mis-
sionary reports.
POPfLATIOK.
Asia, including Pacific Isles (see Asia) . . . 752,806,493
Africa {Encyclopedia Britannica) 100,000.000
Kurope (see Europe) 262.300,000
America (E7iq/d<^>edia Britannica) 52,800,000
1,167,906,493
All attempts, however, to a.scertain the pop-
ulation of the globe, are based to a great ex-
tent upon conjecture, as comparatively a small
portion of it has been determined by actual
census, Balbi makes the total pripuiation of
the earth 7.36,700,000 ; but, according to later,
opinions, based on better acf|uaintance with
China, he underrates that kingdom about 200
millions. It is probable, however, as we inti-
mated in the article on Asia, that the above
estimate of that continent is too high ; and,
comparing all the estimates we have seen, we
are inclined to regard that which puts the pop-
ulation of the globe, in round numbers, at one
thousand millions, as probably near the truth.
The following estimate, with reference to reli-
gious profession, has been based upon that
number :
Chri8«ians 200,000,000
Jewa 14,000.000
Molmmmedans 140.000,000
Heathen Idolaters 646,000,000
1,000,000,000
The following table will*show something of
what has been done during the last half^cen-
tury, for the evangelization of this vast nmlti-
tude :
COUNTRIE?.
Axia
A frica
I'acific I.slnnd.4
Went Indies
Nortli America.
677
150
256
177
28.372
27.241
49.720
02,404
13,653
Totals 1,673 211,389 190,746 1,572,000
>■.■
84.16S
31.547
45.1S6
25.513
4,3;il
c ja
•if
122,000
60.000
200.000
1,200,000
Ed,
Africa, and the Journah of Missionaries and
Tourisis in Africa ,- Spry's Mixlern India. Sec
also, Africa >Fm/.
This statement, though far from bcinp com-
plete, exhibits a band of over 1 .fiOO mi.s.sion-
arics, the results of whose labors show over
'200,000 members of mission churcluis, with
nearly the same number of scholars in Chris-
WUDALEY— YORtJBA.
781
tian schools, and a nominally Christian popu-
lation of not less than a million and a half, all
redeemed from heathenism in half a century.
But this gives but a very imperfect view of
the work accomplished. The foundations have
been laid deep and broad, for a rapid advance-
ment in the next 50 years. These mission-
aries are scattered throughout the world.
They have established Christian institutions ;
reduced barbarous languages to writing ; es-
tablished printing-presses ; and translated and
printed the Scriptures in almost every language
under heaven. Idolatry, Islamism, Romanism,
and every false religion, are trembling to their
foundations. And, whoever lives to the end oC
this century, will see the wonderful works of
God in the earth.
WUDALEY : Forty miles north of Ah-
mednuggur, in Hindostan, — became a station
of the American Board in 1845.
WUPPERTHAL : A station and a mis-
sion colony of the Ehenish Missionary Society,
in South Africa, near Clanwilliam.
YAVILLE : A Karen village in the pro-
vince of Tavoy, Burmah ; an out-station of
the Tavoy Mission of the American Baptist
Union.
YORUBA, or YARRIBA : The Toruba
country is situated some distance inland from
the Bight of Benin, between Dohomey on the
west, and the River Niger, or Quorra, on the
east and north-east, extending far into the
interior. This territory once formed one of
the most powerful kingdoms in Western
Africa, composed of a large number of pro-
vinces, having their separate governments,
and owning a sort of allegiance to one king.
But, about the year 1817 or 1818, a civil war
broke out, originating in a quarrel in the
market, between persons of different tribes,
' about a cowrie's worth of pepper, in conse-
quence of which man rose against man, town
against town, tribe against tribe, the slave-
trade helping it on ; till, in a little more than
30 years, the country which travelers describ-
ed as everywhere richly and carefully culti-
vated, was turned into a barren wilderness,
and the people, previously agricultural and
trading, mild in their manners, and hospita-
ble to traders, became brutal and ferocious,
from constant war, revengeful, thirsting for
blood, and ready to barter their fellow-men for
gold. From the broken fragments of 145
towns of this kingdom, chiefly of the Egba
province, destroyed about 1825, has arisen the
city of Abbeokuta, the location of the Yoruba
mission of the Church Missionary Society.
This city is situated on the bank of the river
Ogun, in latitude 7° 8', about 60 miles from
Lagos. It stands in the midst of an immense
plain, on the two highest of several detached
hills, which ascend gradually on the N. E., and
terminate in a bold and perpendicular bluff on
the N. and S. W., being surmounted by masses , ,, . -
of smooth gray granite. On the sloping sides, I the influence of Christianity, Commodore
and around the bases of these two hills, en-
closed within a wall and ditch of about 15 miles
in length, are the dwellings of 100,000 inhabit-
ants. The fugitives from the desolated vil-
lages fled to this spot, then a wilderness, making
the great rock Olumo their resting-place, till
at length the forests were cleared away, the
town arose ; and in 1829, they were joined by
Sodeke, a man of great f)arts, who was chosen
their ruler. The town was called Abbeokuta,
from " Abbe," wider, and " Okuta," a rock,
from its situation. But the people of the vari-
ous towns united at Abbeokuta, still have each
their governor, their judge, their captains of
various grades, and their court-house, forming a
sort of federal government. But since the
death of Sodeke, they have had no general
ruler.
Every town in the Yoruba country has its
market, where trade is carried on in the vari-
ous productions of the country. The people
are chiefly agricultural, and they cultivate
their fields with care and neatness. But they
have made considerable advances in the useful
arts, having their blacksmiths, tanners and
curriers, saddlers, shoemakers, rope-makers, potr
ters, carpenters, architects, tailors, &c.
Religimi. — The religion of the Yorubans is
a Polytheism, and they believe largely in de-
raonology and witchcraft, divination, charms,
&c. They have no correct idea of the one
true God, but seek to fill up the void in their
minds by creations of the imagination. Dei-
ties, endless in variety, are conjured up, each
having his own peculiar sphere of action.
Thus they have gods of thunder, lightning,
air, earth, rocks, trees, water, rivers, brooks,
animals, &c. The chief of these are, Sau-
go, the god of thunder, raised up by their
fears, and Ifa, the god of divination, the fruit
of their hopes. The worship of the former
begins on Thursday night, and is kept up till
Friday morning, with noise, drumming, and
licentious dances.
Ifa, the god of divination, is consulted on
every undertaking. Palm nuts are offered, by
means of which the oracle is consulted, by a
sort of lot. If the response is unfavorable, a
sacrifice must be made ; which puts it in the
power of the priest to impose burdens on the
people. If, for instance, a house is to be built,
Ifa must be consulted ; then the demon of the
ground must be jiropitiated ; then fetishes or
charms must be brought, to keep away evil
spirits ; and thus the whole system becomes
burdensome and oppressive.
Ifa, the country of Rakanda, bordering ou
the Nile, said to be the birth-place of the
prophet Obbalofun, is the headquarters of
their religion. To this prophet, human sacri-
fices were offered on going to war. Such an
offering was made at Abbeokuta, but a few
years ago, and the practice still exists in other
towns, though there it is done away through
782
YORUBA— ZULUS.
Forbes having, in 1851, induced the chiefs to
sign a treaty for ever aboh'shing human sacri-
fices.
But, of all their superstitions, the Oro, (or
as it is culled by different tribes, the Egvgmi,
Egun, or 3'lumbo-Jumbo,) exercises the most
powerful influence upon the people. Although
the Yorubans have no distinct ideas of a fu-
ture state, yet they ^pear to believe in the
immortality of the soul. It is their universal
practice to pray to the spirits of their deceased
fatiiers. The Egun is the supposed spirit of a
dead man, representing different parties de-
ceased, and called up for different purposes.
The part is acted by a man in masquerade,
clad in the most grotesque manner. The
spirit is supposed to dwell in a sacred grove,
called Igballo, in which there is a priest ; and
whoever wishes to raise the spirit, goes into
this grove, aud after various mummeries and
incantations, the Egun makes his appear-
ance.
The .<;ystem of Oro is intimately connected
with the government as well as religion. It is
a secret society, bound together by solemn
oaths, into which no woman is allowed to
enter ; and if she witnesses its mysteries, either
by accident or design, she is instantly put to
death. By this means the women are kept in
subjection. "When Egun passes through the
streets, or Oro takes possession of the town,
the women run to the most obscure places, and
hide their faces till it has passed. Through
the influence of Oro, also, the whole machinery
of the government is carried on, and in its
name laws are passed, and their penalties exe-
cuted ; and in the latter case, the Oro is said
to have taken the culprit and eaten him up,
and no questions are asked. Mr. Hinderen
describes an execution of this kind, the of-
fender being one of the wives of the king of
Ibadan, in which about 100 of these Eguns,
after dancing around the chiefs house, playing
with the woman's head, boiled it, and mixed
portions of it with their supper, and then car-
ried the polished skull about town several days,
the whole ceremony lasting a w'eek.
Popniotion. — It would be impossible to as-
certain the numbers of the Yoruba people ; but
there yet remain many large and populous
towns, which have escaped the general devas-
tation. The Church Missionary Society, in
their report for 1852, enumerate four towns,
within two or three days of Abbeokuta, with
an aggregate of 200,000 inhabitants, and to
the eastward, the territory of the Ijebus, con-
taining 160,000; and beyond these, many
more, to all of wliich the door is open for the
entrance of the Gospel, which we may hope is
destined, at no distant day, to put an end to
these dark and cruel superstitions. All these
tribes s])cak the same language, which will fa-
cilitate niissioiiiiry (iporations. Many of them
have eniliracfd Moluunincdanism, which shows
that they are nut strongly entrenched in their
superstitions. For an account of the Yoruba
missions, see Africa Western.
ZOHARITES : A sect of the Jews, who
reject the Talmud and the authority of the
rabbies, and follow the book Zohar. They are
sprung from one Shabbathai Levi, who in the
middle of the 17th century appeared in Smyr-
na, as the Messiah. In Germany and Poland
they are called Hasidim or " pietists." In Tur-
key they go by the name of Dunmehs or " con-
verts," because they make an outward profes-
sion of Islamism, though they secretly cherish
the Jewish faith, and practice Jewish rites.
These latter are most numerous in Thessalonica,
where the missionaries of the A. B. C. F. M.
have their attention directed to them, and hope
that their conversion may be the door to that of
the Mussulmans. Their doctrines, founded upon
the Kabbala and the book Zohar, are mystical
and somewhat allied to Gnosticism. They pro-
fess faith in the Trinity, and some of them ac-
knowledge Jesus of Nazareth as the Messiah,
in a sense. — Rev. E. M. Dodd.
ZULUS : A tribe in South Africa, inhabit-
ing an extensive territory in the vicinity of
Port Natal. The country of the Zulus is pre-
eminent for the beauty of its landscapes, the
fertility of its soil, and the healthiness of its
climate. The mountains, not large, are rather
tabular than conical in shape ; and when view-
ed from the sea, they rise, table above table, as
they recede in the distance, having the summit
and the sides, with the intervening plains,
covered with verdant groves, or thick shrub-
bery, or large fields of green grass. The whole
picture is diversified, with here and there a
river, or a dark and deep ravine, with fields of
Indian corn, or gardens of indigenous grain
and fruit.
Climate. — The climate is one of the most
salubrious and agreeable in the world. In the
siimmer it is of course warm. In the winter
it is occasionally cool enough to make a fire
agreeable. But for the most of the year the
climate is such that one could hardly wish it
otherwise.
The People. — In 1847, the natives within the
colony were estimated at from 80,000 to
100,000, and they were continually increasing.
The whole number of the tribe is not known,
but it must be very large.
Physical Appearance. — The corporeal and
phrenological appearance of the natives is, in
many respects, liighly interesting. The de-
graded condition and the employments of the
women are, indeed, unfavorable to their reach-
ing and preserving a proper stature and form.
Still, many of these, as well as the men, are
very regular in their features, symmetrical in
form, of a full chest and commanding stature.
The men stand, walk or run very erect, and
they have for the most part a high forehead,
and an intelligent and expressive countenance.
A few foathers upon the head ; a profusion of
beads upon the neck and arms, and sometimes
ZULtJS— APPENDIX.
783
upon other parts of the body ; a small piece of
the skin of some animal about the loins ; and,
perhaps, a brass ring upon the wrist and a strap
covered with hair about the ankles, constitute
as much wearing apparel as most of the na-
tives are in the habit of using.
Dwellings. — Their houses are simple, small
and rude ; hemispherical in shape, having a
diameter at the base of some eight or ten feet ;
being in height, at the centre and apex, only
four or five feet ; having but one aperture, and
that at the base, about two feet high, and made
to answer for doors, windows and chimney.
Language. — The language of the Zulus ap-
pears to be very simple, and yet highly philo-
sophical in its structure ; and, with the excep-
tion of a few clicks, mellifluent and euphonic.
Moral Character.' — Polygamy is practiced
here to a very gre»t extent. The principal re-
straint upon it seems to be the number of cat-
tle that a man can acquire to 2:)urchase his
wives. The fiiarriageable daughter is counted
by the father as so many cattle, and disposed
of, not on the principle of affection or prefer-
ence, but to the highest bidder. From this
system come many evils ; so that an utter dis-
regard of all the principles of true fidelity
among those who are married, and of virtue
among those who are not, is as frequent as
it is surprising and sinful. It is one of the
chief obstacles against which the Gospel has
to contend. Lying and deception are as com-
mon as the truth. Cases of stealing from each
other are frequent. Murder is occasionally
committed, and creates but little excitement.
Dancing and singing impure songs are univer-
sal. Drinking intoxicating beer, taking snuff,
and filthy conversation, are daily indulged by
all. Almost every thing relating to their man-
ner of life is very filthy, and tends to debase
and degrade.
Redeeming Qualities — Desire of Improvement.
— They are a brave and spirited, though not
a revengeful people. None of their number
have ever been kidnapped and reduced to sla-
very. Perhaps no nation in South Africa has
ever exhibited so much skill in military affairs,
and so much desire to rule as Chaka and Din-
gaan and their people ; and the natives around
Port Natal are their immediate descendants.
They are a social people, fond of company
and conversation. When a woman begins to
harvest, she calls all her neighbors to help her.
In many things they exhibit skill, particu-
larly in making baskets and mats, shields and
spears. And, with a little instruction, they
will turn their hands to a variety of useful em-
ployments, to which they are unaccustomed.
They are an industrious people. It is not an
uncommon thing for a single wife to raise for
her husband some 50 or 60 bushels of corn in
a year. — 31issionary Herald for 1847, pp. 399
to 403 ; Anmml Report A. B. C. F. M. 1846,
p. 87, and 1850, p. 93. For Mission, see
South Africa,
APPENDIX.
Results of Missionary Labor among the In-
dians— Letter from Rev. Mr. Byington.
Stockbridge, Choctaw Nation, )
June 20, 1854. j
My Dear Brother — You say in your letter
of Jan. 1 : " I should like to receive from you
a letter conveying your impressions of the pre-
sent state and future prospects of the mission-
ary work among the Indians." I must confine
myself principally to the Choctaws, to whom
I was sent by the American Board in Septem-
ber, 1820. My impressions are favorable in
regard to our missionary work, especially if
laborers of suitable qualifications occupy the
field. The blessing of God, I have hoped,
would attend our exertions here. I should
prefer to give you a few leading facts, rather
than to offer bare opinions. The character of
the facts I wish to present will show you the
state of this nation (1) when existing without
the Gospel ; (2) after having come to its
knowledge. I wish to put honor on the Gos-
pel of our Saviour, whenever it can properly
be done.
I. The state of this nation ivithovt the Gospel.
— This embraces the whole period of their ex-
istence, so far as we know, till within the mem-
ory of many now living. (1) They were with-
out God, and had no forms of religious wor-
ship, with reference to the true God, or any
false God. They were ignorant of the God of
the Bible. We had no false system of religion
to oppose. (2) They had various superstitions,
as a belief in witches, conjurors, rain-makers,
" doctors," ghosts, fairies, and the like. They
had a belief, to some extent, in an evil spirit
or being, and a good one. But all this was dim
indeed. (3) The value and immortalfty of the
soul were new subjects to them. Many said,
" When I die that is the end of me." How
true it is, that God only can instruct us about
himself as a Spirit, and about ourselves. (4)
The nation were ignorant of many things use-
ful to them in this life. How could it be
otherwise ? A little tribe, hemmed in at home,
for ages, through fear of hostile neighbors ; so
much so, that we find but few words in their
language borrowed from other tribes. They
had no books, no history, no science, no laws,
nothing in writing. A few traditions existed
among them. Put your soul in just their po-
sition, and what would it be ? Put your body
there also. (5) They had many wrong usages,
such as that women must perform all the hard
labor, that polygamy was right, that children
could inherit nothing from their father or mo-
ther, that it was a disgrace for a warrior to
labor in the field, and right to destroy their
own infants. (6) They were not only a nation
of idle warriors, but of drunkards. Only one
man was named to the early missionary who
would not get drunk. Men gloried in being
drunk as a proof of manhood. (7) They were
784:
ATPENDIX.
poor indeed, at their homes, in all rcsi^ects.
It was rare to sec a man who wore shoes, pan-
taloons, or a hat. It was rare to sec a house
•with a bed, table, or chairs, or to find at any
place good farming or mechanic tools, a good
house or farm. Formerly there were no fences.
(8) 'J'hey had no literature, but a branding-iron
for calves and colts, and pieces of cane slit up
and tied in bundles, used in calling assemblies.
Each piece numbered a sleep. One was to be
drawn out and thrown away on each morning,
till there was but one, which marked the day
of meeting. The chiefs could do nothing more
in calling councils. They had songs at dances,
and for the sick. However, the words which
were sung were few. (9) The murderer was
executed without a trial. He and his friends
looked for none. He made no attempt to es-
cape. He would not disgrace himself or fam-
ily by being a coward on such an occasion.
He dressed and adorned himself, painting his
face and breast, singing, dancing, and whoop-
ing, to show his bravery, and would point to
the place where the ball should enter his heart.
He was not sorry he had killed a man. Nor
were the warriors of his family sorry, if he
only died like a brave. His grave was dug,
and he lay down in it to see if it would fit his
body. (10) They were exposed to diseases,
such as the measles and small pox, and knew
not how to treat them. They were wasting
away. Many were killed as witches, being
accused of causing death by tlieir arts. (11)
They had no regular form of government, no
written constitution or laws. The chief's brave
called councils, which often proved to be times
and places of great drunkenness.
I will stop here, and ask from what region,
above or below, is any ray of light seen beam-
ing on tli^e benighted men ? It is not neces-
sary to say there was then no Sabbath, no
church, no Christian school, and no followers
of the Saviour, among all the Choctaws at
that time. One colored man, a native of Af-
rica, who professed to be a disciple of the Lord,
was found after a while by the missionaries.
Now, here is one of the bays in the great Dead
Sea which sin hius formed on earth. We en-
tered it wiih the Bible. I must now speak of
the nation in its state,
II. ylfler having come to a knowledge of the
Bible. — These evils have been gradually pass-
ing away, not entirely ; many still remain, and
there is much for us to do, that wc may bear
onward, to a better consummation, the bles.s-
ings already received, as well as gain those
which are still promised. The improvements
made are, (1) The nation now knows the only
living and true (Jod. lie is acknowledged in
variiius ways, in their General Council, in their
court.4, as well as in schools, families and
churches, and in regard to his Sabliath. (2)
Their cruel and ba,se .^ujierstitions arc passing
away. They have formed laws on these sub-
jects. (3) The soul of man, its worth, its na-
ture, are now widely known. (4) Knowledge
has greatly increased, through the schools,
books, newspapers, the post-office, and the
direct instructions of the different missionaries
and other agencies. (5) The warriors have
gone to work. They clear land and fence it,
a4id cultivate the salne with horses and oxen.
This is a new era for the women, who stilL
help in the field and in other places. It is now(
a disgrace to lead an indolent life. Marriage
between one man and one woman is regulated
by law. The descent of property is secured to
children. Infanticide is punished. (G) The
nation, as you know, have lived under the pro-
visions of what is called the " Maine law '' for
about 30 years. (7) The comforts of life have
increased a hundred fold, in food and raiment,
house and home. A legal fence must be ten
rails high. (8) They have a large number of
book^n their o'wn tongue, and many men and
women can read and write well in the English
language. They have educated chiefs, judges,
and ministers of the Gospel. (9) For murder
and other crimes there are special legal enact-
ments. Trial by jury is the right of such per-
sons. (10) They also have acquired much
knowledge about diseases and their most hope-
ful and approved remedies, and such as are
known to Americans. " Indian " doctoring
was no better than Indian farming, when they
planted corn without a fence, and without re-
garding "rows." (11) They have a regular
written constitution, and a national legislative
body which enacts laws. There is a judiciary
and an executive body. They have large pro-
visions for the education of their sons and
daughters, as the reports in the Missionary
Rooms will abundantly show. We have now
nine ministers in our Indian Presbytery, and
13 churches under its care. The members
amount to 1,275, and the contributions from
these churches, as reported at the last meeting
of Presbytery, amounted during a period of
about 20 months, to ^2,431. The Methodist,
the Baptist, and the Cumberland Presbyterian
brethren all have churches in this nation, and
are all doing good in their various fields of
labor. You must make your own inferences
from these facts, of what the blessed Gospel
may be hoped to accomplish, even when preach-
ed by very imperfect men to "Indians." —
Enough is said to show what a people we found
when we brought the Gospel here, and what is
the nature of its influence on the red man's
i)eart and life. These facts I deem worthy of
record, that the infulcl may be silent till he can
exhibit an example of greater and better suc-
cess, through other books in which he believes,
that political men may not attempt to legislate
the Indian from the earth, because he will not
become wise, and that the Church may go on
in this bles.sed work, till it is finished on earth,
and the fruits gathcre<l in heaven.
j Ever yours,
1 Cyrus Byinoton
INDEX
OF PRINCIPAL MATTERS.
ABBEOKUTA, .
Abenaquis, . , ,
ABYSSINIA,
Inhabitants of . ,
Language, . , .
Government, .
Religion,
Conversion to Christianity, .
Papal Missions, ....
Mission of the Chwrch Missionary Society,
Afareaitu, . .
AFRICA,
Map, . - .
Geographical description, .
Progress of discovery,
Rivers,
Climate, People, Copts,
Nubians, Moors, Negroes, Foulahs, ,
Languages, Government, Industry.
Commerce, Slave Trade,
Religion,
Missions, with tabular view,
AFRICA, EASTERN, .
Geographical Description, ,
Mission— (7Am/'cA Miss. Societu,
AFRICA, SOUTHERN, . .
Boundaries, Topography,
The Great Lake,
Climate, Native Population, .
Map, ....
Missions — Moravian,
Tabular View of Stations, .
Zondon Miftsionary Society,
Tabular View of Stations, .
Wesleyan Missionary Society,
Tabular A'iew of Stations,
Gospel Propagation Society,
Scotch Missions,
Glasgow African Society, ,
French Protestant Missions,
Tabular View of Stations,
American Board,
Tabular View of Stations, .
Rhenish Missionary Society,
Tabular View of Stations,
Berlin Missionary Society,
General Tabular View,
AFRICA, WESTERN, .
Boundaries, Grand Divisions
Physical Aspect, Rivers,
Map, ....
Climate, Inhabitants, Government,
Social and Moral Condition,
Religious Belief, Superstitions,
Fetishism and Devil-worship.
Traditions, Funerals,
Missions,
Church Missionary Sooiety,
Reverses for want of laborers,
Evils of connection with government.
Sierra Leone a nursery of missionarieB,
Education, Native Agency,
Translations, . . ,
Character and Ability of Natives
Calls for Instruction,
Missionary Tours, .
General Improvement,
Work of Grace,
Character of Converts,
Church Discipline, .
Remaining Superstitions, .
Desire for the Word of God,
Missionary Spirit, .
50
T
T,622
7
7
8-9
10
11
11
11
11
11
13
14
15
16
16
16
17
17
17-18
18
20
20
21
22
22
22
27
27
43^4
45
45
47
47
49
50
54
55
57
67
58
58
58
58
58
59
09
60
60
64
64
65
67
67
68
68
69
69
69
69
70
70
70
71
71
71
71
Timneh Mission, .
Yoruba Mission,
Present State of the Missions,
Tabular View,
English Baptist Miss. Soo.',
Wesleyan Miss. Soc,
I. Sierra Leone, .
n. Gambia District,
III. Cape Coast District, .
Tabular View,
Visit of Mr. Freeman to Ashantee,
American Baptist Missionary Union.
Tabular View, . ,
American Presbyterian Missions
Tabular View,
American Board, .
United Pres. Synod of Scotland,
American Episcopal Mission,
Map of Cape Palmas,
Tabular View,
Methodist Episcopal Mission,
Tabular V'.ew,
Southern Baptist Convention,
Amer. Miss. Asso. Mendi Mission.
Map of Mendi and Sherbro,
Basle Missionary Society, .
General Tabular View,
Ahmednuggur, .
Aintab, .
Ak-IIissar,
Akra,
Akroful, . .
Akropong,
Akyab, . .
Albany, . .
Alderville, .
Aleppo, . ,
Allahabad, .
Ambala, . .
Amboyna, j
America, ....
AMERICAN BOARD OF COM. FOR* FOR. MlSS.i
Origin, history, &c., .
Organization, mode of operation, &c
Annual and aggregate receipts,
Financial embarrassments, .
Missions,
Tabular View, ....
AMERICAN BAPTIST MISSIONARY UNION,
Number of Missionaries, missions, and stations
Tabular View,
Receipts, ....
American and Foreign Christian Union,
American Missionary Association,
Amherst, ....
Amoy, .....
Aneiteum, ....
Annamaboe, ....
Antigua, ....
Arabkir, ....
Arcot, .....
ARMENIANS, ....
Armenia, boundaries and extent, .
History, ....
Map of Armenia and part of Asia Minor,
The Armenian Church,
Language and Literature, .
Population, ....
Character, ....
Mission of the American Board,
Map of Constantinople and Vicinity,
Beginning of success, . ,
Opposition, , , .
rAOB
Tl
T2
74
74
74
75
75
78
80
84
85
86
90
90
93
93
95
96
97
93
93
101-102
102
102.
104
104
105
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106.
106
106
106
106
109
110
111
111
112
112
113
114
114
115
117
117
117
118
118
118
118
118
118
118
118
11?
119
121
122
122
124
125
125
125
786
INDEX.
Ordination of Armenian priests
Removal of mission press from Malta to Smyrna
First Monthly Concert in Turldsh Language
Continued success,
Power of the bankers,
Breaking up of mission high school and found
ing of Scutari College .
Overthrow of the bankers' power,
Persecution begun by the patriarch,
The persecutors rebuked, .
Death of tlie Sultan,
Fire at Pera, ....
The truth spreading,
Day of fasting and prayer,
Greek and Armenian patriarchs deposed,
Return of Pahakyan from banishment, .
Increase of inquirers,
Opening of Seminary at Bebek, .
Indications of a thorough reformation, .
Quarrel between the bankers and tradesmen,
Removal of the patriarch Stepan,
Special presence of the Holy Spirit,
Interference of Mr. Southgate, .
Progress of the work in the interior,
New impulse at Nicomedia,
Visit of Drs. Anderson and Hawes,
Appointment of Matteos patriarch,
Persecution rigorously renewed, .
Death of Mrs. Van Lennep,
Map of Aintab and Vicinity,
Burial refused to Protestants,
Kcclesiastical position of the converts, .
The converts anathematized and excommuni
cated, .....
Other violent measures, .
Interference of Sir Stratford Canning, .
Orders of the Sultan in favor of the Protestants
Attempts to break up the Bebek Seminary
Organization of the evangelical Armenian
Church, ....
Ordination of a pastor.
Other churches formed,
Anomalous position of the Protestants,
Second Protestant funeral,
Death of Pastor Khacbaduryan,
Successor ordained.
Two pupils licensed to preach,
Friendship of Lord Cowley,
Ordination of Pastor at Adabazar,
Tabular View of stations, .
Great fire in Constantinople,
Failure of the patriarch's plans for the overthrow
of Protestant, and his removal from office,
Present State of the Mission,
Amount ofr printing done by the Mission,
Arracan, ....
Ascension Island,
ASHANTEE,
Extent of the kingdom.
Domestic Slavery, Polygamy,
Roads, Houses, Arts, Trade, Religion,
ASIA,
Geographical description, .
Races of People,
Religion,
Population,
Tabular View of Missions, .
ASSAM, ....
Mission of the Am. Bap. Union,
Tabular View, .
Athena, ....
Auckland,
Austral Islands,
Australasia,
Australia,
Boundaries and Extent,
Inhabitants, .
Missions,
United Brethren,
Wruleyan Miss. Society,
Tabular View, .
Map, ....
A»a, ....
BAilanry,
Badd^frame, . , ,
BaR.lad, ....
BAPTIST MISS. SOCIETY (English)
Rcrclpts,
Tabular View of Mlsulont, .
Bule Miasionary Society,
125
125
125
126-127
12T
128
130
130
131
131
131
132
132
1:33
1.33
133
1.3;3
134
135
135
187
137
137
1.37
138
188
189
140
140
141
141
142
143
146
146
146
147
147
147
149
149
150
150
150
151
151
152
153
153
153
154
154
154
154
154
155
165
156
156
157
158
158
159
160
160
163
\m
163
163
168
164
164
104
164
164
164
16S
164
169
169
109
169
169
170
171
171
ety.
Bath,
Bassein, .
Bassa Cove,
Batavia, .
Bathurst,
Batticaloa,
Batticotta,
Beaufort,
Beersheba,
Belgaum,
Belire,
Bellary, .
Benares,
Berbico,
Berea,
Berhampore,
Berlin Missionary Society,
Berlin Missionary Union for China,
Bermudas,
Bethany, . . .
Bethabara, . . •
Bethel, ....
Bethelsdorp, . . .
Bethesda, . . .
Bethulia, . . .
Bettigherry,
Beulah, ....
Bexley, ....
Beirut, ....
Bhagalpur, . . .
Bhingar, . . .
BIBLE SOCIETIES, .
Origin,
Bible Societies existing before the American Bible
Society,
Origin of American Bible Society,
Origin of American and Foreign Bible Soc
Origin of American Bible Union,
Results,
Tabular view of receipts and appropriations,
Bombay, ....
BOOK AND TRACT SOCIETIES,
Religious Tract Society of London,
American Tract Society,
Systematic distribution of Tracts,
Colportage,
Foreign Distribution, .
Languages and dialects,
Publications, .
Tract House, .
Receipts and issues of American Tract Society in
29 years, ....
Presbyterian Board of Publication,
Methodist Book Concern,
American Baptist Publication Society,
Congregational Board of Publication,
List of Principal Book and Tract Societies
General increase of Religious Books,
BOOTAN,
Bprneo, ....
l/rahma, ....
Brahmins, . . .
BRAHMINISM, .
Ideas of God, . . .
Character of gods.
Character of Priesthood,
Religious Mendicants,
Character of Worship,
Hindoo notions of Sin, .
Ideas of Atonement, ,
Fate, Accountability,
Notions of Futurity, .
Ages of the world.
Cast*, ....
Dr. Allen's Testimony,
Superstitions, .
Cruelties of Brahminism,
Holy Days,
Holy Places, .
Degradation of Females,
Brahminism and Popery Compared,
The Remedy,
British Guiana,
Brusa,
BUDHISM,
Origin of Budbisra,
Doctrines of Budba,
Sacred Books,
Modes of Worship,
The Modern Priesthood,
171
171
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
17S
173
173
173
173
173
173
173
173
173
173
173
174
174
175
175
175
176
176
176
17T
17T
178
179
180
180
181
181
183
183
183
183
183
\9A
184
185
185,481
185
185
186
186
186
186
186
187
18T
18T
18T
183
183
189
189
190
190
191
192
192
193
193
193
194
194
194
194
195
198
197
INDEX.
18'r
PAGK
Bungalow, . . . .
. 19S
Burdwan, .....
. 198
Burisal ......
. 198
BURMAH,
. 198
Topogi-aphy, Population,
. 19S
Social and Political Institutions, Arts, &c..
. 198
Religion, .....
. 198
Map of Burmah, ....
. 198
Mission of the Am. Bap. Union, .
. 199
Burmese War and persecution of missionaries.
. 200
Karens, ..... 2{
1,497
Christian villages formed.
. 203
Visit of Dr. Malcolm,
, 204
Persecution of Christian Karens,
. 205
Dr. Judson's visit to the U. S.,
. 207
Separate organization of the Burman and Kare
n
Missions, . . . ...
. 209
Return of Dr. Judson to Burmah, .
. 210
Deputation from the Board, .
211
Summary View, . . . •
. 213
Bushmen,
.
. 214
Bussorah,
. 215
Cabalist, .
215
Cairo,
215
Calcutta, .
215
Caledon, .
215
Califf,
215
Calpentyn,
215
Caltura, .
215
Calicut, .
216
Calmont, .
216
Cameroons,
216
CANADA,
216
Early Settlement,
216
First Missions,
216
Endowments of Papal Institutions, .
216
Canada ceded to Great Britain,
217
English Missions, ....
217
Condition of the Episcopal Church, .
217
Statistics of different churches.
218
Canton, ......
219
CANNIBALS,
219
Ancient cannibals, ....
219
Horrible practices among the South Sea Islandei
s
and the Kookies in India, .
220
Cape Haytien, .....
220
Cape Coast Town,
221
Canon,
221
Capuchins,
221
Cape Colony,
221
Cape Palmas,
221
Cape Town,
221
Caravan,
221
Caravansary, .
221
Carmelites,
231
Carnival,
221
Carthusian,
221
Carmel, .
222
Caste,
! '. .* 18
8-189
Catholic, .
222
Caunpoor,
222
Cavalla, .
222
Celestins,
222
Cenobite,
222
CEYLON,
222
Geographical and Topographical Description,
222
Population, ......
222
Missions — Portuguese Missions, .
223
Government, Language, Arts, Religion, .
223
London Missionary Society,
224
English Baptist Missionary Society,
224
Artmrican Board, . . . . .
224
Tabular Views, . . . . .
230
Printing, ......
230
Medical Department, . . . .
230
Female Education, . . . .
230
Temperance, . . . . .
230
Native contributions,
231
Present state of heathenism and prospects of
the Mission, . . . . .
231
■Church Missionary Society,
231
Tabular View of stations, ,
232
Wesley an Missionary Society,
233
Conversion of an Ava Priest,
236
Public contest with the priests, .
240
Tabular View, . . . . .
242
General Tabular View, . . . ,
243
Chaldeans, ......
243
Chavagacherry, . . . . .
243
Cherrapoonge, .
.
244
Cherokee, ......
Chettingsville, ......
Chichacole, . . . . . .
CHINA, .
Territorial extent, Political Divisions, Compara-
tive Dimensions, .....
Map, .......
Mountains, Desert of Gobi, Rivers and Lakes,
Boundaries and Civil Divisions of China Proper,
Climate and Soil, Persons of the Chinese, .
Intellectual character. Population, History, Na-
tional works. Great Wall, Grand Canal,
Cities, Peking, .....
Canton, Whampoa, Macao, Hong-Kong,
Amoy, Puhchau, Ningpo, .
Map of Fuhchau, .
Nanking, the Arts, Agriculture,
Productions, Commerce,
Pishing, Literary examinations. Classics,
Chinese Schools, Language,
Ability to read,
Industry and Frugality, Marriage,
Condition of Females, . .
Funerals and Burying Grounds,
Government, ....
Revenue and Disbursements,
Physical, Social, and Moral Condition,
Opium Trade and Opium Smoking,
Female Infanticide, .
Tauists, ....
Confucianism, the ancient popular idolatry,
Missions, Nestorian, .
Papal, ....
London Missionary Society,
Tabular View,
American Board, .
Interesting facts respecting the origin of the
American Mission,
Tabular View,
Southern Baptist Convention,
Church Missionary Society,
Tabular View,
Amer. Seventh Day Baptist Society,
English Gen. Bap. Miss, Soc.
Miss Alder sey''s Female Seminary,
Swedish Mission,
Free Ch. of Scotland,
Amer. Episcopal Board,
Preshyteriayi Board,
Tabular View, . ,
Amer. Baptist Missionary Union,
Methodist Episcopal Missions,
Wesleyan Missionary Society,
Rhenish Missionary Society.
Canton Baptist Miss. Society,
Basle Missionary Society, .
General Tabular View,
Chinese Revolution,
Concluding Remarks,
Chinese Evangelical Society, .
Chinese Evangelization Society,
Chinese Society (for supporting native Evangelists),
Chintadrepettah, . . .
Chinsurah, . . . .
Chittagong, ....
Chunar, .....
Chundicully, ....
Chumie, .....
CHURCH OP ROME, .
Separation of the Eastern and Western Churches,
The various rites,
Support of the Clergy,
Monastic Orders,
CHURCH OP ROME, MISSIONS OF .
Missionary Societies,
Receipts, ....
Missionary Stations, .
Europe — Turkey — Greece, .
Asia — Turkey in Asia — Persia — India,
Further India, China, Corea, Mongol Tartary,
Manchuria, Thibet,
East India Islands, Japan, .
Africa — Congo — Barbary— Egypt — Abys;
Madagascar — other parts,
Oceanica, ....
America — Spanish Missions,
Portuguese Missions— United States and Canadas!
Church Hill,
CHURCH MISSIONARY SOCIETY, .
Tabular View, Income,
FAes
244
244
244
244
244
244
245
246
246
247
24S
249
250
250
251
252
253
254
255
255
255
255
255
257
257
258
260
260
261
262
263
265
270
271
271
277
277
278
279
279
280
280
280
280
288
290
293
293
293
294
294
295
296
296
296
296
296
296
296
296
296
296
297
297
297
298
299
300
800
800
300
800
801
302
303
803
sot
804
188
INDEX.
Cistercian, ....
PAGI
804
Clarkson, ....
304
Clear Water, ....
805
Cloudy Bay, ....
805
Cloister, .....
805
Cochin, .....
305
Coimbatoor, ....
805
Colombo, ....
805
Colesburg, ....
8115
Combaconum : . . .
305
Constantinople, ....
805
Copts, .....
14, 805
Copay, .....
806
Corlsco, .....
806
Corfu, .....
806
Cottayam, ....
806
Cotta, .....
806
Cradock, .....
306
Cruda, .....
306
Cuddalore, ....
806
Cumberland Pres. Board of Missions, .
306
Cuttack, .....
806
Dacca, .....
806
Damara Country,
806
Darjeeling, . . . . .
306
Darli^ton, . . . . .
806
Davyton, . . . . .
806
Dedgaum, ....
806
Delaware, . . . . .
806
Delhi,
307
Dharwar, ....
807
Diep River, ....
807
Diudigul, .....
307
Dinajpoor, ....
307
Druses, ......
734
Duke Town, . . . . .
807
D'Urban, . . . . .
307
Dwight, ......
807
Dysaldorp, . . . . .
307
EARLY CHRISTIAN MISSIONS,
307
Christianity essentially Missionary,
307
Ctntury II., Century III., .
809
Century IV., Missions to Ireland and Ph
xnicia.
310
Missions to Georgia, Persia, Armenia, Ga
ul, cfec.
811
Century V. St. Patrick's Mission to Irelai
Id, .
312
Nestorian Missions,
313
Conversion of the Picts — Baptism ofClov
3,
813
Century VI., . . . .
313
Progress of Christianity in Wales and Co
rnwall.
314
Pope Gregory's Mission to Britain,
314
Austin's violent proceedings,
315
Coluiuba's Mission to Scotland, .
816
Centuries VIJ. and VIII., .
317
Missions in Saxony and Germany,
317
Century /X— Missions among the Danes, £
wedes.
Sclavoaians, Ac, . . . .
318
Century X.
819
Ceuturi/ XI, . . . .
821
Century XII, . . . .
322
Centurifs XIII. and XIV.,
8Q3
The Waldenses, Albigenses, Wickliffe, .
323
Century XV.
824
Century XVI.— The Reformation,
825
Mission to Lai)land,
326
Dutch Missions to the East,
826-827
Missionary Colonies in North America, .
327
Century XVI II., . . . .
32S
Society for the Propagation of the Gospe
,
828
Danish Missions, . . . .
828-329
Origin of Moravian Missions,
829-380
Missions of Wesley, Whitefleld, Brainart
,&c..
830
Mission of Swartz, . . . .
831
Commencement of Modern Missions,
881
List of Missionary Societies,
831
Estimated progress of Christianity, eac
li cen-
tury, . . . . .
882
East Cape, . . . . .
833
Ebeiiezer, . . . . .
333
Edina,
mi
EGYPT— Boundaries, Population, &c..
883
_ Misniovti — Church Missionary Society, .
383
Eimeo, ......
834
Elim
234
Eliot
384
Eminaus, . . . . .
834
Enon, ......
884
EPISCOPAL BOARD OF MISSIONS, '.
884
Tabular Views of Missions and Keceipts, .
335
Erroiiianga, . . . . .
836
Erwuuj, ..,,,.
885
EUROPE— Area, Population, Languages, Indepen-
dent States, ..... 335
Religious Classification of the People, . . 886
Estimate of the Spiritual Condition of Europe, 88T
(1) Condition of the Clergy, . . . 88T
(2) Estimate of the Sabbath, . . .388
(3) Religious Reading .... 888
(4) Family Worship, .... 883
(5) Discipline, (6) Social Meetings, . . 833
(7) Revivals and Conversions, . . . 888
(8) Religious Education, .... 838
(9) Christian Union, (10) Missionary Labors, 339
Means and men of the European Missionary So-
cieties, tabular view of, . . . . 840
Greek and Roman Catholic Churches, . . 840
Agencies employed to disseminate the Gospel in
Europe, ...... 842
(1) Common Schools, (2) Temperance, (8)
Preaching and distribution of tracts and books, 342
WTiat may be done to evangelize Europe, . . 843
Hindrances, (1) Union of Church and State, . 843
(2) Social penalties attached to change of re-
ligion, ...... 845
(3) Literature, (4) Philosophy, (5) Popery, . 345
Present condition of the Roman Hierarchy, con-
sidered as an aggressive power, . . . 846
Review of the European States, . . . 849
(1) England, Scotland, and Ireland, . . 849
Churches and attendance in £ngland,ScotlaDd,
and Wales, ..... 860
(2) Holland, . . . . .851
(3) Scandinavia, (4) Belgium, (5) France, . 852
(6) Switzerland, ..... 853
(7) Italy, (8) Germany, . . . .854
(9) Russia, . . . . . .865
(10) Spain and Portugal, (11) Greece and Ionian
Isles, ...... 856
(12) Turkey in Europe, . . . .857
Methodist Misnifnis in Europe, . . . 358
Bodies engaged — Countries occupied, . . 358
Slode of operation — Success, . . . 859
Switzerland, Germany, Sweden, . . . 860
Irish Methodist Home Missions, . . . 860
France, Italy, and Corsica, . . . 861
Tabular Views, . . . . 862-S68
Fakir, 864
Fernando Po, . . . . . .864
Free Town, ...... 864
Free Church of Scotland Missions, . . . 864
Free Will Baptist Foreign Missionary Society, . 864
Friendly Islands, ..... 866
Furrackabad, ...... 866
Futtegurb, . . . . . .866
Gaboon, ....... 366
Genadendal, . . . . . .868
General Baptist Missionary Society, . . . 868
Geog Tapa, . . . . . .868
Georgian Islands, ..... 368
Ghazipoor, ...... 868
Glasgow Missionary Society, .... 868
Gorruckpore, ...... 869
Gossner's Missionary Society, . . . . 869
Gowhatti, . . . . . .870
Grahamstown, ...... 870
Graaf-Reinet, 870
GREECE, 871
Geographical Description, .... 811
Greek Church — difference between it and the
Latin, 8n
Missions — American Board, , . . 871
American Episcopal Board, . , . 875
Am. Baptist Misa. Union, . . . 875
Greegree, ...... 878
Grequa Town, ...... 878
Hadgee, ....... 878
Hawaii, ....... 878
Hervey Islands, ...... 878
Hierarchy, ...... 879
Hilo 879
HINDOSTAN, 879
Map of, 879
Boundaries and Surface, Rivers and Lakes, Coast
and Climate, Native Population, . . . 879
Foreign Settlers, Religions, Languages, Literature, 880
Science, Arts, Agriculture, Physical and Intellec-
tual Character, British rule, . . • 881
Missions", ...... 382
American Board, — Bombay, . • • 882
Map of Western India, .... 885
Salara, . . . • • .886
INDEX.
189
Ahraednuggur, Seroor, .... 3S8
Kolapoor, Madura, .... 390
Map of Southern India and Ceylon, . . 391
Madras, . . . . . .394
Arcot, ...... 395
Tabular View, . . . . .396
Church Missionary Socief y—'ila.dra.s, . . 396
Abdool Messech, ..... 396
Syrian Christians, .... 39T, 400
Names of Missionary Districts, . . . 398
Wonderful movement in the Tinnevelly District, 39S
Bombay, ...... 4U1
Map of Bengal, . . . . .401
Calcutta and North India, . . . 401
Benares, ...... 402
Birdwan, Krishnagur, .... 403
Chunar, Mirut, ..... 405
Agra, Jaunpore, Gorruckpore, Bhagulpur, Hi-
malaya, ...... 406
The Punjaub— Tabular View, . . . 40T
Society for the Propagation of the Gospel, . 407
Bishop's College, . . . . .407
Cawnpore, Madras, .... 40S
Tinnevelly, Bombay, .... 409
English Baptist 3fissionar'!/ Society, . . 409
Notices of Stations, . . . 417, 422
Tabular View, ..... 422
Loiidoji Missionary Society, , . . 422
Vizigapatam, ..... 422
Madras, Cuddapah, .... 424
Belgaum, . . . , . .425
Bellary, Bangalore, .... 426
Mysore, Salem, Combaconum, , . . 427
Coimbatoor, S. Travancore, . . . 42S
Calcutta, . . . . . .429
Chinsurah, Berhampore, .... 430
Benares, ...... 431
Mii-zapore, Surat, Mahi-Kantha, Almora, . 432
Tabular View, . . . . .4.33
Free Church of Scotland, .... 433
Madras, Bombay, Poonah, Nagpoor, . . 434
Calcutta, . . . . . .435
Irish Presbyterian Mission, . . . 435
General Baptist Missionary Society, . . 435
Cuttack, Pooree, ..... 435
Balasore, ...... 436
British support of Idolatry, . . . 437
Free Will Baptist Missionary Society, . . 441
Tabular View, . . • . , . 443
American Presbyterian Missions, . . 444
Map of Northern India, .... 444
Organization of a church at Lodiana, . . 445
Tabular View, . . . . .449
Wesleyan Missionary Society, . . . 449
Tabular View, . . . . .453
Welsh Calvinistio Methodist Missionary Society, 454
American Baptist Mission among the Teloogoos, 454
Basle Missionary Society, .... 456
Tabular View, ..... 45S
Berlin and Leipsia Missionary Societies, . 45S
JTorth German Missionary Society, , . 458
Gossner's Jfissionary Society, . . . 459
General Tabular View, .... 459
Letter from Rev. Dr. Scudder, . . . 459
Holapoor, ...... 465
HOME MISSIONS, 465
Early Home Mission efforts, . . . 465
Home Missionary Societies in New England, . 466
Home Missions of the Presbyterian Cliurch, . 467
Average salaries of home missionaries, . . 46S
American Home Missionary Society, . . 46S
Tabular View of receipts, expenditures, labors
and results, ..... 469
Methodist Home Missions, .... 469
Tabular Views, ..... 471
American Baptist Home Missionary Society, . 471
Board Domestic Missions Protestant Episcopal
Church, . . . . . .473
Board of Missions Reformed Dutch Church, . 473
General Tabular View, .... 474
Honolulu, ...... 474
Hottentots, ...... 474
Huahine, ...... 475
Human Sacrifices, ..... 475
Idol, Idolatry, ...... 478
Indians, ....... 582
INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO, . . . .479
Nicobar and Andaman Islands, Sumatra, . . 479
Java, Map, ...... 480
Lesser Sunda Islands, .... 4S1
Brita
Borneo, ...
Celebes, . . ,
The Moluccas, . ,
Philippine Islands, . .
Formosa, . . ,
INFANTICIDE, .
Among the ancients, . .
In the Pacific Isles, . .
In India and China, . .
JEWS, Missions to.
Number of, . . .
In Abyssinia, . . .
Present social state, .
Intellectual position, .
Religious condition, .
Reasons for distinct missions to,
London Jews' Society,
British Society,
Missions of Presbyterians in Great
Scottish Jews' Society,
American Missions to Jews, .
American Society,
General Summary,
Jacobites, . . ,
Jaffa, Jaffna, . . .
Jaipur, ....
Jains, ....
Jalna, ....
Jassore, ....
Jaunpur, . . ,
Jesuits, ....
Jooneer, . , .
Juggernaut,
Jiiju or Jewjew, .
Kaff'-aria,
KAFPRES,
Government, People, Religions and
Kandy, ....
Karens, ....
Kat River,
Kauai, ....
Kharput, ....
Khundita, . . ,
Kingston, . . .
Kiosk, ....
Kissor, ....
Kissey, ....
Kolobeng, . . ,
Kraal, ....
Krishnagur, . . .
Kumasi, ....
Kuruman, . . ,
Kumiss, ....
Kyouk Phyoo,
LABRADOR AND GREENLAND,
Geographical Position, Climate. &c
Map, .
Description of the natives, .
ihssioiis— Danish Mission in Greenland,
Moravian Mission,
Discouragements, .
First Conversion, ,
Tabular View,
Labrador, .
Tabular View,
Lagos, . . . ,
Lahaina, , . . ,
Lahainaluna,
Labor, . ...
LEW CHEW, or Loo Choo,
Cities and Villages, .
The People— Products— Dwellings—
guage — Arts,
Religion — Government— Foreign Pol
Mission of Dr. Battelheim, .
LIBERIA — Government, Education, Extent,
Map of Liberia,
Harbors— Productions— Native Inhabitants
covery.
The Pope's grant not recognized,
Portuguese Missions, .
Character and influence of the slave
Origin and History of the Colony,
Missions in Liberia, .
Lodiana, .
LONDON MISSIONARY SOCIETY,
Origin and History, .
Missionaries and Churches, .
Translations, .
Macao ....
PASS
. 431
. 4<84
. 4S5
. 4S6
. 485
. 486
. 486
. 487
. 487
. 488
. 489
. 10
. 489
. 490
. 490
. 491
. 491
. 492
. 493
. 493
. 493
. 493
. 494
. 494
. 494
. 494
. 494
. 494
. 494
. 495
. 495
. 495
. 495
. 495
. 496
. 496
Moral Condition, 496
. 497
Dress
cy,
trade
201, 497
. 497
. 497
. 497
. 498
. 493
. 498
. 498
. 498
. 498
. 493
. 498
. 498
. 498
. 493
. 498
. 493
. 493
. 498
. 499
. 499
. 499
. 500
. 501
. 505
. 505
. 509
. 509
. 509
. 509
. 509
. 509
. 509
a-
. 610
. 511
. 511
. 512
. 512
s-
. 513
. 514
. 514
. 514
. 515
. 516
. 518
. 618
. 518
. 519
. 519
. 520
190
INDEX.
MADAGASCAR 520
Population, Government, .... 520
KeligioM and Morals, . . . .621
Mission — London Missionary Society, . . 521
Results of fifteen years' labor, . . . 521
Commencement of persecution, . . . 622
BreakinK up of tlie Mission, . . . 525
Martyrdom of Rasalama, and violent persecu-
tion of others, ..... 527
Continued violence and bloodshed, . 528, 521*
Escape of a party of converts, . . . 528
Great awakening, and conversion of the Queen's
son, ...... 529
Brightening Prospects, .... 630
MADKIKA, 530
Geographical Description, Government, &c., . 531
Mission — Scotch Free Church, . . . 531
Commencement of a work of grace, under the
labors of Dr. Kalley, . . . .531
Beginning of Persecution — Imprisonment of Dr.
Kalk-y, 532
Departure of Dr. Kalley — his return with Mr.
Hewitson, . . . . . .5-33
Violent proceedings against the converts, . . 5.33
Mr. Hewitson leaves the Island, . . . 534
Peril and escape of Dr. Kalley, . . . 534
Escape of Converts to Trinidad, . . . 535
Ordination of Mr. Da Silva, .... 535
Madras, ....... 535
Madura, ....... 535
Malta, .536
Martaban, Marsovan, . . , . , 5-36
Maronites, ...... 536
MARQUESAS ISLANDS 5-36
Mission to, . . . . . . 665
Maui, . . . . . . .537
MAURITIUS, or Isle of France, . . .537
Mission of the London Missionary Society, , 537
Methodist Episcopal Church, Missions of . . 544
Mexico, ....... 539
MICRONESIA— Situation, Extent, Population, Pro-
ductions, ...... 539
Mission of the American Board, . . . 539
MINISTERIAL EDUCATION, . . .540
Tabular View of the number of ministers from New
England colleges, arranged in periods of 10
years, from 1541) to IS.'iO . . . .541
Decrease of candidates for the ministry, . 542-543
View of the religious state of the country as to the
comparative number of churches and ministers, 543
Education Societies, ..... 543
Mirut, ....... 544
Mirzapore, ...... 544
MISSIONARY SOCIETY METHODIST EPISCOPAL
CHURCH, . . . . . .644
Tabular Views, ..... 646
MOHAMMEDANS— In Abyssinia, ... 9
In Turkey, . . . . . .752
In the world, ...... 780
Molokai, . . . . . . .547
Mollah, . . . . . . .547
Mombas, ...... 647
Monrovia, ...... 547
Montserrat, ...... 547
Monophysites, ...... 547
MOSUL— History of Mission, . . . .543
Letter from Rev. Mr. Marsh, . . . 649
Mufti, ....... ri!>\
Mutlra, ....... 651
Mynpuric, ...... 551
Mysore, ....... 651
Nagpore, . . . . . .651
Nanking, ....... 551
Nassau, ....... 651
Nassuck, ....... 551
Natal .551
Natal Harbor, D'Urban, Petermaritzburg, Scenery,
Climate, ...... 5^2
Negnpatam, Negroes, ..... ,V)3
Nellorc, . . . .Wi
NEST0IUAN3, .....'. 6.'>:!
Map of the country of the Nestorians, . 55.3
NestoriuB and his followers, .... 5.V3
MUiionary character of the Nestorians, . 654-655
Their doctrines and character at the commcnce-
mi-nl of niisHionnry operations among them, . 65.')
Miixion n/l/ig Americiia BoiirU, . . . ^^0
Tabular View of missionaries, . . . 5,%7
Objrct aimed at- -co6|ierallon of ecclesiastics, 657
British una Russiun protection, . . . 667
TAOI
The Press, Translating, Schools, . . .653
Preaching, Native Helpers, . . . 659
Opposition, ...... 660
Revivals, ...... 661
Efforts for the Mountain Nestorians, . . 662
Tabular View, ..... 564
Letter from Rev. Dr. Perkins, . . . 604
Netherlands Missionary Society, . . . 665
New Hebrides, ...... 563
New Brunswick, ..... 568
NEW ZEALAND, . . . . .569
Map of New Zealand and Tasmania, . . 669
Climate, soil and productions, inhabitants, . 669
Tattooing, ...... 569
Religion, ...... 570
Missions — Church Missionary Society, . . 570
Discouragements, ..... 570
Success, ...... 671
Native prayer meetings, general improvement, . 572
Power of the Gospel to tame savage tribes, . 673
Rapid growth of Christianity, . . . 574
Tabular View, ..... 575
Society for Propagating the Gospel, . . 676
Wesleyan Missionary Society, . . . 576
Tabular View, ..... 581
General Tabular View, .... 681
Nicomedia, ...... 583
Ningpo, . . . . . . .582
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS, . . .692
Missions — Presbyterian Board, . . . 682
Map of Indian Territory, .... 6S2
Tabular View, ..... 585
Am. Bap. Miss. Union, .... 585
Statistics for 1854, ..... 591
Miss. Soc, Meth. Epis. Church, . . . 591
Mission begun by a colored man, . . . 591
Remarkable Success, .... 692
Missions among the Creeks, Snakes, Yellow-
heads, Cherokees, .... 694
Among the Choctaws, Putawatomies, Oneidas,
Shawnees, Kansas, Iroquois and Kikapoos, , 695
Tabular View, . . . . .597
Wesleyan Missionary Society, . . . 593
Tabular View, . . . . .601
American Board, ..... 601
General history of early Indian missions, . 601
Mission to the Cherokees, .... 604
Invention of Cherokee Alphabet, . . . 605
Trouble with the authorities of Georgia, . . 607
Arrest, trial, and imprisonment of Messrs. Wor-
cester and Butler, .... 608
Removal of the Indians, .... 609
Choctaws, ...... 611
Tabular View, . . . . .614
Slavery and action of the Board thereon, 613, 614
Osages, ...... 615
Chickasaw, ...... 616
Creeks, Oltawas, . . . . .617
Ojibwas, . . . . . .618
Dakotas, . . . . . .620
Tabular Views, . . . . .621
Abenaquis, Pawnees, .... 622
Oregon Indians, ..... 623
Indians in New York, .... 624
Moravian Mi>:sions, .... 624
Church Missionary Society, . . . 625
Kjiiscopal Board, ..... 625
American Missionary Association, . . 6'J5
Tabular View, ..... 626
General Tabular View, .... 626
Letter from Rev. C. Byington, . . . 783
NOVA SCOTIA— Boundaries and extent, . . 626
Church of England in N.S., . . . . 627
Presbyterian Church, .... 627
Church of Scotland, . . . . .623
Free Church of N. S 629
Reformed Pres. Church, .... 629
Baptist Churches . . . . .629
Wesleyan Methodists, .... 629
Evangelical Lutherans, .... 929
Oahu 680
Oceanica, ...... 6S0
Ojibwas, ....... 630
Ol.l Calabar, . . . . . .630
Oodi»)Tille, . . • . . .631
Oorfa, 631
ORIENTAL CHRISTIANS MISSIONS TO . • 631
Bishop Gobat and Church Missionary Society, . 631
Mode of conilucting missions to decayed churclics
in the East 683
INDEX.
in
Bishop Southgate, ....
Nazai-eth, Jerusalem, Nablous, Syra, Smyrna,
Malta Prot. College, .
ORISSA, ....
Population — Santals and Bbmnijas,
Oroomiah,
Pagan, ....
Pagoda, .....
Parseeism,
The Zand-Avasta — Idolatry of the Parsees,
Paris Protestant Missionary Society, .
Pasha,
Patna,
Patriarch,
Paumotu, . .
Pedang, . .
Peking, .
Pilgrimage, . .
Polynesia,
Pontianak,
Poonah, . . .
Port Elizabeth, .
Port Lokkoh,
Port Louis,
PKESBYTERIAN BOARD OP MISSIONS, .
Mode of Organization, . . . .
Mode of transacting business,
Tabular View of its Missions, . .
Mission House, . . . . .
Yearly Receipts, . . . . .
Presbyterian Church of Nova Scotia Board of Mis-
sions, .......
Primitive Methodist Foreign Missionary Society,
Puna, .......
Rajah, .......
Rangoon, ......
Rarotonga, ......
Regent's Ton-n, ......
Rhenish Missionary Society, ....
Safet,
Saharanpur, ......
Samarang, ......
SANDWICH ISLANDS— Geographical Description
and Map, ......
Population — Social, moral and religious condition.
Mission — American Board,
Preparation at the Islands, Arrival and recep-
tion of the missionaries.
Obstacles, ......
Reinforcements, Position and influence of chiefs,
four years' missionary labor,
Regency of Kaahumanu, ....
Kapiolani — Visit of Lord Byron,
Opposition from foreigners, Whalesh-p, Dolphin, ,
U. S. Sloop Peacock, Vindication of missionaries —
further outrages, .....
Letter from the President of the United States,
Papal Missionaries, .....
Results of first ten years' missionary labor,
Death of Kaahumanu, reaction, progress, schools.
The Press — Churches — Great Revival — Benevo-
lence, ......
, Civilization — Government — Laws — Seizure of the
Islands by Lord Paulet — Independence acknow-
ledged, ....
Decrease of population,
The Mission dissolved.
Summary and Statistics, . .
Teachers sent to the Marquesas Islands,
American Missionary Association, .
Letter from Rev. Titus Coan,
Satara, .....
SEAMEN — Numbers, Origin and progress of missions
to, .
Results,
Serampore, Seir,
Seroor, ....
Settra Kroo, . .
Seragunga,
Seychelles,
Shanghai,
Sheikh, ....
SIAM — Government, Religion,
BIissio.\s — Presbyterian Board,
American Baptist Mission,
American Board and Am,erican Missionary
Association,
Sierra Leone,
Singapore, . .
Smyrna, .
PAGK
632
633
633
634
635
63.i
636
636
636
6SS
638
638
633
638
638
638
638
639
639
639
639
639
639
639
641
643
643
643
644
644
646
646
646
646
647
64T
64T
648
648
648
648
649
649
650
651
652
654
655
656
657
658
658
660
661
SOCIETY FOR PROPAGATING THE GOSPEL IN
FOREIGN PARTS,
Average and total receipts in 81 years,
Society Islands, ....
Southern Baptist Convention, .
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS— Geographical Description,
Map of Southern Pacific,
Productions, ....
Inhabitants, Language, General Characteristics,
Tattooing, Dress, .
Mental Capacity, Marriage, Moral Character, The
Arts, ....
Wars, Government, Religion,
Missions — London Missionary Society,
Georgian Islands,
Tabular View, . . .
Society Islands,
Tabular View,
Hervey Islands,
Tabular View,
Samoan or Navigator's Islands,
Tabular View, ....
Austral Islands,
Tabular View,
Paumotu or Pearl Islands, .
Marquesas Islands
New Hebrides— Mr. Williams's last voyage and
death, ....
Pres. Ch. of Nova Scotia — Mission to New Hebri-
des, .....
Description of the Island of Aneiteum,
Origin and History of the mission, .
Tabular View of Western Polynesia,
Wesleyan Missio7uiry Society,
Friendly Islands, .
Feejee Islands, . . .
Tabular View, . . ,
Temperance, ....
General Tabular View,
SOUTH AMERICA— BrazU, .
Missions, ....
Sunday Schools, . . .
Surat, .....
Suttee, .....
Sydney, .....
Syrian Christians,
SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND,
Map of part of Syria,
Population — Numbers of different sects,
Druses, ....
Missions of the American Board, .
Wonderful movement at Hasbeiya
Tabular View, .
Tabu, .....
Talapoins, ....
Tamtam, ....
Tamlook, ....
Tananarive, ....
Tangena, ....
Taouists, ..... 260,
TARTARY AND SIBERIA,
Geographical Description, .
Population— Religion,
Missions — United Brethren, Scottish Miss. Soc.
London Missionai-y Society,
TASMANIA, or Van Dieman's Land, .
Map, .....
Mission of the Wesleyan Miss. Soo.
Tabular View,
Tattooing, ..... 669,
Tavoy, .....
Tenasserim. ....
THESSALONICA,
Map of ....
Thugs, .....
Tinnevelly, ....
Toungoo, ....
Travancore, . . ,
Trebizond, . . ,
TURKEY, ....
Boundaries and extent, . ,
Turkey in Europe,
Turkey in Asia. . . .
Turkey in Africa,
Population tables, by countries,
Population tables by races and creeds,
Ecclesiastico-Political Government,
Reforms, ....
Uitenhage,
UNITED STATES— Extent of Territory,
67T
678
678
678
678
678
680
680
681
6S2
69T
69T
701
701
705
705
717
708
708
710
710
711
713
718
714
720
723
724
725
726
727
729
732
732
733
733
733
733
7.34
734
734
739
743
743
743
743
743
744
744
744
744
744
746
746
747
743
569
748
749
749
749
749
750
751
461
750
750
75»-
750>
751
751
751
751
751
751
752
752
752
753.
753-
792
INDEX.
Physical resources, Commerce,
764
Tabular View, ....
PAOB
. 769
Population, Public Works, Geographical poritioD,
755
Morai'iati Minaions, .
. 771
Peculiar character of people,
755
Enylixh Bitpti'it i/M«jVn^— Tabular View,
. 773
Education, Keliglon, .
756
Church MivHionary Society,
, 775
Pauperism anil Crime, Temperance
Reform,
757
Soc.for tkfi Prop, of the Gospel, .
. 775
UNITKD BRETUREN'S MISSIONS,
758
London Missionary Society,
. 775
Tabular View,
759
General Tabular View,
. 775
London Association in aid of,
760
WESLEYAN MISSIONARY SOCIETY,
. 775
Vartabed,
760
Results, Income, ....
. 773
Vedas, ....
.
760
WITCHCRAFT,
. 779
Vizagapatam,
760
WOULD— Population— Religious SecU— Table
of
■Wellington,
761
Missions, .....
. 780
Welsh CaWinistic Methodist Foreig
■n Missionary
YORUBA,
. 781
Society,
761
Map of, .....
. 781
WEST INDIES, ....
761
Geography, Religion,
. 781
Table of population, .
761
Population, .....
. 782
Description of the Islands, .
761
-762
Zoharites, .....
. 782
Maps
760, 't63
764
771
ZULUS— Climate, People,
. 782
Missions— Wesleyan Missionary Sc
ciety.
762
Dwellings, language, moral character,
. 788
INDEX TO THE MAPS.
Africa South of the Equator, .
10
Africa, Southern,
. 22
Africa, West,
58
Cape Palmas, .
97
Sherbro and Mendi, .
. 104
Armenia and Part of Asia Minor,
119
Vicinity of Constantinople, .
125
Aintab and Vicinity, .
140
Australia,
164
Burmah, Siam, Ac,
198
China, Part of, .
244
Fuhchau,
250
India, Missionary Map of, .
S78
Western India, . ,
885
Southern India and Ceylon,
891
Bengal, . . ,
401
Northern India,
. 444
Indian Archipelago and Western Pacific Isles, . 480
Labrador and Greenland,
. 493
Liberia, .....
. 518
Nestorians, Country of.
. 652
New Zealand, ....
. 669
North American Indians, Territory of.
. 683
Sandwich Islands, . . • .
. 648
South Sea Islands,
. 678
Syria, Part of, .
. 738
Tasmania, ....
. 569
West India Islands— Jamaica,
. 760
St. Kitts, Antigua, and Mosquito Coast,
. 763
Tobago and Barbadoes,
. 764
St. Thomas, St. Jan, St. Croix, Surinam,
. 771
Yoruba, .....
. 781
west's analysis of the holy bible.
NOTICES OF west's ANALYSIS OF THE HOLY BIBLE.
jAe Rev. Alex. T. McGill, D.D. :
" This book is just a broad margin for us, profoundly elaborated, and for the most part
judiciously lilleii ; the best of the kind perliajis ever published iu any language. Its great
convenience will make it welcome. But the best benefit it brings is the comprehensive
manner in which it indicates the meaning of God's Word at once, by the topic under which
the text is arranged, and the collation with which it is illuminated by the parallel passage*
fully written out for the reader."
The Eev. Wm. M. Paxton :
"He preseTits the Bible as a complete armory, with each weapon of warfare so con-
veniently classilied, and so distiii'ztly labeled, that any one can arm himself at will for any
conflict."
The Rev. Gardiner Spring, D.D. :
" I have no doubt that this ' Complete Analysis of the Holy Bible ' is the best thing of the
kind now extant, or likely to be produced."
"Tliis work needs no commendation. Tlie most cursory glance at its general struc-
ture, will show ministers especially, that they cannot afford to dispense with it. It is
nothing less than the entire Word of God, classified into books, sections, chapters, and
so arranged, that under each topic may be found all that the Scriptures .'^ay on the sub-
ject. The entire passages are given, so that they need not be looked out, as where a con-
cordance is used. Such a book will therefore save time, and enricli more thoroughly with
the treasures of the Bible the preacher's discourses. Sabbath School Teachers wiU also
find it an invaluable aid, as indeed, will all who wish to have the Word of God interpret
itself for their instruction and edification." — Presbyterian.
"It wiU be invaluable to the Clergyman or Sabbath School Teacher, and full of interest
and instruction to all who desire to master the contents of this blessed volume. The
Indexes are e-xceedingly full and accurate, and gi'eatly enhance the value of the book." —
N. Y. Evangelist.
"This very valuable volume is a work of immense labor and love. It is only necessary
to look over the indexes of this large and important volume, and to become possessed of
the plan and its execution on any one subject, to bo convinced that the whole work is of
great merit and value. — iV. Y. Inde/petident."
"This is one of the most important works which has ever appeared in illustr.atiou of the
Holy .Scriptures. Tlie compiler deserves, and will doubtless receive the thanks of the
whole of Christendom for his important work, as its arrangement is applicable to the Bible
in any language and any version." — Literary World.
"The whole of the Bible is cla.ssified and divided under appropriate headings, so that
this work is not only an analyses but a concordance and reference Bible of the fullest order.
We feel that we cannot commend it *oo warmly. It is the best of pulpit assistants, and a
book for every family that delights to search the Scriptures." — Christian Intelligencer.
"It i.s the Bible itself — the entire Bible, arranged according to subjects. The arrange-
ment is simple, and one great advantage is, that the passages cited are printed entire, ob-
viating the necessity of turning to the Bible. It fills an important space which was not
occupied before by any work sufficiently accurate and comprehensive." — N. Y. Observer.
"The successful extension of the plan on which this work is constructed, could have
only proceeded from Herculean labor and painstaking. It will aid the religious reader as
well as the professional student." — N. Y. Tribune.
"The work seems to us to be next to the Bible itself — the most valuable of all books to
alergymen, and almost equally indispensable to jurists and all others who ever have occa-
sion to fortify an argument by Scriptural authorit}'. Dr. West has produced a work whict
will form an essential part of every library." — N. Y. Commercial.
SCHAFF'S CHURCH HISTORY.
SCHAFF'S CHURCH HISTORY.
HBTOKT OF THE APOSTOLIC CHCRCH, WITH A GENERAL IXTRODCCTIOX TO
CUUItCU HISTORT.
BY THE REV. miLIP SCIIAFF, D.D.
TRANSLATED BT THE REV. EDWARD D. VEOMAXS.
1 Tol., 8vo., 700 pages. Price, $3 00
"Without pledging ourselves for the Professor's Theology, as it may be developed in his
future volumes, we are free to recommend the present as a valuable contribution to church
history, which no clergyman can wisely exclude from his library." — Philad. Preslytei-ian.
"Aluminous and truly philo.sopliical church history. The author shows himself a
thorough master of his subject, capable alike in dealing in minute details, without being
tedious, and of illustrating great principles without being unduly abstract. He never
leaves us for a moment in doubt in re.spect to his meaning, but throws every statement into
broad sunlight. It is certainly a remarkable work, and must be the product of a remark-
able mind." — Puritan Jiecorder
"We regard it as a most valuable contribution to our ecclesiastical literature. It is evi-
dently the result of much careful studv, and the fruit of extensive learning ; and indicates
a mind peculiarly fitted for historical laljuurs."— .V. 1'. Observer
Notices of the German Edition.
"Tliis book is eminently scholarlike and learned, full of matter, not of crude materials,
crammed together for the nonce by labour-saving tricks, but of various and well digested
knowledge, the result of .systematic trahiing and long continued study. Besides evidence
of solid learning which the book contains, it bears impress of an original and vigorous min 1,
not only in the clear and lively mode of representation, but also in the large and elevated
views presented, the superiority to mere empirical minuteness, and tlie constant evidence
afforded that the author's eye commands, and is accustomed to command, the whole field
at a glance as well as to survey more closely its minuter subdivisions. In point of style,
and indeed of literary execution generally, there is no Church History in German known to
UH, excepting that of Hase, that deserves to be compared with that before us. The reli-
gious tone and spirit of the work arc such as to leave no room for doubt on the reader's
mind respecting the sincere beUef and piety of the author. Its practical tendency is uni-
formly good." — Biblical Hepertory arid J'rinceton Jteciew
"The work bears upon it the marks of true leaj-ning, and independent, vigorous thought,
from the first page to the last. It is a model of historical order and clearness." — Bibliotheca
Sacra and Am. Bible Iieposiiory,fur Oct. 1S52, and for Jany., lSo3.
"We have now before us a volume of a truly .scientific work produced on our own soil,
but by a German scholar. It has this great advantage over the richest works of the kind
in Europe, that tlie author comliines the pains-taking accuracv and scientific insight of the
German, with the practical religious life of the American laiaA."— Methodist Quar. Bev.
" We predict for this work great success, not only in this country, which may in some
degree claim it, but in Europe, not excluding the Fatherland of its author. Dr. Schalf pre-
Beut« to us discussions on the numerous and momentous subjects, of which the outlines
have been given, marked with great ability, sound judgmeut, elevated piety, extensive re-
Bcarch, and genuine Catholicism. We think that our comraon Christianity, in the various
evangelical tonus in which it is found, will bring no charge of here.sy, utler no complaint,
and manifest no disappointment. It strikes us that it would bo exceedingly difficult to
write a book of this kind, we moan an honest book, as wo are satUfied this is, that would
•mbruce bo much that all Christians reganl as true, and at the same time so little from
which lhcr3 miglit be dissent. From the first page to the la.st wo admire the soundness,
we may say orthodoxy of the writer. Tlie literary execution of this work is admirable." —
Evangelical Beriew.
"This book is one of the best compendiums extant, of church hi.story. It is thoroughly
Cliristian, its arrangement clear, its style lively and attractive, and it contains notices
of the most recent German and other opinions on every question as it rises." — Edii^urgk
Btview. for January, 1853.
"Tliit is the first learned theological work, in German, composed in the United States,
and undoubtedly the best published on that subject in that country. I hail the work in
both re-pects ns the h;irbinger of a great and glorious future. It is worthy of a G<'rman
»chohir, of a di.«ciple of Neamler, (to whom the work is dedicated,) u citizen of the United
atalen, and of a believing and free Christian and I'roteslant : it stands on German ground
but it is none tho less original for that."— i>/- Bunsen's Ilyppol^lut
BOOKS PUBLISHED BY CHAS. SCRIBNEK.
THE PSALMS.
TRANSLATED AND EXPLAINED
BY REV. J. A. ALEXANDER, D.D.
PROFESSOR IN THE THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY AT PRINCETON.
3 vols., I2mo. Price, $3 75 ; in half calf, $5 25.
" We welcome this as a valuable contribution to the religious Irterature of the day. Tt
is a work of great study and research, the results of which are brought together in a form
to adapt them not only to the theologian, but also to the more general reader." — Daily
State Register.
''The work before us is well adapted to meet the wants of the times. Those who love
to read the Psalms in private (and what pious heart does not ?) as well as pubfic expound-
ers of the word, wiU find, in the suggestive nature of these explanations, abundant theme
for explanation and remark." — N. T. Ecangelist.
" The work is designed to assist students in ascertaining the sense of the inspired text,
with as little waste of words as possible ; but without any minute history of the interpre-
tation and arr.ay of different opinions, and without any design to limit the doctrinal and
practical uses to which the text may be applied. In short it contains just so much as it
should contain, and nothing more." — Christian Intelligencer.
" There is no parade of learning, but the results of the profoundest learning are given in
such language that a plain man may understand and appreciate, better than ever before,
t tie strains of the "sweet singer in Israel." — N. T. Recorder.
"We would commend it to the public as a rich and valuable exposition of this intere.st-
Lng portion of the sacred volume. With the aid it offers, many will read the Psalms with
fresh delight, as it will enable them to understand, as they never have before, the pecu-
liar force and beauty of those hallowed songs of S^on." — Christian Observe)'.
" Tliis work is honorable alike to the profound scholarship of its author, and to the bib-
lical literature of our country. It is less scholastic than some of the author's preceding
works, and therefore better adapted to the common mind. There are few persons who
know so much concerning this portion of the scriptures, even those who have been most
devoted to this kind of study, but wiU feel that the author of this work has opened to
them many "green pastures " of which they had no knowledge before." — Albany Argus.
"This work by one of the ripest biblical scholars and soundest Theologians in this
country, promises to supjly a want which has long been felt by ministers." — Chnstian
Secrdary.
" To the student of Scripture, and especially to the clergy, it will prove a valuable aid,
It will, of course, be best understood and appreciated by those conversant with the origi-
nal ; and yet the careful and intelhgent, although unlearned reader, will find much in it
which he can understand, and which will assist his comprehens'on of this delightful por-
tion of God's word.
No one who wishes fully to enter into the meaning of this delightful portion of sacred
Scripture, can afford to be without these volumes, which are quite intelligibl? to the care-
ful reader, although ignorant of the original. To the student of theology its value if
peatly enhanced." — Pa. Presbyterian.
LIFE OF ARCIUnALn ALEXANDFR, D.D.
NEW EDITION.— FOURTH THOUSAND.
LIFE OF ARCHIBALD ALEXANDER, D.D.
BY REV. JAMES W. ALEXANDER, D.D.
One vol., 8vo., $2 50, cloth ; extra gilt, and balf calf, $3 50 ; morocco $5.
" It will be cherished and be ranked as one of the most finished and most complete
biographies. Dr. Alexander was one of the greatest and best men that this country has
ever afforded, in Church or State." — Baptist Chicinnati Journal and Messenger.
" As a memorial of a beloved and venerated teacher, and of an able, learned, and
faithful minister of tlie gospel, it will be welcomed by thousands, and read with interest."
— Christian Observer.
" This judicious and well-written biography has a two-fold interest in the historical and
religious life of its subject." — N. Y. (^Episcopal) Churchman.
" His intellect was one of great grasp, and yet extreme nicety of perception ; his elo-
quence not often equalled, and his vital piety such as few on earth attain to. Few men
have made so deep and noble a mark upon the Christian Church of our country as Dr.
Archibald Alexander." — Courier <& Enquirer.
" It is replet* with surpassing interest to all." — Presbyterian Banner.
" The model biography." — N. Y. Observer.
" We find the style of the work as admirable as its theme is interesting. When we say
this memoir of his life, prepared in part from his own manuscripts, is in the highest
degree instructive and engaging, we but faintly express our estimate of its value." —
N. Y. Commercial.
" It admirably illustrates the character of Dr. Alexander, and presents him as he was
known to his friends, simjile and patriarchal in habits, clear and strong in his intellect,
laborious in duty, paternal as an instructor of youth, and thoroughly sincere and free
from all aiTectation in his piety." — Presbyterian.
"This work has manifold claims upon the attention of the Christian public. With a
simplicity well nigh rivalling childhood itself, he united vigor and grace of intellect, an
extent of learning, and a power of eloquence, a depth of Christian feeling, and a general
elevation and purity of character, which have rendered him pre-eminently a man of
mark, not only in his own denomination, but throughout the whole Church." — Albany
Argus.
" A more valuable contribution to Christian biography has not been made. In any part
of the world, during this century. It is chiefly auto-biogruphical, and possesses all the
peculiar traits of the character of the author; and the editor has arranged the material*
with con!<umniate tact and good taste, supplying all deficiencies, and making an admira-
ble work." — Baltimore American.
" It traces Dr. Alexander's whole course from the cradle to the grave, showing the
various Influences that operated to the development of his faculties and the formation of
bU character on the one hand, and the mighty power which he exerted for the benefit of
the Church and the world on the other. The book contains an exact and breathing por>
trait of tlic mind, the heart, and we may add, the face, of one of the most gifted, most
honored, and most useful of our American clergymen." — Puritan Recorder.
BOOKS PUBLISHED BY CHAS. SCRIBNER.
SIXTH THOUSAND NOW READY.
WEST'S ANALYSIS OF THE HOLY BIBLE.
BY nsr. NATHANIEL WEST, D.D.
A. Complete Analysis of the Holy Bible, containing the whole of the New
and Old Testaments, collected and arranged systematically in thirty
books (based on the work of the learned Talbot), together with an In-
troduction, setting forth the character of the work, and the immense
facility this method affords for understanding the Word of God. Also,
three different Tables of Contents prefixed, and a General Index sub-
joined, so elaborated and arranged in alphabetical order, as to direct at
once to any subject required. 1 vol., royal 8vo., about 1000 pages.
Price, $5 GO ; in half calf, $6 50 j in morocco, extra, $0 00.
A single glance at the Table of Contents and Indes exhibits at once the great value and
availabLLity of the work. In the arrangement, besides the Alphabetical Index, there are
thirty Books — two hundred and eighty-five chapters, and altogether four thousand one
hundred and forty-four sections, and the whole so complete as to render every portion of
the work — and thus of the whole Bible — at the perfect command of the inquker. No other
work but a complete analysis of the Bible can do this, as it respects every subject taught
in the Book of God, and hitherto no such analysis has appeared in this country.
Circulars containing testimonials from the following clergymen, can be had on applica
lion :
Rev. Gardiner Spring, D.D., Rev. John M. Krebs, D.D., Rev. R. W. Dickinson, D.D., Rev.
Joseph McEh-oy, D.D., Rev. N. Murray, D.D., Rev. James M. Macdonald, Rev. James W.
Alexander, D.D., Rev. "W. W. Philips, D.D., Rev. David Elliot, D.D., Rev. M. W. Jacobus,
D.D., Rev. H. A. Boardman, D.D., Rev. J. N. McLeod, D.D., Rev. John Knox, D.D., Rev.
C. C. Van Arsdale, D.D., Rev. George W. Bethune, D.D., Rev. Thomas De Witt, D.D., Rev.
N. J. Marselus, D.D., Rev. A. T. McGill, D.D., Rev. E. P. Swift, D.D., Rev. Wm. Paxton,
Rev. 0. H. Miller, Rev. Wm. M. Engles, D.D., Rev. Joseph H. Jones, D.D., Rev. Wm. Neil,
D.D., Rev. G. W. Musgrave, D.D., Rev. David McKiuney, D.D., Rev. Lewis Cheeseman,
D.D., Rev. Wm. D. Schenck, Rev. Francis D. Ladd, Rev. Daniel Gaston, Rev. John Ley
burn, D.D., Rev. C. C. Jones, D.D., Rev. Daniel McKinley, D.D., Rev. C. Van Rensselaer,D.D
From the commendatory notices given by the above clergymen, the following exbacta
have been selected
The Rev. David EUiot, D.D. L.L.D., of Western Theological Seminar3'^, in an extended
notice, says :
"I feel great freedom in recommending it to the patronage of the Christian public as a
work of no common merit. Its comprehensive plan, embracing the whole Bible ; its admi
rable arrangement reducing it to its elementary principles ; its e.vact and scieutiBc adjust
ment of topics, assigning to eacli its proposition ; its lucid exhibition of God's unadulter-
ated truth, connecting its related parts in one distioct point of vision, combine to render the
work of one incalculaljle value to the careful student of the Word of God. With this volume in
his hand, the unlettered Christian, as well as the instructed Theologian, can learn at once,
and in a very brief space of time, what the Word of God says in reference to any subject
•£ either Faith or Practice."
Ihe Rev. M. W. Jacobus, D.D., Western Theological Seminary :
"It is a plain, a sincere, and most intelligent effort to reduce the entire teachings of the
Holy Scriptures in a methodical form, with no party or theory to promote by the under-
taking. It is that kind of help to Bible study which the merchant adopts in the Ledger."
it posts up all the things of all the Inspired Books, and all who deal in Scripture truth will
find this volume an auxUiary to their daily studies. It 'gathers the fragments that noth-
ing be lost.' "
CONYBEARE AND HOWSON S ST. PA*..
" Of the work itself we can heartily re-echo all that has been said in praise of Its scho«
larship, ingenuity, interest and value to the Bible student. It presents, in the form of %
new translation, all the Scripture records respecting Paul's life, and all his epistles, 'a
chronological order. The narrative of his life is written with great fulness of detail, and
elegance of style; heartily appreciating the excellencies of his character, and doing
ample justice to his theological teachings. All the placc^i, incidents and antiquarian
allusions necessary to a full understanding of the Apostle's circumstances, are graphically
depicted, with a scholarly fulness of detail, and a poet's exuberance of imagination. The
•cenes of the past rise up before the reader, until he perceives and understands the cir-
cumstances under which he wrote and acted. The exegetical portion of the work is very
able and acute; whether the reader will be able to agree with the conclusion or not, ha
will be delighted with the erudition, acuteness, and truly candid spirit of the commen
tary. It will be found invaluable to the student, and from Its popular character, equally
rich and entertaining to the general Bible-reader." — 2few York Evangelist.
"This is a work of extraordinary merit, and a most valuable contribution to Biblical
literature. It combines ripe scholarship with extensive historical and geographical
research, abounding in rich and varied illustration, drawn from every source which could
be presumed to throw light upon the Scriptural narrative. * * * It should be in the
library of every minister and intelligent layman." — Philacttlphia Predbyterian.
" The republication of this work — by far the most important on the subject of which it
treats which has yet appeared in the Knglish language — will be welcomed by every intel-
ligent student of the New Testament, no less than by the professed theologian. Although
a production of varied and acute learning, it still possesses a popular character, and to
many readers is adapted to present a more vivid and comprehensive view of the life of
the Apostle, than any work now extant, ♦ * • The fund of historical and geographi-
cal knowledge which is brought to bear upon the illustrations of the subject would form
a large library itstlf." — Kew York Tribune.
"These are noble volumes; the precious fruit of ripe scholarship, and patient, assidu
ous labor. * ♦ * In fine, we have no hesitation In pronouncing this to be one of the
most complete, interesting, and valu.ible contributions to biblical learning that the English
press has ever furnished." — Boston Evening Traveller.
"Notwithstandin^f it is a learned work, the part not intelligible to a common reader, '
included chicOy in the notes, and need be no terror to one who knows no other language
than English. The work may be read most profitably by the most illiterate as well as the
learned. • • ♦ It Is our sober conviction that as a guide to the true knowledge of
Paul's life and writings, it is worth any half doien commentaries we have met with." —
From Rev. Dr. Sprague, Albany.
"This is the ablest and most valuable of the many contribntlons to our religious litera-
ture, which for some time we have had the pleasure of noticing. As a monument of pro-
found learning and patient industry, It cannot be too highly praised — as a help towards
the New Testament, Its value Is above computation."— C/trwiian/nf^WiVenctr.
" It Is a monument of patient research and various learning, containing almost ever>
thing that can be gathered from history, geography, archaiology, theology, and th«
natural sciences, to lllaslrate the personal character and career, and the writings oi
Paul. • • ♦ It Is written in a popular style, and Is no less attractive and valuable U
lh« lay reader than to the professed theologian."— A't'W York Commercial.
BOOKS PUBLISHED BY CHAS. SCRIBNER.
Cnntjhtnre nn^ HjninsDu's It. f niil.
AMERICAN EDITION, UNABRIDGED.
THE LIFE AND EPISTLES OF ST. PAUL.
BY REV. W. J. CONYBEARE AND REV. J. S. HOWSON,
2 vols., 8vo., With Colored Maps and many Elegant Illustrations
Price $6 00.
The publisher, in presenting the "Life and Epistles of St. Paul," by the Rev. W. J.
Conybeare and the Rev. J. S. Howson, needs no apology. During the short interval Bince
its publication in England, it has commanded the admiration of scholars and intelligent
readers of the Bible, both in this country and Europe, and has passed through the ordeal
of criticism in the leading Quarterlies and journals of both countries, and received the
highest commendation. The expense of the English edition, however, is such as necessa-
rily to limit its circulation in this country, and the desire has been repeatedly expressed
that the work should be published in a form and at a price which would bring it within
the reach of ministers, students, and intelligent readers generally. The present edition,
it is believed, will meet the existing want. Though offered at one-half of the cost of the
London copy, the work has in no way suffered from abridgment, but has been presetted
complete in every respect. The notes, coins, maps, plans, and wood engravings gene-
rally have been retained, and yet the size of the work has been reduced from the unwieldy
quarto to a convenient octavo form.
The steel engravings, which appear in the English edition simply as embellishments,
which are familiar to most readers, and which are in no way essential to the text or to
the value of the work, have been omitted — .<!ince the expense of reproducing them here
would be such as greatly to increase the cost of the work, and yet add nothing to its
usefulness.
The North British Review of February, 1854, after a highly commendatory criticism
of this work, makes the following remarks: "We commend the book to that numerous
class, increasing every day, whose early culture Has necessarily been defective, bat whose
intelligence and thirst for knowledge is continually sharpened by the general diffusion of
thought and education. Such persons, if they are already Christians by conviction, are
naturally more and more dissatisfied with the popular commentaries on the Bible ; and if
they are skeptical and irreligious, this great evil is probably caused by the undeniable
existence of difficulties which such commentaries shrink from fairly meeting. They will
find in the work before us a valuable help towards understanding the New Testament.
The Greek and Latin quotations are almost entirely confined to the notes ; any unlearned
reader may study the text with ease and profit. And it is from a sense of the great value
of the book in this respect, that we would earnestly entreat the publishers to supply it In a
cheaper and more convenient form. In these days a quarto book except for reference,
is a mon3ter,/«rflB naturae.""
" We consider this republication by far the most important contribution which the press
of our country has made for many years, to the cause of sacred learning. * * * Wo
wish Mr. Scribner might sell a copy to every clergyman and half the laymen in <V
land," — The Congregationalist,
Princeton Theological Seminary Libraries
1 1012 01245 6440